MA ^TFR 
 
 NEGATIVE 
 
 NO . 91 -80044 
 
MICROFILMED 1991 
 COLUMBIA L-NIVERSITY LIBR.^^RIES/NEW YORK 
 
 as part of the 
 "Foundations of Western Civilization Preservation Project" 
 
 Funded by the 
 NATION.\L ENDOW^MENT FOR THE HnUMANITIES 
 
 Reproductions may not be made without permission from 
 
 Columbia University Library 
 
COP-^^IGHT STATENENT 
 
 The copyright law of the United States ~ Title 17, United 
 States Code - concerns the making of photocopies or other 
 reproductions of copyrighted material... 
 
 Columbia University Library reserves the right to refuse to 
 accept a copy order if, in its judgement, fulfillment of the order 
 would involve violation of the copyright law. 
 
AUTHOR: 
 
 FISCHER, GUSTAVUS 
 
 TITLE : 
 
 LATIN GRAMMAR... 
 
 PLACE: 
 
 NEW YORK 
 
 DA TE : 
 
 1876 
 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES 
 PRESERVATION DEPARTMENT 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHIC MICROFORM TARGET 
 
 Master Negative # 
 
 Original Material as Filmed - Existing Bibliographic Record 
 
 ;B77.5 
 F523 
 
 Fischer, Gustaviis 
 
 Latin grammar, together with a systematic 
 treatment of Latin composition. New York, 
 Schermerhorn, 1876, 
 
 Z V. 
 
 I 
 
 Contents.--!. Etymology and an introduction 
 to syntax. — Z. The details of syntax. 
 
 Restrictions on Use: 
 
 TECHNICAL MICROFORM DATA 
 
 FILM SIZE:_3_31/>7_/?l_ __ REDUCTION RATIO: 
 
 IMAGE PLACEMENT: lA (hA/ IB IIB 
 
 DATE FILMED :j5lli^J-_i INITIALS__j^L^£_._. 
 
 HLMEDBY: RESEARCH PUBLICATIONS, INC WOODBRIDGE, CT 
 
 ,' / 
 

 IMAGE E 
 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 1^ 
 
 ■ 'I 
 
 111= 
 
 1 3.6 
 
 nil 4.0 
 
 1.4 
 
 2.5 
 
 2.2 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 1.6 
 
 150mm 
 
 A/ 
 
 PHOTOGRAPHIC SCIENCES CORPORATION 
 
 770 BASKET ROAD 
 
 P.O. BOX 338 
 
 WEBSTER, NEW YORK 14580 
 
 (716) 265-1600 
 
'siscrl^ttsarM: 
 
 ■ .>...'^«^ 
 
 
 •»«««* 
 
 V 
 
 mmnmmm^^. ^.c--' 
 
 ■%4 
 
 w^asM 
 
 ¥-yi<^-. Zit^ifhf'-i'l'^^' 
 
 
 
 
 ' ' '• s 
 
 s;jsf^ 
 
 W 
 
 '. ...* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rv^fe-: 
 
 t 
 
 * 
 
 'tSt'j^. 
 
 1 
 
 
 vv.<^i-.* 
 
 ..■*\i 
 
 .k?^' 
 
 ,^^^ 
 
 il^^:-i#'; 
 
 
 ■'\ 
 
 L*V,1 
 
 u. - -». 
 
 _i t a 
 
 ■VAc*-: 
 
 
 ??-.;?■■ 
 
 .vj'?:;^;^^- ■ 
 
 
 
 
 

 LIBRARY 
 
p.—. 
 
 ^RLES KNAPP 
 LIBRARY 
 1937 
 
 A V 
 
 T-\V 
 
 T.NTTv Grammar and Reader on a New Plan. 
 
 THE 
 
 Elements of Latin Guam mar, 
 
 \ 
 
 WITH A 
 
 CONTINrorS reaper AM) VOCAlULAia ADArTEI) TO EACH SECTION OF 
 
 TlIK (iRA^lMAir. 
 
 By GUSTAVUS FISCHER, LL.D. 
 
 This work contains a Latin Grammar, adapted to first beginners. 
 
 The Principles of Latin Grammar are presented in lucid and concise 
 
 language, thorough enough to lay a perfect foundation for the later 
 
 study of details, and easy enough to fit the capacity of average 
 
 students. 
 
 The Reader accompanying the Grammar nuivJ^e_sUidiei ^before jhe 
 
 pupil has received any grammatjcaj^ instruction_\vhatevcr. It consists of a 
 RolKaTriiistory, from the'huilding of Rome to tlie battle of Zania. Every 
 chapter of the Reader refers to a chapter in the (Grammar, which is to be 
 studied at the same time. The author thus solves THE PROBLEM 
 
 I (.f a Reader for Beginners, and an Elementary Grammar, recon- 
 cding the two apparently contradictory assertions that " Cirammar cannot 
 be successfully studied without a previous knowledge o( the language," 
 and " the study of a language requires a previous grammatical knowledge." 
 The two vocabularies appended to the Reader, in connection with 
 those sections of the Grammar which are to be studied with each chapter 
 of the Reader, will enable the student to translate every sentence correctly. 
 The first ox social, o{ the two vocabularies, contains all those words and 
 phrases whose^^^w./Z/Vvi/ forms the student is not yet acquainted with 
 at that place of the Reader where tbjfv f»r.st occur. But it does not sug-^est 
 any of those grammatical forms wm^h'*the student should know^from his 
 previous studies, according to the directions given in each chapter of the 
 Reader. Thus, in every succeeding section the numhcr of phrases, etc., 
 
 ] su'-<rested diminishes, till, towards the end of the Reader, the student must 
 almo-^t cnlirclv relv uijon the second (or general) vocabulary, which contains 
 (all the words of the Reader as they are usually placed in vocabularies. 
 
 I( 
 
 To illustrate the method, we reprint the first chapter : 
 
 ROMAN HISTORY. 
 
 FIRST BOOK. 
 I. First Declension. Study § 32 of the Guammar. 
 Media pars Italifp, infra fluvium Tiberim, antiquitiis incolebStur ah La'iius. 
 llrec pars Italiio. ox nomitu- incolarum. appellabflrur Latium, et caput habebat Albam 
 Lonuain. Octavo -u'cnlo ante Christum, Nuniitor rex Alb» Longie fuit. Is cxpnlsns 
 est a f ratre suo Amulio, qui Alios NumitOris nocavit. Quum Rhea Sylvia, filia Xuun- 
 tnris, geminos filios peperisset, Ammulius jupsit eos in Tiberim demergi. At ecrvi 
 roL'ii satis habt-bant. cxponere pueros in loco proximo aquir. Ibi, lU tabula tradit, 
 dno filii Rheiv Sylvia nutriti sunt lupa, qm« cis mammas pra'bnit. 
 
 In the first (special) vocabulary the student will tind the following 
 words for the first sentence : 
 
 ab, by; ab Latinis, by the Latins, 
 antiquitus, in ancient times, 
 fluvium, the river. 
 incolebatur, was inhabited. 
 
 infra, below. 
 Latinis, the Latins, 
 media pars, the middle part. 
 Tiberim, Tiber. 
 
 All the words belonging to the first declension, for instance: //a/ia-; 
 inioliirufn, Alham Longain, Alba' Longa, aqiar, Rhcu\ Sylvia, lupCi, 
 mammas, are only found in the second (general) vocabulary, in the 
 nominative singular, because the student is expected to translate them 
 correctly, according to the lesson just learned. 
 
 .Since every chapter of the Reader is a drill for some section of tiie 
 (b-ammar, the student upon finishing the Reader will have been over the 
 whole of the dammar in an easy and pleasant manner, while, at the same 
 time, he has acquired that practical routine in the language which alone 
 enables him to study the details of grammar w ith success. 
 
 To write such a Reader is a matter of great difficulty, since it is neces- 
 sary to employ only such Latin constructions as may be literally rendered 
 into good English, and still be good and genuine Latin. And the thread 
 of the history must be so arranged and devised that in each chapter certain 
 grammatical forms occur in sufficient number to drill the student in that 
 pait of the (bammar whicli must be studied according to the order o{ the 
 system. Dr. Fischer has met these diffictdties. We are satisfied that there 
 is not one sentence in the Reader which might not have been written by 
 a classical Latin author, and not one which will ofi'er any difficulty to the 
 very first beginners. 
 
 Fischer's Elements of Latin Grammar, with Reader, 220 pages, 
 cloth, - - - - ----- - Price, $1.25 
 
 ^^^ Specimen copy mailed on receipt of the price. 
 
 J. W. Schcrnicrhorn & Co., Publishers, 
 
 14: Bond street. New York^ 
 
Latin G-rammak. 
 
 • '• * • . TdhETruwI VfrnT /. 
 
 
 • • ♦ * • 
 
 - * • • • • 
 
 • •-. 
 
 • • • -•• ,* 
 
 • » 
 
 * « 
 
 A SYSTEMATIC TREATMENT OF LATIX COMPOSITIOX. 
 
 » . « 
 
 • • • 
 
 m ^ * 
 
 BY 
 
 GUSTAYUS FISCHER, LL.D. 
 
 
 CONTAINING ETYMOLOGY AND AN INTIiODUCTION TO SYNTAX, 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 
 J. W. Schermerhorn & Co., Publishers, 
 
 No. 14 Bond Strp:et. 
 
 1876. 
 
r 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 • Entered aocordintr to Art of Coner^ps, in the year ISCO, 
 
 Bt gustavus fischkr. 
 
 In tho aerk's Oflice of the United SLitcs District Court for New Jersey. 
 
 ^'/7.^ 
 
 f 
 
 i 
 
 "I 
 
 Lange, Little Si Co., 
 Printers, 
 No8. 10 to 20 Astur Place. 
 
 y 
 
 •PREFACE^^ 
 
 / 
 
 X • 
 
 ^"TT" — : ' — » 
 
 The author of the present work submits to the institutions of 
 learning a new me thod of studying the Latin Language, which neither 
 is a copy of our own previous methods, ^nor_an improved edition of the 
 method prevailing in Germany. This jatteir. country unquestionably 
 produces better classical scholars than other nations. The method 
 employed ^here^Js essentially practical. The student, first of all, acquires ^ 
 routine by reading , and this is continued till the language almost be- ^ 
 comes vernacular to him. The whole course is divided in four, five, or niore 
 p laces, and for each of these, a great number of drill-books have been 
 written, wliich are calculated only for one or the other of these courses. 
 We, in this country, evidently cannot devote a period_of_ten_or mora 
 years to a merely preparatory study of the ancient languages, and 
 hence the use of those German drill-books in our schools would be out 
 of the question, even if they should be essentially remodelled. For, by 
 introducing the drill-books of only one or two courses, our preparation 
 would be very incomplete ; and by introducing the drill-bp^ks ,of aU 
 the courses, we would by far exceed the limits of time^ wWch we think 
 ' to be reasonable for a classical preparation. 
 
 The author is fully convinced that there is a method which may give 
 us the benefits of the German practrcal drill and thoroughness in a con- 
 siderably less time than the Germans devote to their classical studies ; | 
 but this method is equally distant from tho G erman^^raction and the j 
 American coj^action. Nothing less than a. rewriting of Latin Gram- 
 mar will "do for this purpose, and the author, after a long prac- 
 tical experience, has adopted the plan laid down in the present 
 work, as best calculated for insuring an end which our educators al- 
 ways have considered an unsolved problem. The practical success of 
 the author's plan in his own sphere of teaching has been remarkable, 
 and as several distinguished teachers, after using the first edition of the 
 
 \i 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 ( 
 
 / 
 
 I 
 
 / 
 
 work as a test-book, have endorsed the new system, it is hoped thai 
 this second edition, in its revised form, wUl win approbation in wider 
 Circles. 
 
 It is one of the prominent features of the new metliod, that the ele- 
 mentary constituents of the Latin sentence have been reduced to a 
 SYSTEM, and tliat througli this system evert possible connection of 
 Latin words has been discovered and presented to the student, so that 
 his iamiliarity with Latin plirases and expressions does not depend on 
 «leir accidental treatment in the text, but on the necessity of the system. 
 The Latin Inflection has been taught ae an essential part of the same 
 system. For we believe, that inflection not only may, but must be 
 taught together with construction. 
 
 We do not hesitate to make this system the base of elementary 
 instruction. For if the classical languages are to teach us the logic of 
 speech, It must be a great mistake to play with the beginner, aSd^us- 
 tom him to loosej-eflection and desultory learning. But we have tried 
 to temper the harshness of systematic instruction by a practical form. 
 For while the rules are fully adapted to the class-room, the exercises, 
 which by far exceed the rules in size, and which have been prepared 
 with the utmost care, are calculated to reduce the theory of the rule to 
 practical and almost mechanical skill. At the same time the progress 
 of our exercises is so gradual as to be almost imperceptible, and since 
 the results of the previous lessons are always incorporated in the next 
 the growth of the Latin sentence is, as it were natural, and the student 
 becomes thoroughly familiar with the different combinations, which in 
 methodical repetition are presented to him in all possible aspects. 
 
 The present volume teaches Declension in all its forms, and with a 
 view to thoroughness, but Conjugation so far only, as it was necessary 
 to show the elementary components of the sentence. The experience 
 of the author has shown how easily aU verbal forms are acquired 
 after a thorough drilling in those parts of the verb which are taught in 
 the present volume. 
 
 It would be beyond the limits of this preface to explain the many 
 deviations from all other tex1.books, which will be found in this volume 
 They must defend themselves, and we do not doubt that most of them 
 will be endorsed by those who will use the book. If the Lessons on 
 phrases, on their combination, on the third declension, on pro- 
 KOUNS and FORM-ADJECTIVES, and COMPARISON, are carefully examined. 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 we hope that interest enough in this system will be awakened to give 
 our book a fair trial. 
 
 The work, when complete, is designed to supersede the use of regular 
 grammars and readers, the former of which ought to be used more as 
 books of reference than as text-books for studying the language. The 
 student, upon finishing the whole course, will be able to read Caesar or 
 other Latin authors, not, as is generally the case, by guesses and 
 with the help of accommodating notes, but with a thorough under- 
 standing of the text. 
 
 The Vocabularies in the Appendix are arranged according to the dif- 
 ferent CLASSES of words. We cannot too strongly recommend, that 
 these bo used strictly as intimated in the different Lessons. If more 
 than one exercise belong to the same subject, generally one only 
 should be translated. The second and third numbers should be given 
 to students of less talent as separate lessons, or else be substituted, 
 whenever it will not seem desirable that successive classes should trans- 
 late the same exercises. 
 
 The second and third parts of this work will follow in rapid succes- 
 
 sion. 
 
 We cannot omit to express our deep sense of gratitude to many 
 scholars who have assisted us with their advice, especially to Professor 
 Reiley, of Rutgers College, to whose suggestions many parts of the 
 l)Ook owe their origin. 
 
 New Brunswick, Dcccrribcr, 1866. 
 
 
?. 
 
 6 
 
 CZl 
 
 
 ) 
 
 •PREFACE. 
 
 Tirrs ^rstyart of our Latin grammar is ' introductory ', its object being, to 
 enable the s"dent by a popular and easy statement of the fundamental prhiei- 
 ples to study the details of Latin according to our theory, which we have mi- 
 nutely presented in the ^coaidJPart. Referring to the Prefucc^ of the Second 
 Part for our method of grammatical treatment, we would make the following 
 remarks in regard to the three books contained in th is lirst Yoluni e. 
 
 We are of the opinion Thai nooocly can fully understand or even appreciate 
 the spirit and usages of any language, unless he is able to express himself in it. 
 Hence we have united Latin Ci>i»p9*iticni^witli what is gener^Hy understood by 
 'Grammar proper'. No rule has beeiT*presented, in tiiis first Part, without 
 showiiii,- its application and treatment in converting Engli^^h phrases or senten- 
 ces into Latin. From the very beginning, and in the most elementary forms of 
 the language, the student learns the 'difference of the two idioms', and ym(7«- 
 ai}>j acqmrea the art of thlnkimj in Latin, while, at the same time, he masters the 
 art of f/rammatiral thinking both in general, and with respect to his own ver- 
 nacular. 
 
 We have continued this constant regard to composition, even in the Second 
 Part, but according to a plan different from the method followed in tlie lirst. 
 On the one hand, the Exercises in composition, contained in the Second Part are 
 chiefly calculated to teach the art of transforming modern tJwiigJd into classical 
 forms. On the other hand, the connection of the exercises with the body of the 
 grammar is more an external one in the Second Part, sotliat they may be omit- 
 ted without at all aliecting the grammatical discussion. And the exercises are 
 Ro framed that each chapter is complete in itself, and especially ada|)ted to the 
 wants of higher colleiie-classes, while all that is contained in the First Part 
 (and also in the Fourth Book of the second) is intended to be studied in the 
 preparatory and Grammar schools. 
 
 In devising a proper method for a systematic study of this kind, we had to 
 strugirle with considerable dimculties, which are wellknown to every practical 
 teacher. It was one of our chief points of view, that the student should fully 
 understand every subject presented to him, without drawing, as it were, on the 
 future, and without anticipating many things that, at the given time, could not 
 yet be comprehended. T<) begin with memorizing the whole of the i^aradigms 
 of nouns and verbs is, in our opinion, a ])ractice both useless and danirerous. 
 Useless, because all the paradii^ms thoroughly memorized, will never help the 
 student to translate the very plainest sentence of the easiest authors ; danger- 
 ous, because it educates the student to mechanical memorizing. On the other 
 hand^^vvecojisider the so-called Ollendorf method a most nefarious device, 
 caleulated to tmin the beginner to desultory and loose study. ~ We also wished 
 
 
 i 
 
* TREFACE. 
 
 to keepclear from all theoretical and pliilosopliical expositions, butnevertheless 
 to teach the student the deep nieanin- hidden under every grammatical form 
 Ue hope tliat there is no pa-e in this whole book AlclAvill encoura-e loose 
 study on the one side, and mechanical drill on the other. We meant to conqxl 
 the dudent to think, and to])repare him for understandin^reven the most dillicult 
 of ii-rammatical subjects. We never have tried to evade any of the numerous 
 ditliculties in his path, but to show him the ri-ht way not only to overcome 
 but to lore the dilliculties. 
 
 How far we have succeeded in this plan can be fully tested now that the whole 
 work is before the public. The first two books, under the title 'Manual of 
 Latin Grammar and Composition', have been for several years in the hands of 
 teachers, many of whom have repeatedly expressed their anxiety to see the 
 work completed. This 'Manual' apiR-ars now, under a dlirerent title, in a 
 thorougldy revised form. It is increased by the whole of the Third Book, the 
 details of Latin j:tyiiiology and Prosody, in the form of seven Appendice's to 
 the body of the (irammar. The teacher may either connect their studv with 
 that of the introductory lessons, or they may be studied separately after finish- 
 ing the course contained in the first three books. "^'' " 
 I In regard to 'etymology ' we have confined ourselves strictly to the Latin, and 
 f never indulged in the cheap luxury of ' comparative philology \ howeV(?r strongly 
 i we had often to resist our inclination to enter upon that field. 
 
 To each of the two Parts a separate and complete index is added, in which a 
 full and systematic analysis of every articlc"is containc'd. 
 
 We must acknowledge our deep obligations to D. T. Reiley, Professor of 
 Latin in Rutgers College. To his advice and suggestious^uiaily'parts of this 
 grammar owe partly their origin, partly their form. 
 New BiiUNswiCK, Juue, 1875. 
 
 ( 
 
 U/<^cXJ 
 
 
 > 
 
 '^■r/i^u /I U. 
 
 ■lA'^c^^acr uryi , 
 
 Hsrs: ^ 
 
 7IZ U/ r>/^ /y/^j ,1^ 
 
 J/L, ^<ajiuty, (icx:/y^i/;'C/::?j^/9^Y 
 
 a 
 
 ^C %f /-'c^ a ?/6 j^ :ai. 
 
 r / /' 
 
 [U 
 
 CJ/Lt 
 
 t {/}/'/' ryM/>.t, 
 
 tla^u.l 
 
 .C/it^ 
 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 s 
 
 /^ 
 
 
/^ 
 
 L.^jr, / 
 
 ^A //////^/V€ O/, 
 
 ^J( 
 
 ^'f 
 
 ft 
 
 II 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 ff 
 
 ~f/ 
 
 tf 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 H 
 
 // 
 
 
 
 JM 
 
 
 /iV^r/f 
 
 
 //^ S^/ 
 
 '/ c ffnr/^r w^^ UC7' r/ iCvt'^f I^uh,^ 
 
 /?/?// ^^/? 
 
 <7/-v 
 
 
 i u.). 
 
 
 TT 
 
 
 ^. 
 
 n ' 
 
 / / 
 
 9/ 
 
 
 n 
 
 ii 
 
 tt 
 
 / 
 
 #/ 
 
 // 
 
 / ' 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 
 r;? 
 
 vjjo^^ /x r^y/r///^^ 
 
 / 
 
 :// 
 
 •■ ~- - OW*" 
 
 
 ct//^?t^ f/ 
 
 
 '/y7/tr.^/^ . 
 
 c 
 
 / 
 
 2 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 // 
 
 /r 
 
 JX^Zl ^^Ar'^^/ Ujjcle /U/i^9ty , ^f4^///_ 
 
 JXV7I '■ ^U/?/c ' i^^Lcud^um. , M^4. ^^f^ . /^j 
 
 JxFZZT 
 
 v//^ ^»^/ 
 
 .^^: ^ 
 
 / ^ 
 
 «I 
 
 // 
 
 1CX7Y7 (Z^^j^^ ^^ ^r^/i-^^ufpt 4^^^ /^7 
 
t. 
 
 ti 
 
 33X22:. 
 
 C yZr/^^7^_(:t^J, 
 
 i/ 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 ♦r 
 
 /f 
 
 n 
 
 J/c 
 
 /46 
 
 n U/yi>^ 
 
 jsnu 
 
 '- 'Mp 
 
 
 
 ^rMyf^U I 
 
 ^/. /<f/ 
 
 ^/9 
 
 '"/. 
 
 xyxtizJ 
 
 
 jszTx; 
 
 
 v^A^ZL^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 /^ 
 
 /^ 
 
 
 /ecu Hi A 
 
 ^/^/ /P / ( / ^ / // 
 
 ""^yl/Na 
 
 r^/{^ . 
 
 V/ 
 
 0t 
 
 E 
 
 
 'f/c :& I Ac/ ''r>/r 
 
 Y'^J^/ai^^TT 
 
 a 
 
 V^ 
 
 
 H 
 
 r/ 
 
 J/^ 
 
 V 
 
 
 '^ 
 
 y>y/ 
 
 3 St 
 
 'i^j^'/?^dccf<r>i ^y ^^h cj^y 
 
 Wb/^ui 
 
 My 
 
 (' 
 
( 
 
 U//a 
 
 /. 
 
 y 
 
 ^■^-Ac/f /^^ 
 
 /( 
 
 Ca 
 
 T7Z 
 
 /• 
 
 7 
 
 trJra 
 
 11^ WW » -■-*<- 
 
 ;^/- J 
 
 
 / 
 
 /^/^ /v) /- 
 
 r/ 
 
 /'^f/^V/ XY^^fy- 
 
 y/^j 
 
 ^/Jj , IruJO c/ y^i f^r^' /i^ Li/'rtr^/^S^i, -^^^ 
 
 "FT 
 
 '< 
 
 '< 
 
 < / 
 
 »♦ 
 
 '♦ 
 
 •f 
 
 *» 
 
 / 
 
 t;^ 
 
 / 
 
 // 
 
 / 
 
 
 / /^ it^yu/z^ J a // /^/ -^ 
 
 (^/T^O^'^t 
 
 IT: 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^» ■ - \<m 
 
 fT 
 
 
 
 // '♦ 
 
 /< ' 
 
 
 // 
 
 ff 
 
 yZ/L 
 
 4// 
 
a 
 
 s 
 
 V 
 
 IKTRODUCTIOK 
 
 II 
 
 ^ 
 
 I.— BIIIKF HISTORICAL SKETCH OF THE LATIN 
 
 LANGUAGE. 
 
 The Latin langua.i^e in its earliest age (about 800 b. c.) was 
 spoken in Latiuni, the central part of Italy. It arose from a 
 union of two languages, that of the Osci, an old Italic nation, 
 and the Pelasyi^ from the latter of whom, also, the Greeks de* 
 rived their language. There are but few fragments extant of the 
 time before the second Punic war (200 b. c), the oldest of them 
 not reaching bej'ond the year 500. Thus our knowledge of the 
 language, as it w^as spoken during this time, is very imperfect. 
 This jirenerally is called the archaic period. 
 
 The next age (anteclassical period) dates from 200 to 81 
 B. c, or from the second Punic war to Sulla's dictatorship. A 
 number of authors, as the poets PJautns and Terence, and the 
 great prose-writer M. Porcius Cato ( Censorinus ) , some of whose 
 works are yet extant, wrote during this period. Their style lacks 
 the polish of the next i)eriod, and the anteclassical language 
 abounds in words and constructions, which the more refined taste 
 of the next period has rejected. 
 
 The classical period or goldex age of Homan literature 
 begins with the dictatorship of Sulla and terminates with the 
 death of Augustus (14 a. d.) During this period the language 
 reached its culminating point, and gradually became the spoken 
 tongue not only of tlie whole of Italy, but of the whole West of 
 the Roman Empire. Here belong the prose-writers Cicero^ 
 Cesar, Nepos, Sal/itst, Livy, and the poets Lucretius, Cat alias, 
 Tibullus, Propertius, Virgil^ Horace, Ovid. 
 
 ^ 
 
6 
 
 IXTPtODUCTTON. 
 
 II. — OF LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 
 
 After the fiokUn follows th.^ sii.vkk agk (from 14 to .-ibont 1.50 
 A. D.), with the prose-writeis T7VA>.s' P,,ten'i(bis, Qnint'dian^ 
 Seneea, Plhn/, the ohh^-an.! younger, Turlfu,, JSuttonlus.Cur- 
 this, and the poets Jaomul, Ferslas, MartluL retrontus, and 
 the trag-ediaii Stneca. 
 
 The next period, or brazen age, marks th^ decay and final dis- 
 sohition of the hino-ua-e, which ceased to be spoi^en about tho 
 end of the seventh century after Christ. Both tlie silver and 
 brazen a^^es form the post classical perioo. 
 
 While in writing Latin the golden age must be our principal 
 guide and authority, several writers of the silver age must be 
 ranked very high, and fully deserve to be stu(h*cd in our schools.' 
 This generally is not the case with the writers of the brazen a<re* 
 who neither furnish a model for imitation, nor can their readino-^'in 
 schools be considered as desirable. ° 
 
 Rkmakks.-A pornliar rla<s of wrifors in the brazon nee arf> tho KrrT.F«»rv«TrrAT 
 AUTHOKS tin IS. those who wro'c on subjects p'rtMi.u-. - fo rl, e n.iM^:^^^^ 
 ch,n-ch. Their styl-. is mil of Ori.-ntalls.ns-' :uh} fauItN .xmvsli ,s b ut , ', " 
 are the only authonfy for the..lu<rical tenni.ioloL'v. Amcu.'' hel^i/XJ /^ 
 (.1-^)js a renv.rkabe exception in .ciranl to LariMiiv. Ms sfvle ei.V.^ of^^ m^^^^^^^ 
 classical p-.nty amle|e...nce.-()f the Kotnar Jurists, helonlnn.r t Wch ' the 
 three periods, only fra-m-nts. more or l.-ss cn-^i^leraMe -ire .-vr-i t i rrU <. , 
 
 usinc laiHiKts or Di'^ests, p.irtly in sum.- treatise.s (,f G;,iii^ and riiii'in -md 
 the smaller lrai,'me.its of a few other.. Several of the Juris i hot ,frjiier 
 and brazen ajjes are greatly superior in style to their contcniporurk«. 
 
 II.-OF LETTERS AXD SYLLABLES. 
 
 L The Latin language has the same letters as the En.rlish 
 with the exception of iv and k. The letter k however someUmea 
 was used by the ancients instead of initial c before the vowel a 
 and the diphthong ae, especially in abbreviations, as K or Kac^o 
 mstead of Caeso ; K. or AW., instead of Calendar. 
 
 2. The letters ij and z occur only in words taken from the 
 Greek and other foreign languages. This in general is the case 
 also with the double letters ch, th, and )>h. IJut these also are 
 found m very k^^y Latix words, as Crtheju., triamphus, pulcher. 
 
 6. J here are three diphthongs in general use in Latin : ae.oe, 
 and an. The rarer di])hthongs are eii, el, and ui. 
 
 ^^^hlJL^'"'^^ few words the l.'ttors ae and oe liavc tlie force of two 
 dibtinct vowels, belongmg to two different sylJables. 'i'his always 
 
 I 
 
 must be marked over the vowel e, either by the dlerests (aer, 
 coerceo), or by the isign of the quantity (i)oeta, aeris). Wherever 
 tliis is not the case, the v(nv(3l combinations ae and oe are DiPHTnoNGS, 
 that is, sounds jmrtdking of the miture of two different vowels, 
 altkoufjh pronounced hy a single utterance of the voice. Au in Latin 
 words always is a diphthong. 
 Klm. 2. Tlie vowcl-rombiinitions en, ei, and ui are generally used as sepa- 
 rate vowels, and not as diphthoni-:». To these tlie siirn of tlie diieresis 
 is not a})])lied (dens, de inde, liu-ie). Tlicy occur as dijilithongs only in 
 interjections {hen, ehai, hens, /lei, eia, hni), and in the words neuter, uenti- 
 qudui, ceu, uen. seu. The I'oets fre(iuently use the combinations ui and ei 
 as diphtliongs in huic, cui, dein, and other words. 
 
 4. The old Romans used only capital letters for writing. The 
 «mall, or so called lloman letters, came into general use not before 
 the ninth century, though they were know^n as early as the fifth. 
 Ill our modern Latin texts capitals are used: L After periods, 
 points of interrogation and exclamation, and generally after 
 colons; 2. In proper names and words derived from them; 3. In 
 the beginning of sections, and in poetry, of verses ; 4. In titles, 
 headings and inscriptions. 
 
 5. Among the consonants we distinguish: 1. The Liquids, /, 7n, 
 n, r, 8 ;* 2. The Mutes 6 and p (P-mutes or Labials), c and g, 
 (K-mutes or Gutturals), d and t (T-mutes or Linguals); 3. The 
 Semi-vowels j and v ; 4. The Labial and Guttural Breathings 
 
 / and q ; 5. The Aspirate h ; and 6. The Double Letter j:, 
 which takes the place of cs or of gs. 
 
 Rem. 3, The Romans used for the semivowels j and v, and for their 
 corresponding vowels i and u, only one sign for each vowel and 
 semivowel {I and V). 
 
 6. The dlvi»iioil of the Latin Syllables is different from 
 that of the English. Every Latin syllable regularly terminates in 
 a VOWEL, and the consonant, following this vowel, belongs to the 
 NEXT syllable. Thus pater must be divided pa-ter^ not pat-er, 
 and po-pu-lui^, not pop-id-iis. 
 
 Of this rule there are two exceptions : 
 
 1. The last svllable of a word mav terminate either in a vowel 
 or a consonant, as : floater, ho?ws, docet. 
 
 • The letter a jrenerally is not ola«sifle*i amonsr the liquids, beins called a sibilant. 
 But it ^h.nvs all tlie e'^^etitial properties of tlie other liqiii<ls. which <spe<'ially is evllent 
 from Oie intlection of tho noun and verb, where the same laws apply to the letter « us M 
 the other liquids. 
 
INTRODUCTION*. 
 
 III.— QUANTITY, ACCENT, PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 2. When a vowel is followc^d by two or more consonants, the 
 
 first of these belongs to the precedhig syllabh', unless the two or 
 
 three consonants are such, that they may form the initials of a 
 
 Latin word. In this case they all belong to the next syllable. 
 
 Thus we divide ser-mo, ai'-fe, pel-Io, since neither rm, nor rt, 
 
 nor // can begin any Latin word. But we divide a-pro, a-gro, 
 
 du-plcx, am-pla, cas-tra, since Latin words may begin with pr, 
 
 gi\ pi and sir. 
 
 Rem. 4. A Latui word, not taken from the Greek, cannot begin with any 
 but the following combinations of consonants: 
 
 1. With a MUTE, followed by one of the liquids I or r, as prae, 
 gr(ftf.% p^tcto. In very few words, as f/narus, the mute ^ may bo 
 followed by tlit^ licjuid ii. 
 
 2. With* the licjuitl >* and a nuite, as spes, sto, scateo. 
 
 3. With s-l and s-r, having a mute between them, as strcpo, 
 splendeo, scribo. 
 
 Rem. 5. In compoimd words the component part must be separated, as 
 ab-uti, tmiifi^o, de-fero. An inserted d joins the preceding vowel, 
 as prod-ed, red-co. 
 
 1. Syllables, which terminate in a vowel, are called open, and 
 those, which terminate in a consonant, eliisc The last sylla- 
 ble of a word is called the ultima, tiie last but one the 
 penult, and the third syllable from the end the ante- 
 penult. 
 
 « 
 
 III. QUANTITY, ACCENT, rRONlTNCIATION. 
 
 1. The l|iiailtity of a syllable or of a vowel is its length 
 or SHORTNESS, that is ih(i longer or shorter time, required for pro- 
 nouncing it. The Aeeeilt of a syllable is the stress of the 
 voice, laid u})on one syllable in distinction from the other syllables 
 of the same word. 
 
 Bern. 1. Tlie two ancient langna2:<^s had this peculiarity, that they mens 
 tired their syllables as well as their vowels. In most modern lan- 
 guages QUANTITY follows the ACCENT, and both virtually are the 
 same. In ancient languages oh the contrary ACCENT was determined 
 
 by QUANTITY. 
 
 ' We here consider qtaxtity so far only, as it has an influence on the 
 accent in flose. For ]»articulai' rules on quantity see p. 389. 
 
 2. In ancient poetry every syllable and every vowel was accu- 
 rately measured, and accommodated to a certain scheme, called 
 the METRU.M. Here the accentuation of the syllables, as it was 
 usual in piiose, was altogether disregarded, and the accent of 
 POETRY (iclu^j or arsis) was determined by the metrum alone. 
 Thus the quantity of every syllable was of paramount importance 
 in the composition and recitation of verse, since it was necessary 
 to fit each syllable to the metrum, and the diflferent time, allotted 
 by it to long and short syllables necessarily modified their pronun- 
 ciation. 
 
 This is different in prose, where nothing but the accent is deter- 
 mined by the quantity, and this in words of more than two sylla- 
 bles only. On the pronunciation of the single syllables or vowels 
 the quantity of the latter has little or no influence. 
 
 3. A syllable is long either by natnre or by position. 
 It is long by nature, if it has a long vowel or a diphthong. 
 
 Thus in venire^ docere, leoncs^ amoeiuis, incautas the penults are 
 
 long by nature, because they have long vowels or diphthongs. 
 
 It is long by position, if its short vowel is followed by two or 
 
 more consonants. Thus in vent us, ferre, magister the peimlts 
 
 are long by position, because their vowels are followed by two 
 
 consonants. 
 
 Hem. 2. The quantity of the i\flkctio\al terminations is shown in 
 those parts of the iLrrammar, where tiie inticetion itself is taujj;lit, and 
 partly in the Prosody (App. VII). Sinee these rules cannot be imparted 
 to tir'st beuiiiiuTs, and since the (piaiitity of the radical parts must al- 
 wavs b(! learned by 'authority,' we have, iov the sake of securiuLr a cor- 
 rect pn)nune!ation, adopted the following system of notation throughout 
 this grammar : 
 
 Vowels, that are not marked, are supposed to be short. The 
 LENGTH of a vowel is thus marked: d,e,i, d, Ft, but only then, when 
 the vowel belongs to the penult, since the quantity of the penult 
 only bas an influence on accentuation. Therefore the quantity of 
 vowels in other syllables is marked only then, when by inflectional 
 changes such a syllable may become a })enult, as : addrare, obedlre. 
 Here the antepcnults do and he are marked by the long sign, sinco 
 these antepenults by inflection may become penults {adOras, 
 ohedis). 
 
 Short vowels when it is desirable to designate their quantity, 
 are thus marked : a, e, I, 6, a. 
 
 4. Two consonants do not form position, and leave the syllable 
 SHORT, if the former of them is a mute, and the latter a liquid. 
 
10 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Tlius in arhitro, tenehrae, quadruplex the penults are snoiiT 
 because their vowels are short, and their consonants tr, br, pi, 
 beini»- mutes witli hqiiiils, do not form i)Osition. 
 
 The mute and li(|uid combination gn however always makes 
 position. 
 
 5. The Ac't*€*nt in prose is determined by the foHowinur rules: 
 
 1. All Monosyllables have the accent on this one svllable, 
 and two-syllabled words have theu' accent on the penult, aspaterj 
 o'nu!^, le'o. 
 
 2. In three - and more - syllabled words tlie accent is on the 
 PENULT, if this is a long syllable, as magi'ster, argen'to, audtre, 
 doce'bo. But the accent is on the antepenult, if the penult is 
 SHORT, as Cae'sare, do ceo, facto, vo'lucer. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS* 
 
 a. Prepositions, when thcv stand before their nouns, have no accent 
 at all. After their nouns they have the regular accent, as: propter 
 ur'hem, but urhe te'nus. 
 
 b. If tlie ENCLITICS iie, que, ve, ?net are affixed to a word, the prec(Mlin£> 
 syllable (the last of the word) receives the accent, \vli"ther long or short, 
 as : terrd'que, Ji/ie'que. But if q>ie belongs to the word itself the accent 
 is regular, as : I'taque (therefore), but Uaqne (and thus). 
 
 c. Adverbs in o, a, as and ic have their accent on the ultima, as ; 
 fidHO , unci , ali'(f<' , illic . 
 
 d. The PRONOUNS illir', iHtir' , and the civic nouns in as, as: no8tra*\ 
 vestras', have their accent on the ultima. 
 
 e. Prepositions, conipounded with adverbs, take their accent on the 
 PREPOSITION, as de'inde, exiitde. 
 
 f. Those comi)ounds of y>7c^';r. that retain the a, are accented on /<I, 
 even if it is the penult, as adefd'cit, satisfd'cis. 
 
 6. The vowels and diphthongs are thus pronounced: 
 a, as a in father if,, as oo in tool 
 
 e, as a in fate ae, as ai in fair 
 
 i and y, as ee in tree or, as French eu in feu 
 
 o, as o in bone an, as ow in now. 
 
 Rem. 8. Of the rare diphthongs the pronunciation of en is doubtful. Wc 
 may pronounce it like u in ftse, T\n) Fr(»nch. Germans and Italians 
 pronounce it diffiM-ently, according to their own usage. The diph- 
 thong ei is pronounced as i in bile. 
 
 * Tren r(>:i accent unm rfiguhii^ cottturhant : dieting ufindi ratio, pronunciandi am- 
 biguitas atque necessitas. Priscianua de aocentibua, 2, 8. 
 
 III. — QUANTITY, ACCENT, PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 11 
 
 t. All Latin vowel-sounds are either open, or close, or 
 obscure. The pronunciation, as shown g(), is that of the open 
 sounds, which in pro.se form the rule for all open syllables, 
 whether long or short, whether accented or not. Diphthongs 
 have no other but these open sounds. 
 
 The CLOSE sounds of the vowels are those which are applied to 
 close syllables, the closing consonant always modifying the utter- 
 ance of the preceding voweh 
 
 The obscure vowel-sound is confined to the letter e in unac- 
 cented, open PENULTS, as mfacere, segcles, vehemens. 
 
 Rem. 4. The close vowel-sounds are distinguished from the open 
 sounds merely by their shorter duration. The close e is eoundcd as 
 English e in 2)en, the close i as English i in jnn, close u as English u in 
 fall. The close sounds of a and o have no exact equivalents in 
 English, and must be learned from the mouth of tlu^ teacher. 
 
 Rem. 5. If a vowel is followed by st or sp, the syllable, although con- 
 sidered as OPEN (I., 7) in pronouncing nevertheless is joined with the fol- 
 lowing 8, and has the close sound, as the i)enults in magi-dir, ca-dra, 
 f'i-.stif<, po-fitis, a-sper, which are pronounced, as if they were divided 
 mufju-ter, castj-a, a.s-per. 
 
 Rem. G. In several words, which are spelled alike, but are dis- 
 tinguished by the quantity of one of their vowels, the LONG vowel 
 always should assume tlu; open, and the short vowel the close sound. 
 Thus the termination Is in ACC. plur. of nouns of the vowel-class 
 assumes the open sound, in order to distinguish it from nom. sing. (n. 
 SING. cirU ACC. plur. cirls). The penult of the neuter Mem, and the 
 nominativts /lic and /toe have close sounds, while the masculine Idem, 
 the adverb /ile, and the ablatives hoc and hde have open sounds. The 
 termination ii.s in the 4th declension, according to the authority of ancient 
 gramma) iuns, was i)r()nouuced with the open sound, even in nom. sing., 
 where it is short, in order to distinguish it from the like termination 
 of the 2d declension. 
 
 Rem. 7. In reading poetry according to the metrum, the open sounds 
 everywhere are applied to long, and the close sounds to short vowels. 
 
 OB8KUVATION 1. It is advisable, in order to accustom beginner-; to th<^ coniiiiental vowel- 
 sounds, to niakt' th.in pronounce the close syllables of the Latin i;:'<uage according to 
 tlie i"ollowin<jr >ysleni : 
 
 al el il ol id, am ein im om nm, an en in on i„n, ar er ir or ur, 
 
 ax <H i.s on 118, at et it ot ut. 
 
 Obskkvation 2. The system of pronunciation, as stated above, is. with some minor modi- 
 fications in the ditb'rent loc dities. adopted thronLdinut C(tntinental Europe In 
 England and many pans of this eituntry a different method |»revails. which i> based 
 on the Kngiinh vowel-sounds. Aujong the reasons, w hicli are opposed I»» this system, 
 we mention th. foUowinir: 
 
 1. The Eiigli-h vowel-system is incompatible with tliat of any other lansnacre. 
 Hence only some of the English vowel-M)unds have l)een singled out, ami appropri- 
 ated to the Latin. JJut this very fact nuikes the Engli^ll iironunciation of ihe Latin 
 more ditticult for even English beginners, than the continental system. 2. According 
 to the English system the long and short vowel-sounds are distinguished accord inLr*^« 
 'Jt*? real quautiiy of the vowels, which makes it uecessury for every learuer to be familial 
 
10 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 with the quantity of each vowvl in every word of the lantrnaitfc, hofore he can pro- 
 noiu\ce oorret'tly. IJiit this'voiiiti reqn re h lonirer time, tljitii iiv any of our schools 
 can he devoted to it. 'JMic coiistqiu'iicf i-s tliat we gt- rn-rally meet with a eorrnpt and 
 vicious proniuiciatioii, which it i> iKiiid'ui to liear. 8. Tl»e coiiliiieiital vowel-systeiu 
 is eH>ily accjiiired, and the few sounds, whose j»ronnnciaiion is somewhat ddhcuit for 
 the t)ei:iiuier, must be an\ h<»w Hiqnir«-d in stiiilyin^ any of tlie «'ontinental htnirnaL'fS. 
 4. We Ivnow. ami can i)rove, that tlie 5 vowels on tiie whole were pronounced by the 
 Itonians, as the continental nations now pronounce them. Hence those, timt adoi>t 
 the Knsrlish system of pronunciation, imi>t ucknowledire, that tiiey <ii>lijjur«' tlie 
 lansruaire, and in readin;; Latin text destroy its euphony. For one vowel, especially 
 in thedenvation of v\ords, stands in a necessary euphonical relation to the other, 
 M'hicli must be lost by the siilistitiition of a foreii;ii sound. 
 OBaKKVATii>N S. Following the contineiital pronunciation, we deviate in one point 
 from the pronunciation of tlie ancient>. nirariiintr tlie ajiplication of the ch)Se vowel- 
 sounds to a 1 syllables eiidiii-,' in a consonant The ancients distinjrui>lied here be- 
 tween ACCENTED aiid UN ACCENTED 8yllal)le-, and irave in certain instances to accented 
 syllatdes. whether terminating in a con-onant or a vowel, the open sound — calling 
 this theciKi i\MKLE<n'ED in opposition to tlie a(i:te sound. Tims the tirst syllable of the 
 nominative /iV'Wrt had the ci^v?/w/?'C/^^/. but that of the ablative lioina tlie avute 
 .«iounil. These distinctions are so comi)licaIed. that it is |>ractically impossible t(» in- 
 troduce them. Hence the practice of the continental system lakes no notice of these 
 nicer distinctions in pronunciatitm. 
 
 8. Most of tlic e(»ii^oii:illt«ii are pronounced, as in English, 
 but with the fohowing exceptions : 
 
 1. G always has the hard sound, as in legere (i)ronounce 
 leghere). 
 
 2. J is pronounced as y in you, as in Jus (pronounce yoos), 
 
 3. G in the classical time was always pronounced like k. In 
 the later centuries the hard and soft sounds of c were dis- 
 tinguished, so that before a(\ oe, e, i\ y it w^as pronounced like 
 hissing ,s, while before the other vowels and all consonants, and as 
 a final letter it retained the sound of k. If we adopt this pronun- 
 ciation, which is the customary one all over the continent of 
 Europe, we should give to the letter s the sound of f]nglish z, 
 since else it would not be distinguished from soft c. Where 
 however the continental pronunciation is being first introduced, it 
 is decidedly preferable, to pronounce the letter c in all places like 
 k, and then the letter s must have the hissing sound * 
 
 4. Ci and ti must not be pronounced like sh, but like see and 
 
 tee. 
 
 5. ITn is pronounced like hoo, not like j/oo. 
 
 6. Qu is pronounced like ktv, but the conjunction qnnm, which 
 frequently is written cum, always is pronounced cum. 
 
 ♦ Tlie letter ft probuhly had the hissinsr sound only in the bejrinninsr of words and in 
 the middle, b^fore. or after consonants. Between two vowels and at tlie cud it had the 
 soft sound of English a. 
 
 J *' 
 
 LATIN GRAMMAR. 
 
 BOOK FIRST : 
 
 THE ELEMENTARY PHEASES AND THEIR 
 
 COMBINATION. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 DEFINITIONS. 
 
 §1.1. Iillleetioil is the application of endings to words. 
 Thus if we change the word Caesar into Caesaris (of Cesar), or 
 Caesari (to Cesa^')» we say that the word Caesar is ilitlected 
 by the addition of the endings is and i. 
 
 ' The different endings denote the different relations, ivhich the 
 inflecfM icord has to other words in the sentence. 
 
 \ •i 2 J^teill is that part of the word, to which endings 
 (terminations) are added. Tlie last letter of the stem is called 
 the cliaracicristie. Thus Caesar is the stem of Caesaris, 
 and the letter r is its characteristic. 
 
 S 3 3 Yerbs, SUBSTANTIVES (that is nouns and pronouns), 
 ADTFCTi'vES and partlv adverbs are inflected. All other parts of 
 speech cannot be inflected, and therefore are called indeclinable. 
 
 § 4. 4. The hiflection is fourfold: a. Conjugation; h. De- 
 clension ; c. 3Iotlon ; d. Comparison. 
 
 a C^oiijnsatioil is the inflection of the verb, as amo,l 
 love amas, thou lovest, amat, he loves, &c. See § 6 and L. 11. 
 
 h Decloii^iioil is that inflection of substantives, adjectives 
 and certain adverbs, which shows the cases of these parts of 
 
14 
 
 DEFINITIONS. 
 
 speech, as pw^r, the boy, ;vj/(t/, of the boy, 2^^f^ro, to the boy, 
 
 kc. See L. III. 
 
 c. Moli«II i> that inflection of nouns and adjectives, which 
 marks their genders, as iirsus a male bear, urm a she-bear; 
 60« M>', good (masculine), bona, good (feminine), bonum, good 
 (neuter). 
 
 d. Comparison is that inflection of adjectives which 
 marks then* degrees, as alius, high, altior, higher, altUsimus, 
 
 hiiirhest. 
 
 •J 
 
 Uem. 1. If VERBS are inflected, we say, that they are con jiiaraled ; 
 if sunsT ANxrvKs or adjectives are inflect^-d by declkn.-i n. we Bay, 
 that thev are de<*liii<'d ; if by motion, that thev are iiiov'etl ; 
 
 if ad.ie('tives are intiected by coMr.VKisoN, they are said to be 
 
 COIIipSil'C'Cl. 
 
 § 5. 5. The Sllllject of a verb is that person or thing, 
 that Joes tlie action imi>lied in the verb. If the speaker himself 
 is that subject, we call it the lir^^f p(*rsoil (as Hove). If 
 the person spijken to is the sulyect, we call it the *«iefOllll 
 peri^on (as thou loveM, you love) ; if any other person or 
 thing, it is called the third person^ as he loves, the boy 
 loves f the house burns. 
 
 Hem. 2. There are three ]K^rsons for each number, sino^ular and plural. 
 Hence the conjugation of the Latin verb is contained in six personal 
 forms. (See L. 11.) 
 
 § 6. 6. The conjugation of the Latin verb shows: 1. The per- 
 son of the sal)ject. 2. Its number. 3. Its relation to the action. 
 4. The time of the action. 5. The conception of the speaker, 
 regarding the action. Those forms of the verb, which mark the 
 relation of the subject to the action are called voice of the 
 verb ; those which mark the time of the action are called 
 teiise!^ ; and those which mark the conception of the speaker 
 are called lllood«. 
 
 § 7. 7. Hence every conjugated form of the verb belongs to 
 the following five accidents : a. person, h. number, c. tense, 
 d. mood, e. voice. 
 
 Rem. 8. All conjuirated forms of the verb are comprised under the oren- 
 eral name '* finite verb," in opposition to the term ** iiicleli* 
 
 THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 15 
 
 nile or non-finite verb, which compri^- the infinitives, the par- 
 Tic'iPLKS, ihe s FiNKS and the vekual adjectives. 
 
 {T^ We C'lnM'lor in the flr*t Iw>ok on y nn*» voice, the Af-rrvr, one vnood^ tb< 
 INDICATIVE, one U-nse, tlie puhsknt; but all three i»frsons in boilj numU-ra. 
 
 §8.8. The aceidents of the llOUn are : case, number and 
 gender; those of the proiioilll : case, number, gender and 
 person; those of the adjei'tive: case, number, gender and 
 degree. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 THE FIRST COXJUGATIOX. 
 
 § O. Paradigm. 
 
 Infinitive : Amare, to love (stem: ama, characteristic: 
 fi, ending: 7v). 
 
 Present Intlieative: 
 
 singular. 
 
 Latin forms. E» 'jUsh equ ivalents. 
 
 1st pers. a mo J love 
 
 2d amas thou lovest 
 
 3d amat he (she, it) loves 
 
 PLURAL, 
 
 Latin form*. English equivalenU, 
 
 1. amamus we love 
 
 2. amatis you love 
 
 3. amant they love 
 
 §10. Observations. 
 
 1. The Enirlish personal pronouns I, thou, ho, etc., as suhjects of the 
 verb, generaUv are not expressed hy special words in Latin, but merely 
 bv ENDINGS. * These are called rERBONAL endings. 
 
 2. All verl)s, which have the characteristic a, are conjugated after the 
 first conjiio-ation according: to the paradigm mndre. Tlie present infini- 
 tive ahvavs has the ending re. What is left of the infinitive, after 
 Btrikimr out "this endinir, is the stem of the verb (verb-stem). 
 
 3. Any o^iven verb, after its stem has been found, is conjugated by 
 successively attaching to it the personal endings, which are the foi- 
 
 lowmg : 
 
 SUNGUTjAR. 
 
 (contracted with the 
 1st pers. — O \ preceding character- 
 
 ( istic a into 0. 
 2(1 " — s . 
 ad " — t 
 
 PLURAIi. 
 1. —Ill US 
 
 2. —lis 
 
 3. —lit 
 
f4 
 
 DKFINITION'S. 
 
 ^NHH-h, .H /.»/' r, tlir hoy. puni, of Hm' hoy, ;,»/rro, to the hoy, 
 
 r Motion .s that iiillrctiim .»t' nouns and a«lj«Ttivis, which 
 murk. tiHu ,.KM»KH.H. us i/r^NM u n.alr hrur. ursa a shc-iK-ar; 
 6i,«iiM. K'"»*» itnttM-nline), f'ona, guinl (remiuino), />o/tum, good 
 
 (Muli»r). . ,. .. , • I 
 
 <i C«llipill*i«<*>* i*^ t'»»* inflection of udjcctivos wliicU 
 
 Mrku tlitir nK..KKK.s us altas, high, a///or, liighcr, allisHimus, 
 
 L, . t. 
 
 Rim, 1 If vK.nnH an- iiifl.'rt..h we nay, that th.y arr roii|ii;;;H*'*l ; 
 If HI UHT vNT.v, > or v.MK. Tiv.H ar. inthvt..a by '(•^•''^^^'^'yj;;' "!" :^>': 
 that th..v aro €l<*<-liiM-d « if »»y Monnx. that n-y an- lliov « , 
 If AlUKc rivKH uni inthi'U<l by o.MPAIIIHun. th»y an- ^aui to l.e 
 
 coiiipiirt!«l. 
 
 I 5. 5. The ^llllici-l of ft Terh is that prson or thinir, 
 that JoV.. the action impli^'^l »" the vcrh. If the spkakkr himself 
 i8 that Huhjecr, we call il the lir^l |MT^oil fas lUwe)- If 
 
 ti r.<(,u siH.ken /o is the Knhject, we call it the MeCOIld 
 
 |M I -till (us thou lovrsf, yna lor^ ) : if nny other person or 
 liiiuK. u i. called the lliiril lU'i>OII, as he loves, the boy 
 loves, the liouse hKvns. 
 
 Rim '^ There are threi- uvrmwH for each number, 8inj.Mihir and ])hiral. 
 
 ilonce the onjupition of the I^tiu verb is contained in six personal 
 
 forms. (See L. 11.) 
 
 i. G. The conjugation of the Latin verb sliows: 1. The per- 
 son 'n the subject. 2. Its number. 3. Its relation to the action. 
 4 The time of the action. 5. The conception of the speaker, 
 reirarding the actum. Those forms of the verb, whicli mark the 
 reration")f the sub.fect to the action are called voice of the 
 verb ; those which mark the timk of the action are called 
 tenses; and those which mark the conception of the speaker 
 
 are called lllOOfU. 
 
 § r. 7. Hence everv cojijugated form of the verb belongs to 
 the lo'll.)wing five accidents : a. peusok, Ik nlmuer, c. tense, 
 
 d. MOOD. e. VOICE. 
 
 Rem. :i All ronjncrnted forms of the verb are comprised «"^^^.^^^^. ^JJ^' 
 eral nam.» - tiiiile verb," in opi>o8ition to the term iiideli- 
 
 THE FII^ST CONJUGATION. 
 
 15 
 
 lillO or iioii-fllllte verb, which comprises the infinitives, the par- 
 Tlcii'LKH, the rt 1-iNKS and the vkkikvl adjectives. 
 
 re^ We cnn.M.tor In tbo flr.t b..nk only one voice, the activk, one mood, tb« 
 iNlncATivi, one Un^, U.c .m:«sknt; bul all three persons m both numbers. 
 
 R 8. 8 The accidents of the IIOUII are : case, number and 
 GENPFir those of the iiroiiouil : case, number, gender and 
 person; those of the acljei'tivc: CASE, number, gender and 
 degree. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 § 9. Paradigm. 
 Infinitive : Amare, to love (stem: ama, characteristic: 
 o, endin<^: re). 
 
 Prt'j^t'iit Indicative: 
 
 SINGULAR. I'L^^^^; . , , 
 
 Latin forms English equivaUntsA Utin form*. English equivalent*, 
 
 *-«"*./ • , ... we love 
 
 you love 
 they love 
 
 1st pers. a mo I love 
 
 2d amas thou lovest 
 
 3d amat he {she, it) loves 
 
 1. amamus 
 
 2. amatis 
 
 3. amant 
 
 § lO, Observations. 
 
 1 The English personal pronouns T, thou, he, fc as subjects of the 
 
 veri> ~llv are^not expressed by special words in Latm, but merely 
 
 hv FNDTXGS ' These arc called rEnsoNAE endini^. . . r. +i « 
 
 • o A v^;rbs which have the characteristic a, are conjuorated after the 
 
 «.,. I, no- out, this endino- is tlie stom of the vprl) (verl)-stoin). 
 
 3 Any v™ verb aft,.r its stem has been found, is ™nJ"?« "d ^f 
 s«e;etivery attaching to it the personal eucUngs, .vhich are the lo.- 
 
 lowing : 
 
 6INGUT.AR. 
 
 (contracted with the 
 1st ix*rs. — O ^preceding charaxjter- 
 
 ( istic a into o. 
 2d " — s • 
 
 ad '* —t 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. — mus 
 
 2. —lis 
 
 3. — Mt 
 
16 
 
 THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 f.m 
 
 THE FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 IT 
 
 4. Tlie cliaractoristic a of the first conjugation is loni^, and the syll»i 
 bl«' contaitung it, if it is the ]K'niilt, must be act-entrd. (See Introduc- 
 tion 111., >i 'i. 5). Hence we pronounce <H)h'f iiiu», mnd'lif*, not a'/namus, 
 a matin. But in tlie verl) dare (to give) and its compounds (circumdare, 
 pesHumdare, venumdare) tlie characteristic a is ii/wrt. Hence we pro. 
 nounce circumdare, circum'damus, circu/n datis, not circumda' re^ cir- 
 cumda'mus, circumda'tin. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 53^ T/ie verbs of the first conjugation in the vocabularies (XL) should 
 he learned succesairdy in about three lessons, and for each recitation 
 j)aradi>inis according to the model of amfire should be irritten, together 
 with the English meanings, pointing out the stem, characteristic and end- 
 ing of the infinitive, as : 
 
 1. Accusare, belhlre, adorare, celebrare, circumdare, creare. 
 
 2. Dare, devdriire, durare, errare, Hare, implorare, interrogare. 
 
 3. Luborilre, nilre, pariire, placilre, postulare, stare. 
 
 1. 
 
 Translate into English : 
 
 1. Volo. Tentamus. Stamus. Erriitis. Narrat. iEdificat. Declaro 
 Piignant. Significatis. Impldrant. Properas. Parat. DesideriTmua 
 Muhas. Aratis. Volant. J>amus. Stat. Arant. Dat. Stas. Curant 
 Confirniatis. Emigrant. Portant. Vindiciimus. Muto. Placilmus. 
 Festluas. Tonat, 
 
 Translate into Latin : 
 
 2. We punish. Tliou declarest. He builds. It thunders. She helps. 
 They ])re}iare. He stands. We give. Von plougli. They hasten. It 
 flies. She desires. Tliev confirm. I desire. AVe imjdore. You stand. 
 Thou givest. He punislies. We err. They reconcile. Thou triest. You 
 confirm. We educate. He preserves. They spoil. Thou plunderest. 
 
 2. 
 
 Translate into English : 
 
 1. Accusat. Ap])ropin(iuJItis. Indicas. Cantas. Clamas. Cogitilmus. 
 Commendfitis. Creatis. Curo. Damnant. Delectat Deliberaiis. 
 Desperas. Disputo. Probumus. Ornas. Numerant. Navigat. Recu- 
 peras. Obtem[)eramus. Natis. Natatis. Imperas. Expecto. Regnas. 
 Stant. Vitupenltis. Repugnant. Liljcrilmus. Obtrectas. 
 
 Translate into Latin : 
 
 2. I reign. Tliou accusest. He approaches. You recover. lie obeys. 
 We swim. It delights. You command. I sail. You count. We indi- 
 cate. She sings. You approve. I think. You sh()Ut. They a<lorn. 
 She disymtes. Wed(>spair, 1 delibcrat^e. We create. You care. Thou 
 condemnest. They swim. We tell. Thou ]>raisest. He asks. You 
 BCold. They put to flight. She announces. We dedicate. 
 
 
 4 
 
 3. 
 
 Translate into English : 
 
 1 Violant. Tolero. Sp )liamus. Rebellas. Saltatis. Objurgat, 
 Mendamus. Mandfitis. Incitat. Invltat. Infirmas. Judico. Guberna- 
 mus Kxornant. Em(>ndatis. Denuntiat. Comparamus. Bellas. Abrc 
 gant Ambulatis. Adjudieamus. Celat. Caelant. Impero. Impetras. 
 Castigant. Evitads. Vitamus. Vetant. Instat. Abalienas. 
 
 Translate into Latin : 
 
 2 Thou workest. We mention. You fight. I recall. They enlarge. 
 Thou forbidst. It shows. We slander. I burden. She hastens. They 
 arm. Thev hope. I penetrate. He pleads. It makes famous. Thou 
 
 ■ deniest. They overcome. You dissemble. He explains. She recon- 
 cih'S. We decide. They disturb. We refuse. It is an obstacle. Thou 
 exceilest. We give (gratuitously). You wage a war. Thou finishest 
 the war. It blows. You put to flight. You forgive. He conceals. 
 We doubt. I approach. They besiege. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 THE FIRST DECLEXSIOX. 
 
 § 1 1. 1. The declension of the substantive distinguishes its 
 cases. Each number, singular and plural, has six cases : nomi- 
 native, GENITIVE, DATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, VOCATIVE and ABLATIVE. All 
 
 cases of the noun are formed l)y adding to its stem certain endings, 
 which are called ca»e-termiiiatioiis. 
 
 § 12. 2. The case-terminations of the 1st declension are the 
 
 following : 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 a 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ae 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ae 
 
 Ace. 
 
 am 
 
 Voc. 
 
 a 
 
 Abl. 
 
 a 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ae 
 
 arnm 
 
 is 
 
 as 
 
 ae 
 
 is 
 
 Tlie stem of a noun of the 1st declension is found by removing 
 the termination a of the nominative case. Thus the stem of mensa 
 is mens. By successively adding tlie different case-terminations 
 
18 
 
 THE FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 to the stem, tlius found, any given noun of this declcDsion may be 
 decHned, according to the following 
 
 Paradigm : 
 singut.ar. 
 
 Latin forms. Kitgli-^h eqiiivaUnts. 
 Norn, meusa the tcUile, a Uihle, 
 
 table. 
 Gen. mens.'B of thi'tahlc,ofa tnhle, 
 
 the table H. 
 Dai. mensae to thet<ihle,toa table. 
 Ace. iiionsam the table ^ a table. 
 Voc. iiKMisa table ! 
 Abl. nieiisa bi/ the table, by a Abl. iiieu.sis 
 
 table. 1 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 fAitin Jfjrms. £'ii</lish equiralenti. 
 Norn, mensae the tables, tables. 
 Gen. mi'iisiirum (f the tables, of 
 
 tables, 
 to the tables, to 
 
 tables, 
 the talfles, tables. 
 tables ! 
 
 by the tables, by 
 tables. 
 
 Dat. mensis 
 
 Aec. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 mcnsas 
 mensre 
 
 i;i. 3. The Latin cases (of any declension) have the fol- 
 lowing English significations : 
 
 a. The preposition of, or the possessive case, stands for tho 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 b. The j)re})osition to, for the dative. 
 
 c. The })rej)osition hi/, for the ablative. 
 
 d. The ohjective case without a preposition for the accusattve 
 These prepositions and the objective case are called the re;::il- 
 
 lar ICii^'lii^li ca!9ie-ei|llivaleiit!«. They are the same 
 in singular and [jlural. 
 
 Rem. 1. All Latin nouns of the 1st declension have the termination a in 
 the nom. sini^:. 
 
 Rem. 2. The termination of the ablative sing, is ft. Tliis case will 
 always be marked with the long sign, in order to distinguish it from 
 the nominative sing., which has the termination a. 
 
 Rem. 3. The dative and aijlative pluhal of all declensions are alike. 
 The nouns flia, the (hiughter, and dea, the goddess, generally have 
 tlie exceptional termination abus in these cmm^ {f lid bus and dedbus). 
 
 i i . 4. Many nouns of the Latin language occur in the 
 plural only, often corresponding to English singulars, as deliciae^ 
 delight, tenebrae, darkness, iniutiae, armistice. These nouns are 
 called pluralia lailllllll (sing. : plurale tantum). 
 
 Rem. 4. The list of pluralia tantum of the 1st declension IT. Voc. must 
 be committed. 
 
 § l»l, 5. Other uouqs have different significations in the shi 
 
 THE FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 19 
 
 guiar and plural, as : sixa. copra, abundance, plur. copiae, troops. 
 These are called liclerolo^ical IIOIIIIS. 
 
 Rem. 5. The list of heterological nouns of the Ist declension VII. Voc. 
 must be committed. 
 
 § 16. Proper Nouns of the First Declension. 
 
 6. The 1st declension contains the following classes of proper 
 iiaiiie!>i : 
 
 1. IN'iiialo names, mostly in ia, 4f Roman, as: Lucretia, 
 uEmilia, Jnlia, Tallia, Terentia, Cloelia, Licia, Cornelia, Virginia, Bor- 
 teii4a.Clrnpritra, d-c. 
 
 2. i% allien of y:o«ldesses, as: Minerva, Diana, Vesta, Lat< ma, 
 Froserpina, Flora, Ponwua, and the plurals Fariae(\hii Furies), Gratiae 
 (the Graces), and J//^v?t' (the Muses). 
 
 :j. I\aiii4'«j» <>1" siiairs, extremely seldom in za, as : tinrta, bxala, 
 Dohibdla, Nuiita,yirca, Porsenna, Pansa, Catillna (Catiline), Jugurtha^ 
 Agrippa, Seneca, Scaevola, GaWa, &c. ^ 
 
 4. i>aiii<«s of nalions, necer inia,^^'. BeIga,iiBe\gii^n, Persa, 
 a Persian, Nnmida, a Numidian, Gelta, a Celt, Scytha, a Scythian, Bar- 
 
 mdta, a Sarmatian. • c? • 
 
 5. ]\'aiiie*!i of <;oiiiiti'ies, almost all in ia, as: Hispania, fepain, 
 Graeeia, Greece, Italia, Italv, Germania, Germany, Gallia, Gaul, Britan- 
 via Britain, Caledonia, Scotland, Ilibernia, IrcXan^X, Pa nnonia, Hungary 
 ISicllia, Sicily, Lusitania, Portugal, Persia, Numidia, SardinUi, Europa, 
 
 Asia, Afrii'a, dc. ^ • m 
 
 a. Vaiiie*» of cities in « and w. as: Roma, Uome, Troja, Troy, 
 Abdera, Alexandria, Apollonia, Alesia, Capua, II"radea, Massiha, Itica, 
 Numantia, Sparta, and the pluralia tantum, Athena^, Athens, I/iebae, 
 Thebes, Si/racusae, Svracuse, Cannae, Thermopylae. 
 
 7. A ft'w names of I'ivers, as Allia, Trebia, Eimera, bequana, 
 Garuniiia, Vistula. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 r^ Commit the nouns of the first declension I. Vocab. in about thres 
 snccessice lessons, and write the follotcing paradigms, including the 
 English equivalents, as : 
 
 1 Affricola, aqua. Belga, bestia, colonia, copia, corona, controversia. 
 
 2. Cura, dea, epistola, filia, gratia, Numida, and tlie plurale tantum 
 Athena). 
 
 1. 
 Translate into English : 
 
 1 NumfP. Grfficia. Iliberniam. Furias. Ir?p. SyracusJirum. Ini- 
 micitiis. Lunam. Culpa. Blanditias. Catenarum. Fahulis. Flanl 
 m;e Forma. Fug;r. Herbas. Horse. Ignominiam. Injunas Inoi^a. 
 Discordiam. Audaci*. dementia. Comoedi^. Fossas. Divitiis._ lie- 
 Uciuiarum. Scalis. Tenebras. Manubus. Nundinal, ^uptla^um 
 
20 
 
 THE FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 fnsiilas. Copias. Cupediam. Cupediigi. Littomm. Littnris. Incolas 
 Justitia. lJistori;e. Causam. Aras. Alis. DUdgnitia. LacrimfirLmi 
 Funiinas. Contumacia. AtjiKe. 
 
 Translate into Latin : 
 
 2. By eloquence. The islands. Of envv. To an^er. An annistire 
 (ohj*). Of enmity. Letters. Of the laddVr. Of beasts, 'i'o farnirrs. 
 By a chain. Of a loss. To fables. An ambuscade {obJX 'I'o disobe- 
 dience. Of an imnii<rrant. By the causes. Of tears. Of an intrigue. 
 'J\) darkness. To the crowns. A foreigner's. The dinner (olj.). The 
 Persians. Rumors. To tlie immigrants. The care (obj.). The wing 
 (ohj.). Controversies (o'j.). To a p<Mind. The ditches (ohj.). Of youth. 
 Tlie goddesses (obj.). Foreigners (obj.). To an armistice. To the cradle. 
 To tortune. By a farmer. By foily. Friendship {ohj.). To a wing. 
 To riches. By disgrace. A farmer's. By letters. By provisions. To 
 tears. Catiline ! Of crowns. To justice. Fables. The Belirians. 
 Enmity {obj.}. I'inna's. By cares. the foreigner (obj.). O fortune! 
 Ot a thn^at. Persia {obj). By goddess<'s. Of the Belgians. Of a flight. 
 Ot the flatteries. Of the wedding. Numidians {obj.). Laziness {obj.). 
 O Persian ! To youth. By a slander. Of anger. By Numidia 
 
 2. 
 
 Translate into English : 
 
 1. Lucretia. Syracusas. Musis. Catilln.T. Luxuriam. Ignornnti». 
 Agricolarum. Ali.nigenas. Acjuilis. Calunmite. Defibus. Audaciam. 
 Ignominifi. ^rumnis. Assech-e. Colonias. Fallacite. Fabuh'irum 
 El(Miuentiara. Avaritiae. Bestifirum. Filiam. Adoiesc-ntifB. Persis. 
 Injuria. Contunieliam. P'erias. Athenjlrum. Indutiis. Minarum. 
 Scopas. Fortunain. Operis. Coi)iarum. Opera. Cannas. Copiis 
 Incolarum. Invidiae. Libras. Homiclda». Justitiam. Doctrina. An- 
 noUcT. Advenis. Amicitiae. Celtas. Ualliani. Italia. Discipliua?. 
 Corruptela?. Concordia. 
 
 Translate into Latin : 
 
 2. Of Gaul. By infamy. O Numidians ! To water. Fortune (obj ) 
 Seneca's. By injuries. O daughter I To beasts. T ho axrvs {obj.). Of 
 the hens. Flatteries. By firmness. The Belgians (ryftj.) O disobedience ' 
 To the glory. Of slander. By controversies. The beast (obj.). O slan- 
 ders ! To the lances. Of chains. The immigrants. O beast ! By a 
 crown. The history {obj.). fc>idly's. Of the farmers. O daugliters! 
 By the islands. The hours {obj.}. To a cause. Of a wing. Bv a letter. 
 Hens. Ot the hours. By indolence. To the dinners. The moon's. 
 By tables. Of folly. By expenses. O goddess! To a foreigner 
 Ditches. Of expenses. The inhabitants. fanners ! To the Beigianet 
 Ot the fame. Alien's. O anger! Harmony (6»/i?.). By the friendship 
 Ot cares. To diligence. O Persians! Syracuse ((yW.). To the ' ^bit 
 ants. Darkness {obj.). By the wedding. 
 
 • The noun, after which the word obj. is placed, Is understood to be In the obyectica 
 
 THE PREDICATIVE PHRASE. 
 
 21 
 
 3. 
 
 Translate into English : 
 1 Fabula. Numidis. Numidia. Persiam. Persae. Caledoni^. Luxuna 
 Ins^^ Incolis. La^titiam. Horis. Feminarum. Fuga. As^uti^^ Co^ 
 tumeliam Cella. Asseclis. Filiarum. Inopiae. Hammas. Catenis. 
 S^ Re li uias. Scalas. Tenebrarum. Indutias Annonain. 
 CoDi-r' Copiarim. Inimicitiarum. Fiduciam. Bibhotheca. Alieni- 
 geS .' Column^rum. Nuptiis. Scythas. Sicilia. ^^l^^^^^iam. Ado^ 
 scntia. DesidicT. Hastas. Injuriis. Iracundiam. Lun*. Ararum. 
 Quadrigas. Insidiiirum. 
 
 Translate into Latin : m ^» 
 
 o Iniuries (c>W) Ovoutli! Of the vacation. By plants. To dis- 
 ^race ^Envv {obJ)- O glorv ! Of a hen. By the inhabitant. To cares 
 fraNumidiin.' By Numidia. To the Muses. ^^-^--^--^/^^ 
 distance (.^j.). By anger. By Athens. To the hours. Otntamj^^^^^^ 
 threat Ui) By Numidians. Letters. iWoxy {obj.). Of the injuries. 
 By d scS' Looses. Of Persia. Lances W.>. ^--->' ^ "^l^Z'i 
 Of the mocm. Of the cradle. An hours. To the want ^^^"|^: f^ 
 Persian's Bv indolence. Of laziness. O rumors ! lo the deligiit. 
 o"':hs!%h/fable(.6;-.). Of an ambus.ule. :^^ ^y:^^^;^^''^::^, 
 Bv history. The crowns. Of the remams. lo the islands Athena 
 {6hj.). Eloquence {obj.). To friendship. By enyy. Of the ditches. 
 The Graces {obj.). 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 THE PREDICATIVE PHRASE. 
 
 R 1 7 1 A SENTENCE cousists of PHRASES, and a phrase of 
 words. There are three phrases : 1. The predicative. 2. The 
 OBJECTIVE. 3. The attributive. 
 
 § 1 8 2 A phrase is the combination of two words, 
 which stand in a certain relation to each other. The one is called 
 the governing, the other the dependent word. _ 
 
 S 10 3 A phrase, in which a noun in the nominative is con- 
 nected with a Qnite verb (§ 7, R. 3), is called predicaliTr 
 The noun in the nominative is the governing word, and is caiied 
 the subject. The finite verb is the dependent word, and is 
 called the predicate ; as : 
 
 Amicitia delectat, friendship delights '^.-^^'''^lZ^^ZtrZ^ dS 
 Agiicola arat, the farmer ploughs; Agmdas arant, the farmers plougn. 
 
1 
 
 THE OBJECTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 23 
 
 9'> 
 
 THE PREDICATIVE PHRASE. 
 
 / 
 
 PHEDiCiTFs hnite»erb8 d<tea<, «j-a^^, /m<, «,-««« are the 
 
 ^*'™./. Iff '"'?'"' '""■'■ J''" '"■ in'Hoato,! by a rnovoov as- Ar lovo. 
 
 ex ,ro^^ I Tl s F ^M i'i' f""""/"":? "" 'I^-^"^ ^-''''X'^l'v «^^ ■">* 
 J.jectsL.'e^ro^::^^ettp\';4fer ^^"' "'"^""^^ '^ 
 § 30. 4. T!,e subject in a finite predicative phrase (for predi- 
 cative pl.rases with non-fi„i.e predicates see B. Ill), is alwavs in .he 
 NOM.xATiv., s,„g,d.-.r or plural, and the predicate agrees with its 
 M>hj,.ct m NfMBKu and p.rson. Hence, if the sul.ject is a n,.un 
 ... the singular, the predicate is in the 3. person singular; if.hesul.- 
 ject IS a noun in the plural, the predicate is in the 3. pers. plural. 
 
 ^""l f ti^.T"'' V".f' ■"" J'"'' havon.cir predicates in the prniUL in 
 Latmhoush their English equivalents „«vv be in he sno. ^n 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Tmndate into English : 
 
 15. ^^.ni^^:^ ''T^i.J^^^J^^'^ 14..P.u;ll.saltant. 
 18. Sententia rej.uonat. 19. Pec iniaTin' t' on At?-"^''' ^^''''''''• 
 
 27. Pa !;:r ^S^^- 28:tal:^XSt.^ir^edS^dcS 'l^T 
 pedife invitant. 31. FortGna variat. -^*^- ^"Pedia dcbilitat. dO. Cu 
 
 Translate into Latin : 
 
 er. approach. 4. The poot doubts. H. Tlie^oets doabf r W^'P" 
 explores. 7 A SRilor «linntu « c -V ^ ''% i'"<^''» a<^ii"i. b. Wisdom 
 
 10 Tlie farmed works 1 Tb!' f "^ '^'^"Z' ^' ^^^^^"^ despairs. 
 1^ Ti!.> ^*"^ .**■' ^^orks. 11. Tlie fanners work. 12. Knmitv 1 nrna 
 
 cide. 10. 1 he Belgian emigrates. 17. The Belgians emigrate. 18 Teare 
 
 abound. 19. Eloquence makes famous. 20. The earth abounds. 
 21. Friendship hopes. 22. Treachery resists. 28. Punishment corrects. 
 24. The provinces conspire. 25. The queen repeals. 26. The eagles 
 devour. 27. Modestv excuses. 28. Pride accuses. 29. Rules educate. 
 30 Arrows kill. 31.' Life lasts. 32. The cradle jars (crrpf/r^). 33. Tlie 
 funeral tires. 34. The vacation refreshes. 35. Enmity disturbs. 
 3G. Darkness reigns. 37. The troops des]>air. 38. Daintiness eflfemi 
 nates. 39. Dainties weaken. 40. The workmen demand. 
 
 2. 
 
 Translate into English : 
 1. Mercatura ditat. 2. Militia nobilitat. 3. Mora fatigat. 4. Nautaa 
 cantant. 5. Portfc cre]\int {to jar). G. Provinci.-e rebellant. 7. Negli- 
 gcntia di^pravat. 8. Perseverantia superat. 9. Philosophia probat. 
 10. Pirata^ su])plicant. 11. Prudentia vetat. 12. Roma regnat. 13. Sar 
 gittfB vulnerant. 14. Numidre equitant. 15. Silva tiagrat. 16. Statuae 
 exornant. 17. Undse sonant. 18. Piratre vastant. 19. Tenebra? obstant. 
 20. Svracusse repugnant. 21. Quadrigae festinant. 22. Nuptiae appro- 
 piniiuant. 23. Mi"n:e conturbant. 24. Excubian vigilant. 25. Copia 
 adjuvat. 20. CopiaB dimicant. 27. Eloquentia superat. 28. Horae 
 volant. 
 
 Translate into Latin : 
 1. Avarice disgraces. 2. Boldness reigns. 3. Darkness conceals. 
 4. The exp(^nses are an obstacle. 5. The pirate kills. G. The pirates kill. 
 7. Robberv {rapJna) ceases. 8. Robberies cease. 9. The Persian wounds. 
 10. The Persians wound. 11. Intrigues triumph. 12. The woman 
 scolds. 13. The women scold. 14. Indulgence sixjils. 15. The chain 
 burdens. 16. The chains burden. 17. Victory makes famous. 18. Vic- 
 tories make famous. 19. Life lasts. 20. Spain rebels. 21. Modesty 
 reconciles. 22. Deserters report. 23. The inhabitants persevere. 24. Jus- 
 tice demands. 25. The daughter greets. 2G. The daughters greet. 
 27. The Persians sail. 28. An ambuscade harasses. 29. The Vistula 
 overflows. 30. Wisdom doubts. 31. The Numidian dissembles. 32. Nu 
 midia obevs. 33. The poet appeases. 34. The armistice releases. 
 35. Provisions abound. 36. Enmity accuses. 37. Syracuse invites 
 38. Labor ceases. 39. The workmen despair. 40. Luxury effeminates. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 THE OBJECTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 §21. 1. A phrase- is called objective, if its governing 
 word is a verb (iu any of its forms), and its dependent word 
 a SUBSTANTIVE, as: 
 
24 
 
 THE OBJECTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 To devastate the land, terram vastare; — (he) renews the 
 frietuhhip, amicitiara renovat; — {you) cor>riqyt nature, natu- 
 ram vitiatis. 
 
 Rem, 1. Here tlie verbs rast'ire, renorat, vitiatis are the oovETfNrNG, and 
 the nouns trrrom, ainicitiam, naturam the dependent words of the 
 phrases, which therefore are OIUECTIVE. 
 
 § ^^J. 2. The dependent substantive in tlic objective phrase is 
 called the objCH't, which in Latin TG^;!:\i\^\'\y precedes its p^ov- 
 erning verb. The object must always be in one of the oblique 
 cases. 
 
 Rem. 2. All capos, with exception of nomtxatite and vocative, are 
 culled obliqiK' cases. In translatinic an English ol)jective ])hrase 
 into Latin, beginners must render the reguhir English case-equiva- 
 lents (ji I:}) by tlie corres]>ondi ng Latin cases, and conversely, as: 
 
 CiEMTiVE: to accuse [somebody] of extraca(jance,\i\iein\)iiTi\.ni\dd 
 accusare ; 
 
 D.vTivp]: [he] conforms to iiafnre, natiirie obtem])erat : 
 
 Accusative : \th\y\ decide the coutrovtrsf/, controversiam dijudi- 
 cant ; 
 
 Ablative:: [?re] reconrilc hy clemcnry, chMnentifi concilinmu«. 
 
 Begiimers must be careful, not to translate the English objective 
 case without a |)re])Osition bv the Latin nominative. 
 Rem. 3. The NUMr.Efi of the governing verb (whether singular or plural) 
 lias no influence on the number of the object, and a noun in the 
 singular may depend on a verb in the singular or ])hiral, and a 
 noun in the plural may depend on a verb in either number. 
 
 § 5J3. 3. The oljjective phrase has this in common with the 
 PREDICATIVE plirasc, that both consist of a noun and a verb. But 
 they differ in this, that in the predicative phrase the noun governs, 
 and the verb is dependent, while in the objective phrase the verb 
 governs, and the nouu is dependent. 
 
 Rem. 4. Row ran ire see, whether a given phrase is predlratire or objec- 
 tice ? In Latin we see this by the case of the nonn. If the noun 
 is in the nominative, it must 'be the SURIECT, and hence the phrase 
 must be predicative. If the noun is in an oblique case, it must 
 be an object (J^ 22), and the ])hrase is OB.nxTlVE. 
 
 In English we likewise may recognize the phrase as objectivb 
 bv the case-equivalent of the iiourt, if the latter is connected with x 
 rREPOsrnoN {of, to, by). If this is not the case, we generally see by 
 the arrangement of the words, whether the phrase is objective or 
 l)redi<'ativ<', since in English the objective case gin\t'r&\\y follows the 
 verb, while the nominative precedes it,* Hence if in English a 
 
 ♦ In Uie inverted arrangement the noininRtlvo may foVmp. or the objective caae pr» 
 csde it. But tlie rej?ular English arraiigemeut is that iudicated in the text. 
 
 THE OBJECTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 d5 
 
 rerb is followed by .a noun, the latter must be presumed to be in 
 the objective case. 
 
 § 21. 4. Objective phrases may be conjugated like verbs, and 
 the governing verb in an objective phrase may assume any form, 
 without affecting the grammatical form (case and number) of the 
 ol)ject, as: 
 
 A. iNFiNmvE : Pugnas amare, to love battles. 
 present indicative. 
 
 SINGrrLAR. 
 
 1. Pugnas amo, 1 love battles, 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. Pugnas amamus, we love battles. 
 
 2. Pugnas amas, thou lovest battles. | 2. Pugnas amatis, you love battles. 
 
 3. Pugnas amat, lie loves battles. 3. Pugnas amant, they love battles. 
 
 B. Infinitive : Culpje damnfire, to convict of guilt. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. Culpa? danmo, I convict of guilt. 
 
 2. Culpje damnas, thou convictest of 
 
 guilt. 
 
 3. Culpje damnat, he convicts of 
 
 guilt. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 culpae damnamus, we convict ofguUt. 
 cidpjT? damnatis, you convict of guilt, 
 culpa? damnant, th£y convict of 
 guilt. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Conjugate the folloiring objective phrases with their English eouify- 
 al( II ts according to the paradigms § 24 : 
 
 Provinciam gubernare, to govern a provi7ice—-pTovmcisi8 gubernare to 
 govern provinces. ' 
 
 Riipina? condenmfire, to convict of a ro&ft^r^— rapinarum condemnare 
 to ronrirt of robberies. * 
 
 Keguhp ol)temi)erare, to conform to the rwfc— regulis obtemperare, to 
 confitrm to the rules. 
 
 Sagittii necare, to kill by an arrow— &a.g\it\s necare, to kill by arrows. 
 
 A. a. Object in the accusative. 1. Amicitiam conturbat. 
 2. Ignorainiam tolerare. 3. R(^gulam abrogamus. 4. deltas superant.. 
 5. Minervam adoramus. (). Piratas dissipatis. 7. Coronam adjudicat.' 
 8. Patriam amplificat. 9. Scytham castlgat. 10. Statuam calamus. 
 11. Culpam celsitis. 12. Gloriam comparfire. 13. Perfidiam confirmas. 
 14. C'oloniam servat. 15. Patriam contaminStis. IG. Ignaviam vitu- 
 l-ero. 17. Concordiam turbatis. 18. Filiam educat. 19. Grammaticam 
 enarrare. 20. Nugas excusant. 
 
 b. Object in tile dative. 21. Deabvis sacrificare. 22. Dese sacii 
 
hi 
 
 THE OBJECTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 ficas. 23. Porte dare. 24. PoHtis dat. 25. Minervae dedicant. 26. 
 Natfine obtcmi)eranius. 
 
 c. OiUECT IN THK GENITIVE AND AHi.ATlVE. 27. Avariti.T arcusjlro. 
 28. Injustitiae acciisilmii.s. 2iK Cniitiinuich« accusat. o<>. Nt'uligeuti.e 
 damiiiire. 31. Perfidia' condcinnant. 32. Injustitiri abalk-nare. 33. 
 Litteris coinmcndaro. 34. Perseveraiitia suporat. 35. (iraiia conoilias. 
 
 30. Victoriis pra'stat. 
 
 B. 1. To refute a slander. 2. To ])ul)lisli slanders. 3. Th.-y burn 
 Troy. 4. You disturb the t'rit'ndsbip. 5. He endures wron<;8. 0. W o 
 teinii confidtMice. 7. You S(^parate tin; country. 8. Thou recallrst the 
 sailors. 
 
 4)ai' 
 1). She renews discord. 10. We censure the intrigue. 11. 
 You reconcile the Celts. 12. I recover the money. 13. They <,-reet the 
 Nuinidlans. 14. To r -fuse the permission. 15. Thou refutest the 
 opinion. 10. He divul'^^es the letter. 17. tShe denounces the inhabit- 
 ants. 18. They demand justice. 19. We attack Rome. 20. Thou 
 committest the treachery. 21. He tells nonsense. 22. We build a 
 library. 23. You enter "the ^ate. 24. I excuse the wrongs. 25. Ho 
 adopts the poet. 20. 1 chisel a statue. 27. You celebrate a victory. 
 28. Thev surround the murderer. 20. He recommends clemency. ;{0. 
 I convoke the inhabitants. 31. We commit to memory. 32. 1 recom- 
 mend to the Persians. 33. Y'ou explain to the Celt. 34. It is an ol)- 
 stacle to glory. 35. He accuses of folly. 30. They convict of disobedi- 
 ence. 37. He obtains by b(jldness. 38. Y<m reign by discord. 30. She 
 appeases by tears. 40. 'They enter by a laddiT. 
 
 ' 0. OB.IECTIVE, MINGLED WITH PREDICATIVE PHRASES. 1. PersaS 
 
 adjuvat. 2. PersjB adjuvant. 3. Piratae circumdant. 4. Pirfuas 
 circumdant. 5. lieglnam condemnant. 0. Reglua condemnat. 7. 
 Roniam gubernat. 8. R(mm gubernat. 9. Nautas implorat. 10. 
 Nautie impldrant. 11. Catillnam increpat. 12. Catilina increpat. 13. 
 idven;e necant. 14. Advenas necant. 
 
 1. He wounds the Persian. 2. The Persian wounds. 3. He implores 
 the queen. 4. The queen implores. 5. Athens condemns. 0. He con- 
 deums Atlu>ns. 7. Tliev save the sailors. 8. The sailors save. 9. Ho 
 demands justice. 10. Justice demands. 11. They devour the beast. 
 12. Tha beast devours. 13. He adorns the statue. 14. The statue 
 adorns. 15. He invites the Belgians. 10. The Belgians invite. 
 
 2. 
 
 A. a. Accusative as object. 1. Insidias paras. 2. Nuptias ex- 
 pectfimua. 3. Sententiam declaramus. 4. Gratiam speratis. 5. Poetas 
 relegunt. 0. Poetas relego. 7. Poetam relego. 8. Vitam conservas. 
 9. Pldlosophiam laudat. 10. Historiam tractamus. 11. Litteras ex- 
 
 Invidiam superant. 13. Culpam probare. 14. Tristitiam 
 
 Angustias vitat. 10. Tabulam vindicanms. 17. Pecuniam 
 
 Calmnnias tolero. 19. Pugnam nmovat. 20. Alesiam 
 
 oo 
 
 pectfltis. 12. 
 simulas. 15. 
 servant. 18. 
 oppugnamus. 
 
 I). Dative as object. 21. Reglnfc obtem])eramus. 
 mandamus. 23. Incolis nuntifimus. 24. Deabus consecrare. 
 consecras. 20. Belgis nuntiiltis. 
 
 c. (iENiTiVE AND ABLATIVE AS OBJECTS. 27. CalumnifP accusarc. 
 28. Injuiiaium accusat. 29. Baplnae damnat. 30. Diligentia pra3Staa 
 
 Memori;e 
 25. De<e 
 
 I 
 
 THE OBJECTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 27 
 
 31 Hasta necant. 32. Herbis sanant. 33. Blanditiis concUiat. 34. In- 
 dulgcntia dej)ravatis. 35. Astutia repuo-nat 
 
 d. OBJECTIVE AND PREDICATIVE PHRASES. 36. Assecks celat. 87. 
 Asseche celant 38 ^cytiui interrogat. 39. Scytham interroirat. 40. 
 liha adorat 41 Hham adorat. 42. Tram excitat. 43. Ira excitat 
 44. liraias (list ur bat. 4o. Piratie dist urban t 
 
 r\£'J' ^' T?' ''''^'' niKASEs 1 I prepare the wedding. 2. He desires 
 
 riches. 3.1 hey prove the slander. 4. I overcome the Persian 5 I 
 
 overcome the Persians. 0. We overcome the Persians. 7. She expects 
 
 Invnrt ^ t7 T'"'- i''^'^^^:. ^- It delights the poet. 10. To create 
 
 ^ Tlu 7;. .y ''^' banish the foreigner. 12. To give permission. 13. 
 
 1 hey excuse the guilt. 14. She prei>ares a dinner 15. Thev carry the 
 
 l»o..t> 10. Thou distarbest the country. 17. TJiev occupy Rome. 18. 
 
 W e observe the stars. 19. You violate the armistice. 20. I hire the 
 
 fTi?.hf'"*'o., l\ "^ «^a»"'^^s the causes. 22. W^e put the pirates to 
 
 ihjrliL 23. riiey capture Troy. 24. Thou conquerest the Numidians. 
 
 \ \^<; conquer .Numidia. 20. He disputes the opinion. 27. Thou de- 
 
 ^!.^fn ^^^l^^^^ill^^^'^'^^t'-^- 28. You desecrate the altar. 29. He denies 
 
 juhtic. 60. vV e weaken the Persians. 
 
 31. To sacrifice to the Furies. 32. We sacrifice to a goddess. 33. 
 He gives to the daughters. 34. They give to the daughters. 35. We 
 give to the Celts. 30. I give to the daughter. 37. To gi?e to the Graces! 
 o8. He minist(.'rs {7nun.tmre) to the queen. 39. We minister to a queen. 
 40. I in, Ulster to the Muses. 41. He accuses of robbery. 42. To accuse 
 aJ ""ll^ '!^'- f- '^y^: ^'^"'^ ^^ robberies. 44. They convict of a slan- 
 tLf A'T P^ '"''•' ^'^' '''^' ^^^ treachery. 46. We approach by the 
 torcst 47. You e.Kcite by arrogance. 48. Thou excellest by the toAgue. 
 4J Ihey appease by tears. 50. You reign by corrui)tiou 
 cr^t.rT'll^ 1;"? P15EDICATIVE PHRASES. 51. He censures the Bel- 
 gians. ov. 1 he Belgians censure. 53. They rebuke the sailors. 54. 
 Ihe sailors rebuke. 5o. Tiiey kill the pirates. 50. The pirates kill. 
 57. He calls t.u la. 58. Sulla calls. 59. It tires the poet. 00. The 
 poet tires. 01. He helps the sailor. 62. The sailor helps. 
 
 2. Pugnam 
 
 Pugnam re- 
 
 Pugnam re- 
 
 11. Pugnas 
 
 14. Silvam 
 
 3. 
 
 A. a. Accusative as object. 1. Victoriam nuntiat. 
 nKJusamus. 3. Pugnara evitat. 4. Victorias nuntio. 5 
 cuso. 6. Pugnas evitaut. 7. Victoriam nuntiamus. 8. 
 cusiimus. 9. Pugnam evitatis. 10. Victorias nuntias. 
 evitas. 12. Copias convocat. 13. Mercaturam laudat. 
 intro. 
 
 6. Dative as object. 15. Cinnae obtemperat. 16. Cinn^e obtempe- 
 rant. U. Regin;e miuistrant (to minister). 18. Regime ministratis. 
 l.i. .dinerva? sacrificat. 20. Belgis donare. 21. Celtis narras. 22. 
 rums sacrineatis. 
 
 c. Uexitive AND ABLATIVE AS OBJECTS. 23. PerfiditB damnare. 24 
 imprudentue accusare. 25. Elegantia pr^rstant. 26. Calumniis accu- 
 Batis. 2i. Controven-iisdisturbant. 28. Hastis vulnerant. 29. Modestia 
 concdiat. 30. Perseverantia superas. 
 
 d. OBJECTIVE AND PREDICATIVE PHRASES. 31. Annonam important. 
 6^. Annonam vastat. 33. Controversite ceseant. 34. Controversial 
 
jm 
 
 28 
 
 THE ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 THE ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 2d 
 
 dijudicat. 35. Fup^am simulant. 30. Fuiram colat. 37. Coloni.p obtem- 
 IHjrant. 38. Asseclas rev(X!Jiiit. 31). Assocl.n robdlant. 40. Belgam rele- 
 gat. 41. Numuliain rtTuiu'rat. 4'2. Nuniida? recuperant. 
 
 B. //. Ou.iE( TIVK PiiK ASKS. 1. He biims thc letter. 2. "VVe s<']iarate 
 the followers. 3. Thou r«'tiisest the remains. 4. He confirms the troops. 
 5. He chaiiires nature. 0. To save a deserter. 7. I endure the loss. 
 8.' Thou plunderest the altar. 9. She suri)asses the queen. 10. ^Ve 
 carry the jm-ture. 11. You avt'nire an injury. 12. They observe the 
 shores. 13. Thou ret'us^'st relief. 14. To make Cinna famous. 15. We 
 explore Numidia. 1<». You release the Celts. 17. They excuse eruelty. 
 18. It indicates ncirli^once. 10. They inhabit Asia. 20. He treats jdii- 
 losophy. 21. We praise tlie scholarship. 22. She ministers to the god- 
 desses.* 23. They conform to nature. 24. Ho conforms to prudence. 
 25. You object (rcpttf/n'irc) to cruelties. 2(J. He objt'cts to military ser- 
 vice. 27. they dictate {imperil re) to Spain. 28. You dictate to Thebes. 
 29. They accus'e of pride. 30. You show by the rules. 31. We sin by 
 nature. 32. They enter by the gate. 33 they fight by land. 
 
 h. Obje( TiVE .VXD riiKDTCATivE PiiRASKs. 34. Friendship delights. 
 85. He refuses the friendship. 30. The enmity ceases. 37. He feigns 
 friendshij). 38. He avoids the ambu.s<'ade. 39. We renew the diScord. 
 40. Discord reigns. 41. The farmers labor. 42. They plough the land. 
 43. The Celts conspire. 44. They reconcile the Celts. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 THE ATTRIBUTIVE nillASE. 
 
 § 15^5. 1. A pbrase is called alt ribiitive, if its governing 
 'vord is a xoux, and its dependent word either another noun, or an 
 ADJECTIVE,* as : 
 
 Naidae tabula, the table of the sailor ; 
 
 Fer,sarum victoria, the victory of the Persians. 
 
 In these attributive phrases the genitives naidae ^v\& Permrum 
 are tlie dependent, and the nouns tabula and victoriae the govern- 
 ing words. 
 
 § iJO. 2. The dependent word in the attributive phrase is 
 called the aUrilMltC, which in Latin may cither precede or 
 follow its governing noun. But if the at.tril)ute is a genitive (atr 
 
 • We consider in this leason those attributive plirases only, which have a vovn in the 
 OKNiTiTK as ultributo. 
 
 tributive genitive), it more generally precedes, than follows the 
 governing noun. 
 
 Kern 1. The attributive and predicative i>hrases are distinguished from 
 each other bv the DEPENDHNT word, which in the former is a noun, 
 and in the latter a FINITE VEKB. while the GOVERNING words in 
 both phrases are NOUNS. 
 
 § 27, 3. The English case-equivalent of the Latin attributive 
 genitive is either the preposition o/, or the possessive case, as : 
 
 Naulaefdia, the daughter of the sailor, or the sailor's daughter. 
 
 § 98. 4. The governing noun in the attributive phrase may be 
 in any case or number, without affecting the genitive case or the 
 number of the attribute, and attributive phrases may be declined 
 in a similar manner, as objective phrases are conjugated (§ 24), 
 as : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. FUiae cura, the daughter's care, or the care of the 
 
 daughter. 
 Gen. Filiae curae, of the daughter's care, or of the care of the 
 
 daughter. 
 Dat. Fdiae curae, to the daughter's care, or to the care of the 
 
 daughter. 
 Ace. Fdiae curam, the daughter's care, or the care of tha 
 
 daughter {obj. case). 
 Voc. Fdiae cura, O care of the daughter! 
 Abl. Fdiae curd, by the daughter's care, or by the care of the 
 
 daughter. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Norn. Fdiae curae, the daughter's cares, or the cares of the 
 
 daughter. 
 Gen. Fdiae curdrum, of the daughter's cares, or of the carea 
 
 of the daughter. 
 Dat. Fdiae curis, to the daughter's cares, or to the cares of the 
 
 daughter. 
 Ace, Fdiae curas, the daughter's cares, or the cares of th« 
 
 daughter {of)j. case). 
 VoG, Fdiae curae, cares of the daughter I 
 
m 
 
 80 
 
 THE ATTRIBUTIVE rilRASE. 
 
 THE SECOND CONJUGATION". 
 
 31 
 
 Abl. Filiae curis, by tlic daugliter's cares, or by the cares of the 
 daughter. 
 
 Rem. 2. In tlie same way we doclino attributive phrases, if the attribute 
 is in the pluhal, as ^^om. jilidrnui cura, tlu; cure of the dauij^hters ; 
 G€?i. filidrum Clime, of the care of the daughters; Ace. filiarum 
 curaiit, the care of the daughters, &c. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 ^^ Deri in e the following attributive phrases according to the paradigm 
 § 28, togdher \dth the English equiv<(lents : 
 
 1. Keginae gratia, the favor of the queen. 
 
 2. PiratiTrum jTOjna, the punixhment of the pirates. 
 
 3. Puelhe hicrimae, t/ie tears of the girl. 
 
 4. Indutiilrum causa, tlie cauae of the armistice, 
 
 5. Sulla' villa. Solid's coJiritry-satt. 
 
 6. Incolaruni senteutia, the opinioti of tlie inhdbitarUs. 
 
 1. 
 
 A. 1. PoctcT corona. 2. Rapinarum (rohberg) poena. 3. Incoliirura 
 fania. 4. Lunae distantia. 5. Fortunie causa. 0. Victoriaruni gloria. 
 
 7. Bestifirum catcrvie. 8. Dearum statu;e. 1). Agricohr diligcntia. 10. 
 Numidarum sagitt;e. 11. Poetie eloquentia. 12. Persiiruni inimicitiis. 
 13. Belgaruni ainicitiir. 14. Incolaruni injuriis. 15. Coena? reliquiis. 
 16. Poeta? epistolis. 17. P(;rsarum divitiis. 18. Germania? silvas. 19. 
 Terra? naturam. 20. Pirat;e rajunas. 21. C'opiarum ])ra»(lani. 22. Sta- 
 tufirum reli(]uias. 23. ScythiTruni saevitiam. 24. Mora? causani. 25. 
 Persaruni victorias. 20. Syracusarum nicrcatura. 27. Agricolaruni 
 inopia. 28. Pof'tu' justitiii. 29. Natura? regulis. 30. Scytharuni igno- 
 rautijl. 31. Nautaruni invidia. 32. Modestiaj fama. 33. Belg«Trum con- 
 cordiii. 34, CinnfP exse(iuiis. 
 
 B. 1. The i)overty of the Numfdians. 2. The injuries of the ix)et. 
 3. The daughttT of a foreigner. 4. The lances of the Persians. 5. The 
 immigrant's money. 0. The queen's clemency. 7. The sailor's riches. 
 
 8. The obedience of the daughter. 9. The history of the Persians. 10. 
 The rules of nature. 11. Athens' treachery. 12. Cinna's cruelty. 13. 
 Of the Belgian's daughter. 14. Of Persia's riches, lo. Of the poet's 
 history. 10. Of tin; queen's justice. 17. Of the obstinacy of tlie 
 colonies. 18. To the glory of Syracuse. 19. To Home's memory. 20. 
 To the «liscords of the i)rovinces. 21. To the distance of the islands. 
 22. To the herbs of the earth. 23. To the tears of women. 24. The 
 guilt iobj.) of the pirates. 25. The Belgian's letter (o^j.). 20. The banks 
 [obj.) of the Sequanu. 27. The rules {o/j.) of discipline. 28. The causes 
 iobj.) of envy. 29. The forms {(jbj.) of the letters {ff the alphabet). 30. 
 The folly (obj.) of the Numidians. 31. By the knowledge of sciences. 
 32. By tlie flight of the Persians. 33. By the dinner of the sailors. 34. 
 By the life of the qiieen. 35. By the vigilance of the watches. 30. By 
 tlie enmity of the Persians. 37. By the statues of the goddesses. 38. 
 By the j urate's booty. 39. By the discord of the troo^js. 40. By the 
 rules of the school. 41. By the justice of the cause. 42. By Catiline'i 
 
 treachery. 43. Bv the industry of the workmen. 44. By the labor of 
 the inliabitants. 45. By the queens of Britain. 40. By the riches of 
 Syracuse. 47. Bv the liatteries of a f/fxH. 48. By the distance of the 
 stars. 49. By tile arrows of a murderer. 50. By the glory of the 
 country. 
 
 A. 1. PirfitfT audacia. 2. Alienlgenne dementia. 3. CatilTna- assecla. 
 4. Scvtharuni a!)stinentia. 5. Provinciarum distantia. 6. Dolabellae 
 l)il)li(>thr-ca. 7. Piratarum cella. 8. Catillna? conscientise. 9. Celtarum 
 ferocia^. 10. Persarum colonia^. 11. Belgarum clavas. 12. Seneese 
 trawediam. 13. Perste arrogantiam. 14. Scribarum desidia. 15. Sen- 
 tendaruni eleirantia. 1(5. Scvtharuni inojuri. 17. Provinciarum agn- 
 cultura. 18. ('.^piarum discipllna. 19. Filife blanditia. 20. Fortunae 
 gratia. 21. Fal)uhlrum nugis. 22. Numidarum rapinae. 23. Pir^jtae 
 tilia. 24. Gramniaticie regularum. 25. Numidarum copiis. 20. Scriba- 
 rum fallaciis. 27. (Jnrci:e insulis. 28. Thebarum ix>rtis. 29. Cnpna- 
 rum inijuMisis. 30. Persarum insidias. 31. Italia? oras. 32. Philoso- 
 phic' fallaciis. 33. Senec;e tragoediis. , o rn 
 
 n. 1. The favor of the Muses. 2. The imprudence of youth, o. Uifi 
 frciiuency of letters. 4. The language of the Belgians. 5. The sailor s 
 ])rudence. C. The corru])tion of the scribes. 7. Of the queen s money 
 8 Of Seneca's pliilosf)phv. 9. Of the treachery of the Scythians. 10 
 To Galbas crueltv. 11. To the clemency of Nerva. 12. To the poverty 
 of Ireland. 13. to the treachery of Thebes. 14. The discord {obj) of 
 the g(xldesses. 15. The disobedience {obj.) of the sadors. 10. A colony 
 (obj.) of Athens. 17. A scribe of the queen. 18. By the permission ot a 
 g.uldi-ss lU. Bv the pride of Britain. 20. By the abduction {rapina) 
 of Proserpina. *21. Bv the daughter of Latdna. 22. By the discipline 
 of Sparta. 23. The banks of the Trebia. 24. The tears of Lucretia. 
 25. The shores of Sicily. 20. The hours of sadness. 27. Of tbe^ wealth 
 of Sicily. 28. Of the remains of the Numidians. 29. Of the farmers 
 Store-houses. 30. To the inhabitants of Asia. 31. To the hardships of 
 the Hi^rht. 32. The delavs {ohj.) of justice. 33. The hardships {obj.) of 
 milita?v service. 34. Tiie swarms {obj.) of pirates. 35. By tlie expenses 
 of cominerce. 30. By an armistice of the Scythians. 37. By the dain- 
 ti.'s of th(; dinners. 38. By the wedding of Emilia. 39. By the gate» 
 of Syracuse. 40. By the want of provisions. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 § 99. Paradigm. 
 Infinitive : Moiiere, to admonish (stem. moMc, charact. 5, 
 eudiug 7't;). 
 
32. 
 
 THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 rgE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 8S 
 
 Prc§eiil indicative: 
 
 SIISGULAU. 
 
 1. Moneo, 1 adinonUh. 
 
 2. Moiies, thou adnwnishcst. 
 
 3. Monet, he {nhe, it) ddmonishcs. 
 
 I'l.URAIi. 
 
 1. Mont'inus, we admonish. 
 
 2. Monet is, you admoninh. 
 
 3. Mouent, tJicy admonish. 
 
 § 30. 1. To the second conjugatiou belong all verbs, which 
 nave the vowel e for a characteristic. This conjugation differs 
 frtnn the fird in the characterisic only, not in the endings, which 
 in both conjugations are the same. But the second conjugation, 
 different from the^r.sif, retains and shortens the characteristic e m 
 the first person singular. 
 
 § 31. 2. The second conjugation, more than any other, con- 
 tains verbs, denoting a state or being. Such verbs freciuently 
 must be rendered by the English verb ' to be? with an adjective, 
 as calere, to be warm, pollire, to be powerful. They are conju- 
 gated according to the following paradigm : 
 
 Infinitive : Taeero, to be silent. 
 
 Pre*^t lit indicative : 
 
 HINGULAR. 
 
 1. Taceo, I(i7n silent. 
 
 2. Taces, thou art »ilent. 
 
 3. Tacet, he, she, it is silent. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. Tacemus, ice are silent. 
 
 2. Tacet is, you are silent. 
 
 3. Tacent, \hey are silent. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 .^ Commit the verbs of the second conju^ration (XII. Vocab) and 
 coTmi^ate the following verbs, accordinij: to the varadigms i^ 29 and 
 31 : apparere, to apiKur ; arcr-re, to tcard off; cah-^re to be warm ; cn^e, 
 to excite; caviare, to be cautious ; fiHreJo weep ; un\)\i'vc, to Jill ; miscere, 
 to mix ; parere, to obey; torquere, to torture; nere, to spin. 
 
 1. 
 
 PREDICATIVE PHRASES. 
 
 A 1. Culpa apparet. 2. Silva ardet. 3. Africa calet. 4. r>esHiia dis- 
 plicet. 5. Aqua fervet. 6. Puella tlet. 7. Pu-na lan.ixuct 8. Tenebra 
 pnrvalent. 9. Poet.e indigent. 10. Pers^^e lu^rent L llora^ monent. 
 
 12. ScythjB pavent. 13. Athr-n.-p i)ollent. 14. InsidiaD at.'iit U. Bel-a 
 mupet 10. Sulla succenset. 17. Terentia valet. IS. \alvae patent. 
 19. Copied pran.lent. 20. Poetre tacent. 21. FuriJB torrent 
 
 B. 1 Delay detains. 2. Discord dt^troys. 3. Disci plme exercises. 
 4 Syracuse tiourishcs. 5. The i^ersian rejoices.- 0. Athens lies down. 
 7' AL^riculture languishes. 8. Glory remains 9. A threat tnghtens. 
 lb The stars glitter. 11. Modesty ]>lease8. 12. The sailors answer. 
 13" 'Hie girls laugh. 14. The Numidians fear. 15. 'I he Belgians urge. 
 IG The Sarth is dry. 17. The pirate is on his guard. 18. 1 he troops are 
 
 fflad 19- A brittle is imminent. 20. Envy is hidden. 21. Anger is 
 iniurious 22. Modestv is silent. 23. The roses are splendid. 24. 1 ha 
 
 sailol-s are angry. 25. The poet is well 26. The colonies are strong 
 '>: The i)rovinces are obedient. 28. The lances are conspicuous. 29. 1 he 
 statues are exi^osed for sale. 30. The senate-house is open. 
 
 31. The 
 
 labor languishes 
 
 OBJECTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 Alienigenam adhibrtis. 2. Praedam admovent. 
 4. Diricrcntiaiii augeinus. 5. Arrogantiaui coerceo. 
 
 A 1 Alieni«^enam adhibrtis. 2. Fraedam admoveni. 3. Statuam 
 amovet 4. Dirigentiaiii augeinus. 5. Arrogantiaui coerceo. 6. Roiiiam 
 dcir-re ' 7 Colonias deterres. 8. Fossas expletis. 9. Cordnani meres. 
 10 Mi'suricordiam movet. 1 1 . Uticam obsideo. 12. Pecuniam obtinemus. 
 13' Persas perterrPtis. 14. Tabulas jxjssidemus. 15. Belgas timent. 
 
 (lENiTiVH. 1(1. Pecuniae egere. 17. Pecuniae egeiuus. 18. PecumaB 
 eo-es. 19. Inc^liirum eget. 20. Indutiarum egetis. 
 °DvTiVE AND Ablative. 21. Keginre adbereraus. 22. ^um8e appa- 
 ret. 23. NuniEe api)areo. 24. Arrogantia displicetis. 2o. iihjquentia 
 
 movent. 20. Blanditiis persuades. , ^ , o xt o rn «„ 
 
 B 1 It destrovs discipline. 2. We ward off the Scythians. 3. Ihey 
 excite envv. 4. Vou detain the Celt. 5. I teach grammar. 6. It exer- 
 cises path-nce. 7. We have provisions. 8. Thou admonishest the 
 dau-hter. 9. He i^ssesses the island. 10. She retains lite 1 • ^•>vi f^^^ 
 the battle. 12. We are in need of a library. 13. He is hidden to the 
 pirates 14. It is injurious to the farmers. 15. You are obedient to 
 Home.' 10. Thou givest advice to the poet. 17 You shine ^^7 ^^^^f^;^^- 
 18. He is ix)werful by ekxiuence. 19. We restrain by discipline. 20. i hou 
 
 dLspleasest by negligence. 
 
 /£» 
 
 PREDICATIVE AND OBJECTIVE PHRASES. 
 A 1 Ira fervet. 2. Pugna ardet. 3. Nanta cavet. 4. Poeta? docent. 
 5 A'Vricolfe dolent. 0. Herl)3e llorent. 7. Feminae gaudent. 8. Justitia 
 coeicet. 9. 'Teiiebrje pnevahnit. 10. Parietina3 manent 11. ISatura 
 tornet 12. Diligentia languet. 13. Copias auget. 14. Copias augent. 
 15 Heginam al>h.)rret. 10. lleglnas abhorret. 17. Keginam abhorrent, 
 is" Heginas abhorrent. 19. Terram movet. 20. Indiitias praebet. 
 n Athr-nas d.'lent. 22. Pecuniam adhibemus. 23. Lndas timeo. 
 ^4' Piratas arcPtis. 25. Incolas ries. 20. Pecuniam debere. 2^. Irani 
 ^^ntinr-mus. 28. Concordia vahltis. 29. Invidia displices ^ 
 
 B 1 Life teaches. 2. The tongue is cautious. 3. The foreigner is 
 astonished. 4. Philosophy lies down. 5. The poets answer. G Memory 
 is strong 7. The stars shine. ^. 'J'he provinces are open. 9. The inhab- 
 tants are angrv. 10. The pictures displease. U. The rules teach. 
 r> The w.)rkm;n are on their guard. 13. We increase the vigilance. 
 14 Thev deride the victorv. 15. Thou teachest philosophy 16. He re- 
 moves the old walls. 17. You grant permission. ^^- ^y^/^'^^^^.^^^^^^^P; 
 ti..n 19. He holds the lance. 20. They owe friendship. 21. You 
 destrov iustice. 22. I see the flanu^s. 23. He prohibits the funera 
 24 Th'ev sustain the slander. 25. Thou obtainest a victory. 2(.. \ou 
 display Virmness. 27. They are in need of vvater. ^^, IVdiTdvSth 
 to the queen 29. Thou restrainest by punishments. 30. 1 dit,advibe tlie 
 battle 31. She besieges the gate. 32. We retain the tollowers. 
 
 3 
 
 j^ 
 
34 
 
 TUE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 R 33 1 The uominative sin-ular of the nouns of the second 
 dedension has the case-ter.niuation .1^ or lllll. The former 
 belongs to the masculine, the hitter to the neuter gender. 
 Rem.l Some nouns of this declension in er and ir drop the case- 
 termination us. See L. X. ^ 
 
 § 3:1. 2. The case-terminations of the second declension are tue 
 
 following : 
 
 SINGU1.A11. 
 
 N. us, NEUTEiiS um. 
 
 G. i. 
 
 D. o. 
 
 A. um. 
 
 V. e, NEUTERS um. 
 
 A. o. 
 
 PLTJTIAL. 
 N. i, NEUTEIIB a. 
 
 G. Orum. 
 D. is. 
 
 A. OS, NEUTERS a. 
 V. i, NEUTERS a. 
 
 A. is. 
 
 Bem 2. 'Neuter nouns of any doclension have the rH;^^^l>;;;;^ty fhat theil 
 nominatives, accusatives and vocatives are ahke, and that these 
 cases in the plural always terminate in a. 
 & •J4 3 The cases of nouns of the 2d declension are formed 
 
 by addin^^ t'he terminations § 33 to the declension-stem, wliich is 
 
 found bv removuig the termination n. or ./m of the nominative. 
 
 Thus hortus has the declension-stem liorl-, and helium the stem 
 
 ^>^ll'-- n «^ T> 
 
 § 3»>. Paradigms. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. Yentus, the tcind. 
 G. Venti, of the wind. 
 J). Vento, to the wind. 
 A. Ventum, the wind. 
 V. Vente. O icind ! 
 
 A. Vento, ly the wind. 
 
 N. Bollum, the war. 
 0. Belli, of the war. 
 
 B. Bello, to the war. 
 A. Bellum, the war. 
 
 V. Bellum, rear! 
 A. Bello, by the war. 
 
 I'LURAL. 
 
 2f. Venti, the winds. 
 G. Ventorum, of the wind». 
 J). Vent is, to the winds. 
 A. Ventos, the winds. 
 V. Venti, winds! 
 A. Ventis, hy the winds. 
 
 N. Bella, the irars. 
 G. Belldrum, of the wars, 
 D. Bi'llis, to the wars. 
 A. Bella, the wars. 
 V. Bella, Owars! 
 A. Bellis, hy the wars. 
 
 THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 35 
 
 § 3«. 4. The noun deus, a god, has the following irregular 
 
 Voc. Sing, dens, like the nominative (not dee); 
 Nom. &Vuc. Flur. di (seldom dei or dii); 
 Dai. <k Ahl. Flur. dis (seldom dels or diis). ^ 
 
 R -17 5 The following nouns form their plurals either in i or 
 in L* They 'are masculine in the former, and neuter in the latter 
 
 '"''X'^.s, jest, (pLUR.>ciandioca);//'e/ium, bridle, (pLUR./ren^ 
 and/yriia); locus, place, (plur. loci and loca). 
 
 The plurals loci and loca have different significations. Loca 
 are localities, but loci places in books or in discourse. 
 
 Rem 3 The plnralia tantum and the heterological nouns of the 2d de- 
 clension' VI. and Vll. Vocab.) must be committed. 
 
 Proper Nouns of the Second Declension. 
 § 38. 6. The following proper nouns occur in the second 
 declensum^^^ uaillCS. The majority of the Koman male 
 names belong to this declension, terminating m ns or lus, as . 
 Famulus, Brutus, Cassius, Fabius. 
 
 Rem. 4. It is customary to drop the termination ^^. oy^/j^ji^f. ^^^^ ^^! 
 
 ;« ir",^rrii<Vi nnd to chancre them other\Mse, as . y tf- 
 
 ORck male imnns in «» assume the termination «s m Latm. To 
 
 "heir l."l ng Jl.m-rus, Homer. PhUiiypas, Plulip, -«'"'if «'";.,., j,,. 
 
 On the other liaml, modern proper nan.es K™"" '^^^.[«"^"Xr 
 
 ending «» or ius by modern Utimris and ""™ J. '^^o o™^' 
 
 7\^7^i O TuUiusI Tiiose in jus chan-e ^ into i, as : (x./i, U bajus 
 iMWi.u A^;*li'^ . .. pomnev ' But common nouns in lUS, and 
 
 S;;i:Toa,"n- i::r;n;t'":jjo:o^^^^^^ 
 
 ji/iiM (,Bon) makes the vocative /^i, not Jilu. 
 
THE SECOND DECLENSION.^ 
 
 THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 37 
 
 36 
 
 4. Several name» ol *•«•"»'• '» *' "'' • f , 2^„(i(,„i, 
 
 «e.s,<x, ^</;y/''«»- (Egypt)' «'«•'•«"«•^"^' ^"'^'"*' 
 
 5. A fcw uaiue. « . r*i;,X;l,;a J (the llhonc), 
 (the Rhhie), Vanubiu^ (the Uanuut), li/to \ 
 Jlellespontiis (the Hellespont). 
 
 ./'i/-.^/o.r/,.^ ..i.^^^ : ^^^^"^^S^^^. proper na,ne. to 
 ^f the male propernames ^'^j'^'^d ^e^^^> ^'^ ^''"■^^"'^Z. 
 he declined in the Hinijular only), and oj emi.^r , 
 
 1« 
 
 Translate the following Vocatives into Latin : 
 
 Translate thejouoiciny r c.t,......^ ^mnmnion ' O 
 
 Anthony! » f^;d ! O f. «n ! O si cp « J^m^^ o rorn.Uus ! O 
 
 }i^-i:e!%'''~er'o'evS./otsassin! O „auiclau; O pc.p.e I 
 
 O crimes ! _^ 
 
 ATTllIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 ' =.n 2 Tlie hour of Imsinoss. 3. Tho fli^-ht of the 
 
 1. The enemy's son 2^ \ ; ' ^ Fabius's life 6. The victory of 
 
 allies. 4- A disease of the bra- ^5^^^^^^^^ s. The em.nies 
 
 the Carthaginians 7. ^ ^^^ ^*^;^ ,n" x- ,^,.i.,>od 10. The places ol the 
 of the people. 9. The cau^H of the i^\^'^^^>^-^^.^,^,,,,.,„/of the walls, 
 hattle. 11. The pay of ^he tiiWs^ U. 1 • ^^^^^^^^^^^ ^. o tlie 
 
 la. The hours ol leisure. 14 He «J^r s o ^^^^ ^ ^^ 
 
 tvmnt's power. 1«. Of the ^^^"^^"*/^^^ "Xf the pivlVct's prudence. 
 iXsopliy. 18. Of the V^^-^-^^ ^ •JiJ^.Z^L^t-- 22. Of the 
 |>0. Of the duties ot -f^X%)t\h^^^^^^^^ ^^^i^'^" '^^' '^'^.^'*'^' 
 
 evidence of the ^^^^l^ ^ ti fl ,1 mlar of the Greeks. 2«. To the i>en 
 erick's note-book. ''^•^^To the ca endar ot^Uu ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^.^^^^ 
 
 of Livy. 27. To «^'"tley s scholars^^^^^^^^ \o ^^^ ,,„flagration 
 
 21). I'o the auxiliary trjx^ps ot the ^ ^rman^^^ ^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^ 
 
 of Susa. ai. To the bagga-e ol the allies. 
 
 ,, To the enemies of the master. 34 To Pomi-y's sla^v^^^^ 
 eneniv. o6. lo ini ktu^i The r vers (^?>?) ot ltai>. o*. ^^^ 
 
 3o.CUarles-.misdem(-anor(.-^.. ;?, ;-j,' '*,"; of the Dan«l«. 39. The 
 years (obj.) of youth. ^8. ' * ,,! 'f^. ' f ,U ) of the Helvetiaiis. 41. 
 iing-loms (ohj.) of Euro,H.. 40^ e can v (« >' „„^j 4;.. By the godB 
 
 h^'^% ^e It^r tt ^'aulf '^"^. By the grave, of the aUie. 
 50 By the crimes of Tarquin. 
 
 PREDICATIVE AND OBJECTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 1 9 The roofs shine. 3. The slaves laugh. 
 1. The people commands. ^- The ^^^^^^^^^ c. The German. 
 
 4. The assassins are hidden, o. /. '^^,,;'^ .^.^ound. 9. The calendar con- 
 mourn. 7. The gods grant, ^f'^^^^^^^l w[nes deligU3t. 12.Tbe camp 
 tirms. 10. Auxiliary troops appear. ll..^b^^^^^^^^ 
 
 is <.pen. 13. The rivers are ^^' ^^^- ,X^\^, ^ triumph. 17. Tliou mcreas- 
 1.-) The arguments move, ^l^-^*^,^'''^,,^ i«) Thev destroy the baggage, 
 esi the dai?ker. !«• ^e kiHs the t^^ant^, , .^^ILace. 22. Thou re. 
 o() You dt'secrate the temples. ^^- ;'*" » H» destrovs Susa. 2.). We 
 ?me.t Pompey. 23. They besiege ^ e^^^^ assai ns 27.' Thou plunderest 
 deride the barbarians. 2G I ^f ^^^i^ you frijrhten the allies. 30. They 
 ?hTpeople, 28.Weha^.^m;nds 2J.Jo^^^ 32. I. am obedient to 
 
 teach the freedmen 3 . ^o sacnnce ^ .^^ j^ jg injurious to the 
 
 the nrefect. 33. He adheres t^) tlie t>Tau ^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ .^ 
 
 p.o ille 35. They conform to the 1--^;^;^^/^^^ ^, 39. You hurt by 
 87 Thev convi<-t of a crime. SS.^ ^^S''^ 4 Thev recover by the sword. 
 faVseho<fds. 40. He heals by a minude 4L^nu . ^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 42. They are strong by arms. 4d. iii^> ^ H, 
 
 Translate into Emjlish: ^^^ ^^^ 
 
 44. Gnecos reh^gat. 4.->. Oppida expu.^at f^^^ ^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 tm^necat. 48. Pcenos superant 4^. i^ ^^^^^^^^^^ 53^ Argumenta 
 lis. r,l. Adversaries deridet.o.. ^"^ ! ^-^^.^s torquent. 56. Fabium 
 a^lhibc-Muus. 54. Barbaros arce IS. ,f'^- J,f^ ,^ ,ecus!iut. 59. C'ommer- 
 ,.;tn\w>r.uit 57. Veios delemus. o». vioum r. ^^^eria coercemuB. 
 ;ZrS K-etis. «0' Pf -r'"t":!Set" 04 Vurt -aceosat. 0.5. Opvida- 
 «-• ^'^-r "oo'Ti pa^rPn^ " OT'.ftuaioW-t. 08. Kumero valets 
 
 ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES 
 
 Sicily. 10. The siioils {dr).) 
 
38 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS. 
 
 -ADJECTIVES. 
 
 18 B7 the Oracle of Delplii. 10. By Pompey's iiK^ssenijer 20. By the 
 anihassadors of tlie Ik'lvetians. 21. By the horses of the ( arthagimans. 
 22. The eonimands of the ].refect. 28. The dan-.Ts ot the war. .4. 1 lie 
 sons of .Eiiiilius. 2.-). Of the decrees of the i)eople. 2b lo tlie freed- 
 men of Anthonv. 27. To the refuge of the slaves. 28. 1 o the rewards 
 of perseveraiic.''. 21). To the nioiiiiments of E.uyi)t. 30. lo Darius ^ 
 deatli 31. The rem-dies of the pliysician. 82. The oiupanion ('^6;.) of 
 tvrants. 33. The philosophers {obj.) of (Jreece. 34. O son of Mark! 
 3.-,. O adversary of Poinpey! 3(). companion of criines! 3i. O mea- 
 6»'nirer of thirtvrant! 38. By the testimony of l^abius. 3J. By the 
 l)riiiciples of philosophy. 40. By the walls of Athens. 
 
 PREDICATIVE AND OBJECTIVE PHRASES. 
 1 He asks the ambassadors. 2. Tln^ ambassadors ask. 3. He fears tlie 
 tvrant 4. The tvrant fears. 5. lie appeases Anthony. 0. Anthony 
 appeases. 7. The'y praise the tribunes. 8. Tht- tribunes praise J. He 
 recovers the ba<r-a<re. 10. He b.'sie-es the camp. U. He is obedient to 
 Poinoev 12. Poun)ey is obedi.'nt. 13. He is conspicuous by merits. 
 14. ThG'arms lie down. 15. The i^-ople fears. KJ. The slaves mourn^ 
 17 The towns flourish. 18. The schohirs are silent. 1!). Ihe swords 
 .-litter 20.Thev kill the soul. 21. They adore gods. 22. He carries a 
 steer * 23. He counts {mlibPre) the votes. 24 They ovrcome the allu-s. 
 2.-) They recall the auxiliary troops. 2G. He saves the captives. 2<. lo 
 be obedient to the masters. 28. It i^ agreeable to the tribune. 29. W e 
 adhere to the plan. 30. They accuse of a f^dsehood. 311 am m need 
 (eaere) of food. 32. He is in need of provisions So. \ou reca I tlie 
 messengers. 34. Thou seest the temi)les. 30. We greet the ambassa- 
 dors. 
 
 Translate into Enf/Ush : . 
 
 36. Philosophum liberant. 37. Servura ca.«^tigat. 38. Prrefectum fati- 
 eant. 39. Fluvios superant (to cross). 40. Muros delent. 41. Morbum 
 sanant. 42. Captlvos liberMinus. 4:5. Libertos yexant 44. I). tav^Mit 
 4.-) Servi latent. 4(5. Plel)rji dolent. 47. Socii gaudent. 48. Jud.ei 
 paVent. 40. Monumenta mauent. 50. Pr-rfecto debr-nius. ol Delph<>g 
 SDoliant. 52. Oraculo i)arr-mus. 53. Promissis i)crsuad.'tis o4. Pr.rc p. 
 tis doces. 55. Mundum creat. 50. Dolo regnas. o,. lebejos cietis 
 58. PeloponnC'eum occupant. 50. Furta perpetrare. 60. Patricus ad 
 hsereo. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS. ADJECTIVES. 
 
 A. Gender. 
 
 R 510. 1. The ;;;eilder of Latin nouns is fourfold : 1. th€ 
 MASCULINE, 2. the Teminine, 3. the neutek, 4. the common gender. 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS.— ADJECTIVES. 3d 
 
 The common gender, with a few rare exceptions, is confined to the 
 third declension. 
 
 nine an- the ^--J^^^^^'^^'^^Z^g of "the term 
 the two sexes ot P':'"'"''''-,„„„ '„,' „,,x and hence this gendei 
 
 COMMON gender see the third declension. 
 R 40 2 The gender does not influence the declension of 
 sonsfexeept that neuter nouns have three eases ahke m bo h 
 ^o^^s, exupt t adjectives are differently 
 
 r;S i::rl>n!'t^^;:e lider of the .0... on which the, 
 depend^ «^^ *^^^„_^, „„„„, (that is nor.ns, denoting per- 
 J.toi the SECOND declension, terminating in us^ are wthou 
 „L «ASCUL.VF and always denote males. They generally 
 "rr^rt: m«U«.. (§ 4,\-o. O, that is their termination .. 
 I ..han'^ed into </, iu order to designate females of the sam. 
 category. They then belong to the first declension, as: 
 
 Liu8 a male companion «ona, a female companion; 
 
 Booius, «"< .fX„j .arnica., a female frund ; 
 amicuf. a mule fnena " ,, 
 
 <•«»«•"!'"<'■■••;••••;„•■„ ■ Tiomrma, a female Boman. 
 
 IJomiinus, a male Roman ""' -J 
 
 Such nouns are called movable nOHlis. 
 
 „ ^- • *i,„ vjriiK-L comprising individuals of both sexes. 
 
 Rem. 3. Nouns in tie '^'''^''•*,^'7™!^[„.f,,,-„Wmale and female) ; con- 
 aUca,/.^ are masculine, as : P-^oi'-X'/hSAle plurals of national 
 sobrfni.c<,»««.s M both |-« -,«'-,'', T,? *^X. all of which, if 
 denoting the n^Sn as ^^h, always are of masculine gender. 
 8 40 4 Tebsonal nouns of the first declension in a, always 
 J m^'^'culine unless they exclusively denote females, as Jiha /., 
 Ser ; "i.. /, quee'n. But pom. a poet, p^rata, a pirate 
 etc. are masculine. 
 Kem.3. It is pecuUar, that the «^^.««ye^^^^^ 
 
 English of «.-««»"« ge'fr, ^^""S "S"l "' (."iiearrue ; incola. an in 
 
 en?!.X;t'scri^?'-»^^^ 
 
4:0 GENDER OF NOUNS.— ADJECTIYES. 
 
 Persa, a Persian. In Latin all these nouns designate the male sel 
 only, and hence always are masculine. 
 
 § 43. 5. Nouns, denotinj,^ TSlili;:^^ (inchiding beasts), of 
 the first declension (ui a) are feminine ; those of the second 
 declension in uh are m.\sculixe, and those in um neuter. 
 
 § 44. G. EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 a. the names of the Gallic rivers Ganimna, the Garonne ; 
 Sequana, the Seme; 3Iatro7ia, the Marne, are masculine. 
 
 b. The names of cities in us, as Ephesus, Corinthiis, djc, but 
 not the pluralia tantum in ^, are feminine. 
 
 c. The names of trees in nSy as primus, a plum-tree ; cerasus, 
 a cherrv-tree : law us, a laurel-tree ; pln(s, a pear-tree, are 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 d. Tlie names of the followiiio; four countries in us are femi- 
 KiNE : JEr/yptus, Eplrus, Fekqyonuesus, Chersonesiis. 
 
 e. The nouns alcus, a belly or beehive, coins, a distaff, domus, 
 a house, humus, the ground, vannus, a winnowing instrument, are 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 /.The nouns 2^elafjus, sea (a poetical word), virus, poison, 
 vuhjus, the populace, are neuter. These do not form a plural 
 number. 
 
 Kern 4 Several nouns of the first and second declensions. ori-:inall.y 
 denotinir TillN(;s, bv a fi-urutive use of the lan^^ua-e, have assumed 
 the signitication ot" pekbons. Such personal nouns r^'tain that 
 Lronder which thrv have in their original signification as thinus. 
 Thev are- a. The fkminines eoplae, troops, o'-stodiac, ?U'V'* ^, 
 excuhiae, sentinels, opirae, workmen, HfjUiae, watchnien ; b 1 lio 
 NEUTERS aaxUia, auxiliary troops, atratium or mancqmun, a slave. 
 
 B. Adjectives. 
 
 § 45. t. Adjectives are divided into movable adjectives, 
 and adjectives of COIIHIIOII $;-C'llder. The latter belong to 
 the THIRD declension ; but the movable adjectives, that is those, 
 tchich have different forms for the three (jemhrs, belong to the 
 first and second declensions. 
 
 § 40. 8. Movable adjectives have the termination us for the 
 masculine, a, for the feminine, and um for the neuter gender in 
 the nominative singular, as bonus m., bona f., bonuni u. The 
 masculine and neuter forms are inflected like nouns of the second, 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS.-ADJECTIVES. 
 
 41 
 
 and the feminine forms like nouns of the first declension, accord 
 i„g to" the following paradigm : 
 
 ]^, bonus 
 
 0. honi 
 
 Z). b(mo 
 
 ^. bonum 
 
 y. bone 
 
 A. bono 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 feminine. 
 bona 
 bonae 
 bonie 
 bonam 
 bona 
 bona 
 
 JfeuUr. 
 
 bonum 
 
 boni 
 
 bono 
 
 bonum 
 
 bonum 
 
 bono 
 
 MaftcuUne. , 
 
 boni 
 bond rum 
 
 bonis 
 bonos 
 boni 
 bonis 
 
 FLTJRATi. 
 
 jPeminine. 
 
 bonse 
 
 bonarum 
 
 bonis 
 
 bonas 
 
 bonse 
 
 bonis 
 
 Keuter. 
 
 bona 
 
 bonorum 
 
 bonis 
 
 bona 
 
 bona 
 
 bonis 
 
 Rem. 5 
 
 guiar. For thuse see Lesson i.. 
 « .1» q Adicctivcs are attributes of the nouns on which 
 
 Adjectives in connection with 
 the following paradigms : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N, Nauta regins, a royal sailor. 
 G nautic regii, of a royal sailor. 
 J) naut e regio, to a royal sailor. 
 A nautam rigium, a royal sailor. 
 V. nauta regie, royal sailor- 
 A nauta regio, hy a royal sailor. 
 
 NOUNS are declined according to 
 
 Y. Cura magna, the great care. 
 6?.' cur* magn<^, of the great care. 
 B curfT raagnre, to the great care. 
 
 4 curam magnam, the great care. 
 
 V. cura magna, great care ! 
 A. cura magna, hy the greaX CAire. 
 
 PLUHAIi. 
 
 iV^ nautfE regii, nnfal sailors. 
 
 G. nauturum regiOrum, of royai 
 
 sailors. 
 B. nautis regiis, to royal sailors. 
 A nautas regios, royal sailors. 
 
 V. nauta^ regii, royal sailors! 
 
 A. nautis regiis, hy royal sailors. 
 
 \K. cur® magnne, the great cares. 
 G. curarum magnarum, oftJie great 
 
 cares. 
 
 D curis magnis, to the great care», 
 i curas magnas, the great cares. 
 V. curiB magnJB, great cares ! 
 A. curis magnis, hy great care» 
 
42 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS.— ADJECTn"E&. 
 
 B-STEMS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 43 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Ji. Dolus niutuus, a mutual fraud. 
 G. tloli iiiutui, of a mutual fraud. 
 J), dolo mutuo, to a inutual fraud, 
 A. doluiii iiiiituuiu, a mutual fraud. 
 V. dole mutue, mutual fraud f 
 A. dolo mutuo, hi/ a mutual fraud. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 i^. doli mutui, wututd frauds. 
 
 O. doloruin muluOrum, of mutual 
 
 frauds. 
 D. dolls inutuis, to 7nutual frauds. 
 A. dolos inutuos, mutual frauds, 
 V. doli mutui, O mutual frauds/ 
 A. dolis mutuis, hi/ mutual frauds. 
 
 N. Prunus celsa, a high plum-tree. 
 G. ])runi cclsio, of a hhjh plum-tree. 
 J). i)runo celsj!', to a high jdtim-tree. 
 A. prunura celstim, a high ^j^W7«- 
 
 tne. 
 V. ])rune celsa, high plum-tree I 
 A. pruno celsa, hy a high plum-tree. 
 
 K. pruui cel»o, high plum-trees. 
 G. pruudrum celsarum, of high 
 
 plum-trees. 
 B. prunis celsis, to high plum-trees. 
 A. pnmos celsas, high plum-trees. 
 V. pruni celsje, O high plum-trees ! 
 A. prunis celsis, hy high plum-trees. 
 
 N. Oppidura parvum, a small town. 
 G. o})pidi parvi, of a small town. 
 D. oppido parvo, to a small town. 
 A. oi)[)iduin parvum, a small town. 
 V. oppidum parvum, small town! 
 A. oppido parvo, hy a small town. 
 
 N. oppida iMirva, suudl towns. 
 
 G. oppidoruin parvOrum, of small 
 
 towns. 
 D. oppidis parvis, to small towns. 
 A. op])ida parva, small towns. 
 V. oppida parva, small towns! 
 A. oppidis parvis, hy small towns. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 ^^ Commit the adjectives VIII of the Vorahularies, and irrite the 
 foWncing paradigms icith the Engliih significdions, according to ^ 47 : 
 
 \micitia vera, true friendship. Incola e^rr-nus, a poor inhabitant. 
 Dea benigna, the kind goddess. Barbarus indoctus, «// unlearned har- 
 harian Humus madida, the wet ground. Cerasus vetusta, an old cherry^ 
 tree Scytlia Sivvus, a cruel Scythian. Vulgus proffmum, the profane 
 populace. Auxilium certum, a certain help, ^gyptus aiitiqua, ancunt 
 Egypt (sing.). 
 
 1 To a friendlv stranger. 2. Cold water {ohj). 3. By a renowned 
 Belgian. 4. Of aVaitliful follower. 5. By st^vere disciplini'. 0. An ex- 
 traordinary ieqregius) boldness {ohj.). 7. Pernicious discords. 8. Ot the 
 deep (iaronne. 1). Unheard of intrigues {ohj.). 10. Of tlie angry tr<K)])s. 
 11. By inveterate enmity. 12. A dense darkn(>ss. l)}. By a cowardly 
 de^rrter 14. To a poor farmer. 15. To the sad daughters. 1(). Tlie 
 open gates 17. By the renowned Ephesus. 18. Of a nefarious treacheiy. 
 11) A high poplar (ohj.). 20. To a thankful peopK'. 21. By an ungrate- 
 ful freed woman. 22. By an idle (female) beggar. 2:1 Industrioua 
 {female) slaves. 24. Sharp swords {ohj.). 25. Ample provisions ((y/^jO- 
 26. Of an honest German woman. '67. Pernicious poisons {ohj.). M 
 
 ,. oo The renowned Delphi {<m- ^0. By invincible 
 Of fon-ign arms. ~9., A[\^, J/'" ..o pv the wealthy Damascus oS. 
 j,^,,^^,. ;3l. ot l>r;>ua Athens. 3..^^^^^^^ 85. Ample re- 
 
 Foreign auxiliary troops, dj. By a P^^nia , ..^^ ^y a small 
 
 l^^-tl: Of ti!^ '^^- ^- ^f^^^' ''■ ^ '-'' '-'-'''' '-''' 
 
 1. Narrow roads. 2. O^^^son^J^ ^T ^^^ ^^ 
 an ^^ecurate schc)larship o To tu, ete ^.^^^^ drivers (a../F^^O. 9- 
 
 t,>wn. 7. Of attentive ^^.^I^H^^'^"-^,,^^^ s^'i^e {ohj.). U- Contrary de- 
 Of contente<l farmers 10 ^he ^^^^^^^^^^ \.^ Doubtful testimonies (o6y.. 
 Bires. 12. To an excellent ^^'l^^^^^, 16. By a fertile ground. 
 14. An el.>Muent ixH't U. ^^ ^^^^^''^^f.^ master. 19. Of the re- 
 17. Of hostile Num.dians. ^,^- f y,^/5^\,^^ {ohj.). 21. By secret 
 nowned Peloponnesus. 20. lue pi .w. , ^j ^female) neighbt)r. 
 
 :„,, ,2. Of rebellious --'^^^\^-^^l^:Ze)U^^^^- ^f. Fu 
 k IW the Latin langimg- -o^^^^^^^^ Inner wars. 20 Of 
 
 turetriuniphs(./>jO;^|; 1^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ The immense sea (./>> 
 
 moderate merits. 30. Lnpieasai w n^.i.rhboring estate. 34. A 
 
 p,*„„.„ a.. A -te relugc. 33 By a »;.;'o „,,„ su-r ! 37. O 
 
 Z^^^^'r^^^^^^^^-^- 3U. Of a sudden death. 40. 
 By the whole world. 
 
 LESSON L 
 
 B-STEMS OF THE SECOND DECLEXSIOIC 
 8 ^S 1 Several noun, and adjectives of the second declens.ou 
 § 4». 1- »P^<^ •" , J, terminations us and e m 
 
 .itb stems, tevmn-atrng n n . op ^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 the nonun>U,vo and voct^ne .n r.,,^,», «f ,he 
 
 aiipeiir m tlie>e cascs^ i'"-! "' 
 
 second dcfl«'"*'«"- , without exception 
 
 Tl,e nouns, which belong o this cla s, arc ^m 
 
 --"•T rin1:rm::cure"S.er<:!rv,^hf femininl and 
 r::t;::s:ssmn;:tre' regular Lminationa and «». 
 
 '"t'lr'nouu vir and its compounds (as levir, a husband's 
 
44 B-STEMS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 brother, duumvir, triumvir, &c.), and the national name Tremr, 
 
 a Trevirian ; . 
 
 2 The proper names in cr, witli a few exceptions, as : Alexan' 
 der Tcucer Ltjsandcr, and the national names Cimher, a Lira, 
 brian, Umber, an Cmbrian, Ccuitaber, ^ Cantabrian, Calaber, o. 
 
 Calabrian, Afer, an African ; . i x^ tt o 
 
 3. Those nonns and adjr-ctives, which are enumerated JSo. U., - 
 
 and VIII, 2 of the Vocabularies ; , . , i 
 
 4. Those nouns and adjectives in fer and ffer, which are de- 
 rived from the verbs fer re and rjerere, to carry, as: Lucifer the 
 morning-star, armif/er, an armor-bearer, siynifer, a standard- 
 bearer, //•</////€/•, fruit-bearing, i^estifer, pestiferous; 
 
 5. The adjective satur, sated. 
 
 Rem. 2. Those compounds of n>, which consist in '^"^^^fffl^^^^ 
 NLMERAiA denote in \\^ vi^^uxi. 2. commitUe ovhoard.>S <l<:^^^ 
 vumher of men for the pnfoymaHCc of Home public duty. Ihc bm- 
 eulur denotes a member of such a committee, as : 
 
 Duumvir, a duumvir, member of a committee of two, tlur. 
 
 (/wMmi'm. a committee of two ; f ♦i.^^.o • -pt m 
 
 trixmiir, a triuiinir, member of a committee ot three, tllr. 
 
 ir?>///U"i>/. a committee of three ; . . . 
 
 qLuorciri, a committee or board of four; septemnn ^^^^ 
 
 tee or board of seven ; decemcin, a board ot ten ; centamun, a 
 
 board of a hundred. 
 
 § 50. 3. In the inflection of these uouus and adjectives we 
 Lave to notice the following three points: 
 
 a. We decline and move tbera, as if the termination m of 
 the nominative had not been dropped, as vir, gen. vlrl ; satur, 
 
 FEM. satura. 
 
 h. They generally Jro;> the vowel e of the final letters er m 
 all cases except nominative and vocative singuhir mascubne, as 
 maglster, gen. nuujlstrl; ^nejer, gen. piyri, fem. piura, neut. 
 
 piqruin. ,••«<-• 
 
 0. But the following words retain the e in their inflection. 
 
 1. The nouns adulter, (jener, puer, socer, vesper, presbyter. 
 Liber (the Latin name for the god Bacchus), and the plur. 
 tantum Uberl (children); 
 
 2. The adjectives asper, creper, lacer, liber, miser, prosper, 
 
 tener; 
 
 R-STEMS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 45 
 
 3. The compounds with/er and ger, both nouns and adjectives. 
 
 The adjective dc.rter sometimes drops the e and sometimes 
 retains it (fem. dextra or dextera). 
 
 Those nouns and adjectives, that retain the e, are inflected 
 
 after the paradigms ;9?^er and liber; those, that drop the e, 
 
 foHow the paradigms ager and sacer. 
 
 Rem 3. The compounds with /^r and ger may be recognized by their 
 MEANING (carryiiig or bearing something). Thus the adjectives 
 pifjer, mfer, nigerXnd tlie nouns agcr and Afer are not compounds 
 
 of ferre an<l qerere. , ,^ , J.^ 
 
 Kem 4 The i-EKSOXAL noung, belonging to the R-stems mostly are 
 * MOVABLE. Thus mngider, minister and arbiter torm the feminine 
 nouns magistra, minMra and arbitra. Pmr irregularly torms the 
 feminine noun paella^ a girl (instead of puera). 
 
 o 1 . Paradigms. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 B. 
 A. 
 V. 
 A. 
 
 BINGUL.Ul. 
 Puer, the boy 
 pueri, of the boy 
 puero, to the boy 
 pueriim, tlie boy 
 l)uer, O boy ! 
 puero, by the boy. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 iV. pueri, the boys 
 G. puerdrum, of the boy» 
 D. pueris, to the boys 
 A. pueros, the boys 
 V. pueri, boys! 
 A. pueris, by the ooys. 
 
 JV. Liber, libera, liberum 
 G. liberi, libera', liberi 
 D. libero, lii)er;e, libero 
 A. liberum, liberam, liberum 
 V. liber, libera, liberum 
 A. libero, libera, libero. 
 
 bberi, libene, libera 
 liberorum, liberfirum, liberorum 
 bberis, liberis, liberis 
 liberos, liberas, libera 
 liberi, liberae, libera 
 liberis, liberis, liberis. 
 
 JV. A ger, the field 
 G. ngn, of the field 
 D. agro, to the field 
 A. agrum, the field 
 V. ager, Ofidd/ 
 A. i\gro, by the field. 
 
 K. agri, the fields 
 G. agrorum, of the fields 
 D. agris, to the fields 
 A. agros, the fields 
 V. agri, fields! 
 A. agris, by the fields. 
 
 2f. Sacer, sacra, sacrum 
 G. sacri, sacr;e, Siicri 
 D. safro. sacrie, sacro 
 A. sacrum, sacram, Siicrum 
 V. sacer, sacra, sacrum 
 A. Bacro, sacra, sacro. 
 
 sacri, sacrap, sacrsii. 
 
 bacrorum, sacrarum, sacrorum 
 
 sacris, sacris, sacris 
 
 eacros, sacras, sacra 
 
 sacri, sacrse, sacra 
 
 sacris, sacris, sacris. 
 
I 
 
 46 
 
 R STEMS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 KXEUCISES. 
 
 THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 47 
 
 ^W' Connnit the IW^ of the Il-sfe)Ns Vonrb. IT, 2 and VIIF, 2, and 
 write tht\foll<>}rif,p pormlifpnH : triumvir, a tri'iinnr; arbiter, an f/m- 
 pire ; «i^iiil'er, d dandit i drearer ; and the a^Jcctivea assper and crebt'X. 
 
 1. 
 
 A. ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 1. Of a tnnirherons African. 2, Of pious cliilclren. ']. To a renowned 
 armor-bearer. 4. The unjuHt eommittee of tin. 5. X'iolent south wimls. 
 G. By a red crab. 7. Hv (ireek books. 8. A sad son-in-law {obj.). !). To 
 an industrious meelumic. 10. A j)leasant evening ('%•)• By a liidden 
 knife. 12. Of liurtful serjx^nts. Vl. To a learned fathi-r-in-law. 14. Ol 
 a private assistant, lo. Hy a rough island. 1(5. Of a crafty deserter. 17. 
 Pestiferous plans. 18. By a tender b(»u1. It). Of free pient tears. 20. To the 
 free country. 21. The left eye (obj.). •J2. By a lazy farmer. 2o Bhu-k work- 
 men. 24. Beautiful meadows {ohj.). 2.")* Sacred Del])hi (f^lj.). 20. The 
 wretclied Corinth (of»}.). 27. By a prosj)erous sailor. 28. Of a river, 
 carrvini:: uold. 25). By the right arm. oO. Of a conii>lcte picture, ol. Of a 
 fruit-bearing field. fi2. The siited trf)ops {oh}.). 3:>. By the lean steers. 
 84. The wretched inhabitants. 30. Of an active (female) assistant. 
 
 7>'. rREDICATIVE AND OBJECTIVE PHRASES. ' 
 
 1. We plough the fields. 2. He praises Alexander. ,'> You adore 
 Liber. 4. Thou recommendest the book. 5. The umiiires decide. (>. The 
 (female) teachers please;. 7. The assistants are silent. 8. The board of a 
 hundred examine. 9. lie releases the nurhanics. 10. I recall the 
 standard-bearer. 11. ^V'e censure the (female) assistants. 12. He salutes 
 the father-in law. 13. Knives wound. 14. The south-wimis blow. lo. The 
 evenings refresh. 10. It wearies the triumvir. IT. We adhere to the 
 standard-bearer. 18. He kills the boar. 11). They denounce Lysauder. 
 20. They sever by a knife. 21. The mechanics rebel. 22 He reconciles 
 the s(m in-law. 23. The committee of seven resist. 24. The books de- 
 light. 23. The umpires are on their guard. 
 
 2. 
 
 Trandate the following phrases, and point out, to wJiicJi category they 
 belong : 
 1. Accurate teachers. 2. The public lands (ager). 3. The boars of 
 ISIeleager. 4. By the negligence of the nu'chanics, o. She is in need of 
 a teaclier. 0. By the sacred road. 7. The standard-bearei-s remain. 
 8. Of the left bank. 9. By the sword of Alexander. 10. He kills by 8 
 knife. 11. We await the evening. 12. By tlu; assistants of the tyrant 
 13. He sacrifices a goat. 14. \W the sou in-law of Augustus. 15. They 
 banish the decemvirs. 10. Of the obedience of the children. 17. The 
 Al>ic*4is enter. 18. Of fruit-bearing Egypt. 11). The (female) assistants 
 
 of the queen. 20. He conforms to the umpire. 21. By a beautiful 
 hou^e 22 He plants (pfant'lre) wild olives. 23. Frequent games. 
 'M We put the Cantabrians to flight. 25. By the red river. 20. Ot a 
 comi>lete beehive. 27. The wretched trooi)8. 28. The serpents hiss 
 {xtridere) 21). The Calabrians rebeL 30. Of a lean steer. 31. Pestil- 
 eious war.-^. 32. By the rough forests. 33. Of a beautiful cherry-tree. 
 34 Of the red flame. 35. The children {ohj.) of Ponqx-y. 30. To a black 
 standard-bearer. 37. Th(! mechanics urge. 38. He sees a serpent. 31). O 
 lazv preftH-t' 40. O just mnpire! 41. Bv a tender conscience. 42. She 
 reconciles the father-in-law. 43. By a Latin bo(ik. 44. We sncrifice to 
 Liber. 45. lb» banishes tlu; children. 40. The teachers {ohj.) of the peo- 
 i.le. 47. Of a prosi)eroiis neighbor. 48. The (female) assistants^ spin. 
 41). The Umbrians are angry. 50. By the pity of Teucer. 51. Knives 
 frighten. 52. By the knife of an assassin. 
 
 LESSOxN XI. 
 
 THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 § 5»5. 1. The fourth conjiii^ation has the characteristic i, and 
 the same personal endings, as the ist and 2d, except that in the 
 3d person plural the letter it is inserted between characteristic and 
 
 ending. 
 
 § o3i Paradigm. 
 
 Infinitive : Audire, to hear (stem audi^ charact. i, end- 
 ing re). 
 Present inclieative: 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. Audio, I hear 
 
 2. audis, thou hear est 
 
 3. audit, he, she, it hears 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. Audimus, we hear 
 
 2. audit is, you hear 
 
 3. audiunt, they hear 
 
 § 51, 2. The verb Ire, to go, changes its stem i into e in the 
 first person singular and the third plural, as: 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. eo, I go 
 
 2. is, thou goest 
 
 3. it, he, she, it goes 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1 . Imus, we go 
 
 2. Itis, you go 
 
 3. eunt, they go. 
 
 R*.tii. 1. The verb ire forms many compounds with prepositions, that 1« 
 verbs, consisting of the verb ire and a preposition, prefixed to 
 it as: 
 
46 
 
 THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 49 
 
 These are conjugated like the simple verb Ire {adeo praeter eo 
 re™ hZrlantl But the verb amblre (to go arouiul, to solicit 
 Tot^a can Uaatt»), which likewise is a comiH>und ot .r.. is cj^njugated 
 1 ke a retulur verb of the fourth conjugation {amh,o, «/'^'^^' " )• , 
 
 T^.m '> The verb nennlre, to be unable, not (to) can. is conjugated like 
 7r7(/!AJ^l cannot nequis, thou canst not ; /.^Vy^/r.^^^ they cannot) 
 
 Eem ' Th? verb^^ar. has two meanings: a. to co,ne b. to be for ^<^e 
 In the fcrmer signification it is conjugated regularly, like a./rf/r. 
 1 the latt «^ Bi-nification it is a comi>ound of Ire, as ^m^i^o I am for 
 ^; :if.:rtW are for sale ; but .e^Cio. I come, r.,u..^, they come. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 for Side nequire, to be ttnable, not (to) can. 
 ' 1. 
 
 . H T» - ,v,o,io,int *> Portamaperit. 3. Amicis impertit. 4. Sociis 
 
 gabvonimus ''■ '*■''■,/ A,,^iriiara ineo 10. Trimnvirosamliio. 11. Mu- 
 8. F «ymm """«;;"•., «^.f^";.;;^^^ 'Ts' Via,,. inve„T„,,.«. 14. Mendacia 
 
 inveniunt. 1^^'- «:;« "^f„*^:" ^^'^."^o 19. ^ mm,.uB s,.b.-unt. 30. Copi» 
 iuteremit. 18. Ari;i,i„.'nta pr.utr, o. ij<. , ,. ^ 23. Nuutii 
 
 adveniunt. 21. Magistri consentittnt. 22. Cup^-dise vencunt. 
 
 '■'/'"rTl.p auxlUarv troops go a«ay. 2. The Cin.l.rian. arrive. 3. The 
 
 m.ss.-„grr arrives. . . Prov "'i""","' ; ' i^.i.innts perisli 11. We bind 
 9 The.CiaulB come to help^ J^/^ ^^^^t^, bury the pne,. 
 the prisoners. 12. 1 am a ^laM. " . ; ^ «, Lysander. 
 
 14. Von clotl,e the beggars l;'- "»,.,. 7,^rdf„ 18. Thev cross 
 1«. Thou undergoes, dauf^.r3. 7^^ Ui",, .^e 
 
 the Danube. '''■ '.f > ^,^''''^ "''" gvos 22. You exhaust the water, 
 inhabitants. 21. He t nds '''<',^™';,';';, "^^.^ bv flatteries. 2.->. They 
 23. We educate, "'f ""'" bv^be n aceT 27 We punish the slaves, 
 hinder by arms. 20 ' Pass ^^f "^ P^^^^"'^;,; ^. the uoops. 30. You 
 28. 'rhe tTm,,,v,rs d,ssent -^». 11 y e^t"«^^^^ ^, ,,,,,' je,,^ ,«,,i8h. 
 
 guard th,. .T>n«'n'7- "^} t LTstrike the ambassador. 35. They die by 
 ^^ ^"^c' The sSdafibear Sme forth. 37. The votes are for .do, 
 
 2. 
 
 V • ,«* 9 M-ic/mtri erudiunt. 3. Nummos disper 
 A 1 Fluvios e-shaurmnt. ^. Magisiri eruuiuui. .,„._., „,u.rTrft 
 
 yi, i.iiu*iwo .-i-. K N«>cr()tinm coniDeno. o. Lastra apcrire. 
 
 r-^auti. r:nrnr8.''E<pi- de^iCr 9. U^^Hi exeunt. 10. Captlvi 
 
 redeunt. 11 Statuam oporiunt. 12. ^rumnas molliunt. 13. Bell um 
 
 1 . J u>t tia ^ enit. 18. Discipulis impertltis. 10. Adversariis subvenitis 
 .rat am impertiunt. 2 . Nuntiis comperiunt. 22. Frederlcus disi 
 
 or T^ * ''''^'? ^''^^'''''- ^'^- I^l'^^^litiis lenlre. 2.1 Morbum 
 
 00 ij -''^ Puniunt. 27. Perfug.e pereunt. 28. Mendacia in- 
 ;p- Hegnum stabilit. 30. Oppro!)ria subeo 
 i^. 1. We soften the tears. 2. We lull the watchman to sleep 3 
 TlM.y cross the Hellespont. 4. We bring as.^istance to the Cantabrians 
 11.; stiitiics are for sale. 6. The Numidians come. 7. They bury 
 
 \7 n] ?' 1 •?■ '' '''''' ^>''''^ *^ ^^^ q^^^'^"- '^- '^Jiey feel the iniury. 
 10. Ihe inhabitants come forth. 11. Thev cover the pictures r> You 
 hnish the book. 13. We fortify the houses. 14. They dst rib 
 
 20 
 sent 
 lenit. 
 veiiltis 
 
 tvr..«+ o~ \\-~ 1 , --• ^"" strengthen the 
 
 'h \'^- *" approach tlie prelect. 2(>. The workmen thirst. 27. 
 
 1 he Ahicans commit cruelties. 28. We season the dishes. 29 You 
 nourish a serpent. 30. They cross the street. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 § •lo. 1. The third conjugation differs from the other three: 
 
 a. I]y having a coxsoxant, or the vowel u as a characteristic ; 
 
 /j. By having personal endings, beginning with a vowel. 
 
 § oO, 2. The endings of the third conjugation are the fol- 
 lowing : 
 
 1. Iiifiiiilivc': ^re. 
 
 2. Present iiicliiaf ivc : 
 
 8i:XGULAIl. 
 
 1. — o. 
 
 2. — is. 
 
 3. — it. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. — hniis. 
 
 2. — Uis. 
 
 3. — ynt. 
 
 § or. 3. The STEM of verbs of the 3d conjugation is found by 
 removing the ending ere of the infinitive. Bv successively attaching 
 to -the stem the endings § 56, the fohowing paradigm is formed! 
 
 ♦ This phrase may be translated in diflferent wayK 
 
50 
 
 THE TIIIIID CONJUGATION. 
 
 THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 51 
 
 Infinitive: legCre, to rmd {^i^\\\ hg—, characteristic^, 
 endinc: ere). 
 
 Present indieative: 
 
 SINGUI.AR. 
 
 1. Lego, I read 
 
 2. legis, thou reddest 
 
 3. legit, he, she, it reads 
 
 PTXRAL. 
 
 1. Leghniis, ice read 
 
 2. legitis, 1/on read 
 
 3. legiint, they read. 
 
 Rem 1 The infinitives of the 2d and 3d conjugations are distinguislied 
 bv the quantity of the vowel e, preceding the linal sylhiUle n, 
 which in the second conjugation is ^o/^<7. being the cliaracteristic ; 
 but in the 3d conjugation sh»rt, being a mere connecting letter. 
 Rem e. Tlie Ist and 2d lu-rsons i)lural of the 3d and 4tli conjugations are 
 distin'niished bv tlie quantitv of the vow.d i bctm-e the linul syllable 
 mus and tis. This vowel in the 3d conjugation is short, belonging to 
 the ENDING, and forming its connecting vowel. We therefore pro- 
 nounce Icfjimas, legitis, not legTmus, U<jl tis, different trom the 4th 
 conjugation, where the vowel i is the characteristic and lonj. 
 § 5h! 4. Several verbs of the 3d conjugation take the vowel 
 t between cliaracteristic and ending in the 1st person singular 
 and 3d plural, thus having the ai)pearance of verbs of the 4th 
 conjugation in these persons. These verbs, which are ciiHed I- 
 Verll!»»^ are the following : 
 
 capere, to take f ugere, to flee 
 
 cupere, to icish jacere, to throw 
 
 facere, to do, to make parere, to beget 
 fodere, to dig 
 with their comixmnds (sec Rem. 3), and the compounds of the obsolete 
 verbs lacere and specere. 
 
 They are conjugated after the following i)attern: 
 
 quatere, to shake 
 
 rajx^re, to rob 
 
 sapere, to taste, to b^ wise 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. Capio, I take 
 
 2. capis, thou takest 
 
 3. capit, he takes 
 
 rLUR-VL. 
 
 1. Ca])imus, ice take 
 
 2. capitis, yon take 
 
 3. capiunt, they take. 
 
 Rem 3. ThecompcMindsof r^;)er^/ac^r^ .;>r^?r, rnpere, sapere, larere and 
 specere change the vowels a and e of the stem into 7. i he compounds 
 oi quatere take the form of cutere. 
 
 CArERE. 
 
 accii)ere 
 conci]X're 
 decipere 
 incipere 
 
 FACERE. 
 
 affic«'re 
 coniict're 
 deficere 
 interficere 
 
 JACERE. 
 
 abjicere 
 conjicere' 
 dejicero 
 ejicere^ 
 
 RAPERE. 
 
 arripere 
 corri})ere' 
 diripere 
 eripere^ 
 
 BAPERE. 
 
 desij)ere 
 insipere- 
 
 LACERE. 
 
 allicere 
 
 pellicere^ 
 
 elicere^ 
 
 SPECERE. 
 
 aspicere^ 
 conspicere 
 desi)icere^ 
 inspicera 
 
 QUATERE. 
 
 concutere 
 percutere* 
 excutere' 
 
 The changed stem-VQW(»ls of these verbs always are short. 
 therefore inter' jicit, in'spicit,de'jicit, con'cutit, d:c. 
 
 Pronounce 
 
 Rem. 4. Thof^e verl)s, compounded of facere and words other than 
 prepositions, retain the a, as: liquefarere, to melt; tacuefacere, to 
 empty ; calfat'ere, to warm ; assuefacere, to accustom ; mansuefacere^ 
 to tame- patefacere, to open ; satisfacere, to satisfy. 
 
 § 
 
 •59. 5. The following verbs of this coi^'ugation have several 
 il*re;;'lllar forms in the present tense : 
 
 ■ 1. Velle (contracted from volere), to be willing, to. will ; 2. 
 JVoHe (instead of ?ion velle), to ])e unwilling, not to wish ; 3. 
 Jfflle (instead of magis velle), to wish rather ; 4. Ferre (con- 
 tracted from /erere)) to carry; 5. J5*\se (contracted from esere), 
 to be; G. Posse (instead of pote esse), to be able, (to) can. 
 Tliese verbs are thus conjugated in the indicative present: 
 
 I wilt', U) he tcilling. 
 S. 1. volo, I am icilling 
 
 2. vis, thou art willing 
 
 3. vult, he is icilling 
 
 3rnlle^ to wish rather. 
 malo, I rather wish 
 mavis, thou rather 
 icishest 
 
 rather 
 
 Nolle, to he unwilling 
 nolo, I ani nnicilling 
 non vis, thou art un- 
 
 icilling 
 non vult, he is umcil-maxuXt, he 
 linn \ icishes 
 
 P.\.\d[Mi\\\x9^,iceareicillingno\uni\\B, we arc ?/7i-malumus, we rather 
 I i willing j itish 
 
 2, vultis, ^0?« are willing \\o\\\\i\iis,you are, &c.v[i?ivxx\i\^, you rather 
 
 I I wish 
 
 Z.\o\\mi,they are willing i\iA\mi, they are, &c. malunt, tliey rather 
 
 I wish. 
 
 Ferre, to carry. 
 S. l.jfero, I carry 
 
 2. fers, thou carriest 
 
 3. fert, he carries 
 
 P. 1. ferimus, we car?^. 
 2. 1 fert is, you carry 
 S.'ferunt, they carry 
 
 Ks!*e, to be. 
 sum, I am 
 es, thou art 
 est, he is 
 sumus, we are 
 estis, you are 
 sunt, they are 
 
 Posse, to he able. 
 possum, I can 
 potes, thou canst 
 potest, he can 
 possumus, we can 
 potestis, you can 
 possunt, they can 
 
 1 To throw. 2 To seize. ' To throw out * To snatch away. 
 
 > To look at, to regard. ' To be mad. to be insane, to be silly. ' To allure, to attract • Tt 
 •trike, to stab. 'To draw out « To despise. ' To thake out, to shake off, to siTt 
 
<J2 
 
 THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 53 
 
 Rem. ;"). The verbs prre and esue form many com]>oun(ls, wliicli are con- 
 jugated like tlie simi)le verhs. as: afi nr—af fcr<>, afftrs, ajj'ert : 
 pracferre — prae'fcro, praefcrs, pnuftrt ; adt.ssc — adsiini) adm, adest; 
 pracesae—praisum, j)r(i'(ft, prmest. 
 
 The verb pfodcssf, a comiiound <tf pro and ffise, has the letter d 
 inserted in all forms of cssr, which hetrin with a vowel, while in 
 those forms, which begin with a consonant, this letter is dropjnd, 
 as: Pi'osuin, prodta, prodext, ^noKfinnis, prodistia, prosnnt. 
 
 Rem. 0. The most usual compoumls oi eaxe ar«; the following: Ahc!<a(\ to 
 be absent ; adixKe, to be )>resent ; dtcsse, to be wanting; obrssc, to 
 be in tin* wnv, to hiinlcr ; pnerssr, to he a cliiof, to eoininand ; prodesse, 
 to 1)0 useful, to benolit ; sxperesse, to survive. 
 
 § 60. 6. To the 3(1 conjugation behmg all ilicoplive (in- 
 choative) verbs, that is those, which have the termiiuitiou scere. 
 These verbs are dkrived words, inostlv from verbs of the 2d con- 
 jugation, sometimes from a<ljectives or nouns. 
 
 They are called incept Ire, because they originally denote the 
 BEGixxTXG of an action. Tlu'v generally are rendered by the 
 English verb " to hecome^^ with an adjfxtive, as : 
 
 Virere, to he yreen — vin^scere, to become green ; 
 calere, to he irftrm — calescere, to become icorm ; 
 dormire, to deep — obdormiscere, to fall odeep. 
 
 The verbs, from which some inceptives are derived (stem-verbs), 
 are uot in use, as the stem-verbs of dlscere^ noscerc^ assuescere, 
 crescere. 
 
 All inceptive verbs are conjugated regularly after the paradigm 
 of Ufjere. 
 
 1^ For a list of the inceptive verbs see XIII, B of the Vocabularies. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Commit the verbs XIII, 1, A of the Vocahuhnien, and write the following 
 pa rod ignis : 
 
 Scribere, to write, regere, to govern, dicere. to sag, discerc, to learn, 
 incipere, to begin, intertieere, to kill, ejicere, to throw out, currere,^o run, 
 pra^ferre, to prefer, diripere, to plunder. 
 
 1. 
 
 PKEDICATIVE PHRASES. 
 
 1. The teachers describe. 2. The peojde govern. 3. The gods live. 
 4. The bovs play. 5. Pvrrhus vields. (>. The earth nourishes. 7. The 
 slaves cook. 8. The farniers sow. \). Wars commence. 10. The Italiana 
 deceive. 11. The Persians ilee. 12. The pirates rob. Vo. Wines re- 
 
 fresh. 14. The tributes reject. 15. The ])risoners escape. 10. The 
 freedmen are insane. 17. A member of the committee of s<'Ven reports. 
 18. The philosophers conceive, li). The promises allure. 20. The Celts 
 di•^ 21. The g(Kls beiret. 22. The umpires ins) ect. 23. The Numi- 
 diuiis kill. 24.' 1 he mechanics throw down. 25. The ambassador oll'ers. 
 2ti. The queen rather wishes. 27. The pirates are unwilling. 28. The 
 t!0>ps are willing. 29. The prefect commands (is a chief). 80. The 
 accused is absent. 31. Study benelits. 32. The relatives are absent. 
 33. l;0:.ks are useful. 34. Tlie grandfather survives. 35. Fortifications 
 are wanting. 
 
 OBJECTIVE nillASES. 
 
 3G. I escape the danger. 37. I deceive the teacher. 38. He throws 
 th«' arms awav! ,31). Thou bringest the letter. 40. They surround the 
 allies. 41. We oncede the victorv. 42. You confer a favor. 43. They 
 perfect the walls. 44. They behold the shore. 45. Thou bribest the 
 tribunes. 40. They consimie the provisions. 47. He defends the poet. 
 48, Thev abandon the towns. 40. We yield to the enemies. 50. lou 
 give satislaction to the queen. 51. ^Ve accuse (arguere) ot perfidy. 52. 
 Thev ac<'use of negliircnce. 53. You are wanting to the country. 54. 
 It is useful to the trooi)s. 55. They return irnldirei^thG prisoners. 50. 
 You i)refer Virdl. 57. They affect by tears. 58. We succumb to 
 hanlships. 59. Thou art victorious by treachery. GO. You return 
 thanks. 
 
 Translate into Engliah : 
 
 1. Adversariis cedunt. 2. Adversarii cedunt. 3. Legatos repetunt. 
 4. Leg.lti repetunt. 5. Ornanu'Uta abjiciimt. G. Ornameuta desunt. 7. 
 Belluui indlcit. 8. Bellum negligit. 0. Bellum incipiunt. 10. Bell um 
 ])erticiunt. 11. Bellum opprimit. 12. Perfidia vincit. 13. Perfidia 
 viueit. 14. Hasta interticit. 15. llasta interficit. IG. Promissis alliciunt. 
 17. Promissa alliciunt. 18. Prafectum convincit. 19. Priefectus con- 
 viucit. 20. C'opias lacessunt. 21. CopiiC lacessunt. 
 
 2. 
 
 j\. 1. The colonies fall off. 2. Conflagrations destroy. 3. The pirate 
 strikes. 4. Flatteries allure. 5. The pen corrects. G. Luxury corrupts. 
 7. Words deceive. 8. Athens is foolish. 9. The Scythians plunder. 10. 
 The trooi)S confide. 11. The Romans forgive. 12. The CJauls give 
 satisfaction. 13. The messengers report. 14. The precepts are useful. 
 15. Testimonies are wanting. 10. The assistants are absent. 17. They 
 throw the swords awav. 18. ^\e acquit the accused. 19. They receive 
 a letter. 20. Thev sharpen the knivt-s. 21. We summon the inhabit- 
 ants. 22. He closes the gates. 23. We abandon the cause. 24. They 
 delav the undertakings. 25. You oj^press the provinces. 20. They 
 diminish the glorv. 27. We distinguish the rules. 28. Y^ou divide the 
 island. 29. Thoii escapest the assassin. 30. We succumb to arms. 31. 
 Thev betrav the country. 32. They .yield to the Plebeians. 33. The 
 Plel)eians vield. 34. He censures the mechanics. 35. The mechanics 
 censure. 30. The candidates promise. 37. We promise to the candi 
 dates. 38. He brings the letter back. 39. They offer an armistice. 
 
 n. 1. Patientia vincit. 2. Patientia vincit. 3. Dolus opprimit. 4 
 
54 
 
 PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVES AND NOUNS. 
 
 Dolo opprimit. 5. Consilium contomnit. C. Consilium deest. 7. Iivn- 
 diuni fffugit. 8. Invidia evcrtit. 9. Discipuli pioliciuut. 10. Discipuloa 
 negligunt. 11. Libros inspiciunt. 12. Libri excellunt. 13. Liberos 
 dilitrit. 14. Liberi discunt {to learn). 15. Liborum extoUunt. 16. 
 Libnini adjicit. 17. Libruin conficit. 18. Captlvos arrii)iunt. 10. Cap- 
 tlvi arripiunt. 20. Prafccti deciinunt. 21. Pra^fectos decipiunt. 22. 
 Domuni reliciunt. 23. Donununi produnt. 24. Oppidum tradunt. 25. 
 Oppiduni deficit. 20. Opprobrium perferuut. 27. Litteras i^erferuut. 
 28. Captivos occidunt. 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVES AND NOUNS. 
 
 § 01. 1. Adjectives and nouns are called predicative, 
 when they are connected with any of the forms of the verb esse, 
 to be (see § 59). The verb esse in connection with a predicative 
 adjective or noun, expresses one verbal idea, and if it is in the 
 finite verb, forms tojrether with its adjective or noun the predicate. 
 Thus validus est (he is strong*) is the same as valet; tacit us 
 sum (I am silent) the same as taceo; servus sum (I am a slave) 
 the same as servio. 
 
 The verb esse in this connection is called the COillllil) which 
 generally is placed after its adjective or noun. 
 
 § 63. 2. The predicative adjective or noun with its copula, 
 in the same manner as a verbal predicate, is dependent on a 
 subject, and with it forms a predic.vtive phrase. 
 
 Rem. 1. Thus " puer assiduiis est, the boy is diligent" is a predicative 
 phrase, in which pit er is the subject, and a,sxidtnis ed the pbedi- 
 CATE. Here the two words assidnus est have the grammatical value 
 of one siugh; word, and the copuhi est has the function of a ])ersonal 
 ending of tlie verb, while the predicative adjective assiduus rep- 
 resents its STEM. 
 
 § 655. 3. Predicates, consisting of a predicative adjective or 
 noun with the copula, agree in the following manner with the 
 grammatical subject: 
 
 1. The adjective agrees with the subject in gender, number and 
 case, and hence always is in the nominative, as the case of the 
 subject 5 
 
 PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVES AND NOUNS. 
 
 55 
 
 2. The predicative noun agrees with the subject in case only, 
 but if it is a movable noun it also agrees in gender and number ; 
 
 8. Tlie copula agrees with the subject in number and person. 
 
 Diligentia conspic'ua est, the diligence is co?ispicuo us. —Verhi' 
 
 gium securum est, t/te refuge is safe.—^lnvi alti sunt, the walls 
 
 "lire high.— Gujxis poeta est, Gajvs is a i^et. — lujustitia vitium 
 
 est, injustice is a vice. — Lucretia serva est, Lucretia is a slave, 
 
 -Athenaj arbitra} sunt, Athens is the umpire. 
 
 Rem. 2. For the agreeanent of the predicative adjective in the construc- 
 tion of the accusative with the infinitive see Book III. 
 
 § 61. 4. Predicates, containing predicative adjectives with the 
 
 copula, are thus conjugated : 
 
 singulak. 
 ^alvus or salva sum, Iain safe 
 salvus or salva ea, thou art safe 
 salvus, salva, salvum est, ?ie, she, it 
 is safe 
 
 plural. 
 
 Salvi or salvse sumus, we are safe 
 salvi or salva? estis, you are safe 
 salvi, salva^, salva sunt, they are 
 safe. 
 
 Kern 3 The adjectives in the 1st and 2d persons are either masculine 
 or FEMININE, according as the speaker, or the person spoken to is a 
 nu\le or a female. In \he third j^ersons they may be either mascu- 
 line, feminine or neuter, according to the gender of the subject, 
 expressed or understo(xl. 
 
 Rem 4 Predicates, containinir predicative nouns, which are movable, 
 are conjucrated in the same manner, as those, contammg adjectives, 
 except "that in the 3d person they can not assume a neuter gender. 
 
 § 65. 5. Adjectives, predicative as well as attributive, may 
 have OBJECTS, like verbal i)redicates, and form together with these 
 latter an objective phrase. Such objects generally precede their 
 governing adjectives, as : 
 
 Imperii cupidus, desirous of poicer.—Amicis fidus est, he is 
 faithful to friends.— Kuhrn pleni sunt, they are full of courage. 
 — Arrogantia molesti estis, you are unpleasant by arrogance. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 f^^ Comuqate the following predicates: Aptus sum, 1 am fit; 
 genfrosus sum, / am generous; liber sum, lam free; Romanus sum, 
 lam a Roman; Persa s,\xm,Iam a Persian, 
 
 A Predicates mTii the Copula. 1. You are accurate. 2. ThoB 
 art learned, O poet! 3. They {the icomen) are decent. 4. She is tired 
 
56 
 
 PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVES AND NOL'XS. 
 
 5. It is unjust, G. We are sorrowful. 7. I (a icomayi) am thankful. 
 
 8. You are faitliful, O daui^-litrrs ! J). TIkhi art sick, O Cornelia ! 10. lie 
 is i)ernicious. 11. It is manifest. 12. We are i)rosi)erous. l;>. You are 
 treaclierous, O Celts! 14. Thou art profane, U Semiu'onius! 1."). I {a 
 wanuiii) am ani^ry. 10. Thou art beautiful, O queen! 17. You are cau- 
 tious, O mighbors! 18. We are unknown. lU. She is tender. 20. Wa 
 is lazy. 
 
 B. Prkdicatiyp: Phr.vses. 21. The Cimbvians are cruel. 22. The 
 standard-bearers are firm. 23. Poets are happy. 24. The towns are 
 small. 2."). The colonies are rebellious. 2(5. The sailors are active. 
 27. The plum-trees are beautiful. 28. The (female) assistants are inex- 
 perienced. 2!). The Persians are conscientious. oO. The roads are nar- 
 row. :J1. The arguments are erroneous. o2. The g:round is ri'd. ;]:}. The 
 town is wealthy, 31. The t^(jds are eternal. 35. Tin; (female) teacher is 
 learned. 30. Sempronius is a ])atri('ian. 37. Lucretia is a Plebeian. 
 38. Sulla is a Homan. 31). The Vistula is a river. 40. Slander is a dis- 
 grace. 41. ^'Emilia is a teacher. 42. The Africans ar(> slaves. 43. (Jold 
 is a metal. 44, Syracuse is wealthy. 45, Leuctra is renowned. 40. The 
 Seine is broad. 47. Poplars an; hiiz:h. 4X. The troops are faitliful. 
 49. The camp is secure. ."50. The games are magnificent. 51. A vacation 
 is pleasant. 52. The armistice is unfair. 
 
 C. OiJjiXTiVE Phrases. 1. (Jlorije cupidus. 2. Incohlrum plenus. 
 
 3. Indutiarum iguarus. 4. Pojuilo necessarius. 5. Sociis jucundus. 
 0. Pr;ed;e cupidi sunt. 7. Beneficiorum cujjida est. 8. Fiducia^ plena est. 
 
 9. Dei ignari estis. 10. Populo earns es. 11. Patri;e perniciosum est. 
 12. Pnefecto grati sumus. 13. Incolis incognita es, Lucretia! 14. Tri- 
 umviro infesta? estis, feminaM 15. Sociis molesti sumus. 
 
 1. Envious of glory. 2. Desirous of victory. 3. Ignorant of crimes. 
 
 4. Adverse to the; i)lan. 5. Friendly to the Africans. 0. Dear to the 
 Patricians. 7. Contrary to prudence. 8. Pernicious to the troops. 1). I 
 am faithful to the master. 10. We are thankful to the teacher. 11. I 
 {a itoman) am full of confidence. 12. We {looniin) ar«; envious of the 
 queen. 13. Thou art ignorant of the undertaking, O Julia! 14. You 
 are hostile to the allies, O Pomans ! 15. They {the women) are ungrate- 
 ful to the country. 10. They are necessary to the tr(M)ps. 17. We are 
 tired by the battle. 18. You an; wealthy by commerce. 10. They are 
 full of joy. 20. It is near to Athens. 21. It is peculiar to the Komans, 
 22. Thou art agreeable to the troops, O son-in-law! 23. Thou an un- 
 known to the triumvir, O Cornelia ! 
 
 2. 
 
 A. Predicative Piik.vper. 1, The umpire? are just. 2. The evenings 
 are pleasant, 3. The Belgians are brave. 4. The poet is cont<'nted. 
 
 5. Justice is sh)W. 0. Tin; mob is profane. 7. The ]X)ison is perni.-ious. 
 8. The house is magnificent. 0. Homer is blind. 10. Athens is faithful. 
 11. The darkness is dense. 12. The enmity is secret. 13. The batth? is 
 bloody. 14. The advantng(?s are manifest. 15. The sailors are rebel- 
 lious. 10. The farmers are idle. 17. The storehouses are full. 18. The 
 gods are kind. 19. Susa is rich. 20. Delphi is renowned. 21. Anns are 
 hidden. 22. The funeral is magnificent. 23. A (pieen is the unqiire. 
 24. W^ar is an evil. 25. Thebes is an ally. 20. Poverty is a teacher. 
 
 ADVERBS OF MANNER AND TIME. 
 
 57 
 
 27. The places are high. 28. The ground is sandy. 29. The words are 
 false. 30. The remedies are fit. 
 
 B. OiUECTiVE Phrases. 31. It is sacred to Minerva. 32. I am de- 
 sirous of leisure. 33. Thou art dear to the gods, O queen! 34. We are 
 ignorant of fate. 35. It is contrarv to the rules. 30. Thev are devoted 
 {(Ldit'ts) to studies. 37. You are hostile to tyrants. 38. She is envious 
 of rivals. 39. Thou art full of courage, O Lucretia ! 40. 1 (a woman) am 
 thankful to the physician. 41. He is adverse to an armistice. 42. It is 
 contrary to duty. 43. It is necessary to the colonies. 44. Thou art 
 ungrateful to the ]irefect, O son ! 45. It is accej^table {acceptus) to the 
 people. 40. We an^ faithful to the master. 
 
 47. Pecuni.T cupidu.?. 48. Invidia' plenus. 49. PI ebej is amicus. 50. Dis 
 sacer. 51. Pra^fecto diibium est. 52. Oraculi ignarus sum. 53. Disci- 
 ])llna^ contrarium est. 54. Negotio attenti sumus, 55. Siculis cari estis. 
 5(). Patriciis exitiosus est. 57. Belli ignarus est. 58. liomilnis ignomi- 
 niosum est. 59. Concordia? infesti estis. GO. Fabio ingrati sunt. 01. Pa- 
 triae necessarius es, Poinjxli ! 02. S:evitia^ adversa es. regina I 03. Musis-, 
 dediti sumus. 04. Deorum invida est. 05. Incolis cari sunt. GO. Magis- 
 tro moiestum est. 
 
 LESSOX XIV. 
 
 ADVERBS OF MANNER AND TIME. 
 
 § 06i 1. Adverbs denote properties of actions, as qniete 
 vivere, to live quietly ; Sdepe ecenit, it hajjpens often. They are 
 divided into five elasses, viz. : 1. adverbs of place, 2. of time, 3. 
 
 MANXKR, 4. IXTEXSITY, 5. CAUSE. 
 
 § G^. 2. Some adverbs arc formed according to certain gen- 
 eral RULES by way of inflection, but other adverbs are of an 
 IRREGULAR formation. To the former belong most adverbs of 
 MANNER, to the latter most of the adverbs of time. 
 
 Hem. 1. In the English language adverbs of manner generally are 
 formed by atfixing the ti'rmination (y to adjectives. — In this lesson 
 we shall consider «mly those adverbs of manner^ which are formed 
 from MOVABLE adjectives, and the most usual adverbs of time. 
 
 § G8t 3. The movable adjectives (§ 45) form adverbs ot 
 manner by adding the termination e to their declension-stems, as : 
 jucnndus, j^leasant — jucnnde, pleasantlf/ / i)ulcher, beautiful — 
 pnlchre, beautifully ; liber, /'/-«^e — libere, freely. 
 
 They are formed most easily by removing the ending i of the 
 
58 
 
 ADVERBS OF MANNER AND TIME. 
 
 grenitivo sin.ir., and substituting for it tlie adverbial termination e, 
 as: ae(jer, G. aegri — aegre ; prosper, G. vro^peri—prospere. 
 
 § 69. EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1. Bonus irrcfridarlv forms htnc, woll ; 
 
 2. Some adjectives iorm their adverbs by the termination v, the most 
 usual of which are : 
 
 certo, certainly manifesto, manifistly secreto, secretly 
 
 cito, quickly necessario, neccxsarily sedulo, diligently 
 
 crehro, frequently necopinato, unexpectedly sotIo, seriously 
 
 M»o, falsely i)CT\^etuo, perpetually subito, suddenly 
 
 ioTtwito, accidentally mro, rarely tuto, sa fly. 
 
 § 70. 4. The most usual adverbs of time are : 
 
 adlmc, still, as yet, yet mane, early in the morn- quotannis, yearly 
 
 antea, before 
 eras, to-morrow 
 dill, long, a long time 
 liodie. to-day 
 interdiu, by day 
 interdum, sometimes 
 jam, already 
 jam diu, long since 
 hen, yesterday. 
 
 mg 
 noctu, hy night 
 nunc, /tow 
 nunquam, never 
 nu])er, lately 
 bWm, formerly 
 postea, afterwards 
 
 quotidie, daily 
 
 rursus, again 
 
 Rrjte, often 
 
 sem]>er, always 
 
 si mill, at the same time 
 
 statim, directly 
 
 tum (tunc), then 
 
 postridie, on the next day unquam, ecer 
 pridie, the day before 
 
 § 71, 5. Adverbs of manner and time are indeclinable (§ 3), 
 although the former are formed by means of inflection from 
 adjectives. They are governed by verbs, and are considered as 
 their objects, forming objective phrases with them. Adverbs, 
 like other objects, generally jwecede their governing verljs, as : 
 Beate vivere, to live happilg; statim redire, to return directlt/; 
 semper errat, he always errs. 
 
 Rem. 2. Adjectives, especially predicative adjectives witli the copula, 
 may be the governing 'words of adverijs, as: Semper pardtus, 
 alwavs readv; j(ini propinqui .v////^ they are near already; saepe 
 irati'estis, you often are angry. But adjectives generally cannot be 
 the governing words of adverbs of manner. 
 
 EXEJRCISES. 
 1. 
 
 1. Absurde a^itis. 2. Falso accus.ltis. 3. Immodice bibis. 4. Piilchre 
 cnnit. 5. J'erspicue cernimus. 6. Assidue colimus. 7. Cupide consu- 
 munt. 8. Furiose contradicit. 9. Accurate describis. 10. CJloridse de- 
 
 TIIE SUBJECT-INFINITIVE. 
 
 59 
 
 cedere. 11. Manifesto decipiunt. 12. Egregie distinguunt. 13. Subito 
 fugiunt 14. Male legis. 15. Caute procedo. 10. Diserte defendis. 17. 
 Strenue resistinms. 18. Adhuc vivit. 19. Hodie abeunt. 20. Interdiu 
 dormio. 21. Interdum •dissentimus. 22. Jam intelligimus. 23. Mane 
 Burgitis. 24. Noctu advenitis. 2~). Nunc desipis. 26. Nunquam 
 impedis. 27. Kursus recedis. 28. Semper diffldit. 29. Quotidie pave- 
 tis. 30. S.e})e i)ecx!anms. 31. Adhuc iniilta est. 32. Interdiu otiosi 
 sumus. 33. Interdum ivgroti sunt. 34. Nunquam justum est. 
 
 1. lie builds magnificently. 2. We approacli cautiously. 3. They 
 think accurately. 4. He pardons freely. 5. We openly condemn. 6.* 
 'J'liey deliberate* a long time. 7. They desire immoderately. 8. Thou 
 decidest unjustly. 9. Sometimes you err. 10. We daily expect. 11. 
 Thou dwelicst Veil. 12. We examine actively (sedulus). 13. You 
 watch by niglit. 14. We listen (audlre) attentively. 15. He answers 
 kindly. 10. They }>lunder eagerly. 17. She i)leads eloquently. 18. 
 Thou teachest excellently. 19. Vou falsely assert (affirmdre). 20. They 
 fight furiously. 21. ThVy generously confide. 22. You arrive unex- 
 l»ectedly. 23.* He lauirl is immoderately. 24. They necessarily perish. 
 2"). Th'ou yieldt'St quickly. 2(i. I labor actively [inipiger). 27. They 
 advance wonderfully. 28.* They return to-day. 29. I always obey. 30. 
 'J'hou oftt'u art unii:ratefiil, O dauirhterl 31. They go directly away. 32. 
 Thou still art angry, () queen ! 33. You lany-nish already. 34. We are 
 now contented. 35. You never are contented, O women ! 30. They 
 a^^vmhV' (c<mrcnire) yearly. 37. You are sometimes unpleasant. 38. We 
 are always ready. 39. They secretly fall otf. 40. They are now for 
 
 sale. 
 
 2. 
 
 1. Modesto dissuadeo. 2. Tutrt latent. 3. Diserte persuadetis. 4. 
 Immodice succenses. 5. Tarde fiuitis. 0. Serio vituperamus. 7. Beate 
 regnas. 8. Pubiice refutamus. 9. Sedulo oi)i)ugiiatis. 10. Nunquam 
 festlnas. 11. Secreto conjurant. 12. Falso declaras. 13. Inepte diju- 
 dicat. 14. Semper a^qui estis. 15. Interdum severa est. 10. Adhuc 
 imnmtati sumus. 
 
 1. You praise immoderately. 2. He contradicts timidly. 3. They 
 advance slowJy. 4. We zealously defend. 5. They return by night. 
 0. I rarely enter. 7. Tliey cross Imiuently. 8. He rebukes severely. 
 9. He quietly ceases. 10. They esca])e perfidiously. 11. We live 
 obscurely. 12. You relate well. 13. They pi^rish abominably. 14. 
 Thou ])unishest unjustly. 15. Thou art elo(iiient today. 16. He 
 always is obscui-e. i7. Thou art again unjust, O queen ! 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 THE SUBJECT-IXFIXITIVE. 
 
 § 7*2. 1. The Latin Infi.nitives occur in three different rela- 
 tions: ]. as SUBJECT, 2. as object, 3. as predicate. According 
 
60 
 
 THE SUBJECT-INFINITIVE. 
 
 Tn^ SCBJECT-INFINITIVE. 
 
 61 
 
 to these relations they are called subject-iiifiuitive, oVyect-iiifiniMye 
 and predicate-mlinitive. 
 
 Rem. 1. The rKKDTCATE-TNFiNrnvE occurs only in the case of the 
 li'idoricdl iiifuiitlit', and in the construction of the arcffiatirr icit/t t/t6 
 iiijinitke. These constructions will he considered at their proper 
 places. The ohjkct-infinitive will he considered in the ntxt 
 lesson. In the present lesson the suiuect-infinitive is explained, 
 that is : the infinitive as suiJJECT in a predicative phrase. 
 
 § 7 J{. 2. The proper form of the subject is tlie substantive (that 
 is a NOUN or pronoun). See § 19. Predicates, which have sub- 
 stantives, either expressed or understood, for subjects, arc called 
 
 liei'fi^oiial |>rcdii'ateji». 
 
 Rem. 2. Thus the phrases '* the sun fiJiinfst" "lie xlines" are pebsonal, 
 both having substantives as suhjects. The liUtin predicates <nno, 
 niDUS, <nn(it, dr., where the suhjects (/, thou, he) are undivdood, are 
 PERSONAL i)redicates. 
 
 § 71. '^. Predicates, whose subjects are not substantivks, 
 expressed or understood, are called illiperiiiOIial l>re<li- 
 catc!^. They are of three kinds : 
 
 (I. Either they have no subject at all, as tvnat, it thunders ; 
 plult, it rains; 
 
 b. Or tlieir subject is an infinitive ; 
 
 c. Or tliey have a dependent sentence as subject. 
 
 Predicative ])hrases, which are formed by an infinitive as sub- 
 ject, are called iiai|>n>oiiai predicaf ive |>lira»es>, 
 as 3Ianere licet, it is allowed to remain. 
 
 Rem. o. The ri'gular form of the inii>ersonal predicate in English is the 
 tldrd person singnkir, connected witli the inii)ersonal ])ronoun " <Y." 
 The subject-infinitive in this case stands after the pr«'dicate. I'mt 
 sometimes the pronoun it is omitted, and then tlu^ infinitive y;/t- 
 ceilea the predicatt\, as : Jt is use/at to hdrn, or to Udrii is uxepil. 
 
 Rem. 4. We consider here only the case, when the imi)ersonal predicate 
 has an infinitive as suhject. Those impersonal predicates, which 
 re(jnire dependent sentences for subjects, will he explained in the second 
 Part (p. 609 foil.). 
 
 § 7«5, 4. Impei'sonal predicates in Latin are either verbs, or 
 predicative adjectives or nouns with the coj)ula. In the former 
 instance the verb, and in the latter the copula stands in the third 
 person singular. The predicative adjective or noun is in the 
 nominative singular, and the adjective always in the neuteb 
 
 .•I 
 ■i 
 
 
 GENDER The sul)ject-inrinitive regularly /^recefZes its impersonal 
 
 predicate, as : 
 
 AmhuJare conduclt,. it is serviceable to walk (to walk is 
 
 serviceable); 
 
 laborare decorum est, it is honorable to w^ork; 
 rebel/are i)ijiiria est, it is a wrong to rebel. 
 § 70. 5. The number of verbs, which may be used as imper- 
 Foiial predicates, is limited in Latin, and by far not so large as in 
 English. The following of them take an infinitive as subject: 
 ConduHt, it is serviceable Ubet, it pleases 
 
 decet, it becomes, is becoming licet, it is allowed 
 
 displicet, it displeases placet, it pleases 
 
 expeditl it is expedient praestat, it is preferable, 
 
 jucat, it delights, it is delightful it is better, 
 
 and sometimes prodest, it is useful, and nocet, it is injurious. 
 
 § 77. 6. But PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVES ai'c vcTy frcqucutly used 
 as hupersoiud predicates in Latin, and their use agrees with that 
 of the English language, as : decorum ed, it is honorable -, aeqwam 
 est, it is fair ; Jiisfum ed, it is just ; cjenerdsum est, it is gener- 
 ous ; jncundum est, it is pleasant, &c. 
 
 Here belong the indeclinable neuter adjectives necesse (neces- 
 sary) and' .<^a//.s (enough, sufficient), which in connection with the 
 copula frecpiently occur as impersonal predicates, as: Cedere 
 necesse est, it is necessary to yield ; obedire satis est, it is suffi- 
 cient to obev. 
 
 § 78. 7. The jnibject-intinitlvc may consist of a predicative ad- 
 jective or noun with the inhnitive of the copula. Such adjectives 
 or nouns always must be placed in the accusative singular, 
 and the adjectives in the masculine gender, as : Otiosum esse 
 licet, it is allowed to be idle ; poetam esse jumt, it is delightful 
 
 to be a ]K)et. 
 
 Rem. 5. For an explanation of this construction sec the ACcrsATivE 
 ^v^nr tiif infinitive. The bednner should be careful, not to 
 nu>take this accusative of the masculine for a neuter Nomina- 
 
 Rem From this reason predicative^ adjective with the infinitive of 
 the copula, when they are merely quoted as such without their 
 connection with the sentence, are placed in the ACCUSATIVE SINGU 
 LAU OF THE MASCULINE GENDER, aa : tgenum esse, to be poor 
 disertum esse, to be eloquent. 
 
62 
 
 THE OBJECT-INFINITIYE. 
 
 1 EXERCISES. 
 
 Commit the inceptive verbs. Vocabularies Xlfl, B. 
 
 I, 
 
 1. Iprnoscere conducit. 2. Parcrn^ dccct. 3. Qiiifsccro cxpedit. 4. 
 Vinrere j uvat. 5. Vivere licet. 0. Kcconoilinro ])laret. 7. Obire pnrstat. 
 8. Ediscere ])rod('st. 9. Cedere a-quura est. 10. Ke^nare ardiiuin est. 
 11. C'ondonfire boni^num est. 12. Tacere cautuni est. l;3. Rebellare 
 exitiosiini est. 14. Errare liumiTnuiii est. 15. Fugere iK'cesse est. 10. 
 I'roiuittrre satis est. IT. Honest um esse prastat. 18. Modera turn esse 
 conducit. 11). Doctuni i-sse iuvat. 20. Inirratuiu esse nfx;et. 
 
 1. It is serviceable to obey. 2. It is injurious to slander. 8. It is use- 
 ful to aduK^nish. 4. It is becoming to l>lu.sli. 5. It is expedient to pre- 
 l)are. 0. It is better to beware. 7. It is deliglitful to })ardon. 8. It 
 J)! eases to rest. 1). It is allowed to ceiisun'. 10. It is absurd to secede. 
 11. It is a crinu; to bribe. 12. It is unpleasant to grow old. 13. It is 
 ])lt'asant to grow. 14. It is mean to deceive. 15. It is honorable to de- 
 fend. 1(). It is disgraceful to tiee. 17. It is a play {hid >(.'<) to learn. 18. 
 It is a follv to contradict, li). It is necessarv to inij)lore. 20. It is sutii- 
 cient to dissuade. 21. It is serviceable to be i»olite. 22. It is b«'coniing 
 to be modest. 23. It is better to be idle. 24. It delights to be safe. 
 25. To plunder is criminal. 20. To be a jdrate is dangerous. 
 
 2. 
 
 1. Desciscerc pernicidsum est. 2. Differre molestum est. 3. Valere 
 jucundum est. 4. Procedere necesse est. 5. 0}>i»rimere injustum est. 
 0. Debellare Indus est. 7. Flere medeclna est. 8. Ubtrectare injuria 
 est. 9. Tardum esse nocet. 10. Immundum esse displicet. 11. Obscii- 
 rum esse ])rapstat. 12. Pro])in(iuum esse exi)edit. 13. Parcum esse licet. 
 14. Quietum esse decet. 
 
 1. It is better to endure. 2. It is allowed to rejoice. 3. It is becom- 
 ing to refute. 4. It ])Ieases to persevere. 5. It dis[)leases to scold. 6. 
 It delights to triumph. 7. To i)ardon is divine. 8. To devastate is 
 cruel. 9. It is agreeable to oblige. 10. To contradict is an arrogance. 
 11. To commit cruelties is a sin. 12 To praise is a spur. 13. To learn 
 ])y heart is a play. 14. It is necessary to die. 15. It is unpleasant tc 
 be a prisoner. 10. It is honorable to be a farmer. 17. It is i)ref»'rable 
 to be a sailor. 18. It displeases to be envious. 19. To be cautious is 
 expedient. 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 THE OBJIXT-INFINITIYE. 
 
 § 70. 1. Certain verbs, which express an incomplete action, 
 govern an infinitive as object, which is called ol>ject-ill- 
 fiiiitive. as : 
 
 THE OBJECT-INFINITIVE. 
 
 63 
 
 Jre volo I will go. 3Ianere debes, thou must remain, Venire 
 ,,o^•s/ he can come. TnMigere incipimus, we begin to under- 
 slaml.' Di.ivdare .o/5/^s, -you are wont to dispute. Convalescere 
 ncnucunt, they cannot recover. 
 
 The ol)ject-infinitlve, like the substantive-object, precedes its 
 
 iroverning verb. , 
 
 § 80. 2. The following classes of Latin verbs govern an ob- 
 
 icct-iHlinitive : 
 a. Verbs of ability, duty and habit, as posse, neqmre, scire, 
 
 ncscire, discere, debere, solere ; 
 
 h Verbs of intention, determination, wish, fear and their 
 contraries, as velle, nolle, malle, audere, to dare, studere, to try, 
 varare to prepare, statuere and decernere, to resolve, recusare, to 
 refuse, \tipeve, to wish, cogitare, to contemplate, timere, to be 
 
 '^ 'cN'erbs of beginni'no, continuing and ceasing, as iyicipere, 
 to lieoin, properdre, to hasten, pergere, to continue, omittere to 
 om^^desincre, to cease, dedstere, to desist, ncgllgere, to neglect. 
 
 Kem. 1. Regarding the signification of these verbs the following points 
 must be noticed : . • ?. 
 
 1 Veile is rendered bv to intend, to be wUling, to propose, to wish 
 1. yae i^ ^^^^'^ , • ^ person of both, singular and plural, 
 
 ^*ft™ ;r; mted L- "/,'t«?rS." *« second Ind tl.ird persons 
 of ,hs En"auxiliary being used for expressing the FCTCM 
 
 to to awav. Gdere mdtis, you are willing to jneld. Manere 
 
 o"''V!«l'a.[n''"«e are sinularly rendered by "wiU not, mil 
 r; ^.,Z ?,,, first ,>erson sin-ular and plural, and m general 
 
 tcinh either, to P^'fi^" , ^ , «,,. if ^ has a substantive 
 J^S^^:!:::£:^t;::^M^^a:,tepo,.re, but by malle, if 
 
 "' '^^Z 11^;""'^«";»« pr.eferir,^u. or antcponimu. ; but 
 
 . ^''^""deW i": ;"/;£■ i:".:^t.^, to l,e .ont, to VM (with 
 „n'i,;r;tuiveX-''orr "'^ be i« t"e mur followed byo/w.th a 
 verbal noun in "'f ; f • .^^^„„„„,„,) ,„ ^ ,„en,. Amhullre sol.o I am 
 
 ■;' ;ii;tbit';i walk^'nl?" J/«»^-e'.o/.7.«< (ImperiectJ, ho used to re- 
 
 main. 
 
64: 
 
 THE OBJECT-IXFIXITIVE. 
 
 Often the verb sole re is rendered by one of the adverbs grnernUy 
 miudly, co/)n//o}i/f/, in wliidi cnse the Latin infinitive miist be ex-' 
 pressed by an English finitt^ verb, as: 
 
 Abease solenius, we usually are absent. licslxUre sohiit, they 
 generally resist. 
 
 4. Verbs of be.irinninf}:, continuincr and ceasing in Englisli often 
 are construed with the verbal noun in in;/, whicli in th«' verb ^o 
 desist is preceded by the preposition from. To this answers the 
 mere Latin infinitive, as : 
 
 They continue fighting, jvif/mlre j^crf/^'nt. AVe cease Avritinn-, 
 seribere (leKhiiiiitis. He desists from l)unisljing, ;;//// ?/v; desiatit. 
 
 5. The English verbs to knoir and not to l,ni>ic are construed with 
 an interrogativi; clause, introduced by " hoir," corresponding to the 
 mere Latin infinitive, as : 
 
 Thou knowcft how to ride, cquitare scis. He does not know liow 
 to answer, responds re iieseit. 
 
 ^r° Notice, that Ww Kn-Iish vorb ''to d,r n^ a tiu-re aixiliaky. that N if c.»n- 
 necti-d with tlu- iiitiMitivtM)f anotiior verb, caiujot be t-xpiv.-sc»! in L:itiii,as: 1 do not 
 wish, nolo ; 1 d,, not kiu)\v, uexcio. 
 
 0. The English equivalent of timere, to he afraid, is construed 
 w^ith the preposition <f and the verbal noun in iiuj, as: Voilre 
 timet, he is afraid of coniincr. 
 
 § 81. .']. AVhcii tlie object-iiifmitive consists of a predicative 
 adjective or noun with the copula, the iioim and adjective take 
 the CASE and xiMnKii, and if they are niovaljks also the gender 
 of the SUBJECT, as : 
 
 Tardus rsse solet, he is wont to be slow. Scveri e.^se jjo.-^su^ 
 mus, we can be strict. Arnica esf^e nrquit, she cannot be a 
 friend. Ja.'<ta raxe cnpir), I (a woman) wish to be just. 
 
 § 8tJ. 4. The verljs y;o^•8 ', nequlre, solere, debere, incipere 
 and desinere sonietiincs are used impersonally with object-iiifini- 
 tives, formed from impersonal predicates (§ 74), as : 
 
 Tunan; incipit, it begins thundering, plucre so/rt, it usually 
 rains, coTiducere imteM, it can be serviccalile, cxpedlre nequit, it 
 cannot be expc^dient, mole.<tum esse debet, it must be nni>leasant. 
 
 OBSERVATioy.-This is one of tho two ca«^es. wliore impersonal vorbs are nlao.-.l in the 
 INFIN-ITIVB li.^M.inc.rs sh.>ul,l not f,e in.luce.l, to take such iu.per.onal obi ■ 'l-i flni! 
 tives lor buhject-intinitives. See § 05. " '"U'«-rsonai oojiU nmni- 
 
 EXEliClSKS. 
 1. 
 
 1. Cedere debeo. 2. Simulare discis. 0. Tac-re i)ot< et. 4 Parere 
 voumus. 5. Negliirere nolunius. (1. Credere n .n vuJiig. 7 Taef-ro 
 nolunt. b. Debellare malumus. 9. Repugnare audeo. 10. Proticere 
 
 THE OBJECT-INFINITIVE. 
 
 65 
 
 studes. n. Obi re parat. 13. Dimiciire statuimus. 13. Secedere 
 decernitis. 14. Ediscere cupiunt. 15. Confidere timeo. 16. Advenire 
 ])roperat. 17. Intelligere incipiunt. 18. Diripere pergis. 19. Servire 
 (lesiniinus. 20. Contradicere soles. 21. Desipere soletis. 22. Vitupe- 
 ran; desistit. 2o. Pugniire scis. 24. Probare nesciunt. 25. Kesistere 
 neciur.unt. 20. Severus esse ])otest. 27. Invida esse nequit. 28. 
 Moderilti esse soletis. 29. Liberi esse discunt. 30. Serv^a? esse 
 nolunt. 31. Cienerosus esse volo. 32. Saevi esse inci[)iunt. 33. Maesti 
 esse desinitis. 34. Propinrpia esse cupit. 35. Tonare desinit. 30. 
 Priestare debet. 37, Licere solet. 38. Jucunduni esse nequit. 
 
 1. I cannot discern. 2. They can pardon. 3. He knows how to act. 
 4. He d<x's not know how to teach. 5. We learn to obev. 6. You must 
 rest. 7. I am wont to be on my guard. 8. He is in the habit of dis- 
 ])uting. 9. We usually hasten. 10. I will remain. ]1. Thou art will- 
 ing to ap})roach. 12. He intends to escape. 13. We will not open the 
 mouth. 14. You are unwilling to forgive. 15. I will rather go away. 
 
 10. They prefer to perish. 17. They dare to come forth. 18. I try to 
 give satisfaction. 19. Wc i)repare to cross. 20. They resolve to 
 secede. 21. You refuse to assist. 22. They wish to return. 23. He 
 is afraid of consenting. 24. 1 begin to advance {in knowledge). 
 25. They continue plundering. 20. He ceases digging. 27. He 
 desists from slandering. 28. We hasten to plough. 29. We 
 neglect watcliing. 30. They cannot be accurate. 31. You can be 
 el Hjuent. 32. Thou knowest how to be ambiguous, O queen! 33. 
 You ilo not know how to be attentive, daughters! 34. She learns to 
 be envious. 35. Thou must be firm, O son ! 30. I am wont to be 
 contented. 37. Thou refusest to be a com'panion, O Cornelia! 38. 
 Thou art willinii: to be a slave, O Rome! 39. Tliev befr^n to be tvrants. 
 40. They cease to be pirates. 41. You continue being prisoners. 42. 
 It generally j)leases. 43. It must displease. 44. It ceases ^snowing. 
 45. It begins -lightening. 40. It must be disgraceful. 47. It can be 
 just. 
 
 1. Debellare potestis. 2. Appropinquiire nequeunt. 3. Dijudicara 
 scitis. 4. Probare nescis. 5. Natiire discit. 0. t]rrare soletis. 7. 
 Indulgere debetis. 8. Fallere nolumus. 9. Redlre volo. 10. Latere 
 nuivultis. 11. Contradicere timent. 12. Lacessore incipiunt. 13. 
 Desipere pergit. 14. Vastilre desist unt. 15. Arbitri esse cupiunt. 10. 
 Captiva esse non vult. 17. ^Egrotus esse solet. 18. Fida esse mavult. 
 19. Firmi esse volumus. 20. (ilenerosus esse nequis. 21. Ingrata esse 
 ptTgis. 22. Tyrannus esse audet. 23. Amici esse desinunt. 24. Ful- 
 gurare solet. 25. ^Grandinare incipit. 20. Displicere potest. 27. 
 I'ericuldsum esse solet. 
 
 1. They usually approve. 2. We begin to despair. 3. Thou darest 
 to open the mouth. 4. We wiU not mourn. 5.' You contem])late to 
 tiighten. 0. He resolves to retreat. 7. We are afraid of entering. 8. 
 They desist from disturbing. 9. I wish to sleep. 10. Thou must eat 
 
 11. They cannot understand. 12. We refuse to believe. 13. We knov? 
 
 *It snows, ningit. 
 
 i^It W^hX.Qn'i.fulgurat. 
 
 8 Grandinat, it hails. 
 
66 
 
 COMBINATION OF PHRASES IN GENERAL. 
 
 liow to wucre war. 14. lie br'S^ins to tliink. I"». Thou tricst to conquor. 
 1(1. You learn to fight. IT. He coiitiuues rciirninir. IS. We ceas(^ to 
 pTSuade. 1J>. Tliev hasten to arrive. 20. Tliey cannot be moderate. 
 21. Wv ])ro])ose to'be free. 22. He is afraid of beini,^ a nienil)er of the 
 eonimittee of ten. 2:J. She refu.^es to be an assistant. 24. You^ are 
 lunvillinir to be slaves. 2."). They continue brin^r prodi^^al. 2(). Thou 
 canst be kind. 27. She wishes to be a (lueen. 28. You cease to be 
 contented. 21). We prefer to be free. 30. She cannot be wretclied. 31. 
 It usuallv hails. 32. It can be useful. 33. It is generally sutiicient. 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 COXXECTIOX OF PHRASES IX GENERAL, AND 
 COMBINATION OE ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 § 851. I. Phrases are counocted with each other either by 
 coorclinatioii or V)y coiiibiiiatioii. The former is 
 the counection of phrases by conjunctions, as : Prarfectus et poeta 
 adveniunt, the prefect and the poet arrive; wjuriam et contu- 
 tneliam toleramus, we endure injury and disgrace. The latter is 
 a connection, formed by the structure of the sentence, as: 
 Amico jyecumam dare, to give money to a friend. 
 
 § 841. 2. Two given jdirases, whicli have one word in com- 
 mon, are combined with each other by dropping the common 
 w^ord in one of the phrases, and introducing the whole other 
 phrase in its place. 
 
 ILL VSTRATION: Let the following two phrases be given : 
 
 1. PiiKDiCATiVE PiiKASES : The slave escapes, servus effugit ; 
 
 2. Attiiibutive purases : The slave of O^njus, Gaji servus. 
 
 Here we drop the common word slave (servus) in the ])redicative 
 phrase, and introduce in its place the whole attrihutive phrase " tlie 
 slare of G'fjus." Thus the combined phrase will read in English : 
 " The slave of Oajus escapes^' and in Latin : " Oaji servus effugit." 
 
 § 8ti. 3. The two phrases, of which a combined plirase con- 
 sists, either have the same governing word, or the governing 
 word in the one phrase is at the same time the dependent word 
 in the other (st'C the examples in Rem. 1). In the latter case 
 that phrase, whose governing word is the depeudent word Id 
 
 COMBINATION OF ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 67 
 
 the otlier ])hra-e, is called the flciieiicleilt, and the other the 
 
 ;;!:o%eriiiii^ |ilira<!ie. 
 
 Rem. 1. The followini:^ combined phrases are composed of phrases with 
 the same governini^ words : 
 
 a. The sons of Gajus sleep, Oaji flu dormiunt (the sons of Gajus, 
 and the sons sleej)). 
 
 h. A. renownetl colony of Corinth, dara Corinthi colonia (a 
 renowned colony, aitd a. colony of Corinth). 
 
 c. He delivers th(; town to the Romans, oppidum Romanis tradlt 
 (he delivers the town, and he delivers to the Romans). 
 
 But the following combined phrases consist of a GOVERNING and 
 DEPENDENT j)hrase : 
 
 a. The Persians plunder the town, Persae oppidum diripiunt (the 
 Pereians i)lunder, and ])]under the town). 
 
 h. Thou canst conquer the Romans, Romanos devincere potes 
 (governing phrase : devincere potes ; dependent phrase: Roma- 
 nos devincere). 
 
 § SO. 4. In order to combine two given phrases, it is neces- 
 sary to know, tvhicJi of the two phrases must be substituted for 
 the common word in the other. This is determined by the follow- 
 ing two j)rinciples : 
 
 a. If the two given phrases consist of a dependent and of a 
 governing phrase, the dependent phrase always is substituted for 
 the common word in the governing phrase. 
 
 b. If both })lH*ases have the .<'ame governing word, the order of 
 substitution is determined by the nature of the two phrases. 
 
 Rem. 2. The followinir rules and examples illustrate these principles. 
 Tlius the ])rinciple (a) is api)lie(l in i^ 89, 91, 94, while jmnciple (b) 
 is applied iu j^ 92, 99, 100. In many instances the order of words 
 in the combined i)hrases is the same, whatever mode of substitution 
 may be ap|)lied. But often the strict adherence to the rules, laid 
 down in tlu^ following sections, is essential for a correct arrangement 
 of the combined [)hrases. 
 
 COMBIXATIOX OF ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 § ^7. 5. Attributive phrases may be combined, 1. With pre- 
 dicative, 2. With objective, 3. Witli other attributive phrases. 
 
 § 88. 6. If attributive are combined with predicative 
 phrases, the governing word of the attribute either is the sub- 
 ject, or a predicative noun. In both instances the attributive 
 
68 
 
 COMBINATION OF ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 phrase is substituted for tlie common word in the prepicativh 
 
 plirase, as: 
 
 A. a. GIVEN phrase:^: ^ ^.^.., ^ . 
 
 PiiEDRATiVK : The sons play, jiht Imlnnt , 
 ATTKim tivk: tlio sons of the farmer, (Kjrtrolaeplu. 
 h COMIjIN {TKJN: Bv substituliui; tlu' attributive phrase 
 ''lajricolac Jilir'' for the coiunioii word, the subject 
 filii in the i>retlic{«tiv«' phrase '\filii luilu/it" : 
 
 A;;i-irolsr filii liuliuit, the aons of the farmer 
 jdtt//. 
 
 B a GIVEN PHRASES: 
 
 PiiKDic.vnvE : Friendship is rare, nr//?ir*;i^« ra?'a €«C; 
 
 Attiukitivk : True friendship, (tmicitia rem. 
 b COMBINATION, bv substituting the attributive i)hraso 
 ''amk'ltin cera'' for tlie common word 'imicitid in the 
 predicative ]>hrase '' nini'ifii ninfrsf": ^ 
 
 Amirilia vera rikriiv.^U(ttruefn€nd8/tii)ii 
 
 a a. GIVEN PIIRASES: ^ . ^;. ,. 
 
 PUKDICATIVE : CJajus IS a son, GnjKRJilius est, 
 
 ATTHiiiiTiVH: A Mm of Sejus, S(jijili"''<; 
 
 h COMBIXATION, bv eubstitutini:: the attributive phrase 
 
 ">'•> ^H>is' for'the common wonl, tlie predicative noun 
 
 /?////.«,' in the predicative phrasi; " (;r(y'/.«* ///'/« est'' \ 
 
 D a GIVEN PUllASHS: 
 
 PiiEDU ativk: Vir.iiil is a poet, Vu'fjdiHS poeta est ; 
 Atthiul'TIVE: A renewed {yoat, poctn elarus. 
 h COMBINATION, by substituting the attributive phrase 
 ''poeta clariiH''' iov the predicative noun pot7<i in the 
 phrase '* Vi rqVius pot'f^/ r.v/" : 
 %'ir^iliii*» 8>octa t^-lariis est, VirgU is a re- 
 noLCiied jioet. 
 
 S 89. "I. If an attrilmtive phrase is to be coml)ined with an 
 objective phrase, two cases must be distinguished: 
 
 1st case: If the attributive phrase is tlie depemknt, and the 
 objective the governing phrase, which always is tlie case, when 
 the common word is a xorx, the attributive phr me is substituted 
 for the common ivord in the. objective phrase (see § 86, a), as: 
 
 A. a. GIVEN PIIRASES: 
 
 OnJECTivE: To devastate the lands, rigros vnstnrej 
 Attributive: the lands of the tJauls, GaUdrum 
 o'/ros. 
 h COMBINATION, by substituting the attributive phrase 
 " Gallorum agios" for the common word agros in the 
 objective phrase '' agrus uistare " : 
 
 COMBINATION OF ATTRIBUTIVE PIIRASES. 
 
 69 
 
 O alio I'll 111 a;;ros vastare, to devastate tM 
 IciiiLfi of the Gauls. 
 
 B. a. GIVEN PIIRASES: 
 
 Ub,jective : To despise a man, virum despicere ; 
 ATTianuTiVE: a treacherous man, xirain perfidum. 
 b. COMBINATION, by substituting the attributive phrase 
 *' cirufn perjiduui" for the common word drum in the 
 objective ])hrase " rirff/i/ d( spicere" : 
 Vii'iiiii perlitliiiii €le»|»iccre, to despise a 
 tre((cheroas num. 
 
 C. a. GIVEN PHRAS'ES : 
 
 Objective: To be hostile to the allies, sociis infestum 
 es,se ; 
 
 Attributive : to the allies of the Romans, Romano- 
 ram sociis. 
 b. CO Ml3 1 NATION, by substituting the attributive phrase 
 '' Rimianornia sociis" for the common word sociis in 
 tlie objective phrase " so('iif< in f stum cf<se" : 
 Koiiiaiioriiiii ^^ociii^ iiifV^tliiiii esse, tobe 
 hodile to the allies of the Romans. 
 
 2d case: If the attributive phrase is the governing, and the 
 objective the dependent phrase, which always is the case, when 
 the common word is an adjective, the objective phrase is substi- 
 tuted for the common word in the attributive phrase (§ 86 a), as: 
 
 a. GIVEN PUR ASES: 
 
 Attributive : A man, just, xir Justus ; 
 Objective: just to adversaries, adcersariis Justus. 
 
 b. COMBINATION, by substituting the objective phrase 
 
 '' adrerxariij^ Justus" for the cowwnowwoYd Justus in 
 the attributive phrase " xir Justus" : 
 
 Vii' a4lvei>ai'iis jii^ttis, a man Just to adver- 
 saries. 
 
 § 90, 8. In a coml)ination of two atlributive phrases 
 with each other a distinction must be made, w^hether the one phrase 
 depends on the other, as in the phrase 'Hhe i^overty of the friends 
 of Gajus f^ or whether both attributes depend on the same gov- 
 erninL» noun, as in the phrase ''the great victories of Pompey.^'' 
 
 § 91. 0. In the former case the dependent attributive phrase, 
 •iccording to the general rule § ^^ a, is substituted for the com- 
 mon word in the governing attril)utive phrase, as: 
 
 a. GIVEN A TTRIB UTIVE PIIRASES : 
 
 The i)overty of the friends, amicorum iriopia ; 
 of the friends of Gajus, Gaji amicorum. 
 
70 
 
 COMBINATION OF ATTRIBUTIVE PIIRASEvS. 
 
 6. COMBTNATIOY, by substitutiiiij: tlio (lepen«l.Mit i)hra8€ 
 " Gtiji (iinU'nvnin " for tlu' cmnnon word ((/nicOra/n in 
 the li-ovfrnini:: plinisf '^ tiiiiie~>niin inojnn": 
 4ii:iji aiiiiroriiiii iiiopiu, the pocerty of the 
 ftundfi of GtfJ>(f<. 
 
 § iP*2. 10. If tlie two attributive phrases have the same gov- 
 erning' noun, wliich especially is the case, when one of the attri- 
 butes is a genitive, and the other an adjective, the combination 
 is made in tlie following order: 
 
 1. Adjective, 2. Genitive, 3. Goverxixg yous. 
 
 Phrases of the latter kind are called COIIipoilllcl Slttri- 
 
 biilivc |>lii*a«e$. 
 
 a. GIVEX PHRASES: 
 
 The ^rcat victories, vletoriae mdfjnnc ; 
 victories of Poin[)ey, Poinpeji victorite. 
 
 b. COMBINA TlOX'^vnmWwr to the special rule § 92 : 
 
 illa^ii'.r S*o:ii|»oii vietoriic, the (jrcat victo- 
 rks ff Fo/iipcf/. 
 Hem. 3. If the attributive genitive and the attributive adjective have 
 not the same governim; uouu, tin? combination is done by substitu- 
 tion aceor<linif to i; J)l, as: The VICTORY OF Pompey the Gkeat. 
 Poinptjl Mdfiiti cictorlK. 
 Rem. 4. Analyzing combined ])hnise3 means: Resolving them into 
 their constituent phrases. The following may serve for a pattern of 
 
 analvsis : 
 
 Excellent ijewards of diligence, a compound 
 
 attribiiticf phnme. 
 
 1. SINGLE PHRASES: 
 
 Attuibutive phrase: Excellent rewards, praemia 
 
 egnjia; 
 
 ATTiUBUTrvK phrase: Rewards of diligence, ddifjen- 
 
 tine pnt^.iinu. 
 
 2. COMBINATION, by arraniring the attributes according to 
 
 § 92 : Eg-re(/i(i dilvjoitine praemia. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Analyze the follomng combined phrases according to the pattern 
 Rem 4 : 
 
 1. The fate of the prisoners is uncertain. 2. A lone: dehiy dis]>h'ase8. 
 S. Hatred is the cause of wars. 4. He praises the eloijuence of Tullios. 
 5! We love attentive scholars. G. Tiujy are desirous of foreign help. 
 7. A vice peculiar to the (rreeks. 8. Tiie industry of the iuhabitants ol 
 tiie island. 9. The rumor of an unforeseen daui^er. 10. The small 
 {exiguus) price of provisions. 11. Certain testimonies of the guilt. 
 
 COMBINATION OF ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 71 
 
 A. COMBINED rREOICATIVE AND ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 1. Prrrfecti dementia reconciliat. 2. Populi discordia desinit. 3. 
 Piratarum jxrna tenet. 4. -Komandrum scuta defend unt. 5. ^Emilii 
 tloctrina accuriita est. G. Spartanorum studia irrita sunt. 7. Syracusa- 
 rum mercatura fructuosa est. 8. Kheuus Gernianiae tiuvius est. 9. 
 Fama victorijirum nuntia est. 10. Inopia sapientiae ma«^istra est. 11. 
 Vir conlentus beatus est. 12. Discordi;p intestlnre gliscunt. 13. Peri- 
 cula occulta terrent. 11. Vir iiividus otfeiidit. 15. Bella mala neces- 
 ^aria sunt. 1(J. Innocentia perfiigium securiim est. 
 
 17. The rivals of Pompey ^re ^^ilent. 18. The friends of ^milius are 
 al)sent. liK The prefect of' Uaul is i)res.'nt. 20. The promises of Per- 
 seus deceive. 21. Masinissa's friendship is useful. 22. The commerce 
 of Athens flourishes. 2o. 'i'iie plans of the prisoners are clear. 24. The 
 followers of Catiline perish. 25. A timely help Siives. 20. Faithful 
 friends are wautmg. 27. The nei<;hborini,^ provinces rebel. 28. Creat 
 miracles happen.' 29. Fertile fields abound. 80. Unrevenged injuries 
 torture. 31. Unheard of danu:ers are imminent. 32. The Latin allies 
 ilce. :}:?. The treathery of the allies is manifest. 34. The trooi)s of 
 Alexander are invincilile. 35. Tlie disij^race of Catiline is perpetual. 
 30. The farmers of Sicily are wealthy. 37. Private injuries are bitter. 
 38. An unchanged fri«Mulship is rare. 39. Rash undertakino:s are dan- 
 gerous. 40. A quiet life is hajfpy. 41. Philosoi)hy is the teacher of life. 
 42. Memory is tiie assistant of scholarship. 43. Asia is a province of 
 the Romans. 44. Luceria is a Latiu town. 45. Poverty is an excellent 
 teacher. 40. The Romans are reliable [^ctrtua) friends. 
 
 B. COMBINED OBJECTIVE AND ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 1. Philosophi.T principia discunt. 2. Incolarum concordiam conturbas. 
 3. Pra'fecti avariiiam vituperamus. 4. Latinorum C(jntroversias dijudi- 
 cat. 5. Le<zatorum arro^^antiam coC-rcet. 0. Adver-sariorum numero 
 cedinms. 7. Uei pra-ceptis obtemi)errimus. 8 Amicorum auxilii e^^emus. 
 li. Dei «rratia (///vf^f) vivis. 10. Doctrlnfi accurfitti excellitis. 11. Prae- 
 mia ampla concedit. 12. Sententias contrarias refutiimus. 13. Eloquen- 
 tia nura ])r<Tstat. 14. Animum gratum habetis. 15. Insidias occultas 
 parat. 10. Sempronii amiciti;e cupidus sum. 17. Copiarum fati ignari 
 sumus. 18. Discipllu:e regulis contrarium est. 19. Philosophia? studio 
 deditus {d< voted) est. 20. Populo Romano fidi sumus, 21. Imperio 
 reuio adversus est. 22. Templum Minervae sacrum. 23. Viro otii 
 cupido. 24. Copi.e animi plen.c. 25. Decretis populo infestis. 20. Ne- 
 gotium regime molestum. 
 
 27. We despise the favor of tyrants. 28. They restore the temples of 
 the gods. 29. They receive {txcipcre) the ambassadors of Perseus. 30. 
 Thou receivi'st [accipn-e) Metellus's letter. 31. We fear the giit^ {doniim) 
 of the Greeks. 32. We understand the construction (structur/i) of the 
 sentence. 33. They underp:o the dangers of the battle. 34. You 
 8tren«rthen the friendship of the allies. 35. ^Ve are in need of the grain 
 of Sicily. 30. They adhere to the friendship of the Romans. 37. They 
 succumb by the folly of the prefect. 38. He calls foreign auxiliary 
 troops. 39. He inhabits a "golden house. 40. We lose dear friends. 41 
 You have an eloquent adversary 42. They plunder the wealthy templea 
 
72 COMBINATION OF ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 4'] Thev are victorious bv unhoard of liardships. 44. Tlioy arc desirous 
 
 of-^e^LJIILnc'of the Uonu.ns. 4o. He is ^<;^<;^^^^^''^:^:^ 
 AT .,-!.,. Aa 'Vhnn «irr (h-uT to t he sotis ol the (lueen. 4<. i«>u aio 
 
 diihcuU .ta,lv. 49. You are l.ostilc to a kl.ul n i.^^t.T o 0. I< is t»ll^>I 
 neforiouB plans. 51. A prcfcet, unknown to "•"''';''""«;• ;:-^Y 
 temples, full of statues. .'>:!. Arsrummts. unplensaut to tli(. accustu 
 54. By a discipline, peculiar to tlie Spartans. 
 
 C. COMmX.MION- OF TWO .iTTRI BfTIVE PIIRASKS. 
 „. TWO ATTUTr.t-TIVE OENITtTKS. 1- Tl.o l.istorv of ^l.o ^vars of the 
 
 lMet,'llus'« prisoners. 7. The pride ot the i,>ii.i«ers oi ..iii..>.^. m. ...- 
 fl meriTso't ,l,e ,pteen of lv«>'pt. 9, The causes o «'V' ^rs o, Py r hus^ 
 10 Till- vices of the assistants of the tyrant. 11. 1 he I. I.t'i's oi ine 
 «rinciv.es of Kpieurus. 12. Tl... fli^lit «f the troops ol Darius 13. 
 Tl" ^.npathv ol th,. queen of Spain. 14. The abdudion ,,v'y^'"«) «f 
 tlu duuXers-ol the Sabinians (SdbucU,). 15. The anger ol the daugh- 
 
 *"; In.i'Ec'^.VKS- 1>K..F.KDENT OX ..TTRU^rTtVE OEN.TIVES. lfi._The 
 
 gates Of the Ho,nan ca.np. IT. The oracles of the Cuman (C"-';;,"») 
 Sihvl (SihMi) 18. The decrees ot the lioman piK pie. IJ. 1 He 
 a luti^.. of accurate s.-hoLrship. 20. The ren.ains ot ■>-;™t "-,"- 
 lueut- '21 Tlie disgrace of an unjust war. 22. Ihe menioo ol a 
 
 a, pvV.fe 23. The perfidy of false eonn-anions. 24. ' .h' t™";^^ ;;.l' 
 a neighboring people. 25. The pity ot a n..b e soul. 2 .. he gbuy ot 
 m ,guifi.ent t1-imupl,s. 27. The advantages ol public s<.ho,. Is. -8. 1 he 
 desire of a trauipiil life. 21). The votes ol an envious people. 30. Ihe 
 
 ^^'\^.';'i;.o:4r!vmu;^■^;T•p^tt.^sKS. 31. The impious plans of the 
 
 tv a, t.- 32. To the great joy of the s.-holars •«; "[Z,^' .^'r^^reekB 
 fl'i.rht of the i-ncnii.'s. 34. The renowned victory (<-/y.\ol the biu.ks. 
 ^.^ k a 'huigerous disease of the prefect. 30. The unli.reseen treadi- 
 ery of the allies. 37. Tl... obscure arguments ot '''^!; '' "J''';''/:,,^,^; 
 By the inmi.Klerate luxury of the Homan women. •'? .".\""', ^'""^'y 
 Wtles of Mexander. 4(». The hidd.^n Higlit W'y.) ol tlu; troops. 41. 
 it nUniticent remains (.I.J.) of a temple. 42. By tl- d.^Mne e .Hp^enc. 
 of Tullus. 43. Of the secret adversaries of the yrat. 44. Uieosttn- 
 Bible (!.i,<r/r«».,) cause («ftj.) of the undertaking, 45. The clear evidences 
 of the fraud. 
 
 Translate into English : 
 1 Spartandrum tyranni avaritia. 2. Philippi le-atorum artificia 3. 
 Svracusarum tvranni s.evitia. 4. Darii pra feet mum decreta. .). Ml- 
 midaruin equorum pnestantia 0. Tyrunni inmistrorum Perfi^ha- J^- 
 Arbitri injusti iudici'ini. 8. Injustum arl.itri judicium. ''^J^''^\^- 
 rum i,erieul<.sr>rum remedia. 10. Peiieulosa morhorum remeiiia U. 
 Populi liomaui beneficia. 12. Animi ingraii testimonium. U. Amicl- 
 
 COMBINATION OF PREDICATIVE PHRASES. 
 
 73 
 
 tite immutatae testimoniis. 14. Vitae miseria? caus.T. 15. Exiguo fru- 
 nienti ])retio. 16. TemiK'stivo Bociorum auxilio. 17. Inultse legaturum 
 iiijuriie. 18. Manifesta sociorum pertidia. 19. Egregia Liberi statua. 
 
 _LESSON XVIII. 
 
 COMBIXATIOX OF PREDICATIVE PHRASES. 
 
 § 051, 1. A ])rcdicatiye phrase may be combined : 1. With an 
 o«)jcctive, 2. With an attributive, 3. With another predicative 
 phrase. 
 
 Rom. 1. The combination of predicative and attributive phrases has l)een 
 shown L. XVII. For tlie combination of two predicative phrases see 
 Part Second ]>. 240, OiiS. 
 
 § 1. 2. If a i)redicative and an objective phrase are com- 
 bined, the former always is the governing and the latter the 
 DEPE.NDENT pliraso. Ilence, accorditip: to rule § 86, a, this combi- 
 nation is made by substitntiiiu: the ol)jective for the common word 
 in the predicative plirnse. The common word generally is the 
 PREDICATE (see the examples A. B. C. D. E. F.). But if the pre- 
 dicative phrase is impersonal, the common word maybe a subject- 
 infinitive (see example G). 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 A. 1. OJVEX PHILiSES: 
 
 Phkdicative : The ambassador offers. Iffj'ttus offert ; 
 Oi!.TK( TivE : others an armi.^tice, indntias offert. 
 2. COMlUXATI'fN, by substitutimr tlie objective phrase 
 " iiuhifiits off (ft' for the common word offert in the predi- 
 cative ])hrjise *' /tf/df/fs offrrf : 
 
 l^viiiitus iiifiiilias oflVrf, the ambassador offers 
 an urmixtice. 
 /;. \. (r'FVEX P/f RASES: 
 
 Pi.-Kni» ATIVK : The (jueen is kind, regliia hem'gna est : 
 ()IUK( TiVK : is kind to the inhabitants, inroUs henigna cd. 
 2. COMB/XA TION, by substituting the objective plirase 
 *' inraUs henigna est" for the common words henigna est in 
 th(» pnHlicative ])hrase **reglna henigna esf : 
 
 K<';;;:iii:i iucolis beiii^iisi est, the queen is ki)id 
 to tlte inhabitants. 
 
U COMBINATION OF PREDICATIVE PIIKASES. 
 
 0,'.tr.'T.VK. It is M.,^xM to tW .mbassa.lors, /..yr,^;» «<-rf. 
 o ^ U hVv 1 7Y0 V bv sulHtitufms tl... ..l.j.Ttive j.l.n.s,. /.■- 
 "■ '':;''w;^;/- Mm ;h,.-con,,nn„ word /,>,* i.. the nn,n.>^.n«l 
 
 p-';;r.:; ,r'L"r.i;: ".i^'.-i:"/< .••' ««-«<' <" *'- «""'"--^- 
 
 ^ l-£SS''^.i- are .vilUn., W .;'-<; 
 Orm TIVK are willing to dosort, drjirere rolunt. 
 o rnvm\\ri02f l-y s.,l.stitutin,' the objective phrase 
 "l/^c^tSi" for Ule J«n,nou word r,M,„i in the .nv.l.cat.ve 
 
 '''■'"'iooU '.N-H'^Vr.> volHHt, the oHie, „rc ^rillin;/ to daert 
 
 o rnrS^ I'v x"l-tit«tin- tl.o objective phrase 
 
 2. LUMtsi^i.i^i / ^.,_ coiiLmon wore ui<-ipi"»t in the 
 
 « inffHlOf CKxe ii'iuinnid tor tin coiiiui ii *- 
 
 'befjlii to b>' /I'Xti/c. 
 
 ^- ^- PHn'm-Tr'vf^f'lt •ii^lovious to defend. ,?./■, -rf-r-"/''"-*-""» ''^• 
 J^ ■, -Mvi. • to defend tlie countrv, p.itr!ani ,h,tn,d,re. 
 o ^rr Vc/V'i™ bv subs,iu,-tinu' .he ol,ie,,ive phrase 
 
 *'■ 'ranla..'. ii"iv.uiV.-c «•'...•...SHU. -M. a i..^^«™«. 
 
 fo (lefeitd the country. . ,.,,,„„1 
 
 Ren. 3. K th,: ol^ect, de,,e„de,. ;.n the --------IS;;?^ 
 
 l-r""^"''^",.'' ':r;\;^ srfo,Al • conn,o„ ».«.1 ,« the o,iJK<TIVB 
 pWe'T^.uV^be'ex'nple, mentione.! under No. />. more nsnally 
 Ls tl.e f>n..win« order: M/r-^^---'^;^- „,,. ^,„ ,., ,..„„;,,, 
 
 Rem. 3. If the P'-;''''^^''- ,' ,n,l d i I nitiv,' ot the co.mh,. th.- predi- 
 ofa,.n.licat.veadjeetne an 1 m n I ^^.^^^ ^^l^^ ^^ 
 
 ^^rwS'^^d:!;;^..;" JJ: 'r l-nZate. if .ids o„ect denotes a 
 """""'It cMights the triumvirs to be mild. Tnumuro, baugnos em 
 
 COMBINATION OF PREDICATIVE PHRASES. 
 
 To 
 
 jurat. It becomes the queen to be just, Reglnam ju-stam esse 
 
 (frrrf. 1- • 
 
 But the Latin lan;Lruai?e generally conibini'S with predicative 
 phrases of this kind no other objects than those which are in the 
 ACCUSATIVE case, except when fleet or necesse ef<t form the ])redicate. 
 In both instances the predicative adjective, forming ]iart of the sub- 
 ject, acrr<'es with the obi.'cts of these verbs in the d.vtive case, as: 
 ' Uiijo otidso eaae W'et, it is allowed to (lajus to be idle. Copiis 
 strcnuis esse necesse est, it is necessary to the troops to be brave. 
 
 § 95. 3. A peculiar kind of combination is that of a predi- 
 cative phrase with a subject-infinitive, and of an objective phrase 
 with an object-infinitive. This combination takes place, when 
 one of the vorl)S meniioncd § 82 is used impersonally with one of 
 the reguhxr impersonal predicates (76. T7) as their object-iiifiui. 
 
 tive, as : 
 
 Dorruire jucujidum esse sokt, it generally is pleasant to 
 sleep. jSeri'ire j)lacere nequit, it cannot please to serve. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 t^f" Analyze the foUoicing combined phrases hy writing: 
 1. Flatteries corrupt the soul. 2. Money is wanting {deese) to the 
 trcasurv. o. Arrogance is contrary to modesty. 4. Farmers live hai> 
 pilv. 5. It delights {jnvare) the boys to ].lay. G. The troops wish to 
 fight. 7. <ir('ece erases to be free. ^. It is unfair to punish the prison- 
 ers. 9. it is allowed to the poet to be happy. 
 
 1. 
 
 1 Libri pueros delectant. 2. Pueri libros legunt. 3. Numidre tem- 
 i>la (liriiuunt. 4. Frumentum copiis deest. o. Arbiter reum condeiunat. 
 () Socii frumenti egent. 7. Philosophus argumentis convincit. 8. Nautae 
 divitiarum cupidi sunt. 9. Marius Plebr-jis cnrus est. 10. Pugna Ro- 
 nuiiu* funesta est. 11. Socii timide pugnant. 12. Copiae necopmato 
 abeunt V-\. Luna noctu splendct. 14. Amicitia nunquam moh-sta est. 
 15 l)is<Mpuh)s discere jiivat. i(). Amicis rei)rehendere licet. 17. Ann- 
 cos rei)rehend(>re li.-et. ' 18. Tvrannus s:evire jxTgit. 19. Piratc-e diripero 
 (U-^istunt. 20. Triumviri regnare nesciunt. 21. Poeni procedere timent. 
 22 Homilni vincere soleut. 2:3. Amicos prodere simlidum est. 24. 
 Airricolis laljoridsis esse necesse est. 25. Pnefecto otios^i esse licet. 26. 
 Triiimviros generosos esse decet. 27. Ludere jucimdum esse solet. 28. 
 Iracundum essi; conducere nequit. . ^ ->• . . 
 
 'X) Pomi>ev conquers the pirates. :)(). The Persians are ol^edient to 
 Alexander 31. Octavianus defeiits Anthony. 32. The Romans reject 
 the armistice. 33. The baggage bunh-ns the troops 34. Thebes pre- 
 pares a war. 35. The scholars are distinguished by diligence. 3b 
 Teachers are in need of lK>oks. 37. Friendship unites the souls. 38 
 Vices bring disgrace. 39. The troops crois the Danube. 40. The prov 
 
76 
 
 COMBINATION OF PREDICATIVE PHRASES. 
 
 ince is full of desertiTs. 41. The troops are full of con fulf nee. 4'2. The 
 allies are desirous of a haltle. 43. Indoh-nce is contrary to dili.uence. 
 44 The peoide are thankful to the triumvirs. 4."). The country (t(rnf) is 
 adapted to a battle. 4(;. The Simrtans dine publicly. 47. The troops 
 conspire secretlv. 48. The Celts dig l)usily. 41). The gods ottm punish. 
 50 Delav is rarelv useful. 51. Years never return. 5-.\ The trooj.s are 
 as vet unhurt. 53. The slaves are now fiee. 54. The (lUMn always is 
 generous. 55. Riclu'S never are secure. 5(i. It delights the i)oys to 
 swim 57 It is necessarv to \ho Carthaginians to yh-M. oS. It is 
 allowed to Anthonv to return. 5!l. It b.-comes the javfect to bo severe. 
 ()0 It becomes bovs to be nKxlest. (Jl. It (heights tlie quoen to be nuld. 
 C2. It is allowed to the people to be qui.'t. iui. It is contrary to duty 
 to i^hinder. 04. It is never allowed to be unjust. ('.5. It is often expe- 
 dient to be silent. <»«;. It is always better to b.- cautious, (m. It is olten 
 necessarv to be severe. OS. The troops are unwilling to obey. 01). The 
 comniitti'e of seven resolve to conform. 70. The prefe«-t does not know 
 how to finish the war. 71. The slaves are afraid of returning. 72. TJi(> 
 umpires wish to be just. 73. The c^ue -n is afraid <.f being rash. 74. 
 The commerce ceases'to be i)rofitable. 75. The Belgians continue being 
 rebellious. 70. Justice cannot be a wrong. 77. Words must be perspic- 
 nous. 78. Tvrants generally are unju>t. 70. It is cruel to .^fll-nd 
 prisoners. 80.* It is beautiful to defend innocence. 81. It is impious to 
 utter (ilirerc) falst>lioods. 82. It is disgraceful to break (f(((d< lu ) promises. 
 83 It is noble to be useful to enemies. 84. It is expedient t(» 1)«' devoted 
 {di(Ut}ix) to military service. 85. It is allowed to be inimical {(idcvrioi.^) 
 to ne^'-ligi'uce. 80. It is human to be desirous of fame. 87. To bo 
 thankfurto teachers is honorable (^/frr>;v/.v . 88. It cannot be injurious 
 to be silent. 81). It must be serviceable to finish the war. 
 
 1. Bella .-erarium exhauriunt. 2. Disciplina copias continet.^ 3. Pjii- 
 ^osoi)hia ingenium exerct. 4. OppidHni veiiiam imiH'traut. 5. Ljitini 
 pra>feeto subveniunt. 0. Fiducia eojuis deest. 7. Pinltie terra api)ro- 
 pinquant 8. Pueri grammatic;e iunari sunt. 0. Frumentum copus 
 necc'ssarium est. 10. (Jalli Romanis infesti sunt. 1 1. Socii ignominioso 
 fugiunt. 12. Pra?fectus fortuito abest. 13. Animus semper bber est 
 14. Promissa sa-pe ambigna sunt. 15. Prjrfectum inaire decet. 10. 
 Ol)pidanis redlre licet. 17. Agricolas imi)igros esse juvat. 18. Disci- 
 puli proficere nequeunt. 19. Reus hiscere non vult. 20. Sulpicius tar ms 
 esse sol(>t. 21. Adveiue incogniti esse cupiunt. 22. Captlvos liberare 
 humanum est. 23. Maiiere periculosum esse potest. 24. Heligiosuiii 
 
 esse prodesse solet. . . ,. . , 
 
 25. The inhabitants extinguish the Hames. 20. The triumvirs divide 
 the fields. 27. South winds i)ring rain (ph/rin). 28. The boys conform 
 to the rtiles. 20. The troops throw the arms away. 'M). The town is 
 full of ])rovisions. 31. Minerva is friendly 'o the (Jieeks. 32. The 
 groves are sacred to the Furies. 33. The troops suddi-nly aj'pear. 34. 
 The scholars hear attentivelv. :}5. Figures {iium(rii.'<) sometimes 
 deceive. 30. The s^'utinels often sleep. 37. The watchmen are now 
 Httt'utive. 38. It becomes the accused to mourn. :'>'.». It is allowed to 
 the troops to rest. 40. It delights the slaves to be idle. 41. It becomee 
 
 COMBINATION OF OBJECTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 77 
 
 a stranger to be |X)lite. 42. It is agreeable (rotififnfrn/eufi) to prudence tM 
 yiehl. 43. It is never necessary to commit cruelties. 44 It is always 
 ]>r<'ferable to be cout«'nted. 45. It ottt-n is danirerous to be weak. 40, 
 The tribunes must vield. 47. The slaves are in the habit of dancing, 
 48. The seutin(4s cease to watch. 49. Tin; um])ires are afraid of being 
 just. 50. The (lireeks wish to be free. 51. Philosophers do not know 
 how to govern. 52. It is expedient to repeal the decrees. 53. It is 
 necessary to conform to the prefect. 54. It is disgraceful to divulge 
 secrets. 55. It is better to act cautiously. 50. It is abominable to 
 accuse falsely. 57. It generally is preferable to yield. 58. It can be 
 l)rofitable to succumb. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 COMBINATION OF OBJECTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 § 90. 1. Objective phrases may be combined with attribu- 
 tive, PRF.niCATivK, and with other objective phrases. 
 
 Rem. 1. Tiie first two combinations have been shown in the last two 
 lessons. Here we consider the combination of objective phrases 
 
 with EACH OTHER. 
 
 § 07. 2. In combining objective ])hrases with each other, a 
 distinction must be made, whether both objective phrases have 
 tiie same governinp^ word, or wliether the one objective phrase is 
 DEPENDENT on the otlicr (§ 85). The latter is the case, when an 
 INFINITIVE, which is an object of the predicate, has other olijects 
 depeiuhnt on it. In this combination the governing phrase is 
 caUed the objective phrase of the predicate, and the dependent 
 phrase the objective phrase of the infinitive, as : 
 
 Fhfcitnn transire incipiuut, tliey begin to cross the river. 
 
 Here tlie phrase '' transire inciphint''^ is an objective phrase 
 of the predicate, and the phrase ''Jluvium transire" an objective 
 phrase of the infinitive. 
 
 § 08. 3. In combining oVyective phrases of the predicate 
 
 with olijective phrases of the infinitive, either of the two phrases 
 
 may be substituted for the common word (that is the infinitive) in 
 
 the other, as : 
 
 A. 1. GIVEX PHRASES: 
 
 Obje( tivf: phrase of the predicate: We wish to redeem 
 rediniere c npiia ua ; 
 
78 
 
 COMBINATION OF OBJECTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 Objecthk phrase of the infinitive: to redeem the cap 
 tivi's, captlcns ndiinere. 
 
 2. COMBIXA TION, by substituting either of the two 
 plirasi's for tlic common word vi (Jim eve in the other; 
 Csi|>liV4»«^ i'4>cliiii<'i'e ciipliiiiis, we wishtoredeem 
 the capticm. 
 B. 1. GIVEN PHRASES: 
 
 OiUECTivK PintASE OF THE PiiEDlCATE : Tliey continue to 
 
 fight, pHfjinire pergunt ; 
 Objkctivk phhase OF THE INFINITIVE: to fight bravely, 
 
 strennc j)i/f/JHlre. 
 2. COMBIXA TION, as in the first example : 
 
 $>iti*4'iiii<' i>ii;;ii:ii'<.' pvv^unt,th€i/ continue to ff/Iit 
 bn«r,lt/. 
 
 a 1. GIVEN PHRASES : 
 
 OBjErTivE rniJASE of the predicate : We intend to be 
 
 thankful, (/rdti i\sse volumus ; 
 Ojuective piikase of the INFINITIVE, to be thankful to 
 
 the ))rele('t, pr<u'ferto grati esine. 
 2. COMIUNATfON, as in the first example : 
 
 PisufVrlo ;;i*ali e^^e voliiiiiii^, ice intend tobe 
 thankful to the prefect. 
 
 § 00. 4. Two combined objective ])hrase.s, which have the 
 same governing word, are culled a c*inil|ioiiiifl iilnjective 
 
 plira^e. In phrases of this kind the obje(;ts are placed in the 
 following order before the governing verb : 
 
 1. Tlie objects, containing the case of a substantive (casE' 
 objects), generally i^recwZe; those objects, which are adverbs (ad- 
 verbial objects), as : 
 
 Legdtis benigne respondet, he replies kindly to the ambassa- 
 dors. 
 
 2. Among more than one case-object the accusative generally 
 precedes the other cases, but the dative either precedes or fol- 
 lows the accusative, as : 
 
 Pra^fectum perjurii accusare, to accuse the prefect of per- 
 jury. 
 
 Irthums peeuniam dat, ov 2^€ciimam tribunis dat, he ^ivca 
 money to the tribunes. 
 
 Praesiatitlam diliejentld comparare^ to gain distinction by 
 diligence. 
 
 § lOO. 5. Certain verbs govern a case-ol)ject in connection 
 with an infinitive. In this kind of compound objective phrase 
 
 COMBINATION OF OBJECTIVE PHKASES. 
 
 79 
 
 , • f i^ ,)„. LoncAi. (not the grammatical) subject of 
 
 . 1-4. J ,r,r,tn9 ^^ meant to be the 
 
 He,n. 2 In the pv,.„ ^^:^Z'^<^V^'^^'^r:, 
 
 DOKB of the iiction "1 "^' '""."""• ^„'„,i:„„ ti) § 5, is the SDii-IECT of 
 
 ",,;,.,.. Hence the noan '»;' f„"?M Ti<A l\t.i>ieot, explained in 
 
 nV'ilr r .o^^Il "uh,:^;. oTt^e W-nt. see-, I., Ken.^2. 
 
 .,«1.0. The verbs, which are constfuea with thts ku.d of 
 
 con,., amd oljicct, arc tlie followh.g : 
 
 conip.'unu .1 , prevent pcoA*en;, to prohibit 
 
 f'" ..., ^i>^to wa, direct .dur., to forbid 
 
 coqere, to coni])el 
 docere, to teach 
 
 .i';. to bid, direct .*.r;. to forbid 
 2)(r>nitterc, to allow, 
 t») permit 
 
 Be.1... . r v,n.tio,. of .^;^/j;;;^-r- - f^^'^X'^^tZ 
 
 objects of <''^l'r''''" '■ , ^!l; a«es vl tie the former make a com- 
 pl'verninff and 'l';!;;™ ) " , ^jf [uiis analyzed : 
 WL-NU ubju... J^^^^^^^^^ ^,,^ ,,^..„t to go away. 
 
 '■ '^«-"^'«uitive: ^-«"-I'Sntioned verbs, ^ands 
 
 P^^^'^^- , , , ,:fur, this combination Avith a predicative 
 
 With the verb jyentiitttre iui> cu.u 
 
 ndiective cannot be used. 
 
80 COMBINATION OF OBJECTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 to hinder, to prohihif, wliicli are construed willi the jm'posi- 
 tion//v>//i, and tlic verbal noun in /////, wliilc in Latin the nn-rt' iu 
 linitivc is used, as: I prohibit the hoi/a from pUtying, ])Ultos luder^ 
 prohibeo. 
 
 Summary OF THE Rui.es on the cTjAArMATirAL form of the Pre- 
 
 «liciiiiV4' SKljcclii'c». 
 
 The PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVE takcs dittrrent irramnuitieal forms, ac- 
 cording to its ditierent i2:ranunatical ri'hitions. The ruk'S, wliicli cictcr- 
 niine this form, are exphiintd at their jiroper phiees. It is important 
 for the beginner to view these ruh'S in their c(mnection. 
 
 The general principh* is tlie following: 
 
 The predirafire odjcctire (dwff/s (fr/rce.s with it'< looicai. bthject. 
 
 All the spt'cial rules are nothing but applications of this jirinciple: 
 
 1. When the predicative adjective is connected with a FINITE coi)ula, 
 it agrees with its grammaticat. siiuect (JJ <)m). If this grammatical 
 subject is a subject-infitiitive, the adjective is i)hiced in tin; nominative 
 neuter SINGui.AIl (^i ?.■)). 
 
 2. When the predicative adjective is connected with the co]>ula in the 
 infimtive, we must distinguish whether the infinitive is a subject or 
 
 an OIUECT-INFINITIVE. 
 
 a. If it is a suiuect-infinitive, the predicative adjective stands iu 
 the ace». satire mHyilor of the iinfi<enliiie {^ 78). 
 
 h. If it is an ouject-infimtive, we a«rain distinguish, ^vllether 
 the latter is dependent on one of those verbs, that govern a simple 
 object-infinitive (;:^ SO), or on one of those, tliat govern a compound 
 object-intinitiv(^ (vj 101). 
 
 aa. In the tbrmer instanct.' the predicative adjective agrees witli 
 the gram/natical subject of its governing oredicative phrase (^ 81. 
 
 lib. In the hitter instance the predicative adjective agrees 
 with the (Cjeiit of the infinitive (^ 10'2). 
 The beginner will rarely err in the application of these rules, if he 
 always looks for the lofjiral subject of the i)redicative adjective, whicli is 
 easily found, l)y asking the question: Who or what dues tlie action, ex- 
 pressed by the predicative adjective and copula. 
 
 Analyze the folloiring phrases : 
 
 1. They cannot destroy the country. 2. lie promises diliL'"ence to the 
 teacher. '6. We remind {admonere} the allies of the danger. 4. He 
 kindly receives {excipcre) the ambassadors. 5. He accustoms the Ro- 
 mans to coiKiuer. (). They prevent ihe troops from i)lundering. 7. You 
 sutler the inhabitants to be free. 
 
 1. 
 
 1. We intend to restore discipline. 2. lie resolves to defend the town. 
 3. They wish to occupy Sicily. 4. I am not willing to h\irt (l/ndi re) the 
 strangers. 5. You do not wish to change place. (>. 1 rather wish to be 
 useful to the people. 7. 1 can reconcile the friends. 8. Thou art able 
 
 COMBINATION OF OBJECTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 81 
 
 o Tlir^v cinnot maintain the battle 
 to return (reddere) the money. ?• ^hey cannm i^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^ 
 
 10. We must rest nun arrogance 11]^^^ ^ .^^ ^.j. Th.y gener- 
 
 Gracchus 12. ^h- -e atra.d of ent i^u^ tl.^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^^ 
 
 allv are desirous ot bootN 14. ^.'^^ /J^ i,_ i .,^.3^ 10. Thev cease to 
 15.* We begin to be mnvcd {a ssn a us) ^^ ]'«^^^ ;;,,i,. i^^. iie recom- 
 act ntoderately. 17 ^ott begm leaning assuum^^ ^^^^ 
 
 nu.nds the poet to the i;-^;f;^^^J;^;,;;Ahe victory to the people. 21. 
 ipulma) to Homer. 20 1 u> ^ !,"7"^j^,ii,-^.rs the letter to the queen. 
 1!.. prefers disgrace to death. 22 Ht ^^'^^^j ^ ' , ^^.^ 04. Thev accuse 
 
 28. 'rhou betrayest the ^^-^e .s^^^-^;^;^^^;^^^^^^^^^^^^^ of corrup- 
 
 the messenger ot treachery. 2o. \ > con ict i ^^ ^^^^^ ^.^.^_ 
 
 iuns by tavors. 28^ 1 rvstram I^;^-^; X^^^J^vLip by a rampart. 31. 
 take the town by Imud. oO. i*»^>/"J '^^^^^ ^33. 
 
 You ialsely accuse Semprom us. .,. "!, J* '^;^ ^^^ ^,^ ^M to the 
 
 He always is faithful to ^^:^'^"^ [.^-"^^^^^^n.. 3r.. He teaches 
 allies. 3.-,. Vou secretly aclher.^;>tl^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ 
 
 th(« inhabitants to obev . o; • ^^ ^^ «^ l^^y ^ ambassadors to be sdent. 
 sutler the prison.TS to perish .9. H^ b ds ^^^J^^^;^ ^^^ ^ to be 
 
 40. You forbid the troops to light. 41 He ^^''^y^ .^^i,^.,, \>rohibit 
 cautious. 42. He permits the Vn^nv^^J^ ^^ the inhabitants Irom 
 the tyrant from being moderate. 44. iou proNcn. 
 
 being treucUerous. Proolium renovare nolunt. 3. 
 
 1 Vitin» (hfi'udere VOlumUS. '^- Xlo,uuiii 1 r'.me'nn 
 
 c.mk.n.nat. 2;i. I'atna> .cm "|i «rati ?» >^; -^^ J^^-^^^ ,.,,,n,nus. 27. 
 
 £^ r: e.i:™-r'^. ,1^,1^ P^Im e.e .Z. 
 
 2. 
 
 11 T^ 1 • ^ o TT.i resolves to couvoke the 
 1. Thev int(>nd to recall Fabius. .f- " ^^ ^.^^^^ tlie Romans. 4. 
 inhabitams. 3, They are in the 1ml) t^^ ^^^^^^'^o Uandon Sicily. 
 \Vc cease electing deceiuMrs. ^^^,;; ;;f i^^^^^^^^^^ ;. Vou begin to bo 
 
 0. We are afraid ot b^ng uni>h^ n^ ^'t;^?;:ach 'captiously. 0. You 
 desirous ot riches. 8. j^^^^J.^^-";'^. f^iiJ^^. the slaves to the ma 
 rather wish to act severely. 10. ^y.,.f^'io You abandon the b<K)ty to 
 11. Th.:- send a --^^^;^^ ^.^ ;^^^ iVaud^ 14, ^Ue 
 
 the barbarians. U. We ^'^''^\,^\^ ^^tten are in need (^//cZ^^c /v) ol 
 --r r ^^'^ef er^.e ^j X - He ac.de.aU. .;.... 
 
82 COMBINATION OF MORE THAX TWO PHRASES. 
 
 troops to be on tlicir ^ruard. 22. We let the enemies r.Joice. 23. Tliey 
 prevent the tyrant from tiecinf,'. 
 
 1. Sneios reconciiiare ciii»imns. 2. Dolo vincere no»i vnlt. o. Lep'i- 
 tum interticere stutnunt. 4. Pnefectum accusare (k'sinis. 5. Invidhim 
 Buperare nesciunt. (). liegina^ infesti esse inoipiunt. 7. Pnhliee die«'re 
 {to !<p(ak)t\mLHX S. Content.' vivcre discnnt. 1). Copiis victoriam pro- 
 mittit. 10. Triumviro cordmun ott'.-rt. 11. Philip])um AU-xamlro 
 antt'p(mimus. 12. SaUiisthim doli absolvnnt. lo. Le^oltos «zladio vul- 
 nerat. 14. Penm diserte defenilit. 15. Ne«rotium e^jrepe perfieiiint. 
 10. Adversarios appropintpnlre snmnt. 17. Copias transire proh'het 
 18. Diseipulos attentos esse jnbemus. 
 
 LESSOX XX. 
 
 COMBIXATIOX OF MORK THAN TWO PHKASES 
 
 § ] 03. 1. If more than two plirases are to be coml)iiie(l with 
 each other, we first coii]l)ine those phrases, which h;ive the same 
 governing word, according to the rules, explained in the preceding 
 lessons. These, in their farther combination w'.lh other })liriises, 
 ■ are treated as o/ie single j^hrase. According as tiiey form the 
 goventlng, or the dependent phrase, the rule of § 8t), a, or the 
 special rules of the preceding lessons nuist then be applied. 
 Thus may be combined: 
 
 1. Three or more attributive phr.\sf.s witli each other; 
 
 2. Three or more objective phrases with each other; 
 
 3. A combined orjective with a puedicative thrase. 
 
 § 101. Illustr.vtiox. 
 A. Atthiijutive rii rases. 
 1. TIk' |M'i'iiirioii<^di«>.<>4>rd o( tlic^ Koiiiaii p<^oi>lc. 
 
 a. SlN'GEE IMIRVSES: 
 
 Governing phrase (compound attribntive, § 92): The pernicious 
 
 discord of the jH'ople, exitwsd populi dLtcordia ; 
 DErENDP:NT PHRASE: Of the Roman \\iio\Aii, popall Itoindni. 
 
 b. COMBI.N'ATIO-X: 
 
 By sui»stitnting the dependent phrase ''populi Ilo)fi<liii'' for 
 the common word popuH in the governing phrase " txitiuM 
 populi discordia " : 
 
 ExitiOaa populi Rumani discordia. 
 
 COMBIXATIO. OF KOBE TIIAK TWO PHRASES. 83 
 
 ^ Ihe ^ll.es, dcxUmc sociOrum alae. 
 
 Bv subs,h«th,-r tl.e deP^'l''"' f 4*t,,e governing l^se 
 aia,'. " I"!- tl'« eoniin.)n word aUie in e 
 
 "'"'"'•''"''"^«(em. socwrum alaefm- 
 B Objective piikases. 
 ,. „e i. .....vU.I...' t« taue ...e to«.. .., «.eacUcry. 
 
 a. Single phrases: .nmrenonmlt; 
 
 ""^ by tJ:icWery, o,,UU„ ,erfiM capc-e. 
 
 \), Combination: i .„+ i.i.rase " oppidum 
 
 „ .,:;. '',n;';:;'"-"un,l objective, g 100): He forbias tbe 
 
 b. Comiunation: ^^popuhim excitare* 
 
 3. llo altoWN the ooy i« *»• 
 
 a. t^iNGLE phrases: ^^^ boy to give, 
 
 Governing phka^e (compound obj.)- 
 
 vxcro dnr prnnittd , . ^ -^^ ^^^ book to Gajus, 
 
 DEPENDK^■'l' riui ASK (compound obj.). h 
 lihvnm Gap dun • 
 
 1). Combination: «jihriim Gnjo dare" 
 
84: COMBINATION OF MORE THAN TWO PHRASES. 
 
 G. PkEDICATIVE AXD combined OB.TErTIVR PIIKASES. 
 
 1. Tlu' :iiiihsi<^s:Miors aiiiioiiiice tlie virlory to 
 
 tiie |»eo|>l<'. 
 
 a. SiXGi.E phrases: 
 
 Governing i'in{ASE (predioative) : Tlie ambassadors announce, 
 
 Uyati nantidiit ; 
 Dependent phuase (compound objoctivo) : announce the victory 
 
 to the \iQO\A<i, popnlo victorimii nuntiant ; 
 
 b. Co.MBi nation: 
 
 By substituting^ the dependent phrase " popnlo victorutm 
 nuntidiit" for the common word ;t^////<V/y/nn the governinjj 
 phrase " kgati nuntiant " : 
 
 Leynti popuh) vlrtoriam, invKt'tdnt. 
 
 2. The C]ii'('ck«* know how to put baihariaiis 
 
 to lli;j:ht. 
 
 a. Sin(;le phrases : 
 
 GovETiNiNa phrase (predicative) : The Greeks know, Gntrri ftrimit ; 
 Dependent phrases (combined objective, j^ 0^): know how to put 
 to flight barbarians, b(rharosf(i(/dre sciunt. 
 
 b. Combination : 
 
 By substituting the combined objective phrase " Ixtrhttroxfu- 
 fjnre st'l'tut"' for the coniinon word Hciuut in the pnidicative 
 plirase ** Gravel xcinut'" : 
 
 Graeci harhdros fiKjdre nciuitt. 
 
 3. It i$ e\|MMliriit to ilie ltoiii:iii«< to r<'fii«»e the 
 
 ariiii!>^tice to the 4 arllia;^iiiiaii$i. 
 
 a. Single phrases : 
 Governing phrase (a combination of an impersonal predicativo 
 
 with an objective ]>hrase, i^Ut. D): It is expedient t<» the lio- 
 
 mans to refuse, Dt/i ('!/<! ir llonianlH ei'ptdit, or: lio/nd/u.'* ihne- 
 
 gdre expcdit (^ 1)4, Rem. 2) : 
 Dependent phrase (compound objectiv»') : to refuse the armistice 
 
 to the Carthaginians, indatiaa Poenis dciie(jdre. 
 
 b. CoMlHNATION : 
 
 By substituting the dependent plirase "i/idtftit/s Poenis drne- 
 ghre'' for the common word dcncjdre in the governing jdirase 
 *' denegdn' Ilomdnix txpediV: 
 Indutias Poenis denegdre Ronidnis expedit, or : Romdnis indutids 
 Poenis denegdre expedit. 
 
 4. The ]^iiiiii€iiaii«< prevent Seiiipreiiiiis from 
 
 eomiiiiiiiieatJiig: the tlaii|^ei- to .i:iiiiliiis. 
 
 a. 8in(;le pihiasks : 
 Governing phrase : The Numidians prevent, Numidac impediunt, 
 Dependent phrases: 
 
 1. Compound objective of the predicate (^ 97): prevent Sem 
 pronius from communicating, Seniproniaia nuntidre imp^ 
 diiint ; 
 
 COMBINATION OF MORE THAN T\VO PHRASES. 85 
 
 2 Compound objective of the infinitive .communicating tk^ 
 danger to .Euiilius, uEniUio pericuLuni nuutiare. 
 I). Combination : 
 
 Evfir^t combining the two comp. ol.iective phrases accordiiigio 
 b' rt^f^^^^ ^^«nlio pericnlum nu,.tiar^ inrpedaud) 
 SdM;Jn^bstituting the iLase., thus <.mbmed ^^>^^ 
 TircHlicate impedinnt in the gov(>rning predica in e phra>c . 
 i^S:.'^c';!^"..^^-^ .J^ndUoperieuUua nuntiare vnpedtant 
 
 8*105 2. If ATTRIBUTIVE pliniscs are to be combined with 
 the more ^.inplicuted phrases of the other descriptions, we firs^ 
 form the skeleton, that is the subject, predicate and lie 
 OBJECTS of the predicate and infinitive. After this the aUnbt. 
 tive phrases are separately constituted, and severally substituted 
 for their governing nonns in the skeleton, as : 
 
 1. Tlioy pieveiil fUe dauj^liteis ol the queen 
 tVoiii »ailiii«* ... 
 
 Skeleton: Tliey prevent tlie daughters from s^iVmg, films nan- 
 
 ATTun-rTivKl^intK: The daughters of the queen, reglnae JUjas 
 Co4./lN V HON. bv Substituting th?attributive phrase " regu.aefihas 
 for the object Jf7iV/« in the skeh'ton : 
 
 J{((/lnne /i7w« nangdre vnpedinnt. 
 2 The II oops of file allies l>e;.iii to Harass the 
 lilt wiiitf ol Ihe .Kloliaiis. 
 1. Skeleton : The troops be^in to harass the wing, Gopme (dam 
 hicissere ineipimit. 
 
 ^- -^T''''',?,''',;t'm,7,')^''^*tho troops of the allie., sorionnn copiae; 
 ti;;™l.m <-.. .^^;- tl- le'-t^ing of the JEuAX^n., su.ist.nn 
 
 3 CoMmNMMoN. ])v substituting the attributive phrases for their 
 
 ?rmernin- nouns, enpiae and <d<un in tlu> si^eleton : . . 
 
 ^^.el^^n^ropiae sinidram ^toldrum rdnm lacesscre vncipinnt. 
 
 1 vttributive adiectives, whicli have OBJECTS, dependent on them, 
 
 Rem. 1. ^^\V^'''"' ?' J '..'„. r,Hl that thev with their objects /(>//^v?c 
 
 generally '''^''' ^"^/"^^^^ '^^i^A anv combination with 
 
 • r m >a ia o aieVo the Romans, Cnmpa.^.oppida lionnuus u^. 
 
 r> ^o u ±era CO mbin;.^ Latin phras.^s are to be translated into 
 
 ^^""^ 1 or^hm^er.^^^^^ OIUiStS of the SUBJECT-INFINmVE ; 
 
 ir'T;Tim utf" be ong^^n^^ to the subject, or to the rREOiCATivE 
 '^- \^''V'o^tkIts of t"ie predicate; 5. Attuicutes ot the hater. 
 6'Sue!:i^^"i^in™ve; 7. ATTBIBCTES of the latter, a« : 
 
8G 
 
 COMBINATION OF MORE TUAN TWO MIllASES. 
 
 |i»iiiisli;t MMioiiiiii ala lliiviiiiii vjido tiaiisirc 
 
 iii4'i|Ht. T • I • 
 
 1. PiiKDKATiVE I'liUASK: Ahx \nn\ni, the fnn(/ b,r/ins. 
 
 3. ATTUir.UTivK PiiH ^sl.: of the subject: Sinistra sociOrum ala, ^A<! 
 
 lift irin'i of the (illua. ..... ;,,,;„- 
 
 4. OBJhX'TivE'niUASEof the predicate: Transiro incipit, heouis 
 
 ft) rro,<(,N'. 
 
 5 ATTIlini'TlVE ruKASE of the lattiT . _ 
 
 6. 0b.tec:t. niii. of the infenit. : Fluvium vado transire, to cross tJie 
 river hy (if<frd. 
 
 7 Attuibutive piir. of the latter . ,1. r 7 
 
 Translatiov : The left iciufj of the allies hefnis to cross the river bij ajoid, 
 
 Srytliaruiii res^iaa» Cyiiiin iiiterficcre liect. 
 
 1. Impers. pued. rnuASK : Intortic-civ hcvt, It is alloicpd to hill. 
 2'. Obj. phu. ot suiuKi-r-iNF. : Cvrmn iiitortici'iv, to kill Ci/nis. 
 
 3. ATTUir.rTKS, l)olon;j:iiv;J: to the siUri'iT, &o. . 
 
 4. On.T. piiu. of PKEi). : Koniiuii Hcct. it is alloind to the queen. 
 
 5. Attuihutive PiiK. of tlie latter: Scvtliariuu w^'^avx, to the queen 
 
 o/'ilie ISciithiaiis. 
 
 6. Ohjkct. piiu. of theoH.ri:cT-iNFiMTivK . 
 
 7. Attkibut. phk. of the- hitrer . 
 
 Translation : It is allowed to the quren of the Sri/thians, to l:,ll (i/rns. 
 
 OusKKVATiov —The rules for the arniinrcMiuMit of the phrases and for the inetliod of their 
 c.rihiiKitioti ntV-r to the HK<iiLAR pu^itiui. of Lain, ^s<.^•.ls. JJut .leviatioiis from the 
 n-ular arraMi:.-in.-nt arc vt-i v tVi-.iiunt. «■>p.'.ially for tl.riM- r.-asuns: I. Kmi'IIasis; ± 
 rKRSIMCL'IlY; -i. ElI'UuNV. All »-\[)OSilioll of th.- rilU->. i-ol»r,Mliln- Ilusi- «IfVI illoiis, 
 
 fiiuU its plii.-i- in L\nv lIiiKi(.i:i.\ It iiiav Iv Mitlic cut. to rnii rk hi-n-. tliat the 
 position of til.- Latin wonis is v. rv free, if .-oiiip-.r.-.l with the ..rran-.iiu-iit ot Mm 
 Kii.'li'h .sfiitfiic.-. vvhicli is hoiiii»! on IVw ami strict rm-. '1 he h.L'iniu-r v\ ill si-e this 
 fn.n. the foliowiii- example: The |)iirasc " th>/ jd.u^ant Mfe,-- admits „t this one miuI 
 no other arran-einent of tlie words in En:.'!i>h. wh le the Latin transi:amn ot t i.- 
 words may be arranged in six different way< : Jucund.f Ulter.i tu.r ; pintuUr t,t<r litte- 
 r.r: litUr.r jiKUud.t lu,r; littera tu" Uci-iuulf ; twr litUfv jiruH'hr; la„' juoi.ain 
 litters. A:illie.>e ;,rraiii^enu-nts an- vouch, d f.r by Ciceroni .n pas-i-e>. (H.ii nneo he 
 menil.ersof ai)li-HS(- isi.is.-rted Let w.-eii the two nsemher^ <•! anotli.-i phia-e which has n-. direct 
 praninialical relatiui, to it. a- : I/'-^r liltrrnn S<„raU'.^ uall'im nli^U' ■ « i-;. : .-ooMies I'l"»''] 
 did not leave a k-Uer (l.ehiiLd l.iin). Here the oiject litUnon \- ii.-erte.l u. tlieatinl.wiive ,d,ra>e 
 '/p-«cNot-r'</rx'and the snUject Si,crnli>< is Hocrled in the attr. pinase ' //</<r <»/i ?*»/;"//». 
 Such clian^e^ of the coiiiniun' order an- not arMiiaiily iiiaiie. hut a! wiys for c itai:. nieKMl .al 
 purposes. It La the otfl.-c of Latiu rhetoric topohit out these purposes, and !o sliow the means 
 hy whicli tiiey are elfetted. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 ^^Analf/ze and tmndutt the followintj eotnhined phraneK:^ 
 1 Tlie accurate aro;iimeiits of the ( J reek philosopheit?. 2. The hattles of 
 wild nations (pop>/hff<) of A^a. o. They intend to abandon Sicily t«j tlio 
 Komans. 4. We t<'ach the hoys to lov*- tlie country, o. llo c«.mi)els the 
 inhahitiints to return inildcn] the slaves to the masters. 0. The decem- 
 virs ahsi)lve the accused of the crime. 7. Tlu; prefect is afraid of 
 resTorino disciidlne. 8. It becomes the triumvir' to restore the nioney to 
 the inhabitants. 9. The scholars of Sempronius liear the renowned lec- 
 tiin-s of the poet. 10. The temple of the Kphesian {Ej/hcviuif) Diaiui is a 
 t^rreat monument of Greek genius \^in(jtidain). 
 
 COMBINATION OF MOKE THAN TWO PHRASES. 81 
 
 x^'^cu^si* 1 The renowned victory of th« 
 
 „„r>^,.U« (.■.(«<'<•"'")<>' l^a'l ";'■"■ tfirVnn, of tlio"Tn.ian (7V..j-(«««) im- 
 o C a . «. 'ri'« ^<f ^'"'"r Mol e ""l«"f Antiwlius. 8. The 
 ■'gnmts. 7. Tl.e unt..rc.seen fl.s. the t o 1^ _^ ., Ry the manifcB 
 
 «ondevlul ,H-^v..nu.;-e (nh]) '' 1. ™!'\ ^!^ *„« of the invincible anns o! 
 .milt of Antlion.Vs slays, l?" Vf tl p uniust plans of the tvrant. U. 
 "^r^na.r. 11. The adversaries ot tie unus^ 1^^^^^ ^ The ostens,- 
 
 T, badness of the '""'r'^»''^,^ "V , uk (Xf'»'''«) of the Koma.i am- 
 ble (.■.»,«■.-«»») cause of the s.uhlen doul M«J^ . ^^ ^,,^ ,„„nt^ 
 
 bas ado,-.. 14. The n.an.lest cause « *^^^^.\,, ,,-,,u„-g to deliver tho 
 C<)Mi,iNi;i> oiWEtTivi; niuASES Y:,,,",;,i to sell a house to (^ajus. 
 paiKTs (UiU ra.) to the trmmvir. 10. I tuul ^^^^_^^ ^^ ^^. « 
 It' We are unwiUin,- to oi^n '' _^" 1' \^ j cannot allow the booty 
 'vish to assisu the cause to imi> ««l^"^^";; ;„, ^j^^. controversy by arbi- 
 o'the troops. . -20 We m.^l ^ ^^^''^^..r.^ the controversy by 
 ^••-r'^-'uT^:' n K-'^hinfexnainingVirgilto^ 
 
 r')-.((;</<i the arms. -.1. ' 1"^"" ,. ,i,„ i„>i,rl,ts ( ;"'7'"«)- *'• He aivecw 
 We snttVr ,he enemies to '^^I'^'^'^.V an armistice to l>on.pey. .4 
 the ambassalors t.> 1"-'>1*«', <^' "f ' t -mples. ;!■•). He accustoms the 
 We Ibrbid the- troops to 1'»"" f ,,!;,", i^nbit Sempr<,nius 1'™", ^"^ 
 Hon>ans to carry o„ war^. M. ^.'^f \.,.^,„t u.e prefect from helping 
 «iK-ritiie' a t'-mple to Diana. .>'■ i'" i 
 
 r, ;;»-■,-„';, ih.- allies. „„TT-rTivK riiR-^sES. 38. The Cartlia 
 
 ^ C, mium:» iMiKDii ativE ani> ""-^^'Vlie onians. 3». The prelect 
 gin';usivt«rn(...M,rc) the pnsoners to t »/•-.„, crown to ^he 
 
 t,romis,. victory o^^; J Xse the ,.refect on-l-udence^ 4 The 
 
 1''"'"; l,nndr.i^^ac luit Oajus of perjury (/'«^'"^{'"l^he inbai^itants 
 
 :.'-;^fi.:' he'tmans'by eh'phants (5^.,*-^-;,_ %'^^ » pe ar* 
 
 intend to decide the «•""«"""•'■i.^Jp'i^^.^ns are unwilling to yield 
 
 wiUin.' to renew the battle. 41,. ^ ^^/ f !p';^,„ ,,i,her wish to change 
 
 rV'""•■'TThe^U';^rssX™"r.l:';t^Ve^.^^ 
 
 to caiiture tlie town, j,- •■ hnm,nittee ol ten can 1'».' ' ' 
 
 cannot sixstaiu the battle. 5.i. "^''^^ '?" 1 «bit ot ceiisuring Uracchi s 
 
 tlie utonev. 04. 'Ihe l'»"-^.^"^ «^ , »,"= :^,l"The prefect «i^h^ '" l»* 
 5.-,. Tl,e stranger dares o h. ! a l.-ajv^ ^^^ ^^ }^^Xm 
 
 ^:^^ =^t'i:^;^r ;:^sr «0. ti^iSu^direc. 
 
 permit the enemies tx) lead away v 
 
88 COMBINATION OF MORE THAN T\VO PHRASES. 
 
 the troops to bo cautions. (U. The prefect compels the inhabitants t« 
 be friendly to the troops. 
 
 {J/njHr.so)}<if). (>-• It Ls injurious to oflend the pcojilc by pride. (VA. It 
 IS expedient to uive arms to the shives. (54. It is pnfcrable to (Hvide 
 tlie eni'uiies by discord. ()."). It deliulits Titus to ()l)lige friends by bene- 
 fits. «0. It is' allowed to the ambassadors to acre} )t the i/n'ts {(f(fiiiiin). 
 07.' It is expedient to Perseus to deliver Corinth to the tyrant. OS. It is 
 pleasant to the farmer to plough the fields. 
 
 Pkedkativk and oiuKcnvi: riiKASKs with attkibutks. (I!). Tjie 
 Carthaginians r«'ject the propositions { propoxittfiii) of the Rimians^ 70. 
 The troops of Pyrrhus succunil) to the hardsliips of the wav. 71. It 
 deliirhts the children of (Jajus to play. 72. It is allowed to the followers 
 of Pompey to return {ndhr). 7:1. The fate of the triumvir terrilies tlu^ 
 hearts {uniiii'i.s) of the pe«)i)le. 74. It is necessary to the future ])refect 
 to win tlie hearts of the peo[)le. 75. The sons of .Emilius prevj'ut the 
 tribune from accusing the i)refect. 70. It is allowed to the s^)ns of (Jajus 
 to be free. 77. Perseus adds tlie town of Ki)irus to the kingdom of 
 Macedonia. 78. The inhabitants a.ssign the real (/v ///a) cause of the 
 conflai^nation to the malice {/Kfjuitio) of the slaves. 7!). You know how 
 to escai)e the envy of the people. 80. The people cannot ac«iuit Semi)ro- 
 nius of the desecration {f«irril(/i'im) of the temples. 81. The whole 
 people censure the rash undertakings of the i>refect. 82. Attentive 
 scholars generally keep \tciun) well the words of the teacher. 8:>. Men, 
 desirous (if fame, rarely conmiit open crimes. 84. \Ve owe the innei 
 discords of the i)eople* to the nefarious efforts of ba<l men. ^o. Tha 
 flight of Pompey may [posse) Ik' pernicious to the whole country. 
 
 Trail side into Enijllsh : 
 
 1. Ineptie virorum doctorum sententifiB. 2. Temp» stivo copiarum La- 
 tinaruni auxilio. :>. Inult;e Persei legatorum i:ijuria\ 4. Immutata 
 Pom])«~ji iiliorum tithu'ia. T). Inauditam vin'rum indo<-tdrum arro- 
 gantiaui. 0. Injusti deci-mvirOrum imperii memoria. 7. Futuraruni 
 po])uli discordia'rum causa. 8. Perju'tua insiini triunivirorum incepti 
 infamia. i>. Variis exigui annon.e pretii causis. 
 
 10. Pnefectum i)erjurii accusare volunt. 11. Rtmianis EpTrum conce- 
 dere nolo. 12. Anndiiam cojais atl'erre neipieunt. !:>. Irani verbo sedaro 
 {allot/) ])otest. 14. Vitam Deo reddere debemus. ' lo. Minis injurias 
 addere audmit. Kl. Opi)iduin terrfi oppugniire cupiunt. 17. Pecuniani 
 mercaturjl comparare studemus. 18. Adversarios verl)is lace.ssere inci- 
 ])iunt. 11). Captivos gladio interlicere nudunt. 20. Discipulos admo- 
 nr-re raro negligis. 21. Agros arare studidse discit. 22. ^'inum immo- 
 dice bibere recusamus. 2:]. Magistris semj^er grati esse debr-nius. 24. 
 Romfmos deos colere docet. 25. Pricfectum Siculis picuniam restituero 
 cogo. 20. Copiis pr<edam colligere (to colhrt) i)ermittit. 27. Legatog 
 castra inspicere jubet. 2S. Legatos ])ra'fe('tum ra]»iniTru!n accusarG 
 inbet. 21). Pra'fectuni ])ra>mia accii)ere vetat. oO. Sempronium .Etolia 
 auxilium ferre prohibet. 
 
 ;U. Oppidani adversariis ]X)rtas a])eriunt. :52. Romani Pcenis bellum 
 indicunt. \i-\. Jugurtha legatos ])ecunia corrumpit. o4. P<nii Antiocho 
 auxilium deut-gant. ;i5. Pra'fectus provinciam PoMiis prodit. otf 
 CJeutumviri Roscium parricidii (parricide) absolvunt. 37. Perseus legA 
 
 COMBINATION OF MORE THAN TWO PHRASEy. 
 
 89 
 
 • • , 1 W.O+ '^^ Roniiini Siciliam retinere cupiunt. 80. O^ 
 tos imunissis p.lacat^ •',;,,? 40 Pnefe<tus castra oppuonHrc statuit. 
 jus divitias com, arare /^t^ ^ ^ ^^' ^^'^ op id^ni nmros delendere desl- 
 
 juvat. 5i. Camillum patria> restituere Romanis conducit. oo. I ra?tecto 
 
 pnpdam coi/iis relinquere licet. , n ^ r.-, T>v^f«ptn« Per«ei 
 
 54 Tvnnni ministri legatos veneno tollunt. oo. I rfriectus P( rsei 
 b.;^^os *.dt e ul,^. 5(5. Rmnanorum cophe Syracusarum divituis d.npi- 
 legatc)^ adiit ju ct conspiciunt. 58 Copiarum reliquue 
 
 iniuria' usta be li causa ?unt. «0. tb'iipus lucuiu l uh.» r, 
 7 DeKtera tiuvii ripa bestiarura ferarum plena esse solet ... 1 rem 
 ;opi^Romnnilocios deficere cogunt. 73. Reglna. m.nistn loca pubhea 
 adlre timent. 
 
 Attributive Pint xses. 1 . The doubtful fate of the Roman captive^ 
 
 ^ muKTiVF Pim.SES. 9. We try to adapt the «ord to the sense 
 (,„^,"T 10 ™cdo not wi8l> to f.noo«rage(.o»/r»<„r) tre=K;hery by 
 ^■''''„, 1, 11,. refuses to soml a message- to the pret.ct. 1^. 1 can 
 r,-wnrds. "■ "' 7. * ,,,, pi,.i,,.i.,„s 13 He is unvvillins to assiffn 
 recone le the Patru-ians «« "',: P'^.'^V^' ,'„ to abandon the town to the 
 the delay to «".aeher . U ^^^^^'^J^^^^^^^,, ^, »,,« sword. 1«. 
 
 He is 'in abU ; f 'pi a.b g wJn.ls by slanders. IT.They often neglect 
 He IS in lamt oi . ja "j, ,i|,„es buying provisions. lU. 
 
 t,. guard t i.' walls. IS. He ""''%•'"•'., .iq f hev propose t.. keep 
 We intend to examine the '>' "^ ae » ate b . .0 1 ,^^^1 ^^^^^^^^^ ^^ 
 
 (sen.-.re) the pronuse» <^ '^<, V^ ' / ;^,; -{^. Carthaginians to abandoa 
 
 S™;r"^l ^dir^ts .itaJ^sisumr.o. guard .he f-'-- ^^^tn^'f 
 tirbid the triumvirs to restore the pro,K-rty (bona, pi. t.) to 1 arqum. ,o. 
 
 Ue permits the troops '" if ■"l^/^^yj;:;';;^;^ p„„ ,SES 2G. The tribunes 
 CoMi.iNEDPyEi)! - Anthony restores Egypt to CI eo- 
 
 submit the ])a]u'r> to ine qmv n. ^;" i.^a oq The tribunea 
 
 putra. 28. Fabricius prefers innocence to riches, ^y. me inouu 
 
90 COMBINATION OF MORE TITAN TWO PHRASES. 
 
 offend tli(> queen l)v arr«)<rance. 00. Tlie teacher intends to award tlie 
 prize (?>/v^t////'^///) to Charles. Ol. The qne.-n is unwlllinir to eon cede 
 the price to the pirates. ',V2. The scrihe is in tlie habit of c jnimunicat- 
 inir the secrets to the prefect. 30. The inhabitants resoh'e to defend 
 tlie town by arms. 04. The ininiiirrants wish to bo frien<ily to the in- 
 habitants. 05. The queen be«j:ins to be envious of the tribunes. 0.<5. 
 Nunia accustoms the Ronums to worshi]) (r<>A?r) the prods. 07. The de- 
 ceinvirs suffer the ]>risoners to ])eiish. OS. The prefect hinders th»; 
 troops from being idU'. 0!>. It delights Claudius to torture prisoners. 
 40. It is uni)leasant to Titus to refuse the permission. 41. It is better 
 to defend the town by land. '^0. It sometimes is necessary to restrain 
 the j.opidace by arms. 40. It often is expedient to enemies to feign 
 friendship. 
 
 PkEDK ATIVE AND OBJErXIVE PIIIJASES WITH ATTRIBUTES. 44. FOTU- 
 
 pey subjects {si/hjirerc) Asia to the ])ower of the Roman ])eoi»le. 4"). The 
 remains of the troops try to save life by flight. 4t;. The mutual hatred 
 of the inhabitants is tlie numifest cause of the war. 47. \V«' cannot 
 permit the ambassadors of the tyrant to despise the commands of the 
 people. 4S. It is peculiar to the (Jr«>eks to love the study of ])hilos>.pliy. 
 41). The gods freciuetitly delay tlie deserved {tneritifs) punishmtMit (»f 
 crimes. oO. The rebellious hearts (^o/ i//? ?/.v) of tlie Hauls are open to the 
 eve of the ])refect. 51. The divine ehxpusiceof TuUius «'xposes((A^/A=.''^' 
 the nefarious plans of (^itiline. 52. It becomes the followers of Pompey 
 quietly to accept the judgment of the arms. 50. The ambassadors of 
 the Greeks do not kncnv how to deceive the great cunning of Philip. 
 
 Translate into EngUf<h : 
 
 1. Incognita providenti;e {providence) divlnrr consilia. 2. Invictis ])0. 
 puli Romani armis. 0. Imbecilla Uaji filiormn ingenia. 4 Irata nunti- 
 orum regiorum verba. 5. Securum Antonii amicorum perfiigium. G. 
 Generosi regVn;e animi mouumentum. 7. Dextene socioruni ale fuga. 
 8. Profan^e Juirurtha' legatdrum audaciie testimonia. 
 
 9. Adversarios dob) vincere nolumus. 10. Legfitum veneno interficere 
 cogitat. 11. Pnefectum dt'mentioe ac<-usari' desinunt. 12. Veniam 
 Togare nun(piam omittit. 10. Phiiosophiam impign» tractfire incipiunt. 
 14? Copias arma abjicere cogit. 15. Legato» ignorantiam simuhlre 
 jubet. 10. Copias a'rumuas perferre assuefacit. 17. Tyrannum .Etolia 
 
 uuxilium ferre vetat. 
 
 18. Pnefectus incolis concordiam commendat. 19. Porsenna Tar- 
 quinio auxilium offert. 20. Legiiti incohis ]tecunia tentant {to tcnqit). 
 21. C»)pia' castra valhj munire incii)iunt. 22. Tliebani (the Tluhans) 
 bellum Persis indlcere timent. 20. Praefectus glorijEcupidus esse desi- 
 nit. 24. Op])idani reginam strenue defendere volunt. 25. Mariuscopiag 
 «Tumnas ])erferre assuefacit. 20. Decemviri legat<^s oi)pidum intrare 
 prohibent. 27. Mendacia dicere necesse esse nnnquam potest. 28. Op- 
 pidanis muros diniere expedit. 
 
 29. His]>anifc ])opuli P(rndrum promissa Pomanorum amicitia? ante- 
 pdnunt. 00. Populus Hagitii causam avarifi.e tribuif. ?A. Pnrfectus 
 opjadandi-um animos falsis victoriarum nuntiis di^cipit. 02. Agrippa 
 Plebrjis discordi.e i)ericula ostendit. 00. Philipi)us Pcendrum h'gatia 
 auxilia promittit. 04. Populi Romfmi provinciiB apertas pnefectorum 
 
 THE APPOSITION. 
 
 91 
 
 raplnas per^^rre nolunt. 35. Socii Homa..dnvm arn c^ ^ comn^^ 
 8,.nthe incipiunt. 00. Amicdrum "annnos benehci s n.rc U^ ..^^^^ 
 ^demus. 07. Socidrum contr<,versias dyud.c.ire p n>ub> Rma^ 
 dum esse nequit. Os. Praefectum decreium ''^\'''''^^^^^^^^^ 
 01). Discipulis impigris ampla diligeuti.e pra^mia percipcre {^to leveue) 
 
 licet. 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 THE APrOSITIOX. 
 
 8 106. 1. A|»1M»*«*»«» i« *" agreement of an attribu- 
 in F N01N-, witl, its ftoverning substantive in case, as Dionysius 
 tyranum, Dionysius the tyrant ; G. DionysU tyranra, of Di- 
 
 onvsius tlie tyrant, &e. . 
 
 The nonn in apposition, which with its povernmg nonn foim» 
 an attributive phrLe, bears the same relation to the pkedic.tive 
 noun, as the attributive to the predicative ad.iective 
 
 8 1 or " The AKKEEMENT of the noun in apposition witli its 
 coverning 'substantive is the same as that of the pkedicative noun 
 ^"th its subject. Hence it aUcays agrees in cask, and when 
 
 a MOVABLE noun, it also agrees in gexde. and numbeb with 
 loverniug sul«tau,ive, as : mo.ysio tyranno, to Diony.ius the 
 [vrant; Lu.retiam ny,yMram, Is^x^ the teacher ; Athene» 
 iapieutiac moyistrm, Athens, the teacher of wisdom. 
 
 is Ib.nul in tlu- sui.ie "'^'"'"■'' f" n v,?r orCOU.ECTIVK noun, it may 
 
 as • Jxdui Dei populu,. the Jews, the people ot Uod. 
 S I08 -A Latin nouns in a|>positiou generally are placed 
 „i*,M;..^ven>in. nouns, while in Kuglish they.often precede 
 fy^.a>n, reolna, queen Cleopatra ; Sca>na>uler fiucu.. 
 
 "'Vio' frtt^ad of a simple nouu a whole attributive 
 t,hr>'e simple or combined, may be placed in apposition to a gov- 
 Irnhig'subs'tantive. In this case the attributive phrase la apposi- 
 
92 
 
 THE APrOSITIOX. 
 
 tion must be fornud sc) tuafoly j:ccoidii'<r to the riilcs in T.. xviii 
 & XX, and then be i)liieed affcr the iioverninij: substantive, and all 
 those attributes, that are dciH'udi'Ut on the hitter, as : 
 
 Lnca-lit, a sdihU toicn o/ CamjKOiid, Lueeria, cxiguuni 
 Campania^ oppiiUun. 
 
 An ext'dleut statue of P<dijdetas, the ornament of the Tns- 
 culan rilla, egrogia Polyeleti statua, vilhu Tuseuhuue oruanieu- 
 tum. 
 
 Hem. '2. A noun may have more than one apj)osition. In this case the 
 ditterent appositions follow each other, each with its own attributes, 
 in re<2:uhir order, as : 
 
 The tjinnd l\ri<iu(ler, a son of Ci/padus, Periander tyrannus, C\\y 
 
 seli Hlius. 
 
 GiiKfo, ((town oft'dinpania, the nursery of vices, Capua, Campaniaa 
 
 oppidutn, viliorum seminarium. 
 
 § I 10. '). If tlie number or gender of the noun in apposition 
 is dillereut from tiiat of the governing noun, the predicate ai»rees 
 witli the suiuKt'T, not will» tlie noun in ai)jH)sition. But if the 
 «••overniiiii- substantive is the name of a towx or crrv, being a 
 plnralt tantnni, and the noun in apposition is a word, denoting 
 ''elf I/, toif-n, rill<([ie^^ (as oppihttn, clcnsy urbs, cicitas), the 
 predicate agrees with the noun in api)Osition, and not with the 
 subject, as : 
 
 Canme^ a small v'dlaf/e of Apulia^ is dlstine/inshcd b// a 
 vldort/ if the Cartluajunans, Canna?, exignus Apuliae 
 vieus, PaMiorum victoria pnech'irus est {)tot imeclane sunt). 
 
 § 111. (i. Of the diilerent names, by which the same person 
 is designated, tlie first name grammatically is treated as the gov- 
 erning noun, and the others as aitositions to it. They conse- 
 quently nuist agree with the first name in case, as : (iajns Cor- 
 velins Gracrhas, Gen. Gajl Cornelll Gracchi, of Gajus Cor- 
 nelius Gracchus, &c. 
 
 Keui. n. The first names of the Honia'ns consisted of the f<)llowing few, 
 t^enerallv desi<j:nated in an abbreviated form by the initials : 
 
 A. Adus,C. (roju.i (Cajus). ( 'n. CnejoK. I). Didnins, L. Lucius, M. 
 Mdirus, M'. M<i„i>iH, N. N'luteri'is. P. Publiu.s, Q. Quintus, S. 
 Sextus, Sp. Sp'irins, T. Tit>ts, Ti. Tiberius. 
 
 § 11^. 7. Often the Latin language uses the form of an ap- 
 rosrnoN, where the English language employs the form of an at- 
 
 TIIE APPOSITION. 
 
 93 
 
 rRiBUTTVE GENITIVE (bv means of the preposition of)\ and some- 
 times the reverse is the case. We meet here the following pecu- 
 liariti s : 
 
 A. If the names of cities, towns, villages, islands, provinces 
 and i.isiRicTS, are accompanied by their corresix)nding appellative^ 
 ii()un<, the English language connects the name of the city, town, 
 district, &c., iry the preposition of as ''the city of Capua, the 
 district of LiquriaP This attributive relation is expressed by an 
 apposition in Latin, so that the name of the city, district, &c., is 
 made the <roverning substantive, and the appellative noun is placed 
 in api)osition to it. Tims the plirases '' the city of Capua, the 
 ?V<y,/./ o/\S7(v7//," must be changed into ''Capua, the city ; ^Si- 
 
 cihj, the island,'' as : ,.,//• 
 
 n- to.n, or Tarennn.,, Tarentnm (rarely ^.r^u// oppianm) ;^^..%^^ 
 
 ci- With the u^nl nv'nnn, h..wevor, attributive penmves are used and i ot 
 n;.pc>sitions, a' : Cn,ra'foria> r.pnnn et r„pn. i..,Uu the kia.^dom of Cappa- 
 dori:i and the island of Cyprus (Cic. Fanu 1;^ 4, 15). 
 
 The name of a district {ayer) is designated by an ad.iective. 
 formed from the name of the i)eople inhabiting it, as :^ The^ dis- 
 trid ofLiiiuria, ager Liguricus (literally : the LiyurianJiM); 
 the district of Zurich, ager Tigurlnus. 
 
 \\ The birthplace or residence of individuals m English gen- 
 erally is expressed bv the preposition of with a noun, denotmg 
 the place l>ut in Latin the name of the place is changed into a 
 civic noun, which is made an apposition to the name of the per- 
 son, or into a civic adjective, as : ^ ^ . .. -o ^ - • n 
 IJry of Patai'ium, Livius Patavlnus, G. Livu Tatavim, JJ. 
 Livio Patavino (literally : IJry the Patavian). Horace 
 of Veuusium, Horatius Yenuslnus (literally : Horace the 
 Venusian). 
 
 p:fr It appears con.eqnontly, that the title of a familiar elementary Latin work, 
 " Vii i lio)ime,^' i.s bad Latin. 
 
 C Names of months in connection with the appellative noun 
 *' month'' in English likewise are connected by the preposition 
 of' but in Latin the names of months are adjectives, as: the 
 month <f January, mentis (3d decl.) Januarius (literally: the 
 Januarian 7aoHth). 
 
iU 
 
 THE APPOSITTOX. 
 
 D. Names of stars on tin* conr.'arv in Eni^li-^li tako ilio appel- 
 lative noun " .s7</r" in the form of an APeosirioN, while hi Latin 
 the NAME of the star is made an ATruiHrrivE (jexitivk, as : " Tlie 
 star Saturn, Saturni stelhi (Htcrallj: the star of Saturn), 
 
 E. A word whi(;li is quoted as such, with the apposition 'word' 
 (verbum), ' noun ' {norne/i) etc., is made an ai tkibutivk oknitivk 
 of verhum, nonien etc, as: The wonl Mr;>u<l,' rrr/nf)n doll {doH 
 verhuin). For tlie appositions to ' name,' see P. II. p. 82. 
 
 EXAMTM.K or AVM.YSIS: THKYCUO-STHK T?TIOnA\'TT«. A BIIOAD KIVER OF GaUI.. 
 
 A. Skkkktux. TIu'v cnis»; tlu' Illi'uiaiui-^, IllKxld^mn trmi-o imt. 
 
 B. AiTKiBi'TivK piiuAsKs : 1. PfriiASK WITH APPosiTrnv. The Rliodnnti* rivor, 
 JifiO'lnmim fliitvnn. 2. f'oMroi'NO attiub'tive plirn-c (It'p ndent ou the 
 apnostioii './?// r? '///^ ' .• A hmnd river of (Jaiil : laf'on (rfiUlp furi'tm 
 
 C. Akuanokmknt, In- placini: tlu' appositioiiMl pJirasc ' f(ttnn) (iaTh^ flhrinrn'' 
 after the iroverniiiL' noun lihodamtm, in the skeleton : RfLodanuin, latum 
 Oallice Jl'tviu/n, traaseiinf. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 I. 
 
 A. ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES, CONTAIXTNG APPOSITIONS. 
 
 1. By Priscianus the f-ranimarian if/r<tinmaticun). 2. Of tin' erram 
 marian Priscianus. ;l To tlie poet Virg^il. 4. O tribune Sei>tinmlrj us I 
 5. To (]ueen llortensia. G. Of the teacluT Lucretia. 7. By .Emilia 
 the assistant. 8. By tlie town of CasilTnum. !). To the village of 
 Leuctra. 10. To the town of Seiresta. 11. By tlie river Rliiiie. 12. 
 By the district of 'Salernum. l;i. The diijjtrict {ohj.) <»f Brundusjuni. 
 14. Knnius of ^Kudife. 15. Terence (r/Z/y ) of A fiica. 10. Of ^I). .Junius 
 Brutus. 17. ToQ. Mucins Scfpvola. 18. ByM'. Ciirius DentHtus. li). 
 L. Seririus Catiline (^6j.). 20. By the island of Sardiiua. 21. To tlie 
 Btar Uranus. 22. To tli-i •Salient inians, a people of Calabria. 23. 
 To Cn. Poniprjus Mai2:nus, the renowned adversary of C. Julius. 24. Of 
 Athens, the rival of Sparta. 25. By the triumvir M. Antonius, the rival 
 of Octavianus. 2(1. To the Latin poet Virgil of ''Mantaa, the friend of 
 Augustus. 27. The' banks of the Ister. a 'rapid river of Paiuionia. 
 
 1. Seneca p]dloso])hus. 2. Seneoa» phiioso})!»!. IJ. Senecje i)hilesopho. 
 4. Seneca ])hilosopho. 5. Victoria {proper ikiihc) regina. (J. Victoria? 
 regln;e, 7. Victoriam reglnam. 8. Victoria reglna. \). .Ennlia magis- 
 tra. 10. vEuiiTue nuigistnp. 11. Sa<runtuni oi)ii(!um. 12. Sagun^) op- 
 pido. 13. Leuctra vicus. 14. Leuctnlruni vici. 15. Cannis o})i)iil<j. 10. 
 Ca]>uri oppido. 17. Nuniidia ])rovincia. 18. Khodo insuhe. l!l. Vejos 
 oi)])idum. 20. Vulturnus lluvius. 21. Vultiirno Huvio. 22. Lucio 
 Metello Cimbro. 23. Liicii Ann.ei Seneca?. 24. Agro i^atavino. 25. 
 
 ^ Sttlervnm U)rm9, i\\e ndjectiv»» Snlernitrinnn. litemlly, •'h^-lintfthiq to Sttlprvitm!" 
 When we siiL'irest adjeotives nf this kinti in the notes, tiiey uiwiys will he (je.-iignated hy •• hfi> 
 Ittixjing to''' '^ B'Uiiiiu-^'DiHM. belonirina t»» Brnii lii>iii;n •• /in'fuii.s. beloiiiriiiif t<> UudiiO. 
 * Let llie begiiuitr ahvjtys write «ml tlie ahbrevi.itions of tho Hr-t n:iiiu'> in Ux- trausln- 
 lion. * SiiUentinuH, a SJallentiiiiiin. « JJuntiidnua, beUuiging to Mantiui. '' Kai>iil, tur 
 
 THE APPOSITION. 
 
 95 
 
 Ag.nm ^Tarentinum. 20. " ^Amenno 27^^o^; I^j^ ^ 
 
 ff Cantabros. Hispanije l-l'^^^^" ' ^ .r;';,/^ ,f 32. Eximia Mercurii 
 
 ^- " PHRASES. 
 
 Brundusini, Lima geneu, trai,fcmce i ^.^^^-^^^^^ Volscos, autupmin 
 
 Seneca? tragrediaui, leg.u-e l)ra>ta^. 4. .^^ pra^clarum Mer- 
 
 Latii poptdtttn. vmcip. ^■^^^;^'2nZn tlagiliorum nnnistra, p<vpu^i 
 curii teuipUnu l''^^^/'^-. , ^ ~ D mm Metroddram, Aristonici ^^Tlie- 
 
 Komfiui decreta deridet. _ '• J^''''"'mc' ,itoliuiii, deorum douuim, dese- 
 
 s;S;:r"t"K=™.'-4s"^^""' ^^*^-"^-" '-''""' 
 
 is allc.wod to l>l"°yf"^-,* ;«,'>;:„": a ™ .:^e f S,°.!n, refuse to yield to 
 of the g<Kls. a. 'Ihe ;' ' "' ,;:f,^,;; '4 ". -He ,,„s „f the tyrant I'is.stra. 
 Drusus. the prelect ot \' ' l'^.'^^.'^i^;,f *ii,„,„o,lius. r,. H„rt.-n9.u. the 
 tus torture ••'l.c-ena the Hhiki oi ivxplain the cans,' ot tlie 
 
 Varne.l -attorney of the »''""*;'•;' J»,,^,,;: 'Lueretia. the private 
 dispute. «. "hou canst »^" «^"f; ^, ','^,„„p|,v, the t «cher of hie. 
 asistaut of the tyrant. <. ^','» ''' "''^ .^ tlie rival of Rome. 9. The 
 8. TuUns Hostiliu. destroys • \ a L^^'»;^»^^ ,„ ,,.,,, ,„„-„ of E,ii- 
 
 Uomans plun.ler S^yracuse. a «>'" • "' ^i of the --Peloponnesian war. 
 danmus. a cohmy ot ',"•■7;™; /, ' ^^t n P ef ct -Ehutius. li. Deme- 
 1,. Wo wish to save '1'^./''; ' 'd,.'!'"!! of Cassander. 13. Tliev in- 
 trius, Anti,:;onus sou, k. Is -\'^.^;'"?A';,.\,,"\vrant Dionvsius. 14. The 
 tend' to award a 'prue ^^^^ ,. ^,^,,; „,- ,,„gust-„s. 1.5. We in- 
 
 1. Syracuse, a colony of Corj-th is frien^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 i:^,^rr r sr;atr .|utl;rE;^pt%s t,. favU tiieto„_n^ 
 
 ^ o 4 ..^ „,.-,, .tiv >iijli»n<Tin2 to Aniens. 
 
 river in upper lt:ily, ti-e im»< en. P. . ''''^' " U Xr<,pof>tfn,ns, belonirmg o Ne.-.po- 
 [.ThrhunMS. bolt.i.ginir to Tlu-bes. a T'..b.u . Vju ji^ ^ ^^^ „,„,e <,f an Athenian 
 
 woman. ••^^ AU.M-n^-y, p<it-ouus. ' » -a p.IouonneUacuH. ""^ "t*'\ ^ •', 
 
 ancient resitU-ncc of the k'Jgs -^ ^'''Tremperantia. 3i PuUUanus. belu..gm.? 
 
90 
 
 COORDINATE PHRASES. 
 
 4 Lvsander takos Athens, the rival of Sparta. 5. Ari)iiiuin a small 
 toxvii <.f Latium, is the •^-'birthplaco of C. MariiK. G. -^i iiular, r,t 
 Thebos, 'Svins eternal glorv. 7. The town of Ai^nigentum is a colony ot 
 the Khodians. 8. Ih' nei^lects to aapiire -wealth, tjie assistant ot 
 fame. i). Tiie K<mians do not wish to lose th.- island ot Medy. lU. 
 Perseus directs the troops to i)hin(h'r the district ot Tl^'h^'^^- ,,1-.^'^^* 
 island of Britain is dear to Julius A-ricola. the fatlier-in-law of I Jicitus. 
 1 Ilerodoti •''llalicariiassei histoiiani lecrhims. 2. liisthTUS -Milesius 
 Darluni krdere nou vuit. ',]. I'ersa^ uurum ^'\Vtticuin vastaut. 4. 
 3-'(.\)irvran Pcriandri, Corinthi tvraiini. filium interfi<-iunt. o. Minerva, 
 sapieiitife dea. (iran'os -"'oleam serere docet. 0. Masinissani popuh 
 Romani sociuin. defendere volunuis. 7. A<>:rippa trd)riuus 1 U-bejos 
 Patriciis ivconcilijTre studet. 8. T. Annius P. riodiam. mveteraiuni M. 
 Tullii ininiium. iutcrficit. 9. PuMii airrum -"Panorniitanuni vastare 
 pergunt. 10. ■'■^Segestaui, Siciliae poi^ulus, Honianis niagnani Irumenii 
 copiani donaut. 
 
 LI^SSON XXII. 
 
 COOKDINATE rilP.ASES. 
 
 § 113. 1. The coordination of ])hrnsos (§ 83) is tlircofold: 
 either copiilalivc , or ili)*Jnurlivi , or advn^ative, 
 
 accordinj,^ to the ntUure of the conjunctions, by which the 
 
 phrases are connected. 
 
 Rem. 1. roiijuiK-tioiis are words, connecting sentences or plirases 
 with each other. 
 
 ^ 114. 2. If coordinate phrases have eiiher the same 
 GOVERNING, or the same dependent word, tlie common word 
 generally is expressed only once, as: 
 
 A. rREincATivE pnii.^SES. 
 
 Metellus H .Emilias, triumphant. .VrfjUxs and ^^iniluii^ triumph 
 (^>^.^'-^(/^^■''M('telllls tnuniphsf«//</ .EinUius triuniphs''). ,. , , . 
 
 Metellus venit et vincit, M*tell>iH coims and w victorious {instead of 
 " Metellus comes ^/'CZ Met ell us is victorious'). ,y,,^j, ;, 
 
 Ambuhlre conducit rt juvat. It i,s,Hrrnrn,hh' and (lrhf//,ffu/ to walk 
 (instead of'h is serviceable to walk aud it is delighttul to walk ). 
 
 Ic/m 1 -t -s u ritv in Asia Minor. '^^ Atfirm. lu-lonsini: to .\thens. ^^O.rrj/r.uHx, 
 aConvrem io^ an olive-tree. *^ ranormit inu><. h.Um^Uvj: to ranom.us. the 
 
 modern ralermo. " Segestdnus, u Segostian, inhabitant of Segesla. 
 
 COORDINATE PHRASES. 
 
 97 
 
 B. OBJECTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 Grammaticam ct philosophiam discit 5". ler^rns grammar b^^ phUoso- 
 phy {instead of " he learns grammar and he learns philosophy ). 
 
 C. ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES, 
 
 Antonii et Qeopatrre vit«^, The lives of Anthony and Cleopatra {instead 
 of *• the life of Anthony and the life of Cleopatra ). 
 
 If subjects, predicates, objects and attribntes are thus connect- 
 ed bv coordinating conjunctions, having either the same govern- 
 ing, or the same dependent word, they are called coordinate 
 
 subjects, objects, &c. 
 
 I. COPULATIVE COORDINATION. 
 
 S 115 3 In order to form a copulative coordination, 
 the KiKvlish language employs the conjunction ^^ and^ which is 
 rendered by one of the following Latin conjunctions : et, ac, 
 at que and the enclitic que. The first three are^ placed between 
 the coordinate words, while the conjunction qtce is affixed to the 
 end of the last. Of tliese atque cannot be used before a conso- 
 NANT, and ac not before words beginning with a vowel, nor before 
 
 c aud qu, as : 
 
 Darius loses life and kingdom, Darius vitam et ^^gji™ perdit {or vi- 
 
 pin.iuos atque amicos, or propihquos ^micosque, not ac). 
 
 S 1 1 4 The conjunction et (not atque or ac) often is 
 placed l)efo're each of the coordinate words or phrases, answering 
 to the following three Euglisli connections : I. hoth-and ; 1) 
 ^^^f ^,j,^^bia also ; 3. as icell—as ; as : 
 
 ^2^::Z^^ kll^'as ;" n o"; tL"sabinians. as of the Vo.sclans). 
 
 S I I 7 .5 If two puKmcATivE phrases, which have a common 
 PUEn..AT.; are co,,uh.tivel.y co.inectcd, the pmlicate in En^Mish 
 al,ra,/.o, and i.i Latin ffenerall!/ is placed in the PLrBAL^ But ,f 
 the coordinate subjects are things in the singular, and express 
 related ideas, which may be considered as om, the Latin predi- 
 cate stacds in the singular, as : 
 
COORDINATE PHRASES. 
 
 99 
 
 98 
 
 COORDINATE PHRASES. 
 
 ^^nilSu^ and MeteUiis die, iEiuilius Metollusquo oboiint ; 6'/^ ; ^ 
 
 anget (not augent). ■ •, . i 
 
 Rem ^^ The connnon predicate sometimes is placed in }^J^^;^ 
 evl^n i the cor-rdinate subjects do not contain rehited «1^'^^«- ^ ;\\'^ 
 s iWects are connected by et~et, the prechcate may be placed in 
 th^-^sino-ufar(>r plural, even if the subjects denote pehsons, unle^s 
 one of Ihem is ^n the plural, in whi<-h case the predicate always 
 
 '^!:i^^ar!:^n::^-Laclius consent, etMnc-.nns et L.lius con- 
 ^^XrS':;;:^, temfy, et min. et ira torrent inot terret). 
 S 1 1 S 6 If the common predicate consists of a predicative 
 adjective and tlie copula, the number of both, adjective and copu- 
 la is determined by the last rule (§117), as : 
 'mpparchus and Thessalus are cruel, Hipparchus et Thc^ssalus s.evi 
 
 ^%rQinia and Lucretia are renowned, Virgnia et Lucretia clarre sunt. 
 War and Uanger are past, bellum pericul unique pra3teritum est. 
 
 But if the subjects are of different genders, both adjective and 
 copula must be in the plural, and the adjective assumes the 
 MASCULINE gender, if the subjects are persons or heasts. and the 
 neuter gender, if they are things avithout life, as : 
 
 The son and daughter are stndions, filius et filia studios/ sunt 
 
 TheZmlfand ihe-mlfare tame, lupu.s et lupa mausuet. sunt. 
 
 1 OU and labor are lost, oleum et opera perdita sunt. 
 Rem 3 These rules apply also to those predicative adjectives, with 
 which the copula forms an onjE( t-infinitive, as : 
 
 Gajus and Sempronius must he ready, Gajus et Sempromus parati 
 
 ?;va^/i^r^!;//(f P^rj.^;-^ cease to he disgraceful, pcrfidia et perjuriuni 
 ignominiosa esse desinunt. 
 § 1 19. 7. If two attributive phrases, which have the same 
 attributive* adjective, are copulatively connected, we distinguish 
 the following two cases : 
 
 1. If the coordinate governing nouns are of different numbers 
 the adjective generally is repecded, and placed before each of 
 
 them, as : 
 
 He overcomes the ohstacles hy great dangers and perseverance, impedi- 
 menta magnis periculis magnfuiue perseverantia superat^ ^ 
 
 1 A Latin proverb, meaning, that all efforts are In vain. 
 
 V 
 
 2. If the two governing nouns are of different genders, denot- 
 Inn- THINGS, thc adjcctivc either is placed before the former of 
 the nouns, and agrees with it, or it stands after either of them, 
 agreeing with the one it is connected with, as : 
 
 Gaius is distinnniHhed hi/ re?narkal,le talent and scholarship, 1. Gajus 
 Hiiro in-onio ac doctrina f.ra^stat, or 2. Gajus ingenio miro ac doctrina 
 pra^stat,'"//' 3. Gajus ingenio ac doctrinfi mira pnestat. 
 Rem. 4. Even in the secx)nd case it is quite usual, to repeat the adjective 
 
 before each of the governing nouns. 
 Rem. .5. If two coordinate attributive adjectives are dependent oti the same 
 uoun,and the noun implies two different things or persons, ad >t- 
 gui>hod hvtho two a.ljectives, the number ot the "«'^".^^/^ ,^^(^^.^^^^ 
 PLURAL, as in English, or the singular, as: The Latm and Gictk 
 huiiruages, Lingua (or linqucB) Lafina et GrcEca. 
 
 § laO. 8. The copulative and adversative conjunctions some- 
 times are 07mtfed, and the coordination is^ then called Sisyu- 
 flctic (that is "being without conjunction"). 
 Rem. r>. Of more than two coordinate phrases the first two regularly are 
 connected a.v/ud.(iodly, in English as well as ^^ Latin. But in 
 Latin even the third and following phrases generally ha%e no con- 
 
 ^''^^Th^y^drfend children, property and lives, liberos, fortunas, vitas de- 
 
 fc-ndunt. 
 
 Iconic, see and conquer, Venio, video, vmco. 
 
 II. ADV^ERSATIVE COORDINATION. 
 § 1^1. 0. The adversative coordination is a copulative 
 connection of opposite ideas. The adversative conjunctions are : 
 
 1. J)((t, sed, vermn, autem, vero, at ; 
 
 2. jStlll, yet, tamen, sed tamen. 
 
 ^edj verlmi and at always stand before the first word of the 
 phrase' which tbey connect, while autem, vero, and generally 
 tamen, are placed after the first, sometimes after the second 
 word of the connected phrase, as : 
 
 The Romans Pjht hravely, hut the all ies flee, Romani strenue pugnant, 
 Bed (rerum) socii fugiunt, or: socii autem {vero) fugmnt. 
 
 lluy often fiyht^y^t never conquer, Saepe pugnant, nunquam tamen 
 
 vincunt. 
 
 III. DISJUNCTIVE COORDINATION. 
 § l!355. 10. The disjunctive coordination in English is 
 
100 
 
 COORDINATE PHliASES. 
 
 COORDINATE PHRASES. 
 
 101 
 
 formed by the conjunction or, wluch .generally is rendeml by the 
 Latin conjuiction ant. The donble connection either-OT^ 
 usually is expressed by " ant—aut;' as : 
 
 We intend to oecujv, the right or left honk of the riur, Dexterani axii 
 
 ''''f:^^:!:^ or tke Carthaginians, aat Re 
 
 mHiiis, aut Poeuis adli^orrre dubi'tis. 
 jy Fur the use ut vel^vel, and sive—nice, see p. -M) foil. 
 
 IV. ANALYSIS OF COOUDIXATK I'lIRASES. 
 S 133 11. Cc.Ordinato pl.rascs are nnalyze.l, like combised 
 nhrases I'y resolvin- tl.ein into their eleinentary plirascs, and 
 translatins; these sin.^ly. They are urno./ed by e.xj.ressing .he 
 common word once, a.ul joining the coordinate words m snciv a 
 manner, that tliev tof;efhe>- f.xU the same place either before or 
 afto.r the eomn.on word, a. each of then, had in the sn.- e phrases. 
 If phrases have no common w.>rd, they are simply I'hu'w' together, 
 and joined by the recinired conjunction. 
 
 Bern. 7. It generally i. b..t for '•'■^---. '"/-the"o,.rnm.T.r«ris. 
 
 coCrdinate phrases, to drop at first one "'. '' , , \,,t,. ,,,ases 
 
 • and to translat.. tU. «-.Uencc Y'"'''?' , ; rolRniNVT w t. B, en- 
 
 nr,. then seimratelv constituted, and tlie co..ri>inati, w > i , . 
 
 ml,., d inUtem, substituted lor the single ccirdotate wo.d m the 
 
 '"tlVKy'^KNTEXCK: The boys wish to he devoted and 
 
 tliankful t(» the tfiichcr. » ,,„i tlvmkfiil" • PaeH 
 
 1. Omitting tht' coordinate adjective "and tlianktiil . rutn 
 
 micjixtrix dtditi ense c a pi ant. 
 
 2. Cor»lU>lNATE PHRASES : , 
 
 wish to be devoted, dediti es^e c^ipvnit; 
 wish to be thankful, (jrati emi oipiunt. 
 R -VRHVNCFMENT bv Substituting the coordinate word, deddi 
 '• ^^i^v Iw single coordinate word dedit. m the sentence : 
 Pneri m.ujistris drditi it u rati es..e cxpi'fnt. 
 Bern. 8. Coordinate ATTUinrTivH P^J-^- lu.vi.;p c;<m.rnjon aHn^ 
 
 adjective, are constituted according to M>- ^^' 't c » r na^ 
 
 tlu' crovei'iiiniT uoim, a> : . , i xi 
 
 OJVEX hyTENGE: Large fiM and foresU mrroxmd the 
 
 t Skeleton (droppia;? one of the coordinate euhjects): 
 Agri domum cingunt. 
 
 
 « r. .•^T.T^T.mr ATTTUBUTIVE PHRASES: Large fields and 
 
 •• fS::r-^7ri »u,7";<rSe ,• («r ,«.,.» «.h «<= «^»". -^ "^^ 
 
 . ^^:ft;cKMEV.■•l*•'s,U;stituting the cor,r,hnate phrases for 
 ^■th;.irg^S^w.;rd a,n in the skeh..ton : Agn magma. 
 
 Mr,,,' d ,o„ci„;/,n,i (<'V'"'^"'.,'J;f.'to"be [.. ned bv coordina- 
 
 Bern. 9. If compound "'"'^^"^^«^'[^.t^ri'n jl 'hra es c^^^^ th. 
 
 ^^Z^::^'Zr::^^Lts^:J.^e^ in either of the 
 
 '■' •ri;;'.';:;":!:. "uajus by protmses, and Sentpronius by money." 
 1. Single ™<^^- promises. G'lj'im promism plaeat ;_ 
 t "aira^e» Se'^^-r'^iniC by mW, Scmpronia,n pecunu. 
 ploeat. 
 '■ ^S"W prrraXle^pronius by money, Gajun. 
 promim. ,1 S„,pro„0„n ;|^c««M. „^^5^^,^ compound 
 
 ^Gojum promissis ct Scmpronium pecunia placat. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 tsg- Analyze the folloiringcoordin,dcpl,raj<es: 
 
 ,% pren't e.ce,s by P-'™- ^^.^ ro^plet;;! I. W^ 
 duumvirs are unwi Img to «f ■;','; .^'"'^'"tuJ teacher praises the 
 
 injustice. ^tro.evQ 1 Thev capture and destroy 
 
 CooUDiXATE OBJECTIVE ^^^f'^^'l^-}^-^ Su )i-ius 8. We surronnd 
 Nun.antia. 2. He accuses ^^^Vl anrc-m^^^^^ ''■ ^^^'' 
 
 and kill the allies. 4. '1 hey y'^l^^''"^ ^''^l^^^ and 'opposed 
 
 are dear and ple^isant to the ^^^J^^^ l'\ie pleads and defends 
 to the war. 7. ^ou labor and ^^'»[" ,^VhP I'm^^^^^ 10 We either admon- 
 eloqnently. 9. They caj.ture ^^/^.l^^^f ^^^^^^^^^ V fe, but plunder the 
 
 ish or punish %^f^^ J;^J^\^^cZ. to 'the erlemies. 13. 
 Vop^rty. 12. The> tigUt bravei>, ii They olten open 
 
 •lev tignt nraven, out ^u.v^.." ^- Thev often open 
 ^Ve-al..u,d,.n the town, yet we retain the eas e. 14. Th y^oiten op^_^ 
 
 the mouth, still «'-•>, -T|;;;,.;'i*:„;^,rt.h the n.an and the crime, 
 house an.l fzarden. Id. )h.> f """"\\ "■ ,, 4,,^. corruption. 18. ^\ e 
 IT. We not o.tly censure, but »>^'! V'^^.^J' . [, ^ ,,_ l,,- ,,„„.„ge „nd 
 expect either d.-ath or victory. 1"- /1''. •'f'^.''; .,; We pve both 
 coilidence. iO. Tlvy read e.ther "^f, ^^^^ ;, ,1 t„ry and glory ic 
 ^Z^'iri^:^^^'^ «»i- -d Semprlus. ^ 
 
 iContrailus. ^ Bona, G. bonorum. » Emittere. 
 
102 
 
 COORDINATE PHRASES. 
 
 acquires fame and money bv diligence. 25. He never loses a battlo by 
 imprudence or nog-ligcnce. 2G. They generally displt^ase by ignorance 
 or arrogance. 27. 1 know how to reconcile friends and relatives. 28. 
 They intend to concpicr or to peritih. 29. Tliey either are not able or 
 not willing to explain the sentence. 30. He knows how to read, but he 
 does not know liovv to write. 31. They can lose life, but they never can 
 ^lose fame. 82. We teach the children to be contented and happy. 33. 
 He directs the duun»vii-s to ''arrest and to guard the accused. ;>t. He 
 compels both P«'rseus and the ^-Etolians to •'require an armistice. 35. 
 He permits Gajus either to remain or to go away. 30. He permits the 
 ambassadors to ''recite the papers, but refuses to %dmit Perseus. 37. 
 We wish not only to help, but also to teach the freedmen. 38. Thou 
 accusest Gajus of perjury, and Sejus of treacln^y. 31). He sends horst^ 
 to the })refect, and money to the troops. 40. They begin to approach 
 {adlre) the walls, and to harass the inhabitants. 41. I intend to bribe 
 the ambassador by money, and the tribune by influence. 
 
 Coordinate predicativp: purases. 42. \Vars and battles delight 
 the Scythians. 43. Discord and hatred destroy the glory of the country. 
 44. Phoebus and Minerva grant wisdom to the minds. 45. The j)en and 
 the sword are the masters of the earth. 4(). Pride and arrogance dis- 
 please. 47. Avarice and corruption are disgraceful. 48. Lucretia and 
 the queen are free. 4i). The queen and the ])refect are dear to the in- 
 habitants. 50. Earth and heaven are full of the benefits of God. 51. 
 The house and the garden are valuable. 52. Crassus and the i)refect 
 cannot be contented. 53. The queen and ^Emilia generally are glad. 
 
 54. Daughter and grandfather continue to be thankful to the prefect 
 
 55. Both the troops and the inhabitants desist from being hostile. 50. 
 Sword and lance cease to be dangerous. 57. Patience and courage 
 gen(»rally are necessary to troops. 58. Tlie arms and ^accoutrements are 
 ^*^burdensome to the allies. 51). Food and water begin to be rare. 00. 
 The troops are safe and unhurt. 01. The cause is clear and manifest. 
 62. The allies be<2:in to be hostile and rebellious. 03. The irround isdrv, 
 but fertile. 04. The accused "api)eals, but the queen confirms tlu; sen- 
 tence. 05. Either folly or treachery is the cause of the crime. 06. 
 Either the prefect or the tribunes must yield. 07. Men are either free 
 or slaves. 08. Negligence or imprudence '-causes the loss. 01). The 
 queen comes, sees, and conquers. 
 
 CooUDrNATE ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 70. The ample rewards of 
 '•^genius and wisdom. 71. The poverty and disgrace f>f tlu^ children of 
 Anthony. 72. The mutual ^•'grievances of both the .'Etolians and 
 Perseus. 73. The evidences of '-'extraordinary judgment and '''shrewd- 
 ness. 74. The great damage and losses of the farmer. 75. The town 
 has old walls and gates. 70. Gajus has ingenious male and female 
 scholars. 77. The triumvirs obtain ixjwer by great fraud and intrigues. 
 78. It is not only allowed, but also ex]x^dient to the allies and friends ot 
 the R<mian iieojile, to ''present mutual disputes and grit'vances to the 
 people. 7y. The ambassadors of either the ^tolians or of Perseus must 
 
 * In coordinations like tliis, the coiiimon words (here can an<l Iomp) must not be ex- 
 pre8>^e(l at the second place. * ('ojnprehen'U-re. • I'otere. '' Uecitftre. " Adniittere. 
 » Sitrcinse. *° .Molestiis. »' Aiipeliire. i'' AlTorre. i* Ingeniuin. '* Querela. '* Egro 
 giu8. »« BuUeriia. i' Proferre. 
 
 COORDINATE PHRASES. 
 
 103 
 
 yield. 80. The daughter and son-in-law of Gajus are unhurt and safe. 
 81. A quiet conscience is a great relief and '^consolation. 
 
 Translate into Enrjlkh: 
 
 Coordinate suriects. 1. Minucius etTrebonius '^qunesturam male 
 ""gerunt. 2. Ingenium et sapientia invidiam superat. 3. Avaritia et 
 perfidia flagitia ])arit. 4. Et Brutus et Cassius patriam amicitiae praefert. 
 5. Ant Posidonius aut Seneca errat. 0. Gaji filius et filia aegri esse 
 solent. 7. Lucretia at<iue ^^milia reginne filiJIrum invida' sunt. 8. 
 l)iscordi;r c^iusa atxpie initium sa^pe exigua sunt. 9. Invidia mutua 
 at<iue odium exitiosa esse solent. 10. Belgarum industria ac mercatiira 
 egregifc sunt. 11. Pompejus, Lentulus, AfricJTnus foede x)ereunt. 12. 
 Invidia, odium, iuimicitia? tinitinra* sunt, sed tamen ^'differunt. 13. 
 Peregrlnum auxilium ac ])eregrina pecunia populis liberis sa?pe exitiosa 
 sunt. 14. J'oi)uli Komjini et justitia et dementia sociorum animos con- 
 ciliat. 15. Lil)ertos et adjuvare et docere necesse est. 10. Praefecto 
 cajitlvos aut interficere aut libera re licet. 
 
 CooKDiXATE PREDICATES. 17. Libros et legimus et scribimus. 18. 
 Liberos educare et jx)ssumus et deberaus. 19. Bellum finire aut nescit 
 aut non vult. 20. Debelliire volunt, sed nequeunt. 21. Reginae incola- 
 rum animos conciliare et exi)edit et necesse est. 22. Servos liberare aut 
 periculosum aut irritum est. 23. Belgne ]X)pulis finitimis infesti exiti- 
 osique sunt. 24. Sociis auxilium aut mittit aut promittit. 25. Sicilia 
 RoHumdrum cella et -'horreum est. 
 
 Coordinate objects, 20. Pompejus ^^Armenios et Judaeos vincit. 
 27. Magister discipulorum et ingenium et diligentiam laudat. 28. Plii- 
 li]>pus Pa?no8 et copiis et pecuniJi adjuvare i)romittit. 29. Adversario- 
 rum co])i;e et numero et discipllna i)rapstant. 30. Alexandrum saevitiaE?, 
 injustiti.e, superbi;e accusjlre solenms. 31. Philipju legati tribunes 
 pecunia ac ])romissis corrumpere student. 32. Adversaridrum argumenta 
 aut refellere aut concedere debemus. 33. Persae Lysandri avaritiam ac 
 '■'^nequitiam aldiorrent. 34. Africanus Africam atque llisj^aniam imperio 
 Romano addit. 35. Persel legati ^litdlos magna -^munificentia magnis- 
 (jue ])romissis corrumpunt. 30. Copiae castra diripere ac praedam "^^col- 
 ligere incijuunt. 
 
 Co'iRDiNVTE ATTRIBUTES. 37. Discipuli Plauti Terentiique comoedias 
 legere malunt. 38. (Jajo philos«>]diia^ aut eloquenti;r studium com- 
 mendamus. 39. Gaji lil)er egregii '^'ingenii ac doctrlnap documenta con- 
 tinet. 40. Et amicorum et inimicorum consilia protlesse poseunt. 41. 
 Linguam Germaiiam atque -''Anglicam lingu;e -•'Frauco-Gallicae anteponi- 
 mus. 42. Fabius diligentia mira et cauta Poendrum consilia ^'eludere 
 scit. 43. Vitam miseram sed justani vitae jucundae sed injustae ante- 
 ponere debemus. 
 
 1* Solatium. " Quaistorship. '" To administer. 2* To be distinsiii>hed from each other. 
 *3 Honvum, h<trn. 23 Armcniu.s, an Arntfiniait. "4 Wickedness. 26 Liberality. 
 »• To collect. "7X81601. 2s ^iig.icus, EnglUh. '■'» Franco-Gallicu.-, French. ^» T« 
 baffle. * Related. 
 
104 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 BOOK SECOND. 
 
 PASSIVE YOICE.—TIIE IXFLECTIOX OF XOUNS 
 AND ADJECTIVES CONCLUDED.— PRONOUNS. 
 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 LESSOiN XXIIl. 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 § l!34. 1. The English passive voice consists of compound 
 tenses only, formed by tlie participle and the auxiliary to he. But 
 in Latin the passive voice in the present and i« those forms of 
 the verb, which are derived from it, consists of simple tenses, 
 formed bv attaching: the passive endinirs to the stems of the verbs. 
 
 § 125. 2. The pa««MVC C'll(lill^'«>i of the Latin verb 
 are the same in the 1st, 2d, and 4th conjugations, those of the 
 third being mostly modified by connecting vowels. They are 
 the following : 
 
 I. II. & IV. CONJUGATIONS. III. CONJUGATION. 
 
 Infinitive : ri Infinitive : i. 
 
 Present indicatfve : Present INDICATI^^E : 
 
 SINGULAR. plural. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 1. or mur \ 1. or h/iur 
 
 2. ris mini I 2. eris hnlni 
 
 3. tur ntiir. \ 3. Uur nnttir. 
 
 § l^ff. 3. By attaching these endings to the stem of the 
 Terb (as shown in L. i. ii. vii. xii.), we form the following 
 
 Paradigms : 
 
 I. FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Infinitive : Amjlri, to be loved (stem amu, char, a, ending W). 
 
 Present indicative. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. Amor, I am loced 
 
 2. amaris, thou art loced 
 
 3. amalur, he, xhe, it is loved 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amnmur, we are loved 
 
 2. amamiui, i/ou are loved 
 
 3. amantur, tfwy are loved. 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 105 
 
 II. CONJUGATION. 
 Infinitive: Monr-ri, to he admoimhid {stk^i mone, ckxr. e, 'E^d- 
 
 INQ H). 
 
 Present indicative : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. Monoor, I am admonished 
 
 2. nionrris. thou art admonished 
 
 3. monC'tiir, he, she, it is admonished 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 PLn?AL. 
 
 monemur, we are admonished 
 iiionemini, you are admonished 
 monentur, they are admonished. 
 
 III. CONJUGATION. 
 Infinitive : Lfgi, to he read (stem leg, char, g, ending i). 
 
 Present indicative : 
 
 SINGLTiAR. 
 
 1. Legor, I am read 
 
 2. legeris, thou art read 
 
 3. legitiir, Jie, she, it is read 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. legimur, we are read 
 
 2. legimini, you are read 
 
 3. leguntur, they are read. 
 
 IV. CONJUGATION. 
 Infinitive : Audlri. to he heard (stem audi, char. I, ending ri). 
 
 Present indicative 
 singular. 
 
 1. Audior, I am heard 
 
 2. audiris. thou art heard 
 
 3. audltur, he, she, it is heard 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. audlmur, we are heard 
 
 2. audiiinni, you are heard 
 
 3. audiuntur, they are heard. 
 
 Rom. 1. In the \. sing, of the 1st conjugation the characteristic r? is 
 droj)j)(>d, and in the 3 plur. of the 3d conjugation the vowel u is 
 inserteil between stem and ending, as in tlie corresponding persons 
 of the active voice. 
 
 Rem. 2. The characteristic of dtire and its com]iounds is short, as in the 
 active voice. Pronounce tlierefore circf/m'daris, eireum datur. 
 
 Rem. 3. The I-rerhs of the ?A conjugatic n (g 58) insert tlie letter i be- 
 tween stem and ending in the t.anie persons, as in the active voice. 
 as: 
 
 Infinitive : Capi, to he taken (stems cap and capi, charact. p, 
 ENDING i). 
 
 Present indicati\'E : 
 
 SINOrXAR. 
 
 1. Capior, I (nn, taken 
 
 2. cajMTis, thou art taken 
 
 3. cai>itur. Jie, she, it is taken 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. capimur, we are taken 
 
 2. cai)imini, you are taken 
 
 3. capiimtui', they are taken. 
 
 § I 37. 4. Of the irregular verbs of the 3d conjugation e^sc, 
 pof^xe, velle, nolU\ maUe form no passive voice. Ferre forms the 
 following, partly irregular, passive 
 
106 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Infinitive : Ferri, to he carried (stem fer, cuAii. r, trreoulah 
 ENDING ri). 
 
 Present indicative : 
 
 STNGn.AK. 
 
 1. Fcror, lam carried 
 
 2. ferris (irr,), thou art C((rried 
 
 3. fertur (irr.), he, 6he, it is earned 
 
 TLUHAL. 
 
 1. feriniiir, we are carried 
 
 2. ferimini, you are carried 
 
 3. feriiiitiir, th(?/ are carried. 
 
 § 128. 5. The \vr}) face re imd those of its c()mj)Ouiuls, that 
 retain the vowel a of the stem (see Rem. 4), form tlie irregular 
 passive mfLuhWe fieri, and in the present tense assume active end- 
 ings, formed from the stemj^?. The passive fieri, which has botli 
 the passive signification to be done, to he made, and the aciive 
 meaning to become, is tlius conjugated : 
 
 Infinitive : Fieri, to he made, to become. 
 Present indicative: 
 
 rLT'RAL. 
 
 1. f Imus, ice are made, we hecome 
 
 2. fitis. you are made, you hrcome 
 
 3. f Tunt, tJiey are made, th< y hcome. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. Flo, I am made, I hecome 
 
 2. fis, thou art made, thou hecomest 
 
 3. fit, he is made, he becomes 
 
 Rem. 4. Tlie compounds of far ere, wliich do not ('hanir<' the vowrl a of 
 tlieir stems into / (j^oH, K. 4), form tht-ir passives accordiiiir to the 
 paradigm oi fieri, as: r(drfae< n — eed( fieri, eahflo, ealifit. eaUfiunt 
 But those comi)ounds, wliirh are com])osed with ])ri'j)()sitions (st'O 
 §58, Kem. 3), form a regular passive, like the other l-verbs of tlie 
 3d conjugation, as : interfieere — inter' fici, intejfeicrr, interjieeris dr. 
 
 § \*29. (). //r, as a simj)le verb, forms only an impersonal 
 passive (see Boolv III.). But the transitive compounds of ire, aa 
 transire, prarterlre,, imre, form a complete passive voice accord- 
 ing to the following paradigm : 
 
 Infinitive : Translri, to be crossed. 
 Present indicative : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. Transet)r, F a77i crossed 
 
 2. transiris, thou art crossed 
 
 3. transitur, he, she, it is crossed 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. trnnslmur. we are crossed 
 
 2. transimini, yott are crossed 
 
 3. transeuntur, they are crossed. 
 
 Syntactical Rules on the use of thk Passive Yoice. 
 
 § ISO. T. Predicative and olyectivc ))h rases are formed from 
 verbs in the passive voice according to the rules in the preceding 
 lessons, as : 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 107 
 
 A. predicative phrases. 
 
 1. Passive predicates. 
 
 Puer amdtur, the boy is loved. 
 
 Copiae vi/icuntur, the troops are defeated. 
 
 2. Passive subject-infinitives : 
 
 Lauddri jucundum est, it is pleassint to be praised. 
 Vinci dispticet, it displeases to be defeated. 
 
 13. objective phrases. 
 
 1. Oriects, dependent on passive predicates. 
 Perfidiae accusdtur, he is accused of treachery. 
 llastis interjiciuidur, they are-killed by lances. 
 
 2. Passive object-infinitives. 
 Relinqiii incipit, he begins to be abandoned. 
 
 Vituperiiri solent, they usually are censured. 
 Vinci possunt, they can be defeated. 
 
 § l«ll. 8. The formation of the objective phrase from verbs 
 in the passive voice is in two points distinguished from that of the 
 active objective phrase : 
 
 1. Passives generally cannot govern objects in the accusative 
 
 case. 
 
 2. The SUBJECT of the active voice assumes in the passive the 
 form of an object in the ablative, w^hich is called the pai^sive 
 
 a:;eiit. 
 
 When the passive agent denote^; a person, the ablative must be 
 l)receded by the preposition a, which before words beginning with 
 a vowel or A, assumes the form ab : 
 
 Puer a magistro lauddtur, the boy is praised by the teacher. 
 Curiatius ah Horatio interfieitur, Curiatius is killed by Horatius. 
 Gajus ah dmlcis adjuvdtur, Gajus io assisted by friends. 
 
 i3ut: 
 Agerequis (not ah eguis) ardtur. the field is ploughed by liorsos. 
 Oppidum dulo (not a dolo) expugndtur, the town is taken by stratagem. 
 
 Rem. 5. If the passive agent has attributes dependent on it, the pro- 
 position a (or id)) stands before the whole phrase, as : Tullius ab 
 Antonii amlcis expelUtur, Tullius is banished by the friends of An- 
 thony. 
 
 § 1JI2. 9. The passives^^eW and vklcrl may, like the copula, 
 be connected with predicative adjectives and nouns. Fieri has 
 then the active signification " to hecome,^' and videri the active 
 signification "- to seem,^' the rules for the grannnatical form of the 
 ])redicative adjectives and nouns, which are connected with these 
 
108 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 past^ives, hcinp^ in every instance the s:inie as those j^iven for their 
 connection with the coi'i i..\. See L. Xlfl. XIV. XV. 
 
 Vi((e anperae fiiiiit, tho rouds ])ecnine roiiufh. 
 
 Copitt'' dijii'tiic cidi lit (i\ the trooj)* seem (li8i)irite(l. 
 
 S' ihihuui Jiii'i }<t>iUniii rid'tnr, to b.M'anio i)r<)inl seems foolish. 
 
 Graeci libtrljii ri cupiunt, tho Gn-eks wish to become iVee. 
 
 § l*S*t. 10. The verb ^'/(/m also governs an objkct-ixfixitive, 
 like the verbs, mentioned § 79, as : 
 
 Gajns dormlre videtar, Gajus seems to sleep. 
 Copiae pariitiie esse cldentur, the troops seem to be ready. 
 Mu(sti esse vi'd< mini, you seem to be sad. 
 
 M< rcatura f met 11 osa fieri cidetar, the commerce seems to become pro^ 
 fitable. 
 
 exehcises. 
 
 1^" Write the folloicing paradigms of t/te passice voice with the Eng- 
 lish fdgnificiitions : 
 
 Parare, to prepare ; auc^rre, to increase ; regere, to govern; ]>erficere, 
 to absolve; ])atelacore, to open; atferre, to bring; sepelire, to bury-', 
 pra^terire, to paxs hy. 
 
 Verbal foums of the p.\ssive. 1. Delectamini. 2. Supcnlmur 
 3. Exspectaiitur. 4. Expuii:natur. 5. Mutaris. 0. Circumdor. 7. Cir- 
 cunidamur. 8. Kelegari. U. Ediicaris. 10. Necantiir. 11. Liberamini 
 13. ConciliiTri. 13. Deleri. 14. Doccntur. 15. Adhibrris. 1(1. Tone- 
 mini 17. Videris. 18. Julu'or. 11). KxtTccmiui. 20. Moveor. 21. 
 Pertcrrentur. 22. Possidrtur. 2o. Coercemini. 24. Timr-mur. 2-"). 
 Torqur-ris. 26. Duceris. 27. Falli. 28. Fraiiyitiir. 20. Vinciinini. ;;o. 
 Decipimitiir. 31. DiriiVmiur. 32. Relinqui. 33. Co(|iuintiir. 34. Velii- 
 mur. 3o. Hedfici. 30. Dimiiuuintur. 37. J)istin<2:iu'ns. 38. Diriiji. 30. 
 Afficimiiii. 40. Piminiini. 41. luveniiintur. 42. Apcrltur. 43. Erudlri. 
 44. Iini)edior. 4o. Stabillmur. 4(). C'ustodiris. 47. Vindmur. 48. 
 Vinciniur. 40. Pnrtcreuntur. 50. Praeferris. 51. l^'tel•imilli. 52. 
 AfFertur. 53. Assueflunt. 54. Pateflunt. 55. Liiiucfieri. 5(). Teme- 
 rarii tiunt. 57. Studiosa fit. T))i. Infestus fio. 50. Sobrium fieri. 00. 
 Injustus videor. 01. LfPta videris. 62. vKquum videtur. 63. Imbecil- 
 li vidr-mur. 64. Iratje videniini. 65. Contentum videri. • 
 
 1. You are celebrated. 2. We are preserved 3. He is surrounded. 4. 
 Tliou art asked. 5. He is praised. 6. It is mentioned. 7. I am burned. 
 8. Thou art banished. 0. Vou are lu\'i]ed. 10. Tlu-y are wounded. 11. 
 He is avoichMl. 12. To be called. 13. Thou art surjmssed. 14. I am de- 
 li<;hted. 15. You are adorned. 1(5. It is completed. 17. They are in- 
 creased. 18. Thou art taught. 10. He is directed. 20. It is mixed. 21. 
 You are frightened. 22. Wo are held. 23. They are omi)h)yod. 24. 
 Slie is moved. 25. It is granted. 26. I am fi'ared. 27. To bo seen. 
 28. To be tortured. 20. Vcm are restrained. 30. We seem. 31. He 
 seems. 32. Y*ou are led. 33. I am l)roken. 34. Thou art defeated. 35 
 They are killed (interficere). 36. We are left. 37. It is cooked. 38 
 Thou art drawn. 30. He is acknowledged. 40. Slie is di ninished. 41 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 109 
 
 They are distinguished {dieting nere). 42. I am p3rceived. 43. They are 
 beliehl. 4^. 1 am sent. .45. Tiiey are coinnieuced. 4(). To be olfju-d. 
 47. It is endured. 48 To be left.* 40. Tliey are dug. 50 They ar.' be- 
 gotten. 51. Thou art brought back. 52. 'JMiey are thrown aw'av. r^Z. 
 I am alhire'd. 54. To be c(^rre»'ted. 55 To *be defi^ated. 56. To be 
 bound. 57. You are defeated. 58. You are bound. 50. V\'e are pim- 
 ished. 60. It is fortified. 01. It is inventi-d. 62. To be educated (ov/- 
 dlrr). 63. Thou art found. 64. It is finished. 65. To bj finished. 63. 
 You are api)eased. 67. We are hindered. 68. It is imparted. (iO. They 
 are entered. 70. You are softened. 71. It is exhausted. 72. Thev are 
 approached (^;<Zm). 73. We are struck. 74. We are carried. 75. 'it is 
 o\Mwd{aperlr('). 76. They are opeued (jM^^/acf/'^). 77. To be brouuht. 
 78. They are melted. 70. To be tamed. 80. It is learned. 81. They 
 are learned by heart. 82. To become cautious. 83. I become attentive. 
 84. Thou becomest unjust, O queen! 85. tShe becv^mes weak. 86. They 
 become eloijuent. 87. They {the uonieii) become friends. 88. To seem 
 zealous. 80. Thou seeraest happy, O daughter! 90. We seem tired. 
 01. It seems absurd. 02. Tliey seem envious. 
 
 Predicative piir.vses (without and with the passive agent). 
 
 1. Ager aratur. 2. Consilium mutiitur. 3. Via monstriitur. 4. Fabula 
 
 narratur. 5. Triumviri relegantur. 6. Pugna renovatur. 7. Nuptia? 
 
 celebrantur. 8. Pericula sui)erantur. 9. Tempha spoliantur. 10. Op- 
 
 pidum circumdatur. 11. Xumerus augetur. 12. Puer docetur. 13. 
 
 Acjua miscr-tur. 14. Dona i)r;ebentur. 15. Imperia delentur. 10. Openip 
 
 adhibentur. 17. Castra moventur. 18. Copijo ducuntur. 10. Consilia 
 
 ])erficiuntur. 20. Heglna veliitur. 21. Adversarius vincitur. 22. Cap- 
 
 tivus vincitur. 23. Pirfita i)unitur. 24. Negotium finltur. 25. Dis- 
 
 cipuli audiuntur. 26. Triumplu impediuntur. 27. Pericula subeuntur. 
 
 28. Fluvii transeuntur. 20. xVuxilium atfertur. 30. Incommoda perfe- 
 
 runtur. 31. Tribunorum consilia conlirmantur. 32. Pnefecti jussa lau- 
 
 dantur. 33. Sociorum stipendia augentur. 34. Adversaridrum insidiae 
 
 timentur. 35. Homanorum castra iuspiciuntur. 36. Gaji nuptiee difFe- 
 
 runtur. 37. Piratarum numerus diminuitur. 38. Fluvidrum vada 
 
 transi'untur. 30. .Erarium Ix^Uis exhauritur. 40. ('opi;p disciplinji eon- 
 
 tinentur. 41. Ingenium philosophia exercetur. 42. Flamm;e ab oppi- 
 
 diinis exstinguuntur. 43. Fluvii a sociis transeuntur. 44. Muri a Ko- 
 
 mandrum copiis adeuntur. 45. Agri a triumviris dividuntur. 46. Dona 
 
 a (ira^cis atieruntur. 47. Legati donis corrumpuntur. 48. Tenipla 
 
 statiiis exornantur. 49, Pecunia ab aiulcis doniltur. 50. Discipuli at- 
 
 tenti fiunt. 51. Pugna oxitidsa fit. 52. Sententia sequa videtur. 53. 
 
 Copia? fessa? videntur. 54. Perfugium securum videtur. 55. Pr^eterlri 
 
 iiijustum vidr-tur. 56. Doctum fieri arduum est. 57. Tribunum fieri 
 
 licet. 5S. Sobrium fieri i>ra'stat. 50. Egenum fieri molestum videtur 
 
 60. pecii)i acerbum est. 61. Opprimi displicet. 62. Piratam fieri igno- 
 
 miuiosum est. 
 
 1. An ambuscade is i)repared, 2. Tlie tem])les are dedicated. 3. The 
 town is embellished. 4. The enemies are overcome. 5. Poverty is in- 
 creased. 6. Syracuse is (h-stroyed. 7. The camp is besieged. 8. Pa- 
 tience is exercised. 0. Philosoi)hy is taught. 10. A scliool is established 
 {instituere). 11. Tho captives are thrown down. 12. The enenues are 
 perceived. 13. Sempronius and Livy are removed. 14. Friendship and 
 
110 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 liannnny are restored. 15. Deserters are punislicd and despised. 1^. 
 The we"ddin<j: of Anthony is prevented. 17. Thf adversary's arirumcnta 
 are passed over. IS. The bushiess is finished. 1!>. J^ivy and liatred are 
 hurieil. '20. Tiie UM*tals are nu.'ltrd. 21. liewards are conferred. 23. 
 Ar<^unients are alleged. 33. The letter is brouii^ht. 34. The atTairs are 
 investigated by the eomniittee of two. 2."). Tiie camp is captured by the 
 Carthaginians. 3(i. Money is accepted by the umpire, '"27. The com- 
 edies of Plautus and Terence are explained. 38. Perseverance is assist- 
 ed {adjiirdre) by fortune. 31). The camp is captured by fraud. JJO. The 
 controversy is decided by favor, ol. The controversy is settled {sec page 
 87) by the sword. ;J3. Jerusah'Ui {IlUroxoli/ind, G. oru)u) is destroyed 
 by Titus. 3o. Memory is strengthene I {fir/n/lrr) by the ]>en. o4. Tiie 
 tribunes are brihed by the a!nl)a.ssador8 of .lugurtlia. 35. The ambassa- 
 dors are bribed by influence and money. 8(). The prisoner is saved by 
 the daughter of the prefect. 87. Literature (litterae) is negU?cted by the 
 Spartans. :]8. Koscius of Ameria is (h'fended by M. Tullius. 3J). The 
 town of Luc 'ria is ]>esi(;ged by tiie Carthaginians, 40. Tlie i)refect is 
 preventeil by a disea»:e of tlieeyes. 41. The district of V^'ji ( Vijentamii*) 
 is devas at( d by the Romans. 43, Sempronius is saved by the timely 
 help of friends. 43. Tlie troo])s beccmie rebellious, 44. The roads be- 
 come rough and swampy {palud''HHS). 45. The province becomes (piiet 
 and trauipiii. 40. Thebol in -ss of Catiline becomes unbridled {ejfrenCdua). 
 47. The water of the river Vulturnus becomes putrid {]>utiil>is). 48. 
 The opinion of (iajus seems erroneous, 40. The oracle of Pythia seems 
 ambiguous. 50, The principles of grammar s<M'm ditlicult. 51, The 
 victuals of the troops seem wretclud, 53. To be courted is i)leasant, 
 5:}. It pleases to be defended by friends. 54. It is uni)leasant to bi* fteg- 
 lected, 55. It displea.ses lo be rejected, 50, It is bt;tter to be exalted 
 57. To be lov<*d by tlie people is beautiful and honorabk\ 58. To be 
 betrayed by friends is bitter. 51). To be banished seems hard. 00. To 
 be lettered seems disgraceful. 01, It is a crime to become an enemy of 
 the country, 03. To become eloquent is difficult. 08. It is bettor to be- 
 come "^calm, 04. It seems mean to become; an assistant of tyrants. 
 
 Simple: and coubined objective piikases, 1. Imjirudentiie ac- 
 cuser. 3. Triumviro commendfiris. 8. Dis conciliamur. 4. Corruptelae 
 coiKk'rananiini. 5. Prafecto ilenuntiamini. 0. Impensarum adnioneor. 
 7. Incepti periculo deterreris. 8. A piratis ignominiose obsidr*mur, 9. 
 Antonii filiis injuste anteix)nimini. 10. Plebejorum candidato pra'feror. 
 11. A M. Tullio ajite refelleiis. 13. Sulpicii auxilio secreto expedlmiir. 
 18. A triumviris juste punimini. 14. Decipi raro ])Ossum. 15. Severe 
 })unlri dehes-', 10. Ab adver.-^ariis accusari solenius. 17. A pra^fecto 
 revocari volumus. 18. Injuste accusari non vultis. 19, A Gajoadjuviiri 
 stiides. 30. A piratis diripi tinienius. 3L A magistro negligi videmini, 
 23. Injuste opprimi videris. 2''i. Ab inimicis damnari inicpium est. 34. 
 Manere cogor. 35. Pecuniam restituerecogeris, 30. Patriam defendere 
 docemur. 37. Ablre impedimini. 28, Captivos custodire jubeor. 29. 
 A vigiliis oppidum intrare i)rohil»emur. 
 
 1. I am recommended to the queen. 2. Thou art accused of treachery. 
 
 » T<i fitter, 'vinrirfi. ' Calm, qnirtus. ' Why stands the adverb in phrase 14 o^r, 
 and in (>hrui>e 15 before the objecl-ititinitivo ? 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Ill 
 
 8. We are reminded of the danger, 4. You are betrayed to the enemies, 
 5. I am ^ruthles-^ly tortured, 0, Thou art well taught. 7. We are 
 publicly acquitted of tlie crime. 8, You are splendidly clothed by the 
 
 e sons of the 
 
 queen 9. 1 am ehxpiently defended by Tullius. 10. The 
 preferred to William. 11. We are kindly greeted by th^ ^^^^^ ^. ^^^ 
 queen. 12, You are badly nreated by the tyrant. 13. Thou art im- 
 moderately aflected by the tears of the (female) j^risoners. 14. We 
 ceas(^ to be ])referred by the teacher. 15, You begin to be ruled by 
 decemvirs. 10. Vou continue to be hindered by tlie want of provisions. 
 17. Wc! niiver can be allured by rewards or promises, 18. I seem to be 
 deterred by the difficult beginning of the undertaking, 19. Thou art 
 afraid of being taken by the pirates. 20. We will not be derided 
 and despised by the enemies. 21. You generally are corrected by the 
 teacher. 22.. Thou seemest to be splendidly •'received by the inhabitants. 
 28. I am forl)idden to proceed. 24. You are prohibited from speaking 
 publicly. 25. We are hindered by disease from writing the letter. 20. 
 1 am com])elled by the })refect to return directly. 27. Thou art directed 
 by the queen to inspect daily the books of Sempronius. 
 
 combination of riledicative and objective phrases, with or 
 
 Without attributes. 
 
 1. A triumph is decreed to Africanus. 2. The town and the 'garrison 
 are betrayed to the enemies by the duumvirs. 3, The message of an 
 ^'unfortunate battle is delivered to the prefect, 4. The arms and bag- 
 gage of the trooi)s art; '"surrendtTed to the Carthaginians. 5. M. Tullius 
 is aj;<piitted by the opinion of the whole people. 0. War is announced 
 to Jugurtha, but badly ''conducted by Calpurnius Bestia. 7. Sempronius, 
 the candidate of the Patricians, is convicted of corruption by the board 
 of a hundred, 8, The inhabitants are abominably i)luiidered by L. 
 Antonius, the assistant of the i)refect. 9. A temple is consecrated to 
 Fortuna by the sons of b\ibius. 10. A '-'new house is built by the sons 
 and daughters of Cialba. 11. The cam)) of the Romans is surrounded by 
 a ditch an 1 a rampart. 12. Metals are melted by the flames, and '^pearls by 
 '^acid. 18. Crimes are punisluMl by the people, and vices by God. 14. The 
 Germans rannot be subjected by the Romans, 15. The war '^may be '^un- 
 fortunately conducted either ]»y the envy of fortune, or l)y the ignorance 
 of the prefect. 10. Bad men usually are ''tortured by the 'torments of 
 conscience, 17. Indolent scholars must frequently be admonished and 
 punished. 18. Industrious and zealous scholars do not wish to be sur- 
 ]>assed by '^fellow-scholars. 19. The slaves are afraid of being sur- 
 render«'d to the masters. 20. Decemvirs cease to be -^*elected by the 
 ]>eoj)le, 21. The sailors of Ant i(X3hus seem to become pirates, 22. The 
 Roman women seem to be prodigal and devoted to luxury. 23. Honor- 
 ble men cannot suddenly become vain and boastful. 24. Sempronius 
 .s hindered by the commands of t\\v. prefect to" occupy the right bank of 
 the riv*'r, 25. The ambas.sadors are tlirected by Perseus to delay the 
 business by disputes and -'quarrels. 
 
 * Tluthles'». f<BduK. ^ To treat, hnhire. • Excipere. "< Proe^sidinm. 8 Advernus. 
 • Arf'-rre. 1" Tnvlfre. 'i To conduct a war, bfllum gerere. >'■' Novus. i3 A pearl 
 murgarUa. ^* Acclum. ^^ P<>shp. ^^ Male. " To torture, a nfl'er^, ^^ Tormeiitum. 
 *^ C<'ndiwipulu8. ^^ To e\cct, eligere. ^' Querela. 
 
112 
 
 DEPONENT VEUBS. 
 
 1. Perfugae Romjinis a Poenis redduntur. 2. Gloria et victoria copiia 
 a pinfecto proinirtitiir. 3. ( astra et ])r,Tda inuiK-iisa Aleiaiuiro a 
 Porsis reliiKiuuntur. 4. Fabrioii copi;!^ I*yrrlii elcpiiantis ]K'!tvMroiUui'. 
 5. Belluni Persco u Konianoruni Irgjiti^ iudicitur. G. Pcriii a Ht nianirf 
 perfi(li;o mriidaciiciue accusantur. 7. PnpfV'ctus a p< pulo c«'rrupt("lnf 
 aperte accusatur. 8. Rnma a liomulo et Kt-mo, Klioa? Sylvia^ fjJiis 
 conditur. D. Fama diviii;{'(|uo a ])lidosoplii8 sjppe coiil Mmmiitiir. 10 
 Furta aiit serrC'to aiit manifesto jxrpctiari {)<)ssunt. 11. liicdla» Honia 
 iidruiu imperio adjici cupiuiit. 12. Iniiulcis tradl injustum est. l:». 
 Al) adversarlis laudari gloria magna est. 14. InjiLste acciiyari aut falso 
 condoinnilri acvrbuni est. lo. Pocni et Fabii prudcntisl et Africani 
 inirenio {f/t'iiOus) vincuntnr. 10. Ei)icuri fallacije a M. Tullio refelli 
 Solent. 17. (/. Marius Patricioruni eandidato a ])<)pulo pr;etertur. 18, 
 Ab adversariis deridr-ri niolestum videtur. 19. C'reta insula a piratis 
 relincpii videtur. 20. (iaji di.<cipuli eloqnentia' dediti esse videntur. 
 
 21. (iajus a pra-feeto ])eeuniani, Sieulis debitani \d'ff), restituere cogitur. 
 
 22. Sodi a prafecto castra nuiniro docentur. 2o. ()pi)idani a Senipronio 
 mums statim djruere jubentur. 24. Semprouius oculGrum morbo ludos 
 spectare {to icitncsff) impeditur. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 DEPOXEXT VERBS. 
 
 § I«t4:t 1. Deponent verbs are passives, wliicli lack the 
 active voice, and mostly have an active sigxific.vtiox, as hortarl^ 
 to exhort ; loqid, to speak. Their conjugation is that of the 
 passive, but their construction that of the active, and they may 
 therefore have objects in the accusative (see § 131). 
 
 Rem. 1. Each of the four conjugations has dej)onent verbs, but the 
 great majority of the deponents belong to the tirst conjugation. 
 
 § IJI»>. 2. Paradigms. 
 I. CONJUGATION. 
 Infinitive : Hortari, to exhoH (stem hortd, cuak. a, ending ri^ 
 
 Present indicative. 
 
 singular. 
 
 1. Ilortor, I exhort 
 
 2. hortaris, thou exhortest 
 
 3. liortiitur, he exhorts 
 
 PLUKAL. 
 
 1. hortfimur, we exhort 
 
 2. hortaniini, yod exhort 
 
 3. hortantur, they exhort. 
 
 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 113 
 
 II. CONJUGATION. 
 Infinitr^e : Veren/tofear (stem vere, chak. e, ending ri). 
 
 PllESENT indicative. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. Vereor, I fear 
 
 2. vereris, tJioufearcst 
 
 3. veretur, he fears 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. veremur, we fear 
 
 2. veremini, you fear 
 
 3. verentur, tJiey fear. 
 
 III. CONJUGATION. 
 Infinitive : Loqui, to speak (stem loqu, char. i2, ending t). 
 
 Present indicative. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. Loquor, I speak 
 
 2. loqueris, thou speakest 
 
 3. loquitur, he speaks 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. loquimur, we speak 
 
 2. loquimini, you speak 
 
 3. loquuntur, tJuy speak. 
 
 IV. CONJUGATION. 
 Infinitive : Potiri, to seize (stem potl, char, i, ending n"). 
 
 Present indicative. 
 
 SINGUI.AR. 
 
 1. Potior, I seize 
 
 2. potlris, tJiou seizest 
 
 3. potltur, he seizes 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. potimur, we seize 
 
 2. potimini, you seize 
 
 3. potiuntur, they seize. 
 
 § I !{6. 3. Tlie following deponents of the third conjugation : 
 gradi, to proceed ; rnori, to die ; pati, to suffer, with their com- 
 pounds, belong to the I-verbs, inserting the letter i between stem 
 and ending in the 1st sing, and 3d plur. (morior — moriuntur, 
 pallor— patiicntur^ (£r.) The compounds of j^^iH and gradi 
 change the vowel a of their stems into e, as dlgredl, to go away; 
 ingredl, to enter ; aggredi, to attack ; progredi, to advance ; 
 congredi, to meet ; perpetl, to suffer. 
 
 § 137. 4. The verb oriri,, to rise, forms the present indica- 
 tive like an I-verb of the third conjugation, as if it formed an 
 infinitive orl. But the other forms of this verb (see B. III.) 
 belong to the fourth conjugation. (Pres. indicat. : orlor^ orerls^ 
 oritur, c£'c.) In the same way the compounds of orlH are con- 
 jugated (pxorior^ exoreri.'i, exorttiir t£'e.), except adoriri, to 
 attack, which is conjugated like a regular deponent verb of the 
 4th conjugation. 
 
lU 
 
 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 § 138. 5. The following deponent verbs govern an ol>J€H*t- 
 illlillitivf^^ like the active verbs, mentioned § 80 : Conari, 
 to undertake^ to endeavor ; meditari, to contemplate^ meditate^ 
 desi(/n.; cuuctari, to hesitate; exordiri, to begin; oblivisci, to 
 forget, as : 
 
 He endearors to rapture the toirn, oppidum expairnnre conatur. 
 We contimplate to Viturii, rcdlre mcditHiiiiir. 
 
 Yon ihsiijii to (Wprl the garriKoK, ])r;<'sitliiiiii expellere meditamini. 
 Th<y hesitiite to adcduce, progrt'di ciiuctantiir. 
 He begins to speak, lo<|ui exordltur. 
 They forget to send the money, pecuniam mittere oblivisciintur. 
 
 EXEIiCISES. 
 
 t^ Cotnmit the lists of deponent verbs % XI. 2, XII. 2, XIII. 2, XIV. 
 2 of the VoeaJjidanes, and tprite the following paradigm,^ togetJier with 
 the English signifieations: Mirari, to wonder ; tueri, to proteet ; niori, to 
 die ; jn-oficisci, to depart ; assontlri, to assent ; exorlri, to arise. 
 
 Simple phrases. 1. Pliilippura adinlror. 2. Philosopliiam asper- 
 naris. ;}. Gajiis concionatur. 4. Virgiliuin intorprftrunur. 5. Fuiiram 
 uieditaniini. 0. Copia^ pabulantur. 7. Culpani confiteor. 8. Castra 
 intueris. 9. Reirlna tiirtur. 10. Belluin verrmiir. 11. Auxiliuni pf)l- 
 licemini. 12. Medici medentur. V.\. Populuiu allcxiuor. 14. Advcr- 
 sarios aggrederis. 15. Poena scqiiitur. 1(». Portain ingrediiuiir. 17. 
 Veniam assequiniini. 18. Captlvi morinntur. 19. Locum nanciscor. 
 20. Injuriam ulcisceris. 21. Poeta expei<riscitur. 22. Advcrsarii ira.><- 
 cuntur. 28. Gajo assentior. 24. Dona larglris. 25. Pan us muntitur. 
 26. Prnedara partlmur. 27. Triumviri sortiuntur. 
 
 1. I imitate tlie teacher. 2. Thou l)orro\vest money. 3. Tlie prefect 
 jests. 4. We lay the fi.-lds waste 5. You n-ward trraclierv. G. Gajus 
 and Sempronius live in the country. 7. It is allowed to rejoice. 8. It 
 deliirlits to roam. 9. We endeavor to be present. 10. You hesitate to 
 attack. 11. Thou designest to rebel. 12. 1 protect (^M^r/) the commerce, 
 la. Thou confessest ignorance. 14. AVatcr heals. 15. We promise 
 provisions. 1«. You tear the oods. 17, They address the que.n. 18. 
 I embrace the son. It). We follow the prelect. 20. Tht^y attack the 
 Carthaginians. 21. Thou i)ursuest tlie Germans. 22. The triumvirs 
 die. 23. It is sad to fall. 24. The ambassadors are an.ixry. 25. Thou 
 forgettest to dine. 20. The troops march. 27. We obtain power. 28. 
 The moon rises. 29. The girls flatter. 30. We attack {adorlri) tha 
 camp. 
 
 Combined phrases. 1. Pr.Tfectus oppidanorum controversias asper- 
 natur. 2. Co])ia' reglna^ doraum tuentur. 3. Incohe miram i)ra;tecti 
 clementiara admirantur. 4. Kegna opulenta discordia dilabuntur. 5 
 Copia» molestias {prications) terumnasciue jHirpetiuntur. 6. Belli Ibrtunam 
 exiK?riri nolumus. 7. Adversariorum 'vestigia sequi conaris. 8. Gaj' 
 uegotium '-'exsequi cunctamur. 9. Numidarum copise latrocinanlur 
 
 » Vestigium, trace, track, a Exsequi, to carry out. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 115 
 
 Bociorumque agros populantur. 10. Legatdrnm superhiam atque arrogan- 
 tiam recordamini. 11. Pr;estantiam iirnaviii assequi nunquam potes. 
 12. Cassandra, Prlami filia, Troja^ excidium vaticiniitur. i;j. Tribiini 
 immodice vocifcrantur, priei'ect unique minis deterrere conantur. 14. 
 Praeiectus sociis Latlnis -^novas victorias novamqui; pnedani i)ollicetur. 
 
 ^ 1. You frustrate the plans of the triumvir by the testimony of Sid- 
 picius. 2. We forget to revenii:e '^former injuries. 3. We admire the 
 arroiiance of the and)assador and the ])rudence of the prefect. 4. The 
 Komans remember avcU the ennuty of Philii). 5. The Thebans protect 
 the towns of Boeotia by ^garrisons, G. You ft-ar the new arguments of 
 the tribunes. 7. Fabius hesitates to attack the Carthaginians. 8. Troy 
 falls by the cunning of the Greeks. 9. The tribune Sulpicius arises sud- 
 denly and addresses the ])eoj)le. 10. I wish both to live honestly and to 
 die liai»pily. 11. The teacher '^tests the judg-ment of the boys by 'little 
 juestions. 12. Tlie assassins of the prefect sutfer Meath. 13. The 
 ambassadors j^rofess friendship, but meditate treachery. 14. Thou 
 reward! St vice, and pursuest justice. 15. You remember the bad 
 (adccrsus) fortune of Dionysius, tyrant of Syracuse. 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 THIRD DECLEXSIOX. LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 § ltJ9i 1. The third declension differs in three points from 
 the first and second: 1. By its characteristics. 2. By its case- 
 TERMiXATioxs. 3. By the manner iu which the stem is found. 
 
 § 1 10. 2. The characteristics of the third declension are 
 either consonants, or the vowel «, as : genius (char, s), nonien 
 (char, n), dolor (char, r), civis (char. i). The stems of tJiose 
 nonns. which have the cliaracteristic ?, are called the TOWel« 
 sloillN of the third declension ; those, having a consonant as 
 characteristic, are termed COIlsoIiailf-^teillS. 
 
 §111. 3. The case-terminations of the third declension (see 
 § 145) are attaciied to the declension-stem. In the 3d declension, 
 however, the stem is not found, as in the -other declensions, by 
 removing the case-termination of the nominative, but by dropping 
 the case-terminations of the oblique cases, that is, of any case but 
 nominative and vocative singular. 
 
 ■ Novns, n/10. * Pri-stinus ' Garrison, prsBSidium. • To teat, experTri. ^ A litUe 
 quention, quasstiuncuhi. ^ Death, supplicium. 
 
116 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 Thus the i^icm J u die of J/^(^('.r is found by dropping the case- 
 termination is of the genitive judicis. Hence in order to decline 
 a given noun of the tliird declension, one of the obliciue cases must 
 be known besides the nominative, for which ])urpose the g km five 
 siNfiULAR generally is chosen. 
 
 § 1 155. 4. The Ci<eilfler of nouns, belonging to the third 
 declension is fourfold : 1. The masculine, 2. The feminine, 3. 
 The neuter, 4. The common gender (§ 31)). 
 
 If a noun, denoting a persox or beast, is used in the same form 
 for both sexes, it is said to be of colliniOll ^:eilder, as : 
 cicis, a male or female citizen ; conies, a male or female com- 
 panion ; canis, a male or female dog. Nouns of common gender 
 are thus treated : 
 
 1. If we do not distinguish the sex of an individual, we 
 generally employ the masculine gender; 2. If we speak of the 
 individual, as of a male, the masculine gender, and 3. If we 
 mean a female, the femlnine gender is employed. 
 
 Rem. 1. For tho a])i)licutioii of these principles to the names of beasts 
 seeL. XXVlli. 
 
 THE CONSOXANT-STEMS OF THE THIRD DECLEX- 
 
 SIOX. 
 
 § 113. 5. The Consonant-stems of the 3d declension have 
 either one of the mutEs, or one of the liquids for a characteristic. 
 See page 7. 
 
 Rem. 2. Stems, which tcrminatoin a ltquid arc called liQiii«1 Kleins, 
 
 and stems, tcnninatin»^ in ont' of the MUTE consoivants, are termed 
 liillt<^ nK'HIN. Some nouns have stems in '/ and r (*^/i*, 6fS, «/w- 
 pitir). These are called iuuegulau stems. See g 188. 
 
 § 14-J:. 0. The liquid stems appear without a case-termina- 
 tion ia the nominative singnlar, except the feminine /liet/is^ G. 
 hiemis (winter). Mitte stems on the contrary generally take the 
 termination 6' in the nominative sini»:ular. 
 
 § 14o. t. The case-terminations of iiouns with cousonant- 
 stems are the folluwins: : 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION.— LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 117 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. B or — 
 
 G. is 
 
 D. i 
 
 A. em, Neut. like Norn. 
 
 V, like Nom. 
 
 A. e. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. es, Neut. a 
 
 G. urn 
 
 D. ibus 
 
 A. cs, Nerd, a 
 
 V. like Nom. 
 
 A. like Dative. 
 
 A given tiouu with a consonant-stem is declined by applying 
 these terminations to its stem, which is found by removing the 
 termination is from the genitive singular. 
 
 LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 § 110, 8. Since the noun hieins is the only noun with m as 
 characteristic, there remain only the four liquids /, ??, r, s, which 
 can appear as characteristics of liqnid stems. They accordingly 
 form 4 classes : 1. The L-class, 2. The X-class, 3. The R-class, 
 4. Tlie S-class. 
 
 L-CLASS. 
 
 § 147. Vocabulary. 
 
 Consul, G. consillis m. a consul sal, sails, m. & n., salt 
 
 exsul, exsulis, c. g. an exile, ban- sol, sdlis, m. snn (also as a proper 
 
 if<Iu'd j)ers(>n 
 
 fel, fellis. 11. hVe. f/nJl 
 
 mel, niellis, //. honey 
 
 name sun-f]od) 
 vigil, viofilis, m. a icatchman 
 Hannibal 
 
 proconsul, proconsillis, m. a pro- Hasdrubal >- G, tilis, m. barbaric 
 
 consul 
 pugil, pugilis, m. a boxer 
 
 Adherbal 
 
 proper names. 
 
 STNGL^iAR. 
 
 N. Consul, a consul 
 G. consul is, of a consul 
 D. consul i, to a consul 
 A. consulem, a consul 
 V. consul, consul/ 
 A. consule, bi/ a consul 
 
 § 148. Paradigm. 
 
 Plukal. 
 
 N. consults, consuls 
 G. consulum, of consuls 
 D. consulibus, to consuls 
 A. consules, consuls 
 V. consuh^s, O consuls ! 
 A. consulibus, by consuls 
 
 Rem. 3. Nouns with the final letters al, except sal and the proper names, 
 have VOWEL-STEMS, and will be considered § 176, 177. 
 

 lis 
 
 THIRD 1)ECLP:NSI0N.— LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSIOIT. — LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 119 
 
 N-CLASS. 
 
 § 1 10, Vocabulary. 
 
 A^nnon, agminis, n., aivmon, column W^o, dm.% m. a hoe 
 
 ^ of'au. army hmix'nado, 7 /iv<,f. leu ffth 
 
 Anio Anirnis, m. a river in LdWuii Miu-cdo, onis, m. a Mdrcdonian 
 
 A])oli() hiis, the god of arts and sci- mairnitudd, IniKf. gnat/NSs, dzc,^ 
 
 (,j^(.f^^ imir-ro, hiix, )n. df. border, margin 
 
 carl)0, oiiis, m. charcoal niiiltitu(io, hm,f. multitude 
 
 (•ardo', hits, m. hinqe, a j)ole of a globe -natio, oois, f a nation 
 
 carmen, uiis, n. a poem noinen. Inis, n. name 
 
 Curtlia^n), 7friM,f Carthage obsulio, o„i.s,J. .^uge ^ 
 
 caio. (v//v/?X f. fle.sh, meat occasio. o,HS,f orraxion 
 
 cvninv\o,onisjn.a centurion (captain) oratio, oni-sj. oratom 
 
 certam.'ii, Xnis, n. strife, druggie ordo, ?>//.v. ok ordrr, rank 
 
 co'momcn, T/^/.v, n. surname ong-o, 7oi.s,f. ongin 
 
 concio ON is, f assembly of the people pavo, On is, ni. peacock 
 
 conditio, onis, f. condition ■ pecten, Inis, m. comb 
 
 conjuratio, orus,f conspiracy pranlo, i>nis, m. robl)cr 
 
 consiictudo. In is, f hohit, custom. ])n.rio, nnis, m. dogger 
 
 discrlmen, Uis, n. difference, critical ratio, dnis,f reason, method, system 
 
 sii nation 
 disputatio, dnis,f. discussion 
 draco, onis, m. dragon 
 factio, onis, faction , party 
 flmnen, 7nis, n. a river 
 l\)rtitudo, hiiSyf brarery 
 fulnien, inis, n. lightning 
 grando, inis,f. hail 
 har])ago, onis, m. grappling hook 
 ^honio, 7/iis. m. man 
 imago, hiis.f. image 
 interrogatio! onis,f question 
 latro, onis, m. robber 
 lectio. onis,f. a reading 
 legio, onis,}'. a legion 
 leo, onis, m. a lion 
 
 § 150. Paradigms 
 
 Singular. 
 
 roi^io, onis,f. region, country 
 
 rdigio, onis, f reverence, conscien- 
 tiousness, religion 
 
 renes (stem rUn), pi. t., w. the kid- 
 neys 
 
 Saxo. tniis, m. a Saxon 
 
 seditio, dnis,f rebellion 
 
 semen, in is, n. seed 
 
 sermo, nnis, w. speech, language 
 
 eimilitudo, 7/iis,f. si m if a city 
 
 testudo, litis, f. a tort<nse 
 
 tiro, onis, m. a beginner 
 
 valet udo. inis, f. Judith 
 
 vicissitudo, hiis,f. ehaiice 
 
 virgo, hiis,f a virgin 
 
 N. Sermo, the speech 
 
 G. sermfiiiis, of the speech 
 
 D. sermdni, to the sj)eec1i 
 
 A. sermdnem, th^ speech 
 
 V. sermo, speech ! 
 
 A. sermdne, by the speech 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. senndnes, the speeches 
 G. sermdnum, of the speeches 
 D. sermonibus, to the speeches 
 A. sermdnes, the speeches 
 V, sermdnes. speeches ! 
 A. strnionibus, by the speeches. 
 
 I Homo and vlr tnust l.e dislincuishcd from ench other. The former indn.les w..in«n 
 ftnd ohildroii, and means an individual of tht- iicmas r v i: I'.ut inr m opposed to both, 
 women and children. ^ S'otio irenerally means a barbaric n;»tion. 
 
 STNGUTjAR. 
 
 N. Homo, a man 
 G. Iiomlnis, (>/a m/z/i 
 J), liomini, to a mwi 
 A. bonnneiii. a man 
 V. bomo, man! 
 A homine, by a man 
 
 N. Nomen, a name 
 G. nominis, of a name 
 D. nomini, to a naiiw 
 A. nomen, a name 
 V. nomen, O iunne ! 
 A. nomine, by a name 
 
 plural. 
 
 JV". homines, men 
 G. bominum, of men 
 D. liominibus, to men 
 A. bomines, Tnen 
 V. homines, men! 
 A. hominibus, by men. 
 
 N. nomina, names 
 G. nom'nnim, of names 
 D. uominibus, to names 
 A. nomina, names 
 V. nomina, names! 
 A. nominibus, by names. 
 
 § 1 «"i 1 . 9. Tbe nouns of the N-class have the final letters o 
 or en in the nominative sin«i"ular, the former dropping the char- 
 acteristic n in this case. Those in o are masculine or feminine ; 
 those in en are neuter with a few masculine exceptions. 
 
 § loS. 10. Nouns hi are generally masculine, and take in 
 the genitive the final letters onis, whieli they substitute for the 
 terminatiou o of the nominative, as le-o, le-bnis {leon being the 
 stem, and is the case-termination) But 
 
 1. Nouns in do and go have mis in the genitive, and are fem 
 ININE ; and 
 
 2. Nouns in io are likewise feminine, but take onis in the gen- 
 itive. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS TO RULE § 152. 
 
 1. In Gender: Cardo, ordo, margo,pugio, centurio, SLJid some rarer 
 
 nouns. 
 
 2. In the form of the genitive: Apollo, homo. 
 
 3. In both : Anio, caro, harpago, ligo, praedo, besides some rarer 
 
 nouns. 
 
 Some national nouns in o, as Macedo, Saj>9, take dni^ with a short 
 penult in the gen. 
 
 § 15*{f 11. The nouns in en take mis in the genitive, and are 
 neuter ; hwt jyecteii, ^flamen, and nouns in cen (from canere, as 
 oscen, tibtcen, ^tuhicen) are masculine. 
 
 Rem. 4, ^TAen and the pi. t. renes are likewise masculine ; but both 
 nouns have a long e [G. lienis). 
 
 Flnmen, a nrlvYit of a sincde deity. * Oscen, a prophetic bird. ' A fluteplayer. * A 
 player of the tuDa. *Z,i<?;t, milt. 
 
120 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 R-CLAS^. 
 
 § 1«>4. TOCABULARY 
 
 Accipitor, tris, m. a falcon 
 
 ador, dri.s, n. spelt 
 
 «Tquor, dm, n. a surface 
 
 at-r, eris, m. air 
 
 agger, eris, in. dyke 
 
 '^ainor, lore 
 
 ardor, heat, impetuosity 
 
 ansor, eris, c. g. goose 
 
 arbor, oris, f. tree 
 
 asser, eris, m. a {wooden) hoard 
 
 auctor, author, founder 
 
 augur, uris, m. an augur, o. class of 
 
 priests 
 <:adHver, eris, n. a corpse 
 calor, heat, warmth 
 career, eris, m. prison, jail 
 censor, a censor. 
 
 a high llomau 
 
 magistrate 
 
 iter, itineris, n. a journey, march, 
 
 ro(fd 
 jecur, G. jecoris, jecinoris & joc5- 
 
 ris, 71. licer 
 labor, lab'fr, hardfthip 
 later, r/'/.v, m. a brick 
 lenuires. pi. t. (stem UmUr), m, 
 
 spectres 
 inarmor, f>ris, n. marble 
 mater, tris,f. mother 
 mulier, eris,f a woman 
 orator, (tn orator 
 passer, eris, m. sparrow 
 ])ater, tris, m. father 
 l)avor, a tremb'ing, dread 
 ])r<eeeptor, a teacher 
 praetor, a praetor, a high Roman 
 
 magistrate 
 proceres, pi. t. (stem proc^r) m. 
 
 the highest in rank 
 robur, oris, n. strength 
 scriptor, a writer, author 
 senator, a, senator 
 Boror,/. a sister 
 tunoT,fear 
 
 tuber, eris, n. a dioeUing, a tuber 
 uxor, /. a wife 
 
 ver, teris, n. tJie spring of the year 
 'vesper, eris, tn. evening 
 verbera, ])1. t. (stem verier) n. 
 
 flogging, blows 
 victor, (/ etmqueror 
 vomer, eris, m. a ploughshare 
 vultur, uris, m. a vulture. 
 
 Paradigms 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. dolores. the pains 
 
 (r. doldruiu, (f the pains 
 
 D. doloribus, to the pains 
 
 A. dolores, the pains 
 
 V. dolores, pains! 
 
 A. doloribus, by thf pains. 
 
 cicer, eris, n. a chick-pea 
 
 clamor, a shouting, clamor 
 
 color, color 
 
 defensor, a defender 
 
 dictator, dictator, extraordinary 
 
 Roman magistrate 
 dolor, pain, grirf. 
 ebur, drix, n. icory 
 enitor, a buyer 
 error, a miMake 
 {&\oT,facor 
 
 femur, oris, n. the thigh 
 frater, tris, rn. brother 
 fulgur, uris, n. light /ting 
 {nv,furis, c. g. a thief 
 furoT,fury 
 imperator, a comynander 
 
 singular. 
 
 N. Dolor, the pain 
 G. dtAnr'ifi, of th^' pain 
 1). dolor i. to the pain 
 A. dolorem, the pain 
 V. dolor, O pain ! 
 A. doldre, by the pain 
 
 • In tins vocatni'ftiv the resnlar nouns in nr will not be Hocornpaiueil by their genitive» 
 or gi'ndt'r-iiiitrks. it b.-ini; iii\d-'r-.to(>(l, thit they are mitsniJin". iintj form their ijenitlvei* 
 in uiin. with long penult. '' Venper is decline»! both, Mfler the '2d and :3d declensions. See 
 I 50. The genitive ftiilow» tiie 2d (vej<peri, not reaper is), but the ablative follows the 8tf 
 {ve-spere). 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION.— LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 121 
 
 SmGULAR. 
 
 N. Pater, a father 
 G. patris, of a fttlier 
 D. patri, to afatJier 
 A pat rem, afatJier 
 V. pater, O father ! 
 A. patre, byafatlier 
 
 
 PCURAL. 
 
 N. 
 
 pat res, fathers 
 
 G. 
 
 patruTH, of fathers 
 
 U. 
 
 l)atribus, to fathers 
 
 A. 
 
 -paXms, fathers 
 
 V. 
 
 patres, fathers! 
 
 A. 
 
 patribus, by fatJiers. 
 
 N. Tuber, a swelling 
 G. t\ihcT\^, of a swelling 
 D. tuberi, to a swelling 
 A. tuber, a swelling 
 V. tuber, swclUng ! 
 A. tui^ere, by a swelling 
 
 N. tubera, swellings 
 G. tuberum, of swellings 
 D. tuboribus, to swellings 
 A. tubera, sicellings 
 V. tubera, s (ceilings ! 
 A. tuberibus, by swellings. 
 
 § 156. 12. The nouns of the R-class in both, stem and nom« 
 illative have the final letter r, whicli is preceded either by a, e, o, 
 or ti. The genitive has a short penult except in the regular nouns 
 in or. Tlie gender is either the masculine or the neuter. 
 
 § 157. 13. Nouns in ar general) v have vowel-steais with a 
 long penult in the genitive. See § 176, ITt. To the R-class be- 
 long only some male proper names {Caesar, G. Caesaris ; 
 Zlamilcar, G. ITa??ulcaris), besides some appellative nouns of 
 very rare occurrence. 
 
 IS^mis in er, denoting things, are masculine or neuter (aer, 
 agger, asser, career, ^glhher^ later, vesper, vomer are masculine' 
 the rest are neuter.) Those denoting persons, follow their sex 
 {tnater, frater, pater, mulier), and those denoting beasts, are 
 either of common gender {eniser), or masculine (2Misser, accipi- 
 ter). The genitive has a short penult, which in pater, mater, 
 frater and accipiter is syncopated. For the vowel-stems in er 
 see § 187. 
 
 Nouns in or form the genitive in oris, being masculine; 
 except the fem. arhor and the neuters ador, aequor, marmor, 
 which have oris with a short penult. 
 
 Nouns in ur form their genitives in uris, except ehur, femur, 
 rohur, jecur, which have oris. Persons and beasts in icr are 
 
 " A post-classical word, meaning a hunch on the hack. 
 
122 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION.— LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 S-CLASS. 
 § 15S. Vocabulary. 
 
 TPa -Pri^ 77 bronze copper m^^^. maris, m. a male 
 
 ^S%«; rS r standard of uu.. .nr.ris, ,«. "'!-'" f^;;^^ 
 R<.„.n coins, weight, and m.a. ;-;-;'-; -/^^^tf 
 
 CeresTvTcris, (A« goddes» of auricul- nenms. oris, /,. " i/roi-e 
 
 ture 
 cinis, t-ris, /«. a<JA^« 
 corpus, oris, /t. 6o(/^ 
 cms, cruris, n. a leg 
 cucuinis, eris, ;?*. a cue umber 
 dt'cus, oris, /i. ornament, honor 
 dfdfcus, r>ris, >i. dmjrace 
 facinus, oris, n. a deed, misdeed 
 fenus, oris, n. wmry, interest 
 flos, tloris, m. a flower 
 focdus, oris, /i. a treaty 
 frit^us, oris, a. frost, cold 
 fuuus, T'ris, u.fuiiend, corpse 
 genus, eris, /i. kind, race 
 
 onus, eris, n. a burden 
 
 oi)Us. eris, /i. a icork 
 
 OS, r>ri8, n the month, tfie face 
 
 OS, ossis. n. a bone 
 
 pectus, oris, n. breast 
 
 pecus, oris, n. cattle 
 
 pij;nus, oris, n. a pledge 
 
 pond us, r-ris, n. a weight 
 
 pulvis, eris, m. dust 
 
 ros, roris, m. dew 
 
 rus. ruris. /<. country^ country-seat 
 
 Bcelus, eris, n. a crime 
 
 Bid us, eris, n. constellation, star 
 
 Btercus, oris, n. dung 
 
 honos', oris,' m. honor (m plur. places tempus, oris. //. tinie 
 
 of honor) 
 jus, juris, n. right, law 
 lepos, oris, m. grare, elegance 
 le])U8, oris, m. a hare 
 latus, eris, n. a side 
 litus, oris, n. a coast 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. Vulnus, a wound 
 G. vulneris. of a wound 
 D. vulneri, to a wound 
 A. vulnus, a icound 
 V. vulnus, wound! 
 A. vulncre, by a tcouiid 
 
 ulcus, eris, a. a sore, idceration 
 vas, vasis"^, n. a vessel (of clay, 
 
 silver, &r.) 
 Venus, eris, /. th> (joddess of beauty 
 viscera, pi. t., the entrails 
 vulnus, eris, a. a wound 
 
 lo9. Parai)h;ms. 
 
 runt AL. 
 N. vulnera, wounds 
 O. vulneruni, of wounds 
 D. vulneribus, to wound» 
 A. vulneni, wounds 
 V. vulnera, wounds! 
 A. vulneribus, hy wounds 
 
 N. Tern pus, the time 
 G. temporis, <f the time 
 D. tempori, to the time 
 A. tempus, the time 
 V. temi)us, time! 
 A. tempore, by the time 
 
 N. tem])ora, tJie times 
 
 (i. temporuni. (f the tunes 
 
 D. temi)oribus, t(f the times 
 
 A. tempora, the times 
 
 V. tempora. O times! 
 
 A. tempori l)us, by the titne» 
 
 » nN< i- 'V//^ cow,fnr' in (.pponition to rifie.^. T^rra and req\o are lafL-yr or 
 .n.a^o ' district, of th^ eartl.. ' L;./.. Patria i%'>;r'^//X;iZ 2 J^Hc'^wlii h 
 10 Yax, rods, l.as a collateral form, vamm, v(m, of the 2d declcusiou, afitr N^uun 
 
 the plural its exclusively formed. 
 
 , THIRD DECLENSION.— LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 123 
 
 § 160. 14. The final li?tter of the nouns, belonging to the 
 S-class, is the liquid s, in both, stem and nominative singular. This 
 final s, which must not be taken for a case-termination, is changed 
 into r in the oblique cases, except in ««, os (bo?ie\sind vas. 
 
 §161. 15. The majority of the nouns of the S-class termi- 
 nate in us, being of neuter gender. Their genitives are formed 
 either in oris or in eris. Some nouns in us {cms, jus, rus, mus, 
 and some rarer nouns) have genitives in uris. The few nouns in 
 as, c^s, €S, is and os, belonging to the S-class, are enumerated 
 § l'^8. 
 
 Rem. 5. The characteristic s of the nouns of the S-class in the earlier 
 periods of the language remained unchanged throui^h the oblique 
 cases. Thus vulnuji (stem vulnes) was declined: G. vidnesis, D. 
 tulnrsi, dc. ; tempus (stem tempos), G. teniposis, D. tempod, &c.; 
 honos, G. honoHis, d'c. 
 
 Rem, G. The peksonal nouns of the S-class, consisting of the names of 
 the f^^oddesses Ceres and Venus are feminine. The names of 
 BEASTS {mnH and lepos) are masci'LINE. 
 
 Rem. 7. Nouns in os occur in the T-class also. See § 105, 167. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 
 Write paradigms of hiems, WiNtir; sol, the sun; carbo, a char- 
 coal; consuetudo, a habit ; semen, seed ; CVsar, jd;*. n.; iter, a jourmy ; 
 frateT, brother ; soror, sLster ; fa\<rnTjig/itnlng ; robur, strength; scelxis, 
 trinic ; corpus, a body ; liios, manner ; lepus, a Jiare. 
 
 A. ATTRIBUTIVE PIIIIASES. 
 
 ^ iv-OLASS. 1. The wretched exiles. 2. Of attentive watchmen. 3. 
 The late of Adherbal and lliempsal. 4. By the proconsuls of Gaul and 
 ^I'ain. o. The 'training of l)()xers. 0. By the invincible Sim-'>-od 7. 
 By 'Attic salt. 8. The bitter gall {ohj.). '(). To excellent lionev. 10. 
 By Hannibal, the renowned adversary of Africflnus. 
 
 1. Sempronii proconsulis. 2. Dionysio exsule. ?,. Hannibali exsuli. 
 4. Mira viuiluiu ne,uli<rentiri. o. Sails Tarentini pretium. 6. C'alido 
 Arabite sole. 7. Iliempsale atc^tie Adherbale, Numidia? regulis. 8. M. 
 Antonio et L. Murena consul ibus. 
 
 N-CLASS. 1. A(Tit() <:la(lii -'mucrr.ni. 2. Varrone .Emilidqne con- 
 Rulibus. ;j. Miro leonis grati ^specimine. 4 Pneddnum Tarentindrum 
 ^inciii-sidnes. o. •' llirundinum ' domesticarum *nidi. (>. (irandinea 
 civbr.e, aij-ris n(»xia\ 7. Mira copiarum fortitudine. 8. InHfinam M. 
 Pisonis -'libidinem. 9. Ma^no mundi universi online ac ratidne. 10.' 
 Altis '"saxosisque fluminis marginibus. 11. Pulchras templi imairines! 
 12. Ferarum Illyria.^ natidnum conditione. 13. Kegidnum frit^idllruin 
 
 > Training, discipl'ma. "Attic, Atticns. » Mncro, edgf. < Specimen, «rami 
 
 • In.iirsio. o. raid. « Hirundo, a swallow. ' Domesticus, domestic. «JSidus, a n 
 
 • Lilddo, pas.iioth, lust, lo Saxosus, atony. 
 
 mpla, 
 
rj4 
 
 THIRD DECLEXSION.— LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 1 
 
 At' 
 
 ncoLp 14 Ma^nrr honiinum ^'admiratiuni. to. P. Cornolius Scipio, 
 Afric.lni co-uomine ^-Vo-uitus. 1(5. K-rt-gia Piivlan carmma. 1.. 
 Splt-ndido AnoUiuis ft Duln^ teraplo. IS. l>nrdan. Ma(vd.»uuni mc- 
 toruD. 19. Pavont'Junr.nisacro. '20. AnirMie exiguo Latii ttimime. 
 
 1 Of the consuls M. Tullius ricero and L. Anthony. 2. By the 
 nefarious <-onspi racv of Catiline. 3. By the goddess Juno, a daughter of 
 Saturnusand lihra. 4. The ''tame dragons ot the '^hpidaurians o 
 The ^^Catilinarian orations of Cicero, (i. By reason, the assistan^ ot ni n. 
 7 Bv a Konum centurion of a -^Gallic h'.i^non. S^ By Carthage, he 
 ancient rival of Rome. U. T.. the ohs-ure origin o Mar.us. 10. By the 
 chances of human fortune. 11. By tlie order ot words ot the La m 
 lan-uage [Mn-mo). 12. Tlie '-Tusculan discussH.ns of ( icero. l.>. A ba. 
 liTbit (5v. of obscure questions. 14. By the opinions (opi>nu) of learned 
 m n(l^i». 1.-^. The\iature of hot regions. K; Bv the passions ot 
 ba<lmen 17. The 'Vxtraordinary si/e (ohj.) of the •'Minud.an lions 
 IS Bv a '^"change of ancient habits. 19. The natur.' of -'oaken eharcoal. 
 20 The boldn.Ss of the Theban robbers. 2L The mutual stntes ot the 
 ^•«M.nosite factions. 22. Bv the -'abduction of the ■-■'^ablnlan virgins. 
 o;rBriVonderful image of the godde>s Juno. 24. The ; 'iron grapphng 
 hol.ks of the -'^maritime robbers. 2r,. By the immense size ot maritnm) 
 tortoises 2(5 To the assiduous reading of industrious beginners^ ^*. 
 S:!;b''urehist,>ryof the ancient Saxous. 28. /i;]- P'-i- o/ "'"^'J 
 and Vir.nl. 29. Bv sun and moon, the -lights of " ^''^ve^i- „;''\, .'^'^'^ 
 dm'-reno-sofliabit'. 'M. The -"Meadly arrows of Aix.llo. 32. The ■-ivory 
 (Mmibs of the Roman women (m'//«Vr.) 
 
 R-CL\SS 1. BvCn. Pom p.") us, the renowned rival of luliiis ( ;esar 
 2 To the Carthaginian Hannibal, a son of Ilamilcar. :,. hwellmgs ot 
 
 trees.asi^n of disease. 4. By the rough spring 'ij;" V;"''"'^^'»r;':Vn;;;^- 
 5 The ^'nmhuried corpses of the en. uiies. (5. lo Ilenrv and \N iHwim 
 tiie brothers of C^harles. 7. The Roman jail W«>/.;. an <>ld and r-n-^ned 
 ^building. 8. The^-ggsof black geese. 9 The a.r (ohj), close by 
 an hot "Tanor. 10. The ramp, secure by a long dyke and dit» h 11. 
 Bv a o-iJi^'inipcluositv of the mind. 12. By the mutual ove and -68- 
 Smu ot- Cicero Lul Atti^-us. 1:5. l^y tlie universal ^>^ass*.U o the •> heai^s. 
 14. The wailings of wretched mothers and wives. U. lhe^4U.a sur- 
 faces of deep rivers ( tl'nurn). IC. The ^'upright manners (-^:7- «^/, « 
 ancient Romans. 17. The prophetic birds ot the augurs. 18. He 
 ^gll^vlll^nings of Sumailus.^ 19 The -untau.ralde ^^,men cd sick 
 livers ^2(): 1^- the invinrible strength ot the soul ot CMPsar 21. To he 
 e^ mordinarv* -«Hvhiteness of the ^"Indian ivory. 22. The 'swollen 
 4lm)a' s ot the Alpine [A^pln u.) nations. 23. The thn-ats and -mutter- 
 
 n \,]nvriit\o. astoniMlnyifivf. 12 Coiinl is A'K^/j. ' •* ' " V r.illinix »' Tu-culin 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 125 
 
 ings of the troops. 24. The cold •^*' Tibur, {ohj.) the ^'summer ^'-residence 
 of ^-ealthy Romans. 25. The slow and cautious marches of the Roman 
 legions. 
 
 1. Accii>itres, ^"venatorura delicife. 2. Mira anserum ferdrum multi- 
 tudine. 3. Pulchra auctoris incerti statua. 4. Furiosi barbardrum 
 clamdres. 5. Bruto et Cassio, populi Romani defensoribus. 6. Diversos 
 scriptorum Latindrum errdres. 7. C. (iraccho, Ti. Gracchi fratre. 8 
 Justii furum pr;edonum(pie pa^na. 9. Longa imperatdris Romani itinera. 
 
 10. Magna' mulLrum ""^treindatidni acpavdri. 11. Julia, Poinpeji uxdre 
 Cicsarisjue filiil. 12. Iliemis ^'Italicfe verisipie ^•^Germanici similitudo. 
 13. Miro Mildnis robore. 14. Temi)lum fulguribus sacrum. 15. Cor- 
 nelia, Gracchdrum matre Scipionisque sordre. 10. Carne ^"bubula, 
 pni^cij)uo •'■^Angldru-m ^'nutrimento. 
 
 S-( LASS. 1. The '*"(•' >pp<'r ases of Servius TuUius. 2. The bones of 
 men and beasts. 3. The *^'silver vessels of Mummius, the conqueror of 
 Corinth. 4. The ''-white mice of '^•Egyptian ♦^'jugglers. 5. The principal 
 rights of the Latin allies. 7. The long legs of the «-^ostrich. 8. The 
 •'"ancestral country-] daces of Scii>io. 9. An excellent ])icture of the 
 ^"Coan Venus. 10. The disgraceful treaties of the Roman commander. 
 
 11. The beautiful gifts (mmixs) of God. 12. The whole works of Livy 
 of Patavium. 13. The crimes {scelu-a) of Messallna, the impious wife of 
 Nero. 14. The ditferent weights and values of the Roman as. 15. By 
 the slow '^^•ure of old wounds. 1<). By the entrails of the human body. 
 17. The wonderful grace {»bj.. l<'po.H)'of the writer. 18. A **^Britannic 
 hare (ohj.), j)leaSant to the ""palate. 19. The excellent deeds of Caesar. 
 20. By Faustulus, the ''herdsman of the royal cattle. 21. The times 
 of the '-Dutch "^rebellion. 22. The "^Asiatic coasts of the Hellespont. 
 23. By the 'premature frosts of middle (lermany. 24. To the timely 
 '♦'redemiJtion of the pledges of Tubero. 25. The nature of both, males 
 and "'females. 2(]. By "^Corinthian bronze, the principal metal of 
 "sculi)tors. 27. To Ceres, the mother of Proseri)ina. 28. The seeds of 
 rare cucumbers. 29. By the dust of the Italian roads {iter). 30. The 
 mouths of the goddess *Fama. 31. By the unhurt honor of the Roman 
 commander. 32. ""Nouns of ^'masculine ^'-gender. 33. ^^Garlands of 
 beautiful tiowers. 
 
 1. Immensa (xermandrum antiqudrum corpora, 2. Calidi ^^Vesuvii 
 cineres. 3. ImprobisCatilinae facinoribos. 4. Crebra frigoris calorisque 
 mutatidne. 5. Exiinia Cereris statuil, **^igndti auctdris opere. G. Fu- 
 tuTJB generis humani conditidnis. 7. Templa, Apollini et V^eneri sacra. 
 8. Divino Jundnis ore. 9. Dubio socidrum Ijatindrum jure. 10. Pro- 
 pinqua Sicilia? insuhr litora. 11. Magnis immodicisque provincifirum 
 oneribus. 12. Scelerum toeddrum *^perpetratidne. 13. Immensa ele- 
 
 »0 Tibiir, a town near Rome, the modfrn Tholi. »1 finmmer, adj. eestTviis. 
 »' Re-siiit^nc; m.-iiisio. '^ I'^uator. a luuitiT. ^* .\nxiety. ^^ Italian. *« Gfrm,tnicit» 
 OeriiiHii, iidj. ^" B'iftu'us. beef, «tv (n/j. 68 Anglas. an Enclisliman. ** Noiirisliinent. 
 «0 (\,ppfir. (iH ad), aiin'ti"^. *' SUpff, ad), arireiueiis. ""■^ Allms. *3 -£tryi>tia as. 
 •M'rteMii:irit<»r. «^ Strut liio. «« Avitiis. «^ "cVmn (of the is'and of Cos). Cons «» Curatio, 
 «» liriiaiiiiiciiN. ''P Pii atiiin. ^i |>a.stor. ^a Uatavus. 7 3 tjedjti,,. '< .V.siaticu-*. ■" Pr»- 
 iiiaifirus. ''6 Ue<lemtii>. -'' F.Miiina. ''^ Corinihius. '»• Statuarius. ®° Nomen. 
 81 .Vla>culTiuis. f*- Gi'MUs. »3 Seitum. «* VesuTius, a known volcano. ^^ IgnoUis, un- 
 knou}n. »* Perpetratio, connniMion. 
 
1-2 i] 
 
 TIIIKI) DECLENSION. — LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION.— MUTE STEMS. 
 
 127 
 
 phanti ossa. 14. Miro sormonis lopdre. 15. ^'Mansueto pueri leportt 
 16. Florum sertoriiiiique ^^odorc. 17. Pecori Apolliui sacro. 
 
 B. SENTENCES. 
 
 1. Magnus exsnlum niimerus patrte a consulibus restituitur. 2 
 Jugurtha Adherbaltm Micips;i? filium interficcre conatur. 3. Fabiua 
 lloinanos llannibahni viiicere docet. 4. El»*pbanti verberibus crebris 
 mansuefiuiit. 5. Color aureus taurorum* felle effici potest. 6. Senato 
 rum numerus a Servio Tullio au«;«"tur. 7. Exempla mala mores bonog 
 corrumpunt. 8. Lon<i:;T *'^cogitationis •■'Hntenniysione ingenii mucro 
 •'retuiulitur. 9. ^-Jactatio auditoribus ^'^fastidium afterre {toc(nis<')sol(it. 
 
 10. Antonius jwpuli pectora publico Cjrsaris funere ^^inflammfire studet. 
 
 11. Servorum seditionem parvo copiaruni numero oj)primere jiossumus. 
 
 12. Hannibal socioruni a.ixiniua agi,'Tedi statuit. 18. ^^Pictor pnedonis 
 imauincni carbone '^"deliueat. 14. Tironibus Ilomeri carmina et leg-ero 
 et intellii^iTc necesse est. 15. Immensa Persfirum multitudo Alexaudri 
 copiarum tortitudinem superare nequit. 10. Straboneni regiones externas 
 explorare juvat. 17. M. Tullio Ciceroni conjurationem Catilinariam 
 oi)primere licet. 18. Errores contiteri semper decet. 19. Imperatoj 
 tribunis et centurionibus co]narum discrlmen ostendit. 20. Copiae 
 clamorem magiium subito edere (^o rcfiW) jiibentur. 21. Augures con- 
 sulem belhim inciix^re vetant. 
 
 1. The Muses are '•'"sik'nced by tlie ''^din of arms and tlie ^^cries of 
 •war. 2. Thou canst not restore to life ihe bones of tlie commander. 3. 
 The Italian sj)ring restores Kigor to tlie soul, and strength to the body. 
 4. The Roman j)e(q)le wishes to diminish the burdens of the allies. 5. 
 Thou canst not restrain, O Sempronius, the blind fury of the passions ! 
 6. To be the author of rebellion is netVirious. 7. Lightnings have a 
 '■^sulphureous smell. 8. Swellings are healed by honey and the dust of 
 charcoal. 9. Tiie people 'demands the lives of Cesar's ""murderers. 10. 
 A vulture daily devours Prometheus' liver. 11. The Macedonians in- 
 tend to tryf the chances of war again. 12. Cesar prevents the legions of 
 Pompey from foraging. 13. The inhabitants as well as the garrison 
 are unwilling to suffer a long siegi». 14. Hares furnish a pleasant and 
 ^palatable meat. 15. The (female) slave does not know how to cook a 
 tortoise. IG. We often admire the good health of Cato. 17. The 
 Greek orators have a wonderful grace {lepoa) of ^style. 18. The garrison 
 is expelled by the help of the highest in rank. 19. Thou must deliver 
 Tubero's country-seat to the buyers. 20. The Roman people refuse to 
 confirm the treaties of the commander. 21. The C(msts of Sicily are 
 dangerous, and are avoided (ffffere) by the 'merchants. 22. A life, 
 devoted to lusts, is injurious both to body and soul. 
 
 8' MitnsiiC'tus, tame. ^^ Otlor, smHl, fragranc/'. »9 CogitRtio, thinking. »o Inter- 
 mi»si<». intfr rapt ion. »* RetuniU're, to fdnnt. »■•' Jactatio, a Ixfisfing. "3 Fastiiliuiii, 
 (iisguxt. 8* IiirtHmriiiire. to injitmc. •* Pictor, a painter. *• Delineiire, to sketch. 
 ^T T<} be silenretf, ohinntescere. "•*/>/«. claniror. *•<?/•//. clamor. ^ Vigor, visor. ^Sul- 
 phureous .siilfurciis. 3 To (Ipinand, eflBsiu'itare. * Murderer, percussor. ' Palatable, 
 sapidu.s. ^ Style, st'nno. "^ Merchant, incrcHtor. 
 
 * T'le quantity i>f the vowel o in the penult of the ohliquo cases, so T-ir a.s it is deter- 
 mined by tlie [jreeediMir rules, will no longer be marked by the long sign in the exercises. 
 
 t Notice the difference oi experiri, to try, and of atudere, to try. Tiie former requirefl 
 « 8UBSTANTIVK, the latief an iNriNixivB as object. 
 
 I 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 THIUD DECLEXSIOX.— MUTE STEMS. 
 
 § ] 0!d. 2. The MUTE stems consist of three classes, the P- 
 class, the T-class, aud the K-class, accorditig as they have either 
 a P-mute, or T-inute, or K-mute as characteristic. They geu' 
 erallf/ take the case-termination s in the nominative singular^ 
 and ai'e tiien niaSciiliiie or feminine. The only neuters with mute 
 steins are : lae (stein lact), cor {^tem cord), crtput, and the nouns 
 in ma, G. tndtis, taken from the Greek. All these neuters re/use 
 the case-termincttion s in the noininatitae singular. 
 
 § 1 0«t. 2. The nouns with mute stems are declined like 
 
 those with liquid stems, by atta^ihing the case-terminations § 145 
 
 to their stems. 
 
 1^^" Since the declension of the mute and liquid stems is essentially 
 the same, and both differ only in the mannei of forming the genitive, it 
 is deemed unnecessary to illustrat'3 the three mute classes by pab 
 
 ADIGMS. , 
 
 P-CLASS. 
 § ] 04t. Vocabulary. 
 
 Ade|)s, Tj)i<?, m.fat, lard 
 
 auceps. aucupis, m. a hird-ciitcher 
 
 daps, dapis,/. a banquet 
 
 forceps, ^ipis, m. dcf. a pair of jnn- 
 
 cerfi 
 *ops, opis,/. help, resource 
 
 T-CLASS 
 
 plebs, plebis, /. tJie pleb^, the common 
 people 
 
 princops, Ipis, m. a rider, chief, em- 
 peror 
 
 trabs, tvabis, /. poet 
 
 lOo. Vocabulary. 
 
 Abies, Uis,f. a pine 
 {enigma, dtis, n. (Greek) a I'iddle 
 jptas, dti's, f age 
 anas, dtif<,f. a duck 
 antistes, ^tis, m. overseer. 
 Ardeas, dtis, m. an inhabitant of 
 A rdra 
 
 Arpinas, (1<v?, m. an inhabitant of 
 
 Arpinum 
 auctoritas. dtie,f, authoHtif 
 brevitas, dtU, f. shortness, briefness 
 calamitas, dtis, f. calamity, mis- 
 fortune 
 caput, capitis, n. head 
 
 aries, etis, m. a ram, battering-reim celeritas, dtis f quickness 
 
 * This noun is eitiier the name of the ooddkss Opx. or an appellative nonn, denoting 
 hflp. As H proper name ir loriii» a eompieto siiiiruiar. Ae an appellative noun it lack£ 
 tbe nuuiinative bingular, but furm6 all other caaes \n both numberi>. 
 
128 
 
 THIKD DECLENSION. — MUTE STEMS. 
 
 civitas, dtii^, f. state, eiff/, citizen- n<^pos. oth, m. grandnon 
 
 «hip iiox, iioctis, /'. iii<jltt 
 
 comes, UhH, e.g. co)t)paiiion obscs, ;<Z/.v, r. g. <i Jtodnge 
 
 coiiipedcs, 1)1. t. (sU'in compid), f. optimatfs, pi. t. (stem optimal): m. 
 
 shiiekks ifridoerntK 
 
 cor, cordis, n. JudH palus, iidi.s,/. -vc^n/ip, marsh 
 
 cof*, cotis,/: whetstone puries, eli.% m. a itall (of a house) 
 
 cuspis, uiis,f. a spear paupertas. atis,f. poceiti/ 
 
 custos, odis, c. g. a guard, guardian ix'cus, hdis,f. a head of ndtle 
 
 diad»"ma, dtis, n.{( iIIEEk), a diadem pedes, 1-tis, m. a foot-soldiir 
 
 dilhciiltas, atis, f. dijfiealty penates. pi. t. (st. penCU), m. house- 
 diixnitas, atis,f. dig nit i/ hold gods 
 
 dos, ddtis, /. a dowri/ . pes, i)edis, m. foot 
 
 eques, It is, m. a horseman, knight por-ma, at is, n. ((f kekk), a j)oem 
 
 traus, fraudis,/. fraud pr;esi'S, alls, e.g. a rhitf 
 
 gravitas, atis, f. weight, dignity, quadnipes, Idis, V. g. a quadruped 
 
 grai'iti/ quies (requies), etis,f. rest, repose 
 
 hereditas, 'dtis, f inheritance Quintes, \A . t. (st. quirlt), the liomatu 
 
 lieres, edis, c. g. an heir or heiress sacerdos. Ty^/.v, e. g. a pricstov priesttss 
 
 liosi)es, "ttis, m. a guist-friend salus. ntis,f. welfare, S(f<ty 
 
 iucus, Mis,f. anvil Samiiis, Jti^s, m. a Samnite 
 
 interi)res, etis, c. g. interpreter satellrs, Itis, c. g. a saUUite 
 
 juventus, utis,f young, eige, youth senses, i'tis.f a sta/tding crap 
 
 lac, laetis, n. milk sen(M*tiis, Fitis.f. old age 
 
 lapis, alis, m. a stone servitus. utis.f slavery 
 
 laus, laudis,/. praise societas, atis,f. soeidy 
 
 libcrtas, dtisl liberty temeritas, dti,s,f. rashness 
 
 limeii, itis, m. Hm it, houndary ic\\\\^i":>i'AS, dtis. f a storm 
 
 lis, litis,/", a lawsuit utilitas. dtis, ustfuUuss 
 
 merces, edis,f. pay, waejes vas, vadis, c. g. a bondsman, security 
 
 miles, 7tis, a soldier virtus, ruis,f. virtve, breivery 
 
 § 160. 3. The characteristic of the nouns, belonging to the 
 T-elass {t or cf), is regulurly dropped in the nominative singuUir 
 before its case-termination s, which letter cannot he preceded by 
 a T-mute. The T-mute, thus dropped in the nominative, always 
 is restored in the obhqne cases. 
 
 Rem. 1. Of the neuters which refuse the ending s, only caput retains 
 the T-mute, but lac, cor and the (J reek nouns in ma drop their 
 characteristics in the nominative. 
 
 167. 4. Nouns in as generally belong to the T--class, being 
 FEMININE with atis in the genitive, except vas — vddis and anas — 
 aniitis{?) 
 
 Nouns in es generally have vowel-stems (§ HT); but a con- 
 gideraljle number of them, which must be separately learned from 
 
 * Later «luthors eomcUmes use the nonn quadrupes in the neutkk pentlor. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — MUTE STEMS. 
 
 129 
 
 the vocabnlaiT, beloni]^ to the T-elass. Tiie most of these nouns 
 in es change this termination into ttis in the genitive, and are mas- 
 culine (miles, comes, /iOs^jes^ equcf^, pedes, dx\). 
 
 The nouns in os {nepos^ sacerdos, cos and dos) have dtis., those 
 in W.S uti.^(juventus, !<alffs, smectus., servitus, u/?'^u.s'), and those 
 in is, partly ttis [lis and Samnis), imrtly id is (lapis and cuspis). 
 AVitli the exception of lapis and the personal nouns they are all 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 Rem. 2. A few nouns in us, mis, and os, mentioned in the vocabulary, form 
 their genitives dillertiitly (/>nlus, incus, jxcus, custos, fraus, laus). 
 
 K-CLASS. 
 § 168, Vocabulary. 
 
 Appendix, 1cls,f. an <ipperidage judex, u'is, m. a judge 
 
 artifex, u'is, nt. artist '^lex, legis,/'. <i law 
 
 '*^cervix, teiii,f. the neck lux, Ifieis,/. light 
 
 cicatrix, lcis,f. a scar nex, necis./. death (violent) 
 
 co(h'x, a'ls, m. a code, book nutrix, Iris.f. a nurse (female) 
 
 ''conjux, ugis.f. a wife, consort nux, nucis,/. a nut 
 
 crux, crucis,/. a cross pax, paci.s,/. peace 
 
 cuh;x, ids, m. ei gnat pollex, ids, m. thunib 
 
 dux, ducis, c. g. a leader, general preces, ])1. t. (stem prec)f. prayer 
 
 fax, facis,/'. a torch i)(mtifex. a'ls, m. a chief-priest 
 
 fornax, dcis.f. a furnace- radix, icis.f a root 
 
 fornix, u'ls, m. an arch rex, rPgis, m. a king 
 
 frutex, ids, m. a shrub salix, tds,f a willow 
 
 frux, frugis,/. fii Id-fruit silex, \ds, ni. flint, pchble-stojie 
 
 grex, gregis, ?n. a fiock vertex, Tm, m. top, whirlpool 
 
 harusjH'x, Ids, ni. a so</thsnyer victriXj ids,f. a conqueress 
 index, ids, m. informer, spy, indi- vox, vocis,/. voice, word, remark, 
 cation 
 
 § 1 69. 5. The nouns, belonging to the K-class have the final 
 letter x in the nominative, which must be resolved into cs or ^s, 
 s being the case-termination of the nominative, and c or y the 
 characteristic of the stem. Hence the genitive is formed by 
 chanii-ing the final x of the nominative either into cis or iiitc 
 gis. The former is the rule, the latter the exception. 
 
 § 1 70. 6. The vowel, preceding the characteristic, generally 
 remains unchanged. But the nouns in ex, with the exception of 
 
 ^^Cetfiix in classical langu:iL'e ahvay? is used in the plckal with siniiular signification 
 11 riinjux aomvl'uues, but rarely, is used a3 a masculine of the husband. ^^ Lex Uk 
 tingle law ; /um is the law, as a generality. 
 
 9 
 
130 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — MUTE STEMS. 
 
 the monosyllabics, enumrmtecl in the vocalnilarv, change their 
 final hitters into tcis in the g-cnilive. 
 
 § 171. 7. Tlie GENDER of tlie K-chiss is the feminine; but 
 the "-ender of the nouns in ex is the masculine. 
 
 Rem 3 The nouns sene.r, niv, supdlfx are irrecjulak. and the noun 
 no.v belongs to the T-Class. Those nouns in wiiich fiaal x is pre- 
 ceded by a CONSONANT, have voWEL-stkxis. See ^ 184, 180. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 l^ Write jmradigms of the follnrlng noun.'* iritlt nvite stems : 
 Princeps a ruler, a^tas the age, miles a soldier, lapis d stone, virtua 
 mrtae, fornax afurnaee, codex n hook, lex <i IdU). 
 
 A. ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 P-CLASS. 1. The different '•'•secessions of the Roman plebs. 2. By 
 the unforeseen help {ops) of bird-catchers. ;i The great resource's of the 
 rulers. 4. By a wooden post. 5. By a i-*curved ])air of pincers. 
 
 1 Plebis '^scita, senatoribus raolesta. '2. Infmitu' Romanornm opes. 
 8. '«Sumtudsis Luculli dapibus. 4. Querneas domonim trabes. 5. 
 
 i^\lbo anserum adipe. ^ » ^ ,,. or» 
 
 T-CLVSS I 'i'he Atti^ nii^hts, a renowned book of A. Gellins ,. Ky 
 C Popilius Licnas, the murderer of Cicero. 3. The i)ledges of safe 
 bondsmen 4. The wonderful nature of the 'n'ontian ducks. .). To tlio 
 ^reat (luiekness of the Numidian horsemen. G. The ample res.»urces of 
 the rebellious states. 7. Bv the vain '"elf u'ts of the aristocrats. 8. lo 
 the -'"Antemnatians, a ne'igliboring nation. U. By -'trancpiilllty of the soiib 
 the certain companion {comes) of virtue. 10. The Hight of both the 
 foot-soldiers and horsemen. 11. By a -'-native -''him. n.ss and sores ol 
 the feet. 12. Bv Nearchus, a guest-friend of Cato. lo. To the -'setthng 
 of doubtful bou*n<laries. 14. By -■'music, the ebxiuent interpreter of the 
 heart. 15. The -'^outer walls of the building. Ki. Tii" snuiU remains 
 of magnificent (standing) crops. IT. By a pleasant repose of the body. 
 18. By the -"surrender of the Latin hostages. 11). Dnnuci'ous wmmds 
 of the riirht foot. 20. To the burden of oil age. '2i. To the iron 
 shackles of the i)risoner8. 22. By the heii-s of the emperer Otho. 2:i. 
 To the small pav of the Roman soldiers. 24. The -"^s<pmre stones of the 
 2»8epulchre. 25.* Bv an ancient ^"corporation of priests. 2C. The wel- 
 fare {obj.) of the state, dear to the (pu'en. 27. Tlie ''loul air {obj.) «>f the 
 «-Pomi)tinian marshes. 28. The unwilling praises of the chiet. 29. 1 he 
 bloody lieads of the =^"conspirators. 30. By the diadem ot Cleoi)atra, 
 
 queen of Egypt. _ 
 
 1. Philosophorum Gnrcorum aniigmata. 2. I'errea generis Immani 
 tDtate. 3. Sempronio, augurum coUegii antistite. 4. Imperatoris 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — MUTE STEMS. 
 
 131 
 
 Romani auctoritate. 5. Vit* human^c brevitiiti. 0. Magn* hominuni 
 s^voluntfiti 7. Illvria? civitatibus, populo Romano intestis. 8. Magna 
 Fat.'llitum copia. '9. Philosophia et grammatica, ingenii cotes. 10. 
 Sociorum pedites, Poenorum -^pra^senti^e ignari. 11. Comitum pedes, 
 itinere fessi. 12. Ilanuone ct llasdrubale, Poenorum interpretibus. Id. 
 Equitura Romanornm ordine. 14. La^ta filioruin ac nepotum multitu- 
 dine 15. Civitatum Grajcfirum libertatem. IG. Immensa mill turn 
 pra^da 17. Duumvirorum decreta, civitatis saluti contraria. 18. N eta- 
 rifi hominum -«perditorum societate. 10. Universa servitutis -abroga- 
 
 *^"k-cl\ss 1 The fierv furnaces of 38 Vulcan. 2. The advantages of a 
 long peace. 3. Bv the '^^oud voice of the ^"heralds 4. To a code ot 
 the^h)resent law^. -5. By pebble-st^ne and "^-'gravel, the ^^material of 
 the «Flaminian way. 6. By the spies of the emperors Tiberms and 
 Nero 7 To the just pravers of the allies. 8. Tlie roots and ^-founda- 
 tions of ^«^truth 0. The opinions of the leaders, contrary to peace. 10. 
 Bv the clear {cleirm) light of the sun. 11. By a rotation {ordo) of the 
 ^'customary field-fruits. 12. To Cornelia, the consort ot Cc^esar. 13. fo 
 Servius Tullius and Tarquinius Priscus, kings of the Romans 14. iiie 
 ^^herdsnien of the royal tlocks. 15. By the ^^answers of the Roman 
 Bootbsavers. 10. The high arches (obj.) of the 'H ullian jail. 1 . . lo a 
 garden,* full of beautiful shrul)s and trees. 18. Fair conditions of a fu- 
 ture ])eace. 19. The breast of the centurion, full ot scars. 21). The 
 soldiers, ignorant of the plans of the leaders. 21. The judges, devoted 
 
 to the -''will of the dictator. i .• o r^ ^^» 
 
 1 ^-^Crassis tauri cervicibus. 2. Culices, hominibus molesti. o. (Treges 
 exiniii, ApoUini sacri. 4. Severis Gelonis legiims. 5. Dario Persarum 
 re-i G. Splendida siderum luna^que luce. 7. Ca?saris necem populo 
 Romano ^ calamitosam. 8. Lupa, Romuli et Remi nutrlce. 9 Inaudita 
 ducum temeritate 10. Indices mercedis ac pra^diB cupidi. 11. Ridicu- 
 lis haruspicum erroribus. 
 
 B. Sentences. 
 1 RomjB incendium Neroni princiin attribuitur. 2. Samnites milites 
 Romanos anna abji.ere jubent. 3. Apollinis sacerdotes Cr.pso ambigue 
 resiKjndent. 4. Uculi animi indices esse solent. 5. Populus Romanus 
 Tarquinium regeni expellit. 0. Antistites novi a centumviris creaiitur. 
 7 ^larii publici custrules a principe ^-'noniinantur. 8. Fabricii mores 
 ac ^h»rohitateni sa-pe adniTror. 9. Philippus, Macedonum rex, libertati 
 Gnecie peiiculosus esse videtur. 10. Arbores fruticesque serere semper 
 cxpedit 11. Seveia pneceptorum disciplina juventuti molesta esse 
 vidCtur 12 Homines nefarios aut interficere aut expellere civitatia 
 Kduti conducit. 13. Ca;sar interpretes orationem litteris (p^/j^^r) man- 
 dare iubet. 14. Pyrrhus, Kpiri rex, lapide interficitur lo. bcipio 
 Ju<-urtham, Masinissse Numidiaj regis nepotem, populo Romano com- 
 
 «« Voluptius fd^oMure. 36 Pra^sentia, pref>ence. »« Perditus, ahandemed^^-' Abrog.atm, 
 ahoiilion »^yidci,>,, tl.e t'od ..f fire and mechanic art^ Vulcaiius ''/^"^' ,%"^ 
 *o Iff raid nrft-.-o <^ I'rex^nt, liodiermis. •«■'(r'/atv-Z, glarea. oj/,,^^,.,^^. niatena. '^/'^a- 
 
 f:^Lun, Fla.ni..ius. *^ FoundaHnn, f..n.ia.ne,.tu.n. "« Ir^'::'''^'^-,,^,^:^';:^^^^ 
 folitus «• //^/(/^-rmf//, pa^tor. ••» J^mc^r, responsum. ^'^ T ullian, Tnm^nm. *' >f4«: 
 voluntas, ^a Cra.-^sus, thick. " Calaiuitosus, dUantrotiti. ** JSominare, to ap/^otnt 
 5» ^lohildA, probity. 
 
132 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION, — VOWEL-STEMS. 
 
 mendat. 16. (lermani a Cjrsare (iailis obsidos restitiuMv cou^uutur. 17. 
 Oppidi iniiri ark-tihus conciitiuntiir. 18. A^'ricohe sei;-t'tfs ^McuK'tJ^re 
 jam incipiunt. 11>. Tacviu arinis assequi pncj>tat. '20. Veneris; steila 
 lucem eximiam -'"edere incipit. 
 
 1. Virtue ninnot be allured l»y pay. 2. Perseus directs the ambassa- 
 dors to -nempt the rulers of tlie citii'S of Illyria by m;)uey ami the 
 promises of royal favor {/(/cor). 3. The inhabitants refuse to carry lielp 
 {ops) to the sick soldiers. 4. Impious men seeni now to be the leaders 
 and standard-hearers of inex])erieneed youth. 5. The suldiers of Cesar 
 cross the Hubico. 0. We remember wl'll the crimes {scela-s) of the re- 
 bellious leaders. 7. The horsemen wish to attack tht^ colunms of the 
 enemies. 8. The ambassadors forbid the king to cross the boundary. 
 i). The crops seem to be devoured by mice. 10. Vesuvius begins to 
 throw out hot ashes and stones. 11. the teachers give {tribncM great 
 praise to the beginners. 12. It is better to defend the safety of the 
 state. 1-3. It is ^•'uni)recedented to give {dcferre) to a Roman knight the 
 honor of a triumph'. 14. The Roman people declare {imllcen) war to 
 Perseus, king of the Macedonians. 15. The •'inhabitants of Larium 
 are not willing to surremU'r the city to the Roman gfurral. 1<>. The 
 horsemen of the Numidians cannot'*" 'break the columns of the Roman 
 footsoldiers. 17. Lawsuits generally are unpleasant for both, the 
 «-complainant and the defendant {rms). 18. The senators cease to be the 
 guardians of the laws. ID. The Pomptiniau marshes are ])ernicious to 
 the liealth of men. 20. It is expedient to the Patricians to repeal 
 the «^Ilortensian law. 21. It is preferable to become a chief-priest. 22. 
 Conscience seems to be the ** 'incorruptible judge of men. 23. We wdl 
 not offer {subjlcrre) the neck to the '^vxecutioner. 24. «^''Barren fields can- 
 not produce {iffcrre) an abundance of good fruits. 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION.— VOWEL-STEMS AND IRllEO- 
 
 ULAR NOUNS. 
 
 § 172. 1. The nouns of the third declension with vowel- 
 stems have the vowel t as characteristic, whicli is either blended 
 with or absorbed by the case-terminations § 14;). The case-ter* 
 niinaiions of the vowel-stems present the following scheme : 
 
 •«Demetero, to harreHt. " Edere, to give out. " To tempt. U'winra. " Unpr^es. 
 denterl inaudltus. «« Larinus. an inhabitant of Larium. ^^To break, perrninpere. 
 •"i Complainant, actor. «' Ilortemian, Hortensius. •♦ lucurruptus. «•» Cariiifex. 
 •• A rid U.S. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — VOTVEL-STEMS. 
 
 133 
 
 Singular. 
 N. is, es, s, Neut. e or — 
 G. is 
 D. i 
 
 A. em {im), Neut. like Nom. 
 V. like Nom. 
 A. e {I) 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. es, Neut. %a 
 G. lum 
 D. %bus 
 
 A. is {es), Neut. la 
 V. like Nom. 
 A. like Dat. 
 
 Rem. 1. From a comparison of the case-terminations of the consonant- 
 and vowel-stems we easily see, in which cases the characteristic i of 
 the vowel-stems is ahsorbtd by the endint^ proper, and in which case 
 it is blended with it. The three principal cases, in whicli the charac- 
 teristic / always ap])ears, ar^: 1. The genitive plural {inm),2. The 
 accusative })lural of all genders {Is and la), 3. The nominative plu- 
 ral of the neuters Ciu). The termination ini in the accusative, and 
 i in the ablative singular likewise show the characteristic i, but 
 these terminations occur in a few nouns only (§ 179). 
 
 Rem. 2. The termination 7^ in the accusative plural b(4ongs to the 
 clameal ])eriod of the language. Later this termination became 
 obsolete, and the nouns with vowel-stems assumed the same termi- 
 nation {es), as those with consonant-stems. 
 
 § 17«t. 2. A given noun with a vowel-stem is declined by 
 attacliing the case-terminations § 172 to its declension-stem. The 
 declensiun-stem is found by removing the termination is of the 
 genitive singular. 
 
 Rem. 3. In nouns with vowel-stems we must distinguish between the 
 declensiox-stem of the noun and its true ste.v. The latter 
 always terminates in the characteristic /, while declexsion-stem is 
 the true stem without its vowel-characteristic, being merely as- 
 sumed for facilitating the inflection of a noun, which is easier per- 
 formed by joining the vowel-characteristic with the terminations 
 proper. Thus the true stem of cicis is cid, s being the ending of 
 tlie nominative. But the declension-stem of cicifi is civ, is being 
 the CASE-TEUMrxATioN of the nominative, that is the ending, coni- 
 hined ttith the chdrarteristic. 
 
 § 171. 3. The nouns with vowel-stems are divided into three 
 classes: 1. The regular vowel-stems. 2. The liquid-mute stems. 
 3. The irregular vowel-stems. 
 
 § 
 
 REGULAR A^OWEL-STEMS. 
 
 1 7«>. Vocabulary. 
 
 ^des, *is, f. a temple {in the plur. a \ aedllis, is, m.^7? aedile, chief of police 
 house) I and public building 
 
 • H as termination of tlie genitive, the mere ca^e-tenniiiatioii is is given in this vocab- 
 ulary, it is meant that these letters must be substituted fur the nominative-toruiiDutiuiir 
 i«, en, or e. 
 
131 
 
 THIKD DECLENSION. — VOWEL-STEMS. 
 
 aeqiialis,is, in. a contenipordvy 
 
 attiuis, is, c. g. a rdnlice htj inavriafjc^ 
 coiDiectioii 
 
 Aljn'S, 1)1. t. (St. Alpi), f. the Alps 
 
 alturia, \A. t. (st. altfiri), n. an altar 
 
 amnis, is, m. a st/rani 
 
 aiuinal, alis, u. a/c aninial 
 
 apis, is, t". <i b<i' 
 
 Atht-niensis, is, in. a/i Athodaii 
 
 aiiris, is. f. the car 
 
 avis, is, 1". a bird 
 
 axis, is, 111. ai'ktree, the axis of t/te 
 earth 
 
 buris, is, f. the tail of a plough 
 
 fa3.1es, is, f. murder, slaughter 
 
 calcar, aris, n. a spur 
 
 Ciiiialis, is, 111. a conduit-pipe, canal 
 
 can is, is, c. ji:. a dog 
 
 Carthagiuieusis.is, n\.a CartJutginian 
 
 civis, is, c. g. a citizen 
 
 clades, is, f. a defeat 
 
 classis, is, f. ajhet 
 
 clavis, is, f. a k,< y 
 
 cochlear, aris, u. a spoou 
 
 collis, is. 111. a hill 
 
 corl)is, is, t". a basket 
 
 crinis, is, in. a hair 
 
 ensis, is, m. a su:ord 
 
 fames, is, f. hunger 
 
 faniiliaris, is, m. a friend 
 
 fascis, is, m. a bundle of rods (car- 
 ried by the lictors) 
 
 febris, is, i'.fecer 
 
 feles, is, f. a cat 
 
 tides, is, f. (usually in tlie plur.) a 
 string (made of guts) 
 
 finis, is, m. end (plur. boundary) 
 
 f unfile, is, n. a torch 
 
 funis, is, m. a rope 
 
 fustis, is m. a dick 
 ^hostis, is, c. g. an enemy 
 
 ignis, is, m. Jire 
 
 juvenis, is,m-. <f young man, youth 
 
 mar»', is, n. tJiC S( a 
 
 meiisis, m. a month 
 
 laquear or lacrmar, aris, n. a [tannel- 
 
 ceiling 
 messis, is, f. a hardest 
 
 moMiia, pi. t. (st. mocni) icalls (of a 
 
 city) 
 moiille, is, n. '/ necklace 
 nares, pl.t. (st. naii), f. nodrils,7i08t 
 natalis, is, m. birthday (in the plur 
 
 parentage) 
 navis, is, f. a ship 
 nubes, is, f. a cloud 
 or bis, is, m. a circle (orbis terri 
 
 rum, the world) 
 ovlle, is, n. a shccp-stable 
 ovis, is, f. a sheep 
 paluuibis, is, c. g. a wood-pigcon 
 panis, is, m. bread 
 par, paris. n. a pair 
 l)ellis, is, f. a skin 
 pt'lvis, is, f. a baain 
 piscis, is, m. fish 
 ])<)stls, is, m. a post 
 pulvinar, ari.<, n. a cushion 
 pupi>is, is, f. the stern tf a ship 
 j)uti'al, alis, n. an inclosure 
 roslis, is, f. a cord 
 rete, is, n. a mt 
 Tu\)cs, f. '/ rock 
 securis, is, f. an axe 
 gedes, is, f. a s< at 
 eentis, pi. t. (st. senti) m. thorni 
 Bitis, is, 1. third 
 sodfilis, is, m. companion 
 testis, is, c. g. iritncss. 
 Tiberis, is, m. th Tiber 
 tibiale, is, n. a legging 
 tigris. is, c. g. a tiger 
 loniuisittmiues), is. m. neck-cham 
 tribunal, alis. u. a court, tribunal 
 turris, is, f. a totcer 
 tussis, is, f. congJi 
 unguis, is, ni. a finger-nail 
 valiis, is, f. a ralb y 
 vates, \», in. a seer, poet 
 vectlgal, alis, n. a toll, tax 
 vectis, is, m. a r(ril, lecer 
 vermis, is, m. a worm 
 vestis, is, f. a garmmt 
 vis (vim vi), f. fare, power (plur. 
 
 vires, drength) 
 vulpes, is, f. a fox 
 
 1 IIoHtiH is an enemy, with whom our couti 
 and iidvei NdfiitK any kind of it nt'i^onht. '* 
 bs a it'Uiiniue,otfeiuald«>. 
 
 try is at war ; iitimhioi is h printte enemy 
 JuvenU homelimes, bul very rarely, w U5«d 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION.— VOWEL-STEMS. 
 
 135 
 
 
 § 176. 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. 
 
 Civis, a citizen 
 
 N. 
 
 cives, citizens 
 
 G. 
 
 civis, of a citizen 
 
 G. 
 
 civium, of citizens 
 
 D. 
 
 civi, to a citizen 
 
 D. 
 
 civi bus, to citizens 
 
 A. 
 
 civeiii, a citizen 
 
 A. 
 
 civis, citizens 
 
 V. 
 
 civis, citizen I 
 
 V. 
 
 cives, citizens! 
 
 A. 
 
 cive, by a citizen 
 
 A. 
 
 civi bus, by citizens 
 
 N. 
 
 Clades, a defeat 
 
 N. 
 
 clades, defeats 
 
 G. 
 
 cladis, efa defeat 
 
 G. 
 
 cladium, of defeats 
 
 D. 
 
 cladi, to a defeat 
 
 D. 
 
 cladibus, to defeats 
 
 A. 
 
 cladem, a defeat 
 
 A. 
 
 cladis, defeats 
 
 V. 
 
 clades, defeat ! 
 
 V. 
 
 clades, defeats ! 
 
 A. 
 
 clade, by a defeat 
 
 A. 
 
 • 
 
 cladibus, by defeats 
 
 N. 
 
 Ovlle, a shcfp-stable 
 
 N. 
 
 ovilia, sheep-stables 
 
 G. 
 
 ovilis, (fa sheep-stable 
 
 G. 
 
 ov ilium, of -sheep-stables 
 
 D. 
 
 ovili, to a sheep-dable 
 
 D. 
 
 ovilibus, to sheep-stables 
 
 A. 
 
 ovile, a shiep-dable 
 
 A. 
 
 ovilia, sJieep-stables 
 
 V. 
 
 ovlle, t(Ju< p-dable ! 
 
 V. 
 
 ovilia, sheep-stables ! 
 
 A. 
 
 ovili, by a sheep-stable 
 
 A. 
 
 ovilibus, by sh^'^p-stables 
 
 N. 
 
 Animal, an aninud 
 
 N. 
 
 animalia, animals 
 
 G. 
 
 animjilis, of an aninial 
 
 G. 
 
 animalium, of animals 
 
 D. 
 
 animali, to an animal 
 
 D. 
 
 animalibus, to animals 
 
 A. 
 
 animal, (Ut animal 
 
 A. 
 
 animalia, animals 
 
 V. 
 
 animal, animal ! 
 
 V. 
 
 animalia, animuls ! 
 
 A. 
 
 animali, by an animed 
 
 A. 
 
 animalibus, by animals 
 
 § 177. 4. The regular vowel-stems of the masculiue and 
 feiiiiniiie gender have the case-termination is or es in the nomina- 
 tive singular, in which i is the cliaracteristic, and s the ending. 
 In a number of nouns the characteristic i in the nominative is 
 changed into e {clades, caedes, f tones ^ ct'c.) 
 
 The NEUTERS refuse the ending .s, and either change the charac- 
 teristic i into 6 {niare^ rete^ tlblcde^ c£'c.), or drop it altogether^ 
 which is the case in many stems, terminating in all and dri [vecti- 
 yal^ cochlear^ lacunar^ tJbc.) Hence the iiual letters of the neuters 
 with vowel-stems are e, at, or ar. 
 
 Rem. 4. All nouns, which have th(? final letters, mentioned above, have 
 voWEi.-STKMs, unless excepted by special rules, contained in the 
 preceding two lessons, which we brietly review here : 
 a. Of the nouns iu is two belong to the S-class {cinis and pulois 
 
13G 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — VOWEL-STEMS. 
 
 §158), four to the T-cluss {!is, Sttmnis, l<ii)is and cKspis, % 1G7X 
 and two to the N-clatJS {/«Uitjid.s and [wlUs, ^ 181)). 
 
 h. Of till' nouns in t.s onc.(tlio i>r. n. C<7V,v, j^ loS) belongs to the 
 t>-clus.s, and many to the r class i^//^//(.v, ^7'/<v, /to.sih.s, m<j(», 
 parua, olmx, dir., ^ IGo). Hut the rule is, that nouns in lh am 
 declined like dadcH. Thus the niale propia- names in «.<<, aa 
 Verves, Xerxes, Tkendntoclcs, dr., must be declined as vowel- 
 stems, 
 
 e. The nouns in e, except those taken from tlu; Greek (p. !>*>.■), 7), 
 ail are neuters of the vowel-class, while of those in <(l antl <ir 
 a few belong to the L- antl K-classes, (§ 147, 157.) The 
 vowel a in these latter is f<hort, while in the nouns of the 
 vowel-class it is lon(/ {IlduiiihCdifs, Cat saris ; but vcctigd'Us, 
 calm r is). 
 Rem. 5. The mnius^j mm is nnd rt(/t is are declined by the case-termina- 
 tions of the CONSONANT-STEMS {G. pi. juveninu, cauiu/i; Ace. pi. 
 juvenes, canes). 
 
 § 17S. 5. The GENITIVE of the nmsculines ami ieininincs in U 
 is like the nominative. The nouns in es and the neuters in e 
 change these terminations in the genitive into is, as clmles, G, 
 clad Is ; marc, G. rudrls. The neuters in al and «r substitute 
 alls and Hrls for tliese final letters in the genitive, as trlbunal- 
 tribiinalls., calcar-culcuris. 
 
 § 170. 0. The following nouns in is take the termination iwi, 
 instead oi em in the acclsative singular : 
 
 1. The names of rivers and cities, as Tibtris, ^ VisHrf/is^ 
 *Araris, '^Albis^ ^Jlispalis / 
 
 2. The feminine nouns vls^ slds^ tussis, buris, /tbris^ pelvis, 
 pi/pjHs^ rest is, t arris., secHris. 
 
 Rem. 0. Vis, sitis, tas.us aud bnris, to which tli(; unclassical words ravis 
 and amussi.s may be added, ahcays take the termination iin in the 
 accusative singular The other six nouns, mentioned above, some 
 times are found with the regular termination em. 
 
 Rem, 7, Vif< in the singular occurs in nominative, accusative and abla- 
 tive only {Hs, rim, ci). The plural irregularly forms tires, ciriuni, 
 &c., and is complete. 
 
 § l^iO. T. Tlie following nouns have the termination i, in- 
 stead of 6% in the ablative singflar : 
 
 1. The neuters in e, al and ar, as marl., tribtntiJili, calcari. 
 
 » F/'-^wiz/x, ft rivor ill Germany, the modern IV^ter. ^ A r< iris [more commonW A rur], 
 « river ill (iaiil, tlie nuulern Saoiie. ^ Albia, the river /Slbc. * llispalis, h city in Spain, 
 the modern UtoWa. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION.— rLIQriD-MUTE STEMS. 
 
 137 
 
 ]5ut the names of cities in e take the regular termination e, as 
 Caere., liti^ite., Abl. Caere., Reate., 
 
 2. Tliose nouns, which have irn in the accusative, and gener- 
 ally navis and ignis. But rest is always makes reste. 
 
 3. Those appellative nouns in alls and dris., which originally 
 are adjectives, iis familiar is., soddlis, aequdlis, candlis. 
 
 4. The names of months in iSj as ^Ajmlis, ^Quintilis, Sextllis. 
 
 § 181. 8. Gender. 
 
 1. Nouns in lis and nis are masculine, except imllis SLudjyellis. 
 
 2. Axis, ensis, fascis, fastis, 77ie?isis, orbis, ^92*5Cis, postis, 
 torquis, an(juis,vectis, vermis, and the pi. t. sentes are masculine. 
 
 3. All other nouns in is and es, denoting things or beasts, are 
 feminine. But anguis, canis, palumbes and tigris are of com- 
 mon gender. See § 197. 
 
 4. The nouns in e, al and ar, belonging to this class, are neu- 
 ter. 
 
 LIQUID-MUTE STEMS. 
 
 § 183. A' 
 
 Adolescens, lis, m. a young man, a 
 youth 
 
 auimans, tis. m. t k n. a creature 
 
 ars, tis, f. art 
 
 arx, cis, f. a castle , fortress 
 
 calx, cis, f. lime, the goal in, a race- 
 course 
 
 cliens, tis, c. ^. a client 
 
 cohors, tis, f. a cohort (the lOtli part 
 of a legion) 
 
 dens, tis, m. a tooth 
 
 falx, cis, f. a sickle 
 
 fons, tis, m a spring, fountain 
 
 frons, tis, i.fortheml, front 
 
 frous (fruns), dis, f. foliage 
 
 gens, tis, f. a tribe, nation, family 
 
 glanfl, dis, f. ((n acorn, a bullet 
 
 infans, tis, c. g. a child (less than 7 
 years) 
 
 juglans, dis, f. a walnut 
 
 lens, tis, f. a lentil 
 
 ocabulary. 
 
 Mars (Mavors), tis, m. the god of 
 
 uar 
 mens, tis, f. mind 
 merx, cis, f. icare 
 mons, tis, m. mountain 
 mors, tis, f. death 
 occidens, tis, m. the west 
 oriens, m. the east 
 parens, tis, c. g. a parent (m. in 
 
 plural) 
 pars, tis, f. a part 
 pons, tis, m. a bridge 
 puis, tis, f. pottage 
 rudens, tis, m. a rope 
 serpens, tis, c. g". a serpent 
 sors, tis, f. lot, fate 
 stirps, pis, f. a stem, lineage 
 torrens, tis, m. a torrent 
 tridens, tis. m. a three-prong&d 
 
 spear, indent 
 urbs, bis, f. a city 
 Vejens, tis, m. a Vejcntian 
 
 » A prills, the month of April. 
 in republican Kuiue. 
 
 Quiiitllis and Sextilis, the months otJuly and Attgusi 
 
138 THIRD DECLENSION.— LIQUID-MUTE STEMS. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 H. Urbs, a city 
 
 G. iirbis, of a city 
 
 1). urbi. to a city 
 
 A. urbein, a city 
 
 V. urbs. city ! 
 
 A. urbe, ly a city 
 
 § IS3. Paradigms. 
 
 Pluiial. 
 iV. urbcs, cities 
 O. urbium, of cities 
 I), urbibus, to cities 
 A. urbis, cities 
 V. urbes, cities ! 
 A. urbi\)us, hy cities 
 
 N. Parens, a parent 
 G. ]mTvnt\ii, of a parent 
 D. parenti, to a parent 
 A. ])iirentcm, a parent 
 V. parens, O parent f 
 A. parenie, hy a parent 
 
 iV^. parentes, parents 
 G. parentium, of parents 
 D. Y>a.T* 'Titihiia, to parents 
 A. ivdn^nii», pare?it8 
 V. ])arentes, O parents \ 
 A. \}\\.ViiXi\:\h\\^,hy parents 
 
 N. Merx, a wife 
 G. mercis, of a ware 
 D. merci, to a ware 
 A. niercem, a icare 
 V. merx, icare ! 
 A. merce, by a ware 
 
 JV. merces, icarcs 
 G. iwi^xi^mm, of wares 
 J), niercibus, to wares 
 A. mercis, wares 
 V. merces, Orcares! 
 A. mercibus, hy wares 
 
 § 181. 0. It' tlie declensioii-stein of a noun terniinatos in two 
 consonants, the former of wliicb is a liquid, and tb(» latter a mute, 
 the true stem always is a vowel-stem. Stems of this kind gener- 
 ally drop the vowel-charaeteri«^tie / in the nominative singHilar, 
 and are then called lic|llid-lllllte stems. They also drop 
 the mutes t or d, preceduig the ending 6» (§ IGG), and blend the 
 mute c with this ending into x. 
 
 NOM. SING. 
 
 Urbs 
 
 iufans 
 
 cohors 
 
 glans 
 
 falx 
 
 arx 
 
 true stem. 
 
 urbi 
 
 infanti 
 
 cohorti 
 
 glandi 
 
 falci 
 
 arci 
 
 DECLENSION-STEM. 
 
 urb 
 
 infant 
 
 cohort 
 
 gland 
 
 laic 
 
 arc 
 
 GEN. SING. 
 
 urbis 
 
 infantis 
 
 cohortis 
 
 glandis 
 
 falcis 
 
 arcis 
 
 Rem 8. X. 7i and r are the only liquids, that may precede a T- or K- 
 mute in vowel-stems. The only liquid nmte siems with 1 -mutes 
 
 are uvhs and xtirps. . . -,..,, ^ j 
 
 Hence nouns ic/iose nominative-termination s is immediately preceded 
 
 hij I, 11, or r, oUcays helonr/ to the liquid-mute stems, which require th4 
 restoration of tlie dropped t-rmUe. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — VOWEL-STEMS. 
 
 139 
 
 § 18»i, 10. The nouns, belonging to this class, are declined 
 by attiicliing the case-terminations § 172 to the declension-stem. 
 The GENiTVE is formed by changing the termination s of the nom- 
 inative, if preceded by /, n, or r, into tis or dis, and final x into 
 els. 
 
 Rem. 9. The genitive in dis occurs only infrons (foliage), glans,juglanSf 
 and a few rarer nouns. The K-mute in liquid-mute stems can be o 
 only, not g. 
 
 § 186. 11. The Ifeilder of the liquid-mute stems is the 
 FEMININE. But mo9is^ 2)ons^ f<^^^i dens^ occidens^ orietis, 
 rudenSj torrens^ tridens are masculine, and anhnans is used in 
 all three genders. 
 
 IRREGULAR YOWEL-STEMS. 
 
 § 187. 12. Several nouns with vowel-stems assume the 
 regular nominative termination of one of the consonant-classes, 
 and are called irregular vowel-stems. Tlicy are the following: 
 
 1. With terminations of tlie R-class, in ber and ter : 
 Insuber, Ijris, m. an Insubrian uter, tris, m. a bag 
 
 imber, bris, m. a shoicer venter, tris, on. the stomacli^ 
 
 linter, tris,/. a boat belly 
 
 2. With the nominative of the N-class : c«ro, carnis (§ 149); 
 
 3. With nominatives of the S-class : glis^ c/llris, m. a dor- 
 mouse ; rnai<^ marls, a male ; 
 
 4. With nominatives of the T-class : Zi.s, Samnis. the civic 
 nouns in as^ dtis^ as Arpinas, and the pi. t. Qulrltes, opti- 
 mdtes and 'pendtes (§ 105) ; 
 
 5. With nominatives of the K-class : fauces, pl.t. (st. fauci) 
 /. throat, defiles ; nox^ iioctls, night (g 165) ; nix, 9iivis, f 
 snow. 
 
 All these nouns are declined by tlie case-terminations of the 
 vowel-stems (G. pi. Imbrlnni, llntruun, carnium^ inarium^ 
 nivium, dx\; Ace. jjI. inibrls, llntrls, cC'c.) 
 
 Rem. 10. The neuters joa and os, ossis, take the termination iin7i in the 
 g«'nitivo plural, but form the other cases like consonaut-stems (NOM 
 PLUR. j'ira and ossa). 
 
 Fraus forms the gen. pi. fraudam or fraudium. 
 
140 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — IRREGULAR STEMS. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — VOWEL-STEMS. 
 
 141 
 
 HIKEGULAU NOUNS AVITII CONSONANT-STEMS 
 
 § 1^8. 13. The followinp; nouns have irregular cliar. 
 sicteristicsi (§ 143, Rem. 3): 
 
 Sus, suis, c. g. (char, k), swine, hog, soic (G. pi. sK/mi, D. pL 
 ,^f(hi(s or snibus) ; 
 
 grns, gruis, c. g. (char, u), a crane (G. pi. f/nmm)] 
 
 l)os, 1)6 vis, c. g. (char, v), (oi ox, a steer, a coic, (G. pi. bourn, 
 D. & Abl. 1)1. biibus or bobas) ; 
 
 Jupl)itcr, Jo vis, (char, w), Jupittr, the supreme (jod. 
 
 § 1 89. 14. The following nouns have stems, not correspond- 
 ing to the forms of their nominatives : 
 
 Sanguis, inis, m. Uood cor, cordis, n. heart (§ 1G5) 
 
 pollis, inis, m. pollen lac, laciis, n. milk [without 
 
 plural) 
 
 seuex, senis, m. an old ma7i supellex, G. supcllectilis, f. 
 
 houseJiold-artides, a store 
 {without plural). 
 
 Sanguis, 2^ollis and senex have stems, belonging to the N- 
 class ; the stems of cor and lac belong to the T-class, and the 
 stem of supellex to the L-class. 
 
 All these nouns are declined with the cast-terminations of coo- 
 sonant-stems. 
 
 § 190. 15. TllfloC'1ilial>lC nouns are those whii^h have 
 the same form ui all their cases. The most usual of them are : 
 fas, nefas, name, instar and pondo. 
 
 Rem. 11. ^"-"^ fvnd nefas {rifjht and yrro////) aro csptvially used as pub- 
 DICATIVE nouns, witli impkksonal subjects {f(t« (\st,\X, is hiwful; 
 7iefas est, it is unlawful, it is a crime). They are used in nom., 
 ACC. and voc. siXG. only. Mtrne (morning), which occurs in the 
 NOM., ACC. and abl. sino., mostly is used as an advkub of tinio 
 {('((r/f/ in the mor/ti/if/). InMav (likenrys), occurring in NOM., acc. 
 and Voc. SING., generally is construed with an attributive genitive, 
 and answers to tlie English adjective and adverb like \montis iui*t<ir, 
 like a mountain). Poiulo (a pound) is used in nom., acc. and ABI. 
 of both numbers. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 {^T Write the following paradigms: Navis longa n long ship, nub(^ 
 atra a black cloud, raonlle pulchrum a btautifnl necklace, vectigal moles- 
 tuni a burdensome toll, stirps incognita an unknown lineage, ]X)n8 ligneus 
 
 I 
 
 a wooden bridge, falx ferrea nn iron sickle, linter auirusta a narrow boat, 
 sanguis vwheT red blood (in the singular), senex moribundus a dying old 
 man. 
 
 A. ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 Rkgo.ar vowel-class. 1. The small harvest of the Athenians. 3. 
 Tlie sight of a rare bird. 8. By the key of Theoddrus of 'Samos. 4. 
 The louiT ships of the Carthaginians {Gdrthaginbn>iix). 5. To the small 
 fliM't of the enemies {hosti.s). 0. The costly garment {obj.) of Xerxes. 7. 
 Hv a black sliet^.p. 8. To the Carthai^inians, the perpetual enemies of. 
 tlie Romans. 9. The 'solid ^'rafts of the K'lialcidians. 10. The ^remote 
 boundaries of Germany. . 11. The fertile valh'ys {ohj.) of the Alps. 12. 
 The **i^rass-bearin^ hills of Bneotia. 13. Worms, injurious to plants. 
 14. Bv the "iron lever of the mechanic. 15. Multitudes of small fishes. 
 10. By the perpetual fire of the ^Vestals. 17. By a high tower of the 
 enemies. 18. The llypanis (^>?>j.), a broad river of Sarmatia. 19. By the 
 »flaix-ship of the Macedonians. 20. The unpleasant thirst (ohj.) of the 
 soldiers. 21. By the great force of the winds. 22. By the extraordinary 
 '^'acuteness of i 'hunting-dogs. 23. The crimes (scrlus) of imi^ious young 
 men. 24. Tlie danijeroiis fever (ohj.) of the pr;rtor. 25. The sight of 
 the wond<^rful stren<>:th of Nero of '-Antium. 2G. By the great hunger 
 of the Athenians. 27. To the » incorruptible '^integrity of Aristides. 28. 
 The '-^heavv tax<'S of the citizens. 29. The secret '-^rooms of the ^'con- 
 spirators. *30. The ancient seats {ohj.) of the Saxons. 31. By the is.Egean 
 sea, full of renowni'd Islands. 32. By Ca^re, an old and renowned town 
 of Etruria. 33. Of the hmg walls [mtenia) of the Athenians. 34. A 
 '^marble temple (ohj. — aed<.<i)'of .Tuno. 35. The /golden house {obj. — aedea] 
 of Nero. 3<). By the month of ■-"•March, the beginning of spring. 
 
 1. Varronem'et Scjrvolam, Ciceronis a-(iualis. 2. Aniene, exiguo Latii 
 amne. 3. Ajuum Atticarum melle. 4. Acutis -'talpe auribus. 5. 
 F<rdam Julii Ca^saris c;edein. 0. Immensnp Persilrum classis excidium. 
 V. '■^-'Crinium humanorum ])ulchritudine. 8. Ciceronis familiarium epis- 
 lolfp. 9. Incerto vita' Inun'ana? fine. 10. IIunnd)alem atque Antiochum, 
 assiduos nominis Romani hostls. 11. Splendida Cleopatne regin?e navi. 
 12, Variis mensium Gr;ecorum nominibus. 13. Roma, orbis terrarum 
 domina. 14. Subitfi nubium -•'collectione. 15. Navis puppim, -^guber- 
 natoris sedcm. 10. Aur(M)S principum torquls. 17. Turrim ligneani, 
 oppuli UKPuibus perniciosam. 18. Immodica Sicili.e provinciae vecti- 
 galia. 19. Subita virium valetudinisque -^ defectione. 20. Invicta 
 juvenum Romanorum virtute. 
 
 LiQUiD-MiTK STE.MS. 1. The Commerce of His])alis. a prosperous city 
 of Spain. 2. The long stems {obj.) of pine-trei'S. 3. By the divine 
 lineage of Achilles. 4. 'To the pernicious defeat of the Vejentians. 5. 
 Bv the errors of the hunum mind {mens). 0. By the happy lot of the 
 
 » Belonging to Samns, Samins. a Solid, solidiis. 3 jiafl, ratis. ♦ Chalcidian, ^}^^]^\' 
 >nsis » /iVmrti*», reinolus. ^ Gra.<iK-hfarin(j,\\eTh\U'r. i Iron. O'fj. f^-TTi'ns. ^A Vestal, 
 ■fHtal virgin, [.riestess of Ve:*t;i. Vestaiis. » F'og-xliip, navis praetoria '" AcnUnfHX, 
 iQnien. '1 Ifinitiiig, venaticus. »" Antium forms the civic noun AntmH ^^ Incor- 
 tptihle. incorruptus. »■» /«^.-(/rjVv. inteiriitas. ^^ Ueary, molestus. i« /?oo»J, conclave. 
 
 den 
 
 v> 
 
 nijtt. . , „ . 
 
 1" ro?/«y///7//o/-. coniurutiis. »» ^.V^*///, .Kira-us. H' MarnionMi.-. i<' M<tr<'Ji. Martins. 
 «» Tr pa, (t mole. ^^ The word criiiis in the sijiiruhtr «leiiotes a singlk hair, and the 
 Kiifrlisli sincular hair, if it means a coli.egtion of hnirs. always must be translated by th« 
 I'LCRAi. of crinis. ^3 Collectio, a gatherinu. ^* Giibernator, a htlmstnan. ^5 Defectio. 
 a fiiilivg. 
 
142 
 
 THIRD DECLENSIO:^. — VOWEL-STEMS. 
 
 younfi: men {fKloJearen.i). 7. Tho nature of the hot sprinsfs of ('ani])ania 
 8. Bv the dark foliairc of the trees. 0. To tlie hiirh forelicad of (N'sar 
 10. Aeonis {<>hj.), tlie food of animals. 11. The volleys of the -''Pyrencar 
 mountains. \'l. The eompletc teeth {'>bj.) of children {infoiifa) l:}. By 
 Till' sudden death (//^>/^v) of tlu^ ])ar('nty. 14. The '-"handles of -"curved 
 sickles. 15. To a neii::hl)orin«( fortress of the enemies. 
 
 2. Adolescentium proborum lal>ores. 2. Artium mao:istri (master) 
 -Miplomate. 3. Mutua olientium "'im^ronoruinqne olHcia. 4 Sevrnnr^ 
 Socratis fronti. 5. Martem, Homuli Hemuiue i>atrem. ({. Mentis 
 ei^^reffi.-e testimonia. 7. Olymj)um et Ossam, altos Thessali.e montls. S. 
 lirnominiosJi Neronis principis morte. {). Exin^Uii? civium Romanorum 
 parti. 10. Exitioso SiTj)entium viro. 11. ^'Urbem Hoinani, «"tenmm 
 mairnitudinis humfinre inoiuimt'ntum. 
 
 Ihkhcu'i.au nol'Ns. Vowhl- .\nd toNsoNANT sti:ms. 1. The frt'cjuent 
 showers (o6/.) of •'-mountainous countries. 2. •'•'Milan, the ••^capital of the 
 Insuhrians. 3. The new boats (f/6y.) of -'^fishermen. 4. < J reat •'Swarms 
 of dormice. T). The «j^reat exi>enses of lawsuits. (5. By the -''defec- 
 tion of the '•'^inhabitants of Fiden;e. 7. The books of the .\ttic ni*j;^ht8. 
 8. The fre;iuent snows {<ff>J.) of the A1[)S. 0. To a lar<i^e drove {f/r<.v) of 
 swine. 10. Swine, •^^hateful to Venus. 11. The high (y/^r////^//,v) price of 
 ^"Melian cranes. 12. To Juno, Jupiter's consort. 13. By Jujnter, the 
 father of irod and men. 14. White steers (bt)f<) sacre(l to Apol'o and 
 Ju[)iter. l"). The ^'powerful necks of the oxen. 1(1. I>y a white cow 
 {bos, see § 197) of extraordinary ^-beauty. 17. 'I'o an ■''abundant store <.f 
 words. 18. By the cold blood of fishes. 10. By the authority of "^^capri- 
 cious old men. 
 
 B. SENTENCES. 
 
 1. Subita nuhium collectio imbrls ac tempestates "''^portendit. 2. "'•'Va- 
 tium Etruscorum ^"aui^uria celebrantur. 3. ^"^Lauri '''folia tussim leniunt 
 {to relieve). 4. Chelia Tiberim -"'tranare audet. .">. iiomanorum dux 
 Nea|K)lim, '''Chalcidensium coloniam, occupare statuit. 0. Xerxes Athenas 
 ^■^ferro et igni vastat. 7. Manilii. airricole iiomani, ovilia celebrantur. 
 8. Equos caicaribus ^■Voncitan solemus. 0. Mel apium labore eilicilur. 
 10. Suum carnem edere Judeis nefas videtur. U. Poi)ulus Komfinus 
 urbcm Romam CajntoliunKjue, deorum sedem. relinquere non vult. 12. 
 Siculi airros bubus arare solent. 13. C'ohortium Homanarum milites 
 hostium '^telis aut vulnerantur aut interficiuntur. 14. Populus Romanus 
 mentis externas bell is injustis vexiire non vult. 15. A civibus diliiy:! laus 
 ma^na est. 10. Agricola^ Italici segetes lalcil)us demetere solent. 17. 
 Et infantes et senes febri ^-'corripiuntur. 18. Spartani arcem Thebanam 
 
 >« Purenenn, Pyien»ii9. '^ jjnnflU. ca|>nlu9. '^ Canted, onrvii». " Diploma, a ffiplo- 
 ♦»ta. =**> Patrr)nus, a jxit/on. 3i The i)hraj*»i "<;<7y of Rome"' is traiis!alf«l l.y urhn Iio>n(i, 
 or urbs Rom'iim, not by Roma urhn. 32 3f<>u7if<iitiniiM. saltiiosim. 33 )/i/(i,i. Medli»- 
 Iftniun. 34 Capital, caput 35 J>'i.sk,=rman, \>\sciiUtr. 36 Snarm, {•xfmifn. 3^ D.-fi»' tio. 
 '<' FidcnM. 5'' Ilatffnl, invlsiis. ♦" Melian, Melicns. *> Pinrcrfnl, rohii'^tiis. <2 li'dut;/ 
 pnlchritiido. *' Ahuii'lant, co|>io-*n». ** Capricionx. moro-iis. *'•> I'ortciul.-n». in for ^. 
 OiHlfi. *« Our prainiiiars state, that f;f/f/'J» and sotne other nouns, besides tlios,> intntioned 
 Rem. 5, take nm, not »«m, in the «km. plur. Hut a refeiit. more ac<'iir,ite f.vaminatioti of 
 the best rnaiiuscripts shows, that vati^H is no r.\ceplioii in tlie formiition <»f tlic okn. PLni. 
 ^'Aiisntium, «ri anrtury. ** Laiirns, rr laurel-tree. <* Folium, a leaf ^o Tranan-, to croHA 
 hy xioimrnhig. *' Chalcidensis. a Chalcklian, an inhaldtant of Chilois *2 J<\rrum in 
 coordination with igiiin always is used instead of gladium. *3 Concitare, to urge. ** To* 
 lura, dart. ** Corripere, to seize. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — VOWEL-STEMS. 
 
 143 
 
 fraude occupant. 19. Morbi sangumem vnrisque consumereMd«itur. 
 20. Aquam co(iuere nive^iue ■^■«refrigerare ^eroms principis mventum 
 est 21 Fulvia.^'lnfortunata Antonii uxor, ab Attico, Ciceronis lamili 
 iiri" adjuvatur. 22. Milites fame ac siti hostls aggredi coguntur. 16. 
 Le«'nones Komanae montium fauces intrare mcipmnt. 
 
 1 The s^pleasures of the ears and eyes cannot be compared to the 
 weniovments of the mind (wex^). 2 We prefer '^'coarse bread to Melian 
 cranes ^Thasian nuts and «Iberian «\-hestnuts. 3. The citizens design 
 to surrender the fortress to the leader of the enemies. 4. Bad wares 
 seldom find a buver. 5. The mind seems to be a ^^enant of the body 
 6 The enemies are prevented by Fabius' legi.m from passing the -toot 
 of the mountains. 7. Theinist<x:les puts to flight and '■^ontsthenn^ 
 men^e fleet of X'^rxes. 8. The outer walls of the city are defended bs a 
 high tower. 9. The soldiers are afraid of crossing the river ^ i^urgis^ 
 10 The general p(^rmits the citizens to «'^repel force by orce 11. ihe 
 Consul emleavors to divide the strength of the enemies. ^^- The t,eachc>r 
 knows h.)w to «^'^inspire the minds ot the young men. 13. lo la^y 
 voutlis we must ^"apply the spurs. 14. The horsemen are compelled by 
 showers of bullets to' ^>find safety by flight. 15. The loot-soldiers are 
 able to cross the Tiber by boats. IG. The soldiers cross a aeepstreain 
 bv b^ --inflaTed bv air' 17. ^ Carrots relieve cough and cure '^gripee 
 and -!ickness of the liver. 18. Pyrrhus dtdivers the -guard ot the 
 ?^Tarentian castle to Milo. 19. The Roman leg ons '^invade the frontiers 
 ( ms) of the Macedonians. 20. Bees feed the chdd Hiero with ?.y) 
 honey 21. Demetrius dares to excuse the impi<ms murder ^* Ale^. 
 ander 22. Old men cannot have the strength ot young men. .3. 1 tie 
 Tnales of -fish excel the mah^s.in (/,/) weight. 24 A\ e will not pre er 
 the orivate rin-hts of the citizens to the public welfare. 2o. \\ e prettr 
 to t low ti:? authority of the Athenians. 26. T}.eUe.a. f the co^^ 
 fii)irators pre cut otl^ by tlie axe of the lictor. 2.. The leaders o tlie 
 SMarUin Miction Uh to' enter the city of Home by the -Sublician bridge. 
 9ft Pontius Telesinus the renowned leader ot the Samnitians. is an in- 
 vLrate enemy o the ^ name. 29. The ^ -'cold of the nights begins 
 
 to irunpleasiuit to tlie soldiers. 30. The -day-lightnings are ascribed 
 to Jupiuir and the ^■'night-lightnings to Sumanus. 31. The companions 
 of Ulysses devour the Sxen Si Apollo. 32. Immense flocks of sheep and 
 oxen are «^raised by the inhabitants of Arpinum. 
 
 irtA''b;u:,\dP.e if^nr- « b; Ibi; Wolve «..ctum,,,. .» to r.i.e, alere. 
 
14^1: 
 
 SYXOPSIB OF THE GEXDKR-RULES. 
 
 LESSON XXVIII. 
 
 SYXOrSIS OF THE GENDER-RULES. 
 
 § J 91 . 1. The GENDER of noniis, is dotcniiined diflerently, ac 
 cordiii<2: as they denote 1. persons, or 2. beasts, or 3. things with- 
 out LIFE. 
 
 The gender of persons and beasts is either masculine, feminine 
 or common, that of things either masculine, feminine or neuter. 
 
 GEXDER OF PERSONAL NOUNS. 
 
 » 
 
 § 19!i^. 2. Nouns denoting persons are either lliovalllc 
 or not. Movable nouns (§4, c. §41) are those, which indicate 
 the male and female sexes by different terminations of the same 
 stem. Movable are : 
 
 1. Most of the nomis of the second declension in us and er (see 
 
 §41); 
 
 2. Personal nouns of the third declension- in en (§ 153), which 
 form their feminines in via, as : 
 
 Flamen — flamina (fJie wife of a fldmen)-^ 
 tibicen — tibicina (a female fiutr-player) ; fidicen — fidi- 
 cina, &c. 
 
 3. Most personal nouns of the third declension in tor, which 
 form their feminines in trix, as : 
 
 Victor — victrix ulti»r — ultrix {a female aveuger) 
 
 praeceptor — pra3ceptrix adjutor — adjulrix (a female an- 
 
 sintaut). 
 
 4. Some single nouns of tlic tliinl decictision, as : rex — rey'uia ^ 
 nepos — neptls (a grand-daughter) ; /wspes — hosjuta. 
 
 § 19«l. 3. Personal nouns, not moval)]c, either denote a single 
 SEX, or are of eoiiiiiioii ;;eiiclei* (§142). 
 
 1. Tliose of the first and second declensions denote single 
 SEXES (§ 142). 
 
 2. Those of the third declension with liquid stems in /, o, er, 
 or, in\ generally denote single sexes (masculines : eonsul^ priedo, 
 hidrio, caupo, pater, f rater, augur ; feminines : mater, mulier, 
 uxor, soror ; but exsul and fur c. g.) ; 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE GENDER-EULES. 
 
 145 
 
 3. Those with mute and vowel stems generally are of common 
 gender {civis, infans^ ;x/r6?z5, comes, /teres, prceses, sacerdos, 
 du.r, d'c.), except thof^e, denoting occupations, belonging to males, 
 as miles, eques, judex, etc., and those mentioned § 192, 4. 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS, DENOTING BEASTS. 
 
 § 194. 4. Names of beasts -(including bu'ds, reptiles, &c.), 
 are either epicene, or movable, or of common gender. '^ 
 
 § 195. o. KpicoilC are those names of beasts, which for 
 BOTH SEXES liavc tlic samc gender. These are treated, as if they 
 were things without life, their gender, without any distinction of 
 tlieir SEX, being solely determined by the termination of the 
 WORD. Thus accipiter, draco, lepu.% passer, jnscls, vermis, md- 
 iiir, are masculine, and ans,feles, Umax, ovis, vulpes, feminine. 
 Names of beasts generalh/ are epicene. 
 
 § 190. 6. liovable are for the most part the names of 
 beasts of the second declension, as : 
 Asinus— asina, /w- and she-ass 
 
 cervus — cerva, stag and hind 
 
 mulus — mula, he- and she- 
 mule. 
 gallus— gallina, cock and 
 hpn, &c. 
 
 Movable names of beasts generally are masculine, if their sex 
 is not distinguished. Else they assume the gender according to 
 
 their sex. 
 
 Rt^-m 1 This rule is not alwavs observed, as in columhvs — columha (he- 
 and she-dove> where the feiiiinim' eolnmhi is used for doves without 
 distinction of sex. Thus the two forms siimm—simln (ai)e), lacertus 
 —larertn (lizard) are promisruofhsh/ used, in order to designate apes 
 and lizards witliout distinction of sex. although in both instances 
 the use of the fomininr forms is prevailing. 
 
 i^ 197. 7. Of COIIIIBIOII gender are the following names 
 of beasts : . 
 
 anguis, a snnke 
 
 anset. a goose or gander 
 
 l-os, an or, steer or cow 
 
 canis, a dog 
 
 ^ama, (1st decl.), a fallow-deer 
 
 grus, a crane 
 
 palumbes, a wild pigeon 
 
 } 
 
 a snake 
 
 seps 
 
 serpens ^ 
 
 sus, a hog, a sow ^ 
 
 talpa (1st decl.), a mots 
 
 tigris, a tiger 
 
UQ 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE GENDER-RULES. 
 
 They are thus treated : 
 
 1. If their sex is 7iot distinguished, a?iser and bos are mascu- 
 line, ms and (/rits feminine, and tlie others are used promiscu- 
 ously in either gender. 
 
 2. If their sex is distinguished, tliey all assume the gender, 
 corresponding to their sexes. 
 
 GENDER OF X0UX9, DENOTING THINGS. 
 
 § 198. Rule I. Nouns, denoting rivers of the third declension, 
 
 are masculine. 
 
 Ilein. 2. The general rules which our c^rammars contain about the gen- 
 der of cities», countries, winds, geuis, mountains, &c., have no foun- 
 dation in truth. 
 
 § 199. Rule II. Indeclinable nouns are neuter. 
 
 § ?200. Rule III. Nouns of the 1st and 5th (see L. XXXI.) 
 declensions are feminine, except the Gallic rivers in a of the 1st, 
 and the nouns dies and meridies of the 5th declension, which are 
 masculine. 
 Rem. 3. Dies in the singular sometimes is feminine. 
 
 § 5501. Rule IV. Nouns of the 2d and 4th (L. XXX.) de- 
 clensions in us are masculine, and those of the 2d in urn, and of 
 the 4th in u are neuter, except the names of cities, trees and 
 4 countries in tm, and the nouns rdvKS, ro//^s^ hfnnus, rannus, 
 domiis ; — aeus, manus, portfcHs, tribus, Idds, which are fem- 
 inine. Vidgus^ virus and pelagus are neuter. 
 
 § ^O'i. Rule V. Nouns of the 3d declension in es with gen- 
 itives in tls and dls, and those in o, oi\ and os, are masculine. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 1. In es (GEN. ^/s or ff i«) : Seges, teges, quus, mcrces, and compes are 
 
 feminine. . u 4. I 
 
 2 In o : Caro and nouns in do. qo and lo are feminine. lUit ordo 
 
 car'do, nun-go, lign, p>f,!/io, 'septtutrio, •'papUio, '^cipi», ce.y>ertuio, uud 
 
 harnoQo, are masculine. 
 
 3: In or: Arbor is feminine, and ador, aequor, marmor, cor are 
 
 4. In os: Cos and dos are feminine; o!^, oris, and os, ossis, are 
 weuter. 
 
 » The north. 'A butterfly. »A staff. «A bat 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF COMXON GENDER. 
 
 147 
 
 § S03. Rule YI. Nouns, terminating^ in as, aiis, x, es with the 
 genitive is, and 6-, preceded by a consonant, are feminine. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1. In as: As, assis. is masculine, and ms, vasis, neuter. 
 
 2. In x: FornLv, ^caH.r and those in fx are masculine, except the 
 feminines lex, n^.r, sitpdlcv, \f(iex and tht; pi. t. preces. 
 
 3. Ill s, preceded by a coiisonant : Ad"ps, foiis, mans, pons, dens, 
 oriens, occidens, tridens and torrens are masculine. 
 
 § •-J04. Rule VII. Nr>uns in is are partly (about half) mascu- 
 line, partly feminine. The masculines are sanffuls, clnis, poll is, 
 pulcis, lapis, and those, enumerated § 181. The rest are femi- 
 nine. 
 
 § S05. Rule YIII. Nouns of the 3d declension in e, /, n, ar,er, 
 ur, us, the sin^i^le nouns aes, caput, lac, and the nouns, taken 
 from the Greek, in ma are neuter. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1. In 1 : Sol, and the plural of sal are masculine. 
 
 2. In II : Pecten, lien (milt) and the pi. t. renes are masculine. ^ 
 
 3. In <»r: A'n\ agger, asser, career, gibber, later, vesper, vomer, iinber, 
 uter, renter are masculine. Linter is feminine. 
 
 4. In IIS : Tr/h(s, (J. telluris (oarth), and all those, having genitives in 
 fin and (lis (^ 107), are feminine. 
 
 Rem. 4. Ei)irene names of beasts, which according to their termina- 
 tions would be neuter, as vultiir, turtur, &c., always are of mas- 
 culine gender. 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF COMMON GENDER. 
 
 t^ See IX. of the Vocabularies. 
 
 ? 206. 1. The adjectives of common gender attach the case- 
 terminations of the THIRD DECLENSION to tlicir stcms. They are 
 (»f ''common r/ender,^^ because they are not movable, assuming 
 the same terminations in the masculine and feminine genders in 
 their inflection. 
 
 •A cap. •Sediment, dreffs. 
 
148 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF COMMON GENDER. 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH VOWEL-STEMS. 
 
 § 207. 2. Tlieso adjectives attach the following case-termina* 
 tions to their stems : 
 
 Singular. Plukai.. 
 
 N". is, s, Neut. €, or like Mascu-' JV. cs, Neut. ta 
 
 line 
 G. is 
 D. i 
 
 A. em, Neut. like Noiii. 
 V. like Nom. 
 A. i 
 
 G. hnn 
 
 JD. ^tbus 
 
 A. 2s, Neut. 7/t 
 
 V. like Nora. 
 
 A. like Diit. 
 
 Hera. 1. Comparinf^ these case-torminations with tliose of nouns with 
 vowel-stems, the principal ditfenMU't's appear to be 1. that the ACC. 
 SINC. of the ADJECTIVKS never has the tenuiaution /;//., and 2. that 
 their abl. sing, alicays has the termination t. 
 
 § 208. 3. We distiiisjcuish four classes of adjectives with vowel' 
 stems, which are represented by the following paradigms* : 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Ma-'-c. <f' Fe/n. 
 
 Xt uter. 
 
 
 Ma.^>\ d' J' tin. 
 
 X-^ottf. 
 
 N. 
 
 Dulcis 
 
 dulce 
 
 N. 
 
 Didccs 
 
 dulcia 
 
 G. 
 
 dulcis 
 
 dulcis 
 
 G. 
 
 duh'ium 
 
 dulci um 
 
 1). 
 
 dulci 
 
 dulci 
 
 J). 
 
 dulcihus 
 
 dulcihus 
 
 A. 
 
 dulcem 
 
 dulce 
 
 A. 
 
 dulcis 
 
 dulcia 
 
 A. 
 
 dulci 
 
 dulci 
 
 A. 
 
 dulcihus 
 
 dulcihus 
 
 
 Jf<i.9c. it Fern. 
 
 Nenifir. 
 
 
 Miific. tfe Ffm, 
 
 N^utfr. 
 
 N. 
 
 Acer m. acris/. 
 
 acre 
 
 N. 
 
 Acri'S 
 
 acria 
 
 G. 
 
 acris 
 
 acris 
 
 G. 
 
 acrium 
 
 acrium 
 
 D. 
 
 acri 
 
 acri 
 
 D. 
 
 acri bus 
 
 acribus 
 
 A. 
 
 acrem 
 
 acre 
 
 A. 
 
 acrTs 
 
 acria 
 
 A. 
 
 acri 
 
 acri 
 
 A. 
 
 acribus 
 
 acribus 
 
 
 Ma lie. d: Fern. 
 
 Nfiiiifr. 
 
 
 J/dsc. if- Frtn. 
 
 Ki'ulfr. 
 
 N. 
 
 Sapiens 
 
 sapiens 
 
 N. 
 
 Sapientcs 
 
 sapientia 
 
 G. 
 
 sapicntis 
 
 sainentis 
 
 G. 
 
 sapient ium 
 
 8a])i('ntium 
 
 D. 
 
 sapienti ' 
 
 sapienti 
 
 I). 
 
 sapientibus 
 
 sa}>ientibu8 
 
 A. 
 
 sapientem 
 
 sapiens 
 
 A. 
 
 sai)ientls 
 
 sapientia 
 
 A. 
 
 sapienti 
 
 sapienti 
 
 A. 
 
 sapientibus 
 
 sapientibuR 
 
 * In this and all tlie following paradigms the Vocative, being like the Noininatlv«, 
 will be u?iiilte(i. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF COMMON GENDER. 
 
 149 
 
 singular. 
 
 Mane. & F^m. Neuter. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 A. 
 
 Audax 
 
 audacis 
 
 audiici 
 
 audficem 
 
 audaci 
 
 audax 
 
 audacis 
 
 audiici 
 
 audax 
 
 audaci 
 
 PLURAL. 
 Masc. dc Fern. 
 N. Audiices 
 G. audacium 
 D. audacibus 
 A. audacis 
 A. audacibus 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 audacia 
 
 adacium 
 
 audacibus 
 
 audacia 
 
 audacibus 
 
 8 209. I CLASS : Adjectives in i^, all of which have 
 vowel-stems. They have a sei>arate form for the neuter gender 
 in e which letter is substituted for the masculine tei-mination is. 
 For havino- a different nominative of the neuter they generally are 
 called adjc dives of two tt liiiiiuitioiis. They are 
 inllected after the paradigm dulcis. ^ , , . 
 
 S •JIO. II CLASS K-stemt^of «H addecBen- 
 sion, consisting of the adjective j^^c//' and the foUowmg m er : 
 
 acer 
 alacer 
 
 campester 
 celeber 
 
 celer paluster puter (putrid) 
 
 ecpiester pedester volucer 
 
 and the national adjective Lisuber. They properly belong to the 
 first class, but drop, analo.^ous to the R-stems of the 2d declen- 
 sion (Lesson X.), their termination Is in the nominative singular 
 of the masculine, retaining it in the feminine, and assummg m 
 the NEUTER the termination e. Only par drops everywhere the 
 termination is and e of the nominative. 
 
 Kom o These adicctivcs are declined like ac.r, by dropping the « before r 
 ^' ex'^em y.r, wbi'h retains the e throu.dtout, ibrrnn.j, the ^ett. i^ur. m 
 wu!uot i.nn. The con.pounds oi' par {compar, impar) have the gen. 
 
 E^m 2 3 13)'; calupestris locus (Colum. 3, 13); equestns <um«te (L.v. 
 27, 1). ' 
 
 R «11. III. CLASS: Liqilid-miltos, terminating in 
 ••« •md r*. They form tlioir irdi'tives in ntis and rtis, as 
 ".son., G. )nsontis, expers, G. expertls. Only the con.pon.uls 
 7Z\co„eors, vecors) form the genitive in d>s {concord >s, 
 vecordis). They are declined like the paradigm sapieM. 
 
150 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF COMMON GENDER. 
 
 § 912 IV. CLASS : Adjectives in a\, OX, i\ and a», 
 
 with genitives in ucis^ ocis^ ids and alls, as : saf/ax, sagacis, /e- 
 liXy fellcis, velox, velocis (see the paradigm andax). Those in as 
 consist in the civic adjectives of this termination, which have the 
 same form and declension, as the civic nouns in as (§187, 4), 
 except that thej form their abl. sing, in i. To this class also 
 belong the adjectives locuples, G. locupletls, and simplex, G. 
 simpHeh, the other adjectives in es and ex having consonant-stems. 
 § 313. The adjectives of the 3d and 4th classes have the 
 same form for all three genders in the nominative singnlar, and 
 hence generally are called adjertive!«» Of'oiie terillilia- 
 
 tioii. 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH COXSOXAXT-STEMS. 
 
 § 914. Vocabulary. 
 
 Anceps, G. ancipitis, twofold, doubt- 
 ful, critical 
 
 biceps, bicipitis, having two heads 
 
 bipes, bipedis, two-footed 
 
 caplebs. ca'libis, unmarried 
 
 cicur, Tirifi, tame 
 
 compos, dtis, havirif/ control over 
 
 degener, eri.% d< generate 
 
 deses, dt-sidis, indolent, slothful 
 
 dives, it is, rich 
 
 liebes, etis, dull 
 
 iramemor, dris, unmindful 
 
 impubes, eris, being under 14 years, 
 yonthful 
 
 inops, dpis, helpless 
 
 memor, oris, mindful 
 
 particeps, cXpis, partaking, paHid 
 
 paling 
 pauper, tris, poor 
 
 pr.TC«'])s, pr-rcepitip, steep, headlong 
 princt'ps, //>/.v, principal 
 pubt's, pubr-ris — S-class — adult 
 redux, rcdilciiji, returned 
 Bospes, "itix, seife, sound and safe, ui^ 
 
 hurt 
 8uperst«'s. Itix, surviving 
 supplex, iciK, st'bmi^'<Kice, suppliant 
 teres, Ptis, tcell rounded, smooth 
 irux, triicis, grim, fierce, savage 
 uber, tris, rich (of TniNOs). 
 versicolor, oris, party-colored 
 vetus, tris — S-clase - old 
 vigil, His, ^catchful 
 
 
 
 § 3I.>. 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 PL U RAT.. 
 
 
 
 Ma^o. & Fern. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 
 Mafic. <£■ Fern. 
 
 XeuUr. 
 
 N 
 
 Vetus 
 
 vetus 
 
 N. 
 
 Vetcres 
 
 Vetera 
 
 G. 
 
 veteria 
 
 veteris 
 
 G. 
 
 veteruin 
 
 veterum 
 
 D. 
 
 veteri 
 
 veteri 
 
 D. 
 
 veteribus 
 
 veteribus 
 
 A. 
 
 veterera 
 
 vetus 
 
 A. 
 
 voteres 
 
 Vetera 
 
 A. 
 
 vetere 
 
 vetere 
 
 A. 
 
 veteribus 
 
 veteribus 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF COMMON GENDER. 
 
 151 
 
 SFNGULAR. 
 Mafic. <fe Fen}. Neuter. 
 
 N. Dives 
 G. divitis 
 
 D. diviti Wanting. 
 
 A. divitem 
 A. divite 
 
 PLURAL. 
 M(V*c. «& Fern. 
 N. Divites 
 G. divitum 
 D. divitibus 
 A. divites 
 A. divitibus 
 
 Neuter, 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 S S I O. 4. Adjectives with consonant-stems take the case- 
 terminations of NOUNS with consonant-stems (§ 145). Bat those 
 in ceps and ;:>te take the terminations e and i promiscuously 
 in the ABL. SING. They form, with the exception of a few, no 
 NEUTER GENDER, which, whcrc It occurs, has the same form as the 
 masculine and feminine in nom. sing. Their genitives are formed 
 like those of nouns with the same terminations, the same classes 
 being distinguished in both. Only adjectives of the N-class do 
 not exist. 
 
 Rem. 3. Vigil forms tlie ablative in i, when it is used as an adjective, 
 but in e, when it is used as a noun. 
 
 § 317. 5. Only the following adjectives with consonant- 
 Btems form the neuter gender : Vetus, hehes, and those in 
 ceps with the genitive cipitis. Veins has regularly Vetera, 
 but the other neuters form their nom. plur. in «a, the genitive 
 liaviriir tlie regular termination um. 
 
 § 218. 0. Indeclinable are: fnieii (virtuous, temperate, 
 wodhy), and nequam (wicked), as : homo frugl, G. homirii^ 
 frugi, etc. 
 
 Item 4. The indeclinable adjectives mces^e, satis, and prtesto (present, at 
 hand , arc used onlv p^tiict.tireh,. Pn,sto esse ^nh dative means to 
 wait on somebody,' as : Gajo proe^to est, he waits on Gajus. 
 
 ADVERBS OF MANNER, FORMED FROM ADJEC- 
 TIVES OF COMMON GENDER. 
 8 ofO Oidy adjectives w^ith vowel-stems form adverbs. 
 Thesrattach the termination ter to their vowel-stems, or— which 
 is the same — iter to their declension-st;>ms, as : 
 
 nrer-ieriter coler-ceh'riter fortis-fortiter par-pariter 
 
 wTs-ireWter felix-feliciter gravis-graviter velox-velociter, 
 
 Rem. 5. Of adjunctives with consonant-stems m^^Tior only forms a» 
 s^dyerh—intmoriter [from memory]. 
 
152 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF COMMON GENDER. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF COMMON GENDER. 
 
 153 
 
 § 220» Adverbs from adjectives with liquid-mute steins are 
 formed by substituting tlie termiuatiou fer for the ending .s of tlie 
 nominative, as : 
 
 dilio^ens— dil i i,^('nter clci^^ans— el« '<,^an t(-r solcrs— solt'rt» r. 
 
 Hem. G. Amhtx forms a^idncter or amhicitcr, and diffit-iUs—diifiruHcr 
 Of friei/ Li, fiuhllfnis, and Umpnnix tho accusative nkuteu sini,ailar ig 
 used with tlie force of an adverb— /};/7'A', si/bllme, H/npr/ne. 
 
 Hem. 7. A few movable adjectives form advt-rbs by the termination ter 
 
 ovttrr, as: fntudnlciitu.^—fr'audiilcntir, '•^nnrus — navitcr, fir^/ixa 
 
 Jiff niter, h umd n us — h uma/Uter, ^inh n ma n >(s — i/i h u ma n ite r. Ha vn k,s 
 
 largiter. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Bt^ Decline the following phras<s hif (jldn<i the nominative ana 
 
 ABLATIVE SINGULAR, and GENITIVE and ACCUSATIVE PLUKAL //i 
 
 Latin : 
 
 1. A short letter. 2. A irre(m tree. 3. A difficult undertaking. 
 A noble deed. o. A quick (nlrr) messenpT. 0. A (luick ship °7 
 quick help. 8. A sharp battle. 9. A violent (arer) hatred. 10 
 populous city. 11. A frequented place. 12. An eipiestrian statue. 
 
 4. 
 A 
 A 
 
 13. 
 
 The cheerful breast. 14. A mort^al wound, lo. ''The Cannean battle. 
 16. The Insubrian forest. 17. A vulpir oi)iiiion. IS. A diliirent be'nn- 
 ner. 10. An enormous evil. 20. A sluugish mechanic. 21. 'i'he har- 
 monious plebs. 22. An inircnious ])lan. 23. A sa^-jicious animal 24 
 An unhappy race. 25. A precocious "intellect. 20. An ecpial danger! 
 27. An unequal ^contest. 2S. A critical journev. 21). An old ima«>-e 
 30. An old town. 31. A dull knife. 32. An ilnmindful friend. "33" 
 An adult daughter. 34. A returned prisoner. 3."i. The <:-eneral, souml 
 and safe. 30. A surviving s(ddier. 37. The suppliant accused. ' 38 A 
 fierce eye. 
 
 A. ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 1. To a man, ignorant ie.vpcr.f) of ''literature. 2. Bv a dissimilar 
 'VJiaracter. 3. By the simple character {untnnt) of the jxH-m. 4. Of 
 the steej) mountains of Thessalia. 5, By the district of "Capr-na. 0. 
 The lands of wealthy (/<><• ?/p/r«) citizens. '7. By a rich (/'/^' //;>/<>) dinner 
 8. The green meadows of Ireland. !). The stom'achs of voracious animals. 
 10. To the unhapi)y condition of sad old men. 11. Bv the prudent 
 questions of the pnetor. 12. Tht; i)resent i)lans of the' chief, useh'ss 
 {inutilis) to the state. 13. By the insolent answer of the centurion. 14. 
 By a youni? man, similar to the emperor Nero. l.Ti. The puerile under- 
 takings of the '-Megarians. 1(1. Old (r<f/.v) and illustrious names. 17. 
 By the '•■Syl)arites, a de^^enerate ]).'ople. IS. Of the rich iuhrr) harvests 
 of the inhabitants of Arplnum. ID. By a man. unmindful of benefits 
 20. Of the i)arty-c()lored o^arnients of the iVrsians. 21. Bequests of 
 unmarried old men. 22. To the small number of survivin<r enemies 
 
 1 Impunis, unpuniHked. 2 Impnn*', with impunitii. 3 Navus, active biisi/ * T„. 
 
 ^um.itms tiihuman. ^ h^rans, plentif,d, tihun<l(int,'v.opioao. « <^a/i»^,i», Cannensia 
 
 InMlect^xn^emnm. « r7r>«^^.V. cert amen. '•♦ Litter». ^'^ Indolen. ^^ Belonaina t^ 
 
 23 The '-«defalcations of rich '^bankers. 24. By the consul, '%afe and 
 ^"unhurt. 25. Bv a dull ^^understanding, the punishment of angry Jupi 
 ter 20 The civil wars of the Piomans, fatal to an incredible nuiltitude 
 of citizens. 27. Massilia, a i)opuloris city of Oaul. 28. By the unhappy 
 i^fickleness of Alcibiades. 20. By the short marches of the soldiers ol 
 Scipio. 30. To the innumerable hardships of the -^Vejentian siege. 
 
 B. SENTENCES. 
 
 1. Genus mortille undis delere Jovi placet. 2. Animalia celeria pedi- 
 bus f^racilibus '■^'cognoscuntur. 3. Initium semper difficile^ est. 4> 
 s-Utiritatem privatam salfiti i)ublicaB anteponere turpe est. 5. Consul 
 hostis clade iugenti rejiellit. 0. Kecentia mercium pretia ingentia esse 
 videntur. 7. Scrij^torum veterum opera admirabilia sunt. 8. Coloria 
 ni"Ti civium jura -' Tespicere -'-'par esse videtur. 9. Platoni ac Socrati 
 parem aut similem esse difficile est. 10. Beneficiorum immemorem esse 
 animi inirrati document um est. 11. Nunc supplicem fieri necesse est. 
 12. Leo-es salutaris ac ])atria? utilTs mutare noli;mus. 13. Dolorem 
 s^fufc^re et "^S-olu])tatem petere h(miinibus atcpie animalibus commune 
 est.^ 14. Sermonis Latlni rudem esse turi)evidr'tur. 15. Milites periculo 
 ancii)iti '-'premuntur. 1(5. Leges Komnn.T aetatem impuberern tuentur. 
 17. Populus Ronianus paiiperibus Mummii filiabus doti'in donare consti- 
 tuit. IS. Sententias Latlnas -^recte -"'convertere discipido, regularum 
 verborumque immemori, dillicile esse soh't. 
 
 1. It is better to l)e diligent. 2. It is preferable to be unmarried. 3. 
 It delights Cesar to be merciful. 4. We do not wish to seem absent. 5. 
 Thi' la'bors of the committee of two seem to be dilRcult. 0. (ircat pains 
 usually are short. 7. The wounds of the centurion seem fatal. 8. The 
 minds of the bovs seem to become dull. 0. It delights the soldiers to 
 he partaking of the bootv. 10. The citizens are compelled by -^"necessity 
 to be haruKmious. 11. The consul directs the ambassadors to be grave 
 and prudent. 12. The queen is j .revented by the king from being liberal. 
 
 13. It is a crime {uefas) to plunder the temples of the immortal ^ods. 
 
 14. It is praiseworthV to reswct the authority of old men. 15. It is 
 cruel (f'/v/^Zc/w) and atrocious to kill unarmed andsui)pliant enemies. 10. 
 The senators present to the returned soldiers the citizenship. 17. The 
 adult sons of Sempronius retain the =^i possession of the ])aternal country- 
 seat. IS. The cliildren of jMior citizens generally are educated 3^vithout 
 c.nni^ensation. 19. It is usi'less to free a degenerate people. 20. The 
 l)aiiis of the brave soldiers are ^^^taken away by a quick death. 21. 1 hou 
 canst not "^raise the svmpatliy of men by unmanly wailin<xs. - 22. Fire 
 and water are useful to men : but still they can become terrible. 23. 
 ]. Sulla compels Mithridfites by a 'successful war to=^''suefor conditions 
 of peace. 24. It is difficult to convince dull and •^•stubborn men. 25. 
 
 1-^ liicolinni."^. ^^ Vn<Jfir.<ifa7}ding^ ratio. 
 
 Utilita-s 
 
 to seek, j)etere. ^7 Periiiiax. 
 
154 
 
 FOCUTIl AND FIFTH DECLENSIONS. 
 
 Gajiis is prevented from beini]: present l)y serious wounds, and Sem 
 prouius by the sad dt-ath of a brother. 
 
 C. rilRASES AVITII ADVKKBS. 
 
 1. The soldiers fi<::ht bravely and •''*spiritt'dly. 2. It always is expedi. 
 ent to live ^'^coniforniably to nature. Ji. I '^•'willinuly follow the opinion 
 and advice of the chief 4. The conditions of ])eace are •*'hesitatin;<rly 
 acc(q)ted by the tccn<'ral.. 5. You nius. treat the unfortunate prisoners 
 mildly (/<>//.-<) and kindly. G. The scholars of Gajus botli write and s])eak 
 correctly and "''ele<>antly. 7. The consid is tn-aled insolrntly by tlie 
 leaders of the sohliers, 8. The tribune Flavins ■^■^n^i rates the •'Vi^i'^rian 
 law •*'actively and vehemently, i). Sempronius nnswers sharply and 
 '^•^liercely. 10. Cicero -^'shows "^^briefly and ^''forcibly the falhu-iis of 
 Epicurus. 11. It is disnrraceful to treat prisoners inhumanly. VI. The 
 scholars seem to understand easily the orations of Cicero. Kj. Theo 
 jKnnpus seems to think similarly, but h-e sj)eaks ^"diliereutly. 14. To 
 Bi)eak wisely is easy, but to act wisely is ditlicult. 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 FOURTH AND FIFTH DECLEXSIONS AXD COM 
 
 POUND NOUNS. 
 
 FOURTH Di:CLENSION. 
 
 See Vocabidaries IV and VI, 4. 
 
 § 391. 1. To the 4th deeloiision belong all nouns with th<^ 
 characteristic u^ except gnis and sus. The nominative tcrminatea 
 in lis for the mascidine and feminine, and in }i for the neuter. 
 The case-terminations are formed by blend inu- the eharacteri.stic u 
 with the endings of the third declension [§ 145] according to the 
 following scheme : 
 
 Singular. 
 N. ?/«, Neut. u 
 G. \LS, Neuters u (/kv?) 
 D. ui or ?/, Neut. alucays u 
 A. um, Neut. u 
 V. like Nom. 
 A. u 
 
 Plukal. 
 
 N. us, Neut. aa 
 
 G. uum 
 
 D. y/>?/.y (sometimes ubus) 
 
 ■ t like Nom. 
 A. like Dat. 
 
 '<* SpirU^tJ, aoer. 3» Conforr)itthl*>. convt'nicns <» Willing. Wn-n-^. <» Ihxitnting 
 cnnctans. *' EUijaut, elecaiis. '«3 To agitntf, agitSri'. ■•* Aijinrian. airr iiius. •*' Ao 
 tire, tiavn». *« Fierce, ferox. ♦^ Detegcre. <* B^ief, brevis. <» bigiiiticans. »« IHfer 
 eat, contiarius. 
 
 rOURTII AND FIFTH DECLENSIONS. 
 
 155 
 
 Rom 1 The nouns in us are masculine, excei)t the feminines acus 
 .</;/;dc>rn .?;..., purtirns, tribus, the pi. t. 10..., the names oi 
 TREEsfas ,.;.;..., fir. I and the female personal nouns anus, nurm 
 and sJcril The only 5 neuters of this declension are : 
 
 cornu, a hora gelu, frod veru, a spit 
 
 genu, a knee pecu, cattle 
 
 art- iNDK.n.iNABi.K in »ht> sin<rul:ir. But af>'»"t -^ "tn VL rFS sing wl.i.-h ac-crd- 
 .nHr.an <lecl -n-l this ^Vr'-'^Vll^^^rS ^l":.if: U 1 in'u^ ^l^T^Aul^er gran.- 
 Inirto i.isopinmn in «''f /•'='-^'^'^-' /'^.^./^l '"'^^^^^^^ which are hrouirh. tbrWHnl. 
 
 to M.s.ain this vi.w. ur.- l.y no "'f '"'^.^^'•"f ^'^'^^ mvn v . ''p o./fs to h. imfoiin.l^ 
 rihi: ;^;^r n::;n;r r 'cl^e hj;^' the^-;;;; " ^J^^^ot-Litated, to re^tore the 
 parailigm "of tlie 4th declension to its ancient nghu 
 
 Singular. 
 N. Fructus 
 G. fructus 
 D. fructui or fructu 
 A. fr lie turn 
 A. fructa 
 
 § 22*2. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fructus 
 
 fructuuni 
 
 fructibus 
 
 fructiis 
 
 fructibus 
 
 Paradigms. 
 Singular. 
 N. Cornu 
 G. cornu 
 D. cornu 
 A. cornu 
 A. cornu 
 
 Plural. 
 
 cornua 
 corn uum 
 cornibus 
 cornua 
 cornibus 
 
 Rem *> Th(^ nouns (lomns and cohi^ in some of their cases are declined after 
 th^ 4 and in 6<mie after the 2d declension. Donni. m good prose 
 fornis the ABLATIVE singular ahrai/s, the genitive i'LUKAL g,ne- 
 rXamUi i accusative plural /,vv../.^/v after the 2d declension 
 - ol^V^innniw, domos. The other cases foUow the4th declension^^ 
 St' is declined in the same way ; but some ol its cases do not 
 
 KemTfirthe'foUowing nouns the dative and .U.LATIVE PLURAL are 
 fiinncd ill iihux, instead ot "thus: 
 
 acii areas; U.cus, partus, pecu, specus, tribus and the pi. t. artus. 
 
 Poiiiis has 75'/.v or ubus. . ^ •, e ^i,^ 
 
 T?em 4 it often is ditticiilt for be-inners to distinguish the nouns of the 
 otand 4 h d'^h-nsions, both terminating in .. in the nominative. 
 F or ^his iipose the student should accurately commit the nouns 
 IV a V 4 of the Vocabularies, among which all concretes in m 
 of til s declension are found. As for the abstracts in lis, they in^ 
 ^L-tV 'v™ to the 4th declension, when they terminate msus. 
 f^roVL.; those with other terminations belong to the second. 
 
 FIFTH DECLENSION. 
 
 1^;^ See Vocabularies V. 
 ^ 2tJ3. 2. The nouns of the 5th declension have the charac- 
 teristi^'i their nominative terminutina in es, for which, in decli- 
 ning, the case-termi nations of the following scheme are substituted; 
 
 » Tolle 7ne. mi, inn. min. 
 Si declinare doinus vis. 
 
156 
 
 COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 SlNGITLAR. 
 N. e6 
 Q. ei 
 D. ei 
 A. em 
 V. es 
 A. 6 
 
 Singular. 
 N. Dies 
 Q. diei 
 D. dim 
 A. diem 
 A. die 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. es 
 G. eriitn 
 D. thus 
 A. es 
 V. es 
 A. thus 
 
 § ^^1. PARADIG>r. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. Dies 
 G. dlrrum 
 D. diebus 
 A. dies 
 A. dirbus 
 
 § 3^5. 3. The gexdfr of nouns of the otli declension is the 
 FEMININE, the masculines dies and rnerkUes excepted. ]>iit the 
 siiii»-ular of dies sometimes is used as a feminine, especially if de- 
 notinir an appointed day, or a term. 
 
 § tJ90. The QUANTITY of the vowel e in the case-termination 
 is loiKj; but it is short in the j^enitivc and dative sin^. o{ fides ^ 
 plehes, res and S2)es, the oidy four nouns of this declension, in 
 which a consonant precedes the termination ei<. 
 
 Rem. 1. Pronounce tliorofore fdei, plehn, not 1id~''i, p^eb~'i. 
 
 Rem. 2. The nouns of the otli d«"clension <renerallv lack tlie plur \L 
 wliicli completely exists in res and f//r,s onlv. ' Kifirjus. farie.s and 
 *i7^.*f sometimes are found in those cases of* the i)lural, which ter- 
 minate in es. 
 
 Rem. ;}. It is easy, to distinp^uish the nouns of the r)th declension from 
 those of the M, terminating- in es, since in all nouns of the former, 
 except jides, phhes, ns and spes, tlie termination (S is preceded bv 
 the vowel i, while in the ;}d declension this is the case in the fouf 
 nouns al)-ies, aiies, paries and quies only. 
 
 COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 § 3tl7. The composition ofnouns is either PROPER or iMPRopKR. 
 I-MPKOPKH compounds are phrases, generally written in one word, 
 when each of the two words of the phrase keeps its own form and 
 meaniun^. This composition is of three kinds : 
 
 1. With attributive adjectives, in respubllca (res public(f),ii re- 
 public or State (Vit^ivniW 2)ublic thin<j)\ ^w^ jmjuraiulum {jiisja- 
 
 COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 157 
 
 raiidum), oath (literally a rir/ht that is to he sworn to). 2. With 
 
 oenitives or other cases in the relation of attributes or objects, 
 
 as ' paterfatailias, mater farnHlas, fillusfajjiUias, fillafanii' 
 
 lias. ' legislator {legumlator), 'plebls^u.tum, * senatuscomultam, 
 
 'Jurlscousidtus (or jureconsidtus), fidejussor, a bail, iimcapio, 
 
 an acquisition of property by prescription. 3. In some, mostly legal, 
 
 expressions two nouns, asyndetieally coordinated (p. 99, § 120). are 
 
 used with the force of a single compound noun, as ususfructus (inst. 
 
 of */6'w.s^ et fructus), a usufruct, emtlo-venditlo, a bargain of sale. 
 
 Rem 4 If nouns are composed after the 1st and 3.1 methods, each of their 
 Constituents is deelinell, as respMca, G. reipuUicc^, Ace. rempuhhcam ; 
 msjnntndnni, G. jurisjnrandi ; nsiisfrucrus, Ace. ummjrnctum In tne 
 second chiss of componnds onlv the jrovernin- word is declniod, a^ 
 iunronsultHS, G. jureconsnlti. In paterfamilias, Jilhi^famdni^, etc., the woul 
 familias is an archaic irenitive of the 1st dech n>ion (mstead ol famdne), 
 which remains unchan-ed in declension, while the iirst parts ot these 
 con»i»ounds(/>a/(^r, jilins, etc.), are re-ularly dechned, as : G. patrisja- 
 milias. Ace. j>atninfaindias, X. PL patrestaindias, etc. 
 
 § ^5:58. Proper compound nouns are inflected, as if they were 
 BiMPLE nouns, as agricola.G. a(irlcolae. They are but a few in 
 num))er, and present no peculiarities in their declension. 
 
 § 32». English compound nouns generally are expressed in 
 Latin by Ittributivi-: phrases, having either an adjective, or a 
 GENITIVE as attribute, as : 
 
 1. With ADJECTIVES. 
 
 the dorpstar. stella canicidilris 
 a goki-eing. annulus aureus 
 a hair-pin, acus crinalis 
 a marble-col (imn, colunma mar- 
 morea 
 
 2. With GENITIVES 
 
 a miU:^tone, lapis moh'ris 
 raiu-water, acpia pluvia 
 a sitoie-storm, tempestas nivdsa 
 a water-fowl, avis aquatica 
 
 an enrth-qnah\ terr.T mot us 
 head-((ehe, ca])itis dolores 
 house-top, adium cidmen 
 snow-fall, nivis casus 
 
 siudight, solix lux 
 sun -rise, soils ortus 
 teoth-ache, dentium dolores 
 water-works, aqme ductus . sing ) 
 
 iTh« Pxnr^ssions " Paterfamilifts, filinsfamiliav' etc., are difficult to convert into 
 often ,.ccurs in the si-Mifioaion ny^. *;\";'*^,,^,7;,, j,, this connection -ienotea not 
 
158 
 
 COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. 
 
 FoiniTH DECLENSTOX, 1. Bv ail iron needle. 3. Tlio knees of the 
 suppliant old man. 3. To the enormous limbs of the t'I('i)hant. 4. Tc 
 an unfortunate accident. 5. By a beautiful sonir. (>. By a h('adlon,i> 
 course. 7. To tlie Niimidian cavalry. 8. Of an unmanly weeping-. 1). 
 By a fatal stroke of liglitnin^. 10. To the ''irrcsistibk' attack of tiic cav- 
 alry. 11. Of a small 'band of soldirrs. 12. By ''illicit piin. l:>. By 
 rouoi-h forests {mdtua). 14. By the Roman senate and peo])lt'. LT. Hy the 
 sound {ineohoit'iK) senses of the hcan-is (amlltor). 1<). The Venetian 
 {^W'latns) and ^Terirestian harl)ors {"hj.) 17. By the harbors of tiic '"Adri- 
 atic gulf 18. By the holy (sd/n'tu.s) spirit. 19. To enormous i-xpcn- 
 ees. 20. By the "country tribes of the Romans. 21. The votes of the 
 '-'city tribes. 22. By a scanty sustenance. 2o. By a fierce {t/'f/.v) i^hmce. 
 24. Of a '■rickety house. 25. To the humble house of the '^Stoic Posi- 
 donius. 20. By the new house of Cicero. 27. The ' biick houses of the 
 old Romans. 28. The hi<rh roofs of the '••'Swiss houses. 21). The ])a- 
 ternal houses {obj.) of Scipio. 30. By the ''suburban houses of the 
 wealthy Romans. 31. The defeat of the '\'onstilar armies. 32. By the 
 ''•*triumi)hal arches {(trcus) of the Roman imperators. 33. By a '^'squalid 
 plight and bearing. 
 
 FiFTU DECLENSION. 1. By an enormous deluge. 2. To a certain hoi>e. 
 3. Of necessary things. 4. The i)ernicious day of the Caimean battle. 
 5. The hot midday {"bj.). G. The fortunate {fiat ((.'<) and unfortunate 
 (ncfad'is) days. 7. By ])rivate and ]»ul)lic atiliirs. 8. To certain de- 
 ptruction. 1). Of the '-'Punic faith. 10. The ha})py (hutHK) end of an un- 
 pleasant affair. 11. By the --asi>ect of a vast -"'plateau. 12. To the 
 rouirh surface of the house. 13. Bv a doubtful hope of safetv. 14. 
 The heat of a -^summer midday, lo. An evidence of extraordinary ef- 
 feminacy. 1(). A mean and vulgar affair {oh}.). 
 
 Compound nouns. 1. l^y the Roman rei)ublic. 2. Of the anci(Mit 
 republics. 3. To the safety of the n-public. 4. Hy the oatli of Piso. 
 5. The mutual duties of hou.se-fathers and house-sons. (J. By Solon 
 {Stlo) and Lycurgus, the lawgivers of the Athenians and Spartans. 7. 
 By a decree of the senate, -"^hateful to the common i)eop!e. 8. By fre- 
 quent eartlupiakes. V). To the -''sea-towns of Italy. 10. Hy a -'«ea-battle 
 of the Romans and Carthaginians. 11. By the rising of the -"'morning- 
 Btar. 12. Bv -"'snow and rain-water. 13. Bv the "'north side of the 
 house. 14. By the ^'south-bank of the river. 15. To the useof •^-'cistern- 
 "water. 10. By enormous snow-falls. 17. Sharp •''night-frosts. 18. By 
 the '^inoderii •'invention of "''steamships. \\). The heavy •'"freight-ships 
 of Julius CiTsar. 20. Bv the -'^New-Brunswick water-works. 
 
 « Inexpuffnnbilis. ' Mv.nU'^. ^mjcjtn^. » T«r<restTnns. helonging to Tt-rge-stfi, the 
 f)io(ifin Trieiit. 10 .\(lriaiioiis. ^ Count >•>/. as atl.j. rusticns. i'-' / V/y, as «<lj. urbanii». 
 18 IJiiiiioMis. '•'Stoicus. ^^ Brick'. Jis ailj. latfri -iiH. *« Ilelvetifus. •' Suhurl-fitiiis. 
 1« ('■msnlaris. i" Triiimphri'is. '■'" Sordidus. '•" I'liniciis. '-'■■' CcUKptM-tus. '^'^ riuiities. 
 2"« SuTtimt'r. as adj. testlvus. '^^ Invl.sus. ^* Trttnshitfl : maritime t«»\vtis. 27 N;iviJ 
 battle. '^" Mututiiiu.-*. ">♦ Mivosus. 3o «Septentrioiialis. 3* Meriilionulis. ^'^ Cistcriiliiua 
 9 3 NdCtiirnus. 34 Kecens. ** luventio. *• Vaporarius. *' Oiierarius. '^ jje^^.jjruns- 
 viceni>is. 
 
 COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 159 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 1 An.'ures cvcnt«s futaros avia.u ='vol.\tu prae.licunt^ I. J^ -CU,'. 
 Ri„.^"S'^uUaun> h,«tiu;n iMn;.tun. s«^^^^^^ 
 diAnaC'iccronisredm. vel.ene, m comurlawr 4 ^^^^ ^ 
 
 bito "■-•-:"^!'''"-,./-o^J"i^^^^^^^ sunt. 14. Sammiium agn a 
 
 miiui <WuK-m scnatiu mimiat. 10. '='^'f™''* P^V^^^^^ 18. Philoso- 
 
 . 1-^ I'*' Viiiiwjfi fnncni oculorum acie exttiin. i.^- ^ 
 
 bus impeditur. 1<. V ulpes cam m ocu . -^y lies occultae 
 
 ,,V.a r^lrun. lu.n.ann.„n^^^^^ 
 
 atotu' •'•'incognita' rel)U& cern» cu^nit i ^ ^. Pelononnesus uni- 
 tuiu. fra.,,1?. fid.,-i public,;» e«tio_s=^ esse s,>lo^ . ~l;^.f,^ «[Xunes sp.-m 
 versa ab llerculis l'™f J''^^•i c olc'su's UiyodU.s err«. motu -pr^ecipi- 
 longain *^conop<-ro vetat. i... ^^ ' f'!'; "• ,„ uuiversam liberant. 25. 
 tatSr. 24. Ath.^nb^nses prcolio nava br.ra^^^^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 4. Tbe water of lakes ,s '^-'^ : >''^^'i;X''rsi.k. s'are carried (firre) 
 Labir-nus to await the issue ot "' '"^"'^. ."i' ,^.„„i g. The vote of the 
 i„ ,,,,,, the left band, -«^^^^^^'^'^XL and i>ortico of Oc- 
 «"lirst-votini; tribe IS given to Cesar. °- J,"*^ f,i„|,,„-,n„' 9. The year 
 
 tavUis are destroyed (^''''*«'«^':<; '•,,^,^,tL°Uus^ we often excel -iU- 
 is full of '>imi>ortant events. 10 By '>>•""" [.'sense of the verses. 
 
 reguh.ted «genius. 11. I '■^•"'ll.V";^ ,7be p^ese ved 13 The puuish- 
 13^Jal.-tl■e,.s,"bear,ngacorns^ »houbl be l^^escrv ^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^F^^ 
 
 ,„e«t of "m>Kms inen ha dct^ec 4^ ^^. ^^_P ^_^^^^ .,^^ j^^^ ^,,. j,,^ 
 ^.S o[ t^iiragi^ra.^ T^'^ ^?;!;^^ '' "^^^T^^- 
 
 t» Flvinc. tiiirht. '»0 Clodianus, Cio<Ji 
 42 To l.ol.l up, to fasten. "» A tre.nbhi.}:. 
 47 To be aisi-losed. *« To entertain- *^ 
 U^vM-^.to illuminate. ^' I'rf- ^'-^f ■ . 
 
 ; si.bj-et Is prere.led by an ol.ject. the 
 Vo y„ ,ii.r-, toUere. '-' To d.Urmine, 
 »- ..c 61 flriivis " Inconcinnus. 
 Vri>ebcre,p.XnU.«... ^^ To he lost, 
 'u Fluctus. '» Senate-hcune. curia. 
 
 ,« nf r/odiuH *» Gloriae cnpidus, amhitioic». 
 
 ^ " "rH;;";.mont »U.«W be ..l«rve,, In L^. 
 penJf " Siruclurf •' Aptu»- " Magnitiid. 
 
IGU 
 
 THE PROXOUNS. 
 
 THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 101 
 
 to be devoted to mlHtary affairs. 19. Tlie approaches to {trminhtte "of") 
 the i)lam are open to the cavahy of llaunil)al. :20. l^xtcrnal tilings are 
 perc<'ived by the eyes, but "-'hidden things by the '^penetration of tin; 
 imnd {menH). 21. The is.sue of tlie ])ublic affairs seems to be contrary 
 to the liope of the '^(ieinap)gaes. 22. Cares and '^sorrow cannot be dis- 
 pelled by the memory of hai)py days. 2o. The '*'cai)itals of the ''Ionic 
 columns '^present the '''imai;e of the horns of rams. 24. The morn imr- 
 and '^"afternoon-hours must be devoted to studies or "'business. 2.'). 
 The leaders confirm the treaty bv an oatii. 2(>. The Ilortensian law as- 
 signs to resolutions of the plebs the force of laws. 27. It is allowed to 
 an house-fathiT to '"-disinherit an house-son or an house-daughter. 28. 
 The Code of Justiniaiius contains tlu; "^ 'ordinances of tin; emperors, and 
 the '^Pandects embrace the various works of the lloiuau lawyers. 
 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 THE PROXOUXS. 
 
 § d«tO. 1. Pronuun.s are word^, roprcscnting persons or things 
 as one of the three gk.\mmatical peusons (§ 5). They are divi- 
 ded into ^iliiple and reflexive in-ononn.s. 
 
 § aXXt , -. The SIMPLE riioxouNs are thus declined : 
 
 J^irst person. Second pernon. Third person. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Tu, thou Is, m. he ; ea,/. ahe ; id, n. it 
 
 tui. of thee t'jus, of him, ofhtr, of it 
 
 tibi, to thee ei, to liiin, to her, to it 
 
 te, tJtee eum, in. him; earn,/, her; 
 
 id, II. it. 
 te, hy thee eo, m. & k., eil, /. hy him, 
 
 her, it. 
 Plural. 
 
 N. nos, we vos, you ei (ii), ?/?. ea^, /. ea, /?., they 
 
 G. nostri [nostrum], vestri [vestrum], eorum, m. efirum, /. edrum, 
 
 of us of I/O II // . . (f th e III, 
 
 D. nobis, to us vobis, to you eis (iis), to them 
 
 A. nos, US vos, you eos, m. eas,/'. ea, n., than 
 
 A. nobis, hy us vobis, hy you eis, (iis), hy them. 
 
 ''^ Reconditns. ''S Acies. ''* Demarioouf, homo popiilfiti'*. ''^ yEirritrpht. ''* Capita 
 lam. ^T lonicus. '« PrsebC-re. ''^ Kllijrics. »" Pomeridiauos. »i I'laral in Latin 
 *2 Exheredare. *" Constitutio. *** Paiidecta), pi. t. 
 
 X. Ego. / 
 
 G. mei, of me 
 
 D. luihi, to me 
 
 A. me, me 
 
 A. me, hy me 
 
 Hem 1. The double forms »o,(ri-n^?«rum, '^"'^ .""f '7!f "'or jSiS' £. 
 di.tin^n.ished, that the forms in i are exclusively u>e,l as o^J£c3y U 
 1^- He is hi wd of m. nostri (not nodnim) cget. i'i«*°™i'' '° "'" I 
 Tre uB:.d a" partitive aitrib.vte., m such ptoses as : iV«». of us (,u^ | 
 trum), miui of i/oiTlJesimn): hee Book Ul. 
 s 3'J'> 3 The pronoun of the third pcrsou is, ea, id has 
 three -enders in most of its cases. It generally refers to a noun, 
 previously mentioned, which is called its antecedent 
 
 The GENDER of the pronoun of tl>e third person is not deter- 
 rained by the gender, which it has in English, but by that of its 
 Latin ANTECEDENT, while the CASE of pronouns is the same as 
 would be given to nouns in their place. 
 
 We adhere to the king, ami love him, iJ.»t adfmeremus eumqm dUigi- 
 ™The inhabitants defend the queen, and are defended by lier, Incdm 
 
 "^l^:£^:l^'^rS:t^ the «oman general oppresses 
 tl„ , hcalu- r,.4d,re cowmUir, ml dia Roiuanus eos oppninit 
 
 T le e en e aUndon the niountain.and the consul resolves to occupy 
 u u!:JJlmo,,tnn rclwQtmnt. comulqm eum (not ul) omipare datmt. 
 '*'^f enSes b^lk'the line of Lttle, but the general restores .t, 
 
 ^xf,: r^ifgr Ci'' rri :rdi£i\t/^iirit, op,. ,na,nur. 
 
 .rfWque ).-,f ;/#c^<« cidUar; or, Lab..r magnus est, eumque fimre 
 dijjicile vidctur. 
 
 & *>'$•{ 4 Reflexive pronouns are objects, wbicli denote 
 the slmJ person cr thing, as the logical subjects of their govern- 
 ing verbs or adjectives. Verbs, which have reflexive pronou.is as 
 oblects, are called reflexive verbs. 
 
 The Eno-lish reflexive pronouns are compounds of the word 
 self (mys^^f, thij^elf, himself, c&c). In Latin the first and second 
 persons of the reflexive pronouns are the same as the simple pro- 
 nouns • but the reflexive pronoun of the third person has the 
 following peculiar forms, in which neither gender nor number are 
 distinguished : 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 A. 
 
 sui of himself, of herself, of itself, of themselves, of one s He f 
 
 ^ibi to himself, to herself, to itself, to themselves, to one s self 
 
 se or sese, himself, herself, itself, themselves, one's self 
 se or sese, by himself, by herself, by itself, by themselves, by ones 
 self. 
 
162 
 
 THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rem. 3. Some Latin reflexive verbs have English neuter verbs for 
 equivalents, as: se rccipere, to retreat ; se Huhmittere, to submit ; se 
 tradere, to surrender ; se jactdre, to boast ; w (/bdirdre, to abdicate. 
 Students should be careful to treat such verbs as reflexives throuirh 
 all their persons, as : / retreat, me recipio ; he retreats, sc! recipit. 
 &c. 
 
 Rem. 3. The reflexive pronouns can have oblique cases only, because 
 tliese lu'onouns according to their nature must be oij,tects. For 
 the anomaly of rctitixive attuihutes see L. XXXVI. 
 
 Rem. 4. The use of the reflexive i)ronouns will be seen in the following 
 exami)les : 
 
 A. FIRST AND SECOND PERSONS. 
 
 I am not willin<r to hurt mvself, me laedere nolo. 
 
 We are unmindtul of oursiUves, nostri iniinemores sumus. 
 
 We cannot accuse ourstdves, 7W)i aecnmre nequlmu^. 
 
 We submit to the king, regi nos suhtttitfiirDix. 
 
 Thou canst not excuse thyself, te excuxdre neqtiin. 
 
 You are dissimilar to yourselv(»s, i^nJm disdinlles estis. 
 
 Thou must abdicate, te abdicdre debes. 
 
 B. THIRD PERSON. 
 
 To accuse one's self is rash, ne aecusdre tenuranum est. 
 To be mindful of one's self is fair, sui tnemorem esse aeqiium est. 
 Virtue is desirous of itself, virtus sni ciqnda est. 
 
 The inhabitants commit themselves to the protection of C;esar,//i^^>^ 
 Caesaris fidei .se endnnt. 
 God is similar to himself, Deus dhi similis est. 
 
 § 3«t !• 5. Pruiiouiis grammatinillv are treated like nouns. 
 They are members of phrases, like these, and assume the same 
 cases as nouns wouhl in their place. But the follo\viu<^ rules are 
 peeuUar to pronouns alone : 
 
 THE PRONOUNS IN THE PREDICATIVE PHRASE. 
 
 § ^Uci* 0. The pronouns as subjects generally are not ex- 
 pressed in Latin (§ 10), the personal ending of the predicate being 
 a sufficient designation of the person of the subject. But the pro- 
 nouns must be expressed as subjects, if they are either exi)ressly 
 or impliedly opposed to nouns, or to the pronouns of other 
 persons. The pronouns are then said to be used eilipliati- 
 
 c*all%. 
 
 Gffjus speaks, and we write, Gajus loquitur ac nos scribimus. 
 Hie consul commands, and I obey, Consul imperat, et ego obedio. 
 Thou art glad, hut I am sorry, Tu gaudes, Bed ego doleo. 
 I go away, but you remain. Ego abeo, sed vos manr'tis. 
 
 THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 163 
 
 . The conml calls Piso, but he refuses to obey, Consul Pisonem vocat. 
 Bed is oliedirc non vult. 
 
 8 •>'|6 1 Two or more coordinate subjects (§ 114) of 
 differc't persons have their predicates either in the «'•st or in the 
 second person of the plural. Tl>e first person is used, .f at least 
 one of the subjects is of that person. But when the subjects are 
 of the second and third persons only, the predicate is placed m the 
 second person. 
 
 Both 1 and thou are satisfied, Et ego et tu content! sumus^ 
 Thou and Anthony mu.t die, Tu et Antonuis mori debet^s^ 
 / and the general intend to accept tl^e propositions, Ego et dux proposita 
 acciiKTe volumus. 
 
 Rem 5 The oRDEn, in which subjects of different persons follow each 
 other -eeiaUy is this: the first person takes precedence of the 
 setond:'ald the second of the third, whatever may be the oraer oJ 
 the subjects, observed in English. 
 
 THE PRONOUNS IN THE OBJECTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 8 «'{7 8 Pronouns, dependent on verbs or adjectives, are 
 calkrproiioilliliul objects. They form objective phrases 
 with their governing words, like nouns, and are subject to the 
 same rules as the latter. If the pronominal object is a passive 
 AGENT (§ 131) the pronouns of the first and second persons always 
 are preceded by the preposition a or ah, which before te generally 
 takes the form abs. But the pronouns of the third person take 
 this preposition then only, when its antecedent is a personal 
 
 noun. , -,- . •* 
 
 Gains cannot be praised by me, Gajus a me laudari nequit. 
 TiriU imt he assisted bu y<»i, A vobis adjuvari nolo. 
 TifcZeannolhctaLibythen, (the enemies), Urbs ab e.s expugnan 
 
 ""v")'-»*. the books and am ddigMcd by than, Libros perlego eisque de- 
 
 lector. 
 
 S ^38 9 If the phrase, in which a pronoun is an object, is 
 combined 'with another i»hrase, containing the antecedent of the 
 pronoun, the latter assumes the reflexive form m Latin, except 
 when the antecedent either itself is an attribute, or dependent 
 
 on it. . ., . 
 
 The general compels tJie inhabitants to adhere to Mm, dux incolas sib^ 
 {not ei) adh.nprere cogit. 
 
1Q4 
 
 THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 ramr aVows the amha^sadors to meet him, C.-rsar loi^^iitos se {tiot oum] 
 
 adire perniittit. 
 
 We are ordered by the general to follow him, A duce se {not euin) sequi 
 
 jubeinur. 
 But: 
 llie disciples of Socreites intend to save him, Socratis discipuli enm 
 
 Bcivare volant. {Se senulre would refer to disripuli, and would have the 
 
 retli'xive meaning *'to saoe themxelcen''). 
 
 Kem. (). This rale liolds good only, when the phrase of the pronominal 
 object is comhimd with the phrase of the antecedent, but not, if the 
 twt) phrases are connected bv rourdinatiipit, as: 
 
 Caaar addres.ses the (intbii.saddorH, (uid permits them to return, 
 Cnp.sar legiltos alloquitur, eisque (//<y^ sibique) redlre |K'rmittit ; — the 
 phrase of the pronominal oh]i'Cl{( isqne pi rmittit)\iL'\iv^ not eombined 
 with, but coordinate to the phrase of the antecedent (leydtos tdlo- 
 qnitnr). 
 
 Rem. 7. The pronoim sui. fdbi, se, according to § 203 and 238, occurs in 
 twodiffennt meanings, in a strictly refixiw sense, rendered by hini- 
 self, etc., and in the sense of a simi)ie pronoun under a retlexive 
 form, rendered by Jtitn, her, drc. These two meanings must be 
 clea'ly distinguished. The pronoun is strictly reflexive, if the logi- 
 cal subject of its governing words is at tiiesame time its anteced<'nt, 
 while it is a simple pronoun, if it has tiie sul)ject of another than 
 its own governing word for an antecedent. Thus in the exam]>h'8 
 to J^ 'I'Vo Hem. 4. J), the pronouns of the third person ar<^ reflexive, 
 while in the examples to ^238 ihey merely have a retlexive form. 
 In the following exami)le : 
 
 '' Gujns Sempronium se intcrficere impedit" 
 
 the ])ronoun se may be taken for a retlexive or for a simple pronoun. 
 If Sempronium, the logical subject of interfcere, is consiilered as 
 the antecedent of se, the latter is IIEFLEXIVE, and the example is 
 thus translated : 
 
 " Gajus prevents Sempronius from kiUinf/ himself." 
 But if we take Gajus, whicli is not the logical subject of interfi- 
 cere, for the antecedent of se, the latter is a simi'LE pronoun, and 
 we translate : 
 
 " Gajus prevents Sempronius from, killing him." 
 The connection alone can show in such instances, whether sui^ 
 idbi, se, is meant to be a retlexive, or a sim[)le pronoun. 
 
 ^^ For the use of the pronouns in the attributive phrase set» 
 ^ 2«3, 2»4. 
 
 EXEIiCISES. 
 
 A. THE PRO^'OUXS AS SUBJECTS. 
 
 1. Et ego et liberi valemus. 2. Et ego et rex hostium adventu fuGrere 
 cogimur. 3. Et ego et tu futuram nipublicie sortem facile pra^dicere 
 possunms. 4. Et ego et magna civiuni ])ars reeentibus belli eventibna 
 urbem ri'limptere prohibemur. 5. Tu ac Sempronius a^groti esse videmini. 
 Vos, tluces militesque, hostis vincere nescltis. 7. Ego magnis curis 
 
 THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1G5 
 
 Io^^r.ro ivir-tnTii ou^ro vos vero voluptatibus sordidis, atque 
 
 drnuis, si-d v'.s '«■diiionem ac bellum meditammi. 9. Kex feempionmm 
 
 rodiro'iiibet, sed is parCreuon vult. ., . o 
 
 1 c'l.nrlM T>1-ivs but 1 learn. 2. Tliou spcakest, but I am silent & 
 
 Tl ou' "St-::»,! Henry returns. 4. Thou, O Lucretia seemest^ U. 
 
 be .■be.rfu!, but «-e 'are tormented by great (ear aud ■•« >^ety a. ^oa 
 
 hnnlore the forgiveness of Cesar, bt.t^ we are not «^"'"S *° ,^l^,f ^^ 
 
 ,,)-,. , tl„. dieiaior 6 Both Cicero and 1 are comiwlled to tontorm to 
 
 t new conli«.mof rtie rep.thlic. 7. Tlte queen and I are adverse to 
 
 c r. , Vmsand frauds. 8. Bot'h thou and I «^<^ *»"'«'" .X'l' to Mend 
 Fi;U. r thou or I must die. 10. We and tlie soldiers intend to ..tend 
 
 K rn in fullow the le'^ious, and ?ie departs directly. 14. i'liiUl enaeavoio 
 ^;. "„;:.,:, the Z^y of the ambaslad.,rs, but tl.ey reject the proposi- 
 tions of the king. 
 
 B. THE PRONOUNS .49 OBJECTS. 
 
 FliisT 4ND SECX.ND PERSONS. 1. Mei indigiTC vitoiini. 2^Se'"P'^ 
 ni*c"msilia mihi utilia esse po-unt 3. Occasio -d.i M-I f-a s^ 
 
 ^■'"'"■'"; '6"At,i.n"n,."::tiaT'r'"geri's.de;'t' ^7. ^r^'eeptor mihi 
 '"'T'-" l!o,u.;,n V «ere^P enn ittit. 8. N-'cessitas me P.nnp.-^jum s..qm 
 T^r .» i;rrem servF." mihi semper licet. 10. T«i iinmeinorem 
 e S in. 'ratu n "'^tur. 1 1 . Reipubli,-a> status tibyncojrtutus esse vtcU. 
 essein r,,i i^voluiitateiu tibi afl.-ne ilesmit. IJ. ic 
 
 ".stisV:..';. d v! o 14 Hostes te elereittimque cla.le ingent, «per.lere 
 'v;:,unt"-15. Mili-es abs '^. «-M-^ni r.-d p no un . U,.^ 
 
 nostri inuuemor,.s es^e ^■'^'«"t"'^;. ^ '' ./^.j if '^^ j re-is controversial 
 et Mac.-donil,usM>uit,lia sunt. '^'/^'J^^s lauS gloriOsum est, sed a 
 a nobis d,., u,l,...r. n;;-l'':: " • ^\^ Et tenpi"s et causae natQra nos bre- 
 ;i:^'l^:,;Vru.'"2r 'Kt;tl::.^.g;sef Upuilic. saUts v,,s vivere v^^ 
 
 "i.^'b:! Oie cbi..f amltbe board of t^n are ^^^^::;^^t;, 
 
 ^,;:?me""r'ne lecture: M^^O of SempiJius are ^th ,Wn, and 
 
 (laedere) us seriously. U. 1 uture ^.^^y^°^.^ , . f ig^ rumors and 
 The faction of Anthony tries to rmn {p^rdeu^i^ee^^ 
 
 1 Viotn.n qiKorore. in «mXv n hnng. ' ^^f^^^^"^^^^,^, % peeus. « Fides. » Favor 
 t&.lo. 5 To \nre credit fi')-'", '"l;;;- jj ^^:^^^'o, p a m aff.rre. to give pleasure. ) To 
 able. io(Jenre.^oc.o«</no<. /' ^ "' il'n _^,,arV is Im.pporlQnus. '6 l„terce8sio. »' 7l> 
 Biiniliilate. i* T» propone a ImcWgam ro^^ra. ii 
 
 foresee, prffinoscore. „ 
 
 • TrannUite : " regard o/ decency. 
 
166 
 
 THE PROXOUXS. 
 
 slanders. 11 The prfpfor offers to thee *willin£rly both assistance ((^7)«( 
 and protection {prae.vdiinn). 12. Tlie study of the 'ilebrew lan<rn:iiro 
 seems to be neglected bv thee. l;j. The cJnnnion people general Iv ""is 
 devoted to thee. 14. Die consul directs tlw^e to ''^execure the conspira- 
 tors hy the axe. l.">. \\v will not -"troul)le thee by qu*'Stions and -'objec- 
 tion.?. 10. To you, O soldiers, the -'taking (,f tlie fortn-ss is as{*igned by 
 the general. 17. The city nnist be taki-n by you. and thr fortress by 
 us. 18. The king is still in need of you, and* refuses to dismiss you. 
 
 TiiiHD PEKSOX. 1. Legatus Capsareiu adit, eupie niiliiuui victori;im 
 nuntiat. 2 Viros niagnos admir;"nuir, eiscjue siuiil(>s lieri studrnius, 
 o. Sernionem Latinuni scire pulchruin est, sed ejus rudein (if///nnfiit) 
 esse turpe vidrtur. 4. Veniani ininncis pr;ebrre huni/Inum Cst, sed 
 eos aniilre divinuin videtur. o. Ciesar legMtos regis liiteras sil)i osreiidere 
 jubet. 0. Cato servum se gladio iiitcrticere jubet. 7. Milites oj»pi(lano- 
 runi donios intrant, eosque auruni argcntunupie -'recondituin sibi tra- 
 dere cogunt. 8. Atticus Antoiiii abseiitis uxori auxiliuni offert, eam(iuo 
 pecunifi et consilio adjuvat. 9. Milites Pers:'i prouii.-^sa Ix-ne ISrordiintur, 
 sed is eorum inmienior esse vidrtur. U). Philippus Th(ssali;e ei\ itntea 
 occupat, sed eas iEtolis restituere cogitur. 11. Hostes naveni pra^toriam 
 siniul'aggrediuntur eauKpa; harpagonibus capere student. 12. Philii)pi 
 regis legati pacis conimoda m-atioiu' -'-'subtlli et oallida fexponunt. Athe- 
 nii'uses vero ea decipi neipuMint. V). Barbari legiontvs R )inanas acriter 
 adoriuntur, scmI fortiter ab eis repelluntur. 14. (iaji scelus -grave est, 
 id(|ue excusjlre turpe videtur. 
 
 1. You cannot be unmindful of liim. 2. We often are in need of her. 
 {]. The city is rebellious, and we must occupy it by an am])le garrison. 
 4. llortensius is a great orator, but we i)refer Cicero to him. 5. The 
 leaders know the secret plans of the commander, but we are ignortmt of 
 them. 0. Lucretia is accused of -'^ixusoning, and the jucig«'s intend to 
 condemn her. 7. Thou art equal (par) to the -'task, but I cannot ac- 
 complish it. 8. A large -''bril)e is ottered to (Jajus, but lie cannot be •^in- 
 duced by it. 9. The leaders of the conspiracy *'sue for an amnesty, but 
 the cliief is not willing to grant {lar(/lri) it. 10. The occasion is -''favor- 
 able, but you let it "-'escape. 11. The general i>ermits you to surrender 
 the city, but I direct you to delend it. 12. The plans of (iajus seem to 
 be useful to the king, but are rejected by him. l;]. The enemies sur- 
 round us. and it is necessary to defeat them. 14. Both mother and 
 daughter are sad, but we try to console them. IT). Life is a gift of Uod, 
 and it is criminal to -^^lestroy it. IG. The conditicuis of jx'ace are ac- 
 cepted by the general, but the senate resolves to reject tliem. 17. The 
 troops are surrounded by tlangers, and it seems necessary to carry help 
 to them. 18. C;esar allows the ambassadors to communicate to him the 
 pro|x)sitions {p}-opo,sitnfn) of the king. 19. The consul compels the 
 kings of Nicomedia and Bithynia to accompany him. 20. A lictor is 
 directed by Verres to bring the pictures to him. 21. The friends of the 
 king are afraid of protecting him. 22. Sempronius directs a slave to 
 
 »s Ilibrfticiis. »9 P(»rcutere. 20 Perturhire. '* Alterc.atio. 33 Kxpiiu'n.jtio. 2» Hid- 
 den. '■^♦Subtle. 26s,.rioii». 26 v,.„^.ticium. 27 Qpu.-*. ^" },lerieA. -•''/'<> iniiuct, m*>\tre. 
 3" To iiUf'fi»- an anmexiy, tran.siHte : to Mfflc an anaieHty, iuipunitatem petere. '* Oppa" 
 tumis. «^ Prajteiire. ssTullere. • Libens. \ Explaiiu 
 
 THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 167 
 
 a^conceal him. 23. The inljabif nts hosule to tl^ 
 
 3.,eizo and deliver him to the Romany fotei^s ot he ^^ccuser arl 
 
 diiectsaslave to crown her. 2.). ihe talseiiooub oi 
 
 manifest, and Cicero tries to refute them. 
 
 a OBJECTIVE PIIllASES TVITII KEFLEXIYE PRONOUNS. 
 
 • ^u- 9 r T^rqise mvself 3. Thou praisest thyselt. 
 1. To praise one s sell. ^- f prai^^ "^.^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ 
 
 4. He praises himselt. 0. ^^ « Pf ^^^ qTbe ^'nclulgent to ones self, 
 selves. 7. T^iey 1>^^^«« *^^7r\\V^-.Pif^^^artl^ to thvself. 11. 
 
 0. I am indulgent to myselt. i^'^^^^^^^^^^^^/i^jg.St to ourselves. 13. 
 She is indulgent to herself. 12. yS^,'^ "^^^^^^ 
 
 You are indulgent to y'^,^rseh-es^ ^tJl^^An^^ mvself. 17. They are 
 15. To be unjust to ones self 10. lam 1^^^^^ ^^ themselves, 
 
 unjust to themselves 18. T u> the women J .^ ^ ^^^ .^f 2I. 
 
 19. To be ^Mistrust tul ot one s sell ~^-/.^",.^'„" ^f himself. 23. 
 
 Thou art distrustful ot thyselt. 22. ^^I'l^^^^^^^^ yourselves. 
 
 We are distrustful of ourselves. 24. ^'^^\J^^^ 27. 
 
 05. They are distrustful otthemselv.^. ^^^' J^ ^^^^3^^ ^^yVXat! 31. 
 1 4. t Osi 'I w»n retreatest. ~9. xle reiliai». "V. y^ 
 
 1 retreat. ~«\ '''"^'J.'^^^' j^.^t aS. To »burre,uler to tl.e enemies, ii. 
 ■V oil retreat. *'•'■, ^ ""^^ '^^:'^'^'',-.,ri,„„ B,,ri-,nderest to the enemies. 
 1 surreii.ler to the enemies. So. Tlioa ,^"' ""«^.^"'j , ^„. „„e-, self. 
 36. They surrender to the ene,ni,.s. .^' • !_^ J;\.;',';, > ^o otie's self. 40. 
 f-T^'"«*'":«'<='If f,-^ 'l„lU bv mvi." &. I protect myself 
 IrS T^:^ Uem'«-..ve:."' ifshe adiuires hers-lf. 45. '^^^-^^ 
 and clmdemnest thyself. 4G. Thoa art u.e.u^ t« h^e • 4 . rhej tree 
 
 Thou canst not ■'-'clear thyself. 
 
 D SENTENCES WITH llEFLEXn'E PKONOUN8. 
 
 1. Conjuratorum numero tne -ascribere nolo, 2. ^f^^^^J^ ^^ 
 gere nec^.> 3. Vestn i.n..c^.>res e^ ch3b^^^^ 
 
 Btu<lio me ^addicere volo. o. li.t tgo ^J^ ^^ ^^^ ' .p ^oercere, Antoni, 
 6. Et nobis et vobis contrarn ^«^« ^^^^^^^"(^^i^. " .^ Octavianum sibi 
 ,,equis. 8. «Vf-^f;;^^-;:|nMSisi(^eT^;-ta est. T- Sese 
 conciliare studet 10 ^ J^^j^^ 1,^.'^ ^necle^^^ defendere ac tuen posse 
 cubernare difficile est. 12. C^ivitatts vjr<»e lecriitos se co- 
 
 fulentur 13. ^'^^^^ZS^^^^^ ii^tu^^e r^nov.re pre 
 ^;h'r^t''.vsarVSt"X trate eo,it.^7. Sui oblltum esse 
 
 ' T i s^Ap^nsator 3' To he indidgpnt, iudulirere. 
 
 3.. rr,/».wi- .■••." ;■;,■"■;:;■[,• -V-jre""' To a.\.l. '" To «Ha.li . " Tc 
 r.?:.:''^^;'' FoVgeSuT-^^T^^crcC .. ■^'^n.ii, sc subun.tere. «. A.Utr.ao.. 
 »0 Inhciiis. 
 
168 
 
 DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1G9 
 
 the soul and froodom {varviUiM) of foar. 4. I will not injure myself hy 
 rash words. 5. Thou canst save thyself and tlie army l»y a timely ^'re« 
 treat. 0. Thou seemest to be forgetful of thyself, O «laughter! 7. Thou 
 seemest to deny to thyself the ''-happiness of a ''\lomestie life. 8. It is 
 necessary to preserve tliyself to the country. 9. We wish to allow to 
 ourselves a short ^^relaxation of the mind. 1(1. By tlie su(hlen ehanufea 
 (clcis.sitrido) of public affairs we must become distrustful of ourselves. 
 11. ''You are neirlectful of vourselves, and '■'abandon vourselves to sloth 
 {(le}<idi(i). 12. You suffer yourselves to be defeated by an ^'■'indifferent 
 gt>ni'ral. 13. To consign (tntdcn) one's self to the -''oblivion of ''""pos- 
 terity is absurd. 14. The troops commit {ithind'ire) thems.'lvfs to flight. 
 15. Theniistocles commits (^v>y//>>///'/<';Y) himself to the faith of the king 
 of the Persians. 10. It is disgraceful to abandon oncjs self to ''''licen- 
 tiousness. 17. The queen ""'attaches to herself the ^'hearts of the citi- 
 z<'ns by incredible '''profusion. 18. The king tries to reconcile to hini- 
 Belf the favor of the Konmn senate and i)eople. 19. The law forbids the 
 citizens to '••^attach themselves to secret societies. 20. The consuls 
 prevent the ambassadors of the king from showing themselves to the 
 people. 
 
 LKSSON XXXIl. 
 
 CLASSIFICATION AND INFLECTION OF FORM 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 Determinative Adjecth^es. 
 
 * •§ !999. 1. All adjectives are divided into descrtptive and 
 |] QRM-AD. iECTiVES. Tlio foHiier cxprcss i deas of th(Mr mvji, while 
 
 the latter merely refer to certain ffeneraLideas. The latter have 
 
 in common with the former their granmiatieal form, whence their 
 name. Thus the foriii^adjecti ve thUitow t a i ns no idea of its own, 
 such as we express for instance by the descri|)tive adjective <7oo</, 
 but it refers us to the general idea of place^ l)y whieii the noun, 
 to which it belongs, is distinguished from other things or persons 
 of the same class. 
 
 Rem. 1, All adjectives, considered hitherto, are descriptive. The 
 iJiBM-AuiiitTiVES generally a rc classified among the PHonouns 
 
 »' Rcfrressus. 69 Felicitas. «3 Doinepticus. «< Rolaxfttlo. o» To nhandon onf'n nelf, 
 8e (U'dere. »6 Mediocris. 67 Oblivio. »» Posteritas. *" Libld<». «o DevincTrc. «> Ani- 
 uins. 82 Largiiio. •» A(l.junj,'ora. 
 
 the^nnniiiH!^ns.Ciaii"g ^V"^ ptionomixal ^3B£|^^f - "L ^fg^ 
 TTVi^^IwN^^ur^while giher grammarmns assert, iliat thejc is a 
 dt5ThTrtlon-t)etween thestTterms, whiaahey however tail to state. 
 
 ^ § 310. 2. The form-adjectiv es are used as attributes of 
 
 nouns^'witll which they form attributi ve phrases. They, like the 
 
 de^ j-iptivc adjectives, agree with their ^ov^iing nouns in gender, 
 
 i^JIlH^cTIIId case. Form-adjectives^^erally^cannot be j^edj)rc: 
 
 dicativeh'. . . n ^ 
 
 — f^Tl . 3. The form-adjectives are divided mto five cla sses : 
 
 1 DCTFHMl'xATn^E, 2. Nu^iERAL, 3. QUANTITATI VE, 4. QUALITATIVE, ^ 
 
 5 I'^^^^TJ^^E Each of these classes appears in four different 
 for ms : l. 'Thc interrogative, 2. The definite , 3. The i ndefinit e, 
 
 4. TTTc'REirvrT v^.;) , 
 
 The interrogative form comprises those adjectives, by wliicn 
 we ask a question, referring to the general idea of their class. 
 The definite form gives a cejiain, and the indefinite form an un- 
 certain answer to the question. The relative combines the pro- 
 perties of an adjective and aconjiinction. It always assumes in 
 the Latin laug^^e the j^nj^of "the in terrogativc^ ljectives. 
 
 Th^^ni'^^^ -»-^ knowledge Jf dependent sentences, 
 
 win not be t^eparaicly considered for the present. 
 
 ^ •Jl*2. -i. The detenniuative adjectives refer to the INDIVIDUAL- 
 ITY o7 things or persons. They are distinguished by a peculiar iii- 
 flectior:, whicli often shows the earliest forms of the Latin cases. 
 Rem. 3. The chief pecnliarities in the inflection of the determinative 
 adjectives are the following : ^-.„ „^^ 
 
 i In almost all of them the genitive and dative sinoular are 
 of COMMON GENDER, the g.nitive having the tennination ms o. jus, 
 and the dative the termination i for all three genders. 
 
 2 In most determinative adjectives the nominative and ACCUSA- 
 TIVE singular of the neuter gender have the termination d. 
 
 -? The other cases gi'nerally assume the terminations of the MOV- 
 ABLE adjectives, but l>mewhat modified in several ^«^«^^f ->"-,;; 
 these adjectives. The interrog ATI VES of this class in dativ e an<l 
 Au. viMVE I'lA RAI. take the termination of the third declension 
 Vjus in good i)rose. 
 
 8 
 
 / 
 
170 
 
 DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § 943. 5. The iilterro^'alive form of tlie delermiim 
 tive adjectives consists of tlie words Quis (qui) and aler. They 
 are thus inflected * : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 n.URAL. 
 
 N. Qfiis, which, what; qui, what a, N. Qui, quae, quae, which, wliat 
 
 Fem. quae. Neuter quod 
 G. cujus, of which, of what, of 
 
 wiiat a 
 T>. cui, to wliich, &c. 
 A. quern, quam, quod, wliich, &c. 
 A. quo, qua, quo, by which, &c. 
 
 Q. quorum, quarum, quorum, oi 
 
 wliich, of wliat 
 D. quibus, to wliich, &c. - 
 A. quoft, quax, quae, wliich, &c. 
 A. quibua, by which, &c. 
 
 N. Uter, utra, iitrum, which (of 
 
 two) 
 O. utrlus, of which, kc. 
 D. utri, to which, &c. 
 A. utrum, ntram, utrum, which, &c. 
 A. utro, utrd, utro, which, «S:c. 
 
 N. Utri, iitrae, utra, which, &c. 
 like sacer § 51. 
 
 Kem. 4. The nominatives quis and qvi are so distiniruished, that hyqjfis, 
 which, we ask for the thini,' or person it.sc/f, but by qui for' their 
 qutdities. 'I'hus by asking Quih scriptor? (which writer, what 
 writer), we expect the name of the writer, or n demonstrative as 
 an answer. Hut by asking i^ui srriptor ? (what a writer), we inquire 
 for the QUALITIES of the writer, expecting such an answer as .scrip- 
 tor accurdtus, Oraecus, vetus. This distinction is not made in any 
 of the other cases, nor in any gender but the MAS( uline. 
 
 Rem. 5. Uter always must be used instead of quis or qui, when no more 
 than two things or persons are meant, even if in English the adili- 
 tion "of two" is not made. Thus in speaking of two ])oets, the 
 question *' Which j)o(t do you prefer? is translated hv "' Utrum (iio\. 
 queiti) poctani priKfrtisf 
 
 If we employ the addition " of tiro " in English, the student must 
 not be induced by the P]nglish plural, to use this number also in 
 Latin, as: Which tf tJie itco icriters, " utir scriptor, not utii sc/ip- 
 tores." The tluijal of f/ter is used only, if its g(jverning noun is a 
 plurale tantum. or if we speak of two paktiks, as: ^7/v^ nuptiae, 
 wliich of the two weddings; utrae parttH, which of the two 
 parties. 
 
 Rem. G. For the neuter form quid see Book III (absolute adjectives). 
 
 § d J:4. 0. The determinative adjectives of the definite form 
 are called cleillOimtralivr ailjrctives (conmionly de- 
 
 ♦ Whon in the followinsr paradijrms three forms an» nifntionod urMlt-r the same rasp, tlie 
 flrst beluiiffs t<» tli« MASCULINB, the second to the femimxk, and tlie third to the meutkb 
 geuder. When a case has one fynn only, it belongs to all three genders. 
 
 DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 in 
 
 nnvorss^ They arc: hie, this; iUe and isle, that; 
 idem, tlie same ; ip^, sell. . -^ jg oftciL 
 
 Besides these t^e ^-^;l^^^U by a relative. 
 I i„ place of ^Ue, '^^^^ ^^^,, ,„ thus dccW : 
 
 o '^ * * PLURAL. 
 
 BIKOU^AK. ^^ ^. ^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 N. Ili^, ''«^<^' '!''^' ^^''^ , G. Jiorum, harum, horum, of 
 
 (i. hujus, of this ^i^pgg 
 
 D. huic, to this ^ U j^^^ ^^ ^hese 
 
 A. Jiunr, hanr, hoc, tins i ^^^^^ ^^_^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^.g^ 
 
 A. hoc, hac, Iwc, by tins ^ /,|^, by these. 
 
 N. IUe, ilia, iUud, that 
 
 G. ilH'i-% of that 
 
 D. m, to that 
 
 A ilium, illnm,illud,ni^i 
 
 A. Ulo, ilia, illo, by that 
 
 IN. Illi, illae, iUa, those 
 
 1g. illOrnm, Ularum, illdrum, of 
 
 those 
 Id ilU-% to those 
 I A. illos, illa.% ilia, those 
 
 lA. illi^, ^>y t^os«- 
 
 SIMGUT.A11 
 
 N. Idem, eadem, 'idem, Oag same 
 
 G. ejusdem, of the same 
 
 D. eldem, to the same ,,^,Jo Isdem {eisdem, iisdem) 
 
 A. eundem, ^--^-'!' '^^^'t'^he ^mc ^' esdeL ea.lem, eadem 
 A. 6(^dtm,ec-aZ.m,cWtm,by thesamo^A. e^^^^ (^.,,^,,riAisdeni). 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. Idem {eldem, ildem), eaed^m, 
 ' eadem . ^ 
 
 G. eorundem, earundem, eorundem 
 
 Ia*. isdem {eisdem, iisdem). 
 
 N. Jp-'^e, ipxa, ipsum, — self 
 
 G. ips'ius, of — self 
 
 D. ipsi, to — self 
 
 A. ip^um, ipsam, ip^->fm, - seir 
 
 A. ip»o, ipsa, ipso, by — self 
 
 N Ipsi, ipsae, ipsa, - selves 
 
 G. ipsorum., ipsdriim, ipsorum, oi ■ 
 
 Bclves 
 D. iP'^i-^, to - selves 
 
 A. ipsos, ipsas, ipsa,— selves 
 
 A. ipsis, by — selves 
 
 being ]>^v><'''^ to tlie bix^ai^^' 
 
 ous sense. . . ^^^„ ,,,....; on with a NOUN is rendered either 
 
 the emphalical particles luy ^"^ 
 
 ■■■■M 
 
172 
 
 DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 173 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. Ipse consul, the consul hiiiisolf, tJio very consul, even tlie consul. 
 
 U. Ips'iKu co/isuUti, of tliu consul himself, of liie very consul, even of the 
 
 consul. 
 D. fpsi cohtiuli, to the consul himself, to the very consul, even to the 
 
 consul, &c. 
 
 PLURAL, 
 
 N. Ipsi ron.mlcs, the consuls themselves, the very consuls, even the 
 consuls. 
 
 G. Ipsonim consnlum, of the consuls themselves, of the very consuls, 
 
 even of the consuls. 
 D. Tpsin coiisulihus, to the consuls themselves, to the very consuls, even 
 
 to the consuls, kc. 
 
 Thus in the feminine: Tpm filia, the dauirhtor herself, «S:c.. whs ipsa, 
 the city itself, «S:c. ; and in the neuter : Ipsmn hi Hum, war itself, kc 
 
 Ipxe also is used as an attribute of ^ll02^ou^'S, as Cfjo ipse, tu ipse kc 
 For this connection see i^ 271), 280. 
 
 § 210. 8. The iiiflefilliic form of tlie determinative 
 adjectives leaves the individuality of persons or tliiniz:s more or less 
 uncertain. These adjectives comprise tlic different expressions 
 for the English terms aonie, any, each, other, no (none). They 
 are the following : 
 
 1. E(iuivalents of some : 
 
 AUqxis {(ftiqui), quidam, and the rarer qui^piam, some; 
 7ioiinulli (pi. t.), several. 
 
 2. Eijuivalents of any : 
 Quisquam and nUus. any ; 
 
 vter and ulte enter, either (that is amj of two). 
 
 3. Equivalents of each : 
 
 Q'lisqne, each, every, 'Uterquc,e2iv\\ of two, both, and the compounds 
 
 with vis and Hhet : 
 Quids and qnVihit. any you please, every jwssible ; 
 C/ir(7*^w and uU rlibet, either you please. * 
 
 4. E(iuivalents of other : 
 
 Alius, another ; oltn-, the other ; the plural ceteri, the others, and 
 rcliquus, the rest of. 
 
 5. Ecjuivalents of no : 
 Nemo and unllus, no ; 
 Neuter, neither (none of two). 
 
 9. These words are tlni.s inflected : 
 
 §24 7. Tlie compounds of <///As' (y^//) and vter infl(>ct these 
 m)rds only, while their prefixes and suffixes remain nnclianged. 
 Allqais makes the nom. sing. fem. and nom. and acc. neutek plur. 
 
 a ,,h.raniuml..i% w^^kcs the >.e. tor </ y ^.^Ue the mascu- 
 
 ,„e latter is used absolutely o.'b ( «« S ^^,)^ ^^^_^^ ^^ ,,o^ ^ ) 
 ,„.„ ,,as,ua,n may be ^^^J^ ^, ,^,„-, ,.,<i uter. For the 
 
 neuters m quul m^i^taa ui ^ i 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. AliquiB, aliqua, aliquod 
 G. alicujus 
 
 D. alicui , 
 
 A aliqaem. aliquam, ahquod 
 A. ali(iuo, aliqtiri, ahquo 
 
 G. cujusdam 
 
 A. quondum, quandam, quod- 
 
 dam * 
 
 A. quodam, quadam, quodani 
 
 rLTJRAL. 
 N. aliqui, aliqufc, aliqua 
 Q. aliquorum, aliquarum, au- 
 
 quorum 
 D. aliqiiibus 
 
 A. aVupios, aliquas, aliqua 
 A. aliquibus. , 
 
 i~^idam, quoedam, qunodam 
 G. quorundam, quarundam, &tc. 
 D. quibusdam 
 
 A. quosdam, quasdam, quoedam 
 A. quibusdam. 
 
 iTuterque. utraque, utrumque 
 
 G. ntriusciue 
 
 D utilque 
 
 A. utvum-iue, utramque, utrum- 
 
 que 
 A. utroque, utraque, utroque 
 
 N. utrlque, utramque, utraque, &<l 
 like uter. 
 
 each without ex- 
 
 aiura,n ntnnn.) ^^^^^,^,. ^^^^^ 
 
 § 248. The words ahus, «"^;- J" ''', ^,,.„,ai„g to § 242, 
 ,Ju. gcnUives in i.. and ^^^^'^J^.:: ;„ „« genitive drops 
 11. 3, without d>stu,ct,on ^[S^2l^.^^■,,, (aUl). AUer retams 
 on. i (alias), but «*^"'i"* '" *^/2 ? ^^Juter drops the e 
 
 r ' -^'''■^t;.?rr:n^«t;andi"-^^-'-^«- 
 
174 
 
 DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 175 
 
 lius. Ill all otlier forms these words are declined like movable 
 adjectives (§ 40, 51), except that alius makes allud, not allum^ 
 
 in NOM. it ACC. SING. NEUTER. 
 
 § tJ 10. Nemo is used in the sino-iilar only, and declined like 
 the noun homo (stem nemin), but in classical lanp^uage it lacks 
 the GENITIVE and ablative, which cases are supplied by 7niUus 
 (G. nuUlus, I), nemini, A. neminem^ Ab. nidlo). It can be 
 connected with nouns of masculine gender only, lldlquus and 
 the plural ceterl are declined like moval)le adjectives. 
 
 § SoO. 10. Those indefinite adjectives, which have the same 
 English equivalents, are thus distinguished from each other : 
 
 1. AU<iuls denotes an uncertain, but quidam a certain per 
 son or thing, which the author cannot or will not mention, 
 Quhpiam can be used in certain connections only. See p. 5j9, 
 R. 4. 
 
 Rem. 12. Qnidam generally is rendered by "a certain'' if thisexjires- 
 sion is used in a geiitaal sense, as Athenienids quidam, a certain 
 Athenian. 
 
 2. A?}!/ with feminine and neuter nouns, and in the plural with 
 nouns of all genders, must be translated by uUhs, not by qulsquam. 
 With MASCULINES iu the singular idhis must be used, if the noua 
 denotes a thing. l>ut with masculine nouns, denotini»* persons. 
 quisquam generally is used instead of idlas^ and always, if the 
 noun is national, as : 
 
 Gallns quUqifam, any Gaul, pJiiJosopJii ryjuf<qnam, of any philoso- 
 pher • but: liber ullu8,faiiiiia alia, acdus ultum. 
 
 3. Kemo has the same relation to nidlns, as qffisqtiam to 
 nllfis. Thus neiuo (except in the genitive and ablative) is used 
 before personal masculine nouns in the singular, while with fem- 
 iNiNEs, with nouns, denoting things, and with all kinds of nouns 
 in the plural, nullffs must be used, as : 
 
 Liher vullus, no lx)ok, homines nidli, no men, feminu nulla, no wo 
 man, scriptoris nuUlua, of no writer, a Hcnpttn'c nitUo, bv no writer 
 but : neuw ncriptor, no writer, Atheidenaem ncminem, no Atheniua. 
 
 4. Uterque, whose English equivalent hofh always has its 
 noun in the plural, must be placed with its noun in the singular 
 in Latin. It is placed in the plural, if its noun is a plurale tan* 
 
 utnmqiieiyartcs,h^^\^V^^'^;^- ^^^^ distinguished: 1. 
 
 5. The ciuivalents of « ''« ^ jf t^e question is be- 
 
 .. Tke olher^^ i« the ^•^-'-•^^« ^^^"^^ ^^S the pluV by ceteri, 
 
 twecn two only) is rendered J.^ ^" ',1 arlores, the other trees, 
 as : «tora wiw, the other tiec tet ^,^^ ,^^..^,_ 
 
 .ithout an article) are ^^-^^ ^' I heU^J.us answers 
 
 «„o,her land; «/"'« '''"■^'^j!^Zv Z'' ot/-'''' ''''''" ''"^"''' 
 to the English " the rest of o _ ^^^^ ^.^^^ ^^ ^,,^ 
 
 „.,„„s, denoting .luant.ties . . i J ./ » J ^^^^ ^^,^^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 placed hKfore the governing "«""^- »^ ;^ ^^,, ^p, ,ara) 
 
 S.aliaMtanaorfOrtanaalm'&c. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 •1 9 o Wliicb commander.' o- 
 IsTEnuoGATrvES. t . W''»- ^f!^^:^ ,- 5 Which of the two sol- 
 
 Tof which «■; la or which <^;>';,XoV;lrrtwo panels. |. 
 V 90 To ^vbat cbild •' j\- ^o ^^" ^^ «4 ^Vllat sea ('/&;.)" -^^; 
 
 %Vhich (-Vy.) of the two m-cUac^s -0 ^ ^.^^^ , ,2»- /J "I'^.^'S o 
 «7 liy whidi situation .' -»■ "f , o^j^ j^q bodu-s? ^?^1^-V "',.,, 
 i;:i,^„Mciihand.^^ 
 
 What burd.-us {c'bj.) '. 44, \> 3 .j,,,;, g «t. 4. 
 
 DKMOs-sTK.vTtVKS 1 ■l-ht.stone -. llu. ^ ^,j^^ -nte oner. 8. 
 
 That u.ouutaiu. ^ 11'^ ^;:>,,^ ,^,,t. 10. The very wound^ H Jh, 
 ■ The Buuie ..ege. ^^-XTl^^^l l^- Of thiB accident. 14. Ol 
 
 I 
 
176 
 
 DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 oath. 15. Of tliatold man. 10. Of tiat diadom. 17. Of that shavery 
 18. Of tlio same licir. 1!). Of tlio saiuo niuht. 20. Of the vcrv inilk. 
 
 21. Of oven 
 this ori«i:in. 
 same herd, 
 heart itself 
 ^rove {(>bj.). 
 
 tlio lion. 22. Of jiain its.lf 2;}. To this hous<'. 24. To 
 2.'>. To that inhtiitunce. 2<;. To tliat imai:e. 27. To the 
 28. To the same Ijojh?. 2!>. To tlie vcrv armv. :i(l. 'I'o tlie 
 ;}1. This fountain (ohj,). 32. This axe (ohj.) 38. This 
 . . , 34. Tliat tire {obj.). 3."). 1'hat tower {objX :U\. Tliat i>o«mu 
 {ohj.}. -57. Tlie same month (ohj.). 3S. The same fever {f;bj.). 3J». The 
 ship itself {ohj.). 40. Hy the Siime ranal. 41. Bv tins fire. 42. Bv this 
 defeat. 43. By that stream. 44. By that authority. 4.>. Bv the* very 
 root. 4(j. By the senate itself. 47! These attacks. 48. These voices. 
 4!). These rights. 50. Those kinds. 51. Tiiose hills. 52. Thos(^ houses. 
 53. The same valleys. 54. The same i)airs. 55. 'J'he sam<' armies. 50. 
 The very taxes. 57. Of these songs. 5S. Of these showers. 50 Of 
 these geese. ^^ GO. Of these pains. 61. Of those defeats. ()2. Of tlie 
 same arts. 03. Of the same young men. 04. Of the very mistakes. (15. 
 Even of calamities. 00. To tliese lakes. 07. To th<.se oxen. (;s. To 
 the same republics. 00. Even to the f<x)t-soldiers. 70. These journevs 
 {<>f>J.). 71. These cohorts (ohj.). 72. Th.'se armies {ob}.). 73. Those uiglits 
 {obj). 74. Those country-seats (^V/;.). 75. The same's» «ats (^V/j.). 70. The 
 same cushi(.ns (/>/;;.). 77. Even young men (obj.). 78. The very shii»8 
 {obj.). 70. By th.se old men. Xi). By those gfxls. 81. By the saiiie god- 
 de.sses. 82. By the brothers themselves. 
 
 Indefinites. 1. Some slave. 2. Some ship. 3. Some work. 4. A 
 certain priest. 5. A certain city. 6. A certain gift. 7. Any soldier. 
 8. Any flower. 9. Any inheritance. 10. Any danger. 11. Everv virtue. 
 12. Each king. 13. Every crime. 14. Both names. 15. Both lions. 
 16. Both legions. 17. Every possible lawsuit. 18. Any ])o«Mn vou 
 please. 10. Either law you please. 20. Another heir. 21. Another 
 head. 22. The other commander. 23. The other age. 24. No patri- 
 cian. 25. No state. 20. No spring. 27. Neither sister. 28. Neither 
 knee. 20. Of some cause. 30. Of a certain woman. 31. Of any Bo 
 num. 32. Of any moimtaiu. 3:5. Of everv <jccasion. 34. Of both ord.rs 
 35. Of every pos.sibh; name. 30. Of anoiher lield. 37. Of the other 
 treaty. 38. Of no Latin. 39. Of neither brother. 40. To some house 
 41. To any deity. 42. To uny Jew. 43. To each part. 44. To anv city 
 you please. 45. To another art. 40. To the other hand. 47. to no 
 knight. 48. To no journey. 40. Sonvi favor ('^6/). 50. Anv river (o/yy ) 
 51. Every robber {ohj.), 52. Both feet {oh}.). 53. Another ware {obj.). 54. 
 Ihe other side {obj.). 55. No clihf (.6/.). 5^;. No night {obj.). 57.^ Bv 
 some accident. 58. By a certain difhcultv. 50. Bv anv pain. (»0. By 
 every hel[). 01. By either house you ph'lis(\ (;2. *Bv !)oth lan-ua'-vs 
 63. By another fir»'. 04. By the other order. 05. Bv the rest of "the 
 money. 00. By no inhabitant. 07. Bv no nation. 08. Bv neither con- 
 sul. 09. Somt! soldiers. 70. Certain rol)bers. 71. Several arguments. 
 72. Any Athenians. 73. Other reasoin. 74. The other kinds. 75. No 
 hostages. 7(). Of some l)oats. 77. Of certain ships. 78. Of several 
 mistakes. 79. Of any leaders. 80. Of both i)arties. 81. Of the other 
 kings. 82. Of other pleasures. 83. Of no fortresses. 84. To certain 
 conditions. 85. To any verses. 86. To other things. 87. To othei 
 questions. 88. To no images. 89. Some nations {oi>j.). 90. SeveraJ 
 
 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 177 
 
 roots W.). 91. Any customs W.). ^'^^'^^'^(^.'^y^ 
 S'^^^T 5^ iJher ri^t^i^s!- ^ ^ the other chie^priests. 
 £ uo defeais. * 100. By both vacations. 
 
 99. 
 
 LESSOR XXXllI. 
 
 F OHM-ADJECTIVES. 
 SECTION II.-NUJIERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 o .-.-.-. 1 XrvFK^is are divided iuto cardiii."»!, ordi- 
 
 § 3.»-3. 1- •^.Vi™^^ ....i,,^ numerals. Tlie Cardiuals repre- 
 
 -"^ '"r " 'Tt^^nTa^b: ;:^ «g toTnLerical OHO.. Tl.e 
 
 ""'"*■ • f „11 numeral» sec X. of the Vocabularies. ThU 
 
 Kem 1. For a synopsis of all numerau si^ 
 synoiisis mist be committed to memorj. 
 
 CARDINALS. 
 I. Simple Cabdisals. 
 5 o^3 o The Cardinal Numerals are either simple car- 
 
 ^ *•* •• t, in the iudeclinabTe ,.lurale UntumqxotM^ m=^"y ? 
 
 „..„, nations ^.^ ^^^^^,^^ ^^^^ ^^^.^^^ ,) ,,^^^ 
 
 S --•*•'• ^«,.oU fnf SO many, and totiaem, 
 
 eViiiaUe .K>to>-..u.nv. n„m a^s .^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 just so (as) many ; 2) of the dean p^^iin^ble are only 
 
 ^riiey are ,luralia -^;""; ^7".^ more than one liun- 
 
 £r:dtr:;!ti"ro::ias^^^^^^^^ 
 
178 
 
 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 N. Trcs. tria 
 
 a. triiiiu 
 
 1). tribus 
 
 A. tris (tres postdamcal), tria 
 
 A. tribus. 
 
 Unvs forms the compound iinnfiquinqyie, earli oiio, in "vvliiHi both 
 
 unus and qiiit<quc are intiected. Duo and tres are thus declined: 
 
 N. Duo, dufP, duo 
 
 G. duorum, (lu<lruni, duorum 
 
 D. duobus, duabus, dur)l)us 
 
 A. duo (duos), (kiuis, duo 
 
 A. duclbu.s, duilbus, duobus. 
 
 Auiho, both, is declined like duo. An/bo is thus distinirnished 
 
 from utcrqiie, that the former means hoth totjcthery but the hittfi 
 
 each of them tfingli/. 
 
 Rem. 3. The numerals, expressing more than one hundred, are declined 
 
 like movable adjectives, as ducc/iti, ducentete, dnrenta ; (}. dncento- 
 
 rum, duceiiturum, ducentdrum, dx. The numerals, exprt^ssing moro 
 
 than one thousand, are 2^hrffsefi, formed by one of the smaller 
 
 imnurals as attributes, and the numeral noun uiiJI'ta as governinij^ 
 
 word. 'J1ie latter is of neutek gendeh, and declined after tho 
 
 third declension like the plural of a neuter in the vowel-elass ((V. 
 
 millium, D. <k Ah. miUihus, Arc. miUvf). The attributive numerals, 
 
 which nuiy be both definite and indefinite, either jtrecede or follow 
 
 the word uti/liei, and such of them, as are declinable, must agree 
 
 with it in gender and case, as : 
 
 Duo millia or millia duo, two thousand; trecenta millia or 
 
 millia trecenta, oOO.OOO ; 
 muUa m\\\\i\, uiaiti/ ■thoi(f>i(nd {G. duorum millium or millium 
 duorum, &:c.). 
 
 Rem. 4. The nouns, connected with numerals from 2000 upward, are in 
 Latin always i)laced in the genitive tlckal, being cf)nsidered as 
 ATTKIBT'TES of the governing noun millia. The arrangement of 
 these ])hrases is fourfold, as: 
 
 2000 .Wf//V/',v, duo militum millia, r>;' militum millia duo, <>r duo 
 millia militum, or millia militum duo; /'// 10.000 inen, diH\n\\ 
 hominummilibus, r>/' hominum millibus decern, or decern millibus 
 hominum, (tr millibus hominum decern. 
 Rem. 5. The numeral iidUe is an iu'leclinable ad.tecttve, and is used oi 
 one thousand only, its governing noun alone being declined, as: 
 oppida rnille, G. oppidnrum inille, D. oppidis miUe. But in the nom. 
 and ACC. 7)dlle sometimes occurs as a substantive, having its noun 
 in the genitive pujkae, lik«' millia, as vnUe h(>miini)n, 1000 men. 
 Rem. 0. The compound numerals [that is 81, 40, 5:5, 0(5, 702, &c.] gen- 
 erally are expressed by cooHDINATIon, according to the following 
 rules : 
 
 1. From 20 to 100 the larger number either precedes without r/!, 
 or ft illows with et, as : rifjinti tn s or treK et n'f/i/tti. In comi)oun(ls with 
 o//f' the numeral //////.<? remains in the siNcuii.VK. agreeing with ita 
 noun in ca.^e and gender only, as: 51 women, ftininae qninqnafjiuta 
 una ; 21 cities, oppida uintm et riginti. 
 
 2. In numerals over 100 the larger number always prec(^es, 
 either without or with tt, which is ])laced immediat«'ly after the 
 larger number, as : 'Soii, trtccnti qainquayinta sex; lVo2, miUe {ct] 
 %excenti triginta duo. 
 
 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 179 
 
 3 u n.no.aU aenof.ng .«ore t.an one JOOO, - ^HK 
 
 latter, ,md c.m,.ot be^"-;^*; J^ruction, and ^^J^^Xf^„uau„^), 
 the case, rwiuiretl oj i ^^^.^-^^ treceuU Iwmiiim (uu 
 
 "■r"''';;;,':; <;• «^(r/;<>.«i«ft«- , . „ „ <, generally are 
 
 titcntu), ~J- "' .,. / ,„, one million 
 
 Keiii'^'mtrruls i(o™ one '^^t^m!>^^^^ 
 
 the fractional parts of the as. ^imidius, a, vm, or by 
 
 diundia pars ^^^/ .? ^he otlier fractions are ^^ ^'^\^ ^^^^ third of a 
 
 Kem y- D'-ftnite numerals oi ai c^riTW. 
 
 ^"%r.c>-i>' ilHir """"-....^io,, of numbers ^^-as done by CAPrr 
 
 LETTEUfe (.8*« >v. .-.^..g «-reater. inu^ IJJ ^.vpfi-s: the siiTU 
 
 lJ03'r' ,' ,, „s .is annexed. Aliusv,v,i ten thousands, 
 
 CCI03 CCIOO; 312,000 - 
 CCIOO CIO CIO- 
 'T'i^':f -rf^rnSnUe numerals, answering to the .ne.Uou 
 
 guoCare the fono^^i..g : ^^^..^^^^^ ^^_ ^. ,ery many, most 
 
 Solus, alone, only ^^^^^.^ ^, ^^ few 
 
 aliquot ) geveral r>aucwres, fewer 
 
 complures S paucissimi, fewest 
 
 multhnvMY all 
 
 j,lurc. (pU>ral oi plu.), moie ^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^ 
 
 plurirni, most 
 
180 
 
 NUMER.VL ADJECTITES. 
 
 The indefinite nmncrals arc thus inflected: Alh/uot is an inde- 
 clinable plurale tantuiii. ^ulns and totfts are declined like uinis 
 (G. solius, totlfis^ &c.). Multi^ phirhui^ panel and phrique 
 (the last without a genitive) are declined like movable adjectives. 
 Omnls and the pi. t. complures are inflected after the 8d declen- 
 Bion like an adjective of the vowel-class. PUit^ in the sinirnlar is 
 a QUANTITATIVE adjcctivc (see l. xxxiv), being used in the xkctkr 
 gender only ; its gex. is pluris ; dat. nnd abl. wanting. But its 
 jdural plures (ni. «fc f.) with the neuter p^lnnt (not pin rid) is 
 coni})lete {G. plKrhan, 1). <(; Abl. plarihnt^^ Acr. plnrU^ pt^nra.) 
 
 Kem. 11. *S'o^/.f, which represents the unity of the indefinite numerals, 
 is translatiid hy oiili/ or (tUnie, and ia used in both sinij^uhir and 
 ]>hiral. TIk; drfinirc numeral xhkh often is eniplovtd in the same 
 sense, and is tlien likewise used in both nnnihers, as: 
 
 i<cipi() <'/(?^>//r, 8olus Scipio or unus fc^cipio; of t lie onJy naxon^ 
 
 solius or unius causje ; hi/ virtue alone, sola 6»/* una virtfite ; oii/(/ 
 
 the lioinanx, soli or uni Koniani ; hy the horsemen alone, soils or 
 
 uuis e(]uitil>us. 
 Rem. 12. Tutus answers to tlie question '' h'>w mnni/ jvnf.s', and ia 
 op|X)se(i to the fractional definite numerals, corresponding to the 
 Eni^iish "the whole" or ''the irhole of" The singular of o,'////j.y fre- 
 quently is used in the same siiruification. The English *' the whole 
 <f" cannot he literally translated into Latin, but must he changed 
 into an ad.iix'TIVE attributive jjlirase, as: 'JVk irh"lr qt' Gaul, omnia 
 or tota Gallia {/lOt Gallite), Ace. omneni or totam (raliiam. 
 
 Oniuis in the sini^ailar frequently is used as a determinative ad- 
 jective in the meaniiiu" o[ qoisque, every, while in the plural [oninea) 
 it corresjxinds to the English all, as: omne citiuin, every vice; 
 omueH hoininex, all men. 
 Rem. 13. The indefinite numerals generallyj^/vrrrZe their governing nouns. 
 
 § !358. T. The adverlliS, formed from the cardinal mi- 
 merals, answer to the question qifoties, how often ? They are 
 formed by the termination les, except those corresponding to the 
 first four numerals (Vocab. X). Thus are formed the adverbs 
 totles (so many times, so often), alupioties and pluries (several 
 times) from tot^ al'upiot^ phires. Pler'upie forms the adverb 
 2)lerumqne (generally, mostly). The adverbs formed from the 
 Other indetiniles belong to the quantitative class (p. 188). 
 
 IT. DTSTIUnUTIVE NUMERALS. 
 
 % 9«S9t 8. The Distributives are a class of cardinal numerals, 
 peculiar to the Latin language, denoting a naml)or, rei)cated as 
 
 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 181 
 
 o,e„. . there a. indivUlua. or u Us ^^^^:^^ 
 noun, to which the -^J^ J"^,, the addition of 
 shnple cardina >uvmcral, ejU^i -' J „.^,, ,,„u>m, even the 
 
 X. Voc. col. 5. ^^^ ^^^^^^^^^ , ,„,j, 
 
 r- ..«.xTov In the followinc sentence: / ^'^ '''?/V"„,;,,eeived to -be as of^ 
 
 'T^:)inr^^X^-^^-^ ''''''^r'^''"''%^ls^roan« r/nul^ be translate.! by 
 , ,.t.-a.l "t tl.o *l'"l'lr ■•»'''"« nasMluT'e anus 1., another, «s: 
 «.,„. u. Th., a.tH.,u.ive ^^^^•^l::^^Xl^^^Z:^^^ 
 
 gdi'eoUuun^. 2. U ul.o ^'»'St (^? 'b>^Sve nu\uoi-al retVr.. as : 
 fonnectod «ith the ""»"■ ",« V',' suta'l il W«™»* ^««« ^'*"I- 
 A-m-A h.„ch /'«»/"«'• *';''*'i^''lf;eExrLtsATioN n.itrUt be tlius ei- 
 
 '^j^c:^ r;r .'"."«^ -.... .^w^^» *"• 
 
 T?,.m 15 IVistril.utives are used in V^acc oi ,,,,ieh have a singu- 
 
 to meaning as «,™ <-.-i- V,,, a ca^na^ 
 
 'Jua^'mtiu) ; tunc bouses, trmu. «.des. 
 
 ORDINALS. 
 
 ,,«,»..»> .i««l.« (-''='" ";• e„.»cr.ied XI. Toe. coL 
 
182 
 
 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 183 
 
 ultimas ^ summiis, the Jilghest 
 
 extrenins t tJie last intiiims, the lowest 
 
 postreimis ) ineclnis, the middle. 
 
 All ordinals, except jirior and cdfer, tonniiiate in hs, and are 
 
 inflected like movable adjectives. Prior has the inflection of a 
 
 COMPARATIVE. Scc Lcsson XXX VII. 
 
 Rem. If). Quotuft corres]V)nds to tlie Enirlisli 'which' or ' ichat\ if an 
 ordinal mimber iy cxpcctiHl as un answer, as: W/u(f ijiurf Quotas 
 {)i»t quis) annus— Answkr : the tire'fth—; What o'rlorkf Qaota 
 hora (litcraily: ' which hour in ord>'r'). Q'lotusquixf/Ke generally is 
 translated by ' hoic few !\ and is declined by inrtectin<j: ^>oth words, 
 quytiis and quisque. It always is used absolutely, that is without a 
 noun, in Latin, and occurs in the MASCuuxl-: sincular only. 
 Hence its prkihcatk, which in p:n<>:lish always is in tlie pmkal, 
 must b(; the singular in Latin, as: How few underdaud those 
 rates/ Quotus(iuis(iue regulas illas intelligit! 
 
 Obskrvation. In tho cunipiifation of the c.\i.F.M)AU-YKAns an»! tlio norRs of tlie 
 i>AY, \vi' ;:iMierally ii.<e «^aiidinal numbers in En::li>h. wliil»- in Lntin Ortlinals nni.st 
 be einployt'tl. a.s: G o'c/<n-i\ horn sexta (litt-rally t/if nUth hour); the year IMJO, 
 annus inillesiinus octinirontesimiis se.xagesimus se.Mus. 
 
 Rem. 17. Th(^ comi)ound Ordinals are formed according to the same 
 rule as the coiuponnd (,'anlinals [Hem. 0], as : the 27th, vicesiiuus 
 sei)timus, or se])tinms et vicesimus. The Ordinals more frequently 
 follow than precede tlieir nouns. 
 
 Rom. 18. All adverbs, formed from ordinal nunu^als. have the form of 
 tlie neuter adjectives, either in the aecasative or ablative singular. 
 Those that occur in Latin, are enumerated J V. No. 4, as ///////////?, 
 for the first time, ^;;v//^<>, in the flrst i)lace. The ordinal advrrbs in 
 scmietimes are used instead of those in am. In enumerations the 
 adv»'rbs in o are more frecjuently ust^l. than those in inn, as: Uei/t- 
 teiidx jird to d"ccicc the citiz>'iis, thni [sccoiall!/] to biconie a co/t,sui, 
 and laiithj to destroy the republic, Priuio civTs decipere, dcinde consul 
 fieri, postremo rempublicam evertere cupit. 
 
 MULTIPLICATIVES. 
 
 § ^Od. 11. The MULrirLic.\TivE numerals either denote the 
 number of PARTrf, of which a whole consists, and then thev are 
 formed by the termination ]>Ir.r, as i<imp!e.v, duplr.r, frip/r.r ; or 
 they express the multiple of another number, and t\un they ter 
 minate in plN><, as i<implt(!<, dnphni, triphcs^ (f:c. Those in pJrx 
 are inflected like adjectives of the od declension with vowel- 
 stems (duplex, G. dnpricis, Ahl. dnpltvi, N. jjl. n. dnp]i,-ia, G. 
 duplicium). Those in plu^ are inflected like movable adjectives. 
 
 The multiplicatives are reudered either by cardinal numerals 
 
 1 I with '' four or by a numeral adverb with the addi- 
 compoundecl with M^ , y ^^^^^^^^ ^.^^ ^^ ^^,,^^ , 
 
 tion of ''as murh'\ as tnj^iex actt*, a 
 
 qnadruplum, four times as much ^^^^ 
 
 NEUTER siN(;ULAR "^ .^^^'^^^fVl'tVuirtold amount. ^,, . 
 
 quadropJI, a tine, eonsistn^g of t^^^^^ ^^^^^^^.,, ^,,1,. All of 
 
 ReuL 20. MuUiplieatives ar*> toimed l^om a ^^uiplicativc of 
 
 tbt'se are enumerated VllL K'>c. i^o. j. 
 the i/oEFl-M-i-E form is ,uuiUl>lex, manyiold. 
 
 EXERCISKS. 
 
 6TMrl.E CARDIKAI, NUMERALS. 
 
 t.Ho,vn.«nyGre..kB! 2. How many arg—! „3.^0fW_-nj 
 years'/ 4. To lu.w ma,^" ox.-n 5 O,^ an g^^^^^^ ^^^ ,^,, j 
 
 ^7. One study. «. ' l>e ^^<' ^^^Z\hl !•'■ «f '1'« ""'-^' "i"*' i^' 
 kin.i. 11. 1- te only. 1.. ?° {/„„\,. ,„ee. 1«. To glory alone. 1 .. 
 Of the mouth ah.n.'. ^''o^?,; j ,1°" ii, „e. Ifl. Only by |.overtv. .0^ 
 The only metho, "/»>). 1«;,^ „ ;°^.'' g.,. Of robberies alone 23 To 
 One armistice. -1- ''<',"' ,;. .".X gods. 2.->. Two suns 2C. Two 
 the housc-s alone. 24. Onl) ^,^ *'^ «»"«; ^^,^., 09. of Wx, partf. 
 
 «ystetus. 27. 'l;71"''.;'°'l^,,{;^thvl'..ns. =«. Two orders (^^^.^Sf^ 
 30. T,. two oratots^ ;^ ,„ ^ ,vmnen. 3.5. Of three oxen. 30. lo thice 
 Two lx)ats (/*;.>- "■*• ^ '"^, V. ' ,j,i 1 as Of four soldiers, 'l^- ^i xi 
 kings. 37. Three toot^soia.er» (.-^ A 43 By 38 
 
 ^,.t 40 1« years. 41. Ot 2b <lays. /*■„,. .0 „ints (s,'.r(n«w.«). 46. 
 llKmtl^t'- 44. if 31) pounds and a^^;;^- ;^^,^* ^^ ,h Inches ^gUu^ 
 Bv 40 acres irigerum) 4*. oJ l^;^:,^^^ 51. ;>3 sides. 52. 34 c ties 
 4<). 'M ^swrc.s (sesterti'is)^ B^^QuestTons 55. Of 52 sheep. 5b. (.3 
 5:>.. 41 head of cattle. 54. B> 4^ q^^^^^^^^^ 59. icxxxviii years. bO. 
 ii,i«fike< 57. 78 kinds. 08. J2 ^^oncs. ^^^ sesterces. 03. 
 
 inis«i<i^«-^- '^" . nf'fi jif words, o-i. ct^'^'-^^-^' ^ \ (\(\ 
 
 oxi.ii sentences. 01. CCCLIII ^^oJ » ,«>unds (po„do). (>b. 
 
 mxMI feet. 04. DCI.VI paces. C.>. WCLXn g,,, „ ses- 
 
 DccnxXT. slaves. 07. dcccci years •f,,<^^Jj \". '."rs (of the alphal«tO 
 t.,'ee„ 70. ccw cc.oo sesterces. '}:\?\'lf l^^,, 7V 1,13 cio («000) 
 72 To CIO c» CIO CIO Boldters. ;3^^' f^ !;,„,. 77. To CO cio 10 
 horsemen. 75. cci.» houses. .0. «> X« 79 coiJO ccioo CLi paces. 
 '^r'"U.. 78^ "^^iri^SLcccSoooo sesterces. 82. ccccioooo 
 
 'c?ccSI"■o<"^S:»«■--^-ooc«c^^^ 
 
 8:i. One fonrth of a l""»'^/ fp.fj„Xi ^^' the artny. 87. O so many 
 7»m1 8.") HaUah<mse. H,. loonenai ., ^,<,tions (»';;.)• ™; 
 
 ve Aes 8H. T., jttst as many l'"'''"-^ .„^^- ^',?•^S"e treaties. 93. Of 
 M^n lightnings 91. «.v '^Y" ^'^"'^ y^r^..i wares. 9«. Very 
 
 , .. vTtions 94. More orders ("'y.l- •'•>• "> " „ ,, ,.„n,iitions. 99. 
 
 — r; 'rs (..-.). 3^ ,rgc^;i: j'r ^ loi^^i:^^^ 
 
 All animals. 100- *»J ■"' fe TZTTZ, 
 
 » The Tt(nr\m capitab, usea uero » 
 Latin nuineruls. 
 
184 
 
 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 102 Of tlie whole difficulty. 103. To tlio whole cohort. 104 The 
 wiiolo {ohj.) of the army. lO.j. By the whole of the -lobe. 100 Few 
 pleasures {ohj.). ^ 
 
 DISTIUIJUTIVES. 
 
 1. Sin^ul;ip arcos a siii<jrulis cohortihus dcfrnduntur. 2. Ecjiii pedes 
 quaternos habent, -iusecta seuos, cuiicri auteni denos. 3. Leo-iones Ko- 
 iiiame ])cdituni cohortis dcna.s sin.irula' autcm cohortes qumlrin.rrnoa 
 yici'nos mihte^ continent. 4. Militibus •^i)r<'etorianis sin'-ula millia -^Pes- 
 tertium. cohort ibus,^urbani.< (luin-rni, -U-^ionariiB trecf-ni Au-usti -tes- 
 tamento f legantiir. 5. J ricit's tricr-na sunt iion^r,>nta. ({. Sin<nila tcninli 
 latcra (juiniy deujacohnnnis ornantur. 7. Binas horas 'musica», ternas 
 granmiaticje, (piatt-rnas Veonietria' studio quotidie -'trihuere soleinus. 
 
 1. Tu-o acros of '"land to each are divided "anion|r the plebs "* The 
 -Mormons ^-marry two, three or more wives. ;}. The fiiurcrs of men 
 inn7' iT'' 'J""^^«' ^'^'' ' 'tiiimih (has) two. 4. Each "^re^iment contains 
 100,) sokhers. o. The leaihT i)romises one '"talent to each consi)irator 
 (>. 1 wo .slaves '^are allowed to each soklier. 7. Each wall (of the house) 
 IS supi)orted by « ' "]>osts. 8. Most houses of this <itv have two -"stories 
 y. A centurion generally leads 100 soMiers. 10. The (hiunivirs allow to 
 each '-'colonist 10 acres of '^-land. 11. Five times 23 are 115 12 Six 
 times 38 are 228. 
 
 OKDIXALS AND JrO.TIPLICATIVES. 
 
 1. Of the first year. 2. The first ranks. 3. Of the second battle 4 
 To the third house. 5. The fourth street (oh}.\ 0. Bv the fiftli dau-diter 
 t. A sixth wedding. 8. To the eleveuth hour. !>.*Bvthe l{)ih "^''cen- 
 tury. 10. By the 28th regiment. 11. Of the ;}Oth sentence V^ Tiio 
 4l8t -'cliai>ter (^%'.). 13. By the ol.-t -miU'stone. 14. To the (I'M ques- 
 tion, lo. To the 110th day. 10. By the 273d night. 17. Of the vear 
 \t::^ ^^- ^'"^"^' o'clock. 10. The lOOlst month ((.6j.). 20. By the Vear 
 
 21. ^Vhat -'•■class (in order)? 22. Bv what day (in order)? 23 To 
 what legion (in order)? 24. How few are unhurt! 2r>. How few prefer 
 truth to life and wealth ! 20. How few seem to observe this law ' 27 
 The last ])rovince. 28. Of the last city. 20. I?v the last reason. 3o! 
 Ot the highest mountain. 31. By the lowest val lev. 32. The hi.diest 
 ^'to|)s. 33. Of tiie middle houses. 34. Bv the middle h gion. 3.').^']'he 
 soldiers attack a double numher of the euf^nies. 3(). We do not wish 
 to ^'\>xpose ourselves to a threefold danger. 37. The garrison ca» 
 '"withstand the attack of a tenfold number of soldiers. 
 
 NUMERAL ADVEItUS. 
 
 1. It is necessary to read this hook twice. 2. We do not wish to say 
 
 3. You must repeat this sentence several 
 
 the same thing three times 
 
 (Juhoris urbaua, a citt/'Cohort. t Lt -fire, to beqututh 
 
 QUANTITATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 185 
 
 •in" '■, This man now is consul for flie third 
 time*.. 4. 101 tnnos 3 a^o «0., • Thm ma ^.^^^^ „ , ^,„^„ 
 
 limu (!. ^Vl• iii'«"'l W a-'K'at tj". '^ • 'c.. „.b,.lUoii tlum the history of 
 it relates the «.i.se ""'' ""n^"'!,^' ^^le "president. 8. To be 
 |,c «ar i..s..lf. and lastly l^;/'^';^ fj,; bo ish, and tl.irdly disgrac*^ 
 
 oad time is accused of a thelt. 
 
 SECTION III 
 
 LESSON 
 
 FOKM-ADJECTIYES. 
 
 .-QUANTITATIVES, QUALITATIVES AND 
 POSSESSIVES. 
 
 I. QuANinATIVES. 
 
 . »P1 ^ Or^NTiT.TivE adjectives are those, which include 
 
 § 263. 1. Q' ' Y'^T I i„,,,^ f„„ctiou IS that of 
 
 the idea of an ailioillll, a»^ ,':'",„„, ^^ ^re measured or 
 
 deter,nun.O "- 5"-';^;{- .^Ju 'm But they also are 
 UK'ighed, as : vinum, «'"'"• (^.^^.^,^^ ,f ^^stiuct nouns, as : 
 used iu order to detcrmuie the intensity oi 
 tempu^, dolor, virtus. Tlicy consist : 
 
 2. Of the uEFiNiTES tantusy so mucti, so gic , 
 
 inst so (as) nnicli. 
 
 3 Of the following Indefinites : 
 .„,„„«., not a little ;y-;-.-r' 
 
 , very '- J;^,,,^^, ^djective^ have two constructions : 
 ^ -*-■?>• "r We s plved in the sikg. of the NEtrrEK gex- 
 
 „.:;;:jitfjrd;rtas— the.^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 parum, too little, 
 
 not enough 
 satix. enough 
 nihil, nothing. 
 
 i:^, ..P.„cers. »r<,^/.a««.o>rcu.ve„,re. »3 In.o.™odas. 
 
186 
 
 QUANTITATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 amount of wine); quaiituiii argonti, hofc much silver; 
 taiitum teinporis, so inur/t time. 
 This is called the partitive coxsTRrcTiON". 
 h. The adjective retains, as it always does in English, i\\Q 
 form of the attribute, and agrees with its governing noun in 
 gender, number and case, as : quanta audacia, how much 
 boldness ; multo vino^ by much wine. 
 
 The FORMER construction is the rule, when the adjective 
 stands in the nominative or accusative singular. J>ut in con- 
 nection with abstract nouns, the adjective 'inay, even in thi;? 
 case, be construed according to the latter method, as : quanta 
 temerltas, what a recklessness ! 
 
 The latter construction always must be used, if the adjective 
 
 is in another case than nominative or accusative sin^nilar, as : 
 
 tanto tlmore (not tanto tlmorls), by so much fear. 
 
 § 5J05. 3. The following quantitative adjectives: ;>/?^<f, ;j>r/?/- 
 
 luin, 2)arum, nihil and satis are of neuter gender, having neither 
 
 a MASCULINE nor a feminine form. They have no other cases but 
 
 nominative and accusative singular. Hence they aliratjs must 
 
 be used in the partitive construction, as : more water, ])lus aqui^; 
 
 a little 2Kitience, paulum patientia) ; 7iot provisiotis enowjh, 
 
 parum frumenti ; hlood enomjh, satis simguinis. XlJill is tiien 
 
 translated by ''no," as : '' nlJdl praemli;' no reward; nihil auri, 
 
 no gold. 
 
 Kem. 1. When the En<rlisli adjectives morf, a littJr, enough, etc., must 
 bo translated by J.atin genitives, datives or al)latives, the w(»rds, 
 mentioned above, cannot beuscil.and otlu-r expressions, or circuinlo' 
 cations must be emi)loye(l. Thus, instead of ;>///.s we sav " ///a;^;" 
 copid'' {&. greater quantity); instead ot\/>^/^//////^ we enii)l(>y the de- 
 scriptive adjective exir/uaH ; instead of satis the relative clause 
 ''quodsatlH est"; instead of nihil the determinative nu/l>f8. 
 
 Eem. 2. The adjective 7ni/,)fs, in tliis form, likewise is a neuter, and can 
 be used in tlie PAinniVK construction onlv. It has a masculinti 
 and feminine form minor (Lesson XXXVIII."), which liowever is a 
 dp:scriptive adjective, corresiwmdinof to the English adjective 
 *' .wiall(r'\ This DKSCHii'TiVE adjective minor, in connection with 
 the noun r^/)/^', must be used instead of the quantitative adjectivo 
 minus, if the construction re<iuires a genitive, dative or accusative, 
 as : by less water, minvre aqaac, copid. 
 
 § 906. 4. The other quantitatives (tantus, quantus, &e.) 
 have a complete inflection, and may be used either in the partitive 
 
 QUANTITATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 181 
 
 +1 of fhev ao-ree with their nouns in number, 
 construction, or so tl^^^V^^^^^^^'-l^^^, ,, . .,,anta induh;entia 
 gender and c.^e acconl^^ ^ J ^ Mndujence ! tantnm spor 
 
 r/s') by much labor. 
 
 a.lio.-tivs •■ Low Kr..at ad so pre , ^^^^^^^^^ .^,,^^ 
 
 translated l,y m".7«" '''<;''' ^? "f ,^,,e Vequenlly expressed by 
 
 ri' t :;;;;:rer^d-;-,^tft\?.X)c4- so ^.^^ .«- 
 
 I': L\Untw (not quot ^";J '"j^f :;;:;• ,„.,„es occur in diminutive 
 
 II QUALITATIVES. 
 
 - ---^^^^'^/r WaWe ,u.Us, what kind of, what 
 
 Th orf of the iin-tte tak such Uind of. such, as : 5««^- 
 
 rir, whkt kind of man ; tails v!r, 'f^J'J'^l ^^^^i^„,i„„ of the 
 
 T,oy nre infiected ^'^.^^^l^ J „L, nnt.her and 
 
 vowel-class, and agree w.th thur n.^- « ,„,; ,,,jo, 
 
 case, as : Qualia ammaUa, ^^hat kind 
 
 by such a word ,,,„,„a,ive, ^«^-f,^J'?S'c:S^^«S^^ 
 
 III. TOSSESSIVES. 
 
 ^ orVH-etives represent the three 
 
 ^208. 6. The '"^^^'^f^^JIL instead of the gen^ 
 
 pramtnatical rr.usoxs as ^™ ^^ ;""j ^'^,,, „„,,er, our father 
 
 Hive case of the personai. ™°'^,°;^^,^^ \,,e 1. au interrogative 
 
 (instead of "«/<e/W'«'-'>/'")- ^'^'^ " 
 
1S8 
 
 QUANTITATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 form ctfjifs, ctfja^ a(jian, wliich is tniiislatod by the Eiiglisli poa 
 sessive case w/tose, but in g-ood prose rarely occurs ; 2. a definite 
 form, wliicli is derived from the stems of the personal pronouns : 
 
 mens, 7n)/ 
 iioster, oar 
 
 tuus, th}/ 
 vester, f/our 
 
 suus 
 
 his, her, its 
 (heir. 
 
 Rem. 7. From tlio stem of the pronoun of tho 3d person i.% en, id no pos- 
 scssivc udji-ctive is foniu'd. Instead of it tliti «jccnitives cjnx, (nritiii, 
 edniin are used, the dislinetion of which from the j)ossessive 
 suns will be ex])laincd L. XXXVI, Rem. 5. 
 
 Rem. S. The inflection of the possessives is that of tho movable adjec- 
 tives, l^ut meus has mi, not inee, for the vocative sin<;ular of tiie 
 masculine, as : y;a\/fV/, O ray son ! Xosttr and lu-diT lose the e of 
 the terminati<m cr in their inflection — ff:m. nostra, GKS. nostn, vos- 
 trae, dr. Possessives }i;envvdl\y fof/ow their nouns, except the voca- 
 tive ))ti, and when tht y are used with emphasis. 
 
 Rem. !). Tlie ])osseS8ive adjective of the od ])erson, .s>/v.^, has an ANTE- 
 (KUKNT, like the j)ronouns of the od ])ers<m. In tlie Kui::lish lan- 
 gUiiije the ])ossessives his, her, its, their, assume the gender of this 
 anti'cedent, which is not the case in Latin. Here the posses.sive 
 agrees with its ^^ny/v«i///7 noun, like other adjectives, and not with 
 its antecedent. Thus^V/^y .v//?^v may mean his. Iter or their son, and 
 (iinirltui sff'f may denote his, her or their fri'ialxhip. 
 
 Rem. 10. The P^nglish possessives, frequently are not expressed at all in 
 J^atin, when they are easily understood from the connection, as: 
 Parents loce their children, purentes liberos amant. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 § ^00. t. The Possessives do not form adverbs at all. The 
 Qualitatives qualis and talis iovm the adverbs qiuditer and 
 taliter, but these have no classic authority. The Qimntitatives 
 borrow the accusative sinij^ular of their mniters for adverbs ; 
 honcG plffSj sat is^ niiaus^ 2^'f^^^^'^^^i I^^^fram arc used as adverbs 
 without any change. Instead of tantum and qHanttoa the ad- 
 verbs tantopere (so much) and qnantopere (how much) fre- 
 quently occur. Niiaius makes the adverb niniis, 
 
 J^x. You speak enough, satis lo(pnmini. They do 7iot 
 pronounce distiucth/ enou(/h, })arum dilucide enuntiant. 
 IIoio iiiucJt do ice lore thee, quantopere te diligimus ! 
 
 Rem. 11. Tliese quantitative adverbs have the pecnliarity. that they 
 may indicate the intensity or the dei,n"<'e of AD.iKCTi vi:s or other 
 ADVEKHs, and must then be consideretl as their onjEC Ts. as : 
 
 IVie troops fujht less vigorously, Copiee minus acriter pugnant. 
 
 QUANTITATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 189 
 
 run.nf enoiinli DlsclpuU satis dlligentes sunt, 
 hitead of (,«»/«;-». and l''^''^''^^^^ a ll^tivei or adverbs, as: 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 OU^NTITATIVES AND QUALITATIVES. 
 
 QLAMii- , How nuicU dnns? 4. 
 
 1. How much pay-! 3. ^\li;^:^^^^ ^\:io^uonce! 0. What a per- 
 Hown.ucUadvama^'o! ... ""^: «•«^^*,''"^ To ll0^v great an enm.ty! 
 L.verunce! 7. Of Uovv mncU asarce^ S.^^^^ ^^_^,^.,, jjy fa^t a 
 
 9. 15v how macU meat! 10. «> ' ,., ii„^v great an.l u.an> mir- 
 
 sch,.lnr.ldp! Vi ]^'';^ P^ ^f^^ {:. Not a little advauta^e. 16 
 ,w.les' 1 1. Not a Uttle iron (.A'"-""!' .^ ' ,g go luucli authority. 1!) 
 
 i''u : 'mucl- wine. 2.^ J«f -,-- ' ^ moiey. I»- M-»» ^f% 
 o- isv much Hay ('<'-y'««"- 7p^;„ ,, 'X n.-Mi-en.-e. 3-3. More fo. a 
 "iV U"v t<K) much hread. 31- T..o uuuu n<o r, ^ yy -joo 
 
 :;r>iorr Bleep. ^' !^j^'^^:^':^,J^.^^^ ^T^^, t 
 
 little diligence, i.- ^"' f ^.^^U. 4U. Not foith enou.gh. 41. Nc 
 yegcables (j^^--^ '^J^'ig M.V.t silver. 44. Very much fear. 4o. 
 
 47.\vhat kir>a of '^ '«^I, ...^^;, ,ro;'':rgan>eut ■.' ol. .^Hat kmd oi 
 
 POSSESSIVES. 
 
 inev! 0. O my tn.ud! 7. ''"> ^ ,.,.^ j... Hcr danger. 13 I 
 
 ron,:^- G:o myfri.ud! 7 \.,^«'>;rvl-3:'Ucr- danger 13. Its 
 vork..- 10. Thv wedding "• ",'4, ™ i«. Its roots. 1- Her ntes- 
 ori-nn. 14. Tlieir gitt. l-'^l' a^ f, ,. -ime 20. Our lives. 21. -01 my 
 n-ers. 18. Our system. 10. ^J»''^ ."J|^. ,,.,,„are. 34. Of thy teach- 
 .rsure. 22. or >"y'*">^l''^'";',,i-'„-me 37.0fitsusefulueas. 38. Of 
 - 2.1. Of his g'::.'V, J .t.^ i^ ' mriif their plans. 31. Of our ol^y^ 
 
 V\n^r ;54. Of vour clients ^o. lu 
 
 t>enirers. 
 
 le 
 
 ers 
 
 their fanu 
 
 o(» of his victories. 
 
 their fame. -•'•. ^\"^ %. of vour kin-. ;54. 
 Se.Ofourqu^Uons -U^^^ou^^ ^^^ 
 
 my journey. -<>• ^ ^^ ^ > L., ,„,bassador. 4 
 
 UI VOUi viiv - 
 
 "••■»«; *';f'i-\ ^'is'TL^'n'u d'todtfend their country, lives and clu.- 
 a:;! ^■^^:'rh 'hiuy^-iel to change his plan. 
 
100 
 
 COMBIXATIOX OF FORM- ADJECTIVES. 
 
 ADVKRBS. 
 
 l.^ITow much (do) wo crriovc;! 2. How mucli (do) you rejoice! 3 
 Ho\V just are thy jud^^ueutsl 4. How inoderat«»Iy lie arts! .">. Voa 
 ]>niiio him so mucli! 0. Tliy son is so nioiU'st! 7. He adorns the citv so 
 much! !S. We work just as much. 9. NVe sh'op miicli and v<ui wat^h 
 
 )rm tliid 
 .ry. l:j. 
 
 '<>'— - - — — -- ,'.. w. .w.^.,ii,„i. XT. v/ui soldicra 
 
 advance a litth;, but cannot sustain the attack of the en<'mif's. lo. You 
 are too little attentive, O boys ! 10. You work enough, but not patiently 
 euougli. 
 
 much! M. \Ve work just as much. 9. NVe sleep much and y<ui 
 more. 10. We daily lovt; him more. 11. They seem to perlbrn 
 work less ably {aptnx). 12. The king is now less desirous of glorv 
 (lajus imitates too much the example of his father. 14. Our s( 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 C0M13IXATI0N OF FORM-xVDJECTIYES. 
 
 § 970. 1. When Form-adjectives are combined with each 
 other or with attribntes of other kinds, the Tiutin huiiruage gen- 
 erally observes a certain order of the words. Althongh freqnent 
 deviations from tlie regnlar order occur, eitlier for the sake of 
 emphasis, or for other rhetorical reasons, it nevertheless is neces- 
 sary to consider this order as the normal arrangement. If j)er- 
 fectly familiarized with this order, we shall better appreciate the 
 reasons, by which the Latin authors have been induced, often to 
 modify the usual arranu-ement. 
 
 § 27 1. 2. Intcrro^'alive adjectives of all classes pre- 
 cede all members of the attributive j)hrases, to which tliey belong. 
 The rest of the phrase is arranged, as it would be without the 
 interrogative, as: What dmightcr of Gaju.^, (pne Gaji lilia ? 
 Which diligent Jmy, quis puer diligens ? How great an indadnj 
 of m'li, quanta homiiium industria ! 
 
 § !tJ7!^. 3. The Dt iiioii*^trative!ii liic-, illo, i'^tc 
 
 generally take the middle i)lace in the i)hrase, and the l*<>f>»Ne*>!;- 
 sives the last, as : Magnus ille vir, that great man ; Hurt us 
 S7d)urham{s tuus, thy suburban garden. 
 
 Rem. 1. When rossKS'^rvES are combined with 7ne, ille, iste, the arrange, 
 ment according to this rule must be the following: 1. (i'(»v«'rnint' 
 noun. 2. Iii<\ illr or isfr, ;i Possessive, as: L/'hrr t'lli' tints, that liook 
 of thine. The English language in thia combination employs the 
 
 COMBINATION OF FORM-ADJECTIYES. 
 
 19i 
 
 . f ^f fbP no^'^essive (mine, ours, &c.\ connecting it by 
 substantive form of the P^J^esswe uy , ^^^ 
 
 j,rm-«;-», these groat .landers ^ connocted witli other adjectives, 
 
 K..m 8. \\l.en P''^,f>*'^'^^, ."L ^™"of the phrase, the p..ssess.ve3 
 
 th.. hitter generally l""-'"''!^ * ^,^/'t„ ° u- as Somo fneud of thine, 
 
 taking the last plaee iV'''''^^'"^ * .™ ,„„1« ol.trectatores 
 
 words is allowed. _ 
 
 . .»■*.. 1 liiilciinito aajcctivcs in connection with 
 
 I '27lt. i. •"•'•,'"'' I J ,,iaee in the phrase, the rest 
 
 DEscmiTivKS genonillN take tht la_ t p ^^^^^^^^ 
 
 of the phrase being arranged a. J"' ,;; ;^.,,,,,, ,3,ttle ; 
 
 nitc, as: Pxcjna '"''"'f «''''%''";";, J",..! But some 
 Gallia a^alpina Ma, the ^^''f , ^'^iXnake the middle 
 
 ^f «nrt?;? ^- ^ t'i: ti-r^eltive adjective 
 t^rZ^^^S:^^^ Clari ,ui,a,n oratores, some renowned 
 
 ^^'^*^^"^' 1 „„,7/; m combination with a descriptive 
 
 other indefu.ites, and ^'^^^ul olace as • AtUs ^riptor nemo („n. 
 erningnoun tak.ng ^1';^ f^.^^.^^f^i;;,,,, qninuaM and-«a«, 
 Im), no other writer T us ar,„^e , ^^^^^ . „; 
 
 :;|!r,rZu':'otie"sr7«;«';:,4-. every other; alu oranes. all 
 olher'lcrfcri .,«.!.«, -11 the other). _ 
 
 R «T4 5 llofillitC lUlllU-ral* in connection with 
 
 2^^ iieeJvcs generally ^^^^^^^^^ ''' 
 
 § ^••»« "• . •' ., ..^c^\i^\r^n n< df-SCriDtlTC 
 
 
 
 c OT.*! G Form-aaiecuvv;s, v.^^-- — . 
 
 Uil^C., generally have the same position, as descriptive 
 
192 
 
 COMBINATION" OF FORM-ADJECTIVES. 
 
 adjectives, that is : tlicy precede the j^enitive, the ^overnin.G^ nonn 
 
 taking* tlic last place in the phrase, as : Jlie same crime of 
 
 Verves, idem Yerris scelus ; Some avenger of ovr wrong.'<, 
 
 allcjuis injuriaruni nostrarum ultor. If atinl)utive <^enitives enter 
 
 a plirase, containing several combined adjectives, the ij^enitive 
 
 g-enerally is placed immediately bt'tore its governinn^ noun, as : 
 
 Mu'o illo hidbrinn spectaculo, by that wondi'rful sight of the 
 
 games ; Belli Vejentani annus (juintus, the fifth year of the 
 
 Yejentian war. 
 
 EXEHCrSES. 
 
 Interroc.atives. 1. Which dauiihtor of the king? 2. To what folly 
 of the ])opulact'? 8. To wliat crimes of thy assistant? 4. By what dis- 
 turhance IpiHurhatio) and anxiety of thy mind ? 5. \\'hich of the two 
 ambassadors of the Macedonians'? (5. By which of the two daughters 
 of your defender. 7. The flanien {oh}.) of what god ? 8. By the guilt of 
 wliich of the two deserters? 1). Tlir death {ohj.) of which r«)hberV 10. 
 How many and how great crimes of thy son ! 11. To how many victo- 
 ries of the Bcmian arms! 12. What year of the Peloponnesian war? 
 18. By how great a bravery of our soldiers ! 
 
 Hic, ILLE, ISTK. 1. That same question (ohj). 2. Those same 
 boundaries. 8. By those same troojis. 4. To those v(^rv faults. 5. 'I'o 
 that very system. * G. Of that «,a'neral himself. 7. Of these ambassadors 
 themselves. 8. That sani»? dream. 9. By this same force. 10. By 
 tills very peace. 11. Of this whole region. 12. All those names. 18. 
 That war alone. 14. Of this other accident, b"). That great fortune. 
 1(). Of these wretched deserters. 17. Of these brave troops. 18. These 
 dangerous exaniph's. li). By that treachery of Lysauder. 20. To this 
 victory of Cn. Pimi^xjus. 21. By that custom of the leirions. 22. That 
 splendid reii^n {impcri'tm) of Augustus. 28. To that extraordinary 
 bravery of tlie Roman hostau:es. 21. Rome alone, that constant fri«nd 
 and helper {(/(Ijutor) of weak nations. 
 
 PossKSsivKS. 1. My little (cri^uKs) scholarship. 2. Of thy learned 
 friend. 8. To his firm' friendship. 4. To her grateful lieart. o. l?y hi3 
 great eUxpience. 6. Our wretched lot. 7. Of my brave citizens. 8. 
 Bv your imiuudent hatred. 0. Thy very father (r//;/.). 10. That rival 
 ot" thine. 11. Of that (female) rival^of tliine. 12. By that rashnebs of 
 theirs. 18. Those flatteries of yours. 14. These ])lans of mine. 15. 
 To this slander of yours. 10. Those ships of ours. 17. Tliese ar<ru- 
 nients of his. 18. f\w fruits of my recent labors. 10. The dc^atli of 
 thy old friends. 20. By the unchanged faith of our brave citizens. 21. 
 All vour crimej;. 22. The whole {olj.) of our inheritance. 2:J. By their 
 confidence alone. 24. To your other affairs. 25. Most friends ot mine. 
 2(). No relative of ours. 27. How great a fear of theirs ! 28. llow many 
 enmities (.v////?i/A/.v) of yours! 20. To the rest of thy fortune. :50. To 
 those ])ernieioii8 ])lans of youix. 81. To that inveterate hatred of his. 
 82. His last words. 88. tIic last «i^ifts of thy gratefid citizens. 
 
 Ia'defimtes. 1. Some rebellious states. 2. To a certain Latin 
 
 THE PRONOUNS IN THE ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASE. 193 
 
 citizen. 3. By no human help. 4. Of any hidden plan. '^- Eve^^ /^^^^^^ 
 born {inf/runa.) citizen iohj.). C Other learned ^"f ^^; .^-.l >/^^^^ f^ 
 wim*- alone 8 Of few good orators. 9. Many pleasant letters. 10. 
 ^Wral parts of the provi'nce. 11. To no Iraud of the --JJ-trates^ 12 
 To the whole svstem of discussion {(lisputatw). 13. Most oiators ot 
 Greece 14. Manv provinces of the Roman empire. 15. Few examples 
 ot consular (....s./r.l.-v) gravity. 10. No other -----l-', ^^^^^^^ 
 other kin-. 18. To an v other reason. 19. Ot any other Athenian. .0. 
 S me oth'er occasion (ohj.). 21. To many other young men. 22. Of 
 eveJv other chief. 28. All other mistakes. 24. Some books of mine 
 or, Certain disturbers itnrhator) of the public peace. 26. Many grave 
 Errors of vours. 27. That extraordinary fortune ot many citizens of 
 ours ^8 'To the unchamred love of all my relatives. 29 The votes of 
 all tiie other tribes. 80. So great a unanimity (consemm) ot all foreign 
 
 "1™te NUMERAT.S. 1. Three 'freight-ships. 2 Of 17 long ships 
 8. Fifteen -'Ionic columns. 4. 8000 Wcenary ««l^^^^f^- .f/,^;;^^. .^ '" 
 t^nce of 5000 Roman paces {pamuH). 6. Aii attack of 2000 ^^^^^^^^^ 
 horsemen and of 20,000 ^lispanian and ^Gallic toot-soldiers 7. io the 
 OOH verse of the second book. 8. To the 1 4th year of the secoml 
 ^Punic war. 9. The second and third years of the ^UMoiX)nnesian war. 
 10. The 82d year of «American > independence. 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 THE rUONOUXS IX THE ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 I. THE PRONOUNS AS GOVERNING WORDS. 
 §270. 1. Pronouns generally cannot govern attributes. 
 Tlms^we neitber in Euglisb can say the great 7, the great you, 
 Qor in Latin maqmts ego, pukher tu, dc. But there are three 
 kinds of attributes, which may depend on pronouns : 1. Partici- 
 ples, 2. Apfositions, 3. The form-adjectives ipse, solus, unus, 
 totus, and the plural of onmis. 
 
 Rem 1 For the connection of pronouns with rARTiciPi.ES see Part II 
 Re n '■ APPOSITIONS luav be cinnected with pronouns ot the 1st and 2d 
 pJrsonTbut not with those of the third person, as: Cues te 
 oS' almvi nrhis conditorem. damn ant, the citizens condemn 
 thee, O CamiUus, the second founder of the city. Ego, 2 hemi^t^U^ 
 
 ~ • „ 1 T.vr.:/^iia 3 Al.^ropnarins * Numulicus. 
 
194 THE PRONOUNS IN THE ATTRIBUTIVE PHllASK. 
 
 positions, arc i'ttl»-«V-'f " ?,1 Uconsi. rti..» the pivdi.-ut- u^-roes 
 
 sfcoml p«'i><)ns of NOUNS. 
 ^ 077 If the fonu-aajcctives ipse, sobfs, unus, totns and 
 ^ 0.1 n. .ttributii of PRONOUNS, they a-ree with tlie 
 
 omms are used «^/^'^7'\; ^J^^.,,,, thev a^ree with tlie antk. 
 
 Intrer m NUMiiKR and CASE, in gendlr urv „ .1,,. /•/>»- 
 
 sola, according to tl>e gender of the anteudcut 1 
 
 , ^r. .0.. ana ... as -^;^^^:^^:::-^ 
 
 translate! by alo.e or o»/,y. V.-^.. m 'J I «;« "'^''/^^^^ ,„ ,,•,..«- 
 U.re, totun. se (o. so tot.nn , t e . . O^ 'J^ .^ ^„„. 
 
 om??e6^ must agree ni ease with its -ovtinin^ p 
 of tcs, omnilms nobis ; all of yon. omnes vos. 
 
 § 270. 4. Ipse as attribute of pronouns of the 1st and M 
 persons is thus transhited : 
 
 N Ip^e ego, or ego ipse, myself, I myself, even I. 
 
 i' ,Li inslus of nivselt, evin of me. 
 
 D ^^^S'>r />^^^-^^'> to "^y^^lt; even to mo^ 
 
 1; ::; ^.. C^i.^) or /,>.. m., by myself, even b> me 
 In the plural the enelitie .net generally is attae ed to th P^^^^ 
 nouns, exeept hi the genitive, as : N. uosmet .psi ..) o ^^^^ 
 
 G nostri ipsoruin. of ourseloes ; D. uobismet ipsis to ouiseUes, 
 A. nosmlt^psos, o^sclces ; Abl. uobismet ipsis, ly oursel.es 
 
 THE PRONOUNS IN THE ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 195 
 
 S a80 5. If ipse is an attribute of the pronouns of the third 
 peLn, the pronoun is, ea, id, generally is omitted in Latin, but 
 the reflexive pronoun sul, sibi, se, always must be expressed, as • 
 
 Reflexive pronoun. 
 
 G. 8ui ipslus, of liimself 
 
 D. stbi ip-n, to liimself 
 A. sc ip-VLin, himself 
 A. se ipso, by himself. 
 
 Simple pronoun. 
 N. Ipse (inst. of is ipse), he himself, 
 
 .liimself, even he 
 G. ipslus (inst. of ejus ipslus), of 
 
 himself 
 D. ipd, to liimself, even to him 
 A. ipsxm, himsi'lf, even him 
 A ipso, bv himself, t^ven by him. 
 
 a'ffi.r, nt rf"n,iluat\.,n., accrding to «luch they are dilierently trans- 
 
 ^''•'it.^'prtonnnal compounds 1 serve to make SIMPI_^ pronouns 
 Exn-UATKAI., ^vhicl, m,-ans. tl.at the pro,,ouns "■•^, «"''^^^.«PL'.^Jy 
 
 S;'{i,-,^ir\hir:?;^ificatio„ the c,.mpounas«.tU «^^ 
 
 i,.i„r„r to th,> first or second person, are tran^h^tcll atcoruiiia ," 
 
 t;l„n he/si. plv are rendered by ipse, without the add, ion ot a 
 ^ ,n ;n(<-'^0 ,s: riuy a.„dann mysdf, me ii«um conden.nant. 
 'tC "• r«"<^ ;»^ il'^nm accusant. Ur hinmlf nfuta this ^pi^ion, 
 ^\Z"t^o^J^ refeUit. Hhe wMes to „«« tl,^ house hersclj. 
 iiisa domum possidr-re eupit. 
 
 ^ The pronom,nal co.npounds with se!f also servo to express Ae 
 «v,:-tKXiVE relation This relation has 1 n consid,T,-,l J. 23,,. 
 
 Tw";u,lent m't easily distinguish this rela.ion from the former 
 
 p,«n'ls with sff have an KMriiATICAI. and not a Rtn.txi^E 
 
 "'™1w,.v,^n the KFFI.FXIVE relation maybe made EMPn.vTICAL, 
 .„d even here Ihe ^ lan„u,,e us., the B;nn,.^,.™,;.n.na co^ 
 pouiKls, distinguishing the ^^"I'l'^^^J^ f , eo, tn rv i,?I "tin the 
 
 mendy by the «"'^^'^^''''^f ,/^"t^^^ * ".^. rinMh,- ad.lition of ipse 
 E.M1-IIATUAL reHexive relation ,s exprcssc >> >.^^ 
 
 Tt'^E'" the"™rd ••• ...MSKLP" is reflexive wmtoFT emph- - -.n^ 
 
19G THE PRONOUNS IN THE ATTEIBUTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 hence ^ve translate it by the reflexive pronoxm .. I^^^^^^^^;^".;^'^^^^^ 
 in^c- Et patrvnn. et se ii>s,nn jwrdnr. vxH Utten tlu re is an 
 ^ ;has^is witliout an expivssed opposition c>t the pron<.un o o tl er 
 1 ions or thin-s. Such an emphasis can be seen by the connlc- 
 ? fx X e nc?. it is sok^ly dctornnn.-d by the HiiKT(>.acAL ac(1 vr 
 ^^Je s;«ntenc. : ^ Hk intends to kill I^^'^»;?;^ ' ^^^^y!!^^ 
 trn.wlntod acroi-ainiras we phice the accent on the verb k-%U, or 
 ^^t^P^n^un " hTn^elfr In the tbnner ca^^ the pronmm has no 
 e nphas s, and is transhited without iim {hc mterpure vult) In the 
 K^cWe the pronoun is enii,hati<-ai, and nnist b.- translated I. n.c 
 ind^^;;" In tVe lolh.wing exc.vises thos. immouns, which are 
 meant to be eniphalicul, have been printed in Italics. 
 
 S a?*; 1 . 6 Instead of the attributive i)lirase, which is fonned 
 bv a refh'xive pronoun as governing word and ipse as attribute, 
 the Latin more trecpieutly niake^^ q.^e an attribute of the ante- 
 CEDFNT of the reflexive, ihat is the suiuect of its governing verb 
 or adjective, so that ipse generally stands in the nominative, 
 whatever may be the case of the reflexive, as : Cato hlh hu.sel, 
 Cato se ipse [or ipse se) interficit ; virtue is stnidar to itse//, 
 virtus sibi ipsa similis est. 
 
 But in two instances ipse agrees with the reflexive : 1. \\ h(ii 
 the reflexive object is cooRmNAiE with other ol)jects, as : GajKS 
 detains both me and himself. Gajus et me et se ipsum detinet. 
 9 When the reflexive corresponds to the Knglish o^tes set/, as : 
 Jt is wkked to kdl one\^ self, se ipsmn interfieere nefas est 
 
 §•>^•J 7 If the pronouns, on which one of the ad.iectives 
 twTo/.^s^ c£r., depeiuis as an attribute, are in the nominative, 
 thev are frequently omitted, as : Thou entertalnest tins opuuon 
 alone, hanc opinionein solas tenes. The same omission often 
 takes place, if these adjectives depend on any case of the pro- 
 noun is, ea, id. as : They surround the enemies and capture all 
 of them, hostis circiundant atque oninls capiunt. 
 
 II. THE PRONOUNS AS ATTRIBUTES. 
 S »^83 ^' lu English the pronouns generally are not em- 
 ployed as Attributes, but are changed into possessive apiectives. 
 Thiis "my father" stands instead of '' the father of me' ; our 
 bouse," instead of " the hon^e of ns ; '' '^ his son " instead ot " the 
 son of him " etc. In the same way the Latin langnage uses posses- 
 sive adjectives (§ 2G8) instead of the genitives of the personal pro- 
 
 THE rilON'OUNS IN THE ATTRIBUXnTE PHRASE. 197 
 
 nouns of the 1st and 2d persons. But in the third person either 
 the possessive adjective 5<^^^5 is used, or the genitives of the ^ro- 
 noxm^ejus.eoranuearumM''' forms corresponding to the English 
 possessives A.X her. its. their. - His. her, their father^' may be 
 rendered ;>a^er suus ov pater ejus {eorwn etc.), but with a dif- 
 ference between the two forms. 
 
 llem 5 The question whether to express the English possessive ^^« etc. 
 bvlhe Latin pronominal irenitive ejus etc. or tlie possessive adjec- 
 tiVe....s,isdJtennined by the same rules as tl^^ »f,^f ^he d^^^^^^^ 
 strative and rctlexlve forms of the pronouns (^ ^38) llcnct. r/te 
 tnZ- the po.sessice is d< cUicd hy the place of its antecedent. When 
 the antecedent of H^, her, dc, stands in a plirase, comhined with 
 that of th(? possessive, we use sufU, except when the antecedent is 
 an ATTRinuTE ; but when the plirases of the antecedent and ot tlio 
 ix)sse<sive are cor)RDiNATH, or belong to dilierent sentences, we naust 
 transhite A/.v, Jirr, if.^, hy ejus, and their by cOram, earum, according 
 to the gender of the antecedent. 
 
 EXAMPLES: 
 
 1 His— suus Gajus sells his house, Gajus domum suam vendit. 
 The duumvirs compi^l Sempronius to give freedom to his slave 
 Duuui nri Sempromum sero» sua lihertateui dare cogunt Hie general 
 restores to the Latins their hostages, Dux Latlnis obsides suos restv- 
 
 "V His— EJUS This province is rich, but i)irates destroy its com- 
 merce, i/^r^^w>/v>n'y/,riV^ l.cupUs est, sedpiratae ejus commercimn di- 
 ruuid Our soldiers defeat the enemies, and take their camp, Millies 
 nostri hadls miieunt eorumque castra expugturnt. The queen and 
 her children arrive, Reglna ejusque liben adcenvmt. These nations 
 and their chiefs sue for peace, Mac gentes earumque prmcipes pacem 
 
 Ren/'o "if two coordinate phrases have a common subject or object, a 
 possessive adjective, combined with the second phrase and having 
 the common suhject or object as an antecedent, must be translated 
 
 bv suus. not bv < jus, as : , , ^t • 
 
 The Carthaginiaus destroy all provisions and hum their camp, 
 Carthaginienses omnis commeatus diruunt et castra sua concre- 
 
 ^^This agrees with the general rule, since \\iQ ^\xh]ect {Garthagini- 
 
 enses) is understood in the second phrase. 
 S 28 I. 0. There are certain attributive phrases, which are 
 derived from objective phrases by changing the governing verb 
 into a VERBAL NOUN, aud its object into an attributive genitive. 
 Thus the objective phrase, *' to destroy/ Carthage.'' may be 
 chau<red iuto the attributive phrase, " the destruction of Car- 
 
19S TUE PROXOCNS IN THE ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 th„.,e " I., the saiv.c wav we form in Latin from Uhcros am-are^ 
 oLanlor, Iron. 'Ooaa emcre-bouorum emptor, from 
 i^ZJre^ioUnn uccusutor. K such an objective phra.o 
 haTa ™ x(,M KAL o«KcT, the Latin language, w!>en cbangn.g th 
 
 obe tlve into an attributive I-'-'-. --^'^^f ^.J— : 
 obcct into a rRONOMiNAL ATTiuni-TK. 'lluis from tl.e "l^^^^t o 
 ^, mse Tamare tl.o rolk.xive attributive phrase amor su, (^elf- 
 £e)is formed, and fron, .. accusure the attributne phrase «c- 
 cusator sui (bis own accuser.) 
 
 iud^'-e : .<<'/i ins7u.'<Ju(h'J', liis own judge. nfldition 
 
 Een.^. a 1.AT..N' ,;<«ses8ivos likewise arc '"««l» ,7'' '»• '^»' ! \\'~' "" 
 
 nf )■»«« which then ivhviiys is placed m the '■'■'""'T'^ '-•. ""T"' .",',; 
 
 ""■"'■^"■w u ertiv ' as .^'Vm»;'" ."'-"<'. liH-rallv " by my, the 
 ouiron?rvUli'u.xV'i k by "oboays wellure but mmc. 
 
 I ATTRIEITES, DK.rENDEST ON rKONOCNS. 
 
 1. E,o, consul ac dux ve^or -U -^-^^^^^^ ^^.S 
 
 cmmoda "af;m' 'f ''^^csm r •K>na.n, iudign.. tracer.- b,ci,.i«nt. 0. 
 Sil'ut<'atru. (iaju^'ot tratrcm '•-^^^-.Si.r'.r^.:"- 
 
 ■ .. Sica. n >1ar,r,^r. «"^ E.pctere, to aim at, to .ingle out. ^3 a cbamplon. 
 affonl, ^* Unexpected. 
 
 i«To 
 
 THE PRONOUNS IN THE ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASE. 199 
 
 cl«'inontm ct luimanitas nosmet ipsns conciliat ac placat. 10. Nulla Verria 
 BCi'liTu aut Mobisaut vobismct ipsis inaudlta attjUf "insolita vidcri ix)ssunt. 
 11. Tot caluninia-el convicia abs to \\,m coiitiriiiari iiequeunt. 12. Tanta 
 ])atri:p calaniitas a vobismet i])sis ''ferri no<iuit. 18. Dux Somprouiura 
 hostis '^'ircuniTrcjubct, ipso '''mediam acicin -"perrumix're statuit. 14. 
 Consul re^nnfp uiiuistros rclcgat ipsamque duuravirorum custoditp tradit 
 15. luipcrTitor rt-gis anilcis vitie -'securitateni ipsicjue populi Romani tu- 
 trlani i)n)niittit. 10. Reglna amlcos suos se ipsam nt'gligere,filium au- 
 tcm suum dflcndere jubft. 17. Egregius ille adolcscuns se ipse erudire 
 studet. 18. Iloitciisius sosc ipst; accusfire vidt-tur. 11). Antouius 
 omneni istam ■^-siniulationeni -'tollit siblquc ipse similis videtur. 20. 
 Civitatos ista' sese ip»o delendere ix)ssunt. 21. Mililrs et ducis et sui 
 ipsoruni nii'inorfs esse videntur. 22. Se ipsum guberna re difficile est. 
 2:J. Tu vcH) totus laboril>us tuis -^aninuim intondcre vidcris. 24. Tlie- 
 mistocles totum so r('ii)ublic;e -•'applicarc vidf-tur. 25. Carthaginiensium 
 fides incerta (vt populustpie eos solos timet. 20. Poimlus Romanus 
 l*()uiprji ing<'uium acvirtutcui admiratur soliqueliujus belli "^«'iinperium 
 niandnVe vult. 27. Patriie saluteni tibi uni debemus. 28. Hujus con- 
 jurati(5nis pericula omnibus nobis eognita sunt. 29. Consul praedones 
 lictori tradit, isquo omuls securi percutit. 
 
 1. The citizens despise tlice, the friend of our enemies. 2. I, the de- 
 fender of libtrtv, \vill not -'keep slaves. 3. It is criminal 'Ho strike me, 
 a Koman citizen, with {tmndxte by) '^^rods. 4. You ruin all of us by 
 your obstinacy. 5. All of you are ^«punishable, but the people intends 
 to strikt^ {fnJre) th«'e alone, tin; leader and standard-bearer of this 
 conspiracv. 0. Tlu^ conspirators confide to me alone their secrets. 7. 
 These ciuestions can b«i -'solved cmly by thee. 8. The citizens seem to 
 be unmindful of me alone. 9. The other soldiers seem to have courage 
 enough, and you alone seem to fear the enemies. 10. The ^-writings of 
 this "■author are too little '^Appreciated by all of you. 11. We wish to 
 employ vou alone to this business. 12. I myself will not yield to such a 
 iui\\<'v\iniperi>(m). la. So great a rebellion must seem dangerous even 
 to thee. 14. They condemn all my friends, but they are afraid of 
 touchinij (pftrJi) mvself. 15. Such measures seem pernicious both to 
 the republic and to o'urselves. 10. Thou intendest to ruin either Lii^lius 
 or mvself i)V these measures. 17. Caesar seems to move even you by 
 this inildne'ss of his. IS. That ^'haughtiness and bold s^overthrow of 
 all laws must be censured by thyself. 19. The loyalty (Jidcs) of these 
 citizens is doubtful, and it is 'right {Un't) to suspect all of them. 20. We 
 fear (rfrPri) the •"i.ord. and worship him alone. 21. The consul directs 
 Semiironius to pursue the enemies; he himself attacks the camp. 22. 
 No man can act badlv and be good himself. 2:1 The lictors are directed 
 bv the senate to burii these injurious books of Flavins, and =^"pay their 
 2^•alue to himself. 24. He himself wishes to diminish the •^'^excessive 
 '"r)ower of the tribunes. 25. She herself intends to save the life of the 
 captives. 20. These legions clothe, arm and ^-sustain the mselves. 27. 
 
 i«rnn«»nal ^t Fern}, t^ hear, to tolerate. »» To outflank. ^» M.e(l\& Acics. the centre. 
 30 To bn-ik ' 5> Socmitv. ^a Hvpocri-y. ^»» To throw otf. =4 Aniiniim intendere, t« 
 
 >» Solvere »2 Liber. 33 Srriptor. 3 1 To appreciate. f/f'-sV/mare. »» touperbia. ^'' Ui8 
 solutiu. STDotniima. '«Solvere, sa Pretiuin. ««Niinius. *» ToVestas. *-' Alere. 
 
200 THE PRONOUNS IN THE ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASE. 
 
 1 ff„i nf hei'^elf 28. The inhabitants cannot 
 Lucretia seems to he ne^rlorttul ( t A^^^^^^^^^^ .^ ^^^ -,^^^.,,,,9 
 
 protecUAo..</r.- ^ij; \;^^":i' ^^^f^ be distrust tiiJ of./.- ^^((^ 
 to m,vern iY.r//. 31. It otten is '^^^'^ff'^'^^'; \ ^.. ;.;., i drliViT myself 
 ^iru generally is ditmult to ^^-^^^ ^^^J, ,,,,Hy to the dis- 
 ^;S [^^l::; J^'the l^nn^ul^o^le. 3o. Thou canst govern other men, 
 but thou canst not govern thy>idf. 
 
 II. THE PIIONOUN8 AS ATTRIBUTES. 
 
 I. Aut C^usaut ^^^^l^:^^jTnJ^ 
 pronio ejusque ^^^'"^ ."^"^^^^l^T^hW^vvv legati paeeni nunc 
 kem civibus suis 'J^''f'''r^^ZvJi^^^ reifcit. V,. Piera.,ue 
 ,erio petunt ; consul auteni «"^, ^^^^ ./^ ^^, ''^^;^^^^ fides ea rum dubia vide- 
 
 Galli^e civitutes 1-P^^*»^ ^"^.'^:^ "i^^ W or Uere noUnnus. T. Ducm 
 tur. G. l>ucem n..strum adN eis^iriis suis r ^ ^ Svracusas aut 
 
 nostrun.diligimus.^us4m.a.h.Ts.r^^^ 
 
 defendere aut regi ^)^^^ / T \olum s 10. Hex 'cetera consulis i>ro- 
 earunuiue regem tollere (^<//) ^*>'^"; ',..." rccfmat H. 1^'>^ ^'^'^era 
 posita -accipit, sed exymtum suum — ^^^^^ p^. 
 
 ionsulis proiK^sita --PI ' ^^,^^ ^* ^m suum, ex,ellere coguntur. 
 Carthaginienses ipsum V,^''' . ?i'av c(,rum pacem ixMere coguntur. 
 13. Carthaginienses et \^f ^'^^^'^^ ' ^ > /^^^'^^^^^^ isse videtur. M ^V^^- 
 14 440btrertatio sm quoddam dementia genus ^^ \.. ^p^, ^^.,.,-.^1« sui 
 
 l^hnatio sui vii^utis et '"^-^^^ ^!^^ 1 1^ vi^m tua ipsuis 
 ipslus •*H'ituper;it.>r ^'ff ^V ['nJ.^ .u-e ,.s.>rum dementia^ ixenas 
 cWa -degis. ^- "^-^^^^^l^ ^^^n^n interUcit. 2(). 
 'i^:T^:^^^^^^ -e solit. 21. Mult, civitntes sua 
 ipsfirum magnitudine ^"concidunt. 
 
 ^. (iajusknc^vsliowto^stramlus j^^^^'^^;' ^:)^;::;^;;;! ^..on. 4. 
 are unpleasant to me. 3. 1^^^^^^''\, \ , . „ .^j^^jp r,. My sisters 
 Lucretia and her brothers are .^^^1*: /;\.,^i^ f^'^V.^torcs tl^c consul 
 and their children are absent. .' : J/^^ ,f^'^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Sempronius to his army. 7^ Y^^. n^V icl of^-^e di^^ to Piso his 
 
 ..appoint ]^':^^'^'^ l^ .^ t\l l^Tmi;;;>rtal Nvorks. 10- 
 statues. 9. We admm' ^^ '^.^^^* ^'^;?;,;,'^' ' "^' '^ ,ve must leav(^ him 
 Our fricm,! refuses to ^^^^[^^,^:;^^^ and 
 
 to his ^'^former poverty U. ^^*^ *^*^"*^^/'\o Our friend ivfuses tlu-so 
 
 prefers to bear (fern) ^^^:'')^^'^'X\:J-^'^^^ intend both 
 Advantages, but we intend to -relie% e hl^ can s lo. ,^,^^^ 
 
 to assist Sempronius, and to '^^^T^':^'^^^\r'^ \\^<^n-^ 
 
 t^L^^^to^have not immey --«^f^ gen!^ J^^^alr^^^ 
 obstacle to his undertaking. 1 . • 1 ^'^' ^^ " .[;'^^;.' 1 'colleague. 18. A 
 enemies, and resolves to expect the ^ //^f/ ^^^^ ''^^q Sepfp.^ise gen- 
 certain self-love see ms to be c«unmon to all nu n. IJ. g>cii i lai ^_^ 
 
 43T0HCcept. *^ Debasement - ^^^"^"^;::,}};;::^- 53'Vo?cM;dTack!VJm/i'^* 
 M I'rbliiius. " Leuire. " /Eruiuna. ^^ To be au uDstacie, ousia 
 
 THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 201 
 
 erally is injurious. 20. To be one's own judge is contrary to justice 
 21. These men seem to be their own ^^admirers. 22. Tlie consul is be- 
 travcd bv his own soldiers. 23. ^V^e are prevented bv our own ''^'weak- 
 liess from waging such a war. 24. I wish to be my own interprett^r. 
 25. No ♦''witness can be compelled to be his own accuser. 20. The 
 Atlienians are ''Teft by all their allies by their own haughtiness and 
 folly. 
 
 LESSOiN XXXVII. 
 
 THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 § S85. 1. The word colli pari^^Oll occurs m an etymolo- 
 gical and SYNTACTICAL sense. Ry comparison in the former sense 
 we understand that wjiedion of descriptive adjectives, which 
 marks their dcifrccs (§ 4, c). In the syntactical sense it 
 means a comhixation of two plirases by comparing them. 
 
 Kem. 1. In this lesson we consider comparison in the etymological 
 sense, that is the formation of the comparative and superlative 
 degrees. Every comi)arison is made by one of the four degrees, 
 which are: 1.' The degree of equality ; 2. The comparative ; 
 3. The SUPERLATIVE; 4. The absolute degn^e (L. XXXIX.). Two 
 of these degrees, the comi)arative and superlative in the comj)arisoii 
 of descriptive adjectives, generally are formed by a peculiar inflec- 
 tion. The expression positive decree is a mere negation of the 
 other four degrees. By this term the adjective, if nut compared, is 
 designated. 
 
 § !2S0. 2. Tlie coiliparaMve of adjectives is formed by 
 adding the ending lor to tlieir declension-stem, or, what is the 
 same, by substituting this ending for the termination i or is of the 
 genitive, as: longus — longior (longer); p?//c/i^r — pulchrior 
 (more beautiful) ; diligens — diligentior (more dihgeut) ; atrox — 
 atrocior (fiercer). 
 
 The comparatives are declined by the terminations of the con- 
 sonant-stems of the 3d Declension (§ 145) with a separate form iu 
 t'us for the neuter gender. 
 
 '» Admirator. «^ Infiruiitas. ** Testis. «'-^ To leave, desercre. 
 
202 
 
 THE COMPAEATIVE AKD SUPEKLATIVE. 
 
 SINGULATI. 
 
 N. lonrjlor (m. & f.). ^onr/ius (n.) 
 O. lougwris 
 
 A. lonrjidreni{m.kL)lonoin8{n.) 
 A. lonfjiore 
 
 Paradigm. 
 
 N. lonrjvn-esim. & i),loimora (n.) 
 G. loH'jwnnit 
 D. lomjiovihns 
 A. I 'ike Nom. 
 A. Like Diitive 
 
 ^^^'^^'"^■^ e +iw. r.ntnmrativcs bavc, liko the 
 
 ga^r. 3 The --K- oM ;nv^^^ „......,,„- 
 
 quantitative a< ,eet.v s, the orm ot t ^^^^^^.^^^.. ^^. 
 
 lar of the adjectives, m lu», as . »^ ^ 
 
 more ''cautifully. , . j^-^ ;, formcl by a.Wing the eml- 
 
 ing mhnu.s to the aecleus>on-stom, ^ " . "'^ ,• ,,„ty/„,,„x- 
 (longest); diUrn^-daigenlmimus (mo=t dil.^ent^ 
 
 o«ro"i.ssuiu(s (tierecst ). „,iioftive« and their adverbs are 
 
 Tliov are declined hke movable adjcttivt., an» 
 fovn ec, like those of the latter, by the en.hng «. 
 S" 2 7V.« fo™« the .uperlativo adverb <»(«,«<>. 
 
 nr'nan!"^:;Usdec,ension-ste,„tcnninateshr.. 
 
 acer—accrrimus (sharpest) 
 velu>i—veterrimus (oldest) _ 
 
 ■Rem 3 iTMrns makes both maturrirnvs and ,««««r.«m"». 
 T aiilfollowing hve adjectives iu .Hs add t,-e ending .»u. to 
 
 Kern 4.-2r«' o;h,; aa^e.^.^iu,.^ on. 0. fj.o.;^^^ 
 
 ternUu, mirabihs, mutabihs, do not torm um 
 e'^ri;::^es m ..c../.«.s ana .5/.. are co.pnred as if they 
 p had the Permeations d^cens, M^^^^p " l,,,,....^... 
 
 henevoliis (benevolent) UmwieMWT 
 
 THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 203 
 
 § 390. G. The following adjectives form irrcsular de- 
 grees : 
 
 Itonus melior optimum 
 
 mains poor pessimus 
 
 ma gnus major ma rim us 
 
 parens 7ninor minimus 
 
 [exterus] exterior . extremus {extimm) 
 
 HnferuH] ill f( nor ' infimus^lmus) 
 
 [saperus] superior supremus {summus) 
 
 Ipostcrus] poderior ' postremus {postumus) 
 
 Bern 5 l^he last four Positives, included in brackets, in good prose do 
 not occur iu Nom. Sing, of the masculine geiider. 
 
 Bern G. lustead of ;/..7///«^*?, as impersonal predicate, the comparative 
 mtius (of sati.s) with the copula is used very Irequently, as : It is 
 better to remiiia, manere satius est. ,. . 
 
 Bern 7 The superlative summus, generally precedmg its governing 
 noun verv fivquentlv is used instead of the superlatives maximu» 
 and Mskmu-^^: The greatest men, summi uri ; the highest 
 mountains, summi montes. Suuimus always must be used instead 
 oialtis4mu., if the superlative highed is used m ^^S^r^^^ 
 
 Bern. 8. Tlie last four superlatives priucipaUy are used as I^Dt.I<tMTE 
 
 OKUINAL NU.MEliALS (See § 201). 
 
 § •J91. t. The followiiij,^ degrees, partly regular, partly ir- 
 regular, lack the Positive : 
 
 COMPAKATIVE. 
 
 Citerior (hither, adj.) 
 tdterior (farther, adj.) 
 ihtenor (inner) 
 propior (nearer) 
 deterior (worse) 
 prior (former) 
 
 SUPERLATIVE. 
 citimvs (nearest on this side) 
 ultimus (farthest, last) 
 intimus (inmost) 
 proximus (nearest, next) 
 deter rimus (worst) 
 primus (foremost, first) 
 
 Bem 9 The Positives of the first four comparatives occur in the form 
 of LOCAL ADVEiins {ritru, ultra, intra, prope). Di tenor and deUrri. 
 mm are so distinguished from p<jor and pex^imus, that tlie former 
 m.'an less and lead good, while the latter two mean more and mod 
 
 Bern 'lo' Vdvekbs as such generally do not f«^rm degrees ; and what 
 ^"the gi^nmadlns usnallf call the coMPAKATrvE and SLW.in ATIVB 
 of vSvEuns, is nothiug but ADVERr.stormea from thecoMPAKATnL 
 and sui-EKL XTIVE of AD.TECTIVES. The temporal adverbs saepe and 
 diu however form the comparatives saepius (oftener) and diutius 
 (lono-er), and the superlatives saepis.ime (oftenest) awd diutimme 
 VnA without an} corresponding adjectives. The adverb hmge^ 
 and its degrees, longias and loiigis^ime, generally have a local 
 
201 THE CO.MPAEATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 ,„.,; fnih-r than .SV/".^. '^' f "" ' i"" i ; e^.^■« dilhr. dilhsuu',^, 
 Eera. 1 1. Dh.H somotinus lias ^^'')\'^"^^i,;J„„„. The contnvtio.i 
 
 „f the JK^Uive dav,s ...to ' ';, ?•/' ^'^!:„ ti,„,,;J >V».,i forms it. 
 .^■(•Una\i)o /"'/«,(«1 luak. > '"« '/. '\/,,i,.,, j,, „no<l pr(«o (lo.-s not 
 
 occur. Tl.e on.paral.ve,.; »a J > . ',„„^.,,i,„„. .jcu'rally 
 ,-,„vHW and ,«»« <'ff'V,' ' il, . n.r t l\.e auie of persons, arc cx- 
 •^'younser," and " ''V'='\,, 1' , i"',, « ««"« being on.ilted wl.eu 
 
 no amliisruity can •."''•-' '\,i,„'„t a positive. I„ .:o,h1 prose 
 
 g o«o 8 O.tlv those adjectives form de;.:rces which imply 
 "': : or n CKP sT Th s natiot.al odjeetives, an.l snch as .lra<i 
 
 CREASE 07 DECREAbh. x /.,,,nii>:^ (-miiot bC CUUl- 
 
 (mortntts), <7o/rf.u (aureus), annual (atntu.), cam.ot 
 
 P^^^'^^- *. ^p r-T^ownvv rofuse the inflectional 
 
 Other .eljectivcs on acconnto ™ J/f , J,, -f,,;, ehvss of 
 
 degrees only, either both ^^'S- °' f^J/; :i ,,, pn.ctice or 
 a.ljectives is very numerous, and must bt itainiu . i 
 
 from the lexicon. 
 
 Kern. 12. The most usual ='fcti- that lac. infleaed^^^^^ 
 
 toUowins:: 1 ■l'b'-^;v-f;: "except 1^1 in ,«"^ as ;.7".««. 
 as »«.««.., «/'""•"»; "'"'•■;,/'; ;;scteru.inating in r,l„^, 01.^. 'h". 
 
 ^„,(;m"., pnrari,^,s. *;;"' «;■ „;,^„.^^^, ^' 4 'm„,;v adjectives, winch 
 
 =^=j^:^s::;<n:|f .^-^;;.^ --■ ""'-' 
 
 Eem. 13. The most usual ot ^}^%2,t^VJ:;l,i,,,,,,_,ncn-^^^^^^^ 
 
 but not COMl-.VKAT.VKS, "''/'•'■';;■'.;,,, „(,„_„te,TI»« "«■ Of 
 
 UlU, probahilis. 
 
 S «O» 9 Tltose adjectives, which for the sake of euh.oj|T 
 J^hLoI degrcei, are co.npared by .na,U .nore - 
 rnosUivo for the coMPAR-.TivE, and by marvnc. (most) wd^h 
 t pSe, for tlte s.rEB..mvK, as : „.«<;.•« no.u. (more hur^ 
 
 THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 205 
 
 fill), maxime noxius (most hurtful) ; magi^i arduus (steeper), 
 maxime arduus (steepest). Adjectives, which form inflectiona. 
 dc'Tces, generally cannot be compared by magls and maxime. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 Attributivi-: phrases with Comparatives and Superlatives Aa 
 
 ATTRIBUTES. 
 
 1 Bv a more accunite scholarship. 2. Of a fairer peace. 3. To a 
 deeper* river. 4. An older time. 5. A friendlier companion (obj.)^ b. 
 By a harder (ardau.s) undertaking. 7. Happier days. 8. Of crattier 
 thieves 9. To more certain events. 10. More bwmtiful gitts {oh/.) 
 11 Bv promises, more sacred. 12. Of a more hostile expedition. 13. lo 
 a braver eni-mv. U. A more merciful leader {obj.) 15. A more enormous 
 crime (ohj.) ifi. Bv a lower place. 17. Unhapi)ier wars. lb. Of nobler 
 deeds 1!) To quicker messengers. 20. More ferocious attacks ('%.) 
 21 Bv moike magnificent arclies {arn/s). 22. The freest country (f^j.) 
 23. OV the oldest city. 24. To the most dissimilar method. 2^. } be 
 most ditiicult (iu;-sti<m (obj.) 20. 15y th..^ hai>pi«'st accident 2.. Ihe 
 lUMSt renowned commanders. 28. Of the best men. 29. Ot the o-reatest 
 writers. 30. Bv the highest courage (j>/^//'.) of the troops. 31. Ao ^ 
 worst c.mditions of a most unhappy pi-ace. 32. The smallest causes {obj., 
 of the .greatest events {re,s). 33. By th(3 highest tops (rulmeu) of the roots. 
 34. Ofli better fate. 35. To a greater name. 30. By a narrower road. 
 37. By the smallest things. 38. Hitber Gaul {obj.) 39. Both ot the 
 Litberandof the farther province. 40. The nearest places. 41. Uie 
 richest kni<rbts. 42. By tlie older citizens. 43. By the ycmnger brother. 
 44 By the'most benevolent magistrates. 45. By the best and mddest 
 idemcN^) brovernment -in the ^world. 40. To the elder ( ato. 47. Of 
 Pliny Secundus the younger. 48. Older houses. 49. The oldest nations. 
 50. the farthest cities of the Insubrians. 
 
 Predicative and Opjec tive Phrases with Comparatives 
 
 AND Superlatives. 
 
 1 Our swords are sharper. 2. Your kniv<'sseem the sharpest. 3. 
 You are more desirous of praise. 4. No city is fuller ot enemies, o. 1 he 
 consuls become dearer to the people. 0. Most citizens are more prudent. 
 7. No war is more pernicious. 8. Few examples are more renowned. 
 9 This dano-er seems more serious and greater. 10. No books can be 
 better 11 °The Athenians generallv are wiser. 12. The people cannot 
 be offended hnore shamefully. 13. This war becomes most dangerous 
 14 A mon^ treacherous plan cannot be ^conceived. 15. The greatest 
 and wisest men reji-ct this kind of government. 10. You are surrounded 
 kv the most h.)stile nations. 17. The consuls are «exhausted by the most 
 dllHcult lal>ors. 18. It is better to -keep [one's] ^vord 19. It is more 
 phasant to bt; loved by the people. 20. It is mor.e useful to treat phi lo- 
 Boi)hv and grammar. 21. It is difficult to be more cruel '-^^. It is easy 
 to bJcome richer. 23. We cannot work more diligently . 24. Cra ssut 
 
 ~^> R»'s7ubHca7 «Transl. "o/." • Orbis terraruin. ■• Turpis. 6 Ct.gitare. « Conficere. 
 
20C TUE COMBINATION OF PHRASES BY COMPARISOX. 
 
 all thy tnonas ^',;';^J^J^^^^\o ;esist ,no.t l.n.v.ly, ;!0. The 
 
 the elder C ato, but It IS mon. UM <renoral "selects a plaee 
 
 ^S:v,SUatthmf\nu«t- treat the ".natter more fully and ele- 
 gautly. 
 
 LESSON XXXYIII. 
 
 THE COMBINATION OF rilKASES BY COMrARISON. 
 
 R oi)4 1 Comparison, in a syntact-cal sense, is a means of 
 comlTning ylirases or sentences (§ 83.) Phrases, which are com- 
 hined by comparison are called compared phrases or a COlll- 
 
 parative period. 
 
 Rem 1 For tlie combination of SENTENCES by compariFon see Part II 
 
 Hem ^' The ccminarison of phras.s has in several points tlie natim of 
 
 ^ a^cor> DiNu'ioN (^ 11:1) This appears chietiy in the coruurHng 
 
 words, which are Either relative adverbs (r/^n/^ ^'''''ry/;'^^;:^^;)' 
 
 or relative form-adjectives (7'/.^/^^v,r///o0, both ol which Ikuo the 
 
 nature of conjunctions (^ C41). 
 
 Rem ;^> Thus the pronouns an.l i>ossessive adjectives of the ..d i>erson, 
 
 which follow the connecting? word, are treated as m cooRDlVVlL, 
 
 and not as in combined phrases (§ 2:^.S, Rem. G ; g 28:J, Rem. ;,), as : 
 
 Gajus is wiser than his l)rother, 0<(ju8 sapkntior cd quam f rater 
 
 i'tHX (not XII lis). 1 1 • J 1 „ 
 
 It is more difficult to deceive Oajus, than to be di'ceived by 
 him, Giijam deciptre dijidlius ed, qunm ah eo (not sc) dicipi. 
 
 S 2S>5. 2. The first of the compared phrases contains the 
 word, indicating the degree, which either is the degree of 
 equality or the degree of dirTe re lire, according as the 
 
 parativk cannot be uauslaled in Laliu. i' Visere. »* Acceaere. i» Deligere. '«Sen. 
 t*^nlia. *^ lU«s. 
 
 THE COMBINATION OF PHRASES BY COMPARISON. 207 
 
 compared relations are represented as equd or unequal. The 
 decree of differcnee in conn^ared plirases always is the comparative. 
 
 ?:,nls ff/i^palon T^^i^r, L .UicU the ior.e. "a." in- 
 
 ad V 4 ""^A^ ahvay. is i,.puJ Besides these there are ajew othe 
 
 ,vords. in which --««-'VT-.ZtA -"F : imper'matvefb 
 1 Tlip verb ?//////ti (mstead Ol magis kik ) , ~- ^'^'^'^ " i , 
 
 1. 1 nc > ei u //M<t(,t, v'"^ «^ ™, o/ivprb^ Tindta (nod) ana 
 
 jird and ^second member of the comparison. 
 8 O€>o 3 The second member of the comparison generally 
 .nperrs in' an abridged form, when the compared phrases have 
 one or more words in common. These common words are e^- 
 pressed in the first member, and inipUed in the second. 
 
 ^'''"'l llv'^siippUing the suppressed COMMON WORDS, and 
 
 2. Ify ^^^W'^'^^^^^J^f^:!'^^^^ deo-rees in both members are 
 '^ ^^^^rTd^rnfhe " ctS Jhe kigker degree, we 
 
 r;TBup"y in the leccmd member the lesxer, and vice versa. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Gajus li.-is better fields tUaii Sejiis. 
 
 analysis : 
 
 word uaaiii: , , . a •„« 
 
 Gajas agros melidres habd quam Sejm. 
 
208 THE COMBINATION OF THRASES BT COMrARISON. 
 
 It appears that S^j'is is the suLj.'ct of the second menih.T and hence 
 in the linal arrangement remains in the nominativj. CASt.. 
 
 2. CiJijii** lias bctttr fields lliaii gai «Uiis. 
 
 ANALYSIS : 
 FlKST MEMBER : Gajus has better fields, Oaj'fs rrf/m.^ melwrfM hahH. 
 Second MEMBER (completed): Gajus has worse gardens, Oujns harm 
 
 deterwirn hdhet. , .. ^ . 7 i v» 1 
 
 ArR VNCxEMENT, hv omitting the common words G(tjn.^—MbH and 
 the (U^gree deterions in the second member, and inserting the con- 
 necting word quam : 
 
 Gajus (Kjros mdiorcs hahet quam hortos. 
 It ar>poars that ^^>?-^'.s is an object in the comi)leted second mem- 
 ber, and iience in the tinal arrangement remains in the ACCUSA- 
 
 Hem 8 In these lessons the general principles of numeral and quan- 
 titative comparisons, and that of descriptive adjectives are con- 
 sideied. For (nialit:itive compariscm. and U)r a more particular 
 trealmeut of the whole subject see P. II. p. 743 loll. 
 
 A. THE COMl'ARATIVE PERIOD IX THE NUMERAL COMrARTSOX. 
 
 § 297. 4. The comparison is called numeral, wlicii the de- 
 gree answers to the interrogative quot (quam muHi), how many,, 
 or quofie,% how many times, how often (§ 254, 258). 
 
 § 2t)8. 5. The degree of equalitv in the numeral comparison 
 is expressed by the numeral adjectives tot (tarn multi), as many, 
 totidnn, just as many, pjuI the adverb tofif^-^, as many times 
 (§ 257, 258). To l)oth tot and totidem belongs the relative 
 adjective quot as connecting word. The connecting word of 
 tolies is quotlcH. Both, quot and qnotles, arc translated by 
 
 " fly" 
 
 W( hire as many houses as Gajus, Nos tot domos habc-mus qtiot 
 
 Stnnpmnius kills just as many enemies as Gajus, Sempronius totiaem 
 
 hostiF occTdit quot Giijus. 
 The Gauls retreat as often ets the Romans, Galli toties se recipmnt 
 
 quoties Homaui. 
 
 §!209. G. The comparative degree in the numeral comparison 
 in answer to the adjective q}(ot (liow many) is expressed ))y the 
 mimeral adjectives j^/jor^, more, and pauriore^ fewer, less (§ 257). 
 In answer to the adverb quoties the comparative is expressed by 
 
 TUE COMBINATION OF PHRASES BY COMPARISON. 209 
 
 the adverb 8ar;.n/.s oftener ^§2VU, R.9), and mmus .arpe {h^ 
 often, not so often). With all these comparatives the relative 
 adverb quam (than) is used as connecting word, as : 
 
 S^^mpronius intends to Imild more houses, than thou, Sempronius 
 
 plurls domos frditicare vult, quam tu. Q.mr^ronius 
 
 Gains seems to be aMsted hy fewer (less) friends than ^^^^»^^^' 
 
 (iaius a imucioribus amicis adjuvari vidi'tur, quam feempioniiis. 
 
 - ^,!;.^;" 'rz:^'/^^ mistaken, than Gajus, Sempronius saepias 
 
 G^uf^^nJsk^'^ften than (not so often c.) Sejus Gajus minus 
 isaepe venit qaam Sejus. 
 
 B. the comparative period in the quantitative comparison. 
 § »00. 7. In the quantitative comparison the degrees answer 
 to'the quantitative interrogatives quaatus, quantum, quantopere, 
 how much, how great (§ 2 03). 
 
 S *W I 8 The degree of equality in the quantitative com- 
 parison when an adjective, is expressed by the quantitative adjec- 
 lives tantus, as much, as great, tantmdem, just as great ; and 
 when an adverb, by the quantitative adverbs tantum, tantundem, 
 and sometimes by tantopere (§ 269). The connecting words are 
 the adjectives and adverbs of the interrogative form, corresponds 
 iiig in their grammatical form to the words, expressing the 
 degree. They in English always are expressed by " as :" 
 
 Gajus has as much money as you, Gajus tantum pecuniae habet, 
 
 ThoullnldnU^^^^^^ just as much silver to me as to Gajus— Tantundem 
 argenti mihi reddere debes, quantum Gajo. ,,„,i^k 
 
 We are oppressed by (fs great a cruelty as you, Nos tanta crudeli 
 
 tate opprimimiir, 5'/^^/<^ii vos. „f„„^ ,.^a 
 
 We rejou-e as much as you, Nos tantum gaudemus, quantum \os 
 Rem The partitive construction of fantus and taut usdeni is tyy^hed 
 
 to the comparative period according to the genera rules (^ -^^' 
 Rem. 10. The connecting words regularly agree in their gramma ca 
 form with the word, expressing the degree. Hence if this Tvord is 
 Ln AD.IKCTIVE. the .-onnecting word must be an ADJECTIVE : if the 
 de-ree is expressed 1)V an adverb, the connecting word i^^^^t be an 
 ADVERB. In the saiAe way both words must agree in gender and 
 xrxmFR The case is not alwavs the same, and is determined by 
 a eTiSJ; of the RELATIVE SENTENCES (Part II.) In the following 
 IxercL only such examples wi^^l be ^-vcm, where Uie conm^.i^^ 
 adjectives agree even in case with the words ^xpressing the degree 
 Bern. 11. S<,metimes the numeral degree tot and the quantitatne tanU 
 (as great), are connected by coordination. In this instance bo.h 
 
 14 
 
»10 ■„,, C0»,S-ATIOS OF Mn»ES BY COOTA.,»». 
 
 "i,„ ;.;;,„"L I»»".., .,... •> 'i""" ■■■■'■ 
 
 word alwaiji is jnniH. 
 
 • .,n,l ' l....^ ' are attrilmlivc adjectivos. they are 
 
 liem. 12. ■« !'<•" ' more ami .''^ff, ?,',,, ",,.,,|iiive srciiiiive (? iM), a^ : 
 
 ex,.r,.ssea Hv ,«»•< an; «!;;■ ,"(;,' 'I'j'.'uannia plus lerri .^i,...it 
 
 <,„an-, «^'"'•'•-^.'^^ ' '; „^^, :'• is ahvavs reiulered by m,>jor pvcu- 
 ,uV, (net /-;«••< i><v«„«i^). *'';'■ '■.'^; •,,"•, *;,ient on a vK.tn. it is reii- 
 
 dorea by /«"'/'•< ■■ I ''''"','''■' u./ri. ma n instances the advkui. 
 p;„,) adnilror <,uam bejuni. I';"- ."'^JV'. ,„ ,,,„.avs wl.en (le|.en- 
 
 dei.t on ibe verb to love ( t.. ov, mmc _ .^.^^ ^^^ _^^^^^^ 
 
 ,«■« or «-«"(■<!, not "'"i"- )■ ^ *, ,; V; „ .e more useful ' = pi«» 
 •;.„er,nr=;-(«;^-,;ri';;;'''-,',4^ 
 
 ?;!::':,:;r pir:s;:t"i:i''^-::^o/^,;s... ...^ (..e,uau. 
 
 tit.Uve mi/.^/.v with tUn grnlth'o J.6/-./v/^^^^ .omparison is fcrm.d 
 
 Rem. 15. The superlative ae.irree m ^^^^'.^^^ r^^^/.^^^^Xl n the ciuanti- 
 
 bv thi' a(l)ectivc'S]>/'//i///i and lumn.sinu (> 7i'J:..*J"';"wi,,, adverbs 
 
 "^tlve comparison by the ,x.Yy.'Xx^'^ plan,umi^Zi^6),^^^^i tli». aaxer s 
 
 muxiint audpl'irinium (most). 
 
 C TtlE COMl-AUAT.VE PEU.OP TK T..F. COMPAiaSON OF DESCRIPT.VE 
 
 ^* ADJECTIVES. 
 
 S 30*5 1 The de<^rees in the comparison of descriptive 
 abLtives' answer to the qnestion quam (how) in connection with 
 a descriptive adjective or adverb, as : How dd.gent, quam 
 (Z,7/r/emsniow bravely, r?i/am/or/i7er? ^ 
 
 k' -{O 1 1 1 The degree of equality consists of the adverb tarn 
 in connection with a descriptive adjective or adverb, to which 
 alwavs corresponds the connecting word quam. Both the degree 
 of eqnality tain and its connecthig word quam are rendered by 
 
 '' a.s"; 
 
 THE CO.IBINATION OF PHKASES BY COMPARISON. 211 
 j-7- * ^a Q..\u9 Gains tam dilit^ens est quam Sejus. 
 
 pu"-nant g^/'i//*/ Romilni. 
 
 T1.C coin.™-, degree (L. XXXVII.) ^^^^^.^I^^. 
 sau.0 conueoling word 5««'«, «Lich theu is trauslated l3) than . 
 
 Jhis placets molt ''"'^^? "' (^^\ nuam montes proximi. 
 
 ^';:-2^f^U.Z!}^^^^e.er. Ho.es aJrlus pu.nant 
 
 ntmm una nam. . i i.„ 
 
 r:;s;,f ,;,sr£. ».- ~"i t,,. v.* ,. >i,. 
 
 tZ<jZ^(?.S g"<a//i diu projicvi. 
 
 305. 12. D. 
 
 SUMMARY OF RULES ON THE TRANSLATION OF Tim 
 
 WORDS more and less. 
 
 1 To rondor the Knmish wcnls J more^^and 1«;^^ J^^^lf/J'ar.nvKUB. They 
 
 firVt di<tin.M.ish whcMhei- iho.-e won > iV ,?. nf v noun exprc-sed; (6) when thi-y are 
 
 are ^ . TIVES ^m when they an- ;'' 7^^"^;^^; „;^ "^.e p'sSi loll.), heing objects of a 
 
 C'd ubs-hiiely *i. e. ^yith t'le h.rce ot J "l^/,*, ^; ^^e advkub. (a. when they .land 
 
 verb, as -t.. -ive niore.^ \to lo^e '"V «;u??;>iore i)/^V/f/'(!. «to: 0) when they are de- 
 
 i±;i <:^T^^rh, ii;:;;;;;^^ s> ^ ^^^ - - ^-- -- ' ^' '- - ' "^"^ '^^7' 
 
 l,,,;.. to tlie nlmk.:al comparison. ^^;'\"^^[V\f ^^^-^ '\^ ore troops ' is alwavs rendered 
 V J,lu. and ndnus with a ^r^^V^^', !''- "Y<!r r 4). For rendering ^ more than three 
 
 etc see «^ :ni. . . , mnrpMs ID the SINGULAR, the corapanson is 
 
 "1; Whin the ^7:-;;-/^.KV,?. ,,?^? ,direi by i>^a. or minu. with a genttne 
 nn-nit tat ive, more ami u>« I. Vr ,.i » 
 
 Vs^iVi.K\i(v!i'^^*vvni,>u<frameuti\,\i.\^. , , . adjectives with the force of a . 
 ^'r NN^K-n^iv>re^ and Mess ar^-iis^^^^ You return more 
 
 noun (see p. 2tll, Rem. 14), they arc '^ ' V*^^ ' - '^^n, nuam accipis. ^ . ^ 
 
 is alwavs rendered ininn^''. hi<rher det^rec of a verb, it is generally 
 
 '"«. When the a.lverb ;}"'>>•,« V^f"°„VMno.e t un hifbrother, rnarm (m>t Pl''^) >''^^ 
 renQeredbvy//«.7^sa-:nepl^'a-«=^™V,?*^^^^^^^^^ the pre.iicate, but that o us 
 
 Zct qxainjrat.r ejus. «O^^JV^^.; •^/"nevanq lisi.e.^ more by good plans than 
 objects is compare.! by marji-^ *'.'^Tr/ J-i/ For the use o( pl^'^ -'^ adverb see li. 13 
 
 bS )i;?^;rprur^ -al'';;.cro';Sroraico). see p. X., p. .™ rou. 
 
212 THE COMBINATION OF PHRASES BY COMrAKISOX. 
 
 EXElinSES. 
 
 A. XUMKKAL CoMrAKISON. 
 
 Deoree of kc^UALITY . 1. Nos t(Jt trstis liabr-iniis, quot V08. 2. (iajug 
 tot carniina scrioit quoT Sfjiis. 3. Liixuria tot liominibus pfrnicirisa est 
 quot i)aui)eitas. 4. Antoniiie* tot civis iuterlicit, (juot Sulla aul Marius. 
 5. Crassus totidem causas perorate] not Brutus. 0. Tot idem adou't^cenics 
 ^pra^cPduut quot virgines. 7. -Ncnio tot verba defendere ))otest ijuot 
 dicere. 8. Poinp«~ji "theatrum totid«'m •^sspcctatcires Vapit (jiiot .lovis 
 tenii)lum. \). Caniillus totics mat «luotics iinjMTatoris nojuen «nuntiat. 
 10. Excubiat' totii'S clamon-ni Vduut, quoties hostes appropuKjuant. 
 
 1. Wo have as iiianv books as Scius. 2. I liave as maiiv houses as 
 tbou. o. \N'e are in ne«'d of as many soldiers as the army of Sertorius. 
 4. I am obedient to as manv mnst«'rs as vou. 5. (lajiis is assisted l)v a? 
 many fri(>nds as S('m[)r(jnius. (i. He intends to draft vc>'/^v•/•/6e/t) as many 
 h'irions as the other eon^ul. 7. It is daniivrous to have as nmnv friends 
 as enemitjs. 8. Uajus is convicted of just as numy thefts as Sejus. \). 
 No writer writes as many words as he reuds. 10. The month of *Mareh 
 has iust as manv da vs as October. 11. The father pardons as ofti-n as 
 tlie sun sins. 12. I intt'ud to 'visit thee as numy tinu's as thy brother."* 
 13. We must h^ht as often as the p:<'neral directs us to flight. 14. The 
 liomans are Mriven back as often as their allies. 
 
 (.'(^Mi'AHATiVK DKOKKE. 1. Plurls aniTcos habere volutnus quam 
 inimlos. 2. Gajus se pluribns verbis defendit, quam n»'Cesse est. 3. 
 Pluils '"bubulcos "habere «piam boves ineptum est.'"'' 4. Inutile est, 
 st^ ])luiibus laboribus '-^dare ([uam '^recte ])t»rfici ])Ossunt, 5. (Jajus 
 pauciHres clientes liabet (puim nosmet ii)si. G. A paucioribus lumiinibua 
 laudari «piam vitui)er;"[ri molestum est. 7. S.epius mediclnam (piam 
 cibum ca[H're videmini. 8. Uajum minus s;ppe videmus (piam Sejum. 
 
 1. More wars are carried on by Pom[>ejus than by any other jj^i'neral. 
 2. More advantages can be ol>tained by this war than by any treaty. 3. 
 More enemies perish bv disease than bv tlie sword of our soidiei-s. 4. It 
 is absurd to keep more ^'stables than horses, a. You seem to keep more 
 <l()<:s than it is necessarv. (J. Thou art useful to more men than mvself. 
 7. That man '**kills more enemies by huni::er and cruelty than the 
 soldiers by the sword. 8. Our soldiers receive fewer wounils than the 
 enemies. \). Thou ])ermitt<'st fewer soldiers to go away tlian it is allowed 
 to thee. 10. Thou hast fewer enemies than even I. 11. 1 have oftener 
 the fever than even thou. 12. You oftener ''a})ply tin? spurs than the 
 ^'^l^ridles. 13. Tlie (iermans are less often '^visited by merchants than 
 the (jauls. 14. It is less often necessary to excite than to restrain one'a 
 self. 
 
 B. Quantitative Co.MrAiiisox. 
 
 Degree of equality. 1. Oajus tantum auctoritatis habet (juantum 
 tu. 2. Tu tatito odio me perseipieris, quanto homines -*^'inimicissimi. 3. 
 
 1 To prect-de. ' Nobody. 3 Tlu-atre. * Sj.t'otator. » To hold. « To r:tiso. i Adire. 
 * Fi-iiUr inav bo [>lac?d in the ac-cusalivfe or in llie noiniiuiiive. What dilU-rence iimken 
 this in st^nsi'? » To irite hm-k. n-pollere. ^" O.v-driver. 'iTokt-ip. '^ i^^. impiT- 
 sonal i)rt'ilicate must be placed either before or after tlie whole coin[»rtrative period, when 
 the compareil pliri><es eoniain coiainon worils. *3 g^ dare^ to <levote one's self. •* JW'eil. 
 1* bUbuluuL »*Tollere. ^' AdhibGre. '^ jOfeumu^ i» Adiro. ^** luimical. *.MHrtius. 
 
 THE COMBINATION OF PHRASES BY COMPARISON. 213 
 
 Pomponius autem tibi tanta beneficia pnebet, quanta mihi ipsi. 4. 
 Tantum hiboran^ debes quantum proficere vis. 5. Huic vulnen tantun- 
 dem cune adhibere quantum periculf.so cuidam morbo neeesse est. 0. 
 Tot tant(jsque la bores ^^buscipio, (piot (iuantos<iue bene perficere i)0ssum. 
 7 Prater tuus tantum sapientiic -^'prodit quantum virtutis. 8. Tan- 
 tum auri mihi deest, quantum abs te -'-suppeditari uequit. U. Democn- 
 tus tantum ridet, quantum Heraclltus Here solet. 
 
 1 I owe to thee just as much money, as thou to me. 2. He shows as 
 much boldness as i-norance. 3. You cultivate as mucli gram as we oiir- 
 selves. 4. This -'beverage contains as nmch. water as wine. o. VVe 
 feel as manv and as great pains as thy brother. 0. Ihis smal fetate 
 carries ..n as manv and great wars, as generally are -/dreaded by the 
 ffreatt^st and ^Hvealthiest nations. 7. We fear these gifts ot the Greeks 
 just as much as tlie Trojans. 8. We -Metest these treaties as much as 
 ycnir emperor. 0. This king fears death as much as any other tyran.. 
 
 ('oMi>ARATiVE DECREE.— 1. CatuUus plus - "siuivitatis habet quaiu 
 rob.)ris. 2. Hoc negotium plus detriment! nobis atfert quam commodi. 
 
 3 i*lus lal.oris ab hostibus perfertur, (luam a militibus nostris. 4.^ 1 em- 
 pus plus doloris leiiTre st)let, (luam omnia amicdrum -;^olatia. o. Vos 
 minus tidu.'i;e habere videmini, (]uam ipsi hostes. 0. Nemini'm scrii>- 
 torem plus diligimus quam Cicerdnem. 7. Pueri magis ludere xpiam 
 laborare videntur. 8. Ambulare malumus (piam sedere. U. Mdites 
 mortem gloriosam subire, quam vitam tur[)ein - degere malunt. lU. 
 Hostinm exercitus plus -^"tirGnum continet quam «''veteranorum. 
 
 1 Our leaders show nmre courage than wisdom. 2. Hogs have more 
 lani than the other animals. 3. You must drink more water than wine. 
 
 4 Thou appliest less diligence to this =^-work than my brother, o. W e 
 assist Poinponius more bv ^^ 'material help than by mlvice, but you gene- 
 rallv give to him less help than advice. 0. We like more to ^^make our 
 livili- bv labor, than to -covet the property =*"of others, i. 1 his city 
 nourishes less bv onunerce than by the -thrift and gooa '^customs of the 
 inhabitants. 8.' Thou seemest to love Serapronius more than anv oJur 
 man-^ i). We will m)t love (Jod less than -^'treasure. 10. Oajus dis- 
 pleas.'S more than his brother, but less than thou. 11. It is less expedi- 
 ent to punish crimes than to prevent [them.] 
 
 C. CoMPARisox OF Descriptive Adjectives. 
 
 Degree of equai^ity.— 1. Regina tam prodiga est, quam ejus mater. 
 2 Militu'rt nostri tarn fortes (piam generosi esse videntur. 3. tecrip- 
 tdrum ve-terum lectio tam jucnnda est quam utilis. 4. A obis tam torti- 
 bus (uiam cautis esse neeesse est. 5. Uermandrum legati tam arrogan- 
 ter res]>ondent .luam inepte. «. Hoc iter tam longum est quam moles- 
 tum. 7. Socii tamtaide adveinunt, quam celeriter eflfugiunt. 8. lam 
 diu laboramus quam diu et voluinuset possumus^ 
 
 l^nt.is '-ift Detest ari 2' Sweetness. '■"< Consolation. -isiolead. •'"Areciuit. A 
 
 ^"eSn. ^"^T^^ Material help, .;.... pL - To ^-:^^^^::^:r'^^'^ 
 »6 t'„„cn,,iscere. '«Translate -><trano<' (oJurxm) property ^.^i Sr^nce woiUd 
 »» "JAnr may be iranslaLe.l l.y an aecu^ative or a nuuiuiative. W hul diHerence woiiia 
 this make in seusc? *" Ui<cs. • Umleilake. 
 
2U THE COMBINATION OF PHRASES BY COMPARISON". 
 
 1. The c:eneral seems to be as -"Hiu-i'ssfiil as his brother. The king 
 intends ti^be a» severe as just. :}. We are as desii(»us of a ■''clianixe of 
 government as vou. 4. It is allowed to ))e as short as thou wishest. 
 5. Tills work seems to be as easy as ]>leasant. (». Th«? general directs 
 the ambassadors to be as ])olite as cautious. 7. Sempronius answers as 
 kindlv as the otlier ambassadors. 8. I cannot -*-M)ear injuries as i)atiently 
 as it IS necessary. 9. This nuigistrate speaks as absurdly and meanly, 
 as it seems to be his custom. 10. The enemies arrive as suddenly aa 
 they ^Mepart. 11. We err as long as we live. 
 
 CoMPAKATiVE DE(H{EE. — 1. Valles fecuudiores esse solent quam 
 monf«'S. 2. GalU Poenis amic-idres sunt (juam Ronianis. ;i. Equos 
 meliores habeo quam lil)ros. 4. Dux ilie pecunbe cupidior est <]uam 
 gU)ri;e. 5. Homo ille ditior est quam Crassus, felicior (luam Sulla, 
 beniirnior quam Titus. 0. Nemo homo magis nelarius esse ]K)test, (piam 
 Catiffna. 7. Aurum minus utile esse videtur, qupm ferrum. S. Lucullus 
 mairnificentius cxenat (juam IMogenes. \). (lermani victoriam acrius 
 disputant quam Ualli. 10. Donatus Virgilii carmina melius enarrare 
 videtur (puim iuteri.retes r<'centiores. 11. Facilius est navem regere 
 quam civitatem. 1'2. Lai»ides fniugere pra>stat, viuam tale negotium 
 l>erficere. lo. Animi doloribus vehementius torquPniur quam corporis 
 cruciatibus (torment.) 
 
 1. (Jajus is more modest than thou. 2. This road H'ter') is shorter tlian 
 the Flaluinian (FUinuhin.s) way. o. This crime is more serious than 
 the theft of Gajus. 4. Our soldiers are bravi-r than any troops of the 
 enemies, o. Our private houses an; more maguiticeut than any public 
 buildings of the Persians. 0. We intend to build better ships than the 
 I'hmlish {Aii(iliis). 7. No writer writes more useful books than Seiii- 
 jmmius. 8. The northwiuds (^/7'/<Vr>) are less dangerous to our coasts 
 than the southwinds. 1). Mice generally are less injurious to the [stand- 
 inu] crops than moles [td^pa). 10. It is more i)leasant t<» ])ardon, than to 
 l)U*iiish. 11. It is h'ss necessary to be wise, than to be honest. 12. It 
 generallv is more easy to hear than to si)eak ; but often it is less ditiicult 
 to SiK-ak, than to be silent. 13. Th(^ Gauls seem to seize {arripere) this 
 occasion less eagerly than the (lermans. 14. Wise men live mon; hap- 
 pily than fools (.'<^//^'^v). l."). A more disgraceful crime cannot be con- 
 ceived {coi/ita/r) than perfidy. lU. The general directs Crassus to march 
 {iter fdCfir) more cautiously than before. 17. We can more easily attack 
 enemies, tluin defend our own boundaries. 18. You generally sleep 
 longer than you work, and eat oftem^r than you read. 
 
 D. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE WORDS moTC AND IcSS. 
 
 1. We teach more scholars than you, but your scholars are more 
 learned. 2. Thebes has more houses, but less inhabitants than Syracuse. 
 3- This writer has more grace (l<pos), but less clearness {pcrspii'Mitaa) 
 than C'ato; he employs more words, but less lights {lumen). 4. Gajus 
 is more ably {(iptns) defended, than he can defend hiinxdf. o. ^^'e have 
 more forests than the Sicilians, anil less fields ; but our forests are 
 
 <» Felix. 
 4* Abire. 
 
 43 A change of governuient, res noca (literally new affairs). *' Ferre. 
 
 IDIOMS OF THE COMPARATIVE PERIOD. 
 
 215 
 
 Bmaller than their fields, and our fields produce (f/ignere) more gram 
 than their forests wood (/<ir//^/m)- ^- Our meadows are more adapted 
 iidourus) to culture {cultura), than the fields of the Scythians; but their 
 fiehls are more easilv harvested {lucUre) than our meadows. ^- ^ J^el 
 more ])ain than thou, but 1 endure it more easily than thou. 8. Wo 
 understand Homer more easily than Pindar {Pindarus), but this very 
 dillicultv gives {<iprre) more pleasure to us, than that smooth {lems) 
 stream ( 11'irneu) of the Homeric {HomcrkuH) language {oratio) 9. My 
 father loVes thee more than his children, and his children love thee 
 more than themselves. 10. This orator has more gall than honey, yet 
 he is more eagerly read and by more men, than any other writer. 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 IDIOMS OF THE COMPARATIVE PERIOD. 
 THE ABSOLUTE DEGREE. 
 
 § 306. The Latin language has several peculiarities in form- 
 ing the comparative period : 1. In regard to completing the 
 second member ; 2. In changing the second member into an 
 OBJECT of the comparative degree ; 3. In deteriniiuzg the degree 
 of difference • 4. In cm})loying the comparative period as a mere 
 grammatical form for the limitation of numeral and quantitative 
 relations. 
 
 A, COMPLETING THE SECOND MEMBER. 
 
 § JI07. AVh'en attributive phrases belong to both members 
 of the comparison, which have the same governing noun, both 
 laniruages omit the common governing noun, but the English 
 language often iudicates it by certain form-adjectives, which can- 
 not be employed in Latin. 
 
 1. AVhen the attributes are genitives, the English language 
 uses the form-adjectives that (those), the one in place of the 
 omitted governing noun in the second member, which in Latin 
 cannot be translated, as : 
 
 The garden of Gajus is more beautiful, than that of Sempronius, 
 
 G^ji hortus pidchrior ext quam Scji (not ille Siji.) 
 The leader of the Romans is as brave as the one of the Gauls, 
 llmnaiidrum dux taiii fi/rtis c^t quam GallOrum (not unus 
 GaMOrum.) 
 
216 
 
 IDIOMS OF THE COMPARATIVE PERIOD. 
 
 Tlie fields of tho Gauls aro more fi-rtilo than tJmsr of tho Genv.ans, 
 Off/lui-'f/n (/f/ri ficiiiidiorcs sunt qaani O'c rmandni/n (.not illi 
 G( rNia/ioruNi.) 
 
 2. When the attriljiite in tlie second member is a possessive 
 adjective, the KnirUsli lanirun.G^c eniphiys peeidiar suhstantive forms 
 of t!ie possessives (mlnr, thine, hers, ours, yours, theirs), which 
 in Latin are expressed by tlie nsnal possessive adjectives, agreeing 
 with tlie omitted governing nonns, as : 
 
 The house of Gajus is greater than ours, Guji domiis major est 
 
 qnttin nodru. 
 The sons of Senipionius are more learned than mine, Simproiin 
 
 Jilii doctionn stint quiun ntd. 
 
 Keni. 1. Frciiuently the adjcrtive '^y?r//" is added to the English pos- 
 sessives, which tlu-n retain their adjective form, as: 77/// brac< n/ is 
 (jnatt r thuii in if oirn, Virtus tua major fst <iuam nu'a. /f'y'"'"* ^H^'^'^ 
 tky chUdnn riwrc t/ian his own, Gajus liberos tuos plus diligit quam 
 
 BUOS. 
 
 * 3. When tlie attributes are other adjectives, the English 
 langnage often indicates the omitted governing noun in the second 
 member by the nnmeral one, which cannot be translated in Latin, 
 the adjective of the second member agreeing with its governing 
 noun understood, as : 
 
 A hrick house is firmer than a wooden one, Domns late vie ia fir mior 
 
 t.st qnttiii litjhea (not lujiua una.) 
 Old friends are l)etter than new ones, Amlci veteres meliores sunt 
 
 quoin noci (not noci uni.) 
 No writers are more renowned than thi'se, Scriptures nuUi 
 
 clariores aunt, qtiaiu hi. 
 
 55 JIO^. When an inflectional comparative degree is used as 
 PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVE, all otlicr words in both members being 
 common, the Latin language })laces the compared adjective of the 
 second member likewise in the comparative degree. Li English 
 the second adjective always stands in the positive degree, and the 
 comparative in the first member is formed either by " niore^^ or 
 by '* ro.lher,^^ as : 
 
 The Greeks are rather {more) mse than brace, Gra?ci sapientioreB 
 sunt quani fortiures. 
 
 Rem. 2. Often the Latin lanf^uaijrc leaves the second adj.'ctive in tlie 
 positive, and th»' comi)aiative of tlie first must tiien always he 
 formed l>j " inof/ix,'' which is nlwai/.s necessary, when one of the two 
 adjectives does not form infleclionul degrees, as : 
 
 IDIOMS OF THE COMPARATIVE PERIOD. 
 
 217 
 
 Artem juris civilis hahetis, magis magnam atque uberem quam 
 diliicilem et obscuram. You have the science of civU law, rather 
 great and rich, than difficult and obscure. 
 
 § 309. The comparative period often is combined with 
 phrases, which logically belong to one of the two members only. 
 This combination gives rise to several peculiar grammatical forms, 
 which mostly belong to the comparison of sentences (Part II). 
 Here belongs the case, when an attributive phrase, containing 
 the comparative degree, is combined with a predicative phrase, 
 belonging to the first member only, as : 
 
 We liave a greater general than Caesar, Ducem majorem hahemus 
 quam Caesarem, or: Ducem majorem habemus quam Caesar est. 
 
 Kern. 3. Analyzing this sentence, it is evident, that the predicative 
 phrase " vve have" does not belong to the second member: 
 
 First mp:mijeu : We have a greater general ; 
 
 Second member: Ccesar is a worse general (than ours.) 
 The copula is in the second member does not occur in the first 
 member, and therefore ouglit to be and often w expressed in Latin. 
 But it frequentlv is omitted, and by a peculiar attraction of case 
 the subject CiEsdr is then i)laced in the accusative, agreeing with 
 the accusative duceui in the first member. This attraction, how- 
 ever, only takes place, when the noun of the first member is in the 
 ACCUSATIVE, not when it is in other oblique cases. We then 
 ■ always must retain the copula in the second member, placing the 
 noun in the nominative, as : 
 
 We are obedient to a greater king than Philip, Majdri regi 
 ohidimu.i quam Philippus est (not qaaiii Pldlippo.) 
 ^^ Attraction is an agreement contrary to general grammatical 
 
 rules. 
 
 B. CHANGE OF THE SECOND MEMBER INTO AN OBJECT. 
 
 § 310. WHien the second member in the comparison of dif- 
 ferent degrees contains nothing bnt the subject, either alone or 
 in connection with attributes, the Latin langnage frequently omits 
 the connecting word quam and places the subject of the second 
 member in the ablative case, changing thus the second member 
 into an object of the comparative degree, as : 
 
 Gajus is braver than Sejiis, Gajus fortior est Sejo. 
 Rem. 4. The arrangement in this case either is the same as in combina- 
 tion of ol)jective phrases {Gajus Si jo fortior est), or the ablative may 
 follow the corai)arative, the same as in the usual arrangement of tho 
 comi)arative period. 
 Rem. 5. 'I'his use of the ablative case always is allowed, when the noun 
 of the second member, by completing the latter, will appear to be 
 
 lU 
 
218 IDIOMS OF THE COMPARATIVE TERIOD. 
 
 ^::':Z:t 0iw-r« t ih!" al-latn-o _wi,„out v-..-^. as o.,ject of 
 
 „ef„..««-,., following or l''-^-f;"f,'\,'^^7,f ;','."" »,m could (mn, 
 oiwrimr and «y.e are translate..! li> the j ia«s ( _ 
 
 '^^,:^:;;r:;:;:;'«;(^^^^ -»^ tk-sc «^airs aren^or» 
 
 ^n:Z % '^:^::^'^:^ l^St.. . greater. U.an H 
 (^^lUo loquacior est, Gajus is more talkative than usually. 
 C. THE ABLATIVE OF PIFFEBESCE. 
 
 8 «1 1 . Tlio comparative [.eriod as such shows ruly, Ihaf Hie 
 conn...... phrases are different or equal, but not the amoint, h,j 
 
 v'ieh the,' diirer. This an.ount of ditterenc. n.ay -c express d 
 either bv quantitative nouns in eonncetion wuli nlmlbals 
 (L XXXIV Rem. 2) or by indefinite qcantit.vtive advkrus 
 (s'->Gy) ' These noaus or adverbs are made objects of the com- 
 mratiN^ de.-ree. The nouns are placed in the ablative case, and 
 ^ ianiit^tive adverbs assume the form of the ablative ne.tek 
 sivcuiAE Of their adjectives* {quanto, mullo, much, > t. r , 
 
 ablative ol' diHVrentc. 
 
 Gajus is (bv) two inches taller tlum Sejus, Gajus d„obus digilis procc 
 %'e:ia'ls'2;00(/;aces farther distant than the camp. Alexia du<^vs miU 
 
 This r..ad is by ■"^"^: «>"■«/ ""•'','. '^f.*' o qmiuto clilkaM.^ 
 
 How much more diligent i& feejus inau vjaju., ^ 
 
 ^^■^Ue'-wo^ns nornule larger than the fox, L.pus alicinanto n.<jor est 
 qua til lulpes. ^ . 
 
 „e luLcli..able, »a w« «re «ccustumcd lu Si.J n. our sr»."""... 
 
 IDIOMS OF THE COMPARATIVE PERIOD. 
 
 219 
 
 
 Gajus spoaks a little oftener than Sejus, Gjjuh pernio saepius loanitur 
 qwi.m S(jns. ^ 
 
 Tlie entiiuies are by one-half more than our ^oldinis. Hastes dim idio 
 piftns sunt qiKtm militcs iwstn. 
 
 Rem^.^ 8. In the English exi)rossions "many more", " mvrli more", 
 " inurh bttter", the words " mxrh" and " 77iore" indicate the amolnt 
 OF DiKFERENc E, and hencc must be expressed by an adverbial abla- 
 tive in Latin, as : T/ze enemits huce many more troops tlum me, llostes 
 copias multo majores habent quam nos. It is much more pleasant to 
 rccfii'6 tJian ^> .yi>(', Mnlto jucundius est ace ipere quam dare. For 
 tlie use ot nihilo as abhitivo of ditference see Part II, ]>. 2(54. 
 
 KenL 1). The English expressions ''as much af/ain'\ ''as high again", 
 
 ''tmce as large", etc., indicating the amount of difference, are ex' 
 
 pressed by the ablatives altera tauto \\\t\\ a comparative, as: This 
 
 Juki IS as large again as that of Gajus, Hie ager altero tanto major 
 
 est quam Seji. The numeral exjn-essions " three, four, etc., times as 
 
 large, as smjll, as much, etc" are transhited either bv cardinal 
 
 ADVERiis with the ablative tanto, -r^r by cakdixal adjectives 
 
 witli the aidative partibns in connection with comparatives, as : 
 
 The garden of (jajus is live times as large as that of Sejii, Gaji 
 
 /tortus qninquiis tanto major est qmtni Si ji, or quinqnepeirtibus 
 
 major (St. 
 
 Rem. 10. Tile ablative of difference may be connected with those words 
 which mi'ohe a comj)arative degree (J^ 2i).')), as : multo prargtat, it is 
 much preferabU\ it is much hattar ; pa ue is diihas pust (instead of 
 2>o8t((i), a lew days later; multo ante (inst. of antea), much before, 
 much sooner. 
 
 Rem. 11. The aniomit of difference niav also be added to an perln tires, flic 
 e.\))ivssion -by far" being rendered longp., or m>il/o, as : This liorse 
 is the quickest by six paces, Hic equiis sex pas.'^ibus celerrinms est. 
 DuiiHK.nx is by far tlie richest, Dumnori.v longe {multo) diti^dmu^ ed. 
 
 Rem. 12. Tiie amount of difference may also be expressed by whole sen- 
 tences, as : The air is so much the denser (crassiori, the nearer it is 
 to the earth (quo proprior est terra;). For this combination see 
 Part II, p. 701, 5. 
 
 JJ. THE comparative PERIOD EMPLOYED FOR LIMITATION. 
 
 § Jll ^. The comparative period often is employed to doter- 
 mitic wttJun a certdin limit numeral or other ideas, which are 
 su.'-x-eptible of degrees, as : more thm six 7nlles, less than 50 
 pace.% more than human, more than a revolt. The word more 
 is then translated by plus or amplius, the word less by minus, 
 as : 
 
 They kill more than 1,000 enemies, plus (aynplius) quam mille hostU 
 vccldunt. 
 Uajus ijA more than diligent, Gajus plus quam diligens est. 
 Hercules is more than a man, Hercules plus quam liomo esL 
 
220 
 
 IDIOMS OF THE COMPARATIVP: PERIOD. 
 
 Bern IH Comparativo exprosaiona liko theso cannot be resolvod into two 
 ditferent m.-nihers. and hence havr only tlio forw, \m,\ tlie logical 
 weauinn of a c<.mparatiN-e period. IL-re the conipaiative words 
 more and U.ss cannot be considered as members ot plirasrs mucjo 
 thev form onlv one idea in connection with those words which tlu-y 
 limU. Thev are nothing but PA KTi(i-KS (see Book IV. ).^ In ;>naly- 
 /in.rconipnrative expressions of this kind the coml)inations ' more 
 than six", "more than human" always must be considered aa 
 
 SINGLE WOllDS. , • ♦• •* • 
 
 Rem. 14. The connecting word q^KWi, wlien in this combination it is 
 followed bv NUMEK.VLS, is very frequiMitly omitted. an<l th.' numeral 
 phrase ir^'nerallv stands in that case, which it would have without 
 the comVarativJs plu^, ampll".^ and tniints. But sometimes, though 
 rarely, the phrase containing the numeral is ]>laced m the ahlatin k. 
 according to the construction mentioned i^ olO. 
 
 We hire more than 'i{)\) eupthu'X,V\n^ (am].lins) ducentos ca].ti- 
 vos habemus (more seldom: plan ducattiH expttns or plus 
 quam dueentoii cupt'ico»). 
 More than 2000 ennniex enter the gntef<. Plus duo milba hostium 
 portas intrant (more seldom: plus dnobun uaUtbuH, or pins 
 qiiani duo viillia). 
 Rem 15. In a similar manner the age of persons is <'xpressed by the 
 limiting'- comparative period, as: older or younger tlian thirty yeary. 
 Ik-re we must us(; or understand the participle /m^M.x (l)orn) llie 
 Latin expression is threefold : 1. nntus plun {amphns, minus) tnjiiit- 
 ta annus; or, 2. mn}ur {minor) tri'jinta annox; or, 8 inojor {minnr) 
 trif/inta annis. With the last two expressions the addition ot uatMi 
 is rare. 
 
 JE. THE ABSOLUTE DEGREE. 
 
 §. :{ 1 :i. Tlie ABSOLUTE dogroe denotes a high, h)\v, or modi- 
 fied iiitcn.sity. It is expressed : 
 
 1. Ill the NUMERAL comparison by the indefinite numerals multi, 
 
 panel, aliquot, eomplures, etc. 
 
 Rem 16 The adieotive muff us »,vl its plural mum may be eonsi.lered aa positivkr of 
 
 would tor../,...siilvo .U-rees A.r the o<Mn,,arat,v.y>/'o>«. ^'■'^^ "'f ''''»' ^'^^^.'^ ^J 
 int..M^itv. it Uiustut)e Mn abschit,- .Lirrti-. h.mI it is nmn. oom-ct to a*bunu-. that 
 j,/.urt6 'and pln-s are orisrinal ciuparHlives wtt/.uut a positive. 
 
 2. In the quantitative comparison by the quantitative adjec- 
 tives mulho^, paulum, pariim, sati% auqmntns, nimlus and by 
 the quantitative adverbs admodum valde, very much ; vehrmcw 
 ter exceedingly, extremelv ; VHfg?ioprre {stmnNoj^rn'), very 
 much, greatlv, very greatly, and by those adverbs, which are 
 formed fromUie quantitative adjectives, as nmltwn, j'^^rum, etc. 
 (see § 2tV.K) 
 
 IDIOMS OF THE COMPAKATIYE PERIOD. 
 
 221 
 
 3 In the comparison of descriptive adjectives by a coraliinatioa 
 of the descriptive adjectives or adverbs with the following quau- 
 
 titative adverbs : 
 
 admodum or valde, very mmis, too 
 
 satis, svfficknthj, enough, parum, too little, not-enough, 
 
 soineichat, 
 
 '''' 'vorv ..loo.u-nt udde (admodnm) dlsertns ; too boldly, nimisandM 
 Zr^ cl3y" """?!'. «'?" M"ride; sufficiently strong, mtu vmv 
 dm- not bravolv onoHgli, F"'»'"/'""'''''''- 
 8 311. The absolute degree i« all kinds of comparison, 
 denotiixv a /.i'/h degree, and in English expressed by ven/, .s fre- 
 q ;;;i^forn.ed .."the prefx,.., connec.ed -U. a jeeuv.. and 
 adverl'x as : ncrcoUdas, very strong ; p'^rnudU, ^^n'^^^'i' 
 TnL;..<s verv great ; perbrevls, very short ; perd.Jficd.s, 
 Cv diffienlt ; p^rlU v^r/well, e,c. Sometimes the prehx^.a* 
 is used instead ot>e/-, as praealtus, very high. 
 
 R «HI Tliereo-nlar inflectional compakative and siperla- 
 .nld "s ;;; Unently employed in the sense of absolute 
 de..rees The compabaiue has then one of three meanings, 
 ''rutU,-, " so,.e,c/uU'\ or " too- and the supeklative the meau- 
 in.r of " i'ety\ " extreiiiely", exceedintjbj, as : 
 " . , 1-7 • ,. ...v,7 Tl.pmistoolos lives too free. C'^nM ineau- 
 
 v:d^:::^:^itnt:^ «1^- -„. .o ,. rati,,, siow. 6.™««. 
 
 fMne pugnant, the Uerniuns hglit very braN ely. 
 ^ \- K dc.srree " a" lii-b as pcissible," is expressed by qimm before u 
 ^''"•, »:,*,<; f «-it 1. or vithont'tl..> addition of pos^ (conjugated in the 
 «»;),)(.«(((, Willi o[ ' decrree is expressed 1. either by 
 
 reipiired form). In l.ngli.-h imb "^-■J', , ' ^ i,v the 
 
 an' adjecive ^l^^..Xa}^^^JrT^,ok\A., is long 
 conipanuive wo d a., ith ^'-f^,};^^^,.^ «-ith ••;,e.«6fe" (the 
 
 f '" t ,^;8ible the greatest possible, etc.); or 3. by the verb 
 1:X' (ar mli is I call a. well'as we can, as many as they can or 
 
 ""Ti!e'ii"',;,.,ns kill as many enemies as possible (as they can), Bo- 
 We" «'iTtfearrv as much gold as possible (as we can), J«a». 
 
 yiL'=Tr:;TirrriSirifp:Masgw 
 
 Bible), quam optinm libros {potedis) kgere dMis. 
 
222 
 
 IDIOMS OF THE COMPARATIVE PERIOD. 
 
 IDIOMS OF THE COMPARATIVE PERIOD. 
 
 223 
 
 Tliey study as diTi^ontly as rossible (as tlioy can), qnam dillgentU' 
 
 He (lireT'ts his li.uUciKiiit to advanco by the greatest possible jour- 
 neys (as irreat journeys as possible, as he can), Lefjdtum quam 
 rnaxiwin itiitevil>i(t< (jtoie.st) projiclsci jiihet. 
 Rem. 18. ''As sooii as posdhlt* is translated by quam primiim. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 A. COMrLETING THE SECOND MEMBEK. 
 
 1 Oalldrum castra oppido pro])ir>ra sunt quam Romannrum. 2. Ro 
 Tuanr.rum naves altiures sunt quam Oallnrum. 3. Minerva? t.-mplum 
 mao-nitieeiitius est quam Jundnis. 4. ( a>saris nomm siepms memoratur 
 quam PomiH-ji 5. Ilomeri carmina a plurihus homnubus h'guntur 
 quam Ib'siodi'. 0. Alexandri r.r"um pra'chirius est quam Phdippi. 7. 
 Ao-(>r 'Se-'-estanus plus frunu-nti 'i^^iiiuit qunm Tarentinus. 8. \ en(Ti8 
 Su^la chu ius lucet quam Satunii. 1). Animi morbi ],erniciosi«»re3 sunt 
 (piam corporis. 10. Audacia nulla major esse i)otest quam ( atilinae. 
 11 Pa'ientia nulla major esse iK)test quam nostra. 12. Vir bonus et 
 sapiens Hitilitati communi plus "consulit quam sua\ 1:5. Nulli inilitea 
 fortidres esse possunt quam hi. 14. Seuii)ronii diligentia nuijor esse 
 solet (piam tua. 15. Lepdnes du;p diutius i)U-nant quam ceteno. lb. 
 Homines honest! et ''sancti Ix-atius vivere solent (pumi improbi. 1<. Am- 
 malia mai;na diutius vivere solent quam ])arva. 18. Scuta "lerrea corima 
 melius te<.^unt quam lii,niea. 19. Ab liominibus inferiorihus vinci turpma 
 est quam a paribus.'^ ^20. Cives nostri hoc helium fortius gerunt quam 
 felicius. 21. PersiC ditidres sunt quam fortidres. 22. Ihec concio 
 i"amplior est quam "pra-sidi gratior. 23. llonestidres quosdam viroa 
 memonlre i)ossumus quam Themistoclem. 24. Regem cleinenti(»reiu 
 habemus quam Titum, sapientidrem quam M. Aurelium. 25. Hoc reg- 
 num melidri viro dan^volumus (luam Antiochus est. 
 
 1. The '^power of Jupiter is greater than that of Hercules. 2. The 
 genius of this general is greater than that of the greatest commandera 
 of our timt!. 3. The industry of the Sicilians Si'ems more usetul to 
 i-inanlvind than that of the Carthaginians. 4. Our tenr.les are liolier 
 than thoseof the (Jauls. 5. The armies of the 'n^russians tight more 
 bravely and •■'successfully than those of the ''Austriaus. 0. Our deteats 
 are f<wer than those of the Italians. 7. We rather wish to imitate tho 
 language {(/I'atlo) of Cicero than that of Sallust. 8. The candidate ol 
 the'^Patricians is elected by more votes than the one of the Plebeians. 
 9 We rather will yield to the arms of the Romans than to those of the 
 Greeks. 10. The ''ordinances of the tribunes have less authority than 
 those of the consuls. 11. The ^'^reign of Augustus is more illustrioua 
 than tbat of Tiberius. 12. We cannot conceive {cogitare) more abomin- 
 
 1 SfO^xtihiuH. belonging to Segesta. « To produce. » TurentlvuM, beloiiginj: to Taron- 
 111 * Intort'st. 6 i'<>),.'<Hf^re,U> rare (for Hiiiii'ihing). to uttt-iHl (to sonittlmig). « Vir- 
 luoik» ' FerreuA, iron (a.ij.) » In st-ntt-nces like tl.i.s tiie sul.j«'Ct-infinitive, Mhi<-h ta 
 cotniiK.n to both members (ln-re vimi) may be onntteii in Lntin. whicii is not a.lmissible 
 In Engisl» «Assembly. »o Splendid, i» Pre.sidonl. ej l',„^.,iUji. »3 Mankind, i/^r»l« 
 hnmarium. »* lidrussus. »« Felix. »« Austriacus. »' Decrfilum. »» Pi-incipiUut (not 
 regnum, which is the reign of a king). 
 
 tu 
 
 z t 
 
 able cr-.mos than those of Nero. 13. The district oi ^^Rhegium has 
 
 more inhabitants than thatof Tarent. .14. It is more profitab le to govern 
 
 the i.rovince of Sicil v than that of Gaul. 15. It is b.tter to -'^trengthen 
 
 the friendshi]. of the'Si.-ilians than that of the other alhes^of the Komaii 
 
 lx-oi»le. 10. The star .Mercury Is smaller than Jupiter Iv. Hus oration 
 
 ^ more ]»leasant to th'3 president than mine. 18. Ihese words can be 
 
 bell^r undei-st<xxl than mv own. 19. I understand the method of bajus 
 
 as easilv as thine. 20. Your soldiers commit as many crimes as ours. 
 
 Si neEmiH-rorisas "^Mevoted to the welfare of tlie state as to his 
 
 own 22 (iajus attends to the atfairs ..f -^-^others as much as to bis own. 
 
 2:J TheRominsseemto defend the rights of [theirj allies more care- 
 
 7 Ilv ///y.M.v) than theirown. 24. It is more disgraceful to neglect the 
 
 id V u tairi's of others than erne s own. 25. The Romans rather wish to 
 
 c .:« u^>ur provisions than their own. 2«. The tenth legion hgbts 
 
 noiv bravely \han the second. 27. Tliese trees are 1^^^; -^ th^^J^^J^^^^ 
 
 2S These p cture.s are more valuable than the others. 29 This bi other 
 
 L'more sober than the other. ;J0. 1 rather wish to own this house than 
 
 anv other, ol. These regions 
 
 are more fertile than any others. 32. The 
 
 - hVrh.r u()ds are more -'^powerful than the lower ones. 
 
 88. 
 
 Ditficult 
 
 ■l;a::ii^^^>;^'u:e..r^;:rtirmi;d^ 
 
 ,4. Both banks of the river are steep; »'^t the ngh one is lug^^^^ 
 the h'ft 85 It is easier to conciuer a weak nation than a strong one. 
 •> The oritW ns of the chief are rather -'^sharp than elegant; they have 
 ;;uwi i/cT; t an hoiii^^^^ 87 This -'«pestilence is more -alarming than 
 
 ' ^ruc ve ^. T^anib^^^^ reason ^di^pntare) rather -sop^usti- 
 
 c;U V t m ■4>gically. 89. We read more difficult enters Uiaii^Cesa^ 
 
 40. h is necessary to -appoint a more learned ^^^^^^^^ 
 
 41. I cannot conceive a juster cause than ours. 42. 1 give tlii^ money 
 to a more -^^intluential man than Calidius. 
 
 B CHANGE OF THE SECOND MEMBER INTO AN OBJECT. 
 
 1 Thucvdides Herodoto 36veracior est. 2. Antonius frequentius errat 
 
 riatdne 8. Juno ceteris deabus potentior est. 4. Am^^-'^^/'^f ^^/^J^ 
 
 od eior est 5. ^^Bellua nulla elephanto prudentior est. _ ^-^^^ 
 
 1 mi u vekK-ior .^t 7. Nulla virtus ^"amabilior .-st modes la. K Ar- 
 
 I. turn - vmus est auro et aurum virtutibus^^. 9. Fortuna plus consilns 
 
 1» Belon-in- to Khesiuni. J^''''fJ''\''\. ^ 9'"''^'''^^^^^^ 
 ^^.tn,ag>r nl.Gnu.. ^"^ The hi.'h.-r u-ds. rft "*;'^' ^ ^'^f ^".rAcJr. '^^ Aeeinm. ^« Penti- 
 
 l.niia. »"MinHX-. «M» rnic.sos.us. ^' ^3' ''^I^'^j " ^^^^^^^ 4o Amiable. "^ Base. 
 
 M.S. ««Trnihtul. " /a se pretence. 3h\v ,11 beas^^^^ 4 5 rra«,tabilis. 
 42 Supi^ly '• cdiuH est.'' *^ Competent. ** beiuh, cuie. 
 
224r IDIOMS or the comparative period. 
 
 nicious than thine. 6. ^«Fhittorers -onrrally aro mom ea,<r.;rlv sou^'ht 
 (ernetere) than t'rirnds. 7. Tlu' Athenians ure more ' vohitiU' tlian the 
 other nations 8. 1 can -«^prodace no more com]>etent witness than 
 Tacitus ') To be wiser than Phito is as (lillicult as to surpass the <;.Kis 
 themseivoa. 10. It is pleasant to Ik' riehc-r than Crcrsus. 11. \irturt 
 must be dearer to thee than life itself. 12. No worse vice ran be tound 
 than -i^neriury U. W«^ must depart {ahlre) ^«^sooner than we expect. 
 1i The punishment of the accused is ^'harder than justice require. 
 15. You have more money than it is necessary. 10. Ihe Italians light 
 better than usually. 
 
 ' C. THE ABLATIVE OF DIFFEREN'CE. 
 1 ILecviamuUispassibus brevior est quam altera. 2 Mensis Martins 
 'Hrinis dirbus lon-ior est quam Februarius. ;i La^lius tribus horis serins 
 advenit Catdne. 4. (iajus tribus annis major est quam S.-mpronins. .). 
 Turres »-'denis pedibus aitidn^s sunt <|uam miirus. (.. Molestum est, 
 uno^'sestertio minus habPre (juam necesse vidr-tur. 7. Minerv.e templuni 
 aliquot pedil.us altius .vst (,uatn Thest'i. H. (iuanto moh-stius est vmci 
 uuani vincere' I). Populus universus civitatem multo melius regnat 
 quam reges. 10. Se ipsuni gubernare midto di ffici bus est quam rem- 
 Dublicam. 11. Lupus artus multo majdres habet quam cams. U. (. aesar 
 paulo ^^maturius opinidne exercitum -dedilcit. 1:5^ he l>r'ii^M>s a 
 populo aVuiuanto minus diiigitur, (luani pater ejus 14. 1 anto dithubus 
 est a-ere quam velle {to pmpox,'). 15. Multo pluris inimicos hab.-re 
 vidr-rrs quam amTcos. 10. Pomprjum multo magis admiror quam 
 Cras^um 17. Ilostium naves altero tanto majdn-s sunt (iiiain n..str;e. 
 18 Kh.'nuss.-xies tanto latior est quam Tiheris. 11». Sol multis partibus 
 ampli..r est terra. 20. Multo prrpstat injurias accii)ere (to nnffer) (luam 
 inferre (to i///f^'0. 21. Hostes paucis diebus ante adveniunt (luani ex- 
 pectantur. 22. Suevdrum gens longe maxima et -Lellicosissima est 
 Geimandrum omnium. 23. Alcibiades multo ''forniosissimus estOra'Co. 
 rum omnium. 
 
 1 Mount .Etna is 0,000 feet higher than Vesuvius. 2. The place of 
 the camp is 200 pae.-s -lower than tlu; '■'top of the mountain. 3. I <>."U»pJJ8 
 is ""two vears older than Cicero. 4. The march of the en.miies is 2 0(»0 
 paces shorter than that of the Romans. 5. Each column is five h'ct 
 higher than the statues. 6. The (iermans are one; foot "taller than the 
 Romans 7. This tree is five inches thicker than the otlu^rs. 8. Henry 
 is several years vounger than Charles. 1). How much ''-stricter are the 
 ruuiof- moralitV tha^n those of the civil law! 10. This battle ,s by 
 far more "«blood v than that of "■H^inn:e. 1 1 . Thou se-mnst to be much 
 Bicker than vesterdav. 12. It is by far better to be healthy than ricn. U. 
 It is much more expedient to «^"keep the ca mp, than to attack the e nemy. 
 
 '47A^„tator. *■• Levis. «« Aff.rre. *» Periunnm. »«> Soon mature. »i Sovoro.^ 
 •2 Whv is the (llstril.iitive nn.nerHl use.l here? ^^ A H.nterrf n 1 ..uiat. cmm. ^4 Mature, 
 earh/snon " To lea.l .twav, to with.lraw. »« Warlike, ^t „,„,,„„.,«. ^. Rv the com- 
 paraUve of iuferH>^. IfnmUior is lower than a low place; inf.nor is lower than l .igh 
 
 v6rr^. «M)tti.ia (/;ia/'.) •♦ Alrox. «^ The battle of Caini8e,i>«i^Ma C'u»neft«t« («annitan 
 battle. " Tenere. 
 
 IDIOMS OF THE COMPARATIVE PERIOD. 
 
 225 
 
 
 
 14. It is ouch more difficult to conquer one's passions, than [one's] ene- 
 luies. 15. We have somewhat richer {nher) fields, than yours. K). The 
 arniv of the Spartans is a little larger than that of the Athenians. 17. 
 (Jur' scholars learn not a little quicker than yours. IS. So much more 
 exi.edient is it to be silent, than to speak too much. 19. Lucullus is by 
 one-half richer than Croesus. 20. The president visits {adlre) many 
 more cities than it is necea<ary. 21. (iajus has much more money than 
 thou. 22. Many more hearers {(ludltor) are j^resent than it is conve- 
 nient {convenieiiK). 23. We intend to start (profirisci) three hours earliei 
 than the messengers of Sempronius. 24. We intend to stay {comnyyran) 
 a little longer than Pompdjus. 25. Our fruits are as large again as 
 vours 20 The river Danube is twice as broad as the Garonne. 27. The 
 mcon is fiftv times smaller than the earth. 28. The consuls return 
 several davs later than tliev are expected. 29. Socrates is by far the 
 wisest of all (J reeks. 30. The Flaminian road is much the best and 
 the shortest. 
 
 D. THE COMPARATIVE PERIOD EMPLOYED FOR LIMITATION. 
 
 1 Plus septingenti milites ab hostibus caiuuntur. 2. Galli amplius 
 duas boras certamen «"sustinent. 8. Plus triginta naves «\lesiderantur. 
 
 4 Minus trecenti milites ])ereunt ; paiih) i)lus quam mille vulnerantur. 
 
 5 Cartha«nnienses plus tlucentos equites habent. 0. A minus quingentis 
 niilitibusl)lus(iuatuormillia hostium ca])inntur. 7. Apes plus ''\in urn 
 T'n'c^em nunquam patiuntur. 8. Hostes minus triginta pedibus ''absunt. 
 9 Filia mea plus decern annos nata est. 10. Pueri mindres quatuorde- 
 cim annis legibus "-pacisci prohibentur. 11. Juvenes majdres sedecim 
 annis '•^ogam virllem "^sumere solent. 
 
 1 More than 30 prisoners esca}^. 2. I cannot be obedient to more 
 than one master. 3. Less than 200 soldiers are missed. 4. More than 
 ten States intend to secede. 5. We intend to defeat our adversaries by 
 more than a million of votes. 0. The Romans lose a little more than 
 2 000 soldiers, the Gauls one-half more. 7. The law forbids to eh'ct 
 more than two consuls. 8. Each legion misses more than a hundred 
 soldiers 9. Ten citizens ])av {pcndn-e) more than 5,000 -dollars 
 ai)iece 10 The citv of Pome is lees distant than 30.000 paces. 11. My 
 son ( 'harl. sis more' than five, and Frederick a little less than seven 
 years old. 12. All citizens, vcnmger than forty years, are compelled to 
 •••^serv.' in the armv. 13. Gajus is more than polite. 14. Atticus does 
 {prneslare) more than [his] duty. 15. This secession ol the Plebeians is 
 more than madness. 
 
 E. THE ABSOLUTE DEGREE. 
 
 1 Atticus noster te valde diligit. 2. Te, mi fili, admodum desidero. 
 8. Bruti littera^ mihi vehementer ""displicent. 4. Cicero librum jucun- 
 
 «7 To niaint!tin «« P^^/V^n/r^ to miss. «9 Grammatically the distributive «'«i^* 
 wonl. ber.ouire<l. Bnt -xlngnln. reges^ wonl.l he amhi^Mu.ns. In ^"^ ' 1"^'«"^'*^*^« 
 ";;; lie cardinal must he preferr.-d. ;» The Ko,m.ns eal.ed ^W q'-n of t^^^ be«* r« 
 Ti Ai>e9se. to hf diHtant. '^ PacisH, to mnk>' coiitractK '3 1 lie manh toga. 10 a^ 
 
 tame. '» Centenarius. t« To serve in tlie arin>-, wi/ifart!. " D,<,piiccre. 
 
226 
 
 IDIOMS OF THE COMPARATIVE PERIOD. 
 
 dissimiim tuum, mi Quiiite, nia<rnoporp laudat. 5. Multiun nunc 
 lacrimari vidr-iis. (5. Siiinuin adniodiim aini)lum {itphitditi) vt txiniium 
 tibi mitto. 7. VaUlc bene Brribis, mi Carol.' ! 8. Amicus nostrr (iiian- 
 dam rrrum ]>ublicririim mutationem {chaitf/e) nimis ciipido rx|MH'tare 
 vidrtiir. 1>. Tu et tVatcr tuHS lin<ruam (Jrajcaiu satis bene intelliiritis. 
 10. Bella Punica a Sisi'iina ])arum 'Milncide nariaimir. 11. Cicero 
 omnes K})icuri errores ' "perbrcviter ac ])erek\iranter exiu'iiit {to stat<) 
 VI. Permulli liomim's hum- reipublic;e statum inteliiiien? m'(iueunt. 13 
 (iajus patri siio simillimus est. 14. Senectus natura ^"!()<]iiaci()r est 
 15. Vespasiamis princeps i)ecunia' avidior est. 1<). Pluriina Datami» 
 ^'i^^esta obscurinra sunt. IT. Hie versus una ^-'sylham brevior est. 18 
 Littene tuie bmi^iores sunt. P.). Plerlijue homines tardius eogitant 
 airunt autem celerius. 2U. (iaUin;r avescjue reliqujp nidos yited) (\m\va 
 «>'^niollissime ^^construunt. 21. Jiiixurtha (^uam maximaa potest copias 
 araiHt. 22. Caesar quam maximum militiim numerum arc(ssit. 2;i. 
 Dux exercitus discrlmen, (luam brevissime potest, miiitibus exponit (<f 
 explain.) 
 
 1. I very much Avish to see thee often. 2. We erreatly admire the in 
 credible boldness of this magistrate. 3. I very much r<»gret the enorm- 
 ous carelessness {Koeordia) of this general. 4 These rumors i^Kenw») 
 «Hnjure thv ^^''reputation exceedingly. 5. (iajus is ])rt'vented from Mork- 
 in'-- mucli bv a diseusi- of the kidneys. 6. Sagiintum, a vi'ry rich {opu- 
 lininH) towi\ is taken bv Hannibal. 7. The walls of the town are very 
 liigh, and are defended bv ten very liigh towers. 8. A very (by pn') 
 great danger is imminent to the republic. 9. This incautious (i//m\Y//.v) 
 man can verv {pn-) easilv be kille<l. 10. That very iinr) modest yoiith 
 cannot '^•bi-ar the voice of the c(msul. 11. The ambassadors intend to 
 stay very long (In/ the ^nperhdice). 12. The ambassadors very {auper- 
 laticc) humbly inii)h)re the ^^pardon of Caesar. 13. Thy words do not 
 run ijlucre) ^-'smoothlv enough, but the narrative {fcdnthi) itself is sulli- 
 ciently accurate. 14.*Thon treatest this \^(^\\\X {locux) too lightly, and 
 the causes of the rebellion are not stated clearly eni)Ugh. 15. Too {roiit- 
 paratiir) grrat and too long a pleasure extinguishes all *lights of the 
 soul. 1(). The reasoning {niti^f) of this ])hilosopher seems to be rather 
 wiphistical. 17. The oldt'st {nntlqunn) history of the Saxons is rather 
 ol)scare. 18. The general begins to censure the ambassadors rather 
 severely. P.). It is necessary to capture as few, and to kill as many 
 enemies as possible. 20. Tlie Helvetians resolve to sow as much grain 
 as T)Ossible. and to procure icomparare) the greatest ]K)ssible ■♦"amount 
 of arms. 21. We wish to bring {(tddnnre) to you as many troops as wa 
 can. 22. Cicero sends both letters as soon as ]>()ssible to Cesar. 23. 
 We intend to h'arn the (ireek lanuruage as z.ahmsly as p(.ssible. 24. 
 Cesar visits {ndln) the camp as often as he can. 25. It is nc cessar^ 
 to deliver to me the '-"dispatches of the general as (juickly as possible. 
 
 ^V 
 
 '8 Diliiciduo clfiar. ■"» Brevis. hiief. so LoqiiHX. taJkatirJ'. " Gestum. a dfed. 
 •5 A syllable ^^ Mollis, soft. «< T<. construct »* Offendere. "« Roimiatiuii, tititiUmaUo, 
 •* I'tire. '"'* Gratia, o» Mollis. »" Copib. »' Litu-i-aj. ♦ Luiiu'ii, 
 
 22. 
 
 I 
 
 
 h 
 
 7 
 
 BOOK THIRD. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES AND MOODS.— ABSO- 
 LUTE ADJECTIVES.— FORMATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 CHAriER FIRST. 
 
 THE PRESENT-SYSTEM OF THE REGULAH VERB. 
 § 3 1 6. All forms of the verb are either finite or indefinite ; 
 the verb is accordingly divided into the finite and the indefi- 
 
 KITX VERB. 
 
 Rem ■< The jinite forms of the verb are those which imply one of the 
 three grammatical persons. They are always distinguished by the pkr- 
 PONAI. ENDINOS. The indejinUe verb comprises those verbal forms which 
 do not show the person of the subject. It consists, 1, of \\w Infinitive ^nd 
 Snnine in which the action of the yevh uppcuvs as mbject or object ; 2,ot the 
 J^irt triples and Verbal Adjectives, in which the action of the verb appeal's 
 
 ^^ The finite verb is inflected by conjugation, the indefinite verb by declension. 
 
 S Hit, The FINITE verb comprises three moods; that is, 
 three ditlerent ways in which the speaker conceives the per- 
 formance of the action. They are the Indicative, the Sub- 
 junctive, and tlie Imperative, By the Indicative, the speaker 
 i/*\sYr^6' ; ' by the Imperative, he commands directly; by the 
 Subjunctives, he asserts or commands indirectly. 
 
 §'ai8. The Tenses of the verb are threefold: Present, Past, 
 or Future, according as the time of the action is conceived as 
 present, ])ast, or future. 
 
 § »19. All forms of the Latin verb are derived primarily 
 from the 'verb-stem, which is found by removing the ending re 
 or tre of the infinitive. Some forms of the verbs are directly 
 derived from the verb-stem. These are called Present- System. 
 
228 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Otliers arc indirectly (§33G) derived from it, and are called Per- 
 fect- Sijstem. 
 
 § «ItSO. The Present-System is divided into four coniuii^ations, 
 acconlinjx to the characterUtic of the verb-stem. Each of the 
 conj notations has two voices and three moods. Tlie Indicative 
 mood has three tenses — the present, the imperfect, and the fu- 
 ture *, the Subjunctive has two tenses — the present and the im- 
 perfe<*t. 
 
 The Indeiinite verb of the Present-Svstem has one Infinitive 
 and one Participle (present participle) in the active^ and one In- 
 finitive and one Verbal Adjective in the Passive voice. 
 
 § 3^1. Paradigms of the Present-System. 
 
 FIRST COXJUGATIOX. 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 229 
 
 IT 
 
 AmSrem, I might, should, wcmld love, or / AmSrer, I might, should, would be loved, or / 
 
 lot'ed '^^'^^*' loved 
 
 amilrea fhmi itnghtest love amareri?, or amarere. thou migJitest be loved 
 
 ainarei, /le might love aniaretur. he might be loved 
 
 aman-mut», we might love aniarC'inur, 7ve nnght tje loved 
 
 anuirCtis, you migfit love amaroniini, you might be loved 
 
 amarcut, tliey might love. amarenlur, tliey might be loved. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 First form (active). First form, (passive). 
 
 Sine. 2. Ama. love (thou). Sing. 2. amare. be (thou) lo^:ed. 
 
 Plur. 2. amate, love O'ou). Plur. 2. amammi, be (you) loved. 
 
 Second form (active). Second form (passive). 
 
 Sing. 2. Ainilto. thou shall love Sing. 2. amator, thou shall be loved 
 3. aniilto, he shall love. 3 . amStor, he shall be loved 
 
 2. anvdx rne, you shall love Plur. 2. 
 
 3. amauto, they shall love. 3. amantor, t/cey shall be looed 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Indefinite Verb. 
 
 Infinitive. Amjlre, to love. 
 pAKTicu'LE. aumns, loving. 
 
 Infinitive. amSri, to b*> loved. 
 Vkiibal Adjective, ainandus one that 
 mud be loved. 
 
 SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Amo. IloT€, am loving, do love 
 
 amas. th/ou lovest 
 
 amat, he lores 
 
 ara3muji, we lore 
 
 annltis, you love 
 
 araant, they love. 
 
 amor. I am loved 
 amilris. tha^i art loved 
 amAtur. he is loved 
 aniilmur, we are loved 
 amamiui, ijoii are lored 
 aniaiitur, they are loved. 
 
 i:\rPEKFECT. 
 
 AmJlham, T loved, iras loving, did love 
 
 ainabas, thou lovedst 
 
 aiTiilbaf, hr. loved 
 
 amabamus», ive lored 
 
 ainabiiris. you loved 
 
 amabaut, they loved. 
 
 aniabar. T was loved 
 ainal>rins or ainabare, thou wast loved 
 aiiiabatur, he was loved 
 arnabainur, we were loved 
 aiDabninini, you were loved 
 amabautur, they were loved. 
 
 FUTURE. 
 
 AmJlbo, I shall lore 
 ainilbis. thou wilt love 
 amjTl)it, he will love 
 amabimus, we shall love 
 aniabitis, you ivilllove 
 amabuut, they will love. 
 
 aninbor, /shall be loved 
 aniabcris or ainabere, thou wilt be loved 
 ama])itiir. he will be loved 
 ainaltiiniir, ice shall be bwed 
 ainabiinini, you, will tte loved 
 amabuutur, they will be loved. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE ]\IOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Amem, I may love, love, should love, etc. 
 
 Bmes, them may est love, etc. 
 ttniei. he may love 
 araGmns, we may love 
 aniC'tis. you may lore 
 ameut, they may love. 
 
 amcr, / may be loved, am loved, should be 
 
 loved, etc. 
 amt'ris. thou maye.^t be loved 
 aiiu'tur, he may be lo^'ed 
 anK'niur. ut may be lored 
 anu-niini, you may be bwed 
 auieutur, they may be loved. 
 
 In 
 
 dicative Mood. 
 
 * 
 
 n. 
 
 in. 
 
 rv 
 
 Present— 7 advise 
 
 I read 
 
 I hear. 
 
 Moneo 
 
 lego 
 
 audio 
 
 niones 
 
 It'gia 
 
 audis 
 
 nioiu't 
 
 legit 
 
 audit 
 
 moiiemua 
 
 legimus 
 
 audlmug 
 
 luonetis 
 
 legit id 
 
 audit is 
 
 nionent 
 
 leguut 
 
 audiunt. 
 
 ImrEKFECT — I advised 
 
 I read, was reading 
 
 I heard. 
 
 nioiu'l)am 
 
 legebam 
 
 audiebam 
 
 nionrbas 
 
 lege has 
 
 audiebas 
 
 nionr-bat 
 
 legebat 
 
 audiebat 
 
 nionebamus 
 
 legebamus 
 
 audiebamns 
 
 inoncbiltis 
 
 legebat ii* 
 
 audiebiltis 
 
 nionebant 
 
 lege bant 
 
 audiebant. 
 
 Future — I shall advise 
 
 I shall read 
 
 I shall hear 
 
 nionebo 
 
 legam 
 
 audiam 
 
 munC'bis 
 
 leges 
 
 audies 
 
 nionC'bit 
 
 leget 
 
 audiet 
 
 luonobimiia 
 
 legem us 
 
 audieinas 
 
 nionebitis 
 
 leget is 
 
 audietid 
 
 monebuiit 
 
 legent 
 
 audient. 
 
 Su 
 
 BjuNCTivE Mood. 
 
 
 Present — I may advise 
 
 I may read 
 
 I may hear. 
 
 moiK-ani 
 
 legam 
 
 audiam 
 
 nioncas 
 
 legas 
 
 audias 
 
 nioiK'at 
 
 legat 
 
 audiat 
 
 monefunus 
 
 legflmua 
 
 audiilmas 
 
 nioiieatis 
 
 legatis 
 
 »udiati3 
 
 moueuut 
 
 levant 
 
 audiaut. 
 
KS 
 
 280 
 
 SECOND, THir.D, AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 lMVEnTv:cT— r ni ir/^i f advise 
 monCrt'iu 
 monC'res 
 mono ret 
 nioin'ivmus 
 luoiieiT'tis 
 luouereut 
 
 1 7Vff/ht read 
 
 le;:treiu 
 
 loi^crcs 
 
 IcirtTft 
 
 lei,'err'inu8 
 
 l('Lr«'rt"tis 
 
 It'^'crc'Ut 
 
 Tiniffht hear. 
 
 aiidTiem 
 
 audires 
 
 audTret 
 
 audirr-imiG 
 
 audirC't\ri 
 
 audlrciit. 
 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 
 
 Fir»t form. 
 
 
 n. 
 
 
 III. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Moiie 
 
 
 leixe 
 
 audi 
 
 muuCie 
 
 
 legite 
 Second form. 
 
 audltc 
 
 Sing. 2. MonCto 
 
 
 IcijUo 
 
 audlto 
 
 3 mouCto 
 
 
 leiTito 
 
 audlto 
 
 Plur. 2. mouetote 
 
 
 leifitdte 
 
 auditote 
 
 3. moueuto 
 
 
 ICiJUUtO 
 
 audiimto 
 
 
 In 
 
 DEFINITE Verb. 
 
 
 TsriXTTivE. Monc're 
 
 
 lefTore 
 
 audTre 
 
 I'AiiTicirLE. mouuna 
 
 
 legcua 
 
 audiuns. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 ♦V 
 
 PiiESENT— 7 am advised 
 
 
 
 I am read 
 
 I am heard: 
 
 monoor 
 
 
 
 le<::f)r 
 
 audior 
 
 rnoiiuris 
 
 
 
 It'jjrCris or legere 
 
 audlrift 
 
 nioiu'tur 
 
 
 
 Icjritnr 
 
 audit ur 
 
 niouCniiir 
 
 
 
 le;riimir 
 
 audTmur 
 
 monenuui 
 
 
 
 let;iniini 
 
 audiiiiini 
 
 moiieutur 
 
 
 
 lei^uiitur 
 
 audiuutur. 
 
 iMrERFECT— /?ra.9 advL 
 
 "ed 
 
 
 I nas read 
 
 I watt heard. 
 
 nioiiebar 
 
 
 
 leL,a'bar 
 
 andicbar 
 
 inoncbnri? or raonebilre 
 
 l(';:obaris or legebare 
 
 aiidit'baris or audicbdre 
 
 moiiebntur 
 
 
 
 Ic'^rt'batiir 
 
 atidii'baiiir 
 
 niouebriimir 
 
 
 
 It'i^a-baiiuir 
 
 audicbruiuir 
 
 monobamiiii 
 
 * 
 
 
 loircbainiiii 
 
 audicbamiui 
 
 monobuiitur 
 
 
 
 k'gebantur 
 
 audiebaijtur. 
 
 FuTUUE— /.s7/rt// f>e advi 
 
 •^ed 
 
 
 J shall be read 
 
 I shall he heard. 
 
 inoi'C'bor 
 
 
 
 k'>,mr 
 
 audiar 
 
 nnnu'beris o? 
 
 monebure 
 
 Icirr'ri!* or legere 
 
 audirris or audit're 
 
 moiu'bitiir 
 
 
 
 Ic^'Otur 
 
 audir-tur 
 
 nioiiebiiniir 
 
 
 
 Ici^'C'inur 
 
 audir-nmr 
 
 n^oiiebiiiiiiil 
 
 
 
 U';,a'inini 
 
 audicmiui 
 
 niouebuniur 
 
 
 
 ifgc'utur 
 
 audiuuiur. 
 
 
 
 Subjunctive IMood. 
 
 
 Pkesext— r w ay he adr 
 
 ised 
 
 
 I way he read 
 
 I way he heard. 
 
 nionear 
 
 
 
 Icirar 
 
 audiar 
 
 nioiiefiris! or 
 
 moneSre 
 
 k"L,'!lri!* or legare 
 
 audiaris or audiiii'C 
 
 nionefitur 
 
 
 
 K'lriltur 
 
 audiatur 
 
 uioiieainur 
 
 
 
 leurninnr 
 
 audi fun ur 
 
 iiKHieaiiHiii 
 
 
 
 K'L'ainiiii 
 
 audianiini 
 
 moueuutiir 
 
 
 
 le'^autur 
 
 audiuutur 
 
 €ylS 
 
 SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 231 
 
 Imperfect — I wight he advised 
 monCrer 
 
 nionorr-ris or monerCre 
 rnonerPtur 
 moneremur 
 ruoneremini 
 mouereutur 
 
 I might be read 
 
 Icirercr 
 
 It'frerGris or legerere 
 
 Iciieretur 
 
 le^icronnir 
 
 lejreromini 
 
 k'gereutur 
 
 I might be heard. 
 
 audTrer 
 
 audirCris or audiri^rs 
 
 audiretur 
 
 audiremnr 
 
 audiromiui 
 
 audirentur. 
 
 MouPre 
 mouemlni 
 
 Sing. 9. monCtor 
 3. monGtor 
 
 Hur. 2. 
 
 3. moneutor 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 First form. 
 
 leirere 
 legiminl 
 
 Second form. 
 
 legTtor 
 legitor 
 
 leguntor 
 
 Indefinite Verb. 
 
 andlre 
 audiiniui. 
 
 BTidTtor 
 auditor. 
 
 audiuntor. 
 
 Tnfixittve. 
 
 monCri 
 
 lepri 
 legendus 
 
 audlri 
 audieudiis. 
 
 Veubal Adjectives, moneudus 
 
 § JJ^l^^. The different forms of the finite verb are thus de- 
 rived from the verb-stem : 
 
 1. Present Indicative, by suhstltuting o for the characteristic 
 of the verb-stem in the first, and adding o to the stem in the 
 other conjugations. 
 
 2. Imperfect Indicative, by adding ham to the stem in the 
 first and second, and tham in the third and fourth conjugations. 
 The Imperfect Indicative is conjugated like the Present Indica- 
 tive of the first conjugation. 
 
 3. Future, by adding ho to the stem in the first and second, 
 and am in tlie third and fourth conjugations. The future in ho 
 is conjugated like the Present Indicative of the third, and the 
 future \\\am like the Present Indicative of the second conjugation. 
 
 4. Present Subjunctive, by substituting em for the charac- 
 teristic of the verb-stem in the first, and by adding am to the 
 latter in the other conjugations. The Present Subjunctive of the 
 first conjugation is conjugated like the Present Indicative of the 
 second; and that of the other conjugations like the Present In- 
 dicative of the first conjugation. 
 
 5. Imperfect Subjunctive is formed in all conjugations by 
 a<lding m to the Present Infinitive, and conjugated like the 
 Present Indicative of the second conjugation. 
 
232 SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH CONJCGATIONS. 
 
 6. The First form of the Imperative (second person sing.) 
 is the same as the verb-stem, except that in the third conjuga- 
 tion e is added to it. But the verbs esse, dicere, ducere, facere, 
 ferre form their imperatives by the mere stems {es^ die, due, 
 fac,fer). The plural is formed by changing the ending tis of 
 the second person Present Indicative into te. 
 
 7. The Second form of the Imperative is made by adding 
 to the third person sinirnlar Present Indicative. The third 
 person singular always is like the second. The second person 
 plural adds te to the singular, and the tliird person ])lural is 
 formed bv adding o to the third person plural Present Indicative. 
 
 8 The Passive Voice of the finite verb is formed by adding 
 r to the corresponding active form, or substituting r for the 
 final letter m of the active. But the first form of the Impera- 
 tive is always the same as that of the Infinitive active. 
 
 9. The conjugation of the passive tenses is made by substi- 
 tuting the passive endings, rls, tur, etc., or eris, itur, etc. (§ r2o), 
 for the corresponding endings of the active. 
 
 § 323 lu the Indefinite verb, the Partk iple is formed 
 b/addincr to the verb-stem ns (or ens,\u the third and fourth 
 conjugations), and the Verbal Adjective by adding ..(7/^6' (or 
 endiisni the third and fourth conjugations). 
 
 ^ 324 The Participle and Verbal Adjective (and in a 
 certain sense also the Infinitive) are declined like Adjectives. 
 The Participles are declined like Adjectives of common gender, 
 belon-inc to the liquid-mute stems (Paradigm sapiens, ^ 208) ; 
 the Verbal Adjective like Movable Adjectives (Paradigm bonus, 
 
 7?^m o The dcclensicm-stem of the Presont Participle is always tlie 
 snme^s The tl ii'l er on plural of tlio Pivs.nt In<licatlve [.tmnnt-,n.ncn) 
 which, however tlie third and fourth conjugations is changed Irom aut 
 
 ^Pant^'^^^f^^ ^rannnatieally treated like a^jccHrc; they arc 
 ^ith M ATTiUBUTFS or P F^^^ Hkc the latter, and may be the goveni- 
 
 f1?^^ o^yot- OB^FCT^ wl eh generallv are placed in the same case as mose 
 Sn^l^ke ?^or MnUiv.^ Sonur of then., as ....... Jloren.^ appeien.. 
 
 ardeuH, are even subject to Comparison. 
 
 § 3^55. The deponent verb has the same forms as the pas- 
 
 REMARKS ON THE USE OF TENSES AND MOODS. 
 
 233 
 
 sive, but with active significations. It has, besides the regular 
 passive ibrms, also the Particijjle of the Active {hortans, ex- 
 horting), and in the Verbal Adjective assumes the signification 
 of the passive (hortandus, one that must be exhorted). 
 
 § 3t26. The I-verbs of the third conjugation (§ 58) insert the 
 vowel i in all forms of the finite and indefinite verb, except in 
 the Infinitive, Imperfect Subjunctive, and Imperative. But 
 the second form of the Imperative takes ^ in the 3. plur. 
 
 Preliminary Remarks on the Use of the Tenses and Moods, 
 especially in Dependent Clauses. 
 
 V^ The foUowinir prcliminarv remarks are intended to guide the ^^J"dOTt in the 
 traS^ion of the tenses and mood., and to -ive him a preUminary driU in the handling of 
 dependent sent«'uces. Fur more exact ruleii see below. 
 
 S 51^7. A DEPENDENT SENTENCE or CLAUSE is a sentenc9 
 which has the force of one single word or phrase in regard to 
 another (the principal) sentence. A clause may take the place 
 of a Subject, Attribute, or Object of the principal sentence, and 
 always is recognized by either a Relative (adjective or adverb), 
 or a subordinating conjunction (§ 328), introducing it. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 1 Tf can never he pecessary fhnt I shovM teU a fahehood. Nnmquam necepse esse 
 
 potU ufm'fdaeium dicam^IIere the -'utence -/^ ^Lr^f^oTmf%l<ScS^ 
 4,.>.v-/^ii>AT «K-vTVKrv in which the folloumjr sentence, ^^ mat 1 ^nouia reu a jaif-tinHju 
 f^kestTu plac^otaW^^^^^^^ expressed thus: -My telling a faMKMTd 
 
 catrmrlrl^n^^^^ principal sentence*^ has consequently assumed an tmper- 
 
 eo a lorm% 74c r ^Mie dep..ndent ientenee is recoj^nized as such hy the subordinating 
 co,Oui*ction^/Ar'?. x4 introduces it. In Latin we employ here the subjunctive present, 
 
 '^'t^'Sfhl^a^^'ikSlGajns should change his opinion. Frater mens suadSbat, ut 
 
 Gains oniniunem mutjlret. , . , ^^ ^ ,^.„^-j.^t 
 
 PiuNcip\L Sentenctc : Mv brother advised. Frater me^JS madepat. , ^^^xr^r.^ 
 
 Depknuent Sfn^^ That Gajus should chan-e his opinion, ut Gc^us optntdnem 
 
 n^t^??^l^ The'^latU r ocTupie the place of an ob.tect fn the former sentence as i jt had 
 
 K thus expressed: Jljbrotli^r advises a change of opinion by Gajus. In Latm, the 
 
 "^T'l^^ji::^:::^^^ ^omus iHaparva vid.tur, quia 
 
 lonirtssime abest. 
 
 i;^;:;^;;^^' In'^^^e ^^^^nttrZ^l^distant. it talce. the place of an ^ject 
 <n th^ form«T lemence aVif w^^^^ said: Tfns hmse is small from its distance, ^&^mg 
 intn'dS bv Ihe sSord^natlig conjunctio because mia), it is at once reco^auzed as a 
 
 ^'^ir''r/;f rS'S Talk"tZ%iuch are called loquacious. Homines, qui nimis loquuntur, 
 
 ^^'pniNxt'pAL s'i:NTENCE : The men are called loquacious. Homines f n-uli dicuntur 
 
 TU-phM.KNT Sentence- ^yho talk too much, i\m nimis loquuntur. It takes \\n. place 
 of ,u, «^VwwJ in ^helbrmer sentence, as if we had said: The men. talking too much, 
 Beri;L'^nt7otuced by the fdativJ^ wlvo (qui), it is at once recognized as a clause. 
 
234 EEMARKS ON THE USE OF TENSES AND MOODS. 
 
 § 3'38. Wo notice at this place the followins suborcVinating 
 
 conjunctions: 
 
 11. that, in order that.» 
 <7?/7///M'"^'//0' when. ^inco. 
 vriu^qvarn, or anieqmm, if/ore. 
 dvin (j'onietimes cum), while, liH 
 potftquani, utter 
 
 OT/frt, becaufe. 
 
 ^Morf, that, or because 
 
 «. if. 
 
 nj,s't, unle??. , , „. », 
 
 quamquam, or €^«i, aUhousn. 
 
 8 129 f( in the signification " that," or " in order that, and 
 Jn in tl, e signification " since," aUays govern the su)OnncU,e, 
 a 'i Tl,e ;redicate of tl>e clause, introdnced by these con- 
 ; ctions, mult always be placed in the subjunct.ve, whatever 
 i", le nood eniplo cd in English. The Engl.sh co.^.ncUou 
 XLr frequently is translated by quod (see § 393) AV e here 
 regard onlj the ;ase, when ,«o.7 stands after verbs of ruAisiNO, 
 CENsnuNc;, and accusing {Umdare, cxtoUere, vituim-are, repre- 
 i'n,/ r « c..„7,r). Ai'ter these verbs we generally translate 
 "5/--ith; verbal .onn in ».,- Buttlu.Latn, ..guago 
 ahvavs conceives quod in the sense ot the conjunction tU<d. 
 
 you will be praised. v 
 
 8 330. Quwn (cum), when, and priusquam {antequam) 
 take either Subjunctive or Indicative, according to the s,,ec.a 
 rules in P. II.' Dum, in the meaning xchile, tak.-s the / rescut 
 Indicative ey.n if it refers to past time; wlien it means .« it 
 takes the Subjunctive, (^«w, 5«am/i«am,e<« are used with the 
 Indicative. When sentences, introduced by quamquam ^nd cts>, 
 precede the principal sentence, the latter is often introduced by 
 the adversative conjunction tamen (§ 121), which is translated 
 by still, yet, or nevertheless. 
 
 '^y::zL ris^'i- ^^. r: i ^^u -ve^hoie».. p,.,,.,,, ,... 
 
 Rem i The Endisli h.nsnnun. IVquently employs an o^'^"^"''^ 
 ^vht■™n Latin a clause, introduced by «(. nuist be used. Ibo bes.mua 
 
 . Th.. En..,sh conjunction «*«< ha. ".any I-a. jn ^n'n-lent, TJ- «'^^f ^""' '" ""^ 
 directed. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE USE OF TENSES AND MOODS. 
 
 235 
 
 will notice that only those verbs which are enumerated, § 80, can be 
 construed with an ohject-infnitice in Latin. After other verbs the Eiigli.^h 
 objecl-intinitive must generally be changed into a clause introduced by 
 " that," as : 
 
 We pray you to cmtu to-morrrnc, OrHnniP vos, tit eras veniJltis (literally, we pray you, 
 that you may come to-morrow).— /iz/^/'/re^/ Idni to depart, Adducebam cum, ut ablret (lit- 
 erally, 1 iudiiced him, that he should depart). 
 
 In the same way, 'priusquam, with a finite verb, must often be translated 
 by before, with a verljal noun in ing^ as: Before departing, priusquam discG- 
 das (discCdat, etc.) 
 
 § m\ 1 . It is a Latin rule, that whenever the predicate of a 
 daiise must be placed in the suV)janctive, the tense of this sub- 
 junctive is determined by the predicate of the principal sentence. 
 Tliis is called tlie dependexce or coxsecution of tenses. For 
 the tenses of the Present-System this rule is the following : 
 
 If the jyrincipal jyredicate is a present^ imperative^ or future, 
 the predicate^ if a subjunctive, must be in the pjresent tense of the 
 subjunctive. If the principal predicate is a past tense, tJie de- 
 l>endent predicate, if a subjunctive, m^ust be placed in the imper- 
 fect subjunctive. 
 
 In both instances it is entirely indifferent, what mood or tense 
 may be used in the English sentence. 
 
 Examples: It ic vvjia^f, that I shonld implore pardon-. Inju^tum est, ut vcniam implO- 
 rem. —JJe/i/^rufe quickly, that 1 may ttU my opinion. Ceieriter delihera. ut sententiam ineam 
 dicam.— H/^f^/i dt^tar app7'(Hiched. the enemies repulsed our troops. Cum Ciesar appropin- 
 quiiret, hostes copias nostras repellebant.— TFe shall abandon the to>on, since the citizem 
 tlumselves bttray us, Oppidura relinquCmus, cum ipsi elves uos prodaut. 
 
 Hem. 5. From what we have said ^ 327, it follows, that dependent 
 clauses, when they take the place of attributes or objects, always must 
 have a governing \rord. The beginner ought frequently to analyze de- 
 pendent sentences, with a view to fiud their governing words. 
 
 Bern. 0. If participles or infinitives are the governing words of clauses, 
 w^e must consider them as the objects of these words, according to the 'analo- 
 gy of the objects ot adjectives. In tiiis instance the rules of consecution must 
 be so applied, that the tenses of the dependent predicates are not deter- 
 mined by the tenses of the participle or the infinitive, but by that of the 
 principal predicate, as: 
 
 Jjtqafi r^nietjtnit petentes. vt obndes a dvsare remitterentur. The ambassadors came, 
 askini; that the hostaires should be sent back by Ciesar. Here the tense of the predicate 
 reniltteitiitur is not dftorinintHl by tlie (present) tense of the participle ^>e7^/i^e6\ but by the 
 teuse of the principal predicate vtniZhant. 
 
 % 33^. The subjunctive mood may also be used in principal 
 sentences. Thus it is often used with the force of an imperative, 
 as: Ita vivdtis, ut mortem semper expectetis, Live so, that you 
 always expect death. 
 
I 
 
 236 REMARKS ON THE USE OF TENSES AND MOODS. 
 
 S 333 The progressive and empluitic forms of the English 
 siiuple tenses do not exist in Latin, hut are translated in the 
 same wav as the eonimon form; tluis amo may mean / love, or 
 lam loving, or I do love ; amabam may mean I loved, or I xoas 
 loving, or I did love, as: 
 
 lo omda^msf-To^^■\^ti^ did C;v^tix aspire, (pdd armr appeKhat f-The 
 llul /!i,?rr.ntan^-TUe wall, were faUing, viun cad.bant. 
 
 ^^^lat do yon d 
 eueuiiea arc comiUj, 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Veni, mi fill, ut tihi h^c verba enarrem.-^. ^f ^jjf ^^J^^jjjl' 
 
 irPompi^T.^ prUsL nn disc,.>U.,ri;' Crass,,,» H in>"i>». """ff , f""^ 
 
 n , r,V,,is w'c (</i«i'«0 i.ra-liis at. I,.)stil)„s lacfsseba„U,r.-l... Milia^ 
 q,,o,,a,a,i,s uic|»/« ) 1 St.,i,,.i(ini„s, cm Wane ptrnam siiW- 
 
 ret avulso.lcnJout ur-l . ^"^ '"'1 '^^ ' i'," t,i ^,/ „,) dlkiotur, ul civibus 
 c„losu„i „CM- li-uslia ''^''^---IV., •ur.rtt,,r'--10 N,,,>tii inoi te ccrto 
 
 ^'i:?. " n^u^miconnn S,.;., spes .,.a.„..po,-c; (?, «^);lebi.Uab,u.,-^- 
 
 ^'''ni"\;,on iis<.if admonisbcs us ,o (that wc ^i'""i->\,;';;'?;;;''-^3 !;;;™;lt,;:: 
 
 2. Attics lolusfa b.„,o,s, althousU ,b.y wore open *' " .•-■^- V, ,„V"^ 
 11 .. ti...t I'on irv" the tortune ot war. — 4. it A\ni ik txinuKnu 
 
 n ;; Uilt ti^il es ''^iiice it is allowea to thee, to pertor,,, (-,^«v) .M-.-ater 
 S'»"-^ It "All b; becoming to perlbrnt (.cn.jer.) lUy business Kr^r.), 
 
 *3 
 
 I 
 
 REMARKS ON THE USE OF TENSES AND MOODS. 
 
 . 
 
 gr(>at('sl care, — 8. I shall never allow, that the captives be returned [red- 
 den) to the enemies. — 0. We eat in order that we ma}^ live. — 10. Learn the 
 Latin huif^uage, that you may know both how to think and to write. — 
 — IL It will be preferable to return, since you are afraid to proceed [any] 
 farther (j^ 291, lieiu. 10).— 12. Gajus will give {dare) to me this dog, because 
 he has more dogs than he wishes {pelle). — 13. Since thou wishest {cupere) 
 to write letters, I allow thee to remain hohie (domi). — 14. Before attempt- 
 ing {rofidri) to cross the river, thou wilt wait till (durn with subjunctive) 
 some better kind of boats {li/iter) be on hand."^" — 15. Thou shalt always be- 
 liave'''* so {i't(t\ that thou art oftener praised than censured. — 16. Since 
 Helvetia is every where {iindlque) closed'''^ by mountains, the chiefs'-'* of that 
 slate are anxious"''* to occui)y better and broader lands {ager). — 17. The 
 general commands {pra>j<cribere) that the inhabitants should make as large 
 (//<(/// /r?/.v) sowings'" as possible. — 18. Hannibal's bravery and mi\\iiiY\{J)ellicus) 
 art terrifieil the peoj)le. — 19. The dead bodies^*^ of the Egyptians {jEgyptius) 
 were embalmed,"^'' in order that they might be preserved as long as possible. 
 — 20. Alexander consulted"^** the oracle of Jupiter Annuo, in order to prove 
 his divine origin. — 21. The Roman people showed'^" the highest favors^" to 
 the Athenians, in order to attach {iihxiriiKjere) this most renowned {claruH) 
 people (.v^/?.'<) to them (^ 238).— 22. M. T. Cicero was absolved by the sen- 
 tence of the whole people. — 23. The enemies already seemed to approach^^ 
 nearer (J^ 291).— 24. it seemed unjust to the Senate, that our i)ioperty^'' 
 should be plundered {diripere) by the most wicked^^ proconsuls. — 25. De- 
 cius loved his country so much, that he voluntarily^* devoted {devovere) 
 himself to death. — 26. The rising {orlri) and sQnmg^occMere) sun makes 
 days and nights. — 27. Dionysius, fearing the razors," burned (^/(/^/'d/'t^ [his] 
 hair {cupilhuii) by a glowing^" coal.— 28. The general, distrusting" himself 
 (transl. to himmlf) and doubting, d\(\{agere) uotJiing. — 29. This v^ictory was 
 annoimced to the kiug, already despairing. — 30. The soldiers, renewing^^ 
 the battles, put the enemies to flight {fagdre). — 31. Death cannot be ter- 
 rible (tevribiliK) to men fearing {cercri) God. — 32. The soldiers, following 
 the general, caused {edere) a great slaughter.^" 
 
 *» To commanff, prje^cribere.— ^» To be on hand, suppetere.— 'i To behave, se habSrc— 
 '2 To close, confiuCre.— 23 C'A?^-/. priuceps.— 2* To be uNjio'/.o. stndvre.—'^^ Sowing, iscmen- 
 tis.— 2« .4 deadUnlij. ciulaver.— ^^ To endjulm. condire.—'^'' To consult, consulere.— 2» frans' 
 late: aftVcted {Utfiwre) the Athenians by the highest favors.— 3° Benelicium.— 3» Accedere. 
 __32 Proiiertij, bona. G. bonorura.— ^s Xoquam.— 3* Vdinitarily. iiltro.— ^^ A razor,, cultet 
 touisorins.— 3« To glow., caudere.— 3^ To dUtrmt., dltildere.— 3» To remiL\ redintegrare.— 
 ■• Slaughter, caedcti. 
 
238 
 
 IKIiEGULAR VERBS. 
 
 CILVrTEll SECOND. 
 
 Tinip:(UiLAR Yp:ur>s. 
 
 § 5l,>i. The Irreguhir Verbs are the ibllowing 8 : esse, posse, 
 velle, ?iolle, rnalle.ferre (§ 59), 7re, including its compounds quire 
 and neqiure (§ 54), Vi\\i\ fieri (g 128). They belong to the third 
 conjugation, except Ire, which follows the Iburth. To these the 
 defectives inqunm and ajo must be added. 
 
 The irregularity of these verbs is confined to the Puesext- 
 
 Syste^f, the perfect-system being regularly conjugated in all 
 
 verbs. 
 
 Rem. 1. The iiTesrnlarity of €S!<e and posae consists in the anriont fonng 
 glm, crmn, era, antrin the j^rt's. ind. Vdk, malle, noll<\ are iin-i;ular in thu 
 pivs. incUcativc and in the lirst person of the pns. subjunetivc {rdiin, etc., 
 fossiiu). The irregularity ot'ferre is confined to the present indicative and 
 imperative. Ire is irregular on account of its two stems in t' and /, and in 
 forming the imperfect and future according to the analogy of the hrst and 
 second^'onjugations in bant and bo. The irregularity of ./'Vnconsist.s in 
 its active fo'riu in the present-system and in the irregular stem. /f, which, al- 
 thougli ending in a vowel, is conjugated according to the third conjugation. 
 
 § 335. Paradigms of the Presext-System of the Irre- 
 gular Verbs. 
 
 1. Esse, to be. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sum, lam 
 es, thou art 
 est. /le ift 
 t■umu^<, ire are 
 estis, yon are 
 Bunt, (he>/ are. 
 
 Cram, 7 loas 
 
 em-', f/ioi/, ipost 
 f'ral, he. ivoh 
 graimit?, we irers 
 (Bnltis, y(m were 
 grant, they were. 
 
 fro. Txha/l be 
 f rid, tho't wilt be 
 frit, he wiil l>e 
 f riniut», we nhall be 
 frit is, ijoit will he ; 
 Cruut, (hey will be. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Presext. 
 
 Sim, I may be, should be, lam., etc, 
 
 eis, thwt tiuiyent be, etc. 
 
 eit. he may Ite 
 
 sTnuis. we may 1)6 
 
 pltis, yon may be 
 
 siut, they may be. 
 
 iMrERFECT. 
 
 espem. / might, should be. I wae^ etc 
 
 esse!*, thou iniqhtest be, etc. 
 
 esset, he might l>e 
 
 ePsC-nuis, we might be 
 
 essetis, you might be 
 
 esseut, they might be. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 239 
 
 First form. 
 
 Sing. 2. Es,*ft«(thou) 
 
 3. 
 
 riur. '2. este, be (you) 
 
 3. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 Second form. 
 
 2. esto, be, thoti shall bt 
 
 3, esto. he shall be. 
 '2. estute, you shall be 
 3. siuito, they shall be. 
 
 INDEFINITE VERB. 
 
 Present TxnEriNiTE. Esse, to be. ... 
 Vi'TruE Infinitive. Fore, to be about to be. 
 pIrtSfLe i^d Veubal Adjective in du8. Waniing. 
 l^^ For the parts oUsse formed from the perfect-stem/w gee p. 247. 
 
 2. Possum, lean. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Popsnm, lean. I may 
 potes, thou canst or mayest 
 potest, he can or may 
 possunms. we can or may 
 potest is. you can or may 
 po:^suut, they can or may. 
 
 Poteram. / co^ild. was able 
 poteras, thou couldst 
 ])oterat. he could 
 puterrnims, we could 
 poterilti»». yon conhl 
 poterant, they could. 
 
 Possim, I may be able, Tmay 
 
 possis. thou mayext be alie, thou mayett ] 
 
 possit. he may be able. etc. 
 
 posslinus. we may be able, etc. 
 
 possltis, you, may tje able, etc. 
 
 possiut, t/iey may be able, etc. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Possem. Icmild. might, might be al)k. 
 
 posses, thou couldst., etc. 
 
 posset, ]te could, etc. 
 
 posseinus, we could, etc. 
 
 posset is, you could, etc. 
 
 posseut, iltey could, etc. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Potf ro T shall be able, it will be. post^ible to. etc. 
 poteris. thou wilt be able, it wiU be imsible to, etc. 
 poterit. he will be aide. etc. 
 poterimus. we shall be able. etc. 
 poteritis, you will be able, etc. 
 poleruJit, tiuy will be able, etc. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 INDEFINITE VERB. 
 
 Waniing, 
 
 I?tfintttve. 
 Participle. 
 
 YSKBAL AJ>J 
 
 Posse, to be able. 
 Potens, powerful. 
 . Wanting. 
 
 3. Velle, to he waiing. 4. Nolle, to be unwilling. 5. Malle, to wish rather 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Yolo 
 
 vis 
 
 vult 
 
 volnmus 
 
 vnltis 
 
 voluut 
 
 nolo 
 non vis 
 non vult 
 nolniniis 
 non vultis 
 noluut 
 
 main 
 
 mavis 
 
 mavult 
 
 malnmus 
 
 niavultis 
 
 malunt 
 
 velira 
 
 velis 
 
 velit 
 
 velTmns 
 
 vein is 
 
 velint 
 
 nolim 
 
 nolis 
 
 nolit 
 
 nolTinns 
 
 nolTtis 
 
 nolint 
 
 malim 
 
 nialis 
 
 malit 
 
 niallmus 
 
 inalltis 
 
 nialint. 
 
 Batititled. , 
 
210 
 
 IRREGULAR \T^RBS. 
 
 voinbani 
 
 nolrbam 
 
 maU'bam 
 
 VDlC'bas 
 
 uoir-bas 
 
 nialr-baii 
 
 volr-bat 
 
 nolt'bat 
 
 malebat 
 
 v()l(?b;lmn3 
 
 nolcbilmi:» 
 
 iiiak'bninna 
 
 volt'bAtiH 
 
 iiolobjltis 
 
 inaU'biltis 
 
 volebiiut 
 
 uolcbaut 
 
 malC'bant 
 
 Tolam 
 
 nolam 
 
 J: 
 
 malani 
 
 voles 
 
 noles 
 
 inalos 
 
 voh't 
 
 noh't 
 
 Tjialrt 
 
 volGmns 
 
 iu)lC'inu3 
 
 inaU'mna 
 
 volC'tis 
 
 nolGtii? 
 
 maU'tis 
 
 volent 
 
 noleut 
 
 mak'iit. 
 
 TMrp:uFECT. 
 
 vcllom 
 
 V files 
 
 TPllet 
 
 vcllemus 
 
 TcUetis 
 
 velleut 
 
 Future. 
 
 nollom 
 
 nolles 
 
 nollet 
 
 noHT'inns 
 
 nolir-tis 
 
 nolleut 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 innllcra 
 
 niailei* 
 
 mallet 
 
 nialirmiis 
 
 iiialir-tiH 
 
 inaUout. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Noli, do not (thou) 
 Nollte, do not (you). 
 
 INDEFINITE VERB. 
 b<FiNiTivE. Velle, nolle, muUe. Pakticiple. Volen^ nolens. 
 
 6. Fcrrc, to mrry, to hear. 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Fero. fers, fert,. 
 Plur. ferimuss, feriis, fenint. 
 
 Sinfj. Fcror. forris. fcrtnr. 
 Plur. ferimur, lerimiai, feruntur. 
 
 iMrERFECT. 
 
 Sinq. Ferebam, ferPba":». feri^hat 
 Pliir. ferebilmus, lerebiltia, ferebant. 
 
 Sinn Forrhar. forebHris. forebiltur. 
 IHtlr. ferebauiur, lerebamiui, lerebautar. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Sing. Fenim. feros. feret 
 J'kir. ferC'uius, lerClis, ferent. 
 
 Sing. Forar. forrris. feret nr. 
 riur. feremur, leremini, ferentur. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Fcram. feras. ferat. 
 IKur. feraiuus, leratii?, ferant. 
 
 Sing. Ferrcra, ferres, ferret. 
 Plur. ferreLnus, ferretis, ferrcnt. 
 
 I. Fer. ferte. 
 II. ferto, lerto, fertOte, ferunto. 
 
 Sing. Ferar. ferSrij». feratur. 
 Plur. leramur, reramiui, feraatur. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Sing. Ferrer, ferreris. ferretnr. 
 Pliir. lerreiuur, lerreniiui, ierrentoi. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 I. Ferre, ferimTni. 
 II. fertor, ferlor, fenintor. 
 
 INDEFINITE VERB. 
 Infinitive. Ferre. Participle. Ferens. Infinitive. Ferri. Verbal Anj. Ferendas. 
 
 IRREGULAR TERES. 
 
 241 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Eo, iB, it, Tmus, Itig, Cunt. 
 
 Tham. Tbas. That 
 ibamiit*, ibStis, Ibant. 
 
 Ibo, Ibis. Tbit 
 ibimus, ibitis, Ibunt. 
 
 7. Ire, to go. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. 
 
 6am, gas, 6at, 6amus, Satis, Cant. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Irem, ires, Tret 
 irCmus, irCtlB, Trent 
 
 Future. 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 I^IPERATIVE. 
 
 I. I, Tte, 
 II. Ito, Tto, itote, eunto. 
 
 INDEFINITE VERB 
 
 Infixitive. Ire. Participle. lens. Gen. Suntis, etc. Verbal Adj. Sundas. 
 
 8. Queo, lean. 9. Nequeo, I eamiot. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 sing. Queo, qnis. quit. 
 Plur. quiuuib, quilis, queant. 
 
 Sing. Quibam, , quibat. 
 
 IHur. , , quibant. 
 
 Sing. Quibo, 
 Plur. , 
 
 Sing. Nequeo, nequis, nequit. 
 Plur. nequlmuts, iiequltis, uequeunt. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Sing. nequTl)am, — 
 
 Plnr. , , nequlbant. 
 
 -, nequTbat. 
 
 -, qu ibunt. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Sing. - 
 Plur. - 
 
 -, neqnlbunt. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Queam, queas. queat. 
 Plur. queainus, queaLib, queant. 
 
 , quiret. 
 
 Sing. Nequeam, nequeas. neqacat. 
 Plur. nequeSmus, nequeatis, uequoant. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Sing. Qnirem, — 
 
 Plur. , , quireut 
 
 Sing. NequTrem, , nequTret. 
 
 Plur. nequiremus, , nequlrent. 
 
 INDEFINITE VERB. 
 
 Infinitive. Quire, 
 Participle, quieus, G. queuntis 
 
 nequTre. 
 
 nequieus, G. nequeuntis. 
 
 10. Fieri, to he done, to heeome. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 sing. Fio. fig, fit. 
 Plur. fiums, fitis, fTunt. 
 
 Sing. Fiam. flap, fiat. 
 Phir. ftamuB, fiatis, iiant. 
 
2^2 
 
 IBREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Sing. FiC'bani. fiC-has. fiebat. 
 i'lu'r. tiebamus, liebuli^, tiCbant. 
 
 Sinq. Fierem. fien's, fieret. 
 Pliir. lierCmub, ticrutis, liercnt. 
 
 FUTUIIE. 
 
 ^yanting. 
 Imperative, Participle (present), and Verbal Adjective in dus, wanting. 
 
 Sing. Fiam, fies, fiet. 
 piu'r. fienui?, flGtis, tient 
 
 11. Ajo, Isay. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sing. Ajo, ais, ait. 
 
 JHur. , , ajunt. 
 
 Sing. AjCbam. ait'bap, ajCbat. 
 J*lur. ajebamiis, ajcbStis, ajCbant. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing, 
 riur. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 -, ajas, ajat. 
 - , ajant. 
 
 Imperfect.* 
 
 'Wantiixg. 
 
 12. Inquam, I my. 
 
 PREgENT. Tnqnam, inqni-. inqnit. 
 
 iiuiuitnuf. iiiqiiitis, iiKiiiiuiit. 
 IMPEKF. (Iiiquiel)am) itiquiebas 0"q"J5bat),— [mrel.** 
 FrrruR. Iiuinies. inquiet. 
 iMl'EKAT. Iiique, inquiio. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 mm 1 The compoimcls of e!<^e {ahense, adf.<<se, etc.) are conjncrMt.'d like 
 essT Be-inners ouilit to be rarcful in immoinicin- tlu'se compoumls ac- 
 coidino- to the marked (iiianlity of the stem-verb [ad r nun, ahenf^ <nh^ nn>i 
 e^c rTi e verb »,vW.w droits the d m all forms of 6'... which beirm with 
 a consonant, and keeps the d in all forms beginning with a vowel {,>mnm, 
 pro'deram.prodess'em.pi'o'dcro). r-or.ov.iu^ U nn.rht 
 
 ^ 2 The translation of the verb /)^.w is often difficult. Geneiallj it ought 
 to be rendered bv ran or amy; by -to he able'' only when it is used of 
 ^^r.l and we speak of their 'ahinty. The future of ;.>x.., when its object- 
 finitive is a pLtre. must be translated by "it is possible to,' render- 
 r. t le Latin jLire intinitive by an En.dish artr, inhnitive, and changing 
 the Latin subjert into the English ohjrrt, as : Har ^,.r>^.a cdenter coajici 
 qjotenint It will be possible to tinish these atlairs (luieklv. , ^ , , ., , 
 
 ^ t B ot'h subjunctives of irlle, noUe^ vadU are frequently translated by i 
 
 should .n.h or lifter ^^ I should not liker ^ ^^^/^'V^'l- -h' H^u^^-ft iu: i ^ 
 ^^I wmr but onlv in the first perscm. The English clause, f< I» '^^ ? 
 these expressi(>ns, wh(-ther introduced by 'Mhat" or not, is translated by 
 the mere subjunctive in Latin, without an introductory ut, as : 
 
 7 .hrr,M ivi^h voti iro^'lf! return a.<^ ••wn as possible, volini (yollrm^ qnani prinmm redn!ttii 
 (redirSisf. jlhoZZtlike that you would itay .o long, nc.lun tandm nmneati.. 
 
 * Tho other fornix of ajo are either wantinir or extremely rare. Tn the perfect ^>>tem, 
 
 «JmI'Scm/ u?on v?n,m in ,.se.-*Mn the perlVct .y.t.Mn of wrawion\y mquuti 
 fnd in*«iahc laid) occur. Inquam also occur, in the n^ean.ng of a perlect. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 243 
 
 The Imperfects Subjunctive vellem, ii/)llem, mallem., must be used, if the 
 action wished for is conceived to be impossible, as : I sliould wiah Coesar 
 teas alive, velleni Casar viveret. 
 
 The second and third i)ersoi)s oi Telle, nolle, malle are used to give to the 
 predicate a color of modesty, and are translated by " would," as: Ut Jinire 
 TeltH, that you would tinish. 
 
 4. The (•omi)ounds of Ire, as redire^ perlre, etc., are conjugated like Ire 
 {redVMim, per'iham, a/nbo, interlbo). 
 
 5. The })assive of Ire can be used in transitive compounds only, as tran- 
 seor, I am crossed (imperf. trannbar, fut. translbor, etc.) But even the 
 simple verb ire, in the third person pingular of all tenses, forms an imper- 
 sonal passive (see P. II., ^ 4(50), as : Uur, edtur, ihdtur, iretur, ibitur. 
 
 6. The present particii)le of Ire retains its regular decleusi(m-stem eunt 
 (§ ;j24, U. 2) in all cases except nominative singular, while the latter case 
 assumes the stem i, changing u into e, like the other verbs of the fourth 
 conjugation. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Cum beate vivere jucundissimum sit, plcrlque homines vitam beatam 
 assequi summopere (g 313, 2) student.— 2. Deum oriimus, ut propilius 
 {gracioaH) nobis sit. — 3. C. Marius multis civibus funestus erat. — 4. Tra- 
 janus ita regCbat rempublicam, ut quamplurimis civibus prodesset. — 
 5. Quum hostes jam adsint, pugnare necesse erit. — 0. Vires tibi deerunt, si 
 tarn ardue {hard) laborare pergis. — 7. Bono auimo* esto, mi tili, ut omnia 
 \\ivc imi)edimenta sujierare possis. — 8. Hcmiinis corpus rectum' est, utcoelum 
 contuGri jiossit. — 9. .Milites nostri a^gre^ castra ten5re poterant, quum un- 
 diciue {everywhere) ab hostibus prcmerentur.* — 10. Ilostium fuga tanta 
 erat, ut paucissimi Khenum transire possent. — 11. Hunc librum, si vis, fa- 
 cillime perlcgere" poteris. — 12. Hoc oi)pidum a civibus soils defendi poterit. 
 — 13. GaudGbo, si totum hoc negotium quamprlmum perticere velis. — 
 14. Cum milites nostri oppidum ingredi veilent, multi cives concurrCbant,* 
 militibusiiue venientibus se objiciCbant.'' — 15. Alexander, Macedonuin rex, 
 totum orbeni terrarum sibi subjicere volGbat. — 10. Coi)ia3 nostra? mori quam 
 vinci malGbant. — 17. Tamdiu manCbis, quamdiu (^ 304, Rem. 1(5) voles. — 
 18. Cum milites nostri montem ascenderent, exploratorcs* jaminde(^A<?/<ce) 
 redlbant.— liJ. Cura** ut exercitus (piaiu primum abeat.— 20. llaec civitas 
 cito i)crlbit. — 21. Domum {home) ito, mi tili. — 22. ^Milites tluvium transe- 
 unto. — 23. Fluvius tam altus est, ut vado transiri nequeat. — 24. Petimus'" 
 lit omnis has res statim nobis referatis. — 25. His rebus minus coinmodi 
 nobis quam hostibus atlerebiitur.^' — 2(J. Aqua tam rara erat, et vinuni tam 
 fretiuens,'- ut milites aquani vino pra'ferrent.— 27. Tabellarius" mens quo- 
 tidie tibi litteras atleret {to bring). — 28. Atfer nobis statuam illam, mi amice. 
 —21». Hoc oi)us vclim melius et (;itius tiat.— 30. His rebus Germanorum 
 agii melidres fecundioresque tiGbant. 
 
 1. Since this journey {iter) is so {tam) long that it cannot be made [feri) 
 1 foot", it will be necessary to ride in a" carriage (curru vehi).—2. We 
 
 on 
 
 ' Bono a.nmoes.'ie. to be of jjood cheer, to be cheerful.— ^ Rectuft, ei-ect.— ' .f.gre. with 
 difluulty.— •• Preinere. t(» Yxci^^.—^ I'erlegere, tt) perusr.— « Concurrtre. to run tui,a'ther.— 
 '^'6 o/ni'cerc (with dative), to oppose t-oiaebody.— ** Ejplorator, a, scout.— * Curare, to take 
 can*.— »" i-'t/tre, to ask. -^^ Afferre. to vaii>^v. — ^'^ Frequeng, abiindaut.—^^ 'J'abellarias, 
 letter-carrier.— 1* (/nyoc^ translate : bytke/ett. 
 
244 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 %^ish {optare) excmlin-ly (^313, 2), that this exorcise {exn'ciiafw) nia> be 
 verv (^ :U:}, 2) us.rul U>,W..s.v.) for {to) thee.-a Miu-e you now are nio e 
 ready than before, it will be easy to perform the whole ;>"«;"t;f -f'^l^^ 
 dili.'ent, inv son, in order that thou mayest {pom-) do {prmtare) all ^^ities -- 
 5 The river was 8000 paees farther (^ 311) distant than the camp ot to 
 enemies.-G. It was very (§ 314) dillicult to do all these ^^^^^;':^^^f^ 
 —7. Althou-h we were verv (^ 314) busy,» we stdl vonU hear the 1^'ct lus ot 
 the Stoic {Sioicu.) Posidoliius.-H. When Sempn^nius was prestnit M^^.s-^^), 
 the other ambassadors were silent.-9. Alexander was so turious, hat t 
 was dan-crous to apiH'oach {adur) him.-lO. 1 hou wilt be priscnt at (r/a- 
 fc) thes". lectures as Ion- as it will \w useful (j^mA-w) t(>thee to ^!;' P;;^;;;;^;"\^ 
 -11 All these undertakini^s will be doubllul, while this man will govern 
 our republic.-12. The astrologers {a.trolo(p,.) observed »l^^\"\'^ti()ns (/y/o/'^/^ 
 of the stars, that they might (;>.aw) learn (c.^r/mAvc./v) the ^^»^1 <;';;'' •!\['M';,^. 
 jjods— 13. Ycsterdav we could perceive the star Mercury (^ 112 D) wit i 
 (transl. />v) the naked eye.-14. The Roman soldiers could endure the hard- 
 ships of the war bHter than the Gauls.-l.-». Our c.ti/ens will be able o 
 endure the war lon-er than vours (^ 307, 2).-l(5. It will be p()ssible to do 
 ifacen) all these works at thV same time.-17. It will be possible to circum- 
 navigate {drcumnavigan) the whole island in (tnmsl. %) three (Mys.-lS. 1 
 should wish you would tinish this work so(>n(4/-lJ» 1 should wish that 
 Gaius was pivsent.-20. I wish it were wmter.-21. Gajiis is so nc i 
 that he wishes to have nothing more {anipUn.y-^l-l. I intended {vdle) 
 to postpone this journev a little longer, so that my friend might {posse) 
 ace mil any* me.— 23. The soldiers were so tnvd, that they refused {nolh) 
 to proceed (any) farther l^-2t)l, H. 10).-24. When we intended to cTiter 
 the -ate a furious multitude surrounded us.— 2o. Live as quietly as thou 
 \vilt"\visli {nllel—liS. I should not wish to iiulorse {conjirman) this opinion. 
 —27 I should prefer {malle) to see thy master.— 28. Since our bodies perish 
 {inte'rlre), thev cannot be immortal.— 2t). I advise that you return ns (puckly 
 as possible.-3(). Si)ring was already api>roaching {appdcre) v^X^^n {cum 
 with indicative) the army crossed the mountains.— 31. 1 shall pass ovei 
 this whole business, since it cannot be pleasant to learn {cofjnoscere) so dis- 
 graceful tliings.-32. The slaughter (MY/r.v) was so great, that more than 
 n< 312) 3000 enemies perished.— 33. I should wish you would bring this 
 book to me.— 34. The soldiers patiently endured {perferre) hunger and 
 thiixt —3.1 The confusion {trepldutio) was so great, that golden vases (n/^), 
 statues and valuable pictures were carried away« by the sol(liers.-3() Carry 
 awav this picture, () friend. -37. King Euristheus gave ordersMo Hercules 
 to (that Iw should) brimr to him the arms of the (lueen ot the Amazons. — 
 38. Parents take pains," that their children daily become better.— o<). It 
 
 rei 
 
 40. 
 
 [th.„, . -. -^ . ... 
 
 that he becauie hateful {incites) to his citizens. 
 
 38. Parents take pains," that their children daily become better.— o). It 
 remains (nstat) that this work be done {facere) quickly and accuratelv— 
 to It formerly (^^ 70) happened'» often that whole cities were destroyec bv 
 [theirl comiueroVs.»' 41. Tarcpiinius reigned {rer/na/r) so despotically, 
 
 1 Thj<i7, ocrnnltKa —^ Lfdure Pchnla.— « Soon, matOre.— ■• Comitari.— » To pass aier, 
 t>r.UT iv -^ ror r% a/mraufern^^ To gi re orders, i.nprrare.-; The Anuizon,, Am»- 
 Sont4.-» To tuLejZfJ, «tudere.-»» It Jiupi^.i^. fit.-" Vicior.-^^ Despottcal. .uperbi... 
 
 \ 
 
 J. 
 
 PERFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 245 
 
 CHAPTER THIRD. 
 
 THE PERFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 § 3516, All forms of the Perfect-SysteM are derived from 
 two principal forms: 1) from the first person singular indicative 
 of the active of the perfect tense; 2) from the first supine. 
 Both of these are again derived from the perfect-stem. 
 
 new 1. In order to find the two principal formf», we must 1)' knovy ihe Perpect- 
 «<TKM i e the verb-i*teni -mp it appears in the perfect system. Generally hotli systems 
 iiave'tliP mwe stem. Amdre, for inst., has tiie stem nnia for both, its pre-mr and \nv- 
 feet «v-tem Ihii offn the two sfms (lifter. Tiuisc-'//><7/e has the vowel stem euba m tlie 
 l)re-«Mit sv^tem. hut its perfect stem is consonantic(C'/(^y; p<'rf. c//^'/^). Pettre has ihe con- 
 H.n-int st".-m p^f \\\ the present svsfem. and the vowel-stem ;Wi in the perlect-system 
 (p. rf i^etlrh —2) We mn<t know whether or not a tensk-sion is to he added to the per- 
 fect-stem, and, iCsi., which tense-sij,'n must be used (whether i\ us in ainCivi ; or w, as m 
 viontti ; or*-, as in carjM). 
 
 g :{:I7. Verbs of tlie first and fourth conjugations form their 
 first person indie, perf of the active voice by adding vl, and 
 their supines by adding tmn to the verb-stem, as : 
 
 Am lire 
 AndTre 
 
 Pkijf. amilvi 
 Pekf. audlvi 
 
 Sep. ainiltnm 
 Sup. audltum. 
 
 Verbs of the second conjugation change their infinitive termi- 
 nation tre for the perfect into tiL and for the supine into ttum, as : 
 
 MonOre Perf. monui Sup. mcmitum. 
 
 Pfm. 2. For the numerous exceptions to this rule, and f.>r finding: th.' two principal 
 forms of the third conju.'Mtion. see Appendix VI p. 85'.. Kdi. '^ »'^'. t^'i^'l.,!^'^;. ;',f';'": 
 mit to m. MM.rv those verbs of the 1st. 2d. and 4th conjugations which ^'^' ''"<^ /. '> /'^'i 
 rule (1). m. No. r... For these. an<l lor all the verbs of the third coujugation, the ll^t of 
 Perfects and Supines, p. 375 loll., must be consulted. 
 
 § 338. When the two principal forms (perfect and supine) 
 are known, the Perfect-System of any given verb (including the 
 irregular verbs) may be formed according to the following 
 
 Paradigm of the Perfect-System of Aniare, 
 
 Active. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 Perfect. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Amilvi. Ilored or hare l&red 
 amavisti, thou loredst or ha-^t loved 
 aniavit, tie Lored or ha>i lortd 
 amavimus, ue lored or hare Imed 
 ainavi>tis. yim lored or hare lored 
 amaveruut or amavere, thty loved 
 loved. 
 
 or have 
 
 Amatus sum, 1 u'a.<t lored or hare been lored 
 amiltus cs, thou wast lored or haU been loved 
 anultus est. he ira^ lored or has been lored 
 amilti sumus. we Were lored or hare tmn lored 
 amnti cotis, you were lored or hare been Imed 
 amati buut, t/uy were loved or have been loved. 
 
246 
 
 Active, 
 
 PERFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 Pluperffxt. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 AmavCram, Ihadlored 
 aniavcras. t/um fuuM Irmed 
 aiiniveras, he had lo'rd 
 amaviT-iniusJ, /ve /ia(/ tared 
 ainaveriltii*, i/ou had tared 
 amaveraut, they had loved. 
 
 Amatuf» eram. 7 had been loved 
 amilnis eras, t/iou hadst tjeen loved 
 ainntii!^ erat, he had been tored 
 aiiifiti crilinijs, we had been tared 
 anulti erfitis, ?/o// had tnen tored 
 amitj eraiit, t/iey had been loced. 
 
 TEEFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 247 
 
 FuTuiiE Perfect. 
 
 AraavPro, InhaM hare tared 
 amaveris, tlion iritt hare tored 
 amaverit. he wilt hare tored 
 aniaverinms, we ,sh(Ut hare tored 
 amaveritis, yaii witt hare loved 
 amaveriiit, they wilt have loved. 
 
 Amfltiis ero, Tfihalt hare be^n tored 
 amatus* eris, thoa nilt hare l)een loved 
 amfitufi rrit. he wilt hare been tared 
 amati eriimis, we )<halt fiave been tored 
 anulti cnW'^.you will Jiare been loved 
 amati eruut, they will have been laved. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Perfect. 
 
 Ainavprim, I tared, have loved, or may have Amiltus sim, 1 ivas laved, hare been loved, ma§ 
 
 tored hare b<en. should hare tjcen loved 
 
 aruaveriti, thou tovedst, etc. am St us« «is, Vtou waid loved, or ha^t tieen laved, 
 
 *?tr. 
 
 amaverit. he tored. etc. amatusi ^it. he ?/'a.« tared, etc. 
 
 amaviTimus, we tared, etc. amati simuti, we were tored, etc. 
 
 ainaveritiH. t/ou tared, etc. amiiti isitis, you were tored, etc. 
 
 amaveriut, they laved, etc. amati Hint, t/t£y were loved, etc. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Amavipsom, Thad loved, would havelared, Amatus essom. J had been, might have be^n, 
 
 mi{/ht hare tared or u'outd hare been tared 
 
 amavi!*seB, thou hadnt taxied, etc. amiltus esses, thou hadsl t>een loved, etc. 
 
 amavisset. he had tared, etc. amfltus e.-;set. he had tteen tored. etc. 
 
 amavissCMiuis, we had tored, etc. amati ossemus. we had f)een tared, etc. 
 
 amavissC'tis, you had tored. etc. amjlii cssetis, you had t>een tared, etc. 
 
 amavissent, tliey fiad loved, etc. amati ebsent, they had been loved, etc. 
 
 INDEFINITE VERB. 
 
 Perfect Infinitive Active— Amavis^^e. to hare tared 
 
 i*EiiFECT Infinitive Passive— amatum etise, to hare been loved 
 
 Pekfect (Passive) PAKTicirLE— amStus. loved or having been, loved 
 
 FonMEU Supine— ainntum, {in (wder) to love 
 
 Latteu ISiTi'iNE — amatu. to tn- toreil 
 
 Verbal Adjective— amaturus», * atjout to love, 
 
 § «{«lO. Ill order to form according to the preceding paradigm 
 the perfect-system of any given verb, whose two principal forms 
 (perfect and supine) are known, we proceed thus : 
 
 I) From the given Perfect remove final % and substitute what 
 remains, for the syllables amdv in the Paradigm. Thus the 
 whole active voice may be formed. 2) From the given Supine 
 remove final itm, substituting what remains, for amCit in the 
 Paradigm. Thus the whole passive voice may be formed. 
 
 * The Verbal Adjective in Urus belongs by its meaninpf to the Preseut-Syeteiu ; by its 
 derivation to the Perfect-System. 
 
 -^ 
 
 Ex'AMPT.ES I. For the second, third, and fourth conjnirations. 1. Second 
 Coniuo-ation. Pcrf. monui. Sup. monitnm (^ :3:i:). Subsutute man a tor 
 amac, and mon)t for aruCit in the paradigm. Perf. \iu\. mom» monui.ti, 
 OHonaif cic.-Plup. monuemm.-l\x\. perf. m.>7i//^7v.-Pert. siil>i monue. 
 ri,n — Plup. subj. mo /urismn,— Fart pass. monttuH stwi (subj. ;«;''}•— ''"P- 
 pas^ monifus €r/r??i (subj. ^.w/zi).— Verb. adj. moMturus.—2. Third Con- 
 iuffationi^O Srriberf. Perf. srripsi, Sup. srripfam (p. 384). Snl)stititte .rnps 
 inroinrfr and !<rript for amat. Fvri. un\. .scn/,si, scnpmti,.scri/mt.--l \u\\ 
 ffrrifwnini.—Fvvi'. pass, .scriptus snm.—\vvh. adj. scripiura.s.—{I>) iM^dere 
 Pc-if hi^si. Sup. lfpmm{\^.m(i)- Substitute /^'.v both for ^/mvf?? and ^///<;/^. 1 ett. 
 Jjpsi,l<f'4s/i, l^f^sif (Mc.-Plui) tasnnm etc.— Perf. i)ass. Imus sum. \ • rb ai j. 
 ;,,,,./-, ,v/.y—:j. Fourth Conju^tion J ?/(?7/Y'; Perf uud>n, Su)). auddam (^ 
 ;j;]7). Substitute iiadlcUn-tuii'iv, and aud'tti'ov (Dtalt. Perl. Aiuiin,audivt»tL, 
 aadhit dr.— VvrW pass, audlta.s f<u)n.—Vi^Tb. adj. auditurus. 
 
 II Irregular Conjugation, beinir regular in the p-'rfcet svs'ein. — 1) 
 Esse Perf./V/(p. 377). Substitute/?/ for ^^w<?^. Perf. : FNi,fulstLfuitL^\c, 
 Phip. fui'niin.—W'rt'. subj. fueritn. Plup. subj. fai.^sem. Suiec there is no 
 supine (p. ;I:T), a passive voice oUxse eannol be formed. \u)v the irregular 
 verb adj fatdras see p. 337.— 2) Pof<xe. Perf. poiui, without sup. (p. o83). 
 SubstiliUe";7.//// Wnamdv. Perf. Potai, potui.xti, potuit eXc. Flap, pot iter am 
 ,,l<. _:j) So the perf svstem of vellc, nolle, m'dle (perf. volai etc., see the list) 
 i^iv.riilnrlveonjuszated {rohii, volnisti q\c.; voluerxm etc.).— 4) Ferre. Pert. 
 /////, "sup. I'lluni (p. 378). Substitute tul for aaidv, and Idt for ainat. Pert. 
 Tall tali.sti,talit ete.— Plup. tuhram etc.— Perf pass. Idta^ ,s//;/^— \ erb. 
 adj Id urns.- 5) //v. Perf. ui. Sup. )tum (p. 379). Substitute 7c for amav, 
 aiul It for aiudt. Perf. Ivi, icisfi, ivit etc. Plup. ivemm etc. Pert. i)ass. itus 
 mimatum eat. impersonallv).— Verl). adj. itiiruti.—(3. Fieri. Ver\.J(tctU!< mm 
 (p 378) Substitute y>/r^ tor ^n/^(7rin the pass. V{^YLFactmmm,faHases, 
 farffLscfd etc.; 1 became, was niadeetc.—Plup./«^^?/s^rawi etc. —Verb. adj. 
 jactdras (belonging to the active meaning ' to make '). 
 
 § U lO. The l\'rfect-System has two moods, Indicative and 
 Suiui'NCTivE. The Indicative has three tenses, Perfect, Plu- 
 PEiiFECT, and FuTUKE Perfect, (dosely corresponding in their 
 relations to the three tenses of the Present-System. The Sub- 
 junctive has two tenses. Perfect and Pluperfect. The indefi- 
 nite verb consists of I) one infinitive for each voice; 2) one 
 participle for the passive voice ; 3) one verbal adjective for 
 the active voice ; 4) two supines, the former for the active, the 
 latter for the jjassive voice. 
 
 ^ 341. The tenses and moods of the active voice are formed 
 by the endings /, trim, train, issem, ami m>, which are applied 
 to the Perfect-stem, increased by the tense sign (w, u, or s), if 
 there is any, or, in other words, substituted for the ending i of 
 the given Perfect. 
 
218 
 
 rEllFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 1 
 
 PERFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 249 
 
 The tenses and moods of the Passive voice are compound 
 forms, consisting of the rEiiFECT Participle in connection witli 
 the Present-System of the copula esse, whicli in this connection 
 is called an auxiliary verb. 
 
 These compound tenses of tlie Passive voice are grammatically 
 treated in the same way as predicative adjectives with the copula 
 (g§ G4, 78, 81, 102). According to § 78, Rem. G, we must quote 
 the Perfect Infinitive Passive l)y placing the participle in 
 the accusative masculine singular (amatum esse). 
 
 ^ :t i i; The following verbs are called Perfect or Preterite 
 verhs, because they lack the Present-System: Ccepisse, memi' 
 nisse, novisse, odlsse. They are regularly conjugated {ccepi^ 
 coepisti, etc. ; cceperim, etc. ; memini, meminerlm, etc.) 
 
 In reojard to their use, the followinsc rules must be noticed .* 
 
 1. Ccepi has not only the form, but also the siirnification of a Perfoct 
 yl began or have begun; ov I commenced, hare commeitced). (Wpl has tlie 
 same construction as the verb incipere in the Present-System (§ 80, c.) The 
 latter verb in classieal language forms no Perfect-System, which is borrowed 
 from tlie verb c(vpisse, as : I began to irri'fe, seribere rcrpi. 
 
 The verb ca'pi has also a complete Passive voice {ca'pfifM fotm, ccppfus 
 eram, etc.), whicli, however, lias exactly the same meaninir as the Active, and 
 is only used wiien the Object-Infinitive, dependent ou it, is a Famcc, as: A 
 war began to be waged, Bellum geri ccrptum est. 
 
 2. Meminme, to remember; norisse, to know ; odisse, to hate, are Perfects 
 merely in form, but Presentx in meaning. The Imperfects of these verbs 
 (I remembered, I knew, I hated) are exjiressed by the Pluperfects of the 
 Latin verbs {memineram, noveram, oderam), and the Futures (I shall remem- 
 ber, shall know, shall hate) by the Future Perfects of tlie Latin verbs (niemi- 
 nero, novero, odero). Memini forms an exceptional Imperative, Memento 
 (plur. menientdte), remember ! 
 
 3. The verb memini, if it has a noun as an object, generally takes it in 
 the genitive, but sometimes in the accusative (I remember the battli'. Pug- 
 luf memini). It also t:rkes an oiukct-infixitive like the verbs mentioned 
 §80; but this object-iutinitive, which in English is always a Perfect, in 
 Latin is always a Preseut-lntinitive, as : 1 remember to have heard, Aud'ire 
 (not audisse) mejnini. 
 
 4. The verb noviHse is not construed with an object-infinitive, Imt with 
 the accusative of a substantive, and thereby is distinguished from scire, to 
 know. 
 
 Rem. 4. To these verbs may be added the verb con.<*ue7u'Kxe, to l)e accus- 
 tomed (i)rop('rly a iierfect of the verb constuftcere, to become accustomed), 
 whose construction and meaning is like that of sole re (^ 80, Rem. 3), as: IH 
 immorfales talln homines punire consuererunt. The immortal gods are in 
 the habit of punishing such men. Thus : Plupkuf., consueoeram, I waa 
 accustomed; Fur. I*erf., consuevero, 1 shall be accustomed. 
 
 
 § S'l»!. The Di:roxENT Verbs, since they have no active 
 voice, have only the compound tenses of the passive voice, 
 although with active meanings, in the Perfect-System. Hence 
 they have only o/te pri?icipal form, which, according to the 
 analogy of the other verbs, sliould be the supine. But the 
 grammarians designate as such the Perfect. Thus : Ilortdri^ 
 hortdtus sum; exper'cri, expertus sum. 
 
 The indefinite verb of the Deponents in the Perfect-System 
 consists of: 1) Perfect Infinitive (hortatum esse) ; 2) Per- 
 fect Participle {hortdtus, having exhorted) ; 3) Both Supines 
 (Jiortdtum, in order to exhort; hortdtu, to be exhorted) ; 4) The 
 Verbal Adjective (hortaturus, about to exhort). 
 
 § 34:4. The following neuter verbs have only deponent 
 forms in the Perfect-System ; that is, passive forms with active 
 siixnilications : 
 
 1) audere, 
 
 2) gaudere, 
 .S) solere, 
 4) fidere, 
 
 ausus sum, 
 gavisus sum, 
 solitus sum, 
 fisus sum. 
 
 to dare, 
 
 to be glad, rejoice^ 
 to be in the habit, 
 to trust, 
 
 with the compounds of the latter (confidere, conflsus). 
 
 These verbs are called Semi-deponents. On the contrary, 
 the verb reverti, to return, is a Deponent in the Present and 
 an Active in the Perfect-System : revertor, Perf. reverti (not 
 reversus su)/i). 
 
 § 34«i. In verbs which form their Perfect with the termina- 
 tion v/^'ontractions frequently take place, when tliis termination 
 is follow^ed by s or r. They consist in omitting the syllables vi 
 or ve, as : 
 
 Amavisti— amasti ; amavisse — araasse. CompleviPti — complesti; comple\is8e— com- 
 pk'sse. Audivisii — audisti: audivistie — andis!«e. Novititi — iiosti; novit^se— uosise. Ama- 
 Vfriin- -amaiiin: ainavC'rmit — aniilruiit. Coiibueveriut — consugriut; cousueveraut — coii- 
 Bueruut. Novtrini— uoriiu; noveruiit— noruiit. 
 
 But when the syllable ve is preceded by I (as in the 4th conju- 
 gation) only the letter v is elided, as : 
 
 audiverim — audierim ; audiverunt — audiSrant. 
 
 Sometimes in verbs with the characteristic i the letter v is also 
 
250 
 
 TERFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 omitted when vi is not followed by s or r. This is regularly 
 the case in the conn)ounds of ire, as: 
 
 ahi'i— (not ablvi) ; rediit— {not redlvit). 
 
 Ban. 5. The secondary form of the 3. pers. nhir. perfect imlic.itive in 
 ere can never be contracted. Thus we cannot say u/ndre instead o< 
 amavere. 
 
 Syntactical Remarks ox the Use of the Perfect System. 
 § J{ 10. The Perfect Indicative corresponds to both, the Past 
 tense, and Present-perfect in English [atndvl = I have loned, 
 SLiul Ilooecl). But often the Engl. Past tense corresponds to 
 the Latin iMrEiiFECT, which denotes past actions conceived as 
 
 7iot finished (incomplete) at the time spoken of. 
 
 Rem. G. This principle on tiie use of tlie Latin Imperfect indicative is 
 applied to a niunbt r of particidar usai::es, coustitutin'j: a very complicated 
 theory (P. II, p. 30.") foil.). The most important instances in which tiie 
 Imperfect occurs are the following:: Tmf. Imim-:kfkct of Statk, d«'not- 
 inir a state lastinu^ at the lime spoken nf, as: The bomidiiriex of fhe (hiuh 
 e.vteitded then to the llhiiie, (JaUonim tines tnm ad Hhcnum us(|ue }nitch(int 
 (not patuerunt). — 2) The Impkkfpxt of coxtixued action, to dencite an 
 action in progress at the time spoken of: When ILinnihnl firrived, we were 
 bexiefjing Capua, Qunm Hannibal advCnit, Cajjuam obsidehd in t/ a (not obxe- 
 diinnfi). — 3) Impp:hfkct of kkpkatkd action, to denote actions indcti- 
 nilely repeated : 2'he enemif daili/ haraxxed our troops, llostes (piolidie 
 copias nostras lacesxebant.-^'i) Impekfect op habit, to denote customary 
 actions: The Chaldeann observed {i. e. used to observe) ///6' atars with great 
 zeal, Clialdaei sidera mairno studio obxervdbant. — Unless the im]>erf('Ct is 
 required for one of these reasons, the stud'Mit should (in this tirst Part) 
 render the En«,d. Past tense, by the Latin Perfect. 
 
 § XW7 , The Future-perfect is used either with the force of 
 
 an English Fut. perf, or (more frequently) with the force of an 
 
 Engl. Future-present, in dependent sentences (introduced by sly 
 
 9tlsl, qiintn, etc., or by relatives), representing a future act as 
 
 completed before the happening of another future action. 
 
 My son will come, if thou wilt gire him permission. Fiiius mens veniet. fi vt'iiiam el de« 
 diris. Here the future perf. di-iteris is used instead of the future dabh, since the perniia^ 
 Bion must be i^iven before he comes. 
 
 lakall write when Uajus conies {will have come), Scril)am, cum Gajus venerit [not veuiet). 
 
 § 5118, The Latin Pluperf Indicative generally corresponds 
 totbeEnirlish Pluperfect. But sometimes we translate the Enoflish 
 Pluperfect by a Latin Perfect. This is especially the case in clauses 
 introduced by the conjunction after^ which is translated by j^ost- 
 quam or postedquwn. This conjunction stands in Latin with a 
 
 PERFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 251 
 
 Perffct, when the action of the Principal Predicate is a conse- 
 quence of that of the Dependent Predicate, as : After the soldiers 
 had arrived, Caesar gave orders to moke the attack, Postquam mi- 
 lites advenerunt (not advenerant), Caesar impetum facere jussit. 
 But when the actions are so separated that the one is 7iot a 
 consequence of the otlier, the conjunction jyostquam must be 
 construed with the Pluperfect, as: Sclplo went to Asia after he 
 had destroyed Xumantla, Scipio postquam Xumantiam dele- 
 verat, in Asiam profectus est. 
 
 B^m. 7. In the former example the two actions (the arrival of the soldiera 
 and the order to attack) stand in an evident relation to each other, while 
 in the latter they are independent of each other, and the one would prob- 
 ably have happened without the other. However, the use of tense after 
 poufquaw depends on several other conditions and must be studied in de- 
 tail (P. II, p. 601, foil.). For the Imperfect after postouam seeF. II p. 
 662 foil. ' ^ 
 
 § «iI9. The rules on the coxsecutiox of texses (g 831) re- 
 fer also to the tenses of the Perfect-System, and, in application 
 to both systems, may be thus expressed: If the Principal Predi- 
 cate is a present or future, the Dependent Predicate, if in the 
 subjunctive, is in tlie Present or Perfect ; if the Principal Predi- 
 cate is one of the past tenses (imperfect, perfect, or pluperfect), 
 the Dependent Predicate, if in the subjunctive, must be an Im- 
 perfect or I*luperfect. 
 
 The Present subjunctive in the former, and the Imperfect 
 subjunctive in the latter case must be employed, if the action 
 of the dej)endent predicate is conceived to liappen at the same 
 time with or after that of the principal predicate. 
 
 Birt the Perfect subjunctive in the former, and the Pluper- 
 fect subjunctive in the latter case must be used, if on the con- 
 trary the action of the dependent predicate is conceived as hap- 
 pening before that of the principal predicate. 
 
 E.vnmplex: I. Time of the principal sentence anterior to that of tlie de- 
 pendent sentence : 
 
 I command that he should come, Impero ut veniat. 
 
 1 conuuaialed that he should come^ Imperavi ut venlret 
 
 II. Time of both sentences simultaneous : 
 
 I come since you wish it, Yenio, cum cupiatis. 
 1 came since you wished it, Veui, cum cuperCtis. 
 
252 
 
 PEKFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 III. Time of depend, sent, anterior to tliat of tlie principal sentence: 
 I come since yon irish<d {hmr <ci.s/u'd) it, Venio, cmii cupiverilis ; 
 J cdine, since you had ici.s/ud it, Veui, cum cupivis;aCti.s. 
 
 JloO. CoxDiTioxAL clauses, i. e. tliose introduced by si, or 
 ni^i [ni), generally take the Indicative. For the instances in 
 which ordinary conditional clauses require tlie subjunctive see 
 P. n, p. 709, foil. A peculiar class of conditional clauses are 
 those of NON-REALITY (hypothetical clauses), when the predi- 
 cates both of the clause, and of the principal sentence contain 
 supposed actions contrary to reality. Such predicates are in the 
 suhjimctive o^ the imperfect if referring to present, and of the 
 pluperfect, referring to past time. See P. II, ]>. 717 foil. 
 
 If he came (hn\ h«> docs not^«, / would leave. Si vetiTrot. abliein. Jf he had come I would 
 leave, Si vtMuss<t, ablrem. If he had come, 1 would have left, SivoniKset, ubiisseui. 
 
 §:?"il. The FORMER SUPINE is used after verbs expressincr a 
 motiuii m space, and d'enotes the purpose and end of themotron. 
 It is translated by "in order to," as : 
 
 The .soldiers went away in otde}- to procure water, Milites aqnatum abiCrunt. 
 
 § tl^ri. The SECOND suriNE is used as object of certain ad- 
 jectives, as facilis, difficilis, incredibilis, jucrmdus, and some 
 ' others, with the force of a 2^((ssjve infinitive, although the Eng- 
 lish language by an idiomatic i)eculiaiTty generally emplo^'^s 
 here the active infinitive, as: 
 
 coSh" erit!'''^ ""'^^ ^ ^''^'' ^"^ ""'^^''*'''''*^ (instead ottobe understood) Narratio facillot 
 This is easy to say. Hoc facile dictu est. 
 
 Bem.S The use of both supines is limited to cerUiin verbs, and not 
 frequently met with m ancient authors. 
 
 » 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 ^ 1. Semper postulavimus, nt Antioehi Iccrnti mhoxw relinquorrnt— '^ Cu- 
 ruis Dentfitus cum bis triumphasset, olcnr ])laiitavit/— :}. Aliens AlMrtiiis 
 qunrtus Koniandnim rex, Latinos licllo donuiit, urbcm Honiam ainpiiticavit* 
 eamque novis mcrnibus circunuicdit.— 4. Sa-pissinie tt- urbcm intrarc ve' 
 tuimus.— o. Quolics r()i>:asti, ut Ici^es usuriic aliroirarcntur '— (J Galli post- 
 quaiii hacc lama contirmata est, bcllum liomanis infcrrc" statuVrunt 
 Hujus belli unperium Orgetoriirj^ mandilrunt.— 7. Quiim trater tmis Sem- 
 pronium milu ronmiendaverit, ne.iroiium illud ei mandabo.— 8 Exercitus 
 noster proticiscitur,*' cum Galli rursus conjuraverint.— 9. Cum milites nostri 
 
 » Consequently the clause it> hypothetical.-^ Qlu?. cabbaire.-s Plant Hie to plant to 
 ^^^::^:j^:i^fZ^l!^ ^ ^^^^^' '^ ^"""^^-^ -^ .^.A somebody.-. :suuJ'Ct- 
 
 PERFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 253 
 
 vr> 
 
 f^ 
 
 advenCnint,hostes jam urbem occupaverant. — 10. Xisi iriltus essem, jam diu 
 le casiii;assem. — 11. Ca'sfU", cum .EduGriim priiieipes coiivocavisset, ^\c{t/iU8) 
 eos allocutus est. — 13. Si nos pecuniil et copiis adjuveris, Germiinos vincere 
 fiicile eril. — 1:J. Si exules vestros revocaveritis, et oppida, a vobis occujjata, 
 Gallis reddideritis, pacem vobis dabo. — 14. Phili])j)us e([uites frumeiitatum 
 misit. — 15. Ibec uva* peracerba gustiitu" est. — 10. Camillas a populo Roma- 
 no accusiitus est, quod regnum appeteret.' — 17. Quot victoriye ab hoc impe- 
 ratore reportatie*, quot pradia pugnata, quot oppida expugnata sunt ! — 18. 
 Cum culpa tua probata sit, hcraiicidii^ te condemno.* — 19. Quamquam Sul- 
 picius imi)eratori jam diu denuntiatus erat, niimquam tamen accusatio recte 
 (/'//////) probari poterat. — 20. Cum urlis expugnilta esset, dux servis omnibus 
 libcrtatem dedit. — 21. Sulpicius, homicidii accusiitus, a judicibus condemua- 
 tus est. — 22. Germaui, fluviiim transire conati, a Romauis persequentibus ne- 
 ciiti sunt. — 23. Siepe jam me spes frustrata' est. — 24. Quamciuam ctoctrlnam 
 tuam semper admirati eramus, tunc tamen ingenium tuum plane (6/i^/;Wy) 
 novum esse videbatur. — 25, Antisdienes discipulos suos mcmuit, ut sapien- 
 tial operam darent." Fauci tamen pariiGrunt. — 26. Romani Corinthum et 
 Carthagiuem, panels aulem annis post (J; 311, Mem. 10) Numantiam dele- 
 verimt. — 27. Gajus a civibus accusiltur, quod Sempronii filios male docuerit. 
 
 28. Etruria tam Celebris erat, ut totam Italiam nomiuis sui tama implesset. — 
 
 29. Quamquam Galli primam et secuudam aciem ulterius (^ 291) pro- 
 gredi proliibuCrunt, tertia tamen acies hostium latus' circumire^" coepit. — 
 
 30. Gallorum auxilia a Cicsare ita adhibita sunt, ut utrunniue latus nostrum 
 tegereut. — 31. Cum aries" et seal» muris admotje essent, eruptio'*'* ab oppi- 
 danis omnibus portis siiniil facta est. — 32. Filii inei magnopere gavisi sunt, 
 quod eos tot tautisque beneticiis atfecisti.'^ — 33. Si banc v^ocem enuntiare 
 ausus esses, nulla te nunc premeret'* suspicio. — 34. Uvas istas nostris ipso- 
 riun manibus cariisimus.''^ — 35. Ca3sar omuls copias suas abduxit. — 36. Atti- 
 cus ita vixerat, ut omnibus civibus suis carissimus esset. — 37. Cjesar Laliie- 
 niim hostium castra obsidere jussit. — 38. Cum existimationem^" meam ca- 
 lumniis asperseris," societatem tuam aspernor. — 39. Dux cum banc rem 
 comperisset, primam aciem ab hostibus repulsam'^ et fugientem conspexit. 
 — 40. Ilostes (luauKiuam aciem mediam'" perruperant,'*" ab equitibus rejec- 
 ti-'* sunt. — 41. Impetus tam celeriter factusest, ut copi;e nostne castra intra- 
 reut, priusquam ab hostibus couspecttr essent. — 42. Si frater tuus adfuisset, 
 filius mens se servare potuisset. — 43. Cum hostes omne frumentum abstule- 
 rint,'"''-' cives vitam sustinCrc nequeunt. — 44. Postquam hie nuutius Mario 
 allatus est, hostis statem i)ugnare copgit. — 1^5. Timoleon diligi quam metui 
 inaluit. — to. Si amicos tuos adjuvare voluisses, nunquam ab eis derelictus 
 esses. — 47. Hoc pradio {in i/ii.s battle) ducentie naves naulragio"^'' pcriCrunt. 
 — 18. Rcdiimus, posupiam hostes urbem relitpiCrunt. — 49. Nisi fluvium 
 transissOtis, omnes ab hostibus capti essCtis. — 50. Proconsul accusatur, quod 
 civis Romanos justo crudelius (i; 310, Rem. 7) punierit. — 51. Perbene diffi 
 cilem banc (iiuestionem detinisti. — 52. Captivi a mililibus nostris arctissi- 
 me""'* custoditi sunt. — 53. PhuMiIces multas artis ipsasque litteras invenC- 
 ruut. — 54. Milites, post([uam atpiam cibosque reperCrunt, meliore animo'^' 
 
 * Uca. a ^rrape.— 2 Gustdre. to ta'^Xe.— ^ Begun m appefere, to a!*pire to the throne, or to royal 
 diirnity.— */iV/>o?'A7/-(f. to report.— siloniicide. —T'o/u/<iA««<7/'e. to declare guilty. — ''Fruslrd' 
 ri. to disappoint —^0/>fra//< (/are. to }iay attention, to take pains with. — ^Laf'*s. flanic.— 
 i"To surround.— I'Hani.—i^A snrl\e.—*^I{e/i<'tfciis ajjicere. to sliow favort* to somebody.— 
 '<To weijrh upon somebody. — i^To pick.— '^Fame. — '''To ^vaxw.—^" Rtpellere. to repulse.— 
 ^^ Acies media, the centre.— 20T0 break.— ^'To throw back.— ^^To carry away.— ^'Aaw/'r» 
 ffium, Ai'i\iwreck.—^* Arctus, close.— '^^Uono animo, cheerfully. 
 
 in 
 
 I it 
 
2^54 
 
 rERFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 itincris l-ibr.ros pcrpossi snnt.-5r>. Memento morti. 1-50. Re-es promisso. 
 
 pnmi.uiuaivt, oppi.hun ah hostibus jam obsulOn cu'pluni eral.-o8. Multi 
 
 homines talia seel.ra ixrpetrfire e.)nsuesse videnlur. n,i(,nted tlio 
 
 1 Tliou hast ba.llv tinea the doors to the house.— 2 Scipio adoptc l tlio 
 
 son o • Pauh.s:Emih\is, in order that his name mi-ht be preserved.-.]. AV o 
 
 Smtlrmed this treaty (>...) direetly, m -•^^-;»^i;!^;^^;^-^^;;,^,X^lS 
 nossible mi-ht feel (snirin) its advantai^M-s — 4. \ on have ir<^^quuiu> lus 
 mrb tl P bl e peaee. -5. Tlie jud-es declared the accused ^nnlty {con- 
 t^'//y /. or t^ e^^^^^^ Poini>ev had comiuc^red {^h^nare) the pirates; and so 
 ir A {virthe « orv of this'war, tliat the command ot the Mulinda ic 
 f l^ L-I/^'/.t) wa Vas conferred (.^./Wv.) on (translate to) liim >y the 
 ^ 'l^^ un-nc-ral lias ^nven peace to ns, the people will -ive 
 
 l\ In the l!Shest (^ 21)0, Rem. 7) lumors.-S. You are praisc.l bv the pj^p e 
 for havin- (translate, thai yon. hace) lou-ht so bravelv.-l). When Cx.ar 
 airivithe enemies had already occupied the banks ot tlHyiy^r.-lO It 
 vol 1 ad cLctlv asked {rocjare) my opini(,n, I should certainly haye told t 
 ?;; vo _ 1 K^^^^ ^y,ll (64 reconcile the king to you, the general will 
 I v^e back your helds to you.-12. The ^:duans {.^ui) sent »^m^^««^f,;;^ 
 to \H yistus to ask {mjiire) [for] help.-l;J. Socrates was accused, that he 
 com t HU^>rnL;)Ar^^^ ami introduced {h,(rod>,ren) new snpersti- 
 
 S(^.nlS.-14. Althoudi the camp had been stormed (''•'V^^//':;^) 
 y our tiCps, yet the soldiers took (..;..r) less booty than "^"«^ .b; M 0, 
 KV,n 7)_l3. Since many crimes haye been committed 1 shall take care 
 h. they be denounced to the pnetor.-16. As soon as {.dn) this inatt(. w 11 
 1 ave bmi evplained by thee, I shall return to thee all this money -I -. It 
 thou hadst "M^^^^^^^ a better advice to thy friend, thou wouldst^never 
 
 W b^fa?(^us Hl\iv liim.-18. Your tViend is acnised of weakness,^ smc^ 
 he has been afraid (^ 80) of yiolating the laws.-U . }^]^]Z^^f^^ 
 (runrtdri) to arrest^» Catilne, since he had been afraid ot einploung loicc 
 ^[;^u/ii!::-20. I n^joiced [l.tdri) that (,.<.^ ^^^ 0/"^;^!» ^ e Ind sS 
 {nolle) to accept an illicit [illicit, i.) gam (/./av////).-2l W ^/" ^ ^^,^^^^'^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 a little longer (6 311) than it was necessary, we searched" the uho e house 
 14 Oroaorix haying bewailed {illacmnnrl) his sad fate,' sei/ed^ tin; ha ml 
 of a^r^ind implorc^l his grace (,../^.).--^^^ The slayes n; ea.nl by he 
 enemies, refused to follo^y their masters.-24. llay.ng l^' » "^'l^' ^^ ^,!^^ 
 (iuils themsclvt's we shall demand the rewards due t( u>.—^'). It was 
 alh w^^^^^^^ our children to be happy.-2l>. The (lanls were angry 
 
 ^^^;.i^r.) with (translate A>) ns, sinc^ (y..rf with '^^^ ''^^',;;^^i!^^ 
 been destroyed {delcre) and their liberties {pnnlq/Hnn) been '^" yl"''^'^ ^ ,;;>. 
 us-27 If thou hadscmployed more care to this business, thou wo UU 
 have been able to reap {jJrcipen) the fruits of thy diligence.-28 All hese 
 ca^nllh^ taye been^ i;;eyei;te<l (;>..A/^^.) by the yirtue and au -nty ;^ 
 Pompey -20. C<Tsar increased his army by two legions, latr > dialu d (^ >/ - 
 ^SV-m) When the enemies approached, Ca-sar had already directed 
 (1«t V Lab enus to occupy the highest ridge {jufri^u) ot the mountam.-- 
 31 All tl ese thin.^s were 'foreseen {proridere) by the general si.ice the sol- 
 dk-rs 1 ad already tilled up the ditches and destroyed the tortihcations.- 
 
 J To fake care curJIrc -^ Weakne>^>'. inconstantia.-' C'ompr.hond.rc-'» ro ewjyloy forc4 
 ■ i rff"!^ uu.:.'/^^^ force to.-" 7-0 ^/rty, touiinonln.-» To search, \n-T- 
 
 SutXi'-^s::,^ -« fo ;;S^4 co;;/pr-ehLiiTre.--»i>a.; trau.latc: owed, pa.t part, oitoowe. 
 dubere.— 1° To annihilate, tollere. 
 
 PERFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 255 
 
 \^"' 
 
 82. When I had seen Brutus, I resolved to follow Pompey.— 33. We had 
 been accustomed to walk early in the morning, when {cnni with indie.) a 
 disease compelled us to keep' Uie bed.— 34. The citizens rejoiced {gaudere) 
 that {quod with subj.) the war had been tinished.— 3o. The citizens took up 
 {«umere) arms in order to {that) exj^el {e.vpellere) the tyrants. — 36. Our troops 
 \yere exhausted {confectus) by hunger, since the enemies had consumed 
 {(dMiuiiere) all provisions. — 37. The ambassadors, frightened by these procfi- 
 gies {prmli<jiani), consulted'^ the Delphic oracle.— 38. Alexander opened" 
 countries, imkuovvn to fame, by his sword.— 39. The consul dismissed the 
 veterans {reterdnas), but he drafted^ 2000 foot-soldiers. — 40. A beautiful 
 statue of father Liber was chiselh'd {scalpere) by Menauder, and ^Menexe- 
 mus formeil' the same god in (by) bronze {acts). — 4L The augurs, induced* 
 by these prodigies, examined' the sacred books. — 42. Argus, charmed" by 
 the music," fell into sleei) {obdornmc^r€).—\'d. The Corinthians" had estab- 
 lished" this colony, and by it promoted" their commerce and authority. — 
 44. The gates of Janus, closed {ckiudcre) or opened {aperin), became the 
 signs {indt.1') of peace or war. — 4.5. The king disajijxiinted" the hope of the 
 people, and spread {spargere) the seeds" of corruption {corruptela) by un- 
 heard-of briberies.*^ — 4(j. Prometheus, since he had defied {s^^ycrnere) the 
 will of Jupiter, was athxed'** by him to the Caucasus. — 47. Posthumius is 
 accused of having extorted" (transl. by quod with subjunctive) the votes 
 of the lioman ])eople by force.— 48. Pisistratus is said to have collected 
 {colligtre) the poems of Homer, dispersed" before. — 49. Continuous {conti- 
 nuu.s) pains gave to the mind of the king a sort oIl {quidani) bitterness {acer- 
 l)it(ts). — 50. Caesar, moved {commovere) by this sudden danger, took {capere) 
 anotiier resolution {con.siliuni). — 5L The bundles" of the lictors became lu- 
 dicrous'-" by the diminished authority of the magistrates. — 52. Gajus laid 
 {jactre) the foundation"''' of his future fortune by this business alone. — 53. 
 The Stoic Posidonius is said to have broken"^'' this sickness by his will {vo- 
 luntas) alone. — 54. Parrhasius is said to have deceived {fallere) the birds 
 by his i)aiiited-'* grapes (//r»0— -55. Brutus \)rL'i'crvvd {a ?itepo?iere) ihQ common 
 welfare of all to his domestic'''* happiness {feUcitaa). — 5G. Sempronius was 
 thrown {coujicere) into prison,'''* since he had reported {deferre) all our plans 
 to the eneiiiies.— 57. The (i reeks remember well the old glory of their 
 country.— 58. The allies, frightened by the elephants,'"' began to abandon 
 {tntdtn) themselves to llight.— 59. The neighboring nations began to be 
 molesteil {preinen') by the war. — 60. Metellus, having obtained {adiplffci) 
 the command, began to restore the former {j)niitinu^) discipline of the sol- 
 diers.— 61. Cornefia, having spoken these words, died {niorl) with {bg) a 
 serene mind. — 62. The enemies, having found out {nancixci) a place, fortified 
 
 by nature, elected {poncre) a camp. — 0,1 When Caesar had departed* (j>r<>/i" 
 cmci), the ambassadors of the Nerviaus arrived. — 64. Pana?tius i)raisei 
 Scipio for {qnod with subj.) having been abstii\ent {abdinenx). — 65. Tl" 
 (jlficers {dux) could with ditnculty-' repress'''" their fear, while'" they ha 
 been of irood cheer Ujojio auiino) before. — 00. Since the enemies have r 
 
 \c^ 
 
 » To keep, tenure.— 2 Consnlore.— ' Tatefacere.— * Conscribere.— » To form, fiiigere.— 
 • Toiiidnc*-, a (1(1 11 cere.—'' To tJ-ainiiie, inspicere.— ** 7bc/<<//v«. permulcGre.— »J/'<«t'. cantus. 
 — >o C'oriiUliiuK.— 11 To e^fabUf<h a colony, coloniam dedncere.— i* To promote, aujrere.— 
 I'Dt'liidere.— »4.4 seed, semen.— i^Larj^'itio.—i^Jb affix, attiirere.— i" Tb extort, extorquere. 
 — >» Todisjterm. dispergere.— ""Faticis.— 20 Ridiculus.— «» Fundamentum.— «'^ Fraugere.— 
 >» Pingere.— 24 Doinesticus.— ^* Into prison, in vincula.— "•Elephauius.—^'Ife/'A difficulty 
 ^.J^^■^> 1.'i^ R^prt^ss, coiitiiiSre.— 2" Cum with »\\W].—*l^iium (cum) always stands with ttie 
 eubjuuclive if its predicate is a pluperfect, not referring to repeated action. 
 
256 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 fused to attack' us, we shall enter {introlre) the defiles {anfjm^iiie) of the 
 luountauis— 07. When Cesar had arrived, the whole condition ot things 
 was suddenly chani,-ed.— 68. After we had returned, Brutus came and 
 brouixht thy letter.— 09. Very many enemies jierished in {by) the waves, 
 when they had been thrown {th'ncere) into the river (/// Jtumtn) by our 
 horsemen.— 70. If you had guarded the fords of the river, you would have 
 hindered the enemies from crossing. 
 
 CHAPTER FOURTH. 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 PxVRTrnVE GENITIVE. 
 
 § li \ ' Attributive Adjectives frequently are used without 
 a o-uveniiiitr noun, so that the latter must be understood and 
 S7fpplled, an in English: 77te wise, the j^oor, these, this, others, 
 mifie. They are either absolute or disjunct. An adjective is 
 called AiJSOLUTE, when a governing noun, denoting things or 
 persons in general, must be supplied, as : " The poor^'' instead 
 of " the poor persons ;" this, instead of " this thing, this matter:'' 
 Adjectives of this kind must be considered as real Substantives. 
 An adjective is called disjunct, when a thing or person must be 
 supplied, which Iias been premoushj mentioned, as: ''How 
 tnany prisoners did we make? Tlco tlionsand:'' Here the 
 numeral two thousand is a disjunct adjective, since the gov- 
 erning noun prisofiers must be supplied from the preceding 
 question. 
 
 I. Absolute Adjectives denoting Persons. 
 
 § S^t. In Latin a>)solute Adjectives, denoting persons, are 
 ])laced in the masculi^te gexder; those denoting things in the 
 neuter. The rules on tlie use of these adjectives are different, 
 according as they are Descriptive Adjectives, or Participles, or 
 Form-adjectiv^es. 
 
 § tio«i. Absolute Descriptive adjectives, denoting persons, 
 
 » Aggredi.— ^* A wave, fluctuB. 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADIECTIVES. 
 
 257 
 
 i 
 
 generally stand in the plural, the same as in English, as : docti, 
 the learned; pauperes, the poor; mortui, the dead. They are 
 more rarely used in the singular, and then w^e must render them 
 into English by supplying tlie word 7nan or p>erson, as : a?grotus, 
 a sick man ; liber, a free man. There are, however, certain Latin 
 adjectives which regularly are used with the force of nouns, and 
 often are translated by English nouns, as : amicus, a friend 
 (originally friendly) ; juvenis, a youth (originally young) ; fa- 
 rnilidris, an acquaintance (originally intimate) ; reus, an accused 
 (person) ; par, an equal. 
 
 Bern. 1. Sometimes we render English Nouns by Latin Adjectives in con- 
 nection with vir or homo (in the singular), as: a scholar, vir doctus. 
 
 Rrm. 2. Latin Absolute Adjectives, even when they are translated by 
 English nouns, cannot take Descriptive Adjectives as attributes. Thus the 
 English " a good friemV must not be rendered by amicus bonus, but by ad- 
 modum {valde) amicus ; my best friend not by opt Ijnus amicus, hut by amicissi' 
 mus. Thus " n great sc/uAar^^ cannot be translated by '' nuigaus doctus^'' but 
 by vir admodum doctus; " the greatest scholar" not by maximus doctus^ but 
 by t>ir doctissim us. 
 
 Rem. 3. To those adjectives, which are used with the force of nouns, be- 
 longs the i)lurale tantum majores, in the meaning " ancestors.'''' But it would 
 be l>arbarous to say nuvgni nostri majores^ our great ancestors. The Latin 
 sa}%s : nuijOres nostri, sumini viri. 
 
 § S«>0. Absolute Participles in general follow the rule of 
 
 Descriptive Adjectives, as: Fugientes, the fleeing (persons); 
 
 vulnerdti, the wounded. Present Participles, especially when 
 
 tliey have objects, may be used in both numbers absolutely. 
 
 They frequently must be translated by English relative clauses, 
 
 as : 
 
 Qu^rehs, one that asks, or asked ; pugnanies, those that fight, or fought; 
 Jluvium transeuntes, those that crossed tlie river; Virtutem dmans voluptdtes 
 spernif, one that loves virtue (he who loves virtue, or who loves virtue) 
 spurns pleasures. Dux ab hostium equifibus diti.sipdtos coUegit, the general 
 collected those who were dispersed by the horsemen of the enemies. 
 
 § JJo7. The Latin Absolute Form-adjectives (denoting 
 
 persons) are used in both numbers of the masculine gender. 
 
 But many of them have specific forms for their absolute use, 
 
 accordiui^ to the followini; rules: 
 
 L The indeclinable Form-adjectives quot, tot, totidem, aliquot 
 
 (§ 257), are rarely used absolutely. We may here either add 
 
258 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 tlie word homines or use instead of q not and tot the expressions 
 quam raulti^ tain niulti^ as: 
 
 How many hast thou killed ? Quot homines {or quam ranltos) interfecisti ? 
 
 2. The interro giitive^r^l (§ 243), if used absohitely, is trans- 
 lated by icho, or by which vian (person). ISometimes, but rarely, 
 the form qui is used witli absohite force. For the distinction of 
 quis and qui, see § 243, Keni. 4. Uter, accordino: to its niQan- 
 ing, is used as a disjunct adjective (see g 3G4), and is tlien hke- 
 wise transhited by who, or ichich of the two (see § 243, Kem. 5). 
 
 The i^irtem^^aUiliLi^* always is_chanjred mto q ui, yv hen it 
 has the force of the relat'nx' "who." When tlie relative qui, or 
 any'other relative, stands wiUiout a noun, it must be considered 
 as disjunct, not as absolute, except in the case No. 3. 
 
 3. When tlie demonstrative ad.iectives {hic,(0e'^H;§te^is, 
 idem, ipse) occur Avithout nouns, they must be considered^as 
 d isjunj ^ (§ 3G4), excei)t when they are antecedents of a relative 
 TfauseTas hie qui, ill i qui (but more generally is qui, ei qui), 
 
 which are translated by he who; tlie one who ; those icJto ; 
 idem qui is translated by " the same as,'' as : 
 
 /<?, qifi fm-ff/m acJjurdfiir. He who Ctho one who) is ap^sisted by fortune. Ei {hi, Uli) 
 q%d ritiii dtditi m/d, Tho!?e who are ghcn to vices. 
 
 The Demonstratives hie, ille, is, in this case are frequently 
 omitted, as in Enolish, and then the relative has the force of an 
 Absolute Adjective, as: Qui seinper dolet, deoa accusare videtur. 
 Who always mourns, seems to accuse the gods. 
 
 4. The INDEFINITE DETERMINATIVES aUquis and qnidam, quis- 
 quam, quisque, nemo, when used absolutely, correspond to the 
 Eno:lish expressions some one (i)lural some), any one (plur. any), 
 every one, no one (plur. none), or somebody, anybody, everybody, 
 nobody. Quisquam and nemo are the regular absolute forms 
 instead of the attributive ullus and nullus in the singular, while 
 in the plural idli and nulli are exclusively used {any and 
 none). But in the genitive and ablative singular the classical 
 language always uses nuU'ius and nullo instead of neminis and 
 nemine, and in the ablative singular almost always ullo instead 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT AD.TECTIYES. 
 
 259 
 
 •\^ 
 
 4^ 
 
 of quoquam, sometimes also in the genitive idllus instead of 
 cujusquxim. 
 
 The English other takes the absolute plural others, and (with- 
 out article) is translated by alii, while tJie others is expressed by 
 ceteri or reliqui, 
 
 Bfm. 4. The Enj^lish Indefinite mmehody or anyhody is also expressed by 
 the Interrou^ative qaln^ when it Ims no emphasis, especially after the parti- 
 cles ;?v/w, an, utrum, the conjunctions «^, idai, and tie, and after relatives. 
 Tiie declension of quis in this meaning is irregular in the nominative 
 SING. FEM. and NOM. and accus. pluk. neuter, in which cases it generally 
 takes tli(! form qua (like aUqnis), rarelv qiup. 
 
 Ons. lii-tra 1 of (ifitjid!< or qul'yq'iii/n, ^on\cMme^ quupiam (G. rt/jvspiam, D. o/ipiam. 
 Ace. (/'/I /tij)i(tm) is ii>ed. often with poteiiiial hubjmictivts : Diuerit Jorfasse quittpiufn 
 (|)t'rliapshoiiiei)0(ly iniu'lit f-ay etc.). It mo>tly occurs absolutely (neuter ^//2(///ia//i = s-oiue- 
 Ihin;^), rarely aitnhntively ((/mepia/n, quodinaui), and extremely seldom in ttie plural. 
 
 Rem. 5. Aemo is frequently translated by" not anybody /' which cannot 
 be translated by noji qaisquain ; as : 1 have not seen anybody, Neminem 
 vidi. ^'ei'cr any f//ie = nenio {nullus) unquam, rarely nunquam quiaquam. 
 J^'enio noih — every one ; iwn nemo {nuUuH) = some one. 
 
 Jiem. 6. The English expression " of others^'' meaning belonging to others^ 
 may be expressed by nliorum., but more frequeutlj- is changed into the at- 
 tributive adjective a/iV«z/ ,9 (foreign, strange), as: The books of otlwrs^ Libri 
 aliCni; by the property of others^ bonis aliCnis. 
 
 5. If the adjectives some — others are coordinate to each other, 
 they are translated by alii — alii, or by the singulars alius — alius. 
 The one — the other is expressed by alter — alter, and the ones — 
 the others by alteri — alter i, as : Some icere captured, others hilled^ 
 Alii capti sunt, alii interfecti. The one teas sitting (and) the 
 other standiny. Alter sedebat, alter stabat. 
 
 Coordinations of this kind can never he separated hy coordi- 
 
 natiny conjunctions in Latin, but always are connected asyn- 
 
 detically. 
 
 Rem. 7. The adjective alius frequently occurs in the same sentence with 
 another case of alius, or the adverbs formed from it (allOy aliter, alias^ 
 aliuhdi). This peculiar Latin idiom always must be resolved by a coordi- 
 nation, as: AUl ab aliis interfecti sujif. Some were killed by these, some by 
 those. Alii in alio loco stabant, Some stood in one place, some in another. 
 
 6. The absolute Fossessives 7neus, tuns, suits, etc., in the 
 MASCULINE PLUK AT. dcuotc ])ersons, who are in some close con- 
 nection to the person referred to, as one's friends, soldiers, fol- 
 lowers, or one's family, as : Ilostes a nostris repulsi sunt. The 
 enemies were repulsed by our soldiers. Hex a suis desertus est^ 
 
2G0 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTF^S. 
 
 The kini? was deserted by Ids followers. Omnes mel valent. All 
 
 my fhrrdly is well. 
 
 Bern. 8. The phrase one's enunlrymen or feUoir-rifizcns generally is ex- 
 pressed bV riici {fffi, .*<'//, etc.) hominaH or cUri*, and in reixard to nosier and 
 resifr bv'the civic nouns noxtnltes, resfrrife.% declined like the irregular 
 vowel-stems in as, atis (^ 187, 4). The Latin lan.iruage also forms the IN- 
 TERUociATiVE NOUN cuj(U(, G. cujuUs (what countryman V) according to this 
 •analogy. 
 
 II. Absolute Adjectives, denoting Things. 
 
 § 358. Absolute Adjectives, denoting Things, are placed in 
 the neutral plural, and generally are translated by the addition 
 of "thinr/s^' ov another noun of general import, as '' matte rs,^^ 
 "'affairs,''' etc.; as: Falsa loqaf\ to speak false things. Parva 
 sa^pe maf/nis rectisshne co?ifentntar, Small things often are very 
 fitly compared to great ones. Allena appetere, to covet the 
 things of others. See Uem. 6. 
 
 Rem. 0. The use of absolute adjectives in the neuter Rin.2:ular is confined : 
 1) to philosophical lanixuaire in "reixard to certain abstracts, jus: Subl'tnie et 
 pvJchrnm, the sublime and the beautiful (meaninjr the Men of the sublime, 
 etc)- 2) to certain idioms with ])repositi()ns, and adverbial exi^ressums, as: 
 in pybliro publiclv; de inter/m, anew; /// vn'/m cof/i\ to be collected at one 
 ]dace • ;J) 'to FoiiM-ADJHCTiVEs (^ 859). In the use of the plural or sin.i^ular 
 the Eiv'lish lan<,niaii:e, on the whole, conforms to the Latin usacre, except 
 tha^ where the plural is used, the addition of a noun of ireneral import al- 
 wavs i^ reciuired in Eni^Hish. But sometimes P:n,irlish siui^ulars are expressed 
 bv Latin plurals, as: }fnlfa, much (many thin-s), while the Sinirular ;/^^/^- 
 tiini i^ used as a quantitative adperb or in c»mnection with (Tcnitives, ^ 264. 
 So omnia (more rarely oni?ie\ every thini;- ; qu(F, what (which things). 
 
 Bern 10 The T>atin absolute demonstratives {hoc, illiid, istud, id, idem., 
 ips,im,'iini\ their Plurals), denotiui? Thin-s, are used as antececlents of rel- 
 ative clauses the same as those denotinu: Persons (^ :J.)T, :}), as id quod, that 
 which (W/r/^ relat.) ; en 9'/^, those things which {ithat, relat.). We may 
 also here omit the demonstratives, as : Id quod (or qnod alone) tibi dixi, 
 terum est That which {or what) I have told thee, is true. Ea qmv {ilia qum 
 or qiu^ aione) audixtl falsa sunt, Those things which thou hast heard are 
 false, or What thou hast heard is false. 
 
 g »59. The Form-adjectives, composed with the interroga- 
 tive <ii(is, take neuter forms in quid (not quod), if used abso- 
 lutely," as : quid (not quod), what (neuter iiiterrog.) ; aUqukl 
 (not allquod), something; quiddam, something; quicquaiu (inst. 
 ofquidquam), anything; quldque {quldvls), everything. 
 
 Bern. 11. Quid is used as an indefinite adjective instead of aliquid or 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND riSJTNCT ADJECTI^S. 
 
 261 
 
 qnicqvnm {somethinrj or anything) in the same way as qms instead oi aliquis 
 and quisquam (Reni. 4), as: si quid .sc^^>,.if 1 know anything. 
 
 Bern. 12. 37/<i7, nothinir, is consi dered as neut er of nenw. iViiV,! «7 frequently 
 is translated by not anj/thin^^^^rmi-h never can "be rendered hv non quic- 
 quam : He did not say anything, niliil dixit. Never anything =: nihil unquam, 
 rarely nunquani quicqu'am. Nihil non, everything; nonnihil, someihing. 
 
 Be7n. 13. The plural qumlam (certain things, something) is used nearly 
 in the same meaning as aliquid, whose plural tdiqua seldom is used abso- 
 lutely. Quidquaui, quidque and nihil form no Plurals. Aliud and alia 
 (other thinirs, another thing), reliquuni and reliqwi (the rest), are used in 
 both numbers. Cetera (the other tilings, the rest) is a plurale tantum. 
 Utrunique, both (both things), used in the singular, is properly a disjunct 
 The demonstratives {hoc, illud, id, idem) are used in both numbers, without 
 ditterence in signitication {hoc or hoic, this or these things; idem ov eadem, 
 the same or the same things). 
 
 Bern. 14. The numerals, except unum (one, one thing), solum, alone (the 
 only thinu:), totum (the whole, the whole thing) are used in the plural only, 
 as niulta,'\\\\\Q\\, many things; j>/?/m, more, more things; )nmca,i^\\ things, 
 a little; omnia, everything, all things. The indecliuables qm)t, etc., can- 
 not be used absolutely, being replaced by quam multa, how many things? 
 tarn multa, so many things. The quantitatives are used in the singular 
 onlv. These latter alwa/s mean the amount of something, and when used 
 absoiulelv they properlv denote the amount of Proi*ekty in general, as: 
 Quantum habetis, hcnv iiiuch (property) have you? Plus quam Gajns, more 
 (proi)erty) than Gajus. But they frequently mean the amount of Things in 
 GKNEKAL, and then their usage very little ditfers from that of the Absolute 
 Kumerals. Thus the sentence: I'antum aud'ivit quantum voluit ditfei-s veiy 
 little from the sentence: Tarn multa audlvit quam voluit (he heard as much 
 as he wished). 
 
 Bem. 15. Tlie neuter plural of the absolute Possessives {mm, tua, ma, 
 nostra, vestra) mean either one's property or ones (own) affairs, as: 
 Omnia mea mecum porto, 1 carry all my property with me. Tua magis ad 
 me pertinire videntur quam mea, Thy iilfairs seem to concern me more than 
 my own. 
 
 § :{60. The Absolute Xeuter Adjectives have a peculiar de- 
 clension. Thev cannot be used in the Gexitive, Dative, or 
 Aiji.ative, if a doubt Avould arise, wdictlirer Persons or Things 
 are me^int, since neuters and masculines in these-cases have the 
 same forms. The rule is, therefore, that absolute adjectives in 
 the GENITIVE, DATIVE, and ABLATIVE cascs always mean persons, 
 uidess the connection clearly shows, that things must be meant. 
 The absolute adjectives, denoting things in the mentioned cases 
 always take the noun res as the governing word, and are conse- 
 quently placed in the Feminine Gender, as : Nom. Falsa (res 
 iaXi^iR), false thlnfjs ; Gen. Kerum falsarum (;iO^ falsorum alone), 
 of false things; Dat. and Abl. Rebus falsis j Ace. Falsa (res 
 
262 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 falsa^). — X. hoc, this ; G. hujus viA.of this ;J).\\\\\c rei, to this, 
 etc. Those adji^ctives, wliicli liavo peculiar absolute forms, 
 take their attributive forms in these cases, as : 
 
 N. Qiiidqnam, anyffdnfi. 
 G. ullliii* rei, of anyfhinrf. 
 I), ulli rei, to uinjUiiiuj. 
 
 A. qiiidqnam, ainjfhl'if/. 
 A. «ilia re. by ainjtkinq. 
 
 N. Nihil, 
 (J. iiulllus rei, 
 D. iiiillT rei, 
 A. niliil. 
 A. nulljl re. 
 
 not king, 
 o/ nothing, 
 to iiotUitKj. 
 
 luttlniiq. 
 by H')thing. 
 
 Pm:k. Vila, any thing's ; niilln, no things ; (icn. iillilnim rermn. etc. 
 
 f^" Xihil has a colliteral foriii tnliilutn with retruhtr iiiJlectioii {G. niliUi etc.), which 
 is used 1) in the meaiiiiiLr ol'a ssuhsfautive (nothiiiL'' = a nt-Mo itf /lof/iitig/i&s-) innst iiMially 
 after prepositions : In nih'Unin co/ir&rti, to he turned lonothinir: rx nihiloflft'i, U^ be 
 createtl from nutliini;;. i) As sj'Mi. of value (iiibili tS'ie. to be worili uoiliing), see P. II, |). 
 272, 1. ;i) As al)l. of dinVrence (nihilo ningu — no more). 
 
 Rein. 16. The rule § 3r»(» applies also to the neuter pronoun id (itK when it refer? to the 
 fjeneral ideaof 'thini,'' (G. (^)ii.-< ni, of it etc.). IJiit in cert.ain <'oiiveiitionil connections 
 the ni-iiftr forms are ahsultitely used, chiefly the ahl. t-o {<n (fitoil. l>y the f ict that). So eo 
 as abl. of dill't-rence, before compiratives : Ko niiVjU (jnod. the more so l)ecause. 
 
 /?«-m. 17. The declinable (luantitative adjectivei» (/ndntuni. titntutn. innltuin. (lUqnan- 
 tntn (in the singular) do not take the forms with /rx, but are used absolutely in the 
 neuter, a cert;iiii irramiu.itical office lu-itii,' assi_Mied to each case (e.Ncept the dative). In 
 the «reii. tliey occur a-' ohjrcts of price and valiur ( F*. II. p. 070) : (^unnt'i hoc < nii<ti / At 
 what price did you buy this. Ttn^ ace. occurs as ol)ject of intensity (I*. II, p. 2G1, 3j, aud 
 Uie abi. as abl. of dillerence (tanto mtlius, fo much the belter;, see ^ :ill. 
 
 III. Combination of Absolute Adjectives. 
 
 § 361. No absohite descriptive adjective can take anotlier 
 descriptive adjective as attri])ute. Tims " innanierdhle (jreat 
 thiiKjs*'' cannot" be transhited by mafjna innumerah'dia ; ^'' exed- 
 lent scholars''* not by ef/re(/ll docti j ^'"renowned deeds'''^ not by 
 pnf^dara gesta^ the words doctiis and (jestam (deed) being Abso- 
 lute Participles of docere and (/erere. 
 
 Rem. 18. The adjective attributes of absohite Participles must be chanc^ed 
 into the corresponding Adverbs {/lofito (f/rcf/ic. doctns^ pnidarc, r/csfa). Other 
 adjeetives are counected by cooruination, as )n,'Ujn<i et innniiierahilia. 
 
 § 30^2. Put absolute Foiim-ad.tectives may take Descri|)tive 
 Adjectives as attributes, es])eciallv when the former l)elon<j: to 
 the indefinite or interrogative class. Other Form-adjectives 
 generally refuse this connection; as: Om?iia jircecldra nfrissfjna 
 sujtt, all excellent thinLjs are exceed inLily rai'c. Bo/ii onniea 
 consenthoit^ all good men consent. Put not: III bonl, these 
 good men; duo prceddra^ two excellent things. 
 
 Piem. 11), Since Form-adjectives are used absohitely in tlic Siuc^ular also, 
 it follows, tliat eomblitatioiis ot" iiuletiiute Forni-aojectives with Descriptive 
 Adje(;tives in tlie singular do not require the addition of governing nouns 
 of general import, as: ^i^nrotxH qnidam,^o\\\{i sick person; nerru) bonus, 
 no good man ; niortdle rdhil, nothing mortal ; qiiiGis sanu», every sane man. 
 
 ?. 
 
 t 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 2G3 
 
 Jiem. 20. The indefinite adjeetive quUqne rarely occurs except in con- 
 neciion with certain form-adjectives, reflexive pronouns, or superlatives 
 and ordinal munerals. The Engl. ' every one ', ' each ', uidess it is in one 
 of these connections, is not expressed by qnuque, but by omne» (every- 
 thing = oiiiida) nemo non, qulvis, unusquUque {pro se qidsque, see Obs.). 
 
 Ors. Qi/inf/i/e, wiiicb in the historian? eotnetimei» takes its predicate in the plural, oc- 
 curs : 1) Witli sui'Ei!L.\TiVEs. {(i) in the nieaiiiiij,' 'every ' with a positive: EpicureO'^ doc- 
 tixsimii!* qtiiii'jne cmtemnif. Every sr^liolar despises the E))!ciireans. Cic. Tnsc. 1,21. (b) 
 In the nj< anin<; 'even', 'the very ' with superl.: PotenfissiniUii qn'ittqne. even the nio(*t 
 power hil. Li v. 3S, 50. Fortl^mnua qiiUqiie pugnare desierat ; The very bravest had ceased 
 
 to Iit,'lit. Liv. 24. 1.5.— 2) With ordinals: Dec'unus quuque (every tenth ni.m) ad sup pit 
 ciuiulictl. Liv. 2, ;.!>. Ttrtio q-ioque anno, every third year. Vrinio quo'jue tt-mpore. as sot)i 
 as pits>ihle. So (piotns qiti>t<{t/e (\). 1S2, Hi).— ;3) In connection witii (almost always ini 
 m»>(liaiely after) the keflexives ^ibi. .sv, and the posse-sive i>ia/g : Ipse se qnUque diligif, 
 gnod )>er se nfA'p/hque earns est {YjVt'ry one Wkeii himself etc.). Cic. Am. '21.— Sua coj us- 
 que aniinai'tis natftra est ; Every livin<; heinsr has its own nature. Cic. Fin. 5, 9.— Pro se 
 ^^a.v7//f(literailv 'each for himself ") often has the meaning 'every one'; Pro se quis- 
 que nxinnrit^r freuvint; Every one grumbled with threats. Liv. 2, 6.— 4) In helativb 
 clauses by incorporation, as : Detendat quod quisque sen-it. Let every one defend what 
 he believes. Cic. Tnsc. 4,4. (sec P. II. p. »«).— .*>) In intekuogative clau^es introduced 
 bv inteiroirative adjectives or adverbs: 11 luleiit (pd^que. nou quo quisque inconwtodo 
 af.rfu-i sit. p/ufdi'-anduni tst (the manner how every one has borne hn affliction, not by 
 wiial MtUiclion he is aliected) Cic Tusc. :i. :W.— (i) In comi'auative clauses with -yf quis- 
 qur\ !ind in abl)ri'viated comparative constructions with two superlatives P. II. p. 751.— 
 7) In TKMi'ouAL clauses with uf quisque : Ut quisque hostem o<:cid< rat (as soon as any one 
 had killed an enemv). abscindendo terWat tempus. Liv. 24, 15.— s) Sometimes in connec- 
 tion with //nidus or qenus ,is (pinlitative g.-nitive : Cujusque generis uota. the character of 
 each class. Cic. Orat. 2i. "lA.— 5M Very rarely qui.^q>/e occur- in other connections than the 
 above, as for inst.: Quisque eorum (each of these) //lulia disputant. Cic. Alt. 4, 2, 4. 
 
 § :{6:{. Absolute Form-adjectivks very frequently take 
 OTHER FoRM-ADJECTivES as attributes, especially in the follow- 
 ing combinations and arrangements : /// omnes, omnes illi (all 
 these, all those) ; ormtia hwc, mnnla ilia (all these, those things) ; 
 omnia mea (all my property) ; alia qucedani (some other things) ; 
 alll ijuidam^ some others; alll multl, many others; alia midta, 
 many other things ; alia omnia, all other things ; ^9«wci quidam, 
 some few; jxnica qiuedam, some few things, some few remarks; 
 tale quls or quldam, some such man ; tale quid or allquld, some 
 such thing ; talla qnadam, some such things ; 9ilhll tale, no 
 such thing; tale qulcquam, any such thing. Instead of tails 
 the phrase ejusmodl (written in one word) is veiy frequently 
 used, as: NlhU ejusmodl, no such thing, nothing of that kind; 
 ejusmodl quid, some such thing, etc. 
 
 Ueni. 21. The English combinations with " el^r are expressed by the 
 . ditfen-nt forms o^ allux^ as: Qnin alia !i, who else; qdid aliad.wh'di else; 
 alius (lUqnis or (divs quls, somebody else ; 'altud quid, something else; alius 
 quisqu(un, anv one else ; aliud quicquam, anything else ; qxUm alius, eveiy 
 one else ; quidris aliud, every Jiiug else ; alius nemo, nobody else ; aUud 
 nihil, nothing else. 
 
 V 
 
 '^.. 
 
2CA 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTITES. 
 
 I7em.22. When those ronibinations refer to* things in creiierar, tlieir 
 genitives, datives, and ablatives, according to ^ 360, sliould he tbrnied by 
 the addition of res, n^: Jif/ nothiiir} else, nullilalia re : to something else, alii eui 
 rei; of what else,cu]\i?> alius rei ; by nothing of that kind, nulla ejusniodi re, 
 
 IV. Disjunct Adjectives. 
 
 § 304. Disjunct Adjectives are tlioso, whose governing 
 nouns are supplied from a preceding sentence or chiuse. Tliey 
 diiier from tlie Absolute Adjectives in two points : 1) The nouns 
 to be supplied, are not only of goieral import, as in the case of 
 Absolute Adjectives, but nouns of every possible kind ; they 
 consequently may be used in all nund)ers and genders, while 
 absolute adjectives in regard to number are subject to certain 
 restrictions, and never can be placed in the feminine gender ; 
 2) Those adjectives, which, when used absolutely, take specific 
 forms, can never take these forms wlien they are merely d'tsjunct ; 
 as : Daho tibi hoc rnedicanientdm^ si quod (not quid) opus erlt^ 
 I shall give you this remedy, if any will be necessary. Rela- 
 tives therefore never can take the form quid in the neuter, since 
 they always must be considered as disjuncts. 
 
 § «SO*!. Disjunct Adjectives assume the gender, case, and 
 number of those nouns, which must be supplied as their govern- 
 ing nouns. In English we frequently employ liere the Avord one 
 in place of the noun understood, which cannot he iniitated in 
 Latin. The English })OSsessives, if disjunct, take the forms 
 mine^ tJiine^ ours^ yo7irs^ theirs^ which are translated by tlie com- 
 mon Latin forms meus^ tiius, etc. Sometimes the governing 
 noun is repeated in English, which generally is not the case in 
 Latin ; as : 
 
 Hither Oaul iras given to Sempronin», and thither Gaul to Marcellus^ Gallia 
 citerior Sempronio data est, ulterior ]Marcell(). — Whik Gajus refused a de- 
 served gift, Sjns accepted an u/ideserved one. Cum Gajus nierituni donuni 
 reeusaret, Sejus iinnierituni aceD})it. — Accipe hanc patennn, ego alteratn 
 tcrtehfj, Take this vessel, I shall keep the other. — Concordia par r^B res eres- 
 cunt, discordid maximcE sape dil(d)untur, By concord small st^ites increase, 
 by discord the «rreatest often are destroyed. — Vos restrani patriani l<iu(kltis^ 
 nos nostrain. You i)raise your country, and we ours. 
 
 Rem. 28. The Disjunct DcMuonstratives hie and iUe, generally cannot be 
 translated literally. They frequently are thus used, in order to connect 
 two periods with each other, referring to one of the nouns contained in thu 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 265 
 
 J 
 
 last sentence. Hie refers then to the last noun, and ilk to one of the more 
 remote substantives. The lileral translation of hie would then be ''this 
 one;' and that of ilk " that one." But we c:enerally translate hie in this 
 connect i<m by an emphatic " Ae" or by ''the leitter f' ille hy " the former '' 
 esi)ecially when both hie and ilk are employed in the same sentence. ' 
 Ca'sar Lahiinum—jussit. Hie duas kgidnes fluviinn traduxit ; Cc'esar di- 
 rected Labienus to The latter (or he; literallv : this one) led two ledons 
 
 oyer the river.— Z^mj; Lucilium castra tenere, Labienufn hostU aggredi jussit. 
 JIic duas kgWines in hostw duxit ; ille cnm dvdhus reUquis castra occupdvit • 
 The Keneial directed Lucilius to hold the camp, and La])i5nus to attack 
 the enemies. The latter (this one) led two leirions against the enemies • the 
 lormer occupied the camp with the two remaining ones. 
 
 Rem. 24. Sometimes hie, or another demonstrative (especially u ea id) 
 refers to a whole preceding sentence or clause. The demonstratives 'are 
 then i)laced m the Neuter ISingulak {Iwc, id, this, it), as : Whik the army 
 teas crossing the river, the enemies, tcho had seen this (it), threw their missiks 
 vpon them, Dum exercitus fluvium transit, hostes, qui hoc (id) viderant tela 
 m COS conjecerunt. ' 
 
 § 360. Disjunct Interrogatives, Demonstratives, and Rela- 
 tives liecpiently are used as subjects of predicative nouns. Such 
 aubjects must agree with their predicate nouns in number, gender, 
 and case, reversing for this combination the general rule of 
 agreement (§ 03, 2), as: 
 
 QiKT (not quid) tristitiee turn causa est? What is the cause of thv sadness 9 
 — What is the foundation of this repuhlicf what are its laws? *Quod {not 
 quid) est reipublicae hujus fundamentum ? quae (t?/^^ quid) sunt ejus leces*-'— 
 This is the source of all excellent things, Hie est omnium rerum prachu-arum 
 Ions.— 77//.^ point, which is the base of my speech, etc., Hie locus, quod oru- 
 tionis meic tundamentum est. 
 
 Rem. 25. AN'hen by the interrogative " ithaf we ask for a definition of a 
 person or thing (in the masculine or feminine), we translate it by quid, not 
 by qu IS or qua; as : Wh(U is " friend r' (meaning " what is the definition of 
 Iriend V ), quid {not quis) est amicus ':* What does the word rashness uiean? 
 quid (not qua^) est temeritas V 
 
 § :{67. Relative Adjectives rarely are used iu connection 
 with their governing nouns, but nearly always as disjwicts. But 
 they always, according to rule § 365, must be treated as if the 
 noun to which they refer (their antecedent) were expressly em- 
 ployed as governing word. Thus in the following sentence: 
 " The picture, ichich I gave to Gajus, has been lost, tabula, quain 
 Gajo dedi, amissa est," the relative takes the accusative singular 
 feminine, because it must be treated in the same manner as if 
 the y\o\\\ picture {tabula) was repeated as governing noun of the 
 
266 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 relative: ^^ the pieture, which 2^lcture I r/ave, tabula, qnam tal>u- 
 lam dedi." 
 
 Jicm. 20. The ancient aulhoi-s indeed sometimes use the r«'lative in tliis 
 primary way, especially Ca;sar, as: I5ell. Gall. I, 6. Onniihm rebus coinpara- 
 iis dum cJicunt, qua die — ainnes conveu'ireut, After all tliinirs had been ob- 
 tained, thev appoint a day, on which day they should all assemble. 
 
 ^Ve see Vrom tiiis, that ihe llelative Adjective does not always stand in 
 tlie same case as its antecedent, but that the case of the rehilive depends 
 on the case of its governing noun, as if it were expressed. 
 
 § 368. Hence we have the following rule in regard to the 
 agreement of llelative Adjectives: They aijree in monhcr ami 
 ge)aler icith their antecedent^ but assume that case, which the 
 antecedent would have, if it were used in place of the relative. 
 For exceptions to this rule see P. II, p. 524, 7i. 10. 
 
 § «109. When the Antecedent of a Relative is either itself a 
 Disjunct FoiiM-ADjECTiVE {hie, ilk,, is, idem, tantus, talis), or 
 has a Form-adjective as attribute, the class of the relative must 
 a<^ree with the class of its antecedent or the attribute of the 
 latter. Tlius Determinative Antecedents must be followed by 
 Deter mi)i at ive\\i}\iii\\Qh {hie, ille, is, idem are followed by qui) ; 
 Quantitative Antecedents are followx'd by Qua/ttitative Rela- 
 tives {fantus is followed by quantum) ; Numeral Antecedents are 
 followed by Numeral Relatives {tot is followHMl by quot) ; (Quali- 
 tative antecedents re«iuire a Qmditative relative {t<dis, qualis), 
 Tliese are called syndetic antecedents (P. II, p. 492, 15 ; j). 490, 4). 
 
 Hem. 27. In Enixlish we have the Relatives who^ which, that, as. The 
 rules for their emi)loyment are ditferent from the Latin rules. The Engli-<h 
 relative '' whaf^ (to be distinguished from the interrogative) contains and 
 implies its own antecedent ; it stands instead of that trhich. It is eithei 
 translated by quod or by qu(e. ISee liejti. 28. 
 
 Eeui. 28. The Latin possessives have no relative form, and are connected 
 "with the determinative relative qui. Among the numerals, oidy t*'i has a 
 corresponding relative; the others likewise take the determinative relative 
 qui {tnulti, j^aud., etc., qui). Among the Latin demonstrativfs the deter- 
 minative IX, more fre(iuently than Hie and iste, is used as antecedent of qui, 
 in order to express tiie Englisli denu)nstrative fhut, as: Mi/ brother has re- 
 ceived that h'tfer, which lie had ej'pect<d, Frater mens eas litteras, quas e.xpec- 
 taverat, accCpit. The Latin Antecedent eas, and the English Antecedent 
 that, may both be omitted, and we have then in English thn-e ways of ex- 
 pressing the sentence. We either say: ''the Utter, /rhich he e.v]Hrted,'' or 
 *' what letter he ewpecfed,'' or '"the letter he expected.''' Any of the three lorms 
 of the English sentence is translated iu tlie same way iu Latin {litteras quas 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 267 
 
 exspertarernt, or: quas eTspectarernt litteras). An omission of the Relative, 
 as in Enulish, is inadmissible in Latin. 
 
 When the Latin Antecedent is Absolute in the Neuter {id or ea), it gener- 
 alli/ is omitted, and the English " thai which'' is changed into " w/iat" (see 
 Rem. 10). 
 
 Pern 20 As for thr difforont da-offifi of relative?, the rnles of ajrreement in Number, 
 Case, and "cJendcr arc in all of them the same as for the relative qui (^ 'M)S). and the be^nn- 
 ncr ()U"lit to be especially careful, not to confound the ditierent clai^Kes, since the Enj^lish 
 )an"-uai}e knows none of the Latin distinctions. Thus /he mme a.<> corresponds to the 
 Latin Tdi/n (jui : .«irh a<, to f(i/i'< qualU ; so nvich a<. to tantus quanft/s; xo many o.s\ to 
 Tof qi/ot Nor must the bcirinner confound the Ki-lative that with the Demonstrative that.., 
 but trnii.'ilate the Eii'dish liekttire, even when it is omitted, as : All I hare told you in true. 
 Omnia, (pnc til)i di.M, vera sunt. — T/i« imn that told you that, is insane, Uomo qui tibi id 
 (hoc) tlixit, iusipit. 
 
 l^ For special Rules regarding the Relatives, see Book VL (Relative 
 Clauses). 
 
 Y. Partitive Genitive. 
 
 § 370. Absolute Adjectives frequently are connected with 
 other Absolute or Disjunct Adjectives in the form of tlie Pauti- 
 TivK Oknitive. 
 
 The Partitive Genitive forms with its governing substantive 
 an ATrKiniTiVE I^huase, in which the governing word stands 
 to its attribute in the relation of the ^)6rr^ to tlie whole, as: Two 
 pounds (f silver, duo pondo argenti; the bravest of the soldiers, 
 fortissimi militum. Attributive phrases containing a Partitive 
 Genitive are called Partitive Phrases. 
 
 § ;I71. The Partitive Phrases are either: 
 
 1) Quantitative, answering to the question, how much? as: 
 
 Multum auri, much (of) gold. 
 
 2) or Numeral, answering to the c[\\Q^t\ox\, how ma7iy ? as: 
 
 Dauci eoriim, few of them. 
 In the former the governing word is an absolute Form-adjec- 
 tive in the neuter singular, and the dependent word a quan- 
 titative NOUN in the singular. In the latter the governing 
 word is a disjunct Form-adjective in the Plural of any gen- 
 der, and the dependent w^ord a Substantive in the Plural. 
 
 ]>ut the lanouaire has extended both of these forms, and ap- 
 plies the QUANTITATIVE fomi to th^ question what? {quid novi, 
 wiiat [of] news? nihil novi, aliquid novi, hoc novi, nothing 
 new, something new, this [of] news) ; and the numeral form to 
 
268 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTI\T:S. 
 
 the question ichich ? (qnis eontm^ wliich of them? nterque ednmi^ 
 botli of" them; sapient Issiini Jiomlmim^ the wisest of men.) 
 
 § ti7^. The QUANTITATIVE fomi of tlie Partitive Phrase in 
 its oriufinal and j)rimary ap})lic'ation lias been considered § 204. 
 Tliis form is applied not only to the QnanttUUlve., but also to 
 those Determinative Form-adjectives which have a similar mean- 
 ing, as : 1) 5'?^?V^, botli interrogative xmd indefinite ; quid tenipo- 
 ris^ instead of quod tempus^ what time? si quid ircB hahes^ in- 
 stead of si quam inon Jiahes (if thou hast any anger) ; 2) ali- 
 quid^ as aliquid patientiiv^ instead of aliqua patientia (some 
 patience) ; 3) quiequam^ as quirquajn bdtdris^ instead of idlus 
 labor, any w^ork; 4) the Determinatives /loc and id, as /loc or 
 id laboris, instead of hie or is labor, that work ; 5) the Relativo 
 quod, as qiiod reliqui fuit, instead oi quod reliquum fuit, wliat 
 was left. 
 
 Hem. 30. We notice here the pln'asea: id tcmporis, instead of eo tempore^ 
 ut that time , id cetdlis, instead of ed (Bfdte, in that asj^e. Livy, tlie poets, 
 and later authors, have nppHed this form to other, even descriptive adjec- 
 tives, as: e.vicjaum cdinpi, instead of exigua cdinpi pars, a small part of the 
 field; nltiiiiuiti inopi(t>, the last degree of poverty. Thus later writers use 
 ahsolute wqwXgy plunds. In order to desiLcnate real parts or even qualitiei< of 
 thinu^s, as: plana urbin^ the level ;m/'^»» of the city; uUima (Jrientia, the far- 
 thest parts of the Orient; incerta belli, the uncertainties (chances) of war. 
 
 Rem. 31. The Parts (divisions) of Time and Spack in classical lan;2:uai:^e 
 are not expressed by Partitive Phrases, but by Attribntice Adject ice Phrases. 
 Thus ''tlie highed part of tJie iiKnintaiii' is not expressed by siininiuiii num- 
 its, but by Hunimus motin (literally, the highettt iiwuntain) ; the middle part of 
 the city, media mbs {not medium urbis); extremo anno, in the last j>art of 
 the year; vere priino, in the beginninir (tirst part) of si)riniz:; di/nidiu/a iter 
 (seldom itineria), the half-way. Tlie adjectives sul)ject to tins construction 
 are the indetinite ordinals (gi 201) and the detinite ordinal primus. 
 
 § *t7St. The Quantitative form of the Partitive Phrase, in 
 regard to tlie dependent word, is applied to absolute neuter 
 DESOKIPTIVE ADJECTIVES, wliicli, according to the analogy of the 
 Quantitative nouns, are placed in the genitive singular. 
 I'his construction is expressed by English ordinary attrihntive 
 phrases ; as : nihil boni, nothing good, no good thing ; aliquid 
 novi, sometliing new ; nndtwn rmdi, much evil, lint this form 
 is confined to the movable adjectives, wdiile adjectives of coni'- 
 nioii gender must agree in case with their governing absolute 
 
 I 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 2G9 
 
 adjectives (§362, Rem. 19), as: nihil mortale (not mortalis), 
 
 nothing mortal. 
 
 r^m 3'> Here belong- the Latin idioms nihil mild reliqui est, nothinj^ is 
 lefflo nf;; Mapa>4 %d,en, I do not care for it (literally: I consider it as 
 no weighed [that is, important] tlnng). 
 
 Bern 3rj The rule, i^iven for quantitative adjectives (§ 264), that the 
 panulve construction' Sm not take place, if ^ ^-^^V^^^"^ ^^.^'^ 
 •mv Other case than the nominative or accusative, holds good in d\\ cases 
 XieAb^^u^e Neuter Adjectives in the ISingular are employed as govern- 
 b/. soVdH^^^^^^^ genitives. Thus we cannot say ahem mm, to sonie- 
 
 thbig new, but must tiiploy here a common attributive phrase with res 
 {nociB alicai rei). 
 
 ? »74 In the Numeral Partitive Phrase the governing 
 words are Disjunct Numeral Adjectives, referring to a Plural 
 noun in a precedin- sentence, whose number they either deter- 
 mine or indicate. This noun of reference is indicated by the 
 Partitive Genitive, dependent on them, which therefore must be 
 a Pronoun or a Determinative Adjective, as : How many of 
 them? quammultieorum; Some o/ z*^, quidam nostrum; lew 
 ofichich, quorum pauci. 
 
 qinpp this Partitive Genitive represents the nonn, to which the governing 
 dis^ net die^^^^^^ it must be in the same gender w th it; and since 
 
 cljspmct '\^1^^ 3\*^^'; ,^; ' ij, ..^.^aer with the noun to which they reter, 
 ^^In^ it^ av^sakf^^/"/^^^^^^ <^(jree in gender with tMr parti^ 
 
 L v'il.v!."!:? as .^;^t edrui or mudti eOrum, according as mum reters to 
 a niascuUiie or feiu'mine noun. 
 
 8 'Sr.-} Tlie form of the Numeral Partitive Phrase has been 
 exteiuled to the question qni, which ? so that Determinate 
 Aaioctives mav be used as the governing words of the phrase 
 as: qaidmn eorum, some of them; neuter eorum, neither of 
 them; alter eorum, the other of them; qimque eorrcm, each of 
 them ; ^,emo eorwn, none of tl>em. It lias been also extended 
 to superlatives, as : sapientlsshmis eorum, the wisest of them ; 
 «w>nM»/<')-<'A'''«', the bravest of whom. . . „, 
 
 Sometimes also the form of the Numeral Partitive Phrase is 
 applied to common attributive phrases, having numeral adjec- 
 tiA-s as attributes. Thus, instead of saying plerTque milUes we 
 may say plerjque miUtum, most of the soldiers ; instead of qu* 
 milites, we may say qui militum. 
 
270 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTH'ES. 
 
 Rem. 84. Plural nouns as partitive genitives cannot be employed with 
 liter, utcrque, neuter, it nun, oniuea, and «renerally not ■with mnlti and the 
 otli("r dctinite nnnierals. llere the common attributive phrase must be 
 used, as ntni Jiliii, wol utni fUulru in ; uterqne J^linx^woX vtcnjue jiliurnm ; 
 omueH milites, not oimteH luiUtvtn. Uiuis is construed with tlie preposition 
 ex or de. The construction with ex or de frequently is api)Hed to the other 
 definite numerals, and to multi and nomadli. See ^ 443. 
 
 Item. 35. When (dii — (dii, alter — alter are coordinate (§ 357, No. 5), they 
 cannot be connected with Xouns as Partitive Genitives, as in EngUsh, but 
 assume the form of Appositions to their nouns of reference, as: 
 
 S(ynie of the soldiers icere captured, others Killed, ^lilites ahi capti, alii in- 
 terfeeti sunt (literally : the soldiers, some were killed, others, etc.) 
 
 Tlie one of the female captires crossed the river by a Ixmt, the other by aford^ 
 Captlvai tiuvium, altera lintre, altera vado transiit (literally: The cap- 
 tivex^ the one by a boat, the other by a ford, crossed the ricer). 
 
 § «ITO. The Personal Pronouns of the iirst and second 
 persons in tlie Plural as Partitive Genitives assume the forms 
 tiostrton and vestni?n^ instead of 9wsfri and vestri, as: Nemo 
 nostrum^ none of us; quis vestrum^ wbich of you? The pronoun 
 of the tliird person sui never is used as Partitive Genitive, and 
 we must use ipsonan instead of it, as: 77iei/ said^ that many of 
 them had j^erished (multos ipsorum, not sui). But when is, ea, 
 id can be used as ])ronoun of the third person (§ 238), the parti- 
 tive genitive *' oftJienC is expressed by eorum or eCiruni, 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Absot/i:te Ad.tectives denoting Persons. — 1. Indignnm est a pari 
 vinci aut superiore, (sed) indi>j:nius ab infcriorc atipie hihiiilidre. — 3. Mortem 
 timens beatus esse necpiit. — 3. Capitis* damnatiis testamentum" facere legi- 
 bus prohibotur. — 4. Gajus, quum''. a sapientibus despiceretur, a stultis lau- 
 diitus est. — 5. Omnes boni hujus viri mortem lugent [mourn for). — (J. B(ma 
 aliPna appetentes* leges divlnas violant. — 7. Ingens [enormous) fugientium 
 multitudo inseciuentium^ telis interfecta est. — 8. Inhumilta [uidmritd) iuter- 
 fectorum corpora aOrem intiuiuavrTunt." — 1). Onmes nu'i jjrudontiam tuain 
 admiriiti sunt. — 10. ()i)portunus' Bruti adventus [arriral) et tibi ct tuis per- 
 gnltus fuisse vidftur. — 11. Ciiesar locorum angustiis" suis auxilium ferre 
 l)r()hil)itus est. — r.i. Hac PompDji victoriil nostrorum animi [courage) reno- 
 vilti sunt. — 13. ^lilitcs tautam Marii diligcntiam [apitUcation) suis re- 
 nuntiahant." — 14. Kosdem vincere et reconciliare ditlicile est. — 15. Quia 
 Ilaunibalis victor fuity — !(>. Cujus negligeutiiT copitc nostne repulstc sunt? 
 — 17. Va\\ soli obedire debPmus? — 18. Quern tilii tui exspectant V — 10. A 
 quo muudus universus rt'giturV — 20. (Quorum auxilio (rajus luoc pcrfc^eit? — 
 21. Quibus Gajus hoc secrCtum prodiditV — 22. Quos Verres avaritiS sua 
 
 > Caput, here: capital crime.— "Will.— «While.— * Appe/ere, to covet.—» Insequi. to pnr- 
 »ne.—* I/if/i/hitlre. to infest. mk-vX.—"^ Opixjituuus, opportune, timely.— * Z,<>C(/;<//n amjus- 
 We, impracticable roails.— »To report 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 271 
 
 six.liilvit et aquibus idem Yerres accusatus est?— 23. Multi bona aliGna ap- 
 petunt sed pauci vi (ea) arripiunt^ et tenent (/w;)).-24. Multonun scelera 
 a Dfo solo puniuntur.— 25. Platdnis philosophia a paucissimis intelligivi- 
 tlPtur — '>() Quorumdam opiniones tam obscur» sunt, ut nemini elucuiari 
 possint —27 Omnium consensus^* ijrave hujus rei [point) argumentum esse 
 vidotur —28 Alii arma abjieientes ell'ugiunt, alii fortiter pugnantes ab hos- 
 tibus intertieiuntur; rcliqu'i, lintils nacti, lihenum transeunt— 29. Qui nihil 
 a-unt turpiter vivunt.— 30. Eis, qui merita* sua modeste celare student, 
 pTus laudis tribuere» solCmus, quam ipsi expectare possimt.— ol bi quis 
 tbrtunam suam experiri velit, amplissima ei occasio dabitur.-32. bi qui 
 domum {homi) redire voluerint (^ 347) veniam eis libentissime dabo. 
 
 1 (^reet in (bv) mv name all thy family.— 2. Every one shall [wiper.) ^e- 
 fcnd his rtViendAl.— 3. It is disgraceful to be deserted by one s [followersj.— 
 4 Who should be willing to give up [dereUnqnere) so great advantages ?— 
 O' Hv whose arts has Trov been captured '?—G. To whom doest thou owe 
 si'ieh a chan-e (,y//^r////o) ot' thv atlairs (/•<^•<) V— 7. By whom could so atrocious 
 a CM in.e be CH,mmitted with iiupunity (^ 220, Hem. G)?-a AUuoli [persons] 
 disturb the (piiet (r/'^M of the city, by nightly' revels y«-^. How many have 
 committed (r.v/////i/^//^/r) their fortunes to this wicked Ofi^'"^) man .•'-10. 
 ]Mauv are call.-d [rocare), but few are elected [eligere).—!!. The opinions of 
 mauV are contrarv to the measures of the president [princeps); but the rest 
 cl,.f;.nd bi.n mosi persistent ly.»-12. By the frauds of some it has been 
 elfected ( facere), that [ut) these most useful laws were rejected by tiie ben- 
 ';,; _li ^'Thi. point [reJ) seems to be conceded by all.-14. The opinions 
 of all are unfavorable'" to vou, because you covet [appet^re) the property 
 (bona) of others— 15. bome have C(^ntirmed, others have denied this rumor. 
 —1« Tlie others were compelled to surrender [se trmiere) to the enemies.— 
 17 These statues have been destroyed by somebody's wickedness [><celus).-- 
 18' If any one's authority could prevail' on me, I would be determined 
 bv PlatiA opinion.-ll). The welfare of the republic must be dearer than 
 lite to every on^.-'-^O. This fruitless [sterilis) victory has been useful (i>w- 
 Lse) to nobody.-21. It pleased- (to) the general to throw * some into 
 priscn (m rimula); [and] to strike- others by rods.^«-22. The civd law 
 O- '.) has been written f/.r [to) the careful (./.7/^.^1. .-23. The poor often 
 unjustly accuse the rich, that [quod with subjunctive) they rob" their prop- 
 ,.,., V — '>4 Nobody's honor [existimatio) can be diminished {imnunuere) by a 
 drunken [ebrius) tman].-25. We fear those that [partic.) bring (^rr^) gitts. 
 —"0 The words of the conirratulatiuir persons were very pleasant to Ci- 
 cero —27 It is often damierous, to clieck*^ the course of one that hastens 
 ( jj^irtir ) 1.2H Some brought help to those who fought [partic), anti others 
 •e^r ned Jmpedlre) thosS that fled [partic.)-2d. He who (r.^a/.) disdains- 
 Irood coundls^nust^lCcuse himself [^ 280, Hem. 4), if he is left alone- by 
 his friends— 30 Who [relative) prefer their own interest [utUdas)^ to the 
 M-elfare of the country, are generally despised by their fellow-citizens.- 
 31 'W) those who [partic.) intend [velle) to wage a war, arms are necessary. 
 — 3-> To those who [relative) prefer pleasures to virtue, wealth (r/^r^M seems 
 to be the hi-hest -ood.-33. If any one has another opinion, I shall most 
 
272 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJITNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 in.licH,iv,.) tlwn- "st (V";.^ 'h^ 0«".V"../<Vv,,,, „,„.„ (,„,„ ,;';,„ 
 
 Absolute AdVec- vk"; kvo' n • ™ v "" <Y"m''' "'^' ""-'"-^ <'«'''"■'>• 
 co,n,„isoet.'-3. Utilia l-ui. .rl' , ™ j.™ i^f;^- , ".','' ^'■'■'I*"' ' '|^'' -^' vera 
 
 20 Nihil „,K„a,„ u,:.^' s ,e",'a,;„',';r:s I; .^; , ^ 'irT;:'^';;;.' t; t;","""-- 
 
 m.litihus ahlata sunt," ejusque rei ipse testis'' "uisti ^*' '"'"" " 
 
 fut,„v things l^-,sT,,.e,'/r!.n s ■■'t^' t^^Z'J'::^'''^'^;^'""'''''''^ "^ 
 to inveslisiute iinl<n,nvn tliin.^s aiul to n ,...,,,! .l''"l'«<)l>liei-s tiy 
 
 wl,icli seen, to be kno,vM.-4Tc,hr '(>'''■''''',■•'■''* ^""'"' "'<«« 
 these iinforese-n events (tl.in.'s -1 F,,,, h* n ■ '^ ili«-"neerte,l" \,y 
 
 (;-•<;-) wise [„.e,.].-o^ ^trrt,*.in:^s w " ' p e,, ':,'t, j'T' ''"".'•"jr 
 
 Wliatdoe'stthotul, Z-<r 
 
 la. Bv what art tho.i tiTriCl v-14'"7^ '''•" "'" <'"' >'"'"•- 
 
 wl,a. did Ga,i„s devole JJI« j so m„?h i i ...iee -/^"i';, ^^'^ ■-'''; To 
 do sonielliin.r,— 17. All seem t<) he fn' It,., i i ,■ ^^" '"'>'^ ^'"*'' '" 
 
 ricious („«,•«,) „,a„ hulll'm'liv f ! .^'^r^^'/Sv^' To^V'"''" 
 
 hmgs are so unproper (,„rfm)n/.,,, that th..v .m,st be con "• ' L:!. -M^'u 
 thou hast heard aiivl in" tell nie -Lot \r,„r.;, ' , ""«^''loi- —-'(». If 
 
 a true IVien.lsldp.^i Nt^-o cotdd n;;t he !."l r 'f '■",'"''-■ ''"""''"' "''■'» 
 hy the a-onv" of the dvin." "i r^\ ,f l" ''''liglited by aiiylhinj;, ,bau 
 
 (/ive(^,*..;r)t c^-^r.Ylin';i;:rpn . ; 
 
 been more disc..ne<Tt« Ity-Z/nv ' . , , , • 'i 'l"'f— 2''- 1 bave never 
 
 [men! eannot foresee (*««'«;a -the'iSs. ^(".L ' ff ivei^Mh'n'.r-.';, •'(V'-'^' 
 
 zc.il.-29. ThoscMliat(rr/./nn".Te^^^ tmited with to.) much 
 
 -;:> Pnf.fare, to fulfil ^u pnM '.'""^.1 { {Z lotZ^ t<',yHe.u .-»/„,„,.,/,>,.,. to change. 
 g.l.s.-M 7'^ refuse, prohihr-rc..-.» To 'ui;^,^^;^ ^mn^J^ ^^'jtnoss -.3 /.,,,v,,,^v., Tral 
 concedere. pputmrn. 1 rauslate . t/t(/Mce us, thai we emi>k,y.-~i^ To allow. 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 273 
 
 of tho ITelvetians.* — 31. It is absurd to bring foi'ward'' anew {denuo) things 
 which {iKU't.) have been once refuted. — 82. These things have been Huished, 
 but now we wisli to commence {agfjredi) the rest. 
 
 Combination of Absolute Adject^tes. — 1. All good men wish this. — 
 2. Eveiy wicked {iinprobus) man praises {extolUre) the enemies of his coun- 
 try. — 3. No honest {j^robinf) man is in the habit of spreading {divulgdre) 
 falsehoods {jalst' thinfjx). — 4. Every new thing generally excites {commovere) 
 the* multitude. — o. 'So\\\uv^Yin\\^Ykx\\)\Q{meinorahlli.H) has happened {evenlre) 
 while you were absent. — 6. This man does not write anything useless {inu- 
 illls). — 7. Your friend neglects some important {gravis) things. — 8. All this 
 is unimportant. — 1). All that is denied bv our countrymen. — 10. Something 
 else occupies the mind of Cajsar. — 11. A few other things must be done. — 
 12. Roscius, deserted^ by all others, is defended by Cicero alone. — 13. This 
 man, praised by every one else, is censured only by his accuser.* — 14. These 
 boys have dev^oted {fribuere) their labors to everything else. — 15. Victory 
 can be obtained by nothing else. — 16. Nothing greater could happen. — 
 17. Nobody else tries to i^rove such things. — 18. The mind of nobody else 
 could conceive {e.rco(/itdrt) such absurdities {ineptidp). — 19. Some great schol- 
 ars have contirmed this opinion. — 20. What else has produced {efficere) this 
 change {mutatio) of public atfairs (things) V— 21. Call* everything by its own 
 name. — 22. Every learned [man] willmost easily see (perftpicere) this. — 23. 
 Everv good {superb it ice) man most readily {libenx) contributed^ something. — 
 24. If every one will fultir (^ 347) his own promises, we shall succeed."— 
 2.5. We deinand, that (^/0 to every one his own property be restored {red- 
 chrt). — 2G. We have heard no such thing; but Gajus will be able to tell 
 {narrdre) (to) you something similar. — 27. I suspected some such thing long 
 since, but neglected this and innumerable other things. 
 
 Dis.ji'NCT Adjecthtis. — 1. The Prussians {Borussu.s) invaded^ Upper^" 
 Gaul, and the Austrians {AnstriacNs) the lower" [one].— 2. If thou hadst 
 accepted the smaller gift, thou wouldst now have got {/erre) the larger 
 one. — 3. Great thieves often escape, while {quuni with subj.) small ones 
 are punished. — 4. Those who {rehit.) lead*- the happiest life, while {dum) 
 they are living, often will lead the most wretched, when {quum) they will 
 be dead.— 5. When Ciesar had thus addressed {(dloqui) Diviiiacus, the latter 
 stood {iinperf.) looking ou*^ the ground {terra). — 6. While Sempronius was 
 {present) thus attending" to the safety {mlvs) of the queen, the latter had 
 already left the town. — 7. Both the king and his wife had departed {profi- 
 m<7);'the former in order to (//0 collect'^ an army, the latter in order to 
 attend to the safety of her family (Ji 3o7, 6).— 8. Artaxerxes inien^led to kill 
 Ids brother Cyrus, but this one had escaped by the help of his mother. — 
 
 9. The enemies intended to cross the river; but Caesar, who had seen this 
 before,'" had sent armed [men] in order to {that) guard" the hither'^ bank. 
 
 10. The tiueen and her sister endeavored to escape, but both were captured 
 by our [troops].— 11. Both daughters of the king sought" safety by flight, 
 but the oue'^" was killed, the other was thrown'^* into prison {in rincubi).— 
 12. Gajus wished to buy both farms {terra); but he could obtain neither 
 
 1 Helveiius.— 5 7b i^nwg' /orjrrtrcZ. proferre.— s To desert, reliuquere.— < AccusStor.— 
 6 Appcllure.— « 7b cot.tnf/nte, conll-rre.— M^ie^tare.— » The Latin >ay!<: "-ue hare ran- 
 gi/Lshtol,'" in order to expn-ss Sl future i^iiccess.—» Ingredi.—i" Superior.— 11 Inferior.— 
 i'^ A"ere — >3 To look on, contuCri.— " Consulere.— i^Conticribere.— ** 7b se£ sornetMng be- 
 fore, providere.— I'TeiiCre.— '«Citerior.— 1» 2b seek, quaerere.— -"o See § 357, 5.— " Couji- 
 cere. 
 
27t 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 ABSOLUTE AND DISJUNCT ADJECTIVES. 
 
 275 
 
 ^ ^4G).— lb. Gajus has ninny l)ooks, Scjns owns' few, but tlio hooks of the 
 latter are more valuable than those (§ ;jOT) of the fornur.— 14 Two votes 
 were given to ine, (and) to Gajus three.— 15. This is the end of all theso 
 labors. —1(). Ihis was the beginning of all our evils.~lT. This was the 
 elnnax {f^miDiui, Gen. f<nm),>(t')i>{' x\\\ his niiserv.— 18. What else is friendship 
 than {quam) the eonneetion ((v>//y"^///r^Vy) of \wo souls y—lJ> What was the 
 opnnon ot thy family V— :20. What will be the tate (.w/-.v) of the captives >— 
 21. What is the source (>//,»<) of these troubles {qacrehiyi—'-Z^ Gajus' poems 
 are beautiful, but thine are more so."^— 2;J. Althouirh the French=*'lan"-ua<'-e"* 
 IS very pretty," still ours seems to be by fir the better."— 24 SemiuonTus 
 gave (to) me all books which his brother iiad lelt {rclinqiure) —2.") Vmbiorix 
 deteated the ai-:dualici, who were the neighbors' of (transl. ^>) his kiu'^dom 
 — 2(). Those men, whom thou hast hin-t {Imkn) so grievously •* will once 
 {tihquaiah») accuse thee.— 27. The royal" troojjs, whom Sempronius had led 
 over the river, were cut down" bv the euemies.— 2S. All ihiu-rs which are 
 determined" by weight {i>oml>ix) or measure {uauHura) mav {ran) be "iven 
 as a loan.'^- 2y. ^'o time, which thou hast spent'* in {hi}) indolenc* can 
 ever be restored {ralihn) to thee.— yo. Most men wish to have a friend of 
 such kind {ttdtn), as they cannot be themselves. — :n The same fmenl -is 
 had come, left the cami).— ;j2. This is the same [thinir], as 1 had sh(»wn to 
 thee.— ija. These are the best testimonies which can be bnjught forward.'*' 
 
 Paktitive (tKmtive.— 1. Hie labor nemini vestrum anicquam i)r()dcsse'« 
 vidctur.— 2. Plerlcpie mcolarum ghnlio trucidati" sunt. 'Keliquorum vitam 
 ducis lenitas'^ servavit.— 3. Quis vestrum periculosfv hujiis e.\i)editir)nis 
 particeps' esse vuh V-4. Nemo nostrum tantam laudem assequi poierit — 
 5. Omnium nostrum tides immulata est.— G. Du;e re-is tilia' salutem fu-'il 
 IjetPbant;-" sed utraciue earum occlsa est.— 7. Sociorum copia' nihil stii)en- 
 du acceperant.— 8. \os (minium harum virtntum nihil fere (^/////</.n/) exhibP- 
 tis,-' nihil tcmperantia',"'- nihil auctoiitatis, nihil irravitatis."^— 1). ISi quid 
 detrimcnti rcspublica cepisset,-' consulcs ab unociuoque accusarcntur.— 10. 
 Quid tequi ac justi a legatis nostris impetrari potuit V- 11 llic juveiiis nihil 
 nniiuam stulti, nihil insulsi," nihil falsi protulit.-'*'— 12. Templum illud in- 
 signls ohm tabulas habuit ; sed prastantissimae earum vetustate"-' periC- 
 runt.— 13. Constanlinoi)olis urbs duabus partibus contiurtur {roitxist.s of) 
 quarum alteram Turci,'^^ alteram Graci inhabitant.— 14. Nemo nostrum' 
 talem^i^gnominiam unquam subiit.— 15. UtiKiue vestrum amici nostri cele- 
 britas'"' jucundissima erit.— IG. Magistrfitus alii nostrorum i^^ladiis interfecti 
 abi a suis ipsorum ci\ ibus trucidati sunt.— 17. Milites alfi aliis itineribus 
 etlugGiunt.— 18. Dua' Ariovisti tilii altera occlsa, altera capta est (captiU 
 sunt).— 11). Ga'sar LabiPnum jussit summum moiitem duabus le«'ionibus 
 occupare.— 20. His operibus elliciebatur, ut intiina urbs, si necesse esset. 
 muniUTri""' semper jmsset. 
 
 1. Our exi)lorcrs {(Xplonltor) have not found any gold.— 2. These mines" 
 never liave yielded {rtdderc) any silver.— 3. We never saw anv of them bo- 
 tore.— 4. It thou wilt tind any gold, try {experlri) the lowest*[partj of the 
 
 1 U^ .^T.^ Pf^f^'iflCre.-a Translate : more hmnHful.-^ Franco-GuIIiciis.— < Sermo — « Per- 
 l)e]l,j; 8 1 ran>latc-: more jmfirnMt (pni-stabilis).-^ Finitiimi^.— »* (iiitrouft. «M-avi^ — "Kg- 
 giiu -»" Jo liiul over, tra<luci-iv.->i To rut ddwn, cu'dere.-'--' To be dttermvTtd, coiitinuri. 
 ~ ^" « ^<^';-, "'»'"?•-'* io ^i)en(i, transigcre.— »5 To bHng forward. protene.-i«'io l)e 
 ofany nse.-i; yrwmA,r^, to slay.->« Humanity.-»» A partaker.-"" Wrt, to seek.- 
 21 1 () show.— 2- Moderation.— 23 Di-nity.— 24 To suffer.— 2» Absurd —2« To uttCr — »7 lW//j,. 
 tas, old at;e. -=« The Turk..-^» Celebrity .-3« To overflow.-»' A mine, met^ullum 
 
 I 
 
 n,4;sl-y. What U>">-tiUn^ '!• thf w- w 11 be'^ given {mandare) to this 
 (,.;>./.), if tlie command ;> ./ '^^.^^V ^^^'^Uer bJen done by this man ^-^ 
 manV-lO. What just =^'1^\ ''^J^^^;'^^-, //'rve happened to thy brothei-^-12. 
 11. S<mu'thing more ^''''X}^ ^''X^.Z^^^^ Nobody could tell any- 
 
 We have never see'u anything "^ ^ ^^^^^^^^^^ n.outh {os) of this mam- 
 thin-- new.— 14. Nothmgtalse evei s^'^mc . ;^ y yf us.— lb. I 
 ^"'N;:;hing glad il<.tMi>^ 1-« "^""^ ^ / h s^c^er iLnd anythb^g 
 did not hear ^^^}frZ'Z^J'Z^^ of Pontus, perished by the 
 similar.-18. Mithndates, the ast <>y^^^^ .- ^^^ ^ Uves endeavored to 
 
 trcacherv of his son l^^'^»'"^^'^^,,' ,,, ^ould reach^ the sliore.-20. Some 
 Iwim ac-Voss* the river but none ottln;m ^^^^^^^^, ,,, ^ow highly 
 
 of us wish to peruse» these book. -^.0 known to the ancients {retm).- 
 (l 3i:{) rtourishing,^ but trw o tlu^n ^^.r^^.*^"^;^^'v_23. But others of you, 
 S. Wbich of the two girls ^^^^i^^^^^^f^^'^:^^^^^^ ^^^ The rest 
 
 ^^•ho have fought "^^>^S^»/^^|^tiV( // / tl e hrst battle-liiVe will have repulsed 
 of you will wait {.xsvecinn) \\\\ ^^^' .'' "'^J' ,imes will be unpunished.^-26. 
 r;>c7/.re) the enemy .-2o. None *>V>/>J,/ribv hides {pelU^\ others by 
 
 dnn\vas to.nul, ...any >.t J^'"!'" X^,f ^' o "', •n<^^ of who.» si-okc tl.us 
 3a Tl... ki,.,i: aa...i..ea ("""»*'■*,.">?: ^^^ {dad,.), the one (aUer) o 
 Lv)-34. We found two causes "'"'"•„,"<, 'nei.f the barbarians sought 
 Sh 1 shall ..ow ^•^l"'"!'^ Jl' ;:''ir,"^iuer o\ul (*r).-30. The highest 
 rth.irl safely by so...e, and o ' is bj < |J.'^\ ^^.,.„ .^ our troops could pro- 
 rnirtlofthebill wasoccupedbj "'^ f*,"- '„,;•-, ,., jinperf) already, when 
 ib tVl.e„..-37. Midnight ai.p;-;^^'^^!'^p;X) the walll. of the 
 (,„,»« with imhc.) »--•;'*"'' .»;';,. f city v^ occupied by the Carthag.n.ans, 
 
 -^XT.ti';a.'s;;brr^ 
 
 [p'krt] of theni^'Ut. 
 
276 DR^ISION AND FORMATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 CHAPTER FIFTH. 
 DIYISIOX AND FOKMATIOX OF SENTEXCPJS. 
 
 I. GENERAL THEORY. 
 §377. A Sextexce or PjjoposiTiox, in its grammaticai: 
 acceptation, is a word, phrase, or combination of ]>lirases, con^ 
 taming a Predicate, either expressed or understood. 
 
 no^ Tlni^'^if^'ll''"'''' "'^'^T "^^"t^ ^^' '' ''^'"-'^ ^'^>»-^^ a« •' ^ ' ^"\ come ! Xon 
 no. lluis the lliree worts ot C'tesar- " Ve/a' ridi r,W n r- ... . i 
 
 conquered), contain three coordinate sentences ' ^ "' '^'''' ^"^ 
 
 § 378. Sentences are divided : 
 
 1) According to tlieir coxnectiox with each other. In tliis 
 respect they are either rjiixciPAL or depexdext; 
 
 2) According to the grammatical form of the Predicate. In 
 this regard sentences are either fixite, ixfixitive, or partici- 
 pial sentences ; 
 
 3) According to tlie connection of the thought with the 
 speaker, in regard to its reality. In this respect sentences 
 are either affirmative or xegative. 
 
 4) According to tlie rehition of the speaker to other persoxs 
 In this respect sentences are divided into declarative, impera^ 
 TivE, or interrogative. When he intends other persons simplv 
 to hear and understand his words, the sentence is dedanitive • 
 when he intends thorn to do something, the sentence is impera- 
 tive; and wlien he intends tliem to c/n.-^^i^e/- somethin<r, the sen- 
 tence is iiiterroq((tive. ^' 
 
 11. Coordixatiox op Sextences. 
 ^ \; * The Coordination of Sentences is made, like that of 
 the I'hiases (§ 112), by the Copuhitive, Adversative, and Dis- 
 
 COORDINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 277 
 
 * 
 
 iunetive Conjunctions. But two classes, the causal and con- 
 clusive (illative) coordination, are peculiar to the ^mtenee 
 
 alone. 
 
 H,..nr,lins Coordination in seneral, there are two points to be observed : 
 1) . om-reet use of the diflerent c..orai"ati"g ~"J"°«V;?f ' ^> ^^^ ^."^f ^J 
 p'„si,i.m of the words in those coordinate «- "^^^^j;' ^ ,4^';'^' ^^S ais- 
 more words or phrases common to both. In the lauer ^^^l^'^''^^^. , ^^ ioq> 
 ?^nun,i^rthe coLvm from the coOrduuitc parts of the sentence (^ 114, §^ 123). 
 and observe the following rule : 
 
 \vrnrme the common parts of two or more coordinate sentences so, t^^ty^J 
 eitter^:^orf2w all aijrdlnaie parU of eveky one ./ tU coord^r^i^ 
 
 "feT': ro.mon Procreate, ^-erallv^,/..^ co.rnon ^^^^^^^yj^^i^^^ 
 the coordinate parts of the sentence. ,,^, /"^.J^ '"i'^j'^^iv™ of makin- co5rdi- 
 
 £ta:X,(;:?farotS-S^J.«r,;r:Sedr;heiy'^vo„..^^ TUu., in d,e fol. 
 
 lowing seuleucc: „ „^. „.„„„^, q^ju, a„a kill» Sejns by treachery," 
 
 we would tUuB constitute ihe sentences : ^ .. _ , ^ 
 
 He wounds Gains by treachery, ^«^•"^/,';f f ^.'j;;/^^^^^- 
 He kills Sejus bv treachery, Stjta/i perjidia intetjicit. 
 
 The co.rainn.c par,, are •• Gajnm ;;"|;;-.;.nd ;; f J-J.|Jert^^»^^^^^ 
 apply here ,lH.L.e„eraln*.son...bs,an 
 
 ^?ece';in\'lciir^ina.e ^i^^.^'.'afd liK.leE.re ,ra„,. ,e the ---;""- 
 
 Pertidid Gajum rulnerat et Sejum interflcit. 
 
 oiilv to the latter, and not to the former. 
 
 the ^Z^^^l^^ ,„ ,„„„,e the city and reduce it by hunger," 
 will be thus constituted: . 
 
 „" he .« i„L par,, are: ••cin.erc" and "iUmc cogere." By ..nc.ly pruceed.ng ac- 
 cordiiij; to S l*i, we iranflale the sentence thu» . 
 
 and ,his c„rr,..pond, to -I';' ^J'i^.S^'jS/'^^prra^.ulX/'co.'iiS!^^^^ 
 
 all llie <■"'■■" ■i'a'^t"'";,'',t,,r;,i..ir&" "fam/- precede ,he coOidinales we would 
 
 sSa"en,';-,,";-''»*-;Sri^^ 
 r,?.;r";;,\-ar;i^?,v,;,f.i;;,K^i;';-id\iu^s^ 
 
 it necesbary in Latin. 
 
 S «JH© Coi'ULATivE CooBMNATioN.— We usc here the Copu- 
 lativ^ Colijunctions et, ac, atque, que (§ 115), the same as m 
 
278 
 
 «COORDINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 I Lrasos. Tl.o KMP„.vric Copulative Coonlination is made by 
 l>la<'n.. con,„,K.t„.ns before each of the eo.nlinate sentenees. ^ 
 1. I he K„g ,s h l.<,th-a>nl is ex,,resse,l by et-c. S,. ,. , ,o 
 2 J he Knd.sh not onl^-1n,t aUo is expresse-l either \.^ct~^ 
 
 I Inlosophers shoul.l ,.ot only teaei,, but also practise virtue 
 
 mj^'/"- ^- '^''^' •■""'"*•"'« »n."lative CoOnlmations have particular mean- 
 
 princes, s,>,„Hin>,.snt^,,Hmr'rCT^^'^^^^ '"''^ son,,.|i,nes hehl by 
 I'artly by bribery '" "'""'"^ "" ""-' '^"'^'-■"s P-uHy by intlueuce, 
 
 as those of the «ickd can .r e , s nle slnl ? V'''-'*'''"''', "' ' "-' ff"''«J »» «■«••» 
 onlinaiion Iron, the c.-n^.a,! on by' ^-^«a,, \Vh(U, '''^""^''''"^'' "«i^ c*>- 
 
 la'ioest (oTHf) vitid^a. turn ((nricin,e r/mrnl., V.]l ■ i ' ^'^""^ omnium rtnim nm>,. 
 
 public atui privat.. Ci;.; Phu^. V'^j-^'J^;;^'^^;;/ a ...a,, adornoti by .;!.,;f;;i„J^ [ 
 ti.e.nHplve.. ar.d f.. t^b-ai., tlu- armistice C-t / R O i i-^ ''''r''^'^'''' J^'»"' f'"* Hc-arin-r 
 H. prose: JAy,/, ^^U'^n.^uAJln ii^?^^^^^^ *'» poerrv. 1> ,t ra « 
 
 ^'7''^77r' ^ ' ''''" ''""^ "■'^•'- ' --^^ 'f-'e^i'.;;'' L;v%2''>;i'""- ^""- ''"- ^^- ^« 
 
 tin, „nli,„ite.i of in.n.n.S ^'J^Tt ^VrT;,!^?^^^^^ ^^^^^ ""^ inemotv'a.;;! 
 a verb, towliu-h an object is arjded iFi^ it. m.m no * I' ^***-' d.-inonsiralive refers to 
 
 mouth (iuiuctili. too. Cic. Att 5 12 ^ ''^^^^^^^ ^» i« u -reut hardship to ^ail, and u ihc 
 
 COuRDINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 279 
 
 § 381. Adversative CoorwDixATiox. — The same conjunc- 
 tions are used here as in the Adversative Coordination of Phrases 
 (§ 121). These conjunctions are thus emi^loyed : 
 
 1 In the case of a direct opposition, that is, Avlien what is negatively 
 expressed in the tirst j^roposition or phrase, is affirmatively expressed in 
 the second, the connection is made hy .sed or cerum, as : He does not dssiroy, 
 6^// /V//jn//<^ ;^/^r, Lei^a-m non toUit, sed (verum) perticit. ^ 
 
 3' In a RKSTRicTivE COORDINATION sed oT verum Ukewise are used. A 
 coordination is caHed rkstricTive, \vhen what is alhvnd or conceded in the 
 lii-;t i>roposition or phrase, is resfrirfed or limited in the second. This coor- 
 dination iiJis a similar meaning as tlie mbordinatl<jn, made by '' althouglu 
 The tirst (concessive) sentence often takes the particle quidem, which is 
 placed after the tirst coordinate word, and is either not translated at all, or 
 by " imleed;' as : Be.f militnm {quidein) rirtfitem coUauduvit,i*ed durum tems- 
 ritdtem gravitrr reprehendit. The king praised indeed the bravery of the sol- 
 diers, but seriously censured the rashness of the officers. 
 
 3. Sed (rarely vemm) often opens a new period to indicate the close of 
 a previous discussion, or return to the subject proper after a digression : 
 
 Std rf^leoadannquo'^: But 1 return to the aucicnt^. cic. Tnsc. 1, \1.-Sedj€mpu.<^fstja}n 
 hlnc ab'ive. etc. : But (i. e. 1 dose my remarks, lor) it is ix.w titne to depart from here. C c. 
 Tii-c 1 A\ —Std l(iXcalia(jiutstioext,ho.-<ud proiKjniumrevtrtainur: Bur ihis.is another 
 UiiesVi(.n, WK must return to our Mil)jecr. lb. :i 5.- Verum (juidem kite hactenns (an elljp- 
 tical formula = • we must stop here '; literally ' these remarks up to this pomi ). lb. a, 6^. 
 
 4. Vera and aittem ate used to pass over to a new fact, person, or thing, 
 either in a new period, or continuing the period which contains the prior 
 facts etc The facts, persons etc.,'to which the author is passing, are 
 expressed either by clauses, or by single words (especially pronouns 
 and substantives, bi'it also verbs etc.). If vera and xutem refer to a clause, 
 thev are placed immediately after the conjunction opening the clause. 
 If they refer to single wends, they are placed immediately after these. 
 
 Omnn vero manisfns traditi smnus, vaHh imb>nm>/r erroHbus ; But when we are handed 
 ovX r io teacliers we are filled with various erro-s. Cic Tu<c 3. I .- Philssopjna vcro.qmd 
 est a/imlni.si donmn dtorum ? lUit what else is phih.sophy than the -.li ol the gods ' Cic. 
 Tu-c I -2») -Vtteri thim/s enuUn.'^ mc/lis fuerunt. liom'ih autem (tfa" J<nn mveteraHs 
 lifferix hnf: Tr e others lived in less learned periods, but RomulusV a-e was when cul- 
 ture was already old. Cic. Rep. 2, ]0.—Mihi vtro longe vidltur esse secus ; But to me it 
 seems to be !ar"^dillereat. Cic. Tusc. 3. 25. 
 
 5 At is used at the beginning of new periods, and its principal force is, 
 to cornet mixtakh. Thus it denotes oijjections, raised by the auflior him- 
 eelf or bv somebodv else ; or to express that someboely's expectation was 
 unfi)imded or was batHed by the agency of another. Sometimes it is used 
 after a conditional clause with concessive force {but at least), as : 
 
 A. II,vcfacerenolo. B. At rex Ju^c itafieri vuIL A. Jh's I refuse to do B Biit the 
 kin- will have it don.' so.-.4^ tanfa militum rirtuserat, nt nemo de vallo decedent ; Bnt 
 so.rr,a V 1 h- bravery of the soldiers, that nobody left, the ranipa,-t^( An attack ha l 
 be.-n m:rde by allfo.ces <.f ihe eneinv. bv which th.-y ihou-ht to take the pi :.c. •).-«/«/- 
 %^Zd!^>m,a<' di» cunctaiu., l)a>^ium appelldbat At iUe...r^ {"."r.jf;;! IIU'^A 
 Blattu.s. having hesitated much and long, applied to B^lll''- ^f %}^lZn^S^ 
 Blattiu--s expecta-h.n) disclosed the matt.r to Hanniba . L.v. ^^::^^--^ ?-?/ ^'ulhl 
 V omnnm/atl at iet.Vis s>ue ; si non hominis, at hnnuudtafi^ ratwn.m haberet , That he 
 {3.1 E some r^^^^^^^ if not for his relationship, but at least for hi 8 age ; it not for the 
 man, at least for humanity. 
 
2S0 
 
 COORDINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 6. Tamen oorrosponds to tlio En<rlish ronjnnrtions ** yet," " still," " how- 
 ever;" ml ((tmr/f, aftdiiifii, rfriiinfiintcn to the En^liMh 'hut still, hut yet, hni 
 Viough. It may, like aed, be preceded by quidem in the first of the coordi- 
 nate sentences. 
 
 Rent. 9. Advei-sative Proj^ositions or Phrases often are connected asi/n- 
 dctiralhj {% 1:20), when the ()p]>()sition apjn-ars from the words themselves. 
 It is especially used, when of two coordinate irord)* the httter is ner/alim. 
 In this case it would be l)ail Latin, to use an adversative conjunction, as: 
 
 UhjHsei^ (but) not Afjdmeninon has tnken Troi/, Ulixes, non AuanuMnnon, 
 Trojam cei)it. — The IScnate icishcK to vdiiqiuAh, but not to opprem these JStat^s, 
 Seuatus has civitates vincere, non opprimere vult. 
 
 § 38^. The Disjunctive Coordination connects two or more 
 propositions or phrases (called alteiixatives), only one of 
 which is represented as a reality^ withont deciding which, ex- 
 clnding at the same time all other alternatives. 
 
 Hem. 10. A Disjunctive Coordination contains four requisites: 1) the 
 coordinate members must be (liffcrent, 2) only one of them must be repre- 
 sented as a reality, :5) it nnfst l)e left undecided, which of them is a reality; 
 4) all other alternatives must be excluded. If a disjunctive coordination 
 contains all these 4 elements, we call it complete, as : Ego hie <utt in con- 
 ^pectu vestro moriar, ant perferam legem, 1 shall either die here under your 
 eyes, or sliall carry the law. The alternatives are " 1 shall die" and " I 
 shall carry the law.'" Tiiey are 1) different. 2) Only one of them is repre- 
 sented as a realijy; 3) it is not decided, which of the'two will happen ; and 
 4) all other alternatives are excluded. Hence the disjunction is a com- 
 plete one. 
 
 But when one or the other of the specified requisites is wantinir, tlie 
 disjunction is called an inipeoper one. Thus in the followinii' disjunction 
 " Tlie old Britons nsed either hriLss or iron rods in place of coin^ Bnldimi ve- 
 teres ant aere aut taleis ferreis pro uummo utebantur," Ijoth alternatives, 
 brass and iron rods, are represented as real, and hence the second and 
 third requisites of a complete disjunction are wanting. See Hem. 12. 
 
 § 38JI. The DisjuxcTivE Conjunctions are aut, vel, sice 
 (sen) and the enclitic ve. The first three generally are placed 
 before each of the alternati\ es, while ve is used only to connect 
 single words, and only then, when they belong to the less im- 
 portant members of the sentence (as duobus trlhusve dlthuH^ in 
 two or three days). ]^y udt — aut we declare either the decision 
 between the preyjmsed^ or the exclusion of all other alternatives 
 as essential ; hy sice — sice we declare either the one or the other 
 as unessential. Aut — aut always is translated by either — or, 
 sice — sice is translated by either — or, or by whether — or ; the 
 latter is the case, if the proposed alternatives, introduced by 
 
 COORDINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 281 
 
 sice-sive are dependent clanses, and therefore have a predicate, 
 different from that of tlie principal sentence. See Conditional 
 
 Clauses (Book VI.) , • 
 
 The disjunction by vel—vel represents the alternatives as de- 
 pending on the will or the conception of the speaker or of the 
 subject'' or object of the action, and in such case it takes the 
 place of either aut— aut or slve—sive. 
 
 liJxamples : 
 
 1 Ant^-aut Clamilrunt, eum sibi camificem novum exortum esse, qui 
 nut mori^i serv ire iubeat. They exclaimed, that he had armn as aneio 
 r/, rf J'/^". /.V>;.rr, commanding the citizens to die or to be daves. Liv. 2, 35. 
 A othcralternati -es, but the two stated ones {mon md sermre)ave ex- 
 eluded, ind this exclusion is represented as the essential point of the 
 
 ^%7nwnstrabant, jvdieium fen oporfcre, ut ant uterque inter ^f^^^^^^f^T 
 sa^d rt Thev showed, that the decision must be this, that either bo h of 
 them i (Uld <nVe securitv to each other, or neither. Cic. pro Qumct. 8. Here 
 e iltematives are: ^^ mh shrill give securiiy^^ or '' rmther shall give secu- 
 riW "The other alternative, that only one of them should give security is 
 excluded by aut-aut, and this is repiesented as the esse,aial point ot the 
 
 ^''V'^lwre-sire a) Either— or. Ita sive casu, sive consilio deorum immor- 
 t-.l'ii,ni mi-c nai-s civitfilis Helvetiorum insignem calamitatem populo llo- 
 ;S intuTe pcrnas persolvit; 21eus either by accident or by 
 
 /;//"// J ;/>^ go^lsjat part' of the state of the Ilelvetmn^ which had 
 i lMd i sgnal disaster on the iLnan people, paid tli^ penalty fi^f-J^^f^f 
 Be Gall 1 12 Here it is represented as ynesseniial, to decide bet^^ een 
 the iwo alternatives {accident or mil of the gods), one ot which had brought 
 nnnishment on the Helvetians. ^ . 
 
 i ir""(/</-^r l>ie«nt, facilcm esse rem, scu nianeant sou proficis- 
 onnlv s mX'.mum on.nes senfmnt, TA.y mid. that the. thmg waxcwy, 
 VhXr theult L'i, or departed, if bat all uovld have the same opinwn. Caesar 
 B G 5 31 Horc'bv facilem esirrem the safety of the army is meant, and 
 "e cieoHi on between the t«o alternatives (whether they wonld stay or de- 
 pmt) is represented as unessential, since in either case the army would be 
 
 '"'3' r.^^'is^'Mibi qnidom conc?dunt omnes, ut vel ea defendam q«» 
 
 P,fn„.Ciurvelit. vol ta can., vel etiam ad nostra me studio referam litterS- 
 
 n 7 '<'»■ iak,,l they all maenle, eitlu-r to de.fe.ul the e.ium of Pomitey (ea 
 
 ■e Vom -it s velit), oUo keep dknt, or to retire to our literary oecupatmis. 
 
 Cic Fan 8 Hero the decisi.m among the three a ternatnes ,s not de- 
 
 cl UTd tmessential, and hence «>.-«.<■ cannot be used. But the exclus.on 
 
 ot' all other alternatives is declared en^ential, since the author nn plies, that 
 
 n these and no other alternatives were allowed to l.im J,ever he less 
 
 " •>, w, r but rel-ul is used, since the decision among the stated alter- 
 
 Salives (f'^lowing the cause of Pompey, keeping silent, or occupying liim- 
 
 Bcir with literature) depended on the speaker. 
 
 (Helvctii) AUobrogibus sesc vel persuasuros cxistimabant, vel vi coaciu- 
 
282 
 
 COoriDINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 ros, lit per suos fines eos ire paterentur, The ThiretmnH believed, that they 
 tcould either perauade the AllobrofjiiUiH, to let them pass throuf/h th/'ir territori/, 
 or to eotnpel them by force (to do it). Tlie altcrntitives are " induct'iiu'iit by 
 persuasion" or " indueement by force." Tlie decision between tbcsc is de- 
 clared as anesxeniialm reiz:ard'to llie passin;:? of llie territory. This would 
 recpiire .sire — .sire. But since the decision depended i)artly on the Helve- 
 tians, partly on the Allobrogians, eel — eel were the proper conjunctions for 
 this case. 
 
 Jiein. 11. Often alternatives, containins: substantially the same proposi- 
 tions, may be expressed by any of the three conjunctions, accordiui!; to the 
 conception of thesi)eaker. Thus C;esar says (R G. 4, 7): Gennd/ii jwMn- 
 lant, ut {Romdni) vel xibi arjroH affribftant, vel patinutur eon tenere, quos 
 armis jmssederint. The Germans ask, that the Romans ndglit assiirn lands 
 to them, or allow them to keep those they had con(|uered. And Livy says 
 (2, oO) Ldfl/H petrbont d soioto, ut aut niitteretit Kubsiditnti, aut se ipaos arnui 
 ciipere dnerent ; The Latins asked the Senate, either to send them help, or 
 to allow them to take up arms themselves. 
 
 In both ])laces the alternatives are substantially the same, and api)ar<^ntly 
 htive exactly the same relation. In both instances it Avas the object of the 
 petitioners, to exclude all other alternatives but the ones proposed; the de- 
 cision in both places depended on the will of the Romans. But the con- 
 nection shows, that in the place of Livy the Latins represented the alterna- 
 tives as an imperatire necessity, while, in the place of Cicsar, the Germans 
 apjH'al to i\ii\fdir/tess of the Romans. Therefore Livy employed aut — aut^ 
 and Caisar vel— vel. 
 
 Rem. 12. The Disjunctive Coordination often has the meaninir of a Co]ni- 
 lutive Coordination, and the conjuncticms either — or are then e(iuivalent to 
 partly — partly, not only — but aUo, Imth — and. Tliese belonir to the Improper 
 Coordinations (Rem. 10), as: Omnes reliqudrum cohortium cenfurionex aut 
 rul/ierdti aut ore'id eruiit ; All the centuri(ms of the other cohorts were ei- 
 ther (partly) wounded, or (|)artly) killed. Csesar B. G. 2, 25. Here the second 
 recjuisite of a Disjunctive Coordination, that only one of the Alternatives 
 must be a reality, evidently is wantinir, since both alternatives took place, 
 but partly the (me, ])artly ihe other. But since every other alternative (ex- 
 cept that of beiuLT killed or wounded) is excluded, and this is represented 
 as the essential point, Ca'sar took here the conjunctions aut — aut. 
 
 lanta est exxpectatio vel animi vel ingerdi tui, nt ego te obnecrdre non dubi- 
 tem, aic ad nos revertdre, etc., So great is the hope in (either) thy courage 
 (or) and thy mind (or both, thy courage aud thy mind), that I do not hesitate 
 to implore thee, etc. Cie. Fam. 2, 1. This is evidently a Copulatire Coor- 
 dination, but Cicero represents it disjunctively, because some had hope in 
 the courage, and others in the mind of Cicero, and he uses vel — vel, be- 
 cause these alternatives depended on the individual opinions of the Ro- 
 mans. Disjunctions of this kind can only be expressed by aut — aut or 
 vel — eel, not by dee — dee. 
 
 Rem. 13. When Sentences with Disjunctions begin with negative words 
 {nemo, nihil, nunquam, non, etc., see -iii 408, 409), or when the Alternatives 
 virtually have a negative meaning so that they may be expressed by neither 
 — nor, the disjunctions are either introduced by the negative conjunctions 
 neque — mque (see '^ 409, 8), or by aut — aut^ sometimes by vel — vel, but never 
 in good prose by sice — dee ; as : 
 
 COORDINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 283 
 
 '^"ii ';n,oIm.n m,-,1 cau-a quicquam aut i^cnsit avt fecit. If he ererMlmrMt or did any 
 
 S..nale .« much irri,.f n.i.l ■n..i..mnL' '';'/";, V'\»;,°;-f'*/rr/rand .iimcX. 
 
 tlii-se «intciiiw the .ISO of iW-re/ »oi,lcl he imprupcr. ,h,. .„>„.,h„ 
 
 liem 14 When .W-. . Are have pn^licale, of ,heir ow,,. he..,?; rendered b v.y.X^ej 
 ,,"• h.-v n" irt b.- ,-.n,.i,l,Me,l as cnditiona.. conji:sction> =, L*': 'lii-, Ir?™ i, rV- 
 ii,," 7:17 On-. 5. Their predicate i. in the .vD,«T,v.n.Ues^.l^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 5i;S.rs;^';;;^:^;vi)^fThr;i;;:;w;rc.^a'x.;i!e;ii>;,-»;iirrr;ard or ,L,en ,„ur 
 
 ^'t»8l The Disjunctive Conjunctions are more rarely used 
 sirtMy in 'Latin, than in English, so that in translating from 
 En-lish into Latin, it must be considered as the ride, to trans- 
 late the single " o/' hy the doidde Latin conjunction. 
 
 n ir c;.^ (*^u\ '^n(\ vel mostlv occur with potius, in order to modify 
 Rem. 15. -^*''^.^^^'^;' . ^"'V^\^ Tumillam in^rediblem celentdtem mi pottus 
 
 'ort^ iVibebsu'tiupUs^Kwithout „.^/«») denotes different expres- 
 
 ''"tT,/."^!,'.' 'le'"rf' Js'uso used ^vi.h a restrictive fierce, accmp.nied with a 
 lViu,,l rl-.nsoto «(fa(»0 as: WM maqiwjH;-e or,-,hdnt,nt »bi aaidaim 
 
 {'l , -l, ,ns • sk e'l m-'entlv, tl.at he miirht bring thein help, or at to.^^ f 
 l!^shm;l;^he hhui;.,ed frotn doing this, to transport only the army over the 
 Rhine. Cnes. B. G. 4, 1«. 
 
 "m: sit^'le eonin.K-lion adf mostlv is ttsed in questions, beginning wilU 
 
 a,?i!:;e^::;^lti;{:V«^-adv.bw,^ 
 
 ^•Uh'sin'.'i.. J n o t t .nembers of the' senUn.e. as: (?.«« P«V««™ 
 r'r„r"««( onae ^tM,nd,„,orai<.rf .Of -I'^l/'f 'il.h/t'.,^'',;^!;- 
 
 Quid primum 
 "ain, or 
 
f 
 
 284 
 
 COORDINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 INFINITIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 285 
 
 eur^m aUqvem qui consvlunfur concurmsesr If thou 'Y^\ ^7^1 1'Z Uw 
 woi.kl.t thou u( t iuuuc'dhitclv h:ive run to Aquihus, or (else to some aw- 
 yerv Cie. Quiuct. IG, 53. nont^ ant circa urban nntWi ca hu:,ne prod,gia 
 %Uf At li>u.e or about the city uiany i>rodiiries happeuecl tliat wuiten 
 liv h (VI Tltuviux xcro ftcffwo,^ clamiUVmt, cum ninjorcH manux ho,,tiutn 
 T^^cniUcnU nut cum. aliquld caJmniUltiH in pro.vlmi. hibernlx emt ^f^i^ /;;;*» 
 T turui^ exchiimed, that they would be too late, when a .irreater force ot the 
 enemy should appear, or (,H>Vhaps) in the next winter-cpiarters some disaster 
 hXlian r^^^ ^PP^'^'^ c^'nx^'I'^^U '//'" ^^"^ altera a rrepto 
 
 ^'^/';rXl:' » was of opini(m, that wlien one or Uie other >vas 
 arrested, the others would be quiet. Liv. 2, ~3, 1.). 
 
 § 385. The Conclusive (illutive) Conjunctions are ergo 
 (therefore, consequently, hence), igltur (therefore), and itaque 
 (tlierefore). The conjunction Ighnr represents tlie predicate 
 as a mitural consequence of the previous proposition. Itifque 
 is limited to actual facts, which are represented as a conse- 
 quence of those facts mentioned in the previous sentences. By 
 ergo an inference or logical conclusion is made. 
 
 ExxMrLKS:-X(m solum hostls, sed ipsos civis suos timf^bant. Multa 
 tV/^T^/'r blandimenta per id tempus plebi ab Senatu data, 1 hey were not only 
 X-<dd!U<' eru,,ni:i>ut <^ their o,rn fcWnr-citizen. Theretore n^any acdUu^s 
 uerc xlunrn through t/n\s time by the ."^nate to tl^ Pkbetaus. ,, , . 
 
 Nemo liber Phocionem ausus est sepellre. 7^;7"^ a servis sepu tus est ; 
 M> free per.on dared to bury Phnrion ; theretore he was buried by places. 
 Homo es er-'-o errare potes, Thou art a man, hence canst thou err. 
 Bem IG ' Iq?tur takes often the phice of either ergo or itaque; but the 
 reverse is not the case in -ood prose. Erf/o and itaque generally oi>en the 
 'en ence ; but iqitur irene?allv is preceded by one word ot the proposition ; . 
 Sometimes even by tWo. When the sentence, without mdnr xvould be.i^in 
 w ii-epc^^^ either the third or the tirst place .,6 
 
 Imus %itlr, or iqitir .^ hoMu.). Thus the Latin generally says Quid 
 est igitur, quis est iyitur, nemo est igitur. 
 
 Rem. 17. When the English word therefore is an adcerb, it must be trans- 
 lated by iccirco or idea. See P. II, p. 281, 7. 
 
 § 386. The Causal Connection of sentences is either suhor- 
 dinating or coijrdlnatbig. The subordinating causal conjunc- 
 tions are quia, quoniam, quod, qunm (see Book ^ I.) ; the coor- 
 dinatuig c^mvi\ conjunctions are mtm, enim, namque and etenun, 
 all coiTcspondiiKT to the English conjunction for. 
 
 Of these nam, namque, and etnnm stand at the bepnnin- of the sen- 
 tem'e while eum (the most usual of them) occupies the second, and the 
 hid pbice in the same instances as i<jitur {^quid e.t enim, luhd est enim, etc.) 
 a^^ K a r^^ habDmus, sed os unum ; plus enim (./' nam plus, namque 
 plus eJenim plus) audlre debPmus quam loqui, We Mve tico ears, but one 
 mouth; for we must more h^ar, than apeak. 
 
 riENEr.Ai. Remauk. — Not only principal or simple sentences', but al«o drp<^nden( clauses 
 mtiy be oiiiiectcd by any of the diUer.-nt methods of coordination, or coon lin ate clauj^es 
 niav be deixjudeiit on the t»aine principal t»eiitenc*! by the same nubordinating conjunc- 
 tions. In the fornu'r case wliich is calh-d Cookdination of Clauses, each of the de- 
 pendent clauses retains its own coOrdinatini; conjunction, as : Postea, ?W quod tanta res 
 erat, t'el quod nonduni aiidierannis, Bil)u]uin in Syriani venisse, vel quia adminisiratio 
 Jnijiik belli inihi emu liibnlo i)a'ne est commilnis. scribenda h*c ad vos putavi. Afterwards 
 1 ihouqhl. that 1 ouffht to /rritt this to you. eitlier IjecavM tlte matter ivas no imjKtrta/it. or 
 because we had not yet heard, that Jiihidus ha<t come to Syria, ov because the adininistror 
 tioii of this war is almost wmiaoit to mt with Bibaliis. 
 
 In tlie latter case, which is called Subordinatiox op Cooudixate Sentences, the 
 pubordinatiiii,' conjunction stands u\i\y once before ail the coordinate propositions in Latin, 
 wldh' in P]!J:rlish it imuj be repeated or <Ainn\ after the coordinates, as: 
 
 Obs(;errivit eos, ut aiit secuni jure contendefent. aot injnriani sine ignominiil impone- 
 rent; lie a<ljwred thtia, that they either should go to law with him. or do him wrong 
 without disfffoce. 
 
 Here we /nay say in EiiL'lish. but not in Latin : either that they should go — , or that they 
 might do. etc.. wiiile it wtuild be barbarous Latin to say: Obsecravit eos, aut ut — cordeti- 
 detent, aut lU injuriain — iinponerent. 
 
 In order to translate Eii;,'lisii coordinates, dependent on a principal sentence, into Latin, 
 the coordinates should first be constituted separately, repeating the si«I)t)rdinating cou- 
 junction before eacl» of the coordinates; and in combining tliem, the subordinating con- 
 {un<'ln)na are dropped, and placed only once immediately before the first coordinating 
 conjunction. 
 
 For «pecial riileu on the subordination of coOrdiuates, see Book VI, p. 4T4 foil. 
 
 III. Infinitive Sentences. 
 
 § 387. The Latin Infinitive is either a Subject-, or an 
 OiuECT-, or a Predicate-Infinitive (g 72). Sentences which 
 liave a Predicate-Infinitive, are called Infinitive Sentences. 
 They are either independent sentences or clauses (Infinitive- 
 clauses). A predicate-intinitive of the Present in hidependent 
 Bentences often is used instead of the Imperfect (not IVnfect) 
 Indicative in liistorical style, and therefore is called Historical 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 The Ilistoricnl Infinitive, which very rarely occurs in clauses, is chiefly 
 used instead of imperfects ot repeated\acti()n, especially when several pre- 
 dicates of repeated action are coordinated with each other (For more 
 particuhir rules see P. II, § 575, p. 811 foil); as : Jii,i2:urtha ubi primum 
 adolevit, non se luxu neqne inertite corrumpendum dedit, sed, ut mos gen- 
 tis iillus est, cquitdre, jac\ddri, cursu cum {e(iualil)us certdre, et, cum omnia 
 gioriil antelret, omnibus tamen earns es,'<e ; ad hoc pleraque tempora in ve- 
 nando agtre, ler.nem atciue alias feras primus aut in \n'\m\^ ferlre ; phirimum 
 facere, I'ninimum ipse de se loqui. As soon as Jugurtha was grown, ?ve did 
 not give himself to the ruining influences of lu.ru ry or indolence, but, as it is 
 the custom of that nati<ni, rode, threw darts, vied with his companions in run- 
 ning and, though he .surpassed all, nevertheless was dear to all. Besides this^ 
 lie spent most of his time in hunting, he killed the lion and other wild beasts first 
 or among tlie. first; lie did a great deal, but spoke very little of himself . 
 
 § 388. Infinitive clauses are chiefly employed to translate 
 EiiL-lish clauses introduced by the conjunction that, and some- 
 times also to translate English Object-Inflnitives. The subject 
 
ssn 
 
 INFINrnVE CLAUSES. 
 
 of Infmitive-clanses always stan<ls in tlie accusative an<l tlio 
 prt.licate in the i,,pritice. Every word of the sentence, which 
 must aoree with the Sul,ject, as predicative adjectives or 
 nouns (if niovabU.), and the Participles of the compound tenses 
 of passive and dei>oiient verbs, must be placed in the AausA- 
 TivK, and agree with suc-h subjects also in gender and number. 
 Subjects of this kind are called Subject-Accusatives, m opposi- 
 tioii to the OiuECT- Accusatives, and the whole construction is 
 termed : Construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive. 
 
 Fyvmi-les— Enicnrns elicit, hominum animos unil cum corporibus inter- 
 ire >^^-.n ..'.v/.^ that the .souls of mm perMi tof/rther ^nth the bodies Here 
 the' 81^ i ect acS^si live a.mos and the Pn.fuanMnrtnitive int^nr. tonn to- 
 g^l^r rVl^nicATiVH riiKASE Cicero ait, ^-^-^---^l^^:^^ 
 t<^r Ciccw sous that thi sonls of men are imutortal Here the 1 uuicaic 
 
 •i-reeiiv witli the; Subject-accusative in case aiul > nuibei.— M.ucun > urn 
 ;^.vnrsuam tegiutaid esse, Marcus .rites, that ^-^^^^^^^ll^^J'^^t 
 Predicative (movable) Adjective ar/rnfa>u agrees ^vlth tlie Subject- Aetata 
 live uworem, in case, ueuder, and number. 
 
 /v,» 1R PRFDicvrE-lNFiNiTiVES luav be active as well as passive as: 
 G.^";xtti^ d "ml^^iu^am a S<^o nmle dc^endi, Gf^s ^^^ -; '^; ^j^- 
 ^n Lll, defeM by ^j^'- Here the imHlicatwe ,. n.ise s a ius>^^c 
 
 ZTHdremrt. that the enemies hair hn n <U fated bi, our tn>ops. Heie the 
 ^ ; p^Ct In the passive predicate phrase hostls rictose^ must agree 
 Ivith ll\e subject-accusative hostts in case, gender, and number. 
 nem. 10. The ho^inner must <^-^fy ^^^^^^^S^^^^^^^l^^ 
 
 otluT. All four may occur m he Kinu- ,^^'' ,^ '^; ;,;^'\\V ^^^^^^^"^^^^ CotiM.tiitin- the 
 
 derstaud Hrntence.^ of this kind ^vuhout n ak lu: tht>^^^ f„, 
 
 ^hv^W phrasos and analyzintr them "y^", I -• ' .^^..Yi/Z.U /se nttMU-e, nvc wu-uld proroed 
 
 undrr>uuulin- st-ntence. of thiH kind. 1 h > \^V/'^,V'"; ' "'-jk 're xve have Uirce Accu^a- 
 
 in thi. way: Vo,ustat, umunrjn so>nn '^*, ^. /'// ^ m. Su ."i^-ct i ^nniti^e in the seuu-nce, 
 
 tivc-i* and tw.) Inttnitives. Iranlin- tluit th -n ';;';• f "']:?;,."• ^.-/.i/i..^ «nd the oth»T a 
 
 of the two infinitives infxen and posse one uw.sf e '^ /^^ J 'i^.-overnin- an Uhject- 
 
 PreUicat.-}.nnitire But we_k|u>w, ;\»«» ^^Shiec i Sd^^^ v '^^ "ecord- 
 
 infinilive i§ SO), llenet^ mf'on m»st be "'Vf>*' ^»^^' ' V^ ^y,. j,„„„. ,heref..re that 
 
 ing to § VJ the Object-inhnitive precedes I'^^^^^'-'T.'",, ,„),,,<, n„w we have two 
 
 ^L mist be a Predicate, an. that us ^"'^J^/ ' ^Vtfur I; ^/^.^^^^^^ »>•'« -f ^vldch 
 
 bi.uns which possibly may be the subjects \\\{^-;''^^^^^^^ Supposin- now, 
 
 must therefore f>e a S^ihjecUuxufsa/ire. am\ h 'h r mO^c , ^ predieative phrase would 
 
 that we should take the accusative a, am to be the ^"T^ ;;';,;:;!^;. i,,tin infueri we 
 
 be a./>an j>osse, f/>e f^eareu ;'(''V .^^1 j" ^X A i</ H th^^ would nntke no 
 
 would come to the translation ^^'^'''; ' ^*^ • f;,7^^^^^^^^ ,he Subject-uiflnitive [homt- 
 
 Beuse. and it follows that not m^l,on. but '''<^" '^t .^ea^v to reco^^ uie at once o^ltw. as 
 
 nem i„t,ieri i^sse. that man ^-^'^ »^^''''^3 ; ,,^, '^ ,'/,• L), S,;/ We translate therefore : // is 
 
 the object of intio-ri and -o/'/m as J^^;,' "l'»^^^" \ y^^!' . .'^ ,,; ,ve would arrive, by simply 
 
 kno>r,.. that imm alone '•'V\^'"'''^^''"''';'^- ./uu -ubtecl if we follow the general rule=* rf 
 
 from the rcasonsi indicated pajje «U. 
 
 INFINITIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 287 
 
 § 380. Tite Personal Pronouns^ wliich as Xominative-sub- 
 jects generally are omitted in Latin, must generally be expressed 
 as Acciisatlve-suhjects, as: Gajus says, that I hold this opinion, 
 Gtfjtfs diclf, me haiic opinidnem habere. The pronoun of the 
 tliird person, whether Sul)ject-accusative, or Object, in Infinitive- 
 clauses always is siii^ sibi, se (jiot eum, etc.), if it has the (logi- 
 cal) subject of the j)rincipal verb as antecedent. 
 
 Gajus belteres, that he {Gajus) is loved by /Sejus, Gajus credit, se a Sejo 
 amari. — Attic us thinks, th((t this has U'en useful to hiui^ Atticus existimat, 
 hoc sihl (noX ei) utile t\iisse. — llw auibassadors announced, that thi\s business 
 Jiad been (uconiplished by then/, Legati nuntiavOnint, hoc negotium a se per- 
 tectum esse. — Gajus thinks, that Sijus is encious of him, Gajus putat, Sejum 
 sui invidum esse. 
 
 Jiem. 20. The Possessives of the 3d person (his, her, its, their) in Infini- 
 tive-clauses must be translated by suus (not by ejus or edruni), when they 
 have the Subject of tlie Principal sentence as antecedent, as: Gajus is of 
 opinion, that his httrst is the quickest of all, Gajus existimat, equuiu suum 
 (not ejus) omnium celerrimum esse. 
 
 liem. 21. The pronouns is, ea, id are used in Infinitive-clauses, if they 
 neither refer to the Subject of the Principal sentence as Antecedent, nor to 
 a notm in the Infinitive-clause, wiiich according to i; 238 would require the 
 use of sui, sibi, se, as : The Se([uaniaiis, after tiiey had received Ariovistus, 
 saw that he (Ariovistus) had their towns in his power, Sequani, postquam 
 Arioristuni recejwrant, intellexerunt, eum {not se) oppida sua {rwt eorum) in, 
 sua {not (jus) jwtestate habere. 
 
 Here we must use earn, becaupc the antecedent i? neither the subject of the principal 
 sentence, nor does it stand in the intinitive-elause. We say ojjpida sua, because the an- 
 tecedent (StijiHUii) is the suiyect of the principal sentence. We say in sua pofextate, be- 
 cause tiie antecedent of siut (Ariovistus) has become by the word eum the subjeet of the 
 Jnjiiiitire-rlaiise. It ii« true that the two words una will now liave different antecedents, 
 which initrht make the sense ainbi<ruous. But when the sense in itself is clear, the Latin 
 usa;;e authorizes such apparent amhiu'uities. However, in instances of this kind we may 
 employ the form-adjective ij>se instead oi sni. >dOi, se. and ipslus (ipsc/rum\ instead oi' Kt/i/s. 
 So it wou.d navf l)een correct in the precedinLr example to have said vithor ips&ru/n oppida 
 instead of npjrida sua. or in ips'ius jiol estate instead of in ixtteMdte sua. 
 
 Let us now express the mentioned sentence in a sii-^htly different way. as: The Sequa- 
 nianf». after they had received Ariovistus, saw. that /A^tr towns were in his power, Se- 
 guani. pf><fqiiain Arioristum fecejMiranf. infe/Iexen/nf. opjnda sua (not eorutn) in ejus {not 
 sua) jxjfestate esse. Here opinda sua must remain the same as in the former sentence, 
 since liie Secjnanians are in both sentences the sul^ject of the principal sentence. But 
 the wordsi ^' in his jx/uer,'' which in the former sentence were translated hy in potestdte 
 sua, must now be expressed by in ejus pote state, siuce the antecedent of his (Arioviftus) 
 no more stands in the infinitive-clause. 
 
 Since tlie Latin lan^Miai^e ha-» tliree words to express our personal pronoun {is, ipse, and 
 fui). and since t(» these three words may be added the disjunct demonstratives hie and 
 ilk. wiiich likewise may be used with the force of a personal pronoun (§ 3«)4, R H'i). it 
 frequently happens, that it is utterly impossible to render Latin sentences literally into 
 Enj^lish. so as to makt; the sense clear. Thus in the f*)llowing sentence of Ciesar (B. G. 
 1. .in. Ariori-ifu.t resiiondU : Si quid ipsi a defare opus esset. se.<e ad eum venturuin fuisse ^ 
 si i/uid ille se relit, ilium ad se renlre ojxjriere. In tliis sentence the words ipse. Hie. and se 
 all have the force of pronouns of the third person, and the place literally would be thus 
 translated: Anoriistu^ answered: If to him tuujthing was necessary {if he wanted any- 
 thing) from Viisar. he uould hare come to him ; if he wished anything of him. h£ ought to 
 come li) him. The meaninij; of the co/irdinate {if he wished, etc.). is here entirely obscure 
 in the English version, and we ouj:ht to transla'te : but Ctesar ought to come to him (em- 
 phatically;, if he witihed anything of him. 
 
28S 
 
 INFINITIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 § tlOO. Tlie Predicate-Infinitive in infinitive-clauses stands 
 either in the Present or in the Perfect (of either voice). Whether 
 we use the one or the other, depends on the rehition which tlio 
 predicate of the Infinitive-chiuse has to that of the Principal 
 sentence. When the time of the Predicate-infinitive is con- 
 ceived as happening before that of tlie principal predicate, we 
 use the Pkkfect-Lnfinitive ; else the Pkesent-ixfixitive must 
 be used, even if in English a i)ast tense is employed, which in 
 this language always is the case when the ju-incipal predicate is 
 in a past tense. This tense in English is the Pluperfect, when 
 the action of the clause is prior to the action of the principal 
 predicate in a 2:>ast tense. 
 
 Examples -.—Gojuk beUered, thit the enemies hid been defeated, Gajus pu- 
 tfivit hostis dctoHfsm (the dcfcatinir precedes tlie helievini:: ; hence pcrfrct- 
 infutitic(').—G(ijiix mw, that hix brother ican ^/Z/.«t'/<^ Gajus vitlit, tVatreiii siuuii 
 alWiiteni cssui (the ahsence happened at tlie mme time, as it ^yas seen; 
 hence Present-Inthiitive)— ^ hear, that Gaju.s has been sick, xVudio Gajuni 
 {VTotuni fume (the sickness has existed before it was heard tVoni : hence 
 Perl'ect-Intinitive) — / "'^^■/', ^^'"^ (tajxx irould arrire, Cupio, (iajum advenlrc 
 (the anivini,^ cannot precede the wishin^i-:, hut nuist follow it; hence Pres- 
 ^,^^X)—lIi' (jace dinctio/i.% that the field should be pl(juf//ied, Jussit, agruni arilri 
 (the plou.i;iiing does not precede, but follows the direction; hence Present- 
 Intinitive). 
 
 Jiem. 22. For the use of the infinitives of the Periphrastic Conjugations, 
 see P. il, p. 134 foil. ; p. G:JO foil. 
 
 § 391. When a Finite Clause is dependent on an Infinitive 
 Clause, the predicate of the former generally stands in the 
 Subjunctive, subject to the law of consecution. The tense of 
 the Sulrjunctive however generally is not determined by the 
 Predicate-infinitive, but by the Principal Predicate of the whole 
 Ben fence. 
 
 The Germans said, that they intended to keep the Uinds which they had taken 
 hu arms, Germani dixerunt, se agros, quos armis ce.pissi-nt, tenCre yeUe. 
 Here the relative clause "which they had taken" is dependent on an nifin- 
 itive clause, and conse(iuentlv must he placed m the Subjunctive, llie 
 Tense of tliis subjunctive is iiot determined by the govermnij: intinitive 
 irelle),y^\\\i'\i wouUl require a Perfect subjunctive, but ])y the Princii)al 1 re- 
 dicate of the whole sentence {di.rerunt), which reciuires a / luperject. 
 
 Cicfro irrote that he <rax daily ej'pectinr/ letiers, because he iras rerymuc/i 
 troubled by the health of hix duufjhter, Cicero scripsit, se litteras quotidie ex- 
 Bpectare quia tilise valetudine \i'\wmin\Xi}A- arujeretur. Here the predicate 
 of the clause angeretur is in the subjunctive, because it is dependent on an 
 
 INFINmYE CLAUSES. 
 
 289 
 
 Infinitive-clause, and in the Imperfect, because its tense is determined by 
 tJie Principal Predicate scripsit of the whole sentence. 
 
 Jie7n. 2'A. AVhen Comparative Periods are introduced by " that," and 
 must be exiiressed by a Latin infinitive-clause, the Nominative-subject not 
 only of the lirst but also of the second member generally is made an Accu- 
 sative, and the common predicate ahcays stands in the Intinitive. This is 
 also the rule, when the predicates are different. But sometimes the second 
 member is treated like a dependent clause, and then its predicate must 
 have a Finite Form, and be placed in the Subjunctive. For these excep- 
 tions see Book VI. (comparative clauses). 
 
 I assert, that Philip was greater than Alexander, Ajo Philipjmm majo- 
 remfuisse qnam Alexandrum (or majOrem fuisse Alexandra. See § 310).— 
 It is more just, that a guilty person should be acquitted, than\hat an 
 innocent one should be condemned, Justius est mcentem absolvi, quam 
 innoc£ n tern da m ndri. 
 
 Rem. 24. Infinitive Clauses are connected by coordination by means of 
 the same conjunctions, and according to the same rules, as Independent 
 Propositions. The conjunction " thar in the En<,dish clauses is here some- 
 times i-epeated, sometimes not. It generally is repugnant to the English 
 idiom, to make a causal coordination dependent on the conjunction '' that," 
 while in Latin causal coordinates are freciuently placed in the construction 
 of the accusative with the intinitive. Conclusive Coordinations in Eng- 
 lish generally assume a double coordination, a copulative and conclusiv*e 
 conjunction {and therefore). In Latin the copulative conjunction must 
 be omitted. 
 
 Gajus dicit, hunc prmentem, ilium {vero) ahsentem fuisse, Gajus says, 
 that th{^ latter had been present, but tluit the former had been absent.— 
 Gajus dixit, se utrumque contemnere; nihil enimfoidius esse quam ejumnodi 
 inimicilias, Gajus said, that he despised ])otli ; for {that) nothing was more 
 abominable than such an enmity. [Here the conjunction " that'' ought to 
 be omilted in English; but the propositi(m, introduced by for, can nei^r 
 be made a tinite clause or sentence in Latin, when it is coordinate to an 
 intinitive-clause]. Gajus narrdvit, muros fortiter a nostHs defensos esse; 
 1u)st'is Ujitur se recepisse, Gajus reported, that the walls had been bravely 
 defeiuled by our troops, and that therefore the enemies had retreated. 
 (We cannot say in Latin '' et hostis igitur;" but must omit the copulative 
 conjunction.) 
 
 § Xl9ii, The Principal Predicate very frequently is placed 
 after the Infinitive clause in Latin, and especially, when the lat- 
 ter is short, as: Gajus se heri advenisse dicit, Gajus says, that 
 he arri\ed yesterday. — Dux castra moveri jussit. The general 
 gave orders, that the camp should be moved. 
 
 Rem. 25. Every one of the infinitive-clauses, given as examples, might 
 assume an arrangement according to this rule. The bednner ought" to 
 make use of this form, whenever the infinitive-clause has no dependent 
 clauses, especially when the principal sentence consists only of a predica- 
 tive i»hrase. 
 
 § :I9JJ. The English conjunction *' thcif is translated either 
 
290 
 
 INFINITB'E CIAUSES. 
 
 INFINITIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 291 
 
 by conjunc.tion. {nt or quod\ or it is expressed by the iorm 
 of an L.finitive Cla.se, Sometimes the conjunetions ./,.., .., 
 quin are' eniph>ye(l (for these latter cases see book \ 1.) iho 
 
 o-eneral principle is this : 
 
 " 1 IvKiNiiivE CLAUSES are «se.l, when tl.e Tl,at-clauso is rep- 
 rosonled as dedaratice (§ 378, 4). the principal predicate de- 
 notin.' tl.e conception or utterance of tlie Tliat-clause. 
 
 o Ut is used when the Tl>at-..dause is conceived as impera- 
 tive (S 378, 4), or when it is dependent on a verb of ejfc'tm;,, 
 or when it icscvihcs purpose (in order that), intensity, or man- 
 ner ( ita nt = so that ; tantus ut, so great that). 
 
 3. Quod is nsed 1) when the princii-ul predicate is a verb ot 
 emotion, oUMerance of an emotion, of acru-^in;,, praisin;, cen- 
 suring etc. ; 2) when llie That-clanse denotes a/act, and tlie 
 principal predicate is «ot a verb of co.iception or utterance. 
 
 I. OK n,.nrr. tlw followin" vcrbs arc constnicd with an Inlniitivc 
 
 (ilC£ 
 
 r;!i^,trffi;;:i^' i^£ur:«t ^'S;:^yZ:t^^ tu. inu Jtive, dependent „u 
 
 juisf'e, is a Paasire. 
 
 pclliiic:, forcing, permitting, Tvishing, attending and taking care, striving, 
 decreeing, as : Pnciiri, petere (to ask), qu(vrere (to ask), rogdre (to ask), pos- 
 tuUire, hortdri^ rnonere,, impellere, permovere^ incitdre, adducere (to induce, to 
 promjit), iinperdre {not jube re), pra>cipere, propscnhere^manddre (to charge 
 somebody with an order), Huadere^ perxucuUre, cogere, concedcre, permittere,, 
 optdre (not cupere), curdre, cavere, coih'^uUre (to take care for something), 
 Tidi're (wlien it means to aftsnd, to look, that something should be done), 
 operam dare (to take care or pains), niti (to strive), condudere, deceniere, 
 fstiifuere. 
 
 Rem. 28. The verbs, that are construed with quod are : verbs of praising, 
 censuring, accusing, thanking, congratulating, and the verbs denoting eino- 
 tiofift, as joy, pain, sorrow, indignation, wonder and admiration, boasting, 
 sutTering, as: Lauddre, extoUere, vKuperdre, reprehendere, objnrgdre, accnmre, 
 coiidemndre, gratlas agere (to thank), gratam facere (to oblige), gratiddri, 
 gaftdere, Icetdn, gloridri, d/dere, angi, ijidigndri, queri, mirdri, admirdri, cpgre 
 or molcRte ferre (to be vexed by something). Almost all these verbs, except 
 grtftids agere, and gr<itum facere, admit Infinitive clauses instead o^ quod, 
 Avilhout any ditfcrenee between the two constructions, all the verbs men- 
 tioned above bch)nging either to the verba se?itundi or to the Te7-ba decla- 
 raiaU, as: Gaudio ^mpronium «e ab illlns Jiominis soriefdte sejunxiHse (or 
 qmtd Seuiproriins se i<ejuuxit), I rejoice that S. has withdrawn fron^ the 
 comjiany of that man. — Doleo te injirmd Tcthtudine nli (or quod infirmd 
 taletudine vteru duleo); I am sorry that your health is bad. 
 
 J{em. 29. Not all the veibs, mentioned in the preceding remarks can be 
 construed with a That-clause in English; but it is important for the begin- 
 ner, to conmke all these verbs so, oa if they w^ere construed in English with 
 the conjunction " that." Thus verbs of praising, censuring, accusing, and 
 others, are construed with for and a verbal noun in ing, as: '' I praUe thee, 
 for being diligent:' But the Latin does not think so, but conceives the 
 clause thus : " I praise thee, that thou art diligent:' Many of the mentioned 
 verbs are construed with an object-infinitive in English, while the Latin must 
 either use ut or an infinitive clause. Thus we say in English: '' Lhope to 
 oime f' but the Latin cannot say: Venire i<pero,\i\\\ must say: L hope, that 
 I eon come, Spero, me venire posse; or: Si)ero me venturum esse (with the 
 verbal adjective in urua). See P. II, p. 134; p. G81. 
 
 Rem. 8n. A Tluit-cl.-uise afier nnn duhiiare (not to donbt) is introduced by qvin with 
 the suhjiiiiftivc, as: Son dnhito quin jam RointE ."U. I do not doubt tli.'it you are already 
 ar Rom»'. — For the coiistrucrion «»t verbs of fearinir. see j). :i()->, .5(1. For the use of iie'^tT 
 iir ?ton in neL'aiive Thar-eh>nses. pee p. ;^)1, 4. For the use of quomiuus, aud for particu- 
 lar rules on Thut-clHUses see P. II, p. 602; p. 588 ft)il. 
 
 IV. Participial Sentences. 
 § :{9 I. English Dependent Sentences of almost all kinds are 
 frequently changed into a Latin Participial gonstruction, by 
 wliich the English Predicate becomes a Latin Participle, agree- 
 ing like an attribute with some noun, contained in the principal 
 
 sentence, as: 
 
 When Curivs iras ftitting at his fireplace, the Samnites brought him a large 
 qnanlitii of gold. Curio, ad focum f^edenti, Samnites magnum auri pondus 
 attulGrimt (UtcraUy : To Curius, sitting at his fireplace, the Samnites 
 brought, etc.) 
 
292 
 
 PARTICiriAL CLAUSES. 
 
 Such attributive participles in connection with the words de- 
 pendent on thcni, wlien they must be resolved into English 
 
 clauses^ are called: Paktictimal clauses. 
 
 nem 31 When and how P^nijlish cliuisos may Ix- chanired into Participial dances, will 
 be -ho\vn"r.ook VI. Tlu- irranimaticiil form, in which these clauses appear, is thai ot a 
 common at tributive phras^e; except in the ca^e of tlie Absolute Ablatives, bee ^ *>o. 
 
 § 395. The Absolute AiiLATivEs form a Predicative Phrase, 
 consisting of a Substantive (noun, pronoun, absolute or disjunct 
 adjective) in the Ablative, as Subject, and a Participle agreeing 
 with it in gender, number, and case as Fredicate. Clauses in 
 which the absolute ablatives form the predicative phrase are 
 called Absolute PAiniciriAL clauses, while those participial 
 clauses in which the particii)le agrees like a common attribute 
 with a substantive of the principal sentence, are called: Atiri- 
 
 BUTIVE PaKTICIPIAL CLAUSES.* 
 
 nrm. a2. Every adverbial clause {>'. e a clan>:e introduced by an adver- 
 bial conjunction,' as ' vviiiie, after, because, aliiioniib, if, see P. TI, p. 4S8) 
 may be "expressed in tbe form of ablatives absolute if the subject ot the 
 clause is ditferent from that ot the i)rincipal sentence. P. II, p. 179. 
 
 § 390. The form of the Absolute Participial Clause is chiefly 
 used, when a clause, introduced by one of the temporal conjunc- 
 tions after, when, or ichile, has a subject, different froiu that of 
 its principal sentence. But in order to employ this construction 
 it is necessary, 1) that clauses, whose time precedes that of the 
 principal predicate, should have w Passive Predicate; 2) that 
 clauses, whose time coincides with that of the principal ]»redi- 
 cate, should liave an Active Predicate. Hence clauses, intro- 
 duced by ''after,''' which always presupposes a diflerence in the 
 time of the two predicates, can only assume this form, when 
 they have a Passive predicate ; while clauses, introduce<l by 
 ''w/iile,'' which always presu})poses coincidence of time, neces- 
 sarily require an Active predicate for the use of the absolute 
 
 ablatives. 
 
 In both instances the Subject of the clause is placed in the 
 AUative Case. When the Pre<licate is a Passive, it is placed in 
 
 1 It is often discretionary in Latin, to employ Conjunctions or Rklatives with a finite 
 clause or a Pauticipial clause. This will be illustrated by specuil rules in B«>olv \ I. 
 In the followinir exercises it is always svgrjested, when En^jlibh conjunctions must be 
 rendered by Latin Participial Clauaea. 
 
 PAPtTICIPIAL CLAUSES. 
 
 293 
 
 the Perfect j)articiple, when an Active, it is ])laced in the Present 
 participle ; in either instance it must stand in the Ablative^ 
 aoreeinix with the Subject-al)lative in oi;ender, number, and case. 
 The conjunctions after, ichile, or ichen are not translated. 
 
 Examples : — After the enemies had been defeated, hostihiiii victia. — After 
 the queen had been killed, regtiia inUrfccta.- — After this had been obtained, 
 hic re iiiipetrdtd. — After the consul had been slain, consule tniciddto. — When 
 u council had been called toirether, Caesar accused the centiu'ions seriously, 
 CiPK'U', ronrilto courordfo, centuridneH ffrariter incnsdrit. — When the arrival 
 of Ca?sar had beconie known, Ariovistus sent ambassadors to him, Ccesaris 
 adirntn cofinito, yiriori^itf/s legdtoH ad euni mint. In the last sentence the 
 predicate 1) is a passive (to become known, cof/?iof<ci), 2) its time precedes 
 that of the principal sentence (sent), 8) the subject of the principal sentence 
 is dijfrrrnt from that of the clause. We therefore employ absolute ablatives 
 with a per fret particii)le {coguito). 
 
 While the army approached, exercitu appropinquante. — While the ene- 
 mies ^v{\, /tostihtLs ftfr/icntihuft. — While money is wanting, pecunid dejiciente. 
 — While Tarquinius Superbus reiirned Pythairoras came to Italy, Tarquinio 
 {>H])er})<> r(fin(iiitf Pytharpmis in Itnlinm venit. — When nothing hinders, I 
 shall come to-morrow to see Wwc, Nnlld re inipedieiite,cr(u te vmim venlam. 
 In the last exami)le the predicate of the clause is an actite ; the times of 
 the principal and dei)endent pi'edicate are the same; the Subjects of the 
 clause and the iirincijxil sentence are different. We employ therelbre the 
 Absolute Ablatives with a PreKent Particii)le. 
 
 Rem. Z'\. If any of the requirements for tiiis construction is wantinir. ablatives abso- 
 lute cannot be used. ThiJ< the sentence ' Afier Diony-iiis had been expelled from Syra- 
 cuse, he r.iiiLrlit school at Coriiitd', cannot b" rendered" D'onynn SijrdcmU expidm\ i>nt 
 bv an attrii)inive partici|)ial cou^iriicriou : Dloni/ni'i^. S;/ruru>iis exind.<tnft. VoHidhi jixie- 
 ros docHtdt. Cic. Tnsc. 3. Vl. -' I hi-ard (the !< ctuie- of) the irreatcst men after I had come 
 as (jua'stor t^) .\thens\ can neitlier be rendered by ablatives absolute, nor by an attribu- 
 tive |)ariicipial cliii-^e. bnt requires a Unite temporal clause: Audlvi sumtnos homines 
 quum (/'icedor ve/ii^.sem AthPnas. Cic. Or. 1, 11. 
 
 Hem. 84. A clause with a predicate in a perfect active cannot take the 
 form of ablatives absolute, unless the verb is a deponent. But only a 
 few perfect Deponent participles are used in this constructioti, especially 
 mori and the comjiounds of gredi [ingredi, etc.), as: Servio lullio mortuo. 
 After Servius Tidb'us had died. 
 
 Rem. 8."). Coordinate subject ablatives liave their predicate-ablatives 
 in the plural or siiiirular, as in a finite sentence (i^ 127). 
 
 Rem. 8(1. When ju-esent participles are employed in this construction, 
 their ablative sin<^ular always takes the ending e, never i. 
 
 % JI07. When the Predicate of a Clause consists of a Copula 
 with a Predicative Adjective or Noun, the clause can only then 
 be chan(::ed into an Absolute Participial construction, when the 
 times of both the clause and the principal sentence are the same, 
 and hence never when the clause is introduced by " after.''' The 
 Copula is then altogether omitted, and the Predicative Adjec- 
 tive or Xoun is placed in the Ablative with the force of a Parti- 
 
294 
 
 PARTICIPUL CLAUSES. 
 
 ciple. For the use of ablatives absolute when verbs other than 
 esse have the office of the copula, see P. II, p. 76. 
 
 Exampt.es:— Cicerone consnle, irliile Cicero iras connnl — Bruto (ot) 
 CoUailiio consnlibiis (irciicrally written Coxs. by abbreviation), during the 
 conffulsliipof Brut as and Collaiuit/H.—Svrl'nn quoque ccpIo alicjuando tonat, 
 erefi while the sky is clear, it sometimes thunders.— AXgx^xuXvo irSto, rrhile 
 Alej-andor was angry. 
 
 Rem. 37. Not only Nouns but also Pronouns, and Absolute or Disjunct 
 Adjectives, may be the subjects of Absolute Ablatives, as: me Uherdto, after 
 I ll:\(l been released; te pra'scnte.VihWv tliou wast i)resent ; eo intirfecto, 
 after he had been killed; mnltlH repugnantibax^ while many objected. 
 
 li£ni. 38. The Latin often expresses by absolute ablatives, what we ex- 
 press by verbal or other abstract nouns. Here beloui? the following idioms : 
 
 IJrhe condita, after the buildinir of the city (of Rome) ; Gajo mljutvre, with 
 the help of Gajus; me depreratdre, by my mediation; nafurd dure, by the 
 guidanee of nature ; Casare dace, under the command of Caesar; me puero, 
 in my boyhood (when I was a bov) ; me invito, against my will ; CiFmre 
 invito, against Ccesar's will; te nuctOre, by thy authority, by thy influence, 
 by thy instigation ; me iiescio, without my knowledge ; me teste, by my tes- 
 
 h\'m.3d. The arrangement of the absolute participial clauses follows the 
 general rules of the arrangement of the phrases and words. As for the 
 place which the absolute participial clauses occupy in the principal sen- 
 tence, they generallv are placed in the same way as the corresponding 
 English clauses. They mav begin the sentence, or be inserted after the 
 sub]ect or other members (if the sentence. But they generally do not fol- 
 low the whole sentence, unless they contain several ol)jective or attributive 
 l)hrases besides the absolute ablatives, as: Germani—qiiam nui.rim<is manvs 
 ])ossunt cogunt et de impror'iso ad Ciceronis hiberna adrolant, nondum ad eum 
 fanid de Titurii morte pcrlutd. The Germans— raise as many troops as pos- 
 sible, and on a sudden hasten to Cicero's winter-quarters, the rumor of 
 Tituriiis' denth having not yet been brought to him (been heard by hun). 
 Ctes. B. G. 5, ;ji). 
 
 Particijual clauses, as it is apparent from the last example, may contam, 
 T)esides their predicative i)hrases, objective and attributive phrases. The 
 form of these phrases is not affected by the Participial construction, and 
 they are arranged according to the general rules. 
 
 V. Affirmative and Negative Sentences. 
 
 § 398. If the speaker represents the Predicate as real, we 
 call the sentence affiumative ; if he denies the realitf/ of the 
 predicate, the sentence is called negative. 
 
 Few 40 We must liore. as in maiiv other point?, distinjruish between the lofrical and 
 irraiumatical form of ihc sentence, tlure arc between a pure affirmation and a pnre 
 lie.'ation nianv interme<liate doL'rees. those of j)ost-ibiIity. pn.lmbiluy. and doubt. 
 Lo'^Mcallv we would not call such sentences ajfirmafue. but <;ranunatically we call all sen- 
 ten'ceH (ifffn/uitire which contain no netrative words. On the otiier hand many sentences 
 would be hx'icallv called afflrmatire. althou-h thev contain nejrativo words, as lor instance 
 the copulatfve coordination by "not only-but aU^or a"d ne-aiivc queatious, as: Have 
 I not done this ?" 
 
 AIFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 29o 
 
 § 400. A pure Affinnation is not expressed by any special 
 words ; but the Xegatlon is rendered by Negative Particles 
 (/^o//, hand, ne) or by other negative words {?iemOj viunquam^ 
 etc.) The different degrees between affirmation and negation 
 are expressed by limiting particles {fere, fortasse, vix, etc.) 
 Both, negation and affirmation, are increased in force: 1) by 
 thii form of the sentence; 2) by interjections; 3) by emphatic 
 ])articles. 
 
 Ref7i. 41. By giving to a sentence the form of an exclamation (exclama- 
 tory seiitcnee), >ve increase either its aliirmalive or negative force. Such 
 exclamations generally are made in the form of an interrogative sentence, 
 introduced by interrogative adjectives or adverbs (as: How great is the 
 goodness of God! instead of an emphatic aflirmation of the sentence: The 
 goodness of God is great). Sentences of this kind strictly follow the rules 
 of interrogative sentences. (See ^5 422 and 5^ 428, Rem. 73.) 
 
 Re7fi. 42. Interjections belong to the class of Particles. Particles are 
 those parts of speech by which the conception of the speaker in regard to 
 the reality of the i)redicate (and the difterent degrees of this reality) is ex- 
 jMisscd. Iiittrjrrtions are exclamatorv particles, which increase the force 
 of an atlirmation or negation, or denote the ditferent emotions of the mind. 
 The ancients used many interjections, and oaths, without considering them 
 as improper. Most of them caimot be translated into English, since corre- 
 sponding words are either wanting in the language, or profane. The most 
 Usual of them are: heu, heas, ehcu, alas! en,ecce\o\ behold! liercle, ine- 
 hercle or hercule (by Ilercides) ; medius jidius, by the son of Jove (instead 
 of me Jovis Jilius)', mecastor, by Castor; edepol, by Pollux. Here belong 
 also the phrases ''per deos" (by the gods), ''per deumjidem,^' etc. 
 
 §401. Particles either refer to the whole sentence or to 
 single members of the sentence. The former is the case when 
 tlic reality of the Predicate as such is either affirmed, denied, or 
 limited. The latter is the case, when*the action, expressed by 
 the predicate, is restricted to single membei*s of the sentence. 
 Then the particle is said to be emphatic, and the word to which 
 
 it refers is called the emphatic word. 
 
 1) Eqtiivalejits oi'"indeed-\' Na,profecto, rero, sane, certe,qiiidem, omjilno, 
 prorsus ; 2) equivalents of ^' at least:" Cei'te, saltem,modo ; 3) equivalents 
 of " also .•" etia/n, quoque, et ; 4) e(iuivalents of " even .•" vel, etiam, et, quoque ; 
 5) etpiivalents of" especially :''' imprhnis, pnfcipue. m/ixime, potissimvm, jyrcB- 
 sertim; 0) potius, rather; 7) equivalents of "only:" tatitum, modo.^ tantumr 
 modo^ solum, demum, dumtaxat ; S) fortas.se (Jorsitan), perhai)s; 9) equiva- 
 lents of " almost :" fere (j'erirte), pane, prope, circiter ; 10) fix, scarcely, hard- 
 ly ; 11) equivalents of" not :" non, haud, lie. 
 
 'i'he \yAr\'ic\i'^ nempe, nimirvrn, scilicet, videlicet are idiomatically used in 
 certain connections, either in an ironical sense, or = 'evidently', ' namely*. 
 For tandem as particle, see p. 310, R. 71, and P. H, p. 224, Obs. 5. 
 
2'.)G AFl'IKMAXnT. AND LIMITING PARTICLES. 
 
 These Partides Generally are placed inimecV.atcly after the ompbntic 
 
 U,cm,i praadruM c„n>U! \ •'''^y'';;''';p, ,'":„,,«,, ,,.„/,/,• ommm is trans- 
 
 «.„>♦. All these .ttny he m,< e. m1 ;'^,'; ;":",„ „,, ,'.„„„„.„ U„se of 
 to our " ofconrae, to he surt, ancl \vt Ap\nni uy »1 corn'snoiu s 
 
 1?.. ;"« ul..^ or hearer (it 1«;^^,';-' '^''''' '^'^'.^'-.i:.' ' ' 'he m rh v.-,', ,./»- 
 to um-'certaiHl!,, ;''''';;''"«'-^.,;" ';/' ^ u It ,'- . shed I'o.u the ..civerb 
 ,hne (most ui.doi.hteclly). t;/-Jc ' "l^-^, '',''';' "i;, ,,,,,,,,,,-r." Thus /-.« 
 «vto. The hater "'V^"'-^ " 7.'\'-''7; " ^;. ^ e'Vta v7 wime "A". c.rM 
 
 wise than by Hie rhetorical accent i>i *1«: ^' f,;", , jV\ve Tay translate it 
 
 I) .or 1 10 24 —Homines ^ane .^i-rvTru >'Vl""'\'!; ,' ;' s»^«/ — Kuui(U'in log.-s viohin- nolo, 
 J^irJ. -I c qui(UMn tacuit. The latter m A;;/;' / ^ea u cm.^m -nam i(TMui<U;ni Kpiru- 
 TV>.%umrtui/l not brtak the /a«>.-Nc(iue \ero » ^^^V^»^" ",. ^,. ;;,^ „otjorthaf itu-^on 
 
 ^ 40:^ The English expressions at ^<^^^ --^^'^^::^^ ".U so "hai 
 th^t they restrict ^he predicate to mu;m^ . ^,, J,,,,, 
 
 0^/^ exeludes ^^^ />^l^^ J i^^'V^i :^ ^at^least'' thus excludes all persons_or 
 
 conditionally or P^^^'^^y^^^l^'":^^^^^,-^^^^^^^ 
 
 —*Vero (properlv tl.e ablative «f rerum=: Z^l^^X^JvlZ^L-.in tin- sent-nce: ^>/.- 
 
 phatu-ally n-fl-r^ tos..,ue Prov u>n- smeM.enr t^^k.n^^ '^^^^UnJ : Did we lor.aa that ,ln. 
 
 f-V-ln the h*'.,ri„nniu' «>' l^''t«'>-^; H J"'' .^; , A^.^^^^^ Y«'K. indeed. 1 nvi>I» y.ui lad 
 Hcn )re^i'iit at my JZreat aniu-noii. ^J^; Xr;.> V m'ir'76;.< ^ I'/o. lirnte,.<^d i" Vuma- 
 
 AFFIRMATIVE AND LIMITING PARTICLES. 
 
 297 
 
 thiiiti-; but tlie mentioned one from the action of tlie predicate, it is trans- 
 lated by certi' ; as : Quo quid sit btdtian^ niihi quidem eerie in mentem mnlre 
 noil potent^ What can be liappier than lliis, I at least (if others do) cannot 
 conceive. Cie. Tusc. 5, 28, 81. — Certe ego tne noci, I at least (if no others), 
 know myself Ovid. Met. KJ, 840. — (Q. B<i?bius dixit) Unuin certe comuhl- 
 tniii phbiti Rom<'ni(T esse, That one place at least (if not both) of the consuls 
 belouired to tlie Plebeians. Liv. 22, o4, 11. — In this meaning quidem is used 
 very frequently, if not oftener, than certe. 
 
 The other meaning of "at least" is, when the action of the predicate is 
 restricted to ttco (tltemutices, of which the lesser is pointed out as a minimum. 
 AV^e translate it then by certe, s<dtem, or iiindo. The use of quidera is hei'e 
 excluded. If the alternatives are so conceived, that the lesser must cer- 
 tainly happen if the other does not, we use certe ; if neitlier of the alterna- 
 tives need to happen, mltem or 7nodo is used. Thus certe always must be 
 used in connection with aut — auf, while with a single aut, saltern may be 
 used, as : Eripe mi/ii nunc dolorem^ aut minue *<^//^<^;«, Relieve me of^ this 
 jiain, or at least diminish it. Cic. Att. 9, 6, 5. — Qui si nan plus iugenpj valc- 
 baSy quam ego^ certe tiniebas minus, Who, if thou wast not stronger in mind 
 than I, wast at least less atraid. Cic. Att. Fam. 9, 15. — lYbi suadere, ut ie aut 
 cum Casare m/hiscumque conjnngeres, aut certe in otium refer res. To advise 
 you, either to unite with Cajsar and us, or at least to retire U) leisure. Cic. 
 Fam. 9, 9, 2. — Chii magnopere ordbant, ut sibi au.r ilium ferret, vel si id fa cere 
 prohibereturexercitum modo lihenum transportdret,l^\m\Jhmn9, asked (Caisar) 
 urgentlv, to help them, or if he was hindered from doing this, at least to 
 lead an army over the Rhine. — Instead o\' salfem and modo (but not instead 
 of certe), the adversative conjunction tamen often is used in the meaning 
 " at least:' 
 
 Rein. 43. " But at least"* is translated by at certe, at tamen. or by at alone, as : Si mihi 
 repi/b/ica bona/nn non licnerit. at carUto maid. If it siiould not be allowed to me, to enjoy 
 a )ziHn\ <ioverninent. I shall at least be tree from a bad one. Cic. Mil. 84.1):l — In quo si non 
 prifsejis jte/icN/uni. at certe lof/inqiia obsidiOne fames esset titnenda, where, if not a present 
 <lanii;er, but at least hun<,'er must be feared, iu consequence of a lonjj ^x^ge. Ciesar, B. G. 
 5, •2«.». 
 
 ^ lOJJ SI. The regular equivalents of only are tantum, modo, or tantum- 
 modo, which are used with little difference. Solum in classical language is 
 confined to non solum in coordinations (i^ 380). Dumicucat excludes a 
 greater amount or luunber, or a higlier degree (we may substitute but only^ 
 no more, or /to farther), and demum excludes an earlier time (we may sub- 
 stitute fiot sooner, not before). It is especially used in the connection tui?i 
 demu)u (then only). Quod^i iste lUdiam relinquet, faciei omnino male — sed 
 turn demum consifia nostra o/mmutanda sunt. If now that man will leave 
 Italy, he will act badly indeed— but only then (that is, " not before') our 
 l)lans nuist be changed. Cic. Att. 9, \d.— Valde me Athenee delectdrunt ; 
 urbs dumtaxat et urbis ornamentum, AWieus has delighted me much ; (but) 
 only the city, and the splendor of the city. Cic. Att. 5, 10. — Ed'icit, se eis 
 dumta.rat vitam concessurum : bona quidem eorum venditurum, He i)ublishes 
 that he would grant them life only (not more than life), but that he would 
 sell their property. Hirt. B. Afr. 90. 
 
 Rem. 44. If ''only" means "- nothing else but:'' it is translated by a neiration with 7ii*i. 
 See Conditional C laiiscs. Hook \ I. If only is equivalent to •'the only one." it may be ex- 
 prestied t)y the numeial form-adjectives uuvs or solus (§ 257, Hem. 11). But this is mostly 
 confined to pronoum and nouns, which have no attributes. 
 
 § 404. Among the equivalents of " even'' vel (rarely ettum or quoque) 
 
 i." 
 
298 
 
 AFFIRMATIVE AND LIMITING PARTICLES. 
 
 is used before 8U])€rhitlre8, as: Vel amicimmi, even tlie best friends.— 
 Concordia parv(B ren crescunt, dlscordid vel mwcimoi dilubuntur, By concoril 
 small states grow ; by discord even the ixreatcst are ruined. Sail. Else 
 etiam and (pioque are synonyms of ?W; but nu)re freciuently the former 
 than the latter. Both dimn' '<i\\i\ qaoque ori^i^^inally niean " also,'' and arc 
 entirely synonymous, except in their positions. Et in both signitications, 
 even and aim, is limited to certain connections, at least in classical lan«j^uage. 
 It mostly is used aftiT /i^///^ and xid, and betbre pnmouns and demonstra- 
 tives, as: Sed ct Ju>c {illud) Unire debitut, but you nmst mind also (even) this. 
 iV«/M et nobis displicet, etc.. For it is unpleasant also (even) to is, etc., 
 
 Rem.A'i. The use of ?>?« for er^/j (§ 279) is conttned to nounp without adjective attri- 
 butes, to pronouut» and dinjunct deinoubtratived. 
 
 § 405. The equivalents of cspeciiilbj and rather denote a comparative 
 aflirmation (Rem. 48). Potimniuni (esi)ecially, chietly, mainly) ami i>ntia» 
 (rather) represent a predicate, as referring to certain persons, things or 
 actions rather, than to others, either with or without excluding the latter. 
 PotiuH is opposed to one, and potissiniuni to tdl other i)ersons, thmgs or 
 actions. The latter verv frecpientlv may be rendered by the English par- 
 ticle "jw."<^" Bv prmertiin we add to the sentence a c/^///.-<t', containing a 
 reason or cond'ition, which more than othei-s, and without excliuling the 
 latter, go to establish the reality of the i)redicate. Therefore it is followed 
 by clauses, introduced by cinn or si, or by words or phrases which may be 
 resolved into such clauses. 
 
 Sed tamen—qiianfvm, viihi rel fraun inimicorvrn, vel res pvltlica tribuat ofii. ad scribe n- 
 dmn iwfiMmiirn conferani. But Htill, t^o much leisure as» the cuiiiiini: of my eneuiie.< or the 
 rt-puhlic leave to me. I shall fsi)e(iallv apply to writinu' (mainly, cliitfly to \vriiiii<;). Cic. 
 de t)rat. 1. 1. Z.— Creilo ego ; ros—ndnhi. (ju'ul nt. (jtiod—tfjo jxitis^intum Ki/rreJtri/n, I be- 
 lieve that vou wonder, \vhv it is, that ju^t i have arist-ii. Cic. Hose. Amer. 1. \.—Qind 
 piiinnw (pi'frai\aHt u/ide potissiinmn oidiar r Of what bliall I complain lirst. or where 
 thall 1 chiertv be^'in ? Cic. Rofc. Amer. W.— Ut ai/dinrni/s jxjfius ex fe, qiiain (c affiononis 
 ullil iiioUs'i(l\ That wo rather hear vou. than i:ive you any inconvenience. Cic. IJrut. :i, 11.— 
 Ct^sar (jroiiter eo.< accu-iaf. f/'/od ah iix non .s//b/tnf'/r. i)r<.t'<ertim cum eoriun prfCihun. ad- 
 ducttts'Mlum. siiKreiterit. C'sesar reproaches tliem seriously, for not hein-r r<lieved by them» 
 especially since he had undertaken the war. induced by their i)rayers. Cies H. (J 1. u;.— 
 Faciam iero. Litli. pnr.se/fim si ufrl</ve resfnwi grafinn fvinri'jii est, \es. I shall tlo it. O 
 Lieliua especiallv if it will be jdeasaiit to both of you. Ch'. i^vn. i. (\.— QitamoOrtm non 
 t.s/a nie sain^ntuc fama dthrtaf. falsa jirasntinK 1 am therefoie not pleased with this 
 notoriety of scholarship, especially a false one (tliat it», especially ij it is Jalst). t'lc. 
 La-'l. 4, 15. 
 
 Rem. 4t>. Instead of potissimvm very frequently maxime is used in the same sijjnifira- 
 tion as : fti ea via.vime rafiOfie fecit, (jtiod iiolnit eiim l(K-iini—rac<lrt. lie did this especmlly 
 for this reas<m, that he did not wish that place to be vacant. Cies. B. CJ. 1. 'ZS.—linjininis 
 (properly meaninir '• among the first, before the others") and jmnijt'/e (properly tiieaiunji 
 ''b>/ i)re'fere/ict') sometimes, but more rarelv. are used with the force eitluT ol iiolifsiiituin. 
 or of lintstrtim, in order to increase its force, as : Fortuna, qmf jUnrimnm isttext quuin. 
 ill relujuin rebus, turn j>neciptie in b<U(>. F«)rtune. which is most powerful in other respects 
 as well as especially in war. Cies. B. Civ. :J, y\^.— Malta me morent %n discessu. tmpnmis, 
 r/iehercule. (juod disjinigora fe. Many thiii<rs aflect me ou my departure, especially-be- 
 cause I am severed iVoiu thee. Cic. Att. Hi, ti. 
 
 Rem IT. Impninhi and pnvcipue (especially, particularly) are mainly used as adrerbs 
 with the force of an absolute dej,'ree (§ :iV.h. in order to increase th»' intensitijol the pi-edi- 
 cate and ma.rime is e.«pecially used to form the superlative de;;ree (»f descri|)tive adjec- 
 tives (§ -.iiKi) as • Jlomo i/itpi'iinix docfiis (instead of admodrim doitus). an extremely learned 
 imm —J/iiic (tgioni (\tsar et iinhdserat ja;rcip'ie it propttr virtiltem conjidrtxd mcwimr, 
 Ca}>ar had l)ee"ii extremely partial t(» this le-it)!!. and very irreaily contided duul th>' most 
 unbounded confidence) in it on account of its excellent qualities, Ciesar B. Ci. 1, 40. 
 
 Rem IS The equivalents of " especially." when used as p.mztkles. must be distin- 
 truished from advkkbs. and especiallv fn.m the comparative adverbs (sunerlatives), since 
 thev represent a comparison not of the predicate itself and its intensity, but ol its reality. 
 In none of the meuiioned examples (except those of Kern. 4(3), these particles lorm a 
 
 THE NEGATION. 
 
 299 
 
 phnm\\\\\\ the predicate, and less yet with their emphatic words; but they must be coe- 
 euiered as one ol those forms ])y which the speaker affirms or limits his affirmation 
 
 1 he particle jmtins. althouirh it may be followed, like comparative adv.r1)s bv qiiam isi 
 distin-inslied Irom a rc^ul comparison by tlie fact, that it does not compare but ejccladt tho 
 eecond member of the comparison. 
 
 ii -106. Vere, prope, pa>ne denote " almost, nearlv," without much differ- 
 ence m meanmg. But fere, more than propc and pane, is used, with form- 
 adjectives (as nemo fere, omnes fere) and adverbs of tune and place (semper 
 fere, numquam fere), as : 
 
 Bella 1 III re liorvm confecto tonus fere aallim legdti ad Ccesarem conrenerunt. After the 
 war ol the llelvelians was ended, the ambas>adors of almost the whole of Oanl came to 
 Ciesar. Ciesar B (J 1, ?A).—l'ropterea quod Jinmcn Dabis pane totum oppidam cinqit be- 
 cause the river Dnbis encloses neailv the whole town. Ciesar B. G 1 liS —J^romJirmiS' 
 niiia e<fn/m regionum cuitas, almost the stroiifrest community of those regions. Caesar 
 
 Circiter is used only of nnmhers (meaning about), as: Hord circiter Urtid, 
 at the thu-d hour about. Vere with numerals means " quite',' as: Millefere 
 hastes ocr'ixi .sa/it, quite a thousand enemies were killed. 
 
 Rem. 49 Satis fere means '' qaife enough.'' His fere verbis, chiefly (mainly) with these 
 vrord^.—IIijEcjeredicerehabui, I had chiefly thiA to say. 
 
 The Xegatiox. 
 
 § 407. The regular negation is Jion. The use of ne is con- 
 fined to imperative sentences, to negative coordinations (§ 409) 
 and to certain clauses and phrases (§ 415). Ilaud is used m 
 certain connections only, especially in hand scio, instead of 
 9iescl<), hand inar/nus, hand txle/uus^ hand mult us, hand medio* 
 cris, haud difficilis, haud stnie (indeed not). In Caesar hand 
 occurs only once {haud seio an, B. G,5,54), in Cicero rarely. 
 
 The jdace of non, Avhen it refers to the whole sentence, gen- 
 erally is immediately before the finite verb (in infinitive and 
 particij)ial sentences before the predicate), and hence before esse^ 
 whether this word is a copula or an auxiliary, as: hoc fieri non 
 j)otest ; hostibus euhi non j^rohibentilms ; dixit, se hanc calami- 
 tateni ftrre non posse; hcBc necessaria non sunt ; caMra expug- 
 ,nata non sunt. But when the negation, as emphatic particle, 
 refers to single members of the sentence, it immediately pre- 
 cedes them, as: Non Gajus (sed Sejus) hoc mihi dixit.— JVou 
 cmne /acinus in onniivita nascitur ; Not every crime appears 
 in every rank of life. Cic. Rose. Am. 47. 
 
 Rem. 50. Non frequently opens the whole sentence to increase the stress 
 of the negation,— i\'<>;i before adjectives imparts to them a negative mean- 
 ing, which may also be expressed by the prefix in (non grafus = inf/rdtus; 
 non multi — pauci). The quantitative adjective and adverb "little" is 
 
300 
 
 THE NEGATION. 
 
 jjonerally oxprossea hy non imiUum,m){ hy f>aulhim,\\\\\Q\\ denotes "a 
 liitlc'\ The P]iii,disli '"(A>" iti m-uative sciiteiices is not separately ren- 
 dei-ed : IVie f/eniVdl did not gr<f/ii tlie rondi(i»/is, Dnx condilioues non con- 
 cessit. The English ''no" hetbre adJ«'Clives and adverbs, is rendered 7i6»/i, 
 not nnllus: I hdd no great plcdxiiie, Voluptilteni hahui non niagnam. 
 
 Rfm. 51. Often two iifLjatioiifJ .are cnnected in the same sentence : 1) \on jtossitm non 
 with un ohjcci-inliuitivf means " i cannot leli) doUvj; somrthini,''', "it is impossiitle not 
 to ", " 1 mnst " : .■E'^ui/iifffn (uani non /)0'>ii von piofMlre ; It was impi)s>il)ie lor me not 
 to acknowledge (I eunid noi help acknowled^'inir» your fairne-!?. Cic. Fam. 1, U, -^ti.— AoH 
 ixxf^'i/tn hon vonfifcri, <'>/)n>/hln mt nut.ihno {/au'/io, I must confesn to be overwhelmed 
 with ihe irreatc'st jt)v. II). 1, !>. l.—i) Xon wiiii a ne^^iiive form-aiijective or a'herh i§ 4('8> 
 has a (iitl'erent meanini; according as the neiraiion prei edcs i»r lullows {iiiin nuniqudni = 
 nometinn^s ; monfjudni turn - aiway»» (n. 259. li. 5; p. iiil. li. 12).— 3) \ec non. ntc nihil 
 liave the force of an attirmative parliclc added to a copulalive coordination : X^c hoc 
 Zeno non vhW ; Nor indeed did this e-cape Zeiio'i* ailention ( - and indeed Zt-no 
 no. iced \\>U). (Vic. Fin. Arirl.—Xec t'ini>-n f<cil nihil; .\nd yt-t he really knows sometliing. 
 Cic. Alt. 2,20. — 4) Xtque.. .neque, foll<<win^' a m-gative word have thf mc-aninu of <////. . . 
 aut : Afihi nihil neque a (e ij)So neqin- ah uUo alio lUwlvtntn tuo scriptum ent (Notiiinir luia 
 been writieii lo me rifh>^r by thyself, or etc.). Cic Fam. 2, I'J, 1.— 5) F.,r Jie non t^ee It. bii. 
 For non nui see P. II, p. 74U. 
 
 lii'm. 52. Tiie force of the negation often is increased by the usual em- 
 plialic particles : non mne, indeed not ; ftre non, almost not ; omnino non, 
 not at all, under no circmnstances, by no means. Instead of omnino non, 
 the adverb /teqftorjuotn, or the phrases nullo niodo, nullo jxirfo are frecpiently 
 used, yot even is not expressed by non vel or non etiom, but l)y ne — qnideni, 
 the emphatic word beiuir plaeed between ne and qnldeni,^i\s: lie does not 
 ecen lauu-h, Ne ridet i[{\idvm.—f did not eren tell the kini;, tnot, etc., Ne li'.ui 
 quidem (lixi, etc. The emphatical word, which in tlie last example is 
 ''king,'' is not always indicated by jio.v'tion in Eniilish,but must be inferred 
 from' the connection. In Latin the i)osition of the emphatic word between 
 ne and quidem never can be changed. 
 
 § 408. Many words attract tbe negation ; tbat is, tlie nega- 
 tion is blended with tliem into one word, as : nescire, neqitlre, 
 nolle, negdre, the form-adjectives neuio, 7nhil, tivllm, neuter, the 
 adverbs numquam, 7iusqua)ii (nowhere), nequaqnani (by no 
 means), nondiun (not yet), nlhllduia (nothing yet), mdlnsdnm, 
 nemodum (none, nobody yet), and the conjunctions ?i€que, ?ieve, 
 nisi. In the combinations of these negative expressions, tlie 
 Latin idiom frequently is diiferent from the English : 
 
 1. The verbs 7iescire, nequ'tre, and nolle cannot stand in the satne sentence 
 with any form-adjective or adverb having the meaning '^uiy" or " ever." 
 Thus we must say: Yon do not know hoic to do anythintj, Nihil facere scltis 
 {not (luicquam tacere nescltis.— Tr<3 cannot »ee anybody, Neminem vidCre 
 possumua {,rwt quenuiuam vidPre neqnimus).— ir<3 are not icdling ever to 
 change this km, Ilanc legem nuitare nunquam volumus {not banc legem 
 uufitiam mutfu'e nolumus). Hence form-adjectives and ne(j<itive adverbs at- 
 tract the negation more strongly titan verbs. 
 
 2. When form-adjectivks and adverbs, both of which may attract the 
 negation, are in the same sentence, the negation generally is attracted by 
 the FORM- ADJECTIVE. Thus the English expressions never anybody, neocr 
 
 THE NEGATION. 
 
 301 
 
 anything must be changed into 7wbody ever, nothing ever (nemo unquam, 
 niillus imtiuam, nihil unquam; not nunquam quisquam, nunquam ullus, 
 nunquam quiccpiam, although under special circumstances the latter ex- 
 pressions may become correct). 
 
 3. When a negative sentence, or a sentence containing negative form- 
 adjectives, advei-bs or verbs, is placed in coordination with a preceding 
 proposition, the negation must be taken from its place before the finite 
 verb, or from its combination with the negative words, and must be joined 
 witli the conjunction. The negative words then assume their aftiri'uative 
 forms, and instead of nemo we must use quisquam or ullus; instead of 
 nihil, qiiicqutun ; instead of: )kfi II us, ullu^; instead of neuter, titer (either). 
 The conjunctions et (atque, etc.) take the form neque or fiec {nor, euui not). 
 The other conj mictions take the negation before them, either in the form 
 of non or of neque {nee). Tims ''but nof is rendered by neque {nee) vero;^ 
 yet not, still not, hoicerer not, by neque {nee) tamen ; for not by non enim or 
 neeiue {nee) enim (not by 7iam non); therefore {hence) not, by non ergo or ?ion 
 igitur or neque igitur (not by ergo non, etc.) Fi'om this rule the disjunetixe 
 conjunctions alone make an exception, which produce no change in nega- 
 tive propositi(ms. 
 
 Examples '.—And tee hare seen rwhody {nor did we aee anybody), neqne (nee) quemquam 
 vidmnis (o(,f et nemmem). And he nerei' returned {nor did he ever return), neque uh-c) 
 nntiuam rednt {not et nunqnam). And he ean not see the enemies {nor can he see the ene- 
 7mts), lu'qiie hostis videre potest {not et liostTs videre non potest, or neqnit). And thv is 
 t/y no means certain, neque hoc ullo modo certum est v^ot et— nullo modo).-^(/^ he did 
 not say f/tfs. neque (ik'c) vero hoc dixit.— 5'^i// / di'l not learn this from thy oration, neque 
 tamen hoc e.x t.r itione tiifi didici (»ot tam«;n— non didici).— For he did not fear to die, 
 neqne <'nini inon ei:im) mori timeMat {mt nam mori non hmeUat).— Therefore ^vcli men 
 ou//lit mtt to lire, non eriro (iiritun ejusmodi homines vivere debent ynot eriro— non debent). 
 — Hut tre t^hall not only take puiits. fjuf, etc., nee vero operam dai)imus csolum, sed etc! 
 (/<(>/ sed mm solum operanuiabimus, sed). 
 
 Rem. 5:i. Both '• nor" and " and not " are «renerally rendered by ,ipque (for neve see R. 
 55», but in tlie followiiii; instances by e' non • \) Et non may be n^ed instead ot neque if 
 th nei,',ition clo-^t-ly beloii^'s lo a >inirie word ot the sentence (so fliat we iiiav in Rn<'iish 
 unite not by a hyphen with this word», as: Demetrius, vetiis et nem iqnobili.< dicendl 
 ma-ister: an old and not ot,scure (nof-oi>scure) teacher of rhetoric. Cic. Brut. 91. 2) Et 
 von is always used in-tead of neque if it i< virtuullv attiiinitive in clauses introduced by 
 si. tamquani (as if), qutai (as if > and ut, ^ el non' h'lvini,' the force o[' instead of : Xulla 
 rv.* recte yx>-V.>< admiuislrari si unusfjuis(/>te relit rertta sjtectdre. et kon ad voluntdt<m 
 ejus qui viha h'if)u<rit acceiler<' : if eveiy one would reixaid the words onlv, and not 
 enter ( = instead of ciiterint;» into the meanuij^ of the speaker (i. e. it is proper that 
 evervone should t-iitcr into thi^ meanini,' efv) Cic. In v. 2, M.—Lippitudinc adductus sum 
 vt dirlarf-m /tanc epi^tolaw, et non ipse scrifjerem .' I am compelled bv sore eyes to dic- 
 tate this letKT. INSTKAO OK wri!in;.' it invs.-ll". Cic.(iii. Fr.i.i. 1.— 3) '!\nd not' {but not) 
 conne tni: .>*'nirle members of a sentence is nsvndetically <'X|)re!f?ed by uon, without et • 
 1 mean (iajiis, and (but; not Sejus', Gajum, non iiejuni, dice. 
 
 4. Negations in ci.auses introduced by subordinating conjunctions do 
 not combine witii the conjunctions, except with <//'(that) and si. Ut cen 
 erally takes the form ne, or ut ne (always with subjunctive), the negative 
 words of the clause* becoming alhiiuative (as in No. 8), aliquis tfc quisquam 
 bemg changed into quis{ne quis, ne quid). In English ' lest \ or • that not ' is 
 used, or an infinitive after not. But when that not is preceded by .^o or 
 thus {tarn, ita, sic etc.), non retains its place and that is translated by ut. 
 
 ..^^^^y^-^^ '—^^if'^''' uarm their young ones with their feathers, lest they may be hurt 
 {that they may not be hurt) by cold. Aves pullos pennis fovent. ne fri<rore la^dantur — Who 
 tlunds, mud strive not to fall. Qui t.tat uiti debet ne lal^atur.- Uf demand that nobody s 
 
 > By sed non only in the cases of a direct or restrictive opi>osition. and then non is olaced 
 ttn?nedtatelj/ after seU. 
 
S02 
 
 THE NEGATION. 
 
 ofrfnre.<^ bf wmUhe>l Postnl.lmnj». no cujiis injun:^ pnniantur.-r;i^v rt-'^^vV. ^/m/^A<w^<m- 
 diZL sfiouid nerefb. chamie^L Orf.hant, m- u.u,ua,n c..,.( hiium-s ilh. ''y'l'^'-^,;':';!;;- ^jj 
 /7Y;om w,re so twtd. that tkey co>,ld not wirance a„y uuhr V'l""^'''";iV;V- ''J Ll', ! 
 lon-ius pro-rodi non p.)s>«ent.-7'A6 orator sjtoke so. Ihat nobody underdood /am, Orator 
 itu FocQtut* est. lit iK-mo etim audln-t. 
 
 Tho coninnction xi introdiiciiiir a ncirativc sentence, is iienenilly chani^aHl 
 into /u.x/, and translated by unhxs or if y/r>/, as: Nisi lute ita simt, unless^ 
 this iH xo (if tliis is not so). Nisi forte means ''unless perhaps {\uA lusi 
 fortifsse). 
 
 Hem. .54. For the upc of fd non in^toad of nisi, pee Book VI. 
 
 Rem .55 When a iii-'ative proposition is copiilativelv connt>cted with a clause intrb- 
 iliiccdbvv/ or n^ and not or nor arc n..t transljited hy neqae but by neve Kneu). as: 
 Citsar exhorts th.m to throve thdr darts from afar, and not to a ppn nich ywy) nearer 
 C^sar exh.)rtAtur eos, nt prociil tela conjiciant. nere (neu) l'n)pui=* accedant.-//rsA /A«e, 
 voitolosl coarane,and not (nor) let thyself be orerwhelmed by (I,. rjreatness oj the task, 
 Ko.'o te nc animiun dcniitlas. nere te obrni neijotii nuiLrnitudine sums. 
 
 Rem 5<i The En-dish conjunction lest after verbs of feakino is equivalent to that hni 
 in Latin is expres^Ted by ne\ while the conjunction lest not or that not x. translated by 
 ut, oxnf ncm : Timeo ,.. r^niaf ; I am afraid lest (tlnit) he may coMie.-]«r/v/>^/r '/^ r.dde- 
 rent'ir litter^e, I was afrai.l that (le.t) the letter would no^ be '1;;H^^^7'< • l./S; ^='"Vj^- \- ; 
 \.-Ve>eorne non lirent ; lam afraid it will not be allowecl. Ih. Alt. % VJ,.i.- Timto ne 
 non impttrem; 1 am afraid lliat I sliall not succeed, lb. 9. (i.ti. 
 
 § 409. Tlic COPULATIVE COORDINATION of tico 7ier/ative 
 phrik.ses or sentences is made by 9ieqfie {nec)—Heque {nee), 7iei- 
 
 ther nor, corresponding to the affirmative et — et, non solum — 
 
 sedetiam. But when clauses connected by '' 7ielther—nor'' are 
 dependent on the conjunction "that," so tliat the hitter in nega- 
 tive sentences wouhl be rendered by ne, we translate the English 
 ^'neither'" by 7ie, and the English nor by neve (neu). 
 
 Examples: The ambassadors neitlier can nor iciU consent, Lei?ati consen- 
 tlre nee possunt nee \o\\\\\\.—Xeithrr Sripio nor /Mia.s w<is present, Neqiie 
 Bcipio neciue Lielius adtiiit.— 77/^' Ounls neithrrwishnlto leare the camp, nor 
 mre thuj raidi/ to f/irc buttle, Galli necpie castra reliiuiuerc volebtint, neqiie 
 pu«nmre p:n-ati vrlint—Qfsar demamled, that he shoa/d mither proroke t/ie 
 yEduans icithout cause, nor should make war on t/wm or {and) their allies, 
 Csesar postidavit ne ^Ediios injuria (trithout cause) lacesseret, neve ins so- 
 ciisque {or sociisve) eoruni belluni nifenet. 
 
 ft 410. The Eni^lish negative coordination with ^'' not only 
 
 not hut even'' is expressed by non modo (solum) non — sed 
 
 etlani. The coordination witli ''not only not— hut not even'' is 
 made by non modo {solum) non— sed ne quidem (or sed vix), as: 
 
 Ml/ pain is not only not diminished, but eren increased. Dolor mens nou 
 modo (solnm) non minuitur, sed etiatn au<::Gtnr.— 7 iu}f oidi/ am w>t angry 
 with ihve, but do not eren censure thy action, Ego non modo tibi non irascor, 
 sed tactiim tuum ne reprehendo quidem. 
 
 Eem. 57. When coordinate sentences with " not only not— but not ev£n" 
 have tiie same predicate, the coordination is made in L:itin by mm modo 
 {solum)— sed ne quidem, leaving out the second non of the lirst propt)sUion, 
 
 IMPERATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 303 
 
 as : To the Senate it teas not only not allowed to help the republic, but not even 
 to mourn, Senatui non solum servare rempublicam, sed ne lug5re qnidem 
 licuit. 
 
 ^411, Infinitive clauses are made negative according to the general 
 rules, but when the}' are governed by a verb denoting an utterance {rerbum 
 direndi (^ 393, Rem. 26), it is customary to take out the negation from the 
 iullnitive clause, and to change the rerbum dicendi into the verb negdre (to 
 deny), as: 77/^' ambassadors declared, that they had not seen the enemies, Legiiti 
 so hostis vidisse ncfp'irunt. — He promised that, if they would do so, he irould 
 not rhihite their territon/. Si ita fecissent (Ji 3-47) finis eorum se violaturum 
 (s^ 347) negavit. Ca?sar B. G. 6, 32. 
 
 ^ 412. Wiien the first member of a comp.vratiye period is made 
 negative, the comjiarison oi difference (i^ 295) is hereby made a comparison 
 i)\' ((juality, and non magis — quam (not more — than) assumes then the mean- 
 ing of '■'■ as little — as,'' while non minus — quam (not less — than) stands for 
 "as much as." Non minus — quam is the general way to render the English 
 " ax much as'"* (sec ^ 301), and imn magis — quam the only w^ay to render the 
 English "as little as." P. II, p. 757. 
 
 I lore thee a>i tnnrh. a-s thou doest me, Ejjo te non minns amo, quam tu me (Ep^o lo 
 tantu/n amo quantum lu nn\ would mean : I lore thee only as much as — no more than — 
 thou doest mt). — (iajus nill hurt you as little o-v /. Gajus vos^ non mairis lyedet. quam 
 eiro. — Son nascitur ex malo bonum. non magis quam ficus ex olea, (Tood does not j;row 
 from evil, an little as (no more than) a fig from an olive-tree. Sen. Benef. 5, 7. 
 
 lUm. .')8. When a comi>aris()Ti of Kqi'ALiTY (hy tam—qiiam) is made negative {non 
 tarn — (juam). it nu-ans t-ither less — than, or not so much— as. Hoc imii tarn facile est nobis 
 quant tibi. This is less easy (not as easy) to us, than (as) to thee.— O eos non tarn constan- 
 tia nostra ddecfet. quam splendor qffendat. So that our linnueiss does not so much please, 
 as our renown hurts them. 
 
 Rem. 59. The English ' not so. . .as not to ' is expressed by ' non tarn ' with ut ; Non tarn 
 dire< sum ut hoc eniere jyossim ; I am not so rich as to be able to buy this. 
 
 Re/n. TiO. • \o more than ' bef(»re nuniiTuIs (§ '.iVi) is expressed by non amplius or non 
 plu.t, which i^ often pbicfd after the nuinrrai : Xo more than. 500 srtfdiers were kilted ,' 
 Non ami>lius (plus) quingeiiii milites (or quinirenti, non amplius, milites) iuterfecti sunt. 
 Aon anij)lia8 also means ' no longer ', ' not any longer ', referring to time. 
 
 YI. Imperative Sentences. 
 § 41S{. Imperative sentences are those whose predicates are 
 rcj)resented as ' willed' by the speaker. They are either inde- 
 pendent or dfjyendent, the latter being called '' Imperative clauses'* , 
 
 Explanation. Independent imperative sentences are shown to be imperative by the 
 mere grammatical form of their predicates, which, in Latin, is either the impkrative 
 Wood, or the si^BjrNCTivE, or the FUTt'KK, and in English the imperative mood (for 
 the Becond person), the circumlocution with ^ let\ or the potential with 'may ' (for the 
 first person plural, and for the third p<'rson), or the future with shall. — Dependent 
 sentences are marked as imperative, 1) by the governing verb (I commanded, wished, 
 ali<)we(I, etc.»: 2) by the grammatical form of the clause, which i.s always a That-clause 
 \\ith its predicate in the subjunctive. 
 
 g 414. It" the predicate of an indejjendent affirmative impera- 
 tive sentence is in the second peksox, it is generally in the^^r^^ 
 J'or)n of the imperative mood, but sometimes in the present sub- 
 junctive, or in tlie second form of the imperative, or in the 
 future tense (7i. 61). — 2. If the predicate is in the third per- 
 
304 
 
 IMrERATIYE SENTENCES. 
 
 IMPERATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 305 
 
 soy it is o-encrallv in tl>e lyresent siihjunctive, but sometimes m 
 the II. form of th J imperative {R. 03).-3. If the predicate is lu 
 tlie FIRST PEKSON plural, it is always in the subjanctive present : 
 lleikamus ad nostras. Let us return to our friends. Cic. Att. 15, 1. 
 Bern 61 The first form of the imperative mood is regidarly used if 
 the ^iion c^mmand<.d, requested, adnsed vW ^^ ^l^f ' 1 " ^^ /""io^ 
 must be immediately performed as : ^' //''^^'^Vf '//;^; ; , '^^^^^^^^^^ 
 lio liiiu \(^ the stike Liv 8 l.—Perne ut ccepi.sti; Continue as joii nave 
 
 to y .,.>■ li-mos, a,..l (lefen.l then.. U.. Cat. :i, 12- ','";. ^•'"'Z ■. ' 'ri e 
 5 ls,dce is «seJl as salulat..ry tbrmula. ' He saluied , be «elco.ne ).- 1 c 
 
 present subjuncive ..f .be copnla (../.v) i» /■•"'"'•'"'^. i;^ ''^ ' ''V.' j ,^V^' o"^" 
 mperative,4; 0/«<.««» "»■ 7■m^• Ik- caioful,. «u^T . . C.C. la^ 
 
 li.^i' tHii ■.liafuMmf Be vour own senate, lb. 10, 10, -'.— *(»7""M; oe 
 w'e i , F 1 3, lO.-ft, d» ammo quo soles <■.«•; I5e "r.sucb a cbs|>o- 
 s ,■ ,., Vas itTs yol,V\.;nt. lb. A,t. 5, 12, :5 Rarelv ,be - M-'f'v;-;, "^ 
 if tlie nrediratc is an or.linarv verl) •. Ad "le m/hssioh- I, It <:;,.■< ; u«< ». Uc 
 Fii 14 '1 -Tl.e shXO.M) K<m« cf tbe in.p.Talivc (son.elnn.s tie futuie 
 is nsec I'rir the pe lo.-n.anco of .be action co,..inan,i«l (pe.™iued elc.) 
 s de ^nVle t on !.f,;t,.,-e contingency, or can l.e |.e.-fo.n,ed -j X ;U sm.- 
 ful,n-e time, as : «« erit quid ,„ojos, domo mUUlo lolullonom It a. . . n.S 
 
 in,po,-.an. will happen, dispatch an e.xp.-ess l^'«'<''--';''";''; ;, . '^' •y'„\'''.,? 
 SeeOus 4) 2) li is also nsed in laws and s;eneral precepts (see OBb. ..). 
 
 OBS. .. Frequently the s„.,ject «f l.re,lic«te. '''^^^P^^":,^'!;,:;"^^^^'^^. 
 Att 3, 4.- r.', « >m ,m>m.jr,ieit M;o/w ; Do enjoy . In> 1. iMtr '■■'"''""-'"'-■, "• " 
 
 ltm:".he;','."a ;.,erc i» ,„.l,o.ly «.,,, has not the n. n ;;,,.1>;|-,- .',":,;;",;, V. ^ ' ^^;!;„^ 
 ll„l,f(„ i» ahnosr ...«ays us.-.l lu-te;..! of *"*';/'' ''',,'" .if Cic \tt t 1.'.. So n> ilie 
 /i.lr /u Irfoii. liiMlu ,' tint .ieeji tins a- a secret (Willi your., lli. cic. .^ii. 
 
 yonrselr. ,„;,. nnike the hest <,r It u. e ''j!'''', ""'i'',^, ,•;■., ,';^,V,,L'^: .•!.;. V.Ufo ' = «»... 
 n„,rlal., lb. Ke„. li, U^ So ;/<'^ ;™ , "S',,^ ,^ ' 1. aVtien, iinifiu-ela^.i;-... st> le, 
 
 'C"i:."^':^:£i^i£'- 1,^;: ;s ;;rqnera^ "':i.r:;i;ii:^r;;;';h;f i;^p;i; ;;^H^r!^ 
 
 Macfl virm^ esto ; H. ^--'^^^^;- ^^^^{^l^-^:^ 1 .li^ V ,fc!/'( probably cor- 
 Liv 7 :i«). So Ii»noa"iiiioeKtitte. Suet. ^ J^- ^•'^'^'"^ ^^ ';,''■ )../w/ /,/, Afthm' If voa 
 
 phraseo.o;:y ; 2) ill or.liimry nse refernns t" ^e l;'"-. >'','';•.'<■' ',';.™.l' | ■"„ 1 he In,- 
 
 rules abontaLrricnlfure, while the later agnculturalists use Pubjunctives or futures : Bene 
 terrain ronnninnifo .- i'uiVerize the goii well. Caro, R. R. 151. So occatiionallv (but rart-ly) 
 ill Pliny : Oca lurid nova xupijonifo (place q^z^ under tiie hen:* at the new moon). Arbo- 
 nnn rairire^ltnid phnd optr'ifo. llurnhliy locis irttevlunw^erilo. Piin. 18, 75.— Cicero quote» 
 tlie etliic (positive, noi the lu'L'ativei rules of tlie St.iics in the II. pers. of the II. I'oim : In 
 t^nf'^iitid ptnuaiilto ; Abide by thy opinion. Cic. Miir. 31,*;.5, So in rejrard to positive 
 divine couiinands. an: Ihus, ' hoc farito. hoc 7ie fectrbt \ diceret ; God would say'Tliou 
 Hhait do this ; but that thou shalt not do ', Cic. Uiv.2, «1. 
 
 Obs. 4. In theoiioiNAUY use of the II. form of the imperative in the second person 
 (in /o and tut"), Cicero is more paiiiciilar than theother writers. In the followinj; in- 
 «•tances he always uses the second form (for which sometimes the future tense, or the 
 present subjunctive is slibstituied. but never the first form of the imperative) : 
 
 1) When a C(»mmand, request, permi>sion etc. (beiup afhrniative) is made dependent 
 on a coniinirency ejjjressed by a cause with a predicate i/i the future-present or fuft/re- 
 pef;rVr/*. ti~: .Si Ltntuli navis non eiit. qiiolilnplacebit imjxmito ; If tliere will l)e no vessel 
 of Lentiiiiis. place them (the statues) in any vessel voii choose. Cic. Att. 1. 8.— /S'i retn 
 nulla /n/ia/jebis. quod in buccam venej'it K-iVnto ; If you have no news, wriie what comes 
 into your mouth. Att. 1, Vi. [Compare tlie fcdhiwinir similar examples with futures and 
 present subjunctives: Si nihil habebis, fanun {ta'ibas aJiquid. An.4,^i.2.— Quum jn'i- 
 tnuni jMfteris, tua cousilki ad me srriban. Ih. 5, ll).— ^i tiihil crit, quod in ttuconn venerit 
 sciibes. lb. 14. l.—Quod quum scies, j'aii>s ut sciamus. lb. 8. 15.— Si quid acciderit noviy 
 fades lit sciam. li). Fam. 14. 8.]— Jrf lirufuw. si quid fcribes. ofjjurqdto euin quod etc. 
 Cic. Att. \'2.'iH\.— Omnia no.ytro, quoad ens limnee {ii^ loti<r as you will he iii Rome) ita 
 gerito, regito, ffuberndto, ut nihil a me exsp-ctea. Ih. ]n.'Z.'2.~i\'isi intellex^ritis, p/dires, 
 nullum esse rrfficium tam sanctum, quod non ejus scelus tioldrit, rirvm opfitnum esse judi- 
 catote. Cic. Rose. Am. ;i8.— r^^j multu aidie v\q. facta videbitis. ibi i^c^lns quoqve latere 
 putatdte. lb. 40.— .Vi roleti»'. in suspicidne latrntdte\ It). 2{).—Quum me confectum luctu au- 
 dies, fxistimdto vie stultifiiz m-v pieuani fe.rre. Cic. Att. 3. 8, A.—Qwim litteras a librarii 
 mann acc^^iteHs, ne paullmn quidem me otii hahui^sejudi-dto. lb. (^u. Fr. 2. 16, 1,— Quum. 
 val>^tudini 'ua^ dUi'jtnfis4ine consul i(,ri<. turn ronsulito navigatidni. lb. Fam. Id, 4.— 61 
 vn^ ass^qui jK}fu<n''\ ut ti'd rvhb'itur septnt». lb. Tusc. 1, 43.— But the other writers use 
 also the first form of the imperative in this construction, especially Livy : Vbi evasero 
 in summum mont»rn. perge hinc. teque et exercitum s^rra. Liv. 7, '^\.—Quum togd siqnnrn 
 dede/o. turn umliqw- iurlnvn inraditf, ac st<-riiite omnia ferro, Liv. 24. :iH. — Si 'h<JBcim})e- 
 di't aliqifis. fert^ serinonibus b^^lla. lb 4.5. [But : Si dimirandum eiit, turn tu in novissi- 
 vios le ncipito. Liv. 7.40. ) Piautii-^ very rareiy uses the first, form of the imperative in 
 this connection : Impinqe pugnnm. si 'muttir'erif. Baceh.4, 6. 2. Generally he has the 2. 
 form, as : Asin. 2. 2, lOS : 1. 3. 13 : lb. 75 and SC) : Bacch. 2. 2. 49 ; 3, (i, 2ti ; 4, 3, 7« and 92. 
 
 2) If no clauses are addi-d with a fiiiure predicaw. the imperative is in the second 
 form, when either a future c.ntinireiiry is undtn^tood. or the action is such that it 
 caunot be performed intnndiatehj ; lllud corT^to ne ille rersus falso testimonio confirme- 
 tur ; Take care lest that verse be n«»t confirmed by false testimony n. e. When such 
 a testimony will l)e ofI"ered. coitiadict in. Cic. Qu.Fr. 1. 3. 8. — ^Vf^/y?a< a notns^ IVteras 
 exsptcta, ast plures etiam ipse inittttu {i.e. vhen you will receive frequent letters by 
 me). lb. .\tt. 1. Ki, 17.-- 7V///'//// yHHina exspec'dto : Kxpe't my third poem (i. <^. when I 
 sliall have accoi.i)lished it). 11). Att. 1. 19. 10 (Comp. *-j>7><-c/a in the preceding example). 
 -De Bruto sem)^r ad meomnia persci ifdfo ii. e. whenevir you will hearof him). lb. 14, 8, 
 2. — Quoniam ad omnia pulrinaria supjUicatio de-ret a est. celebratdte illos dies cum corijU' 
 gibuM rtstris (not now. but wiieii tin se d.-iys will come). lb. Cat. 3. 10.— />*« t/it ^n'/z/t/m 
 ridefo; Only see about the day when it is due (i. e. when you will make the arrange- 
 ments about the payments lb Att. 13. 'Z\.— Annum quidem xitique teneto ; Insist anyhow 
 upon the year (i. ^. when this matter will come before the Senate^, lb. 5, 9. — Tu modo 
 auctoritdtem tuam det'mdito ; Take care of your own authority (whenever there will be 
 an occasion fur it). lb. «j. 10. 10. -Tliis nsa/e is also observed in anteclassical language : 
 Abi hinc domujn ; ranto hue cirater meridiem. Plant. Most. 3. 1. '15. 
 
 lifin.^2. The second person of an afliniiative iinperative is f-eqnently expressed by 
 cnurMLoceTios : 1) by fac or cura with a clause introduced by nt and the subjunctive ; 
 2) by vtlim with a subjunctive witiiout '// (p. 2t2. 3K as : Fac ut considerate nuviges ; Sail 
 cautiously. Cic. (^u. Fr. 2, 1. — Cura ut qua/n jm/nnm venias ; Come as soon as possible. 
 
 gives the formula ' Si paret condemndto. si non paret ab^olvito ' (Condemn, O jud^e, if it 
 is proved: if not, acquit). But in almost all the other passages (lb. 4^3. 46. 50. 51) ne uses 
 the imperatives 'condemna\ 'absolve'. 
 
 * If the coiitiiigeiicy does not refer to the future, or if the clause has a present predi- 
 cate, the imperiiive is in the frsf form : Si titi quid venit in. mentem, scribe queeso. Cic. 
 Att. 15, 5, \.—Si tibi res. si locus, si inslifntuTn placet, lege, qvceso, legem, mihique earn 
 mitte. lb. 12, 36.— //oc, 6^ nie amas, priusquam proficiscdris, effice. lb. 5, 4, 3. 
 
306 
 
 iMrERATm: sentences. 
 
 lb Fain 4 16.-T>/i/;? anhm .«npuvti forrique ^.^ ; Be of a wise and stron? mind (T wish 
 y,.'i w.Hiki'bf. eto.K lb. F.iin. 9. li.-Often Qufeso, rogo, ob-^ecro (pray, I i'"P><>r^' >'*•"» "'« 
 
 ;?f//j W If tb.' prdicate of an afflrmntivo imperative sentence i? in the THiRnrKnM.v, 
 it is i.M.„,.n,Ilv pbiced in the present ^ubjiinrtive ••p'>cafyfmfas reip'>hhr.t- : I.-: b.- ii.- 
 tere^t of the* repnhlie pnvail. VU'.Oti. 'Ar:i::i.-ntlifno tt M^>^ unkpoHUtuv annntut , Let 
 reli-i.H, iind di.tv be plaee.l h,.f.,re friendship. lb. 8, \()..-(Jmn,s >>ciant ; May :dl know t^ 
 hen Ep 42-Tlu'TnliU)i>KUsoNof ilie skcond foum ol th.- impkkativk it* u-t'd . 1> In 
 the i.^ws of the republu-nn time (bnt not in th<.se of the latj-r j)enods. nor in tlie«lccn-e!« 
 of the S. nate or in the edict>^ of the n,a-isirates. ; ^l^-J'^''^-'' '!''>-^'^'}[%J:\^^^^^^^^^^ 
 jiot »ati-fv !lie ind-ment, lie (the ccnph.iiKint» shall fetter bim.js.ll lab 3.--///?- /<omi- 
 Im». lann.cuLm mime Uclto ; It .hall be lawful for those men to receive «'»^t ' « ^ '; 
 Lex Crneli I de Qmesfor. (Uitsehl C. I. n74).-S(, ,f thr lanu'iia-e of the ^^^^: ' ;\^K^- 
 
 d^h,h,a hnh,u1o. lb.Leir.2.s.--2) In ri'Bi.ic tukatiks with other nation;, a *»;!;?; ; 
 
 Taurus. Li v. 88, v^. -3) In lk.;ai. instkimknts, rspeciaMy ^''^lj''^'''^;;'/"^^^^^^ 
 vteu^ Terentuf ii.ron vteo' XXX pondo rasDnmi ar(/enfeorum dato : ruUuis shall jrne 
 to T/Tentil; 80 p..un is .,f silver v/ss.ls. Auct. Her 1, 12.-4. S..,m-limes th- <»rm ocn,r« 
 in the poets u didactic ruh-s : Non safU f$t pulchra 'S.^n>oeinata ; duUa yunto. et^qiio- 
 
 ireciuentlv used in tin- meanin- ■ be it ^o ". So Verum e^to, let this be true. Lie. 1- lace 29. 
 
 C5 4B5. Netrativc impciutive sentences with predieate.s in tlie aeeond 
 person are irenerallv e.vprcssed by a circumlocntion of noli inoItU) Willi 
 ail objcct-it'itinitive' (sometimes by o/^v or by f^n- nc with a i>reseiit sub- 
 innciiV.'); more rarely by /w willi a pkukkct i.UBJiNCTiyH. It Hie pred- 
 ■jcate is in the :5. pef-son, or 1. pers. plur., 7*^ is used with presknt siib- 
 jimetive {ne quu - noliody ; he quid = mUhinir). 
 
 ^^o/i. Olio, maj->nnn iosfi/u'a r'preheod.r^ ; Do not, O «ato. censure J^e institutions 
 of our anc-sf.r-. V\v. Mur. 8H, T^.-XoTHe id xelU ii><od Jiti non ^'^^''^'^ •."';.'' ^^ V;^ 
 what is nnposHble. lb. I'hil. 1.'i:^.-(ktre ejn.hnm me ff 't^>'[/'''«;; f-V 7',/ }l^ 
 not believr that I have ?iveii up the care for the rt-pubhc. lb. ? am. «»^4.— / //;/«, 
 fmter.pnmam navir,anOne„> neomi^ens ; Do not "'i- 'h.; tirst <.pportuiuty ol sadinij. 
 Cir Qii! Kr. 2.«.3.-A> d'dnfiJnx ea^^ tnWere ; Do not hesitat.; o ^eIl(l ilein lb- Att. 
 l.(,._Vo<7^m iiaus d'-sm efjestate lie aspertuKu^ .^s yio not ^lif-'hi his J»'^»-. 7^;/- J '• *' 
 {i.-\e .sh- j>,>f>a-Mf '/.'<. II). 2. 24. -AV (/>ri< fa.-'ttdiat grammatueseleineida , Lei noi)ody 
 rlisihiin the elements of irr'iinniar. (Jiiint 1. 4('». 
 
 C 6 AV with a />.//e.^ subjunctive mostly corr.spoudMo the H'cond form of the 
 imperative in amrnn.tive sentences. Ne with i,rese,.t subjunctive of tin- 2. p. rsoi. is 
 cl rllv lUe classical, as : AV ilium rerheie.<. Plant. Bacch. 4. 8, 110. In classical pn.-e it 
 
 l;!met 1!::^ iisc'l of uncertain persons; else it is extremely «•«''^ j ,^: ;t/r,'(;';;.r'r 
 ul,<it nf leomuK^ Cic.S. n. \{).Srnhen ur punZre: He not ncirhi;.! t m wn nnj:. lb. 
 Att \\ 1 — V^ with the lirst form of the imperative is aniedassical and poetical : .\e in- 
 tHtinbit'viiinl Hacch. 4 8, 9»).--A> fafitud.i. lb. Asi.i. 2, 4. 5k,.-.\e cumu nimis Ih. 
 >Vo't 8 1 « X\Wfr . Vi.-. .En.K:5l4.-A>withthe skconi, FoiiM of the impeiative 
 e her ii h t M. seco-.d or third person is contine<l t.. the republican laws in the strict 
 
 tum deruridnes l^qito, tuve »uUe<fito. mre coa/>rafo, m.vt, etc. Lex. Jul. Munit (Kits hi L. 
 1 2nr, In «lidactic rules and other commandments m with lb.- perf. subj. is .mploved, 
 wh c ■ nl ^ 'wmjs be used, if an altirmaiive sentence w<.uld require the second form in 
 J:!f}.r omnia Jcogmfo: ole.m „e oddidenx.CMo K, ^-l^rr^- ]^'^^ 'pi'in " how 
 the Stoics • Xihil vinoveil-; mmricordiri c<>mm„tu,^ ne ^is. i ic. Mur. 81, »)•>. Piin> how- 
 . vr use.'r^.xvi.h tTTe s.cond fornr of .he imperative in rues on airncu ture: M./c., 
 ',u.id.crescenteluml.netungifo. Plin. U. N \sr^5.-^tntuJlunte ne aralo. lb. 18, ... 
 
 Jiem 6.") DEPENDENT imperative sentences (J^ 413) are introduced by 
 vt unci if neiTRtive by ne (sometimes ut ne). Often the mere siibjiinclive 
 is u^ed instead of dt with a snl.jtinetiye. In such clauses, iieir takes the 
 place ni'neoHe (neither, nor, and not). See P. 11. p. 880; p. oU-) toll. 
 ^ Peto a te ufid a me neve, in hw reo, neve in aHl^ re^ulrax; 1 ask you o n-quire this of 
 nu' neith.M- in le-ard to this dHendant, nor in re-ard to others Cic bam 1, ^ • \^-{^^ * 
 Jiar JIV \jeMirem ob^ecraeV ne u'nd grunus in jnUrem statu.r.t : D. implored taesar n t 
 NMake an V harsh measures a^au.st liis brother. Ca-s. jB. G. 1. 2iy--r^><arLabiluomandat 
 Jiemos adtat ; Caisar orders Luhieuusi to proceed to the Itemi. 10. 6, u. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 307 
 
 YII. Interrogative Sentences. 
 
 g 116. Iiiterroi^ative sentences express a doubt as to the reality of the 
 predicate, implyin<r a request that the person addressed should remoye 
 the doubt. They are either absolute or relative. In the former the 
 doubt refers to the predicate, the answer ' yes ' or ' no ' beinj^ expected ; 
 in the latter the doubt refers to any other member of the sentence. 
 
 Hem. 60. The English absolute interroffative sentence is distinguished by 
 the mversion of the predicate, which is placed before the subject, and espe- 
 cially by placing the auxiliaries at the beginning of the sentence. In the 
 simple tenses the auxiliary " do" is generally used, which w^ord neither 
 here, nor in any otlier case where it is used as au auxiliary, can be ex- 
 pressed in Latin, 
 
 § 4 1 7. The Absolute interrogative sentences in Latin gen- 
 erally are introduced by one of the interrogative particles 7ium 
 or 7ie,' without changing the position of the words on account 
 of the question. The particle iie is enclitic, and is attached to 
 the end of the most prominent word, which then must open the 
 sentence. Num is used, when the answer " no'' is expected ; 
 ne, when the answer is doubtful, as : 
 
 Meminixtine 7ne ante diem XII K<dendm Xoremlms dicere in scnatu fbre 
 in armis—C. ManUumF Xum me fefellif, Cafdina, non m^do res tanta etc ? 
 Doest thou remember that 1 said, on the 12th before the Calends of Novem- 
 ber in the Senate, that C. 3Iaidius would be in arms? Was I mistaken O 
 Catdme, not only in so great an event, etc.? Cic. Cat. 1, 8, l.—Xum, gvw 
 tentpixtdx iniptndettt^ nite.'^ ntelixH conjieiet qnam rjnherndtor? Will the poet 
 guess better than the commander (of a shiii), what weather is impending'- ^ 
 Lie. Div. 2, \i—Num te fugif Xum a domo ah^nm? Have I tied befoTe 
 tbeey Am I absent from home? Plant. Epid. 5, 2, U.—Ajmllinemne tu 
 jMium xpolKire aiisns eaf Didst thou dare to plunder the Deliau Apollo ^ 
 Uc \ err. 1, IS.—Itanefacere oportetf ]\Iust you act thus? Ter. Pliorm 3 
 2,42.—Quid/ Duaxne is uxores habct? What! has that man two wives'^ 
 ler. Phorm. 5, 1,27. 
 
 ^ litm. (>7. Notice, that after num, aliquis and quisquam must be changed 
 into quis (,N3.)T, Rem. 4, and ^ ;jo9. Hem. 11), as: Num quis hie alius propter 
 meatqne te {esty.^ Is here any one besides me and thee? Ter. Andr. 2, 2, 19. 
 —In Servio Tullio — num quod ehquentitz restiqium apparet? In Serv Tul- 
 lius— does any trace of eloquence appear (in him)? Cic. opt. gen. die. 5 10 
 NV hen n^; is used, and the s ibject of the interrogative sentence is the second 
 person, tlie latter generally is ex^pre sed. If it has the emphasis it stands at 
 the first, il not, at the S'cond place, as: Vi.sne tu te, Seny\ cohi'>ere'>^ Wilt 
 thou not restrain thyself, () Seivius? Cic. Fam. 4,5,10.— June dixeras 
 huic? Hast iJim told him (that)? Ter. Piiorm. 4 3 8 
 
 ' The interroirative particle ne must be distinprnished from the iie<rative particle or 
 coujiincuou we; the lonuer has a bhort, and the latter a long e. 
 
308 
 
 Ds^TEimOGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 309 
 
 The ondin- -^ of tho second person of the verb, if ne is attadied and ta 
 follows nvuiiriitlv is elided, to-ether with the vowel e ot the enchtic, as: 
 ^I'^Minstead of a.... /.), doest thou sayV Cen^aCtu ^^ ^rZ, ^ ' 
 doest thou believe? Vu^ta (for risue Oi), doest thou ^^ish .' T ' d n 
 Etrative hlr, and the adverb sir (thus), Avhen /^/' is attached, asMuie h s. 
 ]able ci before /..', as : ILi^cdne tua domus est, Is this thy house .^ 1 laut. 
 
 Ani])!!. 1, 1. r ^ 
 
 Ucm (>S In rhetoiical style the interrojrative ])articles freiiuently are 
 omitted, as: Ta id nesciebasf Didst thoa not know this? 
 
 §418. If the question is negative, and consequently an 
 affirmative answer is expected, tlie sentence is introduced by 
 the particle ?ionne, corresponding to the English negation not, 
 as: XoHJie jyottm post mortem nohilltarl volant/ Do not poets 
 wisli to be c(dcbrated after death? Cic. Tusc. 1, 43. 
 
 § 419. If tico (pu'stions are connected by disjunctive con- 
 junctions* {divnnctive questions), each of them must be intro- 
 duced by an interrogative particle, the former by utrum or the 
 enclitic \,e, the latter by an, which corresponds to the English 
 or. When the second (luestion consists only of the words or not, 
 
 it is translated by an)wn. 
 
 Utninir iqndrant (k Q^a' res marimfv sint ; an vim non habcnt, qua tanfaa 
 re^s n^nf et <,enuh Are the irods i-norant of what the -reatest thin.irs 
 Ii4 c^ Imve tl^ (do thev lac-k) theVower, by which theymavsustani 
 
 ami nde^ueh thin.^sM^ic^ Nat. Deor. 2, 77.- I -m' L'n'inm. Dnnuhnni a,i 
 ^L)jZuil dTsa'.ut? Did you desert (from) L. Donutnis or did L. 
 Domiti;.s desert (Irom) youV Ca^ar B. C, 2, ^^'^^'r^^'l^ZZ'^is^^ 
 no,i ^ Is this (the man) for whom I am askm- or not .'' Ter. 1 hoim. o, 0, 1.. 
 
 Hem m The En.Mi.h r>r cannot ahvays he translated ^y ^^:'^Zx^..^!^^^^^^^ 
 ^^r-; a;b.;t:ai/mu" be uLc]:'aicu^iu, to the rule, on ixuproper di.juuct.ou. 
 
 § 4SO. An AFFIRMATIVE ANSWER to a qucstiou is expressed 
 by ita, Ita vero, vero (yes) ; sane, sane quhlem, prorsus, Ita 
 prorsas, omnuio (certainly, unquestionably), or by a repetition 
 of the predicate with t'ero, corresponding to the repetition ot the 
 English au.\iliary, as: 
 
 ^ILis Gojo^ returned? ^ llediitne Gajus Ita, vero.j^ ita vero.-/M^ 
 thou lit often seen my brother? Certainly. Nonne tratrem meiim s^epe 
 vid str^ Sane (sane quidem).-//.tr. not even the most rewncned ncen so,ne^ 
 iZXeTpunished with death? Certainly. Nonne vel clarissnni (n^^ ne- 
 
 quideni) virl morte sncpe puniti sunt? Prorwis (ita Y^voTf^u^).— Canst fho7i 
 not do this ?^ lam. ^^mne lioc facere potes? Possum vero.— //.^.^^ //*<v,f 
 read Curros works? I have. Le<ristine tu Ciceronis opera V Lcn vero — 
 Doest thou not remember that man 1 I do. llliusne tu viri meministi v 
 JMemini vero. 
 
 Negative answers (English : Ko, I do not, am not, by no means, 
 
 etc.) are expressed by mirdme, nunime vero, non, or by non 
 
 with the re})etition of the predicate or copula. If a negative 
 
 or athrmative answer is combined with a correction, the particles 
 
 inrmo or hnmo vero are used {tio hut, no on the contrary, nay 
 
 more, not only this, hut). If an affirmative answer is coniiected 
 
 with a modification, we use omnlno sed (yes, but). 
 
 Num Uomo' fuitl Immojonge ahfuit.ys^^ he in Rome? no, on the 
 coiitraiT, lie was far away.— ///>, tamen virit. Vicitf hnmo vero, etiam 
 m N.'n,itum venit. Still tiiis man lives. Lives? Nay more, he comes even 
 into the Senate.— 6V/' fat quidque qureri.s/ Recte o/nnino, sed non nunc id 
 ar/itur, Ihou askest, why everything happens? Yes, rioht; but tliis is 
 not the question now. Cic. Div. 1, ;jO, m.—Xu?n quis propinquus fuit» 
 ^on [non J Hit), >V as he any relation ? No (he was not).— .Y/^;^j, irjitur erra- 
 vius, Muamerero, Are we therefore in an error? Certainly not.— 3'<?/i 
 existimas cadere in sapientem cpgritudinem? Prorsus non arbitror Thou 
 bchcvest not that sorrow affects a wise man ? I certainly do not' Cic 
 lusc. 1, (j. 
 
 §4*H. Tho RELATIVE IXTERROGATIVE Sentences are intro- 
 duced by one of the interrogative adjectives (§§ 243, 254, 260 
 2(31, 2G.S, 207, 268) or adverbs. To these belong, besides the 
 numeral and quantitative adverbs {quoties, quantum, quam 
 [how], quatitoperc): 1) the local adverbs iihi (where), mide 
 (whence), quo (wliitlier), quatenus and quousque (to what point, 
 how far) ; 2) the temporal adverbs quando (when), quamdiu 
 (how h)ng, for how long) ; 3) the modal adverbs quomodo, 
 quemadmodum and qui (how) ; 4) the causal adverbs cur or 
 quid (why), cur non, quidni or qii'm (why not?) 
 
 The interrogative adjectives and adverbs frequently are made 
 more emphatic by the enclitic nam, as: quisnam, uhlnam, 
 curnam. 
 
 Whosf Utters doest thou bring? Cujus litteras affers? (Answ^er: those of 
 Gajus, Gaji.)— ]r/f.y do you not answer? Cur non resp(^ndPtis ''*— ir/^^«/"^ 
 does he come? Unde venit?— H7/f? has written this Utter? Quisnam has 
 htleras seripsit ?— ir//^;v? ha.^t thou been? Ubinam fuisti ?— TlV^/'/i ?ri7Z 
 Gitjus return? Quando Gajus redlbit?— ^?/a^ potest esse jucunditas vitm. 
 
310 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 311 
 
 suhlath awmfiisf Wliat can be the cluu'iii of life, after friendships have 
 been taken away? Cie. Plane. S'-i.-Q'io Sinnluscomulto era hoc lerfato 
 penni^Hum^ Aulh. Curficit? C^.^c^^/.. ...^ By what ( eeree n the ben^ne 
 has this been perniitte.l to the dek-ate? By none. \\ hy did he (h> \\ 
 He was eonjpclli-d. Cie. V'rrr. ;i, \Vd.— Uter vextrum cd cclenorf Which 
 of you is (piickeri' Plant. Aul. 2, 4, 42. 
 
 nem 70 We must distin«;uisli between the qnnntitatim and the m(^al 
 adverb' - ho,cr The ciuanlitative /w/^ askin- for the inhnmtn o\ an adjir- 
 ^^rov adverb, is translated by gaam (^ 201), Hem. 11 : § 30;^, whde the ,nrM 
 adverb A..r, asking tor tlie ....../• of an action ^. translated by v;/;;.;-;;, 
 
 The temporal aclveri) quamo i^wm-n, :u >>...... .....v .,.....>. .^. -.••■.•■■ 
 
 ffuished from the conjunction quum (when, at the time when). Q'ihul is 
 ahrau. followed by the subjunctive, conrspondm- to oxxv irhy should as 
 O.' /,/!./ L../..r//OVhy should 1 not rem(niberV(V.;^^^ 
 (with the subjunctive only) in indirect qnestums (^ 42X,). 
 
 mm 71 The eini)hasis of a relative (piestion is increased by the adverb 
 tandZ still more than by nam). This is often ( it icult to trans ate. It 
 cornsiKunls most closely h» the En,^lish collo(,u.al expressHm ' m the 
 uorld " as. Quid tandem auebatis? What m the world did you do? Plant. 
 ]\len 5, 1, 12. Often we may translate it by our " pray. 
 
 Rem 72 A relative question, introduced by uter {i, 243, Rem. 5), may be 
 followed liy a disjunctive question. The tirst member must then be con- 
 nected with the enclitic ,ie, not with utram, as: iter nosframnopulari, cd, 
 f(m an egof Which of us is popular, thou or 1 ? Cic. Kab. 4, 11. 
 
 r,m -^ In rol-.tive nue<ti.)ns the EnL>li>h lanLrna-jfc dot-s not admit more than one 
 
 K rqutSi . m I til . uvo or Hire, mn-rro^.itive. may oc-cur in the ^an.c ..nteuce. 
 
 En"ii"h. as: Ut.v vtri inndias fent ; Which ol ihe luowMylaid the •>,'';:'/, I, .i^'^ " 
 
 how ah.u.st one t.-trht drMroyed an en.i^i'e l-nnded with -► tr.eat ^'1 »'■'»•] « • ^'jI.T: 
 Knoqmdc>n,l>f^amxno: I km.w what 1 am ..wn.i:. and 'V- '^'"''^'^ n i ?i U, inu n7.^ o 
 kill Clo.liiis. how great and many occasions would there have been I Cic. Mil., 14. 
 
 Rem 74 In Latin, relative questions may be iNCouPOR.vrEi^ in infinitive 
 and participial clauses. Sucli comhin:'.tions which are called intfk- 
 K()(jvrivh: INVOLUTION' must be recast in En-lish. as: Quid pete nfes 
 S;;;^/;)%V^^^s^heolvject of your coming ? (literaVly " What askm^ have 
 yon comv'^'')—Qdid me fecisse e-ridimatix? What, do you think. I did .^— 
 *So with ablatives absolute: Q'la freqnentid omnijuufieneruni prosequenle 
 credifis no. (\qv,a profectos ? By what crowds of all kinds do yon thmk 
 we were a(;companied when we departed trom Capua i Liv. i, .5U. 
 
 § 4^*1. If a sentence, by which a question is expressed, is 
 dej^emknt on another sentence, it is called an interrogative 
 CLAUSE or INDIRECT QUESTION, as : '' I do not know, w/iether he will 
 " It is uncertain, hoio Iohj it wllllastr Such a clause is 
 
 come 
 
 . ">•> 
 
 cither the ohjeet of one of the members of the principal sentence, 
 or the hnpersonal subject of its predicate, as in the latter of the' 
 mentioned examples. The governing word of the indirect ques- 
 tion either expresses the act o/ askimj itself, as (I asked, what 
 he was doing), or it implies a doubt ovAmcertainty, in regard to 
 some fact, whicli is added in the form of a question, as: '''l won- 
 der, what he is doing ;" " I wislied him to ascertain, what was 
 going on in thcdcity." 
 
 7?^w. 75. Clauses, containing a thought without any uncertaintv or 
 doubt, fretinently are expressed in the form of an indirect question, when 
 ^^00". '''"'^'' ri f exclamations (§ 309, R 41), as: S<,pe m.cum cogl 
 tan, q,a,n es,rt difficile xensum m repubUca deponere, I often thought how 
 dilhcult it was, to lay aside one's feeling for the countrv Here the author 
 means nothing but: " 1 tiiouglit, that it was eery dilhcult," etc. But he 
 conceives the thought as in e.rclamati.m (how difficult is it, to etc ) and 
 hence the sentence has assumed the form of an interrogative proposition. 
 
 ^ % J^i:!. Interrogative clauses are either absolute or rela- 
 tive, like tlu^ sentences, and are introduced by the same words 
 (whether particles, form-adjectives, or adverbs), as if tliey were 
 expressed as independent sentences. Only the adverb 'quidni 
 and the particle annon are not used in indirect questions. In- 
 stead of them cur non and necne must be employed. 
 
 The absolute interrogative clauses in English are introduced 
 by whether or If; iu L<(tln by mini or the enclitic ne. If they 
 are ner,atlve {whether not, if not), they are introduced by 7ionne. 
 It the indirect question is disjunctive, we use ntrum or ne in 
 ih^ first, as in direct questions, and necne (instead of a7ino7i) iu 
 the second member. -The particles of tlie first member (utrum 
 and }ie) sometimes are omitted. 
 
 The mood of the predicate in all interrogative clauses always 
 IS the subjunctive, subject to the rules of consecution (§ 349). 
 
 Legati cognmcere jimi Hunt, num PerReus melon solllcitasf<ef. The ambas- 
 sadors were directed to ascertain, whether (if) Perseus had solicited the 
 allies.— N;^/y velm, locutu.vie sit h<pc verba ISempronlus, I should wish to 
 knoNv whether hempronius spoke these words.— .V^jw^^, utrum dux hodu 
 
 i^s or n'T' ^n' "^-'^^»'^^^'' ^^J-^»»^^'- tl>e general has defeatc^d the ene! 
 mits, or no{.—Qua^ucit, nonne .^um ire mallet. He asked, whetlier he did 
 no rather wish to go with him.-.S^;>. et viultum hoc mecum lo^^MH 
 bonuie an mail plus attukrit homlnibus eloquentlee studlum, I have oftui 
 and ninch considered whether the study of eloquence has caused more 
 good or evil to men. Cic. In v. 1, l.-Ca^ar legdtum cogmscere Jussit, qZ 
 
312 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 in cm 
 
 a^fri^ nererentnr Ca'sar directed his lieutenant, to asrertain what ^A ag 
 S ZUxZZxx^^^^^ >'e-^cUt, quo hosUs iter fact, -ent. llie -eneral 
 
 'cur Z ./":";.;. r'.)/-v'r/.s 1 cannot understand, why thou hast not 
 
 announced tliis to the general. 
 
 12^' >u :G In interro-ative chuises the pronoun of the turd person takes 
 ., i v^v. ^; nn it- T- terrin- to the h>-ieal subject of the prnicipal sen- 
 
 enc^r i s:.^as i^ nSx dauses (^.88 and'u. 20) as : Csari rn n.n- 
 lenct t t hdii L ab iumfias did .HtnwixMid, Ctesar renienibcnd, 
 
 ^iu' w ;'bo n si e .^.i-s ha<l laid a snare tor him. Here Vc..u. ,,s 
 1 H 1. ViAl s^^^^^^i^ec^^^ the principal sentence, and hen(j^ the pronoun htm 
 In tli^'lnlir^ogJal^cVerc exclamatory) clause, must be translated by ..^., 
 
 not by ti. , <• :.« 
 
 Rem 77 Tntcrro^alive clinsos nrp frnqnonlly us,-(I as sniWKCT>, of im- 
 
 I' 
 
 fmuk.Uwl'^it maUtTS i.), ...1 « l.id. day s,....ob,xly .Uc-s .' 
 
 ;., -« Tl,p worils ;/WW tlMUK meertum f< fiiUcwed by an intcnoga- 
 
 J:^;^. '^.^ ist; '.,.0.; by ;^;(^^^ 
 
 S.M:;r;:;t,\\\Tb^cL"M;:L;uhr„c...^,ive clause hecon^^^^ 
 
 ^zr:tn:s^^f;':."lt;:;^o;i;x;:'=^ 
 
 I should tiiink, that he never said so. 
 
 parlicleti. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 Coordination of Sentences. 
 1. Scienun promi^io-^t ei^t^T Ailll-.SrkJS.M^X 
 
 "" > Promise.-' To make a promise.-» To aunounce. 
 
 COORDINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 313 
 
 Q\ inirenio militari, sed etiam sapientia et animi magnitudine ceteros Car- 
 ♦haginicnsls superavit. — 4. Nero i)rovincias ita exhausit, ut dona aniplissi- 
 Tv.a' non modo reciperet, sed etiam tlagitiiret.^— 5. Rabirius se abdidit,'^ non 
 riodo ut pa'nam etfugeret, sed etiam ut nova scelera excogitaret.*— 6. Sabl- 
 Dus castris {irithin the camp) se semper tenCbat, ut {m thai) jam non solum 
 3b hostibus contemneretur, sed etiam nostrorum militum vocibus ucmnihiP 
 /^arperetur.^ — 7. Dulce est ipsum pacis nomen, res vero ipsa cum jucunda 
 rum salutaris^ {vM). — 8. 8ex. Koscius quum omni tempore {at all time) nobi- 
 litatis** fautor" fuisset, tum hoc bello proximo {in this last war) nostram par- 
 tem {parti/) causamque defendit.— 9. Quum omnium rerum simulatio {a 
 feigning of ererythinrj) vitiosa'" est, tum amicitiae maxime" repugnat.— 10. 
 ."Non meis sed iSempronii nostri periculis graviter angor." — 11. S[ou exer- 
 citus mihi, sed duces defuCrunt. — 12. llorlensius banc quidem opinionem 
 delendit, sed suaviter {mildli/) ac moderate.— 18. Sempronius nobilium auc- 
 toritate, Lucilius autem plebis voluntate {hv^) atque exercitu sustinGtur. — 
 14. liic vir a plurimis laudatur; nobis vero Gajus omnium candidatorum 
 pnestantissinuis videtur. — l."». Et civitates et singuli homines Concordia va- 
 lent, discordia intereunt — 10. Qiiaestiones dialecticre {philo.'fophical) oi)inio- 
 num gravitate {(ceiyht) dijudicari debent, non numero ac gratia.— 17. Reus 
 aut culpam suani conlitCri vlebGbit, aut innocentiam suam novis argumeutis 
 I>robar('.— 18. Catinienses {inhabitants of Catina) sive metu {fnmi fear) 
 Athenieiisium, sive tiedio'^ belli i)acem facere cupiunt. — 19. SyracusSni vel 
 vi coegi vel consilio adduci poterant, ut civibus nostris satisflicerent {to 
 gire satisfaction).— 20. Facile est, multos vel liberos vel servos dicere {to 
 •niention), qui hujus rei testes" fuCnmt.— 21. H«c expeditio sive ducum 
 {ojficers) imbecillitute,'^ sive exiguo militum numero, infeliciter terminavit." 
 —22. Hoc oppidum vi expugnare ditticile erit; ipsius enim loci natura 
 {situation) et nuinimentis validissunis defendilur. — 28. Ikec ego C(msilia se- 
 cutus essem, si tu pra'sens fiiisses. Novi enim temperantiani^^ et modera- 
 tiOnem'" natura? tua.'.— 24. Consilia tua ])ertici non poterunt; nam et adver- 
 sariorum tuorum invidia et ii)sa inopia tua tibi obstabunt {to be an obstacle). 
 —25. liac pugnjl nihil est nobilius. Nulla enim unquam tam exigua manus 
 {band, number), tantas opes'" prostravit (to cru.^h).—2iS. Pliocio vitaB suae in- 
 tegritate nuilto notior"''*' fuit quam glorifi militari. Itaque hujus memoria 
 nulla est, illlus autem fama magna (est).— 27. Qui talia affirmant"-' aut indocti 
 sunt, aut imi)robi. ISempronius autem et affirmavit et doctus est. Ergo 
 Sempronius iinpr()l)us esse vidctur.— 28. Si Gajus hoc dicit, mentltur; dicit 
 autem : mentltur igitur.— 29: llu?c erat loci natura, ut copiaj nostrse undique 
 {eccryichere) hostium telis"""" attingerenlur.'-'^' Dux igitur receptui cauere 
 jussit {gam the signal for retreat). 
 
 1. Eight towns of the Pra^iestians^* were captured, and their fields 
 divided.— 2. This rumor was told {narrare) {to) me by Sejus and confirmed 
 by my brother.— 8. The army of the Latins occupied the left bank of the 
 river and that of the allies the light one.— 4. The general censured the 
 indolent {ignacas) and slothful {soc<^rs), but praised the active and careful 
 {ddigenif).—6. Cavsar was able to conciuer as well the bodies (jf his adver- 
 saries as their hearts {animus).— 6. We intend both to uphold" tlie laws 
 
 ^ Amplu.^, fplt'iulid.— 2 To demand.— » To conceal. -< To devise.— ^ Somewhat.— « To 
 tease.— 7 lieneticial.— « Nobility.— « Adherent.— i» Vicious, wicked. -n Especially, mostly. 
 ~^^ Ang&re, to trouble, to make uneasy.— >3 Di^^ust.— »* Witness».- 1* l>iiioi-aiice.— '« To 
 terminate.— '7 Moderation.—"* Discretion. — »" Oj>e^ in plur., power.— ^^ Notus. known.— 
 ^' Assert.— 22 Tdum, a dart.— 23 Attinyere, to reach.— 2* PrieneslIuus.-26 Sustinere. 
 
314 
 
 COORDINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 loond) Dili also iiuii ui uiuna v^ ""•» .*."/. ^. -- 
 
 ,v\ -To Vs .V l.i..^'s a .. not s»lH.U.,>lly (§S ^<-i. ^««) .•■vplame.!/ so >. 
 ll'uu sliun r . illi. uH tlian .lie <,tl,ors.-)l. liy Ihese «<.i;.l« I .ntriu not 
 .Iq-ii^^ mo encourage (.■.■iff.re) m-v.-Vi. This s,.m-l. (;";"""„''';"';' 
 in J li,h. (.«■) and ..ny to n..;, .,,,, darkn-.s (« -^,, and n .1,.-^^^^ 
 
 til 
 
 to 
 
 l)ri 
 
 dj;rt UcUsc' V 4 o most .iis^aacelul lii.'l.t, bnl Ih.. mU, l.gn.n susian.eu 
 V, .. . n bnl U,e arn,y of the San.nites (Nm.^) tne< to reach u 
 
 ivilt rarrv iiniiiilnhr) the first prize (i>r,emtiim), urn <->aj"= "■•■ ■"■■";■■ ';7;- 
 ; ) the' llmi.-li). The act, i.y.(»«/«»^W«) <'f. "'""^""Irirw:»- "ted 
 f'iJin< bnt the onicliness ot Scipio to Favonius.— 20. 1 In w .ii sumcu 
 l^S'fin she 1 1 ta Jugnrtlia unexpectedly won» the Ir.endsh.p o. Itoc- 
 
 opinion either Of the one (//<•) or ot the '^l^^^^^y^^^-^^- ^^^^^ 
 
 vontlis 'ire neri^hin" either bv disease or by the mnoiU ot tin inunies. 
 
 2 1 mr.-r I 1 very show^ our soldiers, ^^lletller conquenni,^- or con- 
 
 . tl e oh'l^ by d SCO d.-2'J. A few of these, either by sonie Ifood] Or- 
 
 sliii) of "-ood 1 inenl, or wluit more ahoniinable U</'d>ts) than the iiairLU an i 
 1 e nitv ol- the vviclved V-31. 1 shall tlius obtain eitlier a certain lielp, or 
 
 he i^oi- 1:'/'; -I [,ood] will i.ouuu.p ^^ ^j^f^r^^^s't 
 
 ^onlre) the general, to (.^0 «ive [toj me this ^'« d^ ^-> > t iV ve the i . v - 
 
 ^i:n:f to'^ ^ledi^'i^v^y U^^«^^^ 
 
 ?,^I) of oneCn.-35. \VY- directed tins .na,^ ..r rather ummalo 
 
 _aa. If thou liadst either praise<l ^^IJ;'^»""':,"^^™ '^> ' A' "i I'^h d 
 libit onel would now Heal thee more kindly —37. Uaniubal, .liter lie iia i 
 
 qulet^ tUii'' ) '1"^ 01"^'-=' ^y '"■•-''1=* *"-■'«> "'• ''y '"""'■■^ ( /"■<<»■'). '■''^"'veJ 
 »« Gubeniarc. 
 
 mFINITIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 315 
 
 to invade (//^'7r^f ) the district of Neapolis.'-88. Thy brother ^yill be able 
 mm-^u'-^ltbo^dM^.^^''^ excellently; tor evei^thin"'^;:;;" eLfJ^ 
 
 Zil t t ,f nr^ ('"^/7^0,-40. The treatise {W,.r) of Gajus ple.ises^^ 
 ind iccnA ; V 41 T^ W forit las been written more concisely^ 
 
 and accurately —41. The Romans sudden y perceived* a "-reat (m-intitv^ nf 
 
 ; ;" ,;m ^ ' 1^''% ^;^tr"^^ "i^^^ ^'^^ ^^^^^^ ^^-^ hi^i^s[t^;s t ' 
 
 1 Ti i- ^^^ '^^'\'"' resolved to wage" the war in (//i^) another man- 
 ei. Iherelore he be-an to devastate the fidds, to take towns and cis- 
 tles {ea.sfenum, and to plunder the property of the inh- itinK 4-^ \W 
 while (/.^cv..) Jupirtha was increa^sing hTs tnT> \m^^^^^ 
 Mr Txv "; ?"'*''' Vf '"^"r^- ^'' ^vise^[manj cai be unhajw Bu V^^^^ 
 ; tl eVu ITn, .m/'V/^"" ?T notbeunhippy._45. Thi^Lde {umbra) 
 Wi be stormv - ''^^. • ^ "^"^^ '^'\''^\^>'^ ^^, round itself-4(>. The weather" 
 ^111 DC btoim>. Iherelore we shall stay^-" home (ilomi). 
 
 IxFiNiTrvE Clauses. 
 1 Omnes arbitrilmur, ducem nostrum et inirenio et virtute prsestare — 
 2 Frater mens bene scit, Sempronium lu^c verba dixisse.-3 cilTco "no- 
 H, hostium cop.as magnis itineribus- approj)in(puTre.-4 Labie iiis C- 
 
 meUc^l^nint'e^F^^trcmr" -"«^^^'i^-^- L.,ail C.^^'Z^, 
 intcULXdunt.— 0. l<ratrem tuum ddigentem esse video— 7 Hanc -lon-ini 
 nnn.s cahdam esse arbitror.-S. Milit?s impatientls t\iisse scribit-Alt^ 
 iK-gotia train tuo nimis dillicilia esse novimus.-lO. ScfmiTtf foilissime 
 
 ^^"S;7''l^^W T '"' ^^^""^" ^^^^^^^ Posse.-12 Te^^i'c^'dZ 
 es^L aiKlIv 1.— 13. \ os ita vmcere nunquam posse credo.— 14. Eum nui auani 
 
 ita locutum esse existimo (bHieve).-15. Lucilius mihi sse piss L S 
 mjnqiiani aliud quid con.perire potuisse.-lG. Gajus J^p^^ul;^ 
 m . ;;;; -i^ "^ '• r"""^""^'''^' ^^»M)ronium sui invidum esse.-18. Prater 
 o ?. ''"'^"'''^"'^ negat.-19. 8empronius fratrein suum redi^se ^ri^ 
 b.t.-20. Omnes m)vimus, mundum a Deo gubernari.-21 €^^86^0 hoc 
 iH'gotium a Sejo amdiii tinltnm esse.-22. Brutus noster scrhS La£^^^^ 
 ab omnibus derKlGii.-2;j. Ca'sar se a Gallis deceptum esS^ ntellex^t ^^^ 
 bempn^nius lianc statuam sibi a Gajo datam esse negat -2ocV>n.ul com 
 
 '^r OnnidlVi n^T^^^^^ "^"""' "^''^•-"^ multitudine tenCre.- 
 
 ; dm-o^Omn^^ P 1- ^*^^^'^'"'T'' ^'"i t^^l»^*"^^^" J^^m moenibus admov5ri 
 vault.— .8. Omnes credinius, solem longius distant" quam lunam — '>9 
 
 fcri-edir^'^'o' quosC^sar pabulatum misisl-t, in "" (^^^ 
 i^m ^^ • -."^^- <^'""^*« «^i""t, mihtes qui scelus aliquod commise- 
 
 in t, gra lus pun ri quam ceteros civls.-31. Frater mens putat te hoc ne- 
 golium tinlie nol e, cpiia laboribus gravioribus proliibearis.-32 ' Meministi 
 me sicpms hoc dixisse, fratrem autem meum alium opinion^m Se- 
 ^3 bempronms te male h)cutum esse existimat ; nihil enim m Lus iSri- 
 posse, quam ratiHiiem illam, cpia adversarios tuos a-i?ressus 81^-84 Te 4,; 
 
 ver{^r!;^y^:'t^^:;;;^ ^^. Neapolis.-^ Delectare.-3 ConcUe, concinnus.-* Animad- 
 
nio 
 
 INFINITIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 PAIiTICIPIAL CLAUSES. 
 
 317 
 
 1 Mv brother writes, that Oajns is well.-2. My father confirms [tlie 
 reiu)rt]; tliat the enemies are api)n)acliino:.-;3. You all know, tliat the siiii 
 is lar-er than tliC moon.-- 4. Cicero says {ajo), that vn-tue is contented ^Mth 
 (/,,A irscir— .-) The ambassador reports (nn'tnUrnn that the captiyrs are 
 g{ill .jiivc '—(5 We all know, that cricero was th<' .«greatest ot all Koman 
 ^vriters— ': The seoiits'^ eonlirmed, that the enemies were apiiroachmg 
 with ihij) «n'-eat quickness.-- 8. The ambassadors answered, that their states 
 were desirous of the friendship of the Roman p,;,>ph.-«J The messen.ir.rs 
 
 announced to Caesar, that all Bel-ians had ^^l^'^'^'^'^^-^^-^^.^'^Z]^!:^ 
 (Jains ahvavs was unmindfid of his duty.-U 1 suppose,* that thou ^Mltt. 
 better than (}aius.-l2. I acknowledge,^ that I have broken^ the laws both 
 of God and men.— Ul He acknowledges, that lie has committed that mur- 
 der '—U We see, that you have acted with (h,/) uivat prudence, and have 
 well accomplished this whole business.— lo. Tiie mcssen-ers denied, that 
 thev had been al)le to learn^ anythin- new.-16. Gajus denies that he CNcr 
 siioke thus.— 17. Sempronius suspects that Gajus is jeahnis ot him.— I». 
 Solon pretended^Mo be mad."-ll). Ariovistus b()aste(l 0>m<//jw/v), that 
 nobody had ever made''^ war on (M him with imimnitv (?^ 2.0, Kem. 0). - 
 20. Thnles of Miletus'^ (^ 112, B.) has said, that water is the begmnin- ol 
 everything'-— 21. Xenopliaues states (/(M, that the nnxm is inhabited and 
 that' she fs an earth with (transl. of) many cities and mountains.-).:-. My 
 brother acknowledges, that the president" ot the n-pnb he has been killed 
 by him, and that he has been induced" to (^//) do'« ['tj by promises and 
 wihes "— '^:j The chiefs of the state denied, tjiat they were Idled with any 
 envy'or hatred toward (transl. of) the Roman people.-24. \V hen the king 
 saw that he had been deserted by the greatest part ot the army, he sent 
 ambi.ssadors to (^ 3:,1) treat for»'^ peace.-25. If I had learned ij-orjnoscerc), 
 that the city had b.-en occuined by the enemies I "*V''i? •' i-vYmm-v 
 turned there '■^"—20 The kinir already believed that he had obtained victoiy, 
 when {r>nn with indicat.) Lucius ap'proached on horseback,'^'' slwrnting, that 
 the second line of battle had been destroyed*' by a stronger force o the 
 enemies.— 27. When {cinn with subjunct.) the duels ot the states had un- 
 derstood," that their tr()oi>s everywhere-" were defeated by our [soldiersj, 
 they implored Ca'sar, to state-'^ the conditions ot i>eace.--28. Yihen{cu,n 
 with iud.) lirulus pretended to be mad, he deceived the king in order to 
 ffive liberty to the republic.— 20. We know, that the diligence ot Gajus is 
 frreater than that of Sempronius, but that the latter has more talent than 
 the former— 30. The scouts reported, that they had been m sight {m co/i- 
 sperfu) of the enemies ; that those, whom they Had seen, had had arms and 
 tliat their number was much smtdler than that of our soldiei-s.— dl. 1 iro 
 wrote, that he had made a most unfortunate voyage;'^ tor the shij^ wljicii 
 he had chartered,-^" had been lost'" by shipwreck,^' although his lite had 
 been saved.— ;J2. (Jajus wrote, that these atfairs (/i^'<7.>/^^////) were daily be- 
 coming more diltieult, becau.se he was assisted {a(ljuvare)hy "obody s help. 
 —33 We often observe {nninmhertere), that those who laugh most (^ tJOX., 
 Rem. 14), generally (^ 80, 3) grieve most if something u utortunate ( /<(/r6-/vs<^«) 
 
 »» TraiHl ivtre mon'd /yy.— '" To sue for jM-air, paccm roi:ftr«'.— " E<>. — -' >an( l^tl.- /a 
 
 fi\;,nher -^5 i„t,.lU'oii' -'-'^ I hT<iiu'.-" Stntuere.-^-^ Transl. had sailtd imst unJortunaUly 
 (iulchx).— ^» Conducerc— ^^ Truutsl. had j)etis/icd.—^^ Naufia;,'iuiu 
 
 has happened» to them.— 34. The inhabitants observed, that some of the 
 besieg('rs- were throwing'* darts," and (^ 35«, o) that othei-s wx-re approach- 
 ing (.v/v^^/zv) the town by a covered way.^— 3r>. Cjesar understood, that if thev 
 had re(liiced (yA'/y>7//<7^/-6) the fortitications, the end of all labors was oil 
 hand. —3b. 1 he general observed, that those, wdio were attacking the first 
 line ot battle, were fighting with greater ener<j:y,' than those who were 
 occupying the l„ivst.— 37. I hear with pleasuie {gaudeoY that thou hast 
 
 bought the estate 
 
 Participial Clauses. 
 
 1. datura repugnante labor irritus est.— 2. Omne pondus, nulla re imne- 
 ciente, perpetuo movCtur et fertur.-3. Astyage regnante, Tiiales Milesius 
 detectionem solis prajdi.xit.— 4. Athenienses, Laced<jemoniis nihil sentieuti- 
 l»us {to peireiee), navis ascendGrunt.— .j. Me et t€ consentientibus nemo re- 
 piignabit— 0. Graeci, advenientibus Persis, Thermopvlas occupaveraut — 
 i. C amillus novum exercitum conscripsit," nullo miihiam detrectante '"— 
 8. Darlu.s copias suas duxit, uxore et matre exercitum sequentibus— 9 Py- 
 thagoras^ 1 arquinio Superbo regnante vixisse vidCtur.— 10. Trajano mortiio 
 A'A\ns lladnanus impeiiuin (throne) occupavit.— 11. Dione int'erfecto Dio- 
 nvsius nirsus Syiacusarum imperii potitus est {to take pofMemon)— 12 
 ybnGas, Trojil a Gr^ecis expugnata, in {to) Italiam venit.— 13. Sardanapalus 
 yictus, exstrucla" incensjlque''^ pyra" et se et divitias suas concremavit.— 
 14. Alii tela conjiciunt {t/iroic), alii testudine facta oppidum subeunt "— lo 
 Kegibus Bruti virtute exterminatis'^ libertas constituia {to establish) est.-^ 
 10. Ucuhs amissis alba et aira di.scernere" non pos-sumus, sed bona et mala 
 honesta et turpia, utilia et inutilia.— 17. Cajsar, his rebus gestis,^' lecratos 
 civitatum hnitimaruin convocavit.— 18. Sulpicius consul bello {in t/i/war) 
 Maceuoiiico AntipatiGam e.vpugnavit puberibusque'** interfectis ac pra^du 
 
 )mui miliubus concessa {to Uuice) muros diruit atque urbem incendit^^ 
 
 19. Annocpiiiigeniesimo quiiiquagesimo ab uri)e condiul {after the bnildincr 
 of the rift/), Sulpicio Galba (et) C. Aurelio Coss., Philippo helium indicium 
 ^'':!"T~^-.^'*^^^^ "^^'"^ ^^^ P"^'»"<^ l»anc rem saepe narrilvit.- 21. Romani, Hau- 
 nibale VIVO se nunquam secQros es.se posse existimabant.— 22. Eis iuvitis 
 a qiubus Pharus tenOtur, naves Alexandrite portem intrSre nequeunt.-^ 
 o? i'^r^*^ adhuc rebus'Miomanis virtus tamen inilitaris ma<>-na erat — 
 ^4. t ulminum opera mira sunt : loculis"'» integris argentum coull-Ttur '''' ma- 
 nente vaglmr^ gladius liquescit {becomes liquid).— 25. Novimus, solis 'defec- 
 tionem nonnlsr* luiia novissimfr^ fieri {happen) posse.— 20. PompGjum tibi 
 vakle amicuni {kind) esse cognovi {I knoir), et eo tu cousule omnia qua3 
 voles obtmCbis.— 27. Solis occasu'^» {at) Ariovistus copias suas multis vul- 
 nenl)us et illfUis^' et acceptis {suppli/ ab eis) in castra {into the camp) reduxit 
 — :.8. Ciesarduobus maximis bellis una aestate {in one summer) con^iniWs 
 exercitum paullo maturius," quain tempus anui postulabat, in hiberna {into 
 icuitir-quartens) deiluxit.-" 
 
 1. While Tiberius I'eigned {regnfire), the Parthians='" ^vere subjected''^ by 
 
 «v/J te tS; 6^'- ,:'• ^'^ f^^-^inno o;^e^^-3 Coiijicere.-4 A dart, telum.-^ A covered 
 
 nr. H 16T ^". '^''';'""'-- Vt f^r^'Ct. -''^ To kindlo.-i3A funeral pile.-i4 To ap- 
 Po /.••". '", ex enninate.-i8 To di8tm-uie.h.-i7 To carry out.-i'* ^ 2H -i» Burn — 
 (JlrtWf^'' lar^'''''^?''*"/'' '^f ^a'm-a:^ ;-^.s7y«Wim in the ^inC'.-^i I^^ul'i. a casket, a box 
 unui . /a//0.— '"'Contiare, to melt.— ^s Scabban .—'-«< Only.— "Absol decree to be translated 
 by eu;ac%.-"Set (^ 229;.-" To mllict.-»« Sooner.-'^» To I^d.-3o |frtM.-3i DoTar^^^^^ 
 
318 
 
 TARTICiriAL CLAUSES. 
 
 AFFIRMATIVE SENTENCES AND PARTICLES. 
 
 319 
 
 tlio Eomans. — 2. Wliilo tlie ambassadors of the Grorian states were assem- 
 blinir,* the army of the Macedonians''' prepared to invade {invaderc) Greece. 
 — 8. Wliile i)leasure rules,^ tiie i!;reatest virtues are prostrate.* — 4. While I 
 Avas stayinu^ with thee {apud te) the vices of Dolabelhi were unknown to me, 
 — 5. WlViie they were tluis disputinir, a Hi^htninir struck {Uiiiyere) the ship. — 
 G. Whik' tliis man «governs {gnbcriKlri), tlie repul)lic will be safe {xtdvuii). — 
 7. When a storm" arises/ the sails" must be struck {xnbducen^. — 8. The sol- 
 diers entered the city, LabiOnus leading" (/r/</^6'//(/^iV/^^A.*</«/) the rear rank." 
 — 9. The other lejj^ions attacked {nggredi) the enemies, while Varro and 
 ^iCmilius defended the camp. — 10. While thou wast absent, I received two 
 letters of C'icero. — 11. I should wish, that all these things had been done 
 in my j^resence. — 12. Augustus was born while Cicero and Antonius were 
 consuls. — 18. In {m/'re ahlafire) the 24yth year after the building of the city 
 the kings were expelled at the instigation of Brutus. — 14. Octavianus hoped, 
 that he by the help of Antonius and Lepidus could take possession" of the 
 government.'"^ — 15. All these things were done {f/erere), when thou wast a 
 boy. — 10. This house, while thy father was living, was mine. — 17. The 
 Helvetians thought {putdre) that against their will no array could enter 
 these detiles.*" — 18. Gajus has arrived, not only against my will, but also 
 w ithout my knowledge. — 19. The captives were cruelly {fmlfis) mutilated," 
 more than 2000 men being {irhile they icere) witnesses. — 20. Iloratius Codes, 
 after the bridge had been destroyed {re.ici/Khre), crossed the Tiber'^ by 
 swimming.'" — 21. Physicians think, that after the cure" of a disease has 
 been discovered,** the remedy has been discovered. — 22. After Licinius had 
 been murdered {occalere), Constantlnus took possession of the empire. — 
 23. After Darius, the king of the Persians, had died, Artaxerxes accused 
 Cyrus his younger (^ 291, K. 11) brother, of aspiring {that he mpired) to'" 
 the throne.^" — 24. .lugurtha, after [his] friends had died, the most of whom 
 lie had killed himself, was suddenly seized'" by a strange {mirui<) insanity."''^ 
 25. The king thought {c.risti/udre), that after I and my brother had been 
 dismissed, he could commit the.se crimes with impunity (ii 220, K. G). — 
 20. When nobody (^ 249) contradicts, I shall take the liberty {a>mlri) to 
 submit (propofiere) this whole question to you. — 27. After these two most 
 difficult labors have been accomplished [by me] in one summer, 1 shall 
 endeavor to tinish the other easier ones. 
 
 AFFiiiMATiyE Sentences and Particles. 
 
 1. Epistola tua gratissima fuit Tullife raece et meliercule mihi. — 2. Nab 
 ego homo infelix fui. — 8. Njc tu malus orator es ! — 4. Nae ille, medius 
 fidius, nescit, parvum hoc lucrum"^^ ingentem"^* sibi danmum afferre.'" — 
 5. Meministis enim profecto omnium harum rerum. — 0. Omnes profecto 
 liberi (piam servi es.se malumus. — 7. Magnum profecto patientite documen- 
 tum dedistis! — 8. Hoc sane nunquam credidissem, nisi ipse tu contirmares. 
 — 9. Gajus redlbit sane, si hoc cognoverit {to learn). — 10. Ila3c quidem opi- 
 nio a philosophis nostris jam diu refutflta est. — 11. Sempronio quidem nihil 
 inexspectHtum aut mirabile esse vidGtur. — 12. Equidem semper existimavi, 
 
 ' ConvenTre. — ' See § 152, exc. — ' Dominari. — * To be prostrate, jacere. — * Commoveri. 
 • Teinpcstas. — ' Orlri. — " Velum.—*' Ducore. — •" Aj,'men novissiinuin.— " To take posf<es- 
 sioii. poH/i. — 12 Itcspublica. — '^ Ani,'iistije. — '* Mutililre. — '* § 17'.». — •• To cross» l\v swim- 
 iiiiii^, trandre. — i^ Ciimtio. — "^ InvenTre. — '* Trans/, coveting; {(X>nrupisrerc) the throne. — 
 '" Jte^Mimu.— 2» Corripere. — ^a Deoieutia.— ^» Gain, proGt.— ^* Euoruious.— ^^ To caa»e. 
 
 has res multo facilius reprehendi quam emend^lri posse.— 13. Sempronius 
 q..id,m pnn.o respondit, se nihil intellexisse, delude (^ 201, 116.^8 se7d 
 
 in'* 'Jihn i;:^^^'' 1'"'''"''"^ '^'^=^'" t^cisse.-14. Mihi quidem nihil Sc^t^ 
 lus nilHl iicundu.s ess<' potuit.-15. Omnino errare vidrris.-lO. Verbura 
 prorsus nu lum mtell.gn._17. Hoc quidem prorsus intelligo, te d o m S 
 ho..j nianere nolle.-18. Si aliud nihil tieri potest, hoc cert'e efficiCmus ut 
 mvn^nv sullrag.onun numero quam unqtiam antea'yincamur.'^-19. Xc, s 
 l.iudau non possunt, vituperari cert^.- uon debent.-20. PompPjo certe: hoc 
 noJerfiT^'^'r ^^ ^P V^r^ratmn fuisse vidDtur.-21. vlri nihildice^e 
 potes. tinge sa em aliquid commode.''-22. Si pecuniam mihi dare ne- 
 quis, velim consdumi saltem des.-28. Mihi quidem etiam Appii C^ci car- 
 
 1!!''V r 'i^' x"" "'"' ^!^^^",^--^^- Video !dios etiam eisdLn vVtHs de^I- 
 lo.^ esse.— 2o. ^am qui opibus,' armis, potentia" plus valent, adversariorum 
 stui it.a e inconstantia" tantum mihi i)rofecisse" videntur, ut am (.^^ et'an 
 auctontate plus vaIeant.-20. Nefas est nocGre patri*: ergi civi" Xque 
 
 II ni s oi V. n T • ^'^ "1"''^ '^^'"'^:^'" exemplis etiam vestris contirmare 
 (lU)Ltis.— .8. Velmi nobis quoque orationem tuam legas.— 29. H«c auoQue 
 a maj,>nl,us nostns melius quam a nobis facta sum.-80. In vfctoHr('' 
 
 uie) etiam bonos de- 
 
 ^tissimo antepono. 
 
 vino T.. 1 .,,T • • X- — "" '"' """'"'«i acuuuui {notice). — "d'd. Ma- 
 
 rius lel amlcis suis tunestus erat.-84. Pra3dones, agro Vibonensi'^ depoim- 
 
 aio - etiam urbem terrCbant.-85. Olim seditio \iMwr^ supplicii^'« ^m- 
 
 Yssimis puniebatur; nuncvero rebellare vel virtus vidStur.-80. Is quidem 
 
 et yuciliT/-'nb "' "'^•^r^^^'"' ^^''''' ''''^^'' ^''^'^ vidCtur.-87 Sempi^ is 
 n nn ? nf.' cM>nsen lunt, (piam existimas ; nam et ille existimat homi- 
 
 ; I i^y-tru . V •'"- ''^" 7^^^'^7 ''^'' *^^^^^ ^^^^^, lioc consilium vel 
 unique nostrum perniciosum tore (that it icill be).-4l. Turn demum beate 
 viveie potes si te ipse noveris.-42. Turn demum le^rati lit eras d^'^ax^^^^ 
 d.i as, protulcrunt {to shoic).-4^. Sempronius hoc imprimis effid yul ut 
 eadein jura omnibus hominibus reddantur.--44. On ines regiS'L nosU J 
 '^'l^Vl^'^'^.^^'^r i"^P'-I'"i^ Hutem ineridiana3.^^5 S^?^ 
 
 a majoriDus nostris melius quam a nobis facta sunt— 8i 
 vtctor,nyi>\ lirnavis glorijiri licet, adverse res {nu.fortam) 
 tree ant {^hgradi).-d\. Vel iniquissimam pacem bello just 
 8-. In hdibus'-* musuorum'* aures vel minima^» sentiunt i 
 
 1 . , . '7 o M •"•I'iiijiio «vuicui iiifiKiiuiite. — 4-,) iviiriiiT» 
 
 nqS7id " 'r No 'l'"^ r'''^''' ^'7^''- ^-^^^^^ ii^unrTtc^ 
 niipiimis tui. —40. Nos quidem omnium hominum jura deiendimus ora^- 
 
 k^t. ;^;'/X^To"tr" "^^^^'•-•-"•-^^- «^•!?.te Gra^cai potissimum litt^er^ 
 4s \\ . • ?' T^""''^ '>''.^ iieghgere, aut illis certe posthabGre ipoHtpom) — 
 , H..n, /• '' ''' ^'-' l'*^^'-^-^""^'»^ lil>ns delectari, qui non solum pulchra sed 
 
 lam utilia proponunt {teach).-^^X Cjcsar h.ec ea^ maxime latiom fecit 
 ut mercauu-es i M.tius inwrermdUy) provinciam nostram adl^^^ ^ ' 
 -.>0. llui condiliones a legatis rejects, sunt, pra^sertim cum militumiram 
 
320 
 
 AFFir^MATIATi: SENTENCES AND PARTICLES. 
 
 tin,?reTit-5l. Si celeritor pro-rcdi vis, libros utills poluis qiiam jucnm 03 
 
 bant '' ab lioc potissimum nuMlico curiln^' volPbant.— .>4. I cmi.H iiin du-taniKL 
 
 nu^ll; it' sullat. i^mniJulate,) sunt, nt (..^/.^O vd --<;^J--;;;^-^;;^: 
 
 (Kiilis tiTC viaoiv ant nianibus :ittiimcrc^ vidfaiiiur— .).). llor \>ilnus pi( pe 
 
 HH le it -5(i Hoc noil tani luc, quani te cldectabit, qui illliis loci propc 
 
 ncmi p^tut !<Woe.-57. Duo^tVre militum niillia interh'ctn suiU ac 
 
 iria circitcT millia viibienTta.-oS. Has nngas satis ^^'^'^V • ii::i nonnt 
 vix a sapicntissiniis, muUo minus a bailvuis at(iue uuloctis iiitdbgi ueun t. 
 liod Nulla tbrtasse inveutio« gt'iR-ri humfiuo ulilior tuit, quam lUa, qua 
 libros impriniere' docCinur. 
 
 1 Nothin- by Hercules, can ever induce {adducere) me, to c lan-c {depo- 
 r..-.)mv political views.«-2. Verily, Corrueius, thou art a kind ^^ccuser - 
 3 I indeil iun.uesUonnbly) was lucky " to» have seen tb;U •-" ^^^^^^^ -^ 
 
 ^A/. tinie.-4. Indeed that man is an honest ^1»»^' ''-"^.vT^ os\T U tlilVic^^^^^ 
 «t.t.. w -T «r.vat crime indeed !— 0. To know one s self (^ 281) i^ cliincuii 
 
 a"i-own (pube^) [man], trealin- puerile [tl.injrsl.-«. //'« n>an "Hk-e « 
 
 be s^^tdflea- «ith m lir.s.-10. I, on n.y part, ''^"^f ^^« ,'''" | '',,rCt 
 nulre), that a wise n.an] can never be unl;appy.»-U. Caj > ^'^ -^"A. ;' 
 he, oii bis part, could be i.ulu<-ed by nothing, to d'' ''--l- J ' '''^; ' ^ 
 n-..Ii.ei- the Vame as (S 30U) voii have said before.— 1-1 1 In» opinion siuns 
 g^r c^i"?"-^.^-:^U. lUce make tl- att-j>> o-' -^^^Jj- -^;^- / 
 ^ ill be beaten ^vlncere).-\r,. Copernicus cert^imly did "*f^^^"^ y,' J '. ,/;^^ 
 theorv (ruiiAA had alreadv been advanced {propoMre) by Hipi an h i> 
 16 It an one at all can perform this business, Brutus certainly will be 
 able t; <)Ttl -17 If nothln,^ else has been etiected by these stru.-les {c.r- 
 ^ .It s least seems to IkIvc been gained,- that our rqmbhc can m-ver 
 be dissevered- or divided.-l8. Thou hast refused to act tiipc.dt : dl ( - 
 L iu least thy opinion.-19. Also Cesar had the ^'^^^'TT^^ 
 Is understood [perspic^re) also by. us -21 I shall «^1^1 ^^1;^ / =;: ; '"^^ 
 rtiruv^sl are repu-nanl" to our neighbors/'* which to u^, on oui P' ^; s( oil 
 e i ?lv oleral k> and even good.-22. Even thy brother has ^*,""^ ^^'^ y 
 nr oceedin.'s --2:J. Our citizelis are well received {e.rni^re) even by the in >t 
 
 i;:;m^ muions (,.;.).-24. A good ( proOn^ V"^;'';' H ^nd^li'" ^ U 2 - 
 [buti a bad {lmpr^^ni>^ man slanders^' even his bt'^t fiiend^ 1?^ o.>> 1|- - . 
 '^5. I should wilh, that this would also happen ^c,,ure) ^^ ^^^-^"^ 
 said the same thing; but even /a.-^ opinion may {can) easily be letuted.- 
 2^ T is cHme can- been committed only by some cowanUy [man].- 
 
 28. Vli t lesticm can be solved ^A,ere) ^>y the .U^reatest scholars onb^- 
 2') Only this 1 intended to remark {monen), that ././/• adherents at east 
 h tVJ neve ackn(>whdged {agn^.^cere) that law.-:iO. This man avers {ajo) 
 IKU he has paTd" 300o"sesterces (P. I., p. 183), while {cam with subjunctive) 
 
 NEGATIVE SENTENCES AND PARTICLES. 
 
 321 
 
 the treasury' has received {accipere) two thousand onh^ — 81. Then only 
 shall we be happy, if we shall prefer («/i^€j;o/i€r6') the commands {pycpcep- 
 tuin) of God to our pleasures. — 32. TJien only did Liscus, encouraged'^ by 
 the address'"' of Ca'sar, disclose* what (J; 300, R. 27) he had ccmcealed^ before. 
 — :]3. !Say only the word, [and] we gratify thy wishes." — 34. The general 
 exhorted the soldiers, but esi)ecially the centurions,' to {ut) search** most 
 carefully" the forest. — 35. L,*elius had selected*^ just thU place, because he 
 intended to live as ((uietly as possible. — 30. Chietly by these reasons I have 
 been induced, to embrace {.s(/,^cl])ere) the cause of Roscius. — 37. If it seems 
 strange** to somebody, that {infi/t. da u xe) }ust I have undertaken this busi- 
 ness, I should wish you to understand, that nobody else was willing to 
 expose {objicere) himself to so great a danger. — 38. I believe, that you are 
 willing to gratity my wishes, esi)ecially since the war, which is imminent 
 {i in pen lie re) to the republic, can be prevented {prohibere) by me only (^ 278). 
 — 31). The enemy can never cross this line {Jinis plur.), especially if our 
 generals are watchful {nyihins) and attentive.— 40. Our fellow-citizens have 
 always been exceedingly partiaP"^ to this man. — 41. We rather" hear that 
 we ourxclve,% than that others are praised. — 42. Then we saw the veiy flame 
 of civil discord or rather of war. — 43. B}^ this naval battle the power" of 
 the Athenians was almost destroyed {exxtinffuere). — 44. Almost nobody will 
 deny, that these conditions were entirely fair. — 45. The laws almost of no 
 state are as free as ours. — 40. These laws are now nearly obliterated*^ and 
 tbrgotten.'" — 47. We Imve lost quite enough money. — 48. Caesar explained 
 his opinion chiefly with these words: — 4'j. This city is about 20,000 paces 
 (^ 311) distant. — 50. ^Vllen these [events] transpired {evenire) we were al- 
 most in sight of the Gallic shore. — 51. In {by) this skirmish" the enemies 
 lost quite 400 [in] killed and about 2000 prisoners {capfuff). — 52. The Gauls 
 complained esiu'cially {qneri) that {quod with subj.) almost in their sight 
 their towns were pillaged {din'pere), their fields devastated and their wives 
 and children carried away {abducere). — 53. The sight of nothing perhaps 
 has delighted me more, than the triumphal procession {triuniphns) of our 
 general. —54. The soldiers were so few, that they scarcely tilled {co/nplere) 
 one ship. 
 
 Negative Sentences and Particles. 
 
 1. Newtonius baud mediocri'^ sane ingenio, totam banc rationem {theory) 
 excogitavit.*" — 2. llostes milites nostros aggredi ausi non sunt. — 3. Ca?sar 
 yEduos graviter vituperavit, ([uod, tam propinquis hostibus, frumentuni 
 ab eis missum non esset. — 4. Liscus respondit, se hoc facere non potuisse, 
 quum frumentum in agris (//i the fields) inxiXZwwm^'^ non esset, — 5. Ariovistus 
 Ca?sari respondet, C()i)ias suas hostem non verJ^ri. — 0. ]Magnum est nomen 
 ejus, qui non manibus, sed vapore*' nos laboriire docuit. — 7. Gajus non 
 me, sed te invitilvit.— 8. Liber iste, qui tunc omnibus notus erat, nunc 
 fere non legitur. — 9. Ne barbari quidein talia credunt. — 10. Ne summi qui- 
 dem homines has res explanare possunt. — 11. Si ejusmoui labdrem sus- 
 cipere velles, ne Herculis quidein vires tibi sufficerent.''"^ — 12. Cajsari hoc 
 
 coul(f be committed.-" Homo.-" Numerire. 
 
322 
 
 NEGATIVE SENTENCES AND TARTICLES. 
 
 opus ne incipere qiiidem liciiit.— 13. A. Si hoc ita est, tribimi plobis ciinl- 
 bunt,' ut jus tuum"^ tibi a populo mUlruur.*' />'. At tribuni plebis me ne 
 aiuliC^runl (piidcm !— U. Labii^nus, quuni 0:^:ir nonduin adc^ssct, prci'liiini 
 ditrcrre constituit.— M. Natura' U'i>is a niorlalibus nmtari nuUo niodo pos- 
 g,,„t.— If). His rationibus Epicuri opinio probilri omnino non potest. — 17. 
 KxploratOres* Cajsari nuntiarnnt, se nilnl omnino vidisse.— 18. Xulhuu 
 omnino ncgotium invito dco tieri ])otest.— 19. Nihil omnino iK'iticcre scitis. 
 —20. Nullum un(iuam militcm Alcibiade tbrtioirm novi'ranuis.— 21. Dux 
 t'xistimavil, hostis jam fugciv, neque nostrorum impi'tum sustini^re posse.—' 
 22. Lucullus belli uloriam imi)ilmis appetlvit,** neiiue minus jjloi'ue quam 
 divitiarum cupidus'erat.— 23. Hoc sane quam dilii;entissime faeia.m, neque 
 a me ulla res, qme (pudem tibi eunu eiit,^ nei^liiiCtur.— 24. Oppidani necpie 
 niuros defendere, ne([ue oppidum hostibus tradere voluCiiml. — 2."). Consul, 
 postquam vidit, urbem neque vi neque dolo capi posse, obsidionem relin- 
 quere [to raiae) coustituit.— 20. Captlvos inermis interticere nee debCmus 
 nee volumus.— 27. Gajus hoc opus non modo non linlvit, sed ne inehoavit 
 quidcni. — 28. Hi juv^nes non modo timidi non sunt, sed etiam audaees ac 
 temerarii tieri videntur.— 211. Kiro autem ita sentio, Latlnam linguam non 
 modo non inoi)em,' sed locui>letiorem'* esse quam Gracam. Cic. Fin. 1, 3, 
 10, _30. Non modo res {the event) me non feiellit," sed ne dies qindem.— 
 31. Non modo aMernam, sed ne diuturnam'" ciuidi-m jrloriani asseeutus est. 
 —32. His rationibus non modo sapientis, sed ne insii)ientls quidem deeii)ere 
 potes.— 33. Ea enim est coniltus, qua' ei non modo diL::nitatis, si'd ne liber- 
 tatis quidem partem'' relintiuunt.— 34. Nihil menti tam netarium est, quam 
 voluptas. Nee enim libidine dominante recte coii:itnre ])o.ssunuis. — 35. In- 
 terea rex ali(piot Illvria» oppida exi)uguaverat et thraeiam invadere voluit. 
 Nee vero Lacedienionii quievCre.'"'— 30. Dux Aristldem .Etolis auxilium 
 tVrre ju.ssit. Neque tanuni hie, invito rege, obsidionem relinquere voluit.— 
 37. Curare debCmus, ne benignitas" nostra major sit cpiam laeultates 
 {m€an)<).—SS. lingo te, ne ejusmodi nugis vitam eonsumas."— 39. Dux htcc 
 prtEcGpit,'* ne quis militum se neseio navis relinquere i)osset.— 40. Casar 
 omnis equos amovCri'" jussit, ne cui ulla fug* spes reliqua esset."— 41. Ihec 
 Cjesar ea maxime ratione fecit, ne quid ab hostibus serio (i^ 09) susciperP- 
 tur.— 42. CopiiE flumen transiOrunt, ne ab hostibus circumirentur."— 43. 
 Non punlmus homines quia i)ec(arunt, sed ne peccent.— 44. Socrates ita 
 locutus est, ut non supplex aut reus, sed magister aut dominus (/•<//*/•) judi- 
 cum esse viderCtur. — 40. Hjcc quastio tam ditficilis vidctur, ut a nobis qui- 
 dem solvi ncm possit.— 40. Dux milites hortatus est, ne deticerent," neve 
 hostis fugientis vincere ])aterentur.— 47. TimGbam, ne evenlrent ea, (luae 
 accidPrunt {came to y >//.•*.-<).— 48. Casar postulavit, ne (iermanos frumento 
 neve alia re adjuvarent.— 49. Video te onmis labores subire, ac limeo ut 
 sustineas (^r>.<<).— 50. W'reor, ut pons ille satis lirnuis sit.— 51. Non vereor, ne 
 hunc laborem terre'^" non possis.— 52. Hannibalem non magis (i^ 412) bar- 
 barum quam Scipionem tiiisse credo.— 53. Alcibiadem non tam pertidum 
 
 1 To take caro.— " Jx.'i f^io/m {uifHrn. twim, etc.), literally: one's* (my, thy. etc.) n<;ht, 
 or a- Via sav in English: j//.v7?^v. Tlie \\ot(\. Justitia can only be used in an abstract 
 geli-e —3 To reudt-r — * Sci>ut.— * To covet.—* Qiav qid^lnn tibi o/ne erit. Siidi. at least, 
 a« you will care fur.—'' Voor.—'' Rich.—» Hex nw non fallif. I am not di-ceiyc-d in a tlnnir. 
 The negation oltcn W« retained, when the common predicate is expres-ed in the hr^' «>i 
 the coordinate members.— »<> Lastinir— " The part of freedom: thai is: the ktatt, the 
 condition of freedom.— 12 Ouiescere, to remain quiet.— >3 B.nevolence.— »* Voruiumere, to 
 equander away.—" I^ee pnecTpit. «rave these directions.— >« A/norere. to remove.—'^ A«- 
 Itquum esse, to be left.—" To outflank.—»» Dtjictrc, to fail.—''» To endure. 
 
 NEGATIVE SENTENCES AND TARTICLES. 
 
 323 
 
 atque impium, quam levem* et imprudentem, non tam negligentem quam 
 ineuriOsum*^ tuisse novimus. — 54. Themistocles non minus celeriter gessit" 
 res quam exc(»gitavit.'' — o~). Scio, te, quum hac tierent, nondum uatum' 
 tuisse. Non ergo qua uimc ais vera esse possunt. 
 
 1. Thou hast undertaken no difficult business indeed. — 2. It was not al- 
 lowed to the Gauls, to imi)ort Mine. — 3. Thy friends do not desist from slan- 
 dering us. — 4. The Senate is not accustomed (j^ 342, 11. 4) to make {inferre) 
 "war on {to) the weak. — 5. The soldiers did not siLspect, that the mountain 
 was already occupied by the enemies. — 0. The soldiers could not be in- 
 duced, to {at) renew the attack. — 7. The enemies, since they had not been 
 assisted {adjumre) by [their] allies, could not sustain the attack of our 
 legions. — 8. Lucilius felt, that not Sulpicius, but he, was designated by the 
 speaker {orator). — 9. They said, that they did not fear the etieiny^ but the 
 bad loads,^ and the vastness' of the forests. — 10. Themistocles was not less 
 dislinguislied'^ by [hisj diligence, than by the quickness of [his] mind. — 
 11. Thus 50,000 of the barbarians were beaten by no more than 10,000 of 
 our soldiers. — 12. So great a fear suddenly seized {occupdre) the army, that 
 the souls and minds of all were not slightly {nudlociiter) disturbed. — 13. We 
 have not yet learned {diacere), that by battles and wars the lot {fatam) of 
 the human race is ameliorated." — 14. Not even by the greatest scholars can 
 future [things] be foreknown {jii'iEsc'ire), unless they'" have been deter- 
 mined" by certain laws of nature. — 15. Gajus ccmld not even nnderstand 
 these words, but Semiuonius did {facere) almost everything he had been 
 directed [to do]. — 10. The laws of nature are of that kind,'"^ that they can- 
 not at all be violated with iini)unity. — 17. The soldiers of the allies com- 
 plained {fjUivi) that {qnod with subj.) they had not received any booty at 
 all. — 18. The general saw, that he could by no means break {perfrittgere) 
 the battle-line of the enemies. — 19. The soldiers saw, that they could not 
 find any provisions at all. — 20. We know, that nobody ever was wiser than 
 Plato. — 21. We never knew' {novixsc) any greater scholar than V^arro. — 22. 
 No less than 10,000 of our soldiers were killed or wounded ; nor was this 
 battle more destructive'"* to us than to the enemies. — 23. Casar saw, that 
 this was dangerous to the Roman peoi)le, and did not think {eHstimnre)^ 
 that they ought {debere) to tolerate {ferre) the arrogance of Ariovistus. — 
 24. We perceived," that the enemies were retreating,'* and that none of 
 them dared to show [their] faces'" to our soldiers. — 25. It. is known," that 
 the Scythians aie barbarians, and that no arts at all are practised"* by 
 thein. — 20. Nothing is more remarkable'" than this battle, and never did 
 so small a band'^" crush'-' so great a power {opes). — 27. These [men] could 
 neither control"- their faces,'" nor sometimes restrain"* tears. — 28. Ariovistus 
 remarked [iiicei-e) to Cuisar, that he declined*'^ neither his (Caesar's) friend- 
 ship, nor that of the Roman people. — 29. The officers'^" declared, that they 
 neither dared to leave the town without Caesar's will, nor were able to 
 (lefenil the walls, if the enemies should make {sid)). imperf.) an attack with 
 {by) all troops. — 30. The most renowned citizens not imly did not disgrace,^' 
 
 ' Fickle. — 2 Careless. — ' Gerere. to carry out. — * To conceive. — ^ \afus, born : here used 
 as a preiiicative adjective. Natuin fuisse is not a perfect iutinitive of nasci.—^ Bad roads, 
 viarum an<j:ustiie. — ' Mairnitudo.— » Tobe distinguisUed, ])ra'siftre. — ^Translate: is made 
 better. — i" TranM. : unless which are determined. — '^ Detinlre. — »'- Transl. : are those 
 {is, ea, ic/).— 13 Fuuestus. — ^* Auimadverlere.— ^* To retreat, se recipere.— 1^6'6\ in the 
 eing.— »7 Connta!, with an infinitive clause.— i' Exercere.— i«Xobilis.— ^oManus.— 21 Pf^. 
 Pternere.— 22Fingere.— " Vulius (sin»,', in Latin).— 2* TenSre.— '^^ Kypudiare.— 2« Dux.— 
 *'' Contamiuare. 
 
324 
 
 NEGATR^E SENTENCES AND PARTICLES. 
 
 but ereii honorctP themselves by the blood of Saturnlnus and Flaccus. — 
 31. But tiie general did not on'ly not pursue the fleeing enemies, but not 
 even followed [them]. — :J2. We accused Grac<'hus, but thee we not only 
 cannot accuse, but not even censure. — 3^3. I believe, that tln'se not oidy are 
 not wise, but not even sane. — VA. These words were uselos ; for the sol- 
 diers were unwilling to deliver their general to his adversaries. — ;>."). I em- 
 l)loy thy Sulpicius to everything; for I do not think {jxdicare) that any of 
 thy relatives^ is more prudent, nor more attached* to nu'. — ;J0. Our horse- 
 men returned (/v re///), after they had i>ursued the tirst battle-line of the 
 enemies for some time;* hut they had not perceived'' that the ci'ntre" had 
 in the mean tinu-'' occupied the 'town.— 37. We nuist piaise, but not cen- 
 sure these etforts"of the young men,— 38. Pyrrhus tried to bribe Fabricius; 
 the latter, however, could not be iiuluced tol)etray his country. — 311. Cesar 
 gave orders (in/pcrdrc) to his soldiers, not to throw {eotijicen) any dart at 
 all. — 40. Ariovistus said, that he was not so barbarous {Imrharux), as not to 
 know, that the Romans had never before carried {ferre) help to the .-^]du- 
 ans. — 41. Ariovistus demaiuled, that Caesar should bring" no foot-soldier 
 [with him].— 42. Ca'sar demanded, that Ari(»vistus should retiun the hos- 
 tages, that he should not trouble'" the ^Eduans [any] longer V////y/////.s), nor 
 make war on the latter and their allies. — 43. Casar'did this, lest it might" 
 be said, that he had circumvented {eircumvcnur) Ariovistus by treachery. — 
 44. Cicsar was afraid, that the Germans might be troublesome'"^ to our pro- 
 vince. — 45. 1 admonish you, never to {that yoii, etc.) lose'^ [your] courage 
 by anvbody's injury. — 40. We denumd, that nobody be accused for having 
 end)raced'* the cause of the enemies. — 47. 1 am afraid, that some one (»£ 
 you also may have this opinion.— 48. The general i)iil)lished,'" that no 
 (5^ 2G3. foil.) wine should be given to the soldiers, ami that no sutlers'^ 
 should enter {adln) the camp. — 41). I am afraid, that 1 cannot accomplish 
 ^vhat I have undertaken.— oO. 1 am not afraid, that you should not acct)m- 
 I)lish this business.— 51. The soldiers were afraid, that !Scii)io's wound was 
 mortal."— 52. I think {exist imdre) that Semju-onius was as little skilled'* 
 
 -53. I accuse thee of this crime 
 
 declared, that he had not intended to dimiuitih the pay of the st>kliers. 
 
 iMrERATivE Sentences. 
 
 1. Cela iram tuam, et die, si quid mali fecimus.— 2. Abi, Parmeni, et me 
 venisse nuntia!— 3. Salve, mi frater, gaudeo te advenisse. — 4. 3Iilte** hunc 
 virum,obsecro, autme abire sine.— 5. Ora, (piuj exoptas ;'"* dabo!— 0, Keddc 
 luihi, O Vare, legiones meas !— 7. Audlte, di, audlte ! obruite ira vestril sce- 
 leratum''" istumi— 8. !Si irati estis, () di, me potius pnnlte, ([uam patriam 
 meam!— y. ValGte,liberi, et qunj meditamini audacter ac forliter e.xsequi- 
 
 » none^tflre.— 3 \*ro\nr\a\\\\)i.—^ Attached to. amanf» with gen.—* For some time, aliquam- 
 diu.— ' Animadverteir.— « Centre, media acien.— "^ IiitcTim.— " Studium.— » Adducere.— • 
 1« Lace<s(.re — •» Pos!?e.— >2 Molestu-. ->3 Dciiiittere.— »< Sui^cipere.— ^* Edicen-.— '^ .1 
 svtUr, lixa.— 1' Mortifer.— «^ PerTtus.— »» Incapax.— ^» InfClix.— -« [Those thin-sl, which, 
 — a'^ Pollic5ri.— ■" W'vrtfUtss, uuUub.— »* lubtqui.— " Mittere, to ticud away.— ■'« i:xoptdre^ 
 to desire.—'^' V'illaiu. 
 
 IMPERATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 325 
 
 mini !— 10. ContitCre culpam tuam, mi fili, neve amplius' cunctare !— 11. 
 Vide,'-* ne hoc negotium male peilicias.— 12. Fac ut celeriter proticiscaris, 
 neque enim multum tibi temporis restat.=*— 13. Cette manus, veteremque 
 amicitiam renovate !— 14. Cedo hoc i)oculum ;* est enim meum.— 15. IScito 
 me (piam avidi.^sime adventum tuum exspectare. — 10. Tu vero eis rebus 
 contcritus esto, (^uas Deus tibi concessit.— 17. Laurus Apolliui sacra esto !— 
 18. Cornelius et Sallustius aequis {at) partil)us lierGdes sunto.— 19. Si quia 
 intestato^ moritur, nee liberos habet, agmltiis" proximus familiam' habeto.— 
 20. Ne hominem necato, neve furtum committito. — 21. Ne aliCua appeti- 
 veris; tnis' contentiis esto.— 22. Imperator hoc" edictum {edicJ) pro|)o. 
 suit:'" "^"^ •'• 
 
 Ne milites arma sua neve vestimenla vendant; ne duces" plus His 
 
 leslus sun,"* qui te tantopere diligit.— 20. XolTte unquam putilre,me o] 
 vestris (;ontrarium esse.— 27. Noli putilre, me culquam longiores qu? 
 epistolas scribere.— 28. Velim tabellarios'" certos'" instituatis.'''" ut qi 
 
 )])tatis" 
 am tibi 
 
 ^ ..v.^....., ^v quotidie 
 
 alicpias litteras accipiam.— 20. Ut nunc seres habent,*-'He neve navibus neve 
 vi;e commiseris.--'— 30. Valetudini tantitm diligentiap adhibe,'" quantum me 
 dcHideriire scis. — 31. Cave existimes me quicqnam audisse, nisi'-** quod a te 
 ipso cognovi. — 32. Nisi euingravissime jHrnivero, me esse dicito ignavis- 
 simum [the qi'cated coward).— S'S. Ne quis propius accedat, quam impera- 
 toris edicto concessum est.— 34. Resistito, si pra^fectus Lncium gravius mul- 
 tflbit quam legibus sanctum'^' est.— 35. AccGdant'-^" capllvi, sententiamque 
 a jiidicibuslatam-'' audiant !— 30. Me scito omnem meum labOrem coiisu- 
 nu're in {devote to) tus, salute.— 37. Sic semper vivSmus, ut injiirias per- 
 peti quam inferre'" mallmus.— 38. Sempronius reliquos exhortatur, ne la- 
 boribus succumbant.— 30. Aces Datami dixit, ne ab exercitu decederet.— 
 40. Consul Fulvio scripsit, ut exercitum statim deduceret." — 41. Sed eos 
 moneo, desinant tiirere.='°— 42. Quid vis faciam V — 43. Cave hoc facias!— 
 44. Fac ne hoc negotium anq^lius ditferas ! 
 
 1. Pray, add this to thy innumerable favors," to {ift) attend"'* to the in- 
 terests^** of my son as far as^"* thou wilt be able.— 2. But thou, pursue {c^rtr 
 mjui) that glory which always inliamed'Mhee,with (A.iy) all care {diligen- 
 tia) and energy {lnduiitria).—'6. Send as soon as ])ossil)le thy slave Pollex 
 away,''" if he has not yet departed {proficlscl).—4:. Help {adjurare) us as 
 much as (^ 315, K. 17) you can with thy advice, and never forget, that 
 nothing can be more pleasant to us.— 5. But thou, if thou lovest us all, and 
 espec-ially me, thy teacher, strengthen {conjirtitdre) thy health.— 0. Sosias 
 
 * Any longer.— 2 Vidh-e with vt or ne means: to fake care, that {ov lest) something is 
 done.— 8 liesidre, to be left.—* (Joblet.— " Without a will.—» Kindred. But tiie word 
 aonfiti/s ]\n>i no correspundin;; term in En^li.-^li. Af/ii(ltl are all tJu)se who either are under 
 the hanie paternal power, or wo>d<l l)e under it. if not the death of the father had dii?solved 
 the relation, 'thus married dau«;hters. and all children emanciimttd from paternal i)o\ver, 
 were not afjnnti, but coijnati, in re«j:ard to the res^t of the lamilv.—'' Estate.— ^ Why i;? not 
 a phrase witli 7es used ?—« The lullt)wing.— i» To publish.— »» Olticers.— 12 of elieerful 
 mind.— J3 The Latin says : to hojx: the best. We say : •• to hoj)e/c/r the best.''— •< Wiclved. 
 — 15 Torrh. — '« Molt.-'tum esse ofien means •• to harm," '• to inconvenience.'"- i*(?/y/rt^///i, 
 n wish.— >f Letter-carrier.— 1» Ke;;ular.— 2" Instituere, to appoint.—-» Ut mmc se res ha- 
 f/ud, ar* matters now stand.— 22 To intrust, to trust.— 23 To devote.— 2-« m,4 r/vod. except 
 what.— 26 ^sa//c7/¥, to t^ancxion.—^^ Acctdere, to ai)proach.—^'' Seute/diam Jtrre. to pro- 
 nounce a sentence.- 2» To inflict.— 2» Deducere, to withdraw (someiliin<r).— ^o 'I'o be in- 
 :<ane.— 31 Beneficium.— 32Consulere.— 33 Interests, res (p^xxv.)—^* As jar a^s^ quoad.— =5 In- 
 tlammare.— 30 Tq vend away^ mittere. 
 
22(5 IMPERATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 e'timof nu ' O soldiers, a„,l >-"'<:";'-• l.',''!''^';, '^S: a. ':■ ol' "-..t 
 
 have beaten lar-er »"»>'■«/"'' ^'«>,;':ks '-10 lU.V.. time «ill bi 
 « -iVIi nine soUliers, snuilar to yoiirsehes. — lu. inii " '"'' „,. 
 
 i;,u.',;ll seek»bou)\lea,h rather in (^,) '^:!"!j;, j;;"-,'^,?'£^^T 1 e Ig "! 
 Shalt tear (^eriri) «'«' ."'""'/^" rn"; .'."^n^J M tnothe r.-U. Yon ^°.all 
 rant.-13. Thou sha t '<>"'''■ '''J.'^/'V'^'l ^^^ live n.. (-,«0 lailh. 
 
 strengthen- the weak, but ■"l>""" ^ ' ^,^ '^, iov'e m ■ -^U- Ucwcacou.e, 
 
 the'J.igl.est «.^..v««..) law lor ( .) "- -'- ;'--;[-,al es^'vc «e.Snftho 
 
 U„(«fri) [mnm] our baml "« 'm»;-^'- L^ I'O^;^^^ Lot it be knowli 
 
 of the citizens are liuit bj th) ap^n- •>" ^ ^..^/unown —31 Let us re- 
 tlu'e, to whom the habits i.,uo,) ot nun. '* '^''^^'^"^ ';,,,";; ,.7,ler, that 
 warj the general by a most °";=;»;^,^«^\, S^'l^fbo u eenstne St.lpi- 
 (i„f. clauM) I reconimeui these things > tb»; • ?V„:^y, j,,, „„t n,,. cart) 
 cit4, that (,««i with subj.) I'e <=;'»«•;' "> -l^ A _^5 ' Slav my e.xhorta- 
 
 undertake more than '1''''' ?;f''f «' 'VA'",U^h-ed- to hee.-yO. May 1"« 
 tinn'^" never sc't'Ui causek'ss'"' or 111:5111^ luhulivcvi y^ . 
 
 c ^en" i^t be f^'i^htened by this threatenii^," pa,.er (^.//..^ -^^ L 
 notbinir binder yon from biyin- down" [your '^^"^-.--^^J, , . • V, ren . re 
 
 Le,V|;.;"Vnor make (l/.r.) gilts [.s^^. ./Za.l.-41. Do notudon^^ 
 
 .Tol>eofnooa cheer, hono animo e-e^^ I^-^j;;:-',^'^;:"^^^^^ 
 rari._e Dcliirn-.-' Thi^ word i.- a '«^'''/^'^'^^'^^''V/m '\m,MM,r^'-^3 i,,,,,,;e <) take away. 
 
 lluEnulIrc.-'* /'(^ l>e devoted ^ti"l,V[^'- >' V^ta f- -'•' Ff»cii. -" Ci-lestis.-'^' 7o 
 .uppo^e,! sing.. vnt.e.y-^ Kitu. 4 l. ^;;|;. ^^^^^ 'inHtead of .i.'uature : .../.. or 
 
 tlcrWHy depoucre. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 327 
 
 nor worsliip (eokre) more tl)an one "-od — 42 Do not n.v r.,.\ of • i .t 
 writiniis-^ with (bt/) false statements ^^-^ TuT , / ^^ •/''^■^ ^^'"^ ^^^7 
 
 Interuogath E Sentences. 
 
 ^ 1. Nnm ego te ditior sum ?-2. Tune tardus cs, si discere debes sed celer 
 61 h.dere Yi.J-S.lSum Xero clementior fuit cWre ?-4 Non^^^^^^ 
 
 quam Athuiienses ?— G. Is urn tu sceleratum iUum Haunibali comnarilbis 
 quo urn hic n^^ratam patriam semper adamSvit,- ille vero o-Sr^^^^^^ 
 
 ve u;:'^^i;;;ei^ti" ^^;; v''^ "^^T nostibusVrodidit^-g'd ^i 
 
 ^ Cbii^^ a invcni.sti ^—d. ^ urn recte'-^ C.-esari anteponimus Alexandrum ono 
 rum al er humanitate ac temperantia- vel inin icissimos conS^ 
 racundia vel anucissinios sustulit y-_lo. Credisne tu tale me^Uci u p^™^^ 
 trasse -11. ^sum quid novi audisti, mi lili y_i2 Censen'tu tanti m ^^^^ 
 honnnis tujsse;« ingeniun, ut vel summos veterum superset'? tl^^ 
 -1^ Attulistme tu librum, quern mihi heri pollicitus es? Sane quidem - 
 14. ^onne cuui nuper rustieareminijibros illos accepistis quorOarus vobis 
 mi> t.'' Aeeei)nnus .sane.-lo. Nonne satius est (^ 290 R 6) bene mm»^ 
 
 Z:^i<%STI^f- ^'"''^ ^''' ^'' '''^'^ • ^>mnb^>.-16 Nine con^u^l 
 unt (^ ^42, H 4) di unmortales, nnprobis diutuniiorcm^^ interdum imnuni- 
 ateni- (.'oncedere, ut gravius- eos postea puniant y Jta sanH^t -17 Vum 
 
 hosles copias nostras vicGrunty Immo vero, fugati sun -18 Num h c 
 
 lu>morausamhabetjustaniy ImmoveroJustikmam.-19 UtiL^^^ 
 Mquons qui suuimum bonum virtiltem 4e ajunt, an Epcrirum qui bona 
 b"mu s "'^o^ilrf ' cletnnty-20. yolui>tates;!e fus^rJ^'^^^T 
 nm 1 -n ^='J""^"^' ^"^ !^empronnnn negotio illi adhibuisti y-22 Judices 
 .upiobum Ilium civem utrum condemnarunt, annon y-23. Hostesne leS- 
 Os paceu, roga.um misPrunt. annon ?-24.' Num quid antrpe^ulam^^^^ 
 (m-/:/...waj<.v)nial. factum esty Immomultum boni.-25 N une S^^ 
 ^I'u redni y Onmluo, sed rursus abiit.-2G. Cuiusnatn m^er^- c s^^^^^^^^ 
 
 .os,n,m pugnasse eredis y-31. Unde oolligiti.^^solenl ^^^ :^^^ ^ 
 
 ; i 7 ^''''"•'''" l»««l»i'm exercitusprofectusesty-8a. Cur Plijlin. 
 
 in Alexandro anteponis y-34. Quid cunctaris y cur non responses VqI 
 
 ^n.MluexspecUisr^pia.ndiu audaeia tua nos eludet y"-3o. QuoTusqui.^que 
 
 actn.m 'l\, r n ^ 1 'T '"■'^' '''''''" '^'^ J>'-etlK-aie infinitive i^ in 111«;;.;/^^/ ~^' Parere to 
 
328 
 
 inteiirogati\t: sentences. 
 
 INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 
 
 329 
 
 '8 201 R \CA enim doctrlna prscstat, illil qiiidom' qiuc hominibns prosit? - 
 li. Quale lU'-otium (lualibus sociis susccpisti V-37^ ^^V'•^"'?^'^, ^Mnnm 
 hoc quicU'iii int('lli-unl!-:J8. Quid priuuun ciuriar .^^' aul uiulc poli.sHiium, 
 judice^ ordiary aut (juod aut a iiuibu.s au\iluuu pclani .'' 
 
 1 Am I as rich and powerful* as lhou?-2. Art thou accustomed to 
 weep if somctliiii- unpleasant hapi.ens (.w'/(A/v)to theeV— .i. Was bocrates 
 ^kM t whe^^i he was Lccused of impiety v^-4. Will not Brutus see thee, 
 when he returns (^ 347) V-5. Were thJ soldiers sad, after they had heard 
 "ml "he^Jlil^ai lad ret.lrned V-d. Has any one p.. )--\-;^;^;;:iJ"Vj;^ 
 absurd '>—; Has he been slain (tolkn) by somebody s treaehei> .^— H. Do 
 
 ou know ino...) somebody who is able to do this V i) D.dst thmi c.irry 
 Iferre) anythini; else, when Suli)icius met« theeV I did "<>t.- D.x'st 
 
 hou not believe, that'Oajus has lost more than 2000 sj-sterces^ I do.- . 
 Does not, while (../>;. ah^ the war hists,^ all trade^ he down .^^l^nciuestion- 
 ablv-12 Didst thou see that man, whom I had pomted out to .tbee "' / 
 did -13. Do you think (puture), that all this has happened accuUn ally 
 (^ OU)? Bv m) means.-14. Didst thou say, that 1 could d.) this be ter l.an 
 miy one else V Certainly, I did.-15. Is it m>t ^^"^'^'^VTtr^^o Vv ^ 
 (!i 311) slower, than to ruin every thmg by mnhw^niuiiu.) ha^te i By all 
 means-lG. Did (Jajus obtain'Mhe tirst placeV >,o, but the second.-l^ 
 Is Sulpicius a better scholar than Sejus ? Not only this, but he is the best 
 of all— 18 Does the accused confess, that he has committed hat murder 
 laedc'sY^ On the ccmtrarv, he denies [itJ.-lD. Do you wish rather that we 
 Lr vour eiiemies or vouV frie-ndsV Neither (^ 24G).-20. D<) you intend to 
 seek^-^ [your] safety by tli-ht, or to die, ti-htin- bravely V-21 Have these 
 thin.^s been done in thy pivsmce or absence v_22 \V il^t '-" b';tv;. the c tv 
 
 11. a) do you tlin.R lias spoKt^n oeiier, Sulpicius or ^^einpiv 
 chance (W) ^l<> y^>" think is better, [thatj ot Grant i^ o8, 1 . 4) or Ltb=.^tJ t 
 Sevmour(^-^*r./vls)V_27. Whom did you say you expected so long ^^ .0) ^ 
 -28 Whose words didst thou ciuote,- when I saw thee the other day i - 
 21). By which reasons hast thou been induced, to take" so serious a reso u- 
 tion vi30. To whom did Gajus rent'« his lUnn V"-31. \\ hat do you >M>h 
 to be doneV_32. At what o'clock (§ 2r,, U. 1(5) did Cjcsar arrive.^ At nllR^ 
 —33 At (/»/) what an expense'" did Gajus -ive'^ the last {pro.nmu.) ganus .'• 
 At fibout a million of sesterces.-34. How often (^ 2o8) ^l^^\ "^^^ C a^sar say. 
 that he rather wished, that (////. dau.se) a .^^ui by; LihT^o'JJ ^^''^^ ^^'^^'^l^' 
 than that an innocent one should be punished !-3. "^^v wil t b os^ 
 
 s 
 Ic 
 
 ,;i)le to settle (^ 37) these diihculties ol the repnbhc :'-3t). 1 o ho v leltnt- 
 ess" an enemy have we left our atlairs !-:J7. How much (^ 311) more 
 
 less an «*miii> ii.iv»^ »» »- »v.i ^^ -^ - .- - , 
 
 certain is the chance of victory to the K.mians, than o Antiochus l-o8. 
 What kind of remedies are applied by this physu-ian V-3U. H.)W many sol- 
 die'; have been killed by the enemies v_40 low '-">. ^»^^'-;^ !;^ 
 {;mth mhj.) were not willing to believe even tlu^ f—W. Ho\v less nmkr- 
 
 1 At lea«t -« For tlii^ ^ubj. see P. II.-^ OnerU to complnin (o/'sometliin-; the Latin 
 
 I' ln,pc';ysl..-i« Edere;--^oNoceu8.-^^ Ettuijere.--^-^ luexorabih«.-'-^3 ^rand. How many 
 were t'oimd (^reperlrej ? 
 
 Ftand, that all this is empty' and worthless?' — 42. How lonir did this war 
 
 last •'—43. Whence did C'tcsar come, when he made war on lils country? 
 
 44. Whither did Hannibal proceed,=* after he had been defeated* by Scipio? 
 — 4.J. \\ here did Milo dwell, when he had been expelled bv the Roman 
 people y— 4«. When will you return to me the book, which 1 lent** to you 
 the other day ?- 47. AVliy do you believe that Gajus was absent ?»— 48. Why 
 didst thou not hurry hitlierj when thou hadst heard {acclpere), that the 
 arrival ot the enemies >Nas expected ? 
 
 Indiuect Questions. 
 
 Ij JThales, intcn-ogtitus, num factaMiominuin deum fallerent:» Ne cogi- 
 tata'" quidem, inciuit. — 2. Solon, quondam {once) a Crccso rege internxj-atus 
 est, num quemquani ipso (^ 381), K. 21) vidisset beatiorem ?— 3. InteiToo-o 
 vos, judices, istiusne scelus dubium esse possit V — 4. Animadverte igitur 
 rectCne banc sententiam interpivtery— 5. Videamus primo, delne provulen- 
 tia mundus regaliir, deinde (i^ 2G1, R 10) consulalne" rebus humanis y— 
 0. Incerti tuPrunt, hostlsne aggredi, an castra defendere, an fuira saluteni 
 jtetcre priestaret ?— 7. Interrogaveras me, nonne putarem, nostnjs oratores 
 a Gi-iecis longe (j^ 311, K. 11) supefiltos esse V— 8. Quferitur,^'^ utrum mun- 
 dus terra stante circumcat,'^ an mundo stanle terra verttltury"— 9. Si 
 sitis, nihil interest, utrum aqua sit an vinum, nee refert, utrum sit aureum 
 poculum** an viti-eum," an manus concava."— 10. Eucrates quierenti cul- 
 <lam, liter esse mallet, Cnrsus an Socrates, respondit: Vivus'" mallem esse 
 C'nesus, moriens autem Socrates.— 11. Aristoteles hand scio an jirinceps 
 tuerit philosophorum.— 12. Ter soriibus'" consuluPrunt,"^" utrum Valerius 
 staiim igni necaretur, an in"'Miliud tempiis reservarCtury-^— 13. Xum un- 
 qiiam liominem ullum tanta pneditum" constantiil vidistis? Con.stantiam 
 (lieoy Nescio an melius j^atientiam possim dicere.— 14. Dubito an tantam 
 tidcm ac constantiam ju-iemio aliquo remunentri debeamus.— 15. Thales 
 percontanti,-* quid esset dithcilc y Se ipsum, inquit, nosse.— 10. Dionvsius 
 regno" cxpulsus, culdani dicenti, quid sibi Plato ct pliilosophia profuis- 
 i^^^V y^ tantam, incpiit, tbrtunji? mutationem'"' facile ferani {endure).— 
 1/. Lpictetus, interrogatus, cpiis esset dives y Is, inquit, cui id, quod habet, 
 satis est.— 18. Socrates, cum interrogarGtur, cujatein (^ 357, Rem. 8) se esse 
 dicerety .Alundfuium," in(iuit.— U). Agis LacedteuKmi'us, interrogatus, qiiot 
 liabPret milites : Quot'-^" sutliciunt'", inquit, utliostes vincantur.— 20. Quidam, 
 cum mtcrrogaiT'tur, qualem Socrates vitani egisset, qualem," inquit, cum 
 nionar, egisse ij)se cupiero.- 21. Aristipi)us interroiranti culdam, quanta 
 esset hommis cujusdam honestas,=*"^ inquit, i et metire !''— 22. Thales percon- 
 tanti, culdam, ubinam esset deus, interroges potius, inquit, ubi nou sit.— 
 -.3. Lquites obvios''* percontati sunt, quae Ibrtuna {the fate) consulum atque 
 excrcitus esset, ubi copiae essent, quo se Hannibal contulisset, quid i)araret. 
 
 Innnit?.— aNullus.-» To proceed, se conferre.— ■• Transl. haviiii: been defeated.— » Com- 
 modnre.— « To be absent, abest^e.— ' To hnrry hither. ii(l\ o] rin\—» Facff/w. a dt'ed — » 4/i- 
 rj}/Hi me fa/lit. :*omothiiv<r t-scapes me.— '• Literally, the //li/tr/.s- thonqht ; that is- Vie 
 (/„>H,jhfii,—i\ To attend. -'2 q,ueiitin\ it iis the qne>ti()n.-i3 C'lmfoilre, to iro ronnd to 
 larn.— '* W/-/t. to l)e turned, to revolve.— is a «roblet. -1« Poculum H/reum^a, ^dase» «'ob- 
 let.— '■ Hollow.— I'-Transl. ifalire. if tiring: morieris», if cli/inr/.—'^» SoTft, a lot — '•'o Z'on- 
 tnitere. to deliberate.— 21 For another Xmw.—'^'^ lieKerrilre. to reserve, to spare — 28 En- 
 dowed with.— 24 Ptrc/jntdri. to ask.— '" From his kin<,'dom.— 2« Quid prodei<t, of what use 
 '^ • • •— " Change.— 2'*A world-citizen.— 2» Instead t)f tot quot.—^<* Sufficere. to be sufficient, 
 —»> Instead of taleni (vitani), qualem.— ^'^ liowQity.—^^ Metlri, to measure,— »< Those, 
 whom they met ou the road. 
 
330 
 
 INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 
 
 nniaaireret?-24. Domonax, interro^atus, quango ^^^ ^'l;}^!^'^ 
 
 Tnin, inquit, cum ^*>- '''^^ V;/./;;. ' r";" ^t-^'ubi ft quanta^ hostium copia 
 tioiumitcH p I ,,.K.,twm oa«v irnlied : To atlnKmish others. 
 
 
 nun) is. — U. IVoi 
 
 ,,r lu £ ■•» V».» 0"« ,1,. *,„,,. ;f An» 
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 331 
 
 fear prevails* with you {apud dos). — 28. Tell nie, whether thou wast not 
 anirry,'' when thou didst learn {cognoHcsre), that thou hadst been deceived 
 by the kiiiiz;.— 29. I should wish t-o know if these judi^es passed judgment' 
 in {hi/) (rood faith. — 80. Tiie judi::es asked the accused whether he wished 
 to say aiiythiuii:. — ol. I do not know wiietlier not perhaps also one* of 
 you is deceived* by this error. — o2. Perhaps the Stoics were right, when 
 they said* that only a wise [man] could be hai)py. — 33. I doubt whether 
 anything of the kind {ejtisniodi) ever happened before. 
 
 J ValOre. — 2 vl//f/ry, inlti 
 cnvcd, lat)i. — * Translate, 
 (rectt), that only a wise man 
 
 ^s jt/d(//n^.Kt, imVichim dare. — ■* Quia. — * To be de- 
 iow wliethur not perhaps the ij^oics said rightly 
 
 i^:^' 
 
 T 
 
 APPENDIX L 
 
 Supplementary rules on jjeclexsiox, ixcludIxg the de- 
 clension OF Greek nouns. 
 
 1. Declension in general. 
 
 1. The Latin language has five declensions of nouns, which are distin- 
 guished by their characteristics, /. e. the terminating vowels or consonants 
 of their stems. The tirst declension has the vowel a as characteristic 
 {iiwns-a) ; the second declension has the vowel o {hort-u-a, instead of hort- 
 OS, which is the original form of the nominative in this declension) ; the 
 third declension has the vowel i or a consonant {civ-i-s, consu-l, nome-n^ 
 ple-b-a); the fourtli declension has the vowel u {fruct-u-s); the fifth has the 
 vowel e {di-e-'<). Thus each of tiu' live vowels is assigned to a special de- 
 clension, while all consonantic characteristics belong to the third. 
 
 2. The Latin language has two systems of case-eudings, which are 
 shown in the following synopsis: 
 
 FIRST SYSTE.^L SECOND SYSTEM. 
 
 PIXGULAH. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 — ors (neuters q 
 
 ft 
 
 heL 
 
 r. urn) 
 
 Nom. 
 
 — ors 
 
 Gen. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 is 
 
 Dat. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 1 
 
 Arc. 
 
 em (neuters like Xom.) 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 cm (nevf^rs like Nom.) 
 
 Voc. 
 
 likeXoui. cniasc. 
 
 m 
 
 Vie II. e) 
 
 Voc. 
 
 like Nom. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 
 PLUIIAJL. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 i. neuters a 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 es, neuters a 
 
 Gen. 
 
 rum 
 
 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 nm 
 
 Dat. 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ibus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 es», neuters a 
 
 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 OB, neuters a 
 
 Voc. 
 
 like Xom. 
 
 
 
 
 Voc. 
 
 like Xom. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 is 
 
 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ibus 
 
 The FIRST SYSTEM is applied to the first and second declensions; the 
 SECOND SYSTEM bclougs to thc third and fourtli declensions. In the 
 fifth declension some cases are formed' according to the first system, and 
 others according to the skcond. 
 
 3. These case-endings, in the forms which are given in the synopsis, ap- 
 pear only in the consonant-stems of the third declension, and in the geni- 
 tive plural of all declensions. Generally they are so blended with tlie 
 characteristic that either the fii*st vowel of the ending, or the characteiis- 
 
532 
 
 DECLENSION IN GENERAL. 
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 333 
 
 tie . aroppoa. The chavacterlstlc. and .^-on;.^ - 
 
 ladled 'CASE-TKiniTNATU>NS, and what i^Mt^^ ^^^. ^^^^ ^^^^^^^ 
 
 Jr^r^r;" a 'l^nur::^ it\p^^^^ a^. aroppm, the eudings proper, . 
 
 culled the tuue stem. 
 
 Synopsis op tue case-teuminations. 
 
 I. 
 
 U. 
 
 III. 
 
 glNGtTLAK. 
 
 Nom. a (C, at», cs) 
 
 am (Cn, an) 
 a (0) 
 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 Abl. 
 
 a,e,i,o,y,c,l,u,r,8,t,x u^^ 
 
 u 
 
 ul (n) 
 um. n 
 
 /iA<J NOM. 
 
 a 
 
 5s 
 
 CT 
 
 GI 
 
 cm 
 
 like NOM. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 (irn. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 V(»c. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 finim 
 Ts? (ilbus) 
 
 Uk*' NOM. 
 
 like DAT. 
 
 1 
 
 I. NEUTERS a 
 
 Oniiu 
 
 OS. NEl'T. a 
 like NOM. 
 
 like UAT. 
 
 n3, NEUT. Ua 
 
 uiim 
 
 Ibuf (nbiirJ) 
 fl^.NEir. ua 
 like NOM. 
 like UAT. 
 
 Orum 
 ei)us 
 
 /U-« NOM. 
 
 /i^6 WAT. 
 
 I:* 
 I 
 
 fill (im) 
 like NOM. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 6:4, NKITTEUS a (ia) 
 urn dum) 
 
 ihiis ... 
 
 C;^,nei:t. aa^NEUT. (la) 
 
 like NOM. 
 
 mimmmmm&m 
 
 eiSinc,. appoir «"JjJ^^X'^/^H ' i^dro n>-">/'or/o instead ol korto-i. nv. ui.t. of art-t). 
 „!i;„7, -is, U-n...h,.n,us the short | ;-- ';;'',"^-,,,\lU';iUe mUi,,^, .clainiug lhe.d,arac. 
 
 (r7). Nominative plfral. The mapcnline and feminine nonns of the first, pecond, 
 and fourth dccltiisioiis Ibnn tliis case like the gknitivk siN(iULAB. lu the third the 
 charactcri.-tic i, and in thelifrh the vowel e of the tTuHng is dropped (d?;'?.«f inst. of civi-e^, 
 dies inst. of rf<fc-e<). Tlic neuters of the second declension di-oj) the characterii^tic {tecta 
 insr. oUerfo-a). In the neuter» of the third and fourth both the characteristic and endinor 
 remain unchanged (t/ian-a, cornu-ci). 
 
 {//\. CiKN. pi.L'K. This case shows in all declensions the unchanged characteristic and 
 endiiiir. .-md is tiierclbic better adapted, to show the pure stem of a noun tlian the geni- 
 tiie diif/iiliu\ which commonly is employed for this piirp«)se by the irraminariaus. 
 
 ii). Dativk & Ablat. pluk. The-ecases, which in all declensions arealike, siiow in the 
 fifth decl. the characteristic unchanged. Rutin thc()iherdecleiisi(ms the characteristic is 
 i)i:o]M'Ki) ( mentis Jjortu, cifihus. tnanibus int^x. of iiitiisa-i<. /lorfo-is, ciri-ilms. in<u)u-ibus). 
 In fh" f.iiirth decli:n-ioii often the i of the ending is dropped and the characteristic 
 retained [iicuhus inst. (tf a<'u-ibns). 
 
 (/•). AccisAT. I'LiH. This case drops in all vowe! declensions the <? of the ending (>n<=flM^, 
 fiorfos. rir'tJi. niaftil'/. diei inst. of men^a-es. Aor/o-es ciri-ex, inaiiii-e.t, die-es). But. owing 
 to th»^a|>|)irLMit KMidenry of the third declension, to droj) rather the characteristic than the 
 vowel of the endinir, the post-classical lanmiage drops also in //lis case the vowel-charac- 
 teristic i <»f ilie third declension, giving thus to both, the vowel and consonantic stems 
 of the third declension a like case-termination in the accus. pliir. The use of the ter- 
 mination es instead of T« had already commenced In the classical period ; and in our texts of 
 the clas-^ics th(; accusative endinir es is almost always given, lu the anteclassical au'hore 
 this termination is often found with the spelling <i.v, inonier to mark its quantity as being 
 lOhrf. The pronunciation of the syllai)Ie is /lo/ atlected by this spelling. 
 
 /^em. 'i. In the following instances the endings of tiie two systems interchange with 
 each other : 
 
 (f^)TheuKN^TlVK siNfiiL.^Kof the first declension, in ancient language, seems to have had 
 the terminal ion rtsM contracted from a-is) accordinir to the second system. For the d(issu-al 
 period thi< terminat.on is confined to four conipomids of the uouu fiofu/ht : patei'fa- 
 ?ni'ni't, ni'ifti/tiiniim.^. ^tHi'is/niuHbis^ filidfaini'ias. hm sometimes tliese compounds are 
 found with ilie regular tenninaiioii'^i;/ Frcmi the anteclassical period the genitives 
 ttrnis, isc/iM. rias. monefas. Ldfo/aix. fortRiKis are quoted by ancient grammarians, and 
 the genitive custodias is attributed to Suldisf (Sosip. Charisius, p. 82). 
 
 (h). In the gen, sing, of (ireek proper iiomis of the third declension in e,<i the ending 
 i <»f tite first system ahernaU's with the ending i.v of the second, as l\jidifi w Ptricli, 
 }*ra.vitrli'< or I'ntiildi. 'J'ltniwtoiiix or lln-inixiodi. 
 
 ((•). In the (iKNiTiVK PLfKAL tile nouns of the first and second declensions sometimes 
 assiiin ■ the ending um of the 2d system, and then <lrop their characteristics. In the.^/*'< 
 declension this is in itrnse confined to the (ireek nouns amphora (a Greek measure) and 
 drnchina (a (ireek con). 6-V//. plar. (unphonon^drdrhnviin. In the second dedension the 
 ending ///// commonly is employed in nouns, den(»tin;,' <'/7i/i.>\ irci(/hf nud measure, ifcou- 
 iiecierl witii a dcfiiiii- numeral (/(>nn/num. fesfertiu/n, denarinik. rnedimnuf/i, taknfuni^ 
 iwi^Xi'ixtX uf iiiiinindnun, SI sfertioram elc. Sometimes tliis ending is also found \\\ other 
 mums a«-: liheniin. inst. of liherbnim : fahrum inst. ^^fabroruin ; deuTti, instead of deortim ,' 
 Sin-iif//i, insie.id of s(H'ior'iin, and In several other nouns. 
 
 _(d). In the dativk and aui.ativk ri.t'KAL of the fiust declension the termination 
 ab'is IS Sometimes used instead of is. This was frequently the case in old laniruage, and 
 the ancient gr.mnnarians qiiot»; tlie (XaX'wvs pndldbus, jKn-t'ibus, oledbns, tii/t/iphdbus, inv- 
 lfib"s,e'/'/db'fs. a^in'ibu<,p>t'/idlbu<. rnpfdbus. Occasionally these termin-itions are found 
 in postchissie il writers ; but in dassicU language they are confined to the nouns dea,,tilia, 
 and ei/>f'i, {t/clbi/s, fi/irib'ts. e'/i/dbus), and only if ir is necessary to distinguish them from 
 the correspoiidiiii: masculines of the second declension. 
 
 {e). In the dativk and ablative plukal the Greek neuter nouns of the third declension 
 in a ufidffiiia, jMtemu etc.) regularly take the ending w of the first system (cRnigrnatis., 
 poema/is, seldom itnigmatibus, jfoemafibus. 
 
 4. .Muiiy noiiTL^ are borrowed from tlie Gueek language, either with- 
 out atiy chaiig-e, espeeially if the Givek teniiiiiatioii occurs also in Latin, 
 as thoni.v, phiJosophid, Periclex ; or aflcr cliani^iiiu^ the Greek into a Latin 
 teimiiialion, as lliniiKepintola, Eplrus, poefa. in tlie chissical period Greek 
 iioiiiis are mostly contined to the pkoprii n.\mes, and to those few ap- 
 pellatives whose reception was sanctioned by long usage. If the classi- 
 cal writers employ ;in unusual Greek word, Ihey generally write it with 
 Greek letters. But later authors make a very free use of Greek nouns, 
 and the terms occurring in akts and sciences,' as those denoting plants, 
 
334 
 
 FIRST GREEK DECLENSION. 
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 335 
 
 s lo'n'^</vf/2(''V/%.s'. dies\ fxci'pr in tlionom. sin- of tliosonounpof the third (U'clen- 
 "wlu-ro tlu- chiinictcristic / i:* dropped before the endiui,' Uuil^f! strni ttnlif. /letrs st. 
 
 STONES and RARET? ANTMAT.P, arc iioaH v all taken from the Greek. Many 
 of these nouns even in the cliKsieul period ivlain in some ot the oblique 
 cases their Gicek easc-lei'minations, and in the FiusT declensKm a system 
 of case-terminations has been formed eonsistini; partly ot Latin, i)artly 
 of Greek endiui^s, which is called the Ghki<;k fiust declension. See i^ U. 
 
 5. QtANriTY^^i)!-' THE CASE-TEIJMINATIONS. ,. . ^ , • i 
 
 The nnniuation a of nil ca.r^ is short, exci-pt thi- Al)l. 8ini;._of the llrst declension and 
 the Voc siii<'. of (ireek Proper nouns iiK/x.' ///r//.sv7j yy/zaf/o/y/. ,»i,, • ' 
 
 ^ iVshorl exnpl in the Al!l. sin- of .he5lh <lrc!. and in the Noin. Voc. and Abl. bing. 
 of (ireei< nouns in « and cs of the tirst deel. : diS, eintome, dyfiwte. 
 i i-> :il\v;ivs l>>ii<'. as hin'tl, lin. tructin. kik'i. 
 
 o is /0//7 'in ilie dativk an<l aiw-ativk ol the second, but lougorshort m tlieNCMiNATivB 
 of the tliird declension— ri/f/(>, Kcnno. 
 
 ?/ i- alwavs [i)ML'— /rwr//?, <v)/v//7. ^ _,>•-„ «-,„ 
 
 in &\Wiiv>' fi'or/ens tiie precedin<,' yo\\c\-mmmm,frudHtn. f>e«fertiuin, diein 
 as is Ion- (6P^d>,//t#//Artx),some wron-ly excei)tini? ana^. In the (Ikkkk nouns ot the firet de- 
 clension 7,s i,- loi,- af cr a iwcd and after ;• ; but .^f,ort alter the other consonants KOoieas 
 Pl/fhuf/onlii, l\!ojn<iih) 
 eK is ' 
 
 herhl). But in a/7?.<, ubit^, and puru.^ the teruiinaiion ew is Ion-, aithou-h tlieir stems 
 
 ^' i"'i' " shon in" tlie siXGrLAit_(.rf//^v>. inafu<), but Ion- in the pi.uhai. {ttclls, Jinl<). It i^^ 
 
 also Ion- in O'/ir'-'^ and sa/n/U'S (st. 70. . . . ... .^a a . 
 
 OS is Ion- JwHds, nenos. horlOs) exe.-pt the Guekk nonunatiyes in o-s^of the second de- 
 clension, un:es> thev belon- to the Adic declension {Lemnw^; but AJ/io-^). ,,-.,, 
 
 '" is short, exeeplh. ..KN. siN,;., and N..M. and Aceis. f i.rK. of the funrth ciocd (//• o/.7.- , 
 and in those nv)nnsof liie tliird dec!, in which '/ is noiiral {virtue, stem nrtiit , Mia.-^, st. 
 
 In {hi ./issMiMc termhiafions llie feniti.t is always /o/^r/ju the first and second, at d 
 always s/i'>rf iti the thir»i and fourth declensions [auirn, m^n^^'in/m. deahxs. reidyrum it 
 cin'wi, >i,<in,t. twib».^. fniclanm, achhus). In the fifth declension tlie pen It is^-enerally 
 Ion- except tin- gkn. and oat. sino., if the termination is preceded by a coiv^onant, a^ . 
 
 *^T'll^'qlmntTty'lIf'Jl'()Vuiu•lt\^^^ not belon-in- to those raentii)ned above, ia 
 
 re-ulatrd bv the followin- tliree rules : i„„, 
 
 1 MoNOsv,XA.u>> are A^,.y. except r5,%/^^ .V..V. (av^^^^^ 
 the vowels of tlwir final svllables shorf. as : p>ur. dolor, caput, r.dujal. But the t\nal 
 syllables of fhose, termu.alt.i- in a- are Ion- by y.o;i/km the J^^'/Zf ^ ':»V.?;r\ !.v VmvcTu 
 a'K-mute with ^•.— 3. Gkkkk nouns generally retain the quantity, which they lia\c m 
 Greek, as : ciudr, delph'm, Traztii. 
 
 2. First Greek Declension. 
 
 6 The Giir.Eiv first declension (see i^ 4) comprises n(mns, tertninating 
 in e e!i ax In the singi:laii they have a peculiar system of terminations, 
 partly Latin, partly Gheek; bilt in the pluiial they have the regular 
 LvriN lermiiiiitions. Those in e are feinuilne, the otiiers, maxc'thne 
 Hence the pUirale tantum ete^^im (trade-winds) is a masculine, since it 
 must be derived from a (Jreek sitiu:ular vkslaa \^6 irt/6iai). The singulars 
 are declined after the following paradigms. 
 
 a reader 
 ana-nost-S» 
 aiii-nost le 
 ana-nost-JB 
 aiia-nt)st-en 
 anagnost-C 
 ana-nost-C (J) 
 
 Bern. The terminations h ^s, ds are the Greek terminations Vy '/?» «?• The Greek 
 nouns of the first decl., terminaiinir in a, retain this terininaticm in Latin, and are de- 
 clined like Latin nouns, 'A^: i^hmnAna (<pi'^o6ocpia). historia {loropLa), Electra 
 (ILUKr/ja) etc. Of those that terminate iu r/ and V?,many have assumed the Latin 
 
 an epitom-e 
 N. epit(»m-G 
 G. epilom-S8 
 D. epitoin-iu 
 A. e|)itoin-ea 
 V. epitom-e 
 A. epitom-6 
 
 the north-wind 
 bore-ils 
 bore-ie 
 bore-je 
 l)ore-am (fin) 
 bont a 
 bore-il 
 
 termination a and are then likewise declined like Latin nonns ; as: p(Pna [Ttoivrj), 
 syflaba {6vXXafhf), bihliotheca {(^if:i^toSrfH7j),sc}iola {(^ Xo^) ,€tn-^tola {f7ti6roXr}), 
 mavffarVa ( ttapyapir?;^), jyopfa {7roi?;rr}?), jnrifta (Tteiparn^). others retain the 
 (.KKKK termination but have a collateral Latin form in a, as: epitome and epitoma, mu- 
 sice i\\u\w >isi('a, IMene and Hehnn, .\iof,e and Xiof>a. atunt.s and athma Perses and Per- 
 m. Lapjth>s and ['WVha OthiT nonns take the (ireek terminaii<.n exclusively, as 
 hyperlxAt. ma'jice, Ihbe, huterpe, acmaces, tetrarches, Po!iorc?fe.^, Thyest^. 
 
 7. To the Greek declension in e belon? : (^0 all female proper nouns in 
 e, as i irci', Danae, Hcmte ; (h) the names of Greek cities, and of cities named 
 by the (Jreeksjii ^,as : (hflli'iie, Ci/rene, Dldi/mP, .UeHsnie, Mltyletie^Siiwpe ; 
 {c) the mythol()<rical river Lethf^'AmX some appellative nouns, especially 
 the names of arts and sciences in tee, as rhdorlce, qr<immaticJ\ namce. 
 
 n,!lT-J^'* ffW>^/{^/^re nouns in ? are mostly postclassicai.. a^cromht\ alm'^, hmnrhoU\ 
 opo^frop'n-* pfa^tic,^, dinve\ marpre^, ethice.\ etymoIoqice\ Only epitowJ»\ gram- 
 imticry, rhetonn '^^anii ,nu4re\^ have classical authority, and eVen these are by far 
 more usual in their Latix forms in a, as epitoma, (jramrnatica etc. 
 
 8. To the declension in es beloiiij: : [a) the patronymics, that is the 
 names ot men m the heroic a-re, derived from the n:mies of tlieir fathers 
 or aiices^tors, as Atrldrs'^ PelUe>^\ PriawuU's'\ Tyduies^ Laortldde.'i, lle- 
 raclidcH . 1 hey terminate in tde.s, Me.% or iddcs ; (d) Some m \le i)roper 
 iiaiiK.'s, jis A/ich(.H('sjAjeTfes, P/a'loc/Ptes etc.; (r) Some civic and national 
 nouns as Ct'ofo,nr,f,,s-\ AMt/ite.s'\ Spaftidie.s"\ EplrOtea'', 8lagirite.% Malldt4'><, 
 UerndeotM; {d) Many appellative nouns, as anaffnost'es'^ sophiste.'^^K 
 
 7?<m. L The majority of the Greek proper nouns in e^ follow the third declension even 
 It in (iKKKK they are inllected after the first declension; as Euripides (Gkn. Eu?ipidis), 
 MWiades ((Jkn m/tiadis), while in Gkkkk all proper nouns in I'SttS and d6?/S hvhm^ 
 tothe /y/w/ <ieelensioii. Even thive appellarive nouns in e.< {sorites^'', acinares^\ and sa- 
 [r<il>'-<'\ which III (.reek follow the first declension, are in Latin, in the sin-ularar least, 
 inllected alter the thud, while in the PLt'UAL they follow the first declensionse \mon ' 
 Itu! proper nouns in e^. the follown-- belong in Latin, to the first (ireek declension": 
 t' ;•"■'/; ..'";■*' ^''^''J'"-"- I^'fertes, PhVorf^tes, Prnrrustfs, ThersVes, Thueste,^. E-h^crnte^, 
 
 ^Ci/ )>/ ''-^■'^''^^^''-'^•^'■^'^L'^'''' ^t^^^f-'-'f*"'^ PoliorcUts, Polydectes, Achates, AgamMes\ 
 Cro/i^^x, /»/i/-,/<//<^,s. and some others Jess usual. ^ > ^ j , 
 
 Jiew.'2. The nppiUatire nouns in es are mostly posTf LAssrcAL.as coinete"^^ paniratiaste^^^ 
 C/iora"'es-ii, marathrV(s32^ mests^K fnystr^a*. plastts^\ the iM.ruAi.K t \\ti^-m Pandtct.t^^" 
 and many names of stonks. as achat,x^\ chry^ltes^^ pyrltes^K Classical authority have 
 only. rt//a7/w>.y/«i.s«', .w/>.7|-^tes"»i, gernnTtrfs*'^. sorites*^, satrapes, Areopayltes**, and some 
 compounds of arc/ies ('t/jj;/?), denotin- the chief of a country (as Bivotarchs*^, Ma- 
 
 ( abba-e.— 2 the plant aloe.— 3 a rhetorical figure {exagr/eration).— ♦ a rhetorical fi-ure 
 ~ ,„'",^' P '"'''ic art.— « the art of practical medicine.— ^ nia-ic— «ethics.— » etvmoTo-v 
 Z.l\ 'J''*^';'"''"^.- ''grammar.- >2 rhetoric- i3 music- m ..andson of .4/'/'^*% a des'ig- 
 nation of Agamemnon and Mm-laus.- is son of Peltus, desi-nation of AchUles,— le» son 
 01 /narnvx- 17 a descendant of //mv//r.x\- >6 inhabitant of r/o/o//.— i» inhabitant of 
 Abilera.-- 20 Spartan.- 21 inhabitant of Eplrus.— 223 reader.— 23 a sophist.— 24 a -,^om- 
 Ts aM certain kind of sophism.— 2« a Persian sabre. - 27 a satrap {Persian viceroy). 
 
 — ^^U\(i\\omx sat rapes behmgs to the .3d declensi.m only in the <;e\. sing. But ,wri^/is 
 in ^n/'.wnoleof the singular inflected after the ?a\ declension. Qaomodo wrVi resi-^tas f 
 
 ///•^^" '*.>"*'*""'''• Ci'-ero quotes this word only once as a Gukkk express. on*- 
 frHiis hts,(pia< Gr(eci comTfas. nostri crinitas rwant. Nat. Deor. -2, .5. At a later period 
 tlie woirlwas received in tiie Ian-u;»-e. but only with the Gkkkk t.»Tmination *=.« The 
 Un-tucomtta IS loijnd only in the latent Latinitv. The noun planJtes (a planet) insteid of 
 nieciassic:iU/^//r/^,7YWv belong- to the Latinitv of the middle a-'es.— »0 ;, eoinbaiant in all 
 kin.ls of -yinnastics.- 3i ., (i,„e-pl.iyer.- 32 CMin.-l wine.- 33 tiie nMrth-nonh-east-wind. 
 
 — a priest 111 the mysteries.— 36 a sculptor — 3«a part of the civil law. codified by 
 Justinian.- 37 ,,^r:„e. - sh topaz.- s» fiint. - «o a reader.- -«i asoplust.- 42 a ^r^,, meter. 
 
 of AfV'"'^ ^^'" IV". «f ^'^P'li''»"— **« member of the Areopagus, the liigli criminal court 
 at Athens. — 4s chief of the Boeotians. 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 33G 
 
 '."!, 1:: 1/..,V.. etL Juul the river AV.r... ; (/» ^^^^^J^'^^^^ ^^ 
 bomrs\ iidras\ carfxv^' and the pliimle taiituiu etem^. only Ihc last ot 
 which has chissical authority. 
 
 arn;,iny of those in „ ah.l ,;c. Kx,H,„ion, arc the „m.„» .Va,..y-« "."1 "<-'•<:■.. of wl"ch 
 the colhiieral forms Mavf^ya and ^n/m occur. 
 
 10 Gknokk of (luKKK NOUNS- If ^reek nouns in >;? or «? assume the 
 Tntin ten Mtion n tiiey also chan-e their Greek gkndeu, beconnnj 
 FF ntnL a "i^ m '^^;^^^^^^ (tVoin the Greek 6 ^af.yapirv^), h,vr. ^mW.U^ 
 fin GuFFK^w'Wp^ It'both tlie GuKKK and the Latin orms are m 
 
 llsetlletendcM- indifferent aceonling to the termination, as : Uara., masc, 
 
 JJ*;?..';^.",™"'.'''.'.":,' ;v,;w«t' «»!;«;:,;, t'lfo.- «hid. for,,,, occur. tl,o„,h .n 
 bi'Miitication!* diflfrt'iit from th(.' VLritAU 
 
 tl.e la..^n,„i:e this «as ti.e 7r.7V?rt'- nATTVK-TEUMINATlON of lite Greek 
 ■ndiin'-; ill e and f^.v. See Charisius p. "20 Keil. . 
 
 (M T e ACC us v^^^ siNa. of the Greek nouns in .,. sometunes especi- 
 allv in P(H'ts in Vi,.^ .hvays) assumes the terminaium .r,^ alter the 
 GreeL accusativ" in a.. Thu's we always tind in Lv.y the accusative 
 
 ^S'proner names in ex -enernllv have in the vocative and ablative 
 bi^.^!k'l.J^1n terminations .(tor the v<^.), -^^ l^.^^l^"^ ^^^ 
 Btead of the Greek terminations a and e, as \ oc. Ainda, Abl. Ainda. 
 
 3. Sf:cond Declension. 
 A Ailillt tonal Retnarka to Le.^s, VirL, /A., A. 
 
 10 (Vld to 8 32^ Tlu.chnractcn.tic oof this declension ^^^•l'^''*^\'\';>' '\\ ,;!^'^;:;;:,I';^^^^ 
 
 freqnl'ntly find tl.e endin-s os an(l ^^^V. n/ l,^ m i i n m an t Vi.-.). Whil- the In- 
 
 «nil and .lasMeal (ix^serros, arox m '' '''V^^^iv /r , t.C.h.ati?. . ' l^ aT.<l ovu instead of 
 K-riptions of the archaic pe.iod ^:>'"«'/""7,P'''' • ,^' . u the Uolnnu.a Hostrata ; 
 
 V. L\ ,nn <as ,niwo>> in the n>-tai>hs «v^ If..^' IcH i .. th^.rt^l^»^o^^^^^ of tl.e4 
 mi'io.. opj>vlnnr, poi,lorn ^^^' ;>':;,,' ,." ^^^Tn^-^^\^- charac.n-istic of .he 
 
 "'^r iAdd t ';i;s^.'^Th: ^:^:::; ;:^.. .y ..... many proper nanv^ c^MM^^^. 
 
 ■ 1 Chief of the Ma-ne.ian.. - ^ chief of a country in general.- » nor; h-vvind.- * turban. 
 — » ca^t north-ea.-t-\\ iud.— « a Greek measure. 
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 337 
 
 eion are formed fand in the firPt declension the endini? ia) is onVinally a derivative end- 
 in- l..r AI.JECTIVK. t he.no; the derivative element! Hence the e.fdinrSirJ in all 
 tn-e.. genders. Ol the same ori::in is the characteristic i in the nouns of the third de 
 clens.on l)eh.nL.'in- to the vowel-elass. This letter i, as a derivative element is of the 
 
 r;:''.n':n .':"V^'"^^'' '"If-'^' "^-"^^^* 1«"?"«.?«'* ^^^ow il'm their declen'lon^rr «unf u 
 t he coirnate hm-iuiires tins derivative i -enerally appears in its consonantic form ( / which 
 
 lllc pr^.c:.dh,';j"-o wel.'' ^"'^ '^'*^'"" ^ ^'^''"^^ Pomp-^us, Gajus, Majus), always leniihening 
 Thf adjective termination t7/.«f is especially employed to designate the Roman fientes i p 
 tl.e conii.M.ations ol those families which were derived fromli common ancestor ThiS 
 
 .hue IS I he emales 1 ad no oth.-r names h-it th.; name of tlieir irens, those of the same 
 lamily be.iig distinguished by ordinal numerals (Prima, Altera, Tertia etc.). A trace ol 
 
 Hence the n';;:;!;' of''.?':" ""r '" l"" "'"^^ "^"."^^ "^" •"••'^^^- «^ ^'«^'^<^' SeAus Sl^ 
 H.M.ce the names of Komaii families up to the Au-ustan age alwavs end in ius Since 
 
 that time <limtnutinetori,is l)e-an to be introduced for female nauK^;, as I)ru.ma ionn- 
 
 iW^y^/ihl/a'"'' ""'"^ "" '*''''"'' "•''^"^" "^^"^ ^'' daughter Tullia by the dinS- 
 
 ,1 u;./.^*'*'" ^V § "^^- I^-.-'^-) .The rule given in most grammars that the noun genius (tutelary 
 h-.tv) (orm- Its vocative in t, rests on th(.> authority of a single passage in Til)u 1 4 5 9 
 
 . winch he reading y,m(/ne genV is critically doubtful, the correct rcadin- (co„flrned 
 by several manuscripts) bein- alm^. veni. The reason that the e of the v(.eati"ve of proper 
 names ux yt.-^ and ot the noun ./iViw was dropped, is the very frequent use of these 
 
 natives in daily intercourse. This reason d<.es not apply to tile noun qenljl SL voca^ 
 In die aSiiurJteJs:'" "'"'^ '^'"^ used, since i does not oc?ur in 'any foSi 
 
 lo (Add. to g ;34-38.) Mostly to the second declension, but also to the 
 lirst, helon.ir tlie trequeiit Dimlnutives of the Latin laniruacre, which either 
 mipart the idea ot s.mali.ness to their primitive nouns,^or are used as 
 terius of endeau.ment. They have the endin-s ulii,<<, ula, alum, oveiilu^, 
 cala culuni, accordm^r to the gender of the primitive noun, as rivm — 
 ricxlux, measa — menmla, oppidum — oppidalum, muUer — m uliercula. 
 Hence dimmutives serve as tests for the gender of their primitives in the 
 case of doubt. 
 
 nf/?fr",?"Jl\^ endin-s fihis a.vm. which after a vowel are chan-ed into dlu.<^, a, urn, are 
 att.iehed to tlie ntmns of the first, second, and to those of the third declension which 
 
 ^tlK^; nPc'ilK'^'^o J'n' '"'^"rrr' '''' ""r' '''l^ ^^'^^'^^ declensions attach tSese ending 
 lo rneit DhCLKNsioN-^TEMs. Thus are lormed : ^ 
 
 filia— tiliola 
 villa — villula 
 
 piur— puerulus 
 scutum — scutulum 
 
 taba. (obsol.) — tabula 
 bestia — bestiola 
 
 malleus — malleolus 
 negotium — negotiolum 
 
 1st dkcl. area — arcnl i 
 
 ccena — cteiiula 
 2DDECL. nidus — nidulus 
 
 saxum — saxulum 
 3u DECL. (disceps, o^vrV. ) - discipulus rex - regulu* merces - mercedula 
 
 caput — cupiiulum fornax — fornac-ula vox — voc-ula 
 
 nepos-nepoiulus stips - stijmla radix - radlc-ula 
 
 When tlie declension-stem ends in n or r, thest» letters, together with their orecedincr 
 
 // r Xw//f/. "/• ''¥^' ;; ^^'dlnn-caieUa, opera - opella, lucrum -lucel um^siq. 
 
 %Zr.7u.^ [• "^' ^i.7'';///i-^i.7t/'/m. Lnpi< forms lapillm. and codex -codicil'm. Pes 
 
 mgii arly forms W^^vz/w, and rana has two diminutives, the regular ra/////<7 and the 
 
 liregular raaumnlus, the latter pointing at an obs(,lete noun m;?^, d.ranZ (SeeR 2 ) 
 
 clSon'l' «ml 7.VHh'' '■"^'•fi ''• ''"' "'^' attach.'d to the nouns of the fourth and fifth do- 
 ar i Mv ?A those with MQir.i) and vowel-.stems of the third declension. They 
 
 aie aiv\jiy> attached to the tiu^k stem. ^'"^j 
 
 dlminuiive l)![!Sln7''''/ "^ '''"^ '^'^ declension retain their characteristic ^, to which the 
 aiminutive endinirs ctdt/^, a, tnn are attached ; 
 
 piscis (St. plici) — pi<ci-cHlu8 refe (st. reti) — reticulum 
 
 nayis (st. nan) — naviciila pons (st. lytrnd) — ponticnlus 
 
 linler (st. lintH) — lintriculus pars (^t. parii) — parlicula 
 
 venter (st. ventri) — ventriculus sore (st. sorti) — sorticula 
 
 th? vow.'.l'^'i^fn '■"'•^ their nominatives in 2^, instead of the true characteristic?, retain 
 me vowel 2 in th«ir diminutives, as nnm - nab^ada, vulp^s-vidpecula, isedk - se- 
 
 15 
 
338 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 cRctdn.- Faix form, falcula nnd falcicula, glans -^ gland.la, cor - corculum, and ado- 
 
 legcem — adole-cendUitft. ^ . „r,^« ti.avMWPl nrpcedin»' their characteristic in the nom. 
 
 2) The Litii ID Moms, which ''\']'^S^.J\^^''^^^^^^^^ , .,„,,,,^ _pa/riH'u/».<, 
 
 8INO.. retain this chm^ed '^oy.e 'l^l^^'^^^y^^^^J.^^'^L^^ f.rm.nati<.n 
 
 hamiuu^ulus wer-fratorculus mas- mascnhis 
 
 -:^-f::i:z^n. g-Js^u... ;-r-,-;;-;i"- 
 
 declJiVsii).. there is only the (li.ninutive diToda frcni die.s'. 
 
 16 (Ad(l t()ii:V2-88.) In tbe classical pcn.Ml the cKNtTnE ^;n".;[ 
 nomis not VDJpCTivEs) ill ius an-l iV/^/i ^^as /r////r/. a.ul prononwrd with a 
 ZT/ 1^ uUh^ the accent on th. tknult, as /../;.,....<. en ^7.a- 
 
 inge'fii (not ingenii). , v «♦ 
 
 i. alleirinir it t.. he contrary to ^^/'^ \'\' ,;'/',; ;;/;;.[ ',h,,.-; , "classu-.m. ,..Ti<Kl the 
 than the nominative, it is ''«^•^'' ] ^' r'"/" '^ vi^^l> " -" "' ^'''^^ "'-'^ «'"' ""^''■**"^ 
 
 in fM/i'i.^ iX<»<t. Att U. i'^l: >^{ ^-.TxiTri^^^ Hn- cten.porarv of Cickko, ac- 
 
 o,d,i hy Ihe AccKNT (oBN. I m^n ;•.'.'/';,,.; t . .;Jnitives of I'iantns an.l I'l .uiiu>i 
 kn-.u-led-es this nsa-e as ^f'''^' V/ V' ' ^^i'' '" >H-i. ' cntrarv to s.rirt trrannnar. 
 had ^^-^«''^-(?/•''^V''»^'T7^''!:""^•, "! I of nouns in in. ,>..) 
 
 In Lxcrrtv,., V,rud, and lomrt ^ ^'.'^^ ;!!>;. ./J,! ,f„„,,,^ i ..-adnallv was adopted, 
 
 the rules .>f abstract ^>-»M';'<=V', ';." ^^ r.n d-". "d^^^^ 
 
 SeeVchnJide^Cir. p. 51., and Spalding to Qutntihan, % ol. I., p. '±'^^'^^^^^^^ 
 
 the Greeks. :n,d ^^^ v 1:^:1^:^^^^^^ r^^^ Ion. i^jL Gondii nun,/ <.f 
 
 ^oJw^/ /s' nd Isth,n>i>^. which are mas. ilink, as n, (.reck. „ ^, ^ 
 
 from ,.rr-r.. Son,,, m~lorn Rran,man,vn< (l.-m ,„„ ,;„„„„ 
 
 grISSif rc^olllliria'^f 'S;aid';'r;2;.io,. of ^..« nr .• a K.ft.„and u.au ,. .co 
 
 APPENDIX T. 
 
 339 
 
 would he a very stran.^c de i"na,i\fn ?,^" hn.h ouP Ih"^'' ^r^'^'^'^-'^'^ to • rii:hr hand', 
 
 or c<,u.pound,.,l hy ,he Horn H s" \ xi'ite al llv h fo^/ J^"" ''''''^■'' •^^'"^'•^ "^^^e 
 
 q.;enf:;Sij,lX?:n:;?^];;;^,ri^^;;;r.^^^ --ntc . intoniz 
 
 That it cannot have h.enh,. Vowc>n-(; the^^ '*"'' '" otherwords. 
 
 ctyuiol„::ists assert) appears fro tl . f c tl ^h'^n, nfTt?'' ''^ tl«i modern so-called 
 Sanscrit and the other co-nate an-n i-^cJ 1^«^ ^'''^ ""'"'^ "'"'■'' ^""C"'-'^ i" the 
 
 Greek form. ^"o'laie iangua-es stands much nearer to the Latin, than the 
 
 JJ. The second declension of norms horroxoed from the Greek 
 
 scconti ^^{;^::;;.:r^;;r 13^ ^"t L:;i;:T!:;:::;i:: tr\f '^^ ?-- 
 
 of these Greek nnnn« .ntiw . 7 • i^'iiin l.mgnaue has bf}rr(nced nvduy 
 iiini-<u u. I.ATIN „ , I ,s ( Hm I ,,, i ,.'',v I '•■"'.""•"i"i>.^"«an<l '</«, , ''were 
 
 KINK, as h.r' ilmmtiro». Ii.vr i>,rim, m< h,>i ,1. ,, 'f' """"""" ">«■ «lien tli.'y are pemi- 
 iii «■. as l,u- 'lim.U,^« / climlf M,^^^^^^^ Hi -.van, masculixk ilwy are r.,rmixl 
 
 Tifr sTf'liho rl'" "7 "'■."■';'*■" ^«•'f" '^ «■•«•k termi„a„„„ „., have in ,he Acco,*- 
 aii.l til,. Gkekk t.Tniiiiati, ,< Ihe a ■ «^n?.- ..^ '.1 ' """"""'l>'" ''»« ""H' 'ho Lati^ 
 
 ';™r :". .1, t*' ^ ""™ f "f "'• '■"• «■ •' ^ "-'- ^''■'^«- ph.. " « xh ^0« 
 
 '.im';. 'C cC V ; .'r^'s'' '"Xi"; hc"n.fr'tr/'''" •'«"H-'-"™-", n.„,e or a Greek 
 
 j£?i^;^iM;;^^sr]^;2i^^^ '- ""-'" -"-.-» «^'^* 
 
 ).vn;X:'i'i;';fi',;'l,.;:i L";; 'dI.S!7^''.ri;'!'"l'T?- '^ ".ea-re.--, mine, a me.al.- T» 
 ..fa >v,,r,l._ .i„,.„t; i ' sn ,-': ",(^ :;'" '>■"<• P"«.",-,» a inocli snn,.- .«deiivatio,, 
 (lisMict.- n ruhm 1 1. „„ Vnt. „;r It ,n '' '"■;"■ '>.'IJ-.">' — " ■•' «al.Tlily,- i. a 
 vc™ of two measures.-" ari'iiudtamL "S;:a„'l!a:' ^^ 
 
340 
 
 GREEK THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 24. The Greek proper name? of the Attic second declension in CajJ take either w or 
 tMas nominative-termination, .4/i'ios(-'^^G'5), Andror/* >/.< or w {AySfjoyfoi^) ; y-yn- 
 
 dareifx (/ri^S(\'fjfo,TS). Tlu' oihor cases ^renorally t.ikc the T.atin intit-ction («jkn. An- 
 droriei. Ti/mldrti). l\\\\ somctiines the i)oets borrow the peculiar casc-icrnHnation> of the 
 Attic (iecien.'-ioii. Tims Vir«;il (-Kii. H, 20) forms tlu^ okn. Ahdroged after the Greek «en. 
 *Av6fJ')yECtO. Of the roun J/'AfMthe sainepoct vGeori:. .'i-'Jl) lormstlie Accusative ^4 /'Ao, 
 
 accordiiiL' to the (Trc*k -i^&', wliih- riiny 1, 4, 10 has the acc. Affion. Arcordini' to the 
 tcstiiiiony of Prisciaiiiis. Cicen» lonncd the Accrs. Atfionem alter the .'id dtch-nsion. 
 Tlie n<juii To-v», (A' a)?) lornis its cases after its colhiteral fwrm Cons (.gen. Coi etc.) ; Uit 
 the ABLAT. is re<,'tilarly Co. 
 
 '^5. TIk' i>roi)er nouns in f ^'^ of the ."Jd Greek declension crcnerally assume in Latin the 
 tenninatioii ei(x, and are intlected after the .^erond declension, as Ori>lniis r.v.s. (Jrpttn, 
 DAT. (Jri)h(-o, I*iointtheiis, «en. Proinetliei etc. The accusative of these nouns is p.irtly 
 
 formed alter the Latin, partly in it after the (ireek rule. Livy always uses the accusative 
 
 Persed. The vocative is formed in e>i, after tlie (Jreek terminaiion fl\ as Orp/nu, 
 
 l^oin?lhfii. lint some of the nouns in f ^'? receive tlie Latin termination ^.f, and follow 
 
 the third declension. Jr//;//''.^ ( ■ '/T''^'^''''^^ «"<l r'''<?'>^ < ()67^66fi'<^) are always thus 
 formed, and of PerttemWw collateral form Pernex is found (always in Cicero with the Ace. 
 Pertien). 
 
 26. Some neuters in o? of the "d Greek declensi(m retain in Latin the termination os, 
 hut form their eases» after the second declension, us r/tans- {ro ^ao?), «en. c/iai, DAT. 
 chao; m^/fas^uEN. JfiefL 'I'he neuKT ^'Jfjyo^ \< L'cnerally chiniL'ed into the MAs<ri>iNB 
 XM.uiiAUK TANTiM Avf/i. oKS. A/fjorum. But it is also found in the nom. and acc. sino. 
 as a netiter {/loc Arf/d'O. -- 
 
 27. (tKXDKK. The nottiis iti os, tho same as in Gfock, <j:<MU>rally are 
 MASCLJLTN'K. uiitl those ill r>/A withoiit exception nki'tku. Hut nonns in 
 OS, which in Greek tin* feminine, licneially reiain this eciKh'r in Latin, 
 -whether tliey assume the Latin, or retain the Gkekk termination. 
 
 nh- 
 
 Hem. The followinir Greek nouns in on and vs^ are fkmimne : ntitidot>i>i (vf>\*, ajxtxi 
 p?ios^, (nTfos'\ (t/o/in/s'', C(irii<isiis>*^ cnttit^ttis^, d'Kdtrlon. d'xnmetroy^^. dibaphns^^, di 
 
 t/iOiiflu.s^-. jtiitfos^^. j)r/i/nf^fro^**, nnd the iiami-s of ^on)e <.K>i>. as <u/ief/tf/>i'ii.t. ri/rri , 
 
 sappfniiis. The followinir are used in fntth <r<'iiders : h<ntnl<fi. rr!f<t(i'lii.<^^. jih(r<'/>'-^^'^. hata- 
 nii>:^''. jiliid/itix^*. Several n»)uns. Generally eiiunieiate(l a< femininks in our irrammars, 
 beloui; to the Latinity of the miildle aires, as f(t>i/s.si(s. (nt/i'/s, /laraf/niptnis. The com- 
 pounds of o'f^o?'", which in Greek are fkminink. belonir eilher to the ecclesiastical 
 Litiiiity, as //<?/• f.^Yx/^/x^o. /j,f'r nifiutdus-^. or they nst on fiie authority of tlie l.atot 
 writers", as tiif-tliodox. Ilivr period un occurs in the ancient irraminaiians. hut always with 
 a Latiii'interpretalion, which is an evidence thai the word was not generally understood 
 by the Itomans. 
 
 4. The declension of nouns r.ouijowEn from the Greek after 
 
 THE TIIIKl) DECLENSION. 
 
 28. Tlie classes of Greek tioiins of the third declension, with a few ex- 
 ceptions, airree with those of the Laiin lanirnMi^^e beloiiLnni:- to the same 
 declension. The (ireek nonns of this deolensi(»n tire divided into the same 
 classes, and Jiccordini: to the same principh-s, us the L;itin nonns of the 
 third declension. The main ditferences between both lamrniiires are l)that 
 the liqnid-nmtes of the Greek lanirna.ui:e do not belonii: to the vowel-class, 
 but tt) the mnte clas.ses; 2) that the vowel characteristics in Greek are 
 the vowels i(i),o, and .v, beini,' not confined to the vowel /, as in Latin ; 
 
 "•rAnishuid iTTthe Aeirean Sea.— ^ the chaos.— 3 a tune, a soni:.— ■•a counter poison.— 
 • an apn<troj»he.— • the constellation Unit:- '' an atom in metaphysics.— ** ttax.— *a 
 peri)endicular.— 'Oa diamefer.— »» a L'annent twice dyed with purt)le. - '^a diplithoni;. 
 
 13 ,-e,i i;.;i(|. - •< the «■ircuinfiT:'nceof a circle. - i»h crystal.— '"a he.in.— '^an acorn. 
 
 — ^<^ the l)ase of a column.— "> a way.— '» the second book of the Pt/ttateucfi.— ^^ a. coun- 
 cil of bishops. 
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 341 
 
 ^) the dilferenco in the treatment of the N-class and S-class (S 30 and 
 ol) ; 4) the (iilference m the form of the case-e.uiin-s ^ 
 
 .e/i;;s\i:^,l!;:s^;;j:'j„!:^;^^i^i;i,ii:;-; ,;;;;; ::-?;j-/-j""^ t.:; ,K>uns of the first and 
 
 (A.a, =AJaj'. Tpota= -n-opn. The di htl o.;. /. -ne '^^ H>tnetinies „.to aj ;.nd oj 
 
 hut before vovvei^ souu-time- in o e Wv!l- J fl"^^' ,U'''"'S^-- mto ^ a,cpr,,-=^l,e,o, 
 hv y. bu, occasionally hyTiK^^-r^^^'^^^''^'^- ^^»' ^^7^ V.' '■"'-"'^''^- '-^«'l^^'^^d 
 ways cuan;re.s i,,,,, ^,/ „,^,1 «^, ]'\. , '%\\:' 'L ''>" (a«rrv = a.v/./). Th- (n])hihoni: tv al- 
 
 ruptlon, ar'o8va.eO^'JulZ!Tcii^.>!e:;!'''' ''""''^ "'""' "'"'"^ lliorouj;hly cnunged by cor- 
 
 2i). The Greek vowel-stems of the third declension terminate in z (f) 
 
 llie lollowinir nouns : "i-n^ w''*'V^>, i^i\. jj. ^,), Here belong 
 
 ''■""^:^''^:^,^^'^:^:!::*^}:'^!:;!!^^^^^ ■■ <?""■ --"^'^ 
 
 iu later writ.-rs oiilv • /mitiesh m//rn.l/ i ;^ ttr/nd). The following occur 
 
 plMuis. beast., ;n,.l,^u,/.;:T;.r^^^^^^^^^^ Pn/ta,n.\ ami several n^n.-s of 
 
 Ti.e (;reek neuters in c -'em-ral r^kc feuS *''/'• :''»'^'.V are all lemi.iine. 
 
 >H.t -ome.imes «rarely, ti;^;'o:^l.i:a?n^.;^i''.^;'^ -,;;;;,;;; Y'^;V'''''f''^^^ <^m><ri.^^ 
 FKMALK proper names. ix< A/cesiU /^/t-Vs^A- \l L ^v ^^ '''^^'' '''^^'/•''^'■^^- '>> ^<»'ne 
 of a., eddy near the Sicilian cotniurmo:rT,h V'"'^"''''' ^^''"" "^"**^' "«'''« "«'"« 
 names, in i>, belong to Ute T^'lal: see M^^ ^ H'"'"="^ 
 
 wit I. v<M^el-eu(lin.'- «re of Tathi .^^uaJ,' t. -■■' ^,V -*^ *'^ "auies n\ ^.s■, dec ined 
 H.VKKsi,,^.inbarl.;r;^c<, ttde'mS'>:^?^^^^ ^'^ J^^ ^'""^ '>f 
 
 HteMMs in id. as 7VV/,i.v, Aihwi, fa uO^Ii^t. 'nlr^Y:' v\ "' "''^S'' ^'^^^ collateral 
 Several n..mes.»f cIt.ks ui. m ot" u h'-.r ' J^i'rienK 1 hey are all ma.<culiue. (d) 
 
 i» I^.tin. The sand-bank S,rfi. likew !e fol m " Om i'.u .'l T ^l^"«'-!'"r^ "'>" "'^^'d 
 in (ir.-ek it ha^ a stem in id The t l.ir 1!t,^^ i v'.wd-declension in Latin, while 
 
 ((J. Trum^m). luivevl>V"ste,n< lo, i /.V /T.i r^^^^^^^ ^"'' ^''«''^''-' 
 
 aliatantum Ca^e. ^ruH.,>n^vTa s^)^^ ^^^ I''»'- 1' ur- 
 
 I'a^.cpa). All these nouns are feminine! tlitletent forms m Greek (KaA^.a, 
 
 /t>m. 2. (Jreek vowel-stetns in v<: rarelv oreiip in Tat;.. . ^t 
 fern. rMf,,. and of proper na.ne" ^.n he nniTe n .m.. i ' ?J ^ominon nouns only the 
 is also a fe.ual,. n.one. hut i h a . . m 5) ,^7,.:^^' ^?^'^"' '^^^-^; ^7'^'-^>^' ^^^''i^h 
 
 ''//v; (n rh- mountai.; Ot/m/:^, m. and tteSeV /^/^^^^ m a'h'h""' ^'^^''^' '"'"'^ ^'''^^"• 
 Avitl. Greek case-en.liu-s (s/e p :Uo /Vu -()7rntt ',. .W '^^^ ^'""'^ .""'"" "'■^''"' ""'>' 
 im-n.-sof plants mi^v^^iuul //.o/// 1 kewil 1 u itb r I L- "^'''* ^',*''""' ''^*'''^ ^'"^ <»nly the 
 or...rri..guucl.an.H.,l'hM,o,.r'i^.,andabl ^"""^ case-endit.gs, and ci^fuHdarv), 
 
 p4e^;inJe-and tl:e'i;;i;nr;;?rl;^';r^ ter,ninati<Hi e.. only the male 
 
 <.r /in,,,.) occur in Lal-n. Tin- at^e " ner K dee u ^'^"V V^^]""' ^''''"''' 
 
 50.net, nn. take ;'- ^^reek^c.-e:endi^s'^;?'^'^j';;,li;i^;l;;'i;!i ,^|^^ ^--; ^-'--. j-t 
 
 s.»nn. auihors, takes the r-r.n /V,. w .0 n I i vv u- M «ieelensto... lUpa.v,, m 
 
 in others the fo,ni A /•.sv.< (*o in r cem u w H,.T. m ' A '''"^'A"*'''' ^^''^^^^ f'^rxeo, Persea), 
 
 "•>iiu Au,p,e.« (pl. A<.pcet«) occt^s „ V i e Ml r7r "i ^^ ^^''*'^^- The national 
 
 class ( A>;...v, a: lj,,ru'n. as i^'/i.r.n 'a Jtom. smg. 15^^^^ ^^^"^' '^''^"° ^'^^ ^^^" "^' '''^ ^- 
 
 '^^'^-^ii^u&~.L^:i^iv^:i^s:k::^-'^^^^^^ 
 
342 
 
 GREEK THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 
 out 
 t 
 
 s 
 
 in 
 
 iioininativcs in o. as PMo. Ifnjo. Z.oo ^^'!;J%''/'^^ N.,uns not (l.MM)t- 
 
 •A:roAAu,.-o9, hut in Laiiu '-1/'^"''" ;• ., '"• ,r; Wf JMwlon, /uiec Sinjon. 
 
 Maratno,,, --^^^^' ^^^^^^ ^'^'^^^ ;:^ '^^';^Z^ oS. Latin (J^./>*.0". G. J/.m^r..^.), 
 
 r ,.1 Hft.T ll.f M.,-...„l ''"-'"''V'^ nT;5,.^,?,,n 1 iV T^ <in''k valley rd T,^.-,. b.- ng 
 occurs only in noni. and ncc. 
 
 occurs only in n<.m. and ncc. , .u , a Hn«- arc rmpcrlv AmKCTivEf». and com- 
 
 Rem. ^. GrcH< noun- in ... ^^^^ -;=J';j^, ^^,^,^^'^ Iw^v nul all th«s<. in r/... Tln-sc arc 
 p. is., several nuilc proper lunnes .-is '''^'' ^:^*: ';' ', W,^elU etc.». The conunon n.Miu-r 
 Se.-lincd in Latin like ^^^-^-^;]^^^' fl^^X^fnen^^^^^ J^n.are», helUmth... (na.u- « 
 
 «f plants», arc drerk n.-nter \^'^^ ^^''^' "''■ lin-V h i .en. rint: *'nlv "' "•""■ «"'* "'"*'• . 
 
 ~ Atriinnphal livmn.-» *"'' '"*'"' "o!'''^"^thVrcnmvn.'d t.-niplc in the acropolis of 
 d.cni..Mi.-.n.-^ a ^^■'^•^■'V'•'V'"■ '',''"' hmv -'3 ' on -•* eanu.-.-mon,.y.-«6 a kind 
 Atlwns.-H a ron.^mt m the V?!''*'"-,-;/; Inn dial ^»« -ta.Hlard.-'» ima-e.-" pumpkin, 
 of lii:h. vcssH.->^cap.>n.- Miandof s^.^'^^^^^^^^^^ _.M,„nb-bcll.-^MKXnv- of a ftsh.- 
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 343 
 
 I 
 
 Tiem. 3. The common nouns hicheros (a hero), hie. thos (a kind of wolf), the male name 
 Muioi, and the national noun Troi (Trojan) belont; to the Greek nouns of the S-cla.«s in 
 WS-. Gen. wos. They add the cou^onanL endings directly lo the o of the stem {herois, 
 Minvi'^ etc.). 
 
 o'J. The* Gn'ck nouns with mute «iteins, the same as the correspond in i^ 
 Laiii» uoiuis, Consist of the P-class, the T-class, aud the K-chiss. 'i'aey 
 arc ircalcd accordiui:: to the tbUowinii; rules : 
 
 Rem. \. The Gkeek words of the P-clas?, which are received into Latin, are all mascu* 
 M.NK. (July those derived from GDil>{/(tce) have long stem-vowels (dp), as Cycldps^ G., 
 ('ijrlo/d-t. mi/d/)M'-. hydropt^. and itgiloits* . The stem-vowels of all the others are short, the 
 most of iliem havini: sieuis in op, as tlie proper names Cecrops (G. Cecropis}, Pelopn. Me' 
 rojtt ; tlie iiation:il names Dnjopx. .Etldopa, Dolops ; the fish 6/oy?.s\ and the \nv^ epoijs. 
 TiKtse wiihoMf-r ft em- vowels are duilyb^^y Hb>>'^, the national name Arabs and the mylho- 
 lo;ric.al bird (jryps^ with the stem yryph. 
 
 Rem. 2. The Gk^kk nouns in 6t? of the T-clas8, of which mainly the proper names 
 are used in Latin, have stems in txvv, cx^ and cxT . They rettvin in Latin both, the ter- 
 niin.ition as in the nominative, and tiie stems ant, ad and at in the other cases. 
 
 li Those with stems in ant are masculine. Here l)elon',' the appellative nonns ada- 
 tna-^' and eh-phas^. the name of the ciiy Acrar/a^, the name of the priests Coiybanfe^. the 
 male proper iinines Athaiitax, Atla--<. Jiufx, Valchas. /Jryas. Mima,<. I'allas, l^>-riphas, Poly- 
 daiiutK. Thaiinia'<, T/ioa-'', and the national names iii(/aiitt><. Gararnantts, Ilyanles. 
 
 'Z\ Tlio<r with slfins in Jr/ are fe.mi.nine. and the personal nouns amonj? them are those 
 of FEMALES, except tlie male name Arcaft, G. Arradi-f. Here belong ttie appellativb 
 nouns lepas^^.lampax^^. htbdaina-'^^'^. dro/miJi*^, Dtuia.s^* ; the name of the city Detnetrias ; 
 the KKM.M.E names; Palliis, I'olin.'i, Oli/mpias^^. with the pi. t. Hyddes, Xahlde^i, Dryddes^ 
 Tlufinadtd ; the epic poem llias ^ and the national names Arcades and Noniddes^* . 
 
 li'rm.S. Some of the GkfTKk mascitlives in f/?y G. ffzo^, have been received in Latin, 
 retainiui: their n(niiiiiative< in ?x. their stems in eL and their mascilink gender. Here 
 bei<»ni; lUe nouns c^les^'', l^.hrK^'^. heri>es^^, 7nafjnfs'^^. Ore^'^^, the city Tunes, the pi. t. tra- 
 petes^'^, C'urtltx"^, Xann^.fei<'^*.i\\\(\ several male proper names, as t'hreines, Vehes, Thales^ 
 Dires,l\vi two latter of which are more commonly declined like nouns of the vowel- 
 CLASS (G. T/iafi<). The noun o rdlty/'s'^^ assumes in Latin the form fwc tapUe or to.pl- 
 tirm, and a word hie taikis, which is a'lei,'ed by our «grammarians, is not found. The acc. 
 PLiru. /lox A//>?/a.v. which once occurs in I7rf7i/, must be considered rattier as an unsuc- 
 ci ssftil attempt to introduce this word in the language, than as an evidence that it 
 was really received. 
 
 Rem 4. Gkeek words in 7? have. a.<f a rule, stems in 7*5 in Greek and in id in Latin. 
 •when tlieyare received in this lanLruaLre. To the T-class (with stems in 'id) belong the fol- 
 lowing iionn-: I ) APPELLATIVE (111 KEMiNiNK): (ef/is^. pyra/nis^'' . ti/raniiis'^", ifri^-^, aspis'o^ 
 cant liari.s^^,h<tfm^'',profH)xnx^^. Calais'^*, and several nam«!s of plants and stones. 2) The 
 resi are pkoim-;k names, eitht'r of males, as Xtt/.rls, XaMs, Phalaris, Puti", or of fe- 
 males, as Dipkii'is. X-^rP/x, Iris. It'i'^, Seiiiiraini>t. irspe'-yifi^ (p), t.): or of countries, aa 
 Lo-rhi, Tutrix, Kii-i. ('o'c'ii< : or cities, as (Vri'H'i. Piia-tUis ; or of rivers, as Tigris^ 
 Taiiais. Hypan's ; or of titles of poems, as ^-Eneis, T/tebdis. They are all feminine, ex- 
 cept the MvLE pr.iper names and ttie rivers. 
 
 'the Greek proper name- in in. with steins in "id. often assume the declension of the 
 vowel-class, as ^VrtW.s'. G. Xab'idis A\n\ Xahis. In tlie accusative sing. Greek barttonk 
 stems(that i-, all tlio.^e whicli have no accent on the (iltiiiia),iu\i\\\\. of both terminations 
 "yleiu and im. while thi; o.xytone stems (with the acute on the ultima) have the termination 
 xdtin only. Therefore the appellative nouns, mentioned above, except ibis, being oxT- 
 
 * A Cyclops. Tlie Cyclopes were called so from their single round eyes. — ^* near- 
 eiirhted.— ' dropsy. — * a disease of the eyes. — * steel. — • the west-south-west wind. — 
 ' a irrillin.— » adiauiond. — * anelephint (themire usual form It^ elephant as). — i" a kind 
 of lish.— " a lamp.— '- a week.— " a dromedary. — '* a druides-, a Gallic priestess. — 
 *' a female proper name : but more frequently .iii Olympiad, the period on wliicu Greek 
 chronolxiry was hased. — '" the Noiuids. or Nuinidians. — '^ a quick-sailinir vessel. — is a 
 kettle.— »» a disease of tile skill.— 2" u load-stone.— 2' a Cretan, fem. Cressa.— ^"^ aa 
 oil mill.— 23 j)riests oCCybele.— -* a Gallic people.— 2s a carpet.— 2« the shields of Zeus 
 and I'ailas.— '■''' .i pyramid. — ^ct 11,^ r,,]^. ,,f ^ tyrant. — 2u ^ i,ir>l sacred to the Egyptians. 
 — "> a viper.— ^i tlie Spanish fly. — sa j^ ijeroine.— ^^ the trunk of an elephant.— "^* a pre 
 cious stone. 
 
344 
 
 GREEK THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 345 
 
 Svn<>u\:^in6fi^) ba. a .tern in ent (G. Simoends), and the i.land of Salamis a .lem m 
 ^ . ■ r-yc n roirac take in Latin nominatives in oc with ptem? in 
 
 ^.m 6%ev,.,a Greek «or,!., helonpng to tl,e T-cas.. deviate tt. the fo, m. of thetr 
 nomtatt l-eVf,-om the re,r„l„r L*t,n lem.i.mtion.. The«. are : 1) the nkl-teks .„ /'« 
 "'"'"'",,'. rrT,,.., renin the form .if llieir nominative. In ma. th.-ir «terns in 
 
 mill. MM ini-ir.M:.i.ir. ^ , i^jj.,, j,, ,^^,^. „s.uine the 
 
 ge„„er, a, /,i. -^-^^; «• .i^S*!; ".hi^^rV'^^N;»? /r,™i»»-. But /,o. /, W- 
 ^,,";^.";» 'ait h,;ir <i ' k ' e,n in V iC. ny,l,r.nMi.). 4, ..f the Ureek ,-► »,mnk. ■„ vi 
 r U^ the folUnvh.' two occur in Latin, retaining both their stetns ami Jietuler: lute 
 
 imai^ristrorna^^, tonumf^ Hut ^^VO-^>^^ ;aS^^^^^^ (>tl..'r8. They 
 
 may easily be disi.u-iushed fr<»m ^»"' La-i i^ loun^ of tm n . i^n ^^^^^ ,^.^^.^ ,,,^ 
 
 f.-w (as/ama../?«//;;/-a. laennut) ^'["V 't vk r?rR ar se erallv Onned bv th.- ter.nina- 
 
 l^yi^S S:t;"l^n^l^ui^ Sr \::^>o:.;«/i;-;..r instead of j.,,natan. 
 ne.n. 8. Of the Greek -a.cnUn^ ui or. sto^ the nouns ^ 
 
 the termination and drclen.ion ''' l^»' ^"^ .f^-J;- ,,, k.-JiuhI sin-lv, to di^iniruisJ, th.ir 
 nioHtly consist of makk proper "«nies «nd ist -W*^ ';/'"l\ !,;\ -.i;,,. ,» «11 iliose tenni- 
 dceU-u^iou from that of the nouns ol the ^jj ^/ !" ''oi.iv he city CUoihau has a M.-m 
 iiating in pJwn, as : .l/-//y///o//, i Usii>ko,> ^'['''{['l"^'^^^^ n,.d the river />7V- 
 
 i:2,.i!,^;rinra^?r'=£v£J^^ 
 
 ZK4/;r ." .. ;/o.™-' hL a'sten, in «.. The Greek pro„er natne ^«^« »-'"'';;;; , ^" 
 
 *''C' 10 Of Greek nnnns in ex only the nonn „«r/to" ,0. ««rttfdA an* the national 
 
 -. Tl,rOraS;;:^Pf.nKW/.^«--k -me of ,od Amor^ The «..;;. ;;e->yerv fr,. 
 
 qnentlya, name of-aave,.- > » .l;|:"'"".'^^'' .^-J .J i"' S": _ n one of the Athenian 
 
 X'l'r^r^r- ^'^".rrin/if r,e:^•:i^• " ^"olirr- •■ r.oVa.".- 3-. a cuira...- " a 
 Bhrub. 
 
 nonn Lele^es (ginj Lelex) occur in Latin. Of Greek nouns in ix are found : 1^ with 
 fctein,- in ic htc Fh,znix' ; lac or h,^c spadix-^, hie or hizc perdix^ ; 2) with stems in Ic : 
 if!i,n%/J^.!; •". ' ^t'''^ hl/'fj'ix'^^J^cBc c/uenix\ hie or h(BC larix\ and the national 
 ?//r'o ^'"*-^^ ^> ^^''^'^ ''^«'»=* ^" ^9' •• ^c «tnx^ ; \) with a s^tem in ig : hie Uonurotna- 
 
 R'ln n. Some Greek nouns of the K-e]ass, received in Latin, terminate in yx and rtx. 
 In ,jx lernimatf 1) with stems iti yc : bombifx^^ cnlyxV^, sa,idyX'\ The mountain A>ya?, 
 the mrilc inline (ey.r, and the narional name Bebryx ; 2) with stems in ya : oryj^*\ 
 corryri^ the mytholoirical rivcT Sfyx, the male name .7f//>//.r, and the narioual name 
 ////yj;'» ; 3) with steins in ych the precious stones onyx and sardont/r Thev are all 
 mascnline. oxcepx h.ec sandy. r and ^gf .bY.v.r.- lu Mr t-nninate : 1) with stems in «7 the 
 (emmu\e,> ph(i/a,uri\ Sphifi.c'\ .Synxu:^^ Af< nhKc-iO; 2) with astern in fwunly lynx'^Uc.g.). 
 
 (J'tul'S\.?''^'?^ '•T'' '° '^^ ^'-'^\- ^^. "'^^^ «"^ °f ^«'^'^ ^^'^ "^m. termination oa- in La'in. 
 Of these occur ) wi I h stem in or. hirhox (G. bOcis), name of a fish ; 2) with stems in oc 
 
 1' u'inf \^ ^^/'^■l''')- '•«'"•• "< =1 fi^t'. and .1... n.-.tio,,.! nonn Cappadox (also ,iam.. of a ri er^- 
 3. « 1 h stem in or, the imtu.nil m.un A/Mjrox (,,l„r. Allnbrbqes^. With a stem in a«a; oc^ 
 curs/.«c glaijx (from Greek yAaiif, an owl), the name of a plant, G. glands 
 
 3>}. Ghkkk 0a8K-kndin(;s of tiik Thikd Declension —In the classical 
 tiiiio most wriKM-s considcml it iinproiicr to use Greek case-endinn-s in 
 iioiiiis ot the third declension ixnTowed tVoin the Gfeek. Cicefo, nfm, in 
 a h-iler to Atticus, had formed the accusative Pinvea. ajioloirizcs for this use 
 in a liter h'tter, adding- that he oiiirht t.o h ive said Pirmum, accordin*'- to 
 the universal usa-e of his time. Cic. Att. 7, 8, 10. Others, however, were 
 <)t the opinion that m nouns borrowed from i he Greek, Greek case-end- 
 iniisshoiiM lie used. See Quint. 1, r,, (K). Greek c;ise-endinirs are used hy 
 
 poels whenever the metre recinires them, and l.v later prose writers in terms 
 l)eloii<rm<r to the sciences. Hut, in a few instances, even in classical prose 
 dreek endinus occur more frcquenily than Latin endings. 
 
 Rfm. 1. GreeU nouns with vowel-stems in v {y\ ireneiallv take Greek endin-s in all 
 nl^nnT'lliVT \" -'^»- "''It-; ''■'"■"■ ']?'*' '■"" '''"'^ 'J" '""^* •"'^'d «"=■ endin-s (GenT Cotyos, 
 T iv. 1^0' '''Ipu'''"""^ '' ^^'"-'^- ^''''■""' *"■ ^"^'J"^- T»ie AM. is /ormed in ye (Aty^, Came] 
 L v., L -i). I hese nouns are not foinid in tlie plur.I. except Erin,n,?s (the Furies), where 
 € is short, as in Greek, with Ace. Ennnyas. Gen. and Dat. Plur. do not occur. 
 
 litin. 2. Gk\. 9IXG. The Greek endinij o? (a<) is confined to those nouns, which have 
 tne specirte (,feek charactt-ristics o ami y. l\\ the female nouns in Wv characteristic is 
 cuiitructed with the eiidim; a* into «v. as in Greek. 'I'he ijenitive of the proper name 
 I an IS lorined in w, in order to disiin^^'iiish it from panit (bread). 
 
 lit HI. 3. Poets use the eudini; o-i also in other Greek nouns, especially in those in i.?and 
 o-v with stems in 'id and ad (Daphnido-s, I'allados\ and in those in eus (/^t^?), G. eo>< (^ &5?), 
 "'*.„s' '' ^* ^''P^<^^^y the latter of which' is declined after the second declension in 
 
 Hem. 4. The Dative sixo. has the same endln? in Latin and in Greek (i and 1) ; but 
 
 tins endin- cannot be attached to the Greek stems in O and £V {euX The nouns of this 
 
 o'!' . V''"U "'"; ":''^'^;;^'■''".•"l r^n'iniz^d '^'ems, Thus the datives nidoni and Orpheo am 
 
 Vir''il (Ecld'''' f%l'' "* " ^" ^"'^"^' ^"^ <^''M«i (dissyllabic) occurs once in 
 
 , 7?em.5. Accusative .sino. The Greek endinj? v {n) is used in nouns with vowel-steras 
 in I and //, and in nouns in is with steins in id. The endini,' n however is more generally 
 chaiii.'e(l into m ^Xe>/.rim. pordm, Halyni). The Greek ending a (a), which belono-s to 
 tiie consonant-stems, is mostly poetical ; bnt it is the usual one in the words aer, a&ther 
 wKiiiKu^ x\\\i\ l\if, (aera.adanianUiGH:.). It also occurs in irood i)rose in proper names 
 wiiiitlie characteristics n and r, as Agarneimioiia, Lacedenhoiuu SalanwM. Marathona, 
 i/H-tora. riie female nouns in o have the ace in d (Didd), from a contracfi.m of oa.— 
 i ne ace, tyrannida is Ibu nd in Cic. Att. 14, 14, but Cic. generally has tyrannidem. 
 
 ' A Phnpiiician. and the fabulou-» bird Phnenix. - a a palm-branch.— » a partridge — 
 V"'I-'\~, ^^ porcupine — « an Attic m.-asure for grain.— ' a larch-tree.— » a Cilician 
 
 — a laDulous owl — 10 Homer's scourge, an epithet given to Zoiios.— u a silk-worm 
 
 — tue calyx of a flower.— i» vermilion.— i* a gazelle.— is a cuckoo.— i» a PhrvMan' 
 
 — a uctic order.— »« a fabulous mauster.— 1» a nymph.— 20 an island.— 21 a lynx. 
 
 15* 
 
IRKEGULAB DECLENSION 
 
 APPENDIX L 
 
 347 
 
 i,J:Si of the Latin ^''•^'J:':^^'^';;j"-^J^. 'Hrrebel„n,,th..plur. t:U,t. T.,,,,^. 
 
 Of lUe third decreusiou, as .l/ciO.<ic)/ia>-, Allobrogas, 
 
 6 Iruegul\ii dect.enstox. 
 
 See§Ui-15. 3(3.37. 187. 188. 190. 
 
 ,4 Irregular no„ns ar. of live kin,l. : 1) iu,leclinable ; 2) aefocUvc ; 
 3)h.:,..n.l.^ical ; 4, l.e.en.Ci.e; 5, '^;-;'^;-;;-- ,es i.avo the samo .ram- 
 
 ;::;;,";:!:;;;;;;„ ,!.:«:I;e£c;!ve oouus «.mcu u.. used omy lu o.^ csk, =. 
 
 for inst. the abhilive Hiwnte. ^^^,^, 
 
 of theecclef'iastieal writer»» ; 4) the l^rcck iiouus / v ^^^^ historian^ 
 
 children) were capturca. L. v. ^».,4.. a^ricltural and scientific writers ; 
 V mean, the tcp of an ear of nn heat o. mu u y ,.,,_..,,„„ ^, «. ft. . r. or tiie 
 
 toanaeh totluMU l.ith. t-"nnat..n.:. .. uh- r u.. ..^^^^^^ 
 uations ot one of the Latin cla^se^, a^ Abmluinvu^, utii. ^ r iSES 
 
 30 Dkkective not.n.. ar. those, which want e.lher some of Ih.ir cases, 
 or avv^olc number, either the sioguUu- or the plurah 
 
 ■J 
 
 licm. 1. Of those that are defective in capes the followinfr have no nominativks : 
 {(hH)s) G. d(f/n<K {ffi/io) G. ilitidnisK (inttrnecifj) G. iiiternecidnu^. ifi-vx) G.f7unv<, (om) 
 G. opvi, iruis) G. rids*. Of those, that are defective in the otlier case?, ' 
 
 niinihtT, but th<' mo!»t of tliein are of rare occnrrence. 
 
 , there is a great 
 1) (ops) opM opetu ope, plik. com- 
 
 is 
 d 
 
 plete: 2) (//^i-v) rici.^rk'em vice ; pluk. vices vicibus ; 3) vis rim ri ; pluu. ii/'^- complete : 
 4) luts (plairue) laem hm : pluk. wantin<f ; 5) fors (chance) forte (by chance). 
 
 Htm. 2. Many noun? occnr in one case only. esi)ecially in certain phrases. a« : urtonte 
 (ot one's own accord), in connection with 1*<.sskssivks {meu. /?//7, etc. >^[Hjnte) \ ju.'om 
 i/t/i/.'i.s'ti. taitinl'ltH^ iiKHiitu. rf>f/<lfif. and other ablatives of th<' loiirfh declension, derived 
 from the past parlici|)les of veki'.s, mostly in connection with «genitives or possessive ad 
 jecti ves an : jus^ii ( 'irenmh, tneo. fuo, on Cicero's, on my. thy command. Very frequent it 
 the abl. natv (l)y birth, in connection with w/^/V//- and r/ii/i or in the nK-aninjr 'older" and 
 'yonni,'er', sonietimesalso with (i/i/io.'< and a numeral, in the si^jrnitication 'old'. Tlie abl 
 mom/tfi/ is used iu Uw \)\miy^e in prompt k esfie or //(//>t/v, to be r>/ to have at band. Here 
 bcloni,' the lollownig phrases: (H'i^ oimu, for lorai's sake; ve/it/m dare, to sell; ve- 
 iium ire, to be sold ; xnpj^etias ferre, to bring assistance ; iiifilias ire, to deny. 
 
 Rem. 3. Nouns, defective in n>nn})er, want eith«'r the pluual {singidaria tanivm), or the 
 FiNGfi.AK (phiraiia tnntinn). Siiupdat-ia fantinn are : 1) Those wliich do not admit of a 
 plural on account of ttieir meaaimj. Here belons? : a) pkopek names, as Roma, Cicero ; 
 b) AnsTKACT nouns, as jfistilia, amor ; n the nouns denotinjr materials, as anrvm, lig- 
 num. 2i Those which conventionally lack the plural. Here belon-i: most of the nouns 
 of the flith declension, and many sint'le nouns, as aer, It/es. rer. .^pecime/i. which must 
 be learned from the lexicons. Eor the plukalia tantlm and HKTtnoLOGiCAL nouns see 
 §g 14. 15. :Hi. -.il. 
 
 Hem. 4. Projx'r names are used in the plural, if two or more individuals of the same 
 name are meniimied. as duo Ptinii, L>/(ii/M tf l'i(bHii.-< Scipiunes. 
 
 Ai{sTKACT nounsolieii asMimethe p.ural, ifsin-zle inxfuucts^eamnjiles, or kinds of »ome- 
 tliui'.' are to l)e expressed, as insania, instances or examples of madness ; prie-senfiie deo- 
 rinn, apparitions (»f j,rods ; inltntus exercituum, examjjles of the destruction of armies; 
 OiuntK ir/fuj7/n/nu, all kinds of indigniiies ; clari:e vtorte.<, renowned examples ot death. 
 {Sometimes the plural ot absiracts is used iu ;he si>iniikaiion of a singular, as : negotia, 
 buMiiess ; odiu /lominum, tlie hatred of men ; invidia; multitudinis, the envy of the mul- 
 tiiude. 
 
 Nouns denotiuir materials are sometimes used in the plural in order to designate dif- 
 ferent kinds, or si n<,'le pieces, of the same mateiial, as ?-i//«. wines (kinds of wines) apices,, 
 kinds of pilch; ligna, i)ieces of wood; puiiet^, loaves of bread ; carnes, pieces of meat. 
 
 87. IIetekoclites are those nouns which in the formation of tlieir 
 oases assume (H.AHACTEHisrics helonirjuir either to no reiiiilar declension, 
 or U) two dithient declensions, or to dilierent classes of the same declen- 
 sion. 'J'licy are eitlier anouialous, metaplastic, heteroplastic, or redundant. 
 
 Rtm. 1. ANosiAi.ors are tliose which have characteristics ])elonging only to particular 
 nouns, but to no general class, as si/s, gru.s. Ihjs, (l^'U. bovi'O, the characteiTsiics u and v 
 not occurring in any of the regular classes of the third declension (see § 188). 
 
 lUm. 2. Metaplastics are those which, bavinir but o"ne form of tlieir nominative, make 
 tlii'ii- oilier cases aftir iw») dirt'erent decleiicions. Here belong 1) several nouns, mostly 
 denotiiiL' TUKKs. which form their cases partly after the second, partly after the fourth 
 decleii.vi.m. as ct,riii(s yix cornel-tree). c'fprt.'<fiux'(a cypress-tree)../fV'/.s' (a fiir-tree). laurus (a 
 laurel-tree), vii/rt'tx (a myrtle-tree), qut^rcus (an oak-tree). Amolig these nouns are d<miU8 
 and coins k%'1-1-1\. itenus (victuals), and (sometimes) se,tdUi.'< and ltniiitltiis.~-l) After the sec- 
 ond and third declensions are declined -.jiigirum (the Roman acie), which in the genitive 
 plural has jiK/erinn only, bu; in all other cases is declined after the second ; and the plural 
 names of Uoman festivals in alia, which often form their i:enitives after the second de- 
 clension (Jiacc/ianaliorum), vvliile the other cases are intiected alter the third.— 3) After 
 th(; third and lifili is inllucted y?r/*/,>6- which forms its accusative and ablative either ?«- 
 qiuem, vtqnit. or rKjnietem, rtqnivte. Famts, G./(///a,v, ha? alvvay.>/u//ie iu the ablative 
 alter the tilth declension in the poets. 
 
 /?t;/i. ;i. IIetekopla>tics are tho^e whose nominatives have a form 1)elongin<r to a 
 cJasBJd^uj^^alne decle nsion, dilierent Iro m that of the oblique cases, as indjtr, which, 
 
 * Daps, in classical prose, denotes a religious feast, or banquet in honor of the gods. 
 In the poets and later authors it is used of all kinds of banquets, Daiis is the assujikd 
 nominative; hut it might he dajM-s (ii genitive plural not oc< urrin-).— 2 power, sover- 
 
 eignty.— 3 fiestrucliou, especially occurring after ad. 
 • chance, turn. 
 
 It means a total annihilatiou.- 
 
348 
 
 DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 tii>t and another lu les alU-r the lillli dvi le imoii a> ^"'''"'l. , / ,.,/,.j,.^. Thev loriu 
 
 S.H/U. vumtia aiul ;/.>//i;i..'. '?"/,t'7,,";;;U'u" ^ on^ 1 ,1 h2 oerca^^. generally alter 
 the NOM. and A(C. after either <.f V^'"/'''V. ^iVl.t ! m e.ived irojn the past paniciflea 
 the tlrs. only. 6) Many W"'"' ^'t ''»^' ^'1V .\1h. to d de^^^^^^^^^^ cv./.7/..v ^i. a>m7/«., 
 
 of vtMl... have c.Uateral forn.s in ''Z'l^/^^l^vMte^U^^^^ «ihI ^«f/^r^/«m. 
 
 and c-om7/<///., evtfdu, and e^/./y///^ i>/<^^^/"^ ? ^ whu-h the r<.ll.)xvin.'are most 
 
 nen. 5. Here belong a pe:U ^^n'V^--^^^;;^^;.^;;" !;;; . ", 1 .^ Jj^ ^'onci ^nd th rd.; 
 frequent: pUf>s. <-■ ^s and }Mes. G. n , ';V^/ Vir the uhl respire ; Ve.i>^r. in tlu- si-ni- 
 alter the second the acc. r^^pepnn. a ttn- V ' / ' " .,7!' " ;j; /;. V y;^»//., (,'. ;>.//w, and 
 
 -M Hktekooknkous arc tl,.«o n-.nns ^l'":'' '" "''^ 1''"'"' ''''^ ^- * «'='' 
 nKiiilitlLic'iit from thill of the sinjinlar. bees ">'• ,.v .1» 
 
 plural f,.,.u. only curia.,:, 'll'-' '.":''" ,7 '"" ;•. ' „L ,.",," 'n ".'poe.- Hi.- plmal. 
 
 ..«.. (bath), p.ur .a/... and ^^' ;;-;.';; ^^^^ ,„,,,„, ,,.„aer in ^.0, ntunber., a. : 
 h'em. 3. Several nonns li')^'^-^'^»'""^^ V J 'n ri rJiion baltt^»' and /.r///^^/m. r<///'/m an( 
 
 SS;S. These y called UKUtsnANT .n uknukk. 
 
 39 For the heterulogical nouns see ^ lo and Vocab. VI. and \ 11. 
 
 APPENDIX II. 
 DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1 Adicctives are either putmitive or dkhivative. Primitive are tliose 
 
 oomis, Ltiix. i3> ,^ .,..:,:„,.. jire either nouns or vehiw. A lew aie i e- 
 "^^tl oThc"',la«soi- speech, as miernus, t-^cru., nuus (frotu tho 
 
 ''T^ra^io^'of a.Vo.ives is n,aae by means of certain s.tfflxes. 
 
 syllables, and sonietnnes by a ^"'^'^^ >;'\\ ;..,^, ^, . l^ -Ji, {jr-is. In ■>/><. in.<is. This let- 
 xL noun or the verb into an ^^i;^^^;^"^^^'^ ;^y,^'^: %onn^ adjectives are f<.rmed 
 1-; ale^S ^ioaiSlaft rii^l;ur^w;t^<^t ^^ other addition, a. .ijHcas ,Amcun) 
 
 APPENDIX II. 
 
 349 
 
 from Africa. Pdim from Pelion, Ohjmpins from Ohjmpia. Derivative endino^s of the 
 tianie kind always affect the dilicrcut verbs or nouns, to which they are attached, in the 
 sai/ie (jeitet'cU mdnner. 
 
 A. Derivation of adjectfv^es from nouns. 
 (Denominative adjectives.) 
 
 3. The numerous derivative endini2:s, by which denominativ^e adjectives 
 are formed, have three diirerent ijeneral meaninc^s: 1) pertaining, re- 
 i>atin(; or p.eloncjing to somethini,^; 2) consisting of some material; 
 2) BEING provided with something. The great majority of derivative 
 endings {iiis, Icxx, (llin, llis^ (his, ihuh, arius, e/isls) belong to the first class, 
 which are attached to lioth, common and prope:r nouns. 
 
 4. Derivative endings are attached to the declension-stems of the 
 nouns, from which they are derived, as 7'ex — reglus, milen — millt-drU, ae- 
 nex — Hen-Uis, bos — bov-lmioi. Hence nouns with vowel-stems lose their 
 characteristics, as puer — j^uer-ilis (st. puero); fdtum — fat-alu (stfato); 
 ?)an\s — imv-fdix (st. iuid). Only the characteristic u of the fourth declen- 
 sion remains, nsfructiiff — fractu-uKUs, pecu — jncu-arias. 
 
 liem. The different derivative endings belong! iiir to the same class are used without 
 any (litft-rence as \o their meaning. Tiiese meanings are always of a L-^eneral nature, and 
 llndr Emrlish equivaU-nts are usually conventional, (ieneralrules about the rendering 
 of these derivative endings into English cannot be given. 
 
 {it). Dcrinitice enduvjs of the first clam, attached to common nonns. 
 
 5. The following are some of the most usual examples of combinations 
 in which the derivative endings of this class occur: 
 
 iniporJltor — imperatorius helium— hellicus 
 
 uxor — uxorius dassis — classlcus 
 
 onltor — oraiorius civis — civicus 
 'Ifis ar'i"t 
 
 vulgus — vuli^nris legio — legiunariu? 
 
 miles — militfiris nummus — nuinmarius 
 mola — moldris 
 
 Vis 
 gens — gentllis 
 civis — civllis 
 sen ex — senilis 
 wus and iitius 
 mare — marluus 
 urbs — urbclnus 
 
 alis 
 fatum — fataiis 
 murus — muialia 
 rex — regillis 
 
 e/it-ift 
 castra — castrensis 
 forum — forensis 
 
 frumentum — frumenta- homo — huin5nu9 circus — circensis 
 rius 
 
 Hem. 1. The ending rus is attached to pkusonal nouns only (as regius, royal, from rex ; 
 pa'nt'^, belonging to the fatlier. paternal, from pat^r), being most frequently used with 
 tht personal noijns in or. as noror — so/vrii/.<, belonging to a sister. A<Ijectives of this kind 
 are generally reinh-red by an p)nglish noun with the preposiiiou of, as ars imperatoria^ 
 the art of a general ; J'aiulm uwa/iu-s, the estate of a wife. 
 
 lie/n. 2. The ending units generall}' denotes a tkade, vocatio.v or ogcupatiox. It de- 
 signates «'ithcr tlie hu-^iness ifael/ {\n connectiou with «/w», or it represents abstkact 
 nouns (re^, le.o as jtertdiuhiff to sueli business, or indicates the /nrso/is. engaged in a trade 
 etc. (in c«)nnection witli ho/no, and nu>st frequently with /uier) ; as: re^ numfnafi,a, 
 nioiny affairs ; res j^c/a/ia, cattle breeding; res frumentaria, provisions; ars toinaria^ 
 ornamental gardening; ars stdfuaria. sculpture ; leges agrarioe. the laws for the distrilm- 
 tion of the public lands \ f (if jer lignarius, a carpenter; /after ferrarius, a blacksmith; 
 /(//>/• (Urari'is^ a ci>p})ersrnith. The nouns ar^.faber, homo are frequently understood, 
 and the mentioned adjectives have then the force of nouns. So always: fabellarius, a. 
 letter-carrier, argenlarius, a banker, argenfaria, a banker's business. 
 
 Hem. 3. The ending J////s' is most frequently attached to names of beasts, denoting 
 their I'RoDi'cTs ; as: lac asiiunuiti, asses' milk, aax) vitKtina, veal, adtp^ aii'<er~in>i.<, goose 
 hiid. pdll^ aif/rliia. a goat's skin. To the ending T/i'/.v belong several nouns in via, which 
 ori_nnally were adjkctivks with a fein. noun understood, as tJiediclna {ars), doctrlna 
 (.ars), lon.'it rlna (tabtrna). 
 
 liein. 4. Easlfi refVra to flacks only, as fomm — forens'ta, judicial (T)e!onging to the 
 forum}. It is most commonly attached to puopek names. See No. (j, R. 5 and G. 
 
 Jiem. 5. itarcr endings of this class are 1) nus, attached to the nominatives ^a/^^r, fnaier 
 
350 
 
 DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 fraier (pafern.. etc.) ; 2) inmns ileoiamus^finitimm. mantunus) ; 3) ester or esMs (cam- 
 petit er,, sUcestris). 
 
 II,) Dencalire endings of the frst cla,>, attached to pro,m' narnes. 
 r. Tu-ro an. (liir<Tont rules for tlie mlicctivcs Ibnuocl from tlic proper 
 — o i-K son" f cocntu,k.«, an.l of ct.ks. Personal prop.-r nan,es 
 of KoMAKs^enerally auaol, W«« or .;«», to .he «'^f '•■V,';'"?,'™;^' , "^r 
 
 -:-wr^^?"nrr;;:;:;r,ri..:re:.:;;;^^:"u)^^^^^ 
 
 ,»;>«») names of <-ilies lake the etulin-s .Inns, ^n„s, cms, or as 
 
 W«-/.-- oi- <!«.« iwlieii the iiaiil,- '';"""'f ' ' ' ' ^ , .Uv uH.cM o" in i'« Klii.U. if «-ed »9 
 ,m... Tl,ep.ntile,n,,nos., ,lu■lom«.^ eo K^ 
 
 Ciroiti h lanninn-i. i iiey ijikc iiit i iimmi_ » "' ott.n.iiiMl ainDi to the name of 
 
 pens. Thu. if a Roman was a,lu,,t.. ''l/';':; .','; f/- J.' ;, ^^^l^^^n^nnus. i. e. the 
 
 n.-unc which .^fi-A/.?/?^/.^ assnnio.l ^V^*"'\ J;;-^,7^;\' "'^Vv/X^^^ 7^/'^' rYo,/<J/ia is a con- 
 
 S;;;u;mJ';erS'';^r;;j^!;r;n;:^^^^^^ the adherents ana 
 
 companion!» ol Clodius. /-«^„„,7«»« Siiilla — 
 
 adjfotive Ca/Wif<«/-iw.s- 18 formed. . t,.. ^Pr... thp firppk 
 
 ,.f norpK-a tnU-(» the endin<'J» ?M,f or 7v.« (lor me iTreeu. 
 Pfim 3 Pkusonai. proper name» of Uukkks iah.< im mum.,, cu. . , . _,.„ 
 
 XiivhiHl, a» helltt/n .)nf/iHdaHc>im, helium J'i(/iiftfivi>nn. „,,„,.v,:n,, 
 
 7?..: 4. The adjective, denoting n.MionU> ,« -'^;f>;S-^;!^:,^r;;;e 1^!^^^^ 
 leu. (sometimes in Greek nam.-s^^/>') to ';";!„;;/ J', ?;'J, /,, /Vr.fm. the Persian 
 NATION iTsKi.F is used With thi' forc- ot '''■•':;;'':- ,^';^.";.;^7^^^^^^^ farf/t,ir,irau 
 
 lantrnaun' (ttot Perstn. hut lirrr,ua ^'-'^' *"';^^;' *' .' ^\i J^ '.e Xn^" The names of 
 the Carthaginian h.n-ua-e (from Punt. "«^^^^'^^V.nt, i(- nt < mm eral^ the names ..f the 
 nations are not derived ron> tl.e "!»'"'„: '//;.;• "/V/^^ derive, f.'m he nati.Mial nan,e 
 conntries from fose oi the njit u.ns. J ^^ '"^ ' vn -x en ion is th- national name 
 
 t;^;^^.iS[n'tr^wth^nr;vrv::^^^ ^^^ ^ 
 
 ^'^:: ': National adJ.-.tives^so..in.s n^e^t^ ^^-^ 
 
 forms with a peenhar mean in- /^^^ >''"'" ^'i^^^^^^^ //^v/w/J'/v <,r IMmnrus is 
 
 an anny. eonsistui- <.l ^P''"''.\'^''^"^,,:,, ,„,.,,, hn Mlum IIism,tV'U.<e.M war ?/* Spun. 
 
 deelensicns take T.'/s >fjl»*' t^'n"'":^''»''^;','^,'^ '''';.';. ^ho"e a f t/m an.l i generally 
 takef7»'w.as: Alfta --Alhtniu.< Romtr -- JOvmw^ r «.^k and waa?. take 
 
 the etidin- ^//>f?^, ''** v;^'''''^~^V'^ .' %M. /^..linVaM at\s^ is p. cnliar to the 
 
 ;;:;^'^i;;La- 4;:rr^i^;;;--^^^-^^^"- "--^- ^^^-^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^'- 
 
 ^^^i;^rt:u:s^c;ti:nS*fiu;n' their Ghk.k endings, or assttme Latin ending.. 
 
 APPENDIX II. 
 
 351 
 
 The mopt freqnent Greek ending is to?, aus). which is generally retained, as Corinthus - 
 toiynt/utjs, Marathxm — Marathoniiu, tialamis — t^alaminius, Chios— Chius (inet. of 
 
 Hem. 7. The Greek ending Iroi (jnw) is always retained in Latin, as : Agngenium — 
 AfjngeurwvK Rherfimi - Iiher/wvt<, Tarentum— Tarennnm. The Greek endin" aio? 
 Uvu^), whieh IS attached to cities of tlie Jirst declenshm. is raielv retained ag"Xam- 
 *(?«>■, ^wyruaufi. Generally a Latin endinj,' is suhstituted, as Athenumns (inst. of 
 A/hf-rnxm), Thebanvs (inst. of rh^h<vu>i). The endinir ^'^'^ (cum) is generally changed into 
 eusis; as Plaf>ece-P/af.€e,if^, Antiocfila - A„no<:hm.'<if<, Chalcv<- Vhalcidennl. But 
 the end;ni: eus is retained, if renowned (ireeks are mentioned to<,-ether with the places 
 of their birth, as Dttmftivs PhalZreus, Zeno Cittieus. The ending» dzrf^, zVt/S, and 
 &>r;/? are rarely retaiiH-d. as in Cro/oi,uVe^, Spartiates (more frequently Spartdnus), 
 Afjtferifes, .stayznte^, Malloies, Ihradevtes. In names of cities terminating lu polls, the 
 eudin-,' zr//5 i^ always dianged into 'itanus, as NeapolUanus, Megalopolitanus. 
 
 {c). Derivative endings of the second and third classes. 
 7. The ireneral derivative endino: for nouns denoting materials or qnan- 
 titie.s (;is auruin.aqua etc.), is «^/m, as lignius,^\i)o^L'n.^ The endings of the 
 third class (being full or i)rovided uilb suDielhing) are osus, ulentus (or 
 olenttis), at us. It us, utus. 
 
 /.V;/|. 1. Tlie ri'giilar ending attached to nouns denotin<r material is evs. hut sometimes 
 the Miller ending artu.'^ is added, as aurum — aureus, ferrum —ferreus, Uqnum — lirnievs, 
 liHlera—neUerareus, viemhrand — mewbrauaMis. If the material is a species of wood 
 the endings uius, nus or neus ;>re added, as cedrux — cednnus,fa(/u.s- — far/inus, pdpulus — 
 2><'i>'d,H'Ux, qunrui<- querinis and (jtteriuus, ndix — mliguvs aiid salionevs. The t-ame 
 enilings are added to tbur (tbunifus or ebujuus). 
 
 /^m. 2. The ending eus (mostly in tiie pokts) also denotes similarity (correspondin"- 
 t.) the Lnglisii y or ly), as niveu.'i, snowy ; wseus, rosy ; viryiMus, maidenly ; aruiidinlus, 
 
 7^//?. .3. «eing full of something Is expressed hv the endings cms, iilerifvs or dlevtvs 
 (the latter, il there is an i m the preceding syllable), as; puiculum—penculdms^fraus 
 —jrauduithtus vimnn — rinoltntux, animus — uhinto^vs, tititim — vitiosus. f acinus— fa- 
 CiuuiosHs • tin fxi — t'lrbultntus. pidvis — pidvcruUidus. vis — riolentvs. In the nouns of 
 the fimrih decleiisDn. the characteristic u is preserved, as /n/r/"//*- — />'w</i/5.v?/,« 1 he 
 ending uoi'Us is sometimes \\}^('i\, -iloiig with dsiis. in nouns not belonging to the lourth de- 
 cleuMon, as /tWfis — mo/dO-sus and inontudsus ; mon^/rum — f/ionslrosus and momtruOsus. 
 _R>'t>}. 4. Being provided or FniM-^jiKD with something is expressed by the eidincrs 
 aus J hts utus^ as : deittalus (from d^us), provided witli te.th. alatus (from ala), winged, 
 Otirba us(baifMi), bearded, lofjdtus (toya), (iur(lfus(au}^m),fa/cdtus(;alx),cn?iUus iainis), 
 turritus {turns'), cornutus (vm^nu). astutus {a^ius). v./ /' v /» 
 
 L'rm. i). To some nouns whose stems or nominatives end in s. the ending tus without 
 a pn-ceding vowel is attached, so that they terminate in estus or vstm. as : rnodm — mo- 
 de-t us motes — molestus. hoiios — honest „s,ftinus —fi„,t.^tus, scelus — scHesivs, mtis—onvs- 
 lus, ruOur — wtjicstus, Venus — venustus. Velustus is formed from the adjective vetm. 
 
 B, Dekiyation of Adjecth^es from Vekbs. 
 
 (Vekbal Ad.jectives.) 
 
 ^ 8. Adjectives derived from vebbs, as.'^ume the following endings: idns^ 
 nus, ilis, and bilis, jr?/,v, u-his, ax ami bumlvK Here also belong tlie verbal 
 adjectives in vdvs and itnts, in which however Ihe endings must be con- 
 sidered as INFLECTIONAL, not as derivative, since they are formed from 
 ALL verbs (a few excepted). See P. II. p. 125. 
 
 Tiem. L The termination 'idus ex|)resses simplv a quai.itt, determined bv the idea of 
 Tlie VKRB. It IS attached to the vkhp.-stkm, but so, that verbs with vow.l-steiiisdrop their 
 ciianictenstics. Adje.tives in uivs mostly «re formed Irom those verbs of the second 
 c-..iijnu'ati<)n which lack the supink, as calere — calidus : timere — timidus:f7iqer€ — 
 Jnyidus ; turhare — tvrbidus ; rubere — rvbtdvs ; rapere — rapidus. 
 , Pern. 2. The ending vns has a similar signification, but is rare in good prose, as : as- 
 mn-te — asndvvs. These adjectives, if derived from active verbs, have a passive signi- 
 ncation, as conspicuus, vieible, iiriguus, watered. 
 
DEEITATION OF NOUKS. 
 
 352 
 
 rehire- aclrentiriy.; -^ --''[j'^^ .^ f ^^^ f .^ /i/:^ the flr.t co,.j".a,io.. ,nul 
 7?f»n. 7. The nulni- .7v^</'/.< ^t " V ' ..,k k\t i ^i tu iVi k but irnrcH-iitiiifr i1k' action 
 
 baixlNS, Imlihirmlm, woi^hmiivs. /V J^fa nV .rrFVi.uY pkedicatk.s Later nnibors and 
 ^„n.M^ a, d .nostly occur ,u ' ';'';; ^^''fi,";,,^"^^^^^^^ frou. which th.y are d.;. 
 
 Bometinie« even Livy, coti^^true them \\ it hUy_ case "} ' , ^ f^,,,,,^,^, ^^fifrue .Xfur'tvU. 
 
 rived, as : ViJaf.o.O^^ V^l'^^r'^^^'it^lii '^cLZijUalione eArcitus rjlonahun- 
 
 ''"X;r "■ The c.ulin.' cv.avs bas a similar H,,nfication It occur, iujurau -jvcvn- 
 
 APPENDIX 111. 
 DERIVATION OF KOVNS. 
 1 NoTTN^ derived fiom veiu'.s (VKiniAL noi ^s) aiv formed l.y the follc^w- 
 
 CLASS of peix.ns, au.l are loiiijed Ironi V'' -^ '' f "^?^w?- vcitV^r- ^•m//a ^^ iHvfxnjtr*- - 
 
 ''^'■'^- . . ^,'^,ni.i.. .K4i\ bv rbatieiu''- the termination tor 
 
 Hew. 3. The pergonal "<!U"''. "\;^ ';;;;; "^^.V^nJ^ af^tel^^ Si«^.l l'>"^iu..'e even the 
 
 into tru\ as a(/j.7/(//' -«'//» Z/^-'; <« ''^ '^'L^^j 'y^vJ"//?" rn^'Hai. U). ll.U) ^«tutes llmt 
 
 ,K>un8 in ^ were moved, as Um.or =.;!>'. l,-l^;7ver^ 
 Cicero formed the leniale noun <y'y.//.s^/?j,x^hithi:?m.i%c.yi 
 
 7...,. 4. Some per.u.al nouus are f..nned ^.^^^^^^^^^^i^T^J^^'^^^ 
 STKM, as <!;i/x>, a dnmluinl ro/^^^./o a ^'1"\'' /''^:' "'j .^^.^'j, V«.ntenii)tU(.us ^ense. 
 of this kind are not found lu good ,.ro>e, and aluays h.uc a l 
 
 7...K 5. Th<.se endiuus, by -hich the ABsTl^^c^ verba^^ 
 attached to the.vKKU-.TKM and ,m tl> t^o^^^^^^^^^^ that i« a condili..... y./o^/'/jeci 
 
 Thus are formed : 
 
 ArrENDix III. 
 
 353 
 
 1) i n or .- favere —favor ; h/yrrere — horror ; patUre — paZlor ; tirriere — tlmcyr :fvrere — 
 luroi ; aimre — luiwr. None of these nouns are formed from verbs of tlie fourth con- 
 jugation. The most l)eIong to tlie second. To the first coiijiijratiou belou<' only airurr 
 and danwr, and to the third only furor, mpor. fraqor. - j • 
 
 -i.) ill i'«//i.' xtadtre — stadium ; Uedert — kedlain ; coUoqui — colloquium : incendere — 
 incendiiim. 
 
 3) in 'idu, edo, ujo: libtre — lihldo ; prurlre — prurigo ; capere — infercanedo : vtrtere — 
 r>eriif/o. ' 
 
 1) 1 nio : ardre — arafw ; tmmre — nwnilio ; legere — lectio ; larglri — largitio : tnoiere 
 
 Some verbal nouns iu io are formed from tlie vkrb-stem, denolini? a state like 
 the ending's or. iuui etc., as oblirio. the state of being forgotten. Often the same verb 
 tonus one noun froui the vkkb-stkm, and another from its supink. vvitli si-'iiitieations 
 ditierent according to the same rule. Tluis cx'wmo means a siege, as hehvr ])erform^d 
 (on the part ol tlie lM^>itge?-x), wliile obndio means the state of a siei^e, as bein-'- ^/y^^?e(/ 
 by the benegcd. Opiitath) is a conjecture, a supiiOsUmi, but opinio is a belief as'a state 
 an opinion. Jiectio is a dikection in the meaning of an actual directing, but reaio is a 
 direction as a state, a given direction in space, a region. 
 
 5)1 11 us anri iim : nu/rere — imtux ; agere — actus ; cadere — cclsus ; armare — armatura • 
 8ei>erirt — ttepultr(ra;ref^tere—rersura. ' 
 
 Soni.Minifs the same verb forms nouns with both endings, io and iix. with a kindred 
 hut soin-what diirerent sigmiication, n^opiwntio and opj)odfus, actio and actus. Sometimes 
 the Siiine noun even takes all liiree endings, as stafu.-i, ^atio, and statura. 
 
 limi. w The concuete nouns derived from v. rbs. designate a thing eitheras the activb 
 fc'UiUKcT ol the &clun\,mjtuere—Jiuinen {id quod fluit), or as its passive scbjkct as 
 S'^ineu \,id quod senfur). or as the passive AiiEST. that is as the means and instuument 
 ol the action, as ali/nentufn (id quo quid alitur), ve/iiculmn (id quo ve/titur). 
 
 nem. 7. The endings brum, cnmi and trum are rare, being attached to the verb-'ste.'»! 
 Af J ulcire— fulcrum (id quofulclfur), ardre —ardt rum {id quo ardtur\, lavdre — lavdcrum 
 (tdquo lavafur). Tlie cliaracteristic </ before the ciuWui: trum is chan"-ed into.* a>* ro- 
 dere — rostrum (inst. of rodtrum). cUiudere - dausirum (inst. of claudtrum). Sepukrum 
 j;ian(ls lor sepericrum, as stpultus for sepentus. Instead of brum the eudiug bra is often 
 louiid. as dolare — doldbra, latere — latebra, rertere — vertebra. 
 
 Rem. 8. The endings men, mentum. bulum and culum are attached to the pfrfect- 
 STK.M that IS to thar stem of the verb, from which the perfect-sysTEM is formed (See 
 A\r). \l No. 1). IJ tlu; perfect-stem has a vowel as characteristic, the endings are at- 
 tached to this vowel-stem without any other chan-e, as : ar mure — armament um • ster- 
 n-re (St. s(ra)—stramen ; complTre—complemtntum ; crescere — iruTementum ; /enire — le- 
 nim^ntum ; rolrere — rolnmen : no<cere (st. no) — uomen ; vocdre — rocabulum '; pascere (st. 
 piD— pabulum,- Kistere (st. stu) —stubulum ; serere (st. se) — siculutn : vesCire — vesfibu- 
 lum ; terere (st. tri) — tribulum ; st. jto ( iK)tus) — poculum. 
 
 The noun Ihwnenfum from linere occurs in the latest Latinitv. By the ignorance of 
 tue writers of that tune it is formed from the present-stem, and ought to be amentum. 
 
 liem. 9. If the perfect stem is ^onsonantic. the derived noun either assunits a cov- 
 NErTiNu vowEi. (1 or u),or it drops the last consonant, or the stem remains unchanged 
 Jhiis are forme.l : ai with a c.)nnecting vowel cubdre-cufnculum ; monere — mmu'. 
 tmnfum; latere - latibutum : deM-ere-d^cumentum; afere-arimentum : tegere-teffu- 
 vwaUim ; vehere — vetneutum ; erperlri—e.rp.'rimentuni.-\\Q.ncA-farc-ire. haviu^ a comto- 
 nantic perfect-stem. Smnx', farcimen, uut farclmen, a>^ the lexicons have it.-°6) with a 
 consonant d oppe.l. adjunlre (^t.juv)adjumentum ; cedere —ccemen'um : fulqere — ful- 
 Z'\L^,""'^ ^'''"-- ''^- Ji"(f) -flum^n ; Iwere -lunien : fovere- fonientum ; sarclre-- 
 
 /wvfrh" ' 'T''''' T T"'^'i""' ' J'^^''^ -Jaculum : cingere - cinqulum (for cinc^dum\ 
 
 ;:;m\f A ^'"''"^"^";'^ s e,„. /,.a../^r. (pem St. f rag) -fragment am :secdre-,egmen- 
 
 1 M. r. .'"f."*^"^'''V •■ -^' T' -f'^'^^^"' ; ^^re - agmen. In carman (from canere) the 
 cuaiacteri>tic // is chaiiired into r. ^ / ^ 
 
 wM^;'*' ^^'" '^'''^ endings which are peculiar to verbal nouxs. sometimes occur in nouns 
 N lie are apparent y derived fn.m aiukctivks. or other nol-ns. Such nouns must be Te- 
 
 . ov;V'"Vm "'T'^'/'m ''''■^'"' ''''.'.'■'' "^^'"^*''' ^'^'''' ^»-(*>me obsolete, or are merelv a^s^m^d 
 ,V.V,nI r • '"r/'*^ following endings, properly belonging to verbal nouns, are found iu 
 l^7!f.^V^"''T^ """'r A"'»-:*T'VEs .>rotheruouns: 1 ) the endin-o;- (tor) in personal nouns: 
 ^'.^ %-,'^''"' V••''^ ^^'y» r^«' «** " •'•',"" ^''^'^'^ ■• (i/edfor. -ambler, from alea, .as if from atedre. 
 ZJJ '»<'^'«i'|""r' 'f^^ ^-'f^ i'lf'f^} ''»«1 nra. a^p^ditdtus, infantry, from p^des, as iffroma verb 
 K.,.«;^r/^''''^«-^''''-. '•■?''' t>'''^<'^P' :Q"ai''f>'^^'a, from qm^^for. as ir from a yorhquoestere, 
 i /J .v/l'fr •^""'."'"•'y ?:e <«^''iie( c^nsuldtus. pmtura, dicfafnra.- 3) The ending fdo 
 lu duLMo (from dulcis, as if from duldre), and pinguSdo (pinguis).- 4) The andin^ men- 
 
DERIVATION OF NOUNS. 
 
 354 
 
 •1 /, f y^,..-i/m R<i \f from Urr(lre),calceamenhiin. from 
 «„m in/«rra».«./.-m, iron n on.,1, (,r/n^^^m^ 
 
 tf^f^ri5j';;»;";'T«ii;:i;-;«:a center isi^^^> ?"«..««..;« u^-,, or,«,n, b.g,u,„„,.. fro» 
 
 „ru i-i.ACKol- il.n.ss.,.- P'■7''^ -,.'';.,;'' ^VmnwI,!, H.e Gre.'k uiid- 
 
 (,i^U,i'un.i,d,ri..hr--,id,.i.'-le,vmi.m,r,Hl-^^^^^^^^ ,l,e 
 
 "'zr'.. The c„.,in. «w,„«. ,^"'";,r";,srr!r. !!;::;;;,r^,•,■'•::l;;r,?J'?^"-.^™',,^,:^,c^. 
 
 <.nini,--. Th,- .MMlM.i.'un""' ''•'V.''-%V\\,', "l l Mi,' u .1 -r ..1 iiii .i.li.Tlivc eiHllu;:. the 
 ,„ ,,..vNr. uml T,>F,,:<. an. "";;;"""-,; ■ , l' k ind > . "n ■■.li,- animals. Tl,n, are 
 
 6//^.7/. (coiv-^(ahle) ; fV""-^" - ''V"^^'" (hor,-t-sUii>h). .enerallv attach 
 
 AV;/? 3 Th.. I'ATiu.NYMics "n-HtluTMAT.ForFKMAT.E The former -01^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 8tem of the ,,r..,>er u nn.; f'-^>''VV L iL kin 1^ of e^^^^ "'''•'""' 
 
 ;;;:;^,^ fi!';£T,ial''o;;:iu7.>',-'--''' >r^t. ':.', IL ..aVon^alc. . ..-,.., con. 
 
 "'C'ritM.',.r name, in ... (M-c)and rf« (-vA-75) '«k- <>- en.lin. M« (./^,,p for 
 ,na r.nd M ,, <, for f.-nnU.M.'..r"nyn,ic,. a,\4/«-«- .l'n</«^ //"V,*»- //.n^^ 
 
 ^-:::;r.v>,.r ''prop,. , .'•v^'-.'••••<-:!;;,;^,;:'!^n,i:'*;';vf^S:li?:^^nrs^ 
 
 Iiyinl.s. hnt onlv win-n ih.^ luv,-,.,!,!,!: .^^''" '' '' l^''^',- f flV",' Vl'.,■l,.n^i..Il in <w form 
 
 ,l!;;V;;;":o;:J;nic^i'n'^t-.':i•r:■"'■^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 '''^::r;''-itrV,rm^'^';'£t.n:aU.'t:;n.nymic.in « «nd ia. aroused .o designate epic 
 
 ^^ From ADTFCTiVEs are formed the abstract nouns repiosentmg 
 
 OT ^LiT f^isTb'-i VNTivK ideas. Such nouns are formed by attachmg 
 
 t^^^^^^^^l^J^'\-^^ tf'!^- to the stems of the adjectives. Lxeep- 
 
 tioniil endin"*s are monia and elfi. , ,, „ „. 
 
 iiou.u ciiwiu^^ iiiv. foVn nnv of the fonr re«»iilar endinffP. at- 
 
 7?fm 1 Tlie movabi.k ad.tkctives (§§ 4h. 48) take any oi J"^ /""^J^;-" n,uy eudin"8 
 taS- them, aceonlini: to eonventional usa-e, to the declknsion-stlms. Ihe tiiam„8 
 /«■* and t>/do take the c )nn(et!nu' vowel 'i. a>- 
 
 Y'\ ciarn^ _ chtrA-ta.'^. pro>^)<^r — prosper- i-fa-o. titteger- Mefn-t-tas. 
 
 rr;:s:ir-';'brinK".T;.',i;"7;r'';:;,jr/ii^^^^ 
 
 as» con*M^f j/« - consuet-ado, sollicitus - soUicil-udo. 
 
 APPENDIX IV. 
 
 355 
 
 F^m. .3. Of the adjectives of common gevder the LiQmD mutes (§ 211) take the ending- 
 irt. attached to the declensioii-ftem, and the others (§§ 20<i. 210. 212) eenerallv take the 
 en•i\ll«J:/a^^ attached to the vowel-stkm. as / & j 
 
 (u) mpi^n^ — fa/yienf-ia, el^fians — eHjant-ia. concors— concord-ia, biers — in erf -ia ' 
 (61 brevis — brevi-fas\ pobill^ — nolnii-tas\ comU — cmni-tut^, gravis — gravi-tas • ' 
 (c) oc( r — acri-fa>\ ce/er — cderi-tas, alacer - - alaen-tan ; ' 
 
 ('/i sa^fax -mgad-fa-\ velox — reloci-f(i<(,fenx —fefifi-fa.'^. simplex — nmplici-tan 
 ExcKPTioNs.— Aui/ax 'xudfolldx foiin audnna and fallacia : ferox forms fefvcia and 
 ferocUax. Afo.'/i.t. *vy//«,w, and trisfi.'i form mollitia. .<eqintia. and tnxtitla ' turpis fo7'fis' 
 and si,/u/i< ni.ike turpURdo. foritfido. nm'difr„lo. Facilis t'orm^/acili/as mid faculfm with 
 ditl.TiMit siirnilk-ations ; diffiri/t.'< mukr.y^ o'lffifNlta/i only. Pofens [orm^ potenlki' vpntei^fa<i 
 egHis —egestds, rale n^i — valet udo. Tiie noun tem^Htas ip formed from tlie adverb temere. 
 Rem. 4. Of the adj.-ctive«* of the roNi^oNANT classes (§214 foil.) those with LioriD 
 Ptem-* take faM. attaclied without connecting vowels to their htems. Those with mute 
 characteristics take the endinj; ia, as 
 
 (a) pntii>er — pffiipf'r-fa<. p'/be" - p',ber-fa.^ {hist, of imbeMas). Vetustas \» not derived 
 from refif.'i, but from vetiistitn. (See Rem. 2.) 
 
 (h) iii-ftpt — in')/)iif, dirts- — dirif-h^, (leae.f — deaid-ia. 
 ExcKi'T.oNs : Vigil makes cigil-ia, nie/fior — tnemor-ia, princeps- princin-ium svnr^ex 
 — FKltplic-imn. » ^j^ -' 
 
 Hem. ."i. Th<' vndm^ jnoida is rare. It is found in acer — acrimfmia^ca^'^tns — ccu^timo- 
 ma. sancfds—^aiirhmoiiia (to<j:ctiier with acrifa.<, castitas. mncfitas). Parcn.-^ formswar- 
 stm.vw, From the veub qutii is formed qutiimonia, together with guerlla.— Tutus 
 makes tuttla. 
 
 APPENDIX IV. 
 DERIVATION OF VERBS. 
 
 Okvktjat. I?EMAnKs. — Wcronsider here only the derivation of verbs from existing 
 woKDs, and madi' l)y the Lvtins aceordiiig to dcmonstral)Ie laws. Hence we exclude 
 1) the .h-rivatiou of verbs from such words as once existed durin? the pre-literary times 
 of the Latin laniruage. but were afterwards lost, for instance the derivation of such verbs 
 as iKtrtarf, optar^. mutilre. putrut^, jMihlre). T<» trace the oriirin of such verb< is the 
 province of " Latin eiymoloiry" in a wider scn-e. 2) Still more must we exclude the der- 
 nation of Latin verbs from their ultimate itoors whicii would carry us to the time I)efore 
 tlie se|) nation of the Latin from the other co-rnate languages. This is the province of 
 roMi-AiiATivE I'liri.oLoov. Such wrh:* i\< arare (from the root ar, occurring for inst in 
 «/•*. arliiit. anna. ara). or cernere (fr(»m the i-oot kav, ox cer in Latin, occurnn" for inst 
 in rer-fiis, rer-t-hr'im. rr-Pniini. f Vr-^v. cre-dtrf. cre-are, and tiie German ffar-ha aud qar-n) 
 or of rirere (a reduplicating verb of the root rd or re, which occurs in ve-tus vi-ere vi-ta 
 vi-s\ vi-gSre), must for our purposes be considered as virtual primitives. ' ' 
 
 The derivafive elements of verbs are placed immediately before the in- 
 linitive endiutr re, (or ere for the third conjiiiralion). Tiiey consist : 1) ia 
 the vowels /7, e, and 7, by which the words from which the derivation is 
 made, are chan.ired into verb-stems of the first, .second, and fourth conjii- 
 jjations*.— 2) In the syllables lid (containing the element a, in combina- 
 tion with the syllable if, meaning repetition), by which the derived verb 
 is assigned lo the first conjiiuation.— 8) in the element sc (sometimes with 
 the connecting vowel i(i.sr), by which the verb beccnnes ' inchoative', being 
 assigned to the third conjugation.— E.vce|>tional derivative elements are 
 ut'l, ex.<*^ and ilia, wiiich are used for the derivation of a very few verbs. 
 
 Rem. 1. The di-rivative element a is used to derive verbs from xouns and ad.ikctives 
 heiiig attached to their declension-stems. In order to derive verbs from other verbs, the 
 
 ♦The vowels <!. ?. and I existed as verbal characteristics already at a time when the 
 Latin audits cognate langmg.-s formed still one to i-rue ; l)iit thev were even in the literary 
 times ot the Latin lan-u.ige, used as elements fertile formation of new words out of 
 old ones. It is a remarkable fact that no consonant characteristic (which would assio-n 
 the new verb to the tiukd conjugation) was ever used for such a purpose in the literaTv 
 times oi- the laniruage, except the combinations sc and ess, by which inchoative and itera- 
 tive verbs are formed. 
 
356 
 
 DEniVATION OF VERBS. 
 
 pnmltlvo vorh n,n.t fir.t he ohan.ed Into an n.lJoctivo for^ i^ 
 
 r.ar.ieiple, or, .in <..h.r ^^f^^f^^^^^^"^ mUec ' e ideH\ This appear. nu>st 
 
 this ehMuent .h ' >1'^'><'\^'' •'*J '',':' ^'',:/;;';lV i„„h m-utcr and transitive verl.^ are 
 
 plainly in the derivatn.n «ronj no n^, '' l^l!'l^lt,-^^^^^ nonun ^- r,o,nhu7re, 
 
 derive.l, as (a) ' '^^^-''-^V '•^.- J'' ^^^^ f;^^^ 
 
 r,.^ - neaire._ rolm,. -^^'^'/^^^^ ^ s.n. er vc b- r. th.H lo-nie.l from pkkson al ,.oun., 
 
 deno;in- Mhe hcMM- (.f siu- .a perH^" ^ r n.i «^^^^^^^^ 
 
 \\'ri>8 thus fo.mrd from AOJKCTyKs J-'*''^;''/ > ''''V." f^^^^^^ (j. ^. a/ir/y/^m 
 
 101), as alef>.r-c.lebrnre ( . '^■/''^^'X, f/ t,^^^ 
 
 '^^"{£!^'^:.:Su:^^'::^^^^ .....-•......, which .eun. 
 
 81 
 
 P 
 Of 
 
 ither *t(> liarden' or 'to just . „„.„„;no- uhirli bv attachinir this element to 
 
 Vc.rvi..torestin.'andsiirmficant «^/ '^, " '^ '^"? , / -^. v/. T> T^ pHnntive verb first 
 
 UPiNK sTKMs, is in.if..rted to the '«'7' VL .\ ml a tiVi pie, denoiin- • the perlVction 
 
 .asses, as it were, throui:». tlie "^''''''''''-^^ ";* 1 ,f„, -^^^ a-ain assumes a ver- 
 
 ^f theVerhal idea', and .I.e... ^^' ''^. i:;'^ .^f,J ^^, \V(ip" fo^ ^^^'H•'' *' »"''' \^^r^- 
 
 bal idea, impre-nate. by '»'V'Vm\? i W.r, A »" 'embraced one', i. e. 
 
 Th..s amplecfi .to emb.-aee. f..nns ''['['''^^ ^vheth.•^ by the voice, or a.i 
 
 to hold l.in. en.bi-a. ed) ; canere *«"\P\'»^" ,•,, 'V„' rj!,^;,-; I ,„„>i(. ; ,licet'e\xo^,xs)- dh-trtre 
 
 in-tr...ne„t>-m/'/'7Av, to s.ny or play a t : o y^^\l'^^']^^\:,„.,.,^ , ce,hre\xo yi.-ld> - 
 
 
 tre ^damtnre (to shont in:'':.^'V'\t .X) - f^^.^'f'-^^.,. '^^^ ,.,,.;, ori-i.-al n.ean- 
 
 qncTitatives are fOr.i.eo. aiu^ '''^''/'r//;'-/:./ «nVr' VnMiiv"<)th<rs. "in other instances tho 
 th.is farere-fdctiUlre. hf^Z' { ^ ^.U^ll J '^7,7 , t' «'riiinble. whi(-U is derived 
 r.uM.-nvK verbis lo^t- a_s o the r.., ucm tai.vc^^^ - ^,^^^,^,^. d.Tiv<dfn.m the 
 
 fr..... the intensive w>J.<.^<n-e (to speak in "' /»";'Vh1 \.ritnitive «.f which is w>ure {to be 
 H.pine of an ob-olete ve,b '^'''''^'•f;;,';/':"'^^, ;,\^^^^^^^^^^ fornied.t 
 
 silent), from which the adjective mv///., a.id the »''^^"^^ ^ ^ / ^,^„,.^ dkbidkra- 
 
 intensives lb.-med «'•'>"\^"P'''^''*»^"' '^.l^V^'XhuTexists „nlv as deponent, without a par- 
 
 ^'iX.^l^r,,r JSV. does not belong to the root mu, but is an iuteusivc of nwvere (instead 
 of vwvitdrt). 
 
 APPENDIX V. 
 
 357 
 
 in common use: esvfire, to be hungry (formed ft-om the gupine of fide7'e^to eat) and 
 parturlre. to i)e in iiavail (fro.n the supine of ;>a;'^r(?). All the other verbs with ^ifire 
 heem to have been made for the occasion only. Thus the participle emnturiens in Varro 
 K. R. pro. § «J (itching to buy), petitur'ire in Cic Att. 1, 14 (to electioneer, itching to be 
 elected), and the exprt-sttions sidlafurit animus ejus et p'OscHpfiirif, Cic. Att.!». 10 (he is 
 itching to become another Sulla ai.d • make prosc.iptions'. all of which are fo.ind at ihose 
 l)laces only, and nowliere else. The so-called diininuiive verbs lormed by illare a.'e ante 
 and posiclassical, as cantiUtl re, coitsa-ihUldrf {to scribble). Only titilldre (to tickle), of 
 whictK however, no |)iimitive exists, is used by Cicero,— The element et<« is attached to 
 a few verbs of the third conjugation, perlbrminga similar function as the element i/a. 
 These v(m-1)s are rtrc»-,»'.ve/-6 (inst. of atlr/^^i.s-e/e), fro.n ctdere ; aipt-.<sere, from capi-re ; fa- 
 ct-^xtrc. {mm f (lore ; incensert, fiom cedtrt ; and lactsaeie^i'^om the obsolete lacere.—For 
 the elemeut sc and the inchoative verbs, see § GO. 
 
 APPENDIX V. 
 COMPOSITION OF VERBS. 
 
 In order to understand this chapter, it is necessary to have a general knowl- 
 edge of PKKPosiTioNs, which may easily be acquired by reading §§ 424 and 42G (P. 
 II., p. 7 and 11). 
 
 1. Verbs naniiot, c:enerally, be conipoiinded with other words tlian pkep- 
 osirio.NS (tor exc^eptious sua No. 4). Compositions of this kind not only 
 atteet the MKANiNG of the verb, but souietiines change the form of both 
 the preposition, and the verb. It must, however, be considered as the rule 
 tlial bolli the pre[)osition and Ihe verb remain unchanged, as adamdre 
 (tVoin (III and amare) lUjIutrrirc (from nh and Jiorrere). But if the stem of 
 th(! verb has tlie vowels ctor e liiey are, if lite verb is compounded with a 
 l)reposilion, fiequentlvchan<^ed into I, and the diphthong (b is generally 
 clianged into Z, as /^l^/'<^ — interjic^ere ; cddere — iticfdere ; hAhere — iiiki- 
 hl'ir ; li'yere — collbjcre ; reycre — erir/ere ; teiiere — detuiere ; c<jedere — prce- 
 cuUre ; imdere — collldere ; qiKjerere — perqulrere. 
 
 Hern. 1. The following rules regarding the cha.ige of the stem-vowels should be noticed: 
 1) Not every verb ch.inges its vowel a or e when enteri.ig into composition. So cdrere, 
 mdinrt. irdhtre form the compounds pnecavtre, perma/itre, dttrahere.—H) Some verbs 
 cha.iire ilie vowels in some of their compounds, while ihey remain unchanged in others, 
 'riiiis /i,?,'yr/v and pldc'ere Unui the compounds aiiitluibert. itoxiliablre.coiniuaclre^pcrpla- 
 c^if. l).it pt-rhUilre. mhihlrf. dUplirt'e. \\\ddt>, the stem-vowel (wliich is alst>the charac- 
 tei:-ric) ihan^es tt) e, as condTre, addere, perdere. It remains unchanged in ci?'cu?nddre. 
 Before tw«) con>ouant8 S mostly changes into e (as tractdre — confrectdre), sometimes into 
 «, as in ciUcdre and mUtdie {incnlcare, exs>dtdr<). Bui in fraivjere, tangere, and in some 
 compoumls of pdnrj^fe It is changed into i {infri/ir/ere, coiitiiigere, i/npinge?e), while iu 
 oilier compounds of panr/ere (as depaiKjtre). in thecompounds of urg>tere. in atruinddre, 
 pi-rlracldiK^ and in dfsacnirt (a posiclassical verb which also occurs in the form desecrdre) 
 It remains unchanged. Z) e changes into i iu the verbs mentioned al)ove. in eglre (iiuii- 
 glit\,prtnii:rt {f.rpniii^re) sedlre (iim'idtj'e) and the compounds of the obsolete spectre 
 (dt-sp'icere). In the following compounds of It-g^re it remai.is unchanged: allegtre, perle- 
 ytrf^pnelegert, relegere, ,siifA<gert. Of einere the couii)ound cueni^re, and of stdtie the com- 
 liomids with dissyllabic i)retixe8 {circutiistdere) remain unchanged. 4) The diphthong (b 
 remains in /utrirt {ud/uirert). 
 
 Hem. 2. Exceptional changes are : 1) au into m in claud^ re (excl Mere), and into 5 in 
 2*luudere {expUJdere), except applaudere ; 4) u into e iu dtjtrdre and i>ejerdre {h-omjurdre). 
 
 Hem. 3. In some instances a contraction of the initial vowel of the verb with the 
 p.vposiiion takes place, flere l)elong the following verbs: cogere (inst. of co-agere), 
 df>i>re ide-agert), sumeie (sab-emere), pmmere {j)ro-eniere), comere (co-emere), detnere {de- 
 enu:rt),p')/iere (jxjd-d/ure), ptrgere (per-regere), surgere {sab-regere). 
 
 2. Most of the changes whicli the pkepositions undergo in their com- 
 position with verbs are optional, i. e. the unchanged forms are as correct ;is 
 the changed forms. Thus some manuscripts give adcurrere, while others 
 havt; accarrere ; some read adjilgere, but otiiers affligere. The most fre- 
 <iueut change which the pkepositions uudeigo in their composition with 
 
858 
 
 COMPOSITION OF VERBS. 
 
 VF1U5S r«)nsists in assimilation, that is a clian-o of tlio las consonant 
 l^^^^V^yn^^nm into ihe tirst consonant of th. vkhb, as rr/f.r;r msl. o 
 a /.f^'r^^^^ tlic last letter or letters of the prepositions are drom^^ 
 
 as .m^XV; i of ^'.i- radar ; ...wvV., insl.of "'-'->->^ ,;^^"^'^^''^' ^"^ 'ns 
 T^a a re Some prepositions increase by a letter «/)*, as ;,m/./r inst. 
 c)l Xl/v ; and in so.ne tlu- vowels are chang<d, as componere, inst. of 
 cuni-ponere ; antkipdre, inst. of ante-cipare. 
 
 coi'j'irrirr,toiniiiirni.ciiiilriti«. „,.-„.,„f« c A no»'. H ii'similtile.' be- 
 
 f„r.-/-. „u,l l.,.for.. all ..Hum; <:""'■"'"''•»'''■"''»''''/;. '-V;,^;/'/^^ '"•*"'"■ 
 
 nujicere, mriiptre. 
 
 3. Some prepositions occnr in composition only, rm<l ^^^^;^ '^ 
 separate words. They are: \) amK ^vhH•h ^''•';/''*.; f.,^,.^^^*:'^^ V^ .^.i/. 
 aLiitdre) and clian-es into «;i m anqmrere and '•'''f ^Vl ,%m^Tns 3 r 
 ^ rms its^< before V the middle nuites \d and r/), J^'hI all LKiUins 6) ie 
 
 ;(«;'"«; Lm/ire, iece-v,.,-.) except in >^Uere U"^u..d .,1 ^dnere). 
 
 brace. DU mean. -a."!,, er'. a. ''''"'■'•».;;'' ' ;\' . 'in.-,- i.l.. ■ l>ef."e a vowel, as i.i 
 
 " i" CrrulelhalZVhs c.nnot be c,.n,p.mn,,e., with any ....,<.,■ «onls, 
 
 4. A<'l"« r"'^'^;V.< o«-n tlw.n-ire some few excep; urns, the most im- 
 than ruKrosrnoNS (^ ^b.)) Uieic <ue hoim. 1«.« «^ \ ^ — 
 
 «The lorn. , ;;^v^^^T^^i^^;ii^^' f"'™ "' ""* preposition «Inch fec,uently occur, ihns 
 la the archaic luouuuients of the lanjiuage. 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 359 
 
 portnnt of wliich refers to the ^Qvh facer e. This verb occurs in composi- 
 lion wilh other verbs of the second and third conjiiijations (which in this 
 composition lake th(\/?V,-</ place), in order to express a m^W/z.^of the state 
 or ACTION contained in such verbs, as tremefdcere, to make tremble. The 
 \<.'Yht)irere in tiiese compositions takes tlie place of the intinitive-endini^ 
 re of those verbs with which it is compounded, sbortening at the same 
 time the characteristic e of vrrbs of the second conjui^ation. In these verb- 
 al compounds the sti<:m-vowkl of the verb /Wc//-e is not chanired into l. 
 Tlie verbs, which are found in comj)()sili()n with /fCdr<?, are the tbilowing: 
 arescere (stem c//-^) — arcfHcere, as^siv-scere (nr. amte) — aspuefacore, consuescer» (st. con-. 
 t»i?) — c-oiiMK-iji.-crc, calOre — talflacore. doeerc — coiKiocijracerc, madeie — madefacere, 
 in..n5ie — fommonefacere, paiOre — patefacL-re, lain (DEi'V— labefacere, tremere — tre- 
 iiu'lai-ere. 
 
 One verb of the /r.v/ conjuiration (vacdre) occurs in composition with 
 fdccrc, whose cliaracteristic d is chan<,aHl into de— rucncfdcere. 
 
 lii^m. 7. The deponent /)(7//m (which in composition bocomes active) forms with nu- 
 MEKAi.s tlie compounds hiparare. (ripartlre. (/udUriiHirtlre. The verl)s amcVe. uequire, 
 ntfjU'/ere (inst. of neckr/'re) and m/le (ins^t. of no/i vdh) are comfx.iinded with the ne- 
 gation T lie verbs />o.s>e (ins?t. of i>otU tsse) and nuMe (xw^i. of mwm velle) are com- 
 
 pOIUidt'd with ADVKKBS. 
 
 Jt>in. H. Many compositions, which seem to be exceptions to the rule No. 1 are not real 
 VKKBAi, C()mpoiMids. I)ut v.-rbs, d.rived from other words, in wiiicli such compositions 
 already e.xistecl. 'V\\\\-^ jiHlic'tie is not iinmcdiately derived fronl7^^s- aiid d'lcen-, Init fnmi 
 jaile,r (fiX.jn-ilic). Tlie words pary and ntpe» tirst"enrere(l into the conipositjon particep^^, 
 and Irom the latter word the verb pari icipa re is derived. Thus the followhi" derivations 
 are m.ide : ° 
 
 mairni facere — ma<,ndncijs — mairnificare, b.-llnm «jerere — belliijer — belli<>-erare, 
 m-.rem ire ere — mon-er — moriir.-rSri, avis specere — auspex — anspiciTri, 
 
 sacrum lucere — sacrilicus — sacriticAre, avis capere — auceps — aucupSri. 
 
 Verbs thus compounded, are all i>kkiv\tives of tiu' iii>t conjiiiratioii. J^ometimeg, 
 nut i-aiely, verbs of this kind ent>T into composition with nouns, even if an intermediate 
 worddo<'s not e.vist. as it<as facere — ctdijicare (as if from (£dificus or <xdifex), terqurn 
 vtrtert — tergiTermn. ' ^ 1 j 
 
 Rem. 9. Several verbs have the Arpr:AnANCK of roMPocNDS. because thev are connected 
 with o).MPi.KMK\rs (mostly adverliiai), which often are written in one word with the verb. 
 lltT.' belohi;: imtledicere. hemdlrre, lucrifarere, ainmadvertere (iiisi. of unitnum advertere)., 
 pe.^-'Umdure. ctiiinndare, satl'U'acere. It is more correct, to write such words separately. 
 
 5. The coNJUG.vnox of compound verbs in every respect is like that of 
 the siMPLK VEKu. Exceptions to this rule most frequently occur in the 
 lormHti(;n of the peufkct tense. 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 FORMxVTIOX OF THE PERFECT AND SUPINE. 
 I. General Remarks. 
 1. All tenses, moods, and other forms of the Perfect-svstem are derived 
 from two cardinal forms : 1) the PEitFECT of the active voice, or the 
 FIRST CARDINAL FORM; 2) the SUPINE (or in depoucuts the perfect par- 
 ticiple), which is called the second cardinal form (^ 3:56). In order 
 to tind the two cardinal forms of any iriven verb, three' things must be 
 known : {<() the stem of its perfect 'system (for instance tha? jieiere has 
 in the perfect system the stem petl ; thai jamreXva^ in the perfect system 
 the stem ju)\ {b) the active and the passive sii^ns which, if any, the 
 ^^iveii vrrb reciuires in the |)erfect and supine (for inst. that colere reqin'res 
 the active sign a:colui; that carpere requires the active sign « .• carpsi ; 
 
3G0 FORMATION OF THE PERFECT AND SUPINE. 
 
 e s Dine • WuiU'tcere chun-cs its ^i^m far. miojec). 
 nor do all tlie verbs which m ^^»^J !r;:^^ ;^>^\^ ^'t,,^^, ,y,^ ^,H) r/...V^ 
 
 iTet'i \n the nfrfect system. . . tIip 
 
 a,Kl consists >., <.ne<.f .1,.. '^-''^''j^';- «;.""• ^' i a 1 .Ms in one' of 
 
 ' 4. Ti>.. ciANCK. of ii.e stem in .h. ,...f...t fyj;;;- ,<■;:;;:';;;'•', .c"lu'm 
 
 leUors em liesis, as in <«n«<r - end. Meniere - .-(<•««). 
 
 perfect, the stem unMierally '^^f''''''''^'''^^^^^ 
 
 pmedin- iho active «r passne Mt,ai > or ^ am f ^*' ^^ • ^ ^ f,.,,,„ ^ho 
 
 Rem. 2. The perfect system ..f ;|-/-^^;-!;:;!j;:5; '^;;; ^t \>,^^ am.nlin. to tl,e class 
 
 stem of the incept ve verb u.,cep ive ^! ' •;\",;;*;;fj,'/,vst.-n of cre><ceve is Icnned as if 
 
 to which the prnu.t.ve verb hd<. ys. '^ '^;^;;;, ';,';\',L,;. ..f .vhc.ve in the same way as 
 
 the verb were m/-f,_of i\mctre, ab U uu. \cii) w^it 
 
 from its primitive .«.r/re. . ,, , ,;,, , ti.,> tiTinination /^r^rg. Tho 
 
 7?.,;,. 3. The stemsor.the -coptive. an. nnin. by reno^^ T,,,, 
 
 final letter of the nMnaunn- r^l],^^'^!)^^-*^^^^^^ ''^''^''- ^' ^1'^ U-tter beloro 
 
 i„ut^axcere has the stem ^'''''f''?'^ '^"'f^l!^^ ^, ,nnst he removed, the stkm-vkub be- 
 the termination seen i^ the vowel i. »'''^, ^/^ ,V.;'';'Vu"nU*^/vm yfnv^re). But ihive m- 
 lon-in- to the third ^^<>''J''-^^'''»'Vinr/ i e tS.n ion^^^^^^^^ s-em-verhs belon-in- to 
 
 crptives with the letter i, l»'"^'''^'''" -j''%i^,V!j "' ,X , /v/W^ - </o;7//7^^ >'Ciscen-^cire. 
 th'e fo,ntk conjUL'atu.n ';/':;;;;r^;;;;,; "J^^^^^^^ .tems m the periect-.y.a.m 
 
 Two incepiives. annixx'tn aiul;>o.>a/e rcu«iu k 
 
 (cvm/>6.sfMi. W>asri). vowKL-roRM, have a com- 
 
 /Mn. 4. All inceptives whose pcrfect-sti m>, "cion lo i „,^,,t ^„- ,hose belo.if,nn4 
 
 phte VKUFECT syste n, as a-v/ xc-r^ V^^''''^'^;; f 7,^,'^^^^;^^ ibllowin- live : coalesce- 
 
 lo the coNsoNANT-KoKM. lack ^^Yr:''fr^^^r^^^^^^l>^ ^-^'rdinal forms. Th . 
 
 Siiull^onn, excLpt r.^ri. which ..>rm. -^^^f^^^;^ ^^, ,,,,,,, ,i,Her fron. Nors. 
 Rem. 5. Som. ln.-ept i ves have "" verbal stem> at aU but^a^ ,^,^^^^^ 
 
 as i7''«'^r€r^. «/rm-.r^ <.r fnun V^^^ra.K^-dve i ceptives form the active teuse=* by the 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 361 
 
 II. The vowel-form of the Perfect system. 
 fb;!\^n ''^'■^•^' '''^''^'^, perfect-system is formed from Vo^vt:l-stems take 
 STEM, as 7 "'^'" '' '""^ ''' ^^'''^^ ^'^^° '' ^^'^^^^ ^^-^ attacherto the yoweI 
 
 r ^ ... ACTIVES. deponents. 
 
 A^,^.^.... Perfect. Supine. InflnUive. Participle. 
 
 «lie J T^ delctum. r5ri (st. ra). rattis. 
 
 noscere (st. ...). uovi. notimi. i^bhvisci (st. ohll). oblitus 
 
 6 The following verbs have Vowel-stems in the perfect system • 
 
 vetan, which havJ consonant ^iZTicTdom^xc^^^^^^ 
 
 coiijii;ration without exccDfion rr) Th.. Tvr™,vJ "** ^^^ ^^^ Deponknts of the first 
 
 and the deponent r.-;7 (st VT ^' ^ ""^- ^"^^ ^^^ ^"^^^^'^^ *'^''«^^'^ (^^^- ^^^'^^'^J' 
 
 ^./V./^r^ etc ; {/,) The f.>llowinriNCKrT vKs^ criSw^^ "^*^^^'"^^^' 
 
 (St. ^v/g,, and the compounds^f Ih^oZotliS^^^^^^^ ^^^- ^^«^>' ««^^^vre, 
 
 ^■o/^.<e€/-^, St. ole) (c) Tliree verb, of /iw, fhL . -^ {aMesctre, adolescere, exole^cere. ob- 
 
 ;i) Stkms in I (a) The verb, of fh./fV.M.M^ • ' • ^'^ '^'** ^^^ '^^'^' supine ruum). 
 
 wtiich in the prc^senrs^^tcm areVXc^^'^ the compounds of parere\ 
 
 ojn-rhr, r.pJr.,, and the 'i^^^!^s^^^,^^l^ ^Mo^ 
 
 y».\A\T-sTE>f< in tlie oerf.-cr sv<f,.m X 'rA i '^'^'^^' "'' ^^^^ ^^^"^h have con- 
 
 lliinl conjiiiration • r//,>^-/v(st rnnls /inzllt^ n ^"'.if'* v.(«' The followinjr verbs of the 
 Jh-e with V.ml i'^e5(.r.^^^^^^^^^^^ ^'^« derivatives iS 
 
 ^^^i^ip^^c^t^iii!::^ of ;;sr°"'^ ^^^- '^^^' ^^^' "^ ^^« -pmeof ^.a.. 
 
 -i^sKN^^vsJeli; (c^^epl/^^;:':;;^ l/".i'i''i^"T'f ^'"" "-'^'^ ^'- characteristic ^? in the 
 
 ai'.l />7). (See k. •!> ) I, class., ai nn.r, f, ' ,h'. *^-''^^'^'^>- ^'^'^"^r^ aiul esse (st. .^o^w. ro^a 
 '//•'>/V'^''/. Theci.Iracte i^iicTwhi r1 vHm ""'"'^V i" th...e verbs is always 
 
 vowels of the teriiS^ immediately precedes the initial 
 
 by the kindred consonant t', as : ^ ^f^oUtued, and m solvere ^n^UolvereU replaced 
 
 arijuere ' iir.-Qi(inst. of ffrv/7d) ar-fltnm 
 
 di Mere di ui (inst. of dUa.i) difutun?' 
 
 ^^^^^^:^^i::^:^^^^ -icU have the vowel- 
 
 1 rp. . , llcmnrkH. 
 
 1. The inceptive pascere makes tlie supine pastum, not /w///m 
 
 "'';■".''','» "I""'"' i" ihe l...ticor.s, b„t <lop° not oc?ur * ' tmc-my A et-PiN» 
 
 Krfei !:;;Zrr;;;.;te- anS^'Si" ^ con,o„,,„t. and vowol.»fems in the 
 
 cla<.). makes the sip e i/XS from ^he vnu^^l ^fj"*"^-'" ^'if'^ "^ ('^^*'^ ^^^ rednplicaring 
 
 16 
 
362 
 
 VOWEL-FORM. 
 
 8. .*r-T«. 10 sow, maki- the Mipine -<f ;,•.-„'■;'*" ,,„1,;.. i„»?r« - viAlmn. , . 
 
 (/^-/v, l:vrk^ tlio siipmt'. ^^r ^ 5) j,„j ,iie ^^vh^ferlre, Jerocire, 
 
 12 'rh(^ DKsiDKUATivE verhs in in ire ^'oe -^IM'- y •' 
 init>rire, pvinre, ,^u,,rrhlre. fonn no !'';'': '■yj.,';;':;';";,,^ „f ^,v<?. which hi tl.e pn-s. ^y^tcm 
 
 i:i. ri?W makes the ?(upiiuw-?/'^//i- 1 Ik- conrxmnu. oi ^«'/r. _ ^, ^w. ,-,..rMl:.r 
 
 Pill 
 
 (r. 
 
 ni* 
 
 TI 
 
 But 
 
 r 
 
 17 /?//;5r« mMkt's the giipitu' rxf'fm. but 'nly in the com. 
 Thesimple verb fonn^ no *"M>i'H'. Sc'' p. -W- , rnscian. 
 
 This* siein ^upp>lv,o ti*^ "c „ — ^ „,wl en 
 
 7. Tl.e c.,n.pou„,U of „.e verbs memjone. tonn .l-P-'^^^;, •^/;; 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 363 
 
 aL>ve! "' ''^' ^''■"'''*^'^ "^ "^^"' P^^^^^^ ^"d «"Pi^es. See the Remarks 
 
 III. The Consoxaxt Form of the Perfect system in gexer.l 
 H. J he coNSONANT-FOHM has three classes : (./) the Ridic vl ol-is^ whi^h 
 
 -huh ft (7^ V ^^^ "'"' V-'''''''' ^^'^^^^''^ ^^'^^^^ the active si^a /(/^r^ 
 -!''^^^[^h (^) the b-CLASs, wh.cli takes the active sign . (c./ry^.'Jr - ' L^^W) 
 
 r.;^": S^iir;.I^^y::;!^il?^^:f ^ without chan^m. their stems, as ma^i^.i; 
 6./-^ (perf. cabni) ^ ''''^'''^' ^'''"=''=* '" a.lciitiou to an active sij^u, as la cum- 
 
 ihe LI-CLASS, and / in the radiui i ufs . T^^^^^^^^ 1 he passive sign re-iilarly is It iu 
 sii:n / i. s...netimes cha.r^ed i m i^^ In ono v^M-h t?''^ '^ «otnetuues drops its i. and the 
 /r, (mor(uu.s) which ori.'inal /i^' a der "u "e ad> t^i^^ ^^•^'^*.^'^ ^'-" *« 
 
 poneat verbs, wiiich tik • n<)-irtii-<. « ,r.. .. -"^ T '^'^ '^"' "'^ ciassihcation oi De- 
 
 I'K-lass, heJause such won 1 e ,1 e tdaU^^^^^^ '^-^ "-'l<'"-ini,' to the 
 
 if the dcp<,n..ni is a c > pound ^il^^^^^ !.pw' k"^''*^' ■'*"■'"-• ' tl'«y existed. But 
 
 dcp.n.cM|t is always considered a be o.rS)'o?liu ridScli" uh,/"'^*"^' "'^^f' ^1'« 
 Hguof itsj)articiple. "="io lo lac raaical class, whatever may be tiie 
 
 Simple Verb)i. 
 clandere cl.usi clausum. 
 habere hibui habit um. 
 
 t<par^'t•l•e sj)arsi sparsum. 
 tacere tacui tacitum. 
 
 coiiclfldere 
 iiihibcM-e 
 consp.rufL're 
 coiiiKer-cere 
 
 Compounds. 
 
 coucla>i coiiclasnm. 
 
 inliii)ui inliibitum. 
 
 conspersi conspcrsum. 
 coniicui 
 
 Compounds. 
 
 perl^ci 
 decGpi 
 
 perfcctum. 
 deceptuin. 
 
 f.-n-iiTlronwh^u^^fM"*^ '''''7^' «peptions: 1) So ne compounds belon- to a cla«. dif 
 
 Simjde Verbs. 
 
 crer'o ^?'"^- ^"''""»- P-rficore 
 
 caperc cGpi captuni. decipere 
 
 All these exceptions are noticed at their proper places. 
 n..ftat\fHceTI'll//r.M[rV!:' ''''''''' '^-" ^" ''''^^ ''^ '" '^e verbs of the vowel-por.h doe. 
 
 hi^se). (^:^tinxis.-,tm), y;/ (y</u.c^ f:es.^, consumpse (produxisse, cessisse, consump- 
 
 IV. The Radical Class. 
 
 PcrfeP'n.Tf n''-^''l*'""'"'^' ^'' ^'^'' '''■'^"^ '''' "'^^ ^^^^ ''''' ACTIVE sign in the 
 . vev;, u 1 7' '''''•!' '■"'' ^^^''^''••^"y '>^'>'-« <>^ l^^^^ =iff-'cted. Their Supinks 
 
 I'-VssrvE 'sign! ' '^"' ^ ^^' ' ""^ '*'" '^^^^'"^ "^^^^"°"^' ^^^^'=^>^^ l^-'^^^ ^ 
 
 01.^":,/ imS: inh:ci;^;;^ti" i'c i^r T^^^^e^j^y^"^"^" ^''"^'^ ^^^^^-^^ ^^ -^^'^^^ - 
 
 <»r /• ucU,-rfi t^. ,.',,.„ ^";*'^'*^i^'^'*tic IS a I -mute (reed 're — c<vs>mi\ or one of the liuui is / 
 
 uJ<Lfe-jH^Zm^^^^ -.uietimes when an . prccedesa 1^ mute 
 
 Jiem. 2. The compouud* of dare and .«/.r, have ti,e supines ditmn and .^i^^;n (vcndl. 
 
 m 
 
3G4 
 
 RADICAL CLASS. 
 
 .™. ^.n,..r.^. B..t horc '^t>ett..« cannot he c„„,Mer.^^^^^ '-.I^ 
 
 .u . l..».>^t I !ilinit V. ■. . i _ . \.~r»..» *l>n itna. 
 
 thong (as fftridere, aBckre). 
 
 1) Ft'rfts ?f///i rt .<j/?^ri stem. 
 11 Ilerebdonir the followins^ verbs: 
 
 b) Skcon» roN.n r,. : c:i\eM', i.iNtn, hmv.i , 
 ''';^^lij;^;rc:,Sr;-vEll?^;c,!SirTre, rcpWr. „hc .a,t ,.,, .,ein. c,.,nponnd, of 
 
 "''if .iJ„,K,. CO.,,-.,. : «.<-, .ho «bsowo jpi^d «--i -'ii;!-!;,;:;,";;;;;.':":;^;': '^^. 
 
 cSnere. cipno, fik'n;. O.n.'re. "'''^^;," s,-'-lt.r" and the pi-rf.-c.-v.'rh m.-;nlu. (ste.a 
 
 eoSmnti of U.C verh, t'.--!!;;'- t^," nn'- i ^^ ^-vowei:.!." "« "- -'"■ 
 
 plica.in- syllahle al-vays H *. hUe .t '"^j*"^ ,,cMn-vowcl .! into f or 
 
 ff»« a The ,o.li.plicitin.- v.Th, with ■*" ,'^ ,":,.™; ii 1 hi ,h.-.e verl), .-'«'".V-- i« '• 
 
 „f^i,^.,!;a^^:;'^;s;;;^^^:rrvsu-7;^\^oppei';;:'^s. «.«, a. .««-«.., 
 
 'rr.rrr.UM.Ucat.ng ver.. wUU ™o,. s.e., are .ho M,ow... : 
 
 cadere ^/fi'l caxfum 
 
 p'irere iXnhn jnent urn {in the com^.) 
 
 7?^ . Bl^r. huMn-^ th. .t.m ?>.. nnlapUcat.. in the prb.kxt sy.tcm, like grgnere 
 
 an^^./?^.''tu:••h^\^^ ,,, reduplication .yllai.e, 
 
 Jiem 6. The compound, «f tl.e/elupl.c^Uvi ^e >; «^mp ne r^ ^^l^^^ ^^^.^^^ ,uu\ stare 
 
 LrtectoMlv (rO'/</<?r6 -'f,"/' f^' "?''" ^ Vl 8 ch^n''«' h..w.-ve.-. is ciitine.l to c..m- 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 365 
 
 1 
 
 (see No. 9, R. 3). 
 
 Bern 7. To the moiiosyllahic compounds of dare belon-; the two verbs t-g/it/erg (inn 
 of n,n/m dar^Uiud rndtn (compost-d of the root ^^r with da?'e), wJiich have the perfect^ 
 vmdidi, credidi, a.d itie supuiw ceiilUufa, cr^dUutn. Th^ other inoiiosyllal)ic cm- 
 ix.unds of dare arc t e f..ll..wi.ij? : ahd*-re, addere, co/u.lere, de^Jere, edere (to be ditiiiu- 
 giiKsiied lro;n hlere, to eat), indere. p^rdere. prodtre, rtddere, t^ubdtre, tradere. 
 
 Hem. 8. Tlie coiiipomidsof ca/i>re form neither a perfkct, nor a supine excent cnnA. 
 vere, ocanere, pnecln^re, which form perfects belou-ing to tiie U-dass (co,u;lnui Jic.y. 
 
 Htm. «J. The compound!* of pnrere (and sometimes the simple verb in anteclassical 
 laiiirua-jff) «re intl.-cted after the /o//r//icoiijui,Mi ion in the pkkskvt system But in the 
 PKUFiiCT system the compound^ coinpnre and rep'rlrt form tlieir teti<es like the simpi e 
 t'lf II' ,l''T''! ''\!''l'l''>'''- conmri) 'V\x.^ compounds aper\r-. optrivt, and cooperlre' iovxxi. 
 th.-ii p.-r;.!cts like verbs oi the L-da-<s {aj>erui. operui). Hut the supines of cUl com- 
 p.iuncis i.iclu.linir the participles of the dkponrnts, follow the sluple veub (reperlre 
 — rtpertum. aj>tnre — a/)€rt'i/n, exper'iri — txpertas). 
 
 liem. 10 Tlie compounds of memiid are the inceptive depotieuts comminUci and re- 
 mnu.'oi. the former of which forms its participle from the stem //le/iof the simple verb 
 (coniineatu.^), while the latter lacks tlie partlcii)le. 
 
 li'-m. n Tin)sc veri)s with short ste:ns which do not reduplicate, without exceptioa 
 lengthen I h«!ir stem-vowels in the perfect, as: *- » v ^ 
 
 ^inere imi emfinn (emptum). 
 
 l^r/j-re l^ifji lertiim 
 
 7nor?re mrjri inolnm 
 
 ji'imre jn,i jru-im 
 
 f<f'l<-re nt'li ^■e.s.^iutn 
 
 vtu'ire ve/ii vttUnni. 
 
 The followiij,' four verbs change their sten-vowel a int ) 2: 
 
 dr/ere er/i actum (see No. 9, R. 3). 
 
 c'nttre c7pi ciptum, 
 
 filcrre jTri fartnm. 
 
 jd tre jlci jactuin. 
 
 The followini; verbs have peculiar forms in their supines and participles : 
 
 I'rrare Idvi Ivihim or lotutn. 
 
 c'liere clri caxtam. 
 
 fihlre faci Jantunx. 
 
 grCuli gressiis. 
 
 The verbs co/micere, bibere, fnrjere, scab^re, and inemini (as simple verb) have no 
 
 , Hem. Vi. The compounds of those four verbs which change the gtem-vowel a into? 
 in the perfect, take the reirul.r vowel-chanire ^d into \) in the pkesext system 
 J^PP- ^:; -^"- 1>-, r^^\ '" tlie pkkkect they all resume the vowel I of their simple verbs 
 ♦ui*'' M . • **'"' "1 '*y\''"|)!"e they lake the vowel e, except the comp. olagcre, which 
 take the stem-vowel oJ the siini)le verb: «i/ /c,, wmv^u 
 
 retfigere reilP.^i redactum. 
 
 acc'iime accZpi accept nm. 
 
 CDnficere confici coniertum. 
 
 pwjicisci pwfictns. 
 
 dtjicere deject dejectum. 
 
 _ In c5r/ere (inst. of co-u/ere) the stem-vowel is contracted with the precedin<r vowel into 
 o; but the peufect system is formed like that of the simple verb (cd€gi—cdactu?n) -- 
 Ambirjere forms no perfect system. "^ ^^u,i.LUf,t;. 
 
 Rem. 13. Fieri, the passive ni face re. forms a rc-nlar perfect system from the supine 
 p. jcieerc (taetus .^u,n etc. ) Those co upon ,ds of fac^,-. which assume the forms of fieri 
 VJf'u ^:^'--^';'"' -P^''"' 11'- ■"!'' '^- ^)- «••'ktJ th • supinv /actum, \\<e the simple verb \cale- 
 juc'um. piittiaclHin). Hut those compouiuh, which in the present system have the 
 iov\\\ ^ticere. chaiu^e their stem-vowel intog, accordini,'to rule {inter ticere — ifUerfectum). 
 rJJ^'U ^ ^' 7"^' '-ompoiinds of .^^d-^re. which, with the exception of circumsedlre and su- 
 pen^easre, ch.in.'c th.-ir stem-vowel ,? into t in the pkksent system, take the vowels of 
 iiie SIMP! R verb in the peiipect system, as as^^ldere — assldi — asse^sum. But pnjesUere 
 auu auifidere form uo supines. 
 
 I 
 
3G6 
 
 RADICAL CLASS. 
 
 APPENDIX VL 
 
 367 
 
 J?.m 15 Tho perfect «ystem Of co«n»YV« 58 not found in the Clashes. But according to 
 Prf ^?«\, !;>^ formS a pcrlecl conmci, a.id other, a perfect connixi. _ 
 
 ^^r ;; 2^":.;! iti -npounds .ener.U.^.ert n. l.te^ 
 
 (.m/,r.m, ...;./>^//n). J'--,^;:';^"!' ri^.-ninrm^l u U-V f<>nn /he per.eA .y«tenx like 
 \nXo\niere. imd co^iz/i^w. ^^"<'*V-'".'^' J,V»!"///m> Bu followiui; componn-ls, which 
 
 S;/. M,^;;; t;, ,.,„,.,,0. ,.. a,.ai,.t .,,. ^^^^^^::, 't ;r,?.?^s',:.iV"' cjr. 
 
 ir^Vnirkt.^luI^^pIo^edrn-nT-tnlke ioL^er,' i. .. the U ,capUm, wU.ch ,s 
 
 tiiuple vcib : j^rfi'-zi p,df.-l„m. 
 
 ])fr!f:/ere i.,//? i cijit'ctnin. 
 
 ,,,i,hnrn neglai nei/iaium. 
 
 l';;;;;;;;si'ytr;;n-u;r;!i;:„;"ei'vowil'^ wJ.^ jf.o ..ve -i u. preset .^.eu» 
 
 ^T:f "ri-hl'Tit-vor,. «.,« (or «„i.W, of the UEPoxesT .kc.-t.v. aii,i»oi i. ob- 
 Boleie ill all forms but the pakticu-le : 
 
 furmiu- its participle with the ^o^^■<:\e Kad.pt us). 
 
 2) Verh>< with steim, long by po><ltion. 
 
 10 TTore belon*»- the following? verbs : 
 1^. Here Ut lun.^ ..." „r,1PrP nondCro prandCre. ppondCre. tondCre 
 
 a) Srconp CoNJroATK.N: f»''-y^^^;.^;"*^;'^f;f;,^^" .fe^y^^^ currere, dincere. fal- 
 
 (rmr/i) vincereaudthe(lKEKKverhpsallere(^i>;'V.A£ZK;. 
 
 1T1 tlheseverb. the stem-vowel is aUvavs fo lowe.l by tw^ ^ot.s.- 
 
 IJ. in iitsevtii). ,. either a (l()ul)le coitsoiKint ^^ or /r), 
 
 nauts, sucli as make po^^irioN ip. ''''.f,'; \V' ,,tr or n and r with a K- or 
 
 letters sc, which liowever are radical here. 
 Tlie stems of these verbs either 
 
 1) «-«-«•« to»^7 "y /"'•«■''"« i" l"« P"*»' ^y^'*^""' P^"'' "f """" '■"'""*'"" 
 tiun, ui.d part .r/W««( •■«'"l'''f;";"f .;,"'.« „„• lUiuicll miuI are then treated 
 
 vowels mm reaui,licatk,u, or leasHiea lUe,.. wmr -ur reaapl.catio». 
 
 14. Tlie RTKM- VOWELS of the verbs of tlie former subdivision remain un- 
 chanircd, except the rediiplicatin<r vt^-bs fallere and parcere^ which change 
 a into e in tiie perfect, but not in the supine. 
 
 Tlie Si TINES eitlier liave the passive sii^n s, droppini^ the precedino: con- 
 sonant, or are hicking altogether, excei)t toulere, whicli makes temwm or 
 ienUuii. 
 
 Tiiose verbs, which have double consonants {II or rr), drop one of them 
 in the supine, as currere — curxum, veVere — vuUum. 
 Ran. 1. The foilowini; verhs of this* cate^'ory reduplicate: 
 
 II. CoNj. vurriRre inomordi vwrff^im. 
 
 peniti-rt (to hang, n.) j>i>eiid'i ])em>tm. 
 
 ^IMJudere »jX)i>oiidi s^pomum. 
 
 tondtre tofondi tonsmn. 
 
 III. Cox J. crirrtre cucurri cvrfutn. 
 
 fallore ftfelli falmm. 
 
 parctre jiepetci 
 
 7>f7/^/^re (to suspend) pejmidi pensum. 
 
 po<cere popo<n 
 
 tendcre tettndi ientum or t^nsvm. 
 
 Rem. 2. The conijmund? of these verhs do not reduplicate, except poscere, and Romo- 
 tiiiies currere (d-})rhd?re — d' peiidi.rispondere — respondi. ostendere — ostendi, but repo- 
 fcere — rf^/xt/xhci k Ejcurrert and pnecarnit are mostly found with reduplication {excu- 
 C'/rri. pntc'/ciir/i) : but the other compounds generally drop the reduplication {accuni 
 dt^nirri). Rfhlhrt (compound ui falleit) form^ no supine. * * 
 
 Rf>m. 3. Parcfre. in the antetlassical authors, forms the perfect jxirn after the rules of 
 the S-clasn. The verb;il adj<'Ctiv.- pnrnnriia occurs once in Livy (-26. 13\ and in Suetonius. 
 Tnc perfect pncm is once lound in anteclassicai hintruagc. from which Pliny (H. N. 1 
 ;J3, 4--ir ilie icatlini: is correct) lorms tlie verbal adjective y^am/'/Tru*. ' 
 
 Rem. A. Of th.- comi)oun(ls of tnuhre the followini: three : extendere. protevdere. rfiten- 
 df/r arc formed with either passive sign, t or s {exlensntn or ex'entum) : dcteuder» and 
 (f'ile.Kdere liave*-only (oafe/i'^u/n. not— tu/n) ; all the others have ^ oniy (inUnturn, atien- 
 tnni ) . 
 
 litm. 5. The stems of the following verbs remain long l)y position without redupli- 
 cation : 
 fervhe {ferver^^, anted.) pranderc : the comp. oUandcrg (accend< re, in/'mdere), the comp. 
 o[ fender € (dfifetid^re. ajftud'-re). lamhere, tnandere, pandere. preJuri^ere (ox prendere)^ 
 psaUeie., Hcandun-. ve"ire, verrere, vertere. as : 
 
 prand?re jrrandi pransnm. 
 
 Kcandere ticandi ticnnmm. 
 
 asrenUere (P^ccndi ascensurn. 
 
 The perfects ol the veiJ)3 with double consonants (paaUere, vdlere, vcrrere) are extremely 
 rare; t liat of /;vr///<-rt^ is nosiclassical. and that of ?v/rf,'<> rests only on the authority of 
 ancient grainmarians. Vdlere makes two i)erfects. velli and rvld, both of which 'are 
 rarely used. 
 
 Fetvire. laniherc, p.<in1li're ami vtrrere form no supines. Pandere forms the supinej9a«- 
 smn (rt\rr]\ pa/it'ii/i}., and vllen forms ni'finn. inst. (»( rel<//fn. 
 
 J}>eii(Un forms neither a pi ricct nor a supine, although the ancient grammarians men- 
 tion tlie supinesy/-e.vM//< undfrtftsiint. 
 
 Rnn. (5. Feiiere. with the anterlassiral collateral form /«T(?^rg. forms the per fect/^rri 
 or ferbui, the foimer being anteclassical and postclassical. 
 
 Tifiti. 7. Vertere forms the depon<-nt compotmds rererti (to return), direrii (to take 
 lodi^inirs) and pnrrerti (to anticipatci. which have perfect systems with active forms (re- 
 V')'/i, direi'ti. prarerti. not fereisit.f .si/m etc.). Ihit rerer.sUf.' diverf//fi. pixtversus are used 
 as PEi'oNKNT participles with activk si<riiitieation (haviiiL' returned etc.). 
 
 Rem. 8. The participle /)?a//^«.v of ;>m/<(A"/e- has pei-onent significaiion (one that has 
 breakfasted). 
 
 IT). Of tiiose verbs whicii drop one of the two consonants, which 
 always is tin- tirsl of the two (generally an m or n), (m\\ f range re, fu tide re^ 
 Unquere, rumpere, and vlncere lengtheii their vowels without reduplicatioii. 
 All the others iieduplic.\tk with short stem-vowels. 
 
 In 
 
3G8 
 
 RADICAL CLASS. 
 
 Jiem. 1. The lengthening vorbs form the following? perfects» and supines: 
 frmqere fr^'ji fmdnm. 
 
 fnwUre, jTidi Jusum. 
 
 lin(/utre nqni Itcfum. 
 
 tvi'nfm-e rupi ruptum. 
 
 vincere rid iidum. ^ ,. , . 
 
 Franqere at the .ame time chan-es Its .tern-vowel a into ^. Ttj f"':"^';""^//,!;'/?^^ 
 afreoil) do not retain their own vowel-chaniro. but as.uin.' timt ol \»''' ' «^»''V rT'*^ 
 ^fjlji-i'ij'ractinn. The suimne. are tor.ued acco.d.n- to the -eneral rule No. 9, K 7. 
 Jt^m 2 The following verbs of this category reduplicate : , . , . 
 
 ice'Uen) (renVi) (o«/^Mm) (only in compounds). 
 
 diKCcre (ihfiri - 
 
 nndere fuli rin«t. of //tJi) fi^suvi 
 
 ^uiiuqere (pacisd) j)e/''i'/i paiiu/n. 
 
 ptUere pepidi pulmm. 
 
 p„nqere P>'P>'qi , . . ,., PV^cOun. 
 
 sciridere fc'idi (.anted, scicidt) sn^sum. 
 
 n.<tere sVili ^Uihnn. 
 
 tanaere tefiqi ^^"'HLV^ 
 
 U^r'r^ smirdiiXn^i.oUetuli) suhUltum 
 
 tundere tut Mi tunsum or tuf'um. 
 
 Bern. 3. The componndP of these verbs» drop the reduplication, except discere and sis- 
 tere. at» : repuli, atllqi ; but edidin. cotu<titi. 
 
 n^m 4 Cdlere (the Greek KhXXtiv) a? a Pimple verb occurs only in the pai-ticiple, 
 wldch ht \\Xxmlum^ and is used U an adjkctivk o.dy. It mu>t he cot.sulere.l as 
 r-duiV oit in.'verl.. its stciu-svll.ihl,. bein- shortened in the perfect ..I ;>^A-.//^r^-;^r. 
 ?M_Cc, .-'^a;?. The compounds iwhclhre. txccUere and pra^relhjr are \vith.)Ut a per- 
 fect «v^tem • but ej-cdUre tonus the participle .jr./.v«x. witli un adjective meaniu-. A 
 p.Tf.;ct ^elS tioiiih acknowledged by Pri.cian, occur, only m one passage of 
 
 'nem 5 Tlie perfect of findere, both of the simple verb and the comi>ound diffindere, 
 i8 ex treme V ra?e Priscian, whl, acknou k-d.-es the perfect ./,V/i, reu.arks thai M,ine 
 forS aiHTfectisi. Tliat.ftm/^/-^ must be placed among iho.e verbs, which originally 
 reduplicated, is evident Ironi it> short stem-vowel. 
 
 Bern 6 Panqere with an antedassieal collateral from paq^jre, in the stMPT.E verb re-u- 
 Inr vTviri/S -%<-/////^ It als.) has pujui - p<uuhun lafter the ^;cto) lu anteelas^- 
 cal a e^ua^/e ins '^^^ of re.iuplicatini. panqere suineiimes (once m ' '^/."^ f '"VfJ'; 
 nerfect'^'vslem like the verbs of th lit'd rMi"^»ry ip?qi- pfir(um), auA this is awayg 
 ?he case in Ihe compounds i,n pinqe re \xud co,.jn.gere, while the rare compounds d.pau- 
 aere and repanqere do not form a perfect. 
 
 Of vagere (which also was written parere-Leg. XII Tab. in Gelllusl, 20, 1) the incep- 
 tive deponent jxicUci (part, padu--') is formed. 
 
 Hem 7 SMere (stem st-) is derived from stare with a reduplication in the pkesknt sys- 
 
 tem. like bibere (st. be) and gignere (st. gen), analogous to the Greek i6ry}l.u unM. oi 
 
 6idrr;ui, st. dra). The pert.rt sfifi dike bibi) retains its puksknt '•<';l"l>>'C«t'<>'!' ^»^' 
 
 fng the second cc.nsonant of the sten. over iiuo the ••-^l'W>>'^-^V.'' whU u i'u Vhe sui,ine 
 trtmely rare in the simple verb, but frequent in the compounds, which m thu supine 
 
 clian"e a into 'i {dtsUtere — dtditi — deafilum). _ _ 
 
 Ji^m K The verb tdlere instead of its original iierfect tetnli and supine /rt/?/m, 
 
 talf'i iic per ict-sv<tem o^^ c ,iii)..und .ubfoUePe^mAl-.ohmtnm^, wli-ch is not used 
 
 h^ tVe P ese .^s^■^^^ '«'nn tetm. which in anieclassic lan^M.aj^e '- freq.|c>.. ly 
 
 onnd li;s;;Vis pVetix te ^tnli^. a.ui with its supine ^^""^i^^o.rowe.l "y.)^;;^^^") J.^',^ ^ 
 
 ?r^hjfi;Mnp;S.dsofy.;TJfor.n their perf^-ctsHud^ 
 
 nn(] Idfum chan-'ln" tiieir prepositions according to the l•ule^ Ai)p. N . (<{ '.r< rre " ' " •■ 
 
 -af^aulm, irff-tr?e -- atiuli - dilatum. cfferre - exttdi - Udtum. tnjeire - tntiUt - tUaOon, 
 
 ^'^/t/* The perfect fntmli from fmidere is not found in the- Latin «"^^"'■''.r,^^^"^!;."^ 
 i« aeknowl • 'e<l by the ancient grammarians. These als.» acknow e.i-e the }>yrf* its 
 L^si uuW . ." n theco.npou.Hls tTie perlec. fudl is beyond ^«''V'- '^'^^^^-' l.^j!;':'»^': "J^! 
 c^nhldi The supines tuJum and /usum both occur in the simple verb ; but m the torn 
 pounds tusu/n has better authority (contugu/n). 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 369 
 
 3) Ve?'bs with long stem-vowels. 
 
 tn^,L"^sv/^-^*" n7l'? '''^^^' ^""r^ ste"^-v^>wels iti consonant-stems belong 
 to tlie ti-da-^t.^* ()t those verbs, that have a fully authenticated Deiteet- 
 svstetn, only the diphth<in-ic stems c^.de,'e, limrere and haurire belon<r to 
 the K.^DiCAL class. All other verbs of this kind either belon- to tlfe 5- 
 cUiss or, m .i?ood i)ro.se, t.,rm no perfects, or no present-system. Of the 
 verbs with diphthon-ic stems a,d^re reduplicates, bein- the only redupli- 
 catin.nr verb which retams a Ion- stem-vowel {c<Edere~ cecUi— cmm ni\ 
 Jlerere makes /am —hmmm, and /laurlre, hausi—haustum. In both per- 
 lycts the .y IS radiml, being the original characteristic in the present-system 
 
 « . ..,.L * -^?-'' "^■''^>'"'' '^"^ ^"^ "' " Pii-^s 'i:e ot Eunius. quoted bv Prise -m vv lo 
 
 al>«» acknowled"'es the nerfecf atrl/iiri 'Pi.,, t.wi.?..,.» ..- i- • m'«"o^'^i o.y rnscian, wno 
 
 « e!;^;;^tf ., - 
 
 ^id.'re existed or n<.t. The compounds b..rrow the pe.-fect-svstem of sed^re as (i:/^;!.^^ 
 -nm^p.lt -co,i.e.-<><um. A perfect vl^i of tw,v, althoiu^h aile-ed i. he -SmLiri doef 
 not occur. Tne sup.ne rls//,/i is borrowed Irom the verb vuwt «r^iiiniars, does 
 
 ^^m. 3. The perfect-verb ccepi must be considered as l)elon<Mn- to the verbs of tb^ 
 
 s.e.n-vowels u>d,o - od, re - odi -o.<„m), Jmt its p.•esent-sv^"tem occurs on I v n t le .^up 
 
 V. S-Class. 
 17. The verbs belonging to this class take the active sign s which is 
 added lo the consonant-stem of the verb without any chan<''e of its stem- 
 yowel, as cavpere — earp-^i^ manere — man-si. The PASsrvE^sign generallv 
 IS t {c^rpere-~carp-tum) ; liut it \^ s : 1) If the characteristic is rfr^;;;?^./ (see 
 iNo. 9, K. 1), as plandere — plaxsi — plausum, Jiectere — Jkxi — llexum. 
 merriere—mersi--mj'rsum,uti~usus; 2) in the verbs manere imansi — 
 mansum), figere {Jin — ./?>«;;i), and the deponent labi (lapms) 
 
 ^«f.T.n^;7^'i^^^M''■■'^^*"''^l'''' •'" •'''^r''-^ "''^'^^ ^-^'^*'^ «»•'■ ^nlyectto the foUowinff euphoni. 
 
 sfTh K'.;il?J'^.''''"''''^^r'"''l'^ *.'" ^^""-^^^ *"^" P' «« sc'V^-e- script -mipt.m: 
 :l «! ^^->»' T'-'^^^' <7, r/?/ and qu) either coalesce with the active and passive si>rns i„to T 
 ireqere - rexi dtcere - din. figere -ffxi -flnon, dinquere - .tmxi. coquire-mvi) or \i 
 p.y.;edcu by / or r. are dropped (>nerq.re-vi,r.i -Lrsum. torqn^-i-tird fi^^^^^^^^^ 
 Jiilsj). U g,nxni\ qn beL.re ihe passive sign t are changed into c, L reqPre- ectun tiri- 
 
 ?htnr ^''^'^'^'^''-^r'/^'^-r^^T- -^^^''^ T-Mtrx^s^re dropped\^^ the perfelft system 
 h ■ precedi ng v,,wel being lengthened, as dimd^re - dim4 - divUim. ll the fohowi - 
 \y^rh> ihii ^\irn s \H doubled m-tead of lenirthening the previous vowel : ^"""»'n„ 
 
 \^<Mhom^l^(^!''-' ^"^ '^' ^''^^''' ^' "" exception to this rule, since it is coi^ 
 
370 
 
 S- CLASS. 
 
 quarere 
 
 jyercutere 
 
 ciders 
 
 tni/fere 
 
 jmti 
 
 j'af?n 
 
 drfetinci 
 
 pfrcussi 
 cexH 
 
 yX.7'<'W*>'MWl. 
 
 defensus. 
 
 queri - que^itus) ; 5) The liquiu n uc. jirtum. 
 
 finoere ^ '^ pht'ini. 
 
 pin'iere ^! f^ri i^trutum. 
 
 Wm'jeve ^^'^ nactti^ (ornanctus). 
 
 nancv^ci . . ^e ™?,.,/o or jnessux). <>) I» jnh^re 
 
 tj;ii';j'^';:ii'i:;rr;;pi»«V- ,.,,, , ,„ „„. po^eot. 
 
 *j;'\;;"rr,;r" .^'«& "-• -'.. •. , ,„„,, , „,d four oomp..und, of emer>: 
 
 "^ In tho«' vciWs tlw cli.iiau. ri. j .^..j, n,.,j„nly Ot 
 
 18 Tl.c followins vorbs <■'>"«'''"''' ','^,^,7 f'tniu, ooniu-ati.>n, as lUr U3 
 tl, v-rbs ^vill. >u'rF.ci.-UiACTKKisT cs o 1 c nm .,- ,; „„,y „,e 
 
 t .7.\o i."l boLm- to Ibe .-.ubca <; •->;'<';' ,,,^^ ;,i,,,„, ,,repere ; 2Ml..>se 
 v,.,l-s of lb,. sKCOsn an,\ oti u 00^^;^ ^^,^^ ,5 ,4, ,,,.,cl. ca.uiol be 
 du>sitic.a. of ,he sc.oo,ul. tb»a, and ' ' J^ '^ ' ,,,„„,„„ ,„ the class with 
 „>m" din'u-n.tU-, .,r Mie ,lnrd conjutfUU,» . ^_,^,,„^_ 
 
 samere ^'^^ 373. /,^cY^/m (/rixum, rare). 
 
 b) WITH K-MUTE BTEM.//7f7' r. U^^f?J' '^ P' '^' -"i-mV./m. 
 
 
 co(i n* re 
 
 trahfre (>*t. Irag) 
 virere (st. rif7> ^ 
 filruere (i»t. fi^ruj?) 
 
 e) WITH T-MUTE STEMS rja;/;/^r^ 
 
 quiVere 
 iniltfre 
 Jfecfere ■ 
 ■n'lfi 
 p'lti 
 uti 
 
 duxi 
 
 coxi 
 
 traH 
 
 vixi 
 
 cfa'/fd 
 jflexi 
 
 (R. 10). 
 
 J., net u III. 
 fiiti/iii. 
 'ti/irtmn. 
 ducluvi. 
 
 ttat'hiM i^nanctus), 
 coct'iin. 
 tiwiuni. 
 vict II in- 
 struct urn. 
 fparnnTn. 
 
 ClautfllTTl. 
 
 dirl<um. 
 qiKV-xiiin. 
 
 jfleruin. 
 
 7/ !;{">'. 
 t/.s?//<. 
 
 uti r.1 ;? into 1 bat form thoir per- 
 
 Ji^m. 1. The compm,nd. of W^^^l^i^^Jii'lTrfi^^^^l^ 
 
 APPENDIX YI. 
 
 371 
 
 with tho propo^itioiipp^r and ffub dropx the stem-vowel {perqere. fturgere., and the incep- 
 tive deponent e.rp^rrji^ci). lu the perfect-syjftem ihuse cu'mpuunds resume the stem- 
 vowul of tlie simple verb: 
 
 perirere 
 exper;,'ifici 
 
 perrexi 
 
 perrectnm. 
 expei rectus, 
 surrectum. 
 
 puirexi 
 
 Similarly the componrhd^j oHarere and aper^re. ; see p. 3S0 and 385. 
 
 Rt^in. 3. Stiiiquere a.« a mimjjle verb is obsolete, but it forms the compounds exstingnere 
 {ers(inxi — ex^tinctuin),aud the participle institictus. The compound dintinguere must 
 be derived Irom the verb tiiignere. 
 
 Rem. 4. Fur the compounds of legere which belonc: to the S-class, see No. 1!, R. 17. 
 
 Ji'^m. 5. Tile compounds of pun/fere (No. 15. \\. 2» likewise helont^ to the S-class (com- 
 puitH — coinpiincfutn). 'I'hus p<ingtie and parctve form tlie anteclassical perfects, panxi 
 and p<trsi, see No. 14, U. 3, and No. 15, R. G. 
 
 Jie>n. 6. Spargere in its compounds chan^jes the stem-vowel a into e, which is retained 
 in the perfect-system {conxpergere — conxpend — coiuyyersum). 
 
 /i'ln. 7. Angere (anxi) and idngere {niiixi) lack the supines. Vergere and the deponent 
 ringi lack the perfect-system. 
 
 Hem. 8. Compounds of verbs with T-miites, when they chamre the stem-vowel of the 
 simple verb, always retain the changed vowel in the perfect-sybtem, as : 
 
 coiirindere (daudere) 
 alUd-n (liedtre) 
 explodtre (plaudere) 
 ciiiicaUri^ (qii<'tti=re) 
 dtjVtUci i/utisce/'t) 
 ptrpeti (jM(i) 
 
 co»rinH 
 alilfi 
 exiUosi 
 coficu.^si 
 
 conclusum,. 
 
 airisiim. 
 
 exploxum. 
 
 concuxxam. 
 
 defe-ixus. 
 
 perjyessus. 
 
 Rem. 9. Vridere, a.< a sitnple verb, lacks the i)orfect-system, but its compounds have 
 a complete conjugation {ecddere — evdni — evdsuin). 
 
 Rem. 10. The perfect-system of the semideponent /7c^(»;'g (perf . /T-«/.<f ^/w) is poetical 
 and rare, but that (>f th(Monip()unds is Ireijuent an(l classical (a»/?/i.s'k<f. rff/fI,s^A«). Livyonce 
 uses the p rtect coiijidiruiit (44, 3). (^u 'itere. as a simple verb, forms tlie'siTPi.VE qudsxnm. 
 without havinira perlect. Uut the compounds have a complete perfect-system {concutere 
 — anicusiti ~ coiirii.t.onin. 'I'lie stem //// is found in the. inceptive /a/i.sY'er^ (to tire) and 
 its deponent comp'Hind rtifVtisri (to i;row tired). Hotli are ante- anil post-classical in the 
 present->y-te'n. but in the |)erfect -system the p.irtici pies of both \crbs {feas^un and defessus. 
 with tlie adjective nieaniiiir /i/y-t/) are fre(iuenl and classical. 
 
 Ri*!/!. 1 1. MH forms the irrei^iilar participle niri/f besides the regular nwis. The ante 
 classieal inceptive r>';7'</'///v<7-r*' (of unknown derivation) forms the perA-ct o^7?/e.ri. — The 
 perteets of iwcft/e jiiid pecfere., which are said to t)e neri or nexai, and pexi, pex'ii or 
 y>^r/7ri. rest merely on the vouchers of ancient ^nammariaus. But the supines nexum 
 and itexuin have {rood authority. 
 
 Rtui. 12. Tlie intinitive plectere belongs to two different roots, taken from the Greek : 
 1) plectere {tcXehgd) — plexi — plexmn. to braid, which is extremely rare as a simplk verb, 
 but who-e deponent coini)ounds a//i/)/rc/i aud complect i {Uy embrace) with the participle 
 —plenitt, are very fre(iuent ; i) plicteie {7t\.}/66co, st. itXify), which in good prose oc 
 curs as a deponent only with ttie passive signiticaliou * to l)e punished'. Tliis verb lacks 
 the perfect-.syslein. 
 
 neni. i;i. The verbs of the second and fourth conjugations, whose characteristics are 
 K-ML'TEs preceded by / or r, are the loilowing: algere, J'idgere, indalgTre. miilclre^ mid- 
 glre, tergere, torquhe. tnrgere. urgere.farclre (eomp. inferclre. confercire), fulclre, mrclrt. 
 They ali drop their characteristics ill the perfect and supine accordingto Ao. 17, R. 2. 
 
 'I'he verbs alglre. fuhjeii. tnrgert ami urgert lack tiie sui)ine. The supines of the other 
 verl)s, beloiiLrinL' to' this category, take the passive sign t according to No. 17, R. 1, ex- 
 cept tmdciie., which takes «■, as : 
 
 mnlclra 
 (orqi/?re 
 farrlre 
 fidc'ire 
 
 mvln 
 torsi 
 far si 
 falsi 
 
 mvlsum. 
 
 tortum. 
 fait inn. 
 fultum. 
 
 Arc^re and its compounds {coerc^e, exercere) belong to the TJ-cldss. 
 
 Rem. 14. 3) The following 23 single verbs, belonging to the S-class, have various charac- 
 teristics: 
 
372 
 
 U-CLASS. 
 
 II. Con J. 
 
 III. CONJ. 
 
 rV. CoNJ. 
 
 ardlr6 
 
 axdtre 
 
 ay(jere 
 
 ftigPre ^ 
 
 qandere (st. gavia) 
 
 J /'(be re 
 
 lilcPre 
 
 lu(f?re 
 
 manere 
 
 r'uUre 
 
 s>/(7'l?re 
 
 titdtre 
 
 gerere 
 
 'prhiieri 
 
 urere 
 
 qtieri 
 
 uinic'ire 
 
 sand re 
 
 sent'ire 
 
 se/nre {sceplre) 
 
 Tvicire 
 
 nuTiri 
 
 ord'iri 
 
 arsi 
 
 a>/xi 
 jriu'i 
 
 jussi 
 
 luH 
 
 I nan 
 
 tnanH 
 
 r'lui 
 
 »uaH 
 
 gfssi 
 
 jtrent'i 
 
 arsum. 
 
 UUKUS. 
 
 auctum. 
 
 garlfffi. 
 jtissam. 
 
 ganj't 
 een-id 
 sepxi 
 vinxi 
 
 viansum. 
 
 tturuium. 
 
 tiiesum. 
 
 gentian, 
 
 ])re<sum. 
 
 v.sfion. 
 
 quest us. 
 
 amict'im. 
 
 sanctum {sancUum). 
 
 sensum. 
 
 septum. 
 
 riiictum. 
 
 7iunsus. 
 
 orsus. 
 
 eral lor.n ausim an^t<;"«l '\['l;''f^^'''\- . „>,,,. perf.-ct-sv^tem of the pimplk verb i8 
 
 ?^ // 6</) The pcTlect fctdui i. f..uiKl in the latest Latinity. 
 
 Zl IH Ivcere f..rin. the inceptive compo,:nd iltucesr.r. - illu.d. which ,8 used ,mpe - 
 .oSy wl^rioX the deponent ccnpcund cu^^entui ^a^.e,....;, and ardtre the m- 
 tepiive compouud txardtscere ^exarsi — exarsum). 
 
 VI. U-Class. 
 
 19 The perfects of the verbs belonging to this class are formed by the 
 active sig.l /*, which is added to the unchanged consonant-stem. Ihe 
 supine is'' formed by the passive sign it. , , v , 
 
 « i T« t».o f<.iirmMncr verl)H of the U-class the PTEM is affected : gignere (t»t. gen\ 
 
 «5„.,«r« (pert. '*''''•"''':""'"'''!"";;;„ , -ner the a.mlojv of„mr<- and «rere (.up. f». 
 
 '^L ,. The P«»-e «.,, « i. .lropp«l ;.-2^.^ i^Si;:^rrif°"l-S.'"'1^^« 
 J by .ym-op... «•'P'''''" I; ''"%,^. "V^ '"'rnflWc rn^ o be a weakened CI. in wh.eli 
 [rffi'i eo:;?;,"ed'rtbr.7n,:^^'«a^t'ln ^lrH^ .n.. peuul,». for mst. the .upenatue 
 eudin" 'imus (instead of the former umus). 
 
 oQ^The following verbs constitute the U-class: 1) all verbs of the 
 second conjngationr not belonging to the classes previously mentio..ed 
 (f(mu n ' tl e"oreat majoritv of the verbs of this conjugation); 2) a j. - 
 eiv verbs derived tOnr adjectives which have a pertect system (R 0; 
 hV most verbs (Mhe third ''conjugation with liqu d characteristics; 
 4) 21 verbs of the^ tirst, third, and fourth conjugations with various 
 characteristics (R. l«i). 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 873 
 
 Fe7n. 1. The verbs of the second conjugation belonging to this class form their perfects 
 »nd t«upine8 in the following way: 
 
 deb? re 
 
 hdhere 
 
 jilact're 
 
 niervrl 
 
 poliictri 
 
 dehui 
 hahui 
 placed 
 
 debitnm. 
 
 habVum. 
 
 plantum. 
 
 m>r'itus. 
 
 poUtcitus. 
 
 The following verbs drop the i of the passive f ign 
 
 doc?re 
 
 docui 
 
 docfum,. 
 
 miiicere 
 
 rmxcut 
 
 inl-(tum (mixtum). 
 
 tenl're 
 
 teiud 
 
 tent inn. 
 
 t&rreie 
 
 tarrui 
 
 toxtum. 
 
 misereri 
 
 
 misertus or miseritus. 
 
 Pern. 2. The following verbs of the second conjuiration belonffinjr to this class are with- 
 out supines: arce?e (perf. ornn). crd/ere. caudTre. er/T-re. emunre.ffyteie. frofidere. horrere 
 laiif/uere, latere. madZre. nWre, olere. paUtre, pa'tre, riqere, rubere.sUere, sorbert, so7dere\ 
 splendtrt, ntudTre, stupire, tiimre. toriiere. tumere^ vig^re. 
 
 Hem. 8. The followini: verbs of the second conju-ration lack the whole p'Tfect-system • 
 m?re, calve re, caul re, flacclre,, Ha rere. fittere. he'iere, fnunere. immiture, livere, vmr'ere'. 
 polUre. rehidere. scatere, squalire, reger^, t/iederi. — Tin- \erh solere, as seraidepouent, 
 lacks the first cardinal lorin. Its comijouiid a^ittolere has no perfect system. 
 
 /.Vw. 4. The following' ctmipoiinds of fenere : detinere. dMinerp and j-etinlre retain in 
 the perfect their chanired vowel 'i {del'mui, etc.), but t^ke the supine of the simple verb 
 (d-ttntum). Tlie other compounds of tenere (as attitiere, abstiim'e) form no supine. 
 
 Rem. 5. The compounds dXarcere. as exercere and coercere, form not only perfects as 
 tiie simple verb, but al<o si'imnes (exerc'ifum, c(xrcitum). Of the simple verb arcereiha 
 participle arctus is formed with tlje tignitication of an au.tective (narrow). 
 
 netn.fi. Cevsere makes censui — cen-wm. The supine cenx'it'nn has no sufficient au- 
 thority (only the uu)numentuin AncvrSnum. and a pas-age in Suetonius); much less au- 
 thoniy has the supine c«//,«?^Mm. whidi occurs in a solitarv (and quoted) passage of Clau- 
 dumus, and not of the verb cen-^Pre, but of its compound recen^ere. The supine (cenmm) 
 occurs only in the form of the participle cenffux in the passive tenses, when censere in 
 usfd as a transitive verb with the in<-anini; * to assess in the census'. (Jtmen is also used 
 as a TRAN-^iTivE DEPONENT ill the meanuiir ' to profess one's propertvat the taking of the 
 census', as in Cic. Flacc. 32 (.'<ervo>i or peciiniam refisu-<i e.'<. tliou hast professed in the cen- 
 sus such a number of slaves, or such an aiionnt of money). The irie-iilar supine cen- 
 sum (instead ol re n.'i'ifu w) is explained by the original form" and the derivation oi cen^ere 
 Our <rramniarians and lexicograpliers are in great doubt al)out the derivation of this 
 word, soine relerrinir it to the Sanscrit root sa^. and some Identifving it with jiendere. 
 i lie original form of this verb evidently was centere or ceolere. which was reimlarly con- 
 jugated ceiisi — c^usum. Servius Tiillius was the first who introduced the ceirsus ; hence 
 the word could hardly have existed before his liuie, its <,riirinal meaning being unques- 
 tioiKihly connected with the teiisus. For the purpose of the new instiintion. he divided 
 the whole people ink) 'centuri<M\ consisiin-rof a hundred (centum) members each. From 
 this must havespruiiir the expression ^ centlre populuni' (to hundred' the people). From 
 the rc'.'ular supine of this new verb (m^..vww) the noun ctmus\\\\(\ the verb c.^/m?;v- were 
 di-nvi'd, the latter of which kept its original supine (as for instance tlfere keeps the su- 
 pine r«.NV////()f its primitive rhRre). 'i'his derivation, which is extremely probable in it- 
 sell, is eontirmed by the form ot the sui>ine c^/*wwi, wliich cannot be explained in any 
 other way but by assuming that a T-muie was dropped before the s. 
 
 The compounds of centere are percemZre (lackin^j: the supine); recensere (not in 
 C ic.and Cas.). the supine of which has as «rood as no authority (see above) ; and sue 
 r<'/*.v<-/¥. which has the same supine as cemere (succenmm) and as succendere. and hence 
 cannot be distin<:uislied from the latter verb in the supine. Perhaps surcensere has noth 
 ing to do with cemT-re. but is a corruption from yuccendere. its meanini: (to be inflamed 
 y II 1 an-en pointing nitiier to the root ceml than to ceusere. Succendere would then be 
 in the same relation to succemlre (.mc^-endlre) h^pendere to pendere; jacere to jacere. 
 
 Jier/i."!. The following inchontives derived from adjectives behmg to this class: 
 crtbrescere (with its compounds iiia-ef/resrere and peraebresce-e (perf. trebrui), durescere 
 \Mtii Its compound ofjdurescere (perf. obdurui), evan^scere., innotescere. mxicrescere.,ma- 
 lurescere, nigiesceie, obmutescere, obsurdescere, recrudescere, vilescere, evUescere. 
 
 ce 
 
374 
 
 U-CLASS. 
 
 Nono of those form a s.rxxB. The other inceptives, derived from a.lj.ctivcs. lack the 
 
 ^^^;^is:;j:::;i.aHan..rue......i^^^ 
 
 v..rh ruhTre. t ho root of uh,ch ^« ^•;:^' .^' '^^: 't\;\^,u al u'v ot ^rvmc.r. (^y^O, viacre^eere 
 
 and nw noun ^•"*'';-;.7, ; fj;;;:^' ; die ulc ly i favor of c,r6,-..c.r.. 
 
 (macer) and tugtescereiuKjH) \^ decuituiy im .a rh-irartcristics. helonijhm to 
 
 The n.,ow1.,^:r2so verh. ^ro.^r^^J^^^ [-fi/Sr^/I^^^^/J^^;^ 
 t„r th,. f,.nn s« (i"st. of »n). 1 l.i- 1 rM - "-'Wi. ;« ■» «-^ J, ^, „„. ^^^,,,,,, 
 
 ;srViVi.c'c„^;;;« ia,;,„„;o;-;uu, u; 00.«^.™.«- .>wi"i;;:y____^^_,_,, ,„„,„»,.„«. .we 
 
 
 /,^ Jr., rnnv/... secare. sorulre, '^^:;^:^^^'Xi-'n^^^^^ '^^' '"^'- -^ oritur), and 
 
 ?rr,^<f"s;':c',an;!' ;i,'r,iL;;s7rJ";J;[";'[he '^:^ ...„rou.h,y c.xha,.,c.a., i- 
 
 classical. 
 
 .h..^;;;;;?;;::S;'Sn^'rf,?i:^x,in^ Ki;;;^i;r ; .,:^. Ao...er occu« ou,y ■.. .o.„c d. 
 
 ArrENDIX VI. 
 
 375 
 
 J?^. 17. A perfect of the Pimple verh sapere is not fonnd in claspical lanmia^re In 
 anlc-(ia88ical authors we mostly find the vowel-perfect w/.Td (w;?w^€) bnt ace ,rd^^^ 
 ly.sc an w/m also was fornuMl. Of the con.po.iu.l re^^^ipere Cic to fot'in. t le ncM-fect ^^-^^ 
 />/r/._biit in the <,ther ,,assages M'here the word i. found, the reX "^ yaries betw^^^^^^ 
 rti^jni {resipiri) and renpui. ^^^num^ vanes oetween 
 
 l^lwart-imphcafuvK with e(,nal authority. Of api^icare and «pWrVCiVeroiUes thl 
 vowel-fonns (,a./>/tr</i'._^^rfie,7/*/;/^); Out the consonant formf(xfTcvi-eLH^fu^^^^^^ 
 a >o are snstained by jr„od authority. Of cofnplicare and r^^>/^ca>/ he perS svsa n 
 rarely occurs, and hardly bofore tlie silver a-e. See p. 3(il, R. 3 perieci sysitm 
 
 Hem. 19. Of the verbs mentioned Rem. 1.3. the following form their Puoinos with tho 
 passive sip Mnstead of it: /Hrnre (sup. Mctuw), secare isectmm'en^relmt^^^^^^ t e 
 compounds of parere (.apertum etc.), oriri {ortus):rapere (raptum) y^ritctum), the 
 
 a^^e^^Z^^^^^t:^"''''"' ^"'"^ the perfect n;;».i and the supine r.,, to, aa 
 
 Jiem. 21 Of 7»elere Cato according to Priscian used the perfect meomi which is twice 
 fo.n.i ,n .Nhunertiu. G,ai. Act. c. t>2. The perfect of meterh^ -enerallf cipre«^t bv tho 
 phrase m.^...m.Ad Tho perf. ^/.r///i of ^/eWer^ rests on the testimonyot^Priscian ^nd 
 on the coxupound desterlui, which once occurs in Persius. riscian, ana 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF THE CARDINAL FORMS OF THE 
 
 PERFECT-SYSTEM. 
 
 . {^Compounds are not jriven in alphabetical order, except if the simple verb is not 
 Ti.r,!:^."/""" "' "." ^■V'"l'"""^'. V*»»!'! "«" «"^ily '>e lound by moans of the^ sit^ple form 
 lie >st forms after the infinitives are the prestaits : the secnd forms are the perfect* 
 a.,d the thud forms the supines. Of cieponents. in place ()f the perfects and sup fer^^^^^^^^ 
 porect participles are ^nven. Wherever a blank line is found in the regular place of a 
 ..;; l!*""'v '"'"^"^ "'■■'' "'r"^ lormsdo not occur. Forms in brackets hSve no suthciont 
 hor ty torn.. ,n parentheses have less authority than the preceding <.nos with.M.t a 
 h . ff r; nV r "" '•^•f^-'-^'"^'<;^<i''"ote the pa-es and numbers of the observations where 
 the diflorent forms are explained. «ucie 
 
 AMerf, abdo, jibdtdl, abdttum, sec nlr/ere, al^reo, aisi, — , p. 371 R. 13 
 
 d(fre. 
 uholere {ahtlcHcere), aboleo, abolCvi 
 
 (abolui), abolttum, p. 3()3, 7; 'm\,Amicire, 'aniicio fumicui, amixi], 
 ^> ^- amir.tiim 379 
 
 nlDcere, ulltcio, allexi, allectum. p. 
 3G9, 17, R. 2. 
 
 ^' ^- I amictum, 37^, 
 
 ahsrouderc, abscondo. ab.scondi [ah-amplecti, anii)lector, amplexus p 
 
 scoudldi), abscouditum, p. 3Gr), R. 371, R. 12. ' 
 
 '^•„ . nngere, aiigo [anxi], — , p. 371, R. 7. 
 
 «nj(7V,acuo, acui, acutum, p. 3Gl,G,^p6^ri/'<?, apcrio, aperui, apertum, p. 
 
 •>•„ I 3Go, R. 9. 1- > F 
 
 addere, addo, addTdi, addltum, p.api.sci, apiscor, aptus, p. 3G6, R. 19. 
 
 3G.), R. 7 ; .see du>-e. I Coiiip. adipisci, adipiscor, a'deptus! 
 
 (iaoWre,^ adoleo, adolevi, adultiini,V/mV^, arceo, arcui [arctuin, artum], 
 
 p. 3G7, 7. j p. 373, R. 2. Comp. exercere, ex- 
 
 (uiulPHcere,^ adolesco, adolCvi, adul- erceo, exercui, exercitiim, etc. 
 . ij"», p. 3G2, 7. arceHsere, arcesso, arcesslvi', arcessl- 
 
 ((g<'r(\ ^iro, e<ri, actum, p. 365, R. 11. turn, p. 3G1. G, 3. 
 
 Compounds : abigere,'A\)\<^ct, abCi,n, nrdere, ardeo, arsi, arsum, p. 372. 
 
 abactum, etc. — Amblyere forms 110 arere, aruo, — , — , p. 373, R. 3. 
 
 perlect-.s\'stem. drescere, aresco, — , — . Compoiuid ; 
 
 e^rarexcere, exaresco, exarui, — . 
 
 -, ajo(ait)— p. 242, 11. , .___,,_,..„ 
 
 J.'^\ '?]^' ^^"^' ^^^^"^ (airtum), \:>.arguere, arguo, ar<'ui fari^u 
 3'4, R. 9. I 361,6,5. 
 
 lunij, 
 
 P- 
 
 rivaiive words iimuUare.dtsultonus etc.). 
 
376 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 LIST OF PERFECTS AND SUPINES. 
 
 377 
 
 ,v 1 oni siicconsnm (but see p. 373, R. 
 
 asrnidere, see scandere. ] s^i, ^^^^^ ^ ^ recensere lack 
 
 a.rf.|r., audeo, ausus sum; p. 249,, 0).^ ^^^^^^isitum (in late 
 
 a.|;r^.%ugeo,auxi,auclum;p.372.^J ^^^^.^ ^^.^^^^^^ ^^^^^.^ 
 
 6a^^^-(battuere), batuo, batui, -yjf^^^^^^^ln; p. 301,0.3. 
 p. 361.0, o. 7? 4 5-nl Comp.:^''''-<''^^^'ci'>('''^'*'*^y'^^^'^'?^' 
 30.), i^. 11. ^ _. oAi ^nnri,-i'o.nnc\eolrnrii\yconcio),C(m' 
 
 blbl 
 
 rAdere, ciido, c5ci(li, cSsum ; p. 304, 
 /e 4 Compomuls: decidi're, docldo, 
 ^](»(.Y^]i^__; (?ccl(^tVe, occldo, occldi, 
 
 occclsum. 
 c<e(ZtVd, cfedo, cecldi, cfesnm Com 
 
 'c<;/<r</r, coiicieo (rarely concio), con- 
 civi, concltum (Lucr. 2, 207); see 
 
 p. 362, 13. 
 
 cinqh-e, cm<40,cmxi, cmctum ; p. dOJ, 
 
 17, R. "" 
 
 the reduplicatmn: oce^do >^cl^'' ^'^'^'j^'^^'^^')/ o/ Comp. : amdwiere 
 occIsu,n, p. 309, No. 1^,R ^- ^'^^^J^^ conclasum) ; p. 371, 
 
 cdlere, caleo, calm, — ; p. 3 < 3 K. -. t ic. ^c 
 
 ca^/^rd, calleo, callui, - ; P- ^ ' '^' ^^' ^^ /^^,; elepo, clepsi. cleptum ; p. 
 
 »a„,i,V«, only in compoumU ^^''^^'''''^'^^jj "^ IJo.r-'-tn'relv rf«?/A 
 clia,>t;e a into e : tncendere.mcxu- /^ »""'-j.^ ,.„ ,, ( nelj-ius. inclitus) 
 
 -^ie. ... Inceptive : <..*.e.1r., can, Ms.. - cU>MC,d .t> le.___^^ _ ^ „^^_ 
 «<i«a"ri.t"o -."^ ; p. ".73. /J. 3. 1 li. n. .lc.«i.>., ».«)ZeV., without 
 
 ""fi ^:;ni:;!:;!;r:;;s^^n:e«;;r'^<Bpio (..u.d., -pi. c»p. 
 
 rTno concluui, -, p. 30r), R. 8. turn ; p. 309, R. 3. 
 
 ie 11 Comp.: ampere, accTpio, cM^;^/-., 0050, cop^^i coactum, see 
 ucclpi, .uT.ptum, ,). 305, R 12. «r/^r., and p. 30.,, /e. 12. ^ ^ 
 
 (w;)r.ysr'r<3, capesso, capesslvi, — ; p 
 
 301, 0, 3. . * ,. 
 
 carpere, carpo, carpsi, carptum ; p 
 
 309. 17. Comp.: decerpere, decerpsi, 
 
 decerptum. 
 cdcere, caveo, cSvi, cautum ; p. 36.J, 
 
 R 11 
 c^rf;^/r. cCdo, cessi, cessum; p. 370, 
 
 17, H. 2 
 
 comere, cOmo, compsi, comptum ; 
 
 see emere, p. 3(»0. R. 10. 
 commiiiisci, comiiiiniscor, commen- 
 
 tiis ; see mcmim. 
 comperlre, comprMio, comperi, cv^ra- 
 
 pertum ; p. 305, R. 9 ; see parere.^ 
 conciipixcere, conciipisco, coucuplvi, 
 
 concupilum ; p. 361, 0, 3 ; see cu- 
 
 pPre. 
 
 J,^V"only in ti.e co,„pou,>d ,....^U.^. condo, conanli. condU.ttn ; 
 
 .„';"!:fc:,C"censni. censum ; p. U'l-^-p coquo. coxi, coctum ; p. 3C9, 
 a «"3, R. 0. So succensere, succen-' 17, U. w. 
 
 crehrescere, crebresco, crebriii. — n 
 
 credere, credo, crcdidi, cr5ditum; p.divldere, d 
 365, i?. 7 ; see dare. | 309 17 
 
 2. Compounds retain the redupli- 
 cjition {edidici) ; p. 308, R. 3. 
 
 divide, divisi, divlsum : p. 
 
 "'''/^rv/'ilP''' ^'"^i'^'' crepitimi ; p.docere, doceo, docui, doctiim; p. 373. 
 cresrh-e cresco. crSvi, cretum ; p\ddmdre, domo, domui, domttum ; p. 
 
 ^"^;fV^^"'^^^"^cubitum;p.374,UJ;-;,drico, duxi, ductum; p. 369, 
 11. 16. 17 R 2 » 1 " * 
 
 ci/^Z^^Trj' cudo [cadi, cusi], [cusum], dw re-ic^^V^rduresco, durui, - ; p. 373 
 
 edere {to eat), ^do, edi, Gsum ; p. 364, 
 No. 11 ; ib. No. 9, R. 3. The su- 
 pine is anteclassical and rare ; but 
 the participle obesus (of ohedere) 
 frequently occurs, aIthoii<rh not in 
 classical prose. From ^dere the 
 desiderative eaurlre (to be hungry), 
 without a perfect, is formed. 
 
 -cu/n/)ere, only in compounds : pro- 
 cnmbo, procubiii, procubltum (tak- 
 i!i,ij: the conjugation of cubdre): p. 
 372, i^. ]. " * 
 
 cupere, c\i\no, cujnvi, cupltum. 
 (Comp. incept.: concupiscere, cou- 
 ciiplvi etc.); p. 361, 6, 3. 
 
 307, No. 14 Compounds partly edere (lo give out), edo, edtdi, edl- 
 keep the reduplication (excucurri, turn ; see dare, p 365 R 7 
 pra3cucurri), partly drop it (accur-«V^/'^, eireo, egui, —• p 37;i 72 2 
 ri, decurri etc.) ; p. 307, R. 2. | Cmpr:mdig%'e/mdireo indl-ui - 
 dare do. dCdi. datum, p. 304, R. ^! emere] 6mo, emi', emptum (emtum)* 
 rHe comp. with mcmosyllabics p. 365, /^. 11. Compounds chan4 
 take dere in the inlinitive, dUi:^ e into I: adhmre, adlmo, ade.ni, 
 m the perfect, and ditum m the ademptum ; p. 360, R. 16 Irreir- 
 siipine: comUre, condldi, condl- ular compounds: rf.^;A.^^r^, ';?;.o/;^e4 
 tum: od/ir/^/-^, vendidi, venditum; sumere, comere. belon^^incT to S- 
 
 class. Coetnere keeps Ihe'i in the 
 present system. 
 
 credere, credldi, creditum. Poly- 
 syllal)ic compounds follow the sim- 
 ple verb: circuuiddre, c\rcumditd\,^emmere, see manere 
 circumdatum ; p. 364, R. 6 ; p. 365, eo, see Ire. 
 
 ^- '^- ^««^, sum, fni, — (verbal adj. futUr. 
 
 see rus); p. 361, 6,5; p. 362, 22. 
 exercere, see arcere. 
 expergiaci, see regere. 
 p. exolescere, see olere. 
 
 [exuere, exuo, exui, exQtum; 
 
 dedere, dedo, dedidi, dedltum ; 
 
 dare, p. 365, R. 7. 
 de/endere, see fendere. 
 delere, dcleo, dGlCvi, deletum : 
 
 301, 6, 2. 
 
 deiiiere, dOmo, dempsi, demptum ; 
 
 ^HQ emere, p. 360, R. 16. 
 depsere, depso, depsui, depstum ; p. 
 
 374, R.Q. ' ^ 
 
 dtlvendere, see scandere. 
 di'sciscere, see Kciscere. 
 d'u'ere, dico, dixi, dictum; p. 369. 
 
 17, 7?, ^ 
 
 o 
 
 6,5. 
 
 evdnescere, evanesce, evanui. 
 373, R. 7. 
 
 fdcere, fdcio, feci, factum ; p 
 
 11. For the change of the stem- 
 vowel a into I, see p. 106, R. 4, 
 and p. 359. The compounds that 
 retain the stem-vowel are conju 
 
 p. 301, 
 
 — ; p. 
 
 805, R. 
 
 A-j- ^ i.,w ,., . ,., X. Kvi.i luc sicui-vowei are coniu- 
 
 iln'l' *-"'''^^' dilexi, dilectum ; see gated like the simple verb. Those 
 
 that change a into i, make feci. 
 
 du 
 
 Icqere. 
 
 'cere, disco, dldlci, — ; p. 368, R. 
 
 fecium {interjlcere, interflcio, in 
 
378 
 
 ArrENDIX YI. 
 
 qp-. 72 1 conflictnm ; but 7)W^W profligavi, 
 prrf. subj. face,sens <'^-;:^ %^^H J^^^,,, j^ classical lan-ua-e: /#> 
 
 •^ 14. Compouna njdlere taU-^f^ l"^ as Aoun ^/Z*/x^/« as acljective); p. 
 
 feia, ^vitlH>ut a supine ; p. o(). , A- - as n , 
 firlre, tarcio, tarsi t^^^;;;}?,;.^^/^;^: ^ ^/Wio fodi, Ibssum ; P- 364, 
 
 17 0. Compounds: co/^/t^ ctre, '^-/^^'^, . -,^'7? 3. p. 30D, /^. H. 
 
 fersi, contersum) ; \'' ^'hJ\\.i; oK^vPre foveo, fovi, ft>tuin; p. 364, 
 uteri, rateor. fassus ; p. ^'^^ '.{^.t/'^ /'l ; p. 365. 7?. H. 
 Compound: defetisci ck-tL^iscoi, /m ./t/^, i". - '^^^s change a 
 
 308 1. 1. Compounds change a 
 into i, resunfmg in perfect and 
 s miue the vowel of the snnple 
 
 n- v&yW^^7^/-^ intV^.i, infractijm). 
 
 .c.Jrenure, tVemui, tVemllum ; p. 3.4, 
 
 fdleri 
 
 fdtiiiC . 
 
 Compound: </</* ^^ 
 
 defessus; p. 3.0, 1|, U- - 
 /ard/-^ tiiveo, tavi, tautum ; p. 3bo, 
 
 .f//t?lr6 (obsol.). Only iu the com- 
 
 ^ pounds defendere and <^/^/^<^<'''^(;V:> ^ 
 lendo, dctendi, defeusum) ; P- '^^*' ..f,;,;^;^ f,endo, -, — The an- 
 i^-5- .>,.o 10 *^ cient grammarians mention the 
 
 ^■^roclre, terocio, — , — ; P- ;J^:':/'"^,, ..(^'7 /^» 5. 
 rre fero. tidi, latum ; aujerre, ah- ?^ '/': ^ ^,.^(,,,1 frictum or fn- 
 
 Lmu: a..mt»,n ; f - (f '^[i^^^il^i^Ta 1, b^ni. su;".'.',. rare) ; p. 374. 
 Imlovvs the pertect ot ..u.^.M^/-^- .i'^f \ j te\oUl), frlgeo. -, -- ; 
 
 /J.'/i flo, factus ; p. 365. 72. 13. 
 iweve ftgo, tixi, tixum; P- 3.>», y 
 yf;//;.. tiado, ftdi (inst. ot tiftdO, 
 
 tissum ; p. 368, if ^- ^^ 
 
 p,.;h-^ tingo, tinxi. Actum; p. 3.0, 
 
 iliccere, flacceo, — ,— ; P-iZf' V\f 
 Jiai^ere, tiaveo, — . — ; P- 3"^» ^^- ^^ 
 fled re, tlecto, flexi, flexum ; p. 3. J, 
 
 fleet 
 17. 
 
 ji 
 fi 
 
 verb anifciassn^iii, .-> - - 
 
 p,mmls classical ■«»;«.»". coutl.M, 1^ 
 
 stateiiiciu 1)1 iyn.i..>""- . _ 
 
 froiidire. froudfo, fioiidm, — , P- 
 
 JJhlnoT [fnictus «r fn.n.is Loth 
 ^'postclassic.1]. Froi (like *r«..« 
 kml rtiiere, p. 370, 7^. 4, 1) us tie 
 c,.ns-< nantic sl.'m frag, whid. ap- 
 ,M-ar. in the nouns //'"^ ( n.u' s , 
 lin.l fruclus, ami lUe ludecliiialilc 
 
 //v;"tragio, fngi,-;P.3C3,folU 
 
 ■'7J.3-, p.:i«3.f,llv.., 3G9, 
 
 17. „ .,,., r> ■> fKteire iilcio, fulsi, folumi; p. 30», 
 
 'X^ a^i^eclaTsic;;?; ,„^"1.1^.^".-/"^/.--.. fflgco, luls,. _ ; p.o.l. iu 
 
 LIST OF PERFECTS AND SUPINES. 
 
 379 
 
 fundere, fundo, fQdi, fusum; p. 368, 
 
 J-i. 1. 
 
 fn^fji, fungor, functus ; p. 370, 18 
 iNo. 1. ' 
 
 furere, furo, - _. Defective in 
 several forms of the present sys 
 
 tern occurs wim (Cic). The foiTns 
 ^cerain, icera.% wistis, are eitlier 
 quoted by ancient granmiarians, 
 or rest on conjectures. Tlie parti- 
 ciple ictus very frequently occurs 
 in all periods of tiie language. 
 
 ^"SS^^S-y-" <-'-'^;it^^^.vi.-, , sat. 
 
 on, 11. a. Inceptive coinpoundiWfre inrlo inrlT.l! i„ i-. 
 J.m., ggro, gessi. gestutu; p. 370,. ^^^.v; induo, indui. indutum; p. 
 
 Uie ;a:k.n';- 1;± 'a,„.^ ^t^f' T '"■" ' ...T-'-uPlne is only iifi-n-ed 
 
 the present system, anteclassiial. 
 Varro, U. K. 2, 6, ;j , Lucr. 3. 434, 
 
 from the late Latin noun induU 
 turn. See p. 369, 17, ^. 1 
 
 ^.^ sevei-a. in^ta.^ ^Ca^^;Ze^ ^Z^,^, ^^,^^ ,, 
 gimre (antJcl ) .r]Qbo Pnm r.''f^ff''^^''^'/""^^"'' — J P- 373, 7?. 7. 
 
 {:;:i4i;l?';ir3''''^^^-"'^"^ 
 
 of -d :'s.. postclall" anttCr' -Tt?' rf^™^'^"' '"^ ''^^^-' 
 ro). See j) 3G<) 17 /? o - ' '• ' "' ^- 
 
 ?.4 g,.adi!.r,t4iv,s'f ; 3C5, ijfsr'^"'"' "■""'• p-3«i'«'i=p- 
 
 to e: confjredi, congrSdior, con- 
 gressus ; p. 366, U. 18. 
 -gruere, only iu comi>()unds {conr/ru- 
 ere coxvj:vxio, cougrui), — ; p. 361, 
 6, 5 ; p. 362. 20. 
 
 /iovvr^, haereo, ha'si, hapsum ; p. 369 
 iNo. 16. ' 
 
 '''''wiy't''-'^'"*'''' ^^^"^'' baustum; p 
 369, ^o. 10. ^ 
 
 J't\^t7-6?, hebeo, — , _ ; p. 373^ 7^ 3 
 
 horrere, horreo, horrui, — ; p. 373, 
 
 /I. i. 
 
 hamPre (poet, and postclass.). humeo 
 
 _—, — ; p. 373. II. 3. 
 
 ^<^/'e (to strike), a defective verb 
 
 compounds generally drop the V 
 
 in the perfect. 
 irrauciacere, see ravlre. 
 J'^^^^re jado, jcci, jactum ; p. 365, 
 
 K. 11. Ihe intransitive jacere (to 
 
 lie) is regular {j'lcui, jacttum). 
 
 eomp. : conjicere, conjcci, coniec- 
 
 tum, etc. ; p. 365, K 12. 
 ^\^.-;r jiibeo, jussi, jussum ; p. 370, 
 
 *^''K''"i ~-^'l??r' J"°'^^' junctum ; p. 
 309, Iv, 7?. 2. 
 
 jumre, juvo, jQvi, jutum ; p. 365, R 
 ^jUDene^rh'e, juvenesco. juvc^nui, 
 
 <l<>"l.tful. whether bHon.in<: tor TT^^^ Juvenesco. juvc^uni. 
 
 <^eu!: -ul^l.!- ;;--^. 2''^^ '4- ^^? » - "^ -e 
 decided." Pekf . • s jp ^L^' f '-'"' l'''' ^ ^*>'^^teral form Idba {Id- 
 
 U'i (pass infi Oft... J'l''V' ~~' ~~! '^ verb, assumet by 
 U)a.s. ml). Ot the perl, sys- Festus, to explain the compounds 
 
380 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 LIST OF PERFECTS AND SUPINES. 
 
 381 
 
 n IhJ intensive form to^^r^ ('^-|,- f^V,. riucreo liixi, -; P- 372, 7^. U. 
 
 301, 0, 3. supine luctum. 
 
 Sr-.^1 la^ii. l-un, com /«4 U.0, lui, - (-V-mtuu,) ; P- 30. 
 
 p,„„uK lake *• elKKrc, ellsi, «»-|„J,";.^,,,,,,_„„.eresco, macrui,-; p. 
 sum; p. oil, it. o. i .,^ ,. r- 
 
 ^,,.7.^.., laml>(>, iambi -;v>. 3(^/^.0 1-^^^^ ^^^^^^^i^ _. p. 373, 
 
 laiiffffPcf, laugueo, langui, , i^Y 7V2. 
 
 272, it. I. . ,«„ p 2.7n(vrere,\y^^^^(^> — » — ' P» 373, A- o. 
 
 ^''i;;'i!;;lvf <;..m"'.»ml'<W«c;««. ■^l-,;;;;;^^;-;;,^;*;,^, „,,„.u (vcy rare). 
 
 p. bO.) /v. |1. „ 372. 7»M4. C.Hupoumls. < 
 
 legere, le-o, Ic-i. lectum ; p. oHo, ii 
 1 1 The comp. allifjere, pmfi'f/ere, 
 reiegere, keep the stem- vowel .> 
 The other compounds generally 
 (•han«'-e the stem-vowel into I, but 
 
 ,^ mansum ; p. 
 
 37'^ Jl 14 romi)oun(ls. itninere, 
 eintueo, emTnui, -; imminere 
 (without a perteei system); perma- 
 nere and ;r//*r/Ai^/r. like the simple 
 verb {penmaixi etc.). 
 
 
 f/l(Xi neqU'clHrn); p. 3(.(>, li. W. 
 Zi/;!-rt% libel, Itbuit or Itbttmn est 
 
 p. 373, 11. 7. 
 mt^^Z^^/v. me.leor, -; P- '^'^'/^t 
 
 ■nuM\.,><,.m'"ti.c,'r, 1 n.. ,1KUU») " ''•':^, _ ,^e<.pt in the 
 
 is a re"iil:ir peiaonal veil). 
 Uiiere, lino, llvi or ICvi. Ittum ; p. 
 
 301 (), 2. Compounds: tanti'n, 
 
 illCvi. iUItuin. So collinere and d<J- 
 
 r//idA*^ (williout pert'.). 
 Zi/KA'/v, lingo, -, Imclum ; p. 30J, 
 
 i7, i^. 2 
 
 no present system, except in the 
 inceptive compounds commini.sct 
 and /v/yrj/aV/. The supine 7/*.'/^- 
 tum occurs only i" the compound 
 c<wnninUn (I'KRF.; commentus 
 ifttjN); p. 304, 11,</. . 
 mrrf/h-e, merino, mersi, mersum ; p. 
 
 a/!^:;^/e.'linquo iKpd, lictum ; p.^ JOt) 1;;;^^; ^ ^^^^,,,„, . ^. 372, 7^. 
 ;/08, Jl 1. 'Hie simple ^^'\^ V^^^'l " ..j-^let , ,^,.s,/M>ccurs in qii<>- 
 
 i„ ,l,e simple verb,resls on ^>™'"-| !;;j;.;-/,;6,,„;, ,„en>i. - (metuU..n, 
 
 Ue. wUh il. cuiupouud cM,,ae^ ^ Javl, 'limu'amm ; p. 301, it. 3; 
 scire, coUiqui. ^.^ yj ^g 15, 
 
 livere, llveo, — , — ; P- 3(3, ii. d. I p- 0-1, 
 
 arjnoscere, and cognos^cere form tlie 
 suj)ines agiiUum and cognitinn. 
 Tlie other compounds follow the 
 simple verb, p. 302, 10. 
 
 f»i?;2.7(-><?(mPjgre),mingo,minxi,minc-;zI^; nitor, nisus (nixus) ; p 309 17 
 
 tuni and miclum ; p. 309, 17, 7?. 2 ; 370, No. 18 ; 371, 7^.' 11.' ' 
 
 . • r- . ... nivere (obsol.). Coinp. : con?iivere, 
 
 mf^^n'?'^,mmuomxmu,mmmum;Y). connlveo. -, _. The ancient 
 
 . !' I), .) ; p. 30,, ^w. j grammarians variously state the 
 
 mi.'^rere, misceo,^ miscui, mistum or^ pvr feci to he co?inlvi, connixi, con- 
 
 mixtuni ; p. 372, 7i?. 1. //^X without vouchers. 
 
 mixeren, niisereor, misertus (misert- nolle, see vdle. 
 
 tiis) ; p. 373, 7^. 1. noscere{\\\^i.i)^ gnoscere). iiosco, novi. 
 
 mitkre innu)^ misi, missum ; p. 370, ndtum ; p. 301, 0, 4. The comp. 
 
 1 <, 7t. 2. i - ' 
 
 7)wler(\ molo, molui, moirtum ; p. 374 ' 
 
 R 9. 'i 
 
 vionh're, mordeo, momordi, morsum ; 
 
 p. 30<, No. 14. nuher'e, nubo, uiipsi, uuptum : p. 309, 
 
 vwn {moriri, anted.), morior, mor-| 17, 7^. 2. ^ > t- , 
 
 l-\^^ /i^o^'*^^ ^^^^^' ^'^^^'^'"^^'«•'') J Pv-'*^/<^/''^, oniy in compounds (^TiTiwere, 
 
 6iA,J,.d j annuo, annul,— ); p. 302, 20. Nu- 
 
 nunure, mdveo, movi, motum ; p.' ^^<? occurs as a noun. 
 
 30.), 7^. 11. phlivisci, obliviscor, oblltus ; p. 301, 
 
 wi?//r<v'^, mulceo, mulsi, mulsum ; p.| 0,3. 
 
 3< 1 , U. 13. obmiVeHcere, obmutesco, obmutui, — ; 
 
 wnlgnr, nuilgeo, mulsi, — (mulctum,' p. 373, 7^. 7. 
 
 \ AKiio). ^ ohi<olesre>r,see olPre. 
 
 w?m.v<5,.^(llje simple verb only in the ob.surdesce re, obsurdesco, obsurdui 
 
 Glos-s. ^ Phdox.). Compound: — ; p. 373, 7?. 7. 
 
 emungh-e, emungo. emunxi, 6»cr^n^V^, occulo, occului, occultum • 
 
 emuncium; p. 309, 17, 11 2; p. p. 374, 7i». 9. 
 
 '^'^.' \^- . [Mere], [odio], ddi, osum ; p. 309, R. 
 
 7ja//ct."<a,nanciscor, nactus (uanctus); 4. 
 
 p. 370. 17, R 2. \;:,ler€ (to smell), 61eo, olui, — ; p 373 
 
 w^wt, nascor, natiis; p. 301, 0, 1. | 7^. 2. > ' i ^. 
 
 ninire, neco, neciTvi (rarely nernr), -olere (to grow); onlv in the com, 
 
 necatum ; but eneMre, eneco [ene- pounds (tholere (abolescere) achMe^ 
 
 ctti, poslcl. ; enecdri,}inmc\.], enec- 
 tum (eneciltnm, anted.) ; p. 374. R 
 b"). Collateiiil forms : eniclre and 
 r/u'cdci (jintecl.). 
 
 nectere, necto, nexui (rarely next), 
 nexum ; p. 309, 17. 
 
 neglujf're (neglf-gere), see legere. 
 
 f<cere{i\do]^n'),ob.solef<cere and exole- 
 scere. Abolere, abolCvi, abolitum ; 
 adolescere, adolevi, adultum ; ohxo- 
 lescere, obsolSvi, obsolGtum ; exo- 
 lescere, exolCvi, exoletum. See p. 
 301, 0,2; p. 302,7. 
 open re, see parere. 
 
 nere,nvo^ nCvi, n5Lum (poet.,postd.) ; oportere, oportet, oportuit, — . 
 
 p. 301, 0, 2. oppei'iri, see parere. 
 
 -nidere, only in the comp. miJ^^r^.v^/YHn', ordior, orsus ; p. 372 7? 14. 
 
 reni(kM)(ilieperf.?e/j/VZ^/MS quoted ()H/7, orior, orltis (verbal adi. mVil 
 
 in aioss. Phih,x.) ; p. 373, R 3. | run) ; p. 374, 7^. 13. 
 nmrescere, nigresco, nigrui, — ; \)pf1rhn\ see panr/ere. 
 
 drj, R 7. pallere, palh-o, pallui, — ; p. 373. R. 2 
 
 iT'X'o'"°^^' "'"^'^' ""' P- 309. yv7/?r^V^pando,pandi,passum (rare. 
 .,/' ^^ .^- ly pansum) • p. 307, IL 5. 
 
 nilere, niteo, nitui, — ; p. 273, 7?. 3. pangere, pango, peptgi, pactum ; p, 
 
H 
 
 382 
 
 APPENDIX \^. 
 
 LIST OF PERFECTS AND SUPINES. 
 
 383 
 
 J .. 1 otxiu 1? li i>iusuni). , ,- 
 
 IS tormed ; p. dbS, h. 0. | , . j ^^e suspended), pen- 
 
 7).i/-c^^0- The verbal adj. ?>rt/'««/-f^.j 
 occurs in Livy and Suelomus and 
 varcitfirux in Pliny; p. S(u It. .5 
 ■u,. . 1 ,,...t_r>iic*u';ii com 
 
 14 Compounds without redupli- 
 cation {(h'peiuln'c, dependi, dei)en- 
 sum) ; p. oiu, n. '•'• 
 
 pareitura. in Pl.ny ; p. f». '^■^ ' "'AuihZ^'' o sr.spcml), p.-n.lo, 
 
 pounds compurcre and repxrcrn 
 in the latest Lalinity also .v//i/>6'r- 
 
 pei>endi, peusum ; j). d07, ^o. i-i. 
 Compounds without redupliealion. 
 
 Imnerl^re occurs onlv in Pluutus. I see rf.//-^. 
 
 Ji. 4. iiu t,()in|>"uiiw ,. ■ . ^,, I ^-,,.^ romnesco, eompescui, — ), p- 
 
 into K dropping the mli.phcali , f '«, f'""!"- < . j „.|,^.„,^., 
 
 bnt tV-nning tl.eir Pr''»^'" .f »";'. t t:,,f; L ui. nt -at with pasefn. 
 
 also forn.s ,v,;)«-l("». Tl.e ^'.i'H>>;i ?•-•'••. \';^^;;,;; ,^,„i, ,,ia„sum. 
 
 peritk which is.only ..sed as a. ^ «W' ' <;. , ,,,„,,, ^xplO- 
 
 a,lj.'Ctivc (expeneuced). Seep. ^!;^J'^-;-,(„„„„ . „. ;iTl. /J. 8. 
 ;,a''^;'(;o-*-o„ey), pareo, _par„i, y«.V.^(.o^s,rike), plec.o, -. - ; P 
 
 ^ (;«,•-.<»»>«.< and ?«'•./«'■«,, 1'»^'- ,:;'l;./V:r'b.-aia), plecto [plexi] 
 
 classical). /■.-.; 
 
 ??a/vre (to be evident), pSrei it is cm 
 
 plertere (to"" braid), plecto [plexi], 
 [plexum]. The compounds are 
 
 dent , — , — ("^t.a i i jui '^' '^ mwukcti comp exus ; p. 3« I, if. l-i- 
 
 g«ag. in the l'r>^l»''i"' ?' " 't i .../T/^m Iv in c.In.pon.uls: .<»«;,(«■<■. 
 
 ©a.^C()/-d, pasoo, pavi, pastum; p. dOi, 
 patere, pateo, patui,— ; P-i);'^' {^ \ 
 
 .nZ6/-f,only in compounds: comjdot, 
 compleo, complGvi, complGium. 
 So implore, explore, deplore etc. 
 
 patere, paieo, p.uui, — , i'-:;-"' '^' .v ,^ o,.i (; o 
 
 Wi, patior, i)assus; p. 3.0, 1<, '^J';- ;;''?:' pUcui (plicavi), plici- 
 
 ^ Compounds change ^tnt<> .; ^ "i^^'^ ^fiZl; p. Ul, It 3: P- 
 
 ante- and post-classical The com-! p. 3G1, 6, 3. Comp.: r^/ly^^lr^>^ 
 pounds applicore, implicare, etc.,' etc. (conquislvi, conquisltum) 
 make^ eiMier -phcia, plicUum, or quatere, quutio, — , quassnm • n 370 
 pUcaci, phcatum. But explicdre 17, It 2. The compounds'chun-e 
 and rephcare, m the Cicenniian qua into cu (conrutere, concuiio 
 
 IHTiod, always have -plied ti, plicd- 
 txm. [Ueplktuin, poetical]. 
 plodere^ see plindcre 
 
 concuss], concussum): p. 871, R. 
 8 ; /f. 10. 
 qxieri, queror, questus ; p. 370, No. 
 
 pluere, pluit (sometimes pluvit), — : \1 R 2 
 
 p. dbw, S^. quiescere, quiesco, quiCvi, quiOtum : 
 
 7^ft'/a/<';-t', pa:'nitet, poenituit. Aver- p. 3G1, 6, 2. 
 
 hal adj.Hnive pa^nituruH is quoted ^?^J/-e (comp. of ire), quOo, quivi qul- 
 
 by ancient trrammarians as ante- turn 
 
 classical, and Quintilian censures Wi^;-^, raho, -,- (poetical and post- 
 
 Sallust for usiui; this f<»rm. 
 poUere, polleo, — ,' — ; p. 373, R. 3. 
 jW/^/C("r€ (ante- and post-class.), i)ollu- 
 
 c^'^» — , polluctum. 
 ponere, pono, posui, posTtum ; p. 373, 
 
 R. 2. 
 
 classical). 
 rddere^ rado, rSsi, rilsum ; p. 369, 17. 
 
 R.2. 
 rdpere, rapio, rapui, raptum ; p. 
 
 3io, R. 20. Compounds take t in 
 
 the perfect, and e in the supine. 
 
 po.ce re yo^c.^, poposci, -; p. ZQl,rdclre, ravio, -, - (to be hoarse); 
 
 No. 14. Compijiuuls reduplicate . 
 
 repoHcere, repoposci, etc. 
 postie, possum, potui, — ; p. 374, R. 13. 
 pofare, j)oto, |)otavi, potatum or po- 
 
 tum ; p. 301, 0, 4. 
 2^randere, prandeo, piandi, pransum : 
 
 p. 3(;7, n. 5 ; R. 8. 
 ;??W/<v/</m'(prendfre), prehendo, pre- 
 
 hendi, prehensum ; p. 3l>7. R. o. 
 prnnrre^J^\•i^n\^^, pressi, pressum ; p 
 
 370, 17, o. Compounds take I (de 
 
 priinere, deprlmo, depressi, de- 
 
 pressum) ; p. 370, R. 3. 
 prvdi'ir, i)rodo, prodidi, prodTtum : 
 
 see dare. 
 pn^fiCMci, proficiscor, profectus ; in- 
 ceptive compound oi facere\ see 
 
 Syicerc ; p. 30.>, R. 12. 
 prumere, promo, prompsi, promp- 
 
 tum ; p. 30(), R. 10 (comp. of eni^re). 
 prurlre, prilrio, — , _ ; p. 302, 12. 
 psallere, psallo, — , — . A perfect 
 pxalli is quoted bv Priscian; p. 300, 
 
 12, ; p. 307, R 5. 
 piuif/i're, l)ungo, pupuij^i, punctum ; 
 
 p. 308, R. 2. Comp. : compungere, 
 exputupre, which make -pt/nxi, 
 
 occurring Plant. Pcpii. 3, o, 33. TJie 
 anted, verbal adjective raumrus 
 may be referred either to this verb, 
 or to an assumed rauclre or rmi- 
 cere (accordiui,^ to the analogy of 
 sarclre, farcire, and parcere). " The 
 perfect irrausi (used once by Cic- 
 ero) refers to an inceptive com- 
 pound, which may be either irror- 
 visnre, or irrnua'scere, neither of 
 which is actually found. See p. 
 370, R. 3. 
 
 recrudescere, recrudesco, recrudui, 
 p. 373, R. 7. 
 
 reddere, reddo, reddidi, redditum ; 
 see dare. 
 
 regere, r6go, rexi, rectum ; p. 369, 
 17, R. 2. The compounds diru/ere, 
 porrigere, erigere etc. change ^'into 
 I, but only in the present system 
 {dir'igo, direxi, directum). The e of 
 the stem is syncopated in the pres- 
 ent system of surgere, pergere, and 
 the inceptive deponent expergisci 
 {—Bubregcre etc.) : aurrexi, nurrec- 
 turn ; perrexi, perrectum ; exper. 
 rectus. See p. 370 foil., 18, R. 2. 
 
 pnnctain. Rcpungere and depun-^reminisci, see viemini. 
 
 .^^^•j have no perfect system. repere, rOpo, repsi, reptum ; p 
 
 Compounds change a mto e : lli^f'';^^^^^^ ., p. 301, R. 3 ; p. ■ 9ere have no perfect system. 
 
 peti, perpelior. perpessus; p. oil, lum u ^^^ ,^^^ simple verb is ■ ?««^e/'^, quaero, quaeslvi, quaesltum ;: 
 
 R. 8. ' H 
 
 17. 
 
 J69, 
 
384 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 r^/7, reor, riltus ; P- ^«1' "^'',^;^ T? uUcnmUre sc'.un\o, scandi, scan sum ; 
 
 r^./^;r, rodo, rosi, rOsum ; p. 30,), l'':7^l^^4;^a,,;s,.\ai (.c/cXrf^ anted.), 
 
 w r -■ 1 „. Tlu' incontivei scissiun : p. «><>o, ii. ~- 
 
 '•"trn™;;^'' ;;«5^;..,-f " fo'.™^; ,..„..... scisco, scu-i. scuum , p. 3G1. 
 
 „^;;!: X ^m!' ^-1 1^I^'-r;"f 4^^ '-.po. scnlpsi, seulptun, ; 
 iuUMHMiter adjcctivLMU Ibe jnrul- A. H. eompouni ^ ^ ^^^^ 
 
 ical expression * riVa casa' ( = ruta 
 et cajsa), refLTiinj; lo the appurte- 
 nances of farm-property w lull 
 have been separated from the laml 
 bv manual labor. 
 ruwpere, runipo, rupi, ruptum ; p 
 
 308, Rl- , . o~i 
 
 sallre (to leap), salio, salui, — ; p. -i ••*. 
 
 syllables change e into i ni the 
 present system: nsshlPrf, nsMedi, 
 a...Hessum. 'But those with dissyl- 
 hibics retain the e: circuumdere, 
 
 sentlre, sentio. sensi, sensum ; p. .5 -^., 
 Ji. 14. Deponent conip. : ai<iienti> i, 
 assensiis ; p. '372, !!■ ll- 
 
 l-n-e\u> leap), sulio, snUn - ; p. - ^. "^ . '>- ' J j.; ' -.el.vi, sopuUum ; 
 
 7^. 13. Compounds take < • «<^»^ r^^'Vio in 
 
 nre^ desilui (son.etimes (/..^^u) ; ^^.p^;^"^^^^^^^^ s.pio, sepsi, septum ; 
 
 sufutiio salt ; collateral forms: m] ,j;;,^;|' (f-^tecatus ; p. 301, 6, 5. 
 
 Both supines are rare; ^>^^\.^^';V<^'. , ' V n 3G-> 8. Comp. make 
 perfect part. mUus, as an adjec-i 3bl, 0. ^ , P- «^^- ^\..,_, L.,wnvi 
 
 tive (salted), very frequent. 
 saiiclre, sancio, sanxi, sanctum (san 
 
 citum) : p. 37-2. 11 14 
 «<5;7.-v-6, silpio, saplvi (''"ted.), — . 1 »e 
 
 perf. .^"ptn rests on Pnscian s 
 
 -sevL -H,t*,m {coiixen're), consBvi, 
 consYtum) ; di^^slnre lacks the per- 
 fect (dissero, -. dissTtiimUT^ers^^ 
 rere (postclass.) lacks the supme 
 (persert), persPvi, — ). 
 
 imiperc form no perfect ; I'^^t fx " ,1. , ^^ / ^ ^^.^^^ . ^ 
 
 J^:!.^^^^, sanu.; P- 371. ;-^y. -PO, serpsi. serptu.n ; p. 
 /^. 13. 
 
 LIST OF PERFECTS AND SUPINES. 385 
 
 sWre, sido, sidi (poet.). _ Tlief 379 p o rp, 
 compounds borrow tie nerf 3 Z l-^' J'^^ P^^'^- of the simple 
 supine of ,eda-e : ^.. rf/con4df Jnn^,f ^^T^'^".^ ' ^"^ ^^^^ inceptive 
 consessum ; p. 3G9, No 16 7^0 1 n?^ '"^c '"^Pj'^d^^^^re makes ex- 
 
 •^mre, srieo, sllui, - •' p 373 7? I* '..^ ^"'^"' ^^"'^•^• 
 
 «i///'r., sino,slyi;sriuni n 4 fi qi^^'''''^'^^'^^^ spondeo, spopondi, spon- 
 The con/p. dnip t e J, f the ner w'n ' ^^- ^^7' ^^' ^^" Pompon nds 
 feet : ddno. dCsii. c'csl um P. " ^^'^^l^ou reduplication : rc^pondere, 
 
 r^uc, frequent in anted. iL^'Z^TlZJu^^^^^^^ ~ ~' P" ^^^' ^O- Tlie 
 «i.v/.vr. sisio, stiti, stjitum 1 'IS 7? ^ ^-f""^ presupposes the su- 
 2 {dies status, .</nSv 'Jlf ;//■ L P"/-^ *^^"^"'^- 
 t^^m est, po^tclal^^^Th^^.^;:!'^:^^^' ^^"^^^-> ", -; P- 373, 
 
 fh-e, destrti, destr unf ) Sft« 15" ^'^^ ^^'."Pounds, both monosyllabic 
 7 TK. ...:..„ _'"'"'"' P-^^8, i^.| and dissyllabic {circumsid?'e) ■ but 
 
 /. 1 he other compounds form no 
 supme (?/i.s/.y/m% instlti, — • so m-- 
 .vAv/.^re a«*^./^^,.6). Of exsistere (ex 
 J^tt^re), the lexicons ^ive the su^ 
 Jiuie 6j-.s7^7//,;i. But I doubt wheth- 
 er «t be /ound anywhere. Civcum- 
 ststere forms neither perfect nor 
 
 _ 
 
 pmstare makes prsstfti. pr'^stl- 
 
 Uim;p.3GI,i?. 4;p.363,9%.2. 
 Veroal adj.: prmtaturus. 
 
 */«^w^/-^ statuo, statui, statutum; p. 
 361, 6, No. 5. The compounda 
 take i: co.'istituere, constitui, cou- 
 stitutum. 
 
 P. 
 
 
 P-361.fi, 5; p. 302, iV, 23. W?,^,.^ sterto ^fovu.\ 
 
 10, souui. sonltum.- n S7^ r> V! ^^^^^^' steitui, — ; 
 
 «.>///7/r sono, souui, sonltum;' p. 374^ 
 
 *^W>.V^ sorbeo, sorbui,-; p. 373. R. 
 - Comp. : nh.'.orbere, absorbui iab- 
 
 R. 14. ' ~ ' ~' P- ^"^' 
 
 stingucre (obsol.). Comp. : -stinguo 
 -stmxi -stmctum (restingut-rerex- 
 
 ««'•'/'Vc, sordeo, sordiii _ • „ Q70 p '':'<''^ '"'^^' "" ""^ statement of Pris- 
 
 •'^s;;;.s^„r ^C"'^"-- ' ^ ^ "''^: "'°'' "'""" ' 
 n^r^o. eo;!spi.i!si/i;o;:;,^^,;;r;:-^^^^^ sfuctu.; p. 
 
 ^Pi^cere (spic(^re). spgcio, (the''^'^''o^' ^^"'^''''' ^^""^"^' -' P' ^^3, 
 
 .;'enj.V.,,pe,.„o,sp,.Svi,sp,-et„„; p.f "stCI it"^"' ""^'' ^"'^"" > P' 
 «i'W^r;. splendeo. splendui,-; p."'*/i& tt' SeS '"''"""' '^ 
 
386 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 LIST OF PERFECTS AND SUPINES. 
 
 387 
 
 
 See 
 
 p. 308, li 8. AitoUere, without a 
 nert'ect svstcm. 
 
 Jdllr. u.mleo, totondi, tonsum ; p. 
 
 S(!i G 2 Mostly in tl'C com- 
 
 «.^;.rs^go!'s«xi. suctum; p. 300.1 a«TN..,'_^,,„„, '""«"i;' ' ^^ '^fe 
 
 17 /? 2 « m 4//(?//ttre poetical , Din nii. 
 
 .a"vf samo. sumps, sumptum; p. ^;/^f^ ^;^;,.,,,,,, ' (,lu,naer«.™cU 
 
 3(i(i, A>. Ki ; see emere. ,,,, ,vetiue,uly <'^'="'', ""'•.'' 
 
 ,.^:Skpej.-;"nest(sonu.ae- 
 
 /> 2 Compouiuls take i m 
 iresent system, droppin- the re- 
 
 adjective aim a^^.-o^.^ , 
 /.rpi/-., torpeo, torptu, -• . ^^^^/J^j 1 
 torpui seems to ^^^'^^^^S t ^^^^'^ 
 (.(M)tive torpe.'<ch'e only ^Comp. ^v . 
 
 ohtorpesccre, oblorpui (Liv. .i-, -" , 
 lb. 34, 38). 
 
 duplication iu the perfect , conUf^ I ^.^ 
 
 )^.>;l. conttgi, contactum; p. ^^«''^^t/^, torreo, torrui, tostum ; p. 3.3, 
 
 Ug%%go, texi, tectum ; p. 369, ^L^j^^^ ^,,,^,, tradtdi, tr-Vttum ; P^ 
 
 temnL (as a simple verb, poe . , :^J';^;4 ; ^,;,^,rf, etc. _. 
 
 ^"^^no! ^-Psi (ten-)^ ^^^ ^^X^, traho tnvxi, tractum ; p. 3.0, 
 (temtum) ; p. 3.0, E. 4, Z. &o ^^ ^, i ; i^. 4. . «^ 
 
 compound c^^^^^^^Aim;'!^. ^rW^/m^^, tremo, tremui. -; P- «i'^» 
 
 :;^et^:u;^ W:x ^u,^^.«u . ,^,,, ,„_ ^ , 300. 
 
 o^/./irum, as a noun). For the fr 
 
 other compounds see p. 3b., ^;^' L ,^.^. t„oor [tatus]; p. 362,21. The 
 
 E 1 The comp. change (J into i, 1 post-classically lake tut 
 
 fesumin. . in tl.e ^-P^^^J^'^^Zi su^inS .<,!(«»«, and intuUu^ 
 rellnui, relenwm). tI (iHcre ^I"", . -' tvimei., tQnnii, — ; P- *>">• 
 Minc^e Ibm. uosupme; I'; f '/• <"^f 1.' Do-iuVul. wl.etluT .he p. - 
 
 %, 4. C«»ttn«r -'■■ms^fj', .'»; tct i«"H»- belongs to ««'«;':«»>.';, 
 
 its ineeplive eompoun.is only . J« 
 
 l>ont. 4, 14, a-1 ; I'lin. II. N. ~0, i>, 
 
 23). 
 
 as an aJjective only. Tlie pertec 
 'Srantecl.) is quoted by ancient 
 
 o-rammariaiis, „^. 
 
 ie^re, tero, trivi, tritum ; p. 361, 
 
 0,3 
 
 ,^i (ter..re. ter.o (ter.eo), -j -^f - -l^til^ 
 
 t^sumTp. 30<J, 17, II- '3-, p. 3.1,' ;;j;;^^^\o;,tudi, comusum; p. 3u8. 
 
 .|^iexo, texui, textum ; ^' ^^J^^,^^,)^^^ 
 
 Je^, timeo, timui ; p. 373^ 72- 2. ^^;^^^,, a perfect system. 
 
 tjni7i.6r6 (tiug&re), Un--o, tmxi, tine , 
 
 vlri.m, ulcipcor, ultus ; p. 369, 17, 7? 1 
 ti)if/efe (un^irugiv), unnro (nnLruo),'imxi! 
 
 unctuni ; p. 309, R 17. 
 Hfrre,^ uro, ussi, ustum ; p. 870, R 2, 
 4. Thec()iiij)ound crmibfi re re {from 
 an ancient collateral form burere) 
 makes comhusd, combustum ; p. 370, 
 
 •> 
 
 o. 
 
 urgere (ur<ruCre), urgeo(ur£rueo), ursi 
 
 — ; p. 371, R. 13. 
 vadh-e, vado, — , _. The comp. 
 
 ^radere makes evdsi, evSsum ; p. 
 
 0.1, R. 9. 
 'cegere, vegeo, — , _; p. 373^ ^ §_ 
 Vegetiis (which is scanned i'er/^7?/.«j 
 
 in tlic poets) frequently occurs as 
 
 an adjective. 
 tehere, velio, vexi, vcctum ; p. 370, 
 
 i?^/'/^^ volo, v61ui, — . The comp. 
 malle and nolle, make mnlui, nolui • 
 ]). 372, R 1. 
 
 ^''oZ''' VJ^^''' ^^"^ (^^"^^0, vulsum; p. 
 oO<, R. 5. 
 
 vendere,^ rondo, vendidi, veuditum ; 
 p. 305, A*. 7 ; see r/^'r^'. 
 
 tv//7/'e (to come), venio, vCni, veu- 
 tum; p. 30.-), R. 11. 'I 
 
 venire (to be for sale), vC'ueo, venii 
 (venlvi), — ; p. 302, ^V 11. 
 
 ver,oere, vergo,— , — . The perf. versi 
 rests ou a mere conjecture in the 
 passage Ov. Pont. 1, 0, 52. Kun- 
 NER erroneously derives the prepo- 
 sition versus from vergere (see ver- 
 Ure). 
 
 terrere, verro [verri], — ; p. 307, R. 5. 
 
 vertere (vortere, in Sallust and the 
 poets ; also anted.), verto (vorto), 
 vera, versum (voi'sum). The par- 
 
 tic, verms {vorsus), used as preposi- 
 tion. TJie compounds witli re, di, 
 and pr(e, are deponents in the pres- 
 ent system ; but generally take ac- 
 tive iierfects : revertor, perf. reverti ; 
 see p. 307, i?. 7. 
 vesci, vescor, — , — . Inceptive, de- 
 rived from the rooti^e, from which 
 vivere is formed by present redu- 
 plication. 
 
 vetdre, veto, vetui, vetttum ; p. 370 
 R. 13. ' ^ » 
 
 vuiere, video, vidi, visum ; p. 304 
 Ko. 11; p. 305, /iMl. 
 
 nere, vieo, — , viCtum ; p. 361, 6, 2 ; 
 p. 302, 9. 
 
 vigPre, vigeo, vigui, — ; p. 373, R. 2. 
 1 he perf. rif/ui does not belong to 
 the inceptive vigescere (as the lex- 
 icons give it), but to the stem-verb 
 vigere (Tum aras vestrae viguerunt 
 vestra vis valuit ; Cic. Mil. 31)! 
 Perv^'gui occurs in Tac. A. 4, 34, 
 unquestionably derived from »6?-- 
 vu/ere. 
 Tincere, vinco, vici, victum ; p. 308, 
 
 Ivincire, vincio, vinxi, vinctum; p. 
 I 372, R. 14. ' ^ 
 
 \virere, vireo, — , - ; p. 373, R. 2. 
 Tisere, vise, —, visum ; p. 309, R. 2 
 vivere, vivo, vixi, victum; p. 370, R 
 
 4. Inceptive compound: revivi- 
 
 scere, re vixi, reviclum. 
 volvsre, volvo, volvi, volutum • d 
 
 302,22. ' ^ 
 
 vo7?iere, vomo, vomui, vomttum ; n. 
 
 374, R. 9. ' ^ 
 
 v(/ve7'e, voveo, vovi, votum: p. 364. 
 
 11; p. 305, i^. 11. 
 
3gg APPENDIX VII. 
 
 APPENDIX VII. 
 
 PROSODY. 
 I GENERAL RULES. 
 I ,. Every vowel placed before another vowel, or before ft, is .«okt. 
 V^s\ieiis, liio, trdho. 
 
 ^■TlTn-f.t ancient .erminMion ot ,»e genUive of the «i«t dee.en.ion is «.o : a«ral 
 '"-:• k;-,. .oso >n .he vocwe te.n.n.Uons .«. and H o, the prope. n»n.e, .a 
 
 *"'r;''i-"S«''t:".-he intepecl.™ «.. .,„, . ^,„ poet, aUvays .horten i in 
 
 ''tT.n'/i'-vmV' ^"'''■i^'-;^" V:.fr'?ow<.l,hefore vowels h»ve the same quantity as in 
 
 like a c.usonant (»), "'' '- ^,^) <^,«&m^ ^=za>^«-?/«^-). , . 
 
 ,,,,.,=,.,,,r.K.vm^eo -.^a^^^^^^^^ the vowels chancred fnmi 
 
 ^*2. Long are: 1), all '^^Y^]}^']'^^^^^ cmio. 
 
 "^f-;? rp'lt.posi.ion ..., in con,pounc,s, before a vowei, is gene.i.y s„o.. . pr.aca,«., 
 
 -Ti'n'thc eon,po.,.on .i.h ^''^-^::^:^^^'^^:::::"^^^ vowei 
 
 ^ira-TiS vowel is followed hy a n,nte -«^nant precedin^^or^^ 
 
 '"•::Tt:::::ZlZ;:^^ora. retain the quantity ol the corre- 
 spoucling; vowels in the primitive. 
 
 PEOSODY. 
 
 389 
 
 ,!«««; *5('l«-»<>jx«-- „„nniitv of the vowels of their simplea 
 
 v; \ CoMroL-sus retain Hie qiiantit.v oi '"« v « 
 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 nrnf'i!JZ~^V^''^' (^'<^'rf-^^ajedicns, and the other compounds with dicm • nnh^re- 
 %,. :\.^^'^ piviM.Htion ;;r(5 .imrtens its vowd in many compomuls IZrrdceUaZyro. 
 fanus, prbjurjus, prbfiteor etc. Greek ;.ro is always Hliort/ekx-pr in!^r34£. ^^''' ^'^'^ 
 
 il.HrwnT^t-t'''-''''''i,?f ^^« '-^^^lical syllal,les in declinable words retain 
 tlH II quantity iM all the inllectional tonus which the word may assume, 
 as dux, dacis, duabu.s ; pakr, patns ; Uyo, li'fjam. 
 
 EXCEPTION!». 
 
 3. The Pupines of the verbs with vowel-stems are long (p. ,361, 362) &<* minuere-mi. 
 bi'^fete). if'tffi. citu/n. nfum, f/<uf'/m, f^iff/m, rufum On connnmndi^) 
 and (/J ampStivt/ ' ^^''^""'' ^'^''' ^^' '^" "' '^^^'^ "' ^" '^^ ^«"^S' ^^^^pt in das 
 
 XL PARTICULAR RULES OX QUANTITY. 
 § 7. The quantity of those syllabhs of Latin words belono-ino- to tlie 
 sfenis, rests on the authority of the Latin poets. These nsa^res^of the 
 poets ni regard to ev-ery word of the language, have been collected in 
 alphabelica \yorks of reference (Gradus ad Parnassum), which must 
 beconsulled in every instance not setiled by the rules of this chapter, 
 (xenera rules can only be given in regard to the quantity of monoLlla- 
 uUn'AwCijinal or inflectional syllables. ^ J y 
 
 % §. The quantity of monosyllabics is contained in the followiuo- 
 three rules : » 
 
 1. Monosyllabic words ending in a vowel are long (si, nl, me, til, qui 
 ne, pro, ae etc). > > ^ > 
 
 2. Monosyllabic nouns ending in a consonant are long, as : jus, ver, 
 onas, lis, OS (oris). "^ "^ ' ' 
 
 8. Monosyllabic words, other than nouns, ending in a consonant 
 aie SHOUT (dd, fac, quid, et, nee). 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. The enclitics que, ve, ne, ce, te, pfe, are short. 
 
 i. 1 he nouns cor, f el, rtieL vis, as (O'-df) are shout. 
 Tnv./ %r"f ^fi-'/oo quin sin, crns; plus. cur. sic, and the adverbs hic and Mc are 
 long. Tiie form-adjectives hie anrl hoc aie either long or ^hoiit. 
 
 § 9. In DISSYLLABLES and POLYSYLLABLES the final vowels a, e, v are 
 short; the final vowels e, o, u are long. 
 Exception!». 
 1. a Ls LONG in the ablative of the first declension, in the vocative of Greek nroner 
 inHhl^'Urnf-fAvJ-'/^y '''•'/"JJ>-f i-' -' V^« fi-t conjugation (ama, da) luki^'Zl 
 s KT R r W ^ fir'i "^ fT; ^'"^^f ^,?'^;\ ^s^«Pt i" ifd and quid, which Imve the a 
 MioKT. Harely the final a of the mdechnable numerals (triqinfaeic.) is used ^hort 
 frLlf^'"''-'' l""! ?" the ablative of the otli declension (sjyecre); (b) in the ablative of 
 {d^h^rilii^'^ in the ..nperative of the second conjuj^ation (bit sometimes fact 
 cnj, ''d>? ju>>e man?, rale, rvlh ; </) in the adverbs jn> of the movable adjectives 
 (except bh,e, indie) ; {e) in Greek nouns in e (>pi'ome, CircZ). ^"^""^^ auj(.cii\es 
 
 .1 I IS SHOUT (rt) m the vocative of Greek nouns in is (AUxi) ; (b) in the dative of 
 S ich jT'J-h!''?' h'''' (lyi^'.Pinvn) ; (.1 in ,.isu qua.^l and cul (if scanned as a diss vl\a hi?, 
 ib iubi Th^ li. V ?''^ ' ^"^^ *• '^ u^'^'^® '^'* '"**!*^ (anceps) in mihi (or y/iiAi). ^i6t, ^iii 
 bi'f' h.L ii, ,- "*^•^^1^""T m the a.mpounds necubt, sicubi, and generally in ublvis, 
 out long in ubique. So t^/ig?/^, and generally ibidem. o j xu «(/♦(.», 
 
390 
 
 APPENDIX Yll. 
 
 rnosoDY. 
 
 391 
 
 (,fi,t tho.. nouns i^V^^ j';};; ', Jii j r„clA f /i •• ^<^'^ 'l' ^'^" compouua.ol lUe 
 
 But «/vi?.>'. ^//v?.v, ;>a/'i^.s\ !i u. ^''^.^X :: ' 7) i" t »« prt-ix'^ition penes ,^ .. 
 
 ''t'n'; Tenuinations in is, «., ^» are short (/<,n.X <«;,»., Co(^.). 
 ^fini",:;*» (a) in al, ...e case, of t.,e plunU (/'--«..«f^^.^^^V.^? '^fZ^^^ll^ 
 
 ^ VI Terminations in a cousouaiit other than s aie 
 vii^n, aiuer, lauddt, donee, semeL 
 
 arc ahvay:^ short (.Ae*^^/")- 
 
 III. THE USE OF METRES IN POETRY. 
 A. General liuhs. 
 
 , ,8 In Greek and.LnUn V'^'-^y:^^!:^^;:Z:^^:L::Z!r!^ 
 
 th.i ^a.ue pocni. nncionts and was first employed in the ChriH- 
 
 Or^ -2 TheimYMEwuRunkm.wnto heanciuiTs.ami ..J tonirue. Ihe 
 
 fru. hvmu^ at a time wh.M, the Latm l'''lf '"p.^J" ..i^^'en nry of th.- Christian em>. are 
 hv h n't -Ml in the Christian hymns (after «''''J I in the sense (letlne.l ahnve sin.x- 
 
 TiCAi. Latimty. ... ^ ^«„ci<ti; of certain METRICAL 
 
 ^ M. Generally a o..m,K.sU.onjn verse cos,^^^^^ 
 r^^uoDS, each of which CMtams he me t t ^^^^^ ^^n^^; ^TUoI-iiKS. 
 vhich recurs iu regular succession, buch ptuous 
 
 1 
 
 hh 
 
 A strophe consisting of four lines is called a stanza. If a composition 
 consists of one single ver^e or strophe, which is not repeated, it is called 
 
 . ^.■.^; f'/ophes are divided into lines, called verses, and each verse 
 is (hvided into FEET, which contain a certain succession of two, three, or 
 lour syllables. Ihe fee^employed in Latin poetry are the following : 
 ^ - lanibus, as leffunt, pat res. 
 
 - - Trochee (Troc]iaeus^chor5us), scvTpslt, terra. 
 Spondee, ncribem^, terra. 
 
 - - - Dactyl (Dactylus). scrlhere, flumind. 
 --- Anapest, (Anapa?stus), legereiu, Mminl._ 
 
 - - - Amphimacer or Creticus, gratlas. cdgiUms. 
 ^ - - Bachlus, doldrl, amavl. 
 
 - - - - Chorianibus {i.e. Choreus and l^mhn^), prdeteremit,7ximld8. 
 
 - lonicus a niinore, ddainarl, adolescent. 
 
 - - - - lonicus a majore, sententia, miitdbllU.* 
 
 M6. Kn vTiiM is the system of rise or f)ill of the voice at certain inter- 
 ^als, as represented by the feet. The iambus and anapest constitute the 
 b;tnJ'['^'-V. '^'' ^'-^f •^•'V'^^^V^'*^^^^'^' t»»^^/«^^^*^^9H0'tlim. Thesp<mdee 
 7 H;,, ^''^'\^'- T^'V'^'^H"' .^^'^^t combine both the risim,^ and fallin- 
 r^;^^ Wil. r'Ti'"" V;''''''!'' '^.^«'"«.^^'ith a falling rhythm, and ends with S 
 nw '. / • , ? ^^'^^clil.is begms with a rise, and ends with a fall. The 
 >' eh (liigbest r>se) of the v.)ice is called arsis; the sinking of the voice 
 lb called thesis. 1 he arsis is marked by an acute accent ; as ; 
 
 Iambus, ^ — 
 
 Anapest, ^ ^ -. 
 
 Trochee, — ^, 
 
 Bactvl, - -- >- 
 
 Spondee, either -^ -, or - -^. 
 
 Creticus, with two arses, - - -. 
 
 Bacchlus, ^ - -. 
 
 Choriambus, which two arses, ± -^ ^ ±, 
 
 lonicus a minore, - >- -i _. 
 
 lonicus a majore, — ^ ^ ^. 
 
 a I .^pcMHhMi. ; ----. an AntispMsius. All tlii. is n.ei'e theorJticjU specXio^ WV 
 exireniely rare occurrence. ' 
 
 tlie Bacchlus, aud the two Ionics are of 
 
392 
 
 APPENDIX Vn. 
 
 PEOSODY. 
 
 393 
 
 Pliiiiiaiiiiii 
 
 ^ 1«. Tl.c last syHable „t <>very verse (^ lUi can ^ ^^_^^ ^^^^^_ 
 
 m:',.- he either slicrl or Ions, ^^ l"',"^ /'.':;, '«e mav l.e sul.stiUUe.l, and 
 Tims, when tl.e last foot 'f^J^'^l^^p^^.'^u.H syllable. (^e„- 
 vice versa. Wl.en tl.e '^'«t < '^ ;^^^.^," •„, pl,iee. When the last toot 
 crally called a Inbrachys) i. y ^'^, ";'.", 'i^,i ,„„v be used, 
 is an iambus, two short syllables (!>>' '""' !"' " -^ ,^^.„,,-„ ,, ..eiscfoot (hi 
 , ,». C.K.r,... (.narked 1) ■^»''!;-' y;'^.,: ^^rvtlnns^t'.er tl.e thesis) 
 fallh.i; rhytl....a alter the arsis ;.;""' .".''^y';l,„e are leet. But at least 
 Vhe.-? .naV be as n.a.iy 9*«"J,* " ;^.:, '.'"n^w ,Vr ..f n.ore thai. t«-o leet. 
 
 one caesura is "«"'^«'^^''1 «^^ ;Vm ,he "ir^ »^'<>'-'' ""^ o-.^nv^ mn^\ "« 
 There is genera ly ^'•"•''''",1'"," "eiBsi.ra. it divides the line inlo two 
 used. If there is only (.ne "«''''^t;:^ >,„*'*, .■„;.,. ,i,aii the seeo.id by one 
 ^arts, the tirst of wh.eh '^S^^^^f >,,,.'. ''divided into three parts, a.- 
 uora. If there tire two "?' ;^' ^/^Th.s in the epic hexameter the 
 cording to the principle ot ''.;"";«■ , . 'X(^^., „,« n.ila a.sis) ; bi.t tbe.c 
 re.'i.la? eiBs.ira is alter the htlh ."'"»• ;■ ''. ' ,i, moiie. The «vsnr.e are 
 .•.-.y be two ««sur,c after '''«^^ ' 'l^^ ,,!^^tl n"n 'n Thns «..«n, Inhem^ 
 ,,,La after -''l"';;» 'X . ,"; , otS UU^T a half; peuU..ui,„e,:, a c.e- 
 flifcw means a ciCbU.a at t. in i 
 snra after live nior» and a hal , etc. ._^ ^j^^,,,,. 
 
 1. Wl.e.i a wo.d ends in a vowU ^"^' ,,, j^ ,ikU'd. and not 
 
 vowel or an /«, the final vi.wel c.f the ircc,mn„ ^^ „,g 
 
 pronounced, the tw,. ^"^' ^!="!^.J^^i'^,^^^My v^oy'^^^^^-»»^^ ^»'^'? 
 
 ^„,ric-.l value of snch l'-;' " ,1"" i |'\^c qnions arc found here and 
 
 1 ,..:fi. on <.1(UhI vowel (lUinouj^ii c.\«^^^i' , ,. . . - ^j . . n<t..ad of 
 
 2. When a wo.'d ends in ,n 'l'^.'^'";\«' p,;^^ '"v ,wel, is elid.-l. as : 
 vowel or A, the final '"• t.".^'' '"^'r,; ' ji ^icaa^'Men^ (read .i</.:.7«. 
 
 ..«"."-■ ?n>,lf." ",";' ul^'i'Sf"; " ™"l'ill",l V- li-^""?"»'! 'IV^'-/"'' Preco-Iln» w.,rt re- 
 
 cLw'). ^^^'^^P^'h stetenuitque coim^ (read ^ obstapai sietemntque 
 
 5. Often two successive vowels ^rWnn a word (al.so witli h intervonincr) 
 aiv contracted into one syllable. Thus dein, hnie, cui are almost alwavs 
 
 «J' /' ;;;;^/^r '''''''' ^^^^V^^ "-n-yHabics ; ana delude, a^^lX^r^U, 
 acta, (tufeo, teren occur as dissyllables. 
 
 n'lnt ^^I'MnT''''"'' ' T;'*l-; •'^^•^•.^'""''^'"^''^ chnnirod into the kindred conso- 
 le, J^'/ / / ' 'f • /f-"' ^^^/'•'^ .;'^''^ '"-•«'• Virir. .En. 9, «74 (read ' dbjmbas ja- 
 
 ^feaj. 11). ^, IZl.—Crenya labnnt (read ' (/^//«^/ /<Z/>6///0. lb. ^n. 5, 432 
 n.^^lf''T""'''^''''''■r'''''''''^^ •'''•' dropped between two consonants in the 
 -C../r/.^r ..,/ (Mislead of ralklior est). Hor. Sat. 1, 3, oS.-oTv^^ m^t^l 
 
 Vi;ri;^^^^;r^'^''^t.'^^-^^ Cauill.7.5.-7^..W^. (instead o/ Lr.^^)^ 
 V 11 g. .liiii. «, .).)(> : Cidfacd (mst. of calefacii). Ov. Fast. 4, G1J8. 
 
 candla?) xTr^'lvr^/or''"''"''-;."''-^'''^^/'^ !^'-'>'^ '^^ ^'^ «* ^'^^^^ c«W/a.<i Hnst. of rojice 
 capillar). \ II - Lcl. .i % boinetiiiu's v i< clijin<,r('(i int.. the vowel '/ a< ner^hUierf il'iiTi 
 
 ^.-s<„ u-iime.- „. where It forms <„„. ^vlial)le wiih the iiexr vowel (see SI Xo ih m, ; 
 b.. read as a sejmn.te syllable, a. IV/.^/W/^y'/e sur,a.,,(. Luer. 4 llii ^ ' ^' "'^ 
 
 fl-^-^"^/^>./"y''"'i^"'*'*^"-"^'''*" poets, fiiialxof tiieendinirs »/.<? an-i f. is freqnentlv elided 
 
 i5. Simple Metref<. 
 
 ^21. Nomenclature. 1. Verses consisting of simple metres (S 17) 
 arc named after the number of th.-ir 'metres', the word ' metre' bein'^ 
 taken here in a sense ditf -rent from the meaninirs exjdained ^13 A 
 metro, in this third sense, means a succession of two feet • but if the feet 
 are ./.<.7y/.y, or consist of >//.r .yy?/.//>^e.s, each foot constitutes a metre by 
 Itself 1 hus the epic hexameter, consisting of six dactyls (or their substt 
 tiifet*), has .s».r metre>^, whence it takes its name. But a verse consisting 
 <)t SIX iambs, trochees, or anajiests. etc., is called a trimeter. THmeter 
 irn^ins a verse ot two metres; tetrameter, o{ four ; pentameter, of iire. 
 
 - It ail the 'melres' of a verse are ccmiplete, the verse is called acat- 
 ALECTic. But if tlie last for)t or metre is lackimr one or more svllabies 
 the verse is called catalectic {ui sylbdjam, or d/ssi/llaba?,i, according as 
 one or two syllables are wanting). It is called uypercatalectic, if the 
 last metre or foot contains a syllable in addition to its regular number 
 
 '18 
 
394 
 
 APPENDIX Vn. 
 
 PBOSODY. 
 
 395 
 
 and the two loniCS. 1»« oiiici i<- 
 
 elu ,l.!\H.d in vured metres (sec belo^v). ^^^^^^^ ^^^ 
 
 ^ 22. lAMiuc v^:usES. In every Ian^> c ver^e. tl e sn ^^ ^^. ^^^^^^^^^.^. 
 
 bv a Ion- syllable, so ^»»^^1 «\^^^ " "^^, ^ts «r./^) may be ivplac-etl bv t n« 
 the loniF syllable o an lambu. {i. e it. ;t ;^ ^^ ^3 ^^ ^.^^^^ ^^^^^ . ^ ^ ^^^, 
 short svllabU'S (a tnbrachys^ - -. J a, > ,,,|,,,iuuea feet should 
 
 in No. 1 and 3 ; ^^ {^^1^^^;^^'^^ below). The most frequent of 
 be scanned and read ke I*^»; ;^ ^^^^^^ ,,^ senarius. 
 Limbic verses is the In.nete^ f ' Jl tLeteu 
 Obs 1 The measure of the pure Iambic Tkimeteu a 
 
 /.j^J-l^-i-l--^!--' 
 
 a. : Es iml ptidllcus 1 ^t I v5mx 1 f^^f .^^'^ ^^^^'^^'Vet^are Spondees : 
 
 In the Ibllowins line a tribrachy^ (- - -) '^tar.d. 
 foot 
 
 i-^s?^T^i?^^^^r5?i;?!'Sn 
 
 The foilovvh.g verse has an aAja;>^*« m UK. u 
 
 P5..6..ne verna. d.i. ^^^^ th^^t a^d ^nJees in the third and Mth feet : 
 In the f.dlowin- a dacfyl ^ta.ulH m tne n , 7 
 
 Antftm!.6 1ev!ra!nUen!dltreltia. Ilor. J..>. 2, d-l. 
 (Scan : ' aut am' 1 i6 le ' etc.) ^ f^,^,^ ^^i^g spondees : 
 
 Quo, quo, scelesti, ruins, am cm u., 
 
 (Soak: qnoqu6 | «SI6s|ti ™'1"« '<;'' '''-l,,, XrimoK-r Aoatal-ctic i'""','^"'?';*';;;" 
 
 n' l/; u e ?' ' vvav» a /-»'/1« l<"- "/'"'"te ", . ,,, clan-e «f the rhyll"" "'.'"'; 
 
 siJiiiliiitiiHiis 
 
 qL nunc I t„;. I a., unlsnibu. I 'l^lultina.'tl -•■•;; <'• ^^^ ^,,,^, „„, <,, the Aka.o 
 ,4, The DiMKTKR IlYPEUCATALECTlc (occimiu^ on y 
 
 Sirraclliisil,lWm|ll.-6r|hi». "'"■• C"""; ':,J„ ^, j,, eombinaliou «Uh otl.cr verse. 
 te) -Ihe Trimktek Catalkctic, u=cd by Horace 
 
 '*"»« I're'.lldei'i'.'.rdomo I '-"l"--^,,'\';:- jtr/'in' 'con.binatioa wilU the Trimeter 
 
 Oblf|vi6!nem e6n|sibus. Hor. Ep. 10, 1. 
 Ui prfs|ca gens | morta Ilium. lb. Ep. 2, 2. 
 
 (e) The DiMKTKK Catalectic (the measure used by Anacreon) occurs in Latin only in 
 ine Jater poet;* (rarely), jis : •' 
 
 Manu, I pner, | loqimjci. Petr. Frg. 2, 
 
 § 2;{. Trochaic verses are rarely used by the Latin poets (except in 
 certMin passaires of the trno^ics and the comics, especiallv Terence) Tiie 
 trochcH-s admit of substituted feet in the same way as 'the Iambi in the 
 Iambic metres (§ 22). 
 
 Ob8. The foliowinsr two varieties of trochaic measures occur- 
 
 ncrv «,,T!?."M'^J^'^'*'^r^'^*'^"*^'^'^^^*^^'^^^''"^^'^""'° ^" a few epigrams of the Anthol- 
 ogy, and lu tlie Pervigiliuui \ eiieris, as: 
 
 Cras almet qui | numqu:mra;mavit, I qu{qnea|mavit | eras aimet. 
 
 Ver no|vum, ver | jam ca|u6rum, | vere | natus | orbis | est. 
 
 The foUmvin,- lines are from Tereiitianiis Maurus's didactic poem 'Be lUteriset metns' 
 a ccmipoMtion in which ail possible metres are used : *t'te/ w ec rneine , 
 
 Nulla I vox hu|maiia j c6nstat | al)sque 1 septem | littelris, 
 Rite I v6cailes vojcavit | quas ma|gistra | Graecija. 
 
 caim. 2, 1« (aiteiiiutely^with the Iambic Trimeter Catalectic, without any substituted 
 feet) : N6n 5, bur n^que aurelum. 
 
 ^ 24. Of Dactylic verses only two are frequent: 1) the Dactylic 
 liEXAMKTi:R AcATALECTic (iTeuerally Called ' Hexameter ', without any 
 other addition), and the Dactylic Pentameter Acatalectic. ijenerally 
 called • Pentameter ', without uny furthe.- addition. In dactyHc verses 
 mi other ieet can be substituted but Spondees. The last syllable of the 
 l:ist_^ foot ()t course, may be short (according to the general principle 
 ^ 18), and hence a Trochee may appear as the last foot. 
 
 ^ 25. The following is the metre of the Hexameter : 
 
 The sixth foot must be always a Spondee (or Trochee). In all the other 
 Ieet spondees may be substituted, except in the fifth, in which the substi- 
 tution of a Spondee is very rare (generallv for producing certain impres- 
 sions on the mind of the reader). Hexameters, in which the fifth foot is a 
 Spondee, are called Spondaic Ili'xameters [versuH spondiacns). Hexameters 
 are used, without any other verses, as the sole metre in epic poems. For 
 their use in connection with other metres, see below (metrical schemes). 
 
 Ons. 1. Tiie proportion of the spondees and dactyls in the hexameter ciiieflv depends 
 on iiu' ta.ste of the pcn-t. Il.xameters merely consisting of spondees are extremely rare 
 and conflneu to the Ante-Augustan poets, as : 
 
 Olli j respon|det rex I Alba.i longlai. Enn. Frgm. Ann. L 
 
 Cives I Romaliii tunc | fiu^i | sunt C'am;pani. Enn. 
 
 An coe.lum nolbis na|tura ul,tr6 corirupium. Lucr. 6, 1134. 
 
 C^uis te I leni|rem noll)is neu | c6na|rere. Cat. 116, 3. 
 
 Obs. 2. When Spondaic Hexameters arc exceptionally used, they must at least have a 
 dactyl m the lourtii loot, as : 
 
 Cum soei;i!< na|t6que Pe|natibns | et mag'nis dis. Virg. ^n. 3, 12. 
 
 Cara delum sobojle:^, maglnum Jovis | increjmentum. lb. Eel. 4, 49. 
 
 C6nstitit i atque'^)cu|lis Phrygi|a^agmina | circum|spexit. lb. ^n. 2, 08. 
 
 Obs. 3. Many dactyl> in succession, express rapidity of the action described. Many 
 epoudees in succesgiou are expressive of heavy and ponderous work : • 
 
39G 
 
 APPENDIX Vn. 
 
 PROSODY. 
 
 397 
 
 Q,„V,n.pe,d.ntc pn!,r.. soniltf. ,naUt , an.„>a , ca^pum. Vir.. ^«. S, 506. 
 
 a ca=' ura p,M,.lu.rann«i- cannot '«;?'"1> ;;y^*,^; ' ^n?.f^, ! «-.7,v. iMemimerm ; 
 nlelolc6U.ator| .En„'a,l.ic|6r>u,ab auo. 
 
 l:,ne.,,ne« eUhor of I'";, J-^-^m "uaSded llTuM^rttr^t^Uor. .jl.amc o( the thud 
 thi< instance i^eneniUy another ccsuru 
 foot (tioch.ic ciusura), as : _ ^ ^ 3-^ 
 
 Incipi unt ;i aui,ta,a ;i tulme.ccre ^ ^^^ ;^^;J {,, ^Ku. 4, 5S2. 
 
 Si tora I de.eruiere fl , laltet i .ub 1 cU^u. a^ or ^^^ ^ 
 
 Ver.rar..at.c^.c..u.^^^^^ 
 
 Spargens ! humida 1 incua „ ii „,„..,llv' niniL'd * Pentameter * 
 
 In U,e first ^^^ :^ ^^ l^'^^;^^ 
 
 Ne poBlsU nmlquan, | , Cinna, pelr.re fame «;>■'•.,• ^ ^^„^, .„„,,. 
 OB, 1 The name P.-ntanH-Ier r..r the '^<'}^;XZ:\"^'!^<^<yi' + .h.. two ar^.s at 
 
 S;;Le;"''ThT.exp.ana,i,.n,,fm,.tpn.s.^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 tlieir i^norauce mistalvcii the scuciuc 
 
 7,. ' . . , I . . vv ^. 1 
 
 umaiier 
 
 ^ — 
 
 ^ ^ ^ \ K^ <y -^ 
 
 of lyric P'>f y.^Va' h U not V Vrr- and Horace. 
 
 tia., and Murt.ah. ; bi.t not by V .r„ n-ictvlic Tetrunieter Acata- 
 
 ^ 2r. Other dactylic^ mt^vsu^esar^eJUhe^l^^^^^^^^ .^^ combiuaUon wilU 
 
 soluMiie • -ii Tl.o nJt,-ii„ T ■ . 7,'' , "y ••^"S"°i"s as a continuous 
 
 lit r f ;1>ertaniel'.r t^'',''""*"'' C«'^>«'=>ic (consisting of ti.e second 
 
 ?, IT ""'"'"-"-'^ ( I I r). "««'I Ijy Horace in combinatiou 
 
 Aca't- lee. p'orTT'"'''' '■ '''"'"'"" .'"•"■'''•'•<■'!"'; 4) The Dactylic Dimeter 
 ilex; ,e,^^^^ constsjing of the fifth and sii.l, fee, of a 
 
 «iM.ou't re.frtohm''' tTo-?"'' ^P"'"l''<'' «'"' D'-x'ty's may be substituted 
 m4 rs ,, S .nen "in/, "f ^"'«.'^ ""' "seri in the classical poets, but 
 debit's, l5t^,hir,s). '"' ''"■"• '^''■"' '''^'^•^ (Claudianus, Ausoiius. Pru- 
 
 Obs. The following varietiee of Anapestic verses are used ; 
 
 1. The Anapestic Dimeter Acatalectic : 
 
 Furlt ut I Phryiriuni | Ingeat | Attin 
 
 Noil e-r I lacritni.s | , Cussanidra. modus. 
 
 t^iua qine | patiuiur | vlce|re niodum. Sen. Ag. fi89. 
 
 2. The Anapestic Dimeter Catalectic, or Paroemiac : 
 
 Venlent | citft .'»je|cQl;T qnum | jam, 
 
 fe6clu8 I cSiar 6s|sa revi sat. Prud. Cathem. 10, 37, 
 
 3. Anapestic Monometeii Acatalectic : 
 
 ^ KJ ^ 
 
 V-V t^ ^ 
 
 O 116s I jQvf-num, 
 
 Sites helta p.iiris, 
 
 Nee cer ta tme 
 
 Data res | jtatrite 
 
 lihetor A,iethi. Anson. Prof 6 1 
 
 tl^c^ur^I^SS!?-?,-^!^.-^-.- Ionics ^ -'-. 
 
 V-/ W _£. 
 
 V> V_/ .i. 
 
 v^» vy .z. 
 
 Mfserarum'st | nCq„o ^Imori ( darg Uidum \ neciug dulci 
 mjf a falling rhytlim, '"ajore, ;:enerally considered as hav- 
 
 -^ — v./ w 
 
 .^ 
 
 „ , , '"'""' "«■•'' I ■''•a' videt I 6 littore | nalita. 
 
 havi4r,SuLr?;,';'t";,;;r;l;',l'^':"'"'''^'^ '"^ «"•^<"=- ^■*-- ">-* -o. be considered a, 
 
 linp. ^;/-''^^^ ."""'^ BACCfirc verses sometimes occur in intersnersed 
 Ck tip tI'.'''^^''"'' "^' ""^^"'' ^''''''''^'' 5» ^^»^' Comics, as, ?oi i See 
 (cn'id':^™'^"''^^' ACATALECTIC, consisting of four AmpbimLceVs 
 
 Tduta velcordiulnjnata cui.iquam'^iit siet. Ter. Andr. 4, 13 foil. 
 
398 
 
 APPENDIX YII. 
 
 PKOSODY. 
 
 399 
 
 \^ -«- 
 
 B.cc.„c T.™..M.x.KS Ac....u.cx:c consist of four Bacc.lc feet. 
 A^uru'c ArlchTlis qu. adlsSleut, qu.lque 5p6rtct. Ter. Andr. 3. 2, 1. 
 
 C. Mixed (Lyric) Metres. ,,.,,, „f ,•,.„( 
 
 S3.. M«.. M.TKKS a.e ^^^^^^^7^^^^^"^^^ 
 CO ubined in ll.e sa>ne verse. ,.' " {, j [\ ^ 1^" aiy Skneca). Tlieoret.cally 
 the choruses in ll.e trag.;dK« ( n LaU", >P> ^ > gome of these n.ust 
 
 tliere is an endless variety ni sach t''""''"-''' j^^-ice by one or llie 
 
 be considered as "^''^<' '^^^":!::^:X^" t^^- -^^' '''' '•'""".'ll 
 
 all or several of the lyric poels : ^ __ „ 
 
 1 Alcaic Hendecasyixabic ^ -^ \ ^ f- 
 ' Dulc^ei I decoirumVt pr6 1 patria I mori^ ^ 
 
 2 Alcaic Decasyllabic -^ ^ ^ I 
 N6u sine I (Us amlmOsusl infant. ^ . ^ ^ , 
 
 3. LESSER SArPiiic ^ v^ I -^ - 1 I 
 
 ^ \j 
 
 s. 1 ^ 
 
 J- ^ 
 
 J- \j 
 
 J. \J 
 
 X. \J 
 
 ^ \ ^ ^ 
 
 ^ W v^ 1 ^ ^ I -«■ ^ > ^ "^ • 
 
 ""t. del6, o,r6 SyMri,,, I car propelra, a,,n,.udo ^ 
 
 5 Greater AucHiLociiiAN -^^ ' ..tnr..d • 
 
 In tlu- first three feet, Spontlees muy "^^^"^^^^ 
 Sulvitur 1 acri« hile.ns grajta vice | \en. | et iahOm. 
 
 6. Glyconian ^ ^ I ^ v^ ^ I ^ ^ 
 Nilraor;talibuslardui'*t. 
 
 7. Phkrecuatean -^ ' 
 eras dolnaberis I h«do. \ ^ ^ yj J- \ 
 
 8. LESSER ASCLEPIAPEAN ^ - ' 
 
 Miecelnas fitSvis 1 edite r61g.bUs.^ ^^^^l^w-^ 
 
 9. Gkeater AscLEPiADEAN . ^, j,^ choriatubus : 
 being the les.er Asclep.adean. increased Dy 
 
 TaneUn=4sierl., scire nefas^q«u.mnu,qnu,nlUbL 
 
 10. Aristophanic ^ w ^ I 
 Sanguine | vipt^'rino. 
 
 \j 
 
 J- I w 
 
 J- \j yj 
 
 J.\ KJ ^^^ 
 
 e,ul in a vowei, ^v^Jjeu-.- "'■;•;•-.- ,,, ^^ ,^, ^,,o /"711.^"^^;^ called asyna.rc.e nU- 
 eliMon of the P';f «^^^"^f « ^'^ ' ,,^^,1,,,^ «f a rea-on why ' \»L^«J,*^:^;V,^. especially <ince 
 
 &g,-.s- t.honld not *^.' >''fl^'t member must be always //t«r/Hio^^^^^^^^^^^ the ancient gram- 
 
 ?fu.last ^y^Hb eo tl.e n.>^ member ^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^--^^the S n srummar.. The ^- 
 of tht^seasyiuute eNcr.c ^ re .-c hoed in the mouciu « 
 
 vnarians, ^vh.ch might i'^^^^^^^^ following lines: 
 called Eleoiambic consiM^ ui 
 
 X. \^ ^ \ -^ 
 
 
 J- \ ^ 
 
 s. \ ^ -^ 
 
 • 
 
 The Jambelegiac consists of the same lines in reversed order 
 
 J i.e I niAPEiAN consists of a Glyconian verse (No. 6), and a Pherecratrean (^o 7^ 
 
 B. The Metrical Scheme!^. 1. Nomenclature. 
 ^ J12. A poem consists of re,ii:u]ar or irregular metres. Irregfl\r 
 METHKs r«)ntam several different kinds of verse without any plan ob- 
 y^^-vx^^a in the succession of the metres. Tims many of the clloral songs 
 in the tra^^.'dy contain irreirular metres, consisting of Sapphic, Glyconian, 
 Alcaic Dactylic, Anapestic, Iambic, and other metres, without any sys- 
 tem in the succession of these dilferent metres. 
 
 Kegular metres are those in which either one and the same kind of 
 verses is repeated without any other kind intervening (for inst if a 
 poem consists only of Hexameters, or only oi Senarii, or ^/^/y of Ascle- 
 inadean verses, etc.) or in which different kivxU of verses are joined to 
 iitrophe.% all ot which contain exactly the same succession of the metres. 
 ^ 33. If a poem contains only <?;*€ kind of verses indefinitely repeated 
 It IS called MONosTicirox, or MoxocoLox.-If a poem consists of strophes, 
 AMI!» ditterent kinds ol verses, we distiniruish 1) the number of the kinds 
 ot verse empl(,yed ; 2) the number of the lines occurring in each strophe. 
 1 lie number of the kinds of verse employed is designated by the Greek 
 word COLON ^y,th the required numeral prefix. If the strophe contains 
 two difi.Tent kinds of verses it is named diadon (as for inst. the Ele"-iac 
 J entameter, the lesser Sapphic Strophe, etc.) ; if it contains three differ- 
 ent kinds, it is called Tricolon (as for inst. the Alcaic Strophe). 
 
 § 34. The number of lines in each strophe is designated by the Greek 
 word sTiciioN or STROPiiox with the recpiired numeral prefix. Thus the 
 l.legiae 1 cntameter is a DiSTicirox, or distropiiox ; the Sai>phic Stanza 
 IS a TETRASTiciiox, or TETRASTiiopiiox ; tlic sccoud and tliird Archilo- 
 e nan (according to our theory) are tristicha or tristropiia.— A com- 
 plete description of the metre requires the joining of the expressions 
 I'M- the number of both, the cola and sticha. Thus we designate the Sap- 
 ])luc st:mza as a dicolon tetrastichon, and the Alcaic stanza as a tricolon, 
 iciraatichon, 
 
 2. Synopsis of the Metres. 
 ^ 35. MoNosTiciiA. Here belong {a) the Hexameter; ip) the Senarii 
 111 the dfamatistg, Piijedrus, etc., and the Iambic ^Monostichon in Hor 
 -^!'. U\ {c) the Iambic Tetrameters in Cat. 2o ; {d) the Choliambus of 
 ( atullus. mentioned j5 22, Ors. 2; {e) the Trochaic Tetrameters in the 
 t ervigilium Veneris ; (/) the lesser Asclepiadean (mentioned i^ 81, No 8) 
 oecumng Hor. Carm. 1, 1 ; 8, 80 ; 4, 8 ; (y) the greater Asclepiadean (^"si, 
 ^o. 0). occurring Hor. Carm. 1, 11 ; 1, 18 ; 4, 10 ; (A) the lonicus a minore 
 111 lior. Carm. 8. 12. 
 
 v..?r;K^/^'^v '^•l^'^'*'"'^^ ^""-'^ '" ^^^^ tragedy are monostichn. Thus the lesser Sapphic 
 
 •i I.; Vi- -L--o'JV'',*/'^^"^ nKuiosiichoii in Sen. Here. Fnr. 830-874; lb. Thv. o4(> 
 
 ~ iV.,. • "'*•''• '-^^-S-^^-- !•.>• Tro. 1013-105!» ; lb. Here. (Et. 1.39-1606. The lesser Asclt- 
 
 nirraA'TcS^^t "j;?"":;!!^^"'». '" ^^\ "^''•c. F..r. 52.5%91: Tro. 375-412; Med. .56-74; 
 
 Kt" CE ■ 1032 Iiai ^^yco'"**" 18 ^h"»* "«cd Sen. Here. Fur. 875-894 ; Med. 75-109 
 
400 
 
 APPENDIX \1l. 
 
 S 16 Oi'Tirn.. The f.-llowins metres are u^ed as cUsticha (which, 
 ^'^^r^Iel^^S^iir^J^^Sst^ -n.^;S!lier ana a Pen.a.e.r 
 
 '"^ ^r;! Hi,.pnnac,ean. consistin, of a Trochaic Dimeter [§ 23, Obs. m, 
 ami an iambic Trimcler Calalect.c (j i'i, OB3. 4, t) . 
 
 , Tht fl„rrtirArc'i.ilocl>ian strophe, consis.in,^' of the greater Archilo- 
 c,]an'"("'i:5) with an iambic Trimeter 
 
 ...,..., ^1 ^ ^J ^ -^- 'Hm.-rc'ann."l.'4. 
 4 Tht lamt^e/colon, co„.i.t,n. of an Iambic Trimeter Aeataleetic, 
 and an Iambic Dimeter Aeataleetic : 
 
 -ii:ii:::it,i.'Hot.Ep.r-io.' 
 
 5. The fi,^t Py.hiambic, consisting of a Uexameter and an lamb.c 
 Dimeter Aeataleetic : . , , , 
 
 6. ;h:Se:on"d 'p;thtt,Lwcrbein/a Hexameter and an Iambic l-ritne- 
 ter Aeataleetic : , , vv i ^ 
 
 — - ' - Y ^^ti'^ri t^ ^ ^ Hor.Elt fc. 
 
 7. Th^ Secoml is^lepiadean, consisting of a Glyeouiau (§ 31, 0) and a 
 lesser Asclepiadean (g 31, 8) : 
 
 - - ; ^ ^;^ Y, '/l - t ^ - I - -• «"■•• Carm. I, 3. 13. 19. 30; 
 
 ^"i;L"Son-.e;)\ap,..c S.™^ being an Aristophanic 
 verse (§ 31, 10), and a greater Sapphic (s 31, 4) , 
 
 "'" - 1 - ,-J ,t" ^ I - - - I - - 1 - -• n<"--Carm.l,S. 
 
 9. rZ First A^vhilLhian, eor.sisting of a Ilexatneter with a Dactylic 
 
 Trimeter Catalectic : 
 
 ^ K^ <J \ -^ ^ "^ 
 _£_ ^ \J \ -C- ^ '^ 
 
 ^ w. Ilor. Curm. 4, 7. 
 
 J. \j 
 
 ^ ^ ^ .\ ^ ^ • ^ .i«.r a TTt^xameter and a Dactylic Tetrameter 
 10. The Alcmanic, bemg a iiLxamtici, duu a j 
 
 Aeataleetic : • , v^ 
 
 ^ ^ ^ ; 1 : : 1 : l^^^ '-^-- «'-■•• ^'-"^i-^- 2«= ^p- '- 
 
 ■^ "^ X^ .^ ^ "^/^ Qt n,t< \ pfumidorod bv the fframmarians as a 
 M,V;oJil't.^'-K}.e^e^Wt -^^^^^^^^^^ (I^M), and Pher. 
 
 crateaii verse (§ 31, 7): 
 
 t I U ^w" 1 1 ^'■"catuU. 17. 18.19. 
 
 PROSODY. 
 
 401 
 
 ri-L^!; th'IIh '."'''• '^/'f f^>Il«wing two metres, taken by the ^ramma- 
 
 T ^- T^^^.^^'cond Arcliilochian, consisting of (a) a Hexameter (b) in 
 Iambic Dimeter Aeataleetic, (.) a Dactylic TrimetirCatalectlf' ^ ^ 
 
 ^iy..l»....i _rf 
 
 -^ «^ w I ^ v-» w I ^. 
 
 -^ ^ \^ \ ^ w ^ 
 
 -^ V-/ 
 
 Hor. Ep. 13. 
 
 ak^ctirTiU dI'^Tio^ TH ''^"; ^^"f f '«S «f («) ^^ Iambic Trimeter Acat- 
 aleciic': ^ Tumeter Catalectic, (c) an Iambic Dimeter Acat- 
 
 -^ v-' \^ I ^ V-/ w I ^ 
 
 ^^Iw^lvy^lw^. Hor. Ep. 11. 
 
 ^ 3§. Tetiiasticha. They are either dicola or tricola • 
 
 AlcJX^i^^t'^u^'^ stanza (dicolon), consisting of three lesser 
 AM.iLpi.iu(.au>» (j5 61, ») and a Glyconian (§ 31, 6) : 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ ^y yy 
 
 J- KJ ^ 
 
 It occurs Hor. Carm. I. G. 15. 24. 33 ; II, 12 ; III, 10. 16 ; IV, 5. 12. 
 
 2. The fourth Asclepiadean (tricoion). consisting of ia) two lesser As- 
 clepiadeans, (6) a Pherecratean, (c) a Glyconian : ^ 
 
 ■^ — I ^ w w I ^ ,^ 
 
 
 It is found Hor. Carm. I, 5. 14. 21. 23 ; III, 7. 13 ; IV, 13. 
 
 SannWc^ersf. i^^^^^^ T^^^- (dicolon), consis'ts of three lesser 
 
 ^appnic vei^es (§ dl, 3), and an Adonic (j^ 27, No. 4) : 
 
 -^ ^ \ -i. — \ ^ 
 -^ W I ^ _ I ^ 
 -^ W W I ^ _ 
 
 
 It occurs in the Cannon Sneculare, in 25 Odes of Hor in Pqf 11 41 
 and in the Chorus Sen. Med. 580-G07. ' * ^^' 
 
 abics^f^Vl^'f './f '1-'^ (tricoion) consists of (^) two Alcaic Hendecasyl- 
 ^il^ dec'af;ilai;i[/;yir2/" " """"'" Hypercatalectic, and (c) an li- 
 
 
 W ^ I _ II ^ I ^ ^ ^ 
 
 ^ -^ I '^ ^ I vy ^ v^ 
 -^ w v-» I ^ v^ ,^ 
 
 Vo» -i. 
 
 It occurs in 37 Odes of Hor. 
 
 LiS» 
 
402 
 
 APPENDIX MI. 
 
 5. The first Glyconian stanza (dicolon) consists of three Glyconians 
 and a Pherecratean : 
 
 s. — \ J. w Kj \ J. yj - 
 
 X. — I X. w <^ I -^ KJ 
 
 It occurs in Cat. 34, but not in Horace. 
 
 iA 39. Pentasticha do not occur in Horace But Catullus "«ff ^ Pen- 
 Ustichon dicolon (Second Glyconian) i" tl^« EiMthalamium (Carm. 61), 
 which consists of four Glyconians with a Pherecratcuu (bee ^ J» o). 
 
 END OF PART L 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 /if 01 
 
 I. NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION, 
 abstinontia, abstinence. Icoiiscientia, comcience. .ffloria, ahrv 
 
 a lolo s!!.' nli ' ''^'"t''^'- Iconstnntui, instancy, kruuuuuticn, gramMar. 
 ^^^<^^nU^, youth, young. Mmnes.. Wtv^. .favnr%.fiu,n^. 
 
 .■'^' . . ^ (^onimcuUix, abstinence. Ihastu, /a//te. 
 
 advena, immigrant, stran- coDtrover.sia, controversy, ' herba, plant. 
 
 9'f 
 
 lenuniia, hardship. 
 
 &iZT\ci)\i\.far7ner. 
 Hijriciihura, agriculture. 
 a la, icing. 
 alaiula, Itrk. 
 
 nWeu'iiltina, foreigner. 
 muewUn^foiiy. 
 
 annit'A'ux., frendnhip. 
 aiiima, breath 
 
 dispute, strife. ' historia, hUtory. 
 
 contiiniacia, disobedience, ifioniiclda, murderer. 
 
 obatinacy, 
 contmnelia, disgrace 
 
 hora, hour. 
 igiiuvia, indolence. 
 
 coil viva, giust, table-corn- icrnominia, disgrace 
 
 panion 
 corona, crown. 
 corriiptela, corruption 
 culpa, guilt. 
 eura. core. 
 
 fi\mbx\i\, provisions, grain, curia, rj)urt, senate-house. 
 
 di-a, goddts^i 
 dementia, /b^^^. 
 de?.idia, laziness. 
 diligeiitia, diligence. 
 distantia, diHance. 
 discipllnu, discipline. 
 disc'ordia, discord. 
 doc'trina, scholarship 
 
 aqua, tvater. 
 
 aquila, eugle. 
 
 ara, altar. 
 
 arrotrantia, arrogance. 
 
 assccla, follower. 
 
 atstutiu, cunning. 
 
 andaeia, boldness. 
 
 avaritia, avarice. 
 
 bar ha, beard. 
 
 Belga, Belgian. 
 
 beiievuleniia, benevolence 
 
 be^tia, beaH. 
 
 bil)rK.theca, library. 
 
 l»la(i(litia,^a««'/'y. 
 
 ealuimiia, slander. 
 
 catena, ckain. fetter. 
 
 caterva, crowd, swurm. 
 
 Cauda, tail. 
 
 causa, ctiute, reason, case. 
 
 eelia, storehouse. 
 
 chart u, mper. 
 
 chiva, club. 
 
 cleriKMitia, cUmency, mild- fossa, 'ditch. 
 
 ijriiorantia, ignorance. 
 i in pe 1 1 sae, expenses. 
 ill) prudent ia, imprudence. 
 incohi, inhabitant. 
 industria, industry. 
 indultrentia, indu'lgtnce. 
 
 custodia, custody, prison. mWrnwo., infamu 
 
 jnjnna, injury, wrong. 
 injustitia, injustice. 
 iunocentia, innocence. 
 iiiopia, want, poverty. 
 insula, island. 
 itividia, envy, hatred. 
 
 na, / 
 
 , .^. .iracundia, f«"^^'' 
 
 Q\*i^'M\UA. elegance, i^aw^y.'jactura, loss. 
 
 ^\o(^\\Q\\Uii^ eloquence, -- - = ^- • ■• 
 
 epistola, letter. 
 
 i]iy^\\\i\,jfable. 
 
 tallacia, intrigue, fallacy. 
 
 i]xn\di,fame, rumor. 
 
 iemina, /Vwa/e. woman. 
 
 feiocia, wild n ess. 
 
 fi'iuc'ia, confidence. 
 
 fi;:ura. figure, form. 
 
 tilia, daughter. 
 
 flaniina. flanie. 
 
 t'oruii\,Jorni. 
 
 II ess 
 ccena, dinner. 
 colonia, colony. 
 cohnnna, column. 
 coinoedia, comedy. 
 coueordia, harmony. 
 
 t'nrmuii. fortune. 
 frequentia, frequency. 
 \\\\l:i. flight. 
 Galiia, Gaul. 
 jfalliiia, ken. 
 Germuniu, Germany, 
 
 ^xxi^X'Mxn, j ustice. 
 hicriina, tear. 
 laetitia, gladness. 
 libra, pound. 
 litrera, letter. 
 lingua, tongue, language. 
 luna, moon. 
 luxuria, luxury. 
 niedeelna, medicine, relief, 
 nu'Uioria, memory. 
 ni"rcatuia. cxmmei'ce. 
 militia, military service. 
 miseria, misery. 
 
 niisericordia, pity, syrri' 
 pathy. 
 
 modestia, modesty, 
 mora, delay. 
 narura, nature. 
 uauLa, sailor. 
 
404 
 
 necrliirentiii, negligence, 
 obediontiii, obedience. 
 ora, shore. 
 opera, labor, effort. 
 patieiitia. p'ttmnce. 
 puiria, Koae's) c<>untry. 
 peon Ilia, money. 
 perti.Ha, treachery. 
 perfufXa, deserter. 
 perseveruiitia, persever- 
 ance. 
 philosophia, philosophy. 
 pirilta, pirate. 
 poe» > a, pun ishment. 
 poet a poet. 
 porta, i/ate. 
 prseUu, booty. 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 iprce^tantia, exrellence. 
 \)\<.^\\\\i:\:\^ province . 
 pnidentia, P^'Wt^e/K^^' 
 pnelhi, girt. 
 piisTtia, battle. 
 rapliia, rablery. 
 
 IreiTiiia, qnet-n,. 
 rciTiila, ruU. 
 rlj.a, bank (of a river.) 
 rosa, ro.^e. 
 sajvitia, crnelty. 
 ^agilta, arrow. 
 sapifutia, wisdom. 
 r^eli"la, s<'h"oL 
 seieiitia, knowledge, 
 stTil)a, scribe. 
 sella, chair. 
 
 f^<iniQr\t\nyf>entencejOpinio% 
 >\\\iJi,/orest. 
 >tatua, statue. 
 Stella, 4ar. 
 superl)ia. pride. 
 tabula, table, pirtare. 
 terra, earth, cnmlry, land. 
 traLM-Mlia, tragedy. 
 tristitia, sadness. 
 \\n>\i\,vav^. 
 
 ve 11 i ft, permission jorgit*' 
 ness. 
 
 via, way, road. 
 
 victoria, victory. 
 
 vi<;ihuitia, vl<jilanc^. 
 
 vita, life. 
 
 tutela* jirotection. 
 
 II. NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 1. WITH THE EXDINOS U8 AN» VTH. 
 
 acervns, heap. 
 
 Uilvor^arius, adversary, 
 enemy. 
 
 aetimlns, rival. 
 
 serarinm, treasury. 
 
 fiBviim, age (period ot 
 lime.) 
 
 ».\\\\i:\\^, friend. 
 
 uiiiinus, soul^ 7nind, cour- 
 age. 
 
 aniuihts, ring. 
 «imiis, year 
 
 coD^ilinm, plan, advice,' jraudmm Joy 
 
 purj'Ose, itieasure 
 eon>oriiuin, company. 
 coiivieiiun. abuse. 
 di'cretiun, decree. 
 (lelieliiiii, misdeincanor. 
 de^illerinln, desire. 
 letrimcutiun, loss., dam- 
 age. 
 \\\y:\X\\f^, a finger. 
 
 liscipuliis, sc/wlar, disci- 
 ple. 
 
 '^Znentu.n, argumerd,Uocnme}mun, evUence. 
 
 proof Ulolus,y;-a«'/. 
 
 artiticMUTi, artijice, tricK. 
 anrmn, gold. 
 auxiliiitn. help, assistance 
 uvus, grandfitth(r. 
 barharus, barbarian. 
 helium, ivar. 
 beneticiuui, benefit, favor 
 brachiuiu, arm 
 
 calamus, reed, pen. 
 <i&,\\\\>\\^. field. 
 ca 1 1< I i « i at u s , cand idate. 
 Capitoluiin, the Capitol. 
 captlvns, prisoner. 
 cera.-^u^, cherry-tree. 
 cerebrum, brain. 
 c\\n\s, food. 
 circulus, circle. 
 coelum, heaven. 
 
 domiuus, master. 
 doMJUS, house. 
 Ion u 111, gift, present. 
 eqnus, horse. 
 
 exeidium, » destruction. 
 exitiuin, ) 
 exeuipluin, example. 
 \\\\nn\,fate. 
 till us. son. 
 tlairitium, crime. 
 
 German us, a German. 
 ^la<iius. sword. 
 humus, ground. 
 imperium, empire, pow- 
 er. 
 iiuvn«lium, cnnfiagrafion. 
 ineepluui, um/eHaling, 
 inireuiuin, mind, genius^ 
 
 tale /it. 
 iniuiieus, enemy. 
 iiiitiuiii, beginning. 
 Italus, Italian. 
 Judaeus, Jew. 
 T^UKiw'www. judgm,eni. 
 }\\\i\\\n.jake. 
 'iumentuin, ho)se hiraft) 
 
 pissum, command, behest 
 
 Latin us, Latin. 
 
 lectus, beil. 
 
 lefriituui, bequest. 
 
 letratus, ambassador. 
 
 letum, d*-ath (violent) 
 
 11 hertus, freed man. 
 
 loeus, place. 
 
 tluvius, river. 
 
 forum, market-place (the|lueus, grove 
 
 place fur judicial busi- lupus, wolt 
 
 ncs.s in Rome), 
 frajrnientuin, fragment, 
 
 piece. 
 frumentum, grain, provi 
 
 sidiis 
 
 cTlles',\Vmr.o%€, gaiU, ' fuoduuientum, founda 
 
 board ^'^'"" 
 
 commod-im, advantage. fundus, estate. 
 oomiuercium, commtrcs. 'iurtuni, tfu/t. 
 
 nuiluui, evil. 
 niedicus, physician. 
 iiUMubrum, limb. 
 ine!iducium,,/''</^6Aoo<f. 
 men*lieus, beggar, 
 merit um, merit. 
 inetallum, rnetal. 
 miraeulum, miracle. 
 muiiu men turn, manumeni 
 
 momtntwrn, force, impor- 
 tance. 
 
 morbus, dise^ise, sickness. 
 
 niodu-», manner, means. 
 
 in 11 nd us, wi>rld. 
 
 mudinientum, fortifica- 
 tion. 
 
 muriis. wall. 
 
 ncirotium, business, affair. 
 
 Humerus, number. 
 
 ir.unmus, ce»in. 
 
 iiuntius, m4;ssenger, mes- 
 sage, news. 
 
 ecu I us, eye. 
 
 odium, hatred. 
 
 ottieium, duty, service. 
 
 oj)pidanus, inhabitant (of 
 a town). 
 
 opf>idutY^, town. 
 
 0[>probrium, reproach, 
 
 ornumentum, ornament. 
 
 otium, leisure. 
 
 oraeuium, nracle. 
 
 patricius, patrician. 
 
 jieeeatum, sin, offence. 
 
 pertutriuin, refuge. 
 
 j>ericulum, danger. 
 
 piiilosoplius, philosopher. 
 
 plausirum, wagon. \ 
 
 Afer, African. 
 a^'er, field. 
 adulter, adulterer. 
 aper, boar. 
 arbiter, umpire. 
 armiirer, armor-bearer. 
 auster, south-wind. 
 cancer, crab. 
 caper, goat. 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 plebepis, plebeian. 
 I'cenus, Carthaginian. 
 populus, pettple. 
 populus, poplar. 
 praeceptum, precept. 
 j»ra}tVetus, jirrfect. 
 priemium, reward. 
 praesidiuin, garrison. 
 pratum, meadow. 
 pretiiim, value, price. 
 prineii>ium. principle 
 prceiiiun, battle. 
 promissum, promise. 
 proj)iiiquiis, relative. 
 propositum, purpose. 
 retrnum, kingdom. 
 reus, accused. 
 remedium, remedy, 
 Komatiius, Roman, 
 saxum, rock. 
 scutum, shield. 
 secretum, secret. 
 sepulerum, grave. 
 servus, sl<iVf. 
 siearius, assassin. 
 Siculus, Sicilian. 
 sign urn, sign, signal, sta- 
 I tue. 
 Isocius, ally, companion. 
 
 2. K- STEMS. 
 
 coluber, serpent. 
 culter, knife. 
 faber, mechanic. 
 irener, son-in-law, 
 lil>er, book. 
 liberi, children. 
 inatrister, teacher. 
 minister, assistant. 
 oleaster, wild olive. 
 
 405 
 
 solum, soil. 
 
 sonuiium, dream. 
 
 sonnius, shep. 
 
 Spartanus, Spartan. 
 
 spectaculum, sight. 
 
 (Stilus, pen, pencil. 
 
 stimulus, sjyur. 
 
 stipend ium, pay. fee. 
 
 studium, zeal, effort, study 
 
 suttrajjfium, vote. 
 
 taurus, steer. 
 
 tectum, roof. 
 
 templum, temple. 
 
 testimonium, testimony. 
 
 tribunus, trifmne (repre- 
 sentative of the peofile). 
 
 triumph us, triumph. 
 
 tyrannus, tyrant, 
 
 vadum,./'(7ra!. 
 
 vallum, rampart. 
 
 \QX\e\\\\m, poison. 
 
 verbum, word. 
 
 viclnus, neighbor. 
 
 vie us, village, street. 
 
 vinculum, bond, chain, 
 
 vinum, wine. 
 
 vitium, vice, fault. 
 |Votum, vow. 
 t valgus, 7nob. 
 
 onager [onafrrus]. wild ass 
 pinaster, wild pine. 
 puer, boy. 
 presbyter [eeclesiasticaJ 
 
 Latin], elder. 
 sijjnifer. standard-bearer 
 ^occr, father-in-law. 
 vesper, evening. 
 vir, 7nan. 
 
 in. NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 adolcscens, young man. 
 
 aer. air. 
 
 fes, bronze, brass. 
 
 aeias, aoe. 
 
 amor, Uwe. 
 
 Hnimul, animal. 
 
 anser, goose. 
 
 upis, hee. 
 
 arbor, tree. 
 ui's, art, 
 artlfex, artist. 
 arx, castle. 
 Ailieniensis, Athenian. 
 
 auctor, author. 
 
 auetoritas, authority. 
 
 auris, ear. 
 
 avis, bird, 
 
 bos, ox, cow. 
 
 brevitas, shortness. 
 
 cadaver, corpse. 
 
 caedes, mur'Ur, slaughter. 
 
 ealamitas, disader. 
 
 calcar, spur. 
 
 eulor, heat. 
 
 caput, head, capital, 
 
 car bo, charcoal. 
 
 career, prison. 
 carmen, poem, 
 euro, ffes/i, meat. 
 celeritas, swiftness. 
 certamen, strife, struggU. 
 eivis, citizen,' 
 ci vitas, state, city. 
 elades, deftat. 
 clamor, shouting, 
 cVdx>x>\^, fleet. 
 clavis, key. 
 cognomen, surname. 
 oollis, hill. 
 
 T 
 
406 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 color, color. 
 couK's, coinpankm. 
 coin lit io, ci'intitiofi. 
 
 coiiiuriitio, von-viiac;t- •, -,— 
 
 coiiViu-tu io, habit, cud»m\Uu\ Uuef. 
 consul, consul [ouu of the! turor,./ '/ry. 
 twoc'liiet-ni:igsirutct>ol liisii>, club 
 
 the licjhtiung that ap- 
 
 PEAHS. 
 
 funis, r"pe. 
 Uxwns./uneral. 
 
 KoiiieJ. 
 cor, heart. 
 corpus, bi/di/. 
 crus, leg. 
 
 eustos, ijuanl, guardian. 
 «tefeiisor, Ut/endtr. 
 dens, to<>tk. 
 climcuilus, dijirulfi/. 
 dijrui'iis, ditjiuti/. 
 (iisputiitio, discussion. 
 doior, jD nn. 
 
 dux, kaltf, commander. 
 emtio, purchase. 
 eint"r, paickaser, h"yer. 
 eqm>, Uioiuan) knight^ 
 
 hitrsitnan. 
 error, mi-take. 
 exousutio, tJTftiee. 
 expediiio, expedition. 
 
 lueinus, d^ed. 
 
 factio, part//^ /action. 
 
 falx, .sickle. 
 
 fuinca, hunger. 
 
 Ww or, /a cor. 
 
 tVbris,/t-ivr. 
 
 fel, bile, gall. 
 
 tims, lloiit, end, bonnd^irT/ 
 
 ^cimau.jlamen [pkikst of 
 
 A SPECIAL DKITV]. 
 
 ^on^jlower. 
 
 fluMK-n, river. 
 
 tbedu^s, treat//. 
 
 fo\\^,/(ju/itain, source. • 
 
 tbrtiiutlo, bntveri/. 
 
 I'ruter, brother 
 
 i'nxxi^, fraud. 
 
 friirus, cold. 
 
 frous I tis ), f» re /lead, front 
 
 frons {t\iA).f(dtagej Uavts. 
 
 i'vuK, jield fruit. 
 
 i^'Y'"'' [lightning. 
 
 Fulinen, the liglitninjr 
 that 8TK1KE8 ; /ulgur, 
 
 I ii.'i •■ ■, ^- — . _ _ 
 
 i/cMis, pe'ple, nation, trine. 
 Jciius, kind, race, gend*r. 
 gnivitiis. weight, dignity, 
 
 gravity. 
 errox, herd, 
 
 luirn>f»i'X, soothsayer. 
 heredit;is, inheri'ance. 
 hen-s, htir. heiress. 
 I»ieni8, Winter. 
 homo, man. 
 liohOrt, li'ihor. 
 host is,' enemy, fi>e. 
 Iiuiinnitas, humanity. 
 \)f\\\^. jire. 
 imiiLro, inuige. 
 imb(.'r, .shower. 
 imperatof, general. 
 ill tans. 2 child: 
 ijiterro^aiio, question. 
 iter, much. Journey, road. 
 juveiiis, youth, young man 
 juv^■nlu^, youth, young 
 
 age. 
 labor, labor, hardship. 
 
 Uic, milk. 
 
 lapis, stone. 
 
 \:i\i», praise. 
 
 le>;io, legion. 
 
 lepus, hare. 
 
 U'X, law. 
 
 lihi-rtas, liberty. 
 
 lil^do, por-'sion, 
 
 lis, lawsuit. 
 
 lit us. coast. 
 
 loiitritudo, length, 
 
 lux, Itght. 
 
 ma<;niiUilo, greatness. 
 margo, margin. 
 in AS, mak. 
 mater, mother. 
 mens, viind. 
 merces, pay, wages. 
 merx, ware. 
 messis, Ji^rvest. 
 
 miles, sr>l,JieT. 
 moiis, 7n">inta%n. 
 mors, death. 
 inos, habit, custom. 
 mulier,' woman. 
 ] miiltilutlo, inultitudii. 
 i\\\\\\\\>, gft. 
 mils, mouse. 
 natio,* nation, 
 nuvis. ship. 
 nix, snoUK 
 notnen, name. 
 nox, night. 
 Mumt'ii, dtity, 
 nux, nut. 
 ob>es. ho.4age. 
 ob>idio. sitge. 
 occa^io, occasion. 
 onus, buiden. 
 opinii», opinion. 
 o\>\n)YU\\\\\ii^,opl>ort unity 
 
 opus, work. 
 orator, orator. 
 orbis, circle. 
 ordo, order, rank. 
 oiiiTo, origin. 
 'OS 'oris), ni"uth. 
 ort (o*>is), 6<y««. 
 ovi>, shttp. 
 pains, marsh. 
 paiii>, bread. 
 \n'kr*i\\», partnt. 
 paries, wail (of a house), 
 pars, part, party. 
 \K\Wr, father. 
 paupertas, poverty. 
 pavor, ti emblcng. 
 pax. p^ace. 
 pecten, comb. 
 \>\ty:\\\>,brea'^t. 
 pecus [u Jisj, head of catiU 
 peous [6ri>J, cattle lU the 
 
 ABSTRACT. 
 
 pedes, foot-solditr . 
 
 pes,/oO^ 
 
 piseis,^>A. 
 
 plebs, the Plebeians, 
 
 pondurt, weight. 
 
 pons, bridge. 
 
 pout i fex, chief -priest. 
 
 praeceptor, teoclur. 
 
 1 ^,/r^r«,/rtK«,aPOUTiCALoruTEBAKTencmy; i«im.cu«, a private encrty; hostis, 
 
 ' -/^S,7:r'eLe's own children; infantes to chUdren in general, fron. the riRsr to the 
 
 BEVKNTH year. 
 
 1 J/«Z»^r is opposed to rir; /'7«'"'« to ma«. , ^-^^ ?„ nB-virRA.t 
 
 4 I^'atio is a FoBKioN (generally barbarous) nation. Gens \% nation in oknebal 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 407 
 
 praB'lo, robtfer. 
 
 priiiceps, chief. 
 
 pulcritudo, I'eauty. 
 
 j>ulviriar, couch, cushion. 
 
 pulvis, dust. 
 
 quaj>tio, questUm, trial. 
 
 qiiies, repose. 
 
 radix, root, 
 
 ratio, system, method, rea- 
 son. 
 
 regrio, reyioyi. 
 
 relii:i<i, reverence, conscien- 
 tiousness, religion. 
 
 rex, king. 
 
 ru«, country. 
 
 nacerdos, pri 
 
 88 
 
 (>a 
 sal 
 
 f>s, priest, 
 salt. 
 
 cell, C»t<C/t/. 
 
 sal US, welfare. 
 saiijriiis, blood. 
 see! US, crime. 
 Bcriptor, writer. 
 
 [secuns, axe. 
 jsedes, seat. 
 
 soLTes, crop [standing], 
 senator, senator. 
 senectus, old age. 
 senex, ol/ man. 
 |Sermo, language, speech. 
 |.'*ocietas, company, 
 sol, sun. 
 soror, sister. 
 Isors, lot. 
 stercus, manure. 
 sus, swine. 
 Huspici(», suspicion, 
 temeritas, rashness. 
 tem{)estas, storm. 
 tern pus, time. 
 i\mov, fear. 
 
 traditio, surrender, deliv- 
 ery. 
 turris, tower. 
 
 tussis, cough. 
 
 nrbs, city. 
 
 utilitas, usefulness, 
 
 uxor, wife. 
 
 valetutlo, health. 
 
 vail is, valley. 
 
 vas, vasis, vessel. 
 
 vas, vadis, bondsjtuin, 
 
 vates, seer. 
 
 vectlsral, tax. 
 
 ver, spring. 
 
 Veritas, truth. 
 
 vestis, oarment. 
 
 virjro, virgin. 
 
 virtus, braVf.ry, virtuo. 
 
 v\;<. force, power, violence. 
 
 volujitas, pleasure, 
 
 vox, voice, word. 
 
 vulnu», wound. 
 
 IV. NOUNS OF THE FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 ipradu 
 
 IS, degree. 
 
 acus, needU. 
 
 a«f>eetus, .sight. [frustus, taste. 
 
 aditus, access, approach. habitus, hearing, plight. 
 
 ambitus, bribt-ry [tor ob-i ictus, stroke. 
 
 tainincf okfue.J 
 
 anus, oil wmnan. 
 
 appetituH, desire. 
 
 areus, arch. 
 
 audit us, hearing. 
 
 canttis, song. 
 
 casus, accident, case. 
 
 census, census. 
 
 coetus, assembly. 
 
 coiieursus, concourse. 
 
 conspectus, sight. 
 
 consuiatus, consulship. 
 
 cultiis, culture. 
 
 currus, wagon. 
 
 cursus, course. 
 
 delectus, choice, draft. 
 
 equitatus, cavalry. 
 
 exercilus, army. 
 
 exitus, issue, end. 
 
 fletus, weeping. 
 
 fluetus,^>W. 
 
 fremitus, noise. 
 
 fructu.s, fruit. 
 ... 
 jfemitus, wintmg. 
 
 gestus, bearing. 
 
 I impetus, attack, violence. 
 intellectus, intelligence. 
 int«;ritus, ilestruction. 
 1 act us, loss. 
 lacus, lake. 
 1 net us, 7nourning. 
 lusus, play. 
 lux us, luxury. 
 niagistratus, magistrate. 
 man us, hand, baud. 
 n\GU\*,fear. 
 inotiis, motion. 
 nuriis, daoghter-in-law. 
 nutiis, htnt. 
 occasiis, setting. 
 oltactus, smell. 
 ortus, rising. 
 partus, birth. 
 pen us, provisions. 
 passus, step. 
 porticus, 2^'^^'tico. 
 portus, harbor. 
 potus, drink. 
 principatus, supremacy. 
 progreHsut^, progress. 
 
 quae-^tus, gain, 
 quercus, oak. 
 questus, complaint, 
 reditus, return, 
 i?>ii\ins, forest. 
 senatus, senate, 
 sensus, sense, 
 sex us, sex. 
 sinus, bosom,, gulf. 
 situs, situation. 
 socrus, m^other in-law. 
 spccus, cave. 
 spiritiis, breath, spirit, 
 status, state. 
 strepitiis, noise. 
 sumtus, expense 
 tact us, touch. 
 toiiitriis, thunder. 
 Iribunatus, tribunate, 
 tribus, tribe. 
 tumultus, tumuU. 
 us us, use. 
 versus, verse. 
 vestltus, attire. 
 victiis, sustenance, 
 visus, sight. 
 vuhus, glance, mien. 
 
 V. NOUNS OF THE FIFTH DECLENSION. 
 
 acies, keenness, line 
 
 Itattle. 
 barbaries, rudeness. 
 
 of 
 
 cresaries, head of hair, 
 canities, hoariness. 
 oarici», rottenness. 
 
 congeries, heitp^piU, 
 dies, day. 
 diluvies, deluge. 
 
408 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 eflfifrics, imagf. 
 
 ehivies, washing cucay, m- 
 
 vntiaiion. 
 facie:! * , facfi 
 
 materies, material., timber. 
 im-ridifs, midJay. 
 molitie^*, effeunnacrj. 
 muudities, deannesa. 
 
 ytermcies, d^suuction. 
 j.liinities, plain. 
 prosreiiies, lineage., pro- 
 geny. 
 rabies, fury, madness. 
 
 res, thing, nj^air. 
 vaiiies, bloody matter, 
 .seabios, itch. 
 sesrnitieH, lazinexn. 
 
 'crie - », e'r-i ' f, >' • 
 
 fiAv^, faith. 
 placit's, si/wothntKS, ice. 
 iutjluvies, gltittouy. 
 luxuries, luxury. 
 macies, leanntss. 
 
 l)ecies,/or//i, shapv. 
 superficies, surface. 
 
 ftn^nstiae, narrows^ nar- 
 row places. 
 
 arirutiae, xcit. 
 
 Atlienae, Athens. 
 
 bi^'ae, tico-horse chariot. 
 
 CalfJiaae, the first of the 
 month. 
 
 cunae, cradle. 
 
 delioiae, delight. 
 
 diviti:ie, riches. 
 
 excul)iae, watches., senti- 
 
 iiel/i. 
 exscquiae, funeral. 
 exuviae, spoils. 
 
 arm a, arms. 
 armamenta, armament. 
 catioelli, bnlustradts. 
 eibaria, viHiKils. 
 clathri, trellis. 
 codieilli, note-booh., writ 
 mg. 
 
 VI. PLURALIA TANTCM. 
 
 1. FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 facetiae, pleasantry. 
 feriae, vacation. _ 
 iudutiae. armistice. 
 int'eriae, sacrifices in honor , 
 
 of the dtad. 
 uumwU'd^', enmity. 
 iiisidiae, ambascade. 
 lapieidiinie, quarry. 
 inannbiae. booty. 
 niiiiae, threat. 
 Nonae. Noms (the 5th or 
 
 7th of tlic iiioiillO. 
 nujxae, nonSffise. 
 nundinae, market. 
 
 2. SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 crepnndia, rattle. 
 eunalMila. cradle. 
 exta, intestiiia, entrails. 
 fasti, calendar. 
 lamenta, wailing, lamen- 
 tation. 
 
 nnptiae, rcedding. 
 parietiiiae, old walls. 
 phalcrae, trappings. 
 quadriirae, four-hory. 
 
 chariot. 
 reliqviiae, remains. 
 sallnae, saH-works. 
 st-ahie, ladder. 
 seopae, br(M>m. 
 S\Tac'Q>ae, Syracusa. 
 teiiebrae, darkne.^s. 
 Tliebae, ThMs. 
 trieae. trijies. 
 xiiUiiQ, folding doors. 
 
 liheri, chiliren. 
 pru^eordia, diaphragm, 
 sLTta, garlands. 
 s])olia, spoils. 
 virijulta, bushes. 
 
 Alpe», Alps. 
 altaria, altar. 
 aml)ai:es, evasion, digres- 
 sion. 
 com pedes, /p^^^r. 
 casses, hunter's net. 
 cervices, n^'ck. 
 fauces, throat, defiles. 
 fides, lyre, lute. 
 fraces, dregs of oil. 
 
 artu», limhs. 
 
 8. THIRD DECLENSIOX. 
 
 ilia,/a/^^(ofthebody). 
 lautia, presents to ambas- 
 sadors. 
 leuuires, spectres. 
 majores, ancestors. 
 numes, shades. 
 nioeuia, ivalh (of a city), 
 luuuia, offu'ial duties. 
 uares, nostrils. 
 optimates, aristocracy. 
 
 penates, hottsehold godi» 
 preces, prayer. 
 proceres, nobles. 
 Quirltes, Romans. 
 renes, kidneys. 
 sordcs, filth. 
 tormina, colic patTis. 
 vcpres, thorns. 
 verbera, scouraing. 
 viscera, entrails. 
 
 4. rorRTlI DECLENSION. 
 
 Idus, the Ides, (13th or|Qninqnatrus, a/j^^WO* «/ 
 15th of the mouth.) | Miner r a. 
 
 TOCABULARIES. 
 
 409 
 
 81NODLAK. 
 
 aqua, wafer. 
 
 VII. HETEROLOGICAL NOUNS. 
 
 1. FIKBT DECLENSION. 
 
 I PLURAL. 
 
 '+aqnae, rnedicinal springs 
 
 t^upiac, troops. 
 
 cupeuiae [cupedia, orumj datritiee. 
 
 turtunae, riches. 
 
 gratiae, thanks [only in the phrase 
 ^gratias ayere,' to return thanks], 
 
 tlitterae, epistle, papers, sciences, litera- 
 ture. 
 
 operae, workmen. 
 
 oopia, abundance. 
 
 cupedia, daintiness. 
 
 yoriium, fortune. 
 
 gr-diin^ /avor, influence, thanks. 
 
 httera, letter (of the alphabet). 
 
 opera, effort, labor. 
 
 anxilium, help. 
 bun inn. a good. 
 c\\m^,food. 
 castrinn, castle 
 
 2. SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 auxilia, resources, avxUiary troops, 
 bona, goods., property. 
 cibi, victuals. 
 [castra, camp. 
 
 ' -—^- casira, camp. 
 
 epuluin, ba/iipiet. 
 hurt us, garden. 
 iMHuuli-nentuni, impediment. 
 Indus, play. game. 
 
 rostrum, htak. 
 
 ifides, temple. 
 <:urcQr, pri.ton. 
 facultas, /i/c///^y. 
 nataiis, birth day. 
 (ops) opis, help. 
 pars, part. 
 Hal, salt. 
 vis, power, force. 
 
 absurdu«», absurd. 
 accural us, ace a rate. 
 acerbus, bitter, hard (of 
 
 pains), 
 acutus, acutej pointed, 
 
 sharp. 
 adver.sus, adverse. 
 ivjrrdtus, stc'k. 
 ae(pius, even, fair. 
 acternus. eternal. 
 
 i^y^^ntta, strange, foreign. 
 altus, deep, high. 
 ambiifuus. atnbtguous. 
 ninicun, friendly. 
 anipliis, ample. 
 an<.'iistus, narrow. 
 aniiquus, ancient, old. 
 «pert us, o/>en. 
 apt Us, apt, fit. 
 arduus. hard, difiicnU. 
 arenoiius, sandy. 
 
 epului, dashes (on the table)' 
 
 i\\on\,park. 
 
 tiinpednnenta, baggage. 
 
 thidi. th^. public gauits. 
 
 froslra, the Rostra (stage for speakers.) 
 
 3. TULRD DECLENSION. 
 
 ta?des, aedium, house. 
 
 ciirceres, barriers of a race-course 
 
 +tacultales, property, means. 
 
 natales, parentage. 
 
 opes, power, wealth. 
 
 tpartes, party. 
 
 sjiles, tvitticisms. 
 
 vires, strength. 
 
 VIII. MOVABLE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. WITH THE ENDING US. 
 
 aridus, </rj/. \Go^^ienin^, contented. 
 
 assiduus, assiduous, zeal- contrarius, contrary, ad. 
 
 ous. 
 attentus, attentive, 
 
 verse. 
 cra.ssus, thick. 
 
 aufTiistus, august, vener-\ crwtwiws,, bloody. 
 
 able. 
 
 aureus, golden. 
 
 beat us, hapvy. 
 
 benevulus, Otnetolent. 
 
 bcnitriuis, kind, mild. 
 
 bonus, goitd. 
 Ccnpcns, blind. 
 cali(his, hot. 
 call id us, crafty. 
 eariLs, dear. 
 cast us, chaste. 
 cant us, cautious 
 
 cupidus, desirous, eager. 
 decorus, decent, honordblo, 
 densus, dense. 
 ditftnis, worthy. 
 disertus, eloquent. 
 di versus, different. 
 divinus, divine. 
 doctus, learned. 
 dubius, doubtful. 
 durus, hard (for 
 
 touch), 
 ^^e^ww^, poor, needy. 
 
 the 
 
 ceisus, high (of trees, 'eirreirius, «r,-e//^„,j;; 
 masts, (fee.) erroneus, (?/'r'/««ow*. 
 
 cerlus, certain. 
 clarus, noble, renowned. 
 
 7 - - ■ 
 
 exiguus, small. 
 eximius, excellent. 
 
 t The plurals tbus marked occur also in slgniflcalions, aajwering their sixoiTLAa meanl^ 
 
4:10 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 411 
 
 exitiosns, pemiriovs. 
 exterus, \ foreian, exter 
 exteriius, ( nal. 
 
 ^Giiwwdw^, fertile. 
 ferns, mid. 
 ft'ssns, tired. 
 f[A\\i^, faithful. 
 tiiutimus, neighboring. 
 finmis, firm. 
 foedus, ahominaliU. 
 tlairitiosuti, criminal. 
 frig'ulus, cold. 
 friictudsus, profifdf'le. 
 funt'Stus, pernicious. 
 
 i'uinrixs, future. 
 generosus, «0*/«', generous* 
 gloridsus, glorUuts, boad- 
 
 ful. 
 Graeous, Grecian, Greek. 
 gratus, thankful, p^a-^ant. 
 honestus, honest., virtuous., 
 
 honorable. 
 liuniaims, humane. 
 idouens,}?/^, adapted. 
 igiiarns, ignorant. 
 iirnavus, ^</z^, cowardly. 
 \il\\ii\\^,Jiery. 
 'Yx^\o\\\\\\ib»\\'!^.,dtsgracefuL 
 
 imbecillus, »/'et/i-. 
 iinnieiisus, immense. 
 iininodicu**, immoderate. 
 imimuxliis, unclean. 
 iinmiitatus, unchanged, 
 
 unchangeable. 
 imperilus, inexperienced. 
 iinprohus, impious. 
 inaudltus, unheard of. 
 incertns, uncertain. 
 inco^nitus, vuknown. 
 indiornus, vnworthi/. 
 iiidoctus, unlearned. 
 iiieplus, absurd. 
 inexspectatus, unexpected 
 intestns, hostile. 
 
 intiintiis, infinite. 
 
 iiitrfiiiosus, ingenious. 
 
 iuizratus, ungrateful. 
 
 iiiiquiit*, unfair. 
 
 injiistus, unjust. 
 
 insauus, insane. 
 
 i us pe rat ns , ^/ nhoped for. 
 
 inti'stliius, inner, internal 
 
 iiiultns, unrectnged. 
 
 inveteratus, inveterate. 
 
 invictus, invincible. 
 iiividus, enviou-'^. 
 invitus, unwilling. 
 
 »i»pur, rough. 
 
 iracnndiis ) ^^ 
 iratus J ^'^ 
 
 irritns, useless, int-ffectual. 
 ji'jfimis, <//'y. ei ro/nous. 
 jucundiis, pleasant, agree- 
 
 1 aft/*'. 
 Justus, ^"w-s/!. 
 laboriosus, industrious. 
 luetus, f//</fi. 
 luevus, /^/"^ (of the hand 
 
 or side). 
 Laiiiius, Latin. 
 latns, broad. 
 liifneus, wooden. 
 
 lollL'US, iJO'<f/. 
 
 madid us, «'<'<• 
 rnaestus, /*</'/, sorrotrful 
 matriiiricus, magnificent^ 
 I SpUntlul. 
 
 mairiius, f/rf-a^, /ar^e. 
 malus, A*/(/. 
 inaiiifestns, manifest. 
 tnaritiuuis, i/uiritime, na- 
 val. 
 incdius, middle. 
 minis, wonderful. 
 modenitus, moderate (full 
 
 of moderation), 
 modicus, moilerute, incon- 
 
 sidt ruble. 
 moilestus, modest. 
 tmtlestus, unpleasant. 
 morih\mdus, dying. 
 muiulus, clean. 
 uuituus, mutual. 
 neoessarius, necessary. 
 necopiiiatus, unforeseen. 
 iiefarius, nefarious. 
 novus, now. 
 
 noxuis, hurtful, injurious 
 nuduH, naked, bare. 
 obseurus, obscure, dark. 
 occult us, hidden.^ secret. 
 opuk-ntus, wealthy. 
 oliosus, idle. 
 
 parutus, ready, prepared. 
 j)arcus, economical. 
 parvus, small, little. 
 paternus, paternal. 
 percirriiuis,yiom.'/Ai. 
 pertidus, perfidious, 
 
 treacherous. 
 pcriculosus, dangerous. 
 pcritus, experience il. 
 pernioiosus, pernicious. 
 pcrj)etiius, perpetual. 
 
 perspicuus, clt<tr, pernpi 
 
 cuous. 
 placidus, gentle, mild. 
 
 2. K- STEMS. 
 
 ater, black. 
 
 aurifcr, currying gold. 
 
 phis, pious. 
 
 pU'tms, fnU. 
 
 prau'ipuus, principal, es- 
 pecial. 
 
 prjpclarus, renowned^ ex- 
 cellent. 
 
 pretiosus, valuable. 
 
 privutus, private. 
 
 probjis, honf.<t. 
 
 prodiius, proi/igal. 
 
 prolan us, profane. 
 
 propinquus, mar. 
 
 YT^^\}r\y\^, prom r, peculiar, 
 
 p\ihlicus, public, 
 ynvws, pure. 
 (piietus, quiet 
 varus, «-a/v. 
 rectus, right, correct. 
 regius, royal. 
 reliiriosus, consri^ntioua, 
 ritliculus, ridiculous. 
 rotund us, round. 
 Romainis, Roman. 
 >acvus, cruel. 
 sal V us, safe, healthy. 
 sancHis, holy. 
 saiuis, sound. 
 secri'tus, secret. 
 securus, safe, secure. 
 seditio^us, rebellious. 
 >udidus, active, busy. 
 scmpiiernus, eternal. 
 >crenus. serene!; placid. 
 scvCtus, S'cere. 
 sobrius, sober. 
 ^ordi<lus, m-an, vulgar 
 >pLM;i6sus, plausible. 
 studiosus. Zealous. 
 ^U\\U\><, foolish. 
 stretiuus, brace. 
 subitus, sudden. 
 >uperbus, proud. 
 tardus, sl^nv. 
 tcnierarius, rash. 
 •empostiviis, <<mf/.y. 
 timid us, timid. 
 trantpiillus, tranquil. 
 universus, universal^ 
 
 whole. 
 uri>anus, polite. 
 validus, strong. 
 van us, vain. 
 varius, variftus. 
 va'itu^, vast, vaste. 
 verecundus, respeetfvL 
 vcrus, trup. 
 vetu>tus, old. 
 violentus, violent. 
 voluntarius, voluntary. 
 
 dexXer rig?ct (of the hunJ| miser, wretclied. 
 
 or side/, 
 fru <ri fu r,fru it-bearing. 
 glabcr, smooth. 
 impi/^er, cutive. 
 intcirer, unhurt^ complete. 
 lacer, torn. 
 liber, free. 
 macer, Uan. 
 
 riik'er, black. 
 
 sacer, sacred. 
 
 satur, mted. 
 
 pestiter (pestiferus), jp^s- scaber, scurfy. 
 
 tiferous. ]siiilster, l^ft. 
 
 purer, lazy. taeccr (tetcr), abominahle. 
 
 prosper y more frequent Xenar, tender. 
 
 jir<)>perus i, prosptrous. 
 pulelier, beautiful. 
 ruber, red. 
 
 vafcr, crafty. 
 
 nbsens, absent. 
 acer, sharp. 
 admirai)ilis, admirable. 
 airrestis, rustic, uncuUi 
 
 vated. 
 alacer, cJceerfid. 
 aiicopa, doubtful. 
 Ai\\(i\\\{.'nsU,' Athenian. 
 atrox, atroi-lous. 
 au.lax, l>old. 
 brevj.*, short. 
 cailcbs, unmarried. 
 oamf.ester, level [of 
 
 eountrv.] 
 
 IX. ADJECTIVES OF COMMON 
 
 heavy, serious, 
 
 gravis, 
 grave. 
 Iicbcs, dull. 
 
 Ilispanieiisis, Ilispanian. 
 Iiostllis, hostile. 
 humilis, low, humble. 
 iijnobilis, ifjnoble. 
 illustri«i, illustrious. 
 imriKMiior, unminiful. 
 iinmobili», immovable. 
 
 itn mortal is, immortal 
 i in pat ic n s, iinjyatient. 
 a inipar. unetpiaL 
 jimpotiMis, powerUss. 
 
 Qe\it\>iir, frequented, popu- j imprudens, imprudent 
 
 htus renowned 
 
 celer, quick. 
 civilis, civil. 
 
 i nan is, empty. 
 i n ere< 1 i h i 1 1 s, incredible. 
 , - incolnmis, unhurt. 
 
 Clemens, merciful. inermis, unarmed, 
 
 coim^, polUe. incrs, inactive, sluggish. 
 
 coxwrnnm^' common. lintelix, unhappy. 
 
 com[)o^*, having control in^ens, enorm'ius. 
 
 crcbcr, frequent. 
 creper, dusky 
 
 over. 
 
 coiieor-;, harmonious. 
 constans, constant. 
 crudelis, cruel. 
 dejrcner, dtgenerate. 
 demens, insane. 
 ditticilis, dijicult. 
 diliijens, diligent. 
 di-par, unequal, disslynilar 
 d i ssi m i 1 is, ^dissimilar. 
 dives, rich. 
 doc ills, docile. 
 dnieis, siveet. 
 eqnester, equestrian. 
 expers, inexptrienced, ig- 
 norant [of j. 
 facilis, easy. 
 fallax, fallacious. 
 i'nnnWkuA, ftmiliar. 
 fatal is, fatiil. 
 felix, huppy. 
 Urox, ferocious, defiant 
 fertil is, /rr^i(^. 
 
 1a~(\e\\A,f,iiikful. 
 for lis, brave. 
 frequens, frequent. 
 gracilis, slendtr. 
 
 innocens, innocent. 
 innumerubilis, innumera 
 hie. 
 
 inops, helpless. 
 
 insiiriiis, distinguished. 
 
 ins. )!. 'tis, V//*'y^«^. 
 
 iuntilis, useliss. 
 
 Iaudai)ilis, praiseworthy. 
 
 lull is, mild. 
 
 levis. light. 
 
 liberal is, liberal. 
 
 locuples, wealthy. 
 
 nienior, mindful, remem- 
 bering. 
 me mora bills, remarkable. 
 niiliiaris, military. • 
 miral)ilis, wonderful. 
 mitis, mild. 
 inobilia, movable. 
 iiKM-talis, mortal. 
 niuliebris, unmanly. 
 natural is, natural. 
 navalis, naval. 
 nobilis, ru)ble. 
 paluster, swampy. 
 par, equal. 
 
 Y>^n\{^itps, partaking , par- 
 ticipating. 1 
 
 GEXDER. 
 
 patiens, patient. 
 pauper, ^oo/'. 
 pcdester, pedestrian. 
 praeceps, steep, hecd- 
 
 lumj. 
 pi'aecox, precocious. 
 pr.e.-ens, present. 
 prrestaiis, excellent. 
 probabilla, probable. 
 prudciis, prudent. 
 pubes, adult. 
 f)ueriiis, puerile. 
 receiis, recent, new. 
 rudis. rough, raw, igno 
 
 rant. 
 sa^rax. sagacious. 
 saluJx-r, / 7 7 
 sahitaris, f ^^^^ome. 
 
 ■a pi ens, wise. 
 
 silvcstris, ivoody. 
 
 similis, similar. 
 
 simplex, simple. 
 
 solers, ingenious 
 
 SOS pes, sate, sound and 
 safe, unhurt. 
 
 sterilis, steriU. 
 
 suavis, pleasant. 
 
 sublimis, sublime. 
 
 superstes, surviving. 
 
 supplex, submissive, sup 
 pliant. 
 
 tenuis, thin, poor, scanty 
 
 terrestris, belonging to 
 earth. 
 
 terri bills, terrible. 
 tristis, sail, sorrouful. 
 
 turpis, disgraceful. 
 
 uber, rich[o{' tilings], 
 u til is, useful. 
 veliemens, vehement. 
 velox, quick. 
 ve.nsiiuilis, probable. 
 versicolor, particolored, 
 vetus, old. 
 viridis, green. 
 virilis, manly. 
 volucer, winged. 
 vorax, voracious. 
 vulgaris, vulgar. 
 
412 
 
 i 
 § 
 
 o 
 
 VOCABULAKIES. 
 
 * <*) aj 
 ■a c> • 
 
 en 
 
 a 
 > 
 ■ee 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 c « 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 
 cr. ^ 3 ■» 
 
 P ec .3 * •-: 3 
 
 rr> — S — •y C 
 
 
 
 p. 
 
 tc ^ ^ cr cr" an 
 
 
 
 . « aa .3 
 
 * 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 — — 
 
 ^* 
 
 
 
 tr. = o oc 3 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 _tp 
 
 rj^ 
 
 * 
 
 51 > 
 
 
 
 
 ^" ~ ■" — '3 
 
 ffl 3 :^ <y o «^ 
 
 
 iK 
 
 1 
 
 r. 
 
 
 
 J* 
 
 
 ii « 
 > 2 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 s = o rr'TS Ji « 
 3.= '^ r. «'^ S 
 .= g r/: 3 = -/- ;= 
 
 
 
 
 
 '6 
 
 a? 
 
 > 
 
 ■1^ 
 
 X 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 9 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 '3 
 -0 
 
 U CJ „ .^ »j -; — 
 
 a)-3 .::: »- s *-. "i^ 
 z s Jr - -' i> <iJ 
 
 3^3 ^ O' 0* Ui oQ 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 ^ s 
 ." 
 '> 
 
 
 »^ 
 
 alter 
 cu 
 
 
 50 — 3 
 
 3D O 
 
 > ^ 
 
 ^ ^ r— 1 
 
 a ^ cs ^ 3 
 
 3 
 
 •3 -a 
 
 = « ^S.-i'-^ .'«3.5— "S^ 
 bC' ?i — a c 3 == -3 -^ '5 > = ^ 9 
 
 •3-^3 
 -3^ £-0 0-3 
 
 '^ «= n 2-3 = o- 
 
 '^ ^ ^ O^ ao ao 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 3 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 #-• 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 3 
 
 '5 
 
 "a 
 »1 
 
 
 
 •no 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 •i^-* 
 
 
 • 
 
 • -^ 
 
 • >-4 
 
 • P^ 
 
 3 
 
 *3i^ 
 
 c 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 c 
 
 lO 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 •8 
 
 3 
 § 
 
 O 
 eo 
 
 CO 
 
 » 
 
 
 04 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 413 
 
 ZZ T. 
 
 
 3 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 CO 
 
 5-5 
 
 4J ■/. .i 3 — 2 00 X s • .3 * . — * • — s 
 
 o o ^ - ■/. = ~ :- -i 2 • ^* 7 ~ X = = ^ -• _• 3 - 
 
 >-^ ^-7. o = B E •= » 3 X* 2 . = = ::i = 3 -7 = ^ - = T S 
 
 4" *j X .:i ^ £ — 'i *^r — X z 3 s .3 .— o i, •— -^' -) X 52 .— .-: ~ r3 
 
 a- =^=n-e^o = w ::^.3 o .3 •-• z 7 X it ^ £ = '^ a> = » x .— 3 
 
 ^ i c ^ r. i > -T i: ;;. ^ = i 2^, "7 t: t; •.- « z ^t i^ = .= ^ ~ - „ 
 
 .E^-^^ =^- o-r g-^5 tc^^J 5 5- ^i.3 5^^ - 3 -E 2.§ 
 
 — •^— — -'3*'-'" — >» z^Z> — -i^^=! — Ci*'.— -— - "^ <- ._ -tJ 
 
 crx^rD ^ -c^^v(.as03S'aicra-22^33:5 ii-SS 
 
 • 
 
 s 
 
 
 X 
 
 *w 
 
 • •^ 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 £ 
 
 
 JJ 
 
 
 
 
 Y. 
 
 
 
 0^ 
 
 z 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 1— 
 
 
 on 
 
 ■ •» 
 
 X 
 
 <i> 
 
 
 w 
 
 • •-• 
 
 ^* 
 
 
 4-> 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 z 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 <u 
 
 
 ^*" 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 •w^ 
 
 •V 
 
 
 
 •« 
 
 
 • « 3 
 
 • 
 
 
 ci 
 
 •— z 
 
 '^. 
 
 *^ 
 
 '^ 
 
 
 C '0) 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 — il 
 
 <D 
 
 i> 
 
 
 
 
 laj bf . 
 
 tm\ * 
 
 • —J 
 
 0" 
 
 cr X 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 bt 2 'E 
 
 tl z 
 
 = bt 
 
 tr 
 
 
 cc 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 viceni 
 vieeiii 
 
 ■v 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 10) 
 
 o = d = = O 
 
 '5 'z ._• ^ ^ 
 
 :io = -'E 
 
 E rf •«> ~ - 
 
 ^■M +j -- — z 
 
 u o O .3 .- 
 
 C O 3 oQ ^ 
 
 « r:- = 
 
 3 ■.- S 
 
 *" 3 '^ 
 
 oj - •« 
 
 c - "3 
 
 CO 
 
 pa 
 P 
 
 M 
 
 ^ 
 
 <» 
 
 s» 
 
 «J 
 
 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r-« 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 *-» 
 
 
 
 
 
 OQ 
 
 
 
 -4 
 
 ^- 3 
 
 en 
 '3 
 
 **^ si 
 Is» «~ 
 
 ^1 
 
 acr 
 
 p 
 
 "•ii » 
 
 o -^ 
 
 S 3 
 
 T3 as 
 
 --(5. 
 
 o 
 d 
 
 a* 
 
 S2 
 
 O'T 
 
 X 
 
 cQ aa 
 
 
 f- — G ^ 
 
 3 3-3 i! « = 
 > S3 2^ 5-=- 
 
 C o — -^ fc. — 3- 
 3-0 ^-O *- '=!"^ 
 
 X as 
 
 o4 ^^^^^^^^ditii^m 
 
 > 
 
 X 
 CO 
 
 is H 
 
 
 M 
 
 o 
 
 •SB 
 X « >< 
 M M M 
 
 & 
 
 Q 
 M 
 
 c3 
 
 o 
 
 
 "3 
 '> 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 '3 
 
 -4-3 
 
 K 
 
 X 
 
 I. 
 x" 
 
 ' ? 
 
 x 
 
 X 
 
 > 
 3J 
 
 I 
 
 o 3 
 
 X 
 
 *3 
 
 '> 
 
 0) 
 
 -/■ 
 
 • 
 
 X 
 
 sn 
 
 ci 
 
 ¥ 
 
 V 
 
 ^^ 
 
 '0 
 
 "> 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CB 
 
 •n 
 0.5 
 
 (B 
 
 3 '^ 
 
 m X «^.2 X 
 
 o =>! *^ « r^ 3 .3 
 
 .- fee . o 
 
 .3 -: - X i-i.*j 3 C 3 r ~ •- X 
 i---DClOOjj = «Zz5 
 
 09 
 
 X 
 
 b£ 
 
 o 
 
 33 
 
 X • — 
 
 o z 
 
 04 
 
 CI 
 C4 
 
 00 
 C4 
 
 5 
 
 X 
 
 »-'3 
 
 3 
 
 n 
 V 
 
 3-0 
 
 3 ::: .5 "E fi 
 
 CT^ r:-3 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 fe >• 
 
 X 
 
 •ft 
 
 «4 
 
 ^ -* > 
 
 XXX 
 
 XXX 
 
 • • . 
 
 '-C f^ TO 
 C^ <N ©< 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 
 X J 
 
 X X 
 
 . X 
 
 . X X 
 XXX 
 
 >j «J -; 
 
 . d 2 
 
 • Do- ■ 
 
 • Coo 
 
 o ;i t; ;; 3 
 
 2 ^ 
 
 p 
 
 - o a s 
 
 — y o o 
 
 ^ " o "^ 
 
 X 55 M o 
 
 u ^ o o 
 
 o S !;; o 
 
 g^SSS2S?Sgg?§§§5'§o 
 
 i-i c^ 
 
 
 ,M 
 
414 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 4. OUDINAL 
 
 Local. 
 priino, m the first 
 
 place, 
 eecuiulo, (U'iiKlo, m 
 
 tke /ifco/id place, 
 
 Si-comtly. 
 tertio, ill, th>> third 
 
 ploi-e, thirdli/. 
 quiirto, in the fourth 
 
 place ^fourthly. 
 quiato, &c. 
 
 AOVKUBS. 
 
 Temporal. 
 pritmim, at first., 
 for the first tnne. 
 iiermn./"'" the se- 
 cond tune., again. 
 
 5. Ml'ltiplicatives. 
 
 simplex, suiiplns, simple., siwjU, 
 
 duplex, duplns, do'/hle. tiPofohi, 
 twice us much. 
 
 triplns, threefold^ three 
 times as much. 
 
 tortimn, for «/i« ' triplex, 
 thiril time. | 
 
 quintiun, 6i(i. 
 
 t^extnin. 
 
 t^eptimimi. 
 
 ocuiviun. 
 
 deciiniun. 
 
 quintuplex, quiiituplud. 
 
 septeinpicx, soptiipltis. 
 
 oct\>pliiJ*. 
 
 decciiiplox. 
 
 ceiituplex. 
 
 XL VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION 
 
 1. ACTIVES. 
 
 Abalieiiarc, to estrange. 
 abrojrare, remal. 
 abundart'. ab"und. 
 accoMimodaie, adapt. 
 accasare, accuse. 
 a(iindicaiv, award. 
 adpivare, help, as><ist. 
 ad'orare, adore, worship. 
 ndoptare, adopt. 
 aedifioare, build. 
 aestiinare, estimate, value. 
 auibulare, ivall'. 
 aniplitirure, enlarge, extend 
 apjirobare, approve. 
 
 aptar<3,^<. 
 appropiiiqnare, approach. 
 
 arare, plough. 
 ariiiare, arm. 
 
 bellare, tcage a war or wars 
 caelarc, chistl. 
 canlarc, sing. 
 oa>iIsiaru, chwtise. 
 eel arc, conct-al. 
 celebrare, cdehrate. 
 cessare, cease. 
 cireinudare. surround. 
 ciauiure, shout. 
 coeiulre, din,»'. 
 cotritare, think, mean, ima- 
 gine. 
 
 cotnmendare, recommend. 
 
 coMiMuuiieare, communi- 
 cate. 
 
 coinpiirare, acquire, com- 
 part. 
 
 oonciliarc, reconciU, win. 
 
 concromare, burn (some- 
 
 tliiiiir». 
 c'oiuleiiuiare, condemn, 
 
 convict. 
 
 coutlOiiare, pardon, for- 
 give. 
 
 contirinare, confirm. 
 
 ooiijuraro, conspire. 
 
 coiisecrart-. cmsecrate. 
 
 coiiservarc, presf-rve. 
 
 eoiitainiiiare, stain, dis- 
 grace. 
 
 eoiitiiiiuire, continue. 
 
 conturbare, didurh. 
 
 ootivoca^^e, convoke, call 
 togt ther. 
 
 ooroiiare, crown. 
 
 ereare. create, elict. 
 
 creinare, burn (some 
 
 thiiiir)- . I 
 
 curare, care, mind. 
 tiuiniuire, condemn, convict 
 dare, give. j 
 
 debeliare,//!'."^ fi W'lr. 
 debil'nare, n^eaken. 
 deelarare, declare. 
 dedieare, del irate. 
 deleetare, delight. ^ 
 
 eleliberare, consider, delib- 
 erate. 
 demoustrare, t/^wo«.<!</-ar<?, 
 
 pro re. 
 
 denetrare, decHne, deny. 
 
 demuitiare, denounce. 
 
 depravare, spoil, deterio- 
 rate. 
 
 'dcsecrare, desecrate, 
 desiderare, desire 
 
 desisr'uirc, d'Sig^aU, 
 
 dfsperare, d>sp<iir. 
 desiiiiare, destine, 
 U\v\or:\.\X'. detour. 
 dijudioare, deride. ^ 
 tlmiicare, contest, figltt. 
 di-piiiare, dispute. 
 dissipilre, disperse. 
 di-t»irl)aro, disturb. 
 diiare, enrich. 
 divulirare, di'-ulge. 
 (Ionian', conquer, subdue, 
 
 snfiji'it. 
 doiuiVe, give (ffratuitous- 
 
 Iv). present. 
 dubitare. doubt, hesitate. 
 duriire. lust. 
 
 e'liieare, e<lucafe. bring tip. 
 e ttV' I M i ! 1 a re , efe m i n ate. 
 ehiborare, elaborate. 
 |em(*iidare, correct. 
 leiiil'-'rare, emigrate. 
 cMiiirrare. explain. 
 enuntiare. pronounce, vtter 
 (.•quitare, rideU->\\ a liorse.) 
 errare, err, make mistakes. 
 exeitare, excde. rouse. 
 |eX(5UMire, e.rcuse. 
 'exornare. adorn, embelUsk 
 [explai.are, { ,^^,,i». 
 txpliearo, S 
 expl6r.lre, erphae. 
 lexpu'jnare, capture. 
 'expeciare, expect, await. 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 415 
 
 evltftro, avoid. 
 
 tati^rare, tire, weary. 
 
 f"e>tiijure, hasten. 
 
 tlaj^rare, burn, be on fire. 
 
 tiare, bl'W. 
 
 tuiraru, put to flight. 
 
 gwbernare, govern. 
 
 lial)itare, dwell. 
 
 i;uperare, command. 
 
 iijipelrare, obtain. 
 
 iuipioraru, itnplure. 
 
 iiiiportare, import. 
 
 iin}>uifiiuie, attack. 
 
 inch* (are, commence, leave 
 an finished. 
 
 itieilure, excite, hasten, 
 spur on. 
 
 iiierepare, scold. 
 
 indicure, indicate, 
 
 jntiruiare, -weaken. 
 
 inhabiiure, iuhibit. 
 
 iiistare, impend, urge. 
 
 interrogare, atik \jx ques- 
 tion.) 
 
 intture, enter. 
 
 iiiuiidaie, overflow. 
 
 iijvestiifare, ex<imine, 
 
 invitare, invite, 
 
 )\i<l\<.-dre, Judge, 
 
 juraru, swear. 
 
 juxare, delight, 
 
 ial)oraro., tihjrk, labor. 
 
 laudare, praise. 
 
 11 be rare, release, free. 
 
 locare, hire. 
 
 ruaudare, commit, charge. 
 
 iiieiiiorare, mention, 
 
 nit'iidare, correct^ improve. 
 
 luonsirare, show. 
 
 ni ui tare, punish, fine. 
 
 juutare, change. 
 
 Hare, { 
 
 ualare, j *"'^''^- 
 
 narrare, tell, relate. 
 
 navii^are, sail. 
 
 necare, kill. 
 
 negare, deny. 
 
 ni>l)iiitare, make famous. 
 
 nurnerare, count. 
 
 nuiitiare, announce, re- 
 port. 
 
 objurgare, scold, rebuke. 
 
 observare, observe. 
 
 obstare, to be an obstacle. 
 
 obteiiiperare, conform, 
 obey. 
 
 obireetare, slander. 
 
 occupare, occupy. 
 
 oiierare, burden,. 
 
 oppugnare, besiege. 
 
 orare, to pray. 
 
 ornare, adorn. 
 
 \)ariiVii, prepare. 
 
 peccare, sm. 
 
 peiietiare, penetrate. 
 
 perorare, plead. 
 
 perpetrare, commit (a 
 crime;. 
 
 perse ve rare, persevere. 
 
 placire, soften, appease. 
 
 poriare, carry. 
 
 po.-.tulare, demand, require 
 
 praestare, excel, to be dis- 
 tinguished. 
 
 priviire, deprive. 
 
 probare, prove, approve. 
 
 promulirare, publish. 
 
 })roj'erare, hasten. 
 
 prorogare, prolong. 
 
 pu^iisirt, fight. 
 
 putare, believe. 
 
 rebellare, rebel. 
 
 recoiled iare, reconcile. 
 
 recrtare, refresh. 
 
 recupeiare, recover (some- 
 tliiiig;. 
 
 recusare, refuse. 
 re fu tare, refute. 
 reguare, reign. 
 relegare, banish. 
 reiiuvare, renew. 
 repnguare, resist, oppose, 
 revocare, recall. 
 rugare, ask. 
 sucritieare, sacrifice. 
 saltare, dance. 
 saiuiare, greet. 
 sauare, heal. 
 separare, separate, sever. 
 ?ervare, save. 
 sigiiiricare, signify, desig- 
 nate. 
 8imn]are,,/«i^«., dissemble. 
 sonare, sound. 
 .>perare, hope. 
 spoliare, plunder, 
 slaie, stand. 
 
 superare, overcome, sur- 
 pass. 
 supplieare, beg, implore. 
 teiiiate, try. 
 tolerare, endure. 
 tonare, ch under. 
 trad are, treat. 
 triutnphare. triumph. 
 turbare, disturb. 
 usurpare, employ, use. 
 variare, vary, change. 
 va>tare, devastate. 
 \iiVdXKi, forbid. 
 vexare, harass, tease. 
 vigil are, tvatch. 
 viiidicare, reclaim, avenge. 
 violare, hurt, violate. 
 vitare, avoid. 
 vituperare, censure. 
 vocare, call. 
 
 o\iire,fiy. 
 vuliierare, toound. 
 
 Admlriirl, admire. 
 adver»ari, oppose. 
 &i\\i\Cir\,fiar(er. 
 altercari, dispute, quarrel. 
 amplexiiri, embrace. 
 ajmulilri, rival. 
 arbitrari, be of ovinion. 
 aspernari, disdain. 
 auxiliari, carry help. 
 cavillari, deri^le. 
 comi. ari, a company. 
 conuMurari, sojourn. 
 
 2. DEPONENTS. 
 
 oonSri, endeavor, attempt 
 coneiOiiilri, harangue, ad- 
 dress the people. 
 consolari, console. 
 coiitemplari, contemplate. 
 cri in i 1 1 ar i , incrim in ate. 
 cunctari, hesitate, delay. 
 doiuinari, rule. 
 frumentari,./orcr^g. 
 friistrari, frustrate. 
 furari, steal. 
 gloriari, boast. 
 
 gratificari, gratify. 
 gratulilri, congratulate 
 hortari, exhort. 
 imitari, irnitate. 
 iiidiiriiari, be indignant. 
 infitiari, deny. 
 interpretari, inteipret. 
 lacrirnari, to weep. 
 laitari, rejoice. 
 lamentari, lament. 
 latrocinari, commit dejire- 
 dations 
 
416 
 
 Inorari, gain. 
 uiaoliiuari, dt'che, plan, 
 lueditaii, nuditate. 
 
 "^I"^""''. [ threaten. 
 mmitan, ) 
 
 niirari, wonder. 
 
 iiiotk-riri, rule. 
 
 niurari, deldi/, sojourn. 
 
 iMUtuaii, burrow. 
 
 neiijotiari, trade. 
 
 Y^dhwVXn, forage. 
 
 peicuniari, ask^ examine. 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 perscrutari, search^ iii- 
 Vtstujate. 
 
 philo>opiiari, phdos'phize, 
 
 popiilaii, I'll/ wad". 
 
 precari, pray., entreat. 
 
 recorJan, rtin< inbtr. 
 
 ratioouian, rtasoa, argue. 
 
 rcinuMcrari, rtward. 
 
 nisiioari, live in the coun- 
 try. 
 
 scriiiocinari, converse. 
 
 sut^pieari, susptct. 
 
 tu- 
 
 testari [testifioari], v^lt- 
 1 ness. 
 
 tutniilluari, ratse a 
 I mult. 
 
 tutari, protect. 
 
 vai^ari, wander, mam. 
 
 vaucinari, pr-pfu^y. 
 
 veinjrari, rtvtre. 
 - versilri, he involved, 
 
 I gaged, enipU>ye'l. 
 
 vocitV-rari, quarrel, bawl^ 
 
 j cry aloud. 
 
 enr 
 
 XII. VERBS OF 
 
 THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 1. ACT IV KB. 
 
 Abhorrere, detest. I fervere, boil. 
 
 adhiDere, employ. tiiiccerc, droop. 
 
 fidlimeriiy adhere. ^i-ra, weeo. 
 
 adinoiiere, admonish, re ]\i>rcro..jlourish 
 
 friiiere, be cold, freeze, 
 fuiiieiv, glitter. 
 IgmidOre," be glad, rejoice 
 {Imbure, have. 
 harere, stick. 
 iiuinmere, be imminent. 
 'unv\iirii,Jill vp. 
 indiirere, need. 
 iiulul:ZOre, indulge. 
 invidere, envy, hate, 
 one» ywarti, jacere, lie (down). 
 
 jubere, direct., bid, 
 
 mind. 
 adiuovere, bring near. 
 amovCre, remove. 
 apjitiiere, ovpear. 
 areere, hold ojf, ivard of. 
 ardere, burn, be onjire. 
 arere, be dry. 
 audere, dare. 
 au*rere, increase. 
 calere, be warm. 
 caverc, be on 
 
 beware. i" , ' / 
 
 ciere, move, stir, rouse. \ orders, command. 
 coercere, restrain. ihiu^^utre, languish. 
 
 oomplere, fu/Jil, complete, latere, be hidden 
 CoiiluiOre, contain, re- Vwcvc, be exposed for sale, 
 
 strain. \ '** albnved, permitted, 
 
 dohera, ' otce, be obliged, Mxci^r^', sh>ne. 
 
 mna. iluiTdre, inuum. 
 
 decere, be decent, J^coyn-jiuadere, be wet 
 
 ing. -— '-■ 
 
 deliire, destroy 
 deridgre, deride. 
 
 give 
 
 deterrgre, deter, discour- 
 age. 
 
 deiinere, detain. 
 
 disj)licere, displease. 
 
 dissuadere, dissuade. 
 
 docere, teach. 
 
 dolero, grieve, regret. 
 
 egCre, need, to be in need 
 
 eininere, 
 cQ/ispicuou*. 
 
 exercere, exercise. 
 
 exhibere, show, display. 
 
 expiere,^/^ up. 
 
 {ukSQV^, favor. 
 
 iiianOre, remain. 
 in ere re, t/e-sy/ 
 niiscere, mix 
 
 nierere, deserve, earn. 
 
 monere, admonish. 
 nioverc, move, afftct, 
 
 flue nee. 
 nere, spin. 
 nitere, shine. 
 nocere, be injurious, hurt 
 obsidere, besiege. 
 oV)tiuere, obtain 
 
 'be prominent,[\y>iri^rii, be obedient, obey 
 
 patere, be open, clear, ex- 
 tend. 
 
 piivCre, tremble. 
 
 peiidere, hang, be in eut- 
 pense. 
 
 persuhdere, persuade. 
 
 pertc-rrere, frighten. 
 
 placert', phase, be pleasaiUt 
 agreeable. 
 
 pollere. be powerful. 
 
 po>sidere, possess, own. 
 
 prxhiire, furn ish, grant. 
 jpran-jilere, prevail. 
 jprandere, take breakfast. 
 
 proliU>ere, prolubit. 
 
 reinovere, remove. 
 
 replere,_/f// up. 
 
 respoiideie, answer. 
 
 retiiiere, retain. 
 
 riiieie, Uiugh, smile. 
 
 sedere, sit. 
 
 silere, be silent. 
 
 solere, he <iccustomed,wontt 
 use (to act). 
 
 -iplendere, shine, be splen- 
 did. 
 
 - tu.ieio, try, study. 
 
 stupere, be astoni^ihui. 
 
 snadere, advise, give adr 
 vice. 
 
 sncceiiserc, be angry. 
 
 sustinere, sustain, uphold 
 maintain. 
 i/t-'tacere, be silent. 
 teiiere. hoil. 
 
 tcrriiTii, frighten, terrify, 
 
 Uu\^rQ,fear. 
 lorpere, be torpid. 
 tortpiere. torture. 
 uri:ere, yrge^ press. 
 valere, be well, healthy, 
 
 strong, fare well. 
 vidferc, sre. 
 vijrere, be strong, vigorous^ 
 
 jiourisn. 
 vovfire, vote. 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 2 DEPONENTS. 
 
 417 
 
 ConfltGri, 
 fatfiri, 
 
 coiitueri, 
 jiilueri. 
 
 confess, 
 
 ) knowledge. 
 ^ behold, gaze. 
 
 a<;-|lic6ri, bid 
 tinners in 
 tnederi, ?ieal. 
 niereri, deserve, 
 nusereri, pity. 
 
 a price (on mro^i&v'i, profess. 
 auction.; polIicGri. promise. 
 
 reri, suppof>e. 
 
 lueri, protect. 
 
 vereri,yi;a/-, dread. 
 
 XIIL VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 1. ACTIVES. 
 
 A. Stem-veiibs. 
 
 cole re. cultivate, honor. 
 conwnittere, commit. 
 concedere, concede, grant 
 
 K\^A\\Q}^r^,lead aioay, ab- 
 duct, remove. 
 
 abeisse, to be absent. 
 
 al'jicere, throw away. 
 
 al>solvere, absolve, acquit. 
 
 absiimere, consume. 
 
 aceidere, happen, befall 
 (of untbrtunate events.) 
 
 accipere, accept, receive. 
 
 Aeiiere, sharpen. 
 
 addt're, \ ,, 
 !•• t add. 
 
 adjicere, | 
 
 iidetsse, to be present 
 
 ati'crre (adferre), bring. 
 
 attioere (adficere), affict. 
 
 artii^ere (adHijere), ajffir. 
 
 aire re. act, do, lead, drive. 
 
 alcri;, nourish. 
 
 allieere, allure. 
 
 ainittere, lose. 
 
 anteponere. prefer. 
 
 arct's.>ere, summon, fetch. 
 
 arifuere, accuse. 
 
 arripere, seize [of persons 
 
 and movables]. 
 Rseendere [adseendere], 
 
 ascend, rnonnt. scale. 
 ancribere (adscribere), (W 
 
 crihe, attritiute. 
 asperL'ere (adspergere), 
 
 strifi, asperse. 
 ashiir^ere, [adsurgerej, 
 
 rise up, stand vp. 
 attril)ii('re, [adtribuere], 
 
 ascribe, attribute. 
 bibere, drink. 
 caderp, fall. 
 
 cai lore, cause to fall, strike 
 ealefaeere, heat, warm. 
 can ere, sing. 
 cape re, take, capture. 
 cedere, yield. 
 cernere, see 
 
 claudeie, close 
 
 cingrere, sunound^ inclose. 
 oogere, crnipel. 
 
 eoncqiere, conceive. 
 
 C( incut ere, shake. 
 
 conducere, lead.. 
 
 conferre, confer. 
 
 con ti cere, perfect, 
 out.Jiuish. 
 
 confide re, confide. 
 
 conjuiijsrere, unite 
 
 conspicere, 
 ceive. 
 
 constituere, resolve. 
 
 consuniere, consume. 
 
 eontinfrere, happen [of 
 fortunate events]. 
 
 contenniere, despise. 
 
 contradieere, contradict. 
 
 convincere, convince, con- 
 vict. 
 
 eoquere, cook. 
 
 corri^'ere, correct. 
 
 corru inpere, corrupt, bribe. 
 
 credere, believe. 
 
 ciipere, wish. 
 
 deeedere, gooff, leave, die. 
 
 decernere, resolve, decree. 
 
 dc'jipere, deceive. 
 
 du esse, to be wanting. 
 
 defendere, defend, pro- 
 tect. 
 
 defcrre, transfer, report. 
 
 deticere, desert, fall off . 
 Idejieere, throw down. 
 
 dereiinquere. abandon. 
 
 descendere, descend. 
 
 de>crlbere, describe. 
 
 deserere, desert [a place]. 
 
 de?-inere, cease. 
 
 desipere, be silly, foolish. 
 
 devincere, conquer. 
 
 dice re, say, tell. 
 
 ditfi-rre, delay, postpone. 
 
 di tilde re, mistrust. 
 
 diligere, love, esteem. 
 
 diininuere, diminish, 
 d i ni i ttere, dismiss. 
 diri^ere, direct. 
 diritiere, pluriAer. 
 diruere, destroy. 
 dispell ere, dispel. 
 di>tin<iruere, distinguish. 
 t^fa/'dividcre, divide. 
 edere, eat, 
 
 edere, bring forth, publish. 
 e tti ce re , effect, pn >d ucc. 
 behold, ^^r-:etfugere, escape. 
 
 buy. 
 
 einere. 
 
 eri<rere, erect, elevate. 
 e.xceliere, excel. 
 exeipere, receive. 
 excludere, exclude. 
 expellere, expel. 
 ex>tinguere, extinguish. 
 extollere, exalt. 
 evadere, escape. 
 evortere, destroy. 
 fallere, deceive. 
 ferre, carry, bear. 
 fodere, dig. 
 frangere, break. 
 f u ge re , flee, sh u n. 
 irerere, carry, carry on, 
 i n ci I )e re. Commence. 
 indlcere, announce. 
 inspicc-re, inspect. 
 instituere, commence. 
 inteiligere, undersLtnd, 
 interficere, kill. 
 jungere, connect, join, 
 lacessere, harass. 
 Idedere, hurt, injure, 
 leircie, read. 
 ludere, play. 
 tnetere, reap. 
 metuere,./(far. 
 inittere, send. 
 neyrligere. rie<_jlect. 
 nubere, marry. 
 ol)jicere, object. 
 obruere, overwhelm. 
 
418 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 419 
 
 proinitterc, prnmhe. 
 j)ro-cnl)ure, proscrihe. 
 
 occnrrere, meet, encounter proceaere admnce. 
 
 occidere, kill, vmrder. .--'I.ti'- hetrau. 
 
 otleiidere. of end. 
 
 ottcne, <>f*i>'-^ 
 
 oinittere, otrut. 
 
 op poll ore, op/)0.'ie. 
 
 oppruuure, oppress. 
 
 OHteiidere, g/ioio. 
 
 pareri', be>/ft. 
 
 purcerf, ttpare. _ 
 
 pollere, d/ ice (tica>/, harusfi. 
 
 penijrere, perform. 
 
 pertlcre, l^se, ruin. 
 
 porforre, endure, bring. 
 
 perflcere, accomplish. 
 
 periH^re, continue. 
 
 permitiere, permit, allow. 
 
 pete re, »eek. 
 
 plaudere, applaud. 
 
 pra'cMere, cut <if. 
 prjeciperccomwrn /,o/a«-r 
 
 pnedieere. predict. 
 
 9cri1>ere, write.. 
 
 ^ 1— > kjtK.in iseccdere, «65t"/t?. 
 
 nrotlere, o*^'riiu. >-^^^^-<- > 
 
 I . . jsuiere, xuf^r, kt, permit, 
 
 prokl^rJ, advance (in sperncre, ^../-/^ r-/^- 
 
 stiituere, re-fdve, conclude, 
 sul)iLrere, suhj'ct. suhdiu. 
 sulMuitlere, submit. 
 
 pro-cnl)ere, proscrioe. o.. ......... ^, - - - /-..//.yjn 
 
 ?in-re roA. succiunbere, ^^/c>C'^/m6. 
 
 recipere, retake, receive. iMUuere, «aA;« up. 
 
 (so.nethiu-^- tan-ere, ^o./fA. 
 
 redueere, brin'j back. 
 
 re toll ere, refute. 
 
 reterre, brintj back, V'^port. 
 
 retioere, refresh, restore. 
 
 retrere, rule, ijovern. 
 
 riii\<;crG, reject. p--.- ' *■■. 
 
 rellnquere,J^■ai;^«Aa"'/'''t.'trl huere, .iss^i//* 
 
 Irepeu-ro, redemand,rrpeat.veU^rv, ./rice. 
 
 te^'iMv, Cot'*'/", protect. 
 
 tollere, </<^.s-^oy (of per- 
 sons and abstract ideas), 
 i,) raise. 
 
 tradere, ddiver. 
 
 irahere, drag, draw. 
 
 be dU>- 
 
 ; eesse,ioi a chief to re^.r eU^n>\.rc, censure. 
 ^ command. resistere, rend. 
 
 ni-jpff ire prefer. restituere, restore. 
 
 \:r^^:J^: direct, pre- satistacere, satufy, give 
 ^ scribe. I satisfaction. 
 
 B. INCEPTIVK8. 
 
 vellere, «/ta^'<?. 
 veudere, sell. 
 vineere, defeat, 
 
 torious. 
 vivcre, live. 
 
 adolcscere, grow up. | i'^*<'*^ , 
 
 Jtueseere [udsue.eere , enU.escere, 6^Y^. 
 
 a^.c.i^or/;. ^ exardeseere, fte.om. i/i- 
 
 albeseere,J...;.. Mte. \J^ 
 
 tunty. 
 
 noseere. become acquaint- 
 ed with. 
 
 oMnmui^ccre, fall as/^ep. 
 
 obdnrescere, become hard- 
 ened, insensible. 
 
 caleseere, grow warm 
 coaleseere, unde, coalesce 
 
 exsplendescere, shine obmutescere, 
 firth. I ^P''^<^'^^^^'- 
 
 become 
 
 coi\\esi^GrG, unde, coalesce. ./'/"^- , /,r^///Z// ob^tupeseere, become he- 
 
 co.npescere, check, c./'6. cxinncscere, 6. i^'^^''^^^ "^J.iw, .6M*e^e.«. 
 
 oognoseere, 
 
 liTMOseere, beco7ne ac-\ afraid. ^ 
 
 7fuainted with, Uarn. levaneseere, ^;<^riish 
 coLmn^c^re, wish ardent- pliseere, swell, increas. 
 toricui Kv^ , hi^eere, open the moutti 
 
 coiLncseere, grow old, l.orresoere, 6.c'0//i. tern 
 decay- ' >"'' 
 
 numbed, senstless. 
 
 obsolesoerc, become obso- 
 lete. 
 
 occalescere. become callous. 
 
 pasciire, ptisture. 
 
 ' becorne 
 
 j become 
 _ perliorrescerc, ( ^,^^^^,J^ 
 
 iperiimoscerc, j afraid. 
 
 contScere, become ac- ign«.sccre, pardon, /"'•- periiincscere, | ^j 
 
 customed. '-.ni^Jebre^cere gain pntresccre, become putrid 
 
 conticeseere. become *- -^^-j;-^^^^;^,. ^ ' -^ 
 
 contrem-.scere, ^r..^^^. i-^-^-^'^:^:^!^^"^* 
 
 1 ••:• ' . 
 
 (luieseere, r<>d'«. 
 
 recnuk-seere, hreih open 
 (out) again. 
 
 faithless. 
 diirnoscere, discern. 
 diiicere, learn. 
 
 quid, decline. I senses. 
 
 lapideseere, />.^i^y. Ireviv.scere, com^ to l^e 
 
 liquescere, 6^i«;o//i'J liAiuid.\ again. 
 
 sciscere, decree, ordain. 
 Benescere, grow old. 
 
 ttbflti, misuse. 
 aiTffredi, attack. 
 alioqiii [udloqui] address. 
 aiiipleeti, embrace. 
 coiiirredi, meet. 
 asseqiii [adsequi], \ ,. . 
 consequ'l, ^ ^'\obtatn 
 dijrrodi, go apart, separate. 
 d i labi , fall asunder. 
 egredi, go, or come out. 
 
 ftdipisci, obtain. 
 CMiiitniiiisei, device. 
 defetisci, become tired. 
 experiri'^ci, awake. 
 irasci, be anijry. 
 uancisci, obtain. 
 
 Rplendescere, grow bright. I vigescere, arow strong. 
 tepescere, grow warm. | 
 
 2, DEPONENTS. 
 
 A. Stkm-veub9. 
 frui and }>erfnii, enjoy. 
 t"iui<ri and peri'iuigi, per- 
 form. 
 
 irradi. stride. 
 iiiirredi, enter. 
 iiisequi, follow imme- 
 diately. 
 labi, fall. 
 loqiii, speak, 
 liiori, die. 
 
 B. Inceptives. 
 
 nasci, he born. 
 oh\\\'\s{:\, forget. 
 paeisci, bargain. 
 proticisei, proceed, go, 
 march, travel, depart. 
 reiniiiisei, remember. 
 
 niti, rest (upon), strive. 
 
 perpeti, [ *^''/^''- 
 perseqiii, pursue. 
 proj/redi, advance, proceed. 
 prolabi, _/«/!/ down. 
 qiieri, complain. 
 reared i, return. 
 &&(\\\\, follow. 
 uti, use. 
 
 renasci, he horn again. 
 ulcisci, revenge. 
 
 vesci, cat. 
 
 XIV. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 \. ACTIVES. 
 
 AV)Ire, go away. 
 
 ad ire, approach. 
 
 ad Veil ire, arrive. 
 
 Binbire, go round, he a 
 candidate, court. 
 
 aprrire, open. 
 
 com()erIre, ascertain (by 
 Jiearing). 
 
 coiullre. season. 
 
 cotiseiitire, consent, agree. 
 
 custo lire, guard. 
 
 de til lire, define, determine. 
 
 desillre. spnng down. 
 
 deviiR'iie, oblige. 
 
 diupertlre, distribute. 
 
 disseiitlre, dissent, disa- 
 gree. 
 
 doriiilre, sleep. 
 
 erQdire, educate. 
 
 exliatirire, exhaust. 
 
 exire. go out, leave. 
 
 expedire, extricate^ make 
 •'eady. 
 
 adorlrl, attack. 
 a»*seti'Iri, assetU. 
 h\i\\\dm,Jlatter. 
 experiri, try, experience. 
 larL'Iri, bestow. 
 
 evenire, happen. 
 terlrc, strike. 
 til lire, finish. 
 fuleire, prop, support. 
 jiinpedlre, hinder, prevent. 
 [iinperiire, impart. 
 iiiire, go in, enter. 
 i lite lire, perish. 
 in venire, invent, find. 
 
 jindnire, \ ^^fi^n, smoothen. 
 inninre, f</rtify. 
 neseire, not to know. 
 niitrire, nouHsh. 
 obedire, obej/.. 
 oblre, undergo^ die. 
 o})erire, cover. 
 })eriie, perish. 
 perveuire, arrive [always 
 
 with an object]. 
 prsieire, be foremost, dictate 
 
 [words], 
 prodire, come forth. 
 
 2. DEPONENTS. 
 
 mentlri, lie, say a false- 
 hood. 
 moliri, strive, toil. 
 ordiri, commence. 
 orlri, rise^ arise. 
 
 p\}mre, punish, 
 red ire, return, 
 reparlre, find. 
 saevire, commit cruelties. 
 salire, Uap. 
 sancire, sanction. 
 sareire, patch. 
 scire, know. 
 >^enxire, feel, think. 
 sepire, hed'je in. 
 servire, serve, he a slave. 
 si tire, tJiirst. 
 sepelire, bury. 
 sopire, lull to sleep. 
 stabilire, strengthen. 
 subire, undergo. 
 subvenire, bring assist- 
 
 a nee, come to help. 
 transire, cro.'is, pass. 
 venire (veneo), be for sale, 
 venire (venio), come. 
 vestire, clothe. 
 vincire, hind. 
 
 partiri, divide. 
 potiri, seize. 
 
 sortiri, cast lots^ obtain, by 
 lots. 
 
^tc 
 
 2/ 
 
 INDEX TO PAET I. 
 
 fi.r^^ '^!? f '"^* ^-"'■^ "^ ^^** references denote? the pages of the Fir^t Part ThP 
 
 pa "ap^^^^^ wluM.'fi;;'"'";;/''''" l^'^" ^^^ '''^ W'^ ^^^ K^'"-' «r to «tier divUmJol 
 n1 ...: f/ V " '^''" *^'""^ miinlKT is uK.re than once on a na.^e. the (le^i.mafion 72 
 
 (It(; a k oru. .foot-note), or no. (mere division of a pura^a-aph),!^ addJd =" 
 1 he lollowinj,' abbreviations are used: i- ^, ^'^ auuuu. 
 
 Ahl. 
 
 ahs. 
 
 ace. 
 
 act. 
 
 adj. 
 
 adv. 
 
 attr. 
 
 cl. 
 
 comp. 
 conj. 
 
 COIIJII!?. 
 
 Consir. 
 coOid. 
 
 ablative. 
 
 absolute. 
 
 accusative. 
 
 active. 
 
 adjective. 
 
 adverb. 
 
 ajtributc, or 
 
 attributive. 
 
 < laiise. 
 
 comparative. 
 
 conjunction. 
 
 conjiiirution. 
 
 construed. 
 
 co(5rdinate, or 
 
 coor.iinatiiig. 
 
 dative, 
 
 definite. 
 
 de< lension. 
 
 detcrmiii.itive. 
 
 ditlereuce. 
 
 Enijl. 
 expr. 
 
 fern. 
 
 format. 
 
 fut. 
 
 impers. 
 
 ind. 
 
 indef. 
 
 inf. 
 
 irr. 
 
 in St. 
 
 in f err. 
 
 Lat. 
 
 niasc. 
 
 uoni. 
 
 ol)j. 
 
 dit. 
 dtf. 
 dccl. 
 
 d|-term. aefcnniii.itive. part, 
 
 dift'- ditlereuce, pass 
 
 A lab). prcpo-ition. denotes the pass, agent 
 107 K. 2. For the use oluO in generai"see 
 
 Ablative, sing., rule of formation for all 
 deds. Si'Z f; of abl. piur. ;^;«, £.-AI)l. 
 transl. by Knirl. preposition bt/ is, 3.— Abi. 
 of nouns of 3. dccl. in i 13«}. l"so. Abl. in i 
 ol adjs. of ;j. decl. 148, R. 1; abl. in e 151, 
 21b. Abl, of pres. participles in t, except 
 Mhen used as pred. ai)ls. 2*M, m. 
 
 Ablativks ABsoLi^TK. definition and 
 format. 29i, 39.-) foil. Form o( pred. ai)l. 
 2!)->, 39(J; wtien pied. abl. is an adj. or noun 
 2H3. 3!K. Abi. abs. w. deponent participle 
 29>. 31. Pred. abl. in pi. or sing, when two 
 subj are coordinate. 2113,35. 
 
 COMPARATIVK ABt.ATlVi: inst. of Quam 
 
 217, 310. Idiomatic comp, abls. 218. K. 7. 
 Abi.ativk of Difference referring to 
 
 comp-i 218, 311 : hetove. praesfat, jwsf, antea, 
 
 and other words involvintr a comp. 219, 10. 
 Absolute adjectives, see Adj'^dires. 
 Absolute decree of intensity, its different 
 
 foini- in i,;it, 2-iU, 313 foil. 
 Ac, coord, conj., use of 97, 115; 2T7, 380. 
 Accent of Latin words 10, 5, 
 Accidents of Lat. verbs 14, 7; of uouns, 
 
 pr'-n-^., and adjs. 1.5.8. 
 accusare, constr. w. qfod 291, 28. 
 Accusative ^ing., rule of its format, for all 
 
 decls. 332, d ; of ace. pi. 3*3, k. All neuter 
 
 English, 
 
 expressed. 
 
 feminine. 
 
 formation. 
 
 future. 
 
 genitive. 
 
 impersonal. 
 
 indicative. 
 
 ituh'finite. 
 
 infinitive. 
 
 irreiTuIar. 
 
 instead. ^ 
 
 intetrogative. 
 
 Latin. 
 
 masculine, 
 
 nominative, 
 
 object, or 
 
 objective. 
 
 l)article. 
 
 passive. 
 
 nouns 
 Nouns 
 179. 
 dec 
 
 pprf. perfect. 
 
 pers. person. 
 
 phr. phrase. 
 
 pl. plural, 
 
 pliip. pluperfect. 
 
 poss. possessive. 
 
 pred. predicate, or 
 
 predicative, 
 
 pres. present. 
 
 prf)n. pronoun, 
 
 q'lant. quantity, 
 
 sent, sentence, 
 
 piiig. sin-;iilar. 
 
 i?iihj. siil)ject. 
 
 subjunc. subjunctive. 
 
 superL superlative. 
 
 term. termination, 
 
 transl. translated, 
 
 voc. vocative. 
 
 w. with. 
 
 have ace. and nom. alike 34. 2. 
 
 of 3. decl. w. ace. sing, in iui i:3H, 
 Nouns and adjs. \v. vowel-stems of 3. 
 Iiave ace. pi. in w 133, It. 2. Ace. of 
 
 nouns taken fiom the Greek, see Greek 
 /lou/tj).— Ace. transl. by Engl, objective 18, 
 13.-ACCUS. w. inf. 28ti, 388; see Infinitive 
 
 adducere, constr. w. ut 291, 27. 
 Adjectives, accidents of 15. 8. Are either 
 movable <tr of common gender 40, 45. Decl. 
 of movable adjs. (II. decl.) 41 ; 44 foil. 
 Adjs. of common gender (III. decl.), their 
 inflection 147. 20« foil.: 1) adjs. in u- 149, 
 209; 2) R. stems of 3. decl 149, 210: 3) 
 Liquid-mutes 149, 211: 4) adjs. in ax. ox, 
 i>; as 1.50.212; 5) Adj. w. consonant-stems 
 150, 214 foil. They generally lack neuter 
 gender 151, 217. Indeclinable adjs. 151, 218. 
 
 Attributive aiwectives 41, 47; their 
 agreement w. the governing noun lb.; in 
 Coordinate phrases 98,119; their place 41, 
 47; their combiiiatioii w. attributive gen- 
 itives 70, 92. Attributive form-adjs. 109, 
 240. Attributive adj«. w. their governin" 
 nouns understood 25«i. 353. 
 
 Predicative adjectivks 54, 61 foil. 
 Agreement w. the sui)j. 54, 63, May take 
 objects 55, 65, (For the case of these objs., 
 see p. II). Impersonal pred. adjs. 60, 75; 
 61, 77. Pred. adjs, forming subj. infs, w. 
 
 I 
 
422 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 the copula, are placed in raasc. ace. sing, 
 fil 78- juTceiiii: w. the ohjeit of inip«'i>. 
 pivds' 74? :^; wlu'U thoy form ..hj. inls. ihcy 
 M.rifcw. til.- «zmnimaticai subj. iiom. ».4. M, 
 ami in inf. cl. w. lliesubj. ace. ^sr, :ivs; or 
 tlu-v a-me w. tiie ai,n'-.i ol the obj. nf. 
 in arc.'7!». lO'i. t^iiMunary of ruh'H on tho 
 crammatical form of pred adjs. S) 1 u'd. 
 adis. connected w. ./im & ruhn lOi.l-J^-. 
 Fur adis. a- aO(C'>!*ory predieatL's. see 1 . M. 
 
 DK^CKll-nVK AN» FollM-Al).rKeTIVEJ« 1|»H, 
 
 2:]«K Sre Forni-adj ctiv-» and the articl.-s 
 D-tt-niiiiiadve, quantitatire, iitniitml, pos- 
 ^e.-sire, inttnoiaUve Form-U'ljecticei. ^ 
 
 ABSOLI TK AIUKCTIVKS tiof, toU. I't'ttni- 
 
 tion ai.d dirt-. fr.>M> di^jnIU•t adjs 2.)b. M. 
 AI>r-oluie dfscriptivf adjs. di-notmi,' pkii- 
 ^()N< (inase. -ender) 25»). 355; at)s<)Iiile par- 
 ticiples di-notin-; persons 25T_^ 3.)»)j tonu- 
 adis rcferriiii,' to persons -.ix. 3.j» lon.~ 
 Alxohit.' adjs. deiiotm- t!IIN(}s (neuter 
 .render) 200. iijS foil. Generally m iiriiier 
 plnr. 2»V^ 358; wl.en used in n. uier sin-. 
 2t;(), /.'.9. IVeuhar decl. of absolute neuter 
 anj- 2<)-2 :iS. C'i>nii)iiia'ion of abs. adjs. abv. 
 3C,1 ioll. Absolnie movable adjs.. but not 
 
 tho<r« of common ireudef, take the form ol 
 nartitive uen. wli-ii conn et'-d w. iiuanii- 
 
 tativc form-adjs. (,nhUbi>nh-H\^-'Al;ii. yihd 
 
 reiiqid est 2«i9, A'. 32. Mhi! ptnsi huf>eo lb. 
 ln-^.ji'NCT AD.TKeTivKS 2(>4 foil.; tiieir 
 
 a«Teeineia 2(i4. :;»►."); wluiius.-d a- ^-uhjeeis. 
 
 they agree with their pr».'dicate-uoun? 2bJ, 
 
 COMI-AKISON OF APJKCTIVKS, PCe Cwn- 
 
 ptrarir- and Sup.rlaiirc Adjs. which do 
 u.)t form inrtectioiuil de-ive- 201. 2'.t2. loll. 
 Dki.ivvtiov op ADJKiTiVKs tioiu Com- 
 mon nouns :M<.). ?, loll ; from proper nouns 
 :i-.i>, r, loll.: iromv.-ibs :^/)l. 8 loll, 
 admirari, const r. w. <im><l or Int. cl. -^y f^- 
 a-^tnodum, (iiiantilutive adv. = teyv iiunit 2^U. 
 
 Ad"verbs'.^leriiiit'i«>n and classes of 'u Ofi: t)f 
 manner, format, of .'>7, (iS: in o 58, (.11; of 
 time .58. 70. I'o-ition ol 58, 71. A'^ys of 
 manner form. -d Irom adis. ol .^. (led. i.)i. 
 ai'.i foil ; i»r. format. 1.52 1{. »1 & 7. ^'»;»-. 
 oral ad vs. 180, 258. Quaniitative advs. (ol 
 intensity) 18S, 2«i«.»; nv.y be drpendent on 
 adj^ 1S8 11. Advs. of comparatives »fc s^u- 
 l.,ilativc's202. 2s7;20.i. 10. , _ 
 
 adversarius, diti". from kostts & tinnacm 1.34, 
 
 aegreferre, io be vexed, constr.w. quod or lii^. 
 
 cT. 2!il. 28. ^ . m 7 
 
 Aegyptus, fern, name of country 40 d. 
 eqS, impers. comp. abl. = //m/* U is fai7 
 
 msf ir'.'ivrU. noun of S-cla-s of .3. decl. 122, 
 
 l-,8; of neuter },'ender 147, 205. 
 affirmare. constr. w. Inf. cl 2'.H), 2(,. 
 after En>'l. conj., rendered by jjostquam 2-34, 
 
 328: bylibl. abs. 2U2, 30«. . 
 agnatus and cognatus, meaninj; and diff. of 
 
 these terms 325, n. (i. 
 
 Agreement of finite predicate* w. their {rram- 
 imitical subj.'.is in number and pers<m 22. 
 io o,;mrib^uljs.w.the>r^c.vernu,jrn.m^ 
 41 47; of prrd. adjs. w. ibttr io-ical subjs , 
 see i./yVc/.r.x; ol pred. n..uns w. he r 
 8ubjs. .5.5. 2: of nouns m apposition w- «cr 
 trovernin- n..uns 01, 107; a!-'';^;^'";:"^ "^ 
 number, of preds. w. coord. Mibjs. \U. 11 , 
 Hi. K. 2! 98.' 118, of finite verb- w. coord 
 pronouns of dilVereni pe.son^* lt>-^^,f^^' » 
 iittr. adjs. w. two U«>vernin- m.nns .8 ll.», 
 of a noun w. two attr. adjs. 00. K. .). of par 
 Ticioles w. tle-ir uovernim: nouns 201, .>.h, 
 ; isjunct adj-. w. those nouns which inust 
 
 ^" . . . . I. :_ ..........111 Kir tifillllR ..1)4. 
 
 be supplied as their governing nouns .(4 
 8»i5: of relative adjs. ^v.Jhcnr antered t^ 
 •Jti.-). 3ti7: 2r.O, :;«8 foil.: 2t>r, JL 29; of/l\- J .'nj^t 
 adjs. w. their predK-ate-nt)nns 2»..>, -.0 .. ^^^^ 
 di^junet adj-. w. their partitive genitnea 
 in i;.u.hr 2.;0. 374. Air.eement ol ;/>^^, 
 ,olu.<, N,ws. (of us. o,nms\K, their ^^»';; "j^. 
 pron..uns 194, 277 foil. ^V";'- i^- «, ^e 
 the poss. sUHs (hi^ ber, their) w. il^ aniecc- 
 
 ?iiiSs;::\n1/!inerally belongs 
 vowel-class of 3. decl., being mnler 3o, 
 177 Thos,- belonging to the L-cIass H. •_ i^'- 
 
 alienus. n^ed w. the force of gen. pi. a/i<./«/H 
 
 aliiuantus, indi-f. quantitative f^rm-adj^lS.!, 
 
 aliquanto before coinps. as abl. of difl. n^, 
 
 aiiams some, indef. determ. form-adj. 17;2, 
 %T ifde 1. 172. 217 : 173. Use ol aUq'ns, 
 
 ami dirt-. fr..m V''i</«''V 1;.^' f^' ,,;i jr/- 
 = soinebodv, as abs. adj. 2.>8, 4. jj^'l"- 
 s-miethintr,' abs. neuter torm of ahqui'';f^. 
 3.50; w. partitive quaniitative gen. feinj,. 
 
 207, 371 foil. ^ ,.„ 
 
 aliquot, indef. numeral 1.9, 2;>(. 
 aliauoties. numeral adv. 180, Hy^- „ ,. .-., 
 ahus <u>o(l,ii\ ind.f. det.rm. f.)rm-adj. 172, 
 .1.4'' Deel. of 173. 248. D-tV. Ir.un a//er and 
 cchri 175, l.-AliU otbers, as abs :h1J-. J'^ 
 diir. from cettti and rehqui 2;)9, no. 4. 
 Wis .ulii's. us,, of 2.59. 5 & li. i-Alu. . . 
 
 am take app..>iiio..s in^t. -^ X^r'^^miull^ 
 (s..me of the soldujrs. . . other*, -/««"«* 
 rt'ii. ..fl/'i) 270, A'. 35. ^, t-u 
 
 all En-d. indff. ■.u\i.=om>ns or 07nnes .9, 
 i^: 180. K. 12. .\llorusetc = «(>.^^om/'qli«| 
 2'S Ml (»>f) tlu'se-hi omnes 2b.J, 3W, ail 
 rofUhe<e thinL's^-om/<J(f /i(i^<^ I'».; ab my 
 pr?,p.Mtj'=.U^ia mea ib.; all other things 
 
 alLoi^'I.owtta,!^;: 205. 401; 209,400. Almost 
 
 not = f'l-re uoii .31K), .)2. 
 alone, iraiisl. by the adjs. solus and unu6\U. 
 
 alter 'the other, indef. determ. form-adj. 172, 
 ilJ: Decl. of 173, 248. Ditt. Irom alius .5, 
 5 Alter in the meaning ol secundus I8-4. 
 m Alter. . .alter, use of 2.59, -^: ^v.;.ppot'l- 
 tion inst. of w. partitive gen. 2.0, H. do- 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 423 
 
 alteruter, indef. determ. form-adj. 172.246 2- 
 
 decl. of 173. li.U. ' ' ' 
 
 amb, iiisenarahle preposition 358, .3. 
 ambo, f><)fh, dtcl. of 178, 11. 2. Diff. from 
 
 iitrnjxe Ih. 
 amplius, with or without qunin = ' more 
 
 than ' before numerals 219, 312; 220, R. 13 
 
 foil, 
 an, or, di-^junctive interr. particle 308. 419; 
 
 an»on, or not, lb.: aii/,on not used in in- 
 
 direet quesijons 311, 423. 
 an, nom. terminal, ol Greek nouns, how 
 
 mated in Lat. :-a\. 30. 
 and, Kngl. conj.. how e.vpr. in Lat. 97, 115. 
 
 A/id /tot. how tran^i. .301. 53. 
 an?i, consir. w. quod 291, 2S. 
 animadvertere, constr. w. Inf. cl. 200, 26. 
 Anomalous nouns 347. R. 1. 
 Answers to questions, howexpr. in Lat. .308. 
 
 420. 
 
 antea, l^/ore. adv. of time 58, 70; followed by 
 
 quf(„> 207, K. 7. 
 Antecedents »)f pmns. of 3. i)or.«i. ini, 232; of 
 
 r.'laiivcs 200,308. Syndetic aniecedents 
 
 200. .300. 
 
 Anteclassical period of the Lat. lanirnage ,5. 
 any, En-1. indef. determ. form-a(ij., = r/v/.v-. 
 quam or t//liis 174. 2.50. 2:-quis alter nam, 
 si, nt", etc. .307, 07; see qi/is. 
 anybody (anyone) = (7//i.sY/*/^///? 2.58, 4. 
 ».nyt)nng= quirq>/(tm (qinJquain) 200, .3.59. 
 
 Whin e.\pr. by qtihl 2(10. Jl. 11. 
 Apposition, 01. ino Ibil. Airrei'ment of nouns 
 in apposition <>i. 107: 02. 110. Some imcs 
 P^ngl. altr. w. of etc. expr. by Lat. apposi- 
 tions, and sometimes KiigL appositions 
 expr. by Lat. attr. gen, 92, 112. 
 
 ar, nom. term, of Lat. nouns of vowel-cl.of 
 ill. decl. 1.35, 177; their irendi-r 137, 181. 
 Nonns in ar belouirinir to R-dass 121, 1.^^17. 
 Nouns in ar tak.-n from the Greek, how 
 tn*ated in Lai. 342. 4. 
 
 a-bitrari, con.-tr. w. Inf. cl. 2!K). 20. 
 
 Archaic period of the Lat. laniru.iire 5. 
 
 Argos, nam.' of city, how declin.-d 310, 26. 
 
 as nom term, of Lat. nouns. Thev i:ener- 
 ally belong to T-class; their decl. and gen- 
 der 128, lt.7; beloiu'inir to S-class 123, 101. 
 Civic nouns in Oft belong to vowel-class 
 I'JO, 187, 4. Gender of nouns in as 147, 203. 
 Nouns in a.v taken from the (ireek gener- 
 ally belong to first decl. 3^34, 6; 336, 9. 
 Greek nouns in ^/.vthar assume tlu' term.(^/ 
 in Lat. .3.30, 9. R. (ireek nouns in as l)e- 
 lon-ini,' to T-cIass 313. li. 2. 
 
 as. nom. term, of Lat. adjs., how declined 
 1.50, 212. 
 
 as. Kuijl. comparative conj., dilVerent wavs 
 of renderini: it iqii, qualis. etc.) 207. li. 20; 
 tr uisI l)y quant .-ifter tai» 210. .304: bv qiatt 
 qiiaidlt/ue alter tot tunnque 200, li. \\\ by 
 quamdiu Hfter tamdiu (as loniras) 211, 17.— 
 'As. . . so ", how rendered 278, 3.— 'As little 
 as ' = //0// inaqls qmim .'J03, 412. As manv as, 
 how rendered 208. 208; a< much as 200.' 301. 
 'As niucli as possible'^r/z/rt/zivv. superl.221, 
 li. 17. 'As soon as possible' =:v?/rtw pHinuni 
 
 222, 18. 'As much again ' referrino- tomul- 
 t\\)\e^=al(ero tanfo 219. R. 9. 
 
 assuefacere, constr. w. ol)j. jnf. 79, lOl. 
 
 Asyndetic coordination 99, "l^O; of adversative 
 propositions 280, R. ». 
 
 at, but, Lat. adver.«anve coord, conj., used 
 to correct mi>takes 279, 4; at=ii\ least 207, 
 43: at rtrte, at tamen Ih. 
 
 at all, Engl, einpliatic expression, how ren- 
 dered 290. 42. 'Not at all '=07nrrwo non, 
 nequaqnam, nullo modo, nuUo pacta -300, 52. 
 —At If ml, how rendered 290. 403. 'But at 
 least ' = fl/, at certe. at tamen 297, 4.3. 
 
 Athos, how declined 340, 24. 
 
 atque, and, coord, conj., use of 97, 115; 277, 
 ■■>80. 
 
 attamen, adversative conj., its use 280. 5. 
 
 Attraction in comj)arative periods 217, 309. 
 Attraction of ilie neiration 300, 408. 
 
 Attributes, definition 28, 20. Attributive gen- 
 itive 20. 27: attributive adjs. see A^ijec- 
 tires. }*articiplesasattribut(s291.394 foil. 
 Nouns in apposition as attributes 91 foil. 
 Coord nation of attr. 100. H. 8. Fonn-adjs. 
 as attributes 100. 240. Pronouns as atiri- 
 butes 100. 283 foil. 
 
 Attributive phrases, see Phta-<tes. 
 
 audere. ausus sum. semi-deponent 249, 344 ; 
 w. obj. inf. 03, 80. 
 
 audire, constr. w. Inf. cl. 290, 26. 
 
 aus, nom. t-rm. of Lat. nouns: gender & 
 decl. 117. 203. 
 
 ant, C(«Grd. conj. = or 100, 122. When used 
 without repetition 283. A". 15. Ant.. avt= 
 either. . .or 100. 122. Dift". from due. ..sive, 
 reL..vel 280, 38.3. Aut. . .aut=^i)arl\v. . . 
 partly x'83. li. 12. After negaticms jiist. of 
 neque...heque 282, li. 13. 
 
 autem, but. adver.^ative conj. 09, 121. Use 
 ol, and dirt", from s^d and rerutn 279. 4. 
 
 auxilia, au.iViary troops, used in neuter een- 
 «l.r40. R. 4. 
 
 as, nom. teim. of Lat. nouns of R-class 129, 
 ICkS: of nouns belonirini: to Greek K-class 
 344, li. 9.— .\djs. terminating in ax, how 
 declined 150, 212; their meaning 352, Ji. 5. 
 
 Before, Engl. adv. of time, transl. bv ar»iea 
 .58, 70 ; as conjunct, hv priusquum or ante- 
 quam 2^34, 328. For ' before ' as preposi- 
 lion see P. II. 
 
 bene, irr. adv. of bonus (= well) 58, L 
 
 bonus, forms irregular degrees of compari- 
 son 203. 2!i0. 
 
 bos, irr. noun, decl. and render 140, 188. 
 
 both, Enirl. jiutneral. now tratisl. 174, 4. 
 
 Brazen age of Lat. language 6. 
 
 bundus, v.rbal adjs. terminating in 352, H. 7. 
 
 but, Eiiirl. coord, conj., its difl'erent Lat. 
 equivalents 99, 121 ; 179. 381 ; 279, 3 & 4. 
 But not = neque tti-o ;301, 3. 
 
 by, Eni:l. preposition, re^'ular case-equiva- 
 lent of Lat. abl. 18. 13. As pass, agent = ad 
 107, 131. For otlier translations see P. 11. 
 
 Gssar, 5. 
 
 CapitaJ letters, when used in Lat. 7, 4. 
 
424 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 nant stems of 3- l^^^- ^ ' '^, ,„„i ai.- 
 
 Laiiu nouns takon V'T S.r 19 ib 2I 
 
 24 ; .it in 8. dccl. 34o, di. 
 Cato. M. Porcius 5. 
 Catullus 5. /^^,vw nres. pubjnnc. 
 
 .-JOtl, 415. . , „(>. o 
 
 rsL";r.':"c.H!;u-.'w inf. cl. 2..«), »; it» len. 
 
 j^i '^;£ ^^,^'iaf ^u.":^; cj;^''-t 
 
 certo, Htlv. of munniT ob, bi>. Di»- "om 
 
 eSSn:t.SL,andmfrrr^^^ 
 
 Characteristic, deft.u.ion 13, 2 of vcr^ 
 do-UTiuine their conjUiZ. !••• ^ 32 .iU , 4 • , 
 52 -4') 5.-): 228, 320; of uouus 331, 1 , .i-ib, 
 
 cl:;iJrlixy'nanl^ of country, .ender 40. .. 
 
 hcMore suftU ne {hicciiie, stcciae) 308, 07. 
 Koi-tin, par. 205^ 4m; 200,406. 
 Cities in u.< 7'>'- 40;* V^io-i'ion t.^ vrb.^ 
 »;!? 4S;rS' 1 ^ Ci-;^- /..n. how 
 
 ri'iwlt'red 112. n. 31. _ 
 
 .!■;:■ cl.lf-o.,i.i..f. 79. 10. ;w.«/ 
 ,"f!u-«' conslr. w. obj. inf. 61, 80. 
 
 cI,m,i'rison '.1 'V, ii'.iou 14. ,/ ; 201. aSV Cm- 
 
 oqi roll -Comparison of ftinaliiv, ana oi 
 S^ivrence -20.), "i-KV .Numeral comp^msn, 
 9n.< 2t7roll. Quantitative r.onip./209. .^00 
 a com!), of li-itation (U. c^n.n n, 
 numeral excels; -more Huu six etc.; 
 219. 312. 
 
 Comparative degree^, ^^:^^;^^Z ll!^ 
 
 IvV.Vs 202. 6-. I. r. cou.pa.rative. 2; 3, 2«.KH< '• 
 ('(mil) tonned l)y mavJ-^Ot, 2«.i Comps. 
 wi u superlatives 2 -4, 13; w.ihout poM- 
 rives 203 K. 5;-.i08, 291. Co.npaiatives of 
 ^t^rh''202.28r;203. 10.-C.m)p^ >^tl^ 
 
 Two a.ijs. compared w. each other, placed 
 ill the comp. fbv^ree 21b, 308. 
 rnmna-ative periods, their formatioJi 20f,, ^.»4 
 fX\nah sis 2^7,2%. In numeral com- 
 ^;scm2U:W7;i..qua.nitam^compnr- 
 
 son •>0'.) 300. Attraction •)f the btconu 
 .nember 217, R. 3. Idioms in co.np. pe- 
 riods 215 f«)ll. ^ , . »^^ na 
 
 Comperire, constr. w. Inf. cl. 29.^, 26 
 complures, severed, i.ulet. nun en I i .9, 2., 
 Compound nouns, treatment of l..b. ^r-j\'^ 
 lo nnder En-l. compound nount into Lat. 
 
 157, 229, Chanire of their 
 
 Compound verbs 3. ., A ppv. ^ .^ 
 
 su-m-vuwtls 50. d, .10«, .1., ' ', „.K:,.k> 
 Clmn<,'esin the V^p^l^ll^'f'^'^^^T^ 
 veri)s are compounded .-J.).. -J, -wb- "•.^• 
 ^Facere comp.mn.ied w. o. h.r verb. 3o8, 4. 
 coaari, con.tr. w. oOj. inf- IH, 138. 
 , concedere. constr w. ut 2.n, ^i- 
 
 ' conc.udere. to >nJ^r,^y. ^''^■^}:y,^*\J^' ^ 
 c',^/./..tode.er.nine.wj 291,2.. 
 
 condemaare. constr. w. q;iod ^ ♦/' f • „ 35^ 
 .ilh,4ii, o — ^ PHiadliiius 228 
 
 i;;ri'v-;rnjS"onr'v.-.rK-«iion.c...o"«. 
 
 '?°?Sf,nj°''*li"3Sro' i:''c';o,-cl. cu,g.. .77, 
 
 J"" ' "IL'r'I'f T.nSM Law of cnsrcilticm 
 Consecation of lenaea. . .... . 
 
 I cSnsequently, how expr. m I;;''/^^ ' ,8. ,. 
 
 Cousolants, P-'- """'llI^V;;' .^ ^- Greek ''ons. 
 (•uus..nant-st>'m* 143, loll, vv. ^J'*^' 7.^. , ., 
 S;,ns.41foll.Adjs.vs,c.n.s..e.n.l^fo.K 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 425 
 
 .;^m;4.r55T36'',2:3|>3»ll. 
 
 obj. inf. 248, Ji.i. 
 
 oonsulere, w. uf 291, 27. 
 
 Coordination !«i, ll.i loll; 276 foil. Copulative 
 cord. 97, 115 loll.; 2?? loll.; ol two attr. 
 a<ljs. «18, 1 19. Af<> ndi'tic co«ird. '.)9. 120; 280, 
 9. Advirsarive coord. 99, 121; 279 foil Di<- 
 jiin.tive coord. 99, 122; 2S0 loll. Causal 
 coord. 284, :iHr, & 38t;.-Coord. w. doui)le 
 conjs. 27.S; 280 foil.; by <juu,n. . .turn; purs 
 
 . . .parn ; qua . .qua ; nt/iul. . .nviu' ■ que 
 . .que 27K, li foil. -Analysis of coord, pbra- 
 ^'t•!S 100, lii: 277. 
 
 Copula, 54. 61, 
 
 coi,iae, tioop-, used in fern, gender 40, R. 4. 
 
 coi', decl. Hiid «render 140. 18!l. 
 
 Cos, island, how declined 340, 24. 
 
 Coss. ahbreviaiion tor cons 'ilibv^ 294,397. 
 
 Countries, names of, their geuder 40, d; 3:38, 
 
 country, Eu^]. noun, how to be rendered in- 
 to Laf. 122, n. 
 
 coantrymen, tiansl. by T7iei {(ui, sui. etc.) 
 /io//ii»M, (ir by iiostiuttx, restrdf^s iuO, R. 
 8. What coiiiitrvinaii :'=;<7//rt,s':' 260,7^ 8 
 
 credere, «onstr, w. Inf. cl. 21Ki, 2b. 
 
 cujas, G. fitis, nieaniiiir and decl. 2t;0. R. 8. 
 
 cujus, a, um, intorr. po.-^s. form-adj. 188, 2»;8. 
 
 cuius, cula, culum, diminutive term. To what 
 iioilMs they areapplifd 3.37, R. 1 & 2. 
 
 cum, coiij. see quuin. Cam, preposiiiou, eee 
 
 cunctari, w. obj. inf. 63, 80. 
 
 cur. iclnj, inierr. adv., a09, 421. Cur noti, 
 
 why not lb. 
 curare, w. >i( 291, 27. Cura uf. a^* circumlo- 
 
 ciuioii of allirmaiive iyipt-nitiv.' ;305, 62. 
 Curtius, wiitir of the silver a/;e 6. 
 custodiae, guards, ol leni. •,'ender 40, R. 4. 
 
 Dative, corri'sixiiHliii? to Fnirl. pn'i)o<ition 
 /" 18. 13. Dat. si.no., rules lor it.s lorma- 
 tioii ill ail the declensions :iJ2, c; of «at. 
 iM.uu. :333, i. Dai. pi. in e.> in :i decl. ,333, 2 
 Dat. |)1. in iWus in 1. decl. is. U. :i; :3:«, 2. d. 
 
 dapis, defictive noun wiihout nominative 
 ■•{i7. R. 1. 
 
 debere. w. oi)j. inf. 63, 80. Used impersonally 
 bl. 81. ^ 
 
 decernere, w. obj. inf. 63, 80; w. w/ 291. 27. 
 
 Declension, detinition 13.4. Theory of Lat. 
 decl. ;j31. 1, loll. FiusT DECL. 17 foil. For- 
 mat, of it» oise.s :W2, R. 1. Archaic «ren. 
 in as and /7/ :i:Vi. R. 2. a; term, am inst. of 
 Ciru/n ill i,'en. pi. 3-33, c; term. (7A'/.sin dat. & 
 Hbl. pi. m:l, R. 2.^/.— SkcoM) dkcl. 34 foil.; 
 its ^tem.s teruunate in o 3.3b, 12. Archaic 
 Horn, in OS. and ace. in om alur r. lb. Gen. 
 of nouns in lu.^ take a siiif,de i in classical 
 p(-riod .Tib. 1:1 Vocative m i \u<\. of in e 
 3."), 5: 3}7, 14. Irr. plurals in i and a 3.5, 37. 
 Pluialia tantum ;i5. R. 3. R stems <if 2. 
 decl. 43.— Tiiiui) dkcl.; its d;rt". from the 
 other declensions ll."). 189. Cliaracteristics 
 11.5,140. Form, of the cases 1|.5. 141; Gen- 
 der lib. 142. Case-teiminitioiis lib. 145; 
 133. Decl. of liquid stems in, 14b loll. (L- 
 clasp 117, 147; N-class 118. H9; R-class 121), 
 154; S-class 122, 158; Irregular consonant ' 
 
 Ptems 140 15?8). Decl. of mute stems 127, 
 lb2. foil. (I'-class 127, 164 ; T-class 127 165- 
 
 i^>T'','-'; ^7!^- 1'>^)--1^«(^1- of vowel-stemJ 
 132, l<2 1oll. (Ke-,Milarvowel-ohiss i;i3 \Ty 
 liqiiid-m.ites 137. 182; irremilar vowel- 
 stems i;i9, 187). Dirt, between decleiision- 
 siem and true stem i;33, R. 3.-Foukth 
 DKCL. 154, 221 : List ol nouns belonjjincr 
 to 11407. 4. To reco;,'nize nouns of f.-urtS 
 and second declensions in nom. 1.55 i{ 4 
 Dative pi. in vbu-^ 155, K. 3.— Fifth "j)ecl! 
 li>o. 22.3 iMosl of its nouns lack the plur.* 
 i.>h, K. 2. Dkcl. op Adjectives, see Ail- 
 
 j^chvs; oJ Pronouns, see tiiese.— Decl. 
 of GiiEKK NOUNS, see Greek Nouns. 
 
 Defective nouns .•^4»; loll. 
 
 demonstrare, constr. w. Inf. cl. 290 26 
 
 Demonstrative Form-adjectives 170. '244 foil 
 Demonstratives used as antecedents of 
 relative clauses 260, 10. Demonstrative 
 numerals 179. 2.")7. 
 
 demum, only i^not before), limitinff part. 295. 
 101; -Ml. 40 i a. « *- , 
 
 Deponent verbs, 112, 134 foil. Formation of 
 their tenses in pres. svstem 2::i2. ;325; iu 
 pert, system 249. 34.1 Dei)onent pert, par- 
 tKi|)Ie as pied. a!)l. 29-3, 34. 
 
 desinere, impersonally used 64,82; w. obj. 
 nil. b:i 80. 
 
 desistere, w. obj. inf. 63. SO. 
 
 deterioraiKl deterrimus, dift'. from nnor and 
 pf's.^liitiix 20.3. 9. 
 
 Determinative form-adjectives 1G9, 242 foil. Pe- 
 culiarities in their inllection 109, R. 3. Iii- 
 terr. form 170. 243. Definite form 170 244 
 foil. Indef. form 172. 24b loll.— Determin- 
 fltives constr. w. partitive geii. iauidain, 
 eorinn, etc.) 2b9. 375. 
 
 to be determined = j/V^fe 63, 1. 
 
 dens, declined 35, 36. 
 
 dicere, coiisir. w. inf. cl. 290. 26. 
 
 dicis {rau.^a), defective noun without nom. 
 317. A'. 2. 
 
 Diminutives, meaninjr and formation of .3.37, 
 15. 8ei ve as test for the u'ender of their 
 8 em-uouns lb. Diminutive adjectives 338, 
 
 Diphthongs in Lat. 6, 3; pronunciation of 
 10. 6. 
 
 dw. inseparable preiiosition .358, 3. 
 discere, constr. w. obj. inl. 63, 80; w. Inf. cL 
 290, 2b. ' 
 
 Disjunctive questions, how formed 308. 419. 
 ditionis. defective noun wiiiiout nom. 347, R. 
 
 diu, lonr/, adv. of time 58. 70. IIow com- 
 pared 203, 10. 
 dives, adj., declined 151 ; how compared 204, 
 
 do, EiiLrl. auxiliary, not transl. in Latin 236 
 
 •333 ; 300. R. .^0. 
 docere, w. obj. inf. 79, 101 : w. Inf. cl. 290. 26. 
 dolere, constr. w. quod, or Inf. cl. 291. 28. 
 domus, L'ender40, e ; decl. of 155. R. 2. 
 dubitare (non), w. quhi 291, 30. J>ubito an. 
 
 iiiiomalic use of 312, 78. 
 ducenti, etc. declined 178, R. 3. 
 
426 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 427 
 
 dum com.,-whilo234, r«8; const r. w. pros, 
 imi -id :«l). Bum H8 enrhtic ^um^ to 
 
 dumtaiat? rU, iJ/art/ur than), Uautn.g 
 
 part •^'•.■», 401 : -i'.»", 4CW a. 
 duo. dc cl. of 178, K. -i. 
 
 GrtM^k nmms iu r, as.ume ti.e eadin- a in 
 ehh Hn^.^'f-^in-adj., h.nv to he tnm.l. 172. 
 IS I, vi.-)'.»- 
 
 3:U, 6, K. Greek nouns of the S-c^- »" ff 
 
 A.l.j<. in t-. belon-iii- to S and l-cla^^es 
 
 especially. Em-1. emphatic part., how transl. 
 •2't."> 41)1; -i'W. 4(r): -.iiiH. 4'i-4s. . 
 
 esse -irr. ;'eri;of III conj. 5K 59: co'.j- o > « 
 
 !>r.. /:>.sr a. opnla 54, ♦il--^>f >< ^' f ^^ 
 of II. form of impt'rativc, use ol .W4, -5 in 
 
 et. and. coOrd. conj. ; use ol^ ., •' , ^I'l 
 :m ^/ . . . «/, both . . . and ih, »1" , ,'.8, 
 8S0. A7 i.x (i'/K idiomatic use of 27»,». 
 /;/ /w», ditV. from ne>/»e -^^^^ Jl^- Jf " 
 also -i...^ 401 : 2'.»:. 404 ; = eren "fS. 404 
 
 E30le3ia3tical writers, C, 
 
 '?,;%,);,-■ 71 >!./>. J. E";f ,'«.'y;'*4':-,;„ 
 
 orl, liovv cxiir. Ill L:lt. KM. li-, iSH. W. "J 
 
 'n-'T";, ".n:-.. oV,',u.' ,.,..„ »«..^i«: 
 
 ,Uu3,».»m..lin.i".Hivc,.r,mnaI low„«l 
 .,,,1111.4 tlu'V are applied •>>*, "• *• 
 
 f ,,' /^ o, -i /e 21 ' W lio t'lse '=r/Ui.< ah '/-• f 
 •Wuut flso'=7'/i'/ alitidr bouiLiuui., 
 ,„\^,,'' ^nliiKl niiul. Ih. 
 « n<.^ ten. ina.ioii of Lat. nouns he- 
 
 • , .w,^,-.Mi.«l ill ouestioiis helore tU' m- 
 
 eniii:^-;-a^alc<;5nl.co.^;.t.use28^^ 
 eatirely, l.'.w r.M.d.re. 2. (.. 4(i 
 
 Epicoa3 nouns ol beasts ^ ^ •'• : ,, 
 E?ira3. f'-m. nounof cou^;try40,rf. 
 
 ''^^'^"\r\:^ror'la '-uns&adjec- 
 ^^i ves" N., uis in Vr generally i)elon. to R^ 
 \ '..t'X i\i-c\ • their inrtcciioii and u"nder 
 
 Jl-r^lO- w. consonant stems ol 3 decl. 
 
 e[rs^sr'S:u^fvi^?;;ir'Di^^ 
 
 \nes generally belong to vowel-c . ot J 
 Hi ; their gender and mtlectum 1-^';1; • ' 
 1-^7 181. Thot^e belonging to T-cJass 128, 
 107 • to S-class 12:^, I'.l; to tlfth decl. 127 
 on- 15«. K.3. Collateral forms in a of 
 thV.'wfter 348 R. 4. Gender of nouns in e< 
 14 20> 1 17 20: . Nouns in ?.• taken from 
 'o'^eek \: Vecl. =«4, ;.; m 8; tbey are^>f ten 
 declined alter 3. decl. ;ij-\^^^l;, .^7'^, 
 nouns in r,? assuming the term, a m Lat. 
 
 also -.J.'n. 4WI . -t.M. ^v' ._— - . .^. 
 
 ebenim, causal coord, coiij., u^e of iM .W» 
 eUam,>so 2<>J, 401; -: even 2'.i., 404. i^tH 
 
 e'sr'rt'^/'^''^^' preliminary remarks con- 
 
 ceriiiiif^ its u>e 234, :W0. 
 eus, num. term ..f Greek nouns ; how 
 
 treated in Lat. 340. 25; 341. 3. 
 even Kn-l. emphatic particle hovy trans . 
 
 2'»°' 401 ; 207 404; remlered by ipi^e 194, 
 
 279" foil : 171, li. 9. Not even = tie . . . 
 
 e?;;^tiJ;'ex;^.lT2,240;2.3.23:lb..<m^. 
 KJ?rvihin- = om//irt 2tr), K. 9; = q>ndvi>< 
 S). 3.->'.». ~Q'nd<i>»' used only in certuiu 
 connection- 2ti3. /^ 20. ir rli*^ 
 
 ex noin. term, of Lat. nouns of K-class 
 12*.>. 170. Greek nouns of Iv-class in ex, 
 how treated in Lat. 34», R. 10. ,„„^..- 
 
 exclamations, 2'..:,, 4 1 . Kxclamatory cl^tses 
 i„ ,h,- lorm of interrog. clauses .ill, .a. 
 
 existimare, constr. w. luf. cl- 2'.K), -to- 
 
 nin.fer-m. 2 : by sup«^rlatives 221. 3 •> ^ 
 extremus, indef. «rduia numeral 1^2, 261 , 
 irr. superl. of exterus 20.3. 290. 
 
 Facere I-verb of 3. conj. 50, .58 Its com- 
 pounds w. prepositi.ms chan-e a into ? .-.'), 
 \lT Farlr ecmipounded w. other verbs 
 wittiont change of vowel ('*<<">■ ''^/''^^,ff.«'^-! 
 3-,8 4 Format, of its puss, voice lUb. 28 , 
 ItS: k. 4. /V- w. ../ and y as circuin- 
 h>ciition of imperative .JO.) h> . 3lK 4 5 
 
 familias, ancient gen.^of jamUia , nouns 
 compounded w. it h^i , K. lu. ^„„,i„-,.^ 
 
 far End. adv.. before superl. rendered 
 /o'/i7^o7m*///r>219. IMO. 
 f»s indedinabh^noun. useof 140, l.H). 
 fateri. constr. w. Inf. d. 290, 2(.. 
 fauces t>l tannim; gender and decl. 1.39, .-i. 
 fXw citizens, transl. hy v^i Kt'n, sm etc.) 
 
 fere (ferme) a^mo^Mitniting P;i[t,^f '' ^:*^^ ;, 
 DifT. from jvpnr and prope 2'.*9, 40».. JSrt/^^ 
 I fere = quite enou-h 299 3 : ./>^« "<>/> - 
 ; -almost ,._'enerally) iiot m 52 
 
 ferre irr. verb, conj. of ol, o9 , 2iu, o. i» 
 i pass. 10(1, 127. 
 
 few, indef. numeral, = /jam; few things = 
 pa'ica 2H1. 7?. 14. 
 
 fidere, fisus sum, semi deponent 249. .344. 
 fieri, as |»as-. o[ fact re. its conj. 10(), 128; 
 241, 10; as (!<)pula ( = to become) w. pred. 
 adjs. 107. 1.32. (^tnnritv of the i, in the 
 dideieiit form.s of fien 388, 1. 6. 
 Alius, forms its' voc' in i .3.5. R. 5. 
 Finite verb, (ietinition 14, H. 3 : 227. R. 1. 
 for, Engl, pr'puyi/io/i (see P. II) ; before 
 veriial adjs. in inr/ rendeied by quod 2o4, 
 329 ; 291. -^9. Foij, E/u/l. catmU conj., how 
 e.\-})r. 284. ;J86. Eou not = neque (non) 
 einin .3'H, 3. 
 
 Form-adjec ives, classification and inflection 
 lfi8, W9 foil. Combination of 1!K), 270 
 fi'Il. See the articles Deterniinatire, Xu- 
 mernL Q'tanfitafire, Possesdve, Qualila- 
 fire Form ad/fcfivf.t. 
 fortasse, p*^rhap<. limitinij: p'lrt. 295, 401. 
 Fractions, li<>w expr. 17!». 2.5«). 
 fraus, L'eiider and decl. of l:j9, R. 10 ; 128. 
 Fraurntitive verbs 3."-(). R. 4. 
 from, Kiul. preposition isee P. T[) ; before 
 pirticipials in t"7, rendered by Lat. obj. 
 ml. til. 4; 79. R. .5." 
 frugi, indeclinable adj. 151, 218; its comp. 
 
 and snpi-rl. 204. 11. 
 frugis, defi'ctivt; noun without nom. 347. 1. 
 fully, Kiigl. empliatic part., how rendered 
 
 2'.»ti. 102. 
 Future tense of the present system (fiitiire- 
 pre>fnt), format of 231. 322. 3. Fulure- 
 ptvf., its signification 2,j0. 347. 
 
 Gajus, Roman Jurist (J. 
 gaudere, gai-'maa num. semi-deponent 249, 
 .3t4 Constr. w. <i>i()'l or Inf. cl. 2'.»l. 28. 
 Gendsr of noiin.>j.3s. :i<.t. Nouns in p!.. com- 
 pri-inir iiKlividiials of both sexes (and 
 Iieiice n.itional nouns) are ma~c. 39. R. 2. 
 Gender of peis. nouns of 1. decl. 39, 42; 
 of nouns denoting tliiiiLTS in 1 «fc 2. decl. 
 40. 4-ifoll. ; fein. in '/••.■ 40. h—f; of citi.-s 
 and countries in >/,? .3:;8. 17; of shrubs and 
 »in iller plants in //v ;i3s, 17. '2.— Gender of 
 nouns ol 3. dec!.; of nouns of N-clasg 119, 
 151 foil.; R-clas8 121, 1.50 foil.; S-cIass 
 123, Ifil : T-class 12H, IHT ; K-class 130, 
 171. (Jender of the vowel-stenis 1.37. 181 ; 
 13«, isrt; of the irr. vowel-stems 139,187 
 f<dl. : of the irr. consonant-stems 1:^9. 188. 
 Gender of nouns of 4. and 5. declensions 
 155. R. 1 ; 1.5(!, 225. Svnop-is of the gen- 
 der rule>< 144. 191 folf. (J.-nder ol nonns 
 denoting pkksons 144, 192 foil. Commo.n 
 GENDKR of personal nouns 144. 193. Gen- 
 der of BKASTs 145. I'.M ; epicene gender 
 145, 195; common gender of beasts 144. 
 193 ; 115, li»7. Gender of nouns denoting 
 tilings according to the terminations 14ti. 
 1!»8 foil. Gender of Greek nouns, see 
 Gr^ek no'fns. 
 generally, Eii'.d. adv.. transl. hv the verb so- 
 IPr- GJ. H{. 1 : by plrnmi/ite iSO. 258. 
 Genitive case, coiTes|)on(ling to Engl, prepo- 
 i«itiou 0/", or to possessive case 18, 13. 
 
 Corresponding to Engl, appositions 93. C ; 
 94. D & E. Gkn. sing., 1;hv of its forma- 
 tion in all declensions 332, b; of nonns 
 in ins and ium formed w. a single i 3:^8, 
 If).— Gkn. pi.uu.. its ft)riiiation in all de- 
 clensions 3:«, h. Interchanging of the 
 two systems ot case-endings in gen. sin" 
 and plnr. 333, R. 2. Gen. pi. in i//m o'f 
 vowel-stems in ;i decl. 133, K. 1. Partitive 
 OEN., see this article, 
 glis, irr. nonii, its decl. and gender 139, 187. 
 gloriari, constr. w. quod 2tn, -iS. 
 gratias agere, to thank, w, quod (not w. Inf. 
 
 el.) 291. -iS. 
 
 gratuhri, w. quod 291, 28. 
 gratum facere, to oblige, w. quod (not w. Inf. 
 
 cl.) 291,28. 
 
 greatly. Engl, adv., = maf/nopej^^ 'iiO, 2. 
 Greek nouns. General priiiciple concerning 
 their u<e in Lat. 3:i3, 4. First Gkeek 
 DECLENSION 3-34, 6. Regul.ir case-termi- 
 nations 334, 0; exceptional case-termi- 
 nations 33H, 11. Gender 33(5. 10. Second 
 (4i:ekk DECLENSION 3.]9 foil. Temiinat. 
 of nom. simr. 339, 19 loll. Wliat nonns 
 take ace. sing in on 331», 22. In what in- 
 stances Greek case-terminations of 2. decl. 
 are tLsed in Lat. 33'.». 23. Decl of proper 
 names of .\ttic. 2. decl. .340, 21. Gender 
 340, 27.— Tmiio Gkekk declension 340, 
 28 foil. Nouns of 3. (ireek decl. have the 
 same classes as the Lat. 340. 28. Greek 
 nouns w. liquid stems 342.30; w. mute- 
 stems 312. 3t) (P-class .343, R. ; T-clas3 
 343, R. 2 foil. ; K-class .344. R. 9 f^i)ll.) ; w. 
 Vowel-stems 341, 29. — (ireek case-termina- 
 tions of ,3. decl. used in Lat. .34.5. 33. 
 grus, irr. noun of 3. (4?) decl.; inflection 
 and gender 140, 188. 
 
 Habeto = knou\ IT. form of imperative, 
 idiomatically used .304, 2. 
 
 baud, negative part., 295, 401 ; diflf. from non 
 2<><.>, 407. 
 
 he (him, her, them), Eiiirl. pron., when ren- 
 dered by is. ea. id. and when by sui. sibl, 
 f>e 161. 232 foil.; I«i3, 238. In Inf. clauses 
 287. 3s9; in interrog. clauses 312. R. 16. 
 
 help, 7 cannot help doing something — non 
 jws-'Um non :300. 51. 
 
 hence, as Enirl. adv. of conclusion, how 
 expr. in Latin 284. .3a5. For hence as loca- 
 tive adverb see P. If. 
 
 Heteroclite nouns 317. -37. 
 
 Heterogeneous nouns 318. 38. 
 
 Heterological nouns 19, 5 ; of 1. decl. 409, 1 : 
 of -2. decl. 40«». 2 ; of 3. decl. 409, 3. 
 
 Hetefoplastic nouns 347, R. 3. 
 
 hie, ha93, hoc, denionsfrative form-adj.. d'^cl. 
 and use 171, 245 foil. Translation of hie 
 as di-jjtinct form-adj. 204, 7?. 23. .^rt<" ab- 
 solutely used 2(il, R. 13; w. ])artitive quan- 
 titative gen. sing. 2(i7. 371 foil. 
 
 to hinder (somebody from doing) = itnpe- 
 cFife w. obj. inf. 79, R. ,5. 
 
 hir, indeclinable noun; doubtful meaning 
 of this word 3:38, IS. 
 
428 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 his, her. its, their./.ncl. R^^J/^nd ^s^^u'by* ' 
 
 s,,,!,^ 1ST. -itkS ; 197. In inf. «•). -»«, -«' i^'"- 
 Hiitoricil lafini ive, nee lahniuve. 
 homo, dill, fiom rir 118, u. 1- 
 
 ^Z^ Qua,t>>lv.M. 5: as adv. = quam 
 
 S K. i.-I KNOW now TO (do a thiu^') 
 z^ scio w. obj. inf. 0», 5. 
 humus. r//-o"n'/, iVi". »'*'"" of 2. dccl. 40, e. 
 
 I (ireek iu-utcr«. in t of the T-<las=», how 
 
 T-i,tdnTiU 245. yc/emgt/i=the.ame 
 
 jif» ^tlT, /^. ■"•^- , . „. .,.34 .1.50. OK.) 
 
 if Kniri. conditional conj. = «t 234 •««, .f>-, 
 
 ■W) It not = /a4, or si non :'.02, No. 4. 7/, 
 
 f„tro.l.,Hn- intcrr. clatines, transl. by Lat. 
 
 iiitenoir. panicles 811,423. _ 
 igitur. cOnl. concUisive conj. D.ff. from 
 
 ,rao Hiid itaqiie 2.^, 38.i. 
 me /Aa/ deinonstnmvf forra-adj.. its docl. 
 .n. .w' IT! -il.-) (Cannot b.- transl. hier- 
 
 a y vhe l.'sod as disjunct, adj. 2H5, «. « 
 
 mus. a, um. .limi-V'!i:i'^^„^7'"- N"""'* ^" 
 wliidi it is applied .«., if. l- , 
 
 imber, irr.-. noun w. vowel-stem of 3. decl., 
 i,s lurtrcti.H. and gender ^'^.^- l«2>n 
 
 immo, Uou- us<-d 1" answers 309, 420. 
 
 impedire, vv. ol»j. mf. .9, 101. 
 
 impellere, lonstr. w. ^<. 291, 27. 
 
 iM-rative of botli lornis 803 foil. 
 
 lSpe?ati.e sentences, ^^- ^'^^'^^''^ 
 
 .nl r.MMis ..I tb.'ir pre.licjtes 304 1 11 . L)80 
 
 of III.' 11 lorn, ol imperanve. and <l ft. from 
 
 ho lorm 3 4. -2 foil. U^e ot II. lorm in 
 
 he : ■ H rs. and .lirt". fnmi the pres. and pe -r 
 
 Mhimu- m\ iV^ 1'^« of circuuilocuiions 
 
 l.f H.^rativc imperative nentences 3U6, 41o. 
 
 iMl.KKATIVE .LAlTSES30ti. bo. 
 
 Imperfect indicative, f-rtna . .Vf,.^^).- * . S<„ni 
 nr,.ti(.u of this tense ^.A 3i'. .^«'j <•■ 
 
 ImT)erfect subjunctive, lor(nat. ot 231. 3-i. ^. 
 
 7!t in cM.n.liiional clauses of non-reality 
 2.V2! :iiO. When used in clanser acct.idmg 
 to law of consecution i.")!, 319. 
 
 Impersonal verbs, see T>r6.. Impersonal pre- 
 
 imprimis (inprimisX e^p^cia/^y, emphatic part, 
 21».-}, 401; -298. 4T. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 429 
 
 ({ii-(ll(<. see 
 
 f'redicafe. 
 
 it is impossible not to do, = non possum non 
 w. ui)j. luf. 3oO, 61. 
 
 N-cl:is-: how ireated in Lat. 'i^i- 30. 
 li^ceptlve unchoative) verbs 52^ (U. torn.at. of 
 
 their i-rr. ^yMe^n .iU),J{. 3 f }»• 
 incertum est ",.i.li<;.nv'nc us. >f -^ ; '«-^^^^ 
 
 incitare, constr. w. '"-:•"• 7!- .^w.. u :. ^gn- 
 tad«d,KMSI..-m,.l.alicorlim.uns!pa.t.,h..«r 
 
 •j:U. 350; in con.iitionMl tl. *.)2. .»»•. 
 
 indignari, w. 7''<>'/ «''•/"f/,';,^ -f,)^,,,,. 
 
 Indirect 'l-ef-^;»\::'^;,^(;^rdini; numeral 
 ^'lS;l';;;f:^u:ori;«..,irr.Buperlameof 
 
 In/nitiv., Lu... i, of ll.reck„..l> i^J^ » 
 
 *:,',','ri,:r'«'.'e. . ',. '..t^or .!-• • «i""^' 
 
 s hi. ini. wncii I' »^ ^ , OlilKCT- 
 
 ji.id nred adis. or nouns 1)1, .H. 2) uii.it.» 1 
 ^FIN Tn-n2. 79. Verbs jroverninu ob^. 
 Ml 03,80; deponents w.obJ..n•l^t•. If; 
 
 „bj. inf. dependent <'.'\'*'^*'^ ^\* > ; if '-^is 
 • „^ .11« 1 Mfiniiiixxi: w. oitj. ini- <^^'~» 
 c-(P/yi.--.«« 24H. 1. -'^7'" '* . .,,^ » ■'4 Verba 
 
 mt. 28b, 1.». '^"- , . \ c rendered by ut 
 
 Infinitive (hn-l.). V^'J;. ";;• '"^^ Lciatise^ 
 
 234. H- 4; ^y various Lat. 1 nai iittuo^'-, 
 
 2'.»l, 29. Their formation 
 
 Infinitive clauses 285 fob. ^^ ' 'V., ,,,,..,.,1 by 
 .1«-, -^IA^ foil In . clauses introouttd «»jr 
 i^^a/;f^Is<V -k Wl»tM. Engl. That-clan.ea 
 are xnr by Lat. Inf. cl. 2<»n, ).-l"f. cl. 
 ::t. 07.^' after verbs of prals.n,^ ecu- 
 snrin-, and verbs of ^motion 291, 2«. 
 infitias (i/n, <l^-f"»""^'^,'l*.!'";.i*''ds\i 13, 4. 
 
 injuU'; dofective noun, i.. M. only 347, B 
 
 2. 
 
 inauam, conjnir. of 242. 12. , . 4^ 11 
 
 instar n.ieclinable noun, n-c of 140, 11. 
 S & of w. a participial in ;'''(.', I^;';^'*^;,^ 
 
 bv ^//(0/(301,53. For' instead ol -y^ro, ^ee 
 
 intelligere, const r. w. Inf. cl. 290, 26. 
 ' to intend = relle «3. 1. 
 
 con«lr w. interr. clauue 312, »«. 
 Ltrrrem^'awtit.. no„„. used in ace. and 
 
 330, 11. lb. 
 
 Interrogative Form-adjectives, belong to each 
 ol I he tive classes ot ronn-adjs, 170; 17V; 
 181; I80; 187; 188. Use of interro^'ative 
 lorm-adjs. and advs. iu relative luieiroj,'. 
 sentences :509, 421. 
 
 Interrogative sentences, 307 foil. Are either 
 al)-<)luit- or ri'lative 3h7, 416. Disjunctive 
 int<irr. («entences ;^8, 419. Two interr. adjs. 
 or advs. in the t«ame sentence 310, 73. In- 
 volution of inierr. pent. 310, 74. Intkk- 
 
 noGATIVK €'I.AISES 310, 422. 
 
 Involution of interr. sent. 310, 74. 
 
 ipse, demonstrative h)rin-adj.; ded. and use 
 ITl, 24."); 171, K. 9; asattr. of pronouns of 1. 
 &2. persons, how rendered 191. 279; as attr. 
 ot pron. of 3. pers. (he himself, etc.) 195, 
 2S0. Not atireeinj^j in case w. the reflexive 
 sui, nfji, nf.hiw with the antecedent oi sui 
 etc. (se ipse inferjecif) 196, 281. Its gen. 
 ip^ii/s lojjieaily a^jreeinii w. poss. adjs. (sua 
 ips'nts virtus) 198. 9. Jpae = even 171, K. 9; 
 2it8. 45. 
 
 ire, (eo>, irr, verb of 4. conj. 47, 54, Pass, of 
 ire lOti, 129 ConjuiT. 211,7. Remarks on 
 it- ten-es 243, 4-6. Compounds of ire 48. 
 
 Irregular Lat. nouns 346. :ii. foil. Irr. verhs 
 23S lull. Irr. adverbs lo2, H. 6 & 7. irr. com- 
 parison 203 foil. 
 
 is, nom. term, of Lat. nouns and adjs. of .3. 
 decl. They jjenerally are vowel -stems ; 
 their gend<r and decl, 1.3.5. 177; 137,181. 
 Nouns in is- that take Un in ace. sin»,'. i;j6, 
 179; w. i in abl. sin<r. 1.37, 2-4. Niuns in 
 is belon<,diii; to S-cla>s 12;i, Uil ; to T-class 
 129, 167. IrrciT. nouns in is (sa/tguiti, ])ollis) 
 140, 189. Synopsis of irtnder of all the 
 nouns in iv»' UT, 204. Nouns in is taken 
 from the (^reek :Ul. R. 1; 343, Ji. 4.— Ad- 
 jKCTivEs in ^^' 149, 20^>. 
 
 is, ea, id, pron. of 3. pers.. and demonstra- 
 tive form-adj.; decl. of 160, 231. Is quit, lie 
 wii •: ei qui, those who 2.58, 3; is and ei 
 omitted lb. AY (afquc) is. idiomatically 
 used 278. 8. Id as determinative abs. adj.; 
 f<H-m of it- cases {ejus rei, ei rei. eo) 262, 16. 
 Id w. partitive «.'en. sinir. 268, 372. Id tetn- 
 ]}0/ig. id aef<lti< 268, R. 30. 
 
 iste, dennmstrative f..rm-adj. 171, 245. 
 
 ita, adv. of manner (P. II); ita {ita rero) 
 used as answering part. = yes 308, 420. 
 
 itaque, coord, conclusive conj. Dill", from 
 f /f/o and iqifur 284. 3s5. 
 
 ius, nom term, of nouns and adjs. of 2. decl. 
 35, •W; :ii6, 13. I'sed to desi^'uate the Ro- 
 man fjenfes 3.37. 13. 
 
 I-verbs ^^\ third conj. ,50. 58. Format, of 
 their tenses 233. 32ti; in pa~s. voice 105, R. 
 3. Deponent I-verbs 113. 13ti. 
 
 ix. nom. term, of nouns and adjs. of K-cluss 
 12<). 168; l."»0. 212; as f<m. term, of movable 
 nouns in or 144. 3; 352, App. Ill, R. 3. 
 
 Jubere, w. obj. inf. 70. 101 : w. Tnf. cl. 29^, 26. 
 
 Diff. of tiiese two constructions 21K1, n. 1. 
 iudicare, w. Inf cl. 2<H), 2»;. 
 junior, youngtr; use of, and diflf. from minor 
 
 '2u4, 11. 
 
 Juppiter (Jupiter), decl. of 140, 188. 
 
 Jurists, Roman 6. 
 
 jus, riq/t(, law. gender and decl. of 139, R. 
 
 10. DitT. from lex, law 129, n. 12. 
 jusjurandum, ded. of 157, R. 4. 
 jussu, defective noun, iu al)l. only 347, R. 2. 
 just, Engl, emphatic part., how transl. 298, 
 
 40.5. 
 
 Justinian, 6. 
 
 justo, as comp. abl. = ' than it is just ' 218, 7. 
 Juvenal, 6. 
 
 K, when this letter is used in the Lat. al- 
 phabet 6, 1. K-class of Lat. nouns 129 ; of 
 Greek nouns used iu Lat. 344 foil. — K- 
 mutes («gutturals) 7, 5. 
 
 to know how, rendered by scire w. obj. inf. 
 64, 5. To know = novisse 248, 4. 
 
 Lac, irr. neuter noun 140, 189; 147, 205. 
 
 Lactantius, 6. 
 
 laetari, constr. w. quod, or Inf. cL 291, 28. 
 
 Latin language, its origin and brief history 5. 
 
 laudare, w. quod 291, 28. 
 
 least = vd/iinius {ininime) 185, 2; 230, 290. 
 
 ■At least,' w, the force of a restricting 
 
 part., how transl. 296, 403. ' Bui at least' 
 
 = at. at certe. at taimn 297, 43. 
 less, Engl, quantitative adj. and tiA\'.=minus 
 
 (minor, minores. pauciores) 185, 2 ; 186, li. 
 
 2 ; 210, 302 ; 210, R. 12; 214. R. 14 ; 211, 305 
 
 I^ss. . .than — mm tain., .quam 303. 58. Less 
 
 tliau (before numerals), how to expr. 219, 
 
 312; 220, R. 13 foil, 
 lest. Engl. conj. = tie 301, 4 ; after verbs of 
 
 fearing .302. 55. 
 let, as auxiliary of the imperative in 3. pers., 
 
 how transl. 306, 63. 
 levir, derivation, and decl. 3.3S, 18. 
 lex, \aw,(\\f(. from jus 129. n. 12. 
 licet, it is allowed. inii)ers. verb 61, 76. Its 
 
 construction w. logical subj.indat., aloiig 
 
 w. pr>d. dative 74, R. 3. 
 linter, irr. noun of 3 decl.. inflection and 
 
 gender 139, 187. 
 Liquid consonants 7, 5. Liquid stems of 
 
 nouns 117, 146 foil, 
 little, Hs quant itai ive form-adj., how transl. 
 
 18(), R. 1 ; generally expr. by non mvltuvi; 
 
 a little = panllum 299, 50; not a little = 
 
 aliquant us (um) 185, 3.; too little =parum 
 
 lb.; HO little, tardulus ; how little, quantu- 
 
 lug 187, 5. 
 Livy, 5. 
 
 locuples, adj., decl. of 150, 212. 
 locus, n(uin of 2. decl., w. plur. in i or a, of 
 
 different signilicatioiis 35, 37. 
 longe. longius, longissime, adverbial degrees, 
 
 geiierallv used in the meaning/ar,/a/-/A^7', 
 
 fart f test '"iy)-^. 10. Longe before superl.=6y 
 /(/?-2l9. R. 10. 
 Lucretius, 5. 
 
 Mfl, nom. termination of neuter nouns of T- 
 class. taken from the Greek :^4, R. 6; 147, 
 205. Nouns iu ma sometimes take gen. pi. 
 in tdrurn, dat. pi. in its 344, li. 7. 
 
 I 
 
 
430 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 magnopere. quantitative adv. = very much, 
 m'a'nus^' funnt' irr. degrees 203. 2<M) m}or 
 
 form the supcrl. deir.ee ot "^lJ^'^»_17;,,f^:^. 
 2M3 Mavime. as euiph.mc part., - ^^ptti 
 ail V, clfiertv 2!>.V 4Ul ; 2US, 46. Dilf. from the 
 ailv. imuiine -illS. 4S. 
 
 more «•* qumit tative adj. = P'ti^ i'^-^- -^ ■ '» 
 more, n- q" ,j„r,"i 1T'« •i.>7 ; nP(iuiiiiii- 
 
 t.itive adv. = mf/^i" 21'>- •^•-- -''"' -^^*' -,'"', 
 ',;;„"'■'.";% • t-rnV,: a/i>i,..iv. a,|j. vUl,, r 
 
 to make a living, ''^^•^'.'^^t 9^'5C':%f i^i^^ S'referrln.^toth.ntrs == l^'}' '^ J;^'^^^ 
 malle, irr. verl). conj. n, 59: ^" , ' '^ : 'J"^' )>\^, Summary «.f rules about r.mUH, 
 traM-1.03.K.l;;i4;>.3.Lseofm .^n2^,3 /M ^jj_. ^,.^^^.; ^^- "r!:" ^^L" H:; 
 
 j/a//. w. obj. inf. «i3. sd. w- 9;f;;/'^ '^"'^ ^^- ^ 
 
 SS=i'>;;'oorrir." D.ff. oi these expres- 
 
 siuus 118. u. 1. 1 „ Af\ n A 
 
 mancipium, dare, of neuter gendei 40, R. 4. 
 
 SaSdui (U-lectivc noun, in a>.l. only .M7, « 
 
 ■ more 
 or advs. 
 
 expr 
 
 r bv minua w. an affirmaiive 
 (mi'iius mpe — more ran-ly) 
 
 villi li 
 
 )i. 
 
 many 
 
 iZ^n, ar. rendered u'uun UnniA ^nnU 
 3.>T. Manv olhen», ahi inultiiM, dO-i, 
 (itiH-r tliiui^!*; iilia luulta lb. 
 
 Martial, i\. ^.n^ Mtn 
 
 mas, decl. and «render 13'), 1«T. 
 M&trona, iiver.inasc.4it, a. 
 meditari, w. (»bj. inf 114, 13«. 
 
 •2ti. Imperative ///''m<'//Vo-i4.>, 2: •• »• ^,- 
 met ei.diiiea! si-.ttix to pronouua I'Jl, -»•». 
 
 Tun- %;/. abs. us.-d = -my fnends,^ -my 
 nuuiiy^'mtS. Nenterabj^pl.mej^-Muy 
 p.op. rty; or • my .-it hurs, f ».l-/;/'?; . 
 
 miUel miliia, use a.ul . ed. of 1.8, 11. 3-5. 
 
 million, liow exnr. 1 .i». K. «• 
 
 Sine, thine etc., En-l. pos.. how expr. 264, 
 
 Tnt^n.» indef quantitative form-adj. 185, 
 
 T-?"' u "ed a- adv. 18S. >»•-'.». Use <.t m. in 
 
 nujtntitiMve comparison -210, .JOi, -in, -w.). 
 
 ^;;^;;^Zn-:i'^a;i^r'uperl.= leant 
 negative answer3«)i>.4;iO. 
 
 :i:^;u^iuVt'oo■d.2r8./^^ ^;;-t;'^f 
 
 ...«?;/ e/i'f//i. not only . . . I>nt "Ir' ,^*f- -• 
 
 molesce ferre, to be vexed, w. quod or iuf. tl. 
 2'Jl, 28. 
 
 adj. or adv 
 
 ; I i'/ for bv th,- inneeti..nal ^uperlatlve 
 onKdj. 2.-4. 2:.3:2U2. 288 
 
 --;\troi«p;S^;>-"" 
 
 31«. 41. Ol nouns ui 3. de. . 144 -4- 
 
 r^;:;vi;;j:;;Am-TtvKj40 45. 
 
 „, ,,i.//^/U IS, -J • . ^ „„,//<V„,.„- 
 
 ^''^''■';^ Jr/? q 2« /Ml. When the 
 ^n.^ mXnV u;-d'^«( /e. 9. Much as 
 
 4 oivi -^n • 21«» 8 \ Kiiv Mi("H. aa 
 
 ./A.,#, ' ^o mud» = /f///^''' (tanniin), t?i<- 
 / tTmw uch ' 'SO much.' abs. us.'d 
 
 ^(>.i, i», •"'" ' .1.«^ •> Mil o as abi. 
 CrS?Ku.Krrc:;inp™iiv.--..V'm..;.efo.e 
 
 «■,;"«("••!«■ "1": '"^f"™ »"i.'>"- '';■"■* 
 
 mcTut i;0. JoT. Abs..lute nse ol the neu- 
 
 l-.iT foil. 
 
 N» (/»«) = i"'^eed, affirmative particle 295, 
 
 ^^^ ' *fni\rJon1 it-^ u^e 284. 386. Nam, 
 nam, causal couj., »« " . , 
 
 as iuterrojjalive suffix 309, 4il. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 namque, causal conj., 284, .386. 
 
 narrare, con.<tr. w. Inf. cl. 2W, 26. 
 
 natu, ddective noun in abi. only 347, ff. 2; 
 
 added i<> ///i//or and ///a^'or to express aj^e 
 
 of meii 204. 11 ; 22(», 15. 
 
 ne, 1) NKGATIVE PAKTICLE = TiOt 295, 401. 
 
 Its U8«' in iie<,fative imperative si-nti-nces 
 3(X), 415. Ne . . . quid-in, not even 300. 
 
 52.— 2)//?, NKGATIVK CON.ILrNCTION, =:'lest.' 
 
 or ' that not" 301. 4. Idiomatic use after 
 verbs of fearim; 302. 55.-3) ne. as enclitic 
 iNTEunoGATivE PAHTicLE 307,417; iu in- 
 direct questions 311, 42.1 
 
 nearly. Knirl. particle. hc»\v rendered 299,406. 
 
 nee, coiMciinaiing negative conj., see ntqne. 
 Nee non, nee ni/til, use of 300, 5. Aecne, 
 ' or not,' in indirect questions 311. 42:3. 
 
 necessario as eomp. abi. =: 'than it is ne- 
 c.■^^ary " 218, H. 7. 
 
 necesse, ind.-clinabln adj. 151. R. 4. Neeesse 
 est, as impcrs. pied. 61, 77. Its construc- 
 tion w. predicate-dative 74, R. 3. 
 
 nefas, indeclinable noun, use oi" 140.11. 
 
 negare. w. Inl. cl. 290.26 ; iust. of dicerew. 
 TicL'aiive Inf. cl. .•:03. 411. 
 
 Negation, expr. by neirative particles 299, 
 407; by neijjurive words compounded w. 
 tlie n. ■«ration (ne) ;inO, 40n. With what 
 Words negations may or must be connec- 
 ted in neirative scn"tences ;iOO, No. 1-4. 
 Tw(» ne-raiions in same sentence 300, 51. 
 
 Negative sentences 294. 398 foil. 
 
 negligere, w. oi)j. inf. 63. NO. 
 
 neither ... nor = ne(iue (ritc) . . . neqne {nrc) 
 .3t)-J, 109. When rendered by ne .. . ntre lb. 
 
 nemo, indef. determinative adj. ; declension 
 and relation to mdh/.-i 172, 5 ; 174, 249 ; 174, 
 3. Ab>oliitfly nscd = nobody 2.58, 4; 
 3(MI. 408. Xeino uinqiiani (never anybody) 
 30(», No. 2. Xeihonun and non ntino 259, 
 li. 5 ; 263. 2(»; 300. 51. 
 
 nempe, expkuiative part., 295,401. 
 
 Nep")S, ■">. 
 
 nequam, indeclinable adj. 151, 218; its de- 
 jri-es 201, 11. 
 
 nequaquam, emphatic neL'ativo part. 300. ."12. 
 
 neque (ne:), nor, and not, coord, neirative 
 conj. 301, 3. Did", from et non ;i0l, .'>:}. Xt- 
 (jiif rem, but not 301, 3; ntqne tanun lb. ; 
 iii-iiue (non) enim. (or not lb.; neque i{/i- 
 tur. therefore not lb. Neque . . . neque = 
 Utiiher . . . nor :i02, 49 ; aftir a nei^alion 
 = either ... or 282. /.'. 13; ;io0 ; 51. 
 
 nequire, irr. verb. conjMirated 4s, R. 2 ; 241, 
 9. W. obj. inf. 63, iSO; used impersonally 
 64, ^2. 
 
 nescire, w. obj. inf. 63. 80. Use of in nejra- 
 tive sentences 300. 408. Xti^cio an, idio- 
 matic use of 312. 78. 
 
 neuter, iiulef. «leterminative form-adj. 172, 
 42ti, 5: declension 173, 218. W. partitive 
 K<*n. 2h9, .375. 
 
 neve, nor, in imperative sentences and 
 ciau-es .306. 6.5. 
 
 never, Enirl. adv. of time = vumquam 58, 
 70. Never anybody = nemo inulliut) vm- 
 quam 300. 40S. 2. Never anvrliinir = nihil 
 umquam 261, Ji. 12; 300, 408, 2. And nev- 
 
 431 
 
 TT^LUt 
 
 er = neq7je umquam 301, No. 3. 
 ner^r = ne umquam 301, No. 4. 
 
 nevertheless, transl. by tamen after quam- 
 quam and etf^i 2:^1, 33i). 
 
 nihil, quantitative indef. form-adj. (= no) 
 185. 263. Forms no plural 261, H. 13. Al- 
 ways requires partitive construction in 
 connection w. nouns 18(), 2(i5. Its u-e as 
 neuter absolute adj. = nolhinq. not am/- 
 ilnng 261. Ji. 12, Xi/iil reliqui est 269, R. 
 32; nihil pfnsihdbco lb. 
 
 nihilum, nihili, nihilo, use of 262 J^". 
 
 niinirum, eiii{)liatic part. 295. 401. 
 
 nimius, quantitative indef. form-adj. 185, 
 263. X'unis, adv. of nimius 188, 269 ; 222, 
 
 nisi (ni). unless, if not, subordinating conj. 
 231,-328; .30-2, 4. Generally takes indica- 
 live 252. 35<J. In conditional clauses of 
 non-reality takes imp. or plup. subjunc. 
 lb. Nisi forte 302, 4. 
 
 niti, w. ut 2!il, 27. 
 
 nix, irr. noun of 3. decl., ^^ender and inflec- 
 tion 1:^9, 187. 
 
 no, 1) Enirl. indef. form-adj., rendered by 
 nullus or nemo 172, 5 ; 174, 3 : as quantita- 
 tive adj. by nihil 186, 265. No such thing 
 = nihil tide, or nihil eju-^inodi 263, .363. 
 no?/iore fhanhL^i'oTii nmnerals 303. «iO.— 2) 
 Enirl. particle, as negative answer to ques- 
 tions, how expr. in Lat. 301^.420. 'No, 
 but ' =: inano lb. 
 
 nobody = nemo 258, 4. Nobody else = alius 
 nemo 263, IL 21. 
 
 nolle, irr. verb, conjugated 51, .59; 2-39, 4. 
 Translation of 6.3, 2; 24-2. 3. W. obi. inf. 
 63, 80. Nolleni, use of •>13, 3. Xo'li, w. 
 obj. inf. as circumlocution of negative 
 imp'ratives .306, 415. 
 
 Nominative, case of the subject 21, 19. 
 Predicate-nom. 64. 63. Formation of the 
 noni. sing, of nouns 322. a ; of nom. plur. 
 3:«. g. 
 
 non, negative part., 295, 401 ; 299. 407. Con- 
 neciion of nvn w. other particles :-;00, 52. 
 —X on enim; non ergo ; non igifurSOl. 3. 
 Xon i^oluni {modo. tanfiim)...sed etiani 
 278, 2. Xo}) modo {folum) 7ion...sedne 
 quidtm 302. 410. Omission of the second 
 n<m in this construction 302. 57. Xon ma- 
 f/i\ quam = as little as 30.3, 412. Xon mul- 
 turn == little 299. 50. Xon nemo, and nemo 
 non 2.59, Ji. 5 ; ,300. 51. Non numqvam, 
 and numqnam non lb. Non jxtssum non 
 lb. Xon tain.. Ait ,303, 59: non tain... 
 quam (less than, or not so much as) J^l 58. 
 — Xon. as negative answer to questions 
 309, 420. 
 
 nondum, use of .300. 408. 
 
 nonne. interr. negative i)arr., use of .308. 418, 
 
 nonnulli, several, indef. form-adj. 172, 216. 
 
 nor. Knirl. c<i5rd. neirative conj.. transl. by 
 neque 301. 3; when neve must be used 302, 
 54 : 302, 409 
 
 nos, declined 160,231. DitT. ])ervvcen thee-en. 
 pi. nostti and nostrum 161, R. 1; 270. 376. 
 
 noster, poss. adj.. 1^7, 268. Nostri (pi. 
 muse), without a noun = our irieuds, 
 
432 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 433 
 
 onr troops etc. 250. 6. m^fra (pl- neuter) 
 = our proprrty, our art.iir»* 'it.!, A. i.). 
 nostras docleu.i..n and .ne:iniu^' f.*^ '.^ ..oq 
 no^. En-I. ne-ative part., hoA' expi. ^.U, 
 3o7 -Not to know.- 'not to w.-h 3i)0. 
 40>^ And not = nfJi'tf or €^ /*o/' 301. •)} , 
 t at not =neornf no. :Wl, 4 ; no even 
 ^ „....y»i'/em 300, 52 ; not anytjunj,' = 
 r,i//;/-irtl A'. 1-2; not at all ^omrnvomi 
 nu'lo ino'lo i-tc. mh r,2; not ><;» -/!';^- 
 iluin 300 408: if noi = I'f^t or -se /k>« 302. 
 4 -Not in iniporative scMit -ncos by «^ not, 
 7ave etc. 3>.r,. 4i:>. Nor, in qursuons by 
 no.M.30S,4m <^-.o/.,n,u.suon^^a^ 
 
 no!!fan^...qad>n:mroS. Nut >o. . .as not 
 
 <S /.i/-i/ 2(5:1 R 21; by tiolluui,' eUe = 
 
 1^;^^?;;S.^.?!:^M^«. I^rvat1onofH52 
 7,11 Drrl.'Msion of IT; 31; 43; llo f;»' : 1;>/ 
 • 1-331 foil. GcmUt of 38: U4 foil. 
 N uns in apportion IH foil. l*r.du;at.ve 
 u.„u...^l,Hlfoll. Prop.r nouns sen. iVo;>/ 
 nnin^.^ Iiiv-ular nouns, see th<->e. Al - 
 M,mt nouMS, and nouns denoting' materi- 
 iils wi.eu u-cd m the plural jUi, «. 4- ^ 
 novisse inosse». /'> A://o?y, perf. verb 248, ~. 
 
 DtV. fioin ,sri/-«? 218. 4. 
 nnx, irr. noun : ^eniU-r and decl. 130, 5. 
 
 nr.-n inteiT. part. 3oT. 417. . 
 
 & al Form-adjective3, dassiftoatum .., 
 2M 1) (;.vuuiN.;..s 2.V5. Interro-. lorm m 
 2^4 del- form 177, 2.5.'>; in-lel I'-nn l.W, 
 2->t' Distributive numerals 180, 2.).>; tuen 
 r;:.\v plur.t.ntum 181. R. lo; »"'»»>'- 
 
 foil. Ordinals inst. of eardniaU 8i. ob^. - 
 3 Mr./r.i.L.c.^TivEs 182^ •■^'••^•-^;;!"'!' , f 
 numerals 17'.». 10. I^"^t;> "V'L^' w-> 8 
 
 — \rMKKAl- ADVKUCS 180. 2.).S. 18i, 1». 
 
 numiuam .numua^) 58 TO; 3;UK 408. A^.m- 
 nantiare, const.-, w. Inf. cl. 2".»0, 2b. 
 hit. nouns in « .belon<? to N-^lass o^^^^^^ 
 il.M-1 • th.'ir inrtvenon and ijemlei 11.», i.>i 
 fo 1 • l]!-, 20-2. N<.uns in o taken trom 
 tl eGreek; iu)w tl»ey form tUeir nom. nt.d 
 ot Uei c^ise^. 3 12. 2 & 3. Gr.-ek lemale names 
 in (/>>^'/o. />i'^'7>'' etc.) 341, 4. 
 Ob ect .lefinition 24. 22 Object f^-^^ 
 liilir'^. Ol)jeftive phrases, ^ee I liulse^. 
 •por the dirterent classes and cases of ob- 
 ic-ts and for obj-'Ct-clauses, see 1 . 11. 
 obmrgare. w. '/'^rW 2<.»1, 28 
 obliviaci, w. obj. mf. 114, 138, w. ini 
 
 ociia, ooissime, irr. decrees without 
 live, useoi 201, 11. „ 
 
 oiisse Dcf verb, eonjar. and u-e2IS, 2. 
 E .'1 preposition, r.'-ular ca-e-equ.va- 
 
 "lent .rr'Lat.'^eu. is, 13. Hxpr. by Lat ap- 
 positions or adj-. (tl»e ;>vn;.. ol ^]^-^J^ 
 • Ot othe;s ' = aiilnus 2j'J, R. 0. i' aadu^ 
 
 cl. 29;), 
 a posi- 
 
 of. 
 
 nTortw<i = the estate of a w,fe 310 ff. l^- 
 Of as expnne-it of partitive <:eii. •-i<"' '^l^- 
 When Lat. partitive tren. is not expr. ny 
 0> 182. 2*;4 : 2<M, 371 toll. . Whe,. Enu'l. o/" .* 
 not expr. by Lat. partitive t;en. 1.0, K- •', 
 ISO, U. 12: VM). R. 1 ; 2(iS, K. 31; 2j(». /e.34 
 & k.-Of co'ine, used w. foree o» an e^n- 
 phatic part., how expr. 20G. 402. For other 
 Lat. equivalents of En^M. oj. see I II 
 older = maior w. or without nata 220, lo. 
 omittere. w. obi. inf. (W. 80. 
 omnis all ; ind.f. numeral 1.0, 2.).. (//n«<=« 
 mT/i ^.^ all (Of) >he soldiers (not omnes 
 Zntum 270 «. 34. On,n,s = everv, and 
 o,/.,/ia = every.him:-2«53. 20; 2(.0 J. 0. 
 omnino, amrmative part 20.., ^'"^*''!^*^;- 
 As afVirmative answer to ^"^'^^,10«;^ ^o 
 .308. 420. Oininno no» = not at «•' •^""' •^~- 
 on nom. term, of neuter nums of Greek 2 
 decl 330, 19: when it mav or may not be 
 retai.ie» in Lat. 330. 20 foll.-The term 
 dnoi Greek noun- of N-cl.. wh.-n n-taitied 
 i,i I at., and when chan-ed 'nt«. o 3U ~ & 
 S. Term, o// ol (ireek nouns ol1-cla>b, 
 how treated in Lat. 311. H. <'• 1'^,.»- ^ 
 one, eardinal numeral = «""•>■ ^ '!;/;'•?-« V? 
 thousand = >nh'/^ (not '"'.""' ^"ff,':'J;,,.h 
 5. On^.. expletively used in E"'-rl- <the next 
 
 one etc.). must be loft <>"' "! '^li^J/!!' '^' 
 2f.4, 3(>5. The one. . .the other, - aiier. . . 
 
 onlv^i'mitin';- particle, how rend.'red (fan- 
 Owi e c 2<.r,,401 ; 20(1, 403: 2'.>7. 403 a : by a 
 neiatiou sv.V,.} -.7. 41: bv una. or .<o/a* 
 180.11: 101. 277 foil. Not only.. ^\"f '«^'.f 
 
 operae, workm.-n, used in fern, gender 40, li. 
 
 operam dare, constr. w. nt 201, 27 _ ., 
 
 opinione, idiomatic comparative abl.=/Aani« 
 can he erpecteil 218. «•/• 
 ops d^clens. of 127. n. 8; 317. R. 1. 
 ojtare. w. /// 201. 27 
 
 "li .rUmvaieius 280, 383: 2S3. 3^1: I^- / • 
 
 - r> Or else ; or also; or perhaps 2M. /M-)^ 
 
 On expr. by «uin disjunctive questions 
 
 308. 410 Ornot ^ annnn lb. ; = rucae in 
 
 iinlin'Ct qU'Stions 311, 123. -.♦,.. 
 
 «r o n term, of Lat. nouns bclon-in<: to 
 
 "kXs 121. i:.7; 14(3, 202. Decl. of Greek 
 
 0^i;:;'^^;^f!^;ue^'m;i.nt^hnise.and 
 
 qo. 74 K 2 : 78, 00 & 100 ; ^5. 10.> Gen- 
 ;!;al rimarks on'the Latin <>rcl<'r - ->r'i;^ 
 
 «'••"":• ,/;i\irX'N-!''fficiof".i- 
 
 m inif'»'- '"«I '^iio 281. 38.-,: o r.nni 
 
 and eJm 2Sl, :i8;i : of the e ..phaiic and 
 lim .iiM.ar.i.'les 2'Mi. 401; of the ne.i^a.io 
 ;>.! 4;>7: Ord.M- of coO.linate phr.<es and 
 words 101. R.0: ol.c:.or.l. pmuouns ^U\, 
 R 5- ofdt'terminative form-adj>. 1.-). ->i, 
 if iuterroi;ativcs I'JO. 271: of demon.ira- 
 
 lives and pos?. In connection w. other 
 adjs. V»0, 272 : of indef. adjs. 191, 273 foil.; 
 o!' attr. ueiiitives in connection w. form- 
 afljs. 1!>1, 27.'). Arrangement of coord, pro- 
 positions when two or more words are 
 ix)mmon 277, 379. Position of principal 
 pred. ill Inf. clauses 28',>, 302. 
 in order to, transl. by first supine 252, 351 
 
 (For other e\pI•es^?ions, see P. II). 
 oriri, i)artly alter the 3. conjugation, partly 
 after the 4th 11.3, 137. 
 OS, mouth (face), w. gen. ona; and = bone 
 
 w. gen. os.si.<! 1:^9, R. 10; 122, 158. 
 08. nom. term, of Lat. nouns: 1) Archaic 
 nom. term, of 2. decl. a3«. 12.-2) Of Greek 
 2. decl. ;tt9, 10. When it is retained, and 
 when chaiiL'ed into us 3-30, 20 toll.— 3) 
 Nouns in os belonging to S-classof 3. decl. 
 12.3. ICil ; of Greek S-class 342, 31 ; when 
 declined after second Lat. decl, .340, 20.— 4) 
 Nouns in o< belonging to Lat. T-class 120, 
 1«;7; belonging to Greek T-class 'Mi, R. .5. 
 — .'\) Gn-(^ks nouns in to?, how treated in 
 Lat. {.heron, q. heroi.-<) 343, 3.-6) Gender of 
 nouns in as 146. 202. 
 
 ostendere, constr. w. Inf. cl. 290, 23. 
 
 other. Iiow to render 175, 5. 'Others' and 
 'the others' difiereiitly expr. in Lat. 2.^)0. 
 4 ' Of others ' expr. by the attr. adj. ali?- 
 nns 2.50, K. (». Other things = aliti (neuter 
 pi.) 261. R. 13: another thing = aliud Ih.; 
 the other things = cctfva 2(il, R. 13.— Some 
 ...others — a'ti...a/ii 2.")9. 5; the one... 
 the other. = ulfer. ..(Uftr lb.; the ones. . . 
 the others ; = alien.. .alien lb. 
 
 Ovid, 5. 
 
 own, rendered by ip^e, airreeing w. its noun, 
 or 'oy ii)se in oknitivk 108. 8 Jc 0. ' Own ' 
 after poss.. when left out in Lat. 216, R. 1. 
 
 OX, nom. term, of Lat. nouns 120. 168; of 
 adjs.. how treated 1.50,212. Greek nouns 
 of the K-class in ox 345, 12. 
 
 P-mutes ( Labials) 7. 5.~P-cla-<s of Lat. nouns 
 <'! 3 (lerl. 1^7. Kil. 
 
 paene, alinoU. limiting part. 29.5, 401; diff. 
 \\n\\\ fere 299.406. 
 
 Pandectae. Is this noun mase. or fern. ? .3.')6. 
 10. R. /*aii'l<cl,<, Justinians collection of 
 I{oniaii Jurists «5. 
 
 par, adj., deel. of 140. 210; 140. R. 2. 
 
 parare, w. obj. inf. 63, 80. 
 
 pars, pars, used w. force of coord, conjs. 
 •j;s. 1. 
 
 Participial (F^ui;l.) in iag. transl. by Lat. obj. 
 inf. «il, R. 1,4 & 6.; after fo?'. rendered bv 
 L.it. That-cl.iu<es w. guoil'SU, 320; 201,/?.2O. 
 
 Participial sentences and clauses 201, 304 foil. 
 Al)s(ilute and altributive participial clau- 
 ses 292. .305. See also Ablatives absolute. 
 
 Participle of present systetn (present partici- 
 plf), formation of 232, 323 foil.; of perf. 
 system ([)erf. participle) belongs to the 
 puss, voice 217, .340 ; or to deponents (w. 
 active meaning) 249,313. Participles a<j:roe 
 like; attr., w. their governing nouns 201 
 ;i94. Their airreement in the compound 
 tenses of pass, and deponents 248, 341 ; in 
 
 Inf. clauses 286, ;i88. Absolute participles 
 must often be rendered by Lat. relative 
 clauses 257, ;i56. 
 
 Particles, definition 205, 400. Emphatic and 
 Jimiling part. 295, 401. Negative part. 299, 
 407 foil. Interr. part. .307, 417; 308, 418 foil. 
 Ttieir omission 308. 68. 
 Partitive genitive and partitive phrases, deflni 
 tion 2(>7, 370. Arc either quantitative or 
 numeral 267, 371. What neuter (abs.) adjs». 
 take partitive quantitative genitives 185, 
 2(i4; 2(i8, 373: lb. R. :30 foil. Descriptive 
 adjs. in neuter pliir. w. partitive quantita- 
 tive gens. 268, R. 30. Abs. neuter descr. 
 adjs. nsed as partitive gens. 268, 373; lb. 
 R. 32 foil. The governiui; neuters in quan- 
 titative partitive constructions must be in 
 NOM. or ACc. 2t)9. R. 33.— Numeral partitive 
 phrases 2<J0. 374 foil. 
 
 parum, quantitative indef. form-adj. 185, 26.3. 
 Always requires partitive construction in 
 connection w. a noun 186, 265. Used as 
 AOVEKB 188, 2(50; 221, 3. 
 
 parvus, forms irr. degrees 203, 290. 
 
 Passive voice in pres. system, format, of its 
 tenses 1U4. 124 ; 232, 8. Passive personal 
 endings 104, 125. Pass, agent in abl. w. or 
 without af> 107, R. 5. Format, of pass, in 
 the perf. system (always vv. compound 
 tenses) 247, 341. 
 
 Past tense (preterite), Engl., generally corres- 
 ponds to Lat. PEtiFECT 2,50. 316; when 
 rendered by Lat. imperf. 250, 6. Rendered 
 bv Lat. PUESENT-iNriNiTivK in Inf. clauses 
 288. 390. 
 
 Patronymics, definition .3.35, 8. By what ter- 
 minations they are formed 354, /?.; how 
 declined .335. 8. 
 
 pauci. ./■<?//', indef. numeral 179,257. Pai/ca 
 (jHcedatn — some few remarks 263, 363. 
 PauciOtes, fewer, use of yiO. R. 14 ; w. 
 (j'nim in numeral comparison 208, 290. 
 
 paulum (panllum), a little, indef. quantitative 
 form-adj. 185. 2()3 ; always in the neuter 
 sing., reiiuiring partitive construction in 
 connection w. a noun 186, 265. Used as 
 adv. 188. 2()0: diff. from noii inallntn 299, 
 50. Before comparatives paido is used as 
 abl. of ditr. 218, 311. 
 
 pejor, pessimus, irr. degrees of malus 203, 
 200. How distiuiruished from deterior and 
 (/rfrrrufi'ts 203, R. 9. 
 
 pela|:us, Greek neuter nonn of the S-class, 
 decl. in Lat. as neuter of 2. decl. .342, 31, 
 R. 2 : 40, f. 
 
 Peloponnesus, fem. noun of country 40, d. 
 
 penates, decl. of 139. 4. 
 
 per, as prefix of adjs., (sometimes also of 
 verbs) denotinir 'very' 221,314. For jjer 
 as preposition see P. II. 
 
 Perfect-system 245 ft)ll. Paradigm and for- 
 mat, of tenses 245. .338 foil. How to find 
 the two cardinal forms (perf. ind. and 
 snpine) :^>.59, App. VI. Stem of perf. sys- 
 tem 3f;0, 2. Active and passive si<:ns :i(»n, 
 3. Changes of stem :W0, 4. Vowel-form 
 of perf.-system 361, 5; enumeration of 
 
^34: 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 435 
 
 verbs helonglnj; to it 30! 6. ^^l]'^^^;^^^ 
 
 y^^vZtU^\ liHt c,f perfects und .u- 
 Stin^c^e. how transl. into En,l. 250, 
 
 pcrative :*rnteiu-es .•^^•»' ^*!"^- 
 pergere, ^y:,;;^^!;;.^^;;^ rendered hy forfd^^e 
 
 permittere, coustr. w. obj. ml. .J, 101 , w. 
 parmovere,' con^tr. w. ut 291, 27. 
 
 „,„s ,.f 'h';,P:;'"''^';,',f • ^,;,, „f-il,o .1.1.- 
 V.lj'i'o ': r' VvrJn ot Vi.e mcl. «h,.,, ,lu. 
 
 petere. con^tr. w. «^ 291, 27. 
 
 Petrouius, I^^^-.P^^f/.'; io_n Predicative 
 P^-^«%'^TTw predicative adj.. .;r 1 
 
 ;;;;;• ";cr7r'p.ra?j; w.'^si pred.iotj, 
 
 \w-wpn nouns as **ubj.cts 1 ri, 2.... 
 
 Pred pin-, cnsistin- <>^ ^^]^'^ J^^' J'^ 
 ^Sfo^ui>j.acc^.mdp.^.m^^;Ccnn^ 
 
 tives t»2, t9, w. .i<i>'«->"- " •' ,.., . 1 ., 
 J„js. d>-p. on pass, verbs 10«, lU . «i« P- 
 
 97 • w. prouoiniii.il objs 
 
 w\tnibunve>.^-^i^F-,~^;.t;,:; 
 pronouns as at r. sr^ns. ^l^'^ * V, descrip- 
 
 'V ^M'l^'ir-'i'; 47- w" at7r: form a.ijs. 1.1), 
 
 A f aS or di'sjunct adjs.) 2.0«. 35:i. Par- 
 &ive attrTb. pbrascB 207. 370. Allr. phra- 
 
 ses w. /^nm.^ and ind^rord^naU inst^^ 
 partitive P»'^)-,;'!,.^"'^ '^J^^ .uuion of 
 
 a,tr. Pli'-^^;^\^^R/y,^, ' &pound attr. 
 nu)i;.men <-:, 8^^*^^ ';,,u'hut!ve clauses 
 phraser .0. •'-• {^.V' treruudive and 
 
 preposilU)nal attnbun s ^<^iu 
 adverbial attributes see 1 . 11. 
 
 w. partitive uen. 209, 3«o. 
 
 plex >ina P^^», . „ -^. niean n«4 and dill. 
 \h.:' ■*]'[:» UccLuf .»,m«ai; in y'/« l» 
 
 2.")0. 350. rondt'red 1>V Lat. l)Uip. 
 
 Pluperfect, (^..^d.), rcn(U tu > ^ ' ^^. 
 
 ■2-)0 :US; reiulertd by L.a. Py • ',' ,;.. i ..» 
 ,VMr.-.tinrMiilm;-mJ«- „f noun? 17, 
 
 ;!^;d nouns dinotin:4 materials are used lu 
 
 plur. 347. /i. 4. 
 p uries, nuuural adv. ISO 2-,8. 
 
 paratives ol w*?^/ '/.>■• h'hI ''' ' (^ .r"'.,,.,^ . j^ 
 
 ;;;futo'lo"»utu,,ninco,,nv.tnn, w 
 
 Sn..nn IS.'., 2C-... ; "»;^',"•, '";,,,,;« -inoro 
 „. or vviin..nt V'"" ' .'",,' :^ .! . .,.>„ K. IS 
 
 sin;:. />/"'•• 211 . -J»»-». '' "T Wi , <• •>! i /V»/- 
 •>,;.»• itsdiff. fn.Mi m-fVt- 2b. X ZU. t 
 ;t;.,..n.ofpri.-e.uulvaluj.2n^^fV,.. 
 
 ,,,/,ym. a Utile more, J^ ' .»^- •^...fij^inve 
 enrir1i«.^V;t^lnost,inde. 
 
 jiuineral 179, 2;j4. 
 
 poUiceri, w. Inf. cL ^f'' {-% „_„^er 14,). 1^9. 
 Sollis, irr. noun, its decl. ^'r.^'l^\\! ,,„, 
 iondo, ind.rlinable noun, u.e .»1 140. l.»U. 
 Positive degree, 20I, it. i- ^^,, .>, 
 
 1^,3. ^P^,„, Too 10 Translation of 
 not expr. in Lat. »«'^' {"• . / , ^^y ^aas 
 the Kui,'!. possesbive /a*, Htr, tic. uj- 
 
 or fji'^*' 197, 5. 
 
 Possessive Form-adjectives, in t err. and def. 
 forms 187, 20S. When ^us must be used 
 inst. of the ])OS3. adj. of 3. pers. 197,5. 
 I'ossessives of 3. pers. do not. as in En<>;l., 
 a<;ree in ^'eiider and number w. their an- 
 teiedeuts 188. 9. Place of the poss. adjs. 
 1«8, K. 8 ; 190. 272 ; lb. R. 1 ; 191, R- 3. 
 Poss. adj-. absolutely used 259, no. 6 ; 2<!1, 
 /*. 15. Disjunct possessives 204, 3G5; 
 210,2. 
 
 possible. ' It is possible ' often rendered by 
 pOftse w. i)assive obj. inf. 242, 2. 'As much 
 as pos(«il)le"' = quaiii w. superl. 221, 17 ; 
 •as soon as p.' — qnain priininn 222, IS. 
 
 Postclassical period of Lat. laufjiiai^e 0. 
 
 postea, adv. of time, — afterwards .58, 50. 
 Ciiiistr. \v. f/'tam in the comp. meaning 
 •later* 207. K. 5. 
 
 po3tquam, temporal conj. w. perf. or plup. 
 ind. 2.50,318. 
 
 postremus, indef. ordinal numeral 182,201; 
 irreu'. superl. of ^XmY^ /-//.v 203, 290. 
 
 postulare, constr. w. nf 2!M, 27. 
 
 potius, ratlier, emphatical comparative par- 
 ticle. 295, 401 ; 298, 4S. /'o/^-.v?/;j'//n, superl. 
 enipli. i)art.. = especialli/, chiejly^just 295, 
 401 : 29>, 405. 
 
 prfflcipere, constr. w. ?/^ 291, 27. 
 
 pracipue, eKptciallt/, emphatical part., 295, 
 401 ; 29S, 47. 
 
 prascribere, constr. w. vt 291, 27. 
 
 prfflsertim, e!<]}f daily, emi)hatica! part., 295, 
 401 : 29S, 405. 
 
 pr»stat, used imi)er?onally w. subj. inf. 01, 
 70; constr. \v. quatn 207. R. 5. 
 
 prfflsto, iiuledinableadj., used predicatively 
 i:.l. K. 4. 
 
 precari, constr. w. ?//291. 27. 
 
 Predicate, detiidtion 21. 19. Predicate-nomi- 
 native .54, 63. Predicate infinitive 285, 
 387; 288,390. Predicate-abl. 292,395 foil. 
 When pred. nouns or adjs. must be in the 
 accusative 01. 7^< ; 285, a^^s ; 79, 102. Im- 
 personal predicates (ill. 72 & 74. Predica- 
 tive phrases, see P/ira'^.<. For predicate- 
 gen., pred. dat., accessory predicates, 
 predicate clauses, and for the dift'. of predi- 
 cate and i)re(lication see P. II. 
 
 to prefer, when rendered by f/ialle, and when 
 bv jtneferre 0:^, 2. 
 
 Prepositions (see P. II). Prep, used in com- 
 l)ositi.)n of verbs, and their treatment 
 .•^5^. 3. 
 
 Present system of the verb 227. 319. 
 
 Present tense, personal endinj^s of 15, 10. 
 Foiiuanou of pres. ind. 231, 322, 1; of 
 pres. subj. 2:^1, 4 ; its use acciu'ding to law 
 of «onsecution 235. 331. 
 primas, def. ordinal numeral 412: as superl. 
 o\ prhn- 203, 291. Use ot pnmum and 
 primo as ordinal advs. 182, 18. Qaain pri- 
 iiniin. as goon as i)ossible, 222, IS. 
 prior, coni]). ordinal numeral 182, 201. 
 prodesse, conjugated 52, R. 5 ; 358, no. 2, R. 
 4: :ixS. n.* 
 
 profecto, indeed, affirmative part., 295, 401 ; 
 •i'.t«. 402. 
 Progressive and emphatic forms of Engl. 
 
 verbs, rendered by ordinary Lat. tenses 
 
 230. 3:i3. 
 
 prohibere w. obj. inf. 79, 101. 
 
 promittere, constr. w. Inf. clause 290, 20. 
 
 T^Tom^tn (in prompt u esse), defective noun, 
 only iu abl. sinii. 347, li. 2. 
 
 Pronouns (personal), accidents of 15, 8. De- 
 cleiis. and use 100, 2.30 foil. Antecedents 
 of pron. of 3. pers. 101, 2.32, By what the 
 pender of i>ron. of 3. pers. is determined 
 lb. Reflexive prons. and their use 101, 
 233; 102, R. 3 «fc 4. When prons. of 3. 
 pers. assume reflexive f<irm 103, 2:^8 foil. 
 When i)ronoininal subjs. are expressed and 
 when omitted 102, 23i. Cannot generally 
 be omitted in Inf. clauses 287, 389. Order 
 of coord, prons. 163, R. 5. Pronominal 
 objects 103, 237. Pronominal attributes 
 198. 
 
 Pronunciation of vowels and consonants 10 
 foil. 
 
 prope, alm09f, as limiting part. 295, 401. Din. 
 from /6;-^ 21>9. 400. For proi)€ as adv. and 
 as preposition see P. II. 
 
 Proper names, of 1. and 2. decl. 19. 10 ; .35, .38. 
 How modern proi)er names are treated in 
 Lat. 3.5, R. 4. Hebrew proper names 
 346, ,3:3. 5. When proper names are used iu 
 plur. 347, Ji. 4. Latin first names, their 
 granmiatical treatment and abbreviation.» 
 92, 111. Names of Roman females 337, 
 13, Adjectives formed from proper 
 names 350 foil. Proper names of Ro- 
 man families 337, 13. Patronymics 354. 
 
 properare. constr. w. obj. iuf. 63, 80. 
 
 Propertius. Roman poet 5. 
 
 prorsus, aftirmative part., 295, 401 : 290. 402. 
 As aftirmative answer to questions 308, 
 420. 
 
 prosum, see prodexfe. 
 
 Prosody, p. 388 foil. 
 
 proximus, irr. superl. of propior (prope) 203, 
 2*^1. 
 
 ps liom. term, of nouns taken from tho 
 Greek, how declined 343, JR. 1. Latin 
 nouns of 3. decl. iu ps 127, 104. 
 
 Qua. . .qua, co5rd. conj. 278, 5. 
 
 qusrere, in the meaning ' to require,' constr. 
 w. vt 291, 27. In the meaning * to ask a 
 question,' constr. w. interr. clause 310, 
 422. Qi/ceritur w. interr. cl. = ' it is the 
 questi(m ' 312, 77. 
 
 quaeso, parenthetically inserted in impera- 
 tive sentences .305, 62. 
 
 qnalis. interr, and relative qualitative form- 
 ad j. 1S7. 267: 267. /?. 2«). 
 
 Quahtative Porm-adjectives 187, 207. What 
 circumlocutions are used in place of their 
 indefinite form 187, 267 l'^^. 
 
 quam 1) = hon\ as quantitative interr. adv. 
 189, R. 11; dift'. from gimnodo SIO, 70.-2) 
 = «.<, as relative comp. adv. 210, 304. 
 Quam = a^ before suuerlatives and ;)yi- 
 7num 221, R. 17; 222, R. 18.— 3) = than, as 
 comp. conj. (a) in numeral c<mii)arison 209, 
 299; (6) in quantitative comparison 210, 
 
436 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 302. (c) after inflectional comparatives 211, 
 
 quamdiu, f>ow long, interr. «tlv m 421. 
 
 (juaiu'lin = «at»' after Unndta 211, K. i«- 
 
 Quamquam, althouuK hul.<)i(linatiii- c..ni , 
 
 ^..vluninary remark, about Vj; '>^.^;;-i3^ • « >• 
 
 Quando, n-hnu a^ nite.r. adv. .JO'.t, 4^1. Di 1. 
 
 Iioiii the temporal conj. (/'/«m, when -JIU 
 
 7t». For quando as temporal and causal 
 
 Quantitative Form-adiectives, their enumera- 
 tion ls:.,-^(./, lull; lli^ir use in the partmve 
 
 jiiul iitlribntive cont^truclions l»o, ^»>-i. 
 
 Their iiilleetioh 18»;, •^«iS. ,„♦;.„ 
 
 Quantity of vowels and ^yll»;^!?,^- "» f ^^^*" 
 
 of "t K. 2. liules on quantity 3SH foil. 
 
 quantopere, quantitative adv. 18S. •■^fi'-*- 
 Juantul how mvch. interr. qiiantitatiye 
 torm-a.lj. lS:i, m. U^ed a:* descriptive adj. 
 ( ^ iiow -reat) 1S7, 3. (^'lanfw copuc, lu)W 
 nany troops; quanta pecuma. »';!w "luch 
 n,onev 1K7, 4. Quantnl»,-^, lunv little 18., 
 ry.—QNandnn. as abs. tt)rm-a(ij. 2».2 1 ., w^. 
 partitive quantitative i;en. ISb, 2(>ir, x«m, 
 kl. 0'/«/'/o, how much, as aid. ol did. 
 before comparatives 21^ 'Sll.-Quantus as 
 r. -la live = d.^'Ziu, 29. 
 
 quatenus, //r^/r /a/-. ii»t"rr. adv. • W, 421 
 
 que, enclitic coimlaiive conj. \U, 11.), -i.», 
 8s(). (^'//'. . .7//''. both., .and. '-i '»•.•>• 
 
 qu«madmodum. //««'. interr. adv. 309, 421. 
 DilV. irom <///rtw. how 810 70. 
 
 Queri, constr. w. V'/rt</ or Inl. cl. 291, 2H. 
 
 Questions, see Inttriwjatiie claiuses and ^«n- 
 
 qii''d**terminative relative form-adj 258. 2 
 Declined like the interr. quis ]U% K. ^. 
 
 Always lias quod, and ticver quid \n the 
 
 neuter 2«)4, mi. See Relaftce ndj, rfi ns. 
 qui, />o>c. interr. adv. 309, 42. Us did. from 
 
 quain, how 310, 7». 
 quia /y^<-a'/>'f, subordinatin? causal conj., , 
 
 preliminary remarks concerning its use | 
 
 quid' neiifer of the interr. form-adj. quis, 
 ii>('d a< interr. adv. = why m 421. 
 quidam, ^•om^ anrUnn o,>e, indef ''^ ^»-!^;"; 
 ative form-adj. Decl., use and dit fiom 
 a/iy^a>172, 24ti; 172,247; l^"^' I'-^.f;! ;, 5^,, 
 quidem, wd>€d, affirmative and rolnctive 
 \ article 29.-), 401; 2%, 402. Ne quidem = 
 not even 300, 52. .,. 
 
 quidni, niiu not, interrojr. at\j^- 309, 421. 
 l)iir. froni cur non 310, 70. Not used m 
 indirect (luestions 311, 42:3. 
 quin. why not, luterroj,-. adv. 309, 421 Q>nn 
 e..nj. = • that' dependent on mn duMare 
 291 30. For the other uses of quin, see 
 P. ii. 
 quilibet, see quivis. 
 
 Quintilian, 5. r.m o 
 
 quire (queoi.(ompoundof2/v.conjug. of 241,8. 
 
 Quirites. dedens. of 139, 187 4. 
 
 quis and qui, fem. qu», neuter quod, ?f A^/', 
 w/uit, «-Ao, interr. form-adj. of ' »'^: <»« •.'.5- 
 miiKitive class, decl. and use of 1.0. 24.i. 
 Masc. quis as abs. iuterr. 258, 2. Quid, 
 
 ahsol.tte neuter form 2G0. 359 e^/^. ^ • 
 
 partitive {.'en. {<i"id »r,ri etc.) 2b., 3.1 fo . 
 
 qiiis, .^on>e.an»,. ind.f. form-adj in st. o all- 
 
 %y,/;.s- or quisquam 259, 7.?. 4 ; 30., (»;); 3 1,4. 
 
 l)itr. in decl. Irom the interr. quu 2.)9. A 
 
 4. Neuter quod (abs. qukl) '" l»^^"^*;/ 
 
 aliquod, aliquid, and quicquam 2<>0, /f. 11. 
 
 quispiam, somtfxHiy, anyone, uidef. form-adj., 
 
 ii<i- of 259, 4, oBs. . 
 
 a<ii • decl. and use 172, 24b .S: 217. D tt. 
 from ullus 174. 2.50. Used ab>olutely ( = 
 anybodv) 258, 4. Its plur. and abl. sin? 
 made from uffu.< Ib.-Abs. neutir orni 
 quicquum .quidquam) 200. 3o9; w'^'Vivi 
 plur. 201, R. 13. W. partitive quantitatne 
 «'en. 20s, 372. Quisquam and quirquam 
 changed 'into quis and quid 2r.0. Ji. 11. 
 
 quisque, enry, ind.'C. determinative lorm- 
 a" (led. of 172, 210 & 247. Lmutatious of 
 its use 2»).3. 20. ^# i~.T o!7 
 
 quivis and quilibet, 172, 246; decl. of 1.2. 24.. 
 0//im = every one 2<)3, 20. 
 
 quo, whither, interr. and relative adv. 309, 
 
 4'M 
 
 quod', pubordinatino: conj., 1) = that; pre- 
 liminary xemarks about \ts use 234, m 
 Verbs, constr. w. quod = that 29U, 6.—^) — 
 6m/ '/,v^ 234, 32». , . 
 
 quod, neuter ol interr., ndative, and indef. 
 lonn-adjs. quis and qui 170, ^43 : w par- 
 titive quantitative gen. snii:. 2(rfS 3.:«. 
 
 quomodo, how, interr. adv. 309, 421. Ditl. 
 worn quam, how ^iHi.'li). .,,1.907 
 
 quoque, a/^0 or even, particle, 29o, 401, 2.JT, 
 
 qiot,/iO'r r/u7f»y, interr. numeral form-adj. 
 177, 2.54; not used absolutely 2o., 3oi. 
 O//0/'. as relative - a.* 2f)7, /i. 29. 
 quoteni, how many, distributive interr. adj. 
 ' 181, 2«»0. 
 
 quoties.'^J/; often, interr. numeral adv. IW), 
 258. Totits. . .</'/o/ie*-, as olten as. 2)8 21W. 
 
 quotus, interr. ordinal numeral adj. 18-i, .0. 
 Ouo/usquisque = h.)W f^'^ lb. 
 
 quousque, how far. interr. adv. 309, 421. 
 
 Juum icum), vrA./.. temporal conj. w. ind 01^ 
 
 \ubjunc. 2:i4, m); in the causa mean n- 
 %i/K-e' always, with sul>junc. 2.34, 32JK- 
 Quum.. .turn, used as coord, conjs. .4.», -i. 
 
 Rather, En-1. particle, = 7^fi>'^ ^^^; f^l^: 
 
 48. llemiered by comp. degree of descrip- 
 tive adjs. 221, 31.5. 
 
 re, inseparable preposition 3;)8, 3. 
 
 recusare, cou>tr. w. obj. inf. 03, 80. 
 
 Redundant nouns 348, -K. 4. 
 
 Reduplicating verbs, see Perf. system. 
 
 ?cfert, i< is of im,x>rfnnce imper^. verb, 
 constr. w. interr. cl. 312. 77 (see P. II.). 
 
 Reflexive pronouns, see Pronouns; reflexive 
 tY,7vx ltd. 233 full.; 102, 11.2. 
 
 Relative adjectives, their general charactj r 
 and lormation 109, li. 2 ; 20.>, %. l.dl. 
 A^rreement with, and repetition of he 
 antecedent 2m, H. 2«;; 200, 3(»8, \V I at 
 classes of Ibrm-adjs. have a relative loiiu, 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 437 
 
 200, R. 28. Demonstratives neeo a? ante- 
 cedents of relative clauses 200, 10. Omis- 
 sion of relatives inadmissible in Latin, 
 200, 28. 
 
 reliquus, meaning and use of 17.5, 5: 259, no. 
 ^ ; 2{\\, R. 13. xM/iil rdiqui est 209, R. 32. 
 
 reprehendere, constr. w. quod 291,28. 
 
 respubhoa, dec!, of l.">7, K. 4. 
 
 the rest, — reliquam, reliqua, or cetera 261, 
 R. 13. 
 
 reverti, semi-deponent 249, 344. 
 
 rogare, /o (U'k; dill". Irom interrogdre, to a«k 
 3i0, n. 10; constr. w. ut 291, 27. liogo, 
 parenthetically ius-erted in imperative sen- 
 tences 30.'), ti2. 
 
 rogatu, detective noun, used in abl. only 347, 
 R. 2. 
 
 8, nom. ending of masc. and fem. nouns .332, 
 R. 1, a. Nouns ending in *• after a liquid 
 (liquid-mutep) belong to the vowel-class of 
 
 3. decl. (except hiems and Tiryns). What 
 masc. and fem. nouns do not take the end- 
 ing s in the nom. 3.32, R. 1. a. Nouns in 
 s preceded by a con>(mant are fem., w. 
 Several exceptions 147, 203. 
 
 saltern, at least, restrictive part., 295, 401. 
 Did. from cf-1'te 297. 403. 
 
 same, Kngi. form-adj., tran.'^l. by idem 171, 
 ~'4 I : the same at^^idem qui 2.")8, 3; 261, /M3. 
 
 Samnis, a Samnite, decl. of 139, 187. 
 
 sane, emphatic part., 295. 401; 296, 402. 
 fSane quidem. as affirmative answer 308, 
 420. ^V6»/< sane, indeed not 300, 52. 
 
 sanguis, decl. and gender of 141), 189. 
 
 satis, tnoutih, indeclinable adj. 151, R. 4. 
 liiilef. (luiintitative form-adj. 185, 203 ; al- 
 ways recpiires i>artitive construction in 
 connection w. a noun 185, 2(W. Used as 
 adv. (sufficiently) 18s, 209; 221, 3. ISatis 
 ft-re = quite enough 299 ^. baHs est as im- 
 'p<'rs. j)red. 01, 77. /Satiug est — vulius t6t 
 2U3. 0. 
 
 scilicet, affirmative particle 295, 401. 
 
 scire, to know, constr. w. ol>j. inf. \>i. SO ; 04, 
 5; w. liif. cl. •:90. 2t). Dill", from uovisse 248, 
 
 4. Use of scito as imperative 304, 2. 
 scribere, w . Int. cl. 2iH), '26; w . ut. lb. 
 
 se v'<'' letlex. pron. in ace. or abl. 161. *S'^, 
 as inseparable preposition in compound 
 verbs ;J58, 3. 
 
 sed, Init. adversative conj. 99, 121. DiflF. from 
 (luitm and veto 279. 1 loll. 
 
 self (invself, hiuiM'lf etc.), rendered by i;>'^ 
 171, K. 9; 194, 279 fod: rendered by hui, 
 Mi, "e 195. 1{. 4. How to render seZ/in com- 
 position w. nouns (self-love etc.) 198, 284. 
 
 Semi-deponent verbs 249, 344. 
 
 Semi-vowels 7, 5. 
 
 Leneca, (i. 
 
 senez, decl. and gender 1 10, 189; its compar- 
 n\\s(is(nim\ tdder; dift". from major 294, 11. 
 
 Sentences, division of 270. .52. D« j)endent 
 M-iitences 2.33, 327. Affirmative and neira- 
 tive sent. 294, .398; exclamatory 295, 41. 
 Si'<' tht! articles Intvvivgative. Imptratice, 
 Infinitive, rarticipial S'entetices. 
 
 sentire, constr. w. Inf. cl. 290, 26. 
 
 Sequana, masc. river in Gaul 40, a. 
 
 servitium, slave, usediu neuter gender 40, H. 
 4. 
 
 shall, in 1. pers., expr, by future tense 228, 
 321. When • shall' is rendered by II. form, 
 ol imperative .'i03 foil. 
 
 si, conj., = if 234, 328. W. indicative 252, 
 ;i30; w. imperf. and plup. snbjunc. in con- 
 ditional clauses of non-reility lb. 
 
 significare, constr. w. Inf. cl. 290, 26. 
 
 Silver age of Lat. language 6. 
 
 simul, adv. of time, 58, 70. 6imul.. .simul 
 n<ed as coord, conjs. 278, 5. 
 
 simulare, w. Inf. cl. 290, 2H. 
 
 sinere, w. obj. Inf. 79, 101. 
 
 Singularia tantum 347, R. 3. 
 
 singuli, ditfereiit uses of 181, 14. 
 
 siser, neuter in sing;, masc. in plur. 143, n. 
 73. 
 
 sive (sen), or, disjunctive conj. 28-3, 384 : lb. 
 R. 15. Sive.. .sive = either. . .or; diff. from 
 ant., .aut 280, 382 ; = whether. . .or 281, b ; 
 283, 14. W. indie. lb. 
 
 so, Engl, adv., rendered by tain 189, 11. So 
 mucli. as u(lv.,= tantum (tanto})ere) 188, 209; 
 before comp. = tanto 218, 311. So much, 
 as i\(.\}.. = tantus 185, 203. About the trans- 
 lation ol so by ita,sic etc. see P. II. 
 
 solere. semi-deponent 249, 344. How trans]. 
 <;3. 3. Constr. w. obj. inf. 03, 80. Used 
 impc^rsonallv 64, 82. Solito, as comp. abl. 
 = ithan usually) 218, R. 7. 
 
 solus, alone, only, indef. numeral, use and 
 decl. 179, 257 : 180. In connection w. pro- 
 nouns 194, 277 foil. Gen. soFius loiricaliy 
 agn^eing w. poss. adjs. 198.9. Solum, only, 
 limiting part.. 29.5. 401: 297, 403 a. Non 
 solum. . .sed etiam 278, 2 ; 7ion idum non. . . 
 sed nc quidem .302. 410. 
 
 some, Engl, indef. form-adj., transl.by a/i^?/?^ 
 or quidam 172, 240; 174, 2.50. Some other 
 things = r//?a qucedam 2(>3, 303. Some others 
 =<ilii quidam lb. Some few^ things = pauca 
 quadam D). Some such thing = ejusmodi 
 quid, or tale quid lb. Some. . .others = 
 alii . . . alii 259, 5. Somebody = aliquis 2.=»8, 
 4; when expr. by quis 259. R. 4; 307, 07. 
 '^o\nc\\\\\\g— aliquid or quiddamU'tO. 3.59. 
 When it is used w. partitive gen. (aliquid 
 novi) 208, 373. When expr. by quid Hm, 
 R.W; when by neuter plur. qumlam 201, 
 R. 13.— Somewhat, as quantitative adv. 
 =r satis 221. 3 : by comparative degree ol 
 descriptive adjs. '221, 315. 
 
 spe, comp. abl. = than it can be expected 
 (hoi)ed.) 218. 7. 
 
 sperare, constr. w. Inf. cl. 290, 26. 
 
 sponte. defective noun, used in abl. only 
 3 17, A'. 2. 
 
 statuere, constr. w. obj. inf. 63, 84; w. ut 
 291, 27. 
 
 Stem, definition 13, 2. Diff. between de 
 dension-stetn and true stem of anoun;^i2. 
 
 still, as adv. of time = adhuc 58, 70; as ad- 
 versative conj. — tamen etc. 99, 121; 234, 
 1 330; 280, 5. 
 
438 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 studere, w. obj. inf. 63, 80. Diflf. from ex- 
 prf'iri 120, n. t 
 
 ^£tre. ^>vel-nTn^ word in prod. phr..es 
 
 ^or?; Must be in nom. if the pred. i:* 
 
 finite 22,20. Ditr. of tjrammatical and lo^i- 
 
 ? nhr^S 2- 14 5. (Fur lo^'icalsubji'Cts, 
 
 calM bj.2^, ^ 14^3- ^ -j,^ Summary; 
 
 nna'v tl) ProncMninal subjs. s^nerally 
 notexpr in Latin, except a. ^ubj. ace. 
 2. S 2>7 :m. Impers. prodicaies witli- 
 iTit Hub I: 5). 74, «. SH"J-et-accu.a t.ve 
 S :^ss. Difi-. from obj. ace 2Mn.^- l'*;- 
 Subject-abla.ive 292, mi Snbj. inf .ee 
 fHtiiitin Fors'lbi. clauses see P. n. . 
 
 nthnn \vh*-n (siibiunc. or md.) lb., by 7ie, 
 Cnot,:i ,4. In Clausen dependent on 
 Inf c a i-c-^ 288. 391 ; in inlc-rr. clauses .311, 
 JS: •; con.lTtional clauses of non-reali ty 
 Vill'm. For tenses of the subjuuc, tee 
 "(•wistcutiou of Teiises. 
 
 fuf srbfV.'reflexivn and personal pron c^ 
 3 ' p i>. 1 ;i, 2:«. Use of tins pronoun l(,.i 
 2-18 • X-A \i 6 & 7. Wheu it must be used 
 ?f inf Hauses 287, 380; when iu mterr. 
 
 T.Uual immeral 18->, 2(,1 ; irr. super:. o\ 
 X^rus i,.i,enor) 2(«, 291). Ls.d w. fo.ce 
 
 "X",»':" = the hi,l.c^t part of .Lemouu- 
 
 tives without s^uperlatives lb -bui>"'- 1 ' 
 ,V neanin- ' very \ " extremely \ exceed- 
 inl.ly' 221,1^15. Superl. alter quam = as 
 much as possible 221, R. 1 •• ^ ^. ^^ 
 
 BuJiie usi of 2.V2, 3.^1 foU. Formation of 
 siu?b.e?as second cardinal form of verbs, 
 ^cQ Perfect system. „ 
 
 suppetias ^ferrc^ defective Tionn 347, R. 2. 
 
 ♦a hp sure iiow transl. 2%, 4U-i. 
 
 .us irr mm», how decl. 140. 188; of com- 
 
 sSari ';Sr'w.'Jnf. el. 290, 26. 
 
 8DUS po^> form-a.lj., correspondnv:: to 
 Suri '/is her, it-<, t/Ur 1S8, 2»>8; aj^reems 
 ■'^""'•. .'*_:. f.r;',,.^;,, Imt not w. antecedent 
 
 T-claes 
 
 ^%;;.;n;ni niMini but no{ w. antecedent 
 
 used in its place 197 ; ui Inl. cl. 2n., 7?. 20 
 foil Masc pi. siii without a noun = his 
 eir e c.) fr ieiuls etc. 2:,9, 6. Sna, neuter 
 pi without a nouu = his (their etc.) pro- 
 niTtv or alVairs2»)l, B. lo. , „i,,c« 
 
 Syllables, division «f 7, 6 ; open and clo c 
 8 7- loiK' by nature or posiium 9, ;- ^P\- 
 clJl niU's on quantity of syllables 388 loll. 
 
 Syndetic antecedents 26G, 369. 
 
 T-mutes OinKual?. or dentals) 7, 5. 
 uf nouns 127, 10.'j fo.l. 
 
 SSfn,!^*. nuama.iv» rorm-adj. 1S7, 567. 
 
 ^ ^^a:U[ ^i^oducin. tlu. principal 
 
 sent, after g>wnqmi,n and «^;» f ^-^'^"p^jp 
 tandem, as emphatic P'-t-/^^^;/^' ^""^ 
 
 (ati'lem as temporal adv. see P. H. 
 tantoDere •«•o nn'ch. quantitative adv., IJS, 
 
 269 ; ' n'qvuintitative comparative periods, 
 
 209.301. ,:,„itin<r particle 295, 401. 
 
 ''ST)aA folio» b^y sea 278, 2. 7^an- 
 
 t«rand{litnsdem,y>m..^i..^-m^. 
 def quantitative form-a<ijs. 1«;^ i<«- 
 Used as descriptive adj. (so great) 18.. 3. 
 \\wfulus so lit! le 187, 5. Taut urn as abs. 
 a( a. 1 nlverbial use of.its ca.es 2t.2, 17 
 Tanfo before comparatives as abl. of 
 
 Tinlefof verbs, definition 14, 0. Format. 
 o??n .vs sv^tem 2:^1,322. In perf. sys- 
 tern 247, :«0 foil. Tenses of subjuuct., 
 pee Consecution of Tenses. 
 
 iilTtr^nA. by quam, see Quam; by com- 
 
 ti:;:i""^Emd.'dJ.li^nilrative form-adj., bow 
 tnai, E.n-1 antecedent 
 
 followed bv o/-, not '-xpf- "' ^- '!•./,,':.," V 
 
 ♦hpfr Fr<-1 poss. adi., how rendered 188 9. 
 
 21 'Therefore not ' = /.ou e/v/0, ;*^V'/« 
 
 th^"\^?d:'denfon;trative adj.. transl. by 
 
 7 f: 1-1 244 'Tills.' without a nouu (of 
 
 ', ,.I ) ii'oc or A.^'^ (neuter pi.) 261, li. 
 
 isl -This; referriug to a whole sentence, 
 
 ^'hoc 26.5, li. 24. 
 
 Sm^ir^w'^pbj. inf.63,80;w..^n.,orn. 
 
 Jme'8'^Fn.M''adverbial plural, applied to nil- 
 times tn.m i canlinal numeral 
 
 lu^v isi '.>.'s ^-n.ree tfonr itcj times 
 wmuch' = ^H/v'/s etc. f,arti/j"8yi. coxnp. 
 iqq -rimes' in m-iltiplicatnm expr 
 by 'tlie distributive form of the numeial 
 
 following it 181, KXPLAN. 
 
 S^I^^l''pi?^o^t";.t^^ar-<!ise-enuiya- 
 "^ent 'of Kdat. 18. 13, For tra.sialiou 
 of ■ to' by Lat. prepositions, see 1 . ii. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 439 
 
 too. Eii^l. quantitative adv., = nimvi 221 
 lul \V*V "ij't"''.' «>? H<lj- = nimius 185. 263,' 
 iHi, 2Mj. ' loo ' rendered by comparative 
 de-j:ree of descriptive adjs. 221, 315. 
 
 tot and totidem, .-o nta/nj. Just so inamj, de- 
 inoustrative numeral form-adjs. 177 2.")5 
 lot. not used absoJuteJv 257, 357. ' lot 
 ... quot. as uianv as 208, 298. 
 
 toties, numeral adjs. 180, 258. Totie!^. ..qvo- 
 as'-H)8"298^"^'''^"^ comparisons, = as often 
 
 totus, he w/iole (of), indef. numeral adj. 
 
 i^l!' V.'^' "» dt-'cl. and use 180, 12; 194, 
 
 2« t foil. ' ' 
 
 *i"« ^i^f' ^^^' ^^'■^'"^^ numeral, decl. of 
 
 trini distributive numeral, when used inst 
 ol ternt 181, li. 15. 
 Trees, names of in ?/.<?. are fern. 40, c. 
 
 S?"',,?.""^- «'"P*J^tic part., lunv transl. 
 <9f), ^02. 
 
 to try. tranpl. by shtdere or eTperln : diff 
 between these terms 126, n. t 
 
 tu pers. pron. of 2. pers., dec!. 160. 231. 
 May be omitted as sulij. 1.5, 1 : but rarely af- 
 ter the interr. enclitic ne 307 67 
 
 turn, t/ten, adv. of tim«;.5S, 70. TufA Jemurn 
 then on y 297, 403 a. Turn . . . turn u^^ed 
 tor copulative coOrdinaiioii 278. Ii. 7. 
 
 tuus, poss foi mad j., of 2. pers. 187,268 
 iMase pi. („i^ without a noun, = thv 
 fn<-nds. thy family 2.J9, «. ^ 
 
 twice as, b.-fore adjs. = altero tanio w. com- 
 
 par. 219, Ii. 9. 
 
 ' ?«i ^wNJ^I"", ^^"^^^ ^^^ inflection 123, 
 161. 4) Of T-class 129, 1C7 : lb. R. 2. 5) Of 
 Greek nouns of 2. decl.; their -ender and 
 inflection :«9 19 foil. ; 340, 27. b) Of Greek 
 nouiij^of T-dass;W4, /i-.S. vriecK. 
 
 Dt (uti), that, conj., preliminary remarks on 
 
 "i 290. 2. Lse ol ut dependent on verbs 
 
 •?nft r-""?^'*^^^' ?^- ^° imperative clauses 
 
 -3U0, JO. t or vt as comparative and teiu- 
 
 I)oral conj., see P. II. 
 uter, irr. noun of vowel-cla.^s of 3 decl • 
 
 inflection and render 139, 187. " ' 
 
 uter, interr. and indef. lorm-adj. of the de- 
 
 .no'"Vi.n^'i? e^'*'*'' ' '^** ^ecl. and use 170, 
 213; 170. li. 5; 172, 246 foil, 
 nterque, tM, indef. f(jrm-adj. 172, 246 ; 173; 
 1 .1, 4. Uterqu^, takesabs. adjs. as partitive 
 
 ^~<l'"A''''.f.'" P'"'"-' ^"^ i'"t nouns 269, 375 ; 
 <<0, /i. .34. ' 
 
 utervis, uterlibet. 172, 246 ; 172. 247. 
 
 utrum, disjuiutive interroj;. part. ,308 419 • 
 
 j;;^y.'^JJ'"-^^lauses 311, 423. Is'ot used alter 
 
 Ubi, where, interr. adv. .309, 421. For vhi 
 as relative adv. and as temporal conj. see 
 
 uUus, indef. determinative form-adj decl 
 and use 172, 246 foil. ; 173. 248. Dili' froni 
 quisqnain 174. 2.->0. Which cases of quis- 
 <Vi'iin aie supplied by uUus 258, 4. 
 
 Uipian, lioin wi Jurist 6. 
 
 ultimus. the last, indef. ordinal numeral 
 >2.2t,l ; irr. super), of ulterior 2m, 291. 
 
 ulus, a, urn, diniinutive terminations- to 
 wh.it words they are applied 3:37, 1. 
 
 unde, whence, interr. adv. :i09, 421. p'or un- 
 de as relative adv. bee P. II. 
 
 undoubtedly, Enyl. emj)hatic part., how 
 traii.-i. 2'.Mi. 402. 
 
 tinus, def cardinal, decl. ori77, R 2 When 
 n.-ed III pliir. 181. Ii. l.^-^. r„u.-i = alone and 
 only 104, 277 foil. Its jjen. vnVis lojri- 
 
 "iiaateti^^T^ ^'' ^'"'''*" *^^-*^' ^^"^ "''^"*^ 
 
 unusquisque, = every one 26.3, 20. 
 
 ur, nom. term, of Lat. nouns of R-cIas« • 
 their decl. and gender 121,157. Tiie adj' 
 w/;/?' the only Lat. word in wr decllued 
 alter 2. decl. 44, 5. . ; . 
 
 us nom. term, of Lat. nouns, 1) of masc 
 of 2. decl. .34. .32 ; 2) of masc. and fem. of 
 4th decl. 407; 1.5.5, R. 4. «ome of the 
 iiouns ()f 4. decl. in us have collateral 
 forms in urn 348, R. 4. Z) Of S-class of 
 
 ^2*!^-^"*"^'.^'^^^^^ ^^^'- = ■^^^'y ^"^h 220, 
 
 ^Lw.lo'^'^'^^^ adversative conj., when used 
 
 ^^■Jjementer, as quantitative ti<iy . =z exceed- 
 
 vel, or, adversative C(mj.; when used with- 
 out bein<>: repeated 2S.3, ;i84 ; lb. M. 15 
 \ el...vel = either . . .or ; diff. from aut 
 «M/. and sive...nve 280,380. Tel ..rei = 
 partly... partly 282, Ii. 12 : inst. of neque 
 .. neque iifl^ir nei^ations 282, Ii. 13.— Fe/as 
 emphatic part. = even 295. 401. 
 velle, ill- verb conjujr. of 51, .59; 239, 3. 
 1 ranslation of (W, R. l ; 242, 3. W obj 
 inf. «3, ro. Vellein^l should wish, wheii 
 used 24.3, 3. TWe;//, w. siibjunc. as cir- 
 cumlocution of imperatives 305. (i2. 
 Vellejus Paterculus 6. 
 venter, irr. noun of vowel-class of 3 decl 
 
 inflection and gender 1.39, 187. "' 
 
 venum, defective noun iu ace. only (venum 
 dare etc.) ,347. Ii. 2. 
 
 Verbal adjectives in dus and ilruji. how 
 formed 232, 32:3 foil. ; in bundm 352. R 7. 
 "Serb adjs. w. derivative endin'^s Idas 
 II us, ills; /nils! etc. 351, 8. ' 
 
 Verbs, a( cideiits of 14. 7. Partial conjuo-a- 
 ticm 15; 31; 47 ; 49 : 104 : 112. Verb-stem 
 227, 3 '9. yorn);i;-i2 of fe!-n»e.s<i:,d para- 
 diy:in?, of ,)rt^. s^sfem :'.27 .foi).,;'. 2.1s. ;i34 
 .% Jl. ; of pc "'.- 8-steii 2^j, 3.^J. Pe. feet oi 
 preterite verbs 248, 342. Preliminarv re- 
 marks on the use of the te.nses and moods 
 : m JolJ. ; V.50, 34»^, foil. Denvatioh- of verbs 
 8.^5 -foi^. Cy>mp..?ition of verbs "r^o? foil 
 ' ImpRrs/mal .ViL'7h« eo, 76; 6V. 7(5. Verbs 
 constr. w. Inf. clauses (verba sentiendi and 
 dicendi) 290, 26. Verbs constr. w. vt (of 
 asking, 'imiyisj?, ex'hortiiiV, con^manding 
 etc.) 290,-27.- Terbfi constr. w. i}uOd (verbs 
 
440 r'r- 14^ 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 of emotion, of praising, censuring, accus- 
 viu5^ En^Snative particle, how transl. 
 
 2VHi. 402. . , - on -.at Dili. 
 
 n. 
 
 as auswenug 
 
 part. = veo' a>8, 'l;iO. . .„. . „.„ ^f and 
 (litr iVoin I'tro and auUm 2.9, 1 loU. \t 
 
 v^r S;;^1S;mtitative adv :. a./.^rf;;jn 
 very, E-'i-i. H Kxur. >v the pri'tix per 
 ?*;i"s;4 by • uuerhuivc-form of adj. or 
 :k in 3r> re/// aft.-r the article ' the, 
 
 = ///a/7//o/>.r«, admod'on mlde -.20, -{. 
 vesper, derleuf'. of f-iO. n. 7. 
 
 vetare,w.obj.mt. 9,101 
 
 vetu3, H(lj., decl. ol l.)0. -il-'^. 
 
 vijeUcet,utlin.^tnepart>cc^..40L^ 
 
 ^UWtieal^da. c•oIM,la^^^,^d Hdjs.or 
 
 inT i'-i-> • w ()i)i. int. lUB, loo- 
 ,i;m,;:V»'cl.ml.u:V.».d m fe,,,. gcuder^. 
 
 ,£ tc. of 4, « ^J.a,,in. ana - 
 compounds 44, K. *• ^lo um. 
 US. 11. 1. 
 
 JiJut'ueuter noun of 2. decl., without plur. 
 vt'i'iT.nonnof 3.decl.l36,R.7. 
 
 ^i^' "'''"7' ' rule of Its format, in all 
 
 ^j?1^^3.:"'vo"ofp.-oi-^--!--\r 
 
 and of./i/i./^for.aed "' *^ -^i;/.^- ^nfMb 
 VVliethcr <pnvi.-< nu.kys the voc. /7<^ni . 
 
 ^°^^^ ^'^r?;;^f"^';i!"D V.^>etwoen gon. 
 "?lmJ'7^//indVXml.U.K.l; 270,370. 
 V;wlspr;H.;uu-iati<mori(K«^Close,op^^ 
 
 ";1 f oun^ of 3. «U-cl- 132 foil, (ireek 
 '^ 1 it. n"of 3- decl.. how treated in 
 ;V,7ln V-vel-tem^ of verb. 3r.l foll.- 
 Chai.te of (ireek vowels in words received 
 
 ^ig^r neiie?' Su of 2. decl. without 
 plur. 40,/- 
 
 on nouns rendered by qvU{qm), QVf^, Q^od 
 170 243. When rendered 1>y (juofus Ihi, 
 1 .' What o'clock? = (/uota ^'oraf U 
 \\/,at relerring to quantity, rendered by 
 ol«/'/ J 1S7, 4" >V/!a/. as «bs. mierrog. 
 f= w at Uiing^) expr. hy gu<, (neuter pb) 
 o»;0 Ji ^); hy (/"id 2<)0, :^.r)9; 2 ..>, li. 25. 
 it ^iJire 'What ' (= that whiehl expr. 
 by id quod, or ^aw/, also by ea quoi 2t>0, 7^ 
 
 JL'^intfVr'^dv., rendered VV«/.^;> 30;^: 
 4-n • a- temporal conj- by qi'um 310, .0 , 
 ai^o'bv abl. ihs. 292, 3'.Ki For the use of 
 vbi, n't etc. = when, see I . lI- 
 
 whether, Engl, iiiterr. part., hms <^^P • 3n 
 423- Whether not = //o////flh. ^^ ''V.!,/ 
 or - t^//u//»...«"(negatively/'/r//H311, 
 
 423 Vheii- whether. . .or' must be transl. 
 hv ' five... sire 'ilS:i,U. 
 while Enirl. con... rendered by if'»\^)' 
 pr!;. imi: 234, 328 foil. ; or by abl. abs. 292, 
 
 who' Engl, interr. adj., = quis 258, 2 If 
 
 the whole = fofu.<^ 179, 2.-)7 ; or absol. by the 
 neutT/o^^/m 2.il, n. 14. .N-L,^^^»^^;^:^^;^ \f 
 a partitive attribute, as in Engl. ISO, K. 
 
 JwiT adv.. rendered by the adj. Mufi\94, 
 278; aS» hy the adv. p^nitu^, fuuditns 
 
 JiU ■ E.-i'" auxiliarv, transl. by the fut. 
 
 Tens.^ o-f the verb 22S, 321 When ren- 
 le"edby.W/. r.:j,^l. ' ^\;1\ ""^ = "^'^^ 
 r.3. 2 : ' will rather = vialle lb. 
 
 to be willing = edit 03, 1. 
 
 W notaixvt. l-ettei-'G, 1; 
 What, Eiial". U'tefr- a^J- 
 
 .when, dependent 
 
 Y nom term, of nouns of the K-cla-s : 
 ^their"en""^uKl decl. 129, 1^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 •203. Greek nouns in x 341, K. 10 foil. 
 
 Y vowel, when used in Lat. 6, 2. 
 
 y^g' amnnative Engl, part., how expr. 308, 
 
 vtf'Eu"!. temporal adv., = a<//iMC .58, 70. 
 ^tnKd by ^lmxin^ rf.m to ne,at.sx> 
 
 word- Knouduni = not yet etc.) ;iOl>, 40^. 
 
 IW as adversative con?, rendered tamtn, 
 
 nttnnifu ete 2:^1, :i30 ; 280. 5. 
 /s r.n term .'.f Lat. nouns taken from 
 
 the Greek 341, 2 ; 344, 7^ b, 4 
 
 Z ivhen used in Lat. 6, 2. 
 
 6 
 
This book is due two weeks from the last date stamped 
 'below, and if not returned at or before that time a fine of 
 ^ ■ \ '1 be incurred. 
 
 3N. 
 
 her's 
 fs of 
 
 thini; 
 
 Jalful 
 
 . It 
 
 -t any 
 more 
 :l vet 
 
 it retains the brevity ana conciseness oi a grmiun***. 
 
 The second part of Roby's Latin Grammar has deservedly attracted the 
 attention of Latin scholars on account of its rich collection of classical 
 passages. But their uncritical selection and lack of arrangement have met 
 
 
 IV 
 
 ;) 
 
 > • 
 
 (! 
 
 
 il 
 
 k 
 
 with decided disapproval. Instead of giving an accurate statement of the 
 laws governing the language, Mr. Roby m 
 which these laws might be constructed, 
 them himself. Jlis collection of e-^mple 
 hence he fails to illustrate many importan' 
 
 1-. . ^^A,irt^(i the oassages from 
 
 n I I D I 1 /- A -r J- 
 
 II 
 
 niiiliiii 
 
 liijiiiiiliifi li III III If I 
 
 1010674837" 
 
 An examination of Dr. Fischer's work 'vill show that none of these 
 faults can be imputed to him. For Rules universally acknowledged only 
 the most necessary vouchers are given. But for such points as are not 
 generally acknowi- 
 attention of (irai 
 
 Wheneve he ui 
 
 argum*^.its car Sr 1 / f^ 
 
 refuted by Dr. 
 
 stereotyped w 
 
 We invitt 
 Composition. 
 
 Part I is 
 
 student to th< 
 important prii 
 
 Part II d 
 
 adapted to the 
 
 Part \, 44c 
 Part n, 8J 
 Parts I am 
 Specimen 
 
 / 
 
 JUL 6 193P 
 
aMHMI 
 
 '# ; I 
 
 i 
 
 I - nuiyi - NMMMMMMIMMI 
 
 ppBef^^aasBj^taa p J T s agww wwsswi*»*^^^^ *i.~*»ii*«&«iiSi 
 
 
 MMMMai 
 
 ^41 
 
 #1% 
 
 'mi 
 
 mAm 
 
 
 I "' i 
 
 I ' 
 
 ^13 
 
 t t 
 
 1 1 
 
 t 
 
 f I 
 
 II 
 
 tl 
 
■■MiiXAi^M^mMm fih'. 
 
 ^JSJJ^i 
 
 Ml 
 
 mmf> 
 
 ilK><rt<i 
 
 4 
 
 ■ ■ 
 
 ■:: -1 
 
 « 
 
 s% 
 
 
 fr.a^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 , • r 1 
 
 I'-'W 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 k^ ■' -iKCJHQ 
 
 
 
 P.-- - 1 
 
 ^■R,» 
 
 S^s» 
 
 ■" i^-^-'-r« 
 
 ^1 
 
 ■* K-- f.'S 
 
 SK 
 
 ^^ ^t . 
 
 ^« 
 
 &m 
 
 C I-- V» 
 
 v.u9 
 
 jP: ' 
 
 kSI 
 
 ^B 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 I la 
 
 j^l 
 
 P<si 
 
 to,s.*j^v;-.>"|5 
 
 ^1.^ 'A- > ' - 
 
 ^AO"*"! • >"« 
 
 
 
 :'^f>' 
 
 ■wstmmmx^mms 
 
 * ." •, "^jj i-iiS'' '^ * ™- i*^?''^V' '^Il^^i'^ hji^A'fc^'* 
 
H .A '■■■ . f . K '. \ r 
 
 ,1 
 
 1937 
 
 J 
 \ ! \v Latin Grammar and Reader on a New Plan. 
 
 ■^«,K.:«,* -ofe.is^^SlHtei'-Wi.^»* 
 
 THE 
 
 intljfCitpoflrtiigiJrk 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 Ghammak, 
 
 'KD TO EACH SECTION OF 
 
 IR, LL.D. 
 
 dapted to first beginners, 
 nted in lucid and concise 
 ; foundation for the later 
 he capacity of average 
 
 may be studied before the 
 w hatever. It consists of a 
 he battle of Zania. Every 
 Grammar, which is to be 
 )lves THE PROBLEM 
 entary Grammar, reton- 
 ns that " Grammar cannot 
 ivvledge of the language," 
 s grammatical knowledge." 
 
 leader, in connection with 
 
 studied with each chapter 
 ol the Reader, will enable the student to translate every sentence correctly. 
 The first or special, of the two vocabularies, contains all those words and 
 phrases -whos^ ^grammatical forms the student is not yet acquainted with 
 at that place of the Reader where they first occur. But it does not suggest 
 any of those grammatical forms which the student should know, from his 
 previous studies, according to the directions given in each chapter of the 
 Reader. Thus, in every succeeding section the number of phrases, etc., 
 suggested diminishes, till, towards the end of the Reader, the student must 
 almost entirely rely upon the second (or general) vocabulary, which contains 
 all the words of the Reader as they are usually placed in vocabularies. 
 
 <•«• 
 
 
 1 1 ' 
 
 ^l-;l '^ 
 
 ll ll 
 
 
 |,;y 
 
 
 ml ^' m 
 
 
 9k)lr^A Ji%x. ™" 
 
 
 wfc% 
 
 
 
 
 ^^^H^H| J 
 
 To illustrate the method, we reprint the first chapter : 
 
 ROMAN HISTORY. 
 
 FIRST BOOK. 
 
 I. First Declension. Study § 32 of the Grammar. 
 
 Media pars Italiae, infra fluvium Tiberim, antiquitus incolebfitur ab Latlnia. 
 Hsec pars ItaliiP, ox noraint- incoiarura, appellabatur Latium, et caput habr-bat Albam 
 Lon<,'am. Octilvo steciilo ante Chri^^tum, Numitor rex Albfe Longa fuit. Is expulsiin 
 est a fratre suo Amulio, qui filios NumltOris necSvit. Quum Rhea Sylvia, filiaNurai- 
 tOris, geininos filios peperisset, AmmuliuB jussit eos in Tiberim demergi. At servi 
 regil gatis hnbCbant, exponerc pucros in loco proximo aquse. Ibi, ut fabula tradit, 
 duo filii Rhetfi Sylvia nutriti sunt lupa, quie eis mammas pnebuit. 
 
 In the first (special) vocabulary the student will find the following 
 
 words for the first sentence : 
 
 ab, by; ab Latinis, by the Latins, 
 antiquitus, in ancient limes, 
 fluvium, the rivor. 
 incolebatur, was inhabited. 
 
 infra, below. 
 Laatinis, the Latins. 
 media pars, the middle part. 
 Tiberim, Tiber. 
 
 All the words belonging to the first declension, for instance : Italia, 
 incolaium, Alham Lougam, Albct Longcc, aqua, Rhea:, Sylvia, liipd, 
 mammas, are only found in the second (general) vocabulai7, in the 
 nominative singular, because the student is expected to translate them 
 correctly, according to the lesson just learned. 
 
 Since every chapter of the Reader is a drill for some section of the 
 Grammar, the student upon finishing the Reader will have been over the 
 whole of the Grammar in an easy and pleasant manner, while, at the same 
 time, he has acquired that practical routine in the language which alone 
 enables him to study the details of grammar w ilh success. 
 
 To write such a Reader is a matter of great difficulty, since it is neces- 
 sary to employ only such Latin constructions as may be literally rendered 
 into good English, and still be good and genuine Latin. And the thread 
 of the history must be so arranged and devised that in each chapter certain 
 irrammatical forms occur in sufficient number to drill the student in that 
 part of the Grammar which must be studied according to the order of the 
 system. Dr. Fischer has met these difficulties. We are satisfied that there 
 is not one sentence in the Reader which might not have been written by 
 a classical Latin author, and not one which will offer any difficulty to the 
 very first beginners. 
 
 Fischer's Elements of Latin Grammar, with Reader, 220 pages, 
 cloth, - ■ - - Price, $1.25 
 
 H^" Specimen copy mailed on receipt of the price. 
 
 J. W. Schermerhorn & Co., Publishers, 
 
 i'* j»ond Street 9 New York. 
 
Latin GrRAMAfAi;. 
 
 i-OiiElHER >VliII 
 
 . ...\ . 
 
 A SYSTEMATIC THK^.TMENT . CF IAT1\ COMPOSITION. 
 
 BY 
 
 GUSTAVUS FISCHER, LL.D. 
 
 PART SECOND, 
 
 CONTAINING THE DETAILS OF SYNTAX. 
 
 «? 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 
 J. W. Schermerhorn & Co., Publishers, 
 
 No. 14 BoxD Street. 
 187G. 
 

 • • • » •» 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • • • 
 
 • « 
 
 > 
 
 Entered nccordinp: tn Act of Conprosa, in the year 1875, by 
 
 J. W. SdlERMEKIlOKN A CO.. 
 In the Office of the Librnrian ot Congress, at Washiiiyton. 
 
 
 /.^L. 
 
 Laage, Little & Co., 
 
 Printers, Eleclrotypers and Bookbinders, 
 
 No», lu tj M Aator Place, 
 
 New York. 
 
 ^\. 
 
 PREFACE TO PAET II. 
 
 t 
 
 The second part of ihU p:rammar conta ins the details of Latin sjntax; 
 
 It has been our object to present a more complete statement of the laws of 
 
 • the Latin lani^uage than has been given heretofore. Our constant study of the 
 Latin authors for many years has been directed, solely for this purpose, to the 
 
 ' minute examination of ^'t;.HY grammatical form, and by this means we have 
 collected vast materials, with the help of which we have attempted to 'recon- 
 struct' the syntactical laws of the Latin lauicuage. We have not indulged in philo- 
 
 i sopiiical and theoretical speculations. Perhaps the reader will find rather ' too 
 little' than 'too much ' of these. Nor did we merely amass the 'material as 
 such ', leaving it to the reader to make the best of it. Indeed it was our chief 
 aim to discover new ijrinciples, hidden, or not sufficiently noticed before, to 
 use these principles as the key for the language, and the language as the proof 
 and test for the })rinciples. 
 
 It is impossible to treat all parts of Latin grammar with equal minuteness. 
 A work of this kind would have been too voluminous, and its end would have 
 been doubtful. Hence we have treated the easier parts of Latin grammar more 
 brielly than the difficult and more important subjects. By discussing the Case- 
 theory, the Agreement, and other elementary i)arts, with no greater explicitness 
 than is customary in our grammars, we were enabled to devote a more exhaust- 
 ing treatment to th e Gerun dials and Participials, to the Adverbial relations, to 
 Tenses, Moods, and especially to JJL^endent Sentences. 
 
 t We have treated the different ' grammatical relations' according to log- 
 ical categories, i. <•., according to the ideas of place^ time, manne r, q uant ity, 
 causy, etc^ whereas it is customary to consider these relations under the | 
 single cases (genitiye, etc.), each of which is treated in a separate chapter 
 in all its «grammatical bearings. A good index, however, will easily supi)ly 
 the reader, who is curious to pursue each single case in all its applica- 
 
 i tions, with the necessary references. But even the best index cannot sup- 
 ply us with all the dilterent forms under which a given grammatical idea 
 appears in Latin, unless the grammarian treats them side by side, and com- 
 })ares them witli each other. So, for instance, our grammars cannot, and do 
 not answer the question, in what dillerent forms the idea represented by the 
 English adverb «70 may be expressed in Latin; since in their arrangement 
 there is no proper place to discuss the question, which comprises several 
 cases, seva'ral prepositions, adverbs, and clauses. Hence what we find in the 
 grammars about this question is either insufficient, or erroneous (Comp. p. '230 
 and 231). So the rules, which the grammars give on Value and Price, are more or less 
 deficient from the fact that neither the ' genitive,' nor the ' dative ' is the proper 
 chapter under which to discuss all' the forms in which the Latin expresses these 
 
 1' 
 
 J 
 
 ( 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 ideas. A grammarian wlio follows the division according to logical categories, 
 is of necessity compelled to state all the possible forms at the disposal of the 
 Latin language to express a given idea, while under the traditional treatment 
 of genitive, dative, etc., such questions will either not present themselves, or, 
 if they do, will be very easily evaded. If we ask why this only proper method 
 has not been pursued heretofore, we know o^ no other answer but that the 
 existing grammatical ' material ' which has been handed down from generation 
 to generation, has been utterly insullicient for that purpose, and will but rarely 
 suggest an accurate answer to many questions considered as doubtful. 
 
 Many important points referring to the use of the Tenses have never yet been 
 considered. The results at which we liave arrived from the large number of 
 passages collected by us, have established a theory of tenses essentially diJGfer- 
 ent from the traditional rules usually met with. We have especially tried to estab- 
 lish the use of tenses in dependent sentences^ a point almost entirely neglected here- 
 tofore. In regard to the use of the subjunctive and the consecution of tenses, we have like- 
 wise established a new and comprehensive theory, founded on a careful investiga- 
 tion of the classical authors. The largest space has been devoted to the discussion 
 of dependent sentences, which, we believe, has not found in our grammars a treat- 
 ment cornnunsurate with its importance. Here we have generally resorted to 
 the historical treatment, so as to give a complete history of the diirerent forms from 
 their first appearance in the authors (or on ancient monuments) down to the sil- 
 ver age. We believe that this method has in several instances enabled us to 
 settle questions belonging to the most doubtful and difficult points in Latin 
 grammar. 
 
 It is proper to remark that, aside from the original sources, we have read none 
 of the many valuable treatises on grammatical subjects in the German philo- 
 logical journals, and none of the many excellent monographs, a veiy few ex- 
 cepted. We thought that we owed the immense time, which an examination 
 of these treatises would have taken, rather to the Latin authors. Although many 
 a valuable suggestion may have been lost, and although, perhaps, our own views 
 might sometimes have been modified, it yet seemed that every hour devoted to 
 the Latin authors was infinitely more fruitful for our purpose than the same time 
 applied to the study of monographs. In writing this grammar, we had before 
 us the grammatical treatises of Kuddinmn, Zumpt, Madvig, Kiihncr, Alch'ing:, 
 ^j^iisi^, the ' Public.^gchool Latin Grammar,' and .soiiiie others. We have duly 
 considered their theories, and when we found their teachings in conflict with 
 the authority of the classics, we have tried to refute the error from the sources. 
 Jlob^ Syntax wasjiot published till our plates were cast. Hence we could not 
 refer to the views of this grammarian. His coll ection of valuable^ material 
 regarding the '3ases of Latin Nouns might have been a very acceptable assist- 
 ance. 
 
 In respect to the continuance of the ' English Exercises ' in this Second 
 Part, we refer to our remarks in the Preface to the First Part. 
 New Brunswick, June, 1875. 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 For a more accurate analysis of the single articles, see the Index. 
 
 BOOK FOURTH. 
 
 Chapter First. Pregositioaa. § 42i, 425 ; p. 7-11. Definition and function in the sentence 
 S 4'2(j. List oT prepositious p. 12. — Ad § 427, p. 12-14. Adcersus p. 428, p. 15. Ante 
 g 42'J, p. 15. Apwl § 430, p. ICi, 17. Circa and circum § 431, p. 18. Inter g 432, p. 18, 19. 
 Ob S 433, p. 20. I'er § 434, p. 20, 21. Post, secundum, pone g 435, p. 22. PrcBter % 436, 
 p. 2:3. Propter, prope juxta § 437, p. 23, 24. Cis, extra, intra, infra, penes, supra, trans, 
 ultra, versus § 438, jj. 24. Erga and contra lb. p. 25. Ab, ex, de § 43'J — g 444, p. 25-32. 
 Cum § 44G, p. 33. /Vcg § 447, p. 33. Pro § 448, p. 34, 35. Coram, sine, tenm § 449, 
 p. 35, 36. In w. acciis. g 450-452, p. 37-42. In with ablative g 453, p. 42-45. Sub 
 S 454, p. 45. 46. Super p. 08. — Names of Cities g 455, p. 46-48. — Exercises p. 48-68. 
 
 Chapter Second. Construction of the yerb^. I. Coastructiou in general, in active and pas- 
 sive §4.56-460; p. 69 loll.— II. wTtu completing Predicates, Predicate-Nominative 
 § 461-463, p. 73 loll. Predicate-Genitive § 464-467, p. 76 foil. Predicate-Dative § 468- 
 470, p. 81 loll. — III. Verbs with simple objects iu Accusative § 471-473, p. 84 foil.— 
 IV. Verbs with simple objects in Dative g 474-477, p. 81 foil. — V. Verbs with simple 
 objects in Genitive and Ablative g 478-479, p. 92 foil,— . VI. Verba with compound 
 objects in oblique cases § 480-487, p. 96 foil. — VII. Verbs construed with Infinitive 
 § 488-495. p. 102 foil.— Exercises p. 109-113. 
 
 Chapter Third, qonstructi ou of Adjectives g 496-503, p. 113 foil.— Exercises p. 223. 224. ■ 
 
 Chapter Fourth. Verbal adjectives and Periphrastic Conjugation p. 124 foil. I. Forma- 
 tion of Verbal Adjectives in dus and ilrus g 504, 505, p. 124 loll. — II. Periphrastic con- 
 jugation p. 126 loll. A. In General § 505. B. Periphrastic Participle § 506, p. 127-129. 
 C. Periphrastic Future g 507-510, p. 129 foil. I). Periphrastic Gerund and Gerundive_ 
 §511-516, p. 140 loll. — III. Keversed Phrases and Geruudials_ p. 150 foll.~"^~.arrlu 
 «j^eneral g 517-523. Ji. As subjects and transitive objects f .524, 525, p. 156,157. C. 
 In the genitive g 526, 527, p. 157 foil. D. In the dative § 528, p. 163 full. E. In the 
 ablative p. 169 loll. 1. Geruudial ablative § .529, p. 169 loll.; 2. Ablative absolute § 530- 
 536, p. 178 foil. Jf\ After prepositions 1h7 foil. 1. Prepositional Gorundials g 537-644. 
 2) Prepositions w. participial phra.scs § 545, i). 198 toll.— Exercises j). 200-213. 
 
 BOOK FIFTH. 
 
 Chapter First, Aivjihial Relations p. 214 foil. I. ,\d%'erbial relations in general § 546, 547, 
 p. 214 loll. 11. Place g 54S, p. 214— p. 222. III. Time g 549. 550, p. 222-238. IV. Re- 
 lations of Modality p. 238 foil. A. Manner § 551-.553, p. 238-245. B. Coincident action 
 g .5.54-.556, p. 245-260. C. Quantitv p. 260 foil. 1) Intensity g 557, 558, p. 260-266. 2) 
 Value and Price g 559-561, p. 266-275. 3) Weight g 562, p. 275-277.— />. Cause g 563-566, 
 p. 277-284.— Exercises p. 284-298. 
 
 Chapter Second. Use of Tenses p. 298 foil. I. Present tense § 567, p. 298-301.— II. Perfect 
 S 568-572, p. 302-305.— III. Imperfect 305 foil. A. General requirements § 573-578, p. 
 305-328. B. Particular imperfects. 1) Imperfect of contingent action g 579, p. 328-332. 
 •2) Describing Imperfect g 580, p. 332, 333. 3) Hietori<;al imperfect g 581, p. 3;i3-336. 4> 
 Imperfect of inner action. A. Direct predicates of inner action g 582, p. 336-338. B. 
 Indirect predicates x)f inner action § SWi, p. 338. a) Imperfect of reference g 584, p. 
 339-342. b) Imperf. of rule and habit g 585, p. 342-346.— IV. Pluperfect g 586. p. 346, 
 347.— Future tenses § 587, 588, p. 347-356.— VI. Epistolary tenses § 589, p. 356-360.— 
 Exercises p, 3(jO-377. 
 
 Chapter Third. Use of the Subjunctive 377 foil. I. Potential subjunctive § 591, p. 378. A. 
 Declarative subjunctive § 592, p. TTB-asl. B. Interrogative subjunctive § 593, p. 381, 
 382. C. Subjunctive in imperative sentences g 594, p. 382-385.— II. Dependent sub- 
 junctive g 595, p. 38.'>. A. Subjunctive of indirect discourse. 1) Direct and indirect 
 statement g 596, 597, p. 385-;W7. 2) Oblique clauses g 598, p. 387-398. 3) Suboblique 
 clauses g 599, p. 398-404. 4) Quasi-oblique clauses § 600, p. 404-408.— B. Subjunctive 
 by Attraction § 601, p. 408-413.— C. Tenses of the dependent subjunctive § 602, p. 414. 
 1) I^w of consecution g 603, 604, p. 4f4-422. 2) Logical tenses § 605, 606, p. 422-447. 3) 
 Conversion of tenses § 607, p. 447-455.— Exercises p. 455-471. 
 
G TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 BOOK SIXTH. 
 
 COMBIKATIOK OF SENTENCES. 
 
 Chapter First. Theory of Sentence^combiaatioii §608, p. 472-479.- Division of clauses 
 
 ChUter Seclnd:'" Relative Clauses p. 494 foil. I. Clas.sification § Gil p. f V:!^f *'.,"• A"*;^- 
 cecU'Uts § (U-2 p a()4-.-yi3. III. Construction and aiKUihcation J» (.13. p. 52J-o42. Moods 
 in relative clauses S G14. G15, p. 542 574. IV. Lucativo clauses S GIG, p. 574-o7G.— Exer- 
 
 ClIaDteVThVrd'"^ 'iut clauses p. 588 foil, I. Completing Tbat-clan.sr-s S G17. p. 588. A. 
 Object Tliat-cUius^slTVrr sentieudi R. 23. p. 588-594. 2) Verba declaraudi «. 24, 
 X) 5't4-5it9. 3) Verba laciendi R. 25, p. 5'.)9-G()5. 4) Fact-clauses R. 2G, p. G()o-(,08.- IJ. 
 Subject That-clauses R. 27, p. G08 loll. 1) Tliat-clauses as subjects of passive verbs 
 OBS 1 p. G08, 609. 2) That-cl. as subjects of predicate-adjectives ons. 2-j, p. (.O.M.l.J. 
 3) That-cl. as subjects of predicate-nouns ons. 8-12, p. G13-615. 4) That-cl. as subjects 
 of impersonal verbs R. 28, p. (-,15-023. 5) Tliat-cl. as subjects of ordinary active verbs 
 oiis 5-8 p. 023.- C. Attributive That-claus.s R. 29, p. (•.23-(;28.-D. Predicate 1 hat- 
 clauses R. 30, p. ()28. E. Inner form of That-clavises A*. 31, p. G29-G3^1.- II. Modal 
 That-clausf'S S G18, p. r.35-G38.— Exercises p. GD9-G44. 
 
 Chapter Fourth. Tfiioporal clauses Gt4 foil. I. (^uuni-clauses S fil9 p Ui A. I »j;« *;'"?- 
 noral (nmni-claus.s. 1. Adv. rbial Quum-clauses R. 34. 3.>, p. 04.)-(.o.J. 2. Attnbutno 
 Quum-clauses /e. 3G. p. G53-G54.— li. Atfected Quuin-clauscs R. 37-41 p. (.a4-(..)9.— II. 
 Clauses with postmiam, >/hi, ut, siinulac, quand» ^ (•»20. p. G51)-C.GG.— Clauses with ante- 
 qua, a and ;»r/M.sv;ua/» S G21, p. GGG-G71.— IV. Clauses with duin, donee, quoad, quamdiu 
 
 ChlptVr Fifth.^"* Causal clauses. I. Direct cause § 623, p. 682-692. II. Adversative (con- 
 ccssive) <-ause !ri;2I. p. r,<>2-700. , ^ wr i v* » 
 
 Chapter Sixth. Conditional clauses § 625 foil. I. Conditional clauses of doubtful realit> H. 
 4t i> 701 foil " \. Tenses of the indicative in clauses of doubttul reality OBs. 1-3, p. 
 702-704. B. Negative Si-clauses of doubtful reality ons. 4-9, p. 704-709.— (\ Tenses of 
 the subinnctive in conditional clauses of do)ibtful reality ons. 10-20, p. 709-715.-- II. 
 Conditional clauses of doubtless reality R. 45, p. 715-717.— III. Conditional periods of 
 jion-realitv R. 4G, p. 717-730.— IV. Improper conditional periods R. 47, p. 731-733.— V. 
 Equivalents and Ellipsis of Si-clauses «.48, p. 733-735.— VI. Co-ordination of con- 
 diti.»nal clauses R. 49, p. 736-738.— VII. Particular usage of conditional conjunctions 
 R. 50, p. 738-743. ,. . . _ _, 
 
 Chapter Seventh. Cpmparative clauses § C26, p. 743 foil. I- Q'^^^taUve comparison 7? ol. 
 p. 744-740. II. Quantitative comparison 1) of liko quantity ii. 52, p. toO. tol , I) OI 
 unlike quantity R. 53, p. 752-768. 
 
 Chapter Eighth. Oblique discourse § 627, p. 768-771. Index 773-817. 
 
 PAKT SECOND. 
 
 BOOK FOURTH. 
 
 PREPOSITIOXS. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERBS AND ADJECTIVES. 
 PERIPIIRASTICS. GERUNDIALS. PARTICIPIALS. 
 
 CHAPTER FIRST. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 4^4. PRErosiTiONS are words indicating the different re- 
 lations of a Dependent Substantive to its governing word. 
 They have the same function as the Case-endings, and hence 
 botli frequently interchange. But the Case-endings indicate 
 the 77iost general of these relations, while the Piiepositions 
 indicate those special relations which are designated by the 
 t<?rm *' Grammatical Circumstances;" that is, the relations of 
 Place, Time, Manner, Intensity, Cause (p. 3U foil.). 
 
 7?^w 1 The En"'lish lan-^aao-e expresses the general Case-relations, except thaf of the 
 Accusative by Prtt^Mtioiis. ^We tnav uiidermnd both, the Cask-relations and the 
 Grammatical CiuciTMvrANCES best, by repre-^entini; them in the form of Questions. 
 'ihus we say. that the Genitive answers to the question " Oj uhom, or • Of ulac/i; 
 the Dative to the question " To whotn^ or ''To tv/tichr etc. In the same Nvay we say, 
 that the relation of Space or Place answers to one of the questions " «'-^r^. J„ ",'"'„ 
 or •' wheuce ;" that of Time to one of the questions " when:' '" since when, ' Hli when, 
 " hoio lonn " etc —The deiuvation of several prepositions is doubtless, for instance that 
 of extra, contra, proeter, ultra, etc. In regard to other prepositions, there is a contro- 
 versy, still undecided, whether they contain original roots, or whether they are derived 
 from verbal or other roots (for inst. in, ah, ex, de, a^i».— Some lingmsts without adducng 
 anv proper proof, are of the opinion that all prepositions, originally, were advekbs, 
 and i)ec!nne propositions when they began to be construed with object^. 1 hey overlook 
 the fact that ad ve bs do not, necessarily, lose their quality as adverbs by being construed 
 with case-objects See p. 114, R. 98. 
 
 ) 
 
8 
 
 PEErOSITIONS. 
 
 Rem. 2. In our rules on the use of Prepositions wc generally disstinguifsh three rela- 
 tions : 1) that of Place, 2) of Time, and 3) the Inner Kklationh, that is, the relations 
 of either Manner, Intensity, or Cause. By far the most of th.e Prejjositions j)rimarily 
 indicate a relation of Place or Space (Local Kelation), and of Time (Teinj)oral Relation). 
 But nearly all Prepositions have, besides these j)rimary significations, a Fioukative or 
 'i'i;oricAL meaning, when theij represent ohjecf.-i of the Mind, as if they were objects of Phice. 
 Thus the English preposition '•*«.■" originally *ha» a local meaning, answering to the 
 question *" nviere,'''' as: "I live in the city." But the same pn'position is also used 
 piGUUATiVELV or TKoi'icALLY, as : ''I am in danger'' or " I am in distress." Here an- 
 INTEKNAL situation, that is, an object which can only be conceived by thi" mind, is repre- 
 sented as if it was an exteknal situation of Place; that is : The ideas '• Danger" and 
 "Distress" are treated as Localities. 
 
 § 4^<5, The Prepositions are not considered as members of 
 the tuuLcuce, since they can neither be the governinr/^ nor the 
 dependent words o^ Phrases. But they connect words to Phrases, 
 and, like the Case-endings, are the marks oi Dependence. They 
 occur either in the objective or in the attkibutive plirase, 
 and tlie Substantives before which they stand are accordingly 
 divided into Prepositioxal Objects and Pkepositioxal At- 
 tributes. 
 
 Rem. 3. The Latin lanijnaf^e docs not use Pi'cpositioiial Atti'ibiitcs as 
 frequently and tnely as tlie English language, and English Prepositional 
 Attributes generally arc expressed either by Latin Gknitivks, or by the 
 insertion of Participles, as: BeUum Iklvdwruni, a why with the Helve- 
 tians; Studlum modeiituv, a zeal Ibrniodesty; Desiderinni t(/i\ a longing /or 
 thee; Victoria belli cic'ilis, a victory z/i a civil war; Consuetud» Iiomiiium, 
 the intercourse with men; Gloria bdh\ the renown i/i war; Bellum cum 
 CarthaginiensibuH geduin, the war icith the Carthaginians; Mo)in prope ur- 
 bem situs, a mountain near the city ; Libri de iihiloaophia scripti^ books on 
 philosophy. 
 
 Only 8oine relations ar.e expressed by Latin Prepositional Attributes, and 
 these must be chietiy learned by the \isage otthe Latin authors, as : Aditus 
 ad caMra, the access to the camp; Iter ad Ilclretios^ the road (journey) to 
 the country of the Helvetians; Insubi in lacu Prelio, an island in thePrc- 
 lian lake ; Homo de plebe (not plebix), a man of the plebs ; Poculum ex auro^ 
 a gold goblet; Tua in nie (uaicitia^ thy friendship for me. 
 
 Rem. 4. Prepositional Oujects, like the C'ase-objects, generally stand 
 before their governing verbs. In the compound objective phrase they gen- 
 erally follow the case-object, except for reasons of emphasis. Prepositional 
 Attributes generally follow their governing nouns. In the compound 
 attributive phrase they stand after the adjective or attributive genitive, and 
 before the governing noun, as : Cic£ronu de pJiilomphia libri, Cicero's books 
 on philosophy; Mmjua in caatria trepiddti*}^ a great excitement in the camp; 
 Optima tua de me opinio^ thy highly favorable opinion about me. 
 
 Hem. 5. When the Prepositional Object is the governing noun of an At- 
 tribute, the PreiK)sition stands before the whole i)hra3e, as: Per manum 
 dextram, through the right hand ; Prrrter Ciceronia fitium, besides Cicero's 
 son. But often TnonoKyllnbic i)repositions, especially in, de, cum, ex, ab, 
 Bometimes also dissyllables, vspacuiUy propter -dud inter, are placed between 
 a precedimj adjective and following noun, as : Eodem in loco, in the samo 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 place ; hoc de tiro, on this man ; magna cum diligeniia, with great diligence ; 
 maxima ex parte, for the greatest iiart. 
 
 Rem. (). Prei)ositions always precede those nouns whose cases they gov- 
 ern, and whose dependence they mark, except versus and tenus, as: tauro 
 ienus, up to the Taurus; Jlispaniam versus, in the direction of Spain. The 
 jireposition cum, belonging to the pronouns me, te, se, nobis, vobis, is affixed 
 to these words as an enclitic. The same is often the case with the disjunct 
 Form-adjectives quo, quibus, and qua, as: Mecum, with me; tecum, with 
 thee ; secum, with him ; nobiscum, vobiscum, quocum, quibuscum (or cum quo^ 
 cum quibus; but not cum me,cum te, etc.).— Sometimes (rarelv) t /iter is 
 placed after the object (quns inter, among whom, Caes. B. C. 7,38). 
 
 Rem. 7. Prepositional Objects are called Reflexive, when their ante- 
 cedent is the logical subject of their governing word (j^ 233). The English 
 language frequently employs the simple personal pronouns instead of the 
 letlexives, in Prepositional objects. This never is the case in Latin, as: 
 Diogenes carried all his properti/ with him, Diogenes onmia sua secum por- 
 tavit. In these instances we alwai/.f must use tiie reflexive pronoun in Latin. 
 
 But even a non-reflexive pronoun of the third person must take a Re- 
 flexive FOKM [xui, sibi, se) in Latin in the cases specified ^^ 238, 389, and 
 § 423, K. 70, and it makes here no dilference, whether the pronominal 
 object is prepositional or only a case-object. The same rules apply to the 
 Possessive suus. 
 
 Jieni. 8. Since the question, whether the simple or the reflexive Pronouns must be 
 used in a given case, belon-s to the more difficult parti? of Grammar, we <rive here these 
 rules in their connection. We call here the forms srii, nbi. se and the Possessive suus 
 ItEFLEXiVE FouMs. whether they are strictly reflexive or not. The forms, derived from 
 ts, ea, id (ii6 eum, him ; ejus, his ; eOru/n, their), are here called Demonstkative Forms. 
 
 SUMMAIIY OJ TIIE RuLES ON TIIE IJsE OF TIIE ReFLEXIVE 
 
 AND Demonstrative Foiims. 
 
 1. The use of the Reflexive or Demonstrative forms chieflv depends 
 on the Place of the Antecedent. The general rule is this : \V/ten both 
 Pronoun and Antecedent sta/ul in the same sentence, the Reflexive /b/-//w 
 must be used; but, when they stand in diffeiient seiitences, the Demon- 
 stuatives must be onplot/ed. 
 
 We consider here all coordinations, even the coordinations of single words 
 as constituting dittereut sentences. Thus the sentence " The queen and 
 her children were killed" consists of two .coordinate propositions, which 
 we thus complete : a) The queen was killed ; b) her children were killed. 
 Hence the Possessive her and its antecedent queen stand in ditferent sen- 
 tences, and the possessive assumes the demonstrative form (Regina ejus- 
 que liberi occisi sunt). 
 
 ^ On the other hand, Participial and Infinitive Clauses are here con- 
 sidered as members and phrai^es of their princii)al sentence, as : Germanicus 
 tegiimes universas, sibi sunnnam reipnbliccc deferentls, cmnpescuif, Suet. Cal. 
 1, Gerinanicus restrained the whole of the legions, oflering to him the gov- 
 ernment of the State. Here the Participial Clause : Sibi summam relpub- 
 licm deferentls is considered as a combination of attributive phrases, de- 
 pendent on legidnes. Hence the pronoun to him stands in the same sentence 
 with its antecedent Germanicus, and must assume the Reflexive form 
 {sibi; not ei) in Lai'm.— Camillas mihi scripsit, ta secum locutum esse, Cia 
 Att. 11, 23, L Camillus wrote to me, that thou hadst spoken with hiin. 
 Here the Pronoun him, dependent on the Predicate-Infinitive lociitum esse 
 
10 
 
 rRErosmoNS. 
 
 rnEPOSiTioNS. 
 
 11 
 
 i^ con'^idercd to be in the same sentence with its antecedent Camillus, and 
 therefore must be expressed by the Ketlexive xa-nni (not oun eo) 
 
 2 Rule No. 1 uncmuUtionnihj applies only to the ease, when the Antece- 
 dent is at the same time the Subject of the sentence, which most .i^^'n;;^''} Iv 
 is he case in sentences of this kind. I5ut when X\xo Antecedent is an Object 
 which rarchi is the case, the usa-e of the Latin authors is not so clear and 
 ccT aim as in the first case, althon.i^h the use of the Keflexivk torm is 
 even here the Rule ; as : dEmr Fablnm cum kijiime m sua remdtd hiberiia, 
 C«s 15 G 5, 0)3, Ca?sar sends Fabius with the legion to Ms wmter-quarteTs. 
 Z^llanimonkun^ nomine dUm^^ Cic. Fam. 13, 21 Love "^^J^^J^y^^'"^ f;;»' 
 /iwsake— 7'<fc autem ticrmlH Ma.ssilk/mbuH sua reddi:*, tie Att. 14, 14, luu 
 t^,u renderest to the Massilians their own. -7.V.^.V>/^.;v.^.<> TZu oZr 
 se conciliat, Cic. Oif. 1, 10, Reason and language bind men to each othci 
 
 ^'The^l)EMo;5^™vE roKM is chiefly employed, when a prepositional 
 Pronoun or Possessive, having an object as antecedent, may be resolved 
 into a separate clause, or when such a Pronoun or Posse..i e ac^uallu 
 stands in an Infinitive or Participial clause, or when the use ot the ReHex- 
 
 ive woiild cause ambiguity; as: Attlco ^w.tro ^l^f^^'^t^^^'^^'^^'^f l^'^Z 
 scrintce, 7ion jucumlwres fuPrunf, qmtm mihi.Uc. Jam. l.J, IH, 1, lo onr 
 AU cus thy letter, most pleasantly written to him, was not more tigreeab c 
 Ui n to me. Here the Pronoiin ad cum and its governing participle 
 s^riut'B form a participial clause, and hence the antecedent .1//^.^ really 
 ^aus in another clause, although in the case No. 1, that is, when the an- 
 tecedent is the subject of the sentence, Participial Clauses are considered as 
 mcmibers of the principal sentence.-.S.m;>.r aniacl Brntum propter ejus 
 Z^mtm inoenlum. Cic. Fam. U, 14, 5, 1. always loved 1 rutus on accomU 
 oads *n-eat <'-enius (that is : Because he is a man of great gen us), tit ob- 
 luZ^l^^ntefUun ejus, Cic. Mil., lie meets C/odius Ix^tore /... r^^^^^^^ 
 (better : before the place of the latter). Here ejus shows, that the su ct 
 Milo) is not meant, which when «a^/^ were used, would remain undecided. 
 \rantl Cincinnato nuatidtum est, eum dictatOrem esse factum, Lie. ben. lb, 
 50 To Cincinnatus while ploughing, it was announci,'d, that /i^ was made 
 a dictator Here the Pronoun eum in the Infinitive-clause has the de>ion- 
 STU vtive' form, because its antecedent is an object. But when the antece- 
 dent is the lorpcal subject (although it has the form ot an object), we must 
 even in\A/.v case eniploy the Reflexive form, as : FauMo spesfuerat 
 re^Lnstirmm apud se educari, Liv. 1, 5, Faustulus had enter ained the 
 ^^ Oiterally : to Faustulus had been the hope) that the royal otFspnng 
 would be brought ui> in his house. 
 
 Wlien the AnttHeJleiit is an Attiuuute, the pronoun always assumes the 
 Devionstuative tbrm. This case is extremely rare, bee ^ Z6'6. 
 
 8 When the Pronoun or Possessive stands in a finite clause, and tlie 
 antecedent is in the Principal sentence, we must use the Demonstuativb 
 Form This follows from Rule No. 1 ; as : Hoc ipsl. SicuUsjta persuasu.n 
 est ut in aninus eorum insitum atque inndtum esse vuleatur, Cic. V err. 4, 4«, 
 The Sicilians themselves are so satisfied of this fact, that it seems to have 
 jrrown and to be born in their minds. 
 
 But when a Peusonal Antecedent is the logical Surtect of the 
 principal sentence, and the clause is represented as being conceived by iht^ 
 subject so that he (the subject) means Jumself by the Pronoun, or his things 
 by the Possessive, we must use the Reflexive, n.^ the Demonstuative 
 
 ••l 
 
 FoiiMS. This refers to all kinds of clauses, wiiether they are introduced 
 by ut, si, quod, quia,or any other conjunction, and to Relative Clauses and 
 indirect Questions; as: JJa fames locum delegit talem, ut non midtum obesse 
 muUdudo hostium sua? pa ucitdtl posset, Datames selected a place of this kind, 
 lest the great number of the enemies could do much damage to his small 
 force. Nep. Dat. 7, 3. This clause contains a purpose of Datames, and 
 lie means b}' the Possessive his own things. — Cassius constituit ut ludi ab- 
 iente tejierent suo nomine, Cassius has resolved, that the games in thy absence 
 should be given in Ztw name. Cic. Att. l.>, 11,2. Tliis clause contains a 
 resolution of Cassius, and he means by his himself. — A Ca^sare valde libe- 
 raliter invltor sibi ut sim ler/dtus, Cic. Att. 2, 188, I am very liberally invited 
 by Ca?sar, to be his delegate. This clause contains an invitation of Caesar, 
 the logictd Subject, and he means himself by. *f(!7>/. — Africdnus si sua r^'j? age- 
 vi'tur, testimonium non diceret, Africanus, if his cause was tried, would not 
 be a witness. Cic. Rose. Am. 80, 8. Here the clause si sua res ageretur is 
 represented as conceived by Africanus, ^is if it was said, that he would refuse 
 testimony if his case were tried. ^ — Decima legio Ccesari gjrdias egit, quod de se 
 opfintuuijud(ciu?nfecis.sef,Ciii^. B. G. 1,41, The tenth legion thanked Caesar 
 for having j^assed the best judgment on them (that is : for having declared them 
 the best legion). — Patus omnes libros, quosfr<der suus reliquisset, mihi dondvit, 
 Cic. Att. 2, 1, Partus gave me all books, which his brother had left to him.'-' 
 
 Whenji/ide Clauses are thus represerded as being conceived by the Subject 
 of the principal sentence, the mood of the clause always is the Subjunctive, 
 subjei't to the Law of consecution. For a peculiar exception see p. 401, n. 4. 
 
 litni. 9. The verb esse frequently is used as the governing word of prepo- 
 sitional and other classes of objects without being connected with a predi- 
 cative adjective or noun. This verb must then not be considered as a 
 copula. Esse in connection with objects has the signification of a real verb. 
 We generally, but not always, use in English the verb " to be'^ in a similar 
 sense. Thus, in connection with the prei)osition in, the verb esse has the 
 meaning " to stuy^'' " to sojourn^'' as : In Megard fui, I was (stayed) in Me- 
 gara. With ex it means the source from which something is derived, as in 
 liie idiom " c republica esse," to be of advantage for the republic, which 
 properly means : *' to come from the republic." With a dative object esse 
 has the meaning ^' to belong f and with the prepositions ante ^ post ^ pro, 
 contra the meaning of esse again is ditferent. 
 
 § 4:tlO. IVepositional Objects or Attributes stand either in 
 the Accusative or in the Ablative. Each preposition governs* 
 
 J SiMiteiices like this» may be represented as not conceived by the subject, but as con- 
 ceived Ijy tlie author. In ihit* ca^-e ttie De.honstuative Form is used. TUus it would l)y 
 no means be fanhy, to use in the above sentence eja-^ instead oi sua. In sentences, whose 
 principal predicates do not distinctly show, that the clause is meant to be a conception 
 of tlie SrnjKCT. both, the Demonstkative and the Keflexive forms are used at the 
 choice of the author, and accordin<j as he means the clause to be understood. From this 
 we oiijrht not to infer, that every possible clause may be conceived in both ways, and 
 that consequi'Utly tlie use of either form always may be defended. This is by no means 
 the case. On the contrary, such sentences, where indeed both forms may be used with 
 equal propriety, are l)ut very few. and in by far the ijreatest number of sentences only 
 one of the two forms must be considered as the proper one. 
 
 " Here l)y'tlie l^'tU-xive fortn suuj^ the author indicates, that the clause quos f rater mns 
 relic/ uiysef was said by I'letus himself, when he made the donation. The Principal Predi- 
 cate (louarif has thus the force o{ dixit se donare. 
 
 ' The Preposition is said to ijovern the Case of the object, not the object as such, the 
 prcposUion bein^' itself part of the object. 
 
IZ 
 
 TREPOSITIONS. 
 
 either the one or the other of these cases. Only four preposi- 
 tions may be construed as toclt with the Accusative as with the 
 
 Ablative. 
 
 The following Prepositions govern the Accusative : 
 
 ob, on account of. 
 
 penes, in the power of. 
 
 per, throurjh, hy. 
 
 pone (rare), behind. 
 
 post, after. 
 
 propter, except, heddcs. 
 
 prope, near. 
 
 propter, on account of. 
 
 secundum, along. 
 
 supra, over. 
 
 trans, across. 
 
 ultra, beyond. 
 
 versus (versuui), toward (local). 
 
 Ad, to (direction to). 
 
 ad versus, against. 
 
 ante, before. 
 
 upud, at. 
 
 circa, about. 
 
 circum, around. 
 
 cis (citra), on this side. 
 
 contra, againnt (hostile). 
 
 erga, toward (direction of the mind). 
 
 extra, outside. 
 
 infra, below. 
 
 inter, between^ among. 
 
 intra, irithin. 
 
 juxta, nej-t to. 
 
 The following Prepositions govern the Ablative : 
 
 A (ab, abs), from. e (ex), frojn (out oQ. 
 
 absque (rare and anteclassical), tcitJiout. pne, before (rare), 
 
 coram, in t/ie presence of. pro, /or. 
 
 cum, icith. sine, without, 
 
 da, from (away from). ten us, up to. 
 
 The following Prepositions take either the Ablative or Ac- 
 cusative : 
 
 in, in (abl.) ; into (accus.) subter (rare), under. ) Nearly always 
 snh vnd£r. snper, over. f with Accusative. 
 
 § 4^?. Ad has the primary meaning " ?iear to.'' l) In locai 
 relations it answers to both questions, " ?r/i^re .^" and '' ic/dth 
 er?'\ aiul is translated by to in answer to the question " ichither'' 
 (denoting direction to), and by at [by or near) in answer to the 
 question ''where;'' as ad urhem ire., to go to (near to) the city ; 
 ad Cmsarem prqficisci, to go to Ciesar ; ad tumidum2m{/nare, to 
 fight at (hij, near) a hill ; ad fluiniim adtiemre or 2)erven'ire, to 
 arrive at the river ; ^j>?^/7;ia ad Can?ias, the battle at {of) Can- 
 naj (not Cannarum). 
 
 2) Figuratively (tropically, see Ilem. 2) «J expresses a tend- 
 ency or AIM toward a point, or a pukpose for or toward some 
 end, and is translated by to or for, as : Ad 2)rudentiam revocare, 
 
 PEEPOSITIONS. 
 
 13 
 
 to recall (o prudence ; ad helium paratum esse, to be prepared 
 (ready) /c;* war ; apt us ad /lanc Ur tern, ^t, adai^fted to this art; 
 ad sumina omnia natus, horn for the highest ends. 
 
 3) In relations of Time it answers to the question : " Till 
 what time?" and is translated by to or till, as : Ad tricesimum 
 a7inum vix it, }\Q\i\cd to \\\^ thirtietli year; ad vesper um dimi- 
 care, to fight till evening. 
 
 Rem.lQ. Ad is frequently strengthened by theadverb w.S(7?/e(p. 21G, 7), 
 which in this connection generally is translated by up to or as far as, and 
 is placed either before ail, or after the object, as : Usque ad Bhenum, or ad 
 lilienum usque venire, to come up to (as far as) the Rhine ; usque ad senectu- 
 tem, or ad senectutem usque, up to old age. In internal relations usque ex- 
 presses intensity and degree (Hem. 13), as : ad furiyrem usque excitare, to 
 excite up to fiuy, to a degree of fury. 
 
 liem. 11. The lirst difficulty, which the student meets in the use of this 
 preposition, is to distinguish it from the relation of the datfve case. In 
 purely local relations, tliat is, when the object is a real place, this dis- 
 tinction is very clear. In such relations tlie English preposition to, an- 
 swering to the question " whither" or " where'' can never be translated by 
 the Dative, as : I come to the sJiore, ad oram venio (not oroe xenio). But the 
 object of a local relation is not always an expressed place, but may be a 
 PERSON or other tuing, represented as occupying a place. Thus the sen- 
 tence " I come to Ciesar" contains a local relation, since it refers to the 
 place, where Caesar is. Local relations of this kind generally are clearly 
 indicated by the puedicate, and when the Predicate is a verb of motion, 
 we nuist translate tlie English " to'' by a Latin Preposition, and not by the 
 Dative, as: I flee to Cu'sar, ad Caesarem (not Cmari) iugio ; he Jiastens to 
 battle, ad piignam properat {noipugnce); lie rides to the general, ad ducem 
 adequitat (not duci). 
 
 There are however verbs, which only presuppose a motion, but do not 
 express it clearly, as : to send, to call, to bring. The rule is here, to use ad, 
 not the dative, as : I send auLbassculors to Casar, Legatos ad C^sarem mitto ; 
 I ctdl Sejus to me, Sejum ad me voco (not mihi) ; lie brings the book to his 
 brother, Librum ad fratrem aflfert (but see p. 90, Jl. 45. 4G). But some 
 verbs (to restore, to write, to hand, to deliver, etc.) might ajipear .of a 
 doubtful nature, a^id indeed we lind several verbs construed either with a 
 Dative, or with ad. In cases of this kind we must refer principally to 
 the usage of the Latin authors. These construe certain verbs always with 
 a Dative, others always with ad, and others sometimes with a Dative, 
 sometimes with f«r?, often according to dilferent meanings of the same verb. 
 Thus all verbs, which contain or imply the idea of giving are construed 
 with the Dative of the receiver. The verb to return for instance, when it is 
 a verb of motion is translated by red'ire, reverti, regredi, etc., and construed 
 with ad or in{ad patrem redire); but when it implies the idea of giving, 
 it is translated by reddere (re-dare) and construed with the Dative {librum 
 am'ico reddere). The sentence " Jle returned the Iwstages to the king" may 
 be exprcsvsed by a verb of giving {reddere), and then we must use the Da- 
 tive ipbsides regi reddidit), or by a verb, expressing a motion (as reducere, 
 
1 ! 
 
 rPiErosiTioNs. 
 
 to return, in the moaninir to hrinr/ back or lead back), and then the prepo- 
 sition ad must be usetl {olmden ad nrjein mla.vif). 
 
 Thi' verb mitfere usually is constiued with ad, but it is found also with 
 the Dative, when the pkusc^n, to whom somethinir is sent, is conceived as 
 tlie RECEivEii, as: to send amba.sfunlorn to the king, Iciratos ad regem mittere ; 
 but : to «end a letter to the kinf/, litteras irr/i or ad rcf/cm mittere. The verb 
 acrlbere may be construed with ad or the Dative, as: epiKtoUuii ad frafreni 
 or fratri ncriberc.' But here the Dative is more usual. The verb restituere 
 (to restore) is construed with ad or tlie Dative. '' To restore a thing to a 
 ^person'' is expressed by restitucre with the Dative of the receiver (as : 
 librum fratri restituere); but " to restore something to a fanner .state' is ex- 
 pressed by ri'stitiiere witli the preposition ///, or by redigere with the prep- 
 osition ad (in honorem restituere, in patriam restituere, discipllnam ad 
 prist inos mores redigere). 
 
 The verbs iinvferre and anteponere (to prefer), although ferre and poncre 
 oriunnally denote local relations, nevertheless are construed with the 
 Dative cmly, since the one that prefers something to another thing is not 
 conceived as bringing it to, but before the preferred thing. 
 
 Verbs, which originallv denote or imply a local direction, generally 
 are construed with ad, anil not with the Dative, even when the relation is 
 FIGURATIVE. Thus the verbs conlre, recoedre^ redncere, addacere, referre, 
 redigere, conferre, deferre, accedere, pertinere, attinere must be construed 
 with ad, as: AliqHeni ad sanitate ni revocdre, to recall somebody to reason; 
 aliquem ad belluni indncere, to induce somebody to a war; ad senatnni 
 referre, to report to the Senate; hoc ad me pertinet or attinrt, this concerns 
 7ne (literally : it i)('it:iins to me). Accedcre ad aliqxid properly means " to rjo 
 near to sonulhin'i,'' and tr()i)ically : to be added to something, as: Accedit ad 
 lioc. It is added to this"' (it nuist be added to this, that, etc.) Hoc multinn ad 
 dignitatem confert, this contributes nuich to dignity. We sometimes express 
 ad in such relations by other prepositions than ^^ as; Siimmnm imjxriuni 
 (Hi aliquem deferre or transftrre, to confer or transfer the connnando»/^ some- 
 body (but deferre is also construed with the dative). 
 
 liem. 13. The preposition to before names of Countries is translated by 
 in, not by ad. Before Places in general, ad expresses, that the aim of a 
 moticm rather is to a point near a place, than to the iilace itself; as ad 
 Jturiirm, (ul littiis ire, to go to a river, to the sea-shore; ad urbem, to a i)lace 
 before a city, but in urbem to the city itself Ft)r this nice distinction of 
 the Latin language, which generally is disregarded in English, see § 450 
 and Hem. 70. 
 
 Bern. 13. The preposition ad frequently is used, to cypress 1) the idea 
 according to (see the prei)()sitions Mcundum, e.r, pro), 2) the idea up to, teen 
 to. In both instances <(d corresponds to its original meaning near to, ap- 
 proaching to, as: Ad voluntatem [nutum) alicujus loqui, to speak (recording to 
 somebody's will (hint) ; ad hunc modam, in this way, after this manner (ac- 
 cording to this fashion); qucm ad moduni {qucmadmodum), how, according 
 to what manner. Ad neceiii aliquem caidere, to strike some one to death 
 (even to death, up to death); ((d mille homines, about 1000 men, as many as 
 1000 men (a synon}in of circittr, ^ 400). 
 
 1 TAhruni nil aliquem arribere moans: To dedicate x\. book to soincbody. Librum alicui 
 ficribere would mean: To wrUe abookyo/- ^ownthoiU.—Einstolum ud aliquem dar€,= 
 to si-ml a letttT to ^oinelmdv; ep. alicui aa/v,=to <,Mve soiiud)()dy a IcttiT. 
 
 2 Generally translated by the impcraiivo scuteuce: Add to thi:?, that, etc. bee p. QiZ, 1. 
 
 rREPOSITIONS. 
 
 15 
 
 Tfem 14 Tdiomp —Ad tempn.<i has throe meanings : Vi in time (at the right time) ; 2) for 
 a time"- -i) aeeording to time (and eircumstances*). Ad rerbum. verbatim, word for word. 
 — Id annum next \^iar.—Ad ejctremuvu at last.— .4(/ diem, ad /coram, at the (appointed) 
 dav or hour.— ^(V wium omnes, all without exeeption. —.-!(/ summam, on the whole.— ^oc 
 nihil ad ine, this does not concern mc.— Nihil ad Ciceronem est, he is nothing lu com- 
 pari6>ou with Cicero. 
 
 § 428. Adcersus {adversum) means 1) opposite to (over 
 against) ; 2) toward or against in local and internal relations, 
 ill a hostile, indifferent, or even friendly sense. 
 
 Rem 15 Adrersus in a local sense answers either to the question ''where'' 
 or to " ichither:' When it answers to the question " where " it means oppo- 
 site, over against, indicating a situation, as compared with another situation. 
 In Ihis sense it is a synonym of the preposition contra and of the expression 
 e regibne with a genitive, as: Mons adversus Tarcntam (or contra Tarentum., 
 or e regibne Tarenti), a mountain opposite (over against) Tarent. AVhen it 
 answers to the question " ^/i/</i^r" in a heal sense, it expresses direction 
 toward and is then a synonvm o^ versus, or if! connection with the idea of 
 HOSTILITY, and is then a synonym o^ contra; as Jwstes adversus Jtucium (or 
 ad Jluviunl versus, or Jtuvium versus) iter faciunt, the enemies march toward 
 the river. Quinctius dictator adversus Qalliam {contra Qalliam) missus est, 
 the dictator Quinctius was sent against Gaul. , , , 
 
 Rem. 10. Adversus in internal relations is either translated by agaimt 
 or toicard. It is employed 1) in hostile directions, and is then equivalent 
 to contra and in, as : belluni adversus (or contra, or in) Jugurtliam gessit, he 
 wa<^ed a war against Jugurtha. 2) In indifferent or friendly relations it is a 
 sym)nyni of erga or in, as: Quonani modo me gererem adversus {m or erga) 
 Ca!sareni,nsus tuo consilio sum, I have made tise of thy advice, how I should 
 behave bocard Ciusar. Ob egregiam, fdem adversus {erga or in) populuni Ro- 
 mdnum, for his excellent faith toward the Roman people. 
 
 We generally employ contra, to express hostile relations, erga to express 
 friendly relations, and adversus to express indifferent relations. For the 
 dillerence from in, sec Hem. 72. 
 
 § 1*29. Ante (before) is used 1) in local relations, answer- 
 ing to both questions '' ichert'" and '' whither ^' as: Castra ante 
 oppidani j^osita, the camp, placed before the tow^n ; ante signa 
 progressus, having proceeded before the standards. 2) In rela- 
 tions of Time (question ''ichen''), as: ante h(ce?n, hcioiv day- 
 break; ante Socvatem, before (the time of) Socrates. 3) In 
 CoMPAKisox (more than), as: queni ante me diligo, whom I 
 love before myself (more than myself). 
 
 Rem. 17 The temporal preposition ante always implies a comparison 
 (^ 311 Hem. 10). Therefore it is construed with an ablative of difference, 
 lint it has then the force of an adverb. Faucis diebus ante, or paacis ant^ 
 diibus means: "a few days before". In this connection ante is chietly 
 used with expressions denoting the division of time (day, year, etc.), qual 
 itied bv numerals, as : Voverat earn statuam annis undecun ante h. A^m\- 
 bus Liv 40,52 ; ^Emilius had vowed this statue eleven years before {i. e. 
 
14 
 
 TRErOSITIONS. 
 
 to return, in the meanin2: to hrinr/ back or lead back), and then tlie prepo- 
 sition iul nuisl be used {obsiih.i ad rifjein mhn'it). 
 
 The verb mitlere usually is construed with (id, but it is found also with 
 the Dative, when the pkus^n, to whom something: is sent, is conceived as 
 the KECEiVEii, as: to send amha.ss((dorn to t/i£ king, leiratos ad regeni niilterc; 
 but: to .send a letti'r to the kind, litteras re(ji or ad rer/ein mittere. The verb 
 scribere may be construed with ad or the Dative, as: epixtolani ad f rat rem 
 or fratri acriberc? But here the Dative is more usual. The verb restituere 
 (to restore) is construed with ad or the Dative, " To restore u thing to a 
 perso/i" is expressed by rcKtitnere with the Dative of the receiver (as: 
 librum fratri restituere); but " to restore something to 'A former .state'' is ex- 
 pressed by restituere with the i^reposition ///, or by rediyere with the prep- 
 osition ad (in bonorem restituere, in patriam restituere, discipllnam ad 
 pristinos mores redigere). 
 
 The verbs i^nvferre and anteponere (to prefer), althougli ferre and ponere 
 oriiiinally denote i.ocal relations, nevertheless are eonstrueil with the 
 Dative cmly, since the one that prefers something to another thing is not 
 conceived Tis bringing it to, but before the preferred thing. 
 
 Verbs, which originally denote or imply ii local direction, generally 
 are construed with ad, and not with the Dative, even when the relation is 
 FiGUiiATivE. Thus the verbs roedre, recordre, redncere, addticere, referre, 
 redigere, conferre, deferre, aceedere^ periinere, attinere must be construed 
 with ad, as: AWpieni ad sanitateni revoedre, to recall somebody to reason; 
 aliqueni ad bell u in indncere, to induce somebody to a war; ad Hendtuni 
 referre, to report to the Senate; hoc ad me pertinet or attinef, this concerns 
 ine (literally : it pertains to me). Accedere ad aliquid properly means '' to go 
 near to somcthinn',' and tropically: to be added to something, as: Accedit ad 
 hoc. It is added to this"" (it nuist be added to this, that, etc.) II'H- mnltnm ad 
 dignitidem confert, this contributes much to dignity. AV'e sometimes express 
 ad in such relaticms by other prepositions than io, as; Sunimiim imjHrium, 
 (nl (diqneni deferre or transferre, to confer or transfer the command on some- 
 l)ody (but deferre is also eonstrueil with the dative). 
 
 Bern. 12. The prei>osition to before names of Countiues is tran.slated by 
 in, not by ad. Before Places in general, ad expresses, that the aim of a 
 moti(m rather is to a point near a place, than to the i)lace it^i'lf; as ad 
 jiurinm, ad littus ire, to go to a river, to the sea-shore; ad urbem, to a i)lace 
 before a city, but in urbem to the city itself. For this nice distinction of 
 the Latin language, which generally is disregarded in English, sec § 450 
 and Rem. 70. 
 
 Bern. 13. The preposition ad freipiently is used, to cypress 1) the idea 
 according to (see the prepositions stcundinn, e.v, pro), 2) the idea up to^ teen 
 to. In both instances ad corresponds to its original meaning ne<(r to, ap- 
 pi'oaching to, as: Ad volttntatem {nuium) alicujus loqui, to si)eak according to 
 somebody's will (hint) ; ad hunc modum, in this way, after this manner (ac- 
 cording to this fashion); gaem ad mod'/ni {qnenuulmodnm), how, according 
 to whid manner. Ad necem aliqueni civdere, to strike some one to death 
 (even to death, up to death); ad mille homines, about 1000 men, as many as 
 1000 men (a synonym of circitery ^ 400). 
 
 1 Librum ad aliquem ttcribcre means: To dedicate a book to poiuebodv. Librum aliciii 
 scribtre would mean: To write a hnok for »oinehoi\y. —EpMolam ad aliquem dare,= 
 to send a letter to Honiehody; ej). alicni aar^,=:to «rive somebody a letter. 
 
 2 Generally traubhitod by "the iiuperaiivc scuteucc: Add to ihb, that, etc. Sec p. 022, 1. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 K 
 
 Pf?n 14 InioMS —Ad tempvft ha? three meanings : 1^ in time (at the right time> ; 2) for 
 a tune • :h aceording to time (and circumstances^). Ad r6r6?mi. verbatim, word for word. 
 _ .1,/ an,nim next ycnv.-Ad extrhnum. at last.-.l^ diem, ad horam, at the (apnointed) 
 daV or hour.-vi^^ wiuui omnes. all without exception.-.l(/ suinniani, on the whole.-iToc 
 liiJiil Oil me. tliis does not concern mn.-NikU ad Ciceronem est, he is nothing m com- 
 parit^on with Cicero. 
 
 § 4S8. Adcersus {adverswn) means 1) oj^^osite to (over 
 ao-ainst) ; 2) toward or against in local and internal relations, 
 in a hostile, indifferent, or even friendly sense. 
 
 Rem 15 Adrersus in a local sense answers either to the question " where'' 
 or to " whither." When it answers to the question " where " it means oppo- 
 site over against, indicating a situation, as compared with another situation. 
 In this sense it is a synonym of the preposition contra and ot the expression 
 e regidne with a genitive, as: Mons adversus Tarcntum (or c^mtra Tarentum., 
 or e reqivne Tarenii), a mountain opposite (over against) Tarent. When it 
 answers to the question " whither" in a load sense, it expresses dir.v.iion 
 toward and is then a synonvm of versus, or if! connection with the idea ot 
 HOSTILITY and is then a synonym of (-^/i^m; sls Imtes adcersus Jlumini (or 
 ad Jluiiunl versu.'*, ovjluviuni versu.s) iter faciunt, the enemies march toward 
 the river. Quinctius dictdtor adcersus Galliam {contra Qalham) missus est, 
 the dictator Quinctius was sent against Gaul. , . , ^ 
 
 Rem IG Adveksus in internal relations is either translated by agaiiut 
 or toicard It is employed 1) in hostile directions, and is then equivalent 
 to contra and in, as : belluni adcersus (or contra, or in) JugurtMm gessit, lie 
 wa"-ed a war again.st Jugurtha. 2) In indifferent or friendly relations it is a 
 vviumviu of erga or in, as: Quonani modo me gerereni adcersus {m or erga) 
 CiL^areni ii.vis tuo consilio .sum, I have made use of thy advice, how 1 should 
 behave toward Ciesar. Ob egregiani fidem adcersus {erga or in)populuni Ro- 
 mdnuni, for his excellent faith toward the Roman people. 
 
 We qenerallq emplov amtra, to express hostile relations, erga to express 
 friendly relations, and adcersus to express indilferent relations. 1? or the 
 diHerence from in, see Rem. 72. 
 
 § 4»20. A)ite (before) is used I) in local relations, answer- 
 ing to both questions ''where'' and '' ichlther,'' as: Castra ante 
 oppidum 2yoslta, the camp, placed before the town ; ante signa 
 progressKS, having proceeded before the standards. 2) In rela- 
 tions of Time (question "iMc;i"), as: ante hicem,hcihiii day- 
 break; ante Socratem, before (the time of) Socrates. 3) In 
 CoMPAKisox (more than), as: qucni ante me diligo, whom I 
 
 love before myself (more than myself). 
 
 Rem.M The temporal preposition ante always implies a conij-ianson 
 (^311 liem 10). Therefore it is construed with an ablative ot ditlerence, 
 b'lit it ha-s then the force of an adverb. Faucis diebus ante, or paucis ante 
 diibus means: "a few days before". In this connection ante 'S chiet^y 
 used with expressions denoting the division of time (day, year, etc.), qu.n 
 irted by numerals, as : Voverat earn statuam annis nndecim ante L. .±.mi- 
 lius Liv 40,52 ; .'Emilius had vowed this statue eleven years before {i. e. 
 
16 
 
 rRErosmoNS. 
 
 before the time spoken of, = ante id tempns). In such constructions, the 
 accusative beloni^ini; to ante is UNDKitsroon, ami ante i>asses over into 
 an ADVEiJB. iMore rarely ante takes such numeral expressions in the ac- 
 cusative, havins^ the force of a preposition proper. For the use of ante iu 
 rebxtions of tinie see p. 224, 10 ; p. 200, 3 ; p. 2:U, 2 ; p. 198. 
 
 "^4 few days earlier than, etc.," is translated eitlier b}' paucis ante diebtis 
 guam, or hy pauris diebuft prius (piam. The ])repositi()n before wills a verbal 
 noun in ing, and the conjunction'' before'^ are translated by the Latin con- 
 junctions anfequam (anteaquam) orpriu8qua7n,wh\c\i consist of the adverbs 
 ante and ;>/7</.'<, combined into one word with the comparative conjunction 
 qnam. Tiie English verbal noun in ing must then be resolved into a finite 
 clause, as: Cato\before leavinfj the citi/, wrote to C/^«?v^etc.,Cato priusquam 
 urbem relinqueret (or rellquit), scripsit ad Cicerunem, etc. 
 
 Rem. IS. " Before to-day " is not cxprossod by ante hiinc diem, but by prius giiam ho- 
 die. Before day is not expressed by ante diem. I)ut t)y: ante lucein. Ante diem means, 
 *' l)efore the proper time," "• prematurely." The expressions before all t/iin^.>\ before all 
 men, before the /^^n/, mean in «r preference, may be either rendered by aide omnia, (ajite 
 Ofnne/i,'anteceferos). or hy priiiiuni q[finiu/n, imprimis, or proicipue, or by pneter omnes, 
 prtettr ceteros (see § 43G}. 
 
 § 4«IO. Ajmd in local relations denotes at (near by), bnt it 
 is chiefly employed as tlie exponent of a relation, tor wiiich the 
 
 English language lias no adequate expression, and which may 
 be designated as the relation of teksoxs in a local sense. 
 In this sense apiid stands always before an object denoting 
 Persons, but indicates at the same time, that the action hap- 
 })ens at a place, to which the mentioned persons stand in a cer- 
 tain relation. In order to render this preposition into English, 
 we either use local expressions (in the house of, in the country 
 of, etc.), or we employ the prepositions among^ icith, hy^ before^ 
 i)K accordinir to the connection between the Persons and the in- 
 dicated Place, as : Ajmd 2)Cftrem/ui,l]m\Q been in the house 
 of (with) my father. Ajnid Gallos mos est, it is customary with 
 the Gauls (or among the Gauls, in the country of the Gauls, in 
 Gaul). Manllum apud popidiun accusdvlt, he accused ]Manlius 
 before the people (at the place, where the people assembles). 
 
 Hem. 10. Apud before the name of a Pl.\ce is translated by near, at, by, 
 and is then a synonym of ad in its second local siguilication, as : Apud 
 Caudium pufjnaverunt, they fought at (near) Caudium. Apud in this sense 
 chieliy is used before names of cities (villat;es) and islands, while the prepo- 
 sition ad has ii. general application. Expressions iis : apud Jluvium, apud 
 mare, apud horturn in correct language are unusual, while such expressions 
 as apud Cannas, apud Acliuni, apud IjCucades insnla.'i are frequently met 
 with. For the distinction from prope, propter, juxta and circa see ^ 437, U. 
 42. For the translation of the English preposition at, denotin<; in, sec 
 § 4o3, 11. 75. 
 
 PRErOSITIONS. 
 
 17 
 
 Fern. 20. The translation of apud before Person^i often is difficult and 
 awkward, since we generally cannot reach the full meaninir, which the 
 Latin connects with this preposition. We must distinguish iiere the dif- 
 ferent relations of the mentioned Persons to the implied place. 
 
 1) When the owner of the place is meant, we use the preposition with, 
 or at with a Possessive Case, or the expressions " in the house of," " in the 
 place of," as : Achilles apud Chirdneni educdtus est, Achilles was brought 
 up in the house of Chiron. Jleti apud pairem cwfidvi, Yesterday I dined at 
 my father's, with my father (merely in t/te company of my father would be : 
 cum pat re meo, see ^ 44G). Apud me comniordtur,' he stays with me, in my 
 house, in my i)lace, in my room. 
 
 2) When the Inhabitants of a country or city are meant, we some- 
 times emi)loy the preposition among (but see ^ 432, R. 25), sometimes tcith, 
 or the expressions in the c^mntry of in the city of or we substitute the name 
 of the country, district or city with the preposition in, as: Hoc apud Ger- 
 manos minus toltrabdtur, this was less tolerated among the Germans, with 
 the Germans or in Germany} Prior horuni apud Mamigctes in j^mlio ceci- 
 dit, Nep. Peg. 1, the former of these fell in battle in the country of the 
 Massagetes. Apud Massilieiises respublica a dclectis administrdtur. With the 
 ]\Iassilians (or in the city of the 3Iassilians, in 3Iassilia) the government is 
 administered by selectmen. Sometimes apud betbre names of nations has 
 the meaning of a Passive Agent, when an action is represented as being 
 done by a whole nation, especially in regular periods, as : Apud u^gyptios 
 falci/jus metitur, Py the Egyptians harvesting is done by means of sickles. 
 For the distinction of apud with inter and in see Pein. 70. 77. 
 
 3) Sometimes by apud the regular incumbents or occupants of certain 
 public places are indicated, for instance the whole people in regard to 
 the regular places of their assemblies, the judges in regard to the forum 
 or the coun-house, the Senate in regard to the Senate-hall, the soldiers in 
 regard to their i)laces of assembly in the camp. Here we use the prepo- 
 sition ''before'' (where ante, % 421), would not be at its place), as: Ajmd 
 ])lebem verba facere, to speak before the people (in a public place, where 
 they assemble for this piu-pose) ; apud Judices {senatum) causam dicere, to 
 plead one's cause before the judges (the Senate) ; apud miiites conciondri, 
 to deliver a speech befoi-e the soldiers (to harangue the soldiers). 
 
 4) Often by apud the author in regard to his work (a passage in an au- 
 thor) is indicated. Here we use the i)reposition in, as : Jioc apud Cicerdneni 
 Ugi, 1 have rcail this in Cicero {in Cicerone would be a barbarous Latin). 
 
 Jt^m. 21. This relation is figuratively transferred from a real to an 
 IDEAL place. We use then the prepositions ti^ith, among, or by. Thus 
 apud is frequently connected with maJOres, as : Hoc nunquam apud majores 
 nostras factum est, This never happened with our forefathers, or this was 
 never done by our tbrelathers. Apud viros bonos gratiam consecuti sumus, 
 AV'e have found favor with good men. Here all good men are conceived 
 as belonging to one common, ideal place (the abode of the good). Thus 
 nuist be explained the expression apud exercitum esse, to be in the arm}-, 
 which is used of soldiers, belonging to the arinj^ 
 
 Ron. 22. Apud in this sense also is used in connection Avith verbs of 
 MOTION, and must then be translated by to and a possessive case, as : apud 
 
 > The Latin would not use m this conucction the expregsion in Germania, by which 
 the country as such, the land U des^iijnated. 
 
Vj 
 
 TEEPOSITIONS. 
 
 patreni vie contiiU, I wont to my father's (to the house of my father) ; but 
 ad patrem me contuli, 1 went to my lather. 
 
 § 1?ll . Circiim or clrca^ both meaning around or about, are 
 
 used ill rcterences to places, as : ^wbes circa {clrcum) Cajyuam, 
 
 the cities around (about) Capua. Circa (not circum) is used 
 
 of uncertain time, as: circa eandeni horam, about the same 
 
 hour. 
 
 Ilejn. 2:}. Both circum and circa mean 1) being or goini? around some- 
 thhi'^ (wh(jlly or j^artiallv) as : Plenum est forum, plena templa ci-rca forum, 
 Cic. Cat. 4, 7, 14, The forum is full, full are the temples around (surround- 
 uyA the forum. ' Terra circum axem se summd celeritdte convertif, The earth 
 turns upon its axis with the ixreatest rapidity.— 2) Both prepositions are 
 used of Peiisons, that surround somebody as attendants or triends, as : Ke 
 m trccentos jucenes inermls circa se habebaf, Liv. 20, 1, 3, Of these he had 
 300 unarmed younj]^ men about him (around his person).— 3) lioth prepo- 
 sitions are used of an uncertain place in the neiii;hl)orho()d of some locality 
 {some/rhere a/)out),aii: Ceferuni(f/o aut ad te confrani jne,aut etiam nunc 
 circum ha>e loca commomhor, For the rest I shall either come to thee, or shall 
 still Ioniser stay somewhere about this neighborhood. 
 
 Rem 21. In rojrnrd to time, rirca (not circum) is u-^cd (first by Livy) to desiirnatc a point 
 of time at whicli an action liapp.-iis, without voiichins; for exa'tni'!=s ( = ahont) : (Urea 
 eandem. hnram rox copiasadmOvit ; .l/yo?// ^/i<;.«rt/Aif//0'//- tin- kinir l>ronuMit his troops aion^. 
 Liv 42, .57. — In the samt? tien*e circlter occurs us ^cnii-preposition with the dcsiirnatum 
 of time in the accits.vtive : Cirrifer meridiem exerciuim in ca^tra n-dnxit ; Afjo>/f voon 
 he took the army hack to the camp. C:e^. B. G. 1,4!>. In Cicero it thus occurs only in 
 epistohiry stvle : Scriptimi erat, te in EpTruni itflrum circifer h'a/enda.'< .SexlUes ; 1 hat you 
 would tro to Epirus arK)ut the fird of July. Cic. Att. 5. IS, 1 (Com]). Cic. tarn. 14 5. 2 ; II). 
 15 .3 t») —Circifer is also used as pakticlk in reirard to 'NTMBEn (I*. I. p. VU'*, ^ 4(K)) : 
 Circifer parte tertia in oppiUo retenfa ; About the third part bein-: retained in the town. 
 CsB» B G 2,32. When thus referrini? to numerical relations of ti.me, the desiiination 
 of time retains the Mine case it would have without circiter : JAes- circUer (j>nii(tenm 
 iter fec7rvnt : They marched about filteen davs. Cjes. B. G. 1, 5. liedito tinr nrnfer men- 
 die '; Return here about uoou. Piaut. Most. 3, 1, 52. For circa, circum, and cirater as local 
 adverbs, see p. 21!). . , , 
 
 Later writers use the preposition circa of internal relations, with the nioaninj? concerrv- 
 i)Hf ni^ pxtAica circa fjon as a rtl^- socorU la. the public indiirer(;ncc about (concermu-) the 
 liberal arts. Tac. Ann. 11, 15. Thi8 use commouces with Ciumtihan. 
 
 § i:t*3. Inter 1) in local kelatiox means t/i the midst of, 
 heticem or amonr/ places, things or persons, as: inter Felium et 
 (hsam, between rdion and Ossa ; inter saucios relictns, left l)e- 
 hind among the wounded. 2) In relations of Time it means 
 during, within, in the course of, as : inter duos annos, during 
 (within, in tlie course of) two years. 3) It expresses Diffeu- 
 ENCE between two or more persons or things, as : Discr'imen in- 
 ter fortls et temerarios, the difterence between brave and fool- 
 hardy men. Nihil interest inter vos et me, there is no difterence 
 between you and me, 4) It is used in connection with the plu- 
 
 } 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 1Q 
 
 ral of a reflexive pronoun as tlie exponent of the eecipkocal 
 iielatiox, meaning each other, one another, as : Inter nos diffe- 
 rinius, we dift*er one from anotlier ; inter se pugnant, they fight 
 with each other ; inter se aniant, they love each other. 
 
 mm. 25. The Latin has for both of our prepositions beticeen and a?n<??w 
 oily one Avord, tnt^^r. When inter stands before Personal nouns in the 
 pluial, and is translated by anwng, it is a synonym of apud (Kern. 20) 
 i hus instead ot apud GaUo,'< ?noM erat, we may also say inter Gallos moserat. 
 IJut by apud we designate the Gauls in t/u'ir own country, which relation is 
 disregarded with mfc'/-, althou-h both expressions may actually mean the 
 same thing. AV hen I say, Inter Oallos eram, I mean, that I was amonn- 
 Uaus perhaps m Rome or at anyplace within or without Gaul. Bui 
 apud ballot cram means, that I was in Gaal it,Hclf Thus inter hodls means 
 among the enemy, among i^L^s in general" (at whatever place), but " auud 
 lostm means, among the enemy at their regular station. 
 
 A peculiar idiom is " inter falearioH'' (among the scythe-makers) ; " inter 
 hynarim (among the carpenters), meaning the quarter of the citv where 
 the persons belonging to this trade, lived.^ Apud %/^a/-^^, etc. would 
 mejiu in the houiics ot ihe cari)enters, etc. , , *> vi 
 
 Item. 2G. The preposition inter in the tempohal relation, denotes either 
 a 1 ERioi) ot tune, irtthtn which an action happens, or accompanvintr cir- 
 cumstances, which hapi)ened at the same time with the action. "wS ex- 
 press the latter relation sometimes by amid ; as : Omnia quce inter decern 
 annos nefmeflurjitio.yquefacta sunt, Everything, that has been done crim- 
 inally and disgracelully icit/tin {during, in the course of) ten years Cic 
 Verr. 1, 13. llae inter cmiam Tirdni dictdri, I have dictated this to Tiro 
 during dinner, tie. Qu. frat. 3, 1, ({. For the dillerence of inter ii^mpus 
 2)er tempus, and in tempore, see Uem. 33 and Kern. 7U. Here belon"-s the 
 adverb interea (lornied from inter and the adverb eu), which is uSed to 
 connect sentences, and translated by: " I,i tJis mean while." 
 
 Hem. 27. To the idea of diffeuence, belongs also the idea of distinc- 
 tion an(lPKKKEUENCE which is exi)resse(l by inter in a meaning similar 
 to that ot the Partitive Genitive after Sui>erlalives (^ 375), as : In oratorihus 
 vera adnuvabile est, fjuantum inter ornnes unus excellat. But in rcrard to the 
 orators, it is remarkable, how much one is distinguished amo'lig (before) 
 all. Lie. Oral. 2, G. o \ j 
 
 lieni. 28. The reciprocal relation'-' in Latin is generally expressed by the 
 preposition inter before a Pluual iieflexive pkonoun (of any person) 
 whatever may be the En{jli,sh prei)osition by which the reciprocal pron<.uii 
 •^a^h other is introduced, as: Inter nos pufjnanius, we tight afjainst each 
 -other; inter vos dijidifi.^, you distrust each other; int<^r se distant, they are 
 (.hshmijj-om each other; inter .se connubium habent, they (tor inst raies or 
 iiation^i) have int ermarriage icith each other ; inter se obtrectant, they slan- 
 
 "i,'^^^^'''^-""-*"'^,'" ■ aiialo-y we mi-ht call the .^o-called Swamp in the City of N.-w York 
 ^VaaJh^''''"' "'"""° '"""^ i^-ather-dcaler., and Wall-.troct or Exchan^je Place i^/^; 
 
 •■* Uianiniatically considered the reciprocal relation is a REFLExrv'E relation with more 
 Virf U 'ih^'V'^- ^" ^"•'\ '-^'lii."""* ».»'« "l>J^'^ts and subject, are idem cal, Zl eadiT^ 
 <!f» .•, ^^'% l^^Tl^J'iner and i^utiere^ of the action, x;xpre^>.ed by the prediiire But thS 
 in?hi'^' '"'"'*'" '" ^^'^ I'Kcii-RocAL relutiou only to the agukegatk of tL tubjVct^ vhi e 
 ia the REFLEXIVE relation the identity of performiu- and surtcrin^- is iadiiiduil.' 
 
20 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 m 
 
 der each other: infer se c^mciUanUn\ they are reeoncik'd to each otl a , 
 internet mint they are afraid of each other; colh:. proinnqni inUr se 
 hilK near ^; c'lch oUier ; ha^c interne confine ntur, these things are depend- 
 
 aie the tii>t twu words of an ancient law, probably the lex Conielia Ue bicanu.) 
 
 § 43:1. O^, as to its local meaning, is in classical prose con- 
 fined to • ub oculos' (before one's eyes), and ob viam (on the way). 
 It generally denotes cause, as a synonym of i:>ro/>^cT (for), 
 
 7?^m qi Alimiid Ob oculof> hahTre.^Xo have soinothintr before one's cyeg; aliquidob 
 o^;Vo?r.r;r/tr vomethin.^ one'« eye.. Ob viam (or obrUnn), in connectmu 
 
 ^ tvX ormonon,l rendered ' to ;7t..r, and construed witb a "^T^^-'^-^f ^;''^ [[^/ '^; 
 riiir/ireinre vtvficUci, fleri)^' to <co to meet ', or ' to meet 8oinel)ody.-0j>. ni the u- 
 fati on of cvu;ris d.Utiy n>*.'.l with rem orm'/>//m, preceded hy n fonn-adjecttve : Ob 
 lim V«L) m/^ r m/S (alr^o 06 i.Z)- therefore ifron^ that reason) ; fj>mm ob caumm = 
 rwh?(^f 'vt'n wherefor, whv. Qu<on ob /..M.often wri.teu in -e -ord) 1. f^^eqnen - 
 r n«5,.d for connectin.' periods, witii the force o{t(ngue (p. 180, /i'.40; Or.s. 4, P- •^-l'^^_^''^- 
 i Oh is nW< ^i '«V T) of rruposK with a meanin- nmilar to ud, denoting ixfuturecoi- 
 ^{Teraiol for vvhich o v ew ,.f which, something i:. done or -iven It is thus chiel y 
 
 S ibs-i;£i^!.;;^Aif-^^^^^^ 
 
 o^othirBeS^ (a/a .ynomy.n of/,ro), with reference to ^/'«/'ll!;';^ '^.^ '^ y," 
 
 ment! noi tMntf.m ob pecaniam.eA eiob ^namommmv^m^dan ^^^^l^^^^^^^^ 
 7,'>.-A-er oppo^^itn'^^t pi-nori decern ob mtvas. Ter. Phoim.4, .i b .-3) 'Yn^f 00 u nstu 
 fi'niratively ot' requitements for former actions (as ^ynonym ot P\o), hi < "«- ^ «"^^ 
 rm in rcmpublicim pertnlimn^*; what we have ^»n;''-e^W'>r our love to t e repnbl.c^ 
 Pic Or 3 4 -CapiteanqnisU.iin ob rem malp ge^fam (for an unsuccesslnl war) Liv »,.ii. 
 :^Er?o nretinm S;.^/^^?/i«^ fcro. Ter. Andr.3,5 4 -4) ^^^ ^^'^"^ l^l^^^^^^^J^^;}!^ 
 frtMiueiitlv in po-tclassical lanirua-e. 06 is used ol motive^ or <)f cau^e y^rwi'/a 7 «1«' 
 ; the • nction • ItomVi us al) Amulio of, labefactandi re-ni tlmorem (fromjear of l»»'' S »»^ 
 t»?n>ne. aHibl^im expAMi jnssus est. Cic. Uep. 3, 3.-Nec meliOres ob earn scuniiam, nee 
 beatir>" c pos^umus. lb. 1, 19. 
 
 g I :i I . rer denotes l) in local kelatioxs a motion tliroiigli 
 space (through, throughout, over, by), or through things 
 (through), as: i>6r x>^'OV inciarn ire, to go through the province; 
 per agros vagari, to roam over the fields; per hanc viam, by 
 this way ; i^er corpus j^enctrarc, to penetrate tlirough (pierce) 
 the body ; ^:>er totitm orbem, throughout the whole earth. 2) de- 
 ferring to Time it denotes during, throughout, as : i^cr cos dies, 
 during (throughout) these days. 3) In internal relations it de- 
 notes'lNSTRUMENTALiTY and MEANS (througli, by, by means of), 
 
 ^^' per procuratdres anere to icf hv o«.^r,fc 
 
 mittPrP tn inf r. ^ i*^. , ^ ^^"^^ ' i^^^ mamis se de- 
 
 mutcre, to let one's self down by (by means of) his hands 
 
 our province. J3iU J^^rirL tt^t '^^ ^^^ ^^"^'"' ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^'^^'omjh 
 
 der ocer liekls ^c"r nfomZn!;' HrZ ""' ''''^"'' ''-^ ''''^''^ ^o roam or wan- 
 Tlie enemies intS^f tl " w f^n.ntT ^''' ^nunitiones d<jicere infenderunt, 
 G. 3, 2«. Tlie Ei^^l h iS^ '^' fortmcations. C\ts. b! 
 
 be rendered by its re-ada r /w^^ '^ 1 "'T'^ ,"' ^^^'« ^^'^«^^ ^""st not 
 
 " A^7/^r ;/^;i/ ° ^' «-quivalent supra, which always impUes the idea 
 
 ^yp'<^7^:iJ:^iS^^^^ ^^r^ ^^ -pressed either 
 
 a whole period we use nnilZ. L, * ■ '")• When an action occupies 
 " to walk dt?r ;>g tlie Xfc n ?hi •" l.i^''- T '"• f'' "^^"^ «'"*"«,•. means 
 the walking ^^■rJZ^etu^n^^^^^^ '°"'««^-'. "-t 
 
 to UctrMusQuam istkuMi/J,^ IMitot ihe nisht. liege per (?»>« /«,. 
 negative senlenws th^.n^ h.nt? ™ '■<="'";«^"t« anin.um. Liv. 37, U.±la. 
 acUon happe'/e<I d ,rh.^ a n^nf r "'■"'•;""]• ''"" '' '''^■"'^l "'"' ^n 
 I>eriod, ^s: Nulla m pe/tk.evmuni^^Jv':!^'^;''/'-' '' '" ""^ /""'« "^ "'« 
 case was decided durin "ihree^^l.^ ^/ "'';'" «'"■'•''''''^«''' «^^^^ no 
 1,5.— Comivire r;«-™51- „ ■ ^ *•■«'-=' «^J^fept hy lier direction. Cic Verr 
 
 *5fi Tf f].« • V • . "^ "^^'^ under root dur no- 14 vear^ r>P« l-i n i 
 
 din-inir sonie time ortlH nl /'^^^^ ^"''^^^"'^^' ^"'''"^ t'^^se days {i.e. 
 
 ^^icilv Liv 30 "4 livi \v.lr^^ ''''^^'^° ^^^ ^^^^ ^"»^"1 c^*«ssed over to 
 ^rLno'^;^,,i^\!^^ centum naves in 
 
 A^m.o4 ^Mieuji;^/- denotes ixstkumentality and mw.^J -, • 
 iiym ot the ablative of mean^ lud ti.n lif. a mlans, it is a syno- 
 
 active construction tlie al^ ati^-e of m in. ,^.f ^'*i,^«^^^^T (§ 131). lu the 
 with about tlie same force arthenruf^T;: '' ^^ denotes tiilxgs, is used 
 and rem j^r anna obtZ^re hlyc nlb^^^!^Z ^'"'- ^^'\f ''"^^ ""'"'^ "^^'^^^ 
 i.s done by a pekson tl r\W iti vo rl^n "^^'^T,"^' ^"^ ^^'^^^'« somethin- 
 iu the active con^ruc onT i iL^^^^^^^^^ the passive, and without ab 
 
 per. Tlie ablative wi[h «^ Is tl c h> dc 1 '^^^^^^^^^^ preposition 
 
 own name, while per desi-'na s th'e dor r n "^ t ' ''^'' '^"^? ^^^^ ^^^^^" ^^ ^^^^ 
 
 (not « W.4) ,}itUuZr m-'^S 
 
 r^^^:^S:^^^^'if^!^,^^^ But onen doubts 
 
 r.te« ^^enerally are Performed b> tlfrm^^^^^^ ^he.e .acred 
 
 caii.e the wou.eii perforin tiie rites thk>.4lh«^^^^^ "^'''^ ^^" i==' "sed, be- 
 
 reli-ious community. Tlie ablative hi I^oVirv A'" V''' "'''"^ «^ ^he priests and the 
 SON, i^ employed when there i" no ribu inn 'ff^'^"^- coustruction, when it denotes a per- 
 
22 
 
 riiErosiTioNS. 
 
 ^-^"^- -o M.M Thm-fi 110 Mfction at is allowofl throncrh me} : per Jo- 
 
 Rem.^. lDioM^-^e!*"',^^''^^Vwi?/,Lnaot-^^^^^^ per litt^-nis. ly writing : per 
 
 colhxjuinm, by uor-d oj nmith 1 «• />- 1^^^^- Cfovre, h„mdin force ; i)er otium. ln.^ur.u; 
 
 ,neans /.c/u«<7, in answer to the qnostiou "^vhoI■c" or "jh.tlu , 
 
 crucem fixissont post «rbcm in via Ponipoja. C.c. ^ cu 5, GO, 
 ^^r Secuna^cnL^r. iter fccCruut, tl.cy marched along (along- 
 side') the sea. 2) Boih, post and ««c«»<?<"» are used wUh refe^ 
 once to local oudku and to u.nk, and are then translated by 
 X or ne.t to, as: Qucaulo post vocCden. lo.,n>n una sc,uU,n 
 cZonans when one consonant follows after a long vowel, 
 r le 2 ^' 13. Secundunx consoles auctoritate pho-unum ,»-«,- 
 S^i^'.«^ ^1/'- (ne^ct to) the Consuls, the Praetors had the 
 is r ntho'rit,-: 3 In relations of Tim. both post and secur. 
 ;,« mean «/^.. bnt with the dirterence, that secundum ind.eates 
 1 i,nnudlJe su'ecession {ne^t to, dWectly after, upou), as : been. - 
 dum con.itia, directs, after the elections; '^^^-"^^^)^;^^ 
 mortem vpon Alexander's death. Janus b.s post not sccuu- 
 moium, iijxjn ^ f :*» Tiv ; 10 4') F "uratively 
 
 dum) Xunue regnum elausus fuit. Ln. 1. 19- V 'Jr „ ^ 
 secindum is used in the n.eaning " n> accordance Mth, oppo 
 :^Z contra, as: secundum nataram or secundum le<je. ...ere, 
 to live in accordance with nature, with the laws. • 
 
 «.;ilttis nSr~^i-nV4s..^^^ lan.u..e o„,y. 
 
 of difiVrcnce (§ :ill, K. 10) an. ""^ "^' J«;. ^t* n any, etc.) days uficr. 
 
 \ , 
 
 3 The ten\ple of Janus was t\\ ice tlosui aiitr luc ^ 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 23 
 
 § 436. 7V*to- 1) i„ its LOCAL signification denotes a motion 
 past or iy some jd.ace (past, hy, alon,j), as : prmter castra C<^ 
 saru coinas trcmsdu,it, he led his troops past (by) Cesar's 
 camp. C«s. ], G. 1, 48. 2) Figuratively it A.no J except or 
 im<fe,as: K*« a«^„«? ^«^0,«« prater iUum, exdemsane, 
 hhellum hbuisset scribere, Cic. Brut. 44, 103.' Amlcum ex con- 
 sulanbus neminem tibi esse video, pr.^ter Hortensium et Lucul- 
 lam, C.c. Fam. ], 5, 15.' 3) It is also used to express d.stixc- 
 Tiox w.th co>..pa.-ative force (like inter), especially i,, the 
 co..„cct.ons preHer ceteros, propter alios. It is then t.-anslated 
 by before- or " «Joi-e," as : Testis est Phalaris, cujus est, prater 
 cete.-os nobiUtata crudelitas. Cic. Off. 2, 7, 27.« 
 
 u^-i'il, wlieii «•«■«< introduces a CLtivral .,,,:./?;,'• ■'• '■, '• '^''« "a™" «dvfrb is 
 tliat. except ilWp. (ajT 2- 7-)'l-ll"l*he, ',.,°,.;, ?^'*'"* ''',"' *',"*'• V"l'rqnam «, except 
 «.7, and forms ii;i-„d;;.rb ',^.,^1:^ !i wui.!'' v f ^i'/.Mn'':.,'''';'' """"" """ ""^ "«verb 
 means: -btMtH tlw" or •4MV«"Viace,Th,.^L" if' '''"''"* "'"' sentences, and 
 
 kings of the sa,„e race! X^erxls aXhtf tttt^^V/xeSJ? \vcrK.°;". 'f """ """^ ""'''^ 
 fer'Sti^^befonTm^L-sSTei''''' "'^ """'^ ' ^"«*'- "*«"'• «i»»" usiai or cnstom ; ^^, 
 
 § 43r. P/'o/j^er, ^«-0^,«, J„a;?ff. i) i„ ,.^„^^.^ ^^ ^^^^^ ^.^,^_ 
 t.ons these th.-ee p.-epositio.is e.vpress nearness to a place Prone 
 generally .s t.-a.,slated by near, near by; propter by beside, bv 
 or on, a..d juxta by beside or ne.:t to; as : propter me, beside 
 by me; prope montem, near the mountain ; juxta muros, beside 
 or next to the walls. 2) In a figurative sense propter (not 
 2yroi,e or juxta) exp,-esses a Motive or Reason (for the sake of 
 on acco....t of, fo.-), as : Quod leyionem propter paucitalem 
 
 arri^ei (rrU7;raSi"^^''aSr' *"""" '^'^'^™'' '"^'^^ ^V» '"ter than he had' 
 ^l^«Ubed, that it had pleased AntoLius to write something «.rfto that really poor 
 
 «\\n-inri's7h'ri^»rs:^VrU^^^^ 
 
Q. PRErOSlTIO^S. 
 
 T • 1 +1.0 lo^rinn on accouiit ot 
 despiciehant, because they clesp.sed the k.^on 
 
 (for) its small number. Cies. li. ^. ^, • ^,,^erb,ana as a Pre- 
 
 vL 40 7>;-rt)i<' is used as a Particle (g 40U), as a ^ m,vcrns an 
 
 poft on I fa'mb.fal, «heUa-r /'/«^,'^..«^.^,,l';^'s-^oe Adverbs as well 
 Tec s ve, sUouUl not be «""^»';;;''"' ''^J \,ta .^ ,eciallv because the co.n- 
 1\ Adiectives may govern Objects (S ''•'.•f" ; A ;. r^gi) are, like /»■«;«', 
 
 a)nstruea with tl.e Acx-u>aln , as . ; ' .^ ^j^^ <^""''"'""V' ' i','»* 
 
 ?^:,l T.t the sixth luilosloue near my ^"'•'- .„V",,,„„e j'roite. propter, jurUi 
 these Tpos tions, by denoti.>S »» ««^;^ ^,'/ 't^'c closest pioximity. and 
 a cV,s\in,J;uisla.,l tV.Mn each o b^^ 
 
 the St tue of I'lato. 1''^ '''''ITnonVaoVmn ine,^-d pl«n. '«^<:";«„^ 
 i the neighborhood of ,as: t< """ ' ' , ,,,ar ine but altogether with me. 
 
 „ jStst; incident ^fX!^"::^'^^^^^^"^^ f-'lt-^fTnS 
 tions- vropterea quod, tor tUL ^^'^^J . ^^,,1,1^^1 iacommo(lnHitnHmAJ^\^^\ 
 
 ^i£^:i.:^:ii^^'^^^-^ ' - ^"^^" "' 7'": 
 
 -jj:;;^'\r ^c'i^ll^Jl^n of cause uK^tfre^uenay l^^^^:^^:J^;. 
 Ju'"s causa or f/m(i.', preceded by " ''"'''"J'as .°,miVi(te c-i«.« (or »';«- 
 !SoUve "g-ei_"S ji'>..Ji-^-™«StS>r"my sake; ...(m <«««., for 
 
 ^ollv correspond to their English equna "1== V» J c<v^,r exercdu,,,. 
 
 5 l!l.m\-«ii««<. the Helgiansl'V» «^^ ^;,^ '^^oss (over) the Garunma^ 
 
 /,■««.< (lariimmm duxU, Ctesai "' "'» /■ ; -j-hese are the first oulsuie 
 
 /Lit extra provincuwi trans {"'',';''"''!'/,',,,« /i,KS prori'/icto, wi hin 
 
 /wi li mt) the province across the «^! ; '"^\^ , j '1; ^n tl.c walls of (iny, 
 
 t e b udari.'s of the province. J>*''^,'"{- rfver runs below the city. 
 
 t V etc.) house. Flanas 'f';'' «'*''"■;;';, nho,-d. Ultra «>«., beyond 
 
 %imJmiOS unlls, l>cy'>"^l Jf /, £, hove (higher than) the valley. 
 
 (my, thy, etc.) strength _^«^ "J,^ ^' ' . ^ „^ ,,-^,,„-.„ «/,.f« //f i--'-^" 
 
 
 te.) strength. Supra vaium, auuv^ ^. ^^^^ ^^^^ 
 
 ^-- ^^S^Tai: EdSS^- '«uiscpte^t CWis miles, 
 
 <?/, at the dU 
 
 riiErosiTioNs. ^ ^. 
 
 f'Stri^oitrfe^^^ 
 
 ,ject 01 the sentence is a word denniw •,"■ ^' ^> ''**• When tlie sub 
 
 >s translated by with, as: r^ fXlfV""'' ^'^ >>"P'"«m, polestm)\enes 
 penum penes consules fuit "^'^'^ ^'"''"' '"^ ^'"^ conmls, Bummum C 
 
 erning noun or pronoun n" Utllu^ ?djective or genitive and its iov 
 ot^r InetKls may eorrespond^lo"tl.ti'"bene^11en'cet^4d'us""''^"^'^ '"""'^ 
 
 irom t'a^sar; ,rm «i a/lT """^ '''"*'■'*' ^o return 
 
 «om the city; «. «.^.W...4 f.^ "Ifh ^''^ "f "^ '"^^"* 
 ^v.c./a ^..v>/?«.c/, to dejiart from Z chv V .1' '"^ ^'•''• 
 
 8 zIJ« Ti => "°™ O'les (own) horse. 
 
 Ab is c.nployecl to ev-,>ress\ '" ^^*^'"- K^^atioxs. 
 
 »«V..,,* a Pl voE 3) • r T '"" ^ '^ 1-om a Peksox, 2) from 
 
 out, o. f -otn «^ii^^ Tl r'" " ''^""°" ^^■'^'^'- «-'» ^-ith- 
 moved is conce ved Totn V^-' ""' ''" ^'""^ ^'^ 1~ 
 
 Roth rfi ir ' "" '"«''"■ l''-'*«° 'o » lo«'er. 
 
 i>o 1 c^, a„d ^ ^^j,^^^^ ^,^^ .^j^_^ ^^ Selection or t.ktvp 
 
 i ^-;-"ong several objects, or from a Place " 
 
PRErOSITIONS. 
 
 \ Tho f()riTicr (Viiiti ot 
 scul, ,lnve. t.uw, ojc ) or .^ ^Zl''^^'^^^ "»^ *' " ^ ""^ ""- 
 rU-.":.'. ? KSr)t' «proi-a ..y ;'* •^>'>-\ ,,„. •„ expressed ..V .- (opP'-d 
 
 *s,m.l,oay iVo.u (out ..1) »t^^' ^L^'^S»» «-J^,,,,, ;,,, i,„„tj.; c<u« ««'«• 
 
 Uiirius Willi liiin. , , ,„„ ,„. „,•„,„ is oxpnssea \iy nh {oi>pospcl 
 
 a The kU-aof motion from a pi;»": <» " - '" j^.,',, .^^ ,..)ining ort'omg 
 
 from lie oiitsUlf of li.e olji'd. "^"i*: ';,^. 3^/,, iv,.ue „bu-e ..r <to«>- 
 
 o «111 n till- object of tbe 111 -non is ■' 1 "l':"tlT.\^.,.,.,,,,, o »« dmUlere, to 
 
 ,• to witliartnv from Cv^ar ^-^^^^^^]:, ^j,,, I co.no front l>on,- 
 
 semiitway a slave OVoni ones fl;,''''.T,,,NKSot-a place, as: ailnUna 
 
 n, v- llwlKMi ti.e motion comes Iron. '»^ "'^^''^^^^^^^^ ..b. besii-ea Mn.nia|; 
 
 rmfc r to .-elreat from MtUtna ^"^^J^'f,,,, «ben .be subject bas 
 nliZ^w re,are, to return Iron, lie '■'^'-; ,.^',' 're e tbe enemies from t be 
 bcW tie rivcT) ; ho.lU a m.>n. J"""':,; (; ,^\' :;,\v tlic iaea of dircctu,,, 
 
 . !llV f^ wben tbe autbor intenas to naicalt m > .^.j^ ^„„,„. 
 
 w' V f.' nrivlliont rej;ara .0. tlie "■^.j; ^^ '"•„:'; ,f. Tliis is espe- 
 
 sir,r :'i^:t4rw'i;::2?^ ^ „!:;:; tL . piace .. .bm. 
 
 i:;;t;;!sy is" Si^t of n^; ^"■<';''t,'-,-' art- I'lia" -bas n,^ "-.u-.i y- -i- 
 
 themouey66to//^stotUetica.uij.- inun y 
 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 27 
 
 ^> n":;^;:!':^:;^^!;^:^.;^,^^ - employment on a place. 
 
 the Ihnmi llici pronernHrr^A^^^^^^ ^''^^"'^ ''^'^ ^^^'^^"« considered 
 .e.,erallyc^xp;4!.^5 r^^^^^ 'potion from a plac^ is 
 
 Cics. H. C 1 18 ' ^uctetius et Attius de muuo *e dnectrunt. 
 
 o^'^^^'hi'^:;^^!^:^'^!^^^^ «--««x ana „.at 
 ««»V/««s m«V Cic Att 81 2 T 1,7™ 5.f''^•••?f '"''*''''* '"'''■'""' '«'«''o 
 
 rL.s±t. .^" Sri -1 ^t- - -' Srri&r!? 
 
 (el.her .me's sein or othersl "'"^^^ "^'' "'' ""= '"'=' °*" "^'"«■"NG 
 
 notby *tl'L"''?,f;i;i''t"'"= ;*" 1''" P'-'^PO^ition/.../^, is expressed by«i 
 
 bus ipX,„^! t,;,l!Lj Cfe';<«'- >«<««/»«, ^™m<; <i;,i«^ « ,u>stri., niilli- 
 ;)«.»««« j«a(„«;. ^« ^iy.nt^ „4^^_ (,jg^ jj (, 1 4j'jj^ ^^.^ iuformea, 
 
 (hi^r^t^f—rr..^.. .,.:., .''y'":*rL\ ** (nejufroire profubuent, noii ex eo, ^-«erf ab eoloconie 
 
 dejectus est Lepidtisf Ab wr6^. 
 
 ""II lauu?, Willie m tj, u. 1 44 ho a<;ksi n.,>cn,. t,» ,.,uC i v---- .^^^ ^^^ ««iu, iruiu meir 
 d<) his regionibus, from thok^ rt'^U;n^whi%i wpL .i^."^^ (^/ft/^m-e) his army ex (not 
 (Cic. Prov. Con.. 12, -9) Bx^dderiuerTde)^^^^^^^ r^^'^'J' ^^^^'ocare de provincia 
 
 PonK'body from his mvn pn)viS whkh h^^nvo^^^^^^^ ^^ "''''''"'^ *« '"''^^" «^ expel 
 
 atumvlo from a liiJl which fovh^Hton?^ ^m™'' -^l^^llie general calls his soldiers 
 iiUquem de aqro Z (Cic Qnincr 6^ fmTfo !?r?v^ occupied. Liv. 4, 39. Thus detrudire 
 ' In several phrases the^mno^■fi^,;^;i l^ f^-'ve somebody from his own land. 
 
 are omitted, ailcl the me?e AblSave is u/?d w[ h fh '1^^ ?^-^^'" ^'^•^^^ ^^^'•««^ 
 must be learned bv nninH/2 n^wl i "t®?..^V" ^^"^.^^^.^^P^ a Preposition. These 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 thnt the troops of Ariovistns wore 24,000 paces distant from our troops 
 2) Bv the AccusvrivK of Place (see p. 220,2), as: Ah his castnsBibrax 
 oppidn,ri ahcrat mWW'A pa.^sauni odo, Ca^s. B. G. 2, G3 The town BiDrax 
 was 8,000 paces distant from this camp. 3) By Adverbs, as : vroctd, longe, 
 multam or multo, prope. (See p. 220, 7.) 
 
 Bern 47 When the relation of distance is not exprcsped hy the verbs disfare or abesi^e 
 thblmonnt of "listance may be expressed hy the preposition a/> with the abhilive, Nvhih 
 premSu n n u.t then be translated by -atthe distance o/," as : IfA qnum a ^'t'*^^"'»* 
 /mi;lo!«l'i/>^« contra ix>suisset, Li v. 24, IG, Wheu he hud erected there a camp at a diMance 
 of about 501) paces. 
 
 § 441. Diiforence of ab, ex and de in figurative meanings. 
 Ab is employed troi)ically to denote 1) tlie idea of Oiuciix and 
 Source from Tersons; 2) the idea of Difference; 3) the 
 idea of Separatiox and Keeping off.— ^'^ expresses the idea 
 of SOURCE and derivation from Things ; and both ex and de 
 express the idea of selection and taking away. 
 
 Rem 48 When tlie Origin, from which somcthin.c^ is derived, is a per- 
 son froin is expressed bv a^ ; when it is a Thing or a Place by ex as : 
 OHqlnem a dis ducere or tra/iere, to derive one's ori.unn Irom the iroils ; a 
 te nulla injuria orta eM, from thee no injury has come. But: nomen ex 
 alinua re ducere or traiiere, to derive one a name from Honiething; nomeii ex 
 loco aliquo vel re capere, to receive (get) one's name from a place or t/nnr/. 
 Here belon.^ the verbs of beginning (starting from some pomt), which arc 
 construed with ab' (in EngUsh with from or which), as incij)ere,ordiri, tui- 
 Hum or principium ducere, initium repetere, as : .1 principio incipere or rem 
 a vrincimo reikfereAo commence from the beginning ; a Q^'f' re jmttmmnm 
 ordiar ? from (with) which matter shall I chietly begin ? Aliquidab ultima 
 antiquitate repetere, to derive sometliing trom the earliest antiquity (mean- 
 in"- • to be<nn in some subject from the earliest antiquity).— V erbs denoting 
 a RECEIVING from or <>/ somebody (aceiperc), an obtaining (^//i;Wn//y% 
 conseqmXov buying {emere, mercdri) are likewise construed with ab as: 
 vecuniam ab aliquo accij)ere, to receive money from (of) somahody ;aliqu id 
 a Ccesare impetrdre, to ohUun something from (of) C«sar ; aliquid a pos- 
 semre emere, to buy something from (of) the owner. The source, Irom 
 which something is derived is also designated by the verbs ot demanding 
 (askin*-- of or from), poscere, pjdaldre, ]kiere, as: aliquid ab am icopoMcere, 
 postuldre or petere, to demand, ask something from (of) a friend. All these 
 verbs are construed with ab. Verbs, wliich express a learning and as- 
 certaining from somebody or something {c^gnoscere, audirc anil acciperc) 
 are construed with ab or ex;' and verbs of asking questions ((/«.frer^ 
 
 1 Because the line of motion is conceived here as Ptartinj? from a mere point, and there- 
 fore cannot be indicated by an eouivalent of " (nit oj..''' 
 
 7Fmlrelnd mercan are construed with ab and de. But emere de frenernlly means : to 
 buv Cm a person who is not the owner, but either the aqeat c^' the owner, or else a 
 nemTniot entitle 1 to sell, as for instance a person under aire. The Roman j.insts in- 
 ?aSV"avV/ilr6 «A when the bar-ain is made between the parties t u'mselves. 
 ^ aZ^a>^r^^^^^ are construed with ab when they reler to rEn^osf(amosc^e 
 
 ab ho Z) but with ex when they refer to Things {cognoscere or ducere ex httens). A'^ 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 ' ' ' I 
 
 ^m\percontari) with ab, ex, or de.' Verbs of judging, iNFERur^G con 
 CLUDiNG (judicare, concludere,coUigere) stand with ex only- ™ Ex Ms re 
 f'^jndicanpotr.t{colligitur,concmi potest), from these Ui'im^s it mav be 
 niterred (judged, concluded) that, ^^l-Peadere (to ckne id Sn or «to h! 
 suspended from ') is construed with ex ^ acpena on, or to b^ 
 
 \erbs expressing a difference, as: differre, distare discrendre di,,,n 
 
 lau comitas? What is so dillerent, than attubility from i^e sw a mn 
 hetoSV T^ ''^ ^ ''''''' discrepant or ablu^rrerl, T.l^,^^^;. j? .^ 
 the ^^ords. The same construction is applied to verbs denotin- i w/im 
 ING or KEKPiNG OFF {avcerc, prohibere),'J^EFE^m^o'vn^^^^ 
 ^l^ye}emi.re,tucri,tutum esse'), a freeing, RELEi^iNG and bein4^^^^^^ 
 iJi^rare, vuidicure, hberum, vacuum, immun^m esse), a separating Sz 
 r'aXr Jr '.tS:^ and DESISTING ^cUsistere)^ ai : H^mt^^lS^tr^l 
 raie aiceje oi ptoUibere, to keep men Irom dishonesty se ab iniyrh\ Hp 
 
 atjtnacre oi tuu i io protect one's Iriends from violence from the ennniv • 
 ahquema metu liberdre, to free or release somebody ^mm^^M M^^^^^^ 
 
 avv^iy trom Persons generally are constriied with the Dath^ Jt' Uie Pe^ 
 
 XlJ^Z^:;'''''^''^^.^^^^' ^^)' ^"^ sometim^'a^sowith 
 ao as Ju,is utiUtas vel a pentts td de libHs deprdmi potest, Cic de Or 1 W 
 
 Legal points may be either taken (suggested by) trom'lawyei^ en* Lm 
 who take Inendship Irom life, seem to take the sun from the world.^ 
 
 § 442. In relations of Time both ab and ex (not de) denote 
 from or since. Both are used to express the beginnincr of a 
 period. But ab alone is used to denote the distan'ce from one 
 lK)int of time to another, analogous to the relation of space. Ab 
 
 iSm'llf-lT,,!? i^il,^^^^ ""^Znl^^Tf"'^' T""^''''^^ ^^^^ ^-^ ^^^^''0 '^ 'o, I hear 
 
 ott^arelaUouoraile-iance lo^vTc^rfrmwiX^ • ii ^"'"^^^o^y)' ^«"^tes : to break 
 
 tt'i-Mi vol V iVo<.., ',,",'." ''^ceue. to wuticiraw one s aliei,nance Irom somebody It i^ » 
 
 ^reiVa^-iSyiVlteidef'f '"'■-' ^^"V'"^-^-'-^ -Many vc^Ds arc consired wah ^^X 
 selection ,i;?.vM,u.,. . ""^ ^e^jaraiion and release, or the idea of takin«r awav and 
 
 Ti^^rson m-ihhn'V,^^^^ ''^" "'^j^^^ ^*^ conceived as a place out of whicV^o? as 
 
 b/riadinl/tlii^'lS/inuthor'!' '^"'"^'^'"^' ^^^^^- '^^^^^ constri'ctions must be'learned 
 
30 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 is often strengthened by tlic adverb indc or jam inde (ever 
 
 since), as: 
 
 Jam inde ab infeUci pitgnd ccHderant animi, Liv. 2, G5, 7, Ever since the 
 untbi-tiniate buttle their courage had sunk.— J/. yEinilius ab iiunnte ado- 
 lescentid me dllexii, M. ^:nnlius has k)ved nie from his first youth (since he 
 was a young man). Cic. Fam. 13, 2\.—Ex eo tempore omnia in repubhca 
 ad arbitrium adminidrdut, Since that thne he administered everything 
 in the republic according to his pleasure. Suet. Ca3s. 20.— 3>c tcro disce- 
 debum ex eo die, quo in aedoii Tellaris conxocdti sumus, But I did not go 
 (from the place) since the day we were called into the temple of Tellus. 
 Cic. Phil. 1,1, 1. — Ab hord septimd ad vesperum piignMum eat, The battle 
 lasted from' the seventh hour till evening. Caes. B. G. 1, 20. 
 
 Bern. 49. Ex especially is used with expressions denoting Time itself or 
 its divisions [tempus, annus, dies, etc.) in the meaning ever since, so that a 
 lan'-er indetinite period is meant, as: ex hoc temiwrc, ever since that tune; 
 ex hoc die, ever since that day. Ab is used either of definite periods, limited 
 bv the points of beginning and ending {a septimo ad undecimum annum, 
 diem, etc.), or when Time is reckoned not by a point of Time itself or its 
 divisions, but from events transpiring in Time, as a juventuie, a pugna. 
 Here generally inde ab is used, to express the idea ''ever since:' 
 
 Ilem. 50. The English conjunction since, introducing Time clauses, 
 meanin^r ''since the time (chen,'' is expressed by ex quo tempore or ex quo (ui- 
 btead or' ex eo tempore quo), as: P. ei On. Corndii ex quo in provinciam vene- 
 runty nulla tempore de^titerunt, quoi adversa hostibns essent facere, Liv. 28, 
 39, P. and Cn. Cornelius, (iver) since they came into the province, never 
 ceased doing what was hurtful to the enemy. 
 
 § 443. Both ex and dc (especially ex, but never ah) are 
 used in the meaning of the English preposition of (out of), 
 
 1) as equivalents of the Partitivp: Genitive, and especially 
 in those instances where the partitive genitive is either inad- 
 missible or unusual (§ 375, Kern. 34). Thus ex (sometimes de) 
 is always used after wins with the force of a partitive genitive, 
 and mostly after definite numerals, after the indefinites nidlus, 
 midti, 7ionnulU, aliquot, ^xfwc/, complures, and after superla- 
 tives (§ 375). In all these cases it is used both before form- 
 adjectives and before nouns (§ 375, Hem. 34), as: l//ius ex 
 (de) amicis meis, one of my friends. Kc his duo morho mortui 
 sunt, two of these died by a disease. 3hdti ex militihus, many 
 of the soldiers. Ex his Hannibal prudentissimus fait, of these 
 Hannibal was the shrewdest. 
 
 2) Both Prepositions {ex and de, but especially the former, 
 and never ah) express the Mateuial, out of which something is 
 
 PEEPOSITIONS. 
 
 31 
 
 made, or the Con.stituents, of which something consists, as: 
 Statua ex mre facta, a statue made (out) of bronze. Homo ex 
 aniiao constat et corpore, Man consists of a soul and a body. 
 
 8) Both Prepositions (but again especially ex) are exponents 
 of the Preposition on, when an action is represented as happen- 
 ing on a place witli an outward tendency or direction, as : Ex 
 (dc) equo inifjnare, ex arido, ex muris diniicare, to 'figlit on 
 horseback, on dry ground, on the walls; ex equis coUoqui, to 
 have a conference on horseback ; ex vinculis causani dieere, to 
 be tried under arrest (literally: to defend a cause from chains); 
 Littcras ex itinere scrihere, to write a letter on a journey. 
 
 "^'^TFrTiV.N-*'/^]?,?'^?,''-^^ ""^ ^-^ '"""^^ l>e cx-plainerl from the relation o' 
 
 cS HS Sf ^> ^^1^=;^^ ,r«;;"-x;- -„;- si 
 
 and Vrul;; which C^n^J' "" "'"^^'^'^ ^"'^^^^^^ '''' ^-^''^*'-- '^ ^^''"'-•^^ *-"«l>-dy belo^,^;; 
 
 § 444. Ex ah)ne is used : 1) to denote a change from one 
 condition to another, as: JM ex honiiuihns facti, Cic. Hep. 2, 10, 
 Gods made out of (changed from) men. Annona ex \inte 
 convecta copia nihil niutacif. The corn did not vary from (in 
 regard to) the quantity brought there before. Liv.. 5, 13. 
 
 2) To express the English "according to," "on the oround 
 of," " after," witli a similar (Pern. 53) force, as seclndum 
 (.^ 43o, 4), especially with verbs of judging, estimating, deter- 
 nnnmg, suing, as: ex eventu aliquem judicare, to judge some- 
 body according to (after) the event; re?n ex mquo et bono dis- 
 ceptare, to determine (settle) a matter according to equity; 
 ex senatus consultu agere, to sue on the ground" of a Senate 
 decree. 
 
 sitSk^,K Vhin' .'^.-o^^^^^^^ ";:;r"'^ connected with that of Time, since everv 
 
 lowin;: each ululv T ,^T;. v . '^l*,; 'i"»""*' '''''' r*'"'^^ "'^ '•'"^^' iniuiediatelv fof- 
 
 atelv an.-rle..-) Kx i^^^^ a<T,ons which are pe.fora.ed imraedi- 
 
32 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 o/"," ' as: Pompejm ex conmldtu in Hispaniam profectus esf, Pompcy immediately 
 the expiration of his term an consul went to Spain.— 6>r;t cum jurm.'iet. ne in nnllam 
 
 tinn of,' 
 
 after . . . ., . 
 
 proritidaw. ex eo viagistnVu itifnnn. When he had ?Vvum, that he \vouhl £r«> into no pro- 
 vince (would take the government of no province) after the expiration of the term of his 
 oftice. 
 
 npm. 53. " According to"' is translated hy ad, arcundiim. f.r, pro. Ad expresses accom- 
 modation to sometliiui,' (approacliiii>r to— <((/ ?ii/fitm, ad voluntdfetn). l^tcundum (from 
 
 §-M.S. 
 
 § 41o. lie alone (not ex or ah) is use<l, to (U-note tlic suu- 
 jECT-MATi'EU of acts of the niiiul, coiTospoiuliiig to "about," 
 " on," " of," " concerning." 
 
 Tiem. 51. The use o^ de in this moaninir is very extended. Tt is employed thus princi- 
 pally to indicate the object of verbs of TiiiNKiN(i. sayin'c», wkitin<i ; l)ut it may be con- 
 nected with any verb, conceived as moducing a contemplated nimlt. We may «generally 
 translate it by '-'concerning,'''' but tliere are many, more special prepositions, which 
 more closely arc adapted to the meanim; of the «riven verb {of, on, for); as: De homi- 
 mbun nut rebus judicdre, exMimdre, sentlre. to think (judire) of, to have an opinion 
 on (concerninir) men or thini^s. /Je jMtosop/iia scr'ibere, to write on philoso|>liv. J)e 
 republica (de rebns pulAicis) dlspiitCire or disaerere, to ppeak, debate on the republic (on 
 political matters). J)e amlco logui. to speak of a friend. De am'uo audlre, to hear «>f a 
 friend. Opin'wnem de cd'iqud re habere, to have, hold an opinion on or about somethinir. 
 De aiiqno queri, to complain of somebody. De aliqud re ct rt 'tore m fieri, to be informed 
 on or o/"somethinir (literally : "to Ik; made more certain (jf or on a thini,'). De principd/u 
 contendere, to strmricle, to contend fur the hi<:hest power. De pace agere. to treat for 
 peace. Dene de altquo inereri, to desi-rve wi'll of somebody. De aliqud re gaudtre, do- 
 We.Jiere, to be y:lad of a thini;, to be sorry, to weep/or a thinir. De a/ic/K'd re de,y>erdre, 
 to desi)air o/a tliinjij. De ed re nihil srlo. I do not know auythin!:: about it. 
 
 lie-rinners ou^dit to be careful, not to translate {h•^ preposition - of" denotinjj the sub- 
 ject-matter of a verb, by the Latin genitice, unless the verb is construed witlx a genitive, 
 (p. \i2, and O;», § 484). 
 
 Tiem. 55. Idioms with ab, de, and ex. Aliquem afronte, a tergo, a latere aggredi, to 
 make an attack on somebody in front, b>/ the rear, by (on) the Hank. .1 srripfo diore, to 
 r^a^i a speech. A parte aricu/u^t es?!e, {o'hii on somebody's side. Qu'id faciam de ed re„ 
 what shall I do with it? De tertid cig'd'id, during the third night-watch. De viedid nocte, 
 about midniLTht. I/ac de caum, qua de causd. from this, which reason. De induxtnd. on 
 purpose. J)e impnm.^o, unexpectedlv. De infegro, anew. De cetera, de rd'iqno, for the 
 rest. Victoria de Gallis. a victory over the Gauls. De qua re ag'itur, what is the matter * 
 Ex pugnd, ex jiericnlo sypere--ise, to survive a battle or danger. E repul/lica. for the best 
 of the "republic. Ex quo effic'itur (with an infinitive clause), hence it follows (may be in- 
 ferred), that, etc. Ex eo quod, from the fact, that. Ex tem])ore et re, accordimx to time 
 and circumstances. Exxentent'id, according to one's own, or according to another's wish. 
 Hoc pendet ex te, that depends on thee. Ex ed cauxd, ex hoc cauxd, from this reason. 
 Magna ex parte, in a great measure. Maxima ex parte, for the greatest part. Ex capile 
 (de/ifibug) labordre, to have liead- (tooth-) ache. Ex morbo convalescere, to recover from a 
 disease. Ex itinere redlre, to return from a journey. 
 
 § 440. Cum is almost always rendered icith."^ It denotes 1) 
 CoNXECTiox and company in regard to place and to internal 
 relations, as : cum ai/neo 2rroficlsci, to travel witli a friend ; cinn 
 hostlbus pugndre^ to fight with the enemy ; meciun loquitur^ lie 
 
 » From these Idioms the modern expressions, ex-conml, ex-president, ex-tnlnist^r, etc., 
 must be explained. They correspond to the analogous terms: proconsul, proprietor, etc. 
 (§448). but while these latter have classical authority, the former have not. It is even 
 doubtful wliether tliev were technically used bv any Latin author. 
 
 3 But with not always by cum. For'the distinction from aprni see Rem. 30. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 33 
 
 speaks with me. 2) Maxxer, in answer to the question - hoio 9- 
 and AccoMPAXYixa cincuMSTANCEs, as : 3Iagna cum cderitate 
 ad exercitum redut, he returned to the army with great quick- 
 
 The pro|,ositio„ cum may be omitted, and the mere ablative 
 may be used, wl>en it denotes mannep, and the noun is accom- 
 panied by an Adjective. 
 
 aqnimtc vesconLi^'^'^^ 2 2 M L ^''^i.^M "7fi '^"™** """'"'^ 
 C, 1.. Tlie stars make tlieir revolutions with a won'CfS raiSv \vi, ' 
 
 iliilSiiSisi 
 
 ^A^imZ^tS^^^^Z^:^'^ is f trensthened by the adverbs 
 
 shu',!'V,ore",o,"'tlK.';Tv"th t^"' """ """ '"''''' '"'"'*'•-. ^''^" I >vas 
 *»/»;««, ■„ peace. Van. ati^uo in gratiam r.cfi^to fe'reSicS^to so^Wr' """ 
 
 g 447. Prm (before) implies the idea of CoxspictiousvEss 
 in LOCAL, and ot ruEFEREXCE in internal relations. It is used 
 only in certain connections : ]) I„ phrases with p;-<^ se (prcB me 
 ^<', etc.), and a verb of motion, as : prm seferre,' to carry some- 
 thing so, that It is seen (and with a figurative meaning:" to dis- 
 pl'V/ to make a sho^c); 2) i., „,e meaning -in ccnparison 
 I j",- ^"'"^ '""^'^' "' «o-'iP-wson with us;= .3) in the mean- 
 ing for ov- on account of r ^,^ec\My m negative sentences, 
 expressing, that certain acts cannot be done on account of (,)rw\ 
 something hindering them, as : Solem prm nndtitudine iacull 
 rumnon videbitis. You will not see the sun for the quantity of 
 our darts. ^ ^ 
 
 «.mn iS/rart;Tmauir";nrS^^^^^^^ "fl'mptui esf. Ores. B. G. 2, 30, 0„r 
 
 bodies. """tr oi conitmpt to the Gauls, in comparison to the size of their 
 
34 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 7?^m rs^ Pr,r in the third mranincr 1? PomotimeP used in a,fflrmative ^on\enco^, as: 
 P^^fnm ^hZ pwS^UwnnihL riaut. Stich. X -2, l.i. The tea.-, come rom my eiC8 
 fo^ joy The prc^o^i^^ />rc« in this counectiou expresses the necessity of the elTcct. 
 
 S 418. Pro m local relations is confined to some phrases, 
 in wliich 'it is translated by ''before^' with the force of either 
 ajnidovante {a^: pro jifdlelb^fs loqui, instead of apml judices 
 loqui, to speak before the judi^es)» or of fmte, when it depends 
 on verbs, implying a local relation, as cojnas x>ro castris j^ro- 
 ducere, to lead the troops before the camp." 
 
 In INTERNAL relations ;>ro is translated 1) by /or, and then 
 denotes : a) ix defence or, as : pro patria pugnfire, to fight 
 for (in defence) of one's conntry ;' b) in behalf of. Here it is 
 either expressly or impliedly opposed to contra, as: Hoc n on 
 modo 71011 2)ro me sed contra me est, Cic. Orat. 3, 20, 75, This 
 not only is not for me, but against me. Zoca sua et i/enus jv^rfncB 
 pro hostefaere, Liv. 39, 30, His position and manner of fighting 
 were /or, in favor of, the enemy (;)ro hoste et contra nos) ; c) in 
 PLACE of, instead OF (as a substitute of), either in regard to 
 Persons (as: Pro coiisuh' in JIlsjKiniam j^rofectus est, he went 
 for the Consul, or with the power of a Consul, to Spain), or 
 inreo-ardto Things (exchange, price), as: a arum pro anjento 
 mutuari, to exchange gold for silver; ;;^r,/;./V^;y^ i>ro carmine 
 dare, to give money for (in exchange for, as the price ol) a 
 
 poem. . 
 
 Or it is 2) translated by in puoportion to, expressmg 1 ro- 
 portion in number, quantity, or degree, as : Ma jor Ponianis 
 
 1 ^^rh nlira«c« are • Pro conridne la/ui. to speak before an a=^>^emhly of the people : jvv^ 
 
 rostriif. 
 
 3 q 
 s 1 
 
 hn« lyro ade «edere. to sit before a temple ; pro }K>rth, pro nviro, pro cima. 
 '^'^"^^^Nonde^^s.io^.S^^^^^ 
 
 ( pvrf- 
 
 """f^o- 'Zol^^e"pn> iSS"^, for or with the power of a pra-tor or qiurstor From 
 Sup - or-Ict?n/pres[dent- niii,^ he rendered by the.e forms ijrw pn^^de). 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 
 quam, pro mmiero jactura fait, Liv. 21, 54, the loss of the Ro- 
 mans was greater than in j.roportion to their number. Pro mul 
 titudine liomimim et pro gloria belli angustos se fin'ts hahtre 
 arbitrabantur, Ctps. B. G. 1, 2, they believed that they had a 
 small extent of territory in proportion to the number of "^inhabit- 
 ants and to their renown in war. Pro merito, in proportion to 
 one's merit. ^ 
 
 /**rj:.?^o7!*^o"^'V''^' prepo?ition>r, denoting purpose, is rendered by 
 fiS^^r :■ ^' \" ^^^: '''h "'' '^'' ^^^- ^'*) ' Z^'"' denoting Time, is translated by in 
 ^ 4ov) ;/(./• denoting Causi:, by propter ov oh (i^ 433. 437); and sometime^ 
 Dy pr(R (^ 440. ror is translated by pro, when it denotes : " in defence 
 IN behalf, or IN place of." For, denoting " in the interest of " is 
 also translated by the Dative case {iianmn cormmdi). The dative, meaning 
 Jor, IS distinguished Irom pro, by the opposition of the latter to contra. 
 bee p. 90, K. 4<. 
 
 Rem. Gl Pro has also the signifieation " r/.V " as ifr which is closely re- 
 lated to the meaning - in place of :' as: Britanni talein ferrets pro nummo 
 ntuutxr, the iJntains use iron rods as (for) money. C^es B G 5 12 Se 
 pro cimgerere, to act as a citizen, Cic. Arch. 5, 11. Comidium 'ttniore per- 
 territum quod noii tuUsxet pro ri,so renuntias^e, that Considins, fi i-ditened 
 Jiad reported as seen (by him) what he had not seen, Cas. B. G 1 22 Alie- 
 nam vicem pro nostra dolere, to be sorry lor the mistbrtune of another as if 
 It were our own. Cic. Verr. 1, 44, li;j. ' 
 
 Jitm, C2. t?ince pijoportion is nothing but equalitv of ratios the prepo- 
 sition 3)ro}s enii)loyed to express the co,fonniti/ofuyo situations, when 
 tlie one situation either is made necessarv, or authorized bv the other Pro 
 IS then translated by " in conformity with," '' in accordjlnce with " " ac- 
 conimg to, as : Exercituni pro loco et copiis instruit, he arran"-es the army 
 according m (in accordance with) the locality and number of his forces. 
 Kill. Cjit. 50, I. Earn Pnitifcr Ma.vlmus pro collefiii sente?itid—ab,sti/ure 
 jusHif, Tue High-priest, in conformity with (according to) the sentence of 
 the Court, directed her— to abstain, etc. Liv. 4, 44,12. " Vos pro med summd 
 in retnpubUcain dilifjentid morao, pro anctoritdie co/t.suldri hortor, vro magni- 
 iudirtejxricaliobttsfor, etc., I admonish you in accordance with' my great 
 care tor the republic, I exhort you in accordance with my consular author- 
 ity, I adjure you m accordance with the importance oV the danger, that 
 etc., Cic. Mur. 40, 8(5. Pro in the meaning "according to" is hereby 
 clearly distinguished from " according to" as equivalent of ad, e.c and sc 
 cundum (Hem. 58). 
 
 §419. The prepositions coram (in the presence of, in the 
 face of), sijie (witliout) and temfs (as lar as, up to), always cor- 
 respond to tlie mentioned English meanings, as: Pella sine 
 labdre et p>ericulo conficere, to wage wars witliout labor and 
 
 » Froporttone. or pro rata means : in proportion to one's share. Pro mrte virUi means 
 that each has an equal share (by equal shares). ^ruimrie iirui means, 
 
36 
 
 PEEPOSmONS. 
 
 danger; Coram legationum conventu, in presence of the assem- 
 bled embassies ; coram me^\w my face ; Ostld tenuSy as far as Ostia. 
 
 Ob9. Tenva is orisrinallv llie adverbial accusative ut a neuter nonn, = ^ertertding to' 
 bciui? construed witTi a locative case (p. 47, IL Si; -JIT, 8). When the locative case Ivcamo 
 obsolete, the jjeniiivc orHl)lative took its place. Ij^o 'Corri/nr (ein/s\ u]> to Corcyra, in 
 an old treaty quoted in Liv. 2H. •24. The genitive is chielly confined to the poets, the ab- 
 lative heini,' almost exclusively used in prose. In Liv. 44, 40, the vnlirata 'genu tenm^ 
 (knee-deepris unquestionably the correct readinj^, instead of 'gtnuK Units'. 
 
 Rem. 63. Sine and extra both moan " without ;'* but nine is opposed to 
 eitm, and extra (outside) is opposed to intra. Sine very frequently occurs 
 in negative sentences, and then tiie negation stands before sine, as : He 
 said, that he had not left his home without irreat hopes. Dixit, se iwii sine 
 inngnn x})e. domuni reH(/iiixv\ Ca^s. B. G. 1, 44.— Tiie expressions sine nlla 
 dubitatione and sine dnhio citlier have the foix-e of rAtrriCLES (referrinu: to 
 tlie SPEAKER, with the force o^ eerfe, proferfo, % 401), and are tlien translated 
 by undoubtedli/, without (ani/) doubt ; or they are Oriects, referrin.2^ to tlie 
 subject of the i^overninjj: verb, and have then the meaning]: " without hesi- 
 tat/on,''^ as : Etenini sine duhio,judires, in har caum ea res in disrrhnen ad- 
 dacitur, Cic. Verr, 2, 1, 2, For imdoubtedly, O judu^es, this matter is brou<;ht 
 to a decision in tliis trial. Si lUi nunc judices essenf, istum sine dubio eon- 
 demndrent, Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 73, If those were now the judges, they Avotdd 
 undoubtedly condemn him. lUnd vero sine uUa dubifatidne maxiine fundd- 
 cit imperitnn nostrum, C'ic. Balb. 13, 31, But this witliout any doubt espe- 
 cially founded our power. — Quid tani temerarium est, quam quod non satis 
 cognituni sit, sine vlla dubitididne drfendere ? What is so rash, as to defend 
 without any iiesitation wliat is not sufllciently known ? Cic. Xat. Deor. 
 1, 1. Afque illi omnes sine uUd d'lbitatione .eondemnant. And all those con- 
 demn him witliout any hesitation, Cic. Clu. 28, 75. 
 
 Bem.iyi. The Enirlish preposition iclf/iouf, wheu followed by a verbal nonn in t/?.7, is 
 translated 1) either by .vi/i« with an abstract noun, corre-^pondiiiir to tlu* En-rlish verb, as: 
 IJfsineofenxiouennimi ejus rd ipse statuaf. etc.. That he would either decide himself, 
 without" LTivini; otfencc to (hurtins;) his feelinijs. Cx». B. G. 1,19. Ut sine maleficio et 
 injuria transeanf,\\mt they would pass (the country) without doinj; any mischief and 
 w'ron!?. Ca^s. B. (J. 1, '.». Or '2) bv nkcjativk i'roi'ositions and ci.ArsKS in ditVerent forms. 
 The most usual forms are the followintr: rt) a simple chanire of the sentence into a ne'_'a- 
 tive proposition, interchan^inir the predicate and the object, as : Cum iftr non inftrmif- 
 teret. Civs. B. O. 1, 41, pince he marched without stopping (literally : fince he did not stop 
 the march) ; b) a negative coordinate proposition with iifque. as: (htum ab his sa/rit/.'i 
 qncereret. neque uUam ommno rem expnmere jjotsef, Cies. B. (J. 1. .T2, When he asked them 
 oftener, without beini,' able, to elicit anythin<r at all. Quihus ))opuliis /iomdnus irjiweisset, 
 nef/ne in prorinciam redee/issef, neque stipendia imj)Oyuisstf, C;es. B; (i. 1. 4.5, Whom the 
 Koman people had foririven. withotU rediicins; them to a province, and without layiiiLr a 
 tribute on tnt'in. Quum vviUos m^ns'ts castris se ac paludibus tenvissef. neque sui j)otestrt- 
 tem fecisset, Cies. B. (J. 1, K). When he had kept himself for many months within his camp 
 and"the marshes, without showinir himself:' c) a neirative participial clauses (either abso- 
 lute, or attributive), as : Nullum partem noctis itinere inftrntisso. ("les. B. G. 1, 2f). Without 
 ptoppin" his march during: anv part of the ni<,'ht. Quod, niH nt^'itus, non renerit. Caes. B. 
 G. 1, 44,~That he had not come without beini,' asked. Xullo militiam deJrectante. Liv. 7, 
 11 without any one refu!!>iui,' to serve. Constat, Namam non petf-n/em in regnuni accVmn 
 e^se. Liv. 1, :i3. It is known, that Numa was elevated to the throne without his asking 
 (for it).— See p. 188, A'. 2:i»i, Obs. 
 
 To express» ''without" with a verbal noun in ing. we also make use of a nesative 
 clause with uf. or quin. For this form see p. 517, C. D. 
 
 llem. 05. Some consider the adverb ptdani (publicly, openly) as a prepo- 
 sition, since it sometimes (in poetical and post-classical language) governs 
 an object in the Ablative case. 
 
 ^Sui potestatemfacere literally means: To give to somebody an opportiiuity {poteslatem) 
 of ouc'i? self (sui, eec § 281). 
 
 ri^EPOSITIONS. 
 
 S 4oO. In WITH the Accrsvrrvv t> 
 en. both cases stand in .ocJ:::^::;;;^'^- ''^' «ov 
 answer to the question '^,c/,ere?» an 1 whh I \ "''"^'^ '" 
 answer to tl.e question "«■/»V/..;. " n • f"^^^^^"^'^ i» 
 
 for LOCI, relations is not always' ea,v to ,'" '' "'"'^'^ ''''' 
 sard to ,.r.„.., relations on ,2 p,,'''^' '""'""^ '" '''- 
 ^v>>i^l. tlie special meanings of t e P I'nS "''' ' T °'''''"S "" 
 In with the Accusative^ in LolllTlT ""' """ '"''''''""''■ 
 i'^^o or to. It is opposed to .. "vhile ^i " ^'""""^ ^'^^'"^ 
 hence in stands toii„ the sa'n, ,2,^:^^^?' f ^*' '''"'^ 
 -neans " to come from the inZl.liT\ '^ '" "^' '^' ^"^ 
 with the Accusative means "0^0, ft, ^ "'" ''''"-" "" "' 
 tl.i...'," while ad mea^s "to " / '" "'""'''"' °^" ^ P'^^^e or 
 t'-«'- (see Kem. "HLl nL % I 'V^'f °!" » ^'^ - 
 paniam profichci, to ^o to fintot t'h? ' ^'\P'''""<='^"h in His- 
 in caMra .cure, ^o co^e o to 1 e P'"""^"'/" ('"'») SP'-" ; 
 ^mnere, to send somebod;^ti S^'tL Z' ""''''''"' ''^ '-''"' 
 
 ^;ven„. ,« the ^^u.stion'^,^^^^y^;^- <o the Eu^lish ^ a™ 
 . tlie qiu-stioii •' <chitherf'\ aud i, i,m „,,^1 . ^ "'" Accusative answers to 
 as are c.,„sln,ea with ,Ue l^e k, ."^ "I^/r'" '''Jcf^'"'' '■''''' "^ -^"™^ 
 expressly opposed Thus we ^y Tu^tfTi-^^^^ "' "'''''^'^ " "'•"-*" i" 
 to (int..) Iialy, because we Lk^"WMt {"^f*^.'" '"'^*''' Scipi" returned 
 mtis. say ^Uaruu. ,,, j^i^, '^««.^' " "satu .f r ''"■ f /"?'•" • ^^^^^ 
 11 Italy, because we ask " Wliere rli,! 4. »,;,'. *'""".? said to liave rei.'ned 
 of ",'hc ^■'"■«""•^''» '■" /'*'•"/ S« ' ^ {^}^' Thus : Ccesar c^ 
 01 the buessones to (into^ t lu.ii- ax:.,, '^^t-^^r tea Jus army from the country 
 
 {Horn Italy) ,0 (i„,„) Africa. ' ^ *"'"l'asiniaus recalled Hannibal 
 
 -;lKi:\ve;acS;^"o";;if Z?eS'sTon?;"''' '" '>°" "- Accusative 
 s (lor» these verbs, as verbs of «nT,7,4^ ri ., '• ^'"^ ^atm an^uan-e cou- 
 
 ?-:<-fm«^,T|^eUallL ad lit d v anS">''';? ''^^^''^^ 
 <"i<l ad tri bOnai K„ Jif* '*'? "«' '" the forum ai uVmfini ^""^"J"- ^'■'^f' t>ut to m 
 
rnErosiTioMS. 
 
 38 
 
 ns-irmbUHl in one place. P'C. 1 mi n, u. ^^ lianue nbiUdil «e 
 
 re^to collect tlf vrniy m o,^ Wace. C^- «-^^-j-^f „i„,sc{r) in .l.e in- 
 
 ^^1T^^ "'X= S S"' .0 -ive — oay m a Uouse. 
 ^i^iV^ ^S:..in ,.epo.«on ^ w« acn..Uve m^Sa|?j!;;| 
 
 with the accnsative by on, as : -('» ''' " ^ '' „,^. „,ounlain). P."-''"' ''"'"■ 
 U e momitain («rf montem, «■• «-^,, f"' 'Uo l\ ust a-J, Cart one-hair on the 
 
 corntioUl. Slercm '^«'"'"'""'""v' • !f,, • Inn" eitlier on the nieailows or 
 ZnX 3«, We ou,ht «o «1--^, 1' = ^'^^.^^.Tiv-e is nse.l. when tkusons 
 on (over) the ganleu.- 2) -'"J^" ,',^i„|,,„^. a place in their midst. Hcic 
 ni-,. the aim of Hie motion, so as to dcsi n.iR . 1 conjieere, 
 
 Zo u 1 "preposition among (in tl".';'''»' ^;\\>i,t; ^cc. ative is employetl 
 ^> throw darts amon;4 the enemy. o)Li "'< '^'^ '.^.^j j, „„.„ translated 
 o designate a hostile direction ?« ''f 'J 'ft", nal^e an attack against or 
 Z'ZoraffaM,^^: /'«/«'«« V' rfrom^-im 1>V ""• opposition of the 
 o > the e,u4y. It is 'l.sutvirmsl.e ^^ ; ,,„in.," wotiUl be poor La- 
 
 latter preposition to pro. 1 '>"^ "' " , „ ^.^,.1,^ denoting " attaclimg, as 
 tin itv 'I'l'c same is the case "'"' ^ l'^."'''" u,e „„ preposition at all to ex- 
 1";':^.,., pr..n,ere, »'^'"« 'S'^r'Tht H for nstance tile el.se with .srW.- .« 
 press m witli the '''=«»^j'" f-ulci tl e N<.nli ; and with verbs o a^cej,i>- 
 as : in septentru>nem H)>eclut, "''if ^^V „,„r»« a-cfmlere, to m.nmt a lioise 
 CO and MOUNTING, as: »«^? '«-'";«»'• ;' ^^„,,,„d by profi,.^,a with m 
 to scale a wall. 5) To '^P^^'^J J^i^ to depart lor Italy 
 with the accusative, as -. «'\f '.''''' '/,'f^, , oc\i. itKL.vnoNs.-/« w U the 
 ;to« 6i) Distinction ot «'' ?''^ "'f ",';,, :;'d of a motiim to a Place, 
 A^cnsativ; is the prop.;r 1-''1--;,';';;;,!1^:3S a m<)tU,n to a Peuson » Tlrus 
 while ad is the proper Preposition t» J-M *-*• coUNTUY, as -. m (not ad) 
 
 we use in, not ad, to ^If^;:';"^!^:"^ to places other than com>!';;;s. 
 
 ^::!^^^::::::^^^^^^^ 
 
 p.aceorthing,.vh^^^^^ 
 
 f„!,^Sl?S^^tl^."'tn£ ... ;„,,^.,^ ,^ ,..„,„,, ,, ,<,;,„« in or on, as : ,««.^. ^» 
 3 The Hrepesitu.u t/i n oc^^^^^^^^^ ^^.^r^. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 39 
 
 a^^V, Caesar led six legions to the town of Gemovia Cas R r - o. /, 
 
 come as soon as po.ssible to town • and nrl F-inf \r o ?> ^ •} ^ should 
 ad ..beni, ,.„ dL,, .... I .^ .^^ :s^o^ras1'c'a.n'e tf ^o^^ dtl^ ^ 
 
 .;..?o;^.c1!'c^v-^^\:L^'=? :^- ST'.' Se '^rf jr sf 'V^'"''-^^ 
 
 §451 The figurative relations, which are e.vpressed by m 
 with the Accusative arc : 1) that of at, iuternal movement from 
 one pon.t or relation to (into) anothe,- as : alfquem in mem 
 opuuOnem, metum, etc. inducer, to lead somebody into (to) a 
 hope, oi.inion, fear, etc. ; aliquem in calamitatem trahere to 
 draw somebody into a misfortune ; in morbum, furOrem etc., in- 
 culere, to fall into a disease, into f.try, etc. ; arnicitlam in odium 
 convertere, to change (turn) friendship i„to hatred. 2) That of 
 ruurosE, generally expressed by the preposition /or, as: sum,> 
 tus in rem miUtamn facere, to lay out (spend) money for mili- 
 ta>y purposes. 3) That of a direction of the mind or feelin<r 
 towanl or against somebody, as : Benevokntia in aliquem, I 
 good disposition toward somebody ; inimicitim in aliquem en- 
 mity against somebody ; omtio in Pisonem, the oration a-ainst 
 Piso. ^ 
 
 nsftl. in order to expre"rthJ En-l?<r/>r/o o^^ '^^ ^'^^ "'"'^ '^*"^^ ^" «'«''^y* i« 
 
 iuto hatred ; in jx^fesfa/.ma/ic'O^^^^^^^ t , r.S i ftA% ' '" '^'""J' ''^"''''^ ^^ ^^" (come) 
 
 jmflx dindere, to divide son ethi U i tc) nnrf^ )/l^ }^ ^"'- ''•' "^ rni^''>ody : aliquid in 
 is changed from true into foKe K/Cffi^ ^.J/^^fr..^ '"^'''* '''-^"^u ' ^<>^/*//^^^a«/«r, this 
 do-: lifyrmninUinnxtmcomtHerf^^^^ conrert.re to change Hecuba into a 
 
 w/,/<=;7-^.3 to confer ^ Ko^ml^iLtu^^^^^^^ h^^''\' i'npeHum ia aliquem 
 
 tribute on a man «-""^^anu o/i Pomebodj ; ^/^i^w^wm m hominem imponere, to lay a 
 
 laws thev were compelled to i^av o tswl th. L'^l'-n"/!'*'" •"' "^ triumph. becau.-e by the 
 
 |>etore Verson« "'^^j^;;;//,;;' K,\n-. 2. U). But ' /<J 
 
 ..•l?ir.:«ssr,;ur.Vuw«eo« 
 
 cpre?s onr: 
 amOrem in 
 
40 
 
 TREPOSITIONS. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 41 
 
 But relations of this kind nrc very frequently expressed hytho En^lis^ 
 »' //) " lliio we u>*e 1) in (with the acciifative). when tlie end of the nu.iu)n i> (i)nni>t.u 
 fi/a «IT ATioN or a STATE IV w the subject of tlie m.»tiou is represented to dwell, as 
 
 ?n u PLACE ^) We u'c«^/ wlu' the end of the motion is conceived a. a mere point, 
 ACTION oVtop.. o"wh"n t lU idei of the moti.,n i. conceived as merely ^•«"'^"^f ^^jj ; . 
 
 F 'm-a h? n o icms of this kind generally are expressed hy the .amc v^^J ^; »> ]]}^''^ 
 real mm ions are indicated, as: venire, 7-edlre,rever(i, duccre {adUucere, induce?., mrdu- 
 cere), trahtre, agert {rtd'vjere), restituere, reai^cre, as: 
 
 Venio nunc ad forlifsimvm rinim. etc. 
 
 Venire in calami fafem (Cic. Rose. Am. 1 ., 
 40). to c(nne to liarm (into a disaster).— 1 1'- 
 iiU^ mihi in fuenhm, it comes to (iuto) my 
 mind, it enters my mind.— iVo/i hoc in dis- 
 qui.4(idntm ve/iit, this is not the point in 
 question. Liv. 30. 31. 
 
 Jeedlre in prist inum station, to return to 
 (into) the former state; in ditiunem, to 
 obedience (literally "to pnbjectioir') ; m 
 gratiam cum aliquo red'a'e),- to he recon- 
 ciled with somebody (literally: to return 
 into <:race w itu somebody ; as if grace was 
 
 a PLACK). 
 
 Adduc^re aHqi(em in ?nefum, (Cic. Mur. 
 24), to brinsr somebody into a state of fear, 
 to make s(mie one afriiid ; aliquetn in snevi, 
 in opinidnem adducere, to lead somebody 
 to (into) a hope, to an opinion (to make 
 Bomehody hope, believe).* 
 
 Trahere aliqotm in opinidnem. to draw 
 pomebodv to (into) an opini(m ; trahere in 
 aliam jmrfem, to draw somebody to an- 
 other measure. 
 
 Eedigere uEduos in senitntem, to reduce 
 the .^<:dui to slavery (to bring them back 
 into slaverv) ; restituere aliquem in anti- 
 quum locum qratiiz (Cits. B. CI. 1. IS), to 
 restore somebody to his old place ol mtlu- 
 ence ; aliquid in'inteqrum redituere, to re- 
 etore somethiu-,' to its former state. 
 
 (Nep. Dat. 1, 1), f now come (in my dis- 
 course) to the bravest man, etc. \ enio nunc 
 ad roluptritts aqricoldrum, I come now (in 
 disconrse) to the pleasures of the rural 
 population. Cic. Sen. 15, 51. 
 
 Jitdxre or rererti ad mores suos, to return 
 to one'e habits (as if to one's friends) ; ad 
 se to (me's self (that is: to onei* proper 
 state of mind); ad sanitiltem.^ to reason; 
 ad proj)Ositum, to the purpose ; ad ;e/^<, to 
 recur to the subject. 
 
 Adducere aliquem ad jfletum (Cic. Brut. 
 93) to brinj? somebody to a weepinj;, to 
 make him weep (to an ,a(Tion); aliquem 
 ad fannus adducere, to lead some one to 
 (into) a crime (an action). 
 
 Trahfrc aliquem ad defecfionem, to draw 
 somebody to ;i fallinj: otV (into secession)— 
 anacticm, not a state; ad mortem trahere, 
 to draw to death (make that some one 
 sutlers death). 
 
 lltdiqtre discipTinam ad pnscos mores, 
 Liv. 8,«), to restore discipline to the loriner 
 habits •* redigere rem ad ])?istinam Ixut 
 rationem, Ca>s. B. C. 1,70, to reduce (re- 
 store) everythinir to the former method or 
 the war; omnia ad prnc>-pta et artem rero- 
 care, to reduce ever) thing to art and to rules. 
 
 TMnnv vcrh« which in fi-nrative relations are constnicd with the preposition in and 
 
 1, 311. the «realest torture wi 1 '^^»'' •';•,; '''''^,^J,,^'^^,'„,;"hein.n'l.^e,l literally, a» : i» 
 
 U.-3 Ad \<•'f•Z^Zf^,l\7Y^^W^^^U■. raSou.' 1,1 Sni^lZ «mild refer to e..u„d 
 r,a«.i. as a per Hoal s ale. ( ;™ '^JJ^', |,ere oi. the preposition oifr, wl.iel. is ini- 
 
 hifidem, incivitatem rf«>rf. to admit somebody to friendship, lo allegiance (allianco> 
 
 ,•-)).!> !lL\^'?^f T"" ^^'\\y^'^^''^^ the idea of motion i.^ conceived as cotitemplated, and when it 
 IS lelt doubtltil, whether the end of the motion is readied or not. Ilele l)elon- the verbs 
 of I)ksi<;natin(;. kxhoktino, i.nvitinc;, kxciting, as desiqnare, destinareTr^tariei'ci- 
 
 citi/ens to slaughter; ad diligentiam hortCiH,'^ to exhort to diligimce • ad litiFi^amea^i 
 ture, (. arouse to joy ; ad beUum incitare, to incite to a war ; Zd ira)iUacSiTio nr.l 
 
 lo call to arms, to stud> , but : m inndiam, in luc urn, in duhium tocare to bnnn to nntn 
 envy to inourn.ng ; to call something into doubt (that is : to make^t dou^MfuT) 
 
 A^//^ ,1. ihe \\<ii of in, to denote purpose, was very limited in clas«ir-il lino-no.rA 
 flautus and Cicero use in in this sense only of nn.ney Lid other thin-i^^oUn^ 
 employed or some stated occasion, as: Aliquid in nupfia, (/«;/(PlauT. Aul 2 rS) to 
 
 u\. n ' ■ • ' •'"'•j.l:^' V)" contribute money for a statue (to erect it). Thus Liw 1 
 ;e;n,;i/" iT/f/'* «^'.^''«/.^^^^'f '* ^^^'P^i seponere, to deposit money for the buildin- Yf a 
 temple." J he Ireer use ol m, to express purime, begins with Livy and the t>oets of he 
 Augustan age Thus Livv says (•.>!, 4->. 2) : Ouem fortuna in id lertaVeTlelerd horn 
 ..riune would choose for tfiis combat : aliquid in gr-atiam alicuJusfZereiS 21^4 • 3,5 -> g? 
 to do ;^(>nie hmg 111 somebody-s favor (for showing favor to some one) • tol in %'imAd 
 dare m, 24, 7), t., pk-dge one's word for somethiHg. Later wrtersu^ in in thls^cMle 
 
 m "honor m^ 7'^ ^lifSi"" liT'^ "•'", ^ ^^'"'^'^ '^ ^ i^^^^z:::^!!:^::"^^ 
 
 punSent. ^' ' ' "'''^^''' J "^^t una pared m lioenam. Fortune spares many for their 
 
 Jlern 72. In in the third signification takes the place of adversus, erqa and contra It 
 
 ir 10 t.'l')'r'?fr'?""' '^: "'^"^ of feelings and actions whose natVirMwKior iS 
 
 or Jio^tiK- IS left uiu^trtain, as: CariMn in aliquem scriptum (Cic Orat 2 8(i -^52) -i 
 
 poem written t/y>o/,^ somebody.' Thus it is used of i.isPosiTioi in 'eneral ks • ]/^ 
 
 (!/n,?!n T 'T '^'^'"' ^^'^'- ^'^™- - ^' fi"-^' ^'«" "1"'*^ l^e of tha?di ositLT owani uf 
 Hn..vT'^T ^'"''' """"?. ''t 2^V^'l^'f'^ liomauum riderentur (Ca^s. B. (i. 1 « Becau-fe 
 Jv, ^/ I '^ ^^:^'"^J■^*t J^^'ll disposed toward the Roman people. In such relations a^^ 
 ■versus (Kt-m. K.j migiit have been used ; but in is bv tar more freauent /li is a Si n^.^l 
 t''}yJl ".IJ'^-'i^lyor hostile sense, as synonym of .r^a (.r.o/Xiiut.^^a Serai Iv 
 
 s used of feelings and emotions toward peksons. while in is used of all possffi re a 
 T-\!^)::n'?J''n"T''' 'T' ny,.y>^/Wiea,n (Cic. Orat. 38. 133), the mefits/K^The reput 
 lit l)ut tua erga me merita (Cic. Fam. 1, l). In regard to inimical relHtinnc in m, ♦ 
 
 ..r J /"''"^k" f'P".''"^'"' ^"ot contra), envy against a man. Jn also must be u'ed i'li u ace 
 
 Ke'Sn "ou"?^- ;i;^)''SnnK'^! V' ''''■ '''T- ''1'''^ ''' ^"«^ contra S!S^^!,{1£;^ 
 oc unions ^o/ {pio) somebody; injuria ami imjnetas in (uoi contra) because there can 
 
 bo. ■ h'l'S',''' ;!"l»'^'^y/r ^"^^ ^""H-body. SaAre in a/^.yV«/^ to be cruel against S 
 bod> because there can be no cruelty/w somebody. But : armis contendere contra or 
 tn); h,;caii<e ^ye may n<rhtj?ro aliquo ;conJurme contra (or in) aliqiZi Un'l q^^^^ 
 (CIC. lirut. 4«, IM), or in. But the latter is more usual u*c</uc//t 
 
 worrf^inl/.llfin''^""]?'- ?.^' «■''„'^everal phrases must be exolained, with which a goveniin- 
 di vcic mv^^'^^ iinderstood, as: hunc in modum, in this mannei- (that is" 
 
 diitcted toward this manner) ; in hanc partem, in this direction • in hanc 'ient^'nfinm Vp 
 gard.ngthis opinion, in conformity with this'view; ?nii^m7n\noS 
 manner ; in utramque partem dispulare, to speak for ind against an opiidon (whit we ca 
 pro and con) • magnam inpartetn (the same Ls magna ex jTarte), S^^llTum^lmlo 
 
 1 In deditidnem recipere is a military phrase, denoting an agreement bv which to thn«P 
 V^aSmlnfl^'^:'^'' '" ^ conqlieror, life and ribertv^vL sccu?il^^' //o?/J'eMn 
 n'^i^c ndiierf: oV"!'^^ o persuade so to friendship, that a treaty of friendship 
 Att 2 1« 'y. ' V «mi U; ?' ■''I'' '''''' f"«I'dshi,).-8 M ae.,cire in le^afidnem invlfor ' (Cic 
 
 
 amleitood, aa : Luiius .■ie,„l„o,uam d„xiU Lucius married Senipronia. 
 
 >«.*.„;.;<, she married }■;;;• na-mmmlofh^ 
 =S^oVno'ifeSi^;./^et^i: ^^r^^^^^^^ 
 
42 
 
 rRErOSITIONS. 
 
 . ,r-^ In relations of T.ME, in with the accusative .s used 
 .,1: u.:umc is concoivea as conton.pUUoa ("/-• a umcs" to 
 r mc)" as: I-<^^'tias in tnyhaa anno. in,petrav.n.nt, they 
 
 ^b " c'l an a,n,istice for thirty years, Liv. 9, 37, Vl ; m o, 
 oui.inim ** ,^. ,^ - 1' i\. -in 'i^n^tei'iiui (Item ais- 
 
 tenqms, for all time (C.c. I'a.n. o, la, ) , '''t'?^''"' . „,,.,„„ 
 ««//' he postponed it to the next day (Cic. Dejot. 7 -1) , «^ "« 
 
 ; ' ^<L. iecar,U.r, an in aVuul ten>pns reservar^^, whether 
 li shonld be killed immediately by fire, or should be .esuvcd 
 
 1 another time (Ca,s. B. G. 153) ; in reliquwn tcnpns {m fu- 
 £v»nrfo'-tl>ei"t>.ve; in perpetuun.,fo...or, in pr.sens, lor 
 
 the present. . „, qvoHdif. Sco 
 
 B J^ 73 Idioms.-//, *>,« or i„ fixg^Jof dif». '?>'>;, "° ?' ^^:„w " nivc' '«"y ; i« «"*■ 
 
 ^ ii," m Lr„i/;rfi««, c-.c.) ;;j «r" ( ;« \;^f- ,S; i« «S. l.. ...m lone alter the 
 
 s'.ir,^. /-. ^VT.. T,n.: A.>..A-nvE.-//. with tl>e Am,.vTivK de- 
 notes ) the 1'...CK, or the internal State or CoNurnoN, .« o. 
 r;:;hii something is, or .. or on .vhieh some -U.-. .,.- • 
 It answers to the qtiestion ".<•/-.«/" ^) the ^ f ^- J" ^,"; 
 .on.ething happens, atiswering to the qttesfon ,r/.en ? but 
 only in certain connections (see l^Mn. /9). , , , ,^ :„ 
 
 \,. castr, cse. to be in camp; - ^«^ '?Vo\S'an TV o,-? ' ^ J" 
 
 eo«wc(«r« p»«-(«//i esse, to rest -»» conjecUire. i,n„,n,rc 
 
 Z. 74. The ,.0CAt, and -:-^^^:^Z':^:^^'i^"'^^^^ 
 
 expresses by tUc P■■^1'»*''|"'^V:;.f:;^c'o^;^ in "ate always «pressed by ia 
 
 Actions that happen oh the «»' '•> ,?,.f , •'':'' "^ a h.)rse ; "<•.«?« in yidAppid 
 
 Willi the Ablative, as: » ''f '" '^t {nnia.i Id So neli.iies «e use tl.e 
 
 fueUi a murder, coinniitted oh the Appian oau ^ , ^e trans- 
 
 /.reposition at, to cU'si^nale aeUoi. ^;^PS'«^, il'.hiif^ «^sclt.l, .^-v,../ /« 
 late '(n.y//twiU the ablaut, as. it.uu = p,-,.|,„sition <-«<•, to 
 
 express the same relation as : P« •«, '( '^ ^{ 'JJ.\^,^ /lellespont. Often 
 i^Si^l^rSand^rlM-i-^^o^ 
 
 «»f. a.,cl i. especially "'"»'':"^; / .' .^,* '<,?" V;"^J ■ ,te-. c»,»). H .lT"l>''ly ">«•"• ' 'f 
 
 S/iri;^^it^trlMvK'anuea"i'^r.^.''plucc. ^ u .....ate. .y o;--io. 
 
 at/. Sue liem. lU. 
 
 rr.EPosiTioNs. 
 
 43 
 
 actions, liapponin.? at a place, where something else happens at the same 
 tmie. In order to designate siicli relations, the Latin languac;:e generally 
 employs the preposition i/i with the ablative (more frequently than inter 
 or per), while we more frequently use the preposition ''during;' as: i/i eo 
 convicio, during this repast; i/i hoc pralio, in (during) this battle; in ludis, 
 during the games; in cvUoquio, during the eonference. 
 
 In internal relations the Latin language otten makes use of the same 
 
 But often the metaphors are different, as: in ocidi.-<, before one's eyes; posi- 
 tuni esae in aliqud re, to rest, to be based, to depend on something.* The 
 Latin language often expresses by in with the ablative, what we sometimes 
 express by clauses, and sometimes by adverbial expressions which have 
 the force of a clause, as: Dignitatem nostrani, ut potest in tuntd fwminuni 
 perfdid et iniq/n'tdte retinehimus, Cic. Fam. 1, 2, We shall maintain our 
 dignity [as well] as it is possible, when men are so pertidious and unfair 
 (in the midst of sucli a perlidy, etc). In ejusmodi reruni perturhatwne omnia 
 metuenda sunt, Cic. Fam. 1,5, Everything is to be feared, while mattei-s are 
 thus contused (in the midst of such a confusion). Quod in tanto imperio 
 populi Jiomdni turpixsimum arhitrabdtur, Ca^s. B. G. 1, 83, which he thouglit 
 to be most disgraceful, the power of the Komaii people being so great. 
 In vanis voluntatihus regndri tamen omnes volebant, Liv. 1, 17, '6, Althouuh 
 the opinions were different {tcith all their ditfereuce in opinion), they \x^t 
 wished, that there should be a king. 
 lUiu. To. The preposition in with the Ablative is used with reference to 
 
 chfliculty {Jdcik) that he {qucm) was «//^6»/?^ {in) the highest. Thales, qui 
 sapientissimus in scptem fuit, Cic. Leg. 2, 11,20, Thales, who was an ex- 
 tremely wise man among the seven."-* In quibus {Itgdtis) fuit M. Scauru9, 
 ball. Jug. 25, 4, among whom was ISl. Scaurus. Cecidtre in pngnd duo 
 mUlia sept'ingerdi ciciuni, in his qwituor Ilonidni centuridnes, Liv. 27, 12, Two 
 thousand seven hundred citizens fell in the battle, among these four Roman 
 centurions. In his {fuit) Antigonus, Nep. Keg. 3, among these Autigonus. 
 llie same relation fretpientlv is exi)ressed by ''in nuniero;' as: in hoc nu- 
 mero MiUiadesfait, Nep. :Mi]t. 3, among these was Miltiades. 
 
 Item. 70. The i^atin authors frequently use the name of a nation or 
 INHABITANTS of a district, in place of the name of the countuy or dis- 
 trict, which they inhabit. When names of nations are used in this sense 
 
 local i^repositions, and especially in, are frequently connected with them.' 
 VVe supply thwi in English the words " countru of or "district otV' as: 
 
 )n in the country oi the 
 never in G reads , nor in 
 
 y^. avii,^,iy iiimi 111 j!,ngiisn me words " country of ' 
 
 JJuni hoicin Volscis geruntur, while this was going on in the country of the 
 
 Volsci. 'y\ins,: in tsiblnis^in ^iJquis^in Fersis{h\xiini\ - 
 
 'riVi.. .."^ 111 V*^"'" "'^ •"" iiiciiu lo uuciare, inai i uaie^^ was the wlfe^t of ilie t>cven. 
 milk n,nn i mV.*" ■*"" -jx^>eptem:^ He only lueaut to .-ay, that TIuUl-h obtained a hi-h 
 rauk nmoij<,' the bcven, tliat he was one of the wit^ec^t. 
 
44 
 
 niEPOSITIONS. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 45 
 
 Jiomanl^, in the conntry or district of the Sabini, ^^^m, PcrsiaTis In a 
 siniihir Avav CMccro (Le-. C, 18,40) sa^'S m patnba. 'fl'';]!}fj l'"^^^^^^ 
 Cffisar (15. (J. I, 01): Cctsaria in barbans iwmeii erat obscunus, CJCbdi s uamc 
 was'lcss known among the barlnirians.» ^ nhl-itive 
 
 i^e^/i 77 The preposition //i tVequently is omittoa, and tlic mcie aDiative 
 casf^ed in order to denote relations, whieh otherwise ^re ^j-M^J^^^'^^jy 
 in witli tlie ablative. The connections, wliere such omission is admi^siblL 
 r ;lnd>le, must be learned by practice. Thus ^' terra ma ngue (i.yjr 
 on sea and and) in coordination, is used ^vltllout preposition ; but, w hen 
 used sii^ly, the same nouns generally take the l»eposUH>u ^l^-^^^-^^ 
 mari). Horace savs: Ibani forte via Sacra (I once walked on ^^^ ^'^^^al 
 road) but Cicero : ^in Appid rid, and Livy : t^ia Lancana. Cajsar (15. tr. /, 
 Orsays Sm opporliuiis lorn erant posita (the camp TN-as placed on a 
 QvU-able ground), but B. C. 1, 43: Acie in locis idonMS ^'^-^tructai^^' '^\l 
 t,attle-nne^md been tbrmed on suitable spots) ^^f^^^"^'^ 
 Sicilid and iota in Sic did ; totd in Graaa and tota A,;cm But it has i)cea 
 re^u kid, that '^ on the whole earth" and '' on the whole sl^' ^J^^e jihvay 
 expressed without a preposition {tota terra, toto cuih). Ihus Cicero has 
 h^hXp'^'^- i^'^ro and prinio libro (in the tirst book), and so in mnunK"^ 
 able cast^ ^Vhere the preposition is left out, it generally is done n cases 
 wl en the'noun is connected with an atlribute adjective, or when he rela- 
 t on may be conceived as a mere ablative-relation (expressed by tbe pre- 
 os t\oi /y) Thus the phrase memorid tenire, to keep m memory, mus be 
 concdved as - to keep l/ meinory." For the omission ol the preposition 
 before names of cities, see § 45o. _ . ♦k^ vKiotiw» in 
 
 Bern. 78. Kegarding the use of the preposition m with the Abla e m 
 relations of time, ^v? must distinguish, whether the tune (> an act n . 
 determined by nouns, denoting time itself and its di ision^ n p(mi s 
 us Z»^ spafinm, a'tas, sa'Cidlim, annus, maisis, Januarys, and the othe 
 mimes of he months, dies, hora);^ or by nouns, denoting events which 
 len in lime, as : tda, juventus, senectus, belUun, pugna pax, consalatus, 
 S m / //^ eti. In tiie former case we use the mere ablatice of timcmth. 
 Tu/^ « vS^V>'r in order to denote the time at or in winch an action lakes 
 pbce^(EnS 'iy, on, in). The expression of Time must then aUcaysbe 
 ^qa^^tiMbf^n Attribut^^ ai : hoc tempore, '.i this time ; ^^^^ ^^^^^^^^"^ 
 lecond vear- Cale nd is Januariis, on the tirst ot January (on the Januar} - 
 t'dends, ^e ^^12, C.) ; tertio die ante Idus, on the third day belore the 
 Ides (the middle of the month); hoc die on this day 
 
 When before expressions of this kind the preposition m (w i the Abla- 
 tive) is us^ it has IvA./' the meaning -during- and denotes, like ;>.r, that 
 t c'acti n ciuples the whole ^m.;%r it denotes, that the action happens 
 ...r^} ear, month, day, etc. But even in these connections the preposition 
 «rt sometimes is oiuitteil. 
 
 The .lUtinction ol' in Volscu anrt ap;d T'oteax. (Rem. 30, « >; ''l^'; 'IV^^.^Jjfommrv 
 
 pl-cuhur lorms, as;: Jnido, in tlie bt-imu.i- {M) ; 7ioctu {uotnocte), Dy ni^ui, uia ^ 
 iie), by day ; tempore or in temjMre, m tune, at the proper lime. 
 
 In hoc femporf.i dnnn<r this* (whole) time; in hoc anno, durin- this (whole) year 
 
 ^^H^ hnr,! i.fn nJ'L'h T."" ""^'vi' ^'"{^^'^'1''^ ^^^- OH'. 3. 2o. 95, the most beautifni;that 
 Lo., f n' i ?^ (whole) year (literally: than who in that year nothin- was born more 
 bea.mf il) Ar(ef. qwe in ornnt cetate cultie. minncos eferiwt frnctus. Cic. Sen. .3. 9, The 
 arts which cultivated in ereiy a-e produce the most wonderful fruits. Neouein iam 
 mN/risa,wi.< cuju,^quam ex svd ^hrpe funus vidit, Nep. Ke- 2, 3, And he saw. dunn- 
 (the wh.»le space of) so many years, the funeral of none of his oflsprin- Bi^dU 
 fhrZ"x{l£r^ ^^.^.^''T'' "^'^^'^ tvvicea day (every day). Cic. Tusc.5.35.100. Ter in anno, 
 lirTJ J . * IT""-. ^" ^^^P'-f^^^.'ons of this kind the English language uses the indefi- 
 nite article, without any preposition. ° ° 
 
 Wiien the Time of an action is determined by events, we supply the gen- 
 eral idea " at the time of.-- and thus expressions of this kind milst be con 
 sidered as attributive phrases with the governing noun time under- 
 stood Thus "i/i icar'' means: ''in the time of war f' ''in youth'' means- 
 ■' in the time of youthr The rule is here, to nse the preposition in as a sub- 
 stitute tor the noun tempus understood. So we say injuventiite, in youth : 
 in senectuie, m old age; in bell), in (the time oQ war; in pace, in (during) 
 peace ;_ m itinere, in (during, on) a journey, during a march ; in xitd, in life : 
 injuga, on (during) the flight. But the preposition generally is omitted 
 when regular, notorious, or historical events are applied to determine 
 time, as: hello Punico secundo, in (during) the second Punic w^ar; comitivi, 
 at the time of the elections; ludis, at the time of the public games; feriis 
 Latinis at the time of the Latin festival. Tiie preposition in may also be 
 omitted, when the word by which the time is determined, has an attribute 
 determining time still closer, as: extremd senectiite, in the hiirhest old aire' 
 hoc bello, in this war."-* " ^ ' 
 
 Itejn. 79. Idioms.-//? pr(xsentia or in pr(fMnti. at i)resent. In eo e.^.9€, tit, to be in Puch 
 a state.or condition, as to . . Bes in inte^ro est, xhl thing (the matter) is in its former 
 s ate. Uie afla.rs are in their former condition. Mifd in aninio est with a Subject-inSii- 
 ti e, or in ammo habco with an Ohjeot-inflnitive. I intend to, as- In onimo nobis erat 
 
 £^^^?W,^''''•"'''^'^^^''7^'-l"^^^r^ 'i ''^ ^^'« intended. \o send ^Mcc^r^rcV'S 
 olat man ' "'""'"^ liabtbat, Cic. Kosc. Am. IS, 5-2, He intended to disinherit 
 
 § 4o4. iSiib (under), referring to Place, governs tlie Accusa- 
 tive in answer to the question "Avhither?" or "in which direc- 
 tion?" as: Uxcrcltum subjugitm niittere, to send an army under 
 the yoke. Often it denotes motion to more elevated objects, if 
 the motion ends before them, in which case the English preposi- 
 tion " under'' cannot be used, as : Ilostee sub micros {sub jnontem) 
 processtrwit, the enemy went as far as (up to) the walls (to the 
 mountain). 
 
 n.'. "^j^J^^.^^ ^"^ tempore frequentljy is used in the meaning " in this bad (period of) time 
 ?irne^fo V^xS^Z Z\n t€'i'\^i^''"''''''^''' ^^^^^ofutl Nep. Milt. 5 1 7n this (tr ^|; 
 "battle of r«rL>^^/? ^ f Athenians. Livy 22. 61 : quo in tempore, in this time (after 
 can S afvvnv. for n r"^'' V'''-'-^'' "^*''^' ™"^ ,^^ replaced by the preposition iKr. But we 
 rtirTeither to uS . Jf.^-^ '''' r /"" ^^" «°^/ ^^ H^^d m place o{ per, if the preposition 
 K^\v ..yi J ^•^^'^^^^,^ of time (as cetas. vita), or to events previously mentioned 
 bu t.u . hv ."'^'^^ "tS'^ f^^"^' ^^^^'•^ ^^'"d*"^' NUMEUALS, it is translated hy per ov inter 
 
 flmiotin.r .f,«l. ^"busannis.— 2 Except in the mentioned cases, the preposition in 
 
 ii.mi.Sorn7,rii.ir;";,,^;;.:;nSh.'''''" "" ■='"■"' ""' ^"^^ ^»'"- "">' '-^ °' » 
 
'1 
 
 46 
 
 TKErOSITIONS. 
 
 niEPOSITIONS. 
 
 47 
 
 Sub governs the Ablative in answer to the question ^' where?''' 
 as: Snbj^elUbus hlemare, to winter under liides;* sub annis, sub 
 sarclnis dornure, to sleep under arms, under the bairgage. JiJj'er- 
 citus sub monte eousedlt, tlie army took its place under (at the 
 foot of) a mountain. 
 
 In relations of Time, sub with the Accusative denotes ap- 
 proximative time (either at, or a little before, or after), as: Sub 
 lucem, about daybreak; sub hoc tenqms, about this time; sub 
 uocteni, about nightfall. Sub with the Ablative denotes, that 
 one event happens just at the moment of another, as: Sub ipsa 
 profectlone, just at the very moment of his dei)arture. 
 
 In internal relations, sub rej)resents actions or conditions, as 
 
 if bein^^ or coming- locally under another tliinu:. The use of the 
 
 ablative or accusative is determined by the analogy of the local 
 
 relation, as : Sub rege esse, to be under a king ; sub imperlo ali- 
 
 cujus esse, to be under somebody's rule or power ; GalUam sub 
 
 2}opidl llornani imperhun redhjerc, to bring Gaul under the 
 
 power or rule of the Iloman people. 
 
 Item. 80. In relations of time poets and later authors use both cases 
 promiscuously, in order to denote either api)roxi)native or exact time. The 
 expression »ah luce in classical hin^^uaijje does not refer to time at all, but 
 means '' in davlii^ht." Ilor. Art. poet. 303. In internal relaticms sxh some- 
 limes caunot'^be translated bv v inter, as '' xnb ocuJix^' Ijcfore one's eyes. 
 The idiom ,suh j'ulire Us est (literally: the lawsuit is still under the judge) 
 means: The matter is under consideration, the question is not yet decided. 
 {■yr° For the u^e of s>ij)er, see p. tW. 
 
 CONSTRUCTIOX OF XaMES OF ClTIES. 
 
 ^ ltj5. When the place in which something is done, or the 
 place to which or from which a motion takes place, is the name 
 of a city, town, 'village, or small island,^ the Latin language 
 crenerally does not employ Prepositions, to designate these local 
 relations, but places the name of the city either in the Genitive, 
 or in the Accusative or in the Ablative. 
 
 1. Instead of in with the Ablative the name of the city is 
 
 » That i^ • in tcntP. made ont of hides.-^ By ^mall i>land*4, those are nndcrMood wliose 
 canitZi n;. bear tlie na.ne of the i>land. a. -Rf,o>ius, .E^iUa, i'ornjm. etc. Sxeuuu ,^ur- 
 Si!/ C^iicil^^ulHxa. Iliberma. do not belon;; to the .mall inlands m this .cuse, hut arc 
 considered as names of countbies. 
 
 ])laced a) in the mere Ablative Case, when it is a plurale 
 iantum or is declined after the third declension ; b) in the 
 Genitive Case, when the name of the city is a singular noun 
 of the first or second declension. 
 
 2. Instead of the preposition in with the accusative, or ad, 
 denoting motiox to a place, all names of cities are placed in the 
 mere Accusative case. 
 
 3. Instead of the preposition ex with the Ablative, denoting 
 ynYvios fro7ii a place, names of cities generally are placed in the 
 mere Ablative case. 
 
 4. Tlie words donius and rus^ are construed as if they were 
 names of cities. They assume the ending i instead of in with 
 the Ablative (donii, at liome ; ruri, in the country). They are 
 placed in the Aiu.ative, instead of the preposition ex (cZomo, from 
 liome; 77^;-(?, from the country). They are put in the Accusa- 
 tive instead of ad or In with the Accusative {doniuni jnittere, 
 to send home; rus ire, to go to the country). 
 
 E.XAMPr.Es: Zenrmem Athenin nudiTbam, I heard Zone at Athen<>, C. Marciii/^ Coriolis 
 ri.rif. C. Marcins lived in Corioli. S'/mma tvepviatio fint CarUiagine. the <rrt'ate!<t ex- 
 citement prevailed in ('arliia;,'e. lionun fiii, I «as in liome. Duo dies Thurii rersdtus 
 eat, he i^tayed for two davi» in Tliurium. Rhoili in morbuin incidit. at (in) Rhodes he 
 fell into a sickness. Atlten<iJ< re(rire. to return to Atliens. Pnvsidium Vejos miUere, to 
 send a jrarrison to Veji. lloinaia propernre^ to liasten to Home. Carlhaginem navi- 
 {/firc, to t^ail for Carthaixe. Ei)lu :<i/ni jiroficixciAo depart for Ephesuf?. A'e Corinthum 
 conferre, to proceed to Corintli. lloiiui teiilf. lie comes from Rome. Athfnis dixce-ssit^ 
 heleft Athens (wi-nt from Atliens). Bntnduno pro/ecfns est, he departed from Brundu- 
 pium. Tn9 dies domi commorCituH Sinn, I staid honie for three days. Domum advenit,^ 
 he arrived home. Riu'i eCiinui^. let us j^o to the country. AtfiTnas udceidrc.^ to arrive at 
 Athens, liure disctdere, to leave the country (go from the country). 
 
 I{e}ii. 81. In the most ancient lanc^uac^e names of cities in answer to the 
 question "" irhcrc^'' were phiced in the first locative case, which termi- 
 nated in i(\). 215, JiA). This endiui!;, which in the tirst declension was con- 
 tracted with tlie ciiaracteristic a into ^p, remained in the names of the sec- 
 ond and third declensions unchanged ; but in tlie third declension at some 
 later time assumed the form of the Ablative. In many instances this end- 
 in<; / ap|)ears even in the language of the classical period. Thus, Livy 
 -almost always writes Curthifjiid (hi Carthage). The forms domi (which 
 nuist not be taken for a Genitive) and ruri have preserved the form of the 
 old locative case, which likewise api)ears in many adverbial forms, espe- 
 cially in iLand (on tlie ground), ahi, where, ublque, etc. The form domi may 
 
 * R»s, fjen. rwm. does not mean a country, in the sense of a land (terra) : but expresses 
 what is oppo.-ed to citi/. Bi-sidt-s this it means "a country-scat."— 2 Since verbs of au- 
 KiviNo are constru(Hl with ad or in with the accusativt". it follows, that names of cities 
 and the words domus and rus must be placed in the accusative (not in the ablative) after 
 words of arriving, although in English the preposition at is used. See Rem. (38. 
 
48 
 
 TREPOSITIOXS. 
 
 niEPOSITIONS. 
 
 49 
 
 Ordinalos ^iomi mUUio'que^^ home and m ^^^^ '^J^^^,/^; ^ ^"^^^ il not 
 
 .ue conbiacntt j.^^.^^ ^^^ ^,t cities is onh men 
 
 required. 1 hns ^^ c iiuist s y . ^J / ^>„^^,/., UqCitox intra dies decern 
 
 ""I?'r '<S"Tt w'"n^e i'''Larnf:{imt, .hen .he name of a city is the object 
 
 WmmmMMMm 
 
 «;j;;rk! ; ■Uann.1o:'!S:.r'ilanuiha. had thus saved his property, he 
 Tame to' Pn^as m Rm.«nlit..nal,^ ,,^.^, „^. „,,^,, „ ,„« 
 
 reS pa.,So," nrstte'used holore tlic^vhole pln-ase,^.s : «< ,u->^ 
 
 before the name ( t the ut) , a^, • ^'' ^'^'^' ;^.;„,.^^g proceeded to Tarquinii, 
 They slopped at Alba, a city conveniently situated. Cic. turn. 
 
 EXERCISES ON PREPOSiriONS. 
 
 Ad. Adveksus. Apud. Ante. 
 
 1 Hannibal quum a Cartha.i^iniensibus cxpulsns esset ad Antioc^^^^^^ 
 
 tarn ad Cannas cladem accepGrunt,' ut totum pane cxercitiim amitterent.— 
 8. Carthaginienses, qimni prope jam ad desperationem^ pervenissent," 
 Ilamilcaii belli imperium inandavGrunt.— 9. Exercitus, Hasdrubale inter- 
 t'ccto, siiinnuim imperium ad Hannibalem detulit. — 10. llicronis morte reg- 
 11 nm'" Syracusilnum [of Syracuse) ad llieronymum, nepotem ejus, trans- 
 iiii>siim est." — 11. Militum ignavorum nomina ad imi)eratr)rcm reluta sunt. 
 —12. ]Slhil ad sapientis felicitatem accedere potest.— 13. Ariovistus legatos 
 ad Ca?sarem niisit, qui eum ad colloquium'^ invitarent {should invite)^U. 
 Pauci eorum ad collocpiiuin congressi stmt.^'— l.j. Hoc non tarn ad Appii 
 honorem, quam ad consulum ignominiam factum est.— 10. Hijec minus ad 
 me (piam ad te pertinCre censeo."— 17. At Philippus nondum ad belkmi 
 liaratus erat.— 18. ISIare ad arbitrium lun», modo (§ 379, Rem. 7) exiestuat 
 {to inrfll upl modo contraliit'" undas.— 19. Sociorum fiaQs{fidi'Uti/), qu£e ad 
 eum diem tirma fuerat, turn labare'' coepit.— 20. Praetor totam rem ad diem 
 sequentcm ditierre" constituit.— 21. Hac controversia usque ad noctem 
 ductil,"* senalus dimissus est.— 22. Qua?ritur, cur non hoc frumentum ad 
 diem datum sit {to dd(cer)?—2n. Deus i)aternum adversus bonos viros ani- 
 iiiuiii habet.— 24. Consul Spurium Cassium, legatum suum, adversus hostis 
 misit, lit eurum impetum, quamdiu {as loraj as) posset, sustinCret.— 25. 
 Cicero in dubio {in doubt) fuit, quomodo se adversus Casarem gereret.^" — 
 2G. Ante llamilcaris adventum Carthaginiensium res male gerebantur.'^"— 
 27. Dictntor Manlium ante se Romam \to Rome) proficisci vetuit.— 28. Ante 
 oppidum tumulus-' erat, quem hostes magnis'--' (/r////) copiis occupaverant.— 
 29. Summus mons a duabus legionibus occupabatur, quas LabiCnus paucis 
 ante diCbus ad Ca3sarem perduxerat {to brin(/).—'SO. Utierse tuae, quas pau- 
 cis ante dicl)iis acceppram,gratissim;e milii fuGruut.— 31. Carthan-iuienses 
 classe apud insulas .Egalls {Ejatlan) a G:ijo Lutalio superata {to defeat), 
 bellum tinire statuerunt.— 32. Hannibal P. Cornelium Scipioncm ter vicit 
 primo apud Rhodanum lluvium, deinde apud Padum, tertio apud Trebiam.' 
 —33. Dum ha>c in Asia geruntur, casu accidit, ut Prusi£e*'=* regis legilti 
 «apud Qumctium Flamiiiium coinarent.- 34. Virgines Vestales apud Tro- 
 jaiios, Albanos, Romanos ignis perpetui custodes fuOrunt.— 35. Dioin-sius 
 hyracusfirum tyrannus, a civibus suis expulsus, apud Corinthios vixit —36' 
 Hoc dictum {remark) apud Xenophontem'^* leperi.— 37. Sempronius apud 
 pratorcm verba fecit," ut funduni suum, a Gajo injuria {against the laws) 
 retentum,-'^ ivcupeiarer. 
 
 1. The ^'Etluaus, since they could not defend themselves, sent ambassa- 
 dors to Ca?sar, in order to ask'^' {nup.) [forj help.— 2. The consul directed 
 the hc^or, to bring {arcesscre) both messengers to him.— 3. The enemies pro- 
 ceeded {se ronfern) with (by) great quickness to the ships.— 4. The emis- 
 saries^ ol Hannibal found access {aditus) to the Ferentian'^" hosta 'cs.- 
 o. 1 his equestrian combat {certdmen) opened to the legions the way to the 
 l^camp () the enemies.— 6. The horsemen of the enemies came as far as the 
 ii\er liber— V The tame of thy bravery and genius has come {pervenire) 
 (up) to the farthest {extremus) regions of the earth.— 8. The censoi-s directed 
 Ltheirj attention^"' to the morals^' of the citizens.- 9. I wish indeed my 
 
 ^ The Romans themselves mistook d07ni for a genitive, because they had forgotten 
 their ancient l«><^«tiv(' forms. ^ „^ ovcr.-^ AdUus, an approach.-* Terga 
 
 t.;«trioruni IC £Sa ;«.7;/f/ro"?m-the bick,).-' Mnure, to fore,.-. To advanc. 
 
50 
 
 ruErosiTioKS. 
 
 PKEPOSITIONS. 
 
 51 
 
 , j> X 4. r^«qr— 10 You liJive callca 
 
 very words had been reported (7/;;:/7V/meidf subiecM^'>^'/^) indeed -- 
 
 Uviv7r ) my attention-^ to a v^p' />^ ) f ^f ^^^uuiy tried, to restore'' 
 
 1 WhenMetellus hud eome to ^^^ ^^^^J^i^a^ stamlard.--l-3. bnice 
 
 he Iseiphne of the soldiers t.> ^ ^^M^l A\ the highest pruxlcMjce 
 
 these virtues of tlie general «i f»'^;»^^- ^.i^^^^.y ,vas certaui.-l. • Our 
 v-e re uUl('d;^« the soldiers te U ^^^'^,^ " ;/l\;e day most bravely, but it was 
 '(>! Uers tbu-ht up to the tlurd »"^^V vll<mer the attack ot' the enemy. 
 
 _U T I iibout midni-ht- the ^vi ; ;;,f ^; ^J^ !-,^^ that the ships were 
 but then so violent ^uhamm]v^ stoim arose I ,^ ^^^.^ ^^^^^^ ^^ .^^^^ ^^ 
 
 he deba.c (.^n«.) "^'<\";'Vs.« ^ > .t .""live *-"»"V"'>M";'"';;^ 
 
 1 ,W««,r) l.i.« to this "■'" y' ;-.;,V,f 1 ;'' ame to the a.ul.onues (m«ff* 
 ,>,.«p (/iHwl 1 liail reported ()«;<;'«) "%' ,, » 7«Ht is important (M-2J. 
 S,.,\v^"4 1 doubt whether (nemo '"'•, M-''' f ,i' °' „.<> pnrties (;«'•«) is 
 «1^' f.,r".he\veirarc of the ciV'V''f •J^;^^,. ins s ouU. he carried out 
 f„ ; nA.rr-23. Verres denm.uied tli.vt eyu>t .^^ ^ ^,^.^ ,,^,,„^ 
 
 .Vc-'f) «ccordins to ins hmt.--4 1 ^1^^^^^^^ 
 
 mnv as ..p h» 2000 '"«"•--■•„.f„^''^^ ^ «f Eubcca is situated « «») opi-o- 
 rect copy of this letter.' '-20. ^ '\^'''X, ; . ,|,,u some one ot tliose,«ho 
 Iu„ to Alhcns.-27. l"'»' S^-".f '?' 7^" ," [^ s,,, c cri.ne against him <.r h,s 
 were i.resent,'= misht mediate J" "'"' \"", ,..,,re" a.'ainst one's sell.— 
 
 llnSl v'\" 357.' 0).-2« It is «^.^''V^; ;'^" .reldet' conunander k.^wn .. 
 'XJ Is not the enmity ot ''•'-".•'^ ,"'? ''.,,.,, others, hut also against )OUi 
 "ilmo't all soldiers V-30 Be jusl l»"' ; ""ei «.'roirCa by I'l'thP. K'"S."' 
 Xs!-31. The battle (!"•««-««), '^^^ f' ,f ,7^ ve (.»7'»fc""") "'' 'f'f'?" 
 ',[.': Macedons^ -^^^^^^^^^, OetLianus de.eated AnU. 
 
 ,,,,._.k \vith .horn .-m you <Viue to-.^y_. „^ ado;: declared, that 
 " . i .rrieefid with our ancestors— J7. "'";.. ",,,„,,,> _38. 1 tind many 
 
 w„trf,)r (ofl this oiiinion in the ohUi f («•••) I""!'' ] , ti,;, i„ 
 
 1M:,:,„.1ius, hut oann..t hnd an> hing ^^^^^A^^^^^^^:^:^!^!!^^ 
 (,r») in 'riuKydides.-40JJ^!->^liL_L rnri^rT:^:;;^ .„Wecv. Whim 
 
 •7 Trangilate : guaras (.cusmu. ; ^^ 
 
 — 41. Caesar marclied*" by the shortest vmrU f}f^,.\ tr^^^ ^ «i 
 
 sent the whole of the cay Irrbefore hTm 40^ enemies, and 
 
 war, Grecian art liacl iiot\; Teacl e'r*» H^^^ Before the second Punio 
 
 CiKCA. CiRcujf. Inter. Ob. Per. Post. Secundum 
 
 hie„"!iU m "ayc^,are.;rper^fxh Vl'::^ ^*-""'' """^ ^'^^""^ -Huilejam 
 
 tatus suo sumptu' sem ,er';.lEha"(/;;;,t;,^^^^^^ 
 
 einissani, quum AIcil)iadem ferro' asgredi noii oudP^-enVnJ^^.n • 7^"'^ 
 
 ?^oX,s» tmnV To i'^M- ""''^•'"'^'''''.'''^ '"°°"« ^it"m." raro a mer- 
 
 inter acies nostras rcstitQtus est ?1tv t " "" .^^^^'^"^'-nnt, qua re ordo 
 tuteni'Miocc4t nt ilHm bP«^^^^^^ Discrlmen inter fortitudinem et vir- 
 
 dunuaxat -15' Lys m^Hnf.^ Z?"^''^ l^abPre possint^hanc antem homines 
 lum inter se c;essOr t r ^J.^^^'^'^'^."?.' ^^^«««l^'^ta- societate (allmnce), bel- 
 
 inter sedifferurr-ri^v'cu?n^^^^^^^^ V""'' ''^^'''^ ^"^^^^^^'^'^^ ^^^'^"« 
 conciliari non 1-sse ntfumq^e din S^ ^T?' '' 
 
 inter se seryasse'-''^ intelli-o 10 n 1 -ir f^^sUtuit.— 18. Amicos illos lidem 
 
 hostihus tradidit ■" non i<-nnn,in ., ., o. •. •^*- ."•^' f'"'" exereitum 
 sed se ipsum ob oculos "inb h "^ rJ"'"^ '""' penculum, non pairiam/ 
 per Allobrogum Ante ter ftceren7" o?""??"', P"''""."^''" °'l'"it. « Helvetii 
 
 ' ThrTndem.::!' Ou^n^V.r'llbTJr.T"^''^ fe.-i With the greatest curiosity - 
 rnpr-ere-* To winter.-^Tt hi eipeusT-«^ wnr§^"7^^ ^f translated by the pcmiVe of 
 
 Mtuated.-M Merchant.-^^'Fierc;''J!f^.^^ kill.-i/To me^t.-i^ Vitus' 
 
 nu-anB : (hunder-mals.-^^ Translate • Tho uor^T ^ Peaceful.-'^ The plural of tonitruum 
 ^' Institution. -'^2 /Tic/^.,» JrrllZ r^. l-o Z^^.'^^'' fortitudo and virtus.— ^0 To dissolve — 
 or trood disposition i-Fo?hiriudicuil-^^^^^^^ faithful .3 ^,.^^^ ara^rii? to be 
 
 ^«Z^.^c^«.-/ac.r^, to make ij^ies!-^^ Wood'l^^^^ ' '' ^— " ^^^'V<tc^;v. 10 nmrca.- 
 
rn PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 bus ne mrrrcrc" quUlcm licmt.-31. C^^J^V'V ^c^ ^ni^os^r<^o^ 
 
 km. s per vos lici is^ft, rop ne vilan, c,.n,l..iu.concoss>ssom-36^N<. m 
 
 per spccKii ^ en I ^ ^ (ku-emciuc coram post me esse ali- 
 
 (M.««W»fc) ycko nu, '--e mai i , '^ereitim in.pcdin.onta post 
 
 qnant» <& /^, ,V.,, :! " ,„\,Lrt I39 Vocnlis»' e. post vocalls „ vH .; pos.la," 
 k-giones colUxfli.it (« ptm- m vm. , 1 oppi.kim Gcriio- 
 
 "'"^"'1."' .,, 'f,,,«t h.>ras Philippiis ante imiro^ advPnit, Mum («nd 
 « r^lasir ', si t'^: G cci Tro a,n a.cuno anno 0.,,?™".! POSt quam 
 «<?;<!) c.isu a iiosim. c„l..ii-iii-; nn\nn tcrtiinn post (kcm reclliTt, 
 
 ~t The M,klk. " ad tilled up" the "canal (./«.«O «Inch was ar,mnd he 
 .ni^, ■> 1 ok a'' the Germans and those tril.es (r/<«.) «huh kad a 
 * V^^ii ■ " .,rn, nd he river Isterl-a. Already llippavrhns. who lived 
 
 fonni^ e e .^i. rde "«.•.(«ii'-O by soldiei^.-5. Cato dismissed all liose 
 
 n' sUmp of .10 g.at ^;^:^^:;^;^;:z;>!:^zij'i:^ '; -. 
 
 enemy.*'— 10. A I^^sc/vn no siu v vtu y i ,' ,. j till the monlli ot 
 lainan imon ^ courteous'^» anion- his [trends], [b it 
 
 Z^^^l^^-^^ --^' taciturn --1:5. '^^'-j-^^ ;:^,i:;;i:rJi^ 
 
 Chb tel ow^citizens, liv4d among (in the country -^)J^^,^^^'j^^, 
 U." During all this time, 1 was twice in the house ot Cic sai.-lo. JJui 
 
 Plural oihostis.-*-' \^'i^''\-'\l ^^'hv / /, • -"« Tho word tribe U translated by tribus, 
 be translated by a;>w^. and "\"^;i'i'-y^y ^'^^^^ wh.n it means a savage 
 
 whi^n it denote»* a thy\^i"/l «^^^^t^ t" ft .rrniT-^ barbarns occnrH in three 
 
 nation.-^" Coinis.-^^ yrbanu»'.-" ^^^^^ ™''^^ hore '>) it denote*» any nation neither 
 ditterent mean.nji. : D.it '^^''^''^t^'^^J''''^^^^^ foUowini? sentence., 
 
 ^:X^. ^frS'^f^'^^irrSmu^t ;S^li;S>ns.der the rules on the difl^reuce 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 53 
 
 ing this whole year he staid {romrrwrdi^ in the house of Atticus — Ifi Th^ 
 speaker went away amid the reproaches {opprobrium) and liissin-s (./i^M 
 
 j/.v)of he nuititiule.-17. During the games the I^mlanvoungne.fse^^^^^ 
 e Sabinian {Sahuiw^) yirgms at a given signal.^«-18. Wha? difflre ice i. 
 
 L mu^ « 'io't; • '^""'IrrS ^"^^ ^ "^^^^^ ^i^^t hates {U^^l^ 
 liarent/ -19 llnsis the difference {dL<<crlmen) between a wise and an 
 
 IVnuTh Z" 'tt'''/''^ '^'^ ^'''''''\ ^''''''' ^'''^ '^'^' '^« know; nothint^ 
 Ll)ut that J the latter does not even know t/m.—20. Only t/wn the rWht ni' 
 
 cue) oy iiie i^anuJejan iaw\— 21. Caesar did not w sh (nolle) th-if Hnf 
 clause, hese Irihcs, since they perpetually {e,>„^/«.« ; Uged-\ all i" h 
 each other, shou ,1 he neighbors" of (to) our province.-23 Tie Greeks 
 and n^'"o.''" "n^'r «^"^" «'"" "^J their ta'stes (.,^«rf.-„«), h!'hi,s ( t,) 
 ^SL„i • V" '' "," "'yP"""'- an» <" opinion»" that these questions are 
 fi^ Tr"*''"™''""'"' r-""^'' «"'«^'••"--'4. For that reason^the oLh n 
 ' i- ' 'o-'-r? ■'vas spread (*y«,«(,) almost U.roughout tlie who l^rth 
 {orb,,).-i>.,. I do not know, for what reason you do not do ( pT/'fe^rthis 
 
 U wn" ^-r"""!".'" I"-''' f "' •" ''""•-^^•"■Tiris w7.ru.e^yc";r iirrbyHrc^^ 
 t was dlowei to hnn hy the law, to become a consul -;i3 Ptminev ob 
 
 tamed («,V,«-,, all these honors through himself, without» bein-Ssted 
 ^lf)wc„re) by any recommendation {commendatio ot anceL,^ (>^r,S - 
 ,n. bon.e uw,-,) of the robbers spread'» over the c^iy, othei^ over tSiei^h 
 bon„.rlidds.-a,5. During all this time the lleet of the t"e,?iies blocS 
 e<«te/,.™ the shores (Ultu.) and the harbor (;«/'^«.v).-ac D,?ri,ig th"\w^^^^^^ 
 war this legion had not even *«« an eneni>'-37. DuringYl esell cVvc a^ 
 V '^Jh" Doh'"':' T <"f)r<;']"'"'S to tl'<^ «ill and hinrof Zl^cc^Z 
 
 stii^tiv'''rth, 1 i^i, ^ '""";, ^T"" "■•■"■ ""** ^'"«^ '^'^P' (•«'«•«'•'^) most 
 
 been d..n, /^, i ; . \ 1 '""' ""= ^'' •'"?" people.-39. All tliese things Lave 
 nttn (lone (perjiea-c) by me most strictly according to thy directions ''—40 
 
 M- lien n»;™';;:;'',''"''-'' '7'?r '"-"'«^ "y '"" '«"«^■•"carriei (l^MaHu>,).-f{. 
 men'" for (f ' K '.nl''' • '" ^'•y.'^,''"'!"»"'-'"'^!" (to) him by two spokes: 
 men lor (§ 3J3, ]{. ^(j) having hnislied the war so» successfully (/«to).— 
 
 
 en 
 
 'he 
 
 To be 
 
 ulum) at all 
 
 Civ- 
 
54 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 'ili'S l^ .tu ^Y^p^^^^^^^^V^Za^ Tire -^eS 
 which at (''y^.^-^veral placc^ cou be c^c«^^ J ^^_ 
 
 save ;>r''<^^'-'*i^"*ff,:, l';^ \hat\Xr iil . .«tlu.noB, Isotratcs has been the 
 hiiul hiiii.— 40 1 beliiAt, "'"' '"'Y , .- whilo the enemy was march- 
 
 i„.»or a"«'->;^^^;'lV7[,tie months S^ to thee the books, 
 
 alive («;)«.'<).-;jO.Alleitrt^^^^ ^ Ca;sar returnea to the 
 
 which thou hasl lent '"'"V, ,"''•,(■;,•,,„ ,.„,,.■:„ nfior he had come to 
 city of Gergovia.-53. "f "'" [ , ';,7 '; .f (^'^^l^^ the power of Dionysius 
 Spain m J^/'f f "'«» :-Vt,v?.^i";^ s ' a^ (Lmat)<.\^ys after he had 
 
 '" '•"f 'Xi l^!■\^^:^TNi•o wa borntS^ nine (curdLd months after 
 reached" ^ '=\'y-7:?*Vr^""Jicnis used to cut" their hair" immediately 
 Tiberius died.-5j. J''"!" "<^, fX^.l^'es» be^ .-ipe" about the summer 
 ^::£^ice«'rxtTo"u.elutvber\?"'.-5T.lThose]'who tear (..r.W) God. 
 live accordiDg to his commauds {pmceptum). 
 
 Propter. PnoPE. Juxta. Pu^etek. Cis. Citra. Contra. 
 Erga. Extra. Intra. Infra. Penes. Supra. 
 Trans. Ultra. Versus. 
 1. Plebs Romana. cum a P^triciis opprimcrmur, -'^H;.» j-rbc™ ot jr^pe 
 
 ripam Ani.uis ad 'e-ti"-» ">•/•''" ,^^.f^!,^,e;^'B,^™^^^^^ me 
 
 nis Laeiuue t;»n'l>>"> »» ' J^^ ^Auict jux a viam Appiam" ad quintum 
 
 lapidem» sepullus est.— o. ^^am l>ioP>^r " .-;""^^^^ , ■^.^., guppe- 
 
 (ripe) non erant, sed ne P'\\'" ' /«'f^^' t ""' ,"^^^ autem usus" 
 
 ^'^'''•Vaimmur'Sr o'It Ado^iX^^ 
 
 iiccessit/" amintui piopur ^ * , • „iensibus ante vi.ijiiiti 
 
 suoruni derehiuiuere jussit, y*'"'^^',''^^^'^^^^^^^^^ a-rorum partem dare 
 
 tria miUia GernianOrum ad se ^'^^^X^' ^^^^f 1^^"^"^^ dissipilos. 
 
 vellet.— 8. Facile erat mdites, pr.TcUe causa P^^" "'^. !f,^^ j^.^Ha, qu® 
 
 took place in every mom.ni ot ^^'l'^^'''^]'.-'^^^^^^^^^^^^ objetts, and jr.n..ally i. 
 
 lent with •• to be a kin- " ^Jl^f^'t ^%r'nU:iate the pr^M.o.itic.n after in No. 50, 51. ^"^ !« 
 translated bv - to nile, to govm-n -' ,V J tin -ere -«'^ toudcre.-»' Tl.e plural ot ca,nl- 
 all admissible vvays.-^» <-'"" V»^; ^^" „r\V,"7,,' -«« To become Hpe, nmturescere.- 
 
 " ^wmw^^r .-^o/./ic^ solstitiutii '"'^'^''^^l-^l'^X^^^^ stick.-* To pl»ce.- 
 
 ^^Accedere, to be added, to follow.-»' To pretend. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 55 
 
 ffotii c:rati{l propenTre. — 12. Nabis cum c.xorcitum raptim {in Jia^k) pneter 
 SpartVim duxisset, Pyniii, quiC vocantur," castra occupavit. — 13. Servus 
 ille ()miiil)us senientns'" prater unam condcinnatus est.^14. Suevi vesti- 
 menta {cht/ii/if/) nulla liabent piaster pellls,'^* quarum propter exii^uitatem'^* 
 magna corporis pars aperta est. — lo. Sahini quoque proBter Volscos et 
 yEquos partem i)raHlai postulabant. — 16. Loquebantur etiam Sempronius 
 ct CethP'gus, et pneter cetero-s Lentulus, qui summam" imperii acerrime"" 
 efllagitabat {demand). — 17. Tantum temporis nemini unquara tribui {to de- 
 vote) antea, proeterquam amicissimis aut reipublicjB causa. — 18. Caisar om- 
 nem Galliam cis Khenum atque inter mare MediterranGum {Mediterranean) 
 atqne Oceanum i)erdoniuit {to subject).— 19. Caesar per exploratores'^* certior 
 tactus est, trls jam partis Helvetiorum Ararim {the Arar) transisse, et quar- 
 tam fere partem citra flumen reliquam" esse. — 20. Britannia} unum latus 
 {Hide) est c(mtra Galliam. — 21. LabiCnus, cum omncm fere hostium exerci- 
 tum contra se pugnare intelligeret, Cajsarem per litteras orilvit, ut quam 
 celurrime sibi aux ilium mitteret. — 22. Apud Germanos veteres latrocinia,^" 
 quic extra linls cuj usque civitatis ficbant,'^' nuUam liabGbant {to cause) in- 
 famiam {infamy). — 23. Nonne novisti meam et ceterorum erga te fidem 
 {good faith) et benevolent iani {good disposition) 'i—'i^. Boji Lingonesque 
 Etruscos et Umbros agro {from their terrilory) pepulerant {to drice); hi ta- 
 men intra Apeunluum^* se tenuCre. — 25. Postulavit Casar, ut responsum 
 {an answer) sibi ad has litteras intra viginti dies darCtur. — 26. Oppidum, 
 infra arcem situm, missilibus'-" telisque i)ra3sidii peti^" potuit. — 27. Per du- 
 centosciuadraginta trls annos imperium [th/', government) penes reges erat. — 
 28. Supra tluvium oppidum est, et supra oppidum colics vitibus'*^ obsiti-*"-* 
 per magnum spatium j^atent {to extend). — 29. 8upra hunc locum rupes pro- 
 l)eudentes-*^ tectum elliciunt {to form). — 30. Senatus Veliternos trans Tibe- 
 rim habitare jussit. — 31. Casar speculatores {scout) ad fluvium versus misit 
 — 32. Ultra linls Xerviorum Kemi incolunt {to live), qui omnium Belgarum 
 sunt extrCmi. — 33. Dux ISemprouium horlatus est, ne quid ultra virls ex- 
 peri rctur. 
 
 1. The enemy placed {ponere) their camp in the neighborhood of a river, 
 to which our soldiers used^* to go, in order {Supine) to getwater.^^ — 2. Ros- 
 cius owned ( possidilre) a little property {fundus) near the sea. — 3. The same 
 has been told me by [that] most renowned man, who is sitting beside thee. 
 — 4. lie held {habere) that part of Cilicia, next to Cappadocia, which the 
 Leuco-Syri inhabit." — 5. You do not understand these things so well" on 
 account of [your] youth. — 6. I wish {velle with intin. clause), that Sulpicius 
 may be safe {salviis), not so much (j^ 412, li. 58) on account of my friend- 
 ship, as on account of the republic's welfare. — 7. Caesar concluded {sta- 
 tuere) to send Valerius to Ariovistus, both on account of his fidelity^® and 
 on account of his knowledge"" of the Gallic language. — 8. The Sequani are 
 woi-se oil*" than the ^dui, for the reason that Ariovistus has occupied the 
 third part of the Sequanian {Sequanus) territory {ager), which is the best in 
 {ff) the whole of Gaul.— 9. It is doubtful, wheUier Sulpicius has done this 
 
 »8 Qucp Tocantur, so called.— >» Sentenfia. a vote. Suffragium is a vote at the polh, a 
 ballot. iSententia is a vote, based on reasons, or after debate, equivalent to : opinion. — 
 ^^ Ptllifi, a hide.— 21 Small Aze.—'^'^ Sumtna imperii, the highest command.— ^3 .4c<=r, vio- 
 lent.— -* Scout.— -i* Ileliquum esse, to be left, to remain.— 2« Latrociniu?n, a robbery.— 
 ^' Fac^re, to commit.— '■^** Supply : Montem, the Apennine mountains, the Apennines.— 
 2» Misfnle, a missile.— s" Petere, to reach.— 3» Vites^ a grape-vine.— ^^ Ohntus, planted (with). 
 __3s Propendlre. to overhang.— a-» By consuescere. See § 342, R. 4.-35 Jq get ivater. aquSri. 
 — " Incolere.—37 Translate : You see these things less.— at» Fides.— 3» Scientia.—*" Trans- 
 late : It happens {accidtre) worse to the Scquani than to the JEdui. 
 
56 
 
 rnErosrnoNS. 
 
 for the sake of (causa) friendship, or [for the sake] of his own interest 
 (utim.)--\0. Thou suspectest, perhaps, that I have done this rather on 
 ny own] account, than [on aeeount] of the rep^.blic -11 Scipio led the 
 fl/et past the coast of Italy and Gaul as far as Spain.-13. The soldiers had 
 no inns except [their] swords.-18. They uttered- nolhin- hut (except) 
 ^n St^^ Xilt (GiixiTiVE) tlie [bad] )inies -14 The All.>hn>,es^n. 
 treated (se rcciperc) to Cirsar, and proved*-' that nothini.- was kit (^ .y^, 
 lia'^Uo them, except the bare- ground {solum).-U. Ariovistus demanded 
 that they (each of them) should bring {dnceve) ten men besides themselves 
 \o the Uiterence i^ollo,uUu.^^^.An^.n^ heads o 
 
 ^en;ec;;;^m;tSr:, ^iie noblest men, and beiore the c> the rs [that] of Cicero 
 
 —17. I am 
 
 clared(i^411) 
 
 laiurs, lilt- iiiMiii^^:?u iiiv,w, .cwvi ,,v...... - - L J 
 
 —17 lam owing (^^c^/c/v) almost nothing, except to Atticus.— 18. He Uj- 
 ), thJt he could not allow this i)assage*-' to them, except, if 
 
 Pl'lrCn 1^ till. Lllclt Jlt/ v^Vj'iiivi. »iv»/ .»••--.. • in ■ , 
 
 thev \vere wi lin.^ to give hostaires.-19. I shall never be quiet*» so long as 
 
 Zu^mai:^ ^n eiS^my^viU be this side <>[.t»-.l^"i;;--^--''o7'?l^^v 
 brbade tic Yeliterni to dwell (//.^6^7.//r) this side the liber.-21. The city 
 
 of Cirta is opposite (over against) Spain.-'>2. Among the kings, Avho bore 
 (%m^ arms against the Roman people, the most renowned (.o/>.^^• were 
 Philii> his son Perseus, 3Iilhridates, and betore the others Hannibal.— .d. 
 The Romans demanded, that the Carthaginians should have no P<>^^^ff /"^ 
 irm.emo) .vithout AtVica.-24. 1 always have f^^^'^]^^:^^^"!;^'^ ^ 
 friendship and kindness {hcnevohntia) toward me.--2.). Demo>tl enes pie- 
 wed within his house- that ulory, which nobody but (except) he, has 
 mc ed(^! "i7L-)tifterward.-2(;. The ambassadors of Philip were du-ected 
 to cave within ten days the city of Rome.-27. Below tiie star hatuin 
 (^ ir^ D) is [tlie star] Jupiter, which is much (^ :]11) nearer to the eartli 
 than t'he former.-28 Perhaps he, who holds- the highest power, will 
 g ; t ff thy ishJs.---J. The form of [this] Gallic soldier towered {e.ni- 
 14 ()ver the heads of the others.-OO. Above the road a very high nmun- 
 t in was towering {impcmkre), so that a very tew easily could prevent [the 
 :a^,a4l -^ Ci^sar demanded, that Ariovistus slmuld no more- Ic.ul any 
 ul in le of men across the Rhine.-32. Thou knowest that I have a 
 
 simlu property U'^mdu.) across the Anio /^ l^^|)-f ^;.Vwhv"*''f Vhmi 
 lustius Crispus, to sail in the direction ot the island ot f ^'iJV^a.— .>4. Ihou 
 sHt not work {lahorare) beyond [thy] strength, nor be hberal-bevond 
 fthv] melius Wpcs pl.).-35. \( is uncertain, of what kind the nature ot those 
 regions is, which lie (^tm) beyond the boundaries {pa») ot the buevi. 
 
 Ar.. De. Ex. 
 1. Ilamilcar hostls a muris Carthaginis removit, eosque pacem petere^ 
 
 — G. Socrrtes^\\\S a'l^'bus occultis avocavit^ et ad vitaui cominii- 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 57 
 
 neni" addiixit.''— 7. Hannibal postquam ad Alpis (the Alp^) venit qua? Ita- 
 liam ab Gallia scjungunt, nationes Alpicas (Alpine) vicit et fudit ^—8 Dux 
 mercenarios' GeruiSnos a reliquo exercitu separare constituit— 9 Pom- 
 pC^Jus quuKiuaginta diGbus postquam ab urbe profectus est, omnia maria 
 totamque Asiain a i)ra3donibus liberaverat.— 10. Hi^c philosophia? ratio ^» 
 qiui} a Socrate profccta est,- usque ad nostram atatem vi^niit— 11 Hoc 
 genus oratorum ab Isocrate originem ducit.— 12. Qiucritu?, a quo initio 
 omnis philosophia duciitur?— 13. Si quid ab amico postulas considera ^•-' 
 impetrarlue id possit ab eo.— 14. Legilti non modo pacem sed ne indutias 
 quidem ab ivge impetrare potuCrunt.— lo. Cato veniam atque impunitatem 
 {munesty) a Ctesare nee petere nee accipere voluit.— 10. Hamilcar anna a 
 patria accepta, hostibus tradere noluit.— 17. Trevirorum leo-ati contirmii- 
 runt, se nunquam ab amicitia populi Romani defecisse.— 18.°H«c est Stoi- 
 corum sontentia, a c^ua ei, qui ad voluptatem omnia referunt, longe {icidelu^ 
 dissent lunt.— 11). Ca-saris litterae animuni meum a curis minoribus ad sum- 
 mum timorem traduxCrunt {to turn over).—2{). !Si laus te ad virtutem allicere 
 [to «^//m'O non jjotest, ne metus quidem a foedissimis factis (deed) potest 
 avocare.— 21 ^diu, cum se suaque ab Helvetiis defendere non possent 
 legjltos ad Ca-sarem mittunt, rogatum auxilium.— 22. Gratissimum pro- 
 tecto non solum mihi fcceris," sed omnibus qui adsunt, si rem a principio 
 repetere yolueris.-2;j. Ab eS potissimum parte ordiamur, qua? omnibus 
 maxime liqucre (Ai id c?^/-) vidotur.— 24. A prima a?tate me omnis ars et 
 doctrlna {knoidedr/e) liberalis, inprlmis autem i^hilosophia delectavit — 
 ~'': !f..^'7";'"^ *^^' ^^'^'"'^^ instituta {habits) q\ cultum^^ Armenidrum^^ imitatus 
 est.— .0.^ Arboivs ab «quinoctio autumni^^ ad Vergiliarum- ortum serere 
 licet— ^<. JNos ita a pueris instituti^" sumus, ut senes summa reverentia 
 (^r//^ r6'm-e/?aO prosequer(}mur.^'-'-28. Di prohibcbunt Iktc, sed nunquam 
 propter me de cado descendent.— 29. Obsides Tarentini (^ 112, B) comnre- 
 hensi,- virgis- cirsi,- et de saxo TarpOjo-dejecti sunt.-30. Deflexif- jam 
 aliquantuui de hac yul consuetudo ma jorum.— 31. Ctesar proposuit (fo W 
 cU>se) iixA^ quisque de Divitiaco apud se dixisset.-32. Vos veio voluntatem 
 
 ^///.'/:7?//.fl"n^^^''^w'n '!^ ^'''''''T ^'^^ i'Jood faith) ex fortun^B invidia 
 {ill-^ctn) judic^t,s.-33. De hac iv idura ad te scriberem, si otium haberem. 
 —34. Apud i^abium multa de republica et de legibus disputavi — 35 C'ice- 
 '■;;;;;' ^l<;.r7"^l'^-] ''l>»-i «"per ab Angelo 3Iajo ^reperti {discover) et'editi- 
 i.nn ;~ •■ f^^l.^^'»^^^'".^ exemphs alia multa adjicere possem, si de huius 
 u. nxpn-ns q.im vellem.-37. De omnibus his rebus melius postea 
 • / ; >Q~iT , ^^*'' ^'""^ qua'ivre, quid ego de republica sentiam (to 
 !mii "7^' 7 \J='C/'^' ^;;^"ja Oesar magnis itineribus ad exercitum ire con- 
 m w/r;f" '^'"^;-t^- J^l^' '^i^ "^^'''^l^'^N "^^'1 ^le suo sup])licio (death), sed 
 
 mi -^/^ /)"'''!'''; ^"-^'^'^'^'^^^^ Teliseloco superiore a miiilibas 
 
 Vy^^"i^ (^> thro^r), liostium acies lacile perfracta-" est.— 42. Hannibal ex 
 
 lam '>'-r'^T' i'^c"^"^ ^'") ai^"^l Zamam a Scipione victus est.— 43. Cicero 
 ltd ex biciha decessit, ut bicu lis omnibus jucundam diuturnamque [lasiircg) 
 
 *'!2^^S^'"''^"^''<'^-^^'-<^ay\irc.-'rTo lead to. to approach.-^ To rout -^ Vercenarii 
 
 V r o o > i r4'ni'bo h- "''r J/^^ ^<'"^''''^ cdian /acere, to do .om^l^od a 
 
 bring 
 frincjire, to brcaY.'' ^"'^^•'""•- ^'-^*^««''^, w luru oxi.-'^^ Edere, to publish. -2« p/^J 
 
 <>b Hm' him .rr...itiir 14 'pf,;. 1 — ^- ■■"'-"'» «-€..!€€ /uoc/^e. lu uu souii-Doav a nr<at lavor. 
 
58 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 memoriam nominis sni rclinquerct.— 44. Ex co tempore lei-es et conpuetn- 
 dines veteres, paulillini (r/radufdlt/) labefactflri {to tot(er)c(v\^{iXi sunt.— 4.). Lx 
 illo die Tarenilni detectionem {^ea'ssum) ad hostls nuHlitan ccepCrunt — 4(.. 
 Turn ex siimmil annoniT3 caritatc^' et inopiiV« ineredibdis snluto vilitas 
 rei frinnentaric-e-»» eonseeuta est.^*'— 47. Atrieanus coc^nnmon {hi.s .vnnawie) 
 ex virtute diixit.— 48. Tales truetus ex dili-entia et probitate^'^ pereipi pos- 
 sunt— 49 Ex hac re colliiri potest, quantum detrimenti ex honunis illlus 
 IVaudibus ceperim.-oO. Quieslvit ex me Curio, qua de causfl se ad Pom- 
 pOium sequi noluissem.— 51. Lueretius docuit, ndnl posse ex ndulo (^ .JOO, 
 KIT) crelu-i —53. Nero ex comphiribus templis statuas ex auro ai\i,n'ntove 
 fabrieatas" detraxit^* et eontlavit.^*^— 53. Duo e ISIaeedonum gente reges 
 niulto ceteros rerum gestarum^" gloria supenlbant, Plnlippus, AiiVvnt^^^;. 
 lilius et Alexander .Alagnus.— 54. Hoc ex omnibus, (lune pioposui, ditheilli- 
 nium esse vidctur.— 55'. Civcs de quibus multi ex muritipugnabant, orabant 
 dueem, ne urbem liostibus traderet. 
 
 1 AVhen I had left {dL^cedere) Cicsar, I saw that I had been more than 
 one hour with him.— 2. I have been informed by letter, that our army has 
 departed iprofidsci) from the boundaries of the Parthi, and is marclung 
 (iter facere) toward Cilieia.— 3. After^» the army of the enemy had been 
 driven (pellere) from the eitv,'"-' Eumenes betcjok*" himsell to the km-.— 
 4 The territory (finc.'^) of the Santones is not far distant Inmi the territory 
 of the Tolosatians.*'— 5. Ca?sar was"'^ no larther than 1500 paces from the 
 enemy.— 6. The star Mercury moves {feni) below [the star] \enus with 
 (by) incredible swiftness around the sun, tVom which it never is hirther 
 distant than the space {intcrndhim) of one sign [of the Zodiac].— 7. The 
 Hellespont separates Asia from Europe— 8. Separate {srjungo-e) thyselt 
 from triends to whom the necessitv of the times has led {perducere) thee 
 for a while {aliqiiamdiu).—^. The Helvetians, when they understood that 
 they could not keep {ara-n') our troops from the river, suddenly changed 
 their plan and attacked our columns by the rear."'^— 10. Let us see, whether 
 we cannot free the city from the tvrant.— 11. The Massilians,"* who derive 
 rthcir] ori^nn from the Phoceans,"' alwavs have preserved {xcrrare) Greek 
 arts and literature.- 12. We must neither ask nor accept lavors ot such 
 kind even from our best friends.""— 13. I should think {nemo) that you may 
 ohX'A\ {impetravc) this from the king.— 14. The Carthaginians were so ter- 
 rified by these evils, that they even asked auxiliary troops trom the Romans, 
 and obtained them.— 15. During all this time I have received one letter ot 
 thee- 16. The delegates praved {ordre) Ctesar, not to sutler {pati), that 
 Unf. clau.se) the state, by the bad {pran<s) councils of young men, should 
 secede from the alleL^iance {amicitia) of the Roman people.— 17. The Stoics 
 differ from the Peripatetics {Penpateticus) not in (by) words, but in {hi/) the 
 whole matter (m).— 18. By these proceedings {re.s) it was brought about, 
 that the minds of almost all citizens were turned {itrcrtn-e) Irom [their] 
 chief.— 19. My pleasure has never called me away {avocdre) from any one's 
 
 27 Svmma carifcut, the highe«»t prices (literally : crreate^^t doarncss).-" Scarcity.— 
 2» Cheauness.— 30 Jits friimentaria, provis^ions.— =»i Co/n^eg'ti. to loUow.— '- llomsty.— 
 « FabncCire. to inanuractiire, Ibrm.-^^ Detrahere, to voh.—^" Conjldre to melt up.-3« Aes 
 Q^^dt (leeclsf —37 Norn. A/iii/nta-^.—^" Part. claase.-3« Tlie army had besie<:ed tl»e cUy.— 
 4" Coufcrro — ••' A Tolo.-alian (iutmbitaut of the modern Toulouse), Tolosa:», Gen. atis — 
 *3 Abees^e — *" Trans^late : and. after iheir plan had been chan.<;ed (part, clau-e) suddenly, 
 attacked our columns (agmen) by the rear.— ^^Ma^silien^s.— "MMiocicensis.-*» Irans- 
 .ate : Favor.-i of such kind we must not even from our best friends cither ask {petere) or 
 accept — ■»^ To bfiiv^ about, facere. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 59 
 
 interest {cwnmodum). — 20. Divitiacus was of opinion {cemere), that Ca?sar 
 was able to protect the whole of Gaul from the aggressions {injuria) of 
 Aiiovistus.— 21. Since we cannot protect ourselves against the aggressions 
 
 of the Germans, we shall l)e ol)lige(l {dihcre) to ask'the help of others. 
 
 22. All places that were behind Cavsar were safe from the enemy. — 28. Let 
 lis examine {repsiere) the Avhole matter from the very begin ning.^'^ — 24. I 
 should wish, that thou wouldst just begin with that point {lory.s), which it 
 is ni'cessary to understand l)efore the others. — 25. From my first bovhood 
 
 the sake of tiie republic— 28. With the Romans the age of childhood 
 {infantia) was reckoned" from the first to the seventh j-ear.— 29. Winter 
 and storms {tcmpcsiasi) usually begin with the rising of the Pleiades. 
 
 30. So great was the bravery of the soldiers, that, although they were 
 pressed by the greatest quantity {multitt'ul») of darts {telum), still nobody 
 went {dt'ced<'n) from the rampart.— ol. The citizens themselves defended 
 the walls, from which they had driven {pellere) the enemy. — 32. I do not 
 know, whether not i)erhai)s some also of you have deviiited {deflectere) a 
 little from the right {rectus) path.'^— 33. I shall neither write of my labors 
 nor of thy expectations.— 34. Thou wilt do {fut. 2^erf.) me a great favor in- 
 deed, if thou wilt indicate {fut. perf.) to me, wliat Sulpicius has said of me 
 in thy house.— 35. These matters, concerning which w(! lately had a con- 
 
 veistition^'^ with each other, are as little important (^ 412) as I expected. 
 
 3G. The leaders quarrelled {contendere) with each 'otlu'r for the hi^-hest 
 command.— 37. The question concerning taxes" and duties" has notl)ecn 
 settled^" yet.— 38. I see no reason, why you should desj-iair of 3'our welfare. 
 — 39. The law on the rights of foreign-born citizens^" has been carried b\^ 
 all votes except three.— 40. I have sent you by the letter-carrier the books 
 which I have written on i)hi!osoi)hy. See what you can do with them. 
 
 41. I sailed from the PineCiis three days after I had seen thee in the 
 liouse of Sulpieius.— 42. Ciesar took (deduce re) three legions, which were 
 wintering {hiemdre) about Aquileja, from their winterquarters {Jdbernu).—- 
 43. When Verres had returned fn^m Sieily, he was aecused by the Sicilians 
 ot malversation**" and other crimes. — i4. Ariovistus demanded, that Caesar 
 and his army should leave {decedere) Gaul.— 45. The citizens saw from the 
 wails, that the enemy was retreating.— 40. Both centurions during the whole 
 battle Ibught on horseback.— 47. Since this time Jugurtha began more and 
 more*" to deviate from the right path, and to throw oil{ed>Jic€re) all shame*"' 
 and restraint."— 48. Since this dav the Greeks began to despair of [ their! 
 liberty, and gradually*^^ to submit"' to foreign {alienus) rule.'"— 49. Since 
 that day I liave leceived no letter of ilieeX-50. When*'" the pirates had 
 been destroyed {tolhn) by Pompey, the highest security {securitas) followed 
 
 C8 
 
 <« Pnncipium. caput.-*» Societas.-6o jha^e of my, thy. his. etc., age. a^quSles.-^M Trans- 
 late : '/ hare heard Diododisr that is : his teachiii^r. Preceptor meus fuit would mean • 
 He liehl tlio o/Aft as my teacher.— ^*-^ Susciperc— 53 To reckon, habere.—^* Via — s» To fiav'e 
 a convtrmfioit. disf-erere.- «fi .1 tax. vectliral.— 6' yl duty (as impost) portorium — »» 2b 
 seme, constituere.— 5« .4 foreign-born citizen, poreirrlnus.— «0 J/o/^Y.;>^arw«. repetund-e 
 (supply ; pecmne). meamn,Lr properly : money to hv. asked back.— «1 More and more ma-'i^ 
 flV T?'**/--~ ,* ^ ^'r'"C<''i<Ha.-«3 Modu.-^.-s-» raullatim.-»^ Se eubmittere.-«« DomiuatioT- 
 "^ Partic. clause.— «=| Consequi. 
 
GO 
 
 PREPOSITIOXS. 
 
 su.lclenly up.^n .ho groato«t excitement •«»,.., of mo. -o 1 1 n .. 
 (lerivoa {dueere) this ..|n.u..i. l.oiu «■ /^^ '; ^*^, ' ',v,, r,, lisastor .)1' the 
 (,•„.,„»•«, ., ). that 1 !'«, V';'^\^;::;r; 7 ; n a'n. i ,-e luc derivod IVom 
 
 'since wljat tin.o he 1;»'^ ^ 1?! ll . n % S« '" h la^ that >he eiti- 
 
 i>ian\ oi uiL iiii.Mur> v/i roiw.!'* «»i' tlii'ui ^nti-'-oiuis, was killed, 
 
 crowns {rerpunn) a icr lus deaUK [O m <>t ^':, ''j^ :],., ...^^ one of his 
 
 Stances. Farewell. 
 
 Cum rii.E. Tko. Sine. Cokam. Tekus. 
 
 sunt Gemulnjs, U'\ '■'";-,,,;'',; ,;\, I .'.'nn.lun.onti» ceperit ex 
 __U ^"^^^1^%!^^^^^^^ 1 suninias ciuuleni hominuni vides vinutes.-13. 
 
 ^rf^-^^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^::-^-^::!^^^^- 
 
 -^;:^;;;;^^^;;^ Ampnus.-" Proljlt..^^ rarsi^onm. - 
 
 -T* When the 
 
 live, the numeral ^- one- must be ^'"^ f ^;-; , ^^ \ ^^ ^^ copiU lU 4 or .•nlver.utive con- 
 UleUitive clauses ^n=ly ''^ "^^/V^'^^^a^, "S ' L^r; o piin.-^ To embrace.- 
 
 jnnctions in Latin (See l): ■»•*' ^^r' ^;,'^,^^ ;^^^^^^^^^ hard a-ain.t 
 
 ^'Alimdd dun adrerms ^^^^'^'l^Xn^^^^^^^^ For the ct.u.pa.^iive 
 
 .omeWljO means :m^einp^ TrembUn,.-« Decency.-- ^V h.ch 
 
 lufhad sufferedf-n In his face and bearln-. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 61 
 
 Liuario, pro :Marcello, pro rcgc Dojotaro orationcs apud Cassarem habitse" 
 sunt. — IT. Qiuesierani ex Semproiiio, utrum ipse pro judicibiis locQtus esset, 
 an alius quidam causani pro eo c^nsset.'^'— 18. Qiuedam incommoda pro eis 
 sunt ([uibiis accidGruut, et quitdam quae laudantur atque appetuntur {to 
 ronf) contra eos sunt (pios delectavCrunt.— 19. Aliquanidiu {for some time) 
 eiiam niilituin nostroruin impetus inipedltus est eo {bi/ the fact) quod Ger- 
 niani pro vallo carros** suos a.i^gredientibus objecerant.^^— 20. Senfitus 
 La'torio pra?scripsit, ut soleninia'" pro pontitice^' susciperet.— 21. Galba pro 
 l)rirtr)re ad exercitum missus est.— 22. Peto nunc abs te mercGdem pro la- 
 bore moo.— 2:3. Equidem pro liac statua dimidium ejus quod petis tibi dabo. 
 — 24. C'{X?sar singulis civitatibus pro civium numero vectigalia imposuit.**" — 
 2.). Quid aliud pro tua erga me amicitia facere potes?— 20^ Crustumlnis {the 
 Crustumuii) vero pro inopia {poverty) eorum'" agrum (suum) restituit.— 
 27. Ca'.sar C'iceronem pro ejus merito laudat— 28. Nonne banc rem pro tua 
 mihi vendidistiV — 20. Supervacuunr" est, ostendere, mundum non sine ali- 
 (juo custode"* stare {to Id.st) po.sse.— :jO. ^larcet'- sine adversario virtus.— 31. 
 r^cisne tu, eum sine gloria vinci, qtn sine periculo vincilurV— 32. PompPjus 
 boc sine ulla dubitatione faciet ; sed nosti liominis tarditatem''"* et taciturni- 
 tatem.'-'*— 33. Quis uiuiuam tot scelera ab uno bomine sine ulla dubitatione 
 eommissaesse audlvit V- 34. Timoleon tantuni babuitamoreni omnium Sicu- 
 lorum, ut nullo recusante regnum obtinCret.— 35. Atlienienses imi)etum, ijon 
 exspectato^auxilio, fecCrunt.— 30. Komani non rogati Graecis auxilium obtu- 
 ICrunt. — 37. Maidius cpuim"^ Semiu'onio banc pecuniam credidisset'-*® neque 
 ullam ab eo salisdationenr' {.'\Q'j:\<>^{ii {to denKHid), tanien i)aucis mensibus 
 post ca'pit diliidere {to bm conji(teue().—o^. Tu vero rei)etas velim ea, quae 
 niibi coram genero meo dicere ausus es.— 31). Quid cogiias de eis, qui aliGna 
 ()mnia'Vlesi)icientes, suarum reruni {dmh) magnitudiiiem coelo teuus extol- 
 lere solent r* 
 
 1. Crassus left (r.?'7/v) witb two messengers the ^vinterquarters. — 2. Han- 
 nibal defealL-d Flaminius at the lake TnisimPuus, and a few davs later C. 
 C"entenius,wh<) was occupying the mountains with a select-' force {mitnus). 
 —3. God be with you, O children. —4. In the meanwhile {Item. 26) we are 
 amusing {dekctnrc) ourselves quietly''" with {in company of) the Muses.— 
 o. SuK'c the face^' of Domitius did not agree {conftentlrc) with his words,'*'' 
 and [since he] against'-' [his] custom spoke much with his [attendants], 
 the matter coidd not be concealed^* and denied=*^ [j^"y] longer.— 0. The 
 entertainment'"' was i)rovided {iiKstructUf<) with everything necessary.— 7. It 
 so(m becomes evident," whether one'''* has been educated in (/yy) a vulgar 
 {c'U'jdrix) manner {ino.s\ or [whether] he is endowed {i)istruct)(s)\\\\\\ those 
 liberaP" arts, which are in liie gift*" of the Muses.— 8. When the Latins had 
 come {acccdcn) to tiie Xi^ry gates of the city, and had returned to their 
 camp, loaded with*' booty, the consul Quinctius called {cocdre) the people 
 to a nieeting (rv///r/V>).— y. Although thou art a consul, and he {that one) [is] 
 a pjivate [man], 1 yet believe, thai thou iu comparison with him, art not 
 
 " IlahZre, to deliver.— -3 Cai/sam agere, to conduct a case. 
 oppo>e.— 16 ^•oA7/<//ia .v?/.s(vy/^/(-. to perlbrm the reIi-,nous cer 
 hiuh priest, a hijrli t^aceniotal ullice in Home.— i" Ittiitonirc w 
 1" W hy not auur—-'' Supertluous.— -^ Ruler, •guardian.— 22 Mat 
 —'•' blownes^y.— •-:* Taeiturnitv.— 26 Althou,t,'h.— •-« To lend.— '- 
 noun ••deeds."— 2» Delect us— 3". Equo annuo.- 3> Vultus.— '2 
 " Kern. 40.— 3*Te<2:ere.~36Dij;siiuuhlre.— 3«Conviviuin.— 3' Tr 
 —35 Transl. : '• some one."— 3» Incrpmins — «u 
 
 iL'cnuus.- 
 
 Tran^l. : which 
 
 t.o men.— <! Trausl. : •• driviu^j [theirj booty before them." 
 
 " Catrus. a cart.— J= To 
 enioiiies.— 17 The pontiiex, 
 ilh dative, to levy upon.— 
 'Cere, to droop, to lau<,niish. 
 ' Security. — 28 Supply tlie 
 
 Trani^l.: upeech (oratio). — 
 ansl. : It is easily declared. 
 
 the Muses give {tribuere} 
 
Q2 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 even a h.u.an '.ein.^-lO I %'^:'^Z^((^i:'^^y^^^^"^ 
 
 art on account "f ll.v] •'''^'?"\-/'vi S , .» ,,r " wil 1 h 'asi."--!:). Ho- 
 Ufe very face ami gait ''f ''»;'",";,;', •,-,,, t , .1 c for [one's] country, 
 race says, tl.at it 't^""'V " i, 1 n m'.' t" l)ct>.re the i.r;etor.-lo. 
 
 -It. Tl,c ,iu<l,!re (iM-eclci Cajii^ ' ' li' , ,'„ for ,nysclf.-10. Demos- 
 
 thencss oration lor C esipUon <?"'■. ^^Tfji,,,. „u.cli Atlicns l.a.l done 
 
 praised even by his f^"'"'''^>;;^:? ' ' . f,,, n I ll.cirl ni..urning" at (r/'"'; 
 
 br Lis frietuls, conkl be seen 1 ,'! "^^' , ^ ' ,, 'e" tiees as restini;-l>^'«s," 
 
 tiv!) bis fnncral /««''»^^'1.■» 7ln^ t .ke*" Iheirl rest (r'-V")-!»- Vale- 
 A^^inst (mO tbese tlK'y leaix «ml > » .^^^^^ i.^V.s -lace to (be 
 
 rii.s besought (orare) the e™^' •;."{' ™ , . I ,, „7 consi.l.i- (huKn^ '><y 
 
 conference (<•"««?"""!; -f^. Senate set'Spronius as a proconsul to the 
 l,ot.seasbis[ownl.-^l. Ibe^^'i^^ 'j ^.^.^^^^ „,^ enemy wtb 
 
 armv.-23. CiFsar sent Amilius -vuth t«.) =• .- j^^.pthnius in his 
 
 U.e -power of a ^^^^:^^!^'^^:^!^^.. bad eVeCe.l (/,«•.;.) 
 stead t.) the Insitbnai.s.-24 11 J u, ti^t; > , .^,„, ,„e town froin .the 
 
 a castle (cmunum). you y'! ' '■'J^'j^J^Vs \.' thai slave.-2(i. Kin.^ Mco- 
 enemy.-25. I have given ^•^>"^^,f „''^1,^^ del Is" of the Cnidians"' tor one 
 mcdes was wil ing to l'/>y/*; " \'^|,^.,''ri . ,,,^v«'.<''v) art to riches, re- 
 statue of Praxiteles But \''<;':\', ',V, ', «w-a" lb -u askest (vetcre) for that 
 fused (n«ifc).-37. l«k^('"-"i<'; ' , , , rd us we return (-V'-'O (>«) Vou 
 horse.-28. For y^»--.. '">'*!; »'4,, ::^'t;'i,.';,'.v wish t.. punish son.e one 
 
 'j^^^^excLcdb^gly according 10 his, m.it«- 
 
 tbat be could m.t come ' V^^^, "'T;\v ,,,t Sulpieius has toUU«"mir<- 
 [do]" nothing without God » .'*^' l'^-;^; !„ •. ,' „„,l'oubtedly invented ' and 
 (to) us about the victories ot the um}^ that be, without any lus.ta- 
 •alse.-3«. Oajus uis >\""™^'^,„^,^ ",", 1 1 this book.-:!?. Cicero wrote 
 tion, was sharing O'™'","''). ' ". ' " „ cVesar's pr.-s,.nce.-y8. Thou canst 
 to Oppius, what be had «''V'\''' o " „,ei. odv's fcerings.'"-39. When he 
 ^y t^thitlg at all ^^"^'^:^%J^'^^^^^^.»Ii being able to see 
 batl told {edere) li.s "f"'^ ^ bouse ^0 lie left th.. bouse, wiUu.ut being 
 any one. be lett («<■«&') \"^, . ' '^;r1vilb..ul taking (habirc) any regard 
 seen"' by any ."!"-';-*l-,f,.. ,\'»_4o\Yili Ibou dare to repeal»' that m 
 iratio) for (gemtiK) my toUh- -^- " '"^ 
 
 
 I 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 63 
 
 my face ?— 43. The army of Alexander marched (proficisci) as far as the 
 Indus. 
 
 AY WITH THE AcCUSxVTIYE. 
 
 1. Ilamilcar, his relms ex sentcntia peractis/ cum exercitu in Ilispaniam 
 missus est.— 2. Arar flumen per finis ^Edudrum in lihodanum influit in- 
 credibili^ lcnitute/ (Ita) ut ocuHs, in utram partem fluat,* judicari' non 
 l)()ssit.— :3. Id llclvc'tii, qui in montem sese receperant, conspicati " proe- 
 huin renovare capCrunt.— 4. Cicero obsecrSvit Caesarem, ut Marcello in 
 patnani redlrc permitteret.— 5. Aristldes per civium suOrum suffragia in 
 exdnun missus est.— «. Quamquam Demetrius liliam suam Seleuco in 
 matninonium dederat, fida inter eos amicitia manCre non potuit.— 7. Pom- 
 pCjus Juliam,Ca'saris tiliain,in matrimonium duxerat, cujus morte ultimum 
 quod inter eos fuit vincuhim ruptum est.— 8. Metelhis, postquam in pro- 
 viiK'iam advcnit, imprimis milituin discipllnam ad pristinam conditionem 
 r('(hi,^ere stU(Uiit.— 9. Keliqui sese fugoe mandilrunt (to betake), atque in 
 l^roxunas silvas abdidCrunt.— 10. Caesar Divitiaci summum in popuiuni 
 Komanum studium [zeal) et summam in se vohmtatein {nttachynent) cogno- 
 verat.'— 11. Caesar LabiCnum cum duilbus legionibus impetum in muni- 
 tiones facere jussit.— 12. Metelius Mariuni ad se in tentorium^ invitavit 
 oravit(iue ne ejusmodi exspeetationes conciperet, admonuit etiam, ut iri 
 tulurum se pro loco'-* et conditione sua gereret.'"— 13. Sumptus, quos in 
 lianc rem fccisti, liaud iacile recuperabis.— 14. Lucullus amplius decies 
 centCna millia sestertium in unam coenam impendit."— 15. Sempronius ex 
 consuliltu in Ilispaniam i)r()rectus est,— 16. Publicani'"^ rogabant me, ut 
 hac vectigalia in se transferrem {to tranffer).— 17. Omnes magistrStus sup- 
 plicabant {to peiitiu,,) me, ne nova onera in provinciam imponerem {to lay). 
 —18. Omnia tibi libere {openly) scribain, qute mihi ea de re in mentem 
 venOrunt.— 11). Ex lltteris tuis cognOvi, te in PompCji gratiam redisse.— 
 20. Boji Ca^sarem imi^lorabant, ut se in fidem et amicitiam reciperet.— 21. 
 Caesar banc civitatem in deibtionem accipere noluit, propterea quod fidem 
 (?Ai'i/- 7f (>/•(/) jure jurando confirmatam {to strengthen) non servassent.- '>'> 
 
 'i^fii. 
 
 Dunmorix vecligalia et portoria omnia in decern annos redemerat."— 23. 
 Hex senatui scripsit, velle se in omne tempus amicitiam cum populo Ro- 
 mano liabPre (Awy;).- 24. Fac ne ulkim omnino negotium in posterum 
 {ncvt) diem dltleras {to postpone).— "ir). Apud Komanos censores in quin- 
 quennium^^ creabanlur.— 20. Utrlque consuli'^ imperium in annum proro- 
 gatum est {to continue). 
 
 1. Ilamilcar took his son Hannibal over'" to Spain.— 2. The Senate de- 
 creed, that Scipio should go as i)roconsul to the province.— 3. I have 
 learned {cognoHcere) from tliy lett.r, tbat Pompey has gone to Greece.— 
 4. La.'sar sent his whole cavalry forward^' in order to ascertain {cognoscere) 
 
 ^ Perar/ere to accomplish. -2 incredible.— 3 Smoothness.— * To run —s To decide - 
 ofte'.M-ir.;*f v..?!;?'!.-"'-' I^,P l^^'"'-'"'"^ «^' ^0(/>'0^'<^ere irequently i. u.ed Mith the force 
 n itic H n vV L "^ 'r-.~ /":' f "V/'''' ^"'"^- '^^^*' "'^'•^^ «^ '^ «^* tentorium are idio- 
 
 coim.f.rf r.n^- ' f'"'"'.^; n^*" purpose of a pergonal interview.-" Positi<»n.-io 6e gerere, to 
 S cr.v^in1 '"'is-^j-^*' ^Pfnd.->2p,,6/?,',w,,,v, a publican; that is: a farmer of the 
 Vh in /n J •" .-^^^^''^^^' ^^ buy.-M Quinqiieiudum, a period of five years.-is Tlie 
 ^ni irt ->-*^"/ 7" ^o"^'»"e the command to the consul : we say: the command o/the con- 
 6ai.-i« Jo take over, transducere.-i^ To send forward, pritraittere. 
 
 { 
 
6i 
 
 PRErOSITIOKS. 
 
 in what (lircclion tl.e cnomv were iiiardnn- (iter f„rere)--.>. Ciesai wilh- 
 
 Z^mZZ) his tf..o|« on tlie next hill, anM susmnuM Ihe "tuu^k ot the 
 
 m.im IvrhiVcavalrv-O. Cicsar dkl this chiclly tor this reason (n M, 
 
 mo he . ritory of The Ie)vetians.-T. Although Caesar ha( n';"' ' I ;; 
 
 PEETOSITIOXS. 
 
 65 
 
 ilV WITH THE Ablative. Ablatives op Place axd Time. 
 .ibus?eu,mfer's\7n,t!?r"'"'"!-"-^- ^^^"""^ '" l''*'"'!"'"^ -Min.nrnen- 
 
 Tr t CT D vi iacus was restored to his former i.osilion (loa,>) ol inllneneo 
 and ono - a The tribunes coniplainea lou.Uy - that the «ar a^a 
 I , 'or a was carried on ('jercn) witli the greatest neshgenee.— 14. Wle.r 
 s Z .V;ri™l ii^tl^^^^^ lis armv, the citizens, terr.tied, concealed 
 
 U mse Ive i e hoi es^lo. For I know thy great" zeal for inv mler- 
 elt" md fllivl nnalUM-ahle" friendship t.iward me and my lamily.-lO. 
 r'Ur c lied 1) orix to liim, and admonished him, to av..id lor the 
 ^,m?e -Is 'ok is -n. Often very vahiahle- things are thrown (,;;,«,•. 
 o he sSl-J-nlhe shores.-18jhey,ng spent an .norm 
 
 tsumptus inqentU) for the wedding ol his ''■''V^'l''^''^-- •'■ '.'J;'''":;, '"™ ' 
 •,|.U- after the expiration of his term as i)netor, went to t5ieil\.— -0. Uccio 
 was af, lid lest aiu' r he expiration of his term as consul he might .e thn>wn 
 nto ^rii'l-aC Upon (ri.iht after, this attack all ^^'^^^^^^IZ^ 
 turned (.« eoMin-terc) into a most d.sgraceUil ihghl.-ii- l,'-»";!"^^:',',.';';!!!.,,,,,? 
 
 hi'VsonYl innibal never to L'ive up" his hatred against the Roman people. 
 
 !!1||. Do no Change truth \.nie t'hings, into (^-^'->^>^ ^^^"^^^ 
 
 Ariovistus made with the cavahy an attack on the 7, ".'^ ''^ .'^ --^, ^, \',Vv 
 (c.«^MV'. with inf clau.se), that you transtca^v.n,r rieid,li. t aid m^ 
 
 Ln -20. 1 doubled, whetlier I ^''-i'!'^;'^,;'^: ^ ; .";, ^'img hasev^ 
 ,,,Oon.lK.sep.,.a-..<^a.;s^^^^^ 
 
 thi.s man t-ilher to thy friendship or .0 0' l">"f ;•-•'• ,Y " ,:.'\,: .'•',. t 
 
 s m,'.^;™e 1^ in rwo'nderful manner.-:;.-,. The higher (,*y.;0 |;';'S- rates 
 „1- the Uomans were elected {crearc) for one (§ ij'Jl year.-ob. Ca.»..i « lotc 
 a book ill praise ot C;ito. 
 
 : ; :— V- ""'"'^ i I ^i-niea jj:uo.s pricsutisse" constat/— 7 C<csar nontp 
 
 m Aran'' lacto, exercituni in Sequanos traduxit {to lead ovcA -^'Cym! 
 Persariini rex, apud Massap:etas« in pra^lio cecidit-9. In liac fu^^a Nmni^ 
 Che qui sinml cum Ilann bale ex acie- excesserant, ei insidiat^^funt '^ 
 10. C()n.solatur me rccordatio {remembrance) meorum ten^^^ rum Xrum 
 niagmem video m rebus tuis.-ll. N,„, j,; vestra sed in ponu 
 
 Komani clementul spcs salutis (vestra^) posita est-r> In Inc re mi^ns 
 ac^rbitate c^mgltus sum^l3. EuphiUor AmLr!^ ^^^^^J!^ 
 p nxit. —14. Xeixes maximis exercitibus terra marlque belluni intulit 
 
 'l!'^:'?iT^''- ^'^"^''''- ""l^^^*^"' ('^^ '''^''^y) novissimuin a^. en secQ 
 A n ; -r''' ^T^^'^''^'' ^^^^^ti»in pra>lium committunt {conunerJ)-U 
 ^^r^^ X.iy-'''T «"^"^^t^>f^ Asia una nocte intilici jussi Cv^ .. 
 i^v-rr^"" ,"-•"'"' tempore judiees ex equitibus" deljo-ebantur '«- 
 
 y wIIus'n';;.^; •"'""' -^'-^itum ex Aduatici^ in Nervios mm^l^it.- 
 nnni - ' "' '''"^^'' "''*'^ ^'^^ couivcium {accomplM), propterea 
 
 quod dies magna ex parte consumptus est altercatione LanJ) Lentu 
 
 ! tpn,nf\/f */ /> n ^ '""^'^ "^*^^^ continenler {^rlthout iaterrap- 
 
 Uon)ipmni{tomarcJ,) Die quarto in linls Lin-onum pervenCrunt cuib 
 
 scqui n(m potuihsent.— 21. In his sex mensibus Casillnum ita est obsessum 
 u nemo nee ex oppido c^gredi {e.vcedere), nee in oppidum perveilix o^^^^^^^^ 
 -^>^ciu nt u'n?Idr^' iKibentur (^.^././), temp;)ie veri^- et auti;!^:^ i.- 
 
 Grl^cam in Z ,n . li^^^^^ 
 
 t^^^ ^^^^u^'^'l'"T7?''\ "^^^ ''' '^^''^'^ cxercitus nostri IWiSores 
 
 luut.— .0. liello Punico terUo Carthago a ScipiOne minore diruta est 
 
 JMiut D} uic cnenn .—2. Ot tiiese legions two were in the Idther iciferun-) 
 and one in the farther {ulterior) province.-3. In the can p he ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 wlm Ui^;;^d^- ' S,^S:^"^"^^ to hi,n, 
 
G(j 
 
 TKEPOSITIONS. 
 
 on the bi-hcst part (^ 3T2, R. 31) of tho mountain the two legions aUi cb 
 he ml iirst (;>mrm -) dral'tecP» in hither Gaul.-i) Hannibal had led {uuh.^ 
 .m' Ti kMiVp^^^ into an ambuscade ni the country of the 
 
 Lucani -10. Let us deposit" these valuables (./^'.) m the temple ot Dinna 
 -11. Caesar decreed to build a bridge ^^^t the rlveMihnu^-U^ .^^^^^^^^^ 
 are mistaken (to be in an crror\ O Sempronius. .S. \es, but \Nho led e 
 hUo I is rn)r v_13. Caesar nuirched on the same road, as (on ^vhlch) the 
 ene ly had gone before him.-U. Know (thou), that the con idence {Jul^ 
 of S both in thy prudence and genius is unchanged.-lo. But sti 1 ^ve do 
 no for anything si much- as treachery in such a contusion- o things.- 
 IG In vour deb^ites"^" both history and philosophy are mutc/Yl'' ^ ^/^ 
 nnmes of hese distinguished-^ men are in the mouth" o the whole people 
 -^ 8 1 tly urgent {mmmus) engagements" tlmu hast honored [dlu.trar.) 
 mv nriv ite aflafrs with thy attention {cura).-l\). We saw the king himselt 
 b fv 1^^ a crow^^^ head.-20. Cicero's head and hands were placed 
 
 Xf/?) oi? he rLtra.-2L The ambassadors of the ^dui said, that they 
 it al iine^^ hid deserved so [well] of (Hem. 54) the lioman People, that 
 their tiel Is ou-ht {ikbere) not to be laid waste {ca.tare) almost m sight {co,- 
 »^cU^ In this whole battle nobody could see he back- 
 
 s' ninemy.-2;i^ Nothing handsomer can be seen on the who e eartl.- 
 04 Cicero died in the sixty-fourth year ol [his] li e.-2o At ^l^^ tunc the 
 hekUniils if rax) generally are harvested- by [in the country oy) the Lgjp- 
 th ms.-2G. On this day the embassies of the Sicilians met- me in my 1 - 
 rim villi ="'—27 In this whole month grain was so high,'"' that haidl> 
 Sny cm Id be i;;u^.t of the corn-dealei-s ---8, Do ,.ot io|^;;^;^t^^;- 
 hait promised (to) me two letters a week (.^)Jma,.<0.-^iKjhc Uns n-c^^ 
 
 cii*> J^eneraUv J^rthree times a month.-;iO. Can anything more uni;>r- 
 ^.au^ W l^PPcn in men's lite V :u Dem(^t lienes ^^^^^^^ 
 n\' i Ahh,tive\ the \\w< delicate itcnui») health m youth.— Jw. At tlie ciLCiuns 
 t^tlM^\^^^^ liave broken out {exonri) among the c|tizcns.-33. 
 
 brother Marcus, were invited to the conference {colloquium). 
 
 Sub. XxVMes or Cities. 
 
 stituit.— o. ±.odcm uic ^. «JL^'^i /^" *- » civitfitis* L. Cass um consu- 
 
 submonte consedisse (e/ica?«i>).— 4. liaec pars cniuuii» .^^y., . , ., ., 
 lim interfeceratet ejus exercitum sub jugum miserat -o. ^^'^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 noc^c conqik^cTu'-T. Alcxundro Bal.ylonc morUm sununa unpcu 1 er- 
 
 =. Co„,crlbore.-" Doponere.-» Translate : -^S.'l^^'io'u^Slo:-" T^.^lai'^l'" 
 tio._s' To be mute, «biuuiescer.;.-»- 1^^ 1,1 "^- ^-„ r„ „uel couveiilrc.-»" TuH-iilun 
 
 ^^h!:^t^S^ii^:^'^l^S&, cotntnunit. nation.-. Co. 
 quiescere, to filcep. 
 
 rREPOSITIONS. 
 
 67 
 
 dicffi" tradita est. — 8. Hannibal IladrumCti^ reliquos^ ex fuga coll5git.' — 
 0. Carthagini quotannis bini reges creabantur. — 10. Usee scrips! subito {in 
 haste), quuin Bruli servi Laodiceaj me convenissent, et se Roniani properare 
 dixissent.— 11. Senatus LatinOrum principes Romam vocavit.— 12. Hostiuni 
 equites Cajre usque pervenCrunt.- 18. Senat^is legatos Coriuthum mittere 
 decrCvit. — 14. Themistocle^quum civium suorum sutfragiis e civitate ejec- 
 tus esset, Argos'" se contulit.— 15. Themistocles LacedaBuionem" profectus 
 est, ut cum eplioris" de maMiium munitione'^ ageret {to confer).— W. Eodeni 
 
 .—19. Opi 
 bcke'^ 
 
 nnago 
 
 a decemviris ad urbem liomam arcesslta est. — 21. iTannibal 
 per hiemein in Capua oppido coinmoratus est. — 22. Publicani me rogarunt, 
 cum Samum ad me venissent, ut aliquid huic edicto^" meo adderem.— 23. 
 Consul copias suas Casillnum, ad Campania? oppidum, direxit.— 24. Consul 
 classem Emporias, in urbem sociorum appulit (liein. 08), exercitumque 
 Tarraconem ad socios et amicos populi Romani duxit. — 25. Hannibal anno 
 Ttio i)ostquam domo profugerat, cum quinque navibus m Africain rediit, 
 t Carlhanniensis ad bellum contra Romanos induceret.— 20. Num solus 
 
 te 
 
 domum advenisti V— 27. Nonne propinquis"* tuis rus ire in annno est? — 
 28. Diodotus per multos annos domi nostne vixit.— 2i}. Liscus dixit, Orge- 
 torigem non solum domi, sed eliam apud linitimos plurimum posse (page 
 (jO) — ;',o. Hie vir, cum domi militiajque clarissimus fuisset, apud barbaros 
 in exilio diem suprCmum obiit.*" 
 
 1. The citizens threw*'*' darts"^ from the walls on the besiegers," by^ 
 which, however, since they fought under cover,'* not much damage was 
 done.— 2. One of the besiegers exclaimed {condamare) under the very walls 
 of the town, that a dinner had been prepared in the camp, if by chance" 
 the citizens {oppidCini) wished to dine.— 3. Afranius led {d£ducere)h.\s troops 
 from [hisj canq), and placed"" them on the middle [part] of the hill below 
 [hisj camp.— 4. Toward morning {lu.v) the army arrived under the walls of 
 the town.— 5. The Corinthians "thought, that it was safer for {to) them, to 
 remain a little longer {paulUper) under the protection {tutela) of a Roman 
 garrison, than to accept the nile'^' of Antiochus instead of that of Philip. — 
 d. At this time the greatest part of Italy had come under the power {potes- 
 tax) of Hannibal.— 7. The Senate was more numerous {frequent) than we 
 had believed that [it] could be in the month of December about the holi- 
 days {diesfestus).—^. When I was in Laodic5a, in Apamea, in Iconium, and 
 in Synnadd,^*' in all of which towns I stojiped {connnordri), the magistrates 
 and delegations (Ufpttio) of these towns (p. oJi.n. GO) mel''^'' me.— i). I have 
 done {perjicere) with the greatest care=*" everything thou hast ordered" (to) 
 
 « Nom. Perdiccax.—'' Nom. Iladrunutum.—^ Instead of: €09, qui superfu?runt.—^ Col- 
 ligere, to collect.—»» The city of .-irj/o-v is treated us a Pliirale tautuiu except in the Xoiui- 
 iiative, where it generally has the Greek form of the Nom. ^iul,^ Anjos (Gen. Argurum).— 
 »' Nom. iMctdiiinon.—^^ Ephori, tlie ephori, the highest magistrates after the kings in 
 Sparta.— " Fortification.— »4 J(/r^/<em to transpon.— i^ J/a^7/-«.s early.— *« To cross.— 
 1" Nom. Cyblle. the great goildess, whose \\ orship at the time of the decemvirs was 
 bn)nglit from Greece to Kome.—i» Edict.— i» /-"/oyyi-'/^wi, relatives.— 20 Z»ee//i **</yy/mi«7/i 
 ob'ire, to ..le.— '» Conjicere.— 2a Teluin.— " Obsidens.— ^^ Translate : under roofs dec(um). 
 —"^^ By chauce, forte.— 2« Constituere.— 2^ Dominatio.— s^Synuada, Gen. Orum.— 2» Couve- 
 nlre. — •" ]\ith, great care, diligeuter.— ^^ Mandirc. 
 
QC^ rREPOSITIONS. 
 
 „1 ,0 ao] .v.,enl w.Ucan,.n «^;; ;n T.;.oc^^ 
 
 of the Aeha-i, was at („, ^'7." '. " .-(".],.' i -l> Q. Maiciiis liex, m llie 
 
 council was l.eUl» by Un- chu-ts "'''',;> 'fiji,,,-;,- iVecily.*K-«U''"'««'-<') 
 
 a eclony to Isarbo.-13. ""-1]"»'*'"; vicit iadcs returned to AtUeiis lie 
 taken („M„ccre) t.) Cyprus.-14. .^l;'"^V^^^^^ applause of his fellow- 
 was received ^e.mi>cre) by "'\.' ™ i'"',,;'/^;;^;' 4a, because he saw, that 
 citizens.-15. Thenustocles em g.atul {^ <;^^7,^ ,i,j,„,,s had arrived in 
 ho was not safe enough u ^\rS;'»->'^„,\; ,'^?J,,,,„„,) ,0 the captain (,h„u- 
 Ephesus, he returned thanks lor 1"».^^" , r \r, .. -i li;w days anibassa.lors 
 «S of the ship, on which he >;«>,|;'^,^^'''.;7,'i .,-\ i^'ee w^s granted (*,«-) to 
 came from Hon.e, «^''^'V^'.^/^t.lroiuIilatCa, crossed over (f-vy,«T<;) 
 Philip.^18. Q'>"«:''"^' ;'"' f tX 'n a rHved in Italy Iron, Dyrrachi- 
 to Anticvra and Corn th.— U. \*';';," >'''';' ,,„ „, nu. in order to (Hupme) 
 urn, the delegations ot very >«;;' y « ';^ S devastated the territory of 
 salute (m Mure) [mc .— 20. Ihc ''"'"\.'' ''..,, xfhm 1 arrived m the 
 t e Bo i as far as the city (op,nd,nn) "'.^ '^adv deparle,! for CoritUh.- 
 cily ot-Argos, 1 hear.l, tl'^'^*?" '''?' f,. ve ,r in he ci V of Khodes.--i;J. On 
 22.^1 lived (.«/««OAi/'Oiu Ibts t;y'"'' I y.^;!'; "',u,sia, fo cnu-ralulate [hin,] 
 
 the same day a^'.^f ;'f ''•!,rTl « c<^>' ' >^ '""«'^' '" U"^)' "■i»'^''l?^"-"T1 
 concerning tbis vit ry.--|- 1 «^ ' ^.'^' ^ i,,;.^ i„ ^,1,« country ot 
 
 in Antiochia.-2.,. '1 he o hei «,"':";,„ j,, Mediolannm, the capital" 
 the 15o,ii.-2(l, On t''-'- J^^T,/,^^; V ..Xl wintered (/uV„.»r) in Capua 
 of the Insubnans.— .ii. Iht .11 my 01 ,..,„,,v,„ia — 28. Alter (iibml.iM.) 
 
 the ntost Hourishing (florcn.) '7" l."'.,^;.'.' "to' dismiss the auxiliary 
 Nutnantia had been des royed. ^»' I ' ^. ^ " -^ ^^uu disgrace so keen y,- 
 r r ^^.a '("Sr rt^TI e ^,^ ,.^., Hyhis Utne the m.bd,.y 
 
 this subject'" with Cato. 
 
 — . ,. 33 ppn Sicvnni<» — ^* Gen. LeucSdis.— 
 
 35 To icait vpon mmrbody, P'-";«,^;;,\if, l^l"^ ~y^ fed'somlthing keenly, aliquid le-re 
 
 * Ab urbe conditil. 
 
 «ical larv'ua-c H ihu:< cccurs two or t\uee «'"/e^ n J;»^^ ["^ jH 15 : :«, 11 ; 40, 4r, ; 41, IS. 
 Fn>ntu«ntlv it is M usod in the writers cf »1»^' ^'j\;' ."c^ur.^ freqn.-ntlv in classical i.r<.>e 
 
 f hiJonaacredenf. lb. 2.i, :.0 So lb. 4l.18.-3) In V,''' .'"\7"V,o 5^ _ j/ii m)>eruUo.^ tmcidan- 
 Z^^Z^'^^l^i^^^'^^^^ -re, and only poet.cal, or po.tci...cal. 
 
 69 
 
 CIIAPTEU SECOXD. 
 
 COXSTHUCTIOX OF THE VERB. 
 
 I. Construction in GenePwAl, in the Active and 
 
 Passive Voices. 
 
 § 4t'>0. Objects are divided into completing and incidental 
 (or advekuial) Objects. They are completing, if their gram- 
 matical form is determined by tlie governing verb, and inci- 
 dental, when their grammatical form is determined by the 
 general ideas of Place, 'Ijme, ^Manner, Cause, or Degree. Thus 
 the objects in the phrases lioston interjicere^ regi obedlre, ami- 
 cdi'um iiunnhilsse, ad jjaceni /lortc'iri, loqiil coepit are completing, 
 since the governing verbs require these objects to be respectively 
 in the Accusative, Dative, Genitive, Accusative with at/, or In- 
 finitive. i>ut the o1)jects in the phrase " Trls annos Homoe 
 vi.cif are incidental (adverbial), since the accusative annos 
 and the genitive Jiornce are not required by the verb vivere, but 
 
 by the incidental ideas of Time and Place with w^hich this verb 
 is connected. 
 
 Jicm. 1. We say tliat verbs are construed witli, or that they govern the 
 case or oUrt granniiatical tbi iiis of tliuir completing olvjects. Thus ccepisse 
 "governs" or ''is construed" with an Object-infinitive (^ 80 c, §342,1); 
 hortari ^vith tlie preposition ad (p. 41); intei-Jicere wdth' au Accusative; 
 obed'irc witii a Dative. 
 
 liiiii. 2. Certain vei'bs (e.g. Cfo^e, fieri, rkUri), require the addition of adjec- 
 tives or nouns to form eomplete Predicates. 8uch adjectives or nouns 
 are called Completing Predicates;* and the verbs, requiring them, are 
 said to be " construed with" or " to govern" a Predicate Nominative. 
 
 luiii. 3. ]SIany verbs require for their objects Infinitive or Finite Clauses. 
 Hence verbs may be construed in six different wa3's: 
 
 1) With Completing Predicates ; 2) with any of the Oblique Cases; 
 3) with Prepo.sitional Objects ; 4) with Object-Infinitives; 0) with Infini- 
 tive Clauses (Predicate-Infinitives) ; G) with certain Finite Clauses, intro- 
 duced by one of the conjunctions ut^ 7ie, quod, quiii^ quominus.'^ 
 
 » These are opposed to the Accessory Predicates. See § 4fil ; p. 245, § 555. 
 
 ^ A complete treatise on the construction of the verb must enumerate all verbs rc- 
 quirinj; the one or other of these complements. But tliis would exceed the limits of a 
 ^-^eneral grammar. While in the fii-st chapter we have shown tlie most important con- 
 uructions wiih Prepositions, and in § 3!Kj, Rem. 26 and 27, and Book VI. those with 
 Clauses, we shall limit this chapter chiefly to the construction with Cases and Ixfini- 
 TIVK8, referrinj,' the student for the rest partly to the Lexicons, partly to the chapters 
 mentioned. 
 
] 
 
 gg rnErosiTioNS. 
 
 „c [to do] .-hen I waited upon tl.oe" ij^ «i;;;^!!!:,-?- 1 U Tt LTac"" a 
 of the Acha-i, was at (,„ b.eyon" w 200J t «^^^^^^ ^,,^ 
 
 eounon was la.UPM>y .he c ,u . o^ .^^^^ 
 
 year 030 (R 1-, V' '"-i?,''*r ' V'' " , ' r^ were iilatt'd (»«'«(«■) on sliips ami 
 ft cclony to >iarbo.-13. '"'- 1'''^'^'^;'^ \\'m!:.,j,,^ returned to Athens, lie 
 taken (Mncere) t".t;yi>ras^-U. ^'^ ,f ,7^ ;t^^^ „f his lellow- 
 
 nus) of the ship, on which "'^/'f^l f,^'''^^'.;Tl ;;\ ..^;' «^, „,uited (*«v) to 
 
 e^'»«'-^''-»\';;"S"havil, d, e,l om 
 
 I'hilip.'-lS- Qmncluis, 'aM",-, \" ' ■" , , , ,,r,.iv«l in Italy Irom Dyrrachi- 
 
 ,o Anticyra and ^""".'l'-l^,,\''''™^''^i'eamrto «in order to (supine) 
 
 uin, the delegations ot v^^O' ™^"y ^ ^f ^, . ^^^^^^^^^ ;Ue territory of 
 
 salute (mluUtrc) [inc].— iO ^lic -vn >k> ' » '^ ^., ^y, j .,rriv(;d in the 
 
 the Boji as far as tlie city (opjmhm) »\TUs |V -l. v ne ^.„,i„ti,._ 
 
 23 I lived (commorun) m this [«lioU] >^;^ '" " ^™-,„ con.'ratulate [him] 
 ,he same davainbassadors came to UesaimU^^^^ 
 
 concerning this victory.-34. Ihc '-"'^ .", , 4' ,-,„i,i '^,, (lUo country of 
 in Anliochia.-2o The «f'" '''j"; ,^^'';',, . ^'.'^'e ,. mA.m. the capital"^ 
 the 15o.ji.-3<i, On tlie next '>-\;'''-;;\''>f;i"a wintered (hiemdre) in Capua, 
 of the Insubrians.— 37. Ibe army o 'V'lV"/ "'^;' ;.' .}a After («/««/, ,M.) 
 ,hc most flourishing (Mens) ^'\^}^l^^^'Z Ci(^ M^'^ ^»^»^»^ 
 Numantia had been destroyed =^'1 "' .!',f [^ j^',,^ "u.grace so keenly," 
 
 this subject^" witli Cato, ^__^ 
 
 • 1- ^ 33 r«»Ti «;irvnni» — ^* Gen. LcucMis. — 
 2- To wait vpon ,om,Mv, P';'',f .l"' ,". l^^lS^il'o fSwnlhi,,^ lcfe,d,j. aliciuid xgre 
 ;:,??.^^V:an:i:u^ I iSS^li^^Kle» -ucoritui U>i» tUiu. wUU Calo. 
 
 * Ab urbe condita. 
 
 SUPPLEMENT TO THE RULES ON PREPOSITIONS. 
 „454 M. .C^.h -..T.VK. is ex,ren,e,v -ejn .... loo», moan,,,. V.«^ 
 
 1,0' 'lit quid stah'L Cic. Le-. 2,2»).-.M//>*'/ l.h f'Vmuiii Liv 2: J, 11-2) A- a fynouym of 
 m enter (bcj-i-h-, beyond, over and iihoTC). /^f.^'^1," ://';/ lu :^i i-8._,s,/y)^/w/o/f //< A(fc 
 
 Hhi dona acrhlent. lb. -^.i, :> Sc. '>• ^ -j^;-; ,'. '/.h u" 2I L-Mii super alio-^ trucidan- 
 succes.sion:Vidnus super Tuinu.-:.s^^^^^^^^ 
 
 69 
 
 CHAPTER SECOND. 
 
 COXSTRUCTIOX OF THE VERB. 
 
 I. CoxsTRUCTiox IX Gexeral, IX THE Active axd 
 
 Passive Voices. 
 
 § 4*>0. Objects are dividod into completixg and ixcidextal 
 (or ADVEiiHiAL) Objocts. Tliey arc completixg, if their gram- 
 matical form is determined bv tlie goverxixg verb, and ixci- 
 dental, Avlien their grammatical form is determined by the 
 general ideas of Place, Time, Manner, Cause, or Degree. Thus 
 tho objects in the phrases Jiostem interjicere, regi obedlre, ami- 
 cor am menilnlsse^ ad 2>acem hortCcri, loqul coej^it are completixg, 
 since the governing verbs require these objects to be respectively 
 in the Accusative, Dative, Genitive, Accusative witli ad, or In- 
 fniitive. ]>ut the objects in tlie plirase " 7Vls annos HomcB 
 vlxW'' are incidental (adverbial), since the accusative aniios 
 and the genitive llomm are not required by the verb vivere, but 
 
 by the incidental ideas of Time and Place with which this verb 
 is connected. 
 
 Jiem. 1. AVe say that verbs are construed with, or that they goatern the 
 case or other grannnatical tbims of tlieir completin*^ objects. Thus ccepuse 
 "governs" or " is construed" witli an Object-intinitive (i$ 80 c, ^842,1); 
 hortCivi with the preposition ad (p. 41); interjicere with an Accusative; 
 obed'irc with a Dative. 
 
 Uim. 2. Certain verbs (e.g. csae^Jicri, rideri), require the addition of adjec- 
 tives or nouns to form complete Pkedicates. 8uc1i adjectives or nouns 
 are called Completing Pkedicates;^ and the verbs, requiring them, are 
 said to be " construed with" or " to govern" a Predicate Nominative. 
 
 Hem. 3. ^lany verbs require for their objects Intinitive or Finite Clauses. 
 Hence verbs may be construed in six ditierent ways: 
 
 1) With Comi)]eling Predicates ; 2) with any of the Oblique Cases; 
 ;3) with Prepositional Objects ; 4) with Object-Infiuitives ; 5) with Infini- 
 tive Clauses (Predicate-Infinitives) ; C) with certain Finite Clauses, intro- 
 duced by one of the conjunctions ut, 7ie, quod, quiii^ quominus!* 
 
 * These are opposed to the Accessory Predicates. See § iCA \ p. 245, § 555. 
 
 3 A complete treanse on the construction of the verb must enumerate all verbB rc- 
 quirinfi: the one or other of these complements. But this would exceed the limits of a 
 general grammar. While in the fli*st chapter we have shown tlie most important con- 
 snucti«)ns with Prepositions, and in § 81»:i, Rem. 26 and 27, and Book VI. those with 
 Clauses, we shall limit this chapter chiefly to the construction with Cases and iNriNi- 
 T1VE8, referring the situdeiit for the rest partly to the Lexicons, partly to the chapters 
 mentioned. 
 
70 
 
 CONHTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 In pomc connections completinG: objects take the form of Adverbs or Adjectives, uii : 
 Latlne loqvi, distrtuirij'acere. See below, No^. III. and IV. 
 
 § 4o7. Many verbs require but one completing object 
 (Rem. 8), and are then said to govern a simple object or com- 
 plement. But other verbs require two ditlerent complements 
 (a compound object), joined to each other. Thus the verbs 
 ccepisse, interjicere^ obed'ire, veren\ dlcere are construed with 
 SIMPLE, but permittere^ prohihh'c^ dare, jycrsuadvre with com- 
 pound objects. 
 
 Jhrn. i. Tt is cuPtomary to indicate the oonstruction of a jriven verb in an abridircd ftnin 
 by means* of tlie dilioren't cas^t's of the indefinite al'v/uis. To denote tliat a verb governs 
 the GENITIVE, DATIVE. ACCUSATIVE or ABLATIVE of the PERSON, We coimect it with ali- 
 ciijus (alc'fx). alictn, aliquem, aliqi'o. The acci>ativk of a 'ihino is indicated by aliquid ; 
 th»; GENITIVE. DATIVE, Of ABLATIVE of a THING bv aiicifjif-'^ Tt'i, uHcui Tti. (iHqud re. Thus 
 coiuhiniidre aliqunn alicii'pt)^ rti means ttnit condanmlre is construfd with tlu' accusative 
 of the Person, and the <,'enitivo of tlie Thin::, llort'tri aliquein ad a/lquid indicates that 
 horturi iroverns the accusative of tlie Person and the preposiiicm ad with an accusative 
 of the Tliinjr. Enpcre alicni aUquid means that eript/e is construed with the dative of 
 the Person and tlie accusative of the Thin^'. 
 
 § 458, Verbs which are construed with a completing object 
 in the Accusative are called Tkansitive ; all other verbs re- 
 quiring completing objects are called Intransitive. Neuteu 
 verbs are tliose that require no object at all. The completing 
 objects of transitive verbs are called Transitive Objects. 
 
 Bern. 5. Thus iiiterficere is a transitive, obed'ire an intransitive, and ilor- 
 m'lre a neuter verb. Many verbs, transitive in English, have intransitive 
 equivalents in Latin, as: obedlre, to obey; veHistere, to resist; nocere, to 
 hurt; parccre, to spare; inridPre. to envv ; fairre, to favor; jursuddere, to 
 persuade, all of which .crovern the Dative in Latin, while their English 
 equivalents govern the Objective. 
 
 § 4»>0. The construction of Latin verbs is oft-cn modified, 
 when they are placed in the Passive Voice.' Only transitive 
 verbs form a complete Passive. Any Transitive (unless it be a 
 Deponent) may be changed into a Passive form, without affect- 
 ing the sense, by making the transitive object the Subject of the 
 Passive voice, and changing the active subject, if the verb has 
 any, into the passive agent (§ 131, 2), as: 
 
 Active : Jliles labOrem pterfert. 
 
 Passive ; Labor a millte perfertur. 
 
 1 Hence, to determine the construction of a verb, it must be always taken In ita 
 ACTIVE voice. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 71 
 
 § 460. Impersonal Passives (in the 3d pers. sing.) are 
 formed : 
 
 1) As in English, from verbs that are construed wnth clauses. 
 Such clauses must be considered as the Subjects of the imper- 
 sonal Passive (§ 74, c), as: CcBsari lumtiatum est, Ilelvetios 2yer 
 provinciain iter facere co7u'in\ It w^as announced to Cajsar, that 
 the Helvetians were attempting to march through the province. 
 Ca3s. B. G. 1, 7. 
 
 2) Contrary to the P^nglish idiom, from intransitive and 
 NEUTER verbs, without any sid>ject at all (§ 74, «), as: Pugna- 
 tin\ a battle is ibught, people fight (literally: it is /ought). 
 M'lJil obedlfur, I am obeyed (literally: It is obeyed to me). 
 
 Item. G. The Passive of transitive verbs (§ 4r)9) which has the transitive 
 objeet for its subject, is called Personal Passive. When transitive verbs 
 are used Avithout their objects, they are sometimes, but rarely, placed in the 
 form of impersonal passives. 
 
 I\<m. 7. In the imjiersonal passives the active subject takes the same form 
 of the PASSIVE AGENT, as in the personal passive, as: Piigmltur a nobis, a 
 battle is Ibught by us (literall}': it in fought by uh). 
 
 Rem. 8. All lenses and moods of the verb, except the Imperative, admit 
 of an impersonal i)assive in the od pers. sinji;., as: Peccdbitur in hoc judicio, 
 Wroniis will be committed in this trial. Cic. Verr, 2, 4, 68. — Antea ratibus 
 narigabOtur, Formerl}' people sailed on rafts. Plin. 1, 7, 56. — Quum sededtur 
 nut (iinbull'tar, wiien one sits or walks. Gell. N. A. 2, 2. The compound 
 tenses of the Passive must then always take their participles in the Neuter 
 Gender, as: ?r/////;« f< people came. 
 
 Rem. 1). If the En<,dish equivalents of Latin intransitive verbs are trans- 
 itive (Hem. 5), the English verb forms a personal, but the Latin an imper- 
 sonal passive. In this case the Enixlish suljject must be changed into the 
 L:itin intransitive object, as : 'The king is obeyed by the people, regi a populo 
 obedltur (literally: It is obeyed to the king by the people). The Latin 
 verb nuist here always be placed in the 3d pers. Singular, although the 
 English verb shouUrbe in the Plural, or in the first or second person, as: 
 Tlie captives are spared, ca})tlvis parcitur (it is spared to the captives). 1 
 irax perf<U((ded, mihi persuasum est (it tsas persuaded to me). You will be 
 encitd, vobis invidebilur (it will be envied to you). 
 
 Rem. 10. If the impersonal passive has no intransitive object that may 
 be made the subject in English, the translation is made in one of the fol- 
 lowing ways: 
 
 1. The Latin verb is translated by an English transitive objective 
 • phrase, in which case the object is made the passive personal subject, 
 as: Pugndtur, a battle is tbught {pugmtre, to fight a I attle). — Apud Me- 
 idlum ccendtuni est, dinner was taken with ]Metdlus {c(£ndre, to take din- 
 ner). — Post c(£nam ambulabitur, after dinner a walk will be taken.— 
 Consurgitur ex consilio, the meeting is adjourned (it is risen from the 
 meeting). 
 
 III 
 
72 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 Sometimes an English norm with a personal or impersonal predi- 
 care r r • ') may bcT employed lor the Latin impersonal passive, as: 
 P, r/L/ Lr tliere was a tight.-.l^nV.r dimicraum .«^ the struggle was 
 iuml-S^^^^ gathering.-i//c bene dornutar, here are 
 n-ood arranurements tor sleeping. „ un,«Tr'» 
 "rotten the iiulehnite English subjects " people," " one, they 
 
 " we" may be employed, as : Cum ad ausfm ventum emt, when they had 
 come to the camp (UtJrally : when it had been come to the camp).- 
 tm line caum Uhw, l>eo,)le often laugh without cause.-.s. /uane 
 nadrjdtur, if one sails in the winter. 
 
 Rem. 11. Passive Infinitives are used impersonally, the same as act- 
 ive imi)ers()nals (^ 8vJ, 4) : r ♦! « 
 
 1 AVhen tliey are object infinitives, dependent on one ot t he 
 verbs ?x>..^, ncqn-ire, debere, sole re, inripere (ea'pisse), donnere^ The 
 first four of these verbs retain their active torm, and are placed in he 
 •]d DCS sin" while the object-intinitive, dependent on tliem, takes the 
 ;t>n if'an imper <>nal pas.ave. But the verbs incipere (caMUSse) and ^',u- 
 
 'rtakftr nipeis()nal pa..ire form in the;3d sing. ; mv;^-. t<>rms the 
 e plX- cU^,//,. ...^ and de.inere : desltum est ; as : IMbnsres^.h mm 
 /.^/ tl e em.nv eould not be resisted (literally : it could not be resiste^l 
 io e enemies).' Ambaldn debet, a walk must be Xakvn.--UjemetmuU^ 
 bVbus Z'^llef, Generally children and women are spared.- l^^y^m so- 
 t/ as is nsiial y the case (literall v : a. it is aecustonml to be dcme). But : 
 Funndli^^ EST (not ea^it), lighting commenced (it ^vas com- 
 meStobef<>u,Hit); 2.V/r/7 DEMTUM est, the siege was discontinued 
 
 ^V' Whe'^he; ':;;•' ScATES of Infinitive-clauses. In clauses of 
 thh'ki^id hesiXject-accusative is always understood; as: J^'^'^^^^'^^ 
 ;;;;; ^^ totis caJis trepidan, it was announced to the general h^ o^ 
 ^ternatum prevailed in the whole camp (///t/v/% : that iM>ab ticmbitci 
 in til: whol^camp).-/.^//^^r.^ sibi his calumniisvon admodum nocen, 
 he saw that he was not much injured by these calumnies. 
 
 Examples.* 
 
 1 Acriter utrimque {on both sides) nsque ad vesperum P".^"^ltii"^ f\- 
 cL B G. 1, 50.-5 Proeho equestri (§ 22U) mter dims f ^^ £1^— ^^ 
 TK o o_3 Celeriter ad castra concui-sum' est. lb. -^» «^^. — ^/^^V^V " 
 hmiento satis esset provlsum."^ lb. 3, 3.-5. Oppi; ;- Pauc.s dieln. 435 
 K. 38) (luibus-^ CO [thither) ventum eiat, expugnatuin e.t^ 1 K .^, ^3^ 0_ Ac 
 cessun/est* ad Britanniam omnibus navibus lb. "^' ^T; ' ;^^^ ^ *L^;^ .^^^^ 
 misqne ordinibus acriter resisterCtur. lb. o, 30.- 8. Non sn c paicuio in 
 c^ist is manctur. lb. 5, 31.-9. 8*vltum est^ in ceteros Trojanos. Ln 1 1.- 
 
 * In place of the former exord.es fc,r translating frnmLaUn^^^^ ^^'S^h'ihe "mdent 
 tracts taken from the Latin authors will now be given as txampits, %>uilu 
 ehould tran:?late into English. ^♦i,!^^ 3 nu;7.jis instead of nostonam.— * To 
 
 1 To run.--' To make provision for ^«'"«t^n^- ,n\il cruSv -^ 
 make an approach.-^ ;Scerlre, to commit cruelnos ; to kill cruelly. itcaam.. 
 in Sicily.-" To repose, rest.-» Alter the Greek fashion. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 73 
 
 3,26.-15. His persuadGri non poterat, ut diutius morarentur. Caes. B. G. 
 2, 10.— 16. Qunm subsidio'» veniri non posset. lb. 3, 3.-17. Ubi intellexit 
 C'aesar, eis nocGri non posse. lb. 3, 14.— 18. Ubi intellexit, ultro" ad se ve- 
 niri. lb. 5, 56.— 19. Per totam Italiam trepidSri coeptum est. Liv. 39, 17.— 
 20. Populus Komanus intelligit, secum actum esse" pessime. Cic. Verr. 2, 
 1,50.-21. Dici'^a defensore coeptum est. Cic. Verr. 2,1,89.-22. Dixit 
 sibi non esse itum obviam (§ 433, K. 31), ne tum quidem cum iri maxime 
 (just) debuit." Cic. Att 2, 1.-23. Dubium non est, debellari*^ eo die cum 
 tSamnitibus poluisse. Liv. 7, 28.-24. Negat jucunde posse vivi, nisi cum 
 virtute viviltur. Cic. Tusc. 3, 20.-25. Nee vero nnivei-so generi humSno, 
 sed etiam singulis a Deo consuli'" solet. Cic. Nat. D. 2, 65.-26. Jam pri- 
 dem" contra eos desituni est disputari. Cic. Fin. 2, 13.— 27. Habitilri ait 
 Xenophanes in luna. Cic. Ac. 2,39.— De provinciis decedatur, in urbein- 
 que redeiltur. lb. Leg. 3, 8. 
 
 II. CONSTRUCTIOX OF THE VeRB WITH COMPLETING PREDICATES 
 
 (Predicate-Xomixative). 
 
 § 401. The Predicates connected with Verbs are either 
 COMPLETING OF ACCESSORY. The forni of the COMPLETING Predi- 
 cate is that of an adjective or noun ; that of an accessory 
 Predicate, a Participle, expressed or understood. 
 
 Iie)n. 12. In tlic phrase Ilomerus ceecus fuit, or Ilomerus poeta fuit, the 
 ■words c<i!ci(8 and poeta are completing Predicates. In the phrase Epami- 
 nondas vincens mortuus est, the participle viiicens is an accessory Predicate. 
 Tlius the adjective triatcs in tSequani trintes terrani intuentur, Caes. B. G. 1, 
 32 (the ISequani look sad on the ground), and the noun prcetor in ^Ebutim 
 preft^r in procinciam abiit (He went as praetor to the province), are acces- 
 sory Predicates, the participle being of the copula being understood in both 
 words. Completing Predicates form together with their governing verbs 
 only one single Predicate, and onl}- one phrase with the common subject; 
 but accessory Pr(idicates form a combined phrase together with the prin- 
 cipal predicative plirase. Epaminondas xincens Quortuus est may be resolved 
 into the two predicative phrases: Epaminondas ticit and Epajninondas mor- 
 tuus est. uEbutius pnvtor abiit consists of the two predicative phrases: 
 yEbiitius abiit, ^butius praetor fuit. 
 
 Beni. 13. Accessory predicates must be distinguished from nouns in Ap- 
 positicm. with which they are very similar in form. The latter are attrib- 
 utes of tlieir governing nouns, while the former are predicates, logically 
 united with the principal predicate. 
 
 § 409. The verbs which (in certain significations) require 
 the addition of completing Predicates, are: 1) the verb esse^ as 
 copula; 2) the verbs /eri and vicleri (§§ 132, 133) ; 3) the verbs 
 evadere (in the meaning "to become," "to turn out"), manere 
 
 »0 To aspist, to help.— 1» Voluntarily .— 12 Agere cum aliqtio, to treat somebody.— ^» i?i- 
 cere, to plead.—»* Inst, oi debnisset, oujjht to have.— ^^ Uebellare, to finii?h a (the) war.— 
 " Consulere alicin, to take care for s^omebody.— i' Long bince. 
 
 n 
 
 't§ 
 
 *1 
 
74 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 75 
 
 and permantre (to remain), existere (in the meaning "to come 
 out" "to be")' 4) the Passives of those transitive verbs which 
 in c'ertain significations require a double Accusative, as creari 
 and dun, to be elected ; dedararl, to be dechired ; appdlari, 
 vocar(^u<i did, to be called; judtcari, hahlri, and extsUman, 
 to be held, considered, and several others. (See p. 101 ) 
 
 If these verbs are finite, their completing predicates must 
 be in tbe nominative case. 
 
 1 H-mnih-il vrcvtor factiis ci^t, postqunm rex fuerat. N"p. ITann. 7.— 
 
 1 r 31-' An i.'.>iuis .x IM.ilipin ainlcis unus (alone) incorrupt a»'" 
 Itt'^mJrut Liv 40 54.- 10. C.J,L cre<udur C»sar et Servlu.s t »3. 
 
 7.'!!!« 14 ' For tlie a-rcomcnt of the Predicate Nominatives in number 
 nmlmnder s Je ^ 03 12 und ^ 75. Poets sometim.s place the predicative 
 ad ective in the rieuier g^nderfeven if the subject is a mascuhne or femi- 
 nine Dun as Varlum et imtabile semixr {e.t) fcmna, \ irg. ^n- 4, oOy 
 ^^ ^mai^ is exJ^emely rare in c lassical prose, aud o-;^^- -'^ -}^^Y 
 nouns only as: Omninm. rerumf' mor^ t.t extrtnouu Cicl^am. ^. -I; I- 
 
 T/V n i^)r the a.-ieement of the copuhi >vith the subject, see ^ 03 2. 
 ^V e the su eet a d predicate-noun are of ditlerent numbers, the copu a 
 
 soi^^s %L. with \he number ot- the V^^^^^^^^^^t^l'^^s 
 ino- witli that of tlie subject, as: Aiule nunc tie tuo Mic^uiata dt^ie, cups 
 
 ^''l^ni ^1g' The veil) ''to appear" in connection with a predicate-adjective 
 or noun must not be transhued by apparere, but by r.d^n. ^^j^!^'^ 
 ^J\.ignitication '' to seem" only in l-st-ch^sica 1>^--;.- ' ^^^ ^ ^ ^! 
 
 rere is construed with an inlinilive clause: Lt palatum luaictm e^ise ap 
 parCret. Liv. 40, 55. 
 
 fieri properly nH'a.is - K, be nmdc i C'' ^^;/ /j*^,p . j ;.:,,^?i'' . ,;;, .ete<l with the.e verb, ia 
 
 I Painful.-' Flavoring condi.nont.-3Mitiejite-^A.^ 
 « Fastidious -' bi^t. ora/iv'/rtz/^/o-once.— « Delender.— " t or '"^-^i''^"'- 
 
 n'lCsr.;.-- The «am,/of '1'« ---Xli;,fe'tr'^s'S" v cll^cx ?££ in thU 
 
 * Thi>* «'enitive is equivalent to an ar)^omIe nt uici vs «^w;. 
 pa^-.a-c the neuter gencfer of the predicative adjective. 
 
 JTc iS seen (being) sad; Consvl victor exstitif, the Consul came out as (beino-) a conqueror 
 St eqvites inadumes eva^issfinf. if the horsemen had escaped unharmed. Liv .39 50 In this 
 pentence tncolumes is evidently an accessouy predicate of evadere. But the mentioned 
 verbs, Irom being frequently connected with accessory predicates, have been ijraduallv 
 connected with me idea of the copula, contained in the accessory predicates and thus 
 assumed the new meanings "to become," '"to seem," "to remain." Uence the ques- 
 tion, whether a predicaie-noun or adjective must be considered as a completing or as an 
 ACCESSOUY predicate, depends simply on the connection of the copula. If the idea of the 
 copula IS contained in the governing verb (which is alwai/s the case with ^ri and vidiri) 
 the predicaiive word must be considered as a completing predicate. But when the 
 copula (as participle) must be understood with the accompanying adjective or noun the 
 latter must be considered as accessory predicates. Thus it is erroneous, to reckon the 
 verbs jnort and nasct, as some grammarians do, among those verbs that are construed 
 \yith predicate-nominatives, as: A'eim nascitur dives, Sen. ;!0, Nobody is bora (bein^') 
 rich. Jnnctun nmior, Nep. Ep. 9, I die (being) uucouquered. 
 
 § 403. Verbs generally can take completing predicates only 
 when tliey are finite or ixfinitives. 
 
 1. SuBJECT-iNFixiTiVES and the Infinitives in Ixfixitive- 
 CLAusES take their completing Predicates in the Accusative. 
 
 1. Consulem fieri valde utile Mario videbatur. Cic. Off. 3, 20.— 2. JS'on 
 ease cupidum,''^ pecuuia est; non esse emdcem,'* vectlgal^* est; contentum 
 vero suis rebus es>>e, maximae sunt certissimaique divitiae. Cic. Par. 6, 3.— 
 3^ Magnis in laudibus'*^ tola fere fuit Grojcia, vlctorem Olvmpi®" citdrL'^ 
 Nep. pref— 4. Id eniin ipsuni est summi oratoris,'" sumnium oratdrem 
 popiilo uden. Cic. Brut. 50.— 5. Traditum"-'" est, Homerum ciecum fuisse. 
 Cie. Tusc. 5, 39. — 0. Non paliar flagitiis tuis me infatneni'^ fieri. Tereut. 
 lleaut. 5, 4, 14.— 7. Priiicipent^'* se esse mavult quam videri. Cic. Otf. 1, 
 ID. — 8. Judicabat, cos uou posse oratores evadere. Cic. de Or. 1,28. — 
 D. (Romulus dixit) se dciim esse et Quir'inum vocari. Cic. Rep. 2, 10.— 10. 
 Scimus rerjem Persea'" ab populo Romano appellatuni {esse). Liv. 41, 24. 
 
 2. Object-Infinitives take their completing Predicates in 
 the Nominative, when their governing verbs are finite. 
 
 1. Cato esse quam Tideri bonus malcbat. Sail. Cat. 54, G.— 2. Oracula 
 
 evanuCrunt-* postquam liomines minus credalC^'" esse ccepCrunt. Cic. Div. 
 
 2, 57.-3. Quc-ero ex te. cogitarisne niigar fieri in Metelli locum. Ib.Vatin. 
 
 8. — 4. Senilis-" stultitia deliratio (silliness) appelldri solet. lb. Sen. 11. 
 
 liem. 18. The accusative case of the completing Predicate in Subject- 
 Intinitives must be explained from the eonstruction t)f the Accusative with 
 the Intiuitivc. Subject-Jntiiiitives always have an uncektain rEUSox for 
 their logical subject. The sentence " It is preferable to be free," means 
 " It IS preferable that one is tree" (prcestat " aliquem" liber urn esse). Hence 
 the CASE of the completing Predicate in Subject-Infinitives must be an 
 Accusative, and its gender the Masculine. See ^ 78. 
 
 Ueni. 11). It is ditiereut, when the impersonal Predicates are connected 
 with personal objects. These objects are then at the same time the 
 logical Subjects of the Subject-infinitive, and hence the completing Predi- 
 cates of the latter must agree with the object of the impersonal Predicate 
 
 i> Greedy.— 1* Eager to buy.— > A rent.— >• It was a great glory.—" In the Olympic 
 games.- »«Same as deciarCoi.—^^ '* That very drcunislatvce is ttie mark of a great orat<jr.'' 
 —•■'0 It has been reported.—'-»» Infamous.— SJ The first, the foremost.— as Greek accusative 
 o[ Peraeus.—'^* Jt^va/iescere, to vanish.- -^ Credulous.— '•^« Of old men. 
 
76 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 in case, gender, and number (§ 94, Hem. 3) This case is ^ f I^ati^;, ^^^J^^^ 
 the verbs licet and mc.se est are connected with objects m the Dat v e, as 
 la republka mihi negliijaiti esse nori licet. Cic Att 1, 17, 6 ^" *- j "\^' ^^ 
 rarely, even in tliis connection the completing l^^'^'^.^^^^te f lound m the 
 accusative singular masculine according jo the rule m Rem. 18. bee lor 
 the particulars of this construction p. G17,9. 
 
 Bern. 20. Participles arc but rarely construed with completing 1 redi- 
 cates. This rule has two exceptions : 
 
 1 The participle of the copula esse, which as such does not exist, may be 
 uLrioodulil^ construction of the Absolute Ablatives The predica ive 
 adjectivr^ noun is then phiced in the Ablative, as : Ctcero,u^ ccco, while 
 Cicero was living. See ^ 397. -, o .^-. ^- a 
 
 2 The Participles of the Passive verbs, mentioned ^ 40X., iNo. 4, aie 
 soLumL con' tilled with completing P-dicate. but on^ C^i^ses if"^; 
 struction with Absolute Ablatives, 0) in other ^"^^ ^/j^'^^lp^^'" .^',J' // ^^ ^^ 
 n-irticiole is either in the Nominative or Accusative. Ihe compietinj. 
 Crates ag^;^ then always with the governing P-^j-P -' -(^^^J^ 
 the construcuon of the Absolute Ablatives are placed m the Ablatn t cast. 
 
 1. Inprlmis quod JEduo.^fratres con^<^"qyi^eo'^^^^^^^^ 
 
 jiiio. iiiv. •*, iu. ^- , I'lm^ul uiio omuium (oj all pti'sons alone) ctiuoie 
 
 ctrti&nbus lacus.a» Li\. 4j, 21.— o. '-Vt^ ji i.V fi l".)-t ilcclurifiob co/u<ult^ Alblmiin 
 
 hostc decrelo. Cic. Phil. 11, 7. 
 
 3. In poetry and postclassical prose Participles in tl^cDATiVF are some- 
 times construed with completing Pi-edicates in the same 9f .^- J^^^^^Vf^^?,^,^' 
 80UY Predicates this construction occurs even in classical piose (p. .jO, 
 
 ^^"T Womittit33 tamen Octavianus Antonio /m«f/i jndicSto amicos omnes. Suet. Oct 17. 
 2. 'Muximo Vibi S evSlcre" onti.Mr.- Val. Max. 8 h, .._. PnM,atna man nou licuU 
 
 illi sapienaf<.-<imo ab Appoline judicato bocraii. 1 lin. 11. ^. », -iU -iu. 
 
 4 Participles in the genitive cannot take completing predicates, but 
 thcv sometimes take accessoiiy predicates, agreeing with them in the 
 genitive • as: Species lusontis interempti Jilii, the image of his innocently- 
 killed son. Liv. 40, 50. See p. 256, Obs. 3. 
 
 § 464. Pkkdicative Genitive.— The Predicate-nominative, 
 denoting the general idea of a Person or Thing, is often omit- 
 ted and°understood, when an atiuibutive genitive is dependent 
 on it. The genitive has then the office of a completing Predi- 
 cate in the same manner as an absohite adjective performs the 
 function of a substantive (§ 353); as: Jlcec domus Senqyronil 
 est (instead of res ISempronil), this house is the property ot 
 ^Qm^vom\x^.— Condemnarejudlcis est (instead of res, officlum 
 judicis), to condemn is the duty (the affiiir, business) o f the 
 
 ^ ,T ron«in« -'« Master of the horse.-^» Elected gcneral.-3«>Cer^tor./!o, I am informed 
 Oitendly-f become more certain n-'^So.., S'H'ty.-^^ To prouounce. declare.-»» t. e. 
 lie a owed all of A.'« Iriend. to joiu him.-»* It fell to your lot. 
 
 CONttTBUCTION OF THE VERB. il 
 
 judge. — Gajns siimmce audacim fait (instead of /io??io SM;/i??ioB 
 audaclce), Gajus was a man of the greatest boldness. 
 Genitives of this kind are called Predicate-Genitives. 
 
 Jiem. 21. This Genitive, which is conceived to depend on a noun of 
 GENERAL import, must be distinguished from the Genitive referring to a 
 noun, preciously mentioned. The former is analogous to an absolute, the 
 latter to a disjunct adjective (§ 358). The English language generally 
 employs here the demonstrative that or the indetinite numeral one 2l^ gov- 
 erning word, while the Latin does not use any governing word at all, but 
 supplies it from the text, as : Ut tuuni factum alieni hominis, meum vera 
 coiijunciiasinii et auiicissimi esse videdtur, Cic. Fam. 1,9 ; So^that thy action 
 seems that of a stranger, but mine that of a most intimate friend. 
 
 § 46o. The Predicate-Genitive is used 1) to express posses- 
 sion, or relations conceived as a Possession (Genitive of the 
 2)ossessor) ; 2) to denote those relations which an impersonai 
 Predicate has to its subject-infinitive or to a subject-clause 
 (Impersonal Predicate-Genitive) ; 3) to denote qualities or 
 relations conceived as qualities of a Person or Thing (Quali- 
 tative Genitive). 
 
 Jie)n. 22. Predicate-Genitives are connected not only with esse, but with 
 all verbs having the force of the copula {Jiiirij videri, etc. Liv. 1, 39).* 
 
 § 4G6. 1. The Genitive of the Possessor, in connection with 
 the co})iila, is generally rendered by " to belong to''* or " to he the 
 liropertu of^'' as: Omnia., quae rnidieris futrunt, \ivi Jiunt, all 
 that has belonged to the wife, becomes the 2^^operty o/*the 1ms- 
 band. Cic. Top. 4. — Ut disceptarent.^ quid cujusque esset, that 
 they disputed what was the property of each. Liv. 42, 23. 
 This genitive is changed into a possessive adjective, when the 
 possessor is expressed by a personal pronoun : Omnia, quae n\ea 
 falrunt, vcstra facta sunt, all that belonged to me, has become 
 your property (yours). 
 
 Hem. 23. Sometimes not the person, but abstract ideas to which some- 
 thing is conceived to belong, esi)ecially the idea of Time, are expressed 
 by this Genitive, as: ]^oii hujus temjwris iata ratio est, that method belongs 
 not to this lime, lllais temporis {oitdtis) fait Aiwuagoras, to that time (age) 
 belonged Anaxagoras. 
 
 2. The Impersonal Predicate-Genitive is differently trans- 
 lated according to the relation expressed. Such genitives 
 
 ^ ■ — — - ' .-^^^ ■— ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■— II ■ ■ . . ■— i.-l. ■ ■■ ..I. . I IMM'P 
 
 * For their connection with the verb?, governing a double accusative, see p. 102,^.76. 
 
 
78 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE YEIIB. 
 
 must be conceived, as if the nouns res, officium, munus, vidi- 
 cium (affiiir, matter, business, duty, province, sign, evidence) 
 were the proper predicates. Often they are rendered by simple 
 predicative adjectives, or other predicates, corresponding to the 
 indicated relation, as: Cujusms hominis est errare, Cic. riul. 
 12, 2, it is in the nature of every man to err (every man is liable 
 to' error). Inim'icis cor^Jidere summm stultitm est, to trust 
 enemies is a mark (evidence) of the greatest folly. Est bonl 
 princlpis legihus oUcmperare, it is the duty of a good ruler to 
 obey the laws. Hoc non est turn gravitatis atque auctoritatis, 
 this is incompatible with thy dignity and position. Coyisulum 
 est videre, 7ie quid respublica detrimentl capiat, it is the busmess 
 (province') of the consuls to see, that the republic may not suffer. 
 When this relation is expressed by a personal pronoun, the 
 latter is changed into a possessive adjective in the neuter 
 singular: Nostrum est, vidvre ne irrita lex sit, it is our duty to 
 see that the law be not ineffectual. 
 
 3. The QUALITATIVE GENITIVE is either translated by the 
 preposition of, in which case a governing noun of general im- 
 port is often introduced, or by an adjective, or by the verb to 
 have (in connection with the copula), as : Gajus summm fuit 
 prudentioe, G. was a man of the greatest prudence. Critogna- 
 tus magncB apud 2^lehem auctoritatls fuit, Cr. was of great in- 
 fluence (very influential, had great influence on) with the people. 
 ^JIoc maximi momenti est, this is of the greatest importance (is 
 
 very important). 
 
 This form of the Predicate-genitive is often used to introduce 
 the relations of weight, measure and number as predicates, as 
 if these were qualities of the subject, as : Murus fuit pedum 
 sedecim, the wall was of sixteen feet (was sixteen feet long). 
 Legio trium millium peditum fuit, the legion was (consisted) 
 of three thousand foot-soldiers. 
 
 I 1 (Nccavit Caesar) Galliam potius esse ArtoriAti quam 'populi^i^- 
 mani. vL. B. G. 1, 45.-2. Jam iiie ^W^i;*^' totum-es.se scisCic^^ 
 2, 13, 2.-3. Hie versus Plautl uoii est. Cic. Fam. U, 1j.— 4. Bello Gallice 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 79 
 
 prorter Capitolium atque arcem omnia hoHtium erant. Liv. G, 40. — 5. Nolae 
 (a cit)^) sniiatus Romaw'n-inn, jilebs Ilannibalis erat. Liv. 23, 30. — 6. Thebge 
 poini'ii l^)l11;■Ini jure belli fact;i? sunt. Liv. 33, 13. — 7. ExistimavGrmit, do 
 ■ - - - - . Cajs. B. 
 
 siimiml^" belli non finnia jiulicium," sed impevatons esse. 
 
 U.l, 
 
 est tarn 
 0. 3Ia<i:ni 
 
 35 Wholly. 
 
 41.— 8. Petiilaiititi^'* et libido magis adolescentium est quam setium. Cic. 
 Sen. 11. — {). Damnatio^" est judicum, poena*" legis. — 10. Non recusilmiis 
 quin** omnia, propter qu{C belhim initum est, vestra siat. Liv. 30, 30. — 
 11. C'urio fuit igilur ejusdcm ff^r//.-? fere. Cic. Brut. 32.— 12. Ejusdem fere 
 tciiUHjrin fuit eques liomanus, C. Titius. lb. 45. 
 
 IL 1. Judicis est, semper iu causis " verum sequi. Cic. Off. 2, 14. — 
 2. Adolcscentis est, majores natu verCri. lb. 1,34.-3. Non minus est imt 
 peratOris^ cousilio supertlre quam gladio. Caes. B. C. 1, 72. — 4. Fortis animi 
 et constanlis est, non perturbari in rebus asperis."*^ Cic. Off. 1, 23. — 5. Nihil 
 igusti aniini tamciuc parvi quam amare divitias. lb. 1, 20. — 
 est ingodi, sevocarc** menteni a sensibus. Cic. Tusc. 1, 10. — 
 7. Est </«.-* qui dat, non ejus qui petit, conditiones dicere pacis. Liv. 30, 
 30. — 8. Id enim ipsum est summi oratOiis, sumnnun oratoi'em populo videri. 
 Cic Br. 50. — 9. Dortona*^ mteHiu:entis'*® est, vidCre quo feraf*Vnatura sua 
 quemque. Cic. Br. 50. — 10. Menliri non est mexm. Ter. Heaut. 3, 2, 38. — 
 11. Si c>tju.squam, carte tiium est, nihil praeter virtutem in bonis ducere.*" 
 Cic. Fin. 3, 3. — 12. NoHtnun est ferre inodice*" populi voluntates. Cic. 
 Plane. 4. — 13. Tempori cedere semper sapientis est habitum. Cic. Div. 4, 
 <J. — 14. Duri hominis, vel vix hominis vidCtur, periculum capitis^" inferre 
 multis.'^ Cic. Off'. 2, 14. 
 
 in. 1. p. Murajna multae industries et magni laboiHs fuit. Cic. Brut. 67.—- 
 2. Vir bonus sunnuie pietdtis erga deum est. Sen. Ep. 70. — 3. Magni 
 judicii, sumnue etiam facultdti/'^ esse debObit^'* orator. Cic. Or. 21.— 
 
 4. Virtus tantilrum viriuni est, ut se ipsa tueiltur. Cic. Tusc. 5, 1, 2. — 
 
 5. Hannibal tumulum^* tutum, commodumque alioqui," nisi quod^" longin- 
 quaj uquationin^'' erat, cepit." Liv. 30, 20. — 0. Philocles animadvertcbat,^^ 
 se nulllus momenti apud exercitum esse. Nep. Ale. 8. — 7. Id est maximi 
 momenti et pondens. Cic. in Vat. 4. — 8. Reliquum spatium quod est pedum 
 sexceutorum. Ca^. B. G. 1, 38.— I). Fluminis altitQdo''" erat circiter pedum, 
 trium. lb. 2, 18. — 10. Xerxis classis milie et ducentarum navium fuit. Nep. 
 Tiiem. 2, 5. 
 
 Item. 24. For the distinction between the Genitive and Dative of the 
 Possessor see p. 82. A peculiar formula of the Genitive of the Possessor 
 is Hie phrase ditiOnis alicujus esse or fieri, to be or become subject to some- 
 body (literally <^ he of somebody's rule), as: Urbes, quce, Carthaginiensium 
 diiionis erant. Liv. 30, {).— Albdni ditiOnis alienoi (to foreign rule) Jdcti erant. 
 Liv. 1, 25. 
 
 J{e)n. 25. The Impersonal Predicate-Genitive often consists of an 
 absolute adjective in the Genitive Singular, denoting " persons in general," 
 ■Nvuh the force of an impersonal predicative adjective (§ 77), as : titulti est, 
 
 "On the administration of the war.— " Cons^true: Judicinm de gumma belli non 
 puuni esse, ged iniperainns.— ^<* Frivolity.— ^» Condemnation.—'»" The penal provisiout?.— 
 *» We do not objict lebt.—'*^ Trials.— ■•^ Under ditticullies.— " To i^ever.—^^ Teacher.— 
 <« Intelligent.— <^ Literally : whither hUi nature carrier erei-yhody. Translate : %i'hat are 
 every one's natural tendencies, a sentence which, literally translated, would make very 
 bad Latin.- <« Literallv : to reckon amonj,' (§ IM. R. 75) the goods. W e say in Enj^lish : 
 among the blenftings.—*^ With composure.— ^» Life.— ^^ To bring on many.— ^^ Talent.— 
 "Will have to be.— &* A hillock.— " In other respects.— " Except that.— ^^ Too distant 
 from the supply of water.—'» To occupy. — ^" To perceive. — •" Depth. 
 
 %\ 
 
80 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 rebm inarnbm commorm, it is foolish (literally: it i^ ^^^^J^^J'^/ ^ /^^^*^J 
 per.^on) to be impressed by worthless matters (tr.tles). T lie Latin does no 
 employ adjectives of one termination (^ 213), and especially not those with 
 consonant-stems (^ 310) as impersonal predicates Instead of tl»^^^ the 
 form of an impersonal Predicate-Genitive is almost always used. Thus it 
 would be unusual to sav, Taclre prudent cxU it is prudent to be silent, in- 
 stead of Tacere prudentls est (it is the mark of a prudent man). 
 
 1 Est pr^identis snstinSre {to resUt) impetum benevolentiie. Cic. Ani. l;--2^^';s';??: 
 re (iukl d. se qnisque ..'utiat. m>n solum arrc^um s e.t sod o.nnTno ^l'^^^>>a '-7 ^»?- J\«- 
 1, 28 -3. In trauquillo «2 tempestaiem adver.<aiu " opiaie deineutis est. tie. Ofl. 1, -44. 
 
 Rem 26. The Genitive of quality must always be connected with an 
 attiibutrve adject ive. Thus, instead of - He loas a man of wealthr we mus^ 
 say in Latin - He was a man oi great wealth," or "He was a wealthy 
 (pecunioms) man." 
 
 Bern 27. The Genitive of quality oftener occurs in the form ot an AT- 
 TmBUTiVE than in that of a predicative phrase as: renclenYi^ctat<B 
 virtfitiH rintm Just., Pericles, u man of eminent qualities.— yirw^fe/w, mttis 
 ^qenUjlLem, ui., Aruns a youth of a sweet character.- A^^r guatuor 
 Sr"i Liv., a held of tour' acres (a four-acre lot). In predicative phmses 
 the AblItive of quality, which has the same meanin- as the qualitative 
 lenitive Ls far mofe frequent than the latter. The Ablative ot Quality 13 
 properly an object, which probably has been introduced in consequence 
 ofTi ( initted -ovei'ning participle, such as -e^idowcdr provided'' {pr^dc- 
 
 Pdt), G. was a man of great gitmyxs.—MilUcH bono ammo jua'unt, the scl- 
 diers were of good cheer. 
 
 1 rComDerif ^ C«?ar) ipsum es'se Dnmnori<;em«5 p„mmjl audaci,!. magna apud ple- 
 
 bem V;riJat«8 B G 1. 18.-2. A-e^ilaus ,tatara^' fuit humili ela>/vx>/-e exiguo Nep. 
 
 l^;S/s_ 3. Cat"; hi omnibus rebu.^inKuUlri fuil prudentui ^\^'{^''''^>-'\..^''L nt 2 V 
 
 4 "llerodotUH tantfl est dixptentm, nr me (luidem majjnopere delectet. Cic. de Or. i, 13. 
 
 —5. Summo iste quidem dicitur iiifjeiiio luisse. Cie. Brut. ob. 
 
 Bern 28 Re"-ardinir the difference between the Genitive and Ablative 
 of qlvlh'y, w"e remark: 1) that both forms are indiscriminately used m 
 nie de ineat ion of character and special qualities, although the ablative is 
 far more freciuent. 2) We must use the ablative m describing external 
 qualities (example No. 2) and momcniarf/ dispositions, as in the phrase: 
 ZTanlno essc.^ S) We Jmt use the genitive, when the prediCjUe ix-ters to 
 number, weight, and measure (j> 46G. Compare examples III. Nob. 8, J, 10). 
 Pum 20. The Ablative of quality is, like the genitive, also used at- 
 tuibutively, especially as an apposition, in which relation the genitive is 
 
 extremely rare. r.- ti * r~ 
 
 1 Alunena mediocri*^ ingenio, sed ma^no sturlio renim veterum. Cic. »™J; ['••- 
 o Emt i^ter'LabiGuum atqiie bustem dilScili //«/i-vi^/-» rtumen r>pi,^f/ue pnerupn.. » 
 %^ n G 6 7 -3 1 i(.m>ui^ ad mensam eximia /o;7/ar puer... ju^sit conMMere '" 
 CIc!'Tusc!'5 -il'.- 1. clJm- Valerium Pn.cillum, .ummi virtule et h,u,uinitaie adolc- 
 eceiitem, adAriovistum misit. Lies. li. G. 1, 47. 
 
 § 407. The form of a PiiEDiCATE-GENiTiVE is frequently 
 used with the force and instead of a rredicate-Nomiuative, in 
 
 _«» Very steep.— ^* To wait at table {.ad meiusam). 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 81 
 
 order to represent an abstract predicate-noiin, which in English 
 has the indefinite article. This is especially the case with the 
 nouns 77103, consiietudo, jus. Instead of IHc fidt tnos (hoc fuit 
 jus) apud Jiomd?ios, the Latin frequently says: Hoc fuit moris 
 (juris) ajmd jRoniduos* This was a custom with the Romans. 
 
 1. Est enim hoc Gallica3 coTisuetudims, ut viatores'* etiam invltos'^ con- 
 sistere^' cogant. Caes. B. G. 4,5. — 2. Negilvit, m^fvis esse Grascorum, ut in 
 convivio virorum mulieres accumberent."'* Cic. Verr. 1,26. — 3. Marcellus 
 id HQC juris nee j^tesidtis''^ suaj esse dixit. Liv.^5, 7. — 4. Quod jE tolls 
 juris est, idem et nobis sit. Liv. 41, 24. 
 
 Rem. 30. In the same wMy the neuters of absolute adjectives are fre- 
 quently used as predicate-genitives, when they with the subject may form 
 a partitice phrase (t^^ 372, 373), as : Demonstrant , sibi prcEter agri solum 
 nihil esse retiqui, they show that nothing was left to them but the mere 
 ground of their tields. Ca?s. B. G. 1, 11. — Ca?sar quid sui consilii sit ostendit, 
 Caesar explains what his purpose was. lb. 1, 21. 
 
 § 4:G8. Puedicate-Dative. — The predicate-noun, connected 
 with the copula, assumes the form of the Dative in two con- 
 structions: 1) that of the Dative of the Possessor; 2) tliat of 
 the ABSTRACT Pkedicate-Dative, which is also called the Da- 
 tive of Pltrpose or the construction of the double Dative. 
 
 I. The Dative of the Possessor denotes the owner of the 
 thing which is introduced as the grammatical subject. The 
 verb esse in this connection is rendered by " to Aaye," " to own,^'' 
 so that the Dative of the Possessor is turned into the English 
 subject, and tlie Latin subject into the English ob.iect pos- 
 sessed, as: Z^oy/« ^^5 ei fuit omni suppellectile instructa, he had 
 (owned) a house, provided with all conveniences. This dative 
 is also used to express relations similar to possession, as rela- 
 tionship, habits, opinions, and all that may be an object of "to 
 have," as: Frater mild est^ I have a brother; nobis aliud est 
 ncQOtium, we have another business. 
 
 1. Jlomini cum deo similitudo'" est. Cic. Leg. 1, 8.-2. Semper in civi- 
 tfite (ei) quibus opes'^ nuiloi sunt, bonis'* invident. Sail. Cat. 37. — 3. Quot 
 
 * Tbis form must be cousidered as analogous to the Partitive Genitive (hoc jjwris, 
 instead oi hie inof). 
 7» Travelhrs.— ■''«' AjT'Unst their inclination.— " To ^Xo^.—''*AccumJ)ere in convivw. 
 
 po 
 " Means.— ^8 Those that are well off. 
 
82 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VEKB. 
 
 homines, tot sontcntiae :'" suns cuique mos est. Tor. Phorm. 2 4, 14.— 
 4 Dives est (i'^) cui tanta posscssio''" est, ut nihil optct amplius. Cic. 1 ar. 
 6, 1.— 5. Sibi mirum vidCri (dixit Ariovistns), quid in suil Galha, qnani 
 t)dlo vieisset, aut Cmari aut oninino j)opulo Koniauo negotii esset. Cacs. 
 13. G. 1, U. 
 
 Bern. 31. Here bclonirs tiie personal dative in the phrase mild [tihi, etc.) 
 nonunoY coqnouwn e,'<t,\ have the name, I am called. The name itself is 
 placed either in the >'ominative, or, by attraction, in the dative (agreemg 
 either with nomen or with the dative of the Possessor), or more rarely as 
 atuibute of jwmen in the genitive. 
 
 1 SvracQpis cPt fon? aqufc dtilcis», cui nomen Arethilm e^t. Cic. Verr 4. 53.-2. El 
 morlx) nomen est araricia. Cic. Tu>^c. 4. 11.-3. Attus Clausus.cni po^tea Appio Uaudip 
 mlmen fnit, Konmm transfQgit.«' Liv. i, 1G.-4. Duo sunt Ko.cn, quorum alien Capt- 
 td/ii coi'Domen est. Cic. Rose. Am. (>. - ^i. j- *. 
 
 The name construction takes place, when verb? other than esse form the predicate, in 
 whidi case tlir name either airrees with the case of tlie word nonien or is placed in the 
 Dative as: lU- arliticibus nomen his(rwnitni.s^' inditum^^ (c^t). Liv. ., 2 — Mirps • 
 cui A^'a>d>an pareutes di.xC-re nomen. Liv. 1, l.-Sometunes the name is placed in tho 
 nominative, althou-h the word rumien stands in another case, as : . n.s/'i(/f>- adto excel- 
 S/,y^!Vo.../A/.i.. Justus ...7 avpellatus, .Nep. Arist. 1, where «v.dcutly wo d,«ereut 
 constructions are mixed.- C'a/i/<io cognoimu Chaucius usurpare concemt. buet. Claud. iA. 
 
 Bern. 32. Between the Dative and the Genitive of the possessor there 
 is the same ditierence as between the English verbs " to haw'' (to own) and 
 " to belong tor The genitive of the i)ossessor expressly or impliedly op- 
 poses one possessor to another, while in the dative ot the possessor a 
 certain property is represented as a part of the whole property ot one and 
 the same individual. Thus ISenipronio aycr est, qui, etc., means: Sempro- 
 nius owns (among his other property) a tield wiiich, etc. But IJNbitatur 
 hie ar/er nitne Sempronii means : It is doubted whether this field belongs to 
 Sempronius (or another). 
 
 § 469. 2. The Abstract Predicate-Dative is employed, 
 when the Predicate is an abstract noun (as honor, obstacle, 
 advanta(/e), and when the Person concerned in the matter {the 
 interested Person) is either mentioned or understood. Both the 
 interested Person and the abstract Predicate-noun are then 
 placed in the Dative Case.* The Dative of the interested 
 Person is generally rendered by the preposition to or for, and 
 the Predicate-Dative either by a Predicate-noun in the Nomina- 
 tive, or by a predicative adjective, as : IMc res mihi hondri 
 {emoluniento, auxillo, impedlmento, etc.) ^.s'^ This is an honor 
 (an advantage, help, obstacle, etc.) to me, or " is honorable, ad- 
 
 vantarjeous,iiseful, awkicard,'' etc.— Cui bono est? to whom is 
 
 it of advantage ? Cic. Phil. 2, 14. 
 
 " Supply: m»t. The copula i». frequently omitted ni general asserticmt. f th,^ kind. 
 — «0 Prunertv -«» To Aw.—^'^ The name hUfrio (actor).-^^ Was jriveii -»''« Oh^piin-- 
 * Se iSicate-Dative is a specie^^ of Attractiou, agrecin- (agaiiiet tho general rules) 
 
 with the Personal dative. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF TIIE VERB. 
 
 83 
 
 1. Virtutes hominibus deco?-igIo7'icpqye sunt. Sen. Clem. 1, 3. — 2. Magno 
 malo est hominibus avaricia. Auct. Her. 2,24.-3. Pergite, adolescentes, 
 atque in id studium iucumbite,*^ ut et vobis honuri, etamlcis ntiHtdti,et 
 rnpuhUcfB otiolumento Q&se possltis. Cic. Or. 1, 8.-4. (Hoc) Gallis magno 
 ad pngnam erat impedinicnto. Caes. H. G. 1, 25.-5. (Ariovistns dixit) ami- 
 citiain populi Wom^n'i sihi ornaniento^^ Qtprcp.sidio,"'' nondetrimento esse 
 oportere {ought). Cajs. B. G. 1, 44. 
 
 Bern. 33. The dative of the interested person is often understood, espe- 
 cially when it refers to Persons in general, or when it is expressed in a 
 followiuiT clause, as : Una res erat magno nsui, One thing was very useful. 
 Ca's. B. G. 3, \\.—Quod auteni idem mcesUtiam meam reprehendit, idem 
 jocum, mag NO argumento esty me in utroque fuinse moderdtum, but that the 
 Kanie man censiires my sadness and my jesting, is a strong proof that 
 1 was moderate in both. Cic. Phil. 2, 16. 
 
 Bern. 34. The predicate-dative is also used with those verbs that have 
 the force of the copula (i^ 4(12 ), and as an accessory predicate, in which 
 case it is generally translated by as; as: Paupertas probro haberi coepta est, 
 «all. Cat."l2, Poverty began to be considered a disgrace.— P<?nc/^s agros 
 8U0S dono reipubliccB dedit, P. gave his lands as a present to the republic. 
 Just. 3, 7. See p. 256, Obs. 2. 
 
 § 470, OTnER Constructions of the Verb esse. — 1. The Latin verb 
 esse, as the English verb to be, is often not a mere copula, but has the mean- 
 ing " to be in a eertain state;' " to behave,'" " to sojourn'' '' to be situated." It 
 may then, like other verbs, be connected with prepositional objects 
 (^5 425, U. 9), or with adverbs : 
 
 1. Quod Gallia si/b peptentrionibu? est. because Gaul if» (situated) toward the North. 
 Cx^. B. G. 1. 16.— -2. Quum ea ifa siitt, since this is so. lb. 1. 14.-3. Reclisnme apud 
 te s^mt omnia, all is riL'ht with vou (is in a riLdU state). Cic. Fam. 9,9.-4. In convivio 
 counter gX jucuiHie finsd.ymx were (demeaned) courteous and pleasant duriu]^ the re- 
 past. Cic. Dtj. 7.-5. Cum sciret nihil roboris secum esse, since he knew, that no force 
 
 was with him. Liv. 4'2, Wi. .,.,.... \r i o- i 
 
 Thus the plirase bene est frequently occurs m epistolary style in the formula bi vales 
 bene est, if your health is good, it is well. 
 
 2. Esse often stands without object or predicate in the meaning " to 
 exist," and is then generally translated by the English impersonal expres- 
 sion " tliere is," " tliere are :" 
 
 1. Ne reditus spes esset. that there might he no hope of a return. Liv. 40. 38.-2. A^er 
 publicus erat in Samnitibus, there were public lands in the country of the Samnites. lb. 
 — 3. Erant itinera duo (luibus domo e.xlre posseut, Viere were two roads by which they 
 could depart from home. Cks. B. G. 1, 6. 
 
 Here belongs the construction sunt or est with a following relative 
 clause, the predicate of which is placed in the subjunctive. Sunt or est 
 qui etc. {xunt multi, quidam qui), means ' t}]^re are persons who' {tJtere are 
 mauy,some who); netno est qui, there is nobody who, as : Sunt qui censeant, 
 there are persons who think etc. Cic. Tusc. 1,9. For this construction 
 see p. 551, Obs. 4. 
 
 3. Sometimes the exclamatory particles ecce &r\den (\o, behold) are used with the force 
 of 
 
 ject- 
 tnen. 
 
 ecce 
 
 In this contraction often an accusative io used in place of a nominative (eccos, eccum, 
 ecciUum). See Hand. Turs. 2. 348 foil. 
 
 ^ I I - — — ■ ' " 
 
 "6 Apply to.— 89 Credit.— ^^ Protection. 
 
8^ 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 III. Verbs construed with Simple Ortects in the 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 ^ 471. The different cases in which the corap^etin? objects are placed, 
 inculcate the tlifferent manner in which the objects participate in the action 
 of tiie subject. Thus tlie verbs redstere and obedlre are construed with the 
 dativp:, because the persons Ibrmini; the objects of these verbs, respect- 
 ively attack and comimind the subject. The verb meminme governs the 
 GENITIVE, because the rememl)ering is conceived to come from the object. 
 The ACCUSATIVE case denotes the' absence of action on the part of the 
 object; and wliile the starling-point of the action is represented by the 
 NOMiNATn-E, tlie accusative represents the object as that in which the 
 action simply ends. Since the Passive Voice reverses the action of the verb, 
 it follows that in this voice the object-accusative, or the end of the action, 
 must become the subject-nominative, or its beginning. Hence the criterion 
 of a transitive object is its convertibility into a passive subject. 
 
 Bern 35 The cages with which the different verbs are construed, cannot he determinod 
 a priori. The original conception of a verb is often forgotten in the later periods ot a 
 lan«'ua"e, and one lan«ruaj;e often conceives as transitive a verbal idea that in another 
 lant'uai'e is considered as intransitive. To trace out the reckons u/iya. certain verl) is 
 construed with a certain case, is not the province of tiie elementary -,'ranunarian. We 
 confine ourselves here to ihc /acts of construction, without enteriu<,' into a discusBiou 
 of its causes. , . , • ^ * • 
 
 Jie/n m It is evident that no intransitive object can become a passive subject,* since 
 this would etfnce the difference of the cases. Ilence the convertibility of an object into 
 a passive subject furnishes a certain proof of its beini: tkansitivk ; and the mere fact 
 that a j)assive verb is connected with a personal subject is alone a certain evidence of 
 the verb beiii" transitive, or governin-? the accusative case. Thus the mere existence 
 of such constructions as, Ihec i-es cavZhtr (this thin- is j,'uarded agaiust;, 18 a proof that 
 Hie verb cavere governs the accusative case. 
 
 § 472. The construction of Latin verbs with the Accusative 
 case, or the question whether a given verb is transitive or not, 
 is determined by two rules : 
 
 1. Verbs irhich are transitive in Eiujlish {and other Ian- 
 
 f/uaf/es) have (jenerally Transitive equivalents in Latin, 
 
 Jlem 37. The numerous exceptions to this rule are of two kinds; 
 
 ia) Several verbs, transitive in English, correspond to intransitive 
 
 Latin verbs. These are enumerated among the single verbs governing 
 
 the dative, ablative, and genitive cases. 
 {b) Several verbs, intransitive in English, are expressed by transitive 
 
 Latm verbs. For these, see § 473. 
 
 B£m 38. The names of LANauAGES, when they depend on verbs of speak- 
 ing writin"-, knowing, etc., are in Latin generally expressed by adverbs, 
 foriiied froin national adjcclives, while the English language either employs 
 TII.VNS1TIVE or prepositional olyects, as : to speak Latin, Latine loqui ; to 
 
 * That in the English language intransitive objects very frequently arc made passive 
 subjects is owing to the aptitude of this lan<'uage to transform intransitive verbs with 
 prepositional objects into transitives, merelyl)y uniting the preposition with the idea of 
 the verb, without changing its position. If the English angua-e had more than one 
 objective case, its condition in this respect would be precisely the eame aB that ol the 
 Latin. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 85 
 
 knoiD Persian, Persice scire ; to icrite a book in Greek, librum Greece scribere 
 Thus occur the adverbs Punice (Punic, Carthaginian), Gallice, Maurice'. 
 I usee (in the liitrurian language) and others. 
 
 1. M. Aurelius Scaurus Latine imprimis est eleganter locQtus. Cic Brut .36 135 — 
 2. Noil tam pneclilrum est scire Latine. qiiam turpe nesclre. lb. 37, 140—3 jovem «Iri 
 ajunt phiu.sophi, SI Grace \ommin, luqui. lb. 31. 121.-4. Themistociem unum intra 
 annum (,ptime lociltum esse ^e^m,^ constat.^^ (^uint. 11, 2, 50.- 5. Diphilus banc fabu- 
 lams GrcKce scripsit. Plaut. Casin. prol. 33. 
 
 2. Verbs whose objects are co)iveriible into Passive subjects, 
 
 are Transitive, i. e., construed with the Accusative* 
 
 • 
 
 This rule will not enable the student to ascertain the construction of a given verb 
 unless he knows, that it forms a personal passive voice. But it is a good test of con' 
 Btruction, and the student should frequently' apply it, by changing active constructions 
 into passives, and vice versa, so as to become familiar with the construction of all classes 
 ol verbs in both voices. 
 
 The rule, generally given in the grammars, that all transitive verbs govern the Accusa- 
 tive, IS a mere tautology. " ^^v^ud^v 
 
 Bern. .3«>. There are several exceptions to the rules in §472. 
 
 1. Several nkiteu vkrbs are sometimes connected with accusative objects which do 
 not complete the action of the verb as such, but denote things or persons to which the 
 actum indirect/// refers, Genenilly such objects are not convertible into passives and 
 hence cannot be considered as transitive accusatives. Here belong ol^re redolPre (to 
 emelh. mpere (to taste), luf/ere, tmerire, dolire (to mourn), .vj^r^ (to'thirstn honlre (to 
 shudder), as: Ctram dPre, to smell of wa.x. CSc.Ov.Zrih.—Literitum reipnbiicce Ivqlre, 
 to mourn for the downfall of the rei)ui)iic. lb. Pis. ■i.—tiUv, honures. I thirst for honors! 
 lb. Qij.ir. .3. 5, 3. Only poets (rarely) convert some of these verbs into passives, as: 
 LiKjthere nobis. Ov. Met. 10, 141 ; wjncE Ritixidur. lb. Fast. 1, 216. So the neuter deponent 
 verh/oqifi is construed with non-tiansiiive accusatives, as: Lapides loqui (t» talk stones). 
 Plant. Aul. 2, 1, :iO.—Xi/dl ni.^i da.<-f.s loquen.< et extrcifffs, talking nothing but tleels and 
 armies. Cic. Att. 9, 2-3. 3.— Peculiar is the accusative dependent on deticere, in the mean- 
 ing 'to faU\ as: Te oratio dt^flccret. Words would fail (to) you. Cic. R. A. 32.-Many 
 verbs similar to the above are construed with an accusative by the poets. These also 
 use ' poetically ' neuter verbs in place of ordinanj traiuitive verbs, constrning them, like 
 the latter, with arc iL-nt tires. Here belong the pli'rases ardtre aliquern, in the meaniu" <»f 
 anulre aliquem; pnlllre aliquid. in tlie meaning of tiialre aliquid; plorare^fiere, geimre 
 aliquid, in the meaning of deploidre aliquid. 
 
 2. Some verbs may tJtke the accusative of neuter fr)rm-adjective8 in the singular, but 
 not the accusatives of ordinary nouns, as posse, velle. v(aZre,prodtsse, profictre, nocere. 
 as: Qmd potfs^ ov nihil ]x>tes {-qnidfacere potes)? What can you (do)? vou cannot (do) 
 anything.— /iY enim quodcuntjue rolerd. Cic. Fain. 9. 17, 'l.—Ignari, quid graritas valertt. 
 Ignorant of what value gravity had. lb. Sest. 28— A^/ii/ tibi litterce mece prodervnt. lb. 
 Fani.2, 17.— Ao/J quo proficiani quid, not that it is of any use to me. II). Att. 12,24,3. 
 Here belong some transitive verbs which, along with their transitive objects, may take 
 neuter form-adjectives but not ordinary nouns in the accusative, as adj'/idre, irnpedlre, 
 vwvtre, n^: Xi/iil (te) imptdio, I am not in your way. Cic. Off. 1,1.— Xi/dtne te noctur- 
 man ]»r<vsidin?n iiwret? IJoes the nocturnal guard make no impression on you? lb. Cat. 
 1, \.—Solitudo aliquid {me) adjuvat. Solitude is of some benetit (to me). lb. Att. 12, 14, 3. 
 Rem. 40. The poets sometimes construe the passives of some verbs with objects in 
 the ACCUSATIVE, leaving both the active subject and ol)ject entirely unchanged, espe- 
 cially with verbs denoting a putting on or off of things iinduere, exvere, cinqere, accin- 
 gere). Tnese verbs have then, even in the passive Participle, the a|)pearance and con- 
 struction of transitive Deponents, being distinguished from the corresponding active 
 forms by a kind of reflexive meaning, as : 
 
 Correbus Androgei qaleam induitnr, Coroebua puts on (to himself) Androgens' hel- 
 met. Virg. .fin. 2, ;i92.— Exuitur cornua, he puts off the (his) horns. Ov. M«;t. 7. .31S.— 
 J'namiis iniuileyV/T'o;* cingitur, Priainus girds /ii//i.sW/ with the useless sword. Virg. 
 ^Eu. 2, h\\.\~lndHtas vesttin, having put on the garment, also in prose (Li v. 27, 37). 
 
 § 47S. The Latin verbs which are construed with tiiansi- 
 
 » Thus u. e. as Plato spoke).— a ft is known.—* This rule applies^ven to Deponent 
 verbs, but only in the Periphrastic Conjugation {milites hortandi b-unt). See Ch. IV.— 
 t Prose-writers construe all these verbs with compound objects, and, instead of the 
 mentioned constructions, use active verbs with reflexive objects (Friamus seferrocingit, 
 Corw-bus galtam sifn induit etc.) See below. 
 
86 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE YERB. 
 
 TiYE objects, while their English equivalents are intransitivb, 
 
 are: 1) many verbs, originally neuter, and denoting a motion 
 
 in space, which have become transitive by being compounded 
 
 with certain prepositions, especially clrcwn, pe)\ jyrcBter^ trcms, 
 
 as: clrcunistdre allquem^ to stand around somebody: perfodere 
 
 allquid^ to dig through something; prcetenre allquid, to go past 
 
 something. 2) The verbs appdlare allquem^ in the meaning " to 
 
 appeal to somebody ;" cavere allquid, to guard against, or to 
 
 beware of something ; sperare allquid^ to hope for something ; 
 
 qiieri aliquld, to complain of something. The transitive objects 
 
 of all these verbs are regularly changed into passive subjects, 
 
 as: homilies clrcamstantur j'^ allquid cavetur, something is 
 
 guarded against. 
 
 1. Eqiiitcs Komflni wteriquc elves, qui circumstant senatu?n. Cic. Cat. 
 1^ j^. — 2. Equites, circuitis' hostiuin ca.stn'.^ Ciasso leuuntiavCrunt."^ Caes. 
 B. G. 8, 2o.— :>. Quihus crat procllvi^' iniuCim^Jtunun. Cajs. B. C. 1, 48.— 
 4. Fama est, Remiuu novos Iransiluisse^ tm/roi. Liv. 1, 7. — 5. Qnintilliu3 
 circulre ariem Ciuiunis et obst'crflre" mililcs ca^pit. Cirs. B. C. 2, 28.— 
 6. Teleslmis. circiiinvolans' ordines excrcitiis sui. Yell. 2, 27. — 7. Yos, qui 
 nuiltas peiaiiibiilasl is* /<'/'/•</.*«, ecquani" cultiorein"' Iialiil vidistisV Y'arro 
 li. K. 1, 2.-8. Militcs navis solvunt" atque altero*'^ die Ajwllonuim praj- 
 tcrveluintur." Caes. B.C. 3, 20.— 9. Aquillii procumtoi" a'" pratore tri- 
 hi'ims ai)pelhlre ausus est. Cic. Quinct. 20, 04.— 10. Tribimi igitur appella- 
 bantur. lb. 0;>.— 11. Milites, monili a Bniiuluslnis,'" ut rail am ctecuin^' 
 fosifanfjue caveant, siibsislunt." Cajs. B. C. 1, 28.— 12. Noii omnia quae 
 dolCinus'*' jure-" queri i)ossumus. Cic. Flacc. 24.— 13. Nuuc spero mcliOra. 
 Cic. Att. I'o, 3. 
 
 Bern. 41. The i>rep()sitIons, -vvhieh make the verbs of motion transitive, 
 are the same, which indicate tlie local objects of tiiese verbs. Thus, in- 
 stead of per (tf/roa cnrro, the Latin ^a-nerally says, agros percurro, I run 
 around the fields; muros circumequitdcit, instead of circum muros equitdvU. 
 Besiaes the mentioned prepositions, also oh, sub, in, and ad have the force 
 to make some neuter verbs transitive, as sub'ire muros, to go under the 
 walls; but with these a few verbs only can be made transitive, while with 
 circum, trans, per, and prater, almostf every verb of motion, and many 
 
 ♦ To translate paesivc expressions of this kiud iuto English, we must generally express 
 the sentence actively. ^ . . . o m 
 
 » Circulre, to ^'o around. Supply : ab eis, and change into an active construction.—' J o 
 announce.— 3 Feasible, i-asy.— * lust, of fransnare, to swim over.—* Tranxinre, to spring 
 over.—* To implore.—' 'l"o tly or tu hapten around — » To travel over.—" Ecqiuim iii>teud 
 of num o'/^Aw.—i" Cultivated.— 1' Naven solvere, to weiu'h aiirtior.— i'-» Nixt. — '^ Pnittr- 
 xehi to sail pa><t — >* Counsel.— '* From the decision of the pnetor.— ** Inhabitants of 
 Brundusium.— 1' Masked palisades.—»» T(. halt.—»» I'o reirret.— '^" Properly. 
 
 t Only a few verbs are exceptions from this rule. Thus trant'jugere, iterjufjfve. and trnnS' 
 currere do not become transitive by the composition with traiu^, but require a preposi- 
 tional object {traiisj'ugere per silvas, etc.) CircuTnJacire, to lie around, is like adjacere 
 construed with the dativk. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 87 
 
 other neuter verbs may be compounded and become transitive. The 
 En',dish language sometimes employ's here transitive verbs, as : flumen 
 transire, to cross the river; hostis circumlre, to outflank the enemy. But 
 generally objects of this kind must be rendered by means of English pre- 
 l)ositions, coiTesponding to those with which the verb is compoijnded. 
 
 Rein. 42. When irafmtive verbs are compounded with prepositions of 
 this kind, they do not change thereby their construction. Thus we say, 
 transmittere nans in Hiberniam, the same as we say mittere in Uiberniam. 
 But the verbs traducerc (instead of transducere), trajicere and transportdre 
 are c.vceptious to this rule. These are construed with two accusatives, the 
 one belonging to the simple verb, being transitive; the other belong- 
 mg to the preposition, being local, as : copias flumen traducere, to lead tlfe 
 troo|)s over the river. In the passive construction only the transitive ac- 
 cusative becomes then the passive subject, the other accusative remaining 
 unchanged, as : Behjae Wtenum antiquitua transducti, the Belgians being 
 led in old times over the Hhine. Caes. B. G. 2, 4. 
 
 1. Cicsar certior factusest. trTsjam;><7r/7^copiarumHelvetios i id Jfumen traduxisse. 
 Lies. 15. G. 1, 12.-2. tquitum ma<ruam jxirtef/ijlumen transjecit.^ Cais. B. C. 1, 55. 
 Hem. 43. There are, besides the verbs mentioned § 473, No. 2, many English intransit- 
 ives which, in translating from Euirllsh into Latin, must be rendered by Latin transit- 
 ives. t>nch verbs are :fo look for something (nusrere aliquld), to atone for something 
 (expiSre aliquid), to ask for something (petere aliquid). to long for something (desiderSre 
 aliqujd), to prepare for something (parSre aliquid), to laugh at somebody (deridSre ali- 
 qut-m). to wonder at somtthin'j (mirilri aliquid), to be acquainted with somebody (novisse 
 aliquem), and a great many others. But most of these verbs have En<dish traticitive 
 synonyms, bo that, in translatinirfrom Latin into English, the construction of such I^tiu 
 iritransitives need generally not be chan-red. A full control over verbs of this kind can 
 only l)e acquired by an attentive reading of the Latin authors, and a diligent use of the 
 lexicon. ° 
 
 L'em. 44. Here must be mentioned the exclamatory accusative, generallv used 
 after the inierjeciions /A?/ or O, wliich must l)e explained as the direct object of an 
 «flection or feeling : EluufugacU annos, O the fleeting years \—0 mistrum Ulum adole- 
 Aa«^f;/<,0 that unfortunate youth! 
 
 IV. Verb.s Construed with Simple Objects in the Da- 
 tive Case. 
 
 §17 1, Tiie following classes of verbs govern the dative 
 case : 
 
 1. Verl)s of helping and AssisTrxG,as : subt€nlre,succurrere,auxilidiH, 
 su ffraqd ri [to support).^' 2) Verbs ot" obeying, as: parere, obtemperdre, 
 obedlre, oksequi.* a) Verbs of commanding : prcei'sse, to preside over, to 
 
 J Ilelveti^A is the subject-accusative.— 2 tran^icere {trajicere) to ship over — ^ju- 
 rare ami adjuvare, to help, to assist, govern the accusative.— '•Here belongs the remark- 
 al)le phrase dicto audi^ntem esse alicui, to obey somebody at his command (dicto) 
 where it is doubtful whether dicto is a dative, governed by audlre, in the meaninf^ 
 'to obey, or an impersonal ablative absolute (like augurato, auspicato). This phrase 
 never occurs otherwise than in the participial form (audiens wWh esse) -, never in the 
 tenses of aurCire. and only in connection with the singular diclo (never dictis). The 
 Latins considered and probably pronounced dido and audiens as one single word, Mith 
 tiie adjective meaning 'obedient.'' and hence it may be explained that the expression 
 not only occurs without any object, but even with another dative object: Aow- 
 nuin nohtiubant, non fore dicto audientes milites (that the soldiers would not obey 
 commands!. Cjes. B. G. 1, .39. Quod milites dicto audientes snis imperatoribus non 
 «•a«M')ecause the soldiers did not obey their superiors). Nep. Lys. 1. Sometimes it is 
 construed with the dative jussia (Jussis dicto audientem esse, to be obedient to com- 
 
88 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 command ; imperdre, to command.' 4) Verbs of opposing and resisting : 
 repuf/ndre and resixtere^ (to resist, oppose, withstand), (?6dASd (to be in one's 
 way) ; obstdre, reiilii, reluctdri (post-classical), adrermri, refnwdH (to op- 
 pose, to thwart). 5) Verbs of trusting, distiusting, and iielievinq : 
 fidere, conjidcre^ jidem habere (to trust, to contide in), dijidere {lo distrust), 
 credere, to believe.* 0) Verbs of pardoning: u/noscere, coudondre,iind the 
 phrase veniam dare.'' 7) Verbs of flattering : adiddri,'^ blandlri^ asseii- 
 
 TJiandt»). The phrajse is» distin2:uii*hed from other vorhs of obeyincr. hy l)oinir used 
 only ot person;; under dUcipliite, as servants and soldiers, and only in ri<;ard to 
 oral injunctions involving immediate and implicit obedience. It freiiuenily occurs in 
 Plautiis, Cicero, Civsar, and Livy. 
 
 * Both verbs» may be construed a) without any object, in the meaning ' to be a chief, 
 lo be a commander (their synonym in this meaning being rer/nurt) ; b) with the object 
 over which a rule is exercised, which object is placed in tlie dative. The synonym 
 regere, however, requires the accusative (I'empublkain regere. oppido prceesse, omnibiu 
 gentibus (exercifui) iniperdre) ; c) with an object, denoting the order to be exe- 
 cuted, which is always placed in the accusative, pnxesbe never being used in 
 this pense, but jubtre, imperdre, pnTclpfve, prasoibfre ; d) with a compound object, 
 expressing the person along with the thing commanded. In this connection 
 inii>€rdre, pra'cipcre, pnv^'rrihere, rake tha accusarive of the thino and the 
 dative of the pkrson. See § 4S2.— '•* To resist an a' tack is expressed by i/npetum fi/s- 
 titure. not by itnpetiii redatere. — ^ jridere and confidere are either construed with the 
 dative or ablative, as : vatilrd, loci confidere ., to rely on the natural position of a place, 
 Cies. B. (}. 3. 9; rirfiKi alicujuii cotifidere, to trust In somebody's eminent qu.dities. Cic, 
 Phil. 5, 1, The simple vvrhfidere is mostly poetical, except in the participles (fld&ne, 
 JL-iun). which are not rarely'used in classical prose. IHffidtre is almost always construed 
 with the dative, seldom with the ablative. I'he Enirlish 'to trust,' when meaning 'to 
 give something into one's trust,' is rendered by romr/nf fere aliquid a/icin. — •* If credere 
 IS construed with a simple object, it requires either a dative or an inlinitive clause. It is 
 construed witli a simpl.* object in the dative «) if it means ' to trust one as a debtor,' 
 ' to give credit.' as Villicu.^ injus,s'it doinini cndaf netnlui (a farmer must not give credit 
 to any one without the proprietor's order). Cato, K. It. 5. 4 ; b) if it means *to have con- 
 fidence in one's qualities, intentions, or assertions,* being rendered 'to believe, to con- 
 fide in. to trust to. to rely on, as : fldti alicujus crtdtre, to confide in somebody's 
 word; aUc>ii inj>ir~ifo criler?. to believe, to tnist ou'! withoit hi-* oath; c) in the 
 ior\\\\\\9i. mihi crede {or c rede ?/iUii), which either belongs to No. c) or is idiomatically 
 used to strengthen an imperative sentence, as- .Vw/a jam istam nientern, rnUil crede 
 (please, do give np that idea of yourg). Cic. Cat, 1. .3.— Mihi crede, advoca illam in consi- 
 lium. Sen. E[). 17. So Cic. Tiisc.'l, :il. 75.— If crt^dtte means 'to be of opinion ' ^being a 
 synonym of urOifrdri, j/idlcdre, e.risti/ndre), it is construed with an intinitive-ciause: 
 Credo ego rw, judice^^. ?nin7ri. etc. I believe you to b<' astonished, O judges, etc. Cic. 
 Rose. Am. 1, 1. In this signification credere' ir^ often construed with the accusative 
 neuter of a personal pronoun or determinative adjective, in lieu of an intinitive-ciause, 
 as : I[o)niiieK libenttr id. quod roluut. credunt (instead of : i</, quml vcflunt, verutn e-i^se). 
 Men fain believe what thev wish. Cjes. B. (J. 3. 18. The English expression, Mo believe 
 in something' (that something ^'.W^Av). must be rend'-red by credere {dicere) with an in- 
 finitive-clause: To believe lii the iiods, credere {dicere) deos ei^xe (Cic. N. D. (not deon 
 credere, as modern Latitiists often sav). With a compound object, credere takes the 
 accusative of the thi.no and the dative of the pkusox. See § 4S2.— ^ Vtniam 
 dare alicui means either 'to «jrant somebody a favor,' or " to pardon soiiebody for a 
 crime' (to<:rant forgiveness). Ay/zo-'r^/'f with a simple object always requires this object to 
 bein the dative, whether it denotes the person pardoned, or the wrong which is forgiven : 
 Jgrwice eis qui, pardon those who; ritil^ ulic//jus igriOf<cere, to pardon somebody's 
 faults. If both the person pardoned, and the wrong wiiich is forgiven, are expressed, 
 the former is place(l in the dative, and the latter in the accusative : tgnoscere rem alicui, 
 to pardon somebody for something. Tiie thing pardoned is also expressed l)y a clause 
 with quod ord; Ignoncite inihi quod (si) hoc facio. pardon me for doing this. — Co/«- 
 dondre generally requires a compound object, the person Iteing in the dative, and the 
 thing in the accusative. If this •thing' denotes the penalty, coudondre means 'to re- 
 mit" (supplicium alicui condondre): if it denotes the crime, con dond re has tlie meaning 
 of ignofictre (alicui seel u^^ condondre). Sometimes both, the accusative .and the dative. 
 deiii)te persons; then the dative is one of the' interested person,' meaning 'in favor of 
 (/rw fratres tot ac tcUibiis xiris condondre. Cic. Marc.) — . • Aduldri more frequently 
 Btauds with the accusative. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 89 
 
 id 
 m 
 
 ri. 8) Verbs of meeting and encountering : occurrere and verbs of 
 ...otion, in connection with the adverb obviam (as obviam ire, obvUini ve- 
 nire, obmam procedere% 9) Verbs expressing anger: irasci, succensere (to 
 liave a grudge). 10) Verbs of serving : servlre, famulari, imervire, mi- 
 nifftrdre. 11) The impersonal verbs of happening : evenlre, accidere, con- 
 tinrjere, obvenlre (to be allotted). 12) Most of the compounds of ei<se:^ as : 
 adesne, to be present ; d^e^ne, to be wanting ; iiie^ne,^ to be in ; interesse, to 
 be i^resent; prwei^se (see No. 3); obesse (see JVo. 4) ; prodesse, to be useful ; 
 Hupcresne, to survive ; als(j prmto esse, to attend. 
 
 To these must be added a great number of verbs which can- 
 not be classitied, as : 
 
 Appropinqudre, to approacli ;* apparere, to appear ; aimentiri, to assent ; 
 con.stdrc^U) be consistent with, to be known to;* diaplicere, Xo displease; 
 favere, to favor; grattfimri, to grati ty ; gratuldvi, to congratulate; iii- 
 duU/ere, to indulge; inmdire, to envy; licere (impers.), to be permitted; 
 rneden," to lietil, to cure; mindri, to threaten; morigerdri, or morem 
 gerere, io accommodate one's self; nocere,'' to hurt; nubere, to marry;** 
 obtrectdre, to .'-lander ; parcere, to spare (somebody) ; persuadere, to con- 
 vmce; placere, to please; jylaudere, to applaud ;^respondere, to answer ;• 
 satisfacere, to satisty ; tdudtre, to be ze:ilous, to take pains, devote care ;^* 
 succtd£re to succeed ;" saadere, to give advice : suppUcdre, to implore ; 
 viderr, to seem {cidetur mihi). 
 
 ^ 1. iA'.'^cum persuadere non possent, legatos ad Dumnorigem mittunt. 
 Caes. B. G. 1,9. — 2. Dumnorix, cupidiljlte regni adductus,'-^ novis rebus 
 stmU'bat. lb. 1,9.— 3. Ilin Coesar ita respondit.^Ib. 1, 14.— 4. Si JEduUde 
 \\\\uv\\'imtiHfaciant. lb. 1, 14.— 5. Liscus dixit, \y\y\{\acMn\ Eeloeiiis favere 
 liropter cam aftinitatem.'" lb. 1,18.— (S. Equitatui, quem ^dui mise- 
 nmt, Dumnorix pra>crat. lb.— T.Valerium, ciii summam omnium rerum'* 
 Jidem habebat. lb. 1, 19.— 8. Ad lunc Ariovistus rexpondit : Jus esse belli, 
 ut qui" vicissent, eis quos vicissent, quemadmodum" vellent imperd- 
 rent. lb. 1,3(J.— 9. Iluiclegidni Cge^ar indulserat pnccipue {particularly) 
 et propter virtutem eonfidebat maxime. lb. 1,40.— 10. Quam rem paucis 
 mhtigtatie docCbat. lb. 1, 43.— 11. Bello superltos esse Arvernos, quibus 
 Popuhis ]^>manus igiiouxxet. lb. 1,45,— 12. Ut si vellet Ariovistus proe- 
 
 » Ofeiidere (to hit, to light upon somebody) and comemre (to meet with somebody) 
 require the accusative.— '^ Abesse is L'enerally construed with ab.— a i^^g^ is more 
 frequently (in Cicero always) construed with in and the ablative: In oratare inest nhi- 
 Iwop/iorutn omniscienda. Cic. Or. 3. T),— ■» Adlre, to approach, requires the accusative 
 and accedere more Irequcntly the preposition ad than the dative— ^ jn the raeanino-<o 
 be known, constat is an impersonal verb, but is then more frequently construed with inte^ 
 
 — * Snndre, 10 heal, and, in late Latin also mederi, are construed with the accusative — 
 ' LiEdere, to hurt, is construed with an accusative.— »* Nubere. properly meaning' • to veil ' 
 denotes 'to marry.' on the part of the woman, the veiling being part of the'^marna^e 
 ceremony ; the dative after nubei-e is a dative of ' the interested persim.' Nupta means 
 
 the bride. 1 he marrying on the part of the man is expressed by in matrimonium 
 ducere. or simply ducere.— • If the obj-ct is the matter to which an answer is ajven 
 resfiondere is construed with ad.— lo Htudere. in the meaningof the neuter verb ' to «mdv ' 
 in>tead ot the'classical l<dxjrdre.or vacdre litteiis, is iisedonly in post -classical language 
 Modern Latinists u-e sfudere aNo in the meaning 'to study for a profession.' instead of 
 opt rum dare, yovi'i rebus studere means ' to be desirous of a new government ' Studere 
 is also construed with an olnect-inttnitive (see § 80), and rarely with an intinitive-ciause 
 
 — '» Succedere, in its literal meaning ' to proceed to a close proximity to a place ' is also 
 construed with »ub and an accu.sative. See Rem. 45.— i'-' prompted by a desire of beiu» 
 a king.— 1» aninity.— »* in respect to all things.— »* supply ei before qui — i« as " 
 
90 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE VERB. 
 
 lio conlondoro, ei potostns non (Iceaaef. Th. 1, 48.— 13. Ncque enim 
 l<ivryn cq>fitafuiHfyt(hnf. Ih.t}, 17.— 14. Cirsar pw/n'intibm^ occurrit. lb. 
 o 21.— 15. Oppidilni tuniiii moxi^vi vi appropinqmln mmnibus xid^nmi. 
 lb. 2, 31. — 10. Dixrrnnt oppidfuii.oninls fere tinitimos'^ suae rirtiiti ui' 
 viOeir.lh.— 17. Ob eas res ex litteris Osaris dies quindeeim suppli- 
 ratio=' deerrta est, quod ante id tempiis accidit nuUi. lb. 2, 35. — 18. 
 Majdri parti* phtcidf, lei eventuni^ experiri et castra defendere. lb. 3, 3. 
 — 19. iMiilta C[csarem ad id belluni iiieitilbant, inprlmis ne reruiune 
 nationes si/ji idem lid-re arl)itrarentnr. lb. 3, 10.- 20. Qmun intelliucret, 
 omuls homiues uatunl liherhUi stniUre. lb. 3, 10.— 21. Neque qwuw his 
 luivibus nostrae" rostro nocere poteraut. lb. 3, 13. — 22. Neque satis 
 Bruto vel tribOniH militum conxtdhat, quid hostes aujereut. lb. 3, 14.— 
 23. Quo loco (ei)qui celeriter arma capere potuerant, paulisper' nostris 
 re.Htiterunt. lb. 4, 14. 
 
 Jiem. 45. Many verbs wbieb,l)esides those already mentioned, arc com- 
 pounded witii tlie prepositions off, unte, con {cum), in, inter, ob,pof<f,prae, 
 mib, super, require an object in the dative case with the force of the same 
 l)reposition whieli is pretixed to theui, as inhcerere alicui rei, to be in- 
 lierent in a thinsj^; ndstare (tUcui,\o ^U\\(\ by some one; consent'ire alicui, 
 to agree with some one. 15ut many of these, instead of with a dative, 
 are construed witli the same preposition they are compounded with, as 
 in/uerere in aliqua re, consentlre cum aliquo. Sometimes they take different 
 prepositions (m rer/num succcdere), and sometimes are connected with 
 cases other tlian the dative {xupersedere aliqua re, to dispense with a thini; ; 
 pmcedere aliqucm, to precede some one). Most of these require a com- 
 pound object. See Rem. 09. 
 
 l{£m. 40. If neuter verbs, compounded with these prepositions, denote 
 a motion to a place, tliev are rarelv (mostly poetically, and in lale Latin) 
 construed with a dative, but eitller repeat their preposition, or bec<mie 
 transitive; as: accurrere ad locum, to hasten to a place; congredi cum, to 
 enter into a tiglit with ; incidere in, to fall into; succedere sub vivros, to 
 proceed (close up) to the walls. But: aqg red i aliqu em, io iWUick some- 
 body; adlre aliquem, io i\\>y>\y to some one; ad'ire or inire mafjiHtrdtuni, 
 to enter ui^on an office; sublre tectum, to Ji:et under a roof ; sublre la'oores, 
 to undergo hardship. Those compounded with circuni, per, prater, 
 trans, are rcijularly transitive. See ^ 473. 
 
 Rom. 47. 3[ost of the dative objects mentioned in ^ 474 may be con- 
 ceived as datives * of the interested person' (j^ 409, and page 135, Hem. 00) 
 indicating the one having an interest in the acti(m. Such a dative is 
 often added in a looser way to neuter or transitive verbs which admit the 
 idea of another person being interested in the action expressed by them, 
 whether to somebody's advantage or disadvantage. Thus cavire, metuere, 
 timere, alicui mean ''to be solicitous' or ' alarmed' for somebody : vacare 
 alicui rei, to have leisure for something ; natum esse alicui rei, \o be born 
 for something; cu])ere alicui, io w'lah somebody well. Sometimes these 
 loose datives are used pregntmtly, so that the construction must l)e re- 
 cast in English : Mihi quidem esurio, wni tibi. Plaut. Capt. 4, 2, 80, 1 am 
 hungry /or myself, not for you (my being hungry is mi/ c onceru, not yours). 
 
 » See §:«6.— ^ neighbors.— 'a tliatiks<,'iving of fifteen days». The accusative quin- 
 decim dies is an accusative of time, which it» ^^)Inetilne(^, but rareljr, attached to uouus.— 
 « the majority.— ^ the issue.- » tupply naves.— ' for a little while. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 91 
 
 1. Non polnm tiobU dlvite? e!»pe voIhihu?, ped Ubcrift, propinquis, amiclx. maximoqne 
 reipubliciV. Cic. Otf. ;j, 6:i. — 2. Multi. cum opes parant, niisciuntcMt parent, nee cujus 
 causa lat)Orent. Cic. Am. 55.— 3. Cie-ar Dumnonr/i cu(>t5des pouit. Ores. B. G. 1. 20. 
 — 4. Sabliius AasYi6'/.^Mn coiitemptiOnem' venit. II). 8. 17. — 5. Vab^-av suU (\\uy(\\nt rtbus 
 Genuanos timCre voluir. lb. 4. Ki — 6. DixC'runt oppidani. /JiW omnls fere finitimos e>se 
 iniuiico-*. lb. 2,3. — 7. Non .«c/z/jAy, sed vitije discimu-*. S-n. Ep. 105. — 8. Nemo errat 
 vifi fibi, hed dementiam spargit* in proximo^. — 9. Domtis dominis ledificata est, nou 
 muribu.<. Cic. Nat. D. :i, 20.— 10. Tisistratus» sibU not pat/ ice Me;;arenses vicit. 
 
 Hem. 48. The dative of the intere.><ted peu!*on or dafivus coinmodi vel incommodi, 
 in its orii^iiial m<aniiig, cantiot be considered a completing ol)ject, but constitutes a 
 peculiar adverbial relation, denoting the person or thing concerned in an action of which 
 it is neither the subject iu)r object. From being frequently connected with certain verl)s, 
 it virtually became -i completing object in regard to these. The following are partic- 
 ular applications of the dative of the iiUerested person: 
 
 1. The POSSESSIVE DATIVE (distinguished from the dative of the possessor, §468), being 
 used in place of a possessive atthibute, as: Se'>e Ofnnes C\e<ari ad pedes p/ojecerimt 
 (i e. ad Cje-aris ])edes); They all threw themselves to Ctesar's feet. Cies. B. G. 1, 31.— 
 Pater vobitt decesdt a. d. 111. Kal. Dec; Our (my) father died on the 29th of November. 
 Cic. Ait. l.r». 2. 
 
 2. The ETHICAL DATIVE, of a proiioun of the first or second person, denotes either a 
 moral intere>t taken in the action by the speaker, or an apj)eal to the person addressed 
 to interest himself in the action. This dative generally appears redundant according 
 to the Knglish conception, but may be expressed l)y a paraphrase: Pidset turn mihi lie- 
 iorein! Let him, then, strike a lictor (i. e. I wish he would do it, to se-i him punished). 
 Liv. 2, '29.— Quid mihi Celsu-^ agilf Say, what is the matter with Celsu<? {i.e. I have an 
 interest in u). Hor. Ep. 1.3. 13. — At tibi repents, quum minime ex-^pecturem, venit ad me 
 Caninius; 'IMnnk only, suddenly came Caninius to me. Cic. Fam. 9, 2, 1. — Quujn toga 
 signufti dedt/o, tain mihi turbam invadite. Liv. 24..3S. — Often this dative is used with 
 iiiow: /lie mihi etiani Q. Faflufi pads coinmoda commemoi'at; Here, Q,. F. lectures ue on 
 the advantages of peace (i.e.'i think it superfluous). Cic. Phil. 8, 4. 
 
 3. The DATIVE AFTER INTER.TECTIONS expresses the persons to whom something disas- 
 trous has hai)i)ened or will happen: Vie victim. Woe to the conquered! Liv. 5, 48.— //e«, 
 inisero Diihi. Woe to me, the poor wretch ! Plaut. Aul. 2, 2, 23. 
 
 4. Often absolute present pard'-inles are placed in the dative referring to persons in 
 regard to wliom the principal actit)n holds good ichen or since they perform the action 
 expressed by the participle. Such participles are often rendered by clauses: OppiduPx 
 primum T/i'essalice venienlibns ab Epiro, the first city of Thessalia for those coming from 
 Epinis. C;es. B. C 3, 80.— -4r//w/i duo. nequrnjuam Hsu ac specie oistimantibus pare^^. two 
 soldiers, by no means equals, when judged by their aspect and appearance (for those 
 that judge th<!ni). Liv. 7,10. — Annulorum tuntus acervus fait ut Jtietientibus dimidiuin 
 tfuptr frVt moflios ejL'plisse.dnt auctores; the rings are said by some to have filled three 
 modii and a half by actual measurement (for those that really measured mem). lb. 23, 12, 
 
 § 475. Some verbs take either the accusative or the dative : adaHri, 
 flatter; comitdri, accompany; desperdre,^ despair of; prcestoldri, wait for; 
 antecedere, atitelre, go before; proBCurrere, run ahead; illudere, mock; 
 providere, provide for. These take eitJier case with the same meaning. 
 Others change their meanings according to the case: consulere aliquem,to 
 consult one, but consulere alicui, to consult for one ; prospicere aliquid, 
 foresee, but cdicui, provide for; cupere aliquid, wish for, but alicui, to wish 
 one well ; timere aliqucm, to fear one, alicui, to fear for one. 
 
 1. Atticus \\otQ\\ti^ Antonio non est aduldtus. Nep. 25, 8. — 2. Mitiores 
 canes furem quoque adulantur. Colum. 7. 12, o. — 3. Tardis mentibus 
 virttjs non comitdtur. Cic.Tusc. o, 24. — 4. Virgines cum parvo tilio comi- 
 tabantur j)atrem. Curt. I., 3, 19. — 5. ^\ (XxxfiWiXo" &\\\s fortiinis desperdro 
 coeperant., se in proxima oppida rccipiebant. Caes. B. G. 3, 11. — 0. Simu- 
 
 1 contempt, scorn.— "to »\iVQa.Ci.—^ desperdre is more frequently construed with de.— 
 * powerful.— 5 whenever. 
 
92 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF YERBS. 
 
 latque* caiuVidatns accusation cm nicditilri visus est, liondrem despcrasse 
 vidCtiir. Cic. Mur. 21, 43.— 7. Ut cudeiii tempore ct hiijus mluti et con- 
 diiidni omnium civium providisse vidcamini. Cic. Coel. l), 22.— 8. Itaquc, 
 O'e frumeutaria^ provisd, in Sontialiuni tinis excrcitum introduxit. Cit'S. 
 B. 'G. 3, 20.— f>. Dcus consulit rebus luuufinis, nee solum universis, vernm 
 etiam sin^fulis. Cic. Div. 1, 51. — 10. Alhenienses consulchant Aiwllincni 
 Pylhium,'^quas potissimum n'li<;iones tenCrent. Cic. Leij. 2, IG.— 11. 
 ComulUc T<'bi% prospicitc patrhr. Cic. Cat. 4, 3.— 12. Hoc est sapero, 
 non quod ante pedes modo est videre, sed etiam ilia quie fulura sunt 
 2~)roi<pic€re. Ter. Adeli)h. 3, 3. 
 
 § 476. K:ire dative coiistructioiis are 1) tlie dative of tlie 
 agent in passive constructions, as: Mlhl conslUnni afptta/i 
 jam din est. Cic. Div. 5, 19, a resolution lias long been taken 
 by me. 2) The redundant reflexive dative with velle^ as Quid 
 ilhl vis? what do you want? 3) The dative \\\\\\ facere : Quid 
 hn'ic fades? what are you going to do witli him ? 
 
 Rem 49 The diuivc, instead of the passive agent with ab, wlierevor it occur?» in 
 cla««'ioal prose, inav aiwavs be interpreted as a dative of the interested per!««)n. But 
 poet< and post-clasMeal authors often make u-^e of this dative when it can liave no othiT 
 nieaninu; but that ot a passive aix.-nt. For the use of the dative, as passive agent, with 
 the penphrastic conjugation in das, see § 51.3. 
 
 g 477. When verbs having a simple object in the dative, 
 are us^-d i)assively, the passive voice is always impersonal 
 (§ 4G0), the object remaining in the dative, and the verb being 
 placed in the third person singular, without any subject: 
 Nobis resistitar, we are resisted. 
 
 Bern. 50. Ahlatives ahsolute cannot he formed of verbs which liayc a 
 simple object in the dative. lutinitive clauses, in tlie passive construction, 
 if the verb lias a simi)le object in the dative, take an impersonal passive 
 infinitive without a subjeel : He thoui,dit that he was envied, i*ibi inciderl 
 putdvit (that is, was envied to him). Seepage 72, Hem. 11, No. 2. 
 
 V. Verbs, construed with Simple Oiuects in the Genitive 
 
 AND Ablative Cases. 
 
 ^ !7 '^. Verbs with simple objects in the genitive are but 
 
 few: ij verbs of remembering {/neminisse, reminisci^ recor- 
 
 dari); 2) of forgetting (oW/i?/6^c/) ; 3) sometimes the verbs 
 
 jtotlri, to take [)ossession of, to seize ; indiytre and efjvi'C, to need 
 
 to want ; 4) the verb 77iisertri, to ])ity. 
 
 llem.rA. Verbs of rememberin^i? and foriretting inay hayo the object 
 remembered or forgotten in the accusative if it is a thing, and must have 
 
 CONSTllUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 93 
 
 it in the accusative, if the thing remembered or forgotten is indicated 
 by a neuter determinative, as hoc {id) me mini ; quod fere obllius sum. The 
 verb rccordari requires the person remembered to be connected with the 
 proposition de. 
 
 lifm .52. 3/^mi/a>'/?^ may even take the person remembered in the accnsative, jf the 
 mere fact of a person bein^^ in our memory is indicated without actually thinking of him: 
 Ci'inamnutniiii. •sultamrldi. Cic. Phil. 5. G. . 
 
 Jic/ft. M. According' to the analo;ry of verbs of remembenna:, the impersonal expression 
 Vt/iit ttii/ii in mtidem (it eome.s to my mind) ii* coni*trned with a genitive: \enU 
 mi/ii IH'doids in inenkm. Cic. Fin. 5, 1. But this phrat^e may alto be used personally, 
 with a nominative as* subject. „^ . . ,, a 
 
 Ilnn.'A 7//rfJve;e is also comstrned with an ablative. PoCu^t is more generally, and 
 enere is always, in prose, construed with an ablative. See § 4T9. 
 
 Rem. .55. For the genitive alter verbs completed by the idea of price, gee p. 266 foil. 
 
 1. Animus meminit prmteriforum {^ 3o8), prjcsentia cernit, futura prse- 
 videt.* Cic. Div. 1, 30.— 2. Homo impn)bus aliquando' cum <\o\ore flag i- 
 tiorum suorum recordabitur. Cic. Pis. 12.— 3. Dux Helvetiorum hortabatur 
 Ca?sarem, ut reminiscerefur et veteris incommodi populi RomSni, et 
 pristine" rirtutiH Ilelvetidrum. Caes. B. G. 1, 13.— 4. Cohortaius est Cffi- 
 sar yEduos, ut controrerHiarum ac dis.se nsiOnum obliviscerentur. Caes. B. G. 
 7, 34.— 5. Beneficia ^neminisse debet is in quem collata sunt, non comme- 
 moiilre* qui contulit. Cic. Amic. 20.— G. Tu, si meliore memoriS es, velini 
 scire ecquid" de te recordere. Cic. Tusc. 1, 6.— 7. Obliviscor injurias, depono 
 memoriam doloiis mei. Cic. Coel. 50.— 8. Quotiescunque' gradum facies, 
 toties tibi tudrum virtdtum veaiat inineutem. Cic. Or. 2, Gl, 249. 
 
 § 470. The Ablative is required by 1) Verbs denoting 
 AFFECTIONS of the mind, in regard to the object and cause of 
 the affections, as: gauderc, laitari, exuUare, to rejoice, e.xult at; 
 dolere, mrjprere, to mourn over; lahorare, to suffer of, labor 
 under; (jloriari, to boast of.' 2) Verbs denoting plenty or 
 WANT, in regard to the special properties or qualities of which 
 there is a plenty or want, as ahimdare, redundare, to abound in ; 
 offlucre, smtcre, to overflow, teem with ; valere, to be strong in ; 
 flortre, to flourish in ; carere and vacare, to be destitute of, to be 
 without a thing; egere, indirjere, to need a thing. 3) Verbs ex- 
 pressing RELIANCE upon I niti, to rest on ; Jidere, confidere, to rely 
 on. 4) The deponents xiti, to use ; edjiiti, to misuse ; frui and per- 
 fnd, to enjoy ; funr/l and perfmuji, to perform ; poftri, to seize ; 
 'vesci, to feed upon." 5) Verbs expressing a placing one's self 
 at a DISTANCE from something, as : cedere, decedere, excedere. 
 
 » as soon as.—'' resfruvi^ntaria, the supplies. 
 
 t to foresee.-^ once (referrim; to the futnre).-3 former.-* to mention.-^ whether 
 anvthiiK' — « to depose.-' as often as.— » These verhs are also construed with preposi- 
 tions (de). or thev tal<e clauses with gmd. or intinitive-clauses. McErere &ud. duere 
 are also constrind with the accusative.-- Tht-se deponents beino: ancunt passives the 
 ablative object; of which are ori-inally their passive agents, or ablaUves of mstru- 
 luent. 
 
94 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 €(/redi^ to leave a place ; erumpere^ to break from a place ; sc 
 abdlciire^ to resign a place; abstuitre, to abstain from ; desisfere, 
 to desist from ; supersedere, to dispense with. 0) Verbs which 
 require the idea of piiice as complement: stare, constdrc, to 
 cost, to come at ; cmere, vendere, to buy, to sell at, for; voure 
 (vened), llcere, to be soki at {to sell for, in a passive sense) 
 V) The IMPERSONAL ExpiiKssiox opus cst, it is necessary (see 
 Hem. GO). 
 
 1. Addobantur ot laudes quihuH hand minus qnam prcemio pnudent uiilitnm, 
 anlnii. Liv. 2, 00. — 2. JVuUd re tarn latdri soleo (juain nieOrum oniciOnuu 
 cousc'iciitia. Cic.Faiu.5, 7. — o. Rex ilk% viotorlisdivitiisiiuc sulmixus* exul- 
 tabnt'^ insolciitia. — 4, MiliUlrcs viri f/Iornftifxr vulneribuH. Sen. Prov. 4. — o. 
 rroi)riiuu I'sianimi bene consliirili.t't hi'tdri bonin rebus, qI ilolere cvntrariiA, 
 Cic. Am. 13, 47. — (>. Aliciui scrmoiu's liominum nlunu bonis mcprentium 
 etiain ad vestras amis jiermananmt.^ (Mc. 15alb. 35, 5(>. — 7. Duobus ri- 
 tiis divcrsis, (tntritid et luxnrul, civitas laburat. Liv. )>4, 4. — 8. Constat, 
 Germaniam (Talliamquo abnitddre ririii* l'\ U'li/n/iibus. Sen. N. Q. 3, 0. — 
 0. Cai)ua Ibrtis^simuiLun virorum iHvUllndine redunddt. Cic. Pis. 23. — 
 10. ]Miscrum est carere conHuetudint^ amicurum. Cic. Tuse. 5, 22. — 11. 
 Quotidie nos ipsa natura admonet, (luam paiicis rkbns egeat. Cic. Tiisc. 
 5, 35. — 12. Attirns lamiliilil.-; stios, (juibiis ftbvs indirptirnnt, adjuvit. 
 Nej). 25, 9. — 13. Est atlolescenlis majorcs natu' verCri, exque Ids deiigeie 
 optimos et probatissimos, quorum coimlio atque (luctontdte nitatur. Cic. 
 Otf. 1,34. — 14. Qiiis potest aut corporis /r//i<7«^',' aiit tbrtunae stdbUitdte,'^ 
 confidere? — 15. Multi benejieio Dei perverse" utuntur. Cic. N. D. 3, 28. — 
 10. Conuuoda qnibus utimuv, lucemquc qua fruimvr a Deo nobis dari vi- 
 dCmus. Cic. llosc. Am. 45, 131. — 17. VA mihi videnlur beate vixisse,quibus 
 sapienti.'C laude perfrui licuit. Cic. Brut. 1). — 18. Fustuarium'" merClur 
 miles, qui signa relinquit, aut prwsidio decidit. Liv. 5, C. — 19. Augures 
 poterant decernere, ut magistrdtu ae abdicdrcnt consules. Cic. Leg. 2, 
 12. — 20. Ca3sar legiones equitatumque revociiri atque itinerc detsixtere 
 jubet. Caes. 13. G. 5, 11. — 2i, Mullo sunguLne Poenis victoria !<itiit. Liv. 
 23, 30. — 22. Militcs Cicsar cdocet," quanlo detrhnento et quot virorum Ibr- 
 tium morte necesse sit conntdre victoriam. Cas. B. G. 7, 19. — 23. Purpu- 
 rtje" violacea;'^ WhvA denariU^* centum venlbat. Plin. N. II. 0,39. — 24. 
 Mdfjistmtibux opus est, sine quorum prudeutia ac diiigeutia esse civitas non 
 potest. Cic. Leg. 3, 2. 
 
 Eem.bQ. The ij'^noral idea of the ablative is tli.it of CAUfSE in its widcPt gcnsse. This 
 relation, particiiliriy, appears a^* Uiii of "the i.nstki:.hknt' (of which the prrpo- 
 ■^\i\oi\'bi/ is the exponent), of .m.\nnki; and meanh (by, iit), as that of okkjin (fnmn. and. 
 applied to space, as the stauting-I'oint (relation whenck). The construction of all the 
 verbs, mentioned above, may be referred to one of these relations, einanatiMjjf from tiie 
 general ide i of the ablative, lint more fre(juently the ablative is used as an aovekbiai. 
 case (i. e. without completinj; the idea of a verb or adjective), in order to express a 
 
 > relying on.— ' to revel in.— 3 came. — * ptreams. — * intercourse with.— « majOres 
 natu, older persons. — '' lirninesH. — *> stability. — * perversely.--*" cudgt'limr to dt-ath. 
 — " to explain.—" purple color.— '^ violet.—** a denarius, a Roman bilver coin. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 95 
 
 varietv of adverl>ial ideas, properly represented by prepositions or adverbs (§424. § 4o3). 
 Fven in tlie-^e relations the g.-neral idea of the ablative may alway» be traced, and it is 
 idle to split (as niDst jrraramarians do) the ideas expressed by th*- ah ative into a number 
 of loose and unconnected catejrories, there being a number of ablaUvc constructions 
 which can properly be assigned to none of them. 
 
 Rem. 57, The verbs cnuiuerated No. 5, expressing distance, etc., are 
 also construed with prepositions. See page 27. 
 
 Rein. 5S. The verbs stare and constdre, mentioned No. 6, are also con- 
 strued with the ablative, in some meanings different from that of price. 
 ^tdre aliqud re means * to abide by something,'' the opposite of those verbs of 
 lilacing one's self at a distance, mentioned No. 5. Onin£s cupiebant Cte- 
 xiireni%tare c^inditionibns eis, quas tuUsset. Cic. ad Att. 1, 7, 15. The same 
 
 jirepositions de, ex, in: quidquid auro argentOce constdret. Suet. Aug. 2j. 
 Gratis) nctirme constat, non imitafiOne. (^uint. 11, 3. (See § 443.) 
 
 Rem. 50. The abl.\tive of pkice (No. (i) is not confined to the verbs 
 mentioned, and in some constructions must be replaced by the genitive 
 of price. See 266 toll. 
 
 Rim GO. The word opus in tlic connection opus est (it is necessary, there 
 is need of) is an indeclinable predicate-noun. Its construction is either 
 i)ersonal or impersonal (which is more fre(iuently the case). In the per- 
 sonal conslruction, that which is necessary is placed as subject m the 
 nominative, the copula esse agreeing in number with the subject, as : Ami- 
 cOrum auxilium opus est; biU Lib ri opus sunt.— If impersonal, that which 
 
 necessary is placed in the ablative,* the copula always being in the third 
 ])ers. sing. : Non mnltis nrbis opus est, not many words are necessary 
 (there is "no need of many words).— If that which is necessary is ex- 
 pressed l.-y a VERB, the construction of tiie latter is either {a) by a sub- 
 ject-in fin i'tive, or (J)) by an intinitive-clause, or (c) by the ablative neuter 
 of the i)ast participle, or {d) by the secc^nd supine (the construction with 
 vt being suite-classical). The i)erson to whom something is necessary is 
 al\vays'l>laced in the dative (of the interested person): 
 
 (a) (Jnid opus est, de Dionvsio tam valde affirnwre. Cic. Att. 7, 8.— (6) Nunc 
 
 opus est. te aninio cat^re, ut corpore possis. Cic. Fam. 16, U.—{c) Matunifo^ opus est. 
 
 Liv. 8, 13.— ((i) Non lougius quam quoad^ scilu opus est, proccdelur. Cic. In v. 1, 20. 
 
 Rrm. 61. According to the analogy of opus est, the rare phrase ysus est 
 (there is use of, there is need of), is likewise construed with the ablative 
 of the thing needed. It is mostly confined to poets, and never occurs m 
 Cicero* or'Cajsar : Ut Octavius reduceret navis quibus considi usus non 
 esset, Liv. 30, 41 (for which the Consul had no use). 
 
 Jii.v iwimlart or UtCire But generally the victim sacriflced is placed in the accusative ; 
 
 3) the ablative dependent ou ylatre, to rain, as sanguine, lapidibus plutt. it rains blooU, 
 stones. 
 
 1 The cause of this construction is difBcult to explain. The ancient Latins considered 
 it thrniselves as an anoinalv. See Gell. .7, 2.—'» to hasten. -s as far as.-* The passage 
 Leg. 3, 4, 10, cited in the lexicons, rests on a bad conjecture, and occura lu a passage 
 in which archaic lan^juaiie is used on purpose. 
 
96 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 VI. Verbs Construed with Compound Objects ix Oblique 
 
 Cases. 
 § 480. Only transitive verbs admit of a second completing 
 object, so that in a completing compound object one of the 
 cases must be an accusative. 
 
 Hem. 63. Tlicre are only a few exceptions to this rule : 1) The plirasc 
 intcrdkere alicul aliqud re, to exchule, prohibit somebody from somctliinii, 
 as nlicui aqnd et igni interdicere, to exclude one from water and lire (i. e. 
 to banish him). Ariovi.stKS omni Gallid Romanifi interdivit. Crrs. B. G. 1, 
 4().—Jukrdictuin mari Aniidti popnlo ed. \j\\.'6,\A.—M(i(jinirntibu8 mcrO- 
 Tfu/i curationc interdictum. lb. 1),43. Rarely the accusative occurs for the 
 ablative {locum (dicui interdicere), and very rarely tlie accusative is fouiul 
 instead of the dative {loco (diquem interdicere). 2) Tlic ])hrases Alicui 
 dicto nudientem case (^ 474, note) ; ^fiId veuit (dici'ijtia in menti m (Rem. 5o) ; 
 Mihi aliqud re opus cut {Ji. 00) ; Alicui aliqud re calcre. Cic. Mil. 27. 
 
 Item. 04. An apparent exception to the same rule is the construction 
 Willi two datives, one of which is a predicate-dative (§ 400 and Rem. 
 33). A similar construction occurs after verbs implyini; an action which 
 may be directed to a certain piupose, when the action is conceived as an 
 advantai]^e to a pkuson, as: I send an army for assistance to llie be- 
 sieged, exercitum obsessis auxilio mittere. l\\ this construction the da- 
 tive expressing tlie ])urpose {aiuilio) must be considered an accessory 
 PREDICATE, in which a participle {heinrj a help) is understood («^ 401). By 
 a peculiar attraction this accessory predicate agrees in case with the 
 * dative of the interested person' (ob.sessis), instead of agreeing with its 
 logical subject (exercitum). 
 
 Jiem. 05. Verbs re(iuiring this double dative are : accijyere, dare, deli- 
 gere, dicere, mittere, reli/tqucre, ire, ventre. The i>redicate-dative after 
 these veibs is generally translated by as, to, for, or without auy con- 
 necting word. 
 
 1. Ctesar qninque cotiorfTs castris priFfddio n-linquit. Cacs. B. G. 7, 60.— 2. Pausanias, 
 quos Bvzantii ccpcrat iciris i)ropinqu()M> titn murwri misit. Nep. 4, 2.— 3. Pausanias 
 venit Atticisa auxilio. N*'p. 8. 3.— 4. Pars SadlnL'^ cxxnt i.?/6«i''/io,' pars Koinilnot» ado- 
 riuniur. Liv. 2. 53, 2.— 5. Fahio, nol)ilissiino liomini, laudl nou est datum.-» quod 
 pin{::eret.5 Cic. Tusc. 1, 2.— 6. Vitio mihi daiit,» quod uiortem liouiinis uecessarii' 
 graviter fero.« Cic. Fam. 11. 28. 
 
 t^ Sometime!* tlie dative of the interested person \s understood, as receptulcanere, 
 to give the sisnal for retreat (i.e. exercitid lor the army). From such phrases aw these 
 the grammarians have invented ' a dative of purpose,' which, fince it is strictly limited 
 to the phrases described above, has led inanv to tlie erroneous opiuiou that the dative 
 case is a general exponent of the relation of purpose. 
 
 § 481. If to a transitive object another comj)leting object is 
 added, the former is called the near oriect, the latter, the 
 REMOTE OBJECT. Romote objccts may be, 1) a dative, 2) ageni- 
 tive, 3) an ablative, 4) another accusative. 
 
 1 relatives.—'» inhabitants of Attica.— ^ assistance.—* considered.—» to paint, to 
 practise painting.— « to find fault with.— '^ near relatives.- ^ am greatly afflicted by. 
 
 f\ 
 
 ' 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 97 
 
 B^m. 66. All such compound objects may be transformed into a per- 
 sonal (never an impersonal) passive construction, by leaving the remote 
 object unaltered, and changing the near object (according to the general 
 rules) into a passive subject : 
 
 Act. Alicui librum dare. Pass. Alicui liber daiur. 
 
 A liquem. fu rti accumre. Aliquis fu rti accumtur. 
 
 Aliquem oculu privdre. Aliquis oculis privdtur. 
 
 Only when the transitive accusative has another accusative as remote 
 object, special rules must be observed See Rem. 73. 
 
 § 48S, By far the most numerous cases of compound objects 
 are the combinations of transitive verbs with objects in the 
 DATIVE, the accusative generally denoting a thing, the dative 
 denoting a peksox, or a thing which may be replaced by a 
 person. 
 
 Bern. 67. If in English two objective cases complete the idea of the 
 same verb, the corresponding Latin construction is generally (see, how- 
 ever, 5^ 486) a transitive verb with a remote object in the dative (he sends 
 me ii xn-i^^i-nx^donum mihi mittii ; he promised him helv), auxiUum ei 
 pollivitm est). Sometimes the English remote object with to corresponds 
 to the Latm remote object in the dative {as :fug(B se manddre, to betake 
 ones selt to llight; gratias alicui agere, to return thanks to some one). 
 JJut generally the constructions in both languaires are widely different, 
 and, while Engli.«;h objects with to frequently ^are expressed by Latin 
 cases other than the dative (as ' to accustom somebody to a ihm<r ^ aliouem. 
 ohqna re assuefacere), or by piejiositions (^ 427), Latin constructions with 
 the dative nuist very frequently be entirely recast in English (as : man- 
 dare altqnid alicui, to charge somebody {alicui) with something {aliquid)- 
 Odium alicui mjerre, to make war oti somebody; prc^Jicere .aliquem exer- 
 citui, to place some one at the head of the arm}^ etc.) 
 
 i,n?,^>.i^"'^*^i^"^*^ instances of idiomatic Latin dative constructions are almost inex- 
 haustible, on V s.,nie of the principal differences in idiom can be mentioned here 
 practRai prol.ciency in the c;orrect use of Unin constructions being attainabfe only by 
 a Ion- and carelul reading of the Latin classic^?. ^ ^ 
 
 ie<'//y. 68 Verbs signifying 'to take something away from a person' 
 arc generally transitive in respect to the thing'taken, adding the losimr 
 person m the torm of a ' dative of the interested person' (dative of dis- 
 advantage) Such verbs are demere, aiiinure, ei-ipere, 8urripere,detrahere, 
 exuere subduc^re, intercij)ere, auferre (to carry away), abiqere (to drive 
 ii\st\y),furari (to steal). We either translate such phrases by a verb of 
 
 taking away' with the preposition from (corresponding here to the 
 Latin dative), or we recast the construction, substituting a verb of *de- 
 privmg, make the person the near object, and the thing the remote 
 ooject Avith the preposition of, as : galeam militi eripuit, he snatched the 
 helmet Irom the soldier, or 'he deprived the soldier of his helmet ' (liter- 
 ally : he snatched the helmet away to [the disadvantage of] the soldier.)^ 
 
 1. Si xitam mihi for^^ ademisset. Cic. Plane. 42, 1 01.- 2. Ferrum et arma iritis 
 
 » If that from which something is taken away, is not a person, and not conceived as 
 euch, the prepositions a^, dt, ex arc used. See § 441, Rem 48.- --^ diance. '"'"''''^'"'^ *^ 
 
98 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 99 
 
 et pngnSro cnpientihns inilitibm adimunhir. Liv. 22, 44.- 3. iVi/i demit, laydi ploria 
 nostra ///«?. Ov. Pont. 7, 20.- 4. Ihcc f^i falsa i^unt, eripic!» miht hnnc ^^'f*"'- <- »c. 
 Art 10 4 — 5 CiP<ar Dfjotaro detra.xit Jrw^»fama 8enatudatam. Uc. L>i\. A-iT.— b. 
 Quodauri habui.it/ mihi in, C. Verrcs. cripiiisti atqiu- abMuli»^ii. <^'!<;- ^'V' 'V it*f- 
 6* ifl,_ 7. qui eOrum cuipiam" qui iini latrocinantnr' lunltiir aliquid aut enpU, la 
 eibi iieinlatrocinio* quidem relinquit locuiu. Cic. Off. 2, 11, 40. 
 
 Rem. 09. A ^reat difference ])et\veen Latin and Enf;lish construction is 
 observable in those compound objects which depend on verbs com- 
 pounded with the PRErosrnoNS mentioned Hem. 45, especially pm and 
 in. Thus 1) pr(vfirere and prcpponere siirnity * to raise somebody to the 
 command {praj of something:,' as prcrjicere aliquem legiOni, to uuike one 
 chief of a lei^ion ; 2) infern\ imponeve, imperare, it>jk€rejnjurigere,ahqnid 
 alicui, i^cneridly ex])ress transitive ideas, completed m English by the pre- 
 position on, as': injuriam alimi inferre, to intlict an injury on some one; 
 iinponere alicnl comUtioites, to impose conditions on ; injicere manuft aUnn, 
 to lay hands on one. Iniperare aliquid (dicui is es])ecially used ot milita- 
 ry reciiiisitions, as fnimentum, pecinwun, miliies alicui inipenwe, to order 
 some t)ne to furnish corn, money, soldiers. 
 
 r^^ Many of the Latin transitives conii)()und('d with the prepositions mentioned, 
 
 cannot bo <onstnu-d with the dativr as reinot4^> ol)jc(t, but talvc l'»ei>«>^>tiona objects 
 
 olten ditlVrent from those with wiiich thev are compounded. (See Hf «'»"•) 1""* 
 
 tlie Eii-'lish i)hrasc'to bestow somethin-,' on t-omebudy' isi expressed either by C(jn- 
 
 j'trre aflqmd in aUqnein, or by lUj'tire aUqukl (ilicui. 
 
 1. Darius cloM Datim pnvfecit et Artaphernem. Xep. Milt. 4.— 2. Ciesar singulis 
 lef/ionihus cinLTulos leqatox^ et quaff arem pnefTcit. Cirs. B. G. 1, o2.— 3. tuisar 
 /iifMrrui^^ L(Mh,mn pra'posuit. lb. 54.- 4. Postuhlvit Csesar, nc Anovistus aiU 
 .EduU-MW eorum «WwAf^'/w in ferret. lb. 43 — 5. Uannibal maprnum Armwn nijCcit^ 
 exncitni Romanoriim. Ncp- Hinm. 5.- »5. Ariovistus respondit. he stipenduim^ capero 
 lure ])elli quod rictore.^ nrfi,^ imponerc consuCrint.» Cses. B. G. 1, 44.— 7. Metelins 
 JugnrthiH imperat arirfuti ;>r<W(/o dncenta millia. Sail. Ju'.^. fi2, 5.— 8. Crr^ar lYrovin- 
 da; t"fi "uani niaxiinuin potest militum Jinmerum imperat. Cues. B. G.l, ». 
 
 § i^:i The verbs doiuire,''' adsjKrgere and inspergere^^ in- 
 tercUultre;- imperare,'' induere,'' cxuere,'" aiul cirenmdare are 
 construed either with the accusative ot'tlie thing and the dative 
 of the person, or Avith the accusative of tlie person and the 
 ablative of the thini^. 
 
 1. Ciceroni populiisKomanus (rternitdtem^* immorUditatemqiie" donflvit. 
 Cic. Pis. 8.— 2. Atticus Af/ieni^n.u.s universos frumento donilvit. Nep. 
 Att. 2.— 8. Vatinius Mildhi, clarissimo viro, n(mnullam laudaliOne'* sua 
 hfheculam'" aspcrsit. Cic. Vat. 17.— 4. Pythagoras ne Apollini qiiidem 
 Delio hostiam"'" immoliIiV volnit. ne arom Houguine aspergeret. Cic. 
 N. I), o, 30.— 5. li^ni.s witdrix omnibus salutaiem impertii adorem. Cic. 
 N D. 2, 10.— O.^Attici paler omnibus doclrlnis, <///f/!/?/« puerllis (etas 
 
 1 Inst of mhil.—'^ qnispiatn, a synonvm of quixqnam. is especially nscd in j^cneral con- 
 ditionni clauses, or su<h clauses as have tin- foncof these (§3oT. U. 4).- =" to practise bigli- 
 wav lobberv.- •• in latrocinio.\n^U'i\i\ <»f infer Uif rone", among the robbers.— «* lieutenants 
 conimaiiding.- « /lifjenia. Gen. drum. (pi. tantumt. winter-quarters.—"' to throw.— inb- 
 ute — » iust!of comtueverint.fiom ro;//!umr>, wiiieh has tlie meainuK and construciion 
 of mlere.—^^ to present somebodv with.— ^i to str.-w soinetbini: witli to Hsi)er.se som«!- 
 bodv.- la to exclude somebody from.— JS to impart, to bestow somethin-z upi.n —'«to 
 clotiie somebndv with, to put sometbinj? on somebody —** to strip somebody of. 1 He 
 dative consirucrionH of exiiere and cirenmdare belontr to poetry and post-classical prose.— 
 »« eternity.— 17 immortality.—" euloijy.— »» a kind of taiut.— '■'" a victim. — to sacriflce. 
 
 impcrtlri debet, fdium erudlvit. Nep. Att. 1.— 7. Pontis atque ilinerum 
 angustiffi» mulHtudini fngam intercluserant. Ca^s. B. G. 7, 11.— 8. Galli 
 commeatihuH^ nostros intercludere instituuni'. Cajs. B. G. 3, 23.— 9. De- 
 janlra llerculi sanguine Centauri tinctam* tunicartt induit. Cic. Tusc. 
 2, 8, 20.— 10. Pomis^ «c induit arbor. Virg. Georg. 4, 143. 
 
 § 484. The combination of the accusative with genitive 
 objects occurs in several constructions, in which the genitive 
 denotes a fact from wfiich the action of the orovernine verb is 
 derived, tlie accusative being in the relation of a logical sub- 
 ject ; namely: 
 
 1. With the verbs ndmonere^ commonere, commonefacere aliquem 
 (dicfijuH rci, to remind somebody of somethiiur;' 2. with verbs denoting 
 
 ACCUSATION, CO:VVICTION, and ACQUITTAL of CRIME Or faultS, and CON- 
 DEMNATION for crime : accumre, arguere, imimuldre, convincere, d/im- 
 mlre, condemndre, absolvcre, liberdref' 5. with the impersonal expressions, 
 miiiercl, pa^nifet, pigcf, pndet, tcvdet {pertxemtn est) me aHcOjm rei. These 
 arc rendered by personal expressions [miseret me alicOjus), I j)ity some- 
 body (or something); pcenitet me, I repent something; piget, I am weary 
 of; pudet, I am ashamed of; tmlct, I am sick of, I am disgusted with. 
 
 1. AdmonCbat Q'A\\\\\va cdium egentdtis,^ alium cupiditdiis^^ sua?, com- 
 plftrli periodi ant ignominifp. Sail. Cat. 21.— 2. Gramniaticos'^^ officii sui 
 comnK.nGmus. Quint. 1, .5,7.— 3. Quum ipse te veteris ainiciticp, commo- 
 nefaceres, commolus es y'-* Auct. Her. 4, 24.— 4. Miltiades proditidnis'^ est 
 accusatus. Nep. 1, 7, 5.— o. IMajores nostri, si quam unliis jfeccMi^* 
 vuilierem damnabant, (eam) multorum malejicidrum^^ convictam (esse) 
 pulabant.Auct.lIer. 2, lo. — 0. Eorum nos magis miseret, qui nostram 
 misericordiain non requlrunt'", quam qui illam efflagitant.*' Cic. Mil. 
 o4, 1)2. — 7. Numquam primi conailii Ueum paMiitet.Sen. Ben. 6, 23. — 
 8. Me non solum pigct Htidtitice mea?, sed etiam pudet. Cic. Dom. 11, 20. 
 
 Hem. 70. Aliquem capitis accusare means ' to accuse one of a capital crime ;' dbsoltere 
 cn)ntis. to acquit one of a capital crime. The death-penalty to which somebody is con- 
 demned is i)laced in the ^^[enitive or ablative {capHi.<f or capite, not mortishnimorte)^^. A 
 tine to which somebody is condemned is always placed in the ablative. 
 
 § 485. The constructions of transitive verbs wdth the 
 
 Ablative are mainly of two kinds, 1) those wdiose remote 
 
 object may be conceived as a MEANS or instrument; 2) those 
 
 which iinpl)' the idea of separation from the remote object. 
 
 Rem. 71. To the former class belong 1) verbs signifying to provide one 
 with something, taken in the widest sense of the word, as mstlre aliquem 
 aliqud re, to clothe one with something; circumdare aliquem aliqud re, to 
 surround one with something; rcjnunerdri, to reward; instruere, to fur- 
 nish, to provide, to prepare ; e.rplere, complere, replere., to fill; orndre, to 
 adorn ; onerdre, to charge, to burden. To the same conception belongs 
 the verb assuefacere aliquem aliqud re, to accustom some one to something 
 
 * Narrowness, — 2 commedtus, supplies.— ' to begin. — *tinf?ed with.— ^ garment. — 
 * ixmium. fruit.— "^ Verbs of reminding are also construed with de in regard to the 
 object reminded.— « All these verbs are also construed with de or the mere ablative. — 
 " poverty. — lOcupidity.— »i «rranimarian.— i^ tobe aftected.— '^ treason.— i* offence.— 
 " misdeed.— i« require.— i^ demand >8 See Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 5. 
 
100 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 (that io which one is accustomed, bein2: conceived as the cause and 
 instrument of tlie habit). Here belon.irs the general verb ap-ere allqnem 
 aliqua re, which is used of producin.ir atfectionsof the mind, wliile modern 
 lano-uai^es generally express both the affection ])roduced and the act 
 of prodlicing by the verb itself, as gaudlo aliqncm ajficcrc, to gladden some- 
 body ; (f(>/'(>re (fjficere, to afflict; admiratidnenfflcere, to astonish, to surprise; 
 ?io}iore, jyrcsmu) afficcre, to honor, to reward. 2) Verbs of estimating 
 and JUDGING, iisjudicdre aliqucm aliqua re, to judge somebody by some- 
 thing; miimare, to estimate; defimre, to determine; vitfiri, to measure, 
 1 Natflra oculos tennippimin membrdnis^ ve.-^tTvit et «cpsitv Cic. N. D. 2, 57.— 2. Cur?l- 
 
 vit Vcm-s lit co/ivhium^ omnibus re^fAsinstnictum el paratum essct. Cic. \ err. '~,4 -.. 
 
 — 3. Dfiis /x>//i*- omnibut» oxplevit nvnidmn. niali nihil a(hni>ciiii<. Cic. Inn. -^. — 
 
 4 Mariii< co/nf/uvt'i, stlpendio^, atwis. ahix ntUibn.'' (rebus) nacuanwraX. Sail. Jug. N).— 
 
 5 Suevi a pueris nullo officio aut disiprwa aj^suefadi, nihil oinnTno contra volunt Stem 
 faciunt Cie« B (i 4, 1.— (J. Non enim hac exceptiOne ?///?/^" affiiitur ^ //f/rno. sed unns 
 priviltur injuria (liem. 72). Cic. A<,'r. 2, 4.— 7. Qui non T. Aiuiiiuu niaxnua* /"/<(«'•' ^^W\' 
 lum Itoniilnuni. cunctam» /A//irtw. /<o/i(5rtf'.s-oninTs artVcissc et dicat et sentiat Y Lie. -Mil. 
 2S — 8 Vo«^ tanti seeleris n/fnrem'^ non ino(lo/?o«W77>'/.«nullis afllcielis, j^eil etiain ad t'up- 
 pliciiun» lapi'"' i)atiemini ? lb. 2'.».— it. Mairiios homines rirtiVe inctlmur xwn fortuna. 
 Sep. 18. 1,1.— 10. (}imi rectum est, nee magniludiiie icstimfltun nee rnimero, nee temj>ore. 
 .Sen. Kp. 74. 
 
 Rem. 72. To the latter class belong 1) verbs of kkmoving, as : aliquem 
 loco mocere, to remove one from a place ; pellcre, to drive; prohibcre and 
 arccre, to keep from; iuUrdudcre and exdudere, to exclude ; ~) verbs ot 
 DEPHiviNG, n^pri rare aliquem aliqua re, to deprive one of -a thing;" orbdre, 
 to bereave ; sjTolidre, to rob ; J5) verbs of fukking, as libera re, noUcre. 
 
 1. Ciesar r^atishabebatJ^inpnePcntiJl ho'^tem raplnis. pabtdafionib>/s\^, jwpvlafioni-^ 
 b> ' ^ * ■ '^ " ' »—..—-- 
 
 § 486. Botli the near and the remote object are placed in 
 the Accusative with the verbs doccre and edoccre (to teach), 
 and cehlre (aliquem aliquld), to conceal (somethin<r from some- 
 body) ; and sometimes with the xi^rhs ])Oscere,Jf a f/i Wire {(diqiiem 
 allquid), to demand (a thing of one), roffilre and iiiterrofjare 
 {aliquem aliquid), to ask, question somebody <d)(>at a thing. 
 
 rr" CeWre aliquem (without aliquid) means» cither 'to conceal', or to 'mi si end' 
 FonVebody bv coueealini,' t«)M.ethin<r {nliquii C€ldfitr=^ome one is dccc-ived). ^l^^}^^^ 
 of cdare alvinein alignid, also celare aliquem de altqua ie occurs. Cic. tani. 7. ^u, 6. 
 
 1. Fortuna \w\\\<n'temviclos i\\\o(\\\Q. docet. Curt. 7, 7, 1. — 3. Philoso- 
 phia uo!< (imim cetcras res omnis, tum, quod est dillicillimum, docuit ut 
 iiosm.l ii)sos noscerCmus'\ Cic. Leg. 1, 22.— 3. CxxWWxyaJu mitutem,, 
 quam illexerat^",mala/^««-9medocebat. Sail. Cat. 10.— 4. Kumenes iter 
 quod habCbat ow/iivcelavit. Nep. Eum. 8.— 5. Non te ceUlvi hunc »er- 
 wOnem. Cic. F^am. 2, 10, 8.— G. Verres ;?a^£'«^^s;)/•t<i//m pro sepultura 
 liherurum posc5bat. Cic. VeiT. 2, 1, 3.— 7. Caesar jEduos fmmentuui. 
 
 1 Membrane.— ' sep'ire, to surround.— » baiiqnet.— '•to mix with.— «money.— • the 
 whole of, .vnonvm ot' to'vs.- ■> aven-er.- • death.- ^^ rapere «'W'''''"\!!'.v"!?'lor"h .7 
 1» If the deprivfuir refers to thing's uhich are separated by takini.^tuem aw«^. !i ]^^^f^ 
 taking awav, but not, irrivare. mu^tbeused.- i"^ to deem, (see H. ^^, <-•»•- *' *"[^S^ 
 «* plinulerifx'.— »» to become acquainted witli, to know.- »« lUicere, to allure.— bunal. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF YERBS. 
 
 101 
 
 qnod polliciti erant, fiagitabat. Cae.s. B. G. 1, 16, — 8. Pusdonem^ quendam 
 
 Socrates apud Platonem interrogat quoedam geomctrica* de dimensioned 
 
 quadrati.* Cic. Tnsc. 1, 2-1:. 
 
 Jietn. 73 In crood Latinity docZre is not nsed in a passive constrnction if it i(« accom- 
 panied by an accusative denoting the thing taught. We can say Aliquis docitur db 
 a/ioi'^). somebody is taught by a person, but not: Aliquis docHur aliquam rem (some- 
 bony is taught a thing). Instead of it the active expression : aliquix rem discit, must be 
 nsed. Only to the past participle doctus the thiiis; lauglit Is added in the accusative, as 
 Lfffidnes Liirmoe. militiam Homdnam edocUe. Liv. 6, 32. — Cflare, in the passive, likewise 
 has the active accusative of the pkksov as passive sul)ject, but adds ihe thing concealed 
 by means of the preposition de (celor de aliqua re). — The verbs of asking and demand- 
 ing, in the passive construction, have the person who is .asked, or from who'm something is 
 demanded, as passive subject and retain the accusative of the thing asked {^ernproUius 
 ro<]atu><€f^l sentenfiam). Mut verbs of demanding, in tlie passive voice, more generally take 
 the construction ^^yi/rt/'cJ {j)0!<cere) aliquid ab aliqua {% A ^\.R. AH.)— All verl)s oj saying 
 and feeling, con-trued with rhar-clauses. or those jroverning an object-iniinitive, may 
 take the neuier accusative of a prolioun or form-adjective in place of the clause or the 
 infinitive, and, ii transitiv»'. m;iy tlifts be construed with two accusatives as objects, as 
 hoc te hortor ; id tecorjo. This neuter accusative remains in the passive construction, 
 as Omnia qud, monemur. 
 
 § 4:8 7« Certain verbs, along with their transitive accusative, 
 take a secoxd accusative (either of a noun or adjective) as 
 COMPLETING PREDICATE of the actioH (§ 402). This predicate- 
 accusative lias the transitive accusative for its logical subject, 
 and, if an adjective, agrees with it in number and gender. In 
 the passive construction the logical subject-accusative becomes 
 the grammatical subject-nominative, and the predicate-accusa- 
 tive is changed into a predicate-nominative : 
 
 1. Active : Populu.'i Romdnu.t Cic^^rOnem, comulem credvit. 
 Passive : Cicero a popiilo Ilamdno consul crcdtus est. 
 
 2. Active : IL(nc legidnem dcsar foriissimam judicdnt. 
 Passive : llcec legio a Ccemre fortissinm judicata est. 
 
 Rem. 74. These verbs, which are generally called factitive verbs, are : 
 
 A. Those signityiug 1) to make somebody something, facere, efficere, 
 
 reddere^Jingtre (to Ibrin, to represent by means of sculpture, picture, or 
 
 poetry) ; .sc pra'here, to sho\v one's self; se prmstdre, to prove (to be) ; 2) to 
 
 CREATE or ELECT somebody something [credre, eligere) ; 8) to proclaim 
 
 somebody something {declardre, renuniidre) ; 4) to install somebody as 
 
 something {inHtiluere). 
 
 1. Pfpni Uamilcarem imp-ratorem^ focCriint. Nop. Ilam. 2. — 2. Themistocles peri- 
 li/<iiifnoji belli navillis fecit Alhenien.us. Nep. Them. i. — 3. Decs placdtos^ pietas efHciet 
 et sanctitas. Cie. Off. 2. 3. — 4. Homines cacos reddit cupiditas et avaritia. Cic. Rose. 
 Am^ 35. — 5. Ancum Marc'utm reqem popnlus creiivit. Liv. 1, 32.— 6. Thebani Philippum^ 
 Macedonia* regem, ductin eligtint. Just. S, 2. — 7. Cicerdnem\\\\\\<irii-JL q'w'ix&s cousulem 
 dechirjivit. Cic. Pis. 1. — 8. Cicero Lvcium Mura^nam conmlem renuntiavit. Cic. Mur. 
 1. — M. Serrina Tulliu^ maLmo consensu^ rex est declanltus. Liv. 1. 4*).— 10. O mi&eruin 
 et inf<'l[cem ilium diem quo co/z^a/ omnibus ceniuriis** P. A^^^Wa reuuntiatus est. Cic. 
 Snil. 32.— 11. Tiresidin^ Mjnentem fiuL'unt poCtjc ; at vero Polyphemum n<mi5rus 
 iounanvm^'^ tiuxit. Cic. Sen. 17. — 12. Tfe (/ij7/r?///i tuismajoribus priebes. Cic. Fam. 2.18. 
 
 ' A lad. — ^ geometrical matters (or questions). — ' measurement. — ♦ quadrdtum, the 
 square. — ' coinm.snder in chief. — " piamtus. propitious. — ' with L'reat unanimity. — 
 " ceuturia. a century, a division of the Roman people. — ' Nom. Tiresias, first (Greek) 
 declension.— lo monstrous. 
 
102 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF TERES. 
 
 t^T" Of these verbs reddere is not used in the passive voice. Instead of it Jieri or 
 effici is listed. 
 
 B. Verbs sii^iiifvin.fij *to call:' dicere, appeUdre, vocdre, nomindre (to 
 
 name), inscribere, to entitle (give a name to a book), 
 
 1. Ifosfig tipnd majnre.s nostros f.< dicebatnr qvem nnnc peregrinrnn^ dicimns. Cic. 
 Ort*. 1. \'l.—-'l. rolycratetn Samiiim' felicern appellilbaiit. Cic. Fin. 5, .'JO. — 3. Suinmiun 
 cormliuni niajOros nostri nppt'liilbanr semltfon. Cic. Sen. 6. — 4. Cato sapiens cellam 
 rtenarbiin^ riMpublicje nostrie, iiutrlcein* i>Iebis Komilniu SicUiam nomiiiilvit. Cic. 
 Verr, 2, 2. — 5. Aliquld de oratnris arte panels pnpcipiunt» libeilis» eomqxie rhetnricon 
 iiiscrTbunt. Cic. Or. .3, 3. — (5. Jiistitia ertra doo.s rdigio dicitur, erija parentTi* pietas.'' 
 Cic. Part. 2-2.— 7. Ttmpas actiOnis» opportfliurn» appeliatiir occaxio. Cir. Oil*. 1,40. — 
 8. Apud Lact'dicmonios ei qui ampli-^sinmrn"' iiiai;i>»tnitum" ireriint.''' iiominajitur 
 fienej't. Cic. Sen. (i. — 1>. Qiiani cDpiOise^^ ,i Xenuphoute a",'ricultQra Jaudfltur in eo libro 
 qui (Economicus inscribitur ! Cic. Sen. 17. 
 
 C. V^erbs signifying Mo believe, consider, hold, deem, judge,' 
 habere, ducere, putdre, exixtimdre, arbitrdri,judicdre. 
 
 1. Natflra insculpsit'* in nientibns nostrip, nt </^o.<f aternm ct heatox habcrCmns. 
 Cic. N. D. 1, 17 — 2. Timolcon cam ricforiam pnTcldram diiccbat, in qiiil plus ess^ct 
 . clciiu'iitia» qiiam criidclitiltis.i^ Xcp. 'i'iin. 2.— :^. Nemo credit, ni^^i'* ei qitein Ji(iTlem^'' 
 putat. Cic. RofC. Am. .'i'.». — 4. Niliil milii i»tiiltiiis videtur, quam e.\i."*timflre eum 
 ffuiiiomm tiii'^ qnem non noris.»» Cic. I'et. 7. — 5. Socrates* tofTiis nuindi se vicolnin et 
 ciretn arl)itrabiitur. Cic. 'lu>»c. r->. 37. — (5. Miilti hiepe. versfltos^" homincd ct callidos 
 admiraiites, malitinin'^^ sapit'/idam }nd\a\\\t. Cic. Ofl'. 2, .'J. — 7. Scj-thilnim f7^/?/f fl/^/i- 
 ^wi.v.svwa 8emj)er babita est. Just. 2. 1. — 8. Omni in rc.co/tsensio'^'^ omuhvn pentimn/tx 
 natatie ])iitanda e>r. Cic. Tusc. 1, 1.'5. — 9. Tniversus hie tuttiidi/s una ciiifa-s lioiuinimi 
 recte exisitimiltur. Cic. Loj^. 1, 7. — 10. Socrates ab Apollinis oraculo est omnium sapien- 
 tissimua jiuliciltus. Cic. Sen. 21. 
 
 t^^^ The active voice of ^rt^>?r^ in the factitive moanini; ' to deem,' 'to hold' is 
 rarely used with a predicate-accusative.-' Iu!»tcad of it, the complelin>j predicate is 
 conn«'Cted \\\th p}V. See Hem. 75. 
 
 Hem. 75. The factitive verbs ducere. pvtSre, and habPre are pometimes construed with 
 pro in place of the predicate-accusative (see i)age Jio. Item. 61). as : Ariovistiis Caesari 
 respondit sese ilium non pro atn'ico sied pro //av/g habere. Ciee». B. G. 1, 44 (that he would 
 hold him, not in the place of a friend, but in that of a foe). Here belont;s tlic phrase 
 aliquid pro tn/ii/o putore or ducere. to esteem somethinir for nothinir. Instead of pro 
 often the expression ia numero will» a genitive is used: (Uiquan in hoslium iiutnero 
 habere, to treat (consider) somebody as an enemy. 
 
 Rem. 76. In resjard to verbs ot making (S4>"^7, A.l) two peculiarities must be noticed: 
 1) Tliey may take a predicate-irenitive (j)ossessive. p. 77) instead of a predicate-accusa- 
 tive or niuninative: Sci/no nmnem oram, liomrinm ditionis facit. Liv. 21.60. — Tota A'iia 
 popidi Itomfini facta est. Cic. L. .\u. 2. 15.— 2) Tne tninsitive accu!»ative is sornetiuies 
 v/iderstood if denotinur indkfimte persons (Itoinincs), the second accusative bi-iiii,' a 
 predicate-adie«-tive. Such adjectives are placed in the accusativk pluiial masculise 
 (aj^reeinuj with tiie transitive accusative /lotnirie^ understood): Vacuus animu-t Ijedtos 
 e^ffi'it, a free heart makes ha[)py. Cic.Ttisc. 4, 1"!.— Nihil est quod tain ini^erO't faciat qua/n 
 srelus. II). p^in. 4. 24.— A'i/ii/ ffuiqiii facit iracuudos quam educatio mollis. Sen. Ii-a. 2, 21. 
 Itarely tlie acciis. sinn;. is used: ihinoria qratum /oi-it. Sen. Ben.:i4. 
 
 t^?f" For the use of accessory prcdicute-accusaiives with verbs not factitive (invenlre 
 etc.) see p. 2.J2, /^ 23. 
 
 VI r. Construction of Verbs with the Infinitive. 
 § 4:88, Verbs take the Infinitive eitlier as Subject-infinitive 
 
 * foreicrner.— ' of Samos.- 3 storehouse. — * the feeder, the nurse. — ^ a/iqvid pnrci/iere, 
 to {,Mve brief rides. — « lihellu>^. a little book. — '' pit.'ty. — *' action. — » rij?lH, <>|)|i..rtuni.— 
 1" the lii«^iie-t.— " ma^dstracy.— »* ,o i,old._ »3 with what fullness.— »< insculiiere, to 
 en;L,'rave.— »* crudty.— »^ e.xcepf.— ^^ safe.— '« attachtnl to thee, interested in th« e.— '» 
 fut. iti noHase (inst. of Jioreris). — 20 shrewd. — '» malii e. — 22 a<,'reement. — 2s itm ju the 
 nu\aiiin<; 'to have' the active Aa6er^ is ficqiiently construed with a double accusaiive, 
 whicb._ however. belon«:s to the accessouv predicates: (Jinne illud ttnipus hal>'-af per 
 tne stdntmn ac /ifjtrum. at» far as I am concerned, he may have all that time unoccupied 
 and free. Cic. Veir. 2, 12. ^7 reliquas cuitdt'is stij>endiarias habireut, that tliey should 
 hold\not '•consider') the other communities as tributary ones. Ctes. B. G. 1,30. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 103 
 
 or as Object-infinitive. Both are distinguished from substantive 
 suV)jects and objects by always having a logical subject, either 
 e.vpressed or understood. 
 
 g 480. The Ob.iect-infinitive is either a simple object of 
 its governing verb, or it forms a compound object together 
 Avith a case-object of the same verb. The logical subject of a 
 slnqyle ohject-bijlnltlce is always the grammatical subject of the 
 
 governing verb. 
 
 Hem. 77. Tlio.se classes of verbs which may bo construed with an ob- 
 ject-intiiiitive are enumei'ated § 80. In addition to the single verbs, men- 
 tioned there, several others belonging to the same classes must be noticed, 
 as a^i^ttueacere and constfescere (synonyms of solPre) ; maturdre and fcitindre 
 (synonyms of propcrdre), cwpixxe, deitiindre, hO/ordre., cunctdri, meditdri,in- 
 d-^tere^inntifacre, consfituere^ pieminisse, odut<e^ and the expressions non 
 dubildre (not to hesitate),//* nnimo habere^ (to intend), in animum inducere 
 (10 prevail upon one's self), aasuetum esse (to be accustomed), consiliurfi 
 ciipere, supersedere (Liv. 21, 40), non curdre (Cic. Fam. 3, 8, 7), and some 
 bimilar vcrl)s. 
 
 Jhm. TS. Of these verbs and of those mentioned § 80, some must alioays be construed 
 wiih an object -infinitive, as />o.«*e, /leqalre. ae/nx/^e. sol^re ; others (as velle, nolle, desinere) 
 are «'///(W alwavs construed so. But the great majority admit of other constructions, 
 either with case'-objects. infinitive clauses, or other dependent sentences. Other verbs, 
 not mentioned here, occur with object-iiittnitives only in rare and peculiar meanings, as 
 occupdre, which, with an infinitive, means 'to be the tirst to do a thing,' 'to forestall 
 another in doiuLT a thing' (b>Uutn fact-re occupdre, to be ahead of the enemy in beginning 
 a war. Liv. 1, i4K 'i'lius Sallust (dxX.hH) von^wnvsconjurdre {aa^U conjur^ando statuere) 
 with an ohjectiiifiidtive : conjurarere uofMssitni civcs patriam incendere. Habire is con- 
 strued with an iutinilve in the phra.se yUiil habto scrihere, I have nothing to write (Cic. 
 Att. 1, 2-.i). which is a Greek construction. But there are a number of verbs which, 
 witii an object-infinitive, occur only in the poets or in later Latinity)". as valere, calKre, 
 suntinZre (instead «if if.)s.se) ; e.i-petere (lnst(;ad of vetl,^) ; fuqere and parcere (instead of 
 hollr) ; quierere, ardhv, trtpiddre (instead of sfudi-re) ; puqndre (instead of latmrdre or 
 l-ardre) ; ih-rstdre (instead of ptrstcevdre) ; optdrt (in-tead of cupere). Part of these 
 v«rbs. iujpropcrly or poeticallv usi'd with an ol)ject-infiniiive, are never, in good prose, 
 construed with any completing object : part require otlier constructions, as optdre 
 (whicli, in classical prose, is construed mostly with ut), while pmoptdre (to prefer) has 
 Cjesar's sanction lor heini; construed with an infinitive (Cjes. B. G. 1, 25). Thus dare, 
 which Livy construe^ only in the phrase dare Inhere (11, 47) with an object-infinitive, is 
 ill later prose frequently construed with an infinitive in the meaning ''topennU.' 
 
 Uem. 70. From the rule in § 480 it follows that if the object-infinitive 
 is a verb requiring a completing predicate {esse, fieri, did, etc., § 4G3), the 
 predicate-nouns and adjectives must agree with the grammatical subject 
 of the governing verb (^ 40^3, 2). 
 
 § 490. Verbs can generally not be used in the passive voice 
 wlicn their dependent object-infinitives accompany them. 
 
 Hem. 80. These verbs cannot form teuscnal passives, since they are without transi- 
 tive objects, nor can they form i.MPEUst)NAL passives, because in this case the infiiutive^ 
 
 » In-tead of i/i aniuio hadtre.tlm imp<irsonal expressions ' a/t<;'« in animo est,' or 
 •■anrui fst animu-t,' are frequently uswl. By this construction the object-infinitive becom.-s 
 jpTiiumatically a subject-infinitive.— '^ Such verbs ouirlit to be s«;parately noticed, and 
 t'hould not indiscriminately swell the lists of verbs with object-infinitives, which gram- 
 m.irians are in the habit of copving one from the other, or of crowding together out of 
 ditrerent lists Irom all text-books within their reach. 
 
104 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 would lo?e its Biibjpct, which would ho aijainft §§ 488 and 4'^0. Hence such phrases as 
 prqlicincl cufntitr, dormlrefextindtur, are vrrammalical in)possil)i]itie,s. ' Nevertheless the 
 verbs ca>pisge and detdnere take a passive form (either j)ersonal or impersonal), when 
 their object-infinitives are passives. But this is only a formal exception, cince tiie pas- 
 sives of these verbs have strictly the same meanimjsas their actives : Derepiibliracoi^uli 
 ccppti fturnm. men commenced to consult us about the republic. Cic. Div. 2, 2, 27. See 
 the examples § 4G0. Rem. 11. 
 
 litf/i. 81. But. while the goveniinj]^ verb must be an active, the ohject-inflnitive may be 
 a PASSIVE, either personal or impersonal, with fjosse, ffol^re, dtf/ire, {co'pist<e, and deH/i'f-re), 
 and PERSONAL (never impersonal), with any of the other verbs, so far as their meaninirs 
 admit a passive complement, as: Metui cu/nunt, fuefu'ic/ue ti/nerd. Sen. Ajram. 5, Ti.—'st 
 .yifA piirgdti e.*.<e vel/enf. Ctes. B. (i. 1, 2S. But in most instanci-s clausks are substi- 
 tuted for passive inflnitives dependent (m these verbs : Dixit non recusataruin. >ff a»«- 
 Jodi rnanibus ipsorum. Suet. Claud. 'ZHj.—iiapientein civetn me et esse ct imiturari volo. 
 Cic. Fam. 1. 9. 
 
 liem.^-l. The object-infinitive after /JOsw is freqtiently understood, e^peeiallv a verb 
 of general import, &^f(icere. in which case the oiiject of'/arere is directly connected with 
 /)<M.N'^, beini; mostly a miantitative neuter adjective, as" ^^/w/'imj/^i, niultuin. quantum^ 
 plus, etc. It assumes, then, the meaninj; ' to have power,' as plurimum ]K)sse, to be most 
 powerful. Cjes. B. G. 1, 3. Thus tlie object-infinitive oi mre is understood in the piuase 
 gcire 1 " instead of ^t-ire loqiii Laflne), to know L:Uin. 
 
 § i!H. About twelve transitive verbs, and a fow intran- 
 
 sitives, admit of a case-object (accusative or dative) along with 
 
 an object-infinitive, so that tlie case-object is the logical subject 
 
 of the infinitive (§ 101). 
 
 Hem. 83. These verbs are 1) the thansitivks d(>ci're, aKsuefae^re, juhere^ 
 v^tare, sinere, arguere (to accuse of), iiminiuldre* (to cliarire with), cogere, 
 pati, impedlre, j^rohibere, juul (poetically and iu later prose) d^terrere, to 
 deter, all of which admit or prefer other constructions"); 2) the intran- 
 siTiVES permittere {(dicui), conredcre {(dinii)^ and (poetical 1\' and iu later 
 Latin) suadere, impcrdre, dare {Grajis dedtt ore rotunda Miisa loqui. llor. 
 A. P. 223. Mlhi datur rcum proxpere defendere. Tac. Dial. 7). 
 
 Bern. 84. The transitives mentioned above admit of the regular change 
 
 into the passive voice, the transitive object becoming the passive subject, 
 
 whilt the objecl-iutiiiitives reiuain the objects of the passive voice, by 
 
 which chauge the i^assive subject becomes their logical subject. They 
 
 have, then, exactly the same grammatical relatious as the verbs of the 
 
 first class (Rem. 77): Bu.v hoHtlxfurjere eodll ; Pass. : Iloste-sfugere coguntar 
 
 (idmost the same as JIostcM fugere dcbeni). Deterrere, which in the active 
 
 voice is not construed thus iu good prose, has Cicero's authority for the 
 
 construction of the i)assive voice with an object-iutiuitive. 
 
 %^^ 1. The passive construction of these verbs occurs not only in the form of a 
 predicative i)hrase, but may have tlie form of an attkiuutivb phrase, so that tiie verb 
 IS used as passive (perfect) pauticipi.e. In this instance the participle becomes (lie 
 ATTKiBUTE of the nouu wliich. in the passive predicative phrase, would have been the 
 passive sulyett, as: I*nf:t(n' ad exereituin ptvUdtici junKiin, the i)netor (beuiir) directed 
 to proceed to the army. The «^overiiinir noun may \n\ ri-(piired by tlie construction to 
 be in any case, the participlf always a^'reeing with it in case, i^endvr. and number, as : 
 Gen. J'ne/d/u ad extrciluni jnojicl/tci jufud. Tlius the i)hrase inay take the form of the 
 
 * Such constructions, however, are sometimes found wlien the iinpeisonal passive is 
 a freiund (§ 5l-i), as Virrve totd ritd di!>ceudinn ext. et totd rifd di-ccudum «-.s/ ?/io/i. Sen. 
 ,lirev. Vit. 7. In such constructions, the infinitive is h.jrioaily an ol)ject-iiifiniiive with 
 an uncertain person as subject, but ;,'nunmatically a suliject-infinitive.— s It is doubtluJ 
 whether tin; verbs irmmuldre and arrjiterc belonj^ here, or whether their construc- 
 tions must be considered as real accusatives with tile infinitive.— 3 Monere and horfdri, 
 which, by some f,'rammariaiis, are added to these verl)s. are sometimes found with object- 
 influitives, but never when they are accompanied with their transitive objects. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 105 
 
 Ablatives Absolute, as : Prcefore ad ercrcititm pivficisci jmao, after the praetor had been 
 directed to proceed to the army.— Rellod^seia causuni inaufiurdri oKicti fiamiiiu, I 
 should have |)a>sed in silence the c;ise of the priest corapelled to inaugurate. Liv. 27, 
 8.— Gn)o LfFlio cum «ociis naralibus nrbem cuf^fodXre jaam, after G. Laelius had been 
 ordered to guard the city together with our naval forces. Liv. 20, 4S. 
 
 2. A second kind of passive construction in regard to these verbs is 
 generally repugnant to the Englisli idiom. It takes place if the transitive 
 object of these verbs is altogether omitted, the transitive object of the 
 oiijKCT-iNFiNiTiVE bciug uiaclc the subject or governing word of the pas- 
 sive construction. In this instance the object-intinitive must take a pas- 
 sive form. In English such constructions must often be expressed actively, 
 as: XcTWK-.Pnvtoreimirbemcustodlrejubent. Passive: Urbs {a prcp- 
 tore) cuatod'irijiiHKtic^t, directions were given to guard the city (literall}^: 
 the citii wd-f directed to be guarded). — Exercilus e.c Slcilid dimitti jus.Hus est, 
 the aiiny was directed to be dismissed from Sicily (the army was ordered 
 to evacuate Sicily). Liv. 20,28. — Antiochu.% mbduci navibus jussis, in 
 hibcrnd A.itiochium couce.saif, Antiochus, after the ships had been ordered 
 to be drawn on land (after ordering the ships to be dawn on laud), went 
 to Anliochia into winter-quarters. Liv. 33, 41. 
 
 Jlem. 85. The intransitives (Uem. 83) admit of a change into imper- 
 sonal passives only, the object-iutinitive becoming a subject- infin- 
 ITIVE, being treated according to the rules of § 49-t : Prceceptor discipulo 
 abcti.sc concedlf ; Pass. : Blscipulo abesse conceditur (about the same as Di- 
 seipulo (d)eiif<e licei). Oidy iniperdre (in good prose) assumes the form of a 
 PEKsoNAL passive, as if it were a transitive verb, being treated according 
 lo the rules in Kem. 84 : Lnperor aliquid facere (the same as jubeor all- 
 quid fdcere). 
 
 1. Magister tnus te inagnil inercede mhWsapere^ docuit. Cic. Phil. 2, 4.— 2. LQupere- 
 gnntim"^ vetat in raurum a.«c€ndere. Cic. Or. 2. 24.— 3. Nolftni^ muros portasque adlre 
 vetiti sunt. Liv. 2^5, 16.— 4. Improl)itas< numquain fi^um re*;>ir<7r6*>iait. Cic. Fin. 1. 1«. — 
 5. Acnmlre eum nun est situs. Cic. Sest. 44.— ti. Insimulant Ao;?w/?^m fraudis causa rfi- 
 sceMfiSie.* Cic.Verr. 2, 24.— 7. Mulier ?/ie arguit, banc domo a se surripuis)>€ . Plant. -Men. 
 5, 2. 62.— 8. Pericleii nvcfor illTus injuriae fuUse arguebatur. Cic. Verr. 1, :i3.— 9. Caesar 
 ceteras ?/a'it>/?«^^ imperio popnii Komilno parlre assuefecit. Cic. Prov. Cons. 18. — 10. 
 SertU qnoque i)ueros hujus letatis vevberare^ concediinus. Curt. 8, 26.— 11, Quinctione 
 per'ue qnidem taciie conceditur. Cic. Quinct. I.5.— 12. Mi in Lautumias'* SvracusS- 
 nas deddci* imperantur. Cic. Verr. .5, 27.— 13. Nefarias ejus \ib\d'\m:» commemordre 
 nudure»* deterreor. Cic. Verr. 1, 5. — 14. Ego numquam quemquam ad te sine niuis 
 litteiis ire patiar. Cic. Faui. 15, 17. 
 
 Obskrv. If this class of object-infinitives take completing predicates, the latter 
 phould agree (in the accusative) with the transitive objects of their governing verbs, and 
 with their passive subjects (in the nominative) if these verbs are in the passive voice, 
 lint constructions of Jubere. argiiere etc. with inflnitives of the copula occur only in 
 connections, which hardly admit these infinitives to be Ci)nsidered as object-infinitives, 
 as : (^uod judicium de compnmiisso factum est, id ifrit'mi jumt ease; He ordered the 
 judgment which was passed on the compromise to be null and void. Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 27. 
 llere ' id^ cannot be taken as a transitive object of jussit : but ' id irrifH7n esse'' g\\- 
 dentlyi^an Infinitive clause. So: Post Numje mortem TuUum. HosfUhnn rt^gem {esse) 
 populus/vAvi/ ; The people commanded that T. II. should be king. Liv. 1. 30.— Servio 
 liwXWojubel (Yvx) populum diclo audieidem esse ; It is tlie will of the king that the peo- 
 ple should obey the orders of S. T. Liv. 1, 41.— The intransitives mentioned above 
 sliould take tiie compleliuL' predicates of esse in the i>ativb ; but examples of such con- 
 structions do not occur iu classical prose.** 
 
 § 40^-J. Many verbs of SAYING and belietixg with infinitive 
 
 » To be an ignoramus.— 2 foreiirner.— s inhabitants of Nola.— * his wickedness.— 
 • to draw breath.— « to have left the city.— ' lo inflict corporal punishment on.— 8 The 
 stone-quarries, a renowned prison in Syracuse. — » to be gent, — 1° shame.— >* Perhaps 
 such a dative construction is contained in At dmo r\wr\c jam otidsoesseimi^QxOy (Ter. Andr. 
 5, 2, 1) though the passage is generally interpreted diflerently. 
 
106 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF YERBS. 
 
 clauses, when used in the passive voice, instead of tlie regular 
 impersonal construction according to § 460, 1, assume the same 
 construction as transitive verbs with object-infinitives (§ 491, 
 K. 84), the subject-accusative of the clause being changed into 
 the subject-nominative of their passive, and the predicate-infini- 
 tive of the clause into their object-infinitive. Tliis is called the 
 construction of the NOMINATIVE avitii the ixfixitive, as: 
 
 Active : Dicunt, Gnjuin advcnisse, Ihey s.yj/ that Gajiin has arrived. 
 
 Rkgi^lar Impkhsonal Passive form : Picitur, Gajuni advcnisse, it 
 
 is said ihtit Gnjus has arrived. 
 
 NoM. WITH Inf. : Gnjus adveuissedic'tur, G ajiis is said to hai-e arrited. 
 
 Jiem. 86. Tin' construction of tran^itiv»; v(m-1)s with objoct-innnitivos (§491) hears» a 
 ptroii_' rf>*i*mblance to thf construction of intransitive verbs of .sayinir and bclifvini; 
 with iiifinitivi' clauses, and tliu* L'raniinarians >onjftiines assii;n the saini? vcrl) (for iiist. 
 jublre. retCire. aiytier^) lo the one or the otiier of tiiese clas>es, acconiini^ to their differ- 
 ent views». Thus, in the sentence J'//>^o ft ralf'-re, the accusative; fe is by .sonieconsiidercd 
 as the transitive object, and the inlinitive raltre as tin? object-infinitive of jnheo. while 
 otiii rs take /«^ ^v//«^/v- as an intinitive clause with te as subject-accusative, and raJtre as 
 ])re(ilcate-inrinitive. In the passive voice, however, both kinds of ct)nstruction essen- 
 tially ditier from each other. If /«- ralfrt is an inliiiiiive clause, the sientence in the pas- 
 hive'voice would take an impkusonal passive form (jitbetuf a me, te vnKre), wlule if te 
 iu a transitive ol)ject, and lallre an object-iiitiiiiiive, tlie sentence in the pas>ive voice 
 Would have a i'kusonai. passive form, treated accordin'.; to /iV//«. SI. {Tu) Vd/ire Jufjtiiit. 
 But the idiom of the l.in_'ua_'e tr«'atsmany intransitive verbs of sayintrand believinij 
 e.vactly 'iccordini,' lothis latter Ibrm, as if they were transitive verbs with oi)ject-inlini- 
 tivej». Thus the active construciio i J)tcu/if, ArUtiexni inventdrem olti e»se (they say 
 that Aristiens is the discoverer ol the olive-treo) cannot be chani^ed into the impersonal 
 y)a' sive /f'cif'tr, Ari-tfie't/n inv-ntrireiH olei e^xf (it is said that Arist;eus. etc.) but niu-t 
 assume the personal form Ansf<( >/i itirftifor o/ri {s^e (/iri^ur (Xr'istivn^ is said to be the 
 inventor, etc.) so that iht; inlinitive esse is treated asan object-intinitive of <(icitur. 
 
 Rem. 87. The passives of videre (in the nieaninu: ' to soem'), of direre, 
 narnh''^, puidre, existiiudre, and of trade re, ferre, and perhibere, which in 
 the passive; assume the incaiiiiii»: ' to be said,' ' to he feporied (h}' hearsay),' 
 aluiost always assmiie tite coiisliuetiou of the ' >«'oiniiiative uith tiie 
 intiuilrve.' Oilier verbs of saylns,^ and thinkinii:, as nuntidre, i/tdicdre, 
 memordre, an dire, reperire, scribere, demonstrdre, oiftejidere, cofjnoscere, intel- 
 ligere, perspicere jire either construed in the same way, or have the reirular 
 imiieroonal constriiclion aeeordini; to Rem. 8(5. Thus we may say either 
 Gajus mortuHs esue nxiifidtur, or Nnntiiliur. Gajuni mnrtmuu esse ; either: 
 ProcinciiB rebelldre axdiuntur, or Aiidlliir provineias rebeUdre. 
 
 1. Non ita «jenerati* a natilril sumus. ut ad liulnm ot jociiin/«(:/i esse ridfdmvr. Cic. 
 Off. 1. '20. — 2. Lectifarinfie'^ I'latonem siudio-ie, (luilir'isse etiam, Ittinosthfitoi dicitnr. 
 (;ic. Brut. 31. — 8. Aristldts tmus omu'nmi^ J'/f'(i'''^i/u>/s j'ui->se traditiir. Cic. St-xt. HT. — 
 4. .ffo//H//w.s' Amiiliuni reirem inferemisse* fertur. Cic. Kep. 'i, 3.— 5. Tfjndan<l(t'> fratre» 
 Don niodo ai/juforet!* in proeliis vit t»»riic poi)uli ItomSni. sed otiam nx/ifii fuijis-e per- 
 idbentur. Cic. Tusc. 1. IJ.-- - 6. Afficus prudea/i enfie \u jinL''' c\\W\ putab.qtur. <'ic. Am. 
 2. — 7. Dm'ifU'ina Driiidjlium" in Britannia rep^rfa^ at(pie inde'" in (ialliain fninsiiitd 
 eaue existimiliur. Cms. B. G. G, \'l. — 8. Milii nuntiabuiur, I'arlkijs trant^isfe A'uphnKetn. 
 Cic. Fam. 15, 1. 
 Jier:. 88 If these verbs are in any tense except future, ])reseiit or imperfect, they must 
 
 be construed i.nrEKsoNALLV, except vidtri, which eveuiu these ten.-es takt? a teksonai* 
 
 construction. 
 
 * b-)gotten — ^ to read repeatedly.— ' vnns owniwm before superlatives means 'of all 
 othc'S.'— « to kill.— * the Tvndarian brothers, i. e.. sons of Tyndareus, namely. Castor 
 and Pollux.— « helpers.— '' law.— » the Druids, Celtic priests.— » discovered.— '<• thciice. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 107 
 
 5 49»*{ The tense of the object-infinitive is almost always the present, 
 if 'the intinitive is a simple object {R. 77). This, also, is generally so in 
 regard to object-infinitives which take a transitive or intransitive object 
 alon- with them (^491). Only insimuldre, arguere nnd, oi course the 
 verbs menlioned R.Sl, may take perfect infinitives (beei^. 8d, ii.x. 0. 7. »). 
 
 Hence English object-infinitives in i\^e perfect {^h^^ ''?ftt''!if£r\.u^%a^r^^ 
 hare b^en' are not iTenerally expfi-ssed 'Jecis^e jwluit , \mssedebint , but facere po- 
 tuil' ' esse defiuit ' To this rule there are the followiDi,' exceptions: . 
 
 Tife eSiJi perfect intinitive after ^ can\ ^ ruay \ico>dd might) ^z. e the perfect 
 and pluperfect of the potential with V«« ' etc.)., denoting '/j'lJf'^;;^^, ^^,f .'.,^^'lj 
 nieterile is either expressed by the circumlocution with 'fien jxjU-st yt , oi Jiert po- 
 fr ' (see p m8^UBs 2, 1), or (more rarely) by the perfect }H>ttd with a present mGn- 
 U^^L^^Su^eYn.oc^JFalcuta, It is possible that J:^-'<;»'t ^I^J^ tS^ am;X^ 
 have been innocent). Cic. Clu.41. But sometimes the Latin uses exactly ti.esa^^ 
 feci infinitive as we do iu En^'li^h, as: E^ce^stsse pugna ad ^^^'^f^^ '' '^^^^^pX/TliS 
 UestrViii, battle at theTrehraca///<o/ havejaUenm '^"s >•*^^'^^L\v. 21, lo.-/^o^w^^^^^ 
 
 lib in tio non ^edl'<se, et lamen Oppianicum ^''f »« ^^«f/^'ff«tf^l.« !^W O^^^^^^^ 
 nii-'ht not have Utrii t^itdnn in the bei^'inuing. and yet might linve condemned Oi^^\&\\(.n^ . 
 Ci" Cir41, 1 Wl-Qnmn {.ac scribCham. Pompgjus jam Brundusium ^euts^e lateral ; 
 Pompev can have arrived at Br.u.d.isium (epistolary tt^»^:f' P;.3?*> -.^^'f-^^^",»^^^ 
 
 2. Sometimes (very rfrelv) a perfect infinitive with iyo.<se and debere lias a foice similar 
 Xo\ Mure^^t^nnnlnvJ, «i: Bellum quod ante ^^i;-"'"™ ^StiuS'SS/S 
 which we may have MM^ed before next winter. Liv. 37, ^^--^f '"^^''J.'^^^.Vr^V/,^^^^^^ 
 tamen de meo jure decCdam ; Althouirh it is a necessity that I ^houkl ci.rec ly l^eat iny 
 adversary should liave beaten' ; see about the meaumg ol vict, p. 303, Obs. 2). Cic. K. A. 
 
 ''^ Vsometime. velle, especially if conn-ected with a negation, takes an object-in^^^^ 
 
 in the perfect, to represent the will as '"«'re decided by £ving to its ob^^^^^ of a 
 
 compleUd c/c/um (Compare the perfect participle after r«//€ii infinitive clau^e^^ 
 
 M ,i\ as- AV nuis nuid fu-^e causil ve/tdidu^se neve tmuse vellet. Liv. 39, IT.— x^emineiu 
 
 m.a i't;av! nXfsK.;" ri./i. II). 24, MS.-^m^ pei^rcisse vobis volunt, committere vos 
 
 cur pereatis non patiunlur. H). .32, 21. f^r^o of a nrp«pnt 
 
 4. Poets occasionally use object-infinitives in the Perfect with the forc^ of a present 
 infinitive: Tendentes opSco Pelion iniiwmme Olympo (striving to place etc.). Wor. 
 Caiin. 3, 4, 51. 
 
 ^ 45>l. Subject-infinitives (P. I., § 70 ; P. II., p. 75) may be in the pres- 
 ent, or perfect, both in the active and passive voices. 
 
 Rpjn m The following predicates are nsed impersonally with subject-infinitives : 1) 
 
 Tin. mi.ula i ncli n ' «rancl vidWir) with predicate-adjectives or pi>-dicate-noutis. To 
 
 ?h^lH rb 1 1 " th^ dt is lawful,; nefas est (n isacrune); lempus 
 
 If ^U x\nT^^^^^^^^^ est\v is worth while). 2) The copula with impersonal 
 
 tst ( I IS time), ^V>ff./.V\'\, ;'*,;. .->. ... ,1,.. following impersona verbs, menlioned P. 
 
 r.} t'fJa? w'^^^^^^^^^ be added: oportet (it behooves) o/>«.v tst (p 9.., /?. 
 
 SlsJi) whU, in this instance, Wome themselves impersonal. 
 
 itL 90 Imix^r<*ot.al predicates are ofren accompanied by the logical subjects of they 
 Hem. VH . ^'"Py/'*' "/'^^"'^ ,ake the trrammaiical form of their objects (rmtii licet, 
 
 con(iJ/i(. convHiif, ecenil. accidit, vemt m vuntem, lied, placet, dupUcet, p oa a. 
 domestic examples). Cic.Orat.7,22. 
 
108 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF "STllRBS. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 109 
 
 Hem. 93. If the copula eftt denotes * definition,' it may take alone: "nitli 
 its subject-intinitive anotlier intinitive as impersonal predicate, ns: V'icere 
 est cofjitrire, to live is (means) to liiinlv. Cic. Fam. 0, l.—ye.se'ire quid, uute- 
 quam natus sis, acciderit, id est seiui)ei- esse pue rum. lb. Oiat. o4, 120. 
 
 Be?n. 98. Subject-intinilives may be emploN'ed as subjects in infinitive- 
 clauses, in place of a subject-accusative, in wiiicli case their impersonal 
 predicate must, of course, be likewise in the infinitive, as: Bene sentive 
 recftque fiicere puto sntix esse ad bene vivendimi, I believe that meanini; 
 well and acting rightly is sufficient for a happy life. Cic. Fam. 0,1. 
 
 1. Grave est a deteiioribns honOre anfe'iriA Sen. Prov. 3. — 9. Afiserf/m e.of trturbdri'^ 
 f<)rtQni5 omiiihuf», inineiius e.*t injuria.* Acerhum eM al) aliqiio circuniret'iri* acfr- 
 biui a propinqiio. Calamitdsuni^ ext bonin ererti,' calaniitof-ittft cum dedecore. Fu- 
 pestum'' est. a forti atqiie honcsto viro jugulari.^ funef^this ab eo. ciijus vox in pra^- 
 conio q^a'^^tu'' proHtiiit.i" Indiffniim est o, \mT\ rinc'mnX ^\\\\i»\uYK\ irHi'Ujriiua ab ink-- 
 rlnrt'. /.t/cfuosum^^ est trci'li nlteri'^ cum bonis», lucfvosius ininiTco. Cic. (^uinct. .'^1.— 
 3. Illnrurn calamitjltcm auL'fre nolo. quUins libt-rosii conjufjrsqne" unas at) iptTus 
 petulantia»* conseirdre non licitiim est. fie Verr. 1, .5— 4. Fas est et ab ho?to doceri. 
 Ov. Met, 4. 428.— 5. Ni/l/i cmtir/it impflnei* nofici. Sen. Con^'. 1.5.— fi. Onortet te. non 
 deeo quod detractumi* e^X (pieri, sod de co irratias fly^r^. quod collecisti.»^ Sen. lb. 11. 
 — 7. Ab LysOm* Apollinis Hicrnum"* ahldtmn (esue) ccrte non oitortiiit. Cic. Verr. 
 2, 4. 17.— 8. Nihilne tihi venief in mentem existimatiOni»» tniv con^/lere .? Verr. 2, 3, .57 — 
 !♦. Homines sapi«'ntTs.2o e.x quiDus rebus maxime respublica labnrat, eis maxime inedtri 
 convefiit. Cic. Kosc. Am. .53.— 10. Quern non pocniteat hoc pretiojestimasKC virtfliem ? 
 Sen. Prov. 3.— 11. Non intellifri>» .««/i^'^>^^*' viri< Unuhw^ <Iiri\cUse (\\\i\m hocpulcrnm nit ? 
 Cic. Phil. 2 4';.— 12. I)e quo quid sentiam ni/iU affinet dicere. Cic. Div. 4, 7.- 13. 7<F- 
 det '}An\ amfire eadcm niillies. Ter. Pii. 3. 2, 2.— 14. ^em\)er esse fencem. et fine m()n»u 
 animi tmn.Are vitain. iqnordre est rerum natfliw alteram partem. Sen. Prov, 4.— 
 15. Profecto niliil aliud est bene et beate rirere nisi^' honeste et recte rirere. Cic. 
 Part. 1, 4.— 1«. (^lid est judicium corrtnnitere, ?i hoc uun e^t, testis» auctoritate" de- 
 terrCre ? Ver. 1, 10. 
 
 Hem. 94, The connection of !«nbject-infinitivo3 with other verbs than the impcr-^onals 
 mentioned above, i< rare and uniisnal. as: InridTre non cadit in sapi^ntern, Envyinj; does 
 not enter (the mind) of tht; wise. Cic. Tusc. 3. 10.— IIo< o)nnls eadem odisse. e'odetn rne- 
 tuere in unvm co^nit. Hatiiifrand feaiiuj; the saniethinirs broujrht all these men to;:ether. 
 Sail. Jujr, 31.— Lidici-'se arfls. emollit mores. Ov. Pont. 11, 9, 58. See p. 623, Obs, 7. 
 
 Fern. 05. rnipersonal predicates often take neuter determinativeg, or peneral iionns 
 alon<; with determinatives (as ha'C res. hcfc ratio), to introduce the subject-infinitive by 
 them : 1. Fuit hoc ouondam projjrium^» ponuli Romjlni lonL'e t^i^on\nf>ell(^re. Cic. Fontej. 
 12.— 2. Semper furc ratio accusandi fuir honestissima (This wa.8 aJfra>/s the most 
 honorable method of prosecuting as accuser) pro sociis inimicitlas sn^cipere (/o 7;myttf 
 enemies in hehalf of those under our protection). Cic. Div. in Cu'C, 19.— Z. Quibusdani 
 totum //ocdisplicetphilosophSri {to occupy am' s self with philosophy). Cic. Fin 1. 1. 
 ZW From such constructions arose the method of combininjr neuter form-adjectives 
 
 in the sinirular as attributes with an infinitive, as if the latter were a neuter noun: 
 
 Me. cum hue veni, Aw ipsum nihil of/ere iMiictnt. after I came here, thisvei-y doing 
 
 no" ■■ 'ds been my delight. Cic. Or. 2, G. See § 495. 
 
 § 4*.*.*. Sometimes the infinitive is used with the force of a noun in any 
 of its functions, as transitive object, as attribute, as completing predicate*, 
 and even after prepositions. Tliis free use of tlie intinitive occui-s oftener 
 in poetry and late prose than in classical Latinity, where it is confined to 
 a few exceptional phrases which do not admit of being generalized. 
 
 1 anfelre. to giirpa«?i.— - to be stripped of.— » supply, ertvrhflri.— < to be circumvented, 
 — » calamitous.— « to be turnefi out of.— t mournful.- ♦• to be slain.— »;>r/fvY>//Jv.< qui^stus, 
 the trade of a public crier — ^'^ pi-oxtdre. tf) stand Ibrlh.— " jrrievou.s.— »2 ^ifcy must al- 
 ways be used for the Entrllsh another, if the action can only be conceived to be between 
 two persons.— i» wife.— >« frivolity.— >" hnpune'\9.\\»iK\ herepre<;nantlv, 'without paving 
 the penalty for it.'— »• taken away.— " to collect, toeave.— >» statu»'".— i» character.— 
 ^^ SajnenHs maybe tak<*n for an"accusatlve dependent on conrenit, or for a eubjcct- 
 accusative.— «» but.— '-"^ influence.— 23 peculiar to, a peculiarity of, a quality of. 
 
 1 
 
 / 
 
 1, JJeate rirere (i.e.. bedlam vitam) alii in alio, Epictlrus in voluptate ponit, — 2, Mori 
 (i.e , mortem) nemo sat)iens mi^e^um duxit. Cic. Fam. (i, 3.— 3. Demis nobis nece>situ- 
 dinem» ilium perseqvi (of pursuiuir). Sail. Juj;. 102. — 4. lj)sum illud quod vocatnr 
 inoj'i (I.e.., mors) breviits es^t, qiuim iit^ scntlri i)os.«it. Sen. Prov. (i,— 5. Deinde alii 
 quiestus' instituuutur* : accipere^ a civitatibus' pecuniam ; pretio certo missos' 
 facere naiitas. mis^Ornm om- e stipendium lucrdri ; reliquis quod dehgrei" non dare. 
 Cic. V«*rr. 2, 5, 24.— (». Adimam cantdre strictis (I shall stop the strict from singing), 
 llor. Ep. 1. 19. 9.-7. Aristo et Pyrrho inter optinie valere (i.e,^ optimarti raletydinem) 
 et ^rawi^^ime agro'dre {i,e..graviisi7niim morbum) nihil prorsus ducebant interesse^. 
 Cic. Fin, 2, 13.— 8. Multum iiitenst inter dare et accipere. Sen. Ben. 5, 2,— 9. Nihil 
 prmter plordre^^. Hor. Sat. 2, 5, 69. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 I>frETisoNAL PassivI':s (§ 456- § 460). 1. The very air of the place is 
 tainted" in which t^acrificcH are offerni^^ to pleasure, — 2. Before the argu- 
 ment of tlie defence was opened [Translate : Before speaking^'* (impers.) 
 had Ijeen commenced (impers.) bt/ the d/fendant^*], the triaF^ was adjourned^* 
 to {in) the following day. — 3. Let us proceed,'^ not by that road wiiere 
 {qua) people are in the habit of going, but [by that] where they ought^** to 
 (;o. — 4. Often those are envied who are more unliappy tlian [those] who 
 envy tliem. — o. It was announced to Caesar that on the mountain a fight 
 had taken place {pugnare) between his [troops] and a cohort of tlie cavalry 
 of ilwj Gaids. — 6. There ican a lUKh^* to arms, l)ut a doubt arose"^^ whether 
 it was preferable to marcli immediately'** against tlie enemy, or to wait 
 for'^'' tlie reinforcements of the other states. 
 
 PuKDiCATE-NoMiN.vriVE (>^ 461 - § 463). 1. Agathocles, not satisfied^^ 
 with having suddenly-* become rich [transl. : that (quod) Jie had suddenly 
 become rich] piacii.sed"-^ piracy-*"' against his country. — 2. Caesar wrote 
 that all Ciaul now" seemed qxiet-^ and had become tributary'^^ to the Roman 
 l)eople. — 3. Dill you hear that our friend had turned admirer^'^ of republi- 
 c in institutions^' 'i — 4. Vercingetorix was called King by his [followers], — 
 o. ]Many would rather {raalle) be considered bad than foolish. — 6. Cicero 
 wrote to Allicus that he had unanimously^' be^n elected Consul. — 7. 7o be 
 called {dicere) a victor in the Olympic games^^ was the higliest praise 
 amongst the Greeks. — 8. Catiline, after Cicero had been elected Consul, 
 resolved to destroy^* the constitution^* by force. 
 
 PKKUKitTE-UEMTivE. (i^ 404 - ^467). 1, Yiiiathns was of so great 
 bravery and integrity'-'*^ that every common" soldier seemed richer than 
 {ubl.) the chief colllmander^^ — 2. He complains^" that the property*" which 
 belonged {esse) to Boscius, has become thine. — 3, Be not disturbed*' by those 
 [things] which it is not in our jtoiccr*"^ to avoid. — 4, How can virtue con- 
 trol*^ pleasure r* For to follow is the mark of one that obeys**, and to cou- 
 
 1 Necessitv.— ^ literally ' than that.'' This construction must be recast in English : too 
 Hhort to be felt.— ^ ways of making tnoney.— ■* to try,— ^ this infinitive has the force of 
 a noun iif apposition to'qucentus, ' that of accepting,' etc. — «communities.— ■? factitive pre- 
 
 ^* evtrtere. — ^s respublica et leges. — 3* coniim-ntia.— ^^ grey:arius. — ^» imperator. — 
 ^" queri.— ■♦o bona.— ■" i)eriurb5re. — ^^ potcstas. Translate by the genitive. To what 
 class l)elongs this genitive ?— *^ regcrc,— *♦ one that obeys (parurc), by the participle. 
 
110 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 Ill 
 
 trol [is that] of one irho commands.— 5. The other part of my^speech 
 will be very brief, and will contain very little matter for dispute .— 0. 
 It is the duty of a good judf/e to make conelusionsMrom the smallest cir- 
 cumstanees*.— 7. It is arrogant^ to read" one's own wntmgs as {pro) 
 
 * 1 H 
 
 Puedicate-Dative, and idioms with esse (§ 468 - § 470). 1. Do you 
 believe that Crassus would have {plupeif. suhj.) spurned" greater nchcs, 
 if they by ehance (/>>W<') had belonged to him?— 2. Honest j^overty has 
 ihyesse) h;rotilpoicer'' ovQi'' insolent wealth.— 3. In my eamp n(. ^na/or ^ 
 txerhadii place.— 4. 1 believe that nothing else can be of [any] hcp^ 
 {abstract dative) to we.— 5. Our arrival'^ gave {esse) nobody [any trouble 
 or expense", either (transl. neither) publicly or {nor) j.^vaiely .— o. 
 What protection''' have you been to our Jteetf— 7. There ^rr/v; mines* in 
 Attica from which a great quantity'^' of silver flowed" into the Ireas- 
 urv-^=«_ 8 I know that ^A^r^ ^//"tJ a great many (^ 314) who belitte- in 
 all ways^^ the good qiialitie-^- of o'hers.— 0. There wdl be always 
 [those] who retuse to do of their own accord'^' what*** the laws direct 
 
 ^^'simi>Le* Object- Accusative (^ 471 - ^ 473). 1. Who will mourn 
 foi^'' the doicnfali''' and destruction of a thoroughly*' corrupted state i— 
 2 Phaeton, because he had asM for''' too great [things], ..niserab y per- 
 ished— 3 We, on our part, do not irishfor'' ill-begotten^** ?fm///i and 
 iinri'ddeous" poinr'^, but for the love'' and praise of our tcllow-citizens.-- 
 4 Do not lose couraiie in adversity^", but hope for better [things].— o. 
 Remember that I speak Spanish^', [and] not lioman.— 0. O, thejallacious 
 hope and fraiP" fortune of men, and the empty" altercations ot ours! 
 
 ^^SiMPLE^DATiyE (§ 474 - ^ 477). 1. To obey God, is freedom.- 2. Epanii- 
 nimdas did not obey that imprudent decree*' of the people, and induced 
 his adleanues to ilo the same.— 3. I cannot pardon the silence ot Dola- 
 bclla — 4. No wise [man] has ever trusted^^ a traitor.— ->. ^ oiitf^.pts ruled 
 over a y^r^r^V/^v.iuslly"" praised by all for [its] extraordinary lerlility .— 
 6 A republic nmsl and will be siich^» that {ut) an enemv can "e'ther be 
 wantiu"- to the wicked'\ nor be an obstacle*^ to the good''.— t. lie wdl be 
 convinced"' of {de) what thou wilt be convinced.- 8. Is there aif^t lung else 
 a^minsl^* liasciiis, but that {nisi quod) his father's i.roperty' has been 
 sold^' ''— I otan envy the mutt"'' if 1 reconsider'" w hat 1 have spoken.— 
 10. How can a man i)i-e()ccupied^" by pleasure, struggle*^ with ^^/^^/; and 
 flanqer^- H A tinu'^' man will HA^Wy resist the attacks ot those tliat 
 tempt«' [him].— 12. Our soldiers icill refuse obedience'* to those com- 
 
 1 PerbrSvi^^.- ^ tran-l. : idll be, of no great dh^pute (contentio\- 3 conjcctflra - 
 
 n'Stentia.- "nran'l. again.t.- ^3 p,oditor.- h adjumen.um.- «^ adv.ntu..- 
 16 labor.- 1^ suniptus.- i» privatim.- i" i^{b.^tj:act dative)]ni^^-idm^^^^^ 
 
 20 nu-tailum.— 
 
 40 iv. rriii 41 h.-ii.i< —42 fonieiiti J — " scTtum.— «^ pcrsuadGiv.— " civdere.— *« juri'.— 
 "'Ji'fmiuT- ."'?Jniiita..-'"". usmo,»:- ". ..000,11.--" to >^, Z:f''"" tX^'^M 
 62 innort^iw _ 63 uerHuadOre — 64 to 66 rtgrrt^/^«•^ (d)stare.— «*» bona.— looesoia, 
 veu ""- «^^' mutas^-^ - rc^^^^ ^^ ocJpM-e.- - resistere.- «^ constant.- '^^ par- 
 
 ticiple.— «3 tentare.- «*to I'cfu^e 666(iitf/iC<!, dicto audientein non esse. 
 
 I 
 
 mands^ which tend' to make them swerve from their duty'.— 13. Live 
 for others* if thou meanest' to live for thy oicn interest.— 14. I judge that 
 our armies cannot be residedhy the enemy.— 15. They worked [inii^erfect^ 
 as lon'^ as» they understood that they were sowing' and investing their 
 libor 7n their interest and in that of the Roman people.— 16. Thou hast 
 raised" thy children not only for thyself, but also for thy country.— U. 
 X<ibody cTi-s merely to his [own] disadcantage, but is the cause and author 
 of the errors (si no.) of others (^^ 357. Rem. 6). ,,,,,. 
 
 SiMPi-E Genitive and Abl.^tive (§^ 478. 479). 1. What gladder day of 
 thy whole life canst thou remember {recorddri) ?— 2. I wish thou m)uldst 
 i<>\\\ Rem 02) remember'" the Acilian ?««? of thy f\ither".— 3. Do not 
 fopret'those men to whom our republic owes all its glory.— 4. I remember 
 weTl ( i/robe) the teachers who instructed^'^ [us in] our youth.— o. ^ot even 
 those hesitated'' to resist the attack who icere without a Iwpe of victory.— b. 
 Alcibiades because he had not practised" faithfully the teaching f of 
 Socrates, ik'came unmanageable- and reckless".- 7. This was always 
 done as long as thou wast in the habit ot using our^.^wto/ic^.- 8- I lave 
 always had the most friendly intercourse"^ icith this man.— 9. [Those] 
 wlio*<doi-y in vice, and praise what others blush'- at [tran.sl : tho^je 
 (thinr^s) at which, etc.], have lost the only good [thing] which is in 
 evil — 10 [Those] that abandon*' principles to pleasure are destitute of 
 either;-'' tor they lose their virtue, and, for the r^'^t," do not have 
 Die- sure but pleasure has them.— 11. If you need help, look^» first 
 
 lu- her'v'm cin.iot find it within {in) yourseltV-. 12. What (must) we 
 think^* o'f thy innocence, when thou hast sold {mdie.) property {bona) 
 worth- 100,000 sesterces for 10,000 V- 13. The treasury ot the Athenians 
 was tilled to overtlowing'^« icilh the contributions'' ot their allies.— 14 
 Sicily abounded in products"^ of that kind" which the Roman pe;)ple could 
 not easily dispense'" icith.- 15. Africa overflowed^^ with the blood of the 
 very soldiers by whom she was oppressed. _ , . , ..„ ,33 
 
 ComVouxd Oiuects (^480-55 487). 1. Can highwaymen- assert- 
 that they have uiveii life to those /;v>/i ichom they have not taken (re/jier^) 
 
 1 v_ J It can hardly be believed that more should have been^'' taken 
 /.;>;« these men than they have earned-.- 3. C.esar 7;..rcZ. ;;.^ W.^/; 
 chief of that province which, of all others, he coveted'^ "/.^'^Vr i 
 
 Fidius whom C'ajsar had made superintendent"^ of the supplies,^' was a Ro- 
 m 111 kni-iil in whose integrity^" all placed the greatest conhdence*' - 5. 
 D no"hnagine-^ that those things which onlperve tor thy pleasure- m'. 
 necessary** to thee. - 0. This event^'^ relieved^^ our minds^^ trom all fear.- 
 
 ' 1 Tn«*i,.n _ aid a-iiare ut - transl. : that they :?\verve (dejicere) from their duty.— 
 
 4 ,;/ r^? hr.in 'uhi M lo^ are here considered as one party, ^o thai the action 
 
 if ndy be wS two; ulTalin. cannot he used The .n.gular (ana not the plural 
 
 , ffiif,, — -^o tran>*iaie : >aiut;u v^^it^""" w. "-^' •- 
 
 cere. — "* res liunieniarui. — in^jn..^i"-. , , _. ., ^„.,, . 45 rm 46 1 ht'rS.re — 
 
 J§ 3i:i) _ 4i fulgcrc.- " by the abstract dative.— *♦ opu?.- re^.- Jiotrare. 
 
 *'' sing, in Latin. 
 
112 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 7. We could not prevent the enemy frojn, ravages^ and plinidoi^ — 8. As 
 soon as' I heard* of this disaster, I sent a body' of piclied' soldiers to 
 Scipio's help {double d/tiive).— 9. The ftinnen'' irere ordered to furnish^ 
 more i^rain than tlay had raised". — 10. Do 3-011 not see of what sort 
 (qnalLs) is a virtue trhich in in need^"* of a r/unrd? — 11. Epamiuondas 
 etfected" by his eloquence that the Lacedaemonians were dep?'iced" of the 
 help of their allies. — 12. The jud,i;es condemned Alcibiades in his absence" 
 for sacrilt'ffc^*. — 13. At Thebes Alcibiades heard that he wdn condtmned 
 to death. — 14. While {oiui) Ilamilear waited'* war in Sicily, he icas eon- 
 demntd for treanon^^ by his fellow-citizens. — 15. Biutus freed the repub- 
 lic from royal" rule^^.— IG. Doest thou not pity those whom, by thy 
 cupidity,'^ thou hast stripped"-" of [their] property? — 17. I confess that 
 / icaa not a little"^ (ishamed of my rash suspicion. — 18. This triumph 
 honored Ponipey so much" as (§ 301) nobody before hiui was yet honored 
 {affected) within the memory of men. 
 
 (Double Accusativk.) 19. By these means {res) Alcibiades effected 
 that he was held (habire) dearest by his fellow-citizens. — 20. The ancients 
 {cetus) called {appelldre) Spain Jbtria from the river IbCrus, anil afterwards 
 lli,spania from the llispauic sea". — 21. What will you do with a man 
 who has m'A(\Qli(/hf* with the pray ern"^ and representaUons-S)f his very best 
 friends? (^ 35")). — 22. Do you believe any shore so def^eriecf that {f/uo) the 
 fame of that day shouUP not have arrived ?'-" — 23. We call {diarc) that 
 ■man happy for whom there is no i^ood and evil except a ^ood and evil 
 soul. — 24. To make Virtue the handmaid^^ of pleasure is the mark of 
 [one] who^* conceives^"^ nothing .i^reat in hismiiul. — 25. All votes having 
 been^^ counted, the delegate's {le;/dtuf<) proclaimed Abraham Li/icoln Presi- 
 dent^* of the Republic— 20. I never wished {edlc) to conceal this disaster 
 from you. [J ramform the object-injiiiitive *" cone etd' with its objects into a 
 passive construction, afOr having translated it actively.] — 27. Do not ask 
 me for such a dereliction'^^ oi' iiU principles which I foruu'rly j^rofessed. 
 — 28. Do not ask of me iho.se [questions] which I am neitlier able nor 
 willing to answer. — 29. We teach our .scholars Latin and Greek. — 30. 
 We teach our scholars the Latin and Greak It ingu ages (g 119, Item. 5). 
 [Traniform the last two sentences into pas.sive constructions or their equiva- 
 lents., after having trand<ited them actively.] 
 
 Inp^initive (i^ 488- ^ 495). ['J'ranslate the sentences JVos. 1-10 into Latin 
 with personal constructions Jf an impersonal oiif'. is not afniissible ; and tcith 
 both personal and impersonal const ructitjns if both are admissible.] 1. It seems 
 that thou art experienced" above (J^ 43«) the others in this matter {res}.— 
 2. It seems that Ciceiv was not vtry modest. — 3. It is said (dicere) that 
 both Pomponius and his son have been killed by robbers. — 4. It is said (ferre) 
 that the goddess Egeria was king Numa's wife. — 5. It is reported {tradere) 
 that the gens Julia derived" its' origin from Julus, sou of ^EuOas.^'' — 6. 
 
 1 Populatio.— 2 raplna'.— ^ aii soon os, ubi.— * ccrtiOrem fieri, p. 76.— ^ maniis.— 
 « deli-ctus.— 7 cultor.— » hy impe rare. — » exarare.— i" opus.— " perliceic— '"^ pri- 
 vtire.— 13 transl. : the al>sent Aici Diaries.- 1* sacrilei^iiun.— ^* gt-rere.— 1« proditio, 
 
 17 reiriiis. — 1« doiuin5iii-. — ^* avaritia. — ^'> spt)liilre.— -> not a little., at quantum. 
 
 — 2- trausi. : ' aflVctod' uijficere) I'ompey with so ^rn-at honor.— *■" (he ^jxini-^h .vta, 
 llispjluinn (,sc. niaiv).- -* ll•an^l. : "held {(luccrt) li;;lit.'— " preces.— •■»« adniouitio — 
 2^ (ie»t;rtus.~ -'^ subjunctive of the main verb.— ->• perva;lere.— 3» uncilla.— 3i paiti- 
 ejplt,._ Si concipere.— '^ ablat. abs.— a* princeps.— '* dcsertio.— =»<» expcruis.- 
 3' ducere.— 3« Gen. iEnCie (Greek declension;. 
 
 * 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 
 
 113 
 
 
 ft is supposed {py tare) that Bamnlus never existed^ — 7. It is believed 
 {ivistimdre) that Cmar took part'-' in the Catilinariau=' conspirncy.— 8. 
 // w announced that Pompejus is absent from home.— 9. It is vnderstood 
 {intelligere) that Cicero cannot have written* this oration.— 10. / am com- 
 manded {imj^rare) to be present at the games. 
 
 11. Epaminondas allowed his colleagues to place"" the whole responsibUity 
 upon himself.— 12. Epaminondas did not refuse' to svffer^ the penalty of 
 the law.— 13. The first settlers" of Italy were the Aborigines whose king 
 Saturnus is reported to have been of so great justice that not only had there 
 been no slaves'" under him, but [that] everything had been common and 
 undivided" tor all.— 14. If Antonius were present, he wouUr-, perhaps, 
 teach me or nither you, O conscript" fathers, to defend Caesar's acts".— 15. 
 Diomedon asked"' Epaminondas'' to allow him{utsibi liceret) to leave" ihe 
 citv in safety {safeh/}, nnd take out"* all his [property].— IG. It will not 
 behoove you to be an'r/ry''' with me for"" speaking in behalf of the republic. 
 — 17 i)em()sthcnes said that it is often more difficult to keep"^^ property 
 {bona) than to acquire-' [it]. — 18. 7b live without literature is to be buried 
 alire'^^ — 19. Do vou think {putdn^ [it] more ulorious to be feared by one's 
 [own] citizens, than to be praised [by them]?— 20. The true glory is, to 
 be equal'* to all others" in liberty, [but to be their] better'"' in regard to 
 {by) dignity.- 21. I believe that every one ought {oportet) to know with 
 whaf-'lnsolence that man has plundered'^'' the public property.— 22. Do 
 vou think that j^^^/^vn/iZ/'V jn^^'f'i'"'! duties'" is a heavy and intolerable 
 burden V— 23. 1 believe i^n-6<7/v/-) WvAi p)rizes'' amX crowns owghi {oportet) 
 to be awarded''^ to these men. 
 
 CIIAPTEll THIRD. 
 
 COXSTRUCTIOX OF ADJECTIVES. 
 § 406, Adjectives, botli attributive and predicative, may 
 have eillier completing or incidental objects like the verb, as : 
 conscius sceleris, privy to a crime (completing object) ; ferox 
 in hdlo, eoiiiis et henlf/nus in /:>ac^, savage in war, kind and 
 benignant in peace (incidental objects). 
 
 Jiem. 90. In reixard to meaning and construction, adjectives are analo- 
 gous to, althouu-h not alwavs ideutical with, verbs, both denoting either 
 states or actions. Adjectives denoting a state co rrespond to the neuter 
 
 1 esse.— ^ to take part in 8ometfnna,wr\\c\x>em esse alicujiis rei.-- » Catilinarius.— 
 * scrit)ere iu»ii p«»tiiisse, not scripsissc uon posse. Si;e § 4"^'^-— ' transferre.— culpa.— 
 ' r-cu>are.— " sul)Iie.— » cultor.— i» transl. : that neitlier any oue had senecl unaer 
 hiuj.— »» inaivlsus.— »2 imperf. sul)j. of the main verb.- ^^ Conscnptus.— i* actum. 
 — 16 rojrare.— 1« ace. Einninnondam (Greek declens.).— i7 exire. — »» eflerre.— 
 la irasei.— -» translate either according' to § 3<).}. Rem. 29, or (more elegantlv) : angry 
 \viih me, spealcin- tpartic. oi dicert) fertile republic' §394.- 21 tuCri — 22 parSre 7- 
 " nr<^S aecessoiv predicate. - «♦ par. - " transl. : ' to //i<? others.' - 2« princep_8 (in 
 the positive).- '^ quaiitus.— 28 f»i)oliare.— 2» to perform judicial duties; ^«atcare.— 
 •" iuiolerabilis.— '> paliua.— ^2 tribuere. 
 
lU 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIYES. 
 
 verbs or to passives, as : raliduK, strong = vnlere, to be stron.2: : htrndm = 
 timere; per.ynmus = quod peri<picitur. The trunsilive and intransitive 
 verbs correspond to analoij:()Us adjectives, as cnpere, to desire = cuptdus, 
 desirous; fiduH = fdi're; plains = implere; iwxim r=z nodve. 1 he latter 
 chiss of adjectives admits completing object^ like corresiiondni!; verbs. 
 
 Pern 07 PAnTiciPLEs, rcprcsentiiii; the action of the verb either in the form of nn 
 atnfbute, or^of an acceV.ory predicate (p. 245; p. 2-lfi, i?. 18). have the nature ..f both 
 adjeclives and verl)?, beins dechned like the former, and construed hke the hitter, lint 
 pome Darticiplesi, from their frequent attributive use, have passed over into mere adj.-c- 
 tives and are construed like these (§49«M, hut /;j(/y also retain the conMrnction of the 
 conespo.idin-' verb, if they are used in a meanm-,' fully correppondiUL' to that of the verb, 
 as: A/tiuns fJi, fond of thee; but atna/is te, loving thee; laborts patiens, hard-workuii; ; 
 hwi kifjort in patieng, sutlVriu.:; hardships. 
 
 Kevi 9S A nvEKBS, generally, cannot take objects», except iirthe followinir instances: 
 nSome adverbs formed from pautioii-lks (conceidenter, cougrntuter, eonsfanftr) may 
 take the same o])iects as the verb- from which they are derived: toureiaenter (in har- 
 mouy with) natnm vivere. Cic. OtV. 3, v;i.-CongnifnU^r natflne rir^re. Ih. Hn. 3 ..-- 
 mn con.tanter dicere {cwmstently uUh one\^ xelj } , Ih. 1 use. o, <X Mini ariy : //.fr to^l^rne 
 ol»^eQ>ie„hr facta: This was done in obedience to bis colleague. Liv. 41. 10.- 2) Uaiely the 
 adv. rbs formed from adjectives of dimension take the same objects as their adj-crives 
 (/m imiesal/e^; Pee Ex. 4. 7. p. 117. S(»: Locum delCi^it ab Ayarico loixje (at a distance 
 of) miUia iKi^suum sed^rim. Cies. B. G. 7. 16.- 3) liarely adverbs are con>trued with 
 oEiuNDiAL DATIVES (p. 1(« foil.): Op/fOffHiie v€nU irrifdndts animi». Liv. M. o.— A) Some 
 adverbs (ssmi-pukpositions) are occasionally treated like i)repositlons, takini: eilher the 
 accut»ative or ablative, accordiuf? to the analosjy of kindred prepositions. Here beloni: 
 d(i?n (m-rttly, with abl. or acc), palam {in f<i(/ht oj\ with aijl.). .v^m;// (to«,'eiher with) 
 iatus (within), «"'7^ (p. 13), procul, and the comparative and siii)'rlative inopms and 
 vrvHme. Also prope and coriwi Juay be reckoned here. Kx.: dam rolnx, wiih..u vonr 
 Inowledse (Ca's. B. C. '2, 32) ; dam pafre (Plant. True. 2. 1, 37» ; ctam mafnm (i.uit. 
 Mil 2 1 34) —I'ahim populo {Liv Ay, U). —Si mul hi» {^^famal cuni /n<, llor. bat. 1, U». N.i; 
 Mar/ne/iha.n nmid (Tac. A. 4, 5."); so lb. 3. (i4; C, \\).-Intus cdia (Liv 27, 11, the readint,' 
 heiii" doul)tful; so Lucr. ♦;, 1 1 ()!♦).— /'/w«/, i:enerally. take-* ab with abl. (p 21) fu 1., 
 Obs 7)- but sometimes a mere ablative: JIaud procid tiedifion^, Liv. »>. lb: j/roou d'lhio 
 i^Hiie d'dAo). (^linr. 1..5. ll.-T'/o/w'/.s-and proxinie take acc. or abl (§4'.I.S^): hxercitmn 
 habC'ie quam proxime /io.<fem, Cic. Alt. «i, 'y, 3; ;>/o;uw nrbem, lb. 1 Inl. ..«>.— o) the 
 adverb 7rqo (proi»ab!y from e and an obsolete noun helon,^'ln^' to the root r^fj =e rtijo, 
 from thedirectitm of), in anteclassical and publicistic laii-:uair<-, is used in the meaii- 
 ini: 'on account of\ as: Kj>i.< rei ergo, Cato It. K. 139; formuU„i.-< en/o Lucr. 1. 1-4..: 
 fanerl^ ergo (quoted by Cic. Leg. 2, 2,-i, from the XII. Tab.); donani ttrtufis ergo (quoted 
 \yy Livy 2.-i, 12, from an old S. C); ejus legis ergo (quoted from a contemporary law by 
 Cic. Atr.3, 2.3, -2). 
 
 Rem. 99. Adjectives are rarely construed with advekbs. except pnrticipleft. y,nt any 
 adjective may bi; qiialitled bv au adverb of intensitv d'. I..ij313; I . U., \>.'Zi)\.J£. dijK 
 or bv adverbs' virtually intensive {ri'liode inco/l■^<(all.'^, = :u\o.^J incoiistans ut rKlicniu- Mt, 
 Cic. K. Com. «). or by adverbs used with the force of emphatic particles: Vtre lioneMuin, 
 truly v!i'ii,,M<. Cic. Otl". 3, 4, 17. 
 
 § 411 # . The completing objects of adjectives are 1) Substan- 
 tives (nouns or pronouns) in the Accusative, Genitive, Dative, or 
 Ablative ; 2) some Prepositional Objects (see Chapter T.) ; 
 a) Infinitives (rarely and exceptionally) ; 4) the Second Su- 
 pine ; 5) sometimes Gerunds and Gerundive ])])rases (p. 101). 
 
 Tfem 100 The adjectives ijoverninor the dative and ahlative jrenerally rorre«pond to 
 thf VERBS renuiriTi" the same case. Thus the reason that ,//,7;.. 2.»vern- the '^ame is the 
 same a^ tlie r-ain whv vrod>s.^e require- the dative: atul /,7>.r is ronstrued with the ab- 
 ative ca'e from no othef reason tha'n m.rare. This is difT-rent with 'J''^ '''';;-;: l^^'^,;;: 
 and adiective- correspondiuL' to transitive verbs reirularly require their obied in the 
 gfntt VP See ^ 499. Th»' accn-ativc case of the objects of adjectives is confined to a 
 
 ' few- instances iii which the accusatives of space and time are applied to dimensions 
 
 i and a^je. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 115 
 
 § 40S. The following adjectives require objects in the ac- 
 cusative case : 1) The adjectives longm iXou^s)^ [^^^^^ (broad, 
 wide), altus (lii-h or deep), and crassus (thick), requiring the 
 numeral units of the measure whose dimensions or directions 
 they define, to be either in the accusative or genitive ; 2) 
 the participial adjective natiis, in the meaning ' old; requiring the 
 measure-units of* life (amius, me?isis, dies) to be in the accusa- 
 tive, as : decern annos natus, ten years old; 3) the comparative 
 and superlative adjectives and adverbs formed from i^ro^^e {pro- 
 jnor—propius, nearer; proximus—proxiwe, next), which have 
 their objects either in the accusative, or dative, or are construed 
 with the preposition ab. 
 
 Jiem. 101. The units of measure used by the Romans w-ere 1) f J;,^^«^^f ^J/J^i^llf-df^^it* 
 one eidith to one tifteenih). and in music modulus denotes the measure or oar. 
 
 wmmmmmmM 
 
 .^truciion), or they are placed m ^''^. ^bi.at \b. in cu^^^^^^ (rarely in the accusa- 
 
 5?:^"" columna .W,j./i M^^>^ /^^^^^i^t:^}^ !i? ^::^^^^^^^:^ J/mJSul^: 
 
 ! 
 
 vigiuti U.dum -^^-^^-<^f;!:':^^:J^^^ '^^^"^^^^* 
 
 ;;:^:S S;;.^;^ e"^ wUh'i^ ml" u;^e;l^;i^with\./ )^^ mats a^ the same).^s : 
 
 !/;./'"« UigintaWibus ad quadraginta lata, a. house between thiit> and fortj fcU 
 
 ^'Pem 103 The expressions of numeral measure "^^y be connected in two ways^^^^^^ 
 coM;:;uA'T.\'ET\l,w\,hthecou.p:u-ativeofuMrrATi^^^^^^ 
 
 is -reater orsmaller than a certain number (^ 3i2). or '^^^^^^'"^'fv,"'^ "/ ? ^ 
 
 L"m KxcK<s of one measure over anotlier (ablative ot ditTerence, § 311). 
 ^^.."lif ihe'lS-mer ease three ditTe.ent co-tructions -^^ ^^^^,JJ^^^ 
 Btruction with jilus or 7ninus according to § 312, Rem. 14. it. imscabe 
 
IIG 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 nre koon«^ the same con?tniction which it would have without plu.<i or niinus, as : ^des 
 ".fph^i^a amMrV'inta ;m-./.. (;).</./;./, ;>ff?»-*'/.s) lata (or latit.uhnc). (he t>mpleismore 
 
 IWdtho-^^^^^^^^ l^7nore than mrlyfeet. 2) The comparative a.lvcrbs plxs.v vunm 
 
 LnV c^d ..-. i t o th. CO. adjVctivc-s maj«;-or;;u.ar attarinn- them as a tr - 
 
 !^ m.i oVlie n. un< of dinionsion. and kct-pin- the construction of the nnmencal ni.-a-ure, 
 ai • i i n i ado 'St uiai<»r (minor) [qn.nn] tri-rii.ta j^dum ( rare y pedf>> or ped»bu^). 
 ^rT^ "ct v^^^^^^^^^^^^ m«y be uVenuki, with the co.npa.ativc-s ;,/*.. and minus 
 
 into coMiu'ATiv ADJECTIVES (iustcad ol plux longm, etc.) : lomjior, altor, labor, cms- 
 i o ., \Vi it ;,^r. A^^^ fonrp,,. lafus/nud al'u. without chani^e ; instead oi minus 
 
 ?mV;;/\V^av ^ ovqracillor. The numeral mea.t.re w.th these compamtives is 
 
 S'Sh pS-1 in he ABLATIVE or genitive: .E.hs hitiores sunt, r^v^/./a p>^dihis 
 Sr%S/m (hardly ever latiOres tnrjinta pedts). Columua cras.ior (ijraeihor, tenuior) est 
 tii'dnia ^/!r/i/i.« or (/i7i/'(5/"'^/n (hardly ever dJ^i/O'*''^- , . ,. ., 
 
 B In he ease of a d.tiuite excess, the forms of the companitive are the same 
 a* in he f rnu-r case and the excess of measure is always expre^srd by the ablatun. of 
 difrerincJrihi column.^ qnarfa part.' ,q,u»tuor </^7'7ls) .enu.Or..s sunt quam i.ta?, 
 the^e columns are thinner by onefomtk (four di-its thinner) than tho.<e. 
 
 Rem 1(14 SorAUE mea-ure has the game words for units a? lineal measure. To pive 
 to these w.ms Uie m.anin- ot- Kiuan- mea-.ire, eith-r the se.ntive are.v. (of surface) 
 ?addei or t e particij.ial a.fj.ctivi.s fpmdraln. or wulliplicnh.s.n^-.^^un' square feet 
 r^T'arllloren^ jnadnVi mnltip/ira/h j^de^ norem. The- Kn-lish • square a^er 
 mm-Al'ise ti.erlilanviseexp by the additi.m of «mMif the connection shows 
 
 that no iuare measure cm be u>eani), or by various ei-cumiocutions as: a s,>ot 
 JK/J^/^X/v locus trin.n are^t i)edum. «/• locus (,uadril'us irium pedum ufrCpte 
 liefe-^ Vitn o^ trTs ,,edes Ioultus et tant.indem latus (V itruv.). Cubic "'easnre is 
 expressed by the addition of qaouaorer^vs : saxum trium pedum quoquoversus, a block 
 
 ^'^/J^yrior-nKM e'ndar' wa^^ of expressing fractions is by circumlocution with par^ aud 
 an ordiual nun eral (§ -2^). V.ut tho^e nactb.ns that may be re.luced to a lorm with the 
 deiumSo! l-^m^^^^^^ «li«- ^•^'^'- <»f absolute or abstract fractious) ex- 
 
 pressed by the parts of the Roman .l.s'. These arc : 
 
 _L- = uncia (expressed hv the symbol F). '., = scptunx (FS). 
 
 ?- (L^ = sextans {V. with a line over it). -,«*,- (i) - bes (FZ with a line over it). 
 
 y. n = quadrans (Z). -,^, {^) = ^^o'^^ins (SZ). 
 
 ?i. L = triens (FZ). j^- (^) = Sextans or decunx (of doubt. 
 
 y. = quincunx (of doubtful notation). ful notatnm). 
 
 ?^4 (I) = semis (S). ii = tleunx (of doubtful notation). 
 
 These 'expressions are applied to numeral measure only when the m*^«;;".'-^/""i;,J,^ 
 u;^erstoo5 as S.ca in. tamla^ non erasure. Mante, cut '^^^ '^^^^^^^^'^l^^l 
 five-sixths (Of a di<'it) If the measure-uint is mentioned, hactions (annot n» ( x 
 nres^ ed Iv the- » te n s exc-pt one half (semis. O. semissis). Stmi^ is generally used by 
 £'>S;l.ai^on: dnM.p!n^ i"c----'<'i"^-vh..n. the CO 
 
 auino'ie mde.< semi< {ov nwmaxu^ pedes et semtssem), five leet and a hall Ion ^^. iii.oi 
 ?cM n lirde to of km- n i n eials it ii often comp<.uud.'d witli the measure-umts in the lorm 
 , rll" atJHbutfvJalljective dUnvimtn. lu/vin. the -J"- --?,"' "gitf(,rSt>n;i:;u 
 or I) -s diinidiiltus). Ttie fraction \}4 \^ frecpiently expressed by sesqm in C''i^P'^^';| '" 
 with the measure-units ysesquum, one foot and a half; sesqmpeddhs, one and a half 
 
 ^""Vm^^m The adjectives mentioned above arc the onlr ones which are used in con- 
 neSon ili/h nSm^rill expressions as ol>j.;cts. ^»' ^En.lish expressums^^.^^a m^ 
 tain -s-'/w. a thousand men strong, cannot be rendered into Latin by means of artjcctiNts. 
 
 ^'^^..^m." Poets, imitntin,' a Creek idiom, frequently use adjcctivos «"<;.Pf;^;5^-f, n;'[»!; 
 ciple. with objects in the accusative. assiLMV..f,^t<. such accusatives tin^^^^ 
 al lative, as celeri^edes (m<X. of pHldj us), quick m re-ard to the feet ^'I'^'h,*^* "' j ..'v th s 
 color,m (White of color) ; tahfactu.< animum (weanedjn soul , ^»^. t^" 1" j,'' . ^/;;;^ 
 con>truction is found in re-ard to the past participle vulutus : Longam indatoi itsiem. 
 T ;,. o* 'Yl 
 
 \. In hac basilica^ mediaua^ testfldo» inter cohimnas ^^l^^O^)^'!'' ^J^,'!fl ^'f !f 
 LX. ; porticus inter parietes et cohimnas est lata ped^s viginti. \itruv.5, i.- 
 
 1 a basilica, a public buildin- of peculiar architecture.- ^ inner.- » arched ceiling. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OP ADJECTIVES. 
 
 117 
 
 2. Columnjehabcnt post se parastaticasi alta.'^ pede.'^ v\s\rMl '«^^'^^^'^f f'fl'J^f'iflf ^^^^ 
 ned^m unum semis: supraque eas sunt alia3 parastaticie />c^i«m decern et octo, latx 
 &Z-^V%,7ped:m. Vii%v. Ib.-3. Hoc instrumentumhabcat^msupenore parte 
 eanaiem* long um pedes quinque. latvm digit ^im alt urn '.'^'^^Vl^^^^^^l^"":.^^ 
 4 Cauinestris» locus alte duai pedes ct semissem infodiatur». ^olum. d, 16.— &. unum 
 taterum' genus e.t longum sesquipede, latum pede Vitr. 2. 8 - 6- Hoc genus laterum 
 quod est quoquoversys qvinqrie palnwrrnn, pentaduron« dicitur A nr. lb. - «. 1^1"';^ 
 Jit per ramOruniMiodc.s'o ea pars abietisn qme a/^e circi.er i;.^..r^^^^^^^^ 
 Viir 2 ».- 8. Majorem turrim ait fieri oporf5re aitam cnbitorum CXX latam 
 cubiorum vigin.i trium. Vitr. 10, i:^.- 9. Supra epistyliumia sunt tnglyphii* a J 
 vZsox dimldidfi moduli, lati in iumX^^^ nnVcs mod^iii - 10 bupra P^^^«.i« erant 
 traN>s>7 cramj; semissem ct quartam pedis ;wW^m. \ i r. in, 15.- 11 Hocinterval- 
 lum's sit»» \rh\m cf>lumndrum crassitudine ; ipsSrum columnilium a/^t/wrfo sit modu- 
 r mm «Veto eVdijnidi^r moduli jKirti.^'. Vitr. 3. :i.- 12. (^uje columua ab in-inta pedi- 
 flvlndj^^^^^^^ alia erit. (ejus) ima^o cras^itQdo divrdatur in parti- septem et di- 
 
 mil anrVitr 3 4 - (Jradns-i ^pectaculnmm^-' ubi sub^ellia^S componantur^* ne 
 
 / ) "aV/^• s lit Irdminedt^K ue plus pede et digitis sex ; latifudines eOriim ne^plus pedes 
 Z^nis ^m ui'^e,ies duo i<.nstituantur.- lb. 5, «.- 14. Ejus pulpit^« altdlKW >M ne 
 Jus ;/2.;/' quinque.^ lb.- 1.^. Cra-situdines eorum g-aduum ita fimantur ut neque 
 a'aJore.'<^^ de.rfanfe. nvqxxo ton uidre-^''*' dodranfe >^mt vyUociiXiXi-'^ \itr 3 4.- 1^.. Mi- 
 pra i i pluieum'o c<.lumme qnartn parte mindreaJtifudine sint quarn inforiores. \ itr. 5, 
 T-i IT lUilnli.imSi latitudines .lebenl esse nee minares pedum demon, nee majores qum- 
 ihnum ut sin-aila ju-a (bourn) ne minus occupent pedes septenos. \ itr. b, b.-- 18. (c^ua- 
 
 rat s'l CM i qi i era /o /./7/, ,( Infr's pedes deno.<, etlicit are<T pedes centum. \ itr. 9, prief. 
 
 _ li ii s n*.n quadraia paribu./lateribu>3-' describuutur. quod ertt jyedum trium 
 
 latus am "hi^ehtV(/'*^J/^/«,' '^^nod erit quatu<.r. sedecim : quod quinque erit vi- 
 
 i\mi Ol V ir ib-- 20. impouito trahem latain i)edes duo crass:im pedera 
 
 uunTn-m pedes Vri.it.ta septem. fato K. R. 18.- 21. Alcibiades «««o.. circiter 
 
 a nennT m,/. diem obiit siiprfn.um". Nep Ale. 10.- 22. Duodequadra-inta an.ios 
 
 vmn^^^ luit I)lonysius,quun'i quinque et vi.Mnti a«;|0. 7|a ;j.^ domi- 
 
 natum3^ocx-ui>avisse!3*. Cic. Tusc. 5. 20.- 2;i. LMui proximi I hj^nwn \x\co\nm^\ €^R9. 
 
 \ 1 '■4-24 In \frica proximi ILspaniam Mauri sunt. Suli. Jug. 49 1.- 2,.. Cum 
 
 um::nta y;;v.rr,/;. innem^^ s1abulantur3^ horridaS^ tiunt. Vitr 6 6.- 20. ^':|-YmS 
 Veniii<'etori".m ca-tra mov sse propiu.< Avartcum. Lies. B. U. •, 18.— -£7. Anamtio 
 mV' i- (7 lam :.v ritia animos huminum exercCbat, quod tamcn vitium propius virtutem 
 
 ■ri?"4 irat 1 1 - 28 Exi-timabant illi. sua sibi periciila proptora esse, quam 
 mea Cic.' Sext. Is]--' 20. C;esiir quam proxime potest liosiium castris castra com- 
 mfliiit^'. Cies. k C. 1, 72. 
 
 § 499. The following adjectives govern the Genitive : 1) the 
 (present ) rAiiTiciPiAL Adjectives derived from transitive verbs, 
 if used in the meaning of personal qualities corresponding to 
 the verbal idea, as lUlir/eus, careful of; negligens, neglectful of; 
 2) adjectives expressing desiiie and striving; control, knowl- 
 edge, and capacity. •,• i i „ 
 
 Rem 108 To the participial adjectives vrovernin.i? the genitive belong 
 mmetenx ea^^T for; fffideus, r/^r^/j.^ instrinneutal of; perfere7is, jyaii^ns 
 an orwiUhr-to etulure, undergo ; fdgieii.s, afraid of, shy ot- a mans, fond 
 (/f- ok^ervans, full of respect for, sitiens, etc. Participial adjectives de- 
 rived from intransiti ve verbs, generally govern the cases of their verbs,as 
 
 1 Pillar.- 5 inslead of binorvm. In numeral expressions the g?"il^'y«Jll"^\f,t ^Jj^ f ^^ 
 declension is c-nerally formed in i/m in.t. of arum Q\'^\^y'^,^ll^'^^^^^^ 
 used here?-"3 should have.- 4 groove.- » l^'y'^^l- " ^''^,'^[}„ '^ n ilr tree -'S 
 a brick - 8 to be considered as a proper name.- » branch.- |o Knot - " «'""ee. cui. 
 _ »3 architrave - i* a triglvph (in the frieze of the Done order,.-/* m f">"<^.-^ '* P^^*. 
 Z 17 beam -^« interval.- 1« should be.- ^o lower.- '--^ step.- " m the amphitheatre - 
 23 bench - 24 to place.- 25 a loot and a quarter.- 26 platform.- ^t here high.- "here 
 Ion -^» to place- 3° parapet.- 3i j^J/^iV, aittle-stable.- ^2 latus o 6ris, a side - 
 
 ^Ahem .4/>Sm obire% depart life to die.- «^ ^"P^^"\^Pr''''-,7 la-f '^^^a^bi^ 
 live, to dwell.- 3^ tire-place.- ^^ stabulari (dep.) to be stabled.- "shaggy.- amoi 
 
 tjonl— 41 to fortify. 
 
\ 
 
 118 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 obediens, {dicfo audiens), obedient ; imminens, (alicui or alicui rei), threat- 
 ening ; flafjranii aliqua re, burning with. 
 
 Fern 100 A niong tlie adjectives expressing desiuk are : avidus\ cupidus 
 studiOsus\ The other chiss, ex pressing control and capacity (mental 
 and otlierwise), is very large. Here belong penfus and consultus , gnarus , 
 ronmm^ certior (in the i>lirase certlOnm (dlquem facere ahcujus ret) 
 pnfdens'] memor, parturp.^, poferif^ and compo.s. pleniis, fee ima us find 
 tlieir contraries, insciufi and }iexn>(f<\ nidis, i/o^uetus\ immemor, obUtm , 
 e,vpfrfi,impot('n.sam\impoH'\er/f'iiHn,inopn. . , -n 
 
 Rem 110 Several ottheseadje('tives, as r^w.<»^«'/.v, are also construed with 
 a dative (especially the reflexive dative mM, which is redundant ni hnglish , 
 or with im abltitive, as consnltu.s {juriH ov jure consnl(a.% a jurist) and 
 pleniiH ialicfnnH rei or idiq^a ri^ Referfm (full of, hlled with) is almost 
 always construed with an ablative. Some, as rudin {ahrnjus rci or m 
 allqud re) are construed with a genitive or with a preposition. 
 
 hem 111 In poetry and hiler prose, many adjectives and participles 
 take a ocnitive, which, in L,M)od prose, are either not used at all (ns ;)/•«;- 
 ,uqi(.s, 7fhs(emiNs, pnT^eiusi or which have ditferent constructions, or 
 take no object at all (as intef/er, earns, ambiyu us, docdi^'i, sapiens, ixiu\ a 
 ureat manv others). Here belon- the adjectives m a.r tormed trom 
 verbs, n^ hfaj; gluttonous; fera.r, fertile; fur/a.r, tugitive. Ihese 
 adjectives, whicli in classical prose are extremely rare, and still more 
 rarely occur with objects in the genitive (in Cicero perhaps only the ad- 
 jective r^7)^y.r in a single passage), are very frequent in poetry and post- 
 classical prose, and regularly construed with a genitive, as tempus cdax 
 rerum, time, the devourer of things. 
 
 1 Ronia.ii semper appeknfe,^ r/lorice pnctcr cctcras ircutis atqnc aridUaudi^ ^",^/,""V 
 
 Cic M n • --tiCvrenaici'i pl.llosophi omuc bonum in voluptJlte I'o.uCninl virtfiu;n - 
 
 nue ce sucrunt'c^b'e.nn rem audJlri ..portcrc q.H.d efficient essct rd'^pfaUs. <^ i^- <->?■, '; 
 
 N.-n Kn -^— 4 Multi cwitenfwiux sunt r;//m/?ry/v.s qnam rerttatis. eic.Or.l, 1 .— 
 r >vttn^o;a<.A-S W^^^^^ pl.iluH.ph.... C-ie. Tusc. 5..;5,-0.,ln omnibus 
 
 relV^ -n'bouToptinnia.eti^^ latet, idque ab e.. p.,te^. urn ,p>.< ni gnarm est 
 
 nu "iri CU Or 1-7 Solus homo ex tot animaniium" -eneribus rattoni.^ c^t 
 
 ^S-t^i^i^-^-: Cic. Le, t, 7.- 8. om.^. 5;;^(j;-v>o^- ^^^^^ -»'• C-- 
 
 Tuse 5, 13.— i>. SUientem me virtatis taai deseruu-ti. ID. 1 luuc. 5. 
 
 §500. The adjectives denotincc necessary (to somebody), 
 
 USEFUL, ACCEPTAliLE, FIT (foi* Something), NEAPw, SIMILAR, EASY, 
 
 and their contraries, are construed with the dative. 
 
 Rem 112 The dative objects of almost all these adjectives iiiay be 
 C(msidered as ' d.xtives of the interested person.' Their luimber on 
 account of the great diversity of interest, is extremelN' large, so that they 
 cannot be all eSumerated in lists. The most usual adjectives belonging 
 to this class, are 
 
 1 Eairer for- » etrivin- for somebody (i. «., attached tohim).- » skilled 5"-* ^»;^- 
 
 livin- bein".-- " tho.i-ht.- >» acceptable.- »• accommodated.- '' fit.- »« bkilfu..- 
 «9 equal.— ^^» neighboring.— " related.— " intent ou. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 119 
 
 omnibus (since he was liii^hly satisfied with him), Il>. Plane. 11.— Mihi explordt'wiest (E 
 am ctmvinced) ita esse ut scribis, lb. Fam.2. 1«, 6. For ' mihi cert am est' see p. 612, n. 2. 
 Bern. 113. Some adjectives take either a dative or genitive : 1) Similis^; 2) par, gen- 
 erally takes a DATIVE, but sometimes a genitive; 3);>rc>prif/« (peculiar), in Cic. generally 
 with'a ciENiTivK^, else also with a dative; 4) communis, contrarius, superstes ; 5) sacer 
 (sacred to) generally with dative, but sometimes with oenitivk^. 
 
 Rem. 114. Many of the adjectives governing the dative, when used absolutely, are often 
 treated entirely as subst tntives. taking their objects in the form of attributes in the 
 genitive, as ieqiol'l-i. a c()iit(Mnp«)r:iry ia/iciljus). but 'equal ' (fdieui) ; familmriii, a friend 
 (aliciijus). but ' intimate with ' uilu^ui) ; amicus (with the same meaning and construction 
 «s famUuiris). Even the supclative amicissimns, the best friend, is sometimes con- 
 ptrned with a genitive attribute. Thus nece.'isariu-'i, a relative, takes a genitive attribute 
 or a pos-esslve {n-r'Ss'ari'ts fuut. G iji nf-cpssarius), but if meaning * related ' or ' necessary,' 
 it is construed with an object in the dative. 
 
 1. Senntari necnf-fariuni vM nosse rempublicam. Cic, Leg. .3, 18.— 2. Lacedaemonii 
 id potiiis iiituebantur (juoil ipsuruni dondtiatioiti^, (\\\ixn\ quod universie GrCEcicevtile 
 esset. Ncp. Then.. 7.— ^. R..rniiliis niiiltihuline graCior^ fuit quam pah-ibus'^, (sed) 
 longe ante alios acrepfi>isin\iis militum animis. Liv. 1. 15.— 4. Nihil est naiflne homiiiis 
 a^'commoiafius b-netic-Mitiil et 11 be lal it lire. Cic. OlF. 1. 14.— .5, Volupfntibus vvixi- 
 nus ta-tidiuui^ fniitimiim est. Cic. Or. 3, .35.— 6. Plures Romuli quam Xum/K similes 
 fiiennit n-ges. Liv. 1,20. 2— 7. Num deos esse tui similes putas ? Plant. Am. 1, 1, 
 los._S. Nam «I'liil i".> xini't!^ Mlo fuit r Ca?-^. B. G. 7, 77.— 9. Id est c>iju<que projrrium 
 qut) quisque Iruitur atiiuc utiiur. Cic. Fain. 7. .3i). 2 — 10. Veins verbum hoc quidera 
 est. comin'/nia es.se ainicOrum inter se omnia. Ter. Ad. .5, 8. IS.— 11. Oinni (Vtdti mors 
 est comimlnis. Cie.Sen. 1'.».— 11. Totosdies precabantur» ut*ti(?>i liberi«w;x^.*^i/;«^essent. 
 Cic N. I). 2 2^. — 12. Utinam' te non solum ritce, sed efiam dignildtis //1^(6 superstittni 
 reiiquissem'. Cict^ii, fr,l,3,l.— 13. «b'a/is esse ItaliiB uuum consuleiu cens6bai. Liv, 34,43. 
 
 § 501, The oiuect-ablative, dependent on adjectives, con- 
 nects with these 1) the idea of instrumentality and origin, and 
 2) with a few adjectives (as Ube)% free from; allemis, i'ovQ\g\\ 
 to) the itlea of separation. (See § 485.) 
 
 Rem. 115. lu some adjectives, as onmtus (laden with) aiid pr(^ditus (en- 
 dowed with), the ahlative denotes direct instrumentality, similar to the 
 l)assivc ai;ent of verhs. The adjectives and participles belonii^ing here, 
 ai*e in seN'i-ral respeets noteworthy. Prmiitas is often used to paraphrase 
 EuLHish derivative adjectives or"^similar expressions, as virtuous, y'wixiXQ 
 ])r,editus ; ia modest circumstances, parvis opibus praeditus (Cic). ^ Here 
 belon<^ the participles ductus, motus, permotus, adductus, imiuctus, impul- 
 sus, perterritns (with expressions of fear), corresponding to 'prompted 
 by'' or to the prei)osition from, denoting a motive, as: Feci Iwc inetu 
 permOius I have done Wnsfrom fear. It is unusual that motives are ex- 
 pressed bv the mere abhuive, without any of the mentioned participles. 
 
 Rem. IIG. The ablative connected witli most adjectives must be con- 
 ceived as denolinu- indirect instrumentalitv, corresponding to very ditfer- 
 ent Eu'^-lish prepositions. Thus the instrument of the action is conceived 
 1) as producing habit, satisf.\ction, and confidence, with the adjectives 
 a.s.uetus aliqud re (accustomed to), conte jit us {^iiiisfied \\ith),fretus (.ijlym^ 
 o/i)' 2) a? producing fullness or defect, with plenus aliqud re (tull of 
 'see Hem. 110), refirtus (tilled toith), opuletiius (rich in), fecu idus (fertile 
 
 'iSimilis always takes oexitive if the object i>.,a .1»'-?"'^"'^^';:' ^^''I^'^^'^'jj^^raio -""^ 11 
 it is a person (m^i similis, patris similts. also ren simili'^'). Other> ii>e either case.- as 
 forinvi Cic R A 8-L,M.lG.- 3 as: Insula torutn dedru7n >>acra. Cic.Verr.2, 1, 18. So 
 lb Le- 2 18 - «power - popular with,-* Senate.-^ 6urfeit.-« pray.-» would that. 
 
120 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 in\ prcBstaiis, exceUcm, cdeber, prfEclarus (distiuguished for), par alicui 
 aliqud re {-a \\\\\Xi'\\ for soinuhody m soiiu'tliing), pauper, 7iud us, vacuus, 
 orbus (destitute of)\ duudas (hvnie in), mger (sick 'icith reufpect V)). 
 
 Rem. 117. The adjective dinnus (worthy of) takes the object of whicli 
 somebody is worthy in tiie abhitive. In regard to the exphiuation ot 
 this construction opinions ditfer. 
 
 r^^r- It is probable that here ai; intermediate idea must be supplied. The Romans 
 do ii"ot .«»eem to have — iccived the ablative object of dignm as an immediate ol)j.Tt 
 of ' worthy.' hnt as thv. object of a passive verb dependent on difiitus, so that dirjtvis 
 aliqua re would have to be explained hy di'jnm aUqua re onmn or pnedihtm esseK 
 Tlu' other constriietions of drf/iit^ are 1) a relative clause ; 2) a clause wUh vf ; d) the 
 intinitive: 4) the second supine (difjna dic/if, Liv. r^f), 1 : 2.5 1) ; .5) with the p-nitive. 
 Of all thes<^ con-tructions only two arc normal, that with llie ablative, and that witu 
 a relative clause. (Sec p. 557, Obs. 3.) 
 
 Bern. US. Here belong: 1. The construction of the vocative mofJe (pi. 
 inacti) with an ablative,' mostly rirffttti {maclc rirtfite csto, which is used 
 as a phrase of praise and conirmtnlation, ' Well done! Let me ccmgratu- 
 late you for your bravery! '). Made is a defective adjective, occurring only 
 in the vocative, and behniging to the root m.V(J {niagnu!*, and the English 
 ' might, maif). 
 
 2 The ablative natu (literally In/ hirth), added to mnjor, mn.nmu8, and 
 mliior, minimxx, and indiciling that these adjectives refer to the age of 
 men {major natu, older ; minor n<itu, younger, etc.). 
 
 1 Orf'ctorix cnpliitdte reijni^ ?/i^?ur^/.-f.conjuratirmem nobilitJltisS fecit* Ca;s. "B. G. 
 1 i _ 2 Ce-ar ner cxploratures» coiinOvit, Considium (imore /h'rfernfurn, (id) quod nor. 
 vidiss.-t" pro viso-» sibi renuntias.f. (":es. H. (J. 1. 22.-:} Laced;emonii p.Ttiiu.iCM-nnt, 
 i\ecarita(t' patrise ^/t/c/^/v Alcil)iades aliquando'' ab ii)>is dcscisceret»» et cum suis in Lrra- 
 ti-im redTret'» Nen Vic 5.-1. Dubiil >/><' iinpni^m certum in periculnm se c(mnnlsu. 
 rlc Fun ;^ 8-5 Varus homo est suinm;l religiotie ct summil WJCfonfat^-'' prmdttu^. 
 Cc ciu M-G AUrnutn'-^ est ma-no ri/v), qu.xl alteri pm-ceperiti», ul ipsum facere 
 lioii pos^e. Cic'lirut. '.♦.- 7. Per-e»^ hiiK's omni liher me'u. teque et exercitum s.-na. 
 Liv 7 :U — 8. ContentHin suis rebn.^t esse maxim:e sunt certissiimeqiie divitiie. Cic. 1 ar. 
 r, x — 9 Cimon Tha<ios ow/fm'UJ fretos stio adventu freirit. ^ep. Lim. 2.— 10. Homines 
 liiijSre as^iduo»«et quotiduTuo»^ a.-xuPfi. quum t.-mpestatis causil opere proliibentur, 
 se ad aliquem ludum conferre'« s-d.-nt. Cie. Or. :i. 15.-- n..Maxima quieque domusx^/- 
 w/est k /.a superbis. Vir- .En. 1>. 2(i.- 12. Qme pars XumidKC Maureianiam attin-it»», 
 cinorirLue opuh'Mtlor est. Sail. Ju-. l'.>.- 13. Keddet'^» uie qu. nunc sreenbm suis 
 nrechlruJ^ v<U m.-arnm miseriSrum paMias. ball. Ju-. 11.- 14. Iluie tradita urbs est, 
 n?JfaimB4dio, referta co/ni^. Cic. Att. 7, 18.- 15. Q.iu.n sunuis ^^;^^']^'^^^}^ 
 curisnL vaon, tuin (f/if„) avcmus-2 aliqnid vidcM-e, audire, add.scere-fs. Cic. Off 1, 4, 13. 
 - hi A-e'ilaus fuir c/w'dus alt-ro prd^. Nep. Alt. H- 17. Ancus re-navit annos 
 quatuor Jl vii:inti,cuilibel«* superir.nim (/aw./-) re-um belli pa.i8qm- et artib>i^e\ glond 
 var Liv 1 :i5.- is. Diqnum hoide virnm Musa vetut mori. lior. Od. 4 .. 28.— 
 1'» Nihil'est laudabilius ( praUe worthy), nihil ma-no et pneclilro Piro^/*7«««*- c ementiS. 
 ri'e'otr 1 25 .S8— 21. »Aar/i rir/^T/f^, milites Komilui, estOte. Liv 7, 3().— 21. tnnius 
 f^ximajormtn quim Plautus et N^evius. Cic. Tusc. 1, 3.- 22. A Datame bcisinas, 
 maxS^mtn «bus. desclvif^». Nep. 14, 7.- 2:5. Hoc prneho lactom^t/r^/.a<M omnium 
 conscnsu'-«« Icgiltos ad Cajsarem mifGr unt. Ca-s. 15. O. 2, as. ^ 
 
 » The same idea mu-t be ^ipplied with the ablative of quality (Kern. 27>. The sup- 
 plying of .uch intermediate ideas is sweepin-lv condemned by manv. These utterly mis- 
 ?a£ tWsp-rit of the lan-ua-e, which frequently makes objects and attributes dependent 
 on ideas tha are felt mo7e than expressed. Such objects and attril.utes cannot be cor- 
 vee ly understood without nnd.mr olit the governino; idea.- '^roya power.- \"o»n it>v 
 4 to form - » scout.- « instead of a predicate-accusative (viaum), as seen b>' him. as 
 if ho Ad seen it '— ' love — « once.— » desert.- i« cum aliquo in grattmn redlre.xo be 
 rLoncUed to one.-^Mn^^ (translate by adjectives).- n not becoming.- » com- 
 
 mand - "*co - »* from here. - '« hard.- ^^ daily.- i« se conferre, to betake one s se f. 
 "o re-ort to.-'»» to border on.- ^o to pay.- «i conspicuous.-^'^ av?re, to be eager.- '> to 
 e/rn in addition.- ^4 any.- =» dtsci6cere, to fall ofi.- ^« consent. 
 
 L. 
 
 CONSTKUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 121 
 
 § ^O^. The iXFiNiTiYE, in classical prose, is not used as an 
 object of adjectives, except sometimes witli past participles de- 
 rived from verbs which take an object-infinitive, as pardtus ve- 
 nire., ready to come ; assiietus scribere, accustomed to writing. 
 
 linn no Diqnm very rarely is construed with an object-inflnitive in Livy (p. 557, 
 Ob^ 3) alsoinVitruv. (forinst.9. pnef.), but never in Cic, Cies., Sail.— Poets and writers 
 of liic silver a<^e quite olten construe adj^*ctives, both attributive and predicative, with 
 an infinitive as Coidenina tit>diini prorbiehE re/inerfi{\\'\h'i.) : diqnux eligl (PMn. Pan.) ; 
 lHrVn>< 7v7^/V(Tac.) : apta regi (Ov.); capidus attingere (Prop.) : calUd'cs condere (Ilor.). 
 In cli^sicul lan-niage, adjectives requiring an actios as completing object, are am- 
 strued cither wiTh verbal nouns (is re.< coqnitione dlqnce, subjects worth knowing. Cic. 
 Oir. 1,«3), or Willi clauses (p. 557, 3), or with gerunds (p. 157, foil.), or with supines 
 
 Hem 120 That prcducate-ndjectives are most frequently construed with a surject- 
 INFIMTIVK has been repeatedlv mentioned. Such intinitives must not be mistaken tor 
 obiect-infinitives (lepciulent on the adjective, an error into which beginners are o [ten cd 
 bv ihe positi<m of the words, as : Qndnnn qmida im-yis sif, dijinle est existmmre. ihc 
 CTcatnesa of whose mind, (literally, icho^e wind how great it is), [ix] is often difficult to 
 estimate. Cic. Tusc. 1, 24. Constructions of this kind are generally made personal m 
 Eniilish, making the subjecT-intinitive the object-inflnitive of the predicate-adjective. 
 ThFs is generally not allowed in Latin. (See Rem. 123. 124.) 
 
 § 5051. Many adjectives, especially those denoting pos- 
 sibility (easy and difficult), and those denoting an affection 
 or MORAL cONDiTiox of the mind (pleasant, bitter, terrible, dis- 
 graceful, honorable), may take tlie/ ^ECoy p^suPiyEl^s o^ect^as 
 res difficllls factu, a thing difficult to^bcdone (to do). See|"'352. 
 
 Rem. 121. The second supine (which, in its stem, is identical with the 
 passive participle) must he considered as the case of a noun of the fourth 
 declension, either the dative (with the ending w, see §221), or the ablative, 
 most of the nouns of this declension being past participles with abstract 
 meaning. In its reguhur (personal) construction, it has always a PASsn^ 
 meaning, althougli it is most frequently rendered by an Engiiiili.acrive 
 infinitive (§ 352)^ There are comparatively few verbs, all transitive, that 
 form second supines : dlciu, factu, aud'itu, cognitu, iiiceptu, inventu, 'ine- 
 mort'ttu, perpessu, scitu, toleratu, probatu, visu, aditu, transitu, tractdtu, 
 existinidtu, responsu, gustdtu, and perhaps a few more. The adjectives, in 
 classical prose construed with second supines, are especially facilis 
 and dijficilis. More rarely are found jucundus, injucundns, incredibdis, 
 molest us, suavis, dulcis, acerbus, turjiis, fadus, honestus, crudelis, nefarius, 
 terribilis, optimus, brevis, dignus. To these must l)e added the substantive 
 expressions (with adjective force), /as est, nefas est, opus est. 
 
 Rim. 122. The adjectives on which the supine depends, may br either 
 attributive or predicative, as Opus turpe inceptu, a work disgraceful to uiider- 
 take; opus inceptu turpe est, the work is disgraceful to undertake. Otten, 
 especially in the poets, it is used in elliptical sentences, the governing 
 adjective beimr used absolutely, as : Cui trls animas Feroma mater {Jior- 
 rendum dictu) dederat, to whom his mother Feronia (horrible to say) had 
 given three souls. Virg. ^n. 8, 565. .... 
 
 Rem. 123. The predicative construction of the second supine is either 
 PERSONAL or IMPERSONAL. The FORMER is employed to give a personal 
 form to sentences consisting of transitive subject-infinitives with imper- 
 
 ^ 
 
 \rr 
 
122 
 
 CONSTEUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 sonal preilicate-adjectivcs. This is effected by clianG:ing tlie active sub- 
 ject-infinitive into a second supine (witli passive force), and making tiie 
 transitive object of tlic former the personal subject of the pre(Ucate- 
 adjective. The adjective becomes thus a pehsonal predicate, and must 
 I agree with its subject-noun, according to the general rules: 
 
 Impersonal constuuction. Ilunc laborem facere difficile est, it is difficult to do 
 
 tliis work. . ,, , . .... ,^ ^ , 
 
 Pkksonal construction. Ilio labor factu dtfficibs est, this work is difficult to be 
 
 done (to do). 
 
 ^ The personal subject of the sentence is always at the same time the 
 Logical subject of ihe supine. The use of a passive infinitive in place of 
 a supine is not admissible. "(See Rem. 120.) 
 
 /?em. 124. The iMrEU:*oNAL construction of the supine, in classical prose, takes place 
 1) if an inteuuo(;ative clatse is us^cd a-* subject of tiie sentence, in which ease the 
 second t»n()ine (mostly a verb of savins) may always be replaced by an active intinitive, 
 as: Ditficliedictnesf.'quanfoojMrrt' coiicliut /loiniiies cotnidis affabilitcmine t'trmoni.o, it is 
 dithcuit to sa\ how much eomilv and allabiiity of speech reconciles men. Cic. Off. 2, 14, 
 (instead of Dieere, quanto—conrllvf, difficile e^t).—Quaq>/.is(/ue in te fide fit et coiunfafe, 
 difficile dicta est de niiirfulis, it is difficult to sav in re<?ard to each, taken sin>dy, of what 
 faitli and sentiment he i< toward you. t'ic. Fam. 1, 7, 2, (inst. of I/icere de ttinguliii, qua 
 fide, etc., (i>n<(/ne sit. difficile est). ''I'lius in the sentence, quoted Kmi. 120. the active \n- 
 tinhWc existim(l?'e ini^ht be clianced into a second supine.-- 2) If the sui)ine (especially 
 dictu) depends on the e.xi)ressiohs /o^- est, nefas €st,op>/s eft. infinitive clauses mav be 
 used as their subjects, as nefcui ^st dicfu, 7ni'-era}nfuisi>e talem senertuft^n, it is criminal 
 to S(aj that such an old aire was iiiiluippy. Cic. Sen. 5.-3) Sometimes tlie supine is used 
 rcdiindantlv, merely to streuL'then the idea of tlie iroveniini: adjective. In such a case 
 the pri'diuite-adjective mav be used impersonally with an intinitive as subject, and the 
 supine -tliay liave active force, as: (Oi-gefonx) jfeffacite jactu esse dlls probnt ronCda per- 
 Hcere. O. proved to'them that to accomplish the undertakinu' was very easy (todo). ( les. 
 B. G. 1.3.— 4) Later writers sometimes use tlie second supine with impersonal predicates 
 without any of tlie.<e restrictions, einplov'n»^ impersonal verbs or predicate-nouns in 
 place of the rcj,Milar nredicate-atljeclives, as : IhidU dictu. Tac. At,'r. 32, 3.— Quod dictu 
 scelus eat. Prud. Apoth. b22.>) 
 
 1. Quid est XnxnjucKndum rognihi atquer/'/<^/'/quam papientibuspententiiscravibus- 
 que verbis ornata oratio? Cic." Or. 1. 8.— 2. Dubitant (homines) Iionestumne factu sit 
 an furpe id quod in deliberationem eadit2. Cic. Off. 1, 3, 9.— 3. O multa dictu graria, 
 perpess'i^ asn-ra .' Cic.Tusc. 3.3..').— 4. Postridie homines mane conveniunt (o.<>><?///W<') : 
 qutprunt quid optimum factu sit? Cic. Verr. 2. 1, 27.— 5. C\\\\\>^facde scifu est quam 
 fiierim miser. Ter. Hec.'3, 1. 15.— <>. Hi postquam in una maMiia convenOre* inr»<?f/J- 
 bile dictu est quam facile coaluerint». Sail Ca . ti. 2.— 7. Procedit in tuniiilum« facil- 
 U)iut)ii risH insidi;intil)us7._ 8. Ilumanus animus cum alio nuHo nisi» cum ipso Deo, 
 si hoc est fas dictu. comparjlii potest. Cic. Sen. 5.— !). Si non lonirius quam quod» 
 scitu opus est in narrnndo»» procedetur. Cic. Inv. 1,20.— 10. Pnn<ipes Hritannue ojiti- 
 t/ium /^V/cf'^esseduxCnint. frumento commeatnque nostros prohibGn-. Ctes. B. G. 4. :W. 
 — 11.' Jiidicium horum houwnnm diffici/e factu e>i[ non probare. Cic. Off. 1, 21,71.— 
 12. Omnia lia'C. risu quam dictu fadi'i'ra. terrOrem renovHruiit. Liv. 21.32.— 13. O rem 
 quuni aiKHtu c}'ud^le//i turn ri-^u iffanatn ! Cic. Plane. 41, JK».— 14. Amnem" trar\.--i'ii 
 diffi'ilem pro nimiimento hal)uil. lliv. 41,8.— 15. Crebra magis quam diqua dictu, proB- 
 lia fecit. Liv. 35, 1. 
 
 J Mad\vkt Ijies to prove that Cicero thuf uses the second supine with the force of an 
 actiVr-trlniitive. without restricting it Ut the ca^es mentione I under No. 1 and No. 2. re- 
 feirinjr to tlie lollowiuLC passage : Ad liax (^ocieldttfi) tion estfarile imenfu oui descendaid, 
 it is not easy to llnd persons who would descend to such society. Cic Ltt'i. 17. But this 
 readinjr, which is not sum)orted by irood n anus ripts, must be unqueBtional)ly rejected. 
 The proper ieadin<r is. Son est f'icile inventus qui dtscendat. there is not easily any one 
 found Mho should descend. Kuh s, especially if containintr false ;:i'ainmar. should not 
 be founded on solitary passajjes of (to siiy the least) doubtful readiufr.— " The subjects 
 of their deliberation.'*. — ' ptrpeti. to suffer. — * to flock together. — • coalescere, to bc- 
 oome one body. — « a hill.— ' insididri, to be iu ambush. — * but.— » quod, ap far 
 as,— *<* in the narrative.— ^^ Btream. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 123 
 
 EXEHCISES, 
 
 1. Babylon Avas sixty miles in circumference', and was surrounded 
 with wails two hundred feet hiirh and rifty wide. — 2. Lay out'^ three 
 plots", each si.vty feet loni^ and ten feet wide. — 3. The leaves* of this 
 tree are about three digits lontr, and one digit and two-thirds {parts of ihe 
 Ah) wide. — 4. Let the boards* be ten feet long, twelve digits and a half 
 wide, and one and a half thick. — 5. The depth of the river was about 
 nine feet. — G. Most renowned arc the plane-trees^ in the walk' of the 
 Academy" at Athens, which are twenty-three feet high from the root to 
 the lowest" branches^". — 7. This kind of pepper" is a small shrub" no more 
 than a cubit and a half in height. — 8. Turn" the furrows** about three 
 hands deeji. — 9. The thickness of the shelT* is less than one-sixth [of a 
 digit], — 10. The garden behind my house measures {esf^e) four thousand 
 square feet. — ILTlie surface'® of the lake contains {ease) about two mill- 
 ions of square feet. — 12. The roots of this herb enter the earth less than 
 a cubit in depth. — 13. The length of the tongue of the purple fish" is 
 one and a half digits (by the adjective). — 14, The thickness of the bricks'' 
 of the sidewalks''' shtiil be not less than one third [of a foot] {by the frac- 
 tions of the An). — lo. Thou hast made these tubes"" too thick ; they ought 
 to be thinner by at least"-' one fourth. — IG. Terentia Cicero^ died one 
 hundred and three years old. — 17. Nearest to the Gauls live {esse) the 
 Belgians, who border" on the sea. — 18. Of all stars is Mercury (g 112) 
 nearest to the sun. — 19. I believe that the battle between Caesar and 
 Ariovistus took place {es»e) ten miles nearer to the Rhine than it is generally 
 thought-*.— 20. To have^* respect for the laws is the mark of a good 
 citizen. — 21. This man, believe me, was always most attached to thee. — 
 22. [Those that are] eager for glory are very often neglectful of their 
 (familiesj. — 23. He who has nocontrol over his anger ought not to teach 
 youth.— 24. jNIan, because he has {shares inj^ reason, sees [into] the causes 
 and development'-^ of things. — 2o. When Metellus came to the army, he 
 found''''' that the soldiers wt-re almost iinticcustomed to discipline. — 2G. This 
 will be of the greatest assistance-"^ not only lo [those that are] unacquainted^** 
 with Greek literature, but also to the learned. — 27. Caesar was far more 
 l)opular'' with his soldiers than Pompey.— 28. I cannot find any instru- 
 ment fit^*^ lor this work.— 29. 1 shall particularly^*^ begin'* with thesubject^^ 
 which will be most adapted'^ to thy age and my authority. — 30. This was 
 peculiar to the Roman f^enate and*peoi)le that {ut) they never made peace 
 when they had sutlered" a defeat from the enemy.— 31. The examination" 
 of truth^" belongs*' especially** to man. — 32. This question, indeed, is 
 common to all philosophers.— 33. Themistocles was most similar in 
 character*' to Lysander.— 34. The forest nexi*^ to my estate is full of the 
 finest fir-trees**.— 35. Publius IScipio, the son of the elder** Africanus, 
 
 » Circuitus, 4 decl.— 2 demetlii.— 'area.— * folium.— ^ assie, rn.— «platanus.— ' am- 
 bularto.— » Acadeinia.— » inuis.— i» ramus.— " piper, 3 decl— " fruiex.— »> con- 
 vertere.— '♦sulcus.— i* testQdo.— »« area.— ^^ purpura.— i» later. 3 decl.— »» am- 
 bulaiio lateralis (modern Latin).— 20 tubulus.— 21 /,0,' /^.v^iAan.- 2» transl. Terentia 
 of Cicero.— 23 to border ont^omeihing, aitin{,'ere aliquid.— 24 existimare.— 2* esse.— 
 =• iOf^hare. part icipem esse.— 27 pro«i;re8sus (plor.).— 2» cognoscere.— 2» adjuinentura 
 (abstract datice).— '^'^ rudis.— 'i acceptus, grains.- 3* idoneus.— 33 § 405.— »* ordlri.— 
 
 '* (hesutjtct, id.— 3« apt us 
 
 37 
 
 — *<* propnuiu esse. 
 <* major. 
 
 accipere. — 3b inquisilio atque iuyestigaiio 
 
 .3» 
 
 veruDi. 
 
 *i § 405, li. 47.— " iuaoles,- *3 finitimus.— •»* abies.-- 
 
124 
 
 FORMATION OP VEEBAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 survived all his sons.— 36. Since the bnildin.i:: of the city', the Romans 
 had been contented with tlie use of [that] water [plur.) which tliey drew* 
 either from the Tiber, or from weils^ or from sprintrs*. — 37. Curlius 
 vohmtarily* suffered" death from love of his country.— 38. Many com- 
 mit crimes from eairerness for' wealtli.— 39. Tlie citizens, when tliey 
 saw that the enemy'had scaled** the walls, surrendered {themselves) from 
 fear of harsli trejitment",— 40. Tlie ancient Romans considered him 
 most worthy of praise who lived'" not for liimself, but for [his] country,— 
 41. Cajsar, reiving on the bravery and zeal of his [soldiers], did not hesi- 
 tate to ben:in" the battle. — 42. All the n(iiz:hborini^ states were filled 
 with fusjitTve*^ slaves. — 43. It is reported that Ara!)ia was rich in frank- 
 incense"^ and sweet-scentin»;'' herbs.— 44. Who can say that he is sii- 
 ])erior'* or even a malch'^ lor this man in eloquence V— 4.'5. There are those 
 who wish to be free and loose" from all restraint'^ of the laws.— 46. My 
 oldest brother is six feet and three diijits and two-thirds in luai^ht.— 
 47. AVho was youni^er, Cicero or Caesar V— 48. It makes little ditierence 
 whether thou art voumj^er or older than the others {sinf/.), as loni; as"* you 
 enjoy better health [than they].— [T/ie foUowinr/ sentences are to be ren- 
 clered hij using Hecond supines.] 49. Xothinij: is more dithcult to ascertain^" 
 than the thoui^hts-* and sentiments'" of men.— oO. I think that the soni^ 
 of {hit niirhtinirale-^ is more pleasant to hear than that of any other bird. — 
 51. It is e*Iisy to know from w hat motives** this man has refused to serve" 
 under that general.— 53. It is very difhcult to WW"^ the real subject of the 
 discussion'-'.— 53. What is sinful"* to say cannot be righteous"" to do. 
 
 CHAPTER FOURTH. 
 
 THE VERBAL ADJECTIVES AND THE PERIPHRASTIC 
 
 COXJUGATIOX. 
 
 I. FORMATION OF THE VERBAL ADJECTIVES 
 § S04L» Verbal Adjectives in a wider sense are all ad- 
 jectives derived from Verbs ; but in a narrowersense only those 
 are called Verbal Adjectives which belong to the regular forms 
 of the verb, and which by certain inflectional endings may 
 generally be derived from any given verb. These are the ver- 
 bal adjectives in das and ilrits, to which must be add(id the 
 PARTICIPLES of tlie PRESENT and PERFECT wlieu tlicy are treated 
 as adjectives. 
 
 1 Traiiel. Since the l)iiilt (coiiderc) city.— ^ hanrlre.— » pnteus.— •• fons.— » ultro.— 
 " obire — ' aviditas (wi/h gen.).— * ascendere.— » harsh treatment, Paevitine.— 
 10 Bubjimct. iinpeif.— i» comtnittore.— " Jugitlvui*.— " tii-, 3decl.— i« oduratus.— 
 16 romp, of pnestans.— »* par— i' soiatus.— »« vinciilnm (plur.).—^^ as lori<,' as. durn. 
 —30 c()"iro>cere.— 2» cogitatio.— '^"^ bciiuntia.- ^s lusciuia.- 24 translate : induced by 
 what causae this man, olr..— " militiln;.— 2« diccie.— 27 translate by an indirect ques- 
 tion : ' what was that on which it was dis-puted.'— "^ nefas.— 2» fas. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 125 
 
 Rem 12."). All adjectives derived from verbs are, by particular terminations, distin- 
 iniishe;! from such a Ijective-* as arc deriv -d fro u otiier parrs ot speec'i. These are the 
 ttTminiti')n-» 'idx-i. ax, '/'/«, bml-i^. anl c'lndu^, which are ireiierUly attached to the st^-m 
 of the piia-iKKT syst m (tho-ie witli a vowel-initial absorbin-^ the vowel-characterisiics 
 or I lisstvj u), an iVi--, bi'i<, T'^uk au I loiu^. which j^jnerally are artachci to the stem of the 
 PKiiPKCT or sui'isB. Each of these ter.niiiatio. IS is attached to the stems of a limited 
 ni-mber of verbs, rhu- r'acere tak'js only the termination Kit {fidlU) ; tiniere only ihe 
 termination vl'is (timidus) : novis-^e only the termination b'llis (nobUis) ; /erre. the ter- 
 minal ions ili'i an'i ar. {fertU'is and ferax) ; nasci, only the termination Ivm (nalivas). 
 The terminaLioii bundus miy he atra lied to m.>st verb-stems belonging to the first con- 
 ju-'ation. bur only 'o a very few of tlie other conju'jrations {prj'abundas, /nortbundUfi), ana 
 muny verbs do not admit any of these particular terminati(m>*. But the verbal adjectives 
 properly so called (in dxs and urus), aside from a few ^pecial exceptions, may be gener- 
 ally formed from auy^'iven verb, both active and deponent. 
 
 Rem. 120. The verbal adjective in i/r?^« (also called the active parti- 
 ciple OF TUE futuiik'), is formed from the supine-stem, and in the de- 
 ponents from the perfect-stem (see P. I., p. 3G1 foil). 
 
 amflre 
 lege re 
 hortilri 
 
 amitflrtis; 
 lectflrus ; 
 bortattlrus; 
 
 moiiSre 
 aiidlre 
 
 monitflrus ; 
 atulitflrus ; 
 eirresstlrus. 
 
 egredi 
 
 Hence no verb l:jckin2: the supine {posse, velle, malle, nolle, meminisse, no- 
 risse), or the whole perfect system (as most of the neuter verbs of the second 
 CO iij ligation, as cdbere, etc.) can tbrm a verbal adjective in Urus. 
 
 Jiem. 127. Several verbs form supines (perf. participles), but no verbal adjectives in 
 tlrus in classical prose, as manv verbs in uere (sup. iltnni), vanuere. suert, inauere, 
 iiiifjiiere (imbutaruii is quoted Dy NoN.), and several verbs of thehrst conjugation with 
 consonant stems in tiie perfeer sj>tem (P. I.. p.3<U, 0). as cubare tonare. velare Ol 
 domilre,ani\ Uivare. no -adjectives in «/v/.y occur in classical prose ^^omituru^,\\v^.^.4. 
 10->; lacafurus and lotdrxs, poeiiral or postdassicai). The p<)ets a.:d po>^taa^Hcal 
 writers form adjectives in uru.^ of some ot these classes of verbs, and ol some otuer 
 verbs, bv adding tilras, stlru.'i, or ituft.-^ I » tue pkesknt stem, a • 
 
 Infinitive Present. 
 
 agnoscere 
 
 argue re 
 
 abnuere 
 
 discere 
 
 lucre 
 
 nusci 
 
 orlri 
 
 par ere 
 
 pintere 
 
 ruei'C 
 
 peciire 
 
 tonare 
 
 Ptvf. ParticipU. 
 
 agnitns 
 ai-gfltus 
 
 nattis 
 
 onus 
 
 l)arlus 
 
 piiisus, pistns. pin- 
 
 sii us i^all ijostclass.). 
 rut us 
 
 PcCIUS 
 
 Verbal Adjective. 
 agiiotflrus {quoted by Pri'ician). 
 armiiiflius (quoted by Ptiscian). 
 abiinirurus (quoted by Pri<cian). 
 disci iQriis (quoted by PHsciau). 
 luitflrus (Vlu'idian). 
 nascitQrus (po-^tdanslcal). 
 orirflrus (Horace). 
 l)ariiflrus (Su/pic. ad Cic.) 
 pinsQrus (alleged by Diouiedes), 
 
 rui turns {poetical). 
 secatQrus (Columella). 
 t^onatarus {Horace). 
 
 sonitus 
 In some verbs this method of formation has classical authority, as /;v/i^Cper feet stern 
 fruQ sue P. I., p. '6'^)-fruitHru.'i (Cic. Tusc. 3, 17i ; juvaturus ^Sall. Jug. 4< ; but adjutd- 
 iuf Liv M Ti)-!nfncaturu,<,C\c. Atr. 1-2, 18, 1 ), pruestatUrus (the supme being prcestUum, 
 botii in Cic. and hiv. ). Ol tnori, vMnturus (from the present stem. iMiw^v nwrtuurus) is 
 nvqueni in (dassic.tl prose (Liv. -21. 12; 24, 3 : 25,6; Cic. Div. 2, 25; 2,4.; iat.0,12), 
 alrhouiih the le-Kicons and KiuNKK assign wtori<Mr«.v 10 the poets. 
 
 Utvi. 12s. The verb esse, with its compounds, forms the verbal adjective 
 from its perfect fui {fiiiiiriis, def/dilrus, profntarus, etc.). For the iufini- 
 tire fore and its' derived foruis, see p. loO, A*. 140^ 
 
 1 Neither me luiii" nor form of the adjective in tlrus warrant the name future PARrr- 
 riPLK Its ineanin- (being ' intention' or ' destinv') implies moi;e than is contained m 
 the idea of the future tensin and its giMmmat.cal foum belongs to a system entin-ly 
 fo'vi M u he FUTUKE. It is true that si..ce the Aug:ista.i age some of tlie functions of 
 a narli^ciple have been as-igued to it. but even this was uulcnown to the old lan-ua^e 
 ami caiinot justify the appelfation ' paniclple,' since every descriptive adjective may, m 
 certain circumstances, perform the functions of a participle. 
 
126 
 
 THE VERBAL ADJECTIVES AS PREDICATES. 
 
 Bern. 1*30. Tho verbal adjoctivo in dnn (often called the passive parti- 
 ciple of the future*) is formed trom tlie stem of the present participle, 
 both active and deponent, by changing tlie genitive ending tin into dus, as : 
 
 amantis— amandua; hnrtantis— hortandns; monenti-i— monondns; 
 
 Iciri'ntis — lejrendus; cupi •nris— cupieiidus ; aiidioiitis— Hiidieudua ; 
 
 moricaiia— iiioriendiis ; lucutis — tueiidu:* ; t* untis — eundus. 
 
 Those verbs which form no present ]iarticiples, as esae^ posse, nolle, 
 malle, quire, 7iequire,Jieri\ the perfect verbs meminisse, etc., most imper- 
 sonal verbs, and the verb reri, to calculate, do not form a verbal adjec- 
 tive in das ; nor does velle, although it forms a present i)articiple. 
 
 Jiem. 180. Tho oriirinal Ptom-ondln'j?/w)'of tlie present participle in the third and fonrth 
 conjugation!* (§ 324, 1{. 2) has bern pre-^ervod in Krveral verbiil adjectives in du.<, t-specially 
 in f)ofiun/iu>t (whiih has equal authority w'nh jiofiend'is), and a number of other verbi* of 
 which the verbal adjectives are occasionally tonned in loid'ts, as dicundns. faciundus, 
 geruf}(l'(s. fenindufi. repetundnii. In certain solemn, particularly le^al, phrases, the 
 forms in u'nd'finn' th>'U<ual ones, as decfmriri Ufjibn^f^rnitdis; actio ))ecunuT re pet un dee. 
 The verbal adjective m'^//^/^/.-'. spruni,'. descended, (construt'd with the ablative case or 
 with ab or (?.r) always occurs in this form, but it has a force difTerent from the other ver- 
 bal adjectives in diis, havin;; assumed the meuninij of the participle ortu9. 
 
 IL THE VERBAL ADJECTIVES AS PREDICATES. 
 
 (PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION.) 
 
 A. The Periimirastic Conjugation ix Gexer.\x. 
 
 § »i ih». The verbal ailjectives are used either attributively. 
 
 or PREDicATiVELY \\\ conncction with tho copula esse (or vlderi). 
 
 In either case they ass;ume peculiar forms and meanings which, 
 
 in many respects, differ from tliose of ordinary adjectives and 
 
 participles. The system of their inflection in connection with 
 
 the copula is called ' periphrastic conjugation.' 
 
 Jtem. 131. The present ])articiples occiu* as predicate-adjectives only if 
 they have in every respect the meanini^ and force of ordinary adjectives 
 (>5 40G, R. 97), as obedieiitem esse, to be obedient ; nppetenfem esse, to be 
 easier; sapieiiteni esse^ to be wise. They can nevku be used in the 
 sense of the Eiii^lish progressive form with the ])resent particijile and ' to 
 be' (^ 333). But the perfect pauticiple, if used predicatively as a ver- 
 bal adjective, has a pecnliir relation to the similar forms of the com- 
 pound tenses of the ))assive voice, which rcijuire a number of special 
 rules about its perii)hrastic conjui^ation. Hence there arc; to be distin- 
 ijuished : 1) the periphrastic conjuij:ation of the peuff:ct participle 
 (periphrastic participli:); 2) the perii)hrastic conjui^ation of the adjec- 
 tive in w/'w« (periphrastic future); 3) the periphrastic conjugatiou of 
 the ailjective in das (i'eriphrastic gerund and gerundive). 
 
 * The verbal adj.-ctive in d'l» hss no «.'reater chiim to the name 'passive participle of 
 tht* future.' than tlie aljcctivi- in Hras to that or "active partic'ple of the future,'' Only 
 .n the r.ire-t ca>*es they are to e icli otiier iu the relation of active and pa^^sive. and we 
 can NKVER chan<»e ihc active construction of the on<! into a oassive construction of the 
 other, ar* i-* always the case with the other tenses and inof)ds of verbs. — '^ Fieri forms 
 neither a present participle nor a verbal adjective in dna ; but the verbal adjective be- 
 lon^inj; to it, in meaning, is formed from/ttc«rf (faciendus). 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC PARTICIPLE. 
 
 127 
 
 Present 
 
 iMl'EKF. " 
 
 Perfect " 
 
 Pllteuf. " 
 
 FUTUKE " 
 
 FlTTUUE PeRF " 
 
 <l. 
 
 armatus essera. 
 armatus fucrim. 
 annatus fuissera. 
 
 7>. The Periphrastic Participle. 
 § 500. The periphrastic participle expresses a state 
 whicli is conceived to be produced by some previous act iden- 
 tical with the idea of the verb, as Oppidum munition est, the 
 town is fortified (/. e., in a state of fortification, from the pre- 
 vious act of fortifying it), but opjndum mumtur, the town is 
 I'ortified (is being fortified). Vires exhaustce sunt, the strength 
 is exhausted (in a state of exhaustion, from previous acts of ex- 
 haustion) ; but vires exhauriuyitur, the strength is being ex- 
 liausted (the acts producing the exhaustion taking place at the 
 
 time spoken of). 
 
 Bern. 132. The conjugation of the periphrastic participle is the same as 
 that of a predicate-adjective with the copula (^ G4. § 385. ^ 339,1) : 
 
 iND. Armiltuf? sum. Jam armed (hare arms) ; Subj. armStus sim. 
 " armatus eram, / was armed {had arm.<<) ; 
 _, , . S I u-a>i {have been) arrmd \ 
 armiltusfui, -] ^^ad arnu) ; f 
 
 " armatus fueram. / had been armed ; 
 
 ,, , \ I t^hall be armed {shall have I n 
 
 armatus ero, -j ^^^^. \ 
 
 " armatus fuero/ I shall have been armM : " 
 
 Present Infinitivk, armaium esse, to be armed ; 
 Peufkct Infinitivk, armuium fuisse, to have been armed. 
 
 Bern. 133. The form of the periphrastic present is the same as that of 
 the ordinary perfect passive, hut hoth are different in meaning, and 
 anndtus sum, if a perii)hrastic present, means 'lam anned,' but, if it is an 
 ordinary ]ierfect ]iassive, it denotes ' I icas {have been) armed.' The con- 
 lU'Ction'of the text alone can show in what sense the perfect participle 
 with sum must be taken. Thus the l)eirinnin,ii^ of Caesar's Gallic war, 
 ' (itdlui est omnis dirlsd in partes trl'i,' (all Gaul w divided into three parts) 
 contains a periphrastic present, and not an ordinary perfect passive. But 
 lliB ni'nWucL',' Post puf/ nam prmta diclsa est' (after the battle the booty was 
 divided) contains an ordinary perfect passive. 
 
 rST" The student's attention should be directed to both the different rendering of 
 the LATIN 'armatus *v/m,' and to tlic different rendering of the English passive into 
 Latin There are cerrain verbs in EuLrlish with whose passives we always connect the 
 meanin" of a state, as ' the work i< finished,'' ' the street is paved,' ' they are united. 
 Ill rendering such passives into Latin, the periphrastic present must be used, and not 
 the ordinary present of the pas>^ive voice : opus finlfum est, via strata est,€orguncU 
 sunt {no{ opus finVur, via stemitur, conjunguntur, which wmM mean 'the >v^>!K is 
 being hnished. the street is being paved, they are being muted [are uniting] ). On the 
 other liand, those English passives hy which the action itself is represented as tak- 
 ing place at the time spoken of, are to be expressed only by the ordinary passive, 
 ag"' lie is called king,' rex appelldtur (not appelldtus est). 
 
 Bem. 134. The imperfect of the periphrastic conj nidation of the parti- 
 ciple has the form of the ordinary pluperfect passive, and armatus eram 
 may mean ' I was armed' or ' I had been armed.' The same rules which 
 have been /?iven tor the present apply also to this form, only that they 
 refer to a time past : Illo tempore oppidum munitum erat, at tlif.t time the 
 town was fortified {muniebCdur, would mean ' was being fortified'). 
 
128 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Rem. \?)T). The tetifect (find the remainder of the tenses, except the first 
 future) of the periphrastic conjup:ation has a form of its own, not occur- 
 ring in the ordinary paradigm, (armdtus fni, * I ij^an armed,' or * I have 
 been armed'). Jani iemplum bis post Nuttkf regnum clanmm fuit, the tem- 
 ple of Janus teas twice ch)sed after Numa's reign. Liv. 1, 19. — Amor iUe 
 in me tuuH quo semper affeetus fta'sti, that love of thine towards me by 
 whicii tliou /uist always been aft'ectud. 
 
 tW In the use of the peiupijuastic PEnFRCT there are two relatione to be noticed : 
 1) its relation to the ordinary perfect passive; 2) its jvlatioii to the periplira-^tic im- 
 perfect. As to tlu; former jxtiut, the (iifterence is the same as that of the pi-riphrasiic 
 })res<'nt from the ordinary present passive, tlie periphrastic perfect iiidieatini; a statk 
 existinj^ at t*ome former time, wliile the ordinary perfect passive denotes tlie act as 
 sL'cii. *Jjuii temphim his clausum e.H' (clausum eat taken as pekfkct) would simply 
 refer to the two acts of closin;;, after which the temple might have remained in a 
 closed state, or not. 
 
 To the second point the peneral rules on the distinction of the imperfect and perfect 
 t«nsos must be applied (see p. .'{02, .SOo). So far as these rules apply to the periphras- 
 tic conj nidation, the student will notice here that the imi'ekpect is used: 
 
 1. If the state de.^rrihed is represented as a uabit, as ' Athenienses litteris et artibus 
 dediti erant {uol/uirunt). (he Athenians were devoted to littrature and arts. 
 
 2. If the state described is repre-ented to have continued whev anotiieii kvent 
 TOOK PLACE, as ' (CcB^arlt adcentu) ripa eral acQtis sudihus pnefixis mtinlta'. At 
 Ciesar's arrival the shore was fortilied by point^id posts fastened in front of it. Cajs. 
 B. G. 5, 18. 
 
 The PEHf ECT, Avithout referrinc: to any other event, simply represents the state to 
 have existed diirinir some pi-riod before the time of the speakei:, i. <?., before the lime 
 at which the sentence was written or uttered. 
 
 l^em. 13G. The ]^luperfcct of the periplirasfic participle rejiresents tlie 
 action as a state wliich had tassed bekokr anollier event happened : 
 Eos qui in opere occupdti fuerant qucerere instituit, he began to examine 
 those who had been occupied in the work. 
 
 Z^W In this sentence the periphrastic phiperfect occvp'tfiftieranf expreseea a state 
 which formally had existed, biU did no lontrer exist when another event (the exaniin- 
 in;j^) took i)]ace. The ordinary phiperfect occi/pufi eni/if would l)e improp> r here, l)e- 
 cause it mii^'lit l)e taken for a pi-riphristic imi'Ekfkct. which would imply that the 
 workmen were still emi)loyed in tiie work when the examitdni: to(,ik place. To avoid 
 such ambitjuities the periphrastic pluperfect is not rarely use<l. when not a state, but a 
 momentary action Is refeired to, as : * Arx CiotOnis, situ taiitum natiirilli quond.un 
 ninnlta. postea et muro cincta est, qua ah Dionysio per (lolwrnfuera' capta, thi; Crotoii 
 Castle, formerly Ibrtitied only by its natural site, was afterwards enclosed with a wall 
 where it had been cai)turcd l)y Dionysius. Liv. 24, 3. Thus Liv. 29, G and often. 
 
 Be7n. 137. The two futures of the periphrastic conjugation of the 
 participle, which are of very rare occurrence, and of wliicli tlie future- 
 present has the same form as the ordinar}' future-perfect, are used of 
 future STATES, the futuke-peufect denoting a state on which another 
 future state is made dependent, as Quibns rebus clontus iua instnictufuerit, 
 domus erit &rndta men, my house will be provided with the same things 
 Avith which thy house will have been furnished. 
 
 ZW^ The future-perfect of the periphrastic conjuiration is hardly ever found with- 
 out another sentence in which a future-present iscontained. But future-presents of 
 the periphrastic conjugation are oftenerused alone. 
 
 Rem. 13S. The infinitives of the periphrastic conju^ration are subject to the rules of 
 predicate-adjectives, and the use of the tense, if thev are preilic.ite-inlinitives in inliiiitive 
 clauses, is determined by tlie rule in § 3'JO, as: Scribit P(<in{)t?jnm ciri-utnvalliltiim ft'i^e, he 
 writes that Pompey U locki'diip within the walls. Srrip^it Pompejuin circumvallilnim 
 esse, he wrote that Pomi)ey lOd't locked up. iScnpsit PompGjuni circuinvallillnm/ui.s««, 
 he wrote that Pompey hail been locked up. 
 
 t^~ The subjunctives of the periphrastic conjugation are regulated by the rules on 
 
 the consecution of tenses, the same as the ordinary verb. 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 129 
 
 1. Natio* est omnis GallOrum admodiim dedita- reliijionibns'. atqueob earn causara 
 qui sunt aft'ecti gravioriljus niorbis admin stns Uruidibus* utiintur. C:«s. B. G. 6. 16.— 
 2. Hestiie" all* coriis» /fc/tc sunt, aliie villis* v-^tltoe. Cic. Nar. D. 2, 47.— 3. Itatjns 
 confusa'' est oiaiio, ita itertarb'iia^ nt nihil sit primum. nihil secundum. Cic. Or. 3. 13. 
 — 4. Multaconsuetudine® co///»/j<;/i inter iv^» f-umus. Cic. Att. 1, 16.— .">. Porticus tota 
 I)atet, et columiue poTitiE siint^^. Cic. C^. Fr. 3, 1, 1.— 6. Oculi nimisargflti" quemadmo- 
 dijiiii- animo afffCti si/tnus loquuntur. Cic. Otl". 3, 5. — 7. Non corOna*^ eonsessus^* vester 
 cnicius" <'st, ut solCbai ; non nsitSta frequentiai* stii)5tii'' suinns. Cic. Mil. 1. 1. — 
 8. Ciesar animadvertit*^ collem qui al) hostibus tanehiiinr nudatum^^ (esse) hominibus. 
 Cses. B. G. 7. 44. — 9. Qiiamquam (.\ntonius) non adesi, tamen sic (so) animdti es-e'^^ 
 debCiis ut si2i adesset. Cic. Phil. 9, 5. — 9. Jubeseum niihi esse affix um"^^ tiimquain^» 
 niagistro. Cic. (j>ii. Fr. 3, 1, 6. — 10. VenetOrum^* naves ad hunc nioduni facta, anna- 
 tceqiie erant. Cses. B. G. 3, 13. — 11. Luce prima^* /Equi jam drcuynvallati^^ al) dictatOre 
 erant. Liv. 3, 28. — 12. Detestabilis^T est istOrum immanitas^s qui in esitio patriae 
 occiipati'^* et svnt ot fuerant. Cic. Oft". 1. 17. — 13. Te vero moueo nt omnem gloriam ad 
 qiiam a XiwvrUi^^^infammatus^^fuisti.omm cura atque industria consequJlr.'.32 Cic. 
 Fam. 1, 7. 9.— H. Ager qui neqne'villam^s habuU neque ex ulla parte /wi/ cultus, uunc 
 est cultissiinns cum Optima villa. Cic. Rose. Com. 12.— 15. Tibi autem multo notior^* 
 mens in te animus esset. si hoc tempore omui quo disjuncti^^ fui/nus, Koinae fuissemus. 
 Cic. Fam. 1.9 1.— 16. Constat^' Mithridatis copias illo tempore omnibus rebus or- 
 7/rt/i7.s-3^ atcjue insfructas^'^fuisse. Cic. Man. 8, 20,— 17. Anna, quae.^Xrt^» in parietibns 
 fuerant. hiimi*" inventa sunt. Cic. I)iv. 1. 34.— 18. Lycortas. quia Philopoenignis, auc- 
 tOris omnium qiue Leai'dvPimtnii*^ facta f(/e/ri»f. factiOnis** erat. ita respondit. Liv. .39, 
 S'\— 19. (^uocirea*' sapiens eOdem nioclo erit affec'us er<ra amicum quo^* in se i|)suni. 
 Cic. Fill. 1. 20.— 20 Non ista qiiidem erunt ineiiOra, sed certe co«(/7/a** jucundius. 
 Cic. Mur. 31.— 21. Quod \\h\ fiierit ]}erstidsum huic erit pet:£uusum, quod tibi fuerit 
 j/robdtu/n huic erit probatuin. Cic. iiosc. Com. 1. 
 
 C. The Pepjpiip.astic Future. 
 
 § t5iJ>7. The periphrastic future contains the combination 
 of two ideas, namely, 1) that of the verb, which is represented 
 as a future act (in the active voice), being expressed by the 
 verbal adjective in iirus ; and 2) that of the coxceptiox of 
 this act, whicli is represented as different in time from the for- 
 mer, being expressed by all the various forms of the copula 
 esse. The usual English e<]uivalents of the periphrastic future 
 are objective phrases Avith 'I am (was, etc.) going to,' 'I am 
 about to', *I am to', and soiuetimes the future tense or poten- 
 tial mood with 'would': Profectariis sum, I am going to de- 
 part, am about to depart, am to depart. 
 
 I?ern. 139. While in the ordinary future the verbal idea is represented af» a future one in 
 rej^ard to the speakeu's time, the periphrastic fuiure represents the verbal idea as future 
 
 » Nation.— 2 dedere. to «jive, to devote— » relii^ious rites,— * literal!]/, use the Druids 
 as ministers, i.e., make use of their ministry (;iirency, interposition).- » corium. skin, 
 lii^e.— « riUus. bristle. shaiTirv hair.— ' confundere. to confuse.— ^ perturbdre, to disturb, 
 to entan-.de.- » L'reat intinia(-v.— ^^» poire, to polish.— " bright.— 12 how, as.— i3 jhe 
 circle of the audience — '* platform.- »* to surround.— »« l)y the usual throns:.— »^ to 
 crowd.— '* perceived.— »» middre, to denude.— 20 animdre, to animate.— '^» as iL— 
 2*'' affirjere.tn fasten on.— 2s as if.— 2* tlie Veneti. a Gallic tribe.— 2» at daybreak.— 
 2« circnmral'drt. to encircle. toenclo!*e.— 2t abominable.— ^s brutality.— 29 occupdre, 
 to en aj;e.— 3" bovhood.— 3' injiarnmdre, to inflame.— ^- eonsequi. to reach, to pursue.— 
 33 a du^Uintr (in "the conntrv).— ^* nofns. known.— ^s disjungere. to separate.— >« it is 
 k,„,wn — 37 omdre, to provide.— 38 instruere, to furnish.— 3^ figere. to fix. to fasten.— 
 *<> on the {jround.— *» Norn. LaMdcemon, Greek 3 decl.— ••' faction.— " therefore.— 
 <4 ns.— <* cond'ire, to spice. 
 
130 
 
 PERirHRASTTC FUTURE. 
 
 Impekfect " 
 Pkkfect " 
 
 Pluperfect " 
 
 FiTT. Phes, " 
 FuT, Pkuf. " 
 
 ecriptflrus cspcm. 
 scriptflrus fucrira. 
 BcriptQrus fuisscm. 
 
 in rrcr^rd to the time of the srBJFCT, hnt scpnrates from it the coxckpttov of the act 
 refcrnn,!; it>* mm; to that of the speakkk. Tlie seiitruct', '(;ijus U Roinf' to depart ' 
 represents th.- net of depautino as ri'TruK in reirard to the Mihject Gains Init iri- 
 aicates at the isanie tinje that the Conception of the act is piu>knt in ie"-ard to the 
 SPEAiiEu's time. In the Pentence, 'Gajns ?<UM,'oiiii; to depart.' the concepTum of the 
 act».! dep.ir-in- is represented as a past one in re-ard to tlie speakeu's time Thua 
 in Latin m the sentence. 'Gajns i)rof.Tiarns est (erat).' the verbal adj.ctivc in ilms ex- 
 presses iliat ilie time of departing; is fuinre in regard to tiie si-bject Gains, and the co'i). 
 uia fy!t (erat) inrhcates that the concepiiou of the act is a present or a past one in VQ^r^vd 
 
 to the SPKAKEi:. ^ o " 
 
 The periphrastic fntnre is conjngated after the following,' scheme : 
 Present Ind. t=criptnrns gum. / mn going to u/ite, am Subj. scriptQrus sim 
 about to U'Hte, atn to u/ite. 
 
 scriptflrus eram, I teas going {was about, ' 
 etc.) to IV rite. 
 
 ecriptflrns fni, /was going, etc., to wiVe 
 {would have wHtten). 
 
 Bcriptflru!* Uxaxam, I had been going, etc., to ' 
 ivrife. 
 
 Bcriptnnifioro, Ishall be going, etc., to tvHte. 
 
 script Orns fnero, / shall have been about, 
 
 etc., to write. 
 
 Presknt Txfimtivk. Scriptflrnm esse, that J am (ira^) going to write (will wHte) 
 1 eufect Infinitive. Scriptflrum fuisse, that I ivould have written. 
 
 Jiem. 140. Thecopn'a<'.w. and tlie compounds of «.w^ as an independent verb in the 
 penphrasticfufure. take the form////'/7/m- xmn ^eranufui. etc.\ I am ^oiiiirto be, ain to be 
 etc (prnfufurffs ,vnn. I am -011.- to benefit). These forms of The copula are inostlv used 
 with |.re(licate-adj.-eiivesand nouns, but also with su.h completiinr predicates as may be 
 connected with thecpnla (§ 4r4foll.), and as independent verb-, in tlie meanin<-' to rii.t 
 J!.o.J t;'^iN <-tc i§4Ti». as Sain^,,i.^/utnn>.-<.sNm. I am prnin^' to be wise; sapiens fuf/f". 
 rti.^ pr«w, erc.j hocjnturumeM si, etc.. this will be the c:.se if. etc. Instead of the pri rnt 
 uAunUw^'Ju urume>^s<e, there is a collatenl {ormfore. (<z//or^.;>ni'/b7V, etc.), which, in con- 
 rection with predicate-a<ljectives and nouns, i< more usual than the re-ular form futu. 
 rum esse, as Sjyero eosconfenta^/ore, I hope thev will be .-atisfu'd. Instead of the iVnner- 
 lect subjunctive ////^7/v/.s-e«w/i. esses, etc.. th.-re are also the rolliteral fnrm^ forem fore<f 
 n>ret,forent (xu^ jortnms.forms), which Saliii-t. Livv. and later writers olteii use'ln the 
 mean-iii^ of e<sein. esses, etc., as quot miUia captaforent, how many thousands had been 
 capturea. Liv. 4.), 2. 
 
 Rem. 141. The present tense of the pcripliraslir futiiro roprosonts an 
 act, FUTURE to tlie SUBJECT, as conceived at a time present to the 
 SPEAKER. The piesent conception is repi-esented either 1) as an inten- 
 tion (ie>;ohitioii, expectation) hy the activity of the subject, or as an 
 anticipation of wh;it is to lie. This anticfpalion maybe 2)' a merely 
 EXTERNAL one (the i.mpendinq of something), or a) a logical one (pre- 
 supposition), representing the fatnre act as a result of sour, present 
 activity. For the first case we generally use the English et|iilvalents 'I 
 intend to , ' I am going to', ' I am resolved nj^on', ' I wish, e.\i)ert to' (See 
 examples 1-7.) For the second case the nsnal eqnivalents are' I am abont 
 to/1 am on the point of, '1 am to', I am going to'. (Ex. S-14 ) For 
 the third case there are the equivalents 'I am to', 'I am expected to' ' I 
 w\ant to', (Ex. 15-20); as: ' 
 
 ^f,\ XT "^-^ Officio illo Hbdicatflrus est, he inf^nd< (lo goinj. etc.) to resign this nnsHinn 
 — (&) Navis qu;e jam in p(»rtiim inveciflra est. a ship that is afjonf to {on the mAnt of 
 eic.) enter (he 7)^/7.— (o Instrumentum quo iHOru- sum. ad laborem accommudatuiu 
 esse oportet, an instrument which lam (e.rjjected) to use must be lit for the work. 
 tK*^ For the copula m«. the passive vidtri. to seem, mav be substituted to express 
 inat tne future act *w//i.s' to be conceived in a certain manner, as: Profecturus videris 
 thou seemest to be on the point of departure (it seems that von are about to depart)' 
 ^ut the periphrastic future with rid?ri may also be considered as a construction of the 
 nominative with the infinitive, (See Rem. 147.) o^uv^nou ui mc 
 
 PERirHRASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 131 
 
 J 
 
 1 Nihil de cOrnm eentontifi dictHrvs sum gui tnrpissimam servitfltemi 
 nomine appellant. C;es. B. G. 7,17.— 2. Qui reipublicte ;>ra/M/^7?'i sw/<^ duo i 
 pnpcepta teneaiit. Cic Off. 1, 25.— 3. \irls nostr.is cum rebus quas tentc 
 
 dedltiOnis' 
 ilia PlatOni» 
 
 H-..^..,,-* -■' -- ~ - tentatnH sumui 
 
 comparare oportet. Sen. 'i'ranq. 5.— 4. Injiiiiam qui fact ilrvs est jam tacit. Sen. Ira 1, 
 1.— 5. Quotusipiisqut! (§-2(il. R. lO) tam patiens est, ut velif discere quod in usu non 
 sit habitilrus!' iMin. Kp. '«, 14, 3.— «. A capessentibns^ rempublicjim adhibeatur tranqiiil- 
 litas animi. sicpii lem* nee anxii» futuri sunt, et cum dii,'nitate victuri^. Cic. Off. 1. '21.— 
 7. Facite quod vobis libct. datiirns non sum amplin-". Cic. Verr. 2, 2. 19. — 8. Belliim 
 snipfurus sum quod Populus Ronianus cum Juirurthii p:essit. Sail. Jug. 5,— 9. Qiuini 
 exameii'' apium e-ri^r</-////i f^V, soleut pra>Tre« si{?na ; qiium jam erolaturce sunf.^, conso- 
 n int>o vehemei.ter. Varro li. R. 3. IH.— 10. Catuli" qui jam dispecf uri sunt^^, cxci aeqne 
 eti» ei sunt (jiii inodo>* nati. Cic. Fin. 4. 23.— 11. Placet, quoniamis omnis disputatio»» 
 de oflicio fi/fura est, antea deflniri quid sit offlcium. Cic. Off. 1, 2.— 12. Si unS^^ inferi- 
 turusest animus cum corpore, vos tamen inomoriam nostri pie inviolatequei** servabitis. 
 Cic. Sen. 22 — 13. (iuid tiineam si aut non miser post mortem, ant beatii< etiara futdrus 
 sum* Cic. Sen. 19.— 14. Cum tali hoste pugnaturi estis, milites ; reliquias extrCmas 
 lio-tium, non hostem habStis. Liv. 21, 40.— 15. Tu veio, Varro, bene meriturus mihi 
 rid^'vi^iW {for) tuis civihus. si eos auxerisi» copia verbOrnm. Cic. Acad. 1. 7.-16. Quia 
 non labOro-o quam valde ea qme dico prof^afiirus sim, eo miuussi conturbor. Cic. Fam. 1, 
 7._ 17. c'lim hi-' ver.<an;^'' qui te meliOrem facfun sunt, eos admitte quos tu potes facere 
 meliores. Sen. Ep. 7.— IS. Quis bomisdubitaf" pro patrul mortem oppetere^*, si ei sit 
 nrofuturnsf Cic. Off. 1. 17.— 19. Meilquidem sententia paci qn;e nihil habitura sit iu- 
 sidiaruin-»'semperconsiilere oportet. Cic. OtT, 1, 11.— 20. RespersasS* manus sanguine 
 paterno judices vidvant oportet, si tantum facinus tam innn^im'^'' credUuri sunt. Cic. 
 Kosc. Am. 24. 
 
 Rem. 142. The periphrastic future, being subject to the law of con- 
 secution (i^ ?A*d), requires its sul)junctive mood to be in the imperfect if 
 the principal predicate is one of the past tenses. 
 
 1. Orf^ctorixperfacileesse prohavit'», conata" ilia pcrflcere, qnod ipse suae civitatis 
 •mperiiun obt-nfilrus esset. Cies. B. G. 1. 3.— 2. Civiiates illas leddi mihi aequum cen- 
 sChain'o. non quia maj;na accessio" ea reiriii futili^a esset. sed quia. etc. Liv. 39, 38.— 
 3. Lacedjemonii. Philippo minitante per litteras, se omnia qute conarentur prohibi- 
 tilriim''-, qu.'esiverunt niim se etiam esset mori prohibiturus? Cic. Tusc. 5. 42.— 4. Quae- 
 vita fuissei Priamo, si ab adolesceniiascisset, quos eveutus senectfltis esset habiturus? 
 Cic. Div. 2, 22. 
 
 /iVw. 143. The imperfect and perfect tenses of the periphrastic 
 fiilure are u.sed 1) to rejjre.sent an event which is future in regard to 
 the SI iWECT, as having been conceived or imi)ending at a time past to 
 XW sPE.MvER, as Atheniemes clucem classis ejus quam in Siciliam erant 
 iimsuri jrcdvirunt Alcibiadem, the Athenians elected Alcibiades leader of 
 the 11 .'t which they were about to send to Sicily. — Nunc jam quod cre- 
 dit ii IS ful omne c/'-edidi, now I have entrusted all (to thee) that I was 
 go- g to entrust. Plant. Most. 2, 3.— 2) as a collateral form of the ordi- 
 V /y pluperfect subjunctive of hypothetical clauses (§ 350), denoting that 
 an event would have taken place if (or if not) another event had hap- 
 jiened, as R'qem occisnrusfui si in sententia mansisset, I would have killed 
 the king if (in the case that) he had retained his o\)\moi\.— Si agendo 
 arnientum in speluncam cvmpulissei, ipsa vestigia qucerentem chminum eo 
 deduddra erant, if he had taken the herd by driving into the cavern, the 
 
 » elavery.— ' dedition.— > rempublicam cnpessere, to aspire to public otfices.— < if 
 (.l<-c._ 6 iidl of cares.— « Both rivei^e and vincere form the verbal adjective victurus. 
 Tlie connection must decide which of the two verbs is meant.— ^ swarm.— « precede.— 
 » to lly out.— >» to make a strong noise.— " a young dog.— ^^ d'lspicere, to see.— 
 1» agueet, the same as.— 1* just.- >' since.— ^» discussion.— ^'' together.— ^^ un- 
 tarni.-hed.-- »" aliqiiem copia i'crburum augZre, to increase ono's stock (store) of words.— 
 ao to care.- ^» the less,— 22 to associate.— •■'> to hesitate.— 2« to seek, to meet.— ''secret 
 treachery.— 2« rej^persus, drijiping.- '" enormous.— =8 in the text of Cjesar stands probat 
 as ' historical present' with the force of probarit.— ^9 conatvm, an undertaking.— so to 
 deem.— " accession.— "* that he would prohibit. 
 
130 
 
 PERirHRASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 in rojjird to the time of the prBJKCT. bnt PcpHratc* from it the coxcKPTTojf of the act, 
 referring it;* tinu; to that <»f the si'eakku. The sentence, '(rijiis f-« gjoin^ to depart,' 
 rej)resents the art of depaktino «s rrTURK in regard to the fubjeet Uaju!». hut in- 
 dicates jit lilt; sanu' time that the cmception of the act is puk-knt in regard to ilie 
 SPEAivKu's time, in tiie sentence, 'Gajns ?ra-'>' going fo depart,' the conception of the 
 act (tf dep:ir'in:_' is represented as a past one in n-gard to tiie speakek's time. Tliua 
 in Latin, in tlie sentence, 'CJajiis ))i()fectflrns est (enit),' the verbal adjective in i/nts ex- 
 pri'sses that the time of departing is fninre in regard to tlic siiwect Gajns, and tiie cop- 
 ula e^t (tnif) inrlicates that the couceptiou of tiie act is a present or a past one in regard 
 
 to tile SPK AKEi:. 
 
 The i)eriphraHtic fntnre ig conjugated after the following scheme : 
 
 Present Ind. scriptnrns pnm. / ayn ffoing to write, am Subj. scriptQrus sim. 
 about to icntc, am to iciite. 
 
 Imperfect *' scriptflrus eram, I was going (was about, " scriptflrus cssem. 
 etc.) to icnfe. 
 
 Perfect " ecriptflms fni, /7rrt.f going, etc., to W7'ife " scriptOras fnerira. 
 
 {would have wHtten). 
 
 Pluperfect" 6cri|)taru!S fiieram,//ia(/66^n j/ot^, etc., ^o " PcriptQrus fuisscm. 
 
 wnte. 
 FiiT. Pres, " scr\p\Qvn!iOTO, Is/iall be going, etc., to wnte. 
 
 FuT. Pkrf. " scriptQrns fnero, / s/uill have been about, 
 
 ete., to IV rite. 
 
 Presknt TxFiNiTivK. Scriptflrnm esse, that I am (waA going to write {xcill icrite). 
 Peufect Infinitive. Hcriptilium luisse, that I would have written. 
 
 Hem. 110. Tlie copn!a f.<J.NV, and tlie compounds of «mp. as an independent verb, in the 
 periphrastic fnf ure, take 1 lie Uinwfutaru,^ sum iennn.fui, etc.>, I am going to he, am to lie 
 etc. ipi-ofutiin/^' ifi/m. I am iroing to benefit). These forms of the copula are mostly used 
 with preilicate-adjeciives and nouns, but also with su -h completing predicates as may be 
 cotinected with thecpula (§ 4»)4foll.), and as imh-pendent verbs, in the meaning' to exi-f, 
 to be the case,' etc. i§47l>), as Sapiens futuru.-i sum. I am going to be wise; mpit^nsfutil- 
 nis eram, etc. ; hoc fnt arum eM si, etc.. this will be the c.ise if. etc. Instead of the present 
 intinitive////<7rM?/i^W(?, there is a collateral iorm fore, {a/fore, pnefore, vie), which, in con- 
 nection with predicate-adjectives and nouns, is more tisual thaii thii re<:ular form, fufrt' 
 rum esse, as S/)ei'o eo-^ con tent os/vr*'. I hope they will be satisfied. Instead of the imoer- 
 fect subjunctive. /'///'7?v/,s' ^.fvfm. esses, etc.. there are also the collateral iorm» forem. fore<t, 
 foret.forent {ni> j'</remug. /oretls), which Sullu-t. Livy. and later writers often use in the 
 meaning of esseth. esse^, etc., as quot miliia captaforent, how many thousands liad been 
 captured. Liv. 4.'), 2. 
 
 Rem. 141. The ptiesent tense of tlio poriphrnslic fiitiiro represents an 
 act, FUTURE to the subject, as conceived at a time present to the 
 SPEAKER. The present conception is represented either 1) as an inten- 
 tion (ie;^()liition, exju'Ctation) by tiie activity of tlie subjf:ct, or as an 
 ANTICIPATION of wli:it is to be. Tliis anticipation may be 2) a merely 
 EXTERNAL one (the impenuinq of something), or 3) a logical one (pre- 
 supposition), representing the future act as a re.sult of some |)resent 
 activity. For the first case we generally use the English equivalents, *! 
 intend to', ' I am going to', ' I am resolved upon', ' I wish, expect to'. (See 
 examjiles 1-7.) For the second case the usual erpiivalents are' I am about 
 to', 'I am on the i)oint of ', ' 1 am to', I am going to'. (Ex. 8-14.) For 
 the third case there are the equivalents ' 1 am to', ' I am expected to', ' I 
 want to', (Ex. 15-20); as: 
 
 (a) Se ab officio illo rtbdicatflrns est, he intend'' (is goin7, etc.) to resign this position. 
 — (^) Navis qute jam in portiim inveciflra est. a ship that is alxnit to (on thejunntof, 
 etc.) enter^ the /jo/A— (c) Instrumentuin quo usani!* sum. ad lal)orem accomtnodatuiu 
 esse oportef, an instruinent ivhick I am (exjyeeteU) to rise must be lit lor the work. 
 
 ^^" For the copula esse, the passive ridtri, to seem, may be substituted to express 
 that the future act «f^/zw to be conceived in a certain manner, as: Ptvfecturus viderls, 
 thou seemest to be on the point of departure (it seems that you are about to depart). 
 But the periphrastic future with vid^ri may also be considered as a construction of the 
 riOmiuative with the infinitive. (See Rem. 147.) 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 131 
 
 r 
 
 s 
 
 1 Nihil de comm eententiS didili^s *.^/m qui tnrpissimam servitfltemi decVitiOnis» 
 
 J. iMiiu uc Luiiiiw 7 -.T _ 2 Oiii reii)ublic;ey)ropA//'7?Y«w/t/. duo ilia Platonis 
 
 S;-i"enta'tSa * "cTc" Off l^25:- 3 V riril'ostnis cim^Vebus quas tentatnri ..m.. 
 
 ?on D- 'i^e <S^^ Sen. Tranq. 5- 4. Injuriam qui fact tJrm est jam lacit.Sen. Ira 1, 
 
 compa. arc port t^.^^ r ^ ^^^^ j^atiens est, ut velit discere qnod in nsn non 
 
 lit AflAiS S / ' n^ Ep .^8, 1 1 8.- H. A ca^pessentii)us3 retTipublic^am «/ l^^^^f oV ^T"^" 
 1 tas animi. sicpiiiem* nee auKU^/'ituvi sunt, et ^^^Yl-^^cfi^^^^^^i"^^ ^9 - S Bell im 
 7. F:.c.te quod vobis libet. dafurus n.m *vm ampl u-. tic \ ei . ^, 2 19 - « • «^ "JJ 
 ftrrinfuru^t su/n uuod Populns Komanus cum Juirurthii gessit. !?all. Jug. 5.-9. <^iium 
 evlm .7' at,i.miTSLv/m.>V. Solent pra>Tre« signa ; q.uim jam erolatarcB synt\ con^o- 
 ?nn V,. JZ" ,er Variv^ U.K. 3. 16.- K». Catuli" qni jam dispecfuri ^«"/^Vcieci seque 
 
 e .i ei sunt qui modoM nati. Cic.Fin^ 4. -23.- 11. ^'^''^-y'^ ^TT T'^ rm'l'^^^^^^^ 
 de otliclo futura est, antea definiri quid sit officium. Cic. Off. 1, 2,— 12 iM una^^ tnreri 
 L .V .;Aun mis cum corpore, vos tlmen momoriam m.stri pie >n\»"l^^fq"«;, ,^^^^^^^^^^ 
 Cic Sen -22- 13. (hiid iineam si aut mm miser post im)rteniaut bearti- enara /-w^^TrM* 
 '.m? Cic Sen ]9.i 14. Cum tali hoste pugnafuri e.//^, inilites ; rehquias extrSmas 
 ho" ium non hostem habStis. Liv. 21, 40.- 15. Tu ve.o, Varro, bene f ^J^'" 'f ™ l^ 
 rhllri^ivifor) tuis civlhus. si eos auxerisi» copia verbun.m. C.c. Acad. 1 ..- lb Qiiia 
 n n labony» quam valde ea quje dico prof^adlrus sim, eo minus^ conturbor. Cic. F^ni 1, 
 mm "»or q u^ ,.^r.<an-^-^ qn te meliOrem facturi sunt, eos admitte quos tu potes lacere 
 meliOivs Sen El 7 - Is.^Ouis bo.uisdubitat" pro patruT mortem oppetere^S si ei «< 
 rr!>r^«>;/sV^Cic Off 1.17-19. Meaquidem sententia paci qu;e nihil Aflft^^Sra ^i< in- 
 siSmi^»'-cVipeVcons.lere(.portet. Cic. Off, 1, 11.- 20. Kespersa.^» .nanus sangmne 
 Kitcr.rjt.dicervid.auto^ lantum facinus tarn immane" cr£(/i^art mM. Cic. 
 
 {(isc. Am. 24. 
 
 Rem 143 The periphrastic future, being subject to the law ot con- 
 secution (§ ;UD), requires its subjunctive mood to be in the imperfect it 
 the principal predicate is one of the past tenses. 
 
 1 Or'-etorixperfacileesse probavit's, conata"" ilia perficere, qnod ipse sn?e civitatis 
 :n ped un X^^Tm. .....7. cSs. B. G. 1. 3.- 2. Civi.ates iHas reddi mihi sequum cen- 
 
 sOi am" non quia magna accessio»» ^tavc^zm futura esset.^aA qnia. etc. Liv. 39, .3b.— 
 3 Kced\emo.i?i. Philimx. minitante per Utteras se omnia qmeconareim^^^ proh b^- 
 tfiriim»2 Quje^iverunt mini se et am esset mori prohtbitur^isf Cic. Tnsc. 5. 4-— ?•_ «^i»» 
 vita fiii/set Priamo, si ab adolescentiSscisset, quos eventus senecttttis esset habiturus? 
 Cic Div 2 22. 
 
 Rfm 143 The niPEUFECT and perfect tenses of the periphrastic 
 future 'are u.sed 1) to represent an event which is future in regard to 
 the suiuECT, as having been conceived or impending at a time past to 
 tlie SPE\KER, as Athenieims ducem ckmis ejus quam m btcUiam erant 
 mi^snri,crean'runt Alclbiadem, the Athenians elected Alcibiades leader ot 
 the lleet which they were about to send to Sicily.— iV'^^MC jam quod cre- 
 dit arun ful omnecredidi,no\y I have entrusted all (to thee) that I was 
 iroing to entrust. Plant. Most. 2, 3.- 2) as a collateral lorm of the ordi- 
 nary pluperfect subjunctive of hypothetical clauses (^ 3o0), denoting that 
 an event would have taken place if (or if not) another event had hap- 
 pened as Renem, occimrmfui d in sente/itid mansmet, I would have killed 
 the kin.- if (in the case that) he had retained his oi^imon.— Si agendo 
 armentum in speluncam compulmet, ipm vedigia queerentem dominmneo 
 deductura erant, if he had taken the herd by driving into the cavern, the 
 
 1 slavery — 2 dedition.— « rempnblicam cnpessere, to aspire to public offices.— < if 
 eue - » inll of care."- « Both rivere an(i vvicere form the verbal adjective victurus. 
 The connect ion must decide which of tlie two verbs is meant.- ' '^wann.- precede.- 
 • to t?y mi .- '' to make a strong noise.- " a yonng dog.- ^^ dmncere to see - 
 1» PC/ /L/ the same as.- i* just.- »» since.- i« discussion.- ^\ together.- »« im- 
 tarni-hed - ^» diauem copia vrvbdrum auglre, to increase ono's stock (store) of words.- 
 io to care - =' he less.- "^'^ to associate.- -^» to hesitate.- ^* to seek to meet- » secret 
 treachery - " rm^ersu^, dripping.- « enormous.- ^8 In the text of Caesar stands pr^f 
 as 'historical piVsenC with the Force oi probdvit.- ^» condtvm, an undertaking.- '« to 
 deem.— •» accession.— "» that he would prohibit. 
 
132 
 
 PEIiirHllASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 ver}' tracks would have led thither the owner when searchini:. Li v. 1, 7 
 
 it7ni»'titnrv.<era( (wlw», at Ihal time, war- contemplating to become ;tls«» a candulaic lor 
 llie a'dilf>hip>. Ijv. 25, 5. Ex. 1-3. »i. t^o when tiio ini- iided a.t i- rcpivsenttfd a:^ iiul.ti- 
 iiitelv ivp.-ated (Ex. 4). -But tlie PEnFECT represents the contemplation (m inipeiidmi; as 
 a coMipIet.-d past ev.-nt without reference to any paiticuhir lime: Quid fiortiia oiuj.< jnit 
 i^usriid, si urfjtm relicirui fmvuisf ('if we were to leave the city'; n..l merely refeirin- 
 
 - -■ In Ex. r. the two ten.^es are si^Miiticaniiy 
 
 would have done 
 
 s pre — - -.--,- , . . 
 
 colni; to prevent by arms* (i. e. he did vot prevent it, but 
 not been revoked). Liv. 2.5, 4. If so conceived, the impeufect represents 1) the action as 
 reaily intended or impending, and that it would hare come to pa^:* but lor some other 
 event: Oferendum i/ltra rati quod a/nissiin trant, tliinkin»? they ^^hould v«.luntaiily oiler 
 
 ubjunctive: (^uod fucturi fxi- 
 ... ... . ^ 
 
 e 
 
 distin«'iiished from an ordinary hvpolhetical pluperfect ,- ., , 
 
 7n,/.>- (=Ucl<>^^mn^) si (Vde< nosine dtjinr/rassent, wliicli we would have done if our house 
 hid burned down. Liv.5.r.3. See Ex." 1.3. 15. Ki.-Sometimet» the phiptrject snUjunctit 
 of the periphrastic future occurs with a bimilar f<.rce, but combining,' the hvpolhetical 
 conception with that of a destinv (Ex. 17). or that of a conternphiled action (Ex. U). 
 
 nam modo toleralMix fututa Etruria fui.sgtt. si quid in Sainnio adcerd ejtnisstt (how 
 Etruria w..uUl have been toh-rable if etc.). Liv. 10, 4:^.—Admone>'t€ Jorfuna, quid, « /tos- 
 
 - See Ex. 18, aiKt the past-atres quoted pi>. 
 
 te7n habul'iMivis, ca.^Hruiiifuit'si't. lb. :is. 4f). „-..-, , , ,• • .- i. . i,„ 
 
 443 and 444. If. howevj-r, the hvpolhetical sentence is a modal clau>e (introducecl i»y 
 ut. ' so that', qnin, ' that \ ' but that \ or an equivalent relative), or in the instance men- 
 tioned p 419, Obs. 7, the perfect subjunctive is used instead of a pluperf-ct. eettinj; aside 
 the law of consecution, a^: Ea res- fantum tunvdt'iin pnel»nt ut, nisi castra extra >irt)em 
 /uisseTif, efiimra se otnnl^ mnltitudo fu<rif. Liv. 2»), !(».— Si rita >^uppetiss^t, haud dulnuin 
 fuitquin'tumin pa-^aesHOne reqni rdictilrus /uerit. lb. 40. .545.— (Uixii). C<///J//fw//i ejus 
 exsUium ruina nrbis secuturafuerit, dainnan se a civibus pa-^sum e.^se. lb. 2o. 4. See j-.x. 
 23, and p. 444.— For the use of the subjunctive of the periphrastic future with the force 
 of'a future subjunctive see p. 448 foil. , .- . , i « » o 
 
 1. Ilelvetii fiumentum oinne, pranerqtiami quod secum ))orfafun eranf, combariiiit.' 
 Cies B (J 1,5.— 2. Uuo die id plebis conc\\\\un /uttlrum fuemf. consul claiii in Sici- 
 lians abiit. Liv. 27, 5.— 3. Le-^aii Uaili petiCruut a Carihaiiiniensihus auxiha adver- 
 Bus GneciaTU. cni Ulatrirus helium Darius erat. Just. 10. 1.- 4. Vedius l»olho servos suos 
 objici6l)at3 murienis* quas esilnu^ erat. Sen. Clem. 1, 18.— 5. Qui occisurux fratrem/^/t^ 
 habeat irjltos pat'-rnos deos ; qui periturus fraterno» scelere /'/«7, perfuiriu-n in patris 
 misericordia habeat. Liv. 40, 10.— (i. Quod consilium vestruni« fu.-rit scire veliin. ruin 
 hostibus nosiris consilia communicastisT et arma consociutfiri^ Juistis. Seditiosi illi qui 
 Vit)eUiutn9 sequcbantur, Rhe_'ium. urhem opuU*iitam. hablturi peri)etuam sedem erant, 
 nee populum n.'C socios Populi Komani ultro (on theirpart) lace-mtilri. Sucronemneio 
 vos domicilium»» haMtftri eratis ? Ubi si vos relinqueivni. deos implonlre debehfltis. qiKul 
 noil rediretis domum. Viam consilii p celerati'^ exsequn3_v(doj_2Hspaniani i)rivvi^ 
 
 ~» Except~^2to biarn.— » to throw before.— ' murceaa, a murena, a lart,'e fish, a fa- 
 vorite delicacy of the ancients.— * brotherly ; here used instead o^ fratris.—' • Scipio 
 addresses a band of poldiers of the army in Spain who had risen in arms ajjainst their 
 officers, under the lead of some deiua«?oi;ues.— ^ consilia communicdre, to treat.—* arma 
 a)n.<iocidre, to make common cause.— » Scipio refers to another military insurrection 
 under Vibellius. a military tribune.— i» Suc7V, a small Spanish town.— " domicile. 
 
 — 12 criminal.— '^ to trace up. 
 
 
 
 T 
 
 i 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 133 
 
 Populo Komauo ereptun erdlls. Liv. 28. a^.- 7. Venie1)atisi i-itur m Africam, provm- 
 ciamm:sxime infestain. O^uero qnid facfuH /ulstL^ f Ouamquam qwd facturifufnfis 
 d lb t'.-^ mini vid.' nn quid feceVitis ? Cic. Li-. S.- 8. Furium et ^milmm.si trumni 
 me triu.nplK-lre prohibcM-nt, testis (uifvess) citaturus^ fui rerum a me jr^-starum. Liv. 
 QW[47_q \d siiDpruium* depoposcCrinit* n<'s Komam : deditns» nltimis^ cruciati- 
 hn-^nfertiinfuZrunt. Liv. 21, 44.- 10. ConciawMllud ubi Dejoturu- erat mamurus^^x- 
 ire pefrexioet, pn.xiM.a ..octe corruitio. Cic. Div. 1. 1.5.-11. llh ipsi aratOresU qu, re- 
 in!inM-runt>2 re'ictnri omnis aarms ^7w/<. nisi ad eo< Metellus Roma litteras misisse . 
 Cic V<rr 3 52 — 12. Explica utriim apc'rte an elam^s te aggressun fuenmus. Liv. 40, 14. 
 — 13 Ou-rr«> jiuiiies si illo die irens ista Clodiana»* quod faccre vol.nt etf.cisset./wt^m- 
 vf ad* arnia i'turi ? Fuistisne vos ad patrium animum "i?JoV''"q"« )irtutem (civl<) ea-a- 
 tatnri ' Fuistisne aliquando reinpublicam a funesto latronei» repetiturt]^ f Cic. Sest. 28. 
 —14 ^i e.'o morerer niecum exspir^dura^^ respublica, niecum cos^urum imperium Populi 
 Roniaiii emtr Liv. 28, 28.- 15. Qnid enim././;«n/m/;|i/. si ilia ir\%"'"'i6°>Sil'""g,' 
 one»» nlebs ao-itari"» cceptaesset tribuniciis^» proc-llis^a ? Liv. 2, 1 • 3. — lo- MazjEU«« si 
 transeuntibus23 flumen supervenisset^*, haud dubie oppresmrus fuit mcoiiipositos-'» 
 Tnrt 4 — 17 ^ut non fato interiit Flaminii exercitus. aut, h fato (interut), etiamsH» 
 o'l)te'miV';a-set"auspieiis27. idem eventurum fuisset. Cic. Div. 2, 21 - 18. Appiruit, qixan- 
 turn fxrifatura moiem^'' VQV.x fuis^^et clades. quum vanus rumor^» tantas procellas exci- 
 vi<set3o Liv -'8 24.— 19. ' Recepti in provinciam non sumus. Quid si essgtis .-< caesa- 
 rlnc earn traditun fuu^sitis, nn contra Ciesarem retmtiiri ? Cic. Li?. '^'\^^'^9^^-^-^-'f: 
 Neuuc ainbi-Mtur3i quins-» Brutus pessimo exemplo id factarusfuent, ^x^vxoxwm re- 
 :nim alicui re-nnm extorsisset^». Liv. 2, 1, 3.- 21. A" potc'^t quisquam dubit^re quin si 
 Li-ariusin lt;Uia esse potuisset. in eadem sententia/wfrt«34/^/„rw^ '" 1."^""^^T '-^i 
 runt* Cic Li- 12-22 Et sic loquor, tanquamss ^i„e duce llispanuE3« futures fuennt 
 (-i morerer), Liv. '28. 28.-- 23. AdeoS^ citato»'^ aginiues» ducti sunt ut, si via recta issent, 
 baud dubie cos a^secuturi^^ fuerint. Liv. 28, 1«. 
 
 Pwm. 14G. The ixdic.vtive pluperfect of the periphrastic future de- 
 notes wli:it was impendinu^ befoke a linie which is past in rei^ard to the 
 speaker {He had intemled to, he had been about to, etc.). See Ex. 1. 2. 3. But 
 
 l^oc'ts use it ill tlie prineii)al sentences of hypothetical clauses with the 
 
 force of an ordinary pluperfect subjunctive (Ex. 4). 
 
 1 Victor*» ( -Emilius Paullus) cohimnas iilas quibus (sacerdOte?) statuas regis Persel 
 immsitilri fueraut. suis statuis dcstiiuTvit. Liv. 45, 27.- 2. M. Valeriuni consulem 
 OMines sententiic (votes) centuri:eque dixere {nominated}, quern senatus dictatOrein 
 dici jussurusfveraf. Liv. 10. 11.- 3. Hoc cum nuntiatura -^^.lex^»'''^'"»,^*'^^^'*' "?^"Vin'!f 
 lon<'as s(K-iis"imp"rarepneceperar. excursurusque*'' cum valida manu"/'^<'^ AthPnas. 
 Jus7 13. 5.-4. Ten era s^V'"<^^^<^ 7ntri>ura*= airlua&*\ n\*' prius*» in scopulum^Hraus- 
 form'ata»» foret. Ov. Met. 14, 72. 
 Bern 147 The two futuue tensks of the periphrastic future are rarely used, denoting 
 
 what will be or will have been the intention, or i upending at some future time (Ex. 
 
 1-3) Sometimes this form is us^d with the f..rce of a potential future m general pie- 
 
 cent's (I) 3,1 foil OBS..5), referring to actions intended at any time: Ea. qucE demissu- 
 
 rus ,ris',s„ni;topa>dln acrbiora; Take those which you (=auy oue> are going to let etc. 
 
 Ca^o \i. It 101. See Ex. 4. 
 
 1 Cicero addresses Tubero and others, who, during the civil war had gone to Africa 
 to open e t liere again-t Ca-sar, but who were denying now their hostile intentions - 
 "c3l doubt •'- 3 7o summon.- "death.- ' to demand.- « the participle has the force 
 of a e. n t i.al clause ' we had surrendered.'- ^ extreme.- « torment - apartment. 
 _ 10 f _ n f;u-iner. - ^'^ remain.- »3 secretly.- ^*gens Clodtana, the tribe of Clo- 
 dius's fol owers -•* a brigand.- »« to reclaim.- i^ to expire.- i« pastor, a herdsman. 
 _'» "tna I'^crrcoming from .dl quarters.- '^o to agitate.- '^^ belondng to the tribunes 
 Dolit a - =2 storm.- =3 the participle has the force of a clause, ' tlie.n wlrle they were 
 P.^ LVi, /' - 2i suplrven'ire alicm, to surprise somebody - " them in disorder (I'teml v, 
 0^\n ordered ones).- ^e ev.n ii' - " the auspices.- ««monstrous mass ^here : earth- 
 niiake) - ^» rumor - 'o exciere, to call forth, to raise.- 3i ambigere. to d'Uibt.- »- biu 
 that - 3» extorau^re to extort.- 3* Some manuscripts have 'fui^seV. Why x^ fuent 
 {h?\m.ner r3 S-3» as if - 3« the two Hispanias.- 37 .o.- 3« rapidly marching. 
 Tri.K ^ij m rapid march^s.^- 3» column.- ^» assequi, to ON;ertake.- «» th« ^•^.•"• 
 a ,;;, -«^ exrurrere, to make an expedition.- " force - 4*;Teucrian ' t.e frojan 
 ?,'hipiV_46 'nergere. xo drown, to en-ulf, to swallow.- *« carina, vessel.- *' mst. of 
 ru^i,-'*(^ before.- *» rock.— »<> to transform. 
 
134 
 
 PERirHRASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 causa q„. d -P; Vf«'",7'«';''- A ,\*;if, ;rnn,. S.' „. "o„»,lciam, qua.u po.,lm: .1 
 
 S 508 The two INFINITIVES of the ponphrastic lutiire aie 
 onU- nsoJ as predicates of infinitive clauses, both in the con- 
 struction of the accusative with the infinitive, and in that of 
 the nominative with the infinitive (§ 492). The infinitive of 
 the riiESF.NT {scriptrmon esse) is used if the infinitive clause, 
 chan-ed into an independent sentence, would have a i.rcdicate 
 either in the present tense of the periphrastic future, or in the 
 ordinary future. It is generally rendered by the English future 
 tense (if the principal pre.lieate is a present), or by the poten- 
 tial with Ucoidd' (if the principal predicate is a preterite). 
 The infinitive of the perfect (scnpturiim fuisse) has always 
 a iiTroTiiETicAL force, and is rendered by the potential with 
 
 '■ v}ould have.'' . , . ., 
 
 Bern. 148. According to g 390,11... pre.Iic.te-infinUiv. Hl^l^^ ^'^ '« 
 ttTi-spnt if ils time is eitlicr c(iin(-i(l(.-iU with or latfi- li:;n lli.it ol t le 
 priS V 'rK Tto 11,0 qu..sii,M, whellKT Ihis present infinitive is to be 
 K'ir.m the oun.NARY o,.njn-ati,.n or from the oonjupUou of the 
 rKiiiiMiUASTic FUTUUE, the following nilcs must be observed : 
 
 perf'ormtd this bui^inesj.. „.,„„» -,«.v'Tvn whirh in Eivlish may be con- 
 
 . .„ „.,-,-tain- » «t.,itim.ut.- ' mmcribtre to draw lip.- * if he snail have been 
 reduced ,0 adulation to, etc.- 'to un»..) tUc other. I.e. the one who ha, bestowed a 
 
 benefit on mo. 
 
 J 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 135 
 
 instancp*» the con«truction of the clause is made impersonal by HifaTi? of the P/jip^'-as 
 ?c infinit V. -^M^^rSX^g or f(rre with ut (literally : that it will be the ca^e that etc ) 
 tL ve.'l. i"pla{"<l in VJ .ubjanctive present or imperfect according as the principal 
 predicate is a present or preterite» : 
 
 ErMimaf foreifvturnm €s.<<e) ut hostes fffugiant, he believes that the enemy will es- 
 ^.,f,^l S,^^^^ mum agiLcenut, he hoped that the ciiizeus would ac- 
 
 knowledge hi6 right. , j « 
 
 -s The notential mood with 'would' or ' should ' which is frequently eiuployed in 
 RnHiHiTritcu'es dependent on other verbs than those mentioned No. 1, is not ren- 
 dered bv a iriptirastic future in Latin, but by ordinary present mfimlives, or by ordi- 
 nafv MuV. iciives, if clauses with ut are used. For more particular rule^, p. Wl, Obs. 6. 
 • re era.^ venire nipioiVdimveniwi eras). 1 wish (that> you would come to-moirow.- 
 Xea»'eest (cmu.<^ eJ) te hoc negotium jyerficere, it is necessary that y^ "/^'^"h'^.^n^ wnnM 
 b,,.i ,„:.s - iVd faremus, te tini rirtutefr>n cupimus. we favor you. and ^ylsh you would 
 e iov your n urits. Cic. Brut. 97.- Smaf'd placet Cra^sum SyHamcMtmre.xi pleases 
 ?l,e SeS^hat Crassus should obtain Syria. Cic. Phil 11, n.-Mirm- teadrmmhU 
 Kcritjere, I wonder that you should have written nothing to me. Cic. Att. b, U. 
 
 IS" For the translation of ' sliould ' by the gerund, see § 511, R. 162. 
 fi The verbal adjective in Urus. if used as predicate-infinitive, agrees, accordin£r to 
 tho'rules for predicate-adjectives, in gender, number, and case with the subject-accusative. 
 Rem 149. TJie periphrastic infinitive, like ordinary predicate-infinitives, 
 is also emploved in the construction of the no.minative with the in- 
 finitive (5^ 492), in which case the verbal adjective in urns agrees with 
 the subject- nominative in gender, number, and case : 
 
 Amicm turn breri rerlifuru^ (e-^se) dintur, it is said that thy friend will soon return.— 
 Civm^,n!lem7ervataroe {esse) videbantur, it seemed that the states were going to 
 keep their faith. 
 
 Bet}} 150 If the verb es-^e, either as an independent verb, or with com- 
 pleting'-" predicates, is used as a present predicate-infinilive ot the peri- 
 phrastic future, it takes either the form futfirumiesse), or fore. The ver- 
 bal adiective/</^r/rw.<< agrees in this construction, like other verbal adjec- 
 tives, with its subject-accusative or subject-nominalive in gender, number, 
 
 ^"' m^beifos fore (or futuro^) speramris. we hope you will be happy.-//<«c res magm 
 mihZxstiMara {fare) videMt>}r, it seemed that this thing would be of great use to me. 
 Jlem. 151 The construction of the perfect infinitive of the peri- 
 phrastic future is determined by the same rules as that of the present m- 
 finitive • but it has always a hypothetical signification, correspond- 
 in- to the potential ' would have.' the hypothetical clause being either 
 expressed or understood. The copuhi fui,sse is rarely lett out, which is 
 only the case if the connection clearly shows the hypothetical torce ot the 
 verbal adjective: 
 
 Dixit se id«m facturum fuisse (not factrmwi without fnisse). he said that he would 
 bav J^lont t r;ame -^^^^^^ 'Tur>eror,em aesaris p>ssis obtemperatarmn fui,se 
 
 ^fueTtadmi^us h^ believed Tubero would have obeyed Caesar's commands it he had 
 U^r^!^!l^'\!^R:diturus M.^s-e ridebatur, H reniam ^^P^^^as^et, U^eems that he 
 would have returned if he had obtained tlie permission, bee p. bd-i, Ubs. ». 
 
 1 Promitto tibi atque conflnno^ me pro tu5 dignitate in hac provinciS imperaWris 
 *,^..m> i W .,tficia a.que partis. Cic. Fam. 3, 10. 1.- 2. Flumen neque iP^e tran^Ire 
 b^hr.uit in aiiimo neque bosils transifuros cxistimabat. Cies. B. G. b, 7.-3. lalia te 
 '^ u y^^^^ innumerabiUa, plane* ^^"^^f ? "^t^df sc^ib^rse 
 
 tib' aniDliiQIo* ista sollicitadt»^ tutfira sit. Cic. Fam. .J, 10. 3.- 4. In litte is ^criD t, se 
 cum iegioiiibus ce!cri ter ad/ore. Ca^s. B. G. 5, 4S.- 5. Sulpicms prouuutlavlt^ nocte 
 
 1 The same form (with fu'unim eH ut) is sometimes employed as a circumlocution of 
 the finite verb in the ca/e that a verb does not form an adjective in urus, as I^'uturum 
 J^Ltluniam i 'ni -oing to be wise. Sen. Ep. 117.- ^ cofifirnmre. to pledge o.:e s helL- 
 ^i^di!reTliqiAd. To chlirge one's self with something.- « plane non, not at all - • but 
 that.— • greatness.- ' distress.— » declare. 
 
PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 137 
 
 136 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 TirriTima ih hml pccundil n?ane ad quartam horam iiocti;* lunam defect ilrirnetseKUy. 
 proximo !^1. hortP^^^^^^^ I ^^f^^^^^r^uavA' citius* quam iminixli» Bruttu« in 
 
 t^iSnos morerver eron Liv. 24, 3.- 7. K«.n:lni, redifuros se ad cos duentes e^., 
 
 pS'cZmr Liv. 24. C- 8, Appi... dixit^i Hcitu-n .e..c^ h-^m n,n5 ain ^jrre 
 Inrfifurum cum collCi^jl provinclam». Cic. tarn. 1.9. 2o.- 9. Dixit Ano\ ^tus siai^ 
 SSiS'o Ca "ir ma-^no se ilium pr.pmi.. renwnerafururn.Cii^^. B. O. 1, 44.- 10. Per- 
 nauci* u-tri<i» /-//^^n/rn esse ait ?/< desorta oppida iiullum niihtem dare posmit. hn 41, 
 r-11 Ca-ir etsi/or^ videhat vf hostes cfleriiate )Hn\i:n\nmefuoerent Uxnv^u lo-u,- 
 nes in ac e pro a"^ ris ccnsiit.nti-^. Oes. B. G. 4, :i^- 12. Video te vHle in cceUim 
 Srk"vi3 et^sp^'o ;or. «^ c*n/i;..7a/ id nobis. Cic. Ta.c. 1 34.- 1\^"'>;'"1 "i'^"^;'" 
 m ut tiuncmi* hac I.oiniuum trtflte re;* haintilra esse vidCtiir. V^-^mI"' V. J;„V~r J* 
 Ot 11 nobis .^aiissinmm erit quod ci qui poiiuntur rcrnm prcE^^tafurt^^ videntnr Cic 
 Fan 1 8 4 - 15. ^Eioloruui iut^enu-t ipsus versus {un>rad nitcrnecionem rt</6;//c^m/.si« 
 vid" baiiir -entem Liv. 4. 25.- U\. Osar, quod'^ niilite. sij;na'« non /«/«n dict-rentnr 
 nihi U "/) ^e de "a re conimovCrii» dixit. C^e.. B. G. 1, 40.- IT lUx dehcm^" ^uaorru- 
 ?iS-a%r^exb^tiiuilvit. Sail. Ju-. :W.- 18. Quitt urn fare v.debanir rcl.qunm R-tat.s 
 fvX7,t;^?rUen n " Liv 22, 21.- 11>. IIU turn so consulf. inipeno dicto audvnUsJuturos 
 liiTSilmt U<' 4 ,0.-1 20. (Vsar excQ-^i qnodobsides dare nterm.scrant2^../or6 id 
 mmd Hccid t"pu«.uica^^^^ Ctrs. B G. 4, 31.- 21. Ca-sar pollicilus est, Mbi earn rem 
 ^'ml ^ S 'L C>V R G 1, k- 22. Vercin^retorix dixit, copias se omnTs pro caj-tn. 
 
 ?S/;i!m cn.^ri- hostibn./.r;7r.m. ^-^^^;^'^^-^- S^-c.alll^'h'mc'adepi 
 niulicrum adcenarium \ ervem f<>(<mnn? ^»^-» 7«"; .^' Ml.- 24. (.all hanc aatp i 
 victoriam in ncrDetuuni'-^* s'C fore victOres confidCbant. ix*. B. (i. 5. 3»).— Z). t icsar 
 
 ronrntn^ nrip«26 teti'n>*-et He dedidisscn". Ca'!». B. G. 2. -U.— ^. caniin> nixii, n») 
 an o S-^^.^. hmnl.ni' tribuniciam- potcstiteni- rf^trf.;-a/^/.>^. ^:;^;iKn -'^'t 
 Ko.nani t-xistiniationiao satisfact-re voluih>et. Cic. \ err. 1, lo.,- 2, ^untl5IUln=•' c>t 
 no is Vano ., At ticmn nostrum, nisi dt. via fossns essct, continuo3^ ad nos t^enhirum 
 f"j"v Acad Post 1, 1.- 28. Gloricmini p.r me licet, eos provinciam /«!.•« C««ari 
 Iradiiur^ Cic L - 8, 21.- 29. Milites contondernnt33, i.icolumi exerc.tu RomanoS*, 
 G?, rST; ca%am.)rnmtaros non fuisse. Ca^. B. G, «• 4L- =50. Hoc toium omilto, 
 ne3* Tubero quod nunquam coi,ntavit/a6-<«rM*V"^'*"« videatur. Cic. L.ig. ». 
 
 § 509. rredicatcs with poriplinxstic futures do not admit a 
 change into the passive voice, except predicate-ixfixitives 
 in infinitive clauses, wliich are made passive by one of the fol- 
 lowiniT circumlocutions: 1) by the first supine with the pas- 
 sive infinitive irl (both personal and impersonal) ; 2) by the 
 impersonal mfimlWefuturum esscut or foreut (K. 148,4) with 
 the subjunctive passive of the verb; 3) by the impersonal in- 
 finitive /w^<7n^m fuisseut w'lih the imperfect subjunctive of the 
 passive; 4) by the personal infinitive fore with the perfect 
 participle of the verb. 
 
 1 defkere, to be eclipsed.- "^ inhabitants of Locri -> declare.- « rather.- » mixed np 
 -'^verlere to turn. Comparative clauses, depc-ndent on intinitive <-lauses have eith -r 
 th.'i- predicates ill the intiuitivc, or in the subjunctive of the finite verb. V\ .• irenerally 
 rene?snch predicates bv infinitives.- ' a law of the Curias, whid. were pol.tica bo.lie. 
 of the P tricians.- 8 to'pass.- » sornH pwrinciam. a political ph-ase : Mo cast lots jor 
 ?he prov nce\- »0 to march off.- ^Uusfrum,a period .>f five years Connection>^ id 
 
 his kind must be recast in En-lish : 'in ten or fifteen yean*'.- »^ to draw np - 3 jj., 
 to - 14 chan^-." - 1» <n-ant.- »« ad internecionem adducere. to extermniatc - ^^ qvod, as 
 to the fact Umt.- »«?i7/ia ferrf. to carrv the lla-. i.e.. to make the attack - »« mmtm- 
 tSA to be impressed.- ^o'oflonce.- «^ abl. of id (from the fact^- ^^ to n|.L'lect.- 
 « terror - i* for ever.-" baltmn-ram.- "« dedere, Hurrender.- " of the tribunes. - 
 28 power - 29 to miss.— so public opinion.— 3» to announce.-- «^ "'.""^^vy — <<^; 
 tendere, to maintain, to ar-ne.- 34 coustructim of ablatives absohUe with the force of 
 an hypothetical clause 'if the army were intact'.— ^» lest. 
 
 I 
 
 Bern 152 The finite verb in the conj nidation of the periphrastic future 
 .idmits of a passive form onlv in the subjunctive imperfect, by means of 
 forem etc. (R. 140) in connection with the perfect participle of the verb. 
 This combination has the force of a perfect future subjunctive, and is 
 rendered ' would have been', as : Di.xGrunt arcem se eis tradituros si 
 remisd forent, they said that they were willing to surrender them the fort 
 if i/uy would have been sent back. Liv. 29, G. 
 
 Bern 153 The first supine with iri serves as the passive voice of the 
 infinitive present of the periphrastic future. It is frequently used in 
 infinitive clauses, but rarely in the construction of the nominative with 
 the infinitive The supine, beim? indeclinable, remains unchanged, and 
 does not agree with the subject-accusative, as : CarnQtes cum longius earn 
 rem ductum iri existimarent etc., the Carnutes, since they tliought that 
 this affair would be i)rotracted for a great while. Goes. B. G. 7, 11. 
 
 tW- The Kupine with iri orisrinates in the use of the active verb ire with the first 
 Bupine, in the ineanin- ' in ord.r to^ (§ 351). Such phrases, especially i" antec assical 
 1 1 Uia.'e are sometimes used with the force of the active periphrastic future, as 
 'si oDulentus it «f/7/«;n panperiOris -ratiam, if a rich man is going to (literally ?70«5 .t^ 
 mlkrt^^si'iv ^ favo • of a poorer man. Plant. Aul. 2. 2, 29.-Sua8 quoque injuries 
 
 vul^nir^t^ they ou^ht to tfnnk also (literally • go to ) of ^;^^ ^^"fj*^^'';,^^^" ™^r ' 
 Liv 2. (i.-(iiii panels seelerJUis parcunt. bouos omuls perditnm^ eurd, those who tpare 
 ?. few villaini?, are going to destroy all good ciiizens. t?all. Cat. 52, 12. 
 Bern 154 The impersonal circumlocution with futurum esse ut or fore 
 lit is tiie same as that employed for active verbs which form no adjective 
 \i^uruH (Rem. 147,4), except that the verb is placed in the subjunctive 
 of the PvssiVE voice. The tense of the verb is either the present or the 
 imperfect, according as the principal verb is in the present, or in one of 
 the past tenses. Since the construction is impersonal, it cannot be ap- 
 plied to infinitive clauses construed by the nominative with the inhmtive. 
 En.rlish Thai-clauses with predicates in the future or potentia passive, 
 in order to be cast into this construction, must be first remodelled imper- 
 sonally {that theij will be destroi/cd = That it will be the case [futuru,n esse 
 or fort] that they are destroyed), as : 
 
 lie thinks that Gajus ivill be dcfeat^l, existimat fore nt (futurum ejeut) Gajus 
 rjmj^/r.-lle thou-hl that Gajus icoulUbe defeated, existimavit fore ut {futurum esse 
 ut) Gajus tincerttur. 
 
 Rem 155 The impersonal circumlocution Vs\{\\ fatiirum fuisse ut is con- 
 strued in the same way as the present futurum esse ut, except that tiie 
 verb is always placed in the imperfect subjunctive. In meaning, it 
 closely corresponds to the active perfect infinitive of the periphrastic 
 future, being always hypothetical. It is rendered by the Luglish po- 
 tential with' would have been', as : 
 
 He thinks that Gains would hare l)€en defeated if, etc.. existimat/M/«r!/m/wfe5« ut 
 Gaiu<rnc7r2^i/r si,itc.--He ^aid that the life of the prisoner would have been jn-e- 
 ^r/ierf.iAiriiad surrendered sooner, m^n futurum fuisse ut vita captlvi cofisercaretur, 
 ^\ tie cilius dedidisset. , 
 
 B£m 156. The personal ^orm fore with a perfect participle is used in- 
 stead of the forms with iri and futurum esse ut if the future action is 
 conceived as a state or condition, as : Provindam brevi snbadamfore exis- 
 timavit he thouirht that the province would soon be subjected (i. e a sub- 
 jected one). Fore with a perfect participle is impersonally used only in the 
 case that the perfect participle has the meaning of an imperson.-^l pas- 
 sive as • Carlhaginienses debellatum mox fore rebantur, the Carthaginians 
 
133 
 
 PERirHRASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 rockonod that \ho war would soon be over. Liv. So, 118 {deheltatum eRt, the 
 war is over). Fore niav also be connected with the pertect participle of 
 a deponent verb, and lias then altogether the force of a future perfect. 
 
 See Ex. 11). . ..,,.,. ,^ . 
 
 \. Ne. Pi occttprifua tumuUisi nb Ilannihale/oM, veliit» in cervicibus haberent hosfem. 
 Liv. 27, -^»».— 2. Si Uiiium miliuuu lioinaiiOnun fuif^ef, ut et C'hakis et Eurlpus* 
 tA'n'cri ' et non rtescri praesidium* Athen-Tnim potuinset, Chalcis et EurTpnsi ndeinta rcjji 
 1'orent' Liv. .31, 23.— 3. Al(Mi)i;ulc's pollicrMiir le-^fltis Athcnieiisiuin anncitiam tt'£?ip, i*i 
 Vespublica a populo trandata ad senatiun /or*^/. Just, .'i, .3.— 4. An Cii. I'onipC'jum 
 cciist's tri>»iis puis consulatibii!*. tribu.^ tiiumphi.>* Icetaturum fuhse, pi kciss.-i ^e lu 
 P(.lirudiii.-« .E^'vptioium» trucidrtf'on'' iW / Cic. Div. 2, 22.— .5. Sc-iCbat mI.i rnmini 
 datuW^ in pecuniam accepiss».'. C'io. Verr. 5, 29.— «J. Hi arbitrantur, se benollcop" m 
 puos amicop rlotm iri si locuplcteut»» cos quacuuque ratiOue. Cic. Ot!. 1, 14.— 7. Nmn- 
 quam Populu» Rouifuius mec.>ii<uU'm locissct, s-i (ukm ve<tro clainOn- pertiirhnlmntn 
 arhitrarCtur Cic. Kab. 6.— S. Ipsi vtn» nihil nocifum iri rcspoudit. C;r<. B (». •'', .3«».— 
 9. VrjfiitesiJ» prffidirCbant, fore ut brovi a Gallis Ftoma cai^r^fur. Cic. Div. 1. 44, 100.— 
 lb Valdf puspicor fore vt infrinqat'ir^'^ honiinum iniprobitas's. c\c. Fam. 1, 10.— 
 11 Illud tibi aftirmo. si rem e.x siMiti-ntiil'* Lresst'risi3,_/c,r^ ut a m\\\xU collixu>U're^\ Cic, 
 Fam 1 7 .5 - M Divitiacu- di-xit, rw^7/-?/m <'<'>*' panels atinis >/M>mnes (Jalli rx ni)ii)U3 
 puispellofentnr'^. Cjes. B. (J. 1.31.— 13. Ejo fide mcil spondco"* /V>r# ?//■ omnia lonsje 
 ampliOra'9 qnain a me pnedicantur^o iuvpiiias. Plin. Ep. 1. 4.— 14. Audita vox est a luco 
 Vestiv, nt niuri ct i)ort:e rolicercntur ; /////Tn/m <'.'>.<?^. nisi provlsum"» essct, •'/Miotna 
 cap^re'tur. Cic. Div. 1. 4."), 101.— 15. Nisi ro tenipor<' niuitii de Cu'saris victoriil espeiit 
 aliari. existimili)ant pkvT<pio futuruin fuU<e nt oppidiiin amitterttur. Cies. B. C. 3, 101. 
 — 1«. Thf'ophrastus moricns" accusasse natOram diciiur. quod h"ininibns tain «'XiL,'uaiu 
 vitani dedissct ; nam si potuisset osse lonfrinquior^'^,///^?;'*//^///?***? ut omnos artes per- 
 firermtur Cic. Tusc. 3, 28.— 17. Frater mens cxistimat, adjuncto isto fundo. patri- 
 ni()iiium-3 snum fore per te con.'ififutum'^*. Cic. Fam. 1. 9, 21.— IS. Aristoteles dixit^ se 
 vidure brevi tempore philosophiam phivv"^^ ab'-o/ufdm"'^ fore. Cic. Tusc. .3. <.9 -19. Hoc 
 die»», me satis adeptu//ifore,e^\ extantopericulo nullum iu me periculum rcdundani-T 
 Cic. Sull. 9. 
 
 § olO. Tlie verbal adjective in ?7r?/.<f, in anteclassical lan- 
 guage, and in the prose of Cnesar and Cicero, occurs only as a 
 predicate-adjective. But the writers of the Augustan age, and 
 more frequently the post-classical prose-writers use the adjec- 
 tive in tirus as an attributive adjective, or as an accessory 
 predicate (§461) with the force of a participle. 
 
 t^^^ In Cicero's letters the adjective mur^ts occurs twice attributively: Quid agenfi, 
 
 miid acturo ^ to him jjoing to «io ' wliat'y Cic. Alt. 8,0, 2 — Tarde tiln rtddituro, since 
 
 you are to answer late. lb. 5, Ih.—Ejiturus in (^u. Fr. 2.5, is a conjecture. 
 
 Rem. 157. If the adjective in iirus is used ATTiuniTTVELY, it either cor 
 
 responds to an En,ii:li.sh attribute with ' about to', ' iroins,' to', ' in a con 
 
 dition to', or must i)e resolved into a relative clau.se (Ew 1. 2. 3. 9). 
 
 Cito ffubrenidtix homini perituro, you should come quiclily to tliea^^sisjance of a man 
 about to perish (in a critical ccmditionK— .Icc^/^ii iUe donaiii sibi exitio fularum, he ac- 
 cepted a j,'ift that was to be fatal to him. 
 Adjectives in vma are sometimes used as absolute adjectives with the 
 
 force of nouns (^ 354 foil.), as : 
 
 InterleciOres iiderftcturis jubentur objici, the murderer? are placed before their 
 
 ♦hill.— ''as it were. p. 718,7.— 'the straits between Bfeotia and Euboea.— * pratai' 
 diutn deitercre, to abandon the protection.— » solitude.— ^.Egyptius, an E<:ypiian.— 
 ' to assassinate.— « § 480, R. W. «wi.- » beneficent.— »<> enrich.— " inhabitants of 
 V,.ji _ 12 to break, to clieck.— " wickedness.— '« successfully.— >• rem fjtrere. to 
 carrv out a business, to act.— »• colltiadrire, to praise.— " to drive out.— '^ fide sud 
 tijKnidtre, to warrant, to pled<;e one's self.— >" j:reater.— 20 privdicdre. to profess, to rep- 
 resent.— 21 providtre aliquid. to make provisions for somethinj^.— ^s lonj^er.- "» prop- 
 erty.- 2« constituere^ to establish.— ^» cnt.irely.— 2« absolcere. to perfect.— '^ to arise. 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE. 
 
 139 
 
 future murderers (before those .ho are to mttrder them in their turn). Sen. Ep. 7. See 
 
 ^ ^8. If the adjective in .r^ .^cd ^- -^J^--^ ^^^^.^^ 
 the force f^an ACCKSSonv PUEDia T^^^^ tuch'as'denoL purpose, but 
 a CLAUSE (Ex. 7. 8. 9. --• ~f --i/» ^ S "l ' .-^^i nUu^o^ and even of a mere 
 also of ti-e-cb^se^ con<hn^^^^ ^^^.^Sl^^Ui^; an object-in- 
 
 co-ordination (E.x. 10) ox lessi^Tor understood, or particlpal expressions 
 ^''T"" M ino-^abo ' '"n) - o' or conjunctions (since, when, but, and) 
 !;;^"!;irthci:"hii^^hli? aSjectWe m ..L agrees with its logical subject 
 
 camfe/^r^fi^^^^^^^^^^ Curt. 7, 10, 10. 
 
 ^::. m trtir: thJ:orbal a jecUves in ^^^a.^ hypc^h^ical ^^-in. a. if it 
 wert a participle of the «hypothetical ^je;^»^^ r^f , .^li qu^^^ potuit, datarus am- 
 
 \ufin\iiy.-uruniPn^ ^^^^^ al [nuch as he could, Sud would have given more if 
 plius SI potuisset, >'*i'"^",^,,"'^^V, " q «, /L^Y Q 10 11 24.) 
 Ft had bten in his power. Plin. Lp. 3 71. .<^^f '^^- ^^" "^^;! .^^ , j^ ^^^ construction of the 
 
 ^W Very rarely the adjective ^" "r'^f. %";«.^,,?: adCc dim di Velio IDmSno erat, tam- 
 ablative abndute. as : .Ant'OC^^^^^^^Pj^,^;?, f_f [J'^^e ^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^,.^,^ not -oin- to cross 
 q„am non trau.ituns !" A;:'^^" f TliJm ^S^^'^,^^^ ao,nine foras non pr.>c6d.t, 
 
 Plin. 11. N. 11, IB. Comp. Liv.4, .8; 41, ^' '**'"; ^^.^j^^^m' cito» perituram si emp- 
 
 1. Ju.urtha cedens; t^b. f.mtr ^}^^^^^:^:,:^rem ph£ fam« ^ituram 
 tnrem '"VV"'," ; o^V^ ^^'•. '^k..num Svracusilnum ad Hieronymum tran> Jtum e.^ 
 quani hd<i. ^^^ ■ \:}^'~. ,!-w m-is rtominatiOiiem« mod ce' laturum^. Liv. 24, 4.— 
 mieniin vixdum* libertatem ^^'''^''T'^ J^''''^^^^^^ Liv. 39. 54.-5. \i- 
 
 Thoc in<licium« est. se nee a,='0>o .ec urbi y^^'^" ';[,^^„;i",, i,n am p//^/» a/ «ro.. Liv. 
 deo vos, Cartha.M.iiense^ ^"^'llu. .^a ida?^u "SrUusque puffnatari quam hostis Liv. 
 2' 44—6 Infer mns helium 't^lne. auaacuis u)rui .4 / j q 3 g, Maj^na 
 
 ^1:4 :-7: llerculem ««""?'' V^ -^"s dVTmpStaten^^^ ^^- 
 
 pars hominum est qua>^ ^'«'„»^1:« ''^^^Kofn.vn^^^^^^ exemplum, nisi ener- 
 
 9. In-eniususM yir t'''^,'"»^:?""^ ^^"^ n U.riim rnisj exi-entii' tibi, mi.<.»'?7m? etsi uoix 
 ;. iss.:^^»^ eum feli.ita>t«. Sen. Ep. 1?„- ,\^;,,Vca"Si?Romanus^ vallum inra^urusl^ m 
 exe^Msses. Plin Ep. 3 13.-- 1 • fc'?^fd;!.;\^,.^f ^eonsiS ^^^5^'^^^/: 
 
 copia^o puj:me heret ^^^^-^'^^ --.^dl^r ad Jc^^^ IlannOnem perdt^» co^^^^Murm^J^e 
 KalouTcam. Liv. 40, 4.— 1.3. ai< xauui i «11 1, _ 14 Ad orima sicrna ven- lianni- 
 
 eve ntV^3 inturorum et de «\'-S%^,;^VuoquilVM.^ vohintate" a<^-.r|C- 
 
 balexercit.imin Eiruriaui due t cam quo^^^^^^ regiOnem BactriSnam" misit, 
 
 rs:,^iii^;^^4 ^^^^r^ l^!^^er;sis.^?: 
 
 ivi 
 
 the 
 
 . '- ; ; 7-rr 4 hnrdlv vet — » much less, to say nothing of 
 
 1 to leave.- ^ venal.- ^q"l^^ y-'^tX-'r J^fproof.-'» adjacent country-.- /^ ^;^ 
 
 Orovalix.wer.-'wiih moderation.- 8 to hear y:"^^,,^,^/ to chant songs to t 
 
 (liT^re alic'ii, n> use force a^^^n^J .one -J '^^rs*'^ ^*VvaYc^- »^ 
 
 ;Kof somebody.- »' to ^«' •" ,** '"7,^; r"/\7i,,» 2e force of a phiral.-* ^nnvadere, 
 
 ^qnest (on thy request).- »c<>lU'Ctivesi.urular^v^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^ « alxnit the 
 
 r. K;^". will.- -to unite with o- -; ;•- ,,,n;"to be presen?.- " ci^"«. 
 r"or-k.- 3r^,7.;«-;?,ro"aremble, to gather.- »' saddle. 
 
140 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 J). The Periphrastic Gerund axd Gerundive. 
 § *#1 1. The periphrastic conjugation of the gerund and 
 GERUNDIVE is fornicd by the verbal adjective in dus in connec- 
 tion with the aifTorent tenses and moods of the copula (Predi- 
 cate-Gerund). It presents the verbal idea as an act tliat 
 MUST BE ]K'rformed, the tenses of tiie copnla indicating the 
 TIME at which the necessity of the performance is said to exist 
 or to have existed: Vincendus swiu I must be defeated ; vin- 
 cendus eram, I was to be defeated. 
 
 fc?o nt of tliis iftVrenct. in meaning', the relation of the pcnphra.tic future to 'he peri- 
 X?<t^c -erand i "not exa.-tly the same as the relation of an ordinary active verb to it? 
 St^iv ^oice io th nhe -cnerallv not be chan-ed into the other uMth<.nt a Te<-t- 
 
 Kv^re^S' T e emviits however, in which neriphrastic futures are almost 
 
 • " Iv .t r monn v/w h I i)erii)hra'^tie «rrrund. Tlius punnatHn e.^ds and robui jniQ- 
 «t;^ /m . niy h h ende e! bv \on are to UnhV. Peritnrm .mn tny be trans- 
 Tat eft^elS as ^W/^^^ mUn e<t (I am to pe-ish^. In such instance- the meanijij 
 nfnecessitvi^ not contained in the periphrastic future as 8uch, but is implied in the 
 «ftn ition xliiich is riese iihe<l. The rules on the use of the tenses. an<l on the cons rue- 
 ? on ol^ he • i-e ic .te^^ Imv a stron- analOL'v to those on the periphrastic fuiiire, 
 ioiwi; s.^^ri t;^he hvnoth.-ti.al meanii.ir of the indicative <.f the past tenses, 
 V^'iS^^^^^^^^c^ ol^ille i^finUives to iiitinitive claus.^, and to the similar use 
 of both the periphrastic future and the gerund as accessory predicates. 
 
 Bern 101 The pcriiibrastlc j^orund and the second supine are the only 
 fonn^ of DEroNF.NT verb^with passive mean in.irs (aside from a few pertect 
 ivtrtieinles) as MlliicH ItorUindi sinit, the soUlicrs must liE exhorted al- 
 though mUifes horlautur means ' the soldiers exhort', and not are exhorted . 
 
 Rfjn 10-^ The predicate-irerund siuniilies nf:cessity in the widest sense 
 of the word without distin-uishiuir amon.ir the ditferent de.?rees and 
 modes of necessity. By the -erund a duty an expediency, an unavoid- 
 able F\CT, or a RULE may he represented. Hence the Lnghsh equiva- 
 lents to he applied in renderini^ the gerund are various and must be se- 
 lected according to the requirements of the sense ; as: lince?i(hts mm, 1 
 must be defeated, I have to be, am to be, ought to oe, should be, mn 
 bound to be defeated, or ' it is necessary that I should be defea ed. AV ith 
 negations the gerund often assumes the meaning 'cjmnot or need not., 
 (Ex 14 22), tii^dubifandum iwn est, it cannot be doubted ; mhd tibi timen- 
 diiin est', you need not be afraid ; cavenduni Jion est, no precautions need be 
 taken. , ^. ^ 
 
 Hem l(i3 To express the idea of necessity, there are a-idc from the prcdicate-jrc- 
 nuurnv vo her expression^ at th<' di<poHiion of the Latin lar?ua-e. namely .feftere 
 an I tC np -^^^^ n<^0'^'<se est. oportet. opus- e.^t. Debcre is ot general iinpor , Hmilar to 
 
 ?he serund^ a nd is mainly employed to vary the expression, or for such act.oua which 
 
 I parens 6parin«'.- ^» lUeraJl>/ : ' t.» those that would h ive left nothing behind' ; i. f., 
 siuce they 'would have left uothins beUiud.-- • tircedmcss. 
 
 PEPilPHRASTIC GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 141 
 
 cannot a'Pumo passive form?, especially for the copula with predicative adjectives and 
 nouns although even thc-^e may often be replaced by vkkbs. and th<>n assume the form 
 of -eriinilB {cavendum est tibi=cautus es-<e defies; liBtandum tibi est = latus esse deOe^). 
 Detilrex^ also used in lieu of a gerund with a negaiio i, wlicu the latter would assume 
 ilif ineaiiin- of possihihty, as inuericordld certe vinci noa debeo. Liv. 40, 15. 
 
 Oporfet means an act mokaixv necessary, i. e., an act the non-perform mce of which 
 would involve the disici^'ardiug of some moral, social, or other rule, either particular or 
 ircneral: Oportet no-i pnrent'is aindre.legibus obedlre.fidem servdre. Compare Cic. Div. 2, 
 
 ^ -- ' . .. . • _i.:. .,.:i. ..„..,; . argumentis et ratiOnihus oportet 
 
 See 
 
 11 • Hoc e-'o pliilosophi non esse arhitror testihus uii ; argumentis et ratiOnibus o 
 (he is bound by the rides of his science, ii would be unph'dosophical to use witnesses). 
 Cic. Off. 3, 29, 107 ; Or. 22, 74. 
 
 2, 1. 31; 4, -A b;4. 
 
 Opux est means a necessity conceived as expedient, i e., which would subject the 
 one disrcL' irding it to some inconvexience, as : Emas non quod opus est. sed qiiod necese 
 e.<t Se I. Ep. ".»4.— I^eirem Curiitam consuli ferri opus esse, n^^cesse non esse; That a /ex 
 Citriala would not he ahsoluiely necessary, but advisable. Cic. Fam. 1,9, 25. 
 
 These expressions aie generally not interchangeable without affecting the conception 
 of the speaker. Hut the predicate-gerund is a gkneual exprcs^ion of necessity which 
 niav serve as a pvnouvm of oportet, 7iecesse est, and opus est (Mori ne es-e est = morien- 
 diim ot : pareiHls ainjlre oportet = pareuiea amaudi suut ; hoc uegare tibi opuserit = 
 hoc tibi lugandum erit). 
 
 § 512. The periphrastic Gerund, like all passive verbs, has 
 cither a personal or an impersonal form, tlie latter being ren- 
 dered by some of tlie general methods of expressing Latin 
 impersonal passives (§ 4G0, R. 10.). The personal forms of the 
 periplirastic Gerund are called the 'predicate-gerundive', 
 ^vhile to the impersonal forms the term ' predicate-gerund'* 
 (ill a narrower sense) is applied. 
 
 Hem. 1G4. The equivalents of the gerund, which are mentioned in R. 161, 
 cannot be applied alike for each tense atul mood of the predicate-gerund and 
 gerundive. Thus in English the auxiliary ' muM\ being merely considered 
 le of the signs of the polentiLl mood, admits of no modification by 
 I or mood, Uie perfect ' he muat have been defeated' implying a concep- 
 tion vety ditferent IVom the present potential ' he must be defeated^, if the 
 latter is taken in the ordinary sense ' we must defeat him'. Hence the 
 English potential with * must ' can only be used for the present tense of 
 the^'predicate-gerund and gerundive, while to the other tenses and moods 
 dilTerent expressions must be applied. 
 
 ^* The terms ^erund and gerundive are not very felicitously chosen, and many gram- U 
 maiians have adopted a ditferent (though not better) terminology. We have abstained 1 1 
 from the ea-^y task of proposing new terms, considering mere names as harmless, and I 
 brill.- unwilliie' to incnnse the confusion prevailing on thcMibject, by introducing terms 
 riiff rent from all those ifi practical use. Our terminology is preciser than many ot those 
 
 as on 
 tense 
 
 adopted by other gijimmarians. By 'Gerund' we always understand the impersonal 
 form whether it i< a predicate, or an absolute participle generally designated by tlie 
 "lammarians as 'ncuttrof the passive futuie participle' {ars scribendi). By ' Gerundive 
 The PER-oNAL form is alwavs understood. Besides this di-tinction, there is only one more 
 to be obs.-rved, namely, tliat between PREDiCATE-gerunds and gerundives, and between 
 ATTRIBUTIVE genuids and gerundives. These four categories, which agree with our gen- 
 eral theory on ' phrases '. exhaust all possible forms which the verbal adjective in dus may 
 atsume The gerund and gerundive arc comprised by the general term • gekundial . 
 
142 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 143 
 
 llffTEKF. 
 
 Peufect 
 
 Pllterp. 
 
 II 
 
 laudamlus esscm. 
 laudandus fucrim. 
 landandus fuis^em. 
 
 Present 
 Imperp. 
 
 Pekfect 
 Pluperf. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 SuBJ. bcllandum sit. 
 " bellaudnm csset. 
 
 •' bcllandum fueriU 
 " bcllandum fuisset. 
 
 Synopsis of the peiupiirastic gerund and gerundive. 
 
 1) Gerundive. 
 
 Ppesent Ivd Landandu. sum, I v,nst he praised, ougfd buBJ. laudandus slm. 
 FI.ESENT IND. ^^^ ^ ^^^^^. ^^^^ .x^^^ ^^ ^^ pruu<ed, etc., or it 
 
 in neo-smnj to praise me. ^ 
 
 laudandus orani. 7 /ra,sWo be nraimUtt was 
 
 nece.<mrifto praise me, or / ougld to have 
 
 been prai^*d. . ^ r ».y 
 
 lau.landus fui, (Twos to be praised). lourfM 
 
 to have been praised, it was (would hate 
 
 been) mceysan/ \o iniii-'Q rtu. 
 laudandn.» fucraui, / ourj/it to have been 
 
 FcTuuE» laudanduf erof/.A.;/ hove to be praised, it will be necessary tojyraise nu. 
 PuE'^FNT iNFiNiTivrn^inVc) laudandum cspc, that I must be praised. 
 
 PrtFErTlNF;N.T.vE,mo)laudandum Uu..., that I ought to have been praised Jhat it 
 would have been necessary to praise me. 
 
 2) GeruM). (Impersoual.) 
 Bollandnm ost^. a war must be icagcd (liter- 
 ally : it ynu-sT be warred). 
 bellandnui oral, a war was to be waged, cvgta 
 to have been waged; it was necessary to 
 
 beThmdum 'fuit, a war ought to have been 
 
 waned, etc 
 bcllandum lucrat,a war ought to have been 
 
 waged, etc 
 
 Future, bcllandum erit, it wiU be necessary to wage a 7car. 
 Prksent Infinitive, bcllandum esse, tha> a lOir must be waged. 
 
 PEUFPCT TvFCN.TivR. bcllandum fuisse. that a war ought to have been waged or thai xl 
 woiddhavebeennccessatytowageawar. , , ^ r „r, i «r -, mnrlitional 
 
 auuther sf ulcncu". Sue Book \ I. 
 
 8 513. 1. Only TUAXSiTivE verbs can be used as geniinlivos, 
 while neuter verbs, intransitive verbs, and transitives used with- 
 out a passive subject (transitive object) must take the (im- 
 personal) form of the gerund. Tiic gerundive and gerund, in 
 tliis respect, as in altnost all other rehuions, are exactly treated 
 as the passive voice in the ordinary conjugation. A\ hile the 
 verbal adjective in das, iu the form of the gerundive, always 
 a<rrees with its subject iu gender, number, and case the 
 same as the compound tenses of the passive voice), it takes, 
 in the form of the gerund, always the neuter singular in f?»m. 
 
 I 2 The rendcrin- and treatment <.f the ""P^"^,' ""'Vp-A,'" ,,^' 'onal -crundive in the tlurd 
 this should happen. 
 
 l\ 
 
 he nmi.W.-Milites landandi sunt, the soldiers must 6e prat^s^.-Mihtes laudandos e?se 
 cen'co / am of the opinion that the bravery of the soldier'^ should be praised.— 
 Pu-MKindum est, a biffle. muH bs fought. -Diceudam esse cxistimo quid ceuseas, i 
 believe. thU it must be said what, you are thinking. 
 
 2. In bolh the li^erand and the gerundive, the passive agent 
 01- doer of the action, instead of being in the ablative with ab, 
 as in the ordinary passive, is placed in the dative case. 
 
 Disiripulu!» mihi laudandus est, the student must be praised by m^^^^-Eraentibuscaven- 
 duui est ne decipiantur, by lho<e who buy, care must bi taken lest they be deceived. 
 Item. 1G5. Latiu inlransitives, requiring a completing object in the 
 gfnitive, dative, or ablative, must take the form of the Gerund^ 
 
 Ant reip'djliar mihi. nut mei meorvmque ofiliviscendttm est (I must forget either the 
 ret)ut)Iic. or myself and mine). Liv. 8. l.—Sncrnrrenduni est D. liruto (D. Brutus must 
 be aided). Cic. Phil, O, :^.-Sao culciue J udicio utend urn est (Every cue must use his 
 own judument). lb. N. D. 3, 1. 
 
 Hem. 10»; In Varro and Lucrctiaa transitive verb? often take the impersonal form 
 of the ^erund even if thev are accompanied by a transitive object in the accusative, as : 
 Dnnd>un o/ieram est (inst. of danda opera est). Varro K. R. 1, 1-2.— Certe, ut opuior^am 
 faciendum est sensibus auctam (instead of ea facie u da est ancfa). Lucr. 6, h-ri.— canes 
 potius nauco^ et arrh- habnidum (est) quam multos (instead of Canes pauci habendisurtt) 
 Varro 14 11. 1 '^l. In C;esar and Liw no examples of this construction are found» : in 
 Cicero only two examples of it are extant (de Sen. 2, and Scaur. 2, 13). But in the lor- 
 mer of these passages the reading; is doubtful. 
 
 Rem 107 Verv rarely the a?ent of the periphrastic ecrnnd takes the ordinary form oft 
 with the ablative, especiallv with verbs iioverniiii; a dauve. when it mi<;ht be doubtlui 
 wiiich of the two dative- is'meant to be the aeei-t, and which is meant to be the object 
 of the verb- Admon^ndum ]X)tius te a me quam rogandum puto. Cic. Div. lo, A.—Aqun- 
 turt>on'jmultr,ruw rivium gmbus a voIjU est consnlenduifi, the property of many citizens 
 is at stake whose interests {guibu^) mu<t be provided lor by you {avobis). Cic. Man -{. 
 Sometimes the placing toizether of the two datives is avoided by a circumlocution of the 
 fforund with fakenduTn est ut (similar to that with/ore ut), as Faciendum mihiputati ut 
 fuif: tifteru b'revi resmnd'^rem, I l>elieved that I ou^ht to answer tliy letter soon. Cic. 1^ am. 
 3 8 (in-tead of tuis Ufferix mihi brni re.^iwndendum putdri) But Ke-'erally, when no 
 ambi-vuitv ran arise, the two datives are used along with each other : Lt hac lege utar 
 non c".nceditur ab eo cujus roluntftti mihi obtcmperandum est (by hrm ^'^f^f.Jf'f^'f"^,^ 
 be res^perfed b>/ m^). Cic. Clu. 57. 158. The same is the case when only one ^^at nre is used 
 which, by the sense, is clearly pointed out to be the dative of the agent, as: Eum qui 
 imperat cogitare ojiortet, hrevi tempore sibi esse parendum. Cic. Leg. 3, 2. 
 
 Hem ir,s" When the gerund or gerundive is accompanied by the dative of the agent, 
 the English constr.iction is regularly made active, in order to avoid the awkward passi^ 
 circumlocutions which are generally repugnant to our lan<ruai;e. The Latin datn e ol tne 
 Sl'en. nnS !hen be chan-.-ed into.an Knglish subject-n..minative a- mihi ^riortercdum eH 
 1 must die. Cattra militibus facienda sunt, the soldiers must make a camp. In th 8 
 active construction several expressions of necessity may be used which in the pa^sne 
 w?» uhl no be ulmiss ble. as • it is the duty \ ' I am obliged ', ; it is necessary for me ' : 
 Ihcachoamlco tuo instifuenda/uit. it was thy friend's duty (it was incnmbent on him 
 to institute this acii.m. .mhi/ugiend'mi erat. I was obliged (c«>nn)elledMo flee. Z/t-s 
 Tincendum fuit, for them it was (would have beeq) necessary to be victorious Even ^f 
 to the .-eru'n.l no dative of the agent is added, the sentence is often rendered into En g- 
 sh as~if s ch a d.tive were expressed, as: Moriendnm certe c^U at id t'^^^f«'«- <^n eo 
 ipso die (we m.ist certainly die. etc.). Cic. Sen. 74. Si in alterutro P^ccandum t^t,7jialo 
 tidm nimis timidus quam parntm prudens (if lam to err on one side, etc.). Cic. Marc. ^i. 
 Jiem. \m. The rules ort the consecution of t enses (§349) are applied to the periphrastic 
 
 1 Some i:rammariah8 except from this rule the verbs uti. /rui. fungi n^^a i>onri stat- 
 - ing that, in tlie gerundive construction, they may be treated «"^ ■/»">" ^;|f;>f- ^^ f m- as 
 a u<a_'e occurs with those writers only who use the.^e verbs m tluMr oMinary U>^^l^^p-^ 
 transitives. In Cicero only a trace of this construction is found «;>c. Fin. |; »■- .' ^^ 
 l-assagesthat were form-rly adduce.l from these authors in proof of ^^'^ "^^^;f ^'^ 'i.^^ 
 gerund, have been critically emendated, so as to be read now with gerunds. (Ca,b. w. u. 
 1, 32. Liv. 37, 49.) 
 
144 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 145 
 
 irernndfl in the present and imporfiM-t, the fame as to ordinary verbs: pwit/rr^eociipne 
 Sln-cnienduni df, (he doubts xvliettier the nlliesou-ht to be assisted). Mtfarit Bocumc 
 subv(nicn<intn e^.'tef (he doubted whether the allien ought to be assisted», tor the su^- 
 iuiK tive of tht; i)erffct and pluperfect s»t'e R. 172 foil. . 
 
 J^e/n .10 In order to tran^slate Kn^'li^h sentences with phrases expressing necessity 
 into Latin sentences with j^nTundive construction, they must (if active) always be turnea 
 into pHssives, and if thev have no transitive object, the impersonal form of the ge- 
 rund inust be given to them, the active sulijects taking the form ol the dative of the 
 
 "°h" Active : The soldiers must undergo danirers : pass. : Dangers must be undergone 
 
 hy\(o)t\n'»ok\icrs— Milif thus peric'dasiibeu/u/asunf.. ^ ,, „ ^ ^„^f i,« 
 
 a AcTivK : You must take care that you do not arrive too late ; pass. : Care must oe 
 
 taken by (fo) vou that elc.—C'irandi/m libi est ne tardins adve/iia^. 
 :i. Active : Thy friend should obey the commands ; pass. : It should be obeyed by {fo) 
 
 \hy iYiexH\to\hi''c(m\mi\\nU—Amlco(voj>/Msobediendt/me/)t „ ^ ., „ r., «,«,.! 
 1. Liber f.^/^.r7N/i//(^//*'///.«-' qui nuUi turpitudini» servit^.Auct. IIcr.4,24.- 2 In omni- 
 bus rebiii,priusnuam m^'jnHWvin'^.adhibenda est pneparatio* diliL'ens Cic. Off. 1, 21 - 
 3 TacitiE magis et occultie inimlcitije timendiE suxt quam indicfip» et apertje. « _ic. 
 Verr 2 h 71 — 4 '^ov(\\Ci\ sunt putnndi qtit mercantnr» a mercatorihus' quod statiiu 
 vendanV Cic Off 1 42 ITjO— 5. Fortes et magnanimi» sunt habendi non qui faciunt, 
 sed qui propulsanti» injnriam. Cic. Off 1.65.— »'.. Tria ridenda^^ mnt oratO-i. quid 
 diait et quo loco, et quo modo Cic. Or. 4.3.- 7. Diffennd'na nobis ei^f inquit (Cnesar> 
 iter ill prlescntiil. Ca-s U. C. ;i, 8.5.- S. K.xistit qiue.tio suMimcilisi^ num quando»» 
 amtci novi veteribus nnt anteiMnendi. Cic. Am. 19, n7.- 9. \ obis carendaac.rur/ifnda 
 quam primiim (§ 31.5. K. 18) amam itas »*<..,•/ Asiie. Liv. 3S, 17.- 10 hx his perspici»» 
 potest quid fit propter turpitudiuem /'/f7/Vwr/ww, quid ucnco^' /urfieriduTn non «^ 
 quodoiiinlno turpe non est. Cic. Off 3, 7,33.- 11. Kiro vcstros pat^res vivere arbitror 
 eteamquidem vitam qune f.<f/ sola vita xominanda. Cic. Sen. 21. 7..— 12. 1 hijosophi 
 Kpicurei»^ omnTs resquiPcWW/" hominieJ7>^/f-«(/(ti8 volu])tSte metiuntur'». Cic. I i'*-''*»- — 
 13 (i<'sui20 KomanOrum neque cum Gnecis^», neque ulla cum ^^cute sunt conferenda" . 
 Cic Tiisc. 1, 2.— 14. Nemo in auiOrem siii (^'iiiU cohort nndused'^'^. Sen. Ben. 4.1«.— 
 15. Nihil iiinoeenti turn optandt/m (est) quam aMiuiim judicium. Cic. Clu. 7.— lb. isi 
 iL-ro ad fratrem, inonendian ed. Liv. 40, 10.- 17. Qiium tempus necessiiasquH* postu- 
 lat dec^rtanduvi^^ manu est, etmors servitQti-« turpitudmuiue antejionenda. Cic. on. i, 
 23.— IS. Aut riegandum eM deiim esse^aut (pii deum esse concedant t-x^fatendmn e^t 
 etim aliquid a-ere. Cic. Nat. D. 2. 7»i.- 19. Quis ad LMibernacula^' sedeat-», suinma 
 cura pfvvidendum^^ et pmcac€nd>/m^<> vobis ed. Liv. 2L 8.-20. Ltiam m secundissimif* 
 rebiiB^' ma.xime ed utei>d>/m coiisilio amicOr.im. Cie. Off 1, 20.- 21. Aut a.'^entiendmn 
 Citt^3 nullii cum3* gravitates* paucis^*, aut frustra»^ dissenliendum. Cic. J^am. 1, ». .3. 
 — 22 Ouie more (acco'dinq to vsnoe) asrenfur institutisque civilibiis, de eis nihil est 
 nrmciiZnClum^^ Cic. Off 1, 41, 148.— 2:^. liisistendum, Laeli et Scipio, senectflti ed, 
 I'iii-que vitias» (iiliiientia comptiimnda*'' (y'int\ ; />!//7/urn(/z/w tanquam^i contra morbiim 
 sic^'- contra senectutem ; habeiula rati"*3 valeludinis. vtendum c.xercit-ationibus" 
 modicis, tantuin" cibi et potiOnisi" adhlbendum*'' ut refieiantur vires, non oppnmantur, 
 necvero corpori f^oVi m/breniendiwi t*/, sed menti atque ammo multo magis. Cic. ^en. 
 11 35— 24 Multis casibus didici. quando /?M7«rt/i'/wm, quando abdmendum pugna 
 *j<:<« Liv 4-i 3ti — 25. Civitatis vestne tyraunum talem esse inter omuls constat, ut de 
 
 » Di'so'race vice— "^ to be a slave.- » to beirin.— < preparation.— « pronounced. 
 — « to'puivhase.— ^ dealer.— « instead of vend it ilri sunt.— » magnanimous— »<> to 
 ward off— 11 to see ^o thn-e thincrs.— i'-» rather diffieidt.— >3 sometimes, inst. of ah- 
 gua>,do.'^vM § ;357, It. 4. §:«», H. 11.- »« the charms.- » per^picere to see (clearly).- 
 »• iccircoQuod. for the reason that.— »7 Epicurean.— »8 erpetere, to desire.- »» l!^^J}^1> 
 to measure — 2« deeds.— '-'» thoi^e of the (ireeks. Instead of the lorm mentioned § .JO., 1, 
 the attribuiive genitive is often directly compared with the goyerniuir word of the 
 attribute that forms the first member of the comparison. This is called ' compamtio 
 comnendiana\— ^a conferre, to compare. (The gerund means here' do not allow , 
 ' do not admit').— 23 to exhort.— ^* necessitv.— 26(/ecrrA7r« mann, to fii;ht with the hatid, 
 i €. to make use .>f arms.- '•^« slaverv.-" gxiUrnacula, pi. t.. helm.— " suhjunctivt., with 
 the force of a gerund.— ^» to provide for.— 3o to consider with care.— »i in the greatest 
 pro^peritv.- ^^ asiieiUiH alicui.xo endorse somebody's opinions.— s* uuhoui any.— 
 I» d\<rnity — ^^ paucis is the object of both, UfOfentiendum and dissentiendum.— ^^ ^„ "' 
 out effect, to no purpose.- *^ j^r^^W^re aliquid, to lay down rules.- " delects.— *<> to 
 make up — *^ as if— *'* so.— *» ratiOnetn habere alicujus ret, to have due regard for 
 sonu-thing.— ««exercise.— " only so much.— ««drink.— «Mo take.— ««for this devi- 
 ation from tiie law of consecution, see p. 426 foil., Obs. 2.— «» that. 
 
 r 
 
 ? 
 
 jMT'na ejns magls qnam de amicitiil nobis coqitnndum sit. Liv. 38, 14.— 26. Quints 
 rfKideiidum HI impui,'nantibus',ne is quidemdnbitat qui spevictorioe caret. Just. 38,4. 
 
 § 511. The IMPERFECT INDICATIVE (more rarely the Perfect, see Ex. 
 17. 18) of the periphrastic gerund or gerundive, indicates that a necessity 
 of sonic future action existed at a time anterior to the speaker's time, as 
 UecjiH litterm in sendtu legends erant, the king's letter had to be read in 
 the Senate. The Perfect (more rarely the imperfect) is used in a hy- 
 roTHETiCAL scHsc (contraiy to reality), indicating that an action ought to 
 Juive been done, or that, in a certain contingency, \iwould harebe£n neces- 
 sary to do the action : Hoc non polUcendum fuit (more seldom erat)^ this 
 ought not to have been promised. Hoc faciendum fuit si etc., it would 
 have been necessary to do this if etc. 
 
 Rem. 171. TJr.rely the imperfect indicative refers hypothetically to a present necessity 
 (inst. of a subj. imp.), Quodd Cn. Pcnnpejux Romoi prit'dtus e.<set, hoc tempore taiiien ad 
 taiituin bdhim is erat (inst. of esset) eligendiiii (ought to be. elected). Cic. Leg. M. 17. For 
 tiie particulars of this construction see p. 727 foil., Obs. 24. 2»). — The English perfect 
 poTK.NTiAL with 'iiiusV ifl iiot expressed by the periphrastic gerundials, but by oportet, 
 or tievesse est, with a perfect subjunctive: (^uoniam babes istum equum, aut emeris opor- 
 tet. aut muiiere a''C''})eri,s\ aut, si horum nihil est, surnpueris necesse est; You must have 
 either bought the horse, or received it as a gift, or must have stolen it. Cic. Inv. 1, 45. 
 
 Hetn. 172. In the subjunctive nK>od the imperfect of the gerund or gerundive is sub- 
 ject to, or exfm])t from the rules of consecution in the same way as ordinary verbs 
 "(§§ 349. 350), as : I'ra?ce})it senatui quid esset decernendum. he directed the Senate what 
 to decree (what was to be decreed). 8ee Ex. 9. — Si hoc faciendum esset, equidem re- 
 cu.silrem, if this were to be done, I should refuse. Sec Ex. 10. 11. Instead of the geniud 
 or gerundive with essem, the gerund or gerundive with forem is sometimes employed. 
 But g(n«'rally it performs the office of the lacking future subjunctive of the periphrastic 
 conjugation, indicating a necessity that will arise at some future time. See Ex. 12. 13. 
 
 Hern. 173. The perfect subjunctive of the periphrastic gerundials hardly ever occurs 
 in any other than hypothetical meaniusr, denoting eiiher what ought to have been done (Ex. 
 2!. 22), or what would have been necesxarij or unavoidable if some other action had or had 
 not happened (see the Ex. below). The law of consecution, in this form, is subject to 
 the same exceptions a* in reirard to the periphrastic future (p. 132, E. 145) : Ita ge^<ta res 
 est ut, si adfiiissent Etrusci, accipienda clades fuerit (that a defeat ivould have been una- 
 roidab.'e). Liv. 10, 27.— A necessary action, 7va//y ^>^/:/b?v/i€(/. if a subjunctive must be 
 usfd, is not expressed by the perfect geruudial, but by circumlocutiou with dtb^re^ 
 ojyortet, etc. 
 
 Hem. 174. The pluperfect indicative is generally applied with the force of the hypo- 
 thetical pi-rfect {ou'fht to have been. See Ex. 2:3), but also in its proper meaninu:. to deiiote 
 the necessity ol an" action as past in regard to a past time. See Ex. 24. The pluper- 
 fect SUBJUNCTIVE, the same as in ordinary verbs, is used in hypothetical periods (§ :i50), 
 either in the principal sentence, or in the clause. Si hoc mifii faciendum fuisset, recusassem, 
 if I should have had to do this. I would have refused. Hoc tnihi faciundum/insset, nisi 
 littertetut^ venissent, 1 would have been obliged to do this if not thy letter had arrived. 
 See Ex. 25. 2U. 
 t:^' In the use of the future of the gerund or gerundive no anomaly is to be noticed. 
 1. Caesari omnia uno tempore erant agenda: xcxlUum^ jyroponendmn^, signum tuba* 
 dandu/n, ab opere revocandi milites, acies instruenda^, milites cohoriandi. Caes. B. G. 
 % tiO.— 2. Romilnis iter i)er regnum nostrum dedi, et per Thraciam, ubi pnx prcesfanda* 
 barbaris' erat. Liv. 39. 28.-3. Dilectibus" intra paucos dies— neque enim multi mili- 
 tes legendl^ erant— pericciii', consules in provincias proticiscuntur. Liv. 37, 51. — 
 4. Civitatem EburOnum sua spoutei" populo Romano bellum facere ausam (esse), vix 
 erat eredendmn. C«s. B. G. 5, 28.— 5. Militibus simul et de navibus desiliendum et in 
 fluctibus'» con-sidendum'^'^ et cura hostibusf7-a/;;?vf7naw/?/w. Cae.s. B. G. 4, 24.— «. Apud 
 Pvthagoramis discipirlis quinque annis tacendum erat. Sen. Ep. 52.-7. Cum montem 
 hostes cepissent, et locy munlto se teuCrent, evndum ad hostis erat, si vincere vellem. 
 
 » impugnare, to attack.— - The flag.— 3 to bring up.— « the tuba.— * to draw up.— • to 
 warrant, to keeu.— ' A barbaris is not the passive agent, but means 'on the part of. 
 See § 445. R. .5.5.— 8 dilectus. 4tli dccl.. a draft.— » to draft.— i» of their own accord.— 
 '1 waves.— 1'^ to stand.— ^3 Nom. Pythagoras, Greek decL 
 
UG 
 
 rERIPHIlASTIC GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 Quid» si nrbcm cum mcpnibns co loco tenCrcni ? Ncnipe' oppt/f/nandi^ eranf. Liv. 
 3S, 19.— 8. Armjlt:!!* quadrTu'as* in primil acic locaverat* rex. quia 8i in fxtrCino aiit 
 in iiuMlio loiilta' fbri'iit, per suos (militcs) af/tv(/<e* eranf. Liv. 37. 11.— 9. Hi mihi nt»n 
 icl videMnntiir acciisjlre quod exsef. accitoandtwi. Cic. 8en. '). — 10, Damon vas^ factus est 
 Phintia>*^, nt si hie non ad diem certam revcrtisset {^'3U), moritndum fwet sibi. (Mc. 
 Off. 3, 10, 45.— 11. Si pro alio dicendnm^ es>ft, tempus ad niedUandnm^^ siunpBirisem. 
 Liv. 40. 15.— 12. Periculum esse dixit nc victi mxvz\^ timendi forent quam bellante)* 
 fiiissent. Liv, ;W, :i5. — \'\. Patres consiilis ropias iniiiui" nolebant. nietii ne cum (Jallis 
 fm-ef bellandum. Liv, 37, 51.— 14, Utinam»^, inquit O, Pontius Samiiis>3. ' turn essem na- 
 lus si qiiando RomJliii dona accipere ccppissent ! ' Nic illi multa»* »vcc\\\a^^ ea'iKCtanda 
 fuTnmt/ Cic, Oft', *2. 21. 75.— 15. Promissum potiiis won faciendum quam tiun taptrum 
 lacinus admitfendumft/i/'«. Cic. Off. 3, 25. «♦.5.— Ifi. Hoc quidim jineccptum falsiim 
 est ; illnd potiiis prmipundutn fuit, ut ne quando anulre inciperf tuns emu queni ali- 
 qiiando odisse j)ossi;inus. Cic. Am. 1(>. fiO.— 17. Cum AristonTco belliim geruiul'im fuH 
 P. Licinio et L. Valcrio C(Uisulilui.-. Cic. Phil. 11, 8.— 18. Quo tandem anim«» fuisse 
 illot* mbitramini qiiibiit» liis de rcbiis non modo audlendumffn(,\ernm vtiamjudi- 
 candum! Cic. Clii. 10.29.— 19. Quamobrem'' aiu exiqend'i'* re^es won fiierunt, aut 
 plebi re»», n<m verbo-», danda lilxrtas, Cic, Le^', 3, 10.25.— 20. Maxime/^/j7 optan- 
 t/'/m M. ScAuro. judices, ut sine offeiisioue"^' cnjiisquam retinCret'»^ lamiiijc su:e dii;- 
 iiitatem. Cic. Scaur. 1, 1.— 21. Dubitilri potest, ad/twenilumn-.-^/uerif lu>c ;;enus'''*. an 
 plaiie^» omittendiim. Cic. Ofl", 3, 2, 9.— 22. Quis e«it qui diibitet, qnin hac re compertil 
 nnl obeunda'^'^ mors Ciuentioaut ffuftripienda-'' accusatio^» /Wa// Cic. Clnent, 17, 48. 
 — *^3. Totiis" est nunc ab eis a qiiibiis tuendx^ fuerafy rclutus. Cic, Fam, 1,9,17,— 
 21, Consul, perfectis <eis) quje Hoiiuc a^^/^^/a /«^/a/i/, profectns in Galliam est. Liv. 
 31, 22,— 25, Si lioc mihi per me effinendum fuuf^et, non me p<riiit5ret Ifa esse molTtum. 
 Cic Fam, «. 12, 2.— 2»i. Nisi reveViisset Dejotariis, in <?o couciavi'o v\ Cuban dum^^ fni^sei 
 quod proximjl noctc corruit^^, Cic Div. 2. 8, 2i».— 27. Et mores ejus erunt (tpecfandi" in 
 qiiem beneficiiim conl'ertnr. et animus eri;a nos. Cic. Oft". 1, 14.— 28. Si Galli bellum 
 facereconabinitiir, frd/aAW^M^^e^/i/ ab iureri<3» C. Mariiis. Cic. Font. 2f,.— 2<». Impri- 
 mis videndum trit ei qui rempublicam administrabit, ui"« ^uum quisque teneat. Cic. 
 Off. 2, 21. 
 
 § 515. Tlie two iNFiNTTTVRS of the Gerund and Gerundive are used 
 on'ly in infinitive clau.^es, wliether tliese are construed with a suhject-ac- 
 cusative, or with a subject-nominative. In this construction the |>resent 
 infinitive of the copula {es^e) is frequently dropped. The perfect infinitive 
 has almost always a (past) hypothetical meaniuij:: llocfaciundamfaisse 
 putdvitj he thought that this ouf/ht to have been done. 
 
 Rem. 175. The most usual verbs after which infinitive clauses with the perund or pc- 
 rnn<iive are used, are those of thinkivo and dkcueeino (eJrUHtn'ire. pufare, judkiire, 
 cen^lre. decernere, sfdtuere and especially ri'i'^ri witli a nominative with the inttiiitive). 
 It is a remarkable exception to the j^eneral rules that verbs of decuekisg. demanding, 
 and otiier verbs which, accordin-^ to § 393, R. 27, are construed with ?//. must t)e con- 
 ftrued with an intlnitlve clause, if the depeiul<Mit i)redicate is a gerund or <,'erundive. 
 The veri> ceris^re (to believe, to deeu»), if it is thus construed with a «gerundive infinitive 
 clause, generally means ' io (/^cr<;e', ' to pass a resolution', or 'to move, to propose a 
 resolution'. 
 
 Cato Carthaginomdelendam censnit, Cato moved that Carthaqeho dPufroyed—V^Xvcs 
 diem unuiu adjiciendum lii(lr)nim ceusueriint. The Senate pasfied a nso!i/tion that one day 
 of Uie (/ameftbe added. Liv. ;i9, 7,— ?5il)i quis(iue d«^poscit. pfcllendos inde hosils, L'reri/ 
 one demaud.-t on his own account that the enemy must he dricea away. Liv. 22, 28.— 
 Legaii domuiu mittendi (esse) videuinr, itaeems that the envoysought to be sent home.— 
 
 How.— 2 of course, surely.- ' to attack.— < chariots (wilii four horses),— » to place. 
 — •to drive,— ' bail, suietv,— » Norn, J'hintias.— » to speak.— »" for deliberation. 
 —1» minuere. to diminish,- »2 woidd that.— »» the Samnile.— »« in an ironical pense = 
 pauca.— 1* centuries. Tliis sentence is remarkable, on account of an accusative of 
 time being made the passive subject. The construction ouglit to liave been imper- 
 sonal.— 1« The second member of the comparison corresponds in grammaticjil form to 
 the first. We employ here in English tiie intinitive.— »^ therefore,— »» to expel.— 
 i» in reality.— '•'" in words.— 21 offeiice.— '* to maintain.— ^3 fo admit.— ^* subject. — 
 25 alto<'ether.— -^ to undergo.— '■'7 to undertake, to commence, - 28 accusation.— 
 29 wholly.- 30 apartment.— 3* to sleep.- ^2 to fall, to be destroyed.— " spectare, 
 (Ui'ivid.'io look fur something, to take something into ccmsidenition — 3* excitare tiy 
 rouse.- 86 inferi. the lower gcnls; here used instead of the ' lower world', the abode of 
 the dead.— 3« viiere is construed with ut^ if it means ' to sec that Bomcthiuf: be done . 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 147 
 
 Lc^ati domum mittendi fuisse videntnr, it seemj< that the envoys ought to have been sent 
 
 Aor/ie.- Sempronio abeundum fuisse putiXvit, he believed that Hempromus ought to have 
 
 ieft. 
 
 Hem. 176. Rarely the perfect infinitive of the Gerund or Gerundive refers to a past 
 necessity witiiout a hypothetical meaning, as : Non satis mihi attenderevidgris. Pomp^jo 
 non solum quid esset'opiimum nrf«A?dMm///i<-w, sed etiam quid necessariuin (that it was 
 Pompey's duty «tc). Cic, Lig. 3, 11, 26.— The gerund or srerundive with /ore has like- 
 wi-^e a hvpoth«'tical force referring to a future. It is used if a sentence whose predicate 
 would be ill the future of the gerund, must assume the form of an inflnitive clause, as : 
 JHjrit H id factum esi^et, urbem hostibus tradendamfoie (that it "would be necessary to de- 
 liver ttie city to the enemy) 
 
 1. Kutilius, et si dammltus est, vidCtur mihi tamen inter viros optimos atq 
 entissimos esse nnmerandus. Cic. Foiitej. 17.— 2. Difficile fuit judicSre, i 
 \ 421, R. 73) virtflte anteferendus^ viderCtur. Cses. D. G. 5, 44 — 3. Reguhis 
 
 atque inno- 
 centissimos esse numerandus. uic. r oiuej. 1«.— i. ijuhchk mn, juunjinv, uter ntrl 
 (S421 R. 73) virtflte anteferendus^ viderCtur. Cses. D. G. 5,44— 3. Reguhis captIvo3 
 rlddenda^ in senStu non2 censuit. Cic. Off. 1, 14.— 4. Csesar parfiendum^ sibi ac la- 
 tins dl<trihuendum exercitum putavit. Cscs. B. G. 3. 10.— 5. Ctesar has tantulSrum* 
 reruin occupationes» Britanniae» anfe/)onendas non judicabat. Cses. B. G. 4,22.— 6. Ari- 
 ovistn« tantos sibi spiritus^ tantanique arrogantiam sumpserat* \xi ferendus^ non vide- 
 rOtur Cies B. G. 1,3:1.- 7. Quum muUi delmdum Atheniensium nomen, nrbemque in- 
 ceudio con^imendam censercnt, negarunt se SpartaniexduObusGncciieoculis altenim 
 cnitnro«'o Jusr. 5, 8.— 8. Exsules" vociferabant»2. priusquam tali foedere obligaren- 
 1ur>3 nox.osi* puniendosesse. Liv. 38, :« — 9. Eis qui se occultaverant»» rerum omnium 
 inopi'a pereundum vide>atur. Cies. B. O. 6, 43— 10. Nee vero audiendi»« qui graviter 
 trrt,'c. //^/'/m'Mnimlcis putahunt. Cic. Off 1,25.— 11. Qnis non videt illis pnmiissis 
 sfandum^** won es<€ qua? coactus quis"» metu promiserit ? Cic. Off. 1, 10.— 12. Germanico^» 
 hello ctuifecto C;csar niuliis de causis statuii2> sil)i Rhenum esse tran-seundum. Css. B. 
 G 4 1(5 __ 13 Se<'estaiii22 pr;rtoris imperio parendum esse decrevCrunt. Cic. Verr. 2, 
 4 '^4' — 14 Mithridates optandum sibi fuissQ ait, nt [de eo] licCret consulere bellumne 
 sit23'cum Uomanis an pax habenda. Trog. Pomp, in Just. :38. 4.— 15. Maxime assen- 
 tior eis qui ne-ant eum ]ocum24 a Panaetio consnltos* relictum2«, nee omnino scrtben- 
 dum fmsse clc. Oft'. 3. 2. 9.— 16. Scipio NasTca dixit, si id factum esset, non magis 
 (§ 412) Conieli:e27 familiaj quam urbi Romanic (Part I, p. 142, note 31) fore erubescen- 
 dam. Liv, 38, 59. 
 
 §tll6. The predicative gerundive, similar to the adjective 
 mums (g 510) is used without the copula 1) in place of a clause 
 of purpose; 2) instead of a relative clause, as: 
 
 Ilanc rem tibi conservandam dedi, I gave you this thing to preserve it, t. ^,, Mu 
 order thanoumav ].reserve it ' (literally '/o 6e;>r..m-.d ').-Nullam rem novimagis 
 fugiendam'qntxm banc, I know nothing ivhich ought to be more shunned than this. 
 
 EF" In these constructions the gerundive has the grammatical form of a completing 
 or^ce«<orv predicate, or that of an attribute. But such gerundives must be distin- 
 guished fmmUieatnibutive gerundives properly so called, which have a peculiar lunc 
 lion of their own, losing altogether the idea of necessity, bee K. l»o. 
 Rem 177. The predicate gerundive, denotinnr purpose (also called parti- 
 crpivL GERUNDIVE, bein- a real participle of the periphrastic conjuga- 
 tion) is attached 1) to transitive objective phrases; 2) to passive predica- 
 tive phrases ; 3) (very rarely) to predicative phrases formed by neuter 
 verbs It always agrees in gender, number, and case with Us logical sub- 
 
 » To nrefer — « The negation is taken out of the inflnitiveclanse to which it Jog'caUy 
 ,elon ^s^ and is connected-with the principal verb, See § 411.-- » to divide - ' toMuli^ 
 otrillin" - «occunation with,- «to the expedition to Britain.— 'airs.- sibi ^m- 
 "r' to a-umr-»e gerund denotes here ^«'«^''ibility (it seemedto be ""Pf ^^^'f .^^ 
 'a'rwi irhim.- ^° t.vt^ar out.- n exile- «^to clamor - i3 oft t^ar^ ^^^'«d "/nh^ 
 liifv- 16 tn hide — »« to listen to.— »' graviter ira-sci, to feel very angrj.— siure 
 tudVe to a1,i e bv a thin" - " ii st. oialiquis.- =« German, adj.- ^i verbs o( decreeing 
 ni?vtrt;^^sfn!edi'itl infiTdtive clauses ^^.ntaining J.-'runaive predicate, e^e" ;f the 
 subject of the clause and that of the principal sentence «;« Vfh-Ci^iTants of l^e^e^ta - 
 use in this case ..bject-inrtnitives in lieu of a cl=tuse - " inhab,ui ts o^ be^^^^^ 
 2> for the deviation from the law of consecution see p. 420.- subject. on pui 
 
 pose.— 3« to skip.— ^'' Cornelian. 
 
 b 
 
 so 
 
 mere 
 
 be 
 
 g' 
 uliq 
 
 m 
 
148 
 
 rERirHRASTIC GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 ject, which, in the case 'No. 1 is the transitive object of the principal 
 l>reaicatc ; but in the cases No. 2 and 3 it is the o^rammaticai snl)ject of 
 the principal predicate. Hence, in tiie first case, the ijernndive is in the 
 ACCUSATIVE, and in the second and third cases in the nominative : 
 
 (\) Cxf^ar erfrcifu/n Titurio Sablno in Mcnapios ducendum tUulit, Ciesar gave to 
 TituniisSablnus tht; army (inorder) to lead it (literally ' to he lecD into the coiiniry of 
 the Menapii. Cx^. B. G. 4, ii— (2) Kxercitus duce»rinx Fahio in Vejentl;» datiir. the 
 annv is» given to Fabius «in order) to he led against the Vejentians. Liv. 2, 43.— (3) Nu- 
 datiini l>-c'nm piti^t iinhiibii-' p>i'r^ faciendum., the oare rtwris open to the rain, to rot 
 (or, taking imbrihus fur an ablative 'to be rotted— dci?troyed— by ranis'). I.iv. 3«), 17. 
 
 Rem. 178. The Irausritivc verb» most usually cotniccied with participial gerundives 
 
 are : 
 
 1) \>rbs implying a grantino or oivino (in the widest 8en?e of the word), the ^rar,- 
 pitive object denoiiTii: a tiiiuL' to be dispo^^ed of by the action contained in the gerund- 
 ive. Such verbs nviTdare. tradere, itrahT're. edere. a<'H(fa:lre. nffribuere. proponere. ditt- 
 dere (in the meining to distributp). concedere, permittere (in the mi-aniiii.' to fntrmf), 
 rHinriiiere, ohjicere (to offer, to at)andon). Here behmg the verbs /orJr^nnd coitdncere, 
 the former \\\ the meaning ' to give out a wouK on contract (o/)'/< /ocar*'), or ' to rent 
 out a THING ' (rem locdre) ; the latter in the meaning " to Uike a work on contract ' (ppus 
 co>iducere),or 'in\nTci\i\\'n\\x' iremmnducere).^ ., ,, ^ 
 
 2) Verbs denoting to skni) a person or thing, to be disponed of as fpecitied by the 
 gerundive, as ndtlere, ditcere. df-dt/cere. 
 
 3) V'erbs denoting to dkmano, to take, or to receivk fomethine (for a p-irpose, ex- 
 pressed l»y the gerundive), as d<'j)oscere, exiyere, su/nere, dtliytre, ncciptre, recipere, nus- 
 
 ciiy€r€. 
 
 4) The verb curare (aliquid), denotiriL' to take rare of a thinir, the nature of the care 
 being expressed by the gerundive (see U. 178). But comp. K. VJS. 
 
 Hern. 179. The participial gerundive i? c«'nerally translated either by 'for' with a ver- 
 bal noiin or participial in j/f/, or bv an infinitive, which is genetally clia"L'ed into an 
 active form when a I'EHson (generally the remote object of the principal predicate) id 
 conceived as the doer of the action, as: Pueri< senindlns ediscatdiUi danvis ; literally: 
 'we give to boys sentence-' to be memorized ' ; but more idiomatically 'to rnemorize. ' {them), 
 or 'for mertunizing \ This chan.'e into an active cannot fak<' plac<> if we cannot connect 
 the doer of the action as subject with the infinitive, as: Sempronium liamatn vddt a 
 com 
 
 The 
 bei 
 
 mlibuti quarendt/m, he sent Sempronius to Rome to be questioned by the consuls. 
 Phe f^erundive with curare alwavs retains in English its passive form, the verb curare 
 ng ll-anslated to cni<e or order (something to be done), or ' to hare' (something 
 
 done), as tnvrof! reficiendos nirare. to order (cau-e) the walls to be repaired ; domum de 
 Integro wstrvenddm curatif, he had his house furnished anew. 
 
 Hem 180. Hence to translate Eni.'lish infinitives into Latin if they arc govrned by the 
 transitive verbs mention<Ml above, they nnist be clianged passively, and rendered by the 
 «ERiNDivE (never by the Latin infinitive), which must be placed in aL'reement with the 
 
 with ad and ihe gerund after the trans-itive verbs mentioned above, is not so rare as itM 
 represented bv some grammarians (See for inst. Cic. I'hil. 10, 2, ."> ; OtT. 2, 13; 2, 17; 
 rianc. 17. 41 ; Mnr. :{!, GO ; Dom. 2-3, GO ; Or. 3, 31 ; Att. 15, 8 ; Lvca. B. G. 3, S ; B. G. 7, 81 ; 
 Liv. 31, 31, and often). 
 
 Hem. 181. The construction with the participial gerundive is rare and unusual after 
 other classes of verbs bur those mentioned above, as : Muris oh^idendum se iiaiu^erat 
 (he had closed him<eli' up within the walls to he beneged). Liv. 36. \1.—Manlimtijioliahos- 
 tium conspicicnda protulit (Manlius produced the spoils taken from the enemy ' to be 
 looked at') . Liv. G, 20. 7 — De spativ< onlinum hoc p'ivcipiendum hah?mus. Col. ft. 5.— 
 Armdri capias ojxtrtet dedurendat in irquum (the troops should be armed with a view to 
 send them to the battle-field, i. e.. 'to make them light'). Liv. 22, 14. Most of these 
 constructions, especially the last, are extremely harsh. 
 
 1 There is also a locatio and a conductio operdrvrn, used of engaging the services ot 
 another, the former being used of the employee, the latter of the «-mployer. But the 
 verbs locdie and conductre are not construed with participial gerundives il taken in thi» 
 meaning. 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 149 
 
 Hem. 182. Those gerundive, which w^^^ ^^:^;^^^^.^^^^ 
 ramlns, an incomparable triumph, ^<>«5'«^?0 fW^raArm, a^^_^^ ^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^ 
 
 rclat ve clauses even hy the Latins, as ^^^ """J* ' *•'. nf^. Rjib. 2.4: where the 
 
 ^^^•^a;^^^^..e.i,>lo.co4rH.n^^^^ 
 
 nussa simt. Lir..20, ^^-:--('vX"%%^e^m'^^ 
 
 trucidandam objicere^ Liv. 3. 1'. , •♦;- f" ^ "^"'"^^^^^^^ Dianre toUtndum^ locS- 
 
 Cic. Att. 4, 2, 5 - 9. Magno ^^';^^'/;^ ^.^ S ?imul cum agro/r.mda ( = utenda) 
 tur 9i-^,f'-,f^,\^-rJ\\ ^iSnpto '^ anicohminam de Gotta conduxerat jacien- 
 locilri jussit. J^'^-.,'^^'-'- ".;i^ v'"V3r..if r'W- Div 2 'M 47 — 12. EquOrum quatuor 
 dam. non inert iai'^ ^''^'^'TJ^^-^^'^^r^' ' t t u ^ 20 1- r? Cassai der mvm Alexandri 
 
 locerandamque^\ ^'»'' ''"'"P^'!fr;> ^''- f^A.'fT 1^?_^ 7 lleJiodus ea qua, vtenda ac- 
 
 se 
 
 gummittendui'^^ essent. Liv. 26, 44. 
 
 I The Morlni.- ' on the spot.- » to seize.- «to assign^- '^^^^^^^^ \^^^-- 
 
 7 to call out.- « ^'tat.u; (imau-e of worship).- »t.,emm 
 tractor.- ^"^ out of intjolence.- »> ^ardy^-i* an oi g the kii lit.. ^^ «.iasiire.- 
 
 _ 1. .4car«««, an Acarnanian.- \\ ^'f ••^'l'P;,^;-bati n - " a U tie.- '^* toretreat.- 
 30 the statue of a cow.— 21 golden.— ■''' \erDatiiu.— u. 
 a reserves.— '• to send to the front. 
 
 cate-L'.Tiind» (ut i„4 /'««'''«'«"^'f'f^'iJn'hf,^' ; 'i^^ „ ico note 17), m>ij>i^r'm>,d«m 
 SS'iUaS^Jrdeffb/L" jrrsui^yVcl'aS.u /o be Ju.ed Uy .we.nu,,. 
 
]^50 REVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 III. THE REVERSED PHRASES AND THE 
 
 GERUNDIALS. 
 
 A. Reversed Phrases in General. 
 §«I17. An attributive phrase, consisting of a substantive 
 (noun or pronoun) as governing word and a passive participle 
 or verbal adjective in dus as attribute, is called a reversed 
 PHRASE, when the grammatical relation of the members of the 
 phrase must be reversed in order to translate them into Eng- 
 lish, that is if the Latin passive attriijute must be changed 
 into an English active participial or infinitive as the governing 
 word of the Latin substantive, as Carthago delenda (deltta), 
 * the destroying of Cartilage^ or ' destroying Carthage', or * to 
 destroy Carthage'. 
 
 Rem.m. The Latin lanizuaec ha. intrmluccd those rovcr.cdph^^^^^^^ 
 
 t'ioV a. snhject of the phrasJ. .o that the decU;nsi.,n of the phra.e rrqu.rc-.l l>y the con- 
 «tr ctioii^ee §28) may be perfoim.d hy <lecli.nn- its governing suhstantue » husin- 
 Meul o^ U'^ ar^V/zt^eci 6^/ nading -book,^ the Latin «ays ' }Ye are ddighted by books 
 
 being rea(V. ,. ^ *• • 
 
 n^m 1S4 The Latin pa<?ivo attribnte in reversed phra?e?, correppondinn: to our partici- 
 niiufn 1^' (or ot er v -rbal noun-) a^ «..vc-rnin- word* in tiansmve objective phrases, 
 ?. Juher aVerfect ,m or a v.-rhal adjective in dus (j,'erundivc), aecordlUi; 
 
 to the rulesi-iven below. Thus we form the followin- phrases : 
 
 1 Bv <nvin" advice we beneftr, con,<^mo dato ;>mvMW'/*/literally : /by advice cr.vcn we 
 benefit '7 < r loasUio dando prosumns (11 terally : ' by adv.ce to be .Mv-n we benefit ) 
 2! The advTee of nn-lertakin- a war, cousUiam belli suscijnendi (literally : the advice 
 
 ""^S. 'S'cha?<;e'oniav*[n"?.n a war, belli suscepti cnmen (literally : * the charge 
 
 of a war having been undertaken). ,. .•«. 
 
 Hem 18-j The f-erundive, In reversed phrapcs, loses its primary idea «f neceseity which it 
 
 has i?n •edicate-"erundi ve assuming the force of a present or future i-assivk paktic.ple 
 
 AUribu ive S^^^^ gerundives^sometimes, but v.-ry rarely, are not reversed phrases 
 
 fsee Re n 182) which is always clear from the connection. In tins ca-e they retain the 
 
 flfa Snece<<itv. Hut aside from these rare instances, considered Rem 82., a -n.-ii 
 
 D ra"\vithn, a tributive gerundive must be considered as kkvkkski,. Thus ay>y>.;m^ 
 
 ?«. t/W/ VJ^^^^ iLiv. 43. 48) is not an apparatus of cities which are to be 
 
 b"-i ■ '.-d (ic^^^^^^^^ to tl.e literal accept ,tion of the pluase., but an "PP'^'-"»"^^^^t'fff.?: 
 
 ,^;i7d7ii* Phrases with pkufkct i.akticm'i.es, however, have more ^'V'';''f''V>\";f [.^J 
 
 oroninarv phrases, and the connection of the sentence alone can decnle ^\ '«< .^^ ,/, ^ 
 
 M n-t taUei a^ reversed phrases or not. This is often clear from the phrase itse I. I hus 
 
 "iw/ /en y^^ ^Xi y^m'n (the charire of having received a Roman ^'arr.sonXan 
 
 on?vbecoHc^vedVs a rever/ed phrase, while ^ dux pn^.-ndii recepti' (the leader of the 
 
 receivcHl S^^^^^^ ^^ense inly if taken for an ordinary phrase. «••JV^'-'l^.' »\"^- 
 
 ever the nlira-e itself may have eitlter meanin-. and the ulterior connection of the di>- 
 
 c<mr<e n •- deternd.e it-force. Thus in the sentence Marcdlus vrbem inw^^ms omni^ 
 
 ada^meidl^^t (Liv. 25. '^) the.phrase J/ar..W»^Y.5rm.s..; see.ns to b^^ 
 
 participial phrase (Marcellus, having entered the city, excited all to take up arms). 
 
 l^EVERSED PHRASES IN GENERAL. 
 
 151 
 
 Kevcrtheless the connectiot. with the previ.;« and JV.U>w^^^ 
 
 "l518'"The obli<iue cases of the impersonal gerund (in 
 J "'^r singular) are employed to express those^ rcjt^ons 
 Ihich are assigned to the English participial m mg it it is 
 rit^er vv thout any object, or with objects which in Latui are in- 
 TR Nsm^ Since the nominative of the English participial in 
 ir. nerally corresponds to the Latin (subject).nifinitive the 
 oUique caseJof the ^personal gerund - generally conside^^^^^^ 
 as equivalent to the cases of the inhnitive, as ^om. legere 
 X; GEN. legendi, of reading ; D.t ^^f^^^^!^^ 
 
 sailing, nnvi'javdo ddecfamur onvving one's rivals, 7nos(emulis invtdendi 
 
 2. (With intransitive objects). Thchab t m ^y;>j p j^^ ^.^,,,,,, castHspotmndicomi- 
 
 ,;,,i,/rr. .'overning ^^%* ;;^^.;;;*^,7e wi^lUyi^n^^ wait fSr the enemy, Umpus fmtibus in- 
 
 /i'///j.— They employed their time vmiu ij "'o 
 
 sviiaiido abswmb'iut. .,„„ a ««mrrF when it is necessary to distin- 
 
 V 
 
 clauses as fi^'j^»-"^- '"'■"'' j"^ # .1 »«»/3 «ntmf tfeteac . inu» u/o «1*1 ^y-... — —-. . „„ 
 musf b^ d./Hild ', but • one defeats , omj^^'l uSmUsd') : d^^idenum nocendii* an 
 n meived-as ars qua navi<jCitar (1"^;'^ f ^^^^'i^^.^c^.JartH. ^- «, 34» says : ui potius m 
 en ivalent of desideriuni quo rmefur. ^' /.^, f.,''"":'^^'',^^,^ detVinieuto mceretur. 
 S"/iio aliquid on.itterCtur, qua.n ^""^'f. '^" i^Vl!"- " fh^^^^ a personal pa»- 
 
 "ITometimes. indeed, absolute J^"V»|^'f^^'?^"„l^^e^JiVs^^^^ of" inaccuracy, as : ^pes 
 
 Pive • J)ut such very rare m^ges must ,^>.^^*^"?;-l^,":, " ,ored. Nep. Att. 9.-Vum populam 
 T^ifiundi nuUa eiaL there was no ^op^ «J ;>y"^j[^*^^ that the people could 
 
 ll: i>^,'suad''ndo i^c cogendoregiPi^JJ'fj'L;^^^^^^ co.npulsion (by being com- 
 
 Ji/,erbe.^overned by ^.ui-jrn^^^^^^^^ ^vis excluded from bemg seen. 
 
 iteUed). Cic.'Fam. 1, ' 
 Cic. Acad. 2, 17, 53. ^ 
 
 . The theory of the .erundials, ^^^^-^by t^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 natu • '. • the oeuuni>.ve. The pnncipa ^ J?";;\ "\,^:f^ ^es it i? used as governing word 
 rund absolute is taken from tl>e fact _that u man> n tanc ^^^^^ ^^^ language 
 
 of transitive objects (§519).. But »»''^ «^;,^,;,^; f " ^[jons lo-^ically active, had been 
 •rom Jhe regula? use of th;' /mpersonal^ |^^^^^^^^^^ its original passive 
 
 pra.lnally accustomed to feel t as n «;/ \^^^^^^^^ functions to it. This usage is an 
 
 force to assitrn in several important '^?'*"."":, ,,':,. «nd in other languages, especial y 
 anonalv, but one which has many ^na ''S^f "^.^^^J^ » «^^^^j;- althoujrh unquestionably 
 \n the- whole deponent verK wimh ^« a^ ^ ^ ^* ^'^./^K 
 
 deponent verbs havt- been once Pass nes noin "» ,. ^^^^ oblique cases of the 
 
152 
 
 BEYEBSED PHRASES. 
 
 ^519. Usao-e has allowed the construction of the gerund 
 absolute with transitive objects, in place of a reversed phrase 
 with a gerundive 1) when the gerundive phrase is in the gexi- 
 tivk; 2) when it is in the ablative without a preposition. In 
 other instances the use of tlie gerund witli transitive objects is 
 either unusual or inadmissible. 
 
 t^^^ Thus the rever*otl phrase Spes >/;Wsf r/^i^^J'/'F, thohopt; of takini; the city, may 
 also be expresst'd by a j,'enind with a transitive object, liicrally answerinir to the Ku- 
 «rlish construction (Sj)es vrheni ccijntndi). The sentence //y.sY7.v ar/z-w vaatuniiU itxant 
 (he injured tlie enemy by devastaiiu'; their fields») may be expressed Ilontli agros cms- 
 tando vexavit. 
 
 Bern. 188. Intransitive and neuter verbs, since they form no personal 
 passives, cannot be used as gerundives in reversed phrases, except tlie 
 verbs iifi\ frai,funf/i\nud potlrl with their coiupounds {tifju(t\perfrut\ pcr- 
 fungi, drfnnr/i), wJiich maybe used as .2:eruniHves, their abhitive objects 
 beins^ made llie covernini words of the «xerundive phrase, as : JaxtitiiB 
 fruemM causa (iust. of justitia fniemll causa), for the sake of enjoyini^ 
 justice. Cic. Off. 2, 12. Tempus UbcrtCdu potiundie (inst. of UbcHate poti- 
 undi), the time for seizini; {L e., assertinir) their liberty. Liv. 24, 14. But 
 these verbs occur also in the irerund with intratisitive objects, as Ea lege 
 male iitendo, by makini? a bail use of that law. Liv. 41, 8 (the gerundive 
 form would be ed lege male utendd). 
 
 § ."t»30. Wlien a gerund is construed witli a transitive ac- 
 
 cusaiiv (J, the latter is sometimes changed by aitractiox into 
 
 the case of the ojerund if it is in the cjenitive, as ar/rdrum do- 
 
 7m7idl causa, instead of agros donandl causa. This is called 
 
 THE GEKUXD WITH AX ATTRACTED CASE. 
 
 Eem.lSd. Hence the form of i^erundials is fourf dd : 1) the genuidiye 
 phriiSL' {ars cauHdrum dlccnddrum) ; 2) ihe gerund absolute {am dicendi); 
 3) the gerund with a transitive accusative {arx cau sandier; ndi); 4) the gerimd 
 with an attracted case {ars cauf^dnim dlnndi). The first two are the regu- 
 lar grammatical forms of gerundials, the last two being exceptional forms. 
 
 llem. 190. The form of ])articiples is twofold: 1) that of the attributive 
 particii)le (in reversed phrases), as crimen Uestp, mnjeddtin, the crime of 
 otfendiug the majesty ; adjunctofundopatrimoniumauf/ere^io increase one's 
 property by (after) adding im estate; 2) that of the impersonal participle, 
 which occurs rarely atidexccptiimally, and almost always in the ablative 
 case, namely ((/) in" the construction of the impersonal ablative absolute 
 {debelldio, after the war had been finished) ; {h) dependent on opus est, as 
 maturdto opus est, it is necessary to hurry; (c) dependent on prepositions, 
 
 and the fact that the connecUon of the ijenind absolute with transitive objects, is only 
 allowed in exceptional cases. <,'() to show that the orii:inal me.inini; of the <,'erun(lials is a 
 pa8-«ive one, aud that tiie lunction of the «rerund as an active verl>, m the cases where 
 u«a"e.allows it. is an encroachment on a province oriLrinally belonirinir to the st^rundivo 
 alone. The whole question is merely one of theory, having not the t«lij;htest bearing on 
 the practical use of the gerundials. 
 
 REVERSED PHRASES IN GENERAL. 
 
 153 
 
 • 
 
 especially ?)/•(?, as proviso aliquid referre, to report something as having 
 been seen ; pro prcpjudicato aliquid fer re, \o consider something as decided. 
 8 ^*Z*^, lie versed phrases (gerundive and participial) and 
 gerunds are used as members of sentences and phrases in the 
 same way as ordinary substantives, and may perform all the 
 offices of the latter. They are employed 1) as subjects (almost 
 exclusively confined to participial phrases) ; 2) as predicate- 
 nouns ; 3) as attributive genitives and appositions; 4) as case- 
 objects; 5) as prepositional objects and attributes. But in 
 all these respects they are distinguished from ordinary nouns 
 by special restrictions. The rules about these restrictions form 
 the theory of gerundial and participial construction, being the 
 most idiomatical chapter, and one of the most important sub- 
 jects of Latin iri'ammar. 
 
 Jiem. 191. Reversed phrases are irrammatically treated and analyzed l^Ji^^ «^^.f.'-.^^'illj: 
 
 ♦ ivp i,hri<e« but tliev cannot, lo-'icallv. be severed ni the same way. Thus m the stn- 
 
 enceS co;^X /'%o y aJx^^^^^ words connlvnn Dionyxxi m.ist be gram- 
 
 m ukam con^iderrd as an attributive phrase. But they cannot be ^^'P^^^ « y .\;^.^/.^^*r ^ 
 
 V • the .1 an of Dionvsius'. since Dionysir expeUtndi is a ueveksed phrase lu which the 
 
 eranVinatica attVibute^W//^^^ is loijically tlie governing word to he joined with con- 
 
 ?Sr Grainm-Aica irW^ the coml)inati<7n consilium expelendi would be lalse 
 
 I le ce reversed p 'rases must be' analyzed and conceived as single words and , nay m 
 
 hi" leM ect be conii.are.l to compound nouns, from which they differ, howexer, b) the 
 
 •L^^cVreHlm^^ each member of the combination indepemie.itly of the 
 
 Ker' combines with other phrases and words (R. 193). Compare the ssor^jusjurandum 
 
 Bern vy> The -erunds (of course always in the neuter sin-ular), and the mipersmial 
 pa. iSp e;take The same case-inflection as ordinary nouns would m their pace^ The 
 E-v.'r^eluh ••»<.- take these inflections by means of their governing substan ives with 
 wlVc^ h erundivfor pa^^ has to agree. Hence the cases, genders and number 
 
 of the Gerundives ami a.^Jributi-par.i.iples are. alwavs deuiv.d ones, neing dependent 
 on,and identical with the cases of their governiMg substantives. 
 Rem 103 While the -erundials and partieiples are treated »>< nouns, respectively ad- 
 
 jecmes in their inflection, they are coNSTUiEn I'l^;^ Y.^g?;; "anHvei clU^^ 
 which thev in:iy -overn. They may govern phrases of all kinds and escn clauses (tiniie, 
 
 't'.il'rio"J,jKn:r;';;r Hlr-ioiples have eomp,ica,o,l ol.jocts o^^ 
 
 .fcnmS i4lS -." . rjc , slriati....» with ,n...t nf the tliff.r.ft \l"rti',"f ■'^J':'; ^! »'"1 
 
 <^^(,V„*«S«l«mv;i";iW,tai,t,,m ,,H,is tmdavcr,,,,^ 
 
 {iioiisi.loiable part of the city by tXaxtox^i the walls at sevuial plate» b> mean» ol ram-. 
 
 ^i ' (V Ji:vi)-. wtTH ruFPO^iTioSAi. OBJECTS : Jiissa ac veiita populOrnm vim l>»b<!jit od 
 them from evil deeds, Cic. Leg. 2, 4. 
 
1 
 
 REYERSED PHRASES. 
 
 q r.KRrsn^ AND GEurNDiVKf» WITH ADVKnBiAL OB.TKCTS ! .Aliq"ot dios difceptamlo 
 
 SXil (Lnvs w "ro s^^^^^ in tliHr.,..i..i: openly about the conditions .-u.d u^eveiul) nights 
 in li.ttin.r out wecreilv C.irthaL'ini.-in soldiers Irom the cunip. Liv. -it», ii. 
 4 (V m-N l^ wn OB.TK Viderent decemviri ne retandoin <^'rtali^re 
 
 "^""ti '"«KRUNDS WITH iNTEtmooATivE ci.AUSK. : Unns OX RomflniP ex PJ«P'"qi]« j;"^ 
 coiitemtdan" v„mera„do /npidc^, i^stimandr^iue q>nd to Jronte ^'f ^';V:';;V' V^K ,„ " I 
 mn ni'iri quantum proximo conjectflrjl poterat, permensus est, <» ne "f ' '^h 'r^l; 
 I Ihi nV-irvewof the walls, bv eountin- the t.tones, and by estimatin- ^^ hat size 
 each oAhemJimUii front, mea.uled the height of the wall as nearly as he could do by 
 
 "TtiEm-Npl WITH THAT-cT.ArsEi. : Lucium Valerium prmlitnm memorise e^t m^Vv- 
 Mm/o /!^/ (/^ m^SV/Zir?/-.^ dlcere. prohibentibusdeeemviris. tumultum fxnvisse, it is re- 
 H tKl thlu l^^l^^^^^^^^^^ raisc-d a tumult by demandin,^ ^'^%T'^'l}^l'^^l^ 'Jl 
 
 &.OU1 be alh.wed to speak about the npublie), the decemvirs f^^rbid.iing it L 3 ^. • 
 
 8 GViiNns w.Tu iNFiMTivK-eLAisEs: Khodii pnfiendo ;y.v/.. reqem w Iff^f'^'fll"^^ 
 fr<>'nr^r^ occupanMnquf 'France op,xrrfnua locu rire.^ coflujere bel um "•••«^e »he 
 iTS ruInV en%ura<'M war by suffering that the king should again cross mer to 
 
 HhS;^.»»"" S^hat he Z gain .tix-ngth by occupying favorable positions m 
 Thrace. Liv. 31, 15. 
 
 Hem 194 Re^anlin? the irraminatioal functions of the reversed phrases 
 and gerunds iii tlie sentence, the loUowing i;eueral rules are to be 
 
 noticed : 
 
 1. Gerunds can never be used a^ pitb-tect.. Participial reversed Phr^f^^ ^f f.^'-^;;^"^'^ 
 n*. d ,iV"iibiects In re.'trd to gerundive phrases, the irrammarians deny their use as 
 ",d>^Ss of a sentence! but it can be shown that even gerund i^.. phrases, in certain con- 
 Btructions, are employed in the relation of s^ubjects. (See K. 1J!S.) 
 
 2 Gerundive phrases (never participial phrases, and gerunds only i" «"•^^^'"J?^*'" connec- 
 tion) are used as pkei.icate-gemtivks and ruEUiCATE-UATivEs (see It. 208).' 
 
 S Gerunds and reversed phrases of boih kinds very frequently occur as attribi'tes of 
 ncmnslmth as attributive iJeniiives and as prepo.sitional attributes. They arc treated in 
 this respect altogether as subsUmtives would be in their places. 
 
 4 The APro«iTiovAi, relation of reversed phrases and gerunds is confined to that kind 
 which in Eu'dish, we connect by ' mmdi/ (explanative apportion), as : 
 
 ( i Nunmun in-eniuni idem ad n>^ dirrMmma.<. parendvm ntqne twperandnm 
 habiliust Never was a mind n..)re able to perform tlie most opp..site things, nainely 
 oSKam^^ Liv. 21. 4- (/.) Non immemor »./'/.*, quod initio e.msuhl us 
 
 5 "n' l^S;^'/i^iim.s plebis. Being not unmindful of t»."Mdb;ry;s.t.on) which 
 he I a.lc.ntraeled in the beginnui- of his consulship, namely of n^coucxhnfj the health 
 
 • l^^;\Vn Pie Liv. 2,47.- (n IMebs cravalnltur postquam et ad aha traducehaitur 
 ouerx fon^Xi \^rw facie ndi.^, cloacurmj'n uHuimam ^./A terram rt<7.m/«//K 1 he Plebs 
 fe t wroi^ed whei thc^^^ ^vere mi>used als.» for other works, namehj (o .^wsfntct ^mt,^ 
 Ilir the Kric^anJyiV^^^^ Circus, and to make the underuround channel j or the (/reat 
 
 Ke'En:dish\qq.o;ition bv which verbal idea. a., such are quoted, in the /V"*!^;.."/.,^ 
 nartieiDial 1 Jy/ / or (»f an inVn.itive. bi-ing attached to the -eneral terms 'word , '%erb , 
 ?tc are 1 at V:;' ,essed bv an attributive genitive-gerund dependent <>n the expres- 
 f onV',^^;;;.' orV.'i.m, as: The n-ord ..jfferi^ P<dien<r^ [''^"'^^-Yf't.mM .lei;; on 
 inwntn rniendi the verv word * /0 icaid" IS sad. Cic. 'I use. 1, 3t». b.. If (kpenaeiii on 
 n li ^on: 'thl^'.e^V^^^ words rerlnnn or nonun ^^l^^^^:;^^^ ^^^ 
 1 atin the uiioted verb takin- the same form as the noun omitted ^hollld Inne taken, as. 
 !i 'ni)>!m/o!)fJ scliptor, Irom tlie verb .cribere is derived the noun scriptor. \ arro L. L. 
 p. 117. 
 
 1 Gerundives (but not trerundivc phrases), and participles (but not i)articipial 
 phraJf") areLqV^ntW^^^ as predicates, namely in the pern.hrastic coujUL-ation and 
 rnSTe ah ^ives absolute. Hut these forms do not belong here, .ince we consider here 
 only those cases where a whole phrase stands in the relation of a predicate-noun. 
 
 REVERSED THRASES IN GENERAL. 
 
 155 
 
 ♦' nf OBJECTS thoy denote 
 5 When gerunds or reversed T>hrnsosar-/n^^|:,^,^ ^^T^T^l^ 
 
 tl»i»V^'^- ^ .•• 1^ onrl thocreriintlive in reversed 
 
 § 5..a. -i;'-, l-^^?t7,^tc r of xT^E which is attached 
 P'"-- '^'■^ '■ t:;;:r o i.e't me of the principal predicate of 
 to them •" -1' ;'-;^j^' Vf the action in the reversed phrase 
 the sentence. It the t me o „vincii>al action, the re- 
 
 ::;:l-Srcotident\r as a future in regard to the pr.nc.- 
 ml action, the phrase is formed ^V f.*^'^';)^';^, „;,,,,„ me. tMnionj of 
 
1 
 
 156 
 
 REVERSED RII RASES. 
 
 GERUNDIAL GENITIVE. 
 
 157 
 
 action, a? : Quia milite? ot capiendo, iirhe tantiim labOris adipseiit. et captii cum eis qui 
 in arcetn confiifxeranr. })m:iia-si-ut. >iiice tlic soldiers Jmd met with such hardships in 
 capt'irlna the cHi/. and afttr its captun had foiitrht with those who had lied to the fort. 
 Liv. 2f). 48 - ^It'telliis di.xii. non piu-seiitein solum dicta toiviu obsiitisse rei bene gerenda;, 
 sed abscntein rtiani f/f.vAr tibstare, that not oidy liad the dictator, when prosint. op- 
 posed ihv arh'i&ti/i(/ of' />/fure fuccess, hnt was in ids ab-eiice opposini; the success t/i 'it 
 had been achieved. Liv. 22,5.— (iui, jniKis hononbus, cosdeiu gessi labOies quo» petendis. 
 Cic. Phil. G, t). 
 
 B, The Ueversed Piikases as Subjects and Transitive 
 
 Objects. 
 
 § t(^M. Gerundive phrases can oreiierally not be used as sub- 
 jects or transitive objects, and when English jiarticipials in in<j 
 are employed in this relation, they cannot be rendered by ge- 
 rundive ])hrases, but must generally be expressed by subject- 
 infinitives, by object-infinitives, or participial phrases (§ 525). 
 
 Item. 11)8. The only c:\se in which irenuulive phrases may bo used as 
 transitive objects or subjects occuis witli some of those veibs which are 
 construed with a participial .a:eruiKlive of ])urp()sc (j^ 510, \i. 170). Here 
 belong the verbs curare, locdre, coiulncere, attribuere, assir/fulre, and 
 P'Kscere, as okajti lecjetulam curare, to give out (on contract) the gather- 
 ing of olives (Cato 11. K. 144); pontem faciendum curare, to cause the 
 building of a bridge; alicui slatuatn transportandam a.si<iqndre, \o Ti9.s\^n 
 to somebody the task of transporting a statue (Liv. 5, 22, 4); peUendos 
 host'i^ HiU depoficcre, to claim the oflice of driving out the enemy (Liv. 22, 
 28). When these verbs are in the passive, the gerundive phrases arc in. 
 the relation of subjects, as oka legenda curdtur etc. 
 
 Jiem. 199. In all these examples the jzoverninc: noun of tiie ji^ernndive cannot he cor.- 
 eider-d as the transitive o»)ject of tlie verl)s mentioned, but it is the action contained in 
 the ixerundive wliicli is the real object of the verb. Ilcncc* the phrase»? in which these 
 germidives occur mu-t be taken ft)r ukveused phrases which must l)e considert'd as the 
 transitive objects of the verbs mentioned. Most of the instances, however, in wliich 
 gerundives are thus attached to tlievert)s enumerated § old, must be taken for construc- 
 tions of tlie participial fjerundive of purpose. We may regard this participial s^ertmdive 
 ati the boundary l>etween the predicate-«,'erundiveand the attrii)ute-i,a'rundive in reversed 
 phrases. Some of these coml)inations beloiii,' to the one, and some to tlie other side of 
 the limit, and sevexal stand on the line itself, t»o that they may with e(iual propriety be 
 considered as belonginj; to eithor side. (Jom^.' dstendufn ptiellam pro/nUlere\ Liv. 3, 45. 
 
 g «>^5. Reversed rAiiTiririAL phrases arc used both as sub- 
 jects and transitive objects of a verb, with the force of an 
 Enc^lish verbal noun to which the Latin governing noun is 
 added as an attribute with * of, as : 
 
 IW For examples of participial phrases as transitive objects sec R. 194, 5. 
 
 Bern. 200. These snbject-phrases may become passive ajjents in the aidative when the 
 principal predicate is changed into a passive. They thus assume the form of ablatives 
 absolute diecepto Hannibale Prusias suspectus pbat. Angebatur Ilaunibal biciUa 
 
 Sordiniaque ami^si'^). Such ablatives frequently occur, as: Etro nntem "^>5>l'"i? ///^ 
 ricfao'^e mut<Vo m<.rcs nmtflri civitfltnm i)Uto. but I t)ehc%-e that bf/aemnge of the life 
 and diet of the nobilitv the social conditions of states are ch m^'ed Cic. Le-. 3. 14.- 
 aM,liri benerolentia amicitiic nomen tollitur. by taking away bentvolence, he »'aine of 
 fr emlship is destroyed. Cic. Am. 5. 19. When these constructions are made active, the 
 
 participial phrases become the subjects of the sentence (vita victusque mutatus mu- 
 
 tal ; subhlta henevolentia .... toUit), 
 
 nem 201 Reversed participial phrases are rarely used as subjects by Cicero, but more 
 frequently In Li vv. an. very often by the writers of the silver a-e. Livy m a few pas- 
 S" has even attempted to intn.duce impersonal perfect participles as sub,iects. a harsh 
 c n<truction, which has not been received into the lan-ua-e as : /'/•on?maa<^/m repente 
 ^e q lis piitc'.r aruKltos violaretur, reliquam omnem ^^'^^^fK^'^^^^^ ^lii'^^^ 
 d,nan>,o>n,cinq that etc. ma.le the rest deliver their arras. L.v 4. 59^ Similarly are u^cd 
 audit urn (2S, 2«) ; trnfCdum (7. 22) ; degen^ratum (1, 5.i) ; perhtatym (7, 8). 
 1. Dubitfl»>at netno qtiin {that) vioWi ho.<>pi'e.^\l'mtinerm^^^ 
 Cdi fana- rexiita^ banc tantam efficerent vastitatem*. (Jic. Pis. 3o, Ho- 2. Nulla res 
 LacVSm.iiis ma.ds erat damno quam dimpnna Lycurd, cui per septin-entos annos 
 •Vilur-ru " " /^^^^^^ Liv :i8, 81.-3. Haiinibalem ante omnia angCbat quod Capua per- 
 iVni^^i ls« om,^7«^^^^ quam defenm ah se, multOnim Italic pc^pulOrum ani- 
 
 ravert^Vat^ Liv. 2(>, 38.- 4. ^uum Arentum amis^>m <«!^f»^V^^»"'-consuht i 
 tnm arx cum pncsidio refenta pnvter spem gaudio l^it Liv. 26, 3. - 5 ConsuUtui 
 c'icernni- non medir.cre'-» adjCcit decusio nafus eo anno Thvm Augustus. \ el 1 2, 3b.- 
 i.Proderitdiscipulisalicfljuso^>;./rj7f/an,M^^ 
 
 7 Lentulo <-lori;e luit bene tol^rata^-' pau/}ertiu!. Tac. A. 4, 44.— 8. lerra mutata non 
 muTi lorA I V 37,-^4.- 9. Occlsus dictator Caesar aliis pessimura, ahis pulcherri- 
 mum fSus vi^ebatur. Tac. A. 1,8.- 10. Invidiie erat ami..«m Cremer* i7r.=E.tdmm. 
 Liv. 2, 52. 
 
 0. Reversed Piir.vses and Gerunds in the Genitive. 
 § 5*26. The genitive of gerundials is used 1) as an attribute 
 of all nouns with which attributive genitives may be connected, 
 as desider'uim fflorUe obt'menclce, a desire for obtaining glory ; 
 cupula cUscendl, eagerness for learning.— 2) as a completing 
 oiuECT of most of the adjectives construed with an object in 
 the genitive (§ 499), as cupidus urhis expug nandcB, desirous of 
 taking the city; insuttus nay/^anc?/, unaccustomed to sailing. 
 — S.'^Gerundive phrases (not gerunds) are used as predicate- 
 crenitives of quality (§ 4G6, 3) as hoc dlssolcendtM dlscipUnre 
 est, this is apt (will lead) to dissolving (the dissolution of) dis- 
 cipline.— Neither gerunds nor gerundive phrases are used as 
 completing objects of verbs governing the genitive. 
 
 Rem 202^ Form of the geritndial genitive. Whether a gerundjal 
 genitive must assume the form of a -erund or of a -eruudivephmse, isde- 
 Lmined bv the -oneral rules (^^ 517. 518. 519) It the verb is transUtve 
 ai accompanied bvjts transitive object, both form., tha of a F^mnd.ve 
 phrase, and tliat of a crerund-enitive with a transitive objec ui the ac- 
 cusative are admissible, without discrimination in meaum-, although ge- 
 rundive phrases are more frequently employed than geruads with au 
 
 1 Guest-friend.- ^ fanum, temple -.» to plunder. * destruction - »^^^^.2^^,^, 
 become accustomed.- •;>er/^«a.r,ob>jumte.-' to aycrt.^-^^^ nonrmatocris, 
 
 not a little.- »» ornament.- " to rebuke.- ^^ brave endurance. 
 
156 
 
 REVERSED THRASES. 
 
 ftorii<5itivo Thus the phrase Mlie promise of dc'livcriiv£? the hostas^es» 
 mav be rendered vlthcr pronmsum obxidex tmdendl, or pronn.mm oJmdum 
 ?;«£«^JA)m But wheu the trausitive object of the gerund is a personal 
 pronoun, a gerundive phrase cannot be used (K. --U.>). 
 
 Rem '^O:^ Wlien the Latin verb has an intransitive object, the form of 
 the genmd alone is admissible, as comitetudo ^qnalibm ^'^^«^^^'^/("«J.,7;(^: 
 UunTYm^uienddrum\i\x^ habit of envying one's equals. But gerundia 
 Sives of the verbs vti, frui etc. take either the form oi a gerund 
 or that of a gerundive phrase. See li. 188. 
 
 Fern ''Oi Somethiies the transitive genitive gerund takes the form ot 
 
 a c. Tund with an attracted case i^ 520). This is, generally, the case only 
 
 'r The Ob ecl is a noun in the plural number as i^^^^^^^^^^^^f i:^'^^'-^^^^'^^ 
 
 estaduuim, the time of paying the pena ty l^^Y-'^T'o^: of the;;%onal 
 Ex D 1 2 3 4 5. But when the transitive object IS one of the personal 
 
 monouns ihis tbrm is used also when the pronouns are in the singular, 
 ^yW Ui leinale) vide ndi est copia, there is an opportunity of seeing thee, 
 riaut. True. 2, 4, \\).-Ejus (Piiilumenaj) videudl cupidus, desirous of see- 
 ing her. Ter. Hec. 3, 3, 12. . . , • . 
 
 Rem 205. AVhen the pronouns vie, te, se, nos, vos are transitive objects 
 oflhe'-erund, the use of a gerundive phrase (for inst. no.tnvnkndorwn 
 ^'»1^ ..:)il inadmissible, and the gerundials, in this case, must t'lther take 
 the form of a transitive gerund with their pronominal objects in he ac- 
 cusative, or that of the gemnd with an attracted genitive (^ o20). 
 Tho same is irenerallv tlie case with the pronouns is, ea, id 
 
 he had the power to restore hitiixelf in many cities. Cic. Phil. 9, .3, b. 
 
 geStivcB of the personal pronoun, were ' origiacUly' neuter po-se.sives. 
 
 All thP«P theories are refuted by the foUowinj; reasons : „„ i ^,:„; 
 
 ^ It i?k reSy dcmhtlul whether the u'l'nitive of the personal pronouns ^va^ ori£- 
 n.livNheiinitive neuter of the possessives, which adjectives are, on the contrary, de- 
 
 '^'^^:^^:^ ^or thc,.uter .cnder «f the^-^;:^. 
 
 since there"isiu)L The .1 -htest doubt that, at the time ol the hterary u^*-* '»' J^^VuoNon^^^ 
 
 S/™;1';r;.e™.n""virb i "mo" ilTbf, "Sn agreement bolh iUosicul and uu„am,nal.. 
 '1'The''t'Cy''or''tl,o Oorman u-rammarian, in no way accounts for the use of <|u. 
 
 ''t^^UU^:'S^yl!^::Z:Z^'::i:^"f^ rcnexive phrase in tl.e f„nn of a (ra- 
 sive) e"run V Ifo iS i'i purgandi ca-ml). It i. ffrannnatically >"™n-"f"« '" " »: 
 SderF«r9^i'.di as a PAasiVEgfrundlve governed by «,/, ....cc rellexivc verbs cannot be 
 
 GERCNDIAL GENITrVE. 
 
 159 
 
 c..n.edin,.pas.vc,itJ.in=i.po.,b,e^^t^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 5. 11 ineinMirvtM '^'\ "/; , *„_ ^'..-hilp our thenrv assfiis these apparent anomalies to 
 anomalies must be acTount^ ^cm d wi h an atS?ed case, which ha. bo many analo- 
 gs Kria^uigc^ ha? it caiK^^^ be considered as an anomaly. 
 ^ rf o V..nT- incr to our theory even such forms as rmi cusiodiendi causS, where the 
 
 Obs. 2. Accoidinjx ^^^/""^ ^^,?"'^.^^^^^^^^ ^ame as those of the pronoun, must be 
 
 pe„der «"'^"i^^rnnds with ? tmSd ca'es andTot as gerundives. VVe must assume 
 coMsid.;red as ?«runds w th atimciea c^^^^ repu-nant to the Latin idiom to con- 
 
 that this form was chosen because i».,^*'^,g~$"f.'^'^t'/ '^J. Y'\ of the jrerun- 
 
 T^c'^s:^^^^'^^^^^^^^^"^ p™— . '-w* -""'I »"'"= "" ""'"=• 
 
 tion of the case unrecognizable. ... ,, . ^ ii„.«,»« 
 
 74 m "OC Tlie ccTundial attributive genitive is cither 1) yirtuallv a COM- 
 rtF^iNtToBjECT of ABSTRACT nouns i.i regard to the verbal or adjecUve 
 [d'f CO t.S in them (Obs. 1);, or it is 2) =Utached to persona:, notm 
 
 adjectives admittini? a ^" J«.^ "i"^,";^;;^'^', dSdeHnmfa^pldo, promi^mm, simu/afio, 
 tives n their mkamngs. Such nouns «re ^^, a«^. t«^ . / testimonlvm, cormlium, 
 si^cie^ (pretext, appearance) sucUum, ^/*^^^^^^^'.f ^^^ Hg- 
 
 u,wi,.rienfia.ars,ju.. <^^''\"^^^'f%^^S'\^^^^^^ in t«gr after 
 
 Kerundial Keiiitives dependent «>n •■"^1^ "^Trind sometimes "by object-infmitives, as 
 
 condlimn Mli inferendu t»'^ ach ce to commence a v.ar J^ ^^^^^ ^,^^„^^^ the 
 
 "OB^ ^^^^Hh: personal notuis -^l^^^ ^^^^^^^S^:^:^^ 
 
 ot.en rcH-ast in rcnderin- as .J//?a^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 always advised the '•^*'"'-;i"f ^jf. "^''"%^ ^- [ TeuTcaumm dicendK a-'defendant in 
 
 {ji^-tJi:/,- KS«5ek'lJ:;cr^'^ar?T;f\p4ing. P...c^./..i.^i,thei.re- 
 
 ™;;;::V"ot nouns ^en^in, .n., ^^^^^^^o^^!:!:^^ ^^ ^^ 
 
 situation or eondition) /«i^v, ("/^'^^'^(^^^^^^^^ that mi-ht be applied 
 
 time): rnm-addU^^and'^ll^^^^^^^^ gratia and the 
 
 to deliberation). Here ^^^'^^j^: ^""^^.f ,^„^'0^^^^^^ 'for the sake of \ which are very 
 
 anteclassical ergo, m tiie n^^'»"'"? , ^^' ' J^°""^as Ui »«r^^^^^ cwmi iov the sake of 
 frecp.ently ronstruc.t_w.th^er«,u la^^ 
 
 aie. Ill iiu- iin;«ni-'f:, •^"- ' '^ ^„ *\,n i.in iniltfiiiii there was no iime lu lui»»" '^"■^ 
 
 subject-intinitive, as Temvm "^'^^/j^^/jflj'^f/c there no reason to injure him.- 
 darts.-O'/of/ in eo caum peccandi non erat o^^ansc tnerc ^^ ^^^'^ writing. Cic. Off. 2, 
 
 1. 4. If, l»<>:vever such nouns t.^et^er^w^ ^^^^ ^i^. ^^ ^^ „,, 
 
 Cic. Csec 5, 15 uiuUa ratio ed = it is unreasonab.e;. 
 
160 
 
 REVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 A. Geuitndivk phrases.— 1. Cse^nT prcelii efmmiUendi^ s]f:jixim dcdit. Cies. B. O. 
 
 pnecicm» a'lxilii Bvzantiis ferendi iirofectus, Tluaces nuo pra^lio dovlcit. Liv. ;i9. :ij.— 
 6 llaiiPibaU-m in<'t'n8 cupl'do» iiicesperati» Tarenti jtoiinndi. Liv. 24, 13.— 7. Logati ad 
 am'ssciidiim HaniiibaU'in ciiiri liaiid dubio jiromisso tradendce vrbis veuCrmu. Ih.— 
 8 lnitaf«uut concilia w/'6t.s- ddtndie, ciriuin frmiUanddrnm^K nomini^ L'onuini exsdn 
 auendi Cic Mnr 87.— 9. Audacii« decfinvinllii'^ ma<j:iia permiitilur poti'stas»^ forr^/m 
 
 bantur. Cips. B.' «. 4, 14.— Ki. FortQna vobisj obiaia est, pro tautis Populi Kom5ni 
 
 bcnefu-iis 7ra/i(iE T'/ier^/^rftE''^. Liv. 5. 44, 3. 
 
 B CiKKiND?» ABS(»LrTE.— 1. No^tji expcctflbant 81-» ab bosfibii» imtinni transeundt 
 fierct C'a.>s. B. G. i>. 9.— 2. Ilur* boinim s .^pes pnidandP^ ot t'tudiiiin Mlandi ab aj;ri 
 ciiltaril et qii()tidijliu)3' labOre revonlbat. lb. 3, 17.— 3. Snmina crat in boc mart vavv- 
 qandi dilHcMiltas. Ih. 3, 12.— 4. t2«'<^l»l>"tl pcrciilil^s Graccbiiin iiit^i quod potestatem" 
 intercedendi'^* coWv^^M MhTo^r^^Wi C\c. Li'j;.3, 10.— 5. Apiid Komilnos vetuj^lissimus nioa 
 
 permequendi*'^. Cic. Mur. 21. 44.— 12. Ei'iulnftandi vtpuniendi inodus-*^. Cic. Off. 1, 11.— 
 13 TituriuH dixit, brevem esse conmUndi occasioiiem. ("aes. \\. G. 5, 29.— 14. Caisar 
 loquendi** fnieni fecit*». Kcqiie ad suos recepit. C'jes. B. G. 1. 46.— 15. Ihec ii^noniuiia 
 accepta** ceteris tribfinis pra'buit jiistam caiisam resUtendi collega). Liv. 4, 53, 4. — 
 16. Multa psppe ad te cofun'taadi -.Tatiil scripsiinus. Cic. Off. 3, 2. 
 
 C. Tkansitive Gekunds.— 1. Locus ipse pnesidio eratbarbaris ; ncquc ex*^ occnlto 
 insidiaiidi*^ et, dis]M^r<os circttDXVenundi*'* sinirnlis deerat audacia. Ca^s. D. G. «>. 34.— 
 
 jicien 
 
 I). GeHINDS with ATTI?.\CTKD ("APE 
 
 1. .Airitnr^^ utrum "M. Antonio facuUas 
 deViir opprimTndiereipubliciP. 'cie(lis facicnd:v bonOrnm. diripiend* urbis. agrdrmn 
 suis lati-Diiibus»'» condonandi^o^ populum Bomanum servitQte oppnmendi, an horuni ei 
 
 » To commence.— « royal power.— » to aspire to.— •• permission.— ^ iter facere, to 
 march — « to refrain.— ' wev decddif alien, the hope leaves some one, is taken away 
 from' somebody.- « under the pretext.- » ea-erness.- i» to overcoine somebody. (The 
 sentence must'take a ].assive form in En,iili«h.)- " to slauijbter.- i^ docemviral (transl. : 
 of the decemvirs).— »» power.- i* falsify.- »» public records, especially the public ac- 
 count-books — »« to for"-'.— »' peniniiT repdundiT, literally : ' the demanding back of 
 money'- a technical plirase denotin-,' the trial for embezzlement of public money».— 
 " to be'a candidate for.- »» to ensaire in battle.- ^o to fi-hi.-3> anqt<em ^v^tere n e 
 in judicio) to make somebody appear for hi< trial.- «-^ trials.- " to Bcttle.- of- 
 fenre — 26 are established.— 2« to hold.— ^t >;ince time was Riven.— as to show your 
 trratit'iide (literallv : to return the favor).- " Avliether.— '"to make booty.— '» daily.— 
 »2 nercellere to cfu^h to ruin.— »3 ri-ht — 3* iidtrc^dere alicui. to interpo-»e one s veto 
 a<^junst the decrees of somebody.— s» property.— »» happy.— »' horwrem habt-re, to pay 
 honor or respect— '« i-weetness.— s» 10 prey upon.- •♦'' there is onetime lor. . . . , 
 another for etc.- <i to applv.- "■' to prosecute.- " a limitation a limit.- <* fimmfarere 
 alicniusreu to break somethin-otr. to cease doinjrPometliinir.— ^/o^y?, to debate.— « to 
 eutler, to under-o.- *^ in secret; see § 4-1.3. 3.- *« to be in wait.- ♦» to cut otl.- '«to 
 
 _ 5'.* to f?ive Dermission. — " the metliod.— »« to advance (by 
 
 seize. — *' superfluous. - 
 
 to give permission. 
 
 running).- " time.— " /?i/?m, a dart.- " to throw.— »« it is the question.- 
 briguntU— •» to bestow (as a present). 
 
 6» 
 
 GERUNDIAL GENITIVE. 
 
 161 
 
 facero nihil liceat. Cic. Phil. 5, 3.— 2. Ex majOre copia nobis quam illis fuit exem- 
 vS-'nncllqendi potestas. Cic. Inv. 2. 2.- 3. UeliquOium siderumi qiue causa collo- 
 iandiMuerit, in alium sermOnem» differendum est. Cic. Un. 9.- 4. Mujti prmcipes 
 rives Roma non tarn sni cotisercandl quara luOrum consiliOrum reprimendOrum* causa 
 nrofu-erunis. Cic. Cat. 1. 3. 7.- 5. Siibito omnibus portis eruptiOuc» facta neque cog- 
 no-ceTidi^, neque 8ui colligendl^ hostibus tacultatem ndinquunt. Cjes. B G 3, 6.— 
 6. Finem \ec\ oferendi tnei ne forte meacredulitas» autinsidtOsa»oaut impudens" vidc- 
 iGtur. Cic. Leg, Agr. 2, 5, 12. 
 
 Rem 207. Most of the adjectives arovernin.u: the genitive of siibstan- 
 livc's (^ 41MJ) may take the genitive of gerundials in any of the four torms 
 as eonii)leting objects. Such adjectives are cupldus, insuetus, perltus, stu- 
 diosu.% niemor, ynarus, igndrus, particeps, poteii-^, imjwtem (Liv. 35,11), 
 sciem consdux/ Verbs, however, cannot take gerundials in the genitive 
 as completing objects. Hence it would be lalse grammar to say Poeni- 
 tet ine hujus rei cUcend(E (I am ashamed of saying this), or coiiunonefecii 
 earn im continetidce (he reminded him of restraining his anger). 
 
 1 Affirmabat lacrimans non se cupidlorem esse cultritis^'^ retinend<-e quam exMlma- 
 fiuku^^ Cic Clu 52, 144.— 2. Timoiheus rei miiitaris perlttis. neque minus civitafi.s^* re- 
 oendiFimt \ep Tim. 1.— 3. Zeno perpcssus estomnia potius quam conscios^^ de^ndiB 
 ■/vm///Ji'/ivi« indicaict. cic. Tusc. 2, 52.- 4. Verum est, si qiiis ignarus Bit faciiinda! ac 
 wliewLt^'' orafwnu, eutn»»^ non posse id ipsura quod sciat diserie dicere. Cic. Or. 1. W. 
 — 5 Ita componenda»» est pax2o ut Gnpcia. etiam absentibus Romams. satis potens^] tu- 
 ^«.'/icsimul p(un^ lib^rtafmue esset. Liv. 3;i, 12.-- 6. Ancus, ''»" "\'''''«/^!7f .^M'"- 
 maudi (iiiam aujeiukE-^'^ reipubliccR immor. centum^s mu* patres2Megit28. Liv. 1, .^5 6. - 
 7 Sc;;urus vir regendiB reipuMaE sciefdi<si?7ius'\ si audierit^^* te, huc^», credo, veniaiso. 
 Cic Or 1 49 — 8 Ei qui kereditdtix illTus diripiendiE participe-n fuerant, statuam lUara 
 facfendam'curaverunt. Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 100.- 9. Docti non solum vivi^» atque prasentcs 
 fi(udlu<os disceiidi erudiunt atque docent, sed hoc idem etiam post mortem monumentis 
 litieraruin32assequuntur. Cic.Off. 1, ^.—\Q.T\twi Xxv^w^iw^equitandipentmimusiMxt. 
 Suet Tit 3 — 11 Dumnorix petlvit ut in Gallia reliiiquergtur, quod itij^uetus navigandt 
 miiv tim"eret C;es B. (J. 5, «;.— 12. 11« res detinebant «ii'/o? iimidendi^^ deserta moerna 
 m'ilites. Liv. 10, 34.— 13. Euathlus eloqueutiae discendye causarwnque wamii^*' cupiens»* 
 fuit. Gell. N. A. 5, 10. 
 
 Rem, 208. The genitive of a gerundive phrase (not of a gerund in 
 anv of its forms) is used with tlie copula ense as a predicate-genitive. 
 While the ordinary qualitative genitive (§ 4GG. No. 3). assigns to the sub- 
 ject a quality directly expressed by the genitive, the gerundial predicate- 
 L^enilive describes this quality by the consequences it must produce. The 
 genuidive genitive is rendered either bv apt with an iutinitive, or by eon- 
 ducive U) with a participitd, or by instm mental of, or by verbal expressions, 
 as ' to serve to '/ as : 
 
 Tribflni plebis concordiam ordinum timcnt, quam dis-^olvendce maxime tribiimd(K 
 Wt^stdtU rentur e.s>r, tlie tril)unes of the people dread the harmony of the ranks^ wliich 
 thcv believe to be especially apt to destroy the tribunitian power. Liv. 5, 3.— Regium 
 imneriuin initio comervatidiE librtatu atque augendiE r'^tpiibhm Ju^rat, royalty, in 
 the beginning, had served (had been conducive) to preserve liberty, and to increase 
 the strength of the republic. Sail. Cat. 6. 
 
 Ob« Later writers use the genitive of a gerundive phrase with the meaning of pur- 
 po<*E^ where the classical writers would add the ablative ca>ml or gratia, as Unum e setii- 
 tiO-is vincTri jui)et, magis umrpindi juris, quam quia unlus culpa loret^ (/or the safce of 
 skoioinn his right, instead of tmirpandi Juris c^iusa). Jac. ili.>^t. 4, 2o. The same authors 
 use genitive gerundials with tfie force ot subjccl-inllnitiv.-s or object-intlnitives. as ; ma - 
 ~T"s^r.— a t<» assign a (their) place.— s discussion.— ■» to repress.— ^ to flee — 
 « a sally — ' to inform themselves.— 8 se coUigere. to collect one s self, to form the ranks. 
 — « crediiUtv — ^» deceitful.— »1 impudent.— i*-* citizenship.— ^^ character.— 1* state.— 
 1» those that were privy to.— »« Greek noni. tyrannis, the government of the tyrant, or 
 the dcspotical form of government.- ^Mo po!i.sh.-i« subject infinitive-clause.— 
 " to draw up — 30 the treaty of peace.— «i powerful.— 22 increase the strength of.— 
 2» supply: ' new meml)ers'.-24 to.- 26 the senate.- 2» to appoint.- «7 ^fa^n^ learned.— 
 23 should hear.— 2» hither.— »» would come.— 3' when alive and present.- ^^ litenirj'. 
 -^sa to take possession of.— 3* to plead.— " desirous. 
 
162 
 
 REVERSED TIIRASES. 
 
 GERUNDIAL DATIVE. 
 
 163 
 
 neat provincialihus potentiam pnam tali mo(\o ostentandi, let it rest with tlio provincials 
 to make nuch a f/ioic of their powi-r. Tac. Ann. 15, 21.— Aiigti!^tnin mo/)>/i/, riancTnani 
 Agripplnani i/isectandi, \iv ailmonif'hed Aiiu;u?tus to pursue Aj,'rippiua. Tac. Ann. 2,43. 
 1. Senjltus cenj^et, ro<^itiOnemi a coIlGixin promulL,'atain^ dl<>tolreiiil(e reipumciB esse. 
 Liv. 4. 4s, 15.— 2. Nihil tarn ief/uafi(i<t^ Uhfrtiitis est quani potent issinunu «inemqiie* 
 l)0!«se» dicere causain». Liv. :W, 5().— 3. lliec p/o<leniii inipt-iii Jionumi (rade/u/.iK'jue 
 llaunibali ricforitP. si/nf. Liv. 27. 9.-4. Leciis r.nini siimmi.sT, quuin animadvertis'set" 
 pleraqiu' di'^solrendt'tiKin reliq'uDnim esse, L. I'etillio dixit ssese <m)s libros in iirneni 
 conjectflruiu esse. Liv. 40.21».— 5. llii'c materia» ita erat collccata'», ut. t^i arl)ornm 
 trunci'» sive naves dejidendi (>i>eris^'^ estient a barharis niissu'. hi!?defensoribusi3 «nriim 
 rerinn vit« miniierCtur. Ca^s. IJ. (}. 4, 17.— »». Omnia discrimina'* qinbun ordines diseer- 
 nuntur". et co/ieordUe et libeitdtis aaue miituendit sunt. Liv, 34, rA.— 7. Cetera in dno- 
 decim tabulif itn/nHndi sunt suintuslamentationisque}'' funeri;'. Cic. Lej;. 2. 2:^.-8. km- 
 hnionci^^' ecertendie reipntdicie t^itlenl esse.— U. t|iiirqiiid>»tribfluusplebif» loquitur, eliam- 
 pi jnTHlendit pattiit du-^olveinUKjue reipuUiCiE est, a^ifuesti8'» quiCti audlre. Liv. <i. 15.— 
 10. Sinant patres creari lei^um latOres qui utrieque utilia ferant»», qu;eque (xquandiZ 
 libertdtis sint. Liv. 3, 31.— Clamant, frustratiOnein cam ler/is tollendiX esse. lb. 3, 24. 
 
 § .I'^T. The o^enitive of reversed rAiiTiciPiAL phrases is 
 used either attributively, depeudeut ou abstract or personal 
 nouns, especially such as are derived tVoiu verbs construed with 
 That-clauses, or it is used as a completing object of verbs 
 governing the genitive, as accasdre^ damndre, cotmuonefacere, 
 etc. (§ 478. § 484). It is rendered either by participials (generally 
 in the perfect with ^ havuif/^) after prepositions (o/, for, etc.), 
 or by finite clauses, as 
 
 Baibarus quidam Ilasdrubalem ob iram interfedi ah eo domini, obtruncSvit. a cer- 
 tain barbarian nlew Hasdrubal out ofanqer because he had killed his master [for hi^ having' 
 killed his (the barbarianV) master]. Liv. 21, 2.— .Mihi Populus K<»m:lnn!< non, nt nmlti;', 
 l>en£ (jestoi, sed, ut nemini. consetrdtit reipubliciK te^ti/nonium dedit. to me the Roman 
 people cave tlu; testimony, not of having utU administered the itpubtic. as it did to 
 
 manj', l)ut of having saved the repufdic, as it did to none. Cic. Pis. 
 
 res;e cnpfiV, jiecu/iidi datnndtus est, Scipio was condemned for havinjj accepted money 
 
 3, 6.— Scipio ab 
 
 hau 
 trium 
 
 from the king. Liv. 38, 5t). 
 
 1. Achiei conHlii'i^ negdti-"^ crimm"^^ excnsflbant. Liv. 39, .33.— 2. Hannibal poculum'* ex- 
 lusit'^*, Ijo-piifl'Is-* deos rio/dde a re^^r tidei testis iiiviKans». Liv. 39, 51.— 3. Jrd pmvin- 
 cr fibi ^>'j»^C pnetor mai:istriltu t^e abdicatQrus erat. Liv. 37, 51.— 4. Philij)pus Deme- 
 filium nuUo alio crimint-'' qxuim Itomdna; amicitioi initte octldit. Liv. 41, 2-3. — 
 5. Ciesarem injuriiB retentOnim eguituiii liomanOrum ad id bolluuj inciijlbant. Ca'?. B. G. 
 3, 10.— . (J, Cum Sagunti excidium Iloma3 nuntiaium est, f-mwmw» pMiov'^'* uon lati auxiUi 
 patres cepit-». Liv. 21, 16.— 7. Dictator co«,'el)at Manlium fatCri /m-i/tM^ insimuldti fal.so 
 crimine seudt'is. Liv. 6. 16.— H. Nunc quoniam euopti"^^ belli purgatum est crimen, gtsti 
 reddenda est ratio^^. Liv. ;i8. 48.-9. Ca?sar tam cito Metropolim venit nt nuntios^"^ ex- 
 pugndti oppidi antecederet". C;cs. B. C. 3, 80.— 10. Hiec tiia recusation* cunfessio est 
 ca/itce jm-uniir. Cic. C'lu. 53, 148— 11. TerrOrem subitum pavoreinque^^ urbis liortux ob- 
 sessoB et oppug/uitih^^ Capua post dies paucos capta^^ iu hetiiiam vert it. Liv. 26, 37. 
 
 > The bill of the law.— ' to propose (publicly).— ' to eausilize.— * even the most 
 powerful.— * to be liable.— « to be tried by the courts (literally : to plead one s cause).— 
 ' after reading the main subjects.- « to notice.— » timber.— >" to place.— '» trunks.— 
 J2 The qualitative genitive is used here attributively, but must be resolved into a rela- 
 tive clause 'guiP. dejici*^ndi opens essent\ It is used thus, to avoid using twice the 
 copula essent. /Jejicere, to overthrow, to destroy.— ^^ by this protection.— >* Discrirnen^ 
 difference.— »* t<> distinguish.— *" wailing.— »^ ambitious aspirations.— " whatever.— 
 i» assuevUse (perf. of asttuescere). to be accustomed.— ^^ to pnipose.— '» council.— '■"» to 
 refuse — -^ the charge, aceusation. reproach.— "■'♦ cup. — '-'• to empty.— '• hospitable. — 
 2T for ni) other crime.— ^'^ shame.— ^*» to overcome.— "> \o commence.—"* render an 
 account about the way it was carried on.— a^ the me-sengers carrying the news of.— 
 SJ» to overtake.- «♦ relusal.— 3» trembling ou account of,— '« to attack.— •' the capture 
 of Capua happening after a few days. 
 
 I), Reversed Phrases and Gerunds in the Dative. 
 
 8 ^H^. Ci(^rnndive phrases (rarely gerunds) in the dative 
 are used • 1) as completing ob.iects of verbs or adjectives con- 
 strued with the dative of a noun (§ 474. § 482. § 500), if such 
 verbs or adjectives, according to their meaning, admit of ver- 
 bal actions as objects; 2) as adverbial objects of purpose, 
 denotin- the end or the aim of an action; 3) as attributes 
 of nouns denoting certain offices, or their holders; 4) as pred- 
 icate-datives (§ 468) to denote fitness or ability of things 
 or persons for an action. 
 
 U-The gerundial dative most freqnontly occur, as a o.„nx^^^ 
 
 rafelv in th.^f^rm ol an absolute ««^"'J;,;^;;^ J''^,^^^^^^^^^^ For "xa^^^iplesof reversed 
 object (Kk IS. 27), and never as a gerund with atimcted case, r or exaiuiii 
 
 „..,., 'ulial i-;;".^, t^e l~." ufa'V^ru u ;. l^^^^ object 
 
 Iti^wl; fiX"irt ium<-)re(\o be sufficient), w«r« (to have eisi re for 
 jitrare (lo '.• ' l^^''•/"•''n a„;.n Th,. ti-in«ilivcs occurrins wtli this con- 
 
 nn;;M\t:;;4"rfS"';; ir^'n , " ra J«^^«"^ to devote care to.do- 
 
 TflZ:^]^^fTimcr^^^^^ in,part labor); de^ii^are to destine : 
 
 ■"„r, ,Ii i'.' Znnilta-e atlhibere, adjkm (animum, to apply one s self 
 
 ^vilh, to linisli the taking of the census). 
 
 nil, to nnisn ine uuviii^^ wi .»- v.^.......,. 
 
 the leading a.lministration of »<• a ;iir • N^Q»;^ V^St (of the'civil war). C.c.Fan». 
 you did not take a very acuve V^'l V^^^^ j.^'J^rm, -ee personally to the execution 
 1 7, -^.-Plem.nio f/'Pt'"" "t m <^{f\^±lf^^^Jl!f^Tdo\\\^^r^^^^^^ '>« present at 
 of the measure). Liv. ^9, b. See b-v. '■ -^"**^^^^'^' ,- .y,^ nre«ence of witnesses at the 
 the writing') is a frequent v"l>Hcistic V\r^^^^ ^^^l^^}^^' ll\,,\Z, in some of the «Id- 
 record ml' of ()ffleial resolutions, ^^^^^F'^^^Z'^.l^^l^^^^^^^ tl e «^ ^^^ Bacchanalibus : (?. 
 est monuments of the hmgua-e, f^ " '^^, ^Ti "fc ^*'^''"^- 
 
 ^faveius etc. IV. Kal. (^^ ?*^- «^SmS 1 Cm^ ?n m'an lU, the recording of the decrees 
 runt), and in the Inscnptions of Vlf "i o"'''^^ cice?o, Fam. 8. 8, we have a verbatim 
 of corporations (Orell. Inscr. 4 ♦^j.;.*f'^J-/;Ve cause of the civil war. This decree 
 copy of the decree of the ^;;'^'/;;j''^^^, J-.J, f pH^^ iTo/. Octdbrls (:iO. of Septbr» in 
 hegins in the ^tyle of the 6^(7. d€ W/«/ja^^^^^ j..,^^^ ^g^ 4^ gcribendo 
 
 aae Aixdlinis sckibendo adfueuitnt i.. y/owmu* ei«^. a provincial council: 
 
 «ii;/is used in the form «'f « g^'-^^dive phrase of he record^^ 1^ Srnbendo adfui 
 
 Zcrm scribendo video ^'IP'^^^^^f^^^, tl^M>eVf,r nance of a\vorir'. ( Ex. 4 ^ G. 7. . 
 ^tv.-Frmssereifac^»d.e, t<> pr^^.^i< »^^'- »^^^ ' n eonnection with a gerundial have preg- 
 
 ,. ._. ^roBesse reifocdend.e, ' to presule over tne I'f i'^^^'^J .^^^ '.^jth a gerundial have preg- 
 Obs. •->. Mai.yol the verbs mentioned R. 2 9 m c^^^^^^^ Supere^se 
 
 naV.f meanings, mostly ^^f,^;";!"^.^^^^^^^ but a/<.r. some things 
 
 with temp'JS as •''•l^J'^^^t mean. ^)f^/"'^^.^^ Zy^ramjempvs or other expressions of time, 
 which are to be done. (Lx. ^^ •rv'^'f, V.v t nirto some action, as Irntivm ludorvm jnvcu- 
 meins ' to give or devote '>"lf,i^;ri*^„\:';^', ;^,t'e K' ^st (ikitium) public games to satis- 
 
 reifaciendir. uenoie^ '"."Vi^" 94; 
 Bometliing for a purpose . (Lv. -J4.j 
 
164 
 
 REVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 ^^ Ziimpt enumerates amonf? the verbs constmed with frenuidial datives tho 
 
 {)lira.«e ftmpii,^ co/iKuuie/t', uiiich \n an error, ttic ircnuidivcs coiistnu'd with iliis phraeto 
 >ein^ abluiivf."*. Compare: Eo reinporc aplandd cla.-<-<e absuinpto. Liv. •jl,4!>. 
 
 1. Claudii U'lTilti. qui otnnibns gerpndi^ rebus (apud dure;* CanipJlnos) aiffi/eranf, in 
 seniltu videbantur. Liv. yc», Hi. — 2. Seniltus, qnuni dc Cicernnit» reditu eijii^ decrSvit, 
 lie quis de efi re ferret*-', lie quis di-putaret^. ne loquoretur, ik^ ^cribf-mlo ade^tsef. Cic. P. 
 R. S. 4, 8. — :i Cran^^um (in seiijltu) snihendo adfuuse auctoritatil)us i)ra>scriptis* 
 ex.stat^ Cic. Or. :j, 2. — 4. Tune, Eifici, pneessc; agro coltndo Mauitiuni putas? Cic. 
 Rose. Am, 18. — 5. C|uum Vesita amxA focuni* urbeni complexa >'it^.^i coltnda; virjiines 
 pnesint. Cic. I.e<;. 2, 12, 2'.>.— 0. Kesi)()ndit Venes, /^rri illi (F(//^ra/<^<r pul)lice Mamer- 
 tlnum penatOrem prtrfvuse. Cic. Verr. 2, 4. 8. JSee ib. 2, 4, 8:1 — 7. Valerius procon- 
 sul tu'andiV, circa Siciifain maiifimie om prirftierat. l.iv. 2>^, 10. See ib. 2.'), 12.— S, Nee 
 consul Uoinflnus reniandu*^ urbihus, ^'i i^pe?» aliqiui se ostcndisset, deeraf. Liv. 20, 38.— 
 !>. Ilannibaiis nullo hibOre aut corpus fatii^jlri aut animus vinei ]>otcrat ; id tempus 
 quod gerendis rebus ifuperesttet, quieti datum est. Liv. 21. 4. — 10. I't villicus» natflram 
 ajj^ri ilovit, t?ic noster hie rector'" sfudnit sane juri^^ et Ugihus cngiio>tcendis. Cic;. Rep. 
 5,3,5.— 11. Cui rei ft*/'?/«/?/'f vis ? Pntninonioh&^' auge)ido f Cic. Or. 2,55. — 12. Vos ne 
 hoc quidem loco contiiindiis (abi/ses) in illos viros dlcrudu pnrcitl^. Liv. 2(), 31. — 
 13. Nee yohimi^ modo vastum hof^tihus relicfum, sed vicis* etiam illiltus ii;nis: vrbibvs 
 (vero) oppugnandis tewpirdtuin est. Liv. 10, 12. — 14. Nihil leliquum est nnde'*ro;«- 
 vieatibus^^ sufficiilmuti^' pnfbendis^'' . Liv. 28. 41. - 15. Tanto (juisque certamine»* 
 aurtim et arireiitum conferunt, nt nee triumviri fi'^dpinndo nee peril»;»'" referu ndo"^^ 
 suJHcerent-^ . Liv. 2G. ;iH. — ](», Cicero conipoiiere-- alujiia de juri(« scientijl cu'perat, nt 
 a|)|>areat po>*se oratOrem non ^/ivc^'/i/Zo tantum.///;'e ?"a^v7/'?, ?ed i'X'uww docendo. Qu. 12 
 
 3, 10. — 17. Coi\s\\\ placandi.i Ronur dh luibtudd(/ut-^ dilecfui dat o\)evt\m. Liv. 22,2. — 
 18. llasdrul)al hnjuendo plnra''*, scnbe)idu(iue i\\nv in rem noii essent-* dedif operam. 
 Liv. 2H, 17 (see ib. 3. 34, IK — 11». Vi.\ eis nhxs quas constituerant duces collf>candi«"^ 
 atque adnniiutrahdisXi^m\)\\i^ est datum. Ca's. I>. (J. 3, 4.— 20. '^{:\\nu oi>eiilnix a^^picien- 
 dis-'' teinpus dabat. Liv. 2<;, 51. (See ib. 3. <;•«, 7).— 21. Masini-sa, data df.xtnl in id quod 
 ■^iiXQh^xwx Migamla;'^* fidei^ in rej^iain"» concedit^". Liv. 30. 12. — 22. Milii n(m est iu- 
 tejjrrum^i ui ineum laborem \\i.^\\\\\\\\\w ytencuWs sutAeraudis'^'^ non itnpertiarn. Cic. Mur. 
 
 4, 8. — 23. MaimbiiR P<inietTn;e'3 jx^rducendo^* ad culintn^* open dest'nultiV eranf. 
 Liv. 1, <>5. 7. — 24. Omncs Volerunem rej'andi.^ cottsulibus jM-rrm^-tlr^ifn triljiinStum'» 
 credGbant. Liv. 2. 5(j, 2.— 25. Tu rv^ii^ ])ecuniit deport an d^^^'' et bello gernido Marcum 
 CatOnem prtvfecixti f Cic. Dom. 8. 20. — 2(1. I'opulus Papirium Semproniumque re/isui 
 agendo*** i)ni'VCcit. Liv. 4, 8, 7.— 27. Mai,'iia animi contentio^^ adit/euda est explirando 
 Ari-ttofelem*^. Cic. Fraj^nn. Uort. G9.— 28. Nuiua rex sacerdolibus creandis auimuni 
 adjecit. Liv. 1, 20. 
 
 Rem. 210. Only a few of the adjectives whicli govern a dative case 
 are, in good prose, construed witli a gerundial dative, and even these 
 few are more generally construed with a prepositional gerundial (K. 240). 
 Tlie Ibrni of this gerundial is mostly a gerundive plirase, more rarely an 
 absolute gerund, and extremely seldom (Ex. 0) a gerund with a transi- 
 tive object. 
 
 Obs. 1. In Cicero the participial adjective accommoddtus only (Ex. 1) is conpfrned with 
 a grerundial dative. Most frequently this construction occurs in Livy, and even in Livy 
 less than thirty examples (all told) of adjectives construed with :,'erundial datives are 
 extant. He thus construes aphis (adapted X^^^, intenhis (\M'nX. intent onK '^a/^^Menouirh 
 for), pro/np/un Siiid pa rat n^i (ready Xo). opj)ortunus (convenii-nt for>, proj)ior (in'arcr to). 
 Later writers construe communis, reltquus, idoneus, halnlis, utilUi, and peveral other 
 adjectives with a ST'^rnndial (Xux'wq..— Pug u undo par, equal to the contest, occurs Ca;s. 
 B. G. 5,34.— T'lc/oridP temperandiE iinpar. Tac. H. 4, 1. In 'dUserendo par" (ecpial in dis- 
 course, Cic. Or. 1, 5tj> the gerund, which Kuhner considers as a dative, is an ablaiive. 
 
 » To deliberate. — " to make a report. — * to oj)poBe, — ■* in the rcjruhir minutes of the 
 resolutions. — ^ to be extant, to he on record. — • a hearth. — ' to embrace. — ** to 
 tempt.— "the farm-overseer.- '"chairman. — n jurisprudeiue,— '- property.— '^ the 
 fcoil. — 1* whence.— '* supplies.— i" ^ati-^y. — I'to distribute.— '" contist.— i» clerk. 
 — 20 to enter on the books. — 21 j„ \^^^ sullicient. — 22 to compose. — ^^ to make a draft. — 
 2* to make several remarks.— 20 in rem esse, to be pertinent.— 2« to arrange— 27 to in- 
 spect. — '^'^Jidem obUgdre, to pled<re one's word. — -* })alace. — ^o to betake one's self. — 
 31 integruines.<<>-, to be allowed. — ^'^ to relieve. — ^3 the Ijooty of Pometium. — ^4 to lead, 
 to carry.— ^» the end. — 3« tribunate.- ^7 to transport.— ^8 to hold the census. — 
 3» magna contentio, an intense attention. — *<> Recent editions have changed this read- 
 ing into Ariatoteli, on account of the trausitive gerund. Uut see Ex. 18. 
 
 GERUNDIAL DATIVE. 
 
 165 
 
 Obs. 
 
 ^ 2 With «'omc adjectives the gerundial dative is connected as an advkkbial ob- 
 iect of piMi -OS- or iti the loo«e sl-nillcation ^concfrning\ These relations, more 
 usual are ^pressed parilv bv the second supine, partly bv a jjerundial in the accusa- 
 iv att^M- ";/ Kus are us.d farUis. fefir (Liv'3. 17), soliemni^ (regular), a^per (liatd t), 
 S/ /. (, .uai) ej^guus (in the meaniiig too small for), parum (aniecW 7naturus, trnm^u- 
 ru'Vmulan the mea nn- strong enonqh for), bonus (good for). Som.-times, but ^ery 
 rareiv 1 c e^^^^^^^^ «» ^"^^^ adjectives have a passive meanin- (Ex 
 
 lir^Pinv rS\i ly uV'^^ in tins way gerund datives, dependent.on ^tilu ^m\ stmilar 
 adjectives^ L Aq>Z nitrosa vtUis est blbe,uio (instead of btberUibus, or ad btbendam). 
 
 "• "l- "l^lh^uZ^il^lV t^;ams"'re& tempera den^ntendisyructibu. et ;>.ra;n- 
 
 .n!/^V;,?,;;,rl;i"sunt. cic sen. 19.^2. AV-'"^5^"« ^See U^'i^A^ 1^^"^""^^^^ 
 nam rJet-sst maxime renarand(f^ intentus f iierat. Liv. 3.. 8. (See Liy. 23, So , 1, o4 , i- «»"•*' 
 07"", . '5, 8 )- 3 HiCnia aptu,r erat be/to reparandoqnnm ulla ptirs te.;rSrum*. Liv. 
 
 '^' i. ■ iee lb. 2. 37' S. l{ 3>, 10 ; 38. 3 ; virro R. R. 3, l^}-,^:,,?"^;'^''^''; - 
 SnrrvrhetoriceSni^e<-ipit perciphndi.-<« puer ?natunfs esse videStur. Qm t. 2. 1, 7.— 
 
 5' i\m.iumM".ud Kagnfttni./. 'ri*-^^ cuUdis^ '^^'S:^':;'K^7^:'^?V^o^: 
 « 17—«» Hie locus ^r/wi/«*- quoque tegendo satis laicbrnsus» erat. Li\. 21,54. <»<.« i''- 
 'li ' V ) - 7 Fl vius dixit, nulla.u umquain genten. prompfiarem renu^darula^^^ fuisse 
 n nun Ro n-in s Liv 25 IH.- 8. De supplicioi^ Cam„ani senatus/aa/t^ vnpf(rand(Z 
 2Si' TS T^i^'- 25. U--9- Appius proplor,lnIer- 
 
 d «''in 0I3 q„i,n ^^.,,'^^^^ magistratui erat. Liv.3 35.-- 10. N^^^Snint consu.es se 
 R Idus Deceuibri- sdlemnem ineundis magistral ibus diem abitQros»* esse. Liv. 
 ? I 3 lb 3 3r, - 11. Ills rebus onsulcs «v/x/w.m'» rfom«ri//o multundinem fecC- 
 runt iv 3 f^> 4--' Camillo. jurare parato in verl)a^7 «c<wrtm/<3B vaJstudim solita, 
 runt. ^^>):'^,;'-';,7;. ,.;\i,j t':'.*/ .^ 7 1. 13 BvaxxxQU^ A^crexiguustanioalendoexcrc^' 
 T^i':^^^ 'i;^^ 2 - V. MiU e; va1rum»« secum portabant. mpardti omni loco cfrr. 
 n/imir, 10. 40. 1- it. -I tenous rebus nerendis immatarum^^ i^vtiX. Ih 
 
 sermnd'-s centui)lex inwvw^ parum^'^ est. Piaut. Pers. 4, 4, 11. 
 Rem 'Ml The dative of a gerundive phrase (rarely of a gerund), is 
 added as ail advkkbi.vl objkct to phrases and expressions consisting 
 of a NOUN AND A VERB, in order to indicate the purpose lor which the 
 NOUN is intended. These phrases and expressions are : 
 
 1 Tr\nsitivk orjective, or passive predicative phrases, as focwwi 
 
 2 Prfdtcxtive phrases, with neuter verbs, as iter patet, dm vetiit : 
 'l)i.< mmifii^ tutbendi» venif, tlie dav arrived for holding tlie a^/embly. --//^r ;>«/</>'«- 
 
 r^J^ltoZllslloZX^ Z »oad is opC-n for the transportation of gru in^^eeEx^H-j^ 
 
 'Tt^) harvest- Mo <mther.- 3 to repair, to renew.- * with the force of a s5>iSu'aj- 
 rJrr in tlem;^it.in- the earth ' is pliced in the plural if c.mceived as an f^^'^f^^jl 
 
 acco. dug .o7 pr scr bed f:.nnuirThe known phrase of Horace" ^-^rar. in ^.T6am^^^^^ 
 ?rr 'swear to the words of the teacher, is used.pregnanlly, 'l^P'-^f ^«J '^Tn ^an Taih - 
 
 Auviium is subjeit accusative,- 3^ unless they are absent, i. e., are kept out. prop 
 erty. — " not enough, insufficient. 
 
IGG 
 
 REVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 3. Predicates conslstini:^ of a piTclic^tc-noun and the copula,* as : 
 
 Deinoathcne^ cum/or tnnris rtfici'-n'li.'f f'/if. IJfino>it hones wii>« a comtnissionor for re- 
 pairiiiir the walls. Vie. Opt. (i. "(). 7, lU. See Ex. 2:i-2'.».— So with pr«'<licati' d iiiv^--, (he 
 jrenuKiiai takiiii; th»- plarcof the dative oC the iiiierested person: Nuc lameu id impe- 
 iii/neitlo nbwi fferendi'^/uit. Liv. 2G. 24. 
 
 Onf, 1. In these phrases, which furnish the most frequent examples of jjernndial dative?, 
 the idea of purpose, e.xpre-sed by the i;enindial, is attacheil to the noi'n, and not to the 
 ;:overiiinLr vkub. Hence they must be, lot.'icilly. considered as attkiblttks of these 
 nouns, altliou<^h they are. «rraniinatirally, the objects of the verbs with which the nouns 
 are combined, and in which they are; mer«:ed, as it were. But in a few instances such 
 perundial dafivt-s must, even ^'raniniaticnlly, be considered as the attributes of nouns. 
 'I'his is especially the ca«-e with the nunn-ral compounds of rir, denoting; olMcers (§'!*>, 
 K. 2>, atid the noun awnVia, as: Nobilitas Tiberiuin (iracchuin, //T'/mWr'/m oVo/'Jix de- 
 (incemiis, ferro necflvit. tlie nobilliv killed Tib. Gracchus, a triumvir for the tifiuling of 
 col<miei< {a colonial commissioner), by the ewortl. Sail. Jui,'. 42, 1. — ifl in manu ejus es- 
 sent coniitia roqando colRr/o', that the meetiug f<rr the choice of his cftUeagve mvjht be 
 in his hands. Liv. 22. :55.t See Liv. 4. 4.— Sometimes it is doubttui wlietlier pucli frerun- 
 diali» ar" <renitive-attril)Utes, or dative objects, as: Ut aliqiiam niihi materiem, proibcas 
 agtndiB ttue apud seuAtum causa'. Liv. 42, 40. 
 
 Obs. 2. As to the use of this construction, the followinj? rules must be noticed: 
 
 (a). It mnst be considered an indispen-able condition for applyinjj a «rerundial dative 
 of purpose, that there should be a sibst.wtivk represented a- Ixini; applied to the pur- 
 pose exi)resse(l by the L'erundial. E.Kamples where perundial datives of purpose are 
 attached to bare verbs without referrin;? to a substantive are extremely rare, and mu>t 
 be considered as harsh anomalies, as : ^cipio citt^if civitatiimi cognosceiidis TarracOnem 
 rediit (inst. of ad causa^^ cogiioscr^nda<), Scipio returned to Tarraco to examine the cases 
 concernini,' these states. Liv. 28. lit. In such connec-ti(»ns either an accusative L,'<'run- 
 dial after ad. or a «reiiitive gerundial wilh causii must be used, as: Ipse ad conventus 
 agendos (not conrendbus agendis) in citeriOnMii Galiiam profectus est. Oes. B. G. \. 5!). 
 
 (b). If an object of purpose is to be expre-sed by a trerund absolute, it either takes the 
 form of an accusative after «of, or of a «.'cnitive, as (titm ad delifM^randum gumere (not 
 delib*-ran<l()). ('a>s. B. (J. 1. 7: spnfium ad resinratidurn (not res/nra/ido) dar/ . Liv. 27. 40. 
 Attiri nxMs ptv/>ositi stmt ad itnitandum (not imitando). Cic. O. G. O. 4, 13. For an ex- , 
 ceptional example of such «jerunds in the dative, see Ex. 17. 
 
 [c). Even jjiTundive phrases, if expressing: an object of purpose, assume more fre- 
 quently the form of an accusative after ad, than that of a irerundial dative. (See li. iSil.) 
 Only if the <,'oveniini: phrase contains one of the nouns denotini; officers, oltices, or the 
 noun a)A/>i/i//, a <,'enin(lial tlaiive is the ueoitlau Ibrm for the ol^ject of tlie pmpose 
 for which these otficers etc. are appointed. Such ofticial expressions are especially the 
 compounds of ?7/' (see No. a), as triumvir, decemvir etc., but also other general desi;;- 
 nations, applicable to more than one kind of t)fflces, as dux. curator, dictator. But even 
 in this connection jc^erundial expressions with ad, or in the form of an attril)Utive ireni- 
 tive are not unusual, as: Triumviri creilti sunt ad su/>pte/idum co\onOru\ii iiumerum. 
 Liv. 3L 49. — Consulis sufi^rogandi comitia habita sunt. Liv. 10. 11. 
 
 ('/). Aside from tlie case mentioned No. (c'), «jerundive datives most frequently occur 
 witli phrases containing nouns of time, {dies.feria, tempus) or place (locus) to indicate 
 the purpose for which a time or place is appointed, as diem alicui rti faciendiT. edictre, to 
 appidnt a day for doinj^ something' ; locum cipere, iocum rtliugnere, i'nvt/tlre etc. 
 
 (€). With other phrases jrerundive datives are either used to vary the expression 
 (especially when other gerimdives with ad occur in the same sentence, see Ex. 12. 1.1), or 
 they are pre<,'nantl^ employed in enclose peculiar dative relations, for inst. thtt of a da- 
 tivus commodi or incommodi, which would be lost by the preposition ad (see Ex. 13. 14). 
 
 Obs. 3. A gerundive dative of purpose may depend on the verb esse in three diflferent 
 relations : 
 
 (rt) if esse has the force of a neuter verb (§ 470, 2), bein? translated by fh^e is, there 
 are, a» : Comitia fueruut f/uigisfra^ibus creandis, ihcro was a (public) meelinj^ to elect 
 officers. Mora fuit agmini e.cpediendo, there was a dehiy in making the detachment 
 ready lor combat (Ex. 21-24). 
 
 * We must remember that predicate-nouns with the copula liave the grammatical value 
 of verbs, and may govern objects like these. % ♦>!. 
 
 t For modern Latinity we may notice here the phrase ' Presidential election\ comitia 
 principi rogando (the President being only 'asked', not directly chosen by the people). 
 
 GERUNDIAL DATIVE. 
 
 167 
 
 jp' 
 
 (6) if esse is used as copula with a predicate-noun (R. 211, No. 3). See Ex. 26-29. 
 
 ic) if a ircrundive is used as predicate dative (see K. 212). „,„.ii„i 
 
 In the cases No. (a) and (b) it is more usual to apply an attributive genitive gerunaiai. 
 
 A GKRUVDiAi. DATIVES GOVEKNED BY TiiANSiTiVB PHRASES. 1. Patres qvinque- 
 riros rompt'ino anro^ dividundo et /ri«/M?;i?'(W Nepete' ootonicB deducendiX.cr€averuni. 
 7 iv 21 4 — 2 Decrevgrunt patres ut pnctor decemviro-* agro bamuih meiienao 
 dividenddg'te cre^ret. Liv. 31, 4.- 3. Talis vir dictator deligendus ^'^^rcendv^ qu<^s- 
 tiombus* Uxit. lb. 9, 2G.- 3. Metellus dixit, non convenlre* quern ni^jd"* cnitas 
 recuinrandiB Ilisjximoi^ delegerit ducem, eum repente» ex provincia «"e^"^";.;"/ „Tpit 
 — 4 DecrCtum est ut consulcs comparent» inter se, uter censortbus creandis naoere^ 
 comitia. lb. 24, 10.- 5. Couui\SL consult ^jni rogando^^^ edicunturi». lb 23,.iL- b. ^^on- 
 cilium legi perferendiH^'^ habitumest. advocato populo abarmis. lb. 3. lb.— <• -^"S^lv I 
 dixit omnibus A j/»^r«wi3 C-x^^nrx^oppugnandisXwxnc esse dictum diem. Caes. n. »jT. ^ 
 27;_ 8. Ilis avertendit terroribus in triduum»* feriicis indictte »""»• L'^- ^'Ji' il'i» 
 9 Galli baud procul inde ubii« nunc Aquiieja est, lociim opptdocondendo'-' c^pCn ni . 
 lb 39 22— K». Numamultaloca.<acm/c^W#«rft.^»»dedicavit I^>' V'^^'TJV. i^ llatm-sa 
 commeatibus^o subrehendis-^^ ex Thessalia mui.Tri" jubet. lb. 44, 9.- ^f.-^^lf^'^^l^';^ 
 re-ins venit ad petendam^* veniam fe^^'i* miftendts. lb. 33 11.- 13 > a-»"^^^*^''^ « 
 Apolloniata'-'* torinenta-'« quae oppugna»d<T nrbi comparata^^ erant ad tuenda^s m«nia 
 devexCre". lb. 24,40 - 14. MuliitQdo incoiarum libertinorumqueet "{''««"^"'""Xj^^^f 
 nuenfa>'dit^' retenta est. lb. 26, 11.- 15. Tertium exercitum tuendis .Paran33MtO?/« 
 fama erat lb 10,:«.— 16. Placuit averruncand.t^^ deOruin trre victimas3* ^ff ^' ; 
 ib.8i. [For smilar constructions see Liv. 1, 21 ; 3. :J5: :i, 37 ; 6, 23: 10, 41 ; 21 4., 
 \i. 7 : 26, 40 ; 27, 15 ; 31, 6 ; 4 i, 3 ; 4:3, 14. Cic. Or. 2, 55 ; Cic. Mur. 11, 25 ; Plant. Rud. 
 
 '^' B GBKUVniAL DATIVES GOVERNED BY PREDICATIVE PHRASES WITH NEUTER VERBS, OR 
 
 THEIR EQiriVALENTs. 17. Pnetor ad opprimeudam (^ 0/>/?re^.-*) t^^-ryOrum conjiiranOnem 
 missus alios, jam con-rei:atos^« ;>w/7/ian(/o, vicit, alios verberatos" ""cibus^s affixit . 
 Liv .-53 3(i — 18. Ouuni «lies venisset fogatidni*^ ex senatusconsulto/^mWfC, wncursa- 
 Ut^i tot.K ille grex Catiiln». Cic. Att. 1, 14, 5.- 19. Philo Romffi juri dicendo*^ urbana 
 sors evgnit". lTv. 2>, ;j5.-20. Neque receptus** Romauis in Tliessaliam, ueqxic comme 
 afibus mrvehcndis*^ eo patuit iter. lb. 44, 6.-21. GomitiH consulibm rogandtsiix^je^^^^ 
 40 18-22. Secundum poenam nocentium«« ut in utranique partem*; an^ndi**« ^c^ten^w^ 
 exemnlum nobile*» esset, indici^o ijbertas et civius^i data est. lb. 2, 5, 9.- 2.3. ^on 
 exerrittis, non dux scribendo exercitui^'^ erat. II). 4, 43, 24.^«e«€c/^M^t or« an d«B quod 
 honestius potest esse perfugium quam iuris interpietatio*' ? Cic Or. ^'f-^.;^-.^^' 
 tum»* ab decemviris est ut supplication* prodigns^* exinandis" fleret*«. Liv. 4-«, ^. 
 (See Liv. 25, .3.) ^ ^^^^ aa -n*. 
 
 C GBRUNDIAL DATIVES DEPENDENT ON «^<«'wiTH PRKDICATB-NOtTNS.— f»- A^^" 
 
 cretum estut Canua esset locus comportandv<^'' condendisque*'^ frrtctiibw. Cic L. Ajrr. 
 2 32 — 27 Datum hoc nostro generi «»est, iuiquit Decius, ut luendis^^ periculis publtas 
 
 » The Pomptinian district.- » Nepete,^., an Etruscan town.- " to survey.- * T'<^- 
 tidnes exercere. to preside at the trials.- * imperscmil.- • just.- ' Might not this be 
 a -enitive ? And to which rule would it belon-.;. if it were a genitive?— « suddenly.— 
 » to settle— "» ivgare, to elect; properly meaning 'to ask', because the Senate had 
 originallv the appointinir power, the people beinjr only entitled to 'ask for the appoint- 
 meTit'.- 1' to tix. to appt>int.- »^ to carry.- »' hiberna pi. t ^mterquarters - i* for 
 three days.- i* days of praver.- »« literally: not far from tfience where (not far from 
 where) — " to build.— ^^ Ifjcutn capere, to select a spot, is a technical phrase, taken 
 from the augural ceremcmies.- »» sacra facere, to perform ^'ly^^i^i^ »»;[^ice«-/; .^'P; 
 Dlie^ _ 21 to transport.— " viam munlre. to mend a road.— 23 a hemld.— J* for a^kll.g 
 fc- "inhabitants of Apc.llonia.- " artillery.- " intended for.- '^^ ad tuenda. 
 to defend.- " dtvehere, to carry away.- »» opifex. an artisan.-, ^^ frequent are to 
 people - " to organize. Parari is the predicate-inflnitive of a subject-clause.- " to 
 Spp -ase (bv religious exercises).- 3* victim.- " cffdere, to slaughter.- 3« assembled. 
 -'3V after scourging them.- 3« crux, cross.- 39 affigere, to nail.- *o rogatwn^mfeire, 
 to take a vote.- «» to flock to-ether.- *^ .jus dicere, to preside over the jurisdicti.m.- 
 43 %^s erenit alicui, literally : The lot Hills to somebody. The «"™*." .'l'5'^%"^^,;^•4- 
 trate^ of the same cateirory divided their departments by lot. Translate lo him 
 fell the department'. ?7r6a/ia, belouL'ing to the city must be rendered 1'y^^.o'npo"",^»,'"? 
 it wilh ' jiirisdicti(m\-4« retreat.- " to convey.- « the guilty -^^ on each side.-*» to 
 keep d(.w 1 - " notable.- «» informer.- •! citizenship.- " to enroll the army.-- 
 «3 eipoun in- - " to proclaim.- " day of prayer.- " prodigy.- ^^ expuirealiquid, 
 to expiate something.- *^ to take place.- »» to forward.- •• to store.- «^ race.- 
 «» luerealiquid, to atone for Bomctlilug. 
 
168 
 
 REVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 piarnla» simns. Liv. 10, 28.— 2S. Hnec ppolia inslj^nia' sint pnblicU locv^ derorandis* 
 11). 10. 39.— 2t>. ijemprouius hoc maxiumm continendU* iu lidc aociis vinculum esbo 
 cons<Cbat. lb. :;il, h'i. 
 
 Rem. 212. Karely gerundials occur as niEDiCATE-DATiVEa, and in 
 classical lau.i^uage (excoi>t in the phrase solcendo cA.se) always as gerun- 
 dives, the copula denoting abilit}', or fitness to pertbrni an action, asonen 
 ferendo esse, to be able to bear a burden. 
 
 Obs. 1. In anteclas>sical languaije the dative of the gerund is made depondcnt on the 
 copula with the force of an ordinary verbal noun, ar*: C^iiid nu^dx eat dttctaiido, aniando? 
 Plant. Ar-in. 1, 3, 17 (= Q'd modus est ductativni tf u/nori, or Quem modnm /udMft duda- 
 tio^ etc. : »ee p. 81. no. 1).— In classical prose the foll»»win«j: gerundive phrasrs occur a« 
 prtdicate-datives : OneHftrendo tfxe (Liv. 2, 9; Uv. Met. IT), 4(W; Sen. Ep. 71 ; H). Ben. 7, 
 9 ; lb. C^u. N. 0, 22); Aowtyri ferendo eaue to bf able to bear an honor, Liv. 4, 3r>: gradui 
 ref'erendif esse, to be al)le to return a favor. Liv. 28, 2.'J: rest'mqnetido i(jtti tsse (u.-ed of 
 thing!», adapted to extinguis-h a tire. Liv. m. «») ; certatniiti tolerando ease, to be able to 
 maintain a combat. Liv. 10, 5: (Xfi ali^no solve /i dot sue, to beaDleto pay one's debts, Liv. 
 31, 13 : the gerund fo/rendo esfie, to be solvent ((Mc. Fani. 3. 8, 2 ; Att, 13, 10, 3; Off. 2^ 22, 
 79) ; cetisifi ceusendo esue, to be subject to assessment in the census, Cic Flacc. 32. 80)». 
 rost-cla<sical authors, especially Pliny, use gerunds as lu-edicute-datives in a passive 
 sense, as Jiadix scohjmi rtscendo tt-t, the root of the scidynius is tit to be eaten (Piiu. H. 
 N. 21, 5»), and often). Such usage is extremely rare in classical prose. 
 
 Obs. 2. DlFKEKKNCK BKTWEKS TUK rREnirATKOENITlVE, AND TlIK mEniCATE-DATIVB 
 
 OP (iKUUNDiAi.s. In both the real prcilicate is an idea understood (^5 100, 2). In the pred- 
 icate-genitive of a gerund it is tlu- idea of instrumentality or means, such as the noukt 
 instnunentmn or ca'isa, of which the gerundial genitive must be considered an attri- 
 bute In the pndicate-dative the idea understood is an AaiEcrivE. such as idonf u< (fit 
 ovable), of which the gerundial dative is an ob.tect. as: 'Decretum est nt ad tnbfltum 
 conferrent divitcs qui oneriprendo esserd, it was resolved that the rich who were aH« fo 
 bear the burden, should ctmtribute to the taxes. Liv. 2. 9. Sometimes i-itlier of these 
 two forms may be used with equal propriety, as for instance in respect to medical reme- 
 dies which may be represented as being apt to heal, or able (i. e., haviftg the power to 
 heal). EmjtlaMrum qnod puri inovendo est, Cels. 5. 19 (a plaster good for removing an 
 ulceration), where the genitive ;>«ri.s' morendi would be etpiiilly proper. But generally 
 the one case cannot be used in place of the other. In a number of passages the reading 
 is unsettled, some manuscripts «jivinii a genitive, others a dative. In other passages the 
 genitive, if of the first declension, cannot be distinguished in form from the dative. 
 The corre<t readiii<^, or the case, respectively, may be easily determined according to 
 the rules laid down above. Thus the passage Liv. 30. 9 : /Vo se gum/ue qua diutvun 
 obsidioni (or obxidionU. according to other manuscripts) (olerand,e sunt ex aorts con- 
 vex^re (everv one to«>k from the surrounding country what was ' for snstaininii a long 
 pie"-c'). All our grammarians give this passaire with the dative readinir. to illustrate 
 the^nse of the gerundial dative. This is evidently enoneons, sirce Livy certainly 
 did not mean toconvev the idea that the things taken by the inhabitants were 'able to 
 s-ustain a siege;'. He "meant to say that these thinirs were a MEANs/or the in/iabttants 
 to sustain the siege, and hence the genitive obsidio/iU \h the only ims.sible reading in 
 the passage. Thus the passage quoted above ip. 102, Ex. 8) : AmbitiOnes evertendie 
 reipublic:e sclent esse (Cic. Verr. 2, 53) is by some grammarian?, for instance Kuhncr, 
 erroneously taken for a dative. 
 
 Obs 3 The expression .w/?v^(/o^sw is best explained bv snpplving the word«i flpn nli- 
 ino (debts), which are actuallv added Liv. 31, 13. Thus it would become a gerundive 
 phrase, and therebv the gerundial predicate-dative, f<;r classical prose, would be exclu- 
 sively assigned to"the gerundive imihases. Most grammarians assert that the phrase 
 only occurs with a neiration {uon solrendo esse, to be insolvent). But this is contra- 
 dicted partly by the passaire of Livy. partly by the use of the Roman jurists, who, m 
 innumerable passages, use the phrase without a negation. See Ex. 7. 
 
 1. Experiendum» est citne aliqiiis plebejus ferendo magno honSri. Liv. 4, S-'S.— 
 ires mulierum exercitaiie' oneri ferendo sunt*. Sen. Ben. 7, 9.— 3. Dictator fretus 
 
 2. Aun 
 
 > A pin-oflTering.— ' insiqne, a badge.— » to decorate.— < to keep.— • The import of this 
 phrase is misunderstood liv all the interpreters of this passage. The meaning assigned 
 to it above is not the original one.— • to try by experience.— ' to exercise.— 8 The 
 passage may be understood in two ways ; bv taking exercHatOE for an attribute of aure^ 
 (the exercised ears. i. <?., bv ear-rings), or by taking exercitatcE sunt for a perfect paa- 
 Kive. In the former way, one/i fefendo would be a predicate-dative ; iu the latter, not. 
 
 1 I 
 
 GERUNDIAL ABLATIVE. 
 
 169 
 
 erat Ic'-fltum» ctiamnunc' certamini^ tolerando es>>e. Liv 10, 5.- J.Hi^pani Ijctatos se 
 dixCrunt ScipiOnem deorum hi^wh-nimc* esse grati(B referendcE.Liy. 2S, li.- b.^m- 
 d^ii ^modoq^ia. restinguendo igniforent portantes, in ^^'^^^^ l^^jj^^.^^f J»^;-. 
 Ih ;30 0-0 Noli mirari quod Maguis spcmsor' buiui factiis est. Nimlium" id fuit . 
 M^ndo uon erat Cic. Att. 13, 10.\- 7. Quum inter tidejussOres* quidam ^Ivendo 
 esse de^iCrunt, earesio ad onus" ejus unisolvendo est uon pertmet. Papm. Dig. 46, 1, ol. 
 
 E. Reversed Phrases and Gerunds in the Ablative. 
 
 1, Gerundial Ablative, 
 § S$99, Tlie regular meaning of the gerundial ablative is 
 that of the means and instrument of an action. Exception- 
 ally and very rarely it is used as a completing object of some 
 of the verbs construed with an ablative case. But more fre- 
 quently it denotes some of the adverbial ideas related to that 
 of instrumentality: being especially used to indicate the rela- 
 tion of MODALITY* The form of the gerundial ablative is either 
 that of a GERUNDIVE PHRASE, or that of a gerund absolute, 
 or that of gerund witli a transitive object. 
 
 Bern 213 The use of the gerundial ablative as an ablative of the direct 
 instrument' or means is very frequent in all periods of the lau.i-uage. 
 It is rendered by an English participial in ing, or by an abstract noun, alter 
 the preposition ' bi/\ as 
 
 Orator rem augere potest laudmdo. vitvperandogue rursiis adfligere, an orator can 
 exalt a thin- 6y;7/ai.4/^7 ^by praise), and lower it by censuring {by censure). Cic. Biut 
 ^riT.-OratiOnem L^itlnam ;/o.^/t./.f7^mii. etflcies pleniOrem^^you ^vil • f ^ ;^«^^«f ^"^ 
 writings increase your command of the Latin language. Cic. Oil. 1, 1. (hterallj . mau 
 the La'iin language fuller). • ^ 
 
 If a gerundial ablative is dependent on a passive predicate, it otten 
 perfornis the functions of a passive agent, as : 
 
 Ilominis mens disce7ido alitnr et cogitando, the mind of man ^^ "S^Jf ^ Jj, ^^^*™; 
 in-and thinkin- Cic. Off. 1. 30 —A sentence like this may in Eng ish be expiessea 
 Actively bvnikm- he part cipial in ing the active subject {Thinking nourishes JM 
 ^?dnd) Biit in LaUn a gerundial ablative can neither be changed ""to a subiect-nomi- 
 nnf S" nor into a s biect-innnitive. Hence English artive seniences of this kind must 
 K,': ^uTc^^SS^^foi^^^ unless a -rbalnotin exists w^i^=h may boused 
 ah subject. [The sentence above we may express : 'Cogitatto alit mentem . But or 
 the verb discere a noun cannot be formed.] 
 
 Obs 1 The lo'-ical subject of the gerundial ablative must always be the same as tlie 
 trrammaticd subject o the governing verb. But if the governing verb is a paf ive 
 e t herfts irrammaucal or its logical subject (the doer of the action, or p^.ssiye agent) may 
 hP the lo4al siXSo^^^^^^ .renuidial, as Faki^is fallendoimpetravit, Fulvius succeeded 
 K !r .!?»?; nfwiV^hP h m"plf wa" the t^er^on deceiving). Milites muniendo occupantur, 
 Se'roSsVre ScaipreTbf forUfy!n7(?4 f-tify) ^^>f ^-/-^^^ 
 
 unless the person expreescd by the subject has sunk the ship. 
 
 » His lieutenant.— ' still.— ' contest.- 
 —8 Ironical particle : ' The fact is' etc. 
 fails to the charge. 
 
 * mercy — » the lines.— • to rush.— '' snretj'. 
 » bondsman.- »° fact.— " ad onus pertinet. 
 
170 
 
 RETERSED THRASES. 
 
 ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 171 
 
 0B8. 2. Ilonce, when words rcferrini: to the loj^ical Fuhjcct of the jrcrnndial. as qnl^q^ie 
 and ipse, are conihiiiod with it, the>( do not aqree with the qeriindial in the ahlatu^. but 
 are placed in tlic nominafi>e case, if the srammalical subject of the irovcrninfr verb it» m 
 that case: Callicrates, agendo ipse lfoniJln:e Hocietatis» cant«am. fflecit utuiii ab s^e di!*geu- 
 pcrit adversiis Koinjliios dicere viderptiir ; CaWhriitv!*. by })leadin(/, /rirns^-f/, the cause of 
 the Roman alliance, made thosie who dit*agreed with him appear to speak a<,'am8t the 
 Komans. Liv. 41, 24. 
 
 1 Ludl et dies festi» quid habCrent vohiptati" carendomn<x\» intellcxi qnamfrf/endo. 
 Cic P. K. Q. 1. 3.— 2. Multi patrimonial tffud{?runt» inconsulte* largiendo*. Cic. Off 
 2, 15. M.— :i. Hannibal scnpi*it, Campilnof» tolrrando pauco^ dies, totam solutQrt^s» 
 obsidiOnem. Liv. 2(1, 7.— 4. Hl;e-ius, docendo qnam ea res patriae salutiliis^ esset, per- 
 vlcit" ut pnvsidium Pnnicum .Marcdlo tradcretur. Liv. 2«. ;W.— 5. Homines ad de(»s 
 nulla re propius acce(hint (approach), qnam saiatem lioruinibus dando*. Cic. Lis: 12. US. 
 — fi. Cirsar dando. mhlevando^'^. ignoscendo ; Cato nihil largiendo^^ 'r^lonam adeptus est. 
 Sail. Vat. 54. 3.— 7. Unam legem to/hndo^'^ cetera» infirmabiiis. Liv. 34, i.— 8. Uux ide 
 ex bellis Mia nerendo^^ vivit'. Liv. 21, 10.— 0. Sic ulciscar»* ea hominnm srenera 8in<?nla, 
 quemadinodum'^a quibiis(iue sum provocStusi»*: maloscivis, rempuMirafuhencgerendo; 
 pertidos aniTcos. 7/J//J/ (7Y(/e//c/o. atqne omnia carendo ; invido<, virtilti et «.'hniie sei- 
 tiendo^'' ; mercatOres»" proviiiciflrum. revocando (eos)domnm, atqne ab eis provincuV 
 rum ratidnes^^ rejy^ftndo-^. (Mc. P. \i. it 9. 21.— l<t. (iratiam nns inlre'-i tt Caisare de- 
 fendendd pace arbitriTmur. Cic. Fain. 4. 2.— 11. Milites fati-ilti per diem totnm vid 
 facienda. a Hojorum reire pnplio victi sunt Liv. 33. 3r..— 12. Consul, occupiltus op- 
 jtugnandis ^^tolicis urbihus, Pliilippum ad Thessalorum civittltes misit. Liv. 3!», 24.— 
 13. L. Marcius omne tempu8 niuuiendis castris convehendisf/ue'^ commealibm^^ con- 
 sumpsit. Liv. 35, 37. 
 
 Ji^m. 214. AVhen Ihe adverbial relation of modality is expressed by the 
 fi^eriiiulial ablative, it irenerally has the force of a ])resent participle used 
 as an accessory predicate (55 4(51, U. 12), as llannihal vincendo aenex /actus 
 est (as U^'cincetiff senex factus est)Liv. ;30, 38, Hannibal, i;re\v old a.s a con- 
 qnewrjn themuht of rictories^coiiqneriiifj. (See lis.. 1-4) Here belongs the 
 combination of the Venindial ablative with neirations, when it is some- 
 times an e(iuivalent of the English participial after ' irithouC, as : Litteras 
 dedit mm scnbendo, he composed a letter without writing. See Ex. 10. 
 
 Ob?. 1. In this relation the frernndial atdative has often a pregnant meaninjr, combin- 
 hii: that of an abi.ativic absolute (of which it, someiimet». is almost an equivalent) with 
 thatof a irerundial. It mav. then, often be resolved into clauses with conjunctions, for 
 instance l)y nhil*^ (Ex. 5. «i. 7), since (Kx 8). after (Kx. 9). Sometimes it is chosen m 
 place of an ablative absoUitive to impart the idea of necessity to the action, as : Tardo 
 Inde ad Maleam i)ervCnir, trahendis plerunKjue rei/iidco naribtis qu:u cum commeStu se- 
 quebantur. Liv 32. It» (From there he came late to Malea, since the ships which followed 
 with the supplies ^a^; mostly /06" /o/f?^</). . - • 
 
 Obs. 2. The «.'eruiidial ablative is (rarelv) used instead of gnam with a siibiect-inflni- 
 tive, after c(miparatives, havinp: thus the full force of a declined inrtnitivc : Nullum ofH- 
 cium Merenda gratia maj^is est necessarium, Cic. Otf. 1. 15 ; no duty is more necessary 
 than that of returnimr a favor (inst. of quam gratiani referred. 
 
 Obs. 3. The «jenindial ablative is very rarely used as a completini; object of verbs, or 
 asa limitiuir object of i)r.(licate-nouns or adjectives: Absfifit conHnuando tnar/islrdtum, 
 he (ifr-isteiffrom prolonj^'in-; his ottiee, l.iv. 9, -M.—Coident'/s f)0>'sid>^ndis agri<, satisfied 
 with holdiuLT lands, Liv. 0, 14. -Ut et doctrlnie studiis et re'jenda civitafe pi mops esset 
 (the first in the art of j,'Overninj? the state). Cic. Leg. 3. «.— Cura ceiisOrum non se tenint 
 
 rando dignus est\ never occur. 
 
 1. InvidiOsisS* nominibus utebatur consul, peditiOnem muliebrera-s appellando. Cic. 
 
 * injudicious. — ^ [or- 
 
 » festival.— ' palrimoniam. fortune.- s eJTi'ndere^to w^^tc— * injudicious.— >> tar 
 qiH to t)e liberal.— « solvere, to raise.— ' beneficial.— « to prevail.— » salnffm alicu 
 dare, to make somebodv happv.— i" to relieve.— »» to irrant.— '- tosetaside.— »3 to raise. 
 — i*ul.ciscialigf/em, to take reven<,'e on somebody.— »» as.— »« to provoke.— to 'vo 
 for.— »<* merchant.- >« account.— ^»" to require.— ^^ gratiatn inlre ab aliquo, to obhgo 
 homebody.— ^a to convey.— '** tjupplics.— ^* odious.— '■'* womauiiih. 
 
 u* 
 
 I 
 
 Oflr. 2, 4.— 2. Bocchns, repvtando^ quae eibi duObns proeliis evenerant, quinqne ex 
 neccssarii82(lc!6o:it quorum fides coL^itaerat. Sail. Juj;. 103.— 3. Rex ^r«rc#/i£/o quotidie 
 militeshostem opperiebatur^. Liv. 33, 3.-4. Camillns Ardex dis hominibi/sgue accusandis 
 eene.«cObat*. Liv. 5. 43. 7.-5. His rebus efficitur* ut dando eX. acci/iiendo, mutuanuis- 
 gnt^ facudatihus'' et comnwdavdis^ nulla re eireamus. Cic. Off. 2, 4.— 6. Ma-^d stratus 
 domim ne danto neve petendd^ neve gerendiV'^ neve gesta potestdte. Cic. Leg. 3. 4.— 
 
 7. Medici toto corpore curando^^ minima? etiam parti medeutur. Cic. Tu8C. 3, 34.— 
 
 8. Hannibal, recor</a/*(io quie ipse in transitu Alpium tolerasset, nequSquamis facilem 
 traiisitum exspeciabat. Liv. 27. 39.— 9. Deniqne Bomilcar. omnia terdando. socium sibi 
 adjuii^'it Nabdal.sam. Sail. Jug. 70.- 10. Qui est qui niUlis ofAcix praxeiHis tradendis^^ 
 pljilosophum fee audeat dicere ? Cic. OtT. 1, 2. 
 
 2 ) A llaticGS ahsolate. 
 § «ISO. Tho Ablatives AB-SOLUTE (§ 395 foil.) must be con- 
 sidered as one of the various forms which the Latin lano-uao-e 
 has assigned to the predicative phrases of several classes of 
 dependent clauses. By this form the dependence of the clause 
 is indicated, tlie ablative case of the phrase having the force 
 of a suBORDiXATixG CONJUNCTION. The subject of this pred- 
 icative phrase is called subject-ablative, and the predicate, 
 
 PREDICATE-ABLATIVE. " 
 
 f^^For the agreement of the predicate-ablative with the subject-ablative see § 396, 
 and R. 3.}. 
 
 Jlem. 21.'). The ablative? absolute are, by their original conception reversed participial 
 phrfwits. expressing, like the gerundial ablative, and true to the fundamental meaning 
 of tile ablative Ciise the cause or means of an action. In this original meaning the 
 ablatives absolute very fix'quently occur in all periods of the language, as: Neutram- 
 l)artem volCbant potentiorem altera oppressd fieri, they wished neither party to become 
 llie stronger bi/ the crushing of the one. I^iv. 42, 30. 
 
 The cause and means of aii action existing always previous to the action as such, this 
 grammatical form (with a perfect participle) was etninently adapted to indicate a timb 
 ANTKuioK to th(! main action and such relations which are analogous to those usually 
 expressed by the ablative of substantives. Thus the ablatives absolute gradually be- 
 came a regular form for the predicative jjhrases of temporal, causal, conditional and 
 modal clauses, and, in general, for all relations usually expressed by the English parti- 
 ciple absolute. 
 
 Jiem. 21G. The ablatives absolute are divided into five classes accord- 
 ini; to the ditferent forms of their predicate-ablatives: 1) Ablatives 
 absolute with pkufect participles of transitive verbs, the subject-abla- 
 tive beinu^ the transitive object of the active verb,* as legdiis dlmisds, after 
 the ambassadors had been dismissed ; 2) with perfect deponent parti- 
 ciples, as IcfiuttH profectiH, after the ambassadors had departed; 3) with a 
 PRESENT PAiiTiciPLE (active or deponent), as mditibus sequentibus, while 
 the soldiers followed ; 4) with a piiedicate-noun, or a predicate-adjec- 
 tive, as Cicerone comule, vthWa Cicero was (is) Consul ; /m^re incolumiy 
 while (my) brother was (is) sate; 5) with impersonal perfect passive 
 PARTICIPLES of neuter verbs, as debelldto, after the war had been finished. 
 
 > To consider.- ^ relative.- » to await.— * to grow old.— ^ it follows.— « to borrow. — 
 ' (our mutual) means.— » to lend.— » to apply for,— »" to hold.— " to cure.— i" by no 
 means.— »' tradere officii pra;cej)ta, to give rules on human duties. 
 
 * This foiTii of tlie ablatives absolute is always a sure evidence of the verb, employed 
 as participle, being transitive, the same as with all reversed phrases with perfect parti- 
 ciples or gerundives. 
 
ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 172 
 
 178 
 
 REVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 CO 
 
 tW To these mny bo added the participles of the three periphrastic conjujration». 
 For the use«>f the «renindial nhlativo with the force of ati ablative alisolute see K. -^13, 
 Obn. 1. For the use of the participle in urns as ab;*. ai)l. see H. 15<». For the use of tha 
 perfect participle witli the lorce of a periphrastic participle, ^^c•e § .VM. 
 Ons. 1. The <;rammatical value of the two tciisep in which the predicate-ablative may 
 appear, is not To be taken as ABsoi.rTE (in rcfrard to the speakeu), but depcuda, as ia 
 infinitive clauses, on its relation to the principal predicate : 
 
 ya) If the time of the action expressed by the participle is conceived as coinctdknt 
 with the time of the action indicated by tlie i)rincipal predicate, the present parti- 
 ciTLK is usfd, and tiie construction must be active (but see Obs. 3 (a).) 
 
 (f» If the time of the participial action is conceived as antekiou to that of the prin- 
 cipal predicate, the participle must be in the PEitPECT, and tlie construction is passivk 
 (but see Obs. 3 (/v).) 
 
 The Enirlisb equivalent of the present PARTiripi,K, if it is rendered by a participial 
 )nstruction, is likewise a i-rescnt ])articiple ; but if it is rennert-d by a finite clause, 
 the tense aj^reeswilh that of the principal predicate, as : CeltibCri quieti m(7H6«/, Tiiu- 
 t\o odfinente imn'mc'uun, tlie CVllil)eriaiis remain quiet wliile Titiirius //oWx (is hoMini;) 
 the province, (or Titurius holding tiie i)rovinci'); but: (.\'ltil)C'ri quieU vuintbant {or 
 manser-anf) Titurio o/>ii/w?///<'l)roviiiciain, ihe Ccltibtrians re//i(/i//e(/ (had reijiained quiet) 
 wliile Titurius held (was hokliii-.') ilic province. 
 
 '1 lie Enirlish equivalent of the pkkfkct pakticiplk (beinj; likewise a perfect partici- 
 ple if a participial construction is clioseu) is j^enerally a pupkufkct*, as : Connlio 
 dimisso lerf(Ui aiKWi sunt, after the council had been dismissed, the envoys were hwtrd 
 (or • the fOuncU haiing l>een dismissed t!tc,'). . . , 
 
 Obs. 2. 8ince ablatives absolute cannot «generally be used to express C(»incident time 
 passively, nor to express anierior time actively. Eiitrlish active constructions, in order 
 to be rendered into Latin ablatives absolute, mu^t frequently be changed in re^j'ard to 
 voice. (See § Ml ) 
 
 Obs. 3. Exceptions to the riti.es in Obs. 1 (a) and ih). 
 
 (a) CoiNCiOENT time may be expressed pas.<tirf/i/. if the action is conceived as a state, 
 produced by some fornvr action. In this instance the pkukkct paktk ipi.e may be used 
 in the quality of periphrastic present (§ 5iMj). as: Consule in Campa/iin ttccufxlto hr\h\ni 
 tarde «^eritur, while the consul is occu/ned in Campania, the war proceeds slowly. (Here 
 the participle Ofcupafo must be resolved into the periphrasiic puesknt occ/pVus 
 ^,M.) If the i)rincipal predicate is a perfect (irestum est) the participle occif/hlto 
 is to be resolved into a periphrastic imperfect (occt/pdtus erat, while he was occu- 
 pied). , , . v 
 
 ib) ANTEmoR time mav be expressed actively by means of a few of the deponent verns. 
 TliuH are used the depon*"nts rnoH. profiH-^ci. tran~<gredi, e(/redi. renrtdi, ingredi, and or'iri, 
 as • rnortuo Tullo (Liv. 1, •,i-i).—Praioribus in vroviuciam profectis, after the pnetors had 
 
 Obs. 4. Rarely deponent perfect participles in the construction of ablatives absolute, 
 and in ordii ary participial constructions, are used witli passive meaninjjs. as dej)opnhlfis 
 tt'iris (Cies. B. (t. 1. 11) ; libertdtv^ dutcedine erpertd (Liv. 1, 17); transgrex-dji Apetmlnis 
 (Liv. 10, 27). Thus are used ad^ptus (Cic. Sen. 2) ; nltus (Liv. 2, 17) and several others. 
 
 Jlem. 217. Relation of the Ablatives absoi-ute to the principal 
 SENTENCE. Tlic Abhuives Absolute in re2:ard to the principjil predicate 
 of tlie sentence must be considered as one single term (the same as all 
 reversed phrases, t^ 191), of which the predicate of the sentence (princi- 
 pal predicate) is the governing word. The relati(m of the Ablatives Ab- 
 solute to this governing j^redicate is always objective, and if they have 
 the gramtnatical value" of clauses, such a clause must be considered as 
 the object of the principal j)redicate. This objective relation is almost 
 always tin adverbial one, being that of time, means, cause, or CON- 
 niTiON. Rarely reversed phrases with participial ablatives are used as com- 
 
 * In freer style a past tense i3 frequently substituted for this plui>erfect. But a papt 
 tense, thus used, may always be replaced by a pluperfect. 
 
 { 
 
 pleting objects of the verbs or adjectives construed with the ablative 
 
 case. 
 
 Obs. 1. To the verbs and adjectives which are sometimes construed with such particip- 
 ial abiitjves as completini^ objects belons; gloridri, gaudere, opus est, coittentus, and per- 
 haps a few more, as: Nulla re mairia gloriantur quam decepto per indutias rege, they 
 
 ' ■ ■ deceived the kiiiff by th(; annifitice. Liv. 42, 47.— 
 
 boast of nothinij more than of having 
 
 Si Icires inlquic sunt, sequitur ut commu tat is nobis opus sit legibu», if the laws are unjust, 
 it follows Wmitheje is a necessity of our changing the laws. Cic. Clu. 55, 150.— Si con- 
 tentns bene re gestd quiesset eo die; if, satisfied with haiing done [the thing] well (with 
 his success), he would have rested on that day. Liv. 42, 59. Sometimes such construc- 
 tions may be considered both as ordinary, or as reversed phrases, as : Civitates com- 
 positd cum Philippo pace gaudebanf. the states were deliL'hted with the peace made 
 with Philip ; or ' the states were glad that they had made peace with Philip'. Liv. 31, 15, 
 
 Obs. 2. The nature of the adveibial relation which ablatives absolute have in regard 
 to their principal predicate, inusl generally be inferred from the requirements of the dis- 
 course, the same as in the English participles absolute. The rules about the conjunc- 
 tions which have to be used it ablatives absolute are to be rendered bv clauses, are modi- 
 fled according to the ditferent classks of the ablatives absolute (see K. 224. 228). In this 
 respect it is a rule, common to all clauses, that conjunctions cannot generalhf be vsed in 
 connection with Latin ablatives absolute, but must t)e understood and supplied. Excep- 
 tions to this rule occur, in good prose, in reirard to the concessive conjunctions ^/'.«i, 
 qvamquam (although), quamvis (liowever). and in legard to the comparative conjunc- 
 tions qxiam (than. vl»'.. sicut (as), quasi, relut, iamguam (as if) and nisi (except if), 
 which are added to the ablatives al)Solute, the same as to finite clauses, if the relation 
 of the ablatives absolute would be obscure or ambiguous without them, as: Cum in 
 expectatiOne seiiatus esset. 6(?//o f/^i non indicto. tamen jam decrtto, (\\\\ regum suam, 
 Persei qui secntflri amicitiam esseiit. when the senate— //i(? war bnng already decreed 
 although not yet declared— wa^ expecting which of tlie kimrs would follow its cause, and 
 which (would follow) thai of Perseus. Liv. 42, lO.— Vtlatdissini'/l cum paUia rdictis^ 
 as if their gods had been abandoned (bv them) together with their country. Liv. 1, 31. 
 —Quod quasi deo teste, promiseris, id tenendum est, what one has promised a* if in the 
 presence of Uod, must be \iKyi.— (Quamvis causa temere in.'ititutd, however raslily the 
 matter may have been decided upon. Cic. Att. 9, 6. See Cic. Verr. II. 5. 25 ; Att. 14,14; 
 Ctes. B. G. 5, 4 : B. C. 1, 37; 2, 13; Liv. 33, 39. See B.Vl. under the conjunctions mentioned. 
 
 Obs. 3. The double function of ablatives absolute as grammatical objects, and as clauses, 
 is blended in a peculiar and idiomatic manner if the subject-ablative is either an inter- 
 KOOATivE or a kki.ativk form-adjective. In this instance the ablatives absolute are not 
 confined to their own relation to the principal predicate, but (in the same manner as in- 
 terro'^ative and relative objects) perform functions which aflTect the irrammatieal form of 
 the wliole sentence, i. <•., they make their own governing sentence a relative clause, or 
 an inierro"-ative sentence, or an interrogative clause. If, in such instances, the ablatives 
 absolute may be rendered by verbal nouns, the construction can generally be imitated 
 in English. But if. as it is often the case, such ablatives absolute must be rendered by 
 CLAUSES or by pauticipials ABSoi.t'TE. the sentence must be often recast in English 
 either by assf-nin " the relative or interrogative function to a member of the principal 
 eentence. or by mailing the aJ)latives absolute the principal sentence, and reducing the 
 principal sentence to the form of a clause : 
 
 1 Rei ative connections : Ea est conatus, qvibus pafefacfis nnllam sibi in posterura 
 di-'iiitaiis locum relTquit. he undertook things «r/ac/^ if knoum, ^\'ou\d leave to his charac- 
 ter no chance for the future (literally : Jle undt'rtook those t?nng< after which having be^n 
 made knmvn, he left to himself no chance for the future). Cic. Fam. 1, 92.--Movebatur 
 Cte^ar misericordia civium, qn'ibus salris atque incolumibus rem obtinCre malGhat, Cssar 
 wa» seized with pitv for the citizens whom he preferred to preserve while at the same 
 time accimiplishing his j)\ir}X)se (literally: while who being safe and iinhurt, he preferred 
 to accomplish his purpose {rem obtinlre). Cies. B. C. 1, 72. See p. 535, R. 
 
 2 Intkiikog ATivE CONNECTIONS : Tu. quibus rebus gestis, quo hoste svperato conciOneia 
 donan.li < ansa advocAie ausus es ? ^Vhat have yov done, what emmy have you cimquernl, 
 to entitle vou to c.ill a meeiing for decreeing presents to you ? (literally: Aft^r doing 
 what things, after conquering what enemy did you dare to call etc.) Cic. V err. 3, 80. 
 
 [Trv to render the followins sentences, both literally and idiomatically, according to 
 the rules given above] : 1. Qua' frequentia"^ omnium generum prosequeuieS, creditis noa 
 
 Make the ablatives absolute the principal sentcucc- « crowd.— ^ to accompany. 
 
174 
 
 EEVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 175 
 
 panda 
 3. Grave 
 
 Capnanron.cto«' Liv.7.30.- 2. \-xd5myxf*,qmbustexmnchs\orafonbu,qn^m 
 1^ lu. con^de,.th. pcidus esl, ?.a sumta^ jaccl* omnm. Uc. N. D. 3, 3o a> 
 
 phalanx, came almost up to our nist ranks. Lies. 15. u. i, 4i. 
 
 Jlem. 21S. The subject-ablative can never denote ^^^^ .^j"^^, P^^^^^'^^^;" 
 thin- as the subject of the governm- predicate. Thi3 subject can 
 not appear in the one of the two propositions as a "«""^^^^^V/. wi ^^ 
 as a p onoun. Tlius the sentence ' ^mpromuscame ^f ^'/^^j'^f.^f ^^J" 
 formed that etc: couhl not be rendered Sempronius unit, eo ^^^'i/^J^J^f^ 
 etc. Nor, if the sentence had the lorni ^After Sempromus haci^^^^^^^ 
 fanned, he came\ couUl we render it ' Senipromo ''(^'f'/Z^^^^^^^^^^ 
 such instructions abhitives absohite cannot be used at all, but the part c - 
 pie must be added as an attribute to the sub ect-nomnuUive, ^^'^eein^^ w h 
 it in i,^ender, number and case : S^mproniu^, certu^r Jactus ^'j;/^ (^*^,^ 
 pronius havin- been informed, came). This construction of the pai 
 fici pie in (,rde? t*> distinguish it from the attribute-participle in reversed 
 phrases, is called ' direct r.\iiTiciri.\L construction . 
 
 OBS. 1. Our jrrammarian. forbid the use «^^^^'^^tive absolutes even xvhe^^^ 
 
 ISSS Sri» is SSis=i=lHs 
 
 locatis MdnOvampriwipibu^ -raviler tos accQ^at,quodde.tllQtu^Mt» . Ca,s. U. o. i, lo. 
 
 1 About the double iuterrogatives see §421, R 73. Translate by finite and co^^^^^^^ 
 terro-ative clause^ without Mibonliuaiiuir coujuuciions. The '"^^.^.^;^^^'^^;; ' " /'[^.i^^^^ 
 S .r.ls. must l>e iu'dieatecl by i"tn)an.in,Mlu. attnbute • o the suru o ^^^^ 
 to jHl'wU- •' ex-^tiiujui. to be cxiingui^Ued. to depart 1 le- » by he "'»»" J^^'""' ". 
 V to lio prostrate.- »sl>ield.- • rej.,re, to »>ri"S - ' ./^'^'"^^ ^'" .?• " ,' n J' iff^d 
 -"tlmrhii-i"iuhi.lile-time.- " «should have Hounshed— i-tofoUou.-^ IclL 
 
 dedtiiute. 
 
 * In the earlier time, populus was not the whole Pfop]«;.;?3;fi «"J^ '^.^J^f/^.'^^r/er- 
 t TUe omission of co-ordiuaiiu- conjuuetions i.. such I'f 1'«^ l''»^ ,,'X „eco^^^ is cun- 
 
 ally indicates that one of the two coublructxous CeUher the Ur^t or the sctoudj w cun 
 
 ceived as prior in time to the other. 
 
 I 
 
 — 6. Nemocrit qui credat. /« invito^ provinciam tibi es?e decrStam. Cic. Phil, tl, 10. 
 
 — t) Ju"urrha fr<itre ineo inferferto, rej^num ej"s sceleris sui praedain fecit, ball. 
 j,i„ ul- 7 Me Ub'^ntf'^ eiipics mild errOrein. Cic. Att. 10,4.— 8. (^xk^^ar obsidibm im- 
 prritix'cen'uw. ho< .Eduis c ii^todi'.'ndo^ indit. Cics H. G. 6. 4.— 9. Cx<&r prinajnbm 
 Trevirorum ad se concocatU has sinj,'illatini {singly) Ciii^'ctori;,n conciliavit. Cies. 
 B. G. 5, 4. 
 
 Ofj«* 2, But more usuallv. cspeciallv in the Latinity of the silver aj?e. direct parti- 
 cipial con>tni(ti(>ns :jre used in place of ablativt-s absolute to which pronominal ob- 
 jects or attributes of the principal sentence reler. In order to chanire' into this cou- 
 t;f ruction, we strike out the pronoun in the principal sentence replacing; it by the 
 noun which is in the form of the subject-ablative, and to which the jrrammatical 
 form of the dropped pronoun is jTJven. With this noun, the predicate-ablative is made 
 to Mjrree, Hence sentence No. 4 would be thus transformed: Ccemr crmroc'ifos yEduo- 
 nim principf^it fjrorifer acru<at. In sentences in which the subject-ablative is itself a 
 pnmouu. this pronoun must be substituted for that of the principal sentence. Tims the 
 sentence No. ti would be chani,'ed in the foUowint,' manner : Caio cujus vivi lingua vigu- 
 
 €t'if. 
 
 I jitin sentences construed according: to this form must generally be rendered into 
 En-di-h as if a conHrucfvtn of ahlati>'es ahmluU were employed, as : (^onanfix (eos) dicere 
 proiiibuit .\riovisfus. Cics. B. G. 1, 17, ichen th'^y were frvi/ig to «peak, Ariovistus pro- 
 Iiibited them Ois if the construction were ' conantibus eis dicere Ariovistus prohihuit eos') 
 
 DlUECT PAKTICirrAL CONSTRUCTIONS IN PLACE OP ABLATIVES ABSOLrTE. — 1. NcmO 
 
 dulntilvit quid interciroio^ ab Thessaliacxerd/'/i patiendum fuerit. Li v. 44, 7.— 2. Varan- 
 /jVy^/^jaui oppuuMiAresuperveuit^aCreflsapnetor. Liv. 42. .56.-3. OrgeUiriqem damna- 
 tum^ pcena >etiui oporteb-it ut iirni cremarGtur. Ca^s. B. G. 1. 4.-4. H(Xsitantibiis^ in 
 rc><ponso7 (It curi:l«'xcederent« dictum (est). Liv. 42. 10,— 5. Progrcftsis^ quatuor millia 
 pa«<uum nihil optabilius»o eratquamredfrc. Liv. 44, 5.-6. Ex Corsica m^ac^a Cicergjus 
 in Sardiniam traii>mlsit»i. Liv. 42. 7.-7. Ludos gpectanti^"^ (Alexandro) nuntms hetus 
 aflertur Persas a suis esse superStosis. Cm-t. 3, 7, 4.— 8. Haec dice n tis (CIW.) latus»* 
 hasiiTtransft\it>5 Alexander. Curt. 8, 1. 57.-9. Alexander descendit in flamen, vixq^ue 
 i/if/re.-isi^^ <ubito horrOre'" artus ri<:erei8 coeperunt. Curt. 3. 5. 3.— 10. Mendaci^^ hommi 
 neverumciuidcm dicHiti credere soICmuus. Cic. Div. 2, 14(;.— 11. CoMandro defnncto'^^ 
 Philippus tllius succCdit. Just. 15, 4,— 12. Tnlia agentem'^^ atque m£ditante,n (Ca^sa- 
 rem) mor<pra^ev0nii2a. Suet. Ca?8. 44.— 13. Hannibal Gracchmn in ms\dieL'^ in dm fum^^ 
 pustnlit^*. Nej). 2:^, .5.-14. Caesar imperSvil ut Ilelvetii reducerentui-as ; reductos in 
 hostium luimero Inibuit-*. Cues. B. G. 1, 28. 
 
 Rem. 319. Gramm.\tical form of the subject-ablative. Any word 
 that may be nsed as subject-nominative (nouns, pronouns, absolute or 
 disjunct adjectives) mav be used as subject-ablative. Even indeclinable 
 nouns and form-adjectives occur as subject-ablatives, as i?nlle occlsis, cen- 
 tum fere capiis (Liv. 43, 23). But neither subject-intinitives, nor subject- 
 clauses can be used as subject-ablatives, except some kinds of clauses 
 which may perform the functions of a subject-ablative with impersonal 
 passives as predicate-ablatives (see § 530, R. 234). Personal pronouns, 
 which are often understood as subject-nominatives, cannot be dropped as 
 subject-ablatives. Tiius dlco, I say, must take the form nie dlc^nte (not 
 dicentc alone) if it assumes the form of ablatives absolute. 
 
 Exceptions Nonns of general import, such as may be supplied with absolute adjec- 
 tives («i 3.>3), pronouns of the third person, ami absolute demonstratives, are some- 
 times understood as subject-ablatives, especially when they are determined by a rela- 
 tive CLAUSE which has tiien the force of an absolute adjective, as mims qui vegan 
 ce.i t to rem facer ent, after persons had been sent who were to notify the king- Cogmtts 
 
 » a'ain-^t thy will — 2 with mv reuly permission.— ^ When they would have been cut 
 off.— ■» siii}trven-ire alicui, \o surprise som.-body.- » when condemned.— * ^vhen they 
 he-itated .... they were told.— ' re,yx)ns>/m, answer.— ^ see § 440, Kem. 4o, 6 note 1. 
 
 — 9 progredK to advanc<'.— i" desirable.— ^ crossed his army.— ^'^ to witness, to be a 
 spectator at.— »3 to defeat — " lafu.< G. ens. side — »6 tran-^ngere, to pierce.— 1« w hen the 
 eovernin-' word^of the participles are pnmouns they are frequently dropped ni tb is con- 
 ItructiimTand must be supplied in the translation.— i^ a chill- »8 rig^re, to be para- 
 Ivzed — »» mendacious.— 20 drfungi. to die.— 21 to a-itale.— ^^ to overtake.— " to l€Ad. 
 
 — " to crush.— 2» to take back.— 2« treated them as. 
 
REVERSED PIIR.VSES. 
 
 quoi framarfa erant (inst. of cognitU eU rebus), after those thinjrs had been ascertained 
 which liad been Iransacti'd (alter a^'certainiiij; what had been transacU'd). 
 
 1. Uivc paranfibi/x hlj^^, ilocem. roL'ii IrMnbi"'' intrilmnt urbom per Jliivinm. Liv. 44, 12, 
 — 2. Compliiribu!* his (populis) propliiss pul4s*. Cjesar in finis» V(»contiOnim pervCnit. 
 Cjes. H. G. 1. 10. — '.]. Caralitjlni". ?imnl^ ad ac Valcrinm initti audir'riiiit, iiondum pro- 
 fecto^ ex Italiil, suS sponti-» ex opi)i(l<i Cott.tm ejiciiiiit. Cie?. li. C. 1, .'M).— 4. Tertio 
 die cum pervenisset ad Citinm montem. vix fran^gre-sins^^ propter altitudinem nivi?, 
 locum castris»» iiivCnit. Liv, -Xi, il.— 5. Adeo'^ sccrCto re<ris curafio'^ fuit, arimiffen- 
 tifiu.t^* neminem, ut fama mortuum (eiim esse) perferret»*, lb. 4'2. !(».— H. Komftnus 
 imperiltor, Po'V)illi() relicto in ciistodiil'* ]\vj:\^'' , jm^mvisis^'^ qui repurcilrcnt" iter, ipse 
 cuii» leirionibus airmen-" ducit. II). 44. 4. — 7. Leu'Sti senatiim accenderunt'», reUltia 
 ordine^^ quae vidissetit. 11). 42. 25. — 8. Marcus et Acilius peractis quie agenda in Gne- 
 cijl erant, principio"' hieniis Roinam rediCrunt. lb. 42, 41. — 9. Csvsar, deposilis''* qui 
 erant ex viiineribus a?gri, per EpTrum iter facere^* coepit. Cie?. B. C. 3, 78. 
 
 Rem. 220. Adjuncts of the subject-ablative and predicate-abla- 
 tive. Both members of the abhitives absohite may take ailjuncts, either 
 attributes or objects, the same as tiie members of aii ordinary pre- 
 dicative i>lirase. The attril)utes of tiie subject, if they are adjectives or 
 appositions, must 'be placed in the ablative (but see C)bs. 1). The predi- 
 cate ablative may be construed with completing objects, adverbial obje(;ts, 
 object-intinitives, and with clauses, finite, partici[)ial, or intinitive. The 
 completini^ and accessory predicates which may be connected with the 
 predicate-ablative must be i)laced in the ablative, agreeini; in gender and 
 number with the subject, as StaVj, eddern manenk', the condition (state) 
 remaining the same. Marcena consule credto, Murnena having been elected 
 consul. Eumem pacaiiOre invefito, after Eumenes had been found more 
 peaceable. Liv. 37, 45. 
 
 Obs. 1. When QuUqfM or plenqne. with the force of a partitive apposition (see § 37'), 
 R. 36) is coml)ined attrilnitively with the «ubject-ablative, these words take the form of 
 the NOMINATIVE, not that of the ablative (see K, 213, Obs. 2). The same is the case if the 
 predicate-ablative has a retle.vive ol)ject which is emphasized by t/>v, as : 
 
 Exercitus Ilerculis, amisso duce, ac muUU sibi quist/u^ imperiuin }k>feniibus, brcvi 
 dilabitur, the army of Hercules, after the 1o!*h of the leader, and since jnany claimed 
 the command, each for himself, was soon dissolved. Sail. Jui;. 18, 3.— (^iii acie refuse- 
 rant milites, inisf<vi jt/trlqae armU. decastrOrum defen-iOne nou cojj^itiibaut, the sdldk-rs 
 who had fled troin battle, the mo^c of them kaiing behind their arms, did not think of 
 a defence of the camp, Cajs. B. C. 3, 95,— Q. Serapronius, causd ipxepro se dicta, quin- 
 decim niillibus leria damiuTtur. Q,. Sempronius, after haviui^ himself defended his 
 canst' (having been his own defender), is condemned to fifteen thousand ases. Liv. 4, 44. 
 — J)is aiictoribus in spem suani qui.'ique acceptis; After each had accepted the author- 
 ity of the gods for his liope. Liv. 21,45. 
 
 Obs. 2. The adjuncts of predicate-ablatives are often very complicated. Combina- 
 tion» of this kind often btiioni; to the most perfect specimens of Latin style (especially 
 C«sar l)ein<,' unsurpassed in the elepint and masterly use of this construction), while they 
 are sometimes so repui^nant to the Euirlish idiom that a literal renderin<j would make tlie 
 period almost unintellii,Mble. In such instances tlie Latin sentence must be rei!;iilarly 
 recast, by separating the ablatives absolute and all their adjuncts from the principal part 
 of the' sentence, and by rendering the whole complex of the ablatives absohite as an 
 independent sentence. We add an example of this kind : 
 
 Ilelvetii, (c) sen quod tiniOre perterritos Rom!lno« discedere a se existimSrent, («) po 
 magis quod pridie (/) t<npriorib>i'< b^if ocfupafix pneliiim non commisissent, «/> sive 
 eo quou re frumentaria intercifldi posse confiderent, (b) commufdb» cemsilio atque itinere 
 convenv, (a) nostros a novissimo agmme insequi ac lacessere cteperunt. Cues. B. G. 1, 23. 
 
 * Suitply 'person-*'. — ' small boats. — ' abL of means : In several battles. — * peUere, 
 to roiii. — ^ ^fi/ieg (plur.), territorv.— * inhal)itants of t'aralis, the modern Vagliari.— '' as 
 soon as.— » supply eo,\. e., Valeno — " of their own accoril.— i" Irani^gredi. to cross; 
 supply eU. i. e., the soldiers. — ^^ for a camp; i. e.. facie iiuis. — *"^ so.— »3 the cure.— 
 '■* supply * his friends', ' tliose about him\ — ^* perftrre, to report, — *• for the guarding. 
 — i~ jugf/m. mouiitain-cham.— >* to send aheaci. — i* to clear. — 20 jjjp army.— ^» acceii- 
 dere, to intlaine.— ^^ in succession. — ^s bey;inuing. — -* to leave behind.— *• to march. 
 
 ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 177 
 
 On the principal pentcncc {a) are fir«t dependent the ablatives absolute (h) commutato 
 . conrerxo (after having modin«'d their plan and changed the direction of their march). 
 The di-=iunctive co-ordinate clauses (c) and (d) feu qmd timbre perterritos . . . exisfnna- 
 rent and nre eo quod . . . confiderent. are causal clauses dept-ndenr on the abiativt-s 
 absolute (havin<'clianged the plan either because they believed that the Romans were 
 turnincT their march from fe:ir, or because thev trusted that they, the Romans, mi-ht be cut 
 off frjTn their supplier'». The clause (e) eo magi« q'lod . . . commi<isisent , is a causal 
 clan-e subordinate to the first of the co-ordinate clauses ic) (the more because they had 
 not accented a battk-). The ablatives absolute {f ) mp^ri/)ribus loc>s ocoipatis (althon-^h 
 thev had occupied commanding positions), is a concessive clause, dependj-nt on the 
 second co-ordinate clause (</).— This period literally rendered would make a harsh 
 EiK'li-h construction. Evidently the ablatives absolute (6) must be separated from the 
 re^fof the sentence, and be made independent of it, because several clauses partly sub- 
 ordinate (me to the other, are dependent on it, and these in a literal translation, might 
 be taken for dependencies of the prineipal predicate. ' The Helvetians, either because 
 they supposed the Romans were retreating from fear, especially since on the previous 
 dav althon«^h in possession of commandin-z positions, they had declined battle^ or 
 Ix-caii-^e they were confident that they would cut them ofTfrom their supphes, modified 
 their plans, and chang.d the directi(m of their march. Soon they began to press on our 
 troops, and to engage them in their rear. 
 
 Rem. 221. Ablatives absolute of all classes are rendered in one of the 
 following three ways : 1) by the English participles absolute; 2) by finite 
 clauses with a conjunction ; 3) by prepositional expressioiis with a verbal 
 noun, either the participial in ing or an ordinary substantive. 
 
 ^^ Thus the phrase naribu,<; atnisn-t may he respectively rendered 1) bavinf? lost 
 the ships ; the ship^ having been lost ; 2) after (when, since, because, if althougli) the 
 ships had been lost ; 3) Jifter (,l)y, on account of, considering) the loss of the ships. 
 
 § 531. In ablatives absolute of the first class (with perfect 
 passive participles, K. 21G), the Latin p.vssive construction 
 is generally changed into an English active one if the passive 
 agent (logical subject with ' bj/) of the participle denotes the 
 same person or thing as the grammatical subject of the princi- 
 
 ])redicate. 
 
 Rem. 222. The passive aijent of the predicate-ablative, if it denotes the 
 same tliinj; or person as the i^ranimntical subject of the principal predicate, 
 is alwavs UNDERSTOOD in Latin, beini]; never indicated by pronouns or 
 form-adjectives referrinu: to tlie subject (such as ab eo, ab his etc.). In 
 this instance the Emj^lish idiom requires a change of the Latiii passive 
 into an active construction, as : Divico lioc reffponso dato discessit, Divico 
 left after he had fjiven (or havinrj rjiven) this answer, or Having given this 
 answer, Divico left (literallv : after tliis answer had been given \hy him\). 
 Cffis. B. G. 1, 14. This forin, in historical style, is the most usual one m 
 which ablatives absolute occur. 
 
 Ob<» If English active participial constructions (or their equivalent clauses) \yhose sub- 
 ject is the same as that of the principal predicate, must be rendered by Latin perfect 
 participles (R. 216. Obs. 1), we must distinguish whether tlie English participles have 
 transitive obiects (in the Latik sense), or not. a a \. 
 
 1. Ifth<' Eiitrlish participle is withoit a transitive object.it cannot be renderert ny 
 ablatives absolute, the attempts of some ancient Latin writers to introdnce for this pur- 
 pose a coi'.struction with impersonal ablatives absolute havinir proved abortive, (^«"e K. 
 234) We must in this instance either use a direct participial construction (if. /1«, 
 Obs. 2) if a deponent verb is available, or else employ a clause in hen of a participial 
 construction, as: Catiline, having returned to the city, assembled his followers, 
 CatilTna, ad urbem regresms (from the deponent r^^rerfi) suos convocavit._ 11 ere we 
 can neither say ra/iH/Ki regresso (which would be against R. 218), nor CatiTina. ad vrbem 
 redito, nor CatiHna ad urbem reditus (both of which expressions would contain personal 
 
 pal 
 
178 
 
 ^ 
 
 BEYERSED rHRASES. 
 
 passives formod of noutcr verbs). But we may say CafiTina posfquam ad wbem redtlt^ 
 which lonn nvid hti used if there i;* no deponent verh available. . • . i 
 
 2. If tiK' participle liasi a transitive ohjeet (the subjects l)eins the f»ame). a participial 
 constructiou may be einploved in two way?»: (a) when a deponent verbis availahle, we iise 
 a DiHECT participial construction (tlie Hanie as in the case No. 1>, but not an ablative 
 al)-olute as: Cm^mi haring proinmd he/p. pent an: knvoy to Auiovistus, Ciesar aii- 
 xiliuuj ml'irifus (from the deponeuf. fXillMri) h-L^Jltum ad Ariovistuin misit (no\ auxHto 
 jMlicifo which would irive to the deponent participle a pa-sive meaninjr). {h) \V hen no 
 dep-nent verh is available, we must diauirc the construction of the participial clause 
 />rt.v.vuWy byturninu'the transitive object into a sul>jt'Ct. the active subject becoming 
 the i)assive a<'enr. Thus, by usin^' th«^ verh proinittere instead of pollictn in the pro- 
 posed sentence, we chan«;e its constru(;tion into 'C-esar, help having been prmnued by 
 hilt), SENT an ambassador'. Leavini: out the passive aijent of) to (hy him) according to 
 K 'ii^ we translate: C\mir a>/xiiu) promisi-o legd/u?n niMt. We may. indei-d, even here 
 employ a clause with jwxtquavi, w liich form may often he preferable from rhetorical 
 reasons Such a reason inav be found in a lojrical impropriety to make the transitive 
 object a passive suhject. thus the followini: sentence 'The consii,, after (upon>/'f'*- 
 Ctinngtheenetny.iiinwMKX^ a uktkkat' may be expressed either: Consul. coi>spicatu8 
 hostis, rece|)tui caneiv jussii (usin^' the deponent cox.'^picari). or. Consul, jwstquam hos- 
 as connpexH, receptui etc. lint it would be less elegMiit to use ablatives absolute (i»y 
 means of the transitive active ccmt^pictre): Consul h<i,dibiis cotifpedl^. ii\{\\i<\y;[,\\ the con- 
 struction would he perfectly correct from a merely grammatical point of view. 
 
 1. Csesar, necejimnu rehnx iwperdtl^, ad leuiiinem decimam devCnit». C;rs B. d. 2. 21. 
 
 — 2. Ilix rebus celeriter adminidra/ls'^ ipse ad exercitnm contendit^. Tb. 3, f—f- ^,«^^'- 
 
 plia-ibus expxujtHVis oppidis Ctesar statuit exspectandam class^em. 1 h. :|, ^4 — 4. l;ania 
 
 percrehuerat<Ciesarem fu-jere. puMu; omnibu.s^ copii< amis^si.'i. lb. B.C. .i. t.l— b. tii*'-:"' 
 
 VolusGno mandat ut. e.rj>lo/df}s^ M/inib'/s j-tbi/s. ai\ se quam priinum r«''v*'rtiHnr 1|>. U. 
 
 G. 4, 21.— 6. His Vcesar^ cogni(i9 mllites air<,'ereinT comportiire» juhet. 11). B. C. 6, bz. 
 
 Bern. 223. If the passive aireiit of the jiredicate-ablative is not the same 
 
 with the iri-aininatical suhji-ct of the prineipal sentence, the Latin passive 
 
 construction is retained in Eiiiilisli. Even in this instance the passive 
 
 agent is i^enerally understood in L:itin. If, tor the sake of clearness, it is 
 
 required "to menlion tlie doer of the action, the passive agent takes its 
 
 usual form with ah and the ablative. 
 
 Legntmiibus di?nis,Kis (i. e.. a senHtiO Harpalus in Macedonian! rcLTepsas cPt, //^^ (7m- 
 bassadors haring been dismissed, Harpalus returned to Macedonia. Liv. 4v 1;>. J nv^ 
 ocoipdtis aniinis ab Enmeue rege. omnis delensio lejiatorum respucbalur. (he vnnas 
 being (havmu' hccn) preoccupied by king Euments, all defence of the envoys was re- 
 jected. Liv. 42, 14. 
 
 1. Omtd Gal/id pacd/a\ abeis nationihusqua' trans Rhennm incolCbanti» Icjrnti ad Cae- 
 parem missi sunt. C;es. H. G. 2, 3.-).— 2 CrefenAb'is^^ cum h<K- respc.nso dimmns, ( Imlci- 
 dcnsfsi-' vocSti <iinr Liv. 4:$. 7.-3. Veji^^^ cap'i^t sex trihilnosmilitum consulnn potestfltei* 
 insequen-^" annus hahuit. Liv. .5. 24.-4. Signo dafo undicin.»" >iniul clamor in<j;ens oritur. 
 Sail. Ju". 57, 3.-5. JIac oratione^'^ habUiV mirum in niodum conver-u»» sunt omnium 
 meiites^Cie- B G. 1, 41.— 6. InterftCto Indnlioiinlro, ad ejus propiiKiuos a ireviris 
 imperium deferturao. Ca's. B. G. C. 2.— 7. line oraiime ab J)tritia<o Af//>?/(7 omnes aiix- 
 iliiuna Ca'sar.- petere cu-perunt. Ca-s. B. G. 1.32.-8. Confinnata re ab exploratuiibuti^^ 
 omiieiu equitatutn (Ciesar) priemlsii--. H). 2, 11. 
 
 Ob** It is unusual to refer 1)V pronouns or demonstratives dependent on the predicate- 
 ablative to the ■•ranimatical sul>iector other members of the principal sentence. Such 
 pronouns or d.-monstrativesare re^'ulurly left out, and must be supplied according to the 
 requirv'inents of the text. 
 
 1 Hannibal i^pe potiundie Nolw ademptd (i. e., ei) Acenas recessit. J^iv. 23' IJ" — 
 
 2. Lcjjilii, ed re ptnnistid (L e., eis) diem concilio c (mstituC'runt. Cxn. B. G. 1, .iU.— 
 
 » Deveinre ad, to go to mvct.— ^ adminidrdre aliquid. to attend to somethiiifr.— ' td 
 hasten — ■• percrebexcere. to become frequent, to he multiplied, to bt; spread about.— 
 » to examine The passive air< nt is identical with the subject of levertatur. being con- 
 tained in the verb —« Th.- subject of the i)rincipal predicate is sometimes placed be- 
 tween the two terms of the ablative absolute, if it is identical with the passive agent 
 understood - "• material for the rampart.— « to carry.— » pardre, to reduce (in. ' to mako 
 Scefun - 1« to live.- »' the Cretans.- »-' those of Chalcis.- >3 § 38, 3.-- >* military 
 tribunes with cmsular power.- »» next.- »» everywhere.- »7 address.- «8 to deliver. 
 -l^wuvertere, to change.- '^o to confer, § 427, K. 11.- " Bcout.- " to send m advance. 
 
 ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 179 
 
 •Hi- 
 
 3. Annxagoram ferunt. annunciata (i. «.. ei) morte fllil dixisse : SciSbam me genuissc 
 mortalein. Cic. Tusc. 3. 30. 
 
 ^ 53*2. The clauses by which ablatives absolute with per- 
 fect painiciples may be Venderecl, or by which English par- 
 ticipial constructions, employed in rendering the ablatives 
 absolute, may be replaced, are 1) temporal, 2) causal, 3) con- 
 ditional, 4) CONCESSIVE. 
 
 nem ^n The TEMPOBAT- cl.m'ses, corresponding to such ablatives 
 ntisolnie^lake hc> conjunctions after or when (properly with a pluperfect). 
 T^Uli^class bd^^^ most of the instances of ablative absolute construc- 
 
 ^'Tf the tblatives absolute are the exponents of caus.vl clauses, the 
 conjtmctions^/;... or ^ (with a pluperfect, or respectively a perfect) 
 
 ""'"Bonl^!? ^d;.^s regnari voipbnnt, ^^r^^^^^^f^ "^^^^^t^l^^i^.^ 
 mans willed that there shoul.i be kn.gs haMi.g no >et ^M^^'^^f" (.^^j^, ^,/^. 
 
 freedom i^ncetheyhnd ^l^^jl^^^f!^^!^ ^^^{^-^^^^'^.rnS^^ Flamininus had 
 S^;hfih:pS^irVi;i=nun.^«:ir^ had negleaed his religious duUes. 
 
 roxDiTiox^L CLVUSES take the conjunction if. They may be hypo- 
 Ihet ca? chu^e\ o7 co.Uain ordinarv conditions, most generally referring 
 fuure c"^m^^ must hare happened heU^re the principal action 
 
 can Ike P ace In this relation the perfect participle has the ioi-ce of a 
 FrTiKF PERFECT while in the hypothetical signification the perfect par- 
 rici^leisemj^^^^^^ the forJe of a pluperfect or imperfect sub- 
 
 '"TI" ti^'^bicti niter se «^;;^-; - ^a^^^J^-^^? ^!^ ^^^ S^^lS 
 posse sperant. mduc.-d by this address tluj P'; rf '1^ ' , ^. rafter) (hey would have 
 fioped that t hey would be- aide - ^•^'^." JJ j>,^,^^^!^ , "^ l^pyUdtl woix/^td factjros 
 f^Hzed nnjal inner. Ca-s B. <^- '• f-':' if thev "h'lll have answered tliat they would do 
 
 k\ ( w <-d'-.- Ilu'ii'b/ lliat ih.y Iwd had difigof. Cic. Off. 3, 9. 
 li>q.Uvalont to CONCESSIVK clauses, ablative absolutes arc rendered 
 bv (dihounh (E\. 8) or eten «/'(E.k. 7). 
 ^ To mlli't latroc nantur Jrrfe proposifd. .o many thousands Practi^^e mbbery 
 aAoug?^dcath n . placed before th^m (is in store lor them). Cic N. D. 1, 86. 
 In collection with nondum or rirdam f^.tWes absolute are some- 
 limes rendered by a temporal clause with before , as 
 
 Hi^^r^ri^nZn Lfectd, before winter was over (before the close of winter). C. B. 
 
 ^" '' W Render the following sentence, both by English absolute participles, and 
 by ti^tc. da ses with the conjunctions required by the sense, 
 ny nunc tiuuM-f" > ♦-...,r,t r-.inhi.nnem ?vi a scnStu non M;j;x?/m/a. 
 
 1. Ex decem captTvis novem reverterunt CiUihainnem. ?f^ a s^u^i ;^^..^ ^^^^/.^ ^ .^^ 
 
 [.; 
 
 in.- • to miercept.- ^ cogmscere, to learn.- « anguibh.- tormeni. iuv , 
 
 » written 
 re- 
 
 move. 
 
 / 
 
180 
 
 REVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 snppliciOrum» metu? Cic. Lei;. 1, 14.— fi. ConcesKO peccato'^, diflicile est. ab co qnl 
 pt'ccaii viiidex' esse debet, nt isjnoscat impel rare. Cic. Inv. 2, 34.— 7. Navis motiim 
 et cursiiiu retinet suyin, intenni<so* impetn^ pnlmque* remnriim'. Cic. Or. 1, 3:i. 
 
 — 8. Koinaiii, sKperioribus locis occiipatiii, pnelium nou coininisCrimt. Cx^. U. G. 1.2;J. 
 
 Rem. 225. Instead of a clause prepositional expressions with particii)ials 
 in iiig or oilier verbal nouns are frequently employed. Tiie prepositions 
 mo.-;t i^cnerally used in rendcrinu: ablatives absolute with perfect partici- 
 l)les are after \\\\^on), by, with, irithout (in connection with a negative, see 
 K. 2oG, oiiS.),/c//' (on account of), and under, as : 
 
 PersiitLsit eis ut oppidis ricisque exustis iin;l proficiscerentur, he pers»uadcd them to join 
 in the e.xpt'ditioii q//<-/' &w/7a/<f/ (huviiiLT burned» their towns and hamlets. (\es. R. G. 
 1. 5.— Nihil amiitiliir dato spatio. notiiiiii; is lo-t by rjiring lime. Liv. 37. '.^^.—Fide pu- 
 blicCi interixtiiUii, upon pledj^iii:; tlie public faith. Sail. ,i\\.:.—LwninihitK arnl<in.^. after the 
 loss of hie» eyet*.— Thel)ani nonnihii et dam/ulfis pfindjnOus et 7'estitiVu exs}ilibii.< •t^wc- 
 censC'l)aiu, the Thebiins were somewhat aiiirry for (on account of ) the condemnation 
 of their leaders and tlie reinstatement of tlie exiles. Liv. 42, 4Vt. — I/is excepfl": with the 
 exception of these. Cic. Otf. 2. 3.— A'o/i exptctdto mll^ ortu class»* in Saniuin tra- 
 jecGrunt, ivithouf expecting snnrU^, they crossed over to Samc.s. Liv. 37, Vi.—Niillam 
 partem noctis itinere oini6f<o, ivithout interruptinfj thtir uiarch durinj; any time of tlie 
 nii,'ht. Cies. B. G. 1, :20. 
 
 Obs. Often the j)redicate-ablative itt^elf ha.'* tlic force of a preposition, in the same 
 manner as the participles uddnctnx, indiiclufi, pernwtu,-i in the direct participial construc- 
 tion (R. 1)5). Thurt a great number of idiounitic phrases are formed, as dilif/enfiii ad- 
 hibild wiih dilij^ence or care (literally ^having tinidoyed diliffenC'''). inttrpo^-^Ud mora, 
 after some delay (literally ' tuirin'j placed a dtlay f/tf/ceen') ; nul/J i/d' ri)a<U('i tnord. with- 
 out any delay, Ca>s. l\. C. 3. 75 ; re bene geMCi. after a successful campaiu'ii (literally ' hac- 
 ing carried o~d the thing mcce^^^fully") Cic. Plane. 25, <;i : clamore ^uUdtu. with shontn, 
 Ca^s. l'>. (t. b, 8 ; clade accep/a, by a defeat : jyecunid accepfd, for a consideration, Cic. Oft*. 
 3. 22. Her»! belonL's Ca'sar's "favorite »'xpression ' inter/nisso {itdt/Jecfo) Itntpore or 
 ^yf>a/io', after some time (later). Other idiomatic expressions in the form of ablatives 
 ab5»)lute with perfect participles have tlu-ir oriixin either in technical usaij»'. or in the 
 peculiar brevity and conciseness by which this form invited the people tocor.di-nse ideas* 
 tlin)ui,'h it, for which we must sul)stitute different lorms. To the former belonjrs ll»e 
 )hrase .signii aMdtis pngndre, Xo fii;ht a pitched battle (for inst. Liv. 4.'), 1), signa conferre 
 )einii; used of the i^'eiieral attack, in which the standauos ()iigna\ of lioth armies nu't'«Y>«- 
 ferre). To the latter kind beloni^ for in^t. the phrases» causa cognifd, after a i)revious ex- 
 amination, Ca's. B. ii. 1, l'.>: eguo adnnsw or citdto, at full «rallop, lb. L 22 ; dei<perdfd 
 salute, out of despair, lb. 0, 5; addlfd ov adjunctd uliqud re, including; a certain thing. 
 
 ZW The ablitives absolute iu the followinjj sentences must be rendered by 
 prepositional expressions. 
 
 \. Pompejn>^, eqnum nactus. defracfi-^^ inoignibn^^ imperatoris'" decumSna'' porta, se 
 ex ca'^tris ejecit'-, jjrotiniisipie'^ tqiin citdto Larissam contendit. ( a-s. B. C. 3, '.»3. 
 
 — 2. Qu;e est tanta atrocit.is'* hujus causic (cast), (luod onuiibus f«)reusibus'^ negotds 
 intermi-ms^* nxnvn hoc judicium»' exerceatur if*? Cic. C:el. 1, 1. — 3. Victor Tarentlmisi» 
 in turbaram"" dace a/ni<so navem transtiressus^i est. Liv. 2H, .'^. — 4. Plus adipiscCre re 
 explicdfd i)oni qtiam addaftitdtd-'^ mali. Cic. Oft". L 24.-- 5. Pericles soli.s obscuratione'-'' 
 territos, redditis^* ejus rei caaHs. metu libenlvit. Qu. L t7. — 0. (Juid esi^s. (pmm pau- 
 peres divitibus esse a'qualTs vellmus, cur \\\o^ surntu ad sacra^"^ ^/^A/i/'^> deOriim aditu 
 arceamus'^7 ? Cic. Ii»-;;. 2, 10.— 7. Consul, prima luce cadaceatdre-^ daiis'^^ indatiis di- 
 misso, frumcntando^" dies aliquot consumpsit. Liv. 31, 3(). — 8. Pnrtor neutrd impel rata 
 re in pn)vinciam redit. Liv. 42, '.).— 9. Alter pnttor, consumpta a'state^' reco<j:n»)s- 
 cendis3''*agris, ne visa quidem jn'orinrid sud Komam rediit. lb,— 10. Legati, nulla inpm- 
 
 1: 
 
 » Punishment.— 3 offence.— ' aventrer.— ■• to interrupt.— 'force.— « raovinc^ power» 
 
 — ' oar.— ** see § 482. K. tiH.- * inngne, a badi;c. — '" render i)y the adjective imperato- 
 fial.— I* the decuuian ijate of the camp, the main entrance placed at the side farthest frtim 
 the enemy.— *- se ijicere, to rush out. — •' protinus, forthwith. — i* enormity. Qnx 
 tantaisa peculiar combinaMon of form-adjertives which cannot be literally rendered 
 (literally : What so great cnonnityK transl. What is there soenarmous in vxi-'.— ^^ iwWc'v-d. 
 
 — !• to suspend ; suspension.— '"^ trial.— ^^ to transact.— '* Tarentia».— -" to throw into 
 c»)nfusion. — -* Iransgredi, to step over. — -^ to doubt. — '-' eclipse. — •* causa/n reddere, 
 to explain a reason. — ^' ovid est cur, what is the reason that.— '■'• sumtum ad sacra ad- 
 ders, to tax relii^ioiis worship — 27 iq keep from.— ^"^ a tierald.— ^' to grant.— '" to f(»rage. 
 
 — >i summer. - '•^ to cxamiue. 
 
 ABLATIVES ABSOLUTE. 
 
 181 
 
 in 
 
 eecu! 
 exert 
 
 smtid refipoti.v) data, eo3 pe Clialcidemi pequi jnspCmnt. Liv. 42, 43.— 11. Spero te diJi- 
 gcntid adidhitd tirmiOrem fore. Cic. Fam. 10. 11.— 12. Panajtiuin nos correctione^ 
 quadani adhitntd potissimum secOii sumus. Cic. Off". 3. 2.— 13. L. Philippus tulit sen- 
 tentiams ut civitates quas L. Snlla necunid acc^ptd liberavisset nirsus essent vectiga- 
 ies< Cic. Oft". 3. 22.— 14. Amicitia baud scio an excepid sapientid quicquam melius 
 sit iiomini a dis immortalibus datum. Cic. Am. 6, 20. - 15. C sesar triduo^ iniermisso 
 cum omnibus copiis Helvetios insequi«J coepit. Ca-s. B. G. 1, 26. 
 
 Bern. 22H. When of two connected sentences the one has happened before the other, 
 the En-'lish frequently ignores this fact, connecting the two sentences by a simple co-or- 
 dination. The Latin, in this instance, rarely employs the form of co-ordination, but 
 gives to that predicate which is prior in lime the form of a perlect participle. W hen 
 both s»'ntence- have the same transitive objects, this participial construction is a direct 
 one: else ablatives absolute are n.sed. as ' S^cipio took the city and plundeud it \ 
 ^c\p\o vrbem captam di7ipuit.— '^civio took, ruv: city and sold the inhabitants as 
 slaves'. Scipi») vrbe captd civis sub corOna vendidit. Often a co-ordination isapplied 
 ,n addititm to the participial construction, as : ' Scipio urbem cepit captamque diripiiit . 
 1. Legati venerunt Thes^dOrum ad Antioctium, orantes ut remoto exercitu per le^atos 
 cum disceptarei". Liv. 3(), 9.— 2. CU-sari in animo fuit {Casar intmded), conjuncto 
 .^•ercitu cum Domitio per Illyricums italiae subsidio» proficisci. Cais. B. C. 3, 74.— 
 3 Tri^inta tvranni plurimorum civium bona publicdta^^ inter se divisGrunt. Tsep. 8, 1.— 
 4. Maiilius Ga/tumin c<mspectu diulrumii rxercituum t'(¥wm'2, torque^» spohavit. Liv. 
 (i, 42.— 5. Romulus Caiuinensiuin»* exercituiu /w/u/i^i^ fugatque, /usutn persequitur. 
 Liv. 1. 10. 
 
 § 533. Ablatives absolute with present participles (both 
 active and deponent) agree in respect to voice with their Eng- 
 lish equivalents, being always active in both languages. They 
 are more rarely rendered by English absolute participial con- 
 structions than by finite clauses and by verbal nouns with 
 prepositions. 
 
 Jiem 227 When ablatives absolute of this class are rendered by English absolute par- 
 ticipial constructions, the partiiiple is alwavs active and present.* ^^ hen timte clauses 
 are applii'd their predicate is eith»'r in the present or past tense according t») the tense 
 of the principal predicate (R. 2ir., Obs. 1). The finite verb is very frequently in the pro- 
 gressive form in Eiigllsli. 
 
 Jiem 2:8 The claises by which ablatives absolute with present participles are ren- 
 dered "are the same as those with perfect i)articii)les, except that the temporal clauses 
 take th" conjuncticms whUe or w/u-n, which are mo.st frequently applied in this con- 
 struction. Next to 'while' and -when', the ccmjunctiou 'since is most frequently 
 n-'ed, a punlv conditional and concessive meaniUL' being the rarest. Sometimes the 
 present ablatives absolute may be rendered by modal clauses with 'so that . 
 
 Dumnonge licente, nemo contra licCri audet, while Dumnorix is bidding, nobody 
 dares to bid airainst him. Ca-. B. G. 1. \'i.-Ih(JEeunte verba )iontiJice id votnm snscep- 
 tum est that vow was made, the pontiff repeating first the words, or • ichile the pontiff 
 xS repeating the wor.ls'. Ux. n.'^.-Cedentibus n^^/Zm. ex parte unaqtie priinores 
 cecidCrunt. neither party retreating (since neither party retreated), t le first in rank fell 
 on each si»le. Liv. 42, l.- Animo sano ac valente. oratio quoque r.ibusta et >^>n'« f t, 
 if the mind is sound and vigorous, laniruage also is strong ai-d manly. Sen. Lp. 114.— 
 Jvlarius peromnlstribus trlbflnus militum declaratus est i>/m>;9«e laciem ejus tg-z/O- 
 r S // Marius was declared military tribune by all tribes, although mo^t j^eojjledid 
 S W him by face. Sail. Jug. m, 4.-In cmspectu steteranr, rfenm^^tfe a^n.^, they 
 
 1 Nom Chalcis.- ^ modification.- ^ senteniiam ferre. to make a motion im a debate) 
 
 ._ <rectigdlem esse, to pay taxes »>r trilmte.- ^ triduum. a space ol three days - « to 
 
 nur^e -C> rans^ict, o settle the p».ints in dispute.- « Illyria.- » abstract datives as 
 
 2ca-S(;ry predicate ; 'transl. : ^ to carry hdp to Italy \- ;» t»> confiscate.- \\ t/j^euvo 
 
 nrinies i i"' aedere, to kill.- ^^ torque.^, a neck-chain.- i< the CiEumenses.- i» to rout. 
 
 ♦ Sometimes, however, it is more idiomatic, to change even these constructions pas- 
 Pivelv Kn.dish ; and. vice versa. Ent^lish present passive participles must be change.l 
 imoLa!in actives in order to be rendered by this form of ablatives absolute. But the 
 instances where this happens cannot be reduced to a rule. 
 
182 
 
 REVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 stood in Pight (of each other), so that the stream separated them (the etream eepara- 
 ^'''-^^-^^pYilil^lauofoth hy finite clauses and by absolute participial conBtructions, as 
 1 '%£im S7S' am;mS"^:monti.c3 ct ohscOra^ hrovita- InCre pro- cultu. S^. 
 
 eerat'i furor eiiam eis qui boni habebai.tnr, nw damante mini e^se bcllo cnlh "i>^^i^'';f; 
 Cic Ka m <;. 12.- 5. lliceias Syracusius»'^ didt. quum terra C'^-^^a.^'lJ, ''^ ^«y,^.'.''^^,^, 
 eadem fhcii' qiw»^ ^i star, te^^ terra cvlnm moverCtur Cic Acad 2. f.- J;- J"'^^/"^- 
 f.Ubt"lt(Mn .equ?- videbiltur. sed ea nulla erat ^;^"(f/l^^^'lf^''^^^^^^ 
 
 7. I^nnp^o deprecante-^ accepta lex non ej^.'-.,*^'^;,^»: '^^^T. ^' iTfr iUi medfftn- 
 p<«»'f (Mv^tc" Pviader» Orestem pese oss^e dixit. Cic. Am. ., -J4.— M. Mri u\\,meiujtu 
 /7^^/6'» capitis iXiis sunt liberflli". Cic I'rov. Con.. 10, 24.- 10. Jam motu.^3 «.se 
 
 11. Thc.b;e in ma-no motn Bunt, aliis ad re-em ^^f *■'' '^;'* ^^\\'^^" ,•, ^.''.^ ""^ KomSnos. 
 lb 42 44 — 12 Nihil potest evenire ni!-r-«mw*<7a//^«redm^e-'^ <.ic. i? ato .14. 
 
 Rem 2-->0 In order to render ablatives absolute with present partiriples, prepositional 
 ex^:?^shms i:;^;S'nore Ireq.iently u.cd tlmn -itb.abhnives ah.o ute i^ ^^'"^ 
 nartieiule^ The prepositions used are: d'mng, in, f»j. nuier. "'*^'';."*''^ /;.))','' ' ^ 
 Sat .mi) ^^^^^^^ or "ith participles im|>lyiri- a ne-ation), althour/ft ai d 
 
 i/jy/ or (more frenui'ntly) by an ordinary verba t"^'"'"" V:,wf. .,,;.?; n.. 0^11 the 
 *rt'nerillv turned nto a possesr^ive altritmte, or into an ol.jectne (a^e alt»r oy. ll inc 
 ribh^cJ'ildlu!^ i^a proLoun or an equivalent demonstnitlve an Kn^.hp^ 
 »^« Mcwi iw Cirprrmf siKidente bv Cicero s advice (l)y the ad\ice or i u t loi , 7/*?/J''6"/."f 
 ^^;<Ty^)^S^^<^^^ of the soldiers ; eo iillo) iwj^rwde. urn er his c..mmand ; 
 r/^f>€/7 i//r«/J with mv permis-ion ; qno pror/redie»fe, in th.; course <>l which ; te di^^ua- 
 Sf r4 ns i^^^^^^^^^ m>dti.- minUautknl notwithstan.liin^ ^'"•'''''"/"V/T J i SJ 
 
 of m-iiiv llere'belcm-a jrreat number of idiomatic phrases, as ''i^'"^^ ''^''^j'^.^'^SX, 
 ylmxh ineu^^^^ tlie be-inniu- of summer ; nu. vidente, ^s■nhm my «'«^t; i^ 
 
 «X/^rSuhbihisheann- r.Ar/««nf. na^^'m, contrary to nature; anno vertente, lu 
 
 ""''^I^^^^^^^Ast^J^-^nte facta e«t. the solar eclipse which happened 
 duri. - "e re Vm, ( A^A^ Cic. Div. 1,49.-Neminem msijurcwfe deo .,n-n lanm 
 
 viruurfuisse e-redcndu.ne;t,we must believe that no one has been a distin^'ul.hed 
 man without the help of God. Cic. N. D. 2, tiG. .,..,, /. 
 
 1 Geramus dt-* rnmnfU,y.^ helium. Liv. 42. 51.-- 2 Atl.enienses ^Y'^r'/Z/htlX. r"i30 
 
 S^^cic or 1^ 
 
 hi nunSl2J/{£t3« (ML '4, 12. - 10. Vvo ee*» qnisque. nec horfanfe*^ vllo, nee 
 bat. nullo ;w*fM<an't__. v^i«- •»>■_-.• ^»,^. ^___^,^3 ^ ,^. ^ ^^_ n. Erat in eo quidam f.'rvor 
 
 ■~ ' " 'nennte 
 
 or 
 
 bat. nulio posixuumt--'. vr. 1.1 1;. t, •*. 'V., % • n on Vr..t in oomiidam fcrvi 
 imperant^'M munienda" castra versi ^^.nn "• V>v. 9 2.- 1. Krat in ^"^1"^' ?,"'/' ;; 
 
 Satis**, qua profmdunte omnia tiuut in dies^^ V-V^'VP^^S'^o^'^^'V^ Qui hiit Wte f r 
 vere in vit ibus4« yemma qme diciti'.r*^ sese ostendit. lb. !■>. r>^.- 13. (jui tuit ist( lu.' 
 
 f 
 
 1 Vi.^Pre to be in lashion.— « to cut short, to mutilate.— 3 sentence.-- ♦ o'>''7'r;^- 
 
 . brevfty.- « ^i ^m to be considered as.- ' cuUus. culture = eleu'ant.- lren>p.Micam 
 
 aer!re Xo be at (he' head of the republic- « the to;^a, "^/'"1*^':,'" J'i /,!V' . ^^''i ^» 
 
 Mo approach (actively).- ^^ plausfnwi, ^KO?--,," ;^« J^' f,\-;:/'/,:n^!!STto act on 
 nr.HliiV.' pflects — »*w»uch would be produced.— ^^ ftare. Xo stand ^xiu.— 10 aii o.i 
 r nles » f ext)edie cv - »^ repagnnre, to be opposed to soniethin-, tobe incompati- 
 
 ^w V^som.'hi^?r^ - moraiW.- - c^7>r..^7H,U <.m)ose to p-;-;.;-,^.;;f;;-j^^'-';^ ';; 
 
 t. know - 21 defend^re, to conduct the defence.- 2-> literally : to be leed fioin the truis 
 or eTnivos.i.-V., tobe acquitted of a capital crim..- ^--^^ "'^ T.m^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 - ^'n -^T^. tH^/S'ii^^iy^ ;;^r.e> Sill- i^JJhp xiE^:^ 
 
 grape-vines). 
 
 ABLATIVES ABSOLUTE. 
 
 UBS 
 
 i 
 
 nt cum Vettio) colloqner5rei, popvlo Romano ridente? Cic. Vatin.11, 26.— 14. Capliua 
 non modo permittente jHitre. sed etiam madenfe ab eo semisravit^. Cic. Gael. 7, 18. — 
 15. Catulus sua se manu interfectOrum fratrern sunm audienfe senatu dixit, lb, 24. «».— 
 IG Fortasse eis non probaro causamS (pii menm inimlcum repugnante ventrd avct^rltnte 
 t«'xCrunt*. Cic. Pn)v. Cons. 20, 47.— 17. Municipia* ilia iter mihi tutum multis mini- 
 tantibus pnrbtitGrunt*. Cic. Plane. 41, 97. 
 
 § «>34. Predicate-ablatives in the form of perfect (passive) 
 participles are used with the force of present passive partici- 
 ples when they may be resolved into the finite tenses of the 
 PEniPiiuASTic conjuG^ation of the participle (§ 506), as : urhe 
 replt/a milUlhus, while the city was filled with soldiers. 
 
 Bern. 230. Ablatives absolute with periphrastic participles fol- 
 low ill their ffniiiimatical coiLstrucdon the rules for ablatives absolute with 
 PERFECT participles ; but in respect to the English equivalents, /. e. as to 
 the tense, the conjunctions, and prepositions which must be used in ren- 
 dering them, the rules for ablatives absolute with present participles 
 must "be observed. These periphrastic participles, like the finite tenses 
 of tlie perii)hrastic conjugation, denote a past action as a state, or as 
 continuing in its effects at the lime spoken of, and in the same way as 
 mileH vnlnenltus est may mean ' the soldier is yyo\im\cCi\ milite mlnerato 
 may mean ' the soldier being wounded' or ' since the soldier is wounded 
 {haa wounds).' 
 
 E<t aliquid natura pnrclanim quod spr^ta et contempta vdit pta te o\)t\mns qnisque se- 
 onereiur there i« somethii.'' eminent in its nature which every good man should pur- 
 ^iw H/,iie Hpurninri and d.spl4nq pleasure. Cic. Sen. 13, 43. [The acts of spurning 
 ind (le<i)i<in-' are represented as conditions and states, not as temporary acts ; hence 
 the DeriohraMic lonn i-* used. The Latin passive voice is changed into an English 
 active construction, according to the rules for ablatives absolute with perfect partici- 
 Dle** (t5 5.31) • but in the use of the conjunction {while) and in the tense (the present) 
 the nih> foV ablatives abs. with puese-nt i>articiples (§ 5:i3) are observed.:j-Si animus 
 paiiM- e-^t in 'eiiium quoqiie est sobrium. Ulo ritiato hoc guoque adflatiir, if the soul is 
 sound th'e mind also is in a normal state ; if the fo7vmr i^ corrupted, the latter also is 
 tainted t^en Ep 114.— Teutoinatus rex. rw/w^^rd^o f^'/o, vix se e manibus pra?dantium 
 milituin erio'uit king Teuto.natus. his horse InirKj nounded {.^nce his horse was woynded), 
 disengaged himself with difliculty from the hands of the marauding soldiers. Caes. B. 
 (J. 7, 4»). 
 
 Ob* V number of idiomatic phraseP take this form of the periphrastic ablative absolute 
 several of tho^e enumerated li. 225 among the ordinary perfect participles strictly belong- 
 in- to this periphrastic form, as: Hoc projmito numquam ens dives, o/WAt.? condifwn 
 ylni will never be rich. Cic. Parad. 6, 1, 45. Tantis ]^?icuhs pioposiiis, when such dan- 
 cers thn-aten Cic. Plane. 30, 8H. Hoc sublafo. hoc remoto, hy re.noving this, this being 
 Removed, excluded, or taken away, without this. Adhibito dt^cnmine, etriclly speaking. 
 1 Fx hoc debet intelli-'i. talibus proemiis propositis^ numquam defutflra bella civilia 
 Cic Off 2 8 - 2 7?;/f.7t?<7>e'^ remota^ izratissima est libertii-. lb. 2.18.- 3 Antiochus id 
 bellura sine uUo impedimento se gesiQrum speravit, occv/xitis Ronumis in Macedonia bel- 
 o Lh'. 4r2il.-4. /liter medias hostium eIassTs,o;;;>/?/i.- "?V-rf ^M^bu? IS 
 l}fonbu< milites incolumesH transportati sunt. C a>s. B. C. 3. .3.— 5. MiliUhus, impe- 
 ;A/t'^ /m > r si^n^ de navibusdesiliendum»3.etcum hostibus erat pugnandum 
 St B G 4 S-Tpiura brevi tempore ».f€/>J. quam muItis anms stante repyhlu^ 
 * scTfp<imui Cic-' OfY'3 1.- 7. Quotusquisque reperietur qui.mp^v/H/a/^^-' j^roi>Q.-t/a, ab- 
 
 to engage somebody.- »' desttire, to leap down.— »« iinpuuiti. 
 
184 
 
 REYEKSED PHRASES. 
 
 stinCre^ posi^it injuria ? Cic. Off. 3, 17.— 8. Jam ip^e tecum, nuUd pert^dnH infroducfa? 
 loquor. Cic. Ciel. 15, 35.— 9. Nuntii miijsi a CiccrOne, obsessis omnibus viu, iiiter- 
 cipinntnr.3 Oies. B. G. 4, 40. 
 
 ^ sls:|.> When predicate-ablatives consist of nouns or ad- 
 JECTIVES, the ablative of the present participle of the copula 
 esse must be supplied (§ 397). Such ablatives absolute are 
 treated according to the rules of those with present participles. 
 (§533), as: 
 
 Caei!»ar j^aviter accfl^sat principcs ^Eduilnim. quod tani propinqn'is ho.<fif)us ah eis nou 
 PublevCtur, Ciesar seriously reproved the cliicfs of the ^Edui. because he was not n?- 
 licved by them while {although) the enemy loas itotiear (the enemy being so near). Cics. 1). 
 (i. 1, 1(5. 
 
 Obs. This class of ablatives absolute passes over into ordinary attributive phrases, 
 consisting of a noun aiul an adjective in th(^ ablative, which are «jeneraily interpreted by 
 supplyiuiij a preposition (cum or t/i. see §41(5, R. 5(5). Some of these expressiruis may 
 be mterprcted in both ways, as : Sletellus inteiito atque infesto txercitn in Nuniidiam 
 procCdit (Sail. Jujr. 4(5, 5), where some coiisidcu* in'ento and iufc.'^to as predicate-al>latives 
 (his army bt'inir full of zeal and ready to i^ive battle), wnile ottiers su^)ply the preposlticm 
 cum (with an army full of zeal and ready etc.). It is evident that m expressions like 
 these both forms wholly coincide. See p. 2.59, obs. 3. 
 
 Jiem. 231. All adjeclives that may be u.setl as prctlicate-nominatives 
 may, with certain restrictions (see obs. 1), be eini)ioye(l as pt-edicate-tibla- 
 tives. Hence form-adjkctives (see ^ 240) are nof, «generally, employed 
 in this construction, e.Kcept if they iiav(? the force of descriptive adjec- 
 tives, as tantus, or, if their use as predicate nominatives would be admis- 
 sible, as iiullus, multus, talis. 
 
 Qu(kI populus Romilnus tantit recfigaJibnii* jam vix potest, which (even") the Roman 
 people can hardly atibrd now, althuiqh its revenue.^! are so great (in spite of its larjjc 
 revenues). Cic. Par. (5. 45. — Summa erat, vastoatque apcrto mati, mairnisiestibus. raris 
 ac prope 7iullis portibus, difficulias navij^andi, there wa-; the jrieuest difficulty of navi- 
 gation, the sea beinc: vast and open, the tides liiijh, hartx>rs bein<; scarce and almost 
 none. Cais. B. G. 3, 13, 
 
 Obs. 1. Adjective'* u-cd in this connection are liable to obscure the meaning: of the 
 author, a twofold ellipsis beintj always involved in the const ruction, one in rcj^aid to the 
 conjunction, and the other in rcani to the copula, both of which must l)e supplied ac- 
 corilim; to the requirements of the text. Hence thi-' form i-> but sparin<;ly applied with 
 ordinary adjectives, beini; frequent only with certain adjectives which, from their habitual 
 use as accessory predicates (§ S17. R. 'i,\ are, as it were, impregnated with a participial 
 meaning, as integer, incolumlt, salvus, invilus, insciu». coiuicius, ptixneus, absens. vivus. or 
 in set phrases which, by conventi nial usage, can hive only this and no other me niing. 
 Such plii-a~es umstbt; frequently rendered by prepositional expres-ions, or by circumlocu- 
 tion-', aiul, often, cannot* be properly rendei-ed at all, beini,' ba^ed on speeiftc Roman 
 intuitions. To the latter belong tiie peculiar expressions pingui (crassd) Minerrd^ 
 tenui Minerrd, which it requires a whole chapter in Roman niytuology to explain. 
 To the former belong the following phrases : me conscio, with my knowledge ; te 
 igndro or inscitK without thy knowledLre ; eo prit<ente. in his presence; nofii^ absen- 
 tibus, in our absence ; fratre vico. durincj tlie life-iim.i of my (thv etc.) brother; re 
 Integra, the state of affurs (or ' of thii aftair') beiiiir unchanged, or * the matter being 
 still untouched' (re<f Integra est ma-WMi 'there is n >thing done, or chanired in the mat- 
 ter'') ; eo inrl/o, against his consent (he being unwillin>i) ; inrVd Minerrd, contrary to 
 one's proclivities ; erf ra^w incoluuii, the annv b-ing uuinjureil (having suftered no 
 loss); salvd fide, consistent witli one's word or duties; galnd republicd, consistent 
 
 1 To abstain. — ^ permnam introducere, to assume a fictitious name. Perftbna 
 (from per and sondre) is the mask which the Roiuiii actors used on tlie stage ; hence ptr- 
 aonam agere, to play (sustain) a part. — ^ ^,, intercept.— * In a similar passage, Cjesar uses 
 the preposition i/< with the ablative (if the reailin^ is correct) : (^uod i//^a/'/o impt-rio 
 populi Rornani turpissirnum reipublicie esse arbitrab.ltur, which lie considered most 
 disgraceful to the republic while the power of the liouiau people was so gr^at (cou- 
 eidurinj; the great power of the H. P.). Cies. B (1. 1, :«. 
 
 ABLATIVES ABSOLUTE. 
 
 iSo 
 
 with the safety of the republic ; salvis auspiciis, by observing the auspices ; salcis legibus, 
 
 in accordance with the laws. -i j „„ 
 
 r^»« 9 «inmr. nb>itive cxnressions with form-adjectives are wrongly considered as 
 
 prSafe-aSves iftL g^^^^^^^^ for instanci the phrase_; /^ ..«a ..' nj the pas- 
 
 ^J.^^nsulibus\ But-if Mc is used in the meaning of talis it may be tnade a predicate- 
 ablaiiv?" Ea sunt tolerabilia hacjuventuie (our young men being such). Cic. Att. 10, 11. 
 
 Rem 232. Nouns are used as predicate-ablatives only when denoting 
 PERSONS either as doers of certain actions, or as holders ot certain posi- 
 tions, ti^\iisti% dux, consul, etc. Such predicate-ablatives are either ren- 
 dered by a CLAUSE with when or while (sometimes by if or because), or 
 (more frequently) by prepositional expressions, in which case the Latin 
 appellation of the person must be rendered by an abstract noun denot- 
 ing ACTION or POSITION, instead of by a personal noun ; as: 
 
 ^ Cicerr>ne, nrcetdre, while Cicero was pnetor, or in the pnetorship of Cicero; diice 
 SenlpwZ Wn Sempronius was leader, or under the command of Sempronius.jmrfer 
 sS^onid'i inmratSre Scipidne. under Scipio's ^^\^^-T''T''^%-'''A'!:J:t^fX^x^^ 
 his mediation • viepuero, while I was a boy, or in my boyhood ; (VJftore (robmw, by the 
 au'horUv or it.sti^^^^ at the dictation of Gabinius ; teste Vatimo, m the presence 
 
 of Vatiriius (he being a witness), or by the evidence of \ atinius. 
 
 tW With two co-ordinate subject-ablatives, the predicative-ablative, if a noun, is 
 alim>js placed in the plural, as Cicerone et Antonio consulibus, in the consulship or 
 Cicero and Autonius. 
 
 Obs 1 The expression ' con^'ulibiis' with two persons as subject-ablatives has a pecu- 
 liar reference to the method of Roman chronology. The Romans did not use fi;rures to 
 desi-nate the years as dates of their own history, except to lay a stress upon the num- 
 ber of years elapsed since the building of Rome. The years as mere chronological 
 dites wL indicated by the na.nes of their consuls, in the form of f^l'.tTv^^hf PoSex 
 These names were known to the people from the consular lists kept by the Pontilex 
 Maximus (fast iconsuldrei or CapitoTini). 
 
 Rem 2;«. Rarely adjectives are used impersokat.t.y as predicate-ablatives, so that a 
 sul^ect'-inflnitive or a sul>iect-clause performs the officii of subject-ablative, as: Con- 
 snect;e sunt duuj nuinquerSmes, baud cuTquam dubio quin Jwsfium eji<ent(\t being do ibt- 
 ffi to noiully fhat th^-v Delonjed to thee.iemy). Liv. .28, n-M^i.^i^Hlnantes navibu^ 
 incerto pne tenebris quVl peterenf. hede perierunt. (it bem- iincTtain V>wards what they 
 ?ere movi..?. i. e.. the ob ects of which they miu'ht take hold, being i»;:»^''^^'^)- f^^^ 
 as predicate^ahlative^ on account of their personal nature, cannot as>ume an impt^ 
 sonal form Such expre-sii.ns as comitiis. ludis (at the time ot the election ai the 
 Sof he.'a.nes,. wuich the grammarians consider as impersonal predicate-ablat.yes 
 are mere ablatives of lime ( § 45:i). R.-solved into tlnite predicative phrases they would 
 be ^VvH^^^udi sunt, ihc games are taking place), and not the predicate-nouns 
 of the phrases. 
 
 1 Pos^^um nominflrei rusticos^ Romilnos, viclnos mcos. guibus abaentiMis numquam 
 fere idla iragro3 „,,jara opera tiunt. Cic. Se.K 7, '^4.- 2 Vix in ipsis tectisj et oppi^ 
 dis frigus iufirmd^ valet udiae vitatur. nedum in man. Cic Fam Ih, 8.- 3- ^'1 » «^^^ 
 me «crip^isse demlror''. pnesertim tam novis'^ rebu^. Cic. tani. 7, 18.— 4. Jugurtna 
 Boc-,ho\>oHicitus e<t Nu.nidhe partem tertiam, s. integri^^ T' •^'''''''l }lt}lT.T^t\ 
 positumJ" foret. Sail. Jug. 97, 2 -.5 Popillius non ^'^^ ^bat Romani rev^ertl ne f^^^^ 
 causam diceretn ndrerso^'' senltu, iufestiare populo. I..v. 42, 2>.- 6. H s r«;'>'f l><;»'^c 
 tum est Mt. a//i.^.^mis- lluminibus atque impediti^sbm^^'^ itmeribus nullum <^=eMr ac- 
 ce"ritM incomniodutn. C.es. B. C. 3. 77.-7. Philippus tum /« 7'^. o .otani molen'» 
 Mi<tirt5i>a, belli Liv 3'-., 7.— 8. Non tu, rtW confute tuo. ca^tra intrab s. lav. 10. 3(..— 
 5 IlMfnq.iebatur una per Sequanos \xx, qt.a^^ Helvetii, S^T^^'^^^ ^r^'^^^'^^^^^ 
 an-'u<tiasi^ i,v«9 non ,) .terant. C:es. B. U. I. <.».- 10. C\e-ar e.xercituiu e t piovmciam 
 
 -rfo na.ue.- Mioman far.uers. Oit-rally: rustic «'»'"»"?)-! ^^^;7.,;i^ SJoniihed' 
 work - * under th.- very roofs of h )iis -s. - 5 w.;ak.- « much le-s - ^ I am a>ton stied. 
 -« Trans bvth. noun^^.i;..- » with -ut a reduction of hi^ territory - "to settle - 
 " raH<a>n dic-re to hive one's trial, to be tried. - ^"^ opposel. inimicd (to him).- ex- 
 t^?\i^r\^l\\k^t^\iio pass.- 1* to sutfer.- >* brunt.- i« by the coajuncLion as long as.-- 
 17 where.— •=* on account of its usirrowness.— ^■' to march. 
 
186 
 
 REVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 innfo muVu tenet. Cic. Fam, Ifi, 11.— 11. Ctesar Divitiacnm commonefacit», qnro ipso 
 pr(v>f>-nte in concilio (JallOrum de fratre <*jus nint dicta. Cues. B. G. 1, 19.— 12. Cser-ar 
 oninibiix- in-'^riis neqiu'* t^iispic:intil)Ur», viiriliil* tfrtiS jiibet omuls lcir>5ned ox ca-tris 
 fdilci. Hirt. 15. Afr. 37.— V-i. Uamniiii!* di.vit lii!<idias Uhis ])luri//iis con-^fiis coinparAri*. 
 Liv. 42. 17. — 14. Ilof vidCinii!? efsc consecQti ur ne qiiis ai,'i'r(' cum jk)|»u1(j'' hwx salcis 
 au''pkii.'i a!ir nalns lerfifmn aut dt-nique sine vi^ pos^it. (.'ic. Fan». 1, 2.— 15. Unuui- 
 vii* mho officio •f'G facere p<)S!*c arbirrautur. Cic. Rose. Am. 1. — Ifi. Ea dicam, T()J)is 
 audioutilius, amisso jam temporo. qn:c ipsi soli, re integrd. soppe dixi. Cic. Mur, 21.— 
 17. Diiilliui» dek'Ctabiitur cri'i)ro lunilli et libicine*, qiue tibi nuUo exemjHo privStus» 
 f unn)stM-at'°. Cic. Sen. 18. 44. 
 
 IS. Fal)iu» Maximus (:,r^io/ie ct P/iUlfipo iterumi' consn/iduji mortnu;» est. Cic. Son. 
 5, 14.— li). lI;oc conditio fuit info pnefare aratOruui»-. Cic. Verr. 2. 3, 2'.».— 20. Qui»d 
 cleo teste promijiteris, id tonouduni ost. Cic. Off. 3, 29 — 21. Brutus collGiram si hi croilvit 
 Valorium. quo adjutOre^^ roires ojeccrat. Liv. 2. 2.— 22, Dicit illo, oinnoin iliaui tom- 
 ])t'siiTtfini* Ctfyare iinpuhoit^"-' atcjuo aijntore ot^se oxcitiltam. Cic. Prov. Cons. 8. 18. — 
 2;{. Ik'lvotii logiltos ad Duninorim'in mittunt. uiettdejtrtcafOre a Soquanis itor {f/ie }>er- 
 viisition of inarcMnq) inipotnlront. Cies. li. (}. 1. «.».— 24. Kliodii non favC'io»* tantum 
 god adju\ Are etiam belluni polorant, quadruginta navibus auctOre Jlegetdloiho pnt'pariltis. 
 Liv. 42. 4."). — 25. Quid ost turpius quam anctore ho^te do suminis» - rol>us capon; consi- 
 lium y C:i's. B. (». 5. !:^.— 2rt. Voces» sunt c(>ntuinol:5sa'if al) iijlto accusatoro'*' nit/lo 
 audi/re eim<^V'^. Cic. Ciol. 1.}, 30.— 27. l{o<;uhi8 in Afiicil captus est dm-e Xant/iij)/)0, 
 impe ratOre Axitem patre llannibalis I/tmilorte. Cic. Off. 3. 2t>.— 28. Ciosur sox l.-triOnoa 
 ox Hispania ot ma'^na auxilia Afraoioct Ptfirjo ditcihua hal)et a lor<ro->. Cic. Fam. Ifi, 
 !•>, 4._ -H) ^liiii quidcni, />Mtri6' itobity, M. fecaurus C. Mario ccderu"^"^ mm videbalur. 
 Cic. Off. 1, 22. 
 
 § «mo. Impersoxal ablatives absolute consist of a mere 
 predicate-ablative in the neuter sinpjiilar of a perfect passive 
 jiartieiple formed from an impersonal passive verb, as debelldto, 
 after the war liad been finished ; 6\i7>/om^o, after an exph)ration 
 liad been made. Tiiis construction is of very rare occurrence. 
 
 Rem. 234. Impersonal ablatives abssoluto are of two kinds : 
 
 1. Tlu'y are formed from imi)orsonal pasnives of neuter verbs, the doors of tbc action 
 boinj? uncertain persons, and tbo verbs bavinir tbc force of traTisitivo objective pbrasos. for 
 wbicb, on account of iboir fromient occurrence in daily life, usa ire had substituted siiiffle 
 verbs. Thus occur e. ir. tlie i)redicate-ablativ»'s f/z/v/J^VJ/o, «'/g"//v7/o. /iWo (inst. of a«- 
 ftpiciis. augurii'^, Kucnticiis rite pirftdix), and drfM-'lato (inst. of //^//o ^finlfo). Those liave 
 both the nature and form of adverbs (in o). most of which (seegfi'.»» are evidently nothini; 
 i)ut predicate-ablatives of impersonal passives, as tiecn to (fvom tte('rrntffe),(ito({'vom Hire), 
 falsi) (iroiufallerc). necopindto (from tlie ancient opindre). tuto (from tiitii), mbito (fmm 
 stih - -• • , . .^- ,. 1. . . 
 
 (It 
 
 ow. ^ , , . 
 
 eral of these expressions are compounds of impors'mal ablatives, as: intestdto (without 
 Itavinjj a will), i/iconxulto (unadvisedly; rare, instead of the classical iftro/tft/tte). bijuir- 
 tllo and triparlVo (in two, three divisions; tlie simple partVo not occurrinj^ in classical 
 lanfiua<,'e). All tliese expressions must be considered as conventional lornuilas, which 
 canTiot, l)y analoury. be extended and applied to other impersonal passives. Thus such par- 
 ticiples as ' p>tf/ii<)to\ 'coiicurt^o' {-—gi/ion pugndfi/jn etc. ej^.<et) do not occur. But some 
 writers (Livy, Tacitus,* etc.) have occasionally coi ned solitary oxpressiona of this kind. 
 
 • to address tlm 
 
 t/.v(> (from failert). tiecopnKiio (Irom tlie ancient opinare). vtio (irom iiieii), suuiiu vii-"iu 
 '/An). Thus occur opfd/o (accordin<: to one's wishes), coni^ultn (deliberately), testdto 
 /avinira will); sortVo\.hy lot. Cic. Verr. 2, 2. 51); sati^ddto, in ' atiguid mtisdato dttnre \ to 
 ve somethinj; on security (often in the jurists, also Cic. Att. Ifi, fi, 3; \h. Ifi. 15, 2). Sov- 
 
 to nrepare. 
 people.— '' violence.— 8 crebro fundli et tibidne, literally: l)y a frequent torch and a 
 
 1 Repeats to.— " any one's.- ' or.— * nitrht-watch. 
 («ople. — 7 violence. — ^ crebro fundli et tlbiciae, lite 
 iliito-plaver; i. e. fn-quent illumination (of his hou-o» with mnsic— » as a private person. 
 
 — »• to assume.— ' » for the second time.— ^"-ardlor. a farmer.— >3 literally h-^lper.- »* storm. 
 
 — 1» literallya inorer,aheltor.— »« fdv^re (supply f>eilOK to s^ive countenance to; adjurare 
 helluta to jiriVe assistance in the war.— »t most important.— »« abusive.— »" accusi-r.— 
 "0 emittere, to utter — «i § 44-), R. .55.— ^a to be inferior, or second to. 
 
 * Some «,'r:unmarians (I'uotoa passai^e of Cicero (cui. errdfo. nulla vcnia. r6!c/<?/^lc/o exi- 
 trua lius prt)ponitur, Loj,'. A-r. 2, 2). to prove tbat be u<es f^r/v7/oaiid nrtyfirfoii^ impor- 
 ecmal predicate-al)latives. This roadiui; would be far loss defensible than even the allowed 
 example- of Livy, since the doer of the impersonal action would bo the loi^ical subject 
 of the •sentence. It has ionj,' beon corrected. l)ein«r only supported by one sinj,'le inanu- 
 Bcript the majority of the manuscripts reading CHJus instead of cut, which makes erra- 
 
 TREPOSITIONAL GERUNDULS. 
 
 187 
 
 E 
 
 which, however, failed to be received into general nse, as: exphrdto (after examination, 
 Liv. 23. 42 : see Ex. 3) ; uondurn jxdam facto (the affair not havinir been made public yet, 
 ^Sy.'l'l.Tirt^.—Svtinndlo lnres,<7r -nf. they entered after room had been made (by thelictur). 
 lb. 28. 27 {s'ltnmori^tur aJicui. a Motor clears the passaire for a m;i<ristrato). 
 2. The second kind of impersonal predicate-ablatives correspoiids to those impersonal 
 assive predicates which have clausks as subjects (interrogative, or That-clauses, see 
 ;iook VF.). This form is extremely rare in classical i)roso, occiiriiiiir only twice in Cioero: 
 Adjuvcto vero /// eldejn etiam prudtute» haherentur. nihil erat quod homines non posse 
 consequi se arbitrarentiir [ — 'postquain accesnt vt\ after it was added that, i.e. 'after, 
 in addition to thi-» '). Cic. Otf. 2, 12. — Perfecto cnim et concluso. neque virtutibus. noque 
 amiritia; locum esse, si ad voluptatem omnia referantur, nihil prieterea est diccndura 
 (:=/^).stq>ia?n perfectum est etc.: alter establishing the principle that etc.). lb. Fin. 2. 27. 
 In Cic. Inv. 2, 10, 30 (hoc loco pneterito, et ci/r pr(¥teredfur dcinonstrdto), ' demonstrdto'' 
 may be taken as an ordinary />fr.s'0/^rt/ passive predicate-ablative (per ecthesin = hoc loco 
 doinonstrjlto cur prjeteroiltur ; see p. SiHi. </). A few times this construction also occurs 
 in Livy, who uses it as virtually equivalent to an active perfect participle, a usage which 
 cannot be considered as <_ronerally adopted: Consul ad Pluinnam est progressus, non- 
 dum co>/i])erto gi/atn regiofiem hostix pet'isse'; ' it having not yet been ascertained {by 
 him)' what route the enemy had taken. Liv, 31, 39. See PIx. 4. fi. In Cses. B. G. 7,52 
 {e.rjnmto quid imquitas loci posset) the reading is dou»)tfnl, 'exjwsuit' being probably 
 the correct reading. In the writers of the silver age this construction occurs oftenor. — 
 Here belong also the predicato-al)latives formed from impersonal predicate-ailjectives 
 witli clai/Sfs as subjects, as: Hand culquam dufno (=:quura baud dubium esset), guin 
 hat/ium essent trirhnes. Liv. 28, 17. See j). 185, R. 233. 
 
 1. Pnofectus roirius. prope jam nt debeUdto, Masinissam persectltus est. Liv. 20, 32. — 
 2. Seipio, vflut jam debtUdlo. quod ad Carthaginieusis atrineret». UticiR oppugnandae 
 Intontus erat. lb. 30, 8. — 3. Am|)ius profectus est, noque explordto circa^, necstationi- 
 l)u>3 satis lirmis positis. lb. 31, 2. — 4. Consul explordto aniva. utrum Leucadem* an si- 
 num* Atnl)racium onerariie" tenuissent,-in vicom' cohortls» frumentiltum» Ambra- 
 ciam misit. lb. :i2. 15.— 5. Quinctius, nondum comperto quam in rogiOnera vonisset, 
 milites por airros dimissos (li. 225) vallum ciedorei" jubot. lb. .3:5. 5.— fi. Consul edicto^^ 
 ntquicuiiquei- ad vallum tendereti3 pro hostehaberetur, obstitit** teudentibus suis in 
 castra, lb. 10, 30. 
 
 7^ IJeVERSED PHRASES AND GERUNDS GOVERNED BY PREPOSI- 
 TIONS. 
 
 1. Prcj)osltlonal Gerundials. 
 
 g ,>37. Botli reversed plirases and gerunds maybe connected 
 by means of prepositions with their governing words, so as to 
 form cither prepositional objects or prepositional attributes. 
 l>ut only a few prepositions can tlius be used with the accusa- 
 tive or ablative of gerundials. The most frequent preposi- 
 tional connections with gerundials are those by acZ, in (both 
 with the accusative and ablative), «5, de^ and (in certain con- 
 nections) oh. Karely are used inter^ ex^ and ;>ro. 
 
 to and recte facto the datives of substantives. Still the old exploded reading is reit- 
 erated in so recent a publication as the " Engli<h Public School Latin Grammar' whose 
 author copie-' from Ituddimin the as-ertiou that ' errdfo' stands for 'si erratum erit 
 a in^\ and ' recte facto" for ".si recte factntn erit a nie" . p. 310. 
 
 1 Qiujd ad Cartluigiiuenses atti/itret, as far as the Carthaginians were concerned.— 
 2 circa, round about, i. e.. in the environs — » stafiunes ponere. to establish stations or 
 posts,— * NOM. Leucas.— » gulf of Aml)racia.— « the freight-ships.— "^ in turn.— » co- 
 horts.— » frummtdri, to forage.— »» to cut the material lor the rampart.— " to proclaim. 
 — ^^ whoever. — *' to press.— >* to oppose. 
 
188 
 
 REVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 A 
 
 PREPOSITIONAL GERUNDIALS. 
 
 
 Hem ''o.j Prepositional c^crundials take eitlier the form of a {gerundive 
 
 phrase* or tiiat of a ireruml absoUite, according to the .c^eneral rules on 
 
 reversed phrases (^^ 517. 518) ; but tliey cauuot take the lorni of a gerund 
 
 with a transitive oi)ject: 
 
 AdcondUwuesfac.ieiida-^, to make coiulition*» (not ad faciendum conditiones) ; in U- 
 
 bris Legtndis, in rcaiin;; bot)k^ (i»oL in Itijeiuio libim)* 
 
 Rem 2.W. Many prepositions are, by their MEAXiNQ, excluded fromjjoverninir i?erun- 
 diiU 'i^ ante nne, super, lenus, sud, coram: but others seem to be excluded from 
 comTec Un -^cTKial <.b bv a mei'e caprice of the la.igua-e. Hence many En-Ush 
 
 Drenositional expressions with Uie particioial in in(/ cannot be rendered by Uilin prepo- 
 Jkions with -.-mndials. fc>ome of these expressions may be rendered by parlicipial 
 reversed phnises ; b.it mmv cannot even be rendered by these. Thus ^b^fare the build- 
 in' of Rome 'may b.- expressed bv ante h'omam conditam. but not by «/</^ homam con- 
 del)da7nf 'By or thr<mqh suireriiiir hardships' cannot be expressed by any reversed 
 phrase with a preposition" (noX }>erlai>vre.'< Meruhdos, nor j,tr labtn-e.^ toleratoi<\,\i\\ih^ nn 
 ablative .r.-rundial or particii)lc (laboiibus tol'vandis or tukralis) 'On account oj with 
 a participial is never translated by propter with a «eriindi.l, and oiily in certain connec- 
 ti(m< bv o4, but most <;en«'railv by cauxa or gratia with the genitive of a gerundial. 
 'Wittiout witti a p:iitici[)ial ' may be rendered by ^in^ with a verbal nonn UXf^srne dubi- 
 tatione) but never with a «reriiudial or a participial plirase_in..t .*<//« j///i'?/a/''-/o nor 
 'sine diligenlia adkibita\ without applying diligen.-e, but nulla ddigt/dia adtabUaU 
 
 Obs in ord.-r to render the Kuj^lish ' wif/ind ' with a participial, various combina- 
 tions are at the disposition of the Latin langua-e : ,- ♦, . /e An<i\ .^r .,P,T«t;vP 
 
 1 The NEOATioN mn (ne. ne-quidem). or negative form-udjectives (§ 4as\ or nejratne 
 conjunctions (mgue, neve, nl^i), which are combined either with participles or gerundials 
 in one of the Ibllowing ways: ^. . 
 
 (a) With PARTICIPLES in tln> form of accessory prelicates, as : Dicam hoc non i-eifrens 
 asVntandi suspiciOnem, I shall maintain this wdhout fmng afraid iA the suspicion of 
 rtaiterv «.'ic Or 3, l2i.— Itoniaiii non rogafi auxilium offenint, the Romans oth*r their 
 XnAxi without beiug iu^ked for it. Liv. 31, -i:}.-! osse liberalitate uti /«or. ^7^<^i<'//-/<'m .-ce 
 patriuionio pecuniae e*t fructus niaximus. f. be enabled to be liberaM/w^/Jow^ depnting 
 one's se^f of one's propertv. is the greatest blessing «)i money. Cic, Off. 2, IH. 
 
 d>) With participles in the form of puedicatio-ablativks, as nulla recwanfe rcgnim 
 obfinGre, to obtain the throne wif/iouf any on^' c^jecJing Xo it. Nep Tim 3 Aonexpecfato 
 solis ortu trajicere. to cross wif/iout expecting tfie rise of the mn. Uv.jU. \i. i^ec ansm- 
 cato r^clitato instruunt aciein. they draw up the line ol l)attle without perjornang tit/ier 
 au<pice^orsacnnce>i. \A\.h,m. ^vi^M.-nri.a-l*^. 
 
 (C) With the Ablative or g.-rundials. as nullify hbns scnbendi.9, without writing any 
 books; Sdpio annum integrum nihil gerundo in /fispania con^umpstt, Scipio i^pent a 
 whole year m Soain without doinir auytliing. Liv. 37, 7. See R. 214. 
 
 2 The NKOATivE PUKFix in. apoliecl to participles, adjectives, or to verbal nouns, 
 
 (a) The participles with this pretax occur either in the form of acces>ory predicates, 
 as insciens hoc feci, I have done this without knowing it ; inrocdtus adest. he is present 
 wittiout bnng invited : inaudVum aliguem cond^mndre, to condemn one without liearing 
 him Ju^t 22 3: or in the forui of ablatives absolute, as: re tnfec/a, or tnfeclo negotio, 
 witliuut accomplishing one's purpose. Sail. >Tug. 58, 7; indicta c<f».va aluiuem condem- 
 
 * Formerly the editions of the classics presented a number of prepositional construc- 
 tions with <'crunds and transitive object.s. These have been almost all corrected, being 
 i)a>ed on iiTferior ri>ading8 of some codices. There are, now only three passag.is left in 
 which such constructions occur, 1) Liv. 30,13: m a'loguendovictorem; 2) Liy. 28,^44: 
 non ad d^fendmdum modo llaliam; 3) Cic. Tusc. 3, «J: ^erbum hoc (i. e., invuiere) 
 ducinm est a nimis intuendo torfunam alferJus. In this passage a iierundive const ruct lou 
 could n(»t be used at all ; »)ecause intuenda fortuna would have implied that invidtre was 
 derived Irom the phra>ie ' intuenda fortOna', while Cicero meant to say that it was iden- 
 liciil with intueri alone. Hence in mis pas-^a-e the gerund with a trauMtive object is a 
 le 'itimate evcptiou, which however cannot be extended beyond this rare connection.^ 
 
 t We read, indeed, in Liv. Tret'. • gutt ante condifam condendamre urbun traduntur , 
 •what is reported of the time before the city was built or projcttd'. Hut in this pas- 
 sage anf^ condendam urb^m has not the meaning 'before the building of the city , 
 bul pre 'iiantlv, by a bidd antithesis to ante conditam. denotes a time in which the build- 
 in" of Rome was not even thought of. Only the antithesis makes this ccmstruci ion tol- 
 erable. Poi'tically ante domandum (inst. of antequam domili trunt) occurs in \ ir<;. 
 (;et)rir. 3. 206. 
 
 (iet)rg. 3. 2Ub. , . 
 
 X Cum with an ablative gerund, and circa with an accusative gerund are, each once 
 found in (iuintiiian ; Cum UMiuendo juncta (inst. of cum usu loguendi juncta) 1, 5; circc 
 inocendum valet (iust. of ad movendum valet). 4, 5, (i. 
 
 
 1 
 
 nnre, to condemn one without hearing his defence, Cic. Kab. 4 ; causa incognita, without 
 having examined the case, Cic. N. D. 2, 73: inscientUms ipns, without their knowledge 
 (their knowing it) ; inauspicdto. without (using) auspices ; inaugurdto, without (perform 
 int') auiruries ; inexplorato, without examining. 
 
 (b) 'I'lie adjective-, witli the |)re;ix in, if corresponding to 'without' with a participial, 
 have the force of participles, as me igndro et in.'^cio. without my having any idea of it, 
 Cle. Plane. l(i : inscios inopinantei^que Menapios oppre»serunt, they surprised the Menapii 
 without «heir being aware of it. C.es. li. G. 4. 4 ; exercitu incruento (Sail. Jug. 97) or in- 
 cruento prcelio (Liv. 2. 5»)), without shedding any blood. 
 
 (c) Verbal nouns with the prefix t/*, corresponding to ' withouf and a participial are 
 
 Idaced in tue ablative, as incnv^ultu ineo, without consulting me ; injuj^su, without 
 laving received an order. Liv. 3, (>3 ; 4.32 {injussu s-uo, injussu iwperafdrit-; -without 
 his command, wiihout the order of the chief-commander. Cjes. B, G. 1, S); Cic. Sen. 20). 
 
 3. Finite sentences, either co-ordinaied by negative conjunctions (neque), or subordi- 
 nated br lit non (so as not to), or by quia after negative predicates, as: Paiuetius de hac 
 re deinceps se scrip-^it i\\(:\^n\\n. nee exsolvit id quod promiserat, Panietius wrote he 
 would speak of this subject at the proper i)lace, tcithout, howexGv^ performing what he 
 hail promised. Cic. Off. 'i, 2.— (^ui intra priesidia Pompeji fuissent, neqve operant in re 
 miliijlri pnvstitifsent, who had been within the lines of Pompey, iiitJwut lending their 
 h'ip in the operations of the army. Cies. IJ. C. 3, 83.— Qui virttlti non ptudet, malet exis- 
 tiinjlri l>oniis vir.n^ non nt. qiiani esse, id non jnitetur. who \s indifferent t«> virtue, would 
 rather be taken tor a «rood man. irithout t/eing one. than be a L'ood man without being con- 
 sidered so. c;ic. Fin. 2, 71.— In castello nemo hiit omnino militum gain vulneraretur, in 
 the fort there was not one soldier without being wounded. Cses. B. C. 3, R^. 
 
 4. Sometimes the construction of the sentence is recast by making the phrase with 
 ' without' a i)rincipal predicate, in combination with a neirative. transforming the Eng- 
 lish principal verb into an object, as: Nulla profecto alia gens tanfd mole dadis nejn 
 obruta e-<set, no other people, indeed, could have met with so overwhelming a di'^aster 
 without t>eing annihilated. Liv. 22, .54. {literally: no other people would have been not 
 annihilated by such a load of disaster). 
 
 h Sometinies a Latin vkubal noln after sine may be employed to render the English 
 'without" with a participial, as: Ca'sar hortjltur Divitiacum \\i siiu ejus offensione animi 
 d«' CO statiiat, C;esar admonishes Diviliacus to decide about him wWwut ftding offended 
 by it. Cics. B. G. \, 19. 
 
 § o38. The preposition ad with tlie accusative of a gerund 
 or gerundive phrase denotes the aim, or tlie purpose of an action 
 (§ 427, 2), and is dependent either as object on verbs, verbal 
 phrases and adjectives, or (rarely) as attribute on verbal nouns, 
 being generally translated hy to ov for with a participial in ing^ 
 or by an object-iniinitive (with or without ' in order''). 
 
 Ilieronymus legJIlos Carthaginem misit ad fcedus cum l\n\\mhn\e faciendyw, Hie- 
 ronymus sent ambassadors fo Carthage (in ord^^r) to make a treaty with Hannibal. Liv. 
 2i, 6.— lit impellereiit hostis ad dedendam nrbem, that they miiiht impel the enemy 
 to surrender the city. Liv. 25, "iA.—Ad nbellandum neque virls neque duces habSbant, 
 for revolting (to re'volt) they had neither strength nor leaders. Liv. 33, 29.— SilSnus 
 propra'tor adjutor ad resgerendasdatn» est, the proprietor Siianus was appointed an aid 
 to administer the affairs (^as an aid in his administration). Liv, 26, 19.— Non tam ido- 
 ueus ad ctlandam rem videbJltur quam ad agendam erat, he seemed not bo much adapted 
 to concealing a thing, as he was adapted to doing it. Liv. 33, 28. 
 
 Hem. 237. The GEnuNDiAL dative is to the prepositional oEnrTTDiAi. nfter ad. in the 
 relation of ttie exception to the rule ; both beinir employed as objects of aim and pur- 
 pose. The followiiiir are the chief differences of these constructions : 
 
 L The gerundial dative is almost exclusively restricted to gerundive phrases, while 
 the prepositional gerundial may assume the form of a gerund absolute (for verbs with- 
 out transitive objects) or that of a gerundive phrase. We may say either diem ' coinifiis 
 habendis^ dicere, or diem ' ad comitia habenda ' dicere. but we cannot say diem conveniendo 
 dicere, the form diem ad conveniendum eilicere being the only correct one. 
 
 2. The irerundial dative alone is applicable if the principal verb is one which governs 
 the dative of a substantive (R. 209)- It the verb may be construed either with a dative 
 or with ad. the two constructions have a different meaning. Thus deesse alicid rei 
 faciendiZmQ&miohc remiss in something (R. 209), while deesse ad remfaciendamme&ns 
 
190 
 
 REVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 to be wantmc:', as Tlr«? d^fntnt ad expiignandam vrbem (not erpugnandct vrM) the 
 means are wantintj to c:iptu e the city.— yir/fw-sY (scrifjendo) inean.« to be prcsenl af an 
 aci ; ade.^se ad a/K/'am rtinjaritndam (Liv. 2, 19) me m» to b.- present/or sl future act 
 
 .{. 11 thepriiiKliai is an AUVKKP.rAi, object of purpose, the darive form is re^tricted 
 to phrases ronuiinmj? a noun io which the purpose primarily refers (U 211) • but the pre- 
 positiotial ;:eriin(liai may l)e applied whether it relers to such a noun or not' H. nee it is 
 very trequenily connected witti verb» denotin-r a motio i in space, where the qenindial 
 dntive IS excluded; as Mlfttre lefjatos ad panin fncitndam. but not paH facie ikUv • ire 
 ad urtk^m opjmr/nandam. not i/rOi o/>j)U{//>aridiv. On the other side the .-erundial dative 
 IS the normal form to indicate the specutl purpose of offices, and with the word cwfii- 
 lUl. See K. 211, Obs. 2 (o, 
 
 4. VVhen ADJKCTivKs jrovcrn a gerundial, the prepositional form is far more usual 
 than the jjerundul dative (li. 210). 
 
 liem, 2:^8. The difference of the participial crcrnndive (R. 177) from the prepositional 
 jreruiidial (both expressing,' purpose), is determined by th.' relation of the «'erundial to 
 the transitive obj.ct, or to ttie pissive subject of the principal predicate." The parti- 
 cipial ^'enindive can only be eniploved 1) if the -gerundial is a transitive verb and 2» if 
 Us transitive olijcct is the same with the transitive ol)ject or passive suinJct of the 
 principal predicate. Hence a prepositional ^'erundial. not a participial L'erundive ib 
 used 1) It it isa neuter or intransitive verb ; 2i if it ig a transitive verb, but if its tran- 
 sitive objoct IS not identical with the transitive object or the passive sul)ject of iho 
 principal predicate, as (a) Lcjrionem unam in a<?ros ad fruinentandum mittif (b) ho- 
 jxatos Atlienas ad pace m facint dam mittif. In neither of these two example-* a pakti- 
 cipiALi;erundive would be admissible. Hut even in such instances where a particinial 
 ^'erundive is correct, it may generally be replaced bv a prepositional .'erund altcrW 
 In this case the transitive object, or the passive subject of the principal predicate loses 
 Its i^erundive attribute whu n becomes an adverbial object in the form of a preoosi- 
 tional .'erund alter ad. The transitive object of this jjerund mu>t be alwavs Vnoku- 
 STooi), beiuf,' conceived as a personal pronoun referrini; to the object or subject of the 
 principa! predicate. Thus the lollowinj,' sentence witii a participial -erundive ' Inslru- 
 mcnla Afh^nas 7'efi<tefida luittit mi-ht be changed into a sentence with a preposi- 
 tioiial -erund Instraitunta AlhZnas ad rf^finenduin (i.e. «a) mittit, both bein.' ren- 
 dered in the same way (he sends the instruments to Athens f<.r repsir (to be rei.Mired) 
 It IS, however, more usual to apply in such cases participial gerundives (see K lyO) ami 
 prepositional irerunds ran never be employed when the whole gerundive phrase iini<t be 
 considered as a transitive t)biect of the piineipal predicate (R. 198). ThiA we can never 
 say iKM'f.m ad fanejHlum o/ranf, or opus ad faciendum locavU iuet. oi mntem facien- 
 dunt cui ant, opus faciendum locCivit. 
 
 liem. 239. Tlie verbs and verbal phrases with which prepositional •••e- 
 rundials after ad may be connected, ;ire "^ 
 
 1) Verbs in wliicli the idea of a purpose or aim is contained so that 
 the gerundial only specirtes the idea already implied in the verb; as 
 
 Mindre. to destine, to allot, Liv. 5, 21 ; se arcommoddre. to make one's self fit Ex 4 • 
 
 tncumbere ^w^ accedeve \o apply oiie"s self, Cic. Sull.29; Leg. 2. 18; xe transferre tJ 
 'If. Cic. Mur. 22, 4ri ; adhifhre. to apply, Liv. 21. :A\ incUndre, to incline. 
 
 devote one's sell 
 
 f T„ o<- o . . " • r ' ' ""/"""^' '" "JMoy, i^iv. XI. ;>*; incnnare, to incline, 
 
 Liv. 2/), 35 , ainnmm coiicertere, or adctrtere, to direct one's attention, Liv. 20 40- 24 
 18; niti and adnlti, to stnve, Ca^s. B. G. 7, 63; Liv. 27, 14 ; txcitdre, to excite, E.x. d:' 
 
 fl'.75'X l"i 'S^'*" V T'^- ^'r -^- ?' "^'/f.'-^-,^,» stimulate. Liv. 27, 37; accendtre, to i..: 
 tlaine, lb. ^A^^-addmrre, to induce, Cic. Mur. 37, 7S ; ^/id/Jrc, to solicit. Liv. 25 15- 
 twvi/v', to call, lb. ; adhortan, tocxhort, Cic. Kab. 1, 1 ; elicere, to insti-'ate Liv 25 15 ' 
 
 P.r'nff'/^iu""^'';-^'-^*^'-/^-.^'-. -^' •»ii. ^"i^"'--'-'^ «»^ supi>ttere,\o be sufficient,' Ex. 5,' 
 Cic. Ofl. 1, 19; pertititre, to belou:;, Cic. Off. 1. G ; , ^ , 
 
 and other verbs of similar import. The prepositional gerunds depend- 
 ent (m these verbs must be considered as co.mi'lktin(} objects since 
 tlie verbal idea would be incomplete witliout them. These «■•(Ti'indials 
 are mostly rendered by English object-itdinitives, which, iirthis con- 
 nection, are neither equivalents of the Latin object-inlinitive nor of 
 English phrases with 'in order to'. ' 
 
 2) Verbs of all kinds, not containing the idea of i)urpose, to which the 
 gerundial after ad is added as an advekhial object of purj)ose Such 
 gerundials are equivalent to a linite clause with ut^ and are rendered 
 either by 'in order to', or by an object-intinitive equivalent to it, or by 
 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 ■^f. 
 
 PREPOSITIONAL GERUNDIALS. 
 
 191 
 
 for' with a participial. Here belong all verbs of motion {ire, venire^ 
 
 projicisci, dueere, mittere^ etc.), jind every transitive or neuter verb which 
 
 may be conceived as an action for a purpose, as : 
 
 Ad reliqucLft nai'i-s reficiendas cere vt(:hdtur, for repairing, (in order to repair) the other 
 eliips. he employed brass. Cies. B. G. 4,31. — liruVii jnulti interfecti a militibus s^urd ad 
 exstinguendam /nxHlitionis Jaitwm, many Bruttians were killed by the soldiera (ii;i order) 
 to smother the tale of their treachery. Liv. 27, 16. 
 
 3) Verbal phrases, either predicative or objective, in which not the 
 verb, but the noun is qualilied or determined by an idea of aim or pur- 
 pose, as 
 
 Tempi's dare or pefere ad aliqvam rem,faciendam^ to give or ask time for doing some- 
 thing. Liv. 27. 24. 4U ; diem dicere, Liv. 22. 11 ; ngnum dare, lb. 45, 34 ; riam quoerere, 
 Liv. 3, 55, 6; rires desunt or deficiunl ad aliquid faciendum, strength is wanted to do 
 something, Liv. 42,49. Here belong some predicative expressions with predicate-nom- 
 inatives, or predicate-datives, as ; Consiiles ad ofnnia qux aspera sunt sut>eunda duces 
 esse debent. L. 26. 36. Thus are construed opus est, and the frequent phrases with the 
 abstract datives usui and impedimento (usui e>!se, to be of use ; impedunento e'>se, to be 
 an obstacle to), as Omnia dterant quae ad reficiendas navis erant usui, Ca?s. B. G. 4, 29. 
 
 Th(-se expressions must be considered as virtual attributes of nouns, 
 
 though they tire grammatically made dependent on verbs. Hence they 
 
 are olten replaced by grammatical attributes in the genitive, as Hignumpro- 
 
 Jiciscendl dedit, Liv. i-'2, 42. 
 
 Op* It is unusual for gerundials after ad to be employed as grammatical attributes 
 without being joined to a verb. But occasionall)' gerandial attributes with ad are found, 
 as yaves se.raginfa ires expuqndtex. sunt, qucedam .cum ?naterid ad classem oidificandam, 
 some with materials for buililing a fleet,~Liv. 26.47. — Jbi audlfur P. Decii eventus, ingens 
 hortameii ad omnia pro republicd avdenda, there the affair of P. Decius was heard oi^ a 
 strong incitement to venture everything for the republic. Liv. 10, 29. 
 
 1. Hoc vitium qui cffugere volet a(//i?6?6i< ad considerandas^ re^ et tempus et dili- 
 gentiam. Cic. Off. 1. 6.— 2. Helvetii constituCrunt, ea quie ad projicixcendwn (to 
 march) perti/ierent. compar5re. C:es. B.G. 1, 3.— 3. Terrae ciiltiim segniOrem^ suspicor 
 fore si a'/ ca//i utendam lerrOqiie^ si/bigendam supersiitiOnis* aliquid accesserit. Cic. 
 hvi:^. 2, 18.— 4. Kriictuosior^ homiiuim generi est vita eOrum qui se ad rempublicam et 
 atl maqnas res gerendas accommodaverunt. Cic. Off. 1, 21.— 5. Sp. Lucretius, magno 
 nalu*. non sufficitutibus jam viribus ad considaria'' munera*^ of>evnda^, intra paucos dies 
 moritur. Liv. 2,8, 4. — 6. Hoc omuls excitdvit ad o.nna capienda^° opemque^^ jam prope 
 capi;e nrh'xftrendam. Il>. 25. 24.— 7. Cives non dubitilbant, hostem deletis exercitibus 
 ad expugnandam L'oniam veniQrum. lb. 22, 5<».— 8. Ca'sar Kutenos ad fnW^ Volcd- 
 rum jX)pulandos mittit. Cics. B. G. 7. 64. — 9. Expetuntur^^ divitiie quum ad usus vitae 
 necessarios. tum ad ])effruendas rotupfdtes. Cic. Off. 1, 7. — 10. Adolescentes, sapientis 
 viros consulentes, opinionem afferiint** populo, eOrum se fore simills quos sibi ipsi 
 deleqerunt^^ ad imifandum. Cic. Off. 2, 13.— 11. Scipio. quod plurimum ad accendendos^^ 
 niililuin animos intererat^'' , testis'* spectatorque virtfltis atque ignavist'* cujusque 
 aderat. Liv. 2*5, 44. — 12. Ubii navium magnam cojnam ad tran^iwrtandum-^ exeicitum 
 2)oHicebantur. Cies. B. G. 4, 16.— 13. Consul quum h gionil)U8 ad convenienditm^^ dicTn 
 dixit, non aiippicato templum iiitrasse argueojltur^^. Liv. 4, 5, 12. — 14. Ab Celtibgris 
 diis ad consultandtini'^^ peCda ed-*. lb. 34, 19.— 15. Siculi oita luce contionem"^^ hubi- 
 turi sunt ad crindnandum me. ad concitandumqve"^ in vos populum. lb. 24, 38. — 
 16. Pomnejus tibi gravissimus auctorad in,stitu(ndam'^^, fideliesimus socii's ad comparan- 
 datn^^, fort issim us a(//«/or c/(/ rem^^ j)erftciendam^° fuit. Cic. Dom. iv, 30. — 17. In tri- 
 buiullu plus virium t'st ad vexandum sendtum. qiiam ad renstendum improbis collggis. 
 Liv. 4,48. 14. — 18. Hoc mihi numquam impedimento ad rempublicam bene gerendani" 
 fuit. lb. 45, 39. — 19. Hoc nobis nuiximo usui ad concUiundos barbarOrum animos erit. 
 lb. 26,^3. — 20, Ii)si scitis quanto exercitu adT Capuam obsidendam opus sit. lb. 26, 8. 
 
 » To contemplate.— 2 plow.— 3 iron ; here 'the plow.'— * superstition.— » beneficial. 
 
 — • in his advanced age.— ' consular.— « miinvs, duty.— » to perform.— '° to take up. — 
 '^ P. 1. p. 127. — '■-' territory. — i^ expetere aliquid, to seek for soniethinir.— '* to impart. 
 
 — »5 Jo select. — '" t*) lire.— '^ plurimum interest, it is most important.— '^ witness. — 
 »» cowardice,— 20 to convey.— -1 to assemble.— '■"'- to accuse.— '^ to deliberate.— -* to 
 request, to apply for.— "^ a meeting.— 2« to excite.— "7 to conceive.— ^^ to prepare- 
 rs your plans.— '3" lo carry out.— ^i to administer. 
 
192 
 
 EEVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 Bern. 240. Adjectives denoting QH^litios representee! as bein.i^ooo^^ 
 FiTYor seme end or purpose, or as holding «^^>«;^"\\^.^.,^ ,^.^, aenoUn ^ 
 RESPECT to a puri>ose,are constnunnvilli ad "^^ ^^^"^}^^ ^^^^ 
 tlwMMid or numose This construction is more «j^eneiiil in its cnaiacAcr 
 t an oth^^uncKal dative dependent on adjectives, and may ah^^^^^ 
 
 brrul'ituted fm- i t^ The number of these adjectives is very large. Here 
 
 beloiii; ... ^._ 
 
 1. Tiiose denoting fitness and suitableness of persons or things lor 
 
 a ]Mirpose, as 
 
 2. Those denoting easy and difficult, as „ ^ «?o. 
 
 Fanli^, Liv. 27, 11 ; Cic. Off. 3, 6 ; Tusc. 1, 32, aud often ; dlfficihs, Cic. \ err. ., 3, hi , 
 Ktp. l':j5; arduus, Liv. 24, 31. 
 
 3 Tliose denoting sufficient and necessary, as 
 
 %nn. Cic V R Qn 1 3 : Liv. 2.>. .30, and «.ften ; nece^.^anu.<^. Cic. Off. 3, b and often. 
 nt^^SonVthe ixpiH^/.ion. opu.^ 6v/, and mcesse est. li. 2:J1), No. 3. 
 
 4 Those denoting re.vdiness or inclination, and their contraries, as 
 
 *T. -, r.«. R r •) 91 • 1 1', • 1 41- Liv. 27. 43 and often ; prompt'/.^, \av. 2b, 1; 
 
 lor Cic. Rep. 2, 12 ; Ih. C«c. 4 ; -^egnu^, slow, not di.'posed to (Ex. l.i). 
 ^» ' Those denoting- coneral personal qualities or dispositions of cliarac- 
 tei wliich by the gt^-undials are restricted in tlieir relations or etfects, as 
 
 k:'^-ln^^>^:u!i^pi\ ferox, Liv. 7, 27 ; jyeriinax, Liv. 5, 7, 1 ; mterjer, fresh 
 
 (Ex. 19) \€ oquen.^ \. - . . foUowed by for or fo with an infinitive (too 
 
 ''''^^VJ'\^hm: etTi ' ^^uun^^^^^ b/a-'uorandial after ad dependent 
 
 poor to . ny a }}'''''jyl'j:\jf,,^^^^^ but bva clause with vmm »/ after a com- 
 
 on adjectives mot .im.^^^^^^^^ ,„,,fi,reref. Attains was too 
 
 r.NE in place ontn.rnndahs.,lnt.. aft^M- ad ; but not m place of a .^erundive, and NMth 
 
 3. Re iquie "a^^^^*^""?.,.^ 4 iiannibil ctimdelcctis* ped turn equirnmque quam poterat 
 rio3 factac.t*. lb. 4^^^^^^^^ l^\l^^^^,,^^^ contendit^ Liv. 2r,, 5.- 5. Visdicendi« 
 
 "^^r'f^'n icTtri^ om alperLuImduni acrommoddUe. Cic Ac. 1, S .32.- 6. Om- 
 
 est t'^pli<''^trix or^iuoni «* opes^' tmnda^t ac (enendas quam (iilisi, iiec a/j- 
 
 nnim rerum nee «/>/*'/^^ 
 
 taJ^i'crclSam emL'uv'39; l.ls. Uti-^ nulla materies tam/m/i. a^..rarae.c..<^.m»3 
 
 ' ♦ Instead of utilis ad rem faciendam, generally the phrase nsui esse is employed. See 
 
 ^^i^Kv'no m'panc - ' to land - " alarm.- «./?m, to arise, to spread in.- » picked men. 
 JMrhtS-^o hur.y^-«oratonal power-» the expounder.- >» lan^^uage.- 
 11 property,— »2 as.— " to kindle, to be inflamed. 
 
 TREPOSITIONAL GERUNDIALS. 
 
 193 
 
 c««t nuiei ni<i' admOto i^ni iirnem concipere^ possit, pic< nulla mens est tama^f mm- 
 wvSimriJ/ioratOrisparflta qiiajpossit incei.dis nisi« inflammatus ipse' ad earn et 
 Kmsac(^e^"eriV8 Cic Or^ Fu-a htind difficili.^ evat ad erumpendum^ inter 
 
 Numidi Ov 2.5 '34.- 10 Bene scntlreio^rectgquefacere safL<> est ad bene beateqvem. 
 vendnm^'' Cic Fam. (5, 1. 3.-11. Ut adbella ^vsdpiemia^^ GallOrnm a/oc^rac promptus 
 eS animus sic inollh Ac minimeia resistens dd calamitates perferendas mens fram est. 
 Cr " B G 3 V\ - 12. Omnes infe>di erant ad opem i,o^* ferend am nnde penculum osten- 
 del)-itnr Liv 26 46.— 13. NatflrS »w/)«««i sumus ad diliirendos homines. Lie. Le<:. 1, 
 i-V- 4 koianhTradk^redendi/m^^ fui, quod difficile est de discessui» voluntar.o" 
 sine uim spe mVi^tioni«i^ co-itSre. Cic. Att. 9, 1-3, 4.-15. Hannibal segmor ad credendum 
 K n, •; faS. i cTl^^^ 24, 14.- 1«. Atheniensium populnm famai» est celerem et su- 
 ^^^^1^:^;^^i ...eadco.and,m:^^. Liv. 45 ^^^--.n. Milites hostem tnj/^^^^^^^^ 
 rtf/ comminns-ii comerenda!^ maim^i expulC-runt loco. Liv. 2., IB.— 1«. Nome quod «a 
 cowmemm-'wdum"-'^ honeMius^\ id [non] ad prfandum multo vidgn debet^^^?»^; .' Cic^ 
 Div Ca'c 20 65 — 19. Rex in^^7?w habere voluit copias «rf o;)^m propinquis/frm</arn 
 civitatibns sui-". Liv. 36, 16.— 20 L. Paullus eloquentem ad insligandam'^* multitudmem 
 inimlciim in cat-tris habebat, Liv. 45, 37. 
 
 § 539. Tbe preposition in with the accusative of gerun- 
 dives (never gerunds) always combines two meanings, 1) one 
 of the local or figurative relations expressed by in with the 
 accusative of nouns (§ 450, R. 69 ; § 451, K 70. 71) ; 2) the idea 
 of an aim, purpose, or tendency. 
 
 Jn aanim Sequandnmi iwpvlandvm miffi, to be sent to the tenitoty of the Sequani in 
 
 order to plunder it (to be sent to plunder the territory of the bequaui). 
 
 Eefn 241 The construction of the prepositional crerundive after in with the accusative, 
 wl'iei a real purpose is expressed by it. l^ears a stron- analogy to the construction of the 
 PArTicimA . -^^^^^^^ (H. 1T6 foil.). What in this latter construction is the transitive 
 
 ob S of Jhe^pruuipal predicate, is in the prepositional ^'^"-""dive a prepo>ntional object 
 w I h in The <u-rundive performs in both conslructions exactly tlie same office, m- 
 diea in- tin purpose which attaches to the object of the Pnncipal verb. The same 
 
 re-n nt neauini is often contained in the -erundive after ad, as: Gesar RntSnos ad 
 ^MvZ-innn populaado. mitt.t (inst. of ad JinU w-Unf ad popula7idos fj),C^l^^ B ^ 
 7 U In all the«»e constructions the ffovernimr noun of the gerundive is at the same 
 tiim-'a : bsta ive o cc of the prindpal predicate, so that two diflferent constructions 
 (IKit of an ordinary object, and that of a reversed phrase as object) are blended 
 together. 
 
 Rem 242 A ^erundial in the accusative after in is especially used 1) to give to the 
 nrecliaue botha h,cal, and a fiirurative sense, the local sense referring to the noun, the 
 S^niriHveVen^^ the -erundial. Ex. 1-6. 17. 18. It is 2) employed in a merely fig- 
 S;aiv4 sense (»M^ with verbs which originally have a local ".eaning o 
 
 i8tin-ni«h it from a -erundial after ad in a similar manner as m and ad wnth sub- 
 stanthx obicct' are di-tin-uished (^ 4.50. 451 , R. 41 ). Ex. 12-16. 19. This may be especially 
 seen 1 thSstruction f he verbs fmn.ferre (to transfer to\ and oon/./j^ (to apply to 
 ?ot"irn to). These verbs are construed with m and a gemndive ^::'^^ § 11?! <^?«\»«^^^3^^ 
 when the relation may be conceived as a metaphor of ri..^cE (Ex 7. 9. 1»), but with a<f 
 when th's is not the case (Ex. 8. 11), or when the gerundial is a neuter verb, only a gerun- 
 dive phrase being allowed after i/i requiring an accusative, bee hx. lu. 
 
 1. Marcius in barbaros''^ sub jus dicionemqu c^s redigendos missus est. Liv. 28, 21 .— 
 
 il._<. to iatch.- * so.- 6 i,tcaidere. to fire, to kindle.- « unless - '.^eing inflamed him^ 
 self -8 ad earn acce-^serit, he approaches it.- ^ ervrnpere, to break forth.- i» to have 
 go d principlS We comprise both co-ordinate subject-infinitives in one ^^^.^TZ^^ni' 
 ?to act on correct principles'. The Latin lancruage cannot reach here the Eng ish preci- 
 4on - " life.- 12 to take up.- i» ac minims remfms ... est, and has no (re^i=^t mg) 
 nowerof-" eo...vnde. in that direction where.- i^ todepart-i« departure.-" yolun- 
 Eirv -^ 18 return- i« fama est, it is universally believed.- 2° for enterprises.- 'i corn- 
 minus conmemanui to fight hand by hand'- « to mention.- '^3 The comparative 
 ESS reh^-antly i^sed instead of a positive, as if the tNvo clauses were members 
 2?Tcomp'risoz1, wlJch according to § 3(|, vvould require ,^oth adject.v^s toj^e^n the 
 "omparative degree.- 2* to stir up.— -» See § 45.i. R. 76.— 26 § 4a4. ,Sw6jWcS au^ionemque 
 redigere, is a regular formula, expressing complete subjugation. 
 
194 
 
 EEVERSED PHRASES. 
 
 S H 10. The proposition in ^vitl. a gevun.lial Aiu.AT.vr. (ger- 
 „nd or .^erunaiv^.), i« "''<'<1 1) »^ ^'>^' <>''■'''''' of verbs w.th ong.n- 
 ally loc^l meaning., which re.p.iro prepositional oluoct. w.th ». 
 an<l the ablative, as esse,versCa-i,s!twn esse (to be situated) co^- 
 locare (? 453, 11. 74) ; 2) ,as the objeet of A.uncnvEs, or the .at n- 
 bute ofxouNS restricted or determined in their meanings by the 
 .erundial, as tardus, celc; dlffnltas ; Z) to de.u.tc ixdepend- 
 KNT actions conceived as coincident with the prmc.pal predi- 
 cate beincr equivalent to a clause witli Mi'e or when. 
 
 -^*}u>c lantiim bo„U h. ;,MHftt a mMu-m a. ^'V'';-.^.;^;;^;:- "'about.- i« from his inili- 
 tarv dutifs.— -° to watcli over, //t l^ 1i<;h> ponuuu} " i«'.' »,< , ,.. ....!, ..tmntisp^ 
 
 TREPOSITIONAL GERUNDIALS. 
 
 195 
 
 fni««c aeqnlor Q. Mncins was believed to bave been rather slow in adminuiering jy>Jhli^ 
 a1fair<i C'c i>om. M. 91.— In comHio cmiiendo oinneni Galliam reppiciamus, in takutg 
 are^olvtion (i. e.. while, or wheu we take a resolution) let us consider the whole of 
 Gaul. Cffis. B. G. 7, 77. 
 
 1 Omni-» cogitatioi aut in consilils camendh^ de rebu? honeati?» et pertinentibus* ad 
 bcn'e bt-aieouo viv.-ndufn. aut in studii?- .scientia;* coi,'niti()uisque« versatvr'' . Cic. Off. 
 10-'* Cii Plantius totam euam quait»t1Irani8 in me suntentando^ et com-ervando collo- 
 cr7r?7i»~Cic P K. S. 14. .35.— 3. Si respublica «tetip?et»i, «n agendo plus quam in 
 scribe/ido operse poncrCn usis. cic. Off. 2, 1.— 4. Britanni disper^^o^i» noptroi» niiliteP tn 
 viffendo^*' ocaypa/os nubito adorti Mint. (\pp. B. G. 4. :^2.— 5. Cnrius quum iardvs in 
 cor/ifaudo turn in imtrvendo^^ disnpatvs fuit. Cic. Brut. 59. 216.- 6. TePtinionium 
 dicii»9 natio minime in iei<iim(miis di/^endis religidsa^\ Cic. Flacc. 10. 23.-7. Per^eve- 
 rmtia in oinni «'I'liere militia»"^. ma.xiuK; tamen in obnidendis urbibns nece^sarta et«t. 
 Liv o «) 9 — 8. Omnia ilia, dignitas in ."ententiis dicendl^^^, libertas in repvblicd cape/s- 
 fie/)dd'^''> ea tota sublilta sunt. Cic. Fam. 1. 8, S.— 9. Non ilhv eunt polas virtfites jmpera- 
 toria^^j quae vuI<^o cxistimantur, labor in nejrotiif'. indvstria in agendo, cderttas in conn- 
 ciemln connlium'''^ injwocidendo. Cic. Le-,'. Man. 11. 29.- 10. Legati in cornmemoranda-^ 
 civitjlti- (<Uie)m/ami^/7/'«. exscxcentis ad trlj* PenatOre? sese redactos'-^* esse dixerunt. 
 C-r>« B (} 2 28 — 11 Maris pericula tiniGre ccepi i/i tantd pecunid reqiam Italiam tra- 
 jinendd'^'ei victrn-e"-^ exercHu trawportaudo'^-' . Liv. 45. 41.- 12. LegSti inpetenda'^^ pace 
 eiu^ rei culpum^» in multitudin.-m contulCruntao. Cics. B. G. 4. 27.- 13. Manns in de- 
 rnonstrandis^^ locis^- acpersdni^^^ advtrbiOrum^* atque pronominums^ obtment3« vicem. 
 Quint. 11. 3, 87. 
 
 § 541. Tlie gcrundial ablative after ab is used as the object 
 of verbs denoting separation, and of verbs denoting origin 
 
 (§ 441, R. 4S). 
 Hern 243 To the verbs admitting thif» construction belong a^fiinere, to abstain from, 
 
 Liv. 39,25"; 2.22: deferrete ami ab'^ferrere, to deter, Liv. lO-.H ; 2:?' 1 : Cic Or. 1; Fm. 
 
 5 IS • dixcfdere (Ex. 3) ; decedere, Cic. Cicc. 2. 5 ; r^cedere. Cic. Off. 1,44 ; refugere, Cic. 
 
 Or 2' 3- e.rdudere, Cic. Ac. 2. 17. 53 : absfrohere, Liv. 26, 12; Cic. Seu.b-.rtiidicare to 
 
 dol'vnd from Liv. 26. 13 ; abhorrere. Liv. 4, 6, 7 : avejtere (Ex. 5) ; arocare, Cic. ben. 5, 15 ; 
 
 amortre, Cic. Pr. Cons. 1, 2 ; onri, to ori-inate in (Ex. G). mpi.^se{Ex. 7). as _ 
 deferrere /losn.'^ a pers^f/'/endo. to datev the enemy from pursuing; abstinere a pr(^da 
 fanendd^xo abstain horn making booty; avocdri a voluptatibus perfruejidis, to be 
 called away from the enjoyment of pleasures. 
 Ob*» To the verbs of origin on which gerundials after ab may depend, belong those 
 
 denotin"- the derivation of words from Latin verbs, as : a scribe n do fit (is derived) sanptor 
 
 (-ee H Tm4 4) Karelv <'eriindials after ab are used as attributes of nouns derived 
 
 from the verbs mentioned above, as: Arocatio a cogifandd moledid, & ca.iVmg a.way (of 
 
 the mind) from pcmderiug on unpleasant events. Cic. Tusc. 3, 15. 
 
 1 Lc'Mlti deterruervnt suos ab auxilio circumsessa?^' \nh\ferendo. Liv. 40. 47.— 2. Ab 
 horum ~a;fafiby-\ digjnfafib>t<qi/€, et ho/m^ibm violn7)di<i abf^tinebdhir. lb. 5. 25, -3.- 3. In 
 hoc uno «unt^e ceteras» ut homo numquam a se ip.^o in>^tituendo^° contemplandoque dis- 
 cedat*^ Cic Rep 2 42 — 4. Tn litteris scripsit Hannibal, prolectiOnem-»^ Kuam ab^trac- 
 ^w;'am*3 ad defendendam Romam ab oppuqnandd Capua exercitus RomSiios. Liv. 26. 
 7—5 Seleucus facile Philippuin ab auHlio Rom5nis/.?mvcfoad sua tuenda are?-{et**. lb. 
 36 7— 6 yl .SVf7?//*?'o potissimumo/V)'/^;?ff»r/obfllumPunicum secundum or«iA««'.s^. lb 
 26' 43— 7 Discordia inter plebem ac patres"exorta4«,a^^cfwi>;ica/irfo*T qua3stOrum«? 
 
 1 Thinking. 
 • knowledLre 
 
 - 2 to take resolutions.— » moral subjects.— •* pertaining.— » science.— 
 - Kui,»i.-^ -^- — 7 consists in.— » qua^storship.— » to sustain.— i» coUocare tn, toappiyto 
 (literally to place in).— " to last.— »2 operamponere in, to devote one's labor to.— i!| dis- 
 persed — ^*tnefere. to cut grain.— 1» dixsipdtusin infttrucndo, prolix in his compositions. 
 -- »« to o-ive evidence (a passive construction must be given to the Emrlish sentence). - 
 IT scrupulous — 18 in military operations of all kinds.— i^ senfenfias dicere. to state the 
 reasons of one's votes in the senate, (to express one's opinions.)— •^^rempvblicamcapcj- 
 sere. to apply for public office.- 21 imperatorial.- 22 judsrment.- " to stare.— 24 rg^/t- 
 mre to reduce — 25 to ship over.— 2« victorious,— 27 to convey.— 28 to sue for.— 29 the 
 responsibility for.— 3° to lav on.— si to point at.— 32 localities.— ^^ persdna, person.— 
 »« adverbium adverb.- 3» pronbmen, pronoun.— 3« 7nrem obfiner^. to take or supply the 
 place — 37 t )'bcsi.'<'e.— 3« e.<tse, to be contained.— 3» all other things.— ■»<> to instruct.— 
 *i to come back from, to leave off. — ^-^ march.— *^ abslrabcre, to abstract, take away 
 from.— ** to avert.— « patricians.— «« exorlri = Of'iri.-*'' to double.— *« a quastor. 
 
196 
 
 BEYEESED PHRASES. 
 
 nvvyn-o ro'pfa^ est. lb. 4, A\ 3.- 8. Consnlcs appdUlti'^ mint a considendo, non a reg- 
 nando ;U(hil' dominando. Cic. in Au;;. Civ. D. 5, 12. i • r 
 
 §•!!•>. Geruiidials after Je are used, both as objects ot 
 verbs, uiul attributes ot nouns, to denote the subject-matter 
 of actions, especially of those expressed by verbs of thinking, 
 sayin<>", writini^, and bv nouns of similar import (§ 445), as: 
 
 \,M.-Lex de tribanus pUbia rejiciendiii, ix law on the ro-clcctiou ol iiibiiius oi im> 
 
 S 244 Iloncotlie -crnndial with r/Hs also used to oxnros!» the PMhiect-mattcr of 
 transact iot v." >f s Hfes, rni..io..., aud .i.nil.r acts, as Pndiad' oc-ru,,a.dop>.t.< ere- 
 lr;ra;V; th.rVworo frequent rt.-ht. ai.out (for) t»- !';>-;;-;•!;':> .^-.^'-^^^^.^ 
 Le-atos dP pace facie ml a miffere, to send vmovfjar '»'^. "'f,h" ,-, ' ' f,^^" ' itlu U inv 
 the -en.ndial is very frequently used in h.-adin-s of buoks ^ ' ^ h f.^ T n V V- //^ 
 p-ernini: word, as: /A' Mor/e Of^^mn.ndaO I>;'^Pi;"\-,/. ;;\ll,/^iV^ ^' 
 
 llomine Libera Exhibendo. On I'roducin- the Body ol a tiec Man (lit. Di.i,. 4.J, ..»). 
 1. De inferend<V injuria satis .lictiun c;t. Cic, Off 1 8 - 2. VicUd>n.nu« vos ^^^^^^^ 
 
 mt.s r^/^C'/m/i so ( in re ia'pe quai.It:ii«, MiflVa-ia in n.a-.stnltu man. an.h.i^ de reo 
 fi.liamdA^ in Uv"( hu tro-ati^rMie''' scisceluhV", elam an pala.n'-'t fyrre--' "Hdn.s e.>et 
 lb Le- 3 i5-«i''Ke.nduseai..usa I'.pnis </.; captlris romuiutamhs\^nomnmm\^^n^^ 
 est. irroff 1, Ik-TrLe-ati ad Verciu-etorigem de pact et anuciUa^^ concUiauda-^ 
 missis' ' 1 55. B. G. 7, 55. ^ 
 
 § 5i:i. A crerund or gerundive after ob is especially used 
 of actions which the taker of a bribe is expected to perform 
 in consideration of the bribe, as: . . . ,. 
 
 Pecnniam ob dicmdmn te.^^fimonium acciperc, to take money in order to give testimony 
 (j'or f/uin/j one's testimony). 
 
 Bern 245. Aside from this specific mefmin.?, ob sometimes, but rarely, 
 occurs with a gennidial deuolini,- the ulterior piu-pose ot an act, wUh a 
 force simihir to\ul (Ex. G-9). .-on' 
 
 Or^ Thenhrase imvniamob rem faeiendam accipere v.-{\f^ frcqnontly nscd in Miiia s 
 cr^nu; JuiSanon^.!. Cor^u^l^a^^.La in the laws of Augustus (^,7- -/j; ;^^ ^ ^^en 
 nrenrs in C'icero and verv frequently in the Jurists (Ex. 1. 2.3). I he pnia«e is "«'^i"» 
 ^tshed tV(.m ' ac^' ?em faclen.lam pecuniaui accipeie', which means • to accept money ^o 
 that the t/ionei/ is to be applied to some purpoee . 
 
 1 1 e.rc'CorneruTde falsis2» tencntur qui ob inMruendis lites'^-' pocuniara accepCrnnt 
 
 Ui.; Di- 48 10 -2. Si quiso^ ttsfimoninm dicendum vel non dictnd'onp.^cmxuun 
 
 ac^J^pelTt, pTena i:>^M. Corndi^e afficitur. Marc. Dig. 4S, 10, 1.-3. Lege Julia repetnu- 
 
 1 The na^^sive form of the verb is used on account of its connection with a ir'^'nindive, 
 whiTl^al^'v;4 iVin the passive voice, (p. 104 80.).- « The word consu lis ^ J'^ved fron . 
 
 s t<i intifct — * to impose.— » to accept.- • ler, a condition.- ^ ^ .U», K. 1.— Ai)i. 
 7l>,ol-" mnt doesVot^>elon., to scnpfa, holui, nsed -^--^^-^j^^^lf^^^l r''' ab.m't he 
 to be e'ctant.- »o literallv : 'ab.mt tlie carrying on of f.ieiuUhi» , «• f-; ..«J''^"'^ ^Il^ 
 T^nt.ml rirl ts and duties of friends'.- " proiclarisnme script t hbrt. bee ^ 4->n,ll. 'i-.,^\e 
 S>nu tran- itnart"^^^ Wind, but >nake the adverb (/>rrt<-/«m>t/«^) the attribute 
 
 o? T. noun (516?" 1 .1 Latin there, is a diflerence ^^^\r^Y'^^^''^lS'Ji^W 'n.Z 
 nowned book) and pr^edarissime scripttc^ ld>^r (an e.Kcellent ^'^''Vkr/l ,"^ ' « ,o dVi 
 nerof talk - i» to suppress, to stop.- i* ;M^mi'/5, guarman.- '^V.*^"-"-^b~j* ^" "^V"' 
 Jus, L n hist, of rogando.- ^" to p.ss sentence on.- i» P/.^'P^j^^^^'^^^aT., !4 • mi '^^^ - 
 r>««^ rp*.)liitioiis on — '^1 uubliclv.— •" sufrar/ta Jerre. to poll votes.— '» to exc.tian c. 
 ?4 mnUv - '^ makhv' a treity ot^-.-^» on' orgery.- " insfr><ere lites^six^ a technical term 
 deSin^' the MnstUuti^ig o^ 
 rators would appear as a witness, and the other as the complamaat. 
 
 PREPOSITIONAL GERUNDIALS. 
 
 197 
 
 d.rum tenstur qui. qnum aliqn.m potest^temt M^^^^^^ 
 
 nmjudicandumdecermndumve^accep^nt..yi^^^^^^ U_g 4». l\ ^^ J-^)^,.^^^^^^^\^ ^.j ^ 
 objus dicmdnm^ a Ven-e acceptas. Ci,^-,,),,^'^, ^;^?^^^ 
 
 remrnllcand'im pecuniam ^^^'P^'Ji' ^"i^'f''^' l^^l}} ^^^^^ im.nortali- 
 
 absdi>ndum<^ acceperis. condenimlre. I'^-,^- ^g-^-. -J„ V^^^^^ 1 H - 7. Consul 
 
 bus ob^ M'iren.e can.;/aj.m u^^^^^^^^^ f^^'x^ manu- venta- 
 
 prinio med.ocna» i^erebat «^';^' "Jf^i^if "^I ,,on hostlli animo sed ob reyu'^m tutan- 
 ;;;;;;; anna cc^l^^^^fnlTol:!'^- -^^^ ^^^^''^"^ plebSjoho- 
 
 miuii'-' in adopiiOnemi3 se dedit. Suet. Tib. -2. ^ . ^ 
 
 § 544. The prepositions ex (of, from), j^ro (for), and inter 
 (durinir, § 432, K. 2G) rarely occur with gerundials, and have 
 SDCcific meanin^js in this connection. 
 
 also used 1) ^^^'^^;^S^'^^xJ^^^(E^. ?.r, 2 of the derivation oi words 
 /arj.m/(/, to derive plea-urrlrmnth)^^ ^^^ ^,^^^^^ of taking away 
 
 from verbi», like ab (^^: ^^; "«^-^ ^IJ^^/oj^i -inHe noun, as: Tollendum a^iex rebus 
 
 'T^'if ■>« »i.Htn.n'ives is («re,0 u-ed in the meaning ' in behalf of, • instead 
 Of' or' 'as an equivalent of (§ 448). See Ex. 5. b. .. 
 
 _ 2. P^rna divTnaeonstat 6X r^.ra/^rf^v/* n yr /^^ ^ ^^ providendo 
 
 Leg. -2, 17- :5. Smn.na volupms f^^'l^f'^/^^^fJ^, ^j^^^, ^i,J;' \^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ss!pS^;;^-^^^^^^^ 
 
 . ^....a. was technically called tb. P-- of^^ blgl^a^^ratc. ^^ 
 
 power being des'gnat.-d by |.'«/>^' \' - * ^^* I jm&T or rem judicare.- « to acquit. 
 Vi do not "HM.tio...-.5^'/.^rf^c-e;-^ the sanie as^^^^^^^^^ ^^^ .^^ 
 
 _7 o^ ^n-s.^<7^.//. f ';".^;f "';Vj,^^^"'i\tes no? sav «i o^' ; kri;/m, because the obtain in ^ 
 that he be made a consul. Cicero does ""\^ '47,j^.,.i,,r purpose of his prayer, which 
 of Murena's consulship was not the next but J^e uituur i ^^ ^nediwrm genre, 
 wa. a general invocation " ,di^ine b e>s ng.- ,^ f;; ^iV^;",,,^,^ = to attack; supply 
 not to be very active.- i» = 1^^^;:"'"*^"«; . , __ ,., «mnn of nlebeian descent.- ^" had 
 
 -^prceddn — „, ,• n„ 
 
 ♦which he took'.— ^2 to dissemble 
 
198 
 
 REYERSED PHRASES. 
 
 2. Prepositlo7is xcith imriiclpial x^hrascs. 
 § 543. Reversed participial phrases may be connected with 
 their croverning words by means of the prepositions ante., jpost., 
 ah, ad, oh, propter, ^yro, ex, <Je, inter and in (with tlie ablative), 
 as : 
 
 Ante vrbem cmdifntn, before tlie buiUTniir of the city a.iv. Pncf.); sexenniopost V^os 
 
 ca/)tos, i?ix years after the fall (the takiu;,') "f Veji, Cic. Div. 1, 44. 
 
 ]i£m 249. Reversed pnrticipial phrases after prepositions, lilvC abliitivos 
 
 absolute, must bo considered, primarily, as predicative rmiASES of 
 
 CLAUSES, the iutroduciuiT prepositions havin^j? the force of correspondin,i? 
 
 conjunctions. Hence they must, very frequently, be rendered by clauses, 
 
 especially when the predicate-partici|)les have; adjuncts, either in the iorm 
 
 of objects or completiuir i)re(rK;ates, as Post ilechinUos consules Alhinum et 
 
 Pisdnem, after Alblnus and Piso had been declared consuls, Liv. 40, 38. 
 
 Prepositional participial phrases, like the ablatives absolute, may take 
 
 predicate nouns or adjectives, in lieu of a verb, in which instance the 
 
 participle of the copula must be supplied, the same as with predicate- 
 
 abhitives, as : xiiite me cont^ulfnn, before my considship (before I was coii- 
 
 sid). See Ex. 3. 4. 11. 12.— Even impersonal participles are thus used, 
 
 especially in silver Eatinitv, analo^rous to the gerund absolute, and to the 
 
 imiiersonal ablatives abs()liite, as Verba ante cxpectatiDii cmlentia, words 
 
 closing up sooner than expected. Sen. Ep. 114. (Virg. Geo. 3, 348; Ov. 
 
 Met. 4, 700). See K. lUO, and p. 191), ons. 3. 4. 
 
 Rem. 250. When English prepositional expressions are employed in 
 rendering this kind of phrases, the translation is made the same as in 
 the analogous case of the ablatives absolute or prepositional gerundials, 
 the partinple being rendered by a verbal noun (either in ing or otherwise 
 formed), or by participles absolute. The Latin prepositions are gener- 
 ally exi)ressed by their ordinary English equivalents, as 
 Post nrbem captam. after the capture (takini?) of the city, or after takini: the city.— 
 De Mesxcne receptil, al)out the recapture (retiikhx^) of Mes^^ene, o/- about retakini; .Me?- 
 seue.— Propter i)t(Vain pac-m, oii account ol the proposal i,proposiug) ol peace, or ou 
 account of proposing; tlic peace. 
 
 Obs. 1. Participial phrase^* after /)0>'>'/' arc employed: Din place of ablatives absolute, 
 resolved' by after (rarely by niiice), as: I'o.s( il/a.-^ datas litlfras Strata ed summa contoi- 
 tio de do/no, after the delivery of those papers followed (the delivery of tliose papers 
 was followed by) an anj;ry discussion about my house, Cic. Att. 4. 2. 2. liut ^'enera y 
 there is a slii,'ht dillerence iu the two constructions, the i)repositional lorni usually 
 denolin-'- events whithare in no connection with those indicated by the i)rincipal ])redic- 
 ate while the ablatives al)s()lute are always in a lo^rjcal conned ion with the ^n.vernint; 
 sentence. (Compare the analo<,'ous ditlereuce between />oj(/(/Ma//t with u pluperlect, and 
 msYt/wrt/n witii a perfect. § :i48.) . , . , , r* ». /r^ o\ 
 
 2 l'»»e-e phrases after ;>o.s'/; are also used a;» equivalents of phrasen after ao (Obs. "2) 
 with the for^e of the Kn<,'iish 'erer since'' wiih a verbal noun. e«^pecially in the e.\pn's- 
 «■ion ■ post, homines naton ' which means • ever since the exi^-tence of the human race. Ex. 
 9, 10. 1'5. C\)inpare the similar meaninj,' oi potstfjuam, p. «Ii4. 
 
 t^^^ In modern l.atinitv. ]K)st as well as ante is employed in chronology to denote 
 
 the niiml)er of years, as dates : Post Christ u/n vatum. after the birti» of Christ. The 
 
 ancients thus used ab ^Ubs. 2) and ante, more Tixvii\y post (Cic. Fam. 9, 21). 
 
 Obs 2 A reversed pirticipial phrase after «6 is used : 1) to denote an action or event 
 
 niarkin<'' the bkoinning ol a I'kkioo, beim,' rendered hy from. The knd of such a 
 
 period Uo or till) is expressed by ad with a participial phrase, as : lleKiultum Hoime a^ 
 
 conditu urbe ad liberatam annos ducentos quadragiuta quatuor, kings rei-ned ni Jtomo 
 
 PREPOSITIONAL PABTICIPLES. 
 
 199 
 
 a 
 
 ira 
 
 from the hnildin'r of the city to (until) its independence (literally 'to the freed one J). 
 Sd ol- ^44 viars.-It is 2.- employed for computation in chronologv (so many ye. 
 comtinrjfrom). In this conneclion it is rendeied by after ovjrom. Lx. 14 i.. lb. 
 
 On« \ Ob and pronto r wUh pnrticipial phrases denote the cause of an acUon (like 
 ^«"'■•11 d rmni But he specilie ottice of ob (similar to that of o/j ^vitli gerundials 
 f?/o rel)i-Uem t e par ciple a- an kqiivalknt, in consideration <.f whieh, the principal 
 ac i" n as'been pef formei, as Pare pecuniam ob rem factum to ^ne ^'^J^ ^^^^^ 
 tion of an acti<.n i)errornied, while dare pecmtnmobrernjacundam means to j^ne a 
 brd'f^ i" '-onsideration of an action to be performed . bee Ex. 1 <-^^- .^^^,.„. cpp ex 
 
 Propter is not uscmI of • equivalents', but corresponds to a cl="i^«.;v th 6^^^^^^^^^ 
 Ol •>•) After nronter ininersonal nartic p es are used by Livy : Ld)ris inbyUiins proprei 
 .^y,i./L /. r«;wJSSi;^W^i., «ft^er the Sibylline book, had been inspected be- 
 cause it ha.l freci.iently rained stones (on account of frequent stoue-showers). Liy. 29, 10. 
 
 Or* 4 Pro Willi a participial phrase occurs 1) with an impersonal participle (= as or 
 «/ n: as: Considiun'i timofe p?rterritum quod non v disset irrv v^^o ^«""""f^^^V^^^ 
 Con'iditis. from fear, had reported a. .... '? 'fV''^ tV".? -1 1n"t " phrase 5^0 r^ 
 
 ilw situition of aflairs. Cic. Alt. 14, 6. See lb. «, 8. t-x. ~4. 
 
 rac-em esse ju.licc» non </, armi- l«J''^^'^f"\X^°,t^^^^^^ of »rms and.ervl- 
 
 ,. PeJ,„,n. in Ca.nmun, a maj,.;;;;ns no.U^^^^ Z!^Z.^^rS^.i>^ 
 
 pania! cura unit. I.n.J''.i».— '. '<''. ''■,'„, ^,..,„^\y.t „ha (tlu second of Im mine) 
 
 ' ' ' ■ ■ Mil stead of instqmter ges- 
 
 Philippo 
 
 -rji^c^areinaVpremov in ^Z^-?^' ^^/^f '^^^'i^ ust he ^e^c^st. Mo d-istin.uish 
 serat (widch is unusual {''-^^'//^^^^^ f \*X/ verv^m^^^^ L nity. if literally rendered.- 
 cne's self as a tribune', which woiml malvc noj om J.u „raer to atone for 
 
 ,„eV self as a tribune', ^^'"^^ '^^^^^''^';:^,^^^ ^^^^i^n order to atone Jbr 
 Upnmnrnniuin,^siiW^v-^-.~lsedev<mre io^ „^1 ^^^ ^^^ 
 
 something by one's death).- « res ^J^=!:,^{^'Y^f^T^^^ his cd^e).- « the 
 
 tribunes lor quashing an indictment O'}''^,'^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 f,>un.lation (e>tablish.nent) o -nr religimi (by Ro^^ a cotitempUious exyfression for 
 
 Why can qmbus consuUbas not be ^i^.Vu^^^^N'-^ia «,\ «hn^ive eoithet. eauivalent to our 
 
 ' man', of the 
 
 nasti/ or dirttj. 
 
 ^m\^nro.nt''samrS'e rrou? ."si'SSl"--" an abusive epithet, equivalent to our 
 
200 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 — 15. Abincmso^ Capifolio hic est vicesimus annus. Sail. Cat. 47.— 16. Trcs_et poxa- 
 pinta aiuii sunt a priino Piinico a^/ f^ecundnm l/eUuin finitum. Liv. 31,1. — 17. Ei ob 
 ^iim]iToi\\^ndi'^ i:\m\\A levatamignoinlnhirn nt oviin^s* nrbcm intrilret conccpsum e>*t. 
 II). 4, 42.— 18. Soiifttus dccrCvit. ui quanta dona App. Claudio of) dtvictuin Anfiochum 
 roirem data ad omnia pulvinaria* es*sent. tanta privture^ ad honOrt-ni deOruni imnior- 
 talium cui-nrent danda. Ih. 25, Hi.— V.). Appilret, impi^ratOreni dis «rratias aijentem ob 
 rempxbliaim hme gea'am^ redlrc lb. 45, 39.— 20. C. Scniproniu;* Fiilvium ob e.rer- 
 cituin in Apuliil «mks7//M in C()nti()nil)us« vexjlhat. lb. 26, 2.— 21. Hand lu'tiavrrim', 
 propter non niniis^ bincCre iteCitam ant exix't-tntain nupcr par'-m, suspt'clani» esse 
 vobis Punicani fidom. lb. 30, 30.— 22. Dcoeniviri libros ISibyllTnos in.-^piccTf»" jussi 
 ^nni, propter territos homines novis jirodiiriis. II). 22, 30.- 2:i. Hoc non placuit patrl- 
 bus, ni' Marciiin id ipsum" quod consiiltatiOni»^ rcliquerant. pro pniji/tiirdto^^ ferrety 
 lb. 2«), 2 — 21. Mulieres nostra?, in (luibus est tua soior, in pnediisi* illis pro re natd 
 non incommode possunt esse. Cic. Att. 7. 14. 
 
 25. Invidiam»* quje ex contlnudto^^ iUo honored'' imi)onderet'* a te levi\tam" putJlbo. 
 Liv. 3. 21.— 26. Ma<;na iilacommunitas'^o est qujeconficitur^i ex henrficiis ultroet cilro]'* 
 ddtU acrepflsqve. Cic. OtF. 1, 17.— 27. Major ex ciribw amissifi dolor qnam hetitla fusis''*^ 
 hostibusfiiit. Liv. 4, 17. — 28. Apud itomilnos noa mtestitia^i Xdu\n\n tx fnale / e gestd, fed 
 pavor''^^ etiam erat, ne extemplo'^* castra hostis ai;urcderCtur. Ii>. 42. (»0.— 2*). Ach;ei de 
 Messenei'eceptdcomponll'^cpie'^'' il)i r^6»<.<jexposuCrunt-". lb. 40.20. — 30. ////<^/*]^aviuium** 
 et Albam Lon<;:am deduct(uncoloniainir\)i,\utix fere intorfuCre^" anni. lb. 1, 3,4. 
 
 » Render by 'contlaKration '.— ^ Clndes Sempro/iidna (see P. 1, p.a*)0, A'. 1). tlie defeat 
 of Sempronius.- ^by ovation.- * omnia pulvinaria (all cushions) means ilie teast of 
 the larjj^cr lccti>tternia. in which cushions» were i)repared for the ima^i's ot a// the <:od.s. 
 
 — * retnpublicani gerere is a term Wf^i^X of the administratiiMi of the ciirulc mai;i>trate8, 
 especially the consuls. Here the term is applied to the «rods, as if fh<t/ wvrti t lie real 
 administrators. Transl. : ' to irovern well the republic'.— «popular meetinu:.— ' Perf. 
 pubj. in the meanim,' of a qualified assertion ' 7 tro'/td or shall not deny".— " not qtiite. 
 
 — » suspicious.- 10 to inspect.— >» that very fact.— *'- for further deliberation.— ^^ pro 
 prcejudicdto ferret = pnejndicfltum esse existiuulret ; pne/>/dm~tre, to decide beforehand. 
 
 — i* country-places.— i* the odium.— i« to prolong'.— *^ oftice.— »» would impend, 
 would be lial)l(! to arise.— "♦ to diminish.— 20 communion.— '■^> to arise.- *- mutually 
 (literally: thither and hither).— '^^/i/ndere, to r(»ut.— "* mournini:.— -* alarm.— -«on 
 the spot.— 27 componere. to settle, to arriiijje.— 2h to report.— 2» Lavifiiujniinil Alboiti 
 Longam are accusatives of place dei)endent on dtdudain — ^" translate by ■ there were'. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 I. PRRrpiiRASTTC PAKTiciPi.E. — 1. OuF vcn'aiio is lu'illicr quick nf)r 
 smooth', but wearejilinostdfownecP by a nuiuhi'i'-' of .storms*. — 2. The 
 whole iomnU) coustitutiou {ratio) of the Senate, of the courts^ of the 
 whole republic is changed.— 3. It is written in some passai^e'' of {apud) 
 Plato, that the whole character {mos) of the LaccMhvmonians was inflamed' 
 by ea<a'niess'' for {of) victory. — 4. I do not wonder that {infin. clau.^e) 
 Scaurus [should] be broken down*-' by'" this disaster".— 5. It liappensvery 
 conveniently'"' that {quod) with his incredible boldness a remarkable" 
 stupidity" is united'\— 0. It seemed'" to every one that this whole hope 
 was destroyed {toJkre).— 7. We are very much embarrassed" in our do- 
 mestic atfairs'^— 8. When I was so much alFected [in my] heart, I began 
 to distrust'" mvself— 9. When I arrived in Italy, the meadows were al- 
 ready clothed'^" with irrass-* and flowers.— 10. Towards {mh) the end of 
 the battle the strength" of the soldiers was exhausted'-\ and their courage 
 sank''*.— IL When this happened-* to you, I was separaled-M'rom you by 
 
 etruct).— " pt-rturbjlre.— 1» res familiilris, t^in-jr.- •* dittidere.- '■'o tctjere 
 p/.— aa vis, pi,— 23 exhaurlrc.— 2« deliceru.— '-» accidere.— 2« disjun^cre. 
 
 21 herba, 
 
 EXEKCISEa 
 
 201 
 
 the sen.— 13. During four centuries" the Britons'* were subjected" to the 
 Romans, and after {ahl. <ihs.) these were driven^" out of the island, they 
 were themselves e.xpelhnP' by the Saxons'^— 13. The passage" over the 
 Alps (.4//>^.'<) was twice within'threc months obstructed^''' by snow-storms". 
 
 14 In the same 3'ear the town, which had, before, been fortified with a 
 
 rampart and a wall, was provided^" with turrets^' and castles^^— lo. Thou 
 wilt soon be stripped^" of all resources*", if thou continnest to squander*^ 
 in that way*"' thy propertv*'.— 10. Wiien the rebellious** states will have 
 been pacified*% the financial*' distress*' will be removed*** in the shortest 
 time.— 17. The life of the dead {tmrtuus) is contained {placed, ponere) in 
 the remembrance {memorla) of the living {mvus). 
 
 II. Pkiuphrastic Future. Present. — 1. Are the citizens going to 
 warrant*' to thee a safe journey through their territory" ?— 2. 1 know the 
 names of all those who are going to invest" money in that undertak- 
 ing.— 3. Sempronius is about to be absent {(ibesse) from the city for 
 {ace) three days.— 4. What soldier can be of good cheer if he is about to 
 flirht with the enemv while^'^ he is afraid of death?— 5. If you want 
 mTi" to carry** this biisiness out to the end, it will be necessary to assist 
 me with your advice and work".— 0. It is no favor^*» to give those [things] 
 which are to hurt" those that ask^" [for them].— 7. I cannot fulrtP' this 
 condition if thv favor is to benefit"" me.— 8. I do not know by what rea- 
 sons you are «roing to defend this opinion.— 0. I believe that those who 
 are going to teach" some science should"- not be ignorant" of the ele- 
 ments'"* of knowledge"^— 10. It is necessary {oportst) that thou shouldst 
 love my [own] self if we are expected to be true friends. — 11. What I am 
 expected to believe must be of a kind"" that it could iiave happened". 
 
 III. Peripiikastic Future. Past and Future Tenses. — 1. If Cyrua 
 lived thus [sic), who was never to be a private [citizen], how must thou live 
 who art to return'^'' to the people the power"** thou hast ?— 2. The consul 
 was going to cross'" as soon as" the first light'"^ [of day] would show" a 
 convenient'* crossing'*. — 3. The Roman foragers'" were led into that part 
 [of the country] where the conference" was to take place'l- 4.1 asked'** 
 the decemvir among what [persons], and how^" he was going to dis- 
 tribute" that lan(^■^— 5. Metellus was asked'*^' what he was to do on the 
 next*'* dav. — (J. Since vou were about to accuse this man in a short time 
 {brrci), you oui^hl"* to have preserved^" that most important*' witness^".— 
 
 7. It is announced''* liiat the delegates^" who were to assemble"' yesterday 
 have been suminoned"^ for {ad) the third day before the Ides of April".— 
 
 8. Ceesar was going to march"* through Uly ria"^ if (in the event that) Pom- 
 
 27S;eculum.— 2s Britannus.— 2» subjicere.— s" «jicere.— 3» expellerc— ^^Saxo.— 33 iter. 
 
 — 3* obstruere.— 35 nix.ii snow-storm.— 3« instruere.— »7 turris.— 38 castellura.— 3» nu- 
 (liXre.- -«o auxilium.— -»1 dilapidilre.— -»2 ua.- " bona.— •** seditiOsus.— ■»* pacgre — 
 «« iiummarius.— *^ diflicultas.— 4« exstinuniere.— *» pra;stare.— so plur. ot\ftnift.— »» col- 
 loijlre.— 52 by the oarticiple of tiniere. airreeinsr with ml'e^ — ^3 if £ am to.— ^4 to carry 
 out. perducere.— »5 opera.— '« beneficiuin.— ^^ noc5re.— *** petere. Those, that ask, by 
 the pariici|)le.— *9 pnesiire.— «« pn)desse.— «> to teach a science, artis prcec-pta traders. 
 
 — 62 ti,>hCM-e.— «3 i-iniis.— «4 eleimnium.— «^ littene.- «« ejusmodi nt — «' to happen, 
 fieri.— «» reddere.— «9 pote-tas.— to rransire — ^^ as soon as. i/bi.— '^'-\nx.— '3 ostendere; 
 transl. bv subjunct. pluperf., wliicli has the force of a subjunctive of the futun- perfect. 
 —74 ov)portunus.— ^s transit us.— 76 pabulAror.— '''' collociuium.- 7« to take place, esse. 
 
 — 7» qua^n-re ex — «o quemadmodnm.— »» to distribute among, parfiri with dative.— 
 »2 a2:er.— »3 to ask somebody, qiujerere exaliqm.— 8« proximus.— ^*» debCre.— ^» servjlre. 
 
 — «7 cri-avis.— «8 testis.— «y '/viii/blre. with an infin. clause.— »" I'igatus.— «^ convenlre.— 
 •a convocare.— »3 Aprllib. Translate ; Jdus AprlUs. uee § 112, C ; § 18U, 4.— »♦ proflcisci. 
 
 — «^* lllyricura. 
 
2 J EXERCISES. 
 
 pcy wonld»" cross over»' to Italy.— 9. Flaminlniis would not even have kept 
 quiel'"* it"" the eiiemv had remained*"" qniet'.— 10. Hannibal said that 
 nobody could irive a truer- advice than the one' who advised* the other 
 [to io\ that which he himself woukl have done if he were in the same 
 situation (I'KUs).— 11. This rule {imperium) seemed to the Lacedremonians 
 so {(idea) despotical {si/ptrbu.s) and worthless% that ('^0 they undoubtedly» 
 would have taken up' arms on the spot', if the fortune of the city (cintas) 
 had been as of old (trausl.: had been the old).— 12. If any of our allied cities 
 shall be {have been) about to treat'" with the enemy, it will be visited" with 
 the most serious''^ puuishment. 
 
 IV. Infinitives of the peripiiuastic future. — 1. I believe that thy 
 brother will perish if heshalF^' petsevere in this undertakin.;;".— 2. I h()i)e 
 that our republic will llourish", aud be powerful" for all time {jiL) to come". 
 
 — 3. The soldiers i)romised (poUicen) to obey Caesar implicitly'".— 4. The 
 tribunes threatened to arrest'" the consul.— 5. I hope that Seinin-onius 
 will be able (posse) to pav"" all [his] debts''.- 0. Plato beli«'ved that slates 
 {re.spnblic(i) would be liappy" only" from the moment"-' that i)hil(>s()phers 
 would rule them.— 7. Seinpronius stated"' that his brother would not 
 need''* any help — 8. Cicero said that Ilortensius would be worthy of the 
 hi'diest praise if he would be willinij: {vene) to sacrifice" his private dis- 
 llires^*' to the republic— 9. Fulvius" said that he would be willnvu-'" to 
 sutler^" the severest punishment if he would=*' ever chanu-e"' his opinion.— 
 10 Caisar said that he would now (.;V«//0 do immediately" what, other- 
 wise'*, he w«mld have been willin.ir (li. 144) to postpone" for some time. 
 
 — 11. The fellow-citizens of Tiieniistocles^'» had conceived the hope that 
 he would cmce" be a distin^^^^shed" man.— 12. Gellius says that if Cicero 
 had not been consul, the republic would have been totally" destroyed*". 
 
 — l:}. Hannibal believed that Antiochus in this way (<"^/) would have shut 
 out the enemy from the sea*', and would have made [their] tleet useless . 
 
 — 14 It was evidenl*^' that, if** the Hhodians would have been relieved 
 from this care, they would have made*' those parts*'' of the sea ixTfectly 
 s;ite.— 15. It seems {rideri) that Anicius would have accomplished*' this 
 task (negotiiim) if it had not been for his sickness*". 
 
 V. Circumlocutions of the P.vssive, and use of forem.— 1. Them- 
 istocles said to the LacedaMnoniaiis that their ambassadors could not olher- 
 
 »« Su1>i imp— 87 tl•ajic<M•(^— »'* to \<.t'o\) qwWt. gNie.^cere.— »» by nblativess abso- 
 lute — »»» e.s>r. wliich is tlropi.ed in the constriRtion.— ^ quietus.— 2 fidelis— is. 
 — 4 suadCi-e witli d;it.— 5 iiidiLjniis.— « hand duhii'.— i caperc— « cxteinplo.- » 1 ransl. : 
 If aiiv city (dr/Va-v) of (ex) our allies.— 1« la-dus lacere.— »1 atnt-rre.— 1- cnivis.— per- 
 IVct future.— »♦ coufitus.c;. us.— »» tlorere.— »« vij,'Gre.— »t in onuie tcnipus.— »no obey 
 iinulicitly. dicfo auin>^nteni esse.— »'•» in viucula conjicere.— "" solvere.— '^^ :cs a lenuni.-- 
 2J Aeatu-- — ■-- luiu demuni.— '■'*Trjinsl. : If ]tliilos<>pliL'rs would iiave coiuincnced iplxperj. 
 «wi/j) to 'rule (regen) them.— 25 § 411.— «* indi-ere.— " condonfire ali(iuid alicui.— 
 
 (condnen) the hope, lliat Themistocles etc.— «^ a i(iuan.lo,— 3« eirre_MU^.— •*« luiiaiius.— 
 4» to be destroyed, intenre.— *^ Trausl.: Would have taken {aditnert) Irom the eneiny 
 the use ot ttie sea.— *'^ inutilis.— *' apparZbnf, with jiitlnitive clause.— <* Tran^l : If 
 this care l»ad been taken (<iemere) from tlie Kliodians {Ii/iodius).-~*'> to make perlcctly 
 pafe, tiduni, prmtare.- ■•« regio, in the singular — «^ confieere.— *» Transl. : unless (nm) 
 
 he had been hindered by sickness. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 203 
 
 wise*» return than if he himself would have been sent back".— 2. The am- 
 ba sado s!^d they would counsel peace- when (....) ^^^^^^^ 
 have been delivered np''^ and the hosta^crcs would liave been i etui ned . 
 "^l lIl"c;ulrbelievJd,\hat C.sar would -^f^^^^X!^^^^^ 
 nil in< tn)ol>^ — 4 I would have kept silent", had I known uiat my 
 , i :,: wo'uM ha^e b^c.,, rejoCccK- k I ..anlly" believe" that ,he Pres- 
 i. ent^« Avill be re-elected»^".— G. Sempronius hopes to receive the votes 
 ft 1 te electoral bodies.-?. Titui'ius believes that the army will be 
 cut y 'from its] supplies-, if they stay- at this place. - 8. I hope 
 tint v^>nr own person" will be respected^ by the enemy (/)?i^^-. — 9. Am- 
 ioiVV romle^^^ the person of \he general (.f..^) should not be violated 
 
 £^r.) 1 V his [soldiers] - 10. Alcibiades would never have gone with 
 rfleK" to Sici^ if h( had known beforehand^ that he won d soon be 
 vcalled by his c t^z.-ns to defend himself^» at Athens against the charge 
 of Se.^.-ll. The consul said that Fulvius would have been killed 
 V thC soldi M-s of his own legions'» if he had led these men to deail".- 
 1 . Th accu^.l O..^ stated {proferrel that if he had «^f " f ^[^^^ 
 the city, the citizens would have been slaughtered, and the city itselt 
 sacked" and burned. . i i :. 
 
 VI. Participle of the periphrastic future.- 1. ^l^^;^"^^f ^,1^?^^"^ 
 clothes otT'* in order to throw himself •' into the nver - 2. Daiin. had 
 ar ved a the village- of ArbCla {pl.t) [which, /.^r/.] ^/^ was going 
 nikc renowned" b^ his defeat.- 3. Alexander commanded Qz/&e/'^) tha 
 8)000^^rmen''sln>uld be drafted" out of all P^ovinces^m order to 
 have at the same time {dmul) hostages and soldiers.— 4. On the nex 
 av [t e] wo most renowned- captains- of [the] two most powertu 
 I'd.ns proceeded- to battle, being about either to crown" on that day 
 the r m t Md (//i'/7/«s) brilliant achievements- or to wipe kem out 
 alio'e^l e^^^^^^^^^^^ perceived^ that the am^assado s 
 
 had'come to^^ ascertain"» the plans of the war, he commanded them to 
 ^ale- the camp fc>rtbwitl^ Umplo).-JS. These are riches more pre- 
 cious'^ than gold, [and] to- accompany- you '^'}:^J^'''^^\J^^.^ ,^^^,,^,^ 
 
 Vll. Predicate-okrundives in the PJ.^^f.f^'-lp^,^/^^^^^^^^ 
 heoducaled tor a religious" and virtuous"*' lite.— 2. I my ot stN le 
 must le b(^^^^^^^^^^^^^ tVom the ancients-.- 8. The bonds o liberality- must 
 
 peace, pans aucforem esse.— ^^ tradi-re — }JX ^: . , v,_,. u-nown — *' vix — ^* subj. 
 l.H- p^efiicate-innni.ive.- " tacSre (,dup ^,^^)^;^/;^ ,x'r ( /.;> Sm) will ie proro.Mie^i 
 pc.rf- 5« princops r^n^u.^'liciE.-;; fm ir.1. that tl c po«^^^^ rl^oncCi {referre) by 
 
 (prnrogare) to the President.- «» J/'»;'- «2 i„;i;w/X-<i with at)!.- «" commeStus G. 
 umreabDixW electora Iwdies (centuria).—/^ intercumti e \\iuinin. „, , . jjj 
 
 f.:: M manCre (by the pcriphr future)-;; l^^^ IJ- r 7;ero or^^Tth tie predicate- 
 not be violatc.l (the H^'f^^ation be.nL' cnher connecud^ ^^^^^^j^j 
 
 nninitivc).- «; classe P- hc>sci.- « 1 V-^^^^^'^^- ,„j, f;\4j yacrilegc ^sacra vioim, the 
 defend himself (m'/.<am <il'^'^'i''^'^^^^^^^^^ sui leyionani.-'^ 'm\ ^up 
 
 violated f =^7"^ .t»^"?f '•- •; ^' ^i'ii^73"dtripe e.- 'VVm^.sl. :'he too^ idetra/^ere) [his] jzar- 
 phcium tnihere.- '' 1^ "^^^'^^^'^^^s «/«m&e - '« vicus.- " nobilis.- '« youn- men, 
 ment {reslis) Worn n""^].'^od> •— ^'- (W^^f/,^' Hflns<i^^^^^ »2 dux.— «3 opnlentus.— 
 
 j>n,iores.- '« le.;ere.- «o posteru^- ; ^" :\^i^[ ^'ra b^^^^ (a n^, partus).- ^^ to wipe 
 i* procedere.- «* eumuiare.- «« ^'^^^'^ ' ^^^^^ • 89^,1 «.'der to _ «o explorare.-»i excedert 
 out altogeth<T. everfere.- 't''''}''':'^'^^^^^^^^ .anctus.- »« lio- 
 
 ^^.^^ InS'S^ - -^Ji^-- ^^^^^ '^ -^"^ ' ^"^"^ '''''''" ' """'' 
 centia.— ^ transfro.— * munitio. 
 
204 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 205 
 
 ono-ht to be dostroyod.— 5. It is necessary to abandon» the ^vholc reirion 
 toTlie barbarians.— 8. Our towns must, before all [otiier things] be pro- 
 teeted" tVoni phi"(ler\— 1). Peace oni^Hit to be made by you assoon as possi- 
 l)le — 10 The worst" torments" must be endured by the cnptives.— 11. It is 
 necessary to restrain^" ambition", but to cnconrage^^ rectitude'* and mtec- 
 i-ity» _ '12 A speaker" must not fear"' the murmurinir" ot popular assem- 
 hli;.s»« _ 1:3 W(. nuist not pass over'" [in] silence'" those most important 
 thiu«'-s concepticm-andinventioir^— 14. Theconsuls must cast lots^^ib.mt 
 rtiierrfi)i-<>vinees, whenever'* their names arc reported" by the electoral 
 bodies— 15. The arroirance of these officials" cannot be endured at all — 
 16. We cannot deny-" the good faith of these ambassadors.— 17. I do not 
 know whether this'busin(>ss ought to be ])ostponed {(Uf<rrf) or not. 
 
 VIII PuKOlCVrK-GKIlUNDS IN TIIK IMllCSKNT. — 1. A Walk OUgllt tO bC 
 
 taken after dinner^.— 2. The meeting must be adjourned.— 3. A hard bat- 
 tle was fbu-rht [which lasted] till evening.— 4. It must be very much de- 
 sired^" that there should be no further^»' delay'-''^- 5. It must be acknowl- 
 ed"-ed'' by all of you that the enemy lias fought bravely.— 0. Duties must 
 never be iop'-otteu.— 7. One must easily pardon friends.— 8. Soldiers must 
 meet'* dan<'rrs without shrinking•'^— 0. This man does not listen to 
 reason*"- 10. Nobody ought to be injured {nocPre) without cause.— 
 11. These wretches" ouirht to be spared.— 12. It is ottcn necessary to 
 speak in thecourts*" ex tempore=*",but still in {hi/) connected^ and precise 
 lau'nuK'-e*'-- 13. Bolilness and recklessness (temeritas) ought to be op- 
 posed ^jbiiam ire) rather late (sero) than never.— 14. Those that n re ac- 
 cused of treason" must either enlist in the army** or suffer death — 
 15 We should enjov*" pleasures moderate! v*\ and devote*" only so i»ii<^''» 
 time to e.Kcrcises^" of the bodv, as not to interfere"' with <nir studies o\ 
 duties'*.— 10. The character" of this man is such'* that" you must take 
 great care" lest'" you be deceived"" by him. 
 
 IX. Pjip:dic.vti<>geiiunds and geuundives ix the tast and futuue 
 Ti:nses— 1 It was necessary to buy peace from the barbarians.— 2. The 
 war ou'-'ht either not to have been undertaken»' at all, or to be conducted 
 accordim-- to (pro) the dignity" of the Roman people.— 3. Such {fjuf<niodi) 
 terms" of peace ought to have been quickly'^' accepted by the king.— 
 4 Thelloman commander had to cross a great many'" rivers and to build 
 a number ot^' l)rid"-es.— 5. A march of a hundred miles"" had to be made 
 by the consul witluu two days»".- G. It had been necessary for ^letellus 
 
 to perform^" an enormous task" ; for he had to reorganize'^ an inefhcient 
 
 we take {detrahere) nottiing ^quvl) from.- " iittera\- " nomic. . . . noque.— " offiua 
 honestatis.- " mos (;>/«/■.).- " ejusmodi.- ^^ nt. - »« lo take irrrat care, nui'mopere 
 cavire. — " ne.— «» circumvenlre. — «' piiscipcre. — «"^ «rerere. — " di-mtas». — * lex.— 
 alacer — «• plurimus — «^ aliquot — •» a mUe, niille passus».— «» two dayt*, hldnum (a 
 ace of two day?).— '<> peragere.— "^' optis.— "''^ ad difCiplTiiam revocSre.- luers». 
 
 66 
 
 epac 
 
 \V-ti 
 
 Hud almost dissolved'* army. — 7. Mithridates had been obliged to comply 
 "with" all this, and moreover'" to release" all captives without ransom'^ 
 
 — 8. Peace was granted" to the French^Mmt they had to cede"' a not 
 inconsiderable"^ part of their territory"^', and to pay an enormous tribute'"*. 
 
 — 9. All had to die who had li^'ft the camp witk Titnrius.— 10. All ofTl- 
 cers {dux) had to acknowledge {confiferi) that the most liberal"' conditions 
 had been granted to them!— ll.Tlie road was ^o {aded) narrow that"', 
 breaking the ranks"', the soldiers had to march"" in single files"". — 12. You 
 ought to have treated {tmctdre) this point"" \yith greater accuracy"'. — 
 1J3. You ought to have resisted with greater energy"'^ the unjust com- 
 mands"^ of the tyrant. — 14. If the enemy had succeeded"* in reaching 
 the town a little earlier"', Cajsar w^ould haVe been obliged to invest'" the 
 place by a tedious"' siege"".— 15. So obstinate was the battle"" that, if the 
 enemy had resisted'"" the attack till evening, our [soldiers], since the road' 
 to the water was not free^ would have been obliged to march back to^ the 
 places they had occupied the night belbre*. — It is the question' whether 
 Alexander couUr have obtained so great a glory if he had been obliged 
 to fiirht in Italy instead of in Asia. — 17. It will not be necessary lor the 
 nation (.v^^.s) of the Thracians {Thrrt.v) to fear either" Perseus, engaged" 
 in w.# with the Romans, or Perseus in peace". — 18. We shall be obliged, 
 to refute {refelkre) this opinion, before we proceed'" any farther". 
 
 X. PllEDICATE-GEItUNDS AND GERUNDIVES IX TFIE INFINITIVE. — 1. The 
 
 senate resolved {deceniere) that the king be bound to accounl'^ first of all 
 for the murder'-' of Aretaurus.— 2. The daughters of the king wrote that 
 they had to endure'* at that place all the evils of exile. — 3. Domitius Cor- 
 bulo said that the enemy ought to be defeated by the spade" and the pick- 
 axe'^ — 4. Many Laceihemonians were of the o\)\n\in\{exi)iiiindre) that 
 Athens ought t() be radically {ftinditus) destroyed and to be wiped" out 
 from the earth'". — 5. The senate resolved {censere) that the consuls, with- 
 out any delay'", should depart*" for their provinces.— 6. It seemed {vide- 
 bdtur) to many that the siege of Capua ought to be raised'-", and that the 
 enemy ought to be met" at {<id) the gates of the city of Home. — 7. Han- 
 nibal said that if Autiochus had followed his council, the Romans would 
 have had to fight a great deal" nearer lo the river Tiber.— 8. I think 
 that this war ought not to have been commenced'-* at all. — 9. I believe 
 that it will i^cnm\breci tempore) be necessary to repeal this law. 
 
 XI. PAiiTiciPiAL-GEHUNDiyE.— 1. Nature assigned-' to woman (plur.) 
 the household-gods'^ lo guard*'.— 2. The ediles-"gaye on contract the house 
 of the traitor"^" lo be torn down^" within two days.— 3. I am going lb 
 hand over^' the repub lic to Muncna for upholding^^ and defending it. — 
 
 74 Dissoiatus. — ■'6 t() comply wiUi t?oinetlnn<r,/tfCc/-^ aliquid. — '* praitt-rea. — '''^ libe- 
 rjiic — ^» preiiiiin.— ''^ concedere.— *>» Gallii!?.— "» cedere with al)l.— «- aliquantiit^.— 
 »> piur. oiJinU.— «* trit>atum.— «a -uquus.— «« ut.— «^ Trau-l. : after tlie ranks (agmen, 
 in the sinj,'.) had been i)r()keu (yiolvere). — '^'* incadere.—^^ siti'juli, aL^reein^' with ' i*olUiers\ 
 — «0 l()cu5i.— "i dilii^entia.— *'^ animus.— »3 iniperiuni.— «* Trausl. : If it had been 
 done Hiat ('//) ilie enemy rejched (pfrcmlre ad).— »* maliirus.— »« cingere.— ^Mon- 
 •nnquiis.— "«* obsidio.— »» Transl. : ro obstinately (aai^tir) was it fought.— i°" siistineie, 
 %\\h\ imp.— » iter.— 2 to l)e free, paf^re.— ^ re^redi.- * Trani*!. : to the places of 
 the camp of last (prior) ni:j:ht.— ^ qiueritur.— « snbj. perf.— ' instead of, noii.— « not 
 either... nor, neque, uegue.— » occupare.— » rerseus? in peace, Feraeus quutus.— 
 1" pro"redi,v?/*j. - " anv fartlier, /o/i7'"«»'.— '^ to account for .somethin«r, lat'onem ali- 
 aVunrei reddere.— ^^ ciedes.— i* suDlre.— i» Transl. : by worlcs {opus).— 's dolabra 
 («/.)._ 17 to wipe out, exstingitere.— »« orbis terrjlium.— i» mora.— -<> proticisci in.— 
 31 tollere— -'^ ol)viain ire.— ^^ aliqnanto.— ^* inferre.— ^saitribuere.— -^ Lares lanii- 
 liares.— '" custodlrc.— ^-^ ledllis.— 2» proditor.— 3o dcmollre.— ^i tradere.— ^a sustinere. 
 
206 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 4 Dometrins, son of Philip, was delivored {dare) to the fimbassadors to be 
 taken back" to [his] father.— 5. The Roman people assijrneil to"* Pompey 
 the enactina: of the tinal scenes in the Mithridatic war.— G. Sp. Licinina 
 took the charixe'' of the war in order to hinder it.— 7. Does it {/ior.) mean 
 {esse) helpinir^*» a people, to abandon" it to the tender mercies^' of the 
 enemy ?— 8. The transport to Rome='* of [the imai^e of] Juno, the qneen 
 [of ixoddesses], was assii^neil to vounij: mvn{juvenis) selected from the 
 whoTe army.— 9. The execution of these desi^rns*" was left to the consuls. 
 — 10 The consul charged*' Amynander wilii the task*"^ of rousing" the 
 ^tolians" to the war.— 11. Sempronins rented*' to Gajus all the prop- 
 erty he owned in Albany coimty.- 12. Sempronins contracted*'' with 
 Gajus about providini:: with fences"^ and roads** all tho lands (pnedium) he 
 owned in Albany county.— 13. The Senate ordered*'' the consul to see" 
 that the contiscated"' lands {(ifjer) of the Ligurians were i)romptly'"' re- 
 stored to them.— 14. Caesar had {tiurare) all the old ships repaired", and 
 new ones built in Gaid. 
 
 XII. Rkveuskd piihases as sub,jects and transitive objects. — 
 1. The exposure'* of the king's fraud made the inhabitants" cautious. 
 
 2. The capture {mpere) of HeraclCa broke at lenirth {tttudon) the smrits'*' 
 
 of the ^tolians.— 3. Especially" the sinking'* of the royal flagship* by a 
 much smaller Rhodian" vessel, struck the enemy with dismay'''.— 4. It 
 seemed as if {that) the liberation"' of Chaleis would bring the neighbor- 
 ing communities [ddtus) over^^* to the alliance"* with {of) the Romans.— 
 5.'The king mourned" for the loss''" of his friend more than for [that] of 
 his crown"^— 6 Gajus has taken*"^ Sempronius's farm {pnpditaii) on 
 gliare?.— 7. The Senate assigned {attnl)uerc) to Scipio the i)acilication*" 
 of Spain.— 8. The public accuser {accu.sdior) caused the i)unishment 
 Ipunlre) of all [persons] who had acted against'" the usury {usuriu.H) 
 laws. 
 
 XIII. Genitive OF the GERUND.— 1. Wisdom must be dehued^' [asj 
 the art of living.— 2. God separated man from the other creatures'"' by 
 nothing so much {nutf/is) as by the faculty" of speech'*.— 3. Who does 
 not know" that the hope of impunifv" is the greatest incentive" to sin- 
 ning ?— 4. The ediles were cha rged"* with the care of pavin g'" the streets 
 
 as Kediicen^ — ^* Transl. : a!»si'_'iied (d'^ferre) to Poinpev tlie end (er'ttico of the Mlth- 
 fxCLixixc (Mlthindaticus) wnr to achieve {conficere).—^^ to take ilie cliar<,'e of t^omethiii;,', 
 muiciperealiauid.— '^^ auxilium ferre.— " oluicere.— as Trans*!, to abandon it to tlic 
 eiieinv for bein-' slau'Mitercd (//v/rif/J /•«').— ^" 'i'ranr'late : (iueen Juno was assitjned 
 Uissiqnare) to be transported ul^portilre) to Konie.— ■•o Transl. : These lhin-8 to be 
 done were left (permi ft ere) to the consuls.— <» to cliarire somebody with soniethmi?. 
 attribtiere alicui al>quid.— •»'■' Transl. : attributed to Amynander the /Eiolians to be 
 roused— *3 concitjlre.— *♦ ^tOli.- '♦'* Transl.: S. rented {locare) to Gajus all the 
 T)ropertv (priedio) which he held {hahtbat) in Albany county (arjer Albdnm) to be 
 u-ifd (}'rui}. The addition 'to be use T shows tliat a locatio rn, not a locatlo 
 opens is meant.— ■««Translate: S. gave out on contract to G:ijus all the lands etc. 
 to be provided etc.— *^ to provide witli fences, .«tp/vT/v.— <>* to provide wiih roads, d>-mere. 
 
 — «9 inandare aliquid al'icui.— ^" Transl. : that {ut) he should care the condscated lands 
 to b • promptly restored {resfiti/rre) to the Lij?urians {Lir/ures}.— ^^ adiinere.— '->- sine muril. 
 
 — 83 i-fticere.— 6* Transl. : The detected {detegere) fraud (fra'i<) of the kiu.r.— '* cau- 
 tus — 6* animi — ^^ maxime.— ^s demeri,' -re.— '■'•' heptC-ris — «o liiuxiins.— «i to strike 
 with dismay, percellere.— «•^ libenlre.— «^ to brini; over, tmd'icere.— «* societas.— «* to 
 mourn for soinethin<r,/«7e/-^ aliquid.— «« amittere.— «7 re^'uuin.— «« Transl. : ha- taken 
 (conditcere) the farm of Sempronins to be cultivated (colore) on phan-B ipartiano).— 
 «9 pac5re. — ■"> to act a<?ainst a law, in leqc ni peccary. —"i^ appellilrc.— ''-' animal.— ^' facul- 
 ta».— '♦ dicere.— '• not to know, igiidrare.— '« impunitas.— " illecCbra.— ■"« to charge 
 Bomcbody with isoinethiug, alicui aliquid manddre.-- ''' sieruere. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 207 
 
 {via) within {in) the city with pebblestone**, and [those] without the city 
 with crravel«».— 5. Postumius went**^ to Praeneste for the sake of offering 
 a sacrifice'*^ in the temjile of Fortfina.— 6. I, on my part, have our ances- 
 tors'*^ for an authority^^ and for [my] teachers in^» the observance J of 
 reli"-ious duties***.— 7. The mtdtitude was standing^» on the top of the 
 wail* of the city, eager to see«' Alexander.— 8. Neither of the generals 
 {dux) thou.rht {rmmorem esse) of sending help" to our hard pressed 
 [soldiers] — 9. The barbarians were powerless^* to resist our armies.— 
 10 Neither of the officers (<?'^.c) had"' any time for saving himself.— 11. 
 I do not believe that Gajus has spoken thus {ita) for the sake of praising 
 us— 12. The Helvetians carried"" all their carts to {in) one place for the 
 sake of defending themselves.— 13. Cleopatra was desirous ot excusing 
 iierself to {apud)Cxsi\r. 
 
 XIV Genitive of gerundive and patiticipial phrases.- i. Anti- 
 ochus did not cross over"" to Europe for the sake of commencing"» war, but 
 [tor the sake] of liberating Greece.— 2. By this error the general lost the 
 opportunity {1<m:us) of achieving a success^"".- 3. Tiie Senate gave^ to the 
 ediles aulhoritv to repair the porticoe of ^milius.— 4. This answer^ of 
 the kin"- furnishedMo the ambassadors no material* for pleading his 
 cause before {apud) the Senate.— 5. Although {cu?n) after the Pharsalian 
 battle I alwavs advocated', not the laying down«,but the throwing down 
 of arms, 1 did not succeed^» in bringing" the king over to my opinion . 
 
 — () Tlie method (ratio) of choosing" and arranging'* the words is easy. 
 
 — 7 Many renounce'^ pleasures for the sake of obtaining {adipisci) 
 o-reater pleasures.— 8. Demosthenes was zealous'" in hearing Plato.-— 
 9 Both took part" in suppressing'" the Catilinarian conspiracy.— 10. It 
 isreportrd'" that Csesar was desirous of acquiring^» the royal title _- 
 1 1 The «--lorv of havin»'- successfully'' conducted" and finished the Mithri- 
 datic wal- was conceded to Pompey.— 12. A shouting was heard, a sign 
 that iqenitiir) the town was taken.— 13. The consul was deeply affected 
 bv the news-' that [his] brother had been killed.— 14. The prisoners did 
 not dare to deny the charge" of having entrapped'" Koman horsemen by 
 
 an ambuscade'". . rao *i ^^ 
 
 XV. Geiiundial dative.— 1. That man was in charge of ^» the de- 
 i)artment=" for public works.— 2. The common counciP'gave to decemvirs 
 the supervision" of the buriaP* of the dead^^— 3. The means^» of the 
 state were neither sufficient for arming nor for supjiorting^' the army.— 
 4 Those men devoted their care not to governing^"* but to plundering 
 tie city {deltas).— 5. Romulus selected*" a place of*' remarkable*^ adapt- 
 
 «0 Sllex — 81 fflarea — «^ proficisci.— «^ to offer a sacrifice, mcra facere.— ^* ma- 
 iOrc«- " Transl.: 'l have our ancestors authors and teachers (agre^einn; with 
 inaioreA.- «« Genitive.- ^7 colcre.- »« reli-ions duties, rdiguines.- «» constare.- on 
 ton of in - " co-noscere.- "'^ opcm ferre.- »3 hard presse.i. laborans.-^* impotens.- 
 lo'iy ',S;_ ». comportare.- «M.urgare.- «s trajicere.- «Mnferre.- oo to achiev-e a 
 success, retn bene gerere.- ^ facere.- '^ responsum.- ^ pr^ebere.- * matenes.-s agerc. 
 — « Pharsalicus.— ' to advocate something, unctorem ahcujUH ,rn esse.— » deponere.— 
 » abiicer^ — i» non posse.- " to bring ov.-K adducere ad.- »'-auctoritas.- i3 deligere.— 
 i* collocare.- »* carere.- i« studiOsns.- i' to take part, partidjyein e^se.- ^8 ..ppriraere. 
 _ 19 tni.lere.- =» obtinere.- ^i nomen.- '^"^ bene.- ^n gerere - ^4 nidex.- ^^ to be 
 deeply aff.-cted, mvimo <lolure affici.- 2« nuntius.- "^ criiuen.- 28 crcum venire^- 2» m- 
 "idie - »0 to be in charge of something, pntesse alicui ret- 3i Translate by opera 
 publica adniini^trare.- =2 decuriOues.- " by pr<xncere 34 sepellre.- 36 mortuus.- 
 »« pecuni*.— >T alerc.— «« regere.— s» diripere.— *» deligere.- " ablat. of qualitj.- 
 ^"^ siuguiaris. 
 
208 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 edness" for Imilcrincr the cUy.— 6. Tarqniniiis was bent on snizinc^ * the 
 citv of Gabii by tVaiul, while {cum) he assumed the mask" ot bemir en- 
 cased" ill the busuiess of his city.— 7. Tlie Plebs demanded {poscrjr) 
 that {at) as soon as possible*^ an assembly for choosin£^ consuls should be 
 liekl**— 8 Two commissions of triumvirs*" were appomted {cmire), Wm 
 one {phw.) for recelvin- the gifts of the people, the other (/>^'^r.) for re- 
 l^alrmo- the temples of Matuta and Fortuua.— 0. ^\ lien the day tor drattmg 
 the annvhad arrived, the most serious^" disturbances^^ arose" m the nty. 
 XVI Gkrundivt. Genitives and Datives as piikdicates— 1. The 
 Parisians"^' brouo-ht" evervthlng to the city which they believed" might 
 make"» the siege tolerable.— 2. Such" harangues" [must] contribute 
 to fan" and nourish»" strife".— 3. It does not seem that the ciecrees 
 of the kin--- are apt to preserve peace, but [that they are apt] to produce 
 ^var — 4. Some [persons] believe that many books" on j^hyslcal science 
 have a tendency to dissolve and destroy religion {phir.).— 5. Daily " exer- 
 cises" are conducive to the preservation of life and health.— 0. In the con- 
 struction"" of buildings" care should be especially taken'^ that the walls 
 are able to bear a [great] weight.— 7. In ourcouniry«'\ those that are"» de- 
 vothv themselves to political life", should especially see that ('/^ V»';y 
 are in a condition to bear the struggle.— 8. An action for fraud lies 
 a'mlnst those who, while {nnn) they were Insolvent, have induced 
 oTheis^MoghV» them goods" on credit. , , , „ ^ „ 7» 
 
 XVII Geuundial Ablative.— 1. Learning by heart'" strengthens 
 the memorv — 2. Tlie first ranks'" of our [soldiers] were tired*' by tight- 
 iii,r_3 Sclplo employed" the lew days whlch^Mie had proposed"* to 
 spend at Carthage with drilllng^^' his navaP" .md land-forces".- 4 1 ou 
 can defend me best by punishing those who have grasped"*" ^l^^'/^eel for 
 the sake of klUlu"'- me.— 5. Hannibal, with the appearance ot tleemg , 
 left the camp wifh all his troops, In order to (?//) surprise'-'^ the eneiny 
 [while] engaged'' in plundering"^* the camp.— 0. The Numidians fought 
 by running''l(n-ward"* and again {rur.sus) retreating (.s£^ recipe re) — 7. Rtmiu- 
 lus taught our ancestors thai they might {posse), by the cultivation * of the 
 fields have a plenty of*" everything.— 8. Doest thou not t«'el that llie 
 Uuh4s by my acqulttaP\ have condemned thee?— 9. The Ilomans, by 
 thnrwli'i'^"" .ri-appling hooks'-'-' upon the ships of the enemy, made the 
 naval battle similar to [a light 1 on land'"".- 10. Alclblades, by showing' 
 liow «n-eat a damage- they would {icere going to) IntHcl^* on the LacedcCino- 
 nlans'b y the capture* of Syracuse, prevailed on^ the Athenians to send a 
 43 ouDortiiuitJi» — *< c.iiicT.t.— ■»* to as-iuinc Ihti m;isk, si//i>d<i/e. wiUi an iiiliiiinve 
 clause (tliat he; wa-» (Mi.'a"o(l).— *» en-a-i'tl in tho l)u-«ine<s of tlie <uy. opwbus urbuuis 
 oSy^T/ / f..^..-^^ quoq.ic tempore.- *^ l.ahCre.- "» blnl triumviri (two sets of 
 
 " <nl)iunctive - &* by e^.^e witli a pixMiicate-ircrmuli.il.- " ejiiMnodi.— 8»» oraiio.— in- 
 flatninare — «oalere.— «» certamen. - «'•* incitilre.— «3 libri de yuinina ratiOne natflne cou- 
 tcriuti — "" niiotidiilims.- «* ambulatio.— «« s^trnctara.— «■ icile^.— «« to take care that, 
 vidirynt - «« apad iios.- ^o th()>*ethat iuc,pariciple. Seo§ 3-)«.-" rempub icam capes»- 
 ^er- —•'2 actio doli.— '^ Translate : liv the action for fraud are h' Id (fenero those who.— 
 ^*plrducere, with uL- 's alkr (sin-:).- ""» to j,mvc on cre.lir, crcUer^.-J' merx (|. .).-- 
 '« edi"cere.- '« contirmare.- «" acies.- «' fesKU>*.- «^ alj=^umer.-.- -^ t„ spend which, 
 transl.: durin- which (aW.)to stay (comwomri).- «« ^^tatnere- «^ exercere - ^« "»'/'^!r; 
 
 - «7 copiiu pede>*tres.-«« sumere.- «« ferrnn).-»" fnpe specie.- •> ♦•PPr''"*;^*'';-;, Z,'^^"- 
 vatus with abi — »= diripere.- »* procur-flie. - »5 colere.- »•' to hive p >-nty, (buidare. 
 
 - " absolvere.- »« injicere in.- »» grappliu- hook, harpaqo.- ;«" a il- it ou 1""'^ y^fi'; 
 na pedestns.- » docSre.- ''damnum.- 3 infene aliciii.- « Trans»!, by ablatives absoUuc. 
 'after they had captured' {expugnare).— ^ persuadere. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 209 
 
 great fleet to Sicily.— 11. The accused escaped» punishment by feigning^ 
 
 ^"xvm Ablatives Absolute (First Class).— 1. Sclplo, by the destruc- 
 tion" of two cities most Inimical {inimlcm) to this empire, not only has 
 willed out {(Mere) the present wars, but also those to come — 2. Philip 
 hoped that, by taking" the cities of the JEtollans, he would be stronger 
 for the war.— 3. Ctesar resolved^Uo cross over» to Britam, by the sub- 
 iectlon^^ of which he believed that the fear'« of the Roman name would 
 be Increased among the barbarians.— 4. After the hostages and the arms 
 liad been surrendered by the inhabitants, C«sar, after the lapse'^of two 
 davs"^ marched^' Into the territory of the Reinl.— 5. After hearing the 
 ambassadors, Cj^sar answered that he would accept their surrender if 
 thev would-» deliver him their arms and the noblest of [their] state [as] 
 liostages.- G. After L. Mummlus had taken Corinth he adorned vyith pic- 
 tures "Imd statues not Italy only, but also the provinces.— 7. When Pa- 
 brlelus byPvrrhus's ambassador was offered^Mi large quantity'" ? ^?i^/^? 
 did-' not accept It, saying he wished rather to rule^* those that had 
 it than have it hlmsdf- 8. Cn. Sclplo died in the greatest povertv, 
 without leaving even so much^« money as was sulhcient^' for the dowiy 
 of his dau'-hters.— 9. M. Sallnator was condemned by the people bmiuse 
 he had noT divided the booty equally^'' among^" his soldiers.-- 10 ^V hen 
 inuum) P Valerius's soldiers had been routed^\ the Senate resolved, that 
 he should receive no reinforcements before^^ he had defeated the enemy. 
 — 11 The consul Ilirtlus sent to the besieged Mutinlans'* letters written 
 on {by) lead, which" [some of his] soldiers carried swimming over the 
 rlverf having fastened them to [their] arms {sing.).— 12. 1 he consul, 
 ;dthou.>-h he had defeated the enemy, nevertheless {tarnen) retreated to 
 the camp, fearing" he mlghf-'^ fall into an ambuscade.— 13. The inhabit- 
 ants represented^' that If [their] arms should have been taken from 
 thein, they could not protect themselves against the neighboring commu- 
 nities [which were] most hostile to them. 
 
 XIX VDLvnvES Absolute, Direct Participles, or Finite Clauses. 
 r \wlil either ahlativea absolute or direct participles according to the rules, 
 ■finite clauses to be used only if neither of t/te two former coiistructMns be ad- 
 missible W/i£rever either ablatives absolute or direct participles are allowed, 
 transude in both ways.-]- 1. The Si)anlards*\ after having hitched*^ oxen 
 to vehicles", placed^^ them In fl•ont^^ and, the signal*^ being given tor 
 battle lired*^ the vehicles [which were] full of pitch-wood*« and sulphur ; 
 then (deiride) they drove^" tlie o.xen against the enemy, thre^v^» [their] hue 
 in confusion*" and brok e through** [them].— 2. Pontius Cominius, after 
 
 • Transl.: was lil>erated from punishment.- ' 8imnl5r_e.- a Trans'L : that he was 
 insane (7«my).- » evertere.- ^o those to come, hy futurus.--^^ ox^n^^^^&Te.-^^Jlv- 
 ■ "us-»^ Ttiucro.- 14 trajicere.- i<* ^^ubi-ere.- »« tiinor. - »; by m/m/a«.r^. - 
 i" bidunm - "« pr)flci.cl.- -^o phiperf. «ubj. of tradere.-^^ Tran.l : Fabncms, when 
 iV h °" nnbasSidor olTered to hi.li.- '^^ poi^idus.- "^^ Transl. : aft^ not iiavmnr accep ed 
 it /a --■^Mini)enlre.-25 participle.- =« ,;o much as. is qm.- ^no be snlhcient, .*«/??- 
 'cl'rT--^ dos - -^^«aa.s^ Jqual.- ^o dative.- ^\f n.i,'are - ^-^ Transl. : tli^t no (««) rem 
 forcemeats (a^m^mrsliould l)e sent to him.- 33 ni-i.- 34 Mutineu<is.- 35 i mnsl. . alter 
 which S been fastened (religare) etc., the soldiers swam over Uranare) tne nver.- 
 sV"^ red ere -37 veritus ne.- 3« subj. imperf. oi inelde re to tall.- S'* exponere.- 
 40 alimere - 41 Hi.pauus.- *^ adjun-ere.- 43 vehiculum.- 44 constituere.- 4» prraa 
 f..o . !!!. 46 ,i.ruum - 47 inccdcre.- 4^ t.eda.- 4« sulphur.- ^o participial construction. 
 _M* participial constructiou.- «-^ acies.- " to throw iu coutusiou, comteraare.- 
 *4 perrumpere. 
 
210 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 ho had been let down» over (^ 434 R. 32) the T^H ^1-" ^^^^J^^ I] "^ 
 swum- across tl.e Tiber, ranie to Vrji, ucconip isliL-a '^ ' ^ '. j,,^^.' 
 vcturned in a sindlar way- to Ins [^-'"P^'V^^^; ;-.;!• .^"^'"r^rT man 
 
 tViends comphiined^" o Ins leniency reMunKin- i i.t. ... .^ "- ,3-, - 
 Ma in t e one C.x^sar.- T,. Hannibal, havin.^^ been intormecU at 
 several of (.i-) liis soldiers had tied to the enemy, declared P^ >Ih'1v tl • t 
 he hmiclt'had sent them under the .^jnise of deserters When tl co- 
 itus had heard- what he had declared, tluy f "f,^-;^^;^^;^;^^, l!'^.^ ^ 
 havin-cutotr^" their hands.- 0. C*sar alter he had P^'-^^^ Zm^^nJ^ 
 fclr a while-, led his troops back- to the camp, dccnnn- [uj sulhcitnt 
 fur the present" that terror was struck- nito ^^^'^^^y- ^,^^, ,,,,. 
 
 XX. Ablatives absolute of the second clas>. [0/6 l\ ''''''^ 
 fences mu.st be rendered bii direct partirip,d ^'^ff;;'';f-^-J^^^^^^^^ 
 had di.'d, Tulhis Hostiluis was made kin- -- 2 ^/.^^^» ^''f,f 7"""'" ' ' IV 
 V rted^* eMch for his [own] province, the Senate directed [it>J ■ tu ntion 
 setlin'- he di icillies i Spain.- 3. After the praetors had le i (ff/redc) 
 Ic'Sy WW. thT^ the draftin,- of the army their l^'.^t business. 
 
 - 4 Alter (he consul had returned (/r^m/.) Iji-nithe province ee- 
 mtuuled ipo.stuldre) from the Senate the honor ol a triumph •- ' • » 'VI 
 A exande^ had crossed" the ilypasis, the army ^^^.^^^Y^'lw.u^l il c e emv' 
 demanded- to be {at) led- home.- 0. Alter day ^ ;';\ =^\Yu 't u 
 made- a sally'^ fn.m {ahl.) all the -ates and came near /he .11 
 
 XXI ABLvnvES Absolute OF THE THIRD CLASS.— 1. ManluiN \\ hen 
 th^irmy m^^^^^^^^ mutiny- in his behalf- against »^ij t'^^her who ha 
 con imued him to deathf persuaded the soldiers tljat they won d^^ 
 l.i.n t(. he nunished — 2. A general is in a great dangei, il (^0 some le 
 
 ^» A noise'" was heard m me ii^btMiiw;^> ; tn^ x^^wcv. ......„-----, 
 
 h^iMi chlm') they were treated" like the Messenians".- 0. i he S.^n- 
 
 ims.— «^ dilii:iMm?M nc.— >"\V. A. ' t.,,. 1;..»- i,.r ^.rruhia^ elTuoere.— ^^ pcrliTru. 
 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 211 
 
 missior'' should not'Mie given.- 7. That man tl^reatcned within tie 
 hcarin- of the Senate that ho would kill his adversary with his [onn] 
 h:uul --• 8. Tn the beginning (inire) of his youth Themistoclesived rather 
 dissolutelv^80that'(?v^r/ic. c<?^.v/r.)his own father disinherited' Inm - 
 The Sena e as^ented^^ to [the view of] Ful vius against the opinion of Len- 
 r;nis- We trust i.perdre) that with the help of the immortal gods 
 hisconspii-acv will be crushed'".- 11. The resolution was carried'^^ unan- 
 mmJ^liv-^ witiiout any one's opposition-.- 12. While Capua was be- 
 sieged bv the Komans, Hannibal led his army to the river Anio and took 
 a pl>siti<;ir« within a little distance {non longe) from the city of Home.— 
 13 Since Fulvius is engaged- in {/>//) important- work for the state, you 
 had better'^- select- another help for=^ you— 14 AVho shotild not wish 
 to eno-an-e" in so creat a science, so great rewards being held out 
 
 XXlf Ablatives absolute of the fouutii class.— 1. As long as 
 
 believe that the Senate would grant** m his absence what it had denied 
 to him i his presence.- 4. Hieronvmus broke^« the Iriendship which, 
 tl e ife iie (.^^ his grandfather- Hiero, had existed- between the Ro- 
 Inan pio )le and the Syracusians-.- 5 This promise has been given b^ 
 thee not nily without my knowledge, but also against my will.- 0. Labi- 
 enu^ said tluft he could not- support- Caesar's uudertakii^g j^ consistency 
 with" his sworn duties".— 7. Your plans are such^* that {ut) they can- 
 not iX' carried out- in conformity with- the laws.- 8. Inthe consulship 
 of .Manlius and Censorlnus the third Punic war began {orin).— 9. In the 
 battle of Canna'" almost the whole Roman army, under the command 
 of Varro and .Emilius, was either killed" or captured.-- 10 A .gieat dis- 
 pue- arose whether the laws that were enacted- under the mfluence" 
 f CTsar should be abolished^^ or confirmed.- 11. If thou art [his] wit- 
 ess an I 'en rser", I shall readily- consent- that the republic be en- 
 tn'st J« PompeV's faith.- 12. Numa is said to have tormed" he 
 reli'^hus institutimis'with the help- of the goddess Egena.- 13. If (. ) 
 
 [its]' former'* dignity. 
 
 
 i^To-i^rm tS; ^W>t/;irs utum.. sTm^nstituere.- - a helper, adjator,- «^callidus 
 !1 Vo S< • I la'i t ey do not believe {subj.) tlmi they can reach (coasequi)--'^ not by 
 ^/.piiirbutl.ya^c/or.- ^^ .euior-year, by the pergonal l^o^x^x senior.- ^3sociu..-'*pn8. 
 
 tiuus. 
 
212 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 XXIII Prepositional Geuundtat.s after ad, in (with nrcusativc), 
 ^^Yy ob — 1 The (k'tciKkr most couscientiously" made use ot all argu- 
 ments that were available'» for the protection" of an accused petson.— 
 2 How few are there now w ho are nominated'" for high public oltices , 
 unless^ntheir] means*' are sufficient"^ for bnbing«=' [the electors].— o. Ihe 
 a<^ents of Perseus inveisrled"-' the communities of the Achan to take up 
 arms against the Ilomans.- 4. Thou wilt have to select braver m^'» !<>r 
 so greata venture«^- 5. The consul, after having sent hisbrother Man bus 
 to collect"» from the Boeotians th.e rest of the numey which ' they had 
 pnnnised, and having api^ointed^'' a day for a conference with the envoys , 
 led his army back to ApamPa.- G. The trooiu'rs"» ot Mago with«' whoin 
 he roamed "through"'^ this i>art of the country"', were neither {non mmlo) 
 stron»'"* enou'di to operate" against the enemy, nor even {mi ne quidem) 
 to protect the tields against {ab) foragers"».— 7. The tenth legion gave the 
 assurance {conlirmare) that it was fully prei>ared" to meet {obrmni ire) the 
 ejieniy— 8 By this letter of tiie kiim', Pausanias was made bolder to 
 carrv out(/)frAVm;) what he had ]>romised.— 0. It is by no means" ex- 
 pediVnt thal'"''the office'"" of our Presidents should be extended' to another 
 [alter] term" lest any one' by a hmir lease* of power should be"^ either 
 more reluctant» to lav down' [hisj oilice, or more strengthened" to ol)taiii 
 it ao-ain"— 10 The Senate ordered the consul to take al )ng'° everything 
 tharmi"ht be useful for the siege" or detencc of cities.— 11. Several 
 thino-s (rea) were in the way {impedimenta) of quickly condu(;tmg {gerere) 
 the war.— 12. Hannibal sent a strong body of troops'"^ into the district 
 of Puieoli'^^ to lav it waste by ffre and sword {ferro et iyni).— Ill G:ijua 
 has deposited'' with me a large sum'^ of money [as a contribution] for 
 the buildin<' of an orphan-house'».— U. [FAcry person] who shall have 
 either giveiv^rotfeied.or accepted money [as an inducement] for voting" 
 is punishable"* under our laws. 
 
 XXIV. Ghuundials after i^i (with abl.), ah, <Je, r>ro,ex, and inter.— 
 1 In the distribution'-' of public offices"-" the rulers"' of the rei)ublic should 
 especiallv {imprlnii><) see [to] what is most useful to the people, not [what 
 is useful] to the ai>plicants-^— 2. When dangers are impendin^•-^ the cus- 
 tom of phvsiciaus ou-xht to be imitated, who cure-" slight'-' cases by 
 gentle'» reinedies, but to more serious" diseases are obliged {cohere) to 
 
 "75 Keli-'irj-U'^ — '* to bo availahU', potiiure. — ''"^ tuGri. — '» proponere (.S7/&7.). — 
 79Transl.7f.)rconcluctinj,M7m/'^) therrpublic- ^» nisi.- "i copiiv.- ^"^ suppetere ^/^j/.). 
 _ »3 iir-Tri— s* ctmcitiirc— «^ Traiisl. : for vcntunni,' (audere) so <;reat a thin- — 
 8« exi«'ere — " Transl. : out of that which they had promised. If literally translated, the 
 relative ' which ' in Latin, would refer to the rest, and not to the whole of the moMcy.— 
 88 dicerc — "» 'I'ransl : havin<; said to the envoys a day for conferrint,' (rolloqin).— >"> eqni- 
 t.itum.si/j'a') — 9iTransl. : the troopers who nnder U»e command (dux) ot Map;o roamed 
 etc — «2 wrrwdri with accusative.— " Translate: this rej,'ion.- «* validns.— "to 
 onerate a-ainst somebody, tace.osere aliqmm- «« pabuhltor.- " t.uperlatiye of pamtos. 
 .-s« miiiime -- «9 inftnitive clause.- 1"« The ottice of a his;h ma-istrate, if military 
 power is contained in it, is reu lerod by imperium.- » proroirfire in.- yi ransl. : term 
 Sf four years, qmdrhnnium.- ^ ne quis - " Ti;an>l : alter {ah!. «/.. ) the power 
 (»o^.sVa*) has t)een made old (inretera^cere, to make old).- ^ subjunc ive of ^vg.- 
 «tardus— 7 deoonere.— 8 muiiTtus.— « rursus.— '" secum poriilre.— »1 ol)sidere.— 
 y-- IxhK- of troops, aqmen.- » I'uteolflnus.- ^* deponcrc.- " ma-na Pecunia.- 
 16 orphnmf raphe twi (late and modern Latin, derived froin the Creek).- " siiff.a..;K% 
 forre - 1« not^tris le-ibiis tenCri.— 1» deftrre.- -» l)ublic office, muwfts.- -» those who 
 rule \qerere) the republic- '^'^ part. ..f i>etere.- -^ 'J ransl. : In damrers to be ap- 
 proached (adlrr).— -'* curare.— "Transl. : those that are {partic.) tli-htly {levittr) 
 sick (rt;yTO^d/-e;.-28Traujl.: gently {hy ItnU).- 27 gravis. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 213 
 
 innlv dann-erous cures'''.— 3. Prestige» is one of the greatest aids'' m the 
 mannc-eme'ni^" of the more important»*^ aff-airs— 4. In defending yourself 
 a-ainst" so serious charges, you ought to have been^* a little more care- 
 ful _ 5 This man had^^ all [the qualities] which are^ most important 
 for winning" popularitv, ease^»" in speakin-, liberality'» in giving, [and] 
 leniencV» m forgivin-:- G. The sight^^ of the walls {mo^n^a) deterred 
 the Cai-thaginians from attacking {oppmj nare)\hQ city — 7 I shall never 
 cease" from promoting", to the best of my abdities^Sthe interests" of my 
 fellow-citizens.- 8. The third book of Cicero's Tusculan" disputations 
 is ^vritten on alleviating*^ sorrow",- 9. An agreement was made by 
 lioth {nternue) leaders, that {nt) ambassadors should be sent from {e^') all 
 Slates to {dc) draft a treaty^" of peace.- 10. IIow wretched is the condi- 
 tion of those who are iunorant {expers) of the pleasure which is derived 
 from seeing^' and hearing!— 11. This law, instead of diminishing vices, 
 holds out rewards for committing crimes.— 12. It is reported^' ih^XAlYen- 
 nus, ^vhile weighing'* the gold given by the Romans, was surprised and 
 cut down'M)v Cainillus. r 1 ^^ 
 
 XXV. Participial tiirases after pkeposittons,— 1. Cnesar lorbade 
 the soldiers to rest" before the eiuP« of the march,— 2. Fulvius drafted 
 
 I hi^] wiir'" but before signing and sealing^' the paper" he regretted [his] 
 [jii,.pose — 3. This happened a few months {abl.) before I became a consul. 
 
 — 4 After Alblnus and Piso had been declared consuls, Flaccus, the un- 
 successful" candidate, was taunted" by his own mother.— 5. Six years 
 after the fall" of Veji, the city of Rome was taken l^J'^'e Gauls.— 
 G Tinit dav when"" the news*^» of the loss""' of the Canncan^^ battle came 
 to the citv; was fir the most glo(miy" ever since the building'* ot t\ie city. 
 
 — 7 Aiiion«- these orators Servilius Glaucia was fiir the most wicked 
 since the exCitence of mankind, but very acute and shrewd and especially 
 full of fun'«— 8. (^rsar was consul in the vear C94 after the building ot 
 Rome— 10 To all generals who had commanded {praesse) armies in the 
 Avar <n-eat rewardswere uiven for their successful conduct of the war.— 
 
 II After the expulsion" ()f the Gauls it was proposed by many, that all the 
 cit'izens should move^" to Veji on account of the destruction '«by fire ot 
 the citv ot Rome.— 12. After {postquam) the report**» on the failure m 
 
 . capturing the city has been made by you, let us speak {agere) now on 
 the meatVs^" to capture it.- 18. I have prevailed upon him«* to go to the 
 country'*^ f.)r a few days, which unquestionably'" was the best" [he could 
 do] under the circumstances. ^ 
 
 28 curatio — 2» cloria.— 3» Transl. : plurimum adjuvdre.— s' administrarc.— »2 mag- 
 
 n„. _ sV I'ransl • in excusin- so irreat charges {crimen).- " Transl.: greater diligence 
 
 o 'ht to ha?i 1 een used {ufiy- 3M>v e.<>se.- »• to be most imiyormnt rnaxiTnt nmnentt 
 
 Zf^-^'-vat^^^^^^^^ 3«'facilit.is.- 39 muniftcentia.- *^ dementia.- *^ by 
 
 ZnS^ere -*^xfceR^^ recedere ah.- " auuere.- 44 quantum optime pot^ero - 
 
 ^States - 4« Tu.<cuianu;.- *^ lenlre.- "« le^ritudo.- *« an, agreement is made by, 
 
 ro//rfe/ ji (impers ) inter.- s" to draft a treaty of peace, paceni ^w//g^r«.- ^1 spectSre.- 
 
 63 raceV- " pendere.^ " opprimere.- " caedere.- *' conquiescere.- »« ^^j co^iHcere. 
 
 ._ 6Cn<cribe,-e.- 60 tcstamentum- «« to sign and .eal obsxgnare.- «Vr''"l^-~ 
 
 «3 poeVdtC're-«* Transl. : who had suffered (/e/re) a repulse (repnlm).- «Mo taunt 
 
 ^ol^^kl fxvrdbriire alicvi.- «« sexennium (a5;.)- «' by capere.- «^ quo.- «^ nuntius 
 
 b S//J™ pervenlre.- '3 fune^tus.-'* condere.--'S iiriprobus. 
 
 1176 fJnot tun ridlcuZ- " expellere.- " migrare.- '» destruction by fire xncendere 
 
 ac Jr/lr' -"° to make a rep..Vt on something, referre de ahqva re-^^ '1 ransl.: 
 
 on ma au)turin.' the city.- «^am.- " by the gerundive of caj)ere.- " to prevail on 
 
 .omeb^dj a" c"c/7v M mealicui vt.- " rus,- «• baud dubie.- «' commodi.simus. 
 
214 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 BOOK FIFTH. 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIOXS.— USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 USE OF THE :\100DS. 
 
 CHAPTER FHIST. 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 I. ADVERBLVL RELATIONS IN GENERAL. 
 § 5 16. Incidental (adveiibial) relations or ' circumstances* are the 
 different relations of Place, Time, or ^Iodality in their combination with 
 the predicate or other members of the sentence. The langnaij^c gener- 
 ally does not express these relations by describing them through words and 
 phrases, but by peculiar grammatical forms to which usage has assigned 
 the meanings of descriptive words. Such forms are applied to all phrases, 
 
 predicative, objective, and attributive.* 
 
 t-ff" ExAJiPLEs. 1. Objkctive RELATIONS OF Vi.ACF. '. C{V9{[T in GanHf hoWum m'lit 
 (i/i denoting; tluTLACK of iJioaclioin. T/zf/f profrttuscs ? U7« we (Iroin what I'KacexIuI 
 you (lopart? Loor/e alu'st, hv is far (a lonjr way) (li^tant.— AxTiamTiVK iiklations : 
 riisina Cannemu, the battli; of Caiinffi (boin^' foii^^lit at a place near CannaM, lU- lum 
 Jlis^pariiense, tlie war in Sjjaiii ((liMill<Jui^'h('(l Iroin a war ai^ainst the Spaniards, which 
 luiijht not be carried on in Spain). H^'n? the attribntive endini; ^/^*^< denotes h>cal re- 
 lations.— Pukdicative itKLATioNs : iiw'iw^ru-^licntur. (Jajus lives in tlu- country. 
 
 2. ()B.rECTiVE kklations of Time: I'of^t diem se.xtnni venit (})Ost denotiiii: ' at a 
 time").— />?■/< niorsttus est. he, tarried a lonmj timk.— Attkibi'tive kklations: Opus 
 crastintnn, tlie work of to-morrow ; labor qKotMh'inns, every day's work.— Puedicativk 
 RELATIONS : \'eiiiet, tie ?r<7(f coine ; vC'iiit , he /m.>>' come ; etc. 
 
 3. Objective UEL.\TioNs OF Modality: 7;i/;/7<^///e/' labOrat, he work? diliirently (in 
 a d;lis:ent manneki. Quanti hoc a'stimas, At what pkue do yon vahie thisy— At- 
 TKiBUTivK RELATIONS : Lleiiuin/(^/ur. a war perforined in a brutal manner. (Mere the 
 mere form of an ai,'iceini,' adjective expresses th<f relation of manner.) Homo <liu- 
 genfior, a, lUHu dili-ent in a hii^her deuuee.— Predicative iielations : CJ.ijus /f/r/j- 
 
 fnantt abiir, Oajiis left weeiiin-r Uhe participle, as accessory predicate, expre^sin;,' an 
 action coincident with his leaving, being one of the relations of modality). 
 
 § 547. The adverbial relations are expressed by the following gram- 
 matical forms: 1) adverbs; 2) prepositional combinations; 3) the cases 
 of the substantive, taken in an adverbial or prepositional sense; 3) the 
 form of an accessory predicate, consisting of a participle expressed or 
 understood, agreeing with its logical subject; 4) adjectives derived from 
 nouns or adverbs denoting time, place, or manner; 5) the tenses of the 
 
 principal predicate; C) by clauses. 
 
 fW Of these forms only the adverbs, the cases of substantives, and the acces- 
 soiiY predicates are to be'eonsidered liere, the other forms beini; assigned todiilereut 
 chapters. The prepositional expressions are likewise considered here bo lar as they 
 
 belong to the Bubjects treated. 
 
 ~ * Thus for inst. the EiVglisirexpressions^in t"h<? way of'V' in the form of are indicated 
 bv the mere ending rim i.i a great nnini)er of substanlive adverbs. The ideas ol cacse, 
 means, puice may be expressed bv descriptive words (ran^a, iiistrnmentum, pretinm), 
 but they are most generally indicated by mere inflectional endings, to which usage, in cer- 
 tain connections, has assigned these, and no other, meanings. 
 
 RELATION OF PLACE. 
 
 215 
 
 7?^n, 1 Advfrb^ are condengation? of speech, combining three different elements in 
 Jiem.A. -^^^'^,^^^, ,?!:,'"' ..^i i^KA bein<' either an ad ective, noun. verb, or pre- 
 en e word, I'ame y 1 .^^.^l^^^^f^^' JJ^^^, and^can^ be understood,* as amanfer whose 
 position, winch '""^'/ '''>? l'"^,' J 5'^ . ,,i],c whose radical is the demonstrative idea, ex- 
 "^''''\'iv '!he lorm u c i^'e /^c "^^ 'ihe general idea of an adverbial relation (place 
 r'^'^'^c^fn rv> whic^^^^^ "^ ^^'^ ^«"^e "'^^^' «" ^'^« governing nouns of 
 
 time, modallt^\, ^^''^.'\ I, "'"'"f.»:", nianner or pkkpositional relation Ppecifyin<: the 
 absolute adjectives : -iUhe ^P^^^ |^ ,7; ."" -.her as direction to, or frcm a place, or as man- 
 general ideas of Pl^^e time or nio( lalt^ «5\?hTch the action is performed. These special 
 
 ;Sui'ons'^;'^-indlcafK ^^' ^^' ^^' '^^ ^^^' ^^^ ^""^^ °^^^^^>; 
 
 n.n.. TY ^'>7-^!;;--^r^^KS;:ci!?^^^ti^ 
 
 or understocHl, ami agre m- ^ > h ^ vidi^the .ame as in 
 
 always {^t^'»"^.^^ " ,^ .^i^,^ /^^^^^ ?<^ula i7to be usc-d as accessory predicate, it is always 
 
 cmia\ ^^ hen ^7 . P^^.i . ' „; ' Vdiective or predicate-noun belonging to it takes its inflec- 
 understood. and the [f ' « ^j J f f/i ^^,^^,^^, ^^ rncolnrmmi\\m\^\U he dismissed 
 
 , o„. the same «^ •" J »^^ " a, ,, hun n lar to the adverb ' impilne').-Sempronius His- 
 Gajiis unhurt (>(.tha he? «.yuihut^^ ^ ^ I ^^ Spain, i. tJ. being a 
 
 ^;^^^:^'^:^^^^^ a ;;ro^oniui;'which we mi^ht imagine to have the force of a 
 (not existing) adverb ' proconsuliter\ 
 
 II. RELATION OF PLACE. 
 ^ 54§ The relation of place is expressed 1) by prepositions with 
 substantives (B. IV., Ch. I.) ; 2) by the locative form-adverbs ; 3) by some 
 adverbs formed from nouns, adjectives and prepositions ; 4) by the accusa- 
 tive and ablative cases of nouns. 
 
 Bern 3 Locative fot^m-adyet^bs are the adverbs formed from the 
 roo^.^;f most determinative form-adjectives (^ 242 foil.) by attachmg to 
 hem certain endin-s Avhich, in all respects, have the nature of case-end- 
 mrs Thtis FOUR CASES are formed, called the first, second third, and 
 f urih locative cases They denote either local dtrections (to,/mm, or 
 ^ r" 7/ oMW^^^^ at a place, the place beitig indicated by the same 
 rono i.^^^^ ^« tiie form-adj(^ctives from whose roots they a,-e 
 
 eri^ed The locative form-adverbs, like the determmative form-adjec- 
 tives, are divi.led into adverbs of the iKTEimoGATiVE, deflnite, indefi- 
 
 xtTF and RELATIVE form > (^ 241). -x- • 
 
 llm A The FIRST LOCATivECASE has thc force of the preposition m 
 with 'he ABLATIVE of to/., accompauicd by that form-ad.i ective fmm 
 w oLe root it is deri ve.l. It Expresses the place at or in which something 
 i\ done -in^^^ hy the ending hi, which is attached to the root of 
 
 tie Ttenntati T the same w^y as the case endings of the corre- 
 s otldhiH^^ Thus v< (rocn forms ibf, which means m eoloco 
 
 VT T "t place, or TIIERE.-The SECOND LOCATIVE CASE haS the foiCC 
 
 otM^ e Dre 'osition ex ov ab (with loco\ and is formed by attaching the 
 eu n<^ Sr^ t le root of the determinatives, as inde {ex ov ab eo loco) 
 Zm ce ( r m that place).-The third locative case takes the place of the 
 p!il>osition ad ovm with the accusative of locns, denoting directi onjg 
 
 6ome gra.iimarians that all prepo-itions were on.anally adve bs, ,. erioncous. 
 
 1 Se° Tic (\Tc. .30, 87 : Vnde utrumque declflrat, et ex quo loco, et a quo loco [i. e. from 
 the interior or from the exterior of a place). 
 
216 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 RELATION OF PLACE. 
 
 217 
 
 a place It has the same form as the ablative neuter' of the determinative 
 adV'Ciives, as lo {ad eum locum), thithor (to that place).— The fourth lo- 
 c vnvE CASE has the form of tlie ablative feminine of the adjfclivcs, and 
 represents the preposition pr, or the ablative via, denoting dneclion 
 throur/h, or by way of some place. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE LOCATIVE FORM-ADVERBS. 
 
 1) Interrogative and Relative Forms. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Local Adverbs. 
 
 FIRST CASE. 1 SECOND CASE. 
 
 Onis, who. which ' ' ubi , lohn-e ! mule, lohenM 
 
 Uter, ivldch {o{ wUoXn^" in which uinnUc, 
 
 THIRD C.\SE. 
 
 two) 
 
 Quicunque, ?p//o- 
 ever or which- 
 ever ) 
 
 Quisqnip, wJio- noiubi, 
 ever or which- ^I'^f 
 ever 
 
 of the two 
 ptacfft 
 iibicuiiquCitt'Aer- 
 ever 
 
 where- 
 
 tvhich of the 
 two pldCtS 
 uiukHunque. 
 whencc60ever 
 
 uiulcniulc, 
 whtnccsoever 
 
 quo, irhithfiT 
 fromwwo, to winch of 
 
 the two places 
 
 quocunqnc, ichi- 
 thersotvtr 
 
 quoqno.w/nth(r- 
 (>OtCer 
 
 FOURTH CASE, 
 qua, which way 
 
 2) Definite Form. 
 
 I^, that, he 
 Hie, this 
 
 lit f"«' 
 
 Idem, the same 
 
 Aliqui^, > 
 Quisplani, some 
 
 Qui^quam, any 
 
 Quisque, each 
 
 Qnivip.s every 
 
 possible 
 Uternui', lx)(h, 
 
 each oft>ro 
 Aliu!«, another 
 
 ibi. there 
 hlc, htre 
 
 iblfleni, at the 
 ' mine place 
 
 inde, thence 
 hiuc, hence 
 illinc, Uromyon- 
 istinc,i iter j)t((ce 
 iiididcm, from 
 the mme place 
 
 CO, thither 
 hue, /lifhf^r 
 illuc, tto yonder 
 
 istUC, f JHUCi^ 
 
 eodcm, to the 
 same place 
 
 qu;1eunqne,?f7Aai 
 way soever 
 
 quflquS, what 
 way soever. 
 
 Oil. by that way 
 bile, by this way 
 illile, < by yonder 
 isiHc, C way 
 
 cAdi'in, by 
 same way. 
 
 the 
 
 3) Indefinite Form. 
 
 , . , , I 1 )from 
 
 cnbi,* I some- euiulo, rf^pfne 
 alicubi, i" ichtre ulieuude, [^^^^^ 
 
 n?i)iam, some- 
 w/iere 
 
 ui-qnaui", any- 
 where 
 
 ublque^, every- 
 where 
 
 ubivis. in every 
 IfossilAe place 
 
 utioblque, in 
 both jAaces 
 
 alibi (alias) else- 
 where 
 
 undique, from 
 every jdace 
 
 quo, \to some 
 aliquo, s place 
 
 5 
 
 quoquani, to any 
 place 
 
 quovi;». to e^-ery 
 possible place 
 
 qna, \ 
 aiiquil, f 
 
 by some 
 way 
 
 utrimqne, /rom |Ulrnque, to both 
 
 t)oth sides \ sides 
 
 aliunde, from alio, to another 
 
 elsewhere place 
 
 qH!Tquani,6yany 
 
 way 
 quSque (upque 
 
 quaque), every 
 
 way 
 qnavisi, by every 
 
 posdble way 
 
 alia (rare) by an- 
 otlcer way. 
 
 > Tlierc i^ no doul)t that tliis ca;-e was not an ablative oriu'inally. It had most proba- 
 bly the same form at» the dative endiuir of nouns {di\ which probably had ori<,nn.illy a 
 locative meaniu", and the final i of which wa?» dropped in the courr'e of time.— ^ or 
 utrubi The locative cases of vter are either anteclassical. or po^t(•]assical ; but vtrnbi 
 was u^ed in the official language of the Pretorian edict.— 3 the four adverbial cases oiille 
 and iste (ille illinc etc.) are chieflv antecla8^•ical.— * The forms cubi and cnide are only 
 used after «i or m. bein"' written 'in one word with these conjunctions (sicubi. necmide). 
 
 
 quilibet, and uterlibet are extremely rare ; of vt€7'Vis no locative cases are m use. 
 
 Remarks on the Synopsis. 
 
 Obs. 1. According to the common theory the local adverbs of the first and second 
 cases are cimsidered as compounds ot ibi, vbi, inde and unde. But it is evident that 
 bi and tide are locative endings, added in the same way to the stem of the demonstrative 
 td\ as lo those of all the otht-r determinatives. 
 
 Obs. 2. Those determinatives which are formed by suffixes {idem, qvtcunqrie, qiiisqne 
 etc.) take the locative case-endiiiirs before the suffix, the same as the regular case-eud- 
 inirs in the corresponding adjectives, as: ibidem (.from idem), vblque (instead of cublque, 
 
 from quixque). . _ , , , ^. / !,• 
 
 UBS 3 The interrocative root cu drops the c m the first and second locative cases {vbi, 
 vnde, ublque instead of ct<bi, ctmde. cifblqve). but not in aliquis and its collateral form 
 quis (some), which make alicubi, alicunde. cubi, cunde. 
 
 Obs. 4. In the definite form hie (instead of hi-ce) forms its first and second locative 
 cases //7(;and Ai/w (contracted, probably, from hibice and hinde-ce); the third locative 
 case being hHc (which corresponds lo the dative hnic in the same way as eo to the as- 
 sumed daTive edi). Thus are formed the locative cases of Ule and iste which, in ante- 
 classical language had the collateral forms illic and istic. 
 
 Obs. 5. Quisquam forms not vb'iqiiam, but vsqva?n which, probably, is corrupted from 
 vlnqiiani. by dropping the i. and clianging b into 8, according to the analogy of asjxtrtare 
 mu\ osttndere {iuf'X. ot abjfortore. oOte/idere). 
 
 Obs. 6. The adv(>rbs formed with suffixes generally change the ending nde of the second 
 case into ndi, as undique, indidem (instead of vndcque, indedem). Alius, in the second 
 case, makf s cdiunde (inst. of alinde) according to the analogy of amliunt, in place of audint. 
 Obs. 7. It is probable that the locative ending i attached to the name of cities, and a 
 few other nouns {d</ini, run, hvini). is nothing but the ending bi of the first locative 
 case. After dropping b, the i. \n names of cities of the first declension, has been con- 
 tracted with the characteristic a in the same manner as the genitive-ending i, and both 
 forms became thus identical. . ^ ^ 4 \ 
 
 Ors 8. Several prepositions {ad. inter, propter, propter, circa, post, ante, tenus, versus), 
 and the semi-pnposition itsque. enier compositions with the third or fourth locative 
 cases, which are either prelixed or suffixed to them. The locative cases, in this con- 
 nection, partly retain their locative meaning, partly express the relations of time, modal- 
 ity and cause. I'lius are formed the conjunction and adverb quoad (as far), ana the 
 adverbs hueusque, eo».<qu^, hactenus, eatenus (thus {iir),idiquafenns (in some degree)^ gwo- 
 usQue and qualmus (liow far), quocirca and quajwopttv (from what reason), praterea (be- 
 sides», ihttvea (meanwhile), proptered (tiierefore), 7>o*/^« and jwsthac (afterwards . antea 
 and anteh.w (before this time), quorsum (for what purpose; inst.ol quoversum), alwrsum 
 and horsum (botli anted.), quoquoversus (in whatever direction). 
 
 Rem. 5. In reL^ard to the syntactical use of the locative form-adverbs 
 the following rules should be noticed : 
 
 1 The locative cases of ^'/ix are used both in iNTEunoGATrvE sentences (§421), and 
 in relative clauses. The cases of qvicunque and 9»i6Y/?/i^; belong exclusively to the kela- 
 T VE from (see n 4'tr foil ). Tlie cases of nter are confined to anteclassical language. 
 
 2 In re-ard tc! tlu' KKLATivE use of the local adverbs, the rules for relative adjectives 
 {%imi 3(>H 30(M must ])e applied as far as they are applicable to adverbs. If they have a 
 
 ocal adverb of the definite form leW, um}e,eo. ea) for an antecedent their cases need not 
 am-ee with each other, but the relative takes the case required by the construction ol its 
 own ch.use. the same as ii, relative adjectives (§ 3»;S). as : Dejectusnullomodo esse potest 
 inde ubi non fuit, he can ]>y no means have been ejected/mm a place (thence) where he 
 has not been. Cic. Ca'C. 12 (see Ex. l-d). , , . , ^ 
 
 8 in the DEFiNiTK form the cast-s of ille and iste are mostly anteclassical, rarely occnr- 
 rin.' in classical lanirua-e. and never if restricted by a relative adverb, as : Lo redieruut 
 unde profecii erant\not illuc or istuc), they returned to the place (thither) whence they had 
 
 *^T The use of the four locative cases follows in every respect the roles 011 those prepo- 
 sitions whose place they take. This usage often difters from the English idiom : 
 
 (a) We often use the equivalents of the first locative case where the Latin uses 
 those of the second. This is especially the case when, accordini? to § 443, ^o 3, the 
 action is represented as occurring at a place, but with an outward direction. ^\ here- 
 ever in this instance, the Latin must u^eex With the ablative ol a noun as an equiva- 
 lent of the English on ov at, the second locative case nuist be used if the place is 
 ndicated by an adverb, as : r//rfM)otissimum ordiar y UA^?-^ had I better begin ? Cic. 
 Ro-c. Am. 1, l.-^icilia vndique cincta periculis est, Sicily is surrounded everywhere 
 with dan«'ers. Cic. Leg. Man. 11 (i. e. dangers threaten //-cm all ])oints).-Muliis7//n7?i- 
 Que interlectis, many having been killed 0« both sides (the killing being an action cioue 
 at, a place, but with outward direction). Ca;s. B. G. 7, 42. (Ex. 7-11). 
 
218 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 m Vcrhs which ronnire the. proposition ad or in with the accupativc, must be con- 
 «trnecl with Th.' Tunu) ocativ.- case, althon-h we us.^ in En-lish the rq.nvalents of 
 t he f.r't (VJ-'T K • rm R <i<)- "••«' heloMi: the xovh^ pernn7re(^o i.eloM:.'). ac 
 
 conven-ire (to ass.-mble in), irnponere and injwere (f place ;";• ' ^- , /'\?,,f''..l "f/ ^""v 
 pcrti.ient. this cI.h-h not b-lon- ^//^re (/i^rf) -Cniiwo (not t^*0 '^ ;;';J ;'' VMrVheV.-is 
 Arrived ///.m-A» principes convenCrunt /A.7y >he clnef. a^J'mblc(^^^^^^^^^ 
 i.avihus. atque eo niilitibus injecti. alter he had .o.zed 'he ship, a 1 ^'"1 Plj< ^^^ 
 diers /A^/-^. Ci«>^. B. G. 7. 58. -Hoc /oa/ 7^ ^/w Hp.'chll)at this '"'"^^^. f,^X. fi"^ J^^^^ 
 different Net) 2 6 (E\'. 12-lo).-Instead of the laclviii<r third case ofrvdlx.^, tlie first case 
 nS^ fj\i:;J;i^nosUy with disoUere and .^i.u//./-.; ^'"f i;''^"i.^!;"j,!;:''Xtn' ll 
 esscf melius qn;un ilhi.n /<./.sv//^am di^r.dere (not to .U-p-«ft for ' ' .v ;^^; , • J; ,^- ti^V^'. J' ^^ 
 -Quum Ponipejus «./.vr/vam diini(hV»r (is not allowed to -. anyuheu). 11>. o, ,1, .i. 
 So ' nee mqmiin di'^cedehnm \ instead of ' nee <vm<nun . ic. '"/•.'• ^,,, ,.,„ 5,. .,^,. 
 (c\ The Latiii uses the f<»(-kth cask instead of the Kn<r ish fir>t case {qva «.'^- ' 1; ' 
 ni ' nil - • vl,ere^\ if the place is not cnceivd as a detinite an.l cnnstanl point but as 
 ^^rn^^o^ 1^ line space: Ut ei iic-t vairiln Q'»! (not ///yt) velit (to ruam where he 
 likes Cic Or -Spati i.n v^/.i llnnien intrrnnttit (th.' space H'lnre he river does 
 
 l„„.-,n.t sua, .be r,-„ul,lic >;:.f. "'■> ^'Jl^, ^,^/^^ '^,;^ V^'; prluus'!, ;;^ . h' proceeded 
 it-i own <''reatness. Liv, pi;ei. — /v»^ int^mtn *'*^-'' ','• n n- c ,. tt^- m 90 
 
 the ablative neuter of absolutely used ''''"^ '\''J t-iu-.M ' Thus eo freouently has the 
 
 manner the loral've fO niu.t ''«"-';;,^,"„ ",',!., ' ,'" ",,,,tiv,- of n,v„ns. as ib rcjicle- 
 Sr:';;^!^; ?X"r.VtI.e?C-o r^PV.:d."uv. «. ... «ee S «... oB. 2 
 
 Poinpeju^, non reciisilre so* qiiin 
 
 iiulllus \v 
 
 ;ii>^ iini)e!;ln>r existimaretnr. si sine maxiiiio 
 
 I'ouipejii», in'ii i..<..ii.-<..v. . V- .1 '..;..,.,.»«;,)///: /^////j trmere'' esseiit pro^ressie. <':e 
 
 detrimento le-iuues Ca-aris '^^-^.e/^'^'^'l' ^V/' '/^, ^. v^%un\x C c Kan . (i. 1.- 5. Vi.it» 
 B. C. 45.- 4. Nemo est quin« 'dnrU qua n ihi >^^l^J^:^{^ ^j^i\. .^s. or,.- 0. Ko vnde 
 
 .entei.tia lenior ut ;'''.;'r/'::\;.M'l:|mu; CiV- V 2 ♦ "_!' T.' 'ou pr,us elO.it locum editum^» 
 discedere non oportuit»», reveitilmui Uc. A . ^. it;. __ \^,' , ^^^.j,.,,, ;„ omnem 
 
 convenerant. C:es. B G .^, l'»-— '-^: \ _',,." r,.„^ n A i 40 _ U K» quum introe-is-*, 
 detractis. .0 U-ionarios'^» "I'l'tes i.nposuit C.es B. G 1 ^, J.^^ .J„^^ ^^, ,„ ^ in- 
 circumspicias'^6 ut i/«/^ exTn possit. Cato K. K. 1. -s. i-'- ».-»•>' ^ 
 
 to bein^ consi lered,- ^ ;-'' ';? ;'f;'•;^.^L" \ p^^^^^^ ' to stand' 
 
 _- 7 rashly.- «there is n-jbody but t^^'^V",,;',' it has in its proper iieMninir. Transl. : 
 with the construction w//i = in '^'^ 'j'.f, /'''V; ,j'^? (j^'-^ _ ti^/Wre o/>r>/^/i/, supply 
 that the punishment should ^>^;,^;7'^«' ^^l^Ja^ ,^^^ ; transl. : so as to be. 
 
 'nos\ we oii!4ht to have lelt.— y ^ '^V. '[ ' „ "is /^J nafilra natiiial formation of their 
 free towards all directions.- '* to *\'-«^v up-- ^oji i"iknlere to rout.- i» r-f'/^r^ 
 Country.- >« oo«/^n?W, to bo ^•^"lV'^!',-;\ .'Ji''^;"^-'".. anrc^Sdt.) offer.- " /.^^i^ 
 to slay.- 20 advanced.- ^ en Q>nh''- ^'5« i^'^'^al ? l/rolr/to enter - » to look around. 
 nai-ius mUes, a (foot) soldier ol the legions.- mtroire, to enicr. 
 
 RELATION OF PLACE. 
 
 219 
 
 tcnditi mattire' ctitn oxercitn perveniat. Cic Mnr 9 22.- 16 Unum ^{5 a";;"^<""J^^t. 
 diffici'e crat. vix Qvn^ t^iniruli* carri» dneerentnr». Ctes. B. G. 1. 6. - 1.. MedOam prae- 
 d cant> in ft pa fratris Hii membra in eis locis gvd se parens perseqnerqurs. d^>s - 
 na?is«e Cic Lo- Wan. 9, 22.- 18. His ex manubiis» Athenilrum arx'o, gna ad men- 
 dfet^M^4.7t esromaUi Nep.Cim.2.5.-19. ^orem jam dedflcamn 7/^ nihil divmatt- 
 r,ne^3 oput sit Cic. lio^c. AiS. 34.-20. Ne hodie quidem scire videmtnt quo amenU<z 
 proj^rcssi sitis. Liv. 28, 27. 
 
 Ecm. 6. The other adverbs applied to relations of place are : 
 
 1) Some adverbs derived from, or compounded with, nouns, as 
 
 coelitus (instead of de calo), from\{oTa^ and ror%i auto/ doors, out o( 
 
 heaven* the house, 
 
 funditns, /rr>7n tf)e bottom, thoronghly. 'obviam,* on the icay. 
 radicitus, from the root, thoroughly, percgre (from ager), abroad. 
 
 ri ttet bj. ' 
 
 2) Local prepositions, used with the force of adverbs, as : 
 
 ad versus (adversnm) opposite (rare) 
 
 ante, before, in front (rare). 
 
 circa, circum and circiter, around, 
 
 all round. 
 citra, on this side. 
 contra, opposite, (figuratively: on 
 
 the confrari/)' 
 coram, in his (my, thy etc.) pres- 
 ence. 
 extra, without (outside) 
 
 infra, below (rare). 
 
 intra, within (rare). 
 
 juxta, alongside, 'near by (rare). 
 
 pone, behind (rare). 
 
 prope. near, votfar. 
 
 subter, b^pfoth (rare). 
 
 supra, on the upper side, on top, above 
 
 (rare), 
 ultra, beyond, furth^. 
 
 3) A number of adverbs, derived from prepositional, verbal or obsolete 
 roots which are comprised under the name of adverbial particles: 
 
 ritro. on this side. 
 desiiper. from abone. 
 cxadvers'um, over anninst. oiJposife. 
 extrinsecus./rom witliout. 
 insuper. on top (besides). 
 intrinsecu-./rowi tvithin (rare). 
 intro. inside. 
 
 intns, within. 
 
 poiTO. forward, further on. 
 
 procul*. far. at a distance. 
 
 protentis, onward, forth with. 
 
 seorsum. separate, apart. 
 
 sursum. upward. 
 
 ultro, biyond. 
 
 introrsum, inward, to the inside. 
 Jicm 7 For the amount of the dimensions of objects {i. c. the distance 
 in space, or the measure in len^ith etc.), the following grammatical forms 
 
 ire used : 
 
 1 If tlie amount of the measure depends on one of the nouns or adjec- 
 tives expressinir dimensions (^o;?.^//r/<7^ etc., ?^w.(7?/.«?etc.), the rules ff>ven f()r 
 the construction of these nouns or adjectives must be applied (see ^ 498). 
 
 2 If the amount of tlie measure refers to tlie idea of distance, it is 
 expre««*ed either {a) in the form of an attribute made dependent on 
 one of the general nouns expressins^ distance, as mterxallum, apatium, iter 
 (len<rth of 1i iournev, march or road), or (b) in the form of an object 
 directly dependent on the governing verb. In the former instance the 
 nouns denoting the distance {i ntervallum etc.), and in the latter instance 
 
 1 To intend to iro. to be bound for a place.- ' early.- ^ ^»/a is used instead of vt ea ; 
 hence it is followed by ihe subjunctive.- « accessory predicate: sinaiy.-^ carrvs, a 
 cair 1« rf'/oT to be driven.- ' they (people) report that.- «was hkely to pursue.- 
 o'booty.- »0 the acropolis.- " south.— " to carry.— i^ prophecy. 
 
 * The termination itus of substantive adverbs is originally the perfect participle of 
 
 ^'"t F,yras and fori^ are the dative and accusative plural of the obsolete noun f'>r<J- ^o- 
 ras is used when the construction would require the name of a city m the accusative , 
 
 \ Obviam in classical prose occurs only in combination with verbs of motion. 
 
220 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 the measures themselves arc placed either in the accusative or in the 
 ABLATIVE case, as : . . ^. , 
 
 pa^s;Sl'op;wiHbufrtUetreU\. three thousLd paces (mile.) rfi./an^ Iro.n the 
 town. . 
 
 If the distance is not determined by definite numeral expressions, the 
 attributive phrase (in tlie tirst case) is an adjective i)hrase, ami tiie object- 
 ive phrase (in the second case) is formed^ by an adveub or one ot the 
 QUANTITATIVE toriu-adjectives. See ous. 7. 
 
 t^- The measure of distincc may also assume rhc form of a ^vn.iECT. Sec obs. 6. 
 Oi'^ 1 The measure-units empl-.ved here an- those enumerated § 10-t, II. 101. to which 
 we must add fr he me.snre.nei.t of h.r.-er distances th. 'day' ulte^K as a Vl^f 7.:^'-"''' 
 of t e ei ' of a road «Jav"s jouni.-v>, ■.•enrrally in connection with tfj^r as <-r <hrf one 
 Sav'< j in ev wJ.A Adnh Lr. a two days' (three days" journey) : d^y^ni '/';/•';(" /.^'='-.,^ 
 
 which is tw.-nty mi es trom Kouie oy lue r^aiariim lo.m m >, u.y. ....... :,•'■■■■,•.■."■:• 
 
 nVil -s on-J Vari-o K. II :}. -i.-M'm viresvn>a,i liphl'^'n, within twenty mde^ Liv. 5 4 
 
 were encampi.f- near the baulc of the Anio, three miles (from the city). C.c. lirut. 1 1. 
 
 Obs 2. In the u<e of the acccsativk or ablative of disfince a distinction ;.""=*t^\« 
 m-ufe \a\ whetlier the distance is conceived as a simpi.k kxtknt or h-n-tli, as lor ins . 
 Sf Ic- ' h f jonrnev. or of a n.ad ; or (/>) as the distance of two i-o.nts fuom eacii 
 OTHKR or as the d stan e of an action from a -ivea point. In th.- lormer ca.e we use 
 ah ays lie accusative; in the last c.i-e either ih. abi.ativk or the accsativk may be 
 e tiSved ^IMu ArciTslTivK of distance must, lie c..n>idere.l as a compi.ktin.; obj.-c of 
 fhe lei • exf nt .iNM)Ki;sTooi>(l)ein.4 neare->t relate.', to the comph-tin.jr accusaiive a ter 
 L/U\ /r '/? -tc § 4^^^^^^^^^^ The nature of the ablative of distance is tln.t ol an ab a ive 
 of piFFKB^ the two p..ints. This ablative in this, as m any other, relation 
 
 is originally an exponent of the preposition 'by . bee ^ .ni. 
 
 Obs" .3 The AcrnisATivR of distance is especially u<e.l as object of the verbs of 
 MOTION ( vroticl^ci proc:d"r,K ani',>illre, etc.> and .)r the verbs donotin- kxtrnt, as pafere, 
 «eSl o ex^ A'^ di^ deem mVlia pri^^mani (or derrm miUiym pn.<<>>n>n 
 
 Sum) / «oVcX / v.. On that dav w.. tr ivelle.l ten miles.-^>/v,. rr^nn^nu^enrni f.'h,i. 
 ^!taZ^^^^^ (ory>./-/iM60 the coast of Germany extends about 800 miles. 
 
 Obs 4 Either the accitsativk or the ablative i- u?ed as object of the verbs cxprcssincr 
 distauceors nation, especi .llvof a/>.v.sv,(/.,s-^7/r,«.s-.^ (witha^ int.r.vltru, aim, d.-notiui,^ 
 ?l e poin of distaiu;.; W-e § 440) : Ro.m sM^elni mWibus (or ''^Z/^^'V' '^''^'Vn^Sl'ron 
 abe^Udi>^tat. est). Rome is sixree.i miles distant from the .«ea. bee Kx. <»-ll.-In tlin^ "'»- 
 efruc i n the distance is someti.nrs placed in the oenitive xyl.u-h ca<e must be <;'>"^»'ler- 
 el as an attribute depend-Mit on the ide i of ^patiuni, inhrmflum, J>'\\'^'' ;'"<^'''^f'>"; :.^:..- 
 JVoUnca-^fra pmpJibrin,',.><q,u^aberantbid'n {i.e. i/er), we hnrned to the camp which 
 was at tne distance of a two days' journey. Cic. Att. 5, K) bee Lie. Att. d, i <. 
 
 Ob^ 5 VVh.'U the .rovernin.,' verb contains an action which is represented to occur at 
 a distance Ihim some p dnt, the object expn-ssin-,' thi- distanc is i^'-n.-rallv in th- abla- 
 fiic e's re ' ntiv in th.. accusative, as : OppUluni condid^runf unnique mdUbu. P^ts^^"''^ 
 ]^^qHh,q!^ mm>nn pa^su.m infennllo ; or, less frequently, qmnque^ nulha m^^>'f>n> ab 
 Aauiiria thev built a towu tat a dist ince of) five mil.-s from Aiiuih-ja. bee Lv. U- 7. It 
 iiThi.s instance the poitit of distance is not added, the ablative (.(distance is sometimes 
 replaced by a prepositional object with ab (Ex. IS). See § 440, K. 4«. 
 
 Obs 6. The distance mav also be expressed in the form of asiTBTKCT-NOMiNATivE with 
 eZoi-iitere^se\\^ nredic ite. the points of «listanee beiii- designated by the prepositi.ms 
 S alT\^\^'?!^ncl^ cedf.um mUiia stwliOnwi sunt a turbi'io (c.jeloi ad lunnni, 
 ?lt\-e .are two .nilll)..'of stadia from the attnospliero (of the earth) to the moon. Plin. 
 11. N. 2, 21. See Ex. 19. 
 
 Obs. 7. When the amount of distance is expressed indeanitely, the following forms 
 
 ^% ' A uv K UBS OF PLACE, as pvo'^'U, lonqe. prop'^ with the preposi tion ^^ or l<>cal ad verbs of 
 the second locative case, as Poiterodie procui a caUns /lOitts in coUibus consttftrmt, on 
 
 BELATION OF PLACE. 
 
 221 
 
 the next dav the enemy took position on the ^f^l^f^:^''^'^/,^'^^^^^ 
 — Pm-id al'iciinde tar from any place. Cic \ err. 2, 2. 20.— l^"amion'/eef'i/an€in sacrum 
 rvX.?; J/ how f a • is it IVo.n h"-re to the Galilean forest ? CiC. Quinct. 2.5.-0«.';m e^fet 
 S S aSirili,l, when there was a war at such a little distance fvom ^.cilyCic. 
 
 Verr 2 ^2 -Th^ sometimes, but rarely, is used with th." force of spafio or 
 
 i«/^mt//o f.'.llowe.l by a de.inite measure in the accusative, as: \ ercmgefonx locum ca^fns 
 den^lital: Ararim lonqe millia passuum sedecim, V. .^elected a point sixteen miles distant 
 
 '''Z^:^:^"'E'^^^cr}i^'(^^^^^ always in the accusative), as /a.^.m^^/an- 
 tumtanhuidem m'dtum (van-ly nvdto): Veteres ,ie«cieiunt quantum a terra f al^- 
 sTthe ancierts did not know how much the sun is distant from the earth (did not 
 
 ^'i; Th";^;^:^^"oS-m^u.m^y ^tlie^ccusativO of ATTnxBX^rrvE. adjective. phm.e. 
 de otiiK' a comparative mcaslire. as : JHc locus fcquofere spatio ab vtnsqxie ca^lr^ahera^^, 
 this t.lace was about at an equal distance (cqui.iist.oit) from ])oth camps Cies. R G. 1. 43. 
 See Kx 20 -rr-Ifthe measure is a pn.portional one (byy>ar.s with an ordinal), the phrase 
 nuista'lways be in the ablative, as ^hrcurvis qvarta parte co'h asoleabest, Mercury is 
 from the sun at a distance of one fourth of the heavens. I lin. 11. ]\. 2, b. 
 
 OBS 8 To the local relation belongs the phrase 'to larder on\ and the phrases express- 
 in- direction towards the points of ihe compass (south Mde. northeni aspect, etc.). To 
 bonier on" is «reneiallv expressed by attinq^re with an accu-ative. or by a^a^ere with a 
 dative or the preposition ad; also by continen, when the borders on all sides of a coun- 
 trv are «dven In r.-ard to nations the phrases \fi/ntwnwi, conjinem. vicinum esse\ixre 
 emi) love.l sJc Ex. 25-25. If a locality is .les.-nated by its direction towards the points 
 of hecompass, objective phrases are us.'d with the verb spedare uv rergere, constmed 
 with an accusative after in or ad, as : Ora Germanice in {ad) septentnonem spectat (or 
 Virqit). the coast of Gemiany /(/cf.< the north. Muas qua ad occidentem soleir. vergtt, 
 the western slope of a inouniain. Ex. 2.5, 20. 
 
 1. Nemo potest biduo ..,yi;..7^/./a mil/ia P^^!,'"^"}.""^^"^^^'-^- .^V'ie?cTni^^ ?n^ 
 olniam Pr-e^.TainJ ^ij/^ pa^mitn c.J^/..^^ hi - 7 ^ - ^«^^^^Ji'^J^^eher 
 
 Sla^pa^uum :^;;S .^/ ae^B G 5^^ Casm. hostiutn a,./,/^L millibus pas- 
 
 ^m . . c1o i huU^^^^^ C:e^. B. G. 2. 7.- ♦?. Z ima quinque d.Sru.n dr.r^h 
 
 r • iV rine a est Liv :0O 30 - 7. Veniidius bidui spado ab Ant.mio abest Plane Cic. 
 Vmi ri7- 8 Is^ K^^^^^^^ Lencadem stadia^ c.ntumvigintij:\c Fam 16, 2.- 
 
 Q T :.inMnV abest a L rino xviil mUHa passuum. Cic. Clu. 9.- 10. ^sculapn templum 
 rmiS^M ":,, nwv^^^ distat. Liv. 4.",, 28.- IL Ca^sivellaui.i finis a manti- 
 
 mis civ, t us^mn dividit.quod appellalnr Tamesi«4. a man ^irci-er mt//t«6 p; s^ 
 ^l>. //.!,;/;/ ('.p^ H (i 5 11—12 \iiovistus endemcastia promnvit*. et m<//i/>'/s 
 passuum ... a (..sons c-; - - ---{e coiis. .t^ C^ ^R ^^i fi^jTi^itmnS^S 
 JSdlt '^'b 2 'S^- 1^1 an i^KU qtiind ctm fere miHium ^«^^o.castra ab Ta- 
 r imf ..suit iJv 2.5 9.-10. tiuiuctius qui.que 7nillia^ ah Thehis posuit castra. L.v^ 
 aV 1 J 7 LacetVi^^^^^^ lonirum, (sol) in latitudinem V'^'l^""^.'!^"'" Jf/f Im'^^ 
 
 niteiis h !)G lilt O'l'/rhiqentos iude fere pa^sus constituit (to place) sigiia {the stand- 
 ; A) b -i >) - 18 losies ad ca^tra C.esaris eontendCM-.mtio, et ah milhbus passuutn 
 ninn; rs^i» R ^i^dmhus castra posn5runt. Ctes. B. G. 2. 7.- 19. Inter nov,ssimu,n>i 
 aTnen?t 1 ostrutn pr num»*^ uon ampliu. qtiiuisaut senis millibu- passuum |"tererat>2 
 Jll'^i''^- •_! V ("esar pe.lum viu'inti directis Iater.busi4 dnxit»*, ut cmus fossie 
 
 ^Av^ tan^'niAtm patCret qlvdmn^^ summiC fossae'- labrai« distilrent. lb 7 ri.- 
 ^i Perfie fti t cimi ndiqiue ie-innes mnqnnm ./^z^^wm abessent. pn.nam le-Onem 
 « ,'b ^ re ni-' ad ) Iri lb. 2, 17.- 22. Prima acies hastati^i erant. nianipuh^^ qmnde- 
 c iS tes ^^^mndimm spafium. Liv. 8, 8 - 23., C.esar LabiCnum cutn leirmni- 
 b s'tribns n eas partis qme Menapio^-'-^ adiin'jnnt pr..hcisci jubetctes. B G. », 33.- 
 2 Tt- redone qua Tuscus'^* a-er Ihrnano adjac^f, tuta omnia fuSre. Liv 2 49^- 
 25. H-ec Jens i^e^^upm^^ Nep. Pat. 4, 1.- 20. Briian- 
 
 1 To traver7p7oc^ed).-2 tb^HercviiiMn forest.-» a stadiinn was 125 Ronian feet.-- 
 4 the Tl-imc- -Mhr is dependent on dlcidU : 'separates at a disance of. 
 
 iu. r.v;.--^^^ to take po-inon.-« supply passuvm, which is Irequently 
 
 mKle s o -^ haulquaqvam tantundem, by no means as much (,. e. considerably le.s). 
 ^.0 to arch.-n LLimum aq.mn, the rear-guanl.-^^ van-guard, snppy 
 
 Non ainntiu 
 »3 cana 
 top of the 
 
 aqmen. 
 is the subject of intererat: There, was^no inore ^-I^J^f;--^-:^;^^-^;; 
 
 iV; "f ^^ Sic^ct^iar'Sd;;.--- ;« draw.-- bottom -n §309^- the 
 ♦ . r tho r..,v. g \r^ R 31 -»» labrinn, lip (here edqe).-"-^ marchine with their bag^ 
 lT<tel=' tll^ liastlii."thl Ir^t divMon in every legion.-*^^ squads.-^» the country of 
 the Menapii. See § 453, R. 70.-"-* Tuscan. 
 
222 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 riae alter anfrnlus» qni est nd Cnntinm', nd orientom solem^, inferior ad maidiew.^ 
 spec'at ; a\wrvergit ad Ilispaiiiain atqiie occidentein i-olern''. Cujs. B. G. 5, 13. — 27. Aqui- 
 tuuia spectat inttr occdsum solin^ el oeptentriunen. lb. 1, 1. 
 
 III. RELATION OF TIME. 
 
 g 549, The relation of time is expressed 1) by prepositions (g 424, It 
 1. 2); 2) by adverbs of lime ; 3) by substantives or attributive phrases in 
 the accusative or ablative; 4) by clauses introduced by relatives or by 
 conjunctions (see B. VI.). 
 
 Jiem. 8. The adverbs of time are 1) temporal form-adverbs, i.e. such as 
 corr('Sj)ond in form to the form-adjectives and locative form-adverbs (R. 3) ; 
 2) adverbs derived from substantives, or adjectives; 8) adverbs of various 
 formation, comprised under the name of adverbial Time-particles. 
 
 Ob?. Tho temporal form-adverbs are more irregular in their forms than the local form- 
 adverbs (R. 4), l)L!ini,' eitlier l)orri)vved from the^ie vas hinc,inde), or havinir a peculiar 
 form of their own, pi'e!*ervin<,'. however, the roots of the form-adjectives from whieb 
 thev are derived. Tlu-y ino!»tlv corresipoiid to the tirst locative case, answering the ques- 
 tion ' when' (aiialoLr«ius to 'where"). Hut a few have the lonuulion of the other cates 
 (quoad, qumiisque, eousque, quatenus, hactenus). 
 
 Jle/n.i). To liie int('rr()l^^ative form of the determinatives, numerals, and 
 
 quantitatives (j^^ 258, 201) beloni; : 
 
 quando. when; quoad, qiiouftque and quatenvs, up to what time; qiioties, how often ; 
 qiKimdiu. how loni,'. Thrre is no form analoi:ons to the second locative case, which is 
 expressed prepoMtionaiiy (ex quo iempore,//w/i uv dnce which time). 
 
 To the relative form bclonu; : 
 quandocunqHe.\\\\<.'XHi\Qr\ quoad, a^ far as; quoties and quamdiii, rntcd as coTrc\a.i[\C9 
 in the meanini^ '«>' (see § 3ti!t). 
 
 To the deliiiite lorm belons^: 
 1) cot respond in<^ to the first locative case of hie. is. and idem,h\\t without showinj? the 
 demonstrative roots: iVm/^c. now*(eorri'sp«>iulin,<; to hie); iu/n [or tune), tlien (.corre- 
 spondin*^ to ibi-\) ; nmuL at the same time (corrt'>pondin«; to il/idim) ; 2> with the form 
 of the second locative case of hie aid is : hiiie, then (silver Laiinity) ; dtindt. and iiide 
 (deifi), then, after this, later; abhinc. ai;o; dehi/ic. henceforth: 3) according to the for- 
 niaiion of the third locative case of hie luid i-i : adhuc, up to this time, still, as yet§ ; 
 hue (rare) up to this time; hueu><que (\w>\.-c\ii^^\cii\), up to this time; tou>^que, up to 
 that lime; 4) with the form of the fourth loc;itive case ; hacttnnt. tlms far. and una, 
 at the same timti (with the meaning of ninud) ; 5) tin; numeral /o/i#-.s (so often), and all 
 the cardinal and onlinal adverbs; tj) liie quantitative tanidiu, so long. 
 
 To tlie indetinit»* form l)el()iii^ : 
 1) corresponding to the first locative case of q^iis, aHqulo, quidam, quisquam, qvi^qne, 
 and alius : Quando^, aliquando, and quondam, at some time, lorineily, once ; unquu/n^ 
 ever, and nunquam, never {nonnunquam, sometimes; nunqnam nou. always): usque 
 (rare), all the time [semper, always] ; alias (rare), at anotlier time ; ti) the numerals and 
 qiianiiratives aliquotits, several times; plerumque, mostly, generally ; aliquauidiu, for 
 some time ; jwstnmo. at last. Here belong, according to their seuse: soipe, ofteu, and 
 identidem (trom the demonstrative idem), repeatedly. 
 
 Obs. 1. Tlie English inierroirative ' when'' is expressed by quando both in interroga- 
 tive sentences, and in interrogative clauses (§ 422», as (m<indo in> ix(aeura.<sp aut eogifatse 
 arhitramini / Wlieii do you believe me to have caiH'cf for, or to have tlionglit of, the-^e 
 things y Cic. Or. 1, 22, 102.— Non intellhjil ur quando obnpat senectus, it is not noticed 
 when (at wliat time) old age creeps uj»ou us. Cic. Sen. 11. As a pure relative, the English 
 
 ^ angle. — 2 \\^q luodern Kent. — ^ oritnt sol, east. — * south.— ^ oceidens sol, west. — 
 • inter occTiJium olivet seiitentrlonts, the north-west. 
 
 ■ - - - • - "- " -'^ ^'•the 
 
 me 
 
 * Just now=iiunc ipsurn (Cic. Att. 10, 4, 10 ; 12, 1« ; 12, 40, 9.y. = modo (p. 22.5. 11. It^ if 
 time is just past. V^n- jam = nunc. se»' p. 224, Obs. 2. X"nc often ref«rs to past ti 
 {=tumy~ flbi, sometimes-////// (Liv. :il, 14).— § 'Still \ referring to present time, is also 
 expre>sed by etiamiiunc (ftiamnum, Cic. Fam. 10. 10) ; if referriuir to jta^t time, bv etiani' 
 turn (p. 316. Obs. 1). 'iStiir before c<<niparaiives = f/i«//Msiill larger, e/i'/m majo)j; aa 
 adversative adverb=/aw^n.— XQuando, dewoimg '■at some time\ is used after ne^si, etc. 
 Instead of aliquando. See P. I., p. 259, li. 4. 
 
 RELATION OF TIME. 
 
 223 
 
 ' whm ' is rendered bv the ablative of the relative adjective, or ^y pecoiij unction t^vwtt;. as 
 /^/i/ /.//V;;^!"^ 't/m (or qvo) GeiTnanos 6'a//i tir/«/. f //?.=m;.r/Mhere was a time when 
 the Gauls exceeded tlic Gennans in bravery. CaiS. 13. G. b, -i4. . . , 
 
 OB- 2 y!/i7tm////r/ and 7./o//./a;nl)otli correspond to the En-lish 'once , meaning «^ 
 J,J>i;/t \ The En-lish '..//r.' is rendere.l 1) by the numeral ;idveib ^.7/i.ni it m^^^^^ 
 W' /i e a 4nole) time as JSo/a se?nel, scd saw, i»<>t once, but olten. Cic. Att. 1, ^^;J-— 
 o? It /henl- ( bv t he teni)^^^ adverb olim when it means either 'o//c« ujwn a time , 
 or ^^;^^ l!ml\u/X^iu.ed <.. ati indefinite period of time ^^^^^^^P^ ^^^ 
 linliLit as it wa< once foimerlv) the custom. Cic. tam. 0, 1(>, lb.— 3) quondam is usea 
 o?;t. r MS s nonvm /y^^^^^ of sin-le acts that happ.ned at a former ckhtain, but not 
 
 ' c^ mS l^nnlTltv'h^non^^^^^^^^^ (the 'same as dim) in ho-sfu^Unusinimex- 
 
 i^iimat^tur^^^^^^^^ thoulditto be most lenient toward foes. Cic. Rose. Am. 
 
 ^-l^l^rcqu^dau, (not olim) r.missi a Py^rho sine jn-efio «^^^^t^/S-^w thoS Sn- 
 ftJrmer time) tho-e that were captuivd bv Pyrrhns returned, being sent back without ran- 
 «oi Liv 22 T-A) AnquaMil is used'of a time mevAy sv pix»^ed , or 9"»^f ^y ^"^'^'^^.^"'l 
 fr.ne iVre-^c'nt ori.a-t an.l mav be rendered according to the connection by o.ce.aiane 
 
 ?iS^Se^^^^ 
 
 l\'e examples e^^^^^^ or'o/im. could be used. . ^^ '^I'cTa' JuliL'e timr^SS 
 
 and quondam are used with the force of oUm and ohm V" "'f^^^'^^^'^'^'' ^'""^' ^"^^ 
 siicli usages are rare, or belong to poetry, or to non-dassual literatuie. ^ 
 
 Ors '^ Ttmi (tunc) ddnde. inde. mav all three be rendered hy _' then\ Turn w used 
 1) oT^wen s th I ocain-c.lat s<une 'former time specifi(;d, being opposite to nmw, 
 I' nid^umcTaqrL ncolTbant, those who then, (at r//anime) ^""^^^^'V-lV^.^f^ >«''d«, 
 C\e Ken 2 2- 2) t conin-cts two past actions with each other in re-ard to he time of 
 fi eir ™ence Tlie action intro.lnced may be conceived as comcident with the one 
 ivVm'd to b >//;,, ,.r as imm<-diately subsequent upon ^t: ' then, tliereuiwn, at that 
 vomnl^ a< lla eo miruut v> aliquamdiu in veutram partem inehnareiitacies.'rv^ not 
 iX d con^^^^ immissis urbare prima signa hostium condtur. They fouglit so 
 
 1 . f r «?(une m le the ranks vielded on neither side. Then (th_ereupon, at that moment 
 1 e couM o.( e re^^^ advance of the cavalry in order to {conatur) throw the foremost 
 •oons ol 1 e eneu V in», disorder. Liv. 7, :«. neinde^dyiay^ denotes an action which/o^ 
 i/^s- -uu tier a ( c^i 1 never replace tum in the case No. 1. But in he second meaning 
 «h . t« , rul. hs m iv intenhan«'e except if turn, (m account of its double meaning 
 •on mak. 1 scis^ Un b 7,s^'c<,i^/.^.m. horrnn scelerum maehinat^em, statin, 
 «,y /€ m-jW- rf^ tum)arcessVur ^faniius,! immediately called Gabinius he 
 
 over of hc-e crim.t. t<. my louse: then ^afterwards) Statilius was summoned, Cic. 
 on 3 3 Freque tlv the two adverbs var/ with each other, as Turn iiajno dixit 
 ^M/;r/. yt/Vro. Ci He 9. lO.-H^^ inde and hie are sometimes (but rarely) used in 
 ^vdJeTdeind^-IudeSi^ also u-ed in the place of '.a- eotemj>ore\ of ten opposed to 
 wi \v^- Ind^^men^^adUn^ Martias sunt./;om that time there are three months 
 ?o tlH. ides of March. Liv. 30, 5>. For the connection of inde with ab see § 442.t 
 
 Obs 4 Abhine and dehinc (the latter not occurring in Cicero or Caesar) have opposite 
 M,MiificaUons Si meaniiig ' «r/o" (from the tin^e <rf the speak Eubac^^^^^^^ 
 fl^hinc 'hence' 'henceforth' (trom the time of the speaker l.)iwaid). Afjfanc is alwajs 
 ntd fnco necti^^^r^^^^^ a numeral expression of time in the accusative or ablative ; 
 wle^/ refers to an indefinite terminus and stands without any other object, as ; 
 }/a^L;/r««?^r riginfi anms est inortuus, tjie father of these died 22 year* 
 
 uorum i^\"'^' "•;;"', "j;;; 90 vcu-s^ cic Vcrr 2 W —Dehinc ertt rerax tibi. henceforth 
 Sn'the^ltitSl ^w 1 ^^n-Sihd o\l^^ Umt Pcen. 1,2, 101. Abhine must be distin- 
 guished (ronV tlie letiporal adverb arde which may refer both to the time of the speaker, 
 and to the time spoken of. See 11. 13. obs. 1. 2. 
 
 Ob« 5 The En-lish adverbs /rz.^V/y,«nrt*V,a^ lengfh.flnalbj are expressed by ;x?.<^^re»M; 
 dudque\.yt^cmdem Tandem denoU-J X\u^X a st^.te oi l.mg duration is ended *?/ some cn'eiit 
 id tn%h at last): deuique <lastlv. finally) expresses tlie la>t in a series ot e^ents. 
 ilZrn \^V< te force of either but is distiiiirnished from tandem, by always requiring 
 /iS p e ^ i^^ai/ w .\c^ it Iv^M-elented as ended, to be expressly mentioiied : Tandem 
 ot r/^y' / e or imtremo) coqnUi qui sim. at lengih you know who lam. Ter. Andr 3, 4 
 t-Fmnp^urprimLi tos docuit meis consiliis rempublicamesse servata m ; tum posuit, tn^ 
 * For Quando as temporal and causal conjunction, see p. 6t;6 Obs 4 ; p. G8T, Ons. 13.— 
 t r./zrisiinilarly to hie) sometimes refers to a time expressed in the subsequent sentence 
 (Cies. 13. C. 1, bO). 
 
224 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 a nenatu etc. rogdri ; dmiq'/e ipfte vospro salfde {med) rogavif, Pom pPjt;s first showed yon 
 that by my counsels the republic ha.s been sived ; then he put it tbar I wis W;»»t*-'i •>/ 
 the Senate otc. ; lastlv (flmilly) he asked you himself for the h:ipi)inessof my life. Cic. 1 . K. 
 (\„ 7 \{\ —Cum ad regeni imTenusent leffCiti, per mnltos dies comemendi ejus ]X}testas iion 
 est facta : ]X}stremo cinn jam profecti essent, ex itiiu-re convocati sunt, when the envoys liad 
 rome to the kini^, they tor many days did not receive the permission t() see him ; at leni,'tn 
 (histlv at last, tlnally) when they had already dep:irted, tlu^y were called back from their 
 journey Liv 42 25 — /^e'/^i^*/^? isalso used bevond the relation of time, to connect the last 
 link in the enumeration of facts or points, wiihoiit any rei^^ird to their time. It is also cm- 
 ploved with the force of an altirmative particle («5 103», equivalent to deinnm, or to our ex- 
 pression 'in short', 'in a \\o\<r.— Tandem is also used as an exclamatory or emphatical 
 particle, correspondin<r to owv ' in. the. world\ as Quid tande/n vere/niiuf What in the 
 world are you afraid of ? Ca;s. B. G. 1, 40. 
 
 Obs 6 To the temporal form-adverbs beloni; the nninoral adverbs, both cardinal and 
 ordinal ' in re-ard to the ordinals, two forms are distini,'uished. those in umiiml rn^'^oi, 
 li 18) in the use of which there is much uncertainty. Tiro (Cicero s amanuensis), m 
 Cell lb 1 reports that the most learned Koinaiis had been doubtful whether I^n/ipe- 
 jii^ tertium or ttrtio mns>d was correct. They consulted Cicero who declined to decide, 
 advisiu" them to use tlie al)l)reviation tert. con-^nl. Cicero, liowever, always says 
 tertian" Qnartum etc. consul (meanini,' either in his third iiic. consulship, or 'who was 
 three (four etc.) times cofKiU '). In enumerations the form primo etc. is more frecpient, 
 1)rim»rm, if used in enumeration, -renerally iinplyintja real precedence m regard to time. 
 The next links of enumeration are rarelv added as in Kn-,'lish, by stcundo, fertio etc., 
 but bv him, delude, denique. Even aside from enumerations, the lonns sccnndo «ml se- 
 cimdiim verv rarely occur, their place beinj; taken by iterum Uhe second tim.;). lt>rum 
 may also be'rendered ' a'j'iirC ; but ' ayam ' cannot ahvays be expressed by ^^<^''>''>^-.\l 
 is expressed bv iterum when tlie s.vmk action is repeated for the skcono tiiu>;. In ttiis 
 meaniiK^ denuo is sometimes used in its place : Etruna denno (more usually j/frw/zi) re- 
 6^/a/i/^ Etriiria rebelling again (the second time). Liv. ID, 31. When 'a-un 1^ used 
 without reference to the number of repetitions, rnrsuji (sometimes also denuo), but 
 not iterum isemi)loved,as rursus p'ct>em in AvenCmum s.'vocare, to make the piens ayain 
 S^to mo..nt'Av'ent:inus. Cic. Mur. 7, 15. If by ' again ' not a repetition ol the same 
 act. but arestoration or an 'undoing' is understood, it is to be rendered by rursi^'^, never 
 by iterum (deiwo occurring even in tliismeanin,', but extremely seldoai), as quern Media 
 d'icit iir /ecisse rursus exsene adolescentulum. Plant. Men. 4, ->, Gl. 
 Ee7n. 10. To the adverbial particles of time beloiij: 
 1, riiEPOsrTioN.vii ekprkssions with ante, post (botli being used with 
 the'foree of temporal adverbs), //i/er. and ;)/•«.• , , . .. / 
 
 ante, rm^g.7 (before) ; pos^t, posted (after, afterwards) ; a/l'eVI^ Iv'foro this tune; po^ - 
 Aac after this time, in the future ; intereu or interim, meanwhile ; int.rdum, somc- 
 tiines : protenm, forthwith ; j)o/ro (inst. of proro) larther. . , 1 i 
 
 a, PARTICLES with the appearance of piiiMrTiVEs, but dem!)nstrably de- 
 rived from lost (partly still existiiiii) roots, as .....,• 
 heri (or here) vesterdav ; cm*, to-morrow ; jam with its compounds Uanijam^jamdm, 
 iamdu4um.jamprid:'ni) ; dum (in compounds, fi-^mndam, tirdum mhildum etc. see 
 8 408) ; imx, soon ; pridem, some time ago ; stepe, often ; semoer, always. 
 Obs 1 In the combination of ante etc. the terminal ions «?.? and h<7c are the fourth loca- 
 tive cases of is and hie. About the use of ante and jMst as adverbs see 11. 13. 
 
 Ons 2 Jam alreadv is ofren used with the force of n '/»<?, as .S-:?/ y/m ad insfttata 
 pe?qriJ^^ i^^^ Mei us cLe now to the subject. Cic. OtF. 2. 2, 8 - .A/m a^de Irom its vari- 
 ous ami cplicated uses with the force of modal particles o very dilU-rent meainm^s is 
 enpH^cV v tl respect to Ti.>iE,of a state cmceivedto have been ui continued existence 
 fir some time up t« the tim.r sp..k(>n of. In this instance it is, generally, not separately 
 rendered P^fZ-e bein- incluc e.l in the English preseiit-p.'rfeet tense, as : .)fitiridutes 
 
 tinue.l to rule) falreadyl for '23 vears from that tune. Cic. Leir. -Man. 3, ..— Hunt no-^tem 
 Z /-o^r rVvli'a aniL vinnma<. we have been defeating this ^^"•■["y (already) for le 
 last 31 vears Liv «) 3 - In the same man ner the compositions. ;am'a/<.7rt''.i//'('{:^'«- . y^"«- 
 ^;/;!'^V,:;fus!^; in'-ill of which the a.lverb.;.m is redun|u.t n>r Uje Eug .sh idmm ay 
 Jamprid-^m cupio A/era»driam Hsere^ I have long wished to see A c.va liu Cic At ^, 
 5.- (^.y.,</ populus RoinannsjamdiuflimKtt-^s'W^^i the Uo.nan l''yi>'V.!.\;\\;^'\^ 'l^'.^ 
 inglon-(l\.ratime). Cic. Div. in C;ee. ^--Z J^'^ 'l''<i'>^J'i'>^'l'''^''>li'''''^ 
 citicB. that stability of frien.lship of which we have been speaking lor a long while (all 
 
 this lime). Cic. Am. '2-2. (p. 229. 319). 
 Obs 3. The English ' soom ' is expressed 1) by mox ; 2) by bred tempore {<patio) or by 
 
 RELATION OF TIME. 
 
 225 
 
 brevi alone ; 3) bv inafure. Mox is used 1) interrogatively in connection with quam (how) 
 as olZ mox rocV^/m est prandium ? How s<.on will lunch be ready (have been cooked) ? 
 PI ill iiud 2 3 12 - Exspedo quam rmx Chcerea hoc oraHone utatur, I wonder (expect) 
 uw -00 CluVia will u^e this la.iguage. Cic. Kosc. Cm 1, 1,- In connection with tarn, 
 ^oimoT\mx brevi Un^^A. ^x^ Mil aatur tarn brevi rem liomanarncrevisse ihey wonder 
 ?hatKome has grown so soon (so rapidly, in so short a time l^jv^l. 9, 4' ^'' l^'"^^* "^ 
 \m,r or brevi in this meaning' often the adverb nto is used. Cic tarn, s, .. 
 ^f Vorts used a,''a,i equivalent of ^preserMy\ of actions the immediate ^oinS of 
 wh ch^Jcon?em lated. either directly, or after another actn.n has fir-t »,een performed 
 
 l^V^E^iMvillam meam Cn-wjussitque miki «'^"(ff'^nfelMr^TTt) 4 X;So 
 Ti-iJ viii-i .m<l s.Mit me word he won d soon (presently) come. Cic. Att. 10, \.— JJuctao 
 
 ^ndedSJe'tS; otli^^begin^^^The^e expressions |^ave a more ^---j^ '--/^Xrt^^ 
 bein- u<ed both if the action is directly imminent, and if it is to IVV/i;^." ^' ^^f. J '^ 
 Hose of s me time : liespnblica per vos frrevi temiwre jus suum recuperabit. the republic, 
 th lou.d V will smm recover ts right. Cic. Fam. 12. 2.- quosn statim agoredertbr 
 t^^t^o^opprS^rum. if he would attack them immediately, he would soon, (in 
 a short time) crush the whole of them. Nep. Ihem. 4, 3. ^„^„f„ 
 
 3) llw s als sornetimes used with the force of deinde to connect Puccessive events, 
 J\ E^iZfurMiati. rnox intra val'nm compulsi; postrern^exuvn^^^^^^^^^^^ they 
 
 Ax-ere directlv routed and driven ; soon (then) they were forced within the lampait. and, 
 nt i'i«f tlii'v"lo<f (are strinned of) their camp. Liv. 4 », 4a. b. j. „ 
 
 Pum 11 From substantives are derived 1) the different derivatives of 
 (lies- 2) some locative and Jiblative cases, and prepositional combinations. 
 A few temporal adverbs are derived from adjectives and participles. 
 
 1 Dfrivatives of dies ; din (Ion-) and its compounds.;a»Wiv, qnamdiu.Jamdiu jam- 
 dl)wn^-1a>rdiudVU^ inf'rdiu hychiv; pridie, day before : i?ostridie. m-xi day ; 
 t Si. dav after to-morrow: hodie to-day \ propediem at an early ^ay :jMoJjrfjJ, 
 £ .v*_/V /1^ audposttndie take a clause with quam (p. 7til), <.r an accusative, {p7idi« 
 
 ' iiha C ic Phi llV. b: ix>sf?^die ludos, Cic. Att. 1«, 4, 1). or a genitive (pr^c/^e eju- dtn^ 
 ^^Fam 4 1 -liere belongs nudius, with the nominative masculine ot ordimds, 
 -•.0 ,"i/y c/a/'s' iro^ (nudiusferlius, three days ago: corrupted lr(,mj7v«c di^ 
 terSisZ)- 2 Locatives, besides diu : noctu*, by nignt ; ^w^^t at even ng, this 
 eve n< • V^'4o.i or t.mperi, timely; luci (Imcu anteclassica ). by dayliL'bt (C c. P iK 
 ir o^f ;H.m iTtly in Plauuis).- 3. Ablativks: 7nane, early '" ^he moiming (all m^^^^ 
 tV ..^',ALLto\- horno this year (anteclassical : hornof i» us, Cic. \ err. 2,^. IS) .mouo, 
 i srimw : nd' tt :^;mp;.i?ions Vith ,.o^ in the '"^^"-'^ '«(^.fS ^iSlf^'S 
 •early ; ^uotidie ( = quot-diebu.) ; J-^/-^-^^"?;. j^Y^ ^ ' ^r o hese ;^ fbe aXded 
 
 (alter a long t mc : lon^fe, for a long time: repmte and subito, suddenly. ^ 
 
 * From ,u>cfu must be distinguished the aDlative ri'H:^;- ;^^-^ 'c-^^BG^u'' n3^U 
 
 G. 7, 72. Sometimes, but rarely, node is used with the loice 01 tiociu. 
 
226 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 § 550. When the time of an action is determined by nouns expressing 
 TIME and ITS TARTS {(empus, an?ius, dies, etc.), these nouns are placed 
 1) ill the ABLATIVE if they denote the time at or in wliich the action is 
 conceived to occur (answering to the question * when) ; 2) in tlie accusa- 
 TiVE or abt.ative if the length (duration) of the time of an acticm is 
 to be MEASURED by these nouns as measure-units (the question ' how long' 
 requiring the accusative, the question ' ^•Ai how much time', the ablative). 
 Tiiey are connected 3) with trepositions or with some of the temporal 
 ADVERBS or are placed in the ablative, if an action is to be determmed by 
 the time of another action, or by a time different from the time spoken of 
 (u v-Mpm ffimmre dulhn^ Dortis ornptio fiCbat, af the snm^ time ix sally was made 
 
 Lervices of tl.is n.an Caesar liad r.nploved m Jonner V^V'- .]^- \{lK-?':'%'nf,J^^^^^^ 
 H(l ('«saremderert he rcpt^rts the lact to C'lesar at nwinifjht \h. J: •^^•-'^^'"'J ''/;', 
 SerUm-Jacm. e't! A,iovis?n.n XXIV .nillibus pa-sMun; aljesse, {on) the seventh day he 
 was informed th.t ArU)vistu< \vas24 miles Iromlum II). 1.41. „ ^ „ . Ttft./i«« 
 
 ^T 1^* 'nio^Roman me x«'imF-t:NiTs for Time w.'re 1) annm ; 2) nvnn^; 3^ die^ : 4^ hora. 
 
 (fonr),as6^^n/a//m iwo>ea>^^^^^^^ 
 
 queMni'im. tive years: «^<^^^'*'^^(*\;,':. .?",,; hindre.I years is expre-.-d by s.vcuhmi (een- 
 Imnquennmi^. qmn<iiu'nnu. . A '"J/;^'; , \ '.'''"'V,^;' ^'^^^ ,i similar wav, of die.^ 
 
 LryK MiUennvnn ,s no Lat.n word. J •<"'»•; .^^^: J" ^,.„„, ,„, iue ndjecl 
 
 the 
 
 CO I 
 
 nove)it 
 
 .-;^?jn;^^:;^po= 
 
 the exprc>*-i()n nundin,ji* rom ''^'' ''V^n nnt^f on every ninth day. the Romans conntin- 
 ^wvry ei'ihth day.or.afier th- l^V'"' "^fj' '!=;'"';,. mely^^ and the last day of 
 
 in all runninL' periods the torniuuitrnj^ lay t^c. namely .ut^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 teen days, eontauun- i'»'/"^"'/ ''*' "^^T,.;';;,)' ,^; „i..ht beinix each divided into 1-2 equal 
 
 rnlnute^^ dodrans hora: = \ of an hour (45 mu)ute.). Phu. II. ^. 2, 11 . 18, ob, semihora 
 
 '''^: V^Z\ t^.^^^- of ti,nc the foil ,^yin. rule, should be noticed : 
 1^" hinle. of the n.onths are .o.TErT.VKst^ecMn^wm^^ 
 
 day bein- ^'^P'-^^^'^yy/^^^^V^i. Lll t^ nmlt he ex^^^^ merU« Junim. October (not 
 
 t y^'^^'^^^'^'^'t.l^hV-tc^l^^^^ ">""»l'^ occur ^yilhout the 
 
 i^^^^^^n^^. t'lic monthX'^ nmst be supplied. 
 
 RELATION OF TIME. 
 
 227 
 
 which are ia^ Calends, or J)l'!^<-^---^^X^:^^^-:^ )5,!/(S>l?/ Tdt^Tu.l 
 (b) Nonce, (abbr. Non.) the/f/ZMin f''''""«'\'^^ H^^^^f [^^^.^^^^ except 
 
 or thirtemth (in lour months the f'f''i''^f;;^"^; J J^l^^l'^ulV^ >1 o^ fifteenth * The 
 in the m..nths of March ^'»^^, J"'>; «"'^^^^-Xh -u "^Jdf^^^ ^^^^'^^ 
 
 Kon(E %vere ahvays <'n the ninth day (or '''^.^''" f J; '';,.V/Io th^ • Tht- first of January, 
 the Ides so that they fell in the four ^'.^.^'^-P^-V" ' "^^"^*^^^^^^^ Febr.) ; the 
 
 fSt^;(r'^^r '^i{;r;4:.r^^^\ ^T^^A^I Mus Av^s dd. Apr.) ; the 
 
 ^ V^&if :i^3^I^-S^Vee con.puti,.days^are expressed by t^ -^erM^ 
 
 ^yith the accu-atiye of the next ^."f^P"^' ;.jf; V^,;„ j^U ^i/?^^^^ the 4. of 
 
 Aw^nM,pndie .\onas MxtiHs oi ,^''^''^'f^f;. ;''^^*- * '„ ^lavs up to the next com- 
 
 3? All other days are exi-r.-ssed by Xf ^'^ /^^^^^f"" of [^^^^^ i, Subtracted from the 
 putintr day (aft,..r the Roman Nvay). so that the ""'"l^^F/'l /"t aait k ^^ 
 
 number represented by V'*:.^''^^.'^"!'' ^, i'Vde- are ^^^ or on the 7th and 
 
 ^vhether in a triven month the^^one^ and Tdes are tne arn a^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 l.'ith.ar.d.forthe Kalends, ^vhether the precedin^^^^^^ ,mnhod. we add 
 
 In order to reduce the Roman f-V";^"^^V"/V nnntin-^l .v th^ bein- reckoned 
 
 one unit to the number represe.ited by . f J. " J^ '"^ 30" (31 3-2 or :W. Th'.Ts the 2. of 
 2(J ,:^.0). .SI. or 3-> days, and '^/'/.the add t o a luui^ th. None^": the 2. of March, May, 
 January would be ^■xprcssed a^ e f^nft d. > m ror. i ja„„ary would be the 
 
 July and Octob.T. as the ^ J^^y of T mu- ry the da'y before (pridu) the Nones. The 
 third before the Nones and the 4 ^J ^'J ' ' ^ Tanuary-Calends of next year : the 14th 
 14th of December would. be the t^'t^i^; '^''^ tln^ ''«^^'"^.^^ \nril-Calends. Some- 
 
 of March \vould be pridle Mus; the Ibth ol ^^^^i^f-V^r/,; Trie Att M •> • 12 44 3). 
 
 ^7^V\VflJv hnfa'*'* the third d:.l before the Tdes. while the preposition ante if 
 the Ides of Jul>. nut «f i"» uiuu »i ordinary me;inn'^ a.s Ante hal. 
 
 placed immedlMtely before the couMMit n<^ a > » as > o.dm ^^^^.^^^^ 
 
 'jannon ^^''iry"':,^''' ^'^1 f, 'Tl^i!'' \^^]^\^r^\^Zt^diem prefixed to.the 
 
 ; f:;i;:;sr^mh;n^;;bi;rin wha?i^r J^ th. date ^.^^r^^f^ !g,:^j:r^'TS 
 
 K- it is the SITB.TECT in the foUowinir i)assMoe ol Ca-ar ('^-Jj-l <^- ^^ ^Zmf\ Piini^ et 
 'J;^^ TA^n.. AG.M.U. Co.^ i^^ ^i^ZT^^^^^^- ^the T^ 
 A. Gab nio consulihus). this dav \\as tnc nun '!' i' ' ' .' rpj ,,. v.t.ntence m s:ht 
 
 ]SlarclO in the o<mM,lship of Piso aiid Oab-nius^Oo^)^^^^^^ ^^^^^,^ 
 
 Ivivp been cxD-e-scd in tlif less u>ual \\.i> y-^ (cieserai ijuin u \ ^jjt j^ i j ,' i r-:p 
 J;;\h'n.;iowJn. sentence ' ^^f !^^ -[J-XhtS'Kt'sS,^^ 
 Fam. 11. <} (the tribunes had P't^V''^ J ' f^ t'»'' ' "^^^^^^ ^ime. Thus it remains 
 
 20th of December), the l'!>^;'^^' takes te "^^^^J^^^"^^,,,,, Kal. Odobns judicio 
 nuchan-'-d afier prepositions a>, ''' ^Z''^'!//'^' ^.['V/ [ 24,h%nd 2.5th days of September. 
 dirta die^. the (day for) }'fr'^.;';'^';X^^Z W intern M%Odotrli in quinque die^. 
 J'Sat;]^i^;^^'S??;^o^;^SiaJt:i^^ lUhdayofOctober. Liy. 45, 2. 
 
 r?/.,,, 1" Tlie nimns expressing the time at or ix which an act is icp- 
 n./enu.;i ^s oTcurHn^are ,'nacc.l ha tl^ABLATivEcase^whethe,- the nouns 
 
 interraJan><). ♦»,„ ,.„or v.ofr!m on the Tdes of March, on which day the 
 
 the Sun and the Moon were included. 
 
228 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 expressing tlie time be conoeived as time-points, or as time-periods ?r/Mm 
 uhich the act takes place * as 
 
 Eo temjyore anni. nt that time of tlic year, aes». B. G. 7, 8 ; alfero die, on the pecond 
 day, 11). 7, 11 : iw-^few die, on the next day, Ih. 7, 18 (al^o expies^sed by ix^stridie e'fis 
 diri) : honi secufidd, at two o'clock (nicanin-r the second hour alter i«anrisc)- I-«iv. 45. 'Z: 
 ttrtn vif/ilia. in the third ni;,'ht-\vatch (nu-anini; the lifth and t-ixtii hniirs alter sunset), 
 C;es. B. "(J. 7, 5S; luildruin liouKiiionini gecnndo die, on tli<' second day of thi; Hoinau 
 «xaines. Liv. 45. I ; tali iem]X)re, in t^uch a time. C:es. B, G. 7, 40 ; aliofe/nfMjre. at anotlier 
 time, lb. :il; hoc ipso remjMre. '}[\st at that time, II). <), 37; prima luce.ai dayl)reak, lb. 
 7, ;i(i.— So(»f time-periods within which the event lias happened: Ko aiitio leiillescuiQles» 
 tritici decies centum millia populo discripserunt.i/^ Mf/ yn/;- (at some time of the year) 
 tUecuriileediles(listri!>uteda iniUion mea-uresof wh'-at amon-^^the pcopU;. Liv. '.\\. li. — 
 Ne(|ue Troii'i.ttemiMrib'K tantiim laudis indi<;endt) I'lixi tribuisset .lomenis. nor would 
 Homer, in I'wjan tinier, has a attached so much praise tor speakin;; to Ulyssei*. Cic. 
 Brut. 10, 40. 
 
 Obs. 1. The abhitive mav be used to indicate that an act lasts through a whole period, 
 as Ctun milittx tofo temjiore frigore et ux»idtm iinhnhux fardan/d'tr, whan the soidiern 
 were delayed </'//"i/<7 (or j//) "the wliole time, or •</«? whole time' by cold and continued 
 showers, c'as. H. G. 7, '^4. Olti'n, however, per is used in this .souse, as Per hosannos 
 mare clattsum fait, the sea was closi-d durin;; ihes»; years, Cic. Le<?. Man. \l. lii.—Per eos 
 dies C/i. Serciliun Coaml in SicUiain trajTcit, In (durini;) those days the Consul Cn. h. 
 crossed over to Sicily. Liv. 30, 24. Frequently other forms than tint of n(mns are^ used 
 to express this relation, espi'cially the alilatives absolute with present participles, <»r 
 predicate-uount» (§ 533, K. 'l-i.\h 231. i:\'i.). as int'infe lehlfe, in early youth; oriente sole, at 
 sunrise ; f/te pue/o, te coiisule etc. For the use of the preposition in in these relations see 
 § 45:3. R. 7ci. 
 
 Obs. 2. The DATKS (in the form described above, § .5.50. obs. 2). if they answer to the 
 question ' ivhen\ are i)laced in the aulativk or in the imikpositionai- lorm with ante ilipni, 
 or (the dates immediately precedini; the computing' days) m the advkubi.m. k)rm {priUie). 
 The ablative is always used if the date is one of the compulini,' day.s (ol course always 
 in the plural, the computing,' days beinj,' pluralia tantnm). Tla-se al)latives of the com- 
 putin"davs are frequent Iv accompanied by ip4.^, as -on the Ides of March , Jdih>(< Marriu>, 
 or Jpsi.'i idif)iis Marfii-i. the other dates (,nen those with pridie) moro frequeutlv take the 
 form with (m/^^/i^/n. but are also (less fre(iuenily) expressed m the lormol an ab aiive.as 
 Quinto(&nU') Kal. Martiiu, on the 25th of February (more Ireciuently «. d.} . h<ii. .mirr.). 
 When the date is accompanied by an apposition, the noun in appos;tion is a('ia>j.<t 
 placed in the ablative, even if the date itself is expressed in the prepositional fonn, 
 as : Ante diem nidntinn d^cimxm Kahiulas Ocfobrls, luddrum Romanonnn seonidn <ii>' 
 Licinio consuli laiireaiie littere (allVriintur). On the. Wh or' S'pfemfjer, t/te second day of 
 the Roman games, a dispatch wreathed with laurel was handed to the consul L. Liv. 4.), i. 
 Ob=« 3 The time to which an action refers, including the dates, is sometimes ex- 
 pressed bv ad with an accusative, chiefly denotiuL' ' ^^^r ^V.J'V^i*' >r' \fl ^-\f''l^'^ 
 ad/dnl Mnjas; I shall remain at Laodicea till the Ides. Cic Att. ., 1. 21 But «./ i. . m 
 used to dvMolc the time at which an action on(ild or was to 6« perloruud or a time Jued 
 fm an action So in the -eneral expressions ' «./ ttmpus\ Uid dievi' =; ivmdnatly : 
 Svitas f-rumentum ad dinn dedit. Cic. Verr. 2. 2, 5. Ad const ttn tarn if^^^i^J^f^^ 
 Cic Fam 2 11, 2. Comp. lb. U). 10, 4. Ad ttwpi/s venire. Sail. Juu'. .0, o. S«). 1 c Lao- 
 d ce; ■ f re a.i meum adventum (at my arrival). Cic. Fam. 3, 5, 3. , (^mwi ad di^m e^Mui.i 
 debC ri fruinentum sciCbat. Cx's. B. G. 6. 33. Thus ad is used neioic dates (m place of 
 an a .lat V ) i he day ^''^ -r is appointed for the action: It erat dutvm a consulibas 
 Jen Spiam ad Nona^ Februarias. Cic. Att. 8, 11. li. 2.-Eiroad Aonas (i. e. veniam) 
 oTemaZodion dixi. lb. 13, Iti.-Pollex, vt dixerat, ad Jdus SextUes {i. e pnesto luii) 
 ftf R 4(S -jTa'^^^^^ ill Pausa spes ? {i.e. ou the day apimnted for the meetin- of 
 
 the Senate). lb. 16, 1,4. . . ., , 
 
 Oiis i In the DATE of lettebs. tlic place of the date is conceived as the place of an 
 action with 'outward tendency' (accordin- to p. 31 3), and hence requires the P.reposi- 
 tUmex (so always 'exca.stns\ instead ot which also the prepos.t..).. «6 (conceive, as 
 direction ' f7vni') is used. See Ex. 21 . 23. Hence the name of the city where the letter 
 iJ da T biin^ conceiv" as < place from \ must (according to p. 47. 3) be placed in the 
 ABLATIVE (not in the r/,nitive),m.tvi^a of which, in the context_ ol letters also the prepo- 
 «it-m'i^aV occurs ; as: '/>«/. a. d 111. Non.O<:t,,hr.,rhessalo,nra: ^''y^^,^;^^'^^^'^')^;^ 
 on the tilth of October. Cic. Fam. 14, -l.-rndie Kal Maj. /{^•'""'''^^- ]^-_^^' "l.-.^,;' v 
 ti^xtU. liheqio; Khegium, July the 20th. lb. 7. 19. Comp. lb 7 20 : 1.3: 10, 3, ^^ ^n ->> 
 11,10; 1 1 , 19 ; 1 1 , 20; 11, 23^nj_oncMKj-ln^_fevvjett ers ad Atticum (3, 20 ; 3,_«j, UieCod. 
 * In En-^lish 'in' \s generally used to denote time-peuiods {in the night, in the year), 
 and ' at ' or 'on \ wben the time is conceived as a time-point (at the moment, on the 
 day). lu Latin both relations arc expressed by the Ablative. 
 
 RELATION OF TIME. 
 
 229 
 
 Med. exhibits the Genitive of the place (Rrundusii, Thessalonlc(E), which the recent edi- 
 tions (probably correctlv) have chanjjed into the Aidaiive. 
 
 1. Hoc die, inquit Sc:pio. tribiini plebis,vusque Qui rites cum "^""^^^.^^..^^^^^^^ 
 piniensibus siirni< collatis in Africa beneac leliciter» pu-navH. ^'^ 3«;51:-f;. ^i^'\^ ^5;'^^* 
 Itonue intercala/'on sit nee ne, velim ad me scribas, quo die '"> -^ ^^ //^V " i'.^^^^'^^^ Oes' 
 \\t 5 21 14 — 3 Fu-nanir uno* te/npn-e omnibus lucis. atque omnia tentantur. c.e?. 
 B G 7 »4 - 4. Ciesa^ animadvertit, coUem qui ab hosribus tenebatur uudatu.n (esse) 
 homini'bus, qui .supeiioribus diZbus vix pr;e multitudine c^'""' P';/.^';| ,• ,^,^J no.T-'i^ 
 5 Hoc ipsot/nuwre Gernulni equites interveniuiil«, protenusque ab decuiiulna l^i a in 
 casfra ir umpe e conantur. H) 7, 37.- (i. Mons Cevenna durvssimo ff^'i^^'J}'"'^}^'^ 
 Kiini live iter i.nnedlGbat lb. 7, 8.- 7. Ciesar veritus ne hostes nocte ex oppido profu- 
 se S. bus e!^ J esmarniis excubare^ jubet. lb. 7, 11.-8. E^fere ^nrnlxl^ 
 f-r Qui ctio Flaminlno venerunt, se si-nis collatis cum re-e Phibppo in IhessaiiJ 
 iuena-e Liv ii, 24.- 9. Exerc.tus vestTi mimquam a Brundusio ni>i hieme suvirrui^ 
 tr-ifismi^Grui I'o Cic Le- Man. 12, 32.- - 10. Antiochus rex initix) verts navibiis ab Ephe- 
 s f X't IS H.-Ilespouuun petitn; Liv. 33, 38.- 11. Pompejus tantum be lum .x/r.m.i 
 Ai^^A^^ apparavif^ i..a./. vere suscepit'». m,dia (Bstale coni^^vi Cic "^^f^^^^}^ 
 35.- 12. Triumpharei* m<.7ise Januario statuerat consul. Liv. .19. 5.- 13 1 acu.t suia- 
 tui Pomponium pnetOrem tnduo proximo lu provinciam proficisci. lb. 2.*, ^U.- 14_ ^ex 
 
 pnetOres illo auho primum creati sunt. lb. ■^■^^'^;^--%^^'^'}'i^X^Zu^Z^ 
 C.'*) decessi.ssei* Antias Valerius est auctor. lb. .3p 5b- lb. 'Jn.^^^^f/i^^^^VVJ';';- 
 tratum proximo s^eculo Themi^tocles iusecntus esti^. Cic. B"»V- ^0; ^t-- 1 '• f^ ^^>^^ 
 vroflio uuiimi'* ab hora septima ad vesperum puirnatumesset, aversum hostemi» \idcrc 
 nem^p t cis. B. G. 1, 2b.- 18. Tola oistate Nilu< yfhe Nik) Mgyprmn obrutam 
 m" r.!?;";;-) Vfnet. Cic. N. 1). 2. 5;>.- 19. (^lue Genabi^o ,,,,;,,^ ,o . ,^esta -n, «;. 
 prifnam a miecUm viqiliam in fimbus ArvernOrum ^"dlta sunt. H «, .3- 2(^. aur.s 
 
 propter nivis anff me>u<^em JuniumtTiin<,lvi non potest. ^^'^^^V'-^^Vi-Jr^a^a/lb 6 
 tissima>^2i a Cubistris-^'^ te meas 1 tteras haliCre ais a. d. X AaL Ocobr. data-. ID. o. 
 It- 22. M. Fulviu^riumphavit a. d. decimum Kal. ./a/i. de .EtOl.s e de Cepha e 
 Tiiis Liv 3't 5 --23 E Pomi ejJuo" navi advectus-^*suiu in Luculli nostri ho>pitium-* 
 '/ /i^^ '\jl;,'ia.> ^n7/.J ///.• e^-ressus autein e navi accSpi ^uasn tteras quast.uis 
 tabellarius--'« in Cumamim-^^ attulisse dicebatur, ^oms .Wu. ^" '^^I^.^^Xr^ur^^^^ 
 eadenifir> hora veni in Puteoiaimm". Ibi accGpi duas epistola.^ alteiaai ^om», 
 VLlmrumVlI Idas Lannvio datcu^. Cic. Ait. 14. iO. 
 
 llem 18 When the time of an action (answering to the question ' when ) 
 i« determined bv mkasl'uinu its distance from anotiieu time, or Irom 
 the time of another action, the nouns expressing the time-measure (meas- 
 ure-units of time ^ 5.50, obs. 1) are generally i)laced in the Ablative. 
 being combined with those objects of time which denote the ideas 6d- 
 f(>/'d"anil '<(fter\ This is called the Ablative ot Time-measuke, while 
 the ablative of the time at or in which an event occurs is d(.'siguated as 
 Abl.\tive of Ti.ME SIMPLE. The ablative of time-measure is employed 
 accordiu"- to the following rules : 
 
 1 The'^nouns denoting the measure-units must have numerals as at- 
 tribute>; which, according to the sense of this construction, should be cau- 
 diwls (intciTogative, dotinite, or indetitiite, as qaot, duo, malti, pauci,aU- 
 quot). But by a peculiar Lati n idiom frequently qiidinals are used m 
 
 1 JiPve ac ftliciter PuccessfuUy.- ^ This predicate has two completing objects and 
 five aTNe,bi/l oSs t^^^^^ temporau'^two modal, and one local. \^ hicli o he 
 
 Sb ect's iXVto c'lcl\ of these^categories?- 3 The 'mysteries^ «J /he festiv.H of tt^ 
 f'riof p,wirii.-.s ri^-bele^ are me:mt.— * units has here the force of laem.— ' to »ee.— 
 5'S vet' t Ul^'.S' Id.- ' ...' 1.-.-P nndor arm..- • end.- • ;^;;;ig;-[,;l;."'"•i "' »■- 
 tor i P mi.lwinter See § 372 K. 31.— *•> to cross over.— " to sail t( wards.— ' to 
 nnwc^-^^lo^ le^^^^^^ one's triumph.- >* Translate this expression 
 
 1 o Liiin by years'lrom the building' of llo:ne (iu th« year 753 b.c.).-i« to die.- "to 
 • low The sentence mu>t be passively expressed in Eu-lish.- '« although.- ^^ liter- 
 al ' a foe turned off ^^^. the back of any one among the enemy.- '^06=ena^Mm, the 
 'ie^sen\ city'ot"uHeans'on the Loire.- - thJ- ^-^^^^^^^^^.l^^ -\'^l^\Z,^t S^M.mfr' 
 :)y whicu what is latest in lime cati be expressed.- "^^^t ,1 I " literalW t/<to A« 
 23 ,iu. Pompejanum, a villa of Cicero, near Pompeji.- 2* to and.- ■'^ Hf^raily i'^«>/^« 
 nMcditu ; supply 'and found immediaielv the shelter of the hospitable roof .- 2« car- 
 
 { 
 
 JlO 
 
 Tier.- 37 "A villa of Cicero.— aa Another villa ot Cicero. 
 
230 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 thk ron^tniction with the force of cardinals, as Po,^t dechmm diem rediii 
 cZ^TmTd^e^^^^^^ lie returnecl after ten days. See ohs. 4 Frequent- 
 i%c mmfeitratti-ihntes coalesce with the nouns expressing the measuie- 
 iniU^ of time into one word {biennium, tndnum etc.). 
 "'o'^niTceie^^^^^^ tempm is used as time-measure it has ahva> s 
 
 X^:^^}il^n^^<^^sU^u^^ ^^\'^^^ of time), which is ^-^\^}^^'^y^'^:^^^ 
 
 adveri'^ar X wS', -'s ^,vM,?rf,Vi«.. p«< .l.ree .lays laler (^'"env.n s): 
 A 7»« «r 1 vo (1 lys before : *•<•«» abhinc aimb, leu years a-... (/-) 1 Kt.P- 
 
 five vears Jffcre Auiriistus died. Suet. V esp. -. ,,..:,i, ii,„ 
 
 4 'insteTdof u-^iirn- tlieHl.1aliveoflime-ine:is..re m connection %v ill. tie 
 
 ndt-erl««"te an .W. H.e latter words may be connected as g<>ye n g 
 
 ruFPO^iT ONS Vil U the accn.atives of the noun ^U;""»"^' / '«= ' «»!\',^; 
 
 !'„l™'i,s used, meaning '«-> moretha,,' in the sense ol ante, and uU laU, 
 than ' in the sense of post. See K. U, obs. o ^c). 
 
 thorn int.. ..no «-.ml (««""''"'' '^''^; •/,'". V,,'yi" '^^^^^^^ i^ '1'^" H.'-ciu» c.iinp.;o- 
 
 dale ,leH.iy^f .<?•«> '™^^of1 h' u". .'r'hlp ' A what M.ne Y mi»" !/"'.■■-•/'!"'■ '^"^■ 
 
 tin 
 use 
 
 Cic. llosc. C«>.n..l3, =57. ^^ ^'^'^V^^:J^T^::T^^'^^^^ backward iVom the 
 li-oin tlie time of a compro.n ^e i k . ^ '^ ,'^f/"^t ou Vlence it fail^ to prove the assertion, 
 speaker's time, is not ^^'^;^^}"^ ^'^;!^' ^^^^^ of «Ui.r, and tl.e abla- 
 t The «rrainmanans conMdcr Uii> ass J"*;,;'"'''';' w-tinn^ arc eoually frequent and vcx- 
 tive with aMi/ic as exceptional, l^'i^ 'y' ' <^' ';; r"\\! ,\- /[^^ pS^t-s quoted, ust-s the 
 uhir in all periods of .he lan^..a..c Cicero^ a^-»^'>.>J • .s aKdon occurs Phil. 2, 4.5, 
 uhlative Verr. 2, .r2, 13'». and At 1> Ik 1 he a^^^»^ ,,^,^,^ e.,n>t. uctious are 
 
 RELATION OF TIME. 
 
 231 
 
 1) ^y ah hoc tempore (inst. of a5Mn^) with an ablative as: Etdein^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Konfnhun qui «6 /'«^ ^^'«^;^. «^^^.f^ft^rf X C c'^Re^^^ 
 
 ward to Romulus, who was kin- ^^' >^'^'^"?•VhP HoS'^trativc- Aic as : Eriro Ai,s quad- 
 
 TivE of the time-measure in connection with the «emonstativc^ /Z2c. a. . i^^ v 
 
 ilhid annMituni se nauns illi-s lUtbus ml^l^t^e L<iij oajum. uioumu. ' ' iivtvpum Tic 
 
 an wS-Thai he had .ent that silver «/.'^y^«^;«r7^(wuhin a 
 
 wise in connection with hic, !^\- ^^^^ ,^^Jl\^'^''^^^^ See R. 14. oDs. 6 (c).- 
 
 thou didst abuse me, ^'^^^'J';. ' J-fTl ,i^> I'l'^, ^'^^ ,'^^ of the quantita- 
 
 5) In re-ard to indefinite ^'«^fi-^^y f''«,,t,°7'o? or w th u^ and indetlnite numerals 
 five adieciives 'as ;)a/^/o a/i^^, a littlt; wnile a^o . or uiLu iiuuii.- "" 
 
 ntheYilUive,as/BeneC.esar;,«^ 
 Ut paulo nr,U dixi. C c. Am. 21 ^Comp._ lb. .<;?<[, -'l^^-.^,^ ' caAll-Pmyauci^ ante dkbas 
 
 bebam')littera8adte. Cic. Fam. b, 20. Comp. tie. 1 u>c. 1, o. .». 
 
 OBs.2. If time-measure is deiermined ^X t^«^--^-,^^ ^fl^J^S^^rf i^ ^e'^^ 
 F.,KE a time not that ot the spe; k r, J \^^,^^,,^J^;^L^V^'^y\' , 'accusative of len-th\ 
 and almost exclusive »o»'V^ ^^'' «^'^ ,^' ""' J,, '^„f^'j.P'J,^^^^ tf the time before which the 
 nor -enerallyt by a prepositioiia %l^'l^^'^.^^3^'^^^^ in the form of the 
 
 event happened is.to be ^\'^^'']';^^'^:: ^^,'^^^^'^'^,^ ?orm of a comparative clause after 
 prep..si.ion««^ewithanc)unor(inoiegeitnl^ ^ j^^ ablative 
 
 he adverb ante. If the ti.nt. is ""t^P^^;''<^,^^,v\^,J, %%Ulsante diebus Lieluis Romam 
 of the time-measure, withou any «^'^«'^,^ \^'^, ^ r'^V •:^0 17 --^ ante guadraginta 
 
 venit. Many days be/ore L^«l'"^, ^I^^^f'^.f ^" V' fyX years eaZr (\>ef ore that time) 
 pax cum Carthagin.ensibus postremo (act cTat. y^ 44.-Adversarios a quibus 
 
 the la.t peace had been made with tl^;:;^^^^.^ -^f '"'.^; ^e- frmn the state his antaj,':nnsts 
 paulo ante erat ^Oectus, ^expe lit ex cu tjlte^^ > G 7, 4.-Qui le-em agrariam 
 
 ,v whom he had been cjectecl « ('^//^Vi^XKal^rit whc> had prop. >sed ail agrarian law 
 (^iquot annuante secundum ^^iniciwibdliw^ Sa 5 13 -Pu«Zo an^. 7nedhim noctem, 
 
 or 'between the lV•^■c^^l'"-^=^V^^^^l^thc^ i m m ^^^^ nttributet Ante annis 
 
 whole ablative phrase or b.tween the o^^^^^^^^^^ Generally however the 
 
 ^^Ll^Z^lt-^^ '■■ S,f 'r./£': or'-- ^uilJ^^u. anu; or • auo6as annis 
 
 ante'. — 
 
 T, . .u,rr. w no reason why the one of the two constructions 
 
 ^^ cSreSr thi^ule ;^^^ -eptioii ^^^^ 
 
 Ih? preposition a.t. vvith \^;;;^^^.^^}\'.'^^^^^^^ lU.ruit. Vellej- 1. 5. 
 
 numerals, in the "1«'^"'"-,. ?.-, '.ff «?Tou N 7 25 -T-eV'^.um ante diem scitOte banc 
 _ll,,can/6pa./c^.'«/mc>.;didiamus Sen Qu 1^.7^^.^^ ^^^^ ^.^^i^^^^ 
 
 ficuiudecerptamCarthagine. Pbn. H. N. t , 2a-ll»c scn^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ 
 
 "unt. Suet.'^Tib. 61,- It 19 'j^'^Z'^Stn^KU^^^^^^ ^^ '^"^^^^ ^'''"^' 
 
 form ante trl^ annos is the regulcir^^''^ /^ ^>^1^'^^« ""J distinction betw-een ' ^rfiz/s a;i/. 
 being exceptional Some -c. «^^ ; «^ \o ^'^"^^ *l ^^^^ ^^^nb. to Ruddiman 2, p. 291). 
 aunis\ and • ante tris annos' (llancl T us !' -^^ .-/^ ^ .^,,, i^ the meaning ' three year.^ 
 i^^o-i^pc^^tl^^et l^Sr^^SS;; Z^aJ^lo S:!^'n^ it so But there is no passage in 
 S.n iSilv nVThe u.e of this tt^rm in the "^-V^»''^,;^;^^ "f^ remely rare, as for inst. : 
 f Tiiiu-measure in the ^7";.<' J /«• ^5;^!;^^^^^^^^^ Nep. 
 
 t HandTniVi l! i7;f»do.ibti that the last arrangement occurs. But compare Liv. 33, 
 44* annis jwst uno et viginti. 
 
 { 
 
232 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 Ob« 3 If time is defcrminod by the number of year? elapsed apteti a certain event, 
 or uliich will elapj^e aftkk Uk^ lime of the si'Eakkk, tiic same coustructions are employ- 
 ed as with a/'^<?, Diit with the lollowin- moditications : • •, ^ 
 
 (a) The adverb or preposition j)Osf, takes the place o{anfe or abhinc. as: Belhim initnra 
 e»\avnui)odtnbuset vifjinti, the warcommeneeil twenty f/iree y earn Later \ aw •^";4i.- 
 Isdietator Xvn^xn^ a^t anuis jmt liomamconditam (/uadntigenfi'xjnindfcim, llewas ciio^rn 
 dictator 415 ijears after the buildinrj of Romp Cic. Fain •.», 21 2.- e,i iiou malto i>ost 
 V'/am Iudi!*ce5*si8ti, Yesterday, not much laier than you kdt. Cic. At t. 12, 4. J. 
 
 ib) The ablative of the noun denotim,' the time-mea-ure orcnerally takes an ordinal 
 attribute, if the numerals are detinite, and are not expressed by numeral nouns {fntiunjtm, 
 Idduwn etc.). For the raeaninj; of this construction with ordnials see obs. A.--inde- 
 cinio die post quam a te disce^s.-ram, ten rfrtyx (literally 'on the eleventh day ) after I 
 had left thee (instead of </e<-^m^/i?/>'As'^X).v/). Cic. Att. 12, 1. ♦*!,„„ 
 
 (c) The prtpositi*.ual Jorm of the time-measure with jMst is far more frequent thnn 
 the same form with ante. If the numerals are d>-,fi"ife, and cannot be expressed by 
 numeral compounds {biennium etc.). they are almost always oiidinai.s, as: Ablato post 
 VNdecimum annom a y>\eh<i cimsuiatu, ^«'/i ijears after the takin<' away of the Co.sniate 
 from the I'lebs (i. e. the riudit of electinj? Plebeians as consuls). Liv. ., K^. 1. S(»ine jrruin- 
 marians take the preposition ;xm-^ in this c«ninecti(m for an advkub, explaining the accu- 
 sative 'as an accusative of the lt/ir,th of time'. 'I'his opinion is erroneous since the ac- 
 cu-alive of len>'th' refers to the whole period, while the accusative of the ordinal won Id 
 refer onlv to the len'-th of one term of the period {atuni^, dies etcK Nor will this view 
 account for the lact that ' jxjsr with an accusative of the time-measure is never placed 
 at the end of the phrase, which is very frequently the case with the ADVEiai pn.^t alter an 
 ablative. If we take 2>ost as a preposition, and the accusative as the te<,'ular case -,'ov- 
 erned by it, this fact will need no explanation. t ♦! ♦• „ 
 
 (d) The adverb mst is often undekstood after an ablative of time-moasure if the tune 
 reierred to is either expressed by a clause, or else must be supplied fr«)m the text, as : 
 Deilisse id deos tandem sej-to decimo deiiuun anno, that the ij;ods had «rranted this at last 
 after fifteen years u"!^t. of sexto decimo anno jx^sf). Lw. 30, 21.— AccTius est Hannibal 
 CarthWinem sexto ac tncesimo anno quam puer inde project us erat. Hannibal was siim- 
 nionetl from Italy to Carrha^'e thirtvjice years after he had departed Irom there as a boy 
 (inst. of 7X)a/ &*/a//t7>royVc/«.s' em/). Liv. :iO. 35. . . .^ 
 
 ie) If the time after which an event is to happen refers to the sprakeus time, it 
 is expressed 1) l)y the mere ablative of time-measure without the addition of the adverb 
 imst as Quicquid est, lAduo sciemus, whatever it may be, we shall know it after (in) 
 two days. Cic. Att. 9, 14.— Dixenint. Ca^sarem statuisse, triduo exeicitiim dediuvre, 
 they saiti, Ciesar had resolved to withdraw his army afteriSw) three days. Ca?s. B. G. 7, 
 *>0 Sometimes the demonstrative hie is added, the same as in the cas»- «>l * «r/« . 1 he 
 relations 'o//er' and '6^b;t^' can, in this instance, be only distiii«:nished by the tensk 
 of the predicate, as : llanc nrbem hoc biennio evertes^ thou wilt destroy this city m two 
 veu-s Cic Rep (5. 11.— 2) By the prepositicm 2^'^t (sometimes ad = />o>7) with a cardinal 
 or ordinal : Ciir dolCret si ha-c po.<t tr^ccntos awios (after .300 vears) event nra putaret ? Cic. 
 Tusc. 1. 37.— Stulttis est qui tlet (juod /io>:t amto^i mille iion vivet. Sen. Ep. y'A.—Post diem 
 senthnum (after six davs) sesc revcrsQrum C(Miliriiiat. C:e~. U. (i. f», 33.--Cur doleam si ad 
 (= msf) dt^cem vdllia dnndrum geiitem aliqtiam urbe poiitflram putem ? Cic. Tusc. 1, 37. 
 (/•) The CLAUSES used alter the ablative of time-measure are irenerally co.mi'auative 
 daii-es witlwy«a/«. which mav coal, see with the pn-cedin.^c adverb ^xm/ (y>o*"^VW«'"^- 'is 
 sexto anno msl quam hi (rulliam reiurat. live ye ir- aft«'r he had come to (Jaul. Ka'-ely 
 such clauses are used alter prepositional ex|)ressioiis with jmt, as : Post dit^m quinfu/n 
 quam barbari male puiinaverant. Iej,'ilti a Boccho veniunt. Four days after the barbarians 
 had lieeii beaten, envoys came fn in Bocchus. Sail. Jui;. 102. Instead of comparative 
 clauses time-clause- with quum. and relative dau.ses are sometimes used, when the aiX- 
 \erb imt mu.st be always omitted. The relative adjective, in this instance, takes the 
 noun of the time-measure as an antecedent, beini,' likewise placed in the ablaive, as : 
 Ditbm clrciter quindecim ^'/i6/A<? in hiberna ventum est, initium tumiiltus ortiim est ab 
 Ambiorire, About fiftten days after the occupation of winter quarters, the rebellion was 
 inaiif'ura'ted by Anibiorix (literallv : the beu'innin,-,' of the rebellion aro.se from Ambiorix), 
 Cies.'li. G. 5. 21. Here quibiis has the forct; «d' jxjsf quo<, beiiii; an ablative of time-m. as- 
 nre iike its antecedent. Clauses with quiun occur more rarely than n-lative clauses, as : 
 Sexto die qwuniu\f\.\\n\Q.n veiitum est, maxima vis utrium efl'-cta, f' ire days after ihey had 
 come to the river, the greatest part of the air-ba-,'s was dtuie. Sail. Jul'. !>1, 1. . , . 
 
 (7) The phrases by'which the Eniilish indetinite tiine-ineasMre • alter some time is 
 expressed, are very ruimeroiis. Aside from the ablatives ab-olute (Ijrevi spafioinftr/nisso 
 etc R 225 obs) the followiii!.; expressions are some of tlie most usual: haud (noa) 
 m>dto jx}.<t, paulo ))Ost, jyost pauio, post aliquanto. post non vndfo (Nei>.), )>ost haudvvuto 
 Criaut.),iX)s^ neque ita muito (Nep.), haud ita malto post, not very Jiuich later (Liv. 3», jS). 
 
 RELATION OF TIME. 
 
 233 
 
 (k) Instead of an ablative of time-measnre with post, rarely an accusative of tixk- 
 MEASURE is used, as : Fnlvius .-edein ForttIna\ quam proconsul in Hispama voverat, 
 ONnossexvif^i^Unmm voverat dedicavit, Fnlvius dedicated the temple otFortnna which 
 he had vowed as proconsul in Spain, six years after he had vowed it. Liv. 42, 10._ t.x- 
 trenely scddom such an accusative is used with ante, as: Tndu urn ante dedic'fioi.em, 
 three davs before the dedication. Such phrases a^postridie Idus Quzntiris. on the mor- 
 row after the Qtiintilian Ides, i.e. on the sixteenth of July (Liv. (j, 1, 12), may be con- 
 sidered as formed after the analogy of dates. Such exceptiona uses of accusa ives 
 of the time-measure, in place of the regular ablatives, must be well distinguished from 
 the HK(a-LAU accusative of time (R. 1^) which may also be used in connection with ante 
 and p(jst not however for marking the distance between two time-points, but to denote 
 that the action continues ihrou!.di the whole period, as: Aliquot annos contimios ante 
 ie-em (iabiniam i)opulns Romamis mairna parte imperii cariiit. A number oj years in 
 i.-ui'cession before the kv-x^Aw^ of the) Gabinian law, the lioman people was without a 
 large portioii of its possessions. Cic. Leg. Man. 18. 
 
 Obs 4 In regard to the construction of time-measure with ordinai-s in place of 
 CaUDInai.s, there are two points of difference from the English to be noticed : 
 
 1 If tlie Latin uses cardinal numerals for this purpose, the English and Latin idioms 
 whJdlv coincide, but they difler when ordinals are apidied. When an event happens on 
 thelir-t (lay of a month, and somebody performs an action (for instance 'arrives ) <mthe 
 third of the month, we sav in Enclish either • he arrived two days after the event , or 
 •hearrive.i on the sectnufday aftrr the event'. But the Latin says either 6irfwo;x)^^£ 
 advt'iiit (the same as in English)", or terlio die ]>ost advenit (diflerent from the English). 
 'Jhe I^itin, when api)lyiiig ordinals, counts every day, including the day of the event, 
 and the day of the subsequent action.* 
 
 2 Instead of 'tertio die posf the Latin also says ;)0.<;/ teriium diem. These two 
 expressions are accoidim: to their strict iirammatical meaning entirely different, the first 
 ap parentlv indicating that something happened on the third day, and the latter denoting 
 that it happened after the third dav. Nevertheless nothing is better established in the 
 rules of the Latiiriangtiaire. than that both fonns of expression have absolutely the same 
 meanin" Alth->n-di we cannot, now. trace the causes which have led to this remark- 
 al>le deviation from the logical value of grammatical forms, we have to acknowledge the 
 fact and will find a complete ideiititv in the peculiar form for dates (§ .'50. obs. 2, 4), 
 \vith this form of tiine-measure for events happening' after a time. As we use the form 
 aute diem quart um Calehdas with the meaning of die quarto ante Calendas, in the same 
 way we use the form ])0<f diem quart um adrenit with the meaninL' of die quarto adrenit. 
 Thus Livv says (30. 21) that Hannibal left Italv ' se.vto decimo anno' (post adventum). and 
 in another passaire (:W, 28) that he left Italy ''jmst sextnm decimvm (innvm\ Now Han- 
 nibal arrived in Italy in the vear 218 B.C., and left it in the year 203 B.C., i '^fi.tteen years 
 (or in the fifteenth ytar) after his arrival. Thus ttiduo {tiibus dilfnis) post (Liv 21, 32) is 
 the same as quarto die jK)-<t. and both are the same as post quartum diem. Qui btduo 
 ant,- venerat (Liv. 40, 4()>, is the same as tertio die ante, or ante diem terttum. Hence the 
 follow in" rule must be observed in renderinir Latin ordinals with lime units, ex- 
 pre-siiv'^DisTANrE in time : Sufjtract one v nit from, the ordinal number and render either 
 by a cardinal or by an ordinal, both in respect to 'after' and in respect to 'before . 
 
 1 Comitia jam abhinc triqinfa diZbus habita sunt. Cic. Yerr. 2. 52, 130— 2. Miilier 
 qua-dam cMlnc tritnnium ex Androi ctminiigravit^ hue. Ter. Andr. 1. 1. 42.— 3. \ em- 
 enti Fiilvio Ti. Semproniiis prietor, qui Ijiduo ante venerat. obviam processit Liv. 4U, 
 40 — 4 Voverat3eam ;edein annis undecim ante L. /Emilius ]{egillus navaii proelio 
 adversus pnefectos regis Antiochi. lb. 40, 41.— 5. Caesar Viennie equitiltum, quein 
 niultis ante diebus eo praMnLsorat*. nactus» est. C«'s. B. G. 7. ».— 6. Socrates supremo» 
 vitic die de immortalitilte aiiimi multa disseruit', et paucis ante dtebus. quum« facile 
 Dosset, edaci» e custodiil»" noluit. Cic. Tusc. l,-<i9.— 7. Paulo ante tertiam vigiham 
 animadversnmii est fumSrei^ aggeremia. Ca^g. b. G. 7.24.- 8. Vidi etiam senemi* 
 Liviuin»6 qui cum sex annis ante quatnt^go natus essem, fabulami» docuisset, Centone 
 
 ♦The passa-n) Cic. Phil. 1.13, 32: Pi^oximo, altera, tertio, denique reliqvu comecntts 
 dit^us which seemed to i)rove that the ordinals in rcirard to the Cimiputation of time, 
 were sometimes used with the same force as in English, is now read without a comma 
 between jnoJimo and alte)v, proximo altera meaning • at the very next day". 
 
 » NoM Andros.— - to move over.— s vov^re, to vow.— * to send in advance.— » imn- 
 d^ci to reach — « last.- ' mu/fa di<.^erere de aliqua re, to discuss many points pertaining 
 to — « althon<^h.— « to be delivered.— '» prison.— i» to notice.— »2 t<, ^moke.— is the 
 rampart.- i^^as an old man.— i* Livius Andronlcus, the dramatic poet, is meant.— 
 ^^fabulam doctre, to have one's own dramatic poem performed. 
 
234 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 .ii. Ro.nilni simul omnos trms-rcs.i '"i f- 1;'^- M • Rriit 91 - 11 1 oc o-t, ntiim" Ivi- 
 n„n modo rxercitatior^, m'.I PPM>e ^K}tatu^ ^ • Br^^^^^ CicD 1, :«.- r^!. ^«(11- 
 
 III ifei=s.^s£Ei^ 
 
 duo quani ha^ dabain littera^ cxspiH-tilbarn. Plane. Cu-. Kim. 10 ..J, H. 
 72^vyi 14 When by the time-inca^nre not the time of another event, 
 but merely the len-th of the period itself is determinecl, tlie nouns de- 
 n in Ahe measurelire placed in the ACcr.ATrvB Th^s tune-measure ,n 
 ?1 e ceusative answers to the question ' ho,o hn;/, the numerals detinmi^ 
 I e measure bein- caudinaia except in the case mentioned obs 2, (./) 
 as • De his insulis nonnulli scripsCrunt die-s rontinuos (rif/tnta sub brumil 
 essenoctem, Of these islands some have written that their^n.irht about 
 the winter-solstice lasts thirti/ daifx in succession. Lies. J. Lr. .), lo. 
 
 iNDHFrN^tTK time-measure, in this relation, is expressed I) by the nouns 
 denotin- the measure-units with indefinite caiuhnal nunieualsI^ ^-u), 
 as Pana>>i ibi dies morati sunt, they staid there afco (liy^. (.^es. 5 ^- ; < -J- 
 _ o) by the time-adverbs hnqe, di>t, and its compounds {qnanuhu.tauidia , 
 aliqnanidlMjanuUa etc.), taiifhp-r**, paulisprr, parunipnr. 
 
 All these forms are rendered either by a mere objective, or by the 
 prepositions for or during (sometimes in). 
 
 Obs 1 Thenounf» bv which thelcn-lh of poriod^ is moa-nred mn-t b.« MEx^vnE-vsiji 
 
 r^« !^; ;«. ^1^0 ^) and must l)u accompanit-d ])y caud.nal numerals (.ntfrropitive, 
 
 S e Tind'flnit. as attributes. If \ho len-th of ,H'rio;ls Is cxpn-sscd ;'' her by 
 
 H r m.nL ineisure-units iii^ tetnpii,'^, pra^lium, hiem^.v^r. adolH>iceulm Qic.) in if 
 
 ':l <l^ r m ;1 n inuVii^v^^^^ a^ attributes, the reUiti..n ol time 
 
 Ti?K P oriods thus oualitied are conceived as Time-i'uints, and are expressed either by 
 preposilio nrcV^r^^ with the ablative), or by the- ablative or ri.ME simple , ncc.rd- 
 
 1 (Ptrite vrocedere, to live (literally : to advance in a-^e).- « t() cross,- 3 stream.- * se 
 
 v™ f,. r^nrii » ^xercitare toexercii»o.— • m radc- ' to introduce.— « silently.— 
 
 Mo^nvt'r w r 17- ^'Tp^i, to land -> ' to carry. - -^ adj.ny.re <rl Xo annex to to 
 
 mi it, w h - '3 ' «d(/.r^, t'^uit^ "to take.- >«the timber.- '«t« aq>mmaddu- 
 
 \ 1 .l.'wh 1" V.muUr est _ 18 Thr writer of a letter f reriueiitly n<e< an imperfect, m 
 
 ^hu^e of "pr?.;;;.t, wri'tiik :- if reilortin, at the time when the letter would be read by 
 
 ^''* The relative clause foUowin- iamdiu. which in En-li<h is introduced bv a.«, be-ins 
 in I/ u w Ml he c^ relit i ve quanidla (compare § ;|.V>., or by qmnd. wh.cli. a< a corr.^ - 
 t"ve i^ renlere bv av. More rarely it is followed by a mere qmini or by d> n.-** /^^ ^* 
 {l»;rl/^e e al y fohowed by a clause with dunu which conjunciioa is either rendered 
 by M or^by «^1 li^vin- in thiicase the force of a relative clau.se. 
 
 RELATION OF TIME. 
 
 235 
 
 inn- to R 11 • as • Stippndium quod p^r bdhim non tulerint (or in beU-o, but not ' beUum ), 
 the pay' which thev did not draw durin- the war Li v. 33. 72. -/'er eo.<>dein dtex (not 
 eo<d^m diet withunt per. the ablative eudt'm dicbus beiiii; likewise correct) C. Claudius 
 au^ur lectus e>r. Durbi'/ (in) tlio^e days C. Claudius was elected aui^ur. Liv. 33, 44.— Haec 
 »-r hiermm act* sunt (not hiemem without, per), this was done duriiiir the vvinter Li v. 
 :j;^ 21 — rofif i)ci>to hodibriA (not tofao nocfUt), I am standing for whole ni«,'ht6. I'hasdr. 
 Fab Nov 1, 18. \).— Tota mtdtt* (not totam cestdtem) Nilus ^.iryptum obrutam tenet, 
 the whole summer the Nile is holdintr Eu:ypt under water. Cic. N. D. 2, h^.— 'loto hoc 
 prceJio, duriiiLC this whole battle. Cses. B. G. 1, 16. 
 
 Obs 2 Exceptions to thr rttlf: tv obs. 1. (a) Sometimes nouns denotinf? seasons of 
 the dav or the year, as jw.v, (T.^fa^. hit^rrv^, and similar nouns, are used as measure-units 
 for deflnin<^ the length of periods, being accompanied by cardinal numbers. Ihey are, 
 in this instance, jdaced in the accusative, the same as the regular measure-units, as: 
 Urbs Veil decern cB-^tiltes hiemfif^qne continual circumsessa est, the city of V eji was i)e- 
 sie 'od d'irinq ten ftuminer.<t and winters in succt ssion. Liv. 5, 22. Here mtat^s humesque 
 has'the force of annox. indicating that the siege was not interrupted in the winter, a lact 
 quite unusual in those times —(/>) Frequently the numeral vnvs is omitted, the same as 
 in Kn'Mish where it is olten replaced by the indefinite article, as : C. Sempronium cum 
 n^/.s' annum ie«'er fuisset, mortuum esse, that C. Sempronius, after he had been sick/or 
 more than a year, had died. Liv. 40, 2.-(c) Indefinite cardinals are understood in the 
 frequent phrase <lifi!inoctliique (sometimes in the singular diem noctemque). day and night, 
 in-t of mulfofi d'l^s noctl^qite. indicating the uninterrupted continuance of the action 
 durinn- an indefinite number of days, as : Vagabatur dies nortV^que, he roamed about day 
 and riijhf Liv 27 31. Aside from this phrase, cardinal numbers cannot be omitted. 1 h e 
 i:no-li*h phrases 'for vears', ' for m<mths' etc. cmnot be expressed by ' an/ios' or * men sis , 
 but"'bv ^jwdtos. anqiiot per an.nos\—(d) Ordinal numerals are used for the measure of 
 time periods to de.^^imate a period which has lasted up to the time spoken of. In this 
 instance (»nlv the hist term of the period is mentioned, being placed in the accusa- 
 tive and havin^ an oudixal as attribute. The predicate, in this connection, is either 
 in tiie pisKsEvr"(in place of the English present-perfect), or in the impkkfect, in place 
 of the Enirlish pluperfects as : ... . •»,.., -j * i^. 
 
 Mithridates ab illo tc^mpore annvmjam tertvim et vigesimnm regnat, Mithndates ha^ 
 f)fien rc\^n\n<- (a\n':n\v) for tioeidi/-fhreeyear.^ from that time. Cic. Leg. Man. S.— Pesti- 
 lentia jam f^rtinrn dnn'trnmhom Romanam atque Italiani va^tabat, A pestilence had 
 been desolating the city of Home and Italy (already)/©/' three years. Liv. 40, 36. 
 Ons 3 The measure of the length of time cannot be expressed by the accusative, un- 
 less the oovKUNiNO VEKB itself designates the action whose duration is measured, and 
 uniess this action is going on uninterruptedly during the whole period. From this prin- 
 ciple the followinir rules sire derived : ,.,,.,. ^ i. «i,^ 
 (a) When the time-measure refers to actions which by their nature cannot occupy the 
 whole time, but must cease at some part of the time, and then be taken up again, the 
 time is expres-^ed bv the preposition jyer. or in, or by an ablative, rarely by the ac- 
 cusative, as : His di^ceptationibus per dies aliquot (not the mere accusative dic-i aliqvot) 
 habitis. these discussions having been continued for sevral days. Liv. 3^}, 41.--Ludi 
 per bidun?n instaunlti sunt, iramcs were performed for two days, Liv. 32. 42. So es- 
 pecially in ne"-ative sentences : Proviiicia sex 7ne?hnf)us hnpern nullas meas acceperat 
 iitteras the province had received dnrinq six fnonfhs of my government no orders of 
 mine Cic Att .5 21, 7. In all sentences of this kind the predicate as such has no dura- 
 tion 'at all, and,' if expressed affirmatively the action of 'receiving' would only be a 
 momentary one. Hence the accusative sex rnens'is would be impropert. If the penods 
 durin" which actions thus qualified have happened, are represented as lasting up to the 
 speakek's time, the ablative is likewise us'd, but with the addition of 'his , as: Cui 
 Hqinfih'vianyns supplicatio decretaest, ut non imperatorappellaretur? For whom has a 
 supplication been decreed ocithin the last twenty years without, calling him ' imperator ? 
 Cic Piiil 14, 4.— On the other hand, such actions which are lasting by their nature, as to 
 rei-'u', ' to stav\ ' to be\ ' to live', require the measure of the r durati<m to be in the accu- 
 sative. Later writers use even for such actiims indiscriminately the accus:itive or ablative, 
 
 * Madvi'^ considers the ablative in this passage a rare exception, requiring the accn- 
 sative, thi.-"" being the leirular form. He evidentlv mistook the relation expressed in this 
 l)assaLre. The accusative would be improper, and" an example' of such an accusative could 
 hardlv be produced from any classical prose-writer. . .,. • 
 
 t Livy (40, '29) says : Sex men hs nuniquam pluvis*e memorire traditum est, it is re- 
 ])orted that it had liever rained during six months. This accusative (instead of sex mfn- 
 sib'is. or per sex menjTis) is harsh. Tlie sentence, according to correct grammar, would 
 have to be rendon-d : It lias never ])oen reported that it had (at any time) rained for siJC 
 months in succession. But this idea Livy did not mean to convey. 
 
236 
 
 ADVERBIAL RELATIONS. 
 
 more acciisuuve won cl De iiic rei:iuar luini. inx- "..■— ■-• '--;,„,.,.• .,.-f ,:„^f^ 
 
 ivvwith Iho same preilicato cimiloys th.. pr.-p.i-.tion per: '■■'<''' ■\!'''^, /"',..7,'' "„ 
 :'(^\:i'/. "he U.-P, mmlel.r r.,r «,v;.™l .lay. in ,h. .^'anonary cam . I- - -f,- 3;- '- ;■- 
 
 a mere accusutive would be the reirular form 1 lui-» «hile C.iMr <_»^_;.';,;,:|". ^;",;^_ 
 pent 
 
 Thirnbhtive musr be concMved as an ablative of mkan-;. as: C:e<ir ({''^>'':.^Jj':^^^^^^^ 
 
 fe''?;;:T;;r,«'on\'™;m:\iu:i..^- "hc'ui^^^^^ ''iic^e'ti.e „,„,..,...• or ca,„,.» ..."Ked m.. 
 
 number of days on a march. ..,••» 41,« 
 
 Or. 4 If the ti.ne is mea-nred bv definite numerals, bur withm rer a.n >'"'t- e 
 
 mEmmmmwm 
 
 w . 1( v to be no lonner than three d n,s absent Ir.Mu th.» camp. Ca-. li. Cc ., 9. bet thu 
 Ex ill ons -2 0). A similar force h is the i.repo<ili<)n tnfm. See OBS. b. 
 
 V^„u r ThP .irrp of men is crenerallv express.-d bv the accusative d.-pendent on 7mf'/s 
 (iL^Z i) it n ?v also be evfr."S by a'puKOKATK-oKNiriVK (with; uimi'us),ov by an 
 i?-c -Hive iit 1ui or i ml dc^.^ndent on ar,.re, as : Krat tnm rf.nndecini fere annonmi h^ 
 accns.iino \Niin! n o .M « 1 ^ i un- n>ihi'>ini ef (hrhnuin eqit unnHin). Mold, 
 
 was then just «'/^" \,V,; bu i el t i< expn'-'cl bv a p:.rticipial cii^trnctio.., cither by 
 
 S 312, K. 15 are emuloyed. . 
 
 tn/m. both Mttjcr will uiru ordered Aulus to leave Numidia within ten day^. 
 
 prec^d"u l,y .m'accntiveor tiin.-. an.l r„llo-,y..d by nc,,,npa,auve clause, as : lr«.n,uu,n 
 
 tf «(?a; 7ne/i*w w/^m qmni licet, ceii:^Qram geram. Li\. J, di. 
 
 RELATION OF TIME. 
 
 237 
 
 S J; C >I eni diculToV dictattlra se ab.lieavit, in modern t^me. wUMa ten years ,from 
 m " ) the dictator C. Mu^uius resi-ned hi. dictatorship. Li v. 9, 34. 
 
 nn^ - Tf mei«ured periods are made the attributes of nouns, they are generally 
 «i?n ^i in t LTfv TiVK ^i< ?;i7'/^ et quadraqmta diernm cibana. proy.sions/ar 4o days 
 ?K S/V! R\a ^the oun o^ the time-mea.snre properly beloniis is connected 
 
 9»m,(/-d;/i.-W>/?V''«odecr5taest,athanks2,yingf..rlod^^^^ 
 
 (duri..<Mhree days) accordin- to the decree of the decemvirs. Liv. 3n, 4i. 
 
 1 Attains mortnus est altcro et septuacresimo anno cum quaf'wr et Ql'^'^ragintaanMS 
 ..rJ t T iv 'V "l - 2 Seiniocum qxndraqinhl </ie>- obsedisset t iicam, absce^sit» 
 
 j;J,;.'i'rsoi:'n,^3:5%L-.5;'c-a.sariW,..,U 
 
 S «IVcs nl'Vr, I.!n m..rll.,.r. mV.-nas H.Mto timor o„M,c,n CXCTC. i.m "cc fy t'»^ 
 
 inccplS re ' discedereut ( ,^^ B. (.. ., J. p,f„^ ' \P^J„ ;,5-e„„i,.,.m* est, in quihas 
 n,„io« ol,Iiniierai><. Ca>s B^O. '• ,Vn le^Vnin nr iiViDe 1 i.in- a>'a'is pliilepopliOnim, 
 
 dumneirotuimconfectnm Mt. Ck. *';V'^- Vn^ ^ \i\utvrm'v"-^ annum ui^^ paren- 
 paun^per in.>M-mitteren.- pro. inm C^es B. f^^^.-^J^X^^^^^^^^^ ^ op- 
 
 vnrlo ed,yuM.n in i,uM^.uhH^ 
 
 J5;^9 ' l~Tribun 'c^W n.»bilitf\rem-^ fraude eorum freri^» ut Hannibal d^ct- 
 J^ ;. M;;m «;.';;;;XlianM.n;iincia,n3o habeaV. Ih. ^V'^n f """^"/^"^S'SJo^ 
 Viare^am /.Wi.m ^/^.m i;;,vW.cuhs^teneie.ivr >n>^S -^1 ;^3^1^.^^^^?^f,g5 
 h.stue^» "'"J''''^*"' •*' vr ,;„,V, nfmn e-t 11 :i'l 4- 21. M. Fulvins novemcfiale sa- 
 
 Si;;33;:;^i;;i? i^;;/;» i^c^i/;;- ^;:^/;y.;.,?iapi.iib,ts pmerat. m. 3|n2^- ^ Nimtm. 
 
 ;;;i 'del feclr^e? lb. 1, 13.- 2G. Phili ppus montem Ha^mum gua^o trtduo a.cenderat, 
 
 "^ -.11 , "oio nv>« the same a« re ^"/V-r/a.— ' a"0?5re7W ^.«»"^ with an infinitive 
 
 I to withdraw.- - abl. abs ; J^ same a re j y' m<^ _ ^ ^^ causa.- 
 
 f„;«rfi.< ,««,«*" as 1 2 »;• „,„i," aJlJo, ,,5, force of a Bcnitiye of a noun (prO!7W«w) 
 l.redR-ate f ■'"'•'"/|, .*""''' " r/IJ, _ 18 ,o keep concealed, ciipplynoSfe.- " to nolily : 
 
 for ,omel>n,ly '"'•''r!"" '^Vj''; ' ?i-p^' .'^'I'^jr fo^ as a province.- " larger vMim.^, 
 
 Z^ ^".r-TnVrcnZ'i'Ura 'X/^L;^'.'- '"\„''',^;"rare.- »" J,, t„e greatest dim- 
 culty.— •»" by the hame way where. 
 
238 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 Mdf/o C'st dc^ressup^ Liv. 40, 22.— 27. Ilasdrubal cum ceteris copiiH f:epfuagesimis 
 autns Tarr.cOiuMii rediit. lb. 28, 1»}.— 28. Ciesar ex po loco qtiintb^ caslns Gcriroviatn 
 pci-vCnir. C'i«a. B. G. 7, *;.— 2«». Latera rejiis duo filii juvciu-h'J ciiii:Cl>am3 [ ers.-us 
 jam tncmnwm annum afitm, Dcni.trius qwnqiiemnoiniiior. Liv. 40, ♦»•— -w^ foreman' 
 nonnn a vobis prulVctus, po^t ncxtum et Trice.<imum annum redii. Ih. 30, .j..— -ii. rsoii 
 die iioti Aon7 o/i//.s* (luam noce-s^e est mai.M>ti:ltu abirris*, modo nc« excCdas^ luil- 
 tum« ti-mpus lb. 9, :^i.— 32. (Iiaccbus centum tria oppida intia pnucos dm m dedi- 
 tiOnem accepit. lb. 40, 40.— 3:5. Ob res prosprre ^'e^ias a i)afnbus ?« dte.^ qiixnqm pup- 
 phcHtinnes^ (iecrCtte sunt. lb. :«, 24.-34. Ilortim prodi-iOrum"-» causjl dx^^m vi.nm 
 supplicatio tuit. lb. 27, 2.3.— 3.-). Addita vmmi diem supplicatio est (>x d.-crCto pontiti- 
 cunj. U>. 30, 22.— 3»». Verriniretorix nuntiat,se exiLruc'" dlTrum XXX habere Irumen- 
 lum, t«eci paulo eliam longing tolenliiii po?be parcendoi'-. lb. 7, 71. 
 
 IV. KELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 A. Kel.vtiox op Manner. 
 g 551. Tlie relations of modality comprise all those accompanyins 
 circumstances of an action which neither refer to place, nor to time. 
 They are distinguished as the relation of manner (in a narrower sense), 
 of COINCIDENT ACTION, of QUANTITY, and of CAUSE. Th<? grammatical 
 forms which the language uses for the relation of manner, aside from 
 the prepositions and clauses of manner, arc 1) the adverbs of manner; 
 2) the ablative case of attributive phrases, and in certain instances 
 
 the ablative of NOUNS without attributes. 
 
 Obs The relation of mod.m.ity cannot be otherwi-sc defined than ncL^atively. The 
 gpeciai relations beloiminii to it pa>-i* over into each oth<'r, and it is imposMblo to deter- 
 mine distinctly their limits, many lorms which we will have to consider haviu',' th.' na- 
 ture of several of these relations. Thus the adverbs /oW/^i/o, f/rafmto (,-rrat^lltously^ 
 fal<0 mfrito (deservedly^, may be considered eilht-r as adverbs of cause, or as adverbs of 
 manlier • the adverbs x,dulo, rcdicilus, ixmtiis (th-.ronirhly), and all the a<!verbs of com- 
 paratives and sup( rlatives may be consul, red eiiher as adverbs of maun. t, or as adv.-rhs 
 of qnantitv (intensity). The relation of rnicE anil vai.ve, f -r whuh lan<;uaf;e lias («>tab- 
 li«hed specitlc adverbial forms, is a complicated relation, which may be considered as 
 one of manner, or of cause, or of quantity. It refers to the MANNKitof an action when we 
 Pimply consider the nature of the tran-action, lor instance, when the qiie>tion arises 
 whether somethim: has been taken as a <:ift or tor a consideration. It may be considered 
 as a relation of cai'sk wlien we 'conceive the idea of value as the uki'kkskntativk ol a 
 thin"- The iud-'c for instance awards namai^'es Itecause the loss is ol su( h a value ; I irive 
 a prfce for somethin-,' on arcvvnt of its value. The same relation is one of quauiity il wc 
 measure the value, comparin.:,' it with other values. 
 
 § 552. The adverbs of manner are formed 1) from descriptive adjec- 
 tives (see i^i^ 68. 21&. 220), as diligcnterjucunde ; 2) from form-adjectives, as 
 ita (from the root of /«), nti (from the root of qy(ix), alitcr. These are called 
 modal form-adverbs ; o) from particii)les, as amanter, secreto, prkathn ; 
 4) from nouns, either by iutlection, as forte, partini, or by composition, as 
 quomodo, obiter ; 5) from prepositions, as iiltro, of one's own accord. 
 
 Obs 1 The adverbs of manner formed from descriptive adjectives are of a twofold 
 character They must be either conceived as ad.iectivk attuibi tks o\ substantive ideas 
 implied in the verb on which they depend, or they denote independent actions ol the 
 
 Mo make the descent.— = his two younu' sons (subject).— 3 to s -rround. Transl. : 
 On both sides of the kini; went etc.— •• sooner.— » Perfect subjunctive, with the force 
 of ' you may', ' 1 have no objection, if you' etc. Magl^tratu ah'ive, to resij^n an othee.— 
 • pr«)vided vou do not, so lon^' as you do not.— ' to exceed, to stay beyond.— » J)re. 
 
 scribed.— » i)rodigy. >" scantily. — ^^ impersonal passive predicate-influitive : ihathis 
 
 army might get alung.— i- by cloic management. 
 
 RELATION OF MANNER. 
 
 239 
 
 I 
 
 Bubjoct which for the sake of brevity, are combined with the predicate in the form of 
 an adverb. In' this case the adverbs have the nature of predicative adjectivks. Thus 
 jua/ndfirirerelvds the force of ritam jiicvndar,t agere ; leviferpunlre means lev^m jm- 
 nam iriomre. Nrfiotii'in ntgligenter conjicere n.eans negligentem esse in conjicvndo 
 neqotio ' hoc facilliwe dintur ='hoc dicere facillimum est. Sometimes the Latin lan- 
 L'ua"e u«e< adverbs in the last mentioned sense where we make use of different expres- 
 sion's in En-lish, as Male, hercule, narras! indeed you are ic rang to mention this. Cic. 
 Titsc 1 f» — Hcec et dicuntvr et credtmtur stutiisdme. it is most foolish to say and be- 
 lieve these things. Cic. N. D. 2, 28.- Utrum impudentim Veries lias res populo Romilno 
 adiMiiir an audacins tabulas commiitavit V Was it more ifnjrudent in Verres to steal these 
 things from the Roman people, or more hold to forge the entry ? Cic. Verr. 8, o6. Ex. 1, 2. 
 Obs. 2. Aside from this instance the idioms of both lanirua^es are often difierent in 
 tlie ii«e of adverbial expressions of manner. Often the «me language makes tise of 
 the form of a descriptive or form-adverb, while the other language uses adjectives, or 
 adverbial expressions not having th«! form of an adverb, as Siccine est sententia? Is this 
 (literallv thus) thv <»i)inion ? Ter. lleaut. 1, 1,— Se ita a majoribus suis didicisse, ut 
 ma<ds virti'ite quam dolo contenderent, they had learned this rule from their ancestors, 
 to ii<'lit the enemy rather by valor than by deception. Cres. B. G. 1, 13. Absolute form- 
 }i(iiective< which, in Eiigli>"h, are used as factitive predicates of verbs of calling (p. 102, 
 Ji) take ill Latin, the form of a'/iw66' of manner; as: irA«/ is this called ? Q'iomodo(\\ot 
 quid) hoc dicitur? as: Tria sunt genera, quid fiat, aut quale sit, aut quomodo nominefur 
 (r;-ferrin"- to the question ' what it is called \—i. e. what name is applied to it). Cic. Or. 
 2. It).— Sev.ral Kuuli-h adjectives form leirular adverbs, while their Latin equivalents 
 do not admit of acfverbial lorms. Thus the adjectives imnuMlis, immenmx, injlexlbilis. 
 iuei-tnis incolu/nis. ingens. ^/.orwjwf I'tlie adverb enormiter being only used by late writers), 
 and many others, do not form adverbs in Latin, while from their English equivalents 
 re"iilaradv(rl)sare formed. On the other hand, Latin adverbs must frequently be rendered 
 bv~i)repositional or other adverbial expressions, if English analo^rous adverhs do not 
 exist, as impiine, with impunity ; cegerrime, with the greatest difficulty ; tici-^sim, in turn ; 
 perinde, in the same manner, and liiany others. 
 
 Obs. 3. To the descriptive adverbs formed in o which are enumerated § f;9. the following 
 shouid be added : arcdno, secretly ; aMUvlto. deliberately : direcfo, directly ; grafuifo, 
 gratuitously ; improvl^o, unforeseen ; inopindto, unexpectedly : liqnido, clearly ; merito^ 
 deservedly • optdfo, according to one's wishes ; precario, on suflerance ; partiano, on 
 shares; fesfdfo and infestdfo. with, and without a testament. Here belong the impersoual 
 ablatives absolute mentioned § 5:iG, R. 234. 
 
 Jieni. 15. The ^Modal Fokm-advebbs are formed from the roots ot 
 the determinative form-adjectives, similarly to the locative form-adverbs 
 (i- 548, K. 4), almost all corresponding to the first locative case. 
 ' 1. To the interroirative and relative forms (root c?() beloniz; : 
 
 the adverbs nti or ut (inst. of cnti), how; q>n, how ; vtut (corresponding to g-wi^^-Mi^), 
 
 and utcunqiie (coi responding to quicunque), how^oever. 
 
 2. To the definite tbnn beloiii^ 
 
 ftic*. thus, so (corresponding to hir) ; ita, thus, so (from the root i of is) ; itideJJi and 
 Us abbreviated form item (rr«)in idem), in the tame manner, likewise. 
 
 3. To the indefiiiile Ibrm belong; 
 
 vtique (corresponding to qnixque), by all means, anyhow; the negatives nfvft^-wa/n 
 (inst of )ie->ftiq>/((m). iwd its synonym ?iequdquam. m no way, in no manner, in 
 no resj)ect ; /lequirquam (also written oequidquar/i or nequ'iquam). in vain (all cor- 
 responding to qui'tquam) : aliOqui or alioquin, in other respects, else (from alius and 
 Quis). andT//i/«y, otherwise, in a diflerent manner. 
 r??" Of these adverbs only qui. sic, and ita, besides some of the indefinites, are in 
 general use. In i)lace of the others, compounds or phrases with modo are generally 
 einploxed Such j)hiases mwf be used in place of the wanting modal adverbs of ali- 
 Qui-t quidam and ullu^\ as a'iquo imtdo or quodammodo. in some manner, uUo modo and 
 Kuilo modo. in some way, in no way, the latter of wliich is more usual than, aud slightly 
 difierent from, nequdquam. 
 Ob* 1 The re'-ular modal form-adverb of the iNTEttnoGATivE and relative form (root 
 . ai) is uti or (more usually) ut. Bu t in this meaning ut is neve r (in prose) used in directt 
 
 * Sic (instemiof^'i-tvT probably is identical with tiie conjuiiciioii .si, both belonging 
 to an ancient deuionsirative root sa, which occurs in cognate languages. Some c<m- 
 sider the a- in sic as a euphonic change from /i in flic (as ef and sex).— t It frequently 
 thus occurs in interrogative clauses: In vulgus elatum e?t, «/ ea res colloqumm dire- 
 misset {liow this had broken up the conference). Cks. B. G. 1,46. 
 
240 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 intPrvn<Tntion«. It occiir^ liowcver, a» the regular form (rarely replaced by qrtomodo\ in 
 
 tlZa n\n\u^^^^^^^ of this kind, frequently m.xiifles a pr.'v.ous ir^'nen^l^um- 
 
 ?St relict nit. s.nne pn.portic.nal standard, and is variously rendered ^^y/^^'^'f 
 
 non^i^Jnc^. he also lu/d great lit.-rary knowled,'e/r>r a Ilornan. C,e fc>en. 4 Ex. 5. 6. 
 rw- 9 Tho Fnrrii^h '/iO«'' in interro-'ative sentence-, both independent and depend- 
 
 ■ « » '/inml-./ «0» »»■«-;.-(«./. i..-..ii;i "ot fmci .m, how »;.>"',■; j'.i'v;;;;;,!,^; ;' ;». '^v, „ 
 
 r P Vli 17 Thu>i Ire. uenllv r/'/7 /?r ..coirs with a following at. as Qmnt Maccmis, 
 J/ /<.^ ro; ;;i/JJ im ^^ . v^loes it happ.«u. ( ) Maecenas, t hat lu.hody lives con .■nt- 
 .";llv .^""iT r Sa 1 1 V>^^^^ and g>:,madnm>l>on.\\n' sanie as y^^ .-m. also used 
 rr^V^tivPa vVrhiVith;^^^^^^^^ 
 
 freouentlv the phrase (i>fo parfo is usc-d (a favorite expression of Cicero). a> . '^^'Y.m.nt v 
 3 ^Si ioc V/ I do not kn.)W how this always h;.i)pens Cic Mur. '21. * re qm n y 
 
 SpF# ':e^3Sf SSSS, :i^ i'^ 
 
 manner so ever one may have been killed .' L ic. 3iii. d. , , . 
 
 Or^ q 9;V !ind i/a are so distinguished tliat 4c is more generallv emp oyed in a com- 
 
 air ;::SS=;;z:2 :«"5|S^ Bx 
 
 ii cannot be made out in what direct icm ^ flowing. Cie^. H. i.. 1, U . -Ita ^pLroqumLm, 
 —*-n::^;;;^7^^7;r\T7irtvn written 'mWo separate words, other words being frequei:tly In- 
 serte^r!wS3i the twoTart^ This is aLavs the case in interrogative sentences when 
 it is strengthened by /,«m as: ^ • ^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^.^^ ^^^^ „f ^,,,^ 
 
 A ^ ^^' 'a ^if^r^hi id declcMSon The tudent will have noticed that the cases of tli s 
 u"e oflSn for ule fomilline V.acum, and for the plural quWr^^cum. is non-clas.icaU 
 
 RELATION OF MANNER. 
 
 241 
 
 to \ hope, Ter. Andr. 1,5, as.— In tertio de OratOre Ua pcriptum est (a passage of Cicero 
 bein<' quoted after these words), in the third book ' On the Orator' Vie foUaicing passage 
 oecurs (literally ' it is written'). Quint. 9, 1, 25. But this distinction is often disregardcid. 
 sic bein" used in place of ita, and vice versa. Peculiar is the idiom by winch Ua 
 (not sic)"followed by lit (that) is used with a concessive and adversative force, equivalent 
 to ' but so t/iat', as If a friitmpharunt ut, they triumphed, but so that. Hcec ita prceteredmus 
 ut tat/iefi intuf.ntts relinquamus, let us pass this, but so that we (as to) keep itin our view 
 (literally : let us so pasj» this that we, however, leave it behind looking at it). Cic. Sest 
 5.— In iiitcrrogative sentences both ita and eicare generally placed tirst, taking the enclitic 
 Tie. hie being chanired into siccine, as Ita/ie cerises, do you think so ? Cic. Div. 2. '^"i.—Siccim 
 t ii' homiiy-m optime de repitUicd merit urn in discrimen rocavisti ? Didst thou thus place in 
 jeopardv a man of the gi-eatest merits for the republic? Cic. Flacc. 33. 
 
 Tain jind adeo, both meaning so (not ' thm') are quantitative adverbs (see R.30, obs. 4). 
 and cannot be used as adverbs of manner in any of the mentioned sentences; but tfa 
 (rarely .s-ic) before adjectives and verbs, is sometimes used with quantitative force, as Ita 
 sum ajffiictus ut nemo vmqimm, I am so much afflicted as no one ever was. Cic. Att. 2, 12. 
 
 Ons. 4. To sic and ita corresponds the adjective talis, such, of that kind (inst. of 
 itrUis), for which the attributive genitive phrase ejus imdi (irenerally written in one 
 word ejusnwdi) is frequently used. Ejusmodi. if used predicatively, has the force of a 
 predicate--'enitive. Xomen legdti efusmodi esse debet ?/^ the name of an ambassador 
 should be'of such a kind that. Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 33.— Genus hoc ^usnwdi judicidrum, 
 this class of courts of that kind. lb. 60. 
 
 Ob^ 5 TfeniHml ifidem arc generally used in the meaning 'likewise', assigning the 
 same «m/ica/^ to another svb/ect or object, as: Est igitur vis virtatis duplex...; tempe- 
 rantia autem itidem distribflta est duObus modis. The power of virtue is twofold...; but 
 temperance is likewise distinguished in a double way, Cic, Part. 20, 76, 77.— Litter* mit- 
 tiintur isti a patre vehementes,ab amicis item. Vehement letters are sent to him by his 
 father and likewl-^e by his friends. Cic. Verr. 6, 19.-Elcirantly, non item is employed in the 
 la<t of two adversative sentences having the same predicate,when the last sentence is neg- 
 ative Non item, in this instance, is translated 'but not\ occupying the last place : O specta- 
 culum uni Crasso jucundum, ceteris non item, O for the sight pleasant to Crassus alone, 
 but not for the others! Cic. Att. 2,21. Torender the English 'in the same manner ' either 
 item, (itidem) is used, or the phrase eddem modo (e^dem ratidne), or the adverb perinde (also 
 nroiiide) This advi-rb has the peculiarity that it is also used with adjective force (perinde 
 est or mnnde valet, ' it is the same tliint.''). Ariovistus respondct, jus esse belli, ut qui 
 vicissent eis quos vicissent, quemadmodum vellent, imper3rent ; item populum Iloma- 
 num victis ad suum arbitrium imperare consuesse, Ariovistus answered, it was the law 
 of war that the conqueror should treat the conquered as he wished ; in the same manner 
 the ]{oman people was accustomed to treat the conquered according to its pleasure. 
 C'e>^ B G 1 :W — Perinde uxor instituta fiierat. libt-rlqiic instituebantur, in the sams 
 wai/h\» wife had been brou<rht up. and (so) his children were being brought up. Liv. 3, 
 44 o Ptrinde is especially frequent with a following comparative clause, connected by 
 vr ar, ataue, quam (as), or by quasi, ac si (as if), being often rendered by just, just so, 
 ii< Perinde ut culque data sunt, in the same manner (pn.porti.m), as it has been given to 
 each, Cic. Tusc. 1, 39. Per'inde quasi exitus rernin legibus vindicentur, jt^i so as if the 
 issues of things were punished by the laws. Cic, Mil. 7, 19. 
 
 Obi 6 Instead of aliter, frequently secus is used, especially with negatives and a fol- 
 lowinir comparative clause {non secus acjiaud secus), as: Hecte an secus, mhU ad nm, 
 rinht or otlterivise it does not concern us. Cic. Pis. 28,— Dixi illud non secus ac seritu- 
 bam, I did not say this other'wm than 1 thought. Cic. Or. 2, 6, 24.- Nihilo secius (or mhtlo 
 minus) means nevertheless. 
 
 Bern. 16. Many past participles form adverbs in im instead of in e, as, 
 
 C(F.sirn, by cutting: certntim, at a race, emulously; con}uncfim, nnited, in concert ; 
 contemptim, in scorn ; curHm, rapidly ; gravatim. unwillingly (rare) ; ncmmatim hy 
 name •! passim, scattered about : punctirn, pointwise : prtvattm, privately ; raptim, 
 hastily : sensim, visibly ; separdtim, separately ; stnctirn, briefly, summarily. 
 Ob" Some few of these participial adverbs have both forms, that in e (sometimes o), 
 which i<5 the regular adverbial ending (»f perfect participles, and that in im. as strictim, 
 oonjunctim, separdtim. These, generally, have different significations according to these 
 endincs, as strictim and stricte (of stHngere), the former of which belongs to the eignifl- 
 cation 'to touch', and the latter to that of 'to draw tisrht'. bome &» minut^m (non- 
 classical) and minfite (minutely, classical) belong to difierent periods of tlie language. 
 Others as conjunctim and conjuncte, separdHm and separate, are used incuscnrainately. 
 
242 
 
 EELATIOKS OF MODALITY. 
 
 ??/.,» 17 Most iulvcrbs of manner ckrived from nouns arc forniod hy 
 thflulin^ ^'r.^:-nor:ily prcce.lec) by «,but «'"^eti'.es by of ..r connec - 
 
 is of a looser clKinicter, as ostidtun, which docs not mean in the manna 
 of doors' but * from door to door'. 
 
 CaUrrknm, in troop. ; a-n,«rmM. by '■™'»*f, J'j^^JI^'i^-ir^rV.Syirin^f^^^^^ 
 
 mCUim, hUiMinarily; ticimm, m turn; vinf im, mmi !.> uuni. 
 
 IMaut. Capt. 1, 2.- 4. Mi.n ^^"'V'7: /'* ' ; "'jA'^ • k T^ fiOr. in c vitas jmipla^ utq.ic 
 turn etiani (Jriucis. ^'^ temponbus ilh>^ eimlltu> tic. »"•;.-,,, ,..,,/.„^ K.,nia,.us 
 
 1- ^-r- .l";.^'.V"'^*- '}Ji,^ Or 9 4^ 11 Oiemadmod'on soU^s <lt; ceteris rebiid, bie de aiuici- 
 r/H«/o j.ulicetnr Cic. Or 2 3S - ^l" V''''^f ^/^^^^^ n.a-istrnmiu adepii Mint, 
 
 mm nihil a t>e culciua.u de te stcus esse d.ctiiiu. Lie. Att. 1, 1.», H. 
 
 ^ '-'t Objects of manner take the form of attiubutive niiiASES m 
 the uuiuuve if manner is expressed : 1) by one of the nouns denotinq 
 
 " ^, "' ' 16 ^ mT o ''"i« •uiut 1 er Vviiv can aliu.'^ not be used hereof- " inUnj.itare 
 
 RELATION OF MANNER. 
 
 243 
 
 MANNETi, especially modus or one of its equivalents, ?i,s> pactum, ratio, mos 
 (if the manner is founded on habit). This form is used {a) if the real object 
 of manner is represented by an adjective (most frequently a foum- ad jec 
 TiVE), as ?ioc modo {pac(o\ cOdem modo.eddem raiidne^ quo modo, qua ratiOne^ 
 mdlo modo {pacto), quodam modo, nefario modo^ etc.; (&) if manner is de- 
 scribed by COMPARING it with the manner of others, as modo {more) Gr(Ecd- 
 rum (after the manner of the Greeks), the attribute, in this instance, gener- 
 ally taking the form of a genitive; 
 
 2) by the ablative of abstkact nouns, directly describing the manner, 
 without the medium of general nouns, such as modus etc. The nouns 
 used for this purpose are either derived from adjectives or verbs denoting 
 the action which is represented in the relation of manner, or are equiva- 
 lent to such nouns, as alacritas, dementia, celeritas, gaudium, tumvltus. 
 These nouns must always be connected with an adjective attribute, being 
 cither a determinative form^idjective (as qua audacid, eddetn studio), or with 
 an adjective of intensity, such as 8ummus,multus,magnus, admivahilis, in- 
 credibilis, as summo gaudio, with the greatest joy ; incredibill celeritdte, with 
 incredible swiftness; ingenti studio, with enormous zeal. 
 
 The English exponent of the relation of manner, if expressed by nouns, 
 
 is generally the preposition with, except when manner is expressed by 
 
 the ablative of modus, in which instance we use the preposition in, 
 
 Ob»' 1. The ablative case mnst he considered as a ^Mieral form for all adverbial re 
 latioiis, l)iit only //" the vatureof the relation is expressly indicated by one of the words 
 of neneral immrt denotituj the relation, a^ tenipns, die^, locus, tntervallum, longitudo, 
 modus, causa, pretium. Oiily these words, denoting: the relation itse f, are, as a general. 
 KUi.E, placed in the ablative case. Hence it is always easy to find the proper En;i ish 
 preposition whicli must be emploved for each of these diflerent relations. But adverbial 
 relations mav be implied by ikDEUSTANDixo the general words mentioned. Here 
 be^-iiK thedilHcultv in detennininn: the n;itnrc of the relation either in a <;iven Latin 
 sentence or in renderini? expressions of this kind from other languages into Latin. Iti 
 is evident that the indiscriminate use of the ablative case in all possible adverbial re- 
 lations would confuse and confound them all, while reserving this cjis-i for certain ex- 
 pressions, and restricting it bv specific forms, different according to the nature of the 
 {elation, will be sufficient for'the purpose of clearness. Thus the use of the ablative 
 in tiie relation of manner is limited by the restrictions mentioned § y53. tiom Ihe^e 
 
 ^%^Thafnoims^in hie ablative case do mt bdon^ to the relation of manner unless they are 
 
 combined unth certain atti-ibutes ; , . ,, x» ..• ^ »,^„o.-7>7. -.,^.« 
 
 2) that the relation of manner cannot be expressed by the adlative of every jwsstble noun, 
 
 l)ut only (a) by jnodus and its equivalents, (b) by abstract nouns directly expressing the 
 
 action which is conceived as being in the relation of manner. ,i^„^t.^ 
 
 \Vc infer from tlie<e rules : 1) that sentences such as ' hejought xnth couraqe , he a^Ud 
 
 with cheerfulness, uith zeaV cannot be expressed by the mere ablative of virtus, alacntas, 
 
 stiidivm but mustbe provided with attributes {summd virtute pugiwvit, rem magna ala.- 
 
 critdtc, summo studio, qessit): 2) that such phrases as 'he came with \\\vqq wiinessee , 
 
 'to fl<'ht with the eneJnv', Mie killed him with the sword^ do not belong to the re- 
 
 latioifof manner, although we use the exponent of this relation in all three instances. 
 
 Ttie fir<t phrase belongs to the relation of ' coincident action', requiring the preposition 
 
 aim (cw/A tribus testibus venit); the seeond phrase contains a com;?/€/in(7 object ot ttie 
 
 verb 'to fi'-ht', beini: likewise rendered by cum (cum hostibus pugnare) ; the third phrase 
 
 contains an object nf instrumentality and cause, being rendered by the mere ablative of 
 
 the noun (gladio eum occldit). 
 
 Ob?. 2. The mere abUtivc case of a noun, unless an attiibute ae defined § 553 be added, 
 
244 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 exprospea instrumentauty or cause, ns TTeJv^fii dMnmt f>e magl^ '^^1V\?T.^..^\l!?r 
 coNffmlereVi^- B Ci 1. 13. the Ilclvrtian? paid that thoy wm' accu-tonu-d to «J^l't ratluT 
 ^va or tlmn &y fraud i. e. by mkans of th.ir valor, not by f^nu hdent mkan.) whm, y 
 \\^\nfi the nrt'pogition icith as expoiunt of mannek. a mcaiuii<; difforcnt from that ot tne 
 uSr vvmKl impartc.» tothrUntencc. • To (l-ht «i^A valor ' is not v^rmt^^-oritendere. 
 
 tin exercifum in locum prwdjnf.m perdnxt^-^e dixit. Liv. 2(.. '2 ; he ;=ud '^^J J^>'" f. *^ i^^'^/;^. 
 
 er^ had led their armies by recklessness and '''^'''^l''''''',^''''\fj^^}:}^Z^^ 
 
 lP«<»np^^> into ' ti«'ht' olaees. Thus, f we wcmld reiuh-r the sentence he acconipn. niu 
 
 ^'i^^^.i^di&e and care' by tnere »^>'''tl-- i-';-;'';;'- f :;^; i^^,^^^^^ 
 nermoit) we w<.uld thereby chan.je the relation ot MAN>fKU into one ol •''^V iTw 
 
 Itt ir w^n^e to n.nvevthe idea ' dili-.ntly ' and 'ca.elnl y ' we must "!:*•••> »»'r 
 
 mherbiotin".."e^^^ 
 
 Unagml, otnni, or mnwul dUigentid et curd). . , , 
 
 Or^ S There are a few nouns, the mere ablatives of which are jrrnerally considered 
 
 to expre.. a r laHon o mannku. But altl.ou.'h we senerally render these iiouns as 
 
 f ,\i^rbS«. A he relati<.n of mann.r, ^^e shall timl. <m closer ;;^='"^V'"'V;;;;. «f 
 
 thev eUln-M tM..n- to the reh.tlon of instrumentality and cau';.-, or totl.at ot ^•«•";^'«^ J 
 ar LV ai d tir t even in the latter instance thev were ori-inally conceiv.-d as expi ■^^^l.>' 
 '^n ans' d in^ir nmenti^^^ ll»'-e belon- i)Jure (ri-htly, ju.tly, correctly) which is 
 
 n" eU.;Sti;hol""n;;a;,ri?;ute or with possessives ^^:^%'!-^:'Z:'"^oZt\"'?^:r^y 
 
 CtinpHtur n>im hire hoc feceiis. it s the question whether you ha\e doin t ns ri^niiy 
 
 ^SS v^u wSi.h? in doin^ this).- iioc tuo^or ^'^''';j)./^f::,;^;-;::::;,;'^:;i^iV,''*:;:^? 
 
 that von a«»<ert thi-* • ri<'htlv', * correctly ' (i. e. that you j#.^ nirht in a>> rtliij: '"'^'; '^y'* 
 
 ^ eVib.nti;themeanrn..4;iri.'htr^^^^^ 
 
 2» T„;urin lU iniurid biUuiii iof^ne. to commence awar vn/'fsf/!/. ( i»-?. 15. (•• 1. 2t). .^n 
 
 n,/^rwarisn2(';metb;^'.sw;^.K»inanunju^ 
 
 friColous «noUNDs. an.l hence the expresMon belonu"; '•;,'"/;/' h™ H di « J- 
 
 Rfiiimpiifiliiv' — 3) 17 aiul dolo, v o .Mitlv and Iraudulemly. a> in tli« phra^c?^, atxo pie 
 
 ful;u,l7u%^^^^^ h battle was not eomm.nced in thr n-ual manner wih s u.uting 
 
 has typically this meanin-) the dead with wailnif? and tears, Liv. 2o, .JH, wUcic me aoia 
 liv,. ..V iflpntlv d<-notes the means b>/ which the dead are honored. 
 
 laVihroVamS^n^^^^^^^^ our trooi)s thr defence was mad,- in tf,. .ame ^nnvnerm 
 
 on th ^h v iSore Ca-s J G 5, AO.-Simili rafione Powpejus w kui. casfns con.idit in a 
 on the (lay IK tore. v.« s^ , J:! ,..\ti\,, hu pumn Ce- H C 3, Ttl.—Kf. it ions of modality, 
 
 a view to take h^j or Ca s. 1 • (- ^y • ^,'^^'^^;, "^/ T,ie foUowim,' sentence : Hoc fecit 
 S. ;;;;ii; Z'd^ . diar p " /'-/" that. the war mijjht be fin- 
 
 KecKLi V. 'i^ 35), Ihe phnise non dubia .pe expres.es coincident action (/«>/i dubte .peran,). 
 n«« K ThP nblative of those abstract nouns which pinErTi.Y describe t'lo manner of an 
 ac?.on (^ ?.3 I) . Vc^ie nth' made dependent on the prep..si,ion cum (§ '^^ n/^'/^'",;;»; Jf 
 
 BELATION OF COIKCIDENT ACTION. 
 
 245 
 
 Ob8 6 From the relation of manneu must be distineruishcd those ablative phrases 
 which express the relation of roiNriPKNT action, as orndtu regdli- in mlio sedet (Cic. 
 Fin 2 21) • maano coviitatu ingreM mn(. Cic. Cat. .3, 2. r,. omnibus copiis ad castra con- 
 tendere Cics B G. 2, 7 ; nudCdo conxire piigridre, lb. 1. 25. a^quo anitrw ferre. All th- se 
 and similar objects do not denote the manner of sittins?, of cominjr, of hastening, and 
 fi-'htiii" but actions coincident and comfnnid with another action of the same subject. ^ 
 Th.v aVe equivalent to participial expressions, used as accessory predicates (to sit being 
 in roval suite ; to come al«)nf? /airing a great ntinue; to hurry to the camp having all 
 the forces: to fiirht having an unprotected body etc.). See § 5,54 foil. 
 
 Oiis 7 Sometimes phrases, properly beloniring to the relation of manner, take the form 
 of air'acce-^ory predicate, in the same way as Ihi? relation of cause is expre>*sed accord- 
 in- to ^ 5<)1 K. 115. Thus especially the participle vmfi is employed, which in this re- 
 lation perAums the same function as the participles odducfu'i, comnUJtus etc. in the re a- 
 tion ol ( \i«K as- P(»st<aquam in vulgns milituni elatuni est. v"« anw/anfta in col o- 
 qui(. Ariovi-ti-'s t/vt/AMmini Galli.l RcmiJInis interdixisset, after it had become generally 
 known inthearmv irith tvhat arrogance (literally 'using what airOganct) Anovistua 
 had forbidden the Romans from the whole of Gaul. Ctes. B. G. l,4t;. 
 
 1 Hoc modo iste sibi prospicere^ didicit. Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 61.— 2. Siculi ipsum Verrera 
 pertulisseut''*. si humdno modo. si usitdto ?fiore^, si uno aliquo in gene-e peccasset*. lb. 
 2 2 3 9—3 Thes-^ali* servornm tnodo jineter spem repente« mannmi^sOrum^ jaca- 
 bau'tsVese iusectatiOne» et conviciisi» RomanOrum. Liv. .3<», W.— 4. Sumat argentum » 
 alicunde; si nuflo alioparto. fenore»^. Tir. Phorm. 2. 1. 71.- 5. Ab his, qm i^^cudym'^ 
 ritu ad voluptJlK-m omnia referunt>Moiigedissentiunt. Cic. Am. 9, 32.— b. Anovistus 
 po«tniavit ut uterque cum equitatu venlret : alia ralione sese non esse venturum •. 
 Cse- B G 1 42 — 7 Ilac oraliOne habitil WJfrwm m 7//0</ww convcrsaii» sunt omnium 
 mente-s' lb '^ 41 — 8. Scipio omni curd inteutus erat necuhi hosti ivquo»' se conimitte- 
 ret l(»co Liv '25 :« — 9. II<»c te ita rogo, ut le majore studio ro>r?ive non possim. Cic. 
 On Fr '1 2 — K) Marcellus, captis Svractlsis, cum res in Sicilia t ant a fide atque m- 
 teg'ritd'te C(mlpo^uissetl^ Ii..maui devexiti». Liv. 25, 40.- 11. Catulus, seutentiaui 
 rogatus, hoc initio est suin?nd cumauctoritdte'^^ usus. Cic. Verr. 1, 15. 
 
 B. Relation of Coincident Action. 
 § 55 1. The relation of coincident action represents the accompanying 
 circinnstances of the predicate as separate actions, but as ch)sely united 
 with tlieniain act, or alTectin.i^ the same, so as to be conceived as a relation 
 
 of modality in reijard to the latter. 
 
 Ob< The relation of coincident action holds a middle place between the relations of 
 manner time and cause on t tie one side, and the connection of two actions l.y copula- 
 tive co-ordination, on the other. Hence it may either assume the grammatical form of 
 an oii-iKcT, or that of a dedicate (accessory predicate). Thus the Engdish phrases to 
 perform an action olaply, thankfili.v, vnwilmnoly' express a relation of coinci- 
 ciDENT ACTION, although ADVEinJs formed like those of manner are used to express 
 them. These adverbs do not express the property of the a( tions, but the feelimrs of 
 the subiect while performing the actions. Not the action is thankful, but the individual. 
 The Latin expresses c(.incideiit actions of this kind mostly in the form of an accessory 
 PREPiCATE, either bv participles, or adjectives, but often objectiveforms are employed 
 as- Nos vero. n tale gnid acciderit. l.eti ef aoentks guatias poreawys, but we. if such 
 a tiiin'- hai)pens, will obev cheerfully and thankfully (literally 'being cheerful and render- 
 inn tirankA. Cic. Tusc. 1,'49. The same relations may be expressed objectively in the 
 form <.f APVEKBs (rarelv), or in the Ibrm of ablatives, or by prepositions, as : Anto- 
 tiius Sulpicium exsfincf'um i..f.te atque insoi.enteh /«//?7, Antonius bore tlie death of Sul- 
 picius imlullvand insolentlv. Cic. Phil. 9, :^.-rnfferifa grate wemimt he remembers 
 th.' past 'thankfully. Cic. Fin. 1, 19.-The same relations may be expressed by the phrase» 
 grata dafo) ai'iimo, gralismna viemorid, stmimo cum gaudio etc. Lie. i^nii. 4, 1 , lu, a. 
 
 % 555. The relatitm of coincident action takes either a predicative oran 
 objective form. The predicative form is called the form of the accessory 
 
 1 To t'ike care — 2 to endu:e.— » custf.mary.— •« to ofTend.— » The.^salus, a Thessalian. 
 • suddei'.lv.- "^ manumittere, to emancipate.- ^ se jactdre. to l>oast.— » prosecution.— 
 10 ^-onvictum abuse.- " mt>nev.- y^fnuK loan at interest.- '» pecudes, cattle.-- '* to 
 refer to to place in connection with.- »» supply : dixit.- " converlere^o turn.- i' even. 
 » to settle.- »" devehere, to sail for.— 20 power, effect. 
 
246 
 
 RELATIOKS OF MODALITY. 
 
 TREDic VTE (§ 461), as Hmc fi.ens a Ccesare peiivif, this he asked creeping 
 from C^sar,' Cses. B. G. 1, 20. The objective form of the coincident 
 action consists either in an adverb of manner, or in a phrase ni the abla- 
 tive, or in prepositional expressions, especially with cum and sine. 
 
 Rem 18 The accessory predicate may consist of a present participle, 
 an adjective, or substantive, but it is always conceived as a present parti- 
 ciple, the adjectives and substantives used in this relation havin- the force 
 of n irticiples of predicate-adjectives and nouns, the participle o the 
 con a be n- understood. In whatever form the accessory predicate 
 m^v ppea-rit must always aj^ree with its lo-ical subject in case 
 mber,^ 'md (if it is movliblef in gender. The logical subject ot 
 the accessory \)redicate is always at the same time a member of the 
 phrase in ^^■\nvh the principal predicate is contained. Tlius it may be 
 he grammatical subject, or an object of the principal predicate, or an at- 
 tribute combined with a phrase of the P^n^'M^al Pr^^^^c^Ue. T ie ac- 
 ces^orv predicate, accordin- to the relation ot its logical subj ct, is 
 either^in Ihe nominative, o? in any of the oblique cases, mostly the ac- 
 
 cusative * 
 (a) AouKEiN-a with thk ^v^^^'^'^\ G<xMfemnansadvh^^ 
 in h»-to) - X^uio saJKit i^nbrins, nobody dances -sober . Cic. Mui. b.— Hk-'^ar proquiX. 
 
 Ihe c.innmiKln- ,>,inloii<.-cl Sc.npronuis ut Ins .■.■<iue-t (lit; '• J ^ '">- "-"""= ""^ '• 
 
 the tyrant was haunted by the ima-c of tliu • muocntly Iv.lled man. 
 
 Ob^ \cce<sorv i.rcdicates, in r.-ard to tlicir jn-animatical fnnction in the pontonco mnst 
 
 ail aciuMiiv.slliciopula.. ■««(belli'-- oinitied: nwrtuos iM^imUus. 
 
 1. biNoi.K ^l**^^-^};;\ ., .Vh..Hiibiect milifes being in liie accusative in tlie troveininff 
 ^^!^:'l!r£^'^ pLVc^"'c£j?d tntJ at.^tccnsa.ive plnase with participial 
 t^tf^JlSefX^intli and tlms incorporated with the ;;overninj,' plua.e. 
 
 Hem. 19. No tatiticiples but the tresent can be employed «"js acccs- 
 sorv Pivdicates. Hence this constructi(Mi is generally conhned to e 
 active voice. But the langua-e has in tlie periphrastic conjugation of the 
 participle (^ 500) a means%> supply this defect, and hence P=nticip les in 
 he form ot' the perfect passive, frecpietttly occur as ^'^'''^:y/'l^^^^' 
 which must always be considered as tuesent pahticiplls ot the^PEUi- 
 
 PIIllASriC CONJUGATION, as ,,.,,, /f f 
 
 ceived as a pkesent, relatively to the time of the main action. 
 
 BELATION OF COINCIDENT ACTION. 
 
 247 
 
 u«rn hptona tho exolctivc partlciplcs addnctiis, pei^wtus etc. (p. Ij^./i'- ^^^^' ^''".^^ 
 Here bcloncc the expicinc i * ^ ^ .^^^ ],} 19).— For the use of the periphrastic 
 
 nr.' frOMllcIlt V used as ;lCCeh>01 y 1»1 tlin^''*»''-^ yjj^. j»». ^.v ,. . „ ion n 1 ^Q . r» 
 
 u^rx\v\^\eXx ani.^ and -enindials in dns, a^ accessory predicates, see p. U\hR. lo8 , p. 
 
 ?4l i 51(1 For ilie ll^e of The participial adjectives in bundus as ace. pred. see P. I., p. iol. 
 ilL 1 Tho Fn-diFh oauivalpnts of participial accessory predicates arc ?encrally pak- 
 ^^T;l' w fmnu tW ther f..rms are used, especially when the participle ts in an 
 
 quid dtcenHfrattr tmi^ ^''^^t^' ^r.^o trnnJi.i .' the accessory uredicates libem and scieM 
 
 'r^'t^ll:" a"•'')5a^■SS^^ m^ l^&;.^lZ^i:S gladly (wi^lliu^ly. fain) 
 
 k-::pt'^:ilenrabc;u/fhis 'Slsr Uv. 27 8.- Ut ofenderet sciens neminem, that lie know- 
 
 iiKihi offended no one. Cic. Plane. Ifi, 41. , .. ,, 
 
 n^ rThera^c of an accessoi'vpredicateis. of course, in the accusative If thesentence 
 
 n wiiichit is n-ed' Ls an SnitSve'c^ause, provided that it refers to theBubject-accusative 
 
 of the sentence. (Ex. 18. 19. 20.) r.- c , n i^ 9 TprPntins 
 
 1 . Plato nno et octo^simo amio^^ t^^^'^erS'Si^^. ^Tcf iiS' ihi 
 
 ava,..^i urbetn "n't-^L- \^':- A^^ ^^)f- 4 Con u. iO.S om^^ fortissinie pvgnanjes 
 
 E-J^Jvr'^Vt C c' n^^^^^ ]^fl^!^O^S^^moriem populum Rom3num liberum ,;elm- 
 peisi;Mra\it. cic.inu.... ^- ' ,,»„.,„ ,i,,h)tam contirmare possum. Ctc. Bam.o, 16, 
 
 KoinJlnos eru. i.n. o.), 4.j.— '■*• ;r\'' ",..', -'ik 4,, ^^ _ 15 nov,tes separStim ntdivm. 
 
 if/c/t//(^^w^^*. Cic. Cin.O.i. i.h. „ M-^.'^27 ,\.7^ » ry 1 .>2_-20 Le^^ati ex St nulbant, spa- 
 
 ^^'^:!'ii::^:^^\^S:i^Vru:<^^ Xs-Lp,a™e tenum. Liv. «.47. 
 
 Ttrm '^0 Tlic AD.IECT1VES wliicli are used as accessory predicates gener- 
 
 .,lh ill. En 'nsl, a.lverbs as e<,«ivalenls, cannot l,e reduced to a detinue 
 
 n i . "nee J Latin laiiirna-e lr<.t,nently employs adverbs even in rela- 
 
 ,S Iv iC d not lieion- to 'MASNEU', but to ' COINCIDENT ACTION 
 
 \ most idiectivestlius employed belong to those expressing personal 
 Ml ties especia ^y a^^^^ ami te.i.pers of the mind, and properties 
 
 ■et'e in'" lo lie bodv. to health ami life, to clothing and arms. Bui some, 
 ^.mcitlb'siiclias have a parlicipi.al character, do not belong to any ot 
 thele cl'ises The following adjectives are most frequently used as ac- 
 
 (timidly (..^;f7«'''w """S'Vf >; ''^ ; " i\ i?i tt l /S in \^llei ce., intemr ami i^ 
 
 -— : — : ; "",,,:,,,,,. triiimnli 2 t,) adjure. — ^ to aliandon. to 
 
 1 Otan. to celebrate an ovation. ^ e. a '"/'!"."?';• in,ndre.l soldiei-s.- ^ concidere, 
 .critice.- « a centurion, co.ninMnd...;^ a jl •>» n '^^,! " r -d bv a uieuositional exl 
 
248 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 and i/j.w/l.s' (innocently), orxultus (hidden, m secret), imprudmH (^^ ''V^^^.*^?;;;;';*;,;^ 
 of), lucop-inam and 1,,^"«^^^^ ^without expecting , niewor ^'•V"»^"^; ;;";'-;;X«^^^ 
 (unmindful), vivus (alive), .Fj7er (sick), xanm- (healthy) mImsKm .afe ^^^^J^^ " 
 presence, or ' in CiX^\x\ ab>^m (in oneV absence) ;y/./^/x ^""^ r'%!L/J^.?<fn-^^^^^^^^^^ 
 mdudatus* (in full uniform), i/i^mi.>» (unarmed), d'd.c^, ^ \'^ T f'l,^J^^^^^ 
 1ar<-e numbers), rams (seldom, in small numbers, far between), confeitu^ ^^^11}^}']^ 
 do^e Columns diiersu.^ (<>n difTerent roads. i/. the 1>l"r'^'Jr^''l';^^';^-^''^^ 
 (on \\\'^h).mHtum (as a loan, especially in the phrase />eic-ama mutua data^mouay ijivcu 
 
 on loan), and many other adjective». 
 
 Ors 1 The Kn<Wish lanffua-e uses the form of the accessory predicate only m a ^w^n- 
 Btances w ih a( K ives. l5ut even in Latin the <,uesiion whetlur the form of an adverb 
 Hhi form of lin adjective must be used, does not always <1'-P^'- ,"";-;"!; "^^i";,'; 
 relation which is to be expressed. Adjectives are always used lu th« a ^ »^u >n^ 
 f the relation is one of mannkk, i.e. if the adjective represents a property <.f »« ^'a<-»j'"i 
 anHot a qua i tv of the subject. Thus adverbs must always be used m such phrases as 
 "o write t^eSy' (onuVe lcHf>ere. Cic. Tusc. 2, 3) ; to tlee i.,-loriously {turintrr jugere, 
 ci. B G 2 'X to spe^^^^ barbarously {harUire /rx///e. Cic. Tusc. 2, ^) ; t<, s.ng lalsely, 
 iS^urde ca/»;rf{t'ic ib ) Here not the surikcts of the action, but the actions are rep- 
 ??sena'l m be ee^^^^^^^ <yrmlta^, in.'loricms (fuga ^,"r;/i.) barbarous (.m.jo ftar- 
 
 Lr,") false ^cant^^ a^^urdu^). In all these examples the actions expressed by the 
 medickte are essentially moditie<l and chan-ed by the circumstance connected Uh 
 S en The other extreme is when this connection is merely an externa «".e^, "«^ c nu- 
 i ^ or even aflectin.^ the actions, but expressiiiir a state or conditum ot the Hibject 
 merely 'n kf.oahd tootle pri.ulpal pre.licafe, which may be see,, best when the pm n « e 
 Ts a terb hnplyin- a local jrction Thus in the phrase ' (iAJUS ahu.vei. safkly , 'h' acM I'l 
 «f AKKiv NO is not at all atiected bv the safe conditi.m of the subject. Ait hou-h a loose Ei -- 
 
 ish iiu^o t^M iM.%1* ys mlverl,; ^ such relations, the L.tin always expresses them by 
 ^$^Z Sn';^' foKn ;;f accessory vreai.at..iGaJu.i.o,lu^^^^ 
 
 iHJ>mi\ft>r >>rmlre)f Thus we must say quittm (not quitte) nedef, he sits quiciiy (<-i». 
 Se « 17) and / F I;^ (i^ot L^^) abiit or rediif. Cicero, in describini; Nestor's lauL'ua.'e uses 
 The met /pho • i tlowed sweeKT than honey', sayin- duMor (not dulciu.) melleJtuM om- 
 /S^/s^T n %/ si ce the action of llowin- i>' not at all atieeted by the sweetness Hut 
 £^e?u ul^i'SSnles ^l^Jl^ are'many interujediate cases i" -hich n.e t..> rehi^tm 
 P..VSS over into each other. This occurs especially in two » '^ff^f^'*.-^^^ J \/*,i, \. ',•-''« 
 Hiiiwe while nrouerlv belon-Mn<' to the subiect. more or less aftects oi iiioUint.- inc 
 aSoii^ o foSr he adve biaU adjective, are used accordinir t.» the fancy of 
 
 theauVlor oraea^ to established usa-e. Thus Cicero says: Supnd muhtbnl^r. 
 
 iirH/i/; ViJ^rS (Tu-c. 2. 2.}). where not the actions, but the persons are woman- 
 ish 'It iVKcovvar^^^^^^ But the actions are impre-nate.l and mod.tied by the quMl.t.es 
 u^\\,^iT^^^^^^^ »'t« that of mat.ner. Cicero says timvle 
 
 /V^m X Cic Tusc 2 •") but Sallust (Cat. ♦». 3) tinndi resist ant. Thus occurs occultus 
 
 fiereelv (Sail ;i\v'.^A).a.\\(\ftrfH'ittradt<iiiifariti\A\^.Ai.i). l '/'^ '"V '»./_.,,,•?,. 
 «, vi Xrfi/^^?e (not"^'^^^^ or dUiffenter (not dUiqen^) rem frartat. alt ho.i-h not he act on 
 
 is studiou^^^^^^ Ue doer.- (6) If the action as such is mentioned witho.i the 
 
 doer if the actll)n has an iu.personal Ibrm. the adverb (witli somc^^ 
 
 onS 2 andnottheadiective s used, althou-h the cireumstance belon-s rather O the 
 «er^n^han to the a?^^^ Cicero, while, in the personal cousiruction he has (Juceus 
 
 e^lre to ic^ve the city in full unifm-m. It is said of the ch.el-comiuander who is leavm- 
 
 ^^+ TLe^^tudent'sSidt'ca^^^ not to mistake this relation for an attributive relation, 
 as m^>s? ™naS^ l^ Mich adjectives lo be 'in Ai.r<»s,T.oN An 
 
 S^/W?^i;^Srt"ve has no relation whatever to the predicate, not even an <'X«-'Mal on , 
 
 SusS bv a^Vuly n^; t he te nn ' apposition' to the form ' the man anived sick' .. ^ or it 
 is^'Snt tLTKmli\?i to this lAianing of the term the tw,.fonns'Conin 
 Hvrived' and ' \ arrived as Coinm ssioner' would be both appositumal. licncc i lo. e 
 grammadan. who call Vhe adjective nek in the .econd phrase, au apm^hve adjective, 
 either misapply the term, or misuuderstand the relation. 
 
 RELATION OF COINCIDENT ACTION. 
 
 249 
 
 Obi». 2. The limits noticed in ob3. 1 are frequently disregarded by the poets, who often 
 nso adjectives where i)rose-vvriters would employ adverbs, as Rapidas (uisi. of cifo)fra- 
 trem rocdrit. he rai)idlv (in haste) called his brother, Vir-;. ^n. 5, 13. Thus poeis fre- 
 quently clothe the adverbial relaiitms of time and place in the form of accessory pred- 
 i(at»'< and even in the form of attributes. as Vesper Cinus pete tectum, seek ateveningthy 
 roof (in-t of rcj^P'-ri). Hor. Epist. 1,0, 'lO.—^Eneas se matut'inus a^refia^ ^neas was early 
 a«tir (inst. of mane). Virg. yEn. 8, Aijh.—Domtsticm otior, I enjoy my leisure at home (iust, 
 of domi). ilor. Sat. 1,6, 127. 
 
 Ob« 3 Here belongs the frequent phrase prcEcljnfem ire, agi. dari-. or ferri (praceps 
 irit praceps actus est) \\\ the meaning Mo rusli headlong, to be driven into ruin' (liter- 
 allv- to "•() with the head foremost) ; as Pec/v/is indufgens prreciinfem amieumft7Ti stmt, 
 wlio' connives at his friend's faults, suffers him to rush (precipitously) to his destruction. 
 Cic \m 24 s9. I^iireps is not used as an adverb before the silver age. Similar is the 
 phra^^e subrimem. fern or subHrnem ab'ire (subTimisfertur or abit). to be borne alofr, or on 
 hi-h In this phrase, however, the adjective form is chiefly poetical (but see Ex. 2<j), 
 while in prose the adverbial expression (but in the form of the neuter adjective ^wWIwi^) 
 is the usual one. as aer sublime firtur, the air rises upward. Cic. N, D. 2, ;i9. 
 
 1 Hannibal banc contumcliam facifus tulit. Liv. il\ 19.— 2. Ji:tOli incavti^ oppressia 
 sunt n». 37, 4.-3. Non plaeuit. Lycios, qui nati liberi siiit. uHi genti in servitQtem 
 (l,i,.|3 lb 41' 6 — 4 Inter omnls cohvenii*. nt primo </?/ifii in foro obversarentur*. lb. 
 as 1 1- .f," (Jallo-Grseci nudi pugnabant. lb. 38. 21.— 6. Scipio monuit pnefectosnavium, 
 ut\'i<'ilias noctnrnas» f///^/i/i' servArent». li) 2G, 43.— 7. Nihil feci i ra tu,<t, nihW impo- 
 tenti'animo, nihil n<m diu consideratum». Cic. liar. R.2, 3.— 8. Lictoresio consmum 
 quin(iue riri in hostium potestiltem ven(?runt. Liv. 27, 27.-9. Sempronius t*aepe ante- 
 hac lidem prodiderat. luxuriilatque \no\)\^ pra'cej>s abierat. Sail. Cat. 25, 4 — 10. Alarius 
 hoc tempore (nam postea ambitinne pjurrej^s datus est) C(»iisuiatum petere" non aude- 
 bat lb. Jug. «hi, 1»1.— 11. Multi nobiles Ktrusci prima pnrsentes erant c«)ndemnftti ; pos- 
 tea sibimetipsi exilium conscisceiitesia, cum absentes damnati cssent, bona tantuni 
 pa^iiie priebelmnt'3. Liv. 29. .37.— 12. Privati earn coiiditiOuem lixfi accepCre. lb. 31, 13. 
 
 — 13 Calanus I:idus Uhe Indian) sua voluntate rivus est combustu^»*. Cic. Tusc. 2, 22. 
 
 — 14. Post diem tertium veni in icdem Tellilri^'^, et quidein" invitus. Cic. Phil. 2, 35. 
 
 — 1") Mane Gerinani freqventes ad Ciesaretn in castia vengrunt. C«s. B. G. 4. 13.— 
 10 ivieaqiiidem senteniia (frequens enim te audlvl et adfui) homines illos salei" tuo 
 ct lepurei» pellexisti»» Cic. Or. 1, 47.— 17. Quid tandem novi fecerunt matrOuie'"', 
 QUtxl friawntes in causa ad se pertinentesi in publicum'-^ proces.^enint? Liy :W. 5.— 
 IS Jiane. scahe-» umMiium altiludini a-quari^* j)oterant. lb. 2«i. 45.— 19. Accedgbat hue 
 ut immquam co///V//i, sed ra/i mairnisque intervailis proeliarentui-ss. Ca-s. B. G. o, lb. 
 
 — 20 Nuntia G. Fabio, ^Emilium pneceptOrum ejus mejnorem et vixisse et inori. 
 Liv 22 49 — 21. Herennius I'oiii ins omuls qiiam primum i«rio/tf/o«2« dimittendos cen- 
 suit II) 9 3 — 22 Tibi nos, Kulli, lotain iiaiiam mermem tradiiuros existimasti ? Cic. 
 Le"' A'"'r'l, 5, 1«J.— 2:>. In eis dentibus ebumeis-' scriptum litteris Punicis^s luit, 
 re<"em Masiiiissam imprudtnttm eos accepisse, (sed) re coirnitil reportandos'*» curasse. 
 Cic Verr. 4, 40, ia3.— 24. Cato sen hit, le-iOnes siepe alacils in eum locum profectas 
 (esse) uiide redituras se non arbiirarenlur. Cic. Tusc. 1. 42.— 25. Animadvertit Uesiir, 
 Sequanos IrisOs capite detnissoS" teriam intueri3>. Cies. B. (i. 1, 32.— 2(). PubesS" Ko- 
 mana credebat patribus, liomuluiu procelia subi'wum raptum^a esse. Liv. 1, lb. 
 
 Rem 21. Fohm-adjectives used as accessory pi-edicates in Latin, mostly 
 correspoml to adverbs in Eni,dish. Here belon.ic 1) the ordinal adjectives 
 witii an adverbial Ibrce, includin.i,^ prior, prine^ps (first, toremost), ulttr- 
 iaus,poHtreinUH; 2) the cardinals (and distributives) uhuh, solus, totus, mul- 
 ius, singuli; 8) the adjectives p/v^i^or axuX pro ximus, having m this respect 
 
 » Unprepared for theemergencv.— = opprimere in military language means to overpower 
 the enemy by surprise.- > in serhtutem dare aliqutvi, lo assign somebody as a siav e.- 
 « impersonally used: All agreed.- » to walk about.- «the nightly guard-service.- 
 7 ri.4<llv — « to observe.— » considered.— »" lictors, the constant menial attendants of 
 curdle magistrates.- " to be a candidate for.- 12 dU conseiscere, to intlict^ upon one s 
 g,.ll_ 13 ,r, oiler, to leave lor punisliment.- 1* comburere, to burn.- »6 lellus, the god- 
 dess of the Earth.- 1« et quidem. and..too.- 1^ sal, salt, ^ylt.- ^^lepos.^^■^t, humor - 
 >" nellicere. to attract.- '^« tlie ladies, the women.- 21 p,r(intre ad. to afleci somebody 
 or something.- "to appear publicly in a body.- ^^ Mw^.- -* ceqnare, to adapt — 
 as pndiarL to ftdit.- '-'« unhurt.- " dens ebvrneus. an elephant tusk, ol very hi-h value 
 with the ancients.- 26 Punic (the same as Hebrew) letters.- 2» to take back.- >« cast 
 down.- 31 to look at the ground — ''^ youth.— " rapere, to carry. 
 
250 
 
 BELATIOilS OF MODALITt. 
 
 ll>p nitaiv of ordinals ; 4) the ciclcrminatives idem and etip>e. in llie mean- 
 III" KtoX n-i ll.e «eialive detcnninatives mdlm and mhd witU Uic lorco 
 
 Liv. 41, 4 (i. .. he was .l»e first «"'7'":/ ','';;; .^,.';I wUh ' « •' wl^'ior/^'/v se tertinm 
 
 X.T2 tI^ !!{J^'i^L in .m ( rrrimurn. iferum. Urtium etc.) are used i Hho ^am b 
 
 time. Tins form ''V'>' ^^f P^'"^l^' ' '^"^'S,^\ « ^V %^^^^^ ' tlu' first ti.n.r. !i>* : 
 
 etc.) did tlie ac.ti(.u\ an.l is rciulered by_ t^ st ^ ^ j'^,^"^;/,,;^^ nxy brotlier (loos 
 
 Non lUKlie me Pri^'^^^'^\'^^ J^%Z"^ «Mlavt Z^T^S:o^^^^. U., 40, 15.- 
 not to-dtiv accuse me lor the 1 r^t tiin< , oiii "7.'; -\ '",,., ♦., , .'.ttcr- ol is tonu'-ue 
 
 into one: 1) that tl.e honor ^'^''^'''^^Z^^^'^^^^^v,^ tirst am<.n- the to-ati 
 
 -;:i:?^ s.ri;;;i-^*:s:rir:.^ih:; ni::^;;^»;:? ^li^^^^^ t^^ pa.a,e e.. n. 
 
 "^.'^.^:eX!.llalformsino(;>..no,^;...^^^^^ 
 
 are represented as bein- Performed "'r^/''^^ 7^nie^d or /-/•>> m also be used. 
 
 in this instance the forms uj ''('^^^^l'^'» '^;/,^!^*^. '■;,;^> m)^ T,jran,v.n^n'>w 
 
 These, adverbs are ^^^^^^^^Z^Hrfc^it^r^^^ '^' ''"''' Aufocf.m Jus.U 
 
 {or primnm, but not pnmu-^) neffaie autr "'"^"* Tv.ml.l not accept ihe citv oth rwisc ; 
 W, the «ynuu first un the fir>tphice)^ldt^yah^ hutnor;>Wmn m 
 
 then he ordered I'h.ioLle^ etc. .-ly ■]::;^J-^J/'.!//,/'^,,,^ ,ii/,i„,4 '^nnt. the I/i-^nria.is first 
 
 must take ad.jkctivk form according' to obs. 1 • -P^'Y'^'''"\j^, '", ., -^,, ,,,,. Kn<'li<h " fir-t ' 
 m S lak' the adverbial n.nns in om or « ^^cconhn^ U^ b^^ 2 . nd^3. ^^^ ^;^^ J),,^. 
 refers ei.her to two persons a»;"" -> K >i to^tu ifao,nf,alpnncei>s 
 
 mu.^, and the adverb P'-'"'^^^'^^^.^}^^'.^^ went into battle first (amon- 
 
 in pnMum ibnt. ^^/'""'f ^•'f;^^ f, { .vctheled alter lu. close ..f the b ittie. Liv. «21. 4.- 
 bis soldiers), and was the last f 1 ave tb^ i "i ,';»;,.;;' ^/,,^ ,he Carnntes promised that 
 
 they wonld take lie '<"^''""^,^,l'' '^ '"J . ^l^. (then- bc-ln" onlv one more party to the 
 
 ;;;:^'c;;;^^/h:f^sr;^^.^d'lb•^^lp^ nV'"i4^ -i^u-^) -^^^t .eemed to be 
 
 r^e ii.iiihtfiii tJtri'U"th for a loothoid. sail. Jii;^. y-*i •*• 
 
 K' SniL'a1Sr;,Tp-aic«'ii l°,f:^S Uhe'rom. m „ bein,dou.,tt,.l, there being „o 
 
 KELVTION OF COINCIDENT ACTION. 
 
 251 
 
 (next) lik.-w.se denote order in r^'^P^f ^ ^) localit> Dill J -^^ ^ j^,,^ ^^^, adverbial 
 
 They Kon.rally take t'»;; a- Ject.ye form if hey re^^ ^^ ^^^^. ^^^^.. 
 
 form (in 7/.v and e) if referrmu' to «R:\t;fT^ is ^ -'»;" ^ /^ m,)untain (t. e. bein- nearer 
 tothemountain^ havini: all h.s cavalry with him. ball J. g. 49. Cra6*« gro^ 
 hyimraf Cra-su-* had had his winterquarters nearest to the sea. ^^^■^yy- >>. ^ "• 
 Vr^a^castm mov^ref, lest he should move his camp nearer. C.«s. B. G. ^ , 9' 
 
 1 Augustus «mi.^. omnium ti-rimi Rom« ostendit in cave.y^ \T ^ ^."3^^. 
 T>i;:. ii^'v 1 «11 '1 T ivius })nniH^ ro<'atus est sententiam. L. 3*. l*-— •>• i^.J'^.^'®' 
 
 L V 4 '19 - 5.- OnV itinl iKUin.uun extenlrum pHncep.^ S^"'^rnnf.d^H-m n'ibalJm 
 j^i\. ^*. iiT. -^- . \' ..... o o _ « i?ttnu t^ atnm Marcellum ad Hinnioaiem, ui. 
 
 Komilui appbcuit^. <-\c. \ e 2 2 b. Kai^^^^^^^ ;,o..^/.5w'^s' RoinanO- 
 
 cx (iiio« prime's' secund;u« 1>"^ "f ,>' "/'^'"^ r?//;l. ad hos-" Favonius accessit' i . Cic. Fam. 
 
 ^ c;;^-^q.Sciv;;^" li^rai^ffa; essent, Tli-.salos ;>W.J.. ouunum »-.u^.t con- 
 sul I/'v. :«.S.).- 10 Ilos.is ;,;w in -a^tra copias reduxit. lb 44 3.^.^- 
 «'em a'fiiinm consebat ;;n^>m« dicereis. Ih. 3.. 3.^.-1^. i-(^~^i«- ""V^"^^^^^ ifomanus 
 fl i in Scipioni sine pretio'" redditflrum iv-em dixit. Tb 3y..3(. - 13. 1 If *l^ '"l^fj^;^^^ 
 "nem facta.n hosti credidit, nihil se prwrem moturum'J. l'^^;^^^. 31 - 14. 1 i.ec^^^^^ 
 
 •^I'V" '"^"V"_ ,g »11, ......a Hi „t roironi audTrent. nroJfwu conslitere-'". it). J, ^o, ^. 
 
 7>riwo.s'exciverei9 Albilno- Ml, Urej^cnaimrLii. //(/ ,^ ^^ ^^.^ ^ex 
 
 rtwo< excivere'' i\i'uui«'-.'>i, «i> '-»-•■—•■•"■--;'.... , ,, ,0 28.— 1<». Sex 
 
 1.^. Princeps in senStu 't'" -Vn^ri^^inf'Vb 3^ -7 - l^EUr^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 pnetoresilloanno prwiutn croilri -nnt; lb. 3'';,'-'v,...V,:„„r..;o.,:,.« nn.irl " 
 
 j^^'C'-Xrv;"" ,■."-_■- - ._„ "-J" V-;..,.Hi^<Tinienses quod jwn7?iO majOrum 
 
 luendum^i. Varro It. K. 1, 3». 
 
 Ons. 7. The En. li<h adverb, ^^^n.^l^^^^^^y^^r.^rl^^'f^^^^ -' 
 
 verbs ;>ror..//*- ^"^.'r''''^'v''^' "';I/^^ ^ b ■ m,. i. ud -^ a chan,'e of aft-air., 
 
 TCnon rerum arhla, AntiocH iota .rat AYn}n\^i^^^^^ adiective and an 
 
 seemed more convem.Mil to ^<>y^-i>V'il^»'\^. ^.'^^L^^!?.," Tr tiw»- «r.. combined attributively 
 
 i^aie-denotes • ^^^^^^^f -/^ ^'^!^- ^^^^^^^ 
 
 quently and fiercely defied the "«^V »]>;„^^'^f jJ^^J/j-u; „S ^^. b G 1. 47.-' Smrily\ if 
 
 ,!^7;.7^^r, which >a"-'"--!i^''' Ariov St is n m fr^^^^^^^^^ adjective nlmdUW<i^ 
 
 f^i^;^;!;;n;;^''i^u! ^d^e^? ^-- -^^^^' ^ «^^^^'^ ^^'^^ 
 
 DUiish each of these classes singly. Cic. p. 11. C^ii. J, ^1. ,,.,., ;„ 41,» fnrm 
 
 lowing turn IS the antecedent of fj'^-- ^^l^i^^Xo^u^Uih^ legion of March, 
 from eomebodv.- " (vcidere wl ahquem, to 3^>"\,,^'l"^,f';" \-,,p idei of March).- ^^ to 
 called SO in h.inor of the ^lay of Cesar s a>-as inano^»_^« V^ n.o^^^^ 
 
 - =2 ^l;S arilfu^. a bra/cn coucli.-;3 «^^'''^^^. to imi^.r •- j^ Jo ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^yo 
 
 ;;;/iJs:^i^ s^^:i;^;i;:'S.^^^;o:^uiS;e^i^Ud.^- v^io re^ff Lrve.t.L 3» ,« 
 
 etore the crop?.— " to market the Iruit»?. 
 
252 
 
 BELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 armis vvJbis dUrMif, Scxtn;» docs not lay down his armf». Cic. Att. 15. 22.— //A7 qnldcm 
 noi'te tiihil pntterquimi riqildtum est in vrhe, aside from this, there was no wafrlunu' <»n 
 that iiiirht in the city. Liv.'a/^fi, 12. Here belonjrspt^rhaps, theplirase ' nihil irnpedio, j)er 
 me licet, I am not in the nay (I have no «)bjeotion). yon (,he, they) may do it'. 
 
 Obs. 9. The En^dif^h 'likeu'ifte\ '«/.sy)\ 'at the fame time\ are frequently expre.*ped in 
 Ihe form of an aecesisory t>redicate. cither by et ipse or by idem (in place of the adverb 
 item), as liotntlni ne i?i caMra recep^nint ; rex ct ijtse copias in caMra reduxit, the Komans 
 retired to tlieir camp; the kinj; withdrew his Xroox^i* like ttiiie to his camp. Liv.44, :i7. — 
 Oratio uphndida et grandis et ead>^m inpniiiis factta. a splendid and irrand Ptyle. and at 
 tht fame tit/,e especially witty. Cic. Brnt. 7!». ^i^i. — Qnid honesfuui tttt. idem est vtde, what 
 isi moral, is also expedient. Cic. Off. 2. 10. Et ipse is used if the same predicate relers to 
 DiFFEKENT Ot>gical) subjcciiii, and idem, if uifferent predicates refer to the s»ame 
 subject. 
 
 1. Ciepar hac parte Oalliie pacJltiT, totus et mente et animo in helium TrevirOrum in- 
 pistit'^. Civs. H. (i. 6, 5.— 2. Et ei qui snum nejrotium «rerunt. et «i qui f?e fofos tradide- 
 runt voluptatil>ns, sentiunt'. sine amicitia vitam esse nuliam. Cic. Am. 2-3. 8t).— 8. iWi 
 omnium oiiOsi* sunt qui sajiientiie* vacant* ; soli'' vivunt. Sen. lir. Vit. 14. — 4. Milii 
 temper nni magis quam utuverBif*' plucCre voluisti. Cic. Qu. Fr. 1, 1, 10. — T). Ilonestius» 
 eum Hirrum vos ii/iiversi^'* quam >4fi(fu/i possider^tis. Cic. Ai.'r. 2, :51. — (i. Omnes civesi 
 judicant, civitatis salfltem cum ynl>/s med salflti esse conjunctam. Cic. Vat. 3. — 7. Sulla 
 in operibus»!, in a^uiine''^, atque ad vigilius" inultuJt ades^e solCbat. Sail. Jui;. 9<i, 3.— 
 8. i'hilolimup non modo nvlhis venit, sed ne ])er litteras quidem certir)r«nj me fecit 
 quid eL'erit. Cic. Att. 11. 24. — i».Sic tecum loquar ut misericordia permOius esse videar 
 qua» tibi mdla debetur»*. Cic. Cat. 1, !♦).— 10. Nihil pro!e( to sapis»*. Cic. IMiil. 2. K — 
 11. Nihilne te nocturnum jjnesidium I'alatii'", nihil nv\n^ vi^iliie»^, nihil timor populi. 
 rdhil lu)rum ora>» vultusque'» movfrunt ? Cic. Cat. 1, 1.— 12. IntervtMiit co'jitutio'^o 
 Locr08 ur!>em recipiendi. (puc sub delertiOnem'" Italiie tt ipsa de-civerat-- ad r(enf)s. 
 Liv.29. ft. — 13. Nou omisere puirnam deserti^' abEtruscis Fre<,'ellilni ; sed postquam 
 vulnciJltos ambo consules videre. tum et ipsi cum Crispluo coiisule duGbus jaculis"* 
 icto^*. et Marcello adolescente, paucio*' et ipso. etluirCrunt. lb. 27. 27.— 14. l'u«j;ii!lie 
 et ip.'.'i mihi placet. lb. 44, IW.— 15. Milites levem''" et concursatOrem-'^ hostem, cum 
 procul missilibus2» puiina eluditur'". instabilem'» eundf^m ad comniinus^''' conseren- 
 das manus, expulCrunt loco. lb. 27, IH.— 10. Indilcis^s f.ermOnem^'* lacetuiu^*. me 
 dicere soipre esse me Jovem, f^'/«'/f//*V'/f' dictitfire^" Minervam esse sorOiem meam. 
 Cic. Dom. 34,92.-17. Niliil est liberflle quod non idem justum est. Cic. Off. 1. 14 — 
 18. Necesse est, qui fortis sit, enndem es^e ma<rni animi. Cic. Tusc. 3.7. — 19. Mu- 
 piciST, (pii erant quondam uditn poOta;, machinati'* ad voluptiXtem sunt ven^um^» 
 atque cant urn*". Cic. Or. 3, 44. 
 
 Jie'm. 22. The nouns used as accessoiy pretlicjites, are mostly peksonat. 
 nouns, (.kscribii)i( a per.son by his qualities (for iust. ojfire, vocation, utate of 
 life, age etc., as rex, connitl^ ohxes, capt'ivus, mmtiua, stnex, (((hJtxcens), and 
 representin»^ such (jualities, not as inherent in tiie person (as in the appo- 
 sition), but as existiuij: only in reu^ard to, and in coincidence Avilh, the action 
 expressed by the principal predicate. In Eni^lish they are generally con- 
 nected with the ])redicate by the conjunction ' rt.V, or are expressed by 
 means of adverbial phrases (in the quality, cajiacity of). Sometimes such 
 personal nouns are rendered by nouns denoting the qualities they ex- 
 press, as puer, in his (my etc ) boyhood. 
 
 Junius a,'dem SalOtis quam rrw#?// voverat. rf;?^or locaverat, dictator dvHlic5vit, J. de- 
 dicated a« dictator the temple of Salus, which h e had vowed as c onsul (in his c jnsulshi p)^ 
 1 To subdue. — ^insistere in aliqvid, to apply one's f^elf to Pometliin»;. — 'to be of 
 opinion. — * are at leisure in the proper sense of the word. — 'the study of wisdom. — 
 •to apply one's time. — ' supply ' lhey\ — *all the rest toi^cther. — » The adverb is tak»'U 
 predicatively . § 5.52. obs. 2. The predicate must be rendered by a potential with ' would'. 
 — loall of you taken tojjether.— "at the military labors.— I'^at the march. — ''at the 
 jjuards, or posts. — ^* d^b«^/ur aliquid alicui, »onivi\nu<r is owin<,' or due to somebody.— 
 »* to be wise.— ««The P^alatium, one of the seven hills, was the quarter where most of 
 the aristocracy had their seats,— >t the sentinels in.— »«o.*, face— »»mien,— ^onien 
 the idea struck him.— 21 desertion, defection.— "a de^^cisc^re, to fall off, to go over,— -^ by 
 a//Aou///j.— 2«dart. — 28 struck. — ^«w(mnded. — 27 „i,nble. aj,'ile. Transl. by a relative 
 cXsLM^ii (who was). — ^8 a ^^ood skirmisher.— 2» missile.— ^o 10 dodj^e.— »• unstable. — 
 ^^commini/s conserere ma«'/,f, to fight hand to haml. Transl. by a noun.— ss to intro- 
 duce.— '* remark.— '* wittv.— ^* to as.sert. — ^^ musician. — ^^ machinCwi aliquid, to 
 give to something a form aaai)tftd to.— ^» versus, poetry.— '•o music. 
 
 KELATION OF COINCIDENT ACTION. 
 
 253 
 
 and which he had built (frivinjr it on contract) «^ ^^"W)r. L. 10, 1.— Cato litteras Gracm 
 
 ifenex didicit, Cato learned the Greek language in his old age (as an old man). Cic. Sen. 8. 
 
 Obs More rarely non-personal nouns are used as accessoiy predicates, as Ccesari Gal- 
 lia prorinda obihiit, to the lot of Ciesar fell Gaul as province. Sometimes acc»'Ssory 
 pre(licate-nouns are connected hv comparative conjunctions (w^. fam^u^m, m///), il the 
 connection of the noun with tlie main action is inerely assi/med by the subject, as 
 Afortem itt finem miseridnwi exsjjecfo, I exp(^ct death as the end of my miseries. 
 Tac. n. 4, 58 — In place of nouns, absolute adjectives may be employed as accessory 
 predicates (Ex. 6). 
 
 1. Ego nee ohses ut RomSnis iraderer. nee ut leqdtns mitterer Komam petii. Liv. 40, 
 
 j5 1_ 2, Jurslvit LabiC-nus se nisi» rictdnm in castra non reditCrnm. Cies. B. C. 3. 87. 
 
 — 3 Ouicunque (whoever) helium civile optSvit", eum detestabilemS civ^m reipublic» 
 natum (esse) judico. Cic. Phil. 13. 1. 1.— 4.C. Sempronius dixit. Fvlviinn prope unum 
 nuntimn delCii exercitus (sui) l?(miam redisse. Liv. 26, 2 — 5. M. Jumwhdamis pro- 
 prietor adjntor* ad res gercndas Scipinni a senStu datus est. lb. 1«.. 19^ (>. hi Konmni 
 
 » hoc cunctantur facere. brevi extorres^ reijno Ftdemeens et Cleopatra Romam venicnt. 
 lb 44 19 — 7. Cetera» multitfldo, priccipiie qui graviOrum armOrum erant, s^pectatOres^ 
 pu'-nit stabant. lb. 44. 4.— 8. Eqo non eadem volo serux qnsc imer volui. Sen. tp. 61. 
 
 — 9. Auri argentlque» usum, velut omnium scelerum materiam», sustulit»" Lycurgus. 
 Just. 3, 2. 
 
 B€m. 23. All kinds of accessory predicates may have, as logical subjects, 
 the TRANSITIVE objccts of the verbs to which they are atlaclied in which 
 case thev must a^n-'ee with these objects in the same way as the complet- 
 inj; predicates of factitive verbs (i^ 487). Almost all kinds of transitive 
 verbs may take accessory predicates combined with their transitive ob- 
 jects. Such accessory predicates may have a participial, an adjective, or a 
 substantive form, the same as those w hich refer to the grammatical sub- 
 
 iect of the sentence : ,.....• 
 
 Attalnm aliquamdiu nihil aqentem tenuere, they kept Attains for some time inactive 
 Liv 31 15 — Multr»rum te ociili non sentientem custodient, the eyes oj many wiU ivatclh 
 vou, without yourbnng aware of it. Cic. Cat. 1, 2. 6.— Qnod ilium siwhalwn stipatum- 
 O'/e lictoribus vidr-res, that you should see him des^iioUed. and surrounded with hdors 
 Cic Verr. 2 4 40-Ceteros i//<^/7?<w Demetriadem remittit, the rest he sends tmcktvithout 
 arms to Dermtrias. Liv. 3«>, 14.- Alteru.n viruni amavi. alterum non odi woW«?/m, </i« 
 one I loved in his life-fime. the other I do not hate after his death. Lie. Oil. 3. I8, »3.— 
 ODuressit ■vWmneromnant'isiqnaivsque omnis Perseus, Per^^eus, therefore, overjxnvered 
 them all without their expecting or knowing it. Liv. 40, 57.- Neqiie oiiiin /tim/m id 
 vol)is Philiupus permitiet. fn- Philip wUl not leave this free toyou lb. 31. 6.— (^^uinc- 
 tius deos /*^.v/7.< ingrati Magnetum animi invocSvit, Quinctius invoked the gods as wit- 
 nesses of the ingratitude of the Magnetejs. lb. 35, 31. 
 
 Ob« 1 Grammaticallv this construction is the same as that with a double accusative 
 afterVact'ilive verbs (§ 487, R. 74). But tlie accessory predicates do not complete the idea 
 of the verbs with which they are combined by means ot the unity of their loirical sub- 
 iects with the transitive objects of these verbs. There is har.ily a transitive verb 
 which mi<'ht not be combined with an accessory predicate of its transitive objects. 
 The most^usual verbs which mav be thus connected, are the same as may take parti- 
 cinial <'erundials (which are nothing but a species of accessory predicates, ^ 51».), especi- 
 altv verbs of motion (mittere. ducere, reducere. dimiVere. reinittere. agere. redigere), re- 
 linquere, caiyere, tenere, opprimere, invenire, tradere, 2)ermittere, dare, damnare, assequi, 
 obtin^re, and a great many others. 
 
 Oii* 2 To the verbs which sometimes take an accessory predicate of their transitive 
 obiects i>elong audTire and videre, both of whicli are more j^cneially construed with 
 an"intinitive clause, as: Neque eum quisquam queerentem audlvit, nor did any one hear 
 him inquire. Nep. Tim. 4 (instead of the more usual eum qucerere, thit he inquired). 
 _M Catonevi vidi in bibliothCca sedcntem, muliis circumfasurn StoicOrum libt;is ; I saw 
 CiMo sitting in his Whvuvy, surroundtd with many books ot the Stoics. Cic. l^^in. 3 ^.— 
 Su bvenies si jne hcerentem vides; You will c...ue to my help ifyou see me faltering, lb 3 
 4 !_Onis ^ illis diCbus solMum Vidit ? lb. Pis. lO.-7/^/m slipatuux lic'oribus videres. lb. 
 Verr. 2,4, 40.— For nouns thus used as accessory pre dicates see bx. 27. ^». 
 
 I Excent - « to wish for.— » detestable.— * assistant.— e Properly an adjective, ' drivm 
 from the cmmtmr. ' It may be translated by exUe.- « cetert is sometimes (rarely) 
 nsS in tln-Tiuirular as an attribute of collective nouns.- ' spectator.- « silver. -» ma- 
 ItM-ial.— *<* tdkre^ to abolish. 
 
254 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 «juam's owes it 
 
 ori'Mii as : Portoria parvo nreiio rtdeinpta habu'it, he otrnfd (had) (he 
 ~ ' li.G. 1, 18 Oitt-i-ally//^ A^f'/ the imposts 
 
 Tnii)o.^ts. hannq bonqht them, at a small price. Cses. li. G. 1, 18 literally he had ne ""ix'^i^ 
 boanht ii\ a small prict-).— E(iiiitatiiin (lueni macfirm hablbat, the cavalnj vhich ht hail 
 dm/ted. II). 1. lo^properly meaning,': the cavalry which he had a* a draj ted one, or hav- 
 im/ drafted it). 
 
 Obs. 4. The participles accepfu<, datn^, expensing, as accessory predicates of transitive 
 ohjects, expii-ssin.' values, of the verb referre or fene, have a technica nieamii^' con- 
 nected with the Koinan account-books. Account-books (tabuhf) wen* used by all Konians 
 who had any tnoiiey ii-ausacrions. Two books were kept, the one beini; called codex 
 
 rrtiilit (luatn Veires ei e.rpensnm t>fllt. Dolabella placed less to the credit of \ erres, than 
 Verres placed to his char-e (charj^'ed him with). Cic. Verr. 2, 1, :i*.K Both phrases, aside 
 from tiie account-books, are frequently used in the general meauin*: • to owe or ' to ac- 
 kno\vle(l<'e to owe' (acceptamftrre), and to have a claim (expensum lerre), as : huit nemo 
 qui lion mihi vitam suain. liberos, r<-mpublicam referret acceptam, there «v/v nobody who 
 did not acknoicU'dge that he uas indebted to me for his hje, children, and for the repuO- 
 lie. Cic. Phil. 'Z, 5 
 
 1 lli-tri Strabniiem in pnetorio» insfruentem'^ atque adhorfantem puos opiircsseruiit. 
 Liv 11 2 — 2 Ilis diC'lms audTvi (luendam sapientem refenntcm quse primus quisque 
 ex iloimlnisducibusfecisset. Sen. Hr. Vit. I.J.- 3. Co^'im eum responderc, cur tot yiri 
 huncunum non ant utanteni comprehenderints, awtf'/rjir/ifem cotisecilti suit. Lie. Lx\. 
 2H r.7— 4 Epaminondas imprranU/n patriam I/ued:einoiiiis ri-lnKpiebat quam acce- 
 vvnxt' servieate?n. Cic. Tusc. 2, 2t.- 5. Atque ban; non eo* dicuntur ut te o,atio mea 
 dormienfem excita-se», sed potiiis ut cmrentem^ iiicitasse^ vide-itur. i ic. gu. 1^ r. i, i, 
 1« — H Quod iiisi'^ ita e<set. nuiKpiam claros viros seniltus rinctos hosiibus tradiclisset. 
 Cic Off 8 2«» —7 Hoc ita coiniiMratum» more majorum'» «-rat, ne qiii< triumphilret nisi 
 perdomifdm'^ pacafamtjne provinciam tn.didisset successori Liv *♦ '^-^iT,^- r.:?"^v !!' 
 cum nobilitas pnesidiis./f/vnJ^/m atque omni ration.- ^(>/>mM//'//y/'-'teMel)a <- lA^ • 
 ') 1 3 — q Hrassicam>< esto»* vel w/am vel crudam^*. c;ato K K. !.)<).-- 10. Dux Ko; 
 mSnns in alas dirl-onn sociabini^ exenitum habebat. Liv. 31, 21.- H- N<>'i «-''"nt isti 
 homiiu's audiendi. si quando de amicitia. quam nee usu»» nee vatir>ne<» habent rof/m- 
 tam disputilbum-o. Cie. Am. 15.52.-- 12. Vrrres?.ry>('/<.svi chryso-oMo servo sestertium-' 
 
 ^'?"^^*^"'^V»'Pi:^;'^'ri:";::::;.V.,3i";;,V,,i^alienasse35 at.iue in amm e-i>se prari„iteni, 
 
 •em diiceiidi^^ jua 
 
 * to arouse. — * to 
 
 ( rdomdre. to con- 
 quer wholly.- '•' by every means.— »3 o/>ra7/Jrf', to l)arri..ade.- i* c-ibba-je.- '» From 
 
 ci8 coniux (/t'i/V;) recfcm tsocium-' . .,. , ..... . ,, 
 
 dicitur. lb. 30, 'l 4.— 21. Decietu m est, inin tuni ne quem mi litem veter em duceiidH" jua 
 
 1 The priEtorian lent.— ■' to draw up.— ' to arrest.- * to that effect _ 
 
 n,n.-T to stimulate.- ^ if not.- » to establish.- lo aneesiors.- >> pn'domare.Xojoxx 
 
 edere the second form of the imperative beiu- used, bc-cause the Beiitence contains oiio 
 
 of the Ki'LKshiiddown by Cato- '« raw.- >' ''^''V^'"''^ ^'''^'''^''^/iT'f ?n"T/; li'^n ,•' 
 callv — " theoreticallv.— ^o to discuss.— 21 Ger.. plur. ol the second de.l. 111 ?/m, a^ I'n- 
 ther below ' /a/e/J/«/n.'- "- For the use of the genitive plural ol ^<=f<^rtvim ;;;'''''*"'• 
 See U 3J oiis «J— " ward.— '-^^ ra'iocinan. to ivck.m. to calculat.;.- -•» unbuii. (l.— 
 2«6V/.o.sW>//«A^, the place of the renowned battle of Flamii.Inus a-ainst " 'P-" ' " 
 rut off.-^«emptv. I.e. without a -arris.m- ' » m/<^/^r^, ^'ij"?- '"'r sV \ .li' S. 
 distribute.- 3» to raise.- sa anchor.- ^^ to march by land.- " allied.- " to uhcuate.- 
 ^<^'ducere, to compel a soldier to take part in a campaign. 
 
 RELATION OF COINCIDENT ACTION. 
 
 255 
 
 f T>, .^1 R o.-> Privati*» onibupdam ex pecnniS quam conpnlibns mutuam dede- 
 esset. lb. 31, 8.— 22. 1 F» Y«, „r^ih -^) IM — 23 Pro impen^is in belhim factis quinde- 
 ranl.t.-r.ia pensio*^ '^n^?^^;*.'''^;, ^il^tn V^i/'/Za et miliia talentura per duodecim 
 cim mil ia talentum dabnis, q"''";^" f,/?^^;!^^^^^^^ ob'?ntes eos damnat. lb. 42, 43.- 
 annos. Ih. 37, 45.- .24. Ismcn.as [^f^^^^^^^^^ /am 6 %, 13.- 2H. Hannibal hospi- 
 
 2.5. Incolumrm te ^ito, ut^spero )!^.^ .^^'^ ^^^;,^^^^^^^ Liv. 39, 41.- 
 
 ,alT^* deos yiolatira ^'"^ i\,^'^/ ' ''*^'* ^ rJm !fu>^ iA/ 7^^ bostium videremus, 
 
 niiod te, Antoni, co«<f«//em non vidit. Lie. 1 nu. -:, o. 
 
 Pen H S.)i lelimcs intransitive objects take accessoiy predicates 
 Til nulst (JlTienUv'occurs with the ablative objects ot the verb uU^ and 
 with' the (hitive objects of several verbs, as ., ^ . , • 
 
 \^^^^ii;::i:S^l^^:^^^^-' =''»C.,sicans at t.,cir request. 
 l:'c,;!;-«%espondi,, non .s.econs„etumnem poj..^ 
 
 as Vy«^^V\}^^%X ^£^^-^^<^ fonns which accessory 
 f,;:.;i;cau^a Jn,VuxUres;'iuTt'ances fre the saute as those lor completiko 
 predicates. ^ 4G."i. 
 
 vu-am 7ne t ibi amv»if/ere. non aus s s . / dared '^^; f ^^t/ii vorumus, we uUl make u,e 
 
 OBS. 2. If an adjective, as «" «f,^^,:^?^^ 
 INFINITIVE, it is general ycban^d into ^^^^ 
 
 )stul:lvit consu ui '' ""'^;''" ;;\7::,V:, tHunwhal vroce>^>iion. L. 31, 2U.— li »*ioi iiotrun^ 
 
 at it be allowed to htm to enter ff/^^/^, ^X/f rem in^ tha' it might be free to him 
 
 e..ef vel ad helium manenft ^'^/.^H^ I^^f^T.^^for ^^ P*^^^" ^^" '^'^' -«--^.f/S^^'^"!:^ 
 
 ^^i^^.!^o^X^:^S^^^^^^ "^^^^''^^ ^'^'^ ''^'' 
 
 ecl-intinitive were a finite verb. Ex.2. „...,„u,.^ to participles, especially in the 
 
 OBS. 3. Accessory predicates arc ^?" fj'^jf.jfj.^'^^^.^?,,, u^kJcompk predicates, in 
 
 construction of ablatives absolute, i >' ^^^ Mi^omnt/^u^ Oibcns) decessit, Theoxena 
 
 tii-biativ. as : ;j;i-;^;^^ 
 
256 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 Exire j»iia secinn ifferentibus ;//*>w armii tidCmif, he took their arm fi from them icho were 
 ordered to kave carrying all their property loith them. Liv. 4:}. IS. [TIih diuivo is diivctly 
 
 mAh9^] iiii Jlor porco jnaculo wwiolaudo, by i^acrificiuij this ho<; as an expiation. Cato 11. 
 
 li. 139. See Ex. 14. 15. 
 
 tef>fibfi3 
 
 tirt)emvi viclnain* sibi ot. cognStam' iniioxiam perire nnerenf. Liv. :^7. 1..— (.. Kt'srilti 
 artirm-lbani, se tacitos ablreiii animo habul-^t^. lb. 3!l, 54.— 7. P«)^se liboralifilte vti nun 
 sitoliantemi^e patrimoniopeciinite et^t fructiir* maxiiniis. Cic. Oft. 2. IS.— 8. I lane coiin- 
 teor «ori nihil posse dcinentiiis quam arnntem in eiiin locum V'mre, ubi libirtiltein si!< 
 pcrtlitarus. Cic. lijib. !», •^4 — 9. llannib.il nihil niajus pn-cjltiir dros, quam ut uicolvmi 
 Ci'dere'^ atqiie abire ex hostium terril /iccat. Liv. id. 41, m.d.— 10. I{ex n..n c.nsuit uicoiaii 
 
 periculis defendendam. lb. Mur. 37,80.- 10. Cn. Fulviii!^, decrm ex_ CampauOrum 
 numeioj'/,sv;t.>' inertnibus dedQci ad se, in fidem omnis iecei)it. Liv. 24, 1*. 
 On=» 4 In the fame way an in the instances mentioned above, accessory predicates 
 may bt- dependent on attimiuttivk oknitivks, or .vTTitiBirTivK adjkctives. as: Manea 
 Vinnniu', mortiuv quam viriE ftlicioris, tandem quievCruut ; The dt-iKirted spirit ot \ ir- 
 ginra happier wh.-n dead than when alive, rested at len-,'tli. Liv. 3, .58.— .\t quein homi- 
 iiem, al)8i-ntem. caus-l iiicoirnitil, condemnasti ? Ckjxs ab.<tiiti$ nomen recepi>ti (i. t. ad 
 judiciindiimjy whose name did you receive in hit» absence {i.e. ' whom did you put to 
 trial when he was absent ') ? Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 45. 
 
 lieni. 20. AiisTKACT I).\tivi«:s (p. 8:J, II 34), and Ar.L.vrivr.s of qu\t,ity 
 (p. 80) are tVequ'Mitly uslhI as accessory priHlicalL's ; very rarely (sk.ni- 
 TivES ot (iU.\LiTY (p. 77) are used in this relation. AVilh such datives, 
 ablatives, etc., the 1'.\uticii»le of the copula must be understood. 
 
 Ob9. 1. Genitives of qiialiiv are very rarely u«Jed as accessory i)redicafes, as: Xonm 
 annurnm avol)is prolectus, piist si'xtum et tricesimiim annum redii. Liv. 30, 37; lUayinjj 
 departed from vou at the aire of nine years; analoirous to the ordinary predic.it«'-<:enilive 
 'noretn anndnhii ^;vr/// ').— The aul.\tivk of quality fr<'<imMitly occurs in thi> form, as: 
 rati animo Lacediemonii in Th»-rmopylis occidenmt ; With a similar spirit (/. e. Imukj 
 animated with a similar , spirit or fedinq) tlie Laced:emoniaiis ft-ll at Tlicrmopyhe. Cic. 
 Tusc. 1,42, 101 (with a finite copufa: I'dri animo erant Laced<fmonii).—ViMH\(i{v animo 
 forti; Take your meal with couraiieous hearts (beiu^ with courajxeous hearts). Cic lb. 
 
 C)l?s 2 The accessory i'kedicate-dativk (abstract dative, § 4()'.M is far more fre(un;nt 
 than the accessory predicate-genitive. It is ol the same nature as the predicate-dativu 
 with the copula, only th at it i s attjtchedjoprincipal predicates ex pref sed by^'e verba 
 
 ~"i To mention^'' todenounc(s to abiise.— » fayor^.— * of/sfrinr/ere. to bind, to oblii^e.— 
 6 exftvl an exile.— « nei-,'hborin<r.— ' kindred. Tran-1. both co-ordinates by a com- 
 pound': neiqhboring filter city.— « to escape.— » radices monti-s, the foot of a inountain.— 
 fo <.old — »» to i)erform a sacritice.— »"^ to slaughter.- " \vear and tear.— »* to supply. 
 — >» band, body of troops.— i« to strip.— »' to lay waste (supply them).— »« to lend.— 
 *" Incdumem is not to be counected with tradere, but with defe/idendam. 
 
 RELATION OF COINCIDENT ACTION. 
 
 257 
 
 mentioned R. 23. obs. 1. the copula beino: conceived as a participle understood, as. 
 l'an-«anias nuos Rvzantii ceperat regis propinquos tibt mnnen misit, Pansanias sends to 
 thee as a aift (bein«r a gift) the relatives of the king whom he took at Bvzantiura Nep. 
 Pans 8 :f 1 - 7>ar^ slbinis eunt auxilio, a part went as a help (being a help) to the Sa- 
 bines Liv 2 5.3 Here belong the frequent phrases diem (alicui) coUoquio dicere, to ap- 
 point 'a dav for an interview ; aliqnem (allcui) praddio relinquere, to le^ive somebody for 
 protection' ; alv,>nd im/nori dare, to give something f<.r security; a^u/md «f^J:^*^»"»' 
 ritio t)r protjro dare, to impute some action to somebody as a crime (Ex 7. 9). Frequently 
 these constructions mu^t be recast in rendering, ni^Fabiolaudi non ej<t datuinqvod pingeret, 
 it was not considered a ground for praise that Fabins practised painting. Cic.l use. 1, 2, 4. 
 The phrase l^Mum ca-^tris ca/iere, to select a place for a camp may be cither understood 
 a- ail acci'ssorv predicate-dative (supplying sibi). or as an ellipsis of a dative gerundial 
 (ra/^tri.1 fa<iei,dl^). Here heh>n-s the phrase rectptui canere, to give the signal for retreat, 
 where inilitibus is either supplied or expressed. 
 
 1 Turn qunm rem» habgbas. qnspsticulus' te faciSbat attentiOrem ; nunc, qunm tarn 
 (eq>/o animo bona perdas, lestimatiOnemS te nuUam putas accipere, qiium me hospitio« 
 recipias Cic Fam 9 Ifi. 7.— 2. Si quid obtigerit^. O'^vo rt//wv/);wrt/(x/?/e monar. Oc. 
 Cat 4 2 — 3 I<'navi milites in proelio nonnunquam infeqro c&rj>ore seabjiciunt». atque 
 affli'cti^ et exaniniJlti" jacent. Cic. Tusc. 9, ^i.- 4. OppidSni proelium m^jpte animo com- 
 mi-Cnintquam sustiniiGrunt. Liv. 44, 31.— 5. Cffisarin animo habuit. conjimcto exercitu 
 cum Domitio per lllvricum Italian subHdio proficisci. Cues. B. C. 3. 78.— b. Quarta pars 
 niilitum imesidioim'pedimenlP^ relictaerat. Cjes. B. G. 5, 11.- 7. Ego etiam qnte tu sine 
 Verre c.fmmisisti, Verri crimini dattlrus sum. Cic. Ciec. 11. 35.- 8. \irius sola neque 
 datur dono, neque accipitur. Sail. Jug. 8.5. JiS.— 9. Vitio mihl dant quod mortem homi- 
 uisnecessarii» gravitei-i" fero, Cic. Fam. 11, 28, 2. 
 
 Hem. 27. Often the form of the accessory predicate is borrowed to 
 connect the idea of coincident action with the adverbial relations of 
 PLACE, TIME, and CAUSE. Hencc this form is applied to adverbial clauses 
 of all kinds to represent them as coincident with the main action.^ In 
 the construction of ablatives absolute with present participles, adjectives, 
 and nouns, the relation of the participle to that of the principal predi- 
 cate is the same as that of an accessory predicate. 
 
 Ob<». Here belong, in regard to the relation of pbice, the expressions obvim, simmls, 
 
 prareps, and the compounds with rersas, as fransrers»s and aversm. instead of the aa- 
 
 verbial forms o/yria/y/, subnme, [capife pramisso], transrerso, ex averso ; hi^ "^^It-fJiL't 
 
 anrt/ur obrius pr-ocMit, Adherbal marches to meet Ju-urtha. ^^I'v'^^T*!^.. k t^»^,; ,t 
 
 litteras tnitta-'^, send me the letters to meet me on my journey. Cic. Att. b,b.—/iotnnius 
 
 mbllmisafjif, Romulus is borne upward to heaven. Liv. 1, 16, l.-Cum coepiteos transrer- 
 
 sos aqerefelicitas, when prosperity has begun to drive them 'across (e. «.from the 
 
 strai'dit road). Sen. Ep %.—Uoc toto prcplio aversum hostem nemo ridere potmL \n this 
 
 whole battle nohodv could see any of the enemy 'by the back' or • turned off {i. e. the 
 
 back of anv one). Cies. B. G. 1, 2H.-In regard to time, the participle nfl/j^>^, in the meaning 
 
 old (»i 498 -h. must be considered an accessory predicate (mst. of natu, in regard to btrf/i). 
 
 In other relations the form of the accessory predicate (like that ol the English parficiple 
 
 ab-olute), is used when the connected action is meant to convey more than one i"ea, fO 
 
 that the more definite forms introduced for expressing cause, ^"^«ij'*'f/ "^,^;'" ^^^^^ 
 
 given case would weaken the meaning of the author. Hence it is very rare that these n,ost 
 
 frequent constructions with accessory predicates can be resolved into ^"'te thL\^!« 
 
 out impairing the force of the expression, although, generally, the one or the other idea 
 
 must be considered as the prevailing one. Examples occur on every page of the Latin 
 
 authors, as: Dumnorix petlvit ut in Gallia relinquerStur. quod in.mttus navigandt n are 
 
 timCret D. asked to be left in Gaul because he being unaccustomed to saibnir, v\a3 
 
 afraid of the sea. Cjbs. B. G. 5, 6. Here the accessory predicate insuyns is added as an 
 
 h-plination of his fear, not strictly as a cause. Thus in the following two sentencea 
 
 tht- accessory predicates nescius and bmt>im combine, the one a temporal and a conces- 
 
 t<ive idea, the Other a temporal and conditional idea, haviug at the same time the force of 
 
 *'''c!mlSnisexpngnatiOnem in hunc annum coninW, hand vf^eiiis qnosdam «''se qui 
 
 aniio ins^quenti captam tradiderint, I have placed the la 1 ^^ ^^''"^^f^V^n J^^^l^t 
 
 B c ), bring miy aware that there are some who state that it was taken in th^ next 
 
 year. Liv. 27, 7. --Generosiu8 in sua quicq uid sedc gig nitur^: tuMtum ali5n%terroe, lu^td 
 
 Ti^T^erty^^'' a small gain.- » honor.- * as aguest (literally : to hospitality).- 'should 
 
 happen, i. / if death should befall me, a frequent euphemism.- • t'l''")'' j^^^o^^^vlr 
 
 the ground. - ' paralyzed. - « lifeless - » homo necessanus, a relative.- ^^granter 
 
 ferre, to bear with grief. 
 
258 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 quo alitur (le^enomt. ovorythiriLC ffoniiine jrrows in its own homo: tramplanled to & 
 t«trani:e soil, Ci dcKcnwatcs to that by whicli it is fed. Liv. 38, IT. 
 § 556. Aside from the form of an accessory predicate, the relation of 
 c(»i"ncident action is expressed objectively : 1) in the form of an attkiu- 
 UTivK PHRASE (rarely a mere noun) in the aul.vtive, as mar/ m da more, with 
 great shouting (the same as marjnopere clamitam)', 2) hy a phrase or nonn 
 connected with tiie main action through the preposition cum (negatively 
 sine), as aliquem ciun frequentl amnsu audlre, to iiear some one with fre- 
 quent assent (i. e. frequenter amntanH) ; cum exercitu adcenlre, to arrive 
 with the army, i.e. accompanied bi/ the army, or accompanying the army ; 
 sine ordine proficixci, to march without order, i. e. obKcrcinfj no order. 
 
 Him. 28. Attributive ablative phrases, expressing the relation of' c()inci- 
 dent action, are of tliree kinds: 1) such in which the idea of coincident 
 action is contained in the attkibute, as nudo corpore pugndre, to fight 
 with improtected body {i. e. without protection)-, 2) phrases in which tlic 
 idea of coincident acfion is contained in the «ovEUNiXd N()U\, as magno 
 CLAMoiiE castra intrare, to enter the camp witli great shouling (/. e. eland- 
 tanf<); '^) such phrases, in which neither the noun, nor the attribute con- 
 tain the coincident action, the phrase being conceived as an object of an 
 accessory predicate 2Uidersfood, in whicli the iilea of coincident action is 
 contain{Hl,as: Oifirdbus copiis adcenit {^ccomp.'^'SIED by all his troops). 
 
 Ob^. t. The first of the^e forms is the ablativk op quality, usi-d as accessory predi- 
 cate, as explained Uiin. 2«>, obs. 1. lk'in«z<,'iaminatically a i'kedkative lonn (§4«>ti, K. "i.), 
 it (lufs not pioperly l)»'lonL,' \n tin- objoclivi! lorius of this relation. Ir is ust-d wlion th»; 
 coriicideiit action is attached to nouns expressini; the soul of the dorr {ii>; urn forfi\ or his 
 body or parts of his» body, as Fabiu'i nuil'is p,^(/ifj>/.^ in'imbnlilhat. babuis walked alonj? 
 with 'naked feet (instead of nwlux pedibtis). Vac. Fam. 10, :« ; rapiti' demi<sot^rr<vn tn- 
 tuelKinturAhcy looked at the i,M-ound witli their heads han-,'in<;down, C'jcs H. (t 1 .,2 ; legati 
 CiimUo nroinis.^0 inqres-i fooit cnrhtiji, the i-nvoys enfer«?d tlie senate-hall with disord('red 
 hair. Liv. 44, 19. This form can neviT take the pieposition cum K\wi cum nuUtu jteUiOu.^^ 
 cum cajnllo pj'omisso or cum capife demubO). 
 
 Ob>! 2 Tlie second of these forms, th»; action belnc: exprc*»sed by tlie oovKUNi>fo noun 
 of the piirase must primarily l)e considt-rcd as an ablative of means and instrument, the 
 same as all other adverbial relitions expressed by tlie ablative, a< : Mu.rimo damore it 
 plaum liruti memoriam pivmiuehatur, he expressed his fi-elin_'s m re-ard to the memory 
 of iiriitus wi; h (bv) the loudest shouiinj: and applause. Cic. Thil. H), 4. Here the shouts 
 and applause mav be considered as the means by which the subj.jct ;;ave vent to histeel- 
 in-'s- hut frequently the relation of ' means' is only an indirect one, i)assin<'t)ver into that 
 o!>o'incident action, when the noun (always a verbal noun) may he re>olv.'d into a present 
 participle, as Lenilti maqoo Jietu a Cmmre (iuj-iliumpefir7runf the_ envoys with jireat 
 weepin- asked help fromCic.sar. Cies. B. G. 1, 22. So sedato r/radu ahire, to -o away witli 
 a nuiet^step. Liv. 2.'), 37 (i. ^. t^edilte -radiens). This kind of phrases always aumit.h 
 the construction with the preposition cum, as marjiwcum strepUu eijressi, havin;; j;ono 
 out with o-reat noise. Cies. B. G. 2, 11. Cum must be used if the nonn has no attril)nte: 
 Cum impeno in prodnciam proHcisci vecease erat. to dep.irt with 'imjM^rium \ i. e. bein*; 
 invented with iniperium. Cic. Fam. :^, 2; but Consuiriii, imi}eno proficiici {Ex.i>).— Cum 
 crucidtu rtH-ahiVur. Ca>s. B. CJ. r>, 45; but Sunwio crucldtu perid. Cic. N. 1). :i 33. Mere 
 al)latives witliont an attribute mu-'t be taken as ablatives t)f means, althoii;j;h they may 
 often be chan<'ed into accessory predicates without atlectinsi the sense, as: Agefnit nuc- 
 torifufe amb<if~roti^i/io (b>/ nnXh<n\iy. Ini plan). Cic. Sest. .\\). — i',>„tumii'i~f adverrus /lofnles 
 ceitare (AwdefyiuL' the nobility). Liv. 5), Ak\.— V<duiitritrin dhwiti-mrfmre. lb. 29. m.—Ler/e 
 anerc Liv 1 9- C'ic Verr. X.ATu-feiiUdctiune aqtre, to sue ))y a ' 'eqU m-fio'' (a form of pro- 
 cedure in'theold republican law. (Jaj Inst. 4. 11).— But in a few co.nvkntional expies- 
 gion>J 'mere ablatives' deiioti; c«)iiKident action, icitho'd the idea of instrumentality: 
 Silenho exercitum redOcit. C;es. B. C. 2, :^ (so 11). B. (J. 7. 11 ; Liv. 21. A-D.-Ckundt't pvovo- 
 laiit. Liv. 1,1.— Clamore castra invad'- re. lb. 5, ib.—Strepitu adventare. ball. Jui^'.o^i. 
 
 Obs. 3. In the third instance of ^. 28, the phrase is trenerally connected hy cum 
 (ueijatively by sine), as: Uasdrubat propedieni adi-r'U cum vuiiiu haudijuCiQuain. coitr 
 
 RELATION OF COINCIDENT ACTION. 
 
 259 
 
 temnenda TIasdrtibal will in a few days be present with a body of troops by no means 
 K d sj) s?(U e. accompanied by a body of troops) Liv. 30, J-'^'^^^^'^^^Ztv^r 
 mam vetm-^ecum febri, I learned Crom him that you had come to Rome with the fever 
 
 ri^^hiuinathTfever) Cic. Att. 6, 9. But there are several exceptions to this rule : 
 ^ (a) I he phrie^^^^^^^^^ as an ablative absolute with a part.npial adjec- 
 
 tive ,iy-)OBi the preposiih.n cum is frequently omitted. Here belong the majority 
 
 ttlo^e phrases whic?h t!,rmerly were explained by an ^>;^^^^;««ft,^e preposition ^«^ 
 ami which our pr-seiit u'rammarians trenerally represent as an abla i\e ol manneu , 
 a h.ui-li hev neve • denote a pkopektv of the main action, as : AmbU)nx alias regipms 
 « r V i>/i mc^^^r. >ri«dio quam quntuor. A. was fleeing to other parts with a retinue 
 of no more than four persons (i. e.hl< retinue heinrf not f/reater). Cies B. G U j'---(^^ 
 
 I r / i\/i/^^ v^^^ i'l rheda. pcenulafus, imignoet i7nj>edimento et muhebr^ cmrxxta- 
 
 //(7odiis drove with his wile in a carriage, wearing a wooden cloak, with a large 
 luanmem^^^ it. e. his luggage being lar^re, and his «nte consisting of 
 
 f em es Cic M" 1 28.) Here belong the difl^erent i>hrases with ^ agmef. describing the 
 m " ements'ol- ali anfv or its condition on a march, as agmine Q''<^dfa<>af^edere to ap- 
 1 roVch in battle order (literallv ftie army being squared, ov arranged). Cic Phi! 13. 8 
 1*42 S dl Ti .' 10."; agmine >^uso abire, to march oft' with dissolved (spread oat) rank> 
 T'iv 41 ^'l ■ cihifo aamiufi by forced marches (the agmen being hurried). Liv 2o, .i5.-bo 
 • +»' tnfJfr, i^-l nil^\ Hence militarvlanc'ua<'-e sometimes makes use of this form, 
 TrlZXr^^^^^^^^ '^- interpreted as an ablative 
 
 Mh^olnn. as //Si" 'xfr«/« ab vrbe profectu^ est, he marched from the city with an enor- 
 
 no- 1 armT uf 7 9. Thi^ sometime/ om/.i6./.^ copiis is nsed instead of cum ommbus 
 Z,iK- a" >/oiVaV/Vav/,.a C<e.<aris ojnnibu-^ copiis confendirunt,thi'. enemy marched on 
 SS^'saS^^i^A^an their tr.>ops. Ces. R G^. 7 G^.ienilly^ however, phr^es M thm 
 
 '"''■ri' . r h.n «M h or fsi ioVai^^^^^^^ atqusUsvim accubare, to sit (lie) to 
 
 s;i:in a^;;ui;^!e^n.r:;,s:n;:!dCn;!d^;;ets. Nep Age| 8^ \ry^^^^j^s::{^ 
 
 tvridixoHm.. C;ic. Tusc. .5, 5. But also with cutn: Ad Alpes cum bona pace (without oppo 
 sition bv) 6''a//5rMm ;)€rm/?^. Liv.21.32. „„ ^^ 
 
 Ops 4' If the coincident action denotes the effect of the predicate, the nouns ex- 
 
 S come «1 .no to lUe shame of the Roman people. Uv. 44, 111. 
 
 OB.% Be-i.le. the preposition, cm and .«-if, i» »ith .-m •'•W.'vt.vc is fometitnos tised 
 ,o?Mire\s'^Hl;^i..e,,t. eti; ...,h,,t ™^^^ 
 
 must l.e rendet^d e.ther l.y he Wat, e ^f.^'^^ f ,!;'„ '.'^?'^ m"„;°i;, „„,, ettm l.c,;iml.; 
 
 31 
 
 tamJ2 pUm'^'i gradu in nosiem inuucu--. i^iv. •«'•'•*';"• ,,"" "9 T.r ^ Maibre* nostri ne 
 
2m 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 (heirships), quum (whUe) Asiam x>ro\\ncmmcons7daHttnpertooh\w(iros*.Cic. ^1«^«- 34--- 
 9. Varus dc tertia vi^jiliS dftnfio t'xerrituui in oppidnm rrdOcit. Ctys^ 15. C . "A d4 — ill. 
 Hrtsdnibalac Majro, pruMiii^sis Niunidis, (luain potonint maxwie citato ngmtnehom:* 
 miui ciept-nint. Liv. 2o, 35.— 11. Tantiis fult terror militum, ui quunU.ajuf \olusCiiu8 
 cum equitatu ad castr.i venissot, Iklein non fac-ret^ adoss»^ oim incolumi C a'sarein /jp- 
 ercitu. Cit's. 13. G. 0, 41.— 12. lieatiis est nemo (lui ejl le-re» (in such a condition) vivit 
 wt non niodo iinpanc sed eiiam cum summfi iiitfrfeetOn-s ffi^na intcrlici possir t ic. 
 I'liil U :i5 - l;i NiiUi est altcrcatio'» clamonf/us uiiqnain hahita vu\iorirj'is. Cic. Hrut. 
 44, li>4.— 14. Ponteiu Mulviinu^ maqno comitata .\llobro;;iim le-ilii in;rredi nicipiuiit. 
 Cic Cat 8 2 ti— 1.'). Oai.latn dixrMrintJnM)eratr)reiu l^>iM:lnnni«//m;M//iOtrey«'/w/^ 
 inambiihlie in "vmnasio. Liv. v>9, •->().— l»i. Voluptai» fini^'itur'' pulch,rrimo restitw^ vt 
 QriuVu'* reqdli in Holio»" sedeiis». Cic. Fin. 2, «1. (!'.».- 17. Mar/no cum. d<dore \yAn-\c\i\^- 
 rumii elapsus>2 sum eis. Cic. Fani. 10. 23.— 18. Ciuorum eonsilia Cu'sarein a taiiUl gloria 
 summo cum terrore homiiium avocjirint, exputare»» non possum. Fum. 10, 24.— Con»p. 
 Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 5M ; lb. 2, 4, 30 ; Liv. 44, 42. 
 
 C. Relation of Quantity. 
 
 1) Relation of Litoislty. 
 
 ^.j.j7. Quantity, us a graminaticjil circumstance, occui-s either as 
 DIMENSION, or as INTENSITY (deguee). The rehitiou of dimension is 
 always an auxiliary of other relations, namely those of space, time, 
 value and weioiit. But in the relation of intensity the idea of quantity 
 is directly applied to deline those qualities and actions whose idea 
 
 admits of an increase or diminution. 
 
 Ob^ 1 The qnestion 'when qitantitt becomes, quamty' is an old metaphysical pro- 
 l)lem III (JUAMMAK the relaiion of iNTKNsiTY is the point where botli rel.itions me<^t. 
 Intensity is the relation in which qualities and acti-ais are <ieterinined. a< it were, by 
 mea-ure and weight. lint in this relation liie measurini,' is not determined by any meas- 
 ure-unit- as it is"" in all the applied relations of dimension, but by the one measure oJ 
 the mind! which in Eiii,dish is n-pre-ented by the j;eneral noun 'DtiiUEK', and in Latin 
 by the isi^l'nirtcant word • opu^' (see Kern. 21»). 
 
 Ons "i The relation of i>imexsion is one of the relations of modai.ity. beinir one of the 
 kinds «rf'modifvinir an action, lint this relation has the peculiarity that it is always sub- 
 servient to other relation-. It would hive been more pliilosophieal to treat the ivlation 
 of dimension in a sip irite chapter. comprisiiiLT all it- ditlerent applications to kxtknt 
 ii 4%) ri.ACE (§ 'A^, li. 7), TiMK (§ r>.")t)) and vai.itk (^ 5.V.> foll.>, wliieh would liave dehiied 
 with «'i-eiter clearness the painmatical forms employed in tins relation. Theso tiram- 
 maticTil forms are in mat. v respects identical ; but at the fame time they are difterent 
 accordin" to the nature of the relation to which tliey are apidied. In t)ursuinj;. how- 
 ever, tins' plan, it would have been nece-sary to treat the sui)jectsof lime and place in 
 ditfe'reiit parts of the system, aside fnmi other practical inconv<Miiences of such an ar- 
 ran-'ement. Hence the rel itioi: of dimen>i<m has be«'n assi<;ned to ditrerent chapters. 
 It o7dy reniains now to consider 'quantity' as a dimension of value and weiout (.§ 559), 
 and as the inner measure of actions, or at» intensity. 
 
 ■ » »^. The grammatical forms which are used in the relation of inten- 
 sity are 1) atthiuutive phrases in the ablative, containing the noun opus 
 as governing word, and a quantitative adjective (§ 2G3) as attribute ; 2) the 
 absolute neutek forms of the quantitative adjectives ; 3) the adverbs of 
 intensity ; 4) the comparative and superlative degrees of descriptive 
 adjectives (^ 28.") foil.) ; 5) modal and comparative clauses of intensity (p. 
 
 035 foil.; p. 7 50. f oil.) _ 
 
 bv courtesv, trave such a character to disilnsrui-hcd persons, wlio thertbv enjoyed in 
 the province all the privileges of real envoys or commissioners— ^ to hold.— ^ naetn 
 facere to make somei)odv believe eometliinjr, to convince somel)ody.—=» a slayer.— * alter- 
 'catidnem hatjcre, to have a quarrel.- * the Mnlvian bridge.-* crejnda, a mm\ii\.-\nnr/er^, 
 to represent.— » dress.— » royal state.— »o*c//iww, throne.— "assassin.— ^-elaOt^io 
 escape.— *• to make out, to jjuess. 
 
 RELATION OF INTENSITY. 
 
 iU- 
 
 r*9- or the=e form?» those marked No. 1. 2. 3. are treated in the frdlowing remarks. 
 Tl??comi'ari-on ofrijectives has been considered in the first Part. The de-rees of ad- 
 iec ive^iii ..^of ?he grammatical forms of 'intensity', since every comparative im- 
 du's the adverb of intet^Tity 7nar,is. at.d every superlative the adverb maxime. The dif- 
 ferenl forms of the clauses of intensity are considered B. V 1. 
 nem *>9 The ablative of the noun opu.% analogous to all those general 
 nouns bv which the adverbial relation itself is expressed, as tempu.^ spa- 
 ^^m2dus, caum. pretium, is attributively cor^nected ^vtth the different 
 flu ; of the' qttantitative form-adjectives 1) in the }^'^'-§^^iJ^ 
 live forms: qnanio opere, how much (as a relative ' a.O ; 2) m the deliiiite 
 form /a L Lre, so much ; 3) in the indefinite form: magno opere, mnjore 
 !;;" ; ^;^Li o,ire. snnuno W>U greatly, very greatly ^-<^-^^^::'^; 
 in the hi'diest degree, and negatively no?i magna oj^ere, httle, veiy littK ,as 
 
 Quanmv,^ opore ip,. municlpil cau.J ^«^^^^'«' 'l^^j. ^^^^^'^^^X^/^^S^;;^ 
 
 «anl Low 'inalKj ...v«./i«,/ '^^ 'Xt-.m.-^^r H.* < ^ I^^ 
 
 ?ffXvS ;;;.c rXSri'iiXTcl'ilHT'on St.;,;*«hen l «...ed U , Ce sob.. .9 
 
 fcuiv,- art.classirieil acrnnhn_;t.. llH'.r NrMKRAL c a^^^ 
 
 Ob- 3 Fiirthcrelaliveforccof 4M(mto;Mre8ecR.31.oss. 6. 
 7?,m -m The ADVRUUS of IXTKNSITT «re 11 llic interrogative and rela- 
 ^\^Zfm I, w («.r,v en tHOcl as a relative) ; 2) tl.e definites Mm so; mleo 
 ^y J, mcl «' t< s»cl. a de-ree; 3) tl.e indefinites mlde, admodum. rehe- 
 ZnZr^y very n.ucli, exceedingly, intensely im-^.^", more ; '««^"«^; 
 !;^>st «<i'k to<^ too n.neh; mtl>, enon.irh, sufficiently; pamm, not 
 
 applied iquaui latus, 9''f ('*'«' !7^ 7''« «'^^^^ ^^ Me O^.am max mi operam das ? Le. 
 
 direct interroijations chiefly (►ccur in the ^'> "'c=^;^«- ^J*^- J(, ^j j^^ „^ , i^g. Strange 
 
 llmoptimequamdudumtuadi^,^^^^ 
 
 nuestion! IL.w Ion- ago did ^ou a rue ? IJ^m- ^-- t'.r * „.««.o,^ „nrt in interrogative 
 
 o (to wear fc.r a V>"^;"V^, y^^^^/';.;^',^ ^ th v^e a e ^N'ho lovV, may be seen from 
 amant^yd^r hoc \!^^l^Zam{^^^^^^^ adjectives only, or with adverbs, btit 
 this. Cic. Fam. ., ^'-^i'^'Z^X^^^T^xy-yx^^ and cupere, as : QunmreUm etmmnunc tn 
 
 not ^^it^. verbs ex.^c^t^om*•^me.^^,^^^^^^ ^^^ province^ Cic. Att. 7, 1, J-<?''«7 
 
 'SZl1<;:Xi:i>^^l^r^!^ ^vish to be praised, how they are ashamed of 
 bcins defciLied ! Cic. Fin. 5. 22. 
 
262 
 
 I1EL.VTI0NS OF MODALITY. 
 
 OBs. 3. Sometimes qmm and qnanfnm. in connection ^vlth acljecti vcs am^^^ by 
 
 Willi />T(Oi'.s. 7) is a sviioiivin ol raW^; h'rqnam r/mr^ extdiaa. Cic. 1 lane o. in com 
 i)o><ition with vU it means 'however much \ See p. (.'.i-i foil. 
 OB- 4 T-am an.l ndeo differ 1) from each other ; 2) from fie and ifa ; 3) ^'j^^^^^'?/'?-^;'': 
 
 mho t irahomre ov tmHum) is used ])el()re adj.-ctivep to i-xpre^s the Knirlish >o il 
 
 m-,. c I 1 'o ' r „lira4 wi 1. ' «V, which in L^.lin i» ii.troih.c..,! hynuam. as : A !//</ '■« /»». 
 
 JhW>;w 7'/r/kf.v^ <7'/rt//i ?v>^, I am rt.< tenderliearted rt.« you are, () j i<!.-e>. C k . Mil • 1. li 
 /r/mi^rolX'd hvi//am.iti^ used even lu'fi.re m-^/.^ and can be i.ei h.T r.plaeed bv 
 
 T rnnir >o well, as I can disregard those thm-C.e\ttl.{. 
 
 20^ //) If ■ he En-'liri \i', «lualifyin- an mljeetive is followed by a That-rlause* e.ther 
 tun o«Lo sometimes, but rarely, Ha or sic) is used, ilie n>nJMmnon that be.ns: v - 
 m-d bv /!• xlq>>e annid faciehdnv,. tarn framu. anient e.ut e.vph>ra'a_ ^^1^: T -n '. ' 
 i\a nor were we while doih- this, so fcx.lish that we should consuler victory «'r/'er ani. 
 c\c Fam fi 1 -■ lleo e^t nnhi inrmi.^ vf etc., he is so odious to me that etc C.c. t ..m. 
 
 lant y rnrnished did he depart for the province thathe left nothm- ar hon le C.e^\ eir ., 
 1 Vl SeeK 15 oB< 3-(0 Adeo properly means 'to such a d^^r/rce . he kiiui a> <o, 
 and hence ban i I^reater emphasis that, tarn. It \s more frequently employed than -/m. 
 fn dirtn questi^ans and takes then, the tirs, plnre with the enclitic ne '« ^V/^^'i.^Sr,?/ 1 1 
 
 may be Ivplaced hyifane (K. 15, obs.;J), as Adnlne me ^>V"s(ume^e^ rl^^K m 7 • - 
 
 irascerer, did vou believe me to be i^o unjust as to be ariirrv with you .' V r.tio^of' m\s 
 
 /) Neither adeo nor fa,n can be used to express the Kn-rl^h .0 i i 'V*/ V,cJexmc4ed 
 
 N FK If ' .w' has the meaniui: of ' manner' (in ^'uch a manner, fh>fi), it ib cither expicseea 
 
 by dc or ifa (see R. 15, Obs. 3.). For the use of eo see K. 5, 4 Ad). ,..,,, 
 
 Obp. 5. Tarn and quam are frequently blended (./) with the ^'^'^''^l^lJ!!'^^ //IwiVl 
 auag>wt ; (/.) witii thequantitative adjective multummio ta,du,nnm\ 7''«^/'^ •/' ^^^i»^ 
 the descriptive adjective 7nar/nu.^ into (anfus and quantum, bee t? 2.). , ^ ^M , § -:t»o. 
 
 Obs.G. Valde and adnwdum are synonyms being used both ^'^'f''^, "/V^'^'S^ "'^^^^^ 
 verbs. They are. accor.lin-l>, rendered eitluM- by ^ ven/ or by ' very inmh 2rfZd 
 )^r (adverb of vehemen.-^) is more em,.hatieal than either, eorrespondin- to our ^jr^^c/- 
 
 U or eVtnmely. It is used before acijectives and verbs. ^A'^VJ^'T/ i^^'J^r//; r^ me 
 celJmsiqnnni/Msvfi^ a very lar-e and hi-h statue. ^^'^•- Vr''V^-,~r/''r ^it V^^^^^^^ 
 nilmndinn dthctanint. Philotimus's letter has verv much deli;,'hted me. Cic. Att. «, >-J. 
 7 'rfA' /i i^^^^^ rumor Was that you had been very prosperous 
 
 Cic fLiI 8 7 -4i7a/.?/-.' ilUid tuum, qmd mi/n valde anuerat, vehement, r di><plicd 
 
 that wo d Vi;;Il«.^r6' of thine, which I hafl liked very ^^^^^^'^^^]\^^^-iru^t^n"fS^ 
 in<rU' Tie Att 13 21. Instead of tv/?fmf«^^r the expression etiani atqne elinrn (wiinri 
 
 a;Jo'nu.ans^'.',afra;.Z .,.«.) is frequently used. ^-^^^-^^y^^^^^H:;. 
 gmtli/ n^ etiam a*que (tvmi roqo te, 1 ask you most ur-ently. Cic. tam. 1.3, o.— ^a/"o 
 dum nihil, or nihil adnwdiim means ' almost no thiiig\ ^ 
 
 * In place of a That-clause theEnjrlish frequently employs the construction with a« and 
 an infinitive (.*o as to). This construction has no comparative force, and cannot be icu- 
 deied by quam. See the example under No. (e). 
 
 RELATION OF INTENSITY. 
 
 263 
 
 Obs 7 Per in composition with adjectives, adverbs (also with quam. Obs. 3), has the 
 meanin-' of valde (P I . p. 221). Sometimes it is thus used as a separate word (in fnieH), 
 as: I'rPeMim miqai '<e<fi>no, I value it very hi-hiy. Cic. Att. 10, 1 l.-^i.H<, ;>|r/ord 
 accommoda'um tihi, he said it would be greatly convenient to you. lb. Fam. 3. 5, 3. 
 
 Jitm, 8L The qtinntitative adjectives used to express the relation of in- 
 tensity, must be considered as absolute adjectives in the neuter gen- 
 DEii (i^ boS), witli which a general noun representing the idea of quantity is 
 uiulerstood. This noun inay be conceived as corresponding to the En- 
 glish noun ' atuount ', which sometimes is expressed by copia {tantum = 
 tanta copia). The adjectives, thus used, (always in the singular) occur either 
 in the form of the accusative, or in that of the ablative case. The accu- 
 sative is analoiz:f)ns to the accusative of extent (U. 7, obs. 2), while the 
 ablative is lluit^of difference. The quanlitative adjectives thus used are: 
 
 1) Intkrijooative and relative forms : Qvatitvm, how much, and qr/anto, how 
 much bv how much: qiiantumvis. however much.— 2) Definite form: tanti'm, so 
 much'- ianfo so much, as much, by .'jo much; tantitndeni (corresi)onding to idem), 
 \\\<i as niiiclWwithout a form in O).— 3) Indefin[tk form: aliquantum and ahquanto, 
 soin.what. a little, coiisideialdy ; multum and multo. much ; panlum and jviulo. a lit- 
 tle; />/'/.<,• ("witlioutan ablative form), more, ;7/'/nm?/m, most (plurimo only in relation 
 to price and value) ; vmnmn, too much (nimio after comparatives, = quam nimium). 
 Ob< 1 Whether the quantitative adjectives, enuinerat.-d above, are called 'adverbs', 
 or • absolute adje"ti ves witli an adverbial force' is a mere ditleriince in terms. But that by 
 the Latins ihey were considered and felt as absolute adjectives appears not only (lom 
 the two form- in ?/mand o. but also «rom their use as accusatives and ablatives of ppace 
 and time (It 7 oi}-. 7. x> : R. i:i, 2). wliicli are wholly aiialo-,'ous to 'accusative-' and ablatives 
 of intensity" as Quinrtiu-^, taidum Thebis morafus quantum casus coegil, Elaleam redit, 
 Ouinetiiis "haviii<'' tarried at Thebes so long as the case demanded, returns to Elatea. 
 Liv 3;J 2—Anfi(x'hus tantum prorjre>sus e cast lis e.^t ut dimicatiirum appareret, Antto- 
 chus came forward troni the camp solar as to make it apparent that he was Avilling to 
 lidit lb 27 3'» In the lirst si-ntence tantum is an accusative of the Length of Time (R. 14), 
 at7d in the'la-t, sentence it is an accusative of Distance (R. 7, obs. 3). The adverbial 
 accu-^atives of inteiisitv (whether called absolute adjectives or adverbs) must be distin- 
 <Miished from the /r(//<.vi/ir:: accusatives of (luantit-.tive adjectives used absolutely, both 
 haviiK^ the common feature that thev are conceived as attributes of the same i:oveming 
 idea (amount or intensitv). In many instances this distinction is plain, as in the phra-es 
 multum perftrre, muVuin audere, to bear much, to risk much, where evidently mvttum 
 is the tran-hive object of the transitive verbs petferre and audere*. On the other hand, 
 in the phrases aliqutm imiltum dilhjere. to love somebody much : plunnuim interest, it 
 is very important ; nimium 7iocef,\l injures too much, the quantitative adjectives mul- 
 tum, vivnmvm ninuum are objects of intensity. Often, however, the ditference 
 is les.^ evident especially when the governing verh is ditlerently conceived and con- 
 strued in En"li-h. Thus quantitative adjectives are frequently used as objects oi jjosse. 
 qMie«e inu<t fje considered as iraiisitive objects (see § 4'JO, R. 82). wh:le in EuLMish they 
 take an adverl)ial form, as: Grafll ta>dum possumus quantum vicfi. a!> ior mttxn-nce we 
 are as i)ow< rful as the vanquished can be. Cic. Fam. 4. 1.—Qui apud me jylunmimipos- 
 sunt who have the irreatest inlluence with me. Cic. Rose. Am. 1**. Here helongs tlie 
 l)hra<e alicui ?nulfum {plurimum etc.) tribuere. which means 'to esteem highly one s 
 o|)inion< or to have great deference for somebody', as Ei plurimum triouanuu^ a qm pin- 
 Amunidilinimur, we should esteem him most highly (or 'should have the greaiest defer- 
 ence for him' ) by whom we are loved most. Cic. Oft'. 1. 15. 47. Here plunmuni is a transi- 
 live object of the verb tribuere, whether rendered adverbially or by a transitive object. 
 
 0b<» 2 The forms in vm of the quantitative adjectives, including the comparative ad- 
 jective ?;/^/>\ cannot be used to qualify adjecti ves, but only to qualily veibs,t except 
 
 ♦ When the quantitative adj-ctives are used as tran-^itive objects, the plural neuters 
 mav always be ns<.d in place of them {multa perferre. multa audere). Many gramma- 
 rians maintain that there is a great ditlVrence between midta and mu'tump-rffrre. rins 
 difTereiicc is merelv iina 'inarv. Tlie difTerence begins only at the point where the quan- 
 titative< have aua'drerlAa/ force.—** That these are transitive accusatives is proved l)y 
 the fact that jM^sse is construed with accusatives not belonixiui; to quantitatives, as: 
 Quod poterant, id audebant. Cic. Quint. 2, 1.- 1 This is an evidence that the I^itins did 
 iTot feel these Quantitatives as adverbs, but as accusatives. Else there would have beea 
 no reason to exclude them from qualifying adjectives. 
 
2G4 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 nimium, wliich is nsed with the force of nimis, both before adjectives and verbs, an ni- 
 viimn multi. too many, Cic. CMu. 4H. In i.Iaco of the other q';j}'V;.''';'^'^•^^Vr,,?; 7' ,^ 
 nientioiied U 30 must, he u^ed to qualifv adjectives, as quant (/iffUnfui, how riifflc uit (not 
 Qxantiim ditncilis) : tarn inmlerhs- (uot t<inf>/m in^-olens) ; valde inrj^mom^ (not vviUum m- 
 nenwmx) ■ mnqU vloneux, more adapted (not plus idoneus) ; maJtme (not plunnium)la- 
 imio,^u.o. The forms with o/>f'/-^ (li. 21h are used synonymously with the accusattve (ad- 
 verbial) forms of the nuantiiatives. They qualify predicjites ot all kinds, but cannot be 
 connected with attributive adjectives. VCith some verbs the forms in 0]m-e "^^t «f^;»»';; 
 Thus valere, to be strong, to be i)owerful, to be worth, always takes the forms m urn, not 
 those in opere. Ex. 11. 
 
 Obs 3 The forms in o of the quantitatives are used before coMPAnATivES, and with 
 Pueh verbs as im|)lv a compilative tas pnv-^irire. to be superior)*, as: Quaido (not <rmn- 
 turn, nor quam, ikm- quanto/>ere) Stoici meii'/,; qm a vobis repiehendui.t.ir,/io/«; nim\f'':^- 
 te kvc the St.dcs who aiv censured by you ? Cic. N.I). 1, 44.-Sic die wuKo -^celemtwr 
 et mquior q.iam Hadriilmis, aliqmnfo etiam jUhio?' hut thus he was m v.Vi mar. t t/la >- 
 ou.'< and wicked thin lladrianus, and also a gcxxi deal luckier. C ic. V er. 2, 1, ^*-^^"'^ 
 mihi i>ne-^(af in eandeni recidere tortQnani. qnaui etc., it is inxchnwre pnUrahle to me 
 to relapse into the same situation than etc. Cic. Sefit. KT, H.j. More rarely the f«>rms 
 in art applied to sii-kulatives, as inulto ex maJ^ma parte, by far lor the ^re.Y'^^'t jk rt. 
 Cic Verr 2 1 1«). The most usual adverb of intensity which is connected with hi per- 
 latiVes is/oWV, as: Apud llelvetio- /o«7^ nobUis^iinu.^ fuit Or-etorix anion- the Helve- 
 tians Or-etorix was far tlu most dUtinquUhed man. C\es. B. G. 1, 2. For the meanin-of 
 ouam wilh superlatives see obs. (i.-AHform-adjeetives. qualifyiuL' comparatives assume 
 a ( uantitative character, and must take the ablative form of the neuter, as mlnlo magis, 
 no (by nothing) more; eomagis (with the force of tan(o?/iarjis), the more, so much more. 
 Obs 4 The En'^lish '^.s' much' after cardinal adverbs (twice, three tim^K as much etc.) 
 is cxuressed by taido after the Lsxtin airdinal adverbs, as /Us taulo raleo quaTn. ralui pH- 
 vslixm worth twice as much as before. Plant. Merc. 2. 2, 20. More rarely the accusa- 
 tive forms are used, af* Sexhstao turn qwim quantum satum est abint urn •^^.''^^''"'^nnr.Fn' 
 six times as much as was sown was taken from the farmers Cic. \err. 2, 3, 4v5.— Hu Ln- 
 ernh'av much wore' or 'as jnuch aqain' nfwr cardinal adverb- is expressed by tan to 
 (■sometimes eo) with amplius or plus, as Quinquies tanto ampliu>< (luain el licitum erat civi- 
 tatibiis impemvit, he taxed the cities with t\ve times as much a-.-ain as h« was 
 allowed. Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 97. -Instead of bi< tanto the form alfero tanto is of en used as 
 Via altera tanto lonqiOrem anfractum habebat, the road was twice as long (literally had 
 a 'round about' twice as long). Nep. Eum. 8. 
 
 Obs 5 The En<dish 'little' as adverb of intensity (opposed to 'much') has no direct 
 equivalent in Lalin, the quantitative panlum meaning ' a little', and P'lrum, too littlet. 
 Thi«* adverl) i< "enerally express(;d bv connectiiiir a iie<ration wiih the ditlerent eqi i\a- 
 lents of mw/i,"as mm maqnopere (■«.2!». last example), r/o/i inultum.mimm^ mult urn 
 Thus 'a.* little a-*' is generallv expressed l)y )>o/i maqis quam (^ 112). Sometimes how 
 
 little' and 'so little' are express^ed by quantulu.^ and tantulus, n^ qnantulum judica/e 
 s as litth! as we can jiidsre. Cic. Verr. 2, 3. 1. Tantulum mostly corresp 
 
 7)0*>v///iw,s% as little as we can jiinge. v.ic. v urr. «, o. i. iy.u;,;„v ..., - ';. • y 1"^"^ l^,,^.^^ 
 
 Eu.'li-h -ever so little', as si tantalum mndo interest, if there is ever so little difference. 
 Cic^Le" 1, 12. :W. 'How little' is j:enerally exi)ressed by quam ''»/'«' '^,, 7''«'^ "^?"» «* 
 Quarnll te nan decebat, how little wu- that becoming to you! Cic. I hil. '^^^-^"yj^ 
 nihil explica.o,ho^vVut\ii do vou explain! Cic. Att. i). 2.-' •'^W*// '^' is exptx-sed by adeo 
 nou or adro nihil, as Ma/dius adeo non fenuif iram, ut qladio cwctum se m senatumrentu- 
 rum diceret, Manlins c(.ntrolled his an-er so little that he said he would come with his 
 sword into the senate. Liv. 8, 5.-//(Pc' adeo nihU movennd qiuimquam, ut etc., this had so 
 little effect on anybody thai etc. Liv. 3. 2. For the particulars in the use of non vvigis 
 quam, and nonplus quam, in the meaning ' as little , see p. <j7 toil. 
 
 Obs The relative use of the quantitative adjectives and adverbs (quantum, wiam, 
 Quant'opere) is confined to compauative clauses, which are nothing els.- but 'relative 
 clauses' apolied to the relations of manner and intensity. The antwedentsof the quanti- 
 tatives of the relative form are Din the comparative clauses of ' difference the compaua- 
 TivKsof adiectives, in which instance quam (than) is used as relative word, passing over 
 into a conjunction. See § 2«.)4 f«.ll.- 2» If the comparison is one of equality, the antecedents 
 are tam, tantum (tanto), tantopere, tantundem. The relative-, ^\h.ch are alwajs rendt^^ 
 by 'a.s', almost always take the same form as the antecedents, lo tayn corresponds 
 
 * The comparative p/ws and the superlative pluHmum of coiirse. cannot be used to 
 intensify comparatives. Hence they have only onk form ^^'^*<>' '". J,*^'* .rP,^Pf,^,V 
 has the^ame nature as plus and plurimum, but it is used "V^"""f, ^'«"„^'*Vli ' 
 paratives in place of 7?/am with a positive, as nimio p/^/^\ more than too "]"ch- » 'aut. 
 Bacch. 4. 4, 21. -t Sometimes, but very rarely, the quaulitative parw/n, in classical Ian- 
 gauge occurs with the meaning ' little'. 
 
 RELATION OF INTENSITY. 
 
 265 
 
 . ,. „i,,.,Hin.r^ Pie Or 1 35.— 'S'i m£ am/is tantum quantum pro- 
 
 the language (he uses) in his Pl*;''"'"^^'^- .^ ,^: '^^^^^ cjc ^tt. 2.23. For examples with 
 
 quantum omnes hrede^. he '^^,^1;^,* "^"" , ''^, „« n relative which often, (as in English) 
 fjefore comparatives takes quanto (rarely quod) fl^'''^^]^^^;^^^^^^,^ rendered ' th^,' as : 
 
 ^: SlSS?^i;/S 'S.n^Si^^re ~|S^,lt ^^^±^'^ 
 
 tlli^VufpiS^S'^^k^^^^^"^ ■""^'^ a. I see rn his 
 
 '"^.'^' 7 ''T'Ltl'i'jrr' ah^oluto adjective rammvmflrrc-alar superlative of «t/p«n»), in 
 
 p.ri/,7n,m in titree or tair days at m^ 'Kiffe «»'«"'"'"»« <'^«'*«/ ' ,^T "'"' ^»" 
 as synonym of iiluiinvun ar mxtm^. y"' ^', j _j, ,, „,^0 used before adjec- 
 
 ^;^^^:^:,^^^^^::^^^^^-^:^^^^' -"' ^'-'-^ ^-^^ J""'"""""' 
 
 ♦hie mn«t be exceeding V pleasant to me. Cic. tam. id, ib, «. 
 ''^'"Dic :irp:tl.st;,i»,«;.«pudeanthonunes., ,n,ud^ 
 
 Cic. N. D. 4, 49.- 3. At ici ^'\%X%ll' ^„^?f "ncp Itt 7.- 4. Tanto opere justitia 
 pecunias impenlret, hu.c ni"hi^tus'i u?ch-Uate?h?bell devictas in fidemi^ recepis- 
 SpudmajOres «"^^'•^t4"t'sc nfci? Off 'l H -- 5 Qi^i^^ nos magno o;>.r6.attendit» un- 
 
 apud major 
 
 sent, carum patrOni 
 
 quam 
 
 essct' 
 
 8iim7n6pere vii5n„ «portCbit Cic inv i j^ ^j. ?j^ "\;'^;;:f ^irepta sunt ! Quam ilia 
 V^'S^S^S'^ll^So, ^S:6^;- V^" tSrpis Syracusani^ miseranda^^ omn. 
 
 ent. carum patrOni^^ essent. '-'^•,^"/v' .".r 2 1 10 - 6. Hiec res, etiamsi lex non 
 nam in hoc genere causarum^y Uc \ eir 2 1, 1 ). b i^ 
 
 ssctl^ riiagnopereyxx^n^^i^nx^^^^^^^^^ ^-J^ simiilac"-» profOgit'^^ Heraclms, 
 
 mmnopei-e viian oportebit. ,cic. inv . i la, ^). o ,HreDta sunt ! Quam ilia 
 
 _ ^ : — -— a how thev run up to me.— ' remarks.- * protect themselves. 
 
 1 In the countr>'-towns.— " ^^^^^^J, , „ Vu var e to hide away — * dear.— ^» private 
 _ » pasture.- « to look about.- '^.W_^- '^ J^.^^'- .i«_!'lfXr?tont-actise, to respect. 
 
 ^^^^2!^"^^:^^^^^^^ ii^l^tVallger in or to.- " aacred.- - to keep. 
 
 12 
 
266 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 cicnm Romania eseet. Liv. 41. 19. - 14. Iter mvlfo qnam "Va^ccnsnt fiiorat diiflH' 
 ill fuit. lb. 21,35.- 15. Hoc mihi crit, r.//.men/^r -ratum. C.c Ira.n 13 2 - 1». l_u . 
 tantiim homine-^ fefrlli-ti ut iioi u,'eres aiictont-ltcm senatn?. Cic. Scsf 14. .r.. 
 
 J//W c t ■ ) --n plnrimmn. Cic. Fam 18. 'i-^.-lS. Athc.ic.ises non H.Jiim spcin l.a- 
 
 ce-se5 po,e a Nop .M 3. - 19. MuUum to ista iefollit opinic, ct qnule,n« multis 
 in'UKirck Vrr 2 l,35.--20. Auxiliaribu^^T ad pnirnam non. miiltuni connuebat 
 Cral-us ri:. B a ^^^^^^ dixit, esse i.oni.ull..« quorum aurtontas apud 
 
 B G 1 17 - 'Zi, Mxlto dilifienllus S.tviIuh lurta ilia n<»tilt:i« liabet q lam tu. tic. 
 Von-' 2 1 21 - 23. Qucwto vita illOrum honiinum jmidanor, t<u,to l.oruin M)Cor. 
 f\\S'iinamo4'orv*t SaTl Ju-' 85, 2>. - 2t. Hannil)al tanfo vnxsUihat ceteros inipera- 
 
 Nei) Ilann. 1.-25. E-o viuKo tnnio inhenor ^um qnam tu. 'iaut. liud. 2, b. .><.- 
 2(J Non M minus ducenta qnadraLMUta JM-(M-a»2 ,,livCti c<.la- minus nno viliu-o>3 ha- 
 lleVc «" e- nee AHs ianto n,n)iltdvem lund.un, aut (ovl'»^ ^-olas, id.-o>* duo viHic. . ut 
 ttvs a endi sunt. Varro li. li. 1, 18. - 'il. ("a-ar i)rovincia' q^mn maatmutn ^yolest 
 m lit ... ur, m impcat. Ca's. 15. (;. 1. 7.-2S. V<m re< a.ietor tuif •\ nt rpm,n prwwm 
 1 o mi.K s jMi a<'ere'« i.cip.-rent, bominem(,i.e minime l.t.-iusum'^ q,m,nt»nnilt>io.v^^- 
 Sl''a,u;,.i;;M,t,;r. Cie.'ven-. 2, 2, 14. - 21). (^a-sar Cingelori-,'is auctoiitatem quam 
 ])lurhni/m inter Treviros valere voluit. Cies. B. G. o, 4. 
 
 2) BeUdlon of Vnhie coid Price. 
 
 % 559. The Value ami PincE attachea to an action is expressed : 1) by 
 the abhitive case of gp:nekal nouns expressing? value and price, as pre- 
 Hum ; 2) by the ablative case of the measuuk-units of money {nummus, 
 sestertius etc.) in connection Avith cardinal numerals; 3) by the ablative 
 or genitive neuter singular of absolute quantitative form-adjectives, as 
 quanti, at what price ; magno, at a high price. 
 
 Bern 32. The adverbial objects denoting price and value are always 
 (but see ons. 1.) dependent on one of those verbs with winch tlic idea()t 
 price and value may be connected. These verbs are, 1) those implying 
 or referring to transactions for a valuable consideration, as emere, to 
 buy {((liquid m/tqno enure, to buy something at a higli price) ; 2) verbs 
 si<niifving to estimate, to appraise (value), as mtlniare {ahquid tnhus 
 se'stertiis mtimdre, to value something at three sesterces); 3) verbs denot- 
 ing ' costing' and ' being ^voktii', as coufitdre, esse (quanti est dla merx 7 
 wiiat is that article worth V). 
 
 Oi5=. 1 Only one adjective, renrdi^. in connection with esi^e, is sometimes, but rarely, 
 constVued with an object of price and value, as P. Clo'lii insula fst niHid.s' 'inymmi hMs\ 
 the plot of ground belo.i-^inir to P. Clodius is to be had at 10,01)0 sesterces. Cic. CjuI. .,1.. 
 
 ()B3 2 The most n<ual verbs implvini; money transactions arc r-eiidere, to sell ; venire*^ 
 to be sold, to sell (in a neuter sensi') : emere and inercarl, to buy : r^dunrre. to rede.-m, 
 toacniiire for monev ; Ax-^T/r, t(. let : amducere, to rent: trauMgere. to a-iee on a price 
 in a bar'^iin: decid>re. to compromise for a price; addirere, to award a contract or a 
 work) to strike otl' in an auction; lifan (dic>ij>i>< (rsfimdre to award or hx damages 
 a'^ainst on<«. In the same way are constni.d n.:.ny verbs denoting a<ti<ms which are 
 eUlier perlormed lor payment, or which cost a certain sum, as n:di,ft c(tre (to bin id some- 
 
 » ascent.— « qrafum alictd fac<-re. to do somebody a favor.— 3 recomim-ndation.— 
 4 to do harm.- * t.. do <roo.l. i.. be of advanta-.'.- • et qoyhm and . Do - \')."xi'iaiy 
 troups.- « notnre, to n..te down.- " sl..tb.- »<> to cxed.- >» '•'''''•^''^/.''"•- I' ^,'^'./''- 
 
 mra oliveti co/erf, to cultivate anoliv larm of '^'V'V'"-''^!,"-'''"/. ''• / "r./bo ,...7 
 ■»« iheieloie. on that acount.— ^^ancfdnm esse uf, <diqttiH (diqiad Jacvit, \o makt somt - 
 body do somet hi 1»«,'.— I «ai^^re, to institute proceedings or u lawsuit.— ^^ quarrelsome, 
 
 ^ *^ve}are (viil:»!veneo) is used as the regular passive voice of vendere; aase^tcrtU) venire, 
 to be sold lor a sesterce. 
 
 RELATION OF VALUE AND PRICE. 
 
 26' 
 
 thin*'' for a price), doc^re (to teach at a price), haMtare (to live at a certain rent), cctnare 
 (to (]\i\e for a certain price) and many others, as : Modium tritici denario emere, to buy a 
 bu«hel of wheat lor a denarius. C\c.\ aw. 'i,Z.9>s>.—Ag mm frumento locdvit. he let out 
 land for a rent in L'rain. Liv. '21,ii.— 7\rnis m£dimnis decidirunf, they compromised at 
 llie price of three mcdimiii (a piece). Cic. Verr. 2, 3, A\).—Pi,-cm(E cedificanfur magno, 
 nurseriis for fish are built at a high price (cost much nKmey to build). Var.o R R. 3. 17.— 
 Triqinta millibm e>nn dixistU haWare. yon said that he lived at a rent of 30.000 sesterces 
 Cic Cad 7 —tmsar cenfies eesterlio coendvit vno die. Caesar dined on one aay at a cost of 
 ten'millions sesterces. Sen. Cons. 9. Here belong the verbs denoting ' to condemn to a 
 fine' as : Absem nidndecim mi/libtPf condemnatus est, he was, in his absence, condemned 
 to 15* 000 sesterces. Liv. 5, 32.—' To write a note/or a cerfciin sum of money' (lor inst. l.CMK) 
 sesterces) is expressed by syngraphanifnille sederfium {iien. p\ur.)facere. Cic. Phil. 2, 37. 
 
 Obs 3 The verbs of estimating and appraising are fEfttinulrenud {TaTe]y)pufare, itaxdre 
 bein-'post-clas-^ical), as: Est modi lis tritici lege iribus sesfertiis semisse oistimatus^iha 
 bii-^hel of wheat was bv law valued at a tax of three sesterces and a half. Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 
 75. :Si denariis qundiingentis Cupidinem iUu7n 2)u(asset, if he had estimated that statue 
 of Cupido at 400 denarii. Cic. Veir. 2, 4, 7. 
 
 Ob^ 4 The verbs sifmifying ' to cost', ' to he worth' are «w«. to be worth (which signi- 
 fication can always he recognized bv the attached phrases denoting the price) ; stare and 
 comtare to cost \ Uc^re, to be held at a certain price ; valere, to be worth (ante and post- 
 (•li<<i.al) ; a< : Sextante sal UoincE et ])€r totam Italiam erat. salt was worth one-sixth of a 
 «(.Vt'erce at Home and throughout Italy. Liv. 2U, n.-Polybias scribif, centmn talent is earn 
 rem Achats sfedsse, Polvliius writes that this aflair cost the Achieans one hundred talents. 
 Liv ^34 50.— T'tm qitadrlgte lioinoi co>,stitZ7vint quadnngentis milhbus, one four-horse 
 u'am cost 400.000 sesterces at Rome. Varro R. R. 2, 1, U.-Quanti Drust hortt Itcuisse 
 saibis- id ego giiogne avdUram. th.- price at which you write that Drusus s park was hein, 
 1 ha.I likevvise heard. Cic. Att. 12. 23.-What apKRsov is worth in money is not expressed 
 in tid- form by an accusative of value, but l)y a transitive accusative w.th possidere, 
 a«- He is worth a million, ^?o.v.vi(^e< decies.— Both constdre and stare are frequently used 
 of 'equivalents metaphoricallv represented as -costs', as Multorum sanguine et vulnert- 
 husea Penis victoria stetit. that victory cost the Carthaginians ' the blood and wounds of 
 manv' (i e they paid for it with etc.). Liv. 2:3. 30. ' It cost hi-^ life' is not vita stetit or 
 'constitit\ but morte stetit (comtit it), as Utrlq'ie vindicta libertatis nwrte ste fit the vindi- 
 cation of liberty cost both tlieir lives (.both paid with their lives for etc.). Veil, i, b4. 
 
 Rein. 33. The general nouns expressing price and value are pretium 
 (price, value); pecunin, money; impensa or impensm (not e.rpenm) and 
 «^/w?)/'/.-*, expense, expenses; ???^?wn% pav. fee, wages {stipefidium, the pay 
 of a soldier). Tiie ablatives of these nouns do not belong to the relation 
 of ' quantity' unless thevhave adjectives expressing quantity as attributes. 
 A LOW price is expressed hy parvum {vile, or exiguuni) pretium ; a high 
 PRICE, b^^ mafinuni pretium. 
 
 Ob<5 1 Adverbial ablatives of the nouns mentioned above, if not accompanied by ad- 
 iective-^'exni-essin^ quant itv, belong toother modal relations than thatof price and value, 
 unMici-allv (^^ressini^^^ ins.nimentaliry. as ApolUmius mercjde docebaL Apollomus 
 
 taucrht for ir.v Cic Or. L ^.-Fid'-m et religionem svam pecuma commidnre, to baiter 
 on :^s fa th L. I religion (ie. one's principles) for mrney. C.c. (■!'•• ^^'^-Jl^^J^l^^f" 
 iubliro in Asia?n mercdfor signdrmn missu.<^ est, Verres was sent at public expen-e to 
 Asia -fs a tmder in statues. Cic. VeiT. 2, 1, Hi.-Prelio ordinem senatoi^um mercarx, to 
 buy the senate with money, lb. 2, 2, 49. 
 
 Ob<> 2 Quantitative expressions with pretium to denote indpflnite^amonnt,s^of price, 
 are not ver\ neq..e..tly us.';i. Instead of such phrases the absolute JV"«",^the quanti- 
 tative adjectives in the ablative or genitive (§ 5;)0) ai-c lar more usual The adjectives 
 which a^uei with ;>r./e//m, aside from tho^e mentioned R 3:3 are the comparat ves 
 w"f o • and minor, the superlatives maximns and summns. and all those ^"^"'itative form- 
 S ect ivvsTh t inav be attached as attributes to nouns (2153 foil.), as B»mnorxx omnia 
 J^i^Orm^^^^^^ Dumtiorix had farmed all the pubhc 
 
 im s s of the ;Ed..i at a small (low^ price. C;es. B. G. 1- IS.-^^/» '^T''^ K^^'^ Zfj^t 
 Vossum'^s quam hi cmuntur, we cannot be redeemed at a higher price than these may e 
 boto-lu for Liv. 22. 50 (So.netimes vUi preiio, at a cheap pnce).-lf price is expressed by 
 an a"; -cti^'e vvi h pretium. dependent on esse (to be worth), the phrase is not in he abla- 
 ^/LKMri.rtbocALiTxTivE genitive: NuU'i,^ est tarn parii pretn gum etc. (i» of_eo 
 ^ n v.in but .mm Plm^^ -Parvi pretii est. Cic. Qu. Fr. \,2,A.-Mino7ni 
 
 rSa 6 ^L S.-K/<t- n tiie positive is never used i.i.regard to price, and j^cuma 
 uht4y6 takers ;;4Ai^^ (tantus) and its degrees: Fidem mxijore pecuma adversarw tror 
 
268 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 didMi, you have surrendered your faith for more money (a larger Pum> to your adversary. 
 CicVerr. i, 'i'ii.— Tanfd pecnnia. for so much money. Cic. Ih. 2, \ .M.—Miicore pecunui, 
 at les:^ monev, Cic. lb. 2. 2, 9. -There is no j^enerai noun for the Ln-hsU '^um , wtncli 
 is variously expiesst-a by the out- or the ottier of ihe a'>ove mentioned -cneral tt-nns. 
 The noun '>i>imma means a • sum' as the n-sult or computation, of sutnmim? "1»."«: >> n=*t 
 is the bum (total) of these men ? Quanta istiEC liominum sunwii e.^t f 1 laut. Mil. i, i, -lo. 
 
 Bern 34. If the price of an action is deterniinetl by a noun denoting 
 MEASURE-UNITS OF MONEY, the hitter nuist take cardinal (iiiehiami^ dis- 
 tributive) NUMERALS as attributes, either in the interrogative (rehitive) 
 form {qnot.quotmi), or in the definite (or deinoiistrative) form {M, iinus, 
 duo,bini etc.), or in the indefinite form {^/liquot, ?n>(/tt\ pl'fres, plnnnii, 
 panel). These phrases an; phiced in tlie ablative (a lew instances ex- 
 cepted, DBS. 3 and 4), as : PUnius commentarios snos vendere polerat qua- 
 dringentis millibn>i nnmmum, Pliny could have sold his commentaries for 
 400,000 Henterces. Plin. Ep. 3, o. In E^^dish these ablative phrases ot price 
 are rendered variousiv bv>/', <^^ to, or by a mere objective, according to 
 the meaning of the governing verb. We say : to estimate at, to scUJor or 
 at, to build a house for, it conta (is worth) three dolUirs, U) condenm to a fine 
 of eic. In Latin all these prepositional phrases, and the mere objective 
 after ' cost', ' to be worth', are expressed by ablatice phrases. 
 
 Obs 1 If 'price' is mide the coMPr.KTiNO object or subject of a verb, the phrases 
 by which price is exprn-sed. t:il«', of e.Mir-e, the e;ise re<iuiri'd l)y th«^ construction, as 
 Numerantiir illi .-^estcrtia (JCL, 250,000 sesterces are paid to him. Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 20. 
 
 Obs. 2. The interroj?:itive and iiulefinite fonus of these numeral phrases of price are 
 rarely used, the quuiitTlative forms m.-iitioiied § .'jtil) l)eiiij? prrtem-d for this purposi-. But 
 in certain connections these forms cannot be dispeu-^ed with, as: IHnribus aluju;iiito me- 
 f/i//*//i.Nd*-cum;isiMneriiut(iuam ju-jeraerant sata,they bou<?lit the tilhi-s/Wr quite consider- 
 ably more mt-dimid than there wen- acres sowed. Cic. Verr. 2, :i, 47. The deliuite numeral 
 vniis as attribute of nouns expressiiiLj the denoinmarioiis ot money, is trequently under- 
 stood, as aliqnidsestertio emtre, to buy soinelhini; for a (one) sesterce. 
 
 Ob.«5. 3. The verb esse in the meanincj 'to he worth' takes the price either in the abla- 
 tive or in the form of a i)redicate-«,'enitive, as; (iuum in Siciliil .sv.s7e/-/ii.s' bini-'i iritici 
 modius esset, snmiuum fen>i<. when in Sicily wheat was worth a modius or three at the 
 hi"hest Cic. Verr. 2,3, HI.— Opus hocerat vix sest«'rtium(/'m^//-ar/i///a mdli'ini. 1 his worK 
 was hardly worth 40,000 sesterces. Cic. lb. 2, 1, 54. The ablativk 'of worth' is used to 
 denote the maukkt riacK of an article, while the i,'enitive denotes its real value, bee the 
 first example It. 32, obs. 4, and Ex. 5. Ji. Sonietiines (but rarely, and mostly in post-clas- 
 sical lin<Mia<'e) ra'ere is used in the sense ol 'to be worth someihin,'', «,'enerally con- 
 Ptrued wUh Uieablativt; (as IMin.33. 3». but once (in V'arro) it is found with the object of 
 value in the acci'sativk: Di-narii dicti quod r/e/w< a^ris V(i/?banf, mn am quod r/^/iz/a-f, 
 the denarii were called so because they were worth ten (poiind-s) of copper each, tlio 
 quinarii because they were worth tlve. Varro L. L. 4,36. 
 
 Obs. 4. The verb fiPN'/lm^//'^. especlallv in the combination litem CEMhn'ire (see H. 32, 
 OBS. 2), is sometimes consirued with iid befoie the price, in place of an ablative, as: 
 Ddabdlce. nd tncies lu est ce<finiafa. the damaijes au'ainst Dolabella were laid at la 
 uiillioiis. Cic. Verr. '2, 1,3S.— If ie-^tiimlre is construed with a «genitive ot a price ex- 
 pressed by a definite numeral, it has not the meaninj? ' to ap/mnse', but the fiu'iirative 
 meaniiii; ''to e-<teein\ ' to <vn4der\ in which mi^anini; the object of value rei,ml;»rly is in 
 the genitive (§ ufil), as 7^///i(}/•e-« senuin iiiukx cextinKiidur assU, the talk, of old men is 
 valued at one as, i. e. amounts to nothing. Catull. 5, 3. 
 
 Ob-!. 5. The Piandard of Roman money was oriirinnlly the copper as. weigh! nc; one 
 pound UPS lihrdle,ies (trarc\, which gradually was reduced to one twenty-lourih of its 
 original weight with the same nominal value. On this standard, >ilver coins were made 
 of Ihree denomination-: 1) the //^/?aW/'<', containinu' 10 as; 2) the qnininn-^ ot o as; 
 3) the ses'terfiifs (contracted of semi.-! f^rtii/s\ i. e. 2J) of half this value, worth abouU cents 
 of our money. All sums of money in piililic and private intercourse were calculated hy 
 the sestertius, which also was simplv called nu/nocu.s^ (properlv meaning 'com' or 'piere 
 of moiieyV). Th^ sesterce is generallv notated by the letters US (a corruption Irom 11>, 
 i.e. duo et semlO. Occasionally larger sums of money were «letermined by (Jreek 
 denominations of money, especially the mine (mi/ia, which in Greek was worth lOOdrach- 
 
 RELATION OF VALUE AND PRICE. 
 
 W9 
 
 «,» whilP the -Romans understood by it a sum of 100 denarii); and the Attic talent 
 
 ?s;; S!,?ru.'?r^ ,r^£n *.05{iu .o,,u^^ 
 
 iiiUlibus he let tue house for 2000 se?terces. 
 OB. ti In r...^ard to the gmmmatical forn. of the word sestertius and the numerals con- 
 
 mmmmMmsmm 
 
 cA-i^t- -1 «-»!/• H t , .,/^„/,w,i* ,in,i it< Mr-eoinnaiiVlU"'' liumb^'rs. as LupiL Ul^ bui--'ifiui 
 
 '^:^^^i;;^:^J^^IS^^<^l£m^^r.A outo,- W, .aud^^ property. 0.c. 
 
 f„,V.i,m';m6a.Vaud..iaht, l,u.,<hcdilwu.au<l seslercc-.. t. «. uiic uulliou eight huudrtd 
 thousatid sesterces. Cic. \ err. '2, 1, 39. 
 
 numeral urn e4\, fourteen times a 
 
 sesterces) vvas pa dl^ :!|;rfor--Vxnlli«.ns sesterces. Suet: CiES. 50. So Sytvgrapfia 
 S^;lr^^!i.!j?rfe \v^. ^ irli^m;.;:^ -^te..es ^Cic. PHiL 2, 37- CeutUs sesUrtu lav 
 
 gitione, by a bribe of ten millions sesterces, lac. Ann 12, .>8. 
 
 f'''" , ^rnni.V;r .Verwinu-'' ani.l nneco» eniimefilivt» a.uliChant, fumlam venire arbi- 
 tiis est ut q « "•'^';'^' "' ^^"4"'^,' „„i „1, |,oste ohsidentur, ri em.-ie aquie «stan- 
 
 vir bonus e met demfio quod fit mille Uemnum / Cic. Oft. 3. M,- b. Dccuma. 
 
 . The neuter ^^n^^!:^^i;,J^J^r,^^^;;'f^ ^ "rfS,,-"- » "t^e '^2- 
 
 llm ";'z;,™,,, that^lw'u'e or'l:iS«doe.'uot occur in Cicero is eitoneou., as .s seen 
 •/.iTrJ^Sus, a li^ufd ra;;,r/cioSn^"a!;out a'pint.- n <lecu,m, a tithe. 
 
il ■ 
 
 KELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 RELATION OF VALUE AND PRICE. 
 
 271 
 
 SmlTS trhi.^Cic. Verr. 2. :l, 39.- 7. Phi.n.s homo ill.istn. ac 
 
 ? ///svS^r m r K'^^^ et m'dimni. DVLIV. lb. 2, 3, 40.- 8 Opus ouod ^^y^iefrtt^'rn 
 
 56 -9 I 10 qui rem qninqentUmedimni^ d.-idere nohus.ot. null.' promTs.t I . 2 Z M. 
 - 10 D cGbant illi ie malle sfHertium quir,q»agh,v< we//i6w damnilri. lb. 2 3 .iS- 
 11 Qua in d vit-lte C. CaiOni, clarissimo > ire, H^ fnituor millifnis lis ivsti.nam est. in 
 Pido, c ivit-lte Vcrri^ 8cribie« rt^t conce.-Muni ut ih terdecie^ uno nomine' aifem-ts. 
 lb 2V^.- 12 Qmun senatus ^«a<?..«i. //.>^ tritki^ ^"*"^"^^,^'n^7*^'\^H.PC 
 nia^n Verres tiitici mo<lio. .in-ulos (emu denanis sesn.nKlvit lb. 2, 3, 81.- 13 H ec 
 omnia sirrnaii Praxitelis. MyrOnis. I'olycleti, //.VA.vjr milUbus et quinqmds \ cvvx \en- 
 
 ^J^'quMmqintamiinhus venTre? lb. 2, 4, 7.- 15. Aponio SaturnTuo «n auc nue 
 inter subsdS" ^^ gludiatOrcs sestertio mnagies iguorauti addicti 
 
 sunt. Sutt. Cal. 38. 
 
 § 5r»0 Price indefinite in re^i^ard to numbers is most generally cx- 
 pres.>uu ..y quantitative adjectives used absolutely in the neuter singular, 
 so as to understand a general noun denoting price or value, the game as 
 a noun denoting 'amount' in the relation of intensity. Some of these 
 adjectives are placed in the genitive, and others in the ablative ac- 
 cording to the classes to which they belong. 
 
 Rem. 35. The quantitative absolute adjectives which are thus used 
 
 with the idea of price understood are ^ ,c \ ^ *■ 
 
 \\ in the interrogative and relative forms: quanti, at (lor) what 
 
 price (as a relative generally rendered by ' an'). It is always in the genitive. 
 
 the ablative form of this adjective serving always as ablative ot ditlereucc 
 
 before comparatives. . ,o ^ ^ • ^ *^» 
 
 ">) the dfmonstrative quantitatives taiiti, at (for) such a price, and tan- 
 iidem, at the same price. Tliey are, in this sense, always in the genitive. 
 
 3) ill the indefinite form : 
 
 la) manm. at (for^ a hi?h (great, larjre, dear) price ) VioXh. always in the ablative. 
 parvo (nonma{mo),iii a low (cheap, small) price \ 
 
 (b) p'uri'i (nirely vuyori^), at a higher price ' i^q^ji always in the genitive. 
 
 i^pi:^; ^^l^^^tiLn: quan^pluXno,^ hid. (dear) a. possible. 
 miniim; generally with qaani; quam minimo, as cheaply as possible. 
 Hence the quantitatives of the interrogative, relative and detinite (<lemon- 
 sSe) tbrms must always be in the genitive, while m the indefinite 
 f,)nn the co.mpauatives only are placed in the genitive, and the posi- 
 tives and superlatives in the abl.vtive, as : 
 
 m IvTERUoovTivB po«M : Quanti earn emit? At what price ha<» he bought her? 
 
 rrVer?2 ^40-%) Indefinite FouM (a) Positivks and >^lu'kiu atives : .Va.//.o 
 Cic \ err. A .1. 4.». f/.,, .t,„ x\\\w^ at a hi-'h pr ce. C c. Verr. 2, 3, 1»,.— Om^/'/r/U/t 
 tZSf.^u!:^;:,'^.^^'^^'- ou th'e palatine hlU ». a cheap ...a cat no 
 
 . ir- Ifi^l "U.,i,,,ir',',mm«m .mv.r,. nou ,^minl • (Cic. Att. 1, IJ), mmon I, not an 
 ablative ol price l)ut of means, Uependont on movere. 
 
 ,' 
 
 9^ 
 
 
 J.J- !• ^ »// 7^'^ fiR&fit lib'ido tua. You sold at a 
 trrent rolitV Cic. C«^l. 7. 18.- ram '^''.f ."''";," ..^'e'Cvtfh tie law- cic. Wrr. -.!. .3. 49. 
 to,f m-to r [weassatne that) >""•■<, ^^^ «,£i if is In the interest of the farmer 
 
 «^at tl ftiil^es should sell >,/ ft' ''>',!' a Mure ;>' j ". * , ,k'e„ or s,,ner. a* cAmpl!, as yoa 
 «m. *™»I Q"ea> """""''•,™nM" '''^;^,' !'^,'.' Ve.Klo fn t^.^ttln non ;/«™ <."«,, ceteri 
 
 o:r,'Th"'— ians are at a loss .o exphut, tl. re,.™ w,^ in |]-;f STertf,:: 
 
 lives, and can never perform the ^"«^^^«j'J^ , adjectives which, according to i?. 
 
 Oh^ 2 The verb e^^se, to be worth, may ^^ke all the aajecu ^^^^^ ,^^ .^^ ^ 
 
 r. ar^; used to denote the worth, ^" t^« «'^^'^i\f. a<: bi ut quisque quod plurinn sit, 
 
 q-, are used to denote tne wuit.., ... •;"- ""v^^ •> . o<: si. ut quisque quod plunnu sii, 
 excluded from the use as ^^^^^^l^^^^t^Ja I'h.edr. 2, 5 ; «f ^^^^^j^^^' 4^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 as Jiene fminn- q"od '^JfJ^Jl j^^f huvin.,' i- -<>"^*'»""f,>'^'»;iT:rb Jt to Surn what^^^^ 
 the king who ^>^^"5-:'^^;;'^,l:^U„„ht the house aim 
 
 CO) 
 
 tec. ..- 
 
 as gi/awi opfii 
 
 i-nMi^»..'.-- - ' ji ^^ ji price). VIC. il'' jr\''^__ j.:,nit domuinirt^peuiintuw 
 
 aUa". 0/-«"« ««<"■«. «" '■«" " ."-T ■" ' . ' Verr S. 3. 21.- 2. «««"«.ffry-rr. 
 
ci-n 
 
 BELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 tarn 
 ma 
 
 , 4 «..«»,♦ Pio Phil 9 7 — 6. Permittite nt decu- 
 
 rtpecnniamredcmpton' ^"l\^"^?"^'^"ra::;^^ n 95.- 7. Dixit VorreB 
 
 squarUi qni^que (PnHOrum),veli a«.'ne^ J^^^^^^^^ a-stimaliOnc* alter 
 
 .. decma» /an/We'm a^^timasee 7 /«/ i.^'^»*^^^^^^ US XV pro me( imuo, 
 
 gublevarul'i arauln-s, alter ^^■^'';^^\r^ V m ■.iTmmim • retinui^ti US XXI, tariH cnim est 
 ta7iti euim erat ilU» tempore ^^itu imd nnn,m ui u _ ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^ 
 
 frumcntum SicilieuPC ex le-e «•^«'" *^' " " ///Jcn-* b 2.3,80.-10. Malehaiit isti 
 im.., quare putJlbas t;mptOn luerum» « '^ ,;> 'Xum Veiri; enu.snriu.u' ineidere«. 
 pul.lieepotius qxx>xmM>^ u>agno ^''l\*/*^v7".V? » i^A^/i uecunue venlrent ; non enim 
 
 g -.,-.1 If the value attached to a thing is not reclucble to money or 
 « ' nnt i, ronccivea as ' esteem' or as an ' inner appreciation of a 
 
 Sr ':«.;:g reTnl. of appreciation is genenU.y expre^.i hy U.e 
 same quantitative adjectives which are used to denote price (R. 3o), hut 
 the^e adjectives are all placed in the genitive case 
 
 . ''\"'n.i,T^ All o which except rarely ma^no with cestiware) 
 
 ed by the adjectives mentioiK'd 7?. 35 ALL or wiuL^ -hi-hes^t'), inuj-iwi is also nsed. 
 
 are In the .^knitive.. For P^^"-''\\J^',%^^^^^^^ ex ornmhu, facto 
 
 Absence of esteem is V-^i\'"^^':^*L^*^n! i-if.* -^''•^■'- ^ ^ '-• ^-"^— - in^^ t.irtt. 
 
 pit 
 
 tariti, 
 
 16.- 
 
 of 
 
 averted from you. Cic. Cat. 2. 7. *>,*> 'rolloanial' "onitives fiicci, vavci, osH-o, te- 
 
 cation of our noun 
 
 rV - •» rIrS may be understood 'as an adv-rsative (•onjuiic- 
 cuuon oi oui ..V,..» .^,- rt .— ^*^;.";: •' f.^^^.,,^ j,, ,hc tlrst case the phrase is to »)e 
 tion Kbnt\ or as tiu^neuter of th, a 1 tx^mc ''^^^ ^ran^lation wonhl h.' ^ Suinxmng 
 
 reiuU-red '7i'// be thu m ' /"?f,/ J" J' ": '^on -thin- excelhuf, i. e. to pride yourself upon 
 /AL«!itm<n/^\- V^'^'-'^l'^.J .f.f 7'Si i^^^^ that there have been those who.- 
 (with a participial couBtruction).— jui»be qui, ^ 
 
 *•* supply tinerU. 
 
 0." 
 
 DELATION OF VALUE A^D PRICE. 
 
 273 
 
 •rot to care a =tnuv for Fomothinir', as Jndice» r^minmcam Jlocn rtonfaavn Ahe jn^gcs 
 
 .In nor (arc a straw for The republic. Cic. Fan.. 4, 5.-.EQui tomqne ahqmdjacere means 
 
 M./t kc . tldr.rplc-asantly- (in ^-ood part), as Si to. von mortt pencudnn noscegm bo- 
 
 ,!imlfnrimvs if ioir do not care for the dan-er, we look pleasanily at it. Liv. ^\. Zi 
 
 nl^t/./arm?^/^. If I ^^^ „^,^,^^^ ,„^1 ,,,% q.^TClae. Liv. .29 17.- 2. Ihs u niporOnis, 
 
 * 1 UvftA.miini cniu<aue wja^m <B>VJwo unlus aostatis fructum» paliestne^ Pala- 
 
 C Ci A 2 ^7 iTs?cailW?re^ ;vstimatOres3 prata et.areas* qu.sdam m^iq- 
 
 ^^Y'J^ILnr,/' fVuantt e-t a.^timaucla virtus. qu:T? neque naiifrao:io« nee incendio amit- 
 
 mnr^^ S >n-^r2 r.l - 4. Ve^^^^^^ tii.i tauti fin^nx ejus libTdinem liomumm um..- 
 
 Iitur .' C ic. I ai I , *;'•,, , ... Y 2 1 :30 — 5 N"Siruin est lene modice» popnli 
 
 «a<7^ iv imant.ir. Cic. lb. 3, 13.- 8. Si sapiens aliquism.ser esse VoU^-\^^^;;^^> ^^ 
 tarn .d( riOsaui»* virtQtem mn maqno^^ £Estimandan» puto Cic. lb 3. 3.- 9 lllud est 
 
 Zini m^^^^^^^ 
 
 in Pr-ivi»« homines sua Darii pern ere, aliCna cupere soleiit. Sail. Cat. li.— li. « ato 
 
 l^ lu^rL F niiin 1). 5 am d.'duxerati\ quod non minon.^ (Esfimanws quam quemlibet 
 
 oar. • a\i. ou^. o<.. »-i. f ,^ -- Video Quanta nobis iiiviniae 
 
 lOrem e us prealm^^ 
 
 SKtt^" ric o!t. l^g - 1(5 Ilorti illi inveniendi- tibi sunt .i me tantt laci« 
 
 'Z!!'^'^^^yi^^^\he q:tmititative adjectives are used a. one 
 of the 'forms to dwiole the de-ree of intet^est which i^ taken in an action 
 ^ hich is «^eDemlly expressed by the impersonals interest and refert (p^021) 
 
 ^S^'^>d1 l'c"^V^" 2 i. itK '^But neither c^rcire.^ nor exf^eUit and a^^i;^^ are construed 
 with objects d'enotin-'lhe dkouee of i"'^'»-^^^»- ., ,^^ ^^f^^). hut is 
 
 UBS. 9. The impersonal r?/W/ h^;";;^,^/,"»;.}" ^^^ !<^l^t7ed .f^^^^^ with a 
 
 a compoun.l of 7? (the ablative ^;^j:'\^^'^J^^^^^^ ihe atiair' or 'in the 
 
 force similar to the Lnfrbsh 'it /;W> | ^h ^^ '^._^^(™r «ffafr i. «. I am interested in 
 interest'. Thus : 7-e mm J^rf, it tells mm^. '"tires J>J «ttf^»^;^» . ^^.^^^^ ,,f ^ajus', it 
 .omethin-, it is important to me -^^^'^ /;;;.';. j^^^^ construcioi. became 
 
 is important t<. ,^'«J"^- ^ ^V^"! ^ f .'inu^o^^stJi^c tion was applied to wUre^t which ha. 
 this : aaji reji-rt. ^'^''fy%'f!;.Jf}]\^^^^^^^^^^^ the ablative re was omitted as soon 
 
 rfil^tSl^e ^ril^s^';;: j:S^-;S;:i^ ;^e/;^r!S^l^--as grammatical objects 
 
 of inttrtu'^t. (Obs. 4). ^^ PUB.IECT-CLAU8E8. or (niore rarely) 
 
 OBs. 3. AS srB.,ECTs %;^:!'''^'(^ll^.^^^^^^^ interro^^ative or infinitive clutises, 
 
 SUUJKCT-INFINITIVKS. 1 lie SUblcCl-CiaUftP n _ 
 
 Hostile CUM If* wii" »»v..^ ^„.--.- - 
 worn acauctrt is icv......v^....j — -- :«« oriHi'tioii — i» very — ^" approvable.— ^\ pieatrea 
 
 iimphal processions.- ^Mo «^^Je aii add.t^n _v«ry. pf .^ but.-" to keep 
 
 faith word.— ^^ to sacrifice.— '" to be immineni. «. i^ f, 
 
 apart.- 2« to find out (for me). 
 
274 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 as: Maxlme intn^e^t quemadmoflnm qua'que res nud'n'ihir; it rmk*^9 a vast cliffcronre Iiow 
 a thiti"' i- heard Cic. Hint. '^I. — Q'ti'i rcfert, victnm e-'^se Antoniinn? \Muit diffen-nce 
 niakc<~it ihat \ Ims ht'cii delfated ? Ih. ;'i«l Brut. 1, M.— Interest ominnm recte faceve, II 
 i- ill the iiii.-ivst of all to do riv^ht. lb Kiii. 2, 22.— Mor.- rarely the subject-clause^ of inter- 
 (utt and rer-rt take the lorm of That-clauscs with '//, ne, qmU, •)r the form of a M-clan>e. 
 FrcninMitlv ill plMce of snbjcet-chuisf!*, the lu-uters t»ini:ular of the determinative It.rni- 
 adjel tiws (hoc. ilbid, id. qmd) are n«c(l (Ex. 1. S. 9. 14. IS. 19 : s.-e § 491, R. 95). Fur the 
 particulars of the con-tructious of interest and V'-fert, see p. G21 foil. 
 
 Ob- 4 The quantir y or degkke of the interest is expressed eitlier by the qua vtitativb 
 Fou.>i-Ai».rK(riVKS, or by tiie advkubs ok intensity (p. 2r>l), or by the neuters sin<^ilar 
 of some DETEK.MiNATiVES of the inteiTO^'utive and indeflnite lorms (quid, aliquid, nikU). 
 
 The Qiv^NTiTATivE AD-lKCTivEs take either {u) the form in wm, accordin-.; to the rules 
 on the n-lation of intensity (R. 31), as Quantum interest {rf/€rt),\\\\tiX a i?reai ditleience 
 doe< it m.ike, how important is it i\\x. 4. 5 G.) ; taniuni interest, so import'int is it ; jhh- 
 rimum interest, it is of the greatest importance, etc.— Or they are (/» conceived as cl«-^'ree«i 
 of AiTKEciATioN, takini,' the tjeiiitive form accordinjr to the rule § 5GI. In this instance 
 these adjectives (qxanfi, fanti, multi, plunmi) are subject to the same r.strictn)iis as when 
 they are us<-d as objects of the verl)s of ' esteemiiii;', as Pennwjnl fUP<tru interest te 
 esse RonuE, it is of the hijrhest importance for us that you should be at Home. Cic. .\tt. 
 2 ii3 — Jllud narri refert mx^ rectiqalia awimi po^fea victoria recuperdn'. It is ot little 
 consequence (it makes little ditlereiice) tliat we afterw:inls recover the lost revenue by 
 victory. Cic Man. 7, 18.— Quan/i id reftrt A tamen accidit / What diilereiice does it make, 
 if it vei happens? Cic. Fain. 5. 9, l.(See Ex. 7-12.) , .. , . „ .-o 
 
 The ADVEKBs OP INTENSITY lake all the ditTerent forms detailed in § H-jS, as quantojiere 
 intere4. how ijreatly impoiiant is it ; maqnopere reftrt ; nun tarn interest quain ; fnaqis, 
 niinime. maxit/ie interest, {i^ce Ex. Vi-\'i.) ,.„ . , . ^ u i ^ * / 
 
 If the nel:ter detkuminativks arc used to qualify the verbs interest and reftrt (a case 
 which must be well distinu'iiished from the instance that the neuters hoc, illiid, quod are 
 imper-oi al sitb-ikct-», we ;,'enerally render such phrases hy the noi'ns 'importance', 
 ' consequence'. ' dirtereiice'. Tiiese combinations are very fretjuent with reftrt, but ex- 
 tremely rare with i/J^^m< as : Quid id vud refert f What diflereiice makes it for me? 
 IMaiit Cure :i 'IT).— Si neriu.^ est numquid reftrt / If he is a slave, makes it any ilitlerence? 
 Plant! Pseud.'s. 4. 28. (Ex. 18. 20. 21. 2 !J— Ilefert with nUiU or non is rendered ' it makes no 
 ditleience' or 'it is of no cctnsequencc!', or 'it i< unimportant', 'it concerns iioi', as: 
 '' Mea quidem istuc nihil reft-rr, that coiuerns me not (or 'it is of no consequence,' etc. to 
 me). I'laut. Pers.4,3. G8. See Ex. 18. 21.22. , . . ,., 
 
 The personal construction with substantives as subjects of r«;/V''^ and interest is ex- 
 tremely rare and mostly non-( las>ical. as Ijonqitudo in. his refert. non crassitudo, the 
 leng.h is thi; important point in this, not the thickness. Plin. II. N. 18,31. 74. 
 
 Obs. 5. The person or tiuno (always conceived as a person) that is interested in an 
 action, IS placed in the cjenitive. Itiit if the interested person is expres<e(l bya per- 
 soi 
 
 ional pronoun, tlie lat'er t ikes the form of a tosskssive KouM-AnjKCTivE in theal)Ialive 
 lingular fenii nine (nieCi. tuil. sua, nostra, re<trd : but i/rius, ipsorum, cnjus. cnjusquarn, Gaji, 
 ."eijfuttliciv iiU'.). When the genitive of siib-tantives is required, ilie verb interest is far 
 more frequent than refer', which is very rarely consinied with the irenitivc of substan- 
 tives, but very often with al)lative posse.-*sives. In English these forms of the • inerested 
 person' are expressed either personally by subject-nominatives, or by the ciiuivalents of 
 the DATivK as the proper case of the ' iiueresled person' (§ 474. U. 47, § 4('y,> ; as : Magni 
 interest med una nos esse, it is of great importance (great interest) to t/ie that we should 
 meet, Cic. Wt 13,4. — Magis nul/'ius interest quam tud. non impOni cervicibus tiiis onus 
 sub quo concidas, it is to nobody oi so great importance as to yourself, that no biirdt'ii 
 should be placed on y(Mir shoulders (literally ' neck') under which you wt)uld sink. J.iv. 24, 
 8.— Semper ille qu intuin interessot Vlodii se perlie cogitilbat, he always thought of how 
 great importance it was for Clodius that he should perish. Cic. Mil. 21, 5t). 
 
 larians have taken verv difleienl views. 1 he older grammarians luosily explained tnea, 
 (U etc. as neuter accusative plurals (not considering the long quantity of the liual «and 
 le length of the syllable re in r?fert). Others (lor insl. Ziimpt and Kiihner) supply causd. 
 [advig thiiik< that tned is an adverb with the force 'in my direction'. But old Prisciau 
 
 great im[)orl , . 
 
 The origin of this con-truclion is the one explained in ons. 2, although some gram- 
 marians liave taken very difleienl views. The older grammarians mosilv explained men, 
 tua 
 tht 
 
 Mad\., - 
 
 explains refert by in re medftrt, and he is unquestionably right 
 
 Obs. 6. The thing which is concerned in the action BEsinKsor in n.ACR of the person is 
 sometimes added by means of the jireposition ad. as Magni ad honureni nostrum, inter- 
 est (inst. of honoris na^'ri) nie quam primum ad urt)em re/nre. it is of «rreat consequence 
 to my honor that I should come as soon as possible to town. Cic. Fam. l»i, 1. The da- 
 tive of the interested person as object of these verbs o.-curs in the only passage of Ilor. 
 Sat. 1, 1, 4'.>: Die quid referat intra Katurce finis riventi (some reading vivenlis) j ugcra 
 
 REL.'^TION OF WEIGHT. 
 
 27 
 
 o 
 
 centum an mWe aret ? Say what matters it to one living within Nature's bounds whether 
 he ploughs a hundred acres or a thousand? 
 
 1 Kni.toMrum "enera mnlta esse non ignOras, sed unum illud ccrtissimum cujus 
 1. bpi^tojarum -r*^ ' „v' ,.,:Ar»< (nr<.r.-mim -i sentis si cniid esset qmd eos scire 
 
 causa inventa res ipsa (^st, 't <--e"Ore> la' < run us a ^V"ij^ .S putat intei'me se, re 
 aut notrd aut ipsvrum ^>^\^''^fi-J'^:.^^ 
 
 ^'T'.n V^^I^mS^^ clc iS I'S- 4. q^ant^^kp^ili^i.^^uH C^saiem potius 
 ; /-^. m im \i to niiim r'i icipei . tantum (reipul)liae) retulisset AaZ>?r^.Bru turn quam 
 i^''^' if^?, Veil ' 72 - 5 O^^^^^^^ loco quanfum salutis co?nmunif intersit dms 
 
 Sali.mwn a mid te p id <^ bftQras, malui fkcere quod metis familiaris ta^di suatnte. 
 
 rr hrnm * oeras^^ Plant. Pseud. 1, 1. 100.- 13. Ciesar iJiviuacui . uu^^r. ,/.„.,m^ ,w . .>.. 
 tervis I Refert enim maqnoopere id ipsum. Cic. del. 23. oi.- U. Cesar diceic , oie )ai. 
 
 I :,. -a 1T m TheonJir islUS moriens jueu^a^fc iiaiui«iii v..v,..>.. ^ 
 
 ::i-j^:icf^n'^^ri^ ifiii^run- quorum i^ni^^if^^^^^ ^^}f;^ s^ ;^5; 
 
 me inferfui<set, e:dguam vnatn dedisset Cic lusc 3^8 - 9^ '^r ^c. Itt.' 
 
 s'- VonVjri ? a^r inaitos libr<?s, se.l quam botios h'.^'^fas Seii E|x 4.. - 23. bcio. si 
 qrd;h^,n^a intersit, tibi inajr.ri cune solere esse quam mihi. Cic. Att. 12, 3(. 
 
 3. Relation of Weight. 
 
 ^ 562 The rdiitioii of quautity in regard to weight is expressed by the 
 measure-units of weight with attributive cardinals in the accusative-, as : 
 Cyathus iiendet drachmas decern, a cyathus weighs ten drachmae. Plin. il. 
 N 'H ''OO Indefinite weight is expressed by the quantitative forni-adjec- 
 tivw (ll 31) in the accus.^tive neuter form, as : Plumbum tantuiuUm 
 nendere par est, lead siiould weighju.^^^^ much, Lucr. 1, 3G0. 
 
 OBS. 1. The standard of Roman -'i.M was the pocnd (^^^^^f.^rVtll Va" ''^^^^^^^ 
 
 /i/>m, taking the form of an y;; .^^^ '"=\ ! [^'Xar.^ ^ *« 
 
 ^^;;:;tS^:x;^4S\.y^XS^ l^e^^K'p^ is --« (ounce). 
 
 OBS 2 The NEUTEU verb to weigh is expressed ei ther by the neuter verb ; >..^erg*jor 
 
 -VX^r;,,,, ,,aet in suffraqu> J'-^^J^^^ 
 
 the greatest prosperity.- ' a^semb e.- * ;>o/ r -.\ '.^jj^red as a 
 
 P,»llux\- ^ V"'"'^ and quanfi are together '"'i^f;-; ' ^ ,:'?" {..(.'^^^^^^^^ relative forin.- 
 mere conjunction of comparison, and quanti as a ^"'" V^' fj'^^,",'^^'"; to nlace - « v^s 
 
 die-ere, to dispense justiee - i»i\>f '''^'. >• ,.„ cm to P'-ove.- 13 rain.- i^ critjnnn, a 
 vest someb.)dy with somethiiig.-i^ W bat you ^'aim 'O pim _ ^^ crow.- 
 
 the transitive verb pendere as the word expressing the idea to have wei^ni 
 
276 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 RELATION OF CAUSE. 
 
 277 
 
 by f^ne, both takincr the object (lonntinj; the weight in the arcnpativc cn?e, ns : As ercA 
 lihram j/ondo, tlit- a;? woiuhcd :i pound (uas a pound in weiLMili. Varro L. L. 5, 36.— /rui 
 o-ibnita Mf, pondo quincunceni, the quantity ol" sifted *Irif*' .««hould weij^h a pound and 
 ftvf twell'th!». Col. 12. 28. — Quut pondo tecetuies tise, how many pounds do you think you 
 weii;li ? riuut. Asin. 2, 2, 35. 
 
 Obs. 3 The numeral cxpieffsions hy which weiffhts are determined are added in the ac- 
 crsATivE Cask to jMVido, l)ciiif? the adverbial object of the idea 'iiYir//ii/iof\ w hich is never 
 cx'iressed hy an adjective, or In' a p.irticiple (as in Engli.xh). Ttiis aceusiative al.xo cor- 
 responds to our KiiL'li-h ol)jective alter 'of, indicatin.,' the weiL'ht. a» : Patene aurete 
 fuCnint CCLXXV'l iibra< fere omne» pcndo, there were 2Ti» f^ojden bowl;» iveifffiinq all 
 exactly o//>! pound (all a pound in weight, all of a pound). Liv. -Jfi, 47.— Dictator corO- 
 nam aureani. lihram pondu, in Capitolio Jovi donum po.-uit, the dictator plHced a golden 
 crown, one pound in weight, (of one pound) in the Capitol a? an otfering to Jupiter. Liv, 
 4, 20.— Fnnn libra U formed ihe adjective librCilis, ^\Gm,i'm^ 'one pound in weijjht', as 
 lH,ra ([)i'ar>i) libra/ia. Plin. H. N. 15, 11.— '7V> be of weirihf , in a figurative sense, is ex- 
 pressed by the qualitative genitive />OAj(i<'ri< esue, or by vallre with a neuter qmintitative: 
 Tmtlittt'nt nuu-imi tutnt apud me inrndtris. Cic. Fam. 2, 1«. iio jK}ndU{< habere, lb 3 1* 
 j)liif< and tantum ralere, li). 3, 7; Off. 3, 31. " ' ' 
 
 1. Drachma' .Attica" denarii ar<jrentei' Imbet pondus, eademque cex obolos* nondere 
 cfflcit* ; ob<»lus decern chalcos^ p-ndef, Plin. II. N. 21, 109.— 2. Mna^.iiuam iio>ti{ minam 
 \ocH.ut,pend(t drarhmas .\tticMs centum. lb.— 3. In Transpadflnjl»* Italift scit), vicunas 
 qtdnax librae, larris» modios ;>f/<(/?r«' ; circa Cinsiuin et sena^. lb. IS. 12. 2.— 4. Invenl- 
 miis tiiuunor''" tahnta qitindecim pept'ndi.^xe. lb. '.♦, 17. — .*). Fi^tulasn denum pedum lon- 
 gitudinis esse le:;itiiuuui est'-, et. si quiiiariie'* ^n\\\X,sti'agtn.a i)ondu jundZre ; si octo- 
 nariie, centena ; si denaria\ cnf^na rir?na. lb. 31, 31.— •>. Exercitus Minucio corAnam 
 auream libranijX)ndo dvcrCs it . Ijv. 3, 29, 3. — 7. \'iuctii>i centum jx/ndo es, qnaudo pe/ide^^* 
 per (on) pedes. Plant. Asin. 2, 2, 35. 
 
 fJ^" (lENEIlAL ReM.VKKS ON' THE OUAMMATK'Al. FOIiMS USE» I\ THE RELATIONS OF 
 
 Measuremknt, VVkight, and ("oMi'iTTATioN.— The most «reneral forn» by which tlie En- 
 giisl» language desiLrnates all these relation^, and di»tiniruishes them from each other are 
 ad.iectives (participle>) and vkubs to which the numeral ex()res~ions of mea>urement, 
 weiurht and computation an- added as ol)jects in tln^ form of the objective casi>. As to tiie 
 use of adjective and participial expressions, the two languages are analogous in the meas- 
 urement of SPACE and time, but they ditVer in the other relations. 
 
 (a) In si'ACK tilt! adjective expressions used in both laiii^uages to designate measurement, 
 aside from minor diversities, a;e almost the same (§ 4i»8 and K. 103). The general verb 
 ' /o 7nea<ure'' (in a neuter sense), under which ail the dift'erent kinds of measurement in 
 space are comprised, is in Latin expressed by the verb pa'cre. which, in this sen-e. is con- 
 strued with an Acri:s.\TiVE, corresponding to the English objective, a.s : ^-Estimilbat 
 (/uid in fronte pattrent lapides ^inLruli, he estimated what the single stones viea*tured in 
 front. Liv. 25. 23. Seh(enus t/nadntginta s/adia paftt, the .«chnMiu< (a Persian measure of 
 distance) meaxnrfix fortij stadia. Plin. II. N. 12. 'JO, 2. — IIujiis silva> latitndo iiovem diCruin 
 ittrpatet, the width of this forest nia<urts nine days' journeys. C;es. H. Ci. ♦>. '2.'). 
 
 (b) In the relation of time the Enirli^h language; de-»iginiies by aiuectives the age, but 
 no other spaces of time. The Latin laniruage agrees in this respect with the English (§ 49s), 
 except that in respect to the a^^e of thinos or animals the English 'old' is neither ex- 
 
 Inessed by natus. nor by arj^ns,X)\xt either by a genitive, or by an n u m (an nox) htibiie , as : 
 jUcus LucTnus nunc circiter ^i//«'///i (/'tadrin(/t >df.-<i/num qitiiKpiafjeaimurn hafM:t,\.\\Ki Lu- 
 cinian grove is now about 450 years old, Plin. IH, 8.5. 
 
 (r) In the relation of nucE and valite the Latin language has no adjective correspond- 
 ing to our adjective ' ^wr//r. The expression 'worth sucfi a price' is variously para- 
 phrased according to the connection (II. 3*2, obs. 4). 
 
 a strange error, caused by the passaL'e of Lucretius cited above. Tt is certain that in 
 this passage the word pendere has a short penult, and hence i^ of the third conjiiiration, 
 belongiuij to pendo, not to pfndeo. But since jyendh'e always denotes ' to weii;h a thing', 
 in an active sense, it i.s obvious that Lucretius, by a frequent poetical license, for the 
 sake of the metrum, has used the active verb in a neuter sense. There is no other pas- 
 sage in any author in \\\\'n:h. pendere is used in the neuter sense 'to have weight'. The 
 passages of Pliny in \\\\\ch. pend?re and p^pendh^ffe occur in the infinitive form (Plin. 18, 
 12, 3; 9, 17: 31, 31) must hi; assigned to peudere. and not to ]}eitdpre. 
 
 • A dracluna nrdntcttm, a small Greek silver-coin, which is still u<ed in modern Greece. 
 — ^ Attic. — 3 silver (adj.). — * an ol)ole, a Greek copper-coin.— * to contain.— • the chal- 
 cus, (copper), the smallest Greek coin. — '' a Greek word (Mna\— * Transpadane. i. e. 
 beyond the Padus (the river Po).—» /ar, rye.— i" a tunny-fish.- »' lead nipes.— >3 lerjiti- 
 mum est esse, they should be (literally: it is legitimate that they shoula be).— '• quina- 
 rias, octondrius, dfinarins, measuring five, eight, ten digits in circumference, — ^* pendi^ri 
 is here ' to be weighed', not ' to hang'. See Lum))in. to this passage. 
 
 i 
 
 (d) In the relation of weight the phrase ' weighing 8vch an ammmV ie expressed by the 
 indeclinable ]X)ndo{\n weight) with an accusative, or by a mere accusative (§ 5t-2, obs. 3 ) 
 
 (e) In ' rompufafion' the Latin languai:e. like the English, lacks specific grammatical 
 forms. Our phrase ' so many men etc. strong" is not expressed i)y an adjective, but by the 
 ablative nmn-ro (or ad num^.riim) in connection with a L^enitive. as : Cum Y^crt^ac rnille 
 ^?/7;i^;T> 7Jaf'»;/Klassein ad Delum appiilissent, when the Perrians had landed at Delos 
 a fleet one thousand sails strong (in miinber). Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 18. See Caes. B. G. 1, 15. 
 
 D. Relation of Cause. 
 
 ^ 563. The relation of cause is of three different kinds. It may be 
 conceived : 1) as the means and instrument of an action ; 2) as the fact 
 which effects an action (cause efficient as real cause, and motive as 
 moral cause); 8) as purpose. To each of these subdivisions of cause 
 different grammatical forms are applied. 
 
 § 564. If the relation of cause is conceived as the means and instru- 
 ment of an action, it is expressed either by the ablative case of the noun 
 represented as means and instrument, or by tl»e preposition per. 
 
 Rem. 37. Both, the ablative of mwms, and the preposition per are rendered 
 
 by the Englisih preposition ' by' ; but sometimes by other prepositions 
 
 {uith, (It, on, from). In the passive voice the ablative of meaiis h:is the 
 
 ai'>peariince()f a passive aizent, as doloaUquem clrcumrernre, to circumvent 
 
 some one by treachery ; dolo circa mvenlri, to be circumvented by treachery. 
 
 Per is used with the stime force, as : 
 
 liubrium per rim dedfici impenlvit, he ordered Rubrins to be taken np by force. Cic. V err. 
 
 2, 1, '2.').— Cum in eas urbis ri invasisses, when you had invaded these cities byjorce. lb. 2«>. 
 
 Or*" 1 The ablative of means has a wider range than the preposition 'by' in En- 
 <dish It borders at the one side (ui the relati(m of 'manner', and at the other side, 
 pas-es over into the relation of 'cause efticient' an«l 'motive'. (Compare the Examples 
 given § fvM OBS ;i.) Thus i^eitibu^ ire (ferric, to walk on foot : cmm vehi (but also with 
 t« Cic. Phil. -2. 21. 5S), to ride in a carriaire (by wairon). as Irretigids'im ratus est. sacer- 
 dSfem wdihus ire ft-rrlrpw, ac se in rehiculo conxpici, he deemed it irreliL'ious that a pnest 
 should walk (and niovet on fb<»t. while he himself was seen in a carriage. Liv. 5,40— V\ e 
 gav ' to be astonished at a thinir', or ' to be astonished becaus^e', conceiving this phrase 
 either as a metaphor of place or as ' cause efiicient'. Th- Latin conceives the thing at 
 which one is asttmished as the • instrament' of the ast(mishment. using an ablative of 
 MEANS- Oh^tupnit homini'i irnprvhi dicto. he was astounded at -the words of the wicked 
 man cic Verr '2, 1, 2t>. The mohal «uorNO of an action, which Is in EnLMish expressed 
 by 'for' IS in Latin conceived as an ikstki'MENt of the action, and placed in the ablative, 
 as- 'I'hiiippns Demetrium filium mdlo alio ctimine quam Komfliup amicitia^ initteoccldit, 
 Philip killed his scm Demetrius for r.o other crime than that of havinir joined Inend- 
 8hip with the Komans. Liv. 41,'2:^. Thus the ablative of means touches the relation 
 of cause as 'a motive', where we use the preposition ' fnnn or 'out ol , as : Pranor ira 
 provincite sibi erepta« ma-istiatn se abdicatams erat. the prietor was about to resign his 
 office fwm {out of ) auger X\\Ai the province liad been taken from hmi. Liv. 3., 51. Here 
 belongs the relation represented by ' according to', which in Latin is expressed Dy ad or 
 ex but al-^o bv the men; ablative, as r>>/>i/«i()«e w^'7, according to (in) my opinion.— J lUl ices 
 dedit nulla Uge, nuUo institnto, nnlUT sorte. he appointed the judges according to no law 
 and prtctdt/if, without castiuir lots for them. Cic. Verr. 2, '2, W. 
 
 Obs 2 The exact limits of this 'ablative of means and instrument' cannot be reduced 
 to a rule and in this respect the ablative case shares the cliaracter of most prepositions, 
 the limits of which cannot be exactly defined by distinct marks and theoretical reason- 
 ino- But it is evident that the idea oY ' means and instrumentality' is the leading con- 
 ception out of which all theee difterent shades and varieties ot/ cause must ne ex- 
 plained. It is a remarkable argument for the correctness of this view that m almost all 
 the instances in which an ablative of means is used to express what we generally 
 conceive to be ' cause enicient' or ' motive', the preposition j)€r (hkewise denoting means) 
 may take the place of the ablative, as : Si natiiraiis essetira. quomodo quemquam poem- 
 t(5ret quod fecisset »«r iram? if anger were natural, how could anyone feel corapunction 
 at what he has done out of anger. ^ Cic. Tusc. 4, SI. -Per metum potius quam voluntate 
 
278 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 civinm fortanis consnluSrunt patre^ the I^atrida1.s consuljo.l 'i^'-.^^^e inte^^^^^^^ 
 
 CONVKNT.ONAM.Y HU ACT.VK MKAN.NO ( bv r '''<-' ^'/'FJ^; J ' 1,^^ lotilak^^^^^^ 
 
 WC enplov our diirerent ca.isjil P'-^T'»^'"''"'-, . V" \VhJ /; , m^^^^^^^^^ 
 nectio;lurdi^.H.r..an;tljetwopo;m 
 
 correctnesso aj: Y )'/ ;.^ ,^^^^^^^ ti.e ferce of the preposition ;>roy;/^/^ in 
 
 given above, ti.e ; '^ ^n ' "u^^^^^^^^^^^^ of tlu' more definite preposition*» would be 
 
 <w» ^1 Th,. rcl'.fion of means anil Insirum.Mitality amnnt be expresi-cil bv form-nd- 
 vcH?^no, Sine,'; V y bral,|iUive.Unb,,,l..tc.f..r.n;a,Oc.Mi 
 
 u,i..ih 'I'.m J .'iviii''tne inteiTo-'ative iinn^ tiir tlie innic-ipul aUM rnui ici.nntii>. luu 
 
 ^ cusUkUhs ho.l!.nu fallebant, ^/../W.y tUey deceived the posts ot the enemy. L.v. ii U. 
 Or^ 4 If tlie means or instrument of an action is expressed by a whole sentence the 
 La?iT<4uMa ly i^ses he tor.n of a «.uini.ia.. ablativk (§ 5-29) [more rare y f e «onii of 
 HhU-^saS^ li. '^ir.J.and someli.nes the form ol a .U-peudent c la Use in- 
 
 tSc^Ml bv S »>v the absolute n.-uterfo (of io. as : CaptTv. lidem eo 
 
 max me an x^r^^^^^^ inter ouinTs c.n^MuChat. the prisoners n.creased the relmnce 
 
 Xee ID n U e m chietly bt/ (he fad, that the reports ..f ail a-reed (by a-reem- in the.r 
 ?eD ms L V 9^4^^^^^^^^ sauie ablative to with a eiau.e intro, ured by <iuod -r 9/'"^ [re- 
 n^entlv denote"* 'cau^e efficieiit^ or ' motive', as : Helvetii h, u. e. ea eausjl) .piod re h-u- 
 ?, Si^a i terdildi p^ it^r converterunt. tl»e llelvc-t.ans tnrm-d Lea- 
 
 rn h /V //l^mii/i /^^^ (because) Ih.-y trusted that the Konu.ns nn-lil be cut oil t mm 
 Ih. ir KM nlies Serii O 1 2:3 -Tiic ablative eo as ablative t>f means, must be d.stin- 
 Ju she ' fronV'^o denoiin/^^ (§ 5G(i), which is followed bv " ^'""f^ ;^;;t ' '^'^^ 
 
 ?)fromU as ablative ol DiFFEUENCt: belore a comparac.ve, which is followed by a clauso. 
 with ^^/0 (751). See p. G54. . , 
 
 1 Siculi talem ncccperant injuriam quam nulla lege satis dicrni perscqui» pos«ent 
 Cic Ve r 2 1 S-2 Tuapudexteras /ntiOnes i.uperii n<.mini.que nostr. hin.am ./i.- 
 ^ri^/V'^ /?« Jk'/^ /« vi<.lasti lb.- 3. Ciesar dixit, Ariovistum (Jallos nx,vs\^ rationed el 
 J"^^.}: .-^^^" J %f\iU'. r'.,w R (t 1 40 — 4 Heracl us. pecuniosissimus» antea 
 ^::^:ZZ^ n^n^^S^^^^ X^M-ris «..n-i/^^a.que injuria pauper- 
 
 l^mirelt C^^^^ 2 14.- 5. ('ircumsessus« est Verres a Lampsacen.s^ liomini: 
 
 conditioned sociis,/ar//7/t(2'» ^ervis, tvV.//^(a/.Y suppl.ci .u- lb. 2, V./^tiduV^. unt i^i 
 litea .Myndo MilGtum pedib us reverti jussit. lb. 2, 1, 34.- 7. In culpa Hint qui 
 
 1 To prosecute.- » prohrnm. a dis-raceful act.- 3 method^- * ^V.nh^^r^v^bv 'lli^ir no- 
 cutn^edei-e to besie^^e — Mnbabitants of Lampsacus.— » also. furth« r.— » by their po 
 mcii condition -'»0 by their misfortune,/or/.7na beinj, "-\d "^ "^J^.^^J" "^ ^/.^^^^^^^^^ 
 both a fortunate and an unfortunate sense - " as to their ^^"^> '^- ^^ h. fmlt 
 may all be rendered by 'as to'.- >'^ in culpa, esse, to be blamable, to be in fault. 
 
 RELATION OF CAUSE. 
 
 279 
 
 officla de«erun1i mollind^ animi. Cic. Fin. 1, 10. ai- 8. OratOrnm ant in/m7|/» 
 omcia °^'^^}^"\.'\.-j „rima<* in causis» agSbat Ilortensius. Cic. Brut. 90, 308. 
 aut ^//^^•:^;^* f ' f./if .%^;;;?\^on tam tegni qt.ara regis vitii^ repudiatum« e.t. Cic. 
 To?/ ^^'f'n - 10 Ob hfe" I'e.Scia guifL ilii homines obstupescuut, nuUos honOres 
 mihi nisi verbOrum decerni muo. Cic Att. &, ^i, i. 
 
 ^ 565 Tlie relation of cause efficient and of motive is expressed 
 1) by attributive phrases consisting of tlie general nouns denoting cause, 
 e^lM'cially caum and ratio (sometimes rex), which are either placed in the 
 ablative, or take a prepositional form, chiefly with de and ob, sometimes 
 with ex and propter; 2) by the pkepositions propter and ob in direct con- 
 nection with the substantive represented as the cause, without any mter- 
 mediate noun, such as causa or ratio ; 3) by substituting a mere ablative 
 ■ of the noun in place oi propter and ob ; 4) by the foum-adverbs of cause, 
 as cur idco etc. ; 5) by clauses or sentences introduced by one of the 
 causal' conjunctions (i^ 385. 386 and B. VI.) ; 6) by accessory predicates m 
 form of certain participles {inductus, adductus, permoius etc. § 501, R. 115). 
 Jlem 38 The ablative causa is thus used 1) in connection with at- 
 TUini^^TivE GENITIVES either of nouns (§ 437, R. 43) or of gei'undials (^ o26, 
 R 4o OBS 3), as C(^sa?^isciiusd, for the sake (on account) of Caesar ;7i^;i(ym 
 i^*;^ out of respect ; purjnandi caum, for the sake of fighting. For the 
 SiV miLz tl!e abhui/e gratia is, in this connection, frequently used 
 ns a svnonvm — 2) with attributive adjectives, either descriptive or 
 form-adieclives, as 7ned causa, on my nccouni; probabiU mj/f«, from a 
 laus b e reas(, I ; fdiena cwisd, for the sake of others. In this connec- 
 tion S cannot be used in place of causa, except in connection with 
 
 ^^*n=r5^ The ablative of caum or ^m/ia with an attributive genitive or an attributive 
 
 ^^ • ?-J„i^^r w. is the ost -enn form for 'cause efficient' and for 'motive.' 
 
 possessive ^'^'^^^^I'^J^J^^'^'^^^^^ cause is conceived as a person in 
 
 ita iiiicxu ii.iiiiiii ut '^"' ;" . , Thiis fTn-vin iedrum) cau^a. lor their sake, bome- 
 as to undergo dangers »" /'^^ f ^*- and seem Tuems assuine the genitive forms of 
 
 genitive attdlmtcf H is Inte-classical and poetical, but is also u.ed (even classically) m 
 the language of the law. (p. 114, 98) , . a e^,^ 
 
 Snn'of c«S wfthLnnd-'^me f^/m"^ nsual (/.a. c/. ca«.a .• ob quam causam ; but 
 nuUd alia causa ; mullis de causu^, not jnultis causis. 
 
 Item 39. The prepositional form of causa, as exponent of the rehition 
 of causcremeieiit a nd motive (genera ll y with de or ob) is confined to ad- 
 
 ^prnnas agere, suppl> pariis. primaiuy "=^" , nnendia in uleadin''- causes, i. e. as 
 
280 
 
 RELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 RELATION OF CAUSE. 
 
 281 
 
 jective attributes which do not belons^ to tlic possessives, but hardlr ever 
 occurs with attributive genitives. It^ is as unusual to say oh cama>n Qaji 
 in place ot Gajt causa, as graci causa (for an iinportanfreason) in place of 
 graDi, de causa or ob gravem causam. 
 
 Obs. 1. Per with causam and an attributive «renitive means ' ?/rt-*«r the nreUrtof a« 
 per ca>,sam equifatv,. coqemU, under the pretext Of (Iraltin.- c"nal, Ca- if f; f '^^^^ \n 
 a certain meaninnrj>w/>/«r is connected with ratio and an attrilmtivctrenitive a^wTvi». 
 ter ratwnem brtvitdiv^, from a uegar» for brevity. Cic. y^'J'^ ^^'';•'•4'^'/^^fe^"'t'v^'"*i''^f>?>- 
 ♦..?.^!l; ^" '?o™'^li!"<'* re* with pn^positions or in the ablative U iised in plaoe of cau.<a in 
 
 f:;i;ir=5dv^ro?U!;r(ii:tr'""^ ^^"«^^ ""^^ ..«/.<^...oa{L ^.^:^z 
 
 n^'m. 40. The form-adveiibs employed to express the relation of 'cause 
 emcient and 'motive' are: 1) I.NTEKuoo.vrrvii and iielative foums • 
 Lur, why; quubu, wliy not; quare, quamobrcm, whv, wiierefore, for what 
 reason {quapropter in this meaning being anteclassical).— 2) Drfimtk 
 form: eo, uleo, iccirco (or idcirco), propterea, tlierefore. Causal form-ad- 
 verbs ot the indefinite form do not exist. In their place plirases with 
 causa {m the singular or plural) are used, as inultis ils causls. In place of 
 cur, the neuter adjective quid is frequently used in the meaning ' whi/'. 
 
 th??.r2'^S',?^''^-^' fi:erierally ennmerated amon- the adverbs of caitsk. is a compoiiiul of 
 the prepoMtmn circa with the third locative ca^e quo (p. 217. Obs. 8). havin-the mLinin.- of 
 circa quod i e. in which respect. Hence it does not properly belon- to the relation of 
 
 and car u.ak.nij: u very improlmble that the one slu.uld be a corruption of he other* ami 
 the MKAMNo ol (w- excluding its derivation from on rei, which even in its lorin w.m d 
 have no aualo-y. Cur is unquestionably a wor.l wh.ch reaches up xo . he very ear est 
 peruHls ot lan-ua-e. It distinctly shows the iuterro^-ative r-.ot c> in itr„r ,,Lrv lorm 
 Ijke c;//vi), the letter rbeiMir.nost likely a (\,riaative sound, which ..ecu suth^s^^^^^^ 
 nitication in ttieco-nate lan-ua-es ^he r in the En-lish ' where', bein- of the Jame ori'nn). 
 
 *yP^^' •'^•.J'\^"f«^'Ji'*fi(:al l-}"'-?'iiU'e the old ablative qui (see R. 15. oes. 2) wa.s used with 
 the si-mftcation ' why' a>laut. Ba<-ch. 5. 2, 4:». The neuter quid frequently km- r" n 
 
 W hy do I ar-ue ? w hy do I discuss th(f matter y Cic. Mil. l(i. It is ^,;rv freuueuilv used 
 in connection with ../an, the conjuncti.m qml (sometimes with 7' a /UrVm i^^ 
 
 renipute,'^ te tuamadpam commxiaclre aim nlttro />asvst'/ Why (literally «hat iTii 
 that) do you accuse oti.ersy Why (li.erally : what is 'it fo which re io, do you tlmik 
 you can make another share your ;^'uilt t cic. Verr. 2, 2, 20. 
 
 Obs 4. Anion- the causal form-adverbs of the iuterro-ative form, rvrand mitd are the 
 most frequent hav.nn: the most -eueral character, q^ire u^uallv a^ks "or it e r^^ i-o s 
 which \i-<i,\(^ deter mined An action, and qmnmhrrm more -eueraliy ivfer^ to m .tivk or im'h 
 pose; as :q>,nre pri.num il'ea.lesseu..luit ? <leind.- tu rvr .indices alios soriitus es " Wl^i 
 111 the nrst i.hice. reiused that man to be present y and a-aiu. wh,, did voii <lraw (bv Ion 
 o her judges V c'ic. V err. 2 2. \^.~ q.uunofnem een-n.-es ad statiiam tihi confer^ i t* 
 TUy Old the censors contribute for thy statue y n,. 2. 2,.55.-If the int-rr..i:ali( is ," i'. 
 tue, three torms are used : Q^in (instead of qm >m„), qui ini, r>,r noo. coPrespondin'-to 
 qui. quid, and o/r, (qiiare and quumohrem b.in- rarelv used with ne-ation-) o!iin whv 
 not) does not really ask fora reason, but implies that a future action kould be p.rformed. 
 
 )V,^^i /" '""^ our horses? (=Consceudamu.^ eq>,o.<.) Liv. 1. sf. See pp. .'>4.; an.l 51T 
 UBS. n. turnou asks for the reason of a present or past not-doinji: Qm x„ut tn -" cur 
 
 \\hj did y<.u not enter stramhrwaysy Ter. Eun. l.^.l.-Qmdid (always with the -ub 
 
 te,'«rVlI w^Jh ''^'^'''''''^•''^'•''', ""^'/''•"«^"y contains an emphatic affikmatio.v, 
 ^«r,"l, ri •' ^'t'"'".t a predicate (= Why notf). It {,'enerally refers to the speaker's 
 ?^ r.r 0' £"'^v* '"rVr'^'« K Why Bhould I not remember ? {i'e. I certainly reinember)! 
 CIC. ur.2 W). bee. for the derivation and nature of this adverb, p. 7(ks, notet. All the 
 causal interroRatives, except quidni (quia only in certain connections; «ee pp. 547. .M8 
 
 1 
 
 -V 
 
 615. 12) are also u?ed in indirect questions and as relatives : Quae qmirn ita sini, cur non 
 arbitrum pro cocio adeqeiis Q. lioscium. qvcero ; I ask, why you did not proceed against 
 Q. it. by an action on account of partnership y Cic. K. Com. \).—lpse ostendit, qxiamobrtin, 
 Carhunem reliqiierit; he himself shows why he left Carbo, Ib.Verr. 2, 1, 13.— II used as 
 relative adverbs, quare etc. trenerally have the otlice of relative adjectives with causal 
 prepositions, referriui,' to caum, ratio, res, as antecedent, and are rendered \forwhich\ 
 'on account o/ which'. See Ex. 18. 19.20. For the particulars of this relative use, see 
 p. 527 (a). 
 
 Ob«» .'>. The demonstrative adverli ^0 (expressing 'cause efficient' or 'motive') is not 
 the same as the local adverb eo of the third locativ.' ca«e (R. .5, No. (e)), but the ablative 
 neuter of i*. Jdeo is a compound of id with eo. Propterea is formed out of the fourth 
 locative case ea with the preposition propter. To these causal adverbs may be added 
 the seconil locative cases hinc and inde, which sometimes are used in a causal sense, m 
 the meaniu" ' hence'. Here belongs also the compound provide, hence, and the words 
 itaque iqiTur, erqo. which have assumed the nature of coordinatinir conjunctions 
 (S3S5)' ilere also belon<r the relatives qvare, qunmobrem, and qvaprapter which are 
 verv frequently employed in the si£fiiiflcati«m of i/ffr/w€. the relatives which f.>rm part 
 of these adverb* havitii? a demonstkativk force, as is frequently the case with all kinds 
 of relatives. With the same iorce qvocirca is sometimes used. 
 
 Obs r. The causal adverbs of the relative and definite (demonstrative) forms, are on 
 the dividin'T line which separates conjunctions atid kki.ativk adjectives from the ad- 
 VFKBs and hence belomr to th(! most interesting; formations of the lan.'uage. The com- 
 mon feature of the causal conjunctions and causal adverbs of the demonstrative and 
 relative forms is that thev all contain a drmonstkativk or relative element which 
 incorporates in them a whole sentence, either precedini? or follow.nfr. ^^ hile thus, as it 
 were either uepeatino or anticipating sentences, they at the same time, by their 
 secoiid CATSM. element, desiuMiate these sentences as causes. Hence this lortn was 
 admirably adapted for • connectin-.^ sentences' with each other. This nature of con- 
 nectives thev especially have when thev are the first words in a new sentence. Those 
 amoii"- them" which are habititally placed thus in the beirinninir of sentences for the 
 purpose of connectiuiz them with the i)recediuir sentence, have by this fact assumed the 
 nature of cotijunciions. beiiiir, as it were. impre<,Miated with the force of causal con- 
 nectives These are itaqne. iqitur. erqo, which are only used as connectives, and hence 
 arc exclusively considenMl as conjunctions. The same natun; have q>iare, qnamot/rem, 
 quapropter. qitocirca, althou-;h these words are not called conjunctions, since they, as 
 iiiterio>'-atives and relatives, retain their adverbial force. As conjunctions they occur 
 in the 7ollowiii<^ sentences : Non tarn facile Caithairinis opes concidissent. nisi bicilia 
 classibus nostrfs j)ateret. <?//«/<? P. .Vfricfinus, Cart hairine delStS, Siculorum urbes pul 
 cherrimis moiiumentis exornilvit : The power of Carthaire had not collapsed so easily 
 had not Sicily been open to our fleets. Therefore P. Afiicanus. after the destruction of 
 Cartha<'-e einbellished the cities of Sicily with the most beautiful monuments. Cic. 
 Verr ''~2 *i— Mihi necessario properandum est. Quamobrem rcliqua attendite: T must 
 nece-ssiri'lv' hunv. T/ierefore attend to the rest. lb. 2. 1. Ifi.— Qfodrca maergre hoc 
 eventu vereor aii nnvis 'invidi sit quain aniTci. Therefore I am afraid lest it be rather a 
 si^n of envy than of friendship, to mourn for this event. Cic. Am. 4, Vi. Nemo istum 
 colnperendinatum sed coudemmltum judicilret. Quapropter oiio, quod ad meattinet, vici ; 
 NohI>dv would think liis case adjourned, but they would consider him condemned. 
 Therefore I have triumphed as far as I am concerned. lb. 2, 1. 8.-Tn all these sentences 
 the a'dverbs quate, quanu)brem.. quapropter. quocirca are virtual conjunctions and may 
 be replaced by itaque ; quapropter 111 the last sentence may be even replaced by ^r^o. 
 Thn^vroinde is generally used with the iorccoi ergo, as: .Ait accusatOies ejus multo 
 majOrem pecuniam pnetol-i pollicCri ; proinde, si saperet, vidCret quid sibi esset^ facien- 
 dum : He says that his accusers were promising the prsetor a far «,'reater sum ; /unce, ir 
 he were wise, he would see what he had to do. Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 29. 
 
 Ob« 7. Eo, idea, iccirco. and propterea are distiu<;uished from quare, qnam^rem. qua- 
 profit-r itaque aud erqo bv the fact that they cannot be used with the force of conjiinc- 
 lion- 'They mav open a sentence the same as quare etc.. but they do not, in this case, 
 CONNECT the precediui? sentence with that sentence of which they are fframmntical mem- 
 ber- as • Trcirco.mdiwa, quia veram causam habCbam. brevi peroiSvi. Iherefore. Ojudses 
 did I plead briefly, because I had a f?ood cause. Cic. Inv. 1. 48.-^0, uleo, iccirco, and 
 nropterea crenerally are in the relation of 'antecedents' to causal clauses introduced 
 lyqnod ox quia (se^- p. 492, Obs. 15 to! 1.; p. i^i. Obs. 3), being rendered ' therefore ', or for 
 tiie reason', the followin<j cimiunction quod or quia l^einu' ti;anslared by that . Often 
 both ifleo (iccirco etc.) and the followimr conjunction are rendered by the simple conjnnc- 
 tioii- because' ; as: Ideo mihi non satisfacio quod nullam partem meritOruni tuOrum 
 conseoui possu n. I am not satisfied with myself /r>r the reason that (or because) I cmnot 
 reach any part of thy merits. Cic. Att. 3, 14.-Filia habitJbat cum x^^ilve propterea quod 
 
 f 
 
282 
 
 DELATIONS OF MODALITY. 
 
 v.rnm non habebat, the dnn-htcr lived with hor father became she had no husband Cic 
 \ .Ml. >, 1, «.).-Ao IS fre.uM-allv placed qfter the causal clause, and sometimes this is also 
 hr c.Hse with the othyr causal adverbs, as : q,url probSre populo Roui;ln.. fide . ve^rim 
 nun p..tuist.s. to vohK j,„lic-an<li potesfas erept i e<t. b.caW y^nx ould iu.r,.r vc to 'm 
 CMe'Ter"'' ' r"r f^V"";'"r"^-/^^V?^'^'"^ the judicial power has been tak.'n from you 
 fv hi^.^ ':i' ' ^•-^"'^'ri"' "' ^^^ "» "'.'** ^^'l'^<', liequently eCi rt with qucnl or ry/z/a is iised 
 In S^ an evidence that eo m tids c.mneetion i. an (Motive, and not the third 
 
 louitue (a.>e] , as: Causatu coi,'iiosci oportet : ea re (|iiidem quod aliter condemiviri reus 
 
 be cSiemnlS: vSt.Ti' IT ''''^' ""''''' '''' ^^^^^' '''''' "'^'^•''"'^^ ^''*^ acci";d Vinnol 
 
 «.iV^o ^' ^*''?^(^''^'^ in ehissieal hin-ua-e. is rarely usetl otherwise than i.i connection 
 Avith a causal clause. Uut, eo, ideo, iccirco occur also without such a (lauV- reR-rriir^^^ 
 
 nH'v^Ht':T"';r '"^'' 'r"'"' '" "^'^ ^"^'^"^^' '""^^ '^« UNDKHsToon ,^ hi n-/ adied o the 
 ndvt^rbsin the lonn of a causal clausio ; as: Afranins et Perrejus aesaPei pr r io 1^^^ 
 cessuut; neq.ie tccirco Ciesar opus interunttit ; Afraniu. and IVtrjuV make attacks o 
 r T i-i '7.';^^*^^''-<l<'*-^»'>ti'lterrnpt \^^^^^ovkfor that reami {on ///a/ mw/'.?) Oes H 
 C. 1 42. Here we must alter ledrco supply tli.- previous sentence in the rorm > o>md nr.l' 
 ho laces.^eb<itur\^ In such connections the adverbs idea etc/irV e rU r l.tert /^^ 
 causal conjunctions ifuqne etc., and thrir equivalents quare. IJut t lere is s il hi< d m r 
 CM.ce between both clas^es of words, that ideo etc. never co//;^^^/ he sin See' but ,^^^^^ 
 he sramniat iciil ofoecfs of the pre.li.^ates in thcdr own sentence, ///i J e c on'the ^ 
 and, «r€ mt members of any of the phrases of the sentence wl.ich tTuVinimdu e I e iic^^ 
 idto etc. express the reason ' for the sake' or 'on account of which the s./.t of tho 
 sentence p.-rforras the action contained in the predicate; while t-v ion wl^^^^^^^^^ ?1 tl 
 inbiec? ^rbrKvni'V""r'n'^' ^"^"'' ^."f'^^'r^^^'O >"uk.s the t««/i.cV/o uT not by fife 
 t '. •". Vf: . . ' ' ''H '^''-'"'' ^'^ ^-^"'P'»"'»^' t-'x' followini: sentence with the one la-t au,- 
 
 ed . 1.1 censu h.-.bendo potestas omnis censOri peimitiitur. Jtaqne po ih < en m ii ix 
 ma cura (ielii^if : ,n mak.n- the cens.K all the power is i.-ft to th • o^so,^ yy/, ";^ " the 
 people elects h.m with the -.vatest care. Cic. Ve.-r. 2, 2, 43. Here itauue ex ..-Js-es h^ 
 a// //or\sM-eason. by which he accounts for the car'e in elecVinV,T("cenw. heice 
 tccirco or Idea would be ..upropcly applied in place of t/ar///^. " I ,, t in h h.., en« e 
 qncued above the reason for the act is represented as that of /he s.ibject; Lt that of the 
 
 Aemf^>^'9-i'^'''o^?^/'"fi "•^"''''' T ^^'{^ntaJionU-i aut q>,mtu^^ camd philosophantur^ Cic 
 Acad. 2 2..- 2. lieneficin... est quod qi.is no., sua cuuhJ dat, se.l J,m- c.i dat Sen Ben 
 
 ^|;.ii^^o::J:;s-;;^:U- 
 
 m.om/^ab.E.,uis/ve//^e<lacie.x urbe le-iOnes jussCre li, o ^4' _u Iwi nM^/r nn T* 
 a.it^..r ilio niodo p.-oro,.ttum est ? c./;.tant<.peie pnSuT nm "sfv Av V iTTfJ^i 
 eir<. nunc Sexti Pompeji testimonium recitem. qui cau<au D nni< e-i i " ^,,^.! ^/1 
 DiGms? qmd Manlii «-t Calen. V Ib.Ve.r 2 2 8 ~\:i (h n^^^^^^^ i ^ "-^ ''"^^^"'* 
 
 tfimni ? IK Cr 1, l(i._ 14. Q.id / Scieba.s tibi cri,& d fi ,. ! 1 V' "SW'm 
 pciCbas? (///a;/<o/^m/ietiamsiispicabaie? H) Verr 2 5 2<) — 1-. >i,.Vf.,. V;. v"7'""^'/ ^^'J 
 quern ad tinemy quam ob m/Lm ^ quo exemnio vXilvT^/ 
 
 Jloni^us secflri;^ /nitim percussis. ips^s pirAt "Sisl^lJil!!;!;';,, ;^., -j.-- [^^^^^ 
 
 i~ n ?• ''•V'^ '^^"'- "•'- ''^'^a^^'^.- tl'i>"'» tihi id fac<.re non liceat lb Farn 7 27 
 3.. Quare hoc sit a'qnissimum, facile est diceie. lb. Verr 2 1 44 -IK I)no s .^if ;.„, " 
 cur tu irequentiori» in isto otticio esse debeas q.ia.n iios i, F^nn n%\'^'''^*?'\^^ 
 venta est rat o. fiu(i7v. sh- lis; vir-w.w «^ )ww .^... . ' , • '._ '^ '""• '•'' '^"' -^ — i'*- In- 
 
 venta est ratio, qua?e iste US vicies ex hoc uno genere (ne-otiOrum) cepei-itV^ 
 
 H).Verr. 
 
 Sophists.- ^ostentation — sorain. - * to profess philosophical studies » S.mni^r 
 'quarn revera mnt\ tha.i they reallv are.- «iruest-friend _ ^ rC^/uf I?J r;.";;» 
 leniences is often used in ihe nieanin- • as to' 'conV^nHip 
 etc.- «bad i.etaken himself.- » literalTv 'I a.,i\ilr i x 1 o "iVn: /l^ t''"'^'"" "'"' 
 
 attend ,„orc. rerjularly lo a ^'^^^^^'^ p.a.^;:^^j:,-^:i^':^:Z^ ZS!^' '" 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 RELATION OF CAUSE. 
 
 283 
 
 2,2. 58.— 20. Hind cpt quam ob rem} haec commemorem, quod existimare vos volo, mi- 
 rum queindam «lolorem accipere eos, ex quorum nrbibus hire auferuiitur^. Cic. Verr, 
 2^ 4. (M).— '^1. Ch. Clinia^ htec fieri videliat 'i M. Quidnif mecum unasiinul ! Ter. Heant. 
 5, 1, 28. — 22. Hiinc judicein horrebanl* isti ideo quod non tam propeiisus* ad miseri- 
 c«)i'(liam qiiam iinplicruus» ad severitfitem^ videbatiir. Cic. Rose. Am. ;30, 85.— 23. Si 
 Verres huic uni populo liS CC millia abstulit. num iccirco absolvC'tur, g'/O'i scrij)tum 
 est earn peciiniani ditain^ es.><e statiulriim nomine» y Cic. Verr. 2, 2, .58. — 24. Conso- 
 landiis ipse sum proptt-rea quod nullam rem erraviusio jam din tuli quam incommoduru 
 tiHiiii. Cic. Fain..'). 18. 1. — 20. Eiro videor mihi hoc** gi-aruin fecisse'"-' Siculis. Quaprop- 
 ter non recilso»^ qui., vos quocpie Verri temperelisi^ si Sicnlis probatus'* sit. Cic.VeiT. 
 2. 2, <;.- 2»». T. Ai^ar-ius ot comes mens fuil illo miseriimo tempore, et omnium itine- 
 ruiu. libOium, periculorum meoriim socius. (Junre sic tibi euiu commendo ut «num 
 de nieis domesticisi* et maxime neces.sju'iisi*. Cic. Fam. 13. 71. — 27. Quid eM qunmo- 
 brem abs te, (^. Horte.isi, factum clarissi.ni viri 11011 reprehendiltur, (sed)»* repreheu- 
 daiiir meiinit' Cic. Siill. 1,3.— 28, Statuerant ill! hoc maleticiiiiui* non esse occultan- 
 dum-". Qiiai/iobrem quid est quod mirC-re, si cum eisdem me in hac causa vides 
 adesse^i cum qiiibusiii ceteris iniellitris abfuisse^^ * lb. 3,7. — 29. Eriam deosaliqui ver- 
 bis ferocioribiis"3 increpant-*, weiiideo queraquam fulinine ictum"'^* audlmus. Liv. 45, 23. 
 
 ^4 566. The relation of cause, conceived as purpose, is expressed by the 
 followin.Lj i^raniniatical forms : 1) by attributive phrases in the ablative 
 with the general nouns expressing purpose as governing words {causa^ 
 gratia, ratio^ cotmUuin^ animus^ mens ; 2) by prepositional phrases 
 with ad and the special noun finis (end, purpose) as governing word ; 
 3) by the prepositions ad and ob with nouns or gerundials; 4) by the 
 FORM-ADVERBS quo, quamohvem^ and cur (for what purpose) ; eo and ideo 
 (for that purpose); 5) by clatises with ut, ne, quo, or equivalent rela- 
 tive clauses; 6) by the participial gerundials (§51G); 7) by the par- 
 ticiple of the PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE as an accessory predicate (§ 510) ; 
 8) by the abstract dative, as completing or accessory predicate (§ 469, 
 1{. :U ; § 55"), H. 2(), OBS. 2) ; 9) by the gerundial dative (g 528, R. 211) ; 
 
 10) by the first supine (§ 351). 
 
 Obs. 1. The ablative of the nouns canm and f/rafia with a frenitive srerundial (§ 526, R. 
 20(i, OBS. 3.) almost always represents the genitive of the irerundial as a pl'upose of the 
 doer. But often the genitive of mere nouns (abstract or otherwise) dependent on causa 
 or gratia must be conceived as denoting purpose, as Bestias homianm gratia generaias 
 esse viilCmiis, we see that the beasts are creaied /or the sake of men {i. e. the aim of 
 their creation is to serve men), Cic. N. D. 2, (Vi. Thus Ex. 1 of the last exercises strictly 
 beUmirs here (it is the ri'UPosK of the sophists to make money out of 'philosophy'). — 
 The nouns ratio, con^Hinni. animus, mens in the ablative in connection with form-adjec- 
 tives generally denote * jjurpose', being rendered either by this word, or by * view', or 
 similar nouns («/7 ratione. for that purpose; hoc conHtio, wWh this intention : eo ani/no 
 or hac tnente, with this view), as: omnes iili — hac 7nente labOrem sese ferre ajunt, senes 
 ut ill otia ttita recedant. all tlies.i say they bear their hardship with this view to retire, 
 when old, into an undisturbed ease, Hor. Serm. 1. 1. 30. — Hoc consilio a Metello peti- 
 vCrunt, ut {juam prinium Verri succederet. with this intenfton thej' petitioned Metellus 
 to succeed Verres as soon as possible. Cic. Verr. 2, 2. 4. — Ad w'Mti Jlnem expresses ' end' 
 or • purpo.se' in the same way as ob with cau-^am or rem expresses 'cause etiicif'nt' or 
 'motive', as quern adfnem, for what end or pu.'pose. (See No. 15 of the last examples.) 
 
 * Instead of ilia est res (caum) ob quam rem (quamobrem). — * to steal. — ^ female 
 projier name. — *\o dread. — ' inclined. — * determined tipon. — 'severity. — * to ex- 
 pend.— » under the item. — ^^grariter aliquid ferre, to fee] sorry for something.— 
 -* Therf)iislruction beIontj<?to §4^7, R. 74. A. — ^'■^ g'rafum aliquid aticui facere, todo some- 
 body a favor with something, to oblige somebody with something. — ^^ non recu-<o qnun, 
 1 have no objection to, I submit tt). — ^* to spare.— ^^alicui probnri or probdtum esse, to 
 be endorsed iiy somebody. — '* house-mate.— ^^ n(?r<',waW'/s. a relative, is properly an ad- 
 jective. For the conuection with ina.rime see § 355. K. 2 ; § 292, R. 12.— »« See § 381. R. 
 9. — »» misdeed. — ^*> to bush up.— '^^ to come forward. — 2a abesse in, to keep aloof from. 
 — '■'' rather tierce.- '•^* to scold.— -'' struck (^^upply esse). 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 285 
 
 284 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Or-*. 2. The propositionfi ad and oft oxpreps pnrposc not only with prernndials (§ 538; 
 §54:5), but also with nouns w hon verbs ol general nu'iiniiij:: in ajfcrundial form may l)C 
 understood with tliem. Thus 'amicos alicQjus ad mortem (b-i)oscen! («• ^- u«l nionciu 
 pubcundain), to dtmaiid i<oint'l)oiiyV friends yw death, t'les. li. C 3, 10 — Pecuniam ad 
 sfatuam confene {i. e. ad t?tatuam fariendam), to contril)ute money lor a statue. Cic. 
 Verr. -2. 3, 77.— In a similar manner od with a noun ha;^ the specific mt-aninsi: ot of) with 
 a i^erundial, if we may supply the <;»ruiidial of a vcrl) of irent-ral impori. as : rrcuniaiu 
 illam od c^nturnm conrra leu'es clam dedCM unt. they ilh-irally and srcreiiy irave tiint money 
 'fo?' a»'seiis//ie/d\ i. e. so tliai ihey mi<,dit l)e assessed lower than they o»<;ht to have been 
 awsesscd. Cic. Verr. 2, 2, S.'j. (See E.\. 4. 5. G.) 
 
 Obs. 3. The forni-adverbs quo, to what purpose, and eo. to that purpose, are the third 
 locative cases of (/uls and id. and have assumed the meaninj; of piirpo«.e l)y the preposi- 
 tiou ^«/ which is implied in thetn ; as: Primuut r/MO tantant pecuniam (dederunt), in the 
 first place y<//- what pui'itoxe did they j;ive so lar<;e a Hum ? dc. Verr. 2, 2, hh. Eo. if used 
 in this meainng, is ;:enerallv followed (sometimes preceded) by a clause witii at, as Ct 
 h<K; pacto ratiOuem ref<-rre ri<eret, eo SulliliiU!- repent»! (actus est, non uf hoiios et dii,'ni- 
 tas iiobilit^lii restituerOiur. f/iaf he mi<:ht be allowed to reiifier his acTouiits in that way, 
 thenfore (i. e. with Ihat intrpoae) he turned Sullanist, not to reslorp honor and di.Miity to 
 the nobi'itv. Cic. Verr. 2. 1, \A.~Idto is. in this sense al>o. used with the force < f to, and 
 must thetibe considered as a compound of id and the third locative case, to be distin- 
 guished from ?V>> denotiui; * caii<e efticient' ;R. 40. obs. 5). as»: hbo delecti patrum ad 
 eum missi sunt, ut in perpetuum mentio ejus rei iiniretur,/o/- that pur iK>se were deputies 
 of the Patricians sent to him i/uit this matter inii^ht be set at rest for ever. Liv. 2, 15, 2. 
 1. NavTs onerariasi Dolabellam tnenffi comparilvit^ ut Italiam peteret'. Cic. Fam 12, 
 14, 1.— 2. Quo consdio hue imis? Ter. Eun. 5, S, 1.— 3. E.xpli» ilvi ^entelltiam meam, et 
 eoquidemconnlio, tuum judicium ut cojjnoscerem. Cic.Fin. I, 21.-- 4. Naves t:edfl* et pice» 
 reiiquisque rebus qu:e sum ad i/*«/<</ia compl(?tie«enint. Ca-s. IJ. C. 3. 10!.— 5. Noii con- 
 cedes tu (piicstOri tuo ut pot- state sujl ud quantum iitjltiir. Cic. (^u. Fr. 1, 1, 3.-6. Ncjjo 
 til)i ipsi nlluin nummum esse numeiatum'. sed cum oft tun decrela.obedUta.ob imjterta, 
 objifdicid pecuuiie dil)antur, non erai quicrendum cujiismanu numcrarentur, >ed cujus 
 injuria coi:erentur«. Cic. Verr. 2, 2. 10.-7. (Juid h<c hotniiie lacias? aut quo civem iin- 
 portflnum" aut quo potius hostem tam eceleratum reserves'"? Cic. SePt. 13.— 8. Si 
 Jialbus tam famili'iri-»» erat Clodiie quam tu esse vis, dixit ei profecto quo vellet"'-' au- 
 ruin illud. Cic. C;el. 21. r>3.— 0. h'o te non iiiierpell-lvii^ ne quid de hoc tetnpore dimi- 
 imergtar»^. Cic. Or. 3, 4'.>.— 10. Mannnem ad te fo misi ut aut tecum ad me quam pri- 
 mum venlret, aut. si tu morarGre'*. statin» ad me redlret. Cic. Kam. Iti. 1.— 11. Non 
 ideo Uheiium insediunis»" ut Italiam tuere nur. sed lu; quis alius Ariovislus re<;nt) Galli- 
 flrnm potiretnr. Tac. H. 4. 73.— 12. CatilTna notal'^ et designat»» at/ aedem^' unum- 
 quemque nostrum. Cic. Cat. 1, 1, 2. 
 
 » FnMghtship.— '^ to procure.— =• to try to land.— * pine-wood.— * pitch —• to fill.— 
 Tfopay. — «tocollect.— » evil-minded.— '" to reserve. — »• intimate with.— »"^ supply • /la- 
 l)fire\— '3 to interrupt.— ^* dindnui. to be lost — " /nonlri, to tarry.— ^^ irwide'e locum 
 (more frequently loco), to occupy a place with troops, — »Mo mark. — »» to designate.— 
 *• murder. 
 
 EXEUCISES. 
 
 I. Locative Foum-adveub.s. — 1. Where is }'our friend? lie is there 
 whence nobody h:is ever yel retiiriuHl— 2. Where did your vessel' hiiid'^? 
 There where it h:ul stiirted^* [on its voyai^e]. — 3. Where do yon conio 
 from? From tiiere where I wrote yon I wonkl start.— 4. Ls* there any 
 road from here over tlie monntains to llimera ? — 5. Here the farmers' are 
 in tlie habit of doini,^ their bnsiness"; at the same [place] tlie bntcliers' 
 have tiieirshops^— G. Blackberries" are found ahnost everywhere in tliese 
 rcujons.— 7. The widtii of lllyria'", where it is greatest, is 325 miles.— 
 8. The straits'' where the Peloponnesus begins is called ihe Isthmus of 
 Corinth". — 9. Over these monntains there is only one nbt very {it(i)\mvYoyf 
 road {iter), where two wagons" can pass" at the same time'*. — 10. The na- 
 
 1 ^jivis.— 2 to latid, aiiiXilli.— ^ proficisci.— * There is a road to, ilerfert (ad) — » arfl. 
 tor.— • to do their business (by going and cominur), conunedre. — ' lanius. — » laberna. — 
 • nibus Idica (in the sing.).— '" tllyricuin.- i' an-usti:e.— »'^ by the adjective Coriidhim. 
 — »' currus. Gen. us,— »* diici.— »» Two at thesaine time'iA expressed by the distributive 
 luimeral alone. 
 
 t 
 
 lure of the locality" is such" that (^/0 darts"* can be thrown" everywhere on 
 
 the euemv. 11. 'Where do these men intend to assemble'^ for (by causa) 
 
 holvling'"" [their] meeting'"?— 12. The east-side of the house is protected" 
 by a parapet"* nine feet high and thirty feet long. 
 
 II. Measurement of space.— 1. It is reported that Philippides, at the 
 time of the firsl Persitm war, ran 1140 stadia, [the distance] from Athens 
 to Sparta, in two davs.— 2. Philonides, however, the runner" of Alexan- 
 der the Great, ran 1200 stadia, the distance from Sicyon"" to Elis", in one 
 (];,y._ 3. Ill the consulship of FontPjus and Vipsanius, a boy eight years 
 old is said to have run 75 miles from noon to evening.— 4. The longest 
 [daV's] journey made bv Tiberius, when (pariic.) he hastened to his sick 
 bro"th(T Drusus in Gerinanv, was no more than [a distance of] 200 miles. 
 
 — 5. The river Alpheus is" navigable"* [a distance of] six miles from the 
 g(.:i_(;. There are 120 mdes tiom Elis to Epidaurus— 7. Cape'^ Athos, 
 which Xerxes cut olf ^" frotn the continent^" by a cana^^ runs" [a distanc^ 
 of J seventy miles into the sea.— 8. Apollonia, a colony of the Corinthi- 
 ans, is forty miles from the sea.— 9. Tlie [two] shores of the Corinthian 
 Istl'imtis are live miles distant (by iiitermllnm) from each other.— 10. The 
 eitv of Byzantium is 711 miles' distant from DyiTachium. So great is 
 imtar) tlie length of the land-road'* between the Adriatic Sea and the 
 Propontis='^— 11. The [two] shores of Asia and Europe, where they are 
 separatecP" by the Hellespont, are seven stadia distant from each other. 
 
 — 12 Eratosthenes savs that the whole earth extends (patere) 252,000 sta- 
 dia which amounts to" 31,500,000 Roman paces. Hipparchus adds to 
 this measure" a little less than 25,000 stadia, making {and makes) the oarih 
 the ninetv-sixlh part of the whole world.— 13. How far is it from the earth 
 to the moon according^" to Posidonius?— 14. The Island of Man" is 
 about equidistant from In land*' and Britannia.— 15. Meroe is a twelve 
 davs' journev disttint from Sirbitus; from there it is just as far to Davelli. 
 
 — \{) The army of the Athenians took a position*^ near the village* of 
 Marathon**, about ten miles from the city.— 17. Epirus borders on Mag- 
 nesia and Macedonia.— 18. The Pelop«mnesus, a peninsula, similar in 
 shape*" to a platanus-leaf *", borders on two seas, the Ionian*' and the 
 yEgean***.- 11). Attica, towards the north, borders on Boeotia.— 20. From 
 thai [point] the shore has a north-eastern direction*". 
 
 Ill Expressions of Time Simple by Foum-adverbs.— 1. Avhen did 
 your brother die? My brother is still livinir.— 2. There was a time when 
 this mtin was worth'" nothing.— 3. Then 1 was in delicate^' health ; btit now 
 1 am well — 4. The soldiers began to despair of their safety. Then [it was 
 tluitl two centurions went fortl>' from the ranks", and otfered" to die tor 
 llie army.— 5. 1 told these men that I would lirst finish my business, 
 [and] then would go" where they would have me go.— 6. Everything that 
 
 1« LOCU8.-17 i^,ca,id.-'« telum- ^» conjiccre.- «u convenlre.- ^» hab6r;e - «^ coa- 
 tio - 23 ,u.f,.ndcrJ.- ^»* vallum.- " cursor.-^" Gen. SicyOnis.- " Gev. Elidis.-- a» to 
 be'navi-able, navi^-mi- ^* promontorium.-3o «J'^cindere.- 3i contmcns (t^^^ 
 
 •^ ■ • . . - .1 .33 tjxcurrere. — 3* transi. : oi ine lanns. 
 
 32 a c7inal. connect inir witii the sea z=fretum.— ^^i 
 rarum.— s^Gen. Propontidis.— asdividere.- ^7 
 
 terrarum.- «M^en. Propontuiis.- -cuvuicre.- - to amount to <./^cem- '/^ ^Jf^f^^J- 
 _89Tran«l • How far does Posidonius sav tiiat the earth is etc. ?— <" Mona.— llUK.rma. 
 _ v/to lake a position, contra /acre.- -^ vicu.s - - Accus (Greek) MarathOna.- - for 
 ma — «9 the leaf ( folium) oi a |)latanus.— *^ lonius.— *'* ^geus.— *^ ^pectare.— pos 
 Sssed nOtldng.- V. intiru.ns.-- *2 procedere.- ^^ac\e. (sing.).- ^* Tran^l: saving that 
 Ithevl were willing to devote (detovere.) themselves for the army.- « 1 ran^l. . that 1 
 would go thither whither they commanded (velle) that I should go (t/i/. clause). 
 
286 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 is m,w donhtful and obscure ^vill onco becomo ^fV^^j'^^/'^^^^.^J^j;-- J.^^.l! 
 civilized" nations have once been wild" and barbaroii>.— 8. ^"^e o"r .m 
 ceVtors he r these thin^^s in no esteem", but they are "ow cove ed by 
 pvrrv D-ood''' man — 9 I remember tliat yon (mee maiU the same re- 
 ma k-io Sue - offcwes-. once comn.itted-, may be pan oned but. ot^^en 
 routed- tliey must be corrected- by words and PyV^M.^'^^.^rT ,Vwe 
 riv( b(HMi for a Ion- time i-noranf^" of what you were dom-;'^- U- 1 li'We 
 onc^e d- for a ?n'eat"^time 1(7 see the falls- of Nia.^ara.- 1:5. One o my sons 
 viul.n leave" for Uo.ne.- 14. ITmv soon will you have ^-^J^[^J^ 
 n So soon was Greece reduced'* trom the summit'f oi l>o^^cl to tlie 
 ksWl^rree-o? weakness-.- 10. Tell- your friend that shall recm'e 
 him recently.- 17. Believe me that I shall pay tins debt- -;>"•- .f^-^;^^ 
 last I received your letter so lon.^r expected ;>.\";; -J,^- ,^ -u ' iv^^^^^^ 
 ^vere lon^^ and violent-; the one protlered- tins tj e th t ^''* '^^V^^^^ 
 rtilll at last Sulpicious arose- with the to lowni.<« add es^ „•- -;^- );^\,y 
 lowed- to -o t( the exhibition^» this evenmg? It is, bu sec th { ) > u 
 ire back- Tn time (tunely).- 21. Was the exlnbu lot. ^vcl vis.t.d tle^ 
 before yesterdav ?— 22. Cato Uticensis seemed to ha\e lived \Mtli tuc ic 
 public and to have died»-' at the same time with it. .x ,.,,,«_ i Qn 
 
 ^vhit div will vour commencement-exercises"* be-m .''- 2. In ^^ilat >(ai 
 wlj.iiuav ^^>" >";",'''"'.. rp ._:.,„ ..,,,1 Plinv lived"« in the next century 
 
 ?o Uv^":, U ■ V fortmeations, an.l had'»» this .M.v' .lelivercaM.. all on he 
 s ,e I V - 5. Sw..pr...mH writes to me that his house, whieli last sun - 
 me- I'a been struk' by li-htnin-, had, after bein- struek a-a n been 
 con.mn Ml by fire,- 6. I have been busy' the whole «ntle.- wuh trans- 
 H in • tl e hdo.'U 's' .,f Plato.- 7. The solar eelipse» wb.ch happ>->».t m 
 the eonsK oT Vipsanius and FontCjns was witnessed" in Can.pan a at 
 sev™ ml i Arn.en a at ten o'eloek. This could not have happened re- 
 marks" 'iV il- the earth W.Me a plane-,- 8, In E-ypt the slt;.'">w -'/ « 
 "nn-d al ' is J:^ noon-tinu-" a little h,n,'er than hair 'l'^^?'^^;';'^'^;,^"^: ."-i^, 
 i„ ihe eilv of Konie.al the same hour, the nmth part ol the sljle i,- «.mt- 
 
 g" o theladow in the town of Ancona '''<;'« '--"^^^f*;-; .tl'e- 
 fit?h ■ in Venetia at the same h(mrs the shadow is equal to the st\ 1 . 
 it In Patalis a renowned port" of India, the constellation <>1 the Ureal 
 Be "» a ; rs <mly !> lif.eeii ,ii.i;hts, and is seen- only ill thetr lirst parts 
 . -10, The belrinniny s'' of the Reasons" of the year with til.! Komans 
 
 pcrlalivc- " to make the fame remark, ,^md^.e.^ , /be ?° 'rant ,. elhh,..., 
 
 iriiinriire aitquul. — «• a^'ere.— '" com iipi. ''''-■,. _ -s i,v lummu^ — '• pcitentm.— 
 
 ti by «,mmi«.- '"inllrmita»,- '• ''""''•''^' • ','.''•;;:_,. _ ,6 ,.",„.lri - »• liic.- "' vert)»- 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 287 
 
 were the followincr^* : On the 17th day of March, when the sun entered^' 
 into Aries Sprins:? commenced-'*'; on the 9lh of May was the bej^m- 
 nin- of Summer; on the 12th day of August, that of Autumn;^ and on 
 the ninth of November, that of Winter.— 11. The consul appointed'^ the 
 day for election^» on (//0 the third of August, and the Latin fftiva on 
 the nth of August.— 12. We intend to be in the Firmian vdla" till the 
 fourth of May.- 13. In the year of Rome 8G5, on the 17th of June the 
 Romans were defeated by th6 Gauls at the river Allia.- U Julius C<Tsar 
 was assassinated-''^ in >he year 44 before Christ on the loth ot ^larch.- 
 15 AI Tullius Cicero was killed by Popilius Lsenas, a military tribune , 
 on ih'e 5th of December in the year 711 of the city.- 10^ The cnuperor 
 Tiberius was born in the year after Cicero's death on the lah ot >ovem- 
 b,.,-— 17 The city of Rome was built on the 22d of April, in the year 
 753 ij. c— 18. The ^legalensian^* games were celebrated^'" in the month 
 of April from the fourth to the tenth. 
 
 V DisT.^NCK OF Time. [The different exprefisiom of Tune mmt be ren- 
 dered in every form adinimble, the regular forms heinr/ placed frM]— 1. liow 
 many years airo did you come^" to this country" V Twenty-three years ago 
 — '^* I' visited-'" Seinpronius three years ago on {e.v) [my] journev when i 
 was* n-oin.r^» to the province to preside" at the Courts.— 3. A few years 
 a«^o tliese'cities were occupied by the enemy.- 4. Homer bve( * many 
 years before l^)mulus.- 5. When I arrived at the city thy brother who 
 had come three days before, was waiting*^ for me and took me to Ins 
 ],otel** — G Scipio^nade*" the march to Asfosta so rapidly {tarn ciio) that 
 (ut) he" overtook" the c(dumn*' which, a few days before, he had sent 
 ahead.— 7. While Jul. Csesar was Pontifex, he changed*" the ancient 
 Roman calendar*", several years before he went to Gaul as chief of ^the 
 province.— 8. Carthage was destroyed forty-seven years after tbe end ot 
 the second Punic war, and was rebuilt" twenty-three years later.— 9. i 
 shall write {dan^ a letter to you in ten days; take care"* that you answer 
 two or at the latest {^uniniuni) three days after the letter will have been 
 delivered" to you.— 10. I shall depart from here m lour days, and will re- 
 turn a few days later.- 11. The body of Alexander the Great was taken 
 to Memphis, and from there, after several years, to Alexandria.— Iv. 1 lus 
 whole tieet was fmislied 00 days after the carting" of the timber had com- 
 i,,enced — 13. Six years after the destruction of Carthage Viriathus wa^ 
 killed by his own soldiers. Not very {ita) long afterwarc.s the Numan- 
 lians- revolted'^.- 14. It is reported^ by some that the tirst snn-dial in 
 Rome was erected"^ by Papirius Cursor a few years before the war w tli 
 Pvrrhus. But Varro states" that this hapi^ened in the tirst Punic %vai 
 thirty years lat er than the Papirian"" sun-dial is said to have been erected. 
 
 • 24 hie'- =» tvansitum facerc- '^« hntium caperc,- ^■' «"f;.'".""-"^- '' i^rmi-m villa* 
 dav f..r st.meihin-, diem diare alirm rei.- '^» cinitia -- 3« iorue.-''i ^j^^^i m an ^ la 
 
 S/?.) - 3« ro,n,ni"n1rt..- 37 ,e-pnb!ka.- 3e adire.- 3« pi-ofic.sci.-^o to pre^ideat he 
 ^cJirk convent u.i agere.-*^ e.se.- ^"^ e.xspociart. « -qucm.- ^ cond uere.- *^ e^ 
 ,nn.- *5 coiillcon'.- ■•« to ov.-rtake. itmere pnvtenre.-- *' ^»''^*^"":^ J,?'" ,! nmvpr 
 
 lififMrium).^ ^- Tran-1. -arter the v.mV-A war'.- " .•.■panl.y.- ** curare - />-fatre. 
 _ 6« iaii<r.-rro.- ^' Transl. : aller the limb.-r ^nviten o ha-l been co.n.i^c d t'> he cart- 
 ed ( A>or/.7r.).- " N.unantlui.- «» rehellure.- /«Jerry.- W^m'^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 addition ,olare hein- made only, if necessary to d\^tV'^T\ ^n w rred wiirPvr rh^^ 
 of time-pieces).- «2 siatuere.— OS Transl.: before it had been warred with liriuus. 
 
 «« prodere.— ** rapirianus. 
 
288 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 VI Measurement of TiMR-rERioDS.- 1. It is reported that [there] have 
 beeu [men] who nh^Uimv,r {■^^'fV'n^rtivf) ten days in snccession irom 
 bod - 2 We think dav and nii^ht of the sad condition of the republic. 
 -8 CcTtain little animals- live only one- day.-- 4 Dionvsius was for 
 thirty e. Hit years tyrant of the Syraensians.- 5. I ow lon^^did you stay- 
 a onu^M'staid only a few days at Home, but in Naples I spent- the 
 who e Mimnier -- 0. It is known" (says^^ Pliny) that in the town of Pto- 
 e 1 fs- on he border" of the Red- Sen, 45 days bHbre the solstice^ 
 an a! i:> "" fterwnrds, the snn stands- at midday- perpendicularly- 
 oy T h< Id "^and thnt duiin,^ these ninety days the shadows are tlirown- 
 Jo, h v .d--7. In the Island of Thule (says the same aiithor), wh cli 
 Ha' X d ys' sail- distant from Britannia tnward( /^ the Ts^^'th. and is 
 near the M-tex" of the world, both the day and the n.-ht hisl^six mouths 
 hi 'nece<=sion - 8. Tn-es may b.. transplanted»^ both in sprinj? and autumn 
 rur iTaboutthirty days.- 9. We had not seen (/)^//.)your fruMid for three 
 
 o' tlV-^ 10. Pope- Pius the Ninth ha. been re gnin- now 20 .years y 
 oX!'^.).- 11. Did not the Maeedonhui- Alexamler meet w. i ch.v h» m 
 his thirty-third year? {Raider hy all mcthodx ndnimihle).— \l.n'^nmh^\, 
 nne years old. was bound- under {h,) oath by his lather "•^'-'Ijf ^. 5! (j^^) 
 Deroetual'Maimity a-ainst the liomans.- i:3. It is repm-ted that 8 .0,000 
 
 en built the p>Tami<l- of Cheops in 20 years.- 14. Tiie staj Saturnus 
 cmnpleles-itsc(>urse- in thirty years, but Jupiterin tNyelye.-lo^cpioled 
 his army by the third ni-ht watch oiitof the town, and arrived in three days 
 TR^derhyall method.^idmiM.) at Tarraco.- Ki- It^Jv^H take im^- he 
 best parf^ of six months to build this Inmse.- 17. For- atten( uig- to the 
 funeral"» of that man, a vacation of two days was given' to the students 
 (Render hij aU admiHsihle methods). 
 
 VII. ADyEUBS OF Manner.- 1. It was more cruel to preserve' Capua on 
 
 m these conditions, than to destroy it\ [To thi^ sentence must be given an 
 
 when they hear» that you have not succeeded • in this atfiiir -... The^e things 
 •eVo as I told you repeatedly.- 4. If Caesar, as you thmk». isde ermmed« 
 a seizin.^'" the government", drafts'"^ tor soldiers must be made" tlirough- 
 the w-hole ot'ltaly.- 4. Alcamenes is a rich" [man] tor an Athenian. 
 6. Such a knowledge»"^ was quite»" astounding" lor those times.-- 
 
 ai 
 on 
 
 out 
 
 7 IIow could you know that the senate would be satistied'^ with such 
 excuses»" v- 8 1 aslr» you how it could happen-^' that all this was etfected 
 'vithout your knowledge^- or consenf-'-?- 0. Thus it came'^* that nobody 
 
 «7 ab«tinCie - «^ contituious davs.- •« a little animal, bediola.- " be careful in tran?- 
 Iitin MhiM. uneral - '» ino.aii.- '• ^^•^•^. ' Spent' nmy also be rendered ^ afjmviim , witU 
 a uns ?c' •cn^^Ui ve. But in ab.nimere the idea ' u> spend for j, p'nw>^e' .s contauied. 
 
 V" « HtaJe -^ '* Okn. l'tolem;iidis.- "^^ niar-o.- ' " Mare Itubnnn.- " sol- 
 
 ;:;'i iur-^«fransl r^ s nany\/o««c/em.-'»es.e.- «0 § 372 R. 81.- «M-erpenchcular y 
 
 Too f„nn\ 1 rn rider^^^^^^ ^» di*cipulus.- » coimrmre. 'To preserve Capua must be 
 terro<;Jlre.— " fieri.— ^a by nescieni'.— ^3 by invUus. - " ticri. 
 
 V 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 289 
 
 ..„3 .nUn.^ to plough >-l-d:;wbne (*»*..) .Uat[m^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ir You have lieard how Acilms did 1"» J» >„ '. " ^,';^ ,a «ot find him- 
 
 senTJfc) o'.ct 11.o.,whileit«as yet poss.be , be^"«^,. ^^ ^ ^^,,, ^,, 
 
 se f » no V in .nch a l''«'>'<-''"^'^lf':-»},e «.needed to private citizens to 
 re el violence" l.V violence, »>• ^ «?^,i'^«^f(S«9 ) are threatened" by open 
 „s'e violen<« i tl.eir prope.tj « ^f^ , ^ i^i,^,,^ ?vere accepted, but so Ibat 
 
 r«^:a.u;;.i^^;"^sini^d{£5;^^in^ 
 
 L i:i. Sud. ar-»n.ents ;''"f'^«,^""!,';\'even slander" orsusp cion is able 
 
 ".eliemently opposed" ;,,f''™l,'^:,;er,'-Tc He easily Rained" Ota- 
 
 p,.ace sb..uld be denied o 1"« f li f ^,^,^, .poke just as if tl.eir Mmy 
 
 ■ili.is, but not Sempromus.- 17. {, f T^,/,,ee„ defeated, as they were*' 
 
 stvle" did Gajus bndd b.s ^ a - 3^^° ,;^,,.„. •„,„) ,i,ould be «"««/■•ed? 
 ih-,,,1." the de eijates ot the Gallic ion .is. ^"\' ,' ,,' u-.„„ y_ 4. 1 do not 
 !!:."aO.I what .'.nditions -"' P,'-«- ^'^ef that /^r t'lS^ -">'f ''■ 
 know how (by y'''';'7A;-""'=i' 'the sane manner Sul,.iei«s Las^ ^l^vays 
 main (««) concealed .'— ^- 1" " « >>, ^ y^ ,,een a witness" thai 1 
 
 been an adviser" of peace.- «; } '' '//VVY ViUerved in no other way.- 
 said, nay" shoute.l", that peace ^ "^' '^V.-imhn.m, we would not have 
 7. If Clodius had co.t.e in goo ;..th .. A.n^^ g ^et «s,eelebrale~ 
 
 heard him swa.L'jier" m the '"''°"",",n, of our countrymen".— 9. ^ by 
 thU. day according to the "'''!ri,.Uv«» ad wisdom".- 10. Your dele- 
 1 mile.- «poke"' in the senate with ability "' ' ,, "^fyj^test fairness" and 
 caws Intve examined- this maU.T ("«;"« .«M'^^ ,;^U1. greater eloquence 
 ffiigenoe".- 11. You "■'ve dehjnded h.sop mon ^^^^^^^ 
 
 .There Ilasdrubal fell»* fighting, ^vo|ll ' I >J,'^' ! g -,„ ,,ft« i^iy 
 
 ^>^r:r t!J t^::;;;;i^-^.^^ - ti^4:{^^We>^^ 
 
 ^ ' T7~ 27 while it i* po«pible. re integr^.— 
 
 pCre.— *•* P'^ii^"*'- 49 «.nuns — »" omnTno. — *' raiio. .„ „,^_-:,r,re — *»se mctjlre.— 
 "occultu*'.- " ""^i'^'^^^tn - «2 pcntentiam dicere.- «" '"-^J' •" "a - ^° oc-regiu?.- 
 
 Srre°-'.V^rtrfmpru«t«t.e',!«.«.-*^- 
 
 if. 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 291 
 
 290 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 what hopes- thev had returno.l.- 5. There I was informecr that tlie con^ 
 
 an I all without exception came unhurt to tlie camp.- 0. If I fl»'»^^'^» ' : ,« 
 ever Inn iv' V otf.ndea an v of you. you will jud^-e me more by mv xs .1 
 ?lrm l)v mv deeds-».- 10. Tlie youn- man bore this abuse» silently and 
 than '^\'^ > y, V ,,/],io nl'U'e— 11 In the same year one ot tlie VestaP 
 V n^^^N^ i- a ve^ 1^ Sem,H-ouius said h^ ou.lit (posse) uot to 
 I ve bec^^m^mncd in his absence, sinc-e he had been absent m tlie^i^ 
 vcc' Mhe state.- 1:5. IJold and a despiser* ot gods and men, Catilme 
 rSel cl Iv- u()re] into his ruin.- 14. When Verres departed as qiu^s- 
 [ r u- e u-ov nee he took« with him all the money, out ot wb.ch t he 
 ^ d e s ^re to be paid' U.riu.) the next year.- 15. ^ '"^^^ - IJ^^ ^^ i;; 
 had not returned to Home as a free man, but as the Ix.ndsm ui and tlic 
 slave ft ueiemv^ If thou hast ne.iilected to sow" in thy boyhood, 
 ; u wi not'^M; a harvest'^ in thy old a,e.- IT. ->" ; ,^^;-^];;il- 
 .dv done you this service» if you had sent me word'- a h le ar ic . 
 -iS.m friends came to see- me in la.-er nunibers lian 1»*;^^ ;^ f ^^^^^ 
 t.w'vmJ— 1«) We approach'» you, O Conscript'^ Fathers, as suppliants 
 e 1 m win./'M V w ose artifices- your minds have been P»-<';>ccupied > 
 ^20. Publiu^^ Hu'-ns lost Ids eyesight- sleeping, while {cum) ho 
 
 was dreaming"'^' that this happened to him. 
 
 IrronH^^^^^ ilm 'ZM) fitli-r into accessory pivdicates, or into alyrrhm 
 
 acc(>i(lin^ to m._ ruu s u. .^ painUMl in wax colors^- must be traustornicd 
 
 '"('SHkH Hs th ' ti" K^ .• in va.K col.frs'. Instead of • 'l^his was il.e llrst u.clm-. 
 Aii^tHHs, a^. iM< iir 1, l'.i«i> ^ i)U-tu e was sohl. as the lirst. in Koine . 
 
 KS:;u''TlenVav lift t^m^ bechanced into ' Then t saw a 
 
 nri«-of wa f(.r h^e n^ (prwvwi)\ When the Eni^l.sh senten^-e has a passive 
 
 for n wit a - ve a -ent, tlie sentence must -enerally become active in Latin to ex- 
 [?nlVu ili, aVi<^llv Th.^ Kn-li^h sentence 'The first mon-y was ccined t)y 
 
 SJervhis iSi?, must be chu.^,'ed actively into vServin. Tulliu^ as the hrst, corned 
 money'. 
 
 1 Kin*-- TuUus Ilostilius was the first wlio wore'^^ a to-a pnetexta after 
 having conquered the Etr.iscans-.- 3. The tirst (.ysterl,eds- were niade 
 by Sergius Orata at his villa near Baj.L'", at Uie time o he orator L. 
 Cras^u?— 3. Italy saw the tirst elei)hants'^'^ in the war witlr" king IV'Thiis, 
 in the year 472 of the City.- 4. Pompey was the hrst ^vho paraded a 
 yoke^' of elephtnts in hi< African triumpli.— ■>. Asintus P..llio wa^.Jhe 
 
 »*> uil)e excedere.— "^ aulerr* 
 
 - "■- HCie: 
 
 CO- 
 
 o,^ ^ ' - S.;;; u '- - u^^^^ pernuierirp:^ illiquid -" conlertus^- •« aci^« 
 
 X7 -"-« vZh^.^ loo'factu.u - ' injuril.--^' Ve^tllis.- 3 in -h. service, o t .0 
 ^lZre}p,mJcausu.^ * contemptor.- ^ in die.. - « fVrre^- J to ,P^>' j';;, -' ;»^^' ;;* 
 snpekdiL aumerare mUin.-» muie ,.tum.- » setuenleni facere.- 'VMoa.mctoi^o 
 11 to .lo a service, m^mv.y ,>nedrt'-e. - '» cert lurem lacere -- '3 nataro.- * /. ,^l'"?f„ , ^_! 
 somehoclv, co//i;6^/ruv a'u/'^eni.- '» I have a rv^WJicet nnki.~ ^«^^"'•' ;-/; ^'•"s "m J are 
 le.uppiek!- »« non iuM.ams.- ^* ars.- "^i ..ccnp:\tns.- ^^ "^•^''^'■'•™.^,'' ti"^ ' "-T S^ 
 _ 24uti— " Etrusci.--''a'i oy-ter hcil : Oifruru/n vican'vn.— ;\ii\\\hi ikui mjo., 
 Bajdnurn.^'^» elephantus - «« Tran-1. : the war wa.,'ed {r/erere) with Pyrrnus.- da 
 cere.— »> a yoke ol elephants, etephanti juncti. 
 
 r 
 
 first who made man's genius»' public property" by establishing^* a library 
 in Rome- 6? k Valerius Messala exhibited" the tirst battle picture" m 
 KomeTi" the year 490 after the building of the City.- 7 L. Mummius, 
 he sati N- A^^^^^ destroyed Corinth, placed- a picture- of Ans.ldes,rep- 
 •esentn- Father Liber, in the temple of Ceres, whicli Pliny believes was 
 llfiis t^.re -n- picture- exhibited- in Rome.- 8. The red" color which 
 s cil ed sinolus was tirst found in Pontus, not far from the city of binope, 
 whe ce it^S [itsj name.- 9. Sempronius caught" tlie first mulle - 
 
 fisiy» hi lis year.- 10. Thales is said to have first predicted- an eclipse" 
 of the sun - 11. The Cimbri crossed the Alps tirst of all German nations. 
 _ 1 ^ Wh'ile (ahl. ahs.) the two" legions disputed^» with each other which 
 of them should enter- the city tirst, the chief commander directed the 
 seventh legion to entei-^^ first.- 13. The slave was uncertain ^vhe her e 
 sho Id invUe LucuUus lirst or Sulpicius.- 14. To-mght (W..\ will lie tie 
 third representation" of the tragedy (Edipus- 15. bempronius was di- 
 rected to leave first a sutlicienl» garrison at Crotona, and then to go to 
 hd » he other Consul.- 10. The captain- himself left the wrecked- 
 si 1 IS of all - 17. Hispania was the last of all [provinces] which, under 
 I le ead of CtEsar Augustus was subjected-.- lo In that year Gajus was 
 elected the fourth time mavor of the city-.- 10. My brother has devoted- 
 hhiAelf wluiily to Greek literature.- 17. The chief-commander directed 
 t ! k- (,ns to obey his commands alone.- 18. The Stoics believed that 
 
 V rt untlone was sufficient for a happy- life-- 1»^^^"' ''''fntrndo.^ to 
 as quickly as he could^* on Vesontio; but CiBsar likevvise intended to 
 ma e l.imself master- of that city.- 20. Cnesar accused the chiefs of the 
 E lui hat they had not kept their promise", and that they, likewise had 
 not heliH'd'- him with supplies, although^ they might have done so' . 
 
 X . ACCESSOUY PKEIHCATES KOT AGUEEINC. WITH THE GRAMMATICAL 
 
 SUBJECT Hi 2:J-20).- 1. Ciesar, beimr carried^ too far^« by the streams ot 
 tl c sc^l lUTciived- Rritannia; lying'^ at his left.- 2. C^sar, at lus depart- 
 ure'^ for Britannia, had left the M.,rini in a state ot subjection ^ o. Apd- 
 les left his renowned'^ picture of the Coan'« Venus unhmshcd .- 4 rhc 
 ilhenian i^enerals were innocently condemned t*> ^^^''=^^\^/;'J^^"^.':, ^^ ^^i 
 they had left unburied'« those whom they had been ^l"^^^; «i^ 3^ Tn nii iha 
 on account of the violence"^ of the storms^^- 0. Manns took «Tuguitha 
 fettered''* to Rome - G. The consul dismissed the envoys weeping [the 
 .;'L;. ^^.,,n, and lamenting the fatal- error of the lang W which he 
 
 had been induced to make war on the I^;>"^^« l^^'^^P^^'^ 'l,^ ^'^^^^^^^^ 
 took the city almost entirelv'"*' destroyed by tire, and det, tute ot m- 
 habitaiits.- 8. Youjiavejrp^at^^ 
 
 " »2 Tr^sr^the <Teniuses (ingenia) of men.- 3» res publica.- 3« dicSre.- 3» biblio- 
 thSca - "e^pro ponerf.- 37%l^,^i p,c\i tabula.- «^ ponere.- 3 a picture r'^Pr^;^;:"^^^^^^ 
 FatluT Liber i Fafker Liberia picture mala)- *<> ^"^^ternus - *^ ^'^^^^^o - i ute': 
 
 '43 rntw.r 44 tr-ihor. 45 caoere — ••* mu us.— *^ pnedicere.— *'* detectio.— uicr 
 
 m/p Xenare - ^^ ntroTre - " intrare.-- " transf. : the tragedy will be represented 
 ?r;r7).- " Stis.- - aSuum (by the al.stract-da.ive).- " dux.- " ^-^y^^^^.^f'^^^^' 
 ^^w panlre.- " princeps decurio!- «« dare.- «» be5tus.- ^^ hy f '^f/ aT '\\«^ l*;^" 
 tlere - «* by a- great marches (iter) as he could.- " velle.- «» P.\'«'i- ^fS^.i"' ^ Vo ion' 
 
 "f;onno-s^-«o cxiMpere- 82 tempe^tas (H>ig.).-<^^ ducere-.^* v.ncTre.- 
 
 s» fa.iirr- «=■« almoJ^ entirely, p<B>^.- " destiltttua.- «» to threaten one's life, trmdian 
 alicui. 
 
o<>2 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 poctln,'- it.- 9. Thou .ilt have [in] njc J^^^^^J^^^J^^Z ^^"^ 
 
 Llu>r%un<r mc a brave ^"^ "y-^ /f-^T/;^^^ 
 
 monev they had received as a loan.-- ^- y,' . .....(i you in mv name.— 
 
 tw hundred sesterces to my ^''^•^1'^;^!'^ k^" .^^, ^;!;es^^ caused" Dv thy 
 ll I am goin^, to char.e thee w.th ^^^^l^TX^^a to employ" this 
 a-ent-on my premises ;- \?- /J^^, Vl u it is not possihle'- tor every 
 man [any] hm-i^^ as mui.s er ^>f ;" ; .. j ^^' ^ie honest, and free'»» from 
 one (..^0 to die rich bnt ,t is P^^f^^f^;^^,^^;^^ ntline'hin.^ly» to death. 
 
 e,imV.- 15. It i^ the "^j^'; ;>^.^^; ^ i 'i^-* //S Unr, was a,.,n,\ the con- 
 - 1(5. Ilavin- dismissed ^l»^ .^^y'^'^" -;.•,, ^^ ^p troops without delay to 
 
 sul directed [his] lieutenanl^ ^^'7 )a • '^^^» U-is fell on^ th(^ en.my leav- 
 thebc>undaries of Macc'donia.- ^.^Oh s(> lui^ ^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^^ 
 
 ino;», loaded with booty, the ^-^^'^^l'- /^r' V', j ..p^ted to the general as a 
 voli have sent me as a V''^^'^''\-- ^\^\-'l''^ the distressed'» Sem- 
 
 ^Hme that (,...0 1- did m>t^nd - [;^ ^ ^;;:,!|;u.;^^0. The inhaiut- 
 pronius,in spite" of V^^"^^, n ll vvrthcm three c<,horts'-= for protection"', 
 ants asked the consul to ('/0 ^;^ ^'r/'';^ |V ,r ^^. oiubct. (^ r,.-,G).- I. Ex- 
 Xn Coincident action in tiik koi m ob an o '.l ^ j_ _^ 
 
 pei^f* thcJ^altaek of the enemy -«^h umhum ed^,^-;^; (-^ ^^.^ ^^^j. 
 
 F4at soul, and free- from al des. e t . ^^^!;^^;J^^;^^ .^ ..^i.^e- to take a 
 ^ersaries.- 3. With the ancient Jj^^^^^,^^.^; ^^J^' , ,!^, wiih dishevelled" 
 meal^'with unwashed- hand>.- /• i'^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^j^,. ^ j '. aarts-.- o. The 
 hair* and tor.f^« garments- rusl.ed '^' '^-,;'\',',,,i;.,v?d=«' face— G. The 
 emperor- Angustiis w.g never^u ^J h jU.^ ^^^^.^. ^^3. ,f the 
 
 severe sentence ot the CoiMi ^] f ^^.^J, ^,.!^,.,,^^^^ hud come with 
 
 soldiers.- 7. The ^^^^S ^^^^;;^^^^' ^]^^^ ^^^^^^^^ 
 
 authority- to ccmclude -'^ 1> ' ^^ '-^^ , . , '; i was so drenched- by rains" 
 
 immense^* howlmg•*^-/| On 'l»;Y J^^"^' > '.■ j j,^^. M,.a,.s {.\fedus) it was 
 
 that I returned home with a ^^^^^^^^^Zy^J,,^^^ 
 
 the custom for- vvjf^^^"'/* i , ' l/w- that i-nirlha i.uended** to throw 
 
 garments^V- U. When ^^f^^^^^^i^.^^^ follow" him by forced 
 
 himself into tb;,,^^^'^^''-^^ ,^, ^ .^' >:;ii'^y[ i^in undisciplined- army, with 
 marches.- 12. Cleon went ^o battle ^^J' ^^^. ^\ ,,^ual [par) to 
 
 mi willing- allies, [being] it ^^^^^^^ ^^ ,,i,,, the Sigents of Fabius 
 [his] adversary.-- bi. lu. t t > ^ ^ j^ ^ ^^^^.iin'inistration- <>f thy office- 
 exi)ected me to do.— U. i " \\, ' 5, .,., -.pij .rained"' to uie the applause** 
 tiuVi wilt imitate chully my ";^,^' » ^^. N^al^'^o m great satisfaction, not a 
 i^^■ cverv <'-<)od'-' (man), although I niaat ,10 m> ^.i 
 
 ;e^^ em'iiuesby^ 
 
 _ »6 iJr^du/ni (.sing.). - "V'''"'i.'^^n.t. S^^ M.^'JlLUS. 
 
 fi«r ) -"* to tear, scindere.- '' vc:^lM W f^ ; J^ "V i i^ens.- 3«^ ululiiu-, G. ^;^ - 
 
 if Mrii..u..- t;^'-"»'^^'^rnS'ir!^3rJi^' ;j^^^^ women were "--'-l. ;;;"?'>- 
 
 40,, ictus-*» »u»o intexins.- *' vesus '^**'*/;^^^^^^ nu ^imui conumltere.- *«male 
 
 throw one', .elt. i>et.r..- *' clr.erta l)'^!^.-- ^! ' ^,*,\?, ;„ _ ^^l^-.Mo (dng.). - " ene. - 
 
 EXEECI3ES. 
 
 293 
 
 aware (««u *.V""'-'J'Yl''«^»^^,^l;^^>' some, now [kind of ] work, lyou] 
 your opinion — 3. It y"". ""'',,.,,„,•., i.nt i,ow miicli it can liurt you — 
 must not ask how much it f/" /. '. f ' ' ^'V a,i; " ictory was, [andl how 
 4. Wcall fed I'ow.sa.l, hmy P''»'' ^''^ ' "''|-frie„,,sf _ 5 much 
 
 ,,is,naccrul '">^'^;''."'"f/:, ;;:," 'i u-e b ™ if y uhll chosen"» to lis- 
 hotter, how much la.rer "■'»',';^^i ,"^ „%^,','; ,,,/as you Icnow that I love 
 ten" lo my opinion.- 0. 1' .1 'f"; y '" '.„,„, { ,,.^,m urssntly ask you 
 y,m, I wouW in no way i'^'* .«/''"v ;\v er that you so gre-atly wish 
 (o ilo what you have l'''M''«^. •;;:, 'jj "^o secre Iv w-as that affair irans- 
 ,„e to l,uy that slave.- 8. So '•'\»'' "^ \'.,^" *,^„ .'i ;,,,, i,Uiqmd) was heimr 
 acted»*, that we did no even .^ ^.^Ppf^ .^', ,,:^ fj " fi 9. -Phe purchase'» 
 P^V^"■"',^t Fonn?:i^' se n U 1 i'^- b -en aL well considered»» as [it was] 
 
 il^^llt!^" wXl; ndr^i^^ i.dij^^^^ 
 
 this passage" displeases »'« .'''^'^,^,^^^'^,;^ , am greatly bowed" down; 
 cd" by these arguments.- 1.5. ^^'''V\, .",•,,,„. v-.u-i() tVo.n which I see 
 for 1 found here thy two ^1^;J^:^,^^^Z^V. thougl.t would 
 ht.w little we can b"P<; />' \'' f, « ',' ' Id,.-' impressed the embassa- 
 bring" us peace- 14. 1 ''^•,;» ' \7;,. ,;''„/ ',,at.ur embassadors bad witb- 
 dors not a little.- lo. I wished < '« « ) -^ tirmly.- 16. U cann.rt be 
 stood- the.^e arn.gant demands ^, ,','''-, '^''^'eeomel he more impudent, 
 doubted, that this <;"'''»y ;•' '" '^. S'/wUli bun.- 17. The ancients be- 
 the more generously we have ""='^\'- .,,.'.'' ',„ ,„0011.- 18. The praises 
 lieved that the sun was nine imes as Ug^c j ^^ «v ^ (by causa) saved the 
 which people i,l,o,u,ne>) ^l'"':,,,.\L"/"^,X;:.;.r Expect.- lU. Art thou 
 country, seeni to be inueb ^ ''^ '•' ''^ ' j^ l.Vi,, our institutions"', ibat 
 BO ignorant"» in Knowledge \ »' '",':^, .''',"» v_ oQ. The enemy made the 
 thou cansliiot even '■•;«>. "''f .;'„''/, ^1'. ■ nuiks they could..- 21. 1 wish 
 attack against our soldie 1=. « ' '^/'.',^'",',"^ ^ii as you can, by your advice 
 
 the city. . rr.,. „ pictures'' of renowned artists were 
 XIV. RklationofPkicl.-1. ^.]'^ }]l^. '^^^^^^^ ,/;,f/V//?.«<l - 2. The Archi- 
 soldat iabuU,us«>rices m aiUiqmtv^ ,, „,eh 
 gallus of Parrhasius which If \\\ ^./^. ^..';^ '^^ was estimated at 6 mil- 
 that he h>cked it up^ m ^^^^^^^^^^, ;>tThebes was bought by 
 dions sesterces.- li. he .^'^/^ i ts - 4 The Argonauts^ of Cydias the 
 king Attains for one hundred talents^-4^_LHe^_o__ 
 
 67 sur-cipore (per/, future)- " «''.^\^*^-""e'6T:,tclli-Se - «« emtio. - " Fonniauum - 
 •8 n, iiurltu- - «« Ir.icii.Osus.- •>" lucrum.- ' ' ^^ ""^ „ , J!J° _ 78 niovere.- ^« affli- 
 ^.,. bO lerre - »^ oratn». - ^" ob^iire. -- l^.f,! V;,,! _ »0 reel?*- " conlertu^.— 
 r. aua!;ii.us.- - -oU:^ore^^l^^^>^^%^{^:^ ^J be in the .iu^^ular.- 
 
294 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 I 
 
 law 
 hoii 
 1 
 
 i^ver'°° Hortensius hoiicrht for 144,000 sosterces, and built^ [expressly] a 
 loiiseMbr it in his Tusculan villa.- 5. The Ephesians'» en-a-ed* Apel- 
 es to paint AU-xander the Great with lightnin.i^ in h.s hand for the 
 
 1 ,'0^0? tventy talents.- 0. Timomaehus of Byzantnini sokl h.s Ajax 
 and his MedCa to Jnlins Caesar for eighty talents, whieh pictures were 
 pi red in the temple of Venns Genetrix.- 7 Gajus gav. me, f.>r money 
 L ven to him as a loan, his note for on(> liundred twenty thous^md Dollars 
 fexpreL the amount i a sesterce^.- 8. The pria.' for a tnp to Troy on tlie 
 boat is three Dollars [e.rpress in ^sterces].- 9. The Senate has compromised 
 that claim" at 00 millions of sesterces [remk)' in all mithoihadnumblc\.— 
 10. That work has been awarded to Sempronius, who made the lowest 
 bid» at mi 000 sesterces [rewUr in every way a'imtmbl£\.--\y). i nave 
 rental mvtknn^» to Gajus for C,;500 sesterces a year".- 11 That house is 
 worth loO 000 sesterces, or at the utmost 100.— 12. Wiieat sHls now at two 
 Dollars a bushel {e.rprex>^ by >u',terres\ — \\V Yerres bou-hl a statue that 
 was worth 00 times aR much, for 0,500 sesterces.- 14. TheJustice of peace 
 laid the damai^es ai^ainst Sempronius at 1,^300 sesterces.- b). Ins house 
 cost me exactly {fere) 280.(>0() sesterces to build'V- 10. This tence will 
 cost vounot Ussthan a mina to make.- 17. This war ha.s cost me my 
 house— 18 That book is exceedini^ly rare ; it sells at auction tor prices 
 ran.-ino- iVoin oOO to 1,000 sesterces».- lU. The splendid team'* of bempro- 
 nius has cost him 50,000 sesterces.— 20. I cannot do tliis work lor less 
 
 than 100,000 sesterces. , ,t ,. „ . 1 9 
 
 KV INDKKINITK rnicE.— 1. AVhat Will vou take" lor that horse .^- 
 
 2 What is goV\ worth today?— 8. Wiiat damages has the jury'" awarded 
 in that law-suit?— 4. What did your house cost V— 5. What did you 
 bid'*' I fori tliat statue at auction V— 0. At what sum did you comin'.)mise . 
 
 — 7 What do vou think tliat pifturc is worth V At what sum do you 
 value itV— H. llow docs wheat sell to-day V— 0. In the Roman Forum was 
 a picture of Aristldes, representing''" an old herdsman with a statf"', in re- 
 ga-d-'' to which an envoy of the Tellt()ns•''^ being asked how high he estimated 
 him answered, he would not take" such a [fellow] as a gift [it he were] alive. 
 
 — 10 How much hiu'her does wheat sell than barley-^ V— 11. Seminonius 
 sold me that statue for what''" it cost him.— 12. Sempronius s«)ld me 
 that statue for a much higher price than [what"'"'] he bought it [tor]. 
 
 — 18. I have rented this house for the same price as last'" year.— 14. (»ram 
 sold then so high that poor people'--* could not buy it.- 15. The contract- 
 ors made so high a bid [on J that work that nobody coul d compete with 
 
 100 Orator — ' faccre.— » a?(U's {nnrj.) .Edes if^plic-d in tlioMn<rul:ir if it denotes houses 
 consistin-oif one main room, a- teniples, and Hinsctuirs s.ich as tlie mentiom-d one «.f 
 HorLo.isia^. -3 Eplio^iiis.- * rr:ui-l. V-ave out on c.mtract Alexander to l)e Pointed 
 etc-»Transl.: hl.ldinir in [lii^^] tiand.- • Byzaniin-.- • Transl. : t is sailed (wari- 
 o7r«>nowto Troy for etc.- » nomen.- » Transl. : who liad hidden (/wvn) the ..west 
 (minimoi- •<> ru>.- " 'a year' is expressed l>y .rivin-. to the nmneral the di^tnUut.ve 
 l„rni.- »2 Be carelul in renderii.o; ,his numeral.- '3j,ulex P'^l'|"^'''; - ^\VuJ!-J 
 have bnilt this h«us.- f-.r ete.-"» Transl. at .'",00 sesterce- up to l.OO».- « bigic.-»^ hy ven- 
 a^re — »» indices In elas>ical times tiie f miction of the jude.v was almost th<t same as 
 th:.t"of onr jnries. VN hat we call 'jnd.^e'. in those times was the /^V^^^'f- „\\ \'\;, ^'^^'^'^ 
 the quesnon o^^law\ while Xhc judex, decided on ' fa.N and e\ u eiice .- »« 1 he 'K- con- 
 nect d with llclre, is the same a< oth.-r objects ot pru<. and vain-. - -« Tg-^^V.fV-iv , ! nl 
 of an c.ld (v^//^.c)'terdsman {paMor) painted hy.- «» l)ac.ilum.- ^^ de.- -^ ' ''^ f ' "^ 
 Teuloid -'^* Tiansl. : he would not (/<o7M th-U such a one was presented to him alive. 
 — -^» honlenm.- =« for so much, as.- =• The Latin eannot omit the rclaiive ..f price in 
 comparative clause» aft;ir quam.- ^» superior.- 2» Poor people, egtnte.^.-^^ 1 rau.-l. could 
 bid a^rainst. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 295 
 
 ihem- 16 Your negligence has cost you dear!- 17. Sempronius esti- 
 ♦ KtVwmd It a vei-v hi-h price.- 18. The Jury have estimated the 
 mates this w 01 Iv ai avcij mi^«ii" n^i.o Tnw bivo estimated 
 
 dimao-cs at a lower rate than I expected.— 19. Ihe Juiy liaye t^^siimaiea 
 thrcbmra. Va.' ainst Sempronius at a lower rate than they es imated those 
 tut (la na ( s a.^.i 1 ^ ,, j Tarcnt.— 21. Rent is cheap^^ in that 
 
 ?Sr!"^ ^^ Ttldnk-^ indlords^^' wish to let as high as possible. 
 Zl tllms-. lo lent as low as possible.- 28. You have bought this house 
 
 '''xVr'll^n'^ox 'oK^NNEU VALUE.- 1. It is wondern.l, what value is 
 
 now a lache 1" U> these accomplishments.- 2. I do not know how high 
 
 Y u h tl a mm ; I, on my part, h(.ld him at nothing - 8. If you hold 
 
 UkN ' li e • n^ -eiHiblic as detn-,as I do, we ought to let minor points- 
 
 >i - 4 Even the Smallest [sum of] money is woiMh much to u^cmu these 
 
 [;_ 5 Was this man so much t.) thee that his fall" should affect thee 
 
 V h ;o ^v^^Jilef V- 0. All these disadvantages^ 1 ^^ ";;t muuUtthou 
 
 w It but1)led-e='" that my and my children's lives (.si/^y) shall be sate .— 
 
 - If V , 1- ce a oreat value on the pleasure of a few^» hours, how much 
 
 hi. LVi I St vo vi ue a pleasure which at no time can- be interrupted" 
 
 ;;;-l;:,[,;;i;::;.^ A s. if wLt i esteem i^^^^-nA!:;:!'. 'f:^. s ^'r^^^ 
 
 in.leed no commimion^^ can be between us.- 0. Since V *« 't'^LTpir 
 tlke^^ li-htlv, the great injuries of these men, you should* take then 
 
 "^'^^{' UELvrl:^^ 'o/^'j^^.- 1. What d Terence does it make to 
 Sc^pnlni!^ whether you are sorry or glad ?- 2 I do -t k^^w olw^j^^^ 
 portanee this matter is to thee, but to me it is of the n^^^;^ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 •>. That thou art "-oiu'^ soon to return home tnmi thyjou ne\ , wil Ov. 
 
 ;;f <rrca in e rest to mv brother.- 4. It can hardly be believed, ot what in- 
 
 ^Si^it is^lo';:Nh.t ^.is niatter shotild be ^ly-^rJ^V^.^ll^^Cr^S^Fr^^: 
 
 Franc, was ...ore iu need ..f l.iiu tl.an ho [was m '";<;; 1 "''','* "^'C,''!,^^ 
 made liulc dillVriMice lo Fidv us wheUuT the Sunato «<)« lalilj Ins 
 U;etso^:;>'-T.U will be onhe last i.,^^ 
 
 .leee^« vour brother to inf) io n" m our councils.— 8. It is not so muca 
 
 u-inie le t aslhat <.f the. king that the C(mditi()ns of peace should be 
 
 I e )L- ^^icRHl^- - y What matters it that the tyrant has assigned to Sex- 
 
 t u a province'for plunder, in which there is- --'"''''h^y^^l^^^l 
 
 lei-ed v- 10 It does not matter lo what sum«- you bind y5>ui=r^ ' ^^ 
 
 n^ ;/, aJ vmi have nothing with which to discharge^ t^ '^^^"U 
 
 XVlll. Relation of weight, and M,,.,suuEMEvr in «^^»^;^^;J^ 
 
 Which weighs more, a pound of lead, or [a pound] ot tlax •-;• |V^^^ "^i^"^ 
 
 pounds doc's that fish vI^jigh^JtWH^^ 
 
 ' .. Transl. : It is lived at a ^^'^^^^^^^^ 
 at a cheap price in that part {regtol- " Tian>l. . '»h } tha ' ^ ^ «^3'« ^.^^j^^i, > every- 
 Suennt.- » at what [value] these acc(mM)ii^^hment^s /7e* a c h^^^^^^^^ _ J ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^.^^ 
 thin, smallest O^.r) - \»'^ve to be dropped .^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ./^V^X subjunctive <>f the 
 
 — >» pr.e>tare ptrj. .vw/y/ ). - ■•» sal\ us. . *.*'■,. „ 45 (..jmmunio. — ** qmmiam.— 
 prinelpal pn-dirate.- -«^ intermittcre - ** "' ' .' r^.^Te-Uc - "^^ - '' faceti*.- 
 
 i. eert^. J - lem.,- - Pros, siibj. of ^^ l>--^>i^ ^'^^;:^',,^ j;!!! ^ t o ratily ,somc- 
 
296 
 
 EXERClSEa. 
 
 n he iiTst who coined»' money : tl.e ase», '^''i"^<'by."''.«)7;;;§^'?; , ""^ 
 .n(l a niece — 5 An Enfflisli" niile»' measures about (arcUer) 10.)0 Roman 
 e" and a naufioa ln,ile" measures m,>re tl.an four times as m"ol..- >. I 
 ,not estimaie the exact measure" of these flel.ls from ^"C>'i;^S';^<; -T; 
 
 ^eneral presented the Delphic Apollo with ^^''Jf/Jl'^Sf ^^^fil^o^r^^^^^ 
 % weiM t.- 4. Servius Tullius, fourth kms of ' '« |,^''''^, f • 't!.'! ,e?l one 
 been the first who coined»;.m,me.v : .he ases, comed^b^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 poui 
 
 paces, 
 
 cannot estimate tiie exaii iiit-usuiu ... "^^^^/^''KU.VnVc nr^rcpivefr* to their 
 
 7 On the f()llowin<i-" clay, at daybreak, the inhabitants pcrceiven i» ^"'^" 
 
 L^^et terror Tie troops of the\'nemy, 10,000 stronir stanj inj? m bat le 
 
 Sray" at their gates 1 8. The ancients report {prodere) that theie ^vere 
 
 cpvpi-ql trees more than thousand years old. 
 
 vlv M^Axl AND NSTKUMENT.- 1. Bv this mcans Verres meant" to 
 conccnl- Ids plins - fwe c^ effect this by no other means.- 8. 1 can- 
 noT^ld^en Uds c^^inion by any law but by the custom of our ancestors, 
 not ^\<^|f"/Vl./M t nt riot even the enemy should be deceived by traud.— 
 r A\t\,lf^^i Tna re shre'^r» and prudent, and he assisted nature 
 by^he "i^eatesfpcT^ 5. The Lacedaemonian Phcebidas seized- 
 
 th^ )rt?(s^^^^^^^^ the instillation- of a fcAV Thebans who were 
 
 fiyoi- of t e Lace'hTmonians.- 5. I was astonished at the iiriiorance 
 of thl^man who Xn he was obli.i^ed-, as a pranor, to m'^k^- laws 
 hmself could not even correctly understand those that were made by 
 oH ers - 7 I takes two hours" to walk on foot from iny house to the 
 H V - 8 ThcU t^' s at that time no law l)y which Caninius could right- 
 
 l^wrong whicirh'e had] suffered;».- 9. According t^; >- .<^1--^^^^ 
 least {qmriem), tl^-^ assertion- cannot be proved /Jt alb- 0. T as a t.o,^ 
 I can prove by the fact that never any enmity existed (m^) btlween 
 
 Roscius and his father. T^ninc cnirl ihit he had not 
 
 VY Ckv^v ffficient and motive.— 1. Icihus saui tnai ne n lu 
 
 n'om hls'talit.-- 4. Fron. theL -.•asons (.«,™) I '-e ''^™ , .f,, T, 
 
 7'^J:l^■^^^:Z\ZSp^■Foi^im called- n,e to defend the 
 
 lunlv- and uXreseeu'', IJurrus acconM^anied'» him on his jonruey ..nder 
 t":%.e"i'of mSmp:-9^m e" rentained out of shame" mord eMo 
 
 '0 milliaiuim navale.— ^» I nuiM. . nn nai ^'^ • \, "^ " ^, ,, _ ,» t(..,^.rt.. - '» neracfliut'.— 
 mu8. - ■'* conspicere. - :* inr^'"ctus. -J« ncit.-^ jUlc^ 84,n 1.7. in fnvordf .o.neho.ly, 
 ««occupjire. 
 
 , .^ - , , ,. . '■ sK.Js^ » <lp««H-jln' — 10 Dative of the ptTj^oual 
 
 »' iionnulli.— ^" by addnctvs.— »» pudor. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 ^97 
 
 • • ^r f«nr 10 Why have you changed^ your opinion ? 
 avoid the suspicion of fear.— 10 w y nav > - .,_^ ^^. AVhy do 
 
 - 11. But wliy do I try to teach t as ck F^'^ • l.^ ^ ^.^^^ „^ 
 
 you think" that 1>VV?1^ '^K in ^ca^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 faith" in your manhood and in m> ca c ';. > • • ^9_ 14^ There was 
 
 lv>re di<l you tak. -X> -^^^^ y^ ^ d ^^^ war on ^ your 
 ,10 suflicient and good ca ise - J./J" j f,,,.g ,,f ti^e Roman people 
 
 country, why you should jom h. «uU ^^ V^^, j:^^^3i ,oyou.- 15. Why should 
 ^vhy nothing. livine and hiunanshode^^^^ ^} » commit^ thee to 
 
 I not immediately ;^>-^^«^ /17;, ^1 o a^^^ same arirument? 
 
 „,i,„„._ 10. Why hast not thou also ;V:)^\^.;^^^', /tossed to" have been 
 Evidently- l>ecause th(M-eby thou w<>^^^^^^^^^^^ ^.^^,^^„ 
 
 privy- to the P ^'^^^'l^ ^^/'ifrZ.Vl w hout^^^ 
 
 Tiierefore I shall anlicipa e" xNhat ^ ^^IJ.^^*;"^ Jj",,,^ ...^ak*» your plead- 
 
 have posti^oned- till ^ ^^'^^^'^l--^^: ^'^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 ings*» are; therefore you ought to ;\^^^ '^^^'^.'//Tinm hast misin erpreted" 
 strength in vain; tiieretore '^^^^;)^^^^ " V^^r.Vto^H^^^^^^ the" feelings of 
 me. Because {//v>;/. the ^If^.^^^^^.^^.^^^esth^ You have defeated 
 
 this witness. 1 did ''''' .^^^^^TJ^^^^^ therefore (on that 
 
 our cavalry in one unimpoitant ,.,^: \' ^"^"i^^^i^iie,, _„ 00. Hannibal by 
 account) c<>"sick.r your victory cm^^^^^^ i c^e cm^^^^^^ did he therefore 
 
 no means despised tlie little* band ot ^ »« e u >_^ ^^^^ ^.^^^^,,,^ 
 
 (cm that account) become careless or "J^'^,^/' ^,t „. „^^^^ ^.e surrender" 
 Ihat y<ui refused to overcome i^ KT^tlTc..^^^^^^^^ ^ ^^^ 
 
 of (.0 keeping the torces- o Ulecmem^a^^a^^^^ 
 
 order»-^ with a {that) view to mislead ^ ^J^*; ^\ , throu-h the whole 
 s^,p,o* v_ ;l For what purpose are S^^^^'^h;;^^ ' ^".^^ ,,,oney to 
 
 eitvv- 4. For what purpose did you T^'l' \ ;''^r not bvr'?- o. 1 do 
 Ihim I whom, according to your books^^ 3'^»" ^^^VeJ^K^se^ ti^ ^;^^ 1 men- 
 t kn<nv to what purpose j^ni 1»=^^'*^^ "j^'',' '^" t^,,,^^^'^^^^ not be 
 
 tioned [them] in order [jov the purpo^^^^l _ ^^ ^^, 
 
 euM.Ui'O-e) to ->;-r;:^ ^^:^^^P^^\^^; Sd be a prot^ 
 
 f(.r that purp()seare the l.nv:,g\t ^ ^'^^ ^ ; > j,,,^. ^',,, the innocent- 
 
 J. „., . ,. ...., 23 f,Mn,>ro —'* discedere dc officio. 
 
 20 Disrcdere de ^ententiil.-^ trimcyis.-^- Jli!);;'^^^^- " \\, ,- .^ „r interest:^, ddigeptia. 
 _ 26 to have xiu f-^uh m de^n<-nirede.- ■ U ;, .lirere - ^» join hands, arma joctare.- 
 .1 invioiauis.- 3-^ c..mpreheM.^ere.- 33 in n cu . umj ce^^^^^^ ^y^^_^^^ ^^,,^^ ^^ e 
 
PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 21i9 
 
 298 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 tect" not that Ihov should oppress the ri-hts of the citizens— 8. Not 
 
 hose onlv shouhlbe punished who -ive'^ but also those who accept 
 
 nev f >r votes" {syffragitnn).- 9. The proconsu ordered- from the 
 
 was iroiu'-- to make thioui^h the province.— 10. I he tmNi^ J'/vf-V • n« 
 nmco. . il with M two-horse team for some tavors^^ which they (.//. wished' 
 rih/mld iianl" Hiem.- 11. Catiline is marking- every one ot you for 
 murder" ! 
 
 ,. T^ r 1 72 r^i,,, ni.fl nfr/^tif niu^t l)e in th«M>«'rf*-'Ct tense.— '^ Arrange: who 
 
 r vo^e^mone^livve^ v^M utTo wi;., hn^e aecepicd should be pu.nshed.- '* vn- 
 '"-anZlS^^i^'^-^^l^ciilinisinj.).--^^ veUe with inliu. clu,.«e.- " pra^stirc- 
 
 for 
 
 per.,. 
 
 '«» noifirc— '» ciedes 
 
 ClIAPTEU SECOXD. 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 tW- The rules on th.c tenses arc applicable to the tenses of tjic subjunctive only so 
 far^they are uot modified by tlie special rule, on the tcn.e. ol this luood (Ch. 111.). 
 
 I. PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 ^ '«^r The PRESENT TENSE IS uscd 1) whcH the time of the predicate, 
 i e the time spoken of, is represented as that of the speaker, as IIos ego 
 video, These men I see, Cic. Cat. 1, 14; 2) when the predicate is repre- 
 sented as belonging to all times, as Satumi stella cur.um tnguiia aiims 
 peragit Saturn completes its course in 30 years, Plin. II. N. 2, 6 ; 3) if the 
 predicate is represented as belonging to no pauticulak time, as Pernoc 
 tant xenaiores in nive, in montibas uri se paiiuntur. Hunters spend then- 
 nights in the snow, and suffer themselves to be burned in the mountains, 
 
 Cic. Tusc. 2 17. 
 
 -Or« 1 If the nresent tcn««o is used in the significations mentioned above, it may l>e 
 sahl to have Us mvn and proper mcanin.', the action in all these instances belon-.n^ 
 Shereirelv or partly t\)th(;sPEAKEKN time. It thus forms a contrast to a 1 the..tl er 
 t . es^hi corAunm reunire of which is ,hat they desi.Mmie times not tho.e " ^ !« f P''»^^^^^^^ 
 Tnereare instance^ however, in which the presen tense has lost this distinguibhmj, 
 mark, having assumed the force of a preterite. See K. 4o. 
 
 Obs 2 The Latin lancrua^-e has only one form for all the different meanings connected 
 wi?h tlK^-K -LNT rS^^ the i-KETEKiTE is expressed t>y thuee. and the futluk 
 
 bv \v tVreS f(.rms. 'Thefact that it is often desirable to d.stiniruish »'« P'-csent 
 hue Vn ^s m lar w'ly as the preterite and future, is the cause that in i-t'^'l'^h to the 
 P KSENT^E '^^^ some functions are assigned which properly be ong o the pr.^nt 
 ten-e In Latin thert^ is only a faint trace of such a usage. See U 42, obs. 1 But in 
 another seu-e he Latin lan-uage makes use of the perfect in place of a present it two 
 pSic'ites, both beYlnu'in,' to a time present to the ^i-^-K^^-a^^^ cmm^ed with each 
 other that their times in uelation to each other are different, bee K. 4-1 
 
 Obs 3 It in ikes no difference in Latin whether the predicate which, according to 
 8 v.7m.<t be in the i.re-eut tense, expresses a coutinu.-d or a .n..m.-ntary action ; m 
 Lh in'^itceslhe Latin hiSiaue uses .ilily onc^y-tn. igm 
 
 Kn<Wi«h i)ro"i-e-=sive and common forms, as: Ao/a/ et desi'incU o^znU^ ad ctaein nium 
 que'miiK^. v^^^^^^^ is MAUKiNo and siNULiNa out with his looks every one of you lor 
 
 murder. Cic. Cat. 1, 1, 2. i i\ 
 
 Rem. 41. The time of the speaker is conceived in a double way: 1) as 
 THE MOMENT OF HIS SPEAKING, as lloc uuiic pHmum audio, I hear this now 
 (in this'moment) for the tirst time, Ter. Andr. 5,4, 33; 2) as the period 
 
 [» 
 
 OF TIME (or one of its regular divisions) within which the speaker is liv- 
 
 mg, as /,^»/iijci«n/w m.(i(mtrum aerunt. nt sunt, sic etiamnomi- 
 
 Apud i^^^-^f^iy^JlXl^cedS S^^^^^ ^^^'' magistracy .s they 
 
 nantursnie.<, with trie ^''*^*^'^>-'^'V" "',''■.,,,, this word Cic Sen. «, 20.— At senatui jme- 
 are -old', are calltd hy a "■•'"^';2 >'"-y,^';/',;' s^^^^^ be d.me and hew 
 
 srrVM? Q>H^ T^ff'T'^'^-'^^-^r 1 u s not do 1 liJ ii? Vl e moment of his speak- 
 it nmst be done lb. b, 18 [ It e ^ »;;'^' «^.Z ''/ "/^^ -^f^ V , which he makes the assertion.] 
 iuir. but at stated i^ues within 'j ^'^''»^^1,"^^^^^ "the Ibod of the Germans consists 
 
 _ G^rmanorum rtctus^^n arfe^J^ron^ f ^if n'h s'wa^ ue be/are the time of the as- 
 in milk meat, and ehee>e. t.je-. d. i». i,n, i^. l\"'- «* ./ 
 
 yertion.^ind «/^./'it, a.id refers to C^.ar*^ . 
 
 lii'm 4'^ If an actiou is represented as having lasted during ^ peiiod of 
 •v c.Ttai.rU'n M (K 10, obs. 2 ; R. U), and as still continuing at the tin e 
 fMiV in -kT. lie Latin lan<nia-e places the predicate expressing the 
 ^Ict n i l\e PR -EN TEk w^ the English language makes use of the 
 Pu^ nVpA^^^^^ designated by definite orin- 
 
 d l^'.i t^ex n^^^^^^^^^ c which often ja/y^ is added, denoting m this con- 
 c Ion [lir;m'ti;n;ance of the action np to Jl- njotnent^ of sp^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Tbo fnvoo of this adverb jam is contained in the English present P^"j.ci. 
 llieioiccoi uiis. auvt.ii-»7 *' «^ _ ,^^.■,^ .y t.^i^] ^,.fi hnigf)ee?i. encased the i.A$r 
 
 In hoc judicio JamfAernuumt^^arm^^^^^^^ ^^„os 
 
 two y.ars (not duo, "''/"'^^«Z^v• A^i« ^n existence already /or more than 700 years. lb. 
 awplvi.'< riront; The Laced. A«^^, *',tl / t Sr£'/f so /id4 for these many y6ars that 
 Fiacc. •iO.-Ego tot anuos ita 7, "^. "^^^ '^-.^^^^^^^^ tracto constantiam ; 
 
 discrlmen^ vcnerPis L . ^, 38.- 2. {*fj;'\ '^'^'j^^X^ hie asto^ et pidto^. Plant. Stich. 
 
 num Italiam f>fj^idel^. lb. 28, 41.- •''■J\'^\)^ y;;"" ",\eendium. Just. 4, 1.- 5. Quomodo tu 
 
 2, 1, MS.- 4. .Etme mon is per ^f /r^f'inrS iaSe« af^ris ^ Cic. Rose. Com. 3. 8.- 
 hoc nomen« an.piins tramiiuun in adv. r an^^^^^ ^.^^ ^^.^^ 
 
 jam cliein path.. .^ ^ 
 
 ignuro quid agas. Cic. tarn. <. y. conetrnctlon, 1) if the predicate is an 
 
 OBS. 1. The perfect is used in ^^'^. ^/"^. ^\,^.^"f^c^^^^^^^ iconticui, of conti- 
 
 iNCKPTivK, ^^•^V-^ P^-'-^^^S^^^^S''^ "Sn^ Ja^^^ tu* liitene; Your 
 
 c^scere. I hare b^crmif silent = In ^ !^»^^;. „7 f /q _ g) if the actiou is represented as 
 pen has bien silent lor a ong t ime. ^r^^vJJ '"!;';' k,,\ a^ having cea^d at that time : Sero 
 having continued up to the tune of tlieM!^^^^^^^^ ,^^^ ^^ ,^,i,t liim 
 
 reM>timus ei quem per annos decern «^V'''t f,«S^ ; h,. 1 i-t ten vears (but no longer at 
 
 (V.ar) whom we '""'^ ^^^'^f^^^^ J? "5«;"^'1\^, ic • lades qn e 'in nol per quatuorde- 
 
 the moment of rPf^^^i;: -^^^/^J-i^/ Vhe disL^^^^^^ »P«" "^^ '^«^ ^«"'"^^" 
 
 cim annos tnoruennd vertantur. '\\, '"\^"'?"*YV .^^ ^^ 
 
 years, be turned in that direction (thither), f^ '. r;,; t*' ^«nt an action as happening at 
 ^ OBS. 2. To that class of Prcsent predicates xNh^^^^^^^^ ^.^^n § 567 ; 
 
 ALL times (§ 507, -2). belong 1. ^<\'; ' ^^ '^f. > on^^^^^^^^^^^^ represented to be true lor al 
 
 "S^^^l^^^^mk ^i- i^never expedient, ^.c Oft 3 1^ 
 
 peccilre 
 1. Viri illi perpetul adiniratinne 
 
 leculnrum celebrant ur. Quint. It, 1 
 
 1. Viri nil perperua ;''VJ'''^"':'';",,:;r:;V;n7"'sen'3 13.- 3. Dolus'mahisis in gimula- 
 omne.;x>;^>'m^ es.e pcipimie^^ ,,.,, - 
 
 tione contvittar^^. Cic. on. -i, i«j- -*• > ^^ ° i^ — -,,—-—--—- 
 
 13.— 2. Non 
 in sim 
 nisi f ulta '^^ sit, 
 
 iul -- »• the edi.- '' Maxim.ises. i. e. such ?^^l' ^Zt^cltion^^^^^ to our Common 
 
 n/ulclre, to prop. 
 
300 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 ad tcrmm /erf >tr.— 5. Facillus in morhos Inridunt adolo«ccntps (quam scnes), grayius» 
 ccgrdtanfi, tristius^ C'lrantur ; itaquo pauci veniantaA s»eMectati'ai. Cic. Sea. 19, ti7. 
 Ob~. 3. Artioi.s which are rcpn-scMte 1 a?» hHoniriiiiXto no pauticular timk, are placed 
 in tlie iMiKSKNT when tHe speaker proposes them by way of siti'1'osith>n. Such senten- 
 ces usually have the Ibrm ot general conditituiil or relative clauses (»/'a//y o^f^.Z/ws^ ^f;//o), 
 as • Si ei (j>d ah hoste ofMdentar, aqiite sextariiiin minjl einere coguntur, hoc prinio audita 
 incredihile nobis vidUxr, if those \\\\o are besieged »)y the enemy, are com .elled to buy 
 a sextarlns of water for a mina, this w«7/i>', when we hear it tirsi, incredil)le to us». tie. 
 Off. i 1«J, 5<; — Sicut illi qui iHinyranf, qwmn snbito mare coepit horrescere. unliis opem 
 imfdom/d, sic iiost'-r populus mau'istratibiis in l).llo;>^//v^ ur re-i. As the;/ w/Maresm'tng, 
 when siiddeiiiy the sea i)e<^in8 to be in an uproar, imjUore the help ot One, bo our people 
 (^.ys its ma;,'istrate3 as (it would) a kin<,'. Cic. Kep. 1, 40. 
 
 liem. 48. If two predicates, both beloii^nni; to a time conocivea a*? pres- 
 ent to the spe,\kp:u, are so connected that their several times are different 
 as to EACH OTHER, the Latin lanirnaire places that predicate which desig- 
 nates the earlier action in the perfect tense, while the English laugnage, 
 generally, in this instance uses the present, as : 
 
 Si aut privatus aut populus Driiidum decreto non ittefit, sacriflciis interdu^unf. if either 
 a private person or the people dO'^--! mt of> y (literally ' ha-< not obeyed) the decree of tl»e 
 Druids, they exclude them from the sacritlces (excommunicate them). Cajs. B. G. 6, v>3. 
 1. Galli pro vietimis* homines imnndant*, inprlmis eos qui in aliciua noxiil" sinit com- 
 prchiusi^. Sed cum ejus jji-neris (homiiiiim) c«)|)ia deflcif*, etiam ad innocentium sup- 
 plicia» de<cendiiiit^^\ Cx^. H. (i. H. lb.-- 2. Galli5rum matjistrStus qu;o vim sunt^^ occ'd- 
 
 taiin"', quieque e«se ex usu )>idica>\run( multitudi.d /troduiU »^. lb. ♦;. 20.— 3. Apud 
 Germtluos, ubi quis ex principibus se diiif ducem fore, musurgitiit^* ei c^ui et causara 
 et houiinem proftaat^'^ lb. «, «.— 4. Alces'-« enrn se arboribus, a venatonbus per radi- 
 ces subnitis'" quietis c:ui-il redinac^runl^'^, inflrmas arbores pondere a^ffTifjunt^* atqiie 
 unsl ipsie conridiinn^. lb. «, 27.— 5. Si ad luxuriam ctuim libidinum intemperantia ac- 
 ce>sit, diipl.'x milum €>>(. Cif^. Off. 1, 34.— G. liuocunque ad<i}exlsti, ut funie, sic tua; 
 tibi 0CCM/7V//// injuria'. Cic. Par. 2. 
 
 Obs. The perfect verbs me.miid^se.yOili^se.diwd novif^e (§ 312) nre used with the force of 
 PUKSKNTS in all siu'iiitications of this tense. With tht^ same force are employed all verbs 
 that in the presei7t denote an incipient state (especially ttie inceptives), the perlects of 
 which, desiijnaiini,' the state of ' incipiency' as a past one, express the state itself as 
 viiKSKNi'. ilere beloui^ the verbs assuH^icrre nud co/irt'ie>icere, to become accustomed (in 
 the perfect msuevi!ite,lo be in^cu^tamed) ; cognoscere, to ascertain (in the perfect co{//io- 
 vi.<-!e, to know) ; ad<ilrseere, to i,'row up (in the perfect adoievi-ifie, to be adult, the same as 
 nubereinesse) ; adainnre, to l)ecome fond (in ttie perlect adaniasse, to love): of/tin^re, to 
 acquire (in tiie perf.-ct obtiU'iU^e, to have acciuired, i. e. to knee, to hold). All such per- 
 fects are used in two siLjniilcations. in that, of a />erfec\ denotin.,' the action with the or- 
 dinary preterite force, and m that of ii present, denotini; the state whicli has i,m-owu out 
 of the action as a present one. They are. in this respect, anuloijous to those passives 
 whicli in ti»e perfect (piiriphrastic puriiciple, § 5')ii) denote a present state, 
 
 1. Druiiles a hello abesse coum?,rurU., nequc tribflia unS cum relicjuis p.-ndnnt^i. C;es. 
 
 Ilem. 44. Verbs of saying (the same as in English) are frequently placed 
 in the present, if the act of saying is past as to the time of the speaker. 
 This is the case 1) if the speaker qnotea or mentiom the words of another 
 
 1 morcdan<^erously.— > to fall sick.— ' one of the constructions noticed § 552, obs. 1. : 
 the result of Their cure is oftener fatal.— * Instead *)f the ordinary victims (i, e. animals). 
 --*to sacrifice.— * offence.— ' to catch, to arrest.— » m;«a deficit, there is a deticiency 
 in.— » tormentin"-.— i» to proceed. - »* rideri (supply bona), to seem proper (to them). 
 — »- to com-esil.— 13 to impart.— '* to arise.— »» to approve.— »« elks.— i' cut hy the 
 roots.— »« t(» lean on.— i" to break, to upset.— 20 ,0 full to the t:rouna.--2i to pav.— ^- \t 
 is grovviu" dark.— ^a mos is used here prejjnantly ; mi liberi beini: technically called 
 the childnni In patonuil power.— »* except.— *-'* to surpass.— '^« In translating, the ante- 
 cedent in eix (with lindibus understood) must be placed before guarum.— ^^ to give 
 one's principal attention to. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 301 
 
 ^ ' 
 
 in order to answer them, or to comment on them ; 2) if passsages from 
 authors are quoted. 
 
 Obs 1 If the speaker mention? the words of another, in order to accompany them with 
 his own re n'rks^t^e verbs of sayin:^ by which the remarks of the othe.-^are mn;<>; "^ed 
 mix n . 1 ace. in th(' pre<ent or in t^e perfect, and it makes here no d.fterence wh.;ther 
 h^iuf the lit -ranee of such re n arks is recent or not, as : Negaf Fabms a<iitum 
 es e clas^ibu nol r^ iT^.Vl^canl ; H.y^^ ullos portus pat6re: M. Atdiu.n captu.n m 
 Al-Hcl rv //l//J//iom< • Fabius ,s«yy tluitoia- fleets have no access to Africa ; he denifs that 
 a. V porra ^Xen ;' h^m^diom that M. Atilius was made a prisoner in Afr.ca. Liv '-^, 
 ii^ 'ipreS^diS answers a speech just made by Fabius. In the same answer he places 
 tt- v"rbs of i "■ refer.- n^Mo hii predecessor^ re.narks, promiscuously in the present 
 o^ pera-S Fa i^^p in.ipio <.ratiOtiis commeniomrit, in sentent.a sua P^^^^« «^J/t'-ecm^^^^ 
 
 ne.'i sus'pectam essc^, Fabius, ni the beginning of »'i%^P«r^-»^,JX'pha^.tis^ 
 
 ments might create the suspicion of dispara^'ement. Liv. 2S. 43.-I haI6 e i^^^ 
 
 Pi r He n rifumrat qui tantam pecutdam in Propyhea conjecerit, Demetrius V\m\erL\\* 
 
 ceTmre^ \IJ^^^^ for having sunk so much m.mey in the P;;9Py>«a. C c Off 
 
 2 7 In th s n is-a re Cicero uses a present ten<e i r. respect to remarks which were uttered 
 
 moie I. •M)(\ earf be^^ represents these words as pkksest to him, because he 
 
 "s-nMnc/to refute Ih^ of iemetrius, as if Demetrius were himself present. 
 
 Obs 2 If passa-es from authors are quoted, not only the verbs of saying, but also the 
 verbs denotilli the doings of persons i.Ttroduced hy the author are placed in the present 
 toiK.. For ttie use of the iMPKUFKCT 111 quotations, see item. <u. , u..„!! 
 
 *^"7>fn;/a,md Xeno^ negat se unquam sensiss. senectfliem suam imbecil- 
 
 lirn.m Sctun Cic Sen '> 30 - 2. I )ivTne Plato escam' ma'orum-^ appeVaf voluptatem. 
 b r^il - 3 Ea qu^ "itenda acceperis, tnajOre me.isa.ay.ft.^ r.<ldere "esuHus. Cic 
 
 i\«- Vr w A <M,rVainniis ffi-twtfa'* uMhera^ ess'Jovem. Cic. >f. D. 1, 15.— 0. fccce tini 
 
 lluic subvenlre debCmus, qxitrit eniin auxiluim. tie. 1 use. i. l-K «. 
 Re„i. 4.-). Frequently the present tense is used with the force of a per- 
 fect in stating the facts of a narrative. This present is called the 
 
 HISTORICAL present'. . ^ • ^^ 
 
 CpsirMinuciumcum omni equitatu prcewfU : mw't ut ignl-i in cistns fieri prohi- 
 >TS n*?^n^ 1 his adv -ntus procul sir/itic.tio tiat ; ses- confestim sub-equirfia/ Mmu- 
 • \ .Tn rVr ,nf..st Iv 4^ Minucius in advance witli all the cavalry : he 
 
 ^;;;/Vo , '/1^^ o for d the ifse ;. Xe in the camp, lest any intimation of his,arnval 
 mfXbe ';UV.Cn -^llstance; he .ai(/ he would fodow immediately. Minucms did 
 asdii-ected. Ctes. B. G. G, 29. 
 
 Op- 1 The use of the historical present is not Confined to 'animated and picturesque 
 nan-LTiv:-- as r^ aL S but is solely employel lor th- sake ot varying t^e 
 
 n;rm I tlu M) re lic~ate" to avoid m..notony. In the most conimouplace passages we Ire- 
 nnen.lv tSn<lTsto,'cal presents, and as frequently the most animated narratives ot bat- 
 tles, etc , are related in perlects. ^ * «^ c r?.; 
 obs 2 For the use of the historical present with the force of an imperfect, ?ee § 575. 
 nu«" q Subinnctive clauses dependent on historical presents, if subject to the law of 
 Ons. ?, ^''''■P^Vw:r.liv'fX.th<)se tenses which an ordinary Dresent would require, as: 
 pT!rT^'M! n ;n"s Li i^^ 1 ^co -e io One^^^ Cott^eqne et Titurii calami.tAtem, qui in 
 
 t"i"ir |,i'.'«Tvation (ll lerally ' that tliey wure preserved ■). Cies. B. Q. X, ». 
 
 '_ 7'a passag; of the second part.— 
 
 f^[4. T^'-^ Pr^'riche.'-".» iSp^- .■ being lu noSd of. The ve.e 1. s,K>ken 
 by Andromeda. 
 
302 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 II. PEHFECT TENSE. 
 ^ 56§ The TEiiFKCT TENSE is the general form for predicates express- 
 in' ac^!:. 'hich have happened before the time of the speaker, except 
 
 if "special rules require an ^^^^-^-^^\Z^^^r..,o.a to the English 
 Obs. 1. The Latin iniprrfoct and p.-rfc-c t. /; »; . . !^-^''f ^^ Kern. 42). «) ihal either of 
 prVt^-rit and pres.ntpt rf.ct i^^^^^^^^^^Z tic one or \L oUu-r o/ the tenses in the 
 kr^;;ii:a^.J" Z^^'S^IS::^^^^^^^^ t.. Latin tens, is d.«Vreut irota 
 tliat belvveen the Engb^h ten^^es^. r ,u„ t «tin norfert and imperfect refer only 
 
 OBS. 2. The rules .iven l-^l<!V;;;/"„^Jl\7t .'r^';?/, i"it^ m to each oth.u. 
 
 to their u.e in the inimchTIVK °^" i\v ?"t ti ^es o^ the subjunctive, in the intinilive, 
 
 Whenever tlieconstructmnreiiuii^p.i^t_ttn.tsiooei j tense*» cease.-* to 
 
 paAiciple,or in the Pln»'^''''''"'' ^'^^l^tV- i e am iV'-d withou a^^ to the differ- 
 
 Sxist, L t'hat the verhal tonus >V^'l\!; »^,^ / [^j^ iv Both sentences ' Pericles ce.cris 
 cnce between imper ect and perfect ' .' \^^ ?^» ^^^,*^ ;, ,; ;,,,,fUit ' must have a ly^rfectm- 
 
 s;^^r^:i::^"^nde;!t,!n^^s^|^ 
 
 ^"V^ri^;cat:r^. represent an action as completeo (perfect) 
 atlp!^\i!.:::-n.ed l>y the Ipeake. are placed j^^--;;- ^^ 
 teritiun verfecium), while predicates designated as not complefld at sucli 
 
 Z:iL and end) are placed in the impekkect C^-^-;;;"- ^l^^l^^^t^ 
 Eo quun. veni, praetor guiescel,at ; when I c.... there (^^^^^^^^^^ ^^. ^^^^ 
 time spoken of), the pr.«tor was uestino (not co.npleted at the ttmc 
 spoken of). Cic. Verr 2 4 14 ^^^^^^^ their con.oqucncc. and 
 
 Obs. TI»c Esom^» V^'^'^;.Hn Ht th.- tTme of the speaker; 2) when actions past m 
 results are repr^-^^'i'|e'l «« bis n^ a t - "n- o ^ i.ap'pe.u-d durin- a period conceived 
 the moment of speakm- "'.'^ '^'I't^w-VtHi time can »)e assi-ned to pa>t actions. 1 he 
 a., present to the speaker; 3) ^'^^^^^^ ,^,^\1^\" ve^i^termined by the completeness or in- 
 choice of the two p ist tenses '.'it ^ 'n /cti n i' e tier disregarded, or expres.sed by tlie 
 completeness oi the action. "»''^v»^;/'; V. ^i'/'^But „ Juin the use of the tknsk depends 
 poH.i a>ro-re^Mve "'• ^;<'"^"\';" /,f. *\Ve KTKt> or nV^ compi-ktei^. wliile the English dis- 
 l^^^llonsSiei; ;t:*;wo^:^;sem;J.:c;a;.y d.sre.arded in Latin. 
 
 ; r,rO. Tlte Lalin perfect covers almost the whole gnntnd o Ih Eng- 
 lish lu.. ut-perfect, and a great part of that of the English preteut (past 
 
 '"us^ost Latin g.ammarians ^JivideUieLatiit perfect ^ 
 
 perfect, and an 'iistoiucal perlee 1 Ins c J, ^^/^^^^^ ,„^,,t generally 
 
 ^ua-e, has no '"''''[l^^'"'}- . '? ' ^ ^^ect but ^isis owini,Mo very diflerenl reasons, 
 (not always) be renderc^d '>y '^.^a " iKr"^^^^^ has a relation to the pkesent 
 
 Ihe Latin perlect beins ''«,^.^^''"V'^J ,^'\^,i "^ ucl ion perfect and com- 
 
 t.me, b..t because the P"-';,^!'^^^:; '^.^""^*:^'^.! "c in Lat^^ a past tense cannot be u.ed 
 plele at a past time (See Iteui f ^^.^^)..^^";^ e speak, r's time (11.. A:t). That the 
 at all if theacti(misrei.resentedassti la^n^^^^^^^^^ il evident from the fact that per- 
 
 lYi>^cian. 8, s, 39. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 303 
 
 dependent on historical perfects (for exceptions Pce p. 427 foil.): ^Jf«^i vobis omnia qiiJB 
 ^/Sa/ have imparted to vou ail / know (these being the clo>in- words ol a speech, 
 ecu.-: ; 4.-nanc^nna.n, Cesar, habeo inj.niaui tuam: femU x^lviverem^l rmrer.r 
 n-raius thou ha.-t etleeted that I live and d.e an ungrateful man. ^7': ^«"- ^- ^,- ^|? 
 1 1^ mi Vt ea itled that Iheaucient L^.tin -ran.marians, while lully ex-plaining thecharac- 
 ef\.l the d\ir rent tenses, know nothin.^o^ these two natures of the per ect, which it 
 is safe to say they would have mentioned if they Xvsnijtlt any such dl^lluctlou. 
 
 Ilem 4«. If tlie predicate denotes an action the results or consequences 
 of wliich are still existing at the speaker's time (§ 509 Obs.) it is placed 
 in the peufect both in English and in Latin; but in English on account 
 of the relation of the action to the present time, and in Latin because 
 past actions with results present to the speaker must always be con- 
 ceived as completed in regard to the action as such. 
 
 1. Etsi mihi nulllus noxhe^ conscius^ sum, tamen cum siimmo P';'dOre3 in cont^O- 
 nem* vestram procesn {I have come, and am there now). Liv. 3, bi.- 2. 1 oia i^ "^ rc^-puD- 
 lica atq.ie est mi^erior quam reliquisti. Cic. Att. 2, 21, 1 - 3 Hoc consi o ' »' Koscumi 
 
 vobis jigulandum'^ tradiderunt {they have delivered, «''^.''«f ''?,?;.f .f^ir^^b 'f o^ 
 Ko^c \m. 10, 29.— 4. Omnium harum rerum judicium ipsa natu a in ^^'i"^"* „P,:,.,n, 
 ^oM^^ias jUaced, and it is ther. now). lb. Or. 51, 174.- 5.. Sulpicii n'<;>^^ ;:."1«|' "^^ 
 pnesidium «miiz/u/^. Ib.Fam. 12,5.-0. FecGruntidem quod 'u tioslr|republicasolcnt 
 ei qui per laigitiOnem^'magistraius adept.i sunt (i. e. tenent). ID. \ en. ^, ^, oo. 
 
 Obs. 1. Here belong those verbs which in the perfect are '•ender^d.JXf^^^rb's^^ 
 E!lgli^h verbs denoting the results of the actions expressed by the ^^at m % erbs iiu^iua 
 i,..' the perfect verbs Iniemini, odi, novi), and many inceptives as co«*"ea, 1 ^av*i be- 
 coTne acai.to.ned. or I a.u accustomed (of consuescere) ; ^'f«''«',|.,hf;';;,^^^£f,^;V) as • 
 am drv (of exarescere); conticui, I have become silent, or I am ^' .«''/. ,^'^^^'if'-;/tfnr'ti^ 
 KxiMjlos v.teris vbertdtisexandf, the t^ower of my /.«J^^^'' ^^^^' '».{;., ^,^'"^^^^ 
 Withered. Cic. Brut. 4, Ui.-Jampridem conticuemnt turn ltttcr(B, thy letteis have Decome 
 mule (are mute, it. 42) long since. lb. 5, 19. , . , 
 
 Obs 2 The perfect peril (I have perished, I am dead) frequently is used in the mean- 
 in^fu'a PI F-^ENT state, mostly occurring i i exclamatory sentences, and is rendered 'I 
 a.n lost "am ch.new 11 "similarly vicr(Vicimu.) is used to denote a present or future 
 So^able is".e of a pending dispute or ditiiculty, being variously rendered according to 
 
 its connection. , ., .^,n t»i *. 
 
 1 Pa Salvasum. /;L At ego ;>mt, qtioi^ medulIamMassittIdo9 iierbibitio. Plant 
 
 Sti.'h •>■ TlVi - ' Si senseritiCyj'm.' Ter. And.-. 1,3,8.-3. Bruto si esse "V]"^'f ^"S 
 hl-eb.V,^Vfe!;;.. (o.r .s.cL. U Jtain). Cic^ Att. 14, f \f-- ^; ^-7 sig.uim- ost^md^ 
 emptuin»3 esse : ricisti (/ shall allow you the victory). lb. \ err. 2, 1, 23.- 5. bi cunaem 
 aninium habueiitis, vicimus, milites! Liv. 21, 42. 
 
 Obs 3 Since the perfect denotes the completion of an action at a former time verbs 
 de^ilofi-ng ."^r'.xTii an^d sonietimes other.ve.bi are of.e.i p.egnant y u:;<^^";^h;?^PfjfSich 
 designate tlie state as no h.ng.-r existing at the speak-r . t me. ^"^J., f/jit^-^'rctS 
 havc^the force of a ptescnl with a negation, are rendered ^r'''''*-^^ ^,^^^' «X*^ ^ 
 with *once' or by Eu-lish presents with 'no more," no longer; as. Ego '^iii'""'" 
 s m SiU qu -m m nunc habes, / once had that spirit^.whicb you ''^jj%%^'^^f%%^ 
 V,dmufl^voAf>nt ilium. We are no /o/^ye/•Troja..s, Ilium is no "'^ ^: .VrSofrfam pr^: 
 -Often crwndam is expressly added to perfect, of this kind,. as J-u 1 c ^ ''^^«f '^.P^^^ 
 p.ium populi Uornani longe a domo beliare, tt^wasouce a I»!'^;,''^^'^/;^ j!^i^.."V?^'''i£*;^^^ 
 
 of tlmse who were no more living (literally: who had f ^''V,^,^-'^;,^,^;/-,^ i„\^Vhaf they 
 diJisse pronuntiat. the crier declared that the pleading had an end (littially . tiiat tney 
 
 hud spoken). Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 3U. . , , ^ , r>-„ m.,^^ 
 
 1 Triste est nomeu carendi»* quia subjicitur haec vis'^ ' Habmt, non habet. Cic. 1 use. 
 
 « bribery. 
 
 " stJme - .'paw fo,'--.« p. 154, R. IW, No. i.- " it impl:os Iho mean.ng. 
 
IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 305 
 
 304 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 1 36 —2 Do Cjpparo ct Marcello audlrom non miiinp lubcntor' (}imm dc eis foratoribns») 
 qui 'faerifnrr Cic Brut. 71. 24S.- 3. I)e exncitationc^ ct coiisiMtiidinf diori*. vunc de 
 ratiOiK'fi vidcilnins. lb. Tusc. 2, 18 — 4. Fuif ida nspiiblica quondam : fmf l^ta Kcve- 
 ritiis in jucliciis. lb. Vorr. 2, 5, 18.— 5. Ea via est in coplum, ct in (a?tiiin ennnn qm 
 rixinrnt, et ilium incohint locum, lb. Hop. «. 15.— (>. SuKtcnta te«, nn Tercutia, ut' 
 potes lioneftis!«iino ! VLrimiis,Jtoruimus»f lb. Fam. H, 4, 5, 
 Obs. 4, For past actions continuing at the time of the speaker, pee p. 299. 
 Hem. 47. The Enj^li^^li laiiirnai^e employs the present-perfect if a period 
 of time considered as present to the speaker (as to-day, noic, etc.), is added 
 to the predicate. If such period denotes a time past to the speaker (yes- 
 terday, last year, etc.) the preterit is used in English. But the Latin tense 
 is never determined by such desi<,niations of time, the perfect being used 
 both \\ith hodi'e and Iteri or similar expressions, if the action is conceived 
 as complete at the time spoken of, while otherwise the imperfect must be 
 
 Hocnos ab istis faccrc invTti Tifiri coacti si/mvft, yesterday ire were, much ao:ain8t our 
 
 will, co)t>pdled by them to do this. Cic. Or. 2, 4, 18. But : Itaque hen imrahar qnid 
 
 accidisser, I yestcrdav wondered \vh;it had been the matter (i. e. while a certain action 
 
 was ijoin"- on) Cic. Off. 3, 14. m.— Satis multa a nobis hodie dicta huut, enonjrh /<a.<f 
 
 been mid hy w» to-day. Cic. Or. 1, «2. 2»;4. But : Eum hodie eo-pectabam, 1 have been 
 
 expecd/ig him to-day (while eorae other action was occurrinj:). Cic. Att. 9, 11, 1. 
 
 1. Decemviros intra decern ho.^ aimos ct crearimns ot e repnblica st/f-tidimuft.Uv. 4, 4. 
 
 — 2 Sic nunc ad Antonium Ca-saremque mrrenivivf^ . Cic Brut. 3«, 138.— 3 Ei^o num- 
 
 quam mihi minus quam hesferno die^'^ placiii. Cic. Or. 2, 4. 15.— 4. Crasbus hen nobis 
 
 poUicilus estias civlle'i ad artemi^ rcdact0rum»3. lb. 2, :i3, 142. 
 
 Jiem. 48. Predicates denoting actions to whicii no certain time can be 
 assigned are placed in the perfect, the saiue as in English ; the imper- 
 fect being e.xcluded, because there is, in this instance, no time at which 
 the acticm could be considered incomplete. 
 
 1 Ouam multi exercitus qnibns minns^ prospcra pujma» fortflna/wi/. eruptinnei» 
 facta victOrcm"» hostem ;>f />///? ;t/»/'^' biv. 44, 39.-2. Aircr (luum multosannos (pmnt. 
 uberiOresetrcrri''^ fructns ^olet. Cic. Bnit. 4. ir,.— 3. Apud ccteros phdosophos qui 
 ono'.nrit aiiquid, tacet. lb. Fin. 2, 1.— 4. Mane salutflmu>"' d<.mi bono» viros mulios; 
 {ihi2o ^alutano2l deJluHf^-, litteris me involvo^a. n,. Fam. 9. 20.- .\ Hunc tu pauperem 
 putas an dis imm<»i talihus similem qui sc Ibrtflnis omnibus WJ/ir^*.?* Sen 1 raiiq. 8.— 
 ti. Certamiiia S ncWbmxnx^^ fuh'vnt erunique pluribus populis magis exitio^» quam bella 
 externa. Liv. 4, 9. 
 
 § 571. The Latin perfect has the force of the English tretebit (past 
 tense) whenever the action is conceived as having been completed at 
 the time spoken of (§ 500). Hence the perfect is the regular tense 1) to 
 express the facts of a narrative (historical perfect or aorist); 2) to 
 desinnate detached past actions to which an author refers in argumenta- 
 tive style (Ex. 2-4). The instances in which such actions are conceived 
 as non-complete, and are placed in the imperfect, are specified § 572 
 
 foil. . ^ 's^-, ^ 
 
 1 Per«eus innremm est castra (conpnlis"» nnllo sunrum ronnte. ConsvrrfTir-^ cnnpul, 
 
 nnvTcssusque panllum introeunti-^» rej;i dextrani ; w;«i/-».summittenteinque sc»" ad 
 
 ])edes siixtidit ; iiit rodurtu ni in t aben iaculum^^ cimA([crv^-ju^\<it.JlA\\_^^ 7.- i Cato 
 
 "~MVTtl, i,(>lef!< pU'^Hirey^' whfTare deceased, are no more living.— » as to ex«'rcise — 
 
 <Tam done with it.- » method.- « keep up thy spirit-* — Mnsiead of ^«/«/yt.-" our 
 
 lilc, our lianpine-s are trone.— » i. e. in tlie treatise.- '<> the same as ^6/t.- " civil law. 
 
 — »•■' science.— »3 to reduce.— '•» //<</(«/.>•' pro,<pera. unrav(.rable.— »» a soriie.— »« victorious. 
 _ n to rout.- i»^ to bear.- »» to receive.- 2» »is M)on a-.- ^» rece[.tion.- ^i to «ease. 
 
 — a» 1 bury myself in my books.- " to divest.- " taction, party.- ^« nun.- to rise. 
 
 — 28 to enter.— 2» to tender.— a» f€ ad pedes snmtnittcre, to full on one s kueee.— •» tent. 
 
 — 32 lo take a peat. 
 
 1- 
 
 rudi sipculo litterns Grrecas didicit. Quint. 12, 11,23.-3. Hocvernm o^t, dixit enim 
 LutJUins. Cic. Or. 2, 40, 173.— 4. llaic statua est etfuit lota Grsecia summo houOre. lb. 
 Verr. 2, 2, 35.' 
 
 Obs. In the historical perfects of passives and deponents the auxiliary e^se is fre- 
 quently drojjped. 
 
 1 Thraces» domos^ dilapH^, Cretenses< spem pecunia? f^eciiti (i. c.sunf).Uv 44, 4.5. 
 — o lli^ audltis clamor cum inirenti plausu* frrtus (i. e. est). lb. 4o, 1.-3. Po^t^ro die 
 eeniltus in curia habitus'^ (i. e. ed), supplicationesque' decrStae (i. e. sunt), lb. 4o, Z. 
 ^ 572. Poets and later prose writers, in imitation of the Greek aorist, 
 sometimes use the perfect to designate habits referring to all times, inti- 
 mating by the use of that tense a past (complete) experience on which the 
 
 assertion is founded. 
 
 Such i>erfpcts are rendered by English presents, or by the use of the auxiliary ' icilV : 
 Mon -erls acervu8 et auri ie«irr,to domini deduxit corpore febrls, no pile of money 
 and L'old via take disea<es from the body of the sick owner. Hor. Epist. 12, 48.— 
 li^^e ? cc.Tumi m.Mis omnibus una est : auiisso ntpir^' fidem constructaque mella dm- 
 mlve iusa^ • as long as the queen remains, all (bees) have one mind ; whenever she is 
 UxjZTwill ma^mK and destroy themselves the cells constructed (by thern). \irg. 
 Geo 4 212 - Multa quam supervacua essent non intellexvnus nisi quuni deesse ccepS- 
 nim Thesupcrtluitv of many things we will not comprehend except when they begin 
 [< be wailtin" Sen. Ep. 12-3.- In the first example the perfect ded^iMt^Vimy also be ex- 
 nlained bv understanding the adveri) v»qmm {has ever takeii). In this way the per- 
 
 ?e?iklrea?ly occurs iti S.Olast : Avaritia Pe^""yV!"^i,"r.v u^ Sh^II Tat^'lH'^ VV^^^^^ 
 co/^rw/>I/i/. which no wise man has ever coveted (w.ll covet). Sail. Cat 11, 3. \V it i 
 Si as subject, a similar usage of the predicate occurs already in Cicero : Multi 
 q n bes'e vdlent, pro/.e,vmf. et quum prodesse, ob/uSnwf, many \<iredone ^,ood 
 (Will do irood) when they meant to do harm, and have done harm (will do harm) when 
 they meant to do good. Cic. N. D. 3, 28, 70. 
 
 in. LMPERFECT TENSE. 
 A. General requirements op the Imperfect. 
 § 573. The Imperfect represents the predicate as not completed at 
 a past time assumed by the speaker : Ciesar hostis prosequi vetuit quod 
 loci naturam ujnorabat, C. forbade to pursue the enemy because he did 
 not know (was unacquainted with) the locality. Cas. B. G. 5, 9. Here 
 the predicate ignorahat is represented as not completed and going on at 
 the lime assumed by the author, ^. ^. at the time when the prohibitory 
 order was given. 
 
 ?m;!f,lctiatt[li.ri.mlTl/.laltcr being placed ill the iMPKBrECT, but the lormer m tbe 
 PKRFECT (or historical present, see R. 45). 
 
 Uem 49. Whether a past action is to be considered as complete or 
 incomplete in the grammatical sense of the word, depends 1 on the na- 
 ture of the action hself (^^574) ; 2) on the time which the speaker assumes 
 in connection with it (§ 575). ^ 
 
 » The Thracian*» — ^ instead of in dornos sua-% to their homes.- 
 Cretans.- «applause.- « to hold.- ' thanksgivings. 
 
 » to disperse.— * the 
 
300 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 IMrERFECT TENSE. 
 
 307 
 
 Ob^ 1 The author, in inlrodncinjj past actions, trnnpfcrs himself in idea to a past 
 tinierOu thf stand-point inn-jr.ird to tiiiu' thus a-unu-d by thc:mih(.r. dopends thr n^e of 
 Ihf ten<e 'IMiis t;ta d-uomt of the author may ho a d(»iil)Ie oiu-. In thi- hrst place, he 
 ;nav vhnnn/ the lime with the acti..n introduced, so tliat tlje predicate determines its 
 own lime wuicli mav he chaiiired wiih every suhsequent Dreihcate. In this instance the 
 author dwells on t e"actu)n as Urn- as it la-ted. The time viewed Irom this stHnd-point 
 is ca""d 'TiMK \\\so\a:ik\ and the action is said to he 'c<)mi)lete pn .-e . Such predi- 
 cit.'H are ,or, at hast, oii-ht to he), always in the i-eukect, as ih.- perlect in the example 
 S511 No 1 and most of the perfects in the examples hehmirini,' to ^d.i» and ^. J» I. N <'ry 
 rarelv medicate^ denotinu' such actions are found in the impeufect; hut they must he 
 co..8i(lered.is suleeisms, as : Vicesimum ah Carano, qui primus re.7//(/A(/f (fauUy. instead 
 uW^r/Narit) I»,i>eanumerjlhant, they reckoned Perseus as the tw«-ntieth Ovinj? of Mace- 
 doii) IVoui Caranns. who rtk/ntd tirst (was tlie first kin-), Liv. Ao. 1>. lu Cicero, Lui^ar, 
 and >allust, improper imperfects of this kind are not loiind. 
 
 Obs 2 Tiie other way of determinini; the time of actions is hy connectinij them 
 with a past time, which tlie author has introduced aside from the actioii uself. Ihe 
 time thus assigned to the action is termed 'Time Relative'. Tiie pre.hcate, m t^iis 
 instance is placed in Ihe imperfect if the actioii is conceived as nicomplete (^ .j.4), 
 hut ill th'e PEKFKcriril is represenlrd as finished (comidete) at the time assumed hy the 
 author It makes here no dift'eience, whetlier tiie action is of a Ioniser or shorter dura- 
 tiou If the action is conceived as finished at the time <;iven hy the author, lie tlwelis 
 in his mind on the action duriuir its whole extent, the same as m 'time absolute , and 
 the i)redicate is placed in the perfect; Ilelvetii eS tota nocte itruvt, the Helvetians 
 jiiavclied (continued their march) during that whole nij^ht. Cie*. B. (». 1, 26. Here, by 
 ttie perfect ur>nif, the act of marchin- alllioimh a continued action, is represented as 
 complete at the jjiven tim<> (ea toia i\wAv).—M<insit Silviis omnibus co;,'iiomen qui Allnc 
 re<Miavenint the name'Silvii' remaned with all who ruled at Alba. Liv. 1, ;i i He 
 time (rel,ttive)of the action 'mansit' is implied in ^ AlhiE regnnr?n(iit' \ the predicate 
 7nan'<if, represented as laslinj? at that time, is in tlie perfect hecause the fact caiiie to an 
 end at ihe close of the period, and hence is conceived as complete at that time.— bupera- 
 vii posteaCinna cum Mario; tum. clarissimis viris interfectis, lumina civitaiis exftncta 
 ftunf, at that time, hv the murder of the most prominent men, the li<,'ht-- of the state trere 
 exdnfjuiahed. Cic Cat. 8, 10.— Hannibal, diim miirum Incautius suliit, trairuhl iclusa<i</</. 
 Liv 21, 7. Here the time of tin; predicate ctcidit is determined hy the time ol another 
 actioii ulum subit); being complete at that time, the i)redicaie must be placed m the 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 § 574. Verbs in tlie itiipeifect denote eillur (^0 a statk existing at a 
 given time (R. 50), or {h) an action in pkoghess at the time (imper- 
 fects of CONTINUin) ACTION, OF of rilOGIlKSSIVE ACTION, W. 51), 01* (r) AN 
 ACTION llEPEATED (imperfects of REPEATED ACTION, li. 54). 
 
 Obs. Imperfects denotinj? acts of the mino, as (xhtlmare, tinilre, cc'ire, etc., may be- 
 loii" to anv of the above three classes : but imperlects of tiiis kind, on account of 
 several features peculiar to them, are treated as u separate class of impeifecis, beinjj 
 termed ' imperfects of inner action'. (§ 5«2.) 
 
 Rem. 50. Predicates denoting states are grnmniatienlly considered as 
 not completed or tintinished as long as the state is e.xistiiig. Hence such 
 predicates are i)laceil in the imim;kfect if the state is represented to have 
 been in existence jit and beyond a time mentioned by the author. Here 
 liclong the verb esse, either as a copula, or with a perii)hrastic participle 
 (§ 500), or in the meaning ' to exist' ; mane re ; immiiteve ; servi/e^U) be 
 a slave ; jyitere, to be open, to extend ; diatdre and ahcxse, to be distant; 
 Jlarere, to liourish, and all verbs used to describe things, localities, and 
 persons : ' 
 
 Simul in eilvam ventum est uhi plures diversn? semitne emnf. at the pame time they 
 came to a forest, where there ictre (existed) several paths in difl*erent directions (i. e. 
 at and fjei/ond the time of the cominir). Liv. 44, 43.— Ciesar hunc locum probilrat quod 
 superiOrisaniii munitiOiies inte^'ra? manebdiit. hecause last year's fortifications still 
 remained unhurt (were still in tjood order at that time). Cies. B. (}. «, 32.— Ctc^ar turrls 
 consiitiiere coepit, nam circumvaihlre loci natQra woftibtbat, for the nature of the local- 
 ity did not allow to enclose (the town) with a wall. Cies. B. G. 7, 17. See Ex. 1-5. 
 
 I 
 
 Obs. 1. Imiierfects of this kind are generally rendered hy the English common form 
 of the preterit, only * transient slates ' admitting of the progressive form. 
 
 Obs 2 Predicates expressing states existing at the time spoken of, are frequently 
 placed in the perfect, in order to imply that the state ceased to exist (was • completed') 
 at a later time. The author dwells then in idea on the wliole time the state was in ex- 
 istence, reprt sentiDir it bv the i>erlect tense, us finished at that time. This perlect 
 passes over into the negative perlect considered. K. 46, OBS. 3.— Via Nomentana, cui 
 tum Ficulensi nomen /«t^ profecti ^unt, they departed hy the Nomentum road, which 
 ^m.-.' then called ?^iculensis. Liv. 3. 5-2.— Civitas ea (Saguntum) Ionize opuleiitissima/wi^ 
 ultra Iberum, tliat citv was (at the time before Hannibars siege) by tar the wealthiest 
 beyond the Iber. Liv.*21, 7 (this condition of the city having ended by its destruction). 
 ISee Ex. G. 7. 
 
 Obs. .3. A predicate denoting a state no more existing at the time spoken of. is gener- 
 al h placed in the pluperfect. Sometimes, however, such predicates are found in the 
 perfect (never in the imperfect, if the action denotes a state), as : Hue ex ilia domo 
 ptjetori.1, quie reiris HicrOnis/?/i^, emigrabat. to this place he (Verres) would move Irom 
 that prietorian palace which had been king Hiero's. Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 12. The imperfect 
 eral would represent the palace as belonging to Uiero at that time, who was then dead 
 long since. 
 
 1. Eraid omnTno itinera duo quihus Ilelvetii domo exTre possent : unum per Sequa- 
 nos, angustum et dilficile; monsantem altissimus im>)^ridtbat^ . Cses. B.G. 1,6. — 2. Hel- 
 veti'orum fines ill longiiudinem milliapassunm CCXL -atebant'^. Ih. 1,2.-3. Plusapud 
 me eOrum auctoritas valet' qui MagnamGneciam, quienunc quidem del6ta est. tum* 
 Jlorehat, price ptis* suis erudierunt. Cic. Am. 4, 13.— 4. Facigbat» cum pupiiia^ con- 
 siietado^ juris ejus quod tvat tum quum Asellus est mortuus. Cic. \ err. 2,1,41. — 
 5. Crebris» arhorit)Us succfsis'" omnes introitus" erant prcecliisi^^. Caes. B. G. 5, 9. — 
 ()'. Airer Tarqiiinioruin'3 qui inter urbem et Tiberim /«i/, consecratus Marti est. Liv. 
 2^ 5.2. 7. lianc modestiam'* ubi nunc iu uno inveneris quaj tum populi universi/wi^,? 
 Liv. 4, 6. 
 
 Rem. 51. Predicates denoting the performance of an action are con- 
 sidered as incomplete Avhile the performing of the act is in progress. 
 They are ])laced in the imperfect if the action was in progress at the tiine 
 assumed bv the author (U. 49, Obs. 2). In English, predicates of this kind 
 are generally ex pressed by the rROGUESSiVE form of the preterit, except in 
 the instances mentioned obs. 1. : In ea civitSte duo de principatu inter se 
 conteiidibant, in that city two men vers stryggling with each other for 
 the highest power (at the time of Ciesar's arrival). Cti^s. B. G. 5, 3. — Cres- 
 cehat interim iirbs, meanwhile the city icas qroicing {i. e. while Romulus 
 established its institutions). Liv. 1, 8. See Ex. 1-3. 
 
 Obs. In the following instances imperfects of actions in progress are in English 
 expressed by the common form of the preterit : 
 
 1) Generally in the passive voice : Dum ea Romani parant jam Saguntum oppyqnabahir. 
 While tiie Ko'mans were i)rej)arin<,' these things, Satriintum was already besieged. Liv. 21, 
 7 See Ex 4. 5 The progressive form in the passive is used only if the common form 
 would mean an accomplished fact (p. 127, B. l*i), as : Reirni certamine ambigCbant fra- 
 tres; major minore ah fratre pellebdtur. The brothers were engaged in a combat for 
 the throne; the older brother was being driven out by the younger. Liv. 21, 31. (Ex. 6.) 
 
 2) If the Latin verb, denoting an action in progress, is expressed by the English copula 
 with a predicate-noun or adj<'Clive, as: Exierat cum Crasso L. Cotta, qui t^m tribuna- 
 tuiii ptlcbaf, who wa.s then a candidate for the tribuneship. Cic. Or. 1, 7, 25. (Ex. 7 .) 
 
 3) Generallv p'-edicates denoting acts of llie mind, as: Rexquarta vigilia profllgit: 
 pefPbat \mphipolim. he inUnded to rearA Amphi polls. Liv. 44, 43.— Responsum anceps 
 datum (est) quia faiCri piqeMt in potestate sua Latinos jam non esse, because they dis- 
 liked (were loath) to owifthat the Latins were no more under their control. Liv. 8, 2. 
 (Ex. 8-10.) ^ 
 
 1 Hun"- over (the road), controlled the road.— ^ t. e. at the time of the emiirration pro- 
 jected by the Helvetians.— 3 ;>/«« tulet, weighs more.— « supply « but' — » teach- 
 
 ln<r _ • was in favor of.— ' his ward.— » practice.— * in many places, (in large num- 
 beTs). Seep. 247. R. 20.- »» wm</^;r, to cut, to fell.— »' approach.— " precluded.— 
 »3 belonging to the Tarquinii.— •* moderation. 
 
308 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 4) When predicate, denotin.^ the P-'---^^^^ «[ .Sj^.^Ji^^..^^.^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 ^ 5) Iinhe instances of preirnant imperfects mentione^ R. 52. ,,^,.:„,e9 u«ed 
 
 11111111^« honoris (a Manu) '':*^!V' P\'^;j\ '. ,h f.\tis tril)nC-t) .t'^ coercendnm quibiiscun- 
 
 ?c.n q«.e eient»« tuta ab hostibus ,ed<ilbat^'. Ca>^. 13. G. 2, 5 
 r1 52 InipM-f.-cts of continned action (R 51), arc frequently usee 
 ■^i luic^x^T that the actinn expressed by the verb, althou-h 
 
 U i a c mplete o r^.c,n .'^^ includes an imperfect «f a state existtng 
 or of n^rrei ve ^ by itui'lication ; as : C^rsar Crassu.n SamarobrlVc^ 
 
 pr4m' ie '^^^^^^ ^tttribuil, quod ibi i.npedi.ueuta exere.tits reUngu^ 
 £ cisarlnp(,int d Crassus co.utuauder of Samarobnva and ^'^ve h n 
 
 le.'ion bec^u.se he Z.// there the ba^age^ of the army (...quod ib,, 
 
 nuun decederet, impedimenta erant). C*s. B. G. 5. 4.. bee Ex. 1 .. 
 
 ' OBS. Lnporfects of this kind are f-a-JlJy -^^^ ^l^Xi? inne^f!^" 2^cf Str".:^;^ 
 a previous |,:jssa.v '"••^- ^Xir'^not u" eauJ - of peri-..nnance. Such predi. 
 
 i„^ta..ce vvitl» a view t. <»'^ ' \" 'V^;;, * "^^V^KJcai^e th.'V pngnantlv include an inner 
 cate< are siirniflcantly placed n. i he '«'P' '•,,'' ^^'^'^^\" L' JJ 4,° TheV nu.st frequenily 
 STATK (can.a. vwdu., «;<••> j^y'^VA'CL^^^^^^^^^ obj.-cts.^.o that, 
 
 occur in sentences ni.rodu.ed by ^''/' ^' fi''^^'^''^ '" from K-is to the puEDirATE 
 
 /,rr^ to malce a report.- »Mo ^ yt _ofl. nce^^^^^^^^ «^^^^^^ 
 
 Mhy.'v.-.rv P^^^^i'^V-'T r.7/r hTs^e.^- ' ' o rim^ '' fenred for the safety ..I the 
 
 ties) ^v V^',';;^;;'-^- L^^'"1V\ ' ' ;.*:! U''a'„c' o,-^ ..'ti particular tin.e .tated in a previo.ts 
 Sn^ ^^•«'UVe dead'than aliv"" " sin..r - ^^ i. .. -'<\ .J^^ PJ^^;-- ^^ ^21T.Z 
 ^ntaMnt). s,> that he was con^pelled to ^^^^^^^^^^^^f^'l^^^.s. quod 
 allow a profit -" i^.qn;e ^"7^ ^^^'-^J ' ' J /.^^^^^^^^^^ '" »"« "ccmint- 
 
 ^::::S^\iC:^ t.;Tmcmurandum-book.- 3» i. . 
 
 quae erat causa cur relinqueres. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 309 
 
 RoFcinm. Cnr saibtbas ? Ib. Ropc. Com. 3.— 6, Socinmi tibi in eis bonis' edidisti» 
 Qiiinctiiim. f'nm «-o tu voluntariam societateni* c.oVjas'> qui te in hereditaria socie- 
 tate* IraudSrat^ y Ib Quinct. 21. 7»'»,— 7. Quum i<;itur eos vincTret quos secum habg- 
 hat, t<' folflinm»* Komam vnt't'mii'^f Ib. Dej. 7. 22.-8. Hoc igitur per gaMlna? Jupi- 
 ter tantie civiiflti ^ilr^lnm'o dabat^^ f Ib. Div. 2, 6. 56.-9. Eoniodo inter se duo 
 imiteratores, sunimi viri, certabant^^^ ipsi pares, ceterum opibus disparibus. Sail. 
 J III;. 52. 
 
 Rem. 53. Frequently actions are treated as incomplete, the verbs beini? 
 placed in tlic imperfect, 1) to intimate that the action was not carried out, 
 but remained an UNACCOMPi.isnED or unsuccessful attempt (Obs. 1) ; 
 2) to represent the doer as liaving been on tue roiNT of performing the 
 
 action (Ous. 2). 
 
 Ons. 1. Imperfects of unnccomplished attempt arc used : 1) Of actions commenced, 
 but rcmainiKs^untinisbcd. Such imperfects an' rendered either by 'endeavored to," or by 
 the proirressivf form of the verb, as: t^uod evelli primi hastati si^mumnon potuit, timide 
 f«>rtas8(; siu'iiifer ereUehat quod tldenter inflxerat. As to the fact that the standard of the 
 lir^^t 'hasiatus" could not be taken out of the jrround, the standard bearer perhaps en- 
 deuvored witiiont contidence to tear out (was p.-rh-ips tearing out with timidity) what he 
 had inj-erted with assurance. Cic. Div. 2. 31. H7 (E.k. 1. 2). 2) Of acticms which, as such, 
 Avere liMi^hed and completed, but without the expected results, for instance orders not 
 executed, or appointments not kept ; as : Ibi Chiudius maniim inj6c!t, scqulque ^ejube- 
 bdf. Then Claudius laid hands on her and ordered her to follow him. Liv. 3. 44 (the con- 
 nection showing that she did 7wt follow him). Ex. 3, 4. Thus such imperfects are used 
 of motions in riebates (expressed by verbs expressing the object of the moti(m). which 
 wore not adopted, or laid over to another time, the matter remaining in statu quo for 
 the time being, as : Ex hac etro lege (minia ilia follTbam, quse ad privatOriim incoinmo- 
 diim pertiiiel)aiit ; Siillanrnum poss'.'ssiOnes ro?>;?/7/?f7Artm; sed ha^c tota res, interpellSta 
 hello, refi ixit. From this law I proposed to take out all that pertained to the disadvantage 
 of private persons ; Jicas mlllngtoconfijin the titles of Sulla's partisans: but the whole 
 atfair. ii.terrupted bvthe war, came to riouLdU. Cic. Att. 1. 19, 4.— A Kal.Febr, legatiOnes 
 in Idus Fel>r. re}irub(tntur, \\w question about the legations fvafi laid over from the firstof 
 Febniaiy to the Ides. Cic. (^u. Fr. 2. 3. 1. In the same way the imperfects cm^/^^m daf^t, 
 retd/tat. etc.. in Ex. .5, denote that Gracchus unsuccessfiiily proposed laws to give the citi- 
 zenship, to f('rt>id. etc. ^ , . , 
 
 Obs. 2. The imperfect denotinir that the doer was on the point of performing the 
 act ion. agrees in its general meaning with the imperfect of the periphrastic future (u. 132, 
 K. 144), but it represents the execution of the desiirn as diiectly impehding. while the 
 imperfect of the periphnistic future represents the action merely as contemplated with- 
 out any regard to immediate execution. Such imperfects of the verb itself can only be 
 used if it is made clear by the connection that the author could not mean the performance 
 of the a^^tion as such, as: A. D, VI. Id. Maj. quum has dabam litteras, ex Pompejano 
 proficisctbar. On the intli of May T waft on the jmnf of departing from the Pompejanum 
 when I w.is writintr tliis letter. Cic. Att. 5. 2, 1. Here the meaning of the imperfect 
 could not be mi-taken since the letter was nor likely written on the rond. But : Mar- 
 cellns templum quod (edificaturtiaerat (not adificdbuf) eis rebus ornate quas ceperai, noluit. 
 Verr 2, 4. 5.5. Here m/ificdfxit would mean the building of the temple actually per- 
 fortned This kind of iinperfect is also used with the force of the hypothetical imper- 
 fect of the periphnistic future (p. 232, R. 144). See p. 730, l(Ex. 0-11). 
 
 1. Ilenna's tu simulacrum'* Cereris tollere aud^bas^^ ? Henna tu de manu Cereris Vic- 
 toriam'« eripere condtun eff Cic. Verr. 2, 4. 50.— 2. Ad ea Crisplnus (dixit), iiec sihi nee 
 illi hostlsdeessein (juibus virtfltem ostendant'', conversusquei* 0^16«?'*. I.iv. 25, 18. — 
 3 Vocare tribus extemplo populus j*/^/^7>a/ ; ille tamen dies intercessiOne'-^o est subia- 
 tus". Ib. 10, 9.— 4. Miserije nostra? tribuas22 qnod a Vil)5ne, quo te arcesseMmi'S^^, 
 subito disres-imus. Cic. Att. 3. 4.— 5. C. Gracchus dabaf^* civitatem^s omnibus Itali- 
 cis, e xteiuUbnt eam pa^ne usque ad AipTs; dividebat agros ; vetdbat quemqnam civium 
 
 » Partner.— ' property.— 3 to declare (by public entry).— < partnership.— » to enter, 
 Paraphra-e : Quae erat mens tua qnum colres?— « joint heirship— ^ to defraud. — 
 " fiee, at largo.— ^ i. e qua? ^m^ mens tua quum mitteres ?— "> warning. — *' i.e. num erat 
 (esse poterai) Jovis consilium ut daret ?— J'» to contend ; i. e. hie erat modus quo certS- 
 bant.— »» from Henna, a Siciian town — '* image.— 1* the connection shows that this 
 attempt was unsuccessful, while the attempt de-^ignated by comtm es in the next 
 verse was carried out.— '* a Victoria (statue of ).— i^ inst. of a«^ewrf<?ry /)0*.«fn^— ^Mnstead 
 or s'f convertit et abibaf.— •* The connection shows that Crispinus did not leave the place. 
 — -0 intercession of the tribunes.— 21 to frustrate.— 22 to attribute.— ^s he summoned 
 Atticus.butdid not keep the appointment.— ^4 proposed to give— 2« right of citizenship. 
 
310 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 plus qninscntiP jn-orisi hnbCrc : jmWcla fnwiferibaf iid cqnitr«. \ clloj. 2 fi - 6. Phi 
 U\m\ litU'iis U-cns mu.avi con^^ilium .ie muli.'r.bus.qnas, ut scnp^t'ram.ad teR..mam 
 rendtWxiW' C'ic Att. 7, 23, 2.- 7. Tunc esseia hoc ai.imadvcrteiidum* quuin dasMS 
 ^^rlci^prot^ceMtu^. lb. V.rr. 2. 5, 43.- 8 Nam ...m q"'>"l I'f/Y^' if-fsT 
 eiiciehan,*, reliquain fOnjunHOrum mamiin simul exunram puiabam. lb. cat. .i, a -i. 
 - y Qnuin ei.? Catill.uim ex urUo i>etimm, hoc provi.lCbam ammo i.on m.hi esse 
 reihC- it MiicdtSto.n piMtimfscendam. lb. 3, 7, 1«.- 10. Nn.n dubita. id me impcrante 
 f^c're"'q 1. ja.n tua 'p..nte r\mef>a.'< f lb. 1, 5.- 11. Has U-aiiOne. CiC.ar, quod in la- 
 fail /mlA76«/', ad so revcrli jussit. Ca's. B. G. 2, 35.- 12. roriu" lo tnnms cop.ar.nu 
 daiuinTst) quia Mai.lius emu hand invalido"* pne.idio» in Galham mitUOidur^^. 
 Liv. 21, 17. 
 
 Rem. 54. Predicates arc placed in the imperfect to represent the action 
 as INDEFINITELY KEPKATKi) at a «^Mveu liiiic, the repetition beini; under- 
 stood toiroonat that time. The Ireqnent repetition without dehnite 
 limits marks tliu action as incompletk in the sense explamed above : 
 Primo adventu exercitus nostri hosles crebras ex oppido excursiones 
 faeiebant parvulisque procliis cum nostris conteiuUbant, At the hrst 
 arrival of our armv, tin; enemv icere makinf/ freciuent expeditions Innn 
 the town, and fought m small skirmishes with our men. Cics. B. Cr. --, 6{). 
 Ob^ 1 Mere iiiiperfi'Cts (without any other addition) arc not used to denote repeated 
 action' if"it would be h-lt doubtful whe.l.er tbe predicate \r^ *"'^'%'\''Vh/nl!' sJu'^S's 
 actions, or one continued action in progress at a -iven uiue. 1 h us in .»»'«,,''^' '^">^^^' 
 Ex 1-7 every ambi^'uity. in this respect, is removed hy tlie connection itself. In I'.x. » 
 fhe predicate 2.roc..?2^>u'Mvould be arKRFEcTif it had be.n ^'^^''\ H^^^IS^'^luc^ 
 Mu.'lH • proce>>ion ' of ti.e prefects, which could not iiave been considered as ' C(>in- 
 Dlcte ' at ihe time assumed bv the author. Nui.tiOrum pars depi;eliensa (ab ho.tibus) in 
 conspectii no-t.Oium militiua cum cruci:1iu mm^.(7/'//' l>art oril.c ^'^^^^^IS^^.'^^ 
 seized were killed with tortures in the eiyht oJ our soldiers. Cies. B. (». o, 4j. 1 he im- 
 ped c m/ft/?/'/rden<.tesr.peated action, implying that several execution.s were occur- 
 ri, .' a K l.'o 111' on at the ti.ne spoken of, each messenurr beimj kUIe.i whenever geize.l 
 The execution of all at one time would have been a complete act at the time spoken of, 
 renuiriu" the pkufect tense. -Quum uteniue. utrimque exisset exercitus in coll^pecttl 
 fere( ue e re-ione castrin castm iH)uibant, When b«»th armies. had started to manh 
 each on «me of the two banks of the river, they pitched camp in si-ht "'• ''!'^ »''"[■ J 
 opposite to each other. Cas. B. (i. 7, liV The connection of thi« p:.8saL'e «liows hat 
 thi^ method of pitchin- camp was repeatedly done at a time when Cie>ar\x.s ak- 
 in - ceftsiin measures. The mak'n- of the two camps on one sin-le wcasion would have 
 inrplied an action complete at the «jiven time, requiring: a PKKFtcT. See Ex. .♦. 
 
 Sometimes pn-dicates may be classified either a.s imperlects .»f continued or of re- 
 peated action, without an V dilTerence in sense, as : Jam fetiefHW ur arieiibus inuri Then 
 ffie w^ll. >xere battered by rams. Liv. 21, S. It is indifTerent whether ^^'^^^'^'y']^^:^^^ 
 ceived as one continued action in progress, or as an ai:-re-ate oi repeated blows bj the ram. 
 Obs 2 Repeated actions», if represented to be uegularly done accord ins: to some 
 principle, routine, rule, or habit, pass over into the imperfect of haiut (> ot>o, which 
 usually, althouirh not necessHrily. implies repeated actums ot the same kind as . 1 uc 
 Verresex ilia domo fw^f/m^a^ I'hiiher Verres v^ed to move (every spnni:) Ironi that 
 bon-e Cic Verr 2 5 12. Tlie perfect emigrant would denote a sniLde chan<;e ul hm 
 a lode complete' at the time spoken of. See Ex. lU-13. Here belon- actionn, repre- 
 sented to be di.ne whunkveii (as often as) another event happened (impekfect or roN- 
 TivcKNT ACTION «cc § 579) : Hi, quamcuiique in partem impetum fecerant. hostis loco 
 cedJre conlbanL "Wherever they made an attack, they {ieri>darl>j) diModmi the enemy. 
 CeV B ('2 41- \theniHsenteniiaqiinm judicitnis iXarmw^mteri-ogabatur reus quaiu 
 :e'-ii'matiOnem commernisse e.e confiterGt.ir, When at Athens a case was passed over to 
 t^.ejudy^ to pronounce sentence, the accused 7mx a.-<kfd (.evr// /i//^ accord.n- to the 
 routine of thee».urts), wli*t. amount of punishment he confessed that he had deserved, tic. 
 
 Or. 1, 54. See Rem. (>5. (Ex. 14. 15). . . 
 
 I Acres.— 2 The connection shows that he did not send the women to Rome - » inst 
 of fuis^et— * to attend to.- ^ The c(mneciion shows that the matter could n..t h'iiv«;heen 
 done after the lle^'t had sailed.- • The connecti..n makes it clear that ''^"•-jjj^^^^'l "[^J^,^^ 
 tion could not be meant, which also would have requinM a perfect. 1 he eamt s the 
 case with p4rebam in the next, senience, and Jacubas m No. U).- ' was ••' l'/''; « ^? /^^^^ 
 part (was haxteninf/ in En-lish has the same meanimr ol a future act).- ^ haudinialidus, 
 pretty strong, respectable.— » force.— i» Manlius had not yet left at that tune. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 811 
 
 ate "^a^'i^t'-^te, he 2ro W rrw^^^u. juc^^ s ^^^^^^^ y^^.^^ .^ represented as 
 
 K. the former dec sion. L n . 3,^. %'r\^^{^r-fl^^^^y Ucn be rendered by 'used to ' 
 ^::^^f^&Z:^TZ^^^ ^- the examples in oB. 2.- 
 
 ^ Ob' f IMhc action i^ represented Jo ^ a ve l-^^^V^^^l^^^^^^^^ 
 
 probably was oftener 'Y;']'^':^llX/^^ee^^^^^ fo"^ that punishment which 
 
 iervos damnatos Mjerabat, \ •^"J^f/^^^^ He Verr 2 5 8. The cnnection shows that 
 he infictul on uncondeinned » '^^' f «•..^V'fw J ^, ^,; ^veand one master.-Quum amies 
 b<„h ac.ion. were only once d'j .- >" «-«^y ^ t« ^. ^.^^l^ ^.^ ^err. 
 
 " ^;.'k;:mq;^.te. mum« ^^^^^^^^S^^^^^S^^ 
 
 tate* eventus ^^'T^ Z^'^SntZ!^^^^^^ lb. 2, 16.- 5. Interim juvenea 
 
 captTv s, trans Sabim flunien oinnls .^•-r\^ob con lu .. tiogtium copife summis- 
 
 c?bninai ,,r^/,«;,^.o jn semT.um '>P'>"J-^tesque. U^ M,^^._ 0. \l««\>^"5\^,^^.di,ione om- 
 pis'i a regeauxilii<crebro augebaMur. C.«^- /J^^' ,' , -i nertii acia (minium fortunaa 
 ^les Palatn ^....f.;./-, et cuin At j^. a^^^^^^^ i^S ubi ex oppidis pra.- 
 
 perturbari'3 vellet. II). 2 3b.-8. Mctumsiii^xu ^j » „ ■ veteres navis paucis 
 
 Jecti regii obvii procedcbant J^. J"^- 46 -^9. ^ ''^ » ^, f^^j,,^ .^.erces ementieban_. 
 rebus imposit IS, U'l'^'^'l'^r^'"^^;"''' f^^/" ;^'\ „ 'i" j^^^^^ facile septimum diem supera- 
 tur^^. Liv. 2.5, .3 - lO'/^Ji; '"[^'^;-^ .V",i;;;iaraS aii/ tuoB (O C^sar) 
 
 bant^^. Ih. 41, St.- 11. 1 <;" >y^ ^ 4 i" !!irx ,ctii andndabat Themistocles quod som- 
 numcrare non P"^^"""'^" \ :,^, ntu-.m^ re.m dmt, Miltindis trop^is^" se ex somno 
 iium capere non V^^>,^'\'y^^\\^^'^}^X^^^^ diei tempora per explo- 
 
 exeitari^'. lb. Tusc. 4. 1'.».- 13. ]}''J ^'^f^^',\ 'Jl q. o( tleri vellet irnperabat. Caes. 
 ratoies qu;e ad Avancuni -ererentur <^^l^ff^,^-'J± Sorulum lustrarel^S bonis nomi- 
 B. (J. 7, ir,.- 14. quum nnpenyor ex,TC tuin tn>o popuiuin m.^a ^ ^^. ^^ 
 
 nibus" qui hostias jl^c-H^a- ^^^.6«^; ^^^ C^^^ cquis- impedl- 
 
 littore alniuos singularl^-^ '^ " ^U,? , c-./i/in^ao alii ab latere apertotelaco«^tae6an{. 
 
 The histovical iiitiukivu mostly occur., i.i place ot aa imperlect ot Rc 
 
 ex die diicere iE.lui : conf erri, comportan, ades>c t/tggrg, 
 
 different results.- ^ on repeated "'^"'"f " "/'^" ^.^f f.^^^^ 11 to ''end.- ^^ to 
 
 have tak.-n a place,to '>^^^^^^^V:'^--:'^^r^:^^^-^^nZ^^^n sea.- »' to pretend 
 treat.- »=" to endan-er.- »< contractors.- '» t<>f'"';; _ o» , ."pj^f^s - '^' awaken.- 22 at 
 ' _ 1- a id;."ue. prevailing at that time.- 'V'','^"^ ♦■^rnf TsVur-ons with lucky names, 
 .tated hou-rs. J- to learn.-- to P«rfor\" \h.;^ "^, ^.'^^^^^f ^e^era import (person) must be 
 The ablative is one of quality, with wh ch ' ,^,^^ { .'^^..''^^^'^[.tlriy.i: 2« at full gallop.-- 
 understood.- -^» to lead t k. victims Uothy^^^^^^^^ ^osl- 
 
 «» them while try ng to reach the land. ImpfditiL>^ n\ miiiuvrj ' "•- = 
 tion of a soldierlorfavorable for tlghiing- «o to sunound.- rank. 
 
312 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 n^kinn tho /EdnnnS for 1 he corn w\ii<;^.t1 
 SJam^r o> fn>,n day to day ; (^^ y^''^" V '^ 
 lU'i.r at l>and. Cues B. (i. 1, 16- i-X; i- -«• *; 
 
 Obs. 
 
 ran-ly i 
 i'lamiire 
 
 t^houUl answer me. Cic. \ err. 2, 2, .7 
 
 Ob8. 2 
 never oc 
 nor cau 
 
 thov had promised. The ^uans ;>»/< the 
 t it was being collected, tran^-ported, and 
 
 5. 
 
 iiiswer nie. CMc. v err. <4, ~, • <• „„„anv nslofrical Ptibiect, and hpnce 
 
 I. The historical infinitive ^^t^^r^l^^^S^ ^^^. ti"ni., and thins. ; 
 .(•ur*. lor an imperfect of f.tate (K. • 0) '" j^^'',^" J^pas^^ively). It can not be used 
 i, ever be n«ed i"M>c3r.onally_(neit».er ac v elj -u^r pa y; ^^ ^^ ^^^ ^. ^^_ 
 
 allv(neitner acuvei^, ■'"« F" j'- „,- .ho mind or 
 
 ;T„cTron-. in pm-re,» without rcpeHMon .xcept *>;•;" :'™°,'^°r,,f^''°i^;„1u'wS;.«^^^ 
 
 jici catena. Flaviano jube . lac. 11. d lu i,„porfects of coNTi^aKNT 
 
 ?«^n ;^^x"r8f ^nV'oJS^btU '^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ refer, to r^lpeated orinner acttoa. 
 g:T-i?"-See'kTl.'Hl, § =387 (Sail. .Tu.. 6.. ^^ ^^ 
 
 OBS. 5. Sometin.es the l^i^f^J'^'l^/J^^.^i^tme. t""^ H^ occur in the nreaniu,. 
 
 the a(Mi..n the colorof n^^'ll'^y /V.il.^'^J^I.M^^'rH/ (at a oicm time, all the actions going 
 
 ^^. ^'iVirihrWi-ofi-mperlect. of rcpc 
 
 and Ex. 12. ,!.,;,rrfre> tapktes In vallum «miifsr* .• 
 
 i> iiitinris vinhua «"titer »f;) ';/'««. n.^^^^^^^ a;cur>«-« et an- 
 
 Cir. 01U-. 21. .',9.-, 6. .Jan, pl,.b. iw-.n tnm.m J^^ '4» -■ nc ,^,,»n. e.,e in captS 
 
 hauited.- » while othei-s with f re^h (" ' ' .Si ,hat rfS i-^found in tlr.« meanin- only 
 fin, to remove. The le.dconj. «••ro"e"Usly ^tatc t hat rf^ "f'y^^.^l\l^^^^__ » to be in conster- 
 in a tropical sense.- ' would entreat.- » hold ^"}/^*[y "f ' '^7;^^^^^^ is the counr^el (advo- 
 nati<m.- i» inquire for- ^ ' at t >'nt ^omen - »^ fe^l/^ha^rintd^ ^.^ ^^^ _ ,. ^^^ 
 
 rii:p;;iS^hr- lV-S;vl;:tl^^r :^-.^ i^^tarted, proceeded. 
 
 i 
 
 / 
 
 ..V 
 
 I 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 313 
 
 «^foi Th 9^ 10— R Vir<'inius ferro', qn5cumque ibat, viam facere. lb. 3, 48.— 
 mota». ■^\,ti:n?>;«TinTIi«nan 'im lirimo Ptatim adventu omnem exercitum in se con- 
 ve?tVt'- nmXrem^^^^i^^^^ milites cv.d.r.; eundem vigOrem 
 
 h^ vnlt\i vimiu^hi ocilis infum. Neque Hasdrubal alinm quemquam P^^f ^«^e m^/€» 
 hi i«l To?trerVac"trenue agendiun esset, neaue milites alio* duce l>^^> fPJ>Mf^ 
 a /Ly I. 21/4- 10. Sic '^^^^ vita erat: facile omnis perferre ac i>a t« • cum 
 
 m 
 
 '•'""Si'.^',. tulV terrnrem PloraiusM muTier im non ex privatis .olum domi- 
 
 Ei'lE SiSr ^irss: i^s^;^^^::^ 
 
 cernit senatU!*, etc. Liv. 20, 9. ^ 
 
 § 576. Tlie TIME assumed by the speaker (standpoint of time) m re- 
 gard to an imperfect must be aPARTicuLAK time, aside from the general 
 idea of past time contained in every past tense (R. 49, Obs. 1). This par- 
 ticular time is eitlier expressly stated (R. 55), or understood (R. 56). 
 Every expression of thne thus assumed by the speaker is either conceived 
 as a TIME-POINT, or as a space of time (§ 578). 
 
 Or«( The «ame action may be conceived as complete or incomplete according a« U is 
 v;?wp',l from S'rent Doiiiti of time. Hence, in order to account in a given instance 
 for l^c^iscM^f an m^^^^^^^ is necessary to find out 1^« standpoint of time 
 
 vhici'the author'&s.umed^ and from -^^-hjie vi^u^ the ac„^ l^c'x oHe' 
 
 i« either conceived as a timk-point. or as a space oI time (period), w hiic tne action ue 
 Jfo^ed bv tluf fmperfect is a/a-az/6' conceived as occupying a space ol time (being of un- 
 defined duration or repetition). • ^ A 
 
 % 577. If tlie lime is conceived as a time-point, the prcdicale is placed 
 iu'the im'pcrfect to represent the action as indefiuitely outlasting that time- 
 
 ^^^^^ Antiochns helium -ossit cum minOre ejus (Ptolemnci) fratre, qui turn Alexandriam 
 
 :sSEir£ri!nL^^rb;'^:fe 
 
 cmy were admitted to the Senate. , , ^ , , • 
 
 Or^ The imnerfect is always used in this instance if the action had been already m 
 
 destroyed his own. Cic. l3iv. 2, 5G, 115. ^i r n 
 
 Jlcm 55. To express the time-point assumed by the author, the tollow- 
 in- forms are used: 1) adverbial expressions, reterring to a point ot 
 tiine previouslv spoken of. as turn (then); mode (just now) ; ^«m (in tho 
 meaning ' by This time' ) ; eo {eOdem, i^ic.) tempore {sub idem iempus, eic) 
 (Ex 1-8)- 2) clauses expressing the time of another action, generally 
 inlVoducVd bv gu um, nM, or their equivalents, but also by relatives or com- 
 
 i Had been put in motion, i. e. ""^l«':ta»<en, attempted.-- ^ sword.- ' c^^^^^^ 
 commander.- « where brave and determined action was required.- 'tins abative is a 
 romnlPt n.r obiect of confiderc. and an adverbial object of audere (contide m, or dare 
 nX) - ?oSl7>e^//n^^^^ he would get along ^:f all.- ' 1. e. 9t.^6...5C»;t^.. erat 
 /nertmesin) -*• construe eis cum gmtntscunqve, to all those with whom -to give 
 one's self up _ 10 "-ould enter into their ideas.- " res <tiP^rce, TO»g\iy^ov^^ ^^^V^^'lf 
 
 E^«pi.;-™'^-t.rp?-^^^^^^ 
 
IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 315 
 
 314 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 parative conjunctionc, atlachea to demonstrative temporal expressions 
 (eo ternpore quo, v\c.) Ex. 8-11. 
 
 TTMK at which anolht-r act OM f»V; »[ n'lwrn .Ym o il urevlicate, the tinu- of which is de- 
 (rarely in Jh^'j'^i;-- -•^^[\\\*J\^;;;-\';^i,,;KcVW «f the clause.: 
 
 tcrtninc'd by it, s P^^' VV.i/ nit.^ri,.^ S priiicines rranf !-Edni. altc rTus Soqnani, 
 
 Ot/u.vi Ciesar in <'=' ''''V^.^l^t r el" ..^t c ^^^^ were the ^duans. those of the 
 
 iVhen Cesar m//v. to ^'f'^^.^'^^'^»"^'^ '\\ Hut Jas, ovv7/^^7emn tiias littenis. Ilirtiu-. 
 otherwercai.ebcqnatu Oes B O.h 12^ . , "L /i^,,^, ^ is i•epre^entc■d as a space of 
 
 see Kern. (,o . j^^ «„(.h expressions ns^ eddem tempore <7?/o. are stated to 
 
 mmmmsmmm 
 
 bilnniA enim in piippi' 
 
 et clav;,,^:5'•/;:;^^;;;;rCie;Fam.l5,3:-2.(^^ /.m« nior- 
 
 estsipplex. 1^>-/^V5 Ttv ai •; ^, (\)n"i)ecta ex murls ea innltimd.. vnir, jamque 
 thaLriniensiiim era/it. Liv. 21, b.— •> *.oir pctui ,\j "^ ,. ,,, .-//^ i,,.,^ Uinnore ainul 
 
 aZLo p'r/, r. 1 ru'.et indici.uu" conjurationis in SenAtu si..anim Jov.s m 
 
 nu'JuoJ'etTStrunW^^^^^^^^ annis n(ihi tctiUe pr.e.tabaf. lb. 
 
 B ; 4'^ iVl - ?0 S.r^^^ Mi^nnm Jovis collocabatm- quo cnjurat... tnchraf^,- 
 
 fur \hl)\y. '2, 21, 4T - 11. LTMlem fere- tempore pons in Ibero prc.pe cllocius nuntialHi- 
 
 tur et in Sicori'^ vadum reperiebatur. Cies. B. C. 1, G2. 
 
 ieem 5G More frequently the time-point at wliieh an aetion was ineom- 
 nk'te is not expressly slated, but tnicJer>ttood, bein- nnplied either in pre- 
 vious predicates, or in the predicate of the principal sentence it tlie ac- 
 tion is contained in a clause. 
 
 Ors 1 If tlie time is not stated, an action may either be conceived as soinj? on at a 
 
 cSa n time, ^N^tl "n impkkkkct-preuicatk. or it may be rc'-arded from ^^-^^ll'^^;;^^^ 
 
 of < ow iine hein- represented as an indepkndfat Fact, in whicii case llie medi- 
 
 r It is i)l- -CM in he peufkc:t. In this case the use of either of the two tenses Is always 
 
 ontuit f the neon Vteness of the action is no essential point in the rarn.t.ve, 
 
 i tl e thou ^ht"xp esse.!. This may be seen by tlie followinir exampl.'s : Fu-.aeijtes 
 
 que s nun s re mo.rhW'O texer.n/. ab equitfltu M.nt interfc-cli ; The [Vr:»";>'"A "J'VS^ 
 
 n th I fore-.t-' nor mountains nro/^ctec/. were killed by i lie cavalrv. Cus. B.C. .,hi 
 
 The v<-ticm^Jr?r " if viewed from the time of inferfecti sunt, or if viewed 
 
 fr m tTowi iinc • but it woul<l be incompK-te (rr<,uiri.i- the imperfect tegrf>af>t) it 
 
 xiewec fn m anv partVcilar time-p-'int durin-.r the ni-ht.-Vbi pnmuin impedimenta 
 
 no. ri exercitis ab d in sUvis abditi lafrOant visa sunt, subito omnibus coinis pro- 
 
 voh vcnm[ !i^^>on as'the ba^.^e train ..I .uir arny was >^. jy t'^^T^i^'^^'V^^'JeS 
 
 4nft m the forests thev sudden v rushed forth m full lorcc. Ca>s. B. (». ^. \.i ine aciiou 
 
 "1 7 7 at the time when the per-on addressed wrote his letter.- « any lonfrer - » gun/d. 
 _ 4 stern -^ he m - « at the moment wlu-n Ci.c-ro left the city.- ' «"«^ •»*-"f»'";'^>- jg 
 disipprove - » disclosure- '« 10 erect.- »' «'/^/v, topuDlish.- «^ was m his thirty-fourth 
 Year, which outlasted the time-point of the publicaliou.- " the rivor Sicona. 
 
 I 
 
 plete if viewed from the time c^ Z^^^^^X'^.^:^^^^'^^ 
 U„f) would have been J."^jl^,^,^.^^^"' Oiiod i^l^^^ hnentum ajrentibns fore videbatur. id 
 ti(m as a ST ATK (were lynj^z ju den) -Qiiodimp^^^^^^ ^ is viewed from the 
 
 maxime ad ««l'^'''''"'" «^:'5\^- ,^V„,^Vt jiave beK viewed from the time 
 
 .t .nd point of its own line • J^ ^'^^ ^r uleg «ij^^^^^^^ in a similar connccti.m : Adju- 
 of the predicate ridehatur Thus S*/'^"^.; Y 17 Here adjuvit mijrht have be^n used 
 raf>at eorum consilium quod, etc. C je>. b. i- A 1 • " J imperfect tense that the 
 
 fit had not been the «"tennon "f^j^e auti^or to mtin^^^^^^ ^^ mentioning; who 
 
 circumstances which '^rnls kI the hclp^^^^^^^^^^ the perfect, sometimes the 
 
 wrre the chiefs of ^*T«''»'l ^'"/;''^'y,^'' ^f ^in.iaiK a chief as a fact, viewed 
 
 imperfect, re,>reseiitin<; in the fo nei 1 1^^ ;e^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^hc 
 
 IVcm the r»^^l"lP^^'"\^l ''^ enm m tmS c ius Iciratir.tns Divico princeps/t/t^ (or 
 of the arrival : Le-sltos ad eum nimum, ti . - i^^atiOnis NamSjus et \ er 
 
 the time 
 erat). 
 
 n ' — (jresceoni inierim m"^. ^^^- --, ".'"■;— 
 i.'ci ifMi:- IV, w.v. .............. '_. A . Of. Theoredicatesof these sentences miJihtne 
 
 lloma interim cref>nt A '>^e r Tni> lb. 1.30. f J^^, f ^"jj^an^ (continni) displicgbar. Cic. 
 interclianged with each ^^^''^['^^'''^J^-r^l^. ^ admr'iut. Il>. Sest. 57, 122. EOrum 
 Att 2, 21. 8 ; and : ExistimSre <^^^ I'l'f 7.^f""^4^^\lq'^ -^tKs t w^ way of viewin- an 
 judicio qui adprer^mjyvo^mi^,^^^^^^^^ ^ed from the stand-. 
 
 ^:^::^l^Z^ZC^^r£^i^^ym^^^ »« predicates denoting actions of the 
 
 "o^;. t^^^'lauses with inMJcr.ct pr^^-^of tir^^ 
 
 I^JKt!^'^!^;^^™^^^^^ 
 
 OBS. 3. In the foll«^^vinlr. instances, the time ^^^^^^^ „.^,^^ ^^^- ,,,ncate of 
 
 PERFECT-rREDICATK IS ''''V^''';;"^,^" 5^,"^,^,;'^i ^^^^^^ ^.580); 2) in the HISTomCAL 
 
 the principal sentence :1) in the DLsciiP.iNGn^^^^^ | time-point or a space of 
 
 ihaV^cneraUy treatises or ii-ri>^n.V,^pbs (tl^^bcn. c^^^ rS^^irS'^Si- 
 nenc^e with 'sentences conta.ni.y^ f^'^Zlt^o^ witli 'ToU .' condcMtnr: because we 
 
 2 MassUienses Albicos, barbams ^^'nines qui mem ef ^^Vr^.^^l^.^ te^imonium. quod 
 
 go vocaverant. Ca^s. B. C V-;^~ ^i \- Tie \tt 7 2 7.-- 4. Cc^sar in L n?ones 
 non qjia'rBam: quod P^^V/^Ar^amnesraMt. U(\ ah- «, _^ Ab hoccmsilioLingones 
 
 cr at quia arc e r-r-KTTir^iTilt^TTmaFt^.-- * amicitiatn alicuju» 
 
31G 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES, 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 317 
 
 riOie parte i«diumW/^^ye/f//^rt/ en n nx i ^ venenit eiiim in Jtinns. t n. LucJiin-, 
 
 tnr I V 1 4U- 12. Panlo P"''» ^^'^'L, ''" pj'" aV; 15 ib 1 - 13. Consules nee »eUitiO- 
 
 prc.».u ■''^""^'^^''''ri; '','';;,,<,,,•,<,,, assumed, but is represented to go 
 its action .snoconnnd |« "- ^' ^^.„^,„ H-deno,c, an action incom- 
 bcyond IS hm.ts (E^- ;0- -1 -*• ,„ „,^, ;, ,,,fect even wul.- 
 
 plclebyitsownnatmc.solha .t«ou 8.10.13.22.20.27); 
 
 out any designation of tunc (U. ^C. «B^- ^' l*^; - ' ; « ,^,^^, ,,;,„.,„ „.„ 
 3) .,,e.. t..e P™»-y~,r ' : .: ti "^^^^^^ '•- -«... and 
 r:£"p";;tedt::ing on during .be titne. are or inde.n.te 
 
 iX adverbiil den.onsirative J'M'ress. n, si.nil^u t.. tn -^i,i„„,^ 
 
 .prLio,. '^'-^^ ^b fexprJ^s!;:^^ '"^^l^STt by 
 
 UMiinoralc-lanst'S, eillu'rabhUives .iDsoiuuv'/^^t . . clauses, 
 
 ^v:^K <>->."->''-';;-i,';;^ll,^;.;^t\';'Tbr;r; /,;;-;« or- '««p-- «-• 
 
 U,e latter >»■•■'.? ,f;,f'\'!> "V V Bvprinoipal sentences. U. 0«. 
 
 (See Oi»s. a, and It. 1.0. Kx. .) : -^) iy 1'^'»^' ,„„.„,,,„,, .««».(»« (Er.io-is.) 
 
 :;^S^-e^ we,^«^^^^ "•^^^'^ ^"'H''^X™di;^^te i^'u.e m-KurJ^T (according to 
 Gi! 130. SCO Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 15). (ipai^natc periods of indefinite 
 
 mmmmmmmm 
 
 En-lish in renderin- such V^'^^^^ ,^,\^;ocihiis ejiciel^^ ^^^ ^^»?^^ """^" ''„'''^>Suurn?d 
 
 t. '« time and to the time spoken of before, takes its predicate in the im- 
 ^ OB. 3 If the period a.nimed lor the '^c"*>^^,:\"^4"/,k^^Th .uch as the author con- 
 
 Of an action (Nvheih.-r t\>" '»"^J ''J 4 and the Ex. 10-14 to U. 60. 
 
 Ex 28. 2«>, the last examide ol Obs. 4, auu luc x. ^^^ ^^^ j^^, 
 
 bii in the perfect. j, Tiir.rnm seauiTles" male locflto» 
 
 ri» rd nisi a>>*l'l''''' V^,''. „ l ,J dit« lu'cnn-i. Plant. ,Kl'.'f.';,5-.p-f7,' 'i 4 _ igrut 
 
 planian-.- >* '^' ^"S' ;.*,! .to ench other's hatids.- i« ^l40^'2e';^;'-y ^^^. _ 22 cHar-e.- 
 longer than the readins. 
 
318 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 Ptr 1h Or 1 u -9^ Cx^ar. dif-s XXVcommorafu.9 dahaf opernm^ntin ofRaolinmnO' 
 Ck Verr ^ 4 21 -sfyW^^m-^///* fore fuT^t urbs sine armis, ^ed oratOrum aul «i'^cesHU» 
 
 2^ F Li . t tiuu ill" vUt.)ri na'<» f>iU i.i Sicili-l ;>^r ^ru^«//i'/w Verre prcetore lb. 
 2, M. (See tbe Ex. 10-14 to U. 60.) 
 
 Rem 58 If the period of time by which an action is determined, an- 
 swers io the question ' how lonr/?^ (p. 234, II. 14). so that the designated 
 period is conceived as ' measurinf/' the time of the action m question, 
 the predicate cannot be pUiced in the impertect, as : 
 
 PomuSinm vidi IV. Id. Deccmb. Fmrnus (uoi emmus) unfl horas duos f«>';^;JSse, I saw 
 Pmnm V on the Otb of De(itn»)er : we were about ttro honrs to^rether. Cic. Alt. 7 4 
 
 HT'IZ q nutn ca^tra inille passus inde posuis.et, i^^^^^^'V''^'^ '^'^V V^.m tlfafj^lo 
 (n<»t S/xio; ^VMuM. tlu. c.,nsunuid pitched can.p at.ou^-th(M.*aiid pace, fiom th^ 
 
 he ktpt tiiere/0/- t^tccnU days a stationary eair.p. Liv. 44, 4b. x. . * 
 
 C)R^ 1 Tbe idea of coinpleteiio^s, which is always involved in actions the time of 
 ^vhi?U^bt^meas,tred ei-h.destbe use of the in.perfect ^}-:'-^\%'l}''^JTZ 
 nleeu'x-' is tala-n in th.,- conventional sense mentioned, K. 52 and li- •'^^' ?b^- ,^' '^« 
 J^ V. i .t.. r/m;y be 1 aced in tbe imperfect, since in these cases not tbe action itself, but 
 lira fbea,- <'^.^^^^ as ' incomplete'. Tluis in the sentence 
 
 Fx 5 t< 'k 5"Tcic Rose Com. 3), the predicate relinquebut has the Orce of causa erat 
 J^uid pe^rfea.n) reli,m4l \.uC. il placed in \'-.-M'-^ -^/'j,-;!;^y^/il/;-^ ^^ 
 I,- ..<iii'.-<l tu li-ifinii'im In the ast sentence quoted, U. 57. OBS. 3, livjinia aics • ..• • 
 w/Jn.Jw n.eansMack ..f resuUMbe action as ^ncb beins 
 
 c fn/u lie T^i^^^^^^^^^ frequently tbe cas,; in predicates denoting hahit. as in the ^eu- 
 
 ?;S'ex: 2.; , "r. 5"(Li v. 4^1, l.-.)/Thus : Ilic mos, quern ,;e. oni'^'\^Uims^^aMi^.^^ 
 
 ac'b.r; Ab h',! «>nd a pe^'an, ^C&^ eoLnfi Mnmt Ho.nilni usn aquflnnu 
 
 quas ant e^ribe^i^auU.^ jluteisaut ex fontibus hauriebant. Front. Aquxd. 4. bee\x. 12. 
 Ob^ 2 The expressions by which the dnratioii of actions is thus measured, are phrases 
 ^v;Vh ;utm^ 1^ mea^^urc" adverbs, prepositional expressions den<.tin<; the in.tial and 
 ; imS pointMl^^o tLj.r. ,^,>^ ad t.n,.. u^ue ec^J-^f^^^ 'TSnliotS 
 ia»7 o-v ', iiTtroduced by the conjunction quamdiu, etc. lor tbi» kind of tuni.or.ii 
 
 clauses see K. til. ^ . ■ *„ „„ 
 
 1. Macedonia a fnmunoc>.lmine^\forfun(^nd ^^'^^^»'^-^'?^''*,f » J'f^.j;'?^,^^;/,; ^,?"! 
 
 nn^ftfp/it Liv 45 l> — 2. Vide, si quis e^t m e-l provinciil in qua tu //<€«/a//m. /me- 
 
 ?\^^/ , ^^ t^i nolit i)eri^Ve Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 77.- 3. Ex eo die di^^ contwuOM qmnqne 
 
 ^(fr "^o 'SJ^Zr.o^^^produ^'^^ et iicieni;^" i-tntctan^» ^f ^^^f;;:' -^ S 
 
 z^: i^s^iiro;;^^^;;;;].;^ i^:vSs^'x;nc^;ue ^^it!'^:^t^^T^-ryi 
 
 KaV ma Fori maTve. iin.", et (lb hard rx-fara ad v..per,nn secrCto ro 'oc/y/i" ^„nus. lb. 
 A t7 8 4 - Pop s 1 omanus aliquol an>,o.^ ante leirem (ialnmam maxima parte 
 iin HM-ii mn/i/ lb Te- Man. IS.- 7. Idque Scievoiie conti-if, qm solos ;jom« jne^isls 
 in\\H'U\ cannr. li. ^»- '"J*"- \^ ._„ *o,i;e nuum ita esscnt, tameii Dejotarus j^vv^e 
 K"";;^/ QU^; ^' l^o, pSo l^tt^^^^ DcJ.4.1.-9, Id,.o,i\en nsq.e ad 
 
 PyUia' 4 /S -iV^^ aHatiMii. lb.Tusc.5, 3 3.- 10. PotitilantHtues-^» "J^rT. fi.l us 
 
 -■ , rph. ..„..(.tioii hiiovvs that ihecare taken by Ciesir was unsuccesslul.-J» Keep 
 
 •.. • ,^V^ 3 Pirv.,-i in in^^^ * censer^.-» what he bad torn Irom the ceu- 
 
 To ";;.f othj; uS le -" a r, iv.- "inserted irepeafed acaon).- « depar.ure,- 
 V'nt^nLTav^l^'wre to old the most promim-iit place in the bar; ^tLe aCion 
 outSe hfpMl«.<h^ «"V name. The meetinu' of the Senate '«t. If/.^^y- 
 
 ^s" e period aEumed.- H ,be rule- .•/concluded.- 'Mnstead ^»^ f-f^^e -*p nl 
 jM,,-ru ,uir.- 's to examine^- '• tbe pnetonan \^ • " ' ^* «^.^^ " ^ "f^-.2 ,vere n 
 „ w.ip tim — »» nresented.- '•*<> h s 1 nes.— ^» drawn tip. See p. ^•>4, < bs. .5. wen m 
 
 "eciel coKVerencle.- - r^--^.. eo . . . quad, till the time that.-^* exiMed, was used.- 
 " the heads.— '-• sanctuary.— "•'^ race.— ^* shop. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 319 
 
 ,-. / Ti. Vrrr 2 4 24.- 13. Id ego jusjurandum patri da- 
 
 h-t^'i .^ hinted for lite space *>V' ? tbo p upe^^^^^ i^ ^^^^^^^' ^^ = ^^^^'' ^"^''^ 
 c Ati'KUFKCT, while in 1?"^^^^^^^ .?. '.^a,n e!t T^ ^^'^ ^^"*"''' '''' '^^'^''"'^ 
 
 b;?':v^:^Sven^o^ ^^"'''' ^^^^ '-' '''''"' 
 
 fir a loiifl time. Liv. 24, 29. accoidino; to which the predicate 
 
 is placed in ^^^^.f ''^,^^^',^ ,?o , at the spbakkr's tune 1 ^"^^ ^/"^J " espondinji to the 
 kind are ^cpresen d^s gmn o pbkfecT is u^V'^ V/.^VI' " am o«-' ^V^^w al'dmus, 
 
 as coMiM.ETE at the '^P'^'^'^'-JJ; ' "' ! sero resisimnis ei ^^^"^"^^ P^^ f'l' "i inn's for ten vears 
 
 „eolen,,y>rf 'l"'M'""'"'"/.V^'',''f j' j m.t «■»«> (Have ''"J,«S"£i'- «S "cul..» « 
 ,„>...eu!:ei- «W ™'"\r'';," -^/; ,'^i\im " i*-*;-»"' '.";<= » '^fTuJeCXxly otluT place 
 
 liine^ If the impertect de'^i'^i'-'^ii'l^^J)^, meanings of the prtuicai^ . , f\ 
 
 i in the last it would essentially change luc « ,t„iorv «tvle (R. 77, Obs. 1 (/ ) 
 
 ce8.<i in the last, it ^^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^^j^,. „, epl^tolary . tyu j ^.^^ ^^^ 
 
 3iOT|e^^ up their «reugtb.- P. ^i=. 
 
 nobles.- • pitblicly. 
 
320 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 20 13-5 Ibi oxdntum et licesimum jam diem oppvgnaham oppidnm. Cic. Fam. 2, 
 10 3 - 6 Mnlti jam menses tian^^ierant' iieque Bruiidusio naves lejrionesquc ad (.«sa- 
 rpm veniCbai t" c"'« B C 3, 2r>.- 7. yu.im dtcbnum jam diem -lavitor ex intestl- 
 ir/X-l^m3, fli^i inTtiscuianum. C^ic. Fan.. 7 '2(i, L- «. Jam inde ab adolescenUd 
 c«,'0 hanc vitam urbilnam secatus num. u or. AuUr. 1, 1, lb. 
 
 liem CO. TEMrOKAL clauses designating a space of time to which an 
 action is referred, answer either to tlie question MrA^/i.? denoting ^ the 
 time at which an action was going on, or to the question how long J de- 
 notino- the length of lime during which an action lasted. The lormer 
 are generally introduced by quum or dum. Sucli chuises Ji^n^i re their 
 principal predicates in the imperfect (in accordance with § 0.8, JSo. 4) 
 if the actions expressed by these predicates have no definite time-limits. 
 See Ex 1-9. But the principal predicate must be in the perfect it 
 the action is conceived nsjinisfied within or about the time designated by 
 the clause (Ex. 10-14) : 
 
 Turn nunm insula Delos nihil timCbat, nos provinciis atqnc oris marltimis mr^M- 
 mn8. At the time when the island of Delos wius in vo/ear, we on our part had no con- 
 JrS over our provinces and seacast. Cic. Le-. Man. 18.-I is l.i)tis adnumerandi, 
 sunt sex de republics quos tunc descripsimns quum gubernacu la reipublicte tenebamu», 
 Amon- these must he reckoned six books on the republic which we vrote when we 
 weieholdini^Mhe helm of the sovernment.Clc. Div. 2, 1, 3 Ube writing '><-'n^; co^^^^^ 
 Dieted within the period).— Dum ea Komflni |;arant, jam ba-untum summS \\ onpug- 
 naMfur, While tlie Romans were preparing these thin-s Ma-untum «v/s alreauy i€- 
 t^iegedwmi the «greatest enerj;y. Liv. ::i. 7 (the besie-in^; hem- not dehned as to its 
 limits) -Dum hH'C in Africa ^eruntur. Hannibal in a-ro Tanntino astfltem con^^^mnp- 
 sit. While this was goin^' on in Africa, Hannibal was sjiefdixfj* the summer m tne 
 territory of Tarentum. Liv. 25, 1. 
 
 Obs 1 The principal predicate is sometimes placed in the ri.tPEUFECT instead of 
 in the"Derfect to despmate the action as anteri(»r to oth.-r tacts, ^ul>s. quently narrated, 
 which likewise were completed within the period : Dum hiec in Italia -eruntur. nuntius 
 viiiorije Cartha<;inem w<t/rt/ Ma^'o ; is res -estas exponil ; While this was P>">^';>" J'} 
 Italy Ma-'o /lad come as nussenj^er of the victory to Carlhage ; he explained what Had 
 beeu'done. Liv. 2:3, 11. See Liv. 21, 21); Cic. Verr. 5, a'i, 91. 
 
 Ob«> 2 The predicate of the clause with qfo/m desi-jiiatinc: a ]>erio<l (whether defined 
 or not) is either placid in the imi'EHFEct inuicative, «)r in the imi'ekfkct sib.iunctive. 
 Quum bein- rendcnd by ' ir/un ' or ' icfnle\ (If tlie clause denotes a time-I'oint, guiim 
 Ti^nu\n'.>i the, ))erfect-indicafire in the clause, accordinj; to K. 55, obs. 1): <;/»/ym omnes 
 Caesarem m^^«'«^x//«M^^ PompC'jus eum dili-ebal ; At a time when we all «>/v *//?Ya(/ of 
 Caesar, Pomp.-y loved him. Cic. Att. 8, 1, 4.— Turn qi/mn hello sociorum tota Italia ordS- 
 ret C. Norbanus in sunimo olio fait ; At a time when all Italy was in the llames of 
 the social war, C. Norbanus lived in deepest peace. Cic. \ err. 2, 5, 4. bee Ex. 1-8 : 
 10-13. 
 
 Ob« 3 The predicate of the clause with dum (if it desiirnates the time-period when 
 anact'ioti was performed, not denoting 'len-th'of time on the (luesti-m • how louir') 
 i- Dlaced in the PRKSKNT indicative. Such clauses are rendered by ' rchrle with the 
 pro'^rc^-sive form of the preterit, as : Dum ea coiK/uinin/iir et conjWxhtnr hominuni 
 inilUa VI e (Vsaris castris ei^ressi sunt : While these thinirs were being colUeted a/at 
 delivered, (5,(XK) men esca[)ed from Ca-sar's camp. Cas. R. G. 1. 27. See the Ex to /.'im. 
 «0 and Ex 9. 14.— The present, in this ccmnection, must not be taken lor an historical 
 present It Jias the force of an itnper/'ert. but seems to have been convontionally adopted 
 for thin meaning of dum. to distin-iiish in this way its other meanings. 
 
 Obs 4 The present after dum is also found with a force of an Enirlish pkesent-pek- 
 PECT in the sense of /iV//<. 42. as : Tuas litteras phiribus epistolis accepi dam mm in 
 Arpiiiilti I have received several of thy letiers irhUe 1 have Uen (during my pr.-seiit 
 Slav» in tnv Arpiiiian villa. Cic. (|u. Fr. .i, 1, 3.— If tlie present in clauses with ^i//m is 
 required by the construction to be turned into a i»ubjunciive, it follows the rules on the 
 
 » To pass —2 equivalent to: Xoship^. etc., had come to C(Xsar for many montJut.— a c-ravi- 
 ter iiitesiTnis laliorilre, to have a serious disease of the bowels: also: to be seriously 
 dispeptic — * The action is conceived as complete within the period. Fnmi such exam- 
 ples the difference in the use of the English progressive form of the preterit from tho 
 Latin imperfect may be seen. 
 
 IMrERFECT TENSE. 
 
 321 
 
 con.ecntion of ^^f^^-^-^^^^^^J^^S^^^^^ ^^Bi 
 
 '^';^::s'^^ ^f^r ^^,>^- % ,^;re;-^r'i;\^hrssr^i^;b.K 
 
 and later wuters, .he '^' If;! '^;'. Pcbim" a.ct fjl obmuim'.r. Cic Tus^. 1, 
 
 775.» See p. 074.. ronnected with a predicate in the 
 
 OBS. 5. sometimes dum (in the ^^" «,,^f j^J^-/;,i;?u^^^^^^^ 
 iMrKRFECTiNi>icAT.vEandrard> ^^ltlymIMlLKFK^^^^^^ meus hostia. 
 
 The iMrEUFKCT .NDTCATivE ^-JX?.r\ u ^ t « me vx'lenme secum m castra profi- 
 im.noiavit. Di^lna re> dum <^r,fic.fat "^ 1 ^-ked me whether I was willing to accom- 
 cisci ; WhUe the sacrifice ''^f\P'/ir'''f,^:,^^^^^^ ^,r66«;/^yr.SamnIteslnteram- 
 
 pany him to the war >ep. Hann 2- - />///?^ h.^^^^ ^,^ Liguribus agebntur^. 
 
 nain occupilre conSti sunt. ^'^- .^^'' -^^- fr'','.'* ,1 41 14 - /?wm haec Vejis agebantur, 
 Li -u res repent Ino inun-tu c«>loniam c T.Crum. lb 4i, i*. 
 
 ?;;t;.rim Cal,itolium in in.enti pericu lo 'u;^^^! > ^;^^;^ .^ .^ .^^^^ ,,y ,^e construction) 
 
 The «MP»inFKCT si'BJUNCTiYE (as^de f on t^^^^^^^ ^^ rexav.Heret. alter eia- 
 
 is fouml in several passag'is ol L>>y-/^"''' "'^,^ J^^^ j,, Samnio, cujuscunque auspi- 
 tam secQrim in cap.it^ ^'^'J.^'^'^V.V/XvVnf^ri n">en im \ngens concltur. lb. lb, 18.-- Poets 
 ciis, oererentur^ Koinitnts '^;.^/; "f '"' i'^y\\ pj fS^.t^^ both indicative and subjunctive 
 S?;ir'rn.^"^rcrs%erCei; l^umim S /.n.'^ vidit simulacrum suum. l>hu.dr. 
 
 ^'^*'^' . oftnr r/./w if used in this meaninir, in classical proBe. 
 
 pPS,;Tr^rc^«ptLr to"^tr rllc'r-ule '^Z te,.c a.ter U... .ee OBS. ., and 
 
 th"T.ME. but otiKT r.-la.i«..J .. tlK- n™'.'" ."^ .^ ».',■ ,^ 't Time'clau.U, ihe te„«.8 of tl>eir 
 clau-.'s have ,.nly ll,c../orw. '"','',,'''=,"-' ;.', u-"' (a ,lau-c-s wh.,«. pn^dicale^ are de- 
 nrcUcati;* bfiiiR ilet>riniii.-ii by tbcir "»ii " ' • ^" ' ..^f ,i,i(1 im-aniuL' "ftlie action 
 8:,,n;'; ,1,. pH"ci|.al.«.n,Ha;.- «cc«rd.ns to tbc^^^^^^^^^ - ^ j, „„. 
 
 of the doer, or by s..ine «•'l^"'' "-S!'^. ^ ."f^" e^^^^^^^^ or tl c sake of the time, so that there 
 the time of «me act on >>' '>'"\y ,;^' '^^^^^^V^Vins ^iut thisdilfeMUce, though it is correct 
 i< no <.therc«.nnection between teuo action. 1 ,,,„,.rved. and already Servius 
 
 for the great majority "f ^/^ , 1' ^' f'j;:;din- he t^vo saying: Sane sciendum, 
 
 (En l,»;'.i7^ c..mplains of this ^«miounni „ uit- _,. ^ ,,.<,nii.ntlv occurs in pass- 
 
 Inalo enore g>nan e, dumr. Hom.^ms ^^.^^^^^^y^^^'^Z^o luhdum has the meaning 
 inir over from one action t.. "•'•'l»'*'^/ . .V'k. l. u<U\ in exactly the same meaning as : 
 
 and III in the meaning ' when\ see p. bbO foil. ^ ^ 
 
 ral manuscripts have trahai.f, whn h P'''''-'''.%^,.;';,S^^ L. ,iie incident, being left an in- 
 oMhe passage shows that t>n-i'^;;^^-^;-';. ;,','/ ,1 Hdb'cl in th<- present co./g/^r 
 coMu.leteacticm for the time being. ]^^ ■;'';" .^.V of pueonant iu-pcilVcts (see R 53 
 Henc! coufimbalur must be ^al-t'" /«» ^ ^ jm-e been expressed 'Pater wmiolabat 
 and II. .M, OBS. <•,), -";'V;^,;»'r.;«'l [^ ;: ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ is written by Xepos b:m- 
 
 et</*/mdivTnaresw/*./f6t/'r, etc ^ ''y''^^;''- ,f",i.,r) manuscripts read qumn.-*}^^^ 
 pelf, Mud not by his epltoml^t.- ^ ^oi c on 'lor^^^^ f. the remarkable co-i.ui- 
 
 inii.erfect is probably meant to point «ith greater ^^?;!;';' ^\ ^^e Ligurians was cele- 
 •iee of the two actions:/ At the ^-^''y /.^'^f^^^'he 3 b) surprise?- ^ Some (infe- 
 brating, the (same) Li-Minans ^^''^.^^P '"^,7^^ ^e^^s xl have been iufiuenced by 
 
 j!;)^?^^nr1ir^?;;;;t:r:^^S^-^ 
 
322 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 e; t.- b 'rarnniniu. tun. n-^fnit quum ^^''VT'^um^L C arn 1«:' t tCli omaclni., 
 
 et ^schiues t€,u>bant\ '»•. ^'-.V, /w 4-> lUS - iV c\i-ar 7-/«m im/z/o/^/re^" iUo die 
 
 quo primnm in -^■^^J^}^>^:^!\, ^:^^. J"X\X^^d,,m utri.nque'* subverat»r^\ a 
 
 119. 
 
 cast 
 
 ,i.m K a e J,Sm 'f i ' <.«" nction, answering to ,.,.• <l>.-.i.m ' -«« 
 
 turn rex fuit qmdii ivsfn. i'i;>c ""'' ;,';^' V' ;;''",;, ,,; . ,|» /„«,«* fi.rco «w )«f/n- 
 
 cal fonn <>^"'»'l■*'•"'"^ Vr'M-"-; ; '^ (P; ™. ^ ; :^^l^^^ ^ ,.„i„^.i,,„ ■„, ,h«r dura- 
 
 '««to.»;'"''- l'''Vy."''\""'y,"'?Pl"-' \, . J , , niMi.im^ i.nl.lythat Loth 
 
 • a |«,wcTtul Kovo.-...noi.l IP'-«V' "",;., Tik - "en rail».- •' /«» <*""'"■ '!'«/'"=• 
 I» gi-adually.— ^* into line. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 323 
 
 l^ydum or, uona. These conjnncm>nB ^e incowl^^c^cr^ 
 
 aft.r (f'on answering to ttie quo^ti-.n j'f^J,^ <\\- '' j ^^ t^ijIo tarried for a little while, 
 
 strri .^xr.i^«^ir"U';;SKs;^, 'ar;;'iv!.i' t.».',; Sippeu. cic. mi,. «. ^. see 
 
 %!^:.. If ,he co„,m,c,io„ .reqni- .he .vn,janc,We bo^^^^^ 
 
 li.-i ,a„.u„, .;.np..ri. r.leM ^'';';"]^^';iZ^"l:SuS^i^ Sr*;,^.;; or .he roj^l troop., 
 y;e^-Liv'T^^-1v;;;;^,rc'S'n a';^ l ..„,«.^- Xhe .tr„,g.e wa« 
 
 8« ioni doublful .ill Uarlus ^ooi ,l.u,l take.,) A.^bt. J"*t. 11,9. 
 ,.;Bjb„lu,.eoppi,,o„,u,n.is.™o.Wj^^ 
 
 ^'HS^^r TvJSs?;;r r :^i^r y;;i^S'ii:^e^ 
 
 rtx.^ lb. Or. 2. 2.i.— 4. Liir <a .i_M<»_ V <"" "• ' ,q _ 5 ji„c /Vd dum licmt, 
 
 rum* ?>'//«^Vi. ^a//i'/i'/ do.ni {[n'^s)J '.',*^r>u,J/ lb. ^,V";,.l \-!_; .. ",,niM,.6 res L^eri^ uo- 
 
 foruui (lis innnnrtalibns />o//*m' ori.a u.. ^ Vo «/ U'.,n li a n"^ '^ 
 
 ii^ o remorati'^ dum in elephautis auxihum pvtanL hall. ^ »'g- ^3, -3. 
 
 i?m. G2. TlHM-e arc two exceptions to the rule II. Gl 111 regard to the 
 use of the pel feet tense : 
 
 .T k' OK. ,.r..i..a,e of a c.a..se ... .««. ^^^^ 
 
 rr;brpSic?.,:o"rcCraU'era:*;hr^^^ 
 
 nie nhicecl in the impeufect. ,, • „„ 
 
 "' \r,Ucn, benefloia q,,. ip.e .HbaeraUWj^^m««i^<r^^^^ 
 r/.h?Uc^i" V\',-r,l:?,.^:"u.a t KrnS.' N^'P A... n. 5. a. - be reu.e,n,-erea 
 ?n ««■»«« (ivheiie er he bestowed), and as long at). See Ex. 3. 4-B. 
 r. .' m. Ue or ,en.e in regard ,o .;:« /-^1-.;; of ,he c^J^ 
 
 fi';;,i^'=a^srn;er«s.eK^;i^';d!Mm^^ 
 
 mortal -ods.— »= remained, tarried 
 
IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 325 
 
 324 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 "■OB^"^. ir ,he .ja,,,e «.,,0.0, horn 
 
 laTe?/t" would not dan to utler any unusual or obnoxiou. word. tic. Or. 8, 25. 
 
 Wmmmmmmmm 
 
 interest, and not in that of Verres. Cic. Verr. 2, d, ov. 
 
 deinctede inte-ro" ca?ptnm, nec d>mi per patentia-» .Kaj/;/c^6(l^/r a-.nu. a/v^a »^^^^ 
 
 Zut loii^ _r/>/n Sulla in Allis ivbns emt occu p:\lusi-'. erant^'^ lulerea qui .uis vul- 
 5^: i.ir ned<!^mi^M.";,! KO.C. Am. 82, OL- 7. ^.^^'^ 1 Min vidc^Su/'IlP PnJv ' oZ 
 
 ^-ts^Sj^^irairnSS'^^j^i^^'-cSi;^^^ 
 
 L;7'^; posTea?,uam acce.sSrunl>^ pills nmralibu.'- interlbant. Ca>s. 6. C. 
 
 7 82 
 
 Rem 63. Frequently, especially in the historians, the time of actio.is 
 to be mentiotuMl afterwards, is expressed by rKi>ciPAL ^^;^'^;^;f;^^;^-^^J^^^ 
 time in this instance is mostly represented as & period, but sometimes as 
 a time-point. ,. ^, 
 
 ^:::M".^^i>^rJi^'nZ^^':''n' Already t':e liLo/ «^ 'fcf -' "''^ <"■'"«• 
 inr'waV •• but ClauJius came earlier to Home than Sc.uproDiua. Liv. 39. 3-i. 
 
 . f 5„nn..' 3 nnon * nrmv — » nile,— • to maintain. — 'gen- 
 
 them).- >i who ha<l the exclusive k'H>NV^^' ge o theni - _J'',^^j;;f/;f «i/^^^»,,, ^r.-s, 
 
 tic) imperfect implying ' ^^'"'Vf,;;!^ '-To ^/^'^0« S^ ^ rv ;/^'.cA, tl e imperieci in.plying 
 i. c, gratified their own appetites.- i» cftc^ /^ofjiit^^r^^^^ railu r distasielul to 
 
 ;::;;r ^r:,?s,;:^s mid • wbii;^^^ti.y^^t r^in^di^iUce ahe^..;. .^ng 
 
 ?nSe at «ev^'ril^,.n.s.- n t/>ey effected m^^^^^^^^^^^ ^[KL^i^!:!'- „"^^1 frirc-heS" 
 
 paratives lonqius and /)/«* refer to each other (the -rtaiet, uie mur».;. 1 1 
 
 ^^jjilurn tnurale, a wall-javelin. 
 
 i 
 
 Or» The oredicates of such sentences are placed in the imperfect if they denote 
 Fimes o time cofncident with the main action. If anterior to the main action, the 
 n li, ,. il ti.o n 111)%^^ (Ex 6) ; if it denotes a time-point, it is placed in the PhR- 
 'f^ct?Kk 4 The^ ac i onfrifeTrini to this time are placed in the perfect or ^mperfect 
 FECT l!.x. 4) 1 ^^^ »^' J,. ^ . expressed by such a sentence, refers only to 
 
 clause is almost always in the perfect. 
 
 1 7ntn invfsmrascebat\ ct nc in proximam quidem noctem nbi satis tuto cnstodirS- 
 Inr'lSi.eS^^^^^ I^i''. 3'-^ ^b.- 2. Anni {tern pus) ]xjs( circmyiadumsol- 
 
 l^J; 3 r / hma d^^^ ad wendiemtercrebat : Iter mu to PV^^-^'^^* f^^\'|"Vf'.;ii 
 
 C€^s€raid\ quum ille alter Alius nectltur. Cic. Clu. 9, 28. 
 
 liem G4 Predicates of repeated action are placed in the imperfect 
 if the actions are represented to have happened at several indepiite time- 
 points in a period expressed or nndersto()d ^^iletheMlle same is ^etined m 
 its extent or not (see Ex. 1, Obs. o4; Ex. 23 2.),K. o. ; K. 62 ^o. 2). On y 
 il the i>eriod is defined bv nmnerals, and tlie question is how Ion? the 
 repetition lasted, the predicate is placed in the perfect. See Lx. 6, 
 
 \\. 58. 
 
 Obs 1 The particnlar time of imperfects of repeated action is often ^^^"^^^^^^S^;^'^ 
 ninnmiernVcnli r to this class of imperfects, as : Qme apud Sallusiium rara fugnint 
 ^ wi n.u^rre ri sii t • nee -^ine cau-k : ille enim in luec incidtbat. at hic illa qna^rebat ; 
 
 if , r 1 1, n SerZ 14 The period understood for ' incidebat ' is the whole time of 
 afl.T them. hen. Kp.. IW. ^i ne | ^^^^ ^^ Peculiar is the use of a»dteb<t7n ^used thus 
 
 t that we nacl souis laKeii uui ui vn^-. i,ii.>c.. -«.,... ...v. ... y-- 
 
 niv 1", 27 (E\- 1-3) With this imp<-rfect a time must be understood which the author 
 fs p'resuined to knmv, and to which he refers in his mind without declaring it. 
 nn« o Predic-ites denotin«^ repeated action are placed in the perfect, 1) if "."/«^y; 
 
 •liiiiliiiiiiilli 
 
 d, o, i. ^".", ;. ,,' « /1 A 9.> 'iMiii- in the tir«t sentence Quoti'd. Obs. 1. the per- 
 
 si:sy;«?s;;,-iSi/wo:,icthtebVi^a';pX.<v^ 
 
 r»„ ^ •? Tn the insfincc^ mentioned obs. 2. adverbs expressing repetition, as .^crpe, ere- 
 l^:;,n p^^"^^y^^^^o^^- pred icate i n order to qualily the action as a re- 
 
 ~~ : "^ '• '■ Q ;t „•.,< ,i,.fifi,.<i _ 3 literally after the solstice had been 
 
 — ' had not yet elapsed in the meanwhile. 
 
326 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 327 
 
 cL", em cm'limlcs: *,««• .-x Inluu.Sli „r^Jicarll ;ulvcr.a Cit.:i.-cm pruil.a fcc•.^.c. Cks. 
 
 cri <nT of i' I r""t bin, and ortc lu> l.onk» were pawmdio buy »....;. c ^i=8t- 51. 10. 
 Here'lL parm-ular ti,,,:. i. U.e n,„,, i,-.,n,,rJ,uM pom. or^^ .^^ 
 
 ;;a,.ii™,;i«''t;me'S^'SMr/bi;ial!cV 
 
 recoiling of rhiiiuWivii^oii^A^ii: 'i\n'yof)fauiea oracles. ) ,, ., , „ „r 
 
 Ob^ 4 Peculiari* the u^eof/^rt-p^ with an imperfect if it i^ *^'''V;<^c^'''^"''^.^!;,f, ? H/.. 
 
 P r \undS <k' ili^ au to "r;>. aurluUnn ami diceret se Iu^i^* mai:i*. (^ua.n "tilitat >8 cleM- 
 
 deHon/ovcJi/Cic Fi^^^^^ 19 (i/.., Often when Auildius said tl.i. Uca^aheanr. -^Pr^^V^ 
 
 nu ^ ", Tho flbverh anotidie always refers to a certain period (exi)resse(l or under^tooti) 
 
 Sn • \.iovi^tuJ^ d..rin- all these livr! days, fought a calvary-lK.ttle ^^^^'7; «; '/pf '.^ ' 
 G 1 48 In the same syaiguoddie is used with an imperfect, if refc-nm- to //a'.i/6 (Ex. lo). 
 
 • ;. Non erit tihi hoc -vum ; nam j^j ^l^ A - ^'iSS' ':;l^^'^Ji:^^n: 
 
 ?ia^m ii! DW risr^!- Umemin^^^^ 
 
 -^1 WeT.mvVa^KiTin-Tnch case-, the predicate answers to the q^^^!"',»*';";, j, [j"^; "[^^^^ \{^;;^ 
 
 that the pelfecl after s(Epc is analogous to perfect Pr^J'^'^tes answer. ^' to he q^^^^^^^^ 
 
 loHii '' -"^i- «•, "Obis pueris.- 3 Ilow the whole audience then raanifebted their reelings. 
 
 e.!.,!m.rc. facili.,, po,..„.. n"^ «^''-'SSr-'f sim;;iSe7.'p.tp"rm\"S:q,?o1 
 
 h„c iP-^";;;; log; '-{(f Sem :^;«. n J , ."i o.tibn' * Z»-«. q...^ >%>er a boni?*^ 
 (because) 11. (jiaccni moricui ;.(^//c HI V. ^ ,.„.„/.;„,„ -,^^t;nri sipiw. ex te rt'/cnri 
 
 (beca;.se);iM.Gracc|un,ortem.|/^incu ^^ ^^ ^^^^,^ 
 
 m/^<^/*^^ Ih.Or.2.40 1.0- b^^^.^^^^^ ^.j.^^^. ^^,^,^^,3 opertnm* c..n- 
 
 tunm. lb. IV--\^, 4 8 in SeinOn<S reliqulQue Galli) COAJ.^?^^^^^^ nunfiave- 
 
 ;:i;^;^rnii^"<^^ e;.^-Un.;nn mnnn^^ 
 
 cnsiVm";-^,.;..rAiM-udens.i_nce,^ 
 
 niOti nnntescrebn.interpelabant« (Cuii*^^^^^^^^^ j^^^^.,j^ ^.j^. 
 
 mihi videbar habC'ie cou'mtum ex cis r^-'^"** ^^^^^, I^^i^tw Tw o 3« - 13. Revertit 
 
 rences. imnerfeci tense is the nsnal. although 
 
 Obs. 1. In describing aflfairs «^ ,<^f^H",J' ^Jj^'X 1^"«^^^^^^^ <«^'^" intermingled 
 not a nece-sary form ot the Pr<;^'^.^^«,^ ;.r*^5,V^.*^^ ^ re almost always used in re-ard to 
 with historical presents and '"^^«V^f ' "Sx^^^^^^^^^^ and 
 
 pnch occurrences, if the doers «f «/^ '"j^V"/;^^^ Galli crebris 
 
 masses, as for instance in ret;:.rd to !»^^ d*\Vnf inil es occuStos in opere adoriebarnur ; 
 eruptionibus aut aL-eri iirnem ^rifcrtbant, iwimiM^^^^^^^ ,mraban1ur 
 
 ernostnlrum turrium ^^Itituchnem arf^^^^^^^ ,,^ either the 
 
 nicenibu.que «I'P':"^"'^"^';^/^ ^1^^"^ la^ the siege-works; they k^pt 
 
 breast-w.)rks o» fire, or attacked the *'''}^f\J*J^^;T^^^^ trenches with larse stones 
 
 heir turrets at eu'uU hArjht ^V^^^h'^u.ut S' B G f^i.- i" the description of 
 
 an.U-.y>^ them Irom ^PP''^'?,^;' 7/ho ba le^ Abditi in tabemaculis aut 
 
 the panic in Cjfisar's camp '\^''*»;;^'',^J^\^ !'^^^^^^^^^ periculum rni^rabantur. 
 
 pedes altte d'icehantvr -ante hos «-^''^ '!* X' ^„,\"/*i "J,^^^^ Permanent trenches 
 
 Vrv^exadcabanhir; reliqna pars scro is virgult j i/^;^f^^^^^^^ .^^ ^^^^^^j^^ ^^^ 
 
 live feet deep were made; in front of the^e, P\\f/,f// "'7 '' ,.^^ np with twigs, etc. 
 TamledfaA-n\x earth ; t he «-^-"^" >";,"^, P;^^,,^,;^^^^^^^^^^ iuThe descriplion of the" pesti- 
 CiEs B. G. 7. 73.- Such imperfects occur '"^.;"f^\;"|V. " ' roceedin-s of the people in 
 
 ^^ ^^^^^^^^l^rrSTt^^ r;e%t.ibea, .be 
 
 in front of Bruudusium. (Ca;&. B. C. l, 60). 
 
 1 
 
328 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 '■'T ":,! I":,i.i: .^ <"™~ >.'«4''»-'; ii^-rAtr xisr/:,-: "t'nq 
 
 corun/;TS6fl«/'«;;qu.te«lio.nam. ^^'^J^^,^,,'^ , fi Ui po^trCnu,. o^rfere'^^ 
 
 SaVT^Iixa iuT'cnti ponderc «'^'/^^^'^f, ,' ..V^ V"'^; ^, nj • • a pro?u53. esset. suspen-a*» 
 br^a4^r".p:>^"^"^^^ LbU^r cadcnten.naven. und. 
 
 affligibat^*. Liv. 24, 34. 
 
 B. PaUTICULAK classes of iMrERFECTS. 
 
 1) Imi>€rfcct of contingent action. 
 
 ""oB. 'n.e pro,„ca,c, .lono.in. repeated «cUons ^'i^^lZH^tlS:^ ^'^f^ 
 
 co.itingoncy(U.tib, OP.8. 2). „,i,;r.], imnoitVcts of rcpcatrcl actions 
 
 Jinn. 05. TlK. cc,nth.g<^cy m. ^^ h n^^ ^^^ ^^^ 
 
 arc. made aepcMMlent, is cMtlu;r ex, us>u )} M •,,,,,,, i^ under- 
 
 ciPiALCONSTUUCTioNsa-^x. ol o.) ^^^//"^^^ au-uriis semper 
 
 stood, being generally '"^^'«'^\^.^^| \> ^^^'^^^^^^ 2, 30. TO. (Ex. 1. 2.) 
 
 ytebatnr {L ...whenever an ;>^^,^^f *'" ^\*^3, ' qv^^^^ iruius furere viderC- 
 
 s^,Vo i::;k^u;:r ^v{;vn.vw - ;;i^,j^^.^'^-;:;; •:;,t - u; ^*^'^''^;^'^^:;;:;^! 
 
 wt-, to vote a-ainst n.e - '« •* " 'i I t,, I, • eft and riiht.- -^ xvIhmvv.t.- ^* a ^ qia".- 
 yJnne-other..- •■^'^ ""^^i^'lVr r.noat - '^ i.i alinanv diSo.ct direction, an 1»"^'"" - 
 roll - -^ in mat^pc!*.— ■** to reticai.— "\. ,„ ,i,..ni-ihi bodv —"■'«to (^iirround.— ^" oit 
 '.«tho^e that, bad been separated ^" '''^-JI'^lV, **' ,'i n "' -' 3. .,Ui..cs.- 33 to di'-trn)"'^- 
 
 8* to hurl — 3^ to attack.— •'*» weapon.— ;,/,'.,'..,..„ ™^/ _ 3b an iron grapple.— •*» tht- 
 lSra;,V;i S^^;;^' " l^at^/beiu loo.el,e...- " da,„e.l i. a^a-s. ..." ««.er- 
 
 IMrERFECT TENSE. 
 
 329 
 
 nrcssion on me that the angry Telamo was raging Cio. Or. 2, 46, 193 
 ii e mcnciej- he smke these words, he made on me the impression etc). 
 The finite elanses expressing contingency in regard to repeated actum 
 are- (.0 Tempokal clauses yw \ih qmrm,nbi,vt, aud nmulac ; {b) Loii- 
 nrnoNAi clauses witli si; (c) Kelative clauses, in which the rela- 
 ^vradk'Clivr or adverb is treciuently compounded with cinujue: 
 (rfrCertain classes of compakative clauses.- The tense of the predic-ate 
 iutlic contingent clause is mostly the pluperfect indicative (obs. 4). 
 no= 1 ConornWv the finite clauses expressing coutingeucy referring to repeated 
 
 afraid he nii/'ht have conmi l.ed '''^'l^"'"^:.t'l-t^^^^^^^^^ if'JlnyZ'e («hen- 
 vem religuvnanl, luistes unclu|ue M» 'f "'« ' "\™™"r^^^^^^^^ lo help 
 
 eve.) our troops had faMe.ie. a /'''P^V'e 1"^», »«^»1^» " r<p <R„Te the co„tiu. 
 
 ^.'^y^^Shapl^fn^agu^J^f^sJil-^-^ 
 
 te'i'airrta^ji'i |;?:«err ;f ^ «^ 
 
 the indellnites. especially when they ««-.^ «" j' !^^. ;^^if^d acti< is lep^esented as immedi. 
 . i,„ si i'/''^^'^''«";' ^';^;.),„^,f.'^,^„^„JJ- the c%S.on?SU.. sivmlaiqve, vf. are used, 
 «/e/y con^eqMent to ^^c contingrncj tue co j remisfiat dissoUlms reperubatur ; 
 
 S:^'(^ad:^2^\ai^^'/S.^ i^^^^^^n as ke KaU untent (thrown off h:s re- 
 
 ^''o^'^^J^ e^:e!itng^ontingency ff-^-^^S^^^ ^L^r/^n^'e 
 cLAtsE when the idea of --^^^^l^^^^,^l^^S^!^%^ 
 eonnerted with any member o {^'^^S [^^r^^*;..?;^^^^^^^^ . as : Quo gvi intraxerant, ^e 
 
 lorm may gei.erally be leplaced by claus^^^ (alwa3^) involved in 
 
 ip.i ac.tissimis vadis iHa>ub'iHt; ^^[[^^'^''^'^'Y'^^ f ^^' ^^0^ eo intralerant,- Ubi 
 the sharp pricks of the palisa les [ *'\-. V^VnrP .y-.i<ti?ban^ €.. Sicvbi. n qvo loco, 
 plurimum periculum ostendebatxr ibi "I'Jp',^,."';^; \Yer^^^ 
 ;.steudebatur) ; ^Vfu^er ^^^^^^^'^^ "i^^^T^a/i^^ i^^que.^tif eon,pou..ded 
 
 crsoever, etc. : »i 9««Wi«//<9we^in partem mpuumy^^^^^ ^^^^ 
 
 Imchattv^r direction xhvy \'^^l^^^^}]^}''^:J}^lf^^^^^^ of the con- 
 
 ^. V. 2, 41. Ex. IS.- Since by the. e ^ 'P«^ f,j;;^\^J'^",^ f^'^^^^^^^ (Ex. 19.), 
 
 Ungencv is separately marked, the ^*-''»^^,.*^'''*^',^/ ' , ,,, Ivl' J-.kpfe^ for the same 
 or of both predicates (Kx. 2n.) are sometmes r^^^^^^ qyotie.am. 
 
 reasons as with miye or sevn>er (i\. kJ, Obs. -J), t'ltl^ !^hoi^^^^^^ often \ or as of ten as (if 
 cjne (not = quocunquc tempore. .^"^ = qua m 8 s.^^^ ioe/not auswer to the q.iestioti 
 nsi'd in that m. aninir). In this instance ^^ P'^ y^f ^ " f,J "t,.). >-„niquam dubitavit 
 ' whtn \ but to the question -Km often (R. ^^-^' ^.^^^f'/Tiy/^^^^ • Verres never /<**■»- 
 v"rre. (auferre a.MmU.s)^.o^i'-.r./«9^. alu-ujus am^^ 3 ^ ,^^ ^^^ 
 
 tuted to steal, however ojten he lell in love with tome one s iin„. uie. 
 
 ""II'TtUo following forms of comparative clauses are used to express contingent 
 
J3J C8E or TIB TESSES. 
 
 Vupni a-irne labonlret ^''9}^^ :'\]:,X,,ed tlu^re himself «.r senf <»tu - «• ' , j,, fr„ut of 
 tlu' wall accorihnfj t the ^ V.^ ^ ^, q 7 4« ^s.-c hx. -i;''- /I ,,'/ „i.lv to the action in re- 
 
 he the P"f''" "li'n o 7, 81 (Es. ai). . , ,„ mar,!o, or 7'«). .f», 
 
 ues afddimt. Caes. »• i»; '■ ° ,,„„„,„., • (Mif-^ ■■■■ q«ohH', I "<"■ ■ ■/.,( ...^ „-ilh quo. to. 
 
 >r«;i/ «<•!' /""'^''' "" ""-" .,„„„,, „t ,his kind in ro^aM to 
 
 27-'». , „„ .i.,,«e« denot n-r '■onluisenc> 01 1 „51 on mn>l 
 
 »-«SS iii J-^'SilyS:^^ !i^cen.,.d h, .. othe„. 
 
 'Z^^ilr^. ",,,,„ , H„e in ..a..n,.Mch_..;cnd.^a,iUe,;o^.;. -^^^^^ 
 
 Or« 5 There is a unifoim y "' ' .^.^^od in ehuisi-^ of :"[-."'' i,.^.s in the claut^e 
 in whidi contin.^-ent actions ^^"^^^^^,^, Thi. V>n;;^:;j>;.;. \' 'J'^ontin^-ent action 
 whe lier the time is P''^^''^' \\,.P, .^rprineipal sentence, w he oiriiu. ^^^j.^„^.,. ^ 
 
 rl^J"«.^.m;; t^ ;;- i^^in U.ne.' m i'-^^]^:Z) ?f Uie t -e i' ^Vasf c»-. tlie coj «- 
 w p.iiiceiv«'d to be anun'" fnllowin"- lensen : (") »' '•"^ .xilpupkct (or perfect n mu 
 
 tenses ThiH IHW requires he JolUm 1 .^^ ,o...^*/^»' ^^^ nu' S' y^'-' »^' >^ »" '^^^ "":•" 
 Je, action is in the p»'^'»,'^. I^.'t!-^^ if the time is ^>'''''^^" "/f'VVt iVne is/'/^'?v, the conttu- 
 
 ^vVlen any -ue did no. ^uO,m ^^^^ ^^.^^ ^,^^ ^t^nit. they 
 
 ftc . « ouf^i-if sacriflcus lutcrUiUin, n " j 
 
 ^ (;> Fn///r^ : Si qni* «on stetent, feacr ^ontin-ent dances 
 
 J« .xdud. I'itn. «i^- , ^, ^ „i„„erfoct (or imperfect) in t^^!^, ^;Vf,,^J,allv in clanses with 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 331 
 
 when the continf^cncv occnrred, as Cic. Quinct. 11, 39 (qnotpd 7?ew?. 03, OBa. 4). Thus: 
 Driis'iis<'ravi-^ (cnu) orator, ita dumtaxat ywwm de repnblicii diceret ; Driisus was a power- 
 ful hpe.rkcr, but not otherwise than u-hea he ii}y}ke on public jiflairs. Cic. Brut. |»2, 2>2. 
 Althou-h Quum here ext)resses lepeated coiitini;ency, it cannot be rendered by wlien- 
 (■ver '— (6) Karelv (in continjient clauses with quum and n) the subjunctive is used by 
 Cicen» and CVr-ar if the consequent denotes an action which is represented as havinir o/- 
 ti-am haopened nfunenr the confmu'ent action occurred, as: Ilortensuis, quum parhre- 
 ^//teciim caiisas perorandi locum semper tibi relinqnWat ; When {ever) Hortensma 
 tvoke a- your partner (divided the cases with you), he (Uways leftlo you the cIosiul' up 
 or I be cjise Cic Brut. 51, 190.— Sin autem locum ten5ret-f//(?/i/, tela vitSre wonjwterant ; 
 liut if (whenever) th^ concluded to keep their positions, Xh^y could not piofect thein- 
 t^clves from the missiles. Cics. B. G. 5. 35. See Cic. Or. 1, 54 '^2 (q.ioted li. 54 Obs. 2) ; 
 lb. Div. 1, 4r., 102 (Ex. 14. to R. 54): Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 22, and Ex. 30.— (c) In the later 
 writers, bednning with Livv. the subjunctive became the more usual mood in all clauses 
 expressins? paht cl)ntinL'encies of this kind, as: Quum in jus duci debitOrein nrft.*.'"^?^^ 
 und.q.ie convoimant ; Whenever they saw a debtor conduct ed to the courts tliey^ocAyo? 
 tof/efTier from all quarters. Liv. 2, 27.- Quemcunque iictor 7>rf/^«»(/^«^e^ tnbanns imtti 
 iubebul: Whomerer the lictor had arj-c,sted, \hc tribune ^voiihl (always) commit him. 
 Liv. 3, 11.- See Liv. 1, 32; 3, U; 3, 3« ; «, 8 ; 25, 3; 20, 11 ; ai, 38 ; 44, 29; 44, 41, and 
 often. 
 
 1 Fatoor me hoc tibi sa^pissime nepjassc, quod non superbia neque [nhnmanitate 
 faciedam' Cic Or 1, 22. 99.— 2. T.rrie vis^ Pythiam Delphis miifabat^, natflraj 
 Si])yllam.'ll). Div. 1, 3(i, 79.- 3. Q»um Galba otiOsus^stilum^ prehe?uleraf, motni-que 
 aniini». tamciuam ventus^ hominem, defecerat^ flaccescebaf^ M'""."!*"'- ^'^- ^l^h ri^^V 
 4 Coiisilion ejus quum valebant homines ntebantur, pairociiiioi^ quum ^u-^ia/i'. lb. 
 34 i:}0 — 5. Verres quum rosam xiderat, tum ver incipere arhitrabatur. lb. \ err. 2. 5, 
 
 10 — g' (5'/^///iuiuepiaini4 coht)rs inipetum/f^^/a/", hostes velocissime/v/wgtedrtn?L Cajs. 
 BG 5 35 — 7 I'nusquisque opiniOnes finrrebatis. ct ad id quod ab alio audierat sui 
 aliqu'id'addSbat. Hoc nbi unoanctore'« ad y>\x\v\^ permanaverat,'-' , plures auct5re«i8 ejus 
 Yvxrid>^ba>.tur. \h. B. C. 2, 29.- .s. UU frumento et pabulo'» opw.s' ^rn^ cohortes cuin 
 oinni equitatii pncsidium aqitahanf^^ Sail. Jug. 55, 4.- 9 ^/owac/^a^^a^M/^i senex ^t 
 quid asperiu-"^ rfM-*?mm. Cic. N. D. 1.:«. 93.- 10. ' Nihil hoc ad nos;^^, ad-* CicerO- 
 iiem,' innuitbaf. Gallus noster, .vi <??/i< ad cum tale quid retulerat^'. Cic. lop. l<J;Oi-— 
 
 11 Sif/uce res eraf major, populus horuni aiutoritate maxiine commorebatvr-^ lb 
 Se'-t 49 105-12. .vi qua in parie^' nostn laborire^»* videbnnfur, eo si-na luferii^» 
 C*8ar wbebaf. Ctes. B. G. 7. ».7.- 13. Hi, si quid erat diii-ius^", concui^^bant^^ ; si qm 
 equo decide rat^-', circuf,iH.^tebant^\- si quo erat lon-iuss* progrediendum, tanta fmi 
 alieritas" ut equoiuin cur.um ada;quarent3«. lb. 1, 88.- 14. St qmclquafnc-^mi^- 
 axp^xerat, manu^ abstinere non poterat. Cic. Verr 2. 4. 22.- 15 Qui «""'^«/^'^.^^jn 
 oppidum veneraut, immittebantur^» lUi ccmtinuo Cibvralici canessa ^,u ^V^^.^^Vlnhv 
 
 niiia Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 21.- 16. Quoi Cibyraiie fratres;??-o/x/mAiA eis crust:«<o aut emble- 
 nlata*' detrahebantur. Ih. 2,4,32.- 17. Qua ex parte*^ no.tros prcmii" t;,^^tom/A^ 
 his auxilio** ex nlterioribus castellis deducto^'»» svbmiftefxint. C:es. B. G. <, 81.— 
 18 QuCECUuque navis ,'X Asia, ex Syria venerat, statim tenebatur. vectOres*' omnes sta- 
 tim in lautnmias conjiciebant ur , onera atque merces*^ ,„ pnetoriam aoxxinnxreferebaTi- 
 J/4"Vic Verr 2 5 5r,.- 19. Oi/«cw//7'^e tter/m< Seivilius, hoc jucundissimuin" 
 spcctaculiun oniuibus pra:b-,baf< lb. 2, 5, 2 G.- 20. Quascunque posiea controversias 
 
 1 i e whenever I refused it.— ^ power.— inspired, i. g. whenever she issued an oracle. 
 _ ■• in "his leisur.' hours.- 5 had seized the pen.- « fnofus aidmi. excitement.- tam- 
 
 quam v.rdus hominem. supply dejlcit : the same as if »1"«»« ^^f/^.^JIf Tahi; 
 ^ .. , , , - 1 :.i ^nro,,ij droop. — 1° his style. — ^^ aavice. — ^■' ma 
 
 crew.— " onera afq 
 presenied, oflered. 
 
332 
 
 USE or THE TENSES. 
 
 21 NuUaes^tamf uiiquamecn cntia | \^"'' ^..„,1,^6 vi^i *^nuX. Cic. bam. .'.. 2, «• 
 
 r„t,i; ac«4a^ CO njHJor^d.»»^^^^^^ 
 
 d^Ja'C^.n et ab Hcic .rc;«rf.W . U^ 
 
 que et dill eor/Hanlt (iiiSiiam n 1'''^^;':'," K ridcMi-ni" i ici» livihus. Cic. Uiv. 1. 1. 
 
 tor. lb. Brut. 24, 93. 
 
 ">) Describing Imperfect. 
 ^ '^«ft DE^criBiNGiMPKUFECTSure those ^vhich Min eate the appear- 
 .^/^e^.:.:;M;.s;o. actons as t.ey P— ^^^^^ ^ ^^^^ 
 beholdei-s at a moment of time chosen by ^J^V? I';;,. 1, hei:atin., evon the 
 
 OB. 1 While onnnodern stylo 'vbonnd. in; f:raph|C^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ,hey 
 
 po?-Kmado a very .paring' "-;,;>^; !',t ^/^l^ ^r^ of a',Vo7j>r 
 
 occur the author empl^'y^' tlicm ^' '-'Vi,». n.yint narticularlv chosen by him lor thi;* P» r- 
 
 fti it J puearcd to tlio>c prc-ent at a i>'V'-»'V'"^J'f,V,i,, , .,1 in tlu' discourse, and thereby 
 
 pos e^Tlus individual stand-point "^''rivon the^l mr i pe f^^^^^ The actio..s thu. 
 ?h;de-^cribinu'imperrecti..l.s.n.i^u.>hed 1^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^.,^,,i„^, ,».,.,„ „1 .he 
 
 jrraphically presented are ^7"r;'\\'fc.; , £ i'ndeflni.ely outlasting that 
 
 ^.>.nent -^^'^f, ;j:j';;;,;^ ^^l!^ "^^ !!,• HmJ^r^^^ areWequently intenmngled. 
 
 "^0^:" . ^:" 2:^:7^^ -- of '».0 -;.n^de. or <l.^;bi^ • ,, ,, ,^0 
 
 j;5iJ!o.;:;;:^i=^ 
 
 mn( unlus famiiiie viril)us \ ej.-nti P'>P';'\\ '^' ^ V X . th<'V w< re marchini: iu pro- 
 et admiratione stupens Ire ^-'l^'^ ';^J;;^\Z^'^^'oo^^ ?hen>. It \.nplcfureot 
 cession: .<equeMt>,r ti'rha, a crowd "« ^l\/'V, 'f,,,: f of time as a beholder).- (/^> ^|'^' 
 fhe procession, the author ^^^^l^^^^^^^^'^t t Ud i^ and P.so (Cic Se<t. 8, S, 
 descr-Ptionof the tacen and outward 'M>p f » ^^^^f / ' V, ., un-'ueuti^* ainuens, cala- 
 
 " an\ t.eter ince^m^oL quam 'run, entus ! c. a t^^^'^^^ '^«„!^.;,\^^ !,, j^eir laces and d.po.t- 
 iu oculo, tanta contractu) fronis ut. etc \;'»;'> ^/'f " ^ ■ curled by the inm,. . .he.-M'^^ 
 nlenr ! The one dripping ^v'th t.nguen .^^^^^^ th/other,0 good gods! 
 
 coidewpt for the km-l>ts, and his "'»^' /''^ " v/fl ,0 1^ at ! Such ^va< the s(,lenm grav- 
 how m}ly his person u-a-s how fl^'-^«- »^, ^ .f^. , ,' of Ve.avius (Ex. 1).- {d) The exe- 
 itv <.t the looks, etc.- ('^) /»'^;V^>'"f !\"*.^^'c . aw^^ ^^x. 8).- (/) A religious pro- 
 
 « to encounter in battle.- ' l|t' ^an e ir "^/ '^;*; ,*J '_ „ ,„ ,„. .upeiior.- ''■' made a 
 tives.-» whatever I had ;'''>';''<1 '^ ;- .,5 ^)'^'; in the track of such an attack.- 
 
 dash airainst 1»»« «''•''"y- '' "" '^'^ J^'l^e''^'^^^^^ when they were f .1 bn- back 
 
 1* slauuditer.-^^c.l- all sexes ana a^.s_-U^^^^^^ ^^ ^^.j^^.^ j was inquning. 
 
 on their ranks.- i^ outtlankcd.- J 'l^f,;^" ^r imi.ortanl lleldsof hunian kn.^wle.lge. 
 - 20 woul.l occur to me.- '^^ oi^tinut are »'^,^, ;r, "V»^' V"to teach" to «liovv.- •'* wUcu- 
 -^atua alien jus rei, the way t»r »oad to eomethiug. w itac , 
 
 ever he .poke.- '" to inflame.- ^« impas:*ioucd. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 333 
 
 Thu" the acts represented on the stage are pometimcp given in imperfecfft on account 
 of their pictural character: iJabat in ilUl labuia poena» Bellerophontes ; Bellerophontes 
 did pav his pcuaitv in that drama. Sen. Ep. 115. Such imperfects arc used in the poeti- 
 cal descr ptiou ot works of art. when the autiior takes any stand-point ol time, as 11 one 
 of J hose that saw the work. Here beioug.s the description of the shield of .«Eneas in 
 Virg. J2n. 8, G*», which is given in imperlects and hij-iorical presents. 
 
 Ubs .3 The frequent description of localities occurring in the historians, which have 
 not the aim of graphic delineation, but of explainimr those local features which are 
 necc-sary to understand the narrative, do /lot l)elong to tlie describing imperfects, taken 
 in this sense. In the>e the time of the predicates is always suL'gested by the lacts of 
 the narrative, and hence thcv t)elong to the regular imperlects of state {Re?^}. 50). Only 
 in rt "ard to their grammatical connection, sentences containing such descriptions have 
 the pt-culiarity that they generally begin new paragraphs, beinsr not grammatically con- 
 nected with the J) evious senteuce.s. Hence the particular time referring to imperfects 
 of this descfipti(»n Hieing always a whole period) must be regularly vndersiood. Thus : 
 Ipsum ernf oppidum Alesia in c(dle siimmo.... ; cujus collis radices duo duSbus ex par- 
 tihns ttumina t~tiUinbaht. Ante id oppidum plani lies. .. .;?«/?6a<! / reliquis ex paitmus 
 colics ...oppidum cinqUant. Cies. B. (J. 7. 6!».— Flumcn erat hand ma'_Mium propius 
 hoBtium castris, etc. Liv. 44, 40. See CiEs. B. G. 6. 7 ; Liv. 25, 39, and often. 
 
 1. A D. IX. Kal. SeptembrTs, honl fere septimS, mater mea indicat» ei apparSre 
 nubem iiiu-itjlta^ specie. Poscit avunculusS soleas^, asceiidit locimi ex quo maxime 
 illud miraculum conspici poterat. Nubes. incertum procul intuentibtisex (juo niome, 
 Ofitba'ur. Longissimo velut trunco elaui in altums quibnsdam ramis» diffuiidebatu.r\ 
 pondere suo victa'^ in latitudinem vaiusc'ebat''. Plin. Ep. ti. 16.— 2. Direptisi" 
 bonis" Taiquinii ('amnati (^unt) proditOresi"''. sumptiimque supplicium'3. blabant 
 deli"-ati'< ad paliim»» juveiies nobilissimi. inUerebatqnt'^^ nou poenie mairis homines" 
 quani sceleris. Liv. 2.5.— 3. AthenodOnis videt agnoscitquei^ narratam sibi effi-ziem ». 
 Stabat, innuebatqne"^^ diirito. similis vocanti : hie tollit lumen et sequitur. 7&a/ lila 
 lento irradu: p<»siquam deflexit'-i in aream npeiite dilapsa22 deserit comitem. Phu. 
 Kp 7 27 — 4 Quam di>siinilis hie dies illi tempori videbatur. Tum^s imperaror 
 popnl'i Komani deos patrios'* rejiortalHit'^^ Segesianis ex urbe hostium reciiperatos^»: 
 nunc'''7 ex tiriie sociOrum pnctor eju~dem populi eosdem illos deos nelario scelere 
 wifertbaf^^ Cic. Verr. 2. 4, ;i5.— .'j. Dihlta^» res est in pn.ximum senatum, cujus ipse 
 con-'pectusao augustissiuuis^» fuit. Princepssa ]}r<£sidebat^^, erat eiiim consul, etc. 
 Plin Ep 2 11 — () Post eas duo signa JunOnis ixyrtabantur; tum XXVII virgines, 
 lo,.-am indane vestem. carm.-n in JunOnem cauenies ibant Virginuni "rdmem ^«9;^^- 
 b(Wiur decemviri, coronati laurea. In foro pompa constitit. Liv.2< 3.^-- 7. btdebafin 
 rostris collCira tuus. amictus to«ra purpurea. Esceudis. ascendis. . . i)\ad^i\m imjyonebas 
 cum plaiigOre populi ; ille cum plausu rejicilbat. Cic. Phil. 2, 34. 
 
 3) Ilidorical Imperfect. 
 ^ 5§i. IIiSTOBiCAL Imperfects are those which contain an historical 
 perfect by imvlicati/jn, the action being represented as incomplete on 
 account of certain purposes of the author. Tliey are used 1) to impart 
 to an historical fact, which is stated as such, the quality of a temporal 
 CLAUSE to determine the time of other actions {Rem.(S^)\ 2) to narrate 
 historical events according to their general features {Rem. 68). 
 
 1 Told me - 2 unusual.- » uncle.- * sandals.- » as if raised on an immense stem, 
 like a tree -«branch.- 'it spread out.- 8 pressed down by its ovvn weight-- J ^^ 
 Jniduaiv vanished .m both sides.- >» to confiscate.- ^Mhe property.- i'' tra,tor.- 
 ''^llupiM.nn mmere. to execute.- i* ,ied.- ^^ a post ([^"der by a p lunil).- ^» M^^^^^ 
 J7 the sMectalors.— i» to recoiruize.— i» the apparition described to him.— -i" to beckon 
 _ Vi tnrncd to the area.- 22 ,he suddenlv disappears and thus left hercompanion. See 
 m^re 18L R 22. .- 23 ^.;n («m the former day) determines the time ^^I'^-f^T'^ll 
 does not iustifv the use of the imperfect, since the action ^^'a.^compMe on that day. The 
 a h(r asluM.es a prntindar moment at which he represents the actions as witnessed by 
 le l^hol e rs - 2^ the trod- of their city.- 2^ to carry back.- 2« recovered.- 27 on he 
 atter day - •^* to steal.- 2» to lav over.- 3o the very aspect.--3i most sublime.- 3 2 the 
 .mr.eror-33 The action was complete if viewed from the whole time of the meeting. 
 But the author intends to give u picture of the assembly, and chooses for this purpose 
 eomc particular time point. 
 
331 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 Bern. 67. Historical imperfects implying u tf-MPORAL clause occur in 
 various connections: (^0 *''>H<>^ved by a clause imroduced by q a ui/i w ah 
 the force of a kklative adveub {quo temp) re). ISee Obs. 1-4; {h) opening 
 adetaclietl narrative or anecdote (Ous. o) ; (c) closing a sentence, and 
 indicatin/j a temporary suspension of tlie narrative in ren:ard to the pro- 
 gress of events (Ous. (>) ; (</) so that many historical impehkects Ct 
 BiNED point to a stibm/uenl perfect by which the result ot tlie aclious 
 inii)erfects is to be stated (Obs. T). 
 
 COM- 
 
 iu 
 
 tempuf^) bt'lluia iutcrvenit. 
 
 impcrrcct hiive the force of relaiive clauses» in tlie above >eiise, hut in tins indance tem- 
 poral ixdvi-Td^ {efiainfamjnterea) urn a.Uled niitn-f/uN/n, to show that (/uu/n has thenu-an- 
 in<»of a rehitive (fttryuod teinpus). Thus in the Examples quoted Kein.oT, Obs 1 and 
 Obs. 3 (Tri"inta dies ui ea navi fui, quuin inferea semper mortem ex.-<j)ec(dUim.— EvolS- 
 rai jam tiiremis, quum edamtum naves cetera; auo in loco moliebantut). See Ex. 0. 
 
 Obs 3. The predicate of the principal sentence \» always in the iMrKiiFECT ini)ic.\- 
 TivK if it represents a period of time diinnrj which the action of the clause happened, 
 correspondin«'to the <,'ener:il rule, liein. «10. Obs. 2 (Ex. 1-5). But it is placed in the plu- 
 I'KUFECT (rarely in the pkufkct) if the action has hap|)ened ajter tlie time <»f the princi- 
 pal predicate, as : Cominodum dixcessenis heri quutn Trebatiiis veidt, \ou hud ]n-l leH 
 ve-terday when Treha'ius came. Cic. Att. i:}, 9, 1.— Ti-^'/v mihi es' priino vetenlior iiitel- 
 
 x|)ressea by «ci'era^ pt .. ^ ... . ,. ., 
 
 iiavem cfmscendU, Brundusiumque rilant, et iiltiiiias iladriim mans o\ix* ptticU, qanm 
 inteiim milites donmm ohsidere ca'peruui. Cic. Pis. 3S, 93. 
 
 '8 the form of an indepeno- 
 mittere intortnisi:-ses: 
 
 ENT 
 
 Op.s. 4. In place of a relaiive clause with 7'/vw.sometinie8 the 
 .At sentence is used, as: Minlbar quid esset quod tu mihi litteras i 
 
 indicilnt mihi Pansa Epicureuin te esse lactuin {when Pansa intimated to me that you 
 bad become an Epicurean). Cic. Fam. 7, 12. 1 (See Cics. B. G. 7, 25). Here belongs the 
 Horatian ' Ibam forte via SacrJ : accurnf quidam, etc' Ilor. Sat. 1 1. (i. e. quum qui- 
 dun accurrit )— Somctime-i the correspondini,' denionttrafice adverb t'lin takes the place 
 of qnum as : Jam cxi<,'iium inter duas acies eral spatium . . . : lum ccmsiil Konulnus 
 eqiiituin pauca< turinas immlsit. Liv. 10, .3»).— Sometimes intermediate clauseP, as quum 
 hoc aqerein; are inserted in the place of quum, as Uses. B. C. 2, 36. See Ex. 7. 
 
 Ors 5 Historical imperfects in independent sentences frequently introduce detached 
 narrativ.s or anecdotes. These. be-id<'s represent iiii; continued actions as ordiiuiry his- 
 torical facts, mark the time diirin-j which the d. -tails, containing' the jwiid ol the uuec- 
 dt)ie, happened, a>* : Cn. rompejns ccpnani Verri dahat. Apposuit patellam in qua si- 
 gilla eraui ejiieiiia, etc. ; (Once) Pompey gave (was giving) a dinner to \ erretf. lie 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 335 
 
 , 2, 4, 22. 
 quum 
 
 placed a plate on the table on which exquisite fignrcs were carved ctc.Cic. Verr 5 
 slic-h imperfects always involve temporal clauses with quum (Pompejus dedit : 
 daret [da^at] apposuit, etc. See Ex. 8-12. 
 
 Ob* 6 Historical imperfects very frequently form the closino prt^picate in histori- 
 cal conne(ti. wit b previous actions. as\ Helvetii jam in J^duOrum flnls^ pervenerant 
 eorm e a<"os /><>«^L/ya;//'/r. ^dui quum se delendere non possent le-atos ad Cjesa- 
 rem n t.um etc ; 'the Helvetians had already arrived within the boundaries of the 
 ^ in" s n wered^mtatinq their lands. The ^duane,. smc^e they.could not de end 
 tlRmiselves sent envovs to Ca-sar, etc. Caes. B. G. 1, 11. (i. e. Helvetu jm^hUi mnt, et 
 /^X xi ./X '/'/^^^ Am mittunt etc.) Frequently imperfects of this kind are imme- 
 diately preceded in the same sentence by co-ordinate, or otherwise connected ;>^rr€Cte. 
 Thev<i^'''«te facts followinir those, expres-ed by perfect predicates, m ordinary his ori- 
 calsucces>ion, and are placed in the imperfect to mark a temporary stop in the course 
 «f pro.'ressinL' events foreshadowing the statement of other facts which happened 
 lir Mhe time occupied bv such actions. After stating these tacts, the thread of the 
 
 te mi eel Sn of s ncceedinir events is taken np again : Ad nnntinm tarn atrOcem «w- 
 Xirag men, (luce-que quid agerent cm^^ultahaiU (here follow the details of the consul- 
 tation); quum videre.ft pnvtOres . . . . exercitum ducuid Megaram. Liv. 24, 30. ^i. e. 
 cOHxultavtiunt.iiidumcoumltant.tilc.) ^ceh.x.\'^\^. 
 
 Ob« 7 Oft.-n GiioT'ps of historical imperfects are combined, representing historical 
 fact-occurring in succession to each other, such as are ordinarily expressed by peftect^. 
 The oriof tl.e imperfect represents them as unlinished for the time bein-, always 
 p/dnt in.";: a fact to 'be alterwaVds mentioned, which will end the state «f ^."comp letenesa 
 iiid uncertaintv as to tht> ttnal result of the actions. Such imperfects have the lorce of 
 rime periods fnr the liiture fact to which they point : Pnin«, concursu hostes pell m- 
 
 latuie in fu-am coniicinntur ; ab sinistro . . . reliqui ordmes acenime resK^hbant 
 
 he rei ut this resistance remaining in suspense), nee dabat suspiciOnem f".^'je QU.s- 
 Qiiam Ip-e dux Camoiuireiius suis aderat. atque eos coJwrlabatvr. (I urn) . • • f'^'QiJ 
 ^^^^inM-erunf. etc. C.es. B. G. 7, 62 Mich groups of ""IK-rfects are very frequent 
 iu the historians, as I'les. B. C. 3. m ; Liv. 35. 10 ; 10, 36, and often (Ex. 19). 
 
 1 Treviri a LabiGno n(m hmgius bidui via aberant. qnum duas vej.iffe legione^jusm^ 
 
 (ii^arl^con^o^cuid-^ Ca-s. B. O. ♦>. 7.- 2. Jam ad Hexapylum eront Hippocrates atque 
 
 ^cZ^i::i!;:!:Uq,::^c^o^n^ per propinquos^ ^''V'^'^'K^'^'lT^^ ''ZnnZv' 
 7.„,ji, .>,v^7^,»vx• h,ifrrei,?runt** Liv. 24. 32.— 3. Ita equestre proelium ercU''. quum piv- 
 
 rent 1 b 25 T«J - 4 Minus quin-en.os passusa castris aherard. quum in con^^ectujuere 
 '^ium^uut lb. 4i%.- 5. Jam n^ii niotlo pacis scd ne belli qu.dem J-a ..j.g« 
 eranf, quum Komtlnus exercitus ad Olympium castra P;'^"/^- f'^-.J^- ;«.-- b (ff^^^ 
 ^i;i3 vir«Ms»« civi> Kuimltms, quum inferea nullus gemitusi" rtW(/if?6f?/Mr. Cic V^rr. A 
 ^02 A 7 Hipp )( ra es castra circa Acrillas iw.ebat : munientibus superv6nit (surpitsd) 
 MaiTellus Liv 21 :i5.- S. Dionysii.s, quum fanumi« Proserpime Locris expllavlssell^ 
 f^Su^^^^>^^; isquo q?,um'secuiidi^sin.o>« ventu. ^^••«""^^;.^'^!^,^";,"; ^^f 
 'Videti<ne'"iiuiuit, ' quam bona a dis im^nortalibus navigano ^acrlltgls2o detur 
 Cic X D 3 34 8: -9 Octo hominum millia tenebat Hannibal qui re icti m castris 
 
 fuissent a PatiUo et VanTme con 
 
 ulibus. Eos senfltus non censuit redimendos-', ut 
 
 e«set insitum" militibiis nostris aiit vincere aut emOri. Jb. Off. 3, 32, 114.— 10- Captis 
 a S n lo Veiis milites simuhlcrum-^^ j„„Onis sede^* sua moxevi^conabauturj^ixon^m 
 2b 1. nterroUta dea an Roman. mig.Jlre vellet, velle se respondit. ^ aler. Max. 1, 8 3. 
 !- 1 U • bcMn c^ do^ulUU^^. Quum ille cui donabStur. se !?/« ".eujii^^«- 
 II. 1. 1 /^lii '.^ _ ,i;,.„„^ „,,,, /.,>nv..iiTrof<ivtf5n:e >n;e2o : 'ISon quiv 
 
 2« ;' Non quiero,' 
 12. Syracu>ani 
 
 tanti'niuneris invidiam refllgissel-^ diceiisnon con venTrcfi*i1 time 
 
 iiiniiit -fluid te accipere deceat. sed quid me dare. ben. Ben. i, Hk . 
 
 q"!"ia.f^Grunt-''HLVacliibo.iis..r.c/J'^^^^ 
 
 £)icCbant (juantum cuT-iue Verris jusMi '»""\'i\^«:»l!?y'.':^;':'^<:.^^i=^V. <-'^J»^l>a"t....^}.ra<-» 
 
 siliii, sed larinen patiebantur^a. 
 
 Kepeiite recitiltur^^ uno nomine^^ HS CCL milliaju^sa 
 
 -ToFdc^i^::^» to learn.- " to open.- * ccmininnications.- ' J '■}'■' f^;";';;^^^^^ 
 Idre^ thepeonleV partv, the democrats.— ' throw open.— Mo interfeie.— ^"'^ ;^'^^ 
 gll^^^.g ou, in tViat stiite was.- - appearin.u^ in the distance.- - =/^'3^7- - mo^ 
 ^.r.,vp^ Ml-irm — 13 to beat — '* ro( .— >'' groan.— !*• temple.— >^ to plundtr.— "."~ 
 fcvorlbte:- - to l^:nn::- course, technically used of -.sels whidi -e -UmgJ^o^ 
 the win.l : make -..ood headway.- '^» sacrdepu,. a «^"ipl^'-'-, '''';,^':rT '' Vh'f ^'t of the do- 
 .•nlr-if..fl in the mind-i of — "" statue.— ^* p ace.— -^ presentid v\itU. Hit ati oi uie uk, 
 n ; Si he^^e^;^!,^! as a lasting tran^iction.- - measuring u. ^-.^^JS^"^^!'-^»^^ 
 worth.- " had deelined to undcr.'o the odium of such a ''•cl» «'•-;! f;''^fj^"^^f^^,f'l 
 eum-tances - *» the managers of the Heraclius esiate.-y 3« to render an "<-Couni. 
 aJmt.iiey.- 32 to groan— «^ they bore up, they were patient.- ^* it was read that.- 
 " iu one item (belongs to recitdtur). 
 
336 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 pn.tnH. data. FU m.xi.nns ^^r a^^^^C^. Ver^^ 
 
 vetii ratibus franManf. I bi Cie>ar «^^^r"» ^ /«^^i » e i Q» profect.i^ ad cam par- 
 
 x;"rT;:^;:r:;::;:rr:::;;:;:or^ 
 
 the iMPERFKCT. Mostly (but not necessarily, see Lx. 3. 4), such acts in 
 vnlve reneuted jiction. See Ex. 1. 2. 5. . ,. ^, 
 
 "tl vLc..^ Of .,„. .|^. m.i.n.,. -p;- ^^-r ^-.^..'S/Sf.rC S^ 
 
 M.mr'f" in qnam >m|XMne 7;"'!»",;^'fVn vVnm lian lib. 'l ct P.tM i »'A<"'^'- H'- »>• 
 C*s. B. U. b. 43. 
 
 4) Imperfects of inner action. 
 
 A. i>/;vc< Predicates of inner adiofu 
 
 K5S2 rredicatcs (knoling actions of the mind (/.€., feelings and 
 
 conceptions, cogitation, dispositions and affections, volition), have the fol- 
 
 lowing peculiarities in reg ard to their tense : 1) The use of the perfect or 
 
 IT (ft win--- 'tliev were hard proP.in- (supply />osfes).- ^ to Pf.'-c^iyf,- * .^^^^^^^ 
 
 breakin.' down, do^'tmyi"?^- ' /S? . - i» C . p - ' > Proparcd tben.^clve..- ''^ the 
 _ « freely, impiidrntl} .- » to /•^''P'^'^^^^^^^^ tlie ccn,Vr to thcMu.- »» damdrem follere, to 
 '^^r;' t Katu7cry -^« re.^^^^^^^ (or nm)-- >" ^vere carried, 
 
 ?;;' advanc n" - •»» havhS formed a tortoise (by holding' their ^^^^^^^'^^:' 
 "o"n c£cl raT.k..-^^ wild palm-tree.-" ^"Pporj^d them.elve..- '^^^^^ ^'IJl^^^^. 
 
 — 3T to burn.— '« to drive. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 337 
 
 imperfect, more than in external actions, depends on the individual 
 CONCEPTION of the author (Obs. 1. 2. 3). 2) External acts which, as such, 
 are represented as complete at the given time, are frequently placed in the 
 iMPEiiFECT if they have certain particular relations to actions of the mind. 
 All predicates placed in the imperfect for either of these two reasons, are 
 
 called IMPERFECTS OF INNER ACTION. 
 
 Obs. 1. The jreneral principle which requires the use of the perfect or imperfect, accord- 
 mir as the action is represented as complete or incomplete at a given lime, is also ob- 
 served in retrard to actions of the mind. Thus predicates denotintr resolutions, or sudden 
 imi)ressions of the mind are placed in the perfect, while predicates denoting actions 
 whirh an; represented as states of the mind indefinitely lastinof. and mentioned in 
 coujiection with a particular time, are always placed in the imperfect, as 
 
 1. Peufkct : Gennanicobello confecto C'Ai^&T fitatuU sibi Rhenum esse transeundnm 
 (C'.Tsar reftofved, took the resolution). Cies. B. G. 4, 14.— Sed me pnmus dolor percussit, 
 C'otta quiim est expulsus {thejirst pang of grief struck ine). Cic. Brut. 89, 305. 
 
 2. Imperfect : Antonius ait se cloquentera vidisse neminem. Imidedat videlicet in 
 ejus meiite species eloquentiie quam, etc. (in his mind an ideal of eloquence was lylarited 
 or flj-ed). Cic. Or. 5, 18. 
 
 It would be improper to use imperfects in the first two sentences, or a perfect in the 
 last. 
 
 Obs. 2. But actions of the mind, from their nature, may often be conceived either as 
 states lasting: indefinitely, or as actions defined by the limits of the given time. Hence 
 the tense in i)redicates of inner action very frequently isdiflerent in very similar senten- 
 ces and connections : 
 
 1. Pufdfxit ami pntavit. (a) Ciesar, quod memoria tenSbat, L. Caesium consulem occl- 
 putn ab Helvetiis. (hoc iter) concedendum noup>/t(ldat. Ctes. B. G. 1, 7.— (b) Csesar quum 
 intelligeret, omnis fere Gallo.s ad belliim celeriler excitari, partiendum sibi exercitum 
 pitfdvit. lb. 3, 10. Madvig (transl. l)y Thacher, p. 292) assigns to putdbam the meaning 
 •I was of opinion', and toputdvi the meaning 'I adopted the opinion'. But in the 
 above sentences both putdbat and jmtdrit have the meaning 'he adopted the opinion' 
 (i. e., the opinion was caused by the emergency). In the same sense putdbam is used 
 B. G. 1, 40. On the other hand 2)utdvi has the meaning 'I was of opinion ' in Cic. Off. 
 3,30,110 (Regulus, quia hoc pairiaj non utile ^w^Jri/! [independently of the existiu"- 
 emergency], iecirco sii)i honesium sentire ilia credidit). The difference in the tenses ol" 
 all these predicates cannot be explained by anything except by the character of all inner 
 actions expressing states or aflections of the mind, which admit of two ways of con- 
 ceiving them. 
 
 2. h'xisfimddaf and flxisfimdvit. (a) Obcam causam non cunctandum ^a:'i.«^iw<fri^quin 
 puu^na decertilret. C:es, B. G. 3, 23. (b) His ad consilia c«pienda nihil spatii dandum 
 eyislimdlHtt. lb. 4, 13. In these sentences the i)erJcct existiwddt, and the imperfect 
 fj-iA/z/^J/^r/niave exactly the same Ibrce ('bethought /Am that somethinsr should /Ac» 
 not be done '). Compare lb. 3. 17; 4, 3(j ; 5, 28 ; 6, 5 with 1, 23 ; 2, 17; 4, 5 ; 4, 6. If 
 however existimdi-e means an al)stract judgment about things, the perfect is rarely used 
 (equitfltum recenti pra-lio j)ertcrritum esse existinidbat. Cies. B. G. 4, 13). So lb. 1, 6 : 
 1,7; 1,47; 6, 7; 7,50; 7, M; 7, Gl. 
 
 3. AfferPbot and aftulit (to cause), (a) Magnam hrnc res Caesari diflRculfStem ad con- 
 silium capiendum affevtbat. Ca^s. B. G. 7, 10.— (6) Haic re.s Caisari non niinOrem voluptS- 
 tem anulit. \\Y. 1, 53. 
 
 4. Tduit (nfjlifif) and rol^bat (nofebaf). (a) Ilarnm cau?arura illafuit jnstissima quod 
 Csesar Germflnos suis quoqiie rebus timgre coluif. Cies. B. G. 4, 10.— {b) Id esl maxime 
 ratirnie fecit quorl uoluit eiiin locum vacSre. lb. 1, 28.— (c) Causa mittendi Galbam fuit 
 qiiod iter per Alpis patefieri rol^bat. lb. 3, 1.— (o?) Quod siepius forttlnam temptaro 
 (ialba nol^baf, po?tero die in provinciam proficisci contendit. lb. 3, 6.— (e) Huic tu mo- 
 lestus esse nolvixti quera nunc respirare non sinis ? Q;tein nunc interficere cupis. eum 
 appellare nol^bas ? Cic. Quinct. 11, :i9. In all these examples the imperfects and perfects 
 nii-ht have been interchanged with each other, being used in perfectly similar, and 
 almost identical relations. In the quoted passage ol Cicero, the tenses have evidently 
 been varied for the sake of formal euphony. 
 
 5. Doldrem tnlit and dolore officiebdt>/r(hefv]t pain, was pained), (a) Eum dolOrem 
 Plancius tulii (at that time only) paul.'o apertius. Cic. Plane. 14, 34.— (6) Qua ex parte 
 
 15 
 
338 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 homme^ bcllandi cnpUii n.a=no rtolnn- afflcuhanl'ir (,.en»anontly). C«es. B. O. I, S. 
 6. sJnl (re,„lv«l) and ''«'"'««^heia an op,m.m «^^^^^^^^^^ „. 
 
 'Vcll^eV... ana ™«.^..^™( (.«^^« n"-;-r:L'f.l^ 
 
 ?*T'i;r,"!l'm '.".pS <:?ZX" rf..rSrunl:'u'mniu';;:;;nr .« «,^,um .tutcn... <»«-„-.8^"« 
 
 iupjuraiulum iY?/g6a^. ^'C- O^- '^' •^^- \f> ™.Vh, 1, Brut 62 221.- (c) Aiiti^tiuP rem 
 
 k\"aS^;-?c'i'.p3.arfflT«;i;i'erm^^^^^^ 
 
 9 S and,*^;;,» (I know,. («- *i»a,H "-"-«f «iJ.rriSHr/'s'n;^';^'^ 
 (M Est... <|iinin 2«nni iM.m. nion arum f/"v^''.'D 'vatlS i-i iniM'ihnnn. «-'iri liln-i-i». 
 
 !1 ilm ji islherwilarlciiscot Ihepiwlaatc, as: , .,, , 
 
 '" fXn o, omiiia n"- n,„v.n,nr na.flra., n,m;.ri --;,%«!r;,.?,:U;"ro 'inl 
 Cic. N. U. 2, 16. 44.- -l. l>.vlhas..ra» ««.«.< '"''";;;";;; ^."'rcmmHnaVa,*» « quibna 
 
 raL!rnrri.vL'rt^'c'sk';;uiv"s?rou^sir;n^^>^ 
 
 Fam. 5, 12, 7. 
 
 B. Indirect Predicates of inrwr action. 
 S 583 Predicates denoting external acts are frequently placed in the 
 impcrfec't on account of their kefeuence to INNER actions or states. 
 Thev either introduce actions with reference to their real merits, inner 
 niea^ini?. and signiticance (Imperfects of reference) ; or they repre- 
 sent an action as the result of a rule, principle, or habit (Imperfects of 
 
 RULE AND habit). 
 
 . WMoh move fn-m na.nn.. -uhc. - ^ oiMjer "^y -t-al J-^c,. or _^Pon.anco„.1y.- 
 s tlu! iniiHl.- « iH t'xtrndiu- over.- ^PV'^* '" -;^,.^,.V,X,,; ..T.;^ _ 8 i„ c« ns<'(inence of 
 in tl:is lueu.ung, intimates ^^^}^^^^ ^T; ^J^,^. ' 'quum in ChiOr.uu lapi- 
 inei.tul dir^ea^*...- » to rave.- '<> 1V»1^''' ^ Vii.lu.* o«h. t (w is HOlit out of tlie rock^^), falso 
 cidlni^ ^q>mrri€^) flgQni quiedam ''' '^|\^';,,\\ I'^^J.f^!, ^^^^^^^^ ,e.Milar head. - »=« The 
 
 exi..imal.al ( ^./f/if/eW,; V^^^r^'^il^ l^^Md hvVle/e ance.lo^^^^ has evidently 
 
 continjxent a<-tion to wh.cJ» the Opm on »'^'^l y/"^f^ M,, sculpture.- ^^ This im- 
 causedthe u.e ot Uiin iniperlect hy a k/''^\ «(/J '''f.?^ •■-,., tsTeU h^^der, he did not 
 perfect refers to a notorious order of Alexander J Am he is^aeU mu ora . 
 mean i7i&n-vomat) hy it a peculiar favor {(jralKE causa). 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 339 
 
 a. Imperfects of Reference. 
 
 § 5§4. The sentences in which imperfects of reference occur, have 
 (a) either the form of a finite clause, generally introduced by qvum ; or 
 (5) the action referred to is expressed in the form of an object ; or (c) un- 
 derstood from the connection. 
 
 llem. 69. If clauses with quum are used, the claum contains the action 
 
 whose merits and character are designated by the predicate of the iirln- 
 
 cipal sentence. The predicates of such sentences are placed either both 
 
 in the perfect or both in the imperfect indicative, as : 
 
 Te :?orOns filiu« iwtdvH gnum tutOrem liiieris non institvit; Your own nephew branded 
 you when lie did not ap]xAnt you the j^uardian of his children {by not appointing ; he 
 meant the omission as a gtij,'ma ; it was virtually a stit^ma). Cic. Sest, 52. 111.— cA^im 
 Collailno Brutus inipcrium ahrorfdhat. pot erat wdUri facere idinjuste; Brutus, We» 
 he reinnvd Collatinus from power {in that he removed him), tnight seem to have done 
 It (to liave acted) unjustly [the act of abroiratiou is characterized as a possible injustice]. 
 Cic. Oft". 3. 10.— ^?/j/mplehs tribuniciam i)otestjltem;)ft'>c^6rt/'. verboillam posccre videba- 
 tur. va \*^r^ imWvwwu jwsclbat ; When the people (/fwaz/derf the (estal)lishmtnt of the) 
 tribunate, it seemed, by the words used, to demand thispower, but virtually it demanded 
 the judiciary. Cic. Verr. 1, 15.— See Ex. l-S. 
 
 fnP^^'^' ^^'^""'^^^ of this kind have only the grammatical fai-m of temporal clause?, 
 rhey denote the in.nkk identity of two acts, and by the form of a temporal clause the 
 actions are represented as if the one had happened at the same time as the other. Both 
 predicates, in fact, denote only one action, which is twice mentioned, first by the clause 
 by which it is introduced according to its outward appearance, and by the principal sen- 
 tence which states its real or virtual meaninij. This inner identity of the two acts is 
 also express<'d by the identity of the two moods and tenses. That either the perfect or 
 thonnpcrfect m.iy be used, follows from the general principle applied to all predicates 
 of inner action (§ .->H2, Obs. 2). This form of a temporal clause with q>mm occurs also 
 when both predicates denote internal actions (Ex. 8). 
 
 Obs. 2. For the use of the subjunctive in clauses of this kind, see p. ().>4, 2. foil. In 
 the lollowini: pas.sa<,'e, the subjunctive diceret falls under the rule p. («4, Ubs. l: Decla- 
 rant hoc hujiis tribflni contiones, qnibns quotidie meam potentiam criminabdtur^ quum 
 diceret scuatum quod ego vellem decernere. Cic. Mil. 4, 12. 
 
 Oks. 3. In place of such Quum-clauses, sometimes clauses with dum and quod 
 are used, dum taking a present, imperfect, or perfect ^see p. 673, Obs. 5, n : JJuin 
 nostram gloriam tuil virtQte augCri exj^to.feci non sapienter; When I insisted (bv insist- 
 ini:) upon our glory being promoted by your labor, I did not act wisely. Cic. Oii. Fr. .3, 
 1, 3 (Ex. 9).- Quid tandem novi mtiXv(i\y<'p. feclriint, quod in causa ad" sc pertinente in 
 publi«-iim i)roce^serunt ? What new tliin^did the w<mien do in that thexj slwwed themselves 
 in public in a matter concerning their interests ? Liv. 34. 5. 
 
 Obs. 4. Frequentlj'. in place of a clause with quum. the fonn of an adverbial object is 
 tised, in which case the predicate is almost always placed in the imperfect : IRs verfns 
 etsi non nmninabafur Cicero, tamen solus petetxtfi/r a. e. Clodius, q}ium his verbiii vtebd- 
 tur, Cic<ronem non nomindbat, sed solum j)etebat) : IJy these uwds of Clodius, Cicero 
 alone, although not mentioned by name, ivas aimed at. \ ell. 2, 45 (Ex. 4. 10-13). 
 
 1. Omnia tu Dejotaro /n6'/j.s7i' ^f/w/^^ et ipsi et filio nomen regium concessisti. Cic. 
 I^5'Jot._J'^. 30.- '2. Non, quum si:/na rccej)tui3 dedi. frangere audaciam* vestram volui^. 
 Liv. 2,0^38.— .3. Oravissimum" judicium de me;! tide et de constantia ixx^fecisti'' quum 
 post, mortem C:esaris toium te ad amicitiam meam contulisti^. Cic. Fam. 11, 29. — 
 4. Non plus Africanus iu excidendd^ Numantia reipnblicje profuit quam P. Nasica quum, 
 Ti. Oracchum interemit^^. lb. Off. 1, 22, 7li.— 5. Non Herculi Dejanlia nocSre volnit 
 quum ei tunicam sanguine Centauri tinctam" dedit. lb. N. D. 1, 28, 70.— 6. DeMpitbain^'^ 
 quum^^ illas littcras mittlbam tibi. Plant. Epid. 1, 2, 35.— 7. 3Ie quum quaestOrem 
 
 1 You did for Dejotarus. — 2 ^y conceding, in conceding, when you conceded.— » the 
 fiffiial for retreat. — * weaken yourcouraLre, confidence. — ^ I meant.— « the most unequi- 
 vocal.— T judicium facere, to pass judgment (we would rather say ' to bear testimony' ). 
 — ^ se totnm ad amicitiam couferre, to devote on<!'s self whollv to one's friendship. — 
 • in (by) destroying, § 540, No. 3.— i» to kill.- *» dipped in.— »3 i was insane.— i" in 
 that. 
 
340 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 ^r.^r-\\ deferWnt Cic. Pis. 1, 2.-8. Errdbas. 
 nonnluR /"ari^fta/, homlni ille honorem non jreneTi ^/^^^^^^ t^anpriiine Inerc'* 
 
 irh'tn^lre! I»>. Verr. '^5 ^«.-^V 18 1 - ^i?^^^^^^^ Kfi «'"; nm Cim: 
 
 i?,>r?/>«m« dolOros meos. l'>- Att. U, '». J- *;'•,, ., o, _ n. Cum CelubCris, cum C im- 
 
 b " nlli m t/i cum i>dmV'i><^genlH,tur^;c^ri^^^^ online. ././/to//^^/-<Vxj/'. 
 
 appellando. Liv. 34, 7. ^^^ referred to is 
 
 7?€m. 70. To the instances \" ^ .^^^^.^^^^^^^ 
 UNDERSTOOD, belonff 1) the "f^^^,.^ . '^,;;^^^;\ ^ \)^^,ceeclinirs, and speeches 
 and utterances i" ^*:»'-^^^'^- ! ^f ^ in referring to or. 
 
 (Obs.1, 2); 2) the ^'^V^^'' r^ons Ob< 3) • S^lie peculiar meanings often 
 q->t-S ^1^« ^Tr mellk ^ach^i^lulll/hnperlect (Obs. 4). 
 given to a verb by n\ertl> piaciu^, „p„..„.x. features of Puch dis- 
 
 o«a 1 Tuinerfect. of debates are generally u..m1 f U.e «^^^^^^^J^,^ J.^quently imper- 
 cu^o,>l "^ e pmc^di..j.. in f "^^ft-U^idu^irnM; a£' ^T ^v o^r win. reference to 
 fects o hi« kind refer to .pecial ami n ^^l^^^^^^ the mot mns and act« 
 
 all kinds of d.HCU^.'ion^ conference. :nd^P^^ dUn^.'ion or debate as tie 
 
 tl tie debater, or ^f^i;^^}^J^^J!:^^^r.co^^'^^ou acrount o «he nv;! - 
 Bivue of time assunud for them, ni in„ im • o.^inion-* and views of the s-nbjed». ror 
 
 i, -3. /Vr^fmiajn(licibusutilUidjetat mu^^ ^^^^^„^ ,.,j . Accvsa/Hif^^ 
 
 nb pe culpam in miliK's tmmjemat L % • 2 k 3 '^•^« j ,-^ con}\cubantur ;aiie,u/Mi- 
 
 iindacia projtnlMtur-'. Cic. Clu. 10, ou. ^ y 
 
 '<"'• SI-' „„„,= 1 fi Fa re» acta est qimni rompi-jus vix pcro- 
 
 an one,- appointing Pompey the ruler of the ^^ ''^^^j /^Vr ;y,,,_,,,abrxtur ut cum min.Tcis, 
 wo S- ' was conferred upon. - i- f ' ^' ! " 'X^ac e • was That of a war of ex.crmi- 
 
 _ ,e „ot even— >' P'-*'^"^"^';,'^^^;;" ^ed he laVv-pc.ints of the ca^e.- ^"^ wa« ihe jpud C 
 Avas carried to the courts -''^ • f ..tr.J i, If to the do^-in- (secret waylayinff).- '\^y* 
 accuser.- '^^ «larts.- ^* l»'e ^'''\''l'f^^™'^ 1^ Ciodius,.- -^» wh|.m they 
 
 Bta.ed as a fact.- ■=« had ^'«^f , ^*^ fj^^vin^ -^o'^moV^ nelanous.- 3i pes.il.nce - 
 wished to tro.- 2» the consul told ^'h'- K man . an imperfect of h;.bit 
 
 «^ This imperfect is generally ^.^^'^^'^''^i.^^^^^^^^^ mid hence could 
 
 ( = solGb.it^Ucere>. But '^ '•^'^^'■•^!l\f, *'/' -a" a ' S^^^ ^^ Xugei-e aninio, ima-ine. 
 
 uot denote habit, unless ptjrhapsArchjtaaw at a ittimci 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 341 
 
 Inptntc maximil; ncraini censehai^ fore dubium quin nihil agitSrc' mente posset. 
 Cic. Sen. 12. See Liv. 3, 51 ; lb. 30, 32. 
 
 [CoNFKRKNCKP.]— 9. Hirtius enit apud me. Primunis quod aitinct, nihil mihicorw^^fe- 
 hat ; deinde arbitrnm mcstatntbut* iion niodo hujus rei, sed totlus consuiaius sui. 
 Cic. Att. 15, 1, 2. — 10. Curio utrumque improbans* consilium, quantum alteri senten- 
 tiie deespet aniini, tantum alteri snperesse clicebat^. Caes, B. C. 2, 31. — 11. LegSti 
 mairno|)cre ne longius progredergtur Cxnar oraha/if. Quum id non impetrassent, j5€- 
 tlhaiit ut eosqni ai;men aniecesbissenf pugntl prohiberet : ca conditiOnequae a Citsare 
 fcrrCtur** se nsflros*' c»iten.dthant . lb. B. (». 4. 11. (Compare the long report of a philo- 
 sophical discussion in Cic. Or. 1, 18, 19, 20 ; and lb. Att. 15, 11, 1, 2 ; Brut. 22, 88 ; Fin. 
 
 2. n, 55.) 
 
 ()b8. 2. Frequently imperfect?» are need with reference to debates which do not denote 
 the action implied by the verb, but iht' proponnr/ of such an action, as : Claudii senten- 
 tial consules cn^ndbat in tribflnos (instead of Claudius censZbat consides armandos 
 esse), he moved the consuls should arm against the tribunes. Liv. 4, 6. — Hujus dediiiO- 
 nis ipse qui dedebdbur (\n hoc concilio) suasor et auctor fuit, the mover of this sur- 
 render was the very person whose surrender wa8 under discussion {qui dedebdtu?; i. e. 
 de ciijus dediddiie agebdtur)^^. Cic. Off. 3, 30. 
 
 1. SenStu vocjito. P. Cornelius omnls duces exercitusqne ex totS TtaliSad nrbls 
 pnesidium rf roed^a/" / Fabius MaximusabscSdi'^ a Capua flagitiOsum ducSbaf. Liv. 
 2(;. 8. — 2. l)e snpplicii»''' Campfmi senSius haudquilquam inter Fulvium Claudiumque 
 conveniCbati-\ Claudius Roniam adsenaiumaibiirium'^ejusreiro'idei^rt/'^^. Ih. 2(5. 1."). — 
 
 3. Si'tultum ut revocavCrunt sufietes"*, una seutentia de pace le<;at08 ad ScipiOnem de- 
 cernebat^^ / altera llduuibalem ad tueudam patriam revocdbat. lb. 30, 7. 
 
 Obs. 3. Verbs of saytxo are frequently placed in the imperfect. 1) If they denote 
 what was said by the speaker or others at a previous time or occasion ; beiug olten used 
 in letters witii reference to remarks in previous letters (Ex. 9, 10). See Ex. 1-8. 15. l(i. 
 2) If they refer to remarks and sayings of celebrated persons, expressing their opinions 
 on certain subjects (Ex. 11-15). Both these imijerlecis refer to the t/iouf/ht conveyed by 
 the language, the occasion at which the remark was made being conceived as the time 
 given ft)r the predicate. Imperfects of this kind are generally explained as imperfects 
 of repeated action, or of habit. Btit in many passages this interpretation fails, and in 
 most of the passaL'es where such imperfects occur it is evident that the author could 
 not know whether the remark was often repeated or not. and, certainly, did not 7nean. to 
 convey the idea of frequent repetition. But instead of those imperf<'Cts more usually 
 nfr/V<"''A' are used, a latitude beinir common to all predicates of inner action. Thus in 
 Ex. 17 dixit and diclbiit occur in the same sentence. 
 
 1, MedPa modo et Atreus coviniemorabantnr^^ a nobis. Cic. N. I). 3, 29.— 2. Ejus- 
 modi artiticiiim-i de ipso jure civlli hesterno^^ die Crassus compOni^^ p^jj^e dicZbat. 
 lb. Or. 2, 19, 8^3.— 3. Tum ilia qna> modo (Jrai^iiUii comm^morabat-* egi. lb. 2, 84, ;^1.— 
 
 4. At medici quoque— ita eniin difefxi-^^^—)fpei>c falltmtur. lb. N. D. 3, 6. 15. — 5. Subsi- 
 «iiiim oratnri ex illis disputationibus-* petendum^T egge paullo ante dicebas. lb. Or. 1, 
 .')3, 2.'J0. — f). Ouas igitur 'i'yndaridas''''^ ai)))ellabas2», eas te obviam Vatinio venisse ex- 
 istiinas? lb. N. D. 3, 5, 11. — 7. Potest igittir. quod modo 7/<?.7<7^a^, veritfltem casus imi- 
 t:lri. II), Div. 2,21,49.— ^. Is, se pnesente, de se ter sortibus consulttim^o rfi^e/^a/". 
 Cses. B. G. 1. 5^3. (Compare for similar expressions : Cic. Or. 2, 42 ; Part. Or. 22, 111 ; 
 N. D. .3, 7, 18 ; 3, 9, 23: 3, 12, 29; 3. 18. 47; 3.20, 52; Sen. Qu. N. 5. 18, and often.)— 
 9. Binas a te accepi litteras, quarum alteris mihi gratulabCire , alteris dicebas te velle 
 
 ' i. e., dicTbat se censtre. — ' perform no mental act. — ^ as to the first point; 
 with reference to the lirst point.— * he appointed me umpire.- ^ disapproving.— 
 « said that the one proposition showed so much courage in excess, as, etc. — ' who 
 had i)receded the army.— "^ that condition which Ca?sar proposed.— » comply with.— 
 '" This imperfect cannot, with our grammarians, be taken for an equivalent of the peri- 
 j)hrastic future, because the surrender, at the time spf)ken of, was neither certain, nor 
 immediately imminent, both of which would be required to place it under the rule R. 
 5:3, Obs. 2.— '» i. e,. revocandoscensebat.— ^^ retreat.— '3 held.— ^* punishment.— ^^Cor>ve- 
 ni/ infer afiquns (impersonal) = aliqui convtviunt, they agree about something. — >« de- 
 cision.— >^ was of opinion that, .should be left.— '« the highest mairi-trates at Car- 
 thage.— '* i. e., decerntndum cevHbat.— 2" were mentioned (in a previous passa<rc).— 
 *■" trick. — 22 yesterdav.— 23 accomplish.— 24 in a previous passage.— 26 \r, a previous 
 passage of the book.— 2« discussions.- *» must look for aid.— 26" the Tyndarides, i. e.. 
 Castor and Pollux.— "^ in a previous passage.— s«tbat it had been consulted by lota, 
 that they had cast lots as to his fate. 
 
342 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 cxercitum a ere n..n ix'f;'- J >^ \\ft- ^" «- „ „\' , Ac S Khodo %x.nerat VIII. Id. 
 on lion toutlrent quid ppsct satis II). ur. -r^, Li. *;•;,,,,'".{' ,, o-, '^ — 1(5 Teren- 
 
 turn» ex quo mira quieduni se audist'e dutbat. lb. Or. z,6,i6. 
 
 Or^ 4 Tn manv particular ii.^tances predicates iu the imperfect imply special mental 
 
 mis-takeu by the iutcrprclers?. 
 
 h. Imperfects of Kule and Habit. 
 § 585. Predicates denoting habitual actions, i. c, actions regularly done, 
 continued, or repeated, according to a certain rule, are generally 
 placed in the impeufect. 
 
 Obs 1 Habitual aclionf. (in consonance with the -oneral rnh's). arc always placed in 
 the imm^f"-c if a parliculurtime is ahsi-iied to tht-m, and il they are reproented aw 
 goin'o'^Vat Uiat tintS^Thus xvh.-u tlu- time .ivcn is -in>o^^oonu^^nn..-^^ut^o^ 
 fuif) onuAno turn viox ul faciles essent in suum cuKiue trihueiulo J» ;^«^ f;^ " |^"|J^ 
 cuJoni that peoplf were obli-iuLT as to 1, avin- every one his cm n. Cic. Brut. 21, bo (Ex. 
 4 5 r. ) It 71 But the imperlect is uot used for habitual actions : 
 
 ' D* If no time can be attached to the habit, as : Semper oratOrum ^:]'''^]]''.?^}^'^^^^^ 
 f//i/ and iter urn nrudentia : Tlie taste of the audu-nee /<«.%■ a/jw.V'»' ^^-^w the <,'Uide loi tliu 
 ehn ce Th^^^^ ^ *t- By the Nvritirs of the silver aire however, 
 
 h i 1 1 icti , ,s to'wht^ ;.. time can' be ass^;ned. are frequently placed "' ' 'C nnpe,-- 
 tect Multa .pian, snpcrvacna essent. non intel ex nms nis, ^uum deesse ca',,5run 11^ 
 bamur cnim Hie n<m quia debebilmus sed quia habebilnius. hen. Ep. 12.^.- MaL-ni Mrt 
 qiXm J 1 enstrnascertisdiebus leriis daUud : (piidam nullum non ^l";'» •'"\'7»V^'? 
 e e lias Ju-i(/?6«»/. Sen. Trai.q. l.",. Cicero, in such passages, would pn.bably ha e ex- 
 pressed [he predicates by the perfect of soTtre, or by oratio mdirectu {6Cimus dtduse- 
 diridifse.ov dare i^oliti sunt). 
 
 2^ In literary historv, where the literary customs and habitual qualities, etc. of the 
 diffemi writeVs criticiUnUare the subjects of alnu.st the ->''»•- J'^/^r^nlll^^^/Scrs 
 chan.H; of tenses is dictated by the requirements ol lormal euphony. I hus in C<.eM ^ 
 B utus PERFKCTs and iMPKRFECTS of habit are promiscuously emphyed, as : renchB 
 su I V itJlte maxime hilarat(e AthCna^ ^vnt ; hujus uberiatem et eopiam admirAtir ejusdem 
 till dieend itern.remque tivnr^runt. Cic! Brut. 11.44. But : Phaieivus ,hlectuhat UMi^^x^ 
 A n iensTs quam injfammdbat. lb. y, 37.- Thus: y,r,af>,s ea in omn. fere frenerc 
 causlrum H) 4:} 159; but: At ego hoc tempore omni in omnium doctiinflrum meihta- 
 y\ouc rer^bar. lb. «»1.308.- M. Pi^o /m/.7/i^ qno.ldan. in natflra genus acuminis 11). »,., 
 2:3») ; but : C. CarbOnis naiuralem quaudain auctoniiltem habtbcU oratio. lb. bi, ii\. 
 
 .S)'lf habit<ar<' first mentioned in L'eneral term.s. and f^ubsequeiitly specified by the 
 deUiils of these habits, it is cu>tomary to use the perfe ct for the predicate by which 
 
 ' A frequent formula, ' That w'.at I had undertaken might fnccecd '•- JJ" a ^?LnvI* 
 letter.- a «jxcept those things (supply (/itv/^^^), except in re-ard to those things.- * ^tou?. 
 house.- 6 probJibly referring to a passa-e in Cato's writings.- • rHers o tt^f ""^1^,^,^^ l{ 
 p^n/nifl;/7.- 'with the revenues of which'.- » to blunder.- s thai the fever had left 
 you.— • that he had met Scievola. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 343 
 
 the habit is designated in genera] terms, hut the imperfect for the predicates specifying 
 tiie haiiit : as: Aiuiltis oratorii)Us Gnecis incre<lil)ili quodam nostri homines dicendl 
 %X\uVwflagrar?riint. J^d^r/Zvan'os mngniiildo ac varietas causarum; erant huic studio 
 maxima ej-jwnta praMiiia, etc. Cic. Or. 1, 4, 14. 15. — Deinde auguriis et reliqui reges nsi 
 (sunt I, et exactis regibus nihil publice sineauspiciis gerebatur. lb. Div. 1. i, ;i — Vallo et 
 Macedones et Gncci vni stmt, sed usuin . . . non aptartruntj nam majores arbores coide- 
 Imnt quam . . . et quia eniintfMi/if, etc. Liv. ;i'i, 5. — Tarquiuius cum quibus voluit in- 
 jussu populi loedera fecit diremi/f/fie ; LaiinOrum sibi maxime gratiam concilidbat, . . . et 
 alhnitates Jr/z/r/^/w/. Liv. 1, 4il. — Ilidmlt Caiillna |)eimulta signa adumbrata virtntum. 
 Utebatvr hoininibus iinprwbis inultis, et quidem optiinis se viiis deditumes8e^>■^m^^/a^<, 
 etc. Cic. Cicl. 5, 12. 
 
 4) If the autlior means to designate more tlie action itself than the habit which is im- 
 plied by it, the perfect may be used, as : Apud Grtecos e!oqueuti88imi homines ad scri- 
 beiidain histoiiam se upidicuierunt (where the weight is placed on 'ad sciibeudam his- 
 toriam ' ). Cic. Or, 2. 13, 55,— JJivus Augustus inter initia Sphinge^y/riari^ (sealed); duaa 
 in inatris annulis inveiierat : altera per bella civilia ainici M^nawr^ epistolas et edicta. 
 I'ostea Alexandri Magni imagine ngndvit. Plin. II. N. 37, 4. — Aristx)teles in hac qnaistiCne 
 adolescentls exercuit. Cic. Or. 14, 4H. — yEjfyptii et Bab3ionii, in campOruin patentium 
 jeqiionbns habitantes, omneui curam iu siderum cognitiOue ix)8uetiint. Cic. Div. 1,42, 
 y3. iSee Ex. 10 to K. 71. 
 
 Ob». 2. Predicates expressing habitual actions, always imply two different actions, one 
 of which is the action re.\li.y performed, and the other the idea of habit or rule, 
 which is always an inner state prompting or producing the action. From this double 
 nature of jin-dicates expressing habitual action.alj tlie j^ecuiiarities in their treatment 
 may be exi)Iaineil; namely 1) that imperfects of liabit do not require the addition of a 
 particular time, since the inner element always contains that indefinite space of time 
 dui-ing which the external acts are represented to have happened; 2) thut the perfect 
 may always be used if tlie internal element is disregarded. — The language either ex- 
 presses both these elements separately., or mentions only the action a* such^ leaving it to 
 the reader to supply the idea of habit. (See Jieni. 71.) 
 
 Hem. 71. If the idea of habit is designated by special expressions, 
 
 the action itself is variously added in the form of an object-tnfinitive, 
 
 of an INFINITIVE CLAUSE, or of a TiiAT-CLAL'SE with ut (witli later wiiteis 
 
 also quod). The verb expressing the idea of habit wv,\y be either in the 
 
 PERFECT or IMPERFECT, but it iiuM bc in the imperfect if so required by 
 
 the gciH-ral rules, i. e. if a particular time of the habit is either expressed 
 
 or necessarily understood. 
 
 Obs. 1. The expressions used to desisnate the idea of habit, are : Solere ('oltbatn or 
 solitus sutii) ; morem or morix e-Sf>e {mostrat or ft/it) ; con.<fuescere in the jiluperfect {consneve- 
 rain), whicli takes tlie place both of the perfect and imperfect (the peifect consvevi 
 meaning ' I <///* .sccustomed ' ) ; i/i.'ififaft//n tertere, to observe a habit. Here belong the 
 adverbial expressions rulgo {in ri/lgu.<)&u(\. «^m7>^'r (customarily, generally, always). Some 
 verbs combine tiie idea of habit aiid the action itself in all their forms, as uti, se gerere 
 (to conduct one's self), and the intensive verbs in itore and sare, as obseititdre, to observe 
 habitually or usually ; factitdre. to do habitually, etc. All these expressions, when they 
 are verlis, admit both tenses, either the perfect or imperfect, unless (in accordance with 
 the general rules) the addition of a part'iculer time at which the habit as such was going 
 on requires the imperfect (Ex. 3-6). But even in this last instance the perfect (though 
 rarely) is sometimes used. (Ex. 8.) 
 
 Obs. 2r Habitual action is ahvays designated by the addition of one of the expressions 
 mentioned Obs. 1 if otherwise the connection would not clearly represent the action as 
 an habitual or repeated one, as in the beginning of treatises, or new paragraphs uncon- 
 nected witli the previous sentences (see the beginning of Cic. de Am.) Ex. 1.2. But 
 frequently these expressions are chosen, even if no such necessity requires them. 
 
 A. Solere 1. Neque illud venim est quod Socrates ^/ic^7'« ^o/fin/S omnis in eo quod 
 scirent, satis esse eloqiientls. Cic. Or. 1, 14, (13.-2. Curioni iia plausum est ut salvS 
 republica Pompejo ^>/awt/i solebat'K lb. Att. 2, 19, 3,- 3. In collfga meo susiinendo si 
 
 » Biclhat, instead of dicere sollbai . would not clearly express either habit or repeated 
 action. Rem. 70, Obs. .3, No. 2.— '^ PtaudeMtur mitrht be tal^en for a single continued 
 action at the time spoken of ; plaudi solitum est would not refer to the time expressly 
 spoken of, although (rarely) it is thus sometimes used. 
 
344 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 mcam in illnm induli^entiam landare soleMtts^, par pro})e laup P. Sestii ep?e debet, 
 lb Scst 3, 8.— 4. Wo» turn refutare ttolefxlinK^'^ quoci p:U<'r miiltu nobis de ejus Ptudio 
 Bsept' narrilvit II). Or. 2, 1, 2.— 5. Tian pnetor in liac omolna niajarem partonj diCi cum 
 tunicil pull{l3 f<^dere >^olchat et pallio*. \h. Verr. 2,4, 24.- 6. Erat hoc factiUltiim Bcmpcr 
 etiani in Latinoruni stipendio^ turn qinim illurum auxiliis uti solehamuif. lb. 2, .), 24.— 
 7. llos libros Thucydidct» turn ?cnpsi<se dicilur quuni, id qnod optimo culque AtliCnirt 
 (iccidere soUhrm «.</«, in exilium pulsus essot. lb. Or. 2, 13. r)0.— H. C<)n?uetQdo quo 
 quondam solltm sum'' u(i qunm mihi in isto studio versilri licebat. lb. Or 1, 30, 1 3.:».-- 
 «» Hoc nt! TliermodOrus quidem fitciebat, is qui PlatOui^ libros solitufi e.4 (tivulgure^. 
 11) Att 13 21, 4 — 10. Vcf'ier etiam 1). Briilus. ut ex h. Accio mm atKUn solifus. dicere 
 non mculte sollbnt. Cic. IJrut. 28, 107. B. Mouem ksse, etc.— 11. Mos enW* taliscis 
 eOdom nia«Mstro libcrOrumet comite uti. Liv. 5, 2<).— 12. Armilti, ita mos j^anU» erat, 
 in concilium venCrunt. lb. 21, 20.— 13. Nam, ut mos fuit^^ Bithynije refjibup, IcctTca 
 octophoro'i ferebfltur. Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 11.- 14. .Tuba duo millia equitum, quos sme 
 custodiiE causa' '■* circum f^t^. habere con»u^rat, Suburric summlsit'', Caes. B. C. 2, 4U.— 
 15 Tenuity i'rvc9, hocimtitatutn in'* turibulis'* omnibus quiecunque in biciliS fuC- 
 runt Cic Verr 2 4 21.— IG. Fuerat ille annus quum intentusarcus'* est in me nnum, 
 \\tv^dgoWn^ri rerum loquebantur. lb. Sest. 7, 15.— 17. Clipeis'^antea KomJlni vst sunt, 
 dein Bcuta'« pro ciipcis fecCre. Liv. 8, 8.— 18. Neque enim ita ^e;7^s>t^ ^ «"cs >n his 
 rebus tamquam ratiOnem'» aliquando^o esset reddittirus. Cic. \ err. 2, 4, 22.— 19. 1 lie 
 8ic se qaibiit Atticus ut commanis infimis, par jnincipibus videretur. Nep. Att. >.— 
 20 Neque solum deOrum voces PythairorCi obserritartrutd, sed etiam hominum qn:e 
 vocant omina'^'. lb. Div. 1, 44, 102.— 21. Etiam Pompiidius mulUis i)rivata8 causas 
 actitdrii'-^. lb. Brut. 70. 24«.- 22. M. Bibulus scripfitdrit'''^ accurate, lb. '-.7, 2«)7.— 
 2;i. Timarchidcs Verris omnia decrCta, impt■ria'-^ lilteras-^- periti^sune et callidissime 
 venditabat'^^. lb. Verr. 2, 2, 54. 
 
 Rem. 72. The idea of habit, if no doubt, ran arise as to the meanin.!]: of 
 the imi)erfc'Ct, may always be e.\i)i-essed by the inei-e imperfect of tlic 
 verb. Such iuipeitects conij^rise all actions which are represented as 
 being done in consequence of a rule, by routine, or by any principle dic- 
 tating or producing the same action under similir circumstances. These 
 impeT-fects are ijenerally rendered by tlie mere preterit ; but sometimes 
 in the same way as \{ nolere were expressly used {used to, was accus- 
 tom-ed to.) Imperfects of rule and habit denote : 
 
 A. Usages in the life, practice, and sentiments of nations. 
 
 1 Quid "Miostri veteres versus iibi sunt cpios ' olim Fauni vatesque caiiehant''' ' f Cic. 
 Brut IS 71 — 2. Hoslis'-« apud niajuifs is dirtOdt/tr quern nunc p«^'rr;.'ilnum29 dici- 
 niu«« lb Oti 1 123".— 3. Rudis adhuc antiquitas cr*^^/?/^^/ et attiuhi imbrls cantibiis et 
 n'pclli 'Seii'N. Qu. 4, 7.— 4. Co/e/x/zi/»/;- ab Ilernicis relii;ir)iie>3' pie mai,'isquam mag- 
 nilice. Liv. 3, 57.— 5. Phalarica=»'^ ^m/' Sn^nntlnis hastlli al)ieirno unde^s ft-rrum^'» «-x- 
 stabat^*. Id stuppa^^ circumfirjd/Mnt^'', liiiebantqut^'* pice»», lb. 21, 8.— 6. In (Jnecia 
 disabnnt omnes nuisicam. Cic. Tusc. 1, 2. 
 
 B. Habits of the Public. _^ ^. 
 7. llla via qua (Ap|)iu8 Clodius) PpectStum*" ibat, Appia jam via vorafxttur. Cic, 
 
 Sest. 5», 126.— ». Hiec(Dianje) statuaab omnibus advenisrwt'i»(7/«/«'. H). Verr. 2, 4, 3t. 
 
 > Lnndnbdlis mi"ht be taken for a single (iiiner^ action at the time when the ' sustinlre' 
 happened ; soliti estis would not refer to such a time.— " vfidabdmus mlLrht be taken for 
 a refutation made on a sintrle oeca-ion.— ^ jrrav tunic, a jrarment worn only by the lower 
 classes, and not fit for a pnetor.— * Greek cloak, or <rt)\vii (opposed to the togji).— " ser- 
 vice — « this was the case at all times ; hence solebaf, which would refer to the time 
 ^^pokenof could not be used.— ^ solPfnim sliould here be expected.— ^ published (with- 
 out the author's permission).- » at the time ^poken of.— '» //o/ at the time spoken of.— 
 1» a (sedan) chair with eiuht bearer<,— »- as :i body-i^uaid.— '^ sent to help.— '* as to.— 
 15 censers — '« the bow was bent.- '^ shield.— '" buckler.— '» to render an account.— 
 2» eviT— 21 The so-called human forebodings (presape^).- 22 mtended to. acted in.— 
 23 wrote an accurate style (accnrdte saibVtat, would nder to the sul)ject8 of the composi- 
 tion.)— '•'« rules.— ■■'•' i)apers(containiii<r official decrees. L'ranls. etc.).— 2« traded in : sold 
 them to the parties.— '^^ Quotation from Ennius. — -' The term ' ho^ti^' was applied to those 
 whom.- 2a foreiu'ner, stranger.— 3° by chants.— 3' relii,'ious ceremonies were cele- 
 brated.— 32 The Sa^untians used a Pha"laric (a kind of l)urnin<,' missile) with a shaft of 
 >ine-wood.— 33 „t the top of which.— »4 the iron point.— 3» to stand out.— 3«- tow.— 
 ' to wrap in.— »» to smear, to paint.— 3» pitch.— ■•» went to the spectacle.— «i to visit. 
 
 F, 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 345 
 
 — n. Incolie, ut anfea demonstrdbant quid ubTque esset, ita nunc quid ubiqne abia- 
 tum' sit ostendunt. lb. 2, 4, 59. 
 
 C. Personal habits and qualities, 
 
 10. Cum pneris Socrates hulere non enibescebat^, et Cato vino /a.ra^^x?)'' animum cu- 
 ris pui)licis faiifratiim. Sen. Traiiq. 15. — 11. llaunihal })rinceps in proelium ^at. ulti- 
 mus conserto pra-lio* txcedibal^. Liv. 21, 4.— 12. Balbus 'Pliorius ita vivebat ut nulla 
 l)osset inveiiiri voUu)tas qua non abundaret. Cic. Fin. 2. 20.-13. Antiochus sella 
 eburnea* jus dicehaf . disc f}>t aba t que controvi-rsias ininimarum rerum. Liv. 41, 20. — 
 14. Atticus mendaeium neque dicebat, neque pati poterat. I^ep. Att. 15. — 15. Atticus 
 sic Griece loquebatur ut Athenis natus viderCtur. lb. 4. 
 
 D. Occupations and professional activity. 
 
 Ki. Tantas clientGlas^ Appius reqlbat ciecus» et senex. Cic. Sen. 11.37. — 17. Philoc- 
 tCtes^^mpavoAa^'o vitam aucupio'i pennarumque contextu'2 corpori tegumenta"/a- 
 ciibal. lb. Fin 5, 11,— 18. Hie qmestu'* se sustinebat^^. Sen. Mort. CiPS. 3.— 19, Diouy- 
 >*iu8 tyrannus, Syracflsis expulsus, Coriuthi pucros doctbat. Cic. Tusc. 3, 12. 
 
 E. Literary activity and merits. 
 
 20. Antoniu?7Y;;^n?6a< quid dici opus esset. memoriaqne ea comprehendebat ; excel- 
 llbat autem actione'*. At Crassi mairis etiitebat^'' oraiio. Cic. Brut. 59, 2i5.— 21. P. 
 Scipio omnia tale'^ facetiisque'^ superdbai'^^. lb. 34, 128. 
 
 7^. Actions regularly performed by order, or by natural necessity, 
 
 22. Calibns^i eum interdiii solQtum^a custodes seguebantu?-"^^, noctu clausum^* as- 
 servdbani^^. Liv. 24,4."». — 23. Poeta Antipater Sidonius omnibus anuis uno tantuin- 
 in»)do die, quo genitus2« erat, febri implicabdtur'^^ . Val. Max. 1, 8, IG. 
 
 Okneral Remark about the u^e of the Imperfect in contrastinir it with Perfects. By 
 Fueh an opposition l)Oih t lie imperfects and p<r!ecr8 are placed in a peculiar litrht, which 
 can not often be imitated in En;;li.*h. The following passages may ber\e as examples: 
 
 1. Non defuit (miliiibus) quid responderetur ; deeral qui daret responsum (deerat em- 
 phasizes 'Jw.s/ then \ while defuit is not confined to tlie moment spoken of). Liv. 3, 50. 
 
 — 2. Foret/atn reij)ublicje cui semper fari. Cic. Fam. 12, 1 (favet/ant, then and there; 
 fafi, at all times).— 3. Quamquam te boniim timor faciibat (at that particular time), im- 
 probumyVd^audacia (at all times except the particular time mentioned). Cic. Phil. 2.36, 
 99.-4. l)eincei)s fiiit annus quoeijo consuhlfuin pefli'i ; j)etebat Catillnamecum. Cic, CseI. 
 4, 10 {petlri is com})lete within tlie year; bur also because the action was crowned with 
 success: 'I obtained the consulship'. Pettbat is incomplete at the time of Cicero's 
 candidature, but also because Catiline failed to carry the election). — 5. ^lius scHbi-bat 
 oratiOnes qiias alii dicerent. ut Q. Pomi)Cjo Uufo (as for instance for Pompejus Rufus), 
 quaniqitam is etiam ipse scnpnt eas qiiibus prose est usus. Cic. Brut. 5(5. 206. (The 
 iniperlect scribtf/fit represents the action as a professional activity, see R. 72. No. D. : but 
 scrip-it, ultliougli involviiiir repeated action is represented as an occasional action. — 
 6. .M. Scaurus non sa-pc dictbat. Latlne vero ini)rlmis elejjanter est lociltus. Cic, Brut. 
 35, 1:^5, (Dicebat expresses habit ; tst locitfus is in the perfect, because tlie imperfect lo- 
 gueMtur might be understood as limiting tiie action to the occasions when he ' dicNjat '), 
 
 — 7. lAcetxd melius quam /-m/^viMIortensius. Cic. Or. 38. iJicebat is an imperfect of 
 habit; ycripnt is not ri'))resented as a habit, hut as the judgment of Cicero on the quality 
 ol Hortensius"s writings. It is the main predicate, while dictbat has the force of a 
 concessive clause. Cicero meant to say : ' Ilortensius"s 2vriti/iqs are no good models 
 for imitiition'. But to soften the harshness of this criticism, lie added i\mi wJienerer 
 Hortensjus ,s7)ciA'e, Jie spoke well. P'nmi urbanity the excuse is placed before the cen- 
 sure, 'i his loree of n'ripi^it would be destroyed "by scribibat, or by placing (/icfia/ in the 
 l)erfect. — 8, Nec enim l)ej«)tar<> cornix canere potnit, recte eum faeere quod populi Ro- 
 mani libertatem defendere jtararet. Ipse hoc seniiibat. sicuti sennt. Cic, Div. 37, 78, 
 Stntiebat, if not followed by sicuti sensit, ou acc«<unt of its opposition to poiuit, would 
 
 1 Auferre. to steal.— 2 did not blush ; was not ashamed.— 3 to relax,— < after the 
 battle had once commenced. — ^ was the last to leave. — «ivory chair. — ^ held court 
 as well as discussed.— ^ bodies of clients.— » although blind.— '" literally 'delayed his 
 lite', i. e., kept himself alive.— n bird-catching.— '2 by weaving feathers together.— 
 "coverings for his body,— " by trade.— '^inadea living.— '« by hisdeliverv,- '^ Crassus 
 was more distinirui shed by the substance of his addresses.— '*> wit.— 1* pleasantry.— 
 2» was superior to all.— 21 in the city of Cales,— 22 without fetters,— 23 accompanied.— 
 2* under lock.— 25 guarded. — 26 on which he was born, i. ^., his birthday.- 2' was in- 
 volved in, seized with. 
 
^ 
 
 BiG 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 FUTURE TENSES. 
 
 347 
 
 have an hypothetical force (p. 730, 3) : 'he would have felt this even without the cawin» 
 of the crow '). The perltct sennit means here couiplctcness as reality and actuality (.uh 
 he really and actually lelt it). 
 f3^ For the Imperfect in letters see § 589. 
 
 IV. PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 § 5S6. The Plupeufect i^euerally correspouds to i\\G English pluper- 
 fect, except in the instances mentioned Obs. 3. 
 
 Obs. 1. The pluperfect it» used (a) to denote an action which was complete hrfore the 
 time spoken of: Iter (Ilannihalis in descensu de Alpibus) multo quam in ascensn fuerat 
 dilflciliiia fiiit, Liv, 21, 35 ; {h) to denote an action which had coi nine need before the time 
 ppoken of, hut was completed at the time spoken ol". Such pluperfects are frequently 
 co-ordinated whh /n/>fori''al irnfierfect.t : Prima luce etnostri umuon eranf /ran/^pfrrfati. et 
 hostium ucies cemelmtur (fx'fore (iaybreak. i. e., heftue the time spoken of, the act of >hip- 
 pin<; the troops wms not yet completed, but it had commenci'd ; af daybreak the act was 
 comnleteK Cies. B. G. 7, (Vi; (r) to denote an action, commenced before the time spoken 
 of. the eflects and consequences of which are still lasting at the time spoken of. Such 
 ]>luperfectshave the force of periplirastic imperfects (p. l-i7, U. 131), with which they are 
 fre(|uently co-ordinated : Iluncoinnem locum copiie Gallorum com])leveranteX maceriam 
 sex in ah'itudinem iH'(.\nm pradtt.i'franf. Castra opportOnis locis erant jxm/a (the phice 
 was still tilled with troops, and the wall still existed at the time spoken of. Erant f)0- 
 n'a is a periphnvstic imperfect). C:es. W. O. 7. VtW — Ita uno tt-mpore et loniras navis ses- 
 tus contplevetaf, et onerarias tempestas afllictilbat ; Thus the tide had at the same time 
 Jilltd the lonj; ships, when the storm was injurinjjr the freij^ht ships. C;bs. B. G. 4, 29 
 (ce>itu>i complecerat has the force of mi^fu coni/flitai erant). — Dum certilmen in unam 
 partem ho>.tium oculos averterat, scalis capitur murus ; While the combat had turned 
 the looks of the enemy in one direction, the w.ill was taken by sealinjj^ ladders. Liv. 32, 
 24 (dum averterat has the force of averterat, et dian avtvms teiitbaf, t>r rather duin— tenet). 
 
 Obs. 2. The ancient <:rammarians define the jduperfect as the tense denoting 'what 
 happened a very long lime a(jo\ and hence I'riscian stranu'ely states that in such passa- 
 ges as • Trojic qui primus ab oris vtnit (Virv'. -En. 1.1)', and ' cecinit qu;e prima /Enea- 
 das (lb. 8, 310) ', the perfects venil and cecinit have the force of jdnpertects. Sometimes, 
 indeed, pluperfects oeeur whicli seem to be used in accordance with this definition, as : 
 'Iccirco (jenueram (tiliiim) ut esset qui pro patrijl mortem non dubitilret occiimbere'. 
 Cic. Tusc. 1, 42. 102. But if the detinitioii of the ancient ^grammarians were correct, a 
 very great number of i)erfects would have the force of pluperfects, and u still greater 
 number of pluperfects must be considered as faulty. 
 
 On?!. 3. Sometimes the pluperfect denotes an actifui hai)peiiini; «< thetimeftjxtkenof. 
 By such pluperfects the author prepares the mind of the reader for a later past action 
 to be mentioned afterwards; as: Dum elephanti trajiciuntur, liannil)al Niimidas equi- 
 tes ad castra Jiomjina ;yavf-/rt/ (this pluperfect refers to a skirmish of the Numidiaiis 
 with the Romans, which is n'ported dincily afterwards). Liv. 21.29. — Nam quuminam- 
 hultlrem in xyi^io, et e-'isttn otidsus donii, M. ad me Brutus vmo-at (referrin;:: to a conversa- 
 tion between Cicero aiifl Brutus, narrated afterwards). Cic. Brut. 3, 10. See {). 320, Obs. 1. 
 — VVhile the pluperfect thus preirnautly foreshadows a later past action, it may even 
 denote an action happeniiij^ a//fr the time ppoken of. completely reversini; the lotrical 
 order of time: P. Cornelius consul tridiio fere j)Ostquam Hannibal a rijxJ lihodani ino- 
 vit. (luadrilto a'zmine ad castra hostium venerat. Liv. 21. 32. Here an Euirlish phiptrfect 
 should he used for the Latin perfect ;//r/?j/, and the Latin pluperfect ?ft«f^/Y// must be ren- 
 dered by an YA\^\\i\\pretenle. Tims in the followinj; sentence: Jam aliquantum spatii 
 ex et» loco ubi pugnatum est, aufuijerat. Liv. 1, 25. 8. 
 
 Obs. 4. In the followinj; instances the Enirlish plnjierfect is expressed by a Latin im- 
 perfect: (a) in the case mentioned Rem. 59; (/<) sometimes, to denote an action lastiiiif 
 without deftiicd limits at some \\\\wbefore the time; spoken of. as: ()ui ne nostrorum qui- 
 dem flnium nobis per nos tuendOrumjus antea dabant (inst. of dedcranf). nihil inierces- 
 pgrunt. Liv. 8. 4. — Latin PKirFECTs are used with the force of Entdish pluperfects: 
 («) after ]X)st(iuam, ntn. sini'dar, and sometimes after r/Kinn (see ]>. f».V.>, foil.) : {lA some- 
 times in cLAisKs, particularlv relaiive clauses : Co;^niiis eis rebus qu:e sunt gtsfit in ci- 
 teriOre Ilispaniil, helium parSbat. Cies, B. C. 2, 18.— In eadem causil fuCrunt Usipefes, 
 qui compluils annos Siievorum vim sustinu^nint (which had happened fjefore the time 
 spoken of), lb. B G. 4. 9. See the Ex. quoted n. 307, Obs. 3(d(miusquie reikis HierOnis/t/iO. 
 Sometimes such perfects occur in principal sentences: Dies baud iUi multi intercennS- 
 runt (Sov intercesserant) quum le^jfiti ex Leontlnis, prsesidium orantes, veneruut. Liv. 24, 20. 
 
 Obs. 5. The English preterit corresponds to a Latin pluperfect in many clauses de- 
 pendent on imperfects of contingent action. See R. (»5. 
 
 Obs. 6. Frequently pluperfects are followed by clauses with qwim having the force of 
 a relative adverb {quo tempore). If in this instance the action in the clause with quum 
 is represented to have ivnnediately followed the action expressed by the pluperfect, 
 certain adverbial expressions of time are attached to the pluperfect, ^s vix (scarcely), 
 conunodum (just), tantuin quod (just a moment) ; Vix prior tumultus conticuerat quum 
 Scipio vi majOrc urbem agiiredi jubet (.scarcely had the tumult subsided). Liv. 26, 45.— 
 Commodum ad te mii^erain Demeam quum Eros ad me venit (I had just sent Demea to 
 you). Cic. Att. i:j, 30, 2 (See lb. 13, 9, 1 ; 13, 19, 1).— Tantuin, quod ex Arpinati veneram, 
 quum mihi a te litterae redditte sunt (I had just arrived a moment ago from my villa in Ar- 
 plnum, when, etc.). Cic. Fam. 7, 23, 1. See p. (>52, 10. 
 
 Obs. 7. Sometimes the pluperfects of deponent verbs take the auxiliary /«^am in- 
 stead of eram, the same as the periphrastic pluperfects of the passive (p. 128. R. 136). 
 These forms are used (a) to denote actions happening before actions expressed by ordin- 
 ary pluperfects, as : Iluic Caisar, quod in omnibu!? bellis singular! ejus o\>er^ fuerat ums, 
 niajOrum locum reftfituerat ; To him Ciesar ?iad restored the place of his ancestors be- 
 cause he had, in all wars, made use of his special services. Ctes, B. G. 5. 25. (b) to re- 
 present the action as complete in certain particular senses, as : ConvenCre omnes pi-aeter- 
 quam qui cedentts in arcem Romanos persecuti fueianf. Liv. 25, 10. The form fuerant 
 intimates that the act of ' following' the fleeing Itomans was complete and definite, so 
 that thev remained in the castle together with the Romans, a fact which would not be 
 expressed by ])ersecuti erant. In a similar way are used ^loitdt us fuerat '(Liv. 25, 6), and 
 fuerant usi (CiSS. B. G. 4, 38). 
 
 Obs. 8. For the use of the jiluperfect indicative with hypothetical force, see B. VI. 
 
 p. 7;j0 For the use of the pluperfect indicative with the force of a ' future-pluperlect' 
 
 see R. 76, Obs. 8. 
 
 V. FUTURE TENSES. 
 
 § 5§7. Both tlie future of the present system (' FUTUTlE-PRESE^'T ' or 
 •future' witliout any addition, § 322, No. 8), and the future of the per- 
 fect system (' FUTUKE-rERFECX ', g 340), denote actions to happen after the 
 speaker's time, or after the moment of speaking. Tlie future-perfect repre- 
 sents a future action as complete (R. 74) ; the future-present represents an 
 action simply as future without distinguishing its completeness or incom- 
 pleteness (R. 73). 
 
 Ob^ The views of the ancient Latin grammarians on the future-perfect are as vague 
 and erroneous as their ideas on the pluperfect (| 58<), Obs. 2). They called this tense the 
 ' subjunctive of the future tense ' (Prise. 8, 10, 55), being led to this erroneous view by 
 the FtniM of the future-perfect, which, except in the first person singular, is the same as 
 that of the perfect sul>jun«tive. To this similarity in form often corresponds a smiil- 
 arity in meaning, so that it nuiy sometimes appear doubtful whether such forms (for 
 instance, negavens, dixerint, etc.) must be assigned to the i)erfect subjunctive, or to the 
 fut ure-perfeQt. See .R. 75, Obs. 1.— But nobody now doubts that the form airuivero, etc. is 
 an indicative, altliough there are some grammarians who have enriched the language with 
 a subjunctive of the future-present {amatiirus s'un). while one or two have introduced 
 even a subjunctive of the future-perfect (amaverim). These evident errors, hardly need 
 relutation.— Modern Latinists and grammarians have given to the future-perfect the 
 name of ' Fut ilrum e.r actum,' or ' Futilrum perfectvm.' both terms exactly correspond- 
 ing to the nature of this tense, as expressing a /«<Mr« complete action. 
 
 § 5S§. The two future tenses are either («) ordinary futures (R. 73, 
 74) ; or (//) potential futures (R. 75) ; or (c) dependent futures (R. 76). 
 
 Hem. 73. The futuue-present, as ORDrXAiiY-FUTURE {i.e. strictly re- 
 ferring to future time), corresponds to the English future tense, both 
 with 'shall' and 'will.' Hence the ordinary future-present is used 
 
348 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 (1) to represent an action as j^redictedhy the speaker; (2) to represent a 
 future action as determined and icilled by the speaker (someiimes by 
 other persons). 
 
 Ob?. 1. If the future reprc.s<M)ts an action as predicted hy the ppoakcr, it corrosponds 
 to the Enu:li;-li form, with 'shall' for the tirst portion, and to tliu form with 'wiir 
 for the '-i. and 3. persons, as: Solem pr;e jaciilOrum multitiidine fioa videbifia . . . 'In 
 umbijl ij^jitur pKffiiahimus ;' I'c/'/ wiU not s^ee the ^un for the imiltitudu of iniHsiifs , . . 
 • We hIu7u, WxKiW, fifjkt in the hhade,' Cic. Tusc. 1, 42, 101.— Ista lex jyerj'tretur, vnit 
 enim Cae!»ar ; That law wiUj}ai>s, lor Cai:*ar will have it bo. Cic. Alt. 13, 32, 4. (See 
 Ex. 1-9.) 
 
 Obs. 2. If the future represents? an action as determined by the ppeaker, it corresponds 
 to the Eui^Iish futuri-, with ' will ' for the tirst person, and to the future, with * bhail ' 
 for the 2. and 8. persons, as: OccVIar equidem, ped victus non perldo, I s/iaU be killed 
 (prediction), but I wilt not jierifh tdetermination) a vanquislied man. Auct. Her. 4, 52. 
 — Sella tihi e7'lt tamqiiam hypodidasealo proxinia : ><equitnr puhlnus ; You fhall have 
 the next chair in ^'our quality as sub-teacher; a cushion shall fol low. Cic. Fani. 9, 18, 
 4. (i.e. I wdl take care X.\\M you have these things.) The tirst i)t'rson of tiie future is 
 rendered by 'shall,' or ' should,' if the action is dftermiued by others than the speak- 
 er: Claasibus aditrsabimur igitur ? ' Shall ' (should) we, then, oppose the fleets ? Cic. 
 Att. 10, 8, 4. Ex. 8-l.i. 
 
 Obs. 3. For rendering the English ' shall ' in laws, see R. 75, Obs. 5. 
 
 Obs. 4. Somt'tiines the Latin uses a pkesent tense when in English a future is re- 
 quired, namely : 
 
 (a) Oiten with verbs expressing aprc'^ent *7rt/^, which is to continue till another action 
 will take place, especially with verbs of expectiuir and waiting, as exsj)^c(dre, opinr'ui, 
 teii^ri, commot'ilri : Konue ^t^y^eor dum a l)olal)elhe procuratoribus exiuam priniam peii- 
 siOnt-m ; I shall Ix kt-pt {shall remain) in llonu* till the lirsi payment is due l)y Dulal)ella"s 
 agents. Cic. Earn. 0, 18. 5.— Itaeiuc ^.r>7>((7o Tlu-ssuk)nTc;e acta Kal. Sext. ;'Tliererore I 
 shall await at Thessalonica what will (may) be done at the lirst of Sexiilis. lb. Att. 3, 
 1.5, 6. This present has the same nature as the present tense used for states that have 
 been lasting for a certain lime (U. 421. —lint often the future is used in this instance 
 in Latin as it is in English : Durn herus adveniat a foro, opptriar domi ; / fhall wait at 
 liome till the master arrives from the forum. I'laut. Pumi. 4. 2. 107. See Ex, 14-17. JJuin 
 (till) referring to future actions in tiiis connection has its predicate either in the future- 
 present or in the present indicative or subjunctive. See Cic. Fam. IG. 10, 1. 
 
 {b) Sometimes, with verbs of going awiS. coining, U exihcr &x\ atlverb or a clause dis- 
 tincily shows that a future action is meant, or if the act is to be immediately performed 
 (similar to the imperfect in the case of R. 5i, Obs. 2). Tiiis u^aire, however, i> contlned 
 to colloquial or epistolary style : Ego in ledeiu Veneris f^o, I shall go (am goingdirectly) to 
 the temple ot Venus. Plant. P(en. 1, 1. 62.— Lentulus hodieapud me (est), eras mane viidit ; 
 Lentulus is in my house to-day, he leaves (is going to leave) to-morrow morning. Cic. 
 Att. 14, 11, 2.— Ego abto; vale atque salve ! 1 mud go, good bye I Plant. Cure. 4, 4, 32. 
 Ex. 18. 
 
 (c) Sometimes in clauses with antequam and priusguam. See R. 70, Obs. 3, c. 
 
 Obs. 5. Certain verbs are idiomatically used in the future to increase the force of an 
 aftirmation, the same as 'swearing' particles. Here i)elong (a) Mortar si d will die if; 
 
 I pleuge my word that not); Moriar si pneter te quem reliquum habeo; I will die 
 
 if I have anyone left but you. Cic. Fam. 9, 15, 2.— (b) Ita vivain^ (as true as I live>, used 
 parenthetically, as: Sollicitat. ita vlram. me tuavaletOdo: Upon my life, your health 
 makes me uneasy. Cic. Fam. Ui, 20.— (c) AnuVx), or amdbo te, a< pareiithetical sentence, 
 which is added both to imperative and interrogative senttMices: Cogita, amdbo, 
 item nosperhiberi ; Please consider that we are in the same ])redicament. Plaut. Pien. 
 1, 2. 30.— Soror, parce. amdbo; Sister, forbear, I beseech yon ! lb, 1, 2, ;i9.— Eho, amdtjo, 
 quid illo nunc properas ? Halloa ! \Vhy,/or tk" sakeof your love, are you now hurrving 
 there? lb. \. 'Z, bA.— Amdbo, niim hi falso oblectant gaiulio nos ? Ihar me. do 'ihey 
 amuse us with a false i)leasure (hope)? lb. 5, 4. 101.— .l/mTAo /^ quum dabis posthac 
 ali(iuid donum litterarum, mei memineris ; PUaxe remember me if voii, hereafter, should 
 make any literary gift. Cic. Fam. 15, 17, 4.— .1//<<7(V> in this connection literally means 
 • 1 shall be obliged to you if you do, or if you telV what is expressed by the main predi- 
 
 1 Most grammarians consider the expressions rnonar si, and ita tJivam as present sub- 
 junctives. Both forms have here exactly the same meaning, and in place of * .sjf r/ie di amii- 
 bunf the form ' sic me di ament ' is frequently found ; but only • amibo te ' not ' amem 
 
 FUTURE TENSES. 
 
 349 
 
 catc - Similar is the force of the expression 'Sic me di amabunt' Chy the love of the 
 L'od<) i e 'The «^ods shall love me as certainly as what is expressed by the main-predi- 
 cate is true ' : ItcTme di ajmbunt, hand proi)terea te rogo ut hoc proferam. ler. Hec. 1, 
 
 2 SI 
 
 ' i Ilodie apud inferos» fortasse ccenabimvs. Cic. Tusc. 1, 42, 101.— 2. -Roc assegui- 
 mv'r et tacendoet laiendo^. lb. Att. 13, 31. 3 —3. Nomen judicum amiftemus ei ad cau- 
 sas3 judicia jam facta* domo dr^ferhnvs^. lb. Clu. '2, «.- 4 C^iud ergo potis^simum 
 scritnim ? Quod velle te puto», cito me ad te esse venturum. lb. t am. 9, i,\.-b. Qua- 
 rts fortas.se cur, (luum luec in urbe sini'. non absun, quemadniodmn tu lb. 9. 2, 2 — 
 6. SeditiOnis auctOres sanguine ;^/^//<« quod adraisernnt». Liv. '28. 29.- 7. Miln crede, 
 nnus annus additus laboribus. multorum annOrum lanitiami» ,io])i8 afferet^K <^»c. Qu. 
 Fr 1 1 1—8 Ouaniquam invlta'2 te«/re/>oi3, animutne<:o^/^^i«m7/i'* tamen ut iliud 
 coiisulami» Plant. Cist. 8,4, 3.— 9. In sua terra cof/am pngnare Hannibalem, et Car- 
 thago pra-m'iumvictoriie el-it. Liv. '28, 44.- 10. De^« Fadio/om-A;u/.^studiOsequae rogas. 
 Cic Fam 15 14. '2.-- 11. Quare negent Siculi sese te actorei^ «d J"d'cium adfut^ros, 
 ei ine non ««cii... Cic. dTv. Ca.c. 9^ '28.- 12. Nostm- ad diem detain- .^^^^^^^ Ib.lani^ 
 1« 10— 13. A nobis agentur omnia diligenter. II). 1, 5a, 3 - 14. Exspecto dum i le 
 venit. Ter. Eun. 1, 2. l'2fi.-15. Ego in Arcano o;;p.Har dum istac,,<.Mio^^^^^ Att. 
 
 10 3-16. Tu istosabdQce intro-'o, „os hasce hie i^mtolabimur^K Plaut. Poen. o. 3, 
 36!- 17. Opptriar hominem hic ut salflteiu^^. Ter. Ad. 3, 3, 92.- 18. Ego hos conr 
 veniam^^ ; post hue redeo. lb. 4, 7, 39. 
 Rem 74 The (ordinary) future-perfect in independent sentences is used 
 
 (^0 ^vitii the force of an EngUsh future-perfect (Obs. 1) ; {h) with the force 
 
 of an lc:,ui^\\s\i future-present to represent actions as complete in the lu- 
 
 ture (Obs. 2). * 
 
 Ob- 1 While the English future-perfect is rarely used in independent sentences, and 
 still more rarely in clauses, the Za/iM future-perfect most frequently ocxurs m clauses 
 
 7TU)nt also (similarlvUJ the English) in independent sentence^ But.t ,s rarely used 
 V hie force of an English future perfect, ^yhere ,t occurs with the meaning o t le 
 
 Enirli^h future-perfect, it is mostly qualitied by clauses with dum (wh le, t 11), or by 
 dauiesw th«twith/>H««a//«//^..r byVMUM-al relative clauses: lJuminh'.ee leges c-o 
 [ Imn lor asse ^nr.//^;o; Perhaps I shall have met with Xhaxxnan lU (before when) you 
 reiti' letter Cic At . 9, 5 - Prieciare vixero liquid mihi jirius acndent quam hoc 
 [a turn nial videro : I shall have lived happily if I die belore seeing so great a calami y. 
 
 1 M '6 99.- Is bell.im cunfectrit qui Antonium oppresserlt : He who crushes Auto- 
 niiis will have finished the war. lb. Fam. 11, 1'2, 2. See H. 70, Obs. 4 (Ex. 1. 2). 
 
 Obs. 2. Frequently the Latin future-perfect is used with the force of an English /«- 
 turerresHif This is the ca>e if the predicate may be conceived a-^ an act cotn])lefetn the 
 /v'/V/ras r'Perpaucis diebus in Poinpejauum ; post in luec Puteolana legna rei^avvpiw; 
 tnaverv f'wdJys 1 shall start for (my) Pompejanum ; then I shall rehnTi hy ^ax\ to 
 thel' Putcoat^ realms. Cic. Att. 14, 16, 1. Here it is not the return-tnp. but the return 
 t^eTf whids expressed bv the future-perfect. The fuf.re renarigax> would mean 'I 
 sir 11 be n the return-trip"'. (See Ex. 3-9). Thus generally \ridero is used with the 
 f ,rce of- ' shall see' (but also ridl^x,^. Videro imp,ies »)'«;'' <>;")fj,lf^;;^;;[';;^d^ 
 ' riilTre' a* an accomplished act : Ego sta?c recte ut haiit ridero ; I Ml see to this being 
 ^ i 1v.,l^K Ter A dr 2 (J 25 Thus frequently ' *SVf/ ridetimus' as a detached sen- 
 Unce%u\ veVlils^e C 5,3 Ib'4,6,4,'and often. But ' S.d ridebimus ^ Ih 
 
 10 4 1 - S?rupulum i^^enuW, sed vidrbimus ; A poser for one that is Som- away but 
 we !AazV/^^/(r" whether it will be feasible, representing the act as incomplete in the 
 f.n'r. ; lb Fill 4 •>H 8() See Fx 10 11 Hence sometimes future-perlects and luturc- 
 ore-e t's (bo^^ Eu'VlVsh comm<)n futures), are co-ordinate if the cute de- 
 m tS ^c no etc- k\ in the^^ ser.se. and the other an act without definite limits : 
 N i^quam S t.s banc n Iserrimam vitam vel suslenfaix>,ve\ abjerero ; ^o;vlK're it wil 
 be easier to me either to drag along this most wretched hie, or to ihww it of. Cic. Att. 
 
 :^ 19, 1. Ex ^12^ 
 
 1 Tn the other (lower) world.— ^ bv silence and concealment.— 3 trial.— ^formed.— 
 
 18 as tu Fadius.- '^ te adore, when you are appointed manager of lu. tn,''J- „„„". 
 diiVv -- 1» at theauoointed day.-^o introabducere, to take into the house.- -» to expect 
 fol\nx for - ^'^ ?(?'2lute hiln^ to p,y my respects to him.- ^3 aliquem convenlre, to see 
 eomebody (in order to speak with him). 
 
350 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 Obs. 3. Sometimes future-perfects of deponents (hut only in clauses) take the an.TilJ- 
 KTy fuero instoul of era, the same U8 periphrastic fntnre-peffects <>f the passive? voice : 
 Nunc proticiscCmurad reliqua, si paucn VLulcfuenmus a V()i)is deprecdii. Cic.Verr. 2, 3, 5. 
 
 1. Bidunmi/MfH.< in viil dum in CuniJlnum' v.iiis. Cic. Fam. IG, 10, 1. — 2. Si omnes 
 ocruliinus^, ego omnibus exitio* /««^/-o. U). (^u.Fr. 1, 4.-3. Clamor et primus impetus 
 ciXi^WAcepent. Liv. 25. 3S.— 4. Atque hoc idem in amici re* uut periculo/<?(^-frl/. Cic. 
 OIT. 1, 43, 151. — 5. (^uis tibi priinum iliud conctsaerit pneter PyrrhOiR-m'* Ih. Fin. 4, 
 18, 48.— «. Jieynriiro^ si te vidcro. lb. Att. 2, 24, 5. — 7. Multumad «a qme qua^rinjus^ 
 explanatio tua j^fOfecerif*. lb. Fin. 3. 4.-8. Isto pretio iios» tuas»» IdcxW feceris. 
 Plant. Pcen. 5, 4, G2.— ». Si \n^r<;U, abiero. Ter. Ad. 1,2, 47.— 10. Quicsce", istanc 
 rem ego recte vldtro. lb. Merc, 2, 3, 111,— 11. (^ute fuerit causa mox ridew. Cic. Fin. 
 1, 10. — 12. Quic quum magna ipei hab^bimun^'^ , turn dtinpseriinus^^ hostibus multo 
 majOra. Liv. 20, 4^3. 
 
 Item. 75. The future (botli present and perfect) is called totential if 
 not a future time, but particular conceptions of the speaker in regard to 
 the predicate are expressed in the form of a future. The future is thus 
 used 1) with the force of an impkuative (Obs. 1); 2) to represent the 
 predicate as a conclusion of the speaker from premises given or under- 
 stood (Obs. 2. 4) ; 3) to designate the predicate as a kule or law estab- 
 lished by the speaker (Obs. 5) ; 4) to designate the predicate as an opin- 
 ion of the speaker (Obs. 0); 5) in verbs of saying and uttering as a modest 
 form of tlie assertion (Obs. 7). The futtire-jierfect is not used with po- 
 tential force, excei^t (^/^as a dependent future (H. 70), {b) when it lias the 
 force of an imperative (Obs. 1). In all other instances of potential fu- 
 tures generally i\ni future-present is employed. 
 
 Obs. 1. Both future tenses are used with the force of impefiatives, beinsr rendered 
 by English imi)eratives : In omnibus rebus quid tantis hotioribus dei)eas cof/UdMn ; Con- 
 sider in all tilings what you are owing to sucii honors. Cie. Qu. Fr. 1, 1, 10, Vos. mili- 
 tes, eo9 quorum vos modo arma texGrunt. ]ni\rr>ue» ml'/faMfis' ; You, soldiers salute (will 
 Kilutc) those whose arms have i)rotectcd you just now, as patrons, Liv, 22, 21).— Quare 
 \\\\\\\ j^ropemrl'i ; Therefore be not in any hurry. lb. Fam. 1(>. 3, 2,— In '7nei memineris'' 
 (remember me), Cic. Fam. 1.5, 7, 4, memirierht may be taken for a subjunctive (perfect, 
 with the siL'niftcation of a present), or lor a future. But also the future-perfects 
 with imperative force of other verbs rnau generally betaken lor perfect subjunctives. See 
 § ,^.94.— Ex, 1-5. 
 
 Obs. 2, The Latin likestoemploy the form of the future-present in anrnmentative dis- 
 course to represent the predicate as a conclusion from premises given or understood, or 
 as a statement dependent on a sipposition madeor understood by the author. In English 
 such futures are sometimes rendered by a future with 'u'Ul\ but more frequently by 
 presents or some form of the potential (can, mu"*t, would) : Aberif igitura saj)iente icgri- 
 tfldo; lienco. gr'wf tvill not dwell within the wise (cannot dwell, does not dwell). Cic. 
 Tiisc, 3, 8, IS.— Num igitur ignobilitas et humllitas sapietitem bejlium esse prohibtbit ? 
 Can (will, would) therefore a low and humble station of life hinder the wise from being 
 happy? lb. 5, ;i(J, 103.— Si considerare volumus qiue sit in natQra hominis excellentia^ 
 intelli(jetnus quam sit turpe delicilte ac moll iter vivere ; If we would perceive (if we are 
 not blind to) the excellence in man's nature, we imi^t comprehend the disgrace of a lux- 
 urious and etfeminate life. lb. Oil". 1. 30. 100.— Frequently such futures dependent on 
 suppositions (expressed or understood) are rendered by an Euirlish hypothetical period 
 with ' would' or ' should ' : Si de re militjlri huic dicendum erit Snlpicio, quceret a C. 
 Mario ; If (for instance) Sulpicius /f//o?/A/ have to speak on military subjects, he would 
 apply to C. Marius. Cic, Or, 1, 15. 00.— Quamobrem si quis universam oratoris vim de- 
 fining vnlt, is erit orjltor meil sententiii qui, etc. ; If, therefore, any one ?ro//W define the 
 ideal of an orator, / .should my that he is an orator who, etc, Cic. Or, 1, 15, 04. (Hero 
 the future mMias the force of dicann'nmesse).~kr\»\ow\e< istud non dabit. quippe 
 qui. etc. ; Aristotle would not concede this, since, etc. lb. P'in. 4, 18, 49. (Here we sup- 
 ply ' si eum quixderis.')— See Ex, t>-y. 
 
 1 Two days.— ^ my villa near Cuma^.— ' to perish.— * abstract dative : ruin.— ^ affair. 
 ^ 8 to take breath again, to be relieved. — ' ad en qua', qucerimus, for our })nrpose,— * to 
 contribute, to aid.— » us (female slaves).— »» thy property.— >« be quiet.— ^"^ while those 
 things which we shall have, are great.-- '^ to take away from. 
 
 FUTURE TENSES. 
 
 351 
 
 Ob« 3 In all iiiPtancca of potential future? the verbs expressing possibility, volition, 
 and necessitv, namely po«^€. veUe, detrere. ojxtrtet, n^cesse .^^f, and the predicative gerun- 
 dials are frequent I v placed in the future with a potential force which is already con- 
 ted in the verb itself. Such future predicates are generally rendered by some of the 
 f rms of the English potential : Si i-itur (talis vir) non jKilent bella gerere, etc.. i la tamea 
 1)4" tire (/^/.e^trqu^ in ipslus potestSte ; If, therefore, such a man e.//J«o^ conduct 
 
 wars etc hTmiycertainlv(is^erta^ to perform those duties which are m 
 
 lis nower Cic Off ]. ;w. 121.- Onid autem did ;><?/. H^ si tnrpitndinein non ipsam per 
 se fKndam esse ^ 6ut what can be said if we assume that turpitude is 
 
 C; dlltJltaSe in its<df y lb. Fin. 3, U, :i8.- Ne respublica q"idem hjec pro se suscipi 
 volet ' Not even the State would have such things done for u. lb. Off. 1, 45 159.— Etqui- 
 dem ban? totam copiam jam Lucullo nostro riotam esse oporabU; ^1"^ ^^Ijole treasnire^ 
 too, mud have been known already to our friend Lucullus. lb. Fiu. 3, 2,8. bee Ex. 10-13. 
 
 17 19 
 
 Ob« 4 Two particular forms of conclusions arc very frequently expressed by poten- 
 tial futures, namely 1) the syllogism ; 2) the deductio ad absukdum. 
 
 A In SYLLOGISMS the present tense, or vece^e est with a clause, may also be used in 
 nlace of a future. In English we use (besides the present) the potential with 'must 
 or tlie future with 'will ' : (Major prkmisk) Numquam sapiens est pertui;batus ; (MI^OR 
 PR MisE) at fT.Mittldo perturbatio est animi ; (conclusion) semper igitur kcti udine 
 sapiens racabit~{oT varat, ovsainentem vacare necesse est) ; A wise man is never disturlied 
 hi Ids nS; but grief is a disturbance of the mind ; hence a wise man must {will) 
 ulwavs be free from grief, Cic. Tusc. 3, 7, 15, See Ex. 14. 
 
 B The DEDUCTIO ad absurdum is either clothed in the form of a clause with si the 
 l.rincipal sentence with the potential future containing the <^«!'<^J»^'''" '•*'P''';r;i"t'f, "« 
 falsi' or alKurd • or in the form of an independent sentence as premise, and a questicn v\ ilh a 
 I)Otential fnture as conclusion. Such nuestions are always ^\'thout interrogativ^^^ 
 i.les. Both forms are usually rendered by a hypothetical period : >St nihil (^ sap enna 
 conficiCtur) nisi c(»rpus. summa bona erunt ilia, valettldo, vacuitas doloris. pulcrittldo^ 
 ce eri r If wi-h.m had only to deal with corporeal things the .^"^1^^^ ^^«!>f.fj,jfj>^^^hil 
 healih freedom from pain, beauty, and the like. Cic. tin. 4, 13, So.- ^'mo' »^ «"^ a»^^^^^^^ 
 p.rritndinem ootuit repellere, ratio ab sapienti wro non jwie7%t? Jj U'&r y^asYtower- 
 V^ZZ Vre^^^^^^^^ ^o^ ("""^,^ not) reason f^^ve [he power 
 i-eoe lit from the wise? (or : Fear had the power to repel, etc., and reason should not, 
 etc V C c tTc 3, i7, 0( . See Ex, 15, 10. Tlie premises attached to such questions may 
 ili nrecede in tlie form of a relative clause, the interrogative sentence containing the 
 a m-iedent • "v j ^/ca delJlhri fuk-Ore illustmri Jovis templum oportgbat id apnd is urn 
 i ejusuKKli (-onv viis constituUur f A chandelier bv whose lusire Jove's temple ought 
 have been illuminated, should be vsed in such kind of banquets ^X ,^iich a man ? Cic 
 Verr 2 4 :V> -- Sometimes the clause with si is understood, as: Quo quidem modo (i. f . si 
 hoc itaeritV nee duces m/;*? utiles, nee magisirStus, nee medicTna, nee denique ipsa 
 sapientia; In E^Ltwa; neither generals would be ot any ufe, nor magistrates, nor the 
 hcaliii"- art, nor even wisdom itself. Quint. 2, 10, 5. 
 
 Ons 5 RULKS and laws laid down by the speaker are expressed 1) by the second form 
 of the imperative. : 2) by the subjumtive P»-^^'"t ' 3) by genindial^^^^ 
 oj)Ortet (not necesse or opu.^ est) ; 5) by the future-present ; 0) by the present leu^e it ine 
 existing law is merely repeated. , ^ ., ^ . 
 
 A. The SECOND FouM OF TiiK IMPERATIVE is uscd iu ^bc predicate conaiu^^^^ 
 
 hn^ction if the law itself is the speaker (corresponding to the English shall ). But 
 
 i< l^-m is i ni^e^^^ , the laws in he strict sense- of the word, for instance to the laws of 
 
 1 e XII Tab e"-^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^vhich were constitutionally given by the people in the 
 
 fr«,zv/a «A^/riafa The pretorian law, the ordinances of the emperors, and he respon- 
 
 criT, nrtnm ,mn AaWtorTlIc ,.r.«or .ay«: What • .Imll be • .luuencted u„ucrcompul«on, 
 /.-A<i//iiiit hold valid. Vlp. Uig. 4, 2, 1. , . , . , , j. .. 
 
 V. R„lp. and la'v» roferrin" to AOTS and k-iknce in the brii-f style of c/)mpendi. are 
 frc,\,enly.-r4n in the second fern of ihe hnperativc (3. or 3. pets.), ml..rchan£..ng wH 
 IKrhTfo^s mentioned above : F«n„m t.M [t?'^'fra^<:'''o.car^%%r ^St 
 
 ces 
 
 »ther forms mentionea aoove : riKiiiuu u-m i^.... ,y. ..,-..;. -"-^----_^-^ 
 Cut the h-iy as soon as it is time, and do not cut too late, Cato R. K. 53. But in 
 
FUTURE TENSES. 
 
 353 
 
 352 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 classical lan^ua^rc the mo.t usual.form of rules is thc/^^^m whel^^^^^ the ru^e 5^ declara- 
 tive or i)rc5=crii)tive (i. ^. contuiniuj,' an injimction or precept that or ""W/*^|"^'"' t 
 XnilL,Jdoue)- the former intm1m..Kii.- frequently with 8ubjui.ct.vi; presents ad 
 ?h"^liuer\?;;h tile forms tueutioued No? 2 3. 4.. Tlu- ....ur.. o, P;-cr.p..ve rules .^e^ 
 ilert'd bv ' should ' or 'must' : that of declarative rules by ihe prc^tIlt or iiic poicm mi 
 with ' m-iv ' or ' can ' (Declauativk) : llujc et ad imprubatiOuem, ct ad umrro-utiu- 
 
 nem t "tSm' .^v" 6«.' ; This is Jo true of u ejers to) tje r^bu^^^^^ ^^ S^'a^ 
 and i.f the exami.mtion of witnesses. Ai.ct. Her 2 <, 9.- Hv^^^^^^ 
 
 qui 2>oterimus, arte, imitatiOne exerci-atiuue : All tins ^^« .f^'^^ ^,*^" ^..J^?^,,/,^^ 
 wavl bv art bv imitation, and by practice, lb. 1, 3, 3.— ^Pul^cri «tin t) . ^i»»" ;'"'"' 
 Sru-^re a i voU S cmlidcran.las reset tempus et dili-ent.am ; \V hocxer 
 
 wt^il'ti^aloVd thistult (in order to avoi<l tins fault we) ^-"^^;;;^,^,^^^^^ 
 riili'cnce to the treatment of h s subject. Cic. Otf. 1, 0, 18.— 1 iimum cormutniou a(.iu 
 
 Tat\o conferenda est or enr ; ratio conjereiur uxn^, "^ -^ " ,V„ imnor . rt gubiuuctive 
 that the En-dish • should' in this sense cannot be expressed by an impcrlLCt euDjuuciut, 
 
 '^'^he English m;;;^•^S^w^''^^etUn^^^ an otOectir.^ rule, ie, a rule 
 
 esSbHl\u-d by"the Z^n sjn.ken of, for instance by ha.,it <-,-»--!f,ir 'j;;;; j^ ;f^;';|j:,^J 
 do as thevDlease^ This form wh ch closely c<.rrespou(is to the ^V<>"'d , "' /*^iy ^ ,^'^ 
 nast act on ( K 54 Obs 3) is KcneniUy expivssed by ,olhe : but sometimes by the future 
 dncer in connections Silv)^ quem(,ue deceat. ex ^n;v^r^u^Jud^cah>mt, 
 
 obLS em p eisO^^^^^^^ ipsa natflra ; The (dramatic) poets iviU judge rom he 
 
 reo irenM\^s()f the is proper f.n- the person ;, but to us (philoso- 
 
 Ksuat rriier"^^ that part. Cic. Off. 1, 28, 1»7 - Aln rursum eisdem a 
 
 Si cip s onine^'ftlcium ad volupt^ltem rejWent ; Others-au'ain fm.n the -'^n;;' P"''^ P «^ 
 wiUiWer everv duty to pleasure, lb. Fin. 5, 7. 19.- Ahquando mains h< mo ^^cet ^M.nl 
 nihil Bit requirenduin ; Sometimes a bad man udl male so that uo fault can be louud. 
 Ouint. 2, 20. 10. See Ex. 20. 21. 
 
 Obs.O. Assertions- advanced by the speaker as hi< own «".^''"^f. ""• J/^f^r^fT^/,';^: 
 ouenilv Dlaced in the future to distinguish them Irom t,'eneral truths and statements 
 S V er^ally ack. w edg^^ which are placed in the present. Such futines are either re - 
 de ek by a^?itnre with" wiir or by thV present potential : ^^^'^^^^^^^ ^^}"]^^^^]^ 
 necrflbit se fecisse nuod cogerCtur (unil le-e) quuni altera lex permitteret ; A defence imust 
 S« coJiilfm;/ S wJJu, by which the accused acknowled-'cs to ''^^^e d.sobeyed a cotnp.a- 
 «orv law and to have acted upon another law merely permissory. Au( t. Her i, 10, 15. 
 Fa(eb^I^iturVo\c\ ha^c omnia dicta esse pncclflre ; The Stoics .re// (unquestionably) ac- 
 kSedge all this to be well said. Cic Fin. 4, 8.19.- Sed ccTtei.i bonis ..v///^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 amicos ; But you ivill. surely, count friends amonj? the ' blessin-s. lb. o, 2., hi. Ex. 2>. ».J. 
 Or^ 7 Often verbs of SAYING by which the speaker introduces a statement, advice, 
 or othJ asse .'n o his own. are placed in the V.iture for the sake of P'>l'tene^ and o 
 avoid the harsher and more direct lorm of the present tense. '^"•••\ ''/";••:■ :V.':T^i,r'" 
 may supply a clause like 'If von permit', correspond to our potential u. h ^;«>"1* • 
 Tamum te mfmo/?.-6o, si illi ab^.enti'^salatom dederis, pnesent.bus Ins omnibus te datfl- 
 mm- I would only icmind you, if vou are goin- to pardon him in hi-; absence to do it 
 ™ the p esence "this whole aiidiJnce. Cic. Li.'. 12. :W - Tamen audm \e ab hac Aca- 
 d" mik Eovrf ad illam veterem vocare : ll<»wever / icould beg to recall you from this ^evv 
 Academy to the Old one. lb. Fin. 5, 3, 7. Ex. 24. 2;>. 
 
 1 ^'m/V-s-, et quidem confestim». Cic. Att. 13, %\ 1 .- 2. Fane^^ ny certir.rcm de Tdt- 
 bu- II) 13. 3;J, 4.- 3. Mihi, sieunde2 poles, enus^ qui decern le-/lii Mi"i'.''"'> ^l'*T« '^* 
 Tb 'l3 ?0 3 — 4 In ceteris mhrime>i^ si me hivreiilema v„ici,is lb. Fin. 3, 4.1b.— 
 6 P incipio" aniTco miiim rcslxtnnU. Ter. Andr. 3. 3. 38 - «5, Si .uhUam^ et fortuitam« 
 oratiOnemo commentatio et co-itatio'" facile vincit'S banc ipsam profecto a^sndua et 
 dniV-ens^ciMpJi-lra'^ ../^./v7/;i^"cic. Or. 1. 33, 150.- 7. Mim v^^yv^iiegiilxtur defonnem 
 Pyrrhi pacem'S ciccus ille Appius diccudi viribus dircmis^c»* ? Quint. 2, lb, t.— 
 
 \ 
 
 » And quickly, too.— a = .si cunde (if you can from any place, i e. anywhere). See 
 217 o2" 3 and R 5 Xo 4 a - ' di- out. make out, tind out.- " come to my aid.- 
 stopi?n.V ('l-tkSng).-- « be?oie all other thin.rs, first (.f alK- ' extempore - « unpre- 
 pared.- 9 mldress.- i» cominentaiio et cogilatio a prepared and ^'y'V''.'^ ' 'ff^^^'l'^'vr- 
 " surpasses, excels.— i" a carefully and diligently prepared paper.- i» dejotmu^ pax, tuc 
 transactions of an ignominious peace.— ^* to break up. 
 
 
 8 SeauHur igitur beJlta vita virtfltem vel ad supphciumJ ctimque ea descendet^^va. 
 tauriMu', nee cam minis blandimentisve corruota deseret. Cic. Tusc. 5, 31. 8<.— 
 q Honc^tum* ergo si solum est^ bonuni, quid hahdju'^ prieterea quod sequSre'? 
 Th Fin 3 4 14 — 10. Tertiuni" nisi tenebimus», nihil oraiOri in quo magnus esse possit 
 relinOuhnus^K lb. Or. 1, 15, 6s.- 11. Jain aut Callipho aut DiodOrus i^xxomoCiopoterunt 
 xmUmX concedere? lb. 4, 18, 50.- 12. Si virtus puestat ndiquis rebus. beSius esse 
 ^^7^ virtflte una pneditus". lb. 4, 18, 51.- 13. Hoc te diligentissime percij.ere et 
 Wmi nisse ro/am. lb. Fam. 11, 7, 2.- 14. Quarum artium^^ snmmrei3 crescere possunt, 
 ear metiam contrariorumi* .umma potent augeri : ad virtatis aut^nn summam acce- 
 dere'5 nihil potest : ne vitia quidem igitur crescere jwterunt, lb. Fin 4 24 (m.- 
 1.5 Er>'o histrio»» hoc vidlbit in scenS»' : non tumit sapiens vir iii vita ? lb Off. 1, 
 31 114^- IH Ergo in bestiis erunt secrCta»« a voluptate qujedam Pi'^uiacra»» virtQtum : 
 in ip^is hominibus virtus nisi" voluptatis causa J'"'l'\/''»^-^, ^^ k^"* !; S// V 
 17 omne principium'i rei totlus quje agCtur" gicrnificatiOnem^s habere demit. lb. 
 oV 2 7^ 320 - 18. Defensor impulsiOnem"* aut nuUam fmsse dicet, aut, si fuisse con- 
 cedit' exfenudbit, et parvulam" quamdam fuisse demonMrmt, aut^ non ex ea solSre 
 huisiS^di facta nasci'^« docebit. lb. Inv. 2, 8, 25.- 19. SuspiciOnes" _e ex test.rnon.o 
 P .'v nin.nre duci^» oiwr'lbit lb. 2, 14. 4«.- 20. Vul-aris29 orator, si in dicendo cnt 
 exercitatus'o, hac ipsa exercitatiOne istos (oratOres) r-./^ftemJt/^i, neqtie ge abets con- 
 temi i ac desnici simt lb. Or. 3. 21, 79. - 21. Gravis et fortis civis et in republica di-- 
 
 m %rin 'K s'*<ii'iOnes ac bella civilia /.^i.^3. atque ^eni ^rff^^ totum 
 leiiHiblicu'.totamqneeam sic rw<=6J^»r33 ut omnibus onsulats* lb. Ofl. 1 2o, 8(^^.-22 Is 
 
 le nim vii^mV cu us animnm neque prospera forttlnaas efferets», nee adversa-"' infr n- 
 I'et»" Liv 4.5 8 - 23. Ac mea quidem sententia nemo;>o/m^ esse omni laude cumu a- 
 tu-3»'orator nisi erit omnium rerum magnarumatqiM-artium scientiam^» consecfltus^-. 
 Cic Or 1 B 20 - 24. Piso. Exspecto quid ad id quod qua'rebam respondeas. Cicero. 
 JieJmn'debo me non quierere hoc tempore quid virtus efficere P«>ssit. lb. tin 5, 2. ««. 
 - 25 (Jiuu^e banc oratoriam facultatem in eo genere iWig/ziM**'» ut eam civlhs scien- 
 t'lsd*^ partem^* esse dicamus. lb. Inv. 1, 5, 6. 
 
 Eejn 76 Iftlie time of the predicate in a clause is determined by a 
 future time given in the principal sentence, the predicate of the clause is 
 jrenerallv placed in one of the two future tenses. Such futures are called 
 'DEPENDENT FUTURES,' and ai'c usually rendered by English presents 
 (indicative or subjunctive), as: 
 
 Profecto nihil accipiam injun» si tn aderv< ; I, surely, shall not suffer a"?' ;^;i^"? »/ 
 
 xoJare fje^yre^'^enf. Cic. Att. 5. 18, 3.-Ex isto morbo convalesces, f^Axeadfiibvens me- 
 
 d?cuursi^e m,n adAJftw^m ; From that disease you will recover, whether you emp/oy 
 
 a nh "ic iaii o " not lb. Div 2. 13.-Ob banc rem tibi reddam operam uhi roe^, nbi jus- 
 
 %H<: F.»r this lavor I will retuni you my services wherever you choose, wherever you 
 
 Tff/uire [i\\eM\]. Plant. Pu?n. 4,2, 31. 
 
 Obs 1 As to the question, which of the two future tenses is to be used in the pnnci- 
 
 naV^entenee and in the clause, four combinations occur : (a) Both predicates may be 
 
 n Uie flit re-pi-esent ; (fA both predicates may be in the future-perfect ; (c) the principal 
 
 pre icate may he a fu ure-present. and the dependent predicate a future-perfect ; (d) tiie 
 
 pSp d redicate may be a future-perfect, and the depende.it predicate a luture-present. 
 
 The 1^^. St and second combinations are used if the two actions are represented &^ co- 
 
 1 Scaffold - 2 enter.- » the brass steer of Phalaris (in which, after it was heated the con- 
 
 (ol t^ Sin d in committing the c.ime).- '^'^ panulam gvamdajn a very weak one 
 -^26t\,at"S a"ti<'nsare n..t usu.llv beirotfen from it (the motive).- ^- grounds for 
 «nunie m. -2» be taken be derived.- " commonplace.- ^« if he has practice in speak- 
 r"^'l^" Uvhip to punish.-- 3. detest.- «3 admiiiister, govern. - ^* so as to consult the 
 i UMest^ to 1 o^ide for the interests.- s» prospera fot tuna, prosperity.- ",;o ehite 
 -" adv^.r-.ity-3« crush.- 3Miterally : heaped widi all praise, t. e accomplished in 
 everv re' pect an orator of the hi.'hest order.- "« omnium rerum magn&rum atque artium 
 #Sia a knowled-e of all great things and arts, i. e. every important fadd of knoxU- 
 ed-e -'<> to acqiriie.- ^-^faadtatemin eo genere ponemus ut dicamus, I would class 
 the oratorial art as, etc.— «^ social science.— ** a branch. 
 
354 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 Incident, or parallel in their temporal relation;» (Obs. 2). The third form is upccI if tho 
 dependent J'utiirc i>^ rt'pre.xenrcd as precedinij tlie aclion of the principal predicate (Obs. 
 3). Thef«)urili lorm is rare, beini^iised if the aclion of the principal predicate precedes 
 that of tlic clause (see Rem. 74, Obs. ]), Dependent futures are used both as ordinary 
 and as potential futures. 
 
 Obs. 2. In the first two comhinafions (cqnalit}' of both tenses in the case of coincident 
 action), l)()th predicates may be placed in tlie fiitin-e-perl'ict, if this tens»^ niav be used 
 aeeordin;,' to K. 71, Ons. 2, as: Satis te niaifire iidtto si plane conlirmatunt rhteio ; I 
 vhall see yin\ early enough, \i I see you fully recovered. Cic. Fam. 10, 4. h (E.k. 1.) Iloth 
 tenses generaHij are future-perfects, if both jjredicates refer only to one acti«)n. wlucii, in 
 the clause, is desii^nated as such, while the principal predicate expresses the import and 
 inner force of the action (see R. (JO), as : Per niihi {^ratmn feceris si in hoc tain diliirens 
 fueris cjuam soles; You wil! oblii,'e me very much if, in this niatt«r, von are as careful as 
 you are wont (by be in tr as careful, etc.). Cic. Att. 1, 2(), 7. Hut: Itaque sapienter 
 fades si te in istam pacificatiOnein non interpOves : Hence you will act prudently if you 
 do not mix with this peacemakinj» business. lb. Faui. 10, 27, 2. See Ex. 2-<J.— In' all 
 other instances both predicates are future-presents, which, in the case of potential fu 
 tures, is almost always the case : (^nod ri(/(!/yi^ wr rectum esse, cmabo ; I shall do whai 
 is ri.L,djt in my view. Cic. (^u. Fr. 3, 4, 5.— Tu quod voles fades ; Do what you like. lb.— 
 Minus id prodei'it in ediscendis quie oratiOnis perpetuaj ernvt ; This witl less avail 
 in memorizini? passages belonging to connected discourse, (^uint. 11, 2, 24.— Si genus 
 cansie dubium habebimns^ a benevolenlijl principluni constitiitinus ; If we have a case be- 
 lont^ing to the dubious kinds, «.'g ^Aow/(/ 6rt<e our introduction on the good will (nf the 
 judges). Auct. Her. 1, 4. 6.— lu clauses with dum — asloitfj as. both predicates are al- 
 ways future-presents: Dabllur a. me argentum dum erit commodum ; Money will be 
 given by me as long as it is convenient. Ter. Ad. 1, 2, 38. See Ex. 7-12. 
 
 Obs. 3. The third combination (Obs. 1), when the action of the clause is represented 
 n» inrcedinff that of the principal sentence, is analogous to the two instances when per- 
 fects are dependenton presents(K. 43), and when pluperfects are dependent on imperfects 
 (see Hem,. (>»», Obs. 4. 5). Future-perfects thus dependent on future-presents are either ren- 
 dered by En\i\\^\\ jyresenls. ov by English /«^//■f-/>/e,sw//,N', or by English ;><^/;/k'^*- (rarely 
 by future-perfects). The most usual forms of such clauses are the following : 
 
 (a) Conditional clauses with si : lloe astfttijuar prolecto si instittlta iierfrcero ; I shall 
 certainly gain this point if I accomplish my work. Cic. Div. 2, 2. ♦>.— Xec omnis avari- 
 tias. si a^que avantias esse dixenmus, seqiittur ut etiam HMjuas esse dicjlmtis ; Nor does 
 i^ /b//o?<' that we should call all kinds of avarice equal (to each oxXwx) \f we equally 
 call them 'avarice.' lb. Fin. 4, 27, 7.'). 
 
 (b) Temporal clauses with quum, ubi. simular, etc. : E-ro in H])! vnm pvqfidscar qnum 
 primorum dierum nnwiut^ ej'cei)e to ; 1 will depart for Epirus. ^///e/- rectivinq {\\\\r\\ I 
 have received, when I shall have received) the tidiuLrs of the lirst davs (intelligence of 
 what has been transacted in the tirsl days). Cic. Att. 3, 23, 5.— /y^/f/i^/ex urbe ubi > rmd 
 
 facfy. nnptiie ; He will Uee from the city as soon as the marriage is accomplished. Plaut. 
 Trin. 2, 4, I'Jti. 
 
 (c) Temporal clauses with anfeqitam and pHusqnam : Nequc priits qt/am debeJlarero 
 absislam; Nor will 1 desist before I have (shall have) finished the war. Liv. 41. 31>.— 
 iScvibam ad Antonium, sed non aiiteqiKim te videio ; I will write to Antonius, but not 
 before I have seen you. Cic. Fam. IH, 2.3, 2. 
 
 id) Comparative clatises with ut : Ut semcntem /<5<Tm« ita metes; As you sow, so 
 will Im' your harvest. Cic. Or. 2, Cuy, 2<»1. — Generally. howev<-r, comparative clauses re- 
 quire both i)redicates to l)e in the same tense : Animam relitiqnam potius quam illas 
 deseram ; Rather than desert these, / will lose my life. Ter, Ad. 3, 4, .52. (See Ex. 5. 
 18. 20). 
 
 ((?) Relative clauses with qui, quicungue. quidquid, etc. : Utar co portu qnam pri- 
 mum videro ; I will ni'ike the first pt^-t that oftrs (wliich I shall see). Cic. Att. 7, 7, 4. 
 — Qiioquo modo nos (jesserimus.Jiet tamen illiid ouod futurum est ; In whatever way 
 we may act, that which is to be, will happen. lb. Div. 2, 8, 21. See Ex. 13-24. 
 
 Obs. 4. En^rlish clauses with 'before ' referring to the future, take th<; followlmr gram- 
 matical f(»rms in LatiiMthe action which shall be done first 6^/oref the otlier action is 
 performed, Iteing designated by ' Action A \ and the aclion which is to be done alter tho 
 first, by ' Action B ') ,• 
 
 (a) ' Action A ' may be made the principal predicate, and ' Action B ' the predicate of 
 the clause. If. in this instance, both predicates have the same subject, ' action A ' is 
 placed in the future-present, the clause being introduced by antequnm or priusquam 
 with its predicate in the present indirafire, or subjunctive (p. 6r»8) : Antequam do 
 accusatioue ipsa dico (B), de accusatOrum spe pauca dicam (A) ; Before s^peaking of tho 
 
 FUTURE TENSES. 
 
 355 
 
 charges. Inill mnU some few ^^^^^^ ^^^^,;:^^ ; 
 
 Jnt^quam de repuhlica ^^^"''^ ^» 'f.^Sv Sah. ^ motive of my departure. Cic. 
 
 i. us are generally phice.l in tl'/'fii"'!;^;!'^ f/; //:.\^^^^^ corfecero;lU 
 
 cate bem- a future-present. , In.the 1^*'^; "f^^Jf 'i'., '^i^^ propiOres sunt, dixenmm: 
 
 barn ImaMie. .,c .Uruile ...nnm fcrro •,^J./,",'^'^.S/„«"w"rd, Civ. -U, 38. 
 
 from »11 iliroclions on the cr"wd, and «("*«» I »""'.' „ ^j i„„i,i„,-/„«« oratio cum 
 
 ina.'Uituaim, utiUt Jtis i-omimnlnrjV ""'' o^"i'-,^ |o _ Uanc siraililailincni qui a,<fc- 
 aml «ith Iho ransrc of Us ''*f''^Z^;r,,^-\noi\d:eTio altaiu to thi» likened, <•"<»'<' 
 
 rii-que vchu^ satis>ftcerimus lb. OA- l. -<i ^"^- . . , ^^q„od placeat, (lecrevihHh\- 
 
 (T) I>EUFECTS implying a luture ^"VX^/'i'J J 1 like, I have n.ade up my 
 
 f.T-,. Mind te • But if (in the case that) I sfmtid "^^ s ''" <. 15 5 _ Si Brutus corner- 
 
 ;;l'„';<i"lo''iiv.'>" '1. yo" ;;■>■■ '"f 'V^^;^6^o.^. -i, »«" c«i„pir°e «.ub ac Att. T, .5, 
 
 vCtfut erit vicinius. it). i<am. !■«, «. y^'^^ » ' 
 
 ''oB. n. in place of a '^'■^^f^^^i^ ^XZ^'AS^^l^i^^^ 
 force .f a f„l ure-present and '-t "'''";, rfS a mSi iUmmmm. Cic. «... Fr. I, 1, 11.- 
 mnur), «rdi.,c.n l'». "'''" V',^ l™, "'", 'tm.' c" t Ib.-'vci'r. 4, 39. 
 
 ^ OB-: ' 'u .be ,i„,e of predicate. ^^^'^^ ^:^;;i:^;^!;:^i^^^^'^ 
 
 ^'o„'' '■ Sontetimes f.,t„re actio,,, arc ^'>n^l:t^':^^:^:^^^X^!^ 
 
356 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 EPISTOLARY TENSES. 
 
 357 
 
 1. TTnpccomitiasi £rratnitn/wf7in/i. plnsnnns Cato/w/f/^/t/^qnam omneplecrpsomnopqne 
 judicen. Cic. Qii.Fr.-2, lo, 4. — 2. (|uo(l vali'tiulini tu:e nmxiinecoiidflcct f'iyVc<i'i.v3, iiDixiino 
 obfemj)erun>i voluntSii iiu-ie. H). Farn. UJ, 1, 2.— ',i. Noii laninm ad id qimd jam habere 
 poles', f?i pnt'lio ricenfi*. irloria»^ (ui/'Ctrift. quantum wlemeris gi quid advcrsi evcniat. 
 Liv. 30, 30.— 4. Si jiidicareHtii< fine doit) malo* pos^e lioniineni occldi^, omnibus 
 facinorosis'* eandoni liceiitiain pirmi'/erifis*. Cic. Fiau'm. Tull. 3. — 5. Uptime autem 
 pocietas hominutn conjunctiOciue"' strva^itur'^^ ai. in quisque e7it conjunctis»8imus. ita 
 in cum benii^'nitatis pluriinuin confe/rf//?'^-. lb. OlT. 1. l»», .50.— <>. Id racillimc /rtcvV.f t^L 
 me omuilms rebus quas dicfs e*t fanes interesse>3 putCihl'i. li». (^u. Fr. \. 1. Irt — 
 7. E/it eiiim mecuu) xi lecum erit. lb. Fin. '>. 28. Sti. — 8. Cetera, (iuotiescuiu]ue roitlia, 
 vobis \).x\Mvkerunt. lb. Tusc. 3, 31, Si.— 9. Ihoc si et arjes^^vi senfiett, turn m^ non modo 
 consul, sed matjnus etiam consul. lb. Fam. 10. (». 3. — 10. Prol)abiIi.s>6 erif narratio'* si 
 ])ersnnis, si temporibus, si loeis ea qiue varrahiintur. consentient»'. H). Part. Or. 9, 
 32.— 11. Hoc. (turn eri/nir^ in ttrnl, ftif C(elesti vit:e simile. 11). Tusc. 1, 31.— 12. Num- 
 quam. dnf/i ego adin». hie te tdnrjet. Ter. Ad. 2. 1, 3.— 13. Plura scrihain si plus otii 
 habuero. Cic. Fam. 10, 28, 3. — 14. l)e eo dicerc ]X)t>-iinnts si ex quil)us partibus jus'» 
 coustet»» cor/norerimus-o, Auct. Her. 2. 13, 10 — 15. Nemo me vestrum. guum hinc 
 excesiiero'^, g^quPfur. Cic. Tus<c. 1.4.3,103.-10. Me ista sapientia, ftimv'afgue ad earn 
 con/ugef •(/•', in libertiltem rindiciVnt-^. lb. Or. 2. 33. 14.').- 17. Vhiowm locum^* omnem 
 co<;itatione sepseris-^, nihil le tfuf/ief. lb. Or. 2, 34, 147.— 18. Hoc si rarius,/?/^^ quam 
 tu exspect'ibl<, iden/causiequodnon temerc committere audeo litieras meas.'ib. Fam. 
 1, 7, 1.— 19. Te in eis ipsis rebus quas a te d'ulict rit . sniH-nVnt. lb. 1, \h. (iO.— 20. Hie, 
 qiHeciinqnt res inciderit. prudtntcr, onijltL"", et meniorilcr'-'' dicef. lb. 1, 1.5. (>4. — 
 21. (^iddqiiid liorum (malOnim) di>cu.<strifnu.s'^o, quo inajttM ac tcrribiiius trit, hoc ma- 
 jdrem i/uOh/i>/.-<-^ trratiani. Sen. Ittn. 1, 11. — 22. Old j)rior s/rinxerU'-'^ fernun, ejus 
 victoria er//'. Liv. 21, ;38.— 2;i Non erifui/,^ libetdfp^ /ini/sq nam \ia esse tu nos/t-rfm 
 certiOres. Cic. Faui. 10, 20, 2.— 24. Ue Carlha;^'ine v«'rGri non (ode dednam quam illam 
 excl«am32 esse coqnovero. II). Sen. 6, 18. — 2.5. l)e hac querela prlu-quam rfSftondeo, 
 pauca p?opn>ia>/t. lb. Fam. 11. 27, 1.-20. Antequani pro Murena dicere t/fc.7i/!wt»53, pro 
 me ipso pauca dieain. lb. Mur. 1. 
 
 YI. THE USE OF TENSES IN EPISTOLARY STYLE. 
 
 § 5H9. In epistolary style, the writer of the letter often uses tenses whicli 
 
 lie would use if narrafinr/ the eeenta V) the recHcer of the letter at the time of 
 
 readlncj it. Such tenses, whieii are called ' EPr8TOL.\iiY tenses,' are alwaj's 
 
 rendered by the corresponding tenses, ordinarily used in «rriV//?// the letter : 
 
 Hem te valde bene ^essis.-se rumor frat. Fx^pectahantur littenr tu;e de quibuei trdmua 
 jam cum Pouii)ejo /oc/7/i,* Tliere U a rumor that you met with <:reat success. We are 
 exi>ectiiig your letters, concerniuLj which J hare alreuly ^7>oA.v7i witli Pumpry. Cic. 
 Fan). 1, 8. 7. It the writer would state these facts orally at the time of reading the 
 letter, he would, even in English, use the same leases a.s in the above Latin tenience. 
 
 Hem. 77. Epistolary tenses are used only to designate actions which (</) 
 either transpire in the moment of writing, the letter being incomplete at 
 that moment ; or {b) which refer to the irJcdc letter, the time of its writing 
 being considered a moment, or a unit of time. 
 
 In regard to actions of the former kind, epistolary tenses can onl}^ be 
 
 > Come off wiihout bribery. — ' poii'<e =■ to h:fve power (it will be clear that Cato has 
 greater power).— ^ if you do (by doini:) what will be most conducive.— * i.e. by beini,' vic- 
 torious.— » belouiTs to tantum.— * nuilice.— ' to assassinate,— » all inclined to doinis- 
 chief. — " give permis8it)n. — >' connection.— " to preserve. — i"^ if on every person a 
 ;ri>ater liberality is bestowed according to the closer nature of his connections.— la to 
 )(> present.— " to do.— '* plausible — 1« narr.itive. — i' correspond to.— »» the law. — 
 J" to consist. — "" co(iPO^cere. to learn-, coqhotUse. to know. The panic difference in 
 meaning is between the future-present and future i)errect. — -' excedereex loro, toleavea 
 place.— 23 confiKjcre ad aliquein, to take one's refuge with somebody.— '^^ aliqu&jji in 
 lifjertdtem rindicdre, to restore one's Ireedom. — 24 subject. — 25 to embrace. — 26,.it.j,,j„tiy^ 
 — 27 ntemoHterdicere. to speak without notes. — '"* (^i.<C'/^*'?v, to abate.— '^^ grafiam inli'}^ 
 to be popular (the more popular it will be).— so ftrruj/i stringere, to draw' the sword. — 
 3» perijjhrasiic conjugation.- 3- excidere. todesiroy.— 3' to begin. 
 
 g 
 
 nscd if the clause 'o^/wm 7we/t «m7>c^^?7iMwhilc I was writing this) is ei- 
 er expressly added,'or may be understood (Obs^I). Henc^e «^^ch tense^ 
 must be either imperfects or pluperfects (R. GO, 6o ; ^ 586, Obs.O). 
 k'c Ons 1 4. 5.— Acti(ms referring to the letter as such must be always 
 nhiced in 'the perfect, since, when the contents of the letter are nar- 
 rated at the time of reading, the 7critinp of the letter must be consid- 
 ered a momentary, accomplished fact. See Obs. 2. 
 nn^ 1 The eni«tolarv tense of action» prkpent to the writer, is the imperfect if 
 
 *"' " !V''4';?:'-'\r'ftrun;I'°nar"i'ryam'"lpnfoi;;idebatur. qnnd rnasmo prrrMdip Bono- 
 „;:;,', ^"j;;(-Am.m", "■ l>. &■„„ , l. .-.lUdy ^.-tag ii-'ge* .,y .mall ■o.ces, because 
 
 which vou are pressed (lit<'iail} . .L>or \\as i, \mhi^ vuiuno k^ ^, ^ .. ^ 
 
 ^''!;^t^\^'vYl!!^^-^nuc publice littera. Romam mittero^ pardbam ; I am 
 no^;l pri;a;i«^aToffieial letter tc? be sent to Rome (literally : I wa. prepanng to 
 
 ''';;/nU;KrTJ"'l™N^'ch;d!us'^^^^^^ habebat.Sn quibus Lucnllum et 
 
 llc^^ e <iuut cont^ un^ Clodius is holding SKvex^hed mass-mee .ngs m 
 
 Pibulul Soes not trouble me pers.)nally ; he " will rather write' to me on every sub- 
 ^'r/S'lMrKurS-T ACCOUTRING TOR. 59. Ob.. 5 : Septimtim jarndiemCorcynE«.n.&a»mr; 
 
 clZ^ 2 Foi.fol.rv PKKFECTP with PRESENT force canuot. generally, occur since what 
 
 'Vuis is the third letter I write yon o-c^^X ^'^^^jVrG f- H^c 3 cA?ri anibulans ; I am 
 two letters to-day: this «s- ih" th>,dK Cic Att ih b i ii ,^ ^^^ habSbam, 
 
 dictating' this letter while walking. lb. 2, -«.; l;"/^-/; FJl^'J!'. Ajthou-h I have nothing 
 brevitatem secHfus fnim te masristro (bcmuning of the lettei) ' Aixmm^u x Prope- 
 
 To whVc, T isludh tryxo be brief «^.^-^^ "f j^i^^V-^^iJ^liTieiiJer K^^ 
 
 rantibus tabellariis aliCnis banc epistolam ^f/* • / J^^'f ^* ^^^^^^*^ '■'"^ J 
 
 carriers of others, who are in a harry. lb. ftt. n, H. J- . . pj.RFKCT3 
 
358 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 EPISTOLAKY TENSES. 
 
 359 
 
 ScriAcnd'nn ad tc ex'isfimilvi (nne of Ctesar's favorite ciirunilocution?) ; I write to you. 
 I'ies. in Cic. Att. 1(», 8 B, 1. — FacMTc non jMjtui qiiiii tihi se*ntentiam declariliein nieam ; I 
 Tnu,'if. tfll yoii my opinion. Cic. Fam. G. 18. 1.- llivc til)i etni audita esse arhitrtlbar, volui 
 tuini.:n notiOracsse ; Aliiiou^h I think that you have heard tliis, / wi^h it to bri^till Ix'tter 
 known to you. lb. 10, '28, 'i.— Qtiiiin inihi lonsciu? essi-iu quanti le facerein, non dubi- 
 tdri jyefetr quod prtendiiin esset ; / iinkeAfatinrjhj a-^k for what I mu-t ask you. lb. 13, 8,1. 
 
 {€) Sotnciiines (rarely) jurfecls are used instead of iuipertects, for instance 0) i" predi- 
 cates denotin<; inner actions (according.' to rule |§ 582. Obs. 1, i) : l)e Dionysio f^tim udmi- 
 rCUug • ltej,'urdinjj Dionysius I am astounded. Cir. Att. 9, la, i. (2) Actions wiiich siiould 
 be in the present accordini,' to R. 42, and hence in the epistolary imperfect according» to 
 Obs, 1, No./, are placed in the perfect if quaiifii-d by adhiic (\\\c action beinj» thereby 
 desiLToated as complete* at the time beinj?) : ISo^udhuc in ejl orjl iliifi/imu,'^ ut. etc. ; la/n 
 still on that coast so aa to. etc. Cic. Alt. 8, 11 B, 1. — (:i) Instead ol an imperfect with 
 future loictr, accordiiii; to Ous. 1, No. r/, souVetimes a perfect i.s used : Ei;<> ftu-itinui me 
 in Arcino fratris, ut duin aliquid certius atlerrGUir, occultiOre in loco essCmus ; I am in 
 the Arcan villa of my i)rotlu'r, and tihall .stay there to be concealed till something more 
 detinite will l)e reported. Cic. At'.. 10. 2, 1. 
 
 Tlu' imairinary narrator at the tinu; of tiie readini;: of the letter would deliver all these 
 facts in pkkfects, viewini; them as complete facts at the time of writing the letter, 
 which is here considered as a moment ot time, whereas in the tisc of the imperfect 
 (Obs. 1), when '■qnum h(ec scribUbain'' is supplieil, it is considered as a pi-riod of time 
 duriniif which the action was incomplete (§ 5Ts, K. 57, 58 ; K. GO)— Momentary acts traus- 
 })iriii;X duniii^ the writini; of the* letter, are i]^eiier;illy expressed hy ordhuiri/ /xrfcrfs, so 
 that the fact is stated with the addition of * (^uum /urc ficriptUsem.'' In Enirlish we 
 would use h(!re a mere present without such addition : Qin/m luvc .scripnastiyi a CuriOne 
 mihi ainttidtume.sf eiim ad me venire ; At this moment (while I am wriiini,') Curio sends 
 me word that he will come to me. Cic. Att. 10, 4, 3. See Ex. 8-13, 
 
 Obs. 3. Present actions which do not refer to the moment of writing or to the time of 
 the writiiii^ of the whole letter, but which refer, in general, to the speaker's time, 
 and which would be expressed by presents even by the imau'inary narrator of the letter 
 at the future readiii",', can neither be i^xpressed by epistolary perfects, nor by epistolary 
 imperfects, l)ut always remain in the j)resent tense : l)e linito valde tihi a.<s'e/i/}or (not 
 o.ssen/itbar). Cic. Fam. 11, 14, 2.— Itaque te non hortor solum sed etiam om ut totil mente 
 in rempublicam incuinl>,is. lb. 10, 5. 2. (Itmi<:ht be hortandum e.rh-fimari.hut lun /torfa- 
 tus sum.oT hortdbar). — Pompejinn sets (not scitboti) temporibus illis non muitum in seniltu 
 fuisse. lb. 1, 7, 3,— Even actions which are transpirini,' at the moment of writiiii.' cannot 
 be placed in an epistolary tense if at the future rt;adin^ of the letter they will, probal)lv, 
 still continue : Ma^^'iia e^t ho;ninum exspectatio de te (where erat would Involve a «jreat 
 impoliteness to the person addressed). Cic. Fam. 1, 7, 9. 
 
 Obs. 4. Ordinary imperfects (rarely perfects) are chanired into epistolary ri.rPERFECTS 
 if the action may be conceived as complete at or 6^/o/v the moment of writing, .<o that 
 either ' 7MM/n hcEC ticnbtbam' (or rarely ' antequam /uvc scnberem'' ) maybe supplied. 
 Such pluperfects are rendered l)y Eniclish present-perfects (rarely by preterits) : He», 
 quiim hiec scnbebam, erat in extremum add'ida di-crTnieii ; Thinirs have b^en bn»iqht to 
 extremities, (literally : Thin>:s, when Iwi-ote thi-. had been brought, etc.). Cic. Fam. 12, 
 fi, 2. See Ex. 14-17. Epistolary i)Iupcrfects corresponding to English i)reterit8 an; use(l 
 in the same instances where, with reference to the present time, j>erfects arc employed : 
 Ad tuas omnl* re scnpst^ ram pridic; ; I yesterday answered i\.\\ your letters. Cic. Att. !». 10. 1. 
 -- VT\d\c dederam meft manu Iongi0rem(epist6lam); I, yc^m'vdny., delivered A longer letter 
 by myself, lb. 10, 3rt, 1. 
 
 Obs. 5. The two future ten?es generally n^main unchanged. But sometiines the fut;ire- 
 present is changed into an epistolary iMPKurecT, .and the future-perfect into a pkufkct. 
 
 A. The ruTUUE-PUESENT is changed into the impkufkct of the verb, if the writer is 
 on the poitit of doing th<; act [Ons. 1, No (/<)1. Thus the imperfect prnfici>iCtfr(T is fre- 
 quently used if the writer is on the point of departing; but also the imperfects of other 
 verbs, if the connection distinctly shows that the action did not yet happen at tlie time 
 of the writing : Ilinc exercitum in hiberna dedMcendum (^uintofratri dafjam ; Syt-^o. me 
 LaodicCam redpir/)am ; Hence / icill qire to my brother t^nintus tlie army to take it to 
 winter-quarters; I myself ?ri// f7<? 6rtc^ to Laodicea. Att. 5, 20, 5. V.k. 18. ly. 
 
 B. Wherever the epistolary pekfkct is used in r. future sense it takes the place of a 
 ptiTUKE PEKPECT (wliich. liowcver, according to R. 74, Obs. 2, frequently has x\\v force 
 of an English future-present) : Si recte ambulaverit is qui banc epistolam tulif. in ipsnm 
 tuum diem incidit ; If he who ra/vi.^*' (shall have carried» this letter, walks as he should, lie 
 will just arnvt (will have arrived) at your birth-day. Cic. Att. 9, 4, 3. The imairinary 
 narrator would use here perfects, the same as are used in the letter.— Ipst; Capnam III. 
 "Son. 2i/vfeclus sum, (iinim has litleras dedi (i. g. pro/eclus ero -^ projlciscar, iuiim&i'mg 
 
 by tlie perfect 
 
 future-perfect, that he will arrive at the eame day). lb. Att. 7, 18, 1.-- 
 
 Such perfects (an<l imi)erfects) sometimes give rise to peculiar expressions w 
 
 "ntiot be imitated in English, as : Paucis diC4)Us_//,a^^6am ( == Imhitflrus eram) cer.os 
 homines quibus darem litteras. Jfaque eo me sei-vavi ; i shall have i" a few days reha ble 
 '•aniers to forward this letter. Henc^ if you receive this letter, it will be an evidence that 
 / .shall havfi lived a few days lonqer. Cic. Att. 5, 17, 1. Ex. 20. 21. . . ., !.• « 
 
 C If Vuch eui»*t<;iarv perfects or imperfects are used in clauses requiring the subjunc- 
 tive thev are either "in the in^ierfect, p.-rfecl. or pluperfect, according to the rules 
 of consecution : Etsi qnum tti has litteras leqere^^ putabam fore ntscirem jam quid 
 
 r.uXii ar/'/m emt ; Alihouirh I think that I shall know what i8 (wmU have been) done 
 at un lusiiun when' ^oxxvMl read this letter. Cic. Att. 9, 1,1. (For a Pim'l-;r sen- 
 tence expressed bv ordinary tenses see R. 74, Obs. 1. Cic. Att 9, 5.)- Pfi-"|«^" .^"^/rest 
 quo tibi iwc tempore epistola reddita sit : It makes a great difference at what time tli > 
 eicr will be (will have been) handed to you. Cic. Fam. 11 IG. 1.- Quod "^^ «^'f/^^f^ 
 eiro Ari)Tnum co-it5bam : I intend to start for my villa at Arpi as soon as / shail haie 
 
 ^"iTlf iriuture act is contemplated or resolved upon at the time of writing, tbeiM- 
 PKUFECT of the PEUiPiinASTic rrTUHK is frequently used with the force of an English 
 future • Dejotarus ad me LaodicCam renfilrns erat: Dejotarus will meet (is going to 
 C(mie to) me at Laodicea. Cic. Att. 5. 20, 9. Ex. 23. 24. 25. ■■ v ^ -t-.K^». 
 
 F Future action^ contemplated by the writer are frequently expressed by cogitabam 
 with an inlinilive. which is the re^rular form in re-ard to contemplated movements, wheii 
 the; intinitive (/>ro/(V-iwi or es,e) is nnderstc»od. the object of the motion ^'-r»"^ «f J'^Jf.'^f.^^ * y 
 j/Mvithan accusative, but the object of e^se l\v ff^^vlth the ablative Nonis MaJ'^ "^ 
 Vilinam coqitabam^: On the Nones of May I shall depart_ for Cilicia. <^;c. Att. 6. 2 6.- 
 Eo die coeniabam in Anaqnlno. postero autem in Tuscvlano ; To-day /^M// be in my 
 villa near Ana<Mii : to-morrow in that near Tusculum. lb. 12. 1. 1. See r^^.^. 
 
 imi T e use of epistolar», tenses is far less frequent than that of the ordinary 
 tensed eve, if t'pisrola?y tensermight be properly used ! Nihil habeo quod ad te scribam 
 (epistolarv tense: hafMbam). Cic. Att. 1, 19.- LafM>rafur vehementer ; incltnata res ed 
 (epistolary: lafxtrafxltur ; inclindta erat). lb. Fam. 1, 1. 
 
 1 Nos autem in Formiano^ morahamnr. Cic Att. 9, 1, 3.-2 PompCjns (rat ^\ma 
 mvnHmnJuvrZrmbam. lb. Fam. IG, 10, 2.-3. Eqnidem, quum h^cscribebam ahqxud 
 ^^m^aZ^rputrd^am. lb. G, 4. 1.-4. Atque ba>c mihi seri^^naveM ^^y^-'^^-^^f;^, 
 e<<e eumacnjus tu desperationem accusare^ scditus esses, lb. b, 1, 5.- 5. Fama /nm- 
 /i^-V^^te esse in Syria ;auctor erat nemo. lb. 12. 4. 2.-6. It AthCnas ad \ II. Kal. 
 Ouinci veneram 'exst^'ctdbayn ibi iam quartum diem Pomptinium. lb. Att. 5. lu, i.— 
 7 VdVJ^ rvilla adhuc eirressl non snmns ; Ua inagno^ et assiduos ,mhrl^ habebamis 
 b 13 IG^ 1 - 8 II ec dlcfdri sedens in rheda^ lb. 5. 17, 1.- 9. Quum Philogenes sta- 
 ndi ienavi^lt^'um es.e diceret, has ei litteras c^^i quibus ^^^^rescrips^^^ 
 acceperam a Bruti tabellario (beg inningof the letter). Ih «^- ^- •- 10- ^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^'f^ 
 tusconsulttim factum est quod ad Xemtsi. lb. 4, 2 5.-- 11 . Quiim T. P«"\P^"'"f « /^.«^ 
 j.roficiscerCtur. aliquid mihi scrlbend'Wi pnfari. lb. Fam. 5. ^; .^,;- \\ ^,,^ ' ^'f 6 
 d a te litteris petere quod mihi omnium eseet maxime necessanum. 1 !>•*•'["• ::«»•;*• 
 -l5. Ciesarem nunc d-'fen.lit Curio? t^iis hoe putaret pneter me? >« «"^; \' J.^^ «"J: 
 nitavi 11) 2 13 3 -14. Qme impendere putarem, .vrn/M^ram ad te^ et jam tuas litte- 
 ^iTexsiJ^d^^^^^^ II) Att. 8. 13. 2.- 1.-.. Capua» N on i s Febr. esse ro/?^flm quia con sues 
 j 'Jm'^^ b 7 l| V- Februariis forum' in.'^fitueram^ airere ^^odxi:e^.l- 
 
 5 2T 9 - 17. T iLTinta dies erant ipsi qnum has dabam litteras, per quos "")!«;; "^^0« 
 Vi/Vrrrm ih. 3. 21.- 18. Nihil babrbam q^'l^. ^^ribeumi neque en.m nov. qmdquam 
 audi, ram et ad tuas omnTs r'.sr7tp.<-ram pndie. lb 9. 10, 1.-19. A. D. V 1. ^«- ";'J-' 
 nun/ has dabanV iitteras ex Vomuvi^un proficLsc?bar. Delude coqitalmm sine ulia 
 n ra i -n i mm» ft cm. lb. 5. 2. 1- 20.\\d eum postridie mane r«rfe6«m\" qmim 
 K'(^;;,,^.'Vb:5?l(^2^21. Siillecuimandavi satisscUen^^^^^^^ 
 
 s;;;;!v;rt;";;:ina:i;;i^s;^-jf^:'ii;:i,;^^ 
 
 ^iv^.^t-^- 2^^.-s^ i^^;^ ^^^ ^;;ir ^^1^5.3 
 
 oj q__9<: h\ro tabellarios ad vos iiostero die eram mf^surux. lb. h. 3, 1. «• V"'"^' 
 
 ro^am TMlram'n uberalibusi^ coqitkam dare. lb. G, 1, 12.- 28. Beneventum cogitabam 
 . hodie. 11). 5, 3, 3. 
 
 ' 1 My villa near Formia^.-- 'that it was \.-^ali^njm ^/^■';^^''«/^'>«^'«,«f^';f,fj'J:^,«^'^f^f 
 somebodv with despair.— "i^^ (/em. . ..non. not a foot.- ^ carnaire.- to ai sw » '•- .Z^o- 
 r^rX^ t hold acourt-Mm-^^^ 
 
 ZL -^» to walk -- '» skilfully.- >2 t(, choose.- »3 the toqa virdis being called p/vm, 
 beSiuse it hadnol the ornameits of thcboys^ toga.- ^ the Liberalia, a Roman festival. 
 
 A 
 
360 
 
 USE OF THE I'ENSES. 
 
 Rem. 78. Tlie epistolary tenses are connected with peculiar expressions 
 
 regarding 1) the date of letters ; 2) the rendering of the adverbs to-day, 
 
 yesterday, and to-morrow. 
 
 Obs. 1. The«hit(' is never placed at the lioad, and rarely at the end of the letter. If placed 
 Rt the end, it i:* either the mere day with or witliout the name of tiie place, or the day in 
 connection with data (i. e., data est e/mtola, tlie letter was* delivered to the carrier), which 
 is otten abbreviated />., as : Data Non. Novembr., Naruiul. Cic. Fam. 5, 106.— D. IV. 
 Noil. Mart. lb. 7, 13.— More frequently the date is contained in the text of the letter: 
 A. 1). IV, Kai. Maj. iens in Pompejrmuin bene mane h:vc. scripsi. lb. Att.4, 9, 2.— Scito 
 Id. Maj. nos has dedisse. II). 5. 5, 1.— Most frequently the clause 'quo die lias» litteras 
 dedi ' is used, bein^' attached to the day of the caltrndar which, in this instance, is ren- 
 dered ' to diy '. Trebatiuin VI. Kal., quodie has littera-» (/e(/i.exspccttlbam ; I am expect- 
 iiiL,' Trebatiiis to-day. (^ic. Alt. 9, 17. 1.— Sometimes the date is expressed by implication, 
 and must be found liy calculation : I't AtliGiias a. d. VII. Kal. (^uinct. veneram, exspectfl- 
 bam ii)i jam quarluin diem Pomptinium. Cic. Att. 5. 10, 1.— This makes tlie date the 
 IV of the Kal. Rarely the date thus indicated in the text is expressed by an imperfect, 
 which is (mly the case in a clause, or if other epistolary imperfects are conuccted with 
 it: Iljecautt'in i<cnbiba)n\>v'\{\.\Q Nonas. Cic. Att. 9, 1, 1. 
 
 Obs. 2. Tlie adverbs to-day^ yesferdat/, io-morroiv may, even with epistolary tenses 
 be expressed in the usual way, which, strictly spe<ikin<^ is illoirical, since the imaginary 
 narrator would not usi; these adverbs : llodle tiias litteras ejrspedabainuft matutlnas ; I 
 expect to-day your mornin^^'-letter. Cic. Att. 12, M. So Att. 9, 11, 1 and often.— //i?/i 
 eiiim vesperi veneral ; For he m//i^ yesterday. lb. 12, 1«.— t'/y^A* 0»'it not its equivalents; 
 see the last sentence), always stands with the future.— But very frequently these word», 
 ill conm-ction with epistolary tenses, are expressed by a relen'iice to a given day or 
 other time. If relerriti*; to tlie date of the letter, to-day is expressed by (odie (eOdeni 
 die): Eq auiem die credo aliquid actum in seniltu. Cic. Att. 5, 5, 1. Most usually ' to- 
 day ' is expressed by the date with ' quuni fuvc ncribebam.'' . or ' quodie hnj* littera!* dedi '. 
 — Yesterday is expressed hy pridie with reference to the date : Venerat is in Cunijlnum 
 vesperi pridie^ id est Idibus. Cic. Att. 10, 4, 7.— I^idie apud me Crassipes fucrat. lb. 9, 
 11, :i Often it is expressed by the dav of the calendar : E.r<> me de Ciimauo movi a. d. 
 V. Kal. Maj. Uhe letter beini,' of the IV. Kal.^. lb. Att. 4. 9. 2. So lb. 5, :i. 1 and often. 
 To-morrow with epistolary tenses may be expressed hy j^o^^tero die or /)ostri die : I'ostero 
 die cor/itdbarn in Tuscuhlno. Cic. Att. 12, 1, 1.— Frequently it in expre.^^sed by mane: 
 Indc domiini CfpniTtum, ut sim /nofie pnesto MilOni. lb. Att. 4, ]2. — A peculiar coml)ina- 
 tion of 'to-morrow' with the particular time of writinj^ the letter is made by the cir- 
 cumlocution ' Postridie ejus diei ((ui erat tuin fiitflius quum hiec scrihebam' in Cic. Qu. 
 Fr. ;3, 2, 1 : Postridie ejus diei qui erat turn fmarus quum h:ec scribCham ante lucem. 
 erat apud CatOnem divinatio inter Memmium et Neronem///^«my To-morrow there will 
 6e a competition-trial for the public accusership betweeirMemmius and Nero in Caio's 
 chambers. I am writing this before daybreak (of the day before the trial). 
 
 Obs. 3. The epistolary tenses became obsolete about the time of the Emperor Nero. 
 Pliny in his letters always uses ordinary tenses. Together with the epistolary tenses, 
 gome other ancient formalitit's in the writing of letters secern to liave been abolished 
 about the same time. Here belongs the frequent introductory formula ' -Si rales t}fne est, 
 er/o va!eo ;'' If your health isgoixl, it is well ; I am well (abbr. : S. V. B. E. E. V.). Seneca 
 (Ep. XV) speaks of this as an obsolete form which had been yet in use in his youth. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 1. PiiESEXT TENSE (R. 42. 4o). — 1. Retiim to me that book, which I 
 have missed* for a long time. — 2. Your brother Marcus has been 
 living with us for three months. — 3. How long have you been living in 
 this state? — 4. This law-suit'' has already lasted two years^ — 5. Who* 
 accommodates^ to what nature exacts®, feels' neither poverty nor fear. — 
 6. VVlieresoever** I cast" [niy] eyes, I see all faces'" full of courage" and 
 
 * Desiderare. — 2 Translate : In this trial (judicium) we have been engaj»ed (vermri) 
 already, etc.— ' bieiinium. — * is Qui. — ' se compomre ad.— • exigcre.— ' Translate! : is 
 not only out oi {extra) the sense or poverty, but out of fear. — ^ p. 218, (i). — ' circumferre. 
 — '<' all faces — omnia.— '* animi. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 861 
 
 energy'.— 7. When (ifhi) we see that this plan'' [will] not avaiP, we 
 summon* the authors of the damage* to the court. 
 
 1 1 ExNGLISII PUESENT-PEIIFECTS and LaTIN IDIOMATIC PERFECTS (§ 569, 
 
 R 40).— 1. 1 shall never deny that [there] are some contrivances» in the 
 possession' of those who have made these studies a special ty\ — 2. We 
 have said enough" on the subject.— 3. We have come'" now to the pas- 
 ^a"-e" where we stopped" the other day.— 4. Our people''' have readily 
 adopted'nhis habit.— 5. The law"* is a creature" of society'".— C. Cras- 
 sus has learned all he could.— 7. All those with whom I spent my youth' , 
 are no more — 8. Many have often Iried^" to become*^' suddenly^ rich, 
 but" few have [ever] succeeded.— 9. Those who take money for their 
 vote»? and those who buy them, are liable to legal punishment^*. 
 
 III! Impeufects of st.\te (R. 50).— When the Roman fleet approached, 
 the ships of the Carthairinians were anchored*-'» at^» the island.— 2. Anto- 
 nius increased the garrison,which was in the town,by three cohorts.— 
 3 At that time more than two legions were hiding" in the forests; but 
 the army'* arrived at*" the wall of the town before the consul knew^" that 
 the enemy was present''.— 4. Caesar called out" the two legions which 
 then were in winter-quarters^^ at" Aquil5ja.— 5. When Caesar came'^ to 
 Germanv the irreatest part of that country was covered'" with lorests.— 
 Tlie winter-quarters" of all these legions lay'* within a circle of one 
 hundred miles — 7. The road which led to Acerrae was intersected'" by 
 a river which was passable*" at several places by a ford*'.— 8. The bounda- 
 ries of the Helvetians extended at that time more than two hundred and 
 fortv miles in len-'-th.— 9. There I saw*^ Buchanan, the same (/«) who 
 later*' was Presidoiit** of the United Slates*^- 10. The whole army (ag- 
 men) stopped*' here for several days ; for the snows of Mount Cevenna 
 
 hindered the march. ^ » n 4i 
 
 IV Imperfects of progkessive action (R. 51-;)d). — 1. All inese 
 thin"-s compelled the king to call to his aid*' the forces which were protect- 
 in"- the boundaries of ^Etolia.— 2, At tliat time the castle of Tarentum*'' was 
 hdd by the forces of Hannibal.— 3. When Caesar came to Brittany, its in- 
 terior*" was inhabited^" bv those who stated^' that they were born on the isl- 
 and But the sea-coasl^-^ was held by those who were crossing over and 
 returning for the sake of plunder''.— 4. Cassivellaunus sent messengers to 
 the four^iiigs wlio ruled" over those regions.— 5. While at the right 
 winrr" the ti^dit was going on'" (see R. CO, Obs. 3), the second and third 
 legions were defending"'' themselves with great bravery agai nst the attacks 
 
 "^Robur^^al^tlor^^^^lioUmUT^ fo the court. \i\ judi- 
 
 cial. Voiir.' - ^injuria.- « ars.- ^ in the jmsession, by the adj. proprtus.- « Render : 
 Wl ;, ban. plaeed an their study in knowing (cor/«^.co-e)tl.ese things.-- « Render : enough 
 much — »0 nervenire — 1» locus.— ^^ subsistere.— ^^ Render: lie.— lubentei.— 
 "' sciscere - '« usUtia.- >^ procreSre.- »« Render : The society o men has created 
 ,he law !^ 1» whom I used as a youn- man.- ^» velle.- -' Render : to acquire (cowi^a- 
 r&^iS^^^^^ of en riches.--^'^ brevi.- -^ Render : which however (taimn) have fallen to 
 nJe lofol few />a "■i.o^.;i«r/.;v).- - Render : Those who after receiving money have ca^ 
 (feire) [their] votes, and who gave the money, are held by tj« P^"'^^' ^^^^L^^.f. fJ^'Z 
 «^ to be anchored, stare.- =« ad.- ^^ latere - 2« «snien.- -« sub.- =» subju^ 
 31 adesse— ^'^ arcessere.— 33 hiemSre.— 3* ad.— ^" indicative.— opcrtue.-- j" bi- 
 berna pi t-38 Render: were contained (co/j/imTe) by 10.000 Pace«-- -'•' prohibgre.- 
 
 " to bV passable, transiri.- * ^ vadum.- ^^ convenlre ^^^^^ri^] P^fe'j!ii7sistere -^ 
 President vrceesse.— *^ the United States, cicitatts tmnims Aviencani.- «subsistere.— 
 inw the 'aCSct dative.- <^ by an adjective.- - pars '^^1^^''^'^; ]^;;^Z 
 '1 dicere.- f»'^ pars maritima.- " pneda.- ^* prjeessc.- " cornu.- by puynare.- 
 "'' to defend one's self against attacks, impeturn sustmere. 
 
362 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 363 
 
 of the encn.y.- G. The. army ^ool^ ^V-^^}^^^^ "^^"^Zl 
 for there the savapV were said to be huUkn.— /• v\ n> ,11 i c n 
 
 tw lUlcost him hislife^ did he enter» the ^ \» \^- ^" .^.),.*^^^lf;^^^ 
 
 11 Epaminondas was already on the point ol dying, when he was in 
 formed- that the Spartans had been ^^efeated 
 
 V. IMPEKFECTS OF REPEATED ACTION (^^; "^fijY ^^-i .^^VnU'S the ri-ht 
 
 all states of the South^ -l-^f-^hbl^a^^^ mn e w.^^ 
 
 eve» of the same consuls arms were openly caiiiLa "'K' ".^ " V.'i. ,,,„ 
 grtor, an..] the steps" of .he ->"^^ ^"^^:^;^ ^^'l^^,^"^ , mur 
 
 with msuiis , ni.iKiii-, u.-^c f» ppnsured bv several 
 
 othors— 3 When Att cus was doing this, he was ctnsuieu uy^ 
 
 ■ : — : ; s i..,-,. U..<1< n-niTtiieji (i/cloidit, (/UOK liil</0 LoVdleC- 
 
 S,e.-» rc-mler : How .mc:U wen; he re-^i-Cf <«^;, ; _ xV'l^intinGro.- »^ .ulmnlten;.- 
 
 i«ab.stract(Uuive.-»Mobe har pu^>c , Mw '^ ,j j ciritates dleridrts, 
 
 tive) - »- civiiates ultorlOres. (Tbe Ma-os of the ^;« \» ]; ^"''^ ,,,^. .,n;,io-y dI' Oci/Z^a 
 
 Ma.:;,rH line bcin,- "»<lT<7;»^V"« !»»%*l'7^;f_!''i\\\Tc ?- "^^^^ ^n»' ^tu.li-».- 
 
 or Ilispama citerwr aud ulterioi .)— '"^y- ,5 "^ _1 a, oxDloritre,— " qua latione. 
 
 •.3 consuliarc- "-* to .e,u\ "''••'•"•^.f 'J^j/t^u^Tcr )^>rm^^^^ _ 3o' ^ war commence., helli 
 - a« undc- '^- subjunctive i"M;errect of b , crb jm i>er _ ^^ „.„,„, f,„i« «^ concl- 
 
 initi'imfit.- =«» ha\>Crn,-- 3^ contio - 3= ,u "? J%»;\7y;'; ,;,^^,._ u« anlCre.- '^ ^nmina 
 li;,Uulis.-35 <7rm^ ercitement P'^^\f^'\^^^..^^^^^^^ nispeclin-(i"xy>.c- 
 
 l,ellandi cnpiditas -^^^ by in^e.- '7t<f'yl\'r • L^^ J :, ' .^^^^ 42 ,,.<.- <^ ciedei.- ** dirrptio. 
 /u..).- ^0 ^o '/'^''^•^^/^«/^•«■•il'^'-"*-^'];:'''' 7^^^^ 4 "tn We- ^» to U under couhol. tcncri.- 
 _45„;,lam — •"» comportare.- "^ pradi s - toil. n.. 5'i t,„-widCre — " pote^tas.- 
 00 neri.- <»' /o ,^/0«^ /W/' (o death lap.datione. f« - ."^^:- ...f/;. ' ..rUcat.-..-- " tod<mn- 
 54 Tl i; and the following paniciples are to ',>;' f^''^"^';;^* '\VV> »Vo^^^^^ " to 
 
 nofr with insultx. domii.ari et in.ultare.- ^" to viako^ „Timi mu e C-re - «*' oi.tiiuStcP.- 
 vk^l^^ intimidation to ^om^^d',. joxx^Z^^^^^^ little (p^rr/.m).- 
 
 5« Render : That (ry,/o</) he seemed ^^'''i^' i'^' ', , "J^'^\' ''t, a-r/(>r anythi„<j\ (ali)quid 
 
 «8 ad versus.— *^ male rem «jerere. 
 
 C Bibulus was his' enemy, who accused not only him but the whole 
 nobility.— 2. Meanwhile the common people, which, desirous for a change 
 of government^, were at first' in favor* of a war, changed* their minds, 
 randl execrated" the plans of Catiline, [and] raised' Cicero to the sky.— 
 3 \niiochus invited' the prcetor Verres to dinner ; he displayed" all his 
 tiiin.'-s'" a great deal of silver, and not a few goblets" of ^'^ gold. Verres 
 took"^=' every" vase'* in his hands, [and] praised, [and] admired [them] 
 The king was happy'' that his banquet" gave pleasure"* to a praetor of 
 the Koman people. AVhen Verres had come home, he thought of 
 nothin<^ else but" how he might"" rob'-^'and plunder^- the king. He asked^ 
 for thole vases, saying"* that he wished-* to show them to his artists^". 
 Tiie vases were sent. ^The king, at first, feared nothing, suspected noth- 
 in'^ One day passed", [and] the nexi'^«, [and] more; they were not re- 
 tuVned'^. Then the king sent [a messen.sjei], that^» he might return^ 
 them if he would pleasc'^^ Verres told" [the messenger] to call again . 
 It seemed strange^'^ to the king. He sent ugain^'^. Thev were not re- 
 turned. In one word", Verres ordered the king to leave'' forthwith the 
 province bef«)re night. 
 VII. Imperfects (or perfects) determined by a point of time 
 
 (ct 577) 1 Bv this time the king was already on his way to the theatre 
 
 (rf war^" — 2. From here the king started'" for Amphipolis, and arrived 
 at llie town in five days". But at that very time the consul crossed the 
 fnmtier with all [his] forces.— 3. At the same time when {qm) this intelli- 
 «rence came*- to mv brother, the house which he owned*' at Puteoli was 
 Tlestroved** bv fire*^— 4. In the same night when Herostratus burned 
 down*« the temple of Diana at Ephesus*% Alexander the Great was born. 
 
 — 5 When Themistocles at a banquet*' refused to play on the lyre , his 
 education wasquestioned^».- G. The king, when hemet^' the consul, was 
 Mttended"'' bv his two s(ms, the one of whom was three years older than 
 the other^' — 7. Jackson^*, called the Stone-walP% was hil^*^ by a bullet 
 in the battle at Chancellorsville^', [and thus] paid the penalty to his coun- 
 trv no-tiinst whicli he was arrayed in arms^».— 8. Armed [bands] ^lestroyed 
 thViail, which was being repaired" by order^^ of the Common Council . 
 
 — y At that place, Servilius, the same {is) who was, the^ other day, in 
 your house"*, was attacked"^ [and] killed by [a band of] assassins .— 
 
 I To him.- ^ rerum novfirt.m cupidu.^.- 3 primo.- * favGre,- « by ablat ves al),Bolute 
 - « ex"ecrari - ^ tollere.- » vocaic- » exponerc- 1« copiae.- 11 pocnlum.- § 443, 
 No 2 - n .u mere - '* unu.qnisque.- '^ va.um.- i» gaudSre.- ^^ .co"vivium.- ^ i- 
 cu ;.lum ac^ratum es.e.- »« ni.iV =» by the ^subjunctive o ^he mam verb - « spoh- 
 a,e-2'i expiiare.- -3 ro-are aliquid.— -* finite verb («^O-- '* '^«lle.- artiicx. 
 
 I ." ,wn.J-t e Fn/zW//^--*" in eunlU -*" Render : refused {recnmre) the lyre (lyra). 
 
 hit actus), paid {penoicere).- " «l-m^-- '^^^''"*^ l'*),^,^;" r^ "S decurtone"- 
 accH-i ) — «" demollri.— «^ reticere.— «- ex consilio.— «3 tomimn touncu, uccunont-b. 
 «* hy'ajnid — «* to attack and kill, opprimere.— «« insidiStor. 
 
364 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 ENGLISH SENTENCES. 
 
 365 
 
 10 ^^^1r bccan^^e almost all the Gauls were under (//0 arms, thoii^litMliat 
 Avas much facilitated by a storm Avhich kept the patiols ot the cucmy 
 
 veyd^e t tVom ours-.- 5. In my boyhood \!:l^'';^^^\ ^^"^^.^ ^ 
 ,,„ L.i» — n \t Paris" I staved about two years. I licre I hnished llie 
 r" d t- o Laplace's works^ which- study occitpied- me ^ 'U elongei 
 Ui I fexpecto(b because my mind was distracted" by cares ot the m s 
 vnr Ml ki^iu^^^^^^^ 7 From tliat day to tlie be-inning ot the war tlio 
 H.l - ot- CO mVletiu.; the army was carried ou with the .greatest euer.^ 
 1 Sfts wcM-e ade- in all coulity-towtis^^ and mass-meeti.u.'s were he d 
 Dialts wcic " ' \ ; . ^^53 _ J seinio observed^* this habit to the last-'» 
 d^^rin^s'lif^ o g^^ to (/.oX (Capitol, where he closed himself 
 
 itt-in Jupiter's tfmple.- 9. From that tiuie up to Socrates, the Greek 
 il()SHu is Vkvo tcd^» their study priucipally""^ to the observation of na- 
 1 ! el'^ Foi th^ vears the State was without laws and was con- 
 r led- bvar ed bands" of ruffians-.- U. The second aud third le- 
 gi^ms mall^alned the combat^^ith the greatest ^^--''V^ ^the^o^-r s 
 ^ ♦«• 1 ,r r ou;^^nn« p'lrrijMl heb)*^^ to our rsoldicrs m clistiesb . — i»/. m 
 
 my wont, C()i.>^uCvi.--^ Ken Ut . A tlou.,a ''^ ^^ L V'' '"'J „ jvinen.- »» cxcedcro ali(ino 
 
 •« ."miiiittoiv.- " aiixilium fcrr.'.- •• l>y ihc i.ailicii.te pre», of hiioiare. tuuit. 
 70 vLTfilii.— " by ordiUiil?.— '' couttticre. 
 
 the end of l.is misery' was near at hand'.- 13. When the ^;"? -••rived 
 not attend to his h^^v-pn,ct.ce^- lo On the Uu.l ot Jtu^^ 
 
 Ihc weapons" of all bad*^ citizens. AVhpn Cras- 
 
 -^;h:lsl^o?^;ir^?2^ HiJ^S^ {-^ 
 
 C. While son>e were ^■i^l»^,^:;^'^'"^,""*^"^ '„;;'" i o co .fusiou"^- 
 •JK o. 1 m-l» Je» enlere,!- into a ions ^"'r!"T""oV^u"T^P^^^- 
 nlh- snlro '.n.led» l.y H.e "V'l'''>'\>:;;,,''';:\^;'';4- ^;,„'ne 'u sn^ "«- 
 
 in.- Appins's interests '" > '« l^"™ '^^nser- 9 While I have beea 
 came the lather-m-law ".' '''^'^''''\,,5TY,V.,ye according to the ens- 
 [r i;;ir uJ^d^ ^irl^i P^^i>l-t^;na\ave ^ afinostaU thy 
 
 ti^e=^:,;j- t?^f if? \ ^ri™^.^^^i,^";a^a^i,s: ^h!;! 
 
 eonld no llon.^'er] l.mder it.- 2 As 1 ma; .as '-}^'J'^^-'^ ,,, .^^d kuowl- 
 
 Pon.poninsahont htnf ,ben,^ .'' ' ,'^'^'^^';^^ ^ S^^^ ,vas at the head" 
 cd"e*" ol the voiin.tc man.— J- As loni, as r.|K.i. q ^pg _ 4. As 
 
 .,r-the repuhlic, Thel.es was '"« /".''^"•'J.gfJ.t Uself I'y the Wdes of the 
 
 (/,,v) to ,ne.- ^0 advers-lri.- P^* [,*^i", J « « ),«r, ari^y»/;^^^r one's cord rd. ur em 
 
 tnrbAiv-3* agerf.— ^^ tie iiidii>tna.— •• " .7'" v;,,..,., ornarc— 4° omuibn> rebUK— 
 
 ri<7/<y [/iri«(7 .— "•• coiivenTrc— " *^f ''"4« ' "„ , ^ai J atnchanned. captus sum.— **: im 
 !i;!;;»i%-o-cX^--"'^P-^^^^ ^.tT>««<.»< ^Va^.. caput.- " munu.0.- 
 »3 doctor. 
 
366 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 367 
 
 I felt that I made any profrress'. — 7. "VVc resisted these unwise" plans 
 as long as we could. — 8. TJie general retained that legion [only] so long 
 as he thought its presence' was necessary. — 9. I supported* him as 
 long as he was living in my house*. — 10. The Romans excelled' all 
 other nations in the arts of war' as long as they did their own fighting**. 
 
 — 11. Britanny fh^urished as long as the Romans governed that island" ; 
 but after'" the Roman rule" had ceased'-, all traces" of humanity rap- 
 idly'* vanished'*. — 13. CanulPjus kept his temper'" in discussing" so long 
 as those that debated'* with him would submit'" to his opinion.s. — 13. It 
 was already day-break*" when the first troops {ngmcn) of the enemy came 
 in sighf^'. — Already noon was approaching'-^ when the messenger re- 
 turned to the camp. 
 
 IX. DksiGNATION of time TX rUEDTCATES OF REPEATED ACTION (R. 
 C4). — 1. I do not wond(.'r that this happened, for I heard similar things 
 from thy father. — 2. I heard that this orator often spoke to a very slim 
 audience*^. — 3. On these subjects'''* I liave often had long conversations'''^ 
 with hiuA, but could never iniiuce'*" \\\n\ to-' adopt our views. — 4. Atiuius 
 often informed** the consul of these irregidaritles"" of the soldiers. — 
 5. I have alwa3's liked^" scholarship and scholars". — 0. Themistocles, 
 when he was a young man'*'^, was much engaged" in judicial business^* ; 
 he often attended^* popular meetings, and no important^" affair was done" 
 without him. — 7. In those sad days I was often compelled to pawn my 
 jjroperty'"' ; often I borrowed^" money at enormous interest*". — 8. That na- 
 tion always came with arms to their public meetings. — 9. In those days 
 C. Marins always appeared^' on the streets in the garments of a suppli- 
 ant*^ — 10. jVIeanwhile Indutiomarus hovered*' almost daily with all his 
 cavalry about Labienus's camp, partly to** reconnoitre*" the locality, 
 partly for the sake of creating alarm*"; all the horsemen almost always 
 [plerumrpie) threw*' darts'" over*" the rampart. — 11. Meanwhile the hope 
 for reinforcements daily increased^", and LabiCnus openly said that he 
 would break*' camp earl}' at day-break on the next morning". 
 
 X. Imperfect of uniteo action (R. G")). — 1. Ca'sar built*' the bridge 
 over'^* the Riiine in the following*^ manner : lie combinecP*^ for each 
 yoke*' two eighteen-inch*" i)osts^", [being] two feet apart"" [from each 
 other], and of a length adapted"' to the depth"'' of the river. These he 
 
 1 To make progre><s, proficere. — ^ impraiiens. — 3 i)y a clause with iit {ndej^se).— 
 «adjnvjlre.— ^ hyapud.— « prn^^lilre.— ' i)j' belliois.— « Umder : At* loni: as they f(ni«,'ht 
 themselves for themt*elv('i*. — " Uender : Ilehl tiie empire of that island. — '<> ablaii\*e abso- 
 hite.-- ii imperium.— »2 Render : had been upset (tolUre).— ^^ vestii^ium.— »< ccler.— 
 i-» evanescere. — *« i»e retinGre. — *' Render: in sayins;. — '"* disi)nt;lre.-- »» Render : con- 
 ceded what he said (qiue diceret). — -" prima lux. — '^^ to come in sighf, cemi. — '•''-' api)e- 
 tere. — '^'■' Render : When very few {perpavci) were pres^ent {xiibj.).— '^* res.— 26 to have 
 lonfjconverf<afio/is, miiltum eolloqui.— •»" addnct-re. - '-" Render : T/uif (lit) he accedfd (acce- 
 dere) to our vit-ws (senlentia). — ^h cominonefa'cre. — -^ licenfia (.-i/if/). — ^*» / tiAe 
 KOffiefhir)'/, aliquid milii plaeet.— 3i virdoctiis — 32 in,Minte a-tfite.— ^3 (q fjf enf/arjf-d in 
 fiotnetliin'j, ver>{iri in aliqiia re. — '^* Judicial huKinen», ']\\{\\v\w.— '^^ \t\oi\\rv \\\ contiOiie.s 
 populi. — 3« niajor. — 37 <,'i.n*re,— 3» Render : /, compidled ijy nocessi'ij, jKuvned. u>ppi','- 
 Wiiv^vUmy proi>ertij (Tii^ familiiiri.^).— 3» mutuflri.— *" in<:^cnii cum ver.-flr:!.— ••• toa/iixdi' 
 on tilt street», in pnbiicum j)ri>dlre. — *2 the (jannents of a xnpidianf. vestis ^-ordida.— *3 va- 
 ^ari.— ** ut.— ♦•» Render : to ascertain (co::n^^eere) the nie (situs) of ttie cam/).— <« to 
 create alar7n, territilre. — *^ conjicere.— *« telnm. — <» intra. — ^o juiiJGri. — *» movere. — 
 ^■^ postero die.— ^3 facere. — '*•♦ in.— '^ ad unnc inodum.— '* inter t^e jnnirere.— ^' 'for 
 each yoke ' must not he separately rendered, but is to be expressed by nsinirdistiit)utives 
 lor tlie cardnial numbers. — ^s fiL'squipedaiis.— si» tignum.— ^" inlervallo, witha genitive. 
 
 — •' Render: bcinj; measured (dimensus) accordinii to (fid).— *'•* altiiiido. 
 
 drove' bv machinery- slanting' into [the bottom of] the river, and 
 nliced opposite to them two posts* joined^ in tlie same manner, at a dis- 
 
 ance" of forty feet from the former'. Beams" two feet thick", correspond- 
 in- to the interstices between each pair of posts'", were fjistened" on top 
 of^hem'^ All these [beams] were connected" by timber laid length- 
 wise over them'*, and covered over'^ with long rails'" and fascines".— 
 2 Pompey,t.. prevent Ctesar's soldiers from entering the town by force 
 durin- he very embarkation of his army, ordered the fol owing fortifica- 
 tio s to be made'^ : The gates were barricaded'", and the streets*" and 
 souares" walled up"; the mads leading^' to the city were intersected by 
 'trenches"; the roads and approaches'^^ which led'*- to the harbor outside 
 
 h(. city, were closed-' by driving- [into them] immense logs- sharpened 
 ... iiie toi)^" — 3. At first our soldiers advanced {mcedere) cautiously and 
 wi is olv steps". But when several of them tell-, [being] struck" by 
 
 the darts of those who defended the breastwork^*, they moyed"^ at double 
 lick (step)'" acj:unst the fortifications. There they cut ' the breastwoi-k 
 h [ heir hatchets- at many spots'" at the same tune*" and the defend 
 
 MS w hen they saw that a way was already opening*', fell back*^ on the 
 
 upper*' part of the town within the wall, while** our columns** were 
 
 marching*" thnmgh the breaches*'. it i« rPnorted*Mhat 
 
 XI Imperfect of contingent action (R. GG).— 1. lUs reported tnai 
 b/thc ancient Romans, according*" to a law of king ISuma, wars were 
 eel- red*" with the followimr ceremonies*': After^' satistaction 1^ ad been 
 en landed*' with<,ut success"*, the king consulted- the senate. When 
 lis [member] who by the king was asked for his opinion^%declared* 
 at war shouUP be proclaime<l, and the majority- ot the [members] 
 ese - voted in the same way"^ the war was [thereby] agreed up()n"\ 
 T len a priest who was called 'fetialis' would carry a lance with an iron 
 point"' to the boundaries"* of that people from whom satistaction was de- 
 led There he would declare war by a solemn lormula When he 
 h!;;rsaid these words, he would throw"" the l^»^ce into their em^^^^^^^^ 
 •> Whenever reckless"** and audacious men were at" the helm ot the 
 r;,>veMn.neut'" the worst" and m.)st lamentable'^ shipwrecks- were made. 
 !l 3 Whenever {si) anyone eith er in the Senate or in'* [addressmg] the peo- 
 
 1 1? .,^.r. Wh.n hf had driven (defi<?ere), he placed (statuere).- « machinatiOneP.— 
 3 ^^"^ ll'iJrXL 4 Kcm eJ //. /"ac^(/ /'^0 opprMte ones (contrarius).-- » jungere.- 
 3 prone ac fastigilte.— ^V'»''* r • f^«^ /«"^ " ^ J^dalis.— i» corresfwuding .... posts. 
 
 cuH _ *^> platea.- a^in.editicare.- " which led {levre).- " ^^^ 
 '"% fortdrau-n (pneciucere) - " aditus ~ ;« ducere.- " p.^= 
 2'^ UHhc^.-^^ sharpened at /he top l)nVHem» ?.- -^' '^a']^.» f,^!i, J 
 
 praisepTre. 
 radu — =*'^ cadere.— ^3 ictus. 
 
 vote in the 
 tire (m the 
 tere.— «^ 1 
 gubcrnacula 0)1 
 
 I 
 
368 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 pie uttered^ a syllable'' referring' to liberty, the rods* and the axe* 
 were immediately made ready' lor' his own punishment and as a warn- 
 ing'' for (Ihe) others. — 4. Tlie enemy attacked" now^" the tirst column, 
 now tlie last", according as" the locality would give an opportunity. — 
 5. Whenever by chance'-* any one of those who had thrown" themselves 
 into the river reached'^ the other shore by swimming, he was immedi- 
 ately seized" by the multitude, and killed with tortures. — G. Daily the 
 enemy endeavored to lead their troops against our ranks. But (n/) as 
 soon as \mnulac) they commenced their advance", a formidable''^ hail- 
 storm"* would throw"^" their ranks into disorder. As soon as {ubi) they 
 liad returned'-* to camp, a marvelous^"^ serenity and tranquillity''^ [of the 
 weather] would ensue"*. — 7. Whatever ship was bound"^ to ^lacedon 
 was always either sunk-° or plundered"' by the prefect. — 8. If any one 
 of the lieutenants-" proposed'-" a ditierent^" view^\ the general would not 
 allow him even an opi)ortunity to prove or explain it^'^ — 9. Wherever" 
 [any] gaj^s^* appeared'^ in the line'^ of the enemy, the Romans immediately 
 Avould introduce" their columns^^— 10. Wherever^" the elephants were 
 placed'" during {in) tin; march, they made'' (that part of) the army {(if/me?i) 
 safe from attacks*\ the enemy being afraid" to ai^proach"* [them].— 
 11. Whenever any one'^ was i)ointed out by the chier", he was hurried 
 away" for execution*'.— 12. The better (;>/?/a) a man'" had deserved of'° 
 the country, tlie^' less was his chance^'^ of receiving [any] honor or re- 
 ^vard. — 13. Whomsoever the prtetor designated by [a hint of his] eyes, 
 the lictor seized''-* [him] and threw^* [liim] into l>rison=^— 14. Wherever^' 
 Decius made the attack-'', they trendjkHp" as if" struck"" by supernatu- 
 ral power*".— 15. However often the enemy endeavored to break tiirough^'^ 
 the lines, they always were rejudsed''^ with great slaughter"*. — 10. I made 
 use of his advice as often as either necessity required'^^ or as some oppor- 
 tunity presented itself" to me.— 17. Our countrymen" devoted"" them- 
 selves with so much greater zeal to natural science"", as high'" rewards 
 were held out" to those who had been most snceessrur- in the one or 
 other of its branches.— 18. The nearer I approached" the solution of that 
 problem'*, the farther it seemed to me that I was removing'^ from the 
 
 point'*. ___. 
 
 1 Mittfic— 2 vox.— 3 meiiior.— * viiiriL'.— & pccilri.-J.— " (o make something nady, 
 exiH'dlrc aiiqnid.— ' in.— "^ as a waminq, in nietiim {aHh oe/tifire).— » a;:gredi.— 
 10 mo(lo....m<Hl().— " novissinius.— ''^ utcunciue.— i^ hi quando.— ^ projicerc— '^ /0 
 reach (he shore by swimming. Konder : (o touch (attin<,a're) land, hnring ffetu carried (al- 
 Ifitiis) to (he other shore bj/ shimming (nari;).— >« excipcro.— »^ by progredi.— ^"^ inj^en!?, 
 
 — 1» cum «,nandiiio U-mpcsta-.— •-» to throiv info disorder, dis^turbilrc.— "■'» ee rtfcipere. 
 
 — '^'•^ mimJ!— ■■^3 cum s-civniUlte traiiquillita:*.— '-^ orlri.- '^'^ fo bt: bound for a jilace, lo- 
 cum i)etere.— 2« supprimoro. — --^^ spolijlrt'.— -''loLrJltUK.— 2« proponerc— ^"ccminirius.— 
 31 opinio.— ^*'* Rendtr : ivould not concede even a ptewe of proving or explaining idis.^crcrc;. 
 
 — 33 quacunque (referriiiL,' to the battle tiold ; uf/icu/Kjue would be 'everywhere').— 3* a 
 gap, iiitervalfum — «^ (oajfj^ar^din-l.— 3« acie.».— 3t insinuare.— 3« ordo.— 3» quacunque 
 'm vbicunque^ and whv r— ^" licnder ! 's(eppedon' (incedere).— <» pnebGre.— '•••i.Kt//^'^- 
 lar (impcuis having no plural).— *^ Keuder : Because (0 the em my iras jnir.— *^ adire. 
 
 — 45 „t qui-^quf.— ■»« dux. - *'' (0 hurry away, rapere.— *" nex.— ** Hy ut quisque.— 
 fi" (0 deserve of (he couidry. de repuhlicil nii-ntuni esf«e.— ^i ita. — *'■' Render : Th>; leis 
 icas hi.< name presented (edi-re> yw/' (ad) rtctiving (h-rvf) an honor, vtv.— " npprehen- 
 Jere — ^* coiijicere.— ^^ vincula. — ^" Quocunque? (luacuncjue '; or ubicunque?-- »' to 
 make an attack (on horseback), invefii.- «*" pavere.— s'-' baud e'ecu-- qnani.— «" iclus.-- 
 «1 supernatvral powrr, divlnum quoddam nuinen.— «'- porrumpere.— «» repellerc— «* llen- 
 der : By (/real slaughter (ca'des) of their [men].— «« co<,'erc.— •« pc priebCre.-- " civis.— 
 «" s(! dedere.— «» by inrexth/dre nattlram.— '<» ami)lus (comparative).— ■• proponere.— 
 ■"» lU'iuler: wlio had mast (maximo) progressed {prqflcere, in tiie Huhjunctive) in each 
 branch (discipllna)— " accederc ad.— '< by qutEStiont?n ^.o/i'trtf.— '^fjcedcre.— '* a line 
 uiihi pioposito. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 369 
 
 XII Descutbtno tmpkt^fects (§ 580).— 1. The aspect' of the triumphal 
 T^roce'^'sion- was most brilliant^ Paullus iEmilius himself, the tnumph- 
 in<^ .reueral\ crowned with laurels^, rode» in a gilded' chariot» drawn» 
 bv^four white horses. Behind him within'" the wagon stood a public 
 slave holding a golden crown over his" head. Next came" the lictors 
 with their laureled'-» rods'*. Next'^ to them marched'" the victorious 
 armv The soldiers, likewise'» laurel-crowned'", adorned with those 
 irw-irds of merit which each hr.d received^' in the campaign, sang their 
 own praises, and [those] of their generaP^- 2. The spectacle was a most 
 revolting-'- one. Mettius was surrounded^M3y his cutthroats'^», who evi- 
 dentlv*''"lnrded'« the assembly^". One of the Common Couucd presided. 
 Not a voice of a decent'" citizen {phir.) was heard. 
 
 XIII Historical imperfects (§ 581). 1. The officers" were sitting" at 
 the banquet, when suddenly a slave announced that the enemy had 
 entered^^» the citv-— 3. The conference^* had scarcely endcHPs when the 
 first columns-'" of theenemv were in sight".— ^i. Theinistocles had daily 
 conferences^- with the ephori, in which he tried*» to put otF*' the matter as 
 lon.r as possible, when in the meanwhile at Athens the fortitication of 
 thedtyand of the Piraeus was pushed*Mvith the greatest energy*- and 
 raniditv**— 4 Bias was once on board aship*Svith wicked*" men. When 
 d'urin..-" a storm the ship was tossed*» by the waves*», and the men O^^O 
 involu'd^" the gods, he said-^', * Be silent, lest^^ the gods perceive^^ that you 
 are here on board '.- 5. C Vettius, the leader of the Marsi was trans- 
 ported^* to the Koman general. His slave drew^» the sword [out of the 
 icabl)ard], of the verv soldier by whom he was conducted and fiist 
 killed his master; he'then said", ' I have emancipated^» my master ; it is 
 now^» time to attend to myself'"". And thus he ran the sword through his 
 l)o,iv" — When this was announced to the Consul, he ordered the army 
 to sop"-', and examined the locality [with his ej^^s"^]^ There was a marsh 
 to (J) the ri-ht, on wliich a forest bordered"^ buspecting^" that the 
 enemv ^^.as hiding there, he sent three cohorts to"' reconnoitre"» the forest 
 as to'the presence and strength of any hostile forces.- 7. Meanwhile 
 C-mna marihed at the head of "« live legions to the support of- his troops 
 and his cavalry was aoproachim: Sulla s^' horsemcMi at the same time as 
 
 ,11 — *- i;iiii ' iviur". — - •«c-'^v,.. 
 
 {janvc 01 ine imeiL-^ic-u i'^'~:''--—''^ Yh",", ov) Or^ 'u — iMaurciltUh.— =0 bv^?/w.«on 
 10 proxinui.. - '« HH-»'^ •■.^«•- Vo^^lJ.^'rr)--- Render: ;.-i^A wM (hey had 'been pre- 
 acc.unt of quisque (^ .^b2. R. 19, >o 3, c) ,'".,,-_ ^* atrox.- " circumvc-ntus. 
 
 sented (doiulie) during (he war.- ^l canere.--3 ,mpcrator. ''^'^30 -,)onu-^ - 3i dux. - 
 
 (;frfUunifuifbvllK>«oicl -(<''','_ '^'V- «. R,.,,ikT • lliivini; suspcct.'d.- " Render : 
 
370 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 371 
 
 the leuiions were soon' in order of battle' by the enemy, and all was sud- 
 denly clianged. The one legion of Cinna^ which was pressed by tho 
 enemy, en(()iira!::ed* by the hope of relief,' made an attack on [iheir] 
 adversaries. Tlu'se, foarinic for their communications in the rear",s('t tlie 
 example' of tlii^ht. The right wimx", havin*^ perceived" the friicht'" of 
 the horsemen, <^ave way" to avoid*"^ beinir made prisoners within [their] 
 intrenc hments^^ and most of them tiirew" themselves from a heiirht" of 
 ten feet into the trendies. All was" disorder, panic", and rout'". To 
 remedy'' these serious checks-", the following"^' expedients-'^ otfe red them- 
 selves-^ to Sulla, which saved his army from destruction'^*. 
 
 XIV. DiUKCT INNEU ACTION (i^ ~j&2). — 1. CiTCsar thought-^ the best 
 plan would be-* to collect"^' ships"", to cross the sea, and to follow Pompey ; 
 but he was atraid this would be slo^v work and would take a great time^". 
 He did not wish^° that in the meanwhile {interea) during^' his absence 
 more troops^'' should be enlisted'-'^ by the Pompejan party"*, or that expe- 
 ditions should be sent to GauP^ and Italy. — 2. Ca?sar did not think it 
 advisable^** to subject" his passage over the sea^"* to the perils of the win- 
 ter season^". — o. C:esar thought it advisable to conceal the intelligence 
 he had received*". — 4. Ctesar did not think {existimdre) that the enemy 
 Avould cros:* that river. — 5. They thought that all were preparing [for] 
 fliirht. — (5. Cicero thought {statnere) \.\r\X. this principle*' in the aclminis- 
 tralion*'^ of the province was the corre(!t*^ one.— 7. Cirsar resolved {stKfti- 
 ere) to** carry out this i)lan in the administration of piis] province. — 
 8. Pompey's opinion greatly*^ differed from mine. — 9. Ihe Peripatetics*" 
 and Academicians*' diticrcd in terminology*^ [l)ut] ngreed*' in substance-'". 
 
 — 10. Ciesar laid this matter"" over"'- to {in) the next {posterns) day.— 
 11. Cicero knew that his departure"' would offend Ciesar.— 12. The jury^* 
 did not agree.— 13. After'^ this address"" had been made, the opinions of 
 all agreed"' at once"*. — V^. Pythaiioras believed that the world constitut- 
 e^l"* a numerical figure*^". — ^14. Posidonius believed that dying [persons] 
 had the gift of prophecy'^'.- 15. Chrysii)pus thought that all things were 
 made""^ for the sake of men. * 
 
 XV. Impkhfects of uekeiienck (to inner action) ^ 584. — 1. When 
 
 1 CerneitT^^s i^ ordtr of battle, by the adjcciive in.'ilrintas (accessory predicue).— 
 3 by the adjective Vinn'nins.— * coufiniuTre.— ^ i-ui)siiiium.— « lieiider : Ftannq for 
 (dative) ///ri/- rt/mt/ (receptus).— ' ^o >^H the example/or f^metfiinf/, i^'\i;uuma\'n:ili\ix rei 
 dare.— " cormi.— * atiiinadvertcrc (al>l.itive atisoliite).— i»t<'rior.— " t-e.se recip<re.— 
 1'^ Render : Le-^t (lie) f/iet/ jniq/it t/^ oppnti.<td icitkin^ etc.— '^ niiniitio.— »< nracipit are. 
 
 — »» Render : from a brednfico/k uminiiio) of ten feet.— »« Render : icanfull of diimidcr 
 (tumiiltus.)- JT terror.— ^^tUira.— i" Render: For these cfieck".— -" Render: tfie-^^ no 
 great evils.— 21 hie— 2a ijui)si(ruim.— '■'3 i^uecurrere.- »< Render : which brought 
 (afferre) xafety (saliis) to his armij.— -* use tlie form of a concessive ehiuse (althougli he 
 thonfjlit-~ij<i).— '^\W\n\^r-- i\vsnr opim/red (\no\)M\-) most (niaxime).— '" coirere.- 
 2« Render: after hanug collfcted '-Idp-* (:il)l.iiive at)solnte) /o r;w,s\ etc. — 2» Render : He 
 feared the dtlay (mora)V/ lIuU thing, anri the length (lonirinqnitas) of finie— 8<* nolle.— 
 3» alilativc absolute.— 3-^ more tr(K>p^,iniKUhi.- 3^ parare.— s* the Pompejan party. Ponipe- 
 jani.— 35 Kendt-r : that Oaul .should be tempted^ teiiiptare).— 3« by tjcistimare with the 
 j^'erinidive of xubiirere.- ^'' that the passaire should be subjected.— 3» ;>a•s•.^■rtf7« Oivr the 
 sea, naviiratio.— 3» to the perils of ttie winter season = to wintir.- *" Render : TJjat 
 those (thinirs) which he had ascertained (a)7/'^*'>w/'<?) ^tiould be concealed (dissimnldre) 
 l)y him.— ••» ratio.— *'-' by administrilre.— "^ optimus.— *« thai tliis jilan {ratio) should 
 be carried out (obmrare) by him in the administration, etc.— ••' multum.— <« Peripa- 
 tetiei.— *t Aeademici.— 48 in termiiiologi/, vocal)uli!*.— ** conscntlre.— ^» re ij)sa.— 
 51 res.— »2 ((, lay over, diflerre.— '=* profectio.— ^* Render: The opinions (sententue) of 
 the twelve-men did not agree (congruere),— ^^ ablative absolute.— ^» oratio.— ^^ in iinum 
 coni^ruere.— »« gtatim.— »» consjtrirccx — •» numerus.— «' to have Vie gift of propliecy , 
 diviuare,— "" to be made^ nasci. 
 
 
 MurCna returned to the citv,he intimated' [by it] that there he would be 
 of greater use- to his country than anywhere else^— 2. You acted un- 
 wisely* when you were a candidate" for the praetorship" agamst such a 
 strong rival'.— 3. When Alexander declared war against {Bat) Darius, 
 iie did not mean" to «rratify" the Greeks, but his own ambition' — 
 4 When the English" demanded'- a tribute'' from these provinces they 
 seemed, according to the letter, to demand'* a tribute, but m tact they 
 demanded that we should impress'" the mark'^ of servitude on'' ourselves. 
 — \R 70] • 5. When the defendants had come to Syracuse, Apronius 
 who''^*was Ri^pointed-" as judge by Verres, told [them] that they had 
 acted^' against the edict {cdidam). They asked, 'in what respect^^ r» 
 lie answered that he would tell [them] at the tria^-^ Apronius took^ 
 Artemidorus and Tlepolemus as complainants in the name ot the people . 
 The defendants asked in what form he wotdd rule"^" the question at issue, 
 lie answered, 'If it shall be proved-'"' that [theyj acted against the edict . 
 Timarchides advised-" [the defendants] to compromise-^". They peremp- 
 torily refused^".— C. The complainant^' asserted^"^ that Manlius was in 
 pos.sessi(m of an estate belonging to him {i.e., the complainant). Ihe 
 defendant denied [it]. He (/. e., the defendant) said he would prove that 
 he held that estate from the [lealj owner^*; he asked=^ for a referee .- 
 7 That matter came up=*' in the Senate. Volcatius denied that the duum- 
 virs had legally- that right- which they claimed*". The tribunes inter- 
 ceded*', [and] so the matter was dropped*-. I [now] introduced >our 
 atlair; llortensius made the report**. His report*" was received wi h 
 l.iud cries of disapprobation l)y many. The consuls neither assented 
 nor did they objecl*»very much*^ After"" this debate"' had been Pi-otracted 
 till nbrhtfall"' without^* being fiuished"% the Senate adjourned .-8. It 
 what Trebonius just now mentioned"' is true, I believe that you wdl not 
 make the iournev'^ without great danger.— 9. lousaid correctly-^ that it 
 is exceediiK'-ly dillicult to disabuse"" the soul from the habit ot the eyes. 
 !1 10 in Uie same letter you asked"^ [me] not to""^ detan- these men 
 [any] longer from [their] work, and added that you intended to come 
 over«^ yourself.— 11. Hortensiu s said that you were engaged^" with writ- 
 " 1 si-Miifbiire — '"i to be Of oreater use. plus prodesse.- 3 in any other plac-e.— * inii.ru- 
 
 [HViu what 7esp.ct, quid (as object offacere).- ^ }'' J^'^'f^J^'-fl'^^^^^^ 
 
 because it belongs to the judicial transaction, ""P^y/"'?? ^y^^.*^^^ "f^7*>^^^^^^^^ recimra- 
 
 'r";r;".W ; •bi^inni^VoTevery judicial rule i^tnMla) ^I^^^ ^to^f^^};' 
 .s aclm.fuere.- - tbat^.n .hey .liould compn^^^^^^^^ & felstate (^JX.) 
 
 ^,.;•em»/on^^ perne^are --^c^tor.-^ ^l^ ^^,,__ 3« arbiter q,;! rem 
 
 was possessed 1)V M.ii lius.— uominii. t ,.^,ir.» - «o-pre'» on this matter in 
 
 possesseu ny mamius.— ^^ (umiinii.. t'^; . ...^ , _ a«rere) on this matter in 
 
 cocjnJ.sceret.- 37 Ren< er : Ac ion was '"V^k ttia^f- ^« w^ assumed to them- 
 
 the Seiiaie.-3'^accor.iui.-to tht^aA >.-^^^ ' .'I^i^/.r^^ 43 proponere.- <Mo make a re- 
 gelves.- *i intercedeie.- *- to be doppf; "-^f'J^- u ^oa'damored (reclamflre) violent- 
 port, referre.- *' oratu,.- *;.K^"J^'' = ;^^ '''i^'^^Serc - *» v<Ude^ Ablative abso- 
 
 ly (vehemei.ter) ^/.J'^^/'^-;^, „,7;^^!^^ T?{- - ""^mue, p. 189 No. 3 ; p. 188, No. {b).- 
 lute.— 5icontroversia-»^(lnc(T^;-. 57 ' ommeinorilre - ^^ to make a joui^iey, pro- 
 
 ««occupitum e.-se, ?ri/'A abl. 
 
372 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 inir, find tolcV [mo] that ho. had seen you twice* at Cumne when yon were 
 buryini;^ [your] brother Marcus. — 13. Attains said that it was more 
 j)le;isant to make a Iriend than to have one. — 13. Philip, Alexander's 
 father, saiil that it was possible to take* auy^ fortress to which a donkey' 
 laden' with gold could" climb up". 
 
 XVI. PllKDICATFLS OF HABIT WITH .W(7r, CtC. (>5 oSo). — 1. JulluS C»TSar 
 
 did not foriiet anything except^" injuries [received]. — 2. It was custom- 
 ary with the 8i)artans to use red tunics" in battle to'- conceal" the blood" 
 of [tiieirj wounds. — 3. The ancient Massilians used to give to strangers'^ 
 who'" were leaving" their city, loans in money" to" be returned to tlieiu 
 in the lower worhr". — 4. The Cimbrians had'-' the habit to exull'^'^ in 
 battle, [but] to waiP^ in sickness. — 5. Tiie Laccdtvmonians, before they 
 went'^* to battle'-'^, used to arouse'^" [their] courage" by the sounds" of 
 the flute-" — G. The Persians observed the habit^** not to^' see^'- their chil- 
 dren before these {t/tei/) had comi)leted^^ their seventh year. — 7. In those 
 times men used to talk more bravely for their liberty than they fought^* 
 for it. — 8. When Epaminondas had come into a company^^ in which 
 either pul)lic atfairs'-*" or philosophical subjects" were^" discussed^", he 
 never used to leave it*" before the discussion had" closed". — i). In those 
 times the Athenians used to expel from the State by ostracism*^ those who 
 seemed" to be dangerous^-' to llie liberty of the re|)ul)lic. 
 
 XVII. Impki{F1-:cts of habit without solar, etc. — 1. Atticus so con- 
 ducted himself*" as*' to seem on terms of equality*" both with the low- 
 est and with the greatest. — 2. The Laced;emonians always had two kings 
 from tlie two families of Procles and Euryslhenes. It was not allowed*" 
 that a member^" of the one of these families sliould succeed in the })lace 
 ot a king of the other family. The oldest son of the last king in pos- 
 session had the first claim^' to succession. If a king'"*^ had deceased with- 
 out male issue, then the next of kin was elected. — 3. At Athens those 
 who were^^ condemned [to death] in a public trial''* were delivered^^ to 
 the board of eleven^'' for execution^'. — 4. Whatever was a.^ked of Atti- 
 cus^% he [always] gave [his] promises'" after mature reflection as to their 
 
 » Narrare.— !* ite?'um (freqiiuntly U!«ed witU llie force of bui, hecauKo what has been done 
 a second time niur»t have been done twice).— 3 etlene.— * expii.'niTre.— ^ Kender: All 
 fortresftes (castelhwn). — ^ afellus.-- '' onustup. — ^ not rendered; the finite verb often 
 hicliuliiijjf tlje meaning,' of ;^.v.sf.— «ascendere.— 1" ni.<i.— " tunica rubra.— >2 ^,; \\'\\\\ 
 gerundial.— i3 dispinmhlre.— '* cnior.— -* hospejj.— i*by a i)articiple.— ^^ cgredi ex. 
 
 — 1» pecuiiije mutuie.— i" Kender : uiiich were to be returned (siil>juiictive).— soapud 
 inferos.— '■^1 By tf«e with dative.— "- exultari-.- '-'^ himentari.— -' desceiulerc ad (x'/ft- 
 jmtrf). — 25 by diinicdn.— -^ inUamniilre.— -' aiiimi.— '^^* concentn.— -" tibia. — so fus^ti- 
 tfltum.— 31 ut.— 33 aspicere.— ^;' inipiere {siit»jiinct.).— ^* 'they fought ' must be placed 
 in thepame form of tiie verb as ' to talk'.— ^^ circnhi!».— 3* pnljhc a fairs, respublica,— 
 3' philosophical mhjtcts, piiilosopliia.— 3» subjunctive.— 3» Render : it was disputed on 
 public afairs, etc.— *" difcedere ex (ind*).— "O Kubjunc^ive.— ■*"■' the discussion closes^ 
 sermo ad rtnem perdncitnr.- -»3 ostracif^inusi. — •** hul)junctive. — ■** Kenrkr : Those J'rvtn 
 (ex) whom the liberty of the republic seemed to be attle to take a-apere) so7ne damage (detri- 
 mentum; by partitive jzeidtive).- '»«t»e ^erere.— ■" ut.— *» Render : that he seemed com^ 
 7/iofi (coniinfinis) to Ihe lowest (infiniuf) and a peer (par) to the foremost (pnncept').— •♦» li- 
 <(>re. — ^" Render: That (intin. clatise) a kini.' should l)e made out of the one {alter) of 
 the?e [families] into the place of the ottier fanuly.— ^' Render : In the first pla re (pri- 
 muin) consideration was had (raiiOnem habere) of him who wa-< (subjunct.) the oldest out 
 of the children of the one (\\W.) who had dn-eased (deccdere, subj. ) [while] reigninrj (reunare). 
 
 — *•■* Render : Jf he (i)*) had not It ft (subjunct.) 7nak isftue (viriUs sexuf), then was electtd 
 who loas (ful)j.) the next by relationship (propinquita;*).— " participle.— '♦ pnt)lice.— 
 ^5 tradere.— S8 see Part I., p. 14, 5.—^^ tiuppliciuni.— «•» This attribute of the claus-e must 
 be made tlie grammatical .suDject of the principal sentence {Atticus promised what was 
 asked— Yog^vii).— •'-" togive promis(S, promittere. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 373 
 
 «orupulous fulfilment'.- 5. Dionysius, from fear^ of razors^ used to burn 
 hTs" beaid« by llLrhtecP cllarcoal^- G. Scipio Africanus was W(>nt to 
 tie- occasionally^» a season of rest" from his magnificent'^ l^^V^^^^J" 
 ; s» an lfn>inihe crowds of human being.-, to retreatMo solitude-, 
 1 it'"' () a port- 7. The battle-order of the Roman army [always] con- 
 sisted ( f hree lines'*. Tlie first line'" was called ' hastati , who entered 
 m o 1 • combai- first of all. These were followed- bv those wh<) bore 
 le n me^'principes '. The third line were the ' triarii' veteran^^ sol- 
 iersot' tried'* bravery. If the Miastati' could not beat- the enemy, 
 he' pine 1^^^^ receivx'd- them into the places'-- left open for them in 
 u^n- ranks Then the combat belonged^« to the 'principes', and the 
 « listaii " IVn'med the second line^". If neither the ' principes were sue- 
 ces^^i^, they gradual^- fell back'"^ on tl- li-" of the maru. ^^H^^^^^^ 
 
 i^ r- ^T^^ ;;S '"^'^ dd" ^b^^w^^of 'an^Un^ ul^r^di- 
 bie stnd^msn ss^^^^^ H b7gan*» to study by lai;.p.light*' directly*"^ after (a) 
 nidiid*' Before davli|ht** he reported*^ to the emperor \ espasianus 
 who lkewise*« made nse of the night for his labors^ Having re urned*^ 
 ( e he devoted^ the rest*" of the day to studies. Even during- dinner 
 re^d a book and took notes- ; for he never read^^ anything witlH)ut ' 
 tak iVi note^ When he travelled-, a secretary- accompanied him^« with 
 ?U olc ai^^^^^^^^^ whose hands, in ^ "t^M-, were pro ected^ hj 
 
 lo sl^^^^^^^^^ thai"» not even cold weather" might mterfere" with his 
 studied The' works- which he left, comprised one hundred and sixty 
 
 volumes'*. vrTURF-PiiE^EKT (72. 73).— 1. We shall know in 
 
 ,«^ a \" u'u'.h^mlu'^^Ci W^sUau'wander abou^ aestUu.c- 
 ^V I mr wives" iiml cl.ildiin — 8. SluiU I lemuin, or shall I depart ' 
 S,rol v" I s all oHVcl n.Uung wUli.mt n.onoy and wdhout an anvu^ 
 ; '>_4 All lUis v.iu «ill learn" (rom Pompey's letter.- 5 T) at lime 
 
 *v!;,'-c,;n.e'a,.l" rapidly'Moo - C TLc.u, ^'^■-^ ^ ^J'Tu^e '" n" 
 adapted" to this purpose'" than I am— .. Nothing will ut uonc 
 
374 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 that matter^ aG:ainst CiT3sar's will'. — 8. Afterwards^ I sliall write* many 
 letters to our friends, in which I will most earnestly* commend* you 
 and our Tullia. — 'J. 13y my care thy father shall be relieved' from all 
 fear. — 10. When, I pray 3'ou, and by whose order" has all this been 
 changed? — 11. Please, do grant" this permission'" to mo", to pertbrm" 
 this business in my [own] way'^ — 12. I shall stay" here till my brother 
 arrives. 
 
 XIX. FUTUIlE-rERFECT IN INDEPENDENT SENTENCES (U. 74). — 1. YoUV 
 
 sail'^ will have lasted long enough if you return'** liome by the tenth of 
 September. — 2. The enemy will have routed" our trooi)S by the lime 
 {(hnn) the reinforcements arrive. — 3. By the time you read this letter 
 I shall have made up my mind"* on thtit subject"*. — 4. That explanation-'" 
 will not contribute'-' much to elucidating"^ the subject. — 5. My brother will 
 return in two, or, at the farthest"^, in three days. — 0. This will give"* the 
 greatest pleasure to all of us. 
 
 XX. PoTENTI.\L FUTUUE. H. 7."), (A) WITHOUT POTENTIAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 1. Please"''^ send word^" to my brother Quiutus that no letter of his'-'' has 
 yet'-"* been handed^" to me. — 2. Send my love to your wife'". — J3. Do not 
 send any letter to me^' tilP"- 3-011 hear^^ from" me [again]. — 4. If you look"^ 
 at nature, you [can]not doubt that [there] is somemaker^* of the universe^'. 
 
 — 5. If you examme'" the case attentively^", 3'()U | must] acknowledge*" 
 that the accused has been justl}'"" condemned. — G. Whv, then*^ would 
 you attempt to prove an opinion which it is impossible" to uphold ? 
 
 B. (With potentlxl AUXiLiA/iiEs). — 7. Neither friendship, ncn- jus- 
 tice can at all exisl^*, excej>t*' the\' are sought** for their own sake''^ — 
 8. Since*" Sulpicius refuses*" to be retained^" in this case, I would wish^' 
 that Antonius [might] be the attorney'''^ — 9. If this rumor should** be 
 confirmed, we must depart for Svracuse as soon as i)ossible**. — 10. It will 
 be sate to say*^ that Ti!)crius is better**' informed^' about the matter than 
 he^" is willing to acknowledge^". 
 
 C. (With ok witiiout potential auxiliaries). — 11. We ought"" not 
 to place faith in the words of those who have often" treacherously""' de- 
 ceived"^ us. But the Carthaginians have already very often deceived us. 
 Hence it would {will) be the greatest foll^' to have [any] hope in their 
 good faith*'*. — 12. If it were true that"^ m:in has be(,'n created by nature, 
 nature itself must (will) be endowed"" with a soul and reason. — 13. Even 
 rude and illiterate"^ [men] acknowledge,"'* a moral power and duty, [and] 
 
 * Kos.— ■'' voliiiit.'i!*. — 3(ieiii,|e^ — 4 conscribcre.— *clili<.'('iiler.— "comuieiidarc— '^ lilHJnliv. 
 
 — 3 hy whom [nsj an author (auctor). — * pm'bGre. — '" venia. — '» ut.— ^'^ perlict're. — 
 ^3 ratio. —I* coinmorilti.— 1° Render : Youwill hare sailed long enouqh. — »* reverti ( future- 
 present). — >'' fuirilie.— •*• toniake up one\t julnd, siatiicrc— '" n-s. — 20 t-xplanatlo. — ^' nmfi- 
 cere. — 22 iHnytrrirc (gerundvil).—'^'^ siiinimini.— ^* alVt'rre.— 25 si- (loutiactt-d from n ri.v), 
 to be placed, after tlfe first words» of the .•*eiitence.— 2« to >iend word to xoimltody. aliqiiem 
 certiOrein facere.— 2^ ab eo — 2^ by dmn \u connection wit!» ' no '. See § 4C)8. — 2» uffern-. 
 
 — 30 Kender: You will salute ijrn/r wi/V (inaterfamilias) by my vame. — ^^ Render: You 
 rcill not have sent (dare) to me a l-tter. — '2 diim.— ^3 future-prer'ent.— ^* de. — ^^ intiiOri 
 aliquid (in fiititre-pre^ent). — ^a ariifex. — ^"^ miiversiis iniindu<. — ^s coirno^ccre (future 
 perfect). — ^» diii._r,.iitius.— ■»<> concertere. — ^' jure. — ^"^ iiritur.— *^ ich'irh can (poj-fsi- in the 
 suhjuncfive) be uplceld (tiiCri) by no means.— ** esse.— <= nisi (u'ith subjunct.).— <* e.\pe- 
 tere. — ■•' ipsie per se. — ■*« quoniam. — ■•* nejjjlre. — *" to be retained in a ca.-^e, caiisam 
 puscipere. — ^» velle. — *^ patrOnui*. — ^^ futtiri'-present. — ** primo quoque tempore. — 
 ^•' by oiwrtlre. — " plus. — ^^ to tte informed nlx)ut a matter, de re novissc. — *<* ipse. — 
 
 *^ concedf're. — *» Render : Who hare deceived ?*•*, to the speech of those we ouqht (de- 
 
 bSre) «0^/0 hare faith.— «> sjepenumero.— «2 per fidem. — "^ fallerc. — «* good faith, fides. 
 
 - ** Render : If man has been created (procreilre).— «" pra?ditu8.— «' in'doctus.— "" con- 
 cede re. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 375 
 
 fhP wise would not»?— 14. The defence' should first proye^ the integ- 
 itv of the lif^[of the accused] if [this] can be done^ ; if it cannot, the 
 de^nde. si ould proceed to show" [his client's] inexperience', youth and 
 w. U of education«. If he is estopped- by the bad moral character'" [of 
 ^V\,!Tl?pi Olid first" trv^-^ to establish the foct'-* that false rumors 
 ^^c 'miad" and shou d dvvell'^ on the theme" of the unreliability'' of 
 n,mo;T If'«n(^^^^^ [things] will avaiP, he shcmld make use 
 
 rumors. 11 iumic '^'^ ^^ ' , K . , ..0,^ u;.,„22 tUof b*. wn«j not ad- 
 
 '^Tnv of S- s ol < be 7, w " on an acre", but in some locali. es»'^ 
 n ,1c more"' or ess Hence» lhnne,-s« should observe the custom » ns 
 ?o Ic^u- ntity of seed n a Riven locality.- 16. A judge must not take 
 lit fn tlVe parties-.- 17. We should (oportere) not f^-^P /*;'!^^ " 
 w ifl we cannot return".- 18. Boys will learn more (/)i«m) iri public 
 elools^' than by private instrucli.m at home"; for at home they wt 
 lear° only hat" il taught" to THEM (/;»<•), [but] m ^c 'ools also wl .at [is 
 n,"it1 loothers-19. A person" who is goiu!: to inflict punishment 
 vde in an"e';iir never k^eep that middle way" which 'S between too 
 mucli ml fo. li tie".- 20. Such a knowledge", in my opinion at leas 
 ;"•)',;". is'of .m use".- 21. He will be justly'; <^^^'^^. 
 irni. nli-n^iive is^^ the contempt" ot pleasure.— 22. Unly lie isa j,oou ciu 
 m^wl oo erves- the laws/not in his-, but in [l^Bjcountry sinteres .- 
 2 J W h^"* he wise^- wealth is a servant"" with the loo ish"' it is the mas- 
 ;;.«'_ 04 I would ask" vou to phice no"^ taith m that hope. 
 
 v'^ n/prxni NT fut^^ Hi 70) — 1. We shall take"^ any"" provis- 
 X\I. Dependknt FLiLiu. Vf vou r,ubliclv pionounce"' these views, 
 ions which we may fiinl-— 2. It >o^\ P^i^^.^'J' •? if von jro to see'» that 
 you will [.Iierelnlattack^^^^^^ 
 
 ^'"r&Mll d "t rtVou alt, reUier" shun" the iompanj-' of these 
 _ 4. J ou w 11 "'•''.../ , ,51,. ,, , (sj) taking tetter care" for yow 
 
 h,:;hr-G^Wl.:. il bettow'-bwK-fitsVsliL^^ 
 
 [aiul] af.envards" the useful-.- 7. If these [things] are evils, [the one] 
 
 rerbK - *" to address a court or monm, Ts f.; a _ 2« r ticm.- ^» serere.- ^^ jugerum.- 
 _ 25 crimen.- 2« § 259.- " rnodm^.- I'^^l^;- 3« Render : how much in eeery region 
 32 locus.- " amplHi*».- ^* qtiare.- ';^'"?','';'!;.t; . .^_! 38 [j i-mntes.- ^» benet\cium.- 
 /. sow (gerundial) /m. t^'t^^'^'^^'^al^S^^ithin tlie walls (parietes) teacher.- 
 *o refenc- *' Uidus.- y Render •;tiyamiait i>'\ov • Never an anqry one whowiU 
 
 ,resent.- ^\<-onteniptio.- - > c t„>m - ^ .oR^udvv : in servl'ude.-- 
 5T not to him, but to [his] <^ountry.-^JaY>ui\.-- ^^-^''J;, auferre.- «« any . . .which, 
 «isiultus.-«2i„ mpeno.-^ro^^areex^-^ ^^ honestumque ipsum.- 
 
 by guicungue.- «^ declamre— «« impu!xu5ic - ,3'P^^ _ 74 f^jrere.-'^ soc.etas.- 
 
 'otogo to see, convemre.--'i poi^cre.- '' V/ '«7/V5r"rS?w<7 aliquid diUgenter curSre. 
 TH-rati8simuraalicnifacere.-";o/GA-^.7W^/("^ .i^vliat is, etc. 
 
 ^_78 pra-bcre.— 'M^euder: ivhat ts {will be) mcestaiy. ikiuuc. 
 
376 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 377 
 
 who is [involved] in thorn, cannot bo happv^ — 8. You -\vilJ obtain all 
 \'()U (losiio-.— 1). Will the wi^e Innff.] be hai)pv if they lack [ihtirj cye- 
 sii^^ht^ 1* They will be even then." — 10. I shall not be remiss^ in anvthini^» 
 which it is possible to foresee. — 11. If you propose this, you \vill not 
 make peojile believe it'. — 13. We shall make niistakos** as lonir as we live" 
 on the earth. — V,]. If the price of bread-stuifs should be higher'", you had 
 better {irill best) take" your city-establishment'- over to [our] estate near 
 Arpi". — 14. I slvtill send you word as soon as (d) lie has left". — 15 I 
 Bhall let you know" when I make up my mind" as to" nieetinir him on 
 the road, or expectiuL^ him here.— IG. 1 will write you how I shall find 
 matters'" after my arrival'" at Home.— 17. Immediately after my return-* 
 to the cMy, I shall attend" to all that concerns your interest^^ — 18. I will 
 follow the advice which he may give me concerning (ff<^) this atfai^2^ — 
 v.). Whatever quantity'-* you may add to it-*, it will not be changed in 
 kind-^— 20. Whatever-^' will be decreed about me, I shall bear-'" "it with 
 that mind-'" with which I ought {dtberc) to bear [it].— 21. I shall not 
 touch''" these [things] before I have seen you.— 22. I shall not depart be- 
 fore I have linished^' this work.— 23. I shall have linished this work be- 
 fore you depart.— 24. I shall depart after lirst'^ finishinir this work.— 
 2.i. Before I depart, I will lirst finish this work. — 2(). Heibre I proceed^^* 
 to defend myself, I will brielly state'* those [things] from which all these 
 chnrges" have arisen'®. 
 
 XXII. Tenses in epistolatiy style ^ 589. [Epistolnrif fense-Uo be used 
 icJwnevtr admissible].— 1. L. Clodius, tlie tribune elect"', is with me. It 
 seems to me that he suspects, somethino="^ which vou disliked'" may have 
 been insinuated''" to you about him. Hut he speaks in the highest terms 
 of you'', and'^ I would ask'' you earnestly'' to believe rather me than 
 the one'" that has slandered'" him with'' you. Your letter has just been 
 handed to me''*. I did not know Dolabella had so many troops with 
 him'". I am on the point of starting for Capua. There I intend to stay to- 
 morrow, when''" I shall fully answer 3'our letter. Heneventum on' the 
 IGth of September. 
 
 2. [Modern- letter, Addison Xo. LXXVJ.]. October i:]^/^ ITll. 
 Dear ISru : I am very much obliged to you for your last kind letter 
 and invitation, Avhich 1 heartily wisiri could accept; but you know I have 
 put my hand to the i)l()ugh, and have already been absent from my work 
 
 1 Bt'fitns.— 2 vclle.— 3 to lack one's fiyfsirjtit, KoiiHilHisc.irere ociih'nim.— * IheyicUlhe 
 even then = etiam.— ^ /o />f n/niss, Jalli.— « lieiitler: i/i tho<€ [thinqx] iiiiich will be iMe 
 to l>e foreseen {\>ro\'u\^ro).— ^ Rrndor : You null not mikp faith.— » to make jnUtakt.^, er- 
 iSre.— » u>-.«>e.— i" If Ijread-^tuf^ (aDiiOiia, sinfj.) will be dearer (canl^).— ^^tjetake yoiir- 
 fst-lfi-^v. cotiferre) witk thr fomiln to. etc.— 12 fainilia d. e., corvi).— la rniulus Arj)Tiias. 
 
 — 1* proficitici.— 13 ciTtiOn-m facoiv.— >« to make up one's mind, constitiu'rc— i^ lU-n- 
 (Icr : wh^tk r (iitriim) I shall vieel (<»l)viam i)ro(o<tere) Mm. or, etc.— 1« Jteiuter : what 1 
 shall have pef'oind (perspiccre).— 1« when I sliall l)ave como to Rome.— 20 itei,(irr : As 
 soon as (>iiniilat(|iio) J shall hart returned.— -' oiurin- ali<|ui(l.— -- I{i'ii(ler : Those [thiiu/s] 
 7v/iich will thlmi'i (prrtinere) to your adrantaqe.— -'^ what to inc at)out tliis thin;,' Ik* sliall 
 have irivi-n advice, that I will follow.—-* qiiantumcniKnie.— -' eo (i. ^., ud huuc locum, 
 ad haiic rem).— '-« Rcufler : It will remain in its kind (s,'eniis).— 27 quidquid.-- 2« ferre. 
 
 — -'•' aiiiinii.-.— 30 aritii<j:ere. — 3i peiiic'Te.— 32 priuj^ __ 33 inHtitnere.— 3* iinri;lio. 
 
 3* criiiieii.— 38 to arise, iiasci.— 37 (U.s^ijruntu-.— 3- by infinitive clause.- 3» nioleste ferre 
 (suhj.).— <o to in<in uate sameJhinq to so)n^lK)dii . deferre alitiiiid ad aliqu.-ni.- *' Itender : 
 He sj)taks and thinks (sentire) most f/iendly (amicus» of you.— *- qiiare.- *^ peterc ah 
 aliquo.— ** etiam atquc etiam.— *^' than the one, quam' ilji neseio ciii,— <« male dioere 
 ahcui (subjunct.).— *'' apud — <« reddere.— 4» that Dolahclla so much (adeo) abounded 
 In troops.— ^^froni where I shall more accurate' y annoer (res<crii)ere ad) yonrletUr. 
 
 one entire month. I hope you will not think of staying in the country 
 so lono- as you mention. Sure it will be worth your while to hear the 
 peace treated in the house of Commons. If you will be my lodger, I 
 will take a house in Kensingt(m square, and furnish you a chamber. I 
 send you enclosed a paper of Abel Roper's. We talk of nothmg but 
 l)eace I am heartilv glad you have your health, and question not but 
 you would find the Kensington air as good as the AVorlley. I am ever 
 with the greatest sincerity, etc. 
 
 Paraphrase. 
 
 Jo«cph Addison to his Wortlov UosTphus Addiso Vortlejo si/o S. 7).) 
 Know that thou hast -really obli-ed me^ that^ thou by thy most pleasants letter 
 hast t vitedmc into the hospitality* of thy Vortlejjnum, whither O that it was allowed^ 
 tome to come ! But th<m knowest« how many and how great labors I have taken over me^ 
 which indeedMuterrupted» by a space of thirty days, have been lyin^ down i» too long, 
 anil ar^tmwH longing tori2 the master, as^ a long neglected fi^"'^' f^J-^^e j; ';ji?l; *• I h^^ 
 that thou wilt not be absent from the city so long as thou sayest that thou art going to 
 le For surely'^ thou wilt wishi« to be present if it will bo tiansactedi^ on the peace m 
 the housc^H of the En..'lish'» people. If thou shalt have rcsolved^o tr. use '"y ^ospitah y, 
 I shall rental a housc-^^ in the Kensington square", a part of ^^^^i^h, furnished^* wuh 
 wh-.t thin-s it will be necessary", thou mayesf-'« have for thyselt2J. I ha\e sent a pa- 
 ler-'« f Abel Roper^^.- We spoke of nothinu30 e.xcept3i poace. Tha '^ thou art we]133, 
 \am very glad nor do I doubt that 34 thou wilt breathe3s equallv3« w-ell at Kensing- 
 tonST as in thy Vortlejilnum. Farewell. London (Londinu m), October 13th. 
 
 1 To obliqe somebody gready, gratissimum aliciii facere.-2 quod.- 'J"f "J.^Jf .-,V'Tf 
 pitium.- ^ Othat if uas allow, d. ntinam lict-ret - « novisse.- ' to l<l^\our one 8 set J 
 iibi suscipere.- « quidem.- « intermittere.- ^» to he down, jacSre.- 1^ jarn - ^'{olong 
 for the 7na.<ter. dominum desidenlre.->3 tamquam.-^ «nltrum- 1« prolecto.- Nell . 
 ■L 1: a^rrre - 1« curia — 1« An-'lictis.— 20 constituere.— 21 condticere.-- 22 aedep,— 23 m- 
 c„* -V4' nstruc uJ- 25 opus'^sse.- 2« poreris.- 27 dative.- "" libellp.- .^^» AbSlus 
 R.qWvus.- 30 Sj alia re.L 3i „i,i._ 32 J^uod.- 33 valGrc- 34 quin.-35 re.puare (per- 
 lect ^ubj.).— 3« a*que.— 37 Ceusinlo. 
 
 CHAPTER TIIIKD. 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 § 590. The subjunctive is either potential or dependent. The 
 former (liiostly occurring in independent sentences) has the force of the 
 English potential, imperative, or of separate verbs conveying similar 
 ideas Rarely the Latin subjunctive has the force of an English sub- 
 junctive The dependent subjunctive is determined by the relation of 
 a predicate to another (principal) predicate, and exclusively occurs m 
 cl.\uses. 
 
 Or<» The T itin Pubiuncliye is in a great measure a conventional U^Tm of the Prf^'ca|e, 
 tl^ldeJof^S^Sorbe reduced t<> erne pnenilpm^^^ 
 
 the subjunctive is the mood of 'conception'. «>•;, ^VI,"'"^^J:l'^^.i' ,^^,^e ^^^^^^^^ 
 
 mind of the speaker'. lUit erery mood V^J>''*';^*%^'^^l',?'^7i^f,. ficts^ whereas the 
 
 alar-.; part of the denendent »^"1>J""'»i^-^'^ <i^''V> f J^J /"^L^S 
 
 required, must be learned Uomspecial rules. 
 
878 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 379 
 
 Q 
 
 y POTENTI AL SUBJU yCTIYE. 
 
 § 591. The potential siil»junetivc occurs eilher in dcchirative, or in 
 interrogative, or in imperative sentences. 
 
 (X) Dkclat:.vtive Slujunctivk. 
 § 592. The dechirativc siihjmictive is most freciucnlly used in con- 
 ditional periods, both if the conditional clause is expressed, and if it is 
 understood, as: 
 
 Die;» deficiat si volim mimorfiro, etc. ; Tinio would fail if I fhonld ftttompt, otc. 
 
 Cic. 
 
 N. D. 8. 3-2, 81.— Turn me 
 I would confess not to ' 
 Plane. 39, 93. 
 
 \i ronjitiar wow ]\i(\\ii\\\m habuissjf de utilitate reipiiblicie ; Then 
 liuve had liny judgment on the intereats of the republic. Cic. 
 
 For this class of subjunctives see B. VI. p. 717 foil. 
 
 Rem. 70. Aside from the subjunctive in conditional periods, a declara- 
 tive potential subjunctive occurs {a) in the piiesp:nt or peiifkct, as sub- 
 junctive of GUARDED STATEMiiiXT, With the force of a potential future {R. 
 75, No. 0) ; (/>) in a few passages as impeufect or pluperfect subjunc- 
 tive, beins^ an eciuivaleut oi oport nit {ovvj([\t\o \n\\i') ; (r) in the second 
 PEiisox SINGULAR of the present, perfect, and imperfect, to represent the 
 subject of the action as an indefinite person. 
 
 Obs. L The subjunctive of modest or irnarded Ptatement in the present tense mostly oc- 
 curs in thi' first and second persons, and is rendered by sticli expressions as ' I am inclined 
 to\ 'it seenip to me\ 'I Hhould ' ; and in the second person by 'may' or 'will': Ego 
 Tion hoc quii^rendum cenneain, sed, etc. ; It seems to me (I should think) that this is not t lie 
 question here, but, etc. Liv. 21, 18. — Forsitan quitnitl^ qui i^Ie terror sit ; You viU 
 (may) axk ])erhaps of wbat kind that terror is. Cic. Rose. Am. 2, 5. — Ex. 1. 2. — More 
 rarely this subjunctive occurs in the third pftr<on. almost always \\'\\\\ forsitan (which 
 l>einir contracted from fitr.< it an, ur forte ait an. ' it is the (by» chance or th(> question 
 whether', always recniires the subjunctive) : Matrem insiinulilre forsitan fas won sit ,' 
 perhaps it tco'ild //o/ /a^ riirht to accuse one's own muther. Liv. ;i9, 10. 
 
 The second person singtdar, if used in this meaninir, frequently denotes an uncertain 
 person (R. 91. Ons. 4.'». implying that the predicate refers to any person under the stated 
 circumstances : /it'j>ena< multos (juibus j)cricuIosa consilia (jiiiC-tis splendidiHra videau- 
 tur ; You (one, people) will find many to wliom dangerous measures would eeem more 
 showy than peaceful ones. Ci(^ Off. 1, '24, 
 
 Obs. 2. The subjunctive perfect likewise occurs as subjunctive of guarded statement. 
 It mostly occurs when the |)redicate is a verb of saying or tliinkin<r. and is limited to the 
 hingular niunber and to the active voice. Although it is evident that the kindred mean- 
 ing and almost identical form of the future-perfect must have intluenced in some way 
 tlie usage of a perfect in the meaning of a qualiflcd future, we cannot adopt Madvig'8 
 theory, who, on the strength of this fact, has invented the theory of a subjunctive of 
 the future-perfect, to which he assigns, in tiie active, the same form as the perfect sub- 
 junctive. Since the future-perfect, even in the indicative, is not used with potential 
 force, like the future prt;sent (except in the instances mentioned R. 75), and since he 
 must himself acknowledtje that the so-called future-perfect subjunctive has neither the 
 meaning of a fiUiire-perfect, nor that of a subjunctive (Madvig's Or. § 380), the expedi- 
 ent proposed by him is contradicted by the very reason which induced him to in- 
 vent it. The fact that, according to Madvii;'s theory, we would have to admit a dilVer- 
 ent consecution of tenses in reirird to the fiUure-perlect for the active and for the ]>assive 
 voice (Madv. § 379), and that it would, in other resjjects, impair tlje symmetry of the law 
 of consecution, and of the modal r«'latioiitf of the two fiUures, is fatal to tlie whole 
 theory. 
 
 The perfect subjunctive in this meaning seems to occur first in Varro and Cicero. It 
 is best rendered by* would', 'may', 'might' (nciratively by 'coidd not'): Hoc 
 sine ulia dubitatiOne continnat'erim ; I zcoi/ld «.s'sv/Y this without any hesitation. Cic. 
 Brut. 6, 25.— Plane quidem perfectum Demosthenem facile dixcJ'U ; Demosthenes yOM 
 ma I/ fiaMy cait simply perfect. lb. 9. 35. — Forsitan qulspiatn dixerit ; Perhaps somebody 
 viigfii (may, will, would) say. lb. Oil'. 3, 0, 39. See Ex. 3-8. 
 
 
 Ons q The second person sin- is often used to represent the subject a» an ttncertatn 
 PK^soN ;oT.e sotTebocly you), and, if so used, is alu.o^t invartably m the ^nbjunct.ve. 
 
 rtsV^^xn<^^^^^ There is nothing forbidding in his appearance ; at a 
 
 mee n" v^^'S Jook at \mwwWi awe. but not .hiink frortihun. Pl\"- *^ '-J' l»'- Jl J .^ 
 S.nc.i^e id- the second person denoting an ;..detin.te subject, mo.t fiequentli occui8 
 in dependent sentences. See R. 91. Obs. 4.— Ex. J-l'^. .,, , ^. ^^^„ 
 
 Obs 4 The stibjunctive imperfect and i)luperfect, as potent, al-declaratives very 
 rai^;*occt r fn the'n.eatung o^\i>ortuit (ouirht t.> have : - om-.^.r inc^^^^^^^ 
 
 wiiisay iicMutijr These subjunctives occur only if the conntc- 
 
 fiol ;„S. r"o'x"ce ;:■lo,;;^>^n'^i„!;;■;fu,ly\■,lear ; ,h^^^^ po.o".W ,o™,, e.pre.«ng 
 necessity («'erundials, oi)ort€t, dehZre), being lar more usual. .See ^»*^- 4,^^"- ^«'- ^. . 
 
 iliilSisiiillllii 
 
 i;;;!,»^ vims nominaro q„i «c : / ''"'i'^f"'/' ,'?™"™ SS';>y?f«' af/l« m ^i 
 
 cic. Tusc. 5, 0. , , , < 1 ^t «« 4 />o« Viavp' rrpnorallv renuires a circum- 
 
 ;>,,.->•. with a i.erfect inlinitive of the main ver^^^^^ 
 
 (d) The pluperfect potentia ^V.''\ '"'^V i /^nr Us «xi oiivm- licvit. licebatM^.\ and 
 fect,imperfect,orpluperfectiiidic^tiveof^o*w or tss^^n^^ 
 
 •should have' or 'ought to have' is ^'^P-lf ^^^^J^^ J ^ ^xt Deh\hanU\x omnis bonos effi- 
 detfere (or its sjMionyms, oi^rtehaf oix^rtrnt^^^^^^^^^ ^u ^.en good. 
 
380 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 381 
 
 ..^. . Vor if wo idont this opinion, 7 o^ght to hare been alarmed thc^otl.cr day for t'ao 
 
 vre}ent(lv^^) i^» 1)1:uhm1 in tl.ei'KUFKCT \i potidf ^lean^* ' . whs po-^il,le 1»'=^) ( /i^m />o^n« 
 ??) Hndnu' nin rive pn-rrdes ir in lin.e: /WuiMiluin. ab inuu, ""^J '7 ■'*;Ve be iu- 
 po-lbh- (at tlu tini.. of tlu' vordict) tl.at eomo yudge) Aa(/ «of 6fm present in Hit bt^u 
 
 "*;y^ i;:;;:: J^;;;;;-.^y ^S'huuViJ^o of the pn.t tense, i. i^ed ->th potential ^r<. in 
 
 1. Hau.l /^rmm an» no oi.ns sit q.ii.lom niliil nnquam ^^^J/l"/ ;^';^7'"^^''£,^;/;.! ; 
 14 51.- -2. Itaqiio rH.a«-, reb.is injnstis jnstos n.axune doluro. lb M, -^J- '^Jv /'\ 7/; 
 ju lidnm. pace t..a-^ aU-<ri„u b.n-o antepono tuo I»). 1 use 5y^ 1^.-4 ^{ «^^ "'j;"4« 
 n ru.lin ///fvri/zj lb Hint 45 105.— 5. Bona hoc tnil voniaJ ^/i 'e/?/«. l'>- i^'^- i' J;^ -'*• 
 « V V nic. m "n S he i.oribns clarin.^ d„,,rinr-> (,uani qnod, qnnin per Ir.eu- 
 ;^,,mrimi.e>r^^^^ pa tcs» Italian! ol.sid(^rent^ illatfli urn ^e bcUnni eis no., 
 
 d "< mnKM ViVl 2 2^^^^^ vt-ro Platr.neni nec nimis valde nnqnam noc n.mis 
 
 r:^ n e-^^^^^^^^^ 1 1 \ iT. : : , 7r,.-«». \ulliun ni>i loco^ p<.situm verbuni ri./^v-^v lb. 
 ii It 7< 214 -^0. Ko nuV^ti-r/>././v.s- victo.>'-rodennl ,n ca^tra LW" .Vi 
 
 11 -n. m veroc^r/V;/-.^ qnanta and..cia fnissot in oxercitn CatilTnie. Sal. <^ ^i'- •'»; Ij- 
 ia V x MK-eratimperAtuinqnnn.illn.nsp..liatum'Os.ipatnmune>M^ 
 
 rlc Yen 2 4 41 -l.i. (^.i.i fac-re debnisti ? Il.t„lh>^e.<>, sUn^sen]^ "■"il^'V ' o i' ?' 
 V Kl 14 Ki-(loin ex libVis p.-i>p eios qna' dixerini, aut ,>,> jH>})0.'>n>:<e<. 1»). Att. 2, 1. -i. 
 ili;TaerimymeO^^,^n;•.ul nJ.r.eni i e proldbuerunt qu.^ 
 et ad eftii.Mcn.los intolerabiles dolr.res./-//«^ npfis.im»m^-.^ lb. ^n. J''-/;, :^' ^'"J, ;/. 
 
 :i;;;;;;.^;.E'no;r n^;;.:^-. \b.l)iv.' 2. .1:- is, Hrqnum ;;-tn;^« n-<uni io^.i^sunt . 
 
 nn-o vol sine niao-istro facore ;><;^/r/-///^/, jrermunosi' ^je pntaiit e^te ^ ""^><!>"f^7, * '; 
 ?) 9 i-lV .reulh.s, qui ta.nen ali<iua ex part.-c ei^ incH>nHnod.. "^^'«ICn lor a-e 
 li/Vil'^.'/^i vostro iiis-u coactuH partem inilitnin diinlsit. l^»- ^L'»"; ^> ^- -^"l- /." ;| 
 Hv t^t\^)i8 mim.b 1«^ quu.n et remisisti qu..d non oiwrhhaf, et aecep sti quod 
 
 civitati_ his "l'"';' ;•., 'r'a-V- 21 ArcbipinVam'- ipsum vidit nemo, de qu<.^3 Mippli- 
 dnm';^^ - U '^i^:"l'i.t5. ^:-'2i:'^Si; jam Vfiuar non ut,<.iio pennmiis e.^ 
 videar/quorfe^U^», sed ut misericordi;V«, qme tibi nulla debetur-^ lb. Cat. 1, 7.- 
 
 1 P I <J 4-^.i R 78 - 3 with your leave.- ^ with your kind permission.- * admirable. 
 _ ^a.cele To consider.- « tin- faction. .>f Marius and Cinna.- ^ had in V'^'"",J"^^VJ;.7 
 r,u i 1 nioi er ace - » supply : eox es.'^e.- i» plundered.- »> surrounded.- '^ a i roj^- 
 lt nt co. ' r c i m • fnstea.l . • quun. lictnres imperata perfecerunt. ccrnere. ou.n st.pa- 
 n.inr C( n. ;'';'^' ''" ;' ..- ^ ' . ._ia vouou<dit t«.havo n-tnrned ihe corn and ^'i\en it 
 tuui ''^'V.'^ •;';,^^:,'^,,\' ,a„,^ 'l!\'5 ;vas uJife^f ibest) tbin-r I ciiM have done : <.r would 
 um-T,e. n he L^t li^i "^^^^^ me to do. in ord.-. to, etc.-»» It woul.l have been b. l.-r 
 h ) J .lid l,L- p ev Mned (i e. to prevent him).- " the -ods ou-ht to liave wished 
 ■ losA i.^JAv HMover tliev haveuse<l some harshly irarhledsontences.-'» ve.i- 
 t i o ^0 in some measure.-'-' /. e. if vou had let him alone.-" the arch-pirat ■.- 
 " ^rTete n^ to n"«o but to arcfnpirota, anith.r har.li ^}^^f^^-;:i^;:(;i:^Z 
 funerJde alinuo. to put somebody to death.- '♦- sui)ply : w/W'/^" esse.- ^IM/'J 'fi" " 
 Zrl^dtf'eZe The tn-lish expn-ssi<ms should be varied by synonyms of ^pn'vwlu» 
 ^;;T_ '27'' uich o you" is not iwed at uU, i. e. which you are not enUiled to at all. 
 
 23. n>ss.m Pe-q,n; mnlta^decta^enta^r^nm^^ 
 promissum pairis non es:?e* seivjliuui. lb. Oil. 6, io. 
 
 ^ Interrogative subjunctive. 
 
 t; 593. The siihjunctivc is used ia interrogative sentences if a declara- 
 tive assertion is placed in the form of a question, to imply that the con- 
 trary of the assertion should hold, or should have held good, or that the 
 •iction of the predicate cannot take place, or that an imperative sentence 
 is expected as answer to the question. Such subjunctive questions may 
 l)e introduced by interrogative adjectives or adverbs, but not, generally, 
 bv interrogative particles, except by an (Ex. to Obs. 1). 
 
 Or. 1 The predicate is placed in the i-resknt (sometimes in the perfect) suhjunc- 
 • ^^-'c •; r .^,^; iw. th,i<' of the «pFMvFn This subjunctive is rendered by the po- 
 
 ^,mbv V./r/A/\- Qmspidet celentJltem in<:enu L- Bmio defu ss. I^o .^j^^^^^ 
 
 Colldldo\<K not knowing, bow learned cm- wise ^^J^^'^'^^.'^^l^Z 
 fuissciUam infamiam judicii corrup 1 ^^^^['^ ,\'^^^^^^^^ polueHm ? 
 
 Sll^^H^-'.■'■;o .v;.'vo„\ ;re:v;;;'«sj ;,:;. Atu^i i^didfs/or a» c.pa„.e or .,0. 
 
 r!mmlio.n.ilu»him.cllmadfapurl.H-rtol,l.ciw.,; Ln.4.3. 
 f.„. ■> Ti,» niprnpFrT sfim'NrTivE (more rari'ly the pfrfzctI is used 1) '' "'«n 
 
 tinLM.ished, b.-inir ren. ered ''' »' ,f'V' ^,^^'> "; .'"^^^^^^^ plehis privatum 
 
 Si?" wi^fXKcllii^TK^^^ 
 
 n^ed) arms a-.^dnst a tribui.o of tbe people ? ; ^;\;^^^^ ^ do n ich ^ ^^ ^^ ^ ^ . ^, 
 
 42.--Stomaciulr, C;nnus sed qmdy«c..r^^^^^^ fi*' ^1^4 1 2) If tlie question is the apodosis 
 he could do nothini:^ H). (Ml. 3. 14. Me f^^- V/HiV-oro m _ nuis civis ei reiri non fave- 
 of a hypothetical period : Hanc causam si "[f;[^/>^^|,«,^J -;,?;",, Ivovldnot favor ih2.t 
 r,t qui. etc. ". \i \\^^^!^^ '^?i;" l^^t Z mpiv ' a co^^^^ ^^^^« ^^"''^ 
 
 w i h the force of a potential future, and is ^^ "''■•'^^f '," ^.^:J^^',^, Ss slrmOnis accedel 
 Ennio, reliquis poCtis ro«r. v/./rm lit "«"""';^"i\").^ Si^.f.")^; 'fmow Hotner, Ennius, 
 r.-nt : ipse nunquam ab il'^^cerrima content pne^/et^rf^^^^^^^^^^ ^ ^ 
 
 .-Mid the other poets to emp <>y f ?"iV^"^\«^„;,^"^,^V'?c Or 31 10^) - But in this kind of 
 from that strictest style of critical i'^'»^""" ?.• ,^'^' >J';irti ' ^^^^^ dissimillimis 
 
 questi..n also prosent subjunctives "^J^'' l^^^^^^^^^.^^^^lj^^f «e^en stage-players doing 
 porsoni^ Patisfaciebant: e-o non f^/''^^'«, ' ' J^,^;J .^^^.V^^^ 
 justice to the most heterogeneous roles, and .^honld I not take Pa_i«S' ^^ inferiOrem 
 
 1. Qttid etiim ei pr.rU.ia.f Q--. -«.!!!f^"E^s^;S^S.^.;S"^ 
 
 ^^^^^:7::^x^^^:^^^'^^ 
 
 ' Mention.- 
 Lk*- ^fU^cbaS;;- -V,;;-bc .,ack«ldi.. tUe praise: 
 
382 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 34 93 — 6 Ouis lionOroni. quis jrloriam, etc., tarn unquani pxiwfaty qnam igiioniin!am, 
 
 iniain"iam*etc.. /Vr/mr-J/ 11>. !'• O. iti, 91.- 7. Iln.nini aiit-'ii, pnostflru qiii^ ]X).<sit nisi 
 
 e Iv Ih N. D. 3. 10, -^5.- 8. Quid .-go nunc tibi dc AfncS saihamf lb Pet.. Coms. 3, 
 
 li" qi utn rnajurc^J m.st.i adv.-nas rt-^cs* no.i fasiidiennts ? lb. 4, 3.- 11. Nunc vcro 
 quid/ da/ Ion pat:0nu8>': in\-jusMu.di causa ^^nn\ face rent omn.s Cras., et 
 
 blitu' ■' lb 2 2 5f).— 13. Blcsamius ivrannum C:Psarom H-nf>eret , lb. 1>(J. iz. .i-.. 
 -14 O'/ieNcr'/v-m et ;w/^/-fr doi.fc rcliam ct in regiam meam anuiltus perveuu^set? 
 T iv 42 "^41 — ir) Owiv eniin ei rciri non fartnf fujus onin«Mn atafem in populi Koni.ini 
 belli' cou^umpt'am esse niendnissel ? Cfc .1). j. 2. H.- Ifi. Idem de ist.« ^^'^P'i^JlJ^J'r.^;*;;;; 
 ^///oeniui nomine potius sophismata i,ophi<rns) apiycUenif ben. Lp. 4;..— 1 *. LouM\aiu 
 me tihic()inmitiercaususn<m!*um: comisaiOrem'" tecum armwveuieutem reci/>ia;/if" 
 
 Liv. 40, y. ^^ 
 
 :C) Subjunctive in imperative sentences. 
 ^ 591. The potential subjunctive (aside from conditional periods) most 
 freciuently occurs in imi)erative sentences, reprcsentin^i^ the predicate as 
 the object of the will, advice, niAYEH, TEUMitssiON, or wish of the 
 speaker (imperative and optative subjunctives). 
 
 Rem. 80. Imperative subjunctives occur both in t lie present and per- 
 fect ; optative subjunctives occur in all tenses excejit the porlV-ct. 
 
 Ons. 1. If the predicate is in the second person, it is most usually placed in the im- 
 perative (P. 1, § 414) and often in either of the two future tenses (K. 75, Ous. 1). Hut 
 hometimes the second person of the present sul\junctive is used in such sentences. 
 These subjunctives are most usually made dependent on a verb implying a command, 
 prayer, advice, or wish, as: A'^/Tro (/(^vT/zn, I couiuiand you to l>e i)re>enl. Liv. 21,21. — 
 QuiBsu/nus vos, hac reconciliatiOne conjumri a nobis f^inafis ; We beseech you, «How 
 vourselveM to be united l)y us in reconciliatitm. Liv. 40, 40.— In h:ec \i'T\n\Jitres})Osfu/o, 
 1 demand you to swear to these words. Liv. 22. 53.— DuOlnis ducibus r> misftis o/>orfet ; 
 It is necessary you alone should resi>t two commanders, lb. 22. 39. If denoting per- 
 mission, llot'is added : Dwas licet; Take Inm away! Cic. Or. 2, u:j, 255. But the lan- 
 guage frequently understands such vc»bs of command, etc., using tlie subjunctive with 
 the force of a direct imperative, as : Uno animo/^<7rt/i» sen;ltum, equites recenseatl", a'ja- 
 /wcensum, lustrum conddtis ; Sdect unanimously the Senate, examine the lisi ol the 
 kni'dits, perform the census", constitute the lustrum. Liv. 40, 46.— Capiat restim ac te 
 «/.s77c//(/a.'^ cum hero ; Taken rope and hang yonr^^vM with your master. Plant. Pa-u. 1, 
 2, 1S5.— Miseriienostrae^n-^'/a.^ quod a Vi1)r)ne subito discessimus; Attiihute to our 
 wretched condition the fact that I suddenly left Vibo. Cic. Att. 3. 4. See Kx. 1.— More 
 frequently, however, the second person thus used has the force of an indefinite subject, 
 as: Facete lioc cwn'?c/a.s' adversano ; You (i. e. ixny one) 7/iay ironically c^/iCe</fi this to 
 your adversary. Cic. Or. 2, 71, 2S<5. 
 
 Obs. 2. The first person singular generally denotes a wisn, and may often be taken 
 for a future, except in negative sentences : (^uam primum mon«r.' inquit ille. Homo 
 demens! Non vult mori qui opt at ; Ler me die (may I die) as s<»on. as possible, quoth 
 he. O you fool ! He does not mean to die who savs that he wishes so. Sen. Ep. 117.— 
 Sed ne dum huic obsequar vobis inolestus sim f But I wish, I may not displease you 
 white obeying tliis man. Cic. Fin. 5, 3, 8. (Sec Obs. 0.) 
 
 Obs 3. The first person plural contains a command directed to other persons which 
 the B()eaker offers to follow himstlf : Percjamns igitur ad reliqua, et institfitum ordinem 
 persequamvr : Let us, therefon-, proceed to the remaining iH)ints, and lollow tlie order 
 indicated. Cic. Brut. 4-3, \h^.— Morhlmvr. milites, et morte nostril ei-ipiamus exobsulione 
 circumveiitas legiOnes ; Soldiers. Id //••>• die, and by our death let us free the surrounded 
 legions from the siege. Liv. 22, (10. Ex. 2. 3. 
 
 Obs. 4. The third person frequently represents the predicate as dependent on the will 
 
 ^ Aliqiiid expefere.tcn^trivo. for something.— ^ to shun.— 3 /»o>«i/fY r/if' a/Kv7j».'>\ I am 
 diso•u^ted withsomebodv.— * immigrant kings (i. e. kiuL's born in foreign countries).— 
 6 tobeloathof.— «as attorney.— 'to be bound.— «> write Ciesar down a tyrant ; |)ro!ioiince 
 him a tvrant in writing.— «table companion.— »« as a fellow reveler.— ^^ recipiam 
 may either be taken lor an interrogative subjunctive, or for a potential future according 
 to p. 351, Obs. 4, B. 
 
 roTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 383 
 
 nflhe person spoKen to, commandhig or advising this person to see the action Perform- 
 Cc VSJ;? amesTiue qu.e id quod audiunt e^i^nme^^yr^r^r.^^-^^-^\^^ 
 nn;e«tus causa insu.surretur ; Let thy t-irs 6« such that theyar^ nuic.cu lu 
 
 ?;^y hear, and not what by f '■'M'^»/'^^! 'i^'%^t f^'Jiy't^f^^ ""out' S^^. 
 
 V,. 1 1 4 _ ihrc i'dtur pr mum inlainiar/^ra/'/?'; /v«c '"'*^,'^V^5'^*^^ ^ A i Vhiii.-^ nm- 
 
 «■^Ve^nnc,! Ci^Qu Fr. 1, 1, 11, Ex.9. lO.-Somet.mc, «he third pe„on refers to the 
 tnealcer httmelf. if the predicate is pasfue or impersonal. Ex. 11. li. 
 ObTs Negative imperative sentences, If not referrins to the second Pe'.'»';- «f"'^?^; 
 
 potest, ne susaptafur. Cic. P. o. -J4. " r*-'*^/!'"" ^u ' sometimes also by m with 
 
 tVenlrum. m ri> admlnVus Olonof womierX 0'= Fan,. 7, 18 .J ^f ^J„, ^' '^J^son mea,iS 
 
 (referring to ^"V^-ry "M^) '■^^^/.^''^^'^•/'Jf.^'l^/.mh.^ of 'U^^^^ Non eo sis consilio 
 
 fru'aliiv to have no silver and gold. Sen. Ep. 5. 
 
 OB^ (i Sentences expressing a wish are mostly expressed by velim or jdlem {cyjnam 
 or cJ/^m/M w h a d,!',^ iTredicate in tl>ciniinitive or -"^H""-^'''^\u ''f^dS • it 
 
 duo; I rather icish to l)e the auth..r of one speech of L ^^^r^^J'^'he verbs of wishing 
 
 i:!;,^r,;,'lun,Vlyi,,s .1- ori.in:H,co,,c;.p.i.m oM 
 ?rS f.f\f-^f-;iS-Sunmrin,nirn"plM^^^^^^^ 
 
 K-d':^ff^::^s't-^ii8-fnS(S;^S^^^^ 
 
 l-u'a^<iue meo b-ne et hhciter ere7nat .' -^^'^V ^^s hap ui pro^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 colic: <-ue ! Liv. 40. 4«. But sometimes a mere si bjuucti\e P'^^^\"\"; ?'"%,_ .j.^ ,j^i-e of 
 s e ke bminis etiam cau^H tibi ahsit C. Flaminu memoria Vfly also for ^^^^J^^^^^ 
 iLoLu, the precedent of C. Flan)i..ius be far In-in your n u ! ^i ^ ^^r/V'^y^; i." /e 
 
 r^'T "" ';:;d"th;e' u^t'^ ^Thu^n ^i;?^" ' .:'auci;^y&muK : c^uod 
 
 l)v rf, or Od- in wliidi iusiance the predica e i» realed »» '\,^"' Vhai Jvm tcrr.tnrned 
 clauses ,B. VI ) : ^n;ihl.pne,erUosr^ra( .. Jnl» er- 
 
 •bXhr-'anllS: Ui<?sfm"et?Ari;;ie?c'haL'^e in™ e same period : H.c ad te die na- 
 
 \ 
 
384 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTiy-E. 
 
 .nii mnn Krrinsi • ntio vfbiam. Pusccptn» non essenumt ne quid ex oftdora matrc postca 
 
 oS that day/or my mother had not b<yrne alierw>tfd8 1 Cic. Att. 9, 9, 3. bee Lx. lt^31. 
 o«^ 7 oiton iiniH-rative Dmlirates in th»x?inl)jiinctive have the force of a concepsiox 
 
 snhi inctive retVrs to the uresfut, and, the perlect j,'rni'rally to the P'^''^ /^* • V*:^,„^"^ 
 
 £s;:,':'fi;^vidin;icenln<.n.u.^r(/nJi.f//7i«Ml^ 
 
 Avioiif even if this he wroin?) itytertainly is not odious. Ce. Atad. A ->i. f «^'7: " J 
 
 ni PhUit i>us cur advcrsus ruDfThiK- dec.ruerCmus : quid IVr^rus meruit cur ^o i < n - 
 
 S /hoi. "isim.isy r;,.*.^..f that Philip may hav. <l<r\^-^-'^';;'^ ''^'y''^^^^^^ 
 
 resolve thi< airainst him ; ;„ut what hH=5 l'er.^eu:i done that we alone of all should be 
 
 hostile to him y Liv.41,;ii. Ex. 3i-:«. „„.n,.^ 
 
 rt/fm'' (U tail. IS. ^''; !.•„!>,';.. ,,. o i-^ Xo illi ouidem on non prius qiiam \ enu- 
 
 null's eJpnesklii reipubiieu. esse. Liv. 2:> 59.--.l4, De ^]^^^l!^;:;^^^%^i^ 
 10.7.-15 Ne tramieri.-^ IbCrum, n^ q.nd lei t't;> ^t/ cum Sagnntlnis. ''^- ;/• "'^- ,_ 
 1 Ea*; litteras in enndem tascieulnm-^ velim addaf. Cic. Att. 1-- •^^ " \V/ur ,t n 
 vGr^/*/^ia% rv/im lb. 7, 7, 7.- 18. Velim tibi eum placCre (l"a.n maxime lb Br it. .1, 
 ai .- rqnatn r^^^^^^^ d^ his etiam oratoribus qui I'odie .unt VJ>;;l'CcM-e '^^'r/^ I^h^^. , 
 2 H - 20. Vdlem ade..<et Antoni.is, m(,.l..;=« s ne a-l voc-lns^o H»- P» 1- , \^^{^.^h If^^'^^ 
 «liquid Antonio pnet.-r ilium lib^dlum^i hb'm.<et_ s.-ribore. .^'^- J.^"' • f/; V';.n7q il 1 
 n e ) ipsl.is interitu mallem litteras meas(/e4./erur6.3.q„am »'*'^^V34 P„n .ii m niian i 
 -k^NiMnn accidisset^^ tempus in quoperspicere P«'^f^'^3,»l"^"V i ,VTi' 1 - 25^ C^^^^^^^^ 
 V.rntiim fuerem lb Div. 3. K».— 24. Falsus utinam vatesss ,sim .' Li\ . -J», h'. -^- ^i"'» 
 J/i^, ^^e iVp™Vis3« p Tve^^^ /imr/.' Cic. Tusc. 1, 49, 119.- 2(5 liiud ^' ^^"«"^;-^ 7\'^ 
 
 4 Kr^m Ih Div. 5. 17.- 27. U/i»am e-o t.-rtius vobi^ amicus «f *'^^^' vl: * 
 'Sisc 5 2-2, J?.- 28. r)i.m;n liberOru.n t.ostrOnnn ^^;^:i^^^;^]^'\l^:^'''l^f {S% 
 1 o f; _- «xi rtinam in Ti Graecho ta s mensy?/^^c«(?^' Cic. Brut. -^. l(M.-- -lo. viuoii (.i 
 mnen ar;wa : ' L V i^ 13^ 31. 1«/../;//='» civ-es mei, rale<,nt! sv,t incolume.^o ,,,,,, 
 
 5 rVmesH ^ //! oil HV .s/./" h:pe urbs pnrelaia. mihiq.uc patria ^}^''^''^^}.^'';: 
 M • 1 "«'-^i Vtndat*^ jedTs vir bonus propter aliqiia vitia^ ; pestilente«^« sxntjt 
 A /i;y7A //; «alabres • quuM-o, si ha-c e.nlon'bus venditor non dixerit nuin mjuste aut 
 
 nun f.e^^^^ ? 3?13.- :«. Ne dt .ane summum malum dolor.: '»« «''" .^;:[ « 
 
 y"t lb Tusc. 2, •5.-34 . Fuent ille Bruf.is^^ qui dominatu rc-io rempublicam libenlN it : 
 
 1 T.. innnire for - ^ to trace out.- » quarter^.- « to approach.- » topccnre.— • to ex- 
 tort froi - Mo unite.- ^ I make the following conditions.- «brief and pnnctual (or 
 'wiuS- restraint M 10 econc,mical..- - P-vjiVT^'R C ^- ScT^m loi clZ 
 " DoiidiM- upon.- 15 deliberate.- '« ring, seal.- " § 3.)., K. b.— '''/';. ^ a ,,.Mrntiv« 
 1« J -cs branches.- "-^ to undertake.- »» to .eck contemplate J" «• <^-- '"^'i^J^'^^ 
 T...rf Tf • T ft this be «■nou-h • h-t us stop here as to the causes.- " drawn.— raise my 
 ? > [4 i'^^wh did not "u.p till they ime.- -^ mnntp se vmferre. to Jave a n.-ht to 
 irefcr themselves. The sentence is imperative merely in torm: ' <>" ""V 1 f rn\ • MUp^ 
 E Mu t im-rer themselves and to boast'. In Enj?lish we use a declarative form . they 
 hi-e 1 o i.d t.' Th^ c'o-ordina.e ^ olorlati sinr shmvs that the Latin sentence is no con- 
 
 ceiv-ed as declarative.-" to the sf.me file.-" ^ive l»l^V'^T^.^hnd not"c";m'e - iVfow 
 but -3« aitornev.- 3» treatise.- ^J^ to miss.- ^^ I wish the tinie had not come. now 
 
 i.'h I ho d -" prophet.- 3« with spread sails with llyni- auivas.- ^^ to «'ali — 
 s ' ulvVr ojoin - "'i wish all hai.piiu'ss t.. my fellow-citizens.- *» may no evil bef 11 
 them -^'i mosperoiis -^^ blessed i ^^ ,tand fast.- ** supposin- a g^'/^VV/'"/'' t)^^ 
 houTJ.- "defects- 46 unwholesome.- ^^ granted that he had been that Brutus who, 
 
 etc. 
 
 DErENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 385 
 
 add (lei tamen non posscm ut qucmquam mortunm conjnngcrcm cum immortahum 
 rei'iOne lb Piiil 1, 6, 13.- 35. Niliil metus priesens ab Kimifmis sententias nostras 
 iudlnarih ■ fuit certe tamen aliquid quod tarn longara deliberatiOnem fsiceret Liv. 
 tuamvu ^^_^^^^^ ^.^ .^ ^,^^ ^_^^^^i^ ^^^.^^ ^^^^^^^ ^j..^ . j.,^. ,jj„(jo esse ccepit ? Cic 
 
 Verr 'l 14 —37 Nemo, inquies. unquam fuit (ita eloquens). Ne fuent. E-io einm quid 
 dt>^i<ierern; non uuid viderim disputo^. Cic. Or. 29, 101.- 38. Ne (zquavertlxs^ Uanui- 
 bali Philippum : Pyrrho certe a^quabitis. Liv. 31, 7. 
 
 @ 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 § 595. DicPKNDENT SUBJUNCTIVES are those which derive their force 
 either from their principal predicates, or from the conjnuction which in- 
 troduces the clause. They are either general or rAirncuLAR subjunc- 
 tives, accordiui; as tliey are common to all classes of clauses, or occur 
 only 'in some particular kinds of them. The dependent general sub- 
 junctives are of two kinds : {a) Subjunctives of indirect discourse ; 
 
 (/>) Subjunctives by attraction. 
 
 Or«« 1 The followin'^ are examples of rARTicTiLATi subjunctives : Stint qyi dicant, 
 etc Tlu're arc people who say, etc. ; where dicant is a iiarticular '^nl'J""''"''^.^^^'V: 
 rin.Von i' in relative clauses (p. 551). Timeo ne rcniat (I am alraid lest he jnay come) 
 w ere the subjunctive is determined by the conjunction m. }n ' Si adjnt sicloquatur 
 
 hc\ve?e r -ent. he would speak thus) the subjunctive addt is peculiar to hypotheti- 
 
 •• Uhm^c- ^ All he particular subjunctives are treated in connection with he clauses 
 
 to which they belouL'CB. VI.), only the general subjunctives belonging to the present 
 
 chapter. , , • i /1 „„ 
 
 Ors 2 Xot everv subjunctive occurring in a dependent clause can be considered as 
 a (Wndent siib^^^^^^^ tlu- sense dellned above, such subjuiict.ves often having au 
 
 fnt en ent pott-ntial force ^according t.> 1 592 foil ), as : (iuodsi id quod dtonun aver- 
 f nil f mine ouomie variaverit fi-rtuna (ivhkh omen the gods may actrt). Ln . 23. 13. Here 
 the sub nc cv^r^^^ is potential (imperative, according to R. bO, Obs. 4). although it ,9 
 ! n de lei de It Vl^^^^^^ a subjunctive has both the force ol a potential and of a 
 
 lei e uK^^^^^^^^^ : Mi.a luitaccuratio, sed ea?/« citius veteratonam quam ora- 
 
 t Sm J ^'.ni • S^ a remarkable nicety, but of a kind that you would c(dl it so- 
 
 I b-tTcal rather than oratorical. Cic. Brut. b7, 23^. Diceret has thecharacter of a poten- 
 i il Md> mcUv^ and of a dependent subjunctive determined by«(. bome- 
 
 n es eve it iiav be considered «ioubtful whether the author has taken the ^tV.Ii^^Sl.e 
 f mtentialor dependent, as : Multi rumr.res (erant). qtios c?/;?frgm veros ; Hfc^^ere 
 nu rm!>rs which /.S/.0./W ,M (or • which / ^;i./..^;) *« X^ On"^ ^^''o^ Ibr a del 
 Here aqitrem mav be either taken for a potential subjunctive (II. &0, Obs. b), 01 tor a de- 
 pendent subjunctive, peculiar to relative clauses (p. jOO). 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE OF INDIKECT DISCOURSE. 
 (S> DIRECT AND INDIRECT STATEMENT IN GENERAL. 
 
 ^ 59«. Statements which the author represents as the conceptions 
 (tliou-liis, utterances, feelings, perceptions, etc.) of persons introduced 
 by liim in the discourse, are either direct or indirect. They are direct 
 if the ^xMhov ' quotes' them, i.e. states them in the same form and words 
 used by the person introduced (Ex. a). They are indirect if the author 
 mentions them in his own words, making them dependent on a verb of 
 saying, thinking, etc., expressed or understood (Ex. h and c). Indirect 
 
 1 T et ns 8UDno«e that it was not a present fear which averted our leelinjrs from the 
 Rom m« - » t^> asser -- 3 aqvore aliquem alicui., to consider somebody »n equal \o 
 Sar •; to compare him to another (Supposing you cannot or will not compare, etc.). 
 This perfect has the force of a futiire-perlect. 
 
386 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 387 
 
 ..ten.en. always l.ave tUe .>.nj^^ -:-^:::;^;™^:^Sr^ 
 
 liein.' citl.ci- INFIMTIVE clauses (hx. k), <» UMIE cla 
 
 premcutc in tlio srnJUNCTivK (Ex « ^mU))-, . „»-™«<J- 
 
 45.) ' ■ „,,, ,<, INFINITIVE CLAVSE. Romulus dixit «6 deum esse. C.c. 
 
 OB« 1 Direct .,a,eme„„ .on.ajn.n, ,u,natio„. - f.«-'; /-I™!"."' 'vc^'-'-'y 
 i,,?,!;.;,. which ,nu,. we in.;.r,e^^^ 
 
 the s'libjcct. iUKi 
 
 cm).ruUHl ill the =^ciitence c.nitain.n- the ^ tatu u^ ' ^^^ introduce direct 
 
 buerim, nihil .«pus est commem oiilie • .^^'/j.^^gf _ 3. m me ubi vidCrunt ' H> 
 m" tarn enimcul. ami c-o P^fsta u» C c ^,^-'24 14-4. 'Nihil hoc art no.* ; ad 
 sunt. Pa-nphile'. ^^/'/vi/JS;' i qu ' Hd\'um'ude quid rCuUTat. I.j Top. 12 51. 
 is Turn Quinctin.. ' Kn "^^^K///ln// ^ ;';,Vlo S r i.i'fl ... iliam boreditStem? '• 
 
 ilKMU e as the statem.-nl* „r other pers i - • "V"'- ° 'I (Indirect : Es...vero the 
 B, tieaid • 1 will "'"•1''?::":^' /'TV ,e'":?aiemen.r lii'l. theau.hor mnkes •"»"«;;": 
 ;;ircr.'^^aS:;r '(rre^^^ly'-nun^'i 'ilr,hn';eati«e, «cept those ot the ..hU „.e.,.,oa, .1 
 
 "'r'^";;:;;:;:::::i:::^:uCxr;.:\....jc,i.o^ 
 
 Ob.. 4. Statements arc ""t expro.sed a dir c , h t^^ ^,_.,_^j,,.^, „r pereeivn.-^, 
 
 sentence containing them is ^»;.'^:; ;^';' ' ^; .^*; e n i. ' ' --ted in tlie author:s statement, 
 except thatthepresents^'/O or/f)./);'/A«/ aM.<)n^^^ nieierer de meis civibu- hi. etc. , 
 to r. re>»eiu them as -uarded opinions ^Vi if , tV- Tie Fin 1 :i.- 0/nnor, eis crura 
 5i;y;?I :i^>nld --einyc.mn.rymenba.ly ^^^%^^',,^ «tc^b. Rose. A. 20, 
 sutlVini,'anlur quum, etc. , I Otlieie uicu „ 
 
 '% W (Manses of iitcVirect discourse are either dirertl./ or iiulireetly 
 ai^'o:T:.r^. (so.neti.nes a no.ni) of sayi.i,, thi.iUin,, ory^^- 
 
 dene.ulent on such verbs, they arc called oi,LiQi E "^''/^^'^y ^ 
 
 all those thoughts and utterancesw^^ 
 
 '-:^^;;,;;zr.'rn^^ be -j;- «^;!^^,;- rr;;!i;|;;;w 
 
 ^nertiner (it does not concern u-*).— ^^v^»^ U>»ir"^**=^ 
 nothiitg, O paiu.- « however iuconveuient. 
 
 author, if using his own words in dii'ect statement, would express in the 
 form of an independent sentence (Ex. a). 
 
 Chiuses of indirect discourse dependent on oUlqne clauses are called 
 suBOBLiQUE CLAUSES, Containing those utterances which the speaker, 
 even in direct statement, conceives and expresses ^% clauses (Ex. h). 
 
 Obuqi-e CLArsF.s : Dcmocritus dicit innumeraUTis esce mvndos. Cic. Acad. 4, 
 
 a. 
 
 ».,. (I)ireet: Inrvinuiiihik-^, inquit, sunt mnndi).- \ entns est ve hmtiurn impejum 
 suxtbiere nm j)0,*set : He was afraid ( ^ lie thoutrht) he could not resist the attack of the 
 enemy Civs. 13. G. 5. 47. (Direct : ' Hostinm i>npettfm\ iuquH ' smtinere iwnjw/ero ). 
 — Oulrslvit a mcdicis qiiemadrmdmn se hablret ; He aslicd the physicians what was 
 the character of his disease. Nep. Dion. 2. (Direct : ' Ouemadmodum • niQU't, vie 
 liat- o" ^y— Orilbant vt i^e cihojitrdrent ; They prayed to help tlum to food. ties. 15. Lr. 
 7,78. "(Direct: 'A^(wd6o', inquiunt, 'a/:/;"»".?^^.'')- .... . ,_, . - 
 
 b SiBOBLiQUE clauses: Neirat Epicilrus jucnndo posse vivi visi crim rirtuteyita- 
 frr ' Epicurus pay? that men cannot live happily vnle.-^s they lire virtuou.«hj (l>"(;ct : 
 Miicunde\ inquit, ' vivi non potest rdsi cmn lirtufe viriti/r'). Cic Tusc. 3, 2(), 49 — 
 Damocles exonlvit Dionvsium ut abirc WcXireX, quod jam. beatus noUet esse ; Damocles 
 imploicd Dionvsius to h't him depart because he did not care any lonqer to be happy. 
 lb. 5, 21, G2. (Direct : ' Liceat mihi \ inquit, ' abire, quod jam beatus nolo esse ). 
 
 (?) OBLIQUE CLAUSES. 
 
 § 598. Oblique clauses are either declarative, imperative or interroga- 
 tive (5^ 378, 4). The declarative oblique clauses generally have the form 
 of infinitive-clauses, but if dependent on certain verbs of saying or think- 
 ing they either must or maybe finite (see Rem. 82-85). Imperative and 
 inrerrogative clauses are always finite*. All finite oblique clauses have tUir 
 predicides in the subjunctive. For apparent exceptions see Rem. 82, Obs. 3. 
 
 Rem 81 Oblique clauses have the form of an infinitive clause if 
 the indirect statement contained in them is declarative, and dependent on 
 those verbs of saying, thinking, etc., which, according to the general rules 
 (i; 393 R '^O require the construction of an accusative with the infini- 
 tive. ' Foi^ examples see the Ex. to A*. 86. For the instances when a 
 nominative with tlie infinitive must be used, see § 402. 
 
 Ob« 1 In the historians, verbs of snyin?irovernin? oblique clauses are frequently ?/;i- 
 .^?sW'if"asih supplied Vn.m the connection, as: .E-hii leu'il.os ad O^sarem mittnnt 
 ro Amm atixili n : Ita sc omni tempore de populo Roman., wenfps e.sse ur etc. ; 1 h e 
 
 Thn/" sent e v.. St,, Caesar t(. appiv for h.-lp : Thnjhadnt all tjmes so well demjed 
 of t le Ronvin .e.M.le that, .-tc, Ca's. B. G. L 11, (supply : TTViO said (qvi dicerent). they 
 L etc -DiTtiia^^ ccrpitnequid gravius in fratrem statueret : 
 
 ^^;/semaeSe rl^xc. ; Diviriacus be..u, to nnplor.. Cir^^ar n.,t to take «"y ha^^^o"' In 
 ires a<-ainst his brc.tlier. He said that he knew this to be true. etc. Cie^. B G. 1. J'- ^" 
 r,.,th ^cnu-nces verbs of .aying are implied in the governing verbs rogatum and obse- 
 crdre. 
 
 On- 2 The construction of ordinarv verbs of sayin- and thinkin- with 9'"'><J a"[}.tbe 
 .ubiincTive instead of an inflni.ive cla'use belon-s t.> late Latinity. e>^P<^c.ally that of tbe 
 Ssias ca auth<,rs. But some traces of this construction occur in ante-chssical 
 Hud c1 s«ical \t t"^ Thus Plautus construe, sdo with 9'/o^/ at'd the subjunctive in 
 Tl nil 7(1 ami Cicero connects the same construction with inteUiqerem bin. 5, 11, 30, 
 uu\iH\t^\n\cVri 25 81 In Liv 3 52 2. almost all ..f the older editions gave 
 Jd/«m;i;.;5r.r;^'vL^^ bemg supported by the codices, the 
 
 readinirs of which are senseless. 
 
 For exceptions in regard to interrogative clauses in the oratio obfiqua see p. 769, 6. 
 
388 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 li 
 
 u\ 1 
 
 lem 83. 01)liquc doclarativc clauses take the form of a finite clause, 
 .„ place of an infinitive clause, if the verbs of saying, leeliutr, etc., on 
 which they are made dependent reciuire to be conslrned Willi nt (/id, 
 quill), or \villi quod (J5 o\i''i, K. ^T, 28). 
 
 Ob^ 1 Verb^ of saviii", etc., which require this construction, or admit of it (in which 
 ca.'e cithera rtniteclan.e or an intli.itive clause may l»e usrcl», ahvays ^'••"'^''/V./'nu/'nVn.r 
 the ideaof mijingj-tding, etc., some other idea relcrniii,' lo the charactt/ ol the utitr- 
 
 """^; A n-w^c^lS rcf;;;?ril;^';;;f... or gum (the .reatost ,wt of the y^h. -J^-y^^^^ 
 coustriu'd wiih tliesc coiijiiiRfions <;()vtru ti/ipovfit'e da'fsfs, li. ^..}. 1 lio>t \\ iiitii 
 
 G. 1, 34. Since these conjiiucMons always reqimv tin- siihjunctivc (if tluy nuan * that 
 
 lu^siticatioii of siicli ol)liiiuc clauses IS iiiiuurtaiit <»iily 
 
 I)laced anion-' the ol)li(iue clauses, the same a> intinitive daures, which may Irequently 
 be subslituled for them {li. VI). ^ee § 3'.)J, 14. 2s, -21».* 
 Obs. 2. Quod-clause;* dependent on the verbs of sayinjr. fec'lini.'. etc., mentioned Obs. 1, 
 
 (Direct : Laudans Africilnum 'Ab-tineiis; iiuiuit, ' fuit").— Ca-sur jiraviler .Kduos arni- 
 mt Q'lod (lb tis mil ><ut>ltrltur ; Ciesar earnestly chanjtd ttie .Edui aith Ituvixij Utm icKfi- 
 o'lt axsistance. Ca-s. IJ. (J. 1, KJ.- C'a-aar mihi vjiumil per iittera» quod iion ««^('«^'«'^^ 
 Cic-ar, in liis lerter, exc'i.-<eji me for fiiUhiq to roine (my stayiii*,' away). ( ic. Att. in, d't, ^. 
 See Kx. 1-5.— Rarely the author, by ^uch Quod-clauses, conveys factt» from his own 
 standpoint a^ author, in which instance tiie predicates are placed m ilie u,dicatin\ as : 
 V Wwm re pr(-hen>n< (I no, I hWrXw^ patrOnum j/<f(//>a^ eiim qui tum m mI^erus «-rat .' Do 
 voii lliid fault 'vltk the r<u't that the fiee.iman aided hid former, master who at that time 
 wa^ in distres!? ? Cic. Verr. 1, 47, \l\. Here the character of tlie aid, namely that it was 
 bestowed by a freedman on Ids former ma.>^ter iu distress, is a lellcction ()i the anlhoi\ 
 and not of the subject of repieheiidis. Had Cicero u.<ed the mere iiam.s of ttie parlies 
 the thou-'hr would have been represented as that of the subject, and the predicatt; would 
 have been in the i-ubjunctive (J//?;m/).— Often the indicative is used after ^'^orf iu re- 
 ijard to present actual facts (Ex. W). See pp. 5'.K) and 698. 
 
 * That the Latins did not conceive Quod-clauses, dependent on the verl)s mentioned 
 above, as ' causal clauses' is made evident l)y the fact tliat the use of quia, qnoiuatn, or 
 of theottier causal conjunction- 
 
 not admissibi 
 
 conjunction 
 
 clauses and ordinary causal clauses. Hence, from the siandpoint of tiie En<rli^h coiic«-p- 
 
 lion we would consider tlie-e clauses a^' sub()l)li«iue or • (lua-i-siib-oblique (li. S(. ; It. »8 ; 
 Obs 2.), which would not becorrect for tin; Latin standpoint. This want ot distinction, 
 in En<'lish. between the two kinds of clauses, may oiten cause ambi^'uiiies, as : lie 
 praises him f}ecause he is his friend/ which may mean, * He praises liim fort/u Jact that 
 he is his friend,' or 'He praises him f(»r soinethiiii,',.//y>/M //^6' rea-^oii that he Js his triend. 
 The latter would require quia or quonUiii iu Latin, while the former would be expre^bcd 
 by quod. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 389 
 
 OP. 3 If the author introduces .e....?JaMt^(lo^calj.^^ 
 
 i.^''eic'; whic h re.iu,re 'l^^^;^^X:u!^^^:')]^^do!p^od^^^^ / ^ «»» g^f^ 
 
 piV-dicaie i^ almoM always i'' .\'^/' .'^'^^i'^^l.''^^ ^d aUmadvermm e.^t m eos . on de- 
 liat I have iiiterrupicd you. 9'^^, ^i f:^!:^.//.,-/! sT^Y /rt'/^/o ' I must not tind laultwith 
 \^':olp;ehendere ; Muod vij- ,\;',;; ^^K^^.a t u^e^ be^t..wed on brave 
 
 tlH. lac't thai these ^]i^'\-^:'''' S;t^^^^^^^^^^ l\wd te ubi vi^uru. dm 'f^^XJJ^^l^^''^. 
 
 ;-i!;f^:r;:^;^rrix^rd^;rr^^ 
 
 !;,!;'„.; Onyouracc.,untatwo-lold.ohcmuicat^^^^^^^^ V,^_^^^ .^ ' '^ ;;''j')\VTl^<i 
 
 l.'T; u;'i\TV'TS.Xim;iyh"^ U.nouia'.A Oe so (Comp. p.542, ^014, p. 54.3, 
 
 A'.'l.i ; p. «ili; «i'.»0, B.; p. TC»; ^l » - ^^'-' 1^|; , ^,1 .^,t „, verbs construed with a Qttod- 
 
 Ob-^ 4 If the person or thin? represented aH ho oi>J«^^ int.. a relative clause, which 
 
 ,^,'; i;!detin\te, the Q'}"^- i'^i^l^lll^f ^^^ ,^hi^ s ^^e a. ; Kpicurei huidant eos 
 takes the san,e mood as .he Q;;"i;^,^^^?^„n " raisL those who die with ^'^^""".'i-Vform 
 (jui aqua ainmo monautur : 1 '''^*- "\"\^,,,. Atinite, the statement would have the lorm 
 
 ^j'uVc. 8. -^9. 7-2. If the -':4^\^ ^Vt^e?;^^;^^ ^*^" ^^"^" ^* 
 
 of a (iuod-clause (Epicurci laudant ^^^! «'^ ^ .eptimo die po-t lilite mortem hos- 
 
 ] .E-chine. in Demosthi-nem ^".rM^^«/^ S>Hf,cls^^dednia lelio C«sari gratios egxt 
 tia- ^nmolaurWK Cic. Tusc. 3.;2(.. bj - 2 1 nnc^ps atu ^^. j^^,^.,,,,^.„^ n.irantur 
 
 '^^'^^^^^:^ a^ey;. saying, .Ui^U- 
 
 yolUion, and i.dv.ce) >s by "^^^^^^.^^ ,hc clause is generally 
 
 OB- 1 For Ihc conMruction of imperative etaUMS .n the 
 
 <t:/tTmrT::;l«.r:e' dLsest;. „,a,i^ 
 
 :;;S:,^v"l!^;^-;V^if^"^J,V|;..r...^ 
 
 ihat. etc.; they grudge you that, etc. 
 
390 
 
 CSE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DErENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 391 
 
 a snis Tyndaridis peferet ; Scopa? said lo Siinonidop he iconhl give him half of what he 
 liad l)ai gained lor; tlie rust he should take from his Tyndaridc?-. Cic. Or. 2, 80, 352. See 
 £x. 1. 4. 
 
 Obs. 3. Often the j^ovcrninc; verbs of command, etc., mnst be snpj)lied from the con- 
 nection, the same as verbs of sayinL' will) declarative oblique clauses: rrociimbunt 
 ad pi'dc's, fie piilclu-rrimani [otTiis" (iallia' urlx'in suis inaiiii)iis succi'iuh're cofitrentur ; 
 Tliey fall to tluir kiifi-s (f/e.<f<clnn(f Vi7'ciii(/etorix) not too'ini»! them lo burn the fiueat 
 city in all (iaul with their own hands. Cais. li. G. 7, 1.'). See Ex. 5. 
 
 Oi'.s. 4. Oblique imperative clauses, if not introduced by a conjunction, have tlie same 
 form as those JiKlfpcndeiit imperative sentences which tike their predicate in the subjunc- 
 tive, except that the subjunctive of an- independent imperative sentence is always in the 
 present (st>metimes in the perfect), when-as the subjimctive of the clause is subject to the 
 law of consetution, and hence imnj he in the imperfect. See Ex. 1. 
 
 1. C'icsar respondit, si quid velleiit, ad Idus \\n\\\A rfvertirentnr. C:ps. B. G. 1,7. — 
 2. Pf'tieri/nt ne se et liberos hostibus dt-derent. lb. 7, 2tJ.— 'i. Plerlque c^nsefianl^ ut 
 noctu Iwrfart-nnt. Ih. H. i\ 1. (»7.-4. Vercini,'et()rix dicit.perf<irile essefactu Irumen- 
 tationibus- Ho rflnos jtrohibcre. a'cpio modo^ animo sua ipsi frumenta con'i//n/>ant 
 KdillciiKjue iuctntlnnt. lb. I^ (i. 7, «U,— h. LcLratiunem ad (Yassum mittunt. si velit 
 8UOS recipere, obsides sibi rtniUtat. lb. 3, 8. [For more examples see the Ex. 13 foil, 
 to Kern. 8().] 
 
 Rem. 84. If an oblique clause depoiukMit on a verb (or nonn) of say- 
 in*^, etc., is conceived a>^ an int<MT( miration, the predicate is retrnlaii}' (bnt 
 see W. H.l. Ous. 7) in llie si lurNCTivi:, the obruine clause being called 
 *iNDiiiKCT QUKSTiON'or ' INTKKKOG.VTIVK CLAUSE*. Tlieso clanscs are 
 introduced by the satiie jiarticles, adjectives, and adverbs as the direct 
 questions (^ 123 ; but see Hem. 85, Ous. 7). 
 
 .Epaniinondas qucei^lrif salvus//^ e-ifief clipeus ; Ep. n>>l'ed whether his shield wa? pafe. 
 Cic. Fin. 2. "iO. — .Menedr-nnis qinni/xtt ,'iir (\v scril)endis le<;il)U!» litlera nulla in e<^rum 
 libris hn-fuirtt'ir : M. a?^ke(l irhy in their writ iiiirs not a word /ra^Joi/nd on the makin<xof 
 laws. lb. Or. 1, 11», ^<i. — C'lodius inttrrofjd/iat suos ^«iv txset qui" plebem lame in'c5ret ; 
 Clodius asked his <;antf m;A6» it teas that was starviui,' the people, lb. Qu. Fr. 2, .3, 2. 
 
 Rem. 8."). Iiulirect questions are divided into rnopp:R and iMrnorER 
 ones. Proper interrouative clauses are those that are made dependent 
 on a verb or noun of sayinu^ \viiicli implies the askinu^ of a question, as 
 gucerere, qna'Mio, i)iferr<>f/(lrc and their etpiivalents, as in the e.\anii)le3 to 
 li. 84. — Improper interroirative clauses are those which depend on other 
 verbs or nomis. These have only the irrahiinatical form and construc- 
 tion of interron-ative clauses Avithout beinir conceived as questions actu- 
 ally asked b}' the subject introduced. tSee Ons. 1. 
 
 Obs. 1. Improper iuterroirative clauses are used in the followinjj instances : 
 (a) If the clause coiUains actions represented as i'nceutain or inknown. and the 
 principal predicate states the kind of this unceutaintv. Such predicates are Dut^- 
 tdre, dubium est, incertum est. non lUiuet, audnrjfre, nefc'ire, o(/tifii<ci, adnnidti (in the 
 m«'aniiii; * I wond>-r how.'' etc.), as : IhifAtn n>t/n idem tibi suadeie (piod mihi defjenm ; 
 I doubt whether lemght to j,'ive you the same advice as [I would] to myself. IMiu. Ep. (», 27. 
 — Jncertum est quo ie loco mors exs/)ectet ,' It is unceriiiin at what j)iace death waits for 
 you. Sen. Ep. 2ti.— ()i/>d \\oW\< agendum sit nescio ; I do not know what we shall do. 
 Cic. Att. 12. 7. — Ilic I'arquinius. Prisci Tarquinii &\\\\s fuerit neposve. pftritm Uuuet ; It 
 i« not quite clear wheth'r this Tarquinius wtix the sou* or iriandson of Priscus Tanpiin- 
 ius. Liv. 1,4*). — Hie ita nej^iii^ens vot)is rUlehitur. \\\ vnde audurit ot/nfi/s sit; This 
 man will appear to you as so netrlii^enr as to have for^/oftt^n where he heard [these 
 things]. Cic. Plane. 2.3. 57.— Adinirari >olC't)am undv essef ilia taiita tibi in causis divini- 
 tas ; I used to wonder ivhence had come to you (how yiui had aeipiired) this transcendent 
 tact (this inspirarion) in judicial transactions. Cic. Or. 2, S9. 3ti2. Ex. 1. 2. 22. 2:1 29. 
 
 (l>) If the principal predicate; de-i,i;nates an action by which the uncertainty repre- 
 pented by the clause is, was. or maybe removed (U* defined. The verbs ^overuiiiLr such 
 'nuiirect que-'ii(»ns'' are. mostly, verbs of savinir, knc.wiuL'. learninir, showin;;, teachinj;, 
 
 > CVn,<j5r«. if meaning:* to beof opinion that somethinj;,s7tM//</l>edone' (i. e.. if theclauso 
 isimp»'rative>, may also take an intlnitive clause with a jrerundial predicate (ut iter fac&- 
 rent., or iter faciendum esse). — '•' foraging.— ^ they should only will» good grace destroy, etc 
 
 . 
 
 iii'iiidiu" as. aferre (to allege), diceie, f ^1^^/^' ""^,.''',;,^^^ exiiicdre^exponere, videre, 
 
 circa m^^idce re, prm'ipere, curare and '«^^'"^/^J^jf '„ . ^. meaning ' to look out^ and to 
 Oo chiose between alternatives) ..r^/>^.V<^^ ,,r), and many other 
 
 cxuectM. many iiupers.)nal predicates (as •/^'f'/.^Vo^^^^^ QUije apud CicerOnem gerun- 
 Sf.re>si!;nsc,f%iu.llarinu.<.rt;as:Ibj^^c^^ 
 
 ?/ r? 7- non poluit iHer utri virtule ^"«'"^^''•^IV'^ri.Vv.' ol if, > 44.- Doceant qui vir Sex. 
 
 pmn'ise's. II». l.-).*44. Ex. 3-5. 11-17. 19. fO- 24 _ ..^.^^^ Interrogations, have the force 
 ^ ^c Sometiuu'si.uerr..gativeclaus.-s tlKs mcas^^^^ ar/a/ //.o ; If 
 
 of a negative declakative ^lay ' ^ • ^! /.' (fnn afraid what Ino would do ; I am 
 Uu-e._'o(is don<.t exist, ^ how mil /««■/%''•,. \^ 'II; 44 
 
 uVraid we could do uotlung with Ino). Cic. N. »• ^' ^^J ^^" .overuing verb of 
 
 Ob«< 2 As in other obli(iue clauses so in J'^-'-TJ tcrasS^^^ (i- '■ ^" ^V^' 
 
 savim-, etf.. is fre<,uently understood, as : ,^'^,^;' , I'.^J^^rf^^V/n , esset ; Labienus in- 
 K IV-i/ii/ gaau/o cum periculo l^'^'J''''^^ 'V.^ ^\!^' u ht ^iou the wlnter-qu^ 
 fo mtVuVsarbv letter how dangerous It was to c^^^ , f,,j.n, ^f indirect, 
 
 ci^ U. G. 5, 47. Here belong l»»>^^' f?';'' 1^^.,.^' 'it is the same' (whether-or) 
 questions in which such expressions s it isimlim.uit^^ UnbeciUlne simus, non esse id 
 must be suiM>li^'<l^ J^^ : Fatenuir, '''•"/ /^ft/^^, J '^X/ or gaick. we aeknowledore that 
 l';;,.obis ; Alfher we ^reep'^d^r <^^^^^^'^^!^;^: iXipersonal • nihil interest^ it 
 the cause is not in us. Cic. tat. J. (.ucii- uc n j 
 
 makes no din'erence.) «nhipct-clauses of impersonal predi- 
 
 OBs. 3. Frequently indirect ^]^'^}^^j;'^r'J^^,!SAt!Li^^dibile est! embigitur.re. 
 
 cates (§74, c), as |^-'/'-',f^^ '//'J^ conslr?^ on^^ the intermgative cl-»^.-« ^^^Ve^e 
 ferf. interest (^ 42:}. K. .2). l".""*- ' ,' , 1, .rirallv thev depend on them as it they were 
 •.'rammatieal subjects <.f th(' predicates but lo^»caii>^ quantum inter omuls 
 
 tl e r • nc.pal predicates : In oral.uibus <^:';^f,/i;''('/;^X orators, one is superior to 
 
 m excellaf ,' It i>^ remarkable how "'^c-h among t^fj^ >^;\^,,^ ,^,^V//i.r, etc.,' is ren- 
 Cic. Or. » . The K'"-'!^^»'.^'^»";^''*';''-" Z It^, liU Zcne Qvajitnr ; It is the question 
 
 lered by q.mitur or <J"ff^oe^ Di 'Ti^it-Q^Jioest mrm paMuTti^iea .resse 
 whether there are any irods or not <''<^- ■^•f'-Ji; jn,eremerit ; // ix the question whether 9. 
 }^'7^^:!^.^^^^^^!^^^^^^^^ the country should t>e pumshed. 
 \Z t tlf il^ii^r^t^IuSn^s an; «ttac^ t. "cmns of t^snme ^^t^J^ 
 
 nien.ioned Obs. 1. In this "^t^'-'P^'lr,; manet r7 /' 1 opuH Horatii, utrias Curiatu 
 Jitional or trenitive attribute, "^:/'^'f^^ '"'-"A ,.1' V nat^^^ the Iloratii, and towhtc/i 
 :^:e.int; Tl. doubt ^^^^^^r'Tv^C^^ "o the nationality of the lloratu 
 the Curiatii belonged, still reniains (?. e. m 
 
 and Curiatii). Liv. 1, 24. See Ex. «.. 5- lu- introduced by interrogative adjpe- 
 
 Oh- '■, Relative-interroirative clauses (t. ^- t'\*';^,^J\,?rdinary (declarative relative 
 
 2 ; § 359). as : -.„„, /,^,vr^»/wrco^noscebat; There he took 
 
 1 INTEUROOATIVE t Ibi 9'/<^ ad Avancum J7^?m»/wr CO u ^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ .^ interroga- 
 
 not'iceo^- what was going on ''V^^i-i? 1 pm ^T VK • Poste5quam illinc discessi 9"« 
 
 I h,ve I..1<1 von what I/l,Mu. e.. >>>.V "" ' nl^r" ^i.ivc ", Latin, and relative m 
 
 Ji 1^1. Cic. or. i. «.-.. X>U. n ''«.«^'""'"if,,: .f; '^„jj «„& loqnar ; For Willi you I will 
 Ei"islil.«-I!.;^AT.VK: Nam te^cuin a e.,^^^^^ 
 
 ;X^^''S^rSuiCa?V?^S^e'"n'"E'Sir.r^inii tUey mistake Kii.Ush Cause, 
 
 V, 
 
392 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 In thopc instances where the predicate of a rehitivc clause, hy the jjeneral rules on sub- 
 oblique clauses (§ o'M), or by the special rules on relative clau;^es (B. VI.), is required to 
 be in \he /^'nfjuiirfive. a i;lven clause may oHeu be taken either for a relative or for an 
 interroirative claube, because in this instance the grammatical tonus of both entirely 
 a<:rce with each other, as: Ut di le<,'ercnt qui /lomen /i(/i\e i/HA danf ; In order that tho 
 jxods might select (him) who should give a name to the new city. Liv. 1, ti. This sen- 
 tence may be taken for a relative ( = ut di legerent evin qui daret), where the subjunc- 
 tive (la ret mx^ht he taken either for a sul)junctive by attraction, or for a subjunctive pe- 
 culiar to relative clause» (B. VI.) : or it may be taken lor an interrogative cl.iuse (ih.it 
 the gods should determine the (/uesfion who was to give, etc.). Since both kinds of clauses 
 l)re<isely meet at this point, both inform and meaninir, it is idle to si)eculate whether the 
 author 7n(ant the clause to be an interrogative or a relative, just as if the question would 
 be raised whether Livyin a given passage, meant the accusative ;>/t6^/n to he the accusa- 
 tive of plebes after the .5th deeleiision, or of jttebft after thcr third. — His rebus gestis La- 
 biSno relicto, ut qwE in O'aliid e/en /vnf/ir cognosceret, Casar navis solvit (after Labienus 
 was left behind to keep himself informed of w/iat na>: (joing on in CJaul;. C'ics. IJ. (i. 5, 
 y. The clause quee. .(lererentur (\n Euijlish a clear relative clause) may betaken for a 
 quasi-suboblique relative clause according to Rem. 81), Ous. 2 (ut ea quoi rjererentur cog- 
 nosceret), or for an interrogative clause ( = quid gererttu7\ as in Cies. B. G. 5, 4S, quoted 
 in Obs. 1, b). But according to the princii)le explained Obs. G, the latter alleruative must 
 be considered correct. 
 
 Obs. 
 
 6. In which imtance^ doen the 
 
 doen the Latin language erpref.^ a given thmight in the form 
 of an interrogatice chiKxe, and whtn inn.^t the for'in of a relatire rla>/<e be r(,sedf— 'I'liis 
 question cannot be divided according to the 'iisag*' of the Kni,dish languatre, in which 
 relative clauses are frecjuently required or prelerred where the Latin language must cm- 
 ploy an indirect question (Ons. 5^ 
 
 (a) The form of interrogative clauses in Latin cannot be used otherwise than in the 
 instances mentioned Obs. 1. Hence the interroL'ative form cannot be used (I) if the 
 governing verb does not belonir to the classes mentioned Obs. 1 : 'J'ena numquam sine 
 usnra reildit quod accepit (not qidd acce/f^-ri') ; 'I'he earth never rtturna without interest 
 tcttat it has received. Cic. Sen. 15,51,— I'fnnn til>i commodum e-4 elige (not ufri/fn..d() ; 
 Choose either, whichever is convenient to yon. Cie. Verr. 2, 2, Gl. Here idru/n is not an 
 iuterrojjative adjective, but a relative endosini,' its own antecedent, and used with the 
 force or idrunicitnque, in the same way as the Kmrlish * what '.— ri) If the ^'ovtrnim: verb, 
 beloiiLTiui: to the classes mentioned (,)bs. l,does not represent the th()U<,'lit of the danse 
 as doubtful or uncertain, nor reun)ves such an uncertainty, a-^ : C'jesar qiutril e.v solo ea 
 gum in eonventu diu-erat (not qme dij'inKtt) • Caesar asked him privately about what he 
 had said in the convention, (jes. B. (J. 1, IS. [Tht^ question was not ' What did you say 
 in the eoiiveiition ':\ which was known to both parties; hut 'Are the things true wnicli 
 have btHMi said in the convi'ution:' ' |.— (^ucErdinus (i. e. investi-C-mus) vtA malelicium 
 et est et inveiiTii /;o/6n7 / Jj( u-! make our inquiries (there, at the place) M'//<-/'g the crime 
 lies and w/ure it may f>t detected. Cic. Kosc. A. ;iO. The question is not about i\\c place 
 of the crime, which was conceded by all parties to be certain. Interrogatively expressed 
 (ufji malejici'im-sit), the clause would denote that, the place was unknown, and was to be 
 found out by the inquiry ('let us iiujuire at what place- the crime was committed*).— 
 Soles tu iia'c studiose incestigare qidt sunt in eo irenere; You are wont to incestigate 
 with zeal the thingn which l)eloni,' to this class. Cic. Hep. 1, 11, 17. Here the 'things' 
 are represented as certain, being assigned to a gicen cla>s. H' the clause is expressed 
 interrogatively {qmE sint in eo i:enere ; ]Vhat things belong to this classy), the ihiuirs 
 would be represented as uncertain in n'gard to chissiiication. this uncertainty to bo 
 removed by the ^ invedigdre'.— In all these insiances the English idiom perfectly coin- 
 cides with the Latin. 
 
 {h) But if the clause answers to tho requirements of the rule in Ors. 1, it must gene- 
 rally assume an interroirative form in Latin, while the English lam^uau'e prefers or re- 
 quires a relative form wheiu^vcr the antecedent of the connecting lorm adjective or ad- 
 verb maybe made an object (prepositimial or otherwise» of the governing verb; as: 
 1. Ciesar (/wi'i vectigaiis populo Uonulno Britannia penderet conj<tituit ; Cm^ar jLced a 
 
 \inquestionably relativtr for interrogative clauses. Tims Mad vig (in Thacher's paraphrase. 
 J). ;i!l) says: "The beginner must avoid ronfoiiiiiliiig dependent (lUistions with thoso 
 relative clauses which in Englirh bcLriu with ivha*. Dico quv)1) skntio, J .'«tij wh'd. 1 
 think, i. e. wliat 1 saij i.-< my rea'. o/nnion ; Dicam quid skntiam : / shall tell what 1 
 think, I.e. I shall state what my opinion i'i.'' In the last sentence Madviir irives likewise 
 the present di'V, which his translator, from reasons l)est known to himself, has changed 
 into diram. The fact is, that both sentences are in English liKLATivK, and cannot, 
 in the way they are given, assist the beginner ' to avoid confuu/idmg dependent questions 
 ivith relative clauses.'' 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 393 
 
 V 
 
 . 
 
 tribute 7rAicA(less frcquentlv ' detei^nned what tribute') Britanny was to pay to the 
 Roman people. Cses. B. G. 5. '22.- '2. Nihil fuit turpius quam quod etiam "' ^^«''P i=^ f" 
 livi.<c-^hatur quid paullo ante po^uls^sef ; The most disgraceful thing wa< that e\ui in 
 writing he would forgtt what he had jn^t stated before. Cic. Brut (it», 2'8.- -i- N^-b ^<> 
 tare ouanti homo sit ; Do not look at what a mm may be ivorth U. «.at that which a 
 man. etc.). lb. Qu. Fr. 1, '2, 4.- 4. Ignilri, quid m unaquaque re vitii ^^^ iieqiicnntjudt- 
 care • The i<Miorant cannot j'/^/7« of (discover) the faults wlack thim^rs nniy have. ID. un. 
 3 •/ r, - In aM ilR'seexan.plesthe EuLdish clauses are relative, while m Latm they must 
 be interrooaUve, hince the clauses are r-presented as uncertain orunkn<>wn, and the 
 actions of the governing verbs (belonging to the classes of Obs. 1) as either asserting 
 the'^e oualities of the clauses, or removing them. ^ .. v,- u 
 
 (c) EXCKPT10N3 TO RULE (6).- If the clause contains past or P^^^^^-t actions wdii^^^^^^ 
 althou-di unknown to the person spoken to or spoken of, are represented as dehnitc ana 
 ceriaii. liicts, the relative form mal be used ; as : Ju-urilia {etx) qu(ByUl*^\\n^a.gebatex 
 nuntiis ao-Tpit ; Ju-rurtha learned from his messengers tvhat Metellus was doing h^\\. 
 Ju- 4(5 r.Ju.M rtha did not know the doings of Metellus before he was i"f^™^'d by he 
 me^ssen.rers r^ the doings of Metellus being stated in previous chapters, the auhor, 
 by using the relative form, represents them as known to the '-^^«d^;'- ^'^^/^""^H^^Vj'^- 
 able auMdetinite f .cts.]- Vidednvismmc strictim «"^^ PO^t mortem .S^'J- R"*^^ » f ^ J® 
 T Ko^ci larta.^unt: Let us UywAU s'lrvei/ «-Aa^ after Sextus Kosc us s death wa5 done 
 iv ..u't. K'-cius.-Cic. Rose. A. :^4. 95. [l\he int. rrogative form '"l^-'''^, l"^*^. ^«f " "r,vei 
 but thJ author prefc-rred the relative form since the domgs of K;;>;ci.'« > a | e rel tive 
 by the examination of the witnesses.] From the same reason the lo. m of the rdame 
 clause is used in the example qu..te<l Obs. 5, 1 ,q»ce sunt gesta cognoscite).- J;^'"^?;^ ^*^ J- 
 Cit on 5 . 5.-i 2 - S<nnetimes the form of a relative clause isu-ed to prevent Jinambi- 
 guio:which w<u.ld1)J cau^ed l>y the inter,o...tive form, as : ,^'!»'';" 1 '"^^'ff ^,^\ft«^ 
 ChrvMvronus agebat ; I solelv ofjs<^rred what Chrvsoironus ?m.9 rf6^/^7. t ic. |i"f,. .\. ~L o»- 
 T l^iiuirr ^u^^^^^ V//;e//..a7^-/>r might betaken in ihe mvmmv^ what he 7vould 
 
 io '^ n It c ex: nple ( (.t/(l Obs. 5. 2 {loguarq^od sentio) the clause, having tfe lorce of 
 '^Lfi'ZXt^nU the trufln, is not ^ep,c4nted as uncertain, -"- «^;;^,]-" woufd 
 dressed would naturally prcMime the speaker o tell ^^'''Xw\o.^'^%i^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ™ ri,,V -onn no. t "l to tlio <.on,-tniclion chosen, a» ; Oi.erGjus, «•;»-!»< f/i«w m ior- 
 '^M^U^^e^^^\'^"<^^S^^^"^^' (sec (),». 7, .»..,1 B VI.), .0 thai ,t ,s 
 
 ^'""^J^a ■' ;'i "l,; ve Srth.''.",i '■ Inn,. 1„„ d .Jm he u„ ''^ S"' v^'i ^'/«/«r. 
 SwrV '!■''"' »' "»< <,«o,lf„lu,;„„ f.f, ; 1.0. „,e knew «''"^'ff,,*'™», ho relative 
 
 LLfib;;:;i'i":i,;i;ai;fi^sv^;;,iJh;;:n;e:»":2^;a,;;:™^ 
 
 k'.:n,.^r'li;:r -:;-;-e \^ i!^ =!S^ sni^.'^'^i^ ^^f ' !iiriS i^ 
 
 ±nL^:^^;^^^^^ s;!u:^i;ft.n^;p;^p ^>^/^^|i:;S it^ 
 
31U 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 395 
 
 Obs. 7. If! the indicative inclnune.^ of thin kind nlwaijif a sure evidence thai the clause is 
 reUitire, and hot in/er/w/a/ice f Thi;» question is idfutical witli the qin'siion ^ /v/iethtr 
 ever the predicate of (indirect) interrof/afire c/a>/ses is found in the i ■''/' Most 
 
 j^raminaruiiis (luiiy "this absolutely fi>r classical prose (M idvi^, p. 311, '1 i ; KiihiK-r, 
 
 § 15«N, U : MeiriiiC', § 730 ; rul)lic Scliool (ir. «j l(j2). lint iliat clear and unqnei»tioiiable 
 indirect interroijaiive clauses in a very few passa.res ol Cicero have their predicates in 
 the indicative, cannot be dispute'!. The lacis are tliesc : 
 
 {a) Accordini,' to Obs. (>, clauses wliicli, by the ^'eneral nilet», must take an interro^jfft- 
 tive CiTm, a.-suine the form ot relative clauses, il ihe author hat» an impi>rtant rea^on to 
 place the predicate in \\\i; indicative. Hence wequite often llnd clauses with predicates in 
 the indicitive where the introaucin»; form-adjectives and adveri)s on accfuintof the lack- 
 iuijc antecedent have at first siirht the appearance of inteiToi/ativtt^ ; as : l)ili>^entiain nos- 
 tra m, au I V'/e-z/i (/'i /f /?t-//i ad hue res //rO(v,swi/, cur pnetcreani y Why should I not ineniion 
 our own ert'orlsor /At; ;eA7///,s'(,lineini which (queini we have so fat arhicvtd .^ L'ae-. IJ. C. 2, 
 32. The t<peaker meant to represent these results as unquestionable facii*, and did this 
 briffly in the form ot an indicative { processit. instead of proc'es.-<erit), which was gram- 
 matically allowable, since the s».'ntence could pass for a relative clause with incornoraied 
 antecedent (p. 5()(i.), in place of: 'Cur flnem ad quetn res pr(K\s\it j)ra>tereain!!' . — Ex- 
 actly in the same way the following: passaires must be interpreted: (^ui si 7<putaverint 
 vX, (j'titjus ii'so temporibu< nia<j;iii.iiilium adfj/fus su/n, vt ^iosxvn qiue «genera hominum in 
 seniitum pervenerint, profectovxistimabunt me merito judicium aniini mei muia>se ; If 
 tlu'y consider the times in which / ca/ne into the jjovernment, and ihe kind of persons 
 who afterwards came into the Senate, iln-y will surely think that I had a rii:ht to chaii;:e 
 my views. Sail. .Iu<j. 4, 4. Sallust represents his own acc»'ssion to the ;^'overninent and 
 the political duiracier of that time as notorious facts, opposini,' it to tiie •questionable ' 
 character nf the men who obtained power under Ciesar, the names of whom he omits, 
 trcatiuLT them as a 'class', IK-nee the first clause (ir. stead of * j'eputai'eri/it te/njx*7-a, 
 quifjus tenij)orifjus ego. .adept us sum) is 7'elative^ to enable the author to usc an indicative 
 predicate ; the second clause icmained interro<;ative, the subjunctive predicate an~wer- 
 111!.^ the puri)()se of the author. — Qua df causa ei quoinnn causa ille hoc pi omutqdvit. os- 
 tendi ; J havt' shown the reason, for which (why) and for whose sake he piomulqattd this. 
 Cic. L. Aijr. 3, 4, 15 (instead of: ostendi cnusdiii de qua cau.sti et quorum causCi)^.— Nihil 
 est in Fal)io aduiiratutiu< qnam quomodi> mortem fllii tulit : Nothinu^ is so admirable 
 as the manner in zvhic/i Fabiiis bore the death of his son. Cic. Sen. 4 dor : qnnm modus 
 quo modo mortem tulit). — Vides enim in quo cursu suinus^ ; For you see the situation we 
 are in. Cic. Att. 1, 1. 4 (instead of vides cursum in quo sumus). 
 
 (b) The mentioned chanues of interrojzaiive into relative clauses» arc admissible as» lonij 
 as the noun connecti-d with the intcrroirative form-adj«'Ctive nuiy be understood as an ob- 
 ject of tlie irovtMiiini; predicate. lUii if there is no noun connected witii the interroizative, 
 or il the noun could not be connected as object with the i;«)verninL,' verb, such a chanj^e is no 
 lonijer admissible, and the predicate should remain in tiie sul)junclive. fre« i/ there were 
 loiiical reasons which mij^ht make the indicative mood more correspondin:: to the author's 
 ])urp()ses. Nevertheless there are the followin^authenticateil passaires in Cicero, where 
 the predicates of clauses which ^'raininalically cannot be considered as relative, are 
 ])laced in the indicative as if the clause were relative., and as if the introducing interroga- 
 tive word had an antecedent : 
 
 1. Meininistis (^. Maximo ct L. MancTno consulibus quam ]xtpuldns lex de sacerdo- 
 tiis videbdtur : You remember Ao/r/>o/>'//«/- the law on the priestly otlices /ie^-med to be 
 in the year of (|. Maxiinuss and L. Mancintis's consulship. Cic. Am. i"), ".Mi. The in- 
 dicative ' rvlebtltur' was desiral)le to the author, since the subjunctive of the verb 
 vidtri would impair the po^-itiveness with wluch (as tlie connection shows) he meant 
 to state the fact '■that it seemed so\ Thus the author emancipated himself from a 
 ■jirammatical rule for the sake of a logical purpose, perliaps induced by the close ana- 
 loi:y of those (ori-inally interro„'ative) clauses which according to No.\a) may be con- 
 ceived as relative^. 
 
 * This clause evidently stands on the dividing.' line where it may seem doui)tlul 
 whether the seiittlice could pass for relativi'. or must be reckoned among the i-xceptioius 
 No. (b). Grammaficallij. however, then' is no reason wiiy the clause should not be con- 
 sidered as relative, although tiie form of a relative clause would be rejuignant even to the 
 English idiom. But this ciunot be a reason for referring this passage to the exceptions No. 
 (f)). since the whole question cow^Wxs oi i\ sf rict I y formal grainmaiical point.— ^ The read- 
 ing simus is airainsi the codices.— ^ To take this passage, as our grammarians do, for a 
 direct exclatnalim) (Meministis : ' Qnam jx)j>utd>is Icx videtHitur ! ') means only to substi- 
 tute a greater dirticuliy for a lesser one. This remedy would evidently be worse than 
 X\w. evil it intends to cure, since nobody has yet alleged a single i)assage of ancient aii- 
 tliors in which direct exclamatory (or intern")frative) sentences are found in such a con- 
 ueciion with a verbum seutiendi. See § S'Jti, Obs. 4. 
 
 2. Mdes propinquitas qnid habetj Yon see what (conveniences) the nearness of 
 residence atlords. cic. Att. 13, !8. The editors did not know any better means to get 
 rid of the difficulty of the ii.'ilicative ' habet\ than to change it into ' habeat\ and the 
 grammarians readily acquiesce. But the manuscripts have uniioimly habet. Cicero 
 speaks of the ' piopinqiiitas ' and its conveniences as a thing positively known to the 
 lierson addressed, and although the subjunctive //a/^^^a/ would not affect this ibeamng, 
 we must assume rather that he disre-rarded in the easy epistolary style the strict rules 
 of "rammar, for the sake of using distinct language, than alter the authenticated text. 
 3' Similarly must be ex|»lained: Vides quanfo post unjl fiitQri sumii.<. Cic. Fam. 7. 4 
 4. Vidlte. judices, qnanf<e res his testimt.niis i,unt confecta ; You >>ee how imimtant 
 facts were done according totliese testimonies (You see the importance ol the lacts 
 which). Cic. Mil. 18, 47. Of this passage there is a reading sud conject(£, which, now 
 ever, is supported bv onlv two inferior codices. . 
 
 .5. Quaw qua tu ('studia) esse majoia inteUir/is ; I ask what studies you nnderstantl 
 to be greater. Cic. Kep. 1, 19. Uere the leaning inttUigas is perhaps belter autiienii- 
 cated, and ought to be adopted, since Cicero had no possible reason to substitute an 
 indicative for the regular subjunctive. So in Fam. 2, 9, 1 (Sns quern dico or dicam). 
 
 6 Oiher passa-es in Cicero in which indicatives occur in such clauses may be inter- 
 preted as relative clauses according to No. (a), as Cic. Verr. 1, 2, 53, 131 ; lusc. 4, dn, 
 11 {nostiqu(E sequuntur). ,. ^, . .. ,. ;„ i„t„_ 
 
 (n In aniedas^ical language (Plautusand Terence) the nsc ol the indicative J» 1";«^- 
 roirative clauses is quite frequent, as: Scio quid ago. Plant. Bacch. 1, 1, 4o.--- y"*^**» 
 qiueio, quid jxjtest i>ecunia. lb. Slich. 3, 1, 9. So in Ter. Phorm. 2, 3 li :.Ad 4 5 -J 
 llec. 1, 2, Hi, and often. It is not pmbable tnat tftis usage was caused by the influence oX 
 the Greek lamriiage. which always in these clauses requires the indicative, it unques- 
 tionably was a colloquial inaccuracy, which found its way to the language of tne coimcs 
 There are several passages in the authors of the silver ag;e where indicatives occur in 
 nnquestionably interrogative clauses, as Quid animi estis haJjifuit quix^o. liutu. a-V.H;, ~' 
 G, p. 98.— Quwres a me quo juie mihi prutor dedit possessionem, lb. 2, 8, p. ii-i. -1""» 
 Valer. M. 5, 7, ext. 1 ; 5, «. ext. 5 ; Sen. Ep. 4; lb. 34. K^^^n 
 
 (d) Several passages which, bv some, have been placed under this rule, must be con- 
 sidered as direct questions after being correctly punctuated, as Quid iwbisjactenaum et>l f 
 Jtjnbro; What is to be di»ne by us '/ 1 do not know. Cic. Att. 14, 13, 2. 
 
 Obs. 8. The idioms of the Latin and English languages often differ when in Latin 
 intern.gatire clauses are used, and the rendering of such clauses is olteu a matiei 01 
 
 some ditliculty. . r.>.„ ^t „ ^.tntivp 
 
 (a) In many instances the English lan<2:uage requires or i)refers the form ol a rtiame 
 clause, in which instance the Latin trovernin-,' noun oi the interrogative adjective «-;; w «ae 
 the Knqlish antecedent, iiiterro<:ative adverbs being, for this purpose, r^'^olved int > 
 attrilmiive phrases with or without prepositions. Absolute interrogatives ni"^J « fn 
 be turned into English absolute relatives with a preposition as required by the govuning 
 verb, as : Quid quisque me dixisse dicat, pnestdre non possum ; I cannot «"«(f^/'^ 
 nhat other people say that I have said (for the remarks which other P*'rs(m> place in 
 my mouth). Cic. Fam. 9, IG, 5.- Quid hostes con^Mi caperent exjyectabat; He ««»f«/f^ 
 the measures the enemy would fake. Oes. B. O. 3, 24.- Ignosc6tis mihi s'. "»^'^0 ^w« 
 cauHi me ad banc lo(iiiacitatem imputerit acce peril is ; You wijl ^^^^ciise ine f l^^^'^^ff 
 the cause which has forced me into (his locjuacity. Cic. Or. 2. 87, 355.- Athgnai me deltc- 
 tant rec^^datiune summOrum virGrum, ubi (lUisque habitilre, ubi ^<^^^f «/ ^f* X^^V-St 
 nt so/itux; Athens attracts me by the memory of her great men connected nith triepiaces 
 irhtre thry livtd, and where they were wont to tit and to speak, lb. Leg. ^, -:. oce 
 
 %) Frequently English noun,s representing actions with the idea of ","f rj^;"!^ ^^,"; 
 expressed bv Latin inlerrogative clauses. Thus the Latin does not sjiy, I do ^f^/'O^ 
 the size Of t/i'is land.' l)ut ' I do not kmw how great t/iis land t«,'_ as : Si quKl/^^t »» '«V 
 in-enii.\iuod quam sit exiquum senlio ; If there is any ta ent in me, the '^.'/ff/f ^^'^^^-J' 
 Jiciaw,) of which I am well aware of, etc. Cic. Arch. 1 L [Cujus ^^^^Q'^^'lf'Jf!^. 
 wouldbe ^erv poor Latinity.]- Induiiomarus^^/o-^n Telit preecipil. Indutlomalusj7a^^« 
 his (or the necessary) orders. Cies. B. G. 5. 5«.- Qualis sit amnius ipse a/""))'^/.^^/.^. 
 The soul does not know its own qualities. Cic. Tusc. 1, 2, 'Z.-lHctndi O^^ro's MuodJvent 
 in utroque.ov^^^o\Mi^ utriusque, etiani posteris nostris, indicabunt ; Ihe oration* oi noin 
 will bear tesiimonv to thtir {grand) style, evv" Nvilh our posteriiy. lb. Brut, -^/i '"'*.- Yi« 
 solibus dtioinis stude.) audire quid sentias ; I wi^h to hear your opinion on the iv\o suns 
 (lately seen), lb. Kep. 1, \1.~ XxnMJvvnn quantum quaque cirijas '-J?^;?^'^;^'*'"''^', Vj ^Z 
 fixed the numtM^r of arms which every state should furnish. Cit>.^- B. O. i, 2. 1 m U; «re 
 other similar idiomatic uses of Latin interrogative clauses which must »f, 1^'f,^"^'; ''y 
 practical observation. Thus an interrogative clause \\\\\\nde is used ^^ ^olloqu al st) le 
 to impart any intelligence to the person addressed : Vide quanti, in te stt snatuas , 
 
 k 
 
89G 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIYE. 
 
 literally • See (look) how j?rcat an affahility is in you. Cic. Fam. IH, 5, 1 (i. e. The fol- 
 lowiii<nncifU'nt shows tlR'alVability of vonr niannoi-i^K Seo Ex. 11-15. IS. 
 
 (c) Sometimfsinti'iTojiativi- adjtM tivesaiul adverbs are not iininediaU-ly connected with 
 t\\c firedicate of the intcrroirative clause, but witli a participle (eillier iii iheform of an 
 
 to tiie Latin tcrriiorv. I.iv. 1, 1.- VvlZinu,^ (/mhtfs fxstim/is omlorihm quani in jwns 
 KiyeHsit ' We see thi'Vmall numiier of pronii.-ini,' orators which the deaths of the «'reat 
 nicn {UHlirafrd fji/'q\uhu< which hert 7iu(w.< ' \\\mi kind of) we have mentioned has 
 Jell to us (literallv : We see after wltat Iviiul of orators iiavini,' died, in now lew tliere is 
 hope' ) Cic Otl" 2 19 — CVsar inilites edocrt </>i(ii,(o ditHmenlo et qvot ri/urt/m/arfii/m 
 mort" neees'!«e sir constare ricfonam ; Ciesar explained to Jiis soldiers that victory must 
 be bou<'ht at the price of s^reat disadvantajres, and by the death of many brave men 
 (literally : -showed what disadvantage and the death^of how many brave men U would 
 be necessary that victorv would cost '). See E.\. 1(). IT. , , , i 
 
 id) Freuuentlv tlie subieet of an interrogative clause is taken out of the clause, and 
 
 lis 
 ar- 
 cellus Lie h'am. ^, u», -i. — i/ntud/n >;«-[«■ m i/nwi, iK^iimifi ^,^ i.'\>\c.\\u\iuv gtiu/H finl KVfS 
 (instead of' perspiciturquam lives (luidam siut ' } : The flrkiem xs of viainj is olteii louiid 
 out if th.' monev at stake is but a trille. It). Am. 17. «i:}.— I)>ii'>trafni' de Ararico incen- 
 arineitlaceief an defendi ; They held a deliberaiion whether Avaricuni should b.- burned 
 or defended Cies H. (i. 7, 15.— Ecthesis occurs also, but more rarely, in clauses which 
 are not interro-'ative : lleia fruniHdariani, uf aalli cointnodt ,s>ii)})ortriri jK)t<':€t, timere 
 dicehanf They pretended to be afraid of the inconvenience in conveyinj,' the tupplies 
 to the arm V. Cles. B. ti. 1, 39. See E.\. 1.-^-20. ^ ^^ . v/i 
 
 (e) If iiiternx'ative clauses refer to lhe/f//Mr^, their predicates are rendered by will 
 or * would' accordiii'' to the tense of the principal predicate ; and when the answer ex- 
 
 ■ ■ • • ■ senteiiee). the j)ie(iicate is 
 
 and the inteiTojrative 
 
 transferred totlie principal sentence, «,'enerally as transitive object : but sonie imes 
 subject or intransitive object. Such sentences must ofti-n be recast in hns,'lish. II 
 is called " kctiiksis ' : Nosti Maroll'im (jvam tanlits ait; You know the slowness of M 
 
 •ellus. Cic. Fam. 8, 10, :).— Qmddni saipo m parvtl i)ecuniS jx-rspiciui^ - ' 
 
 instead of * perspiciturquam leves (luidam siut ' } : The firkiemss of /, 
 mU if tilt; monev at stake is but a trille. It). Am. 17. O:}.— Ddi'ftriitni 
 
 pected i.sa77//<? for the iktsou askinir (beiiif; an imperative sent 
 
 rendered by ' Dvust: 'to h*- to: \<fi(>'dd\ If boili the principal 
 
 predicate have the same subject, the i>redicate of tlie clause is ^'riierally rendered hy an 
 
 English inliniiive with 'to'. This rule is important if such Knirbsh mnnitives are to 
 
 be 'i-eiideied into Latin : (V'os eain potestjltem habeiis) ut ufafmlfis utruiii nos semper 
 
 Queinadinodxin /n.i .•«tH.^racla^t vidVris; Look out how you will safi^fi/ these (our friends). 
 Cic Or -2 SO 351 —()u'i<l airers fy/m/-e it/ r<;''////>i p/^^t/y/'-/.v; W'hat reason d() you LMve ?r//y 
 we should helitve that this was the case. lb. Rose. A. 1'.». .^4.-Senatusdecievit q>n Romie 
 rennaret : Tlie Senate decided wlio should be kiinj at Home. Liv. 1, 17.— hL,'o (luid acce- 
 perim scio, <7//i(/ U'lawi nescio; I know what I have heard, but do not know w/«/i' to 
 mij Cic Utisc A. 21, 58.— C^uo»l sibi ipsi judicasseiit v^/o procedendum aut quid a<;en- 
 dnmiid'erelxr ; Because rhev had assumed to judj^e whtre to proceed or ichat to do. C;es. 
 B. (i. 7, 5-2.- Predicates of this kind are not i^euerally placed in tlie periphrastic luture. 
 
 See Ex 21-24 
 
 ( /') The English interrosjative clause with an infinitive introduced by ' how ' with which 
 the verb ' to 7v/ou' ' is coiistniefl, is expressed in Latin either by a mere object-inlini- 
 tive or bv an inteiro<--ative clause (.with a finite predicate) introduced by quowoilo or its 
 equivalents, depemlent on w7/r. A Latin interrogative clause with (juomoilo is used 
 only if scire refers to the style or nuinner of performmj; the action ; if it means a knowl- 
 edo-eof the whole action, the EuL'lisli interrogative clause is expressed by a Latin ohject- 
 inllnitive : Soli qui memoriil viccent scivnt <iuid, et qiiatenus, et quomodo dictCin sint : 
 Only those who have a stronu: inemorv ^//o?A' what, how much (= up to what point) and 
 how to sneak Cic. Or. 2, 87. :i55. Bur : Purranre(iuaiii dedindre sriat, before a boy knows 
 how to decline (not ' quotnodo decllwt). Quint. 2, 1. .3.— J^ocere sciu/d, they know how 
 to teach a. e. the art of teaching; qiioniodo doceaiit would be • according to wliat method ). 
 Qui lit. 10, 5, 1'.), See E.c. 25. 
 
 Obs. 9. Interrogative clauses dependent on 'w^.<fm' are often parenthetically inserted 
 with an kllipsis of the interroirative predicate, and with the force of an iiidelimte lorm- 
 adjectiveor adverb. The indicative predicates with which jusno'xw this ca*e is often 
 inimediately connected, must not be taken for interrogative i)redicates : iVe.sc/o quod 
 magnum malum me celant (i. e. Magnum malum, nescio quod [malum] sit, me cclaut) ; 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIYE. 
 
 397 
 
 They conceal some great evil from me (a great evil, I do not know which). Ter. Hec.3. 
 1 .39 — Lucus n-escio quo easy, nocturno tempore incensus est : By same accident a grove 
 was set on tire dtiriii" i he night (literallv : ' A grove. I do not know by what accident.' etc.). 
 Nep Milt 4 — Sed," /ie-vdo r/vo ;)arto, ab eo quod erat a te iiroposiium aberravt oratio; 
 But'mv remarks have wandered away from the subject sugg.'sted by you. I do not know 
 how it' happened (or : But somehow my remarks h:ive, etc.). Cic. Tiisc. 3, 33, 80. Hence 
 nescio quis and riescio quid virtuallv have the meaning of a/iquis and ahqind : I rope me 
 uescio ouis loquitur: .Somebody is ialking near me. Platit. Pers. 1, 3 9.-- De lejie agrarii 
 »<e;.scio (/wi(/ vohiisse eum diiere siisoicaMautur ; They supi)Osed lie had intended to say 
 toifiething on the agrarian law. Cic. Leg. Agr. 2, 5, 13. See Ex. 2()--28. 
 
 Ob«* 10 To the interroL'Mtive iiariicles mentioned |§ 417-419, must be added fc and n. 
 Ec (of uncertain derivation) is used as prelix with the indelinites quis and qin{ecqvi, 
 ecQuis fcquid), and with the indefinite adverbs quo iihdquando(erqyo, ecquanOo). It has 
 the force botli of numixwik /;e, and is not especially rendered in independent interroga- 
 tive sentences, as: Ecquidfit:!^ anything going on? Cic Fam. 7, 11. -Aery w f€f' a 
 rirtus provexi^set f Would your own ability have raised yon to any {posifionU lb. 1 mi. 
 13 U.U.-Ecquando te ratioiicm factOrum tuorum redditurum putasti v Did you i)e- 
 lieve that you would ataity time be called to account for your deeds .' lb. > err. 2. i <, 4.1. 
 — In ii.terro<'ative clai'ses ec means -whether ' : Qiueris ecqnoi i-pes pacifacaiionis sU . 
 You ask whether there is any lun)e for an amicable settleinent. Cic. Att. ^'/» — ;5"r" 
 atribrino.<Y/./«//rfonisiper XXXVtiibus crtiiti siut; 1 ask the nbuiie ?M^///y ilcj 
 (the tribunes) at any time (ever) were elected otherwise than by 'li^ f^/r'^^»^ •'>• ^''^' 
 A«rr 2 7. 17. Sometimes ecqvis is streiigtliened by the sufhx nam (§ 421). hx. ^9. 
 
 "si is sometimes used with the force of • whether * (the same as ;^^ ' m Ln^bsh). It 
 mostfreuuently depends on verbs of trying and expecting; ^^"t '^ ,s not coi.hiKd to 
 tliese, as "some grammarians assert : Ilelvetio si perrvmpere 2H)>^sent coxxM\ ^""^^: /' '- 
 Helvetians tried whether they C(mkl break through (the lines). Cics. B G. 1. 8.- lemp- 
 t"ta res est si primo impetu lain Ardea posset ; The attempt was made «'.'"^/''/f Ar^ a 
 could be cariied by the llrst assault. Liv. 1, 57.- Statui exspecaudum esse si Q" d cer tins 
 Z-er^fur;lrv^o\vedU>wait whether 
 
 Cic Fam. 15, 1. 2.-Philopa^meii qu(Vslvit si Lycortas incolumis evasisset; 1 hilopffiuitn 
 inniiired whether Lvcortas had sately escaped. Li v. 39, 50. Ex. 30-33. 
 "' ' e h^Jiorlan/very frequently iiAerro^ative clauses with .^ are so used hat a govern- 
 incr verb of -trviu"'. or soun; eiiuivalent expressi.m, is understood. Th:s is most fre- 
 Qifemlv t le casl f the principal predic:ite is a verb of motion, and the c ause denotes 
 t^lcM) feet ot- the moiio, . so that the verb of 'trying' if expressed would be '"the hrst 
 I oi Mr3'- ) Dicunt clam ex castris exisse {\. e. teniptaf urn, or ' vt^ viderent' «quid 
 nuM.iri-;/^ag?i";;..7W ;W; They stated they had secivtly left the camp^^^^^^^^^^ 
 irhether any lood mi'lht be found m the neighborhood. Cio. B G. «. 20.— IKrcuies per 
 ^iiadspeluncam. si forte L ^^^xx^^ferrent ; Hercules proceede( uUhe direction ol the 
 cave, to see whether perhaps any tracks w.re leading there. Liv. 1, <. Ex. .^4-dU. 
 
 EXAMPLES TO REM. 85, OBS. 1-10. 
 
 1 «;i unon-im ^f//W/.7/'/m f.*/. QuirTtes. w/rwm tribuni plebis yestrS an snil causa sedi- 
 
 tiOnum sc^ui>cr a.ictores /../-i.l id e... hoc anno desisse 'V^^ l^^'^^ ^r^^" ' ''oe' ar ex 
 K '\ _ o Tiil/num est uter nostrum sit verecundiori. Cic. Ac. 2, 41, Ui>.- 3. CcC>ar ex 
 cIiDtlvi^'c-oX^/ ^;'0 i" foco h.stes con^edissent^. Cies. B. G. 5, 9.-. 4. Earn cond.tio- 
 Si nHmrf er nt ut optet* ulrum ;;*a//./ cervices Eosci.) dare^ an insutus m cu leu . « 
 
 V t n^- n it ere Cic. Ho«c. A. 5. 30.- 5. ^•.•que cognosce.ndi quid fieret. necjue sni col- 
 \liani iiiiin iL 1 «... V, IV . »«»>. V . iM.. . 1 ., tnrJi'i mniii>i7 Cine dis- 
 
 li-endi hostibus facultatem relinquunt. C;es. B. G. 3, <•.— (>. Lot uHm omii is .inem. 
 
 i:;.^?rwi:!^^';u^.^;;^in^u^n^^ oiSi^l^^s^. i. ^^^i^P^^ 
 
 quMalint possumus susiiic-lri-'o, sic attirmat ut oculis ea ceruere videStur-^ Cic. Rep. 
 
 1 Modest.— ^ considere, to 
 ntre. to leave (prescribe) to 
 wurremb-r one's neck.— • sow 
 » all kinds of i)romi.scuou'* ( 
 persmis, or of slaves. Liber d 
 esset is qui fuqeret, an servus.- 
 serving.— '* [what are] for an 
 ncative force = nihil me att 
 etc.— »"* crime.— ^" conjectur 
 
 pitch camp ; consedisse, to be encamped.— ^ condi'idnem 
 
 somebody a c<nulition.— -» lo choo^i^.— ^ cervices dare, to 
 
 id up in a sack, the usual punishment of parricides.- 
 
 •rowd- — « distinction.- » whether they consisted of free 
 
 IOCS not grammatically refer to turba : understand ■ Lihern« 
 
 — 10 took their refuge.- ii to snow.- i'- to hail.- \^ by ob- 
 
 orator the benefits of a good memory.— ^^ a question witn 
 
 inet dkere, I need not tell.- »» traces.— " as to the place, 
 
 e.— 20 guess.— -^ that it seems as if. 
 
398 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 399 
 
 1, 10, 15.— 1'2. Cirsar iioqne qvanfa esset in^iiljp nmirnitudoJ. Tio<|no ^v^r^ ant qvnntte 
 ii-uiOiit's iiicohrtht, iifniie y//<wt ueum Ix'lli \\i\hitY\^\\\, xuqwQ qnf^ fs^tut ad miijOriMU 
 iiavium innltitiKiiiu'in iclonci portu^ reperire polenit. ('jus. W. G. 4, 20.— 13. Prodiicuti- 
 tm-* ci quos LitavTcus odociit'rat* q^ue r/irj, vellef^. Csvs. li. G. 7, J^. — 14. Vita quam 
 sit brerU coijita. Plant. Most. 3. 2.— 15. Ex hoc ini<lIiLri potest qnantus fiient Ilanni- 
 hal. Nop. Ilann. 23.— Ki. CoL'itSto quan/is'' lafxtribus fuiKiritKin'* iniiicriiiin una no?: 
 pajno (ielTiit. fir. Cat. 4, 9, 19.— 17. Tnni Ic-aiis dicthdl j)ot»>t;lirn» qviit pttnitm^ 
 veiiennt f.icit'". Liv. 1, 22. — 18. Qmv^^ qi/(rn/nfur^'^ qurJid fint, iiniiinicrabilia sunt. Cic. 
 Or. 2. 32, 137.— 19. Tcinpus qvamdiu^^ (iiaremw nobis pra*stiiUel)as>*. lb. (^uinct. 9. — 
 
 20. Sanytdnem, hilcm^'", oxKd video posse dicerevnde^^ concrefa finf. lb. Tu>c. 1,24. — 
 
 21. In nostnlno potestilte est qnid in<'}tiih(rivin.<i f lb. Fin. 2.32. 101.-22. Dionysiiis, 
 qunni bollnin adversusi cum Syracnsilni decrcvissent, din dubitilvit impiMiunincv/f'yx)»^^/, 
 an bello resi>t(ere(. Just. 21. 2.— 23. Nt'cjue .«atis Brnto vc! tril>Onis niililnm constilbat'^ 
 qifid agercnt, ant quam ratiOueni i)ujrna> insistetent^*. C'a^s. IJ. (i. 3, 14. — 24. Hu*c volni 
 per litteras (tibi fcriboro), nt habtn-s^^ quid- dicere-'^ si quando in vitnperatorcs^" meor» 
 incidisses2». Cic. Fara. 7, 3, <!.— 2."). Lex natflra» vetat nllam rem esse^^ cnjnsqnam nisi^» 
 eju>'^* qui fractore et vti sciaf. lb. Rep. 1, 17.— 2<>. Casu tiesrio quo in ea tcnijxna a^tas 
 nostra incidit. lb. Fam. 5. 15, 3.-27. Kescio qvainodo ipsa; ilhv littera' excludere me a 
 l)ortu et perfiijrio-^ vid<'ntur. lb. — 28. llle ?ie.<no qui{<-'^, qui in scholis notninaii solet, 
 mille et octinjreuta stadia quod'-*^ abe<set vidCbat. lb. Ac. Tr. 2, 25. 81.— 29. Ilbid du- 
 binm est, ad id quod sninninin boiium dicitis, ecquanam fieri jxpssit accessio-*. Il>, 
 Fin. 4, 24.— 30. llanc palfldem si no>itH trannrent^ liostes exspectCibanf. Ca-s. B. G. 2. 9. 
 
 — 31. Centuriones nntti-* vocibnsqne^** liostis s-i iidrmre^^ vdl<^nt ?v<e(7/y ccepCrunt. lb. 
 5, 43. — 32. ])e quo «renero pnuUo plura dixi. nt hoc ridertd'^ n lundafivnes^^ (.«sent in ora- 
 toris ofticio33. Cic. Or. 2. ^5, 39«.— 3:^. Primuin ab eis quu'slvit, si aqvam iioniinibns 
 jumentisque in totidem dies quot frumentun) iinjyosuissit (i. e. navibns). Liv. 29, 25. 
 
 — 34. Consul ad (Jonmum castra niovet, si ]X)nn oppido jH)ssff. Liv. 42, M.— 35. Iliniilco 
 gecQtus est M.uoellnni, si q>ia (K-caxio puq)ia>idi esset. lb. 2-4, 3<). — 3G. Reseniltis^* .^duis 
 i.i per eos civitaies reciperdrt^'' jx>sset.,ri:\K\\\oi> captlvos? exercitui distribuit^'. Cajs. B. 
 G. 7, 89. 
 
 {j? SUBOBLIQUE CLAUSES.- 
 § 599. SUBOBTJQUE CLAUSES ai'O clauses DEPENDENT Oil OBLIQUE 
 
 clauses, and forming those parts of the indirect statement uhieii the 
 speaker introduced conceives in the form of clauses (^ 507). All sub- 
 oblique clauses require their own predicates to be in the subjunctive. 
 (For exceptions see R. 87.) 
 
 Eetn. 80. Suboblique clauses may be dependent on any of the four 
 forms of oblique clauses menlioned above, as: 
 
 1) On INFINITIVE clauses: 
 
 Epictlrus dicit, omnium rerum qiios ad bedte rirend>mi safnenfia emu pa rar frit, nihil 
 esge majus amicitiil ; Epicurus pays that of all means which wisdom had devised fora 
 
 '^Maf/nihldo\» redundant in this passnjre.-- - qu(V refers to the name, and qnanftT to 
 the iMjml)er of the inhabitant's. — ^ q',,} ^yjn, idohti refers to tlie capacity of tlie liarbors. — 
 * prodncere, to bring forward. — ^ to teach. — ' tiie witnesses were intended 'to play a 
 ceriain part', by personating others. — '^An interrogative sentence witli 'how'' must be 
 used, which may be directly coiniected with deltrit. qi/a/diM being chanL'ed into the corre- 
 si)onding demonstrative.—* founded.—» quid )>tft/it€-! venerint is dependent on dicendi. — 
 ^^ potestdttin aliadfacere. to give to somebody a permission. — ^^ eaqua.— ^"^quiTvi has 
 lierethe meaniiifj 'to be in doubt', 'to be unknown'. — i' tewpua qiiamdiu = per quod 
 tempus.— '* to deterinine beforehand, to prelimit.— i*gall.— i" tlie elementg which con- 
 stitute. — 1^ Alioii aiiqiiid cons/a/, somebody is clear as to something'.— '" insisttre raii- 
 vintn )tiiqiur, loadopi a phui of baUle. — ^^hahTvo = scire.— ""caviller. — -' to fail in with, 
 to meet with.— -- to belouir. — "^ except. — '■^* sn|)plye<.>-y' (except to him). — ^5 icfnire. — 
 -* that somebody. — ^r g^-e Rem, 81, Obs. 1. — ^^ accessio,fie7i potest ad atiq>nd, something 
 admits of an increase.— ^» by gestures. — '•"> words. — =** to come in.— '•'• i)anegyrics.— 
 ^^ beloTiged to the province of an orator. — ^* Kender : Wiih the excej>tion of the ..Edu- 
 ans wlio were retained. — ^^ recover. Ccesar is the subject understood. — '•' (ii>tr]l'V*re 
 (diqtiid alicui, to distribute something among some persons. Here a distributiuu of the 
 prisoners 'as slaves' is meant. 
 
 I 
 
 I'f f.i^nrUhin wn^ the ^-reatest (nothing was greater Ihan friendship^ Cic. Fin. 
 Aa;)7)?//^/'^.fIlendshlp^^as ine -^\'^l^\\^ ., denends on an accusative with the inlini- 
 
 1, 20, r.5.- [The fl:'"''^^''-^- ^^^' i^'^ "'tn, word" were stated in a direct form, would 
 live and the ^"^>J«ct,.E|MCM.rn.s f Ins cm ^^o.d^^^^^ .^bohlique, and its 
 
 express this thought {"^he f.-rn of a ^; ,. iencc^ U|^ ^^^^ innnitive clause has the 
 
 v:r^^ :;;t^^!r^e\};rzXz s^^rs^Tdiii^i^^^wdays. 4. ciu.02, 
 
 175. See Ex. 1-0. 8. 9. 
 
 o\ r»xr OrT TOT-F Tn \T-CLAUSES with vf, ne, qvin, «n^» f'^f^ •' . „^ 
 
 rivnl thtre. Cic. Fam. 2, 19, 1. See Ex. 10-12. 
 
 patil.le «ilU the public interest). Css. B. O. 5, 4b. fete ti. 1. l.. 
 
 ;;;'S7i!;«»;l'r'JI->c!'\,c1ia,rio',»n,i.h,oent. Cic. 0.2, 3,, 134. See Ex. 
 Ob''',. Ko. n,l c,„„.e. ''^.P-/!-' "" f iH^SSived J.'^'SeJ 6*"«»^^.%- 
 
 !;;;;-;;i";!;,^,,u^;;t.'lr^vt":i;r'r;;i,|.S^^^^ 
 
 i» not suboblique, becausi; it uoes not .,e.w..„ ■•' "p -\^24 
 
 remark of the author to explain the smnmon ^«/ J^V^^^;. Q„,dam furti damn?ltu8 
 (i) Dkpkm.ent.on '•"■^^•:CLA^,,f 5 V;»V^i^^ uiteriOrc ejus municipii 
 
 est. quod eqno cujm^ vsvs xUi «'^-^''//^'^^^^.^"^'T S taken (stolen) a ride on 
 
 clivoVectus e«set ; Somebody ^^•«^ ^^' ^^LJ^ '^'^^\ll'^f^^ ^Jt ^^ him to use vp to that 
 a hill beyoii'l the town of Aricia <m ^}'^jrf,l^^]^.^^^.^^^^^^^ „ot suboblique. because 
 In-n. Valer. ^Slax. 8, 2.4. .^'f^^'^^l^^^^^^^^^ the theft, 
 
 riie\m a hill, etc., and th<M-eby have sujlen the^ se o^ LabSuo Jandat, GermSnos qni 
 
 (c) Depknoknt on i>'rKiVVTivK cla -ls . ca.ar i^^ ,,anslre conentur, prohibeat ; 
 
 avxilio a lidqis ({rcessVi du-ebantur.^xv^^^^^^ .Zwevetaid to have been Unmmed 
 
 Ua'sar ..rdered Lab-enus /?./'^«'^'^^tJ « V ^"h Hver f L'V .v/i^^ atlejni^t to force a 
 
 Ua'sar ..rdere.l Lab-enus ^?/f*t,7rrns<inL" he river f they should attempt to force a 
 by the IJetqians /» /Z/^^/- a*'/,- /''''" "^' 'J? % ""' Znlntur^ is suboblique, because it 
 
 i"-^'"- • . . 1 ^f ,Y,r, onthnr (^iven in the form of a relative 
 
 OBS.2. Som<-times ^xplainniir remarks o he thorven ^^^^.^,^,^^.^ ^f 
 
 clause, have sib-iinctive Pp'^'l^"^' ^, ;^'V,h m^nV d^ on whici. thev d.pend. Gener- 
 te indirect stateuumt ^^^^^f V^^^^,'" .^ "^^llf.'rel Uiv^ .biunctives 'with causal force' 
 ally such subjunctives must ^!*,\C2"^'\'f '^J ^^;.,,'^', \^^^^^^^^^ SolOnem fuisse, euni 
 
 according to B. VI p 5C(), as : ^^J ' f„*^^'^, ^^^'S^^^^^ sav that the wisest man ot 
 
 ?^/S<?;;*a^'sr?t^'S;e^^XS^^;>;^'S^^^ .iJm ,hJy (the Athenians) use to 
 
400 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 401 
 
 the present day. Cic. Rose. A. 25, 70. Here the clause ' qui scripserit ' forms no part 
 
 of the indiivct (statement, and hence is 7iot i^uhohlique, and yet the predicate is in iht; 
 puhjunclive hecause tlie aiitlior represents it a« tlie |.»roJ)ahle caiii»e of tlie };»-nerai opin- 
 ion stated in tlie oblique daus-e. Hence the i)redicaie utuntur, which i» a remark ol the 
 autiior icifho'it sucli cau;-al force, i;< in the; indicafive. See Ex. "^s,— Sometimes, h«)\vever, 
 such predicates are iii il»e ful)juuctive when no such causal force can he as>i.:ned to 
 them (Ex. 7). These belong,' to the subjunctives by quasi-attraction. (^See Kem. Ul.) 
 
 1. Docet' Ionise aliil raiiOne bellum esse gerendum afque'^ antea r/estum nt. Cjcs. 
 r>. G. 7, 14.— -2.' Majorca vestri, ^ibicunque muU'dndo etistt, ibi et leijitimum rectO- 
 reni^ multitudinis censebanl debere esse. Liv. .39, l.'j.— 3. Ilelvetii leurillos ad Ciesarem 
 niittunt qui dicerent, sil)i esse inanlmo^ sine ulio maleticio^ iter per proviuciani facere 
 propterea quod allnd ittr haberent nulluin. C;es. li. G. 1, 7.— 4. Ciesar. n vim fact le^ 
 cont/d'tr liclvetii, prohiiiitQiuui^ ostendit. II). 1, 8.— 5. Considius dicit, montem (jue/n 
 Ccesar ab Labieiw occvpdn toluerit, ab hostibus tenCri. lb. 1, 'irl.— {\. Quidam dixit, 
 plus quani jioUicUus e.^att Ciesarem facere. lb. 1, 42.-7. Diciiur ctiam Flaminius, is 
 qui tribuuus plebis let'em de ajrro» Gallico dividendo^ (ulerit^^. (et) qui contiul ap'id 
 Tr<Uiiinenuin fit interftctus, ad populum valuisseii dicendo»-. Cic. Brut. 14. 57.— 8. Vi- 
 dCris mild tantumi^ juris civllis scire voluisse qnaid>!iii satis tK-<et oratoii. lb. 40. 150. 
 — 9. liex, Servioocclso, quemcunque ali'tm^* generuin delef/is<ef^^. eundem r«'«;ni herG- 
 dem hictilnis videbatur. l.iv. 1, 40.— 10. Non dubitilDat quin, d ijkte Ven-tinconvtnl^stt\^^ 
 leqiiitaiei^ causie commovGre'» homini'm posset. Cic. Verr. 2, I, 48.— 11. Lei^ilti veniG- 
 bant questum (juod llai ildes. qui nt/ptr in. Galliam traiuspurtCtH ti^mnt^'*. linls (■Oruin 
 popularenlur-o. Ca's. J3. G, 1, 37.— 1^. Marcius miliies increpril)al-i quod in muliebrls 
 be projecissent'^'- lletns poiius quani ad tiitandos xeintt iiKOsaciterenf^^ unimos. Liv. 25, 
 37.- 13. De'^* pecuni:! linTtur'", ne major-" causil ludorumconsumeretur-^ quatn quanta-'* 
 Fulcio Nuhilidri decreta'^^ e-^set. lb. 40, 44.— 14. LeirAti intt-rse sanxerunt=»», ne quia 
 enunliilretsi (.l'^'"* ''e-^) nisi (ei) quibu.^ coiatnuai consUio vimuirit nnx, e<Kel. Cies. IJ. G. 1. 
 30.— 15. DecrevGruut patres ut, quuin })opuluK reqtin jussi-'i'tt'^'-, id sic ratum^^ csset^i 
 pat res aud ores fiertnf^*. Liv. 1, 17.— 10. l^alrOno^^ „ialo suadCbut Granius ut mulsuui 
 Iri^ddum^i biberet simulac doniuni redisset. Cic. Or. 2, 70. 281.— 17. Fa-dus ictum inter 
 Itomanos et Albanos est his lci,dbus='^ ut, cujus poputi cites €0 ctrtamiue vicuseut, is 
 alleri populo imperitaret^'*. Liv. 1,24.— 18. Solon quuni interro;,'aretur cur nullum 
 Kupplicium consiitui^set in euut qui parentnn mca-^ftf, dixit se id m-mincm factilrum 
 putasse. Cic. Hose. A. 25, 70.— 19. Credo eijo vos, judiccs, minlri quid sit quod'^^ eqo 
 pijfimmuf/i surrexerini*'', qui iicque tctute neque in^enio sim cum hi-' qui sedeont*^ 
 cotnparaitdu.<. lb. 1, 1.— 2U. Ilerodotum, qui j/rincejis qenus hoc ornurit*'^, in causia 
 iiilulominu>*3 V(Ts;ltum'> esse accepimns-»^. lb. Or. 2. 13, 55.— 21. C;esar commodissi- 
 mum esse stutuit^'', leixionarios miliies'^ leir'onis deciuue, cv/i qua/n maxiine confide- 
 bat*'^, equisimponere^". Cies. B. G. 1, 42.-22. Ne hunc quidem, quamqvam <=••«_/ in re- 
 public 
 Or. 2. 
 
 quuin , ... 
 
 '24. LVque eo, judices, animadvi-rti eum (i. e. accusau'rem) jocari alque alias res aL'cre, 
 anttqaaiii Vhri/foqonum nominaei-''^. lb. Kosc. A. 22, GO.— 25. Lei,'aii venerunt onltuni 
 
 c'(7 iV;/^s•(7/^^^•^'*, ex numero accepimus eOrum (fuisse) qui causas diciaarunt^i. Cic. 
 ;. 13,50.-23. Itespondi, netjue me hoc ixistuiare. ne(iue in conventu SiculOrum, 
 li a me aujilium pfttlnVur, le^jalos Syracusanurum adluisse. Ih. Verr. 2, 4, 02.— 
 
 » Doclre with a gerundial = to show the necessity of.— - than. ^Render : accordinirto 
 a plan entirely dillVreui Iroin what had been followed before. )—3 a lei,dtimate (responsible) 
 leader.— * to'inteiid.- ^ without dnin;; any inischiel.— « to use violence.— ' i. e. se prohi- 
 biiQrumesse.— » land.— » on the distribution.— i" fer/fimft-rre. to propose a law.— »' di- 
 cendo valere. to be disiinguislied as a speakt-r.— '= ad'ix^iiutum dictre, to speak publicly.— 
 13 only so much.— ^ i. e. in place of Se:vius.— i» wouhi have chosen.— '" if he hadseeii 
 Verres in person (/>«). The pluperfect su1)junctives in this sentence and in i\\. 11. 15. K». 
 17. have the force of subjunctives of the fuiiire-perlVct. beim: rendered either by 'would 
 have,' or by 'would.'' or by 'had.' See § r.07.— iMn'^^ice.- >"* produce an eflect j)u the 
 man by, etc.—»» had been sent over.— 2« were devastatin;: their territory.--' to rebuke.— 
 '■i- h id aiiandoned themselves to.— -' ratlier than stimul ite their min(ls to, etc — -* con- 
 ccrninj,'.- -^ [the Senate] decreed.— =« i. e. pecunia.— -^ to spend.—''''* than the ainonnt 
 wliich.— -*' to -,'rant.— !*•> came to the understaiidin.,'.— ^' l<> divuli^e.— 3- to elect.— ^^^ the 
 election should bir valid onlv if, etc.— 3* auctorem fieri, to coidirm somethinj;.- ^* attor- 
 ney.— a« ice-cold honey-wine.- ^^ conditions.— s-» should rule over.— =»» quid nt iju(jd, 
 what reason there is that, etc.— "> surqeie, to rise, (i. f^. in order to speak).— •«> who are 
 keepini; their seats.— •«'^ who was tlie I'lrst (earli-si) writer in this branch of literature, 
 — " nevertheless.— «* in causi^ vermri, to |)racii-e the 1 iw.— <^ we have heard, i.e. * we 
 know.'— 4« thought it to be most expedient.— *'' teqionarii mifite.^, foot scddiers.— ♦'^ in 
 whom he placed the vcrv hii,'hest confidence. — <» to provide with horses.— ^^ in repu- 
 blica versdris to be eni!;aj,'ed in politics.— ^» causas dictitCire. to practise the law.— »2 be- 
 fore (till) I mentioned Chrysogonus. The mentioning of Chrysogonus is not a part 
 
 V 
 
 ut celoritatci reliquas res couficeret, qua pleraque erat consecutm^. Cjes. B. G. 7, IS.— 
 20 Hunc sibi ex auimo scrupulum». qui se dies noctlsque stimakU ac pungii*, nt evelia- 
 tiss postulat. Cic. Kosc. A. 2, (i.— 27. tiiuero abs te. luerisne, quod sine senadtsconsulto 
 tibi non licuit, in regno Iliempsalisl' lb. Vatin. 5, 12— '28. Quum ex Socratee^eet quye- 
 sltum. Archelaiim. lY-rdiccie tiliiim. qui turn fort unatl-'simus haberetur. nonnc beaium 
 l)uiaret, • Jlaud scio,' iuquit ; 'iiumquam enim cum eo mm collocutus. 10. lusc. 0, 
 12, :«. 
 
 Hem. 87. Stibobliqiie clauses may liavc their predicates in the I^'DICA- 
 TiVE, 1) if the indirect statement so tar as it is contained in the suboblique 
 chiusc, is ENDORSED by tlie author (Ous. 1) ; 2) if historians make use ot 
 the exceptional license of giving to suboblique clauses the same gram- 
 matical form in tense and mood, as they would have if their governing 
 oblique clause had the form of a direct statement (Obs. 3). 
 
 Ob9. 1. While the author may always (except in the oratio obliqua strictly so callcdi 
 see B. VI.) add his own remarks to indirect statements in the form of a clause wUli an 
 indicative u» which instance the clause is Jiol suboblique ; see Ji. 86, Obs. 1), the same 
 mood is frequently used in clauses strictly subol)lique, i. e., in those that are conceivea 
 bv the same person who makes the indirect statement in the t:overiung oblique clause. 
 The author. l)y using the indicative in such clauses, implies that the statement ot tne 
 j)ers()n introduced as speaker represexits at the tame time his own view, blatemeuts or 
 
 this kind may . 1 .^* „ ,^„„ 
 
 1) contain actual pacts, as : Kectum putiTbat Roscius pro eOrum honestate se piig- 
 x\^rM jrropter quas ipse hone-^tUsimus inter suos nurturatKitur ; Roscius considered it lus 
 duty to stru'gle lor the honor of those on account of whom he 2vas hiinse/f recKon<-a 
 among the most honored of his townsmen. Cic. Kosc. A. G, 10. (The sul)junctive7iwme7'a- 
 7e////- would leave a doubt as to the correctness of Koscius's view in regard to tlie laci ; 
 by the indicative the author pronounces Koscius's supposition as correct).— inita tan- 
 dem ratio est ut, quod riribus deerat, arte a.>quaretur ; The plan was finally adopted to 
 supply by art w/iat ivas wanting in strength. Liv. 20, 4. (The clause ^quod..deerat is a 
 neces.su-v part of the resolution 'Arte ivquemus quod riribus nostiis deest . lieiice tne 
 subjunct'ive deesset would be correct ; but by the indicative deerat the author declares 
 that tile stren-nh was really deficient. althouLrh the subjunctive deesset wouldnof intimate 
 the contrarv)'- (iuem arciorem studii censeiis luisse in Archimede, qui, dumm pulvere 
 qmedam dtscrVAt atieniius, ne patriam quidem captara esse senserit r" Lie. J^in. &, 19, 
 
 2) OMlu^statement may contain ideas which the author takes for granted on account 
 of their 'objective' character, the criterion of which is that the statement cannot be 
 (iispiitrd in the wav it is presented ; if for instance the mere idea of a substantive is rep- 
 resented in the form of a clause, or if the clause contains a hict acknowledged by all ; 
 as: Quis potest esse tam mente captus qui iieget, hiec omnia ^//(« «(/«m?i.«f deorura 1111- 
 niortalium potestate administrjlri ? Who can be so insane as to deny that all things 
 vhich y/v see are governed bv the power oi the gods ? Cic. Cat 3, 9, 21. (1 he clause 
 'qua' ridtmus'hui^ an ' objec'tive ' character, because the fact that we see cannot be 
 di.^uuted).- Kes hoc postillat ut eOrum exspeciatinni qui audiunt quam celernme oc- 
 currillur ; Reason demands that we should as quickly as possible meet the expectation 
 
 of the statement introduced by Umimadrerti.' but an independent remark of the author 
 who is Inre at the same time the speaker. The sentence is pregnantly expressed ad 
 in i)lie< ^animadrerti eum jocari, in quo mque eo rersdtus est dum Vhrysogomm nomi- 
 7 .T'-l uTactinl' rapidly. See p. '243, Ons' 1, 1 : Obs. 2.- ^ The clause yua....conse- 
 catiis' is nJt conceived to'be uttered by the ambassadors. Caesar intimates this by be 
 indicative, and by not usinu' ed in connection with celeritdfe. It is meant for a modest 
 remark. ' My success is owing more to my rapidity than to any genius '// ".^'V'ir'irnnv' 
 tres< pan-, remorse.-* The imperative (optative) cUxx-Q vt....erellatis: /^i.^ony 
 When the'accuser asked lor the death-iMualty of the accused. Ciceio represents him as 
 if he meant by it to ask the curt for n-lief from.the legal steps tl^^t the accuscM W 
 probably take airainst him. Hence the clause ' qui.. . .stimulat acjm ngltJ^x hich ^istiacts 
 u d uis him) could not be placed in the mouth of the ac.u~er. \\ hile Cicero makes the 
 s emeut of this clause his own assertion by means of the indicative, he intimates by 
 the rellexive lorm st (which irrammatically would require a subjunctive predicate p. 11, 
 R 8) that at the .same lime tlie accuser /ee.-'.- that the orator has correctly represented the 
 sta e of his mind. It is one of those faults against strict -rammar which are committed 
 . on purpose, and by which a irenius proves thai he is ttie lord even over the laws ot Ian- 
 guage.— * to tear out. to remove. 
 
 \ 
 
402 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DErENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 403 
 
 of thoBC Who l>car (I. e. of our au.lionco). Cic. Or 2, 77, 313 - ^;'^^,f *^!: ;i"7p;^«\ ?^,f J 
 da«- A^kdor the person) to whom vou may return what yon are oicwg (i. f. vour 
 ce!>t 'Vifyulave contracted one). Sen. Ben. 5, 11).- In all sueh elause.^* the subjunctive 
 iP le9< ( ften <ed if, as in theexaniplcs above, Ihc f/orerninrf nbluiue clause is repre>entea 
 ^ an ,^cSl.mblL fact. Ii; on the cl>ntrar>-, the .overnin^ elause is «-P;.;';;^" j;^! as auO-ue 
 tiiei/itiim/^^'^in suboblinue clauses of this kind is unusual, as: Nollie putilre cos ^'/t 
 Xn^im/iecmonmrJ a.itari Furiaru.n t.edis ardentibus : Do ""i^.^;; J^^i^^j^.^'f^';^^ 
 
 .burnin- torches of the Furies. Cic. l{osc. A. 21, ♦...- But f the ^''^l%}\^^^^":: 
 tains a doubtful fact, botli moods are indiscriinjnately used, as : 9/ '^'^V / -' / - \ e 
 videntur atnciendus (/ui d^vm patria'conservanda' caus;le//^/emm^ <.or tuluuful) [- the 
 
 troduces Aim^-^//as speaker. In this instance a distinc.u.n nu.st be '^'^'^^^V'' '^ ! sa^ 
 author l)y tlie principal predicate of saying, commanding', etc relets t. » '«-/^'.'"f^ .^'";'J/ 
 in::s and conceptions, or whether by the principal predicate he '«'i'-^J' "f>TV ke tho<c 
 views In the former case the statements of the author as speaker are treated like t lost 
 o • other crsoi s, as : Postulo ( = postuhlvi) ut Syracu.nnis liceret senAtus consul ui 
 gU^ >r'JK%?m^«nnihi reddete; I demanded .hat the Syracusans shmi d '>«P^/.'" ^c^ 
 t<. return to me the senatorial decree w/nch t hey had iHV^.ed he <'"-y,^.(<^ *-•. <^, • ^V ' ^" .^J 
 4 00. But in the latter instance the indicative in the subobhque clause is "i";^^."^ ; 
 tl.an the subjunctive, because such indirect «^"tements are virtua ly direc a^ 
 on.nis qui ad/uerunt deleclSros esse vehementer gmwi a e e><t ^;^^^'f ;;j«''<^,*^f// '^ 
 that al nre.<tnt were irreatly deli-hted.when you delivered your •^"^f, ''.^ rl'^^^^ " ^^ 
 nilia Cic Or. 2, 11, 44 ( = omnes qui adfueruni delectabantur quuni Pop luiji te lau- 
 data'esD.-Iv'o a te petout, si tihi vidt/ar. disputes de hoc toto peneie. lb. :>,.,., 2.U ( - 
 l)ispuia, si tibi vidCtur, etc.). See Ex. 14-20. lu Ex. 21 the subjunctive mood is used. 
 
 Obs 2 If ' improper ' indirecl questions do not contain indirect statements of a per- 
 fion introduced by the author, but have only thcfonn of an interro-at.ve fl'';';;;;^/'^^-J^ : 
 the clauses dependent on them are virtually direct clauses, and the mood .)f the r ,>r - 
 
 •ates is not determined by the rules above, as: VideHtis quam fi, -enu.s eOrum jr 
 ]!£ierudVivide.t.r hebes atque impolltum; You may see how ^If ""'.'"»«", y'^^^ 
 is the tribe of those who iinarjine (hat (hey are learned Lie. Or ^' j.'l-^^.J.r. •*-,"" ^ 
 eurum r/m ,'<ifn fnuWl ridfutur e-reu'ie h.bes atque impolltum e>n - i*^''l; ^ •'* ''" ''"^ 
 in laiide justitiie quid cum tide, quid cum :vquabilitille j.n^ (jni laudabltur feceril ( = ^^UJe 
 is qui laiidabittir fecit explicanda eruiit). Cic. Or. 2, .So, 34.x 
 
 Obs 3 The lic<Mise, by which the hisKuians «ive to the predicates of ordinary sub- 
 oblum'e clauses the same tense and mood as if the s„vernin<roblique cause had the form 
 of Ixdh-ect statement, is mostly contlned to the orado obliqua in the strict sen>e of llie 
 word "(B VI)- but it also occlirs in (u-dinary sentences with indirect statements, lu 
 either instance the use of this form is rare, but occurs in all the clas-ical I'lsK.nan^; 
 a^: Constituunt ut ei qui valetudine aut lelate inuliles s,n,t hv\U\ oppido excedaiit , 
 Thev resi)lved that those who by their iiealth or a.ire werexmM for war, should leave tlie 
 town C;es B. O. 7. »1, 8. [If the qVmx^c ' qui. .sunt heUo\ were represented as the au- 
 thor-; remark, it would hi^Uiui. .erauC ; if it ^vore tn-ated as subobhque clauses should 
 be accordin- to rule, it would be ' qui. .e>^sevt\ The form ^qui..suid »'''»^,«» ' , ^.'^ f 
 IV.rm as it would have if the .irovernin- obiKnie clause were representee las a ' ^^-^^ »" 
 maud, ' Qui vaMudim, etc., inudl^ sunt tjello, omdo excedant ! ].- i hus on oh iciut 
 discourse) in the speech of Mithridiltes to his soldiers (Troi;. Pomp, in Just. .iH, «.). Ait 
 I^lilhridates .,u( ipxi lioimVd ferunt, conditores suos lupai uberibus altos, pIc omnem 
 ilium populum lin)r)ium animos habOre; Mithrhlat.s m\d. ...that a.'^^ the Lomajig theni- 
 felveshadtht (raditioii that the very founders of their race had been nourished at the 
 breast of a she-wolf, so had that whole people the souls ol wolves — I uui senein jhM- 
 auain conrivium i>n,rut, exceptum poculum Druso tradidisse; (It was rumored) that 
 thereupon the old man, after he had joined the banqut(, had taken a -oblel and handed 
 it to Drusus. Tac. Ann. 4, 10. See Ex. 22-21. 
 
 Obs 4 Sometimes the form of the indicative in suboblique clauses is used for par- 
 ticular reasons as : C. Mario ma-na atque mirabiliaportendi haruspexdixerat ; pnniide 
 qu(e animoaqitufjat fn-tus di-ageret ; Tlie liaruspex had said that a irreat and astoumiiiig 
 fate was destined to C. Marius ; iience he mi-ht. trusiin- in the ^'ods, carry out w/uit he 
 was then revolvinq in his mind. Sail. Ju-. 63. Here ugitabal can neither be considered 
 Hs 'endorsed by the author' (no fact heini,' 1,'iven which the author could endorse), nor 
 lis an indicative accordimr to Obs. 3 (wliidi would require the preseid tense). But il 
 Sallust had used the subjunctive, the clause ' pioinde qua anivio agitaret would not 
 \m\ii\.\\^.\nvan\nz' hence... Avhat he ^cas (hen revnlring in hh intud ,but ' wha(eyer ne 
 henceforth tnight revolve in his mind\ To make this undersUindini,' of the clause impos- 
 
 sibl ■, Saljist used the indicative aprainst the strict rules of grammar, thus preferring a 
 qiies'ioiiable grammatical form to a faulty expression of hi-j meaning. 
 
 1. Ileheiii, (luum id quod ipn dilf/us viginti cege}'7i7ne^ confecerant^, Ctesarem uno 
 die coulecisM" inteliigerent. legatos ad euin mittunt. Cics. B. G. 1, 13.— 2. Intelligere 
 dei)e-. tibi tiieiidos esse illos virosrt qnibu/i iniduni libertddsconfectuin est^. Cic. Fani. 
 9 14, y _ ;^. Prudentissima civitas Aiheiiiensium. duin ea reruin jwdta ef<t*, luisse tra- 
 d'itur. ib. liosc. A. 2."), 70.— 4. Illain proscrii)tiOnem senatus siiscipere^ noluit. nequid 
 Hcrius» quam more maj&n/m coinpardtum esP, publico consilio lactum (esse) videatur, 
 Ib w.i l.j3 — .^ (Rosci'us) roirat te, ^i nihil de pains fortilnis in suam rem conrer/it^, si 
 nul'd'in re te frauddtit. ut sibi per te liceai» innocenti vitam in egestate degerei». 
 Ib 4'i 141 — O". (^luens an v<ruin sit quod Stoicis placet^^. sapieiitiam bonum esse, sa- 
 
 fs>e i)rovinciiira quuin in areis fruwenta sunt^''. Cic. Verr. 2. 5, U— 10. Scitis esse 
 notisfimuTu»" ridiculi genus quuin aliudi" exspeciamus aliud dicitur. Ib.Or. 2. «;3, 255. 
 — 1! Nonniilli priecipiunt-", ut verbuin illud quod causam faciC-^ lucide^s breviterqiie 
 nteiqiie-3 dftlniat lb. 2, 2."). 108.— 12. Non quieritur, quo bentficium ab eo, cui datum 
 /•-^ lian-fenliur'^^ Sen. Ben. 5. 10.— 13. Quieris, cur pariter iiatiss» fatii diversasint, 
 
 •> •).; _ .2(1 (»ii;ero abs t«', circumsessusne'»» sis Lampsaci, (et) co-peritne domum in 
 7iadeiersaljart'- niiiltitudo inceiidere. Ib. Verr. 2, 1. 78.- 21. Nihil prius constituo'* 
 
 > With the «'reatest difllcultv.— - The predicate is suboblique, l>ut endorsed by the 
 nuthor bem-^stated, both in his own nanu", and as part of th • reasoning of the llelve- 
 ti-iiis — ^by^vhom the way for lifjerfy has been paved. The staiement is suboblique, 
 beloii'jin ' to the sentinn nt which ihe person addressed ought to have: but it is likewise 
 eMdoi-ed"l»v the author, who a-serts that the men he meant (Brutus and Cassius) were 
 indeed the ori'dnators of liberty.— * «n long av it held the supremacy. The clause forms 
 a D.rt of the ' tradilinn.' but is at the same time endorsed by the author.— ^ to be re- 
 sponsible for — « lest harder measures should seem to be adopted.- ' than it icas war- 
 ranted This fact formed part of the motives of the Senate, but is at the same time 
 endorsed as correct bv the author.- « appwpriated to himself. This and the next clause 
 are part of Koscius-; pleading: but the correctness of the facts is at the same tune 
 vouched for by the autlior.— « at si/A per te liceat. to permit him.- '« to spend.- i» the 
 fact that the assertion 'sapientiain /jonum esse,' etc., fvas one of the Stoic principles (so- 
 called ^loic paradoxes), is endorsed by the author.— I'Mvho got out ol him (received 
 from him» part of the bo-^tv. Ferre is used in contrast to ^ofTerre.'-]^ i. e.quo'ftsa 
 tne-^* which we call 'didactic' (including the moral philosophy).- ^^ to obtain the 
 hi<'hesf de-ree of.-"= to jnake a circuit in the province.— i" when the corn is in the barns. 
 The fact that this happeiicd once everv year is generally acknowledged.— "' the most com- 
 mon speci<-s of the ludicrous.— i» when we expect something else than what is men- 
 liouod — -" "ive the rule.— 21 on which the whole case rests (turns).— 22 placidly.— 
 23 both of the attorneys.- "-* is cui datum est, the receiver (for which there is no good 
 latin mnni) — ''" gwlenfficium transftrdtnr, how the benefit bestowed, is «pplied.— 
 2« nariter na'tis, to those born in equal circumstances, in similar situations.- and are 
 as diver-ent as circumstances can be (literally: and are distant by the greatest in- 
 tervals „T circumstances).-2» orisrin, birth.- 2» there 1* the least possible diflerence.- 
 30 .rn-at works .d" arr.— ^i /,(id inonred great losses, a notorious fact at that time.— 
 ^"-solutiOne impedltd. bv a suspension of jiayments.- 3» credit.- 3" to collapse.-/' all 
 that set racticaliuiportance to the citizens.- 36 ,h(Hild comprise in his mind.- 
 37 , ncc ninodate Ilippias ivith so much.- »- friendship.- ^Mo alow.- " which 
 threatens which is aimed at.-^i to ward ofl.- " that, having been in the most indigent 
 c ircu. "ances. you became rich, etc. See § 444 -*^ legem ferre, to pass a law'.-- ^4 pn the 
 e nl ez/lement of public money.- "5 the most stringent.- ^e drcunisedire. to ^'osiege.-- 
 i^TitrM^io stay.- *« 1 establish nothing earlier than, i. e. I determine before all 
 other thiugi. 
 
 ••%,. 
 
 I 
 
401 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DETENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 405 
 
 mmm onUl Pit illud» qno^ mihi sit referenda omni;» ilia or,itio3 (iua:ni propria* 
 ^ J /;-?,/ 5 ih Or '^ -'7 114 - 2> Ju'MMiha p()>tero die cum Aulo in rolioqiuo» 
 
 forme^^ sihi putarerant. cum tilio •■jus Anstonln. belhuu -e>M-=^. . 1 fe^ 1 " ^ ;, r . « dJ 
 \^'i\-'l\ Scapiius intll'^ annum so tcrtium ct octo-csimum a-ere, ot in a-ro dc 
 quo agilur^'' militasj!«c"*. Li v. 3, 71. 
 
 ; 4)QUASI-0BLIQUE, AND QUASl-SUBOBLTQUE CLAUSES. 
 ^ 600. If clauses coiUaiu iiulirect stalcnu-iits, conceived by the (logi- 
 cal) subject of the principal sentence, without being grammatically de- 
 pendent on a verb of saying, thinking, etc., or on (me of the oblique 
 constructions mentioned § 509, they are virtuallt/ ohUque or svbobUque.aud 
 are called quasi-ohlique or quasi-subobliqce clauses according as they 
 arc analogous to the oblique or to the suboblique clauses. They regu- 
 larly take'' their predicates in the suhjunciive {\'ov exceptions sec i?. 88, 
 Obs. 2). and never have the form of an infinitive clause. 
 
 Ob* It 1«^ a common feature of the oblique (or subobliqurV and the qnasi-obliqnc (or 
 o.ia<i-ub. hliqn " e aiises that b..th are stated ' out of th.- mind of a person introduced by 
 tlu\uri or ' er Ji? /a ;^^^^ cor/itau/ur). and ther.- is no clause- which may no be repre- 
 sented i^ the thm^^^^^^^^^ another ,,ersou by merely =,m in. - to tl^; predicate he ™ 
 fl "n b u nctive Th^ En-Ii-h lan-ii.pe has m. mean=. to express th.- same distinction by 
 ?h - rb. n of tl'e pmlicate. as : Nocte ambuhlbat Themi<roc es 7.0./ v.,,.«^^^^ 
 «m; jwwsv/ • Themistocles walked about by ni-ht because he could not 4et^p. Cu. ^»^^- 4; 
 iTifTh^ predh-a e ..f ti.e clause is plac.-.l in the subjunctive, since the cause w . cli 
 iile Theml^ocles walk by ni.dit rests wholly on his own ^^f^^^^^l^^'^^ 
 We must supply ' id 'i'i'>d se furer^ dlnbnt quod ,. . .n..ii posse . 1 ins iu..krs tic c . u e 
 ' ou/A sulH) >luiu(> ' ai if dependent on an intinitive clause ut>der>tood. Had the author 
 n^.r b. m ic^ Ik- would have stated the cause as his own remark or as 
 
 vou-lui^^ "«•' ,l,inl< proper.- Pliniu.a.cend,th.cuiu 
 
 n ^>) qui) ma'lme illud min/culum ro,..pM i^feraf; IMiny «-;- ;;;^:,^'\i^^^;^,::^^^ 
 that remarkable (-vent could U be>t d^^ernd. 1 liu. Kp. b. 1«. Ihe "" »';r- ' > ". .''r,;"J 
 (iicative voUmt, rei)r('sents the clause as his own r. mark, imply n-_' "'/',' '''V',,')^ 
 ihe.hlce' and that the view from there really was as stated. /Us.ti! would make the 
 clau^e qua4-obUque = ex quo illud miruculum conspici ixx^se «citbuf. 
 
 Hem. 88. Quasi-oblique .clauses are virtually equivalent to ohhque 
 clauses i. e. tliev may be transformed into clauses immahuieji dependent 
 on verbs of savimr, thinkinir, etc., which must be supplied liom tlie con- 
 nection. In lieu of the verb of saying, etc., they take their predicates in 
 the .suMnnrUcc. The governing verb thus understood is . , , 
 
 1) either a verb expressing purpose and intenlum, or an equivalent 
 accessory predicate {eo comilio), in whicli instance the clause is a final 
 clujse/ introduced bv the conjunctions ut,ne,ov 7^/^ (generally used 
 before comparatives with the f..rce of v/0,^ which always require the 
 predicate to be in the subjuncti ve'" (See B. VI.), as : 
 
 1 Quid sit Vlud - the aim.- ' qnn referemla «^ to which ^^Ko"!;) Jjc {^'J^f !;:,^;r ^l^^ 
 discourse.- * refers to.- » subject, theme - « conference - ' f'' ' / f J;'^ •(• -- 
 nn.-iied bis views to Aiiliis — « = ets .— *» held ... .enclosed, i. (. had at his iikhn. 
 
 • d c ss . 1 ve -^^^^^ '"- The relative clause must be placc-d alter th.- in- 
 
 finite clause -»^ in rc-'irdo himself (Enmenes).- i4 improper.- ^^ be-an (to sp.-ak) 
 - « t n-t of th;- country -1^ 7?ev de qua aqitur was u le-al lormnla. corresponCn- to the 
 attriiJu !\-cf phmse "!i7.«^,Vr/ ..././w/i^c^ '/.^^^."^^ ''^^ I^^'.^IA "V;to\h miliVa^y 
 
 multis locis in iuriscousulturum induditur f.ir.uiilis. Cic. I^''^^; '•';'■';- ,i:^^^^^^^^ 
 Bervice, to servc-^» Clause:? of purpose or ' Ihial clauses arc not alw ays couctn td as u.di- 
 
 i 
 
 * ,....r,,r..u pniios vf f>nem fuocB iolleret: C;tPar removed the 
 
 CjEPar ex !^^]'\^^'S\^^.'^^,;,'L^^^^^ thehopeof JlighL Ca^s. B. G. 1, 
 
 hots.s .uit of sifTht tu ordet /0 Uhat c " V'' ^^. d/strovin- \ connlium hatms. or eo 
 
 2.5; ==;inU-iidin{?todest.ov ^' ^^ p^VP.erb of intendi.Tg is impi.ed in U.e mere 
 
 coriAlio ut spem »'''^*'^et. 1 he louc m u_ ^ j an^,„5.this quafi5bat, ne mvl- 
 
 conjunction ''^.«;yl J^^'^X^rh m^^ -^ '^^ ^^'^ lest hemiqht 
 
 ti(udh,e ctrcumxrltur: fh. ^"*';^j;.\ P ,,,^^ ^^ep. Them.3 ( = m order 
 
 be outflanked loj the >-^^l>^rwr^^^nub Jot tla uicmj ^^^^ \^^^^.^^^l f,,,iiius eqmtatum 
 that not, io conditio addudusa^^^^^ (hedtro) to have a bettet defence against 
 
 t:;i;rx»!t'ei.i. y:G^r>i( = ™iS/i''W..c« lu etc. «ec ex. «. lo. n .» 
 
 owi , „,.,ii„n,v Tort) of «avini. commanclin,!:, or tliinUing, which, 
 
 !;;.^\\T:,:n"K;y;:i>;::i-ohC 
 
 another route />r'i'/.'6 ''' '""'^^ If^La [^ AlminOrum ad Civsarem hgSti vene.unt, qui 
 prudennsadorlnnon2^^setnte elM^^^^^ j,^-^ ^^^^^ to Caesar, 
 
 ,e de ^uperiOH.^ tempons ^^^'•^V"^,,^f J^, "Vfmi er r^ Ctes. B. G. 4, 22 (t. e. 
 
 ichoivereto ercnse '''-'". 'jj'J''''^^'^^^^^^^ els indi.-nitas crescere, n ;?. 
 
 ouibu^ m mandaveraid vt se ^_^cusai n . ^ I'M j, j increased uhen \_hey 
 
 de Tarquxmo quidemad se ''''^7', Jj^j .^ \ vi^'y-^^l^in',- death beretvruedto them. 
 conndeUd that] the throne would ia>^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 pv. L 40 l=;i -- ^erSbaii re. nm -^ '^--Ji:^- ^,^^,, Uv. 87, 7. Ex. 1-^ 
 luxuruw.N><?/, lion a\Lr.>uuM- qu.ini .„„-♦ ko «nnnlied a-cordinf to ;?. S2, re- 
 
 OBS. l.Soinetimes the verbs of saym.wh^^^^ 
 
 quir.- a (iuod-clause, as: ^''^y^^'^'}^^J'^L^l^^um ot the people, because the late 
 jv,.,v/.i,,- nium .lictatr.ris f«>rm , '_^ '• ^i^.^'J soldiers, misled the dictator s mind, 
 c^f the State had ^^^^^\-^^Z \uunJ^ai^t^ictato, em quod tritjas milifibus, etc.). 
 Liv. 1, 27 ^ - nivKlui hot. inuiu qui ^'^^ ^ the subjunctive in the final clauses intro- 
 0ns. 2. The mood of the clause is a ^«^ ^hc sm^^ ^^ ^^ ^^ ^ ^^ ^^^ 
 
 d.ued by vf. w. quo, »''fV-''''"7 v-Ou"i hor i. which instances the indicative may be 
 indirect statement is endorsed b% the '^'''"''''J^]/" j^ludesque interced'ebant : Ue was 
 nsed a>: Lon-ius prosecnn ven us est, '{.^'^^%^^^^ Cips. B G. 5, 
 
 aii^dd of continuiu. .he ^^^^^1^^^%^^ t^^r^'I^U^tfdan i.rfiri^/a/ (j^uarded) 
 rv> ^ee Ek 8 '.».— H, il^>^V'-iver, such an ar-Miuoiii.iM , ^^ m.neral y in connec- 
 
 '^;^U^on::i tiie autiu.r. the ^«^J'|>'^t>y«,;!;^:S^L^^ ^ ^^r^hi^r itnf^ines t^Orum, qvod 
 tion with a pareniheiical credo ^ a. . ^^ '".'^^^Ji'.'J „,h^.r\iav I saw Demosihencs's^ image 
 eum, credo, a;m7;v., imag.nein f ^, ^J^V., -«//W /iS'^^^^ lore him. Cic. Or. 31 .10. 1 he 
 amon- the images of y..ur ance^^^'[,^' \^'l '.f;, ' ut /potential subjunctive (R. 79) em- 
 clau^e ' quod evm atinires Ms n t J"f J.?^ .'Jg^c ition. i niusi be in the imperlect, wlulc 
 plove.l in a clause where, ^'y/ \^/:;'^ *' ,f ? e ^ Jsen or perfect. See Ex. 10. 
 in an indep 'udent sentence it mu.t be ^» ^hc pi^ tn J' statements, instead of 
 
 Obs. :i Often causal or relative fl'V'^f^^;. ^^"^^ ^.^i Xpen lent on those verbs of say- 
 t-iki n- their predicates in the *'\'^^J''"^'''^Apsnl e tex^^^^ thought, 
 ^^ cFc , which represent the act by which ^^e ^J^^J^^J/ Ji^Vssa reciperaturos conndebant ; 
 vs: Hoc sihi t^ol^«tii l''-''I>7'^"'^'"'J).*?;'^ ..^^^^^^^^^ speedily 
 Thev consoled themse ves^cca*/.. /^ey /^^/^/^^^^ ^^^ .confidlbant might have ub pred- 
 recovir their losses. Cies. li. G. .. la. /.''^^^'L'"^,,^^ celeriter amissa reciperatun essent). 
 [iue in the subjunctive without ^omf^^'tK^^^^^^^^ occur in clauses o his 
 Ihit there are two peculiar and ^^'''y * '^JV,^^^^^^^^^^^ verbs of saying and Uunk- 
 kind.aml must be (-onsub-red as a t '•^^ \^XK^^^ of saving or thinking is inuirect ly 
 i„;r are ].lacc.l in the ^'f^''''''//''^;' \'»^ ''f/?.";iVlvetii qu^^^^ Romfinos decedere a se extdi- 
 stated, butiheclau-edepend.M.tonit.a^*. "^,'^';;;;^ ,„.2an to follow our tro..p8 be- 
 rnareif. no<tros insequi ca?perunt ; T 1 e \\^^^^l\l^^^ t^..^. Cibs. B. (i. 1. 23 ; 2) that 
 cau^e th.y thought that the Koman> ^^*^ f ,. ". i\7,i ,J ,iiese clauses (cither ni the in- 
 veiibs of /ayin-^- or thinking are fjj-^f' ^J,^ ^^^! JJM",^; the act of saying or thmkwg^ 
 dicative or-more Irequenily— m the suojuntu ; 
 
 ' "^ \ '• IZToT^ninnsp conceived hv the author, and 
 
 scurAliijocus sit aut mimicus. Cic. Or. 2, oJ, iiJ. 
 
406 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 hut tho af'tions mid or Ihovqht are concoivod as the canso of tlio principal action ; asi : 
 L. Treboniiis, iiire.<ti;s (crat) patrihiis. quod se ah iiis in cooptauiTis tri'>flnif* fraiulc cap- 
 tuni {ijVmt ; L. Trtboniiis had n griuli.a! ajxainst tlic I*atrii.ians. btcaii.^e he said that they 
 had playe(i a trick upon inin. Liv. :{. (»5 {i. e. because, accordini; to his staiern(Mit, they 
 liad. etc.).— Ille cnijteiidit itt in (jiallia ndin(inereriir <i^>iod reli-^'ionihns tsi-se imp<'dlri di- 
 ct-rtt ; He deniandcd to he h'ft in (iaul. b&ainse he i^aid tliat he wns kt-pt tliere by reli<,'- 
 iniis reasons. ( jes. B. (t. 5, (i (j, e. because lie was, according to his stattuien't, kept 
 there, etc.). See Ex. 11-10. 
 
 1. Qi'oniam f/emini^ exufinf^, necnctfltis verecundia' discrTnien facere ;)o.«.<r<«^^ Palatiuni 
 Romulus, Kt-tnus Avi-nilinini ad aiiiruranduin tcinpla c;ipiuiit*. Liv. 1. «».— 2. Miltia- 
 des qiiotiiain ipse pro se dicere non poaxtt, verba fecit^ Irater ejus Tisacroras. Nrp. 
 Milt. 7, »» — 3. AristTdes nonne ol) eain causjun expulsus est patiiil, ^w^/ prater nio- 
 dum" J //•>•/ '/.< €iiset f Cie. Tusc. .5, ;j!>.— 4. Si lucf^ (pioque canes in t'apifolio iatrenf^, 
 opinor I'is crura sullrinirantur'* quod arr^s^^ /^ifif*^ ctiani turn (jmnn suspic-io nulla sir. 
 lb. Rose. Am. 'i{\ 5(i. — .'>. Sji'pe aliquid anihiiritur'- qxod ant K/t/urn aut rtrtja nut 
 privfermt«a^^. lb. Or. 2. 2r., 111.— 0. TabuKe»^ repertse .«tint in quihus suninia erat'» 
 JlelvetiOnim capituin inillia CCLXIII. ; exhisr/wi art/ia /(rnf)(fs.stnf^^ ad niillia XCIT. 
 Cies. B. (;. 1, •jy. — 7. Ctesar exploratOres pnrmitnt'" qni^"^ loruin idoiwrin c<t>:f n--: dili- 
 qaiit. 11). 2, 17.— 8. Ca-sar in Morlnos proliciscitur quod iiidt trat brevi-sinius iu 
 liritanniam trajectus»». lb. 4. 21.— 9. C. Fl;imiiiius La-liuna socerutn, ywja cooptdtu,s^o 
 in auirunim colleL,'ium'-i nonei'at. non admoduni diiiirebat. Cie. Mrut. 2H, 101.— 10. Ilor- 
 tensius post consuhltum— r/v//o, quod vidTnt ex ccHisularibus^- neniiiiein esse s»('cuni 
 comparan<ium, iteqlirji^rtt'-'-^ autem-* eos qui consuii's non iuissent— illud stadium n^- 
 niTsii'-". lb. \y.\. .320. — 11. Circiter homiiium inillia sex spe saliliis-" inducti. quod tiiiam 
 fugani occu/tdri /)o>tse exiMimdreiit, e castris llelvetiOrum e-rressi sunt. Ca-s. B. (i. i, 
 27.— 12. Alius alijl-T c:iusa dlatS^y, quam sibi ad /)rt>fici.<cei)dufn^* nccesmriam'-^o esse di- 
 ceret. petCbat ut discedere liceat, lb. 1. .'iJ».— 1.3. (^uiesierat ex me Scipio quidnam siii- 
 llrem d(! hoc <iuod duo colei^ visas e/^^^.e constdret^K Cic. Jtcp. 1. 1.3. 11».— 14. lluuc excu- 
 silvit 'I'ereniius quod^'^ eunt. bracliiuin frerjisse diceret. II). Or. 2, <»2, 253.— 1.'). Hi ex- 
 jjonunt^^. equite.«i .Eduoruni interfectos (es.se) quoil rollocnti cum Art'trni^ dicerentur. 
 fjes. B. (t. 7, 38.— Hi. Verres nomiiiat servum suum quein tnaqistrum ptcori^^* esse 
 diceret. Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 7. 
 
 Rem. 89. QuAsr-sunoBT.iQUE ct-ausks arc those Avhicli ai-e virliially 
 equivalent to (^uhohlujue danarii {^ T)!)!)), \vliicli is liic ca.^^c (//) if the r/oirrn- 
 inrj verb implies an ohlique chuise (Oiis. 1) ; (b) if llie clau.sc is dependent 
 on a quasi-oblique clause (Obs. 2). 
 
 Obs. 1. Verbs or phrases, which imply oblique clauses, are the following: : (a^ many 
 piirases with substantive objects, as Causain re/terio = causam esse rejjerio; ptt/irt^or or 
 propouo aliqnid = polliecor me aliquid ractilrum esse; ])Osco (^ar/ito, jieta) aliquid = 
 impero (peto) nt aliquid detur. as : Ca'sar banc rtperilbat ra //.<.«;« quod apud (Jf-rmnnos ea 
 consuetQdo t^,s>6'/' ut, etc. ; Vm>&v found out t/ds rt-aso/i that it woa- cu>t(>mary with the 
 (iermans to. etc. Otes. B. G. 1, 5i).— Mai:iia/;/YV>"////7 eis (jiii eum occidfrint pi-aMida ; He 
 pr<rndstd «^reat rewards to those who would kill him. lb. h, 8.— Ciesar qiiotidie .Eduos 
 frumcntum quod €ssf:ntjx)llicifijla!/itdre; Ciesar daily ^/^7«««r/^</ from the .Edui the corn 
 wliirh thct/ had prornistd. II). 1, It;.— {b) Those vt'rbs'of say ine. tliinkinir. etc., which are 
 construed with an object-infinitive (g§ 489, 491) are often equivaU-nt to a similar verb of 
 siyinir, etc., with an infinitive dau-^e. or a clause with vt. IJence the clatis.s depend- 
 ent on these con>tructionsar<' quasi.sufM>bHque if conceived by the subject of the ^'overn- 
 im^ verb of sayinpr, etc., as : Nee Ilasdrubal alium qu'-uHiuani pratlctre. nuUk (malebal) 
 ubi quid fortiter ac streniie agendum esset ; Nor did Ha^drubal likt. to jdace any one else 
 
 1 Twins. — 2 j_ fi quoniani fremino» se esse considerjlbant. — 3 respect due to a^'e. — 
 '' IJomuIus took the I'alatine. and Hemus the Aveiitine hill as ol)^^■^•vatories (fenii)la) 
 for the au'jcunil phenomena.— ^ acted as his defender because (understand : ' he eon- 
 hidered that his brother', etc.).— « to excess.— i at dayliirht.- « would bark.— * their 
 bones would be broken.— >•> sharp.- " i. e. quod existimarent eos an'is esse, l)ecause 
 they would consider them as sharp. — »= is considered ambi«;iious. — J3 i. e. quod vidC- 
 tur verhum pnetermissum esse;.- i-» lists.— >•> suinma erat Iltlv^^tiorum. the a.^irreirate of 
 the Helvetians was staled to be.— »« /. e. who were desi<:nated in ihe lists as beini,' able 
 tt) bear arms. — >' sent scouts in advance.— >« /. e. qiiHius imperavit ut. — i" pa>^pa<re. — 
 20 chosen.-- «i board of auiriirs (whose chairnum was Ladiiis).— sa exconsuls.- ^3 hlijjht- 
 ed. took no account of them.— 2* and.— '-» j?ave up.- •''' induced bv the pros|)eci of 
 liboriy.- 27 see § 3.')7. R. 6.— 2« to alleije, to plead.— 2» for his departure.- ^o c<iusa 
 7t>-cessaria, a reason which forms a f^nod excuse.— 3» constat, it is known.— ^2 literally ; 
 because he suiU = by saying.— =*=* to ? tate.— ^* overseer of the herds. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 •ll 
 
 u i 
 
 1 
 
 in command wherever brave and enerjretic action was required. Liv. 21. 24 {necprcRficere 
 maUr»Z be paraphrased bv ' Xeqarit se pnvticere ' ).- C'onstitutrut.t ea q.ue ad proficis- 
 ^umprHinlrnt cmni>arC,re ; They resolved to prepare sshi^uvasrequiredjovxh^ march 
 V'vT\\ii\ 3(r=constituerunt ut coinpararent).- (c) Predicate-accusatives, governed 
 b; V. i.s of say nir or thinkinir (§ 487, B.C.), are frequently equivalent to a ^'"^'1^»';;;^^ > 
 of Ivin^r. erc.Vith an inllni.ive clause, as : Leres militesc^m ha;tam tan turn r7^rer.«Jroe^^ 
 Itnntur • Those who carried onl v .1 lance were called light-arnved soldier.^. Liv . 8, 8 ( - dice- 
 ha ur'leves m li es esse). [Compare the Ex. p. 202].-The imperlecl of the periphrastic 
 luf re ( fien imX< a verb of ' ies..lving\ and clauses referriufr ,0 such a resolution are 
 
 U mmrlvdssnrus ; 1 was ^oins H- e. I had resolv.jl) to send »ht back «. soon a^ she 
 wo^d consent to it. Cic. Att. 11, 17. So the Ex. with Si-clauses, p. a4.-hee Ex. 1-b. 
 
 Ops o Clauses dependent on quasi-oblique clauses are quasi-sufjoblique according 
 
 to thea\ndo-vof /? 8(i 87. as: Minucius obtinuit ut h-.Ones. ,tcuti comuhbus 7nos 
 
 i!;j/ hUertrdivuie;.M.t; Minucius obtained (a decree of the senate) that they should 
 
 distribute the le-ions amon- each other, as it was customary with i-onsnls. Ln. 22 ^.. 
 
 !Sc lio'^ ss^t^ is nuasi-snboblique, because It depends .m a quasi-suboblique mi- 
 
 ,e. at i N-e) c au.«e, ' vt leqones diriderent ' iobtinuit = eredt ut senatus decerneret).- Pluri- 
 
 I msyVb s tecuiu e-i i\, q»oscunque tihi ejus n.cessarios com7«f//rfar-m. babSres eos in 
 
 I me o ne0rurnelvs.arfor.^ ; 1 have been rather explicit on this subject, m order 
 
 I at vo i I av consider as m v relatives, whomsoever of his relatives I would recommend 
 
 to / C Fat^ 6 13. The clause ' quoscwiqm. . .commenddrem ' is quasi-su .oblique, 
 Ihfce it depeS on the quasi.oblique(i\mx\) clause ' ut haf^res; etc.- Canes aluntiir m 
 Ca itoio It si-nitlceiit si fures venerint ; In the Capitol dojrs are kept to announce / 
 \hU^^l^uld^come. Cic. Bosc. A. 2... 5«! The conditional ^^:^^:^T?:^ '' 
 qua«i-suboblique, being dependent on the final clause 'w< stgmjicent. See Ex. J-U^ 
 
 Obs. 3. Sometimes the governin- final clause of a conditional or of an eqnivalont 
 relative lau-e or of a clause with ant.quam or priusquam. is ellipticallv omitted if it 
 may -"sy be supplied irom the text. Jn this instance t^\^l^'P^'^'^>f/'t claiise is qua - 
 
 suboblique with.'.it any gov..rning clause. ,.^''>"^^''»''"'V. .^ 'V'^"'^' ih s AnV^^^^^ 
 FnHi>h introduced bv 'in theevent that' or 'in the case that.' as: 1 ullus tamen,«t tana 
 J'iV «. / ( MHtio)-, in aciem edflcit exercit urn : Tullus however placed his army lu 
 
 1 Sltle-order in the .vent that what Mtttius proposed should be untrue. Liv. 1, 23. He.e a 
 Xiseof nurnosemust be supplied 'edueit exercitum ut pugnare PO-^^tt ^^. ^'^-^^W 
 oft run? sr v/ r" /0 Z,sop.ne hi : Others ottered t hemsel ves in the.ca^e h at their asnsarice 
 woudbeo- anu Le Liv. 2<i, 9 (Supply ' Ut sendtns ojH>rd sua utatur si quo usus ejussit). 
 1 tM(h-Ti-( es /"'/^ry.mm tanfum rofhris esset UomCwis, quantum futfirnm apj.arebat 
 ocni !a.it beliifm fac^ere ; The Fidenates hastened to begin the -«/ .^/^.J^^^^-^i^^, 
 had so much strength, as it seemed that they would have. Liv. 1, 14 u. e. 'hey iKgm ine 
 w^ir in order to cf^u^l the liomans to fight before they would have, etc.). See Ex. 13. 
 
 Obs 4 For the tenses which any description of indirect predicates must af"me, if 
 thev in a direct form of the clause' would be iu one of the future tenses, see §(»07. 
 
 1 Scinio Corinthiis statuani pollicenlibus eo loco uhi essevt aliOrum imperatOrum, tnr- 
 
 miil'dJxirlSbi displicere. \. Or 2, 05, ^^i?-" ^^ V*:--^^'-- ^^'t' J^^XiS' 
 Inlus esf3 cinod castra i>rop us Romanos jnovv-sef. ( a>s. B. O. <, ^0.- -^. i ffi^ar ooj^acs 
 
 r a. sTVos^'/i arf eisfugiss^nf, j.>po^ctt. lb. ^ ^■-'^■'^^'^^'''^ ^^^u' 
 iZ.)quos infer* controversia esset, ad se Decetiam 'JY;'<j;^f\^\^^I^^'- f/ Vartha^' 
 rix caniii-» no^iuMn eis? qui non paruermt^ conshfvil\ lb t, .1.— b. Carttiaj,ini 
 en<e^ S 1, i" o majorum suoru.n fuisset^^ delude ah Syphace ad se pertiemsset^ , 
 \^m^i^n'^ ' Liv 4 17.- 7. Omnia senStus reficiel^at^^ nisi de me prius consule_s r.^?/- 
 
 S f/>^ Cic Sest 31, 08.- 8 (ialli, nisi perfregerinf^^ nninit.ones, de cmwi ^f'^t^ de- 
 sTJ>^ nt^^i\\o\M.si rem ohtinuerint^\ finem lahonim ()muium ^^^'P<^'1<^'}^11-.^^^^^ 
 BO 7, 8.-i.-- 9. CaduceStor"» eo regius veuit ut indutioi essent dontc toUerentur ad 
 
 • 1 4 nun int^ndtd bu Sci ino : statme turmriles"^i^^ing l>oth ' equestrian statues,' and 
 
 • «taVuer bv so dmns '-2 f easini.- » was accused. The phrase proditjOms insin uia- 
 
 ^ked for t lie re n of wl at «tc- ^Unnnia rejiriehat = declarabat opmia mtiionend^ 
 ^-\l\orv^^^^^^^ they succeeded in forcine th.ir way into the intrench- 
 
 menT^ ^ee T» 07 - '« desahVe desT>frant, considered their lives as lost ; = scxefHiM sibi 
 H^en^m Ut - >^ il they were^«uccessful.- ^^ = sperdi>ant finem adjore laborum. 
 — 1» herald. 
 
408 
 
 USE OF THE iSUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 4u9 
 
 8epr.ltaram> qui in acit"^ cecidUsfnt: Liv. 33, 11.— 10. Bor.i imporaiOrcs in oo loco ( 
 fujj:;iiu hostiuiu fore arlWirautur^ milites coUocaiit, in (j>io-<K fi qui ex a<ie/tir/tr\ 
 de iinpmcVio incidant^. Cic. Rose. A, 52, 151.— 11. ]I(»sttA-» in foio eiinfaiim cousii 
 runt lioc Hiiiinc) w/, n qua ex part e contra offriam renirtfur, acie instrucifl df-fnigiim-tin . 
 Cies. B. G. 7, 'iS.- !:>. C'lUriur casirlla coinniQiiit", quo facilius, si se invVo tratwir« 
 xx^nareiit'tr. prohihCreyw-VcNt/. lb. 1, 8.— 13. Siiuul Tanaquil, bi,spes deistituaf^ , alia pne- 
 gitlia'* molltiir". Liv. 1, 41. 
 
 B. Subjunctive by attu.ution. 
 
 % 601. The predicate of ii clause is frequently placeel in the subjunc- 
 tive because its jivincipal iwedicate is in the same mood., althoui^h neither 
 the clause, nor the principal sentence contains an indirect statement. The 
 predicate of a clause may thus ' agree in mood'' with its goveruini^ predi- 
 cate if there is a close and intimate loi^ical connection between the clause 
 and the governing sentence. Such subjunctives are called 'attracted 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVES ', Or ' SUBJUNCTIVES BY ATTKACTION '. 
 
 Obs. It may be considered af a linijniKtic fact that, whencvor an indicative predicate, 
 in consequcnVn! of the ^rranunatical laws of a lani^ua^e is clian^ed into a ml>jniictive, 
 those who nse tiie lan;.'nai,'e f*-el in the chanirc of the mood a ehan;;c in the manniT of 
 coiiceivinij tlie i)redicate. 'iMiis chan2:e of conception atlects all part.s of tlic sentence, 
 and is thiis transmitted to those dependent predicates which are in a close lofjical con- 
 nection with tlie ^overnini; j)redicate. Hence the attraction (»1 mood is nothing but a 
 «grammatical form by which the lojjical luiity of two predicates, the one of which is de- 
 pendent on tlie other, is represented as an identity of tueiu modal iielations, 
 
 lle.m. 90. The mood of predicates in a clause is generally attracted by 
 
 the std)junclive mood of the governing predicate if the modal conception 
 
 of the priuci/hil predicate may be transferred and extended to the dependent 
 
 predicate. Whether this is the case or not, cannot be determined by a 
 
 general abstract rule (see however Obs. 1 and 2), but often dejX'nds on 
 
 the connection in which a given sentence is placed, and on particular 
 
 intentions of the writer. 
 
 Qiiif" in illfl jr^tjUe pndorem, coiistantiam.<'/i(7m'>t .«//J nihil infersit, non tamcn diliirat? 
 Wliat person would not love modesty and lirmness (if already manifesting^ itself) in 
 Pitch an early ai:e, even if he takes no per.-'onal interest in itf Cic. Fin. 5, 2*2. (»2. Here 
 the modal relation of tiie «ioverninj; subjunctive dilioat is that of a supposition ex- 
 pressed in the form of a neijative (juesti»)n (§ 5!)3). 1'lie clause '• etianiA .-•na. /d/iil in- 
 Jf/vt/" is conceived as belonirini; to the same sni)position (t. f. etiamsi suil niliil in- 
 tersit in iilo tmdore qitem posuii. Hence an attraction of mood is required, and tho 
 use of an indicative, as lon^' as the principal predicate is in the subjunctive, would be 
 faulty; whereas if tlie principal predicate were placed in the indicative, the d'-pend- 
 ent predicate would assume tlie same mood (t'nusquis(iue f///if/i^.etiamsi suil nihil 
 inft-rest ; or /H(i(/et etiamsi sufl non infererit). — Hut : An ei^o in liac urbe esse pfjssini his 
 pulsis qui 7n£ hujus iirhi.-ficoinpotemfecernntf C(»uld I remain in this city after the ex- 
 pulsion of those who made it jws'fiihle for me to stay in this cityf Cic. Sest. 09, 146. 
 Here the clause ^qui me conipoteni fec^i itnf is not subject to the motlal conception 
 of the principal sentence lin which tlie subjunctive bel<»n;:s t«i ihesume class as the one 
 ill the lirst example). Hence an attraction of mood would be improper. Thi- instances, 
 iiowever, in which the attraction or non-attraction of mood is to be accounted for, arc 
 not always as plain as in the examples above. See Obs. 2 and 3. 
 
 But the mood of the dependent ]uedicate is generally 7?/>^ attracted: 
 ]) If the governing sulijunctive belongs to the indepp:ndent subjunc- 
 
 1 Ad sepulluram tollere, to take away for btirial. — ^ iijjttlc.— ^ see R. 88, Obs. 3. — 
 * This relative clause has the force of a clause of purpose. See B. VI. — ^ to make an 
 unexpected attack on those who, etc. — "erected fortified castles. — ' if (in the event) that 
 her hope would be disajipointed. — * expedients. — * to devise. Supply : ut lis uti poisset 
 «i, etc. 
 
 i I 
 
 ( 
 
 lives fsee the example below, No. a), exci^pt in the case of hypothetical 
 pI,?ods(Ex 20 24)! and of interrogative subjunctives (as m the examples 
 
 mentioned above). ^* i,^ «^ 
 
 ^\ If the modal concepticm of the governing predicate cannot be ex- 
 tetuled to the dem-ndent predicate. This is generally the case {a) if the 
 de)endeitclausrccmtttinsa particular action uhich is stated as having 
 iL y W^^ (see Ex. below. No. b) ; {b) if it contains general truiliS 
 whidi h^ even without their connection willi the governing pred- 
 
 icate (see Ex. below, No. c) : T,.;^„rr. 
 
 J [T„H OOVKKMXO rUKDtCXTK BKIKO A^^^^^^^^ ^^^Z 
 
 nat Oram causae videat (orator), qwe "fX/^'^^^'V^f// / .t^ 1 30 placing the predicate 
 
 juiictive by attraction. „.,.^ . , ^-xv/- a^tt-at ■papt'sI — Tantnm exarsit bellnm 
 
 iK.lds good Without any J-Ci^'-i^d .^^ ^he pr c pal prcmc^ ^^^^^ ^^^ 
 
 the principal I>'•^■^!i^'V^^'^''''''V "wV/ rS^^^ But Ma"uUfldo maleficii facit at, 
 
 • allVct the clause, and the >"*'9^ .'^f^J «/f,^,!^^^^^^^ The magnitude of 
 
 ?mi pane man>fe,^tum parjnndvim PrqWa'^^^ Sc«?^y7>^ /i«^/^ ** Proved. Cic. 
 
 the crime makes it incredib e nnle^ 'I'^tlonXoTf^ ^lerlniualify. and since it falls 
 
 1-5. 
 
 real meaumu' «^ ,i.^y cc^, .... v- -- -- ,,. • p i- r- iiero the clause ' si. .ducininr'' 
 
 'i^::;(;!^X^"^'oiT;Z^ ',^4,',!"; kllilng „„dc.r tUis^uie, attra^ou a.mo.t 
 ,K> iuikes laec. Here belong the following in»taucc8 : 
 
 i,HlicM,r requires \u d^-pen-lfnt ^^'iT'^i'^^^ZmJ^todiT^^^^^ efl'"' / «'« *""". » 
 
 !;r:i;;7;,^n:nH.'a,;Sfcier;;r.iVets'.]unc^^^^^^^^ 
 
 its indicative accordim; to II. ^"^'^''!- If^* ^f,?„7;f ' li. Mch beinc introduced by si, qicum, 
 
 (fj) In those predn ales of contingent action ^"|^^' ";'''|: ' ,,:tuer tenses equal to 
 
 vtiLsim>:iac, .^nc.nq.e. r'<fiesr;^^q^^ "hS^ct "if H^e Xr ^ i^ Se'i^rf^t, and 
 
 thoae of their jxovernintr predicate, or a plupciicct " '''*;'^.''''^^_ . „^^ 5 . p 330,: Ita 
 
 mentem ei rentelmt restdM) ^,He began to be .ojie nt,e^ instituendos adolcsceniulo^ 
 
 Simnlac jH>dfa est-habent //l^^-^^"' " «f,^^f "",^^;''«;/ t^Tcas^ii qiven] they may know 
 adapted to the ^"sf"^';'^" "fJ.'^^^^l/Vr o '27 m - FiGbat nt omnium oculos. qvotie^- 
 where to appW for "^lon-'f^/^^^ £ co^?rVrL^^ (It\vas the case that), wherever he made 
 '^;^:::^^'vn^^ «^ ^^^ (independent : qaoi^escunque .n 
 
DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 411 
 
 410 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 nublicnm nrodieraf, omnium ocuios in se converterat). Nop. Ale 3, 5. SometimeB, how- 
 fver <mMwS^^ intnxincrd by a compound oicunque, the moo.! is nut Hltracted^ 
 a'inT'^;. ..0^(1.1 t-.i.mlar to .he last : Captlva ad ScipiOne.n adduc.tur v.r^o adeo 
 exlmS lornuT nil quacunque inccdSOat, converttret oumm.u uculos. Liv. 2b, 50. bco 
 
 ^*r;/"*In Uio-te clan^c^ iiitroducHl by quum or duni which require tenses and moods equal 
 to%<,^V( the^rp^^^^^^^ predicate. iH-cuusc, the two predicates denote inner identity 
 
 of ac i .1 (K «'» OBs. 1, x> m). as : Quo fiCbat ut Athen.enses omnia mnais prospere 
 ?4ti \lcib ac is ciilp:; (Lertnt, qnuiii eum ant ne-li-enler aiit nial.tiOse {i:cx^:^eloque- 
 Sir Tm^ it^c^-^m^ the Athenians affnf>>'fed every ill success to Alcibiades 8 
 
 fa, »i;/i/%4 .•>■/'' Ctnusmuch a^ th.y mid. by myinp) that he had acted «'cul.-eiitly or 
 
 ?/^ S aid lie l)lame to Alcibiades). Nep. Ale. 7. 2. Sometimes 8uch clauses akc tlio 
 Ibrm of a ^o.'ditional .-lause. See Ex. 16."^ The satne is the case in clau.e. introduced 
 by quamdix after tamdi't, or their equivalents (See Jiem. (.1, Uus. o). 
 
 Ons 2 The predicate of clauses which cannot bf .separated from the L'overning predi- 
 cate wiMnrnt dfstroyin.,' or afVeetinj,^ its nleanin,^ mu>t be attracted Jo' »^)„^;T e c 
 .'overnin-r uredicate. Here beh)nj: comparative clauses with qnam. ofqne, ac, etc., 
 Cv ich have^ni nde^ value, but only serve fur qualifyiui, the PnM<M>al chmse or 
 
 sentence, as : Quis^^loriam tam unquam ^^7^^^«^ «''«''',*^7'''^!';;;'';-/;'7/ 
 
 wiU (would) ever cocef renown in the same measure (Ui he f'/ittns disfracef i c 1 art Ui. 
 
 2»; 9 The mea, in.' of the principal sentence ' qnis r,lonam expetat would be who ly 
 
 chan-ed withou he comparative clause, nor could the latter be conceived as an inde- 
 
 m dent sen ttM ce Hence the predicite r>fr,iat could not be in tlie indicative as long as 
 
 e nVi dp S ChanL'in;; the latter into an indicative, 
 
 e m od of//7i(^ must follow (nemo tarn expetit gloriani quam ///.v*^ iixm.mn.ian 
 
 See Ex nS/ B It the predicates of those comparative clauses which either contain 
 
 hftortcal facts (Ex. 21),or are merely ad.led f..r the sake c descnlnng he principal 
 
 iredcare si as to have he nature of a 'parenthesis ^u'eneraly nitn.duce.l »;>' ^'/^"''^^f- 
 
 mX/V .^(v/^/ etc.), are j^enerally mt attracted, but retain their indicative, as : Quid iratua 
 
 1 Xt 'P^e Ueirulusy What -reaier harm could 
 
 a K ^lov^h e ^^^ <li<i to ImLlf?^ Cic. Off 3. 2«--"^h'^'''^';n/r.^L';* 
 
 nim Kic enulTvit nt, aueniad. udnni qnondnni h\ibiani mitite^ Komani apiMati mnt, 
 
 s?riuhicraten4s pucl (inec()s in summa laude.r>^-/-'"V ; Iphicrates drilled the army m 
 
 n nvm er Uiit ^-onri the Jiomau mldirrs were ccUtnl Fa/nan.^, so the Iphicratian. were 
 
 i^Z^W^TSuZ^ Greeks. Nep. Iph. 1.2 4. Clauses with the mere/arm 
 
 a comparative clause (an^6 q»am, vast quam) nn, d(//;/ attracted or not; as De h s 
 
 rebus dsputatum est in llorte'.sii viTlft qiuini vo jx),>^tndie vcni^sCmtis qmmapudCatu- 
 
 im/Sm.'v; There was a discussion on this sub ect in »\f ;'"!;";;,« ^^f 3.;^, '^^"^til^ 
 
 h-id arrived there the day after our visit to CatidiK. Cic. Ae. 2, 3. (See Ex. 2^. ^i.) «ut . 
 
 Hoc iperiimrDicm hicile perculit nt post diem tertium qnam^ .Sinl tarn at tiger at 
 
 Svracas.?s ^^X^^^^ So easily did Dion crush that -..vernment that he entered S>racnso 
 
 ulr^^iUv-o, davs^';-/^/^^ had landed in Sicily. Nep Dion. 5, 3 The same prmc.ple may 
 
 often be applied to dependent clauses of any kind. See t.x. Z\. Zo. 
 
 Obs 3 Hut the criteria j.'iven Obs. 1 and 2, arc not always sufficient to determine the 
 moo^l of the dependent predicate, and in many instances attractions .re found in certain 
 Sences while in ver} similar Sentences the predicates remain unattracted. This par- 
 ticularly refers to causal and relative clauses. „ * 
 
 \) The Di-edicates of causal clauses, although containing general truths, are often at- 
 tr cte( hi' . S on ace. of their close lo-ical connection with their L'overninj; predi- 
 cate- F tZen t^^^ niaxima quasi o.atOri scena ridtatnr contiOnis. natttra ipsS 
 
 ilornatiisdicenm .'enusexcitCMUur; Hut it is certain that we are. by the very nature 
 
 of- iixumstaiices incited to a more elegant style ^.^'[«'--/'^^f 1^ ;'-\,;^ , i^^.^i^,;;;^^^^^ 
 RPfiiis a< it were an eiK.rmous stiige lor tne speaker. Cic. Or. 2, 4.i. AW. in tins txampie 
 UiedieVwa :."^^^^^^ al^>><'^t the character of an indirect statement being 
 
 epi!^ei:S;?Zaca;t^ dwelling in the imagination of ^IV;""';^ ^':^^t^::^'^Z^ 
 •11 ricted although the clause contains a -eneral truth. But s-uch a coin i ption cann c 
 b Vound in 1 rron<,w^^^^^ sentence, the predicate of which remain- nnattn.cted : Acc5( t 
 
 t e f Ui li an i^ IS evtldat ex hoc aere, quod nihil ed animo v^loctu>^ ; To tins must be 
 •uide<l Ihat thVsoul the more easilN^ leaves the atmosphere of the earth, 6€ca^/.e ihert ts 
 rtolhing quicker than the i<ouL Vic.'Vn^c.U v.). EK.'Zh ,. ,. ,v,^^ 
 
 2) Relative clauses are not subject to attraction if the stntetnent contained in therti 
 i^ifin^obiecive character ' (the same as when they are subobllqm^ li. S7. Obs. 1, 2), 
 ^^a en ihev del ote as were, 'ready made ideas,' so that they often have the lorce of a 
 mere^Sl?<tan ive o?a<n^ as : Omnisdicendi ratio tribus rebus est nixa, ut conciUB- 
 
 n us 1 SbifeosT^. a/ Ji««^ The whole plan of speaking is shaped by three pSinls of 
 
 ^1 
 
 M 
 
 I 
 
 / 
 
 
 m, 
 
 view, to cmciliate our audience, etc. Cic. Or. 2, ^, 115 - Epistolae proprmm e^ixx^isad 
 Que?n Kcribitur de eis rebus quasiqndrat certior Jiat ; It belongs to the nature of a le ter 
 thai the rtciirer is informed oi w/iat he d-ies not know. lb. Qu. Fr. 1, 1.— lien Pote>t ut 
 id quod sentit pollie eh qui i.on pos-it ; li is possible that he cannot express his tItoughU 
 smoothlv 11). Tusc. 1, a «5. Ex. 27. 28.- But sometim^-s the predicates of such clauses 
 are attracted by the governing predicate : Multos vidC-mus qui quod relint sine cujus- 
 ouam sim.litudine coiisequantur ; We see many who gain their ends without imitatmg 
 J V me lb. Or. 2, -'3, 98. See Ex. 25. 32. If the relative clause refers to lacts vvhich 
 ncfuallv have transpired, the predicate always retnins its own mood, as : Di prohibeant 
 ur hoc ouod inaiOres consilium publicum vociTri ro^werMn^, pnesidium sectOrum existi- 
 niGtnr- Heaven forbid that the body «/«ic/i our ancestors 07 (/<?(=(/ to be called 'Coun- 
 cil of the Peoide' should be considered the instrument (support) of the land-sharks. 
 Cic. Rose. A. 52, 151.— Ita mihi erant cari ut eOrum aspectu omnis qucv me angibat cura 
 
 t • They were so dear to me that, at their si<:ht. all the care that afflicted nie 
 
 ) Brut 3 10 Ex 29-31. Thus If a present uredicate denotes a />a«< action, as : 
 
 '■ :. '.. 'j . . I .i:.,i^ «^...,>/^.i..r.i oM«n«ri.i • Tt msiv hv tliflt vou iiever heard 
 
 consederit 
 
 ceased. lb. I'irui. o, lu. rL,.\.. >iii--ii. ^ im.^ n t. j/iv.. ^ ..„ ^,..,»-.--^ — -- — r^. ■* ' v.' a 
 Potest fieri ut quod teaudisse dicif, numquam audieris ; It may be that you never heard 
 the words which you say you have heard. Cic. Or. 2, 70, 85. U however the relative 
 clause has the force of liWnlingent action, (according to Obs. ^^,^V «^ if it refers to an 
 eventualifu (as in Ex. 9, and 33), the predicate is attracted even if it beloi gs to the past, 
 as • Quo factum e>t ut Atheiiieiises Attico omnIs honOies quosj^ssent pub ice habCrent, 
 Thus^it happened that the Athenians publicly showed t(. Auiciis all tlie honor tli^y 
 could. (iNUKi'ENDENTLY : Quoscunque pjtcran/ hondrcs ha(jebant.)Ne\^ Au. 4, l. 
 
 3 1 1 most instances whet^, according to Obs. 1 and 2, an attraction of mood should be 
 expected, occasionally the mood remains in the indicative, as : Non utar ista consuetu- 
 diue *i quid ^st factum clem^nter, ut dissolflte factum criminer ; si quid vindicatum est 
 severe, ut ex co crudelitatis invidiam coUigam. Cic. \ err. 2, 5, 8. 
 
 1 A"esilJlus (in trajiciendo Hellespont o) tantilceleritilte uf=us e-^t-aX, qvoditet' Xerxes 
 anno fertente^ confecerat. hie transient trigii'ta (iiebus. Nep. Ag. 4, 4.- 2 IIuic uni 
 contigit nt patriain in qua erat natus, oppressam a tyrannis, hherflret. I^^- Tim"l- J. L- 
 3 Ita liebat ut quos tn n-ipublicm causa heseras-, palam te oppugnflrent3 Cic lam. 1, 
 7 1 _ 4 NenMuem conveni quin omnet-, quum te sumtnis laudit/us ad cnhati extuierunt*, 
 mihi continuo maximas gratiasagant. lb. 9. 14, 1.-5. Quid potuit aliud si L.Brutua 
 ^^t^uiciritatem dornvTatu regio libelant / ID. Plane. 25. 60.- «-.Nemo est quin banc 
 affectionem^ aiiimi piobef qua non modo utUifas'' nulla quatr-tfur^ ?cd. contra utilita- 
 ?e n« etiam consena'ur fides'». lb. Fin .5, 22, 03.- 7. Ejusmod.n prolusions df^fe.se, 
 Ut iDsis senteniiis'3 quibusproluserint^\ pugnSrei^ possmt oratOrcs. lb. Or. 2, SO, 325. 
 -8 Quodsi luce qtioque canes latrent, quum deos salutatum^^ aliqm rentnni, ax^ 
 crura siflrin<ranttir. lb. Rose. A. 20, 56.- 9. Mos est SyracQsis ut, siqua deread senci- 
 ?/rr.rm7 L^n^ icat sententiam qui relit^'^. lb. Verr. 2, 4. 64.- 10 Hoc malehcium ita 
 rifo exsiiiit Mi si quando au<ntum sit. portenti ac prodigu simile»» videatur. lb. Rose. 
 A IS ;« — 11 Nemo erat qui animum jinlicis quocunque v-s posiularet-'> po^i>et un- 
 nellere^i' lb Brut 9:i, 322.-12. Nullum helium civile fuit in nostra repiiblicil in quo non, 
 S/'/X/9««/>a/%vrici.4^",tanienaliq f.n-ma esset futtlra=3 reipublicic. lb ad Brut, 
 l^t 10-13 Si dm'datqueorluseLr-*, se quisque cognosceret continuo-^ vidSret 
 miid esset siiminum bonum. lb. Fin 5. 15, 41.- 14. Equidem so eo agere adversarii 
 ?-iiisain2« ut discipiilus agat snam, et guidquid de sua ve^'' cogitant in medium profe- 
 r 2« lb Or 2 24 102.-1.5. Accedebat ut,9'rH//t sa^rlre ventusccfmssent, et ^e vento 
 dedi'Jni'^ (nxxs'i^^l et tempestStemSo ferreiit facilius. et in vudi^^i consi.^erentsa tu- 
 ti'ls c!cs. B G. 3, 13.- 16. Ego non c ommittam33 ut, si defugenm^\ causam aliquam 
 
 1 - Dnm annus vertit, in the course of a year.- a to hurt.- a to attack.- * raised 
 to the skv -^ that emotion.- « to approve.- ' worldly advantage.- ^ is aimed at - 
 . J m '/^/i/<7/.;«. with a disadvantage; at the sacrifice of ^^'^'-'dly af jfntage^ .-J ^ 
 d.itv i- di-char.'cd.— 11 belongs to es^-^e ; must be so composed.— i^ intioduction. — 
 ?" h<>i<dus-M"which ihev ha^ve used in the intioducti«m.- i.Mlgit the adversary - 
 1« t"der to pay their re-pects to the gods.- »' if any question is discussed in the 
 S<."?._iV3,^;/,,„^,,,/iaii qui velit, any.me may volunteer his opinion ; in Rome 
 nnbodv bein- allowed t<. speakf except when invited by the chair (^ententiaTn rogare).- 
 l^, XI r^a simile, like an event out of the le-ulnr course of nature.- «o in whatever 
 din^^io^ the case Voiild require.- ^i turn the mind of the judge. Fosset and in the next 
 ^inte ce 'Ze futrlra ' are particular subjunctives peculiar to relative clau^es.-^^ 7mi.M 
 Imvc defeated tie other, the pluperfect having the force of a future-perfect.- " 7/;a« to 
 b^i ; -in the coniemplation of' the party-leaders.- ^.^ orJri to be born^- " ^ rectly - 
 ^^'cansam agere. to perform the part.- " case.- -^ in medium prqferre, to ^nng for- 
 ward-"» had c..mmitted themselves.- 3o storm.- 3' in low water.- '' to M«y;,- 
 "no« com? itfamvt r/^w. a circumlocution of the simple negative future (I uill not 
 give'luid^^^^^^^ thing as to give).- 3* = defui/iendo, by a withdrawal ou my part. 
 
1 n 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 413 
 
 tibi rocupandi' dcm. Cic. Or. 2. 57, 23.3.- H. Quid habot popninrc «7!ip,|"'V;i""™ 
 3, " 
 
 19._ IS. Maccdoiu's k'vihus be 
 
 r, 23.3.— 17. <iaicl nanor popmare or;un 
 
 puinpscris ac pop'i/o lioinano r/Jtvf/io'.f 
 
 His, qiiic fXcrcC'ivr.f-' mai:i>» qn^iivx fath 
 
 qdreiiP, ^^ub 
 
 aWuina miiuiil' fnerant. Liv.42, 5.- iiC Qnumyidtam "avc-m curM.nu.Mu-utjM,,^uurn, 
 nun tfmposi?.te i)n;jncm potius» q^iam Uli 
 
 94 - 20 Jec i-tm ipse me potius in i,rufuu<lum' nt cetercx eons rv-lrem quam ulos ad 
 
 beham iiovi (luod /w-s^ nccidisset qnnm dnhsem ad to Philoyciu littria-. (_ c. •^';; • ^; 
 
 -2: Quid babel irs b.ei- (iu boc .loeOrun, ^-^-'rV '>• ^I'l'^'lf;'' f'' .'"'^.^^ST-^^^^ 
 pmis^Min bTrere»3d'-beat quam cogititn iiottn,^.<<' vidt(i!>fr ." Ib.Oi. ^.5.». ^4*.— .;». urns 
 eu nie n! mn la veret (/ ^. si in torn d.c-reui) r-V'/v onuKMU tetfllen, in populi Ko- 
 3 b^ irionslimpfam.Um^.../- Mb. I^ 
 
 ad d.cenduui veuii'^ banc atl\rt^; lacnlu-lieu, ut, ^^'«''J;;''^ ''IJ ^'^' '? /^^ 
 omr dicantxr^^ similia ecriptOimu»» ess^e vuleanmr. lb. Or. 1. .33.— «»). t.i no luuni r 
 ^^ qmnlc^nib^rcallo locuvum"-^ dij>n,cn .,n,v.., jht litjeras teeuu, coiioquan lb. 
 fIuh VTl -27 Kloquendi vi.-)--= elHrit nt .-a qua- iqnoxmufs dis.eie et e.-. 9;/tB fCl- 
 i<am. I, I, I. -««. '-^^'";l '■",, XT n •) V> lis — •>s \<ia lain <)pTma-3 est el fertibs 
 muK abos docere i)ossIuuis. Ji>. IN. i*. .*. •>•', ^*^- -^- -^- i<« '<»"•' i '."* ♦ . „ n ,04 lu 
 nr mu iiudine eaum Jcnun q>ne exporfantur U\c\\i^ omnibus terns antec.ll..t-*. lb. 
 L .. M i.- 2 K Adeo a c'consiv^' sunt spe.. nt etiaut q.i obsideh,,nlur Sy;;'ia-^'%r'VS 
 Misnileriut^« Liv 24, 3.-..- oO. Si reviviscant Plaluuis audnores fyv? yKt;•;//'^^^ qmd 
 rSoomiS- ^' Cic" Fin 4, 22, «il.- 31. Quibus rebus tiebat ut Mibiades nou minus eOrum 
 vol «IT e imperium o^^^ qxi (cuu.) vma-an(^\ q.uiui lUoruni onn Q'ifus /rat 
 
 «w/S^^^^ Milt. 2,3.-32. Quum bal.eas id quod ;/u////.;t.s. noli drsulerflre id 
 
 Se^^a iwi nU^ne. vive,dssenU cloquenliJ persuadCre potuisseut Mb. Inv. 1, 2, 3. 
 
 Bern 91 Predicates dependent on non-oblique infinitive clauses or on 
 sulnect-infinitives, are sometinies placed in llie sid.junctive, «« ?/ 6.y 
 attmctum, provided they stand in such a relation to llie govern in^sx in tini- 
 tivc clause or subject-intinittve that their mood icouhl be attracted hi/ i/^em 
 if these intinitives were subjunctives. Such subjunctives may be termed 
 subjunctives by qu.\si-attiiaction. 
 
 Or^ 1 Or A^i-ATTKACTioN cbiedv occurp if tbc p:ovcrninj: infinitive clause takes the 
 pl?cv o 'an (im HM™1) ...6>r^ v^^ an impersonal ,.redieate, ^-ucb '^^ ^{''^^.^'^^ ;f,^.f^^ 
 lTd>mrW^ e< vw.^ esK or i.redicaies coutandn- in.pcrsonal pred.cate-enitives § 4 W. 2) 
 ?8 • Ditn • le est in pbilos<.pbia pauca esse el n..ta. cui non ,i>U aut plenique ant omnui; 
 It is drffl'ult that n philosophy a few tbin-s should be kn..wn i,y h-m who rfo..^ o^ 
 k)ww e ther most, or alL Cic. Tu4. 2, 1.- Necesse est ejus etiam p rtTs propter se expe 1 
 
 10 m iver-^m pr..ptersef:r/>.Vrt^/r .' It is necessary that tlie parts ot a thinir sliould be 
 de? Ton [be r owi accouut'if the whole (literally ^ ivhir.h as a w , of e/) is desired f..r Us 
 own sake Cic Fin .'', i7. 40.- Mand-lrc qnemquam liti-ris co-itatiOnes suas qu eaa 
 mc dfX'.cTC nee i^lb ;trkre po^sif, hominis est intemperanter abut.nt.s et olio et litte- 
 ?isffl a porson should corn-nit his ib<..i<,'hrs to writin- who ain neither arran^^e nor 
 rxnl'ii them is the mark of a man unduly wastin^' his tune and paper Cic. 1 usc. 1, 
 explain the t ^^^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^ constructions are repugnant to he English 
 
 idiom, and oii-ht to be recast, which may easily be done with the above sentences, bee 
 Ex. 1.'2. ^ 
 
 a 
 
 1 Of excu«in- yourself.- '•' tchich rathfr kept them in practice. The Mibjunctive exer- 
 arevt is pec iai- to relative clauses.- ■■> to weaken, to impair the streUL^th.- * under 
 con/ nou'^ military r.mtine.- ^ referring toc.r.sU..-« f.dlow the course, and Hccomno- 
 rlati to it — 7 into tl.c sea.- « as.— » to depart.— >° what place (chance) is the.e lift 
 for art '-n in that class of jests.- i^A/ce/i dkfnn, witty word - ^^ eviUswn ha^rtr^ 
 (Zeaf litera ly 'must stick .-.fter beinjV sent ibrth '. t. .. 'must have hit .- " lu his 
 Sins' t le Inpothetical idea of the principal predicate 'favtrH^ is very cbarly continued, 
 a, d he hvpothetical cluis.; (si in fmo d,cerem) may be aj.pbed to it in the same way, as 
 with }arrr&.- ^» proceeds to speakin-.- »• brinir-* with him— \' extempore, wit -out 
 J o es _ »« = bis words.- >•» like written ones.- 20 a circumlocution, instead ot •/i^>^/- 
 Urcolloquor^^-^^ inten^aUo loconnn. by space.- ^^eloquence.- "rich.- ^4 to excel. 
 _ 26 vve?e intbmied reviv.d.- '^* kept up their spirits.- 27 ^ the bearers .f Plato.- 
 2« ei wimi^erant -his principals, the owners of the expedition.- =• r- his companions 
 thrnu'm rs f the expedition.- 30 This suhjunctive is evidently cl.oscn to correspond 
 to the parallel clause '7 w<i malueiis\ But it is also meant for a subjuuctive ol 
 iruarded biateinenl. — ^^ bow. 
 
 Jw 
 
 K 
 
 4 
 
 Obs 2 Subject-infinitives have the power of efTecting a quasi-attraction, because they 
 are always equivalent to infinitive clauses with indefiidle persons understood a'^ tlieir los;i- 
 cal siibiects (^ 4'>4) a- : Satis est id quod IradaUir posse meraoria cusrodire ; It is enougU 
 'to "be able 10 keep" what in tawjht iu one's memory. Cic. Or. 1, 2% 127 (\. e. aliquem . . . . 
 custodlre • Tliat a person should be able to keep, etc.). See Ex. 3-5. 
 
 Obs 3 The cause of quasi attraction is the modal similarity in the conception of sub- 
 junctives and predicate-intinitives. Hence some lanirua<xes often employ tubjuuctives 
 when the Latin language makes use of a predicate-inliniiive. 
 
 Obs 4 Since clauses with predicates in the subjunctive of the second person with 
 the mi-aniu" of an indeflniie subject {\i. 79, Obs. 3), may always be placed in tliosub- 
 iunctive siPcb eubjunclives, wherever thev occurin clauses, do notbeloni: to any class of 
 dtpouhnt subjunctives, but must be considered as potential, as: Memona minnitur mst 
 earn exercea^; Memory is weakened unless you exercise it. Cic. Sen. 7 (Compare, how- 
 ever p 712 D) —Frequently they occur in clauses which require the subjunctive Irom 
 other reasons, and in such inst.nces these subjunclives have a two-fold force and nuau- 
 in«' a-- Tum ilia ita scite inaureis poculis illi-jlbat ut ea ad illam rem nata esse rftcercs ; 
 \t"tbat time be inserted «bese things so skiHuilv iu «rolden iroblets, that one vnr/ht have 
 'thouqht thev we.e made for the puri)08e. lb. Verr. 2. 4, 24. Thus such subjunctives occur 
 whei-e any predicate woidd have been in the subjunctive by attraction or qiiasi-attraction : 
 Neaue est boni neque libenllis parentis, qtiem procreCnis et eduxeris^ eum non et vestire 
 et ornare: Nor is it the mark of a g..od and liberal parent, to'eave him whom /^e has 
 henotttJi and hrouqht op, without clothing and support. Cic. Or. 2, 28, 124. In the last 
 example the indefinite per-on to whom the subjunctive of the second person refers, 1« 
 a noun where in Entrlish the third per-on must he used. But in Latin the second va-v- 
 eon may be used even in sucii connections, if the s"hjunciive is dependent on a subject- 
 ii.linitive since with a subject-infinitive the indefinite subject-accusative aliquem must 
 alwaysh;. supplied (§4".M). which maybe replaced by'ie'in the meaning of «/t^wm. 
 (ThAl you , should not clothe him whom yawAare begotten, is the mark of a bau parent.) - 
 See Ex. 6-13. 
 
 1 Mo« est \thf nis, laudari' in contiOne eos qui sint in prceliis interfecfi. Cic. Or, 44. 
 — •> Cui proito4ta sit^ conscrvaiio sui, necesse est huic partis qnoque sui caras esse. 
 lb~Fiii r/ 13 37 — 3. Si est oraloiis, q>urcunque resinfinde jws'ta sit^, de ea posse di- 
 cere, d'icendJim erit ei. quanta sit soils ina-_MiitQdo etc lb. Or 2, 15 - 4. n-eniOsi* 
 vidCfir vimS verlii in aliud atqve ceterinccipiant*' |)osse ducere. lb. 2, ()2. 254 — 5. i.st 
 boniconsulis qunrn cuncta auxilia'' reip'/fj/icce /ab'farfan'* videaf. ierre opem j)airioe. 
 II) Kib 1 3— () Si in homines caros judicibusque" jncundos acerbiuset c(mtunielio- 
 iin-'» imWire^^\ nonne abs te jii.liees afja'ienes p-^ lb. Or. 2, 7.5. 304.-7. Non enim 
 Picut ar-umenium simnlatquei^ ))Ositum est arripituri*. ila niisericordiiim|6 gimu.- 
 atoue ii^futcris^^ posHs cummovCre. Hi. 2. 53.214.- 8. Si. quum pro alteroi^ d^m>^ cau- 
 Um relinqvas^'', \uh\UiC vocHisf lb. 2. 7.5.- 9. Est»» sive artis sive consnetiidinis2«, 
 nosse re-iones inter quas r€«f;/.-'i, ut^^ jyervefiges^^cino^. qiueras-* Ih. 2 34- 
 10 Deli.'ere oportet qucni relis dilieere. Auct. Her. 4, 20.- 11. I rb5na dissimulations 
 cVt nuum alia dicnntiir^* ac sentias. Cic. Or. 2, 67, m).-V2. Si ita nimreMlas'^\ afteren- 
 dum"« est quod sif^» aut giavins^'o aut u-que grave. Il>. 2, 53, 21.5.- 13. Ita^» dissimiles 
 orant inter sese, statuere ut tamen non posses, utrlus te malles esse gmiihOrem. lb. 
 
 Brut. 40, 148^ ___^ -^r^ 
 
 ""rin^FTMMi we use a subject-infinitive instead of the Latin inliniiive claiise. \\ e 
 
 may consider here the • Mos: as personified, laying down a rule according to which, etc. 
 
 Tin- I e subjunctive by quasi attraction passes over into a subjunclive of indirect 
 
 ?t eine t.l!- ■Avhoever is Anxious of preservinir his perso.i (his 'Ego').- ^ indiscnmi- 
 
 nately on every subject that may be given.- ^ the mark of genius.- « vim veiU dvcere 
 
 ^liquid to ai)]»ly a word to a meaning.- « aliud atque ceten acctjnant different from 
 
 e a. ceptatbm by others.- t all the res'burces.-^ to be weakened, paralyzed.-» jyrfict- 
 
 bus is an oldect ot both co?os and jucv n dos. -''> raXhcr abusively.-" to inveigh - 
 
 la alienate (the -ood will).— i3 at the same moment as it is introduced.— J^to catch, 
 
 to understand, to appreciate.-is misericord iam. co/nmorere, to awaken sympathy, or pity 
 
 vi he accused) u the au<lience.- 1« at the same moment 'you have touched the 
 
 siVi -' Utcrallv 'you have introduced it').- '^ another.- »« rel.nquish, drop the case 
 
 1 1" it s amatteI-.-2o experience, practice.- 21 = veneris.- 2i wuh the purpose of 
 
 r,b-oendent on vvi^re), or -so as to' (dependent on Jiosse).- '^^lierrestiqare, eitlier to 
 
 beiuccV^fu in up': or'to t.aceuj.in all diiections'. the prefix ;^r having 
 
 e thet- nieanin- - '-^* what von are searchimr lor.- " it is a species of elegant irony.- 
 
 " «lip ly : ««-^ t^-- " >v'»l^ the force of a potential future = si quis ita mm refellet 
 
 (reflJlvLr adrer,<a7y).- 2« to brin- Ibnvard. to ofier.- 2» subjunctive of quality (B. \ L), 
 
 a dependent f.iture may be substituted.- 3» a reason of greater or equal weight.-- 
 
 »» They were dissimilar, 6?^^ so, etc. 
 
414 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DErENDENT SUBJUNCTIYE. 
 
 415 
 
 & 
 
 Tenses of the dependent subjunctive. 
 
 § 603. 'E\Q\'Y independent subjunctive is placed in n particular te?i8e, 
 since those rules (^ 592-594) wliich rcgu.late the use of the difiereut classes 
 of independent subjunctives, determine in each instance their tenses. But 
 the tenses of all dependent subjunctives (whether they belong to the 
 general or particular subjunctives, § 595), are determined by general rules 
 referring to all of them. These rules comprise two diffeuent systems: 
 1) the law of consecution {consecutio tempornm), which determines the 
 tense of a dependent subjunctive by the tense of its governing predicate ; 
 or 2) the logical method, which determines the tense of a dependent 
 subjunctive by those rules which hold good for the tenses ew the indicative 
 mood. The tenses used according to the former sy'stem are called * tenses 
 BY consecution'; tliosc determined by the latter are 'logical tenses'. 
 The former are the rule ; the latter the exception. 
 
 Eiro incis rebns jjestis hoc S7im ai^/teculns ut hoiium nomen CTUtiwer ; I have «»ained 
 this iioiiil by my acts ihat / am considered a jrood name. Cic. Fam. 5. (5. Here tho 
 present teii<e of the subjunctive e.rUtinier is a logical tevsk, bocau-e the predicate 
 is conceived as t)el(»nijinijj to the author's time, and is placed in the present witiioui any 
 reijrard to the tetise of the irovernini; precJicate ''sum a-ss(critiis\ — Ita rixi ut opiniOne 
 vestnl facile contentus e>.v?6//i ,* / hare so iirtd that lam perfectly sati^fied (that J can 
 afford to be satistied) with your opinion (of me>. Liv. 28, 44. The imperfect tense of 
 the subjunctiv<' «A*;i?/n is a tkvsk by coNSKcrTfov, because, althouirh it is conceived to 
 l)elon*? to tlie time of the speaker, it is nevertheless placed iu the imperfect by the in- 
 flueuce of the j^overuing perfect vixL 
 
 1. Law of Consecution. 
 
 % 603. 1. Predicates in 7ion-preterite tenses {i. e. in the present, impera- 
 tive, and the two futures) require their dependent subjunciives to be in 
 the niESENT or teiifect, the present being used if the dependent sub- 
 junctive denotes an action coincident in time with that of the governing 
 predicate, or later than it ; the perfect being used if the dependent sub- 
 junctive denotes an action preceding that of the governing predicate. 
 This method is called 'tkesent consecution', and hence the present and 
 perfect are 'the tenses of present consecution'. 2. Predicates in 
 preterite tenses {i. e. perfect, imperfect, and pluperfect) require the sub- 
 junctives of their dependent predicates to be in the impekfect or plu- 
 perfect, the imperfect and pluperfect being used with the same distinc- 
 tion as the in-esent and perfect in the * present consecution'. This method 
 is called 'piieteuite consecution', and hence the imperfect and pluper- 
 fect are called * TExsf:s of pueterite consecution*. 
 
 Obskkvation. The rule about the distinction between the two tcnfcp of the pubjunc- 
 tive, used in eacl» of ttie two clashes of consecution, must be qualified in re^rard to irov- 
 erniuiT predicates in tlic future and in the pluperfect. 1. If the principal predicate is in 
 the luture, tin- dependent subjunctive denotini; an action anterior to it, is not always in 
 the i)erfecr. This tense is used only if the action is at the same time anter:<;r to the 
 »i)eaker''s lime (Ex. C. a, 1), or if it lias the force of a eubjuuctive of the future perfect; 
 
 \ 
 
 ol=e tbe»r.^f»/«ubiunctivemust be used (Ex. C. flr,2). 2. ritipcrfect snbiunctives de- 
 o^e tl.epr^'f/u su ju u^^ irenerally ref.-r to a Wma pHor to the latter; but m 
 
 pendei.iouai^^.ve I MjM^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^i,,,^ 4.35 3). 
 
 111 perltct »-"I'-IV''',\' ,,,,.,:. '_r,.„» /„ 450 g) always refer to a time subsequent to the 
 subiunc.ive ''•'''';' '^/I!^^^^^^^ be considered as anteri<.r to or coincident 
 
 •'"!• ''"!•/; I'l ;. .M.vcrn , <' ?ed ca^^ "«^ »>« determined t)y the English use 
 
 o" 'tensJ but bv the ImHu xfay of thinkin,^ Both ways are sometimes diUerent (see R. 
 42 • n. 43 ; n. 00, Obs. 4, and Ex. under A, a, 2.) 
 
 K'^rjirsiru3':fpi;ii«. .;M.;L^T;.xVtp,"Lsu.« ^.^,.^,ol^,».m^^ux u.m that »> 
 
 which the Latin subjunctives are placed. 
 
 A. Pbesent as ^roverninii: predicate. «ovi^^x-ivr predicate 1 1 Scis 
 
 (a,THEI)KrKNUKNTStB.t-^NCTI^^^^ 
 
 :^SJ:H^/ ?i:^^ri;n?} X.^T. neVj^nore^^-mi.^^han ^^^^^ ihav. 
 
 blushed,. Se,u Ep. 11.- (6, ^^^ll^^^'^^li;"!^^^^^^^^ tT"leave tta y wh fe H^UaU^^^ 
 
 mum jnweres : I exhort you to ha.<t^n to Home. Cic. Qu.tr. 1,.3, 4. 
 
 B. iMPEKATivE as fjoverninjr predicate f^nr^r^rt r\f Vam 1 9 15 — 
 
 eible. Cic. Fam. 4, 10. 
 
 2'.». 1. 
 i). Fi'TURE-rEUFECT a? ?overnin<x predicate. ^ 
 
 (. PK.o.O Si causam qua- me i^i^^n^^'^^,:^^^^:^ 
 
 which has ,ndurrd me. V"^' V -^ Pn iiSn.^ • If tluMiop^^^ G'^iCii>f^ pass a resolution 
 aliquo cive Romano ut sit is civ.> C»aditanu> , 11 nic l;*-**!''^"' 1^ , (La^^ (jic Balb. 
 in /e^^rd to a Roman citizen, that the same ^^te^ ) S?quc'n cui rSe V^^^^ 
 11. 27 (:= if thev pronounce him to be, etc.).— (0, I^at'eh ) ^l quii i c i 
 ilrnui^ ; U I'jind a person whom I may salely entrust (with the letter). Cic. tarn. 1, 
 
 Roman i)eople. Ln . 2s. -y;- y';^'*'^Vi,rthn; le« cn's^ed or^r to Africa at a time when 
 vreretur. traosgre^susm Alncaniro, • AgiUhocl( sj'K>^.>fa t;te^ ' ,-. „„o(j p^jhi 
 
 war had bem ra'iioq in Sicily for a long time. Liv. ^f;J^--.~-ri^}*l{^^^ "tic. Fam. 
 
 ,V?;.;l „r thS^ -I am ."live .i.;. ha. J, -;,t;"'/' oS*orS'=A«*'* '^« i- 
 2 ()r'ndorx civitati ?><'r^^'/(^^'^/lU de hnibu^ suis 60-17 eA«, v^i„v.. ^ o — 3 Re<nili, 
 
 habitTn.ts /o/.«r..that they should leave) \he\r |^;mtvy. Cx>^^ 
 
 priusquam tota cironnrenir.tar acies. inter tu"" 1 " " fl^^ 'Unrounded. Liv. 28, 33.- 
 
 imidst the disorder b.-lore the whole "^niy / «/i ^^ /' «^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 condemned. lb. 28. 34. 
 
 ^ent. prius ctiam quam nostrum syixiluim ;><^)!i.W . ^;^^*i^,f{.,^"'^before theu had ap- 
 
 •il 
 
 
416 
 
 % 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 ageretur ; The unlucky hoy felt already what 2va$ the matter. Clc. Qu. Fr. 1. 3, 3.— 
 2. Piiucis diCbus erani in'utsurus (episiorary tense) doniesticos labellarios, uttotlus aes- 
 tatis res jjjestas ad ^euiitiuu per^crlbtrein ; 1 am to send in a lew days (a letter by) my 
 private carriers, that / r/iay comprise in the letter to the Senate the events of the whole 
 summer. Cie, Fajn. 2, 7, 3.— (r, Lateu.) Exi»loidhant Gulli nnde belli initiuin ./f*;ci / 
 The Gauls wtre making liiquiiies where the war was to commence. Cajs. B. G. 5, 53. 
 
 G. 1'lupbrfect as yfovernini; predicate. 
 
 (a, Puion.) Uu:e pwi^osita J'aerant nobis qnnm honoribus 9iW\\i\\-?-^\x\-\\'i perfun.cti «.*«?- 
 r^i^/*, ea jam sublilta tota sunt ; What had Ineii our alms alter ice had /jetn lu the hi<;h- 
 est ollices, all that is now wholly demolished. — 0, Coin'cident.) (^uum inamlnddrem 
 in xysto, M. ad nie Urutiis ventral; M. Brutus A at/ come to me when I was loalk- 
 ing on the portico, lb. Brut. 3, 10.— (f. i..\TKK.) 1. Hannibal scalas quibus scan- 
 deret muros non aftulerat ; Hannibal had not carried wiili him any hidders by which 
 to scale the wall. Li v. 2:^, 7.-2. Priiis rtcursum semper ad wwl^'erat quam clamor 
 airrestis corto/e^ ; T\my had aUs'ixy* returned to their ships before the alarm /wti Inien 
 given to the country-people. lb. 29, 28. 
 
 li;^* For tlie use of tin; ' pres(!nt consociilion ' with predicates depend* 
 ent «M I'i-^torical presents, see li 45, Obs. 'S. 
 
 % t#(^ I. If subjunctives are next-dependent on a predicate which is attain 
 
 dependent on another predicate, they follow that kind of consecution 
 
 Avhich is required by the tense of the next (intermediate) predicate on 
 
 whicji they depend, not that consecution which may be required by the 
 
 FURTHER (remote) predicate by whicli the intermediate predicate is 
 
 governed. This rule is peremptory if the intermediate predicate be finite 
 
 (for particular exceptions see § 000, Obs. 4), as : 
 
 Nihil ultra malOrum est quam quod jmssi swnus ut, ad ultimura, fidom voh'iji priTstarJ!' 
 mus ; No evils are worse than lintse which we have suffered to keep owr alleiriance to 
 you to the very last. I.iv. 2S, .31>. The consecution nl' pnesfaremus i- ruETEKiT. beinj^ 
 cletermined by the intermediate Unite predicate pa>si sumus, not by the further predi- 
 cate est. 
 
 But if the intermediate predicate is non-finite (P. I., p. 227), the con- 
 secution of the dependent subjunctive is determined by the (logicall}') 
 nearest ^/i/A? predicate on which the non-finite predicate depends, except 
 if in the intermediate non-tinite predicate a preterit tense is implied. 
 (llt'in. 92 and 9;].) 
 
 Explanation. Gramjnaticalbj every predicate is.^//i/^ by nece«Pity (§ 19) ; but logi- 
 callij all those words are considered as predicates which have viriually the functions 
 of finite verbs, and may be represented by such. Here bclonj; all ])redicafe-inlinitives, 
 all accessory predicates, a?! predicate-ablatives, participles, supines, adjectives (§ 4'JU>, 
 and verbal nouns. 
 
 Hem. 92. If subjunctives are next-dependent on object-infinitives, par- 
 ticiples (either direct ixirticii)les or ablatives absolute), supines, ^erund- 
 ial i)hrases, or genuuls absolute, their consecution is not determined 
 by these ' intermediate ' ])redicates, but by the finite predicate on which 
 those intermediates depend. The same is the case if they depend on 
 nouns, adjectives, or su()ject-infinitives. 
 
 Ctesar qu:e esset \ nsuUe ma^rn i t ildo reper'ire non poierat ; Cie?ar coyihl not find out what 
 was- the size of the island. C;es. B. G. 4, 20. The imperfect of esset is a tense of ;>/W«- 
 nA' consecution, not according,' to the intermediaie present objcct-inlinltive reptr'tr*", on 
 which it next depends, but according: to the finite predicate yw/r /•(!/.— Scciiri percitssi 
 sunt, adeo torpentibus metu qui aderant ut ne j;eniitus quidem exaudirtlur ; They 
 were beheaded, those that witnessed the execution being so para! i/zed with terror that 
 not even a ^roan was heard. Liv. 28. 29. The consjecution of exaudiretvr is not deter- 
 mined by tlie next participial ])re(licate, but by percussi sunt, the Unite predicate on 
 which torjtentibus de[ii:nds. See Ex. 1-5. 
 
 I 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 417 
 
 Btit if the participle is a perfect, the consecution of the subjunctive 
 d('i)eiulent on it is not determined bv the ^overnins: finite predicate, but 
 the subjunctive takes the same tense which it would have it the pertect 
 participle were a finite perfect (see Obs. 1). 
 
 Obs 1 Hence subjunctives dependent on perfect participle? have <renerally;)r^^m7<J 
 C()u^ciiti(ii as • Mi tuniur ad Cesarem ab Ccerone litterte xnagm^ p?0]x>niispvmim^ 
 ^%,fu^s^ni^Uo pertuUnnt) ; tellers are (were) sent by Cicero to Cu.^ar a tei-^peat 
 rvLvd>^ 2vere promised a«. the messen^-ers) in the event ^hat^/^^y "W^^ '^'/^/y ^^^^^^^ 
 ttum. CiEs. B. G. 5, 40. Here the consecution of pertulissent (which has the loice ol a 
 ■nure-perfect) is not determined by the governing «"•'« P^<;4'c^\« /'" '^^''^, «'l' ..^ .«^J 
 u-onld admit of pre*,ent consecution {lyertulennfu but by Pm^^'^tis'sxhichxl^unQ^^^^ 
 r, outre preterite consecuiion.- Quern cnpulitatuni incendus inflamjnatum "' «u. poti- 
 cndis qnaj acerrime concvpicisset,xmx:x lanitia perluncli arbitra.nnr qua ua Ali^ica mm 
 Hannibale victo ? What i.er^on infiaimd by the fit;e ot desires m gaiuinj: ^^ha he ai^dently 
 icisl.es, do we think to be pervaded etc. ? Cic. Fin. 5, 24, TO. The tense oM f ^^« "i c- 
 Uxe concupicisstt is not determined by the finite predicate ^^^^.^^^'^'^J^l)^'^^^^^^^^^ 
 accorciini: to the teachin-s of our gramnmrians but which would r^.q^i'^^ ^^f "^^^.fj^ ^Z' 
 l).it bv the perfect participle i„flammatum. If the participle is changed into a hnite 
 perfect inflammatus est. it would, accordii.g to the genera rule "^ ^f.f • «^^-^ff'^f; 1% 
 quire a;^>f;-Ac/ indicative, which, l)y being made a ^">^blique predicate must become 
 a subjunctive, and lieuce according to the prefcut rule a tubjunciive ol the pluper- 
 fect. 
 
 Or-» 2 Tf the norlect participle on which a pubjunctive depends, is iroverncd by an in- 
 fini^tWe cla. se (a.?in t>d e^xaniple Obs. 1), the subjunctive will be in the perfect ^^^ !^^ 
 
 ttu infinitive clause, it woul.l be a perfect indicative as : ^^">;>/"J?;" J^f,^" PJ^^.^^ ^^^^^ 
 bus conumsVis qui in multitndinem dicere av^t -tnt, memoruT diirnos jierpaucos f'"s «^ 
 ButrSthisto le .S^^^^^ 
 lleneoDle at hir-e there were but very lew worthy of being remembered. Cic Brut 
 
 . 2l4^ The predicate aU sinf. if taken out of the infinitive clauseMVOuld be a Perlect 
 indk^iive (VS/fs ro/zr/.^^ sunt (pn..ausi'svnt) ; beinir chanired into a euboblique 
 preiiJateNt mS ivtafn {he san.e te,/se according to the nde above. For the reason of 
 this rule see R. 93. Obs. 1. For an exception to it see Ji. 94, OB^. b. 
 
 Obs. 3. Sometimes, but rarelv. the present consectitipn is "^f^ ^^'^t^ subjuncm 
 rl.nendent on oresent participles, if the governui'j finite predicate is a pietent, as . l)ie- 
 
 •it^or «acrOr m causil Ilomam revocatu,r(,st), consilio ac prope precibus agens cum ma- 
 g]s?ro?quhum ut plus conSuo quam fortfln^^ conjldat, a se potius ducem quam fcem- 
 pronium i//<i^^^</r. Liv. 22, 18. 
 
 1. Neque cognoscendi quidfieret neque sui colligeudi ^o^^i'^"^,f«^!; ^^^^.^If^l^^.^IIISj 
 
 Hiisf nres^ Cies B G 3 G.— 2. Hannibal cum eqiiitibiis ^unu(h^^ circumcqmtat 
 
 is' , re^) urbem ml riendum^ qua max.me^ p-.rteS aggred,retur L-v 29. 1.- 3. Han- 
 
 des finis eOruin popularentur. Ox>. '^•^'\l--;'-T,^-,^V:'"i \.y « it-mnib-il nuntio 
 Ti'x^ «en natrum" sen plebis an inos penclitarelur^ . Liv. L 42.— b. ^^'^"''y''"';'""" " 
 nx . .(u paiiuii /^«-"V >- / . ,,-Kpm !iP-<rredereiur. coeptam jnv5mt 
 
 jirivmi^so'^ 
 
 u/su! i^SK';;.;:^'^;.^» dtun ips^ aggrederetur. ccptam invSnit 
 
 pugnam. Liv. 29, 7. 
 
 Rm. 0:]. The same principle is applied to subjunctives dependent on 
 
 INFINITIVE CLAUSES. - 
 
 1 If the predicate-infinitive is nox-pi;etertte (present, or the tnture 
 infiiiitive fore) the consecution of the dependent subjunctives is deter- 
 uiincd bv"the -()vcrnin-.A'/*/^^^ predicate, licing the present 9i>"f scutum if 
 thelaiteV is non-preterite, and the preterite consecution if the latter is 
 
 ^''""TrToo^.o. nnrari vos quid «7 quo.l e:ro poti^^imurn ..m:r.rim ; {*f>^"^^?/^X^^'|: 
 tin- wint ?s' the reason that just I slio'ild /lav^ arisen. Cic. l^)^c. Am. 1, 1.— f"/'";™. 
 S,Vid a te per Httenls jTtere (piod mi hi omnium e^set maximum; J have not /usilafed 
 
 1 To examine.- ^ 7naxim^ aggrederefur, should make the ^^^'^f attack - » side.-;- ^ to 
 to, etc.— « to send in advance.- » to commence the battle. 
 
 
 I 
 
418 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 419 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 (do not hesitate) to ask of you by letter what, for me, is the most important object 
 of all. lb. Fam. 2, 6, 2. See Ex. 1-7. 
 
 2. If BOTH the predicate-liitiiiilive and the «rovorniiiG: finite prediente 
 are puetekites, the cons^ceution of the dependent subjunctive is regu- 
 larly the preterite consecution (for exceptions see Ous. 7), as : 
 
 Nemincm ad eam diem fnninphn^sfie qui pine magisthTtu rem fjemssef. comhV>at : It 
 7cas known th:ii up to that day nobody //a^/ triumphfd (to nobody a triutiiphMl entry 
 was «,'ranted) who had conducted the WJir without being in (a curule) otlice. Li v. 28, 
 38. Ex. 8. 
 
 3. If tl>e i)redicate infinitive is pketerite, tlie governing finite predi- 
 cate beinii: non-pueteuite, the snhjunctives dependent on the former 
 have the same tense as they iconld have if their gorerning yerfect iujini- 
 tive were chanrjed into a finite perfect. See Obs. 1. 
 
 Obs. 1. In order to apply Rule No. .3 correctly, all the subjunctives» dependent on a 
 predieate-intinitive mu?t l)e divided into 'ouioinal scbjcnttive!* ' and * scaTrNCTivES 
 3IKHELY sui5obliqce\ The toinuT coinpri>e ail tho>e Mibjunctives which would be in 
 this mood ev-ii if tlieir oovern'mg inflnilire loere a finite perfect, as all i)redicntes of de- 
 pendent interroirative or imperative clause!», all those jjoverued by conjunction;- r^7»ir- 
 t/*7 the subjunctive (jd^ne, quo. quin, qunm causal, qwivi temporal in certain connec- 
 tions, quAunris, licet, etc.). and all oilur ' particular ' ^uhjunctives (B. V[.). The l.itler 
 are tho>e wliich are |)laced in this mood merely hecaufte, as ,<>/f}<jMiqi/e predicatfs, titey are 
 made dependi^ni on an intinitire clanst, and w hicli, but for this reason, would t)e in the 
 inUicalice. All 'oriirinal' subjunctives, when dependent (»ii ])redicate-iiilinitivei* in the 
 peilect, are strictly treated according,' to the law of y^/'^^/c/e/tf consecution, whereas the 
 'merely siiboblique' sutijiinctives n-tain that tense in the subjunctive which they would 
 havt^ in the indicative if the intinitive clause be (-haiifjed into a finite sentence. Tenses 
 treated aicordiuir to tliis metiiod maij have the appearance of a pretfrite consecution (if 
 the original tense of the dependent "pri'clicates is an imperfect or plupi-rfect ». or it may 
 be virtually a present consecution (if iheir ori<;inal teJi(>e is a pret^ent or perfect)*. 
 
 Mihi qiiidem HomCrus hujusmodi quiddam r?^/^s>v r^/tV///- ineis quaMle Sireinim can- 
 
 tWm^flnxent: It ■<tenu^ to nte lliat Homer has seen scnnethinir of the Jvind in that which 
 
 ♦A« states ym hi< fictions) on the Siren songs. Cic. Fin. 5, 18. 49. Here 'finxtHf is a 
 
 * merely subi>hli(iue ' subjunctive, beinir an 'orii;inar ])erfect-indicative : ' HomSrus 
 rir/i^ qiiiddam ejnsmodi in i-is (\\\;v..1iii,rif.' This perfect .//«ri;! is chanj^ed into its 
 own sul)jiiiictive by l)eiii<j: made siil)<>bli(iue, with-ut any rei^ard to thei,'oveinin<r finite 
 predicate. It would be tiie same it it tiad assumed 7>/v.>.-^/»/ consecution.— lUud iniror 
 adflflci \c ]x>tiiis>te, qui me peuitus wo-^^g deb?rcs, ut exi^timdres me t;im improvidum: 
 I wonder that you. whoonf/hf to know me entitely, roidd (shotild) have been induced 
 to belifve me s(» imprudent. CMc. Fam. 1, It», 1. IJrfferes is 'merely 8ulK)l)lique,' since 
 the ind-'ptMidenr construction would l)e 'Ad \^r\ potnl-iti (tu) (pii me peiiitus no-^se de- 
 blbax (li 7<>, Obs. ,')). Hence dtl'thas is ch.tir.:ed into its own sul)jtin(tive de/^^res, 
 which «rive-» ti> it t lie appearnnce of />?'«=/<^ri7« consecution, which it is nof. Sii.ce in 
 plice of defjehas the indi(ritive miirht hive been either d''hni-<ti or dtbuej'os {li.l^^y 
 Obs. 5, d), if would have been as proper to use debiiens or debuisses instead of debires, 
 the former of which would have ;jiven if the appearauc of pv-^ent consecution. Oil 
 the other hand txi^ti/ndres, beinL' a pirticular or 'original' subjunctive, iroverned l).y 
 vt, is subject to tlie law of preti^rite consecution in consequence i»f the perfect /)Otiri<se. 
 It would have tiie .same tense and tlie same mood in independent c-uistructiiui, 'Ad- 
 dflci pofuisti uf exisflni'ire^.'' — F)io Liiculli adventu uri)ent CyzicenOruin obsessa/n esse 
 quam L. LiicuIIuh tihtrdrit. pa(>^fncfiunqi/e nostiis lejionibiis esse Poiitum, qui antea 
 populo Konitino claasusfidsstt ; 1 say that at the time of Lucullus's arrival the capital 
 
 * The reason for this diflforence in the treatment of the two clnsse^ of gnbjunctivos la 
 plain. The ' merely siibob ique subjunctives' are 'oriu'inil indicatives', and their rela- 
 tion to the tense of tln-ir L'overnini^ predicate is an 'indicative' relation; hence tlujir 
 governunj: infinitive can atfect their fen--e so far only a- it wouhl in the indicative : 
 whereas the 'original subjunctives' tak(; the mark of tense from their «joverninu; predi- 
 cates by the same irraminafical act as they take the mark of mood, a lin<;uislic fact 
 which the laii<.;uai,'e represents under the };iammatical form of tense-consecufion. Hence 
 the tenses of the 'merely suboblique' siibjunctive.s are not tenses Uy consecution, but 
 logical Xaw^v». They strictly do not beb>ni,' to the law of consecution, but to tlie next 
 section, being treated here merely on account of their close connectiou with tense-con- 
 secutioii. 
 
 <& 
 
 The i„d.-l«'"il'->" •'"''^"T) :,:T'}i]A;,\!^i^^ Hence Uic perfect 
 
 S!t7:.tar,'v'nS;riur ••'^lTA.TL^tjriu»fa\V„ b^ a te.se'- by consecution.' 
 
 that they have the external aPP*'»:!^»^^^ «^ P-^^Vl'^^^^^^^^^^ immtlnis nemo A/m«, 
 
 h'e approbation, since many items ^^^f^;;;> ^fa ™ ate dependent on '^falmm est; not 
 clauses. ' q,nnv . .fveiit , and 9^'' f "^" '^'^S . ^^^- ;!d ly present consemtim. If depend- 
 ^litr^XC^;:;' Xy ^^^l^:^^^^U .--^ cau.al requiring the 
 subjunctive. See Ex. 21. 
 
 be in tlm plujm/tct. See Ex. '26. 
 
 cm-iniiiiiim;, « ...v.. . .._... , i>.,,,iio nnst ^«.nv ferunt nvnnaiu'iit oiuiwinu., j..'v. 
 
 the;>;-.^n/.consecut.oniHnpp.e^ j^ i, ,.,j,orted that 
 
 nes sfai-e ad janiiam duo quos( .im, QUi turn ina^ ,,' /fetwo voung men at the door who 
 .o<,n afterw:Mds Simonides .^.^v t;(rom^^^ 
 urgently wished Imn to t>e called o't. Cic ^'it in t'lu claiise ^juvenes stare: and thus in 
 
 i±;.rio 't;;;l:&^2/' ifaff'S-iS^ n^-it mu.t have p....... 
 
 pendent predicates to have 2'/;f7:,'^^ ^i^J-.^^^^^^; "h prSicX nlii^Ttives in the present, is 
 [•nt infinite clauses, referring to past actions, I'F'l]:'^. ^^^^ ^subjunctives directly or 
 i„ this instance considered as a ''^''^^l ^, ^^^jVive chiu<es o have pVeterite consecution, 
 indirectly cl'T^'"^l^'''f/'" ^^'^ P''^'?;"^' V^^^" m nh^^ '^»^''"'"' ''^V^^ ''l" 
 
 "^OB^. The.e nre .evora. in.Unccs in "Imb .e..^« -e n^ .bat floviate from tbose 
 ten«!H which ^h..nl,l be expec-ted "'■"'")'■'« '"'^1? all ke nr«iicalc. dependent on in- 
 
 .,!ffiv'c"z^;?sTbiuMr,ss'/s,»;h%"-r/.'''i.-^^ 
 
420 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DErENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 421 
 
 in those tenses wliicli the ppeaker infrodiiced would use indirect discourse, as: Tantiim 
 {(llcehanf) esse riirOn'iu ut lie Siuissifiiics (iiiidcin, qui eOdeni jure Ktantnr. doleireri 
 jtotneniit : Tliey said. . that tht-ir ni.iducs-' was t^uch that not even the Sues.-iones, 
 who ivei-t us'iiK/ the same hiws, could In- ktitt from, etc. Civs, B. fj. 2, '.\. Here, acconiiui^ 
 to /ii/n.'Xi, No. 1. pitteritc coii.vecution should liave been used; hut the subjunctive!» 
 vfdHtitr aiul ]H)tHerinf are in liie present and perfect, l)ecauoe the speiii<eri<. in «lirect <lis- 
 conrsc, wouhl have said utiintnriun\})0lH7iind.— Tradidercquithiin. /Y,«>7X'>//.'//mah smatu 
 ense.^AMUi: Ithodios leijatiOnem mi^/ifse post (piaui trausi;rei-so8 iu Maeedouiaui Ifoiuaiios 
 (nidlerlnf ; Some liave reported, that tiie answer ira^ rjir' n '«y tlie Seii;ite. . . t!ie Kiio- 
 (lians laid xent ambassadors at a lime wlien they had heard that ihe ifouians liad crossed 
 thr Macedonian fronti(!r. Liv. 45, ;i. Thepeifict subjunctive f^^/'/^Vri»// is u^-ed because 
 the Senate in direct discourse wouUl have said audilnint. According to /^. 93, No. 2, 
 audissent sliould liave l)een used. See IJ. VI. 
 
 {b) The latitude allowed in oblique discourse (No. a) is often extended to ordinary 
 indirect statements, not strictly belongiiii; to o!ili(iue discourse. 'J'his usaire is IV»;- 
 quently found in tlie historians, l)ut very rarely in Cicero, ami other philosophical writ- 
 ers : Dictator ]SIanlium jure ca.st/m (e.s,^e) pronunfirrvit, eliam>'i rep:ui crimine insona 
 /ueHt, (\\n vocHtus a mairistro ecpiitum ad dictatorem non vt^nis,<>ef : The dictator de- 
 clared tliat the l<illini,'of Manlius wa.-i Ugal. altliou^rh he m'lfjht hare been innocent of 
 hii;h treason, since he ha<l not ohcyed tiie summons of the vice-dictator (literally : \\lio 
 //</c/ ?uV<;'o//'Y' summoned by the master of the horse). Liv. 4. 15. (In direct statement, 
 the dictator would liave said : 'Jure Ctf>7/v fx/. etiamsi insons ///J/. qui ( = quum) non 
 venuset (or venerat). The rule in Jiejn. 1*3, No. 2, would require /</is><-/ or ee.fe/] — Qui 
 docCre relief nihil ita sii^nilri in animis nostris a veropos-e, (piod non eOdem motlo fws.yit 
 a false; Who intended to show that nothinq; can be tlius imprinted in our souls l)y truth 
 which canr.ot likewise be inijjrinted by falsehood. Cic. .^cad. 2. 22, 71. [.According to 
 rule Jieni. 9.3. No. 1, ■ po/tsef is required ; but ';>r\?v?7' is likewise correct, since the direct 
 statement would be ' nihil signari ]x>le>!t quod non eOdein modo jx^teat. etc.].— JSonietimes 
 this exceptional 'consecutitui ' is used where, at first sij:;ht, the tense «tnployed niiL'ht 
 pei!in strauLT'dy out of plac»'. \vh(Mi on closer e.\aminatl<ui the e.Kceptional lorm aj)i)ears 
 to be used witli «rreat si^'iiificance and perfect consistency ; Eiro ba'c omnia Chrysoi:oniuii 
 fecUi<e dico, nt ementir^tnr. ut malum civem Koscium i\u>iii\finf/eref. ul eumapud adver- 
 sarios occlsnm esse diccret, ut hiscc dc rebus a lefriltis Amerinorum docGri L. StiUani 
 passus non sit ; I assert that Chrysoi^onns anninrlted all tln*se misdeeds, namely to lie., 
 to say against his better knoniedge that Ho?cius was a bad citizen, to say that he hlid been 
 killed in the enemy's camp, and not to allow Sulla to be intormed of liie>e affairs by the 
 Amcrian embassy. Cic. Kosc. A. 41, 127. Here the perfect p<nt<iis i<it is u stumbling 
 block to our interpreters, and Ernesti corrected ^ pate ret ur.'' But Cicero, in this wiiole 
 passage, did not use tenses according to (preterite) consecution, but lor/ical tenses. In 
 direct statement he would have said : Chrysogonus enientieln'tfiir (imjjerf. of repeated 
 action), malum civem U. Uil^iiofnr/Tbat (imp. of j)roL'ressive action), eum apud adversa- 
 rios occlsum d'icebat (according to U. 70. Ous. *}). docc'ri Sullani pai'sim non est (a momen- 
 tary act with reference to a point of time). The same ten-es are used with perfect con- 
 sistency and significance in giving to these sentences the form of indirect statement. 
 By using grammatical consecution, the difl'erence in the nature of these actions woidd 
 have been completely etlaced. Ex. 29-.J2. 
 
 (€) Logical tenses of the dependent subjunctives maybe used in this construction 
 {E. !>3), if the use of such tenses would be admi>sil)le according to the general lules in 
 Item. 94. Thus we fiiul xxjn'enent consecution, where, accordimr to the rules of li. 93. a 
 preterite consecution should be expected, if either the gorerninq finite preterite, or the 
 preteHie pralicate-injlnitive logically iiiclude.< a present tense, li. 93. Obs. 2, as : Civsar ad 
 me scripsit (i. e. scripsit et uunvjadicat) <,'ratis-imum sibi esse quod guierim (the gram- 
 matical consecution would have recpiired gii'-s.-teni) ; C;e~ar has written to me that w/y 
 reniaiiiing inactive was (had been) very satisfactory to him. Cic. Att. 8, 11.— Credo ei:"o 
 vos audisse (i. e. audisse et nunc scire), quemadmodum i)r;esidia RomSna ab Siculis cir- 
 cumrerda et oppressa sint per lios dies (stuict oii.\mmatical conseci tiox : circitinrenta 
 es-^tut, as periphrastic imperfect, or ri/-CM/A<re«?>¥«////', as ordinary imjjerfect); I believe 
 that you hare heard how the Koman garrisons during these day-< have been entrai)pe(l 
 and surprised by the Sicilians. Liv. 2t, ."iH. It is very rare, that, aside from 'hese instan- 
 ces (No. a, b, c), logical tenses are used in clauses dependent on predicate-infinitives, 
 as: In Alcii)iade, iiatQra quid efllccre;>o.v'j;<7 (instead of ;x>wO vidCtur w;>(?/-/a. Nep. Ale. 1. 
 1. Difficile est amicitiam 7nanTre si a virtate defcerix^. Cic. Am. 11, 37.-2. Ego 
 
 non de-p6ro,/ore aliquem alitpiando qui, quum se ad audiendum. legendum. scriben- 
 
 duinque dederit-, e.rsistat talis orator, qualem qujerimnsS. lb. Or. 1. 21.9.5.— 3. Valde sus- 
 
 > Dejicere ab aliqnd re, to fall away from something, to «bandon, to forsake something. 
 — 2 to devote one's self. Dederit has the force of a subjunctive of the future-perfect. 
 Sec § G07.— 3 as we are seeking, i. e. as we want (need.\ 
 
 f 
 
 \ 
 
 \i\crtrfore ut infrtngdfnr^ liomininn improbitas consiliis tuOrum amicr)rnm. lb. Fam. 
 
 I, fi. 1. — 4. Iie'si)onsum est. in deditiOnem ita «7cr?/yi eos si belli concitOies' ^/Grfjt/i.*r- 
 senl^. Liv. v9 3.— ft. Nunicpiam mihi drfut'irani oratioiiem'', qua exercatum meum al- 
 IcKpurer, credidi. lb. 2S, 27.— 0. Nonnuili Ca'sari niinti[H»ant. quum castra moveri>A<f- 
 sixKtt-\ mm fore dicto audieiites milites. Ca-s. B. (J. 1. 39. — 7. Non speraverat Hannibal 
 fore ut tot in Italia })opnli ad i^v. deficerent^. Liv. 2S, 44.— 8. C{e>ar cognovit. Consi- 
 dium qtiod non ridisfiet pro viso^ sini renuntiasse^. Ctes. B. G. 1. 22.— 9. Ait mens 
 Ifiniiliaris'-', eand* ni causam Alexaiu]rli,is y'/i-vve cur lauddrent Gabinium quie mihi 
 fiierii quum eundem deftndertni. Cic. ifab. Post. 12, 32.— 10. Ecquam civitritem/y^/Zd- 
 /i.v (ill'» tempore) pacfltami" yVyi.vvy?. (\\vm (iiutic) Inciiples nt}^ ? lb. Leg. Man. 2:3, 67.— 
 
 II. Conf ted/is necesse est. te o|)iuionem nmhuiu fcfeUisse^^ quod existiinans me causam 
 Cluentii lege>3 defensQrum. \\y (^']„_ (jj^ kj») — 12. Ipse se insanisse^* confitefnr quod 
 suam pecuniam regi credidetit^^. lb. Ilab. Post. 9, 25. — 13. Tu non rides, ipsum ilium 
 Aiistotelis discipulum. i)ostquam rex appelldtus sit^^. superbum. crudglem, iinmode- 
 itltum/'/f.sw.?' lb. Att. 13. 28. 3.— 14. Illud dico, me, ut^' primum in contiOne proviu- 
 ciam (iejK}suerivi^^, statim, quemadmodum earn tibi traderein, cogitare capisse. lb. 
 Fam. .'), 2, 3. - 15. Ne illud quidem intelligunt, ita memoriie prod itmn esse, quum De- 
 mosthenes dicturiis essel^^. ui^" concursus2i audiendi cansil ex toia Grsecia fierent. lb. 
 Brut. S4, 289 — 16. Dionysium /V;v///^ ediHsse, ut quod quisque de sacris^-' hatieret. id 
 ante diem certain in suiim^^ quid(jue fanum referret. lb. N. D. 34, f;4. — 17. Medgam 
 jn^t^dicanl'^*. in fuira fratris sui membra in eis locis qua^^ se parens perseqiteretur"^^ 
 di<Hpari.*tse^'. lb. Leg. Man. 9. 22. — 18. Eam suspiciOnem propter hanc causam credo 
 fni.s-ne qnod Fannius in medioctibus'-^^ ovutorWms haMtus esset, hivc oratio aiitem vel 
 optima esset omnium. lb. Brut. 26, 100. — 19. Sinit qui propter adjectum ^SvEquOrum 
 \'«il-corumque hello Vejens^o belliim, quia duo consules oblrc^-'^ tot siniul tiella neqm- 
 rent, tribunos militum trls c;v'7/o.v (esse) dicant. Liv. 4, 7.— 20. Socrates dicif. Peri- 
 clem 7;;"t; N/<7?.«.«t? ceteris oratoribus, quod is Anaxairorte ,/W;i^ aurlltor, a (iwo^"^ cen^t 
 <-UTn, quum alia pneclara qujvdam didicisset. fuisse iiiMxvnm quibus oratiOnis modis^^ 
 qtulMlue aninu'rum \Mirlv^^* pellerentvr^^. Cic. 6r. 4, 15. — 21. ('nidum. Col«)phOnem, ali- 
 asque urltTs captas es.-^e coinnienwrem, quum vestros portus in pnedOnum fuisse po- 
 testilie scidtis f lb. Lclt. Man. 12. 33. — 22. VidZ-r^is mihi tantum juris civlli< scire roln- 
 isse. quantum satis es/^et oratoii. lb. Brut. 45, 150. — 23. Ouum tu Solem^' quia solus 
 e.tsef ap})elldt>iin esse dicas, Soles^' ipsi qunm multi a theologis proferuntur ! lb. N D. 
 21. 54. — 24. Nisi forte Censes, Gracchum h(idt\C>rvn\ fuisse quam filium, quum alter siabi- 
 
 ^Jiifriiigi, to receive a blow, to be checked. — - abettors. — 3 plup. subj. with the force 
 of a 'subjunctive of the futuie-perlect. See § 607. — * language. — ^ — future-perfect. — 
 ^ ad aligiieni deticere, to desert to somebody, i. e. to join somebody after deserting 
 anc.tber (the Pomans). — ' as if he had seen it. — « (o report. — » Iriend. — ^" the Romans 
 called a city or country ' pacdta '. Avhen it was in their power, or subjected by them. — 
 11 locii]>le< exset would be an original subjunctive referring to the time of fuit, according 
 to the rules of 'relative subjunctives' (B. VI.); independently : Qiiui (nulla) civitas, 
 quse locuples esset. iiacata fuit? ' Lori/ples sif is merely subobliqmr (indep<Midently : 
 civitas, qua* nunc locuples est). The sense is: 'No city, then in our power, is now 
 rich.'— '-^ (•pinto /ne /nnltani fallif. my opinion deceives me much ; i. e. it is a great 
 mistake on my part. — i-'' under th(; law^i. e. with ref(*l-ence to theexi^ting laws (opi)osed 
 to 'ecpiity ').-- >> in<ai'ire, k» be insane.— '^ credere alin/i j)ecuntam. to loan somebody 
 money without security.— ^* regem. apptlldri, to be called king, i. e. to be acknowledged 
 as kiiig. to become kiiiir. — ^^ a-i< six>n us. requirimr the perfect indicative in direct state- 
 ment.— •'' proiiiiciarn in confion'' (i. e. militum) deponere. to lay down the government of 
 the province before the assembled army. i. f. to deliver one's farewell address to the 
 armv.— •=> was to ^.peak.- -" how.— 21 concnrsi/s fiant, literally '<:ath( rings are made \ 
 I e. people fiock together, gather in crowds. — 2a sacra, sacred thing-, i. e. objects belong- 
 ing to religious wor-hip. — "^ suura gnidgve famnn ; That temple to which each thing 
 l)elong<'d.— - 2* The writer» extol tiie fact (witli reirard to Medea's ingenuity).— 25 relative 
 locative adverb of the 4th case, instead of ' p^-r ryz/rt" '.— 2« The indicative dependent 
 on dissipdfjat would be '■ perseqnebdtnr ' (with a future force, Ixeni. .53, Obs. 2). It might 
 also betaken as ' subol»lique ' fiom the • mind ' of Medea instead of 'qua se persequi 
 exi>tim;lref, in which insiance the subjunctive would be an 'original one '. The use aK se 
 shows that the author j)rol)ably took theclaiise in this way.— -^ 10 disperse.— ^s among 
 the orators of middle rank.— -•' See p. 19!». 0ns. 3.— '^^ Vejentian.— 3> tot simul bella 
 oblre. to have so manv wars on their hands at once.— ^2 an • involved ' relative construc- 
 tion (See B. VI.). A quo refers only to ' did'/ci^xet \\\o\ lo ' gnanim fuisse'. Render by 
 ac<M>rdinntion: 'And he believes that, while he had learned from him, etc., he was in pos- 
 session of the knowledge (he knew bv what etc.)— ^3 rhetorical means.— 34 each faculty 
 of the soul.— 35 to incite, to operate iipon.- 3« Sol (the g<Kl).— 37 the principal sentence 
 is elliptical (I must answer thai a great number of Sols arc mentioned by the theologians). 
 
422 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 423 
 
 lire romnublicam studuenf\ alter evertcre. lb. Fin. 4, 24. (i5-'2o&-r.^ me quodam tcni. 
 porJXupontu.n ve,n..e tecum, n.-qu. a.l hospit.-n aute ^.^'.;W quam i'yt^agonfl 
 ipt^uin ilium locum ubl vitam rdiderai», hecU'ruqiie ivlrrim lb. ;>, 2 4.- Mk Aego rem 
 esse ullam in quemquam ohjtclam* quie Fidieulanio o/o<cfii "<>» ,^^^ ahquul y</t.-^*e m 
 Fidici.Ianii caljl quod idem uon esset in ceterOrum lb. Ciu. 41. li:i- 27. lie>'l>0'>.um 
 es.<^e feruni per Atialum reireuu Hoiiulnos compote^^ ejus jote quod pehreid. Liv. 21» 
 11—28 Te meminU qmim euldam clari^*simo atque optimo viro KupplicatiOiiem'» 
 lion decerneres\ dictre le decit-tQium ^^ refenZtor" ob eas ret< qn''*'^ «r,. con^n\ ni 
 "rbe S-^isset Cic. Fam. 15,4,11.-29. Le;;ati ce>,erant i.unuanh-s, Philippum pn- 
 mum ApoUoniam temptasse'^ delude, ut ea res tardiur si)e/w6^/i/, ad Oricum exercituui 
 admorUse. Liv. 24, 40.- 30. Scipio iieqiwlquam eOdem ammo ^.*^trepwj^^use.^t ad m - 
 dicandumio id m'lus quo'» civTIem erruren»»'^ mi\wr muavtvity^. lb. 28, 3f— .«. Lc- 
 eati tv//e>^.A^/ nuutiantc'8 »^e mstiuhexxm Macedoi.um m.n ;>o.«.v^^. msi pra':^uiium wf - 
 tCttur Komanum. lb. 24, 40.-32. Jh.-^pondinint legati. ejus, quanta yralia es^tt apud 
 iiiiperatOrem, exjiertos ease quum tribflnoa in viuculu coujectrU. lb. 2U, ly. 
 
 2. Logiml Tenses. 
 % 605. Logical tenses of depeiulent subjunctives arc those which 
 are not detfrniined by the tense of the governing predicate, but by the 
 lo<^ical relation of the time which tliey designate, i. e. by those rules which 
 determine the use of tense in the indicative. 
 
 Hi (Attici qui de ridioulo scripsCrunt) ita in^ulsi exstitervnt \\i nihil aliud eOrum 
 nisi ipsa insul-iuis lideatur : These (i. e. tlie Atties who made theories of the lau-Ji 
 able') became so insipid that nothinj,' else u laii(fhahk in their writin-s buttheir own 
 insipidity. Cic. Or. 2. .54, 217. Th«- pre*.ent tense of the subjunctive n^^*////r is not 
 determi!iedbyfj-.syi/e/''/;//, but bv its own logical relation to the speaker s time ( the 
 insipidity is now htu-hable '). If the imperlett rider^txr had been used it mis^ht still 
 refer to the speaker's time; this relation, however, would not be indicated by the 
 tense, but solely by the connection. 
 
 Ob^ The tenses of dependent subjunctives determined by consecution may be at f/ie 
 sameiiim lonical ttn.'^e.-i. This is gem-rally the case in the t-nses of /^/v^vAi^ consecution 
 (S 603) and in the preterite consecution if pluperfect subjunctives or imperfi-ct subjunc- 
 tives are used with the meanin- of the same leii-es in the indicative.as m/omf «»r «'^e 
 examnles "iven above, as : tSentiGbat quid aqeretur (- id quod afjthalun, ^ b0.i, JN«). if \ 
 heiatus sum quod mihi liceret i = quod /icrhaf), § »103, No. E ; Scipio disseruil qnas jrentls 
 redenisset ( = de irentibus qiias redegerah. § •103. No. K. But oltm the tenses by conse- 
 cution are in coiitlict with the loqical meanin.i,' of the lense (in the indicative), as : Len- 
 lulu^ ostendit quanta conscieniiaj vis esset : Lentulus showed how <rreat the power ot 
 conscience u. Cic. Cat. 3, 5. Here the imperlect esstt logically denotes present tinie.-- 
 Factumestut statim terga rerferent : It happened that they dinctly turiK-d to flight. 
 Ca>s B ft 3 19 Here verftrtnt has the force of a peffect indicative. 1 he predicates 
 in clauses of' purpose (which, exce|ft in very rare instances, are always either in the i)res- 
 ent or in the imperfect tense) are almost always in contiict with the lojiual relation ot 
 their time, which refers to \hcfitfi/?-e. On the other hand lo(/ical tenses are Irequently 
 iu coiit!ict with the law of consecution (§ (lOd). 
 
 . c»;HJ. The instances in which logical tenses are in conflict with the 
 law of consecution mostly occur when subjunctives o^ present consecu- 
 tion (present and perfect) are made dependent on preterite predicates. 
 
 Such subjunctives may be used in certain circumstances (7?. 94. 95.) if 
 the action designated by the subjunctive is determined from the stand-point 
 
 » Independently expressed : Gracchvs hedtus fait quum sfuduit (p. 339, Tiem. 09).— 
 2 «^one t«) Devertere is technieallv used of the stopping of strangers with their guest- 
 friends or in public houses.— ^ rifam edere, to live.— •* ofOecta est. present of the peri- 
 phrastic participle (ihat any objection is made a-ainst Fidieulanius ; any fault is lound 
 with him) — s amixttem nlicnjus rei esse, to obtain something.— « a thanksgiving.— 
 ' non derernere aliguid, to vote a«;ainst somelhin-,' (if the vote refers to a decree), hee 
 p 341 Obs 2 — 8 it the report (in the Senate) relerred to what he had done as consul.— 
 •attempted to take ApoUonia.— »« to punish.— >' as.— ^a = civium suorum errortm, 
 the offence committed by his fellow-citi/ens.— »3 to correct. 
 
 \ I.' 
 
 of the spcaker'^s (author's) time, without any regard to the time of the 
 principal i)redicate. — Rarely subjunctives oi pretente consecution (imper- 
 fect and pluperfect) are made dependent on non-preterite predicates {R. 9G). 
 
 Obs. 1. The time of the action determined from X\\& speaker'' s time (in the instances 
 where this is nermitted). is either a time present to the speaker (as in the example to 
 § 605), or a lime ;>«*•;! in reirard to the speaker. In the latter instance the perfect is used, 
 as : ArdCbat Hortensius (dicendi) cupiditflte sic ut in nullo unquam flagrantiiis studium 
 tideHm ; nullum enim patiebatur esse diem quin aut in for<» diceret. aut meditarltur 
 extra forum; Hortensius burned with such a de>ire for 8})eaking that / never saw in 
 any a more ardent zeal ; for he did not allow any day to pass without either sj>exiking in 
 the forum, or studying outside of it. Cic. Brut. 88, ;302. Here the clause ut.. .vUierira has 
 no reference to the time of ardetjat, being represented as past in regard to tlie author's 
 own time. But the time of diccvet and meditaretur refers to the time of the principal 
 predicate ;w/it//<7/'//r, and hence r«rt«o< assume a tense of present consecution. Dixtrit 
 and ineditCitus sit would be as improper as ridlrem or vidissem. 
 
 Obs. 2. Often relative clauses have the logical value of independent sentences, having 
 only the grammatical f(/rm of clauses. If such clauses have predicates in one of the 
 ])0itntial suf/junctivts, these latter are not subject to the law of consecution, but retain 
 the tenses which they must have according to the rules of their class (§ 592-594). Such 
 instances are no rearexceptions to the law of consecution, since relative clauses of this 
 kind, logically, must be considered as co-ordinate sentences, as: Rem commoiisti nov5dis- 
 piitatiTuie diL'iiam. quam in aliud tempns differmnus (not differrPmvs) ; You have intro- 
 duced a subject worthy of a new discussion, which we had loiter postpone toanother time 
 (lilt-rally ' which Itt usj/ostj)one'). Cic. Brut. 87, 2!i7.— Qnidam non adjecere niimerum, inter 
 quos me ipse poni malim ; Some did not add the number, among whom I myselt would like 
 to be placed. Liv. 29. 25. The former o I these subjunctives is imperative (| 594), and 
 the latter a subjunctive of guarded statement {Rein. 79), neither of which, in independ- 
 ent seniences, can assume a tense of preterite consecution. — Herebelou"^ relative paren- 
 thetical clauses, restricting an assertion of the auth(>r to his 'best knowledge.' as: 
 Fuit Sulpicius omnium, quos quidem ego audiverim (as far as I have heard) grandis 
 orfitor. Cic. Brut. 5.5, 203. See p. 5(i0. 
 
 Obs. 3. If a clause with a potential subjunctive can not be considered as being virtu- 
 ally an independent sentence, it generally follows the law of consecution. But some- 
 tinies sucli subjunctives keep their own tenses, whether they are dependent on pre- 
 terite or on non-preterite predicates, as : (a) Htjjyothetical periods which are made 
 dependent on otlur sentences, in some instances keep their own tenses, and in others 
 follow the law of consecution. (See R. '.;0).— (6) Interrogative svbjunctives. if made de- 
 l)endent on preterites, may be placed in the jferfect to preserve ihe peculiar meaning 
 of the interrogative subjunctive according to § .593, which they would lose by assuming 
 the tenses of preterite consecution, since in this instance they would not be distinguish- 
 able frtun ordinary iiitenoijative clauses, as : Quie fuit causa cur cuncta civitas Lampsa- 
 ceiiurum de conlione domum tuam concurrerit ? What was the reason that the whole 
 community of the Lam|)saceni, alter the mass-meeting, should have repaired at once to 
 thy house"? Cic. Verr. 2. 1, 31. (Independently : Quid concurrerit civitas? Why should 
 they repair, etc. : i. e. there was no gofnl rea-^on why they should do so, except, etc^ — 
 Oui in illjl re quid facere potuerit mm habChat ; Wh'o did not know what he could do iu 
 the premises. (Indeix-ndently : Quid facere j^otuerit f What could he have done? i.e. 
 nothiiiL'.) See Ex. Cic. Kosc. A. 22, (Jl, to R. 94, Obs. 4 {c^. and Ex. \.-(c) Oblique 
 Quod-clauses (R. 82), and oblique clauses with i/nperative subjunctives (B. 83), if made 
 dependent on preterite predicates, sometimes keep the tenses which they would have 
 in direct discourse, according to the principle explained R. 93, Obs. 7, (a) : Resjwndit 
 ab arniis discedant ; He answered they should lay down their arms (Independently : ab 
 annis dl^^cef/atis). Sail. Cat. 31. 1.— Cato ad Popilium scripsit ut secuudo filium snum 
 obliget'^ sacramento; Cato wrote to Popilius to administer to his son a renewed military 
 oath. Cic, Off. 1, 11, 36. Seniores eOrum nimiam lenitStem populi Rimiflni castigarunt 
 quod eo-= homines qui in alieno solo ledilicilre oppidum couiUi cint, impunltos dimise- 
 rint ; Those of advanced age found fault with the excessive leniency of the Koman 
 
 * Some (inferior) codices have concurrerent. which stands in most of our editions. 
 Conru7rerf^nt is evideiitlv a later correction bv those who (like the editors) did not under- 
 stand the force of this perfect.— 2 The reading obligdret is a mere conjecture, without 
 being supported by the codices. From the connection of this passage it appears that 
 Cicero used the present obliget in place of the imperfect olMgdret to distillgui^h the im- 
 perative clause from a hypothetical construction. See for this passage Rem. 96, Obs. 7. 
 
424 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 people for Jinring failed to punish thopc who liad thrrcd to hnild a town on a ?oil not 
 iheii- own Liv. 3i>, 55. This form of impi-niiive clauses ino-t Iretiuently occurs lu 
 Suliust (Ek. 'i-o), l)utalsoin Ciesar. (Ex.6).— Sometimes oblique ckiuses of Uiiskiud an; in 
 tenses determined by tiie law of preterite conscculion, while the t^ulxMxq^ie clauses 
 dependent on them are loi,'ical tenses: Procnmbunt ad pedes, ne pulcberrimam lotlus 
 GalliiB urbem. qutE pnesidio et oriuimento .nUiri/dfi, suis manihus succendere coqertn- 
 tur. Cies. B. G. 7. 15. (.Independent : Neco.i;amur urbem succendere qu;e (-6/, etc.). Ex.7. 
 On- 4 Sometimes a non-preterite jroverninj; predicate is left out by ellipsis, in which 
 in-^tance the subjunctives of present consecution dei)endent on such non-preterites 
 understood, often seem to depend on the preterite next to them : Qute mea coiioriatio 
 ne tibi sine causa suscepta viUedtur, ilia me ratio jnovii nt le admonendum putmein \\t 
 con^idenTre-, etc. Cic. Fam. 1, 7, 9. Here the sentenct? ' ilia me ratio morit ' has the force 
 of • illiik f^i^Vhauc me ratiOnem movisse,' videatur bein^ dependent on ' (/it» understood ', 
 not on movit. (Lest this niv exhortatiim should seem causeless to you, I remark tluU 
 this (the foilowinj,' reason) induced me to admonish you, (namely) tiiat yon should con- 
 sider, etc.) Such iustiinciis cannot be considered as exceptions to the law of consecu- 
 tion. See Ex. 8. 9. 
 
 (5 Ctelius le-^'em promultjdnt iit sexenni die'^ t^ine usiiris»^ creditye pecuni;e>* ttolvan- 
 tiir^^. Cx<. \^. C. 3, 20.— 7. Ciesar Labieno imperat. si sustinCre.i* non possit^'', deduc- 
 tisi**cohortibus''*»eVuptione20/>?/7/a7/v/. Cies. 15. G. 7» 86.-8. Idem a te nunc^>^/'o quod 
 superioribus litteris (i. e. jyeHd)^ ut, si quid in perditis rebus^» dispiceres*- quod mihi 
 puiare^ faciendum, me 7nondres-^. Cic. Att. 11, 1«.- 9. Non ei,'o tecum ita jocilbor 
 lit eibdem rebus (i. e./eci) quum L. Mureuam te accusantet/<;/V/<rfc/-t/n. lb Fin. 4, 27, 74. 
 
 lieni. 94. In the followin.i? instances, snl)junctives dependent on preter- 
 ites ?«rty {ovmnst, see Obs. i. 2., etc.) assume the tenses of prctfcnt conse- 
 cntion {i. e. h)L;;ical tenses) if the time of the action imuj or mast be con- 
 sidered as refeiiiiis^ to tlie Kpeaker'a lime, either as present to it. or as past 
 before it : 1) If by usin<^ tlie tenses of preterite consecution there would 
 be a conflict with other .^grammatical rules, or with tliehiws of h)ij:ical con- 
 irruity or perspicuity (Obs. 1); 2) If the Er.ivernin^- preterite predicate 
 contains a present picdicnle by implication (Obs. 2. o. 4. 5); 3) If the prin- 
 cipal ])redicate is a preterite referring to the time-period of the speaker, 
 but preceding another action referrin.i? to the same lime-period, according 
 to Ilem. 43 (Obs. (i) ; 4) If the principal ])redicate is a perfect subjnnctice 
 (Obs. 7); 5) Rarely if the i>riiicipal prcdicat»? is a hypothetic<tl preterite 
 (Obs. 8. D) ; 0) If the clause in whicli the subjunctive stands is a Qnum- 
 clause f()ll<»wed by tin apodosis with tum{On^ 10); 7) If lite clause in 
 which tlie stibjunctive stands is introduced by ut, quin, or equivalent ret- 
 atives, describing the modality of the principal acti<ju (Modal Ut-clauses). 
 See Rem. 1)."). 
 
 In most of these instances it is optional, e\\\wv to observe the law of con- 
 secution, or to set it aside by the use of lof/ical tenses, the usage of the 
 language inclining mo re towards the former than Jowards the latter 
 
 > W 1 1 at w a s t iTe 7 t-a^r- on that (whv). — *■* to he the tirst to know (namely the assassina- 
 tion of Sex. Hoscius).— 3 Indepen'deiitly : ' Qudmohrem rohurif f wliy should he tiave 
 wished, etc. (i. e. he could not liave wished so if he had been iiuiocent of the crime).— 
 * their svmpatliv witli tiie conspiracy.— 'carefidly.— " lo conceal.— ' every living' beinp:. 
 — « appi-oach (tVv) with money.— *• = id quod.— »" tlnit it would not be acceptable to 
 the Senate.— i» To stuff, cram with irifts.— >- sc.rfiuii die = ftexetnii tempore, \u six ye.ars 
 lime.— ^^ interests.— >* credi/ic jMC'/niiV, all debts in money.— '^ m pay.— "» maintain 
 his position (i. ^. within llie iutienchments).— '^ instead i>t possit. Iiidei)endently : 
 PuLMiiltt), si sustinGre non ]Y>tes.— >'^ dediuvre <'olior(l<, to place one's self at the liead of 
 ones cohorts.— »» See p. 181, li. 2m.— '^° eriiptidne pugndre, literally • to lii,'ht by means 
 of a sortie ', i. e. to meet the enemy oiUsidc Uk^ entrenchments.— 21 in my desperate 
 condition.— =- lo discover, to find out.-- -^ to let me liuow. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 425 
 
 method (Obs. 2. 8.). V>\xi final clauses denotinf/ purpose (final Ut-clauses), 
 almost alwitys are subject to the law of consecution, and their predicates (ex- 
 cept in verj^rare i^istances) do not assume tenses of present consecution if 
 depcialeni on preterites (see Obs. o, A. 1 ; Obs. G) ; and in many other in- 
 stances falling under the above-mentioned heads, only the one, not the 
 other system is admissible (see the Observations). But the use of logical 
 tenses is limited to the instances «lumerated above, and to those men- 
 tioned ^ flOO (Obs. 1-*]). If a dependent subjunctive cannot be assigned 
 to one of these exceptional instances, it must always follow the law of 
 con.sectition.* For the tenses which must be used if ahy]K)thetical period 
 is made dependent on predicates requiring the subjunctive, see B. 96. 
 
 Ons. 1. If the tenses ui preterite consecution would be in conflict with other gram- 
 maiicjd rules, or would ol)scure the meanin<:f .»f tlie author, or produce a logical incon- 
 gruity {.Rem. 94, No. 1), the dependent sijl)junctive, if denoting past time, ■niusthe placed 
 in \\\c jyerftct ; tlje action being thus represented a-f past in regard to (he authoi's time, 
 and its tense as logical'. Such perfect subjunctives are most frequent in relative 
 clauses, and in clauses introduced by quum and quamvis, and in all cases enumerated 
 No. 2. 3. 4, and 5 of AV//*. 94 (in which logical tense^* may always be u^ed without any 
 l)articnlar reason, hutmu^tt be employed if one of the above-mentioned reasons coexist): 
 
 (a) Relative clauses often require a predicate in the subjunctive if they are • preg- 
 nant', i. ^. if a subordinating conjunction is latent in them (Book VI.). If such predi- 
 cates according to particular grammatical rules absolutely require a perfect tense, the 
 subjunctive must as?ume this tense, ev<'n if the law of consecution requires an imper- 
 fect or pluperlect; or in other word- : Tlie law of conMcution mud yield to 'prohibitory ' 
 grammatical rules. Thus a clause fallinir under the rule Rem. 69 (according to which a 
 clause containing an action whose merits and character are desiirnated by the principal 
 predicate, must talie a })redicate in the same tense as that of the principal predicate) 
 Iniist have its predicate in the pt^rfect suhJKnctive if it is expressed in the form of a rela- 
 tive clause, and the principal predicate is in tiiat tense. Accorditig to the law of conse- 
 eiUion it wouM be in the imp'rfect ; but tliis law must yield to the higlier law of R. 69 : 
 III M. Bruto magnum /t/i/. Brute, dedecus geiieri vestro. qui . . accusatiOnem/flc/i^ar^- 
 ^'i'^ ; M. Brutus «?«.< a'sjn-at disgrace to your family. () Brutus, who (inasmuch as he) 
 made 'public accusing' a re^rular Imsiness. Cic. Brut. 31. 130. (Expressed by quum: In 
 Bruto ... dedecus ^//i/, quum accusatiOnem /a<:7j/<7r?7.)3— Tubero paullo etiam {fuit) 
 duiior. qui (}uidem in triumviratu.;w(//rarf/i/' VacatiOnem augures non habere ; Tubero 
 t/v/xeven a little harder, irho (inasmuch as he) declared in his triumvirshiu that the au- 
 gurs had no exemption (from judicial duties). Cic. Brut. 31, 117. With quum ; Tubero 
 durus /V/i/ . . . i\n\.\mjudicdcit). See Ex. 1. 2. 
 
 1 Some grammarians have strangely misunderstood the subject of logical tenses by 
 introducing such rules as these : 1) 'Vhc perfect subjunctive is used in histouic (i. e. pre- 
 terite) consecution ' when-erer the s^n^^'e requirtfS that tense and mood ' (Publ. School Graium. 
 p. 4(l(i'i. [If the word " tkesense ' is taken in the ' English sense ', the rule is decidedly false ; 
 if taken in the 'Latin sense' the rule is -useless, since it is just the question when the 
 Latin linguistic intuition requires tlie perfect subjunctive.] 2) When a clause subor- 
 dinated to a historic [ = strictly preterite] tense contains a proposition generally true 
 without reference to time, sucha clause may stand (>*ic) in the present subjunctive : as 
 Olitn laNoUABATi'u quam magnum TecCigaL sit parsimjoniaiS*\\\\\. Sch. Gr. p. 407). [The 
 author has overlooked the fact that his rule is only true under certain circumstances 
 (namely those enumerated K. 94), and hence we cannot wonder at the izrammatical 
 l)lunder {sit instead of essft) which he made in his example, by which he ruined a pas- 
 sage in Cic. Par. 0. 3, 49. We may say that by the above-mentioned two rules almost the 
 whole law of consecution is set a>ide, or surrendered to the license of tlie writer.] 
 — - Kxamples of such perfect subjunctives are not very numerous, since generally such 
 'cnnllicts may be avoided hy recasting the sentence. But tliey occur in the very best 
 authors, and are far too frequent tf) pronounce them, as some grammarians do, as 
 'marks of negligeiu styh^', or even to amend the te.vl, as many editors liave done, by 
 substituting tenses of preterite consecution. — s '|'|i(> sentence, with quum, according to 
 /('. «i9 niiirht have also taken the form dedecus erat quum factitdbal : and hence the au- 
 tiior miirht have used /'c/r/i/J/v-/' in connection with the relative qui, if he had used eratr^ 
 instead offuif. Thus the conflict with the law of consecution might have been avoided. 
 But in this instance tiie peculiar force of this whole form would have been made irrecog- 
 ni/.able, since the im|)erfect would have the appearance of a preterite by consecution, 
 not of a tense denoting identity of action according to Ji. 79. See § G06, Obs. 3. 
 
42G 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 427 
 
 
 (It 
 ;;[;- v;.i;i;,^ ^;;^:;l "Jitv:: ;:; 1';:^.,»^»."'-"^' t,». .^e iS„a «.. ... 
 
 «r.iin.r oil ut eveuiii" (acconliui,' to tlio rule Ji. o\). UBS. Z). , , , 
 
 uiKiuamauiiuis.iMa.aqiue^torrt/^/ e/^ /- I'yr '^^^^^^^^ fonim ' in mv boyhood, and 
 
 wVori'hJwa-- lei' w , U "'»"l'"- •".ant Hut 1„- u.-vvr .,n-«y /imf ^aw. "■' 1^1 "•r, 
 
 L , '* T.! , ;: hv l:::Jnuui:^ «.v ..iwivh ..-.ed u. chu..».. or .i.i. kind. If t '<.;i''' ->• 
 
 ..,.- not m'.».. to n.f.r .!..■ «..Ion ,o hi.o.vn .ime or to ,. 'l^.^'^lZ^^u^c^ 
 
 hill M« thai of llu* -iil>J<tl ul IK* t»nu« «pokfii ol. a- : I pilxo^) '^*' ,.» '"•" V" 
 
 '..... '.(.j,!,.,! ''"' — '//« \t nmhi hf done at H ••mail » 
 
 ,.,. l»', d a» -iihohUqne. helntf ftaiid *out of 
 
 ■ -^ , -A ■■' ' \\r n-pre-enttMl 
 . .,, v,\\h t(«i or 
 
 I (l<<«triiv ti'u' iMnni of nio eimnH*. 
 
 • 'ft' - , * • - I'tnte rontnin^ nn t^mn 
 
 •d wilhoiit Mnpalrlni: 
 I II 
 
 the «oiii i»f ihr 
 
 «'/ 
 
 «' 
 
 ((Ul 
 
 vvH" n rnrii 
 • ♦!. i.H. ; - 
 
 Ill III drniile an action 
 
 I 
 
 ,. .. ! --f 
 
 htJitinff Nt 
 '<'d HI» «n 
 
 lilt 1 1 1 1 
 i t . . 
 
 »dni»i»ft«Thi»firiMllrHit'ronlnln« 
 
 1 
 
 jndired (and still, jndtros, i. e. is of opinion) : ft/if, if was and is still; riflimvu. we paw 
 (ind >till .-ci'ji ; (^') if tlie irovernins pivteiite" i;* introdoced. not for its quality as a past 
 a^MJKii. JMit lor thi' c iisiquences rcsiillinir IVom it which arc represented asi)res( nt at the 
 spcjikcr's timi'. as uikIii^Ik you have heard (and hence khow) ; scriimf, he wrote (and 
 ijiiil is of opinion) : veid, I iiave c<»nie, and hei ce 'am present ' ; cognC'Vi, I learned (and 
 liencc • knoiv ') ; (c) if a preterite is repre-ented as havinjr always or never held uood 
 and as holdini,' or nut iiolilinir now. as nuttupiam dxlnturi, 1 have never doubted (nor do 
 I dou>)t now) ; semper crdd-idlruiit, they always believed (and are believing now). 
 Subjunctives dependent on such predicates are treated in the following manner : 
 {(I) If the action of the subjunctive is repn-scnted fi» present to the speaker, it maybe 
 either expressed as a lofjlcdl tense in the ;;/ex^//^, or as a tense by preterite consecution in 
 the i/nper/ect {v\cv\)t in the instance mentioned Obs. 5^ as : (Puesents) Quod genus 
 Ijoc militlim sit jutHnlvit IJibuhis (qui noluerit etc.). What kind of soldiers this {.<?, 
 l'>ibulu> Jwi'if/f(/ (when he relu-^ed etc.). Cic. Fam. 15. 1, 5 (He judged then, and would 
 judge n w if asked^. — Vh/inn/s cum quanta cerimonia non vestros polum w/a^t.< deos, 
 H>(1 etiam externos acci|)iiltis ; We have seen, (nnd see now) with what solemnil»y you 
 worship uox only your own i^ods hut also admit foreign deities. Liv. 29, 18. See Ex. 
 5-!). — (Impf:rpkcts :) Miiii .^i'onpsi hoc loco doctrlnani quandam juvenititi, qui esf^ent 
 o|)tiinjlies ; I hare t?-^ated (iu)f.\ am still consideriuL') in the interest of our young men 
 the question ' who l^long U\ (who constitute the class of) the optimStes '. Cic. Sest. 59, 
 119. See Ex. 10-1.3. — Sometimes both methods are combined in the same sentence: Non 
 ego ifjnanis quid resfKtnsRrux fact urnsve ease» qitcesivi. quippe quum pne xeferas temptare 
 te magis quain consulen! senatiim ; I a.<ked that question (and still am waiting for an an- 
 swer), not because / did not (and do i\o\) know whaiyour ansiver or action would be, see- 
 in<r tliat (since) ijou openly shoio that yt)U are rather trying (makinc: an experiment with) 
 than consulting the Senate. Liv. 2^, 45. Here facturus esses wWiVfi to the thoughts of the 
 speaker in the (jiast) moment of actually asking the question, and j)rcB te /eras to a 
 state present and lasting in the moment of speaking. 
 
 (b) If the action contained in the subjunctive \'^ coincident wifJi the (jov€r7)in/j preterite, 
 the subjunctive dependent on it is placed eitiier in the imperfect or in the perfect. The 
 iMPEUFECT is used if, l}y changinrf th> qorerninq preterite into an actual, present, the sub- 
 junctire would f>e a puesent. liiit the rEUFECT must be used, if by thus chanqing the 
 principal predicate, the dtpendfnt sutijiinctire would be a preteuite. as : Num qiiisquocl 
 bonus vir txstt (not fit or futrit) gratia-* disf^i/' unqiiam ? Z'i</ t-vera man thanklhe gods 
 fortteinq a good man * Cic. N. 1). 3, M. 87. (CliaiiL'ed into a present : ' Nemo gratias dis 
 aqit quod vir bonus .v?7' ; hence : eqit (\n(:)d.e.<set). But : Quis wnqnvax). dubifarit qiiin inre- 
 jjiiltiica nostril piimas eloqiicntia tenntnt semper ? Who ever doubted (and who <lo<-8 now 
 doubt) that elo(iuence always //«.v hebl iliemo-t prominent place in our cotmtry ? Cic. Or. 
 40, 1 11. (Chanircd into a present : Nemo dufAtat (juin tenuerit ; hence tenvejit cannot be 
 cliaiiL'ed into tenTret).—\\AH\ pugna inilicioywi/ (et nunce.'>0 quos milites qesserint^ animos ; 
 I'his baitley>//7/i.sV/<'(/ (and now turnishes) a proof of the courage with which the soldiers 
 bihared. iJv. 7. "i^i. (Cliaiiired into a present: Indicio est, quos animos qesserint). By 
 the imperlect gererent the fact would be represented as appearing so t'o those present 
 at the battle, which the author did not mean.— Sometimes of two very similar sentences 
 tlu' one, according.' to the al)ove-mentioiied rule requires the subjunctive in x\\o imperfect, 
 and the other in the perfct. as : Perltus ivostri juris nemo nnqiiam qui banc civitatem re- 
 tin(?re rdltf, in aliaiii se fivitilfein dicdvit ; No person versed in our law, if desirovs 
 to retain the ri^dit of citizenship in tiiis city, ever ha^ accepted the citizenship of an- 
 other. Cic. Balb. 12. .'iO. (Ciian^'ed into a ))rescnt : Nemo qui reiingre velit, se dicat ,' 
 hence: Tf^lUt, not volue/it) ; but : Me dicentem qui audierit nemo unquam tarn sni de- 
 tipiciens///t/ <piin s/» nlret erxlem modo se posse dicere ; Nobody who haj< heard me speak- 
 Inir ever undt-rrnfid himself so as not to hone that he might speak as well. Cic. Or. 2, 
 W». :¥\\. [Clianged into a prest-nt : Nemo, qiii me dicentem audierit (aud'irit accordinji 
 to p. :j()t), J{. 4"ii tam sui desiiiciens e/^t (iuin>y>^/f^ etc. Hence : audierit. not audiret ; and 
 >-;u nlre'. not sperarerit]. \\ c cannot hut admire the remarkable tact with which thecl^s- 
 nf il a:ithors. alilioii.rb not guided by any grammatical rulers, almost invariably used 
 the proper lenses* in relatitins wlierc so'delicate distinctions must be made. Our 
 modern Lallni^ls. even the best (as Muivtiis, Erasmus, Ernesti, Wyttenbach) frequently 
 oll'end against this rule. Several conventional phfases, properly falling under the rule 
 menlioncd almve, always require an iinp&rftct. Here belonirs the frequent formula 
 • (Su'pei (Vidiii (or audiOi)am. atidltum est) qiuim dicertt : 1 have often heard him say. 
 See p. a2(l. Ottn. 3. 4.— Ex. 14-lti. 
 
 » Pre 
 
 kind must bo distin'juished from the expressions mentioned R. 
 
 4*2. intplyini; an uniniernipled duration of a etate. Such predicates are always in tho 
 prt^rnf.^ » .Mudvl;; (in Thacljcr*» translation p. 312) considers qesserint an 'inaccurate' 
 cxprer<«lon. 
 
420 
 
 U8K OF THK SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 ■ 'nw of ronprrutlon muM ylH.I to th<. pro»MMlorv rnlo 7? M 
 
 .1 ir.nn ilifiMVrmli lumrtl. ^. t-Hri) III M- ... u (i 1 txi lit»»" 
 
 ' • ' r III lilt' rnnk" of liM ^ V . ,,111.-» 
 
 »••; „ „.,.,1 ,1,.. cl.iii-o would huv.^ »M-cM tyi. ;" U 
 
 1»|H, . » , , 11., ,. . «i... ! ("rHMt ; , . '"" 
 
 ••fl.T.' wliut» v»«ml.i n.^oU,- HI. a- ', ; that tlif fluhl uu» i-llH 
 
 ' •%'! r, liiivf Irll il 1 . 1, will. 
 
 (iiiTonUiiir to III»' rule li. M». Ob»., a». 
 
 (OUfliMitlM'i. ^, J, I ,,',,. p,.ru.(.i HUbJiiiicllvo c«»iiiriiry to 
 
 rU. 7M"/«. or *M| 4 i .1 . ,1.. t,,.w. iif 111.' «liiii-f l>» /<''/ mraiit to he ilio 
 
 rcu-KMinu 0« '''•\"!'V':7;;,\ '. , ..and to the mom.'..t of «rilli»; : S.«po 
 
 "1"»" " " r. ' • !;«« ) / ran., ' to tho foruin ; in my ..|.vhoud Jj-ul 
 
 ;i.r,nM./...M.o:.;n;.^,MU.yuu..oMhan.Uuin.^ 
 
 1I,M« 7"""» • • »^"*""! .^^""'l' "■''?;'; in \v. I am . to th onnn). (Juurn vtuixsem 
 colur.d.Mil ihow could I hc^ir t u-.n «M w; 1^^^ m^^^^^^ 
 
 w«>uld \H' A ti'inporal «InuH.' will, thf nu-aiil nu' alt r \ ';'*,"''' rvMi.tiii' tlu' tiim- of 
 applloi* to -aA/'/'/i//». -; Hoc III' "! "> • ' ' ' ,.' •' ' . .,,„ ,,f ,1 ,it m:m. he iras ltd tnto 
 
 t.ntla... tuan. : IW tin- .*ai..»' man iho •'- ' ' '''^ M'^^ fie. VWA,% 
 
 ,allho„rjh. a„U y.^ you at t he .n.,e ''^-^^ 1 J.^J^/^ ,' ! ' n I e^m .ubjunc.ive 
 
 Tin- pn-diratc of the clause 7-/// m ••/'•'/'"•'''"''' , ,,V ^ r ...ri'-.-nt tl e clause as a time- 
 (or perfect indicative). wouUl accord...^' '*' {V- r P. .^ w^tl. t ?e r c of adveoative 
 claiLe. ^^l.ile it j^ n.eant »"'-,«,,;;• i;:^?^^^;;;^^ ^,\o,. n'cr 
 ,,ropo.>tion ^V.^^f\ J\:'^^^^^^^^''t^^ wl.^ of this kind are quite fre- 
 
 ;:s.r{i;s:.:*:ic;;::.!d;.;;\!ni^^^^^ 
 
 „n.c,ed. Ten.es by c....s.-cut. on an-.tthvayH.>^^^ 
 
 d„es not mean 1«. refer the action ''V»'''*"^^'^^' '^v"'i".''J\',*' ' ,'/^^^^ ^enflt-is noit cei.. 
 
 iiiiiliiiliiliM 
 
 a ;»■«««< predicate by imi<ttcuhm {!!. W, No i . j, ''.*•''.;' V^"V ' ' , ^,„,„„a of 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 427 
 
 Jndi:«d (and Mill ^id-_'Os, i. e. if of opinion) : fmt, it was and 1? ptill; ridimni:, we ^aw 
 i-.nd Mill M-e.> • ?•) if the -overniiiir preterite is introduced, not for its qual.iy as a past 
 jM-ii..n hnt lor th- c i.s. q.ience- reHnliinir Irom it u Inch are represented as present at the 
 .pe,iker-s till..-, as ionhl'K vou have heard (and hence k>.ow); scnpnt, he wr.)te (and 
 Hill Is ..f opinion) ; rnn, 1 l«»ve cine, and hei ce ' am present ; cognuvi, I learned (and 
 hence • know ") ; (C if n preterite is r«.pn>ente.l as havin- always or "j-'vcr held -ood 
 nnl «s h.'ldin- or not holdin- now. ns nuwqvam dufAtari, 1 have never doubted (nor do 
 I doiitit noir) T «tniptr cndidirunf, they always believed (and are believing now). 
 Subiunclivet' dependent on 8uch predicates are treated in the followini? manner : 
 Oi) If the actlcm of the subjunctive is represented ta^jrre.^ent to the speaker, it maybe 
 eiher evpresM-d as a lo(/ic<it (cose in the pie.<€>»t, or as a tense by preterite consectition in 
 the //rt/>*V/W/iexcei.t in the instance n.enti.med Obs. 5), as : (Pkesents) Quod genus 
 ho,- mil.ti.m nl j'^rirarU liihnlns iqui n.duerit etc.). What kind of soldiers this is 
 llibulus »V/ri7f^/ (vvhen he relu-ed etc.). Cic Kam. 15, 1. 5 (He judged then, and would 
 iud"e n w if asked^ — Vidimus cum quanta cerimonia non vestros solum w/tf/t* deos, 
 s.d'eiiamexternos accipiJItis ; We have seen (and see now;) with what solemnitty you 
 worship not onlv vour own gods but also admit foreign deities. Liv. 29, 18. ^ee hx. 
 5_«» — /iMPKUKKCTs :) Mihi stmipsi hoc loco doctrlnam quandam juventuti, qui es.<eni 
 optimises ;'l//ffr6 fnated iam\ nm still considering) in the interest of our y"'"i?? me^ 
 the Question ' who Monr/ to (who constitute the class of) the optimStes . Lie. best. 5y, 
 119 See E.x 1(1-13 — Sometimts both methods are combined in the same sentence : ^on 
 e<ro' ifinanis quid resmnsilru^ factumsve essen qumlvi. quippe quum pne te/^m.«f temptare 
 te ma<'is quam consulere seniitum ; I a.<ked that question (and still am waiting for an an- 
 pwerrnot because /^/i'/ not (and do wox) knotv what your ansicer or action wouldbe, see- 
 in" that (since) you oimily show that you are rather trying (making an experiment with) 
 than consuliin-' the Senate. Liv. %% 45. ll^ircfa^trmis esses refers to the thoughts of the 
 speaker in the (past) moment of actually aslcing the question, and pr(E te /eras to a 
 state present and lasting in the moment of .^7J(f«A-i«,7. .,,.„,. . , .. 
 
 (b) If the action c<mfained in the sul)junctive ^coincident 7nfh the (jovennng preterite, 
 the Kul>iunctive dependent on it is placed either in the imperfect or in \\\c jy^rject. Ihe 
 iMPEiiFECT is used if. Inf changing th>- governing jvetente into an act uaf. present, the sub^ 
 iunclirt would he a pkesent. Uiit the pkufkct must be used, if by thus changing the 
 minnpol predicate, the dependent suf>junctire would be a preteiute, as : Isuin quis quod 
 bonus virw*^'^ (not sit or fuerit) g.atias dis egif unquam ? iHd ever a man thank the gods 
 for being a go.xl man ? Cic. N. D. 3, 3<i. 87. (Chanired into a present : ' Nemo gratias dis 
 ar/it quod fir bonus sil ' ; hence : egit quodesset). But : Quis unquam duUnint qiiin in re- 
 publico nostril primas elocpi.-ntia tenu.nt semper ? Who ever doubted (and who do-s now 
 doubt) that eU)(|uenceaiwavs/i(w/^fWthemo>t prominent place in our country ? Cic. Or. 
 40 141 (Changed into a present : Nemo dubifat quin tenuerit ; hence ^^/meri/ cannot be 
 chan-ed into tenereO.-M.vc pu-nu indicio/wi/ (et nunc e.t) qnos milites gessenni^ animos ; 
 This battle furnished (and n-.w lurnishes) a proof of the courage with which the soldiers 
 behared LiV. 7, ?^^. (C'han-ed into a present: Indicio est, quos aminos gesserint). By 
 th.- imiicriect 7fmvflnhe fact would be represented as aDpearing so to those present; 
 at the battle, which the author did not mean.— Sometimes of two very similar sentences 
 the one according to the above-mentioned rule requires the subjunctive in the imperfect, 
 and the other in the perfct. as : Perltus uostri juris nemo unquam qui banc civitaiem re- 
 linCrer(7/eMn aliam se civiiatem (/?wr^^• No person versed in out; law, it tf^^?m/« 
 to retain the right of citizenship in this city, ever has acceptfd the citizenship of an- 
 other Cic lialh l-> 30. (Ciianjred into a i)resent: Nemo qui retingre velit, se dicat ; 
 hence: vellet, n<.t volneiV) : but : Me dicentem qui audierit nemo unquam tarn sui de- 
 sniciens fait quin speraret eOdem modo se posse dicere ; N obody who has heai'dme speak- 
 in-r K'\ev vndrr rated himself so as not to hope that he might speak as well Cic. Or. 2, 
 89" 3(11 rciian"ed into a present : Nemo, qui me dicentem audient (auaivtt according 
 to'ii m It 43)"tain sui despiciensf^/ quin. v>^r^< etc. Hence : fl?/rfi^/'t^ not ««/rfir^^ ; and 
 sntrare>\\o\ sperarent]. We cannot but admire the remarkable tact with which the cl^s- 
 Pic.il authors, alihouirh not iruided by any grammatical rules, almost invariably used 
 the uroner tenses in relations where so delicate distinctions must i)e made. Our 
 modern Latinist.s. even the b.-st (as Muretus, Erasmus, Ernesti. Wyttenbach) frequently 
 off.-nd a.minst this rule. Several ccmventional phfases, properly falling under ihe ru e 
 mentioned above, alwavs require an imperfect. Here belongs the frequent formula 
 •(SiepeWt'/rfi/MoraudiCham, audltum est) quum (iic£;-e/; 1 have olten heard hiin say. 
 See p. 32G, Obs. 3. 4.— Ex. 14-lG. 
 
 '^Predicates of this kind must be distinguished from the expressions mentioned R. 
 49 imulvin«' an uuinterrutited duration of a .-tate. Such predicates are a ways in the 
 present.— ^ Madvijj (in Thacher's translation p. Ui) considers gesserint an inaccurate 
 expression. 
 
4-8 
 
 USK OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 a^endenm; You hare ^^^?^, <=;"'' ^^„^7 SZJx.i\^^^defen,J.re ' is nnt.nor to 
 earh case. Cic. Finn. 1, U, '21 0><_>t ''o' ' 'ff^f/';; ;" \Z. oh caus^am patreiu liliiis rxr?</e- 
 
 7i^ ; Thtre A«s' Oeen no li-a^.m rt ^I^/f ' ^\. \ fY> " a ill v from two rcanonP : lirst accord- 
 father. Cic. Uo.c. Am. 22, 01 (oc.W^^£v, d IH^ a.n > ^ 
 
 designation of a V^^^^}''"}^-^''' \^' '^ ;.^:;u.,,.^ such siihj.nictives always require a 
 the Troven.in- ,..etent,e is a pnrelv ^^^^Vv n/r t t r.ne e--ot au(iuw>>r< qiue Cortimi acta 
 pluperfect, as : ilnnin res in ^'J'';'; '^,, ^C' f ^''\'?"i^) ^iu^^caudivuLs belon-s to a 
 Imd iuoi dnf). Cic ad. ^;'''y>;:J'';VVwh "lo^^^^^^^^^^ happened on a certain day (I 
 
 luirrative in which the author J!;''a^*,:,.'\J^; ^, '//yiY.ei ae^ ^subjunctives are of the 
 
 heard on that day = «''^'^^^^"^^'^i.TT,^ ^^l' ^ j, \„^K^^^ the Unie of the ^peaker 
 .anu..m;urc.jsthcMr,overnn>,^ to tui. ca«e, as m 
 
 (ashx. I.-ID). f?."' :;'«''.,,.,, Honod .'xaniT)Ks. and ill Ex. 20. . . 
 
 lerues, u».- i,w..^.viv .- V..„ii 1, iM-.'^iMit-Dcrrect The alter always im;iim'f> i"^ "— — 
 
 torical preterite ^^"^/'V tf 1 .- of • nJ int ten'e hdon- .lot u. the perlect tense a« 
 a pl•e^ent, while .n Latin the dea ( t f 1»^.;,*^ ' ^.;.^;^''^.., i^itams. This connecln-n with 
 s,/ch, hut to the connection whch ^ '^^^^'^^^^ ^^ f/ ^^^^^^ is not pe.-nliar to 
 
 the idea uf a present ^^l'^^'' " ":l " \V k an im S^^^^ "^ -ranunariau has yet -one 
 
 the i^erjed alone, but nunj eve. c u . w ith an ' f/>^ /f« ;; . „p explaining such ro.nh.- 
 
 even a sinvlanty wiihan hii'^ri'^h Jl^.^' '•;,;'' ';,.,,ivb..I()n«'"toth(>se preterites which, 
 spond to Knu'lish present periects ^, ^t , V' ,= c d tt <e^a^^ Q»es/us I plures te testis 
 ak-,nnlingtoOBS.2,mayrequireoracl. og^ul^^ • S ,,,„,j,iahud (then and 
 
 habere de Voitinul 4>uim qm.t m eS t bu^ p^^^^^ , ^ Voltinian tribe th .n you 
 
 th.re. and so you do .wir)u^ » \ "r.^i^^^^^l'V^Vie id r r ///. e<f ne e-o, iracundia ahqua 
 /ia^/m/riec/ votes there, f:'^- ^,; h T/. /.;.;,,// A;// Vo,/ indeed /-^«r (not : ^ lave you 
 
 ;nm;Veen in .h\. Pe.-sian war. Nep. Them ^;^^:.^^;:;^^;^^^'" me ] Thus j^^^car^ (hi 
 Ihe fact vvU be v^w^;^ trom the s anc^po u^ , "ois 5, B) «i^ many of the perfects 
 OBs 2, «), • ^f '/;''> -$^'^^5^',^^ „olt^aS for e^^^^^ of En^dish present perfects. 
 
 ■ * Madvi. (p. 34r^i^her) consi<iers the perlect/..ri^ ,^,*,r;\'o clol^e^uTe'^^^^^^^ 
 
 in.. Unit Cicero, when he said (or r»tlKT zr/'O/.) .M'^/. nea^ J > ^^^^^ 1,^ 
 
 I 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 429 
 
 (P. n^. and hence are r.a^Pr^^nr.cor^,o.a^^^^^ 
 
 in exile) far from our country and rom it. Ij,^; a place v^^^e^e /«^.^./J ^^^.^ f,„.^, ,„i,. 
 an 'SO (hat we are ffrowinrf old). Lu. -^,^' ^v ,,V. I'V'. ...ji, , ,, closer examinaticm. be 
 junctives ot pr.tenU consecunou '^j;^/^^^^" 1^/^ Man A(« 
 
 \::^^:^:^&:;^r^^t.^t t. ;sf s^^:?^ e, i. see ex. 21. 22. 
 
 ?^ntl^"Il^v;::^ln^- the subjunctives dependent on the Idnd of preterites 
 ui^itUml'^O;^: i;;^.^n- placed - tenses c^iM^EXKruTK^c^^ ^^^^.^^ 
 
 1. Ifthedependriitsubjunctive IS the predicate la FiNAL^^ predicate is 
 
 mid intro,luced by W, .., <?'/o, or ^.^^;:^:^l'^';^^Jl"'e. fvk.vU even if a 
 almost always in the '^'i'^^«'f:^-CT f the g^wr mn^^^p^^^^^^^ i ^^^^^^ is, that a 
 
 present is contained in U by ""l''' f / ' ' „, f vJJore or wHh the act itself, and not at 
 Purpose connected with an 'return n^-tbep^^ «'" manserit, e-o. ne 
 
 \\n'^ present time' wl.ich is «//c/f/'-v/w^/ , as q un Aico^a^^^^^ has remained in the 
 
 Ufnorau'tis esse al quas pacis ^""^ 't'o «es u xos i. .^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 enenn's catnp. / ''«'•^,^'>'^'^/" f 'Vhe c^i se 'Sf 7 iS^/ir has a ^>./im/ tense, 
 conditions <.f peace. l,iv. 21, 13. . .^ \^„^ ,^^»^^^8^ l^^^ accordinir to the 
 
 while the final clax^sv. ^ ?,e tr/?>oranti.. ."J"r:'/;?,\y " ? S relinqneret natQ- 
 
 law of pn-terite con^ectit-on.- (?/;c«./ \}!}'}^''^T\T)\^o[ xhT\l should relinqvl^h 
 ram, sed qua. '^^^^^'';f^ V!•^•'J,.^^^t,^1'\l^ Noc em un^^ ad consultandum svmpsL qui 
 nature, but to preserve it. C >c.t '"•'•/?' '^.- in«tanti"Vacfrfm ; 7 //«re /a^<'/< one night for 
 
 i. EiMo'a'V hiiiterrMl.-:. altlimiL'li '''■", \V"'"';^,^;,S',:,,j,,^i„,„ ,K,-venms. nobi^qae 
 
 '''/1S'.e;u;.:^'«r"c 'n-"ti..n .are „.e,, .„t «^-^^ P-^«*^ S^Sll'^a.r.'qT.f^'",!! 
 .iV.;V,lVT„'r,;\rjr''^^?«"l.".S.U>'.' RlSi"ai.^,"as ruf.ai. ..c. Se„, B^-u. ...4.- 
 For Ex. of preterite consecution ^^ec pJO.i. persons who'; tu solus ifivenfns es 
 
 2. WUh'ioventi (reperti) '['! 'J'\;^.,.^^^^^^^^ subjunc- 
 
 gui, 'you are the only ""%^\*'V • .,)^,' .,,\' V-^^^r 7?^'/ecY, but is more usually In the 
 live (see p. 5.51 foil.) may be in ^ '^J^'^^f J ^o «tri^^^^^^ 
 
 imperfect. Whenever these express onsh^ f, 'Tb. t m'fre ^^^ the former : Sex. 
 
 inid.-rstood). either he ^"^P^''^^ . "[ »'S'J.^^^^^ hvenfus est nemo; 
 
 Titio damnSlto qui istam ^'-^i '-=; '^!^"^ ,,'^^^^S^aS w^^^ dared to have this ima.ire in his 
 7V,ere wa^^ no^^// 'V«^J:^'/-„^.ll"'* m ,!!3 rXtVi sunt qui uullis pnemiis propositus vitam 
 possession. Cic. Kab. Perd ^v2->--.r"'f .^?':;,!^?/^^)'^ i/^en (are) />««' ^^•ho, without the 
 "uam In.stium telis objecerint (or p/otcreut) • J^^^. .f„^/"|,7"i;f en4y. Cic. Balb. 10, 26. 
 promise of rewards, exp<.se their I'ves to the weap ns of J^nc em y^^^ 
 1- Pompejus unus iov^dvs est (luem '^"^ i y«rMs suas^c^^ ^^^ ^ -^ 
 
 Pomp.'v iv the only one who-e c..ni.nu' to the c^ '^| «^ « , ^•;;^,^„\ gaudeant isnecessary 
 (Still) 7-^7/ir7/j/'^m/ withjoy by ^»l^,^^<-;^„- ^^^f;/,„,,e^^^ ^' ref?rrin- to^the time of the corn- 
 here.' because gaudmn or f/f'?;^^^*^' ''VTv^u s Qtt fasfcs popu^ iovpropone- 
 ^;^:ii;^^^^f^^^'S^^'^^^^^ ftie (berets of the) calendar 
 to the people. Cic. Mur. 11, 25. See Ex. 25-28. 
 
 OB. 6. If .ul^unctives ave dependent on those i^,^;...!^ ^^^^ 
 
 represent an action as l''-^"cedinjz anoiluM aUioiK ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ K ^^^^^^ ^ attached to 
 
 (p 800, R. 43), tliey always take ^^ns6.?oy/?^^€nJ«^^^^^^^^ quis ex principibus m 
 
 lucli perlVcts. have their predicates 'I' hf/^f^^/' /^^^^^^ qui et causam pro- 
 
 coucilio dixit se ducem fore, qui sequi ^^j/'' ^'' '-f fj^^^'^^j ^ St he"is goin- to be the leader 
 bant et h-minem ; Whenever anyone ^^^^'^^^^ tS fol ow 1 m? to^n-i^ll their narr^s, aU 
 
430 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 r'i 
 1/ 
 
 qni afferat aRnnm quom immolCmns, num is* mihi ainins aflfertnr qm etc.? When w« 
 send (have 8ciU) honubody/or a lamb to hacriflce it, will a lamb be bioujrht which etc.? 
 Cic. Div. 2, IT.— QuifiOfit lam cnpidiis in coiriiosceiuijl renim natQrtl ur,si ei coiiteniplaiili 
 les (li'MiijisiimMs f iibito sit lUirituni periculum patriae, ciii tiuljvenlre j)as>!it (in>t posxet), nou 
 ilk! omnia rdin(/nat atqnv. ab)icia( f Cic. OtV. 1, 43, ir)4.— If Mich peilects take the form 
 of an ahladve absolute, the clau>es dependent on them, likewise take tcnces of present 
 consecution, furmiiiL,' thus an exception to the rule R. 92. as : (^iii plurimot» ex hi- inier- 
 fecerunt, rtbltU in "|)ul)iiciini coniibus, qua' nut tesiimouio, n ai:nain lerunt laudem ; 
 They are ^reatlv praised afttr f/irinr/ {aheii they (jive) the horns to the coramuuity, bo as 
 to serve as evidence. Cics. B. G. 0, ^8. See Ex. 43. 
 
 Obs. 7. Subjunctives dependent on 9. perfect f,uh}iinctire (E. 94, No. 3). alwqya assume 
 lo'^ical tinst's (of present consecution) if tiic j)crffct subjunctive has a jxUennal jiresent 
 force accordini: to U. 79, Ou;*. 2, as : Vix ulllus geiiiis huminem inrenerin cujus (elicitil- 
 tem fortfluie Metelli coinpavs; You will hardly llnd a man in any nation ( = hardly a 
 man can be found etc.), whose happiness you could cornpar^" with MetellusV fortnne. 
 Veil. 1 11.— Utriim j)oeta^ Stoicos deprardiint an Stoici poetis dedevint auctoritatem 
 nt») facile diJ-erhn : I voidd not liki to say (W is diftimll to decide) whether the poets 
 spoiled the Stoics, or whether the Stoics inflianced tiie poets. Cic. N. I). 3. 3'^. 91.— But 
 Avhen the poverning subjunctive perfect has the force of a preterite (except, of course, if 
 it implies a present according to Obs. 2), the tense of the d<pendcnt subjunciive, accord- 
 ing to the genrral rules, should be determined hy preteHle consecution, which, indeed 
 islrrequently the case, as: (^uaTendum est num tanta egestas ewvcx opprt»serif \\i sacra- 
 rium suum spolidnt, ut deos patrios rendtnt ; We should examine whether he was in 
 siuch straights that he shoi/ld have robbed Ids sanctuary and ,s/io>i d have sold the gods of 
 his fathers. Cic. Verr. 2, 4, ti. — But olten'such subjunctives are. likewise, placed in the 
 prrfect subjunctive, thus agrecjing with their governing predicate in tense by attraction-, 
 as : Rest:it ut hoc dubitC'mus. ufer potiiis Sex. Itosicum occidt^rif, is ad quem morte ejus 
 diviliie tv//^?7///, aut is ad quem mendicitas ; It remains for us to consider which of 
 the two more prol)ably killed Sex. Koscius. he to whom wealth came by his death, or 
 he to whom begtrary (came). Cic. Rose. Am. 31, 88. Sometimes (Ex. 33) such subjunc- 
 tives are placed in tha present, if represented as present to the speaker.- Ex. 29-.33. 
 f Obs. 8. Hi/]X)thetical imperfect snt/jmictives are Xo^WixWy prexenfs (diceret si vireret — 
 nnnc diceret si nunc viveret) ; and hypothetical pluperfect sabjunctives are logical perfects 
 or imperfects (dijcisset = dictnrus fnit or era/). Hence it should seem that subjunctives 
 dependent on i)reterite hvpotheticals, according to the i)rincij)le explained iu Obs. 2, 
 ou"-ht to admit of logical tenses (in the present and perfect). But this is generally not 
 ihtTcase. Subjunctives dependent on preterite hypot helicals take the tenses of preterite eon- 
 seciition. In order to know whether an imperfect or a pluperfect must be chosen, we 
 must conceive the hypothetical imperfect or pluperfect chan<;ed into a perfect or imper- 
 fect indicative, iwmX give to the di'pendent subjunctives in the hypothetical period the 
 same tenses as thev would ttike in this connection ; but so that for a present or perfect 
 indicative, winch the clause may Uike outside the hypothetical framework, an imjierfect 
 subjunctive must always be su])stituted, as ; Si solos co^ diceres miseros quil)us inori- 
 enduin exsef, nemiuein tu quidem eOrum, qui viverent, exciperes ; If you wo'dd callxm- 
 happy tho~e only wiio must die. you wmdd except none of those that are living. Cic. 
 Tusc 1,5. [Chanokd according to rule : Uixisti miseros eos quibus monendum e^i; 
 excepisfi eos qui vivunt : hence : moriendum esset, riverenf].— Qui ib-ri poiuit nisi homi- 
 nes ea quie ratiOne invem-'^oent, eloquentia persuadCre potuissent ? How could this be the 
 case if men had not been able to make plausible by their eloquence what they have derived 
 bv their reason? Cic. Inv 1. 2. [Chanoeu : Homines persuadCre poterant qiite mtiOnc 
 ihxenerant (this pluperfect is required accordin<r to p. 330, Obs. 4 and 5): hence : inre- 
 imsent\— Ys'O fi\ me non improbissime Dolabclla tracta-set, f/wfti/aw^-m fortasse utrum 
 remissior essem. an summo jure contenderem ; If Dolabella had not treated me most out- 
 ra-^-eously I would, perhaps, have doubted whether to restrain myself or to engage m a 
 strife to the full extent of my right. Cic. Att. Ifi. 15, 1. [Dubitabam utrum contenderem, 
 acf'ordiu" to R. 85, Obs. 8, e.^— II the bvpothetical predicates are expressed by jyresenfs 
 (with th«" force of hvpothelical imperfects; see B. VI.), f fie omecu lion must be present : Si 
 forte nuivreretur quie esset ax^ imperatOris, constituendum puldrem quis esset imperfttor ; 
 si .rrammaticus, si jmCta qumafur. po^sitn similiter explicare quid eOrum quisque 
 profitedtur. Cic. Or. 1, 48. 210-212. See Ex. :34-:39. 
 
 Obs 9 The rule Obs. 8 is often set aside for the reason» mentioned Obs. 1. Clauses 
 with quum ( = seeing that, ov since) if the predicate w.n- placed in the jmtierfect sub- 
 junctive would Ireqiiently be mistaken for hypothetical clauses (gnum being often = ^» 
 in hvp.the'ical p.riods) : and hence such clauses regularly have predicates with jn-esfnt 
 con-ecution : Tu istud nisi lingeres, sic aireres ? pr:esertim (/uum alienOrum pericula de- 
 fendere acerrime soleas, tuum negligeresf Would yuu proceed thus if it were not a licii- 
 
 DETEKDENT SUBJUNXTIVE. 
 
 431 
 
 t^on. cace ' Considering that you u,lL -;lJ^t^«i^-f^t-S^^ S^t^^^^f P^f 
 
 c^r;hc^t:Hod!rS:^epK;Sou -^-----^-^.r; "predicate of the 
 OBS 10 If a quum-clause is 0>"-^^'^^dJ;.>'rr^'Vhe rules pOS^m eircum- 
 
 r«l H-uis es ince the author meant to i;;?''^;;^ ?\,f ^^^l "ssed hy ' defendit ' belonging to 
 Jonmr period in the life of li^^^'^'l^'^^^^'^^S ? /.At' analogical te4e, might have be^^^^ 
 
 mmmmmmm 
 
 ^fe^Z^IW^Cr^v^ryrJ/r^^uVT bf Mfended .o' I. e. th. bound. 
 
 \ 
 
432 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 nnuloiu» cnrandum. Cic. Tusc. 1, 41, 107.— 2. Ciinxmix'^ fuit minfica vi^ilantiil, qni puo 
 toto rons^uirmi bouinnni non ridetifK lb. Fani. 7, yO. 1.— 3. Quid eraf (\\wa' me p.rseqiuj- 
 reiitur in c;i>ti!i fiiium=' i-^'o itc-r ita fecenm* nt me omnium civiUltnm ma^Mf^triltus (in 
 itinera) convonlrcni^. lb. 3,8,4.-4. Hoc quum« rcvCra Uk .f\i^t quum «^t-mpcT ita 
 hfJntuin ofj,<err(t(uiiiqued(, iribQni plebis c-apuf/w^ «?;'//,/» hoc'", lb. J 2.3, .1—5. ^on ea 
 sunt commisHi^^ qme .-ine pincnlis inj:ontibu>'"'^ expirin'3;>o.v.v«/«C. Liv. 28. 2. — b. (Quails 
 vin.s creare vos cousnles decmf^*, t'utit» e.^t dichim. lb. 24, 8.- 7. Accepisti^-' (,m uhmis 
 in republicjl.sif .«tatus>«. Cic. Fam. 1, •), 21.— 8. Multis belli casibus»' didia. quando pii<;- 
 nunduml^ quando ahstinendum pu-ml nt. Llv. 44,3«).- 9. Membns ntimur pnusquam 
 didicimioi cuius ea utilitiliisia causa habulmxs. Cic. Fin. 3. 20.— 10. Me meje lortQiui'.-'» 
 
 lb Mil 13 — 14 Nee, vrro PoinpC-jus mhi'm rtrif/i/iP" quod earn tnCri^J non ;xM\ve/3"^ 
 ne'e Itaiiam (jno'd vSl pellenfi/r. lb. Alt. 8. 11. 2.— 15. Numqnam mibi defutOnim^a ora- 
 tiOm-m^* cndi'/i, nou quo^* verba umqnam j)olius (luam ics^" tj-ercutrim^''. t>ed etc. 
 Liv 28 27 — 10. A Balbo (odnuidvertidi quam nmlta dicta slut. Cic. N. D. 3. 1, 4.— 
 17 Stepe et multum cogitrici, bonlne an mail plus attulerit^'* hominibu^f eloquentioe 
 Ptiuliuin. lb. Iiiv. 1, 1.— 18 Nunc, quoniam qnibus rebus adductns»» ad causam acces- 
 se/i/n*^ clei/ion.sfr~iri,i\\ceiu\'.m\ estde conteniione*' nostril. 11). I'iv. C»s. 3.— 111. Credo 
 e-'o vos audlise quemadmodum privsidia IJomana ab Siculis nrctnnrmta*^ et oppressa 
 dnt*^ per hOs dies. Liv. 24, 38.— 20. Initium qnod'^ buic cum niatre ///f;t^ audi.^(i.f. 
 Cic CIu 6 17 — 21 Nulla est gens ex quil nobis intei'dictum sit ut ne quern asciscere {to 
 rec'eire) civeiii {as a citizen) jw^smim. lb. Ualb. 13, 30.— 22. Krplonitvm eH*^ omnibus 
 quo l()co<« causa tua nt. lb. Verr. 2, 5. <)3.— 23. Ad eamne rem vos 0"(i>ces) dettcti 
 estU nt eos cond'jnnarTtl-^ quos slcarii" juL'ulare*» non iiotuissent 'i lb. Hose. Am. 52.— 
 24 Iccirco in banc urbem r<^//2.«/i nt hujus urbis jura ro/v/z/z/yMms domesticflque'»*' im- 
 nuiniiate no^me civitiltis humanitjltem inquinare^^^ f lb. Dej. 12, 32. -2.\ In omnibus ee- 
 culls pauciores viri repertinint qui suas cupiditates* quam qui imstium cr)pias rincerent. 
 lb Fam. 15 4 15.-20. Jnrenti niut multi qui non modo pecuniam. ^ed vitam etiam pro 
 patritl profimdere-'ii parilti esS'-nt. lb. OlT. 1. 24.-27. Solus tu iinentiix f-xcui non satis 
 fuerit corn'^en-^'- testamenta vivOium nisi etiam resrinderessa niortunrum. lb. ^ err. 
 2. 1 43.— 28. Ecquis e.< inventus postca prietor qui idem illud Htiard^* f lb. ib.— 
 29 Nequc in quadrTicis^^ eum secundum nmnfraiufim^^ aut tertium qui vix e carccri- 
 bns" €xie7-it quum palmam"" jam primus acceperit. Ib. Brut. 47, 173.- 30. Nc inj^enio 
 quidem qui pr(Kstit<nt facile diitrim C. ri>r)ni. Ib. Brut. 78, 272.— 31. Id ita/(/« 
 notum omnibus ut nemo tam rusticus^" liomo Ijumam roneiit'^'^ quiii sciret ]\\n\*^ om^ 
 
 ""MJanTuius was elected consul in place of his predecessor a few hours before the con- 
 sular term closid.-- - what was the reason that.— 3 eince, considerim,' that.— ^ factrem 
 orfecUsem. would represent the clause as temporal.— ^^ addressed me.— ^ since.- ^ n<t<tt, 
 and ol}serratum esset would nmke the clause dependent on the time of pos-^erunt, repre- 
 sentin-' it as (piasi-suboblique, and as conceived by the tribunes.— *» parajrraph.- >» to 
 iiiirodiice — ^^ the Inllowint,'.— " not such crimes have been committe<|. — ^'^ without a 
 formidable (exemplary) reparation.— i^ to expiate.— '* it behooves.— "^ you have heard. 
 
 — 1« position.— 17 bv'many cases of war. i. e. i)y a j^cat experience in war.— i"' it is ad- 
 vi-iable to tb^lit.— '" the purpose for which we have them (according' to /i?«m. 85. Ob*.8. />). 
 _2o f-it<\—-'^ p(fiiifet iw.. I am dissatisfied.—-'^ either "your kindness,' or 'your energy'. 
 
 — '-^3 clianire actively : has caused it - is the cause.— •* in both descriptions of (leiial) 
 actions — ^^ the i)iiiic!ples which.— '■'« Plato wrote (has written) the golden words.— 
 37 larpi Quale.<, of the same quality as.— '^'> you have obtaiNtd it, i. ^. you iire in a t«itua- 
 tiou.— '-» vou need not lie aiiaid.— ^" has left (being still absent).— 3» hold (against Caj- 
 e.,f) —32 'I'he imp subj /w.sw/! represents the action as coincident with the preterite rellr 
 quit, and not witli the present contained in it by implication.— 33 to fail.—»* language.— 
 35 _ jiQfi q„od — 38 facts.— 3^ I have practised, i. e. dealt in. F^ercuerim would remain 
 a preterite even if aedidi were changed into a present.— 3f has been conducive to. 
 The action was past at the time of ' thinking '.— 3» See li. 85, Obs. 8, (f).- '•«' I have be- 
 come connected with this case (preceding the ' d^mor.strdre ').— *^ about the que.-tious at 
 i-.8U<- between us.— •»- have been cut ott".— '•3 to destroy.— ** the rel.itions a»» they were 
 in the be'Tiniiiii"' between him and his mother.— *'"> it is getjled in the minds ol all.— 
 «<« sia<'e (of the trial).— *' cutthroat.— -"Mo slay.— ■«9 by the enormities practised m 
 your native C(mntry.— so to soil.— " to shed.— ^'^ to correct, i. e. to falsify.- " get aside 
 (£ e by an nnjur-t judicial decision).—** literally : vho ' edicted' that same thing, i. f. ' who 
 admitted rules like this in his edict'.— '^ race with the quadilr/a (four-horse chariot).— 
 6« to reckon.- ^^ the starting point in a race.— *» the prize (>take).— *» rustic, t. e. in- 
 experienced in citv-life.— «<> this periect subjunctive is nec«'ssary on account ol the pe 
 culiar relation of the Ut-clause. See li. 95, Ob3. «, B.— «» judicial acta. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 433 
 
 nia pra?loriP nntn» ChelidOnis gubernilri. Ib. Vorr. 2, 5 13.- 32. A ideSmus quanta 
 Ita pecunia///m/ qua; y>o/^/m< Hejum ab humanitate, ab religirme deducere-. Ib. 2, 
 4 (1-33 Vstat ut hoc dubitCmus uter potius Sex. Roscium oc«(/^n^ is qui ardens 
 a'vaiitia hratur infestusS in suos. an is qui semper ita r^xent ut quai.5tum* no.*.vt/, nul- 
 lum lb Hose. Am. 31, 88.- ai. Si in secundis rebus* bonam quoque mentem darent 
 non ea solum qme (venis^ent, sed etiam ea qure cvenire ix>.wn< reputaremus^. Liv 
 i 30 -^ 8i asp rius' in quosdam homines invehi vellem. quis non con cederet uti^o^ 
 quoruni ;cclerum'fu.Ore« xiMus esmn, vocis \\h^n^xcUyerstnngerem^^ f Cic Sest. 14. 
 
 - 30 Aunim et arg<-ntum, a^s, ferrum, Irustraii nattira ?enuisset ^ n.si eadem docu^ 
 isset quemadmodum'3 ad eHrum wnn^^'^ peiremretur. Ib. Div. 1, .51, lib — 3«._^"« 
 vitafuisset Priamo si ab adolescentiji .*d,*w< quoseventusi* senectutis m€« haMuruoJ 
 lb 2 <1 22.-38. Hoc quum viderent, illud quidem non <??/a7-«A-;?fcui hono^ ^ fmsset. 
 Ib" liosc Am. 31. 86.- 39. Hoc scribere, pra^«ertim quum dc philosophia c^mft^m/i, 
 
 Znu'utT^m. nisi idem placCret Pametio !''• <^ff- V^"^ ^n^'T^V^s'^t'^i ' 40' 
 Or .38 132- Ball) 14 33- Fam. 13, 1.5; Plane. 4, 9 ; Pis. 29, 71 ; Or. 2, 21, 89J.— 4U. 
 Qu'o'nam modo audifl-tur Slysus^^ aut Phryxi» Athenis qutim *:"am Demost^henes^jm^t- 
 ref>n--^o ,it putidus? Cic. Or. 8, 27.- 41. Nee de PerMO reticaisset^' Gracchus quum ei 
 Fannius de Menelilo Maratheno ohjecimV^'^ \ pr^senim quum23 Fannius numquara 
 fit haMtu.^'i* elinirnis". jb. Brut. 20, 100.- 42. Memorare;)0.-^.-^^?n quibus in locis maxi- 
 n.ashostium copias populus RomSnus parvS nia"l>",-/>{'^!r^f ^ ^"^^"^'*S,"]";^^^ 
 Cfn€}it ni29 ea res loii"ius nos ab incepto traheret3o. gall. Cat. 7. 7.— 43. Galli bberos 
 eiios. iiisi3i quum {\t&)^adolevtrunt^-^ nt munus militiae suttineresa pomnt, palams* ad 
 se adlre3s non patiuniur. Cres. B. G. 6, 18. 
 
 Jiejn. 9.J. The predicates of modal clauses introduced by the con- 
 jniictions >ft{nti, vt non) and qutn, or by equivalent relative adjectives 
 (OiJS. 9), IVeqiiently take logical tenses even if their governing predicate 
 is a preterite, since modal relations of a predicate of a past action are 
 often described eilher by their ;>m^72< effects, or by ettects in no connec- 
 tion with the time of the principal predicate : 
 A. Logical tenses, in such predicates, viust be used : , , . , . 
 
 1 if the predicate of the clause is a ' kecessaky perfect , which is 
 the'case if the past tiction expressed by it couiams a present action by im- 
 plication according to R 94, Obs. 3 (See Obs. 4) ; 2. if the predicale is a 
 'necessvuy IMPERFECT ', i. €. if ihc action is such that, according to the 
 o-eneral rules ^ 573 loll., it would be in the imperfect if in the indicative 
 ffor insttvnce it it expresses a state, a ctnitinued or repeated action, habit 
 etc determined bv tlie time of the principal action). In this instance 
 the dependent subjunctive is ahvtivs in the imperfect; but such imper- 
 fects are logical tenses, although agreeing with the law ot consecution 
 
 ^^ ]y!* Logical tenses are generally used if the predicate of the clause de- 
 
 1 Hint - 2 avert.- a infestum ferri, = sa^vlre. to act fiendishly against one's own - 
 
 * Jnnos^^ auii^tum to be unacquainted with the art of making money, or' not to care 
 
 to n ak^m. nev ■ -^ n prosi,eri v.- « to consider, to take into account.- ''aspejtus in- 
 
 S/ to I -ea ratl'.er roi"glily, to handle without mercy.- « by the madness of whose mis- 
 
 ifeds instead of 'by ^^4lo^e insane misdeeds;.- « -^responding to '^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 in>tead of 'voce lifjenT, in free (i. ^. plain) ^^P/^"'-!^'--/" J^ "^^," iJVav' o come^^ 
 create to make.- i3 quanadmoduni. . .perveniretur how to come, or the ;^f> J^» ^^ P^ 
 flccordii" to 7.' 85 S 1-'» veins.- i^ vicissitudes of his old age.-i\abstract dative 
 a> 83 " o whom it was for a good ' i. e. who profited by it.- >« a Mysian, t. e. orator. 
 -1^ a PhryS _ 20 exagitWo^ut pvtidns. is criticised as • rotten ', i e. is obnox ous to 
 theirJascs.-»» would have withheld his opinion as to Per.«.ius s authorship (ot a cei^ 
 afn oraticm).-'^^ had criticised him in regard to Menelaus o Mamthus.- -3 the m^^^^^^ 
 •i> ( understand • 'This an^ument is the more conclusive because etc .)— ine piupei 
 SctSi/reU^r represent the clause as temporal, like/ (?r/?/m . oft^ea^^i» 
 
 - af er he had been held).- " speechless, without language = -as unable to make a 
 In'^ecli' - 2« witl a small force.- «7 to rout.- ^» uih^ uvjrnta, lar-e fortress.--» = nisi. 
 
 - 30 would lead us too far.- '^ except.- 32 addescere. to grow to maturity.- ^3 mvnm 
 v>intM^^tl^^t^^Lc military service.- 3* in public- =* to approach them, to bo 
 in their coinpanv. 
 
4' 
 
 ^ t 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 notes anactU-n happonins .t the •'^-''-'V.''"V,?,;^'u'rei;Tmforthe 
 
 ''TLoJic'l^— 'are ne.er used if the clause is represented as .leter- 
 nninPtl iw the jictioii of tlie subject (Obs. 12) . 
 
 dicate ...iM^/- r.lVr. to the ^\^^-'^^''l^,}''''';;.^^^^^^^^^ clauses the im- 
 
 the^e instances Kiihner tjives no i\»l^*-- ^^^"'Vf.r^mtiwiil. h timeof the niiiin aciion 
 '^rfect i. used if the result i« oot.s.den.d :is conK^^ en^u . t r ^ ^^^^^,^ .^ 
 
 curriir^ «r/w . v-j«v. ^^-. - , - -- ...,„„»,•,.,, ,i,,i f.w-r itself i'^ to De oroiiiiin wul ^^j 
 'If iulii:^ioric(i.6. in preterite) 'y''''']'^'^}'''}^^]';^^^^^^ luimiseri erar.t 
 
 dis,lnc:ly, then the perfect -^^'^^'l^f})"-^':^^^^^^^ they w.rem 
 
 plied by quoting other grammarians) Madvig s rule alone is re^po^slD^o. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 435 
 
 OBS. 2. All the modal Cause, may be imjiovted in tl.e V^^^^-^^^^^^"^ 
 denmnstnitive (deliuite, ^S'^'-^V^Y^.^^on aimer ami coinci^^ ^^^^e the ante- 
 
 TECEDKNTS of the chuise '. Vi,.,%i V a.^ preceded by tarn, adeo. vxqm eo, tta. and 
 cedents Ac and ita ; clauses of »i^»^'"*;^> ^'^^I'J' . «'al clauses by eo, iccirco. or eqiuva- 
 S- cons.cmive clauses ^'X i'<^ «/.<^' ^?' ""l.^^^'^^.c > S^e form-adverbs are of.en 
 len't at libuuve phrases ('^ ^''■^^^^«;.,^;f,;'^^^,^:''ad ectives^^^^^^^^^^^ ll manner 
 
 mer-ed in the qualitative and (iiiantitaiiN e *«" ™JV^"^^^^^^ talis) are used as aniece- 
 rfrepresente.! t a ^ quality ', ^^^^^;'^^;^-^^^^"^^ are ur.d.r.tood. most .'en- 
 dents or Ut-elanses. ^^ '•^■^M«"^y/\\'; "'^'kV; fi^ of nianner and coincident 
 erallv in consecutive, antl nnal ^--la u,es ^"^ 'f ^"^ 'J^V^^^, impeudebat t// perpauci pro- 
 ac.i.m, rarely in clauses of inters. t,-, a_. • ^^J« .^^^^^ etc.) ; A very high n.ounmm 
 hi here posxtiU (coNSKci'TiVE <^^At.sh -^« /«Jf ^^^ ^ ^^ ^ ^-^-u 
 ua- in \\v' way. so (hat a very small f^'cc to i I a itnu i P Ut-clau^e, which 
 
 a, tecedents may «1=^- ^- P»='^^'^\*";',r:r;iu ir ipa m^ 'YW^^-r^ '^^''^'''' ,^''Z 
 
 m alm.>st all '"Stances is placed «(/ertpriiupa^^^^^^^ consecutive clause. «c/;-0 vr 
 runt adtout nemo in urbe e.s>t<.(Ui ^^^'J^ 1^'^fV V/.'-^^'* , . n^iie flute-plavera wandered 
 \ I! ;fr,Z<o factum eM ut, or =: iaq^'e with an /''^ ^ !i;;« the sacred u u-ic. Liv. 9. 30. 
 ^^.r r^:i:..y ..,. fi.^.f fh^vfi irnfi nobody in town to peitorm i''« K','^ ..^_ , , ,, . .. ^. , ,,. . y^' ; 
 
 ... V= rjuo factum e.t ut, or =: ztarf>e w it an nu .. . f„-,,,red u' u-'.c. Liv. 9. 30. 
 
 oni to Tibur. .0 t/uU there '^'V :ri\endered w ' 1 /o'rfer ' followed by ' i 
 Mie.an.eceden.s in 1 nal c ausesare u r.d ^y .^ ,„^ antecedents^ 
 
 "^I'j;: .;:eceJen(s i;;;;;:ai clauses «re rencu.^^^ i^T-;fa;;S"hJ a;:;:;;Se;fts'w^^.hp'e^ 
 
 sometimes by '.o that \ In the o her ' ;'^^].,^.;^^(^';\' •';;,,^/, a wanner', 'in .^«c/i ade- 
 pressed or understood are r^'^^f/i"^;, ^ , f,,,*:^ .° hav^ same subject, by 'o>- to^: 
 
 gree , followed by W /«/ \ or if b. th propc.sit m^^ ,noril)Us (a clause of 
 
 h qi.enliai/aperegrinata tc.ta AsuT est ^' ^c^xu^ ^^^^ .^^ circuit throug^i 
 
 'coincident action' = 'se c^^Vt .if arc. rdhfc^to he lorei-n manners. Cic Brut. 13, 
 the whole of Asia -^'O «•'«^ ^^ f/'^^L n^ to ?4c^^^^^^ in English (tnost frequent y 
 
 51._ Frequently however it >^ b^'^^y, ;' '^^.f^H Scs as : In castris P<.mpeji videri li- 
 ? uiscs ol coincident aciion and y,''^'^']}'}.^^^^^^^^^ de eventu ejus diS. timu- 
 
 • lit irichllas structas etc.. vt /«<^\^f^Jj; !'' '^' ^Spo might be 8eeu costly cot- 
 
 is.e (a consecutive clause, w=lei^^cc)li lonp^^^^^^ to the issue of that day. Cies. 
 tages etc., «;^icA r70^.< ^o^7/p/r that the> had n^^ patria ,ue expnlsos om- 
 
 hC.3,9»i.-(Ei qui pecunias impenlbai.t) diet .Uva ii u,pi.,imam tegerent (a 
 
 nibns neces'ari.i rebus c.gere ut bonest:! px^ ipU^^^^^ j,, n,ouey stated 
 
 cl-iiUe ot c.incident action = ter/ente.,): IIiom ^) ;;>;';: "^ \ ^ ..f ,ue necessaries of 
 ? a be in- banished from their own coiU''r> t } wcr. i. w. ^^^^ ^,^^^ j^ ^, g^ 
 
 re V/ ;i usinr, an odicial ^^^'''''^TZ^u^l^d^^ ^^^^^^ prima ejus imago pone- 
 30 I-Mtltiadi /<//i.N- honor tribQ us e^t <!'"'' \ ."-"'' Miiiules coiMtd in placvnj his image 
 rntnr la clause ol maunerj; The honor shou n .".f "'\ '^p^"".,! _F,equently clauses of 
 fb-t in the picture of the battle. >ep. M'b. (. • . ^ *; f;^^;; ^ ,. ^nd ire tlu-n in Euirlish 
 oMucldent aJIion l>«-c^.^"tly CM.n^nn an ach j.^ m^^^ ,, uul nisi de rei- 
 
 introduce.l by ^b;t so that ^, or ^v le ^^J^^l^t^ that (or 'while') he thought of 
 imblicie pernicie cog it a ret ; Antonlu^ r\ ;^7,V. 'pun 4 .> 
 
 Nothing iut the destruction ol the '-.^^^''^^'^^-^^'^.X^ of preterite consecution, 
 
 0ns. 3. In model Ut-clanses the ^«j^'^^r^^^^^^^^^ never denote an ac- 
 
 the piuperlect beinu' excl.ided '>y jbe "f "^ . ^^ ^ ^le pluperlect subjunctive is used 
 
 on an erior to the principal predicate. }.« \y ['^J^'^ tint of its governing predicate, if 
 m al Ut-clauses,'^denoting a time ^/"^"(f '^ '\ 1^ 1 ep 'ndi-nt on another principal 
 tn Ser is likewise a pluperfect ^"bju'-cin . b nn^^ <'^^ 
 
 ' edicate : Attiens. quum tanttl l'r'>^l c»*' '^^r.;, '''l^^^^, _Veriphrastic imiierfects, whicli 
 
 cla "■'. Thl otanation of) l,i.toncal orcl.T ^}f"\^"'^S'L'%S^. Paullus t<,„l«m 
 h ; . ™y ■. VAMn^» I'a"""' I'l-'fiO -y. '«,';f' " ' cTc Ofl 2 2-" [.he f.ato of ' mimnn.iy 
 
436 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 rot he expressed by ' aferref \1 See Ex. 1-4.- Here helon- actions represctited as hav- 
 r,?.5 ah 'n^ or uVJv hafpened ip to the speaker's time, a. : Ta..t.nn -^"p/! ^ "eVJiJ 
 munguain ..ari pev\cyi]o fmnf rartluU'.) ; So -rcat a war whs kindUd ^^'a^<-ar'''•'-^y"f 
 never 6 e/i in mu equal ilau-:er. Nei>- ":»""• 4. 3. ^ce Ex. 5-7.- If thr pm npal pndi- 
 ?a l^f a noda/ul^latise is a perfect inchulin^ a pre>ent by ^V^^^;^Yn'^V"'liff^l 
 the nrc'duate of tlic ehiuse is determined by i\n- nik-s Hem. \)i. Ous -.2. foil., being fiM^r 
 anre'^i ^o ■ imperlect if represented a^ happenin- at the speaker's time, and a j>eijecf, 
 fr renrein e T re-ard t.) the speaker's time, as : Tanfa Hiperstilio mentis om- 
 
 'nhn Si?ulOrumC/j5ar./. qua.cnnlp.e acriaa.t i.x-ommo.ia, I''^ sS'lianriha? 
 evenlrc videanfar ; ISo great a sni.^rstition /mY^a^^f/ the nunds o he ^'^'\« ; '''«^^ 
 whatever misfortune occurs. >^eevxs (to tlu-m) to happen In.m that <:»1!^ "• ^, f; ) \'\' t.)\ 
 51 — Eauideni »\c jam ftbdnrui ut animo it-quissimo axdlitm Lab.Tii poemata, 1 nate 
 Vin^ixS^^becoZlo^ I A^ar Labenu«'8 poems with the {,'reatL.st equanimity. 
 
 Cic. Fam. 12, 18, •->. (Ex. 8-11.) , 
 
 Or« 5 The immrfecl subjunctive Is nsed in all the modal Ut-clanscs as a lor/icaf tense, 
 if Vhe'predicate denotes habit, or any of those actions which woijld require an n'M» r «ct 
 f they were in the vuiicadve. The use of a peiffct m Mich i.ivdi-ales woi Id l>e f n X, 
 because the perfect, in this instance, would be ,nif/,er a lo-.cal tins.-, //w- a tense »y con- 
 «ecu ion : Oratio itu libcre lluCluit id i.usquam ad/uire.-'Ctret (iniperf. ol habit) ; HiS lai- 
 im.'e as so fluent, (hat it .topped at no point. Cic. Brut 71., 274 - Fossain P^'fi"'" v • 
 Sii ,1 diR^ciis lat.Tibus duxit, ut (jus fossa' solum tantuindem j^aferei quantmn su ii niuj 
 n sie lahra distSrent (imperf. of statk) : lie built a cana tweui v tcet deep w 1 1 . perpen- 
 dicular sides, «^> <//«< its bottom /ntd the ^mm-. nuas>,re in nidth as the dis ance ol he 
 e h'es at t le top Csps. B. G. 7, 11. By examinin- tlie tens.- (»f mod.d I t-clauses in ihe 
 different passa-'es of classical auth(.rs, it will appear that amoni,'ih.- lu.perfecl subjunc- 
 tives used in them, « large uiajority fall under this rule.— See Ex. U-Ij. 
 
 Obs ♦; If the predicate of the Ut-clause is represented as happeiiins at the time of 
 the sneaker, it is placed eWier in the present, en- in the imperlect, but more usually in the 
 former tense, as: Curio multa dixit et illustria, ut eum imnr coiiMilem non «»>''^«, 
 Curio SDoke in many ea-es. and his speeches were celel)ruted. m that I WimcUr he had 
 not Wn consul. [Conskclt.vk clause.] Cic. Brur. .3->, 124.- Trajrinus venip.ib .cam i a 
 administravit w< omnibus pnncipibus merito ;>m:/(n</vr ; '1 rajanus admlnl^tered the 
 State in such a manner thai he is justly preferred to ail emperors. [C i.aise of manneu.J 
 Eiitr 8 2 — Themistocles adto erudltus est liiteris PersSrum, nt multo commoduis dita- 
 iur apud "re-em verb, fecis-e quam hi (pii in Per-ide erant nati ; Themistocles was m 
 proficient iirPer^au literature, that he is mid to have more fliiently addressed the kinff 
 than those who were born in Persia. [Clause of intensity.] N. p. I hem. 10, 1.— >ee 
 Ex 1».-18 But : llorum oratOrun. tarda multitQdo fuit. tanta laus, ut quum suriima 
 in'irarCmur, inferiora lamen p/vfHirem,>ts : These orators were so many, and so excellent, 
 that while admiring th.^ best, we i/^t approve of the inferior [both vriraremur, imil pro- 
 buremus, are present acts of the speaker, and would be presents if m an ind<'pcndent ^en- 
 teiice] Cic. Or. 2, 5.— Keddita est ei tum a majoribus statua pro vitil, (jinv ( = vt ea) 
 nunc ad tantie familiie memoriam sola rest a re t ; A statue was then encted to him in- 
 cur ancestors, ill return f..r his life, which statue (so that it) is now alone left as memorial lor 
 pueh a family. Cic. Phil. 5). 2, 5.- (^ui plusopibus, armis. potentiil valent. ;;7v//^ci,sw niihi 
 <«/<<?/m videiiturstultiiiriadversarioriim ut eiiam auctoritilte jam plus r«/^/v«; ; ^'^''/^] 
 who prevail by wealth, bv their arms, and power, seem to hare Inen so much (tenentea 
 by the folly ot their adversaries that they a/e now prevailing even by authority. Cic. 
 Fam. 1, 7, 10. See Ex. 19-21. 
 
 Obs 7 Aside from the instances mentioned Obs. 4-fi. the perfect subjunctive often 
 occurs in modal Ut-clauses in place of an imperfect, but it is impossible t<» reduce this 
 usa-'e to a ^'eneral rule, all the attempts of the fjrammaiians to esrabhsh such a priiici- 
 uieliavin.' i)ioved futile. MadvigV rule (see foot-note p. 4:^4), accordmj,' to which the 
 predicate of modal Ut-clauses is in the iterfect, and not iii the-imperfect subjunctive il 
 b€.-<ides its reference to the principal predicate, it is also iei)ie>enied as a distaut historical 
 fact is not warranted by the usa}.'e of the Latin authors, aside fnmi the impossil)ilnv ot 
 maidn" the 'disnnctness' or 'non-distinctness' ot an liistorical fact available as a crite- 
 rion Madvi"-'s chief pas-^age by which he means to prove his rule (Cic. Oil*. 2, 22. quoted 
 Obs 4) requFres the perfect for a reason very dillereut Irom that which he has proposed 
 (see Obs. 4), aud the same is the case with hi- other passages (Cic. Wrr. 2. 5, 10 : ami t in. 
 2 20 See Obs. 8). There are a large nuinl.er of pas^ages iu which tlic imperject is used 
 in an Ui-clause, although the fact stated in it is not «uily a Wlistinct' hisioiual fact Dut 
 even the 7n«2Vi'action, so that the principal sentence may be altogether omitted wit h<>ul utlect- 
 in" the sense ; and on the other hand there are j)ass«ges wi I h;><?/tr^ subjunctives, coutain- 
 in' facts without fl«y historical value, only serving to illusiratea higli degree ol the prin- 
 cipal aciiou: [Lmpeufects containing the main fact, so that the principal predicate may bo 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 437 
 
 omitted.;Tantafuitomniumexpecta.iov;sendiAld 
 Jiueret. N^-p. Alc.7, 11 ( = \N hen Ale b a esar m^ 
 
 ,hip to receive hinO.-A/U'O \':^9 ;V^'^'''}^^^'^''^^^^^^ an opportunity, 
 
 navv< rdigvas subd<lci>-treficij'ibc,et. <^;y^- ^; J^; 'J' rf/ r^"'* i^e^d on shore etc).- L. Gel- 
 he sent a rae-sa-e to Pompey to ^''1}'' l^l^''))''^}^^^^^ = L. Gellius" belonged 
 bus ita diu vixit vt ^nidtarunv^at,m ^;f ^rfl^^^^'^^ea tes subita fuit ut prius Anie- 
 t<. several rhetoricd period^. C c. l^!"^- •{', i '^- f;,' ". uv i 30 (where the passage 
 nem trauslrent hostesqwam oinmn ^^i/^X^"' f. ^.^^^ only the logical 
 over the Anio is evident y tl''" n^a.n fact, the p n a ie.reh>f the principal 
 
 tesilnun'i bellum ut rnmu,uam ll^'ri jm-iculo {^^^^^^^^'1'^^^^ de^^^sit T^ qui eJf.rrUuT, 
 dangerous civil war arose).- Aristldes in ^' '^ P;VVhV ™^^^^^ 
 
 vixrdiqverit. Nep. Arist. 3_, 2 { = ^^'t^^f^^'^'t'l^^^^^^ ( = ^^""^ 
 
 , z.^_.. r..;t »,/ ,.^»>,y. /. /^,„r,r>itn musa steterit consiannus. »^ic. iJim. T'. "''^^. . . r _i 
 
 r. 
 
 tr'il.anu. Iml'ul nemo a '^''.^"''!},<;^"%'J;Jflf':i^^^^^ historical 
 
 ferrn7pSS'ia'r^cr;«°iii-.c\rro\t 
 
 T f cts Perfects 
 
 dentesin bostem. Li\. y, do. G '^ "^1 
 
 niusCrassus. juris peritOrum eloquentissi- appellatus. >ep. Aii^t. 1, 2. 
 Clauses where ut has the force of itaque or of ^ quo J^l^^^Z^^^cl'wV^^ 
 
 pa 
 cry 
 
 '''''f;,r« .^rvi^dbat hibc'^.L me.^ftus''»* cui. «on facile extra tectum quisquam m- 
 
438 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIYE. 
 
 bUv ji nprfort Pnhinnclive occnr? in place of the rcp^iilnr imperfect Pnbjniictive, it gener- 
 al iTvb^-lon^^^S^^^^^^ P^-ra-ot^ ' ^Obs. 4), or to tho.e winch, acronling to 
 No^ C are usei fn m p^. icular rea/ons. But .on.etim... thouir.h rardy, perfect^occur 
 h. Juch chu".eswith«,.ft any as.iumahle rean.n a. : ^>/nre.ja jnaxMnm uH^^^^^^ 
 Bisiii»; iit hie mnltiis res tt mai:nas s^me nnperature qesstnt, iiullam ^lnt noc imperauH , 
 >tu CI Live S a r.port of lum^elf in 'one of tlie srnate.t wars, ihat XM^verjanmd 
 manvt^^^uV'rearltJwitLut hi. chi.-f, (whil.) the chief did nothmi: wuhout hnn C c. 
 Mur 9 20* - Sometii ncs clause»» of intkns^ity take the aniecedeni.. properly belon- 
 hi to the cianSTf MANNEK.in which instance the.;;.r/.r^ is used in the -«n;.«;vay a. if 
 tu'vtudtiuirpn.prr antecedents, as: Hannibal odiuni miversn8Hc>mnnos«c(t^^^ 
 coZtanlia^ coilservSvit vt prius anirnatn quatn id ^^i^^^;^^^ ^f la \hL h rce-of\an- 
 ^talem imperat^n-ern' xn the passa-e >.p A-es. fi 1 <;i\''\\";'^,^?,^: * Vl^,^,^"- « eubiunc- 
 /«7/l i;nw«?«^()mM — Often the antecedent is o/y^///e(/, and in this instance luc ^"'U"''^ 
 t ve Tx^ V rarelv in the perfect, as : Cujus advenius Po.npejilnos coniprcssit, "o-'rc,->q"e 
 fir, mivit i/V«e ex ".xin/o terrore colliier^nt (so that they recovered from a tornnda e 
 SS C-"4 B C 3. 05.- D»miitiu8 aperte aliscdvit w/omnes tidlrent ; Domiims ca.t his 
 vote for acnniital openlv, m that all saw it. Cic. (^n. Fr. 3, 4, 1. 
 
 7 In tlanses of intensity the u«e of the perfect or imperfect is optional with the 
 wrft'eJ ** iiU iferfc^Ts in the fullouinj^ instances, are more Ir.quently »^^1 «lan mi- 
 m rfecU • If the rt-clause has the value of an independent sentence, and the princi- 
 { al 'A ?enc • n^^^^^^ bv a CAfSAi. claise. or by an adverbial object ol c^use, 
 
 ftf-^Tanlo favT.re ad JnlVra-iuinferendum in tribus discursum est, nt tribQui rcpente m- 
 ll^U^l'tUer^^^^ r.p.'.i'ed with s.» mueli satisfaetion to their respecive 
 
 Domn.^ Dlac^^^^^ their votes, that the tribunes snd<lenly chanrjed their tac- 
 
 rl Li? S^ ^ae The tribune^ channel .he r tactics became they .aw that the people 
 ete--)-! i'adeo su.trbiiu vi.nn. e>t llTunibali vt extemplo tabenias arjrentar.as qu« 
 c rca lor nf Hon a"^ 
 
 L im ned"ucd )a " onters to sell at anction the banker's stancfs at the Roman fomm 
 Uv T 1 lami al gave orders because he considered this as i"V>U(UM.tj. Here be on- 
 e D :. , rjs Ue- B G. 2. 21 : Nep. Ham. 2, 3: Liv. 2<}. 11 ; quoted Obs. 7. See Lx. 22. 2.i 
 o if ,T ,he nrincipal Sentence a quality of the subject, or a trait ol character ^ 
 ;;tu icit e r^t ed and tl e Ut-clau>e c...:tains an actual laet irom which the intensity 
 Ef tlie QU- li V is to e infenvd. as : Octavius tantnm auctorita'e ra'mt, ui Wisvm Sempro- 
 
 S!am 1?umSa,i!m;j;o,«...i/ / Octavuis l-^,-i--^^{ «" jf l^!,'!^ ^J^i^/?^^d 
 (succeeded in repealiu-:) the i Seinpronian corn-law. Cic. Brut, bi. Unit abrogartt >\ouia 
 
 'd-?ret • auum autem ver esse ccpperat. dabat ge itinerilni!», in quibu? <=« trntne se pne>>ebat 
 imn .^ru. S) e n en.o ni.qua,.! in e(,uo sedentem rhicrlt ; Verre-. m the winter-mon lis, 
 vedl "«/Vr« ;"" ^ that hardly any one mw him out doors; but when spnnfr commenced 
 le an ) ie hnn H^^^ in which he sl.ow<-d himself to such a //^-r/'*-^ active //^« 
 
 ro <n r.ver ^^M' him li lin- on horseback.- In the tirst clau/e the iniperlect ivhrt 
 fs u"ed bee u se it is the usual tense in a clause of manner ; u. the last ,^'«»;:^; '^ « * 
 tho- has chan-ed the tense int.. the perfect riderit. ,,arily because it is a clause of niten- 
 iitv' IMH cSv en.use it denotes an action which never happened (()B5. 4). 'I herea-on 
 bv wS M^lvi- acc<m..ts for this pe.fect (that it contains a 'distinct; Inst.jncal fact 
 w^.ul 1 a ply ^^^ exac Iv the same stren-tli to the tirst clause, in which the imper ect 
 ,/r)" W is ui,l The s may be said of his additional remark, that the imperfec ci- 
 
 y?r f u";d in 1 e second clause, would mean ' habi.'. From this remark (wuch is 
 fhe more s in?e because Mr. Madvii: confines in his nUesabout the i.npe.rfect le lea 
 of hab t to theTmperfect indicative) it would fi.llow that rideret in the first cljuise does 
 mean\u^\V^ n^^i clMt eSlentlv does not : and if it did mc.in habit, riderxt >u the second 
 dause would likewise mean habit, since the predicates of the two clauses are perfect.y 
 filike in re<'.ird to the nature of the action. ■,..,. i 
 
 * S< mriTnen re ers have ventured the opinion that the perfect is n.ed in ^s clause 
 heca. sTn e pr neipal sentence contains no real faet, the Ut-clause alone ^''^''^nnn- he 
 fact f the sentence. But tliev overhu.k that just in construcdons of tins kind (if a >eib 
 o do n''i< used as a mere irramman.al form, while the substance.of the af'i»'" .;^4'^: 
 pre^sed by the Lt-clan.e) the tense of the clause almost invariably is the imperfect, bee 
 
 **^Some -rammarians state that ' som.^ historian?, especially Nep^s, use P'-rff^ ^"J;- 
 innotives iifeon-eeutive clause't where the imperfect woiLO be moke usual (Ma(l\i|.M, 
 Kl Aa en ? t seems to be made only for the sake of having some.hin^y ^o accoun c>r 
 fho nV-inv na»8a^'es which Drove the unsoundness of Madviir s theory, ^epos, in a \ei v 
 iw na"a^^- T^ee \o / ses impn.per perfects. But his usa^e, in -eneral, aL-rees wilU 
 IJilit of Uvv krd Ciei\r. ^ This a.uhor. however, employs the form of Modal I /-elauses 
 altogether too often (in the average about three times ou each pa<;ej, and often whtii 
 other writers would have made use of diflerent forms. 
 
 DErENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 439 
 
 • i- „*jr./,4Viot r»rtavin<? had /Af/i so much author- 
 impart a different force to th« ^ent.nce in hmatm . ^^^ ^j^, ^, 
 
 ity'as to re,>.al that '"^^. .^vhile «6ro^a -^^^^^^^^ j,, ,, ut-clause cWs not 
 
 qen^ral qu iliiy).— bee Ex. 24. i). ./[.;, i,",,,^,,;.- th of the imperfect tense (^5»i 
 
 Sote ai actual fact, but «" !!^:*.'" .V" ' 7.e as FuiTetiam disertis, ut i.emo el The- 
 
 •denotean actual '«^^^ but an actio uit^^^unu^. ^ etiam disertus, 
 
 ^.11.), the i-l-lect >ub^unct.xe^iu^ u- ^.^^ ^^ ^, 1, 3, qi 
 
 hjlniis i>ar evset. Jsep. tp. J, i- auu.. r 
 
 3 
 
 „. , ut i.erao el The- 
 quoiedOBS. 7. See 
 
 ^^.^Jperrcct subjunctive ^^^^r^;^l^:^^ 
 
 rKKFECT INDICATIVE '<> ^l^^'^'''^^^^^^^ "tt^^^^ 
 
 ,o • non-complete ' acts, '^^^'^'^''^'lll^'ll^'^^^^^^ • iueomplete at the giveii time^, are 
 
 co-oKDiNATK puEDicATES which. beuiL rt P' ^^^^'^^ ^^ j,„„o 'n.odo i< erat qnu ut IJeo- 
 placed in the imperfeet accordi, g to OBS 5 , a^^^^^ ^^^^^ virtQte mner./ ; Zeno 
 
 Dlirastus, nervos virtQtis incident, sed contia J'"* "'"" Theophrastus, the smews of 
 v,^ by no m.-a.is the ma,. ( = ^»;;»\,^ ";*";. SUvr e le vthing to^•irtue alone. Cic. Ac. 
 virtue but on the contrary suc>i a man «<> to f^^j^T.^',^- ,'_'./ desi^mates Zeno's views 
 P. t i, 10. [Here inci^l^ritrvvre.ynll ^liS- ,2rce?he S"^^^^^^^^ i^ ^^^''^ '9 
 
 L a la-tin.^ siateO See Ex. ^\.^]\l^\tTr^^^^^^^ i'/'ff •> 
 
 imrjer/ect indicafices, a<: \ enerat ad me^ , ''n„h ini cura consederit ; that, at the sight of 
 ; Sii-um a.pectu omnis quaf me anr^Ma^ 'X^uvi<Z^ tTu^l 
 
 Ihem, all the care which U'a^ ^^^'[[^'Th^Z^m^^^^^^ ^*'^^ 
 
 Brut. 3, 1«». [Here the «"^hordesgnaies y t^^^^ according to Obs. 5 impart 
 
 as instantaneous, and as "^oment^ip, wul^ J^O'' "^^^J^^ ^ anffttMit.]- 2) In the Pame 
 
 to the acthm an idea of ".o'^completencss. c« rre^p<^^^^^^^^ /^ .^^^J^ ^^ ^^ . complete' 
 
 way the perfect ^'«'•^>"ct^ve ,s used in nw^^^^^ completing act and final 
 
 action, if the predicate pt ti'^ ^f.f ^";^ AnS l{om£ os tautum vulnerum fuit t/^plures 
 RESULT of the principal predcate, as ^J^^'l^^^^^^^ o„ the side of the Romans 
 
 jmt pnelium saucii ^^^^^^^f^V/'^^JnoreS 1 e s ii 3 ifo.u^ «/^^^ ^^" ^'^^^t 
 
 Ihere'were so many wounds ^'{«'Z"'»^!:.^^!']^^ f^ ne 1««'^^^ quidem iter patuit nt ex tanta 
 
 Su a similar passa..:.e NeP";',.'!^ ^ V^^'cfhere the pi feet i>^^^^^^^^^ expresses the idea that 
 tra, 8cd navls petiernd (Milt. 5, ^^ vvhcrc the pc ccx yye i^ubjunctives are used in 
 
 e^ Persians really reaehed the'»- ships.- •) ^^^'^^^^J ^^;.^, ^VJ, f^^ ^,1 ^^„^ ,j,oken of as : 
 modal n-elauses to express that ' ,J,^;' " ^J^ !r„dlvit. it Tphicratenses apud Gnecos 
 Iplncrates exercitum ^.c omni ^ ■ cipll.ui '^^^'^'-^V^S'^ would be understood as referring 
 ^l^^Z:!^^:!:^ ^'^^^^ ^'^^ ^'^ name tphicratenses 
 
 renuiined after Iphicnites's tmie clause?, the perfect Pubjunctive can only 
 
 J), in rt'-clanses not h<^ongn.g to the modal c «tKe' / s ^^^^^^^ ^^^ employed, This 
 
 be used if. according to R. 94 No. l-^- 'og»^» ^* "; ./,' .iau-e fills up the blank idea of 
 
 particularly, refers '«'7>^^^^25^*^^?";;^'^, ; V; -elV pe^ «^^'"-^ ^" P[|^': 
 
 a verl) of 'doim:'; see p. 4bS). But. m rj ra'ei>, a j . ^ ' f „^ ,, i^^ quam collSgae 
 
 cateclaus<-s a., ^f.}^^^-^^:'^'::^^^^^^;^:^ Z^M wouldVepresent the idea 
 Miltiades m^y-/-i/. ^^•'l»- ^^''Vv^ VVlilHade- w le^ author meant that Milt.ades s 
 of the verb vafere as a qualdy ol ^»1.'^'«^^''^' ^^^ ''\'^ i- mna-e does not permit the use 
 couLds prevailed oI^ a certain «>ccaM.m^^ SV''l'e^'<>^^^'^^^^ the /neaning of the 
 <,f logical tenses in clauses »' ;*^'*^'f;. "^^i'^bv no means refers the action to tiie 
 KSl^^;^::k^^^M?n;^^S;<^^ ^^^^^^^ -ust be considered a solecsm. 
 The sentence should have been recast. substantive in the principal 
 
 OBS. 9. If the subject or object of a modal ,^ ' ,^^.^f_^!)^^^^^^^^ i.i EngliU, 
 
 sentence for an antecedent, so that ^\Pe'-^,«";\\ '; '^l^^\ "in w i ch instance the relative 
 the Clause ..f.eii assumes u relative f« J" " ,^f [. i^l'\^S' ,^ pronoun i^ would have it 
 gni has the foree of ut «v, being P ;'ced iQ tl.at ^;^^';;;^^,,^^^, ,,,;,,, i, p^ade for ut eju>', or 
 it had been u^ed in connection with ut. 1 he ^ ""^ 7"' .' 'I n^^i^ ..^c ). The predicates 
 J/ ^^./'^ which is changed into ^''V-^-;^ ^'^:;! , ? f^.l^^ tenses as the 
 
 of .,nh relative clau^es (always r>;;i' "»f^. ' ^.^^'^^^^^^^^^^^ \u vel pcrire maluerint quam 
 U-clause would take, as : XX\ . Judlte^ >^f, '^ "V;,., „/^/,«) fames ma-is quam lama com- 
 perdere omnui : XXXI ^^'^'"^''l 9"0sK\-^.ltatui^^^^^ refer death rather than loss 
 
 L.r./i/;Twenty-fi.ve ^«' V'^^l .^Mlfm one w?rc?^^^^^^^ 
 
 everything (i.€. '^^^^^""«r \ Xi c^^^^^^ f^'"^- ^ic Att. 1 16. 5;- Here 
 
 iieloi^tlJc '^l^l:^^- V;"i:and clSil. 9, 2. 5 (quoted Obs. 8, No. C, and Obs. 0). 
 
USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 ! 
 
 Obs 10 Negative clnn^es of coincident action which have a neoative antece- 
 dent (or an antecedent ?7r/«a//v neirative, a-, N<na quid est f; = niHl est) in the princi- 
 >al .-entenec almost always, take the relalu'e form (/^rwo qm mm. nullum quod non etc, 
 in^^tead ol ;^;r»o talis vt non, nihU ejusmodi ut non), bein^- often rendered by • ^11""^'^;; 
 before a participial noun (see p. ISU, No. 3). In place of qm non (the r*;\«tive bemg the 
 subiect*) the conjunction quia i» frequently used, bein- i-endcred m the r-amc way as 
 the relatWe with he ne-at^on. In .uch relative and Quin-chinse. the predicate (which 
 ralway.in the subjunctive), is more fre(,uently placed in the perfect than in »!« imper- 
 fect as : A>me»m pnetermisi, quern quidem ad te perventaruin putilrem. n/^lit eras 
 rwnded^rim ; I did Lt let anyon^ pa.., p.;ovided I thought he w-ould reach you to /c//o m 
 1 did not aire a letter {without handing him a letter to you). Cic. Fam. 2. 1, 1.- ^eino 
 Llybl'i liik^um riderit, nemo in Sicilia quin audierit ; Aof^ody was at^ ^^^^'^VZIln 
 did not see it ; nobodu wat» in Sicily who did not hear it. Cic. \ err. 2. 5, 54.- Qu am tn 
 domum Qtian urbem adistl, quod fanum. quod non everstim atque extersum reliqueru ? 
 %l!at\lSZVhat city did\^.u enter, «7.«« temple, ivithout kaving it despoiled and 
 cleaned out? Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 21. See Ex. 2U-:i3. 
 
 Obs 11 Sometimes, in constructions with modal Ut-clauscs, the remarkable idiom 
 occurs that the clause which hix» iho qrammatiaUform of .an I t-d a use, luin no logical 
 ?onn< cti on V ith the principal sentence, while a relative or a Qu.n-e ause dependent on 
 the Ut clause, is the ine by which loi,Meally the modality of the principal sentence is de- 
 scribed 'I'he two modal clauses thus C(.mbined must be consulered as one sin-le Ut- 
 cla use 'and may often be contracted into one clause. But frequently they must be ren- 
 dered by making the «rsl Ut-clanse an independent sentence and by chun-inu the pnn- 
 cipa sentence i.7to a temporal clause. The predicates of the two modal v\m^es mnst 
 alwai/.^ be. in the same tense, which, if the principa predicate is a preterite, ^'K^l/J^ ^^ '[^ 
 an irnnerftct or a i)erfect,ai^ : Halbus ifa vivChat ut nulla tain exqui>Ita;/ow<Mn\ei;Iii \o- 
 fnZfqim^^^^^^^^ Balbus lived so that no pleasure could l>e f..und .0 cK^iu.iWthat 
 
 he did not atjound in it (i. e. that he had the greatest abundance -f the nn.st exquisite pleas- 
 n?ci i hit c^>uld be lound). Cic. Fin. 2, 20. H3.-Alcibiades sic x;erba fecit, vt mmo am ferns 
 fuirit Quin ejus causam lacnmarit : Alcibiades sp.,ke in such a manner Unit n<.b<)d> >Nas 
 /o inhuman that he did not shed tears over his fate (i. e. Nobody wiis so inhuman as not 
 to slied tears etc., when Alcibiades ppoke). Nep. Ale. ti. 4. bee J-.x. .A. .io. 
 
 Ob* 12 The predicate of a modal Ut-clanse must be ff/?my« placed in a tense by 
 CONSECUTION (i.>. in xhvimpHftcfm the case of preterite cunsecutirm) il the clause 
 must be considered as su/sMique, which is the case if the action uf the clause is repre- 
 sented a,s- beinq determined b{/ a mental act of the Ooirical) sul,jecf of the tmnnpaUinUnce. 
 \Utc clHedy bVlon- final clauses; but any other modal relation may thus be rrlerred to 
 the intention or will oi the subj..ct. Pre.iicates of ihi-s kind are rendered by v poten- 
 tial with ' shoul.r or an e.iuivaient expression (• was to' vXi^.y. Ita inter se munera bem 
 paitTti sunt ut K\i\Q\iW^ }nmxset {not pnefuerit) custodi:e urbis, Hippocrates bellnm a.l- 
 ?e s s consulem Uomaniiui qereret ; They thus {in such a nianner) div.d.;d among each 
 other the functions in the war, that Epicydes urn to have the guarding ol the city, an 
 Hippocrates /oco/*^/;/c^ the campaign against the lioman ^''T"':,^'"'' '^*>^*'-~ -J; ^'""t . 
 clauses refer to intensity, ' tanfu.'^. . .ut ' has the meaning 'onlu ii^}f);o much., asto, as 
 Servius mihi videtur tantum eloquentiic assumi)sisse ut jus cniW facile l^.'^set tn6ri It 
 seetns to me that Servius employed onl>f so muche^pqncuce (or J''iy';:i;^''^f'''^'^\ 
 as to be able to treat witii facility the points ol civil law. Cic l>nit.^40, loO. Ihat not 
 in modal clauses of this kind is rendered by ne or ut ne.— Ex. 3b. o». 
 
 Examples lo J?e}n. 95, Obs. 4-12. 
 
 1 Murena Asiam sic obiit' vt in ejl nenue avaritiic nequc luxuriiP vestigium reliqvent^. 
 Cic' Mur 9 — 2 Ilnic oratoii in invenieiidis coinponendisqiie rebus^ nma accuraiio* 
 fuit, ?//* noii facile in ullo diligeiitiOrem majorenuiue» coijnoverim. lb. V,'""V,.*'\'''"?'o "" 
 3 Ea "essimus^, ut omnibus jjotiiis quam ipsis nobis cons-uluenmv.f. \h. bm. Z. i.«.— 
 4! (iuibus causis tu. Brute, eiiam piiesto^ fuisti, ^^i», qui" non satis dm vixerit, lior- 
 
 ♦ Quin is not employed for ut non with obliciuc cases of i\ See p. 548. 
 
 » Went throu-h Asia in such a manner.— 2 that state in which h- left Asia continued 
 at \\w t'peaker's time (' no trac»'S can now be found *).— 3 in the colU-ction an(. airaiiL'e- 
 ment of his material.- * accuracy.- » a clause of intensity. Mira is n.ecl with t '»<''« "-cc 
 of tanta — « a more careful and comprehensive one. (We would say in English mat 1 
 have not easily known any more carelul etc. speaker'.)-'! have acted in sucli 
 a manner.— « consvlere omnif>us. to consult the interests of any one else.— Lausi^t 
 pnesto fvisti, you were i)resent when these cases wire transacted.— »» a consecu ivc 
 clause, «^ having the force of itaque.— " qui has here coLcessive force = alihougn.— 
 
 DEPENDE-NT SUBJUXCTRT!. 
 
 4.^1 
 
 ^^v ^.«^-/i TV» -Rrnt Qt .^24 — 5 M. Cielius talis tribQnus 
 tensius tamen hunc ^nrsntn co^/.cm . lb. Br^^^^^^ ^,^ ^,, .^.^ _ 
 
 plebis fuit, '// ?/^'W0 a senSti <'t !\.\>l\''0™"^.^.' "•,;,,/,, f'^^^ i\a-rantius studium ri- 
 
 !;. ArdShat Hortensius d-c n. i .c>M)Hliiate .^c i^/ 1'^^ J^i mo r o afficit^^ oculorum, ut 
 deiim. lb. 88, :m-7. Hoc mm re """''i fl«'^,^"-*f,y 4" J'^s'^Natflra corpus liomi- 
 2KMeanumquam dextero seque bene w>«.s- ^ • ,^^f, • "^ ' js ,,,^^^^^ alia p.ogrediente 
 
 ,licfrc«l«r"-'. ll>. Brut. (0. •»■).- VI Ad eum P^^;^''' /"" "K scipiOnii'» ti*r«n(«r. 
 C,e.. B C. 3 :».- 13 Krat "^-^^'^^^'^^^^'iS^ri^S^:^ e^^am ««Von ««r,- 
 ^:;S S e -.uiJVrvi nZrZ^'ui. 45, 25,- ':\r;'7,t„ V^;i'™l;;-^^,'Tep" 
 
 ? .m n„V;,„U™. !^ -vr-ruVn riJ").r3= iu hoc illu.l '."«'l «-Jf 'hVIJ^.^irL^Mr/r! 
 rOrem inducere. lb. »•>, S.ii. — 4i. Nciiuft ; "'i' ,/ '."^ „, /,3^ .miiTiiw in de cti crimen 
 
 are now remembering thes^e benelit> .- ^J' t 15 ,0 nro«ecute — >« manner of speak- 
 
 ''T''i-<Wr?i '3 tin w7do n t re.m>t.- 3^ by observin..-.- 35 .eems. Render : so 
 cut. § .J42. li. 4.— tiut we (to 'i* ;;-' i.* said etc.- 3« that you may lead into 
 
 "ror"or™eTn^XTeS o ; .'' ^ " h r^ 
 
 an enor ine in« ^l"J^'^ "3 ',';'; /%,.,.„, .1:,,^ mii^^t etruf'le for his whole existence, i. e. in 
 
 t'houghhe"i-.r;.mmittedn<.<>tlence yocur^^'Z-^:^'Snn^r:^ 
 
 to account'.- -in ^«i„"ar;w a part^^^^^^^ "^ ^^^:: "^^l^X^ <^^^ «cts, 
 
 to the iiilimacy of hi» .nlorcours,. - "Sec p 204 ««s. 5. ^f "[™ -^ 1 >, ^„ 
 contempt, ''-' -' ..'•Vi'f ?<^;v hmlc .»d ' ipo" ei " hr «'tWn.-.. he aMc,l a'?„.,r.h, or 
 ^^u'ht'tm" m^-d'f'^dVlV'it'Vnow «t\ tl',e third «a.) ; i. e. whet.be had ntcmoncd 
 
 three things, he afterwards spoke of four or two. 
 
442 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Brut f)0 217 — 28 Excrcita?! Piimnia diffirultjltc rei frumcntarue afHcu'batnri vi>qve (0 
 vt cciiiu.'lmls dies fr meiiK. iniliics caruennf^ et pecore» extremain laniL-m suslenla- 
 retit* TiR- K O 7 U—i\) Neni't Ai;rii,'eiiti neqiie» ;t'Hlte tarn am-ctil*. iicqiio vinhua 
 tarn infinn'is'' fiiit 'qui von ilia woqXg i<unextHi^ leliuiuiiie», qiKul cul [iie fors»» otlerC- 
 bur. arrinuerit^K Cic. Voir. 2. 4, 48.- :^0. AVmo ine;T resiitntiOne hetatu^ est. nemo in- 
 iiiriS»2 doluit. vKi i>o» Planeii in mo niisericordia «xnita./i/^/i/. lb 1 lane. l*':/;--f '• f^^^ 
 cr?/o</ in hue urbc inaju-i^ mnquam incendiiim fiui eai noa consul suOvenen/ * ? in. l J^. 
 11 2t) — :« Kv Imc provineia lonsniari imperio /iz-v/io'* rediit. qui mcoliimis fi>»^rit\i 
 Quintriuinnlidnt'T. lb. l«i, y.S.— :«. Nemo fiiit miliinm 7'/i« y///,<em/t/</r. (";e-. li. C. d, 
 45 _ 34 SyraeusjTrum hie situs atqu.- hivc natQra esse ioei ca'llqnedieitur, vt iinllus um- 
 Quam dies tani maLrnil tempestille» V'<'''«' Q"^" »Hqno tempore i-ju-' d;ei solem homines 
 vidtrint Cic Verr 2 5, 10.— i"). In Miltiade»» erai imra eomitas xtt nemo tain humilis 
 esset cut //o// aditus-'i^'ad eiim jxittrtt. Nep. Milt.S, 4.- m. Dixit Ciesar, «6- belli raiiOjiem 
 esse divlsimi'^i, ut illi'^-' classe navis auxiliaque sna-3 imptirirent, ip>e wt mitul teiraqne 
 eos prohiberet. Cies. B. C. 3. 17.— «7. Soeietaiem ab Romanis tia volebant-* peti ut nul- 
 lum de ea re scitum \>o\m\\Jieret, aul^» litteris mandartlur. Liv. 45, 25. 
 
 Rem. 00. Tlie tenses of preterite con.secutioii are in two instances used 
 lis lof/i'cdl tensen if the iroverninc: predicate is non-preterite : 1) if ijyi)olheti- 
 cal preterites are made dependent on non-preterite predicates (Obs. 1-4) ; 
 2) if, exceptionally, the subjunctive of the imperfect is used in place of a 
 /)d/'/vW(soiMCLimes instead of a present) subjnnciive to mark i)ailicid:ir 
 relations of the action which, in the i^iven connection, would^ imt appear 
 if the re<::ular tenses of present consecution were used (Obs. 5-7). 
 
 Os^ 1 Hypothetical subjunctive? (§350) in both the principal and the dependent prop- 
 osition "enerally reiain iheir preterite tens.s (imperfeet or i)lupt'rlt«t). wliether Iliey are 
 made dependent on preterite, or on non-preierite predicates. A subordination ol liypo- 
 thetical periods occurs in two instances: 1) if tne thksis (j. e. the principal bypotlieii- 
 cal -'enience See B. VI. Makes the form of a dependent clause (.Obs. 2). in wliieli instance 
 the HYPoTiiKsis (i. e. the hypothetical dause introduced by ^i or /<i*'i) is frequently ■««- 
 dHr.<tood ; 2) it the hypoti'iksis is made directly dependent on an()ther sentence, the 
 the^is beiiiLj undeolood (.Obs. 4). 
 
 08"* 2 If the THKSIS has the form of a dependent clause, the hypothetical imjierfect 
 s>/Mi(V(C(ivf.^ in both tlie thesis and the hvpothe>is, and \\w p!iip,rfect-suhj>im'tire in the 
 livi)Olhesis, always retain these forms, the same as tluy would haye in an independent 
 hypothetical period. No re«,'ard is. in this instance, paid to the law of consecution, and 
 it" makes no ditlerence whether ihf clause as such requires a siibiiincliye or not. as: Hoc 
 api)aret quum yerbiim alicpiod altius transfertur, et in oratione humili ponitnr, quod 
 idem in alia (J. e. '.si i» a/ia poiiertfur.) d^aret ; Tiiis i-; cyideiit when, in ordinary style, 
 some uncommon word i.s' M^e(/ which would be proper m higher style. Cie. Or. 2o. 82. 
 [The relative clause quod. . .dectrtt, but for its hy4)oihetical meanini:. would r-qmiv the 
 indicatiie : the predicate retains its hypothetical imperlect, the same a> it the hypo- 
 theiical i)eriod were independent ' Verbu/ndtceref, n . .]X)ner^fitr\ The law of consecu^ 
 tion would require a present or perfect.] - Nee dttbifat quin e-o a te nutii hoc consequi 
 jwsaem, eiiamsi iedificanirus e,s>e.v .• Nor does /if donbf that / could .>btain this ot yon by 
 a mere hint, even if you were going to build. Cic. Fam. 13, 1, 5. [The clause "qutu. .^ 
 
 » Suflertd ciceedinuly from want of provisions.— = the perfect is used according; to li. 
 58 _ 3 the meat of cattle.— •« sati^fied their extreme liuii<:er. Sux'en'dre/it is an imper- 
 fect of hal)it. See p. 31S, Obs. 1.— a See § 4()<». A'. 'Ai.— « Nobody at .A-ri-entum was of 
 so helpless an a«»e.— ^ rirtf< intirntce = inlirmitas, the ft>im ririhu.^ i/tfir//n.i beinj: used 
 
 iM>dy with consular power, i. e. no pi ^ - . - 
 
 was intact (bud suflered noj,'reat losses).— i' without benn: admitted to the honor of a 
 triumph.— »« tarn maqna tetn}}e.-<t(l(e, abl. of quality. = so stormy.— »» -= MU'iad<"< tarn 
 //lira comitate erat ,ot an adinirable atVability, so that). -- '■'<» access.— 2i the way of con- 
 ductinji the war was so divided \i. e. aniony: tlie two belli-jrereiits). The chance ot \var 
 must be taken here for the loirical 8ul)jeet, ^vhich, as it were, dt-creed that the<e shimld 
 be the parts of the belliircreiits.— '■'•^ namely the army of Tompeju-^.— ^a /i,.s-, i. e. Ue- 
 sar's.— 2* It was their will that a treaty of alliance should be pro|)osed to the Koinans, 
 but so that etc.— '•"> a loosely construed sentence. Livy meant to say 'neve quidquam 
 litteris m(indarelur\ nor should anything be committed to paper. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 443 
 
 «>..,.. ;..^.'wonldrequireasul;jnnctiv.e^ 
 
 posmn and <jedincatnrmessemv^-\xnn \l\}l^^''^^Xxi\xe first example.]*- Horum l;cen- 
 governinj: present P'-«'d?cate t/;/6^/a^• the same a m ^" ^ j„dicarentur ; Had not 
 
 ti:e nisi Carmades restitt.^se.t , ^''VlL'^^Hn not Avoi- bu ha\ they wovM (i. e. they prob- 
 Carneades ren^^ted the I'^en'^e « he,e i do .t ^ o^^ ^^J i5o._if hypotheti- 
 
 )e alone acknowledged as l'h''"l'\H'\*:U -.Hwrnt..* rhev have the samegram- 
 
 viso that ' 7 a;.r;^;/Vo^.;i.n '^---j-f^^S^/i^ ^;n;1;retSitt?^;'h!;;S: 
 
 dently : 'Inlei,'ram \m\\\ erit, si rolam .\ oni 'i ."^l''^''"'^"^ -, /..,.» ...,Ki.inf>iivA 
 
 armeiit 
 he had 
 owner. Liv 
 
 Changed ( See the Ex. .»>^'l '^^^- .. ^,. .„, «p„tcncc) likewise retains its own form if the 
 2. The thesis (principal l^ypo^''^]^^/ f^/ ^.'^' .f ^^^ In this instance 
 
 clause in which it is incorpora e.l d<j€^ /wt «?/"' ^T^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^i/, dependent hypothetical 
 
 the predicate of the thesis t«kes on^ o tl « f^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 thesis referring to the pa-^t may «r^"^^ *'^,^ ^'/"^ "j^e iNi icative of the thr.e past tenses 
 
 srB.TUNCTivK US the regular f»»-'" v^»/, "J^^^" ^^^^^^ f(,rce (p. 729, 27;; 
 
 of the periphrastic Intnre is used in t'^^';,,^"" '^';^ eis ncommodis mederi fortasse 
 
 as : In illo ipso inalo LurnlUis, <!'[', '^:^''']^}''^^^^^^ art?m mililum dimlsii ; In 
 
 potal^set (i. e. si in inipeno '"=i' '"'-^f ^^f ."^' Jl'",) /.^S perhaps have reme- 
 
 ihis bad situation Lueiil us, f^^^^^'^^J^^^'^l'^^ your order 
 
 duMl these defeats (. .If »;;^.»^^;^ /^j^ '•^^f,,^".f ^^ "''^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ form 'ix>tuis.et^ would 
 
 „, dismiss part o the tio<.p- t c Leg Man. .^^^^^^^^ .^ ^^. ^^^^^^j 
 
 have been used. If the »OM>othetieal peno^^ Because, if 
 
 allowed you. would have 
 
 [iNDEPKNDENTLY : parU- 
 
 >% on account of 
 ie'i^overning predicate ' mittor the l;*^^ ot 7>7v*^m^ijj.^c^'^^j^^^ ^^^ 
 
 3.^f the thesis assunu^s the f<>""/' .; .f 'f^l^.^ii', t>?he preto^^^^ so ti^at (a) either 
 
 two forms, mentioned No. 2, are '^'^,*^" >f;^^j .P» ^J'/ahied without any change, as : Atqne 
 the hypothetical subjunctive ot ^be pluperfea is tta nu^^^^^ > ^^^ ^et/iight 
 
 hau<l sVio an par princunbus esse ^^'^^f/ ^ ^ f 1 no v u uu he night have been etc.). 
 have been equal to the nrstdterally: ^ ^]' ,''«^ '^"'''Vkk 4 _ (6) aP the predicate may 
 Cic. Hrut. 41. 151. This method however i*;«/^ ^J^^/^>,t-hich instance the indicative 
 assume the pe/iphra.<tic jor/,i («^'^^il'^ding to No. i,^^^^^^^ with a feme by 
 
 tense which it lias in the instance No. 2 i* changca inio a >^ J ^j ^f Rem. 95. 
 
 lon^eadion accordin,^ to tin; general rules but si^^^^ rf the penphra^- 
 
 Hence, if the governing predicate is ^'Onf^f^^'^^^^^^^^^^^^^ (^ gi ita forte accidissel. 
 
 tic future is u^ed, as : (iunm ux^c r^:!'r,^hf '^'^'.^^^^^^^^ Ihi^T/ou show what sort 
 
 fue/is illo tempore c«)n;nl.r«n.rw^- , ^ylen }Ou t^ d^ j.ki^pened so. Cic. Pis. 
 
 if a consul you trould have been a »»"^ ,/;";,*^: i;.JiV'i i si ta forte accidisset.] See Ex. 
 
 V. . mie fonn i- So e imes however the law of co/<fecuHo,i is, 
 
 the governing P'-cd.cate ' ;n //o t e a ol pnse^acc^ ^^ ^ ^^.^_^^^ ^^^^ 
 
-ill 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 came etident what an tiproar would have been earned by a real defeat. Li v. 2S, 24.— Id airi 
 apparChiit nt iiitciira t*il>i omnia ai)n(l Homiliios cf^hient. conciliiltn apud rcL'em {rratijl, 
 i\\\\n\,accei)trin fiiif>iient renienfeni; It was evidt-ntly intended that their rehitioiis to tlie 
 Koinans slioniii reinnin in tlu-ir previons Ptale, whili' tlie 5r<>od will of tlie kinir was con- 
 ciliated bv the fact that tluyivould have nceivid him if he had cmne. Liv. .'id. 5.— See 
 iix. S. — The predicate, however, t/iatj ht anrl almost always i.-i. in tlie perfect xufijunctice, 
 as a logical tense, if it. is allowed, or required by the rulet» in Ki-ni. «H and •>.}. altli--n-h the 
 rules in Keni. 94 are rarely applicable t() hypothetical predicates. But in modal Ut-ctanses 
 (IL Si'i) xhti sufijt/ncfire perfect i\ri hypothetical tense of the thesis, may be con>idered as 
 the rule*, as : Viri^incs eo cursu se ex sacrario prorij)uerunt, uf, si elVui^ium patui>set, 
 impletilne \\\\w\n tnmnltu fuerint: that, if an escape had been open, tliey uou/d have filed 
 the whole city with lumuU. Liv.24,',>r.. So also, if the thesis is introduced by quia after 
 non duhito. St-e Ex. 9, and p. 132, 2; p. 1:J3. Ex. 23. Or (c\ the predicate may take a 
 non-periphrastic tiiisc of tlie verb, subject to the law of consecution, tht; same as in No. 
 2, so that it is in the j)luperfect, or in the perfect subjunctive, according; as the govern- 
 injj: predicate is a pietrrite or a non-preterite. If it is tlius in \\\v, plu)>erffcf. it cannot 
 be'^distinL'i'ished from the form menii«)ned No, (a). If it is in xUc perfect, the tense of 
 the hvpoUu'iicai clause, accordin-r to 11. 9«, Obs. 7. is often attracted, as : StquenttirWla 
 ...,iiiier loium viiain et improbis-imOrum niliil oinnTno j///r-/-(?^>-tf, ?// Plato, ^i sapiens 
 iiiin fiierit. nihiio melius (pi'iui (juivi< iuiprobissimus nee beatius ri.irrit : Next icill this 
 follow, that there IK wo di fere me at all between the lives of tlie former and those of 
 the most wicked, s(» that Plato, if he hail not been wise, wonld iioi have lived any belter 
 or happier than the verv worst men. Cic. Fin. 4. 9, 21. [indkpknukntlv : Plato, si sa- 
 piens non tm.'<sef, nihild melius rij-isset (or vi.rerut).] See Ex. 10. 11.— This method is 
 chietlv eiuploved witli a copula added to a predicaie-adj'Ctive, or i)redicatf-nouii (as in 
 Ex. 9"and 10i,"t)r if the verb does not Ibriu a verl)al adjective in tlr'/s. In the al)ove-men- 
 tioned exainpl-, the form rictan/ti fnevit has not been employed by theautlior on account 
 of the amhi<;iiitv which would have arisen from the etjUiility in form of the veil)al ad- 
 jective Vict urns' of the verb vincere. This form of the ordinary perfect subjunctive la 
 most frequently applied to the perii)hr;istic «renindial, to po.oie and debere (oii«_'iit to), mul 
 certain impersonals, all of which, according; to p. 727 loll., are used in the jHrfc indcatire 
 with the force of a hypothetical pluperfect subjunctive, as: (Iw.vv'x^ quid luttonii auipliua 
 assequi Plaix-iiis si Cn. Pompeji fuisset liliiis ; You ask ivhaf more Plancius could liave 
 obtained if he had been Cn. I'ompey's son. Cic. Plane. 24, m. Very frequently these 
 perfect suhjunctiv<'s (/x>/w<'/-<7 and debuerif^uro used as loirical lenses in modal I t-clanses 
 (acc«H-din<( lo Ji. 95) if the iroverniiiij predicate of the hypoth -tical period is u preferifc, 
 as • Ejusmodi paciiOnes in coitioue candidatorum consularium/ac/tK sunt ut nemo bonus 
 int'cresse dtbutrit ; Such compacts were made in the meeting' of liie consular candidates 
 that no decent person ouiiht to hare staid tiiere. Cic. (^u. '^'r. 3, 1. 1«». See Ex. 12-1;).— 
 The perfect subjunctive of postie is also used if the thesis has the form ol a Qu7n-cfau.<te 
 not strictly belou^iiiir to the modal-clauses, mostly il the iroverninjr p'<^'ilit-»t'* .^* " "^^* 
 dubifdvi'' or an equivalent expression, as: Haud du/Aumfuif f/ui/i. nisi ea mora interve- 
 liisset, castr.i eo die Punica c:\\n potueiiat ; There aax no doubt but tlmt on that day the 
 Punic camp miqht have been taken if that delay had not interfered. Liv. 24, 42. 
 
 4. If the predicate of the thesis is in the passive voice, the hypothetical forms mentioned 
 above are generally not directly used, l>ut. whenever the sen<e permits it, circumlocii- 
 lions by 7>ov6.e with a i)assive ol)ject-infinitive, or by a predicative (jerundial are einployed, 
 both of which are placed in the i)erlect subjunctive according,' to No. 3, c. as : Tantum 
 pavoris injecerunt ut. si in piano castra posita essent, haud dubie pnmo impetu capi ix>tu- 
 erint ; They caused so much terror that the camp would (literally 'coubr) have been un- 
 questionably taken U it had been erected on level ^^round. Liv. 25, 13.— In eos versa 
 peditum acies haud dubiuin fecit quin. nisi lltmflta extrema airnunis fuissent, imrens in 
 eo saltu accipienda clades fiurit : The fact that llie footsol(li<-rs ha<l to meet the attack 
 of these, made it evident fhatn i'orm'nlahlinh'h'iit would have been sufered in these moun- 
 tains, if the rear of the army had not stood their jrround. Liv. 21. 34 [literally ' it would 
 have been necessary to sutler', the periphrastic irernndial havin.!,' evidently the force of 
 an onlinary hypothetical i)assive]. See Ex. 12. 14. 1."). If such a circumlocution is not 
 admitted by tiie connection, the predicate of the thesis is placed in the pist participle 
 wilh fore/u (p. l:JO. li. 140 ; p. 137, L'. 152), which, in this connection, imparts to the pas- 
 sive a hypothetical character, the same as the periphrastic future to the active, as : 
 Quam vi-re de Ly^i\m\vo foref Judicilf urn, (i. e. si jiulices eiim coiidemnas<ent), oratio in- 
 diciofuit qua* post mortem in domo ejus reperta est; How just the sentence against 
 ! ysander icould have been (literally : ' how justly it would have been jud ged on Lysau- 
 
 riie reason of this usatre of the periphrastic form in preference to an ordinary ])lu- 
 ct subjunctive, is to be found in the fact, that the connection of modal Ut-claused 
 !>1 iperfects is adverse to their nature. See Rem. 95, Obs. 3. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 445 
 
 der'), was proved by the speech which after his death was found in his house. Xep. Lys. 
 
 3 5 * 
 'obs.4. Sometimes the /A6,^ of a hypothetical period dependent on anothe^^^^^ 
 is vnderstvjod In this instance the hypothesis (hypothetical clause) t.-.kes the hame foini 
 iVu wmi n^^^ the-is were expressed, so that, if the governing predicate is non- 
 
 rrJteHte the law oi'con^^^^ i. excluded in the same way as in theabove-mentio.ied 
 
 n^t\rn e • Sed inc vera pro gratis loqui, etsi meum ingenium non rjwneret, necessitas co- 
 r / • But 'iiecess tv i/ /U me to make rather a true than a pleasant statement, even if 
 myt^^\n^^w^^^^^ me to do so. Liv. 3, G8. (i. e. Necessitas coi^it. el coqerd^i 
 
 meum i ."^d.^^^^^^^^ moneiet).- Vide ne religio nobis tarn adhibenda nt qua.n si tes i- 
 Sonium llicerlmvs ; Take care that we must not apply t« > V^-ttmmfv^^^Cic Brut 85 '^3 
 aid of reli-don in the same manner as if we were giyin<r a testimony. Cic. Brut. So, .y-i 
 [ = quam adhiberlmus si testimonium diceremus]. See E:c. lb. 
 
 Obs 5 The use of an imperfect as loqical teme, if the subjunctive depends on non- 
 preterite predka es^ is not frequent. Such imperfects are used : 1) to give the dependent 
 Si ctive%' ) ne pa licular force which would be lost by a tense of present consecution 
 To s (5 2) if he g^.verning predicate contains ix paM tense by imphcatwn, analogous p 
 Ihr^similar case wht-n tense? of present consecution refer lo^ present contained by inipli- 
 caiionin the governing predicate (A'. 94, OBS. 2). bee Obs. 7. 
 
 Ocs fi. Imperfect subjunctives dependent on non-preterites refer to a particiilar force 
 of the acti 1 1) to designate the predicate as a potential interrogative subjunctive (§.)93), 
 ai • &AF/4 a te c?//- 1. Corneliuu'i n. n defenderemf I eu<k you why I should no have de- 
 fv;../^ / r C( rnelius Cic Vatin. 2. 5. ^'either defendam. nor defenderim would express 
 thi'lnim'im* D^ivdam would mean ' why / dd not defend ', and. defenderim-' why / 
 did not de iMul ' ^2) O they i,re-nantly refer to a ' supposition \ e.th.;r l,y representing 
 some neiXr of the clause as an hypothesis against reality (,r i.nplyiniz any other sup- 
 iT don the force of which would not appenr by usii.i: regular tenses of present conse- 
 cution Some of these imperfects strictly fall under the rule in Obs 2. But the hspo- 
 ?1 etic-il reference is not always clear by the sentence itself as it is in the p.-issages quoted 
 Oni 2 nor c«,rid always be conveniently expressed by a reirular hypotl.etica 
 eriod Vr inie n(,n est\xx Ilejus reliL'iOni su.e pecun am ar^tepemeret : It is^.ot 
 e*-"." .-. \ . ,V . 7 7 i „t..,.i.i^\ ;,/,)-^ /iz;/// inoiiHv liio-her rhaii hisrelllT'"" ' "^ 
 
 \ 
 
 ro la le that Hejus would (not • should ') have held money hiirher than his religion. C c. 
 
 N\ri 2 4 ILt^^^^ 'peondam.^ has the forca ' si quis ei pemniam qferret . 
 
 Tt, rn.Mt.'et snbiunetive ' anteposuerit' would intimate that money was really otleivd to 
 
 h n n 1 di c u e wo^d lender by ' should have held ') while the connection shows 
 
 ht 1 em ley ottered was a merely nominal sum. which faci the author intimates by 
 
 Ihf 1 vrnX Ol f«»nn of the predicate.- Verisimile non est nt (Sulla). ()iiem in ot.o sem- 
 
 pcM- scl- 1 hab isset. hunc in eo tumultu qiiem ip^c coinparabat. ab .edumtferet ; Is 
 
 1 ot m-ol) h le tliat while Sulla was enga-ed in that rebellion whicii lie hin.se t was plan- 
 
 n- - is n-i3.e^^^ as having planned), would (not ^ sbould') have disni^ssed, a man 
 
 •Si healu^s h;^^ hiufi;. quiet times. Cic. Sull. 20, 57. Here the object 't« 
 
 rJ/VAi, //»' h-i; a 1 vi'oil.etical force ( = si turn in tumultu fuisset quern ip-e comparas- 
 
 set)Tfl-rH^ denied by the speaker If ^dimiserit^ had been used, 
 
 the evprJi"io~n in eo tumultu quem comparabat ' would have been represented as con- 
 
 i^i n ' a r e fact.t--Sitiius is Immo est ut. . .sibi nefa. mm helium contra patriam sus^r- 
 
 uin p fdref ^ Is Sittius a man of that character that he would have f^iouqhtu his 
 
 ,y'o -Xu^e ;«: agent of Sulla, a nefarious war against ^-.^-"l^'^J.^f^,^ '^^f^ ^ 
 
 rsirnniv • ' s-i Sulla eum ob ta em cau.sam amandassel . if Sulla iiaa uispau uea nun lor 
 
 such a uurm se • P^averir would represent the • suscipere bellum ' as referring to t he 
 
 r •d^^Tpl m at he time, which fact is denied by the speaker.- Ttr/.o can sas ...... 
 
 m-' n u Itas u ' ( = ejusmodi ut ) istum impeUerent ; / see that there are many.ca.tses which 
 
 ir// iir^ / '//r^Aim a.e. Ti. Koscius to assassinate Sex. Rosctus». Cic. Kosc Am. 
 
 ^!92. Tc\u!sasess e quceimpelkrentr has the force of -Causas satis inagnas esse ut eu n 
 
 * All these substitutions prove that the Latin considered the form of an ordinary 
 nbmer feet suh iinctive as generally insufhcient to designate tlie predicate as hypotheti- 
 cal in the ca^'tC clause as s.uh requires the subjunctive. And since, in the pas- 
 s?i( the Sped e t of t e .H-riidnastic future was unavailable, other lorms had.to be 
 device bv which the hypothetical m.-anin:: mi'/ht be c ear ydesi-nated Thus m he 
 abov.Mii ■ ntio„-d passa^ri of Nepos, the pluperfect essetjudwafum would have impart-d 
 ?, he seileiicethe m.'aliing • How true icas the sentence pas^sed upon Ly.^ander', which 
 would mean .-xactlv the contnuy of what the author meant to say, since he luieuded lo 
 convey the idea that the sentence on Lysander was not correct. 
 
 t (^ompare the passages Cic. Sest. .3(}, 78: Rose. Am. 41, quoted p. 612. in which the 
 perfect subjunctives used after verisimile noa est denote tacts not qualilied by supposi 
 lions of any kind. 
 
41G 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 kffed by him as 'po^'^ibleilulllCeIIu>nU^] , .. , • ,. 
 
 a«L , at An.o>,l„. .l,oul,l ha,-, ,i„r.U to H.y »''l"'' X"','' '^;'!»'. r,^', ^;re ', ' a«]«i M' 
 
 ,i. _, „1 ..osmet ■j.sos •"«•■";• ""^,'""!'; •«„","*'«'■* hoW.v.T, such hnpoiTucls seem; 
 e)«ur l=e«<ety"!«. Cic Lei;. 1, i.. '".'"",'. ..i /)i,~> Jj./ niTtic i-uin i posse, iilsl 
 
 ci crura /r*-^« «s™< unste:i(l of ««/.UI.HM. 1.^^^^^^^^ 
 
 t;r;;cc;ri'^' l;;crc;^^^.J.;v,,^'r;\,l;r;!.v,!;^■/^^jl'.e cur,.ct vea..,,. m t,.. 
 
 .imriarconnccVion.l^.io ,,as.agt.« of Cicero, llcucc the vulgaia jHUe,e- 
 
 '% 'iCSp-f u;I^r'Si.>^o^[hi;^pas.a,e i. wroujr, since ' i./a ' is very «tramr.-ly u.od I 
 prLunK^t htu Cicl 'ro "toV > dicta ' i.f place of '^/a ', ulf.ch would make the unperlecl 
 audlrtt a ie>;ular lense by coueeciition. 
 
 DErENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 447 
 
 sent the action as present at the moment of speakincr.]-- 5) Ihe u^e of the imperfect 
 Hibiiimtivc dependent on u<.n-p.eteritc>f, is a necessity in some particular instances 
 'vhe' lie ^anA?a<'e lacks available tonus to satisfy t..e grammatical requirements of the 
 aw «,f CO. se(v t o.Vas : Conadamw'^ fam« hominnm ut genere etiam Iffrmjur Jioi, 
 so u. ts< ' in-e .io livlno ; I^t v.^ alloic this to the fame of (izreat) men that they ^f>wm 
 //aiT Le^ A^K/i to be not onlv of divine mind, but also of d.vine extraction. Cic Kep. 
 /mif &e^« r.y m^ I , ,^„ ,,/ .putarenhir could not assume a i)e.fect {jnitati mit) 
 
 a^ orefiicate " K v ui^ represent the «ct ion ' permitte<l ' as anterior to the p.rui,ss,on 
 Ti/e<nenin^ resent coJedd.nm ' impl.es a preterite, since ''.'«.^^'•Vr;,^^^. "Sn at 
 ex nre-ion places hi.nself with his mind in a i)ast nme, a- if giving the permisMon at 
 hf iiuL «7 6 i suc^i beliefs prevailed, beinir. as it were, an ex past /ado peruiiss on. 
 Fm-Mu-h CO fceut ions neither the Latin nor the En-Iish language has inventea a particu- 
 lar form (t S e" - o -past imperatives' as .n Gre.dO, and hence the pre-^ent forms 
 ust euve.rint it the lorce of a preterite.- 6. Sometimes the preterite on which 
 ■ pen ient s ulOuucti es are dependent rs understood, (as in the examples nu;ntioned 
 n 4->4 No 8 'b as : Jam vero illud quam incredibile (i. e. esi\ quam absurdum {i. e.fais- 
 L^uui iiom* Svdeni facere, qui t.anc urbem intlammare vellet eum lamiianssinu m 
 H nn. din.itJr* • I w ^ it\ and how absurd (woidd it have bee») that he, who 
 
 ^m/r.i to im^^ at Kome, and to burn tJiis city, should send away his mo.t 
 
 intimate friend. Cic. Siill. 20, 57. 
 
 1. n..n«'stnmi tale e^t nt, vel si^ igr^omrfvt id homines, yel si f>^V'''^llf'l(l' nn% nt 
 men pulcritudine ei^.^'et laudabile*. Cic. Fin. 2.1.5.-2. Kgo Bruti rem-. ^'C «f70« ut 
 rn,mi i.wr.ii. nV/r/^rf^' lb Att 5 18. 4.— 3. IIos viros rfrieo in suspicionem populo Ro- 
 
 es-e" di'Miitati sua\ lb. IMiil. 1. 6. 1.5.- 4. EloquentiS »esnoj\n^^ Gracchus "aOuujei 
 mri.n iMn em ID Brut. :«. 120.-5. />ic quidnam/rtc//7r?/^/Mm.* si eo tempore cen^o^ 
 
 p,.-nau-rem>5 commQnis libertiltis si occasioni potuis<et occurrerei« Brut ad Cc^ 
 IV- 7 Quis d>,hitat qnin, si Saiiuntlnis tulisscMiius opem. totum in Hispan am be urn 
 aver.^rvi^-' fmnmu.rUy. 31, 7.- 8. Dixit Csesar, se, qu.^d in longiorem A^^ncalat^l- 
 r /!i« />/W/'« rei.riesent.tflrum^o, ,.t proxiu.a nocte castra motQrum. Csps. B.. G. ,1, 40. 
 -%. 'Adeo nopia est roart.s Hannibal ut, nisi cum fujz^ spec e- »V' m'^'rnnir^f.W« 
 r,.i linn jvH^/i/ 7/-«s22 fuerit Liv. 22, 32.— 10. Quantum periodom ab ilhs populi>/^/m« 
 S ( Won n exs.nbuC^obsessMm scissent, suspicari de pneterito quam re ipsa expe- 
 , ri " /^ s lb 3, <•.- 11. Nihil ex conmieatibus" ,nperahaf^\ omn. Irtimento m ur- 
 
 Tsmu ; nis'convec^^.-^^ nt Hispanonim trans^ 
 rum exspect,Va foret. lb. 22. 40.- 12. lb, ^'l^l^or trepula lOnem /e« 2« m si^J^^^^^^^ 
 h)n.'ius insectiti essent, magna clades a^npi potuerit. lb. 42, (T().— 13. Hjec '<;S sii» 
 i on e-'9 srek"sta et nefaria"^;! ut, etiamsi lex n<.n esset, ma-nopere vifavdafvent^^. 
 ('i Verr 1 42 UK- 14 Taun^^exstidt pavor^i ut, si admOtus extemplo exerc,tu« 
 f. ret omi cntTa pof>'ennt. Liv. 43. 4.- 1.5. Venfum erat eo^^ ut..si hostem similem 
 a tlqui- >IacedoMUin re-ibus babuisset consul, ma-na clades acajn P^%^|^^.J ':/J; J- 
 -- l.i Pruticiscauuir ad earn cui graiior nosier adventus erit quam st nn^^^fuis^emus. 
 Cic. Att. 9, 192. 
 
 3. Conversion of Tenses. 
 § 607. Since the two futures have no subjunrtivcs, they must be con- 
 verted into other tenses, if the construction requires predicates, referring 
 to the future, to be in a dependent subjunctive. For this purpose two 
 methods are used, the method of ordinary tenses, and the method of 
 
 PERTPIIRASTTO TENSES. 
 
 "Moralitv.- -^ both if., ami.- ^ obvivtni, I am mute (have J^^^V^"^^ 'J^"^*;^-- . ^jj?': 
 able estimable - * the affairs.- « to conduct.- ■< vt non ageretsiageret.- « Dat. of the 
 fnteivM -d S^^^^^ - «supply : in ,u.yncidnem.- ^» which would.be disgraceful l>y it ^f ^ 
 
 i^^Ti 11 aliudaccederet.-n that each, from a diflerent reason, is comprm^^ 
 
 Uv - '•■' <^ '> /? 7H.- ^3 1 e. si vita ei lomrior f uisset.- ^* pr^sjo vu ahqnern, I i^ro e 
 ^\e sou.ething p. ibl. A.- iMhe tnost zealouschatnpinn.- >; If h^^^^^^^ 
 oonortunitv — ^^ to ward otT.— i«* postp(me to a later day.- i» f. e. niM ilia accmis. eiu. 
 ^'.oVo lacipate.- - appearancU ?^ to return xo.-y^ f^PP^^,;;",! ^^Tv^the ' ful- 
 U.f, _ 25 to convev — 26 = ut HispJliii trnnsire parati fuerint (to desert).— ^J ".the lul- 
 m' ; ' of time i^^ui been expected I e. if they had waited for the rijrh time - " cans.^ 
 ?onsteruation.- ^» by itself.- ^» ought to have been can*f">'> ,« .^^f^^JT^ .^^^^ 
 the discouragement.- a-» things had come to that pass.- 3» if ^^e had been m eacn 
 other's company. 
 
•I M) 
 
 .mtH*U<*r«> f 
 
 Vn OF THE HllULNCllVE. 
 
 tt 0i f-rim* 
 
 it': I» 
 
 ttotl 'Cllil»- 
 
 •'' «|U»' « i.m 
 
 I him*.-' ' 
 - 'II Hut !• 
 
 ClM.T. liiiiMTfiMl •iihlunrllv«'i".«l«|KMnU'iit oiijir 
 
 ■ n If II.. i.... 
 
 , of it \itI» of 
 
 IIIIOIC 
 
 < . .1» 
 ihjii II 
 
 lor uiltlnir» i» mx'ii to 
 
 r ■ I" wlnt !•>• 
 
 I< 
 
 ,. ... . it III III) 
 ll>tHl II III*' rliiU»)' I 
 «if fiiiittii* iifiiii) I 
 fitil*)*** ' '>•■<••'•'•••«' ' 
 
 ri' ' ■ 
 
 V" 
 
 tin 
 
 pt 
 
 II'. 
 
 |. a J 
 
 • tf tllf 
 
 N. I». I. l."»; S> II tin- pt 
 -«', urn»»-'''"' lo | niN'>, Oi: i 
 
 fc piiilii . n» II III «llrrcl «iHroiir^r, 
 
 U jiiifWtTrd llmt 
 
 Mi. fal. :ii. 1. - 
 
 (,^ ojMn Ik iirimo ,/,/ . Ill- ortliTrd Hum 
 
 ,,,. I > all th,i) ,tntltt. [.. ... .', Crtt»» «tl l'.»|»iliiini 
 
 ,/,• III , I rfinaii^ri*. ihtiiiuIo imiih iMiffft ►mraiiunlo; 
 
 vr..u- I.. I'..i'1'tu.. h.' ^ho'tM Uh.I hi- mhi l «««Ih it hv /nnnifU'i hlni lo 
 
 niiiiv rir nir 1 n..i»i»-In III ^ l'n|K.rl«Mi -iii.iiiitrtiveH hio 
 
 ,,in |ii.« ()i. W»."i No. U) : ii \\ muif nin» i:«iuTa 
 
 i--liiiii liunr 1« Mil III «♦■f// ,. j/i ; / «/ /thin \\ Imlo 
 
 ulyli'H III itiM-aklmr «»» whirl» aimont hoIumIv him t;hfn any 
 . rMiiiJiiii" tlir lm|n'rif<i ftdhf U. f. 
 r thrii-fof tin- imp«Mfi'«l.— 4) S<mH'- 
 iiniii>«-. Ill naiiKi-- ui «IimtI F.iHiriiiriit. an- (lc|MMnl<'iit on t 
 
 ,, tw iIk- fnn-r of itntti-ittti, up : IliK In omi/Kifa* IpMniinMii Fii'' i 
 
 f^iH nui.lr .>.»/ <o|.ini.f ft oriiRt.' (lli-«Tf ; >\ Hit «li«-<' (irrmt «»ialor-) you 
 ^vho ./ I'trf v»'l what if nttnnt |o »iw:ik with a full r«>in- 
 
 ,. hihI Tir linil. K't. .ilM \>'HMiii,<in/>tn - i/"i niinpira- 
 
 Mhir, lh«- iMTfrrt paril<i|»l.' a ix imii-ual in thl* in.niiii.L'. TIm* iinpri fret 
 
 »ni.iuiic(ivi. rw,./ i- ii-.mI |..r th. . :• .... i: - !o M'|'ri-''nt iIm- paniciple >>>isjnninfu/i as 
 
 «■.nilvMlrni i..a n-latiN.TliiiiH.. with n itnlfrife ; «'he ili«' pivM-iit xi/ woiiiji hav.- hvii 
 „,,.,|i « i t.iiita i-iat p4i*ii I ««nit (.\iitoiilii«'> «liirn- In h<MM»rtlln«' rt»"/</'f, 
 
 !•«• «liPliirt. im in. 'am ? For «hat «i inu- in m» ;rr<-at a penalty pioviih-d in the 
 
 \a\\* I hat Aiiioiiln- shnuhl hun ihiml to ^\w wv nr IhmIv. ih.it In- would cic. CV. 
 
 IMill 1 :> \'i. \h>n>i *Mt \\i\* Ww U^n-v i'i • lnrna " </,(*"/." Tin* ptTff.t ' a>if>ix t-tl 
 
 would hnvc r»'pr»-rnl«Ml AiitonluHi» artlon h* nnterior lo the law: <iwc/«'«/ would rrpre- 
 • Mailvii: con'idir»* 'i//' '" In «he alM.vi'-mcntion.d '•• a^ an iiiaccunito 
 
 {if faulty» «•xprt-!'l->n. add: :._ . .' thcanilmr had. in wayini^ ■ <;i ' '.at tin- sanu- iiinu 
 
 thoU"hr of 'm'/Aav^/M^*"', which would place this Inip.rfpct undntlu' rule in Uur*. T.uikI 
 mu-i" I'von th.ii. I.r con>i.I. rrd a If-iilinato c.n.Mniciion. Siinil.irlv: Kjiih pn.-cpil 
 I/ r UI noHinot ipsof* no.«« irr'inn^Mant.i .r/»^/*'^* <"•/ ut i*i. in»n hoinnd. m<1 dco //•</>«- 
 •iiiur (:= tot ft /'/iVi. Cic. Lr^'. 1. i2. In mmu.' pa^-ai;-'^. Ik'w.v. r. such iinp.i ficis .•^eim 
 
 to he 'Inaccurately' ii^i'd hv incro oviM>ii:lit. a-: in<i^<>l^l, pci-Ikmumi i p«>ssc. nisi 
 
 ol crura /rr/.M rxx./i/ .In-'tc.ol of ^i»t*. Cic. I'hil. 13, Vl.-Vt Mci,-.^^ K-natiuin a inc dilici, 
 .»hcuin rem tUd har snif^'ilh. Fain. M IT); u- if '*rH/wi' h:id hccn u-.-d, whicli ko p-l-u- 
 larlv occiii!* In i*\u\\ coninTtioii!'. that p.rh.ips 'ttcri/m" i;* the euriict readin*,' In this 
 oa-'i'n-.'tMHrc i'ic. Fain. l.i. Hi; n. 07, ami often. Coiiip. p.-'J-iTi. ., ^ s n 
 
 tThc variation of tfiift; in th- pas-a-»''* <>f Sallust i- nia(.%' without any aot^itrnahle 
 ri-a-on; hut in ilic pae^a-e Cic. OtV. 1, II, the author pn»haidy in.anr to avoid an ainhi- 
 iriiitv which ini<'lit ari-e Ironi the ii^e of the impcrfc» t (Mifj'inf, which ould he under 
 
 i»tiM)d in a hypoilicticai f'cn? 
 
 Cato wrote "to P«»pilius /<n;r he (Caio) icould f/hiit 
 hV-"'-«Mi ifh'e irato» )ro'/A/ <//Ay^^^^ him to remain in the army'. Thi.s .imhiiruity niiirht 
 also l»eav«.idcd hy ad»)ptin-,' the rradiii;: • yM/j,?/'//- ' of one inferior codc.x, nv l>y readuij;, 
 wlih «eveial codlcen. patilur', which would likewise exclude a liyiunheiical meaning,', 
 antl which would answer the rule p. 40-2. Ons. 3. The (h.cunientary authority of both 
 rea.iiii"^ (#//(/</'//• and pateittnr) is al)<>ut iipial. IJut the u>ai:e ol suhohlique indica- 
 tives o"f thi- kind occurs oiilv in hist<»rians. while tlie use of iinperlecl subjunctives in 
 flmilar connections is loundin several passa^'es of t'iceiu. Hence ihe vuigala 'jMittre- 
 <eir* st-eins to deserve prefi-nnce. , i t 
 
 ♦ Perh M's the readiii:: of this pa«!>aj?o 1;» wroufr, since ' Ma is very PtrancrHy used. 1 
 presume thit Cicero wrote Ulicta' in place of 'is(a\ which would make the imperfecl 
 andlret a rej,'ular tense by coueecution. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 447 
 
 4 
 
 iM»nt the action a» ])rc^cnt at the moment of ppeakinjr.]-- 5) The use of the imperfect 
 fiiltjiiiiclive. dependent on non-pieieritC!«, is a necessity in gome particular instances 
 where the \n ■ lacks available lonns to Hatisfy t..e «irammatical requirements of the 
 
 lavv <ir eoiis' .a- : ( otici'/ih/iiix lama' homiiium ut geiiere etiam pi/farefttu7\ now 
 
 i*oiiim • Hse in;:eni<» divTno ; /^ f i/^ <ill<>w llii-' to tlie f.iiue of (L^reat) men that theri should 
 hart t^en Im'Iu rut to be not only of divine mind, hut also of divine extraction. Cic Kep. 
 a, 2, 4. The Imperative daiisti vt.. .putarentur could not assume a i)erfect (jnttdfi sint) 
 as predicate, which would n-present the action 'permitted' as anterior to the permission. 
 Tlie ^'overniiiL' present ' conrtilanuiH' implies a i)reterite. since tlie writer, by usinj,' this 
 ^•xpre^'^ioll. phices himself with his mind in a past lime, a- if yivino; tlie permission at 
 the lime wktrt such beliefs i)revailed, beinir, as it were, an ex i>m1 facia i)ermission. 
 For such conceptions neither the Latin nor t!ie En-lish lanjruaj;e has inveuteti a particu- 
 lar form, (there beliisr no • pa^t imperativei* ' as in Greek), and hence the ptesent forms 
 must be useil. but with the force of a preterite. — 6. Sometimes the preterite on which 
 <|ependent htibjunctives are depeiuh-nt rs inidtrntDOd, (as in the examples mentioned 
 p. 4il. No. K. SI), as: Jam vero ilUid qiiain incredibile (i. e. est), quam absurdum (?. e.fuis- 
 Ket), qui Itonue ca'dem facere, qui liaiic urbem inflammare relict, eum lamiliarissimum 
 Miiim dimiitere; How incredibe (?w i7», and how aiisurd {nry/ld it /tare bee it) that he, who 
 judfttuifti to make slaiiirliter at Home, and to burn this city, sliould send aw;iy his most 
 inliliiale friend. ( ic. bull. 20, 57. 
 
 1. Ilonestum' tale est ut, vel si' ignordrent id homines, vel si ohninfvissenf^, suS ta- 
 inen pulcritndine eiti<et laiidabile*." Cic. Fin. 2. 15.— 2. Ego Bruti rem^. sic ago^ ut 
 mam ip-^e noii (igrrrf. lb. An. .5, 18. 4. — 3. IIos viros ^//^//eo in suspicionem populo Ro- 
 inAini'' venire, non inodo metu>''. quod ijisiim essef^^ turpe. sed aliiim alia de causS de- 
 es-e" diirnitnti sine. lb. I'hil. 1. (», 15. — 4. Eloquentiil nesno an'-' Gracchus liabuisftet^^ 
 jiarein iieminem. lb. lirut. :\i\. 12li. — 5. Die q\\'\t\ivAm fact arus fueris si eo tempore censor 
 I'uifses. I.iv.'l. ;«. — H. Son tlnltHo qiiin Antistius se ^«•«'^•/^/«/'/•«.«'^/'/m/aceriinium pro- 
 jni^rnaiorein'* commflnis libertatis si occasidni potuis-et occiirrere'*. Brut, ad Cic. 1, 
 11.— 7. Uuis duhitdt (juin. si Sai:uiitTnis tulissemus opem. totum innisi)aniam helium 
 aiersilii^^ fueiDimsf Liv. .31, 7.— 8. DiHl Csesar, se, quod in loiipOrem diem collatu- 
 7«>"'/>/i.H>r7'*'. reiinesent-itflnim'-'", et proxiiuS nocte castra motanun. Cjps. B. G. 1, 40. 
 — !». Adeo inopiil f-st roitctus H.innibal ut, nisi cum fu<r8B specie^i abeundum timuisset, 
 (Jalli.iin nj)>fi/i7ri/.-"-/itcn/. Liv. 22. ;i2.— 10. Quantum period'im ab illis popnlis/V it 
 si Ctipitoliuin al» exsillbus obse^siim scissent. suspicari deprieteritoquam re ipsa ex,»e- 
 rlri ext jneliiis. lb. ;i. Id.— 11. Nihil ex commeatibus^a .'iitperdhat'*, onini humento in ur- 
 bls miiiiltas eonvecto-'. lit HispanOrum transitio''^''/)ar(7^rt /?'<^n)' si maturiias^^ tempo- 
 rum exspect.lta foret. lb. 22. 40.— 12. Ibi clamor trepidatiOnem /e«/2» nt, si hostes 
 loiiL'ius insecflti tssent, magna clades accipi potuerit. lb. 42, *(>. — 13. HaiC res sua 
 siionie-" scelenlta et iiefaria fsl nt, eiiamsi lex non esset, mairnopere vitanda fverit^^ . 
 Cic. Verr. 1.42. lOS.— 14 Tantus e,rs-/i(it pavor^i ut, si admntns extemplo exercitua 
 foret. caj/i ca^\m j>ofaerint. Liv. 43. 4.— 15. Vtntuin erot eo^^ ut. si hosrem similem 
 niitTqiii< M.icedomim re<ribus liabuisset consul. maLMia clades arcijn potuerit. lb. 44, 4. 
 -- Hi. I'r<iticisc.amiir ad eum cui gratior nosier adventus erit quain si \x\\^^^ fuissemus. 
 Cic. Att. 0, 192. 
 
 3. Coniersion of Tenses. 
 % 607. Since the two fiitiucs liave no subjunrtiveg, thc\^ nmst be con- 
 verted into other tenses, if the construction requires predicates, referring 
 to llie future, to be in Ji dependent Fubjunctive. For tliis purpose two 
 methods are used, the method of okdinaey tenses, and the method of 
 
 rERlPIIKASTIC TEXSES. 
 
 1 Morality.— '■' both if., ami.— 3 obniutiii, I am mute (have become mute).— * credit- 
 able, estimable.— * the affairs. — « to conduct.— '' vt non ageret, d ageret.— ^ Dat. of the 
 interested person.— » snpi)ly: in maincidnem.— i" which would be disgraceful by itself 
 {i.e. si nihil aliiid accedereth— ^ that each, from adifleient reason, is compromising his dig- 
 iijtv.— »- § 423, li. 78.— 13 i. e. si vita ei lonirior fuisset.— i^ prces/o 7)ie aHqnein, I prove 
 to be something, p. 101, A.— i^ the most zealous champinn.— ^^ if he could have met an 
 oiiportunitv.- i^ to ward otT.- i« postp«me to a later day.- i» i. e. nisi ilia accidissent. 
 — 20 to anticipate.— 21 appearance.— "'- to return to.— 23 supplies.— ^* siqurdre, to be 
 left.— 25 to convev.— 26 = «t Hispani transTre parati f'uerint (/0 desert).— '^'> if the 'ful- 
 ness ' of time had been expected {i. e. if they had waited for the riL'ht time.)— 25 caused 
 consternation.- 2» by itself.— 3" ought to have been carefully avoided.— 3i so great was 
 the discourairement.— 32 things had come to that pass.— 3S if ^yg had been in each 
 other's company. 
 
as 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 ]?v the .nclhod of ordiiiary tense., the future-prescnt .s treatc.l as .f it 
 ^v...; anordin<,r!,pre»entM\n'^convenva into a prrseut or .mperfect snb- 
 , Klivraccording to the law of consecution (A'. 07). The l„.ure perlec 
 "::':«. a^ >.- it ;ere an orain„r, „erfie, hein, converted int.. a perteet 
 or pUiperfect snUjuuclivc according to the law ol consccut.on (K. 98). 
 
 Cihe n.e.hod of periphrastic tenses the fu.ure-present .s turned >n,o 
 the subjunctive of the present or imperfect tense of the P^V'^^ /''- 
 inre (m 130 131, R. Ul. 142), according to the law of consecution {11. 9 , 
 OBS 1) S nee the suhjunetivos of the ;.,/<W and ;,.;,.</... of the per,- 
 nhr«t c future are appropriated by the hypothetical preterites (It. 9G, 
 oTs 3 tUis method cannot be applied to the/«.,«-;«,/..* ; nor can 
 it be applied to the pa.^>ivc toiee of either future, since a penphrasi.c fu- 
 ture of the passive docs not exist (It. 97, Obs. 3). 
 
 aulhor. in « l.icl. nslnnre the J'';' ^Z, '^ \\' V,, V, \^^^^^^^ to ,h.. .penkiTV tin,,. .a< for 
 
 pi.niii- after the i„i.e^l.ekeii of w. I o t H ni^ 1 1 r , i_ ,„. .,,„.,. ,|„.y ,l„ not re- 
 
 Tnst. th^- Pre,iie:Ue.of e,mseou ,v. la-e . 1.. >..^lo l^"' ;J -, „^^, „,^. „ f,„„r„ ,„,.0 if the 
 
 pre.c.,l.the actjonas f n n e > ^^ ^^;,,tA , V'" ■■'■'■''•■"' *"''""'- .''''"" •'" '"," V'^ 
 clause, m wliicli tliey st i l.lie S?^) ',■',', -■.„,,, „, .,,.„„ ,„ „rl>e ess.t <iiii;)/iJoi"'i»'. Li»- 
 „.,„e qn..t,.,l .ihove : • T,l,ui,te» 1 ''> .y' ' ", V'\ [. ",> ■"«• I i,Mh-|,en<lei,tly. woehl t.ilve it» 
 «,:W\,hee.H,see,tuveclatse.' m « «^O^^^^ 
 
 predieute in tlie i;„,* i^ff/ atlrt not in ''''/'"" "....w,. is irnnired. liut if the ^-amc 
 
 k;;:-ii^'<^isK;;;«fXi^^^^^^ 
 
 k;^\ta"-i.l',,v;:,f:.;i^'i;ini.:^.''h;u^ acco,',lin« to me method of 
 
 '" R:r%-'Tn'cm,veHira FrTriiK.rn,.:sKNT into a subjunctive, onDi- 
 ^-v^frTt.N«F"a , used nifUie p.edi.ale sutiids to its priii<i|,a pre.Uoate 
 ?■ \ ia^^',„ r •! DKrFNDENT FiTVitE, SO that, by takin- Mh predi- 
 c"tero 1 i t e s,; ,j^;cfive coniu.,ti..n, it would be.a dependent luUire 
 af deli" ed Iv the rule p. 353, K. 7« ; 2) if the action ■^/•^"■«'^^ "">;,';,;' 
 fnt re lecessilv or .liitv, or as the object of a ooinniaiul or wish.- 1 Kiii- 
 !^ it\4it eiiies a rc'nse, 1) in relalioiis not belontxin- to those nientioned, 
 f" it- U e ic.im inplii's imthing Imt futurity independent "f <"'";'. -';• 
 tion« < r of o l.er fit ure aclions : 2» in all the instances wbeti 'I"' ;'>';'; 
 cx~d in lependeiillv, would have a predicate in the >;^:;=|'; <.';^' '■ 
 i^?l UK in it. pn.per ii.eaniii.s /. .. if the aeiioj. is n-pr-ented both a» fu- 
 ture and as cma-eiml at the speakers iniie (s •>(»., «■ 13.». 
 0«;. 1. The,e ptinciple. are >l"-,''m;.'-l J» '.lirv.'^J^Cnni'onmra^j'iensJ^^accordit.g 
 
 to^it^-isi^^eirtt^^-'is^r he^ ; o ;^;i. )^^ 
 
 ti^^X^::^:.:^ Sm^^lln^-Sn'liel^^'he IdiJe^d ^,^1.;:; tL .< ,.. peH„i,ia.ie fu. 
 ture. , , ♦. ^. .„...-;,.; on, 1 it^ ofinivaltMit!! (/? 82. Ods. 1. f/U//u'«.VN take 
 
 ordinary tens<.s alt .ouL'h, acTonlMV^ to the K -1 > ^/l \» ! .;.iV^, ^u,,,, ,« vc'rl.s of 
 that tl.ey sho.iUl take y)^nMra,s/i< um.|.c> I ut t . |^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ 
 
 ^;:;;;rs;i':^;lj;;^uon:^S^U^^^ ?;lr i^;^.:;u^:/"e;^onc j; ...^ aiway. ..... 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 449 
 
 i 
 
 ordinary tenses. Thus it must be explained that verbs of fearing take ordinary tenses, 
 a? • Non vereor ne nan gcribendo te expham (not fxpklurus nm) ; I am not afr id that 
 iikll not (be able to) satiafe you with my letters. Cic. Fam. 2, 1, 1.— It seems, however, 
 thit Dcriphra^tic tens^es were colloquially used in clauses dependent on verbs of fear- 
 in<' Thus we read in MatiusV letter to Cic. (Fam. 11, 28. 8) : Non verem- ne mcie vitse 
 niodo-^tia »(?;-?/ w t-aliturant in ])osterum contra lalsos rumOres (inst. of valeat^ ; I am 
 not afraid that niv modesty, in the fnture. tcill he of ihsnffidenf, .^trenffth against false 
 rumor- — Frequen'ily the futuritv of the action is intimated by the hmnforem in place 
 ol es'om lin the historians) : Timor in exercitnm incidit ne simul cum nge et Carthagi- 
 nieiUibu- forti bellandum ; The fear beJoll tlie army lest it inirjht be necessary to fight at 
 the riame time with the king and with the Carthaginians. Liv. 29. 24.— See Ex. 1-3. 
 
 3» Oblique clauses with quin alter non dubito and its equivalents (p. 388, Obs. 1, a) 
 "cnerallv take periphrastic tenses, except if the predicate is represented as an action 
 wliieh should be done, in which instance ordinary tenses are used : Mihi non est dvbium 
 (iiiin renturu; non sitd legiOnes ; It is not doubtful to me but that the Iciricms will come. 
 Cic Fam. 2. 17. 5.— Quuin nee milii nee fratri dubiiim essei qiiin Brundusium contende- 
 rtnv/s* when neitlier 1 nor my brother had any doubt but that we should ]jrocted to Brun- 
 du^iui^n lb Att. 8, 11 2>. 3. (The predicate co///^//cf<^7tw?/<* of the Quiii-daiise is rep- 
 resented as a rule for the speaker's future conduct.] Often, however, ordinary tenses 
 are used in these clauses : (Dixerunt) )-e non dubitdre quin Ariovistus de omnibus obsi- 
 dil)us <'ravis^imum suppliciiim suinat ; they did not dmibt but that Ariovistus ivould in- 
 flict the severest punishment on all the hostages. Cies. B. G. 1, 31. (About the use of 
 the present consecuti<m see p. 419. 420. Obs. 7. 6 and c): Sometimes both methods are 
 combined in the same sentence, as in Ex. 7. See Ex. 4-10. 
 
 4» 0»)liqiie clauses containin<r dependent questions referring to the fnture, irenerally take 
 pennhrastir teiuses. as : Nee ubi, nt-c quando te sim rl-iiruti possum suspicSn ; I have 
 no idea where, or when I sh<dl see von. Cic. Att. 11. 13. 2 — Lacedjemonii qiiasivSriint 
 num -eetiiim esset mori jwohihiturus ; The Lacedtemcnians asked whether he would 
 piohilAt them also to die. lb, Tusc. 5, 42. LIndependently : Avni jnvhib^bis etc.] But 
 if the answer expected on a dependent questi(m referring to ihe future, is a rule lor the 
 ix'r-on askino- (p. :39<». e), ordinary tenses must be used accordiuL' to the second rule in 
 Ji 97 • Hannibal circumequitat 'urbem ad visendum qua maxime parte aggrederetur ; 
 
 tiuiii«< nine- Vou show that you .-ue trviiig to ^'uess what rea.son 1 will give to Caesar m 
 ivard to mv dejiarture. Cic. Att. 11. 12, 1. [By changing ^im allaturus inio afferam. tlie 
 n.rs-jM'-e would have the meaninir 'that you are weighing the question what reason / 
 Ihoiild give to Cie.-ar'].— Deviations from this rule occur (a) if the use ol an ordinary 
 t.iKr in que-tions implv. Jig a future rule would be ambiguous, \u which instance peri- 
 Dlirastic tenses are preferred, as : f:o minus habeo necesse cogitate quid simjacturm ; 
 The ie*^ it is necessarv tliat I should think of ' how to act ' (i. e. that 1 should decide now 
 
 form of the verb^. Cic. Att. 9, 18, 4,- Hence if the futurity of the action is implied in 
 the gorertting verb, ordinary lenses may be used in iilace of the periphrastic?, winch is 
 always the case if an interroirative clause is made dependent on fxspectare, as : Orat ut 
 Quid in lU^vtxui^gerdtur exspectem ; He beseeches me to tvait (till I know) what will be 
 done in Spain. Cic. Att. 10. 8. 1.— Quid hostee conAVu caperent exspectabat ; He waited 
 (to know) what plan the enemy would/olloiv. Cse^ B. G. 3, 24.— See hx. 12-19. 
 
 ■)) Oin<i-obli(iue final clavse-^ alwavs take ordinary tenses according to the second rule 
 of 11 '»7 since the i)urpose in the mind of the doer of an action alwaj-s represents Ins 
 wish'. For Ex. See p. 40."). 408. 
 
 r 
 
 there are niaii'v who irill inform Cie-ar. Cic. Att. 11, 7. 5.- Romulus docSbat vir-ines 
 Sablna"^ eo meliOres viios usilras quod adnimrussit pro se quisque ut parentiura expleat 
 de<i(ieriiim • K<nnulus explained tiiat they would have so much better husbands, becmse 
 every one would stiive to efface by his own conduct their longinc; for their parents. Liv. 
 1 9 — Ego eis ita mandaram ut, quum lam longe abfuturvs essem, ad me ne referrent ; J 
 
450 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 451 
 
 had directed them not to report to mo: .^ince T icotiM be abf^ent for f^o \ovjr r t\mc. a^^^ 
 naa oirerreu ini u I. sciiti-i.te, were n-ii.ix.rnl, it would not admit ol a perl- 
 
 b ,, le ^i-dause, denoting -1« t/>e ecent th<it\ or ^ with the proviso /lat (p. 40., Ob>. 
 • ad in a kind "" co,>Ui/io,ml. and ffwporal clav-^es (introdneed l.v .t, f/»u?n dam 
 ; H/M-v//« n onli rv tcn-es nu.^t l.e us,-d iltln-y are suboblupu', even ,f tlu-ir pr^-dieatea 
 Snof Son^to Ihi ^il'leuUenf tn.ur.s, a. : It•^^^^.^I)en,et^a.U.n^ . r^r/.^.^J./vv^ 
 re-'ein triiGcit • Isidonis erof^s.-d over to D( meina^- tn the <-/>/// /A«^ the kin<x in ni^ 
 [nTrh \-WJ m*^ Liv. 36, -20.- Decreverunt patri->* ut hoc sic ratimi fss.t s% 
 
 at e< «rtG^^^^^^ ^1^'creed. that this .hould be valid under the proviso 
 
 tl^^! thSsJnit^S L.v. 1,17.- Dieebant nihil e>se ni-oln, ^wwm rc-lniine 
 
 Snes mi^-M u^ (not a/,rV/«A^.^>..^/). hanc ie-^^ioneni Mih ^are-n.s ado- 
 
 rlH f They ta d that i. was (would he) an easy matter to atlaek tl.at eo;.o.i umle t^ e r 
 h r ,a<re while the other h-L'ions would be at a «;reat distance. Cies. B. (t. 3 5.-Nisi forte 
 ei po fest pe ?uad^- e It d^'nn oratOn-s eant redeani, quh-scat ; Unless P»*'»'«P^ Ije ;;an in- 
 diK-e him to suspend his operations u^e the lu-otiators a;« (unlllHi)qmnqtoandfio. 
 Cic M 10 1 3 - Cesar, an'tqmmi pl.nes civitiltcs cominmrent. latius sibi diMr.buen- 
 dumtxercU.nn putkvit ; aesar\h„u,iht it best to .Ustribute ^^^!^^'^ ^^^ 
 before a -leater n umber of states woidd join the cON.ynracy. Ctes. B. (». 3. 10 L> " a» in 
 dcp«.de.lt connection, anter/uam and ;>n./.v<7,,./m cannot take the f "j" J^ ' »^J";;« ''^Jj^' 
 liquc connection, the periplirastic luture is not admissible, bee p. 3o4, Obs. 4, a , p. W)^, 
 ^021 foil.] See Ex. 2-2-27. 
 r Bfpendfnt FUTunEs», i. <». those which derive their force as f'jfwres from their 
 
 « mm" p'^ di™ "T. ," .<"VS;-« o \:hel IHM- their m,M.,l is u>lr<u-f.,l by , h.- ■■nhjnnyy., 
 
 irouldconsidtr him to be in war with him. Cies. D. G. 1, 44. [Iiidepi lul niiy . .> • i "*^«''"'^» 
 VllmZiwlM^^ Comn.emoravit quantum .^»//^ periculi «<//////•?/•< >■; '";Y '^ 
 m'^^ /rm- I le haV imntioned the -reat dan-er I irould inrnr, if / ^''''''''''^''^r.^^'lfj^ 
 f/<<yi6tm/i, 11^11»^^ flmlenendently : Mairnum periciilum a(/7/y?.< si in Afr - 
 
 ' i^^rS 'il - J ii^^o-TJx dJil ne id consilium cai^rentcOus extempio ,>*.^; 
 
 ?.iV. T h. ki\p/a"ked Iheni t.) consider the matter, bst they mlul'f tah' meamres ot 
 vhi li A V zri AAn^^ant • r V .^.^ Liv. 3r,. '.» [In<le,,endently : Xe rnpintU consdium cujus 
 
 EBJ a SI ^:;ji^';^ ?r;rs:^:;?;^;c^';ri!^^^^^ 
 
 fl de endiitlv- TV/i^Ai'/'/wi/ze est in concilium, ^Wynxmm^ ddibemturjis ent f - W J^^ 
 hs?<\vinW^^^ a dav for deliberation. The present conception is ««ore Pepa- 
 
 ?at H l^o n he n^^ac^ present conception beini: r.-presented by the copula (^50., 
 
 /f IW But e en the c( p.ila must be in the future, because the conception represened 
 hv !; has the relaiion of a depe.xlent future, if required to be in the Bubjuuclive, the 
 copula erit is uirned into a present, accordinj? to rule.] 
 
 D \Li oTiiFB CLAUSES whose predicate» are reprepented as future in rejrard to the 
 8ne;ker's th e m St take periphrastic tenses, as : [Kelativ,; clause] It.-.que ^"* « 1 «J 
 timp.i' fori! nan y^S/ in consilil. hnmir,.., is extemplo ad M, li.ebmm mis, t ; A'^» ' "« 
 heWiO wo>dd up to this ti.ne. shape hlsrourse accordin- to circumstance^ (i. e. « /^''9'^' 
 he w^o deci\le a^^ his plan of action), sent instantly word to M. Btebius. Liv. 3h 8^ 
 _ fModal Ut-c la st^^^^^ cam ratiOnem vit;e nos fortQna deduxit uf. ''V™'^>'''''V",-r;''/w 
 ho n num de nXs/i/.7/v..vsi Our fate has placed ,i« in such a condmon «>f ^l^. M 
 there nill be a perpetual comment of the public about us. Cic. Qu. l^r 1, 1, ^f J^^uxl 
 imelli"'0 cur Kullu^^ quemquam tribQuum interces.Qrum putet, quum luterce.eio .tulth 
 
 \ 
 
 2 
 I 
 
 ^afe 
 
 tiam intercessOris significafnra fit, non rem ivipedifnra ; I do not understand why 'Rallns 
 should be of the opinion that any tribiino will veto the measure, «/*c<; a xexo uauld 
 (will) only betray the stupidity of him who vetoes, but not prererii the measure. Cic, 
 Le<:. Atjr. 2. 12.— See Ex. 34-30.— But in colloquial style ordinary tenses are often em- 
 l)l(rve(iVheVe the rule would requin- a periplirasiie, as : Ergo hoc quidem est piofectnm 
 nt noil ihodo tuto. vt-rum etiani palam nari(/a7et/n/s ; Hence so mucli, at hast, has been 
 etVccted tiiat w- t^hall depart m-t only safely, but also openly. Cic, Att. 10. 4. 10. [Here, 
 according to rule, and for the sake of clearness, a periphrastic tense, or the addition of 
 po.<se would have been required, since, as the clause is exprest^ed, the i)redicate naviqa- 
 rtmus must be understood as a i)ast. or as a present act. But as the receiver of the let- 
 ter could not mistake the sense of the writer, the latter allowed himself the use of the 
 
 Wise // Ut llflf l/Lnfltf lu siiujK vjiu «h iumi tn.i^ui«.iiii_ i,v/ HIV, 1. 
 
 Cic. Att. 10, 8, 2."— (iuid enim essevi de pace dictUrus, dixi: For I have said what / 
 ivoidd t)€ noiiig to say {i. e. si legatiOnem susceptunis essem, if 1 were going to accept the 
 appointment ;' the w riter being resolved not to accept it). Cic. Att. 10, 1, 3. 
 
 Obs. 2. In place of the imperfect subjunctive of the periphrastic future, the form with 
 forem is sometimes used by the historians, as : Incertum eiat quo ?nissuTi. classem Car- 
 thiiginienses/o/Yn^; It was uncertain wiiere the Carthaginians would send their fleet. 
 LivT;iO, 2 — /r/rfm is sometimes used in place of €.s\«<=//i if a predicate, heing in the rela- 
 tion of a dei)eiid<-nt future, is represented as viicertain, as : Dixit Tullus usflium se 
 eOrum opera si helium cum Vejeiitibus/w*?/ ; Tullus said he would accept their aid if 
 there should be a war w ith the Vejentians. Liv. 1, 20. 
 
 Obs. 3. Since the periphrastic future does not exist in the passive form, this voice 
 cannot, generally, be used if the ])redicate, according to the above-mentioned rules re- 
 quires a periphrastic tense. In this instance the sentence must he recast by turning the 
 passive C(mstruction into an active one. But, sometimes, ordinary passive presents or 
 imperfects are u-ed where the rules require periphrastic tenses (which, of course, occurs 
 only if the future meaning of the predicate is made clear by the connection), as : Dixit 
 Curio, nihil es-c certius qiiam ut omnes, qui lege Ponipeja condemnSti essent, restilve- 
 rentiir : Curio said that notbinir was so certain, as the rthabiUtation of those (literally 
 'more certain than tliat those would be rehabilitated) who have been condemned under 
 the I'ompejan law. Cic. Att. 10.4.8. [Independently: Restiluerdur ei qui condemnati 
 sunt. It ilie piedicate were active, it would require a peiiphiastic tense; hut the 
 chauo'e intoan active construction would he awkward, and hence the author preerred the 
 ordinarv pa-sive imperfect. althouLMi this tense might, grammaticallv, he understood to 
 be coincident with the time of '(/?>ir.] Sometimes a passive predicate referring to the 
 future niav be turned into a predicate-infinitive paraphrased with/ore J// and an ordinary 
 passive subjunctive: as : Qui dubitSre deeveuiu possim quum \\\^x\\\\\c fore vide am ut 
 ipsi oppu(fueidur ; How can I doubt about the issue, since they nill be themselves attacked 
 hv those who etc. Liv. 3»;, 7. [Here hv introducing 'rit/ta/M ' as governing predicate, the 
 clause has assumed the form of an ihtlnitive clause, so that the regular circumlocution 
 with fore ut mav be applied to it.] Some grammarians assert that to passive future 
 predicates a circumlocution hv means of the finite impersonal 'futuruTH est vt ' may al- 
 wavs be applied, so that for instance the above-mentioned passage miirht have been 
 expressed ' quuju futurum sit nt ip.-i oppuqnentur\ But examples of such a usage do 
 not occur in the classical authors, although there would, theoretically, be no other ob- 
 jection a-'ainst this circ.imlocuti(m but the awkwardness of its form. A future predi- 
 cate w hich is peripJirastic t/i/ its own force can neither be expres.^ed by the fhiite circum- 
 locution with futurum est lit. nor hv the infinitive circumlocuti(m whh fovFut, since in 
 both circumlocutions the rop'//rt is in the future while tiie veyb itnelf U in an ordinary 
 tense ; whereas the periphrastic luture if used in its proper sense requires the copula to 
 be in an ordinary tense and the verb to be in a future form. (See § 507, R. 139.) 
 
 1. Quum HmTrfid ne vi capfis nulla apud victOrem venia esset. dedidCrunt se. Liv, 
 30 9-2 Hasdrubal reritus est ne ])arvum vinculum^ ( oe nnptite^ essetd^. lb. 29. 23. 
 — Z' P^riculum erat ne vera emanarfht*. lb. 29.24.-4. Plane dulitCire non po^sum 
 ovin tibi amplitildos istasollicitQdo« futurasit. Cic, Fam. .3, 10. 3.— 5. Non dubifoqvm 
 Csesar lenis' in guintum/«^«n/.v sit.'lh. Att. 11. 12, 3.— 0. Dubita, si potes« 9?nn ille 
 caidem faclurus sit. lb. 10, 14, 3.— 7. Duhium non est qu in BceOti et Thessah ad con- 
 
 » A weak tie.— = nuptials.— s miixht prove to he.— ■• vera emdnant, truth leaks out.— 
 •that mao-nificence.— « an annovance: a rare construction, instead ol the more usual 
 abstract dative isoUicitudini).— '■lenient.— «* virtually = ' dubitare nonpotes \ 
 
452 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 cul abcr-scnt. vim ('X«;r(-i MS ^»»M -^lj\y' ^,', '.= ... ,, o _\) yon d'thifo q>iin iwpe- 
 i.e^cio. lb. 10, 4, «;.- T^. Ls^l bum ^*'"^.' -^^.^^^^-l^ 7 Alt 8 14 'Z-U. IVrtinot me 
 
 iin. nee quo- 
 
 ri8 non d.ibitJlre, ..i co.iMiles '^'''^''^' '/j"^^ "^^^^^^^ Vc. 2.- '^. Su.tinui me^» 
 
 turn priMiua. socn-tflti^, ••^■V\='-^';^;;^J^'".^,.^ "^^fL 2M Dix i Ca'.nr .i pra-t.-rru nemo ...- 
 n>ulO>r. ta.uen sc earn .ohl decuna Uir.r.n;^ / '^ V,,. '.u- .ni Ja/Ved servis etiam re- 
 
 Cic. A I 
 turn p 
 
 
 b'riivi liaidirirm tit. roiiil><-j. »'1 t:'C- Alt. «, IS t'. 1 
 
 7?.m 9S To llie conversion of the fiti:i:e tekfixt, only llie nietliod 
 oTdinxry tenses ran be applicnl (^ GOT) , since tlu^^ul^imu^^ 
 
 ton,e<l.- -^ abstract .lat.ve. = l>''^'J»^L^.^A"'--;.i^.!.'l!..-i !!'5 n7=.kc. tl?e denn.nd o.i me. 
 
 of 
 
 vuut^-M.— V ■.! • ..- ......v 4 tn wiH'rced — s nTakc tlie demand on me. 
 
 measure tluir ^trengt i uith yo.ir an n.- to ^mc^ ^^..j,^ ^.^.^ 
 
 _ . ,,., = «cr/V/er..- ' was l^ ^Jf«-.^:'V^'!!:.::!'X~,.o?v l!teralirtl>e beak o'f the .hip \ 
 
 ' ' • •'•-.- n regndre. to 
 
 tiers of oarsmen.- » ro.v//a tw,ivr^e?f. to turn 
 
 was uuerlv msulbeient.— »* loi the pust iit. /„ '• ' l' niti-s — '» cro-8 over, i e. to 
 disease of VucU "^aH-.MU.y.- J^at an eaHv^^^^^^^^ the name of 'a villa, 
 
 sh()wawiilin-iiessMowardstl.e e>peaol u t^^^o R^^^^^^ 
 
 to trv the plan, i. e. had reso ved to try 'n.e cl.ms. ' ^^f ; • -^ ;'. .'^^'_ ^3 j}onue U not an 
 
 g,es;nn,>< evat, is <,uas,->ubobliqne. K^ !!T(\3v\^^J\om~^^^^^ i- "■ ^l»^' l^'""*^" 
 
 auribuiive uenitive, but a -.Mutive ot place <»»»« »; -' " ''i,r;_35«^^ 
 
 thr<,ne).- 3V .n,>ply : ccmsilns -^^^^^^^"^^ ,, bl c - " 1 am working; .hat 
 
 dtru !<• shrink Irom nothini:.- 3« n. Hie ' ^^''^a^V;^, ' , '/.! Ju,e a<'ainst I'.m.pev is (will 
 
 Ciesar permits, i. e. for Oesar s perinissinn.- 3=* if anv J^J^'V^^ \. -" ;„ vL 40 j,- you 
 
 b b.f. .re tlie Senate (or ' discussed in the ^^''^c ' .- « M^ a «^^^^^^ • ^^^^,^ 
 
 aniicipate the uta-asines. about ^'»'^'^*-\'',:^;;, !;•-„'' f ' ^^Se - «^U^^^^^^^ ^^/Pr. 
 
 _ 4-2 «Vability.- *^ idvimd ^"''•^■/''^''•'';.,,V\ 'Vu-r'"- v b^^^ a situation in whicU 
 
 •)/) .inn eit^ip iM^<<lmm to be more careful, lest we may nt piuceu in» , . 
 we Sinot K^- ^^ accessory predicate : by our Ublraciion.- ^« a mulch. 
 
 fT 
 
 453 
 
 perfect and pluperfect of the periphrastic future are appropriated by the 
 ]>re(licates of Injpothetical iieriocU (II. 90, Obs. 3). Hence a conversion of 
 the ftitu re- perfect into a subjunctive tense is only possible if ihe future- 
 perfect has the force of a dependent future as defined by ihe rule p. 5353, 
 li. 70, the Latin lantrunge having no forms at its disposition which, for 
 expressing: tlie idea of a future-perfect, are equivalents of the periphrastic 
 future (Oijs. 1). If dependent future-perfects tire to be used in clauses re- 
 quiring a predicate in the subjunctive, they are changed into an ordinary 
 perfect subjunciive if a present consecution (or a logical tense referring to 
 the time of the speaker) is required ; and into an ordinary pluperfect 
 subjunctire if a tense of preterite conseciiiioii is required (OiiS. "Z). 
 
 Ob3. 1. Since fnture-pcrfcct^ with independent force are of very rare occurrence in 
 Latin (p. '^W). Ji. 74. Obs. 1), the necessity of usinj; them in sentences reqiiirin<^ the sub- 
 junctire, occurs more rarely etill. If they are used with the force of E\vj[,\\A\ future-pres- 
 ents (p. *)4U, Obs. 2),tiii'y may, even in the indicative, almostalways be replaced by Latin 
 fiHure-presents, andheiice, in t^ubjunctivc clauses, will be convened according: to the rules 
 for futMi'f-preseiits. Thus almost all the sentences witii independent luiure-perlects, 
 quoted \).'M\) and 3o0, m.y be chani^ed into periphrastic ^)re^ents or imperfects (as: 
 (^uum postea in luec Puteolana reyna renatigatilrus ettstin or sim ; quum is bellum con- 
 fctilrus sit qui Aiitonium opproscrit, etc.). Sometimes howevera chanire of this kind 
 will not be a(iiuissil)Ie. Tims the sentence ' Dum tu h:cc leges, ego ilium Ibrtasse conve- 
 tieto iiK 3.!>, Obs. 1)' would neither allow the chan::e of con vcfi era into a periphrasiic 
 presCiit or imperf«'cr, n^r into an ordinary perfect or pluperfect. For 'Nihil certius 
 est quam, dum tu ilia legas. ego ilium co/fi>fiturus sim'' would place the time of the 
 meeliriLT ^//A'/- the reading of the letter ; and " conre.-terim'' would i)lace the time of the 
 meeting Ix-fore the speaker's time, tiince nothing indicates that a future time is meant. 
 There is, in fad. no verl)al form at the di-position of the Latin language, to change fu- 
 ture perfects of tiiis kind into a siil)junciive mood. In passive j)redicates coniaiiiing 
 puch lutuH'-perfects. Cicero has once tried to coml)ine the form of the periphrastic fu- 
 ture of ilie copula with tlie past participle of the verb, in a sentence very similar in 
 meaning to tiie passaire quoted above : Non dui)ito, quin, legente te has litteras, C07i- 
 fecta jam rvt>- /utilra sit (Cic. Fam, H, Vi). where '• conftcta futura sit Ms vsiudly under- 
 stood to havt! tlie lone of a subjunctive of the future-pcrlect (I do not doubt but that 
 the !natt'-r will have been accomplished when yuu will read this letter). But this new 
 foim, tried by Cicero, has found no imitators, and Cicero himself has used it nowhere 
 else in his extant works. To the active voice it would, of course, not be applicable. We 
 may, however, interpret the periphrastic in a difl'erent manner, taking rowyec^a as an at- 
 trii)utcof res ( = that there will bean ' accomplished fact"). But, whether the passage is 
 ni.derstood in the one or the other way, it i!< certain that a periphrastic future-perfect 
 ot ihe passive voice has iiot been received in tlie Latin language*. 
 
 (^Brs. 2. The conversion of dejjendent future-perfects into perfects and pluperfects 
 occirs in those clauses mentioned p. 351, Obs. 3, as: 
 
 (f/) Conditional clauses : Cjesar diKt-t id fieri posse si suas copias .^dui in finis 
 BellovacOrum i/droduxetint : Ciesar showed that this might be done i/ the ^duans 
 would send (literally 'would nave sent') their troops into the territoiy of the Bellovaci. 
 Cses. B. G. 2, 5.— Solon capite sdnxit si qui in seditiOnc non alterlus utrliis i)artis fuis- 
 sent ; Solon made it a capital crime if i)erson:«, in a revolt, iconld not join, (literally : 
 ' W(»uld have not joined ') either the one or the other party. Cic. Att. 10, 1, 2.— See Ex. 1-4. 
 
 (})) Tkmpoual claus-es with vbi and quum: Tribilnis edicit nt, ?/6i signa (%>/urim<i*\<;^n^, 
 exiemplo frfwr^r*^/?^ casiris legiOnes : lie ordered the chief.* of the legions, instantly to 
 maich the legions out of the camp as soon as the signal would be given (literally : * would 
 have been •/iven'). Liv. 30, 5. — JJicebant, nihil esse negotii, quum prima legio' in castra 
 renissety banc sub sarcinis adoriri; Tliey said that it was (would be) an easy matter to 
 
 ♦ It is stranire that some grammarians (Zumpt, Kiihner, Meiring — Madvig being si- 
 lent about this form) a-seit that, if the future-perfect with independent force is to be 
 placed in the siil)JMiictive. the Unrnfuturum sit {ess'-t) ut with the subjunctive perfect or 
 pluperfect of the verb is applied. Kiihner, in default of classical vouchers, tries to 
 establish this rule by an examiile of his own make : 'Non dubito quin futurum sit ut 
 post paiicos dies ad v<>s r<^/^/jV>im ', a barbarous Latinity. [The Latin authors, unqm-s- 
 ti'inably. would say ' Non dubito quin panels diebus?vrf<am' See R. 97, Obs. 1. A, 4]. The 
 chief objection against this rule is that it exists only in the imagination of the gramma- 
 rians, no passage of Latin authors being extant to prove the use of this form. 
 
 ,1 
 
n 
 
 454 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 attack this lei,'ion ichen the first legion icoiihl have arrival in tlic camp. Cjes. B. G. 2, 17. 
 Se«^ Ex. 5-7. 9. 
 
 {O Tkmporal ci.ArsKs with donee (dfnn), anteqvayn, jmvtiqunm : Placttit, omnTs qui 
 consults iniss.'iit cum iinpiMio esst;. donee rteem-^-et a maris ho^tis : It teas reftolttd *hat 
 all who had been consuls should bo iiivt-sted with the hlL'ht-st military power till the 
 eiMiny n'o>'ld hare vifftdraini from thf wall. Liv. 20. 9.— Se non anff Crt'piflruin 
 dLrif qitam\ixucm in rei.'iiH castris eon-'^^jyexi^set : Ife «aid lu; would not beirin iK-lore he 
 ico'dd jx-rcefve (would have perceived, iiad perceived) tiu- fire in the royal camp. Liv. 
 30. ^. [t'lau-es with avtequarn, and ptiK^^uam Mrictly luUow the rule» of tense lor llie 
 indicative mood. See p. 354, Obs 4.] See hx. 8. , 
 
 {d) Uki.ativk ci^Ai^sEs : Ca;sar eii* qui primi mtirum a-teendiKvent yynvnna m'ojwsuifj 
 Cie^»r ptmnised rewards to tliose who would be the first fo scale tlie wall. Cu;s. B. G. 7, 27. 
 See Ex. 10. 11. 
 
 Obs. 3. If the clause of a dependent future-perfect assumes the form of a subohliquc 
 clause, the ;?^'/6c/ sul)junctivc is frequently used in plaee of a idupfrfeet subjiinetive 
 acfordinir to the rules p. 41'.t foil. Ous. 7, as : {/JirTritn/), si li;ec e/iwddUi Ariovisto Kinf, 
 lion (lubTtare (luin irravissiinum supplicium suniat : Tliey said that if this wonld be 
 (would have been) ^/Wmyty; to Ariovistus, h«^ would take tti.' severe-^t reven<;e. Cies. B. 
 G, 1^ -jl.— Sometimes, on tlie otlier \\i\\\(\.. itlii})er/ect mibjioicfiit s (w'wh the lorcc of fu- 
 ture-perlects) are used in place of a perj'tcf. subjunctive, when tlie law of consecution 
 requires a tense of ;>/-^«f/i< consecution, as: t^uud le mecum, quodcunque cfinssein (in- 
 stead of eepentn), cons^ilii pollici'n^ fore; Tliat you promise to be with me, whatever 
 plan I nwdd have adopted. Cic. Fam. 5, 9, 1. 
 
 Obs. 4. The historians frequently use the passive subjunctive phiperfect \\\\\\ forern, 
 instead of f.sw//«, as a subjunctive o"f tlie future-perfect of the pa^sive voice, as : Si pax 
 non iinpetrtlla ab senatu foret. ()l)sides reddi I'hilippo receptum est ; I; was a-jreed upon, 
 that the hostai^es ^hould"be returned tol'liilip in theca-e tliat j)eace uonld not begranttd 
 (would not have been granted) by the Senate. Liv. 33, 13. See Ex. 12. 13. 
 
 Obs. .5. Both perfects and iduperfects with the force of a subjunctive of the fiitiire- 
 perfect require the predicates deiiendent on them to be in tenses of /^/-eAv-t/^consecutioti, 
 althouLdi the future-perfect in the indicative reciuires tenses of present consecution, as : 
 
 [CONSKCITION «IP TUB FtTUUK-l'EHFI< CT l.V THE INUICATIVK :] Milll ijTUOSCet is si, qUJU 
 
 causa me ad hunc loquaciiiltem i/npiderif, aceepentis : You will pardon nie if you will have 
 heard what cM\>>e hat induced iMi: to be so loquacious. Cic. Or. 2. 88. 3<il. [Here the fu- 
 ture-pertect acceperUls taices the perfect subjunctive impuitrit as tense of present conse- 
 cution.] But the same sentence beiii;: made obli(iue Ivy^lie author, preterite cons'-cu- 
 tion is required by the pluperfect subjunctive eor/tuA^naius, imd in j)lace of the luiure- 
 perfect acc£p'^ritbt: Dixisii lore ut tibi iirnoscerC'inus. si eorj no<s^/nus qwx h- causa in ser- 
 moneiii impidl^xet ; You have said that we would pardon you if we xvould hare learned 
 what cause kad induced vou to discuss this sul)ject. Oic. Or. 2, 89, 3f»3.— Eo minus liabeo 
 neccsse coiritare quid lacit'irtis sim si aeddt rit nt ler/aitr : T\ni less it is necessary for 
 me to think of what I ouijlit to be iroinir to do if it should hapj>en (literally : if it should 
 have happened) that / dm apjmnftd. Cic. Att. 10. 1, 4. Here tlie perfect subjunctive 
 aeciderit, accordin<r to the p:eneral rules, take-i ler/arer as a tense of preterite consecu- 
 tion, althGU<;h it has th»; force of a future-perfect*. 
 
 1 Quicritur, si Carthadnem r^/ir/?/m//iw incohimem', num quid incommodi sit ad 
 rempnblicam perventfirum? Cic. Inv. 1, 8, 11.— 2. I'terque idem lenuntial'^ qui })rior 
 has an_aistias occuparerif, ab hoc hostem prohibeii nihil esse negotii^. Cies. B.C. 1. »i«. 
 
 3. (}alli. \\W\^ jyerfreqennt miinitiOnes de oinni salilte despf rant* ; Bomilni, si rem 
 
 ohtinuerint^, tinemlab'Orum omnium exspectant. lb. B. (J. 7. 35.-4. Dixit Ariovistiis, 
 si disces-sissef Ciesar, mai;no so ilium jinemio remuneratilriim. lb. I». (J. 1. 44.— .'). De 
 lioium audacia turn me dictflrum p(dlicitus sum f/uum Erucii crlmini'^ difuls-sem^. Cic. 
 Rose. Am. 28, 78.— <». Nonnulli Ciesan nuntiSbant, 7'/'///t ca.«tr.i movfri ac si.ma ferri»" 
 j'/,s^^t.s■.ve;^ non fore dicio audientTs niilites. Cjcs. B. G. 1, 39.— 7. Scipio ufA eomrfiisHi^^ 
 pusjna €S«et, Lselium cum equitiltii impetum facere jubet. Liv. 2.s. :i3.— 8. Ca>ar re- 
 spondit se civitatem conservatarum»- .si prius quam murum aries tetifjinset se dedidis- 
 
 * Tiic editors, because aeeiderit zcould be a future-perfect if the clause were not sub- 
 oblicpi.'. have chan£;ed leqarer into the present sutgiinctive /<?r7er, although supported by 
 no manu-cript. They call such chauires * kmendations.' 
 
 » Unharmed, in its integrity.— 2 reported, namely etc.- 3 nihil e.<t neqotM. it is an easy 
 matter.— ^ ' ni<i perfreqtnnt\ and ' d lemofdinuenni' are qua-^i-ot'liqne clau-es accord- 
 in" to Rem. 89. Obs. 1.— ^ despaired of their lives.— « rem obtinere. to be successful — 
 T t7) withdraw, i. e. from Gaul.— « the charges.— » to refute.- »" yiqna ferri jufjere, to 
 give the order to charire the enemy.— 1» to begin.— '- i. e. esse ; with an inttnitive ful^se^ 
 which would be required to be expressly added, the next clause would be hiji)OthcticaL 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 455 
 
 n 
 
 . 
 
 N 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 sent. Cies. B. G. 2, :32.— 0. Fabiii? milites, vbi quarta? vigiliae signum cecinisset^, ad 
 enm locum scalar jussit ferre. Liv. 24, 4G. — 10. Scipio dixit, liomain mitterent legatos; 
 quam- seiultu-' .Tquam cfn<nis.<et, cam fortflnam hahitiiros. lb. 29, 8.— 11. Edictum 
 imj)eratr»ris erat. ipsum militattlrum^ qui ita non fecisxet. Liv. 29 1.— 12. Carmen* in- 
 ventum vrtit.quanddq»e^ ho^tis ltali;e t)ellum infuii<sef, eum vinci posse si mater Idica* 
 Komam advecta'' foret. lb. 29, 10. — 13. SentiCbant, si Lycia etCaria adempta ab* Koma- 
 uisforerd, indfldl se insuhe parvte liitoribus. lb. 45, 25. 
 
 1 iSir/nv??i eanif, \\\c signal is sounded. — ^ quam.. ., earn fortunam, = ea?n f07-ti2nam 
 (fate) quam. The sentence contains a circumlocuiiou of the thought 'their fate would 
 "): decided by the Senate'. — ^ j^at the one who ( = every one who)., .would ( = must) 
 himself do military service. The infinitive clause has the force of an imj)erative clause, 
 which is rare. But Livy conceives the clause as if it were independently expres-^ed by 
 an imperative future (ipse militabit qui ita non fecerit). — ■* an oracle (oracles always 
 being given in verse). — ^ whenever. — « the Ida?an mother, i. e. the image of Cybele. — 
 ' adrehere. to convey. — ** by, not from. The latter preposition would be expressed by a 
 dative in Latin. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 I. Declabative subjunctive. (§ 593, R. 70). — 1. In this matter, in- 
 deetl', I ain inclined to dissent'^ from yon. — 2. I should refer^ to all atfec- 
 tions* Avhat Pana?! ins asserts^ in reiijard to* pain. — 3. You may find many 
 Avlio will have the same opinion. — 4. You may doubt this, perhaps; but 
 1 shall easily i^rove it. — 5. To some, both lhing:s'' seem to be the same; 
 l)ut I should [like to] ask this : What force** is" [there] in the word * fo- 
 j^ere'f — G. You are the only [one] who — let me make this remark*" with 
 the leave** of these [triendsl — have left no hope I'or (of) praise to the 
 other orators. — 7. You could not easily repeal** this too often. — 8. Epi- 
 curus, indeed, may (mii^ht) perhaps say this, even*^ in Phalaris's steer, 
 but I, on my pan**, cannot assign*^ so great a power*" to wisdom. — 
 9. Clodius arrived, inflamed with anger ; you (one) would have pronounced*"' 
 liim raving"^. — 10. You (one) would have 1 bought, some companion*^, or 
 some unimportanl'-'" retainer'-* was i)resent, [and] not tlie lord'*'"' over'-''* your 
 life and death'-\ — 11. You might have distinguished-^ a remote^® cloud" 
 of dust, rising'-" at the horizon''^''. — 12. Of that kind^° of property^* you 
 may easily be; deprivetP-.— 13. I might mention considerably^^ more 
 [e.vainples], but the shortness of time warn.s^^ me not to^^ go any farther. '^^ — 
 14. Tiie war might have been finislied^^ in the same year. — 15. He could 
 have easily prevented^** that rel>ellion^". — 10. You certainly might liave 
 shown*" greater en^M-gy** in*^ the pursuit" of llie enemy. — 17. But at that 
 lime {fin/t) we ought to have returned without anv hesitation to the place 
 we had sttirted fi()ni^\ — 18. It seems that Titius had reached a point**^ 
 which 110^® Latin oiator witlH>ut [a knowledge of] Greek liteiature" 
 could have overstepped**. — 10. What had been doiu*", ought not to have 
 been ratified'". — 20. You ought to have paidoned me at least, since^* I 
 
 • Quidem. — ^ dissenllre ab «Tliquo. — ^ referre ad.— * aflectns. — * dicere.— « (i^. — 
 "* ntrumque. — *> vis. — » to be in — inesse in. — ^" Bender : I would remark {dicere) this. 
 
 — " by jHijr.— '■- dictitilre. — '^ yel. — '* /, on my part. ego. — 1^ tribuere. — '^ vis. — 
 '^ dicere.— i" furere. — 1^ comes. — '-^0 parvulus. — -^ assectjltor.— 22 arbiter. — 23 rreni- 
 tive. — -* nex. — '-^^ cernere. — ^e nmOtus. — -^ nubecula. — -" nasci. — ^^ at the horizon^ 
 procul. — 2° genus. — 31 bona. — ^^ exspoliare. — 33 multo. — 34 clehortSri. — '^ ne. — '® to 
 go any farther, longins progredi. — 37 fo finish the tear, debelljlre. — 3b prohibere. — 39 p^. 
 «litio. — '••' uti. — *' alacritas. — <2 ad _! 43 hy jurseqni. — *^ Render: Whence we had 
 Plaried (profieisc'), thither without any hesitation {dubil alio) wi.' ought to have returned. 
 
 — <* Kendt-r : Titiiis eeems to have arrived {perven'ire) at tliat place which. — ^® Bender 
 which a Latin orator could not.— *^ litieroe. — *" transgredi. — ■*" agere. — *" to be ratu 
 Jie-dy ratiun esse. — ** quoniam. 
 
w 
 
 456 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNXTIVE. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 457 
 
 di(P, whatever 1 did, against my ownwilP.— 21. Tliat pirate ought to 
 liavc been kept in jail' at Syracuse. — 22. It would liavc beeu more de- 
 sirable* for Milo to olFer^ [his] throat* to C'lodius, tiiau to be throttled' by 
 Yoc. — 23. It would liave been lair"^ to forbear" a little longer with this 
 our heli)lessness'".— 24. For your safety", and your interest'^ it would 
 liavebeen best to leave your companions alone'^; but honor**, and [your] 
 pledged'^ word** forbade*' [this course]. 
 
 II. Intetikogative ST'iuuNCTivEs. (5^593). — 1. Wlio would not jus^ 
 ly** admir(! this, and tliiidv*" that he ouglil-" to devote'-* all his energy to 
 it? — 2. Why sh(;uld not the rainbow"- be, as well"^ placed** among the 
 ^ods? — 3. What would you do with [dblat.] such a simj)leton"^ ? — 
 
 4. Should /deny this, who could never be convinced"" that it is false? — 
 
 5. AV'ouid nibiilussLuuler'-' thos(! very [men] who were inlhiential enough** 
 to i)revent his recall from the province? — (>. How should those obey the 
 laws, Avho by these very laws were forbidden"" to^" have^' the rights of 
 men ? — 7. If I believe Archytas what he says of others, should I not be- 
 lieve what he says of himself? — S. If any king, if any nation had com- 
 mitted^- any such thini;^^ against Homan citizens, would we not avenge'"'* 
 [it] by war? [And] should we permit^^ this crime^", this degradation" 
 of the Roman name to pass unchallenged? 
 
 III. iMrEiiATiVR suBJUNXTiVES. (§ 5'.)4). — 1. AlIow*'" me, I beseech 
 you^", to be [your] second in command*", and all the others to keep*' 
 Iheir former ranks*- [in the army]. — 2. Be always in arms*% antl on the 
 alert**, and neither miss your own chance*^, nor allow the enemy to have 
 any*^. — 3. Do not believe, soldiers, that victory will be as*' difficult as 
 the dimensions*** of this war are great. — 4. Select*'-' a himdred men out 
 of the whole (om/z/,v) infantry- °, and as many out of the (tavalry,'^ and come 
 with them to me by the lirst night-watch.— 5. Let us reinemljer that jus- 
 tice must be observed*- even towards the lowest''^. — G. Let us love our 
 country, let us obey the Senate, let us disregard^* present advantages'^, aud 
 do everything''® for the glory ot [our] i)osterity^'. — 7. Let evervone show 
 himself^** a severe^" judge both of his [own] good"" and bad*^' qualities. — 
 8. Let there be [at least] a pause*- in our hale'^-' during''' peace, even if"" 
 
 • Af/efe. The two jJi-ctiTites ' I did'* musii be rendered l)y tlie «tme verb, but l)> Uilli r- 
 ciit fiHins. — 2 invltiis». — ^ to keep in- jail, ciif*to(lIre. — < optaljilij».— "> dare. — * jiii,ailiim. 
 
 — ■' jii<;uUTre. — " iuquut!. — " parcere. — i** impotentin. — i' i*alus.— >'- iitilitas.— »3 (o 
 leave alone, (lescrere.— ^* hoiiestas. — i* dare. — ^'' flde^. — J^ repuj^njlre. — "* jure. — 
 '*♦ aibitnlri. — '-° gerundial — '-^' (o d«-fote all ont'd emrtfy to somet/ii/ifj, fuintiie in aliciiul 
 re elabonlre. — 2J ^rci species. — =3 as icdl, leqn(^— •" to place ainonrj aotaething, in nu- 
 niero alicujus rei reponere.— -"truncus. — ^" persiiuuiGie. — '^"^ caluinniilri.— -* Render : 
 111 wliof-e power (ixikntiu^) it was lest (ne') lie slioiild l)e recalled {reiocan) from etc. — 
 2'* prohibCre (sulyunctive).— ^o ne. — 3i ,,(j — n facere. — ^^ (i„,j ^^/^./^ thing, alicjiiid 
 ejusinodi.— 34 vindicilre.— 35 to ptiinit fiome thing to pasa vnehalUngtd, aliqiifd inuliuni 
 diinittere. — 36 injiu-ia.— 37 iixnoiniiiia. — 3f j^i,(3r<j — 3a qua-no. — 4o j^econd in cof/unand, 
 ina;iistor equitinn ; the person addressed Ihmmi^ compared to a dictator.—** tengre. — 
 *'-^ itender : each (^lingular) thtiiv own ranks (ardinex}.—*^ iinniit\\><.—** nn the alert, iuten- 
 tus. — *^ to WW.* one'n own chance, occasion i siuedeesse. — •*<' to allotv minebodij to have any 
 chance, alicui suain occaslOneni tiare. — *''as.. .a-*, tain., .quain. — *» Header : as? ol'^rt-at 
 name the war is. — *• deligere. — ^o j)edes. IJender : onto/ the whole {otnnh') infantry and 
 cavalry ; but in order to render in tliis way, the numeral must assume iliat form, by which 
 it may be clear that it refers to each of the two troops. See P. 1. §-.i,>9.— si tqnts. Both 
 l^edefi awdeques remain in tlie sin<,Milar.— 5'* servilre.— ^3 intiini.— '•« negiii,'ere. — ^* fructiig. 
 
 — ** to do everything for something, alicui rei servlie.— ^^ posteriias. — ^s ^e pnebGre. 
 —5» acer.— •^" good qualiti^^n, bona.— ''i bad (ji/alities.x'ni^i. — «'^ Kender : In peace, even 
 if the hatreds are not ended, let [them] be iuterriipted (intermiltere).— *' odium (pi.). 
 
 — ^* in.— «5 etiamsi. 
 
 * 
 
 \ 
 
 it is not ended.— 9. Let the excess' of our former^ good works" make 
 up for the shortcomings in our present duties.— 10. I wish you would 
 a^k Petronius what happened* to him in my house^— 11. 1 wish you 
 wotdd add some remarks'' concerning the modern' poets.-- 12. 1 wish 
 that all were present wlumi we saw here in our last asseinbly .— 13. I 
 wish you had been» my companion in this journey.— 14 Would that I 
 could find truth*" as easily as I can prove" a falsehood*' !— 15. Would 
 that the ix'ople were alwavs [good] judges*^ of the wortli'* [of persons] ! 
 Perhaps it is sometimes*^ [the case] biU ver>'** rarely.— 16. W""^^^ ^^^^^ 
 Crassiis had seen that day !- 17. Granted that he is a good citizen, and 
 that he is most wise and most learned : all this, m my opinion , will 
 not be sufficient to govern*" the republic well.— 18. Supposing this claim*» 
 is a iustcme, the expenses of the law-suit"" will certainly be'-»' so great 
 that you will be a loser" even if you gain^^ [your suit].- 19. Granted 
 that slavery'-''' was useful either to the lnasters•■^^ or to the slaves, or to 
 both'^* • it certainly never was just ; but what is not just, cannot even be 
 iiseful — '^0 Do not wonder"' that the proceeds'** of this property'-^» are so 
 snialP".- 21. Do not blame'* me, but thyself for failing="^ in this under- 
 taking^- 22. Do not do this", but examine'* everything before you pro- 
 ceed'"^ any farther'*.— 23. Would that I had not been present !— 24. I 
 should wish" you had not done this.— 25. Would that you would not 
 meddle'" in this business !— 20. Granted that Titius had no success'»; 
 could vou derive from*" this tact** any hope of finishing tliewar*^ ? 
 
 IV Indihectand direct statements in general, (i^ o9b). — 1. While 
 the combat was fiercely raging*=' at** the intrenchments*S T. Pullo said, 
 'Why do you hesitate**, Vor5nus, or do you expect that there will be 
 any better occasion to prove your courage ?'— 2. Whenever the empe- 
 ror Titus had bestowed no favor*" on any one during*» a whole day, he 
 used to say ' I have lost^" a dav, O friends ! '.— 3. If that should happen^', 
 you will say to me,' Did T not predict^^ thatjust this^' would happen?'— 
 4 Scinio used to say-'* ' He wished rather to save one citizen than to kill 
 a thousand hostile soldiers^^'.— 5. AVhen they met^« me bv chjmce" in the 
 forum they said^** to me, * Are you the one^» who intend'" to starve the 
 couimon people'- ?'— G. Whenever anyone remarked'% that it was im- 
 possible for the m"* to return alive"^ from'" thtit hazardous u ndertak- 
 " "' The ac^^i{iii.VlatTo7r<c/^//v^//v^) of our former good works may fill up (^^/f3> ;^hat 'has 
 been ceased ' (c^mlre, impersonal pass.) in duly {officium).- ^ p.nor. " ' t>euefacta.-4 ac- 
 cidit -" apud me.- « aliquid addere. - ' the modern imfs, hujus a;tatis poCta^.- « Ren 
 der 'whon? we saw the la?t time (proxime) here assembled (congrega^.^h- ««^J^^^r^^.^" 
 ha.l been present tome [as] tlie c.mpanion ot this J<>"'ney-- ",^«^^'^.- " t^onvinctre 
 _yi fai^a — >3 sin<'. in Latin,— ^ dij,Miitas.— i^ nonnumquain.— '« by^^r.— ^J Kender . 
 I d.-i V that all .r< is snffic cut etc% ^^ ad with gerundial.- i» nomen.- ^» nnpcnsae 
 n'^iVenl:- -"Render "Spcmses will have to ^^^-^-^-:: ^^^^^^ ^"Zil^^ 
 i.erfect-sul)iunctive with the force of a luiure-porlect .— «3 Muceie.- " scrvitus 
 " do.ninus- " uterque in the plur.- ^7 by the subjunctive.- ^" Iructus.- ^» fun- 
 dn.l!!3u'""..nus.- 31 reprehendere.- 3= Render: liecause thou haet pr9ceeded_(;>ro- 
 icere) loo'lutle (parunn in this thing.- ^^ by the sul)junctive.- 3* investlgare.- 
 '^^wooredi in subj.- 3« ulterius.- 37 by voile.- 3« se in aliquii re luterponere.- 3» to 
 hJZ inrris"xmcvvti- "» caiiere — -«» inde.- " det)eliare.- "3 The ann^Mt t>< fiercely 
 r2it.racc.Vime pu^ * "nunitio - ^« dubitSre.- ^; Render : Wimt oc- 
 
 cSfvS) "?V^^"7<P/^^^^ thy courage ivirtus) dost thou \o^\lZi'I^^^;i'^f{-~ 
 *%o t^eitow no favor, nihil pnestare.- '•'• al)l.- ^» perdere- f> mnir€, fu ure-perlect - 
 5--! nnedicerJ- " hue ipsn n.- "* by ajo.- ^^ hostile soldier, hostis.- 6« obviam venire. 
 _ V['eaM.V.- " by the historical present.- ^« Tune is es.- - velle- '^Vf;'*^ *'^':a'?;- 
 «2 piebs _ 63 Render : These, whenever any one (ubt qins) had said.- <^* Render . that 
 it could not be done that (ut) they should return - ^" vivus.- 6" ex. 
 
•w. 
 
 458 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 ino-^ they would say, ' The greatci-s ^yin be our glory ! '— 7. When one;of 
 the youn<'-er chiefs of the k^nous^' asked Melellus what he was goinq 
 to do, he auswc'ied. ' If 1 knew that this coat were privy to that, 1 would 
 iustantlv pull it otf and cast it into Ihe fire '. 
 
 V OiiLIt^UE DECLARATIVE, AND IMPEllATIVE CLAUSES, [h. bv. ii6).— 
 
 1 Scipio i)raised* [Ins] soldiers because ueilher* the sortie" ot the en- 
 emv uor the height' of the wall, nor the unknown" depth of the pond, 
 nor the hi-h situation" of the castle, nor its great strength^», were obsta- 
 cles to their valor".— 2. All returned'- thanks to all fur" having spared 
 them on the previous day, when Ihey were seized by a panic— IJ. Agesi- 
 laus bewailed»^ the fate'^ of Greece that'% by the perverse policy ot his 
 adversaries, his victories had cost so many lives.— 4. The prelects ot the 
 kin.-- of Persia sent ambassadors to Athens to complain'^ that Uiabnas, 
 bein--"' a citizen of Athens, had accepted'" the command ot the Egyptian 
 lleetrand, [m this ([ualityj, was making war-" against the knig.— o. Xer- 
 xes Ihaiikeil Demaialus for beting the only one that had told him the 
 iniili Uerum).— G. Many charged'^' Plancius with--' his excessive popuhir- 
 ity._7. Alcibiades used to boast*-* that his actions"^ had always suri>rised 
 every body.— 8. 1 praised your brotlier because he had creditably ac- 
 (luitted^^ himself.— i). 1 think you are right"-'* that you are in no hurry as 
 to your suburban villa.— 10. The Laceihemonians accused Themistocles 
 of having conspired'''' with the king of Persia to*'" oppress""' Greece. 
 
 — 11 I con^rratulate^^" you on'' the universal praise you met with when 
 vacating [y.mrj magistracy.— 12. 1 thank you for writing me irequently. 
 
 — i;] 1 greatly-'- approve-*\ and am glad of-'* your, continued stay at 
 Brun'dusiuin.— 14. 1 thanked him tbr'" his magnilicent enlertaniment ot 
 my sou Quintus.— 15. Valerius has written to me to"" mtoiin-"' you as 
 quickly as p(>ssil)le='", that he had arrived on the l:ith [id this month ; i. e 
 March] at Laodieea, and that he would write you m a lew days.— 10. i 
 askyou^" earnestly*' to carry out*-' our oral understanding in regard to 
 
 » Hazardous uvdertakinr/, conittiif.-' tanto major.-» Render : Metellu>» to a younirer 
 (»/;/ tor) chief of \hti\i"^u<us (fnhn„us 7ninf>nn) a^^kin- {percrmfam wliat »'^ wa>* l- o ng 
 to do 'Of this tliin-,' Kai.l. 'if I knew that this coat (^///jra) was privy (''WM«'^; ' a 
 
 wonki cast iccwjicen) tl'« P»!'^''» «><^ ^'"^' (^^:"^/-0,int(> ti.e flre\- » ^;*'1J=VMK-,7: ' 'If,* fed 
 7ior nm- = iion . non. ., non.— « erui)tio.— • altitudo.- " Kender : 1 he unexp oiea 
 {ineri>iorrtt>,.-<^ lords (rad,nn) of tlie j.ond (><tagmun).-^ Hender : A castle (C'/.-^^'/f//''* 
 iituati'd {sifus) on a hi-h hill Ktumulus).- >« Render : Nor the sironjrest ^munttunnvs) 
 fortification {am.- "' were oh.'<tiu'hs to their valor = eo« doternnt.- ^ a{iere (his . rc&- 
 ent).-J3 Render: That they had spared (parcer,\ Xhvm. the ten ilied <]"P^0>^/ ^m/wx "" ^^^^^^ 
 day before (pridie).-^* conimiserf\ri.- »* for.nna- '« Render: hat ^'» '"«''>; l^'f^''^^^^^ 
 
 bv him l)ad perished {covcidtre) hy the fault ^'^^^"{'') «f t'''^] /V'^'T t hT7. i vo tar 
 tence. if rendered quod virfoiiie s'ue (of rif U con^ftti-^^ent' wonhi refer to the 1 vc^ i-ac- 
 rificed in A<'esihTns-s ()\^n arm v. ro/j.s^?;^ always implymir nn equivalent paid h.v « 
 b>n/^r. Since A■re^ilaus meant the lives lost on the side of the enenn/ «/''7;'';'7;;.|^. J,^ 
 t^eiitence is necessary.- ^^ que?i (first supine).-'" qtnim esse ._ i« Hei.der . „l»' v" - 
 been placed at the head (/mf/>^y/^^/-^ with dat.) of the tlee .'- -^ helium i^7rer.^~- - ac cu- 
 rare -•-■■- that he was a-reeabit^ (ora'm) l)eyond mea-ure {pr^vfer wod»m).—^ l' ounii.— 
 ■-•» Render; that whatever he did {(pnrnim/'if ugtret) had deceived {jol/ere)of all alwajs 
 the ou\u\ou.--^^toacrpnto)H\'^s.lr-rrHlitaU;/, n-m bene -ere re. - -^* '^"^,^'" = ,^" "f- 
 count of id.) the suburban villa that thou not hurr.e^t i pro j?e rare \\ Praise - "/p J[ '- 
 ,'.i)}re societatem facere.— "-^ ad with «,'eruiidial.- -» oppriinere.— 3» ^'laiulitrt.— ^' R« n- 
 (ler -"That the pr.iise- of all followed (prom"i^ yoti abdicamiir the ma-isiracy ("'«f/»»- 
 //•(//// sf at>diraU.- 3'^ valde.- =3 probflre.- «4 ,,uod.- 3^ by • adhm ;„o;v//7.-"« Ren- 
 der • That he tiad mo-t liherallv (manifirentUHme) received {ea-a/>ei'e)my*^(U\ Quintus — 
 37 ut.- 3« ceitiOrem facere.— 3« quam prinuim i)os<em.- "« ro^'are ab aliquo.— *' velie- 
 menter.- "'^ Render: 1'hat you accomplish (conjicere) what we have made out icaclre) 
 orally (coram) on our things. 
 
 \ 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 459 
 
 our affairs — 17. The consid directed^ the quaestor not to obey the tri- 
 b ne of Uicpecple.-IH. The consul exhorted"^ the soldiers to behave» 
 with the samc> bnivery* as^ they were wont to do.- 19 ^I have written 
 to Curio that he should give [you] what you would wish 
 
 VI In TEKHOGATiyE CLAUSES IN GENERAL. (A. 84 bo, UBS. l-Oj— 1. it 
 
 was the fiuestion whether those remedies were of any use , or not.— 
 
 It is the question whether knowledge^ has been more benefictal» or 
 Tni iri ous o mankind-.- 3. The authorities do not agree- ^ [as to] where, 
 am at what distance" from the Rhine Cresar deteated" Anovistus- 
 4 It Is not certain ( liquet) whether Themistocles came to ^ersja ^^^^^^^^^ 
 the reign'* of Xerxes, or during that ol Artaxerxes.— 5. I was douMt 1 
 'bethel' 1 should instantly depart- for Pompey's camp, or ^vl^^'tl'^ I 
 s Olid wait- for your letter.- C». Write to me labout] what you see what 
 voti Vel [and] what you think'« that our prospects- are, or our plan. 
 Tught tl; Le. J 7. It will depend on you-, .whicli [of the two] statuettes- 
 
 1 r^halll let you have", and by what carrier-* I [shall] send it.— H. Ue- 
 sar fouid ou\-, by asking- the prisoners, what was the cause ot the de- 
 
 1 -7 
 
 '\ll Reiative oh interrogative CL.vrsES? (/?. 85, Obs. 0,7,8,//) 
 [Use the interrogative form wherever it is admissible ; s^;"te"ces which 
 \n.nj be relative Ir interrogtttivc, to be rendered m I'^Jij^^^- 1' ^ 9,^^ 
 not give you an answer- to'^" what you have ^^^^^'^^^ ^^^ ,--Jj .^^^^^^^ 
 Qninlus isMoing-. I cannot tell.- 3. You may have what you ^^^^^ J^^^ • 
 — 4 He wished^'* to ascertain^^ what I liked best.— 0. It is uncertain 
 .vlint l.i^s real onini()n was=^«.- 0. I shall tell, what my true opmion 
 <-7 icanno e"^^^n^^^ '^ hear- what your 
 
 :pini;mi^r;his sui^^'t3«._9! idid not <^-y^^^}^v^^'^'z. 
 
 ■ mini.m was— 10. I sliall know at llio same limewhat to do .— 11. iue 
 S " elibe ratal" as to the best plan" to follow in then; defence 
 
 " i st tl,ea..ack of the eueit.y- 12- ^;!;^^"'"^; „'■::;"« I'on wl?a? 
 liihes" came" to Italv. is not known".- 13. It is not know n f om w hat 
 
 .art of the worUl" tl,e Intlian tribes-" came"' to tl"^^^"" ;"<•"' •-i*;,f^ 
 1„ not reme.nbw what informalion-' I gave you ot' ll e '''^ects ot 
 (Jnintus.- 15. For a general", to do what is ^l^ " ""^ ' '^ "^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 10 hum:luum «:enu^.— •' Render, ii ■ ',' 7 ; . w-.r Rhiiu. interval "— ^^ devincere. 
 r. Ji..„der : 'At how ^Mx-at (p. '221, No. 3) from he I'^'^^^^^^^^J'^l^^^^^^^ i8 cxistimflre. 
 
 
 raior.— s* cognotccie. 
 
I 
 
 4G0 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 what was jjoing on* in Komo. — 18. Vorros sai(P he conhl not jndi^e 
 what that statue was worlh^ — 10. LahiCnus wrote to Ctesar what had 
 been done in Gaul. — 20. I will write you to-morrow what I believe ought 
 to be kept secret*, and what maybe divulged'. — 21. You know Pom- 
 pey's intatualion" ; you know his way of considering^ cruelty a virtue ; 
 you know his susi^icion'* that lam always railing at him. — 22. Hanni- 
 bal sent five hundred horsemen in the direction" of the lloman camp to 
 reconnoitre'" whether there" were any hostile forces, what their strength 
 was, and tiieir j^lans'-. — 2:5. About the; number of troops'^" that Han- 
 nibal had after his passage over the Alps, the authorities differ. — 24. I 
 cannot tell" the exact number'* of the hostages. — 2."). The general ordered 
 an account to be taken'" of the number of prisoners belonging to each 
 nation. — 20. 1 wonder" that there is any doubt" about the route which" 
 lie took in cros-^ing the Alps. 
 
 VHI. Idiomatic iNTKitKOGATiVE CLAUSES. (/?. 85, Obs. 8, &). — 1. lam 
 sensible of the scandal 1 have given by my loose writings, and make what 
 reparation 1 am able-". (DnvDEN). — 2. Before Ctesarlefl''-, he gave his 
 orilers-- about the winter-(|uarters"^^ — 8. The ancients'* did not know the 
 properties of the atniosi)heric aii"^. — 4. The Gauls were uncertain about 
 the dirt'Ction"^^ to be followed by them. — 5. Pelops neglected to teach his 
 son the rules on moral duties"-'. — G. The Carthaginians did n(U under- 
 rate the decrease of their strength by the loss of New C'arthage'-". — 
 7. Is there anything known to you about the nationality of these emi- 
 grants'^" V — 8. I wonder that there should be any doubt as to the object 
 of these men inaj^plying for a railroad charter'"*". — J)- You have informed 
 me of^* the date of your arrival at Athens ; now^'^ let me know'"*^ liow many 
 days later^* you left''* that city. — 10. It is doubtful from^" what reasons 
 Augustus sent Ovid into exile. — 11, You see how many and how great 
 dangers they had lo meet" before they arrived at the camp.— 12. It is not 
 known by what biibe these men were induced to change their votes*". — 
 
 * Fieri.— ■-' by ner/ilre. — ^ fee p. 2()7, Obs. 4.— < ct-lJlre (j^oniiKTial).— * diviiiirnru (Lrenin- 
 dial).—* KendtT tliij three objects of *you know ' (sets) liy iiiterroirativi- clauf'fs. Infatu- 
 ation = liow inlatuated (ftifni/s) P. is. — ' tjow lie thinks {pi/fdrt) cruelty etc. — " how 
 much (f/it(rrn) he t^uspccts that he is always di ridt-d {iftn^i/tn eftse) by nu*. — ^ nd. — 
 1" speculilri ^lir-it supine). — " Render : Wiiere and iiow jjrea' [there] werehotitile forces. 
 — i'-* Render : What they were preparini;.— i^ Render : How many troops wt-re to Han- 
 nibal ha\ in;; critssed (tran^tf/rfdi) the Alps, it is by no means (nef/itdf/'/am) agreed [ronre- 
 nit) amoni; the autliors. — n ii,'norjlre. — '* Render: how irreat was the number. — 
 !• Render by an interroirativeclause with ecthesis : That the prisoners shoiid be counted 
 (receiisKn) \u^\\ many belonged «f<»e with gen.) to every people. — " the seventeen word:* 
 in this sentence must be rendered hy rive Latin words, employing an interrogative 
 clause.— '" ainbigi.—'*' by what [route] he crossed.— -" Render : iSince {'/i/n/uJofjuiilcrn) 
 I have written many things {niultd) rather loosely (lervis)^ winch how nmch {quain) they 
 are to the otlence {(iffenshA of men, I feel. I shall not refuse (rtciis'trc) lo expiate [itj 
 {quin expien)) \)\ X\\v \\'\y\iii\\i.m by which I can ((luifuDi jHnodin jiiaciiliK). — 2» proricisci 
 (suhj. ).—■■'■' what hewi-iie'l to be done.— "■'^ hiljerna.- '•'* vetus. — '-«^ Itender: Ol" what kind 
 (qi/af.is) was the air which tl(»ats around {rircnnifinidere) our earth.- ^* what, direction 
 l/Hirs) should be loUowed (gerumlial). — -' Rend«'r : 'How far {(juatemtfi) everything 
 {(/ui(lf/>it'\ must he attended to (ri/nlr<\ gerund). — -^ Reiuier: Were by no means ignorant 
 (lian<lq>((l(l>i(iin hjiuln ^ ra/tf). how much to them of strength {rirty) had gone oil (di^c-dtrt) 
 after having lost\«mi/'/^/'f) New Carthage. — -"lieiider: • Canst thou state (AV«^Wf/Y) any- 
 thing of what nation (r/ein^) are those immigrants yadrena)' v_30 lender : I wonder that it 
 i- doubted what seeking (V'/t^ry*) those men have wished (?>//«-) that a law on a railroad itia 
 ferrca) should be pa.-*scd ( /'< /7vi in their interest idrtf. o/ ilie iiittresttd person). — "' J{end<'r: 
 You have written on what day you arrived at Athens.'— ^- jam.— ^^ fac ut sciam. — ^^ Iten- 
 der: ' How many days having been placed between {inferjh'ere ; Pee p. ISO, Obs.)— ^^ de' 
 cedere with ablat. — '-^^ induced iodducere) hy which things. — 37 after having met (miiwrartr) 
 liow many and liow great dangers («W. atin.), they arrived.— ^i» having received (ucciiyere) 
 how much (great) money, tho:-e men changed their votes {de sentcntiu decedereJi. 
 
 1 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 461 
 
 I 
 
 
 tlie c.\iR-L-i.i""" "'J y,,,.,i ,.\cwiUn"-lv' thai'" Ileum iimi^"";- ■■"■■ ■- 
 
 «luu t,ul.>.- 1». "l-'-'^Sn^.'^'^l-t.^^a, as loitering- «n tl.e Appmn r.nul, 
 ,,la.v"o.i '"^^ V';"!'-''-- 1^ .JXL'd'^^^^^ 20. There will be trouble 
 
 so,>,e ut.knowu" person ^^''^f'-'" °i,,";.. ,^„y one of" the captives was 
 „f some kind".— 21. He n"'^'^^''- '^ , 'V, :,, the fi"Uting of the others,— 
 ineliiuHl- to participate-' .»f,,?, <- " ti " t ere is "my wSy lo oppose these 
 22. We will have ^"^^^'"""^-^^^ Sex Roscins hiuP any opportu- 
 
 j;l-^;;^;^;.i!:^^t;:ynr:;^:^-^^^.o;^--lt'^ 
 
 !:S"- tSy^a:;:^^ i-'^ii;:L^Xci?u:^t t^am .. .ot ao his 
 
 best'" to adjust" V „ ^n Q7^_l. Yon acknowledge" 
 
 Inoit ;;nxious- tmt to lose- fg^^^^.l'':^^,cou^;:naevU^u.^t 
 
 listed- of raw rc^nuts-, and ']}' ^'^Xx^^^^^^^^^^^^ 1»=^^^ concluded a con- 
 for service from Ins wound.— .. 1 lie nvo^^_^_^ nrisoners, received 
 
 I'll iinuij,i"^j ...._,-- i.,.,1 QoinnronUl^^ WUeiUCi ii^ " "-^ -^'^ 
 
 the lamb «-' — 7. The consul '^^^^'^l ^V^^^^TVo liv bef()re.--- 8. Cicero 
 
 ~ - -1.5*—. //%\j9Jt»0 
 

 462 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 delivered^ the city of TJonie from royal nile^ — 9. Do you think that 
 the Stoics, becauseMhey held* that nil sins'* were equal, therefore" ])e- 
 lieved tliat the same penalty should be provided' for every crime"? — 
 10. You ask me, in j'our letter, whether the opinion" of the Stoics is 
 true, tliat evervthina: that is produced'" on the earth, is created'* for the 
 use of nu'u. — 11. I ask of you that you allow'- me a 3'ear'stime coucern- 
 ini!:" those thins^s which I wi^h'* to discuss'^ with 3'ou. 
 
 X. Quasi ouiJQUK, and (jitasi-svijobltque clauses. (/?. 88. 80). — 
 1. After the battle of Phittvae'" the Lacedaemonians sent Pausanias with 
 a fleet to the Hellespont to drive'^ the Persian'" irarrisons out of that part'" 
 of the country. — 2. Here the enemy established"^" a chain of fortifica- 
 tions"* to exehide"'- our troops fnun all points. — 3. C.Tsar resolved to 
 build a wall all around Pom[)ey's camiVuii^ cround^^ to make the convey- 
 ance-* of corn and supplies for the army less danirerous. — 4. Pompey 
 prohibited the maklni;-^ of cami^-llies'-^^ to conceal"' the more easily his 
 arrival. — 5. Pausanias, because he diil not choose"" to return to Sparta, 
 betook himself to Coklnse, which place was situated-'" in the district of 
 Troy. — G. Miltiades, because he was afraid lest the fleet of the Persians 
 miiilit arrive, returned to Athens to^" the ureat dissatisfaction^' of his 
 connfrymen"-. — 7. Lysatider, to etfect^^this purpose^*, first consulted [the 
 oracle of] Apollo at Delphi^^, because the Lacedaunoniaus had the habit of 
 consul I inir^" the oracle on evervthinir. — 8. Pompev crossed over to Greece, 
 because the republic, as he said", could be defended there'"' better than 
 in Italy. — 0. The kini:: instantly seut Speusippus to piison^", whom, as 
 lie said*", the «rods themselves had delivered*' into his" hands as a hos- 
 taire for the fidelity" of [his] father. — 10. Cicero had not received any 
 letter from Crassns in five days, because he was, as lie thouirht", besieg- 
 ed*^ by the eiUMuy. — 11. The Athenians attributed^" these calamities'" to 
 their own fault*", because they had expelled Alcibiades from tlie State. 
 — 12. At that tiuu> ahuost all States of Greece were anxi(uis*'"' for an al- 
 liance with the Athenians, to have^'' a belter protection ai::ainst the Per- 
 sians in the case that^' they, perhaps, wouhP* renew the war. — IIJ. The 
 kinir reminded^^ the Uhodiausof the ships with which they had promised** 
 to assist him. — 14. The consul resolved^' to naiP° to the cross all the 
 inaraudeih^' who would be captured by the soldiers. — lo. The kinii- de- 
 manded of Verres the return^" of the statue which he had lent him some 
 
 qiioniain.--* «utare. — & pecciltuin.— « ictirco. — ' coiis-ti 
 tnerc; (LMTiiiirlial).— " delict Min.—'* lit'iidcr 'wha 
 
 * LilK'nln». — 2 doniinatus. — ' 
 
 r pleases* the Stoics».' — i" to jirodnee, <;ig- 
 iiei-f. — " freilre.--'2 dare.— '3 de.— »< velle. — '* (o discuiix fo/mt/diir/, colUtqui illiquid.— 
 1* Platieciifit!. — »7 (lej)filcre. — J« barl)aruriim. — '^* Hcnder : ' Out of those rei^ioiis'.— -° elH- 
 cere.— -I a cha'ni of j'urtiJifaCirms, immitinneH perpetua'.— ^- Keiider 'let-tany place our 
 troops could not ent('r.'— -3 to btiild a wall. ..caiinniKj ifround, ciicunivallilre rouipejum. 
 — "* K«'ii(lcr ' In order that with le-s dan^rer tlie corn and supplies {co/fi7/uuti//<) could be 
 conveyed {xvpixntdK) for {d(tt.) the ariny.'— -* infinitive clause. — i" i;rnis.— '•^' Keiider : 
 'that the more secret (occidtns) his arrival (should) be.'— '-'* i.oile.— 2» et^se.— *'" p. 2,V.», 
 Obs. 4. — 8> otlen>io.— 3*- — fjllow-citizens.— 33 </</ with j^.riindi.il.— 3* res.— 3-> Delphicu». 
 — 3rt to refer (referre) all to the oracles. — '^ Keiider ' in ev«-ry allovvabh! way.' — 3s in,le. — 
 3» in vincula conjicerc— ■>" Render l)y all the nieth<»ds adnd>sil)le.— <> dare. — ^^ dHiive 
 of theinterc.^ttd person. --'3 tides.— << ;/;//(?/•(- ; to l)e rendered by all the met lu)ds admitted. 
 — -"s ,,i,,j(icre.— <»'• tribueic— '• malum.—'"' eulpa.— '"* to f>e attxious for an (dllance ivitk 
 sonubo'ty, se ad ali< Qjus soeii-iilieui applicare. — ^" liender : in orJer to protect {t'o/i) 
 th •m>elves the more ea>ily apainst the Persians.— ** in the cane that, tii.— ^- pret«rite of 
 7¥«om/(?. — ''3 adnninGre d»;. — ^* Uender ' whicli they had prolni^ed to send to his «id 
 {.s-u/M /hwi)\- by the abstract dative.— ss slatuere.— *« ad crucem adi-ere.— ^^ Render 'all 
 that would be seized yooititnlundire, in a i)reterite tens^e) by the soldiers while plunder- 
 iiiir (pried'lrL in the form ot au accessory predicate).—*'* to denuiiid tfie return 0' sonie- 
 ih'iiuj^ repotfccre aJiquid. 
 
 EKGLISH EXEECISES. 
 
 463 
 
 \ 
 
 \, 
 
 •r.1 ..\\h two cohorts in town, if the 
 
 SSS e;i= J=3i;; S:S;^^sS- 
 
 con.nl s-nt a '''■'•«l",'"'" . kV. his .Urec.ion in [his] flight. _ 
 
 ev.nl' llmt ihe kin- hud "'"'l' ' ''' !,"\sD qrASi-ATTKACTioN. (? W»)- 
 
 XI SiiuuNOTivK By >;''7'-^"Sp; li.ai tlie public made use of us 
 1. ^Vn.onius was so popnla. a ^[^,.^2. Thus it,c,m^; UnU 
 li.o-il seivici's" whcni'voi tiiiy "liflnpeu was needed".— •>• intituy 
 if was open- ,o all il' his -^'^^'^^"'"^^Xmry" he staid (em), he was cm- 
 AlHbia,ies em.cted ' |f' ' '" ^V;^^,';^ "the «realest attect>..n'».- 4. Tlus 
 
 t . '«• »"1 '" l«- l"-'i""'"'- ''"• ''■"' Tnn,er thaiTn.joice at the victory for 
 „;:,.n over the death -(^^^f ^^ .^ the greatness- of E.vam.- 
 .vhi<h-'= he paid with 1' « : - ^\,t u,e h.d.n ' of the republic The es 
 noudas thit, as lonir as he ^^^^^^ .n-e.it was Ithe power of] his tio 
 ^v s Uie head of all Greece.- ' • f ' ^,,''„„,"1 thkt arms ought to be in- 
 
 ,;:nce that those who ^Y'jt^l-'iftd bet >resen,, he -;o»'ij;f ^ 
 
 ''™''>;. ';;S^.7ourrc7olntions'»\- ^^le hean ^ 
 
 i^l;'ronfill■b^^speeei,if.h-^^^^^^ 
 
 to him — 10. It is the cus om m " ;^''ije„ „ive satisfactory security loi 
 wl are accused of any oflence, "" ""fr ' roachable life is necessary for a 
 Th i ■l„n--nui<e in <:'"Jf,'r ",„4'A u e' Zer- of thinking and otFop- 
 
 tuose who iii've '-«ec ''^^^^^'i,^ Z,- coNKt.icT with othek T}'''^^ 
 viT 'I'liK T \w OF co^sfc.cl/lIo^ i^ ^^ , .^ ^v — I Ihe benaie 
 
 floor of ti^^"Jl!!!!!!:iIlii-i^^ 
 
 m .III .. - -- V(^n have civeu lilt ^"j^^^^oj;::!: : — - — ^^A:,f. 
 
 nor of the house. — i^^vuji«i^^U: TTrTTTThiirhtrshcynl^^ ^^^^'. 
 
 the tti.ht »^"<> ^;'':;';'^ ^i^;,7L'u quo factum e.t "'•" ;^'^^;;,^y;X..6o./2/ theforem<^t 
 __io 10 have a ^t?/ f;' niJ -'« «P"'^ n"0^cunqae.y'' Jo^w^^;^^^^^^^ affection, aliquem ca- 
 u opus esse.--»* hi^ >';^""v_„ f^ (yeat ^ometjody nnth //'f.^J^^f«'\.^j -^uj,, {with .w^v.-) — 
 
 ri.simum Y^^:^^-]Z S"ened iredimer.) by his Hoo^--i«r Render" 'What jou 
 •ja Hender 'which he intctimi v .„^ («apere.— ^** piooaic. , y^ up^rs, would be 
 
 !;!t,^;;':s,;!;'";M,:*"Vf^;H;':,3''\^ 
 
 niKl the secnd pern:";' V""VJ-v;ee ^^,. 33.-3« Icvissitnus.--*» de fanU i^^^^ adnnssible. 
 __43 ,,redere.-* f^^^'^^r^..,..', u^i.v^ the verl)(/a-i/)^ff.-*; ^■^^^''i^J^j^.^^.r g.ospes), ui aa 
 
•"T 
 
 4G4 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 guilt by' opposing^ a, regular investigation into the matter. — 3. Ca?sar 
 did more than he promised, in as much^ as, in lieu of making the tcntli 
 legion his body guard, as he promised, he made tliem cavaliers*. — 4. Cicero 
 saiid that Ca'sar had committed a capital crime^ in as much as he had 
 wished" to be king of the Roman peoi)le and the lord' of all nations, and 
 had accomplished'' it. — 5. During" this Aviiole march^" we could not see" 
 [any] hostile'- forces, although'^ we searched" all the forests'^ and hiding 
 places^® from seven o'clock till midnight". — G. It was impossible for ihe 
 accused"* to have committed that murder*", since he came to this country 
 after"" the perpetration of the crime, and never'^* was longer than one day 
 absent'--' from his [former] home. — 7. He comphiin(;d=*^ without good 
 reason"^*, since our courts'-^^ have always held this law'"'' to be unconstitu- 
 tional. — 8. There was no good reason'^' ^vhy you should sell" those 
 stocks'^" at a discount^", considering that the g(ivernment'' has always re- 
 deemed them at par. — 9. This number was large, considering that their 
 own cavalry^- amounted to no more than eigiit liundred. — 10. The num- 
 ber of these was tive thousaud^^ while ^^their own cavalry amounted to 
 less than [one] thousand. 
 
 XIII. I'llKTEIHTfc: CONSECUTION, OR LOGICAL TENSES, DEPENDENT ON 
 rKETEUITES CONTAININ(; IMIKSENTS JJY IMrLTCATION. {li. 1)4, OUS. 2-0). — 
 
 1. I have sullicienlly explainecP^ how^** the idea of duty-*' [must] be de- 
 rived^** from the idea of morality^". — 2. ISobody has, as j^ei^", asked me 
 whether I had any message** for Rome. — '•]. Have not the decemvirs car- 
 ried*'^ in this very year tlie law * tiiat*"' there shall be no intermarriage 
 betWiHMi Patricians and Plebeians? ' — 4. I have i)laced" all [my] hojie in 
 you since, besides^' you, I have no one in whom 1 trust*". — 5. We have 
 been asking*' you, for a long time*", every day whether there is*' any 
 hope to save the life of the accused. — G. You have not yet learned 
 wiiat may^" be elFected by wisely using the means'' given to us by nature. 
 — 7. We have n(;ver doubted that-'- there are [I'Ut] few Fabriciuses in 
 this country^"*. — 8. I have very oflen^* considered tlie (juestion^^ whethei 
 
 * Qui.— '* by nolle. Kenilcr : ' Who dul!«t not wbli that the thinj^ ^^h(»ul(l be invchtij^ated 
 
 (co(//io,scere) by a just question'.— ^ Kcnder : ' Who, "when h(! had i)roniisod tluU it was 
 to be {futtlrum et:.'<e) lii.-» imetoriaii cohort ; ' (' Ai.v ' to be reudcrrd by the dative of tlie iii- 
 teresteil person). — ♦ (o nuike name person a earali^r, ahqiiein nd equtim rescribere (a term " 
 taken from the promotion to ihe equestrian rank, in tiie census^.— ^ to commit a cujiital 
 Clime, capitillem esse. — " eoncupiscere. — '' dominus. — ** pcrtieere.— ® al)l. — '" iter. — " cer- 
 iiere.— '2 hostium.— 13 qaum, witli sul)junct. — '* i)erscrutilri.— '^ saltus. — 1« latebra*. — 
 1^ multtt nox.--i» Render : How (qui) could it be done that {ii() the accus.ed committed. — 
 *» caides.— '■'° Kender : ' Since he came hiter ij)0^t€(i) into this republic than the crime {tnale- 
 ficium) hid t)een perpetrated ".— ^* Kender "nor that [one] was lonirer etc' — '^'^ al)essc. — 
 ^'■^ queri. — 24 millo jure. — -^ Render ' since it has always been jud^i-d (rognOi(cer€)\—'^^ Ren- 
 der : • that this law, wiihont prejudice to the ctmstitution (tutlra Itfje pt rpef/to). could have 
 not been made (fern}\ Lex ptrpetaa — constitution, is according to tlie anaIo<;yof ' tdic- 
 tum j)erpetuinn '. See also Cic. N. D. 1, 15, 40 ; Or. 2, a^i.— •'' Quid erat quod.—-" transfene. 
 — ■■'*' publica ilia chirDirrapha (nom, jilur.).- ^o cum versfirjl. — 3» Render: 'Since, from 
 the treasury (te?'ani/f/t) ii.-ell', they have always b'*eu redeemed (redimen) at the same 
 price [see p. '.iTD, 7^.85, 'i\ as they were written' (the auxiliary to be used only once at 
 Itie end). — ^- Itender : 'Since the^ themselves had no more than elL'ht hundred horse- 
 men". — ^3 jreiiitive. — 3* qnum. — ^*» explicilre. — 3« quemadmodiun. — '^'' the idea of duty, 
 otficia.— 3^ ducere.— 3» tlw idea of tnorality, honestas,— •"' adhuc. — "" Itender * Whether I 
 wished {v^Uc) anythinir to Rome ' (accordinir to the rules alxmt the cases of tlie names of 
 cities). — •»- ferre.— -"^ liender: 'that not (ne) [tliere] should l)e ii.teiinarria>re (conn>d>ium) 
 to the patricians with the plebs'.—** ponere.—^^pneter.-** Render 'to whom I trust 
 {confidere, snbjunct.) I have nobody'. — *'' quierere ex. — *» jamdiu.— <" Render: 'whether 
 auy"(by€f) [there] is to the accused* hope of safety (^o/m*)'.—'" posse. — *i Render * by the 
 forces {rireei}, <;iven to ns by nature, wisely to l)e used' (reversed phrase). — ^2 quin. — 
 »« Render: 'that few are in this State Fabriciuses'.—'* Biepe ac inultuiu.— '• to con- 
 sidtr the question, coj^iiiire. 
 
 E^'GLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 405 
 
 civiV,...i..n- 1..S boon a ^^^Xi^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^, 
 l,ea.a' l,..w anosa... y " ' • "^ '\ > q ^,,. „ot because' he feels bm.self 
 li,>n'.- 10. I.uoilu.s .as ' :V''' '^'a^Vil' to his relatives'.- 1. ^»' 
 unsafe» in Italy, but ,n •> >' ' ,.V /•7,,fJ'„,in,, „nd gcod character», ever 
 ,.i„zen of this rein.bl.o, ^<; "^,,;!* * e nmtrv''^ «he.?, he cannot' exercise 
 l,as betaken himselt Itor !r™HlJ ," •'*^'"'r :,,,,, give offence" while" 
 the .mlural ri-hts ot ;j'^'> ■-, |,7,.f^. i,}' ,ey mean to give offence.- 
 „„,v mean" to «;'<>"•' a, 'J;'" ' „^ V^ ,^^„^ouia t.o. govern" our re- 
 13. I have olten l»/"*' V, nHlfeol eclions" that Ihedefendant has made 
 public- 14. \ouhave "™'^'^';-° { ^".i. ,,„sl,ccn alleged- which [coidd 
 L'aii.st our arirument.- iJ- -'*./,''"'",•, ■.„ iui.ious=- an offence».- 16. 1 
 have induced- the accused t< • <:-> '» ' ^ '^ ,' .j „,^.,o act as attorney 
 ,ve exi-lained to you the '"''JXv ; , . .^ w ■- onr [friend] Gajus 
 in this <ase.- IT. 1 was ^^^'^'^^ {~\li„m^A^' you ..f the do ngs 
 has- stopped his Pf y'-'f^J'^-T, .^'Si ^ 1 ^s r etnni" ft"... Ganl.he arrived" 
 orQidncuus 'U>.<'^lj;>t!^^ :;/^! J^iHlds place in order to be, as ,t were^ 
 at litis City.— ID- 1 "!^^V V V/.cLl nbout bv manv storms.— 20. 1 ha\L 
 in a safe port, alter ^^'^"-^/ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ on^- may say 1 promised 
 
 made these ^^•r=^>Vgc'nuaU> m ordir jmii^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^..^^.^ ^ 
 
 from fear^Mvhat I I'^'^^^^'^V ^j.^i ?? ,re ready to perpetrate the most 
 persotts ^vho*^^lbr^ ^^11::;^^ '^opfe wh</* leliele, \hat this Senator 
 
 wicked crimes* .— -i- .''VVt,' ,it some wei"-hty*» reason. 
 
 did not change his vote*^ withou somt^^^^^^^^^^^ rK.;FECT subjunc- 
 
 XIV. Tenses of ^^'f^^^^^/J\i::^VKNCES with rytn/m-^^m (i?/J4, O^^^^ 
 TIVES, ON HYPOTiiETiCALS, AND ^f^^T^^'^^f^j j^ ^^f ^/e two meu*^ csteemed*- 
 ,_10);- 1. You ^r^lV^V^t^rUe^ t at you knc^^vith what zeal Crassus 
 tbeoihet-" most-'.— 2. 1 VV'^*"^^, i.?/,} nnrrht that he would gain dis- 
 d c^voted--' himself to speaking ^^'^^V udd i^^^^^^^ though t^^ 
 
 it proper to omif^ jvhat 7;"^^i,,,;>V,f soldiers^'" that Hanmh^lLhad 
 --^I^ ,Khn^r^ti^ber(.f goo(l (/>am/'. or<.f ew^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Voider- ^^s:-f^i^^sj;^^ i:;;-!n- S^'r^:::^-^^::'^,^^^ 
 
 I; '%'jr/ iZ/V conveMre aliquem.-^ P'V '^'^""/^;^:,„ ^V-^' m(.re. b<.ni.-i'' m emu 
 ' lo jfoyu ti-ii "^ iiindmi With ts-<e in tue -unjunti. _ ,v,,,c;i. rthin<'sl whim 
 
 _i'i niiinn with hni>ju"«-i. ^v, f,„.,h i nrofrie) a<:aiiist (t/'> tnost L"'l' " J o« ^,.^ 
 
 thc^ word. ' proper 'o ' ^•^^^J^!:^^,"eop ^ (\vith Quan(ce). 
 5* by an mlerrogatue cuu-e. »- i 
 
466 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 467 
 
 before lie crossed' the Alps?— 5. I would read- to yon many [passafjes] 
 of his letters, if I were not afraid that this kind of arixumeiil^ is at vari- 
 ance* with the i)raetice of tliis court^ — G. Would you deny [if] if I re- 
 peated*^ on what helj) you relied^ when you atlncked me V — 7. What 
 would preYent* me from becoming" a Darwinian'" if I approved of Dar- 
 win's principles"? — 8. Epicurus, surely, would not reason'- tiius if lie"* 
 had learned his multiplication tal)le'^ — 9. Wiih what deliirht'^ would 
 you hear Sem[)ronius, since your Titius, whom you pniise so much, wiili 
 us, is by no means ccmsidered an orator of the tirst rank"^. — 10. I would 
 mention'^ the advantages wliich'^ at that time, LucuHus's advice had'" 
 for me, if I couhl do this-" without speaking of myself — 11. As'-' the 
 Saguutians were at all times most attached*- to thelioman peoi)Ic, so'^" 
 in the catastrophe when"* flannihal ])ut an end to the existence*^ of the 
 whole people, they kei)t'-" their fiilh up to their last agony-'. — 12. While'-" 
 P()mi)ey liad already'^" understooiP" thatCtesar was estranired^' from him, 
 he understood this much more distinctly^'' when he found^' that llirlius, 
 who was Caesar's most intimate friend", had not called on hiin^^ 
 
 Xy. Tenses ob^ the subjunctive in modal clauses. (li. i).")).— l. The 
 administration of tliat governor was so disgraceful as to leave that State 
 wliich, when he entered otlice, was most prosperous, utterly ruined and 
 ])oor'^ — 2. Yesterday your ambassador declared^' tiiat he would not re- 
 turn to you, [so] that I have come myself to^*" conclude^" ])eace with you, 
 if possible*". — ;}. 8empronius's speech was rereived*' witli marked*- fa- 
 vor*% [so] that I have hardly ever heard any orator who, in a like"** man- 
 ner, commanded the attention of [his] atidience*^— 4. Washington ad- 
 ministered the government^Vso faithfully and ])rudently*^ that he has 
 always iield*" the tlrst place^" in tlu; hearts^" of iiis countrymen. — 5. So 
 great was the wisdom of our forefathers^' in framing^- the constitution 
 of the government, tliat it has remained intact, although^^ a most formi- 
 dable"^ civil war was kiiulled^Mn order to destroy^" 1t.— G. That man 
 bore^' [his] poverty in a manner that never any one heard him utter a 
 complain i^^— 7 . Balbus has written that he is'sulfering^" under a bad 
 
 > Tran-i,'it'(U.— '^ n-citilre.— ^ «;ciiiis orationis.— ■• (n be at ruridiire iclth. ul)li()rrC*re ab.^ 
 5 liiijis loci in()<.--« iiarnlrc— ' KeiuU'r: ' iriyini: (frtfus) (.ii what help (a'U'iha) vou at- 
 {arkt!il in-^\— « proliiliC'ie.— s» fvadrre. — '<> Darviiiiiiiiiis.-," HcikIcm- : if I ai)pr.»ved ip/o- 
 Mrt) what that L<»>U'J ^'ays (-ii]>j 1— '-dicc-rc. — ^3 liii'o.— '* Kfiidcr : if he li;id Iwirixul how 
 much are twice two (P- 1, § "-iV.», kxplan.).--'^ Quo tandem animo.— >« (o conH'fer some- 
 bO(lij (HI orator of tke flrnf rank, i\\\i\\wm in ])iimariis oratoiibu^ nutnonln'. — ^^diccre. 
 — '» lifiidcr by an inicrroiijativc clau!*i'.— »>* to hare adrantafjeii for t'ouut/ody. alicui pro- 
 riessc— -«> l{(Mider : If I would not have ({/>^n/nUiah to t'peak "of myself.— 2> Sajrnntliii 
 (lunin.-- 2i ic) fte nwt a/fadied to s'ltnefrntlij, alicui surnmam aniicitiain piiestilrc.— "•'3 turn 
 ve:o.— 24 in ilia calainiiate qua.— "^^ uinvei>ani L'enttm tollcre.— "■'«colere.— "' ad ultimam 
 puam pern iciem. —*•'■" (pium. . .turn.— *^^ antea.— 3" intelli;;ere.— ^> alicnilre ab.— sa certius. 
 —=•3 vidCM-e.— 3M{i'n(br 'who Wiis most intimate (fainiliarU) to that [one]'. The 
 clause is i-eprescntfd as a rea-^on of I'ompey.— ^^ to call on sonulmty. aliqiiem convciiTre. 
 — =*« Keiidet- : ' That man so dis:j:racefully (////y>is') administered {qafternare) the republic, 
 that wliai State he received (accyn're) most flourishin;; (/o/r//,s), 'that [one] he left (r&lin- 
 fji(fire) utterly (penita>i) destroyed (evertert) and poorest*.— 3' i)v ucf/art.—^" ad. with jre- 
 rundial — 3» componere— «0 ?r///i yoa if j}(,Msi/,le ; render: 'if it will liave b»'en allowed 
 (/«r(?/) throuirh you'.— -«i excipere.— ■»-' in-i-nis.— ^3 LM-alia.~'«* par.— «s /o cotnmand the 
 attention of an audience, animos iiudientium commovGre.- •*" rcinpublicam ;:abernJlre. — 
 *"< with so much laith (fides) and prudence.— «« tenCre.— <» Render : • the first in tlie heart* 
 of his citizeiisplace".— 6«aninii.— 5= majOres — S2 Kender : 'thatthe law by which tlioge 
 willed (velli) that the republic nhould be for ever (in perjh^tuittn) ;r<>verned."has remained 
 (manure) intact (incotu/nisf.—^^ quum.— ** nniximum.— s» inllammaie.— ^« evertere (ire- 
 rundial after ad).—^'' ferre.— s-* to utter a complaint, queri (panic, as accessory predi- 
 cate).— ^» Render : ' that, he is oppressed (periimra^tic participle) by so great hoarseneeu 
 (ratfdtas) \ 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 ^ ti^ot l.o pannot sneak.— 8. Crassus held the first 
 attack of hoarseness «^ tl at »e canm^^^^^ g^^^^^^, ^„,ong the jurists, 
 
 place att.ong tl^e speak; J of hi timc^^^a^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^^ common between 
 
 which P''^»»''^"^ ^^l^^^'V' rU?e?r irirt of^ the other's praise, bul« [held] 
 l,oth. so tlial e^^^^h^appropnattd Mil m i ^^^^^,,^ 
 
 his own wholly.- i). ^^ ^''^^ .^'\^'';'',,^^^^^^^^^ seemed as if the whole 
 and the cries of ngony ^ere inte e. ^^[^'j^^ J^^^^ ^^,^,, at that time 
 citv" were in the deepest »^<'"'»"^-V .1 ipinM^ .,« the foremost by far'*, 
 wa\ sttch'^ that the ^^^:^^':^'^^:^^^ 11 He was [in the habit 
 [and that] the lUmu »^S^^^' ,/^^,%^^'";;" Vb th and thirsty'" to his 
 
 of] taking'^such exercises' as ^ .^/^^"^^^^^^^^^ of Greece^"^ that 
 
 n,jals'-r-^12. Athens-' had ^^J^^f^ ^^'^.^^I'^r ,i,e supreme 
 Sparta- was aware that •\-^; .^ ^^ !^ X^^^^^^^ ^^ere the merits of these 
 
 only a (luestion <>^V rTi//. lit to im ^^e" which of them^« was superior^" 
 [two] men^ that it is dimcult toju.ige ]^ '*^' . ^ allowable ten- 
 
 L the other-. [Uender both f;;^^ f;J^^,^^^^^^ large was the 
 
 ses. There will be ihree y^^^"''^^^^^"^;""!' Jacu lous^' that tliL^ should^"^ 
 forces of the enen.y that it ^^^.^^^f^^^^^^^^^^ 15. There was 
 
 have been defeated by so sninlP^ a tou^c / ^^^^^^^^^^^^ ,^^.^, ^.i.Ue" we are 
 such as(.ircity^^ot pn.nunent^ %% i^ \" i^ e t admii-ation for any-.- 
 satisfied- with a ew we 7/^/, =^;." ./ ,^,^, ^ ^ 
 
 IG. That general might have ^U'st.m ed ; "^^ ^ \ ,^^^^^, ^3^ applied- what 
 he had pursued- it*- with energv ' t^ , ' V* 1 ' "Ve^" knew how to defeat 
 Ctcsar is said- to have remarked^-' o I omp^ } , ; v Corv -\ne clauses m 
 the enemy], [but] noij' how Jju^^^eusc ^^^^^^^,,,,14^. n. Pom- 
 the senience, 17. 1«. to betransfovwed ''^''^;:^^^^^^^^^^^ Home with 
 
 pey left abruptly- tlu3 cUy ;---^>--,,;\W^!;:;;^ the undertaking" 
 the greatest- rapidity -^.^^^^^ '"-^.t ,7f ..nHin--»" the sieire of the city.-- 
 because there was very be ^^/^^^^^^^^(7; "ecmntrv-: that he placed- 
 1«J. LJ5rutus^vass(>lalthtulmhlJ.(mllt^l'"_ ^ ,, ^. j^j^ g.^^ _ 
 
 the ireedom of his --^^]^y^^^:j''^!^,^Z^^^^^ a gift trom 
 
 nu'.r 'lH'aki..j,'Wi<'c'»,l>"t ^a.//.//M ^nevula '»/^^^';^ !,,';. M^nit iaufem) both 
 .„'^4 q,lo,lammoUo.-^ ^}'^7;- %}':l^^'o^ l"t^ to address t/ie jyeople. i" 7»"0ne 
 
 inenjae) li s (i.e. praise) wh dlv ' (see p '''\^^;^\,: ;^ in ,,iU us fie/ usque) were made that 
 q«L-f« ll^-nder : ' .0 great .^v^H^p,nL- a.^ n^;' ^ ^^/^^^" , ^ -^^^ (vermn)rnonnnu^ 
 1^ 11 Render- * tluU the buterest [in] '''^ V; i tl.nt then «t^te (^/a^«*)•— '^ ^»^^^^"-"" 
 
 ilcibfades were .0 great virtues and so great Mct. . 
 
4G8 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 vices Ihat all wonclerod lliat so difFcreiit traifs of cliaractfr» sliouUl be 
 toiind in one man.— 23. Aiitoniiis was stiMuilatedM)v so violent* hatred 
 a.^^ainst Cieero that lie was not only hostile' to the latter", but also to all 
 ot his incnds.— 3;]. James the Second was not the man to' pardon" jn- 
 junr-3 received, but of such a character that he" would'" rather lose his 
 crown tlian torego'-' his vcni^eance apiinsl^^ tliose who, on a certain oc- 
 casion , had treated him with disresi)eci'^— 24. 1 never uttered the sli-rht- 
 est rcm.irk in belialf of Capsar^» which he did not receive" with evideiil'" 
 satlsl.•l(•tl()n^^_2.■). Xobody ever returned from that coiintrv without beiii"- 
 nllected m heallii'-'".— 20. Thraso was not so illiterates^ as nof^^ to under- 
 stand tiiesense()f Cicero's words'^^— 27. [There] was nobodv presenf^* 
 wiiliout leelinir- compassion for the accused.— 28. What services did v«)U 
 ^^'•V-"^^;; •:;• ^" ^vhichl did not surpass" your expectation by my 
 zeal- .— 2!). J hey entered into a copartnership^», but so that the one was 
 to attend to the in-door business^", and the other to travel for the con- 
 cern .— ;jO. Ihey compromised the niatter^'^ so that Sempronius was to 
 receive an indemnily" of (;o,()00 sesterces, but was to trive securitv for 
 lutiire damages to iJalbus^^^— iM. He left only so much of a garrison 
 in tiK' town, that the inhabitants could not carry out any treacherous 
 plan . 
 
 XVI. Tenses of dependent nvpoiiiETicAL peuiods. (/?. OG ) (Tv^ 
 ifi every sentence even/ idlniismhlGform of the lu/pothctical preterite )— 1 We 
 are not always allowed to do^'» what would be proi)er='' witli'"* others'» — 
 2. Alexander, bciiiir struck-*" by an arrow at^^ the siesre*-' of some citv re- 
 ^''"''^'''A'y^'""'^ whicli, as^^ he himself said, would i)roclaim** Jiim to be a 
 man if he were not Jove's son.— 3. It is to no purpose to ask^»^ what I 
 would do it these [things] had not happened.— 4. The prosecutor" savs 
 that I ompey has done what he had no right to do*«, which is a more seVi- 
 ous [charge] than if he said that he did^" what he oughl^' not [to have 
 (ionej.— o. Either I must''/ say many [things] which 1 could not suppress^' 
 It I were present, or [IJ must not go^\- 0. It is the question, whether 
 Alexander the Great", it ho had crossed over to Italv with an armv, would 
 have detealed the Komans, or not.— 7. I do not doubt but that Sempro- 
 iiius, with great pleasu re ^^, would accept this olfer^^ if he were \mV' pre- 
 i ^ dipt rent tniit^ of churacttr, lam diveivu iiatanT.— a i-se — » to t)e t^tiiTuilal^d 
 against, i.rri ni.-Mam fen.x.-s i„i,uicu..-6 by u.-Uhe vum to is qui -«la U? 
 njuruis ncct'ptus nMuitiere.-" fjut of .nrh a characttr that /e'.ed qui^-io vele- 
 
 ^^^r'^''inr:f'^-'''''''^^^ Ti..cSui<ei;qua^i^Xbi.^. 
 
 lantlLi . ^() ^\\^;:\\U'>\ yminwuun) ri-inark (^/ r/z/w) of mine (1' 1 l) I'd li "i) in- 
 tork-ml Kinlyreaer,) lor (At'.a.'.-.T acTipenr-." illustri.-.-iv -ratia.-Vo^ ^.i^VJ,^/,; 
 
 com u'ovCd^ 
 
 t i,. -A /^ T **^"^^ ' • ^ "'^t (lid you order (rnandare) me ' y_-J7 vinceie — ^» dili-'eii- 
 
 tia.-^« to enter into a copartntr./up, socieiftte^i ii.t.-r se coniraliere -:*« Reiulei • 'Th t 
 
 \hl ;;"nL''^"' •'*''';''''• ^■^';'''V''''" ^'"'"^'^l ^V'^^l» were to bed,,n™ ;,V-^Ker^^^^^ 
 the uall« (;wte-,.,'._Ji i{,.,uler : 'llie other ^ho^ld always b.- o V/the roacN S^ 
 
 hiufwhithTtc mT;,;; ;;!:;'^ *;'.''^^^"*" li^v^-.r ^r^'^r" ^^"^ '••"' ['-'.i i>-.n] done »;; 
 
 .. .u> i . /f oimiiet.— '-i,'Mnindial.-^3 s^ilGre aliiiuid.--'* venire -5^ liender bv 
 
 Suu!: -^i ffZX'iZ ^"^ ^^^^a,ic/,.o, si etc-^e wltk yreat pleasure. lib;uti..ime.-^i cou^ 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 469 
 
 vented bv the most important^ reasons.- 8. I am greatly embr.rrassed 
 b^the absence Tthos by whose zeaP I wou d have obtained* 
 
 evervtldn- ?1 if they were present).- 9. Clodius lett» tlj,e ^>rum a an 
 enr'v 1 r« because h"e would have been in great danger if he had staid 
 r ^'1 i?!n.r:.r 10 rThc'iel were six cohorts distributed all over« he 
 ;;^-^ nc "^d idi \n!ouM <n-dered- to the support- <>f Domitius i I 
 
 wi iwl Wheml atonenlac Y<m have d(me things ot such a kind 
 
 th t Se u e 1f U we^ free, would have placed you under tria or 
 I,\\' , e- -^ 2'. C\i3sar explained- to the soldiers the danger" in which 
 1 m V would have been\f the enemy had known ^^^^^^^ 
 the fortifications were held.- KJ. It is not probable '^^^'l^^}"^^^^^^^^^^ 
 ould have remained quiet- if they had been "^\VTtWv had n been 
 ,\Ve^« — 14 Tliere is no doubt l>ut that the citizens^», it they had "J>t «^^n 
 1 orou.rhtv demoralized-, would have been aide soon- to ;;ecove Mlic.i 
 ;;';.i!^_'l.K Tlie ambassadors answered that thev had ^f^^" ^^ Z^^^^^^'^^.- 
 nnds of the king-, althou-lr^ they would not have ^^^j-ed [to do soj 
 wi hmit his •iuth()ntv-^'' - 1C>: Thev marched"^-' with so great rapid ty that, 
 • care tbrt IwomnkH^^^^ delayed-" them, they would have 
 
 I.. lw.d he c t - bcf r^^ news-^ of their defeat" had been known»''. 
 
 ^ n So ncS^eiuiy ^s the city guarded- that the ei.emy ^}^ 
 eas ly taken^he whole garrison-, if they, at night l^^d scaled th^^v.>l 
 bv ladders^"'— 18. The ambassadors said that the ^^*;"^'"^ , ^^^'^^ "!L 
 sJrv^ so well of- the Roman people that their country- «".^^^^" ^«J/^^, 
 
 have been devastated almost in sight- of the l^^'»"'-^" ^;;>">-7.\^;,ve feea 
 was the want" of provisions that it would, nnquest u nably ;i;;^vc ^^^ 
 
 ecessary- to capitulate-, if the enemy had not ^^^^^^l^^^^ ^;'^^;" ^ I J^^^^ 
 X.ro oo The conlla.n-auon of the city made so rapid progress that, I 
 
 ^U;i had ' nnlnemid to blow^ noti ing at all would ^^^^^^^^^^ 
 - 21. So suddenly dia the vniemy attack our troops on It ina ch ti ai 
 the ^vhole ba-nige- of tlie army would have been lost ^i^., ^^I^ JJ;^^.^ 
 had not held thei7- ground- with the greatest fi^-;;T^l-7^^^^^^ 
 no liope of relief^^ even it we could break through the ciicie ci 
 by ^vhieh the enemy has invested""' us. ot^rtt-ntpttve (R 
 
 ^XVI I. (.N)N VEUSION OF THE FUTUKE-PRESENT TNTO A ^[ ^'^^^^^^^^^^^j ^^^^ 
 
 97.)- 1. lam afraid the tribunes will eagerly-^ 'T,t re w- s e u^^ 
 to propose-^ the law on the con sular pr()Vinces.-- j ^Ther^^ 
 
 parative).-^ morCui uu llu'.nnperfect u I'^^r^ f u'V/K oV W/ a ^i//rf, ea.-»^ to 
 •i-iai -« mittere.- '» ^^nbsiduini (abstract datne).-' ^^' ;^',;^ ' "^u od..cere -^* Ren- 
 re some one under trial .or hi. ^^^-^<'^<l^.i;;i^^^;!!\r:i^lZ^r^ to re- 
 Irr 1)V ;in interro-ative clause un wha dan-ei etc) ^^'7'" _i,»eivitas ( = cives). 
 nahi V/./i./, «luieseere.-»^ nrtwremjl.n ^'7/.«'-^' :r4nr~'^' revi^ reciperare. - 
 -•^0 they are ihorou,,1dy de,mrahzed, »"""» '^'J^' , ' //, ^f the I'biq. facere qme rex 
 23 Keuder : • the lo>*i lihiu-s]' -"^^ to execde the ^ ' Xne^ ( nrmar/\ bv the authoriiy 
 fieri voh,it.-'-== (,uanu,uam.--« KcMKler = ^"^^^;;;.^ .^''7^ ,"'^ impedlre - 
 01 hituself.--^^ iter facere -^^ Render : tje c^a • U;mO ,^,^,4*^^^,,,^ ^^,,^^,,4, defe it. 
 30 ad urbem pcrveulre.--" citius Hi'^m.-^^^ """t>u. "' ^i.,^,,, pnesidium opprinie.e. 
 -34 pc>rcrebrescere.-3i custodIre.-3« ^0 ^^^;/^''f J'' flff i ide a iquo meritnm esPC- 
 -37 Lcendere^3. .cake.-- to .t^erc^souu-Uat^sonu^ ^e i^^g^^^SiOne.-*^ by g<Tun- 
 «Oai:ri.— *> hyc/e/ye/v.— *^ conspectus— "CM jf all as.^ ._.,"V '.^..^..^vio r.-lenter proced«re. 
 
470 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 most* dani^er that the iTinforcoincnts!, on [their] niarcli, would be attack- 
 ed* by the enemy, and [henee] would not arrive early^ eiiouirh* at the 
 camp.— ;j, llaunil)al was afraid that the kins would not t'liltiil his prom- 
 ise* of makini; war au:ainst tlie Romans.— 4. I liave not the slii^htest 
 doublMhat the Senate' will ixrant your petition. — o. It is not doubtful'* 
 to me but that you should immediately return to Home. — 0. Cix?sardid not 
 doubt that almost all the Gauls woukl join the conspiracy". — 7. Xobody 
 doubted that Pompey, with all his forces, would come to the relief" of 
 Domitius.— 8. The Helvetians did not doubt that the Allobroi^es wouKl 
 be persuaded to allow" tliem a passa.i^e''^ throui^h their territoiy". — 9, I 
 sec what will happen" to us if they persevere'\— 10. Many perished, 
 not knowiui?" what direction'' to take or to avoid. — 11. It was decided" 
 by tlie delejrates how many shij^s, and how much money each State 
 should contribute'".— 12. Valerius Procillus said, they had deliberated^" 
 in his presince*', whether he should be immediately burned alive-'"', or 
 whether his punishment'^' should be delayed-^— 13. Sempronius did not 
 know with how many-* troops, or by what roule-^ the enemy would 
 come;' to the camp.— 14. Cicero was waiting'-'' at Brundusium lor the 
 decision of his tate by Cit'sar. — 1.5. I have written to vour brother to 
 send me a copy of the paper-" which he is i^^oin.ir to read'" hi the Senate. 
 — 10. We have been warned^' to be on our i,Miard'-, lest we may be inter- 
 cepted^*' by Caesar, because he=*^ had marched" in tiie same direction in 
 which our journey lies, and would arrive there sooner tiian we could. — 
 17. I am absolutely unable to do anythiiii^^'' in your atfiir, since the Presi- 
 dent will be absent almost duriuLT the whole summer.— 18. The memory 
 of this man is so much revered" by his townsmen", that abnost all wiil 
 make contributions^" towards the erection of jjis statue.— V.L A pardon 
 was i^ranted'" to Domitius with the i>roviso*' that he should leave'- the city 
 
 in the same nii^ht.— 20. There was a dan<:er lest" that [whole] party*' mi"-h"t 
 be captured or killeiPMf they should fall in with^*^ a larger force*' of The 
 enemy.— 21. Tije delegates remarked, that if Hannibal sliould lose the 
 fleet, the loss would be the same*^ as if'" [the fleet] were lost by^" [any] 
 other conuii.inder; and if any success would be ohiaiiUHp', it would re- 
 dound"- to the glory of Hannibal, not [to that] of (he king.— 22. 1 can 
 
 1 Suminns.— 2 RondtT : ' tli.it tlio rciurorceincnts, huviiii; l)ec'ii attacl<e(l ((f.<vi/>(»;-f) on 
 tiu^ march (iter) l)y the; t'licmii's, won id not ai-rivr.'— ^ niaiurii<.— -« HcikUt botli by .safis 
 and jHirff/H, wliicli advcrl)s requin' dillVrt'iit exprrssioiis I'or ttit' coiijmictiou.— s Rcudor- 
 ' would not fiiinil ( pneddre) what ht' liad |)n»miscd coMCi-rnini: (de) tiie mal^in"- of war {btl- 
 luingerere) ai,'ainst tiio Koinans.-» omiiTrio non diil)itru-e.— ' Kc'tidor : 'iliar tliou wilt ob- 
 tain (Impefnlrt) from the Senate; that whicli thou art t^i-akhi'^ (jjchft).—" diihiii^.—» join 
 the. coiusinraaj , ad conjurationem aceeilere.— >o t=ul)!^idium (al)?iract dative). -»^ dare -- 
 12 uer.;-i3 tines.— 14 e!>.<e.-ia pert^eveiilre.— »6 ino.ertus.— 17 /o takew to avoid a direc- 
 tion, aliquid petere aut vitilre.-'« const itnere. - i» pnestare —'-*> Render • 'that it waa 
 deliberated Kcoimilere)\-^^ Sec p. ISl, li. 2:il, Obs. l.-^--' lo be (jxnietl alive, ij^ni necilri.— 
 -iJ supplicmm.— 'i ni alind tempus ditlVrre.— " qiiantus.— '-•« itinera—" pervenlrc — 
 2^ Render : expected wliat of a re.<oIiition (consilium) Ca'sar would take icaitert) coii- 
 cernin<,' lum. --'-:»' exemplmn libelli.— ^o recitare.— 3i ixan\vi\K:\x\—^-^ to be on one's (ruard, 
 cavere.— 3-^ to intevctid, excii)ere — s^ quod is.— 35 Render ' Jiaviiii; marched into the same 
 places which we are t»eekin^(;>e^e7'e), would come thither more quickly than we could'.— 
 3" Render : 'In thy tliniir I can do at)S()lutely {o//ihIho) nothiiii,''.— 37 tanto lionOre liabe- 
 tur apiid. -38 cives >ui.— 3» to makeconfribuliom fouardniht erection of a atatut, pecunuia 
 111 statuam conlerre. — *o /■or/ran'' 'i7;a;(io«. impunitjltem concedere.-*» ita.~'«- decedere. 
 —43 „(..— 14 manus.— <- to be capturtd or killed, opprimi.— *'' to fall in v:Uh. incidere in.— 
 <7 iiiajores copue.— <« Render: 'that it would be ilie s^aine [aiiioiiut] ol loss {dauinnm)\ 
 — '«« ac St. -•'*' ])er.— 51 Render ; ' il anything' prosperous woukl bai)peu {etenire)\—^'^ ease 
 with abstract dative. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 471 
 
 1 n of T r^nmo to tlic readin<^- of this bilP with the purpose* 
 
 assure^vou ha 1 came to e leaa.n interest^.- 
 
 expect" the return <.t «' f .»'"'';',?'"^V" ."'a, s.K.n as" the season» ofthe year 
 rn;;.'p:.r.'-rir.; yllu wouW ^K^ up «.at p.an.', since that law 
 
 ''xvin'cONvln'^ION OF TIIK FUTCRE-PF.RFECT INTO A SUBJtTXCTIVE. 
 
 /n^.L 1 ^^.n «IV ihatwcwiU be" (lelealed if we ever would come 
 \^-^^JiiuZt^;^l!:n^l ^Seu,pronius writes that "ewiU return as 
 
 consul raist a ^V; J''^ .. , .,• .j ^ of the Roman army would be 
 
 u » the l>.^p" that they would deliver ll^r^'^!,'^!°\^"rck<'To he ti^ 
 
 that person"^ whom he himself would appouU^ — 
 
 inai ptiMM. — >> — -— ^-r— — f^— -^-T^^;^;^^ ,,t,_6 (o second the biU of a law, 
 
 1 Contirmare.--^ ""*'""• uiiTlrc 11« thepaS^eis in yow interest, utile vob b e.t.- 
 leiris auciorem esse.-' V'^'"' "!. ,;rv7 !niv re -u eerundial.-»^ exercitum ex hibenns 
 • existim5re.-io to w^igti andior ''a;/,f "\\\^\.„.,,^ joXcedere -i« abrogSre (Render 
 educere.-i3 ,,nnm pr mum.-i* ^en pus -i^^^^^^^ primum.-^o you allow 
 
 him. per te licet.— ^i tensCrc ut. . '/'"'„11 (ij.rnitv ha? been recovered' (^'6^"?>^«^"«i 
 aliqtio airere.--^ i>atna.--- ^''^V^ ;. .if///L^' , ."d" to "caven, he vowed'.-" claru^.- 
 at)i: abs.).-'^« attoilere. Render : "^ V' r Iv ^Av wcml Utop have stopped, conn^tere) 
 
 n.ilt,Tf.-" ,«i"« ',;""«, -''irf^J ,J" -<» P^cl,.°r" -'' 1!^^ ■■ ''I'^t [he] should 
 
 i-ki-; twiti'it Mhiuiii(> clause. — * remuiere. — |iic«rv.ii»^»v,. 
 
 freat (/mc!a-;'erth^se nloneys '.- - to appoint, ei negotio pra^ficere. 
 
472 
 
 
 COMBINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 BOOK SIXTH, 
 
 COMBIXATION^ OF SEXTEXCES. 
 
 CHAPTER FIUST. 
 
 THEORY OF SENTEXCE-COMBIXATIOX. 
 
 § 608. 'Sentences are connected with each other either by suboudixa- 
 TiON, or by co-ordination. Sentences are combined by subonlination 
 if one of two sentences (which is called * the dependent sentence', or 
 ' clause ') forms a phrase (P. 1, p. 21) with one of the members of the other 
 (principal) sentence, the whole dependent sentence having thus the gram- 
 matical value of a single word or member in the frame of the principal 
 sentence. Sentences which are so connected with other sentences that 
 they cannot be considered as members of the latter, are said to be com- 
 bined by co-onluKiiion. 
 
 Ons. 1 The form of c()-of:dixatiox is» only r/rammnnralh/, hut not lonicalhj, distln- 
 puslH'd from SIBOKDINATION, ho that the same- thoii-hi mav ..ftn, assume eiiher the 
 lorm ol a saftordinate, or of a coordinate sentence wirhout «tVectin<' irs meanin" ast • 
 Omnem senuium wv.c^xit cefero!i(/ueii>ih corona yv/i./i^/i/- (copulative c-ordiuatioii) whicli 
 sentence is equivalent lo : Omnem smatum necjlvit qiiuiavet,roH vndtrtt (or Omu'isniata 
 i,ecato ceteros yendidit). Cm^. B. (i. rj, u;.- I'rimo suis ioci.s exercitum eduxit conti- 
 nenMbu;» vero diebus ^/^ ^^my/vti^'/e/,//. « castrU ; ^ Eduxit, oominentibus vtro diGbua 
 jmxjreaitfHUur a casfn.<. (Kirst Jie drew up iiJ!* army on tiie ixrounds occupied by him- 
 Kelt, 6//^ on the luUowmf,' dayn he advanced further Irom tlie camp.) Ca;^ B C y 84 
 liie same sentence ini^ht iiave been e.:presse(i in th.- form of a concessive clause Ud 
 2)nino axvrcwmw eduxit, contiiicntibus diel)us pro-rediebatiir).— Memoria mil exercejl- 
 ln\\u>i{ dimiiiuetur (memory mu>t be exercised, or it will he diminished), = M<Mn..ria 
 (limmuitiir //isi eaine.reneas.— The question whether, in a uiven instance, subordination 
 or co-ordination should be employed, forms a part o( Ldfin rhelonc. 
 
 Obs. '2. A subordinare ((b-pendent) sentence, or clause, rec;ardini: its grammatical re- 
 lation to tlie principal sentence, is reirularlv conceived as bcin:: virtuallv one of the two 
 members ota phra.-^-e, the other memi.erof whicii is acluallv a m.-mb.-r of the principal 
 sentence. The clanso may take either the place of the ffor.rninr,. ,„• the place <'f ih- dr- 
 jH'ndent word of the phrase, as : n„j„s riri >/>'<^ -^'7 constanlta^ inier omnis constat. Here 
 the interroi^ative claii-e '///////.v. . . qme xit constantia ' has the irrammatical lunction as ,<ub- 
 ^u 1 y'';/"'^T-f""-*' predicate ' amshit \ beiiij,' to it in the relation of a qoreriHun word 
 ^ 1 ' ^. IV' ."hile, m reirard to the irhde .<<-„f€ncfi, everv clause i- conceived as •depend- 
 ent .— t/ujus (/>ue ^it coiistuntia xcU \ Here the same interroirative clau-e has the re- 
 lation of a romp/t(v>f/ (transitive) o/Oerf to the irovernin- predicate ' vav' ( = i,o>*ii ejus 
 constantiam).- ' AccCju litteras qmis /hH scrip^hti \ Her*- the relative clau-e ' quj. . . 
 scrijm,sft IS in the relation ot an uttrihute to the noun litleras ( = heri scriptas). 
 
 §609. Both in the co-ordination and subordination of sentences, the 
 form of connection is threelbld, being either {a) syndetic, or {!>) pronomi- 
 nal, ov{c) a.vjndctic. Syndetic is the connection by conjunctions ; tro- 
 NOMiNAL is the connection by determinative form-adjectives (P. I., p. 1G9 
 ^o\\.)oY form-adverbs {V.ll.^Y^.-^XiS No.2); asyndetic is the connection 
 without any intervening words by which the nature and logical meaning 
 of the connection is marked. (P. I., g 120 ; § 381, U. 9). 
 
 THEORY OF SENTENCE-COMBIN.\TION. 
 
 473 
 
 tion by both c-^-'>^-^>"^;'l]^J" ;; '^i' Sa^ see P. Up. 483.--Some 
 
 junctions see P. I., ^ 'i'^™' \ n ,.re ilsonsed for the purpose of subordination (as the 
 of the CO ordinatin- ^^''J»"^ '' ::"'^/„t" comparative clauses, and 
 
 copulatives ac. and «/r//^^^>^onu tiin s a s , er, ^"'.^ .,;^.„.o,di„aiiuL', and subordinating 
 
 tiun, 1) that ol '^^1^'<,1'V;^'^')\"\\'",'/,^;/ ^vords used lor this connection are th» 
 
 „la connective with ^^'"^ 'f^!^ ' ''Xu^^^^^^^ form-adverbs, being deimn- 
 
 d.'finite forra-adjectives, and »»: ;;;;/;iiyf,,V'vtibord atioii (tA-, hie, Ule, ibi. hie, hue elc. 
 .trafive^ for co-ordinatum, and re aft ^e. ^ y.,^ "^j?' -^^X ,^^ ^^, .. ,,, tu the co-.)rdina- 
 
 hat 
 e 
 
 leiice. iwiiiiMiiii'^ - ,\ .^ ...^ntrarv its niitecedeiit zn ila ow tierut/tvt \y m"^'^*" 
 
 demonstrative i''^<>n»'ra es on the coM^^^^ connected ; as HuicqmA 
 
 makin-the lattera "V;"*'''"' "^^ l.^t !) /^ ////v o^^^^ a»^ mentioned in the 
 
 cumperisset aperit ; He ^*';"";""^»^^^!.^ :,/;,* v' Pans 4 5.- Hue Cu^sar magnis iti- 
 precedin- sentence) what he had ^^'^ ^ ^^^L^^^^ pre(edin- sentence) 
 
 r.eribus c.nitendit ; «JIJ^y'^V^J^'^^^L'^^Jt^^^^^^^^^^^ etc. ; Induced by 
 
 by forced marches, ties. B ^•\^; ,/'J; j 3 jlc're the whole precedin- sentence is 
 1h,se iea.<o,>s, they resolved *^»c. Oes B G 1, -1 ^^^u t neither of the two 
 
 incorporated in the ne.ct by "\^^ :' „ ici^ n a ^ other.- Komulum Kemumque 
 
 sentences, thereby, is made a ^'U "'"' ,^;,,. ;'i\.o\\, "^^^^^^ and Remus were 
 
 cupTdo cepit in his Ukis u!(i,educaiijant ^^^^^Z^^r^^^,, ^,ovnht vp. Liv. 1,6. 
 
 wo/ a connective, but bei.^ IT'^l^^^'^en^s^ii;!?/-.":/' 5;;^'c;^-i/a ^urulis^ampta ../ duc- 
 tile «^^ a.ise to wh ch It re rs -- Hoc kc.^u^^^^^^^^ ;.^.j^.^^, ^,.^,^^ ^,^^ Etru,can.<^. ichence 
 
 T^r:i^^:niri;J^:nV^u::i^^^ ^^« ^--«» - 
 
 nmw^intion i = ab Et niseis, auctoribus mice curulrs). 
 
 sative force (see P. I. ^ lf'> 1>; T^^\:^J1-J'L^ ..i.M^e^ <n SQO. R. M). in infinitive, and 
 
 Or. -.^9, 102. 
 
 l:k rr,','„Vfe^m ■ ;,;;jr,';/S»;, ■ l;;;"." .uSaSg ccguuctluu,. Both ..ay b= c„m- 
 
 ii;v,!;,is;r;;:; i!;.;:;;:;i;'a'.K.'r ^1^:^:^^, t^^iL^s:^^ ^tU ..u,.r., ,y 
 
 Eiv^Vxlh pronouns of the third person. 
 
474 
 
 THE COMBINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 lan^njif^oa f^cnerally ronnoct the (lifl*«'ront poriod;* alt»o srammatically. oitlicr by pyndotic 
 or by nroiiirmiiial ciKinliiiation. in whiih instance Ww. connectives mostly open ihc sen- 
 tence as : '//^/rnnnni vcnissct' (rnreiy 'Qnnm hue vcni^sct ').— Ad h/x res conficien- 
 das l.'ienninm sil.l satis duxenmt. Oes. B. G. 1.3. (The arranL'» incnt 'liiennium sihi 
 
 ad eas res conticieiidas satis dnxCrunl ' would be used for particular reasons only.)- //«« 
 
 '(/>/(»/ u\ quoihi, ttiam. veto, ii/itiir) apj)ear to those who view them from the Kurdish stand- 
 point as mere expletives*.' A more accurate treatment of this subject belongs to 
 Latin Thetoric' 
 
 Ob'^ .5 Of the different kinds of conrdinntion, the copi/lafire {ft, ar, atque, veqve, etc.; 
 «see P I p 277 foil.), the wirfrsotire {seif. auttiiK Vfro. at. el<-.), and the (/hjnncfire («./,', 
 Tf-f tntW, are chi.-flv emploved to coordinate the parts of th<' mm" pefu>d : while th»i 
 iW/sat (nam, €7iwi),'tt\n\ ronsecvfire (if"(j>/e, erf/o, ir/Uur) coordinations, and the 2'/ onotni' 
 nal combinations are used to connect difftrevt ptiiods. 
 
 Or.s «). Sometimes periods are connected by clattses, in which inptance the whole 
 clause has tiie force of aperiodical connective, or coordinatin-: conjunction. Such clauses 
 have the nature of formulas, beinj; used in the same typical form by all writers. 
 
 Here 
 
 lum ; Nevertheless he would make peace with them. Ca-s. B. G. 1, 14.— 2) The clause . 
 Vxm hcec (ea) qeruntur, with the force ofintevea (see p. 3.21, Obs. 7).— 3) Tiie cliiuse Qi/o 
 fwtiim e,<t vt with the force of itaque {thus, or therefore) : Quo factum est nt omnis impa- 
 riltos imprudentlsque otlenderet ; Thus he surprised them all while tht-y neither were 
 prepan d, nor had expected him. Nep. Ajres. 2, 3.— Here belonir those Quod-clauses m 
 which quod has the meaninj; ' as to the fact that/ or ' regarding that.' See p. 521. 
 
 Ob». 7. A sentence may be coTn'dinaftd with another sentence, and, at the same time 
 be tiufjord hinted to a third. In this instance, the second coordinate is almost always de- 
 pendent on the same governintr sentence as the tirst coordinate, belonginir t() the 
 same subordinatinii conjunction <u- relative, which, in the second coordinate, is either 
 expressed or understood, as : His rebus liebat vf et minus late vagarentur, ef minus fa- 
 cile liniiimisbelluminferrepossent (or 't/ ut . . .ruqareiitur.ei nt.. .jWf^sent): Thus it hap- 
 pened that thev went less far in their raids, and {that thty) could h-ss easily make war 
 on their neiL'libors. Cies. B. G, 1, 2.— Sometimes, lu)wever. the second cooidimite has 
 gramtnaticaily the form of an independent sentence, althouL'h it has the same logical re- 
 lati<»ns to the principal sentence as its first coordinate, as : I'ne me tuli, nihil nialle 
 ijuam pacem, non quin eadem limr-rem qme illi, sed ea fjflh rirlti tt-rir-ra ducTfiam (inst, 
 of 'jsv-^/ r/><c>/ eabello civTli \v\\C)rxi dKcertni') : I openly showed that I wished nothing' 
 more urgently than peace, not tjecause 1 did not fear the same events as the others, but I 
 con.yidtred them as preferable to a civil war. Cic Att. S, 11 J/. 7. Thi< kind of cooniina- 
 tion which evidently is used to give to the statement the characti-r of L'leHter po^itivc- 
 i:rss, has become one of the tvpical forms for coOrdinatii'g caus.il cl.iuses with other 
 causal clauses which are introduced hy non quod, ov non quo (p. »)'.»0). But. except lu 
 liii- kind of causal clauses, and in relative clauses (see below), it is extremely rare. 
 
 The form of ind^peiidrnt coordination of logically dependent sentences sometimes oc- 
 curs in the coordination of rdntives. A sentence coordinate with a relative clause may 
 a«iime the form of an independent sentence if the relatire ail'pctire in the secoud roor- 
 dinate would require a case diferenf from the case of the ^ffrst rdatire. In this instance, 
 the second relative is replaced bv the corresponding demonstrative, as: Omnes tiim 
 fere, qui nee extra urbem banc vixerant, nee tos aliqua_barbaries domesti ca in fiisca- 
 * Compare the tollowing schemes of «he coordination of periods: Cic. Or. 1, 1 : Ac 
 fvlt Oiinjn (>pein...Namqui...Neque rero.. Nam pHma...Std tamen...TUA f>ro... 
 'XamTieque .—lb. Fam. 4, 10 : Cura iqifur. . . Vtnit enim.. . QuodA nullum.. .Sed qvo- 
 Tiiatn Me tamen...— Thus the brief letter of Cic. Fam, 13. 14, which may be consid- 
 ered as a model for the idiomatic connection of jieriods : Tilio. . .famiharissimc utor. 
 Omnia mihi ciim eo intercedunt jura. . iieeessitudinis. ////jr. . .pecuniam debet P.Cor- 
 nelius. Ka 77^.sa Volcatio...rejecfa in Galliam est. Peto a tt — Id et mihi grati<simum 
 erit Quod ut tibi ciiije sit ..etiamatqiie etiam rogo. — Some authors of the silv«T age, 
 especially Seneca, bv alfecta'ion, neglect the use of connectives.— Quintilian (Inst. Or. 
 7, 10. H) teaches : Sensus {tht sentenced non modo ut sint online collocjiti laboiaiK.iua 
 est. sed ut inter se juncti atque iia cohierentes ue commisstlra pelluceat; corpus tit, nou 
 membra. 
 
 THEOHY OF SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 
 
 4. 1 J 
 
 esseiit pcrfereiidi. Cies. B. G. 1, 'ii. ^nn7,n\ are not coordinated by connect- 
 
 OK. 8 Dependent sentences (except m '>''f/,^,f ^'f ^-i^,^'";;/; '.or by itaque, ergo, vgi- 
 Ob9. 8. "7,\r,. jy^riodical coordination (neittiei Dy "«'/*,\^"Y, .j^^ co-ordination of 
 
 « etiam etc. : Siniomdes sa^ i by the mi"d if also etc. Cic. Or. 2, 8.. 
 /.,.., our perceptions are ^^'^^J'f ^^^^,;;'^!,, fallowing rules are observed 
 9. In the co-ordniation of CLALSES^ti.e i^)^ _^,j^^^^^ ^^.^^^ ^^^^j^ ^^^^^, 
 
 Ic non IH'rse<^r;>6*«"/"',"-evarenot 
 !m OtJ- 3 33 - Piincii.es AcarnJinum v^jueri m t'« ^u neiaiK ^..jans prevailed 
 from Zeuxidas. Ln. •«, lo. '.'/.", . storms fo owed which ( = ^'^ V, V^ ^ Vi s» tp 
 
 mmmmmmmi 
 
 examples the Latin conceives the t^o^^^'JIJ" " ^^^^^ ^ conditional ctmjunction (f? « "^^ 
 >vrv much as we would onceive a ^"''''^, ["';/;;? .^/ceo^ conception several pccnin nties 
 rixerant n^c eos infuscaverat). . 1 r"'",^H"xn a ned especially the use of qm with the 
 liVtTe use ot rclat.<e.«M.s,r,icUons nu.>M . x^^^^^^ ^, . ^ j,^,e uivolution . bee 
 
 force of td is, quutu U, quod u, n ia, auu 
 p. 534. 
 
 53590W 
 
47G 
 
 THE COMBINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 sed ne tardins qnam cnperem r(MpnblirflR rjraHdarer {not heravnp I (hovriht I wonld not 
 l)t! in time, but ltd 1 invjht coiKjratiUatt the republic later than 1 detired). Cic,l'hil. 1, 
 4,9. 
 
 C. The aftyndt^tic QownvcWon of clatisos follows tho rule*» on thcapyndcfic co-ordina- 
 tion of indepfii(l(«nt stiitiMices (I*. I., ^ 1-iO: § ysi. A'. {>». 1) Three or more deijt-ndent co- 
 ordinates either recjui re the repetition of I he eo-ordinntin<r eoiij unction before raeh claut»e, 
 or are asyndetirally connected, in which in>tance. however, the ftdfordinatinr/ coiijnnc- 
 tion is i;rner;dly repeatt-d, a» : Csesar nua senatusque in eum henetlcia coninienioravit, 
 qi/od rex a/)j>(fldtii,^ e.'<<ef a >-t'\]i[tn, (jnod aniTcus, 7//0'/ niunera atnp isnima ///jaw; ; Ciesar 
 mentioned liis own and the Senate's* fav<»rs to him, that /it had lueii ackiiowledf/td i\^ kini; 
 l)y the Senate, that [lie iiad been addresised] by t!ie title * friend', that most iavish iritld 
 had fjeen sent to him. t'ses. B. (». 1, 43. — 2) If of twodependent adver.sative co-ordinates 
 the one is ne<j;ative, and the other aftinnatlvp, the co-ordination is irenerally asyndetic 
 if tiie same suhordinate conjunefion belonir> to both clauses, and the one sentence de- 
 notes the contrary of the other, as : Erixo et invjdi et malev«di et timidi (appellantiir) 
 gitia procllves ad eas i)erturbatu")nes. tion quia semi)er ferantur; Hence persons are 
 called envious, malicious, and tinjid ftecause they are inciiiwMl to tliese faults, hut uot be- 
 cause they always commit them. Cic. Tusc. 4,1:2, 2!-i. — Illiid aniinOrum corporumque 
 dissimile. quod ixw'xnn valentes mori)o temptilri n<ni j)ossunt, iv/j^ora /tos.^unt ; There is 
 this difference in the properties of the soul and those «"f the hody /Aa/ a healthy soul 
 cannot be attacked by di-ease, fjid that a (healthy) iHjdi/ can. C'lc. Tusc. 4. 14. 31. — 
 3i There are seveial asyndetic combinations of verbs (and other parts of speech) in 
 whi( h, from their frequent c«)-ordinati(Ui, the copulative C(»njun( tion tt is conventiotuilly 
 dropped. Such expressioiis have the lorce of a bin<;ie verb, Utv the idea of whicli a sin- 
 j;le term does not exist in the laiiLruai^e. These co-oriiinations nuisi always airree with 
 each other in their irramniatical forms, beiiiir vari<lu^ly rendered in Knirli>li, as: Latum 
 ad \}n])i\\iim, v<//ent jidji'/'i-ht popiilo Carthaiririiensium bellum indlci ; The people was 
 asked whether thi-ij voted for declarin<]f war aijainst the CarthaL'inian people. Liv. 21, 17. 
 — I't (itiie>cat diim oral (' res /y//// redtiait. X\\iii he mi^'ht bo inactive while neiroiiators 
 would (/o (lud return {would (jo to and fro j i. e. during ilie progress of the negttiialions), 
 Cic. Alt. 10, 1, ;}. 
 
 IJ. Idiomatic co-ordinations of depetident clauses occur in the following instances : 
 
 1. If two adverl>i.tl clauso areadver>aiively co-ordinated so that tin- adverl)ial idea (for 
 m^tiinve &C(tu/<^. manner, or j}utj»ost-\ isdeiiied in reirard to tin' onedatisc. and attirmed in 
 regard to the other, the clause to which the ntfjatire reftrt< is hi ace d ttefore the othtr clause, 
 thf' iwfjatuni (NON) ininiediatti t/ prectdinq the conjunction, while in English often a diflVr- 
 ent arraiiiicnu'iit is observed. The subordin.iting cfuijunction is. in this con^truction, 
 repeated with both clauses, as : Sic eiiim jam tecum lo<iuar. mm ?// odio j^crmotus esse 
 videar, quo debeo, .sxi ut misericordia. (pne tibi nulla debetur ; / will /u»t iipc^ik with 
 you .so a-'y' to seem prompted by haned. as I ouirht, f/ut so «.s- [to seem prompted] l)y pity, 
 to which you have no claim. Cic. Cat. 1. 7, 16 [or: I will so speak to you a.* to Sf-en» prompt- 
 ed (as if I were jjrompted) by i>ity, hut not as if I were j)rompted by hatred. This 
 arranirctnent wtnild not be admissible in Latin].— If the clauses in^' causal, the tirsi clause 
 i-* generally introduced by nou quo { r= non (jiiod). but also by non (luod, and non quia,xhe 
 predicate (d' the first clause l)eing almost always in the sulijunctive, while the mood «>f 
 the last clause is determined by the gene^-al or particular rules on mo(»ds ; as : Num- 
 quam mihi delutflram oratiOnem, qiiaexercitum meiimalloquerer. credidi ; nonqaoycvha 
 nm<iuam potius (jnam res &xercuen/n, sed quia n^i^uC'nun niilitarihus ingt-niis ; I never 
 have thouirht that words would be wanting to me to address my army, ^o/ Im'auoe I hare 
 ever de'tU rather in words than in deeds, hut t/ecause I was accjiiainted with the ways of 
 tlie soldier. Liv. 2S. 21. — Acta Cjesaris servanda censeo, non quo probem, fed quia ratiO- 
 nem habendam arbitror pacis ; I am of the opinion that Caesar's acts should be main- 
 tained, not that {because) I ajiprore of them, hut f>ecause I think it to be n< ce>sary in the 
 interest of peace. Cic. Phil. 1, 7, Hi. — AbstulCre me (Jneciie res, non quia ij)sas oj)er{e 
 j)retium e.^et persciibere, sed quia causa' cum Antiochi fiieriint bi-Ili ; Greek atlairs liave 
 carrii'd me away, not that (Ijecause) it is worih the while to record them, but because they 
 contain the causes of the war with Antiochus. Liv. :^.5, 40. — l.umina orationis sunt 81- 
 milia illis qua^ in amploornaru sceme aut Ion appellaniur insiLrnia. n<m quod solao/v/en/, 
 i<ed quod excellant : The ' lights ' in disc«>urse are similar to what in a festive decoration 
 of th(^ stage or the forum are called 'insignia" (salient points), not thai (fjecuune) they 
 are the only oruamenfii, but l>ecnu)!e they strike the eye. Cic. Or. '■^\\. 184. 
 
 2. If the aflversaiive ccmnection of clauses is at the same time concesnvp (in Eng- 
 lish: 'but nevertheless'), the second co-ordinate clause is introduced by neque eo mi- 
 nus, instead (jf sed nitdlomiw^, as : Ita aflecCrunt animos ut omnia qiue in eos decreta 
 essent tollerent, 7ieque eo minus n'do\uu\\nn in societiliem I'hilippi censGrent ; This af- 
 fected them so that they abolished all decrees made against them, but were nevertheless 
 for renewing the alliance with Philip. Liv. 33, 10. 
 
 THEORY OF SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 
 
 477 
 
 .1 «0. ;f \^l^^\^ refer to the fame concln- 
 U'.icr (or'clausf), or they />7vc..Z., ox folloio it ^^^^^ .^ 
 
 Isihefolh.Nvingpas^aLe. htnei^^^^^ ab assiduo mu-rOre ' ''«^-^ViVh SveMo them 
 
 ence t(» that arangement ^\'»'Y ;;' r. 
 
 phrase would ha%e if used instead of it. between tlie three raethods 
 
 eullivatecl by practical ()b^el^ anon ai a /> j . ^ ij„iiasi^\ 
 
i 
 
 478 
 
 COMBINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 THEORY OF SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 
 
 479 
 
 by vt ne, gvin, and (/-(foJ) more frcqucuUy follow tlinn precede their principal Poiitonco 
 an : lliiic iiia^'n:y pwmiis perMUlder t//i ad Ao.v/7*' travseat ; lie jxTHiadid him to no to 
 
 ?«?/.s?/rt«'<7. the two prrdirates would he in imnu'<hjite Piicce.^-ion (,>^ee ()b« )) Hut it 
 IV.lf 1 "iserted hetween -//,/^0 ' and 'ma(^nis\ If placed hefore /nnc, it would destroy 
 ttic lorce of the pnnorninnl connective. In a *^imilar sentence the Ut-chiuse is i/?.«.r^K; • 
 J) ninoiii;! ?/^?^/^/« w;m7?/j/r, persuader, elque fdiani snani in niatrinioniiini dat'. 
 ta> b. G. i,a. Here the two Unite predicates stand in immediate succession, hut 
 thi^ arrai.jroment was pr. ferred to tlie re.-ular one. on account of the sul>>equent c.Ordi- 
 
 rin. I'fV; m'fr "*"r''' ^'-' P'/l^'^r-.t^'.^t-^l'nisc. .-.fier ^ persuader would hav-c been sepa- 
 rated fioin tlu; sentence with which it is coordinated. 
 
 (»Bs. 4. Dependent questions are most usually infertfd, even if its predicate and that 
 o the pr„u.H,a,.,.„,,,H,. foil. w earl, other in i,.^mediate;ncce.sion:V^^^^^^ 
 
 » .^'"^? ' " "'i'" ^'r'^^^'''»' ^''^qnot* vieissent, ii„n,Hidvmlovi rellent, impeiaVent 
 (a masterly arramred period). Ca's. li. G. 1, 3«.- Ita ut ocuHs, i/. vtmm pmttm It'nd 
 udicari lun, possu. Ih. 11 12. But if the int. rro^'ative claus.-'consist J ol many meml 
 l)cr>, lOft.n precedes or lollows its principal sentence, as : ()uuli>i e.^.^f vntura monfi^ 
 vtrjnahs ^^c^//.s7/,qu. coirnoscerent misit ; Ur ..-nt a ,i(-ta(lun,-nt to examine //.^^^ 
 rA(//Y/c^/;ry //^^ niounttnn and of its ascent ^of what character the mountain was etc.). 
 j-.^. li. G. 1, 21.— Credo e-o vos, judices mirari, quid eit quod etc. Cic. liosc. Am. 
 
 Obs. fi. Relative clatises jrcnerally/o//Mr their antecedents, as : Interea ea h-iOne 
 ^^InHn'i'l'I'f"'""^ iml.-;ih,,s„ue qui ex prorimia ronve„erm,t. a lac, Lenmnno,^'; f in 
 
 m mim p.-.dflci . Cses B. (i. ], 8.- Hut th.-y jrenerallv follow the whole sentence on 
 wh.ch ,h. y are dependent, if the two predicates would lie in inimediate sucvsJi n a. • 
 1 1 omnihns commodis nml cum ,h fniaitur onorum se amiciti;e d. «ierint (not 'l- unei'. 
 ^^nTV"" /""";'•' de'l>y:i'^f/ruautun; to enjoy all the advantai,-. s i c mmunion ith 
 fjHMe to ir/n,, frien<lship tt.ey have devoted th<-inselves. Cas B. G 3 22 If a . ea 
 stress ,s a:don t ,e relati.m of the relative clau.M- to its ^overnim- v -ntcMi v « 't/^ , 
 expre^s nmt jvst that relative idea c<.rr.sponds u.ju.t /Aa^in ec ' ^Ti't t he pV im h^ 
 sentence, the relative clause is placed hjon its antecedent, whic , is ini a ce^ i. 
 
 avs desiirnated t>y a demomtratin', the prop, r antece.ient hein- inc. r u- ed in ll e 
 lelatne clause as the r/Mvr;.//,5r „oun of the niative adjective, as : Jra. qmt m/'. iv - s 
 lie Ive ue itisifrnem calanntriteu. iH.ptih, l^an^n<) intnlerat, .a pri u 
 hus tha part ol H.-hetia (/;/.,«//// • what part of Helvetia '/whirl ha lie e a s - 
 
 A^^^'f^ '"'• ,?*' '^'«^«'Verhial clauses, the mvw/ clauses, and the modal Ut-clau-es f«ee n 
 4.M. )Rs. 1) -eneral!y.;/V/o/.' their principal sentence (;ee the Ex 437) • 1, oHen caSl 
 sal clauses (and sonietinies also nuHlal It-clauscs) arcUvi^r/./i„ the HnV i se t"m" • 
 
 .unlp.flVum' O^^^^^^ '""" ^'V^ • '^'^'"^''^ '••'^^'-"''>' ^Ji' n> ^ ad Xlibeian ini 
 
 ^iVVi u , , ^'i^- ^--^^i^"»»-, qnodw.moria trnltnit, L. Cassiiim occlsum (esse) 
 
 ah HeKvtiis c<,ncedendum non putjlhat. Ih.- Ariovistus nspon.iit iduos " i «^/^ 
 niamMhfortunam temptamnt, stipendiarios esse lact«,s. Ih \ m-O^xTx^n^^^^ 
 qummajus eral i,nam ut ab homine viderOtur, iccii-co as.ignaiiim est C. l^^^lPirs, 
 
 Obs. 7. Temporal clauses with <7w?/m and itP equivalents (?/W vf fimvlar •nnatmmm^ 
 coND.TioNA, roNcKssivK ihv quan.quam and etnl and coyxvj^jirvs'v^^^^^^ 
 a nmite (introduced l)y 7// or quemadmodum . . .m). generally w'H,de tl eir mine "e f- 
 
 rard%Ro/r'whTeir 
 
 t^iiea PROTASIS, while the siicceedin<ri)iincii)alsent<-nce s called apodo-^I'^ • a** • Thi ^n 
 
 m^-i^lliVi^r'm'vnu'i^m TVT"^^ '■'"'^-^ '^ ^"■"'"' ^^ ^""* r.^^zZ}:\x^^ ^^^o^^ 
 Hu mil ptrpioMiiiam daie. et « rim jaare coneutvr, prohihitflrum o^ietidif \vhen 
 
 o'^ i''im dS ;:;i^^hu'rc;;n; i^^'i' '\r^^--^-^ <^rH%^ «.J^r;/^.j^;^U/: •.;2 
 
 fc»//2w, ne (icciartu that he could not allow aiiv one a i)assa"'c throiifh the urnvii.c» • 
 
 and) he .h<,wed that he would prevent them ifthey uJlforVeC-Sr^V\ T- r ml 
 
 hHla suscip.enda Gallr.rum alacer ac promptus est animus.-^^^rmcll s ac minim; r7.i.t«m8 
 
 ad ca am.taies p.rferendas mens er.rum est : As the character of he G.uiNi^nuiek ad 
 
 c la n'ili^ Ih''ri);*'''rM Vr"' "i"'"-' '^ -V*-''*''"-' «"^l "''»i'>"f n,.y po T of'end.t.T, !! 
 calami es. II). 3 19 _ If both, protasis and apodosis, have the same ^uhi.-et the s. Vie -7 
 
 ?vsp:cf;.Sl£?ni •'';!>.;. Vv^f * ;n/f-;^nrustra tantum lahoitn^umL^iaiuiJ 
 
 the dependent, and the ,overr^. clause, tbus .ivin. 1. the clependont^lau^^ 
 p..aranee of a direct dependeiic.^ ■/'«,•?,,,; .it homines bellicOsos flnitinn habCret; 
 Uat n,a,M.o cinn J'^i'»'" P";;;;^';^\^,/ .^ ^^ by having 
 
 lie ^uw that, t/ t/us .sho'ild hom^^xh^ \\ g 1 10 [The clause -id si fier.t ' is not de- 
 
 OBS. 0. If two clauses introdt^ed by conjun^^^^ 
 are mo^t frequently so arran-ed ^^^''\}]\lil^^}l^^^^^^^^^ Thus the two conjunctions 
 
 the c... jun.tion by which 'l^'' l';;V'^' ' ^ "/j'^.^as • G^^^^^^ eos accflViit quod, quwi ne- 
 of the clauses stand in immediate ^" .f,!,;f. " ' ^^V^^f, .^^^ He earnestly re- 
 
 que emi luMpie ex a-ris ^'^']'' V-^'';^J^''Z^^^^^^ boUL^ht, n..r etc. Ca^s. 
 
 clauses are : 1) ut. . .arctssat : 2) quoniaia. . .veuent , 3) quod. . .Jueru\ . 
 
 L 10 The subordinatincr conjunctions by ^^'^^^^^ ^"If I'-'JA,^'!"" o'r p^^^^^^^^ 
 
 one libertum imptiibum habeat. Cic. Rose. Am. 8,22. ... . „ 
 
 n. 1 Inordr to understand and render the combination of the clauses within a 
 
 mEmmmmmm^ 
 
 ,1,0 l„.sim.in,.. «,..1 1,.'.,..,. ■•^\ «h<- flr>t "'•V;';f/'°:\"/,:A"\" :di-catt amon^ll^.eTJn^^^^^^^ 
 „"• t.. ei.,-1. other. All ,he ,K..-lici,.ial .•...ielnK-,.oi.9..lMl »1'I'>^> ':,;'' :"'"«■ "' " """^ 
 
 !,,;:\lH.m !,, the pVincipal Jentoicv, „r placing th.-m before, or after „, aceord.ns 1" the 
 
 rnTes «.'iven in Obs. 1-10^ _ —— 
 
 ~" * The art of Duaohrasii e- a given Emrlish sentence into a sentence acamimodated to 
 iht L- i\n wav ftki "'"belongs to Latin rhetoric. But almost in every chapter of 
 ^^: ammJ? slle Vlf U.^ manf difterenees of idioms J'-,^;"^ ^^^,,^;,^^?'^^ n 
 rraetlce for acnuiriii" this art. is the rendering oi {/^(/Lnglsh trans at ons ol l^un 
 I'mhok back iX Latin, comparing them, when rendered, with the Latin text. 
 
 i; 
 
Hi 
 
 480 
 
 COMBINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 THEOEY OF SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 
 
 481 
 
 ^ OiO. Clauses arc divided 1) aecordinf? to the jircdication, into de- 
 CLAiiATiVK, iNTERiioGATiVE, and iMPEiiATiVE cliiuses ; 2) accoidiiig to 
 their relation to the nj^eaker, into clauses of direct, and indirect state- 
 ment (obliciue, subobliqne etc.); 3) according; UMXm'w fanction as mem- 
 bers of the principal sentence into subject, oiuect, predicate, and at- 
 tributive clauses; 4) according to their giunnmatical form miovi^iiTE^ 
 and non-finite; the finite clauses being subdivided according to the 
 nature of the connective (relative clauses, ut-clauses etc.) ; the non- 
 finite clauses being subdivided into infinitive, and participial clauses. 
 
 Obs 1 The division into declarative, interro-'ative. and imper.itive clauses (which be- 
 longs to (dl sentences^ relcrs to the form of i\u' predication. By ' predication' we under- 
 stand the conception of x\\v. spcakt-rin r.-irard to tlie )nod(d refation>i of the predicate*. 
 The modal relations of thr pn-dicate are either a mere assehtion (in wiiich instance the 
 sentence is dfdaratire), or a volition (makin^j tl»e sentence iwjieratire), or interuoga- 
 TioN (?■ e volition of the speaker to have a statement made in liis ^tead). Tliis division, 
 and* ih<'divifiuu into clauses of direct, and indirect ttateinent, Lave been considered 
 p. 380 loll. 
 
 Ob*! 2 The two division!» of clauses mentioned § f'.lO. No. 3 and 4, are the only C9Sen- 
 tial ones in the theory of <7f/W(^-comhination. V,s dividinj,' the clauses accordiui: to their 
 functions as members of the principal sfiitt-nce, we refer to their Uxjicat tneaninf/, enu- 
 meratiu"' the dift'erent logical relations of those members of pliraf-es which may be ex- 
 pressed^in the form of a dependent sentence. By the/o'//-//i divi^ion, the questi<m is 
 nn-\vered, what L'rammatical f«)nns are at the disjjositioii of the Ian<ruage lo express the 
 ditlerent relations wliicli clau>e9 have according to the tliir<l divi^ion**. 
 
 * • Predirntion \ and 'predicate ' are not convertible terms. By the ' predicate ' a verb is 
 repre^ente(l as a member of X\w predicative phrase, while ^pn;fication ' refers -to tlie <f<n- 
 ^^;^<'^ only, being j,'iamtnal ica II v expressed 1) by the i/iood of the predicate ; 2) by the 
 particU-s referriii" lo tlie modal relations of the sentence (ajfinnatire. and iiiferrof/atire 
 t)articles. See P.^I., p. :295). ' Philosophizini,'' «xrainmarians iiave established several 
 theories about the meaning of the two terms predication (some call it * assertion '), and 
 predicate, the most common of which is the copvla-theoinj. According to tiiis theory 
 every predicate ' in a wider t-eiise ' contains besides the ' predicate proper ' a copnla either 
 expl•e^sed (fionus est), or bv implication, being represented l>y tin; petsonal endine/, the 
 radical (for inst. 'leg' in 'leejif) represent in lt the predicate proper, while the 'predica- 
 tion ' is said to be expressed by the coftula. The chief objection against, this theory is that 
 the personal eiuliiiir is common to lx>lk the copula esae and the ordinary verb, so that, ac- 
 cordin" to the copiila-theory, th(! radical part of the copula es!^e would be ?/f27/<tr predicate, 
 jior predication. :Moreovei\ the peivonal endintr, evid<'ntly, belonifs \o \\\c predicati^^e 
 phra.-^axsuch. being determined by its governing word, like every other endim: of declin- 
 able words. Predication, appearing only in the three forms of declaration (assertion), 
 rolition, amXinten-or/atioii. has nothing to do with the personal relations of the subject 
 
 tive mood' has not the force of a moo<l as long as the j)redicate is confined to a detached 
 predicative phrase. It becomes mood and tense ontt/ by discourse. 
 
 ** Many Latin (and other) grammaii.tns, accoroinii to Ikcker's theory, distinguish 
 the clauses, according to the 'parts of' speech'' which they represent, into sithstanfire (sub- 
 stantival), adjtx'tire (adjectival), and adrer/dal clauses. There are several objections to 
 tiiis division. 1) Those th;it follow this theory adopt the common opinion th;it tlic parts 
 of speech are Uof/ical/i/'' distinijuished from each (Mher, which is an error, since all the 
 four principal parts of speech may /07i^^'% denote one and the satne idea. Hence the 
 parts of speech which, acccn-ding to this theory, are represented by the dillerent clauses, 
 cannot furnish a criterion for the logical meaning of the latter, so that the two questions 
 mentitmed in Obs. 2 cannot be answered on the base of such a division.— 2) It is n con- 
 sequence of thus improperly dividing the clauses, that many quite heterogeneous clauses 
 are classified under the same head, and that clauses both lo-jically and grammatically 
 identical, are assigned to ditlerent classes. Thus the relative clauses, which, in whatever 
 connection they are used, follow the same laws in regard to their {.''"mmatical form, aro 
 
 i?^772. 2. As to the function of clauses as members of the principal sen- 
 tence, either member of anv of the three phrases may be represented by 
 a dame Thus the following classes of clauses must be distinguished : 
 
 A In the predicative plirase : 1) Subject-clauses, representing the 
 
 Jl In the oiuective i)hrase : 1) Completing object-clauses (or 
 ' object-cliiuses ' without any further addition), which complete the idea of 
 a VERB in the principal sentence {R. IJ. Obs. 1); 2) advp^ibial object- 
 clauses (or ' adverbial clauses' without any further addition), represent- 
 ing one of the ideas of place, ti.me, or modality (§540), with reference 
 toll VERB or adjective in the principal sentence. See 11. 3, Obs. 12. 
 
 C. In the attributive phrase: Attributive clauses, representing the 
 dilferent kinds of attributes, dependent on a substantive of the princi- 
 pal sentence (R. i], Obs. lo). 
 
 Obs. The following kinds of clauses do not belong, as members of phrases, to the prin- 
 cipal sentence : 1) Those clauses which are used with the force of a periodical connec- 
 tive, and which represent a co-ordinating conjunction, introducing the principal sentence, 
 (see § tiO!», Obs. (j).— 2) Sometimes infinitive-clauses arc used with the force of an mde- 
 pendent exclamatory sentence, as : Hunccineliominejn tantix delectdtuni esse mgis! Is it 
 l)ossit)Ie that Tins man should have been amused by such trifles ! Cic Div. 2, 13, 30. 
 Suchinlinitive-clauses must be explained in the same manner as the exclamatory accusa- 
 tives mentioned !>. S7, li. 44. with which tliey arc often co-ordinated, as : O spectaculmn 
 mi.'<erutn afgue acerttum ! Lmtitirio esse iirtds qloi-icnn, popvli Bomani nonien jyiratico myo- 
 parOni : in jtorlu Si/racusdno de classe })opy'li llornnni triu)nphu?n oga^e pirdiam! Cic. 
 Verr. 2, 5, 3S.— See Ex. 1-5.— Sometimes mere inlinitives are used with the same force, 
 as : Hoc non ridTre.' How is it possible that tliis should not he seen ! (Not to sec this !) 
 Cic. Fin. 4. 27, 7«.— 3) With a himllar force clauses introduced by guasi and id (both 
 haviuLT their predicates in the su])junctive)are used, as : Quanczu quidqiuim , «dam quod 
 iste nesciat I As if I knew anvtiiing not known to that man ! Cic. Fam. 9, 17. 1.— Egone 
 vf t^ inteipelkm! Huw should /interrupt you'. Cic. Tusc. 2. IS. (Ex. «. 7.)— Both forms, 
 that with gua.<i. and with ut, represent the predicate as ' not to be thou-ht of \— 4) For 
 conditional clauses, referring merely to Ww predication, see li. 3, Obs. 12. 
 
 fieri inea culpa ! lb. Fam. 14. 2.-4. Tene. quum ceteri socii tui fugerent, potissimum 
 iil)i partis isias d^poj^oscisse / lb. Kosc. Am. 34. 95.-5. J/c non cum bonis esse/ lb. 
 Atf . 9. G. [(,'omp. Cic. Fam. H, 1 : Verr. 2, 5, 44 ; Clu. 31 ; Ter. Andr. 1, 5, 10.]— 6. Te 
 
 [Conip. , 
 vt ulla res franr/at^ f Tu ut unqiiam re corriqas? Cic. Cat. 1, 9.— 7. (^uan ego artera 
 aliquam is'toruin esse negetn .' lb. Div. 2, 20, '^.j.— 8. Quasi eiro aut fieri* concederevi, 
 ant esset philosophi», causam cur quidque lieret. non q ua'rere^ ! lb . 2 , 20, 46. 
 
 assi'jned Bticcessively to eachot tlie ttiree classes. The clause • Qidaudiebanf in the sen- 
 tt lue -Qui audittiant rniralnintur' is called a 'substantival cl^se '. because it represents 
 the noun ' the hearers '. But in the sentence ' Homines qui audiehant Tniraf>antur\ it is 
 called an ' adjectival clause \ because it is considered as equivalent to the adjective * hear- 
 ing' (the hearing persons). About some relative clauses the opinionf. are at variance. 
 The clause ' unde piof'ectu>< erat ' in the sentence ' liediit eo iinde profectus erat ' is called 
 by some an adjectival, by some an adverbial, by others a sut>stantival clause ( = ad locum 
 profictiOnis) \ and indeed, according to this theory, the question cannot be decided, since 
 any of the three parts of speech may be substituted for llie clause. The whole theory 
 is utterly sterile in regard to Latin Grammar, not a single rule in regard to the use of 
 clauses having ever been establislied. or elucidated by means of it. 'i'hns Grammar is 
 burdened with a terminology not only perfectly useless, hut producing perplexity and 
 confusion l)y giving rise to'douhtful questions, which, even if \.\icy could be correctly 
 answered, would have no bearing on Latin Grammar. 
 
 > ' Qui., .victor'' has the lorce of a concessive clause : • altlioimli victorious at Cannje '. 
 —- what a blunder he had made.— ^ break down.—* impersonal infinitive clause (literally 
 ' that it should be done '; being redundant in English.— *qiuilitative genitive.—* subjecl- 
 inflnitive. 
 
[I 
 
 482 
 
 COMBINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 THEORY OF SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 
 
 483 
 
 i-.wi ir. ihn rl'umcs and their crnmniatical 
 forms in geueral, ure clillcrunl accoulins U> ti.c cm» 
 
 Srra.1! ^l=:;;Hi:;aT"". 'c-r^ Tu.x.c...s.s-. .ec 
 
 "^ i.- PKKn.r vTr.-c,,AU.KS take the form of an Ut-clause, or of a rclaUvc 
 
 oiuoiNAL (relative) ad\kuhs "'; ;\' pn,niH)inul r/ur//if/''7'/<Wt'//i ; «w/w^ ; 
 
 aiul the comi.arativc adverb qunm ^ '' '^f^ ('^. T^^^^^ umisquam, anted, 
 
 quauuliu, tau.jua>n, i-^'^-^t^J'^^r^ 1 C^;i from the ukla- 
 
 qnam),rr(sttrqHam; {c) ^«^•'^,^^J,^P''^ '//^ v^ ;^^ ^ qu in {\u^\.oi' qui ne), 
 
 ?riVE KOOT ,. (c.) : ^^;'-;i'4;;;^',^; ;^ ana used to 
 
 quoad, qutppe; (^0 coNJLNCiioN^ i iny : with theircompounds 
 
 ^urodu^e certain coM.^.UATivEeh^UM^s^^^^ .^ [ , ,,, 
 
 «m^/^/r,and.«im«^^^(?"«. ^^/i^m , ,1, _ Vll these coniuneiions (</-0 are 
 
 unde,quo,qua). of rehitive clauses intro- 
 
 'Se.u\.f one of ,1... nK.n.l.vrs -^^^'^■^^% f', i.Tr' iovcrnin.u 
 11,0 same form as c.miplta.ns o J •cl-cU s s (.No )^^^ ^^ :ww«;./.«y/ 
 substanlive l.as the same ixlatK n to .^„\ ff,^, " ,; j.;,,, y,y ,i,e adverbial 
 «/»>c/-d„».« (OBS.13.2). ,f ) ^;;;-;':' ; ,'i:,u^' Sive -uherLs »*. etc. 
 
 are .ise<l as aUiiUmes i-t '^"'«'^''' '7^/,*- "'...f' ,!; ,vl,ieli cNpress IlieiDEX 
 
 E. There i» a gknkuai. foum lor ^ V''.^ :;'"'",','', ',,ie, a sub.t„idive 
 
 OF A FACT. Tliese may be used "''''V'^;;,': ;'•,,, «7,-«, or preimi- 
 
 4-1 4KKt Tlu'V either take thi- lorin ot a '/'"^-^'"''•^f.^V,. '{«n « 85 Ob< 1». The fnrin 
 
 lent forms »r?f», g-f/tn. qnomimts''), or a Quod-clause, according to the rules p. 588 foil. 
 Ileiicc both That-clauscsaiid iiiterro;,'ative clauhesare analo;;ous either to transitive or 
 
 to INTHANPITIVE Ol»jt'Ct8 (§ ■4r)H). 
 
 (ff) IXFIMTIVK CLAi:sKS, IMPEUATIVE CLAUfEP, the INTERKOGATIVE CLAUSES dependent 
 
 OR tniiisiiive v«Ths, and liie factitive Ut-clauj^ks (i. e. tl)o^^e deprndcnt on a \erb of 
 doing, bee p.5!U), are analoi;oM8 to the transitive objects (ali^uid dicere, credere, f-enMre, 
 i/nperdre. jieterc/acere etc.), a;^ : ( ae?ar cognovit rnontnn a suis ttueii (Cte?. B. G. 1. 22) 
 = cognovit occmkilionem TtM/itl'). — Jmperat Lielio ut per collla circuwdncat equites (Liv. 
 28, :tt) = Imperat Lcelio circunidticlionem equitiim.— Faciam vt ejus diei semper memi- 
 veiit (Phnii. Capt. 4, 2, 20) = Faciavi evm ejvs diei wemoiein.—- CivitSii p^rsvdsit vt de 
 fini])iis Hni;» ex'irent (,CVs. B. G. 1, 2> = Civitdti pj'ofectionem de finibi/s 2)erfrudslt. — But in 
 p<iin<r conventional constructions clauses of tliis kind are analogous to intransitive ob- 
 jects, as in the cim-truction ui certiormi fucere, Si\t& ojxraia dare. Tlie former is con- 
 strued with an infinitive clavse. althoujrii we say ' certidrem aliqvtm facer e de aliqvd re. 
 [The i)r()i)er frrainmatical construction would be 'certiOrem facere de eo qxiod'' ; but the 
 frequency of its use, and the awkwardness of the regular construction was the reason 
 tliai this verbal expres^i<)n assumed the construetion of its synonym mintidre.']— Operam, 
 dare is construed with a eompletini: Vt-claiis« in place of an intransitive dative-object, 
 as : Dedit openim id quam lont:issime tempus duceret (Nep. Them. 7, 1), analouous to 
 the construction ' alicri rci ojjtrain dare\ That-clatises dependent ou operam dare 
 originally are conceived as final clauses ( = ' he took pains in order to etc' ) : but from 
 the frecpient connection (»f such clauses with operam dare, the original conception wa» 
 forgotten, and the clause was treated as completing, the expression operam dare assum- 
 ing the force of our verbs 'to try ', M») endeavor'.— Thus an inlinitive clause is some- 
 times used in place of a dative of the interested i)erson, in the construction of the ab- 
 ftnict dative ^§ -IW), li. 3-3). as : Ipsa humilitas eOriini maximo argumento est, me n^minern 
 advermtmn es,-e ; their very humbleness is the best argument that I did not r^pttl anyone. 
 I.iv. 2<i. 31. [The clause '•me. . .aveisdtum esse ' has the force of • in my favor' = hvic rei, 
 or Diilii. In the Eni:lish rendering the same clau-e must be considered as an attributive 
 clause. = an aigumeiit 'for niy not repelling any one"], ^ee the Ex. Cic. Thil. 2, 16, 
 quoted p. 8:i. I{ ;«. 
 
 (//) Ut clauses dependent on verbs op fkarino are conceived as iitransitive datives 
 (veiGri alicui rei). Thus ' narifms reritns (C:es. B. G. h. 9) = ' ne quid navihn-'i accide- 
 ref ; recepttii sua tinnl>at (Cies. B. C. 3, »•9) — • id se red pei-^ posset '. 
 
 (c) Clauses introduced by qtiin or <7?/o?//ir/7y,v, are analogous to intransitive ablative 
 objt-cts. or lo objects with i)repositions, but also to certain tiauHitive objects : Kec aptas 
 iinpedit quominus ogri cc^tndi sivdia tenedmiK. Cic. Sen. 17, tto ( = ah agtis colendis). — 
 Mon ea res me deferndt quomimts tiftera.<: ad te mitttrem. Cic. Fain. 6, 12," 1 (jieterrZre ali- 
 qiiem de or ah altqud i-e^. Thus nan d>d/ifo qriin = non duhito de. 
 
 id) 01)liqiie (^nod-clauses are analogous to the construction with an objective genitive, 
 dative, or prepositional object (lando aliquem quod = taudo aliquem propter aliquani 
 rem ; ignosco quod = ignosco alicui rei ; accusdre aliqueni quod prodat = accusdrt ptoUi- 
 tionis). 
 
 op.s. 2. SrB.TECT-cLAUSEs have tliesame grammalical form ascompletingCHV<?67-r/a?/.s^^, 
 the lauiriiagt! conceiving them as • iiideclinahle neuters \ which donctt change their form, 
 whether they are used in the relation of a subject nominative, or in that of an oblique 
 case. JSonietimes a clause introduced by one of the odveftAa/ conjunction^; {/i. 8. 6'). is 
 used as a sul)ject-clause (the same conjunctions being occasionally used to introduce 
 a completing object-clause), as : DixC'ic. minime ess-e mirandnm si tanta ignominia esset 
 accejiia ; They said, it was l)y no means to be wondered at if (that) so great a disgrace 
 had been met with. Cic. Verr. 2, 5, ;^.— Non temerarium'st vlA dives' blande appellat 
 paupentn ' It is not lor nothing jvhen (that) a rich man kindly addresses a poor one. 
 I'laut. Aul. 2, 2, 7. (Compare : Ignoscite si ( = quod) appHlo taleia vinon scrjnus. 
 Cic. Leg. Ai:r. 2. 18, 40».— Subject-clauses are tised : 1) as sui)jects of those passives 
 which, in the active voice, take the same Uinds of clauses as completing ol/jects (Obs. 3) ; 
 2) as subjects of active i)redicates (Obs. 4). Both kinds of subject-clauses always have 
 impersonal jiredicates. Hence the i)redicate-adjectives, participles, and gerundials be- 
 longing to the predicate of the principal sentence must always be in the neuter singular 
 
 Obs. 3. All the verbs which, in the active voice, require cJatises as completing objects 
 (0ns. 1). take tiie same clauses as impersonal .«.////jV^'/.s- if they are in the passive voice. 
 There i< no distinction made, in this respect, wliether the object-clause is conceived as 
 a transitive, or intransitive object, while svh-tantive objects, if intransitive, cannot be 
 turned into pas-ive subjects (§ 477). Hence if any active verl>, with a comi)letingobject- 
 clau^e, is turned into a passi\e, it must take an impersonal form, the object-cl«use be- 
 coming a subject-clause, without any change of form, as : Alldtum est fioxCis adioentdrej 
 li was announced that the cuemy was arriving. Liv. 25, 21 (Actively expressed : Affert- 
 
Il 
 
 484 
 
 COMBINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 bant host'is advevtdre, where ^JiosHs adventare'' i? an ohjoct-clnuFc ; wliile in '' nVdtvm 
 esthontls a(lreii(dre\ the i*ame clausJe is a (tiibject-clnufte).-- Kidcm pnctOri vianddfum tat 
 ntdiiasdtonnn.'ifmmentiexigu'et; It was ordered 'lo tl>e Kaiiie jiia'tor' (i. e. the Mime 
 prietor was ordend) to collect two tithes of corn. Liv. ;yi. 2. — DidAtanthnn von fst quin 
 TiiinK/iiarn poss'it iitUUas cntn honestdte contendtir ; It niusr not he doiihted that cxpe- 
 dieaey can never he in contliet witti morality. Cic. Ofl'. -i, 3, 11.— Iniqiiissiine cornjnird- 
 tume>>t quod in morhis corporis niedicns optinins r/iKentur, in pericniis capitis deterri- 
 mnt* patrOnus ad/iH/et'tr ; It ix most unfairly (stat)lhhtd li. e. it is exceedinjjily inconsist- 
 ent) that in diseases of the body the hest jiliy^ician is called, but that in capital trials the 
 most indifV.rent counsel iatinployed. Cic. Cln. 20, 57. — Koniie non medio<Ti cum admira- 
 tioiie laiidCttiir quod id accifnt-fid'/in non putdri ; At Hotiie • it is praised ' witii not a lit- 
 tle admiration that I hare fhot/f/ht I should not accept that ^donation). Cic. t^u. Fr. 1, 1, 9. 
 — (|iiiim qmereri'tar ecqai Carnpanonirn bene imri'xs de repiil)Iic?l nostra esMt ; 
 When it ^rax inqnind (i.e. wlien inquiries were made) whether any o\ the Cainpanians 
 had wel! desercrd ofo'.n* ri'|)Mblic. Liv. -Zii, :iJ.— The nature of these cl.ni-es may behest 
 feen it' tliey are coordinal»' w it!» sii))-taniive subjects: jis : \jilerio triionpltii<, Maiilio 
 vt ovana inqrederttur urh€m ( = orafio) decretmncxt. ('I'o tna/npht/s the personal predi- 
 cate r/^tvP/i'/.'." f^'/ must be supplied.) Liv. ri;^:^l.— The only exception to the above-men- 
 tioned rule is the instance when intinitive clauses must assume the fori.i of a no.mi- 
 NATiVE WITH THK iNFiMTivK (p. l(i(». /.'. HCi. bl). 15ut even in tliis instance, inij)t/i^onal 
 hubject-clauses are suuKJtinies u-ed where the nile would ri-(iuire a jft-rsoi/al con^tnu•lion 
 will» a nominative and intinitixe, as : A\im c/tnfem traditur f.ima. dulcedine fniirnm cap- 
 tain Alpis transl^se ; It is reported by lame that this nation had cros-rd the Alps, becjinse 
 they were captivated by the sweetness of our frtiits. Liv. 5. :i'{. [The clause '■rpntetn 
 /n//*<'>tA>g' is an impersonal su*>ject-clatisc. ill place of tin; rej^ular nominative with the 
 intinitive * Aa f/en.9 traditur /ra/jAisv*» '.]— Sometime» it may be doubtful whether an Ut- 
 clause, coiinectt;d with an impt-rsonal pas-ivo predicate, must he considered ix mitjject- 
 clause^ nr a final clause as a<tr«rl>i<d ol>i<'Ct of the injpersonal predicate, so that the lat- 
 ter, accordiiii; to § 4»)(), No. 'i. is used without any subject : (.) mii content ione pnijudtuni 
 eat ul lis h;ec capitis lestimareliir. Cic. C'lii 41. \h-r*s^ uf . . .{r^tiinarefur' is eitlieralin.il 
 clause (= there was a hard stiiiLri;le in order to), or a siiltjeci-claiise according to p. o'JD 
 (= they strove to make this trial u capital one). See p. (538, Ubs. 1. 
 
 Obs. 4. The impersonal ])r(dicates of sul>ject-clau-es of the second class (Ors. 2), 
 are either ordinary activk vi-.nns, iiiipersonally ll^e(l, or I'Uki»icatk-ad.tectivks (itt the 
 neuter sinurularK or pedicate nouns with the impcr«»nal copula (I'st). With both kinds 
 of predicates the subjertclause is either an iiiierrogaiive clause, or a That-claubc (the 
 same as in the instance iiientiotied Obs. 3), as : 
 
 strength of the .Ktolians t,e ic^akened. Liv. 3»i, ,31.— />//'//// fiiit. e.rcnifarn populi Ko- 
 nnlni ad lacum Trasinienum intirlre : It n-as [destined bvj /ate that thtarji.y of ilie Io- 
 nian people ahuidd be d^afroycd n\ lake TrasimC'iuis. Cic. I)iv. 2. 8. 21.- AcoDtntorca miil- 
 tos in civiifite esse, ntilsest ; It in useful that there should be many public accusers in the 
 community. Cic. Kosc. Am. 2(). 
 
 (/y) Ci.AirsES iNTRonicKi) hy uf,ne, qiiin. Qnowinua : IJestat '//deimpcratOrcdcliirondo 
 dicenduni esse ridfdtur : It remains to s/kdk i literally : that it sliouhlsteni that it lie siniken) 
 of selecting a commander. Cic. Leir. .>Lin. 11). -il.— Est jnos hominum ut nolint euiidem 
 pluribus exeellere; It is the habit of men to dislike that one man sln)uld be distinguished 
 in several accomplishments, i'ic. lirut. 2L8».— Dionysio wvintefirmn qiiidem erat ut ad 
 justitiam reinifjrdrtt ; It icas nor even in Dionysius's/V^/r^T to return to justice. Cic. Tii>r. 
 5, 21, 02.— Si diem profi-riiniis. jiericulurn est \ = verendutn est» ne oiinu's copia? conreni- 
 anl; If we jjostpone the matter, tliereis danger that all the forces inaij unite. Liv. 25, 
 3S. — ^tetis.'ie per Tn-houtwrn. quoniin us oppid'o jKttirenfur, videl)ntur; It seemed to fje 
 TreUmius^s /aalf that thei/ did not capfuie the town. Csr.-*. B. C. 2. 13 [.s7</i.v.sY being an 
 impersonal intinitive dependent on rideMtur = stetit \nr Tieboniiim <iuointnus potireu- 
 tur). — J\'on est dufjiuni quin f)eneliriuin sit etiam iiivlio prodess»? ; 'J ht rt- is no dontit that 
 i/ <,s' (must be considerea) a Ac/'^/iV to be iiselui to a person even airainst his will. >eu. 
 Ben. 5. \\). [Here a sut)ject-iiilinitive ' prodesse'' is the impersonal sul>ject of the iinner- 
 hoiial predicate - bene ftciuin sit', and thi;- ««enttuce, in the form of a Quinclauae, is niado 
 the impers{uml subject of ' /,on ed dulnuta '.] 
 
 (c) QuoD-CLAisEs: Punqit /nequod scribis e-^e \e \(i\\c libenter: It gives me a pang (\i 
 afllicts me) ; literally ' it stings nie ', that you write yon like to i>e there. Cic. Fam. 7, l.">. 1. 
 — Illud admodutn ridiculuuk {est)y quod negus Dejotariim auspiciOium illOrum pa-ni- 
 tSre ; It is extremelv ridiculm/s that you denv Dejotarus to be sorry for those auspices, 
 Cic. Div. 2, 37, .8.— Magnum tjenejicium natQrie eat quod necttme eat mori : It is a j^reat 
 henejit of nature that ice must die. Sen. Ep. 101. 
 
 THEORY OF SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 
 
 485 
 
 (d) Interrogative claupes : Ea ros rata habedtis necne, reipublicse magis interest 
 qnam mea : Whtther you ratify this, or not. is more a question of public inte/est t han of 
 mv t)wn. Liv. 2«), 31. — Ne in proximam quioem noctein, vld custodiretur expe:diebat : It 
 uus \\i)\.e\vn arranged (i. e. no arrangements had lieen made) for liie next night, where 
 t/ie place of his confintnunt a as to be. Liv. ih — A dnn?abile est quantum inter omuls 
 iinus cxcellat ; It ia'wondcjful, how much one man is superior to all. Cic. Or. 0. 
 
 Obs. 5. '1 he active verbs that may be used as iinpers«inal i)redicates of ^uhject-clanpe3 
 (Ob^.4), are limited to about tliirty-tive. These verbs (including those wliicli are con- 
 sirued with a mbject inllnitive (§ 4t>4), and those which do not take any grammatical 
 subject (lonat, fulqurat. etc.) are called * pkopek impkksonals '. For these verbs, and 
 f(U' the kind of aulgect-clauses which each of them requires, see p. til5 toll.— Predicate- 
 iidjectives, and predicate-nouns with the copula, may be construed with sul)ject-chiuse8 
 (according lo the rules p. iW foil.) whenever the idea of an adjective or noun admits of 
 an acfiou^tis siibjt.-ct. Frecpiently Fact clausks (substantive (^uod-clauses) are used in 
 jilace ol the subject of a sentence. These clauses are not confined to the ' proi)er im- 
 l)er^ollal predicates', but may be used as subji-cis of a//y verb whicli would admit ol 
 an ordinary substantive-subject, denoting an action. See Obs. 14. 
 
 Obs. ft. If the impersonal predicate dependent on a subject clause, is Q, finite rerb, the 
 piit>ject-clause is in the relation of -a subjed nominative, as in the example-' quoted Obs, 3, 
 and 4. But often a sentence witli animj)eisonal predicate and with an infinitive clause as its 
 sul)ject. is itself an infinitive clause, m which instance the impersonal predicate must be 
 phui'din the infinitive (as an impersonal inedica'eintinilive). and iha svf/jectclause mvst 
 be conceived as a sul/ject-accusalice. at^ : Co\\^\.\\\\ev\u\\ .oiitimum esse, dtfinum snarn quem- 
 quertvtrti ; Tliey resolved///^// it was best that each .'should rttiirn to his own lumu. Cies. B. 
 G.2. 10. [Here the infinitive clause 'doinum.. .reverti wtniid be in the relation of a suiiject- 
 iiominalive if the imper>onal predicate were finite (optimum est) ; but since ttie sentence 
 is marie an object-dause of ' constHuerunt ', the i)redicate 'optintum eat ' is made an im- 
 personal predicate-infinitive (o//tiniumes.^e), and tlie subject-clause ' dontvm suarn qxum- 
 que rcverli' assumes the relation ol a si'bjkct-acci'sa i ivk ( = domnm reditioiurin opti- 
 inam esse).] — FuCrequi dicerent, nihil attinere. omnia tumnltuose concitdri ; '1 tnre were 
 tlio-e who said, it was of no use that all should be alarmed in a tuniuitu«»us manner. Liv. 
 3ti, 11 [Indkpknukntlv : • niiiil atiinet, omnI-< coicitari ', the clause '• omnia concitaii'' 
 being conceived .as the subject-nominative of ihe impersotral predicate ^ atdnet \ Being 
 made an object-clause of 'dicerent \ the predicate 'altinef becomes an i in personal yvr^- 
 dicate-infini'ire, ami the clause ' omnls concifd/i' is in the relation of a suBJECT-AtcusA- 
 TiVE ( =' concitafionem omnium nihil attinere)].— Such subject-clauses may consist of 
 an inij>eraon>U j/aaaive of that class which are used without any subjects (§ 400. No, 2), 
 the sul)ject-accusative bein:; understood as if an impel sonal ' z^ ' (p. 72.7«'. 11, 2). In 
 this instance the same impersonal infiiniive lias two relations: 1) that of ii p)edicate-in- 
 finifive of its own clause ; 2) tiiat ot a subject-wcusative to another predicaie-inliniti ve; 
 as: Conciamant omnes, ad castra iri oportere, (literally : All shouted * that it waa neces- 
 sary' that • it should Ije gone' to tlie camp, i. e. 'that all must proceed to the camp '.) 
 C;es. 15. (». 3, IS. [//i iei)resents an intiniiive-clau>e. being at the same time its predi- 
 cate, and ccnrespinding to the finite predicate -itur^ ('t is gone, thty go)\ it is, al.-^o, 
 the subject of oftortet. which being chaiiL'ed into a predicate-infinitive, ii must be con- 
 sidered it.- subject-accusative.] Thu- : Non dicam neillud quidem, in hominem hones- 
 tissimum tanigraviter(///i///«(/tvr/icaustT indicianon opart u isse : I will noteveii mention 
 that so severe a punishment ought not to have been inflicted, without a hearing, on a 
 most respectable man Cic. Verr. 2. 5. 8 [animadverlifur, = poena iriogdlur ; hence 
 'unimadverti oj)ortuii ' = poenam irrogdti oi>ortuit]. 
 
 Obs 7. In the same manner any finite subject-clause may be in the relation of a sub- 
 ject-accusative if its iinper.sonal piedicate assumes the lorm of a preilieate infinitive, 
 as : (Dixit) I'ompeji summain/V/j-v^e semper ro/M/</(7/(7/i ut co?n]x/ne7 et ur alque ab armis 
 disc^dtretur ; He said that it had t\\\\ny^ been tlie earnest desiie of roinpey that a com- 
 promise should be made, unCi thai tluyahould disarm. Cies. B. C. 3, 16 ( = 'compositiOnem' 
 et 'disccssiOnem al) armis * semper liiisse voliintiltein). — Ciesar omnibus consiliis a///«- 
 t>/'/6//'/M/n existiinavii ut Narboneiii proficisctrltar ; Caisar thought he must prevent by 
 all means thut he should mar<h to yarl/O. Ca's. B. G. 7, 7 [ = pn^lectiOnem (ad) NarliO- 
 iiem anteveitendain e>se].— Illud meinineris, conveniaae vt ne quid dotis mea ad te alfer- 
 ret filia ; Reineniher that ' it haa been agreed' ( = we have agreed) that my daui:hter will 
 no' briiiLT you any dowry. I'laut. Aul. 2. 2, 80 [ = non-dationtm (if such a substantive t x- 
 isted) doiis convenir.se], — Ctesar coirnOvii yx-r Afranimn stare quominus picelio dimica- 
 retur : C'A'!^:\rharuvd tlia/ it uas Afranius't! fault that there was no fighting. Cies. B C. 
 1, 1, 41.— (^uiim in»stri quid -ine intj)tratore efiicere l^ossent jteiapici cupeient ; Since our 
 soldit rs w ished ' thai it should be seen ' w hat ihey could do without the chief-commander. 
 Cas. B. (i. 3, 21, 
 
 Sometimes two and more subject-clauses are thus made dependent on each other : Quum 
 
486 
 
 COMBINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 omn'mm voces nudinfifu)' fxfipeetan (Hufius non ojwrtere qvin ad cnHra «fe^wr; AMicn 
 Jill raise'! thtir voice'^ tluit there .-hoidd be no longer delay in i)rorecdm«,' to the c-imp. Ciea. 
 B (i 3 'lA Thvfo- clauses are tiHis re!?;<)lvfd : 1. Quia ad eastra irlUir uon ex.-<pecfafur. 
 'quiii ad casini iiC-iur' beiiii,' in the ivhition of a suhject-noniinative to tlie iiiii)tr>()iml 
 passive ' exsi>ect<'ititr\ 2. liy makinjr tliis t^entoncc the subject of '0])or(et\ the subject- 
 clause ' Qirin irttiir'' assumes tlie character of a Kuhjecl-accntiaHre ( = ad castra itiOiiein 
 ex>pecliTii non oportet). 3. Afjain lliis \vh«)Ie sentence is made dependent as an object- 
 
 ck ■ ' 
 
 chani 
 omnl- 
 
 k/iou'/i anum<: u\\ f/uit you ., ., . . 
 
 the citie- be qortrtted Dy the advice of the luirher ranks (i. e. ft>r an aristocratic govern- 
 ment of the cities). Cic. Qu. Fr. 1. 1,8. [1. it ciri/afe.<. . .adminhtrtntur, prondetur nhs 
 te = Adiniitittl ratio }twvidet nr. 2. Ut cirifdte.s admini/itrt/dur, prorid^ri constat = Admi/n- 
 8trationefH provide ri constat, the subject-clause ' ut...adminhtrtntar'' iiavinjr assumed 
 the relation ol a. sub/ect-accumtive, and the sentence ^ vtadnonistrtntur prondttur ,that 
 ot a suiOect-noininaiive. 3. It civittltes administrentur. ;>/-on(/fH constdre \\i\eo = Ad- 
 minUtratiuiuxinovWionem constdre video, the whole bcnteuce Ko. 1 having assumed the 
 relation of a suigect-accusaiive.J 
 
 Obs. 8. Predicate clauses are drntmlocutions of the pi^edicaf^, the real action or 
 ST'i'.sTwcE of tlie predicatr beiii'„' expl•e^sed in the'form of a claisk, the predicate re- 
 taininj,' merely the (/ramniatiad form ofa predicate. For this purpose those verbs are 
 employed which either (lent»tc the parlicular kind of ' predication ' (§ «ilO ; see Obs. 11), 
 or the .reneral kind i;f verbal action to which the predicate proper belon<,'s (e. e. a verb 
 of b^inr/ or doiiiff). Predicate-clauses alwavs have the external api)earance ot a snbject- 
 claiise'or an ooj'Ct-clause. or an attributive clause: but thry are distin-nished troni 
 these cla-ses of clauses bv the tact that tlie verb to which they are attached lacks thesnth. 
 stance of a predicate, whiVli is assi.jjiied to the cla'ist*. The irnimmatical lorms of predi- 
 cate-chuises are either relative or It-clauses, sometimes (^iiodclauses. and (^uumclauses. 
 The formal (or alt^tract) predicate of the principal >entence is either the verb esse (denot- 
 iiii^ the nitre idea of ' existence *). or the veiby<//v/<^, or one of its synonyms (denoting 
 the idea of * doing'), or a verb designating the kind of i/;-tciia//i<^^i {dicere. (juitrere, pe- 
 tere etc.). 
 
 Obs. 9. Pre-Mcate-clauses attached to the abstract predicate esse have any of the forms 
 meniioned in Olis. 8. 
 
 doiiit) 
 aiiytliinrf he 
 
 dam sunt qui. niulti sunt qui etc.), or it is e.\pres>ed by a noun «>1 general import with 
 or without indetinite attributes. The predicate-clause generally has its predicate in the 
 sul)junctivc, as : Sunt qui censeant una animuni et corpus occidere ; There are some who 
 hold that ^oul and bodv i)erish together, tic. Tusc. l-l> [ = (^nidam censeut una., oiri- 
 dere] — Nemo est qui nesciat ; Ttiere is no one who does not know tluit etc. Cic. ram. 
 1, 4. 2 [ = Nemo nesdf, or Omnes sriunf\.— Kraut t^entenfia quce castra \ ari opi-ugnanda 
 censennt ; There were votes in favor of an attack on Vaius"s caini» diternliy which be- 
 lieved that etc.). C'ics. li. C. 2, 30 [ = XonnulUi; senteidue castra oppiKj nan da cfinsebant]. 
 Sometimes such circumlocutions «)f the predicate l)y means of the verb esse are a|)pliea 
 to make the numeral relations (»r Metinite' sui>jects more prominent, as: Krant ilintia 
 duo quibns itineribus domo exire posseiit. C'.es. B. (J. 1, [ = Duobus itinerilius 
 exire poteraiit]. — St e, ' 
 lacks, lie is not even h 
 
 A'st locus in quo, or sunt . - ■. . , • • . . 
 
 Tii-c. Jb. [ = Quibusdamin lexis id valet].— Kst quatenus amictfue dan veiiia potest; 
 There i6 a limit up to which friendship may be taken into account. Cic. Am. 17 [ - Isqne 
 
 * The verb? employed for such ' merely formal ' or ' abstract' predicates (esse,fareie) 
 have the same relation to ordinary verbs i\-* form-adjt^clives to descriptive a(ljectives. 
 They are verl)s meiely in their «rrammatical form, and, partaking of the wh;>le intlec- 
 tioiT of (.rdinarv verbs, mav peilnrm ail (jratnmatical lumtioiis of the piedicate, but 
 without Its 7nediiiiifj, and .substance, which" is «-xpies-ed by the ' predicatc-dau e '. liy 
 thu-^ di-solvinjr a pr.-dicate into an abstract predicate and a predicate-clause, we sepa- 
 r.iielhe piedicate proper from the predication (§ GIO. fi)ot-not<). The preoicate-dause 
 ha- to its abstract piedicate the same relation as any other clause has to its s.\n«ietic 
 antecedent (C)Bs. 1.'), «I. Since thesvndetic antecedent always indicates the qrawjnatual 
 fuhclion and name of the clause (Obs. 1.5). it is evident, that clause» wldch have abbtract 
 predicates as antecedents nmst be classed as ' lYedicate-claust$\ 
 
 est quod deest (ei>, ne be;ltus qiiidem est: If fhrre ts anyt/itnq he 
 lappy. Cic. Tusc. 5. S [ = si dtot aliquid].— Est ul,i id raleut {i.e. 
 tit (oci in qui/jus) ; Thtre are occasions whtre this holds go.xl. Cic. 
 
 I 
 
 * 
 
 THEORY OF SENTENCE-COMBINATION. i * 
 
 ad cerium locum or finem amiciti» dari venia potest].— Instead of sunt qni, the form 
 
 • iurenti {rrptrti) svut qui ' is frequently used (see p. 429, li). 
 
 2) If predicate-clauses attached to the abstract predicate *>.<;«« have the form of an Ui- 
 dause.esse \> always an impersonal predicateuHhout asubject{eHnt = 'it is the case that', 
 
 * it happens that '). Tlii> form is used : .,,„.„. 
 
 (a) iu emphasize the predication, the same as if an ' emphatic particle' (§ 401) were used 
 together with the virtual predicate, as : Est nt plerlque philosoi)hi nulla tradant prai- 
 cepta dicendi ; Indted. most philosophers fail to give any rules on speaking (it is the 
 case that most philosophers give no rules etc.). Cic. Or. 2, 3«!, 152 [ = Plerlque «on€ philoso- 
 phi nulla tradunt pra-cepta].— JS'on est igitur vt viirandum sit ea pra-sentlri ; Indeed, we 
 should not wonder that these things are foreknown (literally '7^ i.f, therefore, 7/o^ the 
 case that it should be wondered at etc.). Cic. Div. 1, 5«, 128 [ = Prnfecto non est miran- 
 dum ea pricsentlri].— Jam proj^e erat vt ne consulum quirtem majestas coercgret iras 
 hominum ; 'It was almost the case' {or 'it was near') that not even the majesty of the 
 consuls restrained the anger of men. Liv. 2. ;W [ - Prope ne consulum quidem majes- 
 tas coercebat : Even the majesty of the coim^u]^^ scarcely restrained etc.].— Jam prope erat 
 vt nee duci miliies, nee militibus dux satis fideret ; Scarcely did the foldieis and the 
 leader place sufficient contidence in each other. Liv. 10, 18.— Instead of 'prope est id\ or 
 "non est uf the ex|)ression ' abest uf with a limiting adjunct (parum abest, nihil aljesf, 
 von inultum abest) is sometimes used, in which instance the predicate-clause is intro- 
 duced by the conjunction quin (in place of vt), as : Nihil attest quin sim miserrimus 
 {= prope est ut si m): 'Nothing is wanting that I should be the most wretched man', 
 i. e. I am well ni<:h the mo^t wretched man on earth. Cic. Att. 11, 5, 3.— Haud mvUvni 
 abfuit quin Ismenias interficeretiir ; 'Little was wanting that' Ismenias was killed, 
 t. e. Ismenias was almost (nearlv) killed. Liv. 42, 44.— Hero may be reckoned the first Ut- 
 clause iu ih«! construction 'Tdntum attest ut...ni', which may either be considered a 
 Predicate-clause, or an attributive Fact-clause, accordinir to the analysis given p. mi. 
 
 (b) The same form of predicate-clauses is most frequently used as a circumlocution 
 of the liiture piedicate-infiniti ve in the passive voice (p. 137. E. 154). as : ArbitiSbar 
 j'vre ut lex de pecuniis repettindis K.Ueretur; 1 thought that the law on the embezzle- 
 ment of public funds would be repealed. Cic. Verr. 1, 14, 41. Here 'fore id' is an abstract 
 predicate to which the inllection is applied according to the requirement of the con- 
 struction, while the real predicate, whidi does not admit of this inflection, is added in 
 the form of a predicate Ut-clause.— Scipio susi)iciltus i.'>\ fore ut postero die invlti.s di- 
 micslre coqetZtur. ^S'a'^. B. C. 3, 37.— As a similar circundocution for tinite passive predi- 
 cates thennjiersonal predicate ' in eoesf with a predicate rt-clau>e is sometimes em- 
 ploved, as : Quum jam in to esset ut comprehenderltur ,• When it was ' on the point ' that 
 he should be arrested (i. e. 'just when he was to be arrested", or ' when he was on the 
 point of beini; arretted'). Nep. Pans. 5.— hi eo erat ut Miltiades oppido jxttiretur ; 'It 
 was on thejtoiid ' that Miliiades seized the city (i. e. Miltiades was on the point of seizing). 
 Isep. Milt. 7. 
 
 3) The impersonal abstract predicate esse takes a predicate-clause introduced by quod, 
 or a relative causal adv. rb «'/;■, q u an, ottrem) ov hy xhv temporal ctmjunction quuin, to 
 emphasize the adverbial relations of cause and time attached to the predicate, as: Quid 
 est cur tu in isto loco sed<as; ' What is it why ' you ate sittintr at that i)lace J (i. e. why 
 do you sit etc.). Cic. Clii. 5:1.— C<»^'nos< et populus KomSnus quid sit quamobrein, quum 
 e(liuster ordo judicfliet, in ntillo juoice susjjicio acceptie pecunije constitCda sit: The 
 l{oman people will learn ' what it is why' (i. e. will team whij). no suspicion of bribery 
 was established jgainst any judge, while the judicatory was m the hands of the eques- 
 trian order. Cic. Verr. 1, 1, 13.— Credo eiro mirjlri vos quid sit quod., ego potissimura 
 rutrexerim ; I believe that you wonder * what it is that ' (i. e. that you wonder why) just 
 I should have arisen. Cic. Hose. Am. 1.— Hanc domum jam mvltos annos est gumn ]tos- 
 Mdw ; It has been (see p. 299, n. 42) vmrnj years when (that;) 1 have owned this house. 
 Plant . Aiil. Prol. A.—Haudduvi s,x viens'is Me^raribus hue est quum commiqrdvit ; It is not 
 yet six months ago uhen (that) he moved from Megara to this place. Plant. Pers. K:}7. 
 [Th(? Quum-danseg in the last two sentences are piedicate-clauses, since the principal 
 predicate est contains (miy the abstract idea of a jiredicate, but not its substance. The 
 circumlocutitm is used to emphasize the adverbial adjuncts 'jnvlfos annos' and 'sex 
 mnisJs'. B«)th are placed in the adverbi il accusative of time, as if the temporal clauses 
 were the grammatical predicates in place of est. The editors find fault with both con- 
 structiiMis, since thev failed to see that these temporal clauses are jrredicateclauses 
 which, toqether with their abstract predicate est, form the real predicate of the sentence. 
 In a similar passaire Cicer-' nivesa personal form to the sentence, making the adverbial 
 adjunct the subject to which the temporal clause is attached in the form of an attributive 
 clause; Apud Ura-cos jam fz/ywi prope qvadiingenti /fw//^ quum hoc probatur: It isfo^r 
 hundred years when (that) this has been adoi)ted by the Greeks. Cic. Or. 51, 171 (i. e. 
 Anni, quum hoc piobaiur, quadiingenti sunt ; The years or ' numbers of years ' that this 
 
488 
 
 COMBINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 has been adopted arc four hundred).— In a pimilar paspacrc the predicate-clanse has tho 
 Ibnn of an I't-clause : Videsiie ij^itur miml^ quadrin^'t'iitoiuni aiinOriun ^.*s>ihun(' urhem 
 vf sine regihussit? Do you see, then, that this city (by rdhesvi, sec p. 396, d) has been 
 less than "4{X) years without kin<;s ? Cic. Itep. 1, 37, 58. (p. 520, c). 
 
 Obs. 10. Predieatc chiuses dependent on facere, and its synonym?, as abstract predi- 
 cates, have the form of an rt-c/ause vw\ihii>\z\\\<z either the pndicnt'KM, as referrini: to 
 a ' (loi'if/ ' oi the t^ubjeet, or an adverbial adjunct of the predicate proper. This 
 construction is both personal and impersonal, as : Faclibi (i. e. ?// tifn) Urjh Acilicz re- 
 niat in. nientm; Recall the Acilian law to your mind (literally : Make that you rerjiU 
 etc.). Cic. Vcrr. 1, 1, 17. — InrVus facio vt nconltr rnlwit* rtipublicie: I reluctantly re- 
 call the ruin of tlie republic. Cic. Vatin. «>. 21. — Facia lihenter ut per littera^ tecum col- 
 loquar ; I like to converse with you by k'tter ( = libenter colloquor). Cic. Fam. 1, 7, 1. 
 
 — (l\\o feci libentius w/ euin semiOnem inandarein litteris ; The more willinjily have I 
 committed this dialo<,nie to pa|>er. Cic. Or. 2, 2, 7.— Prope factum est ut injussupnetOris 
 in aciem exirent ; It almost * liappened ' that they went to battle without the prietor's 
 orders (i.e. Tlu-y almost went to battle etc.). Liv. 25, 21.— Egif ille niliil aliud illo c.ver- 
 eitu uiisi vt urbTs dfi)()))>dartlur : He did nothinj? with this army but devastate cities 
 (i. e. he <»nly devastated cities with this armyi. Cic. Pis. 17, 41.— Faciendum mihi putilvi 
 nt his litteris breviter yw/^o/it/e/vm ; I tliought that I ouLrht brii-fly to answer this letter. 
 Cic. Fam. 3, 8. — Negavi me esse fact urum, ut de periculo publico non ad consilium refer- 
 rem ; I said that I mist refer to the public council in a matter ot public dai;<;tr. Cic. 
 Cat. 3, 3. — Here belon;^ the impersonal expressions^^^ uf, contingit uf, accidit ut. as : In 
 QA^flt ut ffique quisque altero delect^tur ac se ipso ;' Between such jx-rsons (' it happens 
 that ') eiich flnd-» as much pleasure in the other, as in himself. Cic. Olf. 1, 17.— Timoleou 
 niau:nus omnium judicio vir exstitir ; namque hiiic contigtt nt patriam ir^qua erat natus, 
 oppressam a tyraimo, IWerdret ; Timoleon was a «rreat nian accordiii<r to the jud^'ment of 
 i\\\\ fitr he liberated his native country from tyranny (literally 'it hapiieiitd to him\ ' it 
 fell to his lot ' that he lifjei'ated etc.). Nep. Timol. 1,1. 
 
 Obs. 11. Often verbs of savin?, askincr. and commandinii, on which oblique clanseR 
 are dependent (p. 3S7 loll.) must be considered as alj-^hact pvtdh'ales. This is tlie case 
 if, by such verbs, the author desi<;p.ares his own prestnt as.-i-rtions, (juestions, or com- 
 mands, separating thus tlic jiredication (i. e. tlie i(ka of assertion, (pjestion, or com- 
 mand), from \\\c predicate, i. e. the substance of the command, which is contained in 
 the oblique clause. ^ Dico Epicurvm enulre^ is a mere circumlocution of the simple 
 sentence • Fincurus eiraf ; the diHerence between both beinirthat in the former ihe 
 predication ta declaration) is separated from the iindicale declared. Hence oblique 
 clauses of tliis kind, although they liave the external forn» of object-clauses, are virtu- 
 ally predicate-clauses, the governing verb being an abstract predicate; as: Dicimus^ 
 C. Verremquadringentiessestertiuin ex Sicilia abstulisse ; We a^ert that C. Varro ab- 
 Btracted 40 millions of t»esterces from Sicily ( = Verves. . .al^sfuiit). Cic. Verr. 1, 18. 56. 
 
 — Voln ut responde(Pi ( = respi>itde\. Cic. Vatin. 7, IS.— Q'uvro serrarisne Jidf.ui ; I ask 
 whether you have kept your i)romise ( =• Strvavi-t'ine fdtmf) Cic. Vat. ti, 15. — J'tto 
 ut periculum propuls5tis ( = propulsate pcriculnm). Cic. Hose. Am. 3, 7. 
 
 Obs. 12. Advehbiai, clai'sks are of three forms. They are 1) either infroditced by 
 adverbial conjunction.'^ {R. 3, C), or 2) by 7-elatiie adji-cfires or advrlis : or they take 
 3) the form oi participial clauses, either in the form of ablatives absolute, or in that of a 
 direct participial construction (j). 174, R. 21S). 
 
 Those adverbial clauses whicli art; introduced by conjunctions, likewise assume three 
 forms: 1) the direct adverbial ; x^) the conditional ; 3» the compararivt- forms. 
 
 A. In the dikkct auvekbial form, the ditlrrent adverbial relations of the principal 
 eentence (§ 51(5 foil.), except that of im.ace (which always asMUim^s the form of a rela- 
 tive clause), are dinctUj expressed by coiiju'ictions, denoting the relation. These are 
 (rt) Tkmpoual conjunctions (quurn, (juando, dum, (juoad. donee) ; (fA the modal con- 
 junctions Iff, and its equivalents quo. f/uin, guominus ; (c^ the causal conjunctions g^iorf, 
 quia, quoniam, including the eoucesj^ive conjunctions quamquaui, etsi, quatnri't. 
 
 B. The CONDITIONAL ft)rm represents the pueoication of the principal sentence (p. 480) 
 as dependent on a continuency whose e."istence or non-existence is represented as 
 uncertain. This continirency is e.xi)ressetl in the form of n conditional clause, which is 
 introduced by the conjuiicti<m si (nisi, ni), or by other adverl)ial conjunctions, iinph/ing 
 the* conjunction si (dumni/)do ctv.. vbi quis etc., see § .")7*.», /^ Of»). Hence conditional 
 clauses a.< such do not express adverbial relations of ilie principal ])redicate, but they 
 may i//j;Vy them. The )l"i//(/ of adverl>ial relations which is thus contained by implica- 
 tion in tlie conditional form of the clatise may always be recognized if the unCf^rtainty 
 expressed by the conditional form is removed, i. e. if thi? condition is made real. Thus 
 in the following conditional clauses the relation of cause is implied : .Si diem proferi- 
 mu.f, periculum est ne omnes copi:c conveniant ; If we posti)one the matter, there ia 
 danger lest all the forces may assemble. Liv. 25, 38 [By making the condition real : 
 Omnes copiaj convenGruut quia diem protulimus; The troops assembled because wo 
 
 THEORY OF SENTENCE-COMBIN.\TION. 
 
 489 
 
 postponed the matter]. — Illud perspicunm est, si neqve amens pater, neque deprrditus 
 fliusfutrif , neque odii caiisain jKitri. neque sceleris lilio l'nis>r; It is clear, that it n.iiher 
 the fatht-r was insane, nor the st)u was a villain, neither the father hau any reason to hate, 
 n«»r the sou, to commit the crime. Cic. Hose. 14, 41 [If made real : The lather had no 
 reason etc.. sincehii was not in>ane: the son had non-ason etc., since he was no villain]. 
 — In the follow ing clauses the relation of time is implied : Si prcelium ciunmitteretur, 
 ])ropinquitas casirOrum celerem superjltis ex luga nccptuni dabat ; If (in tlie aise that) 
 a battle ^llould be Ibnght. the neatness of the cami) would allow to the defeated party a 
 quick retreat. Cu;s. B. C. 1, 82 [If made real : Quuin praUiuni conimis<um, e$stt. pnquin- 
 qnitas cas-trorum. . .dabat]. — Signilicant canes et au^eres .^i qui noctu in Capitoiium vene- 
 lint ; Tlie dogs and ueese tjive the alarm if anyone co/ne^fjy night to the ('apitol [If made 
 real : When a certain person came, they «rave the alarm]. Cic. K. A. 20. 56.— iSi qvu colli- 
 gain appclkcsset. iui discedCbal ut etc.; If any one had appealed to a magistrate of equal 
 l)ower. he came so off that etc. Liv. ;i, 36 [If made real : When a certain uerson had 
 ai)|)' aled etc., he came so oil" that etc.].— In the following passage Cicero gives to a con- 
 ditional clause the form of a temporal clatise by removing the uncertainty implied in the 
 condition : Si damndttts e) is, aiquv adco qumn dainndt us e7is (nafn dub'itatio davi7iatid- 
 iiis quiH ]X}ferat esse/), virgis te ad lU'cem ca,'di necesse erit ; If you icill be condemned, 
 or rather wtien you iciU be condtmiud (for tchat doubt can there be of your condemnation f), 
 it will he nece>^ary to whip you to death ; Cic. Verr. 2. 3, 25).— In the following clauses 
 the relation of coincident action is implied : Facis injuriam si majorem S)iem in hvjus 
 (xitiojKtnis quam etc.; You are wron<r if you plac^ a greater hope in hu death than etc. 
 Cic. K. A. 50. 146 [H made leal: Injuriam facis quod. ..jxmis (or quvm. . .jxinis); You 
 ar(! wrong when (in asmtich as) you place etc.].— Satis pro^um M;;(^//cio ut nolint obesse 
 qui pf.sriunt; I am useful (iuowjh if / efnt that those do not harm us who have the 
 l)ower to do so. Cic. Att. 2, 1, 8 [If made real : Sat's piosiim, quod (or quum) jx-rficio (or 
 perfciendo); in as mncji as I eU'ect (by effecting)].— But not every conditional clau.^e 
 irni)lies an adverbial lelation. and any member of a sentence mav as.-ume tiie form of a 
 conditional clau.>^e. if it contains an uncertain action on which the reality of the predi- 
 cati<ui depends. 'I'hus frequently conditional clauses, by removinir tlie condition, may 
 become equivalent lo subject-clauses, to object-clauses, to relative, to intenogative 
 clauses, or even to nnre jflirmative particles, as : Minime est mirandum si 7>iors aceiba 
 fifit ; There is no wonder if his death was lamented. Nep. Cim. 4, 4 [Makini; the con- 
 dition real : '■quod 7nors acey^lia fuit\ or 'wJo/^7/i acerbam fuisse.\ as subject-clause]. — 
 Igno-ce si ejus ri/'i auctorit.ati Djotarus cessV ; Pardon if hjotarus olteyed the authority 
 of that 7nan. Cic. Dej. 4, 12 [If made real, the conditionil clau^e becomes an oblique 
 (^'lod-rluHse].— Si pecuniam tVA aliquis donaretit. beneficium vocabi> : Jf somel^ody 
 j/resenfs 1JOU iritk 7jwney, you will call it a benefaction. Sen. Ben. 4. 6 [Here tne condi- 
 tional clatise has the force of a transitive accusative, ou which a factitive t)redicaie de- 
 j)ends (§ 4s7, R. 74), — dimationeni betificiinn vocdbi-'^]. — >ri)n utar ista couMietudint', n 
 quid est factum clementer, ut dissolflte" factum criminer; I will not adopt th<' habit of 
 stigmati/.ini: as reckless if anything is performed with cUinency. Cic. Verr. 2. 5. 8 [Here 
 the Ciau.-*t! *« ^//iof <-.v//cfC^>//>j '. if the uncertainty is removed, becomes kklative : 'id 
 quod e>i factum clementer "].- Nunc, si me ama.s. cnitere ut scida ne qua depeieat ; 
 Now, // you lore tne. see to it that not a sinirle sheet is injured. Cic. Art. 1, 20. 4 [Here 
 the conditional clause has tlie torce of an adjuring particle * by your love \ per amorem. 
 tuum!\.— Hence interrogative clauses, in which the pr--dicatioii is rei)resented as uncer- 
 tain, freqiiently as^^ume a conditional form. See p. 397, Obs. 10.— If the reality of the 
 predicate is made dependent on a condition icliich cannot be made real, the conditional 
 clau>e cannot b(; expressed in any other form but in that of a conditioti. cortaining no 
 relation except that lo the />r»-(/ica/io». Such conditional jx-riods are called 'hypotheii- 
 caT. as : Alexandro si rHa data lonmor es.-et, Oceannni transvolassel ; Jf a longer life 
 had Ijeeii given to Alexander, he would have crossed the Ocean. Atict. Her.'4, 22. 31 [The 
 clause '4 tita... esset" cmwoi be repla-ed in the form of any other clause, f?YW, if a-f- 
 sujtHHl as real, in which instance it must he altogether omitted. This is the practical cri- 
 terion of hypothetical clause^]. 
 
 C. TnE Cf)MPAKATivE FORM as such does not denote anv of the adverbial relations of 
 thi' principal sentence. It is a peculiar kind <-f cooniiiiaiion forwhich lauirua-e ha» 
 estal)lislied a specif c grammatical form ; but it may. like Ihe conditional form (into 
 which it pas-^es over Ity in<-ai)s of the conjnnct'on "?/i.vi. which is both conditional and 
 comi»arative), intpfy the different adve/inal relations of the principal sentence The 
 nature of this advei:)ial relation is alwavs eviih nt from xhasund'tic ante^cedent of the com- 
 parative conjunction (Ous. 15), which fictiuently is bh-nded with it into one single 
 word. The comparatives conjuncMons (aside from the adjective forms quanfus. qualis 
 etc.) are: quam, ut, and the coordinating conjunctions afque and ac (sometimes ef). 
 These refer (a) to the relation of intensity (with the antecedents tatn and plus, which is 
 often implied in the form of the comparative of descriptive adjectives, tarn beiiifj 
 
490 
 
 THE COMBINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 MeTidod with the comparative conjunction in the form famquam ; (ft) to the relation of 
 WANN'KR (With the anU-cedents .vjraiid ifa, bt-ini; blendt-d with the comparative conjunc- 
 tion in ihf form nici/f or inctiti ; (c) to the relation of timk, in wliich n-lation the com- 
 parative conjuiicti(»ns an- centrally hiendt-d with the antecedents (poslqiiain. nnNquam, 
 p/'iu'iq'Him, siniii'<i(\ duuilittqKt', the comparative conjiiiu-tion vf Wuvz u-ed without any 
 antecedent', witli the toire ot • H-< soon as ' ) . If the comparative form is nt^ed for any otiier 
 adverbial lelaii n. the relation must be generally expnssed hy combining the required 
 adverbial «lause in its own form with the comparative conjunction, as in the relation of 
 CAi'SE : Mereatonbus est aditiis iini;is eo ut qu:e hello ceperiiit qiiibus veiidatit liabeant, 
 quant quo nllam rem ad se importari desiderent ; They allow access to merch mts more 
 in or.lcr to have persons to whom to sell their h(W)ty than btcause they like any- 
 thiiii? to be imi)orted to their coutttry, Cies. 15. G. 4, 2.— So in reference to tlie relation 
 of fLACK : Non loiii;ius hostes aberant q>nm quo teltim adjid jwsxtf ; The enemy was 
 no farther /A^/// /o reach the place by mis-iles (liteittUy : 'than to which place a mis-ile 
 could be tlirown'. Cjcs. B. G. 2, 21. Even tlie relations of intenstt)/ and jiiannn' am Ire- 
 (\\wni\y separately erpre)iseil,n\{\\o\vX^\ these relations are sulUciently expressed by the 
 antecedents, as ; Si plus edidisset qnam quantum natum esjiet; If he had assessed more 
 (corn) than had been raised. Cie. Verr. 2, 3, 29. Here the relation of intensity U tuice 
 expressed, bv plu^. ..quarn, and by quantum, which mi<;lit have been omitted, as in tlie 
 passa.'e immediately I'ollowiuL,' : (i^iiid si minus dedissel arillor quam poposuisset Apro- 
 
 The comparative form is not tncrely applied to adverbial relatione, but, like the con- 
 ditional form, is a general <rr immitic il form whieh m ly refer to any kind of rela'ions, 
 and to all kinds of clause" and piiiases. Thus the eoinparison «)f ' qualities'' or ' num- 
 bers'" -A^^nmci* ii retaf ice form, as: 'I'li, .Tuii'ter, qui eisi/ m quibus luce nrbs auspirii.< a 
 KoinuU) es eonstitatu- : Thou, O Jupiter, wlio hast (i. e. who-e worship ha-i l>een insti- 
 tuted 'n' Rimiulus under the same ausidres (i. e. of the same kind or quality) as tliis city 
 (i.e. was instituted). Cic. Cat. 1. i-i, :W.— - Totidem quot capita oriirinis erant coloniia 
 missis: So m my colonies havini; l)een sent, «v tlu-re were inother-eities. Liv. 5, 3i.— 
 Thus the coini)at':son by qna/n is <'it>pli(Ml to su'>jeet-(lauses. and olijectclaiises of any 
 form : Mori nuiluit quam <ie his rebus Sullam doitri ; 11^- would die rather tlian have Sulla 
 informed of these iliin-rt» (literally: than " tiiat Sulla should be informed '). Cic. Kosc. A. 
 9_ oj;^_ i>i„s interfiiit reipuhiiea*, caslellnm capi I.i'.:utnm quain bene deft ndi cau.<am .ir. 
 Curii : It was mote in the mtere-t of the republic that a easlle of the Limiri.iiis shuiild 
 be captured than that the trial of M\ Curias bhould bt uell conducted, tic. lir. GO, 
 234. 
 
 Hence ilio adverbial clauses arc treated in fivesecMons: 1) Locat. clauses; 2) Tem- 
 roitAL: 3) Modal ; 4) Conditional; 5) Compauative clauses. 
 
 Oiis. 13. ATTUint'TR-CLAUSEs are tho-:e whose Ecoverninir word is a Nouv. They are 
 an;ilo;::ous toall kinds of an ordinary tittrihute. and may be conceived as attril)utive adjec- 
 tives, as attril)Utive ireiiitives. jis |)repositioiial iittribute-^, or as appositions. Attribute- 
 clauses assume 1) the lorm of a uki.ativk claise. if the jrovernii!": notin is at the same 
 time the jraminatical antecedent, of one of its members. a.«i : Ea jmrs Gceani quiT est ad 
 IIi>paniam. (Aes. li. G. 1,1. Here the !Uttil)ufe ciau-^e is relative, because tluMioiin ;)arx, 
 a meinlier of the principtil S"nience. is the aiilec-deni •)f its siihject. The claiisi- is an- 
 alou'ous to tin attributive iidjeciivt! (tiie lli^jxtnir part of tlie Ocean). Tn * Coni/rn-i. qui 
 sunt 'IVevirOnim clientes', ilie clause has tlie force of an (7;yyy6i>i/io// (.the Condru?i, the 
 clients of ilie Trevirians). 
 
 2) If the iroverninc: noun of the clause is ;jo/ the grammatical antecedent of one of it.s 
 members, the clati-e either takes the same l<u-m <is completing' clau-es (Or.s. 1-7). or as 
 adverbial clauses lOiis. 12). The farmer is tlu' case if tlii' iroverniiiLr noun implies an 
 action such as would require to be completed by a subject-claii"'»', or an oltject-clause if 
 it had the form of a verb. a< Crebri a<l C:e-«arem rumores titVerebantur o//</<Z.v JJelqas con- 
 Jnrdre. I?. G. 2, 1. Jiunu'res. implyinti a verb of sayino, takes its attriimte clause ( = 
 de conjuratiOiie) in the lorin of an iiitiuitive clause. be('!iu<i' the same clause would be 
 required if an ecjuivalent i>rb were u-ed in its place {nuntiubVur. omnls J!rff/a^ ronju- 
 rare).-— Capiunt iieces-*ariuin ro/jNi/i'/zyi ut >iuscipiant ip^i neqolium ( — neijotium ab ipsis 
 suscipiendi). Cic. Verr. 2, 1. .■)4. Here co/t<i7i'///i takes iui Ut-clauso as attrit)ute, because 
 a verb expressiiifj the idea of a 'j)lan ' (as .v/fi/'/* r^) would take the -ame dausi- in the ftuin 
 of an oi)j<'ct-cIau«e. — JudicAvit 'Ywh^ivoracatidnem auiruies ownniniK judi-iis opercm 
 darent{ = vacatiOuem ab judiiH-i) non htibcre ; Tuhero declared that the auL'Ur- had i.o 
 immunity f I om servinq as jmlqea. Cic. lirut. 31, 17. Because verbs of j'xemptinur^Take a 
 completing: object-clause \\\\\\ qmnninus (see p. (»02, f)). the noun racatio, in the mtaninj; 
 * exe//ipfion\ takes an attrihtite-chiuse in the same form. For examples of aitrihule- 
 clauses 111 the Ibrm of an interioj,'ative clause, see p. 3*.»1, Ons. 4. 
 
 3) Clauses introduced by ADVEKr.tAL conjunctions maybe made the attributes of those 
 nouns (.or of their equivalents; which represent llie dillereiit adverbial relations, as /fWi- 
 
 THEORY OF SENTENCE- COMBINATION. 
 
 491 
 
 pus, modus, causa, consilium (purpose). In this instance the clause almost ah^ ays has a 
 5et;rn\inative lorm-adjective as syndetic antecedent, which, being ^""^''«^ as tUnbtf^ 
 t<. the .roverniii-' n..un shows the attributive nature of the clause : as : Accept t ajrium 
 temponbm eis qvum jacCrent pretia i)riediOrum ; He obtained the held t/* those tf^suhen 
 the prices of real estiite were down (at the time oj low pnces). Cic. Itosc^ C. 12 - bectl- 
 tum est illud tempus quum me ad I'otnpejum prolicisci othcium nieum coe-it ; 1 hen loi- 
 lowed the time when my duty compelled me to repair to Pompey ( = \^"'P"^ PJ/^'^f^'^- 
 nis ollicinsa-). Cic. Fam. 11, 27.- Voluptatis partis hocmodo descrlbunt w/* maleyokn- 
 tia sit voluptas ex maloalicrlus; beiievoleniia etc. ; They divide pleasure in this way 
 (thus) that malice is (defined as) pleasure derived from another perse ms misfortune ; De- 
 nevolcnceetc ( = modus deliniendi voluptatem etc.). Cic. Tusc.4,l«. 20.- Enxnt ejusmodt 
 ( z= ejus modi) situs oppidorum, vt ncqiie pedibus aditum haberenr, neque navibus ; 
 The sites of the town were of that kind (such)a.s to have neither an access by land nor 
 by water Oes. B. G. 3. 12 ( = hoc niodo sita erant ut etc.).- Mansit in \>'dCio usque ad 
 evm finem rf«/« judices rejecti sunt; lie abided by the agreement vp to the time-jmnt 
 that (literally ' till ') the judges were rejected. Cic. Verr. 1, «, 16. The clause dum . .svnt 
 is an attribute of Hnl^ (end-point of time), the conjunction dum (till) bein<^ used to ex- 
 press the adverbial relation designated by « /t//M '. The words ' usqne ad eumjinem 
 mi-'ht have been omitted, or be replaced by 'usque eo\ In either instance the clause 
 would be adrerhiid; but being made dependent on the governing noun Unern, the expo- 
 nent of its adverbial relation, it has assumed the grammatical lorm ot an attribute- 
 clause. 
 
 The noun locus, as exponent of the relation of ' place', and all nouns represented as 
 localities, frequently lake attributive clauses in the form of adverbial relative clauses 
 (introduced by one t»f the locative adverbs). See § GlO. 
 
 Obs. 14. Any sentence expiessing the idea of a fact may be treated in every re?pect 
 like an ontinahj substantive, and t)e placed in every grammatical relation and lorm of 
 which a substantive is su-ceptible. These sentences, which are called fact-clauses, 
 are geiier.dlv introduced bv quod (but sometimes by ut. s(;e p. (i05), taking the syndetic 
 ant<'C»-dent (Obs. 1.5) id (sometimes hoc. illud, ea res, ilia res. ilia causa), lo these ante- 
 cedents of the fact-clause all the ditierent kinds of inllettion are applied which a sub- 
 stantive would take if used in place of the fact-clause. Hence lacl-dauses may stand 
 in till- relation l)of a puiuect (in wh ch instance the predicates are not conhned to the 
 regular impersonal verbs, Obs. 4, l)iit may consist of az-y verb) ; 2) ot a TiiANsiTiVE, 
 
 INTKANSITIVE, or I'UEPOSITIONAL OB.II.CT ; 3) of a S^B^TA^T1VE-ATTK1BUTE. 1 he SyndCt- 
 
 ic antecedent (id, hoc. Ulud) may be left out when the clause is m the relation o! a sub- 
 ject, a transitive object, or of an attribute. Fact-clause- are mostly rendered by the 
 fact that ', or by a simple That-clause. 
 
 1. Subject kact-clauses : Curam acuWatquod adversus Latinos bellandum erat : Tfie 
 fact that a war must be waged against the Latins, made iheir anxiety intense. Liv\ S, 6. 
 — Suspectum Alexandrum fecit quod Pelusii validum priesidium relictum erar ; 1 he fa at 
 (it) made Alexander suspected that a strong garrison had been left at Peltisium. Liv. 45, 
 11.— (^//rt^i totaSicilia. V//0*/ oinnes Siculi . . .Komie sunt, uihilne idvatefM? Isitot yio 
 immtia nee. thai thewholeof Sicilv, that all the Sicilians. . .are at Rome? Cic. \ err. 
 1, 7._ Xon ea res me deterruit quod tu ad me nullas litteras miscras ; Thejact that you 
 had sent no letter to me di<l not deter me. Cic. Fam. G, 22, 1.- Datum hoc iiostro generi 
 tst ut Itiendis jiericulis ptiblicis piacula simus ; It is the fate of (literally : it is given to) 
 our race to be. (that we are) the sin-oU'erings for expiating public dangers. Liv. 10, 28. 
 
 2. Fact-clausfs as tiiansitive objects : Miseriie nostne /?76?mc*^^worf a VibOne dis- 
 Attributt 
 
 cessimiis ; Attribute to our ui.happv condition the fact that we left Vibo (or ' our leay 
 ill" Vibo"). Cic. Att. 3. 4.— Nisi hoc iiidiL^num putas quo'l vestltum sedeie in judicK 
 viiles quern tu e patrimonioexpulisti ; Unless you think i/an indignity thatxhn man whon 
 you have driven Irom his propertv, is sitting (still) with clothes in the Court. Cic. Rose. 
 A. 50 [Here the clause 'quod. . .rides' is the transitive object of putas, and at the same 
 
 icio 
 m 
 
 * The .'raminaiians genctally consider Ut-claiises of this kind as governed by ' hoc / 
 but the demonstrative adjective «:overnstlie Ut-clause as little as it governs the Quum- 
 clause and the Du)nclau.<e in the other passages quoted. The clauses evidently depend 
 a- aitribute<on the nouns which aie the exponents of those adverbial relatiims that 
 are expressed by this same kind of clause-*. With the form 'hoc 7/wdo\ the Ut-clau-e 
 is an attribute-clause ; but if its equivalent ita is used in its stead, the clause is an ad- 
 verbial modal clause, in the same way as forti in 'foHi 77iodo jrugnare' is an attribute, 
 but in the form ' for tiler pugnare ' becomes an adverb. 
 
I 
 
 492 
 
 THE COMBINATION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 THEORY OF SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 
 
 493 
 
 latter wcro an ordinary isubstantivo : the syndetic antecedi^nt iUa, with w\[\c\\ anCiqva 
 ai^rees, havini; assiuim-d ihc form of u neutiT plural].— si tihj f«)i tiliui non deiiit >it patre 
 ccrto nat^corCTo, at natura ei'ite dedit ut hmnanililtis non i):iniiii liai»C'r<'> ; If late did not 
 grdnt yon (the chance) to he born of a Iciritiinato latluT, nature uL least has granted you 
 (thef^iit) o/ iiupirient education. Cic. l{o^c. A. 15, 46. 
 
 3. Fact-clausks as ablative objects: Cum maj^no nssensn audit us est, non niagis ,o 
 quod inultitndinein no.xfl levilliaf, (iiiam qwnl cn\],r,un in aiiclorcs vi-ricrat; lie was lirani 
 with f,'reat favor, as inucii (no inoreiy'/w/t fhe/dr'f [cunsc) f/i<if lie relieved the people from 
 a «grievance, as (from the lact) ''//«/ li«* had hrouijflit home the fault to its authors. Li v. 4."), 
 10. [Krom this form of the Fact-clause ico (/nod), the orii^in of the cans(U Ouod-claus«'s 
 must be derived, which is made evident by the jibove-mentioned passao^e.]— lloc fo(=/^/</ 
 i^/)t^pi ciril)al lit Pythiam a Ptiilippo eorrui)tam diceret : This referred to the fact that 
 Pylhia, accurdiui; to his opinion, was bribed by Piiilip. Cic. Div. 2,57, 11«. 
 
 4. Fact-claitses as puErosiTioNAL ob-jects: Hoc er to intelliiri potest qnod voi? do 
 eil re Jud!( a'e non debetis ; This may be nndt'rstood. />"r>//i the fact tliat yon t^hould not 
 take coj;ni/.ancc in this matter. Cic. Cicc. :^5, 102. — Videt sibi ^/^ fo 7//0(/consensi-rit cau- 
 eain esse dicendam : He sees tinit he will be j)laced under trial for the fact that he con- 
 6j)ireil {for coji.<jiui/if/. vvliich could not be exprc.<sod by ^ de consent ierido', because; the 
 gerundiul would not refer to a /)(tf)t fact). — Avitus pro eo qno<l fe suorum municipuui 
 comnuxlis na'um esse arbitrabfitur. voluntati Larinatium dees.^^e nohiit : Avitus, in ac- 
 cordance u'lth the fact that lie tlioiu'ht himself to be born for the interests of his towns- 
 nuMi, did not wish to o|)pose the wishes of the Larinatians. Cic. ("In. \'^, 4;i — (Jratiam 
 qui refert habet, et qui habet. in eo ip^o (/nod habet, refert ; Who returns thanks feels 
 thanUlul (has thanks), and who feels thankful returns thanks in the very fact that hefeeU 
 thankful. Cic. Plane. ;2S, (iS*. 
 
 5. Attuibutive Fact-clacsks : Etiam hanc 7fiole<fiam n-^i^^mo quod mihi non solum 
 pro Planciodicendum est. Red etiam |)ro me; I assume also tlie burden of beini; obliged 
 to speak not only for Plancins, ))nt for myself. Cic. Plane. 1. :^ [In altribntive fact-clauses, 
 the antecedent agrees in trender, number, and case witli the j^overnini; noun ot the lact- 
 clause. which, as an attrilnite, irenerally nn-ans 'consistiui; in the fact that'].— Num 
 «'tiam recentiuin inji/riaram qaod \tx'r \H'r jjrovincium ]H'r vi:n temj)tassent, memoriam 
 de])onere posse? Could he also lori^et their recent wron>js (con>istinLr in the fact) that 
 Ihey had violently attempted the march throui;h the province * CuiS. li. G. 1, 11. 
 
 Obs. 1."». Synoetic avtecedknts of a clause aretho>e form-adjectives or form-adv<-rb3 
 of the detlniie form, which mark t he Lrrammatical function of «he clause as member of a 
 phrase of the principal sentence. Tli«'se demonstrative form-words repre<eid. a< it w<-re, 
 their clauses in the principal sentence, and alwavs have the same frrammatical relation 
 (as subject, object, attribute) to the members of the piincipal sentence, as the clause of 
 which they are the antecedents. Hence the relation of the clause may be always deter- 
 mined by th it of the syndetic^ antecedent. Since! the svndi-tic antecedi-nts are idi-ntical 
 with their clause*, they hare not to them the relation of a iroveridni; woid to its depend- 
 ent word in a phra«^e, and must be disiiny'uished Irom the grammatical anfeced'-nt of a 
 relative clause, which irenerallv is at th« same time its jjoverninij noun. Tiius in 
 ''eo die qi/o adera" ", the noun * die ' is the okammatical antec»*dent. and the jroverning 
 noun ol the attributive clause 'quo aderas ' ; but eo is its syndetic antecedent, which by 
 its form as a.ttribute of dies represents the clause as attributive**. 
 
 1. Si:b.tect a!Hl completing; OiUECT-ci.AtTSEs take the neuter absolute demonptratives 
 (id, hoc, ill "d) as syndetic antecedents: Non id spectandum est quid dlcat ; we mii-t 
 nor rei^ard wliat he says. Cic. ()(}". :j. :5:i (,in inlerroiralive subject-clause, different from the 
 relative ■ ill., .quod dlclt'). —Hoc tibi nuimjuam criinino-'um lore |)utasti,r(/*^/([/77//to/6»co 
 tifji cedificari nwein? Did you never think (that) it would be made a charge against you 
 that at a most frequentnl {dace a ship n-a-< f>uilt for you ? VU'. Veir. 'i. ;">, 18.— An hoc 
 dubitfibit quisquam (fuin. is venfilem in Sicilia jurisiliciirinem habiicrii iiiii etc. ? Will any- 
 one doubt that he had a vena! jtnisdiction in Sicily who etc.? Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 48.-- In 
 place of the neuter absolute a noun of ireneral import (res. ratio etc.) may be used, in 
 which instance the demonstrative airrees with it in gender, case, and number, as : Non 
 ea res me detcrruit quod (inst. of ' Non iil me deterruit quod '). Cic. Kam. fi. 2-2, 1. Some- 
 times the absolute neuter demonstratives are used in tlu; plural: His subsidiis m i«um 
 
 ♦The oblique Quod-clauses (p. 388. On». 1, b) must be considered as» oriL'inal Fact- 
 clause-i. whicli is evident from tiie following jias-age : Sunt qui in eo quoque aiu^icinm 
 ejus reprehtndant quod, quantum coinmodum fuerit frumenti, detraxerit. Cic. Verr. 2, 
 1,4. 
 
 ** The syndetic antecedents of relative clauses are generally called ''correlafireft\ but 
 their nature is in no respect different from that of the other pyndetic antecedents, and 
 there is no reason why they should be designated by a separate name. 
 
 flssecQlu»?/^ ex alienissimis gociif» amicissimos. ..redderem ; By these resources I suc- 
 ci'cded in making our most reluctant allies our most attached friends (liierally: I ob- 
 tained these things that I niacle etc.). Cic. Fam. 15, 4. 14. — Not rarely bojh subject and 
 object-clauses take the adverbial antecedents nic and ita with the force of hoc and itlud, 
 which is a grammatical anomaly, but sanctioned by usage, as : Sic a majoribus puis ac- 
 ceperant, fanta jwiiuli Rornani in Shulos ^sse beneficia at etc.; They had received tlds tra- 
 dition Irom their ancestors that the benffilswluch the Koman people had conferred on the 
 Sicilians iceie so great that etc. Cic. Verr. 2, 2. ."i. — Sic ego existimo, in s^mwio itnjM-ra- 
 tore quatuor reses}:eojx)7t?re ; I hold that a great captain must hare four qualities. Cic. Leg. 
 M. 10,28. So with interrogative clauses: A V(d)is i^a arhitror spectari oportere, ^«/«///i 
 ha'C enrum jiidicio, qui stiidiGsi sunt harum rerum. cfstimentur ; I believe that you must 
 take thaf //rie-e into consideration at which these things are valued by experts. Cic. Verr. 
 2, 4, 7 (literally 'at what price these things are valued by those, who apply themselves 
 to those thinjr-). — (Jenerally, the subject-clauses and the completing object-clauses are 
 used without any syndetic antecedents. 
 
 2. Advei{biai- CLAi'SES OF PLACE take the demonstrative (definite) forms of the four 
 cases of ]f>cative form-adverbs as syndetic antecedents (ibi, inde, to, ed etc.). See p. 210, 
 No. 2, and p. 575. 
 
 3. Apvekbiat. clauses op time if introduced by qvnm take the antecedent tvm, as : 
 Tnm qunm hello sociOrum tola Italia arderet. C. Norlmnus in sumnio otio f uit ; ^yhen 
 (literally Tlien whf7t\ all Italy was in flames during the social war, Norbanus lived in the 
 deepest i)eace. Cic. Verr. 2. 2, 5. The combination turn. ..quvm someiimes involves a 
 comparative relation ( = eodein tevqx)re quo) as : Quibus in i)rovin(iis omnia fana dej)o- 
 pulaius est turn quutti in Cn. Dolabellam seeing snum renovflvit qurestorium : In these 
 provinces he despoiled all temples at the same time when he repeate'd aL'ainst Dolabella 
 that crime which he had committed as quiestor. Cic. Verr. 1, 4, 12. If quum refers to the 
 time oi the speaker, it takes the antecedent nunc in place of turn {nunc . . .qinnn = now 
 that), as : Nunc vero qautn sit nnus Cn. Pompejus qui etijim antiqiiitiliis rnemoriara vir- 
 IQte snperarit, qua? res est etc.; But nmv that then; is only the one Pompey who has 
 surpassed by his great qualities even the deeds of antiquity etc. Cic. L«'g. M. 10. 27. — 
 J}um and quoad (in the meaninL' ////) take the antecedent usque or vsque eo, as : Vf^qve eo 
 se tenuit quoad a Poinpejo ad enm leuHti vei erniit; He held hiniselt (np to the time) till 
 ambassadt rs came to him from Poinpey. Cic. Dej. 4, 11. Dujn in the nuaning 'as long 
 as' takes the antecedent ta?ndiu. and sometimes usque, as : Ne tamdiu quidem domi- 
 nus erif duni depatrismorieqiia^rjltur ? Can he not be the owner (of hi ^ house) even so long 
 as the investigation on his father's death is lasting 'i Cic. Bosc. A. 28. 78. — Usque dam 
 per meliciierit: .\sloniras I shall allow. Cic. Veir. 2, 1. 5.— Those temporal conjunc- 
 tions which are properly comparative, take their antecedents according to the rules of 
 comparative clauses, as tamdiu .. quamdiu (see ' comparative clauses'). According to 
 these rnh'^ii po-^tquam. anteqnam. priasquam, siimdatque etc. should not take any antece- 
 dents because in 'postquam'' ]}ost itself is the antecedent of quam ( = later than). But 
 this original meaniuL'' o\ postqiiatn was not felt, and houco po.-tquam not rarely takes the 
 anteceeient turn, which strictly is an nngran niaiicaland illogical con.bination. Postqnam, 
 however, 'ii\\\ti\<. prec^ des this antecedent in the form of a protasis, so that turn, when- 
 ever it i< used, introduces the apodosis. as : PostqiKim non resisti videt, et hand dubiara 
 lassitudinem esse, turn collectis omnibus subsidiis IciriOnes concitilvit ; After (when) he 
 saw that no resistance was made, aid that their state of indi'lence was unquestional)le, 
 (the'n) he roused the leiiions after collecting all the auxiliary troops. Liv. 10, 29. Com- 
 pare : Liv. 25. 10; 2'".. 5 ; 1, 54 ; 22. 48; 2S, 48. The other tehiporal conjunctions of the 
 comparative form take no other antecedents but those contained in themselves. 
 
 4. For the antecedent of modal clauses see p. 4-3.5. Obs. 2. — If modal clauses of man- 
 ner or intensity are in the relation of an attkibitte, their antecedents, as those of all 
 the attributive clauses, take thi- form of an adjec'ive (the demonstratives is, hie. ille. talis, 
 beimr used in clauses of manner, and the quantitative tantus in clauses of intensity) ; 
 as : /(7a definitio jiidicirjrum aquOium rotineatur ?// et sine invidijl ciili)a plectatnr, et 
 sin<« culpa invidia ponStur ; Let that character of equity-trials be retained, that guilt be 
 punished without liate. and hate be slopped without guilt. Cic. Clu. 2. 5. — //oc jure s;int 
 socii. vt eis ne dei)lorare (I'lidem de siiis incommodis liceat. Cic. Verr. 2. 2. 27.— Tahin 
 accei)erant injnriam quain (i. e. ut earn ; qualem would make the clause comparative) 
 nulin leire satis (iilmic persequi i)ossent. Cic. Verr. 2, 1. :^2. Instead of talis frequently 
 tlie form of a qualitative genitive with modus and thedeuionstrative i.9 iejusinodi)'\^ used, 
 where ejus is the syndetic antecedent of the clause and ' modi^ \\* governiiiL'' noun : 
 Statuisti exemplnm ejusmodi quod ( = ut id) acerbum omnibus atque intolerandum 
 videretiir. C\c. Aerr. 2, 2, 45. This form of the qualitative genitive is frequently used 
 predicatively, like ordinary predicate-irenitives. where the Ut-clause logically has the 
 force of a predicate-genitive, but grammatically is the attribute of "modi \ ejus being its 
 
1 
 
 494 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF LELATIYES. 
 
 495 
 
 they form the jjrota^i*» (sec 'Conditional clauses'). But, if merely .,......., ...^ ...v , 
 
 cation, tlicv somctinics taU<' the; antecedent ifa, and if referrin;^' to fi/tie, the antecedent 
 titrn. as: lioe veiienienter te roiro, sed ifd .vi, quod e;,'o iressi, non contemnendmn vid<;- 
 bitur; This I ask earnestly of y<>n, Ij'/f on tin amdlthm that (if. = provided that) yon do 
 not con.^ider my aciy as indifterent. Cic. Fani. 14, 4, \\.— Id ei,'o .ve fallo, tuia te qua'so, 
 Atnphitniniii ut, seinper iriltus sies ; Jf I deceive, tluii I pray thee to l)e always ani,'ry 
 with Amphitruo. Plant. Aiupli.3, 2, 52.— Ihec fi ai:es et sentie», turn eris nia;,Mius con- 
 sul. Cic. Fani. 10. »'•.— .S'i/^ (junra potnero. non ven'ero. tutu erit iniinlens. Ih. Att. 9, 2a, 
 2.— Tamrxdi te seribain plura .^i erit belluin. lb. 7, 17. 4.— Tmn neviuiequain Capitoliuni 
 fervaverim n civein nienni in gervitfltein duel videain. Liv. f», 14. C'onip. Cic. Att. 7, 
 "" ' Div. 1.44. Rose. Am. 7; il). 4!».--- If conditional clauses are at tlie same time 
 
 The syndetic an tec 
 cere, dwere < 
 9.10.11). 1 
 
 I'tc.) wliich lorm ilie ^'raniniiitical predicate of tiie principal sentence (Obs 
 \f. lu. ii;. i'liey both denote the i^'ramniatical function of the chiuse as that of the pre 
 dicafe, and indicate the general kind of ilie action desii/uated by the clause. l>y antici- 
 ])atin!.r the pjcneral verbal idea of the clause, in the same way as the adjective and adver- 
 bial antecedents indicate tlie <:eneral idea of the adverbial rehition of their clauses. 
 
 Hence tlie U-rm for/n-rer/j.s- may l)e applied to these verl>s in the 
 other antecedents are liinncd J'urm-ai(jcctutfi, ixiid fonn-udit ib.< . 
 
 :>unie mauner as Ihe 
 
 ClIAriKR SECOND. 
 
 PtKLATlVE CLAUSES. 
 
 I. CLASSIFICATION OF TIIE RELATIVES, AXD RELATIVE 
 
 CLAUSES. 
 ^tiil. Relative CLAUSES are those wliicli are introduced by a rela- 
 tive adjective or adverb (§ Gl'3),the tbrmer belon<^ini; to tlie attuibutive 
 (/?. 3, Ors. 13). and tlu; latter to the adverbial clauses (7^ 3, Obs. 12)*. 
 
 * Relative clauses have a donl)Ie nature, because every relative adjectiv»* or adverV) in- 
 volves two elements: 1) that of a connkc tivk. namely the relative (ori;:inally * interrotra- 
 tive ') root ni ; and 2> that of a rorm-adj«'ctive. or form-adverb. Jn determii in*; tiie irram- 
 matical relation of relaii\e clauses, the •connective'' element must be di>re<rarded. and 
 the question whetherrelative clauses are to be classed as att rihntive or as adverbial clauses 
 must be decided by the adjective or adverbial element, and not by the connective element 
 of the rel.itive word. Ilenceclauses introduced by relative «/^//Vr/j/vx (as far as tliey belbuij 
 to the rtgnlar lelative clau-^es ; seeOiis. 2» must be classed as atlrit/xfire d.iu-es. since 
 they, ^grammatically, are diri'ctly dependent on a noun expressed or understood, which 
 appears as a grammatical antecedent. This is even then the case if the connective element 
 of the relative performs the function of an adverbial atn junction (Obs. 2). On the otlier 
 hand, relative clauses introduced by adcerbs (except in the case mentioned Oes. 1), must 
 
 Every attributive relative clause is dependent on a substantive (noun, 
 or pronoun) of the jirincipal sentence as its grammatical antecedent, by 
 which it is governed like an ordinary attribute. The adverbial relative 
 clauses are dependent on the tredicate or on a non-finite verb of the 
 principal sentence, chiefly denoting the adverbial relation of place, and 
 
 exceptionally the relations of time, and manner (§ 616). 
 
 Obs. 1. If relative clauses, introduced by relative adverbs, are dependent on a noun, 
 the introducini; adverb always has the force of a relative adjective after a prepositioti. 
 Such relative clauses, beinf; {xoverned by a novn, are considered as attribvtire. and not 
 as adverbial, the t^mne as attributive clausei* introduced by temporal or modal conjunc- 
 tions (Hetn. 3, Obs. 1.3), as : Romulum Jiemumque cupldo cepii in eis locis ubi ( = in 
 quibus) expositi erant, urbis condeuda\ Liv. 1, 6. See 'Local clauses *. 
 
 Obs. 2. Clauses introduced by a relative adjective which has the force of an adverbial 
 conjunction combined ivith a demonstrative adjective (as qui = vt if), are graintnatically 
 attributive clauses, although they are lo<jically adverbial, as : Verres Messanam »\h'\ nr- 
 btin deleirerat qunm ( = vteam) haberet adjutrlcem sceleruni ; Verres had chosen thecity 
 of }fe.<sana for the purpose of having it as assistant in his crimes. Cic. Verr. 2, 5, G2. 
 i'he Latin conception of the relative a<ljeciives and adverbs was different from ours, in 
 as much as they felt, more distinctly than we do, the two elements contained in tlie rela- 
 tiv»' (namely tlie c»)nneciive, represented by the root qu, and the determinative, rei)re- 
 sented by is), as two diflerent relations. From this tact several apparent anomalies 
 must be explained : 1) tlie ability of the languaire to assign to the connective element 
 the force ot ditlerent conjunctions ; 2) in that construction which is called 'involution 
 of the relative ', in which the connective and the determinative element refer to differ- 
 ent diiuses (-ee Ji. 13) ; 3) in the capacity of the language to use relatives in certain in- 
 stances without substantive antecedents (7^ S). and e ven ■without anij antecedents 
 
 for t he following reasons be classed as adverbial clauses. Relative clauses ini roduced by ad- 
 verbs express the advtrfAal idta of j)lace (§54(j foil.) (exceptionally also that of time and 
 manner), which is attached to a verb (generally the predicate) of the principal sentence. 
 Thi-i m;ikes the clau>e an adverbial ofjject of that verb, in the same manner as an 
 ordinan/ adverb of place, lime, etc., according to the definition of adverbs «riven p. 
 215, A'. 1. Since itie grammatical class of the; clause is determined by its relation to its 
 governing word in the principal sentence, it follows that clauses introduced by relative 
 adverbs mu^t be considered as adverbial (object-)clauses (7^. 2). It is true that in their 
 syndetic a/it<ct dents {i/,i—ubi) a noun of general import (denoting * place') is always in- 
 v<»lved as tiie exponent of the adverbial idea represented by the clause, and hence it 
 might seem that such relative clauses should be considered as *■ attiifrutes' of that noun, 
 as: Ibi constitit ulti signa asj)exit, = eo loco in qvo signa aspcxit. But such nouns, as 
 the expot cuts of the adverbial idea, and conceived as being in sin adverbial ca^e (accor- 
 ding to the explanation p. 215, Ii. 1) are involved in «•^/-y ordinary adverb. If we con- 
 sider this kind of clauses as attrif/utes of the f)oun representin<r its adverbial idea, then 
 everv ordinary adverb must be likewi>e considered as an «///^6//^« of this noun. This 
 would neither be in accordance with the phrase-theory followed in this grammar, nor in 
 accordance with the dilVerent logical and grammaticrd character of attributive and ad- 
 verbial adjuncts.— Fnun these arguments itwiil appear thftt the relative advertjs ])t'Tf(>rm 
 the same i^ranimatical function in reg.iid to the relation of the clause, as the adverbial 
 conjunctions (quuvi. vt. dum etc.). and, indeed, some grammarians have classed every 
 relJitive adverb among the conjunctions. From a merely l(»gical standpoint these gram- 
 marians ai(^ perlectly right, the distinction between both classes of words bcinga merely 
 formal or grammatical one [quunt havini: the force of eo te/njyore quo, and id ot eo modo 
 quo). But there is this grammatical diflerence between both classes t*f connectives, that 
 the relative adverbs are always inembers of their own clause, being the adverbial objects 
 of the governing verb in the' c/aw^^ (while the M'/to/^ clause is the adverbial object of a 
 verb in the principal sentence). This is not the case with the adverbial conjunctions 
 quuni. dnni etc.. ' which are vurdy connectives, containing no reco<:nizable determina- 
 tive element, nor forminir an object in the clause which they introduce. Oi-iginally they 
 may iiave been relative (or rather inierroi:ative) adverbs, and some of them (as w6i, 
 quando, vt) are actually used both as adverbs, and as conjunctions. But in the literary 
 period of the language, the character of these connectives as adverbs \\a» no longer/c/^, 
 and a distinL:ui>liing line was drawn between them in the conception of those that used 
 the language. Hence adverbial conjunctions cannot, as the relative adverbs, be used as 
 interrvgatire adverbs, unless they have actually preserved tlie double nature of conjunc- 
 tions and adverbs (as quando. ubi, ut). 
 
49G 
 
 RELATrV^E CLAUSES. 
 
 (R. S, Obs. 7), in wliich instance the relative pcntencos lo^e the nature of claupes, passing 
 over into that ot iiKlcpeiident sentences.— Advcrhial clau-cs of place air sonu-timi-s 
 nitioduc-ed by r.laiive adverl>s which tiave the lorcc of an adnrbial modal conjunctinn 
 mended with a local ive deinonsitrative adverh. Such clans.'s. being always diMx-micnt on 
 r*M/«,j, must be <7/w/////f//iw//// considered as attiihutivelncalelanscs (like tli<»(.' nitiitionrd 
 in Ob?*. IK but kujicalhj as advi-rhial modal clauses, as: Hex 'J'heini>tocli Lamih^uonii 
 donarar mxle { = vt Ir.de) vmiiin sunieret; The king liad pn-senled 'riieini>toclfs wiih 
 the city of Lampsac'is in ordtr to take his www from l/nre. Nep. Them. 10.— Unum itt-r 
 trat per Seqiiano!?, cn-iistiuii et difficile, vix qua singuli cirri ducerentur; Tiie one 
 road lay thronirh the territory of the Sequani. narrow and inii)racticable fo that oidy 
 one vehicle could pass it at a time. Cies. B. G. !. G [The locative adverb qua, with its de- 
 terniinanve element (^(7) refers to the antecedent ittr ; but its conueclive element refers 
 to the predicate •a)i(jUi<lum trat\ describing its modality]. 
 
 Obs. :i Coniparativeclausesformasubdivisionof the relative clauses and beion"- ac- 
 cordiiig to the relative by which they are introduced, eiiher to the attributive, or to the 
 adverhial rciative dances. Since they have many i)eculiarities which are not found in 
 the ordinary relative clauses, they are treated in a particular chapter, bein.r eon^dered 
 here only so tar as they are eubject to the same general rules pertainiiK' to all relative 
 clauses. •"' 
 
 Rem. 4. Kolativo adjectives beloncr to any of the fivecla.sses of form-ad- 
 jectives (P. I., Ji 241 ; i^ OGD), and relative adverbs to the first four classes. 
 Ihey are: 1) Dkteuminative class: qui; 2) Numkhal class: qnot ; 
 tj) QrANTiTATiVE class : <piantu.% and its diminutive quuuiulus (alvvavs 
 implying a small amount); 4) Qualitative class: qualis ; 5) Possess- 
 ive c-lass : ciijus, a, wn. These relatives are either doubled.or compounded 
 with cunque.io introduce the ' indetinite' relative clauses (seeOlJS. 7 foil.), 
 corresponding to the English compounds with ' ever ', as qiti,sqifi,s ; (who- 
 soever), quidqmd (whatsoever), quotquot, qvai.iiiHjvahtvs, qvaU.squaliS 
 (postclassical) ; quicanqiie, quoteunque, q>ianfu!^cunquc\ qudliscunqut', (an 
 indetinite possessive being not formed from cuja.s). To the tirst four of 
 these classes correspond relative adverbs, namely 1) in the determina- 
 tive class: the locative form-adverbs nbi, v/ide,' quo, nu(\ qxa (with the 
 compounds quorsutn and qmtfe/ius, vhtcuiiqne, iihiubi :ind the similarly 
 lormed compounds of the other locatives), and the compounds qwnnodo 
 and q>temiuhn(>du),),vi\\\\ the indf finite relatives qHommlocunquexmiX quo- 
 quumodo ; 2) for the nimekal class qi/oft\.i and qftotusciinqur ; S) for the 
 quantitative class the neuter adverbial forms quantum, with the com- 
 pound quaniopere; 4) for the qualitative class the rare qualiter (not oc- 
 curring in classical prose). 
 
 To these belong as syndetic antecedents (correlatives) the different 
 loim-adjcctivesatidtorm-adverbs of the definite form, namely ]) the de- 
 monstkativeb/5, hie, iilc, istc, and i(h'w, and the locative adverbs of the deti- 
 iiite lorm (p. 210, No. 2; ; 2) the numekals M, totnlnn, and the adverb 
 Mies; 8) the quantitatives tintus, tmtusdem with the tulverbs hiniunu 
 tantu7ndem, ami ta,itope?r; 4) the qualitatives ialu^, aud the postclas- 
 sical and rare adverb taliter. 
 
 Obs. 1 The determinative relative r/^/i corresponds to the En-lish relatives who whirh 
 ad tfint. except if qm has the antecedent Ulem, when it is rendered •«..' ,s,.e • Uo. art 
 tive C lauses ). An om,s.s,on of the n-lative, as ,„ Kngli>h when the re aiiv,. i> t ^o 
 oUjectiye ca.se, ,s not admis>,l>le as : Dum miUtes q.nl iwperaierat convenlren Tm 
 
 u so Uln-rs he had onlered would assemble (>u.t ' miHfe. imilrareraf convemrenl '). t4s 
 B. Ci. 1, ..— i'or the rendering ol the relative ' u'/uK ' see A'. <i, Obs. a. 
 
 Obs. 2. The diial form utfr i». relatively u-ed onlv with tin; force o7 Ht,rcvnoup hrhvC 
 ovwfu,s<Hrer of the tu-o).nH: U.nun vtro i.ti nohnnus. altero est uten m Sw^-^ 
 q; the^e tiro we relii.^e to use, we must use the other. Cic. S.-st. n.-FtrZ !^r u^^^^^^^^ 
 disset, verum oracultira fuisset; Whichsoenr of the two a//e/-«a/m would Im^^^^^^ ha., 
 pened, It would have been a Hue oracle. Cic. D'iv 2 56 """"""''^^ ^^*^'"" "'^^^ I'^^P- 
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF RELATIVES. 
 
 497 
 
 The relative? of the numeral, quantitative, and qualitative classes (and some- 
 
 7chi(h (iminber) he con.-idered sufficient for conveying two legions. C;es. B. G. 4, 22. 
 
 nwdi are f re- 
 
 terdavsaid ini'dit be«levised even in regard to the civil law. Cic. Or. 2. V.K Ki. Similarly 
 in place of the postclassical qualitative adverb qualiter, the determinative compounds 
 with modus iquomodo, quemadmodum) are used. 
 
 OB* 5. The relative adjective of the i>os?essive class, cnju,", a, vm (renderrd by the 
 i),,w<,.w:sive case icho.-<i) is sometimes u-ed in anteclassical language, and in old legal for- 
 milas Mith th.> lorce of the genitive c?/yt/AM)f the relative (?^«', as genitive of the possessor 
 (^ 4(if,) «-enerally with the svndetic antecedent ix, as : Ilia cor.sueitido. in pnediis ven- 
 diindis oniniiini con-ulum. censurum, pra'tOrum, ut in optima conditiOne sit is cifja res, 
 cujum periculnm: That usaire. at the i)ublic sale of real-estate, of all consuls, censors, 
 ami inictors. that he to whom the jiropeity. to whom the risk belongs, is in the 'best con- 
 dition ' a. e. is favored i)y the law). Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 54.— Argentum, p.-o amlnlbus. ciij(B 
 erant domino dedi : I have iriveti t)ie nionev for both (female slaves) to the master to 
 whom thev belonged. I'laiitV Hud. :i 4. 40. Comp. Plant. Pseud. 4, 4. 5.— It is also used 
 by Plautii/in conneetion with t he ablative cau^d {cuja causa, for whose sake), and in Cic. 
 Fniirm. Var. (probably in the language of an old legal formula) as ablative of interest 
 (tiufd iutijfidt, whose interest it was). 
 
 Obs. fi. In the infi-kction of the relative (and interrogative) adjective qi/i. the forms of 
 the second declensii.n are mingled with those of the third. Theor.ginal characteristic of 
 the second declension appears in the f.»rms quo (abl. sing.), quorum (tret:, \i\nr.), quos (ace. 
 I)liir.). and in the anteclassical Un-m^quojus (inst. o\cujus), and qvoi (inst. cf c?/i).— In place 
 »if tlie ablativ*' sin<:. r^z/o (rarely for the feminine (^»/f7) the form yy/7 is sometimes used, 
 mostly with the i)rej)ositlon cihti (qujcum = cum quo). Archaic forms after the third 
 declension are found in the nominative and accusative plural {ques or queis, inst. ol qtji 
 or q-'os). and in dat. and abl. iilur. (r/^m- or (y/z^ix instead of quiOus, sometimes found in 
 . v4.,|),,j,,| _ If tin- relative qui is used as prepositional object, it sometimes ]/recedes the 
 pre|)Osition, as Causa, qua de ante dictum est ; The subje<t ^ of ichich it has been spoken 
 before' d. e. the subject mentioned before). Cic. Inv. 2, 23, 70.— De eo ciimine quo de 
 ai-'iiitur; On the crime concrrninq which the accu^aiion is made (i. <>. on the crime 
 charired). Cic. Inv. 2, 11, 87.— Ille quern contra veneras; He against uhom you had ap- 
 peared. Cic. Mur. 4.— Leges qvas contra nemo est facere conaius: The laws against 
 nhich nobodv dared to act. Cic. Vatin. 7.— Illlus periculnm quern jn-opterhxc ipsa studia 
 diligeb.it; Tliat man's dinvjin- for the sakiof whom he loved these very pursuits. Cic. 
 CirC 22. 51.— This order of the words is frequent if the relativ»; is use«l as the attHfjute 
 of a prei)ositional noun, and the jneixjsition is monosyllabic, as : Quorum in fins Ro- 
 mani exercitum iiitrodiixissent ; In icho-'^e terrifory \\\v. Konians Inul introduced an arm}'. 
 Cu's. B. G. 2, 10.— Quo in loco Ambiorix esse dicebiliur ; In which phice Amh\or\x was 
 said to l)e. C:es. B. (J. (J, 80.— (Ei) quorum de jMiend agebiltiir ; Those uhose pi/nu'/mmit 
 was in (juestion. Liv. 5,8«.— Quibus de rtbus iid me scripsisti : On which things you 
 have written to me. Cic. Att. 12, 84.— Here belong the coordinating adverbial expressions 
 qua de causa, quam of) causam, quamobre?n, quemad/nodufti.— The i)ni\)<)A\\(m cum is 
 mostly attached to the relative as a suffix (qvocum or qulcujn, inst. of cum quo ; qui- 
 fjuscum. instead of cum qvibti"). Earely the common order cum quo, and cum quibtts 
 is met w ith (as in Liv. 1, 58 ; Nep. Att. 5 ; Liv. 4, 5). 
 
 Ob*. 7. Those relatives which are either doubled, or compounded with cunque, are called 
 'iNDKFiNiTK KEi.ATiVKs ', and the clauses introduced by th< m are called • indefinite 
 iiKi.ATivK cLAisKs'. TlU'se clauses are exponents of the idea 'all' or -every', as ap- 
 l>lied to circumstances given, or to things or persons mentioned, and represent the prin- 
 cii)al predicate as h.lding good ?/ any of the sin-le acts contained in the general idea 
 * all ' «>r ' every ' is assunitd as real or true. Hence these clauses jilways imply a ' contin- 
 gency', and jierfonn the same part amonu: the clauses of the relative form, as the condi- 
 tional clauses amouir the clauses introduced by conjunctions. They correspond to Eng- 
 lish clauses introduced by the dift'.-rent relative or interroL'ative compounds with ^erer^ 
 (w hosoever, w hichsoever, whatever ; how much soever, whenever etc.), as : (Lacedoemon 
 
 / 
 
I 
 
 498 
 
 BELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 CLASSIFICATION OE RELATIVES. 
 
 499 
 
 bonis rpc:ibns» iiti iiou potiiitl qmim esset rex hahnnilw^ f/uicunque gcucre rc^io natus 
 C'S!<et : Lacrdivmoii could not liave 'jood kiiij.';» since, u/ioi-rer Wdn born of royal blood 
 wms to be made kiiii,' (to be had as kinj^). c'ic. Kep, 1, :i:i. 50. [Tlie principal predicate, 
 'the having as king' iiolds good in regard to every person in whom tlie condiiion of 
 royal blood existed, — if any was born etc.] (^uoxcitiique de te queri ii\\d\\'\^qtiacuiiqv.e 
 potui raiiOno placiivi ; Whomsoertr I beard complain of \ou, I appeased in ichuUvtr way 
 1 could. Cic. Qu. Fr. 1, 2. 2 [The ' jil<v<lrc'' holds «rood in regartl to any person comi)laiii- 
 inj; ( if' any person complained), and in regard to any method applied for the pnrpose of 
 " plardre''].— Quod. qtiibuKCUnque verbis dixeris, lacetuni tamen est, re contiiietnr; 
 Wh.it is witty in M7m/«i>r words you may express it, is a witticism conr^in<'d in the 
 subject itself. Cic. Or. 2, 02 [ = if you dioose any of the dift'erent forms of ex|)ressiou 
 l)Ossibl(! ; or " altnoucfh ' you change your exprest^ion in evtry possible manner]. — Kuo, 
 qnuiqiiid est in me studii, quhlqithi a'.ictoritfite possum, vel dmne lil)i defero ; U'/iaittcr 
 zeal is in nie. ichatevtr I can do by my inlluence. even all this I place at your di-'posi- 
 lion. Cic. Leg M. 24, 09 [ = sire muitiim possum, nice non multum ; Wkethtr my inllu- 
 ence is small or great, or 'uKhouffk my intluence inaij be small 'J. 
 
 Ob8. 8. The indefinite relative clauses difler in several respects from ordinary relative 
 clauses : 
 
 1) 'I'he introducing relatives have the nature of both relative and indefinUe adjectivcd 
 and adverbs. Wherever the form of the relatives is dillerent from that «if the interroira- 
 tives, they almost always follow in their lormation the interrogative, not the relative 
 form, the same as the indefinite qnl<. Qin<quis and quidqmd have, like the indelinite 
 qiiis, the h)rm of the i.NTEitKOGATivE qiii.-<, not iliat of the relative qni, lackiiiir tJie 
 feminine, and ihti ionw quod, iihXww^h quifiinqae takes the relative form qtiodcunque, 
 not the interrogative foi in y?/?V/<7///7^/f^ if used absolutely. Thus the conipo>ition with 
 CKiiqiie is applied tt) the adverl)S quaiido (qnaiidocniiqiie*), and /// (itfcunque), which occur 
 only as iattnogatice. not as relative adverbs (and as adverbial conjunctions), as : ^-Eqiiis 
 Volscisque. quimdocunque se moverint, ab tergoerinuis. Liv. 7, 30. Ih'iice both, the com- 
 j)ouiids «if cuitqut, and those with doubled f«)rms, occur as pure indetinitcs without any 
 innction as connectives, as : Bestiie, ut quidquid { — ut quidque) objectuin est, non 
 qtuerunt amplius; Animals, when anythiixj is tlirown to them, do not l«)ok any furilier. 
 Ci<-. Tusc. 5, 34, *.>8.— Ita odorabuntur omnia et perve>iigabant tit. ubi quidq'uid ctiy^vt, 
 aliqua ratiOne inveiiTrent ; They >ceiite(l and rummaged all things in a manner that they 
 found out in some way wiiere ectrytldtu/ was (or : th.it. where tiiere was anythinq, tliey 
 were sure to find it). Cic. Verr. 2, 4, Kj.— (inidijiiid erit igitur quacunque ( = ullil) ex 
 jirte. quucunque ( = ullo) de sjeiiere, id oiTi;or dicet melius quam ip^e ejus rei inventor; 
 Whatever there will be, pertaining to any art, or to any sphere, an orator will express it 
 belter than even the inventor. Or. 1, 12, 51. 
 
 2) The indelinite relatives liave in so far the nature of ordinary relitives, as the inter- 
 rogative (or iiuletinite) element qn is used as a ronn-ctive with 'the force of a conjunc- 
 tion ; but the indrtinite relative adjectifs ditler from ordii.ary relative adjectives in re- 
 gard to the anftctddtt. The latter always depend «m their principal sentence by mea»>8 
 of their gramniaiical (////^ce^/*;//, wiiich is a member of the jiriiwipal sent'Mice. while the 
 indtflnite relative adjectives dt) not require a giammalical antecedent, beini: directly de- 
 pendent on the predication \\ hich they (jualify in the manner of conditiona! dauf^is iObs. 7; 
 Ji. 3. Ors. 12, li\\ as : (Frater meu^i mihi, qita-^'unqne re.< qtvit, tuendiis est; I must take 
 lh«' part of my brother tif'aUrer things li«' may do (whatsoever his aciioiis may be). Cic. 
 Fain. 1, !), 18. Here rex. the troveruing noun ol quasrunqiie cannot be made the ante- 
 cedent of the latter, and cannot, in any form, be conceived to be a member of the prin- 
 cipal sentence. The clause ' q'lascunque reti fferit" performs the same fuitrtions as a 
 conditional clause { = at all events, .sire hoc. nre aliiid quid agit; eren if he acts un- 
 reasonably). Both, conditional and indelinite relative clauses belong to the clauses ex- 
 pressing a 'conliiigency ', the f«)rmer expressing eitlitr a dellnite or indetinite (^t qiiis) 
 c«intingency : and the latter only an indefinite contingencv. Hence both kinds of clauses 
 may be coordinated with each other, which, accordini: to" p. 475. No. Ji, is only admissi- 
 ble if both clauses belong to the same class, as : Fateor iiie oiatOrem n modo dm, aut 
 v\'\.\m qidc'i nque sim, ex Academite spatiis exstitisse ; I acknowled;.'e that I, as an or.ttor, 
 if lam i^uch, or I may even say ' whatever orator I am', have proceeded troin the halls of the 
 Academy ; ( = that 1 am owing whatever I am as an orator to what I have learned in the 
 Academy). Cic. Or. 3. Here the conditi(mcd clause leaves the question ' wh«*ther he is an 
 orator or n«.t' undecided; the indefinite relutire clause removes this uncertaintv. but 
 leaves the question 'about bis rank anion:: tlie orators' undecided. Bv removini: tg^w 
 this u ncertainty, the clause must a>siinie an ord inary relative, or a concessive form. 
 
 * The use (»f qiiundocunque. however, is rare, and generally ' quocnnque temin}re\ or 
 *• quoqno temiwre'' \^ used in place of it as: Qnociinqne tevi}>ore mihi potesias prujsen- 
 tis tui fiierit tu eris moderator consiliOrum meOrum. Cic. Fam. 1, 9, 22.— Qaoquo tern- 
 2.076 luerit. Cic. Alt. 9, 2. 
 
 ^^ On account of the dilTerent irrammatical nature of ordinary and indefinite relative 
 rl'iii^e" the latter do not follow the rules of the former in regard to the 7nood of their 
 predicate (^ til») The ino«Kl of the indefinite relative clauses is almost alwai/s the indica- 
 Vivr a< ii c<.iM.iti<.nal clauses prop.r (in which the condition is represented asan unde- 
 ci(leifa«-t), unless the subjunctive is required by the general rules on^dependent sub- 
 j-unciives (p. 385 foil.), while in English the potential is generally used, bee Lx. Obs. 9. 
 
 Obs. 9. The two f«)rins of the indefinite relatives by canque and by doubling the sim- 
 nle imlefmiie are thus distinguished : . 
 
 1 Ouisqni>^ and quldqnid in the nominative and accusative are only used absolutely, 
 h'in.r either in the masculine or neuter gender, according, as the noun of general im- 
 Dortlmd.-rsux.d isa i)eisonor thin- t§ 354)* ; but qmcunque is used abs«ilut« ly, di.-junctly 
 ^ MA. m-i), and attributivelv with its governing noun expressed, as : 0«iC«/j$W6 is est, 
 ei me protiteor inimlcum ; Whoever he is. I profess myself his enemy. Cic. i am. 10. 31, 3. 
 -Yw\ onodc,inqiie\o\i;n\ qui valebunt, valebunt auiem temper anna; ^ haieter those 
 wi>h who have the power, will be done; but the power will always be with the arms 
 (arms will ahvavs have the p<iwer). Cic. Fam. 9, 17. 8.-Plus attuht huic poptilo digni- 
 tatis, q>n.<quis est ille, si modo est aliquis, qui etc.; He who etc., «Vw^r^r he is if else 
 he is any.fne. conferred nnn-e dignity on this people etc. Cic. Brut. I.i.- qtndqmd ci 
 ccmimendaveris, erit id mihi gratum ; Whatever you will recommend to hnn will be ac- 
 centabie lo me. Cic. Fam. 13, 16. 4. Both, quodcunqve and qmdqvid may take partitive 
 qiuHive.^, meaning either ' wAa^fivr' or UilV with the Latin partitive genitive as goyern- 
 in-' noun or literally ' whatever i)art of, when the proviso • if any ' is olten ^inderstood, 
 as"- Te hoc existiinjlre v«>lo. quidquid in eum officii contuleris, id ita nie accipere ut in 
 nieipsum te putem contulisse; 1 wish you would rest assured that, whatever .-ervice 
 (everv .service, if anv) you may do to him, will be so taken by nie that I consider it as 
 d<Mie"to mvself. Cic'. Fam. 10,'l, 4.— Vos hortor ut qmdcvnqve viiMnm contrahere i)o- 
 teriiis conlrahantur; 1 exhort vou to collect whatn-.tr soldiery (all soldiers, if any) you 
 can co"llect. Tompej. ad Cic. (Att. 8. 12, A, 4).-rrincipibus GallOrum placuerat, non 
 omnia concremnri t.-cta, ut qtiodcunque superesset intnx. id pignus ad llectendos hostium 
 anim.is nabC-rent ; The chi«-fsor the soldiers had resolved not to have all the houses burnt, 
 that whatever paitoX the citv would be left, might be a pledge m their hands (literally : 
 Mhev mi-ht liave whatever' part etc. as a i>led-e')to bear on the resolutions of the 
 enemy Liv 5 42 See Ex. 1-3. The ordinarv relative qnod is likewise used with a par- 
 titive <'eniliv«j in the nuaning ' all', but without the accessory idea of "if any '. and 
 withoiu any uncertainty about the amount, as : Ex ipsS Dulna qnod habel)at aari de- 
 tractiim esse dic«); I assert that from the very statue of Diana id', the gold it had wa» 
 taken olV. Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 20. 
 
 2 Omdquid is never used in any oblique case except the accusative, and never in the 
 pliiial ; qiilsqiiix is never used in the feminine, and never in the genitive or dative sin- 
 gular- norisitusedabsolutelvin the ablative singular (except sometimes in postclas- 
 sical lan'nnve) ; but it freqiiVntlv occurs in this case as attribute of nouns denoting 
 thinf"* (not persons), as : (^uis est'qui, qaoquo modo quis interfectus sit, puniendum pu- 
 tet -"who is tlnre that holds the opinion that a punishment should be intiicted, in what- 
 ever manner a person niav have lieen killed. Cic. Mil. 3.— Oainnius illiid, qiioquo con- 
 sUio fecit lecit certe siio ; 'With whatever intention Gabiniits may have done this, he hap 
 certainlv done it with His intention. Cic. liab. Post S. For the use of quocunque modoawd 
 qiioinodocun<nie see N«). Id.— 0'/^^■7'/^^• is never used in the i)lural, except in a single 
 passa-e «if Livy as an ordinarv indefinite : Liberos Buas qmtA/f<q>nbns RomSnis nianci- 
 pi.nUrbaiif q'hev gave their children into slavery to ihejird Roman that would offer. 
 Liv 41 S**. In all the cases in wiiich qulsqids is exchyded.quicunque is used ; but there 
 are no examples exiant of the form quornmcunque.—HoimUmo» the suffix cwiqve\sse]i- 
 arated by one or two wortls from qui (also fr.nn qnalis and qnantus. Ex. Kii, as : So- 
 crates omnium testimonio. quam se cunque in part«'m dedisset, omnium fuit facile prin- 
 r.p<- Socrates unquestionably was the foremost of all, in whatever direction he might 
 npplv himself. Cic. Or. 3, 1«, 00. - (^nirunque is rarely used as an ordinary indefinite, with- 
 out t'he force of a connective, mo-tlv as adverbial ablative with ratio and caum. butalso in 
 other connections (Ex. 12), as : (^lue sanilii poterunt, qaacunque ratione saiiSho ; W hat 
 can be healed. 1 shall heal in every way p.is^ible (where jnAero must be supplied). Cic. 
 Cat 2 5.— (^ui de quacunqne catim asj)eruati nostraauxilia estis : W hode8pl^ed our help 
 from lome reason or other ( = nescio qua causa, or ' de cauMl aliqua, qua^cunque ea erat). 
 
 * In anteclassical language qui^qais is sometimes used attributively with homo. 
 
 ** In the passage in Cic. Sest. 45, which is generally used in the lexicons to prove the 
 use of qui.'<quis in the nom. i)lur., the reading quiqni rests on no other authority but an 
 old printed edition of Cicero's works, where it first occurs. The manuscripts give 
 qui. 
 
I 
 
 500 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF EELATHTS. 
 
 501 
 
 Liv. 45. 23.— Si quid erit. mnjrniim est adinmentiim, pln miniii», qnaninqve rafidne coii- 
 Tendjliniis ; If tlicrt,' will he aii.\ fhiiiir. it will by a {^raiul hcli) ; if not, we will fhilt aloii" 
 ill one way or other. Cic. Atf. 12, 29. i. ^' 
 
 3. rtercunqne ( hut not vfcniter) is used as an indefinite relative in the mcaninjT * which«o- 
 cver of the two '. as : Xiillnin hollniu eivTle fiiir. in (pio hello noii, //fniru/if/i/f' pm^ vicis- 
 pet, tamen jiliqna forma ej^^et fimlra ri-i |)ul)l'C}e. Cic. :ul Unit. 1. 15. 10.— Copiie ita pa- 
 rjlinead diiuicaiHlimi esse diciiritiir ut, vftramt/i/e vieerit, noii sir ininnn lutQnim. C'ie, 
 Fain. G, 4, 1.— In |)lace of the lacUinj; uternfer frequently the s'nji^le uter is used wiili 
 the force of nffrcunque, as: Seniltiis a p«' rem ad po[)iiliini rejGeit ; vtii eoruin dedieatio 
 jussu p()j)uli data essct, emn ])r:r('sse annnna» jnssit ; Thev di-eieed that to iv/i(im^<(ter,r 
 o/ the Itvo the dedieation would he ^'iven. tlie same should he jirefect of provisions. Liv. 
 2. 27.— Faeile convC'uit inter Hoinauos Latiiiosque. vtrlus partis T. Manlius (\ux fu- 
 isset, ejus futurain hauddubie fuisse vietoii.im ; 'I"he Uoinansaud L;itins i)erfecily a<:ret(l, 
 that ivhvh so ever of the two parties» T. Manlius would have comuiandcd, the victory 
 ■would have unquestionably helonu;ed to it. Liv. S, 10. See K.\. 13. 
 
 4. Both qiiotqnot and quotcnnqiie (heiu^' indeclinable) occur in the meaninij 'how many 
 soever', 'however many or few \ 'whatever iiumlier of ' ; hut hoih are extremely rare, 
 as : Si leires dua». aut qitofquof erunt. conservflri noii |>os^inl ; If two laws, or hon' many 
 soever xUk^vv will l)e, cannoi be prc>ervcd. Cic. Inv. 2, 4!).— QuotCKiique occurs only once 
 in the lanL'uaire of the law: Quotcnikque si'iijltus creverit, tot sunto. Cic. Leg. 3,3. In 
 place ()f quotqiiot inu\ qiiotcuhque Hie neuters qnvlqu'id and qxoilcunque with partitive 
 ^enitlve«^ (even of persons) «re jrenerally employed: Quidqidd in castris ])ei dilorimi 
 fuit : Whatever number of desperadoes was in the camp. Cie. Fatn. 10, 23.— See No. 1, 
 and E.\. 4. 11.— Tin' adjective (^^/(y/z/.s/v///^//^ occurs only in the meatiiii;: of an ordinary 
 indefinite without any conneciive force ; it is extremely rare, and only poetical. 
 
 5. Of the quantitatives, the forms qtinnfnsquantii.'i, qtHfntnscunque (botii in the mean- 
 inir ' how nuich so ever', ' how L'reai so ever'), and qiuintnli(s,-ii„qtit ^h()w little soever) 
 are in use. qiianf>i-qi((iiititft \y\\Mx rare. They occur both as attribuie-s, and in the neuter 
 pinjjiilar with partitive p-nitives, accordinir to tiie ;reiieral rules on quantitative adjec- 
 tives (§ 2<i4). The iVtnhWwj^ ui qttdiitidux belon<_'s to Apiileian Latiniiv. Dejutari co|)ia<, 
 qudidivciinqiie sunt, nostia< esse dlico : J)ejotaru.s's troop-. iM.wmu'ch soever there is 
 ot them (see P. I., p. IST 11. 4. .')). I believe to be ours. Cic. Fani. 1.5, 1. ♦;.— Deciusr/w»- 
 tttmcnnque ririmn habuit, ])rimo certamine eiludit ; lion' great ^otrer i)«'cius's stniK/th 
 may have been, he spent it in the bei:iunin<: of the l»attle. Liv. 10. 28.— Quaiduntcmt- 
 qut humoria v^i ; llow much licjuid soever there mav be. Col. 12, 25.— Procura, quantn- 
 larnnque est, Precianam herediijliem ; Take care of ilie Pncms estate, left to me hy will, 
 how .Kinall fo ever \x m.iy be. I'ic. Ait. C. •». 2.— Q'lanfK/unnti u. e. emitun. Imiic emitur 
 (luod iiecesse est ; What is necessaty, is houirht cheapiv (is cheap), at wtiatever (how co 
 ever irn-at» ju-ice it may he lioiiirht. Cic. Att. 12. 23, 3.— See E\. 14-l(i.— Frequently 
 qnantuinontqm occurs with po<.tu/n ( = quantumciinqiie fact-re j)ossuni) as a formula <>f 
 modest assi-ri ion (as much as I can, to the hot of mvabiliiv) in pl;i< e of tiie simple 
 relative qoan'tan, to rejjre^ent the ability of the speaker as an unknown and question- 
 abie '(nianiity'. as: Debeo. qamdnincnnqoe ytosAm, in eo (luotiue elaboran'; I should 
 devote my work, c/.s' miirli (ax far) a< I am attle, al>o to this sul>ject. c;c. Fin. 1, 4, 10.— 
 The idc a -however ^reat ' mny also he expressed in the form of a conces\ice clause (sec 
 ]). mV) with q'lawvis jnagiiHs (in place of fivantHsciinque), which alwavs r.<iuires the 
 ])redicate in tlie subjunctive: Exspectatio qnninvis.sU maf/ua. tamen eau"i vinces ; Hoic- 
 ever great our expectation may be. you will still surpas.- it. Cic. Hep. 1, 23.— This form 
 of the concessive clause must be alwavs u-ed if the (iiiantitaiive idea ' how so ever' re- 
 fers adverbially to the intensity of adjectives. See No. 9. 
 
 0. In the qualitative class, r/w/?V/^/r//i.s- belonirs to late Latiniti', hut qvalixrunqiie if» 
 classical, oc( urnn.: in the meanini: 'of whatever quality, character, nature, <»r kind '. It 
 is often leplaced hy quiamqiie. Primuin qiiidque. qnaltcunque erit, continuo scies : You 
 shall know the very first news, of wha'n-er kind (nature) it may he. Cic. Att. 10 12 (i — Is 
 est Kpicureus noil penitus iili disciplliiic, qmtcunque est, di-ditus : This Kpieu'rean is 
 not wholly <;iven to that system, of what kind soever it may he (j. e. whidever may he itti 
 cha meter).— Ek. 17. '22.— Instead of qua/hcunque somelinies the qualitative jrenitive 
 cnirininodi (instead o\' cnjuscujuxntodi, which is not found) occurs, as: Co<Mi.indum 
 tilii fuit, Konue. n/icmniodi res essent. an Hhodi malles vivere : You had to~con-i(ier 
 whether yon would rarln-r live at \Un\n\ whtdcvir the condition o/'allairs miirht he (lit- 
 erally : ot whatever kind the allairs niiu'ht be», or at Jihodes. Cic.' Fam. 4. 7,4.— Ciff^is- 
 cu.,qiie moliwwh the meaniiiL' of ^'/«//.<c///(^//fc is used attrihutiv^/i/. \\hi\v ci/ianwodi 
 oniv orcuv:^ predicatirely ; as : (Jt/Jn^o/nq/fe enim modi animal con.<t\tiien.< ; For an ani- 
 mal of wliateverkind' you may assume (. = whatever kind of an animal you mav assume). 
 Cic. Fin. 4, 11, 28. ^ j . 
 
 7. The LOCATIVE adverbs formed from the dctcrmiuative qui (wW, wide, quo, and qua), 
 
 if used 08 indefinite relatives, mostly occur in compopitinn with a/nqve (vMc^/vqve etc.), 
 hut also (thoMj;h rarely) in the doubleo forms idAidd. q'loquo. qnoqna. Neither vnde- 
 vnd», nor imdtnniqui- occur in classical prose, instead of wnich. attributive phrases (ex 
 qvocirnqiie kno) .are used. The locative adverb^^. are used in these forms accorditiir to the 
 rules ot the locative cases (p. 217 foil.), hein^ rendered like the simple relative adverbs 
 with the addition 'sotver' : Vhicunque Patricias liabitat, ihi career privjltus est; ^yhe1•e- 
 soerer a Patrician lives, there is a private jail. Liv. 6. 3H.— rbivbi^W animus, d-rte qui- 
 deni in te est : Wheresf)erer\\w soul may he. it is certainly in you Cic. Tusc. 1. 2'.). — Qiio- 
 cmiqne te ratio reipnblieae ducet. sequar : I shall follow yo\\ irhit her soever {y. ^.\vt m\y 
 place so ever to which) the interest of the republic will lead you. Cic. Fam. 10. 16. 2. — 
 Amfiris ttii, qvoqiio me verti. vestijria (i. e. video): I see the footprints of thy love 
 irhifher.'-oerer {\u what direction soever) I may turn. Cic. Fam. 7, 24, 1.— Homam se ire 
 fi'iizu\fitr\hunt.q>nlc(niq>te (not idnn/nque) ihant. inimensum obtinentes loci; They ex- 
 pressed hy their «restuies that they v» ere niarchinjr on Home occuiiyinjr an immense 
 space y/7/f'?r7vr they marched. Liv. 5, .37. — See Ex. 18. — Sometimes the accusative neu- 
 ter quid'/uid is used as an accusative of place to express the indefinite relative adverbial 
 idea ' how far soever \' (Juidquid iiroL'rediebantur, niaeris majrisque tiirhatos hostis cerne- 
 bant : //o?r/a?'.vo<-iYr they came on their march, they perceived the enemy more aid more in 
 disorder (perceived tlie fjradiially increasiij; dlsoider of the enemy). Liv. 8, 39. See 
 Liv. 7. 32.— Sometimes the interro<,'ative adverb qnando is compounded with cnqve in 
 the uieaniuir 'whensoever', (qunndocnnqi/e). but this compound is not found in classical 
 prose, the idea 'soever', applied to time, beinj; {renerally not expressed bv the form of 
 the advert), hut by the tense and mood of the jnedicate' (^co p 3i9. Obs. 1). so that the 
 same temporal conjuneiions (7//»/m etc.) are used for the desimiation of both definite 
 and indefinite tinie. Whenever it is re<iuired to place a particular stress on the idea 
 ' soever '. attributive phrases with qnocvnque temjiore or qnoquo tempore are used, as : 
 Qnftcunqiie tempore niihi potestas pru'sentis tui fiierit, tu eris »»mnium moderator consi- 
 liDruni niennim : At what time ."YV^/yv (wheiiso«'verj it will lie possible lor me to see you, 
 you will be lhe<,'uide <jf all my actions. Cic. Fam. 1, 9, 22. See Ex. 7. 
 
 8. In the ncmekal class, the adverb qtmfiescunqf/e (not qiiotiesquoties') frequently occurs 
 in the meaniiifr ' how often soever', as : Litteras ad me mittas qiiotiesciniqne habebis cui 
 des: Senrl me letter- how ofttn t-oner y<'U may hav»- somebody bv whom to forward 
 them. Cic. Fam. Hi, 11. :i. See Ex. 19. The simple adverb qi/ofies, likewise, has always 
 the meaning of an indefinite relative, but is used with less stress than quotiescnnqve. 
 
 9. In the QUANTITATIVE class, indefinite relative adverbs are rot formed bv composi- 
 tion with fuitque. If the idea -hoivrrer w^c/( ' is applied to quantity ni>' an adverbial 
 idea (iiitensityi, the clause takes ttie form of a 'concessive clause', the quantitative in- 
 ferrojrative advert) qiiani l>ein<j: not compounded witti cimqve, but with ris (qiiamvis 
 instead of qnamcvnqne. which is used in ••v ry respect like a conjunclio!i ; see Obs. 11). 
 The adverb quam in the douliled form (quatnqifam) which, accordini: to the analojry of 
 the otiier indefinite relative adverbs, should have the meaning ' how ever much ', is'only 
 used as an oniinary conci-ssive conjunction, nieaninj^ ' a\(hoiigh\—Qua7Hvis (however 
 much) always requires its predicate to be in the sulijunctive. 
 
 10. Tho qv MATATiVK^ quatite7rt/nf/>/e and qualiterqtiaUter five postclassical. In their 
 place tin? interroirative adverbs ui mim\n.'Y qnomodo and vt are used in the following 
 forms : \) qnoqnornodo (see No. 2) ; 2) quocvnqne modo ; 3) qvomodocunqve ; 4) vtciinqye : 
 5) nt'tt (more rarely than vtcnnque), all with the meaninir ' in what manner, way, orstyle 
 potver', ' how soever', as : Hoc (iiium in amiciiiis dicitnr, quomodociinqvedicitur. infel- 
 b-ri tanien quid dicjltur potest ; If this be said w ith referenee to friendship, we can at 
 least understand what is meant, in vhatever manner \\. mav be said (i. e. even if itwere 
 not quite i)roperly expressed). Cic. Fin. 5, 11. 30.— I'tcunqite ha>c inciderint, bonum ani- 
 mnm habe : IIow so ner \\\\'^ will happc'ii, be cheerful! Liv. 4."j, 8.— Ctut sit res. casu» 
 consilium nostri itineris jiidi( ilbit ; llow so ever this is (be it as it may), chance will dic- 
 tate the plan of our journey. Cic. Att. 1.5, 25. 1 — I'tiit (others read a sim!)le vt, which 
 would not be proi.er in the j»assage) est. indulge valetudini ; lie it ax it may. take care of 
 your health. Cic. Fam. 16. 18, 1.— Often vtaoiqi/e is used in the ccmiparative meaning 
 'accordini: to ', denoting uncertainty of thechance, as: Utcvnqne re^ puflxMrvt, accord- 
 ing ff.s' circumstances would require. Cic. Fin, .5. 4, 11.— Ad ha-c revocCtur oratio. sed ut- 
 cimqiie aderttnt ; To these subjects our discourse must return, but according as the audi- 
 ence (qui aderiint) is. C:c. Otf. 1, .37.— Vtcunqio- in alto ventiis est. exin veJum vortitur ; 
 According as the wind is on sea. (accordini: to that) the sail is turned. Plant. Ep 1 1 
 Thus vtcunque in the passages Ilor. Od. 4. 4. 35: 2, 17, 11 : 3, 14. 29 must be understood, 
 although in these i)assages it is geue.-ally interpreted = qvandocunque. 
 
 11. Adverbs of cause are not used as indefinite relative adverbs, this relation, if the 
 cause is represented as indefinite, being exi)ressed by attributive phrases with quicunque 
 (quacunque ratiOne, quaciinque de causa, quocuuqiie coiisilio). 
 
502 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 Obs». 10. In indefinite relative clause!* four «jrammntical forms* may be diiitincrui-^hed : 
 
 1. Tlioso clau>t's whirli luive (jniinmdtiaU aiitc.ct:denl.-< in tlie principal hcnicnce. In 
 tlu'se the indetinile relative airrees» with its antecedent accordini» to tin- riilfs in re<rard 
 to ordinary relativ<-8 (§ 012), as : P^-^-o vo> in oinni /or/ti/iii, (/naciOK/ue erit oblata. coni- 
 plectar ; I shall embrace ^ou in every /or(>/n&^ wh<i(f<oever will he ottered. Cic. Scist. O'J, 
 146. [ Tlie indetinile relative (luaruiK^iie aixn-es» with its» antecedentyw/<7/m, as if it were 
 an ordinary relative : /orfil/id (jK(V «rit ohljiia.]— I't aiiiino?- ••Oriim ad qiieinnntque cai/sa 
 jx)sfultl/>if motnm vocennis ; That we may call their hearts to ir/taferfr emotion the case 
 will recjiiire (ad inotiim <iurmcunque caii^a p()stiilat)it ). Cic. Or. 2. 27, 115. — The antece- 
 dent may be u/i</erstood as a noun of ^'eiieral import (persons or thinjrs in ueneral». in 
 which instance it may or may not be implied in an al)solnte tbrm-adjective in tne prin- 
 cipal sentence, as: QuoscuiK/ife de te queri andlvi. . .jilacavi ( = liomines, quoscunqne 
 audlvi, j)lae:"lvi) ; I appeased eitry ptrso/i complainiiii: of you. Cic. l^ii. Fr. 1, i, 2. — L't, 
 g//o(/r////<///^ maxiine i)n)i)al)ile oceurrat. «^ no-tro jure lieeat defiHlere ; 'I'hat we have 
 a riudit to defend tvhaUctr truest thing ( = whatever truth) nuiy present itself ; ( = rem 
 piobibilem, qtuecuiniue occurrat). Cic. Ott*. 3. 4. The «;ratnmatical antecedents of the 
 nomiinitives and aceusatives of qiiisqui-i atid quidquiiL m classical lani,'uai,'e, are always 
 conceived as nouns of «general import, either undcrsfo.)d or imi)lied in the syndetic an- 
 tecediiu ht, as: Promiito, (jii'vhi'iid erit a te factum, id senatum comprobaturum ; I 
 promise that the Senate will ajjprove of whatever will l)e done by you ( = oiniils res 
 qnot a te factie eriint). Cic. Fam. 10, 10, 2,— Posthac quidqiiid seripsero, tihi pneco- 
 niiim deferam ; Whatever I may write hereafter. I will let you do the advertising of it 
 ( = ejus rei or lifjt'i, quantcuuqat or qutt/u-u/ique scrip<ero). Cic. Att. l."i, 12, 2. 
 
 2. The grammatical antecedent, logically belonging to the i)rincipal sentence, may be 
 taken ov« r into the clause as the governing noun of the indefinite relative (the same as 
 ill ordinary relative clauses». In this instance the relative clau-e (i!>va;/< inecedes the 
 principal sentence, tin; principal sentence being almost always introduced by a sy/idcdc 
 antecedent {is, hie, ille etc.) of the in<lertnite relative, which airrees wi'ii the governing 
 noun of the relative in number and gender, l)iit is placed in tinit case which the gmin- 
 tna/lad antecedent would require if it were expressed in the principal sentence : Sapiens 
 ita acrem in oinnTs i)artls aciem iiitendif, iit, qitDnciinqne aifnm fortflna invexerif, hu/ic 
 apte et (piiete ferat ; A wiso man has so keen an eye for all eventualities that he de- 
 cently and quietly bears trhaftvtr ckdiwe fate will entail ( = huiic caau/n qutiucuiique, 
 or oninein aifiuin que/n). Cic. Tusc. 4, 17, -id. See Ex. 20. 21. 
 
 3. The governing noun of the indefinite relative may 7iof belong to the principal sen- 
 tence, so that the clause ifi wf/ioiU any (jrainmafical unteccdtnt. simply referring /o ^///? 
 reality of the prim ipal. predicate, representing the latter as true in whatever way the un- 
 certainty implied in the clause may be verified. Such clauses, which cannot be r<'pre- 
 fcuted, even by a syndetic anteceifent. in the principal si-ntence, have a strong resem- 
 blance in tlieir form with clauses introduced by conjunctions, passinir over into condi- 
 tional and concessive clauses (Ubs. 11): Ut qntecunqiiedisseiitieiifinin philosophoiuni senttn- 
 tia definibusxit, tatnen virtus satis habeat ad vitam beAiam priesidii ; So that, whatever the 
 af/inioru^ of dhtsenting ]>hilomi>herii may he on the lvtnfi< (of good and evil), virttie has suf- 
 ficient j)ower (is a sufiicieat stronghold) for a h:ippy life. Cic. Tusc. 5. 2'.» ( — Quamris 
 philo>oplii disseiitiant. tamen etc. ; lloictver /tinch philosophers nniy dissent; or: Al- 
 though their opinions are extremely diverging, it will always be true that etc.). 
 
 4. The fourth form of indefinite relative clauses is the adverbial form, if they are in- 
 troduced by indefinite relative adverhn. Such clauses have in every resjjecr the same 
 nature as liiose iiitroiluced by the corresi)onding sim|)le relative adverbs, <;uiy that the 
 adverbial relation is always represented as an indefinite contingency. 
 
 Obs». 11. All indefinite relative clauses, since they expre-s a contingency both as indefi- 
 nite and uncertain, partake of the nature 1) of conditionai. c!au>es. which express a 
 contingency as uncertain, and eifht-rm* d«'rtnite or indefinite; 2) of conckssivk clauses 
 ■which express a coniinirency either as definite and certain, or as indefinite and uncer- 
 tain. Hence each of these three kinds of clauses pass over into each other, and olteii 
 the same thou;,'ht may be expressed in the form of any of these three claii.-es. Here be- 
 long conditional clauses with H q>/i<. or with si tnaxi/ne ; the disjunctive clauses intro- 
 duced by give. . sive,^ which belong to both the conditional and concessive clauses ; and 
 concessive clauses introduced by quainris, as : Quie yi tnaxii/ie meminissem, tamen 
 illlus temi>oris similitudinem jam eequi dei)erem ; If I remembered this «t'^r* ^■o itv//. I 
 
 * This particle '^^r' it» evidently the came indefinite 'concessive' particle which is 
 '\ised in the rend<'rin;:of all indefinite relative clauses. Many irnimmarians and nutho's, 
 not comprehendin<r the force of this particle, have substituted for it the absurd negative 
 panicle 'never'. These would render : 'If I remembered Xh\» never t^o well', making 
 thus 'never 'an adverb of time, which would introduce in this construction a relation 
 wholly foreign to it. 
 
 CL^VSSIFICATION OF RELATIMilS. 
 
 503 
 
 would nevertheless now be bound to follow the precedents of that time. Cic. Att 9 13 3 
 [The clause *iy//,g d muxi/ne meminl<S( m' may be expressed in the form of a concessive 
 clause • qiiainris ea meminissem', which, according to Obs. 9, 9, has the force of an in- 
 definite relative clause. The clause may also be expressed as an indefinite relative cliu«c 
 in the form ' Quidqtnd de ea re meminissem '].— Errant d qui in belio omuls sccundos 
 r.rum eventus exspectent. Ca-s. B. G. 7, 29 ( = quicunque exspectant).— Tu melius 
 existimnre videris de ea, si quam nunc habemus, facultate. Cic. Brut. 87 ( = de e5 quam- 
 cunque habemus, faculiille). The ditlerence between clauses with*j quis and quicuTiQue 
 orquisqulsniny be seen from the following passage : Scriha» si quid, vel potius ouidouid 
 veniet «n mentem; I wish you would write (/"you think of anything, or nilhktr whatever 
 you can think of. Cic. Att. 9, 19, 4.— Sed sint quamvif boni, non essent meiiOres quam 
 nos. Cic. Att. 9. 13. ( = quamris sint boni, or ,si t/iaxime honi sint. or sire boni sint sire 
 minus: or quahscunque suit).— Qxamvis prud^ns &6.ixv^\lvii\iX\xm sis, tamen, nisi mairnte 
 tij)i cune essent. uumquam ea res tihi tain belle in mentem \enlre posset Cic Att 12 
 37, 2 ( = si maxims sajfias ; or quatitacunque tua prudeiitia sit; or, expressed without 
 iidehiilteness : Quamquam es prudentissimiis».— Veniet leinpus mortis «r« retracta- 
 bi.s, nre properabis. Cic. Tusc. 1. 31 { = veniet si retractabis. veniet si properabis • or ve- 
 wu-tquamtis retractabis, or .?//i(/v^/i</ facies ut retractes ant properes) -Hence clauses 
 with,sire-^u'tareusedas explanatory coordinates of indefinltive relative clauses ■ Sed 
 vtcunque (i. e.y,\^),^eu injuncta sen suscepta foret militia, fiiiem aliquein militandi* fieri 
 lequum esse (dixit) ; But t>e this as it may, whether the military service was a compuUorv 
 or a voluntary one, etc. Liv. 32.3.- On account of this logical identity of concessive and 
 iiKlefiiiiie relative clauses, concessive clau.<es with quamquam (by doubling the inter- 
 rogative y //am in the manner of an indefinite relative), have even the same external 
 lorn, as indelinite relative clauses, while those introduced by etsi borrow the form of 
 conditional clauses. *"iiii ui 
 
 Obs. 12. The regular mood of indefinite relative clauses is the indicative the rules 
 on the mood in onlinary relative clauses (§ 014) being not applicable to th's kind of 
 causes; wine in English the potential with may ov miqht is 'regularly used in t ese 
 clauses. But the subjunctive is used \) if such clauses may be resolved iiL hv^otlieti^ 
 cal clauses with pret-rite subjunctives, as : Vtncunque essum, una cum eis victus c"sem • 
 nherev^r I were, I would be defeated together with them. Cic. Att. 7. 3 2 Flf the indefi- 
 niteness is i-emoyed from this clause, it becomes a hypothetical clause ^ ^iibi es^em x\c. 
 tus 6^s;..t,/i.] See Ex. 20.- '2) Sometimes subjunctives are used in clauses inirSSdbv 
 doubled relative adverbs (.//,/^ ubiubi), according to the anal.^i^yofconcelsiTe elites 
 introdi.ced by quamvu<. as in the passa-e, Cic. Tusc. 1, 29 (quoted Obs 9 7). ''"a,*;^ 
 Att. lo. 25 (quoted OBS. 9, 10).- 3) In post-Ciceronian Lalinitv the Hibjmic iVe i^ f e- 
 onently i.se.l ,n all clauses denoting an indefiniie past conti^.gencv as: S/^^r^^^^^^^^^ 
 irtor prel.endisset, trii.anus mitti jubehat. Liv. :f, 11. See p. 331,_Yn ;onye paSa ?•« 
 the suhpinctive rests on inferior readings, as in the passa-e Cic. Top 2l w Ire Hie vnl- 
 e-dta ^quacunque de re ,tnl\ according to the manuscrii)ts, must he dian-ed iuto sunt 
 
 These exceptional subjiinctives must he distiniriiished from those subi'inctives whiVh 
 acconling to the general rules (p. 3s5 foil.), must he used in all depende "la isS Tht.s 
 a quasM.blique subjunctive occurs in the passages Cic. Or. ti, IH 00 quote IObV 9 2)^ 
 |.iil,ol,l,que subjunctives in Liv. 2, '27 ( quoted Obs. 9. 3». and in Ex 1; .^ 4 ,ia!^«„i>ob> 
 lique subjunctives in Cic. Fin. 1, 4, 10 «pioied Obs. 9. 5). Subjnnct^e^b attract on 
 oc.iir in Cic. ad Brut. 1. M, 10 (Obs. 9. 3^ : Fam. 0, 4. 1 (Obs. 9" 3) -Tusc 5 29 (Obs in ?^ 
 and in Ex. 1. 20. 21. ; a subjunctive of the second person in Ci?Fin 4;il Tb (Obs. 9 6)' 
 
 ;;:J.;, ?-,"!" ''\ 'l'\7" '"^P'^'^'S Q>^idquid Ktiodiomm viro.um feininamm "est, cum omni 
 peciin a nostra Komam veniunt. ei <miiii auroet argento, quidouid uuhlici o^dmlili 
 
 iu-nnlucmu" I'if 45'2f "'^'c^"^"T -'•-'^^";^ cori.o?aM Xos^Heii^le pSin- 
 
 ^im '^r «:ii A;/'eo?;^r^;,^:f;!!!;^? ^i?i^^r:^'V--' ^*^'^-: ^«i^^n- refeft mc quid 
 
 A t\ ••■•1 ^••-"'>.- •■■• ..v.iji.ii, qu.Mu f.1 t-aoem in piuris paitiatur" Ou nt 12'^ 
 
 Id 
 
 veiit, se,u.e^.i^-;;,u.e, vaid;rv;;.r^'^;^rA;v;v4:r2:^ 
 
 J;esJ.aJ^t^^^ro^ecmIvsis^ 
 3 lu r'^.'*-"'""'"' ^i'^'^^V'f i'ifffcedif, a delay intercedes, intervenes, is interposed - 
 
 veH e'^V"-i'7oViV\ "Sf ''tT' ?h^'^^ ""^ propcse.-e generous; a p.edioffive ad- 
 >ero, see p. .J.i8 (Obs. 1). p. .«9.— ^ by the singular, in P:n- sh.—f* to devote — » to riivirlp 
 among.-io p,.rs<.ns. n partitive g.nitive: n.j.ply auri et arqediTrviXr • whateiir 
 £■ '".'''hoT ''^ ''.'f'"' ^^ joining the adjective; p,.6/t« an(iV^r<W with the am^^^^ 
 dent.-i- house.-'» deposit (in a heaf)).~M persoiis.-i^ /jo/f^/J/i alicuius mrmitterl tn 
 place at one s disposition.-'* cdloquial, instead of vulf^.-^-' rS sehX^ ^'^ iloT 
 cumstances are'.-i« with the force of a future: 'we will unquestiouabiy oppose'. 
 
oOi 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 orit. iaMeVt^rroH. Th. Att. 0,10, 0- 8. ^?'''''''^''"?''^)';^^ par^ peraifOnma ]^ 
 mort<> ('jrsaiis niitabit, Ininc in h.»stinm minicro habt;bit. II). Att. 14 I.J. -«•—;'• .»i ' '-^ 
 ex ' mare •..!( , q.ih.isanuim <>tWciis3 Atti.-u.n ob.trinxcns^ oisd.-m mc tibi obli- 
 -n u " ton-, lb. F'a.n. r^/ IS. ^i.- 10. K-«) bonos vim., ant eos quinwque (licrntur 
 b ni s.'ntiar, otiainsi n.enf. lb. Att. 7. 7, 7.- 11. ^^a.nnlio- q„odru„qne n.borib' In.-n.t 
 ex o.nnib s populi.-* contraxorant-. Liv. 10, 14.- 1-2 llari.m reium aliqiml a-.-nt.i- 
 bu^'Or'W'/iyi-intervc'ntu^'' impediinento est. Quint. 1, 2 1-2.- 13. PneK.r o^rfjiio 
 coM-ultam»- -cnti ajcl)at ; nam vtnn.'< partis'» mehor r..rtnna bHli csset, ad ejus ^..cie- 
 tafom im-linatflrosi'. Liv. :J1, ;52.- 14. .Memim•n^'^ qmnUtaniqne tibi acccssiOnrs'» 
 IkMit forta.ije ,-t di-nitatis, cas tc non potuisso conscqm. nisi mt-i>* puer ohm consiliis 
 arni<-(- Cic Fam. 2, 1 2.- 15. Dem--abit>\ (///^///'///^^"«"^"''i "^l euin eni dcla- 
 Mmi« ■ Plain P(PM ••} 4 2S.~ 16. Kx eo quod dico»». qwmtulum id cunquee.^t,c\\\\a fa- 
 ciam iudicilri^o p.,'te-t. lb. Or. 2, 23, 07.-17. Q>mh.<cu„q,(e Himus. tainen hiec qu;u 
 m-Tiiumu. pitinon deb.umus'-". Liv. 20. 17.- 18. Virtfiu-m .pn adoptus cnt. 7/6Kvm- 
 Lii/ehlV-entimn^'^ a nobis diliirCtur. C'ic. N. I). 1, 4t.- 10. Hjc ^n^vr qj^otte^^nnnrie me 
 viderit rn-emiscof". ac pestcm-» suam i-t patris s^ui s^eso dicct videre. ib. ^e^t_. «).«, 
 14«i - 20 Alranius t^e m ca-tra rrcc-i)it. sic paiTilus ut. qvlcnnqiieACCMh^^aX ca-us. hunc 
 Quieto et' aniuo a.mno ferret, (^vs. H. C. 1. 75.- 2L Licet videre, quale.<c>n,qHe summi 
 civitiliis viri fucrint. fal^m civitiliem fMi>se ; quaoinqxe muiatio morum^-' in pnncipi- 
 bus^* exstiteril-'^, eand-m in popnlo secfltani. Cic. Leg. 3, 14, 31. 
 
 II. ANTECEDENTS OF RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 § 613. The !^n-aminatical antecedent of a clause, intioduced by a rela- 
 tiv'e adjective is either a noun, or a (personal) puonoun, expressed or un- 
 derstood. The relative adjective agrees with its antecedent in gender 
 and NUMBEii (for exceptions see Obs. 3, and R. 10, Ons. 2. 3). The case 
 of the relative is determined by the construction of the relative clause 
 
 (^G13, /i\ 10, OiJS. l.foll.). 
 
 'ob« 1 Tbe frrammatical antocedont is always conceived as a member of both, the 
 relative clau.e"an<l the principal sentence. In the cl.m>k. the r.lafire adj.rhve e^\^i^v 
 takes its place, or is its attril)Hte. In the prineipal sentenck it ;/('/// have a >yndeiK an- 
 tecedent of the relative as an attribute. To understand ilie lorm of the relative adjec- 
 tive the clause must be separated from the principal sentence, and the rehiiivc adjective 
 mu<t be rei)lac.d by its grammatical ant.ce.lent. as: Arhons sent a-ncola quarnni ad- 
 spicietbaccam ips/numquam; A fanner plants tr.e^, the Iruit o^ which he will never 
 pee Cic Tu>«c 1 14 31 The two constituent sentences are : ]) Arbores sent a<;ricola . 
 2) Arboi'um baccamaspiciet ipse numquam. Eitiier of the two sentences may be made 
 dependent on the other in tint form of a relative clause. an( tlie relative takes in re^'ard 
 to .'ender number, and case, the -rammaiical form which the common word has in that 
 geirtence in which the relative is >ubstituted. If introduced in the lirst sentence it must 
 be placed in the accusatire ( Q>tas seiit a-iicola arhirum baccam aspirnt ete. : or A-ricola 
 arbwum qmu^ serit baccam etc.). If introduced in the se( ond hentence, it must be in 
 the <'enitive plural, the sentence takini; the form, as quoted above. In either way. the 
 rebuive takes the same wnnher m\i\ qeialer. namely that ot its antecedent, but its ca.<e 
 is ditiereiit according; to tiie case wliich itie noun arbor would have in the same sentence. 
 Obs '> If the relative adjective refers to several co-ordinate antecedents, it ip in the 
 v^urai and, if tiie antect^dents have ditiereiit ;;enders. is i)laced in the m(wcuhne il the 
 antecedents are p^rsons^ If theantece(U-ids are /A?,k/.>;. the rehitive^iseither m tliew*?^</<rr 
 "~i~Mos»t ac^eptaT)le7— ■■' desperados.— 3 services;—* obstrinqere, to lay under obji-a 
 tioiis —6 ohUqrifiun es>>e aHq'ta re to be bound for somethini:.— • to tall ; to i)erish.— 
 ■> i-oh'ir is technically used of the -serviceable' part of a population, t e. of that part 
 which is capable •)f military duty. -« the whole p..i)ulation.-« to collect, to dralt.— 
 10 to those which are en-ajjed in anything' of that kind.--'' interf,ren«e.-|2 t. e esse ; 
 impersonal passive : 'that it was excellently consulted to the people' ^ that the peo- 
 ple was pia<ed in an excellent posititm by these resohitn.ns.-'a p^i'ty--'* t'!*^^;""'*! 
 • -raviiate' towards the alliance with that of the two parties etc.— >* see p. .joU, Obs. 1. 
 —1« Render by ' will be added to \— »^ to deny.—»» aliquid dtlafu/n ^.s7 ad me, I have re- 
 ceived somethin.'. — >» from what I say.- "« a conjecture may be formed as lo what 1 am 
 doiii" -2» p 379'Obs. 5, d.—^'^ The locative adverl)s frequently take the partitive jreni- 
 tive7/e«^^</M or ierranini in the meaninj,' ' where in the world ' ( ^ quo terne loco).- 
 »3 to«'roau —** the de^troyer.— "» morals.— ^» rulers.— 2' to take place, to occur. 
 
 ANTECEDENTS OF EELATIVES. 
 
 505 
 
 (which Render is often used, even if the antecedents are of the same gender) or it a^n-eea 
 w. h the las co-ord.nate. Often the relative, m this instance, takes Ihe ZrZqvi^Z'' 
 in the plural. If the antecedents are partly persons, and partly thin-s the relative ^Pn 
 erally takes the gender of the persons. See Ex. 1-5. ° ' '^«^'ative gen- 
 
 Obs. .3 If the antecedent is a colt.ectivb noun, comprising many individuals tl.P 
 relative is sotnetimes placed in the jylural, as if the antecedent^were a iZral denoting 
 the individuals c()mpns-ed in the collective. But this is generally the ca% only if hf 
 predicate ot the clause denotes an action which does not refer to the colIectfve"dea b t 
 o the single persons. See Ex. 6-8.- Sometimes if the antecedent represen tVa Sn W 
 t e name of n thing or by a noun of a gender different from that of the lerboi melnt 
 the relative is placed in the gender required by ihGi^erson. Ex. 9. 10. 
 
 tnJ.f^^eml^rir^^^^Cio^^vrrr' f -^'Jq "^l/^'i^ lyoj-yniMtw^.tmqve^.XnB misericordiam nos- 
 pu ntV' m i3-,vu t« S II' r\?' 't'T ""i^,«^/.«'^^«\^I"e divia<^, oua prima mortaies* 
 imi.im .iuuuciuni . ^aJi. Cat. .ib, 4.— 3. Attali regis legatus i>ostukbat nnrljtrnnfitn,, 
 qut>, qnce ad Chium navaii prcplio capta essent, "estitui. LiH^ S"-'4 kLZ- on' 
 pida. Viet, castella, agfi. qui ad Pisidiam ver-unt«, (dati sunt) lb 37 56 - 5 M?hi 
 
 ^:^lTl^TV'\r'''r''^??'T ^t i.....V^;n'oVtare vo^is in luam inc^f^s 
 CIC. J IS. 20, 4b.-- b. In gratiam et favOrem no/MiU7tl-i JiMrnrtha, venit miorvm nflri* sno 
 
 " r.!^T.."iL" V v""'* "*^^'^^»f"'- ^^e gravius in e.im consulerSttir- SahS^I? 8 - 
 ,*;•./.;;/ ^^''^•'^"''' omnem quern ex omni provinciiT coacrum habSbat prsemittit ^v£ 
 videant, quas m partis hostes iter faciant. Cies. B. G. 1, 15.- 8 AitTvSemS ter erVf^^^ 
 COS qui dicant aS Academia sensus eripi'o, a qvihns ^ mquara t ctiim " ^ «ut s^^^^^ 
 rem ', aut colOrem aut sonumi^ nullum»3 Jsse^ Cic. Ac. 2,^S^ 103 - ^Illa FuH^^^^^ 
 C odius) y.n non pluris fecerat Bonam DeamM quam trls'sorOresi^ inmunftlJem est 
 illorum'« sententiis assecflrns. Ib. Fam. 1, 9, 15.- K». IlabSbam ininiTti m non ^ \f« 
 rum sed duo importflnan prodigia^\ quo. eirestas. y^/o.a3ris Sign "« ma^nkfldJ'JLo^ 
 Icviias, improbitas, tnbflno plebis w;^^/ric/05 addixerat^o. lb. Sest. nf^? ' ^ 
 
 Hem 5. If the antecedent is a noun, it is expressed {a) either in both 
 the relative clau.se, and the principal sentence, or {b) only in the «rLS 
 sentence, or {c) only in the cUiuse. . k j xy m lue pimcipai 
 
 cii?afs*eJ'tenee hf wbLh ^^'l'^ '"' to express the grammatical antecedent only in the prin- 
 
 wt--^:^- .Se iv'-;r^i;;: ;sl:;;ri^^';:;;^-^^ 
 
 ippSifillMilsilii 
 
 lleUx- ,an^,to/j were found ;„ ,cM,-h i/uM a l-arllonlaraccontwaV rendered «0 0^^ 
 
 n« Bi.iit.r „J • """^^ffi^Q'/M ojrttnf, I have somethimr in abundance — ^ the rantivpH 
 
 the r«« "' '^r/""^;"l«'-eda8 things, and aiv here treated grammatieally so, which is rarelv 
 
 le r-" iITh?;.7lrr''''r. Fn'r' r"' If; ""K'^P^'-'-'' «he good godte^" 2 Cy' 
 
 " debts.-.'? i;.7.Lfiver«w?p^,T;;'i;f,t;,K,;^ 
 
50G 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 ANTECEDENTS OF RELATIVES. 
 
 aim 
 
 aui virl.. i.atQra dedit ' ; both ' ^^.^>'-J/'^ a ff •re. t .'ra.nnuilical nluiiou, ; To Iho^e 
 in the (lut.ve,allhouo;hth(-c 'l;^'^'^^ ','\\f/ "^j ^J'Ui "t^ of otner kiiuls. nature l.a;i 
 beasfs who live (literally Mvhose food ^) by .y^\'^':L o ii'/*' ^« /•.^«a* ad me .crips.st. 
 given either .tren-lh or f^^if^^^fti.lVhinuis -^he^yndet ca^ fis- 1), in- omitted 
 
 i;„ram videhi.n.is ( = deeu J<';;^"; J \!JX'4 r^^^^^^^ i« governed by the «ame ,>re- 
 
 with its preposition, Hince the '^*^''^ '\*;/"j;|,f ,f '' ^ ,o nie, we will ^ee when we 
 
 position) ; AM tho,e m,ui^ on ^'^^}\l^l'>'^^l^^ ^^^^^^ relative are in djf- 
 
 meet. Cic. Att. 12, :^.-- Ex 'J- | II the ^^^^^ „„^ jrenera y be 
 
 ferent cases or «"y^'^"^'^. y^^^f^^^ fj^^^^^^^^ the aecueative) : ^«« cupiditateH 
 
 «milted, unless it is in <,»^«. ,'«>''LV^,^/,;f,%^7 - f^^''^' ^'xplentur) ; 
 
 a uatOra proticisciintnr facile explentur (-</"<« 5«/ tflod Cic Fin. i, 16. 5.J.- The 
 %fu,se appetite.^ w/uc/i arise «••;;;" "ll'^'-^'vj^l'tcfntcc^^^^^^^^ or understood) 
 
 placin- of the relative clause }]^^'!'^'ll^^,^^^^^^ claise '. 
 
 n the principal sentence is ^^ >^'<l ^^J^^^^f' f.^* ,..^^^^^^ ,o the relative clauPe even if 
 
 ih) SouRM lines the grammatical aniecede.tis^^t an. ic^^^^ Hut this is admissible only 
 the latter/.>//o..w its princ pal sentencc^ o^^^^ he ce can occur only if the 
 
 Uxhi' ■<!/n<i^fi<' ^tnfecedtnt is omitted at the s«>" «;; , J rf the (i»-cs of the syndetic antece- 
 syn.letic antecedjM.t would be in '^;/?^>"'\"J .V,^'';:[,! ,am Sd U ui.lat in libris et guam 
 dent and of >''« relative are the sail, s IL^^^^^ .eipublica> rjuan,) ; This i« 
 
 m.xime probat fef"P^ra(ioru^mvv,\n^^^^^^^^^^ „^,,,t of 
 
 that hidance of the government ' 'f^ ,^.\ .J/;^/^^^^^^^^^^^ ^ ^ habeo .«.v litteras quas 
 
 ad eui.dcm misisti) ; I have ^''^/''''fl,^,^^^^^^ iecisset) ; That the come- 
 
 31. _ l><,ptilo ut placSrent (pui,< f^cls^ety</// /<i^ ( -J'^ m*^^^^^ _ rpjjj^\.„„^,ruction oc- 
 
 5i .s he had made, should please the f;^, >',';• /^li.A^^^^^ absolute as : Ex- 
 
 curs also it the antecedent would he a ^^ '^'J;',^ i j'^^ * ';.,V."/J «^^^ he had explaine.l 
 
 positis ry./as- in Corsica |v.v J^';'^^»''^^,^ =4^ "^^^^^^ ,,ause might he Uken 
 
 Ihe deeds (which) he had P^'rform^d u tors, a 1^ u^^^^^^^^^ Antecedents are thus left 
 
 as an interrogative cuuise) ^^'/ • ;^,T' f/- ..,7/,Vi .(v .'overned hy ditlerent prepositions, 
 
 cut if the syndetic ^"t^-c^'^^^"^^ ^i^ Ibi Oi icipT c////* <^,nfM^s anXnWclum vnef,piis 
 alth<.u<Mitheyareintlie sanccas^as IbiCn. a^ ,^^„^.^^ ^^„j^ 
 
 constitlt( = onn ds copns de (/'«'V'-^,' " i iv o-, ?> ^- In poetry, the grammatical ante- 
 Uuy.^e troops which m-o in-'"';;;";;' !^';V ,^\^iL\ive'ctuse is ften^\lace^ relative 
 
 cedent, which is thus translerred «« J ^.,fV,r ,< in» a member of the principal sentence, 
 attribute, so as to have the »l>P^''Vrance of btin, a n,un nr^^^^^^^^^^^^ i^^^^ ^^^^^^^ .^ 
 
 although it is not in the case l};!)'';'"'],^^^^^^^^^ urbem statuo, ea 
 
 not admissible in prose ; as : /'/^'^/f ,;{'', .our" V i- .En. 1, 573.- Naucratam quern 
 vestraest); Theci/y.»t7*icViI(s ml inld.sj^^^^^^^ ^.^.^, ,Va'/m//ex, 
 
 convenire volui, is in navi non ^''«^^^ T .'J'''"',.;jf Amim 4 1, \.- PafrOnus gut vobis 
 nh^^n I wished t«> .oe, xyas no o" !^>^e sh p. ^ ;^^t_Am j.i 4 i ^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^.^^^ 
 
 fuitf.itilrus perdid.stis = iuipa irm^ omission of syndetic antece- 
 
 you had. riaut. Au . 2, 2, l'^-" '\ "wP/'o nic ooets hardly any of the above-mentioned 
 
 afferri tibi ( = 'J ".'"\'' '''''[''.'' i'\l']^]l^,^^^^^^^^^^ of the relative clause is taken 
 
 r "lllliVC Udjuclivc, is Callwl • InCOUI-OKATION of TUL ANTtChUtM . 
 
 principal sentence, while the relatne *^7';<r";^^. ,,( ' ;,ii,.,.tive denotes the oeneual 
 
 form il used (a) if «IV' ^^ h''"'"^.»',;;!!!!.'; I , e • e t b? , 's s ^ Ic >.' (h) if the ante- 
 CLAss of nouns to v^•lHch the gram at.calac^ J ;^^,^.^^ ,,^^,,,, ^,, ^, 
 
 cedent is to the vroverni.g 'V "\"' X, /,/"'' "LS-i(^^^ leqa>i-l^natio : Romani- 
 corresponding roW«r^<<?«?><0'//i m the '^'"-'/V^Sfve ^-m of course ;*o/ a-ree witli the 
 no,nI In this form «'f .t^';- -^/^^^^^ /^^ ^^^! fJ ^ th^ 'hi« ^^^-' 
 
 grammatical antecedent of the dai-^e V'.n F th ai iiositicui placin- the Latiurfovern- 
 
 -i In L^^Thri^^i:^:^..-^^^^^ 'i.i';;^ de-cVlbed ilbo e m 1 ? 1 e'coir. 
 
 ^^Z iJc S^i^^^^o^ pS." J^t!^^^ TlKfLaSL and English idioms 
 
 507 
 
 exprccpcd in Latin, must be recast in the form mentioned almvp «« • m^« • 
 jusMt in olta.<^iro quodam, gtjo; est ar^o/- .Etnje hi fom S.^ /J. J ^* Hominem suspend! 
 the genus) ; lie ordered lue man t..SuS:' on a,. XilXri %}1'V^'V'-''^ ""^' «''^ 
 market-place (a tre, on th,- market-place "of he u'u'; of 'j^t.^f rfe" v '" ' '^^"'a 
 Singulis sepfni //wy(/a tri.ici dahantur Qui nuMll/^ niZ.ulLf^ r^' ^^^- } ''^''- 2. 3, 18.- 
 tur i^u.di.s being the specie«, and JJSX? ^^T ^ "^J^!^^^,^!^^^^ «Pl'^HS: 
 (peeks) of Wheat were g veii, a measure whir/t (nr-KvlnU,,:'' -lo each seven modii 
 iius' at Athens. Nep. Alt. 3 5 - lli mm T./iJ^^i k^^^ niea.snre ) is called ' medim- 
 
 e.st in proviMca. (yU.^/;.^ a phiral , o n^^S/s^^^^^ Quc, cMtas 
 
 to th • nouns denoting the inhal,itant^s ot auTc y\!r co m corresponding 
 
 are the graniM.aiical aniecedent.s, th f "mVrnh noun of Jh ? /!h ^''' "'"'"'f^'* "'" I^^'"«""« 
 
 i»ct,ies;. ±j, uppuis negotia procflrat 
 
 •ill Li,;r ^V ' "*!"' «'^ iiequeniiy made th( 
 
 ovc,- i„,„ ,„lvvr.'iHl rulativi- c alls, "ami „r,vi,n l, I , i " ';'?"«•» "f ""cli foi-ms pass 
 inane. <„/i,,lei„m hoc esse qii" lain "C- ,«1/1 ■r.lin .'''''•''' r"° l^"li>'"''- '"' : Evlli- 
 
 els eq.iiMiMi';;';:^' iic M, "'^::!1 n;'":;''^^^^^^^ 
 
 iH'.n Ihrimn in.o piison " e. B ij • «?,%''"' ^"""' '*•'"'='' "'«, all nalions, had 
 10 Ihe in.livi.liial i, imes of „: amb:,::.,"i„ '''l? .V/™'™" «»«««' would have reftrrc I 
 
 "'4:;'.?;;:'"";:''^ '"^ -Min-Uld iir!hSsTar;;;;-,aVfon,' '"""" '"" ■"""« ■■«"I'assador-, 
 
 onii::'S{.^:^:;::^Ti::::i;zss^ 'ii^/^a^z^r^^ «-«i '^ ,o.„.u., „„„„ 
 
 nyms (as />(w/,/u and ces) or with iff. -.m ''" ,^'rn ally the same, hein- either svno- 
 q Fal>ius aliquot mainlnas ^.J- ,^7 "S 'T'"- '•^'* ^'^'''''" «"^ diel): 
 
 faciendam cu/avit; Q. Fabi,f^t c ie ,• wonnnv/rl''^'"''''" ^'"^ ^'«"«"^ «^dein 
 luulct-monev) he bulk a tempi. ",' Venus iiri" 3, SeJZf^'- ^''^ ''•f ^^'^^'^''^ <«"«• 
 Jour days, a ^' umber of dalKv/dTuo^^^^^^^ S^natedecreed a thank>givin^ o/* 
 
 was decreed for a tha^sgfvi^^^^Yno fonm^^ war L v'^s'i?^' "^ ^^ '"""^ ^"^^ ">» ^^1^^^'^ 
 
 
 differ 
 ti 
 
 Imposition is^asit'S-elV,'';;;;;!; ed'l^n-^.:'^:^^.!^ fi"^'i^ "H 
 
 rtlat^^e 18 an absolute adjective. See Item. 8 
 
 apposition i^ «« it Wo o " 7- '',":■ ^ening rtouii t/i apjx>sii 
 
 relative is an ///..w,,/...,!,-::.*:..""'.. *^™ ^^ •"« apposition is most Irequently used if the 
 
'508 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 turn, in which instnuce the pyndotic antocodent. lantvm is conornlly oTpropepd in the 
 principjil sentence, hs; \&i:u\\\>taiitiiin In latitiuiinem j» itehut v'mw/'/m/ori aciesinstructa 
 occiipare poterat; Tlii;» hill contaimd so 7/jvcA gr/ow/it/ as an army drawn up for battle 
 could occupy. Cies. B. G. 2, 8.— Se.- Ex. 20-25. 
 
 1. Tantiim helium, tani dinturnum, tarn lonjjo latCquc dippfrsnm'. <7»/o bello omr\f% 
 pontes premehautur, PompPjus extrCnia hieinc apparavit', incdijl jpstsl'e conleci». Cic. 
 l>e". M. 12. — 2. Erant oninlno itinira du<>, qu'ihvs itimrihii.'i domo^ exire poK-eiit. Cics. 
 B. O. 1, 6.-3. Antefuixinni* Clodii. quoinfundn facile inille hominuin versabanlur», 
 superiOrem se putilrat Milo? Cic. Mil. 20. hi.— 1 Tanti 7nn'>fidi'^ crimen'. ckI maUffrio 
 tarn iIl^iil;nc ftipplicinin esr constilfltuni**. pro]):Tre te cense;* posse tnlibiis viiis? lb. 
 Kosc. Am. 2(».— 5. Quarn quisque in partfitn'' casu devC'iiit, qtKrque primo .«if/na con- 
 ppexit, ad h(ec constititio. C:l>s. B. G. 2, 21.— (5. Hiineril" deleta. q>iO'< civu^ belli ca- 
 lamitas reiiciuos feceiat'^, fi s»ese Thermisi» colliH-jTiant"*. Cic. Verr. 2. 2, 3.').— 7. Homi- 
 nes sapientis, (-.r (jtnhus rfhus maxime respnblica labrnat'^. ^jv niaxiine niedCri con- 
 venit'"*. II). liosc. .Am. 53. 154.— S. Vinces'^, hi hoc statiieiis'», (jiKirnin Idndmn <:lo- 
 riain adanijlris'", quihiis artibna de laxdea comparatitur, in eis elaborandinri-" 'tibi e-se). 
 11). Fain. 2. 4, 2.— 1>. Eodie. quo coiisuCraf^' intcrrdUo, ho-tis sequitur. Ca^s. B. (i. 1, 22. 
 — 10. Nostri n(m lonjrius quani quein ad fnetn'^"^ porrecta-' loca aperta pertinCbant, 
 cedeniTs^* iiisequi aud«?l)ant. Cies. B. (i. 2.']'J.— 11. Foras^» educite 7»/am introduxistis 
 lidicitiom'^^. Plant. M<>s». 2, 2. 74.— 12. Nunc disturbe qnas statiiisti"^ inaclniui< H). 
 Pseud. 1, 5, 137.— 13. i^na^ /in has pecndes non edunt. homines edunt. lb. \'an\. 3. 3, 31. 
 14. (^unni venissen) «(I Ar/iam/nt^ qui inonx niihi cum Bibulo coniniflnis est, Cassins 
 nosier feliciter ah AntiochCa hostem rejeceiat. Cic. Fani. 2, K», 2.-15. Quuni Syinaditi^' , 
 quuni P/tifatnelii-^, (juum Iconii"* essem, quihus in np/nd'j^ omnibus commoiiltus sum, 
 omnesjum istlus «generis le^atiOnes craiit constitQtu'-'^. lb. 3. S, 5.— 16. Finni et con- 
 ptanfes amlci eliu'en<li «nnr, cuju< fj^neri.-< est niai^na penuria-". lb. Am. 17, <52. — 
 17. II»>lveiii /^f7f7/o.s' ad Cir-^aiem mittulit nohilissimos civitjltis, r^/yw.« /e!f/ff//o/jij<rNan)mC- 
 jus et Veruchetius principem locum ohtinCbanf. Cses. B. (». 1, 7.— 18. Ca?sar, in Car- 
 liiite-i'^^. And*'"'-^. Tnrcnesque'^^, qu,^ riri/ilf&Ji i)roi)inquflp his h-cis erant, nbi helium 
 pesserat, Icirionibns in hiiternacula deductis, in Itali.im jirofei tus est. lb. 2, 35. — 
 19. P. Crassus pra^fectos tribunosque nnlitiim complurls in tinitimas civitjltes frumen- 
 tandi ciusS dimlsit. quo in rtutnno erat T. Terrasidius. ("a^s. B. (J. 3. 7.— 20. Ulraque 
 civitas r/z/ot/ //'^/<>m^° in juvcntflte^i erat armilvit, misiKpic. Li v. 35, 38. — 21. Bhodii 
 quo<l j[(rri>t. qucHl rofx>n< in jtivM-ntflte Tuerat, ami-er.mf. lb. 37, 12 — 22. Quod auri, quod 
 aryentl, quod ornanieittf/ruin in urbibus Siciliie fuit. id Verres absiulit. Cic. l)iv. 
 Ctec. 5. — 23. Littene L. Metelh hoc. quantum est ex Siciliil frunien'i honiotini^'', exara- 
 vSrui'.t^', lb. Verr. 2, 3. 18. — 24. 'l'ri<;nita tyranni^^ tria miltia sii)i satellinini constiiuC- 
 runt, quanfum^^ ex tot cladil)us nec^* civi'uin superfuerat. Just. 5. 8. — 25. Quod culque 
 ternjxtns ad vivendum datur, eo debet esse contentus. Cic. Sen. 19, (59. 
 
 Hem. G. The graniin;itic:il antecedent is p:enerally iinderHtood if it is a 
 wonn u^ fiencvdl ///<;><>r^ (denoting the genei'al idea of persons or things 
 § 35:i loll.). Such antecedents are either implied in an absolute forni-ad- 
 jective (omiiis, mulii, unus, duo^ aliquis ete.), which may be the «yndetic 
 
 1 1 iterally: 'So lonij and widely dispersed ', i. e. coverin-j^ so vast an extent of coun- 
 try. — ■■' to prepare. — ^ irom their homes. — * premises. — * U) l)e enirajred. to be present. — 
 « crime. — ' chursre.— ^ inalejicio ftupidiciuni coiiftituere, to constitute a punishment for a 
 crime. — ' part of the battle-irronnd.— '*• to stop. — »> city in Sicily.— »2 a/iqu<t/t rellquum 
 facere. to spare the life of somebody. — ^3 Thennic. a Sicilian city. — '■* to establi-h one's 
 pelf. — ^^lafH>rdre ex aUqud re, to sutler from an evil. — ^^ conrenit aliquem, it behoove.* some- 
 body,—" to succ»'ed.— 1" to propose.— >" The clause ^ quaruin. . .ada/ndris' depends on 
 the iiext clause '(///i/^'/.« . .cotnparantur'' {kiudc^ beini? tlie antecedent), and this clause, 
 airain, depends on the next sentence. — '^" in arte aliqiui elaf/ordre, to devote one's 
 pell loa sphere (of activity^-'*' supply* Ao.v^A'xf// //i '.—"■•' Construe : ad euin finem {\io\\\{) 
 ad quern /x)t reef a. The relativ<> is inv()lv«'tl in the construction of the participle, and 
 the sentence is best rendered by takinir /jO'Vi-cfa a^ the finite verb (/xoTtgedanf). and 
 omit im'tinebant in the translatiun.— ''^ fxyrH(/i. to be stretched forth, to extend.— '■'* the 
 flei inir enemv. — ^s j^^.^ p 219. — -* names of cities. — 27 leqafiones consfituere, to choose 
 embassies —2s dearth. — ^' names of (iallie tribes. — 3" robur — everyone able to bear arms. 
 — SI amonir their yoiiH!.' men.— ^'frumentuin hornofinum, this year's c<»rn. — ^s trf^)louLrh 
 out; said of a letter of Metelliis, in as miicli as .Metellns by fliis public letter, had in- 
 duced the farmers to cultivat»' tlieir llelds, which else they would not have done from 
 fear of bein<? deprived of their crop-.— 3* The thirty tyrants, iuisiitiired by Lysandcr 
 after the end of the Peloponnesian war. —35 'i\y, coiistiu(ti«)n partly belongs V) Obs. 4, 
 
 Eartly to Ous 3. quantum havini: the lOrce of qui numerui<, the j,'ranunatical antecedent 
 eing the numeral noun (via inillia. — 3« — ny quitiem. 
 
 ANTECEDENTS OF RELATLVT^S. 
 
 509 
 
 antecedent of the relative {is, 7ne,ta7ifus etc.); or it is altogether omitted 
 without being replaced by an absolute form-adjective. 
 
 If the antecedent is implied in an absolute form-adjective, the latter 
 takes either tiie masculine, or the neuter irender in the plural or singular 
 according to tlie rules ^ 'SrA foil., and ^ ;;58 foil,, the relative, as di^^junct 
 adjoclive (§304) agreeing with it in gender and number. If there is no 
 such absolute form-adjective, the relative takes that form, as to number 
 and gender, whicli its syndetic antecedent would have, if expressed. 
 
 Obs, 1, Nouns of general import {ftomo, res etc), as gratnmatical antecedents of rela- 
 tive adjectives may \ni expressed as such, in which instance the general rules §612 are 
 applied, as : Homo, qui et summa gravitate et parens esset, olistupuit Cic Verr 2 
 1, 2«.,— Jlmmnesqui sese student prastare ceteris animalibus etc. Sail, Cat 1 1 — fres 
 sunt res qucE ohst.nt Kos^cio. Cic. Rose. Am, 13, 35.— Cnrio rcprehendit eas res quas 
 Ciesar adm.nistrayisset in Gallia ; Curio censured what CiRsar had done iu the adminis- 
 tration ol Gaul. Cic. Brut. (i<i, 218, 
 
 Or this kind of grammatical antecedent» may he implied in an absolute form-adject- 
 ive. Jn tins instance the r-lative takes the number and render <.f the form-adjective, 
 as: C///n^*', ^//^^/^/y?/.^>a]lquId consiliiaiita'tatis fuit eo convenerant. Cies B G 3 16 — 
 iNunc diets aliquidquod ad rem periineat. Cic. Rose. Am. 18, 52.— Al/«7 o</o</ ip>is iu- 
 
 rr^'''l!l'„7ao ?w"""' n^V '^"'- ^'''* ^- ^* ''^^^'- ^''''^ ''""f 5^"^ '^'"^ efticien.la dicendo. 
 i i.f! -V ♦. ^'•~ ^''V* ?"'P agreement is applied to the sundetic antecedent^ of the 
 n, ative. i( they arc used abs<.luie|y. as : />■ qui ponat summum boiium in vnluptate : He 
 «'//0 places the highest good m pleasure. Cic. Ott'. 3, 33,- MercatOres ea qum ad eflemi- 
 nandns. animos pertinent, imix.rtant ; Merchants import what tends to efleminating the 
 
 ingb /rAarth^y- wish, lb. 3, S'"'" ^""'"'^' *^ ^"^^ ^'"'""^' ^^'^^""^ i ^«" '^^^^i^^^ ^^i'l- 
 
 -^..^I'^^'i' '^^''.''V^''^ "'^'''.' w''l'«>'>t any form-adjective implving the grammatical antece- 
 S . • „. ; / r '"^ia."^-^' >t lakes the number and gender uhich the grammatical aiitece- 
 omt uould haveil exj)i(sse(l,as: Qui stadium currit eniti debet ut vincat : (He) who 
 
 nn"nw '"'"'l' ".'"''^ *"'"'■ ^''n.''''!' ^"'''- ^^'^ ^' '^. 42.- LegSiis, tril)anis ?mperat quod ixpm\ 
 qu inq le lucio opus est : Tothe stalT officers he irave orders abeyitwhat each of them had 
 
 seemed tit; c4s,'b" 4 8^ ^""^ ^^^"'" ^*"^ ^'^'''^ respoudit ; To this Caesar replied t/-Aa< 
 
 « .?."'!;.!:/£ '"'.•''''^•"'''•J.".!'."^."'" ^^^ iiistancos mentioned Obs. 1, must be considered as 
 S, irflw. I "^Vr''^9 /^'^>^N f'^-'^anseit always refers to a previous noun exp.essed or 
 1 ndeistoK . li.uce It nt,>r tak>s the ahmtute forms qitis and quid, unless it is merged 
 he ,ndeJinhe7./j,v9.t,v and qnidquid. But. in order to distinguish the two relation^of 
 11: ;''""^^'f ">rding as it relets loan antecedent expressed or understood, the latter 
 aic (l.signated as arsolutk kkl.^tives % althoii<:h. strictly speakin^, a relative can 
 never be absolute in the sense applied to other form-adj.-cfive- relative tau 
 
 T,.Mw *'•"'' '■^l""^*''^ ^'''-respond to tiie foHowing Em:. ish forms : 1) if referrincr to 
 r. :"1 f • ^"' *"'''>'^1'V""='. I<'.;1'« who '. • the one who '. or ' who ' (qui mpit. facet : who 
 «; a;:.^;;';'?;" '^ ''T^ '•'^ -i^-»'); and in the plural to 'those whA', ' they who\ 'v.!,"^ 
 ffi.i.N.^o' iv''''"''^-/"'',"'' ''■'.'" ';*y ^''^ "'"^' mistaken).- 2) If referring to things, the 
 nuiT^l^ nr ; wf,*T'""H '"^ •''"'■"' '^'"^ correspond to ' whar (that which) : Quod bo- 
 
 Tho t^ / ; '/"l- ""-""^''u''" '^""'' P'-osunt'i : what i.« qood, is useful. Sen. Ep! 117, 
 ns?^, iwl/.o.H ,1? i'^ '®^* r ^^"^ "'""f al, quantitative, and qualitative classes cannot be 
 used vMihout their syndetic an.ecedents (as many, as mucli. suck as), but the Latin ante- 
 San, Mi'ihn'/.onr. wl '"'''' ''V ^"«"^^''^ J^^'^^l"^ ^^ ni>'^h AS I can. Victoria quantam de 
 
 ha "^i er o H ti "^4'?'" •^''" i'-'^'^'^^'VJ '^^ ^^^«^ " ^''^^«""y <^ nobody, up to that day, 
 nail gainea over the Samnites. Liv. 10. 38. ." f j^ 
 
 «IBS. 3. The syndetic antecedents of a relative may have the force of both absolute 
 
 « ; ; Wj;"'' "^1J".^'"^'"\/§ ^^«i^). ^ di.sji.nct, they refer to nouns previc uslv^vcpres^^^^^^ 
 
 iMte S Hv.ru 'n' '• the relatives which reJer to them, are treated as if they were abso- 
 i.kMi^^^^^^^^ antecede.its of either kind are frequently omitted and 
 
 unneisiood, acco'ding to the following rules : 
 A. The syndetic antecedents tnu-f Im- omitted • 
 
 de«Mul/or^w?/T"^'f''^*'"'V?*'''-"^' '•''"'" *^ noun Of general import, is an absolute in- 
 d( finite, or numeral lorm-adj.cnve expressed, as: Mnl/i sunt oui dicant etc • There 
 are m.y.^ who say (not •inulti sunt iHi or n qui dicant'). Sen. 4n,T 4 - Nunc ( iicis 
 iSc' C s-?"' l'""'""'"'' ^''"^.>'«" s:^yso,ne(hinq that beh.n.^s to'the subjict. S 
 fadSit • Th..r: '^rr/ii''/; ^""^ ^/w- '!*;"*' ?,^ «nitore tractata. admirabilem eloquentiaiu 
 laciaut , there are two things which, if well employed by a speaker, make an admirabl» 
 
510 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 eloqnoncc (i. e. novcr fail to cxcUc the admiration of the «ndicnce). Cic. Or. 37, 128.— 
 \\\\\ witti oinnls ihc syiidcfic aiiticodciit may be eilhtv exprohr-od, or und«T>l()()d, as: 
 Oiiu.e id quo <:aiulC'mii9 vuliiptas est; F.nrijUnng U • vohiinasMJUiniJ^emeiit) in uhich 
 Ave liiul pleaf^nrc. Cic. Fin. 1, 11, 37. I5ut : Omnxa (j'ue ahsiint vehemeiiler iiominuiu 
 meiiiTs pertiirl)ant ; All the t/iinffs that are not preeeiii. (wliich we do nut eee; greatly 
 di>iurl» the mind!* of men. Civ». B. G. 7. {S4. 
 
 el) Syndetic aiitrcedeiits are not admissible if the indefinite form-adjective implying 
 tTieurummatical antecedent of the relative ii< e/lijjfiaUfi/ oniitted. An ellipsis of this 
 kind reirulariy occurs (rt) if €*v<-(^in the meanint; 'to exist ') is tlni (abstract) predicate of 
 tlie si'nVence, the relative clause being a 'predicate clause' (p. 480, Obs, 9). In this in- 
 le^tance, the omitti-d antecedent is the ^utijtct (nominative or accusative) of the sentence, 
 while the relative may be in any case required by the construetion of the clause. Such 
 sentences are. in Kni/lisli, introduced by ttie impersonal form ' There are ;>f;>Y >/<<«>' ', 'there 
 avepmide \ ' there are those (amney, ' there are things (occasions etc.) \ as : l)e impuden- 
 tijl singulari sunf (jni mirentur; Thu'e are those (some) who are astonished at his re- 
 niarkabh; im|)iidence (the form sunt ei qui being Un-Latin). Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 2.— See 
 Ex. l-.i. and tl)e Ex. quoted j). 486.— Sometimes comjxunuls of the verb ex.sy are used 
 witli the same construction, as : Ad-^uiit qui vos hortentur; Tliere are those present who 
 admonish you. C;p?. B. C. 2, .'W.— (h) If inren'ire or reperue is the predicate, in which 
 instaiict; the indefinite antecedent is eitlier the transitive ol)ject, or the i)assive subject 
 of the sentence, as : Non facile est inien'ire qui, quod sciat ipse, non tradat alteri ( = in- 
 venTre aliquem Qui' '■turn qui'' being inadniissil)I(') ; It is not easy to lind an>/one who 
 WMUild not teach others what he knows himself. Cic. Fin. .3, 20. (IH — Vix inreu'itur qui, 
 lal)oribus susceptis. periculistpio aditis, non tpiasi mercGdem desideret glorijim ; Hardly 
 anyone is found (ej-isfs) who. afier undergoing hardships and dangers, should not be de- 
 sirotis of renown as his reward. Cic, off. 1. 19. 0.5. See Ex. 4. 5.— Here belong the pas- 
 give predicates ' inrt^nfi sunt " and * rei>er(i yunt ' qui ;»s synonyms of sunt qvi (See p. 421). Ji). 
 
 — (ri If llie predicate of the sentence is a veib denoting '■tohare\ 'toi>end\ 'to select\ 
 or verbs of similir import, in which instance the indelinite antecedent is conceived as 
 the transitive object, or passive subject, as : Tum quum hdOlljas quos imitarcre, non 
 niiiltuni proftciei)as ; When yui had person^ \\\\of\-\<) to imitate, y<»u did not make much 
 pr<'<;ifss. Cic. Fam. 9. 21. — Misiinu^ qui pro veciQra solvt-ret ; I sent a })erson to pay the 
 freiuht. Cic. Att. 1, :j. 2.— Jhle^/isti quo.t Konne relinqiieres, ^//o.< tecum educeres; You 
 seltcfed some whom you were to leave in Rom<-. and oth>rs whom to take out with you. 
 Cic. Cat. 1. 4. 9.— Ex. <5. 7. 8. — The same o nissiou occurs when the suited ol passive 
 veri)s of tliis kind is conceived as subject-ablative in the construction of the ablatives 
 absolute, as: Hannibal Ibenim copias tiajecit 7>/-a'///i.s>iA' (/'/i .Mpiiim transitus ppecula- 
 renuir; Hannil)al sent his troops across tlie Hwr affer hat ing stnf a scouting party i/* 
 a(/iY//K« /(> r«'connoitre the i)asses of the Alps [literally : 'alter having sent (.some) who 
 were to etc.]. Liv. 21. 2.i. For this omission of the sul>ject-al)lalive (wliich after ttie 
 veri)s mentioned is always neces.sary), and for other indelinite subject-ablatives, the 
 omission ol whicli is optional, see p. 17."). 17fi. 
 
 a. The al)solute and disjunct syndetic antecedents may or 7uny not fje omitted : 
 
 1) If they are the snhjects (nomiiiative or accusative), and neuter antecedents, if 
 they are the 8iit)ject.< or trandfire (ttjecfx oi any kind of verb in the i)ririeipal sentence. 
 The i)i{oi'riN(j of the syndeiie antecedents may l)e considered as the rule if they imply 
 persons, biMUg subject-nominatives, and the relative is likewise the subject of its own 
 clause. In this instance the antecedents are only <'Xj)ressed if the autiior means certain 
 ])ersons. or lays u certain stress upcn tlt<!m, as : Ifi eonteiidCnint qui apiul me et amici- 
 liil. et benefic lis, et dignitjlte |)lurimum i)ossinit ; Those ai)plied to me [tiie author meant 
 Certain persons whom for important rea-ons he did not choose to nu-ntion by name] w/io 
 have the greatest weight with me by tlieir friendship, benefactions, and cliaracter. Cic. 
 Itosc. Am. 1. 4. Similarly : I'l sine contumelijl a me nominarintur <i qui se decemviros 
 sperani futfiros. Cic. Leg, Atrr. '2, 21.— But : Quum ab arjliro arcessebantur,9//t consules 
 fierent ; When people (iiersons, farmers) were taken from the i)Iougli /o IxMiiade consuls. 
 II). Kosc. A. 18.— Omnium est commflnis, qui tuit hosti- suOrum ; H>- w/io was the foe of 
 his own kindred, is the common I'liemy of all. Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 15.— Doe i lis est ij< qui aiiente 
 viilt audire ; Docile is he who wisln-s to listen attentively, [where some manuscripts have 
 is, and others omit it]. Auct. Her. 1. 4, 7.— See Ex. 9-11. — If the syndetic antecedent 
 (beiMi;a;>e/vo//), iseithera subject -accusative, or if ii is a nominative, but tlie relative is in 
 a ditli-reni case, the antecedent, likewise, Wofttn omiite<l. but (perlia])s» more frequently 
 ex])ies-e'l. The followini: are exanqjles of omitted antecedents of such kind : (Cu'^ar 
 dixii), qui ( — €0< qui\ siium timOrem in angusiias itineris conlerrent. faeere arroiranter ; 
 Cajsar said tliat tlio<t who relerred their fear to the bad roads («s-igned the bad roads as 
 the cause of their fear) were actinir arn «raiitly. Cjes. B. (J. 1, 41. — Divifiacus dixit, qui 
 ( = eo-iqui) ejusconsilii priucipes fuissent, in liritanniam profiiL'isse. Cies. B. (I. 2. 14. 
 
 — Utile est uti moiu auiuii ( = eti7n uti motu animi) qui mi nitiOue non potest ; It in 
 
 ANTECEDENTS OF RELATIVES. 
 
 511 
 
 riixhj that he who (a person who) cannot act by reason should act bv emotion Cic Tns/» 
 «•>':h. 7f*'>"",7'''^ auiicitia, 7'//^'/^' iu ipsi^ inest causa cur diligantur;' Those are 
 A • "m '^'•'';".'^'"1> who.<,ownj>erso„,iiv^ the reason why they should be lovS «c 
 Am 21, .»-<^,/?4,Av auiem luec sunt coinmunia, civitalis ejusdem hai.endi sunt • ThiZ 
 /o /Mom this is common must be considered as citizens of the same State. II, Lt- 
 ., Z.i.~ Janio plus gratia aKjiie o|)es valnC-re ut, quorum de j)a'na a-elutur, tribflni inilil 
 .tin crearenl.n- ( ^ ut et quorum etc ) ; That the (very) ,mn whose pu.iisinn m was un er 
 iscussion were elected military tribunes. Liv. 5, ;^.0.- EdictunV est, v^//^'.^^ n^/erS 
 . e. ei quibu, rtderetur) n, casira i.roficiscerentur ; That those who liked ini.d.riTo to 
 the cainp. Liv. r,, 2(».— II:ec vociferanteni quihus erat imnerfltum i ^ ei auibu^ id erir 
 ttnperatum) jugiilant : While he was thus v<fciferatin.^ thole to whom the orT^was-nven 
 killed him. Curt. :i 2. 20. See Ex. 12-1.'-, and Juv. :i, lOi.- If the antecedent denotes 
 
 ouS' '''nr'rf /■'" "'"h""^ '^'i """"■^'■"!.' ''^ '^« '^y"^"^'^ antecedent are eqtuiMv /re! 
 
 ? i/i ^^^' /^'''^^'^-^N ^*' ''ci- witii or without a syndetic antecedent, is expressed by 
 
 •A«r whether in the plural or bin-ular, as : Cicero non ea solum quee vivo se actide^ 
 
 run liitura pnedixit, sed etiam qu<t nunc usu veniunt cecinit ut vates : Cicero not oilv 
 
 rTns^lHiU fie ;-''l';r"ir 4" 'iTf "''t/"^''''"^- '•"'' 'i'^- " ^'•«P"«^ foret'ohi'S "?s S 
 
 iiaiispiimg Nep. Att. K,, 4. [Here the syndetic antecedent ^a mav be droooed in the 
 
 . s, p,op..s.tion, a.1,1 add.d to the sec<,nd.]- Ex hoc genere est i//v^ 9C \i u er ei 
 
 qui terogasset iium tibi molestus es.set futurus. . .Inqiiisti : Of the same k iiul i" 7/.//«J 
 
 vol!* 'cic" or ''274 '2-'^ 'r""*' '""" ^1''?*''^/^ """^V' '''^^ wlH'ther he was i./tr id ng'ot 
 
 >ou. Cic. Or. 2. (.4. 2o9.— Cje.<ar co-novit. Considium quo'l non vidisset nro viso sibi 
 
 •enun Masse ; Cie.^ar saw that Considius had reported to him as hiiowif observation 
 
 S ni;';/ rmul';!'.!?'"'- ^- "^-^^ n-?;^^'-»... est qu^ conor. difficile Jst 9.^ poih^ 
 ccor, \\/,<tr I undertake is great: what 1 prom se s difficult Cic Rose Com / M 
 
 f .ati^e;.M;i "^^ul^j^.:^.^^, V^^^^^^i :;;^\;;^,sr^Sitr 
 
 are either expressed <,r ou.itted, as : Tantom clqiic- tribue ,liim eS oS^m inse effl 
 cere possirt ; We should give to everyone (of our Iriendsi ^VL^(^^^S•^sn w^^ 
 
 ^he to C mfV"- ^'' ^"V ^r''^^'^ "S*'^'"*'> ^''«"^"''^ '^ velletdarem He wrote should 
 ^ o^r, ^•'"'"'- (i'?nuch as he wanted. Cic. Att. 10, 15, 4. Ex. 20 21 ^nouui 
 
 Z) 1 he .same omission <.f the syndetic antecedent m</y or may not take place if the ante- 
 
 fsfn /L'"^" ""^ '^''^'\'" ''"'^ '^^ relative, accordingto the c(.„s,ruction i?s mvn cla^^^^^^ 
 
 M, .0 H ""'^'^ '■'*'*' ''^ '»V:.='"'^'«^'dent. o. il both the antecedent and the relative a"e^lenend- 
 
 t( I thesame;>;-fy>o.vi/eo//.v.as : ImiiCmur^wwcuIque visum est ( =. 'o. Xv i^nltArrciiT 
 
 imitate those whom It has seeme( to evervone) Cic Oil" 1 ^1 ns iii!;, r.iL.t .. , " ^.}^^ 
 
 wMu^d Sb f ;r'^-=^f "^>>'^*^^r-« v.^ebat) 'He^:ve-^than.^Mhe'h SJ^g^lS"^ 
 Ls ;.•/ ; ' J -'''i"^■a'•"^''"/''^^^'A.^=equilurDemocritum non fere labitur ( ="n?Sr/. 
 
 F , 'r See' \^%''T 'Vi^^:^^^' 1^^'' u^haH^.\n-n-) he follows Democri us Ck. 
 r Ml. 1, o. >te i\\ 2i-u.— 1 hustheantecerleiit is ircneialv omitted if the relntivo imUow fho 
 
 Jou c;i'.^U.'i',^2"^ misfortune in what (in those things in which) m'y family will x^eeS 
 
 r.SJfronrth-uo?n?p'^^^^ r€^av>^./if the case of the relative is rf^Y- 
 
 ..Z: . ^ "' V'^ antecedent (except ui the iistance mentioned No A) or if tfiP 
 
 r t^^H. . 'i. !v. 'f '"''' ^'"' ^•^•»'^'»dent on different prepositions, of f S er he ameceden? 
 sitio "^^' UrV "''■ r <^^^^-", 'J^'^'* ^'•'•'^' the (,;her of the two is dependent o a Spo- 
 1- ., e; nr , .tf".'^' '!'''*''^' ^" '^" >*yndetic autec deiits, whether they are absolute or Jis- 
 's .is mXSs Sll.^^'i t :Vi?;"' ^'^'I"-;-^«-'<'.: f •■ ,Vcrres eum cui legatL fuisset in hividiam 
 ta It he .V<M)een Ci . VvtT 1 'J ^ "' ^I'^d^ed-. expensed to h.-.tred that mrm whose adju- 
 trVw . ! • • ^' ; ^y}^- ^•'*' ^^•— ^onvidgliirdelniis-eejusmodideliberatinnemin 
 
 t_r<Hiucere in qna guod utile viderStiir c//m .0 quod honestnm eit comparar^tur It sJImis" 
 
 Tni.snJL''^'*;','.'''''"^- '■'"'^' "^ "V" ^^"«''''J> 'I'f ereryone imitate Vvhouretc:'w^<7uIdn)rinad"- 
 m ssible. slncer/^y^.7./gacco^llu-to§3(j2, /?. 20. 8 can onlvbe used in certain connecVin^ 
 
 of .nw'^'f''''''' '""^■"^''^■"^"^ ^ould refer to all ' witin.r.t (^xception \ T, a "ent^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 nrin.fn, '/'"*"' ?"?-^'/«^ '""^t be incorporated in the relative clause, the stijeS of thi 
 
 in ipaUentence bein- vari..usly expressed according t() the requiremems^o^^^^^^ 
 moMly by a syndetic antecedent repeated after the relative clause ^ ' 
 
612 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 ANTECEDENTS OF EELATR^ES. 
 
 513 
 
 he ouf-ht not to have introdnoed a dif»cns?ion of that kind, in which what peems useful 
 is compared zvifh what is moral. Clc. Off. 3. 3, 12.-Hi (Icdacen' colonias in m^ ajrroH 
 Quos vmerm\,vt in (/u(e loca pnetert-a vidcbitur; They uill Bend out cclonH-s /o ///o,v^ 
 hmis which thi'v w\\\ bnv, and moreover /o «// localities they will choose (literally Jo 
 those localities 'to which it will seem to tht-m i. e. to eend colonies). Cic. L.. Ai^'r 2. 2. 
 74 rilere in the first proposition the antecedent m* is retained because it is introdncea 
 by \\ nrepositioji which does nt)t refer to the case of the relative ; but in the second prop- 
 o-ltion the antecedent ea is dropped because both, the antecedent and the relative (le- 
 pend on the same preposition {in ea loca in qitce colonias deducere videbitur).J t>ee bx. 
 25 if, — The absolute antecedent takes here likewise the form Va res it the neuter 
 «'ender is not sufficiently marked bv the relative (see No. Ji, 2), as: Homines non reqnl- 
 runt ratiOnes ^<7/-Mm rennn <juas semper vident (which is more perspicuous mxneonim 
 aim vident) • Aten do not inquire for the causes of what ihey always see. tic. JN. i). i, .i«, 
 9« —It is remarkable that, in this instance, the relative frequently does not agree in gender 
 with the formal ^grammatical antecedent res, but Uikes the neuter form a>f tj the (intece- 
 dtnt were an a/>solute wtjective in the neuter, as ; Sumptu ne parcas uUa m re quod'^ ail 
 valetudinem opus sit; Do not spare expenses in aiujthiJ\g that may i)e necessary ror 
 vour recovery Cic Fam. H",, 4, 2.— Abundantia earvni rermnqim pruna mortaies du- 
 cunt ; By an abnndance o/ w/i«i men place first. Sail. Jug. 41, l.-Uelectu reljnsque 
 aliis omvm'T ipsos aqemia erant pcrlectis ; After the draft and the ohtr things which 
 had to be done by them were accomplished. Liv. 32, 21».- In me qindvis harmn rtrum 
 convenit omt sunt dicta ; ** To me ei-enjone of those /Ainr/N applies ttiat have been saut. 
 Ter Ileaut 5 1 4 —This agreement goes to sliow that, in the conception <»r the Latins, 
 the forms ea res, and id were identical, and that the genitives and datives ^us ret, ei ret 
 (§ 3«0) are really to be considered as the obhque cases of the absolute neuter id. 
 
 I) In the instance mentioned No. C, the antecedents maij t>e dropped 1) if they are the 
 completing objects of a verb (so that the case of the antecedent is clear from the eon- 
 iieetiouK rt/unhe relative is the subject of its own clause, as : Xerxes pra-mnim propo- 
 Puit (i e ei) qui invenisset novam voluptiltem ; Xerxes proposed a reward U^vthe man 
 «7/0 would dfscover a new pleasure. Cic.Tusc. 5. 7. 20.- Semper in prtvlio maximum est 
 nericulum (i e. ei)q>d maxinie timet; In battle the «rreatest danger always tliieatens 
 hVn who is most afraid. Sail. Cat. 58.- Ut agerentur gratiic d. e. tis) qui e miinicipiw vc- 
 ni>*-ent • That thanks should be returned /o /Aon*; irho had come Irom the towns. Lie. 
 PRed 'll See Kx 27. 2S.— 2> The antecedents may also be dropped if they denoie 
 tfiings (botii absolutelv used, or with nouns), being introdm ed by a preiK^sitwn govern- 
 in*' the accusative, and if the relative is the subject or completing «.bjeet ot its own 
 clause as : Nunc redeo ad quce mihi mandas ( = ad eaq'ue) ; Now I come to wliat yoa 
 want me to do Cic. Att. 5, 11.— NuUas adhuc litterasaeceperam privter quce { = pneter 
 eas qua) mihi in Trebulano reddit;e sunt ; I have not yet received any letter except t/iose 
 which were handed to me in the Trebulane villa. Cic. Att. .'i, 3.- Helvetii frumentum 
 oume jmEter quod ( = pneter id quod) s.-cnra portatilri erant, coml)aruni. <-ies li. c i, 
 5 - 3) Karelv the syndetic antecedent is dropped if it is an attributive genitive ot a 
 noun (provided that the relative is a subject-nominative), as : Novil lege, nt va junio- 
 rum non onvenisset ad imperatOrum edictuin, qxique injussu abisset, caput (i. e. eji/j> 
 caput) Jovi sacrum esset ; T.y a m>w law that the heads ff those ainongthe younger ci li- 
 zeiis who would not appear at the call of the coinmanders, and <>J those who would lca\c 
 without order, should be forfeited to Jupiter. Liv. 10, :i8. 
 
 E The svndetic antecedents are almost ahcays retained if they are pndWnfc-nomina- 
 tives, the relative clause describing a quality of the subject a>serted by ^he copula n 
 this construction, the syndetic antecedent (is) is a (/tvy//«t7 adjective, always releri ing to a 
 definite subject, and hence mav be also in the feminine. The relative and its antecedent, 
 in this wniiection, are rendered by 'a man who', 'such a person as to , or by sunilar 
 expresses, as : Zeno nullo m(.do is erat qin nervos virtQtis incident ; Zeno was by no 
 lnean<S nan to cut the sinews of virtue. Cic. Ac. I'ost. 1, 10 [An omission of ^s i n 
 Uiii an I the following examples would be inadmissible.] Non sumus n y'/o/v/m vaL^et 
 ft itn IS er -ire ; We a^e not that kind of pn-sons whose minds wander about nvH jout 
 aViMe// errOre.}. Cic. Oft". 2, 2.- En est Honnlna gens q>ue v.cta .^'V^' 7,%".f ' '^J^:, .1 ,' 
 Koman nation is of such a character as to find no rest if conque.ed. l.u. .), 3.- 1 >. a 
 tec Hlent is, in this construction, is omitted if it is coordinate to an at riimte of ai - 
 otie p. edieate-mmn, as : L. Pinarius erat vir acer et qui nihil in fide ^'«-"lOnun ni>on - 
 ret- L. Pinarius was a determined man, and one who w«.iild not lely on »1^^ f«' 
 c^f the Sicilians. Liv. 24, 37.- All clauses of this kind are ^/'-^^'f'^.^f '^^^J <P- ^^; 'V.^ "^ 
 always must have their own pre dicates in the subjunc tive (se e § ()_n). See hx. -i^J-ii. 
 
 -*Th^neut<'r quod may also be taken for a m'/ri^i«f7 relative, according Jo P^.WO 
 Ob» 2- or as a<'ieein-' with ilii' predicate-nonn opus, according to p. 52o, Obs. i, althou-^n 
 onvsUx ' opus e^t ' was hardlv felt as a noun by the Latins. • , u„ T>.,„ti„v 
 
 ** Two inferior codices read ^dictce\ which reading has been received by Bent.ey. 
 
 Obs. 4. An iNVERsiov of relative clauses (p. 505, Obs. 2) with absolute relatives may take 
 pi ice in all in-taiices where the use of a syndetic antecedent is admissible, lor the same 
 rea-ons as when the relative has an <'xpre-sed noun as antecedent. The svndetie ante- 
 cedent, in tins instance, is placed a/terihe relative clause, the relative reiainii g iis abso- 
 lute form in lien of the incorporation of the gramniaiical aniecedeiit, which, of course, 
 cannot take place where there is no noun t<> incorporate ; as : Quibus ratio a natura data 
 est, eisdem rema ratio data est ; Tothme to ivho/n r^'a»on has been given by nature, a right 
 reason has been given. Cic. Leg. 1, 12, 3:J.— Cie^ar L. Plaiicum jiihet, (^I'oruvi operfi cog- 
 noveratTasiretinni inteifectum.M*comprehensos ad se miitere ; Ciesjir directed Plancus 
 to arrest and send to him those, irhom he knevv to have been imjjlicated in the murder of 
 Tasiretius (lifeially: by nhose iigciu-y he kn-w that T. was murdered). Cies. B. G. 5, 25. 
 — Sperat se posse quod adeptus est per sceliis id per bieiminm effiindere atque consu- 
 mer»'; He hoj)Cs ihnt he can squander and consume within two years what he has ob- 
 tained by crime. Cic. Kosc. A. 2. 6. See Kx. 32-35. 
 
 1. Sunt qui urbanis rebus' bellicas' ant< pOnant. Cic. Off. 1, 24, 82.— 2. Fverunt qui 
 dicerent, non cceli niotii^ fieri ortus et occa^^iis'», sed nos ij)sos oriri et occiderc*. Sen. 
 N. Q. 7, 12.— 3. Nonne dicitis, esse e regiOne* nobis, e contraiia parte^ terra?. quitnUvr- 
 sis vestigiis» stent contra nostra vesiigia, quos ai-TiVoSa?" vocfitis ? Cic. Ac. I'r. 2. 30 
 32-3.— 4. Nihil est ditficilius qiiam rejwnre quod sit omiii ex partei» in sno genere per- 
 
 fectum. lb. Am. 21,70.-5. In HoinPro hoc maximum est," quod neque ante jlhim 
 quem^^ ille imitardur. neque»"'' p"st ilium qui eum iinitSri jiosset, inventus est. Veil 
 1, 5.— 6. Semper CimOnem j)edisequi'3 cum nunimi«i< sunt secflii. nt huberet quod sta- 
 tim daret. N.p. Cim. 4.-7. (^uuin e via lauLMiCrem's, miiqui hoc ei diceret. Cic. Phil. 
 1,5, 12.— 8. (^iiid ouici us qua m //«/>?/•«? quicuni omu\a aiideas sic loqui ut tecum ? lb! 
 Am. 0, 22. — 9. Stiiltissiin is e>t qui hominem ant ex vestt aut ex ctinditiOne" lesti- 
 inat'^. Sen Kp. 47.— 10. Maximum ornamenium amicitue toUit'" qui ex ea tollir vere- 
 ciindiam»«. Cic. Am. 22.82.— 11. Errant ^wnn prosp- ris rebiisso omnls impetii-'-^J for- 
 tfinie se putant lugisst^sa. Auct. Her. 4, 17. 24.— 12. Necesse est sumpium facen 23 qui 
 quant lucrum24. i»l.,ut. Asin. 1, 3, <w.— 13. Ne<:ojii- ess(r--5, ^;,j milesujon sit, pu.'ilre 
 cum hoste. Cic. Oil'. 1,11.-14. Sapiens palain fac it^e, potentissimiim esse y '4 se ha- 
 bei in potestate. Sen Ej.. 00.— 15. ^"ji/^/,< opes nulhe sunt, b'.nis invident. Sail Cat 
 37.— 10. Quod non dedit lortQiia, non eiipit-7. Sen. Lp. 5'.».— 17. ( a-sar niiitit Vatiniuni 
 ad ripjini fiuininis (jui f« qu^^; maxiine ad pacem peitinere^^ videreniur, ageret. Cuis. 
 B.C. 3, 11».— 18, Leviura-" sunt qute n-peiiilno aliaiio modo accidunt'qiiam ea ouiX 
 niediiataso et pra'parata inferuiiiui^i. Cic. Ofl: 1,8.-10. An.bionx dix t (se) it/ (/i/ot/ 
 fecerit de oppiignatiOiie navium. mque judicio. neque voluniate sua lecisse. Cajs. B. 
 G.5, 27.— 20. S(d qiiuiritur majorne quani terra sit. an tantns quantus videatur. Cic* 
 J)iv. 2. 3, 10,— 21. Non speravi-rat Hannibal fore nt tot in Italia p«>puli ad se deficerent 
 quot dcfecCrunt post Cannens^ni d.idem. Liv. 28. 44.— 22. CoeKsiis ira^a quosuvimn^i 
 miseros facit. Sen. Here. Get. 441.- -.'3. I'iso pariim erat a quibus debuerat adju us 
 
 sCmihis qui nobis aliquid attulissei^" qu<>4i hoc firmius crederCMnus. Cic. Tusc 5 7 20 
 — 20. E-ot.s- ^nm qui nihil unqiiam niea potius quam meOrum civium causa fecerit" 
 II). tain. .5, 21.— .30. Non sumus ti quibus nihil verum videatur. sed ei qui omnibus ve- 
 
 ris falsa qmedam adjuncta esse dieaniu». II). N. 1). 1.5 — 31. Dixisti, Vos eos esse qui 
 VI tain intuavem^-! sine his studiis putaretis. lb. Or. 2, 0.- 32. Monstitim certissimum 
 
 ' lies vtbanrp, civil aflairs. 
 
 and s<'ttinirof the stars.— ^ 
 
 footprints opposite to ours, ?*. ^. witli tln-ir feet opposite to ours.— » antipodes —lo in 
 
 eveiv respect —" i. e. aliquis quem.—'^^ Neque aliquisinrenfusest. neque etc. : There was 
 
 —2 res bellicm, military affairs.— s revolution.— < the rising 
 to set.— « just o\^Hm\Q.—T ex... parte, on the side.— *> with 
 
 nobody, nor anybody etc.— '^ footmen.— ^ small coins.-is ^ rhl lanquere. to be tired 
 from the jonrney.—i« according to the state in which he is.— i' \o \i\h\o. — ^^ or)ianienfum 
 alicui rn or ex (tliqud re toUere. to stri|) somethiiiL' of an ornament.— i» mutu.il respect 
 — -0 111 prospentv.— -^i hi<,\v.-22 xo escape.-23 to lay our monev.--"-» iocnmi quivrere to 
 ne desirous of makinir money.— 25 to be lawful.— 2« makes it evident to all.— s' to take 
 
 pre- 
 
 ger 
 
 turd 
 
 away.--"' to be most conducive to.— 2» less serious.— 3o accessory predicate- 'with pr 
 meditation ',— ai inferre, to indict.— 32the wrath of Heaven.— 33 im aHouew pretnif an<' 
 rests on somebody.— 34 th,. fi,.^t baL'L'acre train.— 33 to rush forward.— 3« ■?^'^7^/,7/^/// anuta-, « 
 u/ungeie, to pla?e exp^-diencv in eonfijct with nature (i.e. with moralitv ).— »7 to begin. — 
 from a wroni.' inflicted.— 3» to bring out. to cause somebody to step forward.—" ali- 
 quid attcui aJTme, to give somebody a new reason,— ■•1 from which, in -consequence of 
 which.—" unpalatable, dull. h^^^^-^ «i 
 
 I 
 
514 
 
 KELATm: CL.VUSES. 
 
 e«t cp^e aliqncm humilnil specie» ct. fi^flnl, qui tantum immanit:lte2 hestias Vicente, 
 ur propter quos* hanc f»iiavis!*iinani5 lucoin aspexj-rit. ens iiidiiriiissinif» luce priv-l- 
 rit lb. Hotic. Am. -^J. «53 — 88. Miilto inaiiis liiuneiKlniu est' quod, ciijii< iiianiinn ver- 
 siltur*, n'lmqnam 8init <^?/m respiiilr.-», minKHiain qiii.'i»cerc. lb. Fin. 1. Hi. 53.— 
 34 Qtii.<(jins seiitit quemMdmodiim sit am-ctus'». eniti iiecfss<' est aiit in voluptiln' esse, 
 aut ill dolorc. lb. 1. 11, .'iS.— 35. Q'Kmfnin^^ .\V\o\\\\\> ediditsel»''' <iei)erii^ (anlu/nes. 
 edicto»< daudiim erat. lb. Vcrr. 2, 3, il». 
 
 L'em. 7. If the gnimnmtical aiitcredent of the rchitive clause is a (per- 
 Ronal) PRONOUN. U»c lehitivo adjeclive agrees with the pronoun in NUM- 
 r.EK. and wiih its logical c.kndkk ((^r.s. 1 and 2). Itclative clauses of 
 this kind rarely lake syndetic antecedents (Ons. 1). For the form of the 
 predicate in such relative clauses see It. 10. Ous. 1. 
 
 Ons. L lit. fa. id has the nature both of a personal pronoun, and of a determinative 
 form-adicctive (§§--J3L iU). 11 t.<. absolutely usi-d, f^ovornsa n-lativc clause, it is alwavs 
 a lonn-ailjedlrew) if the person or thiiii,' to which it refers, is determined by tin; re^a- 
 tire clau:<e (ei qiiihcriotiopnpfiienuit) ; un<i (i) if it has the force of aqualitative orquan- 
 titaiiveadjt'ciive (Z.-iio i-rat'is' qui tMc.>. But it must be consideivd as a jxT-onal pro- 
 noun if it refers to persons or ihin<^s mcntioni'd before as it- (irnnnnntKal aitf(ceilfi,ts 
 i^-l-Vl). The En-'lish prouonns ' he ' and 'tbev' likewise occur in botn me;iniii<,'s ; a< : 
 lloium princeps'socrates fuit. u. qui totlus judicio (^neciip. . .omiiitim ftiit facile piin- 
 ceps; Ih who, in tlie judirment of all (ireece, unquestionably was tiie foremost of ail. 
 Cic. Or. 3, n;.— Instead of iw, the other demonstralives hie. illc. ifte. are likewise used 
 ■with tlie force of i)ron()uns of the 3d tierson, an<l may have relative clau>es (l<j)en(ient 
 on them, a- hte, ^//ijam spe atque opinion»' pra^dam istam devoiasset, commutiis est ; 
 lie, «'/iohad in his mind already swallowed that booty, was perplexed. Cic. \ err. 2, 1,5L 
 
 Obs 2. The jtrononns of the first and second pt-isons may refer either to niales or fe- 
 males (pronouns of the secontl person referrinir e.xeeptionally to thiiius per-oiiincd), and, 
 pincc they do not desij,Miate tlie sex of tlie person by their «:rainmalical lonns, have 
 only a i.ooical oknpeu. Hence relative adj'-ctives which have per.sonal pronoiiiisMd the 
 llist or second person a< irranimatical antecedents, aizree with the /of/ical f/fH'lerol these 
 pronoun- as: /V, ecastor. eiras fjiuv ilium exspectcs ; Indeed i/o>/ are mistaken »7/0 
 (when you) expect him. Plant. Most. L 3. 31.— iddme nos sohe scimu-, e;/Ofju<i\\U dedi, 
 et ilia qua' a me accepit ; That only we two know, / who gave it to her, and she who re- 
 ceived it. lb. Cist.1,2. 2«).— Nam ;/o,s\ quarum viri hinc absimt, sollicitiesumu? semper; I< or 
 we. whoxe husbands are abseiu from here, are always anxious. 11). Siicli. 1,1. A.— tqoqia 
 te ronflrmo, ipse me non conllrmo ; l.}rho rcissure vor. am not so confident niyse.f. 
 Cic. Verr. 2. 3, 30.— Ke- luce actrba vidC'iiir uniculiiue re.<triiiii q>n simili seiisu commo- 
 veinini : Tliis'matier seems hard Xo vxu\\ of you . who are allecied by similar f(H'lin;.'s. 
 Yerr. 2. 1, 14.— Ncque te. Ma-silia. i)iu'fereo. q.nv L. Flacciim militeui co;:nosti ; Nor do 
 I pass thee. 6 Massilia, which kiiowest L. Flaccus as a >oldier. lb. Flacc. 20, G3. 
 
 Obs. 3. The personal t>rououns as anteeedents of relatives may be dropped if no em- 
 pha>is rests on tliem, and if thev. as sui.jcets. are easily Mippli'd from ilie text, a- : Qm 
 . = til qiii\ a-'io «olendo i>'aesM' ll;i;:itium putes. |.rof»Tio Atiliiim hoininem ne(iui>si- 
 miim judierir.s ; You. who thiidc it dlMrracelul to niana-e a farm. >urely woiiiii pronounce 
 Aiilius a mo^t wicked person. Cic. H<»sc. Am. 18, .*>0.— If the relative has the lorce ol an 
 advcrbi.il eonjiincii.>n (denotinu' cause, co-incident action etc.), the i)ronouns to which 
 they refer are <'.nerallv droppi'd. if -ubiects : Stiilia multa sum qu<(' vobi-cum fabuier; 
 I am very foolish /r//o\that I) am talkin- witli you. Pl.nit. Mil. 2. .5, :«.- Thus the pro- 
 nouns of the second person are most always droppejl if they are the >ubjec;s «)f an im- 
 perative : Adesfotf omnes animis qui adestiscorporibus ; IJe all pre-eiit with your minds 
 who are present with your bodies. Cic. Still. 11. 33. 
 
 Obs. 4. Since pergonal ])ronouns cannot, generally, take attril)utes (§ 2Tf.), relative 
 chiu-es dei»i'ndent on personal pronouns e:innot, L'enerally, take syndelic antecedents, 
 except in the followiiiLr in^t>inces : («) If the relative clause is dependent on the syn- 
 detic antecedent is (sometimes itle) as predicate-nominative (/A «i, Obb. 3, A), Has 
 
 J In human sliape.— ^ brutalitv.— 3 to surpass.—* bv whose asrency (to whom he is in- 
 debted for the eijovmeiit: t. r-' his parents).—* mo>t delitrhtful.-« in tlie iiK.st outra- 
 ceoiis way.— ^ to shiiii.— "i/; nni/nott/icujux n/filri. loperva le one's mind.--" to breathe. 
 — -»» feels' how he is atlect.-d ; i. e. i- cou-cious of his emotions. — »> quantum (l'^'>V.^- •'" 
 infinitive clause, dependent on edidimset : dehtii being an imper-onal passive pr^cate. 
 —•'•-I to '«MVeoiit \ to pronounce. The subjunctive is quasl-subobiique, dependent on 
 '(?x tdicfo danduni erut\ which is equivalent to ' edict urn pnrcepit ut dar?tur . See 
 p 40(j, Obs. 1, (a).— 13 aliquid dvOetur, someihing is due.—'* the edict of the pnetor. 
 
 ANTECEDENTS OF EELATR^ES. 
 
 515 
 
 nntccedent is retained even if a personal pronoun is the subject. Constructions 
 of his k ml must generally be recast in Enirlish, as: Egouevnqut semper ha : i.ix- 
 rUi Y • 7 w be aJ (^/^« one) who I have always been ( = I will be the m7ne I have 
 ^ '}^: ..,\ riP Att 11 !•> 3 -K"0 is sum qui hoc illi concSdi putem ; lite li ally : 
 i uiw^S be^eVft hat \his sh<nUd be conclled to them ( = IJelonq totho^^cfio 
 Itc) Cic ^tt 7 5 5 -V,/ cs ille cui crudelitas displicet ? Are 7jou the man who dislikes 
 cnu l\v i ib Pis 8 IT -Sometimes in thi< construction the antecedent is mav be dropped 
 
 clnleu ?1 c" re iT-^^^^^^^^ 
 
 c u <V 7is •■ A'70 ipse Pontilex, qui cerimoiuas reliirionesque pub icas sanctissime iien- 
 dlsariu roV ifh c esse deos persuadCri mihi plane velim ; 7, beimr myself Po.ntilex 
 ?;)robSe\arthe public ritlial and worship should be most sacredly man itnined/ 
 would re^^^^ that I could be persuaded of the fact that gods exis . Cic N. D. 1 22. 
 
 O m 1- < or equ r m fu^ tibi\'iderCre. is- per municipia cum caligis et lacernS cu- 
 Tn^^^'i-o^SclZxiohiiye been a vice-dictator, you ran through he provincial 
 t WIS i,\ bro^^ans and duster. lb. Phil. 2, 30.- (d) Sometimes (mostly poetically) relative 
 cl- u"es " 1 ■ ma.le dependent ou ' ill. ego ' or ' eqo ille \- Itaque eqo ille qui semper pacts 
 a ic tor'hi, ,) "ce.n cum Antonio esse nolo ; /. the same 7^'Ao have always counsel ed peace 
 opp." e a l)eace with Antonius. Cic. Phil. 7,3.-7«« ego qui quondam gracili etc. (7 who 
 once sum: etc.). Virg. .En. 1, 1. _„„„„j 
 
 Obs .5 Personal pronouns, as antecedents of a relative clause, are sometinies merged 
 \uT,J^es^re wljectire : Illud quidem nostrum consilium laudai.dum est. 9?'^ '"«<>'; ci vis 
 lervi^^Irmrms objicere noluoim (literally: That o,.inioii ..f ours is praiseworthy zfAodid 
 not wish; i. e. It is praiseworthy wlien. I did not wish etc.). Cic. t^am. i,y . 
 
 1 Laiublbnnt fortflnas ineas qvi trnatum (son) habCrem tali ingenio pnediliim. Ter. 
 Andr 1,1,71.-2. Id wnl minime refert qui sum natu maxnnus. lb. Ad 5 4 2^.— 
 .3. Til nostra, qui remaiisi<semu<, caule contentum te esse dicebas C.c. Cat I- 8. «•— 
 4 Vestra. qui cum summjl inte-ritilie vixistis, h.u- maxime interest. H>- !"«''"• ^»' ' ^ — 
 .5. Vej<tra cousilia accusantnr. qui mihi summum liononm imposuistis. ball. Jug. eo.— 
 c! Vehementer intererat restrd, qni patres estis, Plin. Ep. 4, 13. 
 Bern 8. There arc relative clauses which have only a logical, but no 
 irranimalical antecedent. Such clauses pass over into co-ordinate rela- 
 tives {/?. 9), and are used to add facts or remarks pertainin.i; to a whole 
 sentence, or to any of its parts not V)ein<r nouns or pronouns. The rela- 
 tive, in this consi'iMiction, assumes the following forms: 1) That of the 
 neuter singular (jund (qaioduin, quale), representing the clause as referring 
 to the idea of the ' fact' involved in the sentence to which it refers (J^ 060, 
 7?. 2 1). 2) The form qnm res in the place, and with the meaning of q>tod 
 8) The form of an (ittributirc rehitire, agreeing with a governing noun of 
 general imi)ort m liich represents what is stated in the sentence in a more 
 particular manner than hv the general designation 'res' {qum senteniia, 
 quod qenus, qui honor etc.).— The sentence to which the relative refers is 
 called the * LOGICAL ANTECEDENT' of tlie relative, and the relatives thus 
 referring to iojxical antecedents are called ' logical relatives'. 
 
 0ns 1 ^Kelative clauses of this kind form the transition from pronominal .^?/Z«)?Yfi««- 
 tinn t.; pVonominal coordination (p. 473. Obs. 2), as : P.mipejus, qiiodmihi ^I'J^^modohri 
 fst. ipse se afllixit : Pompey has injured iii.mself, which is very patnfid tome ^^ic- At»- 
 2 IM 2 Here the relative dau-^e * 7^/0^/. . .^>r does not lorm a member of the principal 
 sentence ' 7'o;/*/>r/V/N in>^,^ se affliHt\ On the contrary, the principal sentence is repre- 
 se ted as -incorpora ed' in the clause by means of the relative quod, vhichimplies 
 'v,hichjWc/ "-namely 'that P..mpey inj ured himsell \ But this incorporaiion is a cri- 
 
 * A similar conTtiuction is Pometh^ies applied to national adjectives, to which the 
 
 relative idlers as il to a national noun, as : Vejens bellum ortuni est. ?/'f '^^^^J^^^Vnl! h«d 
 C(.iuunxerant;TheVejentian war an.se «•i//Mr//w/M = wiihwliKhpe..ple the S^^^^^^ 
 
 made an alliance Liv. 2. .«.-National adjectives have exactlv the same relation t;> i «Um 1 
 nouns as possesMve adjectiv- to ihecorr.-spondn.ir persona pronouns. 1 1"»^. "*'«'» ^'^j 
 meniioned sentence mi-hi be thus cban-ea : ' Nostrum bellum ortum est qml^us SabTni 
 arma conjunxeraiit \ Madvig, who has no objection to this connection of relativcb w ith 
 possessives, censures the quoted passage of Livy— which is inconsistent. 
 
516 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 tcrinn of pronominal coordinafio» (p. 473\ beinir juist the vcvcr?o of the principle in« 
 volvi-d ill sulHjrdiiKitiDii. Never h«'les.s the <'l:ui>c is virtually and * lojrically ' .s////<>/v/i. 
 lalte^ since it mos; IrcMiiU'iirly pret-idcs the seiilt'iicc to which it relers? or is iii-i'it-d in 
 it (auaiiist llie iisr in pronominal c<iurdinat!on by deni<»nt«trative?). and may always l)e 
 conceived as an oidinanj rdath-e danfe dependent on a noun of «general import {-jact') 
 in appoiiU'ion to the p'incipal sentence, and iieiice foimir.g :i meniUer of it (Ponipey hii.s 
 injured iiimself, a fact which is verv painful to me). Indeed thi> form of tlie «pposilion 
 is freqiien I ly preferred in the English renderinu: to the Latin ' loj^iral relative'. Ex-n 
 in Latin this kind of sentence-apposition (which is not admissihie in ordinary r^^lalivc 
 constructions, seep. 5()6. Obs. .'}) is frequently applied to the loiricnl relatives [id qxod ;wq 
 Obs. 4).— Since lo<;icHl nlative clauses cannot he considered as heinL'jrrammatically mem- 
 bers of the principal sentence, it follows that Ikeij cannot take fyndttic anlectdtnts to rej)- 
 resent them in the principal sentence. 
 
 Obs. *>. Logical relative clauses of this kind may have a doublk relation, 1) that of an 
 or^/'//rtr// relative clause introduced by quod wiili an "absolute' antecedent expres-ed or 
 undors'ood in the principal sentence; and 'i.) that of a A>f/^v// relative clause conceiv. d as 
 apposition to rtAO/'//t/'c/(^/'^N^, dependent on the same principal sentence, as : Feci, quod pro- 
 fectoaute me nemo, ut ipse me per iitteras consolflrer ; 1 succeeded to be my 0"ii c«)m- 
 forter by literature, a ///i/<f///m/ surely, nobody attem{)ted before me, (literally : 1 did what 
 liobody did before me, (naniely» that I was my own comforter). Cic. Alt. Iv', 14, 3. — Nihilo- 
 minus llelvi'tii id quod constitueraitt facereconantur, uf e tiiiihus siiis extant ; The Helve- 
 tians nevertiieler-s undertook to carry out what ihey had resolved before, junnely t/it etni- 
 gration from tiieir country, or ' The Helvetians neverthehiss tried to leave their country, 
 (which w^is) in accordance with their fortneri)lans.' Cu's. M. G. L 5.— Clauses' of this kind, 
 which must always l)e recast in renderm;.', may assume the inverted form accordiiiL; to 
 7i'. (). Obs. 4, in wliich instance a pyndelic antecedent must be used, as ; Quod a N'erre 
 pridie Heraclius impi'tnlre non potiierat, id ei postiiiiie venit in tnentem, e.r lege /,'unifia 
 sortlri dicax opnrttre ; On the ne.xt day came to Verreg's mind ichat Heraclius could mir 
 obtain from liim the day before, namely that according,' to the Hupilian law he must 
 draw the judires by lot. Cic Verr. v», 2, 17. Here the intinitive <'lause 'e.rr le(j€...opor- 
 tere" is the subject-clause of the period ; the (lo;:ical) relative clatise Upiod. . .nan jiotue- 
 raf is in ai)position with it, '•id ei.. .in imiitini' beinj; the |>rincipal senieiice. At the 
 same lime the relative clause V///of/ potiorat' is an ordinary absolute relative clau>e 
 in re^rard to the principal sentence, in whicli its syndetic antecedent id represents the 
 subject. See Ex. 1. 2. 
 
 Ob!«. 3. Lojirical relative clauses with quod mostly occur in the form of paienthttical 
 clauses, so as either to jjrecedc the sentence which they incorporate, or to he inserted 
 in it, or in the period to which they belontr. They are variou>ly rendered in English, 
 ^^enerally by placini; them after the sentence (with 'irlth/i'), or by inserting them in the 
 form of a demonstrative clause with 'and\ or by chan<j;ini;: the construction substan- 
 tively ; as : Detiique (contirmo), quod eM indignifiHiinutn, per tribflnos plehis reues in 
 civitilte constltui; Lastly I assert (and this is tlie inoxl outnupous tliinq). that kin-^'s are 
 introdu'ed by the tribunes of the people. Cie. Leir. Ajrr. 2, ('>. — (^ui virtQte i)ra'diti sunt, 
 eoli sunt divites ; t^oVi, quod e.^t j)ropnuni dii itiarun/. coiwcuxi suis n-bus sunt ; The vir- 
 tuous alone are rich; they alone are contented with their own, which is a criterion (f 
 wealth. Cic. Par. (>, 52.— Captu* urbis L'oniflnjv, quod jtost paiicos accidil arttios, chides; 
 The disaster of tiie capture of Koine, which, happened after a few years. Li v. 5, 21. — See 
 Ex. 3-5. — The relative clause is placed after the sentence, either if both proi)0>iliona 
 are very short and plain, or to give emphasis t(» the facts asserted in the clause : Natus 
 est Gadibus. qnodinnw negaf : He is born at Gades, ichicti nohody denies (which is n()t 
 dispuied). — At erat mecum seiiatu-'.et (luidem v»'ste mutatil. quod p/ome unojfost honii- 
 nu/n /netfioriam pul/lico con.silio nusceptuin est ; But tin- Seiiaie htood by me, and nn)re- 
 over, in the gart) of miserv, an honor ?rhich, as far as hisforical records go. has f/ee/i 
 shown tome alone hy official action. Cic. Plane. .35. HT. See Ex. «i. If the lelaiive clause 
 follnws the sentence, '•quie ?'es' is sometimes used in i)lace of qu(/d. which is generally 
 the case if the relative is required to be in an oliliquc case (see below): Ca>ar navis 
 paullum removGri jussit; qua' res magnousui nostris fuit. Ca^s. B. G.4. 25. — Cunicullsad 
 aggerem vineasque actis, <•?//«.< rei sunt longe ])eritissimi Aquitani; After digging mines 
 towards the rampart and tlie covered ways, in which (art) the .Aciuitani tire most skillful, 
 lb. 3, 2L— Often quod is connected l)y ip-iutn, in which instance it is ofti-n imi)o-sil)le 
 to render without imi>airing tlie force «»f tlie relative construction by substituting an 
 English coordination : Orat vos ut banc ui-bem sibi intiieri liceat, quod ipsuin for- 
 tflna eripiierat, nisi nnlus ainlci ojjcs subvenissent : He implores you to allow him the 
 sight of this city, and even of this loon fate woidd have deprivi-d him withoiit one 
 friend's help. Cic. Rjib. Post. Yt, A'i^.— Quod, asa logical relative, is generally used onlyi'i 
 the nominative, accusative and ablative singular, as : Dociii nuUam ratiOnem huic cor- 
 rumpendi luissc ; ex quo intelligitur etc. ; From which it is clear that etc. {which goes to 
 
 ANTECEDENTS OF RELATRTIS. 
 
 617 
 
 „.e etc ) Cic. Cln. 23, ^. , Thus in the e-f^tiori >ntb a c^-^ 
 
 TV 'sMcoiid not be -«'VK'f^^^iy';;^i^^;,'^cu • in omei cases, and even iu 
 Mc O r 5tJ. So.neti.nes. however, logical ^1-»' ^^- ''^^^.^i qbs. o.-ln the same way us 
 ule-nVt^ier pUual, as in nie passage "^ ;., ^^^^J^^kal clause, restricti.^g the .mncipal 
 r:Hcr;;;Tn.;Ssf:^in;Hi^t-dS^^lhe la..^ 
 Sni^S rS.S'or^U ^Z^^^a:ZXL I couMdo wUb human w.. 
 
 •nee It m.ts.'be conceived as "^'"'^'"S »»^V„^ ; S maxitneexspectSri 
 
 Av POSITION to the principal f^^^^^'^^e. a- • » ""J^'^^Ytutm : When Pomp5jus showed 
 
 v!dc-ba.ur. os.endit -' J^^e oMle r bS, a^^^^^^^^^^^^ «/'^^'^ -^«!"S''^ ^" *'J' IT^t^^ 
 thnt tie would restore the V*^^^ "\!.?*iw Vrf (/wrxi lam ante dixi, imprudeiite Sulia 
 
 expected, etc. Cic Y^'»'--. V.„\".i:. rthes^c inel Wlu^^ already remarked before, are 
 .celera luec fi^/^.'/^f,//^.'^ 1^^/« .'i;^.^^^^^ Am. 9, 25. See Ex. 8. 9. 
 
 committed witiiout Sulla s know ica^c. «entence is incorporated, 
 
 Ons. 5. Frequently in the logical relaj - ^J^^^^,^^^^^^ i'al'^Of en Hrc'fdl'a'to wKich the 
 but such parts of it as may ^^«^'•"'■fi f^^^L^^he Ste^^^ inference. Such constructions 
 
 relative thus refers must be elicited ft cm l^'^^^^^'l'}^^.^^^ as: Si etiam momndi 
 
 are freque tlv repugnant to the Eng ish H^''» ^ ""^,"^"^^ ^^^^ etc : If YOU must l)e. also, 
 e tis t? me, quod non estis, videor h\>c l^'f . «^^^^ ^ ecomneiVd li.is, that etc.. (literal y.: 
 rnhnoni^hedhyine. which tsnof necessary, I \^<nua \l^vuux 42 _Sic mihi persmlsi, 
 
 il^vcm a fto be admonished, «'/.ic-A you are "^ ^^^^^^^Jii^-^^ym) si non posset, 
 
 i\iJ,m >4mplex animi -^'^- --[',-;ra;e's;^ ^«^ ^'-^f^'r^^i' 
 
 non t.osse intcrlre ; I aiii sitishwl tlut tlie soui^i ^^^^^^ ^_^^ perirh Cic. Sen 
 
 cannot be divided; and V;''S' ,;\'.,f' " «li ? nifiv bl^^ P^^ral, if it refers to seveml 
 91 78 — In Ibis nstance the logical '^.'^'^!^\\ "J ;,,',.,. ..^ • Neque en m scnbenli. edi- 
 ? >;i;dinafe ideas, contained i'» the prn-ctpa ^ ^"^Kge^nu^^ujuscunque il't^-rveidm. 
 
 ecenti. coiritanti. l''«''^'^'l'V'* f ^'';^' .\/. m.^Tas^^^^^^^^ when the latter is writing, 
 
 impedimento est : F<.r the teache c n t «"^^^f »^^^,,^ V^i„._. ^ hindrance to those en- 
 
 action ci)ntained m tlie «^^'V^'^^V' .JTi ' ,rs i^n a «"n ilar wav as in the instance mentioned 
 tlie relativ." without liemg its antecedents, in a . ' " y ;; •, gjative has a qraniviatical 
 t.r.ol'l 3, only that in the instance, ^;:;;!^^^^^ ^»;;,,^- , liJiVl.f the relative is lo^fi- 
 antecedent in llie governinir sen eiice, w'' '^. V^l ^...^l i KiiLdish, either by making the 
 S. S"ch constructions must be /jH":^- ' ^ , ; , -ted w ih the governing sentence in 
 Snerningm)un of the relative its "."teceden 011 u itu « ^ . Pomptniuis. qui 
 
 tie form of an appositio.., or by using th' ^V]^l^\^J^'^^ testi's. i.nestat tihi rne.no- 
 
 a te Uactru.is est ^^''^ ^^^^'^^ll^'J^^-\^^^ ^"^'«1, "•'^'"^^^V'-V "^ 
 
 riam quai.i debet : Pompiimus. who h^^J;^^. " /'/'^ a-" he ought. Cic. Fam. 3, 10, ■^•- 
 
 Quidaii. sibi nullan, societfltem ^7/"/"^V;;= ' .l^VI • sonie hold that no bcmd unites them 
 q.iw sententia societatem omnem <':'\\.''', ;,?;,,; nte.ests. a» opinion which dissolves 
 ?vitli their fHlow-ci.i/AMis in regard toll cm^^^^^ .-xercittis ab GalUs yisa_sunt. 
 
 all civil society. Cic. Oil. 3. ^'^^''^^^^'uJ^aX. (minibus copiis l>ro vol aver tint 
 Quod tewpus inter eos committendi la n ^*;";' "^ J ' ^auls, ///n-c/i moment they bad 
 When the ba-'at'C tram of our army was seen ;^> ;' *^ ,'^:;^ ^..^.^. r. g. 2. 19.- Atticus 
 
 which cannot be literally rendered in English . 
 
518 
 
 EELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 A. Relative cI.jupcs with ntioft nrc ii?ert with the force of an English coniparativo 
 clansc with -^s- '. or of a condition;!! clause witli ' if : 
 
 {(i) In the forniuia f/>/nfl ajimf. (inst. of ttf a'pint^ or (jnomodoajunO. referring to a pro- 
 verb. = 'a-^ iHopIt my\ 'as the prorah has it \ Uicamliny to the jtrocerh\ik^: Nee kc- 
 piilcra leu'eiisi vereor, (juod aju/if, ne perflani inenionani ; Nor am I afraid of losin»- my 
 inem()r\; by readinirt^epuhhres (sepulchral inscription»), as (ht- ptvr<rdMii/s. C'ie. Stir? — 
 Irtje ii;itur. iiec traiisversmn uii<rin-in. f/wof/ aju/it. a stiio: Go on. tiierefore, but do liot 
 go a nad s l)readtii beyond (tVonii tiie pen. as pwple my {i. e. do not spe.ik, l)ut coiiHiio 
 yourselt to wntini:). Cic. Fam. 7. •,>.^, 2. [Here, tlic proierh is the sentence iucorporaied 
 m the l();,Mcal relative quod, — vvhicit tiling (proverb) the people say. J 
 ^ (ft) In arestncdve sense = 'as far as" (mostly witii tlie siib)unctive. ennivalent to 
 qnantuin with the indicative; see Cic. Fam. 1,!>, 10. quoted Uns. .-it. 'J'hus it occurs 
 J) in the fonmilas ' quo'l, sciam \ as far as I know ; to th.- best of mv knowledf^e • ' oi/od 
 audierim \ ' qiHxl cufjuannm \ as far as I have heard, (frequently connecied \>^th the rc- 
 Btrictive p;irticle quidem) : (^ui quiim ante hanc puL'iiam tiro esset, q'/od sciaw • Since 
 he was a novice belore tins battle, as/aras Iknoiv. Cic Jiosc. Am. ♦», 17.— Aristld'es uiiu« 
 l)ost homiiiiiin meinoriani. q)(od qnidem I'os udditninus. coirnomim- Justus est appella- 
 ttis ; Ariiiides was the only one who, as far as we hart heard, was calU-d the Just. Nep 
 Ar. 1,2. See hx. 14. 1.).— These formulas cannot be explained by Ufa lit fciam \ as the 
 ^'rainmariaii.< do, which would be more in need of explanation than quod sciain Tliev 
 are siibjunctiyts of <xuarded statement, or of individual oi)iiiion, api)li.-d to an ordinary 
 (lo-ical) relative clause. ' GaJ'is renief quod ( = id (piod) scio' would mean • Gains will 
 come, a fact whirh 1 know'. But ' Gajiis vuiiet quod sciam' means 'He will come, a 
 lact which Ifhwk I know' = ' as far as I know'.— 2) In several expressions with the 
 meaniiii,' asjarassomtthing' (which is expressed in the princi|.al sentence) is consistent 
 tinth somethinq , or ' not prejudicial to something' (mostly exi.rosed in the clause by 
 an ablative) ; or • tf sointthingisronMstent with somethinq \ These formulas have alwava 
 he pr.-dirate jare re ])ossim ( posses etc.)', or facias ; fie, i possit (iKM^set), orfiat Uiere't), 
 ntio( need by quod as accusative (with face re), or nominative (with fiefi) ; as :'Cupio 
 tibi aliqujl ex parte, quod salru fide (facere)]H,ssim, para re ; I wish to spare your feel- 
 in<^s in some res,)ect «.*/«;• as 1 can do consistently uith „n, duties (as far as is consist- 
 uM h'Ih?^.hro- ^''^•«»>''^;Am.34,r,. These expressions inostly occur in connection 
 with the al)lative commodo ( = 'as far', or • if consistent with somebody's interest or 
 ionrenience) or ' sine 7nolestnV ( = «as far ', or ' if ccmsistent with soiUibodyV cnnven- 
 tenceK as: Sed..., quod rommodo fuo^fit-ri /x)ssi(, u tun >qiw. nostrum nia-'ui inter, stut, 
 te videam : But., .it is very much in tlie intrresi of both of us that 1 should see you it- 
 consistent n-ith your con reni>nre. Cic. Fam. ;j. b. 4.- (^ua- tibi inandAvi. velim cures, ouod 
 nnemolestia tua jaore jK>ieris ,- j wi.^h you would aiiemi to what 1 have i)la<ed in vour 
 hands, asjarasconrenient to you. Cic. Alt. 1, :., 7.-Senritus tibi decernit nt re-ein 'e- 
 dacas, quod commodo reipuhli-,efacerei)ossi^ ,- 'J'he Senate char-es von with le-instatin" 
 ]}^^y^\n)z, as jar as {or If) consistent icith the interest of thf rtpiit,lir Cic Fam 1 1 .S — 
 benatus censmt. ut, qiiicuiKiue (ialliam provineiam ohtinerel. quod commodo reipublhie 
 JiKere jmset {(isfar as vo\\>^\y^w\\H'\c.), Mnwo^ defenderef. Ca-s. B. (; ] Ji^i -Instead of 
 quod, the conjunction si is used in the same sense : Scribit Lal)iCno, si 'reipubliae aun- 
 modo jacere lK>^set, cum ieiriOne ad liiils Nervir.nim veniat : lie wrote to Lahienus to 
 ;T. '«^ '''' r. *'^'',?'V.*'i^l'V ^'^Tviau territory, if he. could d'j so consistently with the pub- 
 he znterest ( ;e.«<. B. G 5^4(,.-In these <'xpressions quod has the force .,f ita ut id in the 
 sense explained p. »;.'i7. No. 2.- 3. For some similar expressions, with both subjunctive 
 and indicative, seep. .OGO, Obs. 2.— See Ex. 16-18. i«i uuui sunjuncine 
 
 B \ relative clause introduced by 'quod atlinet ad' with an accii.sative denotes ' re- 
 gardinff ov concerninq ^oimljody or s,muthinq\'u< to somefjod,/-, 'with r> sped to sotne- 
 thiu,, , Um my, thy. /us part ' bein- often connected with quidem. It is used either to 
 emphasize the person or thin- spoken of in the princii)al .«.nieiice (mostlvas i.areniheti- 
 cal clause, = hoc ad me, te, id etr. atfinel, that which is said refers to m,- ihe.- it etc ) • 
 or as a foi inula oj transition, if the discourse passes over to a new Mil)iect ( = /A>r ouod 
 
 n^^-'l'in'lnn'''x T ''"'7'V "' '- l-l"i^l''"^ V'/^/ ad me attind, q.Jo ,ne vertam 
 nisdo I, on my part (As to me, I) do not know where to turn. Cic. Clu. 1. 4 -Ut se lota 
 res habeat. ^'/0(/at/ ert///ao7<7/<m r///i//.^ demonstrabitiir vobisalio loco • IIow the wh-.le 
 matter stands, ^// r^qard to that State (as far as that State i< concerned) will be explained' 
 to you at another place hereafter). Cic. Verr. 2, 2. 5.-.I./ t.qatos quod attin-t ou ( me 
 cl*^;Kn;3?s;T"s,SEx.'li;-S.^^' ^./.7^',., what could be doiJL by me ImU Ct JJa 
 
 C. The relative formulas 'quoil nitquum eM ', or ' quod supere^t' (• a« to the rest " = 
 eeterum), are mere lormulasol iran>iti..n, b.-ii.fr explained in ihe .-atne wav as the ahove- 
 said -"«r^ nVTr''" ( -.'1'»''^' which will be directly mentione.l, stiirremains to be 
 IV.fiAl'^" *'7>^/-6y^ s! verum illiid (proverbium) e>t, certe pormanebunt ; For the 
 rest, If that proverb is true, they will surely remain. Cic. Alt. 5, 11, 5.-Quod rdiqiiuni 
 
 ANTECEDENTS OF RELATIVES. 
 
 519 
 
 «»< velim au-cas tua in eum bencficia omnibus rebus qn.-e te eruvt di'^nie • As to th^ 
 lS!Fr^'^:^.l'^:^'^S:''' '"'"''' '"'"" '"''' "'"^^^ thataio^econ^ngyiu! 
 J). Thelo-icalrelativetakes an ATTRIBUTIVE form in the sense explained Ob« 6 in 
 those clau>e.swhicli have tin; force of the preposition ;>w (accordins; tc/ in ,.c o daiu e 
 with. p. 3.5 /^. 02., bem- rendered in the same way. or t)v ' with 'or ^S>nXdeZr 11- 
 1 u, s, esset lacium, quce tua esfhumanitas. ascrip^isses flf it had been d.ufe y "^i w.M.ld 
 have added It ,sa,d s..) in your letter, in accnrdance with your courtesy i^nmennovour 
 courtesy ; literally : you would have added it, which is you,- humanitf) Cic An 7 1 \ 
 In ttiese expressions the relative is. iriainmaticaliy. the predicate n<yur,o{ the c\L^^ /hn 
 manitas tua A<ec- est ; ^>/c/. is your humanity), the s.ii,jec bernnnb" raci no n les" 
 
 iie'inl'rn ce nu" tlolie.rOc^- ' T^^'^'t?^''! ''°'^'"^^'- ^^ ,« ^"''^f^-'t-e term, the same as 1 
 111 instance nuntionedOns. G. The above-mentioned example, in its original .T".mmat- 
 
 ca conception means • \ our humanity is such as reuresented in the principal sStece' 
 a clause wtiich is parenthetically added to the sentence. Thus : M,%lifummXih^i' 
 
 '.T/'""/h'''r"'" >'"^"'"'" ^«ti^^ Y«'i'"'m I^'i-'i'^; This seemed to be a sufflck^^ nu-aiiTto 
 «mforce the law, in accordance with icoimderinq) the discretion of men at hauTme i^nX 
 was men s di«creti>.n at that time). Liv. 10, % See Ex. 24. 25.-In ti^ same way the ?Ha 
 
 ivev</«/tx*isused to desi;:nate the idea conveved by the principal seZ'S^ L^bebf^ 
 like he i< ea of the noun which is tlie subject of {lie clause, as^: Abdux, fidt s ante Po^, i^ 
 
 S^iSiiii-Srii-^^^^^ 
 
 Or TV, ^^^^ ,r 'f V'"*^''l^^*'r ^"""'" countrymen. I do not despair that etc Ck 
 Hv.. i r, ''-' ^^- -^'--I'l^-t^'a'l of u^'iJiJ,' a relative as predicate-nominative the same reS: 
 tne IS often used as pn dicate-ablative of quality, as: Qua e^ vrudentid nm\\o^Z\^rt^ 
 nn-as liiteras d.li^.nter le,s:eris ; Aca>rdinqto ( With) ycmi qt iS petcepiiSn mn^^ 
 escape you if you read my letter with attention. Cic^ Fain. 11 13, 1 See Ex 27 S 
 
 domo^e!nf/4ent'' c""'\?T'"J'".'l ^'«."'V^«'" ^'^^=« faciendum quod IlelvetiifeceHnt. ut 
 
 An b.<iS; h ;> i^r;c^;.ci.%r'ci"Fl;;n' I't r^^lT^r ^^^^^ML felicllerS 
 ip.nn erat scelus, dS^;5'^^^n^.rhalf^,!L;^:ib; pJs.^^T-'s hXIi em ^Z^f 
 
 ;'i.accid.l ulirtt I^G^^o^ 
 
 ime ob> en" S X. i osc o^'ic h\7«c ^'';^;i"" «-«^^ ^'va/.^^rm^r/o .a-i-syt/n^-., possum., 
 
 sunt, se injectfln.;^\obis caVJ^n delU.4md ■«' ib C.,?c 2^r' m'p. ' t!--,;^"'''^ '"^-'^"^f 
 
 judices. id quod ad diquitdtem j>opull llil^dd Imir^,^ %^i^d^ ti p iTaS'tf.s nr/ 
 
 ces vn-j.,n.s \ e^talis q„am mime^ Galiorum valuis/e'o^TiSitur fb Fon %T 4^^^^ 
 
 1,- V^'^*"•^^"'^^7;^ .egem, 9;/o</ numquamantea apud «>.■ «m /.m^ii"" ^^avCnin? 
 
 Atlicum here( em fccir r-vM f(Mflr,.,.f,.io ^.. ,..,„ / .. ",• r. ,./ - c; "^: ^^-^ '•^- «-*<^i 
 
 c v.. - V....... , Y""i* <H-tu//i, Pii jieuiem pronteii-'-' est ausiis lb Fin -1 '\ 1 
 
 hi. T MTyTT' ^,r ,r"f ^" ('^o.facerl poleris, venias ad hi ten.p>is'qu'"d 
 -* c - - ^'>'.l-- 1'' IVrj,Maium mihi Itceris si Co.^sinium, qvod nne nwlestia 
 
 aZrL'W"^'"'' '■''/*"'''• "l"^ ''^''^"'"- '' «'-^'""y concerns something -Mhreas-^iorSl 
 a/>'/'/ to h.ive weii,dit wiih s(unebodv.— n Tlie relative clan<e nWers i.of .« tiw. ,..V f 
 
 I'w^iL'*;?' :?"'^";^^'' '''>' ^'"'>' '" ^'- P'-licate and it"objec -:/ 'rm of g^ve 1^^"- 
 ance IVt"^* iS^ ^'^Z- '■ "'^^^ ^'-\«'-ci^cd l.y.-M at. of.-io ,,,, p. ii«. n, Itfs.-l» Mhe:it- 
 I wrote e c -"oTc^ civ'" ""f; "•'• f • ^ ^r^^-'' I^<'!'/'f r ''y coordination : The book which 
 
 84.. »v, T ^"^*^Py- ^^"•' l>ook-coi)yists.— -'a h storical ore^ent — 23 n. hnlulpv 
 
 was the only one who. See p. 251, Obs. 7.-" to profess himself as wise. ^^''^^^- 
 
520 
 
 REL.*.riYE CLAUSES. 
 
 ANTECEDENTS OF RELATTV^ES. 
 
 521 
 
 tu(i ficU, si qua in re op* ^> ci fu«rit. Invent». lb, Fam. 13, 23, 2.— IS. Tu velim, qund 
 coninwdo valetn'iinix Uu^^-i'if, c\nAn\\o\\)^\<Ainc ixiteri;». ohvinm nol)!»» prouert-ei». II). 
 14, 5. 1.— 19. Sic ill provticiil ik>!< <,'erinms2, qu(kl <i(l aMirw/tfuim^ attinet, ut iiullus 
 ternn^in;*'* ii)8iiinatur* in qiieniqiiam. lb. Alt. 5, iT, 2.-20. Quod ad popnldrem ratio- 
 nem^ attiiiet, hoc vid6imir cfgc cuiijifcflri' ut ne quid ULri'' cum populo cine vi poissit. 
 lb. Fan». 1,2,4. — 21. Quoii ad me attinet. jnin advei>a'», jarn»" feciindas re^^ inc ita 
 IraudavCrmit" ut ratiOat*m scqui" quam ff>rtniiam maliiii. Liv. 3(), 30.— 22. Ihvc qui- 
 deni iiacteiius'3 : qtiod r<^/i(jnii/n est . qwothWr tab-llariof*'* habCbis. Cic. Att. Hi. 15.3. 
 
 — 23. QutMi '<ui)erettt, Hcril)c qua ii accural ifsiine quid placcat. quici cfnseas. II). \). 19, 4. 
 
 — 24. Si niihi perinisisse»^, rem, qui rueus amor in U eM, coufecifiscm'* euro coheredi- 
 1)119»«. II). Fam. 7, 2.— 25. Non dubito quiri fine meft commcMiflatiOne, q>/od tuum eat 
 judicium de homini}ju.<i, ipslu;* Lami;e c^iUt^A omr.i.i btudir>.>*t- faciOrus pii». lb. 12, 29. 2. — 
 20. Huic prKlecLo ipsj, gua/Uu/n eM siluin^'' t'« nobi.'<. «ipem fern- debCmui». II). Arch. 1. 
 — 27. Ajax, quo ariim.0 (fuisse) tradifur, mi lie» oppeierf'* mortem quam ilia i)orpi'ti 
 nialui^!«et. lb. Off. 1, 31.— 28. Fater tuus «i'^ viverei, qui severitdle fuit, lu prol'ecto uon 
 vivere?, lb. Dom. 32. 
 
 Rem. 9. Tlie form of the relative clause is very freqnentl)'- used "svitli 
 the force of a puoxo.minal pkuiodical cooudinatio.n (p. 173. Obs. 2, 4). 
 Siicii relatives have in every respect the fmiclion of tlie denionstratives 
 hic or Uy havin<^ antecedents onl}»- in that sense in which every demonstra- 
 tive and the pronoun is of the third person are sai«l to have antecedents 
 (P. 1. § 2o2). The propositions introduced by these relatives are not 
 clauses, but independent sentences. Relatives of this kind are called 
 
 COOUDINATING UELATIVES. 
 
 Obs. 1. Coordinating relatives are mostly used for ;)rrio(/«m/ .coordination (Obs.2 foil.). 
 But sometimes they are used for a coordination of i)ropor-itionf* within a period. In this 
 instance they always include one of tlie coordinating conjunctions et or autem (and its 
 synonyms) {qui — et if-' or s^id i.<). Sometimes they renresent a causal or consecutive 
 coordination (qui = nim ii^ ; or is iqitur) ivifhiii a period. Such relatives are eitlu^r ren- 
 dered by thh! required Englisli coordinating conjunctions in connecion with u demon- 
 strative or a pronoun of tlie third person, or by pariicipial construction; as; Katio 
 docet esse deos; quo couceiino contltendum est eOrum cousilio mundusn adminisinlri ; 
 Kt^ason teaches that tliere are iroils ; and if this is qntnttd (this granted) we must 
 acknowledire that tlie world is ruled by their will. C"ic. N. I). 2. .30, 7.'). — i'lerl(iue exi-li- 
 niunt, si acriiis Sulla insequi volnisset. belliini eo die j)otiiisse tinlri ; cujn^' consilium 
 reprehendenduTU non vidCinr; Most people think, that the war mijht liave been rtid^hed 
 on that day if Sulla had made up liis mind to pursue the enemy with greater energv ; 
 but Ids management, in my opinion, is not reprehensible. (. jes. It. C. 3. 51.— CupidiiStes 
 sunt in-atiabiles, quie. non modo ^ingulos homines, sed nniversas familias everiunt ; 
 Appetites are insatiable, dtr^troijing not only single individuals, but whole families. C"ic. 
 Fin. 1. 13. — Mnlras ad res lierutiles Xenophonti- libri sunt ; quos legite, qucE^o, studiOse ; 
 Xenophon's writing- are very useiul lor many puri)Oses; htiice do read them with uili- 
 gence. Cic. Sen. 17. 59.— Ex. 1. 2. 
 
 Obs. 2. The form of fEiiiODic*L pronominal coordination by moans of a relative is 
 more frefiuently iist-d than a coOnlinatiou by means of a demnnstr.iiive, if the period 
 connected with previous periods is introduced by a i)rot,isis, or by am/ clause ^finite or 
 I)articipial) precedin»: i:s jtrineipal M-ntent-e. In this iiisijince the relaiive, with its gov- 
 erning luwxw, jtrecedts the conjiiiK^lion of the clause, and is the fir>t word in the con- 
 struction of the ablatives absolute ; as; Ilia StoicOrum de so oi>inio tirma in Hiitilioet 
 stabili^ invtMita est. Qui quum innocent issimtis in jiidieinm vocil us csset. omtofem ad- 
 hibGre noluir ; That self-respect of the Stoics was found firm and unalteralde in Kiitiliiid. 
 
 ' Ohviam properdre^ to jfo to meet by a rapid journ«\v.— "■' w fjrrtre, to act. — ^ af^stinen- 
 tiawiiti a technical term, denoting the quality of n higlier officer, esptcially of provin- 
 cial governors, who took no gifts. We have no term for it in Knirli-'h, aldiotiirii 
 wesoinetimes need it : 'as to gift-rcfnsiiii; \— ■« not a fartliiiiir ; tfruncius being tlirfc- 
 twelltlis of an as. — * assessed upon, taken from ; i/isuui<re implyiuLT the idea ^?/w/'/<'' 
 facere in.—^ po|)ular government.—' to have arrived at that point where. — ** aliqu'id 
 agilur cum populo was a technical term applied to those political aflairs wliidi li ul 
 to be decided by a vot" of the people: Nothing can be transacted /y// the peopU' with- 
 out violence."-" adi'e)s<e res, adversity; stru /idee res, prosi»erity. — ^° J<tfn . . Jam. imw 
 ...now. — >i disappoint.— i"'* to rely upon reason.—" an elliptical expies^on; supply 
 dicta sin f : 'So much for this subject '.—»* letler-c.irriers will be at your dis))Osition.-- 
 ^" to arrange.— 1« coheir.— i' rests with us {sitvtn esse, to be situated, to lie).—'" to 
 expose himself to death.—-» See p. 479, Ob.<?. 10. 
 
 r^ vif'S) /T innocent was placed under trial he declined to employ a defender 
 Cu- I.ru .iO.-Quam Jaculfatem n quis casus oripuerit, mea tamen in te officia consfa: 
 bunt ; y/ any incident should deprive me of this pririleqe, my services to v^m win s/m 
 remain the same Cic. Fam. 3, 5, 4.-Thus coordinating relatives are ele-^a ly laci 
 before re ative indirect questions, as : De quo quid sentilim nihil attinet dicere • ^Vhatl 
 tiankor him, it ,s o. no use tellinir you. Cic. Fam 4. 7, 3.-.Co-o..iina"ri- relmi'ves ay 
 even be placed before oti.ei; relative clatL.es to wl.fch thev belong as demT.nVtr We< a? 
 Kc qutbus qjae maxime diflerant ab ceteris hj^c sunt ; Those oHhem.s hicl diftVr nnw t 
 rom he other (animals), are the foII«,win- C«s. 13. G. (J, J.-S. See £v. 3-10 Her" e- 
 long the frequent connections y//^6 quum ita Hut. quo facto, qua re coqnita etc -Kelative 
 co-ordinations of periods are likewise (l,ut not so frequent v) used when the eo-ordiiate 
 period begins with the pnncipal sentence, or consists only of independet sentences as^ 
 Cimontestarumsurtragiis decern annorumexsiliomnltfltis est. 6V^^/.M•acti ceSrf Aih^^^ 
 niensls qtiani ipsum pcen.tuit ; The Athenians, however, r..-rett('d/A.iJ fact qi^icker than 
 he himself. Nep. Ar. 3 Here belonir the frequent com'iections by LamXm%e/a 2£ 
 causa, quapropter, quo temim-e. See Ex. 11-14/ <duu.,nuu,trn, qua ae 
 
 r..?T: ^- r " !''*^ ^''?'"® ,'^'*y ^l*"^. '■^'*^'^) ^he relative adverbs ubi, unde. and qno are n«ed 
 for co-ordination in place of the a.lvcrbs of the definite f..rm (?7vi i^rf"%o) as • Inde 
 hm.lius Lacediomonem adit «c Pallantium. Undex>^v Megalopo n'oTvmpiam e'cend t 
 I tji et alia spectanda visa, et Jovem vehit pne^entem intiiens motus kni no est -i^m;^ 
 there \x^ proceeded by way of Megalopolis to Olvmpia. 77/./-Hie saw J c Lv V5 28 
 ;?c Wh/Mfp'""'"'"»*^!'^"'"""^ legatospergit. (^/^. quum Perse.?s obviam proce^'sl^s;;^ 
 etc. ; W hen Perseus had come to that place to nieet them. lb. Ex. 15-17. *"^"*'^'^''*^^'^ 
 
 Obs. 4 The neuter relative quod is used as a oevrual connective of a neriod which 
 IS opened by a rnoTASis with si (quod and si being (,ften wriaen as one word I t fis 
 connection r/W_ does not refer to any antecedent, except to the wdioiriv^ult of wh»f 
 has been stated in previous pcMi.,d<. It represents the ;; o/ck (and so net mes thenr^n 
 c pa sentence) as connected in a ireneral way with the prec nl-n- e,i f ,r "^^^^^^ 
 
 Ks th,u;n;ese "oS:i?a Ivlt'n? r"rt"'"^'^" ^^' ?"4^' ^'^'^'^'^ W wSt'^KtanUel 
 //,// V,./ /1. ^?V , ,-'-.",'^''T '^ l>'"''»'>ly was conceived as having the force of 'ouod at- 
 tinet ad hoc quod dixi \ where ^ qufnl attinet ad' is only conceived in the mind 'W 
 mSh-h'-'of V^:;;:^' 7J>'-^«^-"ted by ^quod \ If used with this cnidnLlmein.^^, U i^t'mere 
 particle of transition and seems a mere expletive to those accu«*tomed to r .p Pn"iLh 
 
 pipiisisilsflifi 
 
 iiiilMiiPii^ii 
 
 other's companv Cic Fam 5 r,^ }^ Iw j it t '• '"''*^ ^'''''" '^^' ^'^'« ^™« "' «^ach 
 ^■evertheles},Ule^a]if^^^^^^^ 
 
 m^msmmmm 
 
 , liliiiPP=iS? 
 
 j ctui o^tnce^ . Cass. 13. O. 1, 14.-Sometimes quod m quodd expresses a copulative coii- 
 
f^Q-7 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE RELATB'E CLAUSE. 
 
 523 
 
 nection of tho protasis with the i)r('vi()U'* ]>o^i<)(l^*. rondt-rcfl by ''and if\ ' and nrjain if 
 
 { = pra'ferea si) : ()no<IA esjiciu til iK-rtidiil qiiil sunt «-i qui tanjeu ejT situltiiiil ctrio 
 
 lion fuisseui ut etc. ; And >f I red/It/ wcvi; as tmulKious as tliose who etc., I ccit.'iinly 
 woiihl not have been lb<>Ii>li «iiouirl» to etc. Cic Fain. ."^ 10. W.—Qurxlsi id est luaxiuic 
 aMilti omnia ad suain ulilitiitfui relerro, (juid inilii taiidi-iu crat ntdiusquam lioniiuis 
 uobilissiini conjmiciio? And ar/ai// (aside Iroin th.' rea^-ons yivcn beloro. ?/ to iiavc 
 always one's {)rivate interest in view is tiio chief evidence of a sclienier, what could liavo 
 l)een"morein my interest tluin tlie connection with one ot the nio-t prominent men? 
 ( ie. Fam. ."J, 10, '.».— Verv fiecinenily qiiodsi serves to increase tiie force of a simph' si, 
 coirespoiidi'n*'' to ' nay if ', 'indeed if" implyinir a (jradation with respect to formt-r sinii- 
 lar statements : QuodM lloma' I'ompejiis pnviltus esset. tamen ad taiitum belhim is erat 
 dili"en(Uis • Aa?/ if I'oinpey were in a private capacity at Uom'j. it would still Ite neces- 
 sary to s.-lect liini for that war. Cic. Le;^. M. 17, 50.— If quod in connection with xi has 
 the' meaning,' of an ordinary co-ordinatint; relative ( = hoc*, U is ^'enerally separati-d l)y 
 one or more words from .si.'as : i^uod tu fit taiiti laries quantieso semper judicivi facien- 
 dum esse ; Jf you value tins as iii<,'h as etc. Cic. Fam. 3, 10, 1, 
 
 Obs. .5. Sometimes n)Ut rarely) quod is similarly used in connection with otiier snhor- 
 dinaliii"- conjunctions, as witli nisi. ubi. qman. ut y\n Plin. II. N. IS. 2:}». ne (in C.>1. fi, 
 11), an(f sometimes before the relative qui and the optative particle ntinain. In all these 
 connections it is either omitted in renderinir. or translated in a way similar to the ver- 
 sions mentioned Obs. 4, as: Quod nln ille intellexit id iv/\ atqiie id i)aijlri ut etc. : When 
 he (frotn tliesefa'i.") understood that it was the jdanto etc. Cic. Verr. 2. 1. 2(').— Q//otf iilii 
 Cra>sus animadvertil. Piias copias non facile didtlci — noncunctandum existimavil quia 
 pu<'-na decertaret ; When Crassus tUuti perceived that it was not easy to divide his troops 
 " he did not hesitate to make an attacli on the enemy. Ca's. B. C. 3, ii*. See Nej». 
 iiam. 1 : Cic. Ciel. 32, 7'.); H). Ur. 2, 4'J : Liv. G, 8; Caji». B. C. 3, 08 ; Cic. Phil. 10, 4, 9. 
 
 1 Ma"na est vis con^cientite : qtiam qui neirlij^unt, quum' mo viohTre^ volent, se 
 ipsi iii(lTc:"lbunt3. Cic. Cat. 3, 12,27.-2. Centuiioiies nutu voci1)u-^que'« host!-- si intro- 
 Ire vellent vctcilre coepC'runf ; quoram i)roi:redi au-^us est nemo, i :es. B. (i. 5.43.— 
 3. Quoruni in'iqui''' utrinunes^ qmnii ad me per homines hon<'>tissimo-* p»'rf»'rrentiir*. 
 habui non tempornm solum lalionem" mi-orum, sed etiam natriiie». Cic. Fanu 1, '.». 20. 
 —4 Quod qitonidni tihi exposui, facilia sunt ea qujua me de Crasso requlris, li). 1,«>. lit. 
 —5 Qi(od tif/i iit^^ planiu-'» expunam. altins'2 paullo rati"nem con«iIionim meOruni»' 
 rep<'tam necesse est. lb. 1, 0. 1.— (J. Qme. quidtni co/iortatio^* m^.^^ tibi inilni.-"^ ar.t sine 
 cau-Jl suscepta" vidiatur, ilia me ratio movit''* nt consider;Tres in omni reliqujl vita 
 quibusi" crederes. quos cavCres*». lb. 1, 7, 9.-7. Qnotf qnainqiKtm minime miror, doleo 
 tamen te non tuis l)onis2i delectflri polins <^uam aliCnis malis labonlre^'-'. lb. 4. 3. 1.— 
 8. Qui xi est talis qualem tibi vidG i sciil)is. e^o quoipie ali([uid sum. lb. 6, IH. 4.— 
 «.)! Quod CKJiismodl^W. .«atis int.'lliu'ere non possum. H>. 5. 2. 1.— 10. Occupato in aliis 
 
 mihipoluiissima"». tamen in repnbliea non alius es.-em atque^» nunc i?um. lb. 1,9.21 
 
 ♦ Some grammarians (KUhner. § 14.'). note 21) assert that wlienever quod introduces a 
 clause whose predicate •:oyer!is an innnitive clause, as for Inst, in the al>ove-quofed pas- 
 pa'es. qumi is an ordinary relative witli ihe forci- of what ?r«' call syndetic antecedent of 
 th«~ inflnitivt! clause. This learned irrammarian would probal)ly have hesitated to niaico 
 this assertion if he had considered that sijndelic antiad^nfs never c;in take a relative 
 form. Moreover, syndetic antecedent-» are always 'emphatic', and he himself states 
 that quod ctin never" be u^•ed as a coordinating; relative, if the determinative is emphatic. 
 
 1 While, in as much as.— ^ to hurt.— ^ to betray.—* by cestures and words.— * mis- 
 ciiievous.- « remarks.—' to communicate.— "^ rotionem ahciljus ret halttre. to take some- 
 thimr into account.—» their characters. — '" in order to.— >' more plainly.— '^ ;)a'///0(7//'i '/>' 
 repeTere aliquid, to tjo ratlier far l)ack in statint; soinethin-JT. — '=• the scope of my disix»- 
 biuons.— '< exhortation.— •* lest.—'* to consist of empty words.— i' or to be mad'' 
 without suffici«'nt cause.— »^ an ellipsis — dicani til/i, vie. hue ratiuue motuui «-.s-ve ut ; l«t 
 me t<il you that I hid tho motive to make you consider etc.—'» tlie per-ons whom 
 (interro'iative clause».—^" tojruard airainst.— ^i enjoy your own happiness.— '-a to be con- 
 cerned by tlie misfortunes of.— ^^ th'- more jjlainly.— -<./V/?«~n- luudi alicujun, to show 
 interest in somei)ody's success.— 2i> ditlerently.— -•^ m/ipuNiann ten?re, to bi- at the head 
 of the frov»'rnment ;' to have possession of the government.— ^' to disapprove «f.—^^* as I 
 havepiit it just before.— 2» even if every thin^j were wholly accordinj^ to my wish.— ^o non 
 alius atqiie, not difl'ereut from. 
 
 —1.5. Berenice, quum ad so interficiend.am missos didicif=set». Daphne se clandit T'/i 
 quumobsider, eatn nuntultum .Asia^ civitatihus esset, auxilia ei o "L ^,us1:"e^^ 
 2. I.-H,. Memorilhat L. Papirms remjaiblicam Vejentii)U8 indutiis et on, rt'-it,An« 
 .Kqnorum stare^. r../.3 si quid increpilret* terrOrii, s^.ne p t c , maS u p la! 
 ee e-' rempu . beam oppnm.y Uv, 4. 43-17. Tumulus circ inisessus uft ra n edhm 
 ;;;;il; y;.gcJut!^r'i;i;T3i;;"""'"'" ^^^^^ castra^Uesertu es.e, et ipst», quacJiiir/il^S 
 
 III. CONSTUUCTIOX AND SIGNIFICATION OF TIIE RELA- 
 
 TIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 ^ 613. The Latiti relative clause lias the same logical force as the 
 English relative clau.se, and, in regard to the irrammatical form of its 
 constmient phrases, follows the, general rules on cotistruction, tenses 
 and moods, with the following peculiarities : 1) The phrase to which 
 the relative belongs must regularly be placed first in its clause the 
 relative i)receding the other member of its own phrase (for exceptions 
 see Ons. 2). -2) The relative sometimes agrees, by attraction, in gender 
 and number, with amember of its own clause, instead of agreeino- with the 
 antecedent (/?. 10, Ons. 2).-3) The predicate, or the governing verb of the 
 relative is f.equently ELLiPTiCALLYomitted, and must be supplied from the 
 pn.R-tpal sentence(/?. 11)._4) Therelative often takes members of thePRiN 
 ciPAL SKNTKXCE into its owu IVamework, and gives to its own members a 
 form different from that of the English relative clause (if. 12 ; i? 11 Obs 5) 
 -5) Relatives (contrary to the English construction) are frequently made 
 membersof clauses (either non-finite,or already introduced by conjunc- 
 tions), so that the clause is either made grammatically dependent 071 twodif- 
 ferent sentences, or bears a twofold grammatical relation to the same sen- 
 tence (Involution. R. 13. 14).-C) In relative adjectives or adverbs the con- 
 nectivc element has often the meaning of an adverbial conjunction of 
 MODALITY, while the determinative element has the force of an adjective 
 of the definite form, or of a personal pronoun (^ 014).-?) The mood of the 
 predicate in relative clauses is often a subjunctive peculiar to relative clauses 
 alone and not falling under the general rules on dependent subjunctives 
 (>^ 014). 
 
 P,?ir"K; '^'^f- ''^'l='^j^'<r a'b'octivo or adverb rojrtilarlv opens its own clause Hence n fh^ 
 
 uv i;"(A;,,r' n' it noi- \ .r * ' the relatne is used as a coordinating periodical ci.n- 
 ie el mif. w "u ) r i.i "^' [»P''" »»''' P*'";'»^ and precede even ihe conjunctions of 
 hVoi?,VJ, t ' 1>e Onu's while the En-lish corresponding? demonstrative i< always 
 
 fi M l/^ 'r '''''■"'''^T''''^*''y"''''c'' ''^e clause is introduced: Cuj,l iH avoE cm^^»e 
 tj.l o Ml docCre non debeo ; J need no t .how n-ha t is tl.e custom in m s ;^a/7^r - $1)^ rf 
 
 iSn;'SiSh;;?i;;^ :^^ ;s- {;^^xt sei^a^^r^^^ - - X;^^f^z 
 
524 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 COXSTEUCTION OF THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 collicef, omnia pnpiontor fero? ; If yon colloct fMi>, yon will etc. Cic. Fain. 4, 13, 7.— 
 {Inl nisi (IfcC'dit ; /f h<- would hol leave. CiE;*. B. (i. 1. AA.— C^nos (jimm Aiiovi^tut* eoii- 
 ppexisiset ; When Ariovi>tns had perceived tfum. lb. B. G. 1, 47.— Tims if a demonstra- 
 tive member of a rilative clause is employed in a relative form for periodical connt-cti n, 
 tiro relatives will be pi iced in inimediaie snceessjon. In this instance ihe rmrdinndnfj 
 relative nui!<t precede the »*nbordinatinj,' one. See Ctvs. B. G. G. 15 (quoted Ji. 9, Ubs. 2). 
 Obs. 2. Sometimes, however (thongh rarely), relatives are i)laced afttr one or two 
 words of their own clause. This is ilic case : 1) very rar-ly lor rhetorical reasons, lo 
 fjive to certain members of the relative clause a ;j;reater emphasis, in which ins4ai.ce the 
 «;mphatic words, in a few passa;4es. are placed belbre the relative, as : nomani qine as- 
 }»oriatu sunt, ad aed<;m Honoris vidCmus ; What has been carried off to Rome, we see 
 in the tem|)le of Honor. Cie. Verr. 2, 4, 54.— (^iiis autem. iiunni cofisuldfui/t p/ater Clo- 
 dii/m qui vitnperilret, inventus est ? But who was there that censured t/nj conxalship ex- 
 ctjd Clodins? Cic. Phil. 2, 5.— Utei fiierunt inodo qnox noniii ilvl ; As those were ichoin 
 I haveju-t menti«med. Cic. Am. 5, li». Thus the passaijeCic. Rose. Am. 8, 2*2, quoted j). 4?.) 
 (in niaL.'iiri familiaqiii habeat)*.— 2) If a relative has the f.irceof a modal conjunct ion, nejni- 
 tive words iiviif precede the relative, the same as those modal conjunctions whose j)lace 
 thev take, a.s: I'mim (iter» ani^'uslum et difficile (erat», rix qini^wvznW carri ducerentur; 
 So that on it {on which) hardly one veliicle could pass at a time. C;e<. B. (J. 1, (i. (Coin- 
 l)are : Vix nt his rebus tempiis daretur. B. G. :i, 4).— :j) In anieclassical and poetical 
 style, the antecedent, incorporated in th»; clause as the L-ovcr- in;; noun of the relative, is 
 sumetimes placed fj^fore if. as: l'rt>e7)\ qnain (instead of qtiam m-liein) statuo. vestraest. 
 Vir;;. .En. 1, 573 (see p. 50(5).— The oidy part of speech which fjeni'TaUn precedes the rela- 
 tives are those PUEi'osiTioN- by whicli the relative itself is L'oveiiied. But <'ven these 
 arc Inquently placed alter the relative, as - quorum per fiiii^ ierant', instead of ' per quo- 
 7'vm Jinlif ierant'. Ca^s. B. G. 1, 28. 
 
 lltm. 10. The relative, in its capacity as member of the difTerent ele- 
 meiilaiy plirases consiiliitiiii; the sentence, may be used in all relations 
 ill whieli absolute, disjmicf, or attributive adjectives occur. Hence it 
 mav t.d-Le the place 1) of the subji:ct (whether nominative, or subject iic 
 ctisative, or sul)ject-ablative) ; 2) of a pukdic.xtk-no.mixativk ; 3) of a 
 COMPLETING OBJiiCT lu any cuse, like a noun ; 4) of an advkuhtalobjkct 
 (whether prepositional object, or case-object, or in the form of an adveri)); 
 
 f)) of an ATTIIIBUTIVE Of I^AUTtTIVE GENITIVE; G) of ail ATTKIBUTIVE 
 ADJECTIVE. 
 
 In all these instances the case of the relative is determined by the 
 ifcneral rules on the cases of nouns and adjectives. The gender and 
 iiumber of the relative adjective is determined 1) if it is absolute or dis- 
 junct, bv its relation toils «i-rammatical aniecedent, accordinir to the dif- 
 ferent rules under ji «1*.^ 2) if it is used attrihutively with a iroverning 
 noun expressed, bv'tlie gender and numl)cr of this noun {II. 5. Obs. 2. '6). 
 But if a disjunct relative is the subject of a prediaitehoun, it frenerally 
 agrees in gender and number with the latter ; and, in the same Avay, if it 
 lias thefimclion as a transitive object of a factitive verb (p. 101), it gene- 
 rally agrees in gender and number Avith \{.s predicate-accusative (Obs. 2). 
 
 Obs. 1. If the relative (as disjunct) takes the place of a seRiECT-NOMiNATivE, the pred- 
 icate-verb arfrees in person irifh the (jrainmatical antecedent of the relative. Ileiiee, ii 
 the irrammatical antecedent is a pkksonai. puonoun, expressed or understood, the pre- 
 dicate isin (he same jter.^on as the pronoun (see the Ex. quoted Ii. 7. Obs. 1-4. and Ex. i-i 
 belov»). Thisiseven then the case i) if the relative is not directly dependent on a per^t>u.^l 
 pr..tionn, but on the absolute syndetic antecedent i>- (ori//f), denotinii: persons in L'ciie- 
 ral. reft-rrini: as predicate-nominalive to a personal i)ronoun as subject (/?. 7. Obs. 4i, 
 as: Tu es eiiim is qui me fententiis tiiis siepissime ornuxti ; For Yue are the man who 
 hare mo-t frequently promoted my interests by your votes. Cic. Fam. 15, 4. 1 1.— 2i II tiio 
 relative clau>e is dependent ot; a piedicatt-noun that denotes the ireiieral class ol pet- 
 sons to which tlie i)ei>on beioiiu's which as su/jjecf m desiijnated by a personal proiioim. 
 In this instance we must Irequently place the English predicate in the third person, while, 
 
 iToiTorthe 
 
 ♦ This passage shows that Madvi;; is mistaken if he asserts that this pos 
 relative, in prose, is coniluca to the instance that the principal &cui<incc jolhws ine rela- 
 tive. 
 
 525 
 
 in Lattii, the predicate must even here agree in person with the pronoun expressed or 
 niideiMood, as : >on siimns ei nos augu?-eit qui avium observatiOuefutflra dicamvs • ui 
 :in' iwltUo^e a ur,n rs trho predtrt tlmfnUire by th<i observation of birds Cic Div 2 .^i 
 'iV'Sy ' ' ^' ' ''^''VlV' V'^"-'*' '' expressed in English in the form of an innnifire 
 
 after to . t..c person ol the Latin predicate cannot be directly determined by the forni 
 ol the tn-lish predicate. This is the case if relative adjectives have the folce of final 
 conjunctions iihvr dionus, idoneus etc. (s.-e below), as : Non es dignm quihalje.as g. is tarn 
 bene factii sunt ; loa are not worthy of having what is so well made. Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 20. 
 Obs. 2. If a disjunct relative adjective is in the relation of subject to a pnEDiCATB 
 Nrn-N connected bv the copula esse or l)y its grammatical equivalents ( Hen vidhi did 
 ap/)e//an etc., §4♦i2^ the gender atid number of the relative, according to the treneral 
 riile of ^.ju,. mr.stly takes the gender and number of the predicate-noun, and not that 
 of the antecedent, as : ^Etnensis ager, er, quod caput est rei frumentaiije, ager Leontl- 
 nils ; 1 he di';fnct of .1i:tiia, and that of the Leontini, which is the leader in corn-raisincr 
 Cic. \ err. 2, .1 2.1-E.\.stat ejus peroratio qui epilogus dicitur ; One of his closing speeches 
 is extant, which is called ' epilogue\ Cic. Brut. ;«, \'21.-Carcer ilje, qvi est a crufielis- 
 simo tyraimo Dioiivmo factus. ry/zo; Lautumice vocantur ; Th&t jnison. which was built bv 
 that most cruel ryrant Dion\sius, and which is called Laatiimice. Cic. Yerr 2 5 55 —ES 
 qua; bccflta est hi^me, qui fail annus Cn. Pompejo, M. Crasso consulibus -'in the fol- 
 
 inYV'i^.'V-"''' n''^^^'^';''^^'';',^''''!.*'''"'**'. '"^ ^^'"^ >'^"'" «f ^'"- Pompey's »nd M. Crassus's con- 
 . ulsiiip. (. a-s B. (,. 4, l.-CtirsOrem ejus generis qui vfiepoSpofjioi vocantur : a courier ot that 
 di.^cripfion which ;.;:m//^v/ 'nay-runners'. Nep. Milt. 4, 3.-But sometimes (far more r.i rely 
 aiid hanlly ever with the c<.pula e^se) the relative agrees with the irrammatical antece- 
 
 ^ . ) ir f-V^' -^f>.--Ve//« \ eneris qu<f> LncKer diciiur. Cic. N. D. 2, 20.-6>7iw hominum 
 
 guod I/.lotes rocatur. Nep Pans. ;j.-In the same manner the relative generally a'^rieg 
 
 li^enderand nun>l,er with the predicate-accusative, if it is the h.gicaT subject of the 
 
 tier, beinu'j. traiisittye object of factitive verbs, as : AnimaJ plenum ratiOnis' et coi isi^ 
 
 «f'^T/To??' -""'''/>''''••■•;• ''^^ '•'""''''' -'^^^^ '^"^ '■^'*"^"" '"»' rt-Ucction, which wecall 
 wan. Cic. I^'g 1, <.--/>ryw?c//?rt conjunct a qvasyrlA.'^ i\\i:\umi^. mcei ibus sepsenmt • Thev 
 surr..t.nried with walls thos,> mnted homesteads which we call cities. Cic! Sest 40 See Ex 
 4-9 -In the same manner the relative agrees in the neuter gender with an absolute nred- 
 cate^adject.ve. det.ot.ng the «etieral idea of a thing, althotiSh the antecedent ^^.Tpir.m 
 as. Nun dicain«,/,^.-v,,, ,unm, quod apud homines carisdmvm est, non hospifein ouod 
 mnctis..imam ; I will not say thy friend, which with men is the dearek {i. / xiiixo d2sig. 
 KATioN), not thy guest-friend, which is the most sacred. Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 45. 
 
 Obs. 3. liejatiye adjectives (absohite or disjunct) cannot generally tie used as predi- 
 cate-nominatives (see §210). liut they may be so used whenever" thev incline ^Jone 
 Id. a besides that Ota mere abstract reference. Wherever this construction occurs the 
 relative as predicate adjective agrees in gender and rtvmhr with its svbiect and not 
 wtih Its ant,c. dent ^iUn- j.-a,,., „ diflerent from the subject, as in the pas sa.Ve" under 
 >o. 2 (below), and in the secnd and third examples under No. 4. Pel .five^are Unis 
 used predicatuely: 1) If the relative expresses identity of a person or thi i- w ith 
 the subject of the clause, as: Prius non is eras ^,.i erasf nunc !s factu^c^J turn n m 
 eras; ^(unierly you were not the one who yon were; now voii have become one who 
 you then, not were. Platil. Trin. 4. 2. i:i8.-2) In the logical relatives of X foin 4^1? 
 esfluahumanitas\ mentioned p. 519. Obs. 7, D. In this construction the relative must be 
 considered as a predicate-adjective, the clause being equivalent to 'Your humanity is 
 suih that lam entiHed to make the stattvient in the leadinq sentence '.—3) In the indefi- 
 MTE relaiives (see Rem. 4. Obs. 7 foil.), in which the relative expresses the idea 'o/"S 
 ;.:.; '" ' ^^ • '-''■"^^^'■'••" jne. quimnque sim, ex Acadeinije t^paiiis exstitisse; That I be- 
 came an orator whatever kindofone I may tie (such as I am), In the halls of the Academy 
 .;,, ■/ i/ • •' . Ni^>iRRAL, QUANTITATIVE, and QUALITATIVE relatives, as : Totidem 
 gjtotcuiAtamnginiserant,i:oVn\\\'^ missis; Having sent as many colonies «^ there were 
 ml^flin;; r t^^- S- •« (-niy niomer-cities were ^so many^ = ([not). If ^^.oAvere ,,0^ 
 11 eclinable. It would t -ke the gender of capita, althou-h 'co/o/*ii«' is the irrammatiad 
 5. -'.V -^''^ "f ^''« relative (comparative) daiise.-Tantam eOruin multitudinem nostri 
 inuileeeruni. quantum J uit di'ei simtium ; Our troops killed such a number of them a» 
 u,eie_ ivas>.pact qt the day (i. e. as the time of day admitted». C-ps. B. G. 2. 11.— Amicum 
 nanere talem volunt quahs ipn e^se iwn possunt ; They wish to have such a friend as 
 they cannot be themselves. Cic. Am. -i'2. > ■> *i nu u<. 
 
 _Obs^ Ke lative clau ses in which the relative (disj u nct) adjective is in the relation of 
 
 * T^J^ tlifference made by Madvi^r and other grammarians, that the former method is 
 "S'et 11 the antecedent of the relative contains an idea whicli is in itself complete while 
 llie latter method is used, if the idea of the antecedent is determined by the relative 
 Clause, IS without any foundation. This is sufficiently shown by the examples quoted 
 
526 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE REL.\TIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 527 
 
 an onjKCT arc oxccodingly froqnont. and examples occur in any part of tliis grammar 
 (from the fduitli book). In all clauses of this kind the relative takes its caM! according' 
 to the j;eiieral rules. Only if ilie relative is in the niatior. ol an adveibial object (oi piact'^ 
 time, and modality » st)me peculiarities occur. In this instance (lie leadimiadverliial idia 
 i» alvvay- expressed by the «.rammatical antecedent of the relative {locus, ftnipus, or oilier 
 tlesi«;nati()ns of time-point», or time-spaces; t/iodux, cau-^a, or yr.<), wiiich antecedent, in 
 certain in-iances. may be omitted. 'I hese antecedents frequently are l\i^ adre/biat {>\)- 
 jectsof the principal sentence, takin<^ those forms which are requiied by the rules (>ii 
 adveri)ial objects (p. 31.*) loll.). If tlie relative clause is used lo dtneiil^e these adverbi.il 
 relations, the relative adjective reijulariy takes the same grammatical lorm as ii» aiitci' - 
 dent, liavini,' tlie same ;,'tamniatical reluliuu to ita own clause, as the antecedent has to 
 the principal .-entence : 
 
 A. For Loc.\L clauses, which can take no other form l)Ut that of a relative clause, S(o 
 N(». IV. 
 
 />. In TKMPORAL clauses the noun ffmpua or one of its grammatical equivalents (di» ^ 
 atmns etc.) is made the ((uttctdt iit it( the clause. 
 
 {a\ I lie lime at wliich an acti»)n is said to happen requires the form tewj^ore quo {iiie 
 quo. hold qiid, dihus quihus etc. : see j). 'iiO). as : Ko i/to /etnjxjfe quo lieret indiniim 
 conjurationis ; Al (he reiij time tlidt (wheu) Uw infoiinaiion wiis jriveii about the con- 
 spiracy, tic. l)iv. 2,2'). — Itaque quiiKiue \mim» ditOug. 'jui/juii liabC'ri seiiatus poiuit. do 
 iinperio ("iH<aris decernilur; Thus action was taken on Ca'sar's jnoconsiilar pouer in 
 the tir.-t live daij^ l/iut {wlitin the Senate could meet. (';es. B. C. 1, ."). — Thus with a re- 
 peated aniecedeiit, in the inverted form : (^uofuniiore ilium a (iinestione al»dilci nonlicG- 
 baf, (O te)niK»e ad quu'stionem ii)se abreptiis est; .fud at thaf time ivlcn ii w;i> not 
 allowed to n-iiiove him from presiding over the trial, he was hurried away to his own 
 trial. C'ic. Clii. ;i'5. S!». Or the antecedent, according to |>. .V).*). Ons. 2. may be made tiic 
 governinir word of the relative : Quo tempore cam primuin liiieram e-se aiidlvit. sim- jii- 
 (licio reddidit Cejo : At (he time u/nn he lir>t heard thai she wasa lr«'e person, he reli riicd 
 Ii- r to ("«'jus without waiting' for a trial. Cic. (In. 5I>. 1»)2. Sometimes the antecedent may m t 
 be in an adverbial case, while the relative is in the ablative of time : DixCMiinl cum -'a- 
 tuil se eju- habuis-(! tem/y)ri>! rationem quo posita >it ; cum hoinine eju,<( ^wvgeieret la-lhim; 
 They said that with rer-pect to tlu; statik (of Mithridates) they had regarded the dui' 
 when it was erected, with respect to the pkuson they had regarded the time when he \\;i- 
 in war with tin m. Cic. \ eir. 2, 2, Go. 
 
 (fj) If the relative denotes a time aftt^r another time-iioint (p. 2.321, either both the ;ni- 
 tecedent and the relative are in the ahlativk. or (if the antecedent has an ordinal nii 
 meral as attrinute) the relative takes ilie form *^.r <7'/o with its aiit'ecedent in the aiu.a- 
 TiVE. In neither case a relative clause can be iiseil in Knglish ; as : Dttdus iivcvu: i/'i- 
 &'/,>.• materia ccepia erat. comjiortaii oj)ere conlecto ; The work having been linished /"' 
 days after the caning of the material had commenced. Cses. Ii. U. 4. IT.— Mors >>(\. 
 Korcii quatfiduo quo is occTsus est. C'hrysogono nuntialur; The (hath of Sex. \U» 
 cius was antiounci'd to Clirysogonusyo^//'(A///.s a/t>r he was nmrdered. Cic. Ho.^c. >Mii. 
 3(). 10'). — Duodeqiiadrageslmo an/io ex quo regnaVt! c»ep<'rat Tarquinius ; In the tiiiit>- 
 eighth y^ar r.'/" Tarciuinius's reiun (alter T. had commenced to reiiru). Li v. 1. -10. ."^k 
 Ex. 11. 12.— If the antecedent (according to the rules p. 2.'j2) takes a prepositional f' nu 
 witli post, the clause must take a comparative form wiili quain. 
 
 (c) If the relative denotes a Jime in answer to the question ' how hn</\ both theatiti 
 cedent and the relative are placed in the acci'sativk ip. 2:}4) : Omnis illos quo< (Cli< r.-n 
 nSsi) habitaial an/ios ; All the yairs duriiKj which he had lived in the C'hersone^us. N' p. 
 Mill. 8. — Sca'vola fuit meciim triduum illiid quod ego Ephesi commoraiiis sum ; Scicvnlii 
 \\as with me during those three i/ai/s nhirh I sp»"nt (iiieraliy : during which I staiti» .it 
 Ephe>u>. Cic. Kam. .3, "). 5 — If the time (luring w hicli an action has or had been in prti;:- 
 ress is staled prtdieatirely (/. e. in regard to tt,<tlj\ and not lo serve for determiniJi;; il' 
 time of another action), the clause by which the l.-isting of tlie action is stated, is not i x 
 pressed hy a, relative, but Uy n t^m//oral clause with quutn (sometimes by an L't-cl.iii>' . 
 in the difl'erent tortus mentioned p. 4ST, Otis. 9, li. Clauses ot this kind are either pn d- 
 icate-clauses (as in the I'lauiine passaijes meniioiien p. 4S7), or attribute-clausis. a- : 
 Anni sunt octo quinn ista causa in medilaiioiie itrsatur [i. e. anni. quum (insieaii of 
 quos^ or per quos. which forms would iK>t i>e admi^sible) ista causa versatur, sunt o( to] ; 
 It u eight years that this case has been tinder deliberation. Cic. Clti. 30. bi. II the uh<<\<- 
 mt'iitioned passage with ' triduum' were predicatively expressed, the daii-e woiil»! t 'l"*' 
 the form with quum in the lorm of a. suf/jecf-clanse. aim not the relative form with <yw/ 
 (triduum est quum Ephesi commoior ; «)r ' triduum trat qumn rominordbar'). 
 
 {.d} Clauses denoting an action lasting 'erer t-incc' another action occurrf^, almost :ii- 
 w -ys take a relative form in hatin. l)eing introiluced by tu- quotrmpore ( — ex eo tinqt^ue 
 quo), or by ^x quo, where te/n//ore is understood, as : Fundus quem q'ladrienuiuui, In't: 
 est, ex QUO tempore fundus veniit, possCdit Cx'seunia ; An utiatc which had been iu pus- 
 
 pcpsion of Ca'sonnia four years, that is erer sin^e the estate had been sold. Cic. Ctec 7 19 
 — Si. <.r quo trajecimus in (iia'ciam, adhibitus essem in cotcilinm: If I hadf^vrbeeii 
 taken into the council since we crossed over to Greece. Liv. :^(;. 7.— See Ex 18 14 Some- 
 times ^3- <y^/o Is pregnantly used includinir both •immediately afler*, and "ever since ' 
 as : Dixit, se. (J- qiu) siii jtoteiis luerit. Hoinam commiirrasse ; He said he had moved 
 over :o Home ivwiediately after he had been of age, and had lived there ever dnce. Liv, 
 1, 35. 
 
 C. I?elative adjectives or adverbs which express the different relations of modality 
 (p. 2;}S loll.) are treated in the same way as subst^intive objects of that kind, as: Ei 
 quorum interest pacem esse ; Tho.«<e whose interest it is that there should be peace. Liv 
 :il).;H). They are frequently us<d in compakative clauses: as : Qiue facta ^uut eadem 
 rutiuue qua Roscius (.cclsus est ; This has been done in the same manner ns the mnidcr 
 of K(is( Ills (literally 'in the same manner in which Roscius was murdered '). Cic. Rose. 
 Am. :3, '.»4.— De te loquitur qutm ad moduju tii i)utas ( = ' ad eum vwdum ad qvem\ or 
 'eo modo quo tu eum loqiii pittas') ; Of y.ui he speaks in the same manner as you think 
 Cic. (^iiiiict. 27, 84. For this form see ' Conijiarative clauses \— Some peculiarities occur 
 in the relation of caxse, in which the relative takes the following forms : (a) that of the 
 adverbial r«latives quare, cur (negatively cnr non, or quin). quainofjrem ; [b) the prepo- 
 sitional lorm with de.oh. uv propter (quitj'/s decausis. quam, ob causa.m, propter quern e\c ) • 
 (c) the lorm of an attributive genitive with the ablative causa {cujus rei causa). These 
 ft)rnis me Ufvii with the lollowing distinctions : 
 
 («) If cavsa or one of its syiionyms (tado etc.). or any noun implvin"' the idea of a 
 CJiiise is the ant. -cedent of the relative clause, the cause is <:etierally crniceived as 'cause 
 «•fticienf (p. 277). i. e. an existing cau.-e from which the acfi(m was done or should be 
 done. In this instance the relative regularly takes an adrerbial form, b.-ing ext)reH(!ed 
 either by cur in.gatively cur uoii or quin\. or bv qucne., which adverbs l.av" the force of 
 * qua dr causa '. or 'qua ex causa \ a> : Oe-ar satis esse cai/sa; arbiirabnt ur quare in cum 
 animadverteret ; Ca'sar believed there was reason enouL'h to proceed (frhyhe should itro- 
 <ee(i) a-aiiist htm. Cses. B. (J. 1. l".».-Non fuit causa cur tanfiim labnrcm caperes • There 
 \vi» no rnison why ( = from wliich) you should take such i)ain<. Cic. Rose C 16 49 — 
 Sic iibi i)ersuade;.s velim, nniim mihi esse sedatium quaj-e facilins possem pati te e<«e 
 sine nobis : I w ish you would rest assured that vour being without ns is mv onlv nrovnd 
 Of comjort tchtch enables me (literally/m?A whirh ground, or 'why' I am able)t6 siifler 
 more easily. lb. Fam. 7, 10, 4. See Ex. 15. IG.-For the use of the subjunctive in these 
 clauses, see p. ul4, Olis. :i. 
 
 (6i III relative clauses dependent on cama or ratio, the relative rarelv takes a nrepoM- 
 tional form with propter tnob{\\w latter expressing a mofire. bein" generally used with 
 a repetition <)t the antecedent): liatio ab accu-atore reddita non est, qmmi ob causam. 
 (lu^ rva^on why, or jor which) patrem filius occiderit. Cic. R. A. 22.— De cau<is wonter 
 q'nis innocens in pencnhim deducattir. Quint. 4, 2. 12. Peculiar is the x^<^c of quamobrevi 
 Mh i',?,.'::.^. •V,,"'^' """^'^.^''^'"t causa in the plural: .Multie sunt caum, quawobrem ciipiam 
 •iDduieie. I.I. Kun.l.2,«..). In piibli.istic language the relative sometimes takes the 
 niepositnuial form with de, the antec.-deni causa being repeated : Mililes qui causas lia- 
 beaiit.^ qinf„is de. causis mi<si fieri debeant. Cic. Fam. 8. 8. i .it^o ..a 
 
 (c) Freciuently the aiit.-cedent causa is contained by implication in a neuter absolute 
 adjective, especially in the negative nihU, or the iuierroirative quid, also in the mere 
 negation non in th.- predicative expn-sioii- nihil est. quid est f non est {= nulla causa est 
 qjm' causa e^t, caum non eM) In this construction relative adjectives are not used the 
 r.-lai)ve clause being introduced by the adverbs cur, quare, quamobrem (negatively by 
 quin). or by a Quod-clause. See p. 544, Oils. 8. »- J "/ 
 
 u/i If the causal niative doe> not reler to cau.oa or its equivalents as antecedents tho 
 
 f..ll..win- di>tinciion is made: 1) If ix fact or thing is represented as the cause of the 
 
 actmu contaitied in the relative clause, the relative takes the adverbial form with c»r 
 
 qunr,. quamobrem. wXww the pnnci|)al sent. -nee is neqatire, or virtiially so as: ^i vm 
 
 vel minima leperiiltur V'W/K/^/'^w. . . videantur; If the sli-htest fact should be discov- 
 
 ei;-d why «m account of which) they should seem etc. Cic. R. A. 3.-Quod «gr/?/^ c<.m- 
 
 IThl'.l.n ;;' '"'^illi-.^-.ret {i.e. quicquam) q»are timeret; Because he knew WvM nothing 
 
 had been done by him why he should be afraid. Oes. IJ. (J. 1. l4.-(,)uod commisHiiii 
 
 I u, J"*"^* '"'^r^ ad istam rationem perveniietur : IJecaiise ;/o//a/K/ had occurred vhu 
 
 ha measure should have been adopte.l. Cic. Qiiinct. 19.- 2) It the fact or thing is not 
 
 ^; I'T.? "J/I " ' rP";''' "'*' !'''''"*V''' '"''"^""'^ ^'^"-'^ t'"' P'-*'IH.sitional form with Vr>/</^ 
 onuiim.'s o/y). <.rthe lorm c>ijus ret {qnarum rtrum) causa. a<: Mihi eiiam Dpni/udo 
 
 \'U-\^ino'i/^['''"lT account of which) non ipse ad te scribo. sine uUfl laciimaest. 
 y<. Alt. 10, 14, 1,— Lilrunw¥/7///i ol)mi,;>wy>/^' 7//a.v fuGnint tibi infensi. lb Phil ] ]•) _ 
 
 c^n«titne^n?"/C''u^/'''^'oy^^'''r ^"'"'"^ (fo^ ihv, sake ..f Which) exercitum trad'ncere 
 coiistitutrat c.e>. Ii. u. 4 l!).-ReIiquo sermoue confecio, cuius rei causa vcnerat. lb. B 
 v.. 1, ».— 6) If the antecedent ot the causal relative is a penon, the relative must take a 
 
528 
 
 REIATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 prepositional form, almost always with propter, as : Ei, propttr qiios ipse hoiiestissimns 
 j)iital)ritur ; Those for U'liote ><(tkf lie was liimseif held in the iiiiiliest esteem. CMc. H. A. ti. 
 — If till' n-JHtivt! '{:• used for periodical eouncetion. the forms qnd de causd^qiin tXcaKsii, 
 qnami bnm, qimre, qiuipropter, qnocirca, quibus dt caui>is^ are all used wiili the nieaiuiii,' 
 * tluiej'ore \ 
 
 Obs. 5. If the relative is used as an attiukitk of a noun expressed, it either has tlio 
 form of an attuiiutive ad.ikctivk to a noun, wliieh is either the antecedent repeated 
 or incorporated, or a noun pointing to the antecedent, or restrictinj; it, as shown p. :^]:, 
 foil. ; or it lias, i/ t/isjunef. the Ibnn of an attuibitivk (iknitivk, oecurrin-,' in any «f 
 the different relations in which a noi//i nniy be atlriliutively used, as : Qxontm inarfnunt. 
 numrriuii hahebat : Of trhont he had a r/redf umnhtr. C'les. li. G. 1, 4. — (Quorum er;it X 
 jnillia mnnertix ; Wh6-<e numfter wa^ live thousand. lb. 4, 12.— .Multis de cau^ui, qitunnn 
 ilia t'lxw Ji/.sfis.ylma ; For many reasons fhe viont ler/itimnfe of rrfitrk was this etc. lb. 4. hi. 
 — 'I'he Latin ian<.'uai:e frequently u-es relatives" in the form of attributive adjectives 
 ^'overned by a noun e.\'pre>sed or timlerstood, when the Kni,'lish lan<,'ua^fe makes use of 
 ditlereni form». Jlere luloni: the followini; construe ions : 
 
 1) A relative which in Knj;lish has a form equivalent to a pautitive genitive depeiidoiit 
 on definite or iudetii.ite numerals (§ 374 foil.), i^enerally ai^rees in Latin with the ini- 
 nieral in ijeniler, number, and case, as : Venio ad epistolas tuas. qnax v\io '^excenfa!'* uiio 
 tempore accC])! ; I come to your letters, of which I have received ti inillioa at a time. 
 Cic. Att. 7, 2, 3.— Conviviis delectorcumicqualil)us, qi/i'pouci admodum restant; leiijuy 
 the entertainments with my equals in aire, very fete of ivhoiii are left. lb. Sen. 14 — Ejus 
 jjontts custodes rell(iuit i)rincipes, //>//ft//,s' .sirt7'//M iirbium perpetua dederat imperia: He 
 left as <,'Urtrds over tiie bridi^e the chiefs to each of whom he liad driven the u:overniniiit 
 for life of a city. Nep. Milt. 3. L — Propter liniruie (Jallica,' scientiam, qua inull'i j.uii 
 Ari()vistus lon;;inqu!lconsuetudine utelnltiir ; On account of his knowiedire of the (iailic 
 lau^'uaire, much of which Ariovi-tus had already acquired by a lonj; practice. Cies. B. (J. L 
 47. [}[iilta may also be taken for an accessory predicate, - Sixpe. Sei^ p. 2.71, Obs. 7.]— In a 
 fimilar manner relatives aj^ree in <;ender etc. with the adjectives ^o/«.s"aud universus, corro- 
 h{)on(li:i<; to the p]i)glish partitive phrase 'fhe whole of which\ as: De repubhcjl lacx'o.qiiam 
 vos unirersutn in hoc judicio vestris humeris sustinCtis ; The whole of vrAicA you sustain 
 in this trial on your shoulders, Cic. Flacc. 37, 94. — If the partitive relative is dependent 
 on uterqxe, it is used both in the form of a partitive irenitive, and in that of an adjective 
 au;ieeini,' with uttrque ; while a/A )' ahvavs takes its partitive relaiive in the _<,'enilive ; ;is: 
 O'fo/u/H ntt-r^iue contempsit alteruni : Either of whom despised the other. Cic. Olf. '»', 1. 
 Jjiit: Ajjitabiltur inopijl rei lamiliilris et coiiscieiitiil ^calwum. qtnn i/lraque his uriilius 
 auxerat ; He was i)ressed by the scantiness of his means, and ttie consciousness of his 
 crimes. /Mt/h of which he him increased by these divices. Sail. Cat. 5, 7.— If the relative- 
 is d-peiideni on alin-^.. .ali'/s, it likewise occurs in both constructions. ])ut more jreiic- 
 rally in thi- form of a parfi/ire gt tdUve, as : (^normn ali'ix (did causjl illjlijl etc. ; fj<u/t i>f 
 whom made use of ditferent pn-texts. -If a paititive relative is (le^)en(lent on the iieiiii 
 numerus., ox genus it either takes the form ora;,'enitive, or of an adjective at tribute a;.'reeiii!; 
 with numert/s, as: Ilaqiie iiicitilbat omnTs studio suo; quo in mtmeroWxQvnwi L. 'J'oripifi- 
 tiis etc. ; la ivhv'h immhev (i. e. in icho.<e number, anwng nhorn) were L. Torquatiis etc. 
 Nep. Att. L 4. But: Si oinnes societiltes venGrunt, qmintni »'X uiiinero miilti sedeut jii- 
 dices ; U all the. socit ties cmnc. from ?t7io.'''c «vm/'x/- m:inyjudi:es are sitting here (i t. to 
 ■whichxwauy of these judj^es t^'long). Cic. Miir. :W, i'M**. See Ex. 17-20. 
 
 2) LooicAL UELATivEs, wliich caimotbe u-ed in the irenitive or dative (p. 5\C,, Obs. 3\ fre- 
 quently take the form of an aj;jreeiiiL,' adjective, instead of beintj placed in a j,'eiiitivr 
 dependent on re>" etc. {cujns r<i, n/jiis f(((ti),ii>i: (Numquam) obliviscar quanti me sem- 
 per feceritis ; qnce si vos cepit oOlirio,\-\\r id non meo polius capite luitiir qiiam MileiiiB 
 (instead of ejus rt-i oblivio)? I shall never forjjet in what hiirh esteem you have alwnvs 
 held me ; ami if the memory of this fact is effaced with you. why is this not visited 
 upon my head rather than up mMilo's? (;ic. Mil. ;itj, 99. — Per idem tempiisadversu-* <iil- 
 lo< male pHLrniltum, quo m^/u Italia oinnis contremut'iat ( — cujiis facti nietii); And ilio 
 whole of Italy had trembled .//'w/i./entr (concernim,' this fact). Sail. Juy;. 114. 1.— Here l>t'- 
 long .-everal passages quoted" above, as : Atticus reinigrilvit Koinam L. Cottil L. Toninflio 
 Coss., quern diem (i. e. cujiis profectinnis diem) universa civitas prosecQta est. Nep. 
 
 * The Lajin uses the numeral sexcenti wiih the meaning of u large indeliuite number, 
 often for the purpose of comic exaggeration. 
 
 ** Demonstrative adjectives freciiienily take the same form {eo numero = eon/m nu- 
 t)ie7'0). In the relative clause dependent on such demonstratives, the relative adjeclive 
 frequently is in tUe plural, &•* if eOru/n had l)een used in the jjrincipal sentence, as: Ar- 
 chi IS poCia est eo numero qui semper apud omnis sancti sunt lutdlti. Cic. ArCh. 1'<J. -jI .^ 
 Amiciiia est ex eo genere qiuc prosunt ( — ex tdrum rerum genere quce prosunt). Cic 
 Fin. 3,21,70. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE KEL^VIIVE CLAUSE. 529 
 
 ^!^-^iS^'S^:SS^^''^'^ TVi ^^ gr^r - ^"J- ^- t--P-) commit. 
 
 ^t\^^n^::^W^l^^Z^^t^:^^ sentences or clauses 
 
 1..-.1 sentence, as: (Dixit Divitiaais ra rem p'^se ere ^^sJ S "'^!',r^' «"•? ^^« P'-"'^''- 
 ad perniciem suam uterOtur (i. e. fratrem cre?4r// «»«^;^ '^''•' ''i'' oi'^^^^^ ac nereis 
 -.<^) ; Divitiacus said that his brXrTad grown \hrS?^^^ '''' ^"^*"^ 
 
 V'jiuence, which he was «.ing towards his own n it Si' r' T'L'^'^1''''''^ ^''''' «^'^^ 
 sages quoted above, as : Ut me ner litter-i^ enni I'Vr.M. ,w^' 22.-bo in several pas- 
 
 cons.dflrer lif.rum ^c/,*.«^ V'" ^^ad L nTittZ^ T^ VT ^Y"^""' ""^ ^ ""^^^m (i. e. 
 vyiling « W, which I wilf .se.Vto ycm e tc Cic a» VlTi^'n.'^V''^^ ^^'- '''«^«t^re, 
 iMon-em contendit, V?/o j/^ /.w cum nai cL emiiViLA!. ^^ ^^ 'P^'"» Ami 
 
 contendit et in eumlLnn in^uTZ^t^^il^fi^^^''^^^^^ ^^- ^- ^d Ambiorigem 
 
 a l;.St^vr^C2^"irVjl2;^Z^S;?;? ImpIy 
 
 ?;e;;;!s;=w^;irq-;;ss^ 
 
 jest imata est, quantus in classem .«^ "1 foct.L era? Tho \un} *l'""r?'^"'^^ ^*^^"^'^ 
 
 ^^^^'^^^^^'^^i!^^^^^ equivalents of at- 
 
 connected as 8Ub.7ect-ab2at,ves with pa doles in "^^^ «^^^n those 
 
 absoh.te, as: l„ eft republics ixdqmmoSm^!Sn»^^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^'^ «iblatives 
 
 ment/or the oppression of which iht^ ^^u^[uJ^^^^^ vires defuerunt ; In that govern- 
 
 arii regtio ip.f,rum nitc4tV do.n nJt ^^.^oSS.? fnZ=' Vv "V"- *^^?"^- ^'' «^-"Q^od 
 Because their power rested on I)ariuVs r'nln «Jv/,^;/ 'P^<»^ c vibus snis poenas datQros : 
 count by their countrynien. i\'p Milt. 3, i' ^ '^^^^ f^U they would ie called to ac- 
 
 ^s, ccnitTa pop;;b;n^^i^.s^;s^Sn^n?rT 
 
 5, 11.-11. />^eC d?. t ; i i S^^'SJ 'Jn^ appeUatur Tamesis! cSsTo 
 
 ortum est ab Ambioriire. I b 5 2G -pi fS^^^^^ ^'^"^"'n est. initium tumultus" 
 
 tenti.3 Pi.iHppo pa.-, data^' .^u^^h ^2 5^ il^i^T'"'^ "^'V? agebfttar^^ ex quo^e- 
 vnllemstmipsit'^ nullodiY^nrbisn iVrnt.^^iTir ^•. ^^^''P'» Africanus. ex quo lo^r^m 
 tolitun iret. lb. 2(5 19 -ll ( , mV ater^.i «1^^^^^^^ ^•^•" ^"^^ Q"^'" *" Capi^ 
 
 a/w . ' "I";" n ");'" ''^^^^"'^ ^^I>edem h duit-^ h VTV^I\' dies.noctlsque insidU- 
 abessent hello Treviri. Cics B G 7 «-^ i«' o., "" ^'^""l^-. "«^^ tuit caw.*a 9?/«re toto 
 pianicum vellet y Cic. Cli. (il -n E.?;,7p 5' .S""! ^^7« ^"'^ Avito cur interficere Op 
 
 nyn, qnipauci nominanlur fnit. lb im 6 ol " i''si"^''^-""''':'''^^!"^"«'-' q"^'»* ^0- 
 
 ochurn, y//o^ video esse «o/i/^z/Z/o. cum dnnt ^^' T" ^""t qnibus infinitum sit 
 
 ^ai^urare- ^-^i^liJ^^ll^^Z^^^^S^ ^ 
 
 3 Z!;Sri-i:2-^;^-onducti.;^ o^^S'^:^lZ^^^^X!^r^L «my one - 
 
 -e With thi ma;k\'f'rb"SrK'Vr%^^^ 
 
 sanctuary of its religious charader, to ec^ lari^ ' t -" to vow ^""■"'^^' ^" ^" '" ^'^''''^ ^ 
 
530 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 631 
 
 — W Moa« litfcrfi!» quod roqnTri*'', imp-dior^ inoiii-I rornm'. quasi nttf/a^ haJ)oo Htte- 
 
 rtHcii'Miis Cic- \tt 11 4 1. -yl. I.actdaMuMiii «IfctiiiviiAlcn» p«>t«'Hi;1trm a Lysaiidro 
 
 conPiTiatam siistulCrnnt* ; quo dddre^ inccnsus iniit consiliu« reges LaccdffimoniO- 
 
 rum lollere. Nt-p. Lyt>. 3, 1. 
 
 Hem 11. Frequently ihecoveminc: verbs of relatives, or the predicates 
 depeiuient on them, and sonnetimesOther words by wliieh their case is 
 determined, are elliptiaiV.y omitteiU and must he. supplied from the princi- 
 pal sentence, the same as' in coordinate propositions. 
 
 Obs 1 The relative clanscs in which Huch omission? occur, mostly have the nature 
 of cmnparafire clauses {Hew q>d, tnudnn qmwtmn etc): hut omissions ol this kind 
 also oc'ur in ordinary relative clauses. Such an ellipsis cannot he imit.ited m hniili^l» 
 unless the Latin relative may or must he rendered hy tin- comparative conjunction -as ; 
 hut we may sometimes us.Mhe auxiliary • /o f/o\ instead ot rep.-jitin;,' the verh ot tli.; 
 Drincipal sentence. Such auxiliaries cannot he expressed hy 'farrr»^ in Ijitin ; as: 
 Sla-is ea percipimus qiue nohis ipsis prospere eveniunt. quam ilia qme ceteru> (i. e./>;w- 
 n^>y? fiv//iw;i/) ; We perceive more what hai)pens l)rosp,-ro-.i>ly to ourM-lves than that 
 which so hapjfehstookrrs (ttian what does t.iolhers). Cic. OH. l,m--A^^7^m utfinihu. no- 
 men ^mun qiiiffiix vita termhianftir : So that his name is conlmed t<. tUvsawe \um\s as 
 hUlife (= eisdemliiiihus nomen tcrminarCtur v'/i(>//^r/'^Mernunareiur). Cic 1 use i, i,), 
 32 -Erat eiiim eddem quo Mc'Madfxxeum ; For he was of ihvsamf iivudw< Alribtmh.^'i = 
 eddem senm erat quoAlcihiad.^^ eraf). Nep- Ale 5. 3.-lntelliLretis eiiim nullis homiiu- 
 hus quemquam taido odi.. qiuwfo istum Syracu^-\Mi> et esse efj'nsse ( = fa»o fxfioe .xv 
 et f msse, wnw foist timet esse etpmse; For you will understand, that nuhin[\ is aud > as 
 bo hateful to any men, as he {is and tras) to Die SyraeuMans. ( ic \ err. 2, i, .>. fc>V« f'^- 
 1-4 -S(mietiines hoth the principal sentence and the clause have the same ohject-inliui- 
 tive which is understood in /><>f/i propo-itions, as: J',, ye qao cceiusti ( = P/'fi-'** ";« 
 qito'ire ccepisii) ; ilooa to the j>lace to wliu'h yon hair ma<U anuhqemtnfs to (/o. Cic. tat. 
 1, 5. ,. , . 
 
 Obs 2 In the examples quoted ahove ^Or.s. 1). the verhs which arc thus supplied in 
 the relative clause iiave the same grammatical lorm in the piincip;il sentence as must 
 be undei-t^tood for the clause. Hut this is not -eneralty the caM'. 1 hus 
 
 (a I The verhs to he supplied in the clause may he of tenses, moods. <)r p.-rsons dill' r- 
 cnt from those in the principal sentence, »s : Tam sum misericors pidices, quam vc-s 
 tam mills qpam q>d lenissimus (i. ^. .^0 ; I am as merciful O jti(U:es. as >m,u are a> 
 mm as the most /tv/i/z/Mliterally : as he who [i^] the mo>t l<-|'ient). Cic !^»' • '^ ; ^' - 
 Tam milii -ratum efit, quam quod .^ratissimum u. e. est) ; It will he as P'^'l''^'; ^ «'r c 
 «.vWmM*- the most pleasant. Cic. Pain. 13. 3.-Non eadem inihi qua supenorihus c i - 
 sulihus le^^e et ccmdiiiOne utendam esse decrCvi : I have resolved that not the saiue ; v\ 
 and condidon should f>e used by me, as had to be used by the former consuls ( ^ qini ^///"- 
 riaritjusconsaliOus utendum faih. (Mc. L. A-r. 2, 3.-l;'requently. however, in '^»',h u. stn i- 
 tions the verb, if it is in a diflerent irrammalical lorm fnun that '-^''l""'^'' ,^\, ''•,,,V;. " 
 struction of the clause, is repHttnl in Latin, where in hn-lish we rei.eat " y ^^^/^ * 
 iary. as : Animus aletur et sastenfafntur ei>dem rehuP. quibus astra sxsiei.tantvi^ial n- 
 tar: The soul irill be fed and sustuvttd by the same elements as th^ stars are. Cit. int. 
 
 ^'(ftJsometmK-s'the verb in the principal sentence is an infinitive, and must be supplied 
 as a finite verb in the dau-e. as : Eum non ptei.ite haty.wv/-^ idein v'''>^^ ' v m J^X • u 
 He was not ashamed of dmnq the same </x you did. <- L^.^^^'IV '^'v^''-:;" VUw /^ 
 quocefei-i}un;versdri{ = cpio ceteri re rsan fur jwra versan) ; He wishes to be buhjetua 
 loiUc^iimaVAw a^< the others a re. Cic. L. Alt 2.2:1. * i, „,.//„/ xv 
 
 (r) Most frequently of,kct-i,>finitiri-s or predicafe-infimfirf.o are '''n>P hhUu tiie r^w« 
 while, in the principal sentence, the same verb is usecl as the inite pr'-'tlicate, J- -J'" ! 
 8..ss»'mel \vx-vr>vii eddem aq>nd quo ccfpennd ; Having <.nce dislodtred t»'^"^'/ '^.w' 
 them by me.-.ns of the same terr..r as tl,exj did in the beninnincj ( = quo '^?7«' Yf!,n'^/.w •«? /i'^ 
 by which they be-an to drive themi. Liv. 10. ;« -Nemoe^l qui non equo 9''« ^^J^' . 
 (i. e. quo uli cONSuevit) li»)entiU8 utafur quam intractito et novo ; I here i*; •' "'"V'V;" 
 would not use rather a horse /on'// icA //t; iv accu.^foiiudihx <-rn]\y: '''''''^Jf^'fA,-.^ 
 cuslmned^ than an untried and new one. Cic. Am 11). »iH.-V>s t»'"^'",ho^.,f '-f,' 'Z/ at 
 iilo au'Mirio quo diximus d. e. qaoconfirman diximvs^ ; W e, however pmc tins i>} 
 aUL'ury fry which w- hare said it is pror^l. Cic. Att 10. 8 7.— See hx. <>-lO. 
 
 (rf) Sometimes the srovernin- words of the relative whi'h must .^»^' '^''if ^^' /^"J, r 
 principal sentence, and by which the case of the^relativc_^s det.-rmim-d, aic.^M<-/'>s * 
 ^1 As for^your missin;:- my lett<rs.-»'Hrpply";from ^\ritinu''.-> by the want «^, 
 material, of news.-* to abolish.-» = cvjus rei dolbre ; and embittered by grief on a. 
 count of this fact.--« he resolved. 
 
 I: 
 
 they arc vorl)» alons- with other clasfcs of »ords. ne : Crecar rirciter nc ei.., <,«■>..;. 
 <lr,..Ul, „. were ru,„i,h,-,l. „f that kin.l -MfcA •flji./d^;;;;^'^^'^;''',?^^'^'''! 'I"?" 
 
 qmsquepoterai (>/r///.«exTbant(i e v\'< Yv\m» ^^'ilWn^^:^<n^^^^ Kaptim qmbus 
 
 w.-nt out after everyone had f^^n mcc^^cf^^Zt(SZ.Tni Tl'S^ \7r'''^ 
 
 die. quo CO/lslftn rat'-» h,ft-rrn//n l.«.fT^ .-'...; /> ' -rl^^l, .' i . " *J"_ •'•-^'^' «0.— 6. Eo 
 
 tliu tinlfcc, onls nre transluTOl to th<.reltilive clause (p 505 Oe« 'n- o i„ 
 ion-!, to both the piiiicinal senieiice ami the relative clause is aenernn,, 
 
 <'M, which, ficcoriliiiff ,„ Eniriisl, i.sa-e, are placed in the principal En 
 ■nee as a„r,h,„e,s of the tp.iecclcpt.h.tt ticcorcling o La' n S e a?e 
 
 OB^^rgyis^m^^ Ingieaiiy a me mber of both a relative claiiae an d the princip.1 
 J prompted by.—o ^. g. permOtus esse.-^i none of which is owed (due) to you 
 
532 
 
 RELATIVE CL.VUSES. 
 
 sentence, the Enf;li!»h lancrnare places the equivalent of qvt.*q^ie\\\ the principal mifencf, 
 and refrrs to it in the ( lau^e bv a demonstrative, or n pergonal pronoun. But in Latin 
 qiiisqiie if* irentrally jdaced in fhe relative dame, din'( tly atter the n-laiive adjectiv^. ,)r 
 adverb wbiU- in the principal .«.ntence it Is cither replaced by a demonstrative (»*).«.: 
 entirely omitted, if it may beeasdy siippiietl ; as: I't sit per qnem adsripulturr/^/o^/ «/»«<- 
 que de-^ideret : That there mav be somebody thronirh whom every one may obtain uhul 
 he df^sires Cic. Am. 9, 29. Monnil ut ea f/itce in qnoque maxima essent. imitareniur; 
 He exhorted us to imitate in everyone what was irreatest in htm ( = in qnoque ea qmn 
 maxima ineoessenf. which arranirement would not be admissible in Latin). (Mc. Or. .'i, 
 12 Thus with comparative relatives, and with relativf fidvfrbs : I t qndntt qmnque >^e 
 ipse faciat. fanfi liat ab amicis; That even/ one should be li»'id in x'/ch esteem by his 
 friends rtN-A^ holds himself, (.'ic. Am. 10.— Vallum sumpspre vnde cmqne proximum Uiit; 
 Eacli took the materials for the rampart //wm that jilai't uhich was neaiest to ntni { - 
 qiiinqiie ex eo loco qui ti tuvximm fait, which arraiiLMment would tiot be admissibUi 
 Liv. ;^, 27.— Generally the relativ»- clauses in which qnisqne is tluis incorporated are placxl 
 BY INVERSION before the principal sentence, in whicli instance tlie ijriiicipal seniencr i8 
 frequently introduced by a demonstrative {it) referriui: \o qui/ique, in>tead of bein^' iii- 
 tr(Hliici-dl)y the syndetic, antecedent of the relative, as : Koscius jaindiu h(»c est cniisc- 
 cutus lit iu quo quisque ariitici'» excelleret. ix in biio ;renere Hopcius dicereiur ; K«>scmi>, 
 Ion»- since, has obtained the distinction ttia: ex-try one in that spher»- in ivhich lie excels 
 is c^llfd a Hoscius in his specialty. Cic. Or. 1, 28. Tims quisque is sometimes placed 
 alter quo in those comparative clauses connected by qvo. . .to, as : i^uo quixqut* • st ^o- 
 leriior et in<:eniosior. //oc docet imcundius ac lahoriosius; Eni-y one teacluswiih i-o 
 much jjreater ire and pains, as he is (mor»-) sk.lful and in-enious. Cic. Rose. Com. 11.— 
 If qiiisque occurs in tlie same sentence in two diilV-rent relations, the one may l»e placed 
 in the principal sentence (mostly it it can take one of the constructions mentioned in 
 § m-i, li 2t). ;^) ; while the other is incorporated \\\ the relative clause, as: I)ionyi>iii< 
 edixit ut quod qni-que e sacris habCret, id ante diem certain in suum quodque lanuin re- 
 ferret • That even/ one should Xmw):, everythinq that he held of sacred utensils, brlurc :i 
 certain day to the temple in which it belonired. Cic. N. 1). 3, 'M. S«.meiimes yz/iAVJ/c is 
 repeated iii^AO/Aproposuions if it has tiie same relation in Ixith. as : Opportunitas ut i\\x 
 culque i\\tiix esset ea cu'ique obvenlret ; That opportunity should bill to etery one s m 
 which is suitable to him. Cic. Fin. 4, 13.— Rarely, quixque, in this connection, is attaclud 
 to the principal sentince alone. In classical lan-u "ire this «iccurs only il the pnnciiKii 
 sentence precedes, atid quisque is placed alter <('/w or ,<e, as : In.nnte adole-centul id ^J//i 
 ^fax^'/^jrenusietiliisdeirendieconstituit^'/o^/maxime.idamJlvit (where the usual eonstriic- 
 tion ' quod quisque ojenus jetStis degenda' maxime adilmilvit. id siin constiiint 'would im- 
 pair the rhetorical svtnmetry of the principal sentence); Kven/ one choosvi^ in hisyoiiiiL'tr 
 days that future vocal ion/ar M^Z/icA h<'has a |)redilecti<»n. Cic. Off. 1. .32, 117. —Laier writers 
 (rarely) phice quisqne in the principal sent, nee even if no such position alter /?»/i/.f or se 
 can be assigned to il, as: Bonus liber melior est quif<que quo major (inst. of quo qui-que 
 major, which construction lias not been chosen, becau^e in this airanizenu-nl qin.sq'ie 
 would have the app.arance of an absolute adjective, = qui.<quehomo) \ Every good buoU 
 is the better the larger it is. Plin. Ep. 1, 20. See Ex. 1-3. 
 
 Obs. 2. The Latin Language frequently combines with a relative adjective dimiptive 
 arf;^6'/tJV/f a» ACCKS80RV PKKDiCATES of the relative (p. 241» foil. \ which agree with the 
 relative in gender, numb, r, and case. This combination, which is not admillea lu 
 English, is used in the following instance? : i-« n „ 
 
 1) If ill Eui,'lish a sueKiiLATiVK, used as an attribute of the antecedent, isqualilieu i>.\ i 
 relative clause. Such relative clauses «h) not, logically, restrict the antecedent. \nit the 
 superlative, and. it construed in the sam»; wav in Latin, would confuse ihe logical aim 
 grammatical relations of the clause. Hence The Latin takes the superlative out ol ine 
 frame of the principal sentence, and joins it, in the form of an accessory predicate umi 
 the relative, i. e. makes the relative (instead of tlie grammatical antecedent) the lof/uai' 
 sufiject of the superlative, as : Massilieiisitini civitas FoniCjiim eis aflecit hanonffUK q"0'^ 
 habuit amptis.'.imm ; The Massilian State conferred on Foiiiejiis the hiqhest hono?^ uct,i</i 
 it had) in its i:ift. Cic. F<mt<'). »1, 14. It would not be admissible to express thl^^ fv- 
 tence in the Eii'di-h way (Civi'tas Fontpjum amplissiniis honoribus afl^cit quo> habuit», 
 bec.iuse (a) the principal sentence would implv that the State had 'highest' honors to 
 confer, and perhaps no other honors; (fj) the clause 'quod hnf)uit' would repj'-i' "" 
 assertion already made in the principal sentence, namely that tiie State had such h'»"'; ■; 
 to confer. But the construction would not imply what the author meant lo state, uMnn 
 that the h<mors it conferred ictve the highe-t of those it, held. Tliis predicative r^''^'""" 
 is expressed in the lorm of an acces,^ory predicate attached t<» the relative, ^ tiie 'i*^"'' . 
 which it had as the hi ghest, ^/fty?<7 "'t^ Highest . — Thus : Aganiennum Difinie ae vowr» 
 
 * Instead of this form of the comj)arative clause, more rreqiieutly the form with n 
 gviaque and two superlatives is ui?ctl. See ' Comparative clauses'. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE RELATRT: CLAUSE. 
 
 533 
 
 quod in puo regno ;)?//c/<^mm?/mnatum cpset illo anno; Agamemnon had vowed as a sac- 
 ritice to Diana ihe fnofit btnutiful of ivhaf had been procreated that year in his kingdom. 
 Cic. Off 3. 25.— Often superlatives of this kind cannot, even in l-ni;lish. be attached to 
 the antecedent, without impairing the sense of the passage, as : Ille Ephesum ad eum 
 qutui tu ex lux^ Jidelixi<imuni delegisti, i)ecuni:im misit ; lie ncnt that money to Ejjhesus 
 to a man whom you had selected a.v the mod trustworthy of your officials (different iroin • to 
 the most trustworthy of your officials whom you had selected '). Cic. Dej. 5. 14.— See Ex. 
 4-7.— The i-ame form ir- used in comparative' clauses with qiiantvs and posse, dep» ndent 
 on superlatives, and corresponding to 'as much (great etc.) as possible'. In clauses of this 
 kind the superlative !■> always attached as an ac<'essory predicate to qnantus, and not to 
 the .••ntecedcnt, the syndetic antecedent tantus beinj.' generally omitted (See Ex. 10), as : 
 Vi in transversos quanto maxiino possent impe'u concurrenuit (instead of impetu fuaximo 
 quanta jtossent); To rush against their front with as hard a dash as they could. 
 Liv. 10. 2S. See Ex. 8-10.— In^tead of quantns more usually the adverbial foirm with 
 quam is emi)loyed. Thus the idioms mentioned P. I, p. 221, li. IT. must be explained : 
 .Iiigiirtha quam maxitnas \miv6l capiat parat. Sail. Jug. 48.— Superlatives if tlius cou- 
 necied witli relatives often have tlie meaninir of a hiqh (not highest) degree, being ren- 
 dered like i)osiiives with an adverb ol intensity, as : "Veries mittit ad Antiochuni regein 
 rogatum ea rcu^a qu(R puUliernma apud eum viderat ; Verres sent to king Antiochus, 
 and ask«-d him for those admirable {moat beauiifvl) ra-ses which he had seen in liis house. 
 Cic. Verr. 2. 4, 27. [If here the superlative could be attached to the antecedent, it would 
 have the meaning 'for tlie most beauliuil of the vases which he had seen \] Sec Ex. 11. 
 2) The same construction is extended to adjectives in the positive degree, if the ante- 
 cedent is conceived as being unqualitied with respect to the action of the principal sen- 
 tence, but as being restricted l)y an adjective in regtird to the predicate of the relative 
 clause. Such coll^tl■uction8 are variously recast in English, as : Phileas, vir inquigti 
 animi, et minime otium quo liim diutino senescere videbiltur. paticntis ; Phileas, a man 
 "Whose mind was restle>s and impatient of inactivity, which it then seemed was ever to 
 continue till he would bean old man. Liv. 2,j. 7 (different from 'impatient of the long 
 lasting in ctivity in which he seemed to grow old).— Sometimes, in ret derinir such 
 Latin constructions, we would combine the adjective with the antecedent, alihough, 
 l«)gicaily, the action of the princijial sentence has no connection with it. as : Romulus 
 Sabliias viru'ines qiiie Romani ludOrum gnwiS. venissent, quos tum prinuim anniversarios 
 in Circo faceie instiIui^set, Consualibus rapi jiissit ; Romulus gave orders to abduct, on 
 the day of the Consualia. the Sabine virgins who had come to Rome for the sake of the 
 annual qutnes which Romulus had then lirst established in the Circus, Cic. Rep. 2,7,12. 
 — Privatis qiiibiisdam vxpecunid quam con-ulibus 7/i</^</(7m<iederanl, tertia pensio d« be- 
 bninr ; To certain private citizens the third instalment was due of the loan (as if pecu- 
 nid mutud quam d(!derant) ichick they had made to the Consuls. Liv. 31, 13.— If attribu- 
 tive adjectives referring to the antecedent, logically belon-r to both the principal sen- 
 tence and the clause, they are. even in Latin, aifiched to the antecedent, and not to the 
 relative, as : II<ic rectum putab;im. ex annuo surnptu qui mihi decretus esset (not * sumptii 
 qui mihi aunuus decretus esset) referre in serarium ad IIS X ; I considered it my duty to 
 return it) the treasury 10,000 ^estel•ces remaining from the yeai^Iy allowance which was 
 decreed to me. Cic. Att. 7, 1, <i. Here, the -returning' was made from the allowance of 
 that ytar. and hence reieis to both tiie principal sentence, and the clause. 
 
 aj con- 
 datura 
 
 1. Hoc privatorum coiisiliOrum' ubique semper fuit, nt in quam cu'iqve femin 
 venisset^domum nuberet. Liv. 4, 4. 10.-2. (;>woc/ «/I^i/e temporis ad vivendum 
 est. eo debet esse c<mtenius. Cic. Sen. 11), (]<).— 3. EOrum quai natfiril fuerant commu- 
 nia quod rulque obtigit^, id quisque teneat*. lb. Oil". 1, 7, 21.-4. Veniat Ciesar cum co- 
 pus quax haM finnissiynas'" ! lb. Fain. 10, 23, 5.-5. Themistocles nociu de servis suis 
 quern habuit fidtlistsinium ad Xerxem misit. Nep. 2,4,3.-6. Ouas res violentimmas 
 natara genuit, eftrum moderatiOnem nos soli haljCmus. Cic. X. I). 2, GO.— 7. M. Popili- 
 us iii^ tiimulo quem proximum castris GallOrum capere potuit, valliim ducere coepit. 
 Liv. 7, 23.— 8. Hannibal quantam y/fttj-iw^az/t vastitaiem^ potest ca>dibus incendiisque 
 efficit. Liv. 22. 3.— 9. Papirius Sp. Naulium jubet, inter ipsam dimicatiOnem^ nnilos* 
 quanto maximt* posset 7noto^° pulvtre, ostendere. lb. 10, 40.— 10% Tanta est inter eos 
 ^(/a/</rt wj<u'i//}a potest esse, inorum studiOrumque distantia. Cic. Am. 20.-11. P. Sci- 
 l)ioni ex multis diebus quos in \iiik celeber/imos^^ latissimosque vidit, hie dies clarissi- 
 niusi- fuit. lb. Am. 3. 
 
 ' A ri-ht of individual discretion.— 2 to be convenient.- 3 what has fallen to his lot ~ 
 * CoiistriK' : Id quisque teneat quod culque obtigii eOrum (/. e. ex eis rebus) qujc natiira 
 etc.—» with the most triistw..riby (or f//t(/irfe).—« desolation — ' during the ri-ht itself 
 i. e. >yhen the tiLdit would have fairly commenced.— « mule.—» Instead of an "adjective 
 {maxvno) agreeing \^\\\\ pulvere, an adverb is used dependent on ^movtre'' understood — 
 '" lo raise.—" the many famous and happiest days.— 1- the most glorious. 
 
634 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 535 
 
 Ban. 13. It is a princij)lc of the English language that the relative ad- 
 jectives or adverbs must be actual members of that proposition which 
 they subordinate to another sentence. According to this principle, it is 
 not allowed in English to subordinate a sentence to another sentence by 
 means of a relative which grammatically belongs to a clause dependent 
 on tlie sentence which is to be connected by the relative*. Tlie Latin 
 conception is ditferent. Any Latin sentence may be relatively subordi- 
 iiated to another sentence by means of a relative adjective ()r adverb 
 which is a grammatical member of some claum dependent on it. In this 
 instance the relative (according to the rule p.o'iO, Ous. 2) precedes iha con- 
 junction or other c(mnective of the clause to which it belongs, and the 
 clause, in this construction, generally 7;rec6(/t'« that proposititm which is 
 logically subordinated to the principal sentence by means of the relative 
 in the clause. This remarkable construction, which is very frecpient, 
 and is called ' Involution ok the kelative', must be rendered by 
 
 variously recasting the Euirlish sentence. 
 
 Obs. I. Wherever The Latin lan-ua'^e user» an involution of relative clan=e!», it con- 
 ceive;* tlie relative adjective or adveri) «.v (ico distinct word.^, nannly as a connkctivk 
 ELEMENT. consi!?tin<,' in the relative root qh icu), which connectn without bein«r itself a 
 lueniberof the s«enlence wliich it connects; .'iiul a prono.minai. or determinative ele- 
 ment, which rei)r.'seius the antecedent as hel<)ni:in«r to the jrrammatical frame of a given 
 clause. If the relative is ' involvt'd ', the relative i-oot bel(m;„'i% a- if it were aconjunciion, 
 to (mother chxwi^ii ihan the ueierniinative element, as : Vivit 'v\Q..qu<tnsi interfen"''^» ^i\\\'\. 
 essCinus. wliich would be literally rendered : That man lives t/ whom yon would hare 
 killed, we woull be safe. But the" Latin dofn not concnre or feel the construction in tlii^ 
 way. The Latin thinks as we would think if employ inu: a. conjunct ion with a demonstra- 
 tive : 'That man lives ?r//i/<? if you had killed //?/y<, we would be sate; ' Vivit illc 7'/— , 
 em si interfecisses. salvi essCmus ', where qu, beloiij;inir to sidri tsftJtnu/t, has the lorce 
 of a conjunction of «general and loos«'r import than anyspecilic conjunction ( = quuw, 
 dmn etc. withoiu their particular adverbial meaning), while em, belongin-; to si inttr/e- 
 
 cii^se^f is conceived as an accusati ve eion**. . 
 
 ""♦Some of tlie~Eni,'lisirclassical authors have attempted to introduce this form of eoii- 
 Ptruction in the EuL'lish laniruau'e, as: ' Tluij venture to he hanaed for those civil rifjhts 
 ■WHICH TiiEin ANCESTORS RATHER THAN TO PART WITH chifse to be cut to jnecen in the Jitld 
 of battle'. Aduison. Freeholder No. \. Here are two proposiiions : 1) Their ances- 
 tors cliose rather to be cut to pieces in the lield of b.-ittle; :2) the comparative clause 
 ' than to part with which' ( = than they would part with whieh). Tiie former pro})osi- 
 tiun contains no member connect iuir it with the antecedint in the p'incipal sentence 
 (•those civil ri^diis'). tm which antecedent it is mudc dependent by means ol a relative 
 'whicU\ that belonirs to the comparative clause dependent on it ; tliiis leaving the gov- 
 eriiin<' proposition of this clause qrammatically unconnected with its principal sentence. 
 Such attemi)ts have failed to find many imitators since they are repugnant to the prinn- 
 ple of the En<'lish huiLMiaire, according to which the relative word is an indlotol uf>le unit. 
 and cannot btT so separated in thought as to assign the connective, or relative element 
 ' wh" and tiie determinative clement ' ich\ to dillerent jjropoHiions. This is done in 
 the abovo quoted passage, where the element '«•//' belongs to the proposition ' 1 heir 
 ancestors in the Held of battle ', and the determinative element, to the comparative 
 cl.iu-e. To the same I'n-Erglish conMrtictions belong such expressions as 'Than wh(»m 
 ijohody is wiser ', which, being an improper imitation of a Latin idiom, is sometimes nsal 
 
 by Entilish writers. ^ , . , , , * .i n. 
 
 *♦ That this was reallv the Roman conception, appears from the remarkable fact tiiai 
 pentences thus subordinated by the m-reroot qu, have their predicates either in th*- tudic<(- 
 five or suftj'mctice according to the rules on actual relative clauses, as : O :u!oie>centiam 
 tradiictrim eleganter! cut quidein quum nnod licuerit ohjiciiliur, tamen id ipsuin lalsniii 
 rept-riatur ; O how une.vcepiionable must' be the life of that young man ! se>i'>fj M^/M-v. n 
 those repn»aches?)/Y^?v fal>e, which, even if true, would contain no reproach Cie. 1 line. 
 ]•). :^l.— Here • reperidtur' is a relative mbjiindive acc«.rdiiig to § (il4. .ff. lo. ^'^ 
 if the proposition to which r^/xn^?////' belongs, were a rejil relative clause, while the rela- 
 tive adjective grammaticallv belouirs to the clause introduced by quum. T«) the propo- 
 sition in which 'rependtur' is tlie jiredicate, only the relative root cm be n^erre<l, .imi 
 its subjunctive ft)rm can be explained only \f we separate in our inintis this relative ce- 
 ment Iroiu the determinative element. 
 
 \ 
 
 Obs. 2. A relative may thus be ' involved ' in any kind of finite or non-finite clauses, 
 and, in these clauses, may have any grammatical relation which a demonstrative can 
 have. 
 
 .-I. Of the FINITE clauses in which a relative may be involved, the most frequent are 
 conditional clau.<es (see Ex. 1-4, and the Ex. in Obs. 4, 8; Obs. (i, ] ; Obs. 7). IJut rela- 
 tives may also be involved in completing Tliat-clauses (Ex. in Obs. 6, 2), in interrogative 
 clauses (Ex. .5-7. and th(! Ex. in Obs. 4, 1 ; 4, 3; Obs. H, H), in temporal (Ex. in Obs. 4. 2 ; 
 Obs. ri. 1 ; Ors. 7), c.'iusal clauses (Ex. 8). modal Ut-dauses (Ex. 9, and the Ex. in Obs. 
 f). 3», comp.irative clauses (Ex. 10. 11. and Obs. 8), concessive clauses (Ex. in Obs. 4. 2; 
 Obs. 7) and even in n/a/i?vclauses (Ex. 12-14, and Obs. 4, 1 ; 4, 8 ; Obs. fj, 1 ; see l)eIow>. 
 In all these clauses, the relative has the same position, as in the coordination of peri- 
 ods «hich have a protasis, or begin with their clauses (p. .520) : Qui H. cujussi. cut quum, 
 guim ne, quo quin ( = si is, si (jus. quu?n ei etc.). A relative may be involved in a rela- 
 tive clause, if both relatives have different grammatical relations in the clause. In ttiis 
 instance the 'involved ' relative (i. e. that of the two relatives whose relative root be- 
 longs to the governing clause) aOcays precedes that relative which oriirinally belongs to 
 the clause. This latter relative, in the Eni'lish rendering, has always the force of an or- 
 dinary relative, while the 'involved' relative, as far as it belongs to the clause corre- 
 sjjonds to a d*'tnoufitrative (or to a p(?rsonal pronoun, if its grammatical antecedent is a 
 personal pronoun), as : AccCdit superstitio. qua qui est imbtlfus quietus esse numquam 
 ]><)test; To this must be added superstition, which never allows rest to him who is af- 
 lect«-d by it (literally : by which who is affected can never be quiet). Cic. Fin. 1, 18.60. 
 — Similar is the form of involution if applied to inferrvgative clauses introduced by in- 
 
 ^eIUl<^ ; »> nicu now iiiiie [itl is i leei. i. e. 'Jne insyjjictency oj ivtncn 1 Jeel '). tic. Arch. 
 1, L— Sometimes other parts of the «rovcrning clause are inserted between the relative 
 and the interrogative clause. See Ex. 5. 7. 
 
 B. In a sim'lar manner the relative is involved in the different non-finite clauses, as : 
 (^n III INFINITIVE clacses. Here the relative may be the subject, and is then in the 
 accusative, as : Ei quos speiamus nobis profutiiros; Those o/" whom we hope that they 
 will be of use to us (liteially : Those, we hope that who will benefit ns). C ic. OflT 1, 15, 
 4S, But the relative may be in the relation of a transitive, intransitive, or adverbial 
 object, or in that of an attribute; as : Helvetioriim una pars ^^'/o//? Gallos obtingre </ir;'(i/wt 
 est ; The one part of the Helvetian country, ichich. av it has been said, the Gauls occupy. 
 Cies. B. (J. 1, 1.— Exercitatio dicendi, in qua me non infltior inediocritcr esse versiltum ; 
 The exercise in speaking, in which. I own. I have been not a little engaired. Cic. Arch. 
 1, 1.— Cato post mortem in ea loca discessit quo milii ipsi cernebat esse veniendiim; 
 Cato, alter his death, has irone to those places, to which, he saiv, I must go myself. Cic. 
 «en. 13. 81.— See Ex. Ui-lS. 
 
 (fj) If a relative is involved in participial clauses, not belonging to the ablatives abso- 
 Itite, the relative may be in any relation except that of a subject (See Ex. 19-22 ; and the 
 Ex. in Obs. 5. 1). — In this instance many English authors permit themselves a literal 
 '\i' '''m\ of the Latin involution, as : InPhidijc mente insidCbat species pulcritudinis 
 (.*<.;'f' Ir^/w^/M- artein et maniim ad Jovis similitudinem diriirCbat ; In Phidias's mind 
 ^y^e!- *ti an ideal of beauty, lookinq at which he directed his art and hand to the expres- 
 ^,'1 of Jove's imaire (better : ivhich wasftefoi'e his eyes when, he directed .etc.). Cic. Or. 
 ■i, 9. — Relatives, if involved in the construction of ablatives absolute, almost alwavs are 
 in the relation of siibject-ablatlves, as : Sunt prima elementa natfine, qnibus auctis\\r\il- 
 tis quasi carmen efticitur ; The first elements (of virtue) are those of nature (are created 
 by nature), and when thej^e are enhanced, the poem, as it were, of virtue is built up 
 (composed). Cic. Fin. 5. 15, 43.— But sometimes relatives thus involved are in the re- 
 lation of attributes to the subject ablative, or to the objects of the predicate ablative 
 as : Quum L. Flacci res aaxtyir. cujus rirtute reqibus exterminatis libertas in republic^ 
 instil flta est ; When the case of L. Flaccus is discussed, by whose bravery the kings were 
 exti-rminated so that lib.Tfy was established in the republic. Cic. Flacc. 11, 25. See Ex. 
 2;j. '24 and the Ex. in Obs. 4, 2; 6, 1. 
 
 Obs. 3. Clauses with involved relatives cannot be literally rendered into English. For 
 the purpose of renderingsiich clauses, the Latin relative must be 'devolved', i. e. the 
 double nlation of the Latin relative must be reduced to h simjile relation. There are 
 always thre(! propositions which are aflected l\v the i- volution of the relative : 1) The 
 ptincipal st^ntence ; 2» the governinq clav^^e, to which the Latin relative nKtt refers, and 
 which is logiraily dependent on th<' principal sentence ; 3) the dependent clause, in 
 which the relative is involved, and which is thus made grammatically dependent on 
 
536 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 both the principal sentence, arid on its povorninj? clause. The rcarrant^ement of 
 tht'«e three propot^itions by 'devolvini;' the relative, is called ' dtvolution of the 
 relative' which cons'ists in the follow in<? four metliod:» : A) The governing clam« 
 is made' Gn\M>\.vnc\\.\.\ de)i€ndent on the piittcipal stntence by means of a relaiivo 
 or conjunctional connective, the dependent clau^e beinj; so attached to it that a 
 demon-^tiative or pers^onal pronoun is used in place of the involved relative. This 
 method if= called ' diuect dkvolution' (Obs. A).—B) The grammatical relations of the 
 iroverniii"- and dependent cX^n^cs ine reversed, m that what is in Latin the dependent 
 clan«*e becomes the governini,' clause in English, and vice ver^a ; the relative reinaminir 
 in the 'same clause as in Latin, while the connective properly belonging to the clause (if 
 there is any) is transferred to the other proposition. This method, whieh is callta 
 ' OKvoi UTioN BY UEVKUSAL ', IB mostly applied to non-finite clauses, but sometimes also 
 ti) the I'lniie clauses (Obs. 5).— 6') The governing and dependent clauses are contracted 
 into one proposition, which is connected like an ordinary relative clause with the princi- 
 pal sentence. This method is ciiUed 'devolution by contkaction ' (Obs. 0).—^) Both 
 the "overnin"- and the dependent clauses are coordinated witli the principal sentence by 
 u-^in'^'- a coordinating conjunction with a demonstrative or personal pronoun, in place of 
 the iTivolved relative. This is called ' devolution by coOudination ' (Obs. 7). 
 
 There are numerous instances in which, besides these methods of devolution, minor 
 change-* must be applied to certain members of the clauses, or in which connecting 
 links'inust be placed between the principal sentence and tiie clauses. Sometimes, how- 
 ever none of these diflerent metliods will do full justice to the elegance and conemmty 
 of the Latin construction, and the finer shades which the Latin form imparts to the 
 thought will be lost in the Knglish rendering. Peculiar is the rare instanee that a rela- 
 tive T» involved in more than one dependent clause, in wliidi instance several of the 
 above-mentioned methods must be combined, as: Doctrlna, f/uam ego n mhd dicatnad- 
 jiivdre mentiar ; A doctrine tho usefulness of which in several respects. I do not dispute 
 (literally : that which if J would say was not useiu 1, 1 would lie). Cic. Or. 1, 32.— Lx. 8. 2o. 
 
 Obs 4 Diuect devolution.— This form mav be applied in three dlfl'ereTit ways : 
 
 1) By u«in" a relative adjective or adverb, wiiich may be nnide a member of the gov- 
 emint/ dame, and at the same time refer to some member of the principal sentence as its 
 a-itecedent, as : Ad fugam hortJltur turpitndo conjungeiidi cum tyranno, 5?/? qui de in 
 \ncvvinm v^X, Phatarimn^ an Pisi.-tratum .nt imifatnrus : To flight the turpitude urges 
 rme) of unitin'» with a tyrant, of irhovi it is un<-ertain whether he /nil ivutate rhalanj' or 
 Pisi^trati/s cTc. Att. 7, 20.— Infiina est conditio servOrum, qt'if,i/.'> non male pnecipiiint 
 oui ita iubent nti ut mercenariis ( = quibns qui ita jubent iiti ut etc., non male pneciju- 
 nnt) • Tlie lowest rank is that of the slaves, in regard to whom some lay down the good 
 rule to treat them like paid servants (or more literally : in refjard to vhoin Xhom lay 
 down a good rule who order ' to use them ' like paid servants). Cic. Off. 1, 13, 41. 
 
 2^ By substituting for the predicate of the governing clause a verb of kindred signifi- 
 cation hnx \\\x\\ a diflerent (for inst. 'caumtive') relation to the antecedent, so H^it it 
 may be attached to it bv means of a relative, without changinu' the sense, as : ^l ill 
 umnuam patrem facere vidit quod quum imitiltus esset non patn.< siindi.^ vidertiur ; lie 
 never saw' his father do anything which, when imitated by him, would not make himap- 
 irnir the like of his father (i. e. in tnipitnde). Cic. Verr. 2, 3, «i8.--An adolescent .4uni 
 discere ea mavis qmr quum plane perdidieerit nihil sciatf Or would you rath.;r ha / 
 boy learn what Imves him igmn-ant even when he has thoroutrhly mastered it ?Lic. t-iu 
 2« 7H Thus if the relative is involved in ablatives absolute : Stajenus ea lociltus o • 
 pariete interposito, qnibus patefacti^ in judiciumque proiatis ille reicapitah^ da».nu, 
 est • Stajenus, within his own premises, used that langua-e which, after tt Jfasbetrayed, 
 and carried to the courts, caused hui condemnation for a capittd crime. Cic. J op. -W, «o. 
 
 3) By nsino a conjunction, in place of the relative, to subordinate the governing clause 
 to the princTpal sentence, as : C^iam dubium ist, an merito accusgtur gut an oiunino 
 accui^aun-incerfumest,- II. )W doubtful is it whether a person is justly accused '/ »^/* 
 vncertain whether he is accused at all ! Plin. Ep. 7, 10.-(Jratulor tib» quod tanium vales 
 apud Dolabellam quantum si ego apud sormis filium valCreni,7.<//i sain esse pos.sr)n us , 1 
 coiK'ratulate you because your influence with Dolabella is so great th(d. if I had tlie sune 
 influence over my nephew (Antony), we might be all safe by thi^ time.. Cic. Fam. ••, 1 *' •»• 
 Sometimes a conjunction may be attached to an intermediate participle, or clause, 
 thrown between the principal sentence and the clause as : Qmim re mtueor >I;';';' J^ 
 o^/^m si ad Cannab couMilem halmissCmus, melior nostra fort una J uis.et . >Y'^ ''!,'' ^'^ 
 Jpon you. O Marcellus, knowing d^nng convinced, satisfied) that our jate would hare beta 
 better, had you been our consul at Canute ! Li v. 2.), b. 
 
 Ons 5. Devolution by keveissal. This form may be applied : v-. 
 
 1) 'W^temiMwal clauses (both liniie and participial) in whuh the same tempo» a con- 
 junction is adapted to either of the two clauses, as : Lnas litteras video mihi a ic mm 
 
 CONSTllUCTION OF THE RELATrV^E CLAUSE. 
 
 5S7 
 
 esse redd it as, quas L. Quinctius quum ferket, ad bvstvm Basili vvlneratuset sp^Hat'is 
 est ; I see tliat one leitt r iias not been returned to me by voii, (ihe one) which Lucius 
 Quinctius cakimed when he was wounded and rot,btd at lia^ilus's /o/^/a Cic. An. 7, 9, 1. 
 — tiordius plaiistrum. quo vemknti legnum deldtumfuerat. in templo Jovis po.«-uit ;'Gt)r- 
 dius placed in tlie lempk-. of Jupiier tiie wjiiron in which he kode when the croxvn wa>t 
 conferred on him. Ju^l. 11, 7( = quo quum veheret, regnum ei ddanmi iuerat) — Heie 
 beloiig> the passage Cic. Or. 2, 9. quoted Obs. 2, B. o. In the pas-age Cic. V lace. 11. 25 
 quoted at the same place, a devuluiion byrevers«l is \\^ei\, but will) a modal coiPi.nciion] 
 the relation of the twoelauses l)eing not iu'erchaiiireab!.'. Sometimes the reversal of 
 tlie two claus.s may be m;.de by means ol relatives, as : Naturjl fit ut liberi a par. ntibus 
 ainentur ; a quo initio rnoFECTAM cofnmunem hnmdni (,ene?-is societdftrn petseqnijnnr • 
 That children are love.l by their parents is established bv nature ; fr.)m which l.>ve that 
 soci.'tv .if the human race has arisen w hich we perpi-tua'te. Cic. Fin. 3. fri. 
 
 2) (ienerally this meth.)d is applied to infinil ive, and sometimes to interrogative clauseg, 
 in which instance the governing clause is added as a parenthetical clause, enherasyndeii- 
 cally. or by means .)f the conjunction *as\- Socratis n.m ea Irons erat qua? Crass'i illlns 
 veteris, quem semel ait is omni vita risisse Lndlins ; Socratess face was not that of 
 old Crassus, wii.), as Lucilius says, laughed only once in his whole life Cic Tusc 
 3, 15. 31. See the passages in Obs. 2, B. a. 
 
 3) S.)metinies tliis form of devolution may be applied with a change of the Liitin con- 
 junction, in certain instanc.-s when an involuti.m is used to hide, as it wee. the main 
 l»oint of a sentence under the form of a dependent clause, and to solten thereby with 
 urbanity the directn.ss .)f a statement, as : Atiieus 'Noli, oro te". iiiquif Siillse 'adver- 
 su-^ e.)i*m«' ducerecuM quibus ne ontka te auma feki:em Italium renqvi' • Au\c\\« 
 sai.l to Sulla ' Pray, do nor lead me against tho.se whom I would have joined in fight- 
 ing YOU, if 1 had not preferred to leave Baty. Nep. Att. 4*. 
 
 Ocs. 6. Devolution by contraction.— Tiiis lorm is us.'d : 
 
 1) By changiuL' the predicate ol th.> dependent clause into a corresponding verbal 
 NOUN (in iiig or otherwise), which is made an ol>ject (geiieraliv a pr.-posiii.»nal object) or 
 other member of the coniracied prop.)sition, the relative being used as the connective 
 of the whole propositi. »11. Frequently, with this method a change of the predicate ac- 
 conhntr to Obs. 4 must be connected, as : Recordor tna consi.ia, quibvs si parvissem 
 
 guas qui tenent 
 nu 
 
 asqui tenent eruditi ai)pe!ianinr; Epi. unisisnot p.dished enough in those accompiish- 
 •nts the holders (post-essors) .»1 which are called ' sch. lars ', Cic. Fin. 1, 7.-Expulso 
 
 th.)se time^ 
 * This is one t)f the instance 
 
 in which we cann.it appmach the finer shades <.f the 
 
 "s 
 
 Latin s.-ntence. The pa.ssage. as rend.'ied above, contains th.- real meaning of Atticus's 
 ^ords, but this meaniii<: is far in.)re .lirectly expressed in the Engii^h version than in 
 fjhc Latin text. If, however, the passa-e is r.-ndered otherwise, the real p«.int will be 
 •*•/,,'' " ''.'^"'^ "' "'^' I^'"'" t^-'^f- '^ intimated by the lo<,ical connection of the openin'rwords 
 " ../m qui/jHs with the g.iverning clause ' Baliatn lellqvi \ As rendered by our "i-amina- 
 rians and oditors. the sense of the Latin woids wii be all but nnintellicrible " Br5der 
 renders : For the soke of whom I left Ifa/i/, le.<if J might be compelled to bear arms against 
 you. Kuhn.'rand Meirii g : With wheun I did not 'wl-h to bear arms against yov. and 
 therefen-e left Italy (whiili form is as obj('(ti.>nab]e in re<2:ard to (ierman (-tvle. as it is in 
 the EiiL'lish veisi.mi. Madvio : With whom 1 did not wish to bear ar-ms against yov so 
 that /left Italy for that very reason. In all th.'sc renderinirs rh.- ifnwillinLMiess.)! beaiiii"' 
 arms again-t Suila i- made the main point of tlie sent, nee, w hile the m:iin point is ' that 
 he, if he had remained in Italy, would hare joiindthon in the fiirlit against Suila. ThaCher 
 in his ' improvi-m.-nl' .»n Madvjg's rendeiiiig. makes the wtoiil' point more prominent 
 still by translating : 'Against thos.- wUh whom I was so unwilling to bear arms against 
 you that I lelt Italy \ As if rht unwillingness of Atticus to fiirhr airainsr Sulla could be 
 a reas.m not to tiL'ht for him !— It i» prop'.r toadd here the r.inark that the abovt-qu.ited 
 passaize is objectionable 111 tliejioint of i aim st.\le. since the wortJs 'cum qnibus' may 
 be grammatically referred \o IxAh, the dependent vVaum^ ' )ie contra te a7^nafe7rem\ and 
 to the i,'ov.'rniiiir clause lla/ium renqui (cumqiiibus Italiain rellqiii, ne contra te arma 
 ferrem). This glaring ambiguity cannot be excused with the elegauceof theconstructiou. 
 
538 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE RELATI\'E CLAUSE. 
 
 539 
 
 ,» ..w ..... ....-^,.: - ;- . Pouic-or omnibus, oini.i nu- (k"fen^iuIu• u>ilrn,.. t'j>^(' 7"« "«"«^ 
 
 Ob?. 7. Devolution- «y coOiu^ination. i-^ hh k seMt"nct'. Soiuetim.s a con- 
 
 n,.v l.i' rom.ect.-a by ^''^''^'n^tion u u^ pn.^'^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ,.e,in.lin.n..n>e,n..t.la.^^ ,n actOr.- can.., 
 
 /A^ ^««/«y in ^treuiili. LiV.'*\^-;~\ - . .'e^^^ tl.in-s w.iic.i an okatc: .mi>t have 
 
 BY NATURK, AND THE UtFhCT , .... - comnarit^OU ' 
 
 OB,. 8. T.:: ,-,.,„,iv,. i, in..>v.... i" -•"r-i;!' ;;^j^ !"■ -, j^» i;:;;;;^::;;!;"^;;!.. 
 
 If <2</outf. has tlicturce 
 7). {'haiiuiiiir t*lthtr 
 
 one, (a) bv tho coin k rat ^ ^^^> ^ ; / ^ „ ul ' y ■«.ntuact...n (Obs. 7.. cha.,^...- el.ln-r 
 o^a^^^bJect-nolnlnatlVL^the UrNoiut ...._ inm^^^ 
 
 the compa.ativf into a '^«MHMlap-e, "' " ^l^'!'^^, VJ ue fo//^y>.,/7//ir6 clau.^e i. dcvolvc-d 
 
 lent e.vpressi»ns. If v/zoimplK^'^ -^ ^"^V^'^J^^^-jVu 'livV, bv kkvki:^a.. (Obs. .">., as : Avii!* 
 in ,he^U. way. while the j;oy..-n...,L^c^^^^^^^^^^^ „ ,^,^,,,, ,,/,,,, ,« ,,^ 
 
 tui.>«, quo cire nemint-ni V-' '^''^''■^•'%^ ./Z/ J , u- in niv «pinion, wa.. the bravest c.ti- 
 opinwn. had no superior in the l'^''' ^^^'^' '^ \^i ' , f,.i \iei,et esse a/./ir/vi'^s- ; The 
 zen). Cic. Plane. •jl.-Homuui.n "' '\*;\;a ie ^/n "s ^ OtV. l,4.i. 
 
 interest of fellow-men, winch should be the f»;^^/-'. ' 'V .y.u j,, ff,^ „to..( pernicious 
 -qua nulla p^ndcie. /«^V^r u,.n....,..i vi ue p'' ?>t 'l^^'J ,;,;/ /^^'e /.la.ive, as abl.-.tive 
 mU that conl.i beiull ;»'^\\'f^' /'^ "\=' ;, ,^, ..V^^* -.^and Tx.-clalX ehietly i.. th. fon....la 
 or comparison, is i..v.. ved bo h "' ''•^ '";[,*• ^';, li t li u. a- : DeiiniMi, quo „e pluris 
 Er^nf^^^ou ':4e;;^ K'r:^;^;;;n^";:-"V^^;r!>uy -at UUeraHy : -at n.ore tha.. 
 
 -;.n:^-ji:x.r:Jbi?;^;;^-^i^;;5:ci^;^^^ 
 
 qmiles ,i om.iea semper lessen.', ''^V'»'!"/* "V '^*-; 1'^' mo i ,, ."nantlsii cep.sset. in- 
 ?1>. Plane. 11, iS.-:! lyi^l''^' '^»^'•VM' .« ^ PuN.s e<?^ vinciti». non.eu 
 
 t.i.rnis accepra clades foivt. Liv. 10 •|-|;-'»- | " „". 'j L_. .p,/,„ .,^,„..1 sum ea si.n.pta 
 luTpnli Ho.nilni deh-atnr necesse est. V,?;iAl V/;/;»;///;/*o^/'///< mlutarihv uUr^i.luriwn 
 
 K^;;;:r;;;n;;^t,s:;v^^^^^ 
 
 tainlv. bad ihose q»:'!»''^^- J 7\'l\V.;'*'\'V V.mi di. ii.<Mhe li mixn hM> 
 
 would hare arisen '.-« panic.-»" l.at '• ^•- ' '*'^:'i 'jS^J, ere.''- or ' ..f who^e d./^o' 
 been vanqnisned.-'^ om whose rt'^ory chv*^^^<\i^J^oJX^^^^^ ^ ^^^ 
 
 the «^./.i/J/^/^io,. etc will be a ^^^^'^^ZriTX^^^i^^t 'seen -'M,a;, be bred to 
 their country.-'» xyhom. I »^..u.w yo ho 1 ,'^ J^. /^r'^.i ^ol p ram.M^it importance, 
 moral principles.-y for which P' P»f;;' "^. ^ J^oi who incnlca es them '.-'^o object.- 
 ^-iMhechai-actcrof his ^^'-^^l'^'^^'' ''' '^^, .^^^^^^^^^^ by the a-ency of fire. 
 
 >i subject : Your fellow-seetarians.-»'' to explain e\eryiiiin„ oy i ^ j 
 
 niam quid diceret^ infelligi nohiit'. omiflann/,s^. Cic. N. D. 3, 14. .3-").— 9. Sulla cum 
 mat;no equititu in castra venit. (/uo.t vti* ex Latio coseret Ronue relidus erat. Sail. 
 JiijLif. 95.— 10. Multi ingcniuin, 7?//)o n<qi.e ;«<?/i?/,s- ucqiie a //ipliua aliud in natura nior- 
 tali.im est, incnltu" atone gocordiiV torpescere*' sinimt. lb. 2. — 11. I'hidiie eiraulft- 
 cris», qyibuti^^ nihil in illo jrenerc perfecting vidCm.is. cojritare tanien po^gunlus pul- 
 crinra. Cic. Or. 2. 8. — 12. Magna est vis conscientiu' quam^^ qui .u'gli;:eiit, quum me 
 vioiare'"'' volent'3, se ipsi ii.diciliiiint''». Ih. Cat. 3. 12, 27.— 1.3. Sunt cei'ta vitia qncE'^^ 
 nemo'*' est quin eflugere ciipiat. II). Or. 3, 11. 41. — 14, illiid ipsnni qn:er«'i' cvjus qui^^ 
 git comjKJs'", sit eloqiiens. lb. Or. v9. 101.— 1.'). Ponijieji.s uiins inventus est qutnV^* 
 gocii .11 nrbls suas cum exeiT tii renisse gaudeant''". lb. Leg. Man. 23. — 16. Piaeieiire 
 iion pos?um Ilainiicaren. el Hannibalem. qvoii et aniini niagnit.idine. et callidiiate^' 
 om.iln in AfriCiT nato> ]/ras/i/is.<e con>iat. Nep. 21. 3. — 17. Ea scripsi ud te, quce et 
 fraluti tuje co/iducere arbitiarer, e. non atiena''^ tttt-e dueerem a dignitjl'e. Cic. Fam. 4, 
 7.— IS. Attribu.to hoc Gra'cis liiteris. 9W(/;v^w, constat (JnlOnem j^ers/udio'^urn'^* fuisi^e 
 in seneciflte. Ih. >en. 1, 3. — 19. Dedit MurC-na; facu tatem'-^ ie>piiblica libeialitStis, 
 qua u.iu^-'^ niultas sibi tribus adju.ixit-^. lb. Mur. 42.— 20. Quid adhortSri leferret^'* 
 eas legiones cum quihus'^" luiiieiiiem hunc ipsu.n hostem feculufi. conlessiOiiem ceden- 
 tis pru victorijl liabui y Liv. 21. 40.— 21. Nullas consequ^jntur voluplStes quaivrn^^ po- 
 tie.idi sj)e inllainimlti^» mi.ltos labOres n.agno>^que susceperant''^. Cic. Fin, 1, IS. — 22. 
 Oculi, ta.nquanihpeculatrjres^^' al.issimum locum o\)\\\\c\iX\ ex qvo plai-iina coriJ^ijicitnteti^* 
 fungantur M.o munere. C ic. N. D. 2, 56.-23. Pnefecli dixere, Darii legnoss ii»sOrum uiti^* 
 doininatiOneiii^' , ^'/Of.r.v/i/^c/o^'' ip>os poi estate expnlsos^» civibus siiis pa'uas datflios*". 
 Is'cp. Milt. 3.-24. ^apieiitia est una^^ qua prierejyfrlce^'^ in iranqtiillitate'*^ vivi"'* potest. 
 Cic. Fin. 1, 13.— 25. Cautum erat quo uejdus*^ auri et argenti domi haberemus. Liv. 34, 6. 
 
 Item. 14. If each of two propositions, the one of which is dependent 
 on the other, contains tlie s.'une determinative referring to the same ante- 
 cedent in tlieir j)rincipal sentence, the Latin language reguhuly connects 
 tlie depcndeui, and not the governing clause relativelN' with the principal 
 sentence, while in English the reverse is the case. This is called CKoss- 
 INVOLUTION of the relative. 
 
 Obs. 1. Dependent clauses connected by cross-involution of the relative, fake the 
 same grammatical form as tho>e connected by ordinary involution accordinL' to ^. 13. 
 While thus the determinative ol the dependent clause fakes the form of a relative, that 
 of t.ie governing clause lias the form of a deinonsirative or of a pronoun, m liich is g<n- 
 eially uitdtrfilood .f it is a suiyect-nominalive, or if it is in tlie same case Witli the rela- 
 tive. Such constructions must be rendered by • uevei^sal'. making the gortrvning clause 
 relatively drpeiident on .he principal enteiice. and changing th«' Latin demon^tl•ative 
 or pronoun (expressed or understo. dt Jn.o the col•re^polldilll.' relative, while in the de- 
 pendent clause the Latin relative is clumped into an Eni:li^h denionstiative or pc^^onal 
 pronoun, as : Aiitonius habtiil compiehensam animo qiiamdani form.-im eloquent ia>. cui 
 ijeoMAM NIHIL OKKUAT. COS quibusailquid deerat in eani formam non poterat inciuderc ; 
 Anionius had condensed in hi> miiida ct-rtain type of eloquence, iu nhich he could not in- 
 clude tho^e who were defective in anythiiiL', bk^^alsk this typk was without defect 
 (literally: Nothingwas wanting to «7).'cic. Or. 5. 19. Here the same determinative occurs 
 in both propositions (T^a nihil deerat'. and *in eavi formam non poterat includere'). 
 Either ui the two propo?^itions might have been relatively connected with the antece- 
 dent /wv/i am in the principal sentence. The L.itin connects the dependent claui<e rela- 
 
 * Ills meaning. — "■'because he did not want. — 3 wliom we will pass over. — * lor the en- 
 listing of which. — s which is the l)est and most important gift that nature has bestowed 
 ou etc.— « neglect.—* sloth.—» to become toj-pid. to rest.—" statue.—'" which are the 
 most perfect works of art thai we can see.— '^ andthosethat slight its power. — is inpire. — 
 |3 mean. — '< to betray. — '^ (itvoluiion by conliaction. — i** nemoqvin. every one. — i^ I am 
 in search of that 'something' wliich. -i** if. — ^"^ cennpettem ea^e altcxijus rei. to have some- 
 tliiiiir ; or re.ider by • the possessio.i of which makes an oi-ator eloquent '. — "*' quern. . .re- 
 7/^^•^^, who^e visit.— ^» remember with joy. — ^* shi-ewdness. — '■^^ not prejudicial to. — "* a 
 Very zealous ii\\u]cut.—'^^ /aculfaft liberalitafi>!, the means of being liberal. — "^ by the use of 
 which.- 27 to attach. — -'' o( what use would it be. — -'• with whom I pursued this very 
 eneii.y whose tliijht is tantamount to a confession of our vicioiy. — ^o (•,,!. (jig p.-ike of 
 which. — 31 iidlained by the hope of piocuriiiir them. — ^^ to sulunit to. — ^3 j^pi^.j;. — 34 — ^^ 
 siio inuiure lunuantiir, phiriina tx to loco con>pi( iendo : = from which they cun p-rceive 
 tin- greatest amount (i. e. more than if plactd lower), and thus pei lorm their lunctions 
 properly. — 3* rule. — 3* to depend on. — 3' reign. — "* afuM- the extinction.— 3» would be 
 driven from power and etc. — *^ parias alicui date, to be pu.iished by somebody. — <^ It 
 JBwif'dom alone. — *'^ in the school of etc. — *3 jn peace with one's self. — ** man c;in live. 
 — ** The maximum amount of etc, was fixed (than which wc should not have more). 
 
 y 
 
 t 
 
540 
 
 RELATIVE CL.\USES. 
 
 tivclv makin^r the governinj? clause demon-s^tradve, whWe the En-lish laniruaire n1n^'t 
 alwdjs «ive tho relative form to tht- rjorernifu/ ciau.i- »iti earn lurinani Hc.).-Kx qno 
 crein^v illiul fst Cai0ni8, a quo q>nrm qiuertritur qiiul n.axnnr in re faini lan exiM-( Iri-t, 
 T^Fsi' NU IT • hene pascere \ Hele b.-lm.-. that .ayii.- of Cato'., who, uheu a^ked ihicr- 
 allv ' when it was askrd of /dm') what was the first requisite in a hoiiseho d, answeued 
 ">i .rood hoard ' Cic OtV -J 25. Here the determinative of the uoverniiu; clause Uhe pro- 
 noun i" i^ left out as sul)ject-n.muiuuive. while in En-iish it takes the relative lorm ur/>o) 
 If the period had I.een armn^ed without involution, it would have been -fiwt, quum ab 
 et»etc/ bee Ex. 1-5. 
 
 Ob^ 2 The fame form of cro?s-involution is applied to ;)ff/7ia;>ta^ clause?, which arc 
 'devolved' in Ei.irlish in the same manner as finite clau.<es, as : Salutalio illlus libri 
 om eimc>>.'af,lf>>.^, quasi jacentem r-rd^an^' The dedication of that book (,yiv/n<h 
 A tie IS ro sed me froin despondet.cy when he addressed me BV it (when addres.in- It to 
 me\ Cic Brut 3 14 Here the demonstrative of the -oveiinii- clause, beini: lu the 
 same cas'e with the relative, is omitted ^quasi jaceulem eo excitavit), wlnle m English u 
 takes the relative form. 
 
 Ob« 3 Sometimes the denwnstrntives of the governing clan.«o are left out in Latin 
 even if thoy are in oblique cases ditlerent from the case of the relative i!i tlie « lependent 
 clause e<' when thevare subiect-accusatives or transitive objects and even il they arc 
 prJpcSitronal ol^idverbial ,.bject. aCa-sar dixit) ho« esse ^ 
 
 Kcnenumero connresd Helvetii non solum in suis. ned etiam iii illorum hnibiis ple- 
 l^a^c^^a^rirint (instead of 'eo. .upemru.r) ; Ca-.ar said that these were the same 
 aitnumn^) whom the Helvetians had -renerally defeated when they had met inih tht^n 
 both on Helvetian and German soil. C;e-. B. G. 1 40.-(C:e^ar dixit »';/^- /^' ^' "^j; J' 
 populi Komaui acci.iisse), qni n alicOjus injurKe sihi C""^^-'"^^»';^';'^ l^y'V/"'^,':,*^,;' : 
 cile cavCre ( = non fiii>se ti ditficile) ; ...of the Koman people, to which U would not 
 have been difficult to guard against it, t/ i^ (they) had b.en '^'''Y'^'Z^^l^JylUS:, 
 Ctes. B. G. 1, 14.-Quiiii eranl ordines, quo qui intraverant se ipsi acutiss uii> ^all s 
 imliiehant (i. e. nbi se induel)ant ) ; There were live row s, where those w l.o entered iheni 
 (literallv 'thither'\ spitted themselves on the sharply pointed stakes. Cie>. b. It. ., .-l. 
 -Sentences in which, as in the last two, the demonstrative supplied is n..t a ;'C-ces>ary 
 part of the clause, may be considered as ordinanj involutions '^^'^-'''f»";-' '*\^f- J/?;. ,f ' ' 
 indeed, cross-involution is nothin? but a species ol ordinary i''Y';V'''\'\V./. wl . t el i .<e 
 method of direct devolution is applied by attaching the relative oMhe ^1^^^ "^^ ^*; 
 
 to the .'overnin.' clause, and which, even in Latin, may be replaced by a constiiittioi i 
 whichihe i4 litlv-e is /o/ inv<,lved (Ous. 5). See Ex. (i. T.-Scmetimes two relainc 
 claises one of Which is dep.'nd. nt on the other, which is a-ain dependent on a govern- 
 
 ng clause ai-; thu. involvi-d with omission of the antecedents \^'^^'':^^^, 
 ri.-Tvides locutlnnem emendatam et Latlnam. cujus penes r/uo.v la us a Ihiic ' ; " ' ^ 
 rationi< aut scientiu' sed quasi home consuetudinis : \ou see that the first re uis te, lor 
 an Sor is a iCl i.atin 'style, which with tho^ who had the «-^'P^'i^V;;'-; ' ^.V^Iut'o 
 the reputation of a go(Hl style) was not a consequence ol a se entitle method, hut o 
 p ope practice. Cic. Brut. 74, 2;>s. This oi.siruct.on must be thus ^eso IvkI ^^^^^^^^ 
 aimd eou>^nes quos eju.s laus fuit, m.n fuit ratio.ns etc V'^^^'^'t/^ ^^.i X., "i J/ .o^-^ 
 governini clause ' nhn fuit ra/ioni.\ where it ). underMood a8 ''^j ^ >JJ'^- ; i ( hu on 
 i« omitted, as being suincienilv implied in i>rnc.< quo^ ; Ujus' \^ turned by involution 
 into the connecting relative of the whole of the three clause». ,., • i 
 
 Ob.. 4. Sometimes the dependent clauee has, besides !^'«/.^''t^''"|'''^;;;;%);\V^'\Ji-t\"t 
 in common with the governing clause, an.)ther deteiminative relernng to « /ii«^r^/'} 
 ant-cXnt in the principal sentence. In tliis instance it would be grammatically coruct 
 ?o u^e eirher ot the o detern,^ of the dependent elaiise as the connec.ing reh - 
 
 tWt^ Bi the I alii prefer, that relative c.mnection which will not require the u.e.oj 
 
 "^^ih^^eZ^^si^tivha addVion to^ it as : M. ^^'i^r^^^^.^^S^'^^^^Z 
 QUirrn pnelectus essel in Cilieia. est interfectus ; M. Gratidius, the '^ ."^^ "' f^' .f " .^ 
 Xi. s J/o wjis killed when he was /aw (Antoniiis's) preleet in Cibcia. Cic. Brut. 4o, l(.b. 
 Un^u^d V- ,^ q^m ;.. pra^fectus e.set ^;vhicil c.,nst ruction w.Hddn-qm^^ 
 of adem.mstrative. while, if construed as above, the delermmalnet, of l)oih clau.c, 
 being the subjects, are omitted.] ♦ i v^ 
 
 Obs 5. Sometimes, but more rarelv, clauses which mi -ht have been «^71"*;^^«^ J 
 cross-it^volution, are construed as in English, so that the <}^l^';^-'':^''V\C"novi^ 
 dependent clause while the relative beh.ngs to the qorennnq chmt^e, n> . Hoc ne 1 . qu 
 Sr/ci i us 1 xiVu qua.n, q'um. (piia jure fui ei inimlcus doleo a te "ni"»'"^^,^,' J cTc 
 mm". Vtu.u (instead of cul quia fui inimlcus, doleo (.«;») a te...esse .uperatum). tic. 
 
 Phil "Z 7 
 
 i. Tcctaigiturambulatiuncula' addenda est, qnwm i//» tantam faci amu^ n"!'ntamu» 
 
 ^"rj^ta^afnbulatiuncuhi, a little hall for promenading. -^ which, if we make it etc. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE KELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 541 
 
 UUUIII 1. lid tJl* I** 1*1 IJIV I V(l|/lll>r t t I llA 1 . . V ■ -^. ,^IV>. A .f.AIV'. .. 1. i.- IIIV.UIII, ^uti yM((//i. 111. 
 
 ret majoies ex otio fructiis cai)e!e qitam ceteris, non duWaterim me i:ravis>iinis tem- 
 pesiaiinus ohviam fene*'. lb. IJep. 1, 4.— 5. Ex qiioexstiiit ilhuU". multa esse j)iH)ba- 
 bilia", quix^"^ quamquaniwsw peiciperentur'^, tuinen, quia viMim'* haben-nt quem- 
 (laip. insignem el illu^trein, eix sapieiiiis viia regerC'Uir. lb. N. D. 1, 5.— H. Veuit mihi 
 in mentein illud dicere quod^^ quinn apud M". GiahriOnem nuper coiumemorasseni, ia- 
 /t//eA'i vehementer populiiiu Honiamim commovGri'^. lb. Verr. 1, 14.— 7. Id solum bo- 
 num est quo^'' qui poiltur, neces^e est beStus eit. lb. Fin. 5, xS. 
 
 Piern. 15. Short relative clnuscs often take the foim of tahticipial 
 CLAL'SKS if the relative adjective is the subject of the clause. Tlie relative, 
 in this instance, is omitted, the finite predicate being changed into a parti- 
 ciple (present or perfect, according to the sense), wliich agrees in gender, 
 number and case with its antecedent, expressed or understood. 
 
 Obs. 1. The present participle is used if the action is conceived as coincident in time 
 with the principal acti(m. provided the verb is active or dejwueut, as : Non sustinuissent 
 priimim impetum ni alius metua, inddenx pectonbus ( = qui insedit pectt»rihus), a fu-ft 
 contineret ; They could not have resisted the first attack, had not aiioiher/ea;-, /Aa/ocVM- 
 pied their fiiinds , occupying their minds), kept them from fieeing. Liv. In. 41.— Ml^eri- 
 cordia est ivixritildo ex miseria cdter'ius, injuria latjorantis ( = alterlus qui injiina laho- 
 rat) ; Compassion is the grief (arising) I'rom the distress of another pernoii who is bVjS'er- 
 ihfj wrongly. Cic. Tusc. 4. 8, 18. See Ex. 1-5. 
 
 Obs, 2. The past participle is used if the action contained in the predicate of the rela- 
 tive clause is anterior to the principal action, i)rovided that the verb xajms^ive or dei>o- 
 Hint • Ne munus humai)um. ui^nqnatnm a Deo. delugisse videamini : Lest you may seem 
 to have deserted tiie d'dy of men asfiqned (which has l)cen assigned) f/y God. Cic. Kep. 
 6. 1."), 15— /1 difi imwortalVtus con><titrttam inter homines f-ocietateia evertunt ; They de- 
 stroy the mnfty ichich has been established by the immortal gods amtmg men. Cic. Oft. 3, 
 (i, -28 — I'ytha^'oias CrotOnam \itn\\.jK)pulumque in luxvriam lap-^um aiictorit5te sua ad 
 usiini fru-aliiatis revocavit : P. came to Croton and recalled by his auihonty to frugality 
 the people' that had fallen into luxury. Just. 2i), 4. Ex. »>. 7. 
 
 Obs. 3. If the active predicate of a relative clause denotes an action prior to the prin- 
 cipal pction the clause cannot assume a participial form, except the verb is a dejxmenc 
 (seu the last Ex. in Obs. 2), or if the construction may he so changed into a passive con- 
 struction that the relative is made the subject of the passive verb as: 1 imotheii^ en- 
 hanced l)v manv (of his own) virtues the qlory which fit had inherited J romtas juinei , 
 Tiinoiheils a pat re acreptam (jloriam muliis auxil virtulibus. Nep. lim. 1.3, 1. 
 
 Obs 4 If XhQpaMve predicate of a relative clause denotes an action coincident in 
 time with the main action, the clause cannot take a participijd form exc pt t''^;P;;^'Jf «^^ 
 i< conceived as a mriphrastic participle with the copula (p. 12. ), as : In^ila est Altllta. m- 
 tixlatoab Sicilia lnaAai>juncta ( = qiue disjuncta est. which '^ l^;'^}''''^]^^^^^^ ^^^ 
 lita is an ishnd which is separated from Sicdy fjy a rather fjroad channd or tie^ea.^ Uc. 
 Verr. 2, 4, 4H.-Non tam vtilitas parta ptr amleum (luam a.nlci amor ipse <»^'?; ;»f ' ^''l 
 so much the udrantaqe delurhts which w obtained through ajrien.d, as the. fuaiu » Jove 
 (itself). Cic. Am. 14, 51. Ex. 8. 9. . 
 
 Obs. 5. Absolute participles are often u-cd with the force of T^^Vi^^^^./^J^TJf/fdrsl^im K 
 absolute syndetic antecedent is (id, ei). as : t'>'0 d eodem tennKut^ >n^d< > u^i^^ 
 et nataras et vitas et cisus haoent ; Those that are horn atone and ^'''^^^^'^^''t^^Z 
 difleivMt characters, lives, and fates. CMc. Div. 2, 45, « 5.-Pnma et rV,^^^' ' ^V:^ ''^^Sco d 
 t.ilii ut viclis ac sununods re.-isteret, tenia ut vementis *;"^'7^,'-;^^j^/ ' : j''^, r^J.^^S 
 lines made the attack to oppose those that had been (already) conqueied and dtslodgea 
 
 ~\\Mircostalnu)stoi^^1Ttnri7^^::=^bU^Sii^ =' (wp^ 
 
 gill of his countrvmen's love.-^ odium.-* who. although -> v «• e e J^//'; ;^^^^^^^ 
 means -moral cohipulshm ' by some violence acting on the mind » V'^^:' '^'''•'^o^'j^V,,ce 
 « to threaten.-^ tW- .^uard If niy. life.-^ alU.ough.-^ to expose m^^^^^^ 
 
542 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 ihffore) ' tho third line in order to meet thoup that were (newly^ arriring. Cief». B. O. 1, 
 \h—Nin}ernme diet inn facili- mcnioriie niandfitur ; What li(i-< f>t<njnxt Hnd\i^ easily com- 
 mitted to memory. Aiict. Her. 3. 10, W.-Male porta male (lilal)Mntur ; What lia>< Ijeen 
 badly acquired ^oes hadlv to nanjrht. Cic. Phil. 2. 27. (JJ.-Such pariieiples may often ho 
 rendered bv ErK'lish >»ubstanlives or pariiciph's nsed 8uhs«taniively, us : Lquestris prcrlu 
 ratio etr^^/^'/^/i/^^/^ot intieqxentifms par peiicnlum inferehat ; The character of an eques- 
 trian battle wa.s equallv daiifiemns Tor the>^t//7 «"'<1 the ;i»/;-.<w/-^. ( ie.s. iv (, \ u,.- 
 Oiiein i)i<'eat loii-rincinit'iltis bellorum seiibendo leireiidOque, (luje nereidi.'i non laiiirave- 
 riint * Wiio would he wearied by the length ..f wars< in w ritini; and readinir (them), wIikIi 
 did liot tire out thnr ar/or.* '(those that waited them)? Liv. 10, «1 -Olten the Latin 
 idiom .'ivesto absolute participles, with the force of relative clauses, il they refer to the 
 ceneral idea of pcr^on-^, a ^'rammatical relation to the s-ntence which, in En-lish. must 
 be replaced by a diflerent constructicm. as: Ma-naejusdiel quo m Seiitimlti a-'robeimtum 
 est, fama e^t etiam vera stanti ; Litkkau.y : The i:l..ry of the day ot. ;yl";»i ».- »>a - 1« 
 in the Sentinat iaii disM-ict was foutrht, is «reat even toone that .•stands by tht truf/i( = e\en 
 if tiiere is iiothiu'' exa--crated). Liv. 10, 30.— Nisi forlc ha;c illi tune arma dedimus ut 
 nunc cum bene /wz/yI/o pu<_'narC*mus; Unless perhaps we have then <:iv.-ii him (to Cjesar) 
 arin^ in or-ler to ti-hi now with one that iv neff prepared ( == in order to prei)are hini 
 well for lli^'hting a'.iainst us). Cic. Alt. 7, 6, 2. See Ex. 10-18. 
 
 1 \ejm ru'ictain intupus terrain de divTna providentiil dubitAbit. Cic. N. D. 2, 39,90 
 —2* Probe» aStoicis deflnTtiir fortitado (puim eam rirtiVe/n esse dicunl propuf/nantem* 
 nro (tQinfate. lb. OtT. 1, 19. «>2.-3. Aninu) nobis opus est non af,ltorre,d,^ a Q>nelt>'Ci>n- 
 y-iiiU \a\' :W :W— 4. Nullum vitium tetrius quani avaritia. pnesertim in prinnptbits* 
 re>nn>mra,n 'rpff^rnanfiha.s: Cic. OtT. 2, 22. T7.-5. Odinsnm Pane genus honnnum (est) 
 otiicia^ (-ua) ej'prol)ra}iti>ini^', qu;e meminisse debet is in quern colhlta sunt, non c<mi- 
 memorjlre qui coiitulit. lb. Am. 20, 71.-G. Supervcniunt^ hi.< restitj(e,,tit>>isy\\i:xn\m 
 L Cornelius et C. y\&Vi\\\^ad pnvsidvim colleija' mu^si. Liv. 10 29.-.. Prniecti.< afj Ihn 
 ItoimVnx Eumenes*' rex cum auxilii.s occurrit. Just. 31, 8.— S. llisioria" est^'esta r*--'" 
 afj (etd/is na^tr,^ memoria remdta^K Cic. Inv. 1, 19, 27.-9. (^uid est tarn futile quam 
 qmapHim approbare 7>on cogidt'im^'^': lb. Ac. Pr. 2, IK, 59.-10. Jacet airpus durmvniis 
 ut'3 iiwrtni II). Div. 1, 30 —11. Proprium est»* Whexw^v fad'- >iti'( eito facere. ben. lien. 
 2 ft—\i Verum dic^nti/jus facile cedam. Cic. Ttisc. 3, 21, .'-.1.-13. \ .ntus a st-ptentn- 
 onilMis ori»iis'* adversum tenet"» AtliCnis (Lvnmiun^'' \ prona^anfifjn-^. Nep. Mill. 1.— 
 14 Vi-ui« varentem ma-na pars veri latet. Sen. (Ed. -m ~\h. Nihil dithcile ainaidi 
 pii'to Cic Or 10 — !♦). komulus vetcre consilio'» comlentiuai urbTs locum, qui nunc 
 beptiis dc'sceti'dtnfifjas^o i„ter duos lucos est, asylum apetit. Liv 1. ^:,"^,-. *^'' v'^'y^,o'"■ 
 nium ordinum consensu pro reipublicie salQte r/'fa'^J risi'iderat-.yc. ^ '• •^;- 
 18. Prisci Atheuieus(!s« arare^^ et screre frumenta ^jluiidem xetscentibu.^''*' uiontiraruui. 
 Ju8L. 2, 0. 
 
 Moods ill Held (ice Clausen. 
 § 614. Relative clauses have their predifates in the subjunctive 1) if 
 the clause is conceived as lacking reality (subjunctive of non-keality) ; 
 
 1 Correctly —^ pronvgmlre, to be a champion. —3 to shrink.—* prominent men.— » their 
 Da^t services and merits.— « exproftrare a/k/'tid, to ca>t in somel)ody's teeth ; always to 
 relW to what one has done for another, so as to make ir, as it were, a reproach to him. 
 —7 historical present. Sujmrenire alieui, to arrive while somebody is performini; an 
 action de-i"-nated by a piv-sent pariicii)le wliich agrees with its lo:;ical subject.—» J. e. 
 Eumenes occurrii Komanis qui prolecii erant.— « an historical fact.—'» ms; 7e.>Ya, an act 
 nerformed, a transaction, uu event.-'» i. e. quie remota est (periphrastic participle), 
 which is removed from, i. e. which is anterior to.— >= which is not known, i. e. by those 
 whoaDurove it.— >3 as if.— i* It is in the nature of one who performs an a< turn with 
 nlea-ure ->^ the ronhwiud.— '« is a-?ainsr (contrary to) those who etc.-»^ from Atliens 
 to the island of Lemnos.-»^ the sense of siirht.-'» accordin-- to the customary device 
 of those who found cities (of the Ibunders of cities).-^" a place which is now enclo.-e'l 
 bv two «'roves 'for those that descend' ; i.e. which is enclosed towanls the upi.er part 
 of the hill so that those tliat descend must pass between two jrroves,— -t» imaMires 
 taken bv the consent of all the ranks etc.-^"^ to rescind.-^; n.. ,wo '> ^f*^^}"^'.'' hS 
 an- dependent on //iO//>/m/t!, accordinir to the cnstruciion of docre (p. 104i. J)nt,)t has 
 not been used because this verb v^ould require the accusative ,mtv////-s., w;hich m the 
 form it was used at Justin's time (rmr/^/e-s), would not have »>*'^"t' <l'r'""^,';>'^^'';,V'^Vh .'!?, 
 the nominative, and would have made the sentence ambiguous.-s* literally : lo tho.o 
 that ate wild fruit, i. e. ' while up to their time men were liviii;; on wild Iruit . 
 
 MOODS IN THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 543 
 
 2) if the clause is logically connected with the principal predicate (gnomic 
 
 PUBJUNCTIVE, i^ 615). 
 
 A relative clause is considered as lacking reality : {a) if it conveys a 
 
 nci^ative meaninj^ under an affirmative form, or an affirmative meaning 
 
 under a negative form [R. IG. 17) ; {h) if its preilicate does not express actual 
 
 existence, but is merely conceived in the mind of the speaker. (7^. 18. 19.) 
 
 Obs. Several kinds of relative subjunctives belong to both of the above-mentioned 
 classesbt'i-njrsubjuiictivesof non-reality, and at the sam<' time «rnoinic Subjunctives. Thus 
 the relative subjunctive of purpose is a gnomic subjunctive, being logically connected 
 with the principal predicate; but it is at the same time, a subjunctive of noa-reality, 
 theaition «-xisting onlv in the mind (intention) of the sp<'aker (R. 19, Obs. 6). Ofien 
 relative mbjunctives fall under three and more diflerent niles, each of which requires 
 of itself the subjunctive. 
 
 llein. IG. Relative clauses conveying a negative meaning under an 
 nllirmative form, and vice versa, always depend on 'negative antecedents/ 
 and aUrnys require ilie subjunctive if the pegatioii in the principal sentence 
 apcts the relative clause, so as to make it virtually negative if it has an 
 affirmative form, and virtually affirmative if it has a negative form. If 
 the negation in the prineipuf sentence has no such force, the relative 
 clause,''generally, has its predicate in the indicative, as : 
 
 Nan aded qui /iOCSENTtr ( = isqtii hocsentit, nonadest): The person who lias this 
 opinion is not present. But : Aoti adc.xt q>u hoc skntiat. or yemo adest qui hoc skn- 
 TiAT ( = Ei qui adsunt hoc non sentiunt) ; Ti.ere is nolH»dy i)resent who has this opin- 
 ion. In the former example, the relative clause retains its amrniative nieanini.', l)eing 
 not aftected by the negation in the principal sentence, and hence has its predicate in the 
 i>,dica'ire In the second example the relative clause, although afhimative in form, 
 is c«>iic«ived as negative, beiiiir alVe«-ted by the negxition in the principal sentence. 
 Hence its predicate must be in the mbjinictive of non-reality. 
 
 Obs. 1. Sentences with negative antecedents (or what is virtually equivalent to these) 
 of relative clauses dependent on them, occur in three grammatical f..rms : 1 ™ "ega- 
 live antece<lent is the sibjkct of the principal sentence, the predicate ^>^'\"^ 'j'^ 'V,w 
 v.-rh esse, d.-noting mere 'existence' (p. 4M», ««s. 8) as : Ae^*o ^v^ 5?/^ ^^^ 
 Mhil est ,pHKl addi ix>.^sit. -Nulla f/.n.-^ ed q>m etc. (See Obs. 2. .\. 4.)-2) 1 he ^^,t'gatn e 
 antecedent is the silbject of the coriLA esse with a completing predicate as -^^"^^J^.f 
 Iji.nns q,d hm'. senlit (see Obs. .5..-31 The predicate of the ^''^^'^''•""'J-^;;''^'; , .Hon Vllnh 
 i,:irv verbal predicate, the nej-ative antecedent being in any grammatical re'at mn (as s ib- 
 ject* obiect. orattriiuite), as7 Neviiin, qui hoc serdiat, credtrtduni ed : neminem imeino 
 Vd -^c^\%in^rei qjexc. (See Obs. 7). In all instances tho ^^i^^;;^^^^^'^ 
 inav be replaced l.v interrogative antecedents (qtm est «''» ^^'^c- ; t \^f,^,,f :.f J^rm^' 
 See Obs. 4), or by afHrmative antecedents combined with ne-ati. ns in anj ^]\\^J^J'^_^ 
 inumquam rid'O howinem oai, = mminein unquam tidi qui etc., veque qmsquam - 
 nemo; non habeo quod = nihil habeo quod). 
 
 OBS. 2, If the predicate of the governing negative ("^'l, ^5/!;:,flr'!L!7eHi'Vclau^se 
 ABSTUACT verb e^i^e (in English expressed by ' there is ', th'''^,"« >'.';, ' ; ' / -f k a» 
 is abvays cnceived as r,ot existing if it has an afhrmative P'^,^,^ ^f \^;X. "^ n the J^ 
 a negative predicate. Hence the predicate of such clauses '" "^Vh^.i vtS nobodv uho 
 jumiive, as : yemo erat qui jus civile didicisset (not dtdi'^erut = Jle e was nobo.W « A^^ 
 had learned the civil law. Cic. Brut. 93, 322 ( ^ nemo jus f'^.^.;''' ?f^'\VuMam S 
 natio quampertiwesrCimus; There is no nation which we «''^/'J,^^,''/. ^Ji^'f.'^^o 'h f„ 
 iHMn ii-rti.n..«eimn<^ ("ic Cat 2 .^ 11 —Nihil est quod vacet corpore . 1 here i* noinin^ 
 nun l>trti m scimus). t ic. >_ai- ■^. •>• 'f- -^\,,_ ,.J .... ^^ roli.mis auisauam oi/tjurSre 
 
 What is theiv in this case //z«/ ne^ds ix defence? Cic. K. A. ^'j^^ * " "J";', T/ _ , e^^^^^ 
 \m\\-^.xy-quis< est qui xxi\\\^fugiatf Who is there ^^'«^^-'':;';^ ' ^"^:;":,', ^ „„ ^enisJe 
 fuirit utilia). Cie. Ort-. 3.2H, iOl-Utrnmne «.sV tempus ^^'^''''\[{'yj^J^''^^^^ 
 tur,>e .it f (literally : Is there any time at which t... have ^;^'" ,^ "' V\v 'Sc^^^^^^^^^ cS. 
 
 nracer - Can it ever be disgraceful to have been in the Senate at nn hatcver lime . ) v.u 
 
 Dom. 3, 7.— See Ex. 1-10. 
 
544 
 
 BELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 MOODS IN THE BELiVTIYE CLAUSE. 
 
 545 
 
 Thn. the relative clause i. ;^cen.d as ^^^^^^^^^^^^li;;^^^:'^:^ 
 net iHMtinaxoiH'ra : 1 here if J"V TV- vUino- r Vemo e<f i<iftrum qin otliim uon 
 
 ^;;;;f iHduJ^plaie^'S i^^i^AlcX'^^a^^^ death Uoe/no^ enter f Sen. Ep. 81 See Ex. 
 
 exsistere, exstare, ami the I'f ^l^■^'^V;' V.'r.?. r i a d i,r!-e nt ineanh -. is : Inrern.hatur 
 ^../.and r.y>.r///..w^. occur l>'>'^;y;»»V^';'y^r;^7^r -Hut^^^ >v1i«^ "«"ed to 
 
 n./«o«/*use suffra-ium de n.e '"l'^:;^^* ^X ;;^^ 
 
 //^^v/ miod scv'iham ( = nihil est quod scribam). tit. Att. 4, i>.^. Z^.: \' kC 17 
 can urn, lyC^r"^^^ ( = nuUi militW erant qui sequerenlur). Liv. J., 4b.- be. L.v. 1 .. ^ 
 
 !■! no reason why vou should he airaui. v u. \iii. ., *. •»• - ^ 
 
 etc ? Tlurc i- n„ rc-ason «by «e sl.ould bel,«e clc. S-c... (Jn. N. 1,2 
 Oe, 4 • 0"i< «' ".,i • iq,dd »t qno.t^ Ma.irts ,vilh tlu' iMliranve if I he t|"Oft;';" i- "" 
 
 ^:;^^ ? a'„^atio,f^ hut ir %.i,; :■;!>-■ ;-'-:s;i;;.n::i:;i;;;ir;who'?,'« 
 
 rur decx al) homiiiihus colendos dicniif lb. N. D. 1. 41, lu. 
 
 rannot be called etc. ; ' qxioe expers sif ' would mean : ' There exists no bravery which is 
 destitute of reason). Cic. Tusc. 4. 22. 50.— AV;/w> lifjer est cjni corpori st-rvit ; Nobody is 
 free who is a slave to his body. Sen. Kp. 92 ( = Is. qui corpori servit liber n<>n « st) — 
 I'.iit : Niillmn €f>t tevipua quod justiiia vaejlrc deheat (not debet\ ; Tht^re is no fime which 
 should lack justice ( = justitia numquamabesse debet). Cic. Otl\ 1. 19, 6.5 --Si-e Ex. 20-22. 
 
 Ons. 0. To this rule (Obs. .")) there are three exceptions: l) If both the principal sen- 
 tence (rti»h a cojjula) and the relative clause are neL'ativc, so t/mt the uhole sentence is 
 rirtvit'ly qifinnafive, the relative clause is always in the subjunctive, as* : Xcrno rex 
 I'ersAruTn potest esse qui non ante MaijOruin disciplTnain pei-C(pt7-it : Nobody can be king 
 of the Persians who has not previously learned the lore ot the Ma:;i. (Mc. Div. 1. 4 
 ( = Every Persian kin? must be familiar with the lore of the Maui before his accession). 
 See Obs. 7, No. 2.— But nesjative clauses of this kind may have the indicative if ihe 
 whole sentence is ;vo/ conceived as aflirmative. as: Judex esse nemo bonus potest qui 
 suspiciOne certil non movHur. Cic. Verr. 2. 5. 26.-2) If the principal sentence expresses 
 luissihility (nemo ]X}t&st esse), the predicate of the clause may l>e either in the indicative 
 or in thesub)unctive. since, accordiuir to R. 17, Obs. .3, such relative clauses way have a sub- 
 jiinrtive even if the piincipal sentence is affirmative, as: Nemo iimquam in seuatu 
 jiotidi esse princeps qui 7iHiliirnf esse j)opul5ris ( = si nialuerit). Cic. Prov. Cons. 16. :^8. 
 —But : A>w/) JUSTUS esse jiot est qui mortem, qui dolOrem. qui egestatem tinut. Tb. Off. 2, 
 11. ."iH.— See Ex. 2-3-25. 3> If the relative clause re.^tnc/s the nefjilive antecedent, makin-? 
 itifss treiieral or comprehen«^ive. the relative clause has its predicate mostly in the sub- 
 junctive : Quis me est m<n-t}llis miserior, qui riivj/. hodie 5" What mortal t/tat /u'(?.vis uiore 
 wretched to-day than I amy Plaud. Rud. 5. 1. \.—yi/iil est deo, quod quidem in terris 
 Jiiit. acreptius quam concilia ccetusque hominum qiiie civitSies appellautur. Cic. Rep. 
 0, 1.3. See Ex. 26. 27. 
 
 For the sui>junciive dependent on sentences of the form : ' Nemo est tarn ferns qin,' and 
 • eqo non sum is qtn ' see K. 20, Obs. 2. 3. 9. 
 
 Obs. 7. If the principal predicate is an ordinary verbal predicate, the relative clause 
 depeudini: on an antecedent actually or virtually nej,'ative, the predicate of the clause 
 is in the si'bjunctivk : 
 
 1) If what is allirmatively stated in the clause is conceived as not existinjT:. Such sen- 
 tences may be recast by chan^'in? the relative clause into an ind<pendent ne<rative 
 sentence, and by attaching: to it the ])riiicipal setitence in the form of an affirmative 
 nlative d.iuse, as: yHdl dixTrunt quod ad vestrum judiciuui 7?t>7t7/?rf)! ; They said 
 notfiing that bttohffs to yonr de( ision. Cic. Ca'C. 10, 27 ( = quod dixeiunt, ad vestrum 
 judicium non pertinet). Nihil quod ipsis esset iiidiirnum committibant ; They comudtted 
 nothing that was unworthy of tliem. C;es. B. G. 5, 35 ( = quod committebaut non indig- 
 nuui erat). See Ex. 28. *1. For the indicative in such clauses see Obs. S. 
 
 2) If what is ne-xativeiy stated in the clause, is conceived as ;>«/, the predicate of the 
 clause is ahvavs in the subjunctive. In this instance the negative clause may be trans- 
 lormed into an independent affirmative sentence, as : Quis unquam orfltor excellere iiidi- 
 cjltiis est vulgi judicio, 9"i //o/? id(;m a doclis/>;-o/>^/rf^/r.^ What orator has ever been 
 considered as distinguished bv the judgment of the multitude that was not likewise 
 acknouledf/ed by the learned? Cic. Brut. 50, 189 ( = every orator has been acknowledged 
 by the learned who was praised bv the multitude). See Ex. 31-36. Passages in which 
 nlative clauses of this kind occur with a predicate in the indicatire arc S(> rare that they 
 must be considered as marks of inaccuracy, as ; Nee vero quirquam video quod non 
 idem te vidC'ie certo scio (iustead of cirto sciam). Cic. Fam. 6, 3, 2. 
 
 Ons. S. An affirmative relative clause dependent on negative sentences requires the 
 indie ative if wliat is stated in it Is conceived as real and eji-^tinn. as : Nihil quod ratiO- 
 nis eH expers, generare ex se potest compotem ratiOnis. Cic. N. D. 2,8 ( = /</ quod est ex- 
 Wrs, geiienlre mm vtuK^^u.—Nec qul<quam peditum .«wy^er/Vu qui in vallo puguaverunt 
 (they really lou-ht on the rampart). Liv. 28. 33.-.V«///0 in summam nequiliam inci- 
 dit qui umquam h(tsit sapientiae ; Nobodv falls into great wickedness who has ever been 
 attached to wisdom. Sen. Ben. 7, 19 ( = Is. qui umquam hiesit, nou incidit). But : ISiitU 
 potest ad malos perveiilre quod prosit ; Nothins (no benetit) can come to the wickea 
 that is tjen^ filial (to then). Sen. Ben. .5, 12 ( = Pn>desse7>o;< potest quod ad eos pervenit ; 
 but 'qufxl'proiltst' ■- id quod prodest {a useful thing) ad malos perveiilre non potest).— 
 Sometimes it makes nr) ditlereiice in the meaniuir. whether a relative clause is conceivea 
 
 as real, or as not .-xist ing. In this instance either l he indicative and suhjuncti ve are eoiia.ly 
 currect, as : Notjlti .«eptem (a censoribu<), netno tamen qui sella curuli sedisset (or seae- 
 rat\ ; s'.-v.'u ni.nibers of the Senate w re expelled. l)ut none that had been a curule 
 
546 
 
 IIELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 T -,*^;., fi,^ ^nhiiinrtivo the same as» in the instance mentioned Ob». 6 No. 8. 
 1ms Its predicate in the Ml bjctncTje^m,^^^^ ^^. j,.,„ii„ii„n m„do 
 
 lint the indicative is aK<o l.mnd • ' ^'/'^^ "'^ ^^^ ^h am I^dain recitilvit ? \\7,o 
 
 bonunun c..n.uetudMu-m ''^ f', ; , ^\7 ^«^ntlem^^^^^^^ l)nb hrly n-cited the letter 
 
 VM<i; !>*•'• *•'"" »-^'^''y•*f^:. T/^^.tv ?o mr rni Liv 2:1, 14.-AVc pneftrvnffefMit trnc- 
 
 qi^/7/m/ir^p<ed.ea e Ihis 1 mi.^ ^ ^^^^^^ y„Y,/f/e<7/'/r ; lite.iiUy: 
 
 as»(iuivalei.tt()unvulal U-claii>t a_ . . e/^fx^/t / /Ture i^ ncthini; on 
 
 He does .u>t except anythinjjou ^/A^V V^e}. Hta t «k ^n^ pn.liu.Ttur). Cic. Ac. Pr. 
 ?'^^f tS'^aSX r^. ;/i ^'qioill^m/'i-i^. literally :'Non.in^.is «aniin^ to 
 you\ hui; vo io' M.S.>w, = IherS is nothin-Mhat you do not know ,t. e. nihil dee.t 
 fta ul on scia.^). Cic. Or. 1, 17. 77. See Obs. 11, t. . . -, . 
 
 i,,;r to OBS. 2. u.id OBS . f.. I. ' '''"!^l^;™'-;;," iv/eS^ „„,.„ ,ak.us lli.^ particle 
 ,.r«licate« m tin' «ihjiiitctive, ™-„'';^;'V/,' ^.X.uv r,,,- „ .■-(■i- S tll.'.l. Such poiiI.miccs 
 
 which he d.d not I 1^^«:, •"" [ .^ ';~ _o./i(/est i-iiur, (^>mi ocrurmf in hac (pue^iiuiie, 
 kintl pr<)perly belong to ;>a//^<iu^"'''»«"'f'' j'"^» ,:,:,, r.-lanve clause beini; made 
 
 ^itil; e:^';'" ."Uletn ,,u/,c ,Wa^ <,ui e.c, Ci. A., . . se^^ 
 
 r»„. 11 Tf rpl.itivp clause» dependent on negative antecedents, or th.ir equivalents, 
 are utem^elve^ m^^anve; advS^ clauses introduced by <,uin are often u.ed in tueir 
 
 P^r ^a:i^^ ^'riroilgU^Uy an interrogative negative adverb, = cur .on. where 
 
 MOODS IN THE RELAXrVE CLAUSE. 
 
 647 
 
 lu-r, a< athrmaiive particle, iinpeiative sentences, it implies that a command or advice 
 should not hedisie-arded ( = Iiideeil you should etc ; I wish vou would ; You better had) 
 ti< : Q'iin tu hoc cnineii ohjlce ubi licet a-ere : You better /lad (you should) make this 
 ch .rge where the law allows it. Cic. H. Com. 9. 2."). 
 
 J{. From the oritrinal meanin».' ot (/tii/t as interrogative negative adverb, arose its use 
 as a rclatire negaiive adverb, referring to cause (nulla ect caum guin, or itifiil et'f ouin • 
 there is no reason why not), as : Nulla est mum quin me condones (poena;)- Tliere is 
 no reason tvhy you should not pardon me. Plant. Kud. 4. 4, 2«. 
 
 C. This led to the use ol quia as a subordinating conjunction to represent affirmation 
 under a n( i/ative lorm. both the princii)al t^eiitence and the clause being ne«mtive Qhin 
 i- thus u>ed as a conjunction (a) in certain completing Tuat-clauses '^(p. 58!) km) • 
 itj) in a<iverbial modal clauses in the place of ita ut non, corresponding to the English 
 con-jtruction of 'without' with a participial noun, or to the conjunctions 'b>it thaf 
 {IS : Neque uilus Hare ventus i)oter:it <iiiii) (naves) aliqua ex parte secundum cursum ha- 
 
 lei:iltos mitterent ; They hardly let any lime i)ass without sending envovs over the 
 Kliine ( = ut non mitterent). Cics. B. G. 5, 55.— Neminem conveni. . .^win bmnes mihi 
 niaximas gratias again. Cic, J'am. 9, 14, 1. 
 
 1). Modal Quin-clauses witli the force of clauses introduced by ita ut non, are fre- 
 qut'Utly used in place of negative relative clauses dependent on nkgative antece- 
 dents in any of the forms menti(Uied Oiis. 2-9, if the whole s-entence is virtually afflnna- 
 live, and if in Engli.-h the clause may be intnuluced by ' uithout ' or 'hut that\* This 
 u.-e of (^uin-dauses, however, is chielly contined to the instances that the relative, re- 
 placed l)y quin, would be in the nominative of the masculine gemhr, or in the ablative of 
 time dependent on the phrases ' nullum te/npus (nulluK dies) intenedit'' west, or ' nullum 
 tf-mitus {diem) i/itermittere' ; as : Nemo est, quin ( = quia is. vt is non) iibivis quam ibi 
 iitti est, esse malit ; There is nobody Out he wishes to be anywhere rather than there 
 when; he is. Cic. Fain. (J, 1, 1. (Instead of the modal Quin-clause, a negative relative 
 clause according to Obs. 2 might have been used.)— Kepertus est nemo quin mori dice- 
 ret satius esse. Cic. Ver. 2. 2, 36.— In castelio nemo fiiit, omnino miliiU'ii quin vulnera- 
 letur (without being wounded). C;es. 13. C. 3. 53.— CuriOsus nemo est quia sit malevo- 
 liis ; Nobody is curious without being malicious. Plant. Stich. 2, 1, .^4 (see Obs. (i. 1).— 
 Neque ulliim feix* teuipus inteicessit quin alifluem de motu Galloruni nuntiumacciperet; 
 Il.trdly any time passed by (there was hardly any time) that he did not (or but that he, 
 ntthout.iiic.) receive some intelligence on the movements of the Gauls. Cais. B, G. 5, 
 5:3. (Instead of the modal (iuin-elause, a negative reliitiv-? clause "^wo non acciperef 
 misht have been chosen, as in : ' Nullus dies intercessit quo non ad eum scriberet. Nep, 
 Alt. 21).)— Modal Qutn-clauses are especially frequent.in jjlace of negative relative clauses, 
 li the negative antecedent is restricted byanottier relative clause according to Obs. 10, 
 when the resiricting clansJe always requires the subjunctive, as : Nemo, qui aliquo esset 
 t/i nu/nero, scripsit oiationem quin redigeret omnis lere in quadnim nunierumque sen- 
 I'.Mitias; Nooue, who held anv rank, (ever) wrote any speech without arranqinq e\Gry 
 teiitence according to the law of syinmeLry and rhythm. Cic. Or. Gl, 208.**— See Ex. 51-55. 
 
 *If a Quin-clause is thus used in place of a negative relative clause dependent on a 
 negative antecedent, the clause must still be considered as an adverbial modal clause 
 with the lorce of a Tliat-clause introduced hy (ita) ut non. We should guard against 
 tlie heresy of most graminiriiins, who consider quin in this connection as a contraction 
 of the Ufgation non, with the relative adjective qui, or even as a contraction of qua, quo, 
 or quitd with )ion. That the Latin did not feel quin as an equivalent of a relative adjec- 
 tice with non, is provt d by the lact that oftt-n tin- demonstrative is- is expressly added to 
 quin (see tiie next note), which would be impossilde if quin had the value of u relative 
 ailjcctive. in which tin' demonstrative is is already implied. 
 
 ** Sometimes the subject of modal (^uin-claiis'es. if referring to a substantive of the 
 prhicipal sentence, is expressly added by the demonstrative is, which would be implied 
 in the relative if a relative form were given to the clause, as : (iiiisin Circum Maximum 
 venit, quin is unoquOque gradii de avaiiiia tu5 couimonerCtur ? Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 59.— 
 
548 
 
 BELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 MOODS IN THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 549 
 
 ^ • 1 «n. ,ico,i in nl'irp of ri'lative nccrntive clan^os in which the 
 
 Rarely Q''Vl-^^'^"^*;^ "J) "' i:?,^ h- r m time; namely Dif ihe rela'ive 
 
 relative is uot a nominative n';,^^"'";;;, ",,;.,, „ihil est <,>tv, ( = Ha "t no» ; more 
 
 is in the nruter s.nixniar (-/'/O'/ , «- ''",";,! " ,e.c t in-^ hut that it perishes 
 
 uKially: ' q>'od now V) inteieat ; But '''^/V ,^%V:'. 'vj* o ". 12 :w See Ex. fiti. f.7.-2) If 
 
 NnllH fuit civita- 7''*'' < = *'V/ w^w;^ rsl ,te > /M^ hent unrt of its Senate to Cor- 
 .enilius Coniah.m m't'ere ; ' '^'''^.^.'^f ?iVi a-* vue//ci '^ IvifC-ret. Ih. :i. 81. Tims 
 duba. Cies. B.C. i. 1 >---^V'''^ ^^' '"'^ll^^r .' Hn. \s dnO -3) If ti.e relative is a tran- 
 
 Cic. Fin. 4, 13, :«, where. »'"'' Tn ;r tlv. ' JV/,?, t -a", umkM>to<Kl, as: Ci«s«r nullu.a 
 sitive accusative, and ^^''y^';''''^'''^\'''^]\';,^'/V^^^^ 
 
 unquam hos.em fudit. (?</m -,^-' nu-.^^; >«"!•) f^lativl c^u.s.s intnulneed 
 qu..queexueri'). Su-t. Auir. .0. ,i V»i iii. Vl-uisi s with a t-.)rrespMiidiiii: deiuimslrative 
 by relative advkubs are I'^'I'l-'^*'* J -^..f.^' ^ . ! "^^,,'' «Vt " *i/^^ { = nbi no..» iUico ad>il : 
 adverb, a.: Nee sacr.t.n. ''V'^. l»^;; ; 'l %' ,\' :'' I di i-c^i t n-re. Pla.it. Merc. 2, 3, T.- 
 Nor i. there any sacred ov P'-''[.^' fj *\' .\ .',. i 1 .rJ cannot be nplaced by (Min- 
 
 antho- ii.",'al ullum cil.nn. i-si- tniii ^ . i ?,"'"'',• J., ,f ,|,^ i.i,,„i n-nr,. to »iAi(; 
 2,<..-Th,.. thiMlenmuMniuv.. ,- ..H U^^^^^^ ""1 1', , ., ' -..-1.". Iial.c.il v«" "' »'■ 
 
 1 
 
 live clause c.nuot ''^* l''"'W''th".f'(l;Mn rlanj.e8 occur in place of relative clauses with 
 tSome,fe'ra..naY'»"- T.^'^ ? '''^Vfn mo tl^^^^ IM.blic Sch.u.l (J.an.nuir 
 
 relatives in the dative case. .^^»^, \iy ;\* :,4'i\ ' V- unniiatn habni cut darem qmn ( =-- 
 (p. 3H9> uiv.:« the ^^^}}]^^^^'^^^^ ■ I ; ' ' Ins ms -a^e 1^. reblive dan^e culd have 
 cui ««'')<^'^V;;" •.,^' euce s'em vale t^^^^ • f^ahni cm /itferas ad te 
 
 "^^j. ^srn^u?.:^n;:;n^ron;ii;i;;e";^ti;^r!uj;:^^iu .how. that ,uin.. 
 
 the above passa-e ha. not '•'« J«;''^^. •'[ '"^f/'^J^^red nuch a dilTerence. Mkirino eays : 
 
 tSorne -rammnr.ans, ^^^''^T A.rMrv is a^^^^^^ bv r/z/i//. which is 
 
 ^^.,no '^;;j;-;-;;;;;r »11^; ^ X^l I K ^Sl^*^ n-rul^ l.y every exa,/;,>lew.th ,.in 
 
 „ot .o \vuh7W^ '"^;; fcJn: it m.U i'^^^ ne-ative antecedents (othervvi^e rjuin cannot l)e 
 
 w„at is stutedin the clau^e.-Ki;HNj.u say. '^J^^^:::^ ^:^i[:::!^'\^'r:^:,Uvd int-.gui 
 
 i.les 
 
 What is stated m tt.e ^•lal.^e.-l^UHi^^"^' . - '• "■ "^ " 'I /i;,; r,„„„ »,'. r,.s.,lsed int.. 
 „e.rati..„. The authur ol the I't-bl. bch ^f- -; >; '^, V'J^ , i .xaminit.-ih.tx.-.mi 
 
 m,y : emplmsis ', much less a ■ fptxial cnipha».». 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 14, 20, 3.-7. XuUa ed qend quam periimrficfitis!. lb. Rah. Perd. 12, 33.-8. AntePericlem 
 lifff-ra nulla t->!t (/ii<t qiiide.n or.iaiuiu aliquein hiibeaf, et oratOris esse ridfdtur. \h. Brut. 
 7. 27.— '.t. Quid c-/ yiiod art»' eflici jHtsnI. nisi is qui ariem tractabit nuilta ptrcepcri i ? 
 II). Ac. Pr. ••2,7, 22.— 10. Quid tt:t ry/of/ pcrcii.i po^fit si ne scnsnsqtiidein vera nnntiaiiis? 
 11). 2, 25. 7!».- 11. M/ii/ est quod deus eflicere non po>ifnt. lb. I)iv. 2. 41, 86—12. Nihiltst 
 giKid tioii aliciibi esse coqdlur. lb. .^c. Po. 1, (i. 24. — 13. I^^nlla j^?ens est qua von. etiamsi 
 i^rnui'et q.iaieni habere (ieiini deeeat. tan. en habendum Hiat. lb. Lej,'. 1, 8,24.-14. Quia 
 enl qui non anifponat oratori imperatonitn ? II). <>r. 1. 2, 7 — 15. Quis rex unquani jiiit^ 
 quit /Kipulus qyu wn //^r/?/'/r jniedictinne divliia^? lb. Div. I, 43. 95. — 1(». Setno e^t in 
 ludo Kla<i'aioiio< paullo ad laciniis aiidacior^ ^'/i sc non intimuni Catiilnie esse/a^fa- 
 tur. lb. Cat, 2, 5, 9.-17. Animal indium iiivnuH potest quod neque umquani luiium 
 fil, et semper df futtlruin. lb. N. D. 3. 13, 32.— lis. Quis istic est qui decs tani parvi 
 ])endel f Plant, liud. 3, 2, :j<i,— 19. Quid est qua de re nunc litiqdtis inter vos ? 11). 4, 
 4, 16.-20. Btdlnse<l nnuo qui e;l lej,'e riiif ut non niodo imi)une, sed etiam cum Mimma 
 iiiteifectOris j;loria inteilici pos?ii V Cic. Phil. 1, 4, :i5.— 21. Xi/<U ueqiie meum est, neque 
 cujiisqiiani,(/w>/ aiifeni. quod eripi, quod amiiti ;;o/e.v/. lb. Parad. 4, 29.— 22, An ^y/ic- 
 (/^/'/me.^^ secundum naturam 7"0'/./?7 repumiante ratione ? lb. Tusc. 4.37,79. — 23. Qui po- 
 t()^t eiist vita \\\ii\\r-'^ qua noi) in aniTci niutiul benevolentia oo//(??ae-N'c«/'.^ lb. Am.r», 2J. — 
 24. PuteM i^iinr quidquuf/i utile esse quod sit huic taliiim viriutiim choro contraiium ? 
 lb. Oil". 3. 33, lit».- 25. Sacrosanctiim ni/iil tsse latest, nisi qi/od sanctum ei<t. II). Balb. 
 
 15, 35.— 2(». Imp trabilit).-, qui riraf, ?vtUus est. Plant. Merc. 3. 4. 20.— 27. Quis. qvi 
 aiiqiiid sajnaf, n.inc beiltus tsse pc.test ? lb. Fam. 7. 28. 1.-28. Ni/iil accidit quod sol- 
 liciimiiiK-s (illevilnt in<us. lb. Brut. 3. 12.-29. Quiil potest reperiri quod ipsum sibi 
 npuqiut mauis'r Ac. Pr. 2, 11, 44. — SO. Xiliilquod iut.inorikveattiiHat eo anno consules 
 pe>^Grunt. Liv 42. 4(>.—ii}.Xi/nl oratOri in quo ma<:nus esse jto^nt relinquemus. Cic. 
 Or. 1, 15, 6S.— 32. Eiro liabeo, cui plus qtuim tibi dd/eam^ n(vnnem. lb. Fam. (5. 1, 4.— 
 3.3. Verbum frywx/ unqumn ex illlu.s ore excidit in 7?/o quisqm.m ;wv.vi/ oflendi ? lb. 
 Siill. 2«;, 72.— .it. ^V</y/<> uniqiiain me tennissima sll^pi(■iolu; peistrinxii' <??/<=?« von per- 
 xevttrini ac ptrtrf<iei\m. lb. 10,4(1.-35. Quis de C. Cethei'o cogitat cut non ad illlus 
 poenain career ti'ditlcatiis e.«se videntur f lb. 25, 70—30 Quo enim ducere liunc juve- 
 nem potestis }itn 1,011 sua decora eum riudicent f Liv. 1. 2»).— 37. Xevio i)arum < iu vixit 
 qui virifltis pe.feet;e pt-rfecto/z/^'r/^/A' est nninere. Cic. Tusc. 1, 45. 10!». — >;8. Quis pla- 
 cC're popuio potest cui placet \\\\\\>'t Sen. Ep. 2t>.— 39. Quid qvi.^quarn rvii'm\\\\\ quad 
 non an I mo ainipnhtndit et tt-nttf Cic. Ac. Pr. 2, 7. 22. — 40. yum quin. cui quidem eli- 
 
 gendi i)otcstas e,sset. qu< niqinim his anteponCbat ? lb. Brut. .^0. l."~9. — A\.Xec vero 
 ixhvo qur/nqua?n aniiqiiiurem, cujus quidem scripta profereiida 7??/?tw. lb. 10. fil. — 
 42. Primnm piliim T.i.lins dncebat, neque crat in exercitn, qui quidem pedestria 
 Ptipendia /cri.^sit. vir factis noliiiior. Liv. 7, 13.— 4.3. CatOiiem qnis uostrOriim ora- 
 tOitii.., qui (juidein nut.c sunt. Ie;;it ? Cic. Brut. 17, 05.- 44. Xerninetn. ex eis quidem 
 qui tiWqiio \\i j.umero/^/rn//'/, coguOvi tarn indocium, tam rudem. lb. 59, 213. — 45. QvCB 
 enim homii.i, iu r/>/o aliqni si non famre pudor, at Fupplicii timor e.'<t, {rravior poena 
 accidere p>.iuit ? lb. Prov. Cons. 0, 14.— 40. iVVcenim locus vllus i-t^i jynetennisst/s ab eis 
 qui ad leu'es, qui ad moiei*. qui ad disciplTnam reipuhlica" ;)^/*'i?(?rf /. lb. Off. 1, 44, 150. 
 — At. Xiliil lira ttrmittan) quad ad libertatem vestram pertiuCre aibitrdhoi'. lb. Phil. 4, 
 0. 15. — 48. S'iliil pratiriiiissnjn est quod non haheat sapienTem exctisatiOnem. lb. Att. 8, 
 12. 2.— 49. ^ViA</ li-re dictum est ab \\oc quod quidem facetius dictum rider ttnr ., qvod 
 non provocil'us resiKinderit. lb. Or. 2, .'iO, 230. — 50. Qua con fio fuit per hos «nnop, 
 gua quidem es^etnon condurta", sed rera, iu qua popnii KomSui consensus pcrspici non 
 pos-et ^ II». Se^t.f)0. 100.— 51. JN'ewiO est ^J/m banc affectionem animi;>w6f/ atque /a?/(/<=^. 
 lb. Fin. 5. 22. «i3.— 52. IlasnatiOnes nemouviquamfuit quin Jran^'i domarIqnerw/;ie?v/. lb. 
 Prov. Cons. 13, ;33. — 5;J. .\dest feren«//<o r/'vi// acutius viiia in dicei.teqnum recta rideat. 
 lb. Or. 1, 2.5, 110.-?)4. Xeqve ullvm Ivre diem iutermitfTfmt ^?/m equestri proelioqnid in 
 quo(|ue esst't viriQtis pti'.^pict-iefi/r. Oies. B. G. 7, 30. — 55. ^uUvm. adhuc interm'isi diem 
 </'/</^ ali(jui(l ad te lit!eiarunw/fl/r/>?. Cic. Att. 7. 15, 1.— 50. A^j/^i/dicitur aphilosophis, 
 quoU quidem ncle /tonesttque dicdtur, quin ab his partum sit a quibus civitatii>us jura 
 descripta sunt. lb. Rt-p. 1, 2, 2.-57. xVi/ti/ est quin male narraudo jwssit depravari, 
 Ter. Phorm. 4, 4, 10. 
 
 licm. 17. In many iiistancrs relative clauses dependent on indefinite 
 anlecedents have Ihcir predicates in the subjunctive, according to the 
 analogy of those ^vitll negative antecedents. In these instances the 
 idea ot' indefiniteness is transteried to the relative clause in a similar 
 manner as a negntive .-.ntecedent imparts a negative conce ption to the 
 
 ~ 1 To learrT.— '-^ 10 tT-lMhe trmh.— ^ prophecies of the gods.—* amons? the jrladiatorial 
 perrormerv. — * being bold enough to commit crimes.—* worth living. — '' upbraided 
 me with.--" hired. 
 
550 
 
 TELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 claiipc (lopondent on it. This constnirtion orrurs : 1) If the antccedont 
 
 contains a qudliftd doniMl, as fduci (wliicii denies ilic idea ' iiiuhi'), quo- 
 
 HfKqfi/.sqifc, KtruH, and tUe panicle r<> (OiiS. 1). 2) If the lehilive clause 
 
 refers lo liie indefinite numeral t^olun (or mitts, in the nieaninir of kolt/s), 
 
 as predicate-afijectives (see Ous. 2. 3). 3) If the relative chinse is a predi- 
 
 cate-elause, dependent on any indefinite, or numeral antecedent, the 
 
 principal predicate being liie abstract verb esi<c (Ous. 4-9). 
 
 Op.s. 1. If a relative dans»' refers to pattci, or <'qnivnl('iit expressions in the principal 
 pentence, ttie jjredicato of tlie clause is in the siibjiuictive, if whai is stated in tlie clause, 
 is conceived as the act of ' few ' or as happeniii}; * rarely '. Sn«h cl'uises niay he re- 
 placed l)y (iiialifu'd neiraiive sentences, as : ('onsecflti dies panci ornnTno Jam ario nieiis« 
 p, r qiins Sciifltiiin hat'Ore /ic?/'f/ ." Hut few days followrd in .I.iniiiry on wliirh the Senate 
 conhl le^rally meet. Cic. Sest. .'il, 74 ( = On most (»f the following: days the Senate could 
 vot meet). — Karos vt\\u» insideniTs, intm quibvK fern m in M'anu n^/ inv»nies ( = most 
 of those y«)n will meet, will have /<« swords). Liv. 8, liS. — Y'lX invi-iiltur qui Inhorihus 
 b^usceptis mm quasi mercC'deni reriim «restjltum den<lenf irioriain ( = almost every one 
 i/e-^ireM «riory as a reward etc.). Cic. Otl". 1. 1!>. •>."). See Kx. 1, "J.— Sometimes, howi-vrr, 
 in such clau>^es the indicative occurs*, which always is necessary if tlie relative-clause 
 is conceived as a real f.ict to which the <iualitied denial, implied in jxo/ci etc.. dors not 
 refer, as : Cum pat'cis collociTti clteniil)us. qi/ihtis tamum facinus commtitere a"dr//fifif. 
 C'ses. H. C. a. (>().— /'(n/ci tamen lioni in<rant, (///ov rejeclione luirJlre ille non itotucrat ; 
 I?ut there wi-re a few «rood men (amonj; the judires) whom In- had not hctn able to drivi! 
 out l)y a challen^'e. Cic. Att. 1, It», .3 — 'riic iiitcrro^riitive formula " i^notim (jin^fpie t-t 
 qui ' ( — quam pauci sunt qui), and the similar formula "■ quatn umltt f/nf qui \ «lieic 
 the relative clau-es are j)reaicate-clanses. always reijuire tin* sul>juii<-tiv«', as : Quotrnt 
 eirirn quisque est qui lianc in rei)ul)li( il t^vctmn sff/UiVtrr / For how few are there ( = lh< re 
 «re but \ cry few) who follow this sect in tli" republic. Cic. Klacf. 41. ]()i.— (^uifm inuUi 
 dies repfi'iri /wasunt qui tali nodi a/iftpo/iantur / Il>. Tu^c. 1, 41, '.'T. Sev E.\. 3. 4. 
 
 Obs. 2. Kelative clauses, dependent on vnus or fol us as predicate-Hdjeclives {untts or 
 folns est qui — he is the oidy one who), almost always liave their predicates in the sub- 
 junctive, on account «>f the ncijative nieaiiinj; latciit in such claust-s (sdlux e>-f qui hoc 
 d'lcat implyni;; that all others do not say so) : Sa[)ieiitta est una qua? uuesiitiam ptUat ex 
 animis ; It is wi-dom alone whieh e.xpels sadness from our minds. Cie. Kin. 1, to. 43.— Si 
 voluptasest xolaqucR nos ro<v/ ad se, i-i aV/c^ta/su apt eiuit.irA : If it is pleasure alone which 
 calls and attracts us by its o\\ n nature, lb. 1, 16, ^A. — StAux. (-s (C;esai ) tu/us in viclonjlc^ri- 
 deri.f nemo ; You are tlie only one in whose victory no one has p<jrislifd. lb. I)tj. 1"2, 3t. 
 — Solus ed hie homo qui sdat divinltus (who knows it by divine in^plratioll). Plant. 
 Cure. 2, 2. 33.— Ha'C est umi confentio qun' adhuc pfiinanseiit; This is the only dispiitcr 
 which still remained. Cic. Ac. 2, 24, 7S.— See Ex. 5-7.— The subjunctive is also used if 
 vnus or f-o/us are us. d as acce>ttiorij predicates (p. 2.")1, Oks. 7.) : I'nuui excipi<) Catr>"em 
 in quo perteciissimo Stoico eloquentiam non dtsidt^nin. Cic. Brut. 31, 118. — Ejjfo exsiiti, 
 noil electns 7inu,s qui jHjsxemcM:.. (not elected as the only one who could etc.). Ih. Hose. 
 Am. 2. 5. See E.Y. y. 9.— Soinctimes unus or f^o/usurv. itnfdied in ihe i)redicate, as : Cu'-ar 
 quod SlorTni supern'ant ( = uni erant) v'/i in armis tsftnf, eo exercitiim addu.xit : Ca'sar, 
 ])ecHust;the Morini were tin? only ones who were in arm-i, h'd his army to their territory. 
 Cais. R. G. 3, 28.— Sometimes, however, in relaiive clauses dept-ndeni on u/ius or ^•o/»/^^ 
 the indicative occurs, as: Tii esses vnus profecto qvi vi.x ullatn ceteris oratonhus 
 iaudem reliquisti. Cic. Or. 1. 17, 7(1.— ?7/rtest amicitia in rebus hunuliiis. de cujus utili- 
 tate oinnes uno ore cousentiunt. lb. Atn. 2^1, Hf». Comp. Ter. Andr. T), 6, •.) ; Sen. Kp. 92. 
 The indicative is nece'<s(try iC the relative clause does not dei)end on '///'/.•«■ a;- predicate- 
 adjective but on its subject, as : Id ununi bonum est quad numquam dtf/i/tqi/uri = id, 
 quod nuiKiuam defrinj^itur, unum bonum est; what never is worn awHy is the only irood). 
 Sen. Ep. 92. Also, if unufi means 'one,' the iiidicativt^ is used : Kst vnurn jus quo de- 
 vincta tst hominum sori<-tas; There is only one law by whicli society is bound (but 
 '■quo devincfa dC = it is the law alone by which etc)- Cic. Le;r. 1, lo, 42. 
 
 Obs. 3. Ofien relative clauses are attached to >///>/< or folus,au(\ also to primt/s. reliqui, 
 and other form-adjectives, instead of beinij attached to partitive attrii»ut«'s of ihcse 
 words (see K. 1«», Obs. 10). Such clauses always re(juire tin- subjunctive, as: Xenophanes 
 itnus qui deos esse dicdtf, divinaiiOni'in lundilus sustulit; Xeiiophanes aloin* amon;^ 
 those that beli<'ved in the L'0(is, utterly rejected divination ( = unus fj» ^j,s- qui deos es!-e 
 dirtbaiit). Cic. I)iv. 1. ^.—Quevi vero ex.^tft et de quo sit irenioria' prv/it'on eloquvntem 
 f\il»tie,priuius est M. CethC;L^iis; The first (amonr; tho?e) of whom it i> known and placed 
 
 * Thus in the paspa<re C:es. B. (i. 3, 11» the subjunctive " tvaseiinf . phoiild be exi)(.-clid 
 in place of the pluperlect imiicative ^ er:aseraut\ which isexhibiied by all ccnlicee. 
 
 MOODS IN THE RETATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 551 
 
 ^ 
 
 on record that he wa« (they were) eloquent, is M. Cethejjus. Cic. Brut. 15, 57.— Hie qui 
 m collei'io sacerdCtum estuf. pninus post Konuim conditam jcdicio publico est cond»-m- 
 njltus ( = Ihc primus («=j: eis qui. . .enint). lb. IJrnt. 3-3, Vil.—neliqui i-vnt cpji inortui 
 unf, L. Torquaius etc. ( = reliqui ex eis qui niortui svnt, sunt L. T. etc.) lb. 7«, 265. 
 
 Obs. 4. Relative predicate-clauses with esse, or with verbs iucludinij the idea of exist- 
 ence, a^ eroi'iri (exortus e^t). reperiri. invenln. eve/nre, iucidere, occurrere, adcssp, prce- 
 .ffo ^'sse, if these verbs are used as abstkaot pue^jicates (p. 486. Obs. 9), are introduced 
 in Enirlish by ""tlure is\ '■there are" etc. They occur in tlie followin<? forms : 
 
 1) With an INDEFINITE ABsoLiTTE FouM-AD.TECTiVE as suhject (^'/erf^m, non u nil i, pauci, 
 rnulti. (afi)quit. {a/i)quid. quhquis, quofusquisque, nemo, nihil), as: Sunt quidam quibus 
 met amilrum videiluir; Thfre are those* to whom honey seems bitter. Sen. Ep. 1()9.— 
 Sunt vvilti qui omnTiio (inecas non anient litteras : There are many who do not like 
 Gn-ek literature at all. Cic. Ac. 2, 2.— Si quis est qui hiec putet arte accipi posse etc.; If 
 there U anyone who thinks tiiat this maybe learned by rules. lb. Or. 1, 25. — Quisquis 
 erat qui aliquam partem sceleris atti<ris^et, damnabStur; Whoever there was that ri ad 
 his hand in any part of this crime, was condemned. In. Sest. 31.<i8.— A>< aliquid quod 
 non oporteat. etiamsi Meet ; There is somethini; which is not proper, althoui^h it is per- 
 mitted, lb. Balb. 3, 8. See Ex. ll>-25.— For nemo est qui, nihil est quod, imuci sunt qui etc. 
 hee p. 54:i. Obs. 2 foil. ; p. .5')(», Obs, 1. 
 
 2) With an indefinite ronM-,\DJECTivE a? subject tmnEnsTooi) ; as: Sunt qui omnia 
 
 na'i1':e noiiine appellent ; There are some who call evervthiu!; ' nature.' Cic. N. D. 2, 32. 
 
 — Sunt qui eo die inaixno prfplio puirnatum e<^e auctores sint; There are some who state 
 
 that a L'reat battle had occurred that day. Liv. 42. 66.— A'ra/// quos moveret Claudius; 
 
 There were those on whom Claudius made an impression. Liv. 3. bS.—Erit rnox qui ar- 
 
 quaf, nequicriuam .\ntiochum ultra juga Tauri emotum ; There will soon he someltody that 
 
 arjju'-s that A'ltiochus etc. lb. 42, 42.— .Si est quod desit ; If there is anythins; (ihat is) 
 
 wantinir. Cic. Tusc. 5, 8.— Dum est unde jus civile discjltur; As lone: 'i^* there is somebody 
 
 Irum whom to learn the civil law. lb. Verr. 1, 4.').— /!7.>-/ quod differat inter justitiam et 
 
 vere<-uiidiim ; There is something that is different between (i. ^."ihere is «o ne diflereiice 
 
 between) justice and respect (of the laws). lb. Off. 1, -H.—Est is?itur ^'wquidque referfltur; 
 
 Thf^re i< a somethinq to which everythinir refers. lb. Fin. 5, 6, 16.— AW quat-nus amicitite 
 
 dari venia po.«sit; 'fhiTe is a limit tip to whicli friendship may be pleaded in excuse. lb. 
 
 Am. 17, 1\.—Ad^uid qui vos hortentur ut a nobis desciscStis : Thei'e are those present 
 
 who «'xhort you etc. Cies. B. C. 2, 32.— Sometimes ' est qui ' has the meanini: of '■sunt qui ', 
 
 as: Est qui phis ei del)ere se judicet per quem tutior est, quam ei per queni honestior; 
 
 There are persons who think they are owiiiir a greater debt etc. Sen. Ben. 3. 12.— £'^7' nbi 
 
 id valeat; There are instances in which thi< holds «rood. Cic. Tusc. .5, 8.— See Ex. 1(M8. 
 
 3» With NOUNS, taken in an indefinite sense, as subjects, correspondini? in the sinjru- 
 I 1. ,. ...._. , , . ., . . . . . . ^^ with 
 
 are ni^en 
 quirdarn ris {there was a }X)wer) qucR 
 jreneri consuleret humiluo. lb. Tuse. 2, ■\^,—Sunt vhilosophi et fueruut (there are and were 
 jihilosophers) qui omiiliio nullain habSre censerent humaaSrum rerum procurationem 
 deos. lb. N. D. 1. 2. See Ex. 26. 2S-31. 
 
 4) With definite nu.mehai.s with or without nouns : OrnnTno duo sunt qua» condiant 
 oratiOnc-m; There are altoj^ether two thinj^s which spice the stvle. Cic. Oiat. ^^.— Tria 
 sunt qu<t sint efticieiida diceiulo ; There are three fhinqs which niust 1)e acconipli-hed by 
 (pul)lici speakin<,'. lb. Brut. 4!». — In eil urbe suut ««'(/'^^, sed duiv qutv Ionise ceteris ante- 
 cellaiit. H). Verr. 2.4, ii-i.— Quafuor sunt capita quce conclQdant nihil esse quod nosci 
 
 Bossit. lb. .\c. 2. 26, 83.— />'/« turn srcellUbant ( = erant) oratores qui me exciljlrent. lb. 
 rut. «♦2. 317.— .V/7^^ 7es inciderurd qiue iiomioa desidenlrent, nee habCrent. Sen. Ep. 58. 
 5» With iNDKFtNiTR suB-iECTs, expressed or understood, and 'inreulus (re/mfus) est\ 
 'inrenti (reperti\ sunt\ 'exo?-tusesf\ as abstract predirates. a<: Nostra in repnbliea i/i- 
 ventus ejst f^ui filiam interticeret : There was in our republic a man who killed his dauj^h- 
 ter. Cic. Fin. 5. 22.— Sin ^/7/n^ aliqui reperti qui pecuniam prseferri amicitiie sordiduni 
 pufeni : If th.-re will be those who think it mran thai money should prevail over frieml- 
 shi|). lb. AmAl,i>i.—/nrenfusestyumitfa( = Ni\m\(hio\\khun)qui pnesttliet e'c. Liv. 26, 4. 
 —Erortusest serrusqui eum accO^-et; Tlnrecame a.v/a^v to accuse him. lb. Dej, 1. Ex. 2T. 
 —Probably the (^ui-claiis -s after * inventus est ' etc. were oris^iiially conceived as relative 
 claus<-s of puKPosE(p. .^.Viloll.) =' S<unehody has been f<>und out. orsiiiirled out by fate or 
 a hiiTher ai,'encv to do somethinq ' (qui aliquid /aceref). In thi- meanin-r. the mentioned ex- 
 pressions are also used with definite subjrcts". which is the only conneeiion in which they 
 occur in an/edassical style, as: Tv. Tu eiiim rf/}tr(us\s Piiiloeratem qui superes veriverbio. 
 Alt. Pol, tu invtdus's v era vanitiKiine qtn convincas (You have l>een found out to surpass 
 
 ♦The Enirlish demonstrative 'fhose\ in this construction, is never expressed by the 
 Latm demou.-trutivo ei or illi, but is either omiued, or expressed by an indtjinite. 
 
 .5) » iiu NOUNS. laKen in an indefinite sense, as s!it)jects, correspondini? in tin 
 lar to the English indefinite article, and in the plural to nouns without article, 
 ' some ', as: Sunt homiues quos infamiie suie neqiie pudeat, neqne t.-edeat ; There i 
 who j;re neither a<hamed etc. Cic. Verr. 1, V2.—Fvif quiVdam vis {there was a iiow 
 
RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 KGr.cTUHaimr^^^^^^^ t , di^ti rb tlu' p^'Mce. Cic. Ac. 2. .■j.-So.netl.neH both construe- 
 ?i n" tl ; w h H^^^^^^^^^^^ »'"» «»'^«t NNill. a (Ulini.c subject arc uiuted: //n-f/./t/.v .,i 
 
 t^^tifxi 'i''/}'%);J -f'l'yr. ;x\).><L-(l ibc calendar for ihe people» u^e. Cic. Mur H.- 
 na/z/./y Cn. ^</ ^ ^^h^ i;,rfr//^/.«6.o/ etc. when «)/«^v or iwu, \^ added or 
 
 ^>R^ «s The mood in the Qui-c] .us>e»* f,\ii>r wrej^tui^, rcpertu-^, ti\^^ ('rort>^s f^t, on ac- 
 
 f' »■ i- ?.rhr?n,.l • fiir.r nieaiiin" is aZ/rwyv the ^uiudnctive. In il.e Qui-clau^es 
 
 a)in.t ol Its origina hiua im^ the nw.od. in the tune bi'fore Cicero, Nvas 
 
 Sa;;?n "nu^I^vk. S.^1 wSn7rchu;.e reqinn-^.a H.)>jnuetive lor other rea.o,^. 
 In P an I. an Til- nc ■ this constrnction (ahv.ays uith i.idicat.ve) occurs m llie U,\\ov;- 
 in./ m" J4 A iVhic uno.^ credo inter se dicre etc. I^'^»"»;,?'}^;. I'^ol .T^-^'/J^ 9^« 
 "e ri m /? peroninri. Ib.'psend. 1.5, A1.-S>n,t ex te <juit sc.scit>ln ,^y^- /V' ^ l| ^' ?^1'^- 
 W ^yJ sriry ef«e amlco-, *'/«^ quorum in-< lua nun </'/'0 uos.eie. lb. Irin. 1, 2, ..4.— 
 7 / ih!!Vm/v. Urn mVo^^^ lb 1 2. ♦•r4.-£,V/ rrf//'/.v liominuni ^wi 8e pnnios omnium 
 ta^i^i^^^^^^ti^- Where' the sabjifnctive occnrs, it is 1) a M.bjut.ctive <. 
 V^-i^ie ^^\ti^'in^ntns e.D, in the passau-e cp.oied ab<.ve (Obs. 4 N<..5); '-i) " ^-'a"*"^ 
 M iunctive ace ordin- to p. m\ foil.) : ^«/.Z, ',"o.^ «nise.os n.a Cqne /ia^^as </^o.v n\nje- 
 ^Vi"Sox?os ^<« 7/HNf70.s' Aa/.«-.s, tibi feci^ti obnoxiosj. Plant 1 rin. 2 1, 
 
 4S S? S^^^^^^^^ OITARDED STATEMENT ^p.-iTS): /^^i ,.aueis VOS V''^^^. molMtOS 
 
 S/Jln.'i\l'captrrol.n3; 4, tr..4mMaly a -'lUU"etiye on.o.j-rejUUy u^.^^^^^^ 
 i.e-ative antecdents : M/iil e^f quod mefuam. Plant. Capt. 3, .:.. Si ^<^ *y"l'- ^;fl /iii ' nf 
 
 I 2 12 am often) -In Cato and Lucretius this consiiuciion does not occur .it all. Of 
 he ^)s:^Sfsof CiceroV time. Yam, u.es the c^;t.-ucnon f^^,'^^:^ 
 
 onlv three times with the subjunctive: Sunt qui put>-nt,\ arro R. H. 1, 8 , l>ud V/'J «^^«"J' 
 1 12, 7; V./?/v/./ qui duerini lb. L. L. 4 p. l.i W th the indicative: .S.///Z qui tradu 
 
 II T 4 D 13- SuntQui scrijmnmf, lb. p. 44; Kd quod inquwiU, lb U.K. 3, i , iiunt 
 animm^^ ^'''^^'^ '""^ '" '^'"*"^^ consuetu.linem sequimur 
 
 7 ■ i*R 1 65 iH.-a? toth^^^^^^^^ "'"^t be made between the 
 
 instance Ihatthe siU-Iect of '".'< (eM etc.) is elliptically omitted, ai.d that it is expressed 
 ^^v niihltnn multi *iU- For the latter see OiJS. G and <. . 
 
 \u thfcHm^tructio.V witlH It a subject, C.ksau has twice, and SAi-LUSTonce the indxca- 
 
 ;., «v<. nn>j«ji«Te*- .Sw/j/ o>/i vufuiU posse te non decedere. Cic. l^am. 1, u, <i.i.— <v/f<t yta, 
 
 ^•;.!!d'si;rtiu;ftnon«;2;;^ 
 
 ],w/./*< a-ainst all the codices) nonnumquam posse e c lb Inv. \:^'^^-^''"\^^^^^^^^ 
 iitilitaiem pete.dam putant (some Codd. have jmferd). lb. •*' J^.-f "«Z^.^'^f: 'f *f J /^^^ 
 Alt 10 4 11 -Livv very frenueiitlv ii^es this construction, and alN^ays wi h a suOjunc 
 are -iu the classical f)oe,sS he stibjunctive occurs about us often as the indurative 
 
 rJ^;^?:aitmS^vllys use the subjunctive. In a few Vf^:^^^^;^^^^^^^''^^;:^:^^ 
 occ us {.Su/d quiju'/iawf. Sen. lien. 5, 2 : Sunt qui putant, lb. (^11. N. Tief-»- * "^ V.!''?,.p 
 facts it is evident that the subjunctive in the con.lrucln.n ^fun ^V'' '^'^c ^ «;; ""*^"«^'^; 
 to the earlier lanLma-e, and that this mood was lirst used in the time of ^'^ro, \atro 
 sti lus^m' the indicative oftener than the subjunctive, while Cicero almost always, aiid 
 Livv alavs his the subjunctive. Tins subjunctive, ^v/dck occurs in no other language 
 
 but'the iM'fin, has been dirtVrently explained by the S^^VT^'V^'if-.^ '"^1^";^ th?I exX 
 sidtr ' .sv/n/ (,ui dicant ' as equivalent to '^>mf houanes tcOes u duant . Btit this expla- 
 nation u HI fail in mo-t of the pa.sa^es quoted Ohs. 4. and below and >^. '« «^« «^'^''t 
 sible because modal Uf-dauses an; ntrer used in this connection (see p. .>».'n<>ll;. ^^j::;jl- 
 Haase (in Reisijrs U-ctures, p. 605) considers thi* subjunctive a linguiMc '^<f^J'^ff; 
 because the predication proper is contained in the principal predicate, and hence the 
 us. ano her indicative in the relative clause for the same predication w^ou d »^e »' \'' j 
 euistic pleonasm '. Hut it is difficult to see how such a ' pleonasm 'could be corrected 
 6v the I se of the subjunctive. On account of the late introduci ion ol this ';"»>J»;'Ct>Ne^^ 
 it i. m<.re probable that a mere anulo-y ha* caused its use '^;''»^»" !,"'«V, 7?/S 
 found in the negative construciion- ' ne/no e.^t qm' etc., and also in the i-""^";''^-' V" 
 S./VA e^t^q^d', in either of which the use of .he subjunctive, in accordance with the 
 ijeneral requirements of this mood, was established already in anteclassical style. 
 
 / 
 
 MOODS IN THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 553 
 
 "nt the indicaUve occurs considerJwyl f ene? l?an^ in A?.^ *'''• T""^!-^ ^^^^' ^' ^ «"^ 3); 
 
 inderstood,as: Mtdti^ re.s ,unt in ryj Lrde snis rnrimi r ^'."'.'^^••"c ion with fubjecta 
 
 Cic. Am. hi.-Sunt ejus aliquot 07wST^^n»,vl^ "?^°'''?^'" *"'"' ^^^^^ detrahnnt. 
 
 4S.-Quam multi sunt /^^^m^^.^quoram prf.tt^ ejus perspici 7,0^..^. lb. Brut 
 
 -Fulrunt etiam alia genera philosopK?n ^1?«^^ obUgavit! lb. Sul). 26. 
 
 --Sunt quidam qui molestas amicitias/S?// lb Am a '^f^^/^'^^'l^'^^ ^^" ^'- '^' ^'^^ 
 
 fed jmyjiciurd. !Sen. Ep. 120.* See Ex :S-!S Som .^„, ""^"'^* ^^^ ^"' "^u donant, 
 
 this construction to remove ambi-ukfefr^^^y!,/ w^^^ indicatives are necessary in 
 
 «lantur; There are many who di^priAe sLe o ^ ^ erimunt aliis quod aliis laW 
 
 pre.ents. Cic. Ott". 1, 14. IJad tht^reo?,lar ,ub nnr^^^^^^^^^^ '•"'^f J" "'''^' ^''^"^ ^» others as 
 
 \qmd aliis largiaatur' won d not Slv S'.;^^^^^^^ ^"^^," "'^'^ here, the clause 
 
 intended to be, since (he HiI>juncMve '^mS^^ purpose, which it is 
 
 tive by attraction (= they take fro n some v^ifhPvf.ItP''^' ^''\l'' ordinary subjunc- 
 
 ity is removed by Uv^cm^ eriinunlin theind cat iv^ if "'' on others). 'J'his ambl-u- 
 
 JV^t in this construction: the nX of the rdaUve cl^^^^^^^ ^'' ^V'^ '' "^^^ ^« ^"^* 
 
 Siqun- c^tguiC. Kabirium reprehendemh.m ;.^L^ (not .V/«/f ^^^^^^^ /he g„l)j„nctive, as: 
 
 alujui.-^cxt,titeiitQmi)os.nt dicere. lb q^ 3 21' ^ ^^^"'"'^-^- ^-'^- ^^b. Post. 1, l.-^m 
 
 ^^k^^^^^oX^^^"^::^^ refer toBEKrxiTK xtrMKUAX. 
 
 /luce m,d arfes quce l^sunthKlrth^^^^^^ 
 
 ^^^^Y-Quatuo^'lunt^proril^^^^ 
 
 }n^.^aKvays the indicative, to disS^i^K;.- =^ ^'i^r^^^^'Sl^^-^ 
 
 V^'^^^n^^^^^^^l^S^^S^ -e OBJECTS of ordinary verbal 
 
 ;,'eneral]y have their prethcatesi.nhrs^irNfT.vr^i?^^ ^^"^'^ relative clau^es 
 
 mentioned li. 10, Ob- 7 as 4 // /7r 7^/^,\ ,f//« according tothe analo-y of the clauses 
 
 oratio ( = nonnhmsunt gloiiT^xcyT^^^^^^ «^^^'^^"a'^ conclfd^^Snr 
 
 perfect rhythmical conclusion Cic Or<it?i 1? if,? ''•'^'*' "^'^''^^^ \^^noa^ had an almost 
 am rendam vit.c sme negent ( ^^nnttrot'-^^^^^^^^ ^^^ vim 
 
 qucvobsetTem. Cic. Fam. G, G 7.-Si /S. o^/orf L?/.?;/" t ' ^^'- ^^^--"^'f^^o alia signa 
 Ac. Pr. 2, 2!*, 94. ^^^* ^"^^ Hqueat, iieque respondis, snperbis. lb. 
 
 a d^n'e X^^l^l^^^T "^^^^^^ ^l^ '" ^"«^'^^ «^^^ ^^«tin) to make 
 tnuluced by ' there is ^ \nxx \»y ' 5 ^ ?, nerf 111 h?^ 'V-"^^ "'• *^"-'^^*» «''^ ""t in- 
 
 but also in the ivDic^TivKt a« \v//£,? // -^ . "- 'heir predicates in the subjunctive 
 
 intentiOne turn remis>iun(> motus ixmmrnnmsUnimi^u.' /Vi fr~^'"'l'' '""'i^ Q^^or^'m turn 
 
 t.un or relaxation /r^ i/,,/icr//e the emoXoMh^^^^^ 
 
 conturlH-ntX in deiiben.tir>ue nonnunio a 1 • J/V^ ^^- '^' ^•*' '^^^ "^^'^^^ '^«^'J' q"Je 
 
 liberation.'lb.On^3.20 m.-S.??rJ.^<^^^^^^^^ 
 
 «m//«^.xeverythin^Moitsef si £1^55 S^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ces virtually equiralent to he i,oi^ hi w S i^.^ hli',h"''P'''"^-*"'' i- applied tosenten- 
 
 *'///nmpiisdomestic;e/^wri.f QuTi\\l>Tm!, .1^^^^ '.^*' Unction of a copula, as: //eg 
 
 filiis rep.(ant ; Tl.oe arrtoVhe wicked Ui^d'm^^ co„.eeleratissimis 
 
 pum^hM.ent on criminal sons iu the nam^of S rmrfi fs -^^n^^ ".!?^" 
 
 as I; lines pursue the sons etc.). Cic Kov" Am 2 ?- Th ^ 7 \ ^- '^*''''® ^•""S« ^'^^ch. 
 
 IS aKshnied Piir thi< fii^tinr-f VAn ? ..V» 1 1''-'^' <*" ^^^ "'ing to which a certa n ' quality ' 
 
 parin,Mhe dinUlUc'xampl"'' Other S '^^ «^^P^f ">' ^o^' 
 
 dicat ve is used if the iiiHefinitV. ««flii 7 . ^ . ^^"- ^'- '• '^'^^ sl'»te that the in- 
 (/««//a .>w«/ J /fp j C^J" - Fa 0'/^^!%'^^^^^ ■ /'"•'^li '■•^''^ predicate-adjective 
 
 rare, and the lule Vu, 1 ceTtah?]^ mt .n.^vT.^^^ • ''f ^: -^^"^ '"^'^ instances are very 
 Moreover sM(h clauses occu^fh.l"^^ ^^':''^'' indefinites as quidam, nonnulli etc. 
 
 ^ntqui se duo^soir^idS^^^JJiS.^^^c^ie^t^^^^^^^^^ "^^'^"^^ ^*"*'" ^--^' "^i- ^-•- 
 
 thJ 1:^.^:^^^^:^'^ § ^^«^ "«^-'•) erroneously state, that in stich clauses 
 X Inferior manuscripts -ivo conturhant. 
 
5S4 
 
 RELAXrV'E CLAUSES. 
 
 Timneranfia €sf. Qvm ratiOnem utpcqnilmur montt ; It is temperance which admonuhes 
 4TfS U t« r?aSn. Cic. Fin. 1, 14, 47. The.e pcr.tencc^ imi.t bt- d..t.n!,,nKlu( In.m 
 fhoseVTmi In construction, in which the relative clau.c cxpr.-.se« a qnnlUy mdicaled by 
 is (e<pn*^K'(l or under:?! ood). a^ a prt-dicatc-udjecuve. bee li. 2o, Ubs. 4. 
 
 1 In oninibt.8 pspcuIip pancidres viri rei^rii sunf qui Mins cnpidiiStes qnnm <pn hos- 
 tium "> ,;a"V/;;..;..^ Cic. Fam. 15, 4, 15.-2. ^<'r'!l!^'\J^;;:^^;^^'i^ %T\% - 
 a corpoVo ar<H'ent, ct ad divinJlrum rerum ^'^fl'\'^''^:'^J'l^''"^^^^^^^ 
 3 Oitotu.'i i"itur fs/ nmsf/>te qui pomniis pareat f lb. 2. eA 12.>.— 4. Quotui^quuque eM 
 omteneit a^te n numcrOrmn ac modorum ? lb. Or. 2. 50, l%.-5. Solu, est h.c ?"»"'' m- 
 Quam la OieV» ad ernrium /y/Vm/. lb. Verr. 2, 1. 38. -r,. Inus eH qui curet con.tantia 
 Ss quame-oniuio'ca.o. lb. Att. 1, 18. 7.-T. Q.ur (vy.) .i ..^ ./«« ex onuum. y.^ 
 pe.T. moveat. neque nata est certc, et set.rna est lb. Kep. k 2« ^•-«- "«« 'K uc 
 
 ty,/^/w unus qui ipsam eloquentiam /or »//>/. /an w.h Brut. 97 f ;-)?• f^'^'f,,^',;* 
 discessum animi a cor pore ;;»/«/// esse mortem, lb. 1 use. 1 •». 18.-11. Di 1^ ^rris) n pi 
 deutia sin.M.lSri .unt qui rninntur. lb. Verr. 2, 1. 2.-12. hraut qut ';':"-^'.'t"^*'^ Vnl? 
 vl.ri a in r- -. 1! reced.-n.lnm C'les. B. C. 2, ;«.-13. Esse debet, uude ahquul./lrt/, deinde 
 a J oV'z ie E^^^ '•e'>"« ^?'^^'' <lici;>av>-i/ subli iu.. C.c. Tusc 
 
 ? ^i5!:?2^ - 5.%S. V"i ^e statim ctaf.nnt. Tac H. 3. H.-IO. Inva.vmtur qut honesta 
 in niercCdeiu cotanf/quihusque mm placeut virtus frratuita. Sen. Ben. 4, l.-l*. ^«f/f"f 
 o/ihic o «/S>.; / Cic. Tuse. 1, 31, 77.-1S. Pntsto tsl qui necjet reui u lam percipi 
 ?, -s? .e si lu's lb Ac Pr. 32. lOL-l^.-.V»^/» ^uut qvi_ non aeerbum^'/^/^-^" y.vere, 
 lid^snpervac nm. Sen. Ep. 24-20. Est aliquhl quo ^^^u.x^^ anUcedat ^l»"" ;,i'>v;;?-7 
 t\ Quicquid est q.od dec at. id .u.n app^ret qunm ^^^l^;^^-^^:^^ 'ib" Ou %V f " 4 ^' - 
 27 44-22. Midia eonvenerutd qui^ uientem (xfurf^ityd ne.m. lb (^>. h. i'4.4^ 
 S: ( u^ quil>usdam admirahilia vi.ieutur j^nnultisuut qm P""'; "/''';' {^/^^j'-.^^^,^'^ 
 o^si; -■>4 l/'///a ocrutrunt quiv in dicendo prolutflra ?n^a;//Mr. II). Or 2, .b, .3H4.— 
 25" Coi.sUio ac KU^ent a r/"/i re-ere rempublicau. poss.ut multi n..Mnl, phires patrum 
 memoria ex^inSu. \h. 1.2,8.-2«. Kraut sent.n/i.e qmv castra \ an oppuirnauda 
 ceu'lTnt neVi C 2.30-27.\v.m7/o;- iurmtu^est qui Milnnem cum telo esse dice- 
 ?/< Cic Mi -24 16-28. bMqua;damnxunV\ sauifas v^c? M' ni>ipientem ^noqnc radat. 
 lb Ti-c 4 3 30.-2'.>. Sunt uowadlie discij^ime qute offinum (.mi;e l^.rrtrtauf^ \h 
 m \th-kFuire dies qui sequc remque publican, obst.mlns an.mis perdiuin 
 ir^«/ Sa 1 Ca 3fi-31. i^ymvm^ lex est <le reli-ione qu<t in annos sn.L'uIos Jovis 
 laterdOtem «<?rtIto capi^ ;«Lrt/. Cic. Verr. 2. 2. 51.-32. \ovnulti sunt in hoc ..rduie qui 
 snem ?4t Inr^^^^^ atutruut. eonjur.Mtionem.iue luiscent.-m n..n ere- 
 
 d /d , ro/ -X-aS? /^ n>. Cat. 1. 12. m.-^i. Sunt t>eslice quadani w quit,us tuest a h- 
 qud simile C^rtiti.. lb. Fin. 5. 14.-34.. £:</.. e./amor.^/..«ran^ 
 verbis e.v/, alius qui ex (Mmtinuatis conjunctisque_oa«.v/f/J. lb. ()r. '^-^'^ .:,^-*-!;-'5?;/.'''2* 
 ,uut et/uiruntqui a neiro,ii< V}^^>^^',]' *'y,'"'%'';;'^^^^^^^ 
 
 darn ducPdo sermOnis qme ifre/dt et tUancptur S.ai hp. 1( . .-3i /> /0^'/;^/ ^Triulud 
 tractataab on.tOre, admirabilem eloquent iam/a«./«/./..c. Oral. -•• If •-•^'J- f ''V ,« 
 omnl r7^/»^m one in disceptuiO.um et controveisiam cadere posst'-t Ih. Or. 2. 2b, 
 ?n-3* -Q.Xlo^ »"^*^"'» ^7/n/,qui MiiOn.s causam 
 
 mm //riJS.? lb. Mil. 5. 12.-40. Duo ,unt temix>ra quibus no«irOrum civium specten. 
 ^/r judicia de nobis? lb. Vat. 4, 10. 
 
 Rem 18 If ihe principal predicate is represented as jwmOle, doubtful, 
 desirable, or necesmn/ in rci-ard to an indefinite antecedent of a relative 
 clause whose reality is dependent on tiie reality of liie pnncipal sentence, 
 the predicate of ihe clause is ij^enerally placed in the puiuunctive. 
 
 Ob^ 1 The modes of n.m-reality mentioned above are, in ihe prine.pal t^entence. e^- 
 pre-J^'d bv one nhe «.nammatical forms mentioned Ob.. 2. wb.le in the- T^" '"'j;;,^- i f ^^ ^»^^ 
 I me klnVN of nnn-ri-alitv Mrc ."xpres-ed by the subjunctive. Kelative elauses of Ihl^ kind 
 a iw^s 1 we^^ ^^/^7''^. cxpr.«-ed or u.ulerstood), ^vlnch are repre- 
 
 Ben ed a" l>o-iblv real in .he event t bat the principal predicate becomes nnl, as : mpert- 
 % / / %a/ij:idouod animum conffnnef ^somethiiii: must be found nut. u h.eh may con- 
 fiTn the mind • .le ' «?/i"i</ ' is f.-nnd. it will cease to be ind.linitc. the staf of suspense 
 beh..' exp,is,e^^ th.!^siii,junctivc. Ma.iy of these subjuncttves are quasi-oblique. 
 
 Ob". 2. The principal -entenres to which relative clauses of this kind are attached, 
 have the following grammatical forms : 
 
 MOODS IN THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 655 
 
 1 HafiAueo ad a>rarium reffrre. to remit the balance of one's accounts to the treaeniy. 
 1 CmVt^rrrto thVlKMtei^^^^^^^^ the vul-nte has the indicative perrertunt.-^ to elect. 
 
 C«i^;4 b thVtyidcal term denoting the election of prie.t..-^ by indulgent remarks. 
 
 yJf'.Z If-. POTKNTiAi. predicate!» (posse, deb?re, or a pernndial) ; aP : Potest alio (aliquo) 
 confide, t-ut item ex. rcitus in manu sif, falsum aliquid pro vero ciedi- It is ZTnUelvSi 
 imbT some other con.ul,«Ao likewise has control oV.r an army, ^ometliC fSs^^^^^^ 
 Iv lirilrVl'V-- *^^' •• ^''•'- ^'' ^\ "••'•f: ^*^^- "«"-«-«^ality is7>o.*t^.,7jy. whlS isl./dcaled 
 seVt ce Th^'^^^l'I.'!;'.^^^^^ Vr '^ '^'*Vr-^' *"" '"^'T'"^ '-y « I'otcntial verb in the principal 
 c,^uilu1u^r rl^.T^^^^^^^^^^^^ '^ ccmceived as an indefinite person, who will be a 
 
 Hull }^ ■'' "'"^^'.'7^'r"'eV'«"^«orthe principal predicate becomes real.~7?«;fmn. 
 fh?f1r -/^'ui.?' '^"^ T^ y™'' invitanu-nta natflne ; A iource must bediscovend i.?which 
 
 mouum, e^^c iiinxn dtljtt ahquis cujus nt iiicommodum ; Death has no discomfort • for 
 t liere must s(.mebody exist to whom it is (could possiblv he) a discon.for Sn En 36 
 a bus 11 Vor«.w 'is added to the principal lenience I'Audisti ex «S /^^^^ 
 M.li.^sc eum diceiet exeuntem. Ter. Hcc. 4, 1. 35. Ilerethe siibj,inctiveXmrer^)rt«?es 
 b;rKx"'l"7r''"'"'^' ""' ^'^^^^^^^'^^'^ "^ the principal sentence is expressed byy^-S^^! 
 
 i.wf V.?!!'' P'i"^'n"l predicate may have the form of an absolute question (S 417) the 
 ^\^l^X!^TTV^''' ?''''''' bein.^.conceived as subject to tl.e sam" uLertiim$ 
 t^,:!.i '"<:'"^"'«."*^ '.''^'.qiH'stioii, as: Almsne est aliquis improbis civibus peculiaris 
 populusan uos mvl^i fuenmus ? Is there any diflerrut pc()ple pocuIiai\o arci iz.i s 
 to which (people) we liave hec-n hateful? Cic. Ses t. 5.s, ik-Vidistis (rt/Vv'/S oin 
 </^/c.r. chlamydafos cum macluerisy Did voti see any one who luul with hinfth^ 
 
 :ce;;;;;;;;;-n<!;;:'i^:'i;5.^^^iSyx'S- ^"'- '^ '^ '-^'^''^^ ^^^^^- - ' q!;:;\r srr 
 
 ahqunncumquncouferaL cum quo qmerat. Sc-n. Ep. 10!).-Eien pli causa X/Lr^i? 
 quid quodpattal latins. Cic. Oft". 3, 4, ly. See Ex. 11. 12. ponaiur ait 
 
 tho'.u!^^ principal Pente.ice may have tlie form of a conditional clause, the reality of 
 s / / i / ^"'i''/J'''' indelimte antecedent bei.g: dependent on the same condition as 
 Atr i' irf ^^^/''^,f<^-'V'f'"f'' }.<i^ifpnd) quodpe?-tinraf ad me, certion-m me fades. Cic 
 
 ^U\V.'/. V. 1f^^r"^''I/''"■'^ ''',''""'* ''"•^'^* ^""' ni«''''»"^ et natara conqrudmus. lb. Am! 
 1;. r ^*-^/^^- Ij-lJ- ilt'ie belong sentences inirodiicrd by 'quum' in the meaning' 
 
 t .1 V 'e".^'''iI'e;n.r;\.?/'7M/''r/fl-''i "^'^T 'f, ^"''- "'''*'"'? ''^''^ compareaut. id cumulate vidg": 
 nil .:i^.]t•^ ^^- ^"- '^' "• ^S— 1^1^'C HI antiquorum mim.rum rejiciuntur qvum 
 
 a qmdnon Inxunaannmcnta vsUquo\v.ii,eobrmiet. Sen. Ep. HJ. But in ^•uch ciausS 
 Ihrindicaiive is as fre(,uently used as the subjunctive. See Cic. Off. .3. S, 3C, • Am 19 70 
 A. i ir writers o| thu silver .age frequently use subjunctives in relative clauses if Vheir 
 imieliniie antecedents ref.-r to luiure-pivdicates. ii/ place of a depend.-m future a- • 
 ScM.'. Ep. S sITk ir'n''''* ncnimjunqut ac misceat (instead i^f Junr/et ac miscmt). 
 
 .,/?/fi ■/ ?• ^«"^*'^''"'''^ relative clauses dependent on the indefinite antecedents aliquL^ or 
 fl/^V't'/ (expressed or.understo(,d) take predicates in the subjunctive, even if the princi- 
 pal sentei.ce IS represented as real. Such subjunctives must be c.mskle ed as c nvln- 
 lo.inl onnst. caused i)artly by an analogy of relative clauses with nega ive amece lent" 
 
 to /'. 18 . as. Niii c dici.s a/iquKl quod ad rem penineat. Cic. R. A. 18. .'>2 — Vjdesne 
 quanta fmrit ap.id Ac.demicus verecundia? Pl^ne .-nim dicmt (i. e. aliquid) qvndai 
 rrni perfimat (something that is to the point). lb. Tuse. 4, 21, 4l-Magno in nSore 
 
 * If the antecedent and the clause are conceived as given ideas, and as real withont 
 ngard to the non-reaiiiv of the principal sentence. /A/i«rfJm/er. is usecMn The clause 
 (L'eiHTally witht.s«a, etias antecedent): Discutienda sunt ea qua; ohscuranf. Cic. Or 3 
 ..., 21.,. Sometimes the clause maj- be conceived as real or non-real accordiiK' to the 
 conception ol the writer, in which fnstance both moods would be crrect as • Nee pro^ 
 
 rmmnr'oe'^M?''! lo'-f'''?'''^ l"-'7-^ someeodlces have '*•^//.r ) eis quibus pnmiiseris, 
 
 . ; S M ^"' ^-J'*' -^' ^^*'*'''^ "'"^ inufiha ' is conceived as non-real, hein*^ dcoendent 
 
 on he fuj ilmeiit ..f the promise. But in a similar passa^-e the indicatlVe Ts iSd Ac 
 
 '^^^'^^^y^[^'^''^^^^^^^ eis ips'isuiilia quibus ilia promise- 
 
 i„LT!'vw.''"M^"""'!'y''^ in these relative clauses are generally interpreted as ' modal ' sub- 
 
 ,, :; V V ''^\V '■';"•"'*' •''•'"'- <^<'"t"^^''^^^ «** equivalent to a modal Ut-clause. To 
 
 thl.- nte pietatiun the ohjectnm must be made that such modal Ut-eiauses dependent 
 
 n.issible to replace the relative clause by a modal Ut-clause. It is difficult to comnre- 
 heiidhow the Lat.n authors sh.>uld have felt these clauses as Ut-c auses when Siifv 
 never actually used Ui-clauses in their place. ^« «» ui tiauscs, ^neu uicy 
 
 r 
 
556 
 
 RELATIVE CL.\USES. 
 
 MOODS IN THE EELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 667 
 
 inesttamon aHquid <^nod roApnhUrr, profntnmrn p//m Ih. PhU Y^,^^? -,latj"mSi- 
 ? c i?8 e-t illo die quo viclit alique,n cui iiec da.c qaR.iuu.n ;xxv.<«;^ i.ec eriptTc. ^cu. 
 
 1 Omni- ^cientia nlifyuM debet hahOrc manifestum ex quo omV>ir of rmM^ Son Ep 
 eo %\i'.u:d1antT-l ,.0.^ non\oln.n ./;/.././, ..d ^^'^-»r^]l-:;:Z^%!^^^^^^ 
 
 2 6- W-11 /W.V/m ma7i.v/ra/«m in quo n.iln nia-n;c ut.l.tflt. e-';^- />^^> ^ J/ 
 Plane 5 :i - -2. Kiro 7nah rirum qui p.-cui.iiC eqeat quan» l'«^"»";'"/l"f.^. '^*'-. l.^f,; 
 2 21 71 -n .4 'y'/a rcluria sites est 7"ce ^ociOnim anun«.» con.olSji jm.^ , valuta in 
 
 q am IS.Km N Ter Em Pn:^ i'-n. ^i 7^./;/ .. ««./^- 'I'd "},t"am farn.l.ar.^u^i 
 
 ?. mnl n ri;i> huic quantum credendum bit vide. Cir. Qu. It. 1. . r,.-lb. W«t^^ 
 
 ItVn.m 7;r/no^ Z^emr.pOuat dies. Sen. Ep. 'M.-U. Uuju^ unlu« rei u.um 7«* exi- 
 
 f/a/ di<?« venief. lb. 70. i j / 7 
 
 iiV/w 19 If the antecedent of a relative clause is represented as adapted 
 
 or lit for the purpose expressed in llie clause, or as intended for or serving 
 
 a purpose designated in the same, the relative predicate is placed m the 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE of non- reality. 
 
 Or<* 1 If the antoc.'dont is indetinifi*. the mere subjunctive of the relative pn-di- 
 ca?e haithe , ow.r , f d -si^natin^' lb- antecedent .^fit,apt or adanted .0 ibe aonon e.x- 
 SesseTi predicate. Such relative clau^e^ are -enerully rend-red by h v.disb re a- 
 S^'li;:^ ■ wi'^b '"L, ' or by an infinitive with 'to\ as : fZt>i;:^<i^^ ^ ^^ 
 I see perso.i^ present whom I may a-k (U e. adapted to be a>ked bv nie) * ^^^-^ '".''' 
 o 4 -Fiat in le.iuitilte PisOnis paratis.iMuim refuqvwi q<iO sine labnro, ^ine '."«>; '^»'^ 
 homhie^w/^r^ <V • -ni.Te was n Plso's fai.nes^. a r-a.iy refu-e xchtcli unnmm/U uso 
 ^ C t tS'le a^^^ difficulty u. ^. the refu-e was a.lapted to tbetr wants). C.c. \ err '2, 
 ^ ifi Ard is^.Xed nobis (i. e. locum) ubi. animus rx hoc f..rensi strepilu rr/ia.A- 
 J;/f' An'h - pr r.^^^^^ f "• "^ "'^^^'-^ »'»« '"'"'^ m'^y recover Imm tins foreus c 
 
 tut •,^'^,''"'. J.,, ; ,.) S. inner re<ijl))it eiiam snpienti (i. e. /o.v/.<) 7//0 animus .-jus 
 ^; ^ ;'(^ e ^uC^^'n^u^ulll^ f- a wisi man --•'»'i"^',.. wbiclihis miud 
 . .! ' 1 •» If c.^r. 1.'« Mv\ Til»! mnin est ni/i rem .sv>/?"a>«' -omnilju- ; i<>u nave 
 :;ia.u!:'^a^ o ,;^hSia?ms;f an \iTmea;.l ^ 
 
 ?on\ PI 1 liud 2 r.M -M'dta e corpore exsistunt qmt ncuarit ment.m ; Many thi.-s 
 proceed rroml he body, wincfi .hank (i. e. arc Qt, have Iho power to sharpen) the 
 mind. Cic.Tusc. 1,:«, bO. See Ex. 1-4. 
 
 OBS. 2. In several conventional formulas relative clauses denotin- «'^«Ptt;'^"*;;';' '^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 >viVb th^letlniteatiteccdetit '/*K\ referrin.Mo prevwnis remarks e(m^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 and similar predicates, a» : Jhec hab>n de seneelQie quce dir.nm : V'V? 'T .h/V r'ir 
 ?o make on old a-'e ( = this was what I had to say, nhat was adapted (0 b^ -^f '^ •.; ^,; 
 Sen! it ^ Sof7/ic haltui de amicitia 7^/<^ dicerevi. lb. Am. 27, 103 -JI<E C habtbam 
 ' 1 Vpatness — ^ if it 13 asked tor.— 3 This sentence belongs both to the rule R. 1^^- O»^. 
 
 «».[^«/^17 Ors 4 But Terence who construes ^x< 7«^ with the indicahre ^hxce^ 
 '?urf.«M./the';.ii|;;nciive on acSt'of the non-reality of the pre.licate in re,.»rd to the 
 coverninj' conditional clause. . „ . . 
 
 * If the antecedent is dettnite^ti separate adjective expressing fitness etc. is -ener 
 nllv n<. ded (Obs .3> except in the few conventional phras.-s mentioned Obs. 2.- 
 
 1 Uiefoow «.^passage it should seem, at first si-ht. as if '7^' ^^^'^ V^'"^^ "^ "^'f,^ / f/ 
 i,P«s wi.^ maZ^deDendent on a proMV name as antecedent : I.i h«,c fuit numero MiUia- 
 wit. Vur«^.wtodi?rrS/a^ Milt. 3. 2). wli(>re the relative clause seems to have 
 fhe Zrc^^iXnfpeZ^^^^^ with this guard '. But more properly the clause 
 
 s\o be maXiiof^oc r.ymero ^ eorum vumero. so that >'/«;'i'^ '^.J.l';;'^;;,^'^' ^/'^^ 
 to the covernin<' word of a partitive attribute (according to li. 1 .. Obs. 3) "I'^J^l^fj;';. ^" 
 IhepanuTve attribute itself ( - i.i numero eOrnm quibu-s Ula cu.todia crcdebfltur).- 
 The editors generally take this clause as quasi-oblique. 
 
 otz/E to Pcirc veUem (instead of qu<B scires, according to p. 405 Obs. 3). P). Att. 1, 6, 2^ 
 
 f.rfi'inlwe tiTh""ge uiulia^: or 'vJith'^^Sn'ternlgative clan?e : De republic^ nihil hc^ 
 ad te m-i^rm lb. Att. 2. 22, 6.-De spatiis hoc prceciptendain habemus. Col. 5, 5.-Msi 
 quid scribereiniww habebam. i\c.Vam. 'J, Z. ,. .,. - • ♦!,„„„, 
 
 nns ^ The subiiinctive of adaptedness led to the peculiar idiom of expressing the par- 
 tiouHr kirn of uKX ^"hy ndescnptive adjective to which the relative c ause (ahyays 
 wH it> e( ic- e in t e subjunctive) is attached with the lorce of a compleling object- 
 \Mth lt^ l»'^;' V. ViV,.! iv, s are tho-e denolingJiYrtf^•.^^ worthiness, and somt times leadiness 
 
 hi^.< bot'h SV/J ^ antecedents, are rendered by partiapial nouns in mg 
 
 after Tl reno-^h m i/, tn^ov by infinitives, if the relative i^ the subject of the clause 
 II t^'e relative s in an oblique case, the clause must be variously recast in 1-''.-^'^^ ^ »;„= 
 Is n m7()o«y' /er t Qui iidl atar f Will not that man he Jit to be sen f Cic L. M. 2.^,06. 
 ^U iTinSe plire? vidf-tur qui^ aliquando imy>.;.^ jje^n.. esse ; Who '-dpi ly ob^^^^^^^ 
 pee^ii-* to be worthy of commanding in the fuiure. lb. Leg. .i, 2, 5.— Eo inihi <i^(fniorM 
 e^s st «i in am^ meam /ecipenm ; The more worthy he seemed tome ojbev.g 
 
 «"/«i/ .n^^^^ Ih. Fam 13, 1«, 2.-quid est dtgnius '^^ 9"^. «"","1'; "(t^^^* 
 
 Sentm ri/ "w^^ VVhatismore tvorthy of receiving omv whole attention ? lb. \ en . 
 (liii^u.tm w/i^ /| Hlentium ac nox tegat ; Nor do you deseri'e to be htd- 
 
 %'n Vn siilnce ind ?iikt. ui: 7, 3« - Nulla v-i^-'f ur «;>/ior V:r^f^-^^^^^^^ ^^^ 
 Iftnii^retur (more competent to speak on that age). Cic. Am. 1, 4.-b nguiis ariicuiis 
 
 l^i'SuanU'hJl'US 
 
 t.. niiHd.- to fit) the torture of each limb. ben. Ep. 24.— bi piopius C'Pi^i'* ;»"mo\ u.ci, 
 
 ;;;S fofe 7.1 pi^L^nt urbem ; They would be ;.ac/y ^g^.^^^-'f ^.^he city (or per- 
 
 '•. Vio",ii.i ..oti.in^ /o de><erte mv U/wina liim as companion m his flight, lb. Att. 
 M %'2 4m 1 OS ^/sSs ^MUdiqnos duxi.ti, baud i,.c/i7«o. jud.cas 7«o. in 
 9 10, ^-^' "^" 5"."%':;,..:' i,, ,he fir^t propositii.n, a relative construction would liave 
 fidrmreeeptu-^/ec// . w urenM^^ 4-2 -i>J7«a res visa est «f simulacrum ejus 
 
 requ.re.l "J^vice vpe t.d 70..). } ^"^; ^^^^j^f '^ute has no antecedent in thep.in- 
 diei O.acchiis pmgi J'>beret lb 24 lb w iiere in construction. Comp. Plant. 
 
 
 ^l:^^Xriisr::^u;;;Uh a g;n:n;u;r c^ll^e: ^wW a gemndial after ad (p. 1«4, 
 
 tence, or if the '-^"'^'^-.^ent is the .J^^m^^^^^^ ^^^ d'T.rfinite .mt'Jcedents, are rendered 
 
 purpose, which are "-«^* «^ '\;j'\*i af t er «fo " or ' in order to\ 'with theorder to% 'so 
 e therbyan English object-intinitne after fo, or 11 , ^, ^ relative 
 
 as to \ or by part lelpial nouns in t;K/ , '■f.,/''^, ' ^f J ^^tes de, S^ng pu pose (' to be to ' 
 clauses with an int n.t.ve. V^^"' | J/?'^ '";\l?'Xile h? generally takes 
 
 T) ''■^•"'nn^rSXui^t'heJt^^tliln^ 
 
 tin- form ol a final 1 ','*^J*^ '-* l,;.".!"^ V, Obs (31 Often perst.nal pronouns must be added 
 the preposiiioM \fur (S.e the ''^?^- -V^S, ^/1, imi.- ra«e • as • Philippus Ai-isfotelem Alexan- 
 in Enl:li^h if the Latin relative is in ^, J. :^^^^^^^^^ Aristo- 
 
 ,lro filx. doctonm «celvit a quo ^'^■li'^/'if^.^Z^^^^ /vi^ // m the 1 u es of c-loquence. Cic. 
 tie as teacher for his s<.n Al<;xa u er^'//iO ^ o /e«My^^^^^^ amiI•is^imus : I 
 
 Or. 3,.%. 141.-VOS du.. delCgi '/ '^ .IXra.id H^ in til iX^ to 
 
 ]t;?^;?:';;^^.^S'^^-E::^^::i ^^;^;^?rei;i;^m?elS^it; Ue U. C. Trebonlus 
 toaccomidish this. Cas. B. G. 7, 11. 
 
558 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 MOODS IN THE EELATIYE CLAUSE. 
 
 Obs. n. Clau?os clcnotinj!: pnrpope with antocedent? which repropeiit the ccmcelver of 
 the |)nrpo>;p, do not irentially «ssnnic a relative form (see Obs. 7). but are expres^isecl by 
 a tiiiiil Ut-(lause. But if the antecedent is not the conceiver of the purpo>e, and ia 
 represented as >Ymr27Mhe purpose of 8omc other person, the clause almost always 
 assumes a relative form (if nor expressed by one of the other forms mentioned 
 p. -i^i), as: (ieruKlni in castra venerunt }(t (hardly •■ (jvV) de indutiis impetrilrent ; The 
 Germans came into the camp to procure an armistice. Cies. B. (J. 4, Li.— Tertia acies 
 fi'Mia iiitulit nt (hardiv ' q>tcE') venientis sustingret, lb. 1, 25. But : Cicsar equitatuni 
 gui (hardiv ?//) mslin^ret hostium impetum, misit. lb. 1, 24. The relative form is espe- 
 cially ntcess.iry if with tit a demonstiaiive would be required, as : Milites e.v coriis tuni- 
 cas Jecertint quibm (iw\ tit tis) tela ritdnnt ; The soldi. -rs made tunics out of hides to 
 parry (by them) the missiles. Cies. B. C. 8, 44.— Ctesar hibi novum helium exoptabat vbi 
 ( = t,i quo ; but not nt ibi. or tit in eo) virtus enitescere/)0.f><=/.' Ciesar was very desirous 
 of a newwiir in which his <rl•eatne^s nii-rht shine forth (or't/iat" his greatness etc.). Sail. 
 Cat. 54. 4.— His delecii ex civitatiltus attribuuntur qvM'um (hardly til editim) consilio bel- 
 
 pose isaitacheil, as: Hoc non fu^'it Catniiem netpie Lielium. quibus in hominibus erat 
 su'uma virtus, «-t --umina virtQie ampiiflcSta auctoritas. et qi/ir. hU rcbu>< ornainento et 
 re'tp'iblii\K pmndio tssft elooueiitia ( = and eloquence ' which these vien jtractieed' that 
 it miglit be an ornament and support etc.). Cic. Inv. 1, 4, 5. 
 
 Ons. 7. Karely clauses of purpose in which the antecedent is represented as the con- 
 ceiver of his own purpose, assume the relative form, mostly for particular reasons, jis : 
 Verres venerat ipse qui esset in conciiio, et prinnis !>eiitentiain iDceret (Here the relative 
 form indicates ili.it the purpose was carried out: diff^ret including? pre^ruantly the m.-an- 
 inir of an indicative». Cic. Vt-rr. 2, 1. 2<».— Nondum Uotnam Eumenes venerat qui ca/um- 
 niando omnia invtmfacertt (where the action of the clause is cnly ' rhetorically ' n-pre- 
 Beuied as a purpose of the coining; ' ut.. J'aceref would historically state the real pur- 
 pose of Eumenes's c,omin<; to Itoine). Liv. 42, 42.-Pauca\ qiuv ciicum illam exsiut 
 manent ; A lew remained to attend to /itr (where quce is used instead of ut on account of 
 the metre). Ter, Eun. 3, 5, Si. 
 
 Obs. 8 Ifthe whole principal «entence. «)r any part of it which is nota substantive, is con- 
 ceived as the /oqiciU antecedent of a linal clause (p. 515 foil.), and is repre>ented as the 
 tHHtrnt bv whicli \hf purpose of the clause is attained, the clause frequently take< a relative 
 form, bein_' introduced by quo = ut eo (in order that f>>/ it), as : forrupisse dicitur Llii- 
 entius judicium pecuniagwo inimlcum tfwwm condemnrirtt : in order to condtinn 'by it 
 (i. e. corrumpendo judicium) his enemv. Cic. Clu. 4, y.-Deos hoinine-que testilmur nos 
 arma neque contra patriani cepisse. neque quo pericula allu facertinus ; nor tn ord>-r to 
 endan'f^r others ' t>y it' (i. e. anna capiendo). Sail. Cat. :«.— E(iuites<)mnibus in oris 
 pu;;njihant, quo se leqiona/iis niititib"» pnvf'trrcnt ; to gain 'by it (t. e. omnibus Jocis 
 pu-nando) dLsfincfioii orer the foot sotdierx. Ca's. B. O. 2. 27."lf the ])nrpose relers to a 
 coinparat'ire, the form with quo is almost always used in place of ut eo, as : Dixit sese 
 iccirco ah suis discedere quo /aci/iMscivitiltem in officio teneret ; in order to ke^p thirehy 
 
 ' ■ - •■ ' — ' '^'- - '• '^ ''- 3.— Thus if a 
 
 itas 
 tol- 
 
 ^ this 
 
 kind is rendered like a simple 'vt\ tl'e demonstrative eo, imt.lied in it, beinir either 
 omitted, or expressed by • the' before the comparative (quofaciliux teneret. to keep the 
 more easily). -Kar«'lv final ut is n«^ed in place of quo before comparatives, as -.It aperltus 
 hoc sit. Cic Inv. 2, 57. no— Sometimes gwr> is used with the lorce ot tit fnal. when 
 neither eo can be supplied, nor a comparative follows, as : Ego vos, quo pauca monerein 
 udvocavi. Sail. Cat. 58. 3. 
 
 Obs \) Frequently the anteced«'nts of relative final clause* are absolute indefinites. 
 The indelinite aliqHix {quidam) in this connection, in classical lan<;iia;:e, is irenenilly 
 omitted (accordini,' to p. 510 (2), but must be always rendered by correspond in-,' En^'lisii 
 
 * Such relative clauses frequentiv represent the antecedent as acting'' tuider orders , 
 and thus pas- over into imp.iative' clauses, from which they can often be scMrce y_dis- 
 tinMiish-d- Postea homines cursare non destitCrnnt. credo q'li Chiyso«:ono nuntiarmt 
 etc" Tic K \ 22, tU) ( i. e. at the order of the accuser, or of the oMer Roscius : ut tiun- 
 tia'rmt woi'.ld implv th.ir own pMrpose).-Tlms in the frequent formula * ;/a//J^ '^'i},}^' 
 renV and similar p'hrases. as: Ilelvctii k-atos ad Caesarcm mitluut qui dictnnt etc. 
 (who were to say). Ca.*s. B. G. 1, 7. 
 
 nouns (somefhinq, ihinqs, a subject, a fart, persons etc.), as : Aliguem velim qrd mihi ex 
 hi* locis viani mon<tret ; I siioiild like somefxydy to show ma xha way from this place. 
 Plant. Rud. 1, 4. :it).— Sordidi etiam putnndi qui* mercantur a mercatoribus quod statim 
 rendant ; Also those must be considered as carrying on a sordid trade who buy from 
 the merchants ('//i//7>' /'OAvV/them directly a^'ain. Cic. Ofi". 1,42, 1.50 — Dedisti mihi quod 
 diluerem. de quo disputarcni ; Von have given me a fact to refute and to discuas. lb. 
 Scaur. 2. 14.— Ciesar ad pi-.efi'Ctos mittit qui nuntiarent ne hostis prtelio lacesserent ; 
 Cu'sar sent messenqerx to the comtnanders to announce ( = sent word to the commanders) 
 not toattack the eiiemv. Cies. B. (J. 4, 11.— If the antecedents are negative absolute adjec- 
 tives {nemo,ni/ii/). the indefinite element may be in the same manner omitted, so that the 
 mere ne<'-Jiiion remains, as : Qui niitterent'ur non reperiebantur ( = nemo reperiebatur 
 qui mitteretiir). Cies. B. C, 1.33: but: Homo Justus ?/t//i/ cuiquam detrahit quod in se 
 transferat ; An honest man does not take anything from anyone to appropiiate it to 
 himself. Cic. Ot!'. 3, I'». 75*. See Ex. 25. 2G. 
 
 1. Undique mihi suppeditat quod pro M. Scauro dicam. Cic. Scaur. 2. 46.-2. Ego 
 vero quern fuqiam habeo, quetn sequar non habeo. lb. Att. 2, 4, 2.— :^. Quum piimuni 
 fuit <?//i recie ad te htitras daiem\ nihil i)rius mihi faciendum putavi quam ut tibi 
 irratuiarer lb. 4, 1. 1.— 4. H:ec faciliora sunt philosophis quo minus multa patent in 
 eOrum vita qy(e. fortflna feriaf^. lb. Off". 1, 21. 73.-5. Cwsar idoneos nactus homines 
 est mr qtios ea qiiie vellet ad Pompejum jyerferrentur. Cies, B. C. 1, 9.-6. Hunc pro 
 suis beneflciis Ciesar j(/o;<e//w jiidicaverat quein cum mandatis ad PompCjura mitteret. 
 lb. 3, 10.— 7. Hie qui postulat idoneux non est qui impetret. Cic. L. Man. 19, 57.- 
 8. Livianie fabuUe^ non satis diqnm sunt quce iteriim kganfur. lb. Brut. 18.— 9. Plerl- 
 que rem idoneam de qua qucerutur, et homines diqnos quibuscum dixxerdtur piitant. 
 II). Ac. Pr. 2. »;. IS.— 10. ETne qui postuiabant indiqni erant qui impetrdrent ? II). Ilosc. 
 A 41 —11. () v'irum magnum, diqnumq>ie qui in republica nostra natm esset! lb. Oflf. 
 2 23 N3 — T' Siciili statuCrunt, si vobis indiqni essent visi quibus opem auxihumque 
 /•f /v?/i.s\ sedis suas relinquere. lb. Verr. 2, 2, 3.-13. Me impcmor dignutn judicavit 
 cui primum pilum hustamm aMondret*. Liv. 42, 34.-14. Si tibi idoneus videor 7"? do 
 h<.mine Siculo ac (ira-cnlo j//rfi«';n. Cic. Verr. 2, 2, -.'9.-15. Lacedieraonu devicna 
 Atliemen-ibus triginta viros imposuere 9?/i rempublicam eOrum tractarent. SaU. Cat. 
 51 _ir, Pia'inittit'eqiiites qui primnm impetum svxtineant. Cius. B. C. 2. 2G.— 17. Han- 
 nibal tria inillia militum in silvis dispnnit. qui, signo dato, simul omnes e latebns 
 exH-iterent^ Liv 25, 21.— IS. Da mihi aliquid abi condormixcam loci. Plant. Kud. y, 7, 
 13—19 Ouasi \ppius ille Ciecus viam muniverit non qua populus nterctur, ^ca vbt 
 impflne xy^^m^u latrocinarmtur. Cic. Mil. 7, 17.-20. Homini natflra ratinnem dedit 
 nuareaerenturnmmx appetTtus. lb. N. D. 2. 12.-21. Vos nunc quiestiunculam, <f6 9J/5 
 meo arbitratu lonuar, poniti- ? Cic. Or. 1. 22. 102.-22. Medico i)uto aliquid diindum esse, 
 ouoxit studionor. lb. Fam. Ki. 4.-23. Cohortarer vos, q>io ammo Jorfiore exxff is, nisi vos 
 foitinresco-nossem quam quemquam virum. lb. 4. 7, 2.-24. Omnem oratiOiiem attri- 
 buimus Caioni quo majOrem auctoritaiem habhet oratio. lb. Sen. 1, 3.-25. UoctOriim 
 e-t ista consueiudout eis ponatur (a theme is given to them) de quo disputent lb. 
 Am 5. 17.— 2<i. Accusator esses ridiculus si illis temporibus natus esses quum ab ara- 
 tro arcessebantur qui consules^^ren^ lb. R. A. 18, 50. 
 
 ^ 615. The GNOMIC SUBJUNCTIVE (i^ 014) is used: 1) if the relative 
 chitisc restncis the reality of the pkedicate in the principal sentence 
 
 * Anteclassically eaim often occurs as subjunctive present of edere, to eat, especially 
 in relative clauses .)f purpose, as: Mis.-rrimus "st (|ni. quum cupit esse, qtiod edit, 
 non habet Plaut. Capt. 3, 1, 3.- The relative sul>junctive of purpo.se has a double nature, 
 that of uou-reality, and that of virtual obliquity (p. 404, It. as). If the antecedent is 
 
 Druides hahent qui retjux divlnix p,a;xint. neque sacrificiis student ; 'I heGerma s neither 
 lia e Druids prUdinr/ orer reli'iion, nor eic. Ca-s B. G. <;, 21 ( = Druidex nullox habenl 
 QUimvsiut, accordi' g to R. Iti. t)Bs. 7 ; not, as Madvig supposes = Druides id pmsint, 
 
 t, are ex- 
 
 ramas of 
 
 ha statu 
 
 —6 leave their hiding-places. 
 
 \ 
 
560 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 MOODS IN THE EELATIYE CLAUSE. 
 
 561 
 
 Obs. 1. 2); 2) if it expresses quality or modality (R. 20); 3) if it is to 
 the principal predicate in the relation of cause and effect {R. 21). 
 
 Obs 1. Relative clauses restrict the reality of the predication in the principal sen- 
 tence if the facts of the latter are reprei^ented as holdinj; «rood only within the limit» of 
 what 'is state.l in the clause. Such relative clauses, in which often the particles Quidem 
 or modo (at least) are inserted, generally occur if the antecedent is nei?atiye (U. It,, 
 Obs 10)- l)ut they may also refer to substantives not qualKied by any torm-adjeclives, 
 or to absolute indeflnites not negative (as mmes, ceten, rdiqui, unufO or to the whole 
 sentence, conceived as antecedent. Kestiictin- relative clauses generally contain yarioua 
 moditicaiions of the idea •«>• far as known\ and may be generally rendered by ag far 
 as' with a personal pronoun, Veferring to the antecedent, as :Om;jn<m oraforum, guog 
 quidem eqo cognovenm, acuiissimum judico Q. Sertorium ; Of all orators, o-^rtr a.< 7 
 know them (or ' at least of those with whom I am acquainted '), I consider bertonus the 
 most in«'enious Cic. Brut. 4S, ISO.-Fuit Sulpicius vel maxime ommum, quos quidem 
 eno audlenm, grandis orator. lb. 55, 20:3.-Ex oraforibu^ AUMs antiquissimi sunt, 
 guorum quidem "^aipta conste„f, Pericles et Alcihiades. lb. Or. 2, '22 -I nus in hac civt- 
 tate. quem quidem eqo mssim dicere, L. Opimius iiidignissime concidit. lb. best. G7, 140. 
 —If the restrictiii" clause does not express the idea 'as far as known , the predicate is 
 olten round in ihe'indicative (except when there is a negative antecedent, see K. 1»),Obs. 
 10)- a< • Ceteri aiictores. quonnn quidem e-o ^«//i annates, nihil memorabile actum tradunt. 
 Liv 3-i G — U( liquas omuls Gneciie laudes, quiX, quidem erant exjietrndif, studio suo 
 inajOres' in banc uri)em transtulGrunt. Cic. Tusc. 2. 2, S.-Oninia 7'/<r v''i'^*'"J ^^^^^ 
 itidusa sunt, ita locata suat ut nihil eOrum supervacaneum sit. lb. >. D. 'i, 4*, i-:i. 
 
 Ob»* 2 If re-trictin" relative clauses refer to the whole sentence, they are introduced 
 hyquod (p. 515, It. 8), occurring in the followingconventional formulas : 1) W ith the mean- 
 ino- 'as far as known' in the formulas 'quodsciam' (to the best of my knowledge, see 
 D 518. i), quod senserim ' (as far as I have noticed), 'quod exsfet ' (as far as known by record), 
 and equivalent expressions, as : Numquam ilium oflendi, quod quidem ften^enm. Uc.Am. 
 27 \oi~Quod litterU e.tsfet, Pherecydes Syrius primus dixit animos esse hominum 
 sempiterims. lb. Tusc. 1, Ki, .38. These formulas always require the subjunctive, except 
 when quantum is used in place of quod, in which instance the cln'\^« js comparative, 
 and as such not subject to the rules of relative subjunctives. -2) ^^ iih the meanini.' as 
 far as possible ' (to the best of one's alilily), or 'as far as consistent witli somethincr 
 eeiierallv expressed by the formulas quod .. .facer t or fieHposnt. quod fiat (p. 51«, 6), but 
 also by 'quod\s\\\x esse: as: Qmeso. ut liceat. ixice quod fiat tua (if you have no objection, 
 t e 'a- far as it may be done with thy c(msent'), dare huic qnie volumus ler. Eiin. .i, 
 2 13 In the formulas of this kind the indicative (hiture) is sometimes used, as : ru ex 
 cdicto censOrum in Macedoniain redlbis, quod sine dolo inalofacere pottns (to the best of 
 your at)ility. acting in -ood faith). Liv. 43, 15.-Omnia li:ec confixv^^xn, quod ^nlvnhi 
 bomnn afque commodum (as far as consistent with my own good). 1 er. I horm. 1, 2, bi. 
 Com». Cic. Att. 1, 5, 7, quoted p. 518.-3) The formula 'quod in te (nw etc ) e.< = as 
 far as vou are (I am etc.) concerned', as far as it depends '»11 you : being always in the 
 indicative : Sacra Clodiie gentis cur intereunt, quod in teest? Cic Dom. Li, 6\. 
 
 Rem. 20. Relative clauses are frequently used with the force of quali- 
 tative Ut-clauses, and of adveiibial Ut-clauses of manner or in- 
 tensity according to which we distinguish 1 ) relative clauses of quality ; 
 2) relative clauses of manner ; 3) relative clauses of intensity. Each 
 of these three classes requires tin; subjunctive. 
 
 Obs. 1. The requirements of the subjunctive of quality are the^ following : 1) The 
 clau-e must contain facts which are stated with the purpose of deriving trom them a 
 Quality of the irrammatic.il antecedent (Gajus est isquirunnoHfimeat = irii}n^e^t 
 iinnavidu-) 2) The quality must be indicated in the principal sentence by one of ho 
 form-adjectives i.s% talis, ejusmodi, which arc souK-times loft out, but «^e .«hvays //«(^^^^^^^^ 
 stootl. 3) These form-ad jectivi-s must be either in the relation of prediait^-w^iectires 
 the antecedent being the suf,)€ct (as in the above-mentioned example), or in the relation 
 of nttrihutfs to the antecedent, in which instance, however, they mu^t be conceived as 
 kyjicnl predicates {Eas re-< gessit qua defendi uequeaut = His acts are "^l^''^'';"'»^'")-^!" 
 this form the relative clause is virtually the predicate of the principal senteiu e. This 
 logical relation of the clause to the principal sentence must be considered as the giam- 
 matical reason for the use of the subjunctive (§ ()14). 
 
 Obs 2 If any of the three requirements mentioned in Obs. 1 is wanting, the clauso 
 eithercannot take a relative form, or its predicate must be in the indicative, or, if a sub- 
 junctive is used, it canuot be considered as a subjunctive of quality ; as : 
 
 
 1. Animus t.. est quemridelis; copia^ (oae ^"0 J/a? aw|/ts«. • "is ^pint is ^^^^ 
 1/nu */-> • bis resources are >-ych as y(ru hove heard. Cic. Phil. 11, 13. 34 (Here ine iwo 
 r^l.tTvVcl nset not describe 9«a/i^i€. of th- antecedents animus a, d copi<t ; hence 
 he predicite is in the indicaWel-TUn^: Qute domus non ea est quam i.ane tes no^tn 
 S/ 'Anot cinrfant,. lb. Hep. 1.. 13.-Kgo i.; ero qui ::^""^P«''^/'f',,;"*i /«^X*^,3 ^'j 
 11 1' 3-/>mte esse tinue qui si/m {n»x sivi) vgo: Suppose yourselt to be sucfi as I 
 im Here the chuse does not descrzf>e a quality of the antecedent, but deterrnines it 
 Xv'a ^IpaZn^Uh other q.-.alities (i. ././ = tulis qualis). H^nc^e i. ts qut has the forr^ 
 of talis nuali^. the clause must be in the indicative. Comp.Cic. Att. '^^^-^- ,1^"";-^.- '^ 
 2- ib i 12 2* -But • E<'0 isxujn qui illi concGdi p"tem utilius esse quod poMnlat quara 
 sigiiaconterri • IamV/..^m..«..t0o fhiuks (to think) ^'^ rrirX^u ? rs'^See't IiTeI' 
 mauds than to fight ( = I am strongly inclined to peace). Cic. Att. 7, 5, 5. See the ux. 
 
 ^r"BUhvni:r, qum nunc vestra provlnria est, vici exusti sunt complflres. ^ic L. M. 
 2, 4. leJe the ivla.ive clause denotes a g^m/i/y of the antecedent, but it, is ^)"»; «fd can- 
 not be oesi.'nated in the principal sentence by any of 'he fo.ni:«(,ject ives ^JJ(^i^■g^^ 
 modi, as svndet.c antecedents ..f the clause (not: A;«*' Bithynue quie est etc), lluice 
 
 the mood of the cbiuse is the ihdicative /t.u^.,„v „o,»a «o.irh ranse 
 
 3 Improbaniur ei qua^Mus qui in odia hominum in^.urrunt . (Those) irains which case 
 the lati <^- men, are disapproved. Cic. OIT. L 42. Here the clause both denotes a qu dity 
 of I e antecedent and refers to a form-adjrctive is as its syndetic antecedent, which 
 however, neitln" is a p.edicate-:.djective. nor can be logically conceived as such (see 
 Obs 6) ; heuce the mood must be the indicative. 
 
 Obs 3 If the syndetic antecedent of a relative clause of quality is in the relation of 
 a vredc'ae-adkctui or of an attribute-adjective nttached to a jrvedicate-novn, or of a 
 gZuaZ'lqen^^^^^^^ the force of a predicate-adjective, the l.atiii '^^'"«f« ."^^^'^f, 
 Leof thefollowin'-lbnns: 1. Gajus est i-y y//i ,' 2. Urh^e^l ejusmodiquce ; 3. Ghjus est 
 /a i "J^/i ^ u ' T's i"r^^^^ qui ; 5. Hoc est ejus viri qui. These forms are variously 
 
 rSdered l^y' &."iW/,Ma) ,nau ro\ ' the (n) 7nan whf 'suchiu\ 'such asto\ 'such 
 thaC Sometimes diti'.-rent circumlocutions are required. 
 
 A In the forms with is qui, the grammatical antecedent of the clause always is the 
 subiect . f the ent ncet These f-ums are mostly used if the f^'"veri.iuv^ sen.enc^ s 
 
 K^^hrS';SpS^ i-tei^S^iii^^/ivS'^T ^i':r^ f^.^;^^;^ 
 
 /^ foSi^s ?Kmhor?ty o?,.n.ers. Cic. Leg. I 13.-Ego siitn i.^a -^^PO-^j;^^^^ 
 me hac <lidlcisse : I am such a jy^rson (.. c ' my kn;;^^;^.f ^f-'^, ^^ i^.^^»[.,^,^/;;V^ 
 
 ^^/(Krat6iinou<</w|>^sca s Anceuu tjim nocens impflne eripi 
 
 r;!i"/;!' Aw"S\!;rpnf;,tli;;H/r JZ^rmmwl ,!,,,, a dcfunduut .0 culpuhle co„,d be 
 Kn-itched with impuniiv. Cic. Verr, 2, 1, 4. See Ex. 1-8. 
 Tihe folm ejlm mii qui rarel y refcT. 10;,.,««., liut^^mo.^aKvny» t o ...toeeden t. 
 
 Quorum i)riiieeps St)crates fuit. is q 
 
 t In sentences of tl 
 a noun of L'cneral import uuders 
 
 tin ;e;,.„c.^ ,., ,„. ^-«':^B'iii^i'^&'^!^'^^ 
 
 la- 
 
 ,..,„,„ . o„7„, «, i. *;„„„,« • /. and /0/« in Jlji;;}-*-, ion ^■^^^^^'^^l 
 
 the;>^r.s^;rof he verbof the clause does not agree with ''V^\'^'/'« ^'^.^^^V' \' r.^^V 
 pn^lfait' -m.un understood,, but with the pe.-son of the '-^^^^-^.^ ,^^^,?,, ^ j^;;/, 
 ^Homana gens ea est qua^ victa V^^^'^^^'^^ ^Jnerallv do (»o = Roinai.a gens ea 
 predicate-noun understood, as the F«"^™f."^"^^;"',^l,L"^ ^"^ yt ea\ The Latins 
 
 of the English equivalents of these adjectives. 
 
 \ 
 
562 
 
 EELATIVE CL.VUSES. 
 
 10. 
 
 TalL^. as nicdlciU'-adjcrtivc. i?» raroly n^^od ^vlth qualitative Qui-clauseP*, as: 
 i U- t.<<e oDurttt aid tu bonis omnibus {iuctin prabew. (."ic. taui. 10, W.— M qui» 
 lisoui mc vHu'imMiltr a. lOset. lb. Cat. -i, 2, y.-Muie fn qu. ntly ti.e pivduaic- 
 
 — Quic'^i/iil ej 
 
 lb. Ort" 1, 8, 20. SfO Ex. 9 
 
 C. 
 
 ToXe.in 
 
 Sl%^?ttvcSi"!rccuVrwith Vnodal L t-ciausf^V'a'^ l>\}ah^ mut di «f rebus InnuAiiis i/./er- 
 «/i^/ • If the «'Oils aiemch that tbt-y interfere with the Mflairs of men. lb. N. I). .3. 14, 47. 
 On the <.il»e. hand, it is and ejimuodi are predicatively u^ec in the pnmipal sentence, 
 Ut-cl:iu-es more rarily occur than (^n-dauscs, a. : l^ium ille 2.v sit onlior nt nihil eo 
 p.Uit esse pnesiantius. Cic. Or. 3, U, '^l.-Son is es, Caiillna, Mt te unquam pador a 
 turpitudiiie revocarit. lb. Cat. 1, D. . , , 
 
 /; Similar is the consiniction in which U and taJU are attributively attached to pred- 
 icale-nouns, the subject lieinir the grammatical aiitececl.-nt as: E-o vvoi^cmmUqai 
 ooiitiOiiem metuam, (j'd trihOnos pi. bis i^rhorresnim f W ill 1 be .vwrA n consol as tube 
 
 This occurs if tlie :;raminatical subject is an action (.-eferied to by the reut.r hoc\ 
 tin- (lualiiy of which is df^scribed by a relaiive clause releinn- to tlie ciiaracter ot the 
 doer Such relative clauses cannot be replaced by Ui-clauses ; but their predicate. 
 
 ckarac'erof a man wliu in his mind liad travelled through innumerable worlds. lb. Fin. 
 •2,31. 
 
 Ob< 4. Ill this c<Mistruction the predicate-adjective? is, talis, ejxswodi. are sometimes 
 understood a> : I)..miis tst (i. e. ea or tjasinodi) 7'"« "n"' «neilrnm vilianim ctdat ; \ he 
 hoii."*e (on your country-place) U such a< fotje second to none ol my own villas. Cic. tain. 
 6 18 5 —Pieces erant, sed [i. e. e;e) v//j6'/.v C'-ntradlci noii iX}s^et ; It was a prayer. l)Ut 
 s,^chasto admit of no contradiction. Tac. II. 4. 8t. See Ex. ll.-Kor ihe co-orujnaiion 
 of relative qualitative clauses to descriptive adjectives see Ji. 21, Ous. 10. 
 
 Ob-* 5 K"lative clauses dependent on sentences ot the form A of Ora. 3 (Oajus est w 
 oui) have tln^ indicative: 1) if thev do not denote quality, provided tlie sut)jiinctive is 
 not required for other reasons (see //. 21, p. 5(kS. iK.te*) ; as : Suscipe paulispermea» partis, 
 et emu le tsse liii<'e t/i'isi/m er/o ( = think vourscll to be in my place). Cic. bam. 3. 12.— A* 
 erai (I'ti ipsu eain sed.-m roverat ; It was lie who had himsell voted that temple. Liv. 40, 
 34 —I'u es i,vqui me s-cntentiis tuis sa-pissime ornasti ; It is you who have mo>t fre- 
 •cted my interest by your voles on tlie Senate). Cic. F.im. 15,4. II. (See 
 
 has its pedicaie in the indi. aiive, even if it may be conceived as describinv a quality 
 of the subject J. Hence, if there are several co-o rdinate (jui-clanses dependent on llie se u- 
 " * From talis qui. the cotnbi^iaTion7«/i.* qualis must be distiiiiruished, which never has 
 the value of a qualitative (^iii-dau-e, but always has a comparaiice meaninir, requiiinj,' 
 the indicative (See Comparative clauses). Talis qui always requires the subjunctive 
 
 (see Obs. 7, and loot note ti. , , . . . . . , , 
 
 t Som. times relativeclau-es of qnalitv have as antecedents subjects to which a demon- 
 strative (is) referriui: to a prerious sent>r/ice, is attached. In this insiame iv is not re- 
 I)eaied as predicate-adjective, as : /.* erat annus quo Ciesari per l-'jes consiilem tieri licS- 
 ret ( = ^ or hir annus erat is quo etc.). Cies. B. C. 3, 1. The clause 'quo ticeret ' is C(»ii- 
 ceived asaqualiiy of the year by which it came (a-* all other ^imllar years) under the 
 j^eiieral requirements of the election laws in reirard to C:esar. The 
 the indicative would denote a permission referriej; to that year only. 
 
 The same clause with 
 
 MOODS IN THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 MS 
 
 tences of the form A, Obs. 3, those predicates referring to a time anterior to JJat of the 
 principal Pentenceare placed in the indicative, while those belon-in- to the time spoken 
 of, are in the sulnunctive, as : Et reus ui est cut existimatio sancti-sima /wti semper, etjudex 
 est is nutni iios nou minus bene de nobis exislimare quam secunnum nos judicare wfi- 
 mus, et advocatio ea est quam pr.-pter eximiam splenudr. m yereri «''^f-^fi*"^- ^'^' ,^.- ^ 
 6, 1. .-Genus hominum yids erat cui liclM libere f«<^^-'e q"od ^;r'^'"V^^''^A?"i7 ^d?i.?nff 
 Quai paullo ante apud a.iversarios fuevant. Ca's. B C. 2.29. See Ex 12-4.-4) bome- 
 finVen,iit rarely, in relative qualitative clauses of the form ^, not belongin- to any of 
 the mentioned e.xceptions. the indicative is used, as : Ista quidem senteutia ea est qu(Z 
 necjue amicos p«?a^ nee inimTcos iollit. Liv. 9, 3. 
 
 Obs 6 Often the syndetic antecedent 'w' of a relative clanse of quality is in the 
 relation c'.f an atti-ifnde to the jriammatical antecedent (or it may be u*«d «-; «» " J^" " f 
 adjective), the principal sentence havinir an ordinary vert)al predicate. The Latin lan- 
 e i-e oftei. ust's this lorm of the sentence in place, and with the (orceof the predicative 
 fonnsmenth.ned Obs. 3, in which instance the predicate of the clause is generally placed 
 in the subjunctice. The criterion of this ccmstruction is, that i; may be replaced bv tlie 
 predicativ'c form considered in Obs. 3, and that the prin<;ipal Predicate, containing a 
 fact conceived as already kn<.wn and granted, may be relatively attached « ^^1 a"tj'Ct- 
 detit as • Eas res nesse ram quorum m-n unus auctor. sed dux omnium voluntjltis/?/t.s^f m . 
 1 had done ('hoseMhir.gs of which I was not the sole author, but (in regard to which) I 
 ac e as the or-an of The universal will. Cic. Sest. HI. :iS. Here the author does not 
 mean to assert the principal predicate qesseram as such, since the acts relerred t'> were 
 a -edv spoken of \n the previous sentences. But he means to assert the -7«a/t J. of hese 
 acts described in the relative clause, so that the passage is logic>illy equivalent o Kes, 
 5««; qe.seram, e.tfuerant quarum. . .fuissem \ In these co.istructions the ';y"df' f «• «' 
 cedent is (or talis, ejusmo^Ji, see Obs. 7), being always empliatical, and s unMUg, in con- 
 nect On with the'snbjunciv'e, the real meaning of the pa^sHge, >^ ^f,^ ^ .^'j "J' , .' ^^ 
 prose, and always must be understood. UK'lauses cannot be u«ed in place ««/ »^"1«'«- 
 tive clauses unless the construction is first translormed into a construction of the oini 
 A, OBS. .3: as : Non ab frt republica avellar, qua carendum esse dokam ( = «{^^P"^' Vf 
 a nua avellar non est ea qua etc.. or 'non est ea nt carendum ea esse doleam ; 1 he lepuD- 
 fic^ fimn w lich 1 shall be torn awav, is not such that I should be sorry lor being (le- 
 ri\ed of Cic. Fam. (i. 4, \.-Ki mandasti cui ex,,e,nret illml venire quam plurin o 
 
 \L Vir cui ynandasti], est u cui expedlret: He to whom you ''«f^ r/^^^/V^f r^fLi^r 
 a man win.) has an interest in its selling as high as posMble. lb I- am. i, \^--*-^m 
 Vctiiti^n rostra produxit. eumque in .0 /oro constii nit r/j/o Bibulo.cx>nsuli «^P^'^e 
 mm lief re { = loc. s, in <iuo eum cnstituit is erat nt Bifnilo 60 aspn-are non licSret 
 a" .'.in- a place to him \o which etc.. or 'the place assiumed to h.m feeing svch that 
 prcM lb Alt 2 24 3-Tu ifd ems vid omnia scire 7)0..^.s ( = locus, ubi ens, t^^ est 
 Vtm ilc.)^ li) Fam «, 20. 2 *. See Ex. l;Vl9-If relative^lauses^^len^^ 
 heTTc^c^i^^W h^ve tenses reterriug t-. a time anterior to that of tlie principal ^^-'itence. 
 Chmses de ndent <m sentences ofthe form ^, admit these tenses, bit "^''^yl^^'^i^ ^^^^ 
 thir predicates in the subj.inctive.-If a perfect tense in relative clauses of the foim A 
 nc ti< e< the pre'ent time (corresponding to the English present -perfect), it may be 
 placed eiihl^r 1.1 tin. subjunct : A^ enim est ilie tf«t semper voluntft- 
 
 ^^!;^^;!"nunrS1;ei..Sly^t;':ider stibjtinctivos in relative clauses a. qt^itative 
 ..ubiunctiveV aith...i.di .hey do not corresp.md to t)ie requirements ol this rule, as in the 
 S&"A>Hssages(MKiia.NG §704): (^v^^^^^^ in hiatum ^<';^p}^^l.^^^'^^'^'(^^ 
 ferunt faliuho, animadvertit, cujus in lateribus f..res ^'"''^f' • ^^^-^^,^?.;' *^„,,.;, /^/^^^^^^^ 
 ttiis relative clause expresses a quality of the bronze horse. But the quality is siinpiy 
 Ht ?e 1 < a fact vithoiit any predicate force, so that the clause could neither be replacet 
 ?n u n-cl ui V u f cm antecedent ' eum ' bo used, nor could the pnncipa 
 
 uredilvlte •«";;;aZr/i', which is stated as an independent fact be relatujy attached 
 u^-Ueauus' taken predicativelv. The subjunctive essent evidently is quast^obliqne .h^xuj, 
 represe^ el as he^st' enient of the fable.-Natflra nihil habet P'-«^'*'«"';!'^' "' '' '^ .V^ 
 m^X^ exmtat quam honestatem. Cic. Tusc. 2,20. Here the sul)junctivj .ay^/a^ evi- 
 
 3 'rtlv i' ^t a Mibjunctive of quality, but a ' "^7«'^^"f T^'t ^^'^Sh'c;•HmnSr^^ 
 Ors 7 1 -Some -rammarians (for inst. the author of the Publ. Sch. ^' ammar) sa> . 7* 
 o/^ take« tic su1n"unctive if • qui ' is consecutive and indefinite = such a o"f '^at^) but 
 
 ».MUM-ilK' (letihite and the render iil's 'the person ivho and sucn aone inui «'^*;'J' 
 ?n'quelvu?ed without anv appreciable difference. Moreover this nile foes not deter^ 
 mine the instance when^.(, 'Ts ri./ consecutive «^j*^ "\f ««'l^'^.^Y 
 that has most perplexed the grammarians, bee p. 5b8 foil., fool-note j. 
 
 \ 
 
564: 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 K 
 
 MOODS IN THE EEIATIVE CIAUSE. 
 
 56S 
 
 ferrinfrto 'w'.bnt the principal ?ontence does not admit of the transformation mentioned, 
 the indicatire mu?t be ustd, unless tht- subjunctive is required for other reasons, a»? : I're- 
 mt'batur muititado ab eU qui (najOres opes haMbant. Uic. Off. 2, 12, 41, H«Te the prin- 
 cipal predicate ;;rgm^*!>rt^/r contains a new fact, asserted as such by the author, the rela- 
 tive clause liavinir merely a determinative nature, desii^natins: the passive agent. But if 
 hahlbani is chauijed into the subjunctive kabercnt. the predicate prernebatur would be 
 represented as already known, or as mentioned before, wl»ile the statement in the clause 
 would contain the real assertion ( = Homines, qtiibus muititado premebStur, ei (-rant 
 qui niajnres opes habC'rent). — An indicative must als.) be used if the clause, even in the 
 pr<'dicative construction, would require the indicative (according to Obs. 5), as: Civis 
 erat expulsus is i/i/i reinpublicam ex seniltus auct.oritflte defends rat . Cic. Sest. 24. 5.J. 
 — Eid(!ni in eis elabOrant qiuv sciunt nihil ad se pertinCre. II). Sen. 7, 24— In urbe ea es 
 ubi naUi etit ratio ac moderatio vitie (not = Urbs, irj qua es. ea est ut ifd nata nf). Cic. 
 Fam. ti. 1. 6. Compare with : Sed in trd es urhe in qua h;ec vel plura parietes ipsi loqui 
 posse riUeantur. Ih. (i, 3, 3.— Sometimes, however, in clauses of this kind the indicative 
 IS used, even if all the requirements of a subjunctive exist, as: Caio et ea sentit qute non 
 fi&ue probanftir in vul«:ju«, ei in ed est ha-resi quiv nullum sequitur florem oratiOnis ( = 
 Qiiue Call) sentit ea sunt quiB .. .probe ntur ; ha'resis in qua est, ta est qucE. ..sequdtur). 
 Cic. Parad. I'ro. I.—Id enim bellum fjerunt quod ab omnibus m^nxWtVi» pntttdt ur ( = Hel- 
 ium, quod 1,'erunt, id est nt ab omnibus gentibiis probCtur). lb, Phil. 11, 15, ;i9.* 
 
 Ons. 7. Sometimes ^^/t*and ejnsmodi may be used with the force of i* in clauses of 
 this kind (Obs. (i), in which instance the mhjunctire is always necessary, as: Taltin in- 
 juriam aeee|)erant qua/n nulhl leu'e satis difjjne persequi jM'i.^enf. Cic. Verr. 2, 1, :«.— Mild 
 causa talis obhlta est in qua oratio deesse nemini jMsnt^. lb. L. M. 1, 3. Sec Ex. 20. 21. 
 
 Obs. 8. Adverbial IJt-clauses of manner of the form 'ita ut i*' can jreneraHy not assume 
 a relative form, as: Hi ita vivtmt ut edru/n probetur fides. Cic. Am. 5, I'.». This Ul-clause 
 cannot be replaced by a relative clause 'III (ita) vivunt quorum pcobefur fides', which 
 would mean 'Qui vivunt ei sunt ut eHrum fid«'s |)r«)l'Ciur\ But sometimes relative 
 clauses have tiie fore»; of adrt/bial Ut-clauses of manner, namely 1> if the relative y^/o// 
 refers to the whole principal sentence as anteeedeiit (p. 515, 7?. 8i, as: In enodandis 
 nominihus vos Stoici, quod miserandu9n nt. labori\tis; In the explanation of names 
 you Stoics blunder so //m^ it is pitiable. Cic. N. D. l,4i.— .Eta;, uo^iva. quod inttrdum 
 7>'/rfw/, jurisiijnjlia est ; Our time is so ij^norant in the law, tha' it sometime.'^ is a shame. 
 Cic. Or. 1, 10. 40 ; 2) if rehitive duises are coordinate to predicative or attributive de- 
 scriptive adjectives. See li. 21, Obs. 10. 
 
 Obs. 9. Relative clauses are sometimes used to de«^cribe the ' intkssitv ' of a quality 
 referring to their antecedent-. The regular form of diUfes of intensity is that of an 
 Ul-clau-<e,G\-on it the princip.d sentence contains an ant cedent of the clause (p. 4:;7i, as: 
 Tanta vis justitiie est ut ea etiam latrOnum opes firmet atqiie auL'eat. Cic. Ot!'. 2, 11, 40. 
 But the clause takes almost always a relative form in the peculiar idiom of the form 
 'Nemo est tarn Inmus (forlis etc.) qui hoc faciat\ and in eijuivalent constructions with 
 nihil, null us, with iiuerrogatives of negative force, or negative adverbs. These forms 
 are the same as the relative uredicate-clauses dependent on negative anti'Cedents di. U», 
 Obs. 2, 7), and are eraploy«'d to make the statement of the clause more emphatical by 
 denving that even the greatest intensity of certain qualities «)r the indefinite subject 
 caiMiot affect the facts stated in the clause. Such n dative claus«'9, having the adverb /am 
 as syndetic antecedent (which is merged in tantus in place of tam maqnus), must be cou- 
 
 ♦ A peculiar species of qualitative relative clauses are tho-<e wliich designate things 
 by certain quavtitativk properties pertaining to them, for inst.. by their value, size, 
 distance etc. They always occur with a subjunctive, and generally without a syndetic 
 antecedent, as : O societiltem captiOsaui et indignasn, ul)i alter HS quinqiiaginta millia, 
 alter centum millium quitd sit in societiltem ali'ert : And wliere tl»e other party brings 
 into the partnership what is worth (^-f much as 100,000 sesterces. Cic. 11. Com. 10. 2<.* ( = 
 where what the other invests in the concern is worth etc.). — Paucnlis men>iibus lurta 
 prietoris, quie essent HS duodecies ex uno oppido exportati sunt ; Within a few months 
 the pnetor's stealings, which were as high as 6 million sesterces, were sent off from a 
 siiiiile city (= the stealings, which were sent from one single city, amounted to etc.). Cic. 
 Verr. 2, 2, 75.— .At ille, mille et octoginta stadia quod abesset, videi)at : But that man saw 
 (could see) things which were at a distance of 1080 stadia (= the distance at which he 
 couhl see tlnngs amounted to 1080 stadia). Cic. Ac. Pr. 2, 2,').— Nam vir bonus emet de- 
 nario quod nt mille denarium ? ( ^ if what he buys for a denarius is worth a thousand 
 denarii). Cic. Ott. 3, 23. The subjunctive in the last passage may also be relerred to tlio 
 rule p. 555, B. 
 
 t This passage is quoted bv some gramtnarians (Pub). Sch. Or. p. 370) with an indica- 
 tive {iM)t«sf) to prove that talis qui sometimes occurs with an indicative. But all the 
 critical edition?, by authority of the belter codd., give the subjunctive />3iJ#i^ Tuere ia 
 no other proof lor the use ol the indicative after talis qui. 
 
 eidered as equivalents of Ut-clanses of intensity, and hence frequently take the form of 
 a Ouin-clause if they are negative (R. 16, Obs. U) : as: A'mo e.4 tarn senex qm se annum 
 non vufet posse vivere ( = nt se non putet etc.) ; Nobody is so old as not to believe he 
 nii'dit live another vear (the same as 'Nemo est qui se annum non putet posse vivere 
 quanivis sit senex'') Cic. Sen. 7, 21.— In hello nihU tarn In'e est qvod non maLMiae inter- 
 dum rei momentum facial: In war nothing is so insignificant that it might not scmietitnes 
 be of .'reat infinence on the course of events. Liv. 25. 18.— AV^'/« turn reimsso ammo 
 Quifnuam fuit qui ea nocte conquieverit ; Nor was there any one of such equanimity 
 that he coiild sleep in that night. Cses. B.C. 1, 2\.-^ec verot/{/a vis imperii tarda est 
 qu.e preinente meiu }X)snt esse diuturna. Cic. Olf. 2, 7, 2o.-Q>as hmno t-^^t tanta cou&- 
 deiitia f/ui sacerdOiem audeat vioiare ? Plant. Rtid. 3, 2, 32.— Ai/<r/ tarn obsurde diet potest 
 oucMl non dirdtvr ab aliquo philosophGrum. Cic. Div. 2. ^i^.-Netno est torn fortis quia rei 
 novitate/^r/M/^'e/'//-. Cas. B. G. 6, 39. See Ex. n-2S.— lt-clanses are less frequently iised 
 in phice of such ndative or Quin-dauses, as : Nee gum «am stultus ut te usflra falsi 
 t'audii frni velim. Cic. Fam. 6, 12, 1. 
 
 t)B^ 10 Aside from the form mentioned Obs. 9, clanses of intensity rarely take a 
 relative form as : StatuCrunt tantum illud esse maleficium quod «periri illustrailque 
 dtbtret. Cic. Sull. 2. extr. Sometimes taidus is understood, as: Yidi cisternam qucE 
 (i. e. tanta fuit vt) sufficere in usum vel exerciiuj? ;>0e;»6/. Sen. Ep. 8G*. 
 
 1 Equidem is sum qui istos plausus semper contempserim. Cic. Phil. 1, 15, 37.-2. Is 
 enim sum qui vi«'iliis, curi-^, periculis jyerfecerim ut non obstarem reipnbluae. lb. 12, 
 8 21 -3 (ieiius s'cribendi id fuit quod nemo ahjecio animo» lacere pa^set. lb. Att. 12, 
 40 ^—4 Is t'liim fuerani, cui"^ qiiuin liceret majOres ex otio fructus capere quam cete- 
 ris won dubitavt'rim me gravi-simis tempestaiibus obviam /(prre. lb. Rep. 1,4,7.— 
 5 'Non sumus ei quorum vagllur animus errOre, nee hab^at nmquam quid sequatur. 
 li) Off" 2 2—0 Si mod») is sum qui id possim judicare. lb. Brur. 49. 18«.- 7. Aeque 
 is 'sum qui "ravi^sime ex vobis mortis periculo ter?ear. Cits. B. G. 5, .3d.— 8. Aon sumus 
 ei quibus nihil vernm ridedtur. Cic. N. D. 1, 5, 12.-9. Nomen legati ejusmodi esse 
 debet miod non modo inter r-ociOrum jura, sed etiam inter hostium tela Incolume vtv- 
 situr 11) Verr 2 1 ;« —10. Genus ejusmodi fuit criminum quod non totum penderet 
 ex te'ste,'s:ed q'uod jmi'derdret judex ipse per se. lb. Scaur. 2, 14.— 11. Accessit coumiI 
 hortator At aiii consul! Si prudentiam qu:erinius, qui minime falli ;)0,v,v^/; si virtfi- 
 tem rt./i'niillam paceiny>/o^/a/^Miisi .Antonio victo. Ih. Ph. 12, 1.-12. Estne Sthei.ins 
 is r///j omnTs honOres, facillime quum adept us esset, amplissime ac magnificent issi me 
 n^^ssit 2* lb Verr 2 2, 40.— Ki. Hoctes ei sunt qum proximo anno daniore debefiastis. 
 Tac V A"r :i4 --il.Non hostis f-v/ i* cwj^/.'^priesidium Claterna (/-^'ciMlirtius * Cic. 
 Phil 7*8 21 —15 -Majoriluis vestris cum fo hoste res erat'' qm hat^eret rempublicain, 
 curiam', irarium H». 4, 6, 14.-ir,. Prodigi sunt qui }>ecHnias profundum >" f«; res 
 o'idrum memoiiam ant brevem, aut nnllam omi.Ino sint rehcfun*. lb. OIT. 2, lb. 3-5.— 
 17 Cum eo ho-te res e.<t qui he^terno die delendi omnis exercitus lor»flna per soror- 
 diam usus non sit^. Liv. 7. :i^.-18. Manlius prieceps ad id cert amen agitur qm'^ vince- 
 ret an vincerStur, hand multum interesset. lb. 8, 7.-19. Eiat in < ppido conventus is 
 oui ex variis <-eneribus constdret. Cies. B. C. 2, 30.-20. Naiilra dedit tuleyn mcntem qucB 
 omnem virtQtem capere i)Osset. Cic. Fin. 5, 21, 59.-21. 'va/<^.s- viri mitteoantur quo- 
 rum de c(nl^ilio hperSri 7>o,sw/, imperatOres nihil indignum decretflros esse. Liv. 4o, 
 17 —22 Nulla tarn dttestabilis pestis est quce non homini ab homine nasciitur. Cic. Off. 
 2 5 10-**') Quis est tarn stultus cui sit explordtum se ad vesperum esse victarum ? lb. 
 sVn 19 67—24 Nulla gens tarn immdnis nmquam fuit, in qva tam crud61is hostis 
 natrhe 'sit inventus. Ih. Sull. 27, 76—25. Ecquem tam amen/em esse putas. qm illud quo 
 Ve<caiur ileum esse credat .^ H). N. D. 3, 16. 41.-26. A^*m*^wam ullutn peiictilum /o/?/^/m 
 omavi quod subterfu-ere ma/h7n qnam vestnc auctoritati obtemperare. Jb. Fam. lb, 
 1 -27 AVmo est tarn ajflictus quin }>osnf navare aliqmd et elhcere lb 6 1. <.-28. Mwi- 
 q'va m fam male est Siculis quin aliquid facete et commode atcanf. lb. \ err. 2. 4. 4.j. 
 ~*l\vitus quantus is ahvavs u>ed comparatively, requiring the indicative, and is in the 
 name relation to tautus qui, as talis qvalis to tali< qui (Obs. 4). If subjunctives occur 
 with tantus quanfus. they must not be considered as qualitative_ subjunctives, as: 
 Fumenes exeeotus est tdnfo honOre quantum meriiis ejus exvtiuutret debSri populus 
 Runianus (Liv. 42, in, where existimdret is an idiomatic quasi-obiique subjunctive, 
 according to p. 405, Obs. 3. 
 
 1 Bein-' in a despondent mood.-'' See p. 539, 7?. 14.-3 i,ad to deal with.-* In this 
 pas-a<'e"ihe relative clause is conceivtd i)redieativdy ( = If men spend money for 
 hin.'s MAtf^ are of a nature that tliey will not leave behind etc.. they are t^pcndthrifts) 
 —6 The time/x>i«^ of the relative predicate is strictly ;?nor to the time of the principal 
 sentence; but the author has in his mind the time-period or stage of the war.-» in- 
 volved accordiiiij to p. 5-J5, Obs. 2. 
 
566 
 
 EElATm; CLAUSES. 
 
 n 01 Tf -, rolitive clause contains the CATTSE of the principiil preilU 
 
 Kem.'il. 1' "■.'•''l"'^'^. ',,,„:„„ r.mfticntcil as the LOGICAL EFFECT 
 
 icate, the principal ^^^" ™^ ' ''^ "^^,;, ,V ,". '"'i',' ,bc suiuunctive. The 
 
 oflcn be rendered by an ^"K '*!' «"''f' "^.'^^^^^^^ i,aiii, (wilh the KUbjni.ctive, 
 
 ^!.''i;r.uj'.;!ve,' "'^^i:^^^^^ -hf 5ir > .> cau.a. conjunetiun « iU. a deu.„n- 
 
 The coiistniclu.ns in which " \',p/'"'^'V "y ', ;„> ,,^ or on one or the personal l.l-o- 
 
 he (idihouqh. or 'wAo' ) A-«^U' thu., obeyed, «f f ; '^-•'^ , denotin- a fact which theprin- 
 
 B. The relative clause has t'\^; •«•'f.^iVf :^,,^X^^^^^^^^^ to p. 3.S'... It. t.9 [fou- 
 
 cipal sentence de^cn u^ acc.^d n^ o itsm^^ 'c^^^^Hnftted a blunder in m doiug tins 
 
 (u;A.n he did thi.. in ^' "'"i''"^;.^^^^^^^ (Juod-davse after verh>* of pnu.- 
 
 6\ The relative clause take^ the place <'^ ^;, ('f, -^ ^.^ ., yss, Obs. 1, '2 FORMirLA : 
 ing, -censurinir, thank ..|r, .^V/l!!;^'!^' I^-, ^ i'i!^! 4^us A^ haWnf^ said this]. Obs. 7. 
 
 or nndersloodl, bin so Ihnl a ';>'""■' (^'^^^''■.VrriiM.K kmila' : Q'd nilM ejimimli 
 
 re«ient,. (Obs. 1, ^K irenerally den > e '^^ •( .^//;J ..f the causal conjunc- 
 
 principal sentence are/a7?/a?«a/, the earn thc^^^^^ ^ ^^^^^^, .^.^ ,„,,,, 
 
 tion ^V'/m, 8ince.(9'/i = ^''''''\|%5 - /?2ep t i T^^^^^ «Ao (si.ice he) c/irf 
 
 «t/i^/>im/'^7«r, hominem ^"''>'V'^ '\ f h.> mS^fw^ nrirency. Cic. Verr. 2, 
 
 n„/..«.7>^c< anything, began to '''^''}\^\\\l'^'''l'^^^ locus, Komam fe 
 
 Jontulit. Ih. Flacc. 21. 5() - (^'n ( =j;'\"''['^^^,^^^^^^ 1 1 never had par^ 
 
 si^i^^f '!;>?' -v':.K;:;'d^a'-;^- -^^^^-^'^ - ^^'^ '-^ -^ "'''^^^* 
 
 niam), as: SamuTtes, omis-ii? SullcTl^^ Campano- aiorti v^ > ^^^^^^^ ,j^^ 
 
 i,,rf.. i. e. ^6 .i^•) pr*cUB a(que glorue p^^^^^^^^^ ^^.-, t., ,,^ .^tUered 
 
 Sidicini, attacked the Cainpani .ns ff.^^^'.'^'^^ ™ '^'^^^^^^^^^^^^ (/urn 7^^ 
 
 there i from them). Liv 7. f •-^"">^' .' "^'^.[^f V"'^ ahvay. requires the sub- 
 
 sed etc.,. ee p. «take the <""! ."» '^d ^^J^- oc o^ nuliia ten6bat Hantubal, 
 
 junctive. like Quod-clauses of this '^^"Z • ,»^" -^J'^ 'J j.-ulo nu)rtis (/J//W/i.s>>^'^ ^•'^ V"» 
 
 iwnrj.os( = non quod en.) ni acie c.;«^>^^^^^^^^^^^ iJ,.,,, «ooo men, 
 
 ( = sed quod) relict, in V^^''*''- ' ^^/L^ in a t^e o? of anv attempt of th.-irs to flee 
 
 t^omc grammarians doV since .t^^^'V iieUher are P^^^^^^^^\^ /, ^^^^'^^ , evidently equiva- 
 nor admit of a trantlormalion into an Ui-clause. ine ton.uuci 
 
 MOODS IN THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 567 
 
 fn relative cianppp, hy which a catipe referring to a dtffrevt antecedent is pregnantly 
 infitnated. as : I» erat qui ipse earn aedeni voverat gvo die cum Antiociio ad Thermopylaa 
 dejyxiqnanset. Liv. 40, 34 (on the day he had defeated Autiochus, and ffecavse he had de- 
 feated him». 
 
 Often the cnnsal force is not contained in the relative clause, but in its governing 
 clause in which it is inrotred accordiuir to the rules p. 5:34 foil. In this instance, the 
 pr. dicate of the fjovtming clause is placed in the guhjunctive, while the predicate of the 
 relative clause may be in the subjunctive by attraction, as* : Nuinquam laudari satis diirne 
 philosophia potent, cui qui jmreat omne tempus aetatis sine molesiia i^snt degere. Cic. 
 ben. 1,2. 
 
 Obs. 3. Often a relative clause does not assign a cause to the action expressed by the 
 pr.dicate, but to the predication (assertion) as such, repret^enting it as ajoroo/" for the 
 truth oj what is asserted in the principal sentence. The relative in clauses of this kind 
 has the force of the conjunction nquidem (since = seeing that), as: Non est inhumflna 
 virtus neque supcrba, quiE etiam populos universo.s tuCri soleat ; Virtue is not inhuman 
 nor haughty, since it is wont to protect even whole nations ( — which is proved by the 
 fact that it is wont etc.). Cic. Am. 14, 50.— Atticus affliciis semper succurrit, qui quidtm 
 JServiliam, liruti matrem, non minus post mortem ejus quam flurentem colueri.t ; Atticus 
 always assisted those in distress. Thus ( = which was shown by the fad that etc.) he 
 mis not les^ dtvnf'-d to IJiutuss's mother after the death of her son, than when she was 
 in jiro>perity. Nep. Att. 11.— Quid ? Istse mutie sunt qv<x pro se fabulari negveant ? 
 How ? Are those women mute that (seeing that) they cannot talk in their own behalf? 
 Plant. Rud. 4. 4, H9.— Tubero paullo etiam durior, qui quidem jvdicaveiit vacatiOnera 
 augures non hal)Cre. Cic. Brut. 31, 117.— In M. Bruto magnum fuit dedecus generi vestro, 
 ^«iaccusatiOnem/ac/e^ai'^ri/. lb. 34, 130.— See Ex. 10-13. 
 
 Obs. 4. Freqnently the cause designated by the relative clnuse is ADVEnsATivE (con- 
 cessive), containing a reason from which the contrary of what is stated in the clause 
 should be inferred. This force of the clause is frequently intimated by the particle 
 tamen in the apodosis, but often it must be inferred from the connection alone, whether 
 the cause is meant to be direct or adversative, as: Egomet, ^wi sero ac leviter Gnecas 
 litteras attigis.'^fm, tamen complQres dies AthSnis commorStus snm ; I. on my part, uho 
 (although I) had but late and slightly touched Greek literature, yet staid several days at 
 Athens. C'C. Or. 1, 18. 8-2.— Pomptjilui miserrimo ac patientissimo exercitui (Vsaris 
 luxnrienM)bjiciGl)ant,fv/j semper omnia ad necessarium usum defvis-'^ent ;y\\\\c\\ (althou;;h 
 it ; in the face ot ihe tact that it) had always been short of all necessaries of life. Cies. 
 B. C. 3, !M;.— Tu non adluisti, qui diligentissime semper ilium diem et iliud munus soli- 
 tus esf&s obTre. Cic. Am. 2, 7.— Kex Antiochus. qui Komae ante oculos omnium nostrum 
 biennium I'crf. /ulsftet. is., .pneceps proviucia populi iJoraSni exturbatus est; Antiochu:*, 
 vho (althouL'h he) had been two rears at Koine etc. lb. Verr. 2. 4. 30.— Te solfltuni 
 Komam mittebat. qui eadem scire^ f Should he have sent you free to Rome, iclio (although 
 y«Mi) liad a knowledge of the same thinirs ? lb. Dej. 7, 22 ( = He could not have sent 
 you bemuse etc.).— Ut. qui non satis diu vixerit, Hortensius, fat/ien hunc cursum c<infe- 
 cerit ; So that Ilortensius. although his life wa.^ too short, still has finished this career, 
 lb. Brut. IM, :i-2i). See Ex. 14-18.— For tiie combination qui tamen see Obs. 12, 5. 
 
 Obs. 5. Relative clauses containing a direct or adversative cause, have not always 
 predicates in tiie subjunctive. If the causal connection is evident, the indicative 
 ivcrea.<e!i the force of positivene<s of tlie statement, and the relative, in tliis instance, 
 olten has the force of the conjunction quoniafn (which is nor the case, if the relative 
 clause has a subjunctive); as: Constitflta respublica videbStur aliis. mihi vero nullo 
 niodo, qui ( = qiioniam) omnia te giibeniante naufragia metuebam. Cic. Phil. 2, 3G 92. 
 Comp. lb. Ot!'. 1. 32, 118; ib. 3, 2<>. 104. Thus in clauses denoting adversative cause : 
 Contio qua ex imperitissimis constat, /'<7w^» judicSre solet quid intersit inter populSrem 
 civem et inter constnntem. Cic. Am. 2.'). 95.— Atticus, qui pecuniam conferre nolutrat 
 florenti ill: j)arti, abjecto Bruto US centum millia nuineri misit. Nep. Att. 8. 5.— Some- 
 lime^ indicatives a-e used to avoid ambimiities : Clarissimnm virum generis vestri nemo 
 
 ashamed of tiring etc.). 
 
 Obs. 6. Relative clauses are often used with the force of Qnnm-clauses stating facts 
 lent to a causal Quod-clause alter a negation, which always requires a subjunctive, since 
 the relative clause is lo:.Mcallv neirative under an afHrmative form (p. 543, Obs. 2; p. 545. 
 
 a 
 
 mendos * 
 
 >B8. 7). At the same lime tne clauses explain the cause ol the captivity of the soldiers, 
 nd also the reason for the following stiitemeut: 'Eos tenatus uon ceusuit esse redi- 
 
h 
 
 h \ 
 
 668 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 MOODS IN THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 m 
 
 which in the principal sentence are represented according: to thilr inner import and bear- 
 injr (p 3-iO, E. tiy). Such cla .ses» 7nay bi' placed in the isiibjtiiictive, on account of their 
 cau-al character (' in aa much as'), as : Tarquinio quid imputlentius, q>ii beliiim gereret 
 cum ti< qui noii tulerant ejus» 8npirl)iam ? \Vh:it ( =. nothinjr) ic more impudent than 
 (the act of) Tuiqiiin who (in ay much as he) waired a war with iho>*e who had not borno 
 liif* arroi:ance ? Cic. Tu.sc. 6, 12. — M.iriusa tide jUv^titiilciiu' di>cessit, qui optimum civt-m, 
 cujus le;,'aius et»set, in invidiam falf^o crimine adduxerU ; Marius deviated from duty 
 and virtue uhen he\\\\ as much as he, by the fact that he) hy a false char;:e c;ya^ed hatred 
 a'^aiiit't an excellent citizen etc. lb. OH. 3, 2(), 7!). See the Ex. p. 425, a, and Ex. l'.i-21.— 
 But frequently the indicative ViZ^\w^\\\ thet^e clauses' : Errastis veiieinoiit«r, r/vi ( = quum, 
 or quod) n})frastis, vo8 contia cons^ulem popiiiarcin in everti-ndi n-i)ultli<il pt^pulares 
 exi>tiuulri. lb. L. Aj,'r. 1, 7, ii.— In^^rStus (fuit) L. Sulla, qui patriam duriorihu!* remediii» 
 quaiii peric'tla er.jiit, sandvit. Sin. lien. 5, 1«. Comp. Cic. >en. 15, 52, where the codd. 
 are divided between ' procreaf and ' pivcretf.—^ac Ex. 22. 2.3. 
 
 Obs. 7. Instead of completins: Quod-clauses, dependent on verbs of thanliinj» etc. 
 (p. 388, Obs. 1,6; Ob-<. 2), which ahvavs involve a cause, Qui-clau-es are trecjuenlly 
 used. Tliese generally have thtir predicates in the subjimc/ire : Ego te non reprehendo, 
 g(/i ilium ad jedillcatiOnem tuam iraduxens ; I do not bhime yon for having emjiloyed 
 him in your buildinu: operations. Cic. Fam. 7, 2i). 1.— DlctatOrein increpdbant, qui con- 
 pulaium.. .cepiinet. Liv. 7, 25. — Mi^eret tui me, qui hiinc hominem faciiis inimlcum til»'. 
 Ter. hun. 4, 7, 32. See Ex. 21-2H.— Sometimes, liowever, if tiie principal predicate is in 
 i\\i-. present, such clauses have an indicative, as : Doleo te, c/;w,« in ailolcscentiam incur- 
 ri^nisera fortaiia reipublicie. Cic. Brut. »7, *31. This is always the ca«^e if ' giatiam 
 habere' (refene) i^ the principal prediciite*, a;^ : Maximas habfo gratias PisOiii, qui non 
 cogitdvit etc. Cic. Phil. 1, 7, 1.5.— l*ra;ciarum popido h'onu'UH» refers gralium, qui le ad 
 suiuiimm imperium extulii. lb. Ciec. 11, 28. Thus Cic. Phil. 10, 1, 1. See Ex. 27. 28. 
 Comp. Cic. Sen. 14. 
 
 Obs. 8. A relative clause, dependent on a 'general ante'-edent ' (denoting the gen- 
 eral idea of persons or things, or of classes of ^»er^ons or things), may have tlie doul)le 
 function of deteu.minino the general idea of the antecedent, a/id of assigning a 
 CAL'SB to the piincipal predicate. Such general antecedents are mostly expressed by 
 th»; absolute demoutitrative is, ea, id (rareiy by /licur illtf). The predieatoof such rela- 
 tive clauses is placed in the suB.ruNCTivE of causk if the autiior means to make the causal 
 connection prominent. This kind of catisal relative clauses cannot l)e rejdacvd by clauses 
 introduced by causal conjunctions^. They are mostly used if the principal predicate 
 
 * After 'grufia/n habere' ill the present, a subjunctive occurs only for particular 
 reasons, as: Ego vero illi (Lycuigo) maximam gratiam habeo, qui me eil poena muMave- 
 rit quam sine mutuatione possem dissolvere. Cic. Tusc. 1, 42. 100. Here ' /nutetdre' is 
 used ill a figurative sense, = eas leges dedit ex quibus mulctiltus essem. If the indica- 
 tive had been used, the predicate {mulctdvit) would mean that Lycur^'us performed him- 
 self the act of punishing. 
 
 t If the demonstrative antecedent is not deferminedhY the relative clause, but has itself 
 an ordinary noun as antecedent, the moud of the relative clause is treated as if its own 
 antecedent were i noun according to Onn. 2. In this instance the demonstratives /lic, 
 ille, iste are used (rartily is, ea, id). See Ex. 5. ti, and the passage Cic, Elacc. 21, 50, 
 quoted Obs. 2. 
 
 X Relative clauses dependent on the absolute demonstrative w, ea. id. belong to very 
 ditferenl categories, according to which the moods of the clause are difl'erenily treaten : 
 1. They may have the soU' function of more or less detinitely </f/>^77//i/<J/<?7 the general 
 ideaol the antecedent (iMiirl. = 'he who', 'those who', 'that which' ; hut sometimes 
 'such as', 'a man who', 'thinirs whicli' etc.). Sucli clauses liave their predicatis in the 
 indicative, as: Quid potest desideiflre iv cui omnia contingvntf What can a man desire 
 who succeeds in everything* Sen. Kp. »2.— Non is solum grains esse debet, qui accipit, 
 verum etiam is cui potestas accipiendi/'/i/' ( = he who). Cic. Prov. C<ms. 17, 41.— Duces 
 deligunturti qui una cum St'vlor'nt fuerant { = men who). C;es. B. G. 3, 23.— Siepe homi- 
 nes aut tos laudant qtios non deben't. aut eos quos non exjtedit ( = tbost- who. or such as). 
 Cic. Off. 2. 19, 68.— Quo niodo geometies cernere ea potest quce aut nulla sunt, aut inier- 
 nosci a falsis non possunt ? ( = things which). Ih. .\c. Pr. 2, 7, 22.-2. The antecedent is 
 may be used to indicate a gw/t/y described by the clause. In this in&tance the rules 
 li. 20 are applied.— 3. The clause may have the douhle functicm of determining the 
 antecedent ' tV. and <»f assigning a cause to the principal predicate. In this instance 
 the rules Obs. 8 and Obs. 9 are applied. 
 
 Our grammarians liave tried to establish another rule. Madvio, and. after him, 
 Meiring and others, say that if the demonstrative is denotes an indefinite person or 
 thing, the predicate of the relative clause is in the subjunctive, while it is in the 
 Indicative if is denotes a certain person or thing. But so sweeping a rule, without 
 
 «^ 
 
 belongs to the verbs of praising, censuring etc., mentioned Obs. 7 ; but they also occur 
 with other predicates; as: Eoruni constantiam tauddmus qui non turbiilente hnniSna 
 patiantur {o{ those who bear human irials without fr.-tting; i. e. wq praise them /or 
 hearing etc.). Cic. Tusc. 4, '28, 00.— Ex hoc genere est illud quod tu nuper ei qui le ro- 
 f/a^'W/.. .inquisti ; 'Here belongs that answer vxhich you lately gave to one who had 
 ask^d you etc.', the question being represented as the cause of ilie an-wer. or as eliciting 
 it. Cic. Or. 2. <;4, 259.— See Ex. 29-*l. A -eneral anteeedent may also be designated 
 by a noun denoting a whole class of persons or things, as: Ilal)et tamen suos laudatores, 
 qui hac ip-tl ejus sul)tiliiate admodiim V/a'/c/e*//*/; Still he has his own admirers, who ate 
 •n-aily dtHghtt^d by this very nicety o( his (they are his admirers, because they are de- 
 fighted). Cic. Brut. It». tM.— Oppianicus oftsignatores ad cum, qui neque Atinium, neque 
 Aviliiim Hossent, adduxit (' witnesses who were not acquainted etc' ; which fact was the 
 very reason that liiey were chosen), Cic. Clu. 13. 37. Often relative clauses, dependent 
 on'ttie general antecedent i*- (expressed or understood), have the value of conditional 
 clauses with indefinite antecedents (is qui = si quis, or = aliquis, <i i>). Such clauses, 
 which always are to the principal predicate in tiie relati<m of cause to effict, have some- 
 timer' a subjunctive, and sometimes an indicative, as: Non est contra naiflram spobare 
 eum quern est lionestum necare ( = spoliare aliquem si eum necflre houesiiim est). Cic. 
 Off 3 G 32 But : Necpie conamur (\oc(ireeum ulcere qui loqul ntsciat ( = abquein, si is 
 nescii'). 'H). Or. 3, 10. 3S.— Niliil est lam aliGnum ah eo qui alterum conjoiraiionis accilset, 
 quam videri conjuratoium pODiiam lu-Cre ( = si quis alterum accQsal, nihil est tarn ali5- 
 nuin ah eo etc.). lb. SuU, 10, 31, See Ex, 34, 35, 
 
 Ob« 9 By a frequent Latin idiom, relative clauses with predicates in the subjunctive, 
 are attaciied to «jreneral antecedents (mostly understood) relerring to ;>a?/tc///ar persons 
 mentioned in a previous sentence, in order to intimate that, what is stated in the clause 
 in re<'ard to a i)articular antecedent, would hold good in regard to any other person or 
 Ihiif'^in the circnmslances mentioned. Such relative clau>e'- have a causal force in re- 
 card^to the particular person meant ; but they imply at the same time a general assertion 
 holdiiK' "ood in ngard to all. In English they are mostly expressed by participial con- 
 -iniciioirs or, if such constructions are not admissible, by relative clauses with indeji- 
 iiite antecedents ; as : Verres nauarchos vocftri jubet. Qui nihil metuerent, nihil su.'^pica- 
 Ttntur statim accurrunt; Verres had the naval commanders called. Fvarxng nothing', 
 .<?(/.7>fc/i«7 nothing, they directly came. Cic, Verr. 2, 5, 41 (the force of this conslrnction 
 iniv be riilly expressed by the addition of the clause 'a* every one would do under the 
 circumstances ' The sentence, l>esides the particular fact, implies also the treneral asser- 
 ti<.n • Uui nihil inttuit cic, statim accurrit quum ro<dfus est').— Qui nondum physica 
 didicissHd tantum sibi persuaserant quantum natflra adiiionente cognoverant ; Jlavtng 
 no knoidtdge vet of physical science, they (referring to the oldest inhabitants of Greece) 
 believed only what they had learn, d in the school of nature. Cic, 1 \x<c 1, \Z—qut jam 
 ante inimico in nos animo fuisset, multogmvius hocdolOre exarsit : Having been always 
 Xf<)i M of a hostile (lisposTtion towards us. he (i, e. Indutiomams) was »'flamed int«> 
 uh greater an.er by this (new) grievance, Caes. B. G..5. 4, (Comp. Ex. 40.)-Ey6nit 
 facile quodcUs cordi esset : The sod^^ taking an interest in it, it came readily to pass. 
 ( = it came readily to pass! a s every thing does in which the gods t ake a n interest). Liv. 
 anv T>Vher^discrimination, is not warranted by the usage of the Latin authors. In 
 ?he pas^a-es quoted N... 1, the antecedents are certainly • indeflnite', and often cor- 
 r^^.Jml to the\„i^^ indefinite article : still the predicate is always in xhe t?idicative 
 On Z( her hand in the passages belonging to No. 2 (see Ji. 2i ) the antecedent js 
 , I u 't alwav^ /Xi^ and j-et the subjunctive is used. The same is always the case in 
 t riSta.c"riS^^^ ruleois.9.-Madvig tries to establish his rule by the 
 • Ih vi pa-sa.' e^ Obs. 1): Qui ex ipso audissent quum palam multts audtentt- 
 < lou iKM^e ui-^^"^^^^^^^^ q nedam ad me pcrtulCMunt. Cic. Att. 11, S M.^nvio says : Qui 
 j/Sr = ptMso^^^ .uch persons as: '^.a a^/rfi^m/.r won d mean 'those who' 
 ''Ker impmperlv renders '/A/;>ar/i^^ that the Latins did not 
 
 , ake sue I aTSi mVion, appears from passages like the following : Utriimque qui infer- 
 nuiKc MICH « ui^iiiii 11 ; I F »- ^,„r,„.„,j,,„ ^how« that ' (jui infertueie cannot 
 
 di^TiiVt o,,«.-iieimpr.;t>er. C^nnpare : Pictor videt qu(B nos mn vidimus. Uc Ac.2, 2< ; 
 ^ heVL Ilie coneet WdPm*/.. acconling to Madvig's theory, would have to be changed into 
 the improi)er subjunctive videdmus. 
 
r \ 
 
 5T0 
 
 BELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 MOODS m THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 171 
 
 1 ^() Pncrnjitnm ab ho=tibns ita acritor est nt a viris fortibns in oxtrCmfl ppc salQtls con- 
 tVwoTr f cK I" Ih^^ tela jacer^nf, pu-n-lrl «leh.iit ('au'a.nst »' ver.ar e. »Mo 
 
 ?eniste~Acq r« rnr.Te^rrii^ t.. Vern-.), .r/.o'(i. o. altho„.l. be ) own. to have nppro; 
 priaU'd imnuMi.e .nm. by inflictinj; the greatest ^'^l^^^l^P^^^^:^^^'; 1*//^,^^ 43-45! 
 
 r^P nVrT 10- That kin«^ icho...had from his youth considered the heimte a^ th. mo^t 
 See Ft 40 -^SiH ne< si "^ have predicate, in the i.id.cative, as : (^// /0^^'/« 
 
 vidGhnm iit etc. lb. Verr. 2, 3, 18. Sec Ex. 47. 48. . , . ;„ „ jnnir 
 
 ou- in Fn.nnentlv rehitive clauses dependent on a noun a. antecedent, are in a loriir- 
 
 ?onsistere (and aW. to acqnit himself cred,tably in ^»;;,.^ Y.e ^wvudeHc an\ea^ 
 
 -•<•■ 
 
 the adjective by coordinating conjnnctlonP, a?: T{Ki^ ^wwm fieMili^is worf?.', ^^/i (ita m 
 ei) tot s thefinis n.wstitiain iuUmut. conciniintur ; When this is etin? in dolefvlsiiaius, 
 mm to nil whole audiences with sa.tne?.. Cic. Tusc. 1, 44. lOfi.-Multi vuineraiu etiam 
 Qvo^ vires .ansnisqn.^ desererei.t, ut intra vallum caderent iHtebantur ( = etiam ey/^t tta 
 rnlmraii erind vt eox etc), Liv. 25, 14. C:omp. Cic. \err. 2, 5, 27; ib. 28; ib. 2, 4, 51 , 
 
 ^V."^ Re!mi\n'^*'laii-es denotin£r;)roof with regard to the use of the preceding adjective, 
 do Vint takec(.r)nlinatinirc()iiiuMrti(Jns, as: Kepcntead me venit Heraoluis, homo nobtu, 
 nui wicerdos Jovis fuis^f (the hiL'h standint; of Heradius heiny; proved by the fact that 
 he had been a pri.At of Jupiter.) Cic. Verr. 2, 4, r.l.-Isle norm astronomus, qm non tani 
 ciPli ratinnem quam cselilti ar-enti daceref. (the clause explaiuing the reason for applying 
 the attribute noi-vs to the noun lutronoinus). lb. 2, 2, 5, 2. Comp. Cic. LaiC. «, 1».— ^ee 
 
 '^H.'lative clauses of this kind (Hare mostly used to explain adjectives which, with 
 lli.ir .'oveniiii" nouns, form an elliptical kxci.amation. as : O wrwm ><tm)Mc€m qui nos 
 nihil celet : Mfdenfem, q>n Hervieudum nece^sitiTii putet ! Oh, for the simple-mindt-d man 
 who does not conceal anvthinir fn.m us! Oh. for the wise man who thinks he must sub- 
 mit to neco-sitv (make the best of it) ! Cic. Or. G9, 23().-Me viistrum qvijaow adjj'enm ! 
 How unlortunate am I, that I have not been present! I))- Fam. 3. l^ - ^ /%'«"^\^^o- 
 lescens uui tu;e virtOtis Homerum pnccOnem invefei-iS : lb. Arch. 10— ^ee tx. .'* &». 
 
 Relat'ive clauses explainiiij; a preceding adjeciive by addinir a proof, often have their 
 predicates in the in.licative. as: Quam rem pauci impedivCrunt, can avaritia, qin0>^8 
 omnia vendere mos eraf. Sail. Juir. SO, 5.-Ofor(uudta «nors, 7;^« nati.ne debita pro pa- 
 trill e.f potiss^imum reddifa/ Cic. Phil. 14, 21 See Cic. Or. 3, 27, and Ex. 59 
 
 If relative cliuses referrini: to precediii<r descriptive adjectives helouL' to none of the 
 
 preceding catejK.ries (A. li. C). they have their predicate in nwjndicafive as: An imi- 
 
 ilri d.'iiemus a'Tos /V=/'/i/f^\ qui multo plus ederunt quam acc^y>t/v;//^?' Cic. Off. 1, 1^. 48 
 
 Lll.'-e the clause contains a y/.a/i/y of iho ag7i /ertUe^, but not a quality ol the agn , 
 
 coOruinatk to ftitiUx]. See Ex. GO. 
 
 Ors 11 Relative causal clauses frequently assign a caupe to some intermediate predi- 
 cate i„ the mind of the author, which must ho.s>tpi>lied. in order to acciuit for the use 
 of the Kubjunetive. as: Oppianicus L. Clodinm, pharmaeopniam circuinforaneum. r/^i 
 "ivr^m"i"/7/<'/;//n/>i.J/. a--reditur,et cum eo. . .tranngitj Opp.anuus app ud to 
 n diu a peddler in drugs, n'ho h<idj>,xt come by chance (p LarinuuK and concluded he 
 hir ill wi h him. Cic. Chi. 14. 40 (Tiie intermediate fact is 'Oppianicus made use of his 
 ca'ual pr..s. nee. and concluded etc.').-Quod quum Percrebrmsset Pythius quidam y^.n 
 nrr/erdarunn facfiet Svracilsis, ad coenam Canium mvitfivit. Cic. Ott. 3, 14, 08. { 1 tie 
 fn[cnnSe'fa(Tis.that Pyti ius, in consequence of his businee^ as money-broker, 
 • Si ^^^e^^^^^^^ resident, so that he might claim 
 
 tl ^ri h to .vitehim per tot annos HierOnem et Gelonem nee ves is 
 
 babitu nee alio nlloinsigni(lifre.eniTs a ceteris rid/^w«^ conspexCre purpuram ac dia- 
 d? . I iv 24 .5 (Tiie Sviacusiai.s ' were amazed ' to see purple and diadem, nme they 
 h^ never see,', Huh badges of royalty even with their own k.ni:s).-Socii naySies ad 
 li;! populandum a^^rum Nuce.Tnum Vro.ecti P-xim s raptim ^^^^J^'^:^^. ^ 
 n,f narljs' es-X'f loii'dus proiriess , excivCre hostem. Liv. 9. 3.\ [= 1 he cre\\s 01 inc snips 
 St)iX Plundeie r the ivj^^^ next to the shore ' by tvhich they exjmed hermelves to no 
 K.;*'S/?r.thevc.mld«afelv return from there to their ships: but going farther 
 U e -^arou'^^d th. eiiem vl. -Sthebiu«. <iui Romarn ;>^7^'^i^*«^ on^";f,9"« {'.f 'i^JJ^^ ^"^ 
 et idacabil'Ora quam ! limum pnetOris, rem ad amicos suos detulit. ^'«-^ ^'[- *; f' f?; 
 Sum V ' 0« Jrt.j/ pnPtrn-i \ to which the relative clause ^gmjierteni^et, et habnuset 
 r<sH -^b M-a /Ic^ -Homo, cpn semper ita palam dicfifa^set, pupiUos ceiiissimam praedam 
 e.!"- rXrib'i".,;ptmumnei<.tiu,nVibi in «inum obiatum esse ^''f.^^b.^Jhi. H, " On ' 
 ^0 (Sui ulv • ' mrnn non est, Verrem dixisse, optatum negoiiuin etc' To this the Qni- 
 ctai s:!*i£lgns thernson).-bipln.na sta.im non -t datmn qrK>d est "3^'"? eVaTr'%! 
 ill (iiiihu-dam (nd f>dissent acerbius veniam tibi dan. Cic. tain. 0, li, J. lleic aiier gm 
 Z!^'l!^cuuivclL link «who caused this delay' must be understood, the reason 
 
 ^'^oSmelrubjiuftv^iia'it^a^ 
 
 nie, " • ta uUseq^'fnt s.nte.ce.^. as : Atqui ille apud Acciiim pastor. 9';^ na .m 
 
 n I una 1. me ridi-ssef. ut procnl vehicuUim Argonamarum conspcxit. boo mo-io l.-qui- 
 r I c Cic NO 2 35. 81». Here the niative clause ( = • being a man who had never 
 1 mm; a vesiriu.fortr') explains the import of the .emarks quoted in the snbseqnent 
 . , iV, i/w , mviiici e o^^^ 1 vaii.-tate conxtaret, FontPjus pnefuit. 
 
 l^?c S7e" i' "3! (Here ih/ the future argument which the 
 
 "-* Here theT^^nn^^^ti^'link 'which were so situated ^/ia< they could sal ely retreat' 
 might be supplied, which would make tlie relative clause a clause of manner. 
 
 ^ 
 
572 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 MOODS IN THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. 
 
 573 
 
 author is» soinj; to derive (subsequently from the ' variety of the iuhahitants ' in favor of 
 the accns?eii*). . ^. 
 
 Sometime^ relative clauses have the subjunrtWe on account of some inner connect-.on 
 of the fact star.d in ir with the fact? ol the principal *^entence, the nature of which con- 
 Section iiletun.-xplained, as: Mirabiit. quod eo ip^o tempore ^./o^r./ indicuun con- 
 duration s si-num Juvi* cullocahatur. Cic. Div. .>, 20, 46. Here l\^e coincidence of tvm 
 oMi.e facts i^n both propo^iti<)ns, is reprt-eented as a proof that there niu«t be gome 
 innt-r coiuuctKm between thi-m. 
 
 Obs 12 Frequently causal relative clauses are used in connection with cnnjunctions 
 and particles. Such combinations are quipiie qui, ut qui, ufjxfte qui, prizserttm qui, and, 
 
 '^I "0^;^'i^;i (^'StSi'lfTi^nee they, since I, etc.) represents the priticipal sentence 
 as a .^elf-evldent consequence of the facts .tated in the clause. C.cero «lw»i>.t uses the 
 snbiunctive in clauses iiitn)duced by quipp^ q>a. In auteclasMC.il style ij/:'^^ .< ''"»^^» 
 ZTnmeriUly: \n Livy o/Y^", and in Sallust a///aj/.<, construed with the indtcattteX (in 
 
 Cesar the combination guippequi does not occur) : IIos libros non contemno r^uippe quos 
 I^mnmmm /^^Hm Cic TUSC.I3, 7.-C(mvivia cum patre non inlbar Ko-cius, outpfM! 
 «;;iT in o^^^bium f uidem, nisi perraro. nniref. lb. K. A. IS. Hut : Qnippe q.il certo 
 
 ?^o "Plaut^ffic T ? ^X-Q o ni'^^uVi;;; Pe;;:eus ho;tis judicargtur, quippe quem per 
 f?nuia .-ral^a i i^^cllMa^ Liv. 42, 18.-Impenltor omnis lere res asperas P^>r .Iu|iur. 
 
 tl a a-^^^^^ neque consilium, neque incept.iin ullum ^'•"^tra .ra^ Na bJuo;. 
 
 ruaui at 1 <.,/<'// y 1 ^ 10. and often.— See hx. bl-b-J.— 
 
 LmeHne- np'aS^o? reh'Ve cfa^.s^^^ partilipKd claux^ is c<,n.bi„ed ^\ih quippe. 
 as : Es! hoc haud ni.nis amj.lnm. qmppe concedentibas Komam aiput Uitii esse ( = nobis 
 
 amnlum nuinpe Qxiconceddtnus). Liv. 8, 4. ,, , ^ . ^ , a;i ««^ 
 
 ^>rtQ>n has arisen from ut i* q>d = ' as a man (won d do) who etc.' ; as : Ad eum 
 venit Dejoiarus evocAtus ut t.-» qui senatni par?re didm.^^ef &s a man (would d..) who had 
 le r, e( 1.0 obey the Senate. Cic. Dej. 5. Vi. Tliis ' i.< ' is almost always understood, and 
 Lenm lirr.i»v«'-nts the clause as applying to every <.ne besides the a;'t*"V^den under 
 fbe circumstances mentioned in the clause. Clauses intro. need »»>'. V'7 " . »• ?i^fw 
 i^lsuSmcfire: but the construction (except in its ori-.nal form with id i.qui),aoe^ 
 iiotSr in Cicero Ut q"i is generally rendered by ' since he, they, etc.', or by a parti- 
 cipi;.^^ construction: as : ^aiqufnius ad jus regni nihil P-J- ^.m lu^bcbat j./^v^^^ 
 Donuli ius-u neque auctor bus patribus rer/nurtf. Liv. L 49. See h\. h\. h.).— JsouRlimca 
 futhne-atiVe clauses) ut qui is used in the- meaning -ailhough' as: ^am, utqut ne 
 aUeri nurdem exercitu se 4d cer.amen credldisseat pares , adyenientem > Hnnum 
 a -recU tur Liv. <>. 4:i. Sometimes it has the f<.rce ' a.< if he etc.\ as: Prima uce sic 
 crcastr ' rofic toir^t vf quibus e.'<set j)ermd.'<um (as if tiiey were assured. 1. e. as per- 
 SuswoulHa who are assured etc.^, non ab h..ste, sed ab homine amic.ssimo consdiuin 
 TwinnT Ces B G 5 31 In this sense velut qui. qumi q„i, famquam qui nn^ ^onietinies 
 
 sed: Taf^ntlni^Vi./destitQ.i, ac non qui ipsi ^^-('.^''^^'^^''^ ^r-'S* plait"'S ^^^ 
 Liv 8 27.— Meo all.iratu venit, 'Z'/a^ 7"» aurum mihi /erre^ abs te. 1 laut. Irin.j, ^1». 
 _\lius Jiccinit fa>^iidiOse. /a/Ato>mm 9'/i '/ica<! etc. Sen. Ben. 2, 24. ..... , 
 
 •^rV,^/^ J /ill- the force of ut qui (' since he ' etc ). being construed with the sub- 
 iiinctivef- ffius,f ater .0ns, T//y>o//r/«iperegre d^puqr.mV, faniiliam ducit:II.s brother 
 Ttciu^ ^incel^^^^ at »''« »'^-'"l.".* '"f l^-x^x-l-I^J^l- Cu-. Phil. 
 
 Lt.c u ._mc. ny.a .^ ^^^-^j,,,,-, „,ed =. ita vt.or ita 4, in the meaning 'provided 
 that ' fsimilinrem mulierem magisquc eandem, vtpote qua! nou sit eadem, non reor deos 
 
 ^Tp!^^im'Q>!il^pr^^r^^ «^«- ' especially since he, you etc.) in classical 
 
 lAmrmC^c is ^»11 "rued with ihciubjunctive : Nemo adfuit, ne hic quuiem Hortensius, 
 ISS'/^J'/Tilium solus ant^ de4m.dtu defendi..et. Cic. SuU. 2, -Valde m etuo ne 
 
 ♦ ThiTSiidTti^previous ^entence, and many similar passag.-s. are generally under>tood 
 «« enu V ilent to Ut-dauses of quality (althou-h Ut-clauses couhl not be used in the r place). 
 SuTexi luittonsex ain nothing, since the question will arise, «/^y the author co,.- 
 ci^hecl s c cKes a^ qual.tafve tjt-clauses. and why, for instance, in a relative clause 
 hutm irate vprecetiing the last pa-sa-e. which expresses exactly the same thought, 
 a Si/^ i^ u^ed (• Gallite FontCjus priefui». qu(t cousta ex eis generibns hondnum 
 Siec Tie reason that in this'relative clause the indicative is used is evidently 
 because liere the author states a mere fact, while in the next i.assaire (qu<.ted in the text) 
 be repeat- tm. sa e 1^^^ in order to show its importance for the subsequent d.'lence 
 
 t iK Cic Mil 18, 4 (quippe qui obvius ei futflrus non erat) the reading is doub ul. 
 
 1 Lvvuse^ the indicative with quippe qui about as often as the subjunctive. 1 he sub- 
 iuLVive Sccuis for instance in 21, m! 2(;, 31 ; and :37, 20. -For pariicula.s about the u^e 
 .!tv,»/i»»e see D 688 foil. For the derivation of <7Mi/J/>^ see p. 7U>. 
 
 S^iu Cia Att-aTS, 4\Utpote qui nihil contemuere soremus), the reading Is doubtful. 
 
 fri^-eas in hibernis, jyrcesertim qui sagis non ahvndAris. lb. Fam. 7, 10, 2. Sec Ex. 66.— 
 With the indicative, it sometimes occurs in Planius, as Rud. 2, 1, 2. 
 
 5 Qui tiwien generally represents the principal smfence as 'concessive' in regard to 
 the clause, being ren.iered by who however', 'which however', or by althuush . 
 with restrictive meanin-, as : Perturbat me etiam ilhid interdum, <?worf /am€//, quum 
 te peniius recogndvi, tiinCre des:no ; Sometimes this, too, disturbs ma which, however 
 I cease to fear when I thoroughly examine your character. Cic. Dej.2, 4 ( = althougU 
 itdisturbs me, I cease to fear when etO-Sometimes a clause introduced by «?wt tainen 
 has the force of a concessive parenthetical sentence, restricting the predication of the 
 Drincipid sentence by a 'concession', similarly to quamquam U used as co-ordinating 
 {•oniunction (See ' Concessive clauses ') : as: Alter, qui <amm se continuerat, senseraf. 
 tautum aliud atque homines ex-pectabant ; The other one, although (I cannot deny 
 that) he had restrained himselt, only felt diflerently fnmi what men expected. Cic. 
 Sest. 53. 114. -Sometimes qui fatnen approaches the meaning of a concessive subordina- 
 tin<' conjunction (almost = et^), as : Csesar dixit, ejus hostis periciilum factiim esse 
 nuper in Italia, servlli tumultu. quos tamen aliquid usus ac discipllna, qu:e a nobis accc- 
 pissei.t, sublevaient ; That tnis enemy had been lately tested in Italy in the war with 
 the Slavs, althouqh the^e had the advanta-e etc. C;es. B. «. 1, 4(».-<;^«t ^a?»^;? generally 
 stands with the indicative, unless the relative clause as such requires the subjunctive, 
 a- • Fnit miiiftcus in Cra-so pudor, qui tamen ( = ita tamen ut is) non modo obesjet ejus 
 oratiOni. sed etIam pHides.<et. Cic. Or. 1, 26, 122. -Si vt;_tusium verbum sit, quod tamen 
 ( = ita tamen ut id) consuetQdo fcrrc]H)s4t. lb. 3, 4:3, 170. 
 
 1 Homo oui semper hospitalissimus nostrOrum hominum» existimatvn emt, nohiit 
 videri IMbVium invliusdomum suam recepisse. Cic. Verr. 2. 1, 26.-2. I aUoni.is. ^//1 
 le-em nos^et. et nui non putartt sil)i expedire ita accipere. neg^at id sibi debCn. lb. 
 '> 1 TA -3 Neque spes veni;e ab ScipiOu.- erat CeltibCris. quern, bene meritum de se-», 
 in AfriVam op|ni-natum venissent. Liv. :i0, 8.-4. Itaque jam J» Tuscu lano Q.a i.ou 
 vmninUsem, me jam u-um isto pr.uemio. conjCc;3 ui in lilum lib.um quern tiln misi. 
 Cic Att 16 6 4—5 \^U\qui j.im illain pr.t'dam rf<^iwww/, commotus e^t. lb. \ err. 
 2 1' .51 — ♦; Volcatius animo aquissimo nuinmos atiei t. qui nihil amitteret. In. 2, i, \.i. 
 — 7'lnde barl)ari dissipaii, quihux nee certa imperia,nec duces e^>e«^ yertunt I'.'y'*-'^""} 
 iusuo» I 7 24-8 Turn «lemum Titurius, qui nihil ante ;>ro^wdi.'.*^€^ trepidSre et 
 concur^are-'atCo'tta, r/./i coqitasset luec posse accidere, nulla in re commflm salflti 
 dee.T C:U. B. G. !>,:«.-«. I'rimo mirantur onyies improbua.ein. .f'^'d-, J"^;« ^^» 
 no<sent vidObant adi<ctum esse oculum hereditati. Cic. \err. 2, 2, 15.— 10. Attitus 
 niHG ;,m onsulu.n pnefectQia^ deiatas sic accepit ut ne.uinen. in provinciam sit con- 
 secfit.s- oui ne cum Otiintu quidem CicerOne roluent ire in Asiam. Nep. Att. 6.- 
 1 inni^al .rius anitn^.n. qu^fm odium er.a Komanos deposuit ; gi.t quidein, quum 
 patria pulsus 'esset. iMMnquam desfiterit an.m<, bellare cum 1/;;"}^"';«; !'>• l^^%\ %- 
 12 Sit utn nanus mentis. O"icond)tioii<iu banc />;;'/rf?('.««.?' Plant. Inn. 2,4,54.— Li. J>e 
 que Ic f. 'irJa Pientissinuim ngem Philipi)um, qui Aristoteiem Alexandro Alio doc- 
 ?arem ac.fcnX Cic. Or. :3, ri.^ 14i:'-14. Ego, qui ab i'-eunt^ acta.c. tnceru^us essem^unho 
 Crassi, v.rbum ex eo numquain elicere potui de r» ^"^^<i'%"^''- .1''' \'r^s',; '.iTi»; „^1 
 tuip. qwv illlus oausa>.nihil />7-o./^.s-,s-./^/, reponuntur. lb. Verr. 2, 2 6. -16 ^" P.''-'"^' «^ 
 in eadem ir.vidiie llamma /vi^w/, hos in t''''"»atu spoliSre inst tu t lb On 
 17 Vera oui in foro jiidiciOque ita verser ut nemo plures causa» deleideiit, et ^?nomne 
 
 enums ?n his sn,dfis"U.3?m«m, tamen quo die mihi ^»^^"^{""^,'^^^"7,;;;' r/JiTii 
 moveor animo sed etiam toto corpore perhorresco. lb. Cac 13. 41.-18. itaque, qui 111 
 naUinaceebrirae atque in ociil s civium quondam rixenmm, nunc abdimus nos, 
 u u i^m licet II) Oir 3 1. 3.-19. At btulte fecit (R.-gulus) qui non modo non «;j^/6- 
 W cap vorredimendos verum etiam dissuaserit. lb. 3, 27, .lOL-20. Sed tu in re mili- 
 •iri multoescau i'^m^ in advocationlbus*, g;/i neque in Oceano natSre vduerts 
 ne?iiu s eciare essed2rios5. lb. Fam. 7, 10, 2.-21. Ego stulta multum, q uce cam hoc 
 »11,0 t-ubulem PlaiU Mil. 2, 4, 18.-22. Corporis nostri raagnam natflia vuietur habu- 
 "le rino. eur'o^^ i" q"^ esset species honesta, eam posvit m 
 
 rrtuiiM Vr oVl 3.^ 126-2.3 Credo ego miseram fuisse Penelopam, g?/ce tamdiu 
 ?r JS o'<I.lv;i.'Vh;m:'stlVh. tu L-24.'sic vest., ista P-videntia re,.rdiendenda 
 qn^ ra.iOnem dederit eis quus scierit ea perverse "''aros .^'c ,N. IJ- 3, 31 '8 2o im 
 Sacnlm.-.n exsecrabantur, qui vcrrem« tam nequam reliqvtsset. I'^- )e|r. i 1,4»,. 
 oifllo o Li'Mirem accusare c«pit. qui tam diligeus, tam attentus esset. lb. 2, 1, 48.- 
 2lMaiunai"tiKg.at'a^i.^^^ 
 ^-Tf tv^-[,i7;^hospitable toward (mr citizens.-» alttiouoh he bad well d^s^rv^-^^^f ,»^':"J- 
 -3 1 rn^eiTei ft in that book which etc.-* in your 1^^-pract.ce^ Cicero jvro^ 
 
 Sled of gladiatorial shows.-» a boar, being an allusion to Verres's name. 
 
 -i' 
 
674 
 
 LOCATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 576 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 ted quill maximogandiofrnerCmur. lb. Ph. 10. 1. 1.— 28. Bnnam c^tqnodhaboacirmtiam 
 iiiilii. (/Ill lu ex iii-ul-o salsiitn /ki operjl meji. Plaiit, Kiwi. 2, )i, ii.— 2H. Uiucs to^ lau- 
 davisMs (/ui contra ilium b-lluin su^cept'^.sefif. Cic IMi. 5, i. 3. — •H). Socrates t;i>- gut luec, 
 qiiie iiii.ic no- quajriimis, f/ ad are/it, comiuHue iiomeii (philo^opbOnitii) eripiiit. lb Or. 
 3, IH. t)0.— .il. Homo, iiiiiulcus /a.v qi/i recV assent^, hw^^li8 oinniOus (jid arc/a//Hissen('\ 
 exarsiii iracuiidiil. lb. Verr. 2, 2, 20. — 32. Noii iiii^rati, eed mi.-eri (enmt ei) ijuibiifi red 
 dere salfliein. a quo acceperaiit, iion /ifer«?/. II). Se.-^t. 57, 122.— 33. (^ui potest tempe- 
 raiiriarn laudjlre is qui fpnuit siiminiim l)onum in voiupl5tc? II). Ott". 3. 33. — 34. Usee qui 
 vidtat. iiDiiue cou'iltur eoiiliiCri deos esse t H). N. D. 2, 4.—;^. Has episjolas qiii Ugat^ 
 noil mult urn desideret historiam illOrum temporiim. Nep. Att. Hi. 3.— 3(>. (^wi' adolt-s- 
 Cfiis iiibil nisi gravissiine J'eceHl, is? eil leljlte saltjlvit 1 Cic. Dej. 9, 27.-37. i^ni^ ex 
 calainitjlte senatOris I*. U. «*polia doinuni referre auxus «/, is ullam calamitaiem poterit 
 deDivetlri ? lb. Verr. 2. 1,5!). — -'JS. Cupiditiltes qui possuiit esse in to r/wi^ ruri siempor 
 fiabitdrit? lb. 1{. A. 14, 31).— 3!). Noii illo otio fruor quo di'l)ebai w qui'' quondam /X7>€- 
 risset otium civitiiti. H). Off. 3, 1, 4. — 40. Hac impulsi occasiOne. qui jam ante se P. 
 R. imperio siibjectos dolertnt. iiberius atqiie audacius de bello consilia inire iiicipiiint. 
 C';es. B. (J. 7, 1. — 41. In eo qui"^ ad D. lirutum obsidione liberandnm proftclusnf. tiuiere 
 mm del)Gtis, ne raemoria maiu-ar doinesiici dolOris. Cic. Ph. 5, 18, 51. — 42. C^uia qui 
 barbaros homines ad bellum i/iip'^U'-ret, noii detiebat miiuiere illDrum suspiciOnem. 11). 
 Sull. 13, 3<;. — 41 Qui chiroKrapba"* Cjtsaris Ufftiidisxet lucri sui causjl. i> legrs C;esaris, 
 eu-que pra.'ciilras, iit r<nipublicam concuiere possit, evertit. lb. Ph. 2, 42, 109. — 
 44. Qui in sua Vii fuisset egenti^simus, erat insolens in aliCnjl. lb \i. A. 8, 32. — 15. Et 
 qui se arK'in dicendi traditilrum etiam c\i\<ir\» profifeilfur, ipse omnibus judiciisvictns 
 est. Ii>. Fiacc. IS, 42.— 40. Prope inspeciautibus v'obis classis en rui consul P. K. pne- 
 positus esfief, a pnedonibus capla est. lb. L. M. 12, 33.-47. Mihi permlriiin accidn, tan- 
 tain teineritjtem luisse in (O adolcsceiite cujus ego salflteni duubus capitis jiidiciis i/e- 
 ftudi. It). Faui. 3, 10. 5. — 4i. Qui reus pridie jam ipse se condemnaium putCihat, is 
 po-teilciuam defensor eiiis consul est factus, absolvittir. lb. Verr. 1, 7, 20.— 4'.». OiatO- 
 lem per/K'tu/n. et cui nihil admodum de^nt^ Demostheiiein facile dixi'ris. lb. Brut. 9. — 
 50 L'giOni Mt-ssaUa pijeeiat, claris majoriijus. (gnf/ius ipse, et qui soitisad id bclium 
 arils l)onasa//''//i^>'e/'. 'I'ac. H. 3 9. — 51. Tyneta abe>i a Carthagiiie XV' millia passiium, 
 locus quum openhus, turn suapte iiatQra futU{<,et qui a Carttiaiiim; conspici et i)::o- 
 bCre ipse conspectum in mare uriii jx).-<,sit. Liv. 30, 9. — 52. Erant in ejl \i'<^\oue/or(issimi 
 viii, ceuturiOnes, qui ( = ita f^irtes ut) jam primis ordiuibus«y>/)ro/*i//7'/(7;v-«/, T. Piillo 
 et L. VorSnus. C:e>. B. G. 5, 44. — 53. Me impedit pudorab hoininum omnium irravis- 
 simo, qui genus liujusmodl dispuiatiOnis semper coufe/npserif, luec exquirere. Cic. 
 Or. 1. .35. — 54. Est vera lex recfa ratio, iiattlne conff^rufns, cotiMaiui, seinpittrnn. quiE 
 vocet ad ollicium jiibendo, vetaudo a fraiide U^tfrreaf. lb. liep. 3, 22. — 55. Hoscius hunc 
 ■mif^truin, qui iiondum paterno funeri justa solvittsel*, ejCcit. lb. It. A. 8. 23. — 5f). O //#is6- 
 runi scnem, 7'/i mortem contemiiendam esse in tam loiigS jetfite non ridtint .' Cic. 
 Sen. 19. — .57. O marpui vis verit;Ttis, qu^e contra homiimm calliditiliem facile se per se 
 ipsam deftndat! lb. Ciel. 20. — 58. Me Ctxcuni qui h;ec ante lion videriin! lb. Att. 10, 
 10, 1. — 59" O solem ipsum btatissiinurn^ qui, antequam se abderet, lugientem ridit An- 
 tonium ! H). Ph. 14, 10, 27. — 00. (^tiintus etiam C;epio (in numeio disertOrum est habi- 
 tus), \'\racer(itforfi't,C"i furtflna belli crimini, invidiapopuli calamitatiy*(/i/. lb. Brut. 
 35, 13"). — 01. Mihi (piidem pcstifera vidCtur tribunicia potestas, quippe qiue in seditu'jiie 
 et ad sediiiOnem /mfa sit. lb. Leg. 3,8. — 02. Niillas res habeo litteris dignas. quippA 
 cui nee qu;e accidunt, nee qu;e airuntur iillo moihi pt'oben fur. lb. Att. 11, 4, 1. — 0-3. Plii- 
 riinurn terroris Romam cel«ritas hostium tulit, quippe quibu-n a'gre ad undecinium lapi- 
 dem occurswn est. LIv 5. 37. — 04. iEquOrum exercitus, ufqui permultosannos imbelles 
 er/issenf, sine ducibus certis, sine imptiri») trepidJie. Liv. 9. 45. — 05. Igiiur pro se qiiis- 
 que iuennes, ut quihwi nihil hostile suspect tini esset, in agmen Komanum luCbant. lb. 
 30,0. — BO. Verilus est ne hostium impctum tUBtinOre iiou lio&uci^ pt(£(>e7tim qttos re- 
 ceuti victoria efferri sciret. Cuis. B. O. 5, 47. 
 
 IV. LOCATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 i, I* it*. Locative clauses are tliose introduced by one of the locative 
 adverbs of tlie interrogative or relative form {uhi^ unde, quo, qua, ubicuii- 
 
 ^ Who bad read the report.— = who had shown their approval of it by tluir clamor. — 
 ^ i. e. Ucjoiarus.— 4 incaiiing Vines.—* refcrriiiLr to S. Ko>cias. — •» "relerring to ilie 
 HpeaUer. -■ 'Since I have iiiveu peace to the cominunity, I ougut to eiijt)y it myseU".— 
 ' referring to Octaviaiius.— »* the autograph notes leli'by Ca.'sar.— " had i)ci formed his 
 duties in regard to his lather's funeral. 
 
 qiLS etc., see p. 215, i?. 3. 4; p. 216), according to which they belong 
 either to the inteuiiogative or to the relative clauses. 
 
 Obs. 1. Relative locative clauses are either in the relation of adverbial objfct-davfes 
 (p. 482, C). or in that ol atbibutive clauses (Obs. 2), The former (h>cative adverl)ial 
 clauses) have the grammatical value of an object ot place (p. 215). determining the toco/ 
 relation of the principal predicate. Their syndetic antecedent» (expressed or under- 
 stood) are the demonstradce locative adverbs (i. e. those of the definite form : ibi^ inde, 
 to. Hi, see p. 210, 2). The relative locatives may be either in the same adverbial case as 
 the syndetic antecedent {ibi ubi, inde unde, eo quo etc.), or their cases may be different 
 (ibi unde. inde ufn, ibi (?woetc.); au: Nuila est laus ibi esse integrum ubi nemo est qui aut 
 p<»ssit aut conCtur corrumpere; it is no praise to be incorrupt where there is nobody who 
 can or dare corrupt. Cic. Verr. 1, Hi.— Ubi libido doniinatur, innoceniiai leve priesidium 
 est. II). Or. 05, 219.— Ejici est, inde repelii uude invlius recedas. Sen. £p. 54.— Major 
 l>ar8 homiuum to delerri solet quo a iiatura ipsa deducitur. Cic. Off. 1, 41. 147. — Qua triduo 
 ascenderat, (ea) bidiio est degressus; Jiy l/ie way on which it took him three days to 
 ascend the mountain, he descended in two. Liv. 40, 22.— Paheopolis fiiit hand procul 
 inde wW nunc Neapolis sitaest; Paheopolis was not iurfw/n where now Neapolis lies 
 ( = from the present site of N.). Liv. 8. 22. See Ex. 1-0.— Indefinite-relative adverbs 
 either take no syndetic antecedents, or the ordinary demonstrative locatives, as : Vbi- 
 cunque. homo «;sL, i^t benelicio locus est. Sen. Vit. B. 24.— Roniam se ire significabant, 
 quw onque Ibant, immensum obtinentes loci. Liv. .5, 37. See Ex. 7. — The relative locative 
 adverbs niaj' be replaced by attributive phrases with the noun locus to which they are 
 equivalent (quo in loco, quein in locum, quo ex loco etc.. gee p. 215, 7?. 4) as: Qjium vi- 
 dCreiit quo in lo<o ( = ubi) antea. qui sociis injurias fecerant, accusSri et coiidemn5ri 
 solebaiu, ibi esse palam posita ca qu;e a sociis abiati assent. Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 22. Instead 
 of " quo in loco\ the mere ablative {quo loco) is of ten used: Hannibal. j</r> constituerat 
 loco ( = uU conslituerat), quinque miilia ferme ab urbe posuit castra. Liv. 27, 10. 
 
 Obs. 2. Attiwiu'tive locative clauses describe the local relations of an ordinary' eub- 
 Ftaiitive which is the grammatical antecedent of the relative adjective, implied in the 
 locative adverb. The antecedents of such clause»* are either names of cities, or proper 
 names denoting other localities, or common nouns denoting places. 
 
 A. If relative clauses with the name of a city as irrammatical antecedent, are intro- 
 duci'd by those prepositions which, according to § 455. wmild require names of cities to 
 be placed in the genitive, accusative, or ablative, without a preposition (as 'locative 
 cases '), the relative always takes the form oivilocative adverb (ubi — in which ; quo = to 
 which ; unde = from which), as : Tarquinienses VolscOrum bello ad Anxur,vbi (not't/i 
 quo'') puesidium obsidebatur, occupStoa vidgbant Romanos. Liv. 5, 10. — Tanium terrOris 
 liiit Iidtnoi. 7?/o(not ' ad quain ') muitii)lex famapervenerat ; So great a tenor was at lioni^, 
 to which (city) many rumors iiad J'ound their way (where uv.my rumors had arrived). Liv. 
 5. IS.- Maxima pars rf/o/* prof Q git, t///(/e ne nuntius qiiidem cladis Romara est missus, 
 whence (from which city) not even a messenger was sent to Rome to carry the intelligence 
 of the defeat. Liv. 5, 38.— Often the antecedent denotes the inhaf/itants of the citv, while 
 th»; relative relers to the city as a place. In this instance, the relative likewise takes an 
 adverbial form, as : Bellum cum Volxiniensitjus exoitum, quo exercitiis duci nequlvit. 
 Liv. 5, 31.— Adsunt Afhtnietises, vnde bumanitas, doctilua, etc. in omuls terras dislri- 
 bfltte putantur. Cic. Flacc. 20, 02. —See Ex. 8. 9. 
 
 B. Relatives generally take an adverl)ial form in place of relative adjectives dependent 
 on those prepositions which correspond to any of the four locative adverbial cases, if 
 iheir antecedent is any proper name denoting.' localities, as m<uiniains. countries, castles, 
 etc. (where oiteii the name of tlie inhabitants is u-ed instead of the place), as : Iter per. 
 Alpls. quo magiio cum periculo mercatOies ire consuerunt, palefieri volebat. Caes. B. G. 
 3. 1. — Accepimus, statuam in Avent'itnim, quo\o\i\ Romani diciatoris vocaverant, perla« 
 tam. ulji tempium ei postea Camillus dedicavit. Liv. 5, 22 —Qui m Salle nt'inis, fxni in 
 liruttits pnedia habent. unde vix ter in anno audlre nuntium jjossiint. Cic. R. A. 40, i:S2. 
 — Instead of tli^se local adverbs, equivalent attributive purases with 'locus'" freqneutly 
 occur, as : Venit ad castellum Axiam, (x quo loco fundus is de quo agittir nou longe 
 al)est. Cic, Ciec. 7, 20. 
 
 C. The same ' locative ' adverbial form of relatives is often used when tbe antecedent 
 is a COMMON NOUN denoting locality (as l(KUs. vrb», regio etc.). as : Intelliggbat, in eis 
 locis sibi bellum gerendum J/W L. Valerius legatii» interfecius esset. (. je-. B. (». 3, 20. — 
 Videtisne hoc totum «ow<-n. coram utA facit delatiim, esse in litOra? Do you not see that 
 the whole paygye. where he savs that the complaint was mtide in person, shows the 
 marks of erasure? Cic. Verr. 5, 2, 42.— Ex ei» oppidis qua ducebantur; P^iom those 
 towns through which they were conveyed. lb 2, 5, 20. — Vadis Hhodani qua minima alii- 
 tfldo fluiuiuiis erat: by the fords of the llhodanus, ivhe7e (i. e. 'through which') the 
 
ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 576 
 
 577 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 wafor had the least depth. Cnes. B. O. 1, 8.— See Ex. 10-12.— But the upe of relative 
 adjectives with Mich auleccdciits is as frequent as ttiat of the locative ad verhj», as : Mox 
 Vi-iiacxi »d vum lontm in quo (or f/Ai) coniinif'^a pupiia erat. Liv. 10. S»). — Kis tt^tjionihiis 
 quf!>u,s (t^T qua.) iios iter I'actflio!* co^rnovcrat. C'jes. B. G. 5, lU. The use of locative ad- 
 verbs, howi'ver. is* ne<;essary if tlie local antecedent is expressed by an absolute adjec- 
 tive, as : Ad €xtrhnu}n\iVo\\\\c\vb Galiiic ubi (not inquo) castraMarcellus habCl)at ; To the 
 extreme bouudarieti of Gaul where (or at which) Marcellus had his camp. Liv. 40, 16. 
 
 D. If relative clauses refer to 7*?r*"on« as antecedents, the ndative may take an adver- 
 bial locative form, if by the relative the place is meant where the persons are staying:, 
 as : Kem ad pa/res conscripted detuli, quo quum C'atilltia venisset. quis eum senator 
 ippellilvit? Cic. Cat. 2. 6, 12. — But, even if the relative has no local meaninp:, locative 
 adverbs are sometimes used in place of prepositional relative adjectives. This, how- 
 ever, is confined to the adverb viide, as: Quodsi saltatOreui avuuj halmisses, neque eum 
 virum unde ( — ex quo) pudOris pudii itiu'qiie exemi)la petereniur, tamen e.'c. (Mc. Dej. 
 10. 2S. See Ex. 13. 14.- Kanly uU. with reference to persons, is used in the nieanin<i: 
 ' apnd quern \ a- : Neque adhuc pruiter te quisquam fuit ubi nostrum jua contra illo» 
 obtineremus. Cic. Quiiict. 9. 
 
 Obs. 3. The MOOD of locative relative clauses is determined by the rules referring: to 
 relative clauses in <,'eneral (^ 014. (115), both in respect to the subjunctive of non-reality 
 (Ex. 15-17), and tlie jjnoinic subjunctive (Ex. 18). In the case of the subjunctive of 
 adaptedness and purpose, the antecedent /cxv/t*, implied in the locative form of the rela- 
 tive, is omitted in the same way as the antecedents of rehiiive adjectives, as : Ilabea 
 (i. e, loc>/m) ubi ostentts tuam illam prieclilram j-.atientiam fri;:oris etc. Cic. Cat. 1, 10,20. 
 — EtfecSrunt ut esset (i. e. locus) ubi tci^imeuta pnependCre ^>06*€/j^ Caes. B. C. 2, 9. 
 
 Obs. 4. Intkukogative locative clauses, which (accordinjr to p. 482 foil.) are either 
 pubject-clauses, or object-clauses, must always have their piedicates in the subjunctive, 
 according to the general rules on interrogative clauses (p. 390, foil.), as : Istud non beue- 
 ficium sed fenus est. ciicuinspicere. non ubi o^Xum-. ])onas (i. e. beneflcium), ted nbi 
 qiuestuosissime habeas, nnde facilliine tollas. Sen. Ben. 4, 3. 
 
 1. Obcnecat animos fortflna ^ibi vim suam ingruentem refriniri non vult. Liv. 5, 37. — 
 
 2. Ubi culque valles abdita spem salfltis aiiquam offerCbat, (ibi) consederat. Caes. B. G. 
 6 34.-3. Ibi cognoscif, LX navis eOdem, undf erant profecta;, revertisse. lb. 5, 5.-4. Ibis 
 tandem aliquando ^«o te jam pridem ista tua cupidiias etlVenilta ac furiOsa rapiCbat. 
 Cic. Cat. 1, 10, 2."3.— 5. Iliec exsecriXtus in se hostlsque. qua confertissiniam cernCbat 
 Gallonyn aciem, concitat equum. Liv. 10, 28. — H. Ketulerunt, eo se progressos unda in 
 oHinIs partis circumspectus esset. lb. 10. 34.— 7. Ad virtQtem eundum est, yvocM«7M« 
 voc-Svii, quocuxque misit. sine rcspectu rei familiSris. Sen. Ben. 4, 1. — S. Labienus re- 
 vertitur Agtaicum, ii/A impedimenta totlus exercitus reiicta erant. Cu;s. B. G. 7, 02. 
 — 0. LUyUeum, uude diirressa est oratio, reverttlmur. Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 10. — 10. Loca su- 
 periOra, ^4nde erat propinquus dcspectus in mare, ab exercitu tenebantur. Ca^s. B. G. 
 
 3, 14. --11. Ad c</^7/-a S:imnilium perrexil, 7«o multitGdo omnis consternata agebaiur. 
 Liv. 10. 29. — 12. Tantis scelcribus notatuses, ut omiiem lociun quo a<lisses, exilii simil- 
 iimum redderes. Cic. Dom. 27. 72.--13. (^iiasi jam divinarem, illo exstincto, fore vnde 
 di-Tfrem ntmineni. lb. Sen. 4, 12. — 14. (Iia) ut, qui ei(jn necasset iiud'' ipse natus tsset, 
 carSret eis rebus omnibus ex quibus omnia iiata esse dicuntur. lb. R. A. 2(i, 71. — 
 15. An vero ullam oram tam desertam putatis, quo non ililus diei faiua pervenerit ? lb. 
 Lesr. M. 15.— 10. Quid' erat in terris, uf/i in tiu»'^ pedem jKmeres ?' lb. Phil. 2. 19,48. — 
 17. Turn «ibi M. PisOnis domum, vbi ha/ntdret, leu'erat. lb. 2, 25, 02. — IS. Veluti ex com- 
 posito ibi obviam habuCre hostem, vf/i et inirare ac vastare ipsi Samnitium agruni 
 prohiberentur^, et regredi inde* in pacata, Bociorunique P. K. finis, Samnltem ptvhibS- 
 rent. Liv. lU, 32. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 I. Indkfinite Relatives (/?. 4, Obs. 9).— 1. 1 shall send you* all the books* on tliis 
 subject'' lean discover** in my library. — 2. All the soldiers that survive»!" after'" the rout, 
 retreated totheir former" camp.— 3. The ir«'neral sent a foraging parly >2 to the surround- 
 ing countryi^ t,,i4 collect'^ all the corn tiiat was left'-' after the depiedations" of the 
 enemy,— 4. I wish you would employ all the time that will be at your disposition be- 
 
 1 Where was a place etc.—' in your own (property). — ^ a subjunctive of quality, accoid- 
 ing to /?. 20 ( — prohibebantur vastare ai^rum ubi liosti obviam venerant). — * instead 
 of et unde, according to p. 474 Obs. 7, fin. — * Render: You ivill hare.—* — whatever of 
 books, — ' res, — " investigare,- " superesse, — •"• § 414, 7?. 52.— " superior. — *3 Irumenta- 
 lOres. — ^^ surrounding country, agri.— »*qui.— •* colligere. — *' leliqui esse ex. — " i)opu- 
 latio. 
 
 iow9} entering upon yourofhcial duties, to acquire that knowledge without which von 
 cannot successfully perform your duties.-5. { wish you would enter upon^ this bS 
 i.t.>s with the undersiaiiaint;3 that I will myself do* what fuartl of it voii mS 
 leaves unfinished«.-0. Examine^ the man in whatever way" ^TaVi.-7n^whaTevl^r 
 wy we may shape our actions», yet that which is to be, will happenJo._8 The consul 
 orderedu he l.ctor to hurry to executioni^ whomsoever oP^ the cfowd he would desi^ 
 iiateM by [a ni(.t.on ofj his eyes.-9. 1 begi» [you] would remember this, that, whatevfr 
 words you use'» in your letter, you will certainly oflend his feelingsi' _io 'wSh'o 
 ever of the two parties'^ will be victorious in this war, we will be lost'» at all events^o 
 —11. How jrreat so ever his poverty was, he still preserved his intcf^ritysi _12 AH his 
 1. l.f'/rP'^''' '"■'"J^^'y.'/ 'y amount" was, he placed^s at the dispos^ition of the reniib! 
 )ic.-13 Oil never takes'^* the taste" of salt, whatever2« quantity ycm may add" -54^6 
 gav,. what he could, however little it may have been.-15. If [there] will be anythin- of 
 whatever kind it iiiay be, I wisii you would write [it].-10. 1 cannot attack^- a man^. 
 m !v b e'"^" 'rrva^Vo T. ^'''l '\f "'""T^' kin,lnesU< whatever his [Xr] qualh es3» 
 r -^1 r» '•• ^ ^'^ \Z '^^"''". ^ ^*"'"*' •'*''«'■« 'he first of next months*, wherever I may 
 .e [at that iime].-18. Our citizens have committeds* to their government's the pro^ec^ 
 101.37 o, heir persons3« ; wherever'- in the world they may beTthe whole" aulhJrity Sf 
 U e ivpublic is w, th them.-19. So great fame had preceded*' that man, that, to what phice 
 so ever he ca,ne^=», a crowd eager to see and hear would receive" id, i.-_2(^ In whatever 
 direction** they tr.^,ed*^ they were received*" by the missiles*' of the enemy -21 Skir. 
 m ^he^s* harassed*» the enemy along^" the whole line of their march. -22. How so ever 
 
 man wMi Icr«''T Kf Tn '''^ll^"" ^ ^^l"" "f I«>^?ib]e.-23. In what manner so ever th s 
 wn. i' ^ «-hall follow his lead". -24. Be it as it may, there is no reason why" 
 
 xe s iKMild place a doubt in his good faith.-2.5. Let us wait Ibr^- the events of the next 
 [f.w] days, and»» shape our course accordingly. 
 
 II. AOKEEMENT OP TUB RELATIVE WITH THE GRAMMATICAL ANTECEDENT (§ 611 § 612 
 
 slnv.rTsV ^^'.f*^""";''? ami women who had survived*^ this calamity, were sold in tJ 
 r. IP r^;-"'' ohtained fame by those devicess» and contrivances"» which are un- 
 ,^/.'. .''Ve'i '■' '''^•^,"}:'"--"f ^" f'C next day, the hostages and arms which Caesar had de- 
 m.iiKled"', were delivered.-4. Almost the whole community'^ went to meet«3 Cjcsar and«* 
 begj:e(l«s, not to deliver them up to the vengeance"" of [their] bitterest"^ eneinies — 
 foho ih'Tfl J^'^^^orenus left«« the intrenchment, and n.shed'o «n what seemed 
 to be the thickest ol the hostile luies.-(5. f-^extus, the son of L. Tarquinius used'Mo 
 he destruction of the Gabii that power which they had entrusted to him for the nrotec- 
 lonof the !Mate.-7. The Gauls resolved to assemblers for the defence" of that terri- 
 tory^* which?» the Roman s would invade first with their ariny7«.— 8. It is astonishing'T 
 
 ' Kender : I on my part, whatever of time will intercede {intercMere) till yduin with 
 8Ui)j) you wnl assume {occijjere) the province conferred (defejre) to you, I wish you 
 would so employ {collocare), that you learn those thinirs {ea'jierdL^cere) without wliich 
 you cannot correctly perform (^w^^yx'/yV/z/r/i) that office (wvuhs).—^ a-'irredi aliquid — 
 ■ ita.-* perheere.— 5 future perfect, converted into a subjunctive.— «inlectus—? jn- 
 vestigare.— » modus.—» to ahapt one's actions, se gerere.— '<» fieri.— n mandare— '« ad 
 siipplicium trahere.— '3 ex multitudine.— '* significflre (p. 373, Obs. 1 : p 452 ^ 98) — 
 i-'quaiso.-" fut perf. (subjunct.).-^ animus.-'« pars.-i» = we are goin- to perish 
 — '•'"*";"• fid<^s.— " quantuscunque.— 23/o;;/flrc«' at the disjwntionof sfmubodu. dicSre 
 aliciii.— -* recipere.— •■'« sapor.— '-'" Render: How much salt soever vou will have added 
 iieyertheless oil does not take [its] taste.—" adjicere.— 2« acciisare.— 2» is — so prose- 
 qui.— 3' benevolent la.— 32 = of whatever kind he etc.— «3 operam dare ut.-3* Kalendse 
 proximaj.— 35 deferre.— «" = to those who are at the helm (in gvbernaculh) of the republic 
 — 3j pnesidium.— 38 corpora.— 3« Render : Who, \vherever they are etc.— *" Render • there 
 (2(^t) IS the whole authority of the republic.—*' pra?cedere aliquem.— *2 phiperf — *3 nro- 
 sequi.-** qaoqiio.-*» se vertere, p. 328, li. 06; Ob.>^. 1.—*« excipere.--*? telum — 
 •' expedlta- cohortes.— *« lacessere.— s» - wherever he made his march.— s' curSre (ut) 
 
 ft se gerere.-" = I shall follow to what [place] he will lead.—'»* nihil est quaraobrem! 
 —o" Kender : Let us expect what will happen ifleri) at the next (proxiinus) days.— 
 »» Render asyiidetically : according as (utcunque) the thing is (subj.), so let us act 
 {agere).—->^ superesse,— »« sub corOua vendere.— s» artes.— «0 stndia — «1 imperSre — 
 «^ civitas.— 6» obviam procedere.— "* Render: ' nho' begged,- "^ orare ne — «" ira* - 
 V *V'*'^— *** l*>q"i (partic. construction).— «» extra munitiOues procedere.— 'o Render- 
 And what part of the enemies seemed thickest (confertisnmus), in that he rushed (Irrunx- 
 f ^r", . . "i***'" »^y inversion : Which to him forces to protecting (^«?H) the State of 
 ttio Gal>ii had been committed (sM^/tf/^c/.). those he used to (iw) the destruction (wr- 
 nicu.<) of the people (^6//.-?).— 'Sconvenlre,— '3 defendere (f7m//<^m/^—7* Render • bound- 
 aries of that nation (r/^n.*).—'^ Render by iwtJemon.—''» Render by 'to introduce an 
 army into the territory '.— '? mirus. 
 
ENGLISH EXERaSES. 
 
 
 OVCi 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES, 
 
 that» [there] should have been' no rancor' between those men who* were comp«*- 
 iui,'* for tiiicli"^ a prize.— JK You onj^ht to implore the immortal cods to^ defend froiu 
 the nefarious'^ crimes of the mo>t abandoned» citizens a jrovernment'O which^' they des- 
 tined»'^ to be the ^ri-'atest'^anci most prosperous»* of all.— 10. Keturn'^to us soeMengih- 
 cned'« in health that you are able to justify»^ the expectations in respct toyou»'', which»* 
 \ou have awakened" in us.— 11. Atticus assisted the friends"» of his adver>ary AntoniuH 
 with [thosej things they^" were in need of^s.— 12. Returns* the money vvtiich^» you haso 
 received from me.— 13. Semirami» built"» the walls of Babylon with lime"^ and bitumen"», 
 an article"" which, in thatcouiitrv^o, oozes»» from the earth. — 14. KiiiK Philip was seized 
 with the desire of ascending Mount Hivmu»'", from which it was said»», both»* the 
 Adriatic and Ionian seas [could] be seen at once.— 15. The whole land^^ which was 
 between Mount Massicus and the river Vulturnus was p.ircilled oui3« amonir the Plebe- 
 ians,— 1«. The enemy seized»' all the p:old'« and silver, and all the corns'* ji„,i ftKlder^» 
 that was in the city.- n. Hannibal laid waste*" the whole tract of land*» between the 
 city of OortOna and lake Trasimenus, with all the riiror*" of war. 
 
 III. Absolutk rklativks (H. H).— 1. It will be difficult to find [any person] who can 
 pive*3 you a satisfactorv** account*^ on this subject*». —'.>. They maintain*^ an uninter- 
 rupted*'* intercourse*» with these traders*", in order to have; [persons] to wh<mi to sell 
 what they have ^1»«»*'^*' '^y Ptealing^" and robbery*".— 3. The conquerors** broke the 
 fetters** of their countrymen*» sold into slavery*', sending;*'' [parties] in all directions*» 
 to«o search»» [for them].— 4. The mannjxers»" selected [some persons] out of those 
 presenf^s to»* keep order»* durinjjj the proceedimr** in po iarj,'e a *;atht,'rin£: —5. [Thc^se] 
 act wisely who, in times of prosperity»» nuike provisiims»' for a rainy day»^.— <». He i» 
 considered the wise^t»» who'" himseH" conceives the ideas he needs; the next place 
 beinj? assigned'» to him who adopts^" what is well devised'» by others'*. In the sphere'* 
 ofstupiditv just the reverse is true ; forhe'« who has no original thought", is less stupid 
 than he (I'/le) wiio emlorses" what is'» stunidly devised by others,- 7. [Those rulers] 
 who consult*» [the interests of one] part of the citizcMis, [and] neglect the other**», inau- 
 giirate»" a most baneful*» condition of things"* in the country, [namely! rebellion and 
 discord.— 8. Then, even those who had been doul)tful before, went over"* to the Cartha- 
 ginians.— i>. Happy was the decease"» of that [man] who did not»' live to witness those 
 
 things which he 
 
 city] who either do not see whats» is imminent^'», or dissemble»" what they see.— 11. ' 
 Veneti commenced"» to procure the equipments for their ships.— 12, They did»" w 
 was unworthy of themselves, and of him under»» whom they served,— 13. Write to 
 
 aw in his nund as impending.— 10. There are several persons [in this 
 
 ", The 
 
 what 
 hy of themselves, and of him under»» whom they served,— 13. write to me 
 as much as vou can on all the events»* of that dav.-14. Let every one of us attach 
 himself» * to those whom»» he likes best,- 15. Actions»' are dangerons either to their 
 
 » Qiiod.— " intercedere.—» obtrectatio.— * by invemion.—^ they compete for a jrrize; 
 intereos est lemulatio laudis.— « tantus.— ' nt.— » nefarius.— » perditissimus.— »» res- 
 publica.— »» by inversion.— "^"^ velle,- »» pulcherrimus,— »♦ Horentissimus.—»* reverti 
 (fut.).— »» confirmjlre.— " sustinCre ac tueri,— '« expectatiOnes tui.— »• by invernon.— 
 2« concitare,— ■-'» familiilris,— "" by i/uvrix)rafion.—'^ indigCre.— "* resiituere.— "* by 
 incormration.—"'^ construcre.— "' caLx,- ** bitflmen.- "» materia.—»" regio,— »» exsudare. 
 —32 liender : Hiemus from which mountain.—»» ferebatur (with impersonal construc- 
 tion).—»* the two seas, the Adriatic and the Ionic (sing.).—'* quod agri.—»» dividere, 
 with dat.— »' capere.—»» partitive construction.—»» pabulum,—*" pervastare.— *» parti- 
 tive: quod agri.— *" clades.— *» reddere.— ** probabilis.- ** ratio.—*» res.—*' tuPri,— 
 *8 continuus.—*» commercium.— *" mercator,— *» capere.— *" furtis.— *» rapTnis.- ** vic- 
 tor.—** to break wniebodi/s fetters, aliquem ex servitOte in libertatem restituere,— 
 66(.ivis.— 5' to xell into slavery, venumdaie.--*» ablative absolute, in the perfect.—*» to 
 send in all directions, dimittere.— »" qui.—»» conquirere.— »" qui pru'fuCrunt.— »' ei qui 
 aderant.— •* qui.—»* Render : who should take pains (operam ?/«/•<?) lest anything in such 
 a multitude should be done tumultuously {tumult iidse), or against the laws.— «« tempora 
 secunda.— «' providCre aliquid, to make prorl<ionJ< for soinetfnng.—*^ casus adversi — 
 «» Render : They say that he is the wisest.—'" Render: to whom comes into the mind 
 what IS necessary (o/>w),— '» Render: that next comes (inv:rime acrt-dere) that [one] 
 who etc.— '" obtemperare.— '» Render: to the things well invented {//y afisobtte parti- 
 ciple).— "<* Render: of the other,— '* Render : In stui)i<lity it is contrary (contra).— 
 '» .\rran<re : For less stupid is he (iv).— " cui nihil in mentem venit.— '» comprobare. — 
 '» Rendtn- : What comes stupidly into the mind to the other.—*" consulere alicul,— «> = 
 neglect a part — ^" inducere in civitatem,- "^» pcrniciosus,— »* condition of things, res. 
 — 0* deficere,— ^» exitus,— "' Render: who did not see those [things] when they hap- 
 pened (^n) which he foresaw Qmniidh'e) [&i<] future.— «» plur.—^» iinminCre.—»" dis- 
 simuiare.- »» Render: C(*mmenced (institnere) to procure (providere) those [things] 
 which pertain to the use of the ships.— »" cominittere.-»» Render : whose camp they 
 followed.—»* Render : on all things which have been done on that day.--»* to attach one^t 
 aelf to anyone, aliquo uti.— »» Render : to whom it seems. The whole sentence to bo 
 irendered by four words, — »' rerum actiOnes. 
 
 * ■•' 
 
 m - 
 
 doers», or to other?. —16. Every one can" see' with his own eyes the beauty of what* 
 we know to b(> the work* of divine providence,— 17. Is Piso the man wholookb» as if 
 he did this without a consideration' *— 18. They havtj given the nian^, whose» life 
 they failed'" to take, to you. O judges, to throttle»».— 19. lias that [man], who»" made 
 another man's calamity" the occasion of a most outrageous robbery, the iii:ht»* of depre- 
 cating any calamity ?— 20. Many demand»* of iheir friends what»» they themselves do not 
 grant»' them. 
 
 I v. Logical Relatives (R. 8).— 1. He sent to my nid'^ all the troops he could spare, 
 which gave me the greatest pleasure,— 2, You will have to try»» what so many [did] be- 
 fore you, [namely] to retrench"" your expenses"» as carelullv"" as you can,- S.King Ario- 
 barzanes has returned thanks tome for"» the great care which the Roman Senate and 
 ])eoj)le were taking for his interests, [a distinction] which seems to be very great 
 and exceediigly honorable"* for him"*. —4. In the next place"», if I am now"' called from 
 life"»", I shall not Ix torn"» from a»" re})ul)lic which to part with»» would give me pain, a 
 consulati<m which»" I have in common with you. — 5. The Senate returned thanks to 
 Cicero, not lor»» the pood administration»* of the republic, which [it did] to many, but 
 for saving»* [the republic], [an honor] which since»» Rome's building happened to no 
 civilian»'.— (i. He condemned the very man from whom he had taken a bribe»» with refer- 
 ence»» to the judinnent, an impudence*" which is without a parallel. — 7. This happened in 
 such a manner*' that it should*" have been fatal*» to the Syracusians, as much as could be 
 conjectured** by human foresight**,— 8, Verres ordered*» lleraclius to be summoned*', 
 which*"^ ouirhi*"» to have been done from the firsi*",— 9. Alexander did not only kill Cal- 
 listhenes. but even tortured*» [him], a cruelty which was followed*" by too late*^ a re- 
 pentance**.— 10. He hopes it to be leasible** to depart*» with me for Italy. Should I*' 
 live to see this day, I shall think*" myself*» amply rewarded for my hardships. — 11. He 
 never mentioned*'" this subject again»», as far as I am informed. — 12. 1 have directed my 
 agents»" to apply (if it would not jrive you too much trouble) to you for advice»» in all 
 the affairs»* which would give rise»* to any dispute.— 13. The Senate commanded»» Scipio 
 to leave the army*", if not prejudicial to the public interest, and to come to Rome to 
 jtreside»** over the consular election, — 14. As regards me. I keep quiet»», l>ec.ause'" I do 
 not believe that, while Pompey is absent, action should be taken'» in rejjard'" to the 
 Cam])anian lands'»,— 15. For the rest, I wish you would think'* that whatever kind- 
 ness'5 y,)„ ^vili show to Cjerellia, you will do a great favor'» to me.— IH. For my [frimd] 
 Dionysius I oidy oimmi" and pave'« the way to your acquaintance'». When*" you once 
 know him personally, you will, as is your character"», consider him worthy of your 
 
 » To those who undertake th^in,— " by licet. — ■ contemplftri, — * of those tliinsrs which. 
 — * to l)e constituted by,- « = who seems to have done this. — ' gratis.— « is, — » by inver- 
 sion.—»" Render: whom they could not kill while (qnum) they wished (c/;j(?r(!^).— »» jugu- 
 lare (geriindial), — »" by inversion.—»» Render: Who snatched (rapere) owl of the other's 
 calamity the most disgraceful spoils to [his] house.—'* Render: will he be able to de- 
 precate {deprecari) from himself ?—'*desiderare,—»» by inversion,— »' tiibuere,— »* Ren- 
 der : He did, which was to me the greatest pleasure (Icttitia, abstkact dative), that 
 he sent to me to aid (yuljsidium, abstr. imtive) what was left {reliqvi) to him of trooj)s. 
 — '» facere,— "" circumcldere.- "» sumptus.— "" religiOsus,— "» by an inlinitive clause : 
 'That to the Senate eic, his welfare was of so great care (abstract dative).—"* perho- 
 norificus,— 25 The relative inserted clause must be placed before the infinitive clause,— 
 "«deinde,- "' jam.— "" ad exiturn vitie vocari (subjunctive).—'^^ avellere,— »" is,—»» that 
 which must be missed {carere, gerund), I should eriieve (dolere, subj. pres ).— »" Render: 
 which as to (ad) consolation is common to me with thee. The relative inserted clause 
 to be placed after deinde.—^^ pro.—»* bene gerere rempublicam (by reversed particij)ial 
 phrase). — »* conscrvare (rever.'^ed panic, phrase).—»» post,—»' togatus,- '^ pecuniara 
 accipere,— 3» ob,— *" Render : Than wtiich (abl.) what could be more impudent ?— *» ita. 
 — *" debCMV.— *» exilium (abstr. dat.).— ** coiijicere.—** consilium.— *« liistorical present 
 (.pjbtre).—*'' citare — *» to be placed directly after the subject.—*» oportet.— *" initio,— 
 *» toiquere,— *" change into an active construction.—*» too late, senis.— ** pcenitentia. — 
 ** = that it could be done,— *» decedereiu,— *' = which day if I shall have seen,— *" ex- 
 istimare.— *» = that I have derived i percipere) a. great fruit from my labors.— »" col- 
 loqui de e5 re. — »' postea. — «" — so we nave prescrilwed to those to whom we have com- 
 mitted Onnnddre) those aft'airs (nenotium).—^'^ to apply to somebody for adrice. aliquo arbi- 
 tro uii.— »* res.—»* = which would be called into some controversy.—»» prjecipere.— »' to 
 li-are the army and come to /iotfie, ex cmxrii* Romara venire.— »8 comitia consularia habere 
 (oERUNDiAL).—»» tacere,—^" iccirco quod,— '» Render: that it is convenient (conrenlre) 
 that (accus. w. inf.).—'" to take action in regard to something, causam alictljus rei agere. 
 — '» ager (sing,).-'* sic velim existimes,— '* = by whatever things you will have done 
 kindly (benigne) to etc.— '« gratissimum facere.—'" patefacere.— '" munlre.— '» cognitio. 
 — »" Paftic. const. : The acquainted one (cognHus per te ipsum) you will judge worthy 
 etc.—»» natflra. 
 
 ^ 
 
580 
 
 REL.VTIYE CLAUSES. 
 
 friendship.— 17. Whatever may be obtainable», yon wilP (considcrins Caesar's humanity) 
 most easily obuiin it Iroin him by your own applicaiioii^. 
 
 V. CoOnoiNATiNG Kelativep, JL 9. {All the co-ordinating (hmonstratires and pro- 
 nouns, lAs-ec/ in these sentence,, to be expressed relalivthj «*^^«^^^, «;';'i;J^^t^iTo■nfid • ce^ 
 hokls4 bocietv together* t*o much» as [mutual] conlidiMict^«; but ihie (t. <?. c«mnutiicc; 
 can not ex.t^ u W« the payment» of deht8><» be rnforced»».--^. Sophocles wrote 
 fiag-desnp to extreme old We'». When, on accounii^ .>, tl.i.^"ccupano.j^^^* he .e<.nc^^^ 
 to ne-'lect [hisl propcrtvis, le«,'al proceedin->fi« were instituted agaiut. h m by \n* h^on^ 
 -3 The A e. iin. ««..tian.^ aud their other allien, tried'' t.» ^tnp«« the "larch o ] 
 A.^e.ilau: [Bui] he defeated them all in a bloody'»* battle.-4. Uein- well aware of this 
 custom-o, the consul departed at an earlier time-;i lor the army ^'''^'\^^='\'|'V hf-i^^i 
 5. When our army was at the distance'-'a of a few days' marches Irom t''^'^^' ^'''1,' ^' ^ '^'J^^ 
 envoys came to the camp.-C. When their (i. e. the ene><'y f ) C''''"'^'"':'";;'',;^ ''",'*'; 
 tnived-!* hv bustle" and runnin^'2=*. our soldiers invaded" the camp.-.. At this place 
 [thosel who were able to seize theirarms quickly, oppi.sed^Oour [troopsj fora lit le while ' 
 i." The positions- of this -round»» was such^^ il.at heavy missih-.^-»^ cukl be launched»» 
 on" our ships Irom the hi-her3«puints3».-<). When the consul had arrived there he or- 
 dered thecitytoenlist^o^^.idiers [for hisarmy].-llt. llavii.- received*' ihis letter about 
 midni-lil*-, iie immediately communicated" the mteni<,'ence** to the chief-commandei. 
 
 VI "construction op the kklativk clause.-Guammaticai> roKM OF THE Hkla- 
 tive' E 10— 1. Are you the man who has t»tarved«Mhe cmmon i)eople 'r-'f It is 1 
 who'.-ave you the hope*« of an early departure"' ; [it is] I who kept ni.-«« out; conlidence-'», 
 that^" our plans mi-Mit be carried out«*'.-3. It is the mark ot a tnllin-*- mind to repudi- 
 ate a legitimate fameS», .yhich is the most honorable^* fruit of true virtne.-4. Alter the 
 death"^of Pompey, the father, who was the [sl.inin-] li-htO" of the IJoman en.p.re 
 [hisl son. most similar to the fatlier, was killed.-5. I'anula is a..-' i-laiid snriH.ui.ded"- 
 by that sea which y..u call the Ocean.-G. Enmenes tied int<. atoriress^" ol I'hry-ia which 
 is called Nora.-7:Thel)es itself, which Ls the capital^" ..f Bceolia was in jrreat excite- 
 ment'''.-^. Hannibal arrived in Italy live months alter*"^ he had marched irom New 
 Cartha-'c and tilteen days afterS^ he had be<;un to ascend the Alps.-'.». 1 lie ireneral left 
 for the'tlleatre of war«3 two davs«* after he had been appointed to ttie command of the 
 jvi-niv»* —10 I st.aid«« at Athens three days»' after your letter was handed"" to in«-.— 11. 1 he 
 week»» I staid in my villa near Tusculum'^ 1 spmi'i in rcadini: and wriiint,', since 
 the bad weather'- conilned'» me to the- house.— 12. It is now exactly'* thirty years, since 
 I came'5 to this city.— 13. It. is now ten months tliat you have heen unplnateil' ^ in thi« 
 difticultv. -It. Ever since I became a man", 1 have be.n in so intimate a connection'» 
 with Sulpicius, that neither he'» has been doin-'"' anythini: without "u- nor I ^vthout 
 him —15 Ever since Cicero entered on the irovernment t)f [his] province«', he showed'"' 
 himself so conscientiou>*'3 that nobody had^* to nxcxxx^'- even"» the sli-'htcst^' expenses 
 on his account««.-10. This is an important^» reason why we should believe this man in- 
 nocent.-17. What means»» thai whole ehar-c»', if,as«-you say. you had»-' no reason to»« 
 make»5 thi.-* nnt()rtiiimte»«^[man j still»' mo re unfo rtiinar.e?-!». I h ad» '* many reasons 
 
 ''TnTi^I^tramluMfutnre: plural).-^ = it will be easiest ^'^^^^'^'''■-''^''^^'llllf'':}^^^ 
 yourself (dative «l interest).-* continere.-^ vehementins.-» hdes -' esse nulla pote.<»t 
 i.6 nisi—» solutio.— 10 res credittc.-" future.-7'o enjorce wmethinrj = some hm^' m 
 necessarv.-i'-' sumtna senectus.-»^ propter.-^* studi^um.-'^ res familijlns.-'^ Render: 
 He was Jailed into trial (judicium* by etc.-i' conan.-i« «.bsi>tere «l'S."'v7. r"/''';"? 
 •■i" huvin<' ascertained icoffno<Cire) this custom (aW. a6*\)—" raatunns.— -■' It i^ wy umt, 
 con>uevr.-'-3 to be. at a didance, abesse.--'* ah eis.-" terror-'^» siuNiHicaie.--' fremi- 
 tus.--"* concursu8.-3» irrumpere in. -3« resisiere.-3' paulispcr.-^^ nai(^ra.-33 loci s.- 
 sMiic htec, hoc— 3* tormentum.-»» adi-ere.-3' nd.-S'* superior.-»» jocus.-*» alicm 
 milites imperSre.-*! = After (abl. abs.) this letter had been hrouirht (a/env).—*- media 
 jiox — *3 defene ad aliquem.— <* qnie nuntiabauttir.— ** fame necjire.— *« speiii alleire.— 
 *' m'atfira decessio.-*» servare.-*» Ihles.— ^» infinitive clause.-^' our plans may be car- 
 ried out, res contici potest.-^-! levis. -" justa -loria.-"* l"»'^'^''i«--"' = »'te'- J • h^tl 
 died {exstinqui), abl. abs.-s» himen.-" quidam.--"* circumfa-ti**.-^» castellum.- 
 «" cai)Ut -«' motus.— e-! by the relative.— «» ad castia prohcisci.— •* by ordinals, ace. to 
 I) -m Obs 4, 1.—«^ totje appointt-d to the command of theanvy, exerciinm accipere.— 
 «•^coimnoiSri.— «'triduum.-«'reddere.— 6» hebdomas.— '« ri/A/ mar 'J usculuf/i, 1 nscu- 
 lanum.-'» consumere {with genindial}.--'^' teinpestas.-'3 conimGre altquem in aliqiio 
 loco — '♦ ipse.— '^ coinmigiare. -'» in aliquA re ver^ari.— " to btarme a man, togam viri- 
 lem "siimeie.- '^ io be in an intimate connection with, somebody, aliquo familianter uti.— 
 7» iiie —«0 a'^ere.-^' provinciam accii>ere.— ^^ se pra;stare. -=^3 abslinens.— »« eerundial. 
 — «s snmptus suscipere.— <=« Render: -noL even'.-"' minimus.—'^» proi.ter.— ^» magnus. 
 _»o esse.—»* crimen.— »2 by the relaUve.— •' by esse—** cur.—»-» rcddere.--»» mittcr.— 
 »' multo.— •<* by esse. 
 
 ENGLISH EXEECISES. 
 
 581 
 
 why I should join* Pompey as the companion of his fliirht.— 19. What do yon allege' 
 why we should believe you rather than that [other man], whose very words^ betray* 
 his trreat^ consciousness». — 20. I was seized' with the greatest arief when I saw» the 
 ^ man», lor whose sake'" I had undergone" so many hardships, be faithless'^ to a cause 
 which is [that] of all the patriots'». _21. So great was the forgetfulness'* of that man 
 that, if he came to any [place], he forgot the veryi* [thing] for the sake of which'» he 
 had come.— 22. [S(/me of] the most pri>minent" men were present, with many of whom 
 1 am inlimately'Oftcquainted'».- 23. This kind of gems^*», a few'-'* of which are in my 
 possession^-', is of remarkable'* beauty.— 24. We cannot wonder that^* you are hostile^* 
 to that government which you failed"-'» to destroy, not lor lack of disposition, but for 
 lack of strength. 
 
 VII. Ellipsis in tue relative ci.ArsE, anp transposition or words from the 
 I'RiNciPAL sentence. Ji. 11. 12.-1. They27 think»» about this subject very much"» as»» 
 the other barbarians do.— 2. To Aristides happened what happened to many countiy- 
 meii of his3i. [namely] that {ut) he was banished»' by ostracism»».— 3. Caesar left as pro- 
 tection»* for the ships the same troops as he had left before. — 4. 1 did»^ what few did before 
 me. when»» 1 followed»' the advice of those who. avowedly»^, were my worst enemies.— 
 5. I shall follow»» the same plan as*" I did from the beginning.— 6. I shall give you the 
 same opportunity as** before ; only*' observe*» that upriL'htness in your dealings with 
 mt! which you are wont** [to observe].— 7. He showed*^ in his letter that respect*» 
 which it was his duty*' [to show].— 8. Some said that the dead body of Pausanias*» 
 ought*» to be interred"*" in the same** [spot] as those [were interred] who were exe- 
 cureds' for a crime.— 9. If we make gifts^», we should give** to every one what he needs 
 most^^.— 10. Let every one attend^» chiefly''' to those [things] for which^* he is best 
 titted'i». --11. Every one seized"^" those [things] wliicli»i seemed to him the most suit- 
 „ble»'.— 12. The Carthau'inians, [in] the peace made with the Romans, lost th< ii*8 rich- 
 est»* provinces.— 13. The priestess is said to have prayed»^ to the god, to give to [her] 
 sons for their piety the highest»» reward which could be given by a god to men.— 
 14. Drtisus, after leavini^»'' his»'» most trustworthy»» troops as L'arrison'" in the fortress'», 
 ])iiisii«>(l the eiiemv with the rest of his army.— 1.5. He used" as interpreter'» a'* cap- 
 tured'5 Persian whom lie had in his'» camp.— 10. The consul marched" to [his] colleague 
 by as great marches as he could. 
 
 VIII. Involution. li. 13. 14. {Tnvnired relatives to he used in every sentence.)—!. The 
 accu^ed is exceedinglv culpable'", and'», if he is condemned, people»*» will no longer»» 
 say that money is omnipotent'"'^ in these courts*».— 2. It will be necessary** for the con- 
 sul to yiehl»^ his opinion, by doing which"^» he will greatly»' ingratiate himself with all 
 the good —3. At that time we had a chief of quick action"» and energetic»» mind»«. 
 If»» we had now such a chief, we would, for these outrages, demand reparation»' by 
 war.— 4. That alone is a t;o od, the possessor»» of which is praiseworthy»*, even if he 
 
 » SeadjungeTealicui.— ' afleire.— »sermo {sing.).—* demonstrare. — » summus.— «fldes. 
 — 'athcere.— » intelligere.— » is.—»" propter.— »'"susciperc.—»' desererecausam.—'» boni. 
 —1^ oblivio.— »s by ipxe ille.—^^ cujus rei caueft.— »' summus.— »« familiarissime.— '-» uti. 
 — -" gemma.— '^» aliquot.— "■" possldere.— " minis.—'* infinitive clause.— '* infestus.— 
 2« Render: for {ad) the destruction {del^re, gerundial) of which not the disposition (ani- 
 1/iii.s), but the sireni^th (vires) were wanting {deesse) to you.—" hi.—'» senilre.— '» fere. 
 —30 _ what.— 3» see P. J, §272, R. 1 ; § ,2y:l R. .5.-3' in exilium mittere.— 3» testSrum 
 suflVagium.— 3* prtesidium (abstr. dat.).— »^ facere.— »» Render: 'that (ut) 1 followed'. 
 
 — *' by deblre.—*^ = the body of the dead Pausanias.— *» oportSre.- ^" tointer in aplace, 
 inferre in locum.— ^' by the hnative adverb.—^' to be executed for a crime, ad suppiicinm 
 dan idatum esse).— a» benetjcium {sing.) i)riestare (in the future).—»* [that] should be 
 given (gerundial) which etc. — ^^ =■ what is most (maxime) necessary to every one.— 
 ^» elab(;rftre in alicjua re.— &' potissiinum,— ^» hy inversion.— '''^ aptissimusad.— »" arripere. 
 — «1 by i/ivernon.—'^'^ aptissimus.— »» = which they had.—»* opulentus.— »5 precSri a 
 (leo.— ■<» maximus.— "' relinquere (abl. abs.).—»» = which he had.—»» firmus.— '" abstr. 
 DAT.—'» castelluin.— " adnibere.— '3 Interpres.— '* quidam.-'s hello captus.— '« by 
 sex:ut7i.—'*'' ducere. -'« nocenti^simus.— '» = who if he is condemned.—*^" homines.— 
 »» = will cease to say.—»' pliirimum posse.-»» judicium.—»* Intinitive clause.—»» de 
 opinioi'e sua decedeie.— '»« = if he which does {suljjuncl.).—^'' to greatly ingratiate one's 
 self with fome one, ah aliquo summam inlre gratiam.— «» celerrimi consilii.— «» acern- 
 ni"us — »» in"-enium.— »» by the involved relative qualis: ' of which quality {gua/is) if [one] 
 were now '.— »' to demancl reparation for outrages by war, res ex injuriis bello repetere, 
 ^»3 = which who has.—»* laudaudus. 
 
«82 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 11 
 
 •rri 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 683 
 
 has nothinjr else', but witliont which'^ a man is condemned and rejected in the fbll. 
 ness of everything elt^ea,— 5. The 8wnn8« are consecraied» to Apollo, hccause thev 
 seem to have Iroiu him [the pift of] divination, bv which they font^ee* the happiiie/s 
 alter death, ko as to die with »on^^ and rejoicin<,'.8 -«. The nothin-'ness of worldly 
 p(K)cl.s» you have proved in your hook on happy life, in the read'ing»» of which I 
 wish nottiinir s^o much, as to abandon all those [thins;?].— 7. How pleasant must be that 
 journey, at th«* endol wiiich»» no care, no anxiety»* is to remain'^.—g. Where'* on land 
 or water, shall I tind a person'^ whose whereabouts'» I do not know 5-— 9. A TdrouStus 
 Btands'7 belore [myj eyes, the quality»» of whose pursuits both of you must'» know — 
 10. Octavius IS a inan-». whose actions^», of whatever kind-» they niav be we will ex- 
 l)ect \vith the 1,'reatest contldence''^».-!!. That man is addicted»* to habits'of life, from 
 ^'r^^%l}^ ^'■'■1!*" ^^^^ it'once accustomed to them, will seldom return to honest i)ursuits. 
 —12 This IS the carriage-* which Napoleon used--iMvhen, on his lli-ht after the battle 
 of VV ateiloo. he was nearly captured by the eneniy.-l:i. That ancient throne'-i'*, on which 
 the kinj,'-'' used to sit when his vassals tendered him their homa<'e, was ruthlesslyso 
 thrown nto the flames.- 14. This was the prophetic.3» wordS'-» of L. Crassus, which we 
 expected" [to hear] when we came to the Senate.-15. From there thev came to the 
 river i^uphiates,w;hich3* th.-y rapidly crossed l)y pontoons, when another more serious 
 obstacle opposed [the inarch of] the army.— 16. We relys^on those whom we believe to 
 have a better knovyled,!je3« than we [have].-17. Ajudlonius did not sufler those who, in 
 nis judj;ment3^ had no hope of becominir [u'ood] orators, to waste their timeS» with him — 
 iM.Haunihal was appointed^» commander «if theCarthai,Mnian8 on account of the hatred*» 
 Which all knew he had ever since his cliildhood entertained airainst the Homans — 
 
 ?"Ll^l*""®.""^**'.'l'^^'''^' fll'V'P^*?! '" re<:ard to which*» Epicurus remarks that he did" not 
 
 em.— 20. Nothini; is more undignified*'. 
 
 comprehend how life could be happy without them.— *u. .^oiiuni,' i» iiii>re un(ii<rnineu". 
 than that" anythinj,' should s.em worse to you than dishonor**, to avoid*» which any naiii 
 must be submitted to.-21. His*« condition is the same as*^ [that] of the tyrant I)io- 
 nysnis. who, when be was in a position to do anvthinir he pleased*^, did not feel him- 
 self [any] happier*» on that account^".— 22. Of what u>esi are treasures which" we can- 
 not einploy^J when they are in our possession^* ?_2.3. Alexander made»» Parmenio jrov- 
 ernor.)f Media, a country which, in wealth, is second to none,— 24. Philo. who in scholar- 
 snip-« had no sui)erior amon- the Jews, was the first who^^ applied" the speculative'^'» 
 method to the interpretations'» of the facred books of the Jews. 
 
 1 ^- J^E^ATIVE SUBJr.VCTIVKS OP NON-REAI.ITV, DEPENDENT ON NFOATIVES. (R. 10 >_ 
 
 1. There la nothing that either you [would] wish to hear, or [which] I dare to assert«i 
 
 » Etiam si aliis de^intufi^aTiTt which who has not.- -3 in omnium aliflrum reruiu 
 copia -* cyjrnus.-» dediciltus.-* ^ foreseeins; by which what boon U/uH fxj,u) [there! 
 IS in death they die etc.-' cantus -« volupt .s.-» Kender : How none riches are, thoii 
 hast taiiirht in that book which thou hast written on happy 0m/u.v) life.—'» liender- 
 
 When 1 read wiiuh. I prefer {fmille) nothinjr than to abandon ireUnnnere) etc -»» ' when 
 which IS emied (wn^c«'re)\ by akl. abs.->3 sollicitado.-'3 reliqui esse (periphr. fut 
 puhjj — M = rhro'xjh tv/jtch parts (bv the locative adverbial form of the interro«'ative) 
 shall I pursue.-»» is.-»« .= where who is, I do not knc.w.-»' vers-iri -'8 = whose of 
 what quality studies were.—»» nfccs^ie e<f : with infinitive clause.- «<> is — «» =what who 
 !!'f rr"~ o7 "'[•t'rt"»l« relative.-" H.quissimo animo.-^* = follows that method irafio) 
 of hfe --> = by which who is imbiK'd (hnbn/us), can (■'>»hj,incf.) hardly be recalled to an 
 nf'VC w ['/^^''''/x'^ of l.vinir.--'-^« rheda.-2T on (l,y) which when Napoleon fleein- «.ut 
 of the Waterloo (\aterIoensis) battle was driven {ve/uK he almost was captured etc — 
 ^« solmm.-2» =_to the on which {ahl.) sittin- kinur faith and office used [w/^re) to be 
 tendered (pmsfan) by his (men).-3o faHlus.-si divinans.-3i vox -33 L expectin-- 
 which we came.— 34 ^ after having cros-ed (>^uperare. abl. abs.) which by bridges quicklv 
 ?s « ','* ^ u^^*"*' ^^'""".^ {rrrnri)^) o»)stacle (impedlmfntmn) was objected to the armv — 
 3»fidem habere alicui.-s» plus infelligere.-37 Haider: that who he jud-ed couLfnot 
 become r^mrf^rf) orators.-ss operam (not 'tfwpn.,') perdere.-3» constiiuere -*o = 
 hatred of the Romans, that by which he was imbued from boyhood was known (ron.^faf) 
 amoM-all.-*» =r after which had been detracted (abi.. abs.), how life could be happy, 
 Lpicurus denies that he understood {inff/lio^re).-*'* indiL'nus.-*3 jufinilive clause - 
 **dedecus (coMfAU. abl.).-*6 = that (///) thou mayest escape {^fuqfre) which, any 
 {q>nhf)et) rather pain must be nnderirone {><>,U\re, eerundial).-*» = of this (matO — *t ac 
 
 *, 7, ^"V^''"»'" "■''»'" •«" [fhinirs] were allowed (/jV^/).- *» sebeatinrem dnceie.-»<*iccirco' 
 --»» tin bouo s,n,f opfi.'i, literally ' To whom are treaMires Oo)advantare' (AB-Tn d\t ) -- 
 
 iVJrVAf'",-"''? "^'"'^V 'i "'*•-'* .= '^''*''" ^^' •'«^'^' which.-" liend'er : Alexander ;nl>. 
 ject.rt .Media, than which no resrion is more opulent, to Parmenio -»«=: than who 
 nobody was more learned (fruirifm).—^i bv access. - ' ^"^ " ' --' " 
 somefhivfj to somethuiq, uti aliqiia re in aliqu;! re • 
 (ijeruudial phrase).— «» dicere. 
 
 «in 
 
 1 
 
 pred. p. 2.-)0. Ons. 1.—»» to apply 
 -»» dialeclica ratio.— «o exi)licaie 
 
 ns» certain.— 2. There is no admixture^ in the soul which seems to be of terresfrfal 
 origins.— 3. There is nobody that considers Cicero a greater orator than Demosthenes. 
 —4. There was no])ody that dared to open his mouth*.— 5. There is no subject on which 
 the learned disagree so much.— 6. What lapse of time» can replace» divine power? — 
 7. What is there that should hinder me to follow that [view] which seems reasonable' 
 to me*— 8. Who is there that believes that future [thintrs] can be conjectured** out of 
 dreams?— 9. There is no living being», except"» man, that has any notion»» of God.— 
 10. There is nothiiii: that leniith'"'' of time cannot achieve»3.— 11. Tliere is nothing in the 
 whole world that does not belong to the universe as a part'*.— 12. Who is there that 
 does not hate Tarquin the Haughty ?— 13. Who is there that would not like»» to seem 
 benevolent ?'«— 14. Who is there that does not understand, that by this one law the 
 whole republic is annihilated ?"— 15. Who is it that divulges rumors of this kind ?— 
 1»;. What is the reason that you think him to be insolvent"*?— 17. There is no reason 
 why ill this case a prominent genius»» should berequired'^o.- 18. There is noreason why 
 you should call 21 that man from the province.— 19. There is no reason why you should 
 risk ^vour popular! tys*-» by proposing^s t^uch a law.— 20. Nothing is honest, that is done 
 unwillingly^* [or] under compulsion.— 21. Nobody is [to be called] happy who believes 
 in"» this iheory'-*».— 22. There is no good [man] that holds»' this opinion.— 23. Nobody 
 can be a president-^^ of the republic who is not born in thiscountry^».- 24. Nothing can 
 i)e truly useful which is acqiiired^o by crimes».— 25. Nobody can be [called] rich who 
 covets the thincs of otherssa.- 2«. You cannot send me anything from that city which 
 will be more acceptaldess.- 27. The speaker said3* nothing by which the passions^» of 
 the multitude were aroused^*.- 28. I have nothing toS' compare with Scipio's friend- 
 ship.— 2<*. 1 have never met 3» with any [man] from whom3» I withdrew** mure gladly*». 
 ~»i. The name of no [man], that had been among the^e*3, ^as wiihheld*3.— 31. I never 
 have known anyone who said nothing with greater airs**.- 32. No one has yet wished to 
 see*» me w hom*« I refused to receive on account of my engagements. — 33. Nobody who 
 is hurrying*' to his burnintr house*'*, will admire even*» the most exquisite^" music»». — 
 'M. I respect»'-' no i)ursuit^3 which has money for its object^* (Seneca).— 35. After Panae- 
 tius nothing has been written on this subject, at least [nothiuir] with which I agree»».— 
 3(i. Nobody, who has»« a manly spirit»', can tolerate the bearing»" of that man.— 37. Who 
 is there of all [men], provided»» he has any intercourse with the Muses, who should not 
 rather wish*" to be this mathematician»» than that tyrant?— ;i8. There is no one. but he 
 would rather wish to die than be converted into some form^» of a beast^s. while*^* at 
 th»' same time having the mind of man.— 39. There was no one, but he said that the 
 opinion of this [man] was most correct "^ ».—40. No day passes, but Satrius calls on me««. 
 —41. I have never sent a letter home, but another letter for you accompanied it*'. — 
 42. Ilortensius let*» no day pass without either speaking**» in the forum, or meditating 
 without the Ibriim. 
 
 X. Relative subjunctives porxowiNc. the analogy of subjunctives with nega- 
 tive antecedents, li. 17.— 1. You will find few that will ajrree with you.— 2. How few 
 are there that deny wealth and pleasures to be goods !— 3. He took'" [a] few assistants'» 
 whom he thought to be comj)etent'''^ to perform the work.— 4. I was the only one to 
 whom both'3 [alternatives] were open'*.— 5. Y'ou were the «nly one who [ever! wished 
 to have his colleague as a master'».— 6. Have you alone the privilege to claim this right 
 
 » Pro.— 2 = nothing mixed {mixtum).—^ of terrtsttial origin , ex terra natus.— * hiscere^ 
 — » = what lapse of time (Vttustas) is there, that can etc.—* conficere. — ' probabilis. — 
 « conjicere.— » living being. animal.~»'^pra?ter.— »» notitia.— »2 lontrinquitas.— »3 assequi. 
 — '* = that is not a part of the universe (nninersuni).—^^ velle. — »* beneficus. — " deJgre. 
 — »* See p. 1<»8, Obs. 3.—'» excellens ingenium.— 20 requirere.— 2» devocfire. — 2a /^ ^^gj^ 
 one's jiopiilayity^ cum populo in invidiam venire.- »3 leirein rogSre, — 24 _ tj^at is done by 
 an unwillinir [one] (inrVut:), by a compelled [one].— 2» sequi (with accus.). — ^e ratio. — 
 2' sequi.— 2« princeps.— 2» intra finis nostros.— 3» parere.— 3» scelus.— 32 p. i, 8 358.— 
 33 jiuuiidus. — 34 proferre. — 35 animi. — 38 excitSre.— 3' = which I compare. — Sb ^on- 
 veiilre aliqiiem.— 3» unde.— *" ablre. — *» lubenter.— *2 = who had been in that number. 
 — *3 occiiltare.— ** majOre auctoritfite. — *» convenlre. — ** Render: 'for whom (dat. 
 INCOM.MODI) I was enga^red (oc€updtus)\ — *' currere.— *» = to the conflagration of his 
 house. — *» by ne qvidern.— '^^ suavis. — »» cantus. — »2 suspicere.— »3 gtudinm. — »* = 
 
 probatur 
 IS only 
 
 some commerce with tht; Muses. — *° matle with infinitive clause. — *» mathematicus. — 
 •2 figflra. — <»3 bestia.— ** 9!/?/wi with subjunctive of periphrastic tutnre.—^^ somebody's 
 opinion is correct, aliquis vere sentit. — •* domnni mearn tentitdre. — «' Render : I have 
 never sent one letter home, that not /Another was [directed] to thee. —*s pati. — *» dicere. — 
 '" sibi assumere. — " minister. — '2 idoneus, withgerundial dative.— '3 uterque. — '* licet.— 
 '» Render: Who wished (velle) to have him, whom you had [as] a colleague, [as] a master. 
 
 w hich goes out (exlre) into money (ces). — »» / agree with something, mihi pro 
 uliquid.— "* by esse. — »' virile injjenium. — »* viiltus habitusque.— »» = who has 
 
 li 
 
58^ 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 585 
 
 for youi ?— 7. He is' the only person to whom I can confide^ this [secret].— 8. This 
 [man] was the only one* amoujj; those conilemned. who was i)rivy to that crime.— 
 i>. Tliere was [btU] one desire hy which all, who were present, were Hcruated^.— 10. There 
 are those who think that body and soul perish toj^etlier*.— 11. I'lu-re are those who 
 neither know how to decline'^ the benefits which they receive, nor how to return" [theml. 
 —12. There were some that thought the flj^ht would result» disastrously'» to our [troops]. 
 — 1-3. There were some to whom Curio seemed the tliird orator of that ai;e.— 14. There 
 were some who either were anxious" for some new commotionsi^ in {of) the republic, 
 or who turned'^ the discords of the citizens to their profit.— 15. 'J'here are certain [thinirs] 
 whicii are'* neither commanded, nor prohibited by the laws.— IG. There are those pres- 
 ent who are ready to shed their blood'* for the welfare of the republic— 17. There are 
 certain philosophers who think that invalids" bhonld'^ neitlier be called"^ happy'", nor 
 unhappy-". — 18. There are oblij^ations-' which we are owint;'-^ more to some-' [persons] 
 than to others.— 19. There is a certain^* [quality] which is theoretically"''* rather than 
 practically diftereiit from virtue.— 20. There are many thinj^s which may be said on"'"* 
 Doth sides of the [question].— 21. We know some [persons] who studied^^ many years 
 with a philosopher, without^** acquiriiij? even a tincture Xot philosophy].— 22. Ihere 
 were two roads in all-" by wnich^" the Ilelvetians could reacli^' the country of the Se- 
 quaui. — 2.3. There are seven cities^^ which claim^^ Homer as their townsman.— 24. It is 
 tjiis [fact] by which it is proved that this part of philosophy is not superfiuous^*. — 
 25. It is philosophy which teaches the true way^* of liviujj, aud^"* which makes it impos- 
 Bible for its follower ever to be unhappy. 
 
 XI. ItELATlVK SUB.IL'NCTIVES OP POSSIBILITY, NECESSITY, PESinABLENESS, AND DOUBT. 
 
 R. 18. — 1. VVe want37 a commander who has legitimate authority^». — 2. We must learn 
 thino;s3« that enable us*" to be useful to our country.— 3. We must act with'" a diL'niiy*"'' 
 and firmness'3 which is proofs' not only ajrainst iulhumce** but even au'ainst suspicion. — 
 4. Perhajjs [somebody] has told you this who has not seen it himself, but heard** it 
 from others.— 3. Money*'^ should be made by means'''^ which are free*'-* from Ijaseiiess*". — 
 6. Is there anything else*' that you [would] say in your behalf ^■■^ *— 7. lias any onegone 
 dowii*3 this road wlio carried a wo(>den**chest*^ on ills shoulder*^ y-S. To you I wish*' 
 a farm*'"', in which you can enjoy*" al the i)Ieasures'''<' of atjriculture*'.— 9. What deli'jhl®^ 
 of the mind can be compjued*'^ with the i)ursuits"* of those who are always sejirciiiu^''* 
 for somelhiiuf that [may] contribute to the well-being of thc^r fellow-men**? — 10. In 
 the presenf^corruption"'' of morality**, somethinir is required^" that [may] reform" 
 inveterate abuses^"''.— 11. Our people'^ do not desire monitors who [shall] leil them mi- 
 nutely^*: ' Walk^* thus! speak thus! dine thus! drink thus! ' — 12. 11" you know any one who 
 will take^* the villa on this condition, let me know^^ at your earliest convenience"'*. 
 
 XII. Relative subjunctives of adaptedness andpuupose. li. 19.— 1. 1 know [some- 
 thinji:] that [may] give you relief'".— 2. 1 have fouiul [somebody] wlio [might] be prop- 
 erlyBo entrusted»^ with the defence**-* of our cause.— 3. He erected a Ibrtification^^ in 
 
 1 Render: Are you distinguished {eximius) [as] the only one in whom this holds good 
 ivalere)?—'^ Render: I have this [one as] the only [one] Xo whom.—' credere. — * Ren- 
 der : This [man] was condemned [as] the only [one] who was privy {ron/fciun) of that 
 crime (^ce/M*). — * movCre. — * uiul.— ' negjlre. — ^ referre. — * esse.—'" c.ilamitOsus. — " (ohe 
 anxious for mmet king, aliquid quicrere. — "» motus. — '^ to turn something to one's profit, 
 aliqu:"l re pasci. — '* render by active construction ' which to do the laws neither command 
 (Jufjire), nor prohibit'.—'* vitam prot'undere.— '* inra/ids = homo (sing.) valetudine 
 parum prosper^ usus. — " gerundial. — "^ dicere. — '" beiltus. — -" miser.—"-' ofticium. — 
 ■"'"■' which are owed (debtre). — -^ alii. ..alii.— 2* quiddam. — '^* which from virtue can be 
 separated rather by the idea {cogifatio) than by the thing.— 2« iti ntramque partem — 
 2' apud philosophum persedGre. — '^*^ and drew ((lucrt) not even the color. — '■"' omiiTno. — 
 3<» qua.— 31 jx-rvenlre ad finis.— ^2 civitiis,— 33 say that Homer is their citizen. — 34 super- 
 vacuus. — 35 ratio. — 3« Heiukr by involtition 'to which who has given himself, can by no 
 means be unhappy. — 37 nobis opus est. — 38 imperium legitimuin.— 3» artes. — «> = w'hicli 
 effect that (ut) we are of use (absth. dat ) to the State. — ♦' adhibCre aliquid (gerundial). — 
 42 «rnivitas. — ^^ constantia, — •«* to fje proof against something, resistcrealicui rei. -■*' gratia. 
 — *■* acci[)ere. — *' rem lamiiinrem qu;erer(\— *'< eis artibus. — *» to t)e free from something, 
 abesse ab aliquil re.—*'' turpitildo. — *' Incorporat(! 'else' {aliud) in the relative clause. 
 — *2 pro te.— *3 descendere. — *•» ligneus.— **arca.— *' humerus,- *' optjlre (plur.).— *"» rus. 
 — *• frui. — *'' obiectamentum. — *' airrt colendi.— "^ oblectatio. — *3 coiiferre. — ** studium. 
 — ^^ to search fo^' something, aliquid anquirere. — «« Render: 'That looks {specfiire ac 
 valere) towards (ad) living well and h-ippily '.— *^ hie.—*" perversitas.— *" mores.—'"' de>i- 
 denTre. — " disrutere. — '2 malum.— '^ homines nostri. — '* ad singula. — '* incedere (sing.). 
 — '* emere.— ■" certiOrem facere (fut.).—''^ primo quoque tempore.—'» saldtem aft"erre. — 
 *" recte.— 8' to entrust somebody ivith something, alicui aliquid credere.—"''' vindicaiio. — 
 *' locum munlre. 
 
 "4F 
 
 which the soldiers [might] find a safe refuge' if they were pressed by the enemy. — 
 4. Crops were growing in these fields which might serve"'* as pasture for the ilraught- 
 hor?es.— 5. Antonius has [something] to3 promise* to his [adherents]. — 0. Fortune has 
 given» me noihiui: to bestow*».— 7. CamiUus was deemed' worthy of being called'* 
 the second founder^ of the city after'" Itonnilus — 8. Virtue makes" men wortiiy of 
 coming into communion'"'* with'3 (iod.— 9. Who seemed to us a fit person to receive 
 gifts from'*, cannot be unworthy of being our creditor'*.— 10. That architect was fully 
 competent'* to buil(l"the l)ri<lge over"' the rivtT.— II. The horsemen, in order to'* wipe 
 out"-" by bravery the disgrace'-* 'of [their] fliglit. lought at all places.— 12. The consul gave 
 to D. .Junius commaiKi"^-' at the mouth"'*3 oi" the Vulturnus river, with the order to send 
 corn to the army whenever a"^* ship had arrived^*.- l;i C'lesar made"-** the foot-soldiers"-' 
 maiifleuvre"-*» umoni: the cavalry"^» that they might, by daily practices», acquire*' skiips 
 in this kind of fighting33.— 14." Every day a great number of ships assembleu3* for the 
 l)urpose (»t carryiijg sui)plies3* [to the army].- 15. Armed [men] were placed at that very 
 ^pot, who w«'re to murder you. — IH. Places in the Circus were assigned3* to the Patri- 
 ciansand Knights, wliereeach [rank] mighthaveth(!irown seats {specfaculum)^"^ .~\7. The 
 Mamertini «^'ave'^ to Verrc* both a city into which" to convey*'' his gteallng8*^ and a 
 ship in which to remove** [them].— 18. Artaxerxes presented Themistocle8*3 with the 
 city of .Magnesia, to furiiish him with** bread; Lampsacus, from wliich** he was to 
 take** [jjisj wine, [and] My us*', from which he was to liave [his] vegetables**.- 19. The 
 Rhodians sent Thra.xyllus to Rome, in order that by his eloquence the good graces** of 
 the Senate might be won for them*" — *20. What hope of return*' have we if we give to 
 an unknown shipwrecked** [person] a vessel to convey*3 him home?— 21. Moses estab- 
 lisheii** new ceremonies** amojii' the Jews, in order to strengtlu-n thereby the nation 
 f»)r the future**.— 22. Themistocles fortified*' Port Pira^eus with walls, the more easily 
 to defend the cily.— 23. 1 sent him word** that I would arrive in three days.— 24. I 
 have appointed** [a man] to take niy place*" if Icaiinor be present in person*'.- 25. Clo- 
 dius hired*"'* assas?ins*3 to take Milo's life by an aml)ush**. 
 
 Xlll. Rki.ative sfB.iLNCTivE OF QUALITY. li. 20.— 1. Antonius will he the man to 
 whom crowds** of profligate citizens will fiock from all quarters**. — 2. Apronius was a 
 man who had the privilege*' both to say and to write with impunity*" everything'^* he 
 wished.— 3. Sulpicius is not the man to be afraid lest his principles'" be in danger"^' 
 from the artifices'"^ of [any] prepared'3 si)eech. — 3. I am not the man to pronounce'*, 
 whatever we see'*, to be such'* as we see it.— 5. These men will be such" as to consent'* 
 to nothing prejudicial"* to the public interesf^". — t». P. Crassus was in a position (i.-!) tiiat 
 nobody in the repul)lic thought himself siii)erior*' to himeither""'* in honor or in wealth''3. 
 — 7. You are a man who have always been on the side^-* of the patriots'^*. — S. Tiie chief- 
 commander was a man in whom the s«»ldiers placed nnbound<'d confidence*'* : the otiier 
 ofiicers"' were tnen who had seen service^» in Spain under** Sertorius.— 9. [77a.y sen- 
 tence, and No. 10. 11. 12. totje franiformed into relative constructions with attributive syn- 
 detic unftcedents, arcen'ding to Or^. 6.] The works which M. Atrrippa erected*" in the 
 
 * Perfugium. — '•* = in which the draught-horses [ini^ht] be pastured (/)a^'C6;¥).— 3 relative. 
 — * polliceri.— * invenlre. -* dare. — ' habere. — » i>y active construction (/ am called = 
 they call (ferre) me). — » conditor. — '" a.— " efficere. — '"^ consortium.— '3 jrenitive. — 
 ** Render : Who seemed to us worthy 'of whom ' we should receive gifts (bf-nefium). — 
 ** Render: 'rnworthy to whom we owe' (debtre). — ^^ fully competent, satis i'tloneiis. 
 --" />/'tty.»'.N'^ with gerundial dative (fqciendo). — '^ in.—'* Can ' in order to' be rendered 
 here by a relative* — '•*" delcMe.— *' I'lirpitflldo. — ■•*2 pru^ponere. — ^^ ad ostium. — '-** by ^ ut 
 g'/isgue' — '•** accedere. — "-* jubCri. — "-*' legionarius. — '-*'"* piwliilri.- ** equites.— »" consue- 
 tfldo.— 31 percipere. — 32 ^^-^7/ j,^^ usus, with genitive.- 33 proBlioriim.— 3* convenlre. — 
 3* coinmeatum supi)ortare.— 3« Raider : Places were divided to etc.— 3' Render : Where 
 each [rank] might make spectacles 10 themselves.— ^-^ prailiere.— 3* by the locative ad- 
 verb.—*" de|)ortare.— *i fiirtum (plur.).— *"-* exportilre.— *3 dat.—** = furnish (pmbere) 
 to him bread.— ** locat. advt^rb.— ** sumere.--*' Gen Myuntis. — *'' ops(niium (sing.). — 
 *'* to v'in the good graces, \o\\x\\\\\Xyn\ conciiiare.—*" dative t»f the interested jierson. — 
 *' rt'cipere beueficiiiin.— *'- naut"ragus.— o3 = by which he may be forwarded back (revehi). 
 — ** consiitiiere aliquid alicui.—** ritiis.— ** iii posterum.— *' munlre. — *» sent [persons] 
 who were to announce.—** constituere. — *" meo nomiiu! agere. — *' ipse. — *"-* conducere. 
 — *3 sicarius.— ** to take one's life by an amfnixh, aliquem improvidum ex iiisidiis 
 opprimere.—** Render : To whom' runnings (co//c//r»''/.'») of profligate (perditu^) citizens 
 [will] be made.--** undique.— *' = t(» whom it was allowed (/io^/"). — *» imj)Qiie.— ** by 
 the indefinite relative.-- '" fides (sing).— " tol>e in dangtr, temptari.— '"- insidia?.— 
 '3 compositus. — '* dicere.— '* = whatever is seen.—'* talis quails. — " talis. — '** tx> con- 
 sent to something, aliquid sententiis confirmjlre.— '* = which seems to be contrary 
 {obtsse) to etc. — ''O utiliias.— >=' = tliat nobodv preferred (anteferre) himself to him (rela- 
 tively expressed).— »"-* neither.— "^3 fortilnie.— "^* to be on somebody's side, alicfijus partes se- 
 qui.— »* boni.— "* summe coufidere.— ^' dux.— s^* stipeiidia facere.— ^» apud.— *" excitare. 
 
 •\ 
 
 ^ 
 
586 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 y^- 
 
 ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 587 
 
 city, were such that they both 8nrj)ai»scd> the majriiificonce or former' [works], and 
 it'DiaiiuiP uiisjurpajjscd in the fiitiinv— 10. Perha|)s what you will hear from me is euch, 
 that not all will «ijprove* of it.— 11. Tlit- act* which the tril)Uiies had undertakfii was 
 fiieh that it aroiisfd*. not the lowe:*t elashU'S»^, hut llu' very headr» of the l^leheiane". — 
 12. KiiiiT I)l■j(ltatu^'^'* troops mver were oi u quality that he could make war"» with 
 tlu-m on the Homan people. — 18. We were distin-jui^hed" hy qualirier^i^ that do not ^l:ow" 
 themselves in hattle. — H. The people conferred'* tin- hii:he.-t powi-r'^ on a man'* who, Ix-- 
 forc. had in amost disfxracefiil tnanner'^ hrokt-n'** the laws. —15. \N hat State is sostrun::"' 
 that it miu'ht not be utiorly^" (h'^troyed■-'' by hati--"'^ and discord^-^y — 1«. No force-* is fo 
 {^nat that it mij,dit not he brokeu'^^by the sw(*rd-'*.— 17. Was there cvei a man'''^ fo crtiel. 
 as to rorl)id anyone to mourn * — 18. Nobody is so hostile to our cause as to call us ba<l 
 citizens.— H). Nothin^j has ever happened to nnfortunutely^*^, that it thould not be use- 
 ful''* to some one. 
 
 XIV. Causal and adveksativk kelativb clause?. 7?. 21. — 1. The j:fovernor^*' of tlie 
 State, who was of the opinion-" that he should do his ofliciaP^ duty without any re- 
 pud to party, reji-ctecPS the otrcr^*.— 2. Zopyrus was dcridi-d by the others, who did not 
 acknowlcdi^e^* these vices [to e.xist] in Socrates.— .'J. 1 know that the master was aii'MV. 
 since I played the eavesdropj)er3«.— 4. Sleep euil>raced3^ me, since 1 had been awake'» 
 till late^" in the ni<,'ht.— 5. 'I'his is a]tot;:ether'"' your own fault*', since you despised the 
 advice we tendered*"-' to yoti at your departure*^. — 0. The servants, who were of the 
 same stami)** as their master, treated Habonius most shamefully. — 7. We ourselves, 
 althoiit;li we were strongly attached*^ to that party*", are (luily more estran;:ed*^ [from 
 it].— 8. Nero, althouj^h he was <,'iven*'^ to a mo^t immoderate debauchery, was only three 
 times indispo-ed durinir his whole life*».—'.». Should that man have been elected with- 
 out bribe-^", who, besides his wealth, had nothiii"' at all topun thefav«>r^' of his fellow- 
 citizens? — 10. I helieve52_ i djd wronoraa ihat I left&* you.— 11. You yourself acknowl- 
 edired^' this to be correct^», wheii^^ you refused'^^ to follow Pompey to the war^». — 
 12. We admire Fabricius for his belief*" that even the enemy has some riirhls which we 
 Hie bound to respect*'. — 13. I am very thanklul*^ t(» old a^'e*' lor** increasiuti my eajrer- 
 ness*^ for conversation**, [and for] abatin;,'''' [my eaircrness] (or drink"* and food. — 
 14. What place can bravery have*» in liim who says ihat i)ain is the tjre >test evil "! — 
 1.5. We admire the bravery of those who, in battle, prefer^" death to llijrht.— l^i. Ilavini; 
 rehised^' to riile"'^ in his own State, he could not be a subject'^ "m a loreiL'n** [one]. — 
 17. Observe tile discretion^'' of [tluue] Gauls. Not kiiowim:** the life and nature of men, 
 and hiviiii; heard [only] so much that 1*. Sulla and the others were in the same"* di>^- 
 iress^s as'» Cetht;i!;us, they ask«'d whether tlu'V had''"' the same i)urpo.>-e8'.— IS. Who 
 lhroltled*2 his intimate*'^ [frii'iid], what will iie""* do with'"' an enemy if an op])ortiinity 
 otters»* ? — I;*. You cannot"'' [any] longer retain in [the comnniud of) the j)roviiice a 
 nian''^ who is makiiij,' with theeliemy treaties^* disj)o.'ini:*'<' of our allies, and with our 
 allies [is makin;; treaties] disposinirof our citizens.— 20. I shall uiihoitatiiii.'h'" delend 
 a m in»2 wiiom whok; provinces wish to be sale'-'^. — 21. Ilavini; attacked"* this i)ait\»» 
 with the fiercest»* hatred, he now became»' its most ardent supporter— 22. 'I his is a 
 
 ' Vincere. — ^ prior.— ^ Hender : And were surpassed by no [mai:nitic«'nce] afterwards. 
 — * proiiilre aliquid. — 'actio. — ' accendere. — "> inlima plel)s (sing.). — * plebs (sing.).— * = 
 Kill!,' Dejotariis had those troops. — '"helium inleire alicui.— " pra^stilre. — '- ea' res — 
 13 — which <lo not <:o loi ward {/uv/lre) into battle (inerely determiniiii,' the antecedent 
 rc^) — 14 (lefene. — " imperium.— '* is. — '' bv the aclverb (V//^7y^.^■).— '^ violjlre.— '» hrmus. 
 
 — -" funditus.— 21 evertere,— 22 plur.— 23 ^ijjicidjnni (])lur.).— 2* \ifi._ '^s fraiiL'ere.— 
 2* ferrum. — 27 by ecqvl^. — 2« male. —2» prodcsse. — 'o pnrfectus. — 3' existimflre — ^-^ len- 
 der : That oftices should [be] performed (prjest.lre) without faction ( f'acfio). — ^^ re^puere. 
 
 — 34 conditio. — ^^ airnoscere. — 3* ad fores ausctiltilre. — ^7 comi)Iecli. — 3* viudljlie. — 
 3» multa no.v.— *" omnlno.— *' culpa (that thy alto<;ether fault is).— *2 oflerre.— *3 partic. 
 con>tr., by j/rofiei<cen.'i.—** mores.—*' deditissimus. — ** pars.—*' abalienare.— *" — to 
 be «.f most immoderate luxury. — *• = languished altojiether (07?j»7/»o) thrice.— '"jxnitis 
 (th(f question to be expressed in the indicative and without any interrcirative |)article). — 
 " fo (/(tin /A«/rt?'w, aninios sibi conciliiXre. — '2 videor.— '^ pe'ccilre. — ^* disc«d«re ah. — 
 '^jiidicSre. — '* veriis.— " relative. — "* nolle. — '» in castra. — *" = who believed,— 
 *' Paraphrase: That there exists (esse) some crime (ne/tis) even apiinst {i/i) the enemy 
 (/lOstis). — «2 magnain pratiam habere,- *3 scnectus. — «* relative.-*' aviditas, nif/i fjeni- 
 the.~*^ scrmo.— 6' toUere.— *« potio. — «» by es.-ic.—''^ anteponere.— " nolle (re/a/ire con- 
 sfniction).— '2 principem esse.— '^ to be a subject^ servTre.— '* allCnus.— " dili;:entia.— 
 '* nosse ir^fdfire const/wfio/i). — " par.—"* calamitas.— '» relative.— "" esse in.—'"' volun- 
 tas.— «2 jnirulare.— »3 familiilris.— »* is.— **' dative.— '"* dari labl. abs. in the peif.).— *"' by 
 an aftirmative imperative sentence. — *"* is. — ^» pactiOnes facere (at the end (if' the peiiod). 
 •—»» dis}xMnr/ of = de.— »' sine ulla dubitatinne.— »2 is,— »3 salviis.— »* persequi (xelatire 
 const rucf ion).— ^^ faciio. — »* acer.— »' = bejjau to support {aiijnvdre atque 07'ndre) it with 
 the greatest now zeal. 
 
 / I 
 
 mo«»t frrievou'^i error indeed', which (e/ qui) may be fataP to the safety of the repub- 
 nc*Ui The reason Of mai\ is imperfect, but perfectible' -24. The Syracusians, 
 fbein.'l me of experience*, who (i. e. ^ so that th.y') wtc able to see in the dark', 
 kei t an"cc mut« hi the pirates that were daily beheaded». -"25. Archaga hus, a noble- 
 mi.ded'o ma 1 vvh.. (i. e. Ko that he ') wished to be loved and esteemed' ' by his [towns- 
 men 1 felt sore''-' that such an office'3 should have been ten. ered'* to him.-2b._ [Ihese 
 n e r old fa«ldoned people", who (i. e. 'so that they^) judged'* others ' Irotiilheir [own] 
 ch ricu'r''^^^ [tliis statement].- 27. [That] timid and inexperienced'» man, who 
 
 h i ne her' cm rage n^or intelligence20 enough, did not think the "her'tance to be Nvc.rtb 
 so mS"' that he should endanger22 [thereby] his citizensnip.--28. O the sordid^s [men] 
 Avho accepte the Mft. [and] the wicked2* [man] who gave [it] !-21). Oimprudent'o youth 
 wo dUNt surrender hyseff to the faith of a tyrant !-30. It is not e^asy2« „ recognize 
 r tterer, s nee 7«W^^^ he frequently flatters2' [while] pretendinjz2« t« f insav2. ana 
 at Hstao Miller- himself o be cnvinced^i by better32 arguments.-31. Although's Pb.to 
 w^s cruelly injured»* by Uionysias, since (quiirpe) [the latter] had ordered him to besold 
 TntoXVerv"' he yet returned to Syracuse.-:^. The consuls did not restrain^* theai-dor 
 o he 1 -ions' knowin^aVthat the^aw recruits^s of the enemy were not equate, he 
 con st3r!^33 A great part of the Fid- nates, having»' been added a%<^<l,J«"|^t^7. «;^»^^ 
 komai - knew the Latin*' [language]. -34. Y'ou cannot wonder that I should dislike*' 
 hnu" w'ho"rthe Itoman pe<tplcTs inin\ical*3, especially since I in ^^^"'•■^fV^i^^^^^JJ";^ 
 of the Roman people, should*' take** even more than my share*' in*» the burdens 
 and duties'" [due to it]. 
 
 XV Locative clauses (§ 616).-!. Where the king had fallen, a sepn cher was con- 
 btnict'ed -2 When the enemv had come to that [place] where our [soldiers] were d- 
 den in ambush, those [that were] fleeing suddenly stopped", and, urning a u d 
 t^l.fde Ln a tack on fthe r] pursuers'2.-3. Till a ship has come to the place for which a 
 p ssage^ias\M.en aken [ill U it does not belong'* to the owner", but to the passen- 
 •^er.i.'^_4 You must directly return there from where you have departed.-5 J he i"' 
 {■.abitants: in the third ni-ht-watch, madea sally" from the town on that f^^e] where'8 
 he ascen '» to our fortitication.s seemed to be least steep«".--«. They met*' the Gauls 
 eleven mles*'Mo^ citv], where"* the river Allia mixes*» ^^^ ^vaters w.Ui those 
 
 of he Tiber -7. They returned** to Home, where <hc war w;as preparing*' ^^'th the 
 ^rea est enJp'V»* -8 I de|.arled fr.)m Svracus.^ om which [place] the I''|,«sage«' to 
 Greece w^uiJ^d to be safest.-i». On the ihird. .,iay I left«« Tarsus where*» I had ar- 
 
 rVvfd Ure\lay before'».-10. Ipray" [to] thee, ^>, ^«"-".^-^"Vhef ' Tl^The conlul a^'- 
 where a ten pie, worthy of thy greatness'2,w-ill receive-» thee.-ll The con^u ac^ 
 ce Died the capitulation of the city'*, to which the routed army" ^^d fled'*. --12. I 
 U. ught'' it necessary-^Mo point ouf» the sources from which you might draw" th s 
 k w ed-e-' -13. We are not going to sufter^2 i„ this country^» any one ln>m whom^* 
 dan-er ,miy come to our liberty.-13. The consul occupied that town in order- to col- 
 lect"'- there the supplies" for the army^ 
 
 1 T amentAbilis —2 «aiie —3 e\itiO-us.— * salus publica.— ' = but which can be perfected. 
 - or ]^;iH. K^^^^ pe; t 1.;-' oicu^^^^^^ h.bCre.-« seciiri ferlr. (quasi- 
 
 c.bli'^'ifSIjTcti^ve ,1^ if an i'Klirect question).-'" nobilis._''djigere.-'^grav^^^ 
 fcrrc- (With inflnitive-clause).-'3 proviucia.-J* dare.-" '^^^^^Jf^^^^'J^^/z-'o^'lf^^-Z 
 17 ceteri — »» natQia.-'» imperltus.^20 consilium.-2i p. 2b7, Obs. 4 , p., 27) li.^. 
 
 22 Render : That he should come into i\oxx\M{duhiinn) on [his] citizenship « t^);- 
 
 23 sordidu-»- 2* imi>robus.— 2' impr..vidus.— 2* = A flatterer (assen afar) 1=^ not_ easily 
 r.:o^^mnSTiieo p. 2.38.^foll. Obs. I.-2' blandIri.-2B simulare with mhninve^ 
 
 •lau^e--» liti-!lre.-3" ad extremum.-»! vincere.— ^2 potior.-»» q"H™"T , -,7 ? f"^ 
 ^^ obe soldinlosavery, veiiumdari.-»* /;o/ to restrain, indulgSre with dat— »',by nt 
 wi h the ?ebli ve -i»^ Sus miles (sing.).-»» tot>e equal to the contest, satis certamini esse. 
 -*" coionu- -^*' p. 84, R. ;i8.-*2 alicui inimlcum esse.-*3 infestus.-** pro voluntate.- 
 45 deS-** susT pere.-*' quam pars virllis postulat.-*" partitive genitive, depend- 
 enf ^ yi;/..-*» onifs (>i«^.).-- "ulnus (sing.).-^l C'>"^i^tere.-'2 Render -. ami carried 
 a.ferre) the converted standards {sirrnmn) against the 1'"'-^ »", ^ j" f^^J^^'T ' Keen 
 Till (quoad) ' it has be.n come ' (perve,nre. impeus. p-^^s.) thither w hither a ship has heen 
 
 tnken (sumere).-^* esse.-" dominus.-*- "*''"^*rJ?'T •'' o'^S- OKs^n e^a'^fc.der • 
 censrs -»" arduus.— *' occurrere (iniptrs. pass. ).— *2 by lapis (p. 220, Ob> V-—^\^f^^'^^^ " 
 Wher /the river Allia is mixed to the Tiberine (77^>emw.) •^trearn.-** unpcM-s. pass.- 
 6' uar-lre -«* vi- -*' trajectus.-*'* = departed from.-*» pervenire (see p. ii, Ji. hO-— 
 '" ridie 'ejus diei.-'' precS.i.-'2 ampl.tQdo.-'» subjunctive by attnvct.on.-' urbem 
 in dedit^Onem acci .ere -" fusa acies.-'" se conferre.-" putilre.-"* gerundia of the 
 
 main verb.-'* ^i^^^^ 
 
 "ein this country etc) -" civitaa.--^* adverb—»' relative constmction.~»« comportaie. 
 
 Render passively (the supplies to be collected).—**' commeStus. 
 
COMrLETING THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 589 
 
 588 THAT-CL.VUSES. 
 
 CHAPTER THIRD. 
 
 TIIAT-CLAUSES. 
 I. COMPLETING TIIAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 ^ 617. That-clauses are either completing, or advcrUal {% 456 ; 
 § GIO, li 3, Obs. 1, p. 483 foil.)- The former are those which complete 
 the idea of their governini; words ia the principal seutencc. They have 
 either tlie form of an infinilive-chuise, or the form of a finite clause in- 
 troduced by ut {uti), ne, qum, quomUus, or quod. Quod reciuires the pre- 
 dicate of tlie clause to be in the indicative, except if the clause ^^ oblique 
 (p 388). The other conjunctions require a subjunctive in all 1 hat- 
 clauses, whether the clause contains an oblique, or a direct statement. 
 —Sometimes finite That-clauses take an asyndetic form (p. 473, OtJS. 3), 
 their predicates Wmg in the subjunctive {R. 24, Obs. 1, G). 
 
 Or^ The form of complotinsr That-clanso* is dctermituMl 1) by the nature of he 
 M«,w?:rr 24 O." l\ • 27 )v the" .'ovfri.in- word in the i.rincipul ^ontcncc. Coinplet i- 
 tS trUuisr^a ^eith^T « ii l.e relation of objects to the (logical) ,.redu;ttte ol he 
 ir^; d, /em relation of pcb-ikcts to the .ame. or (c) in the rdulum 
 
 of aVSiu't^^^^^^^^^ Thev al.o may «/) perform the lunction of r;"Ki>'^-^-'['^';, f 
 
 the pH, c p: 1 'enteneJ.p. 4S(i foil). C^ompU-tin^' '^^'"'■'^'^'''^J^^v^^C^l^^ 
 
 iulO 0B.IECT-CLAU>?ES, SLbJECT-CLAL-SES, ATTKIBUTE-CLAUSE3, UUd 1 UhUlCArK-CLAL.Ea. 
 
 A. Object Titat-clauses. 
 
 Jlem ^^2 Object TnAT-CT.AUSES take Uie following forms: L That 
 of an infinitive clause if they depend on a ^'^f "^fj If'^'/f 'jf ^ "" o Th!'j 
 andi, and contain an oblique declarative statement (p. .>b j , A. 81).--. i ny 
 t^Ike the form of an Ut-clause (negatively «.: (^0 if they are cU'p. ml n 
 on a verbum declarandi, and contani an obhqne impemtive ^X^Wm^uX- 
 (n ISO li 83V (M if they depend on a rM-6«////m-«r«(/<, implying an ^/*wi 
 ^h^h is siH^diiil bv the That-clause (7^. 2o).-3. They take the f^»rm ot a 
 clause introduced by ne, quin, or quominus, if ^IhT depend ^^!^^^!^^ 
 faciendi mx\>\y\\vr^ nefjatiee aim which is specified by the Ih.iUlausc 
 (/e 25 Obs. 5 foli.).-4 Thcv take the form of a Quod-clanse or ot an It- 
 U',/.; if the governing verb does not belong to any o ^ »« ^^ ^ ^^|[^« 
 classes. These clauses represent the idea ot a fact which is treated ike 
 a suljdantive object (transitive, intransitive, or preposU..>nal ; ependo^^^^^ 
 on the principal predicate (A'. 20). There are several idiomatic excep- 
 tions to all these rules. 
 
 \. Verba senticndi. 
 
 Rem, 23. Verba sentiendi are those that express an act of the mind 
 (sentlre, intelliqere, meminiHse, dincere, exiMimare credere, gaudere, veren 
 cupere, pati e\c.), or an act or impression of the senses {cidere, sentire, 
 audlreAc). The That-clauses dependent on them ^r^^'^'^jr^;;" =\"f;;^ 
 and ijenerally have the Ibrm of an infinitive clause (p. o8^ A. 8 ) uitli 
 Uie tbllowing exceptions : 1) verbs of fearing (Obs. 1) ; 2) the verb dubi- 
 Ijr. with a Segative (Obs. 2-4) ; 3) verbs of emotion (Obs. 5. 0) ; 4) verbs 
 
 \ 
 
 
 n 
 
 of volition rOBS 7) ; 5) those verba sentiendi ^^^\nQ\\ in certain connections 
 have assumed the sii^nitieatiou of other classes of verbs (as .i^.rt./r, cen- 
 
 gere vide re) See Obs. 8-10. 
 
 n«- 1 V.Tbs of FEABiNO require Xe-dauses or Ut-dauses {m non\ aecordin^ to §408 
 T^^'al: ^U^o/./iu^"!Aduslviarti:e nihil dederiut. P-'^^ter l;et_,t.am; ^7 a;;K//mc/ //.«(! 
 
 (See ulf-o Cic. 
 
 ^ n.'.« ' g' That clanpcs dependent on duWare with a ne-ative, or with what is* equiva- 
 
 ]:Z^r^ZMmXi^kr^^i^^^. 1" '«er pUe ,hi» cou.,ruc.iun be- 
 camolhcroxi'Mone mcanin- ■ not to hcsilate ' (»t>cn the losical Buliject of 
 
 th? wi.,ci.faf predS • i " he .a,l^ a" that of Ihe elau.e), >. seoerally co„sm,ed jvuh an 
 
 \ "ri i'i con«i™ ' o. V n^ri iV dulntC,,-: is in ihe peripLrarfie conjUKat.on in d,,m 
 
 \n,) iliihifaiidxni puiavi uuiii (iuccnrrevem. tic. lam. U), 1«. inns yvun /'^« <^' "\'."" 
 d^nUie-l^l^^rnl cuncLdum exi.timavit guin pugna decertaret. Cae.. B G. 3, 2.3. 
 nu« 4 Sometimes other verbs of feeling and thinking, implying, hke dubifare, a, 
 
 tiili,,» /M - ne >.o«l. as : Xoii melnoi/iiin mi-.x, axon lalK » ipp.Mia! i-liit. 1 l.int. Am 4, 
 
 L!^ ,::;... .n/' Si -For hi c.nisliuclion ot neamve linpersoiial», and ne-a ive fuli- 
 'wn'tSv.'" 'vitfr Qiiin-^lHn^-ci' >'««'«• ■■" »■"' SS--'"^ ""= cou.tmcllon of nesauve verba 
 
 ^"ctf 5 ".'^l^.^gg. t!::;.^^ KMOT.O. are con..med wi.h na.rl.,,... to deno ^ 
 ^ TlH^liH^l conception of tlic conjunction quin, in this «>"f;™j"''"!;™/'''L''",j 
 of an afflnnalive conju^.lion, lint ih.t of '"']•''■■■" f^'l^l^Z^^.^t^ it M^^^^ 
 r,-rne ',"' Ke'Vori^tfn t oi? o.",S 'SS^ elc' T,.", an S 'rro^.S-^ dan.e i» not 
 
 ''"i-;'k^'S™h«ramniarl'i\'t';'u;;e^l;;.'S,S^^ 
 
 li™^^ '^^'S:^:;.^^ '!^.'=?- ^'^^v-i" 
 
 Cic \it 1 1 3 But thepa^^'age reads thus: Na.n Pompej us //o/i dutntuL \ ere cmm 
 judiaU tal qiiic de republica ntiuc eenliani, mitii proban. 
 
590 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 COMPLETING THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 591 
 
 the OH..CX Of the -oUon S.^cl^T^a^cl^c^eit^^ 
 
 clause, or thai of •<\Q>'<''ilf.''!''f'l^^^^^^^^^ .uccen^re. irasd, and }he 
 
 htUin, doFere, nutnre, 'o!hn hwie^':J''^-,l''' ^^^ auww J\rn. quo ammo 
 
 a. 3, 32.-Minime e.t "itn^'durn n^^^^^^^ ^^ Facf-davses 
 
 t quo<l-daHses expn-^^in- the o^J^^'^i of an cmo ion navc^ denotin- 
 
 I. 26 OBs. 3), in which th_e «'^^«"^«"^ "^ /'^^^.^"l^^Vf I rejoice a the tact U.at you have 
 fact mm<ieo victoria mi - 9avd.oeoguod ucuti_, 1 /e mcc ai ^^^^^^.^^^^^ ^^^.^. 
 
 a fact (<7«'<^<^o victoria tua - f/ai/rfeo to r/</o« ].l'^;^'L\W;'^^e,t7f^ro quod homines mihi 
 been victorious. ^'^''^^^''''\'^''V"''''' M ^/S !> rhe~-!me S arJrft2//r:.e«'i^«^/^ the.c 
 invident). Since every yejrb ot enioiion V^-.f . ,^,^ "'J-^e pir forni of That-clauses de- 
 verbs may always take infifatire clauses, ^^ ! '^ J, ^' "i^, / .^ ^^„-" ' J. Vhe .ame lnn<Mi..ns, and 
 perulentoi; verbs <,flV^^n,^Bo^^^^^^^ 
 
 trenera y arc convertible. Only lor rneioiuai ^^"^^yj^; \ c . ;^ conci-er and l)ncti'r. 
 
 the other if it is better fittin.:^ the [f ^ « , . i^^"^';!'^,^, ^'^l': ,„ Ul^^Ga^us ad.si gan- 
 
 at the^^ame time gen 
 
 have become a.qnainted etc.. I am very ^r'^tl/V'^-f^^lI'VolurihTihe ;,y;m^^^^ «f ti»e 
 
 and the int\nitive clauses, dep.-ndent '"> '^^j'^'^'f. ^^^nnce ^^^ »« mentioned 
 
 emotion ; but this must be ^'^''"«"^^^^''V i? s ite £^^^^^^ ««• known, when 
 
 as a stale of its subject, the ^"'^/^^'^"^6 «.f l e ^Ut bu ^' I '|^\'W he diflerent from ita 
 the clans.' assigns a reason to the emotion which may, ''\J^]^1r;:^^').i\ (in Knirlish 
 
 n.';S mu... ^uchaclause i^''Otac.nnp etin.%bu tan^^^ ,^ 
 
 introduced l)y ' because '), and may ''^.^">,^T^Vf/.%'y ,:*;;, 'ci an intinm clause would 
 he (are you, etc.) in that stale o emotion ? J" [ ' Vv ^ f/^or v quod (in the meaning 
 be out of place, and the clause is "'troduce «'i»' ^ ' > ^^ 7/,;/;Vi,/^"^7'^^ te negibas 
 'because') ; as : Jam onutto inltus esse; id ( - care >; ^J^^^ ^j.,. ^f, „,,,.rnre ^/id- 
 credere ar-eutum mihi. Plant. Pers. .^ 3, ^J— Jj«H^*''''^ "' '^1^^ y^„,^. ,„,,„ of a cauml 
 tus, et eo ma-is, quod Appu qmrstio est. C c Au. 3, 17 1. ^'^ ^^^ ,„.-nt.oned. as : Si 
 da^tse is used \f, besides ihi^.ofvec of the emo ton a r^a o^^^^ 
 
 intiuitive clause is used if tlu3 P[-*|'^|;:;;;' '[j.^;:,,^^" ^^en ted^^ 
 assumed as true, while by a Quod-claur-e the I'f/'. f ^^^ ''^ J\* ' X-r ons by the author '.- 
 auffun: Bat both construction, contain -iven ''^'^'':; ^l l^,J^y.^'i:^Z,Z,f the feelin-', 
 MADVia says: ' Quod, in this con^tnu.tmn den^^ Th^/ u etn-nt makes dls- 
 
 which, in its va-ne wordm-, may lead to s«-'ry «^ i dUtii-uiVli where there is distinc- 
 tinctions where there is no dutmclion, and failb to distinj,uisn wnere uicrc «. 
 
 tion. 
 
 Ji 
 
 
 jrqnalitas vestra tantum abcst ab invidiil ut, etc. lb. Brut. 42, 150.— Quae nrbs mihi /«• 
 tari \\(\mir quod tantam pestem evomuerit forasque projecent. lb. Cat. 2, lj^2. 
 
 2 Doieo illlus consilio popidum KomSnum carere lam diu. Cic. Brut. 42. Irti.—IJoCebam 
 quod socium et conrJortem <;l<)riOsi laboris amiseram. lb. 1, 5.— lllud iimrto quod tibi non 
 minOrem dolOrem illOrum orbitas afleret quam mihi. lb. Qu. Fr. 1, 3, 10.— Neque enun, 
 nu-a commendation.' te non delectdri facile patitbar. et nunc arigor, quicquam tibi sine 
 me e<sejucundu>n. lb. Fam. 7, 15, l.—Quod vivis nobis» csrressns est, quod ei ferrum ex 
 manibus extorsiums, quanto tandem vicerdre ilium esse afflictum et profligatum putatis . 
 
 3. T\h\ademntas tot mbis, tot genfis. vulignor. Liv. 40, lO.—Indignalus est, regem ad 
 cansam dicendam evocCui. Ca-s. B. C. 3, IGS.-Indignabantur milites quod conspectum 
 suum hostes ferre posj^ent. lb. B. G. 7, 19.— Quod spirStis, qvod vocem raittitis, indtg- 
 naidur. Liv. 4, 3.— Quis tandem siicceriseat, wilites nos essef Liv. 7, 13.— Si tm*cm« 
 juvenibns quod peccant, irascere infantibus quod peccatflri suut^ Sen. Ira. 2, 9-— V^^ 
 quoque irascimur quod aliquis nos autecedat. Sen. ib. 3, 31.— Non irascetur aliquem gibi 
 
 cumihinhi. Ib. 2, 22. . ^. ^ „ « « /^ i . ...• 
 
 - • • - ----'■ . -1 — 1— • <-.:- XT'»— nan Carbo gvavi- 
 
 IS.— 'Juli 
 
 er. Ib. Div. 
 
 Ib. Fam. 3, 6, 5.— Quod a 
 
 fer 
 Of 
 
 'mpardii. Ib. 2, 22. . «. ^n, « « « /-. 
 
 4. Qui victos nostros moleste fervnt. nos dolent vivere, Cic. Fam. 9, 2, 2.— Cai 
 rprebat, sibi qiuestSrem hbUgisse hominem sin<;ulilri inertia. Ib. Verr. 2. 1, 
 •dvittr et aceibe, in eum 7}ie locum addilci nt...ad accusandiim traducerer 
 
 C;ec 2, 4 —Mole<tissit/ie fero quod te nbi visurus sim nescio. It). Fam. : 
 
 tuis abes. eo leriusferendum est quod etc. Ir>. 4, 3. '2.— Quod salus sociOmm euinmum in 
 
 periculum vocfltur, o«o tandem aA/iw«/«r/'e debetis? Ib. L. M. 5, 12. 
 
 5 Miwr te ad me nihil scnbere. Cic. Att. 8, 12 B.— ^linime miranmr te tuis proeclSris 
 operibiis IcEtari. lb. Fam. 1, 7.— Cato inirari se ajebat quod nou rideret haruspex, ha- 
 ruspicem quum vidisset. Ib. Div. 2, 24. 
 
 Obs G That-clauses take the form of an exclamatory infinitive clause if the {rovern- 
 in"- verb of emotion is understood, so that the clause may be considered as the object of 
 a feelin" existin.-- only in the mind of the author, as : Te nunc, mea Tereniia, sic vexan, 
 nicjacfre in lacrimis, idque fieri mea culpa 1 ( = doleo, te nunc rexdri etc.); O. that 
 you are now tormented thus," etc. Cic. Fam. 14, Z.—JUam clemevtiam nostri imperii lu 
 tantam crudelitatem esse conversam! ( = C^uis non indiirniltur. illam elementiam etc.), 
 lb Verr. 2, 5. 44.— Qui, ad Cannas victor, ire tamen ad urbem ausus non eeset, eum, 
 repulsnm a Capua, spem potiundie urbis Korn;e cepi'^se/ Liv. 2(), 8.— Frequently such 
 claut-e< take an interrogative form by suffixing; the interrogative particle jie* to the first 
 word of til.' clause; Men^ non cum bonis esse f Cic. Att. 9, tu—Tene hoc dicere, tali pru- 
 deiitia pra'ditum? Ib. Clu. 84.— 7Vr/e tibi partis eas dejxjjwscisse ? Ib. R. A. 34 95.— 
 Tantamnefuisseodlividnem ut etc. Ib. Brut. Ol, 219.— /yH/wcine hominem tantis delecta- 
 (nm esse nii-'is ut non videret etc. Ib. Div. 2. 13. 30.— Sometimes such clauses consist of 
 a mere intinilive. where an indefinite subject-accusative must be supplied, as : Hoc nou 
 ri(l7re cujus "eneris onus navit* vehat. id ad gubernatOris artem nihil pertit. ere ! (i.e. 
 guemquam hm- non ridire. it is inconceivable that a perj-on should not see etc.). Cic. Fm. 
 4 x»7 7r.— Tantum laborem rapere ob talem filium ! Ter. Andr. 5, 2, 27.-Often such 
 clauses are dep.-ndent on an exclamatory particle, or an exclamatory accusative (p. 8(, L. 
 44) a<- Me mistrum, te in tantas lerumnas propter me incidisse/ Cic. Fam. 14. 1.— O 
 sp-cta'ulum 7hi-erum atque ocerbum ! Ludibrio esse urbis gloriam et populi Komam 
 homen! It). V.-rr. 2. .5, 3S. In this instavce. the clause may assume the form of a Quod- 
 clause. as : J/^ ?rti^<^rwf/i, <7»/o</ in non valuisti! Cic, Att. 9, 6. . • xu 
 
 Frequently in place of ' interrogative' infinitive clauses. Ft-douses {ut requiring the 
 Pubiumtiv.') are used to desiimate the fact as impossible: Te ut nlla ra» fran^at. Ui nt 
 unniuam te corrigas f Cic. Cat. 1, 22.-Egdne vt te interpellem? Ib. Tusc. 2, A^.-hgone 
 vt prolis mete futulam cruOrem ? Sen. Med. 9, 27.-Pater ut in judicio capitis onesse film 
 delteat^ Cic Plane. l:i. 31,- Me ut quisqnam norit. nisi ille qui priei)et cibum ! Plant. 
 IVr-* i 3 52 Instead of ?/^ often quas:i is used in these clauses (see 'Comparative 
 clauM-s') or a mere subjunctive without any conjunction, which form is passing over 
 into the -'ititerrogative tiibjunctive' (p. 381, § 593), as: Ego tibi irascerer? tibi ego vos- 
 sem irasci* Cic, Qu. Fr. 1, 3, 1, 
 
 Obs. 7 Vi"rb« of vomtion (reUe, nolle, malle, cupere, concvpl^cere, optare), are con- 
 strit.d either with an obj.ct-intinitive (except optare) or with an infinitive clause, or 
 with an Ut (ne)-clauso. or with a mere subjunctive, according to the following rules : 
 
 1. If verba of volition (except optart) have objects expres sing verbal ideas, which 
 
 ♦ In this anomalous form of * interrosative infinitive clauses' the interrogative parti- 
 cle do.-s nut bel..ng to the infinitive clause, but to the governing verb of emotion, in the 
 mind of the author, which is understood as a question. Thus ' AdeOne hominem infell- 
 ccm esse' (Ter. Andr. 1, 5, 10), pniperly means : Fierine 2>otest, hominem adeo lufellceuJ 
 esse? 
 
i 
 
 592 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 IIV iinj oi'y/'m* "■»•• — r . - I ,10 
 
 I was). C c. 1 lauc. o4, M. — » «ttt.'-, upn wi. «i»n v di u\ I«t«) in fcntTc lu 
 
 14 St; -To/'//'/ illi,o//i/rw eildcm cnditione nai^cl. lb. I^'^- *t,1/' ;*\-^t'V. J^7 
 
 '"^ "*^," :"/ /„/ . rpuo trihiiiH'« now 'iUcUlenlv wif'li that the H)lduM> be reliexed 
 
 {Mem a: l'.'»^, ""?>'"'„,'• Citc B 31 -Lib.-rls m„>iill:nn !yV.»«i« prnplcr .|.»..8. ID 
 
 orant ut f-cx Komii '•',;''■>'" ""' V,', ' ,j _s,, «ill. riinere (hul not «iih opirin), as : 
 C.mp. Plant Am. pr,.l. •«• „^',S- 'J \; V'^T; tfJlZT ulrimn ,x.<li„clam c<,jnL Liv. 4, 24. 
 
 tii-p lb 7 81 — Te/i'/i iiiihi iy//r/^ra^. Ih. 13, 7.).— ''/o '//i lum n . iMMKu 
 
 ghT>ulVbe (kme'hc wish.-d ', a« : Cras.us, equitu.u pru^fectos colioriam., quid fei . teli' , 
 ""I'lMhe^ubic^t (?f ?hf(iopendentclnu.e islikewiso in the first p.r.on the ^^^^^^ 
 
 fectum. Cic. Att. 10, 2. 
 
 i 
 
 COMTLETINQ THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 593 
 
594 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 ;;t^^ilio:';i:.;*;rcS!ii:ai'i.!-MaL;"V-iu.f.::'p«."s ;e,i.,uo. ...,■,•.. .«■«-.•. iv b. c. 3, 8. 
 
 2 Verba declarandi. 
 
 foelini;, tl.c.i.-l.t, "'■ ""P'V^^."'l •. , . V .^„,, ir tC 00. tain a doclamtive 
 take 1) tl,.- .■o,-m ", »" '''^«'^f^i.t m f u^'^"" ^ 
 
 «•i//^rfby the subject "\^\'"'"^ V l »Jhn /o^o ') or that of a Thut-clause with ^ ^/'Ould , 
 of.ject.inP'ifire ^^■^th^ro ^! h^'/*^'^ " ^^^^ ' snch clause, ttiust either take the 
 
 ^ou^ht\ or other auxiltariesd MM ti-com^^^ .ubjiit.ctive) or it they 
 
 f..,m of an i„w?ative ^^•^'}'^%]ll^'''l\^^^^ with a gernndia^ predicate ; a. : 
 
 Ivixe pa.^me predicates the for' "«' ; v V' >^ho lUl <' ^=ilent). Cic. Brut. 42, \5-.-Ihjri\m' 
 jnxenimf a prit.cip.o n( %'\^l^X%^.]^'^^^^^^ esse eju.tuodi quod mjh i.ec dt.st- 
 
 tril>us conscriptis, m xu^^ Pl'V;!^'^ wu rrtur lb Att 1. 10. «'-(Here • >,e vu.i plaga ronct- 
 nuihiudum. tiec l^'^-tV"^'''"^"; ', t ve d-n^ but he coordinate That-clau.e 'vnlnus 
 derenV x^ conceived a=* JUi "PP^y^^ii^A '!".,^,i r^nmCirent ne hostis pradio laces^^erent 
 e,s. ej'i.'^Mdi etc i^ declaratiye.)-M.tt U ui n*'^^^^^^^^^^^^ no=*inet ipso*. noscerCinus ; 
 
 limiiuive eiuii:?' , ••" ' ■;' .y^ — -. " 
 
 lie iruiii ui fVMi.t.......r, — ~ ;.„,:, o.'i nil ««» ft«» • civitilti yx^^.NWf'-^'iM/Mle linihus siii> exi- 
 
 to persuade ; require^ an '/"KlJ^^^Tri Qt^"- '^^^ t v>.-Socrates Alcibiadi p.r.nasit. 
 
 ' to persuade ' requirer< an impeiauv^ vw....v.. -. . ^ .-Socrates Alcibiadi p^rxinmt, 
 
 rint^;>.r/a.-//....y.CialliaMmpeno ^^^±3^;,^;.;; in the meaninjz Mo remind of u 
 
 e„m nihil hoinmis ^x.v^, ^'^ Ju^c -i, ;«. m- .;;;,,„'. ,„ ..^hort ' must have an impera- 
 
 fact' requires an ''^"'"^^^f"^^' ';"!*" '''c"^^^ «^ "^^'«"^ 
 
 live chiuse : lies ipsa mon^batJ^mpuiyebU. cic. au. iw, o 
 
 domum metueret. lb. Sest 
 
 (>4 
 
 ;;Ve!ra: Tac. Ann. 12,«. For th.. use ..T 7«Jm wuu up^^ .^^^ ^,^,^ 
 
 ^;c^-^;^.Sio;^woui:i^^ nice a pJ::^;i;i;iu^^ that the god. snould^x.. 
 
 or not exist. 
 
 q 
 
 or an 'onler^is conveyed. ^(t:^rani;E'{^mnn -^I am i^ni^{<> ^^f "her word by a 
 E-o puerum volo mittere ut habt^« "'»"'' '^^ 'g/3 sC.-Fabius ad coll5-am vmit. 
 
 Blave that she wist be ol «^ood cheer. 1 laui. i '^-- J '\\ 
 
 Sxercitu oj>us esse qui <^'^"M>iinis opponere un ^^^^^^ ^^^^^^. ^f ^ ,|„,y. a. : 
 
 § Similarly di.6'.r. «.^c^'''* J .,H» ^Vilte quam dolo contenderent ; They had learned 
 £e^i;?i^f w^^^(^i?t;^- S by 'S^c^ than by treachery. C. B. G. 1, 13. 
 
 t 
 
 J 
 
 COMPLETING THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 595 
 
 Ons 2 Imperative clnnses contain the followinj? diflercnt kinds of volition : 1) re- 
 nue-^ts. praver detiiand, and invitation (Obs. 3) ; 2) advice, proposition, and exhortation 
 (Obs 4) • 8) resolution and stipulation (Obs. 5) ; 4) order, charL-^e, command, and expressed 
 wi~h (Obs (> 7). 5) permission (Obs. 8). These diflerent kinds of expressed volition 
 are indicated by special classes of governing verbs {verba im)/erandi), while the general 
 verbs of saying (Obs. 1) may be used with regard to any kind of volition. 
 
 Obs. 3. The rerba irnperanili expressing request etc. are: petere,postuIare,flaqifdre, 
 orare. rogare, precari, obsecrCire, implorare, iustare (to urge) iurildre, and similar v«-rbs, 
 as- I^'fcor (leos vt his inttnltls nostris malis contenti slnt. Cic. Qu. Fr. 1, 3, \).—lete- 
 fmnt 1/fi equites pnvmitteret. Os. B. G. 4, U.—Postulo vt ne qn\d pnijudicati aflenltis. 
 Tie C'ln 2 5 — Ciesar coirnOvit. Germflnos ?»n/J('o.<ewf^ ?/<i ab Kheno discederent. Cjcs. 
 B. G 4, «.—Semper JlagilUri nt convocaremur. Cic. Phil. 5, 11, 30. ' 7b ask for a ])er- 
 tfiisHon' is rendered by ' pet ere vt aliquid facereliceat' (not by 'vemam or ]X)testoftm 
 petere '), as : TribQnus milTium petebat ut Ciesaris voluntflte discedere liceret ; a military 
 tribune' asked Casar for the permistsion of leavin<r the army, Caes. B. G. 1, 39.— If the 
 person 10 wliom the petition is directed, is not mentioned, the clause generally takes a 
 I)assive constniciion, in wliich instance it sometimes takes the form of an ii-fiiative 
 clause which, however, in cb'ssical prose, is confined to the verb ;x>.v''W<?»'€ as : \\\f: pos- 
 tvlat se Roma) af/sotvi. Cic. Verr. 2, 4. 60.— Ettamen ig?)osci nolni^ posiulamug. Aucr. Her. 
 2, \':.—r\).<fcere. in irood prose*, is not construed with That-clauses, but only with substan- 
 tive objects. In the poets and postclassically. it occurs both with Ut-clauses and infinitive 
 clauses. Livy once uses an Ut-clause after clamare et poscere (2. 65).— if insidre, (to insist 
 upon) refers to a mere statement of a fact, it is construed with an infinitive clause, as : 
 Si instetur (if it is insisted upon), suo milite vinci limnam posse. Liv . 2, 48. If it means 
 'to continue with perseverance', it is construed with an object-infinitive, as : Instat 
 Scandilius mscere recuperatOres. Cic. Verr. 2. 3. 59. I5ut if instdre means 'to demand 
 urgently', the That-clause, dependent on it, lias the form of an imperative clause, as: 
 Tibi instat Ilortensius vt eas in consilium. Cic. Quinct. 10, 34. 
 
 Obs 4 The verba imperandi expressing advice, projwsition, and exhortation are sua- 
 dtre^wrsuadZre, vwnere (see Obs. 1), horta/i, cehsere (in the meaning 'to propose', 'to 
 move ' see li. 2:3, Obs. 9) ; as : Equidem svasi vt Komam pergeret ( I advised Inm to pro- 
 ceed to Rome). Cic. Att. 16. 8, 2.— Ciesar reliqnos cohortdtvr ne labOri succurabant (ex- 
 horted them not to succumb). C«8. B. G. 7, 86. Verbs of exhort inir(wo?<^r«, hortarx) 
 sometimes, hut very rarely, take an object-infinitive in good prose (Cic. tin. 1, 2() : ib. 
 Sest. 3 7). The same construction or that of an infinitive clause, with madere and ;)fr- 
 suad^re, is poetical or postclassical, as : Svadibat asinofiigere. Plia?dr. 1, 17, 6.— \ erbs 
 of exhortiii"- are frequentlv construed with ad and a gerundial : Sie ego vos ad liberta- 
 tern recuperandam vohortdbor ( = ut libertaiem recuperetis). Cic. Phil 4, 5, 11. 
 
 y ecu Pi 
 Obs. 5. 
 
 The verba imperandi expressing resolution and stipvlntion are : decemere. 
 mslituere, velle (s-e R. %\ Obs. 7), j)ncisci. pangere**. sanclre. as : Decrevtstts vt 
 
 X nriiiciDes iureiurando, ne quis enutitijlret (qua) essent constiiflta) inter se sanxerynt 
 hev pled'W each other, by stipulation). Ca>s. B. G. 1, 30.— O n« plebi cum patribus 
 sseiit connubia, inhumanissimil \r<rcsanj^H'unt. Cic. Rep. 2. :i7, 6;3.-If the construction 
 
 gerundial 
 Liv. 
 
 quis p<in 
 li 
 (I 
 
 of the\dause'ir;W*ii\?^Tt may'take the form of an inAnitive clause wi^ih a gerv 
 predicate-infinitive, as: Ad unum omncs reguvm NuiTne dejereudupi decerniint. 
 1 iH —i^cernere. constiiufre, and statuere, are generally construed with an object-intini- 
 tive if the actions contained in the clause are those of the subjects of the governing 
 verbs as: LciOnes decrererunt senatum defenders contra Antouinm. Cic. 1 hil. 5, 2. 4. 
 — Cirsar helium cum (iertnanis gerere consfi'ftdt. Ca)s. B. G. 4, 6. But sometimes even 
 in this meanin«^ I't-clauses or (if the construction of the clause is passive) 2//./?;**^??;« 
 clauses with gerundial predicates are used, as : Constit uerajmit pridie Idus Aquliii mane- 
 rem. Cic. Att. Ki, lO.-Reliquam ff/a/tm a republic^ procul Aa6e/.(/fl7rt rfeo/m. ball Cat. 
 4 _if these verbs are used in the meaning.' to judge', as verba sentiendi. the 1 hat-clause 
 takes the form of an infinitive clause, as: In quo omnia mea panta e^se decnvt. Cic. 
 Fam. 2, 6, Z.—Laudun sapiential statuo esse maxvnam. Ib. 5. 13.— II corKtitvere means 
 ' to promise ', it tak^-s the same construction m^ pollictri (with an infinitive clause in the 
 "^♦^U'^ustin (Civ. Dei, '2, 21' mentions the following (lost) passage of Cicero-s second 
 bookde Rep : ' V\\\\\x» ]x>ix>scit ut luec ipsa quiestio diligeniius tractaretur . But, since 
 Philus in the extant parts of Cic. Rep. always speaks in ' direct discourse , it is evident 
 that Au<'u>tin quotes onlv the s€iuse,*i\\CL not the wording ol the passage. 
 
 ** Pangere Jias the meaning ' to stipulate ' only iu the perlect pepigi, not in the present 
 eystem, lior in the perfect- form ^^a/aai. 
 
 1 
 
COMPLETING THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 597 
 
 590 
 
 TIIAT-CIAUSES. 
 
 periphrastic future): Vcilotn non amx(ifuii>s<>ni. in Tuscuian-im m^hoiho re,, fiJr urn e^6i\ 
 L«li(): I wish I had imt hound niis»-lf lo T,ii'liu< 10 come to-Hav etc C ic. Or, 1, «>..- 
 Co/'. «.YJ /fa cum quodam ho^^pitc, me e<,<e ilium conc^nturain.. I cr. 11. c. 1, •„ i^u. 
 
 Ob^ fi The verhi» of command, ami^XrwviX with That-c1ansc:«. arc : imp'rore. pmc^- 
 pere. imvsnnf)^}^, mmulare, veqntunn dar.' (to <\»''>r-r).7-*//.r;r /.//r^rf. /m-<?*. m'>/-^, 
 and those of ' ne'^a'ive' commanrl iprohihition) : i>iter<iic<r>-, vf'tftr (Or". . >. 1 he n <ru- 
 lar construclion of these verbs is with a dative of ''l*" y«'J^\''V";:'l>i;'""\l{;'^^^ FllliLh K 
 with ut, ne (>U fu), or the n.e.e ^uhJunc•IIve (excepty//W/-e ami ^ l^TU^^r, ^^^^^^^^ a"' 
 •aia^e L'eneraliv emplt)vin-' an ohj.ct- ntiiniive in phice ol the Latin 1 hat-clause, as 
 rfmsui'c^ S);l6'.rcur'..Hbus im/.r.lrunt vt sacerdotes ejus ^:u;.i onn-Is J-;;"'!"'-'';;;;^: 
 
 scriptum es.<^f ne quid sine Sexti nostri seiitentia a-eret. tic. Alt. Ih, .^. h.—ni-}>nun>u, 
 
 fminls moriulls p?H-unia <m„'nm>fur. Hull. Ju^'. 28.-M. .£',/.i/i(.. senatus /'/f/^/'^'^ ''"^ 
 
 t//; Patuvii.urum seditiOiirui comprimeret (char-ed with sni)pre8MUff ^'t^'- : .^-'y,- y* * ;~ 
 
 J„frrre takes the peix.n commanded as sub^tanlive «d.j.'ct m llie arcw^afive the ac t n 
 
 comm^^^^^^^^^ b<dnL added in the f..rm of an UO^cl-inn^inre^i 41. p. 104» : C.esar Jl^l^e- 
 
 tio< ouDida vict<fOue, quos inceiideranr, /'tstittiert jtitfsil. Cies. li. (.. 1,^«. Hit V'Tds 
 
 Xm; /elr.. ccu-L do nor take pergonal objects alonj, with the ^nmt-clauses depem lent 
 
 on Ihein: l)Ut ii.corporat.- the pers<.n to whom the ommand is din-cted, n the tlaisc, 
 
 as : Omero edU>ri(ne pra'tor u( wU^ses die trieoimo U'ol : eduunt Mint «;f^-^'7>- ^ •<=. 
 
 Vatin 14, 3:i.— Con>ul eUicere est ausus uf feiiudis ad ve^llluui redlr.-t. 11). 1 i>. «. l«^- — 
 
 The same con.struetioii often occurs with pnrcipfire and pne-criUiy. nirely with impfi- 
 
 rar^^ • Illiid pnvdnien<i"m faiL nt dili-entiam adhiherCmus. Cir. Ain. \U.-Uh-mi>np>ral 
 
 hastas 4''/-- ♦'>i-'^''-^">- I^iv.l.:^7.-ir the person commind-d is V't "n-nlPme, a 
 
 passive Ut-elause or passiv.. intinitive clauMr.is used :/../>■ >v/r; 'i' "'riri IVo 
 
 iteriterfntKr Cic Verr.-.>,3. W.—^owhnnc in vinc.iIa'/'/(7 impnuU-'/ lb. (at 1, 11.— I 10 
 
 Serapinni- li'bro tibi pnr^-^mf^m iwruniamsolvi impenlri. Ii>. Att. •.>. I. V\.-/f(i.^ '"''^IH,'!!'"' 
 
 arial hnperat fitf-i. Ca-s. B. G. 5, 1.- A passive infinitive clause is the UMiai coi.siructn n 
 
 wi h /X^;>Mf the p.rson command.-d is not m-n-ioned. as : Ca;.ar_/>o,,/.m. qui crat ml 
 
 ^:^:''c^>;;i;:7W>t//. Ib,:^.!», l^m sometimes, -. ^'^ 'I'lrM^ci^ui-^'a' • 'llS: 
 
 tion r.mains aciive. ami an ohj.cfMth.idre is used in place of '^,, '/:';•, .^""^; .^;,; J ^,:^. 
 
 du^ end.-m i.,en>ni:T rvUUnjnlnt «pia nccperis. Cic. Brut. 4 -Ca'.-ar lastia ^'»";' >;■ 
 
 q e nvi,\v jM. ("a-s. IJ. (^ •>. 5. Vel.-.a sunt pra'cepta >apientium.(,n..;'/i^/// te p. 1 
 
 Sarci% "ic Fin. :i, 2i.-J)uces barharoinu. tota acie p,OH»ntHir. .m.^.nnd ne qui> ah 
 
 oco dtcederet. Ca-s. li. (J. 5. :3..- JuMiti:! prarli^t paror. o.n.nbus. Cic. hep. .1 U^ 
 
 This con.tructi..n, except with j'//.f/>, is ex-remely rare in clas-ua 1 ;<'^^-;(';'V . /';.'' 
 tVm.te^ the reso!.uion< of the pe..ple in a plebiscite, IS either construed ^itli an ^/-./a^^^^^^^ 
 
 r, if the coustruclh.n of the Th.a-chu.se \. pas.ire, uith an '."f'V''\!;,S. . ' T\c V r" 
 tu-^decrOvit poi)iilu-que jus.<i/ y// (pla•^tore^ eas siatuas demolieiid is curarei.t > ic ^ i . 
 '/•/ iT -lioii, Onem' pn/miilixavit ^r\\eutJ"0?renf I'hii.ppo re^M V- ''A'/'/S-r^ .Va' iv 
 6 -The sarn^ construction ^rarely a Ne-clause) is sometimes us.d. ify'//.(/r fHers . y 
 om<liUuirvc ix<: Hie til)i\i. ^. pfietr.ri) in mentem nou venil ^<//.em '/^^Jm-c qm.q le 
 Srn.t\' ibVve n idisse M;ie. Verr. -2, 4. P>.-(iui..ctius.y'/^>t/ uf naves Kub<vam pete- 
 rent Liv^•2.^^-^la^oninunti^UUln est,. sf,/.7^/m7''^^/^^^ 
 
 \\ -^ iii-Xhef >d senteutiam dhat suam. Plant. Am 1, 1. 5( -(^lod /,. •"'■^^V.' 
 jus^nud. Iliri. IJ. O. H, ^.-JusHt at Briiannicus et Octavia m complexum patns pei- 
 
 jjerent. Tac. Ann. H, :«il^^ -, — 
 
 * The vtM-F/WrTlis verhum iinperanrii mostly occurs in the phrase lerjnn/erre, to^ne 
 
 alaw withmfaconipleti.i- clause). But it also occurs in the meant ii;r Mo ordain 
 
 wUtu.ut i.".m, but wi'th an L-t-dau-e, as : (iuum hoc natQra lulenl ut summi virtQte et 
 
 auimo praH-ssent imbecUlioribus. Cic. Hep. 1, 34. „ v-.^.v .,.;;;,, tiw. 
 
 Tcahre takes Thai-clauses in two ditiVrent mean.ni,'. ; 1 as a ^-^/^l^^^,^' f''^! f ' '"/J\^ 
 
 meanin- 'to be on «me's «uard h'st \ or, ' to take care that, (see li. i'.;> >• ^,^ • ; ,f ., 
 
 verbi.m im/>^m/*^/i in the meanin- ' to make a provision in a fl'i'i'^'^.f '='^\/'' - *;" 
 
 artic of sf-pulationinatreatv. In both meaninirs it is construed with a \e-clause. 
 
 or • th an luSVse as : EpicQru< test.-.mento rarU (onieivd in his testament dies natil- 
 
 lis ^/1 aVei'e. tir Cic! Fin. 2. 31, KW.-Aiiis plehiscT. is cant.nn td (it was provided) m quis 
 
 tundem madstratum intra decern annos capeiet. Liv. «. 4v. , • * •♦ ir u 
 
 "l the That-claiise drpeiuh nt on edicere refers to the actions of the subject it>e f, it 
 
 call. > • cot isid. fed as an imperative clause, and mu^t take the f..rm <.l an i';Htmive- 
 
 clause with a periphrastic luture.as: AVui/, sese judicium injur.5rum uondalurum. 
 
 ^^'siSin'tllc'^con-truction of the nominative with the infinitive : In lauturaias Syra- 
 
 ciisJlnas deduct impenintnr. Cic. Verr. 2, 5 27 (p. KC). lOt)). . „^p„„ntivo In 
 
 \ln this construction J//W/y does not take a personal object in t[»e acciiMtne Ir^ 
 
 I»obt-cla.Hcal lan-aa-e, however, it soiuetimea takes a personal object in the dative, u» . 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 on. 7. The verbs of ...a^ir. -mmjuid (y^c^ibnio^ inferd^^e^ and .W«r^. Int^^ 
 dic^re (.0 issue an "OU''y'y>''; » iToue i u fatxS^ Mandnbratio noceat. 
 
 analogous to edicft;e. as: ^'Jf''^^^^^^^^^ m amplius quam singu as 
 
 C^.. B. (J. 5^ •'^•^•-^>;?'l'^;^ ''it'^^ltToLZr^'^ command with a restriction, in which 
 aiiTs nosse hceat. <-'^- ^." • .••,.;/ «l « in.Te subiuuctive, as: Pra;ci|)it atque tiderdmt, 
 iusiance it is constnuci with ut or a "i^je subjuucu^c a 1 ^^^^^^ 
 
 unum o.nnes;>€/^/-^/// Indutionulrun ^^;/-.^; %f J^ Cic Kep. 1, 31), Hit.- Velare is con- 
 
 nt nni dicto fl^^^^^'^ ^:\Zi'\t\Tu^^^^^^^ that it occurs withaNe- 
 
 strued likej//d/(^/e ,• ony that It ^J^ ' V^^ ^^*"; '\"\y,.r l'^^ ^ A sin-ulis le-ionibus singulos 
 clause, or a mere -;'>>J""J»;^/'^^' " g^'^^j^'it /-Ra^i^^^^^^^ a^e coirecta» velabautnie, 
 Icuato.^ aesar <i^^^<if.^^ '['^'''^l^^^^^ lex, e^/m qui provocasset virgi3 
 
 ^ff^S^rffle';:^'^ 'SS^'uv' lli;-i;:-i^'p-atis Hippocates .etat adiuMre medecl- 
 
 "^;::^:'^^'^ P^rm..o. are ......,^n^^ ^£S^^' 
 
 rer.iamdare ^imI the verbs ..t..T. and «^^^^^^^ ^^,j-,, j,, ^he 
 
 struciion of cr/n^^.^^r^ y>em /.r^, ami f*^^^^^^^^^^ 1^ ^, replaced by an Ut- 
 
 «hitive, and an object of the ''^"''f J ,/■ " '''^^'jr'^^^J;^^^^^^^^^ quantum vellet de 
 
 cV«*/..§,<.rhy a clause with a mere- ^^^^^^^^ ^.^^j,,^^, ,^;}, (Bojos) co/to- 
 
 Ciesennue bonis vt hah.ie( Uc. ^ •^^•/;^ «^,,,^ .„ -^..^^ ,,/ partis facerel ? Cic. Or 2, 90 
 nnt.concesnl. C;es. 1^^^^' "^ ' • H.^m V^,///»//;^^^ Att 2 16 3.-Non commiUam ut 
 tunc l*»'cresju<l.cetur,qunmhacli'^^^^^^^^^^ Ut-clauses, 
 
 .ame wav ' iwtt, date m, Ulcere: «"^ ^*-.? . f,f// 'I'^^.^ttin (/r»c^ anlepOnam. Cic Or. 1,6.- 
 as: mhi,^ (tn.hi) «>anc r-/*ta/n '/ eOi in a c ontc^^^^^ P ^. _.pj^^ ^^^rhper- 
 
 lUe tibi ,K,(e.tatemjacturu.<v^'iut e|ii:as ''';' j^'^''-,^, ;,Vvith an object-dative, denoting 
 .nittere is also c.n.sti ned wnh an obje mi^^^^^ .^ rdre in classical prose, 
 
 the p.rson permitted p. 104, It. 8-i). ,/^ f„^''"^^ [^^^ conjecturam facere iyennWam. Cic. 
 as: Jam ip.-is j././.<;i^.'/.< sine "^;.''l "r^/ .^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ the silver a-e, as: 
 
 Verr. 2, 5, 9. But it is the resrular <^«>nst uuion tut i ny \'^ 2 rermittere is also con^trued 
 Xerxes' Pytlno que.n vellet '^^'^f^;-^- ' t=^^ n^i li^^^n^aMow^^ce ', ' to le.ive ', 
 with a disjunctive luterrouativc el;» ^« • »"^ Vz\VaudI.e Cic. N. D. 3, 1, A.-Peiimsso, 
 as: TiU pernntfo r.s,Hj.denveruihx ]^^l.-;^^^^'tn'^^^ lan^^ua^-e, is not con- 
 
 as-;;ni?mi^d^;;;^;;;;?r^^^ 
 
 sative of the per>on P'»'» < l'^,^/' "" ^,^ „,StiXd as : Tu mesim illam vendere. Plant, 
 constniction, i^M>^'i><''M>^-"'\'''^'\\ "' I'j'^.'^ ,, " id a vobis e\ per solvere. 
 
 Pers. 1. 3, hk.-Sunte me, <iuod vobis f ^^' "/ , ^" ^'^ ":f P^'' "r finl^ snos Helretios ire pafi- 
 C\c. Plane. 42, 103.-I).nnii...MX a beqnan.^^^ Sw^r non «^^^^^^^ lb. 4, 2.-Non pafiar, 
 
 r !n s^;:^.npi;;^;.;!^:c^. verr ^^^ i:^'^^i s:s 
 
 C. 3. l»s ^Minnbus ^,s ,.jc^^^. M^^ cc.n;«.«./ani 
 
 pome manuscripts ki\ f \^'-.^^V7>V. aamits of a diftcrent interpretation, 
 ne etc. -The passa-e tn l.iv. 42 4,3 h f j^'^? ^^^^^^^^^^ /"ai^rr^di, see i?. 25. Obs^ 5. 
 
 ; ^::;^;!!^tS;^n;; S;:;t "ll^^i^lce^^'constnied with ,^6^^.. is erroneous, bee 
 
 -S:i=^ii^^^^^^ - ,fe?5lki;SiS:{^'a^re.ular, no vouchers are ex- 
 
 'fpermdfere and com.nttere on^j-Hy hav^a more gen^l^m^^ 
 
 verbs 'to permit', 'to allow', ^>g^ ' ^ L^ ..Sidv " ' was ori-inally ex- 
 
 redderc iliis liceret. Cscs. B. G. 1, -35. 
 
598 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 (rnrely) con>=tnicd with an Ut-clmm*,a9: Illucl natOra non jxifttur vt al.urim Ppo.irs 
 no^^tra.i facnlinie. an-eilmus. Cic. OlV.a, 5, •>>.-Ne(,.u- sum... iicqnt' R i. ro.isiu-t.id.m-ra 
 />r//i, .//t opti.uc incrTnils .ocios desm-re-t. C\es. H. (i. 1, 45.--^..y< ''"%''":,.•;;?.'? 
 lie. only in antecla^^ical .«tyle. Very lVfqu<i.tly it i^ construed ^v.t . a mere -^" 'J'» ' ' 
 but. it i.sdoul.tful wli.ther tlii;* eonstruciion wa.s ut'ed iii cUssical pr^^et. It luopliy 
 occurs tlius in tlie imperative (dne - let, allow), as*: Sine remat. let him come. ler. 
 Eun. 4, 6, \.—Sine id temput» veniat quo ipsi juheauius. Siu. Iia :i, 32. 
 
 Ob«* ♦) The r^rha dedarandi denoiinu' the inanifef^tation of emotions, and of friendly or 
 umViendlv AF-nKCTioNs, have their completin-: That-clausi-s in the form ol a (^''^'^ff^^'^J^ 
 or of an vifiin/ire chvh-^r, the same as the corrtt^pondinj; class ot veri>a sentieiidi (/^ Z-% 
 Obs -) 6) ' Here hel«>n<' the lidlowint: vcrl.s: (^neii, glorUln, fjratitUni, (jrati((i< aqeje, 
 nraiiam ("not qratias) nf.rre, /a>/(la>e, lepreh^ndere, rit'fpoare.iinre/xne. ^mj<\ie^ 
 o'jj'trmire, acciimre. incumre, cnmiiuirU arguere (to accuse), iimvudare (to accuse talsci> ), 
 aiid iqno^cere.-Q'uH and qloi'idri take inllnitive or t^iod-daiises. (Pm^/A/zv. and verbs 
 of accusin<' and condemninir, m..stly take Qnod-clauses. rarely inflniiivc clauses (/><^rv- 
 ui'im eaesiTiss^ dawnd/l s>o>f. Liv.3(i,31»: aro^mcif luMlitufem, Jraiide ,p<_n vt etc., U). 
 27 21 • i/icumi'if, Mln ex Mlis ,^en, lb. 31, 1) ; but arr/'ure always, and ii^^invthire j;en.'r- 
 ally, takes an inllnitive_claiise._The_other ve rba take ( ^ uod.daus.-s only^: Quentu r 
 
 * The Dhrasis facUe pali^Ti^digne i)(ifi,'iulqm aniinopati, Ami »u^^^^ 
 note amotions or emotions, designated by the adverb, and are construed with int...it.ve 
 clauses like vefbs of emoi ion. as : Faci/e patior id te aectisan tein jam di u di'^ie.y^. I lane. 
 2ti " IVnidqm iKdiehar animo fe a me dlqredi. lb. Fam. 12. 18. See I b. \ err. 2, 3. 2 ; Uv. 4, 1». 
 t In the |)assa<a! ' Non Khxvn turn nol.is deniqne lyyifOndKint (C'lc. \ err. 1, 1>. 54) foine 
 manuscni.ts liavr resiHUHK re and others i-t.<jMidtai,L There are no other pat-sa<,'e8 in 
 classical prose vonchiny lor this construction. ^.. .i ...u •♦„„ 
 
 i Tlur verbs querL and qloridvL bein- neuter verb?, not admittinir pergonal substan- 
 tive objects, have the nature of the verba stnfiendi expressing emotion, and hence have 
 the same consiructitm ju» these. The QMod-clau^es, dependent on them, have the nature 
 of-prepositional Facl-dau.<es (R. 2<>Uiis.4 ), which often are used with tli<-m in then; com- 
 plete form as- Non pudet pbilosophum in eo qlondri q>i<nl luec non timet? Cic. I use. 
 1 21 4«> inlinitive clauses y/irty always be used with them, but they nvtH hv used if 
 tile clause does n.)t express a fact,h\xX a mere sentiment, tti^ : Lentiiius^v alterum ./or« 
 Sullam qlm-idtnr (not ' quod. . '.futurus .^if). Cies. B. C. 1, 4.-Ncarly all t)f the other verba 
 mentiolied take substantive objects. The clauses dependent on these verbs (except ar- 
 nnere) may always be Quod-clauses, beins, likewise, orii?inal Fact-clauses: hrunt qut m 
 eo audaciam ejus reprehendavt gmd etc. Cic.Verr. 2. 1. 4. But arqucre never, and «''^'"'/l* 
 /<7;v rarelv. takes Qnod-clauses: Me arquit, Jhvic dntno ahse iiui'np'ti,^se. I laut. Men. 5, 2,_h-v 
 —Innnvdant, hnm:netn frawinndi ch'/.^d dl^ce-^n.^.<e, Cic Verr. 2. 2. 21; but ln.ninul<irit 
 liomdno.-^ quod Chmridehi tenT'reut. Liv. 34, 23. So in nom. with inlin. : Occidi>'.;'e jmtrem 
 Sex. lioscitis arquitnr. lb. R. A. 13. 37.-Qnod auctnr illTus injuriie/^/t-sw nrquetxi ur. in. 
 Verr 2, 1, :i3.- C'nwi/*<7H, likewise, may take an inlinitive clause, as : Sed imlites ex- 
 tnihiremaimvutnte.-^. L\v.2.:i\.-~Grafuldn often occurs with infinitive clauses in the 
 poets III the passage ("ic. Phil. 9, 12. 2S (Brutus CicerOni recujyerafam fd^rtirtrm est gratu- 
 latns), the i)iira<e rtanxrdtam lib*rtattm may be 4-iiher taken as an intinilive clan-e, or 
 as a reversed participial phrase, used as a substantive object {alicut ahquid gratulait). 
 Asid. from tins p issai^'e, graluhlri in classical prose, takes a Quod-clause. 
 
 Ttiere arc two or three passages in which the verbs gmtulCiri and Idudare are conncctea 
 with Quuni-dauses (in which, however, the readintrs mostly an- doubtful between quum 
 or quod), as : L. Ciesar, ' () mi Cicero \ inqiiit, ' gmtulor tibi qoton (the older editions aU 
 have 'quod'} tantum vales apud Dolabeliam etc'. Cic. Fam. 1>, 14, 3. and lb. Att. 14 
 17 \ 3 This 0»/Mm-clanse ccmtains a verbatim quotation ot L. Ca-sar s colloquial 
 remark, and hence cannot be used as a voucher for a Ciceronian construction.— J e qui- 
 dem. quum isto animo es, satis lundnie non possum. Cic. Mil. m, W. (Here quum j;\i- 
 deiiily has the force of «).-- Jam id ipsum consul laudare quum initiStam se non intiMa- 
 rCtur Liv 3«) 12. On these three passai^es rests the theory of some Liiirlisli gramma- 
 rians (see R 2:j. Obs. 5, foot-noie) that (dl rerbs of emotion (including gaudvie etc.) may 
 be construed with Ouum-dauses with the force of Quod-clauses. But the llrst two pas- 
 sa<'es evident Iv prove noiliing, and the third j.assa^e must be consideiedasa Patavinity , 
 the construction being so aiiOmaU.us that it cannot furnish any pioof for a receiveil 
 nsa.'e (.f classical Latinitv. Much less can it, by sell-made examples, be extended to 
 'alfverbs of emotion' . — Verbs of ruAisisu and cknsuuino. if the clause contains an 
 'individual nawn' for the praise or censure, are sometimes connected with cnu.<ia 
 clauses introduced by quoniam. or quia, as: Utrumque sane laudTmv». quoniatn i)er 
 illus ne ha^c qui.iem gene.a latule curuerunt. Cic. BiMit. :}0, 11«.— Hiec lamilia reprehendtt 
 me, quia non semper quieverim. lb. Att. 2. 1(5, 3. -Sometimes- Si-dau,-^es, dependent on 
 this class of verbs. i//c///(/<? a Quod-tlausc, but so that the fact is designated as uncer- 
 tain, as : Ignot^ce si ejus viri auctorittTti rex Dejotarus ceesit. Cic. Dej. 4, 12. 
 
 COMrLETING TIIAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 599 
 
 q.o<l anobis,K.em -1- ;^i^- PJ^^ f^ l^^^^J^i'i^n^^J^^a^k^^^ 
 qn<xi sit <l^,^t..Qtus ^''^^fi^^^^^^^^^^^^^ in vest. um coi.spectum 
 
 eorum popnlarentur. lb. 1, •"• ,;;'"V fiberta^ equitis KomSni se ferre non po.se.^ lb. 
 T,nix,<e. Cic. ^err. 2. 1.58.-^'/^/^/^'^''^ "»^^''\' Horten-ium QUod numqnam btdlo civTli 
 
 Plane, in, 3.3.--3/.miya {//'.''^'^'Y**'^ i^pu '^^^^^^^ ^'"^ "'^" "^"'^"'"" """^f- 
 
 interfuisset. lb. Fam. 2, lb. 3— L. ^.P^' PP"%y jVi. i 17 m ^Gtatuld'i pr mum senatui 
 Wm esse omnia q.ue haberentur amp issmm lb Ofl. 2 1 ,^ ^^^^^ ^^.^,, 
 
 sunt quod >cipn. prospere re> in Aj";^,^f ^' '^^,.^.r°um est in cos qui contra pugnart nt, 
 nissam regera fecisset L>v.30, 1 ..-r^^od am^^^^ est,^ar/do. Cic. K. A. 47, 
 
 n.,n debeo 7epre<endere ; ^ ''''fy'V'J''^^^^^^^^ lb. Fam. 7, 
 
 SfT^^Ctim^SminellSt»^^ 
 ;,^}J-junrp;>vinci,e n.ntaris, id r.;^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Sl^'^l^'lSrSeiS"::::: i ".^^i! 7!^!^^^ P-tem ducerentur,sibi quu^rendum 
 puiarent. Cajs. B. G. 1, 4U. ^ , ^ • •,• 
 
 3. Verba facienai. 
 7? 9=^ \>rbs denotiii- a ' doing ' may be construed with Tliat-clauses 
 
 ^:^:TZ^^W^t^M Verbs 'of doing implying ;.^a^^ «.- 
 nrJc()i struL^d \vith claiises introduced by ne, quominuH,ov quit (OBh. o) 
 '^rr;^h'of(po.tive) doing cmnpri.^ 
 
 T^^'^^a^^l "^^- '"omeVrt^'etrbs ^rVilso construed with object-inhniuves, 
 Snd a\ery few, with infinitive clauses. ^,,^^^„.^.„^ ^re- oqifare and its com- 
 
 OBS. 2. The verbs denoting i^'T^^T^^f ,^"^J J.'^^^^J^Jlt.XcO flV^>^^^^^ ^'M'e (in the 
 pound cor/i^7/v (to revolve in <>;;,-.^"j"'V .Sr^ , a" a i >^/S^/«/-.. labordre and 
 meaning- 'to desjgn ), "i'^'^'l' ' ''^J^^^^ shape one's acts 
 
 daUrrme, 7nfi, admtt and ^ ' '),'''^''[,'- f 'Jj^''^^ 4; 3^,-,, promc^fe. spectdre and ex^nc 
 towa.ds an aim '), ^•''^*^r^/;^^^,.^;,,tL»i'!5 habirequam to take the first .>ppo_rtunity for 
 tare (K. 23. 0B.^^8j,^.m, , ;u^^^^^^ ^ ^^v^o^^^mu!}!^]!^^^^ 
 
 an action), mr'rr^^jmd_tiu^\^i^njJL^>'' ii_n__^^^^^^^ 
 
 --^G^icirirrererre may be followed by an f ^f J ;;%^,?^^?,;re t o ^m^ia, as : Quoniam 
 objed, but x\M'. quality "f ^^e thanks, be ng a a^^^^^^ Cjes.B. 0^1,35. 
 
 h.inc populo H<''"a..o7r«/i«//* r.r^T^^M''^ " *^^^ ,„^^,5 ration egit, non libeia- 
 
 V.!i lnS:Xi r ^^ t?C Z^^nm^i>^. cL Fam. 13, ^. Here a verbum dicend: 
 
 stuct^orc:t^-nieofthem(./.^.,.^^ 
 
 :i:2^.r^^Sen^t!;;^a";mS ^^:^!::^^^^^, although these may be mental, as in 
 
 mostly ha; the negative meaning ^^.^y^r^gi'^l; in^'^^onstnied with«.(not with 
 inir it belon«'s t<. the verbs with negat ve a"P .<5^,^';;/J- " " -^ic Fam 3, U.-Carendurfi 
 
 est ne extra m..dum pr«>deas. lb Off. 1, .^>. 14^ '" essedariis decipiaris caveto. Cic. 
 rendum- Ciesar exist imilbat Cics. B. <V,, \;^;~:y^,,K\,,,,ctive as a circumlocution of a 
 Fam 7, i).-Carlre frequently occurs w^^»\a "vere snbjnnc^^^ exi^fime^, do not 
 
 an Ut-dause. Only in this n^^-aning it belongs to the ua.^ o ^^^ ^Cavearnus nt 
 
 eical language. the on y P^.^lr'aiin ' is S^ Compare: Cant f 
 
 ^^^^:^ ^S ^^^39, i C^t^r T^l^^ro. 'sulcos aquarios faciamus. Co.. 2, 8. 
 
GOO 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 dere.dimic'ire. fendere). Some of those verbi* admit the con!»trnction with an ohjcct- 
 iiiiiiiitivi? {'<fn(if^re, cofiitdrf. aninntin. inditcert, m-oTin, tiitt), which is the rejiular C()i)>truc- 
 ti(»n of fttudere* and tw/ildrff. A fuw others take aii objeci-inliniiive in poetry and 
 po>t -classical laniriiairc. 
 
 ExAMPLKs : Af/itdlum in nrbe ah tribflnir* ploblo ?// tribflni militnm consnlari potee- 
 tjlte cican-ntnr [Th*- fchmie ofelectwff etr. qvan ar/ifafed). Liv. 4. 30.— Illud i)()tinB ar/fn- 
 dam Kit cor/it anduin eiit ne qniVocii apopnlo Koiurmo d<'sci!»cant. Liv. 24. 4r>. — Inltrllig»Te 
 HO (li.Kit. iioii ill nrji ut. ve;iim inveiiircttir {tlia* thi' infention wa^ uof, to find the truth), 
 fed >it ahquid Jal;?i dicere coirciCmr. Cie. CMn. r.:i, 177.— Ille iiilellexit, id Ufji atqiie id 
 jmrtlriX id filia; husb vis nttVrrCtur. lb. Verr. 2, 1, 2(>. — Itaqnt; i(t idem omnrs ptiitiant 
 sumniil vi (t'jetidnin f>fxe. Liv. 24, 2a.— Pater potnit a/tini'/tn itidurere nt natQram ipsam 
 vi!icTr»'t. C'ic. K. .\. 1!>. 53.— C^nuni senfttii»; ternptrmt (tfiitjlnt) po^^t Komuli execssuni, 
 ut ipso <,'oreret sine r»'<;e reiupublicam. lb. Hep. 2, 12, 2J. — Eqiiidein i/f lioiiOro ditrnus 
 esseni. maxinie semper /«^/ylrt. lb. Plane. 21). 50.— Id rnonrl ei>8 «tque stniero§ lit 
 Syracflsie in ditiOne ItomanOrnm siiit. Liv. 24, 23.— (^ni stadium enrrit, iiiti at cottten- 
 dtrt\\ debot ;// vineat. C'ie. Otr. 3, 10. — Kidter*' por amiios at scida lie qtni dcpereat. lb, 
 Att,. 1.20, 7.— Se adinsflros ut bene cninuiiliam ^.'ratiam referant. Liv. 24, 4s. — Dernus 
 mod») oiifvatii ne (inori) tarn necess^e nobis sit quaiu Catoni fait. Cic. Fam. 9, is, 2. — 
 Moderdlior ipse nt vulear lortuito in serniOnem veslrijin ineidisse. H). Or. 1,24, lll^— Me 
 spectas^e semper at til)i possem qnam maxime esse conjiinctns. lb. Fam. .5, 8, 3. — 
 Mentes iiominum nefarisc ne voi)is nocere pc.sseiit, ejjo prorldi. 11). Cat. 3, 11,27. — Pro- 
 f'Picite. jiidices. id jjlns apiid vos preces viriiinis Vt'stfilis qnam mime (JallOrum valuisse 
 vidtantiir. lb. Foiitej. 21. 49.— Scrviiis Tullius O'/A/ri/ ne i)lurimiim valeant pliirimi. lb. 
 Kej). 2. 22, 39. — Xi/iU (udiqaiiis h(d>iii quani vt Paiisam eonvonlrem. 11). Fam. 11,5. — 
 Pugna ut tecum et cum meis mihi licoat viverc. lb. .\tt. 3, 22, 2.— Omni contentiOne 
 pur/ndfiun eM ut Ii« hjec capitis :estimarCtur. lb. Clu. 41, IP;.— (^iios ut incolnmls coiiser- 
 vilre posslmus. omni ratiOne erit dlmicanduin. lb. Div. Ciec, 22, 72. 
 
 Ob9. 3. Tlic verba efficiendi. dcnotinj]: the 'brinj^ini: about' of an effect, are: 1) the 
 general verb» efflcere^, fucere**, jyrticere, pm.<ftdre, rem eo deducere ; 2) verbs denotitiij 
 
 * iStudere is rarely construed witii an Ut-clause, as: Doeet omnibus modis huic rei 
 studtnduin ut pai)ulaii0iie KomSni pr()lnl)cantur. Cies. B. G. 7, 14. — Caesar studT:bat itt 
 Jianc partem oppidi ab reliquil parte urbis excluderer. Bell. Alex.l. — Studtre is most 
 frcquoiitly construed with an objcct-inliiiitive : Studemua tutiGr"m vitam hoininum red- 
 deie. C\c.liv[). I, '2.— Fit-ri'sfudi't/am ejus protleiitiil dociii)r. lb. Am. 1.1. — Sometimes 
 aiudtre is ctnistrucd witli 'tntiniiife dauseti, as: Si quisquam est qui plactve xe ftudet 
 quain plurimis. Ter. Kun. prol. 1. — Pompejus rem ad arma df'duci itintef^uf. Cjps. B. C. 
 1, 4.— Orator ille. . .illis gratiim se videii studet. Cic. Off. 2, 20, 70.— Qui sei<e student pne- 
 itJre ceteris animalibus. Sail Cat. 1, 1. 
 
 t Krheredilre \ni\vi iiVinm cor/it'ihat. Cic. K. A. 19, .53. 
 
 :}: ParCire i^enerally takes a s>iljst,vdlve object; more rarely it is construed with an oh- 
 jcct-infiniiive. The coiisiructiou with Ui-clauses is very rare, and mostly anteclassicaK 
 
 § Struere. without tlie addition of s^uch verhs as moTlri, does not occur with L't-clauses. 
 
 B Tlie ct)nstrtiction of the simple verl) tendere (in tiie meaning of its compound con- 
 tendi-re, with ut, or iie, is ran;, as: Tril)iliii plel)is tribunOruiu militum ut habeanlur 
 comitia, tenduut. Liv. 4. 7. See lb. :i8, 45. Tlie construction oi ttndtie with an objecL- 
 inlinitive is poetical and i)ost-classical. 
 
 ^ Efficere is often used in the meanins: ''to prove (to make out)', mostly in the passive 
 impersonal form ' t-Jfiritur'' = it is proved, it follows (as a loL'ical consequence). In this 
 meanim;, «fficere is either treated as a rtrftum dfclaratidi. and construed wiiii an infini- 
 tive clause, or as a verbum tfficifndi. beinjj construed with an I't-claufe. as: Diciearchua 
 vult efficere animo>i esse mortuti-i. Cic. Tusc. 1,31. — Mors vt malum non sit, effieies ( = 
 Yourdiscussion will have the elTect that death is not considered an evil). lb. 1,8. Seo 
 It. 27. Obs. 1. 
 
 ** Fdcert lias different c<mstrnctions accordini; to its different mc.aninijs : 1) With a 
 participle as factitive predicate (p. 101. Ji. 74, A.), it has tlie meaninj: Mo intnxluct! iu 
 discourse', as : Xvx\o\)hon facit Socratcrn dixputantem, formam dei qniHri non oportCre ; 
 Xenopborj introduces So(Tates who asserts (makes Socrates assert) that the form of tho 
 Deity should not l)e investiijated. Cic. N. I). 1, 12, 31. Karely in place of tlie participU*, 
 an object-irifinitive (accordiufj to the construction of ju/>ere) is used, as : PolypliCMUim 
 Homgrus cmn ariete colloquentem /ari/, tjiisque lauddre fortflnam. 11). Tusc. 5, 39. — 
 2) lu tho meaninj; ' to represenf it takes a transitive object alon<? with an object-infini- 
 tive (Vikoju/jere), or an infinitive clause (if tlie infinitive is i)assive). as : Si timuigse eos 
 fads qui disccssorunt ; If you represent those that have j^one as havinj; been afraid (as 
 coward>). Cic. l)oni.4, 10.— Poetje imprndtre apud inleros saxum Tantalo faciunt. lb. 
 Tusc. 4, 1(5, 35. — Plato con^trui a deo atque feditiruri mundum/«d.'. lb. N. D. 1, 8. 19. — 
 Isocratem Plato adiunabiliter in Phiedro lauddri facit a Socrate. lb. O. G, O. 6, 17.— 
 
 COMrLETING THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 601 
 
 an effect iii the interegt of the doer: impetrdre, obtinere (tenere), amqui, conftcquL adi- 
 ]n«ct ; 3) the verbs denoting an effect obtained after a previous stiug<de • vincere ver- 
 vxncere evincere, expugndre. The Tliat-clauses dependent on these verT)8 take the'lorm 
 P' "'•' • "''^'' "^" ('>'f.''"i^'('Lv) of a No-clause*. Sometimes, in poetry, an object- 
 
 innnitive or a m< re sul>junctive is used in place of an Ut-clanse. It is frequently reuuo-- 
 naiit to tlie English idiom to connect That-clausos with the regular equivalents of these 
 v^-bs, so that the construction must be variously recast : 
 
 Ex. Faclam id intelligatis quid error aftiuxerit ; 1 will make you understand (make it 
 clear to you) wliat has lieen added l)y error. Cic. Clu. 4,9.-Gennani jumenta quotidiana 
 exercitjUiGno siimmi ul suit la»)Oris ejiciunt (make their horses able to bear the severest 
 labor). C;esB. G. 4,2.— lliec stultitia /oc-i^ (has the effect) ut hoc stultissimum facinus 
 »'ai)ienter factum esse vuleStur. Cic. Kab. Post. 9,24.— /^«d^m ut aut vivo mihi aut 
 niortuogratia.s agas (I will Dring it to pass that you shall thank me etc.). Cies. B C 
 3.91.-S0I ejicit ut omtna llor(;ant. (Mc. X. D. 2, 15. 41. -Satis id est magnnm quod potest 
 pra^'tme ut ea causu molior et pnostaliilior esse videitur (tliat he can inake tliat cause to 
 .7/v^rt/' better etc.). lb. Or. 1. W.AL-Pem hue deduxi ut palam puguSre mssefis quum 
 etc. a. liave made it ivmit^le for you to contend etc.). lb. Cat.2, i. 4.-Attamen le^-re 
 reteiitis Domitianis niilitU)us est factum ne prwlio contenderCtur. (Bv restrainin<r The 
 Eoldiers, a battle aw prevented.) C:es. B. C.3,37.-Ejus belli fama efedt ne se pu^^njE 
 committerent Salpinjltes (prevented the Salpinians from etc.). Uv.'5.S2.—Efflciun7ne 
 
 nnii infer tin v'Stiim <•! iiiarr;^ti..1f 11.,.. .i;»)-..„.^» , .1 ..i»-, .■ .. .Y. ,i .1 • -..^ ■^ _ 
 
 quid inter privatum et magistiatum dilVerat (they effect that there is no difference, = efface 
 
 1,43. 67.— MunitiOnes efficilbard lie quem locum nostri intrare 
 
 * u jjeitnce), i^ic. Kep. .,,, ^.. .^.»,...,.^.1* »- rj/n.t-rt'u«t /m; uut-iu lueuiu iiumti inirare 
 \.o^^ytiM(}rrevent€d our soldiersy/wn.) Cies. B. C. ;i, 44.-^^^ irascdmur pr(Estaljimus : we 
 wi I succeed in suppressing our anger. Sen. Ira. 3, .5.-An etiam prceMdre\>oU\\. necubi 
 rclitescerenl latrnnes //f quid sarcinHrum raperetur, ne quis vulnerargtnr ? Liv. 3S, 49 - 
 JJux Gaiiurum ?//i eildem deditiOnis cuditionc nteretur, a Crasso t/w;>e)'n7d^ (obtained 
 from Crassus the same conditions in regard to his capitulation). Cjes. B. G 3 23 — Galli 
 legAtosad Ca'Mirem dededitione mittunt et vt conservarentur iw;>€/7Wi< (succeeded in 
 eecuring their lives and liberty). lb. 2. 12.— Verum si a Chrysogono non immtidmus ut 
 pec 11 nia nostra contentus nt. vitam ne petat ; It we cannot make Chrysogonos be con- 
 ttrded with our money, lot him (at least) not claim our life. Cic. 14. A. 52, 1.50 —Wmadenti 
 eMi.'^ ne quem civem metueretis ; You have obtained the advantage of not fearing any citi- 
 zen, lb. Mil 13,34.— Quid a.NW7>/i/w/" nisi ?//aieiit qui in agris .reman serunt? what does 
 he gaining It except rAa/ etc. y 11). Verr. 2.3, 55.-Antiochus facile obtiauit vt Cbalcidis 
 yon»i^\h\apeinrentur H'.ii^\]y snccteded in Aadn^ the gates opened \o\\mq). Liv ;i5 51.— 
 JVlarcelius /r/i^/2? ( = ofjtinuit) ne irrito incepto abirgtur. Liv. 24. V^.— yictrunt tribQni ut 
 legem perferrent(cw?7?/^/f(/ the right of proposing the law). Liv.4, 2.5.— Patres summa 
 ope fric-e/vz/i/ut I- urius Camillus crearetur ; The Patricians, after a hard contest, cairied 
 the election of t uriusCainilliis. Liv. 5, m.-Pervic?rwitinbQ m ut Q uinctius de hello ad 
 Rarely/V/revv has the meaning of cogere, in which inelance it has t h e corTstrucTi on of th i s 
 verb (With an accusative, along with an object-infinitive) : Facio me alias res agere. ne 
 convicium Platonis aiidiam ; I compel myself to do someihin<r else, in order not to hear 
 liatos reproaches. Cic. Fam. 1.5, 18.^4) In the Imperative it often means ' sujmose\ 
 requiring an infinitive clause, as: Faconinh amicissimos Foniejo/'wi.w; Suppose all 
 bad been most intimate with Fontfjus. Cic. Font. 2.:i.—Fac (te) potuisse. fb. Phil 2 3 — 
 ^acanimas non reman^re post mortem. lb. Tusc. 1. 34.— >'ac, qui ego sum, es.'^e te. II). Fam 
 '' rTo!. ,'?'" . consiruction of fa/xre as an .abstract verb with a Predicate clause 
 eee /. .30. l-or the construction of far^ re with substantive Quod-clau.'ie^ see P.iHi, Obs 2 
 
 * Ihe veilis ;ff/'^r^ and ^^/firere, if construed with Xe-clau.^e.'i (see the examples in the 
 text), assume the force of ttie negative verbs of doin<r {im}mnre etc., see Obs. 5). Unless 
 these verbs have this force (the aim of the action beinir necrative). a negation in the 
 l.iat-clause is not expressed by ne, but bv non. alter ///, as : Splendor vest er /V/W/ ut 
 pecc.ue sine suinmo poriculo non possltis. Cic. Verr. 2. 1,8 ( = Your i)rominent position 
 has the effoct that if you taller in your duty, the republic is in the utmost danger). Hence 
 if efficere ut has the meaning ' to prove that\ the That-clause, if negative, is introduced 
 hy ut non (See Cic. Tusc. 1. 8, quoted above). Sometimes a clause with ne, and a clause 
 witti vt non are coordinated, to present proirnantly two^ different meaning's of the 
 povprnir.g verb: Ex hoc effiritur. non ut volupta^.» ne sit volnptas. sed ut volnpias non sit 
 sumnium l)onum ; From this it follows, not that we can decree pleasure to be no pleasure 
 (make pleasure be no i)leasiire), but that pleasure is not the greatest good. Cic. Fin. 2, 8 
 
 boinetiiues a clause introduced by guominus is used, in place of a Ne-clause, to impart 
 to the verbs/ac.'/y and efficere the meaning of a verbum prohibendi. as : Quominus dis- 
 eessioflerot, peradversarios Xwo^ factum e.^t ,- Ymir adversaries hindered the takinf' of 
 a vole.Cic. Fam. 1,4, 2.— Nihil censoria animadvcrsio efecit quominus reirimen renim 
 ex noiatft domo peteretiir; The censorian mark did not hinder the tenderiu" of the 
 highest power to tho disgraced family. Liv. 4, 3L This construction, however, belon<'a 
 more to the silver age, and is not frequent in classical style. ^ 
 
602 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 would Im^eJo'fU It out tiiai indtarp, adducere,^ 
 
 a transitive ac(nsan%e. in^- ^^,1,5511« promi*^i tni /^'^;,;^; xf,.t,n)ont() RonftinS 
 EnXh objcct-inftnit'vcs as . bv^^ci .,^^^^^.^jj,^ "'\''" " uvider nt. Liv.25,11. 
 
 am indued t.. remind yo»);, ^?^; Jo a^Mo) »o<^t« •^'^'-^''^'f '" " the .4rden l.iinsrlO. 
 
 nvarilia, alios >r 'C ad.a 7/M v ^^^.^ ^^^ ,^^^ *^':^^'^v n.reu nr Vi"''*. 1^- <^'- ^' ^-'"^^^J 
 
 nuntium. lb. 24. 31. ^ kkoative aim, if con;:trucd n h 1 « c ^^^^ 
 
 ^t •UcTwViler.so.netinv.s ^>' ^\ ^^S n:;:Vx,)ressinR both ^^^^^^^^ jbrmer 
 
 § /niem^/^r'', Hltl''»;!-i' •V'* W ori.'uially means 'to ,^'«''''^i .^" ,^ ',>iiriuni sit ; They 
 ^idered as a ivrbum dicendi ^ " I - ' ,.;„io pacis belllqnc !»'> ''•»'" *^' '? ' .^ce and war 
 ai. Nihil iA/^em-c/i7''<>''"'''^''\''Vufee act l-n of the Samnites "^ /*» l^'-l''y„^^,r,,ier« 
 wcmld in v.o sm\s inl^-rjerf wi'l» ) j';,^^'; ,-,,^^ decvnon of ♦•^•\,^:'\„^\rn,u.'es, inter- 
 
 Ui e i ly •• le^t the •^•«''»r''^,i tf. e K man m'i^'i~t'''^«^-. •'«PrV''' ?' I In s connec- 
 rmosilyusc.l of t»i': r^^.^ ^^hu-h c K . m ^^^ political 'r*'^,^^V„Vi eci>i<»«' t»»«3 
 
 po"e al''»inst tl.e «'^-^'r'^^^;!^'' ,'///;,/! e of the person a^"""-,' ^ •^,,.'; he decis-ou 
 K \at:rcedere '^eo..^^-;',^:^^huse1n trod need ^>y.^;;7;;r ' ^^ H;:" pn.nuntiaviL 
 veto is »''t«'P''f,d;,. V, IS n.preset.ted as a '''''t-,?.^f(tan iMttui. the tribunes would 
 
 Vin 2 1- Cies. B. (i.2..il). ^^^;?" * i-*- MhWnii dfprecans (-non r»- _some- 
 
 ^'";n;Anied with ^;^'^ «l^Xl^^i^'^iviuus it-nm in se ^^v^^ L -^^ ^,^ ,,.^ 
 
 that man from coniiuuiii„ «^ 
 
 COMPLETING THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 603 
 
 their own interest: i^if^rn^riniere, {nbi)fewiyfrare, (sibi) hnperare,abshnPreJenere.rettn^.' 
 re • 4) verbs of delaying and omitting: ^/^/ft/r^, 7/un-an, moram interimmy, exsiiectarfi. 
 cmctdH (diibifar€)*.sibi deesse, pnztermitUre ; 5) verbs of avoiding : mtare^setnpere, 
 carJ/-? (SVC (ms 2, and p. -VJO, rool.uotet).-All these classes of verbs admit the coustiuc- 
 S r«i.irT mtldaSses, to ekpress the action which is .aid to be prevented res.>ted, 
 dela^^Hi or avoided. The En-iish language seldom allows the use of such T u.t-c lauses, 
 so that often the Latin con.Mruction must be variou-ly recast. The Latin 1 hat-clauses 
 n-ed with these verbs, are introduced i)y guominvs, ne. or qmn. Quin can only be used 
 if (he norerning i>rb is qualified by another negation, or by an expression equivalent to 
 a ne Xon as rJ, ingre, or the form of a question). Q.imiinm occurs both when 
 Vhe v^erb is connected with a ne-aiion, and when it is not. Ae? is very rarely used if the 
 «'overninff verb is Qualitied by a nejiaiion. _ , , -, o 
 " The i"f o Ithese^hree conjunctions is thus defined: The first cla-8 (verbs of hinder- 
 ING) takes either quominux or ne (very rar.-ly quin\). The second class t'lkes either 5|vo. 
 minu.^ or quin, i^v ne. The third and fourth classes (verbs of rkstuainino and delat- 
 ing) \\x\iii aninX {Min-y nw^tXy quominu^i, a^x^\ never ne), the governing verb always re- 
 mri.rtoL qualified by a nk-ation. ' Without a nepUiou these verus do not admit 
 Thii-claitse^ The filth class (verbs of avoiding) takes «« (nvxevqninur qnotinnu^}. 
 Several of tlic verbs belonging here, may take the construction with an object-intiniin-e 
 (without a negation) in place of a That-clause with qnosninus, or guin\. 
 
 • The construction with qnin of nan duhitare and nan cvnctari, mentioned p. 589, 
 Obs 3 belono-s to the rule referring to this fourth class of verbs. 
 
 ■^'0»llTc^nv^^\\vv ^mnimptihre'uy Auct. ller.:j, 1, 1 : A-^ quid impeduire quin . . , 
 nrogX- i m?sJ? I Cic. Att. 4,2, 6 the vulgate reading has: Nulla re iinpedirer q^nn.^i 
 ITSi mild int.irrum es.et. But the codices read quod n. ovquod ne .u or quod m^, 
 which readings make no sense. Omn is a mere conjecture,. It is more probable that 
 Cicero ^vrote7;i^/.v^^^ jm^Yntrere is found with quin in the following passages : 
 
 HaiinonequVi'terd 
 
 Liv.26.40.-Nequediomuesid pwhiOtburU quin sic laciam "'» <-«''^«'tiu. Piaiit. Am. 4 
 .3 17 So lb Merc. .5. 4, 01.— Some grammarians (for instance Publ. Sch Gr..p. H-y^^) Umf^^ 
 liuVtran-tl.e difference between ne, quonunu., ai.'l quin : Xon pwhibui n^ tret. I did not 
 torbid him to «'o • quominus iref, I did not by prohibition imj)ede his going ; qum iret, I 
 d 1 not b ' pn:idl ifion prevent his going the did go). The.e d.lVerences are unfounded 
 '\U>/^.V.Su»« ire/ ''will hardly ever be found in classical prose. The expressions 
 x^^q 'miZaonot imply the idea of the English word ; prohibition ', ^vhich is d s- 
 tii.c Iv s(H:n bv the o is-a-e; quoted. Moreover, quonvnus is used in almost all the pas- 
 la.'s-quoted with t he ide-'a tlmt the action was really prevented. The cunstructiou with 
 
 ^''^'Wiel^ndni^^Ms'^hhule^^^^ Bclf in o.ie's own interest, or a hindering of 
 
 otlK^rs in t Tir^own interest. General verbs of hinder ng take quominus. while this 
 
 micu^j^^^^ of hindering requires a Quin-clause. Both classes are expressed by 
 
 Si^i^-eilM-^S butUme ofThe^ -cur ii:^>.>th chisses To those beUnigs^..^^which 
 
 fvorut^^^^^^^ o^hinUennff an .cti<m \ JAferre RvA 
 
 the oYher verl " of lav ng mentioned above refer to the posf2>one7mnt of an action. 
 This ' nnJet .1 f movL with the idea of hin<lering is the reason that non^jnorartis 
 CO st • cd bo with quominu.s and quin, as : Xihil nioror r/..o;/an/^^decemvlrat^ abeam ; 
 T o n t de • V nlv r 'si-'uatio.i as decemvir (i. e. I will make no difliculties as to my re- 
 Ji i " L v^ 51 Hi t N.c morati sunt qui,, de<Mirrerent ad castra (they ran wiihout 
 dt" V To^hL citni i Liv.40,31.-In post-classical style verbs ol restraining and delay- 
 L a 1 te iSenM w th quominu>^, instead of the classical quin, as : ^e 
 
 cl-i-issinU md kTv"^^ r/./.>;7/m'M'aliquid do gram mat icS sen herent retrained 
 
 from wr in" ti-rammar). Suet. Gramin. :i.-Nec quievTre Ubu qxifrminus pra^das e Ger- 
 liin^i:! pl^rent ;~S Ubii tr.r. not slaw (did not lose any timej in going to Germany for 
 
 ^TThos?of\^he'm.-ntioned verbs which, in classical prose, take an object-infinitive jn- 
 «tiuloTTha -Claires wUh7«o/m;>^ or quin, aroAw,pedlre,pj'ohtb^re, deterrere, recusare, 
 «o/ /"li/Z/f O the^^erbs irnimUre knd j^rohibere V^ke an ^^^'''''''^"'''^vulVi^'.r 
 CXrc 1 Btrnction the claus.-s sfuh ne and quominu, being less frequent. VV ith de.er- 
 
 H /ronmdial after //rf as • Quic res ad veH-^tendum cos t?niKdnt. Liv. 40, .«. -/Wa/>€/ e takes 
 a,f /^y "S " n he i>^^^^^^^^ M prohibeant nt \ as : Di prohibeant ut hoc quod majjrescon- 
 Si!ium publicum voUri voluCruut, presidium sectOrum existimCtur. Cic. R. A. 52. 151. 
 
CO^^rPLETING THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 605 
 
 604 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 FxAMPLE^ 1 Vfrbs or HiNPKRmG.-Plnra r,^ (licam tufp f^^ l''^^'-'!""^/;"^;£"(,[;:,';?: 
 
 vent me from ^ayin- ^"<>'-^''^^ '^- P^^"^;f.^^^|H,:^w ir) I W :« -.Kt^^ 
 
 imp^dW Onixi^T^'d tl.c i.nm.diate Ih'?";'""^^ «» ,?.nmi8 sonic; Qiis((l.K.s not l-rovt-nt u. 
 
 ln).n c-.ntii.uin- our pursuit, t- i-xtren.e < U ?• •, <^^ c. Si n U,W^ y^^\,r,„are civitiltcm 
 
 -Ne id qi.od placcbat decormrfr ainbitio ''^'f'^^'I^Xv^^VX^ N D 1 34.-A'« conf.-si im 
 l,e wishrd». . Liv. 5. :i6.-Q..ul .>/W;/ ^/;"/;r^;".i ''Vvt'Jr -f re m^ nnUta' externa v'/^'^^""* 
 
 of erecthiL' a nlatn.- to Inm). ^••P• A't- 3.-T '-^/ ;/.' i7'j;:.;,/i p,.evvnt by our rcHst- 
 rensti pote^t: We can, even with tl.e hel 1 »»}' >7'^: "^,.^, ^renunnal^ qmminus 
 ance the collapse ..f ^^^^. '^^'^'^'^''^'''X]^'^-^^^^^ 
 
 oratores omnia le-ant. ouuna au< .ant : N r u il } Pl ,«j V 5,^; t s*M vo„ recusaturos 
 itu- KiH-jiker-* of all th nil"*. Cic. Or. 1, <.0. 2.)().— <.1'^<I u ponum •";"•'*'' ^, . .,« _,|ii 
 
 S;o;> hoc rlcu..mnt ne e:^.;o;:•^accu^are.|tur ju uu c^\n^^^^^^ ,^,,,^ ,^.,,^.. 
 
 .,,f,den| n,nquany•e.v/.s.,^^ v'/oj. . ^^ U^- ato m ^i;-,j;V5.._p,„„pr.ius dixit von 
 ;SS;e'Je:^;;^im;,;t^;s'S;np;^^t^- e^timarCtur .i Bine ma.imo detnmento h.tO- 
 
 rehnti qnin oppidum irrumperent C ic-. li. L- -J. id. 
 4 Vkkbs of 1)KLAyin<;.- N.m ultra dfje?en<l>/m 
 exerciti.m in.truxit. Liv. 40. ^-^'''('/'([/'''''''''l'!!;::/^^^^^^ 'va ^ ].-Qu.im omnes 
 
 mus l.otntnem nobiscum vetu.hlte um.citKe ^' V "/^^, ":>;.• ^rn-jctn,- (that t lie v should 
 voce, audirentur, exspecUhi d.unus non V'P^f ^;'^'-' *? '' * 'S< H (i ^ '2 -/^^^.s"^ mihi 
 not «lelav anv lon-er the marchuij; a-anist the campK ♦-'V'^- ,"• \*- ( V, Vuu '•> 12 •' 
 
 nr,.v-nted the takin- of a vote.. lb. bamj. 4, 2.-> e nu Ic « 
 
 ceu«*orias lei;es toUere. ne 
 
 ;;npillot.unres..,..^..../V-^;-^^;^^^^^^ 
 
 prevent by anv measure (ron<>d>'i-e) '1»^'"^ ^variiMrom otn.„ ^ji ^^^^ __^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^, 
 
 )('in^ in that i)osit!on wnere eu. ui'V"'-' • ^ a-i ivipter nuereum 
 
 
 «T 
 
 ni • S^^^ construction ' Stat pe?- cUiqnem qvmyiinm (where per has 
 
 the sim^ ce a. in "^r me licet \ the phrase l.eini? equivalent to ' u/t^.'/t-"' ^f"/f J ,9 '^ 
 the -«'^^^, ;'\' ", the acce-s..rv idea of responsibility. It may be variously r.ndiied 
 'T^ ch^,^^^^:^!^ne il}aA,of\^\x i imputed to some ""f ; ' -""?; n*^^^ ^ |T: 
 jt IS S'<"f'/*^''i*' Miliiip of etc ' ♦ it i« one's fan t ', ' owinir to one etc.'. or simply by He 
 ,p<M.Hble o /;;••!"' ^/.*V^[.',- co'm ov t. per Afra?wwi stare quowinvs proelio dimica- 
 IVTi^r • r taVle- ii^ha^ pVevent'ed a li.^ht. Oes. li. C. 1, 41.-S/./i.>". p-r 
 
 C^:tiiuni%^;;;^^;-;m.i.U> potirenun- ^idebnmr ; U k..». tl-Jrebonius wa. rj.^^^ 
 
 f^^ n u e 1 w""ow n "etc o tl.ecom.nande.s, and not to the sol<lier-. Liv. :^ «i . 
 ^^Z'l^^l^^e^mtT^Mi^l^U- fi'ies pra^^taretur ; because the breaking of their 
 faith was not attiibutable to him. lb. 2. .^1. 
 
 n«^ 7 In a similar way a Q>dn-clause dependent on nonfacere (?ometimej» non efficer^) 
 inJ rr;J"t< V/Vr^ e mei idn- of a verb <.f le^traunnr, or on>ifth,rf (Ob? 5). and hence 
 imparts to ^/t^-r^ » '^. '''-';;^^^^^^^ ^ ^j„^„(,^ ,,,.,p (refrain) doin<r 8omclhin<r% 'I cannot but' ; 
 
 :.".S'."not' but e 1 you omSy iny opinTo-K lb. Fam. 6. 18, l.-Fien wdlo modo iK>terat 
 could not but tell >* 1, •''Vi? ' .^ iilto.rfther imnos.ible not to spare ( leomenes. lb. 
 
 See Cic. Mur. :il, TO. . -n> . j ..„ 
 
 4. Fad-claiiscs. 
 
 nnn '^O 'Verbs not belonirinjr to the claR.«^ns mentionod above (i?. 23- 
 o5) nmM Ike Tbat-daiises to represent any snbstantive olyoct (transitive, 
 r. tVr.b ve or adverl>ial). Such chtnses either take the ior.n ot a Quod- 
 .^1^;'' , Ih ll>at <.f an Ut-olanse. They are called sub.tantive-clauses 
 
 or FACT-CL.\USES (p. 41)1, Ol5S. 14). • 
 
 i^.^ 1 TnF„.rli«h Buch Fact-Clauses are either made dependent on a noun Of -eneril 
 Obs. 1 In ^^'^^-'''^'^•.^"V,,^ t) ,.v kft the form of a participial noun in it^g as a sub- 
 import ^f«5;^i ^>°7' VSiVth >^ tUe ?n lU^i^^^^^^ form,' an absolute neuter demon- 
 Htantive object. j;» '"' il non<trative with the i.oun reAh<jec re.<. ea re.^) as syndetic 
 Ptrauve(^../.r><^fWH»^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ required by the govern in- 
 antecedents (p. 4*>2 Obs. 1.)). n\ "'/^" -'"^ ' , • n,,t,.eedent the clause is attached in the 
 verb, or ^v the lem in,- m Iverbia^ tl^e cli^Jt conceived a. a ;>^^^^^ or present fact. 
 
 presses a mere idea conceived in ^^^.^^r^^'^'f^J^'^^^ and some- 
 
 d.tic antecedent may be 1*/ <> >' •* V^rtci<es occur not onlv as ohjecf-claufes, but also 
 times, when it is m the ablat ^^,"!, \^^-f '^ ' { ,^Tfhif^^fe-cIa>hes (See R. 21) Obs. 7. B, fi). 
 
 ced.nf. as transitive ohjrct. is placed in ''"' «V'^""""*,'; ""' '* ^';.'' J,,V„J.( //,„/ v.nl liavo 
 mtnus n-ro 9«<d cn^t-ssisti 'ft'-™7>; '''""''^,, '''i;;"'„S7?o{? .s • . CiJ Brnt/Sii. 297.- 
 
 lEiir^t ?'c7trar/or^oi\^Krsir.sisr;ra^ « itc. b. Fan.. 
 
I 
 
 606 
 
 THAT-CL.VUSES 
 
 15. 4, 12.-Qno facto dna. res eonseai7.tu. e.H*). qnod animos ^.^"^""^Prj;^';^,,^^"^^^^^^^ 
 
 once etc ). Li v. 38, 4'.). See ihc Ex. p. 491,2. 
 nJ V Of th.. intransitive verbs that govern a -onitive and ablative, only some tvrfta 
 
 ilisisiipiiilii^ 
 
 iac? a/ r /^U /ac^am e^e creda. quod = Ascribe tin. to the act that) 
 OB '4 m the follosviu^ instances Fact-clauses with quod take the place of substantive 
 
 Aclius .oVo ^/..0^/ nihil tale t.mOrcnt .Eiuli opp. nni incautas P'!^-V'^4 PoinuTc^n 
 ver factfkat the /Eiuiians did nor fear anythin- oJ the kind ,'^^- 3;.^.-I «> '. '^ ^^s 
 
 contcnt,-d ^e^^i»-;-'»- J'L^- %,,,. ,vi de ic Vn.tecedent eo or Aoc may be left out, which 
 
 "Z^^Z^^^Y^^^^^sc^^^olr into cauml Quod-clauses :.(MI potuit 
 
 intns U<.nuh;'sVir'i^i^;^^ .^y^nm%d ( = eo quod^ "';>,;''." i;^^^^'';V'!' ""l.'i'r/jT'io' K 
 
 tiiConsithiUse ret)ns tuis a.t <i'ind Uenietniim liomain ini>ens Id. 40. i'--7V '^f "Ij"* .'\[!'^ 
 
 "V7>;;S;^7r'K7a'verriumT'ffl<;ieiiili, ini"lil have taken iiii Ut-clau»e (*. 25. 31. wllicll 
 won ;m 'v 'r<:prLrted %fpreUica, an ...rec. of Jl- acllon >vh, e «,"^^ho by 
 
 th,. Kict-claus- represents tlie predicates as ccnncideiit with the main action inus 
 J :.Mn in simil r «em^^ uses an rt-chius^ : His subsidiis m ,umcon><ecu(u.<7a ex 
 
 takesthi^loini^i m. a _. ^MUiiH Kacl-clai.se in the sen>e explained 
 
 ;;;;::;.;"\i:e 'ft 'rauie \!^!^ f-J'^LL;; 6>A>c^c/a..., dependent on cura,n adUm.e ( = 
 
 '''rTVini^au^'dcXemicn^^ ^eenis to require the form of an ;,,/f.mM 
 
 oUu o i it re t he O .i-clau<e rel.'rs to novum, m. anint: th«t th.- act mentioned i, 
 ;;.r/n <X,:!!k^^ tZ:^v.\W fuUow a pccmiur method in the order of exam.n.n.^ 
 
 '"S hi u'Smilar construction eo mnrju. • .n»o. where eo i -f ';!';!- -l^^y ^ relative clause, 
 both the clause and the autecedent eo represeut ablatives of diStiena. 
 
 COMrLETING THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 G07 
 
 ;>nW^/- i</ V'/<x/. besides the fact that, <^\*,^'^^'f'^'* ,; '^' ^„„ ' „,,der reus erat factus vfrom 
 SSy>/io« of the fact thul% as: V-Pf '!!? '"iat, Timu^nSt c^^^ ^ic Chi. 24. 
 
 the fact that Scamunder was "'^^'^ ^-^'^ 1"\^ ,r'^^^^,^^^^^ patiebSlur (is inlerred 
 
 Hr..-0.ii.un pains n til.um ff.^ »^ ,^; ' "/ {V, U A 18,52*. Chalcidensium legatio o6 
 from his snflVrin- him to ^''V ,!Lnnwlec\lci' e-tintr. ductus, ultimie ..ecessitatis visa 
 id qmd priiueps eonun, pod. b i=^ ^^l '^^;^ f^^^td^ ad omnium familiariiat.^ 
 
 res. I.iv.4:i, V- In hoc '["'^ '^.'^'^^^/'^^.i^^.!,^ quidnam sentTrem de hoc quod 
 
 esse munltas. Cic. \ err. 2, -i. ^'^•-J,^"- ,^'* ' fn f V? 19 -Omnia mihi perjucunda fugrunt 
 duos soles visos esse constarei. 1'^- -^^; M;;..^ ;;,,,, ,^^^^^^ 
 
 yr.,Ur Ulud nuod parum ^"^^^^^^'^^^ :^:^;^^l^^^^^^^^^ you) lb. 
 
 "^facl that my property in the salt xn orks /^ ^^«^J^ ^^^^ , meaning ' besides the fact that ' 
 Vam. 7, 32. l.-See tl»e Ex. p..492. 4.-t or ;^^^^ express ' excepting the jact 
 
 the farm lO'.vferquam quod \f xnovii comuu^^^^^^^^ than - »r,^/^r id quod\- as: Sinis- 
 
 t/mt\ the form • nisi quod \^ '"'^j'^ '-^ "''"^'r^nno ^ additie vires (to 
 
 tns, pnetrrquamqu^^l ^"" '.'^V^urtiiaf thJ^^forSd m body, new strenj:th was 
 
 the left w nir, aside fnmi the fact tliat tnt j '"' "'Jf " '' . ,„hn ennsules nrofecti ad bellum 
 added by. etT). Li v. 9, V -'l^^:^:,^^;^^^ZrSin^o^ 10, 26.-Cum 
 
 erant cum (juatuor legionibus, alii «" M;\'^[;, '";. f J;'"^^^ n hih.sophiil vehementer ab eo 
 
 and their prepositional ""^^^'^^'St^nr to^o/^^^^^^^ I^ must be corn- 
 
 periodical connective, being equ.vakmt /." | '«' J^«''^^^ ,.^^.^ ^hat ?), as : QuUr 
 
 pleted by ' Quidde eo dxcam quod e c. ' X^^/ v^nrcr^^^^^ vouiself into cusu.dy. 
 
 qnod tu te ipse in custoduun '^^^^':''^J''^^^^^^^^^ periodical connection, 
 
 Cic.Cat.l.8.19.-(6) Very fivquen ly ^''';^f";Vv' fact that' or ' a^' /o' with a parti- 
 bave the force of ' Q^'fl'-totV^i^'^' 'o^^^tSi^m G^nnano^^^m v.Galliam 
 cipial construciKm, see p. 4j4, «»«• .« ; "x \a\J{xI \s to the fact that he was taking over 
 traducat, id se sui muniendi.cau.a \^^''\^^f,^^^^^^^^^ himself. Cffis. 
 
 a .'reat number of (iermans into Gaul, he ^\ff''*" »/;!„',' indul-entia plures ad lalia 
 l:QAA\.-qnodetiamsua rrdfuUn'it j^^^^^^^^^^^^ J^.^^ ^^eir own 
 
 audenda impellantur : Concerning '^f, {«f^, ,7:;,,,"JJ,iore people might be induced to 
 property, he was afraid that by ^";;';*;i'\^j,V** '^ ,", Te P^haicio de^.Cre quam bonis 
 such undertakings. hw/M.rro.-Quod " -^; ''VV*'/o ywir remark that I am not owiiig 
 
 of prevention : else u^on is "^^''l- ,. o^„-„,p« ee«c mentl^sef vt amplissimis honori- 
 1. TKANsiTivK UT-cLArsEs.-ResTondit Socrat^^^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 hus et pneniiis decoraretnr un^/;?;^ '^^'/-^'^) : »^^^ 
 
 lii-diest honors and rewards. Cic. Or 1, 54. * /•^.-:;", '/'';, |,irini05 ( ^ you have no right 
 vriH)ssis. nee nat.ira "J^l'"^.^"''"^ " .^^^ !,r7as noS^ 'or "as youi- heart any better 
 moVe important ^l^an that oy ^«a/^(7 i'^ "'^^ X ^ et animi magnitudinem 
 
 nnnlUiJ than your wilt of doing *^': /''• ^'i;, t,,; ,, «ccidunt infra se judicet (complectt, 
 Lnplectltxr. e. justitiam, et "^ ;>">.; 1» '* :* ^^'and the^^^^^^^ ol ju.lging all human 
 a/u/m/) : VVMsdom comprises ma.namim^ 
 
 accidents n er or matters. H). I m. 3, i. -io. ""/'''' . v|ptelius (bv his proceedings has 
 I^IV u, quererer hoc -ciis.imperari (('^^f' J^f ^^^^^' ano hi r-iU to k immely that I 
 
 '"" '^""";';l'. :;r.;;ch\'hi. ?:^K- 1 .!"nposed o^^ ^ur •dii..s,jb^T.j,2,_i^^ 
 
 via I/ com plain ol Hich^tnin_s^). in_. i p-^^-:-::^:::-;;^,^— ^^^TTnuam vehementer eum 
 
 ^ - •• ,Cat.2,2. 
 
 , as: 
 nati 
 
 timemlm,. imljrem. ''«• /"'\X, ' ;^ ,]^?e 'h.flnUi i... a.ul. .,>--atively. a Ne-clause, 
 
 juerui guiu'i/o ui.f".*>v. -,.-••--,» ,, ,., 
 rempublicam pcenilCret. \ ell. Pat. 2, 12, 
 
608 
 
 THAT-CLAUSER. 
 
 etc. Ih. Tn^c. 1, 41. 9S.-See the Kx. I •;•;:-• „^, j^ vorsn ?// totis viribiis torrJl apre- 
 clerei.nir; All their hope was directed to l^^^\P''['[yir:\!^\\\zl:, „„„ vide,iinini cs^e coii- 
 
 B. Subject Tiiat-clauses. 
 
 are either 1) iiie rA^>ivr.o w^ '""'':.J.r;V,,« «n. nr '^^ pufdicate-.xd.tkc- 
 
 J^. 73; foU.) i^" OB.^ 4^11 ; or 3) active im.-kusonal vr....;.. bee A. -b. 
 1 Thnt-dauMS as Suhjctts of Passive Verbs 
 
 1. The verb f.fUxre ''■•^"«V^y,/^ h,. <■ v.- m^; nl " v» l^ke:.».. It-dauae, it may .u 
 
 K.. jmrnre. Auct. Her. "2, 2. 3t ^ substantive objects, in the 
 
 3 The verb relinqxere, winch in the actne "'^^^^J^^f'-fyi rV„viin- ' ' the only alterna- 
 
 ]\ 
 
 \ 
 
 SUBJECT THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 609 
 
 bo aone, as a con.,ue.c,o^^ the <^-.starK^jnc^tion.l ^^^ 
 
 s..risqiie copias di^tineret. ^^'«''•^•.^•/^''Jjl-^ take Fact-clanses with quod (/?• 2H, Obs 2), 
 
 ' ■ 2 '7-A«(-<-(««».» «» Subjects of Impersonal Predicate-adjectkes 
 
 Obs. 
 pat* 
 
 t remains) has the ^«.i.^truc tio «t 'J J'/c" tentMdicen.lum videatur .( = re In.qiu- 
 I't rhm^ii as: Rdiqunni *->^t nt "^/i- V ""'' "^ ' , ,„i-,.o « K|lhiect-ehul^-e with quin, like 
 
 INFINITIVE CLAISES >f t'l^ASV"'?. ";,..» J 1,U m/inion. or to pass his J.ld 
 
 -HTh7;;;7iT;:77in^n;^I^Tn^^ ..7 with an ^f^^y^^ ^'Vme^ Sail. Fr<r. Hi^t. 3. 22.- 
 extremely rare, as: ^""V'lnranlt'Se even f ' rele'rs to an anterior fact as: 
 li.liqwnn e,t \> construed ^MIh an J^:;l^';r^^frcmains the only alternative U)Ossibiltj) 
 
 hdiqinim est ut p.r servos 1^«'^' "'^^'^'f :'/.;,: ,''^rfcR \ 28, 7r,. Here rdiqnnvi e^t implH^s 
 (hll^he committed the crime thr^u.^i ;^^:,)^^^if^- ^:eviou. arqvu>en(s^ l^""' XhVn 
 a verb of ptorinq (see Obs. 1), "= {[{^f "f/JXr is the pcr^.nal construction « ith an 
 o»/.vlu.ve committed 'l'y-"'"^]:>:*'iV- ^1''«^^^^^^^ ^^ "^' '^''''' ''''^'^''^'' 
 
 EJc^Turc'S (^ -%-- -^ ^^ rf '"V^"an;.d aHnu'!A.c.r. potest, and a^Jf^nli.. 
 t 1 should be expec.ed Xh:afactli--< ^''^'"'f = ,? \7 "^: /'i k/^.'r, i-.deed. is sometimes 
 .houhl c -nlinir to thi> rule, »>e c<)nstrue( ^^ th <^^ . / J^^^^^ succe^sor tuns 
 
 2 c str led bywrilers or the V^■;''V;Tt'i classical pn>^e/ad^6 est\. either cons.rued 
 no.-it qmim '// velit. Plin. P.Mi. 44, 3. l;"V?(u r^//7 'te 1) l4 No. 2). or with a subject- 
 vti. a second ^"l>''ns or with a unTumha er^^^'^rf^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^..TrMnot: inqne 
 
 i-irtnitive as- N\-quc ^m//a«^'^ "osiris unc) t« mjun /yM/ j y ^,ry frrqnriuly Jacile 
 
 isinrorporated as adverl) in the ''=i""-V,"V.r^ v^Vm-i/e vim joofubtre). Cses. B. G. 1,11.- 
 i;o;/racl/.vimpr(.im>erein,steadc.f ^ >^o«^>. r^^^^ ^A^,^ ^ subject- nflmtive as: 
 
 qme sint in jure, vei apu^ nesc " ".nice. Iom before vt, reprrsent tlu 
 ^M<re the editors, by an improper ^V/ I, th text hardlv admits. 
 ^.ecufive clanse,^^hich the ^•"•'"*|^^ " /j. ^^ eUometimes in Lati. 
 t Propositions .>f this kind may ^"\ ^'' VL,, k"; ct a^ • ' // is danrjeiox 
 cbuU with 'tr with an imlehn. e lo, cal .ubjcc , ^ ^^^^^^ ^^ ^^ 
 
 Jin) be replaced by a 
 
 ..X ,.u»ycAOt/^ i/" owe'* flfrfrmo- 
 
 I iiii ■•■"> - - ^ - - ^, . jy i)e considered the prac* 
 
 «iSU^l^-l^^'r !naSJv;:"Sy;i^S^a,,;^K una J ru,c or OBS. 3. 
 
 Fiu. 3, 15, 50. 
 
SUBJECT THxVT-CLAUSES. 
 
 611 
 
 610 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 T^m riir^re - Vende niihi va^a ctelSta, non es diiiiins qui habeas qnne tarn bene f-^^ta sunt. 
 os^^CciuuK it.;tc. l''/."^'-^,, ;-,'•.,>. i 'ji-Lonoiwi et>l* (It would take Km niiich iime> 
 
 r\ . If ti.o nrinriDHl Drcdicatc fcxpiess^e» tajmh/mfut of the author, as in the pre- 
 
 a past or P.'-f/ 'i., "^ ' "^ ,J^ , /,^^^^^^^^^^ But in all ,»u-se insranc-e. ../6/V7 i/./f/.i- 
 
 Examples: ^-^ .^''^^.^'^/h,- f .?, ^ 1 ,,oc /H/iv/i'///* pmas v</(>^i vesiltum se.lCre in 
 
 lb. K. A. .1 •;^7' •'','/ ,'/ Vis lint • (Mid /'^/7>^'^^• <-s/ q'J'ini sapieutis vitam ex iiiMpi- 
 44. '»i'/; • .w'*./"'."^' , . . .^ . /11, ...J. tlie autlior retirements thu hut tliat mc 
 
 ^'V;''^'";:.'"''\7\'-' 'tV,;! inrnfi':nn c<)^^^^ </Li///i/^ (ev/) quod auirni valenles 
 
 e.s/*. lb. Fun». Iti, It ~^'''''\'*''''''^' .„/,,.. iutm>,,. 4 n -Ouninadtmn.ios homines 
 
 ;f t Ti.e '^V-r/^''' t'-' t he thoul,i?.e subdued by pas..ou who is not .ubdued by 
 
 fear. f/0'-< not hold to reason). \\y^A).J, 1 >. . ^— . 
 
 '"^V^.n^^n^nTii^eVtli^^W^xn^^^ r.cere" In.l^t be diMin^Mii-hed the exi)re>j-ion ; .MAif 
 /■•/L-^/^' - •nil.fi / iV.o lon-ius' (li'ixnot wait for the time that), which is eon- 
 
 ^":;;iJ:!:^qS'';^mi'5icSrrCi?:FanKll,2T.-AiAi/a /..,i.. viuebatur. quam dun. 
 
 ^' +'o;;1?.^'o;her hind" ^[^v^^i^^^^\^\-- with a transitive object dependent on it, 
 mlv^ e repla -^^^^ ^'l^^^se in winch th • trni-tive object '^ -'•••^;>^' ,=' J''^ j^r.- 
 
 SiuiNV theactivesubject-infi.iitivebein-clKUiu'edu.;^ 
 
 J- d lia'ia .sius qua.n eum a quo pecuniain accepens con.Umnare. Cic \ c^n . .'. ^. -ii. 
 n.\o t tr Msitiv . ob e,-t euni mav be ma.le a ^ul>ject-accusatiye witiiout chan.'tu^ it in 
 } r n wlule h ■ a-ti e subj.-ct-intini condrmmre is chanu-ed n.o a Vr" W'^nWeT 
 inft i\ ve (ro/^/^^^^^^^^^ nf>*rtrnem repetl satis est. Liy.3,53. Here the si bject- 
 
 a^-e i UiveSy<Xn mav bo made a transitive object-accusative, the passive predicate- 
 ?nV.;ilive?4wi boc^^^^^^ an active subject-inQaiiive meitatem reiK^tere «atts e«t). 
 ; Fur fjraluni est ut, see Ob3. 0, at the end. 
 
 s 
 
 Or., r, Tf the clau«e is represented as a nde, riqht, duty, task, or as un action wj^ch 
 ..S & iL'; o?S;^ed, it^ljes^th. iom, ol an ^<^- (-f ^-^^^'^^' J^.^^ 
 claram ilh.d est, et r^c^^;/i q oqne et JJ^^'^J^J^^'^*^^^;';^ '«„a true rule that we should 
 ^due ac y-"?,^; 'P->lf'l\^"'"^t^,;,?\],iye^ e^^^^^ q"am ho,K,ribus pertunc- 
 
 love etc. Cic. 1 use. 3, 2». ':{• ^,.^' V.'f '',' .i ^^^^. n, or. i 45. Similailv : Non est rectum, 
 turn senem posse sno jijre f 7'« Jem j ^a uc it), ur i ^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ ^_ 
 
 ndnori ;/ar^/v ;//(?yor*=m ; It ^ ""^^/fV:, ht V" etc i lb Tim.tJ.-ld enim est proprium 
 ' the proposition that , or ^I '^ ""^ "^^t ^^^^^^'/-^ ^' ,/^ Jv ,todi5 (it is ti/e partim- 
 civitiltis et urbis ut sit hl)e ra et not ^oi icita ^ ue rei cujiyp.c _ j^onrium est 
 
 I Ouod-dause {quod ninu esi aiccu n tu^.-, ..ui- — "V.^j ,",;:.' .^ ^n ex- 
 correc^-Id arlliJfor appr-ime (n vita ^^^.r^^^^^^^ 
 tremely us"/ul ?^de^ thai there .hoiild be m «" " Y/-^tc ^ Cic R A 20. 56*.-Nihil est 
 satores mulios in civitate esse, ^^'f «' < { » "! i amlief N^^tl h ? more important in 
 y;.^';i;^:;:;^K' n.?^r c:;^^;^ ^ff^n^ ISe rr.^ ^^o.// be favorably disposed 
 
 '^Tlt ^;;^nc^l>;.r P^dfeate ^Jen-^^^^^ t-^,:!^^^^^/^^^^ 
 
 the sul)ject-claiisedenot.n. that s(,mcmn.^^^^^^^^^^^^^ predicates are CBquum 
 
 turn estyn '»« '«^''"'"-'.'V^n.m Fsbould be onen to all ; not ' ut auxilium pateat '). Liv. 
 
 ato 
 urn 
 sc. 
 
 repre»ciiun^ n « _ — ♦„u„ .H*. fnrm of an 
 
 e*>«, perspicuum est. Cic. Or. 2, S4. 
 
 ,nd .^quum est with an 1"'>";;;^,;;5^;\^;.^/ ^^.^J t>< tude^ another coordinate predicate 
 e.>/ are ai.ways <oDstiMted wnthinfintivc clause., u^^^^^^^ Liv. 39. 13. See, 
 
 requires an Ut-cla.ise. «'^^I'^^.-'f^,^";" ^f/'p^J^.y^T^g^^i-ni «i/i L M. 23; C.es. B. G. 4. 16; 
 bolides th.M.xamplesquotcH in the ext.Cc.^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Nep.2.7; Ter. lleaut 2 1.2 I^^^. It), ^i. ana one i. . ' img to the principle stated 
 two or three phu-es of l>Iai. us a e ;«"- r^^f^^/^ ^^;V,^^';Vet:o^ est meum 
 
 :;Sd^^;f c:isir:;^\niu:^=i^K iii Sa^r^S^-r':..... exisUm^vlt. C.s. 
 
 ""fs^lu^ est at is better; it would he ^^f^^^l^^^i):^^ T Infit'^^^^ 
 as*: dbrui JFAu^ i<.^..i;>us satius ^^^^^ taLTZ Ter E un 4. 7 2. -Satiu^ fuisse non 
 with an intinitive clattse. «Il; /on m. ^a/,.^^J.^ ^^^^ 
 
 iia nobis majf^vr^s- '{«>''t'«^,/';;:/V^.',^t-ntoner ' i'^ not constrned with an Ut-clause. But in 
 thlSd.:;'' Sn't;;;;" V?fi;^liSi^% it'tal-^ either an intinitive clause, or an Lt- 
 clause. See Obs. C. 
 
612 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 n«5nal or nnn^ual raro or h^trango. fho pubjcrt-clanse takes eifhn the form of an inHmhre 
 c'aofe or th;>t of an ri-cln"Sf* (no-ativt-ly >it i,nn). The form of an rf-clausr is ntntvally 
 li«t'(l in this* connection, if the nullior prcpiantly implies iliat, wIkiI is ^tatea in the 
 clause, l< or s^hoohl he oiherwise, or should be exptchd to l)e oi hei •^yi^e 
 
 ExAMPi E* -ConcedCtnr renini e.-^-ie iff b.-nos hoiii (lilijr.int. Cic. Am. 14. 50.— Mn autem 
 ilia rtviora ( = iihid verins) nt idem (sit) iiiteritiis aniinonim et corpornni. ll>. 4, i-*-— ^^ 
 TH-nm est {\f it is certaiiDt vf popnliis Rom-Iiius omiiTs jrentTs virtilte sMpenlnt Nop. 
 llann \.-V>r>i)n est, etiam eis qui alicpiando Intflri suit, esse coosv/em/iw. i. w. tuu .i, 
 l.»r,4_\eaue reri/m esf, oppriini inemorumi imairinum i)ondere. lb. ()r. y. hh.— mm 
 ren>/s est. imimion in oo diserttim esse/w,s>6 quod nesciat. H). 1. 14.— Ita./?/ rerumxWmU 
 awiriliam nisi inter b(mos esse iion possf. 11>. .\m. 18. (J.'i.-Po ipso Roscio potest illiid 
 niii(iern<^.s->v f,Us>mi vt circnmliirjTtiis fuerit anirui. Ih. Div. 2. 31. W.-f-a^'/m f/;/. oniiiT!? 
 animi robiplditi^ esse e corporis societilte. lb. Kin. 2. 82, lOi.-Ktiam turn ()niiin ren^ymle 
 tiV aliquem (crimen) coimnisUse, in t^nspiclDne latrainte. lb. K. A. 20. 5..-Atqiie il ua 
 est pmhahiliKs. neipie tainen rernm. nmrris in eo quod scrent satis ^.<«e cl-quentls. ID. i»r. 
 1, 14 —Hoc rtri-itiiile von est. odio fuissf pareiiti filiuw. lb. \\. A. 14, 40.— Aon m reri- 
 simi/eyt Chr\>^o^<>\\\\!* Jioruin litteriis adamarit ant hiimaniiruem. 11). 41, 121. —An Jvn- 
 simile est itt civis Komanus cum irladio in fonim descendeiit V lb. Sest. .%. 7K.— ]t-rtsimife 
 von est ut hunc in adv.rsij» rebus ab pc dimitteret. \\^.'!>\\\\.'i{^r^:^.— ^/n)vmle mm est 
 vt ille relio-iOni sua» pecnniam anteponeret. lb. Verr. 2. 4, »}.-I)ei rerisvnile est ut altos 
 indub'entius tractent propter parentis, alios propter fiitnram ijosterorum indoleni. hen. 
 Ben A Z-l —Rnrinn est ut in foro jndicia projiter id foliim constitnantiir. Cinint. •>. 1.». .i. 
 — Quid tam fwwi/a/'/m qiiam '// eqiies Koinamis ad helium maximnm i)ro (•onMilemit- 
 teretur? Quid tarn .si/ir/'//'/'^ q"^»" "' C(.nsnl antefieret quam l>c'''"'?;'^ ''/''"; ''V| • J{"!' 
 tam inrredilnle quam?//' iterum eques Uom.lniis tritimiiliHret? Cic. L. M. 21 »i-,.— i^uui 
 tarn prater consiittudinem ( = iiiusitiltdm) (piam homini peradolescenti ^f(r<'^'^'^ nan/ 
 ()iiid tam tarvum quam ndoUscenfem |)iivatiim ex«rcitnm conficeie ? lb. 21,()1.— Non erit 
 tibi hoc nocuin. mihi ill'iin nulllus rei rudem esse visum, lb. Ur.2, 1.— Hoc vero uort/jn, 
 ut homines servos e medio snpplicio dimi.-^orit. lb. V.-rr. 2, 5. fi.^(inid in (.ra-co senuoue 
 tam trifmn atcpie cehtnalmn est quam. si qtiis despicaiui diicittir. nt M\>orum nitimu* 
 essediejltur? II). Flacc. 27. (m. — H in cunis tueiit aii<;uis. ;/o/j tam e-t minnn (strang:o, 
 uiiu^iiaU lb Div 2 :^1, »>♦>.— Hoc vero 0])fi?n"m est (ironically used: It Piirpasses all 
 belief that such a man should t.ut know etc.) ut is qni linem rerum expeteiidilnim yolup- 
 tsTtem e>se diceret et ultimum bomlriim, id ijjsum quid et quale sit nesciat. lb. l"n.2, 
 3. f).— Id veroTuilitibus fitit jytrr/rattim v\j'/nntd>fm nf, qui aliqnid justi incommodi ex- 
 gpectavissciit. ul/ro pr(emiitm/en-ent (aj,'aM»st all i)robability). Ctes. 15. C. 1. 8(5. 
 
 Ob>«. 7. Often the neuters of ordin.\i> NtMEKAi.s (definite or iiuhfinite) are used with 
 the copula iti connection with a subject That-dause. Such numeral adjectives are not 
 to be considered as impersonal ])i-edicates of the That-clatise, but as absolute adjectives 
 denotiu"' the -jeueral idea of a t/iinr/. bein? used in this connection to express \\\f order 
 of certain 'points' in discourse. Such constr uctions must be t reated, not accordwiL^ to 
 * The rea-on ()l iiiis consiructi..n with lUiUt-dause must he derived Iroin those pas- 
 sages, ill which the subject That-ciaust' contains a fact arjainst reality, or a proposition 
 which is contrary to experience. In these instances an Tt clause is used, becaust; this 
 form makes it p(')ssible to expre-s the non-reality of the predicate by a suhjunctue (see 
 T). .548). Subsequently this principle was ireueralized. and optionally exienued to all 
 instances in which tlie principal predicate refers to the rK////y of the clause. _ 
 
 t ' It i« certain ' is either expressed hy'cirfum est\ or i)y * rena/i est . or erpforntt/m 
 est,' being construed with iiitinitivu clauses, as : Port<'ntum ortissimmn est, esse alvpiem 
 qui etc. Cic. U. A. 22, (»8. More «renerallv. however, the expression 'cerliun est m.ans i 
 (lie etc.) am determined (to do a thinir) ''beinf? either construed with an inlinitive clause 
 or with a subject-infinitive. In the infinitive clause, the HniiUsh subject ol the principal 
 predicate is inserted as subject-accusative, the tense of the predicate-intinitive Iteing 
 alwavs the prestyd, as : Ceytmn est. exuUltnni hinc irt vie. 1 am delermined on .s:<>">>' i'H'> 
 exile" Plaut.Merc.3, 4.51».- Knriim w/t libtrtjlti parcere certum est. tic.Oti. i. !•..>«. ir 
 construed with a subiect-infinitive. certnm est takes the Enirlish subject as dative of the 
 interested person: 'Mihi artum est, illTus vti tesnmoniis. <^ic.L'iec.9.24.— Su'pe ex 
 Crasso audlvi, sifA certum et^^-e a jiidiciis causisque discedere. lb. Or. 2. 8.'>.— 1 he expresMou 
 • exn'oratum est ' is construed, like an adjective-predicate, with a dative of the person and a 
 subject-infinitive clause, as : Cni conuis bene constitQtum sit et exploralum ita semper 
 fore Cic. Tnsc.2.7.— 6V/i sit explordhnn (To whom is it sure) se ad vesperuni esse 
 victurum ? Ih. Sen. 1«>. 07.— If certum tst is used in the meanlnir of ' it is certain , it L'en- 
 erallv refers to 'subjective' (i. e. individual) certainty, beinir construed with the (I'lnve 
 of tlie person and an infinitive clause, as : Certi;is tihi eM vi^ esse Homa% quam miia,t« 
 AthCuH. Cic. Att.l. 9.1. —Sometimes 'cfrnx/a/ \ with an infinitive clause, is used in mo 
 meaning of ' objective ' certainty. See li. 28, Obs. 1. 
 
 n 
 
 I 
 
 ■ 
 
 SUBJECT THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 613 
 
 f/ 
 
 the nilo» of impersonal predicate-adjectives, but according to those of impersonal pr^rfi- 
 cate-nouns (Obs. 8 foil.), the iiouter {render of the adjective beinc: not the neuter of 
 ' impoisonahtv ', but the neuter denotinir the general i«lea of a fhin«r (P. 1.^ 8.)4) 1 he 
 form of the sirbiect-clause connected with such expressions is either that of an It-clwise 
 (if the numeral n-fers to the order of points ' to Ije discussed), or that ot a Quod-cjause (if 
 it refer- to anual facts mentione 1 in order), or th it of an intfnitive clause (if it_ relers 
 to asMnnpiionsor opinions enumerated): as: Er-o hoc sit ;>?imi/m in pneceptis meis 
 ut demonstrCmus qu.MU i.nitetnr (Let this be the fir-t point to show et<-.) Cic Or. 2 22. 
 — Prorimum est ut. doceam, deorum provideniia mundutn administrSri. lb. N. D. 2, 29.— 
 Extremum est ut te orcm, animo ut maximo sis. lb. Fam. 4 18 7 -^//^r'/w est. quod 
 ne<r-uis. actionem ullTus rei posse in eo es>e qui etc. \h. Kc.VT.'l.'^\.-Fnmu7n est, e.se 
 athpiod xh^um falsum (the first p.dnt is the as.su77iption thai something lalse has bee^i 
 seen): secundum, id pcrcipi noii />r>sse ; tcrtium, fieri non jmse ut etc. lb. Ac. i'r. A 2b, 
 S:3 —Ao.rJmww ^n/, quam piimum mo/j. lb. Tusc. 1,48.*. ,r. , , 
 
 Sometimes other lorm-adjectives are used with similar constructions, as: \ ir hotni3 
 vt sim, 7veiijn est ; it is in 7i>y power to he a ffood man. Sen. Ep. 98. To such clauses the 
 rules ou Fact-clauses must be applied (/.'. 2C., Obs. 5. See li. 29. Obs. T.) 
 
 3. That-clauses, as Subjects of Imjyersonal Predicate-nouns. 
 
 Obs 8. If the imp<rsonal predicate of a subject-clause is a pREmcATK-Norv wilh the 
 CODula the form of the clause is determined by the previous rules (Obs. 2-«)), if the 
 iiredieate-noun with the copula is equivalent either to a verb construed with an object 
 That-clause, or to an impersonal predicate-adjective construed with a subject Ihat- 
 
 ^^ l" PuFDiCATE-Norxs WITH suB-TECT iNFiNiTiVE-cxArsEs.-Tertium exercitum tnendis 
 paiari finibtis feunn eraf ( = lanul nuntiahdtur). Liv. 10. :«.-Ketn te yalde bene gesnsse^ 
 {^Zlrerat. Cic. Fam. 1,8.7.— NV/«.v a-unt esse comul^TT. phhej'mi fieri ( = ^destum. turpe 
 es'<e^ Liv 4 8 —In Oallo-neciri sacer tnons v^t. quern ferro riohn^ vefas hahVur. Just. 
 \\,i—Fac\nus est rinclri cirem Komanum, sceJus rerberari, prope iHt7Ttctdium necart 
 { -^ it is criminal etc. if, see Obs. 3). Cic. Verr. 2. 5. «Ui. , ^ , 
 
 2 PuFDu ATE-NOUNs WITH Qi'oi)-cLAi'SBs.-lf the predicate-uouu uiav be replaced by 
 a v.'-rb i.f praising, censurinir, or accusinir. the subject-clause generally tak^-s the form of 
 a (Juod.ch,use, provided it contains an actual fact. If it contains a 1>ro|>osinon equ va- 
 l.-nt to a clause with if. or to a That-clause with an indefinite sub.iect (Obs. 3), it alvNaxa 
 
 akes the form of an infinitive clavse : Sum7na laus tua et Bruti est quod exercitum pne- 
 er 'pern Ji"/i;;,^,/u.rcomparasse. Cic Fam. 12, 4. 2.-Dixi. cum ^^''^^ ''"^J;]''^!; '^^^ 
 \y.xuc esse vel niaximam daudem), quod non solum quod opus esset rftc^m, se<l et atn 
 , d non opus esset, tM>n diccres. lb. Or. 2, 78.-P.ut : Mag-a lans est et grata hominibus 
 Znn hominem elahordre ( = if one man is workin.M ,n eS scient.a qm^ ^J^ '" "'^is pro- 
 futilra lb Mur9— Suesi maximam putant ^.svW«//(/6r/i. quam lati-Mtne a suis fi nibus 
 IS V aqro' ; • the lands are waste)! Ca^s. li. G. 4 3.-Grave crnnen est hoc, praWrmi 
 Koc s habuisse decumfinos (it is a serious charge that rt /mp/or shoul.l have ^^^.^ f?-}- 
 Cic Verr 2 3. m Hence, of coordinate That-dauses, one takes the lorm of minfimtre 
 chiuse if if Vont.iins an a-sumed preposition, while the other, referring to an ac ual fact 
 fake^ the form of a Ouod-dause, as :' Non tanfum inali est ( = so -reat an evil) p^ccure 
 ;;;i;*;v-/r..' (V ndeis .U. wnuiL'). quantum iUud q>>od permulii imitutOres principes ex.stunt 
 las that so"manv imitators exist). Cic. Leg. 3. 14. 
 
 3 PuKDicATK-NorNs WITH Ut-claisw. AM) NE-ci.ArsKs.-\ ctus/,^/ /^'.T ( lege m- 
 mv7^ •. ro/^C/i//7^//n esf^ amicitite, ut i<lem amTci semper velint. Cic. Plane 2.5 - 0?n- 
 snlusfnit = consensu decretujn est)senatus, vt mat Ore Prot.o.sce.-emur. b^I-am. 3 3 1 
 P iinum est offf'-i"fn (idea of dufi/, Obs..')) vt (homo) s«. con<ervef in "' une ^tat i lb. 
 !'■ n 8 r '>0 -Ejus cultilne hoc 7»hnusest (idea of task, Obs. 5) ut efliciat etc. lb. 4. 14. 38. 
 -Fuif)^ (uioddam inter Scipionem et I.elium jus ,i(lca of right, or permission) jj 
 sch) o I .'lit obsenaret parentis loco. lb. Wep. 1, 2.-Mea 7'aho in diceiido hac e.<>s^e 
 solet (it is V lis a A /.^ Obs. r,) ut boni quod habeat. id amplectar. a tnalo autem rec6- 
 datn 1 Orl ^V-liriculvrn est 7ie (according to the analogv of T>^reri, = ^'^rendvm 
 i ) ///om .esVoi)iieconveniant. Liv. 25, 3^. -Nullum est exxxm penculum, w^qnid iu elo- 
 o \ ',?i^ ita p leu e ut Mc. Cic Or.'l, A>^.-Haud sa.u. p.7'iculu7n est ne 7u>n n^or em 
 op.andam putet lb Tusc. 5. 40. -The co'nsiruction oi i^ricuhnn est with an infinitive 
 
 '*^;;^:T iniui'^^L^^nol?;;' a^^ ^- replaced hy verbal or adjective 
 
 nre ficates the subi "^ is treated according to the rules of Fact-clauses ^7?. 2(,). as: 
 
 ?'«/'rmiVte li /? /^0^^ Alpls patefi.ri volebat (the fact mentioned «-as the 
 
 cause if th" mission)! C;es. B.V^^, i!_Gravc^c^ianw,rj^/^^.;^./;/L.ti»iL!:^^^J^'!^^^ 
 "" ♦SuT-h predicate-nmin's of gel^eral import may be expressly added, as: AlUra est res, 
 vt res geras magnas et utills. Cic. Off. 1, 20, 06. 
 
 *;i» 
 
•\ 
 
 614 
 
 THAT-CLAU8ES. 
 
 opinio de di- immortHlibu. on^nlurn essot (.ho f-t^non,ioned -;:™^^,f;j J^^^^^^^^S 
 
 ffi^^'^v'Vro^ =^flrS^^^ rccipias in necsHiiulnu-m tuam (the «/m/. 
 
 ?[;,^ s A^Va; ^nl/Jrt ^:;^Ai^ ^^,) Ii>. Or. 1, 1.. -Est »1- c^njnflne a^.^. n; n..,n.. 
 librn<quecivitHtil>n8«nnvi(iia plonre comef» Pit. Ncp.Chab.3. (It i» a wcl, con^quem 
 to the «Tcatness and liberty ol a (^tate, ///'// etc.)- 
 OBs ^10 There are several couveutional usages in regard to subjcct-clauses connected 
 
 "i*X''<au'";^.trul, it is alb.wed by the ,od., it i. prede.,in<^.by fate) is not cou- 
 strned wiTl. an Ut Jiu^.e,' a. .hculd be expeced. but wUh an 7:f;'^\^;^, ^T^Hu c Icgt 
 «(/r-i/e« ^« «.'!'< <«^,"=-^/ 3 2-2.— Si %o.< hoc nomine api)(Uanfastst.\h. 
 
 ^r'Tm^o^^^fa^ GerJ^n!>n.^ra,'e iit was not a. creed ^^ /«'^f''"',/.^^, ^^;!;: 
 
 S;.^;?"mc '^n til ^Si/m / it:^is Shi^d by r!te, is roL.rued eliher wiOi a 
 K -cf infiniM e oV\ vith a It-clause, or uiib an intinitive-(la,.se. the PredKate-n.flni- 
 nirw nrrS tense: as: Ihiplntit fatum fuU .-^ ecpn. aid>-re (it v. as 
 
 ordaim-(yf,y ut.hat D .ph^ should fall). Cic^Kat. :J. 5.-F..( lu.c s.ve nu-um sive re - 
 pub ciyX^^^^ nt iu me un.im omnis ilia iiulinatio tempornm !''^-''"\''«;,^'\- / ' ^^ ^Prn^^ 
 
 Kumt'iuim t/^/trTrt'. lb. Div. 2, 8, 20. _ 
 
 2. The predicates ,le„..tin« ' i/ i» «^ *<;«' ' ("W «'; «"-^'f ''"? 'fl''„rw ImhiMfc. tt 
 
 r,. tiv,.^ .the hibit exist:-), as: K<»iro, quia was est ita rofjaodi. Cie. tam. i.. i.. m'i ^l 
 rmpi^; ro>!'/el^^ <leos ai^i^>'a,Hii : The habit of disputing again.t the eM.i- 
 
 'TtI^^J^^'^I:^^'^^:^^ i:'-tS;.-'ii^h\ime. the proper time) i. ^qniv^^ent to 
 ^.,V/.' «<S .To timt a Tbat-clause cannot, logically, be. in the relat loi. of ^^;;]!^^^^^ 
 nT fCe to this expression. According to this concept .on M/./>./. .^ s mc '"J»^^ ' 
 strued with an uttiibut ve gerundial «leiiitivi- (see p. Id'.», Oijs. .3). liut. '""■^^nj.M"'-;."'^ 
 L";> I- Us construed with a s./Jrcf.infi.itire. or with ^^^^.^'l^^Yu^^ll^^iZ^a^^^^ 
 an imuer-onal predicate = experJit. as: Jam (emp't.-^ est ad id (luud inMitnimus «^<'^'7^^^- 
 Mr Ton 1 5 -Sed^^m«w^v^■/. jam hiiic (ihlre me ut monar, ros ut vilam agStis lb I use. 
 \ 4\yrelwuseT\w^^^^^^ perpetua v.ta cogiUlre. lb. Att. 10. 8.-The construct in of 
 ];,npus ly wUh'tn Tt-clause ii ailteclassical, as : Dicas. ^^^'/"'f"-^ '"'»"; ^^ "' *^^^ '"" 
 i.nm Pbiiif Mil 4 :3 8 — Videiur /t^/^yvJAsf^^ef// eJlmus ad Jorum, lb. 1, i, »-«. 
 
 4 Peculiar is the toormarjis est. in the meaning • there are stronger reasons (it 
 foroH thing than for another), which originHlly was a.te.hnical l-'^'-'j^'v/ '' ^^^^^ ^ ;^"i;- 
 sioii-beiiK' extremely frequent in the Pandects and in I Ipian. Hut it "'^""^^^"rf. » 
 m lin^rv c a<«^ical prose It is c onstrued (as if =^ i^'>s caum est, or major causa est) either 
 u "an S^'i/^^^ Quod-clause (with su)>juiutive), if it refers to reasons lor 
 
 '< irtf/ SOUK' in-' as:^J^^^ est j/MCielius) ip-e moleste ferat errasse «•, q"»'" «^ 
 i-^^TwaS ^^n There are more reasons lor ( u'lius to feel why he 
 
 Iho .1(1 led) s urv fo his eiT..r than etc. Cic. Cel. 0. U.-Macfis est quod yratuhr til.i qua. 
 Mioi.Ki '*^^'\^'-'V;/''' '".p, . ., Tf ;j „,.fcr,; to reasons for -beCvin::', or ' adoi)t.ii«r an 
 ^;■:!^:'c^Il:.^^^^n l^£l^^<;^ But this construction occurs only in 
 
 '^ois"lL' Impersonal predicates, consisting of inipersonal genitives or im per ^^^^^^ 
 datives are treated according to the same rules as prcdicaie-uouns ; as : EU mihi ma<jn(Z 
 
 SUBJECT THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 G15 
 
 , * u« «rn,iTstnr Ptr Tie Fin 3 2, 8.-Scient ;)rtM6w cvree fnissc ne r\\\ti \\)}\\nB, 
 oir(t vt ^^^""^^V.^4 7 -F^/i^^ "^^m SI am) deOrum judicio inbui, la»datid»is est. 
 cU' Or.%'S'.-;(;iiS t.:^o:!ill^^^nento, c^vod pila e'x scutis evellere non poterant. 
 
 ^"^^nf "12' ioinetimoB impersonal substantive predicates take q»in-clauses^^ '"j'^'lS^ 
 
 i. That-dauses a» Sulijecis of Impersonal \ erbs. 
 
 Item "8 The active (or deponent) TMrKUSoNAL veibs wl.ioU are con 
 strnedwrih Tl U-cbusesmav be divided into Iburgronps : 1) Tl.osevv; nch 
 nZ'sen ,c idea of a ferbum seniiendi or dedarandv: Apporet {videtur). 
 
 See Oi"s I -2) Tliose which represent the idea of a tabum fmiendi : Fit, 
 mdilTccidit imdlf, nenit, mu verat. contingil. oblingtt. est, stat, (Obs. 2).- 
 3 Th «e ld"l. rep esent the idea of an adjective predicate, denotmg 
 a iu "nu". of tl e author on the morality or merits of a P!"!'?^;""^/ 
 lleet::mLi,,rep,.jnat, o.^riet (neeesse ^^^^ '^^^ .'^l^'^^^^^^Zti 
 refer! non altim t, prodtst, ex nm est, obest. See Obs. f — 4) A teis okdin auy 
 
 ;^TEUVEUBS ^:l.ieh, by their freqtjent ^"»"«f,"'';,^;f 1"^ Li- 
 clauses have assumed the character of impersonal veibb. Accedit, sequi 
 
 '''aMrl'ubim''^mt^hu.st; connected with these four groups of imper- 
 sonals takiute form of an innuitive clause, or of ^ fimte c^-e intro- 
 rlnced bv lit ne ouod,nnominus,qiiin,oHhe form of an asjnacuc suo 
 ncvecluise according to the i-ules of that class which they represent. 
 ^^tWect FACT-c^AUSEslsee It 20) may be connected ^v.lb any onhnarv 
 veS predicate which admits of tlie idea of an action as subject (Obs.o). 
 
 liar is the per-^onal construction <•»«/>/?; rf^{ Tn iU)^ "iS^a^ data sunt ut ad 
 
 passive, according to the analo-y ol '''^'''^/P;.^"*^.- '^*''?"^,^ p'L it is clear) is some- 
 !^,,andam vita. ra,iOne.n//a/a .... «/V>^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ?Mues. but rarely, used ""P^lf^'"^ '> „V, *, 23 -L 7 /' i cllr) mostly occurs with- 
 idesse quod se ipsum moveat. ^1«- JJ »■ ^; | • ^^^ da ,.e w h (lative of the person: Num- 
 ont s.i).jeet. but also takes a ^"^J^'^V ! f. . n^hal eJit Liv ^45 So Ter. Andr. 2, 3, 3(5. 
 q..am lUiumt^ uoOis, ihi ^f^^f/^^^^ff Jj^^'l .^ f^'nticmli ridere. is virtually 
 
 2. Videtur. being grammatical > the P'^^^'^.,^ *^^,;";,;'V" .j^.^^ it« logical subject in the 
 an ac.ve (deponent) '.'-Personal ver» v - ^;^f, ^" rm^d wi h ^^ ^'«"«e : Non 
 
 ddtire (the same as hcd. placet etc.). and is con/'Jiueu ^^ uu un i ircauentlv 
 
 1;:mMtur ad beflte vivcMidum saHs ;>^.. nr^,^..^ C i^^ 
 takes the personal con^t.uctio.i of the n n^^^^^^^^^^ although it has a 
 
 i, retains,, bv «.^.^ P^" |;'J- /^ ,7,, f^, fxpres ed o? tufdeJ^tood': Mihi videor )^^} de 
 orai/miafic'd subject ^^\y^^.."^."^*"^'l^\ ]^^ __Vere T?n/ti hoc videor esse dicturus. 
 
 bmt.ibus lebus ejus gestis </m.s>6. V • u\ ho :?;:;, n- \ re ' Ived ' (hko placuit), and, in 
 
 visum est. Liv. So. 33. . ♦„toe „,-, infinitive clanse. Its logical subject is 
 
616 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 T know or ' it i» evident to me ' ) : Constare int^r omm^ video, pcit^re aurlo tnas qnerSliB 
 
 ^n v^^^^^ condaMif (M became evi.iei.t to me^ paucuimn civinm 
 
 r!;-;«- e "/ ^ -Omnih,.s (n.ilitil.u.) cw..'-7/../aall the .old.er. 
 
 ! f ».i M^U n VA.iiin />»oWrr^ J 4. '^'J.— Sometimes con.^tat (witliont a per- 
 
 ^"Kd^\>^";%";i- --r;;'^^!^':^-^^ = I^om^Jum nobis ami, 
 
 ''folnJ^^iflil^^^^'il^^^r^^ or^ituaare.r. In the former t..-aPin.Jt 
 bt'lon<- to he third elas*.. (See Obs. :\). In the latt-r meaniiii; it is I'duivMleiit lo (O/ - 
 si,.^k;"'ro s> /i ' '/ etc \ re ernn- ei.her to the truth of a propoHtiun. or to on action 
 
 inZith'e €1^ the l.x'ical sui.ject be in- cxpre.ssed by ^inter\ as: Inter omm.-^ con- 
 r;f /^^ opcnte (All ^h< ufd a-ree on the fact that, ail nhould acknoNvled-e that) conuno- 
 ^ ^^Ihni^Iim a recta ratiOne aversas, es,e vitiOsa^. C.c. '»\J^?«' ;;;;-{^"^ ^^'^^ 
 HnU'urfHouuhtiWi Perfect a (K^^v); 'There js a«:reeinent on the point that , oi all tic 
 a ho i era.'rce' (hat the remainder of the war was carried to the vnd by the consnls 
 Liv i ir-irri/nUir relern to an action to be performed, it is cither construed with 
 nn nl^L^v (,^^r^ with an asyndetic clause wi.li a predicate in the subjunctive he 
 io.Mca sti bjects bein- expressed by the daCne, referring to the one party, l^'tl bv the 
 ir; (siti I C-/ /I referrimi to the other party, a« : Mihi can Dejotaro cotyyoit i// lie m 
 }ne s cas is cssJt cum snrs copiis omnibus Hviad^ an ngre^oi^ct with Ih,otar,>s that he 
 lhnfu?ibec\c)l'\i Atl G, 1, It.-Pacto c«/.ma/ vt Hime.ulinis re-m Syracut^am esset. 
 L vtl tlpro ar^M,nti si aurutn dare mallent. dare,d conr?,nt; U was ^t-pu lated in 
 tlie'treatv) that they should l>e entitled to pay in -old, instead of lu silver, il they prc- 
 lerred it' l.iv. 38, 11. Conip. CMc. Tusc. 4, 19, 4:^. Plant. Aul. '.>. :i, 80. 
 
 r, nl.^emt ' they disa-ree ' (bein- the contrary oUonreint) is construed with avudcr- 
 f^riafi^ZlaZe the lo'ncal subjects bein- expressed hyhder\^s: Q.nn.tum ini mim 
 Sspor am.n;4 tntel' auctort^ dUcrepat: Liv. 2«). 2:,. But '/.o/. dWrjput takes n(>nn- 
 J .Maccordin- to the analo-v of ^non dnlAtdre^), as: ytc di.^cnpat q,An (nor is tl eie 
 anv dit Vrence of ..pinn.n as to the fa.t that etc.) di.ctat..r eo an-o A. Cornelius fm-r. L v 
 8 40 -()uum hand dl^crepdret r;jin qua' re-um fuissent, Komanr.rurn es^ent U »^^n /A. y 
 auned that what had lunnerly been under royal dominn.u, should become K..man terri- 
 
 ^'V'lil'v^^itan renit (it occurs to me, the idea comes to me) takes an infinitive clanse. if 
 it i's eiuiAient to ,n.mini. as: WnU hoc mihi in menfem, 1e fs^e liou.mem div tern. 
 iV uf \ 1 2 2 4J If it refers to an intention of the doer, it \< either construed wi li a 
 B. bjecMnftnitivc'or (rarely) with an Lt-clause : Ne.pie rnitn ^^^^l^^^r^Y*^"}'^" '"^!>r^;i 
 Cia«s„ inridfre I never thou-ht of envy.nir Cinssus. Cic. Ati 2, 4, 2 — U//i{ ""/'(..»" 
 m^dmari'nl^nnf petam. Plant. Cure 4.4. 2.-SMnilarly the l^^Y^^^,?'^ ^JillliliuUIn 
 2wrven>t' is used iuipersonally with a snl)ject-.nfimtive clause: Ad auils mafjutiatuutn 
 7><'/i>/*ii'. exnles in iirbem (levenisse. Nep. Pelop. :i*. , /•„„;/ „,^ «r 
 
 7 m/it me (I am mistaken = opinio fallif me, mv opinion deceives m^\f>gtt m", or 
 vmf'Tmelh me), take their l-.-ical subject- in the arrusnire, heiii.; con- 
 { tiS w th a s,ibjeet-inflnit;ve clause. Xon/a'tit me ,s also construt.l with ^Q^;-^'';'f 
 (ac or'iinu to the analo.^v of non duhito ) ; ^w\/ur,it m. sometunes ^^^^^/''^^'l^''^^ 
 tive- Failit eo>>, dicendo homines ut dicant ef^eere .oleve : 'J lay are mi-^taken >" «l'^»r 
 opinion ti.at men will learn speakin- (u.ake th^.t they speak, 1. e. ''%*»7'{;;;^> I^.^'r.n- 
 in<r Cic. Or. 1. :M.-In <hac) le-i; nulla e-sw ejusmodi capit<i te unu JaUit. Ih. Alt -i- -i-*- 
 -See vero Ca-sarem fefellif q"in ab eis cohortibus victoria oriietur (nor w^;is ( le^ar dis- 
 anooinied in his exii •ctaii.,M that etc.). (^es. B. O. :i. IM—Neque enim tf.u(/it onii.uim 
 art'imn parentem pt^ito..ptun>nJ.dirnri. Cic. Or 1, 3. '.>.-.!/. tan.en fn-.-nU .leOrujn in.ino - 
 talium has esse ptenas onstiiatas. lb. Pis. 2(1, 40. C..mp. Ca-^. P.. C. 1, .1. Cic Att . In, .|, 
 Ib.Caje.;«. Tul vhm^c^ opinio me,rallitU^i\i<^^:i(M''fctans..n^:^^-c^^^^^ 
 
 nem multum fef'-llisse q»od existimaris me causam Cluentu le-e d-fensQrum ID C u.. ,. 
 
 8 /ZeY, u'iich takes its lo-ical subject in the dative, is used with J»":/Vi ,1. Ilh 
 meaiun-s and cmstructions : un Plm^t mihi. m itie nieanuiu' 'I 'ike , s ineti 11^' 
 pleaseslne' is construed personally with a substantive subject, or imper>onady ^^^ >> «^ 
 tubject-inflnitive, or (as rerbum <ifect>is) with a (^lod clause, as : -V^'i •'•"''!■ .f^y'-^''^'''.^^ 
 mihi semper p/annf. Cic. Tusc. 2, :i. '.».-Ne mihi «luulem ipsi tunc //''i'^J'';; '' ;\ '^,,'^,^:,';;^ 
 ab reip.iblicai cu>iodia. lb. Fam. «>, 15, 3.-Ait Quiutus, lil)i mm pfocere quod ad n t s 
 de me asperius scrip-erit. lb. Att. 11. 13.2.- (//) In the meainn- ' if is proper it st.uyls 
 (witliout a dative) with a subject-infinitive, or an inllnitive clause: Placet »" ,« ''/..^"//^f 
 quid sit offlcium ; It is proper (for me) to dellne hrst (or 'that I should defl.;e li;^- ' « 
 idea of duty. Ci cOtf. 1. 2, 7.— P/(/c^/ es^ guidda m in republna pnestaii^; It is i )r«)pt_r 
 
 combinations, as : ' In dif^quisi- 
 
 * The verb venire is used impersonally in some other 
 tidnem venit \ it is a subject of discussion. Liv. 20, 31. 
 
 ■% 
 
 SUBJECT THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 617 
 
 S t^rjS^^Iif T.r 3 i3Xi(;/rFr;qu:Mn{y -^a^r? acet ' ha. the for«. of • I resolve ^ with 
 rhep M^Wt ';///;/«' r', or ' mi/n pfaritnm e.t\ In this instance the reL'ular construc- 
 tion-hat wnh an It-clav.e, or. if the predicate is a passive, ^^ 'Ih^!'/;'^"' u' 14 T ' 
 is : Senalni placere ut con^ules eis ^^V\^^^^^^^^'^^\'l^'^^^^^^^ 
 
 I'lacitum eJnt in .-MmIco loco considered. ^ V I^fl'/^V"^/.^;-* "f,\^\™ ^ 
 re,s(.lved to) (inecOrum oratioiies explicarem. lb. Or. 1.3», l.^i.-IIunc locum ^"'^;'^ '""','; 
 rtmn placuit Liv.5.:i8. Frequently, however, an inhniive clause i> used exen wUh 
 ac'tivc i)r%i ates, as: Placebat Valerium Iloratiumqne ire m Avenilnum. L>v. 3 oi 
 So. etilnes ac.ivJ-intinitive clauses are used wiihthesubjectacctisat.^^^^^ 
 riacn' IkeOlos, Achieos etc. temptare ( = se temptare Bieutos, or Bceotos temptan ). 
 Li\s' 35 47 
 
 There are three imner-onal svnnnyms of fVart^ namely ; Jurat delect at nrnMibef.— 
 nJlectat i rar ly ..y^d impersonally, bt.t .oineiimes occurs so with a ^"!>J<^^;;;"fi»' ".^ 
 dlect t me\ it ddid.ts mi), as: Sunt alii quo. cum ipsa ^^'"^^^^l^^l^^^^^^J;^ 
 Tiwc 3 ^\— Jurat me (with the same meanmir) is Irequently used, both with a PUtij.ct 
 h;!inuf;-e%om:^hne"in the perfect) am» an i.Mlnitive clause, as: ^- >- -lf^-^« 
 fitsnere Cic Fam 3 \0 —Jurat m£, x\h\ n\A< litttras projui>:se. lb. tain. .5. .il. 3.— />ioec or 
 K /;.i/. (\vi t lie p^^ mtum est. nirely libuitL is similar to the fir.t niean.ng of 
 
 ^ Inret \m\ m e- the id«'a of an arlntrary action (I choose), and is used only of actu n* 
 ^Sl; iScS'subject.^ I'is either con^rue.! with -f-^i^^^fl^i^'^^l^SZ 
 form-adjectives: Lubet mihi facere (to si&y) in Arpinati. Cic. Att. 1, 10, li.-Z.t6tfw/n e^c 
 
 mihi paullo plura dicere. lb. Or. 2,85. 
 
 9. Licet mihi (it is allowed to me) does not denote a positive P^r^^^^jon (^h'ch m^ 
 he pxores-ed hy ' conceditur'), but a want of prohi/ntion (licet mihi = I l»'^^f " J". Lv 
 mav lean) llence it cannot take a j.assivc ajrcnt. Wkc ^ concedituf ; but thepei>on, 
 or thim- which ni-htpr^^^^^^^^ an actiin, is expressed by 'Z^/;' with an accusative (;>^r 
 «L / er- I have n <. Iji'ctic.n ; per leqes licet = it is lawful, i. e. the laws do not pro- 
 
 n> r> -7iVV/l as tree rcMilar constructions : 1) with a mere subject -vifinitire if the per- 
 io Init h s a Sd t is not^ represented as uncerta n : Stultitiam «.c«.<7r. 
 
 mini "is c..i)i(v7> /?>f/ • It is allowed to arraijrn lolly {my may be airaigned^ '^'';,,^''^- 
 C VV-Q o u'i H'n velis passis pei^ehi liceat (Would x^^i we could proceed X\^e^■^ 
 . tc ) li i 49 '> If the person wlio has a ri-ht is mentioned, either a mbject-iufinitive 
 fuUaUntwith he u^rs>nasol,ject(locricaT subject) in the (/«7 m or wMth an asyn- 
 Vncsidh^rcti^^^^^^^ tlic P'Tson beim: made the qrammatiral .ubject of the cbuise a.: 
 
 PecalX^ n >bodv is allowed (has a ri-ht) to ccmimit cnnies. ^c Tusc. 5, 9. 55 
 
 _ ta se J -ssit ut ea facere ei liceret. Ib.-Pet is ut tibi per me ^^^f ^ R"^»Vb' Fin 2'S 
 m/»/r^r^ that 1 should not of^ect to your recall in- some one fro .11 ^"^ ^,^•^\'':J'"•2•28•- 
 7;/X/£;// /r i//i M-r wjf /"W .' I have no objection to their ti-htinir. lb Tusc. 4. 21, 47.- 
 iil^SurU^^^^ He ^^'11 »''^^« a perfect ri-hi to follow llermairoras. lb 
 
 t'v 1 ' r -Ft? in fu mina fortan:e conternmlmus licebit si etc. ; ^ye may even (we have a 
 M lit lo 'dii e'irl 1 m fortune if etc. lb. Tusc. 2,27. The use of an It-cIause 
 
 r iVr?w f ■.in"i" vndetic subiunctivc clause is unusual (as in a passage literally rendered 
 f o'm the Oieek -^^^7 1^ venia^- Cic. Tusc. 5. :i2, 90).- Less frequent is an 
 
 .•X/iv^i«v^w th thel()Mcal subject oUicet as subject-accusative of the clause, as: 
 Htc or eSta • V/^^^ ficet ma^nifice virere : A jy^rson observing these rules may live 
 mtn icentlv Cic Off. 1. 2G.-/.i^.? me id scire quid sit ? May Iknmo )vbat is the ma ter r 
 miirniiKini} V K, -L/u construciion of hcet with a 
 
 alli^/^lnnith'^cliuJe ve^ n'^^^^^^ of a transitive subject-infinitive 
 
 f ih. Uica subSo^^ is not mentioned, as : Erocari ex xu^x,\^ (yprios non hcet 
 
 - frirJ y Cw ' S noi icet). Cic. Att. 5, 21, 0.- Coopfnn sacerdotem hfcbat ( =,<l";'f f ^^ 
 iaVnlOt!^"' ^- 1 ^- 1^^"^- 3^ 1^'' ^--liatibnem hablH per leges licet ( - ratiOnem habSre). lb. 
 
 ^' A'comDlet'in- or accessorv predicate of the subject-infinitive oUicetx^ orenerally placed 
 inth'T/Svwhc^itS^^^^ 
 
 Po-t 7.-rt sifn triumphanti urbem invehi licet^et. L;v -iS, 44. bo lb 35, 8 -CT^a «gMW 
 li,,r^ lir?h(d V'll Max 4 7 ext.l. Comp. Cic. Tusc. 1. 15 ; lb. Rose. Am. 49 , ise^.H.ir. 
 
 A\ 
 
G18 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 SUBJECT-THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 6iy 
 
 in the accnsativo even if the loqiral mh}fcf iv in the dative, as : ^o- licet Q^/l^/.f j "^.^ 
 tib; .w^wi/'^/M ess.v CMC. bjnn.;^ 14. b.— J^i ci<i ii«'ii juiu t« ij„i,it 4 4 (i • lb 7.1,11». 
 
 erat ai.i.us quo per loge.^'t con.ultm^fienlueret. ties. B. C. 3, 1. Cf. ^» " • -^' ■»' ' ' ". '\' 
 
 The cou^tnu-tion ' ^i /i<v/ f^>v Unw ' i. als.) applu-d to f>ecesse est nud (in tl'C ; ^ ^^r [^f; 
 tinitv) u>/,;o/^'r">/»'L^ *am/;. TUe o>u>tr.ictiou V.r/>../»^ voOis e.se tx^na. oc 
 
 "';o''?WUn"!iiu;l;^..»nally in poetry and in the prose if ^^-^''-[.SSrThS 
 iavYi S mUarly <wv'//« ..>V i^ u.»ed in Tac. lli^t. '2. :^«, and ^a 1. lli<t 1. 1. 
 ;.^/;e?uu.v;.a";r"'^°Vcrr..,3,l^ny^^^ 
 
 h'^^:^^:^;^;r^.^:^^wi^i:-.^;;]e!^i^nn.^^^^^ 
 
 1 hive not learned less. CMc. Or. 1, 11». n.-M.puUet ta.n c.to de ^^^' ^^""^^.^^r.^^-^^^^,^^^^^^^^^ ^^ ' 
 14) ND \% -J > tin/tire cluusl are n.ed with these verbs if the V^'i^'^^^^'^^.^'^;- 
 ve. as : Nonne esset pumu,n, non n.odo le^ntum sed :^'^^}^;^'^ ;;r^;:;;,X^S- 
 WH;/V,i? Pie Flacc «i^ 52 —The use of a subjeet-intiiiitive witli tittiet is antecassitai. 
 S rdin^ « lhe'antt.^v ofnenlet, the verbJ soltintare, punrjere, and ''«^/^''^ J.!",»^.»;;- .^ 
 lary .lyKO are used in.persoi.ally with loj^ical ^»^;i--»f J'' ! .^Varn^T I's i a"o /<^ iS 
 tive-clauses,or Qnod-cUiuscs {Paiujit me tjaodscribis etc. Cu-.^ani. ., lo, 1 , ^^'d"f^y>y: 
 at,ds lb G. 4,3; nihil me ma-is ^.Miritut, quani mf non 7iiltre tecum. ^» • ^'{f, -'';;',; 
 So/Jni rai-ely . sed in place of doko ,' but, in -ood prose, it is construed neiiher w t h 
 f dnuse or with a subject-infini.ive. The sentence ' Dotet milu q"od a uunc somo- 
 ?/.S-"s-'V.cHTrs in a letter of Brutus (L'ic. ad Brut 1. 17, «^^v''ich probably is spurious, bo 
 with a Si-clause : Mifd dollbit *i quid ego stiilte fecero. Plant. Men. 2, 3, W. 
 Obs. 2. Impersonal VEKBsc<>rrespondin<; to a wr^/^/m/rtai^/'f/i- to denote 
 
 A. The impe.sonals denoting ' it happen, that etc' ^^^^^'^'^^y.^^J^ m» r-omds a"e rtl 
 what haupeus or happened. The nu..l ^'eneral among these di tie rent, '"M>^rf•>n ^^^ «'^ -/if 
 
 and Si?, which a'ri frequently used as ^t^stn^^^ ;^^-^;f^^%:;^^';^':^^^ "'^'^.l 
 instance the Ut clause is to be considered as a Prtdicate-daih-e (p. 4b«, Ubs. i\i). liui 
 ollen some additional idea is expI•e^sed by tliese impersonal forms. ^ 
 
 1 Fit vt represents (a) an action as happening '.som^^iz/J^x' or ' qtten : J-itutnannji 
 ipshid ornat iSs dicendi genus incitCMiiur J it ofUuUm>^'n. that -e are urgedj^>- le v^ 
 
 loree of circumstances into a higher style o ^l><-'^^'''i-'/ 'S" ^'^\V V, I nw fibat '^ 
 est is often used, mostly corre>po..dini; f. ' it is a fact that \ or * o lie i^'Pl>^'"r '»','/ .; 
 Vs///^i)leiT(iuei)hilosophi nulia tradaut praicepta diceudl. Cic.Or.2. 3i. l.)2.-(«») /-ir^ s 
 also uiel to lei .' ate an action as the rLdf Horn facts previously mentioned generally 
 rn'mmectlon witli ita, either by a /or/i.v.aonclus.on ( /f/ .^^ V^Un^' l^ uZ^T U^^^^ 
 as a consequence of historical facts [itajactutn est nt) : Ita Jit (t uis it "f rP<*nf' '"M'^ }\ 
 fulhnvs «/ -anientia sanitas animi sit. CMc. Tusc. 3, 5, lO.-7/a lit ut quc.d bo.mm Mt id 
 e 1 n tne;tTin sli lb. Fin. 3, 8, 27.-(?.o ( = Ua) factum ^/t. "t ;>|n'.Is innjaratos^^^ 
 den't Ne» A'^e<. 2, 3.--(() ' i'Vtri ;>o/<^n/ nV means 'it is }H)SMble that , M\(\ neii non 
 f^^JeiwT- it if impossible that % as: Potest feri nt res veri>osi«.r hi«c fuent, jUh verior 
 Sit 8 3 C -aW"^ fi^ri jJOtek ah equitibns K.)mrinis ut snos necessanos canduhltos 
 n^it:.c-tentu. tob.s dies (it is impossible that the Roman knights should attend to etc.). 
 Cic.Mur. 3t, 70. For 'pri uo/i jxjte-^t quin' f^ea i). m.i.OBn.':. 
 
 2 iccidit ceneially is construed with a subject Ut-dause : Accidit nt illo itinere venT- 
 refLaiS cm^^^ 2, 1. 24.-lIoc tu igiiur censes sapienti accidere posse u a-ri- 
 
 udi e upriinatur: Th.n vou believe it can happen to a wise man tt.a he should etc. 
 I 'Ai-c^3 - aoidit an adv,Ti>ial or other qualilyin- expression is adde.l. denot- 
 
 1- //o^t' a tl in- happens or happened, the subject-clause -eneraly takes the form of a 
 
 i,;>Kaus : .46ril/ p.nncomL,de quod eum nusmiam vidist. ^" l')'''*'"',lV7iA ,1 s[ 
 ve.iientlv that etc. ). Cic. Att. 1, 17, 2.-(|mun ei nihil pnfJ^r consult udint^m "<^<-i'J^'f'JJ. 
 gSvilMs nobis llonul profectns est. in. Cat. 2,7, 16.-(>yv:o;/.nt.^ma r.. ««'J^^^ «^J^ 
 i>o-tri(iie Germilni frequeiites nd eum in castra venTrenl. Lai-. B. G. 4. 13.— in place o i a 
 Q"(iy ia^^r^o uetini?s an infiuifive clause is used : Illu.l mihi permlrum «^-f'^fj^;! «"* 
 Lientat^im fuisse in adolescente. Cic. Kam.3 11). 5.-But «;>;i'«'''"^'='„ .^!»:.'; •>> "J^^ 
 clauses are used even in place of Ut-clauses : ObligJtus ei nihil eram, nee euim accuitral 
 
 . 
 
 r.- -corv, fi 11 1 —N'oaue tanta pernicies ulla acddere potest quam rati3- 
 mihi opus esse. Cic. Fam. 6, 11, ?•— \*^^*}"?,, v -rr 2 l 2 Such intinitive clauses, however, 
 nem verna.is ab hoc ordme ^i^o:'dlcal^.l^.\^^.^^^^^^^ \ou.\^X^ of a copula. 
 
 classical style is expressed by ]'}^^'%{^^'%'%li ' he san e se.S. but reading doubtful, 
 tur. Tac.H 1.7). 'f'^^'^'-'^'^'^f'''^^^^^^^^^ chance, but of such actions 
 
 4. Evenit is not K«»«'-*"y;;.f, i,^/-^^ ^'y 1 L' determina of the gods u^ turns mt 
 which happen either m rt'j: "liii^^c^^"^^^^^^^^^^ ui-clause, or with a Quod-clause it t is 
 
 ^Sfied 'il^^airallS." r:^S'i;:i;;^'t;;'e..... ut m vmgus insipientium opinio 
 
 iVv 'quominus, imparling to ' ecenit " J^f/ "'";;;; V'»;. ^^'^ ^^J^^^^ ,^,,,,,s^^o liceat (it happens 
 t^. T^. cS IslSlI ;?Xlhlft KiXSr master from holding the slave). Pomp. 
 
 iN'hiCh 111 «MlOil prose, ai"«*v' • »■ ""• - •. ,-• 1 u- 
 
 trereret, obiiqlsstt (i. e. by ,-ortitio). C'^;/,^]''i,;,\., i.appens cither in the dative, or in the 
 %. Cadit takes the person t» NvUom^onei ling Jm^m^c^ synonym of acddif but is 
 
 It is construed with a »A.Ti\t;, J^^^i.^^'.,,^,^ ^vnression. In such a con- 
 
 rcommode cadit 
 
 'err. 1. 2. -Hoc 
 
 lb. Or. 2, 4, 15. 
 
 I \ 
 
G20 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 £' 
 
 TO the example, .iven there, the fo^owin. pa.s.^j.r^^c^^^^ 
 
 „^r ///m< */./Jx.v./7"0///t/"/v <1>^' odeieiur a ' 'J'^: ' \',i' ,,.J,,,, ..J» quid hibi faciendum 
 
 e.set, KluuHos consuleratflros e..>c. J V,;^ ,; J '•-,'>%' [^^^^^^^ 
 
 '.oMU'hody is not .vspou.ib.»' lors.Mm f'' ' /; ' '^ '^^^^^^^ pe,sc.(,n.-,ru.ur 
 
 wiih rt;/j// a-- L'tr siiue app;iruU mini p^r nltetOf^ ^nire <in(/fninrt.^ m^ i i .,..'_, ,11,-:; 
 
 lirtnly ,IH,.r„m,o.l to pvr ,.r.n .n >i(l.oi . 1) 1 "'"^' ;^f J™ *i,, ','.,. 1. .lo,, n,.uri.hini? 
 
 ■^t„'. 3. lMrE,-.soK.LVK„n. rcpr«c„,l„,. the i.lea „f ..m.ct.v. or ..-b.t.nt.ve pbed- 
 
 CATKS. . d^ ovnr<'«»«* tlic idea 'it is proper', (beinix similar to 
 
 1. /,,cefana conr^mt ^;:^;^^^^;^^.^ iXr»' c .Vn-u. d ether wiih n.subj.-et-inf,ni- 
 
 (gnuu/n e<'. par e-'if. ete., Yi. ^* , UBs. .n. ^'''^^ "'., ,.,„,.,,_.)in,r to the mire p U- .xp anied 
 
 Ji. oii.OBs.H» m.y tak- an I t clause '»^>'V-T/;^» .?/J/ ('ic Tn-c 4 :il m.-lJei>t cano- 
 
 rem nobis essepahiam jpuitn '''.J'^JV.W'^ ' i ^^■^\];,rZt^JLi<ar. pro Ic-ibus. Cic. 
 
 1, 2, 4.-Quid est n^^-'\^;!!'>'':;!;;;\^;;!^ {^^'iZ^r^ qJam uoc su/v«^>t ' \nm quum 
 qui solum malum dolOn-m esse '"^f[- ''' . " r,,, r,^,,^,f r, n, -.u.-Q'n enim ronvtirit (\t 
 Julore cruciCMur, diet ilrum esse ^'VP^''"' '"'•./';'", /;,;,,ji,.s f^ eidcm in re 
 
 is hardlv nroprr C(Uisistent) vt qui m rebu> impit> ij» P''»; '7, ., '" .. . ' 
 
 •i. /lepu;ii,<il.a 1« "''■"'''''*''" ^.- ■"'''/,','„.,;. V),"'/«a(: .•iiim. recti- <iecii>fre. H 
 ct multi- m:ilis oppre.^i^um. lb. J^»'»- ^'^;''; • '• . , ^ nece^sitv.-Both o/iorfef and 7>ecesse 
 
 T) isS^.^- --f ^"^''' '^1 ^;r ^ui^^ :;, j;;^:;M!;*i:?ir m^ s^d^ ^:;i^^ 
 
 tlu.se nuM. called ;M>>^ Il>- \; ^; M-^J;-^,^^^ o,mtlbnt (the temple ou.Mit to 
 
 dr/m. II). Tusc. i, 15. •^^•-V'V'*''\ * '^'(C;V.4r 1 V» i:W -Hoc habeu.us in prouiptu. lahd 
 hav.. b..en driven over .^^J .^^'IV' 'V,;;;/!^V^■i' •^4Ji;• ,,/ a priueipio o/-7ri o//./.m. lb. 1, 
 ODorfSreioopinadim nden. I' • ^''^^^V^;. r"*:^!" *„.' ,; „„!,,„ ih 3 7, 15. -Qui ulconcupi- 
 i^.r^i.-Xeces^e est, qui fortis sit. f '//*r/r/n ^^^^^^^'^^'l «^ ^^ V Vb 3 9 1!) -If the preterite 
 erit, ewn nece^se est. si nl^c..nseeQius s t. nai^n i^re^^^f^^^^^^ ^,^„^^. »,,^ ^^ 
 
 tenses of o;x.;V./ mean^ 'ou-ht to 1^^ e . h 1^ ^^^^Vj ^^^'^^^^ y^. ExclQdit eum 
 
 placed in the p^,fert^ ■V'^"^-'!.^'w?rjr; f^L m^ b -" ad.nitted.. Cic Verr. 
 
 Cat. 1, 2, 5 
 
 a 
 
 ref 
 t^ 
 
 at. 1, 2, 5. „.,,^^„.v ri »t-<:t:-«^ * ' E-o Crimen onortet diluam ; It is my duty to 
 
 jfute the char<,'e. Cic. K. A. 13. 3t..- 1 1«, si quui ^ ;\V^ j Tusc 5 5 18.-OmuiH/fr^/t^ 
 t.t (you had bet.er t-. look f'»-/7»«,";^:\Jf ,^// to doev Tvt in-i betbre etc.). wi Phil. 
 op'Ttet, priusquam aliquid po-tulet ( t is »"f./''''>„^ * * ^.^.^;!, 'jy >, 7, ]0.-No.. p«.testea 
 VK2r,.-Aut;7.c<7/^<r>/x>r/./.autquulv,spotmsq^^^ „, 
 
 n-.tnra hoc uno scelere esse <;<'V'^''VlVi;};i/ TZ-.^i^ «-^^'l»'^' 
 
 \^.rr.l,15.40.-C^.odsl,ta^s a-W^^ 7 ,4 -Aut \v.^c'facfn n<ni .vJa|^ 
 
 r^r?7>;a/ idem necesse est timiditJltem ^'^^, -' "\ * "\% '^ ,-,: i;^,i,,c jus in dvitdte coiisti- 
 
 SUBJECT THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 621 
 
 ieints ,ii,.!t, opu; e,. ^tt",? » "»i''' "" ^ '"-'"r"- '""'"; ."'''r^'oV"- h '.erest ' (a.mlo- 
 
 ?i,:.„-.utio,, u,,'.-, .;;/;'■' •: ,f ^^^e^e tm ;-U!ina" occur' ai.o "i'''»"' i;"':;";»^ " r-lS'.m 
 
 -I- r/ , Iw • ii «<> hi' 'li'i a-q"al>iliHr ; 1' '"■"'';f* \"i _F„rvi rfftrt ro« vecti^alia piw- 
 
 j;;r,r?,;e^.'?i.t:aj.a,reeeu.,j .^ 
 
 futflra smt. .«'»• M^r ^;^, ^,.1,,^ verb's <with r^y.^r/. ^ 7" "Yli clau>^e is found in Cic. 
 
 vy"Si':>ori\tiv;*Ni.-.3«:ii .,;!--•, 
 
 sr^,.'t;;:,ra^'.icli^^.A''i"«iL-'^,-;^^^^^^ 
 
 i„ uuch construciions a*^;»" «>*'-'*'y . • verv plaus^ible theory ; »V\,.:t uit> an accusa- 
 
G22 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 5. The ideas '•it is mefiil, expp'Hent, or Jinrtful\ are Homctimcp roproscnted by the Im- 
 personal expiessionsf.r-f/.s-wt.sY, or ta: r<? ^.s7 (it" is expidient) ; ahrtext. it is iiitxpedieiit : or 
 l)y tlie in-ntei- verbs prodesse and ohenfie in an impersonal form. Prod> x( with a suhject- 
 iiiinitive or an iiitlur ive clause oceiir:» in poet rr and in the Latiniiy of the silver a-e : 
 Pliirimiim proderif p'leros sitatim ^alul)riter inxtilui. Sen. Iia. v>, 21.— (^iiihiisdaMi iiiliis 
 jyffuit a.'^ptaixse hpecuhim : To some it has been useliil to look into the ylafS when 
 anirry. lb. 'J. 8().— O/v^v/ sometime^< «)C(ur8 with an intinitive clause in j^'ood prose: Nam 
 etllfos nobis iion ttbesf rideri no.<fru/n texfifnoni'ttn non valnisst*. Lie. .Alt. 1, IH, 11. — 
 The exprei*ssi()ns ejr UfHf est. ex re t>-t (it is advantntrtous, expt-dient, * of interest ') are 
 construed with inflniiive claii^cji. except when an It-clans»- is used in a ne^'ative .«ense, 
 according to i?. *», Obs». <5, as : Matns fanjilias s^oriiljus declaiabant \\\\\\\\\ pr&l'umi 
 comniitfi e.r ttsn esst-f, iwcuc. Ca-s. B. G. 1,50.— Libido est opinio veiHQri boni, '^r/od fit 
 ex i/.ti/ jam pr(P.<iei).'i es{te atqne adesse (of which it is thouirht expedient that it should be 
 pre-eiit. i. e. tiie present enjoyment of which is considered desirable). C'ic. Tiisc. 4. 7. — 
 Ex Km re^voti e*-/ id ego tmoriar. Plant. Pseiul. 1. 3. 102.— 'I'liiis v re pid^icd est ' means 
 'it is of public interest \ 'it is in the interest of the republic': Ne mai:is e re piiblicd 
 es>ief, iiderregnvin iinri. quam in eo statu relinqni provincinni. Liv. ::5. »».— ' yl,'/ reesf 
 means 'it is inexpedient \ with the same construction : Non ub retake (^uinctio vieum 
 est, sociOrum aliquou legdfos inferesse ei consilio. Liv. :i5, '22. 
 
 fi. Pnestat (it is better) tak(>s the conslniction of scdixst est (p. «ill, n. *). Sufflcit 
 (—S(dis est) is construed with a subject Ut-clauso in tlie bilver age, as: Sufficit ut biiu- 
 l)bx (luiddam et uniformc doceilmur. Tac. I)ial.3:i. 
 
 Oiis 4. The foUowini; imporsonalsdo not belonir to any of the above-mentioned classes: 
 
 1. Accedif ( = a<ld* to this, that) requires an Vt-clause {(t) if the clause ex|)resses what 
 should l)e done : Accedif etiam illud >/f stdtiu'ilis hoc judicio. utrum posihac etc., to this 
 must be added ///7/^ ijou must defen/iine in this trial whether etc. Cic. Halb. '2S. (>ri.— Eo 
 accedibnt ut nietu reirmim ei fufundu/n. esut^f. IJv. 1,49.— (/y) If arrTdif refers to an action 
 reprt-sentcd a- jH)ssUde or con'i/if/cnt (H accedit uh: (^uid si acctdtt eodein '// tennis ante 
 fiieris ? C'ic. \l. A. 31,80.— -S'ls vero illud quoque acctdtt iit in ea verba pia-tor jndiciuHi «let 
 etc. lb. Verr. 2, "2, li. In all other instances the use of Quod-clauses or It-cIauses with 
 «cc'^'/jV is optional, as: Accedebnt vt ha'c tu pro republicil queri summjl cum niirnitato 
 ex'tsHniarere. Cic. Or. 2, 48. C'ompaic with : Accedit illud (/uod ilia plebecula me a Pom- 
 pej<» iinice diliiri putat. lb. Art. 1, 1(5, \\. — Accessif ut eqiiitibiis i)er oram disi)ositis atiuari 
 prohiberentur. Ctes. B. C. 3, 24. Comp. with : Accedebnt quod suos ab s»- libt-ros abstractos 
 ol)-idum nomine dolebntd. lb. B. G. 3. '2.— For examples with ut see C'ic. Sen. 6 : Dej. 1. 2; 
 Mur. 'II, 45 : Tusc. 1, 1'). 43 ; Fain, h, 12. 8 : Att. :i. N 1 : ib. 14. 13, B. 3 ; Ca's. B. G. 3. 13 ; 5, 
 IB ; Liv. 1, 41). For examides witli quo<l see Cic. Att. 1.3, 21, 7 ; ib. 1, IS», 1 ; Fam. <>, n. S : 
 R. A. 8,22; C;e-. B. G. 4, Hi ; 5, «> ; Liv. 1,48: '2.18: 3"). 10. [Kuh.nek says that accedit 
 must be construed with r/uod if the fact is supposed as correct : and that uf mu>t be 
 used if thefuct is conceived as 'devilopini,' itself '—which distinction is purely ima^'ina- 
 rv.— Mkikin'cj states that quo I is used if an existing fact is mentioned ; and that 'arcS- 
 dit uf has the sense 'Moreover it happens that'. Almost every example j)roves that 
 this distinction is erroneous.— Zumpt considers accT'dif quod the le^'ular c<uistruction, 
 and acc?f/i/! '// an occasioiiul exception, which is rwluted by the fact that t>ofh construc- 
 tions are extriMuely frequent, the one occurring about. as often as the other.] 
 
 '2. Rtstat has the meaning and construction of relinquUur and nliquum est (A'. 27, 
 Obs. 1 ; Obs.;")*, requiring an I't-elause : li'-sfiif uf, qualis t-Orum natilra sit, considerCnuis. 
 Cic. N. I). '2, 17 4r^.—Ii'tstat ut niotus astrOrum sit voluntarius. lb. 2, 1(3,44. Comj). Ib. L. 
 M. 10.27; lb. Quinct. 12.41. 
 
 3. Pertifie/, with a subject-clause, has the general meanin£rs 'it pertains, it referst, it 
 beloiis^s', being alwavs accompanied with the object to ir/iich the facts stated in th« 
 clause are said to belonir. This object is expressed by ad with an accusative, or by its 
 equivalents (tO, eode/n, hur). The clause takes the form of a Quod-claust'. instead of 
 which, if the subject is an indefinite i)erson, a subject-inllnitive is used : Kodrw ptrtittet 
 quod causam ejus probo; It pertains to the same (end) that I approve his cause ( = the 
 fact that I at>prove will lead to th<^ same end. will have the same etrect). Cic. Att. 8. 9, 1. 
 —{C.esar dixit), quod victoria suil tam insolenter i.doriarentur, tddtin ji^rfinere ; Ca'sar 
 paid that the insolent boasting <»f their victory ?ms- of a puce with their other conduct 
 (literally : ' belonged to tiie same thini,''). Caes. B. G. 1, 14.— An tu ad domos nostras non 
 censes pertinere scire quid asiltur domi ? Or do you not think that knoirinq what is going 
 on at home pertains to our homes y Cic. Kep. 1, 13, 19.—' Ad nm perfihet' is sometimes 
 used in the meanincr "if is proper'. beiii<jj construed with an infinitive clause accordnig 
 t<» /». '27. Obs. .1, as : Ad rem })tiiinPre visum est. consules primo (in<)que tein|)ore cndfi. 
 Liy.3!),'-ii.—Pertinelntad vtrn, proeceptlfres pueris placidos (/(wi. Sen. Ira. -2, '22.— Karely 
 
 * Literally : addf quod. This expression occurs in the poets only, 
 t The English 'it refers to something' cannot be expressed impersonally hj refert^ 
 eiuce the verb ri'ftrrc is not used as an impersonal i)redicate. 
 
 ATTRIBUTIVE THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 (S 
 
 nertinet'x* used as a svnonym of interest if the clause refers to an action to be done. In 
 this instance it takes an Ut-dause or a Ne-clause : Ad rejnpublicarn pertinet ( = rtipubli' 
 CiE iuteresf) ne acta mea rescindendo alios in posterum seyniores facialis. Liv. 2«, 31. 
 
 4 Seauifur u-ousequiur), has the same construciion as ejficitur (/?. '27. Obs. 1). Hence 
 it i^ construed either with an Ut-clause. or (more rarely) with an infinitive clause. An 
 It-clause is alwavs necessary if the action is represented as 'to be done : Sequifur ut 
 causa noiijltur ; It loilows th it the case be defined (i. e. the next point for an orator is to 
 define the case). Cic. Or. 2, 8!, ;331.— Inde et iilud sequitur ut minimis rebus non exacer- 
 heiniir (Hence it follows that we should not etc.) Sen. Ira. '2, '25.- Ex perpetuis gaudus 
 nuum nerspicuum sit vitam befltam exsistere. sequitur ut ea existat ex honestate. < ic. 
 Tusc 5 ^i iu -Sequitur vitam hviWAm virtQte «)///d. Ib..5.8,21. Comp. Cic. Fat. 12, '28; 
 ib "lO'^i- Fin 2.8.24. Tusc. 3, Ki. 34 ; ib..x 18, M. Sometimes consequem est is used 
 with the'same force and construction as sequitur: Hoc probato, tWifttgw^yt* €«^ beStara 
 vitam virtflte esse contentam. Cic. Tusc. 5, 7, 18. 
 
 5. Subject That-clauscs icith Ordinary Active Verbs. 
 
 Obs 5 Any active or deponent verb mav take a Quod-clause as subject in place of an 
 onlinarv substantive-subject if the subject contains the idea of a /«/c/: which is de- 
 ecribed'bv a complete sentence, as: Rem disfineftat quod utrum arnulli an inerines emit- 
 terenturre.'ii, irAvnm conreuietmt ; The fact that there was no sufficient atn-eement on the 
 ouestiim whether the roval troops should be sent out with or without tlieirarms. delayed 
 iheaflair Liv .37 12.— Illud niaxime nostrum/#/nr/(7rt<! imperium qvod Romulus loeciere 
 Saliino (Ax-w?/, eiiam hostibus recipieudis augc-ri banc civitjlteni oportGre Cic.Balb. 13, 
 31 -Thus : J v7(7>a/ molest iam quod etc. Cic. Brut. 1, 2 ; adjurabat conMlium ^''orf etc. 
 Cics B.G.'2, 17: r»//(/tctTri/ ">c quod etc. Liv. 40,9; comoatur ^^oc/ etc Cic. Clu 1. 3 ; 
 c<u isiUo sufraqabatur qvod etc' Ca^s. B. C. l.Ol. See the Ex. p. -.91, Obs. 14, 1. -Subject- 
 clauses of this kind mav be changed into r.bject-clauses representing the passive aircnt 
 in the same way as the nominatives of substantives may be turned into ablatives by 
 civi.K' to the predicate a passive form. In this instance the Quod-clause is attached to 
 the ablative loot the syndetic antecedent id (Rts disfinef,afyr eo quod etc.; imperium 
 nostrum fuhdafum est eo quod ; mole.-^tia aiigebatur eo quod etc.). 
 
 OB8 Ut-clauses are rarely used as subjects of ordinary (personal) verbs If they are 
 used so a noun of general import according to 7?. '2«, Obs. 5 (rule, duty etc.) mus be 
 ?uppli "i. as : Quod a^item conHnet vitam fort.inasque nostras, id est 7/^ quod honest urn 
 sit s lum bonum judicemus, potest id quidem coi)iosc au^gri et ornan Cic. 1 «n. 3, 
 sit 1(1 l'»';i',^^;;'^\, ;';,„„, ,,,;„{„,, judicemus. conHnet vitam ; The rule that we should 
 
 comidn- the moral as the only g.x.d. hobis our lives toqefher) ^^'I'Jl^tV'n n"resf,u 
 this kind also occur in accordance with the principle explained 7?. '2b. Obs fi represent- 
 
 -th" facts stated as unreal, unreasonable, or impossible, as : Quam hat>ef (i<Pn(ot^ll^ 
 /"•i-rim multis annis ante fossess.im qui nullum habnit, habeat, qui autem habeat 
 amil7a V CV()tr 2 -22 ( = The principle that pndetarians should gain the lands of 
 X-rs, and that pr<;perty-h(»l.lers should lose theirs, has no fairness, is unreasonable; 
 see the remarks at the end of R. 27, Obs. 5). 
 
 Obs 7 The use of subject-infinitives, except with the regular impcrsonals (7P.27. 28 ; 
 6 49f //'sO) is extremelv rare ; see p. 10^ R. 94, and the examples quoted there To 
 fhese the nilovvim-nniv be added: Bene di^ere non fiaf>ef derinltam aliquam regiOnem 
 • c Or 2 2 3 -Tetnpiis colloquio non dare, ma-nam ].acis desperatiOnctn ft/fV^f/.a/. Ca^s. 
 j3 (> 1 'u^yi,iai pro'Iium defuirisse, mamuim detrimentum afferebat. Ib. 1, 82. 
 
 Or-'s Still more rarelv are subject-infinitive clauses attached to ordinary verbal predi- 
 ct Rsa^ A /erg^^^^ ti.r pe sit, id numquam vlile .... ( etthe I)nnciple remain 
 tl at etc < C c Ofl- 3. r2. 49. -Inde /'.m ad triaHos redl^seproxevhuMUcrefmaf ; Hence he 
 'sayrng'thit the fight has come up to the Trir.rii, has become widely km.wn in the 
 forni oT a proverb (^turned into a proverb). Liv. 8, 8. 
 
 C. Attributive Tiiat-Clauses. 
 
 Jlcm 29 The form of That-clauses dependent on ^substantives 
 (xTTinBrTivKTiiAT-CLAi:sEs)is determined either (r?) by the nature of 
 lie <M,verning .'<ub.st<wtirc (Obs. 4) ; or (h) by the nature of the verb, 
 ' whidi forms either an objective, or a predicative phrase .vith the govern- 
 hi" substantive (Obs! ry){ or (c) by tlie nature of the whole governing 
 vumZk thus formed (Obs. (1) ; or «/) by the nature ot the clause itself, 
 ■which is determined by some leading idea understood (Obs. t)- 
 
624 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 ATTRIBUTIVE THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 625 
 
 OB.. 1. The jronoral form of verbal action. dependont^n^b^amW^^ on 
 
 gcruudial or l>articn>ial ^-^:^^^^^^':^ ^'^J^fl^^i^'^J!^^^^ Cic. Phil 
 
 iri-neraily be replac-d by a [^''^[■''^''''■^'^^^^^ 
 
 that of a 
 
 »y 
 
 il. 
 
 Liv. 4-2, 55 ( = iraiidmm <iu(»(Ualtn8 ^*' P^/ J'J '^^^.'^^ ;.,../Xi4s may be corr.-ctly chan-ed 
 p. IHO. A. ami p. lfi-2 (§527). the '-^••••''"•^'«^^^'^' 'Si ! JJ ,^^^^^^^^^ below, are-ove.ue.l 
 
 nto some form oi Tl.at-clanses. an<l manv of ^*^^/ ; ^ q"«'t^'^l P- ^^^ f*'"- 
 
 bv the sam- eubstantivrs as the .f^^/'V'' / he o m^^ 
 But if the relation of an action and its t^nbj.ct to the M>^» J "- " ' ' j j^ connected 
 
 [net exi.ression than that by a mere J^^' Xv^'VXih prefer ^e^^^ infinUlves 
 
 with -vcral adJ,nvcts^t.K^l^m exceptions .ee Obs. 5, tin. 
 
 ^'o:n:=;;r;;[r'?h:^^^^ 
 
 .* 8uhject.ch.u-e. in .■.-.'arcl t.. a "'>'"■"'."",[' l^»,''; i,, "i aV«( W<-m amid «-mpor 
 
 ■"I;r:;^,tt^::^|;,eaco„.ain.a,n^.c.o„ 
 
 rcD-esente.l by on-' of ttio^e verbs winch, acconUn-' '•\'" , '^^ . t^e same form as 
 smied with compMlnq Ohjecf -cliwm. iho claii^c alnl0^tal^^ay^ takes me 
 
 w:;^ld 1?:' re(^.irid..f ft w.^Ve made ;'«P-^"i-;j^'^J^I7^i^^Sutivc That-clanses 
 A. Nouns imply.n-.a r.r/>;///i ^^J' ^t 'A'l^^^^^oB wcm d take thi^ form ah object- 
 
 in the form of i''./''*'^"'. ^'^«^''^'^ > .^^.^ Vr/.hri ad C«-^^^^ afrerel)antur. om/rw 
 
 clauses of .the_corre-pond,ngr.r^,a^ 
 
 IM'ias co-j'imre. Cits. B. Cr. i, 1 (^."{^j* fj^. on _rAl//<r)r1 = clamilre) oritur, nullam 
 
 fanul. jam If^;-''!^ f^t^^'^i'^'^'i:^^^ ( = flderi) pnebet, c,m- 
 
 earum vivre dehi.-r&. Ih. -i», i> -.U'l''^. '-'^ p,',,.^ iiimileir mc htrrj'imndo adeirit, nnm- 
 
 .vws quidcm idia ostenditur 
 t /OA-f ut etc. Cies. B. G. 1, 42 
 
 jore nieiiii?. *"• "^•'- '*' '%•/•, ni i . Tn..»- i 4-^^ But ssometimes* ^pe<i takes aii 
 
 %..„,,. Cie. A_,r.l.;j.5; ll..Vam iK 1 1 . Tu^^^.^ „,., ,„. /,..j,,,obs. 8),a.- 
 
 Si «K-n nllVrnm, ,-< frnclii* appareat, Uc. Am;,' >/^- "^ " ^JriK.,', «itl. ailrHiulivc Tliat- 
 2 Holli o/ii/iio ami snifi'iiltn in;nn«;-l. ««""/f are C"ii irutu "/i , ,.„,..._.„„ ,-/. 
 
 tandum est, 8i honestatem ^/fn ac rdinire ^enttntia (.noois; ». 
 
 3.i. lir,. Co.np. Auct. Her. 3, 24 40 infinitive clause, accordin!:: to the construc- 
 
 ?,. /'W^-.^in themeanm-'taith ' J/^^'^^l''^^? '^^^^^^ „i-i populi utilitatem 7««^'-*''^- 
 
 ti.,n of creilere : Fac ftdem ( = fac u ^ red. nnm /e H„' , i j ,^^ ^.j.^^^,,.^ ^ ,,„ 
 
 Cic. Aur. 2. 8, 22.-But if .fide^ mean. »> ""V^'*^ ' l^^ed'afcw^^^^^ ^^^^^'^ rerform- 
 
 Ut-clause, because (like pudum, pacmV it i* conctiv cu 
 
 
 2. Noun-s corr.spi)ndins to verbs of ./««n/jf/, take i"V^ '^ ; . j^ 2. 28, 51.-Patre» 
 
 f,-;^!^ i:s,;;:'s;yi'j;.ri„"u:!;'etf:;^.^/e?e:,u'r^si;L «. rZ,^no,m. a.,uc ab 
 
 armisdiscederGtur. Cies. B.C.3.1G. ^,^^;.,,^ imiwr^xrfi rff 24 Ob?. 2) are construed 
 
 C. All nouns which imply the idea of a «'7*""^.*X%nstruc^on with passive infini- 
 with Ut-clauses, and "^r'^tively with ^e-clau^eN /.^^,,Xl with Vi^r^", a? : Per totnra 
 tive clauses (which with verbs i^ ^'?'',;'?''i '1 ftiimi eS^ 
 Italian! edicta missa sunt ^^ qms, qui ^^^^^^ «"^^ '^'\\^,^^ p^^^^^ vt omnes regige 
 
 Liv.89,14.-Pr:etr,res tvnafwnem ^P^^J^f \^'^" ^X,^J*VactSm^ M. Fulvius litteras 
 
 «tirpis^nterficerentur^Ib. 24 -25 -V.« .^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 extempio ad consulem nr.tteret. V'a: ,« ,\^pV...r f'ic Ren 2 :il, 54.— Paul lo post «««- 
 civem Homanum adversus provocat nnem ";[,^^,y^;^^,,V, j Liv 24, 26.-Hispala prece^ 
 
 tvu Ml messa.je, containing «" "',^^'r.^ 14 SrSt^ ( = ^'^^ ?^ 
 
 easdem, w/seable-ilret. lepetTvit. I»^- ?;^j^^;-"-^^^^^^^ accusilret, aut acerbe 
 
 a command, implyin,^ the Idea /,n..m6^^^ „,'^„5^ postea 
 
 morerGtur. ^'ic. Clu. 14. 42.-Ju>sit 1 pr.pm^^^^^^^ GrjecOrum civi- 
 
 scriberet. lb. Arch. 10. 2-5. -Pax data P»^";, ' «^V", '^'j aSsatoriS cnmyetudine C custom ] 
 tates lil)ertatem haoeren . Liv. 33, 3i).-><)n ^]}^^'\^^q. „^ dissclflte factum cnminer si 
 
 Lir;/ iat'i='.;:?S'L';4aJ; ;:'er^tipc^n3iaLi'ao;. Liv. 7, .. CO.P. Liv. S3, 
 
 wmin»> nupliis uiler se.jtliiKerHni,..i. ■"■.■ •""7 ",'„.. ,„, .^^ noun on which it 
 
626 
 
 THAT- CLAUSES. 
 
 the clanse is loqiraJly dopendent. In snch constructions the {rovcrning: noun of tho 
 attributive clause does not form an eef»ential part of the sentence (and hence may always 
 be omitted without iiiipairinL' the oense), but serves only to det-iirnate certain properties 
 of the clause, as : I'ritnuin error est tol/enduttne qui^ gequi existiniet ut duo unit tiitima 
 bonijium. Cic. Fin 3. ti. 2*2. Here iheclaiis»- '■jiequis existimef which is irraminatically 
 an attribute to the noiin error, is lojtrically dependent on tolUre (to remove), which, as a 
 negative rcrbum fuciendi, requires either a Ne-clause, or a (^uominus-elause. The noun 
 frror is loirically in ap|M>sition with the clause, desiy;natinj?tlie proposition as erroneous, 
 and may be lett out without either chanijinj,' the sense or the construction (Primum esf, 
 tollendiim ne qnis existimet, i. e. the belief must be destroyed that etc.). Hence arises 
 the negative form of the clause, which cannot be retained in' tin? Enirlish version.— Neqne 
 eiro nunc coiodlium re/nrhendo tuum gt/od eas tribus. quibus «rat hie maxime notus. non 
 eduleris. Cic. I'lanc. l>s, 44. Here the (^u(xl-clause is lojrically dependent on reprehendo 
 (accordini; to li. '-24. Obs. !>). The noun cotmlif/m, on which the clause is «rrammatically 
 <lep«*ndent. woiilil have required an I't-claure. Leavim; o«it ' conj^ilium \ the sense of the 
 clause remains jinchaniL'ed.— Similar is the followini: : SeniHres niiniam indidgeniiatn 
 P. K. castigCinint quod eos homines qui in alit'tio solo oppidum- aniilicarc conhti sint, 
 impiiiiTtos diiniserit. Liv. 8!», .55.— Servus earn occa.Hon.eni ut littene leirjltis dar«>ntur, 
 exxpecidbat. lb. 2, 4. Here the form of the Ut-clause is determin»'d hy exajiectdf/at (ac- 
 cordinsj to Fi. 2-3. Obs. S), althoui^h irrammatically dependent on occaMoftem, which may 
 be left' out.— Kx hac licentiil htec funnuia cogifi/r ( = efticitur) vt fastidiOsa- m()]lesque 
 mentes evildant civium. Cic. Hep. 1.48.— /Khutius in cam opinidnein Ca>stiiniam addnce- 
 bat. ut mnlier imperlta nihil puiilret ai;i callide posse ubi non adessct vKbuiius. lb. C'lu. 
 5, 13.— Caedem nii^erabiliorem ca.-oix ftcit. guod paullo post nuntiijs venir ne interficerG- 
 tur. Liv. 24, 26. This Quo<l-clanse lo^'ically is a subject Fact-clause (A'. 28. Obs. h). which 
 if the noun ca.>>w is left out. will be analo'i«)Us to the passa<jre quoted p. 491 : Snspectnm 
 Alexandrum fecit, guoit I'elnsii pia^sidium relictum erat. Liv. 4.\ 11. — Sor>t ut dictatOrem 
 diceret, T. Quiiictio erlidt. lb. 4. 2() (where the It-clause is loirically a subject-clause of 
 etv/a/. accordinir to i?. 28, Obs. 2).— In such constructions even mere intitiitire^, which 
 loirically are subject-infinitives <(f some impersonal predicate, may be the grarnmatical 
 aftrif^ufes of nouns, as : Ilia vero d^ndi'mlu arrognntia est. in niinoribus iiavii.'iis ru<leni 
 esse se confjferi, quinquerC'inem. aut etiam majores «^Mibernjlre dviirltse. Cic. Or. 1,3S: 
 = 'Deridendiim est {•X\n\\wm) confirm ri\ while jxrammatically ' contUeri'' is an attribute 
 to '■arrogaufia \ — Ma<^na eriain ilia /««.<.■ vidGri solet, fufisse casus sapienter adversusetc. 
 Cic. Or. 2,85 (Lou'icar construction : ^Magnum esi tulinife''; grammatical construction: 
 ' Laiis tutm-ie, magna ext '). 
 
 Obs. 6. Frequently a That-clause is jrrammatically dependent on a noun, but lorjirally 
 on a verbal idea represented by the «,'Overnin<4 noun in connection with s-ome verb of 
 •general import. This verl)al idea determines the form of the clause. Such phrases are 
 potedatem facere ( = penniffere), toluptdtrin capere ( — qauden), vurr'ire offin ( — do- 
 lere), condlvnn caiiere ( = conntifnere), negotium dare ( = manddre), fe>tem eti.'<e ( = testifi- 
 cdri), rtiens mihi est, or sententin mild est ( = ro/o). Ex.vmi'i.ks: Cein roluptdfem tam 
 iiyiCL'\\^i\»ingeuiinn pilose in nostril republieJl Cic. Brut. 40. 117. — Consilium cepirunt ut 
 notnen hujus de parricidio deferreut. lb. R. \. 10, 2S — Homin'-s te<tes erunf. pen«'s .l^tnloa 
 cu/pani belli e^.^e. Liv. 39, 33.— .l/i.-/i>' ea sen5tus/<a^ ut in Ilispania milites legtrentur. 
 Liv. 35, 2. 
 
 Obs. 7. Frequently the form of an attributive That-clause is determined by a leadinjj 
 idii'd understood. Tliis idea may be either that of the j^overnin;; noun itself, implied iu 
 the neuter form of the syndetic antecedent of the clause ; or that of a verb which must 
 be supi)lied as the connecting link between the governing noun and the clause. 
 
 A. The governing substantive which mu-it be sui)plied, is always a rerttal noun, repre- 
 senting tin* L'eneral idea of a rerbvm .^entiendi, declnrandi, uv faciemli, according to 
 which the clause assumes either the form of an infinitive clause, or that of an Ut-clause, 
 Quominus clause etc. Often such nouns are not expressed fjecause tlit^ Latin lanrpiage 
 lachf an appropiiate noun to express the required idea. Examim.ks : liidicnlum est illud 
 {i. €. dictum, remark) Neroniiliium vetus in furjici su-rvo. so/uni e.'ise cui nihil sit nee ot)- 
 signatiim. nee occlQ-nm. ("ic. Or. 2. til.— Po~id<>nius de lioc ipso (i. e. theme), t-ihil bonutn 
 esse \\\^'\ (juod esset honestum. dispntilvlt. lb. Tusc. 2, 25. — Ilttc ipsu/n { = ordinance) ne 
 connubium patribus cum idebe esset, non dec<'niviri tnlT'iunt j)aucis his annis* Liv. 4, 1. 
 — (^uiini lex abrogatu»-, itlud ipsutn (i. e. • ilie i)rohil>itory clause in the l;tw ') abroiriltur 
 (7'/f///?7??/,s' earn abroL'ilri'oporteat (if a law is repealed, the very provi^ion in it which is 
 to prevent if/.s' aljrii'ia'ion, is lik<'wise repealed). Cic. Ati. 3. 23. 2. — Totuin iu eo (i. e. in eo 
 consilio, or in ea conditidne) est uf til>i impcres ; The whole is contained in your r-'solu- 
 tion (or • dffyinds on the condi'ion ') that you c.ijitrol yoursidf. lb. Tusc. 2. 23.— Nam si hoc 
 Don obtinetur (if the principle does not follow) id solum fjonu/n esse quod ln)nestutn sit, 
 nullo luodo probari possii, beStaui vitam virtflte efllci. lb. Fin. 3, 3.— The influitiv* 
 
 ATTRIBUTIVE THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 627 
 
 Clause ^..^.^^ ^: ^.t^,:^^:^^^^^:^;:^ 
 
 passive predicate {/i. ^'\\^^-;^l'll!(:, Ler and frequentlva That-clause may be con- 
 
 h^aliS:^^^^::^^-^^^^^^^^ 
 
 tive-clause belot.ging tc^a noun of gene al.mpo^^^ 
 
 the same pre.licate ^^'^''^''^^f he hL,' ie llf the -"^'ral i^^iea of the noun wh:ch is to 
 luis no influence on the lorm of ^^e ^l^use "K tl e cntra^^^i^^u ^^^^ ^^^ 
 
 be supplied, belongs to none of the \^'^^:^ ,^'^:,f; '^!~^§ I"'^^^^^^^^ 
 
 treat ed as a sul^stantir, cfau.e orf-act^^^^'^e (R. 26 as. ^f/^^, ^^'^ «f ^ ccedent id means 
 ncm afterat L'cneris humflni. ^^»'^- Tu^c.3. 23 u re t"t. .^u i mav be either con- 
 
 'advantage'. 'property % or a "o"'; ;>f ^^'^Sr^^^JZji 26 Obs. s", or as an attributive 
 reived as a transitive object of f^f ^f / J,*^^^,^,^'^ > accordine to No B, 6. Thus : Habet 
 Fact-clause dependent on » >« 'd^'^^"» ru^cb" S»' Sn »K>Se posui, delectet [either 
 
 in Ihe form of a paruiiplc, as: „„„„,i._, ,■,•,./„, ronco there existed that villne, 
 
 1. -Kfeclinr, ituil tic.': Fi.it \f « <!> ™ f,^^ J' ?' f,/";\'^?.io" ,,„ Lain acerl.issimiim 
 
 ftcnn,, '''<-'' f v-ri foites acrinril,^» M.I , I u av 1 l.ennuO, _^ ,Zmodilm ,t.^a. great 
 
 in foro diceret, deluls^e; mat nc '''^ V','; '^y ' '^ /, «,,^ (-?(. Ren 3 39 -Frequently Quo- 
 
 t:^^ ll;^STa.;il,r;;;'^»'aflW.\ V';>»i«i'.«2....a ^^, .l pater puerO,u.n 
 fiwlmmta justitiie. iLinni... id ..e . ui """ J" ;;,f,,V' L.fnt «c ) Cic. Off. 1, 10, .31. 
 
 tvdin^m omnem procul e.-'Se ix ^'M^i^nte , \\ e mu^t uurn^ Tusc. 3, ;^, 42. 
 
 uam.lg the principle^ ^'^'"^'> J^^'^'T^TV/ 'n ? . 'c o^^^^^^ qlod m.hi'non solum 
 
 (>. ' linng (consisting in) thejact : ttuun "^>»9/' f "^j/j'y 1 , . ^;^^ consistinir in the 
 pro Plancio diccndum est. sed etiam Ij'-fj.^J^ X« j^^^^^^^^ 
 fact that etc.). Cic. Plane. l'?-^;"\\,^ ''. ""^.^^X^^^^^^^^^^ "' ^"«-^^'^^ 
 
 ?ri;rs,K:?'iJi=ers;s.rs;ctiv^ 
 
 Comp. lb. 7, 15 ; Cic. Kai). Post. ''• ^^; ^^^/^f;;^^^ forms of the dependent 
 
 Hence one and the same noun may "1^«'' ^•^*]'^'^,^™ "'"^ i,ata est vt potentia sena- 
 Thatclause. Here belongs the noun causa «^; .J «''f^''^^^*;^ C^c Rep. 2. 34.-But : Sed 
 tus atque anctoritas nii!"'^-'-^^"^. f J««^? f^'.f^^^^^^ by the 
 
 eisdem de cau>>i.<, q^minus f !"^>^;',^^,^,*^ " ; '"'^i'l*' r c 1 82. -But : Acc6dit ilia qno- 
 gj. causes which prevented hnn fvom fl^;^'\"'?;.^'^^P• V' J: etc • The cause consisting 
 que ca..sa quod a ceteris [l\-tan Ha pet Uun^s^^ hic%uoque rafio eos 
 
628 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 Cic Fin 3 2 8 So if 'cmtm eH' \s iipod prodicatively in this PenPe : Mn<nia ra?/,«a abw). 
 
 Fonlfjus'8 acquittal i>^ the purpose (the iiit.ntion) ot prevtnftnrf a L'reat (liMirn< e fr< ni 
 fain.x' on this repMblic. Cic. Fontej. 12. Caum is al.o constrne»! ^\^y\cur, qnare ; and 
 nuila'caum often taiies a (iuin-clau^o (t'cc p. 527, a ; p. 54*, B; p. &4-1, A). 
 
 Ob^ 8 The That-chtn^es attached to ' tavtum nhe»t \ ' rii/dl af>est \^pa>iUum af^st 'etc. 
 may he conceived as jittrihutivc That-clanses, dependent on ' ab eo , l. c.'uf) ''''^^ - "^ 
 7. adverhial That-chi.iHe., accordin.,- to A;. 20, Obs 4 (aO eo vt '-'tc^). T he pred cate 
 ' abM' is thus „s.>d with ahsolute quantitntives a8 ^uhj.-ct^ to represent the facts Mitta 
 in the dause as lacking realiti,, hut witi. sn«;h qualitlcaiions as are nnp hed in the '^n .j.-ct 
 Such constructions must he recast in En-lisli, -enerally hy makin- ti.e Iol'U.I >'.'»J«-Ct 
 of the chaise, the <;rainmatical suhject of the whole period with llie predica e »^ (are 
 etc > fdrfioin ' followe.l hv a participial noun, correHponuIni,' to the predicate of the clause. 
 Such Thht-clauses with 'a/>^.s-^ ' <.ccur in the followini; conventional connection» : (a) Jan- 
 i«mU.3 withan H-r/a^Av. = 'cornet hint; is .o./V/r from heinj: etc.'. T ^. co"^mu;t.on 
 Ln-perallv occurs in combination with a/ujf/if.r It-chi'isp (or its equiv..leiit). >ve h.-U, 
 OBs 4 No 3 But sometimes it isusedwithoutasecond It-clause, a- : lant>n,i ahtmt ut 
 ex Vncomtnod.. alien.) oecasio i)eterCMur : .SZ/./V//- uere (hey r>w« takiti- ntl^"'"??'; «' Jhe 
 distress of others. Liv. 4, .>S.-Parcebant adhuc etiam niulis aninmlihus : W"/'^ <iffrat 
 nt homo homintm occideret ; So far weremenjroin kilU,», vnvh other. \^^'"- ^:]/- •*<;;. .'.^ 
 construction is thus conceived : ' Tantnni xpatunn a'^erat ahear^ nt <'ic. -.sinh a distame 
 was there from the point that etc. The That-clacse takes the ft)rm ol an I t-clause on ac- 
 count of the neitive idea contained in the clause <^^- f ' \>«^- '>- !'^» '" /, ,«'^^^1 
 Liiinitvthis construction sometimes occurs with jwrxohal fuhjects, as .N.pj//<^ /onj7« 
 ai>erit ut ar-umentiscredat philosophOrum : He will he far from helievinjretc. [i e. lon-e 
 aS abJo-ut '). Cic. Ac. I>r.'2, m. 1 7.-(.) V.-ry f- equenth .,/..7 i> thus -■;'^;-^^}\^0!^!^^ 
 subjects, as nan multam abesf, nihil ahest, vonlongvi^ abes , paullmn afHst. ^'^ ' » ' 
 clauses dep.-ndent on these expressions are always (;>//?«-(/;/>/.v<'x acc()rdin^ to the princi- 
 ple explained H. t'.\ Obs. 5, as : Prorsus 7nhil alj^sf quin sim m.sernmus : I am next to 
 bein- most wretched. Cic. Att. 11. 15.-l)ocet, non lomiius atM:^.^e <pnn proxi.nfl ''*>f '; ^-'V/J' 
 nus clam ex castris exercituin «Mlfleat ; It wo>,hl happen no laf^rihuu the i.»-xt '.'H-'ht t_ «^t 
 Sablnus would secretly evacuate the camp. C;es. B. (;. :J, IH.-Pa>dlutnnf,j,at V"/^' \ «• '"J 
 inlerticereiit, mqne rnnltum «//wi/ 7^/Jy^ etiam castris expel .rentur; ^ arus ?6U> for jar 
 from belli" killed, nor were the troops far from beinir dislodired from the^ camp. Cas. 
 B C 2 3:. -SometitUHS thecom|)lete construction with ah ^o occurs, as : ^erl>le multatn 
 abes^e ah eo f/'tin panels diCt)us dedQci posseut ; And that iu a few days the ships would 
 be ready to be launched. Cies. B. G. 5, 2*. 
 
 D. Predicate Tiiat-clauses. 
 
 Fern 30 The nature of Pro'licate-clauses in jreneral is explained p. 4W)-4S8 Prepi- 
 CATKTn\T ci-AirsEsalwavs have the foi in of an I'tclause. or of an asynd.tie subjunctive 
 ciau«^e and are attached either to the impersonal predicate est (see p. 4ST, a and />), or to 
 a verb of doing ( fare re. fi'-ri, agere, non commiftere, carere, and the impersonals denot- 
 in<r ' it happens '). Thelatt-r are used 1) as circumlocutions of affirmative or iH'i-'Jitive 
 imneratiie sentences, mostly in the form of asyndetic subjunctive clauses, as : I'ac bej- 
 hiJ revertare. Return in fair health. Cic. Fam. If,. 18. 1.— (iiietn virmn Jante vt agno.<cu- 
 tis ; Acknowle.lun- the merits of this man. lb. Rep. 2. 20. ryZ.-Car^^ en.'^'tme.^ me alv|.'ci-se 
 curamreipubiic;e: Do not think I have <jiven np the care for the republic. Ih. I-atn.O, 
 24 4 —2) To make more emi)hatiCHl either the predicate of a sentence, or some of jts 
 members especially adverbial expressions <i\^ pro/)^. inr'if>t.f, tihenter, ' pro'fer opinionem 
 accidit ' etc ) See p. 4K8, Ob:<. 10. If such a circumlocution is applied to negalire sen- 
 tences the verb committere, with a ne-rative. is irenerally u-ed as the abstract predicate 
 as: E-'O non commit tarn nt, si defuirerim, causam alnpiam til)i recnsandi dein : I will not 
 rive you a pretext for backint; out by mv retract in-. Cic. Or. 2. r.7. 2:li. To ne-ativu 
 imperative sentences, the d.mble circumlocution with 'noli cowvntttve is sometimes 
 applied as: Xoli commit fere ut excusatidne i)otins explea*» othciiim scrib.ndi quam 
 assidiiitjlte epistoltlrum : Do not by any means replace your duty of writing, by excuses 
 
 rather than etc. Cic. V-mw. 1<>. 2.'>. — 
 
 ""•^Sonurtimes^OuTn-clauses areatUiched to sentences of different forms if a construction 
 of the above-mentioned kind {nihil at>est. paiU/um a/jesf etc.) \^ virtnally contained m 
 them, as • Pernanci ex ho>tium nuin.iro dfxid^^rafxintnr gnin ciincti caperentar ; J he niim» 
 ber of the captured enemy fell very little short of their whole stren<:tli ( = PavUnm 
 ahfnit gnin cuncll caperentur). Cies. B. G. 7. ll.-From this constructi..n ot the verb 
 defdderkre must be distinjruished its construction with quomxnus, implying the idea 
 of hindering (.sec Obs. 7, B, 2). 
 
 INNER FORM OF THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 629 
 
 E. Inner form of That-clauses. 
 
 Reyn. 31. The inner construction of finite That-clauses refers to the use of 
 the nr< per moods luul tenses, which have been considered p. 4U fol . p. 088, 
 
 TlLZulve (OBS. 1-3) ; 2) tlie tense of the predicate-inpatite (obs. 4-9). 
 Or- 1 FxrtANATioN OF THE SuB.jECT-ACCiTSATivE.-In explaining the questum^^^^^^ 
 
 tiS^t^ii; J^ ;^ uin^ttve ^^^^^ i!r;^i :^^Xti^;'i;^d;^v^^& 
 
 wmmsmmmmM 
 
 I;;;s;;:=S rsrss »rr;v.T's 
 
 («hull ho eaw Iliat n<i resistar.ce was niiidc). Liv. 10 J.I.— Ad con iiici i 'J '^ • ,, ^ 
 
 o f"i) lirh". lh.lO.«.-Siniu-efa! falls coiiftSbat lacte pmuife "'• ^ -i"- ' 'ji' 
 umiicate of I u clause is an i,np,Tso.m1 with a ^"'>Je«HnnnUTve or a suiyect-cta^e 
 
 these forins of the snl.ject are «'"«''•''' V '■:''■ ^''-r^l^'f^'l''- ^'-J^^^^^^ 
 'SS^i'^i^Url^u! ^ ;S^«o» or a Wc^acciWative t;;;J.e impersoha. p.K,,_- 
 
 ») Madvi<' asserts that such omissions 'almost never occur ^yj'i''*,.. A-. = 
 i^iln tives^in the perfect. On the contrary. tl^T.^rc/r^g^/^n^ as • Audlvit Din^^ 
 magnam venisse heredititem : Biatnas Ju^sum esse in foro pouere (i. e. eum jusmm e^e). 
 
I^NER FORM OF THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 631 
 
 630 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 rS B U 4 T-Sedcv.V/.c.W'/mqiic».! t'tc (i. v. sed se co d^cepfurn i-s^c quod etc.).. lb. 
 B G 1 4 -Thi. .. Uls ... s very UH.al 1 . il' the im.iu-diat». Hotecfden» ..I the i.roi.o.n.nal 
 Mil U-c^irVuiat ve "a 1 .on.).... of the .a.uc lor..., as: /'./(ieVe^ ;,h- d.r.re, no.. I'^i^H^H^re 
 
 nn-psioi-cin illlii'^ fmasf (i. e. /^' nua>j-tun-in l^.^'seK lb. Div. Ciec. IS— ^» it uu. prcuicaic 
 Suie Vio ..i^Hl witi. an A.-ces.ory predicate vvhc.e the P-'"^^ e "'Kii^'^'j: 
 Ative i< almost always nuTffod i.i the ucciisat.ve ..t ti.e aeee8>ory predirate . 1^,1^ pani- 
 /mrain "<..n (icn ?t;/7/r hoiil no..:T jubet (instead ol' e urn pa» o( am ..vexl re). 
 
 cIcN'tn- 2,2:3T.-Apparuit; .nam vicem indignantem abisse (i. e. earn tndignantem 
 
 Ob.. 3. Tnflnitivc clauses are frequently placed in a P^^^'^'^.f,""^;;;"^,^;!;"' ^'J^^f he 
 En«'lish idi..ni requiies or prefers an active construe ion : 1) when the P'*^^ •"■<', i^i 
 cluie denotes • necessity ', and a -eriindial constn.ction is tobeiised in Latin, as. Cicsar 
 
 etc Op- B G 4 5.--2) Subjecl-inlinitives with tra.iHt.ve olijec s are ^ery liequtntiy 
 convened i.m>i..flnitive clauses with passive predicates. ^ -^^^^T^^^^^]^, ^au- 
 ^Uxinxuomnls uavl^ ^'.bdilci (to t/ra.^ all vessels ashore) ^^.f: «:,^*- ^^f ^--^J';;^^ 
 ddi-i eoA etc • It is the custom to praife those etc. Cic. Orat. 43.— bac nus est i*»rf" 
 dS/uoma.Vum (to mur a U.>ma.i c'itizen). lb Verr. 2, r>. ^T^I^^^'IP (^'ff^lH^^ "^/jj/^^^ 
 (tom//o«/theCvprians). lb. Att. 5, 21, «•— -^^^^^^^t^''*^''* ^''<^'"* pl(i^"ij-'. .*t «•'s' '^^\"„., „ 
 /o//?^/«J/r^ito/- lav. k 22.-3) If the predicate of an active n.flnitive clause has a 
 tm. ive oh S which^ be mistaken for the ^/i>'J«ct;aceusat.ve the Latin Un- 
 
 gua-e, ^ince n.e positio.. of the wo.-ds forms no sufficient ^r'';^"'»";;'} ^^^h'^^^^^J/.l^'e 
 .ivcTcLn^tructio.! to the clause, or, il the predicate is a P^ir.!; drastic f;»;"//' " 'i^f J^f 
 of the circumlocution by fore ut. as : Si te a me «m=lr. scis U»; t ^';; J /^ «'"«r^ ^f;]: 
 Cic Att 1 20.7-Ais/o/r ut /<> Ciesar restiti. at (more accurate than rtt.s (<f.«/c//i tere 
 ^/Su/.i .i; ',.• lb. Fa..i^7. 27, 1. This rule, however, cannot ^-^'^!iyif;:^y:f^^:Z^: 
 ti..ies n subject-accusative occu.-s in connectK... with ?'» "^^J^ -;*f; ;^ ^ '^^AS as^ 
 the connection decides which of the two accusa ives is ''';;"'V, » '\V'^iS>^^^^^ 
 Quum consul mn.atus esset, ew/n sua ma.ui ,^e ...terfectQrum. I>'^-^|22. » •^.f'"'^ « 
 tl.e obiect and se the subject, which is made clear by the con.iec lon.-Sii.iulans ad 
 ieu^M i''/ ; .s" nli.tere veiie '(where e.m is the object, and .. 'l^' su.oect ). Nep Con. 5 
 In botli passa-es a chaise into a passive constructum would neither »'=\^«/ ^\ ^,f ! "; 
 mli.ically passible, lu.r nt-cessai-y. (Tlie V^^^^ <^^^-J^^- f ^'^^ '^ "H^U'iolcd by Meinn- 
 § 73.-,; as it stands in tiie text, it is no exception to the rUiC.) 
 
 Obs 4. Predicate-intinitives maybe in two tense*., the present or perfect. Both of 
 these tenses may be 1) onlina.y actives or pa^si^vs ^^i';^'{>-^';'X>^^^'i;^'^^^^^ 
 tsse) • 2) i>ei-iphra-tic futures (amnfan/m ^-^^^, aiiMtunnnj'iKxt) ; i) pi-nphia>tic m nnHii- 
 
 if the pre.licate denotes necessity, or ^n pass.ve-inh...t.ve ^-l?"*-*^,-; ^\'P"''^ I f .',''' 
 of reso vin-. in plac of IT.-ela.ises (p. 'm. Ob-. •.♦ ; p. r.l >, Obs. =,) I ''*;" ^^'"^ -V' . . L to 
 i.arv activt^a.id passive infinitives a.-e not (listin-u.shed acc.-din- to their relation to 
 
 "^^^^ker^xlr^^'.hnt aeeoniin.' to th<-ir relation ^- ''^^Pr::i'ff!:r:tfkn:^l^ \^:' 
 fi'VJih If the nredicate-infinitive denotes an action pa-^t at or b^Joit \\u time oi int. 
 r.r il ?iVa P -diSri is placecl in the ;>.rA./. But.the Pr-^^i^-^V'-V^^^Ti^n'^fsra 
 1, theVei-^'^^ il its time is //...<«//.. as that of the principal predicate. ^^ >^J; f ,.J 
 later tine than that of the principal predicate, it is placed e ther in '»? O'^*'"/^" •- 
 T^i-ese„t ,e..-e r in th.' pnse,\t of the pe.iphrastic f.iture. aeeordm- to the <^i^t"'Ct'ons 
 Fn OBH f. To the e rules there are the followin<j exceptions : (a) »»1^ "/« ,;>f,.^y7 ; 
 feet pmsive-injiuitive instead of a present-intinitive jn f^^^^/^^^^'^^'^^l '^^[l^{. 
 mi Xo 3 «)• (^» theuseof a/>m^vH^^/'/?/i'^^'■^ iiistead of a perfect in tlausi s (U pi n 
 ent o.i ;iv;;;t;J.''/(()iL ..•)the use of the infinitive of the periphrastic future m 
 conditional and hypothetical intinitive clauses ^Oiis. .-U). 
 
 Ons 5 That-cliii-e- dependent on the lirf^t person of the verb memim^^e, ffi'nernuj 
 ha^rpnMicate-infi.ntivlVJn the present ,ins,ea/i of in the perle<-t) ifthe ^Pf'^'ke.- rep e 
 sents the act ff.« icitne.'^S'd /n/ /ii/n<r-fr. The lai.irua-e conceives nch acts, altnou-,ii 
 nclually^pa'at^he U;::e\./ti;;. pri..cipal p,e<Uc.te. as still ^-VV";: ' "' ;; -J";;;^;;!?:.»;' • 
 the sp.-aker. .-.nd hence as consinietively pre<ent at tl.e time of the P' '\^ ".•»;[; .^^^ : 
 as: ^fennni CatOi.em, anno ante qua.n "'orniiis est. me,-,,m ./»>v./>-/^ ( '^^^ 
 I remember tint Ctt) .</,n/:e etc. Cic. Am. 3.-J/rmi;/i, te mihi Phame;e c.ena.i. ' " ' «• 
 b Fam. 9. Ui. 8.-M>-,ni!n ei^dem fere ve.bis «d me ,e .rrtUreU^ "v ."^L n^u^v/K ' 
 tu.m.l. lb. Dej. 14. :iS._Comp. lb. Fam 3, S. 3 ; 15. 4, 1 ; ^ err. 2, 4, 1;^= ^ "; •*• ^ j" f "j' ^J 
 2.5.17.-But meniinis^e takes a />^/r.cnnnn,tive (in re-anl to pasyacts) j» Jf j^^'J 
 speaker was not a witness of the act mentioned; 2) it ''r"»''»-^^^^';' I" ,7^ 'f,^?''^^^^^ 
 third per6on; as : Memvieram, C. Murium, (luiini vim armorum profu-ibstt, btnlle cor 
 
 ^V^ 
 
 MemoHu tonre, ^V^^Tt^ a tierft'ct infin tive, according to the f;;";;','^^_,j;''Sc phiK8 0. 
 
 "^l^noria teneo Smyrna. '"^ «''^^If on verba. /*«€«^t and tf^c/ara«dt. generally have 
 OBs 6 Infinitive clauses ^^^'P^^^^ent oil Ncrba.^^n^^^^ ^^^*^p"''1ls^• 
 
 msmmmmmm 
 
 ^£ifvt^!;ion;U^^^0^7)ando,^ 
 
 2-.,; see Ex^ P.5»-^^5J; -^^^«^^rW-ed Vn the periphrastic u re n^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ing V^''"^^'^- li^t o verbum sentiendi «^ dec arand i. n a^^l tue e i ^^,7^,,^,). 
 
 mmmmsmmm 
 
 OBs 7 There are several peculiarities in the form of^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^'T^S'Tb^ 
 
 ^^^'- - infinitive clauses Ihesertr^r) ^^^^^^^^ Pf^'}^'. "^^ib.^. 
 
 re are severm 17^ """'"mhp.p refer 1) to the conversiou ^^- "'"'V".// • (M 
 1 of infinitive clauses 1 ^e^e ru^^r ij i (jteccet), poerias dabit , (J) 
 
 8ume the form of 
 ditional period 
 
 against reality) • W) trfyuM «••• 1 ^ ^ .^ ;,^,.,iinnrv 
 
 tic tense is uot admissible. 
 
632 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 rumfui^ Ka,. the mea.nuL' ' f ,,,{ J™"' !, *]'^u£i;, Is converted mxo fulumm Unt»e 
 
 For the converrum of the txprc^^ion. «y ,,: ' ,r*,. mratio ol)liqua) is always m the 
 li The predicate of the Hi-clanHe in oblique ^^''^«-""rf ^ j^f,*^^^^^^^^^ rarely) 1^ in the 
 
 suf^'.mctivv hut in ordinary .*>l>liq"^fT,\t 'i^ml^ ''S SjSi'e^ i.Urdin^^ 
 ind ca ive (,.. 4ul foil.), except ^^^^'^^"^^^^'^l"^^^^^^^^^ rule« on the con- 
 
 conditi<.nal\>eriod., ^^ll^^X'X^ll^^^'t^,^^^^^^ ^^ tHe ten.e of t|'e P"";"^'.;-! 
 
 version of tenses (p. 44. foil.). ^'i.^^\*;"f^\."'^\"ir^." tri coni»ecution ol tenses, but the his- 
 predicate. Cicero almost ^^^^^^ «J^f:^;.^' J !,^ of prLcmt (instead of preterite) consecu- 
 lorians. especially Livy, '"-^'^l^^l^.^r otherult'p ^ ^^^ " theperioil is hypothetical, 
 
 tion in oblique discourse. nj:^« -^" Vf <" ^,^ t e imper ect or pluperfect subjunctive. 
 
 .... . Si peceat ^^.^^^^B^,^ ^ f ^^ 
 
 1 1; ^^x^^^ ,,,,, £;fe^s;^^s^?;;^;;aisittncesse>. 
 
 0, intitiii^ neccaret, pcenas datilrum esse) 
 
 1. Si pcccat (peccet), pttnas dabit ^^^^^^S.kIx V^^mx^ datflrum (esse) - 
 
 2. Si peccabil, pa-nas dabit -' ueccassetS, ptenas datQrum (esse) 
 
 3. Si peccavit, panias dabit ^ neocasset iKeiias datflrum (esse). . 
 4 Si peccaverit {J'nt. perf.)s ^^"^^l^^^l^'uxxn^^^^^^^ «"^y ^^c meaning, of 
 
 The perfect-inflnitive of the P«"l» "^l^f^V^,/ "oX-^^ 
 ft hvnothetical i//'//)^//'^^'^ (wouM »1»^'*'' ^"'S"^^^?""',,^ .t rul i;/J/>^?re^^ (aimturmii fuis^e 
 fn'trSi-clausJ,it'oKen ^-)^^J^^:i^^\^^^^^SU-^^,^^^ are the 
 = Mould love). See Obs. 8. 1 '»*^/; "V!.H ^. '";i^^^^ are the following? : 
 
 i^ame for present consecution and P eteiilt ^^>;; ^;';»;^'^ peccSret, paMias datflrnm fuisse 
 INDEP. 1. Si peccaret, p.vnas dedi*set si ieccasset, pc«nas datflrum fuisse. 
 
 ^•Skl^S^S^^Ce i;!t;u:;^etical peri<><^^i^ ,;;;U^^^^^ 
 
 q,^^^isu forensi,, . -^-^l^^,:^:^)^^ ^i inter cau^s 
 
 len^bit). Cic. Or. 1. 15, ♦j5.-llla n dies ^^ll'^^^^l^^^^^^^^ iJudtum interfntCmim (Indep.: 
 armOrum aliquantum »'.'^f^f ;,/,^V f" 'V^,Y/iu K,.m .;.4. l.-(Miam(>brem sati 
 
 tempo 
 
 tinei 
 
 Fam 
 
 Dlrit, 
 
 ■r«/Jif«^[venianl]). - 
 
 non deerit d e^t). lb. 3, 10. g. .^. ^ dementia opem t'tlerjt. oninibns 
 
 Pure conditional», formulas 3 and 4. ^> ""'". ^ . /,,/tn/). Cic Fam. 5, 4. 'Z.-hdi- 
 in rlbus me/or. in twa pc.te.tate ro/^^^^^^^^ 
 
 cmt (histor. present) si 'l";?^}^;/i''"^J !.'/•? I v 3 2 .-Satis confidere convenuram pacem 
 tares (INDEP. : !i?'^.(>^^^?'^«^^!^^rfr^r2:n^MlNDEP. : convmuU si venfnt). ^^-^^^^ 
 
 pros.) 
 •imus). 
 
 "StS'-^r',^;;;!^^'; -;;^- Si«'M«' -n.r„™ca .„ ...e .«.ne «». a. the 
 '•';"}i:!j;,ft/r(;^X^;/nrr:;:i''/::^^^^^^^^ f„rn.n,a, have very different tneanlng, ; there i. no 
 „J„„f to .li«lnR«i*" <!'en' '"■; '-y ''l-^.^'X';^^^^^^^ ,ocorre.pond to the ;>«-Arf i" Ind^ 
 
 pell^ttti lS';T;a'i.''"iferr^nrPe.^t consecution U^caum u used, T pe^ 
 ?MW have to be converted in this connection. 
 
 I^-^'EU FORM OF THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 633 
 
 i 
 
 i" would hate irfia^" >"'";" I'ii'i/ 'e ad ■«<:«'•''"' /■"''■« *^'""',v- •. ''»"/'"""• • 
 
 llYl-OTHETlCALS, FORMULA 2.-I«a f «^ "S ^ . autttulU.tlH « 7//««^*^^)- <^ '^' J""V ^^ 
 
 Ippidum amitierCiur (INUKP.: «'"^^' %'"',;'. ...ferrin- to present time (formula: 
 OB« 8. If the hypothetical P'"^^»^''^ ^"/,,?„ f '«> a^^^^^^^ ^'*"• ^"""mh; 
 
 iiiipiSsiSsfill 
 
 then the dictator nW;;^n/^^^ ,,ellum, .i pU.res Fa nos ha 
 
 M>- wrath upon all : neraur^t-, ..v. - •- v ., .,, Sonietimes \T>n''-'^ ^* "/i""/", , oo \s * 
 'wr,ieverAlnif^lZ?M^J>^JU!!!;Si^?^^i^^ 
 
 ad castra venti RO> X"?nvK'i^^■^ri^<'^^^^ not support t^^l^ . alTitera u?e1n >vhich the 
 
 (,f lan.iruace cannot '^*-* '\^^V, e theorv of «>"> crammanans ^' 'at^^ .J^^,^ i/j./ica^Jm 
 
 ;i-'!ra\^;T';.l; .ica."S5£^' -l;;. -S 't'hl ir^^^rh-^ticaTSe^Si;!..» « «e cannot 
 exclude the orcii/iary preseut-mnniinc 
 
634 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 „.in^ direct di.conrso, or hy ^f^^-^^^lt^fi^^r- ^^^l' ::^;!^^^■'l:no!Z:t 
 
 cenriie «iv» Car.Kvi(U-s ';r':*^t :f/ ;,Sre/ f^/r/a i c c. ♦). Cic. Div.2. 72. 
 ' affirmavenm/utarunijuisse "^ ''' r^^,;^^^^ have the same modal force a. 
 
 Ob.. 9. Aoconln.tr to the pr.m-iplelmtp.edK. «^ ^ ^^ ,„. ,,,^. j,,r..cts y.V.«, (in the 
 
 the indicative ..f the s:.m.' ^*''';; j^^^,, -/Jv;/^ ( = i^v^/m r»i-W, it uouhi have b.j . 
 ,rnse <.f }H>nrU<en,). f^/'''"- ^ ^ '^/ f" !^^!"^/ opus fU etc.. m.d <>f t he ;..r/' ct f/.r - 
 
 s.;Lhyp.;thHie:ilfo,reea.thepc^^^^^^^^^^^ Perspieuum e.. 
 
 Hnce thVse expre^M-Mii* »''^7' t'»>;7;\" , ' „^anu rmx^re potuuse (that we (-o/zW //oi'- 
 
 e!.s utilitatc. no- luulo modo .^ m »' '"J" \!\;7' '|i"(;on \lica.n. in hon.mmi hone- 
 have gained the>^c '"1^'^'''^'-'*^% J^.} ' ,^,''^:/^";,,tv;(t s<.heavy apnnishn»ent 0'n,/,tuut 
 8Tis8ilnum.am-ravitera/u//m^/^//^ nono/^^^^^^^^ o/,/^//u/m r•"^^■>•^ «it- ""^"-'"'^ '■^"''V^, 
 
 ?„ /?^r<^ he^n infiicf^fi .Mc.)._Ih. \ ^"- -7/' m/.V S hare be^i best if At.tiochns co'Ud 
 
 hareint^rrened etc.). ^tl''- •^•'' ''"/H 1,>5 /.ir^T^/z rf?^ to -uard if he had been 
 fnUse difficile cavCre (that U 7rr)'//(/ '^^J,^.J^!Si7eO& ^eire. sibi trans Kuphrat-ni 
 {c. C:ef B.(i.M4.-Marcnne ^^^^^^^'t^'^^J^^^U^u' i\\x\t, .i nmnltas Knnlu 
 cum i.Mi.Mninifl h^^« P«'-^"''V*^";'nu'nnon W^^ eonsnlcm d-orum 
 
 soriim i^iinia honiinibns ^.s-.s't^r, tamon "•'". /'/^«^•^/^» ininicrnh'e that a consul in hi> ab- 
 nun" t^iu.n honori obstijn; (that^ H «^^j^^^^^ t^^^u"^i: rllni.s.t , ne.hoc ..ui.h- 
 
 s,.nce 8hoMUl liinder etc.) ^ • I ;.J;:;7 th s ui d »'r>*/W har^ been necessary if ^■\^-'- ^^f- 
 \n^o onn.U-'n.<se indww U'lat n..i eNen ns 11 u »' j ^^^ j^^ connection with 
 
 Kv.2.-27,Hl.-Son.eti.n.:s./Vi.s>^^ 'f/^s hi v it un 1 ^ nue ranDnw /.i^se. si lihene ac 
 
 ordi,tary descriptive adjective. ^^ the 1 fe f 1 ^^ <1="''-^^»'*'^ ""^"'^ '""' f'"r''u!^o 
 pndlc;e vivere licilum jm-'^set t h a Y/L*';*^^^^^^^^^ which even in the pn^.'d ind.caiuc 
 
 toiro to Hrundusiu.u ifJ_hcidjon^_Uc^t^. r^ vhich would be fatt h^TW^- 
 
 .r^T^i^J^Tsfj^o^;, or je,darus^-;;- -^f^!-^- .i^rMJ^^';;;!!!,^ V^i^ ;>.• prater. 
 taiidvcaMnoTsaym» '^rMm^^^^^.f;^'>^^^^^^^ . „,^. hypothetical Pense.--^. lo 
 
 ite consecution, which it ^T' '^''''y .;"/.; ^t if th^^^^^^ •"''''"'^ is dependent on 
 
 this must be added the ^^^^'^'''''^ Zy^^T^^uM^^ »^ ' "'"1<^'' »»^^' •"'cessity of chantrni J 
 a tense requirin- present «^''r*"^' ^^ ^/^^,/7- Z't^ siprrc^f). which would ellace every 1 race 
 tlie imperfect into a prcscml .poina'^ «^ I beTom .H^ to use an iwp^r/ecf siibjntictive, 
 of h:p"thetical si.jnirtcatton; "X^J.^ltn t l^wrZ^ i. tself, aceordiiV' to p. 442, Obs 1 ; 
 dependent on a presmf. T his ^^'"V'''^ "''V, '.^,^.^;' "^/.j., c„nstrn<-tion, where an imperfect 
 but a voucher for .Ins ^'^c^'l>^;;'l;;l^; '";';[;, ^^^^ ^vould be absolutely wautm-, 
 
 is made d<-pen<lent <m a P^'" P»'f ^ ^. ...ni of mr/.nV^ consecution i- n quired , 
 
 sin.e in the a!)ove-ment.oned V^'^f^^^^^^'^J'^^ ,J^.r, even if we take the readiut? in 
 Hence the theory of our '-.'ratnuvu a ns woul.l iK w - ^^^^^^^^^ ,^^. correct. Lo<,k- 
 
 the above-mentioned passau'O V.'^'^^T.d hat t u- Euun ne< J>ad <-a>ne already some l.me 
 in-atthec()iinertioniM thetext.weUM tna T.H. r. Titnrins could not say •///'// 
 
 blhre the speech of Titurius to mves > '^J; ?• ,„'!'/',,/ i'o./zi >,ot mavk con,e to the 
 
 WOULD NOT BE COMING \f ,^<*^^^'\'',Z l\,\^ 
 
 camp\ in the same way as he m ^ \ f^-^ ' " ;;';;:\^i , .ry,.,,,/,7,.o. ,.se \ we must assume 
 reJlved to kiU Tas-et.us .. '1 h,i- t '^"i^^^^^^^^ u e M^ahled to express an idea which 
 that fa-ar used an «>''J^^ctu)nah e n rm 1. . t « ^^,.,,„„„„ee -^...^ ' an nnquestionahe 
 he did not mean to express. Wed. m t Mai. to I j..,„i,.ones wo'dd not hare comf to 
 gloss. Takin- it out, the "^^^^^^^^^ ^^''»"l'» ^>"'" »»=^'^ '''^''' •'," Xent.nv^. 
 the camp \ since the -r^ivx^o ^;,^,^'^' ."hcVtei- c«.dices, and are an eviden -loss 
 The words '>i ad^s>->er are left out l\y nu^ ,1. . mr-inin.' of '4 ade->H\ Le-iviie.; out 
 Iinc« the preceding ^aWer^ " ;V "/,?;' t.thlUe'^^ n^^^ the same hand, 
 
 these wonls U will appear probable that bo 11^ K^t^ hy formula- of their own 
 
 Some trrammarians ^^^ ^X?^^^^^c^-^h^dir^r^^^ OB.aQfKll) V^nseo 
 
 make. KiiiiNBK say< : nniEcr im^couu^e^.^^ >^^^^^ .ni^taUes) ; 2. VensZr»anK ^x h<.c 
 
 t=i hoc diceres, te errafnr'un esse .^ y;f ;'';'',;,. ,;,ke. and does not correspond o ' .vi 
 dicere.^. te etra'ur'on ess>' twh eh contains ^^'^ "V,«'\ ll'he author idtl.e l>ubl.Sch. (.r. 
 Kk.m,EKKAnE8\but '^'^''l^^'^'f','-^ '^"^l^^iJ^^ lie gives the following 
 (p. :m) nnpr..ve8 on Kuhner by adding ^"^ ' '','^;;\'"., ,V e ,i Vmr.?, dolifurum f^>•« or 
 formulas: Direct: Si Pf<^'<''-''- .^'^''/Zj^^^^^^^ .i jnccuri^^e,, doliturnrn 
 
 r' ,■ . i \_...,i,i'o iJi.i-ka<».poiiiti((sition.' 
 
 t* 
 
 
 MODAL TH\T-CIAUSE3. 
 
 II MnnAT. TIIA.T-CLAUSES. 
 U. MODAL 1 m^ describe the modal relation» 
 
 S 618. Mo.lal Tlmt-clauses are lU.«e '^^'^'^J" ^' ^,,; TUev are 
 
 either 1) riBE modai. clalses, "•";=', .^^ «. 3-3 ; or 2) final 
 action., or .u„.,nent -^^- f ~' ; .^r»;-»» or .nrpo. of the subject 
 
 CLACSBS, i. e. modal '^'^'^^^..f '"'"„' "i^^^es of clatises are in the gram. 
 of the principal action (R. 3.J). Both ^^^^^' ^,,^^^,, ^ 438. 490). 
 
 ,„„<W rdation either^ .<i-^- «^^^^^ . «.H«. 
 
 ,r„/iV«i relation either of odcerbKil or ox »»"'-— .".idered a. altnbume 
 
 OBJ». 1. All nu>v....... -■,._.„,,, ive of general iiiih"'" "'"VVStr. a nnnn of general 
 
 petaccedere. <^>c Ain..i. r. ^ j^.^j _Ar,<,vi^tu:. ^^/- Vrenuentlv such construe- 
 tione may ''''."^.'S ,s «Md "San. e.urians vj.nlrrt ( r \'« « mm r"s tuantur < = ite 
 
 \;;(^V^^<^ contion-cn -''"-"'-•^^^^^^^'cis, 1) the followin^r points 
 
 Ren.. 32. In ""^. P'"-f »"* 1^'" ^ of ,he 'yndeV.c antecedents For 
 
 n,ust bedistingnished: 1 ^^ « ^^'^ "„„1 Obs. 1 to this re.tta,^ -2^ Tl^e 
 
 ♦iw.co QPf n 4oo, UBS. -w , J», t*^'»-^' » ♦iwicp «ipe t). 4:o4 loll. — oj auc 
 
 o od an * tet)se of the predtca o ^o . ^/;^^^^,^',tWely, is always ^<, 
 
 linn of the itUrocUicing -^X^'^")-! The different idiomatic usages 
 
 -:!S^ w!^."^^^- '^ ^ _er intensity, coincident action, 
 
 "ri!lnpuremod^m.lause.a^^ 
 
 and the con ^ecu t/^e clan ^^^^^ ^.,^^^^ a c;;^if.^f.,f,t''^Sr"^^^"""'^^^ 
 
 Thus the unahtative cUu es(w Phinciu8 t/a vixit ut offend^^^^^^^^ describe the 
 
 tain their ^vndctic «n ^*^»; '«"^^'^.j pia„c. ic, 41. But if /^^''^^^.^^^^/o.-e^^^^ of the viann^r 
 » />/«/,««'' rixtt ;' /^^^ /^^^f,2'«,S/' without describing '\« ^"^"S" ^aUo^^ether omitted, 
 consequences ^^^ "^^l"^ ^^'''^'^^^^^^^ m "f '^^f /'^f, 'il In v?r"tate viidti smd 
 
 of its performance, the ''.V""^^'^^ . introduce it (ita nt), as. J" ^' . „, -25. tK). 
 
 manner, ^^■^'\«TL\l,^:Vi»f Wleam ilerfecerat, vt tP^^ Jorttina }^*^" •> ^^gnce of the 
 
 IgHSSSS^So^S^ - ^ ^SS^oft. »«^ or iu p.. 
 
 It from • Arnold's Prose-composition. 
 
63 G 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 formance, which would be exprossctl by ' ita iterfecerat ut etc.'— Noqne multo post de 
 im\i\\oii\c\o\n'nwi^^i\\\^<'(>nnUnmest,vt iJ>^is Pi.inprjiliii- tides lu-ret <n.)t ' ita i'Ofjin- 
 tumestut') Ih.3, 101. luKi)f,Mir*h, fucli lt-<lausf.>* inii>t alwav!' b«' i lit rod net- (I by aO 
 that' But : ltd tuin ah his patron!.- causa ilia dicta est vt cloqiicntiiiin juris peritissi- 
 iiius Cra^U'' juris periloruiii floqucnti^simus Scievola putarGtur. C'ic. Hrut. 3», 14.>. Here 
 the clause i< ri-pre>eiited as a consequence of the vianner^A perforniini; the pniuMpal 
 action, and hence ita cannot be omitted.— Pompejus m- \^to castris exercitum .^tat>nijat 
 vt tertia acies vallum conlingeret. Cies. B. C. ;^, 5(i. Here the Ut-clause describes the 
 manner of the ' statnere'' ; without m- it would be represented n^ i\ consequence o\ llie 
 ' iftatntre ' itself, without referring to the manner in which it was performed. 
 
 Obs 2 ir the )ynre modal TliatdaiiseA arc negative, the clause is not introdiiccd by ne, 
 but by ut with an oniinarv negation, which may be contained in adverbs, adjectives, or 
 verbs Oit non, ut rtvmqvavKUt n/rno. vt nesnrem ; not 'ne. ne vinqvaw, ve quuxinain, ne 
 scirem") as- Ea vestra merita eri:a iios luCrunt ut nos chidium nostrSnun von puniteat 
 (not neiwnittat). Liv. 'J8. 3U.— Adeo anjrusto mari confllxit ?// ejus muliiindo naviuin 
 explicilii//o/«potueiit(not/<^i;o<wtn/). ^'en. Tl.em. 4.-M. (alius talis tnbOnus plel.is 
 fuit ut ne/no uiot ne quitt) a senatu steterit constantiiis. Cic. Brut. .», 2*3.— Uratio ita 
 lihere rtuet)at M//JM.<.r;^m;n (not ne vsquam) adlueresceret. II). 70, 274.— Sometimes, how- 
 ever, nei:ative modal clauses of this kind pregnantly imply the idea of an aim, duty, 
 command, or prevention. In this instance they mat/ take the form of aNe-cluuse, as : Jtn 
 me gesH, ne tibi pndOri, ne remio tuo, ne <,'t'nti Mace<ioiium essem : I have behaved 
 a. e. shaped my c(»urse) so as to ntlect no disgrace on you etc. ( = me ita g< ss\ ['t <'J>^- 
 ram darein ne etc.) Liv.40, 15.— Perfacile se Sicilia tueUVur, ut ne quod ex ipsa bL'llma 
 po<set exsistere ; Sicily protected herself easily, so that etc. (i. € ' and prevented thereby 
 ]e«t' etc ) Cie Veir. 2, 5, 4.— Ita admissi sunt in nrbeui ne tanien eis seiultus daretiir ( — 
 ea/f'^Z^ /<^ with the proviso that etc.) Liv. 22,(11. —Minucius sciC-l)at ita use r.m auueri 
 oportere ut ne quid de lihertilte deperderet (the clause beinj; represented as Mmuciiis 9 
 dutlJ^ Cic Verr. 2, 2,.m— Danda opera est ut etiain sin«;ulis consuiatur, sed ita ut ea res 
 aut prosit aut ct-rte neobdt reipublira> (the restrietit)n ' ne oMt' beinjj represented a» to 
 be '"uarded a-ainst', ^ ut cavtotur nensohsit). lb. OtT. 2, 21.— But in all such iiistan<-es 
 ut \\\l\\ an ordinary neirative would likewise be admis^ible, as : Soeietatem ab lltmiaiin* 
 ita ( = ea le«,'e) volCbant peti ut nullum de ea re scitum populi fierel (or ne ullum. . .Jteret). 
 Liv. 45, 25*.° 
 
 Obs. 3. If the principal sentence of a negative clause of manner, snbsequent, or coincident 
 action, or intensity, is likewise negative, and the two neirations have the torce ol mak- 
 ing the whtde statement virtually affinnative, the clause may be either introduced i)y '//. 
 noil or by quin (see p. 547. 6', and p. .oH5, Ex. No. 27. 28). Such clauses are v'enenilly 
 rendered by ' withouf with a participial ; as : Ao/t possunt uiul in civitate multi rem ac 
 fortQnam amitlere, ut noii pluies secum in eandem trahant calainitatein (or quin...tra- 
 hant) Cic. L. M. 7, 19.— M/Zi ita fracti aninii civitatis erant ut non sL-ntlrent ete. (or q/nn 
 senCirent). Liv. 45,25.— AVsv/mm oenli ejus lleclentur. ut non quod indiirneutur inveniant 
 (or "quia inveniant"). Sen. Ira. 'i^l.—Numquam domum litteras mitiam qum adjun- 
 L'am eas quas tibi reddi veiim (or at non utljunga7n\. Cic. Fam. 3, 8, 10.-E<:o ;<w7«9*/a//* 
 liberos meos aspicio quin (or vt non) hujus nieritum in me recorder. lb. Plane. 3S. «.".♦.— 
 Hiec natflra loci esse dicitur ut nuiliis unniuain dies tam mau'iia temp'state Uwvw qu\n 
 (or ut no/') aliqti" tempore ejus diCi Kolem homines viderint. lb. Verr. 2, 5. 10.— Some- 
 times the writers of the silver a«,'e introduce clauses of tliis kind by q>/ominu,'i lusu-ad 
 of by quinism: Ubi nemo impQue siulte aliquid dicit, quoininus judex reprobet. Tac. 
 Dial. 34. 
 
 Obs. 4. Peculiar usages in pure modal Ut-clauses are : 
 
 1. The use of these elanses (wilhout a syndetic antecedent) with the force of conce-ostre 
 clauses ; as : Hiec res nihilo minus, vt eqo attsim, conttci poterunt {although I am absent, 
 7M>/w'i//i.sya//^/j//9'mv absence; literally :" '/.o ^Aa/ lam afjsent"). Cic. Fam. 10. 2. 2.— Quo- 
 tas enim quisque disertus est, vt eos numere^ qui volunt esse ('even if you count , ' in- 
 cluding those" : literally ' xo that you count"). lb. Plane. 25, G2.— f/7 guivra^ omnia, quo- 
 modo Gneei Mneptum ' appellent, non reperies. lb. Or. 2, 4.— Verum vt hoc non fit, tainen 
 pneclarum spectacuium mihi propfjno. lb. Alt. 2, l.'i.- T/ dt-sint vires, tamen est laudanda 
 voluntas. Ov. Pont. 3. 4, 7'.). Comp. Cic. Agr. 1, 8; Tusc. 1. 21 ; 1. *» ; Phil. 12, 3 : Liv. .3b, <. 
 
 2. Frequently modal Ut-clauses, with the syndetic antecedent ita, are used in an 
 advermtive or restrictive sense , corresponding to " but so that '. Such sentenc es occur in 
 ~* Sometime8^rai7se¥with quominu.^ occur which have the force of a neirative consec- 
 utive clause, if the idea of 'hindering' is implied in them, as : Neque mihi (luidquam 
 oneris m<<cCp\,quotninu>f honeste banc causam et libere i>ossem defendere: Idul not 
 trammel myself so as to be dcbantd from honestly and freely defending this case. Cic. 
 Clu.51,142. 
 
 MODAL THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 637 
 
 the followin- forms : 1) cither the clause corresponding tothis English construe ion is in- 
 
 tiodu ed bv i a tamen vt, or sed ita vt ; 2) or i/« is incorporated in the principal sentence, 
 
 e clau'e bei .' a^^ e ther with or without tawen : as: Totus hic locus est contem- 
 
 nencUis i/aVawe/^ iiH>rtuorum cor^ nihil sen.Ire sentiSmus ^but fo that sm, knovv 
 
 etc Cic Tu-c 45, 108.-//« dissiiniles erant inter sese. statuere ut tamen mm posses 
 
 ut'TuMc^ma"les eV^e sin iliOre^^^ (they were dissimilar. 6^// .o that you con d "ot have 
 
 leci ed eu II) Brut 40. 14.s.- Pom pejus omnia poUicCtur et Csesar quibus ego ita 
 
 crX i nihil de mea com paratione diminuam (whom I trust, but so tha 1 do' not diM.in- 
 
 V^hoxc) ( n Fr 1, 2 5 -y/fl qua-stus te cupidum esse oiwrte/^t yt horum existima- 
 
 i.-m nVet le-S'Bemmiam puia.es ali(iuid valere oportere ; You migh have been eager 
 
 } ^1 u-re K« o " "/ to have paid some regard to the character ot t»>e^e men and to 
 
 ? e Kn?ia./law. lb. Kosc. Am. V.), 50.-Sometimc8 "^^ V:« J^«"^„^^\\f "%\"^^,t ^ 
 ntiodueed by vt ne to represent the restrictum as a protest Vita vt ne being almost - 
 ;;Ji;;;,;Xne)^ as = Uoc a ita utile vt ne plane illudamur: This is uselul, bnt so iuith the 
 niiui^r^inndinn) that we must not be clearly trifled with. Lie. K. A. iw. ^ », * ;^ 
 
 3 The re m^Vt construction ' Tantum abest"^vUh tuo Ut-clauses, represents what i8 
 stated in tut "t It-clause as ?//'//v/€ in a degree that its very contrary, which is ex- 
 I,. J-sed n the iec«)n I It-clause, is true. The first of the two Ut-dauses is an atiributne 
 %^w r/a / V ai.d 1 elon 's to the clauses mentioned i?. 29, Obs. 8, being equiva ent to 
 ^/S«rrj;aiio\7etc:^ Vhe second Ut-clause is ^,^^f^--'. i:;^;f:^y:'^J:i;:^ 
 as syndetic antecedent, tantum ut etc. meaning ' so jar, that on ^'^^^nfaiy , 5^«^'"M'"''* 
 
 but very rarely) this construction is used in its complete \oymyxn\i ' abest «^..^^ 'vY . as . 
 T.n t i.m ab St «J/fO vt malum mors sit. vt vereor ne homini nihil sit bonumaliud potms, 
 (V T KAL^ V There Ts o gn-at a distance from the fact that death should be ^-^}\;^l 
 on ,1 e cot'tVary I think That there is no other i:ood greater for ^^^J^^^Jf f , « f^ 
 
 from fjeina an eHl that on the contrary etc.). C\c.Tn^c.\,-iO, i^t. A most alwajs imse 
 Se^a e'frnd without •«^>.o'. The;^ n.ust be recast, in the Enghsh ^;yrsnm as: T«n- 
 im attest vt scribi contra nos nolTmus. vt id etiam maxime opiemus ; So far am Jpoin 
 S S//i/ 7 cri cisms to be written against me, that J, on the contrary, p^atly des re 
 thLfcir 'fuse 2 2 --Tantum ahe^t utltvc bestiarum causa paiata sint. vt ipsas best as 
 
 lom nun' causa generitas videamus; So far are these (/'/^7^ ./'ombe^n. provided or 
 th.'KikPi.f lu-i-t« that we see the very beasts created for man s sake. lb. N. D. 2, W, 
 l'^8 yintumXsfu^^^^^ "^ «^^^^vatum a pe exerc^um c^ 
 
 cons^io irSnrLiv 44 W-7a.^ abfuitut (Pansa) periculOsum re.pubbca. M BruU 
 3let exercitum /// in eo firmissimnm i eipublica3 piiesidium poneret. Cic. Phil. 10, b, 1 i. 
 -(\S insteXf ihe^P^^ (modal) Ut-clause, an independent sentence is used : Jan- 
 
 r«!^.''S;.^ .'/ binos (libros) s!-ribe.:ent : vix -^p^^Z:''^'il^T^o^Z^'\rvi^& 
 tun book- aniece thev hardly fin shed one. Cic. Att. 13, 21, 5.— Somttuncs, in putee 
 
 of the c Tuu •.?ti\» w^th^a^ abest ut*", a ^>n^'V-"7"'^'^'^"''"SS 1 d wftbout 
 
 or usouee^ non is used, to which the second (modal) L t-clause is d>r>'Ctly added wlhout 
 anoTer intervening Ut-clause. This construeti<m is rare in classical prose, but ^xry 
 fr^uent the s yle of the silver age, as: Usque eo quid argua,^ non hafjes vt contm 
 enu "muiram cKidum p.U.. ; Far frornU^.r^ a ground J;-^^^,^;!*^»'^;' J-'Vls' 
 th.« iipee<sitv of i)it)i)osin-' what s n conflict with the laws ol nature. Cic. K. A. id, 
 45-OloViam facto, urn adlo non abstulisti, vt auxeris. Veil. 2, ti6.-IIa^c res adeo non 
 sunt «'audia, ut sa-pe initia futflne tristitue sint. Sen. tp. 5J. 
 
 lUm 15:5 FiN\i- TiiAT-cr.AUSES (see p. 404. li. 88, 1) are intfoduced by 
 vt (sometimes quo), and negatively by ne (rarely by quo?ninusy,\mugieu- 
 dered bv English object infinitives (with or without ' iii order ) Jt.the 
 subiect of the action is at the same time a member oi the principal 
 predicate. If this is not the case, the English language uses clauses 
 introduced by ' iti order thnt\ 'for the purpose that , or ^o that 
 which must be distinguished from the ' .v. Mr^r used I'^J^'^''^^^^;"^^^^; 
 clauses.— For mood and tense in final clauses see P- 440 Obs U^ l^or 
 the form of the syndetic antecedents see p. 435, Obs. 2. ior the use ot 
 quo in final clauses see p. 558, Obs. 8. . x. .u 
 
 OBS. 1. Final clauses must l)e distinguished from clauses denoting those aims of t^^^^^ 
 pubiect which are contained and intimated in the governing verb (P.. 'Ip, Obs 2). C lauses 
 of Uds kind o n()n S^^^^^ the modal Ut-clanses. but cowjMe the idea of the govern- 
 hV ycrb while fhial modal ctouses may be dependent on ve rbs containing complete ideas. 
 
 "~^ Logically, the attributive modal cUiuse dependent on 'tantv7n abest" is a predicate 
 clause. 
 
G38 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 o .,1 r^Z^/i^ In Kn-li:-»!, ohjcct-intinitives are -eiRrally employed if the ^""J^'*- ^J 
 
 ?he Chuil i^a thc^^^^^^^^ H M.emberot the princiiml .entenre, as : ^;:^^'^^:^^'^ 
 
 nri-lio ii te -it Ca- B.G. 7, 87.-Leiruiu icciico omues scrv. sunius w< libei i e^^e P<^;\' i^- 
 F-i^ * >, '•J^uii -liUe li-o tempu^ hoc vohis divinitus datum e^hc v odu,, infamul, 
 n pU dini;u:;um'o;i'l;;imUlKi-e.is,Ib.Verrl lo.-ra^ 
 
 On» o If the final clause isf negative, it almost always takes ve. or W «^ (not vt non\ 
 bc?.^ in En', Mnmrodncc.d by • It to ', or ' lest\ a. : Caesar, jl^^HTl'^'some^lmei' ho^^^ 
 mitm- lis onnm ((m-iiCMHt ad exercitum proticiscittir. Cies. B. (..4 0. Sometimts now- 
 ?vtr it th?neSi ive "cMers to a particular'men.ber of the clause. ^^^^'I'i^^'^^^llZ 
 
 -^iur;i;-:^;;^a.;^;;r'sr^^^^^^ 
 
 But it won d be r erfect v pn.i)er (tl.ou^d. le.s concise) to express this ^»;"»^*''^-**/^"'^; ' ' « 
 
 «VeiY^)/ our morals from bciu- examined every tive years, (ic. Pis. !>. 11. >"V.' <^''"'^V*J^'^,^ 
 ? .rt n.Viriv re a ed to those final ()no-da>i.^e.'^u\ which min>t.< is a red comparat i v,-. as . Nou 
 
 ;fi^ium'ei^-^bi!;;;t^'^;;immJ..y>.|u 
 
 etc Cic Trov Cons. 17. Here ' (jm minus ,Hrj)e intn-ptlltr means in oiuu ^" "^ '^. "J, 
 fiv^H itlv in errin.te.r- but n,o /ninw^ nviy also be taken m the sense of «^ ; If-t I 
 JnJft^ /r4Sv i .^ 'Hiis iilcnfity <.f m-anin., in final clauses is nnque.- 
 
 Kaw/th^ oridn of the use of a Quonn,n>. as a "--''J'^;'''';"";; ;;.;"•,, ,i,„«,, ^efer- 
 ()R3 3 Final Ut-clauses are di(<m;iti( ally used as bru f paieniheiual <^''"''^^- \;;.^^\, 
 TimMo tiie S?a//?V>/y (not to tlie /./-t^rfuw/^) in the principal sentence, and exph m nj? 
 [n a -enerafJi N the ^^^^ of the di<course, or the views and purp<.se of the an lor in 
 
 !m/ rV. n,l to m -nt^ion In"En-lish such parenthetical cluises take the form o! an object- 
 nfiS ive( /i/aS Zu:^y',vfpr\(ermitfawalia. to omit other points; r/< mAt/ 
 i'SV/.,nottn;ent1onVtc.>:a;:^ 
 
 tnr • To he hrief- bavin" made her testament, the woumn die.l. Tic. dec. (. 1 i.-h( quui 
 mi.^ur 'It ad falUja^ re.iHrnn. Uo come to the drama, to \^^;;^;;--;]^^ ^^ ^^^ 
 matic poetry), senVx ille Oecil.anus "''"^ns laceie filium rn^t c ni r «/• -J-^ ♦^'^^•^j 
 Ttelinuum iudi.ium de judicibus. et, v^re uf dimm (to tdl the '^ '/ > ■ m. ,1? f . lb 
 ih \Vrr 2 'S »!'♦ -MurOiia -i nemii.i, ut fcrU^irm dicam (to say the least) odio ''nt. i >. 
 Mu^40 87.-1 7 n^l 7 deiUo tempore, nihil de calamitatc reiyubliae qtierar, hoc^ .n 
 Jespmideo not to comphdn of th:/t time, and of that '^^^'y 9\ ^J^"^^"; ^,\^;t 
 'iSi,Vo.-Ut ne lonrjius abeam, decia.at ista a.^crlptio, esse ahquid , i\ottojollou I'^^'lf^ ' 
 A r/A.r ^»,That id.iition shows that there is 8.)methin,. Ib.-l abet.s enm, ' ''f f " 
 iamamiAr^ (to my mthmq more). (,ui se homines coe-issc ateatur. I»>- 1^'- «''i^ ^'''l' 
 ?u S alterlus volunt-ite, ne dicnn libidine {not '«/;«y^ ''.'^/'^'I'Ty^-' '• *^ '^, V^^lVl- 
 -l niea o ^,« multa dicam', fre.iuen.ly ' ». ;/*"//a ' is eliiptu^iliy used = w Mor/ , 
 ^inairord'- Nemulta; invenTiur ea «errula ad Stratonem pervenisse. Cic. Clu (.1 
 
 In ilaie of 'n« dicam' in this parenthetical sense, sometimes the cmpound particle 
 n.]/m (not to me'S to say ilothinj: <.r) i. used : a.. : Krat eimn mu to ;;."' ;• "V '^ 
 huiiisnrbisaptiusquani tota Peloponnrsus. r>f(/^/m Patrcf : Tiie leMdeiice •' «'".^^ ^' '^ 
 Zld inwe been nluch more .-.da/.ted than the whole ^-\^Y'T:^:X ^"^^^^^ 
 Patne. Cic. Fnui. 7, •iS.-Uenerally. however. /..(/////^ is u.sed as i . ,^ '^' . / ^,^^ ' ;^" ,^ 
 ' mucli less' or • much more', mostly occu.nnir in certain eMU-essious with the lorce 
 a particle involvins; the idea of a conditional clause, hee p. ...S. before i 
 
 Obs. 4. Sometimes a final clause is connecte.l with sai^ with t«'e force fa l>elj.r^^^^ 
 cronindial as- SalU es^e ma-nia iiicommoda accepta vt reliqiios casu> luneient , iJiai 
 emmghdi.i.ter^ had been met with to make them afraid of other ucc.deut.. C«s. B. C. 
 3,10. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 639 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 T That ct AfSES DFrENPENT OS verf>a sentievdi {li. 23).- 1. Tbemistocleg Nvas afraid 
 I. / HAT-CLALSES WK^^^^^ barbarians with part of their ships should 
 
 dmlbh.» Jirj-' L a d 1 i^ bo' .-2^ v^ere afraid Uiat Hannibal mi.dit not 
 
 double» the >^ """ y; hiV mnv in time to raise the sieire of the city^-3. Has any one ever 
 doub ed nr on u no d<." th^^^^ did not doubt but you would do what yoit 
 
 rivailvl did T was ^'reatly delighted that an occasion had presented itself t.. him 
 
 lieall\J ^^7- ,^-X I; Thnt as vou write', Caesar is consultinir« you. {lives me much 
 \Ztnvl- bm I raTi er w s'le xVould consult for- you.-7. Men of inferior abiljtyn 
 *r ,1 1 ^ .; .^1 sorrv for beiiK' surpassed by their [contemporanes].-8. Ca?sar sjud, he 
 h u iKe u i"v^ '»>« K""^«» I>«^P'^' ^^^"»^d '^^ ex;orted'3 from him.- 
 
 ! W^a >am'ryM e^^^^^ wTth our dearest friends when'Mhey P^rform^e less than we 
 ;;,^i.t _iO I do not griid-e»' vour"< reapingi" the fruits of your pood action?2o._ii 
 TKub^ic-^i was deeply chagri^e^ ornament, should have been camed- 
 
 oii- b^t ii robb^."* -12. I do not wonder that my [friend Furnius should be held lu 
 sue es im" y you.- 3 Is anvone astonished'^^ when'^' he feels cold''« in winter ?- 
 14 (i'ar was ?eatlv provoked"- bv CiceroV departinii^o to join the force? of Poinpey 
 i^^ Ueer^vvr-hi^ 10 be n.lieved3i-fromthat embarrassmeni3-^.-l«. These [men] rather 
 wi: ; U brdeserie^^^^ all, than to be defended by you.- 17. I wish you ^youM ex- 
 
 iV/ .11 ,n. vMiir «frders3* — 18 I wish you to write whatever comes into [your] 
 K.^nd'^m I 'u(s the time had no^ coml»^ when (,,.0) you are able to "''derstand 
 
 ^hi.lis' 1 he<l3« Pompey, [and] how hi-h [I am holdinirl Brutus.-20 tlandius 
 w she 3^ that t leK()iiian pe..ple mi.'ht have one Isin-le] neck^^ that »>e inif-dU unite* 
 il I iis manifi Id" crimes" in** one [single] strike«.-21. Our forelathers willed that not 
 : o t) Won an neoide should assemble**, unices some of*' the magistrates had is>^ued 
 Tc I rn 1:1 im.*» -2^1 expect to return in three days*«.-23 We waited in yam 
 acallloranuenn . *-. ti.rht60._24. P:picilrus was of the opinion" that 
 
 nlT-a ure^^^i^the hi<^S^C^^^ The majority" he'ld that the army should depart by 
 
 ^hMrom the ca u -^^ propose" that embassadors for^* peace be dirfK^tly sent to 
 
 night lu m V'^^^f.*^";^'- „_;"„.^^^ fV)i.53 departing. --2». See that nothin-^» is done against 
 
 ?he" a w^ -2!» Yo^;^^^^^^^^^^^^^ the Subject- [in question], but you are speak- 
 
 '^"I"THAi-cLAUSEs DEPENDENT ON ve.rt>a dedavandi. (R. 24.)-! The dictator L. Papi- 
 riulslnt ^N ord to his masVer of the horse not to engage in a battle^» in his absence "- 
 ' Avianus nm^^ to punish" rather himself than hisconntrv if any ^^rong«^ 
 
 b^.f ber do e a -ainst reli<'ion.-:3. 1 a^ked for the permission of sending-s a colony o the 
 iM.bli^l d^iI^Scily^ on" your^on's speedy ^^^P^rture -5 A aler.us 
 
 ^vh .tP The s.dXr^ to remember*» the glory of their fat hers. -♦;. At that time I ad- 
 
 •> Vi vA„ to he rlcone le^^^ Parties stipulated»^ that no harsh 
 
 me-i^t.r ". on Id Kken«« air^iilst thV:i:tolian..-8. I resolved to keep"» the so IduMS 
 
 "h eanip iv.li.r 'y a/l adm^sMe methods).-^. He S'^?^^^"? <^d (Kf "^^.^.^^J^^^ 
 imilrrneml\ Vihere) Valeri us to send one legion to CrassusV'» help.- lQ. He gaNeordtrg 
 • 1 ^,... 1. 4:'>' OBS M -^ li.ndir : L >-st he might be pressed by a double {ancej^s) attack. 
 M oe kre sVeii 453 Ot^s. 2. «.-* Jieuderl 'Y\^tii\\. could not lead (a^/rf«cm) early 
 ;^;L/iyi) cmm'.u d. h 5 ar^^^^ (.aTundial after ad) the city from the sieae.-^ corn- 
 
 mi tei-e-«/W^^ That an occasion had been ofiered to him of ' the thing to be earned 
 u 1 ' ;.;yi t'i'/.r^v -' lUndH' : That you write that Ciesar i^etc.-« co»^?//^ •€^- 
 i hi r,,.t/>/-'o Da ive «f the interested person.-" inferiOres.-^-' beneficia.-^s all- 
 «M u'^ icui txtorq.iG e.--'* ir.isci alicui.-»^ That-clause.-i» 7?f«c/.r .• That they have 
 n',V.Vv^7;.7toiU smaller [thin-s] than we have conceived in the mind.-' - moleste 
 7. • ^^IViiZc^^^^^^^ ferre.-=" qood adion.^, virtus.-^i homines.-" gravi- 
 
 teret'";:cerb 1 •rre-"aul\-rie.-"pra^^ hold somebody in siick esteem, al.quem 
 
 t nafacere -iernii-^^^ That-clause.-'^- to fed cold, algere.-^» vehementer iudi^;;5"- 
 
 ^'54 55 «ri' 6« Ne clause. -"■ dicere -f>^ res.-^» pugnam commitiere.-»» abl. abs- 
 
 o^aSaliquid dudus lacere Jn.-'« tenere.-'' by abstract dative. 
 
i 
 
 ^ 
 
 640 
 
 THATCIAUSES. 
 
 t„ prepare ovcrythin. for, he dj.p»r.urc[l!^^^^ 
 
 t>pnc ui I I von lor»* vour nia-'ii iceiit rocoption'-' oJ my br<)tHer.—-.ti. lu n 
 
 "'nTrjAT ri.Ar.F? DEPFNnKKT ON r«*n r<;d«K«. 7?. 2r..-1. Ihave ahviiyf taken u-ioat 
 
 fX"';,;^,;?,"n,i'a'rlhe w\^Aec,Lwer/. ,,,e eonaUW^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 rus t^aul. he was at 1^4 »Hea-« preNcntul )y ms^^ «^^^^^^ njrainst the 
 
 deliverh.g the prisoners by force «rom t he bctor^ -^yj;^^^^^^ „o 
 
 nius out of my note".— 5. <^ f/'"^,' <<^* J*'*." A,,, ' ; »; This \» evident ( />^W«'i I lioni 
 
 verb delere.-^ «raviter -« Ibnt-daiiM. '^^; '> ,[, . c'e-ar had a ir<>od opinion of 
 
 do not know how to bear.--"- P'.'^^'".^',^';-:! ""'""TJ I " nrifm . m -" enlti.-^* H.n- 
 
 s^fisr;,:'rt^r£,^'t;;p;f tps™i^3;r,^M 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 6il 
 
 mander.in-ohief-8. Ap to yonr Ptavinff in Athens. T wish you would depart [from there] 
 r^ H^jn a"i>o"lMw7-9 Your brother d*'serves the greatest thanks (.f our lellow-cinzens. 
 ^10 WhaleN^T tile tyrant has taken from us^ he ha« leltua the rii,^ht3 to transmit (maA 
 
 1 XvMmt am be ". clea.^ aifd evidei.f as that there is some divine i.en.^' l,y whom .h.8 
 w()i-id'' s overned 'U. There is no doubt that of all Greek nations the Lacertjenioinans 
 w 'the bn"e""-3. It is better that a piilty- [person] should -^^^^^-^^^ '^^, 
 tli-m liiat an inmnent [nerson] should be condemned.— 4. It is disgrajtlu lor a irte 
 
 ,n • nAito vL^M^- ''•'""•d "^^) at any placets where he has 
 
 no^ he ruhts of a ci ize.^^-S. It was disL-raceful [lor him] to accuse ( = that he ac- 
 ?u<ed)thatco"^uUv^^^^^^^ qua-sior he had Ik en.-G. Nothing is more important imajm) 
 SaiT or a uSer (/>r^c-./>/^A-) to thorou-hly examine'* before all other hinps ur/j/^im ^2 
 t rtalem'» amr^^^^^^ the student (^i.T.n«).-7. The Senate considered'' i to be 
 
 ioiS ( i^.m"" harcornelius sh.,uld ol>tttin Gaul as [his] province, his command t;/|pe- 
 l^Srbeh^tr cont inuedi».--8. It is not fair (;>ar) that I should speak in the presence ot Kos- 
 
 L d fshou^^^^ 
 
 ^iNJior,Lr-\{) It is a settled matter»" with me to leave the public ser\-ice^».- -11. ^ear 
 
 h r^eS .'i>^ H s" r.^^ tree which it is thou.dit a sin (../a., to yiolate.-l' . It is a Pious cus- 
 tom to attribute Ktrihvert) one's hapI)ine^s to the <rn.ce (judiciuvi) ot the cr"*^^-!^- ^fto 
 savi' in is ' O • -ins ' that with our ancestors it had been t he custom in banque s^i for the 
 ?ul<ir,r<inLMif t.'rn with the accompaniment ol the fliite'-i^. the pral^es and vi. tuts of 
 
 il:,ra'^,=i^^^^£.i;eKfffa|K^ 
 
 VI Tmat-clal'sfs as subjects of Impersonal \ ekbs li. 2«.— i. it was eviueni iimt 
 
 t - V'^ «{%— ^^ Sonl^iTiJe^pi:^ 
 
 ^Tri" - aStk'd lict wtth m^^ that Labeo had committed the murder.- 
 
 ^ I aVneVd (?o/'r ii?) with llortensius that he should open thf P.'^^t"/-' ;' 1" ^his case - 
 7 Thert is o disa^-reement as to the fact that Semproni.is fell !» ^^at battle -8 It ee 
 
 PJ^r*/.iiy «/ «XiS:So</.i:-l-2. It »a. «llo.ed •« .l.e king •» XweVby 
 
 was' not far with his ar/ny when our ^l^Vr'l^Y'^re tints jm-ss^^^ -^It 
 
 ^Tti:,n- he ^;sT "k a-s^an'omtorVa triS ^L than twenty years.-19 In del nitio^^^^ 
 U is proper that nothing, should ^^^ .f}}^; :{^^^^%^\SrA^^^^^ 
 
 St';;¥^i^.irEie-;r^ 
 
 --By>.m;.«. Oraiiasaoere (Pa-We.y).^ eripere ali^^ 
 
 _4 in'mmis.-^ «l'^''-*"^^-- vP'^''P''u\'n;: n nV n'hSta^ eo loco.-»* Lt to have 
 
 » nocens.-'o causani non duere -» ini,'enu s - ««; '"^^^^^^^ _,\ _ ^j^^,, ^jj^t a teacher 
 the rights of a citizen = servTre (by the P^r.phrast c^^cm umm 
 
 should thorouirhly examine ( ^>' J'^^^^o'^^;^ ';" /^, ^^^^^^ J. cpula' (gen.V-*^^ Hender: 
 
 abs. with perfect).- » certum «f^-'^^. 'l^^^i'^Jf^^^^^^^^ the flute («d tibxam). etc.- 
 
 inff), priOrem diceie.--^» ex cons.ho « ^^f.^ l" Ji^cim^^^^^^^ 
 «•,u:tere.-30evanescere-=''uni.mcaus^^ m uare.^ 
 
 tIs;iudicendotenCre.— 5*redundare.— 3*pettfitum. iiu„i. 
 
642 
 
 THAT-CLAUSES. 
 
 .in.U.> State .houl.l he -titled (/^^0 to iT.nl<c Us -- 1---^. J .Imll let yon knowMf 
 
 ,lK-v.lH.ul«l k..()w it.--2fi. ir >V'V'^^"";!^, ?;;'pr"< M.^ at t .•c.l.cu<.n».--'27. It matter* 
 be lone, than in my .nt.Te<t that you >';>'> '»'1 ^^^ fi.V h 1% ee.l.l unless mn) he knous 
 v.-ry little r<.r an ontoi-» to know what to say [m »'"*, »;»'^.VA!..!; V". .r^.L if the enemy 
 
 t„- ,.civ,l villi IraiKl.iU'nl ,"'<<^"'">i' '•-*;jj,r'fl\'"|, „||„,vs^ 
 
 wh.,1 ,uc.a,„.'»we "'"X ■">■« 'V'''^'.^'?^,'"''!^, •^fti,' -35. Oar .lifticiiUie.-' »«<• i" 
 
 I 
 
 ( efeat'-* in >uain. — .5. 1 nc infp^ "»- ..^... ... 
 
 Mauiiiu^ThS be «„„1,1 -..ily r,.«,v..r" «ha. h., had lo«.-4. The .lan?jero"s o.h.mo,, h.m 
 
 pained f'round" that under^nhe-c jii , 
 
 K " ' n he condemned.-5. We hold the o|nn.oi. 
 
 > Iiad lost. — *• 1 UU imnu» 1»'" 1, / 
 
 gained F-'''^"i^^,-'^^^i'S il^^^^niZn^M^afr^Wne^^ (--) ^cept^ 
 
 icommoUum m thi. law V/, V/' A;: ^-j .«h , a i v ni bein-s ^<iniwa,>^) «-ere once glam- 
 or our mas:if»nates.-l.i. ■^''«,Vr "uV^Lti « 1 1 .the aeknowled-'ed (coured^m hy onr 
 dam) calledo» into existence'» >y/ha ce » vvil n..t ^^«;^! '^, ,^,.p^,, \,„ ,j,,) the State 
 
 conntrymen.-l.i. That r.'proach'^ ;,' , ^ , L i ;,* J/ 7 r^^^^ »"•' ^^'^''^^ ^'^^^'S"- 
 
 of t!ie Atlienians that they put ^" <!^'='^ \ <'f,^;/'^. '''^'^^^^^^ (o"* bribo'^ ilieir le-isla- 
 
 -17. There was nt)W {jayn) no m<.tive U-a^/^fO tor »»' .^ 'f^'.'. ' ,„ you why" I cannot 
 
 tors'» -18. You cannot vemoye{Mkre) the chH'^^'^.J' '^'\. ^^J^^ H^^ 
 
 ^Mue into the Senaie.-19. What other cause inul^^^^^^^ 
 
 (reiviomlre) your nefarious measure8?-2u. Veires came >ciy near u „ . 
 
 tht; multitude. 
 
 .M„r^».r"^- »b,.;i» ; he.ej,eh,. the j,^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 S' iH'Cunir)SUs.-3« qnamrU with subjunctive.-^*» "" ' /^««J/Vlri, /yl/i//) -" dicere.- 
 
 44 a.limere.-*» dominus.--»» divulere.-^' V Ji r//.^/ r.f Vm t 
 conari.-^orerupenlre.-'^pra.ium.- /0/ A^^^^^^^^ 
 
 65 nisti.ia.-" /^/K/.r; «'«^^'^^ »'-' CVhu c a se -«"^^^^^^^^ ar n:ltus ,arcess. pred.). 
 
 •« /;.nrf.r.- That lax.'s (trihutam) be paid (^o/tvr^) ^f "^^^^^^"'•g^p,'^ _;♦ That-cl^ 
 •• vocare.-'o vita.-- casns^-- oppm^^^ 
 '2^^:^^^^^Z^^'^X^^ and a Tiiat-ciau.e.-- laccr.re. 
 
 I 
 
 ■ 
 
 ■ 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 643 
 
 „, ^^^c 7? 91 IT hplipve that ve mnst^ Ptrive with 
 
 VIIT. iNNF.n FORM OF TlT AT-CLAFSFP. ^•/^j-r/A\7„rxt4 humUhl -2. It is absurd 
 
 nil our n.iL'hf^ to rednc' the city b.fore_,the first j-f^ncxt^Jjno';^^ 
 
 you "'•^y;''V,''"'\\.'l, 'L.u threat ened't.) imil'^ them to the crossi* when 
 Sfra.;^:nl!:ii?^:-m U 5-^i:: - -j;!^'- ^^^^i^^r S;io^^t^hrmed that Csar 
 
 be defeated, will '«<>» ^^^M;"»"^' ^^^X ^^i^pS e^^ ^'^^ '^-"^""• 
 
 would accept these ^'^^^^^^\^^^''h)\^\^il\'^)l^^^ to n-bellion (>'editio\ had been 
 
 IX. MoDAi. THAT-CLAUSES. H. ii. ^-^-l- fJJ\*^? '^iV.-,^^^^^ j^ th "ranks3» -2. It had 
 tbat l.e placed (ro//o.v7..). for apii^arancc^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^ ,.^^^. 
 
 been noticed^Mhat the ai-my ««.* f Po^^^^^^^^ ^,,,^ ^,^ ,„„.,,t35 on 
 
 part-33 than th.>y were w'»"t'*. ^^. .ir >,Ll nrrfom^^^ his march so that he never wasS» 
 Lot nnfavoral»le3« lm-ou.uP'.-3. C esar had et '^^^^ The attention of the enemy was 
 
 o latus.-** accidere ^^^^^r^^'^^l^'J^Z^^^^ contracted (.v.vd- 
 
 jr..od -race (^ra/JaV-*» liV"'jf; '^Iffl^V^/ere - ««^^^^^^^^^ appHcilre ad.-" tu- 
 
 ^,v) many «^imities (ye//rM/^?/^«>V-;^^^^^^^^ [soldier^i] on etc.-^^ hpvnm 
 
 inulns.-»' Render : t(. observe what w a. h.n.^^^^^^^^^^^ siutiment (ro/u/.tor) 
 
 eornu -.3.aducIr;.^^:^^S;^tJan;^oZSinof ttheir] sentiment ..^unm 
 mi-ht be done.-" largitiOnee.-»» nuntius. 
 
644 
 
 TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 tliou<-ht of the same reapoTis.-IS. This ran' easily be done if yon arc \yilling« to sell 
 V m.r V Ha to kiv nuthin- of a n.ortira-e», which. I think*, yon can ne-otiafe oi, 8a t^- 
 l-u"orv ten..* --14 The «hole tiihe^ of the Greeks, not to i.ntt.M.l.ne a point on lt% 
 is i-noraut ol^ the meanin-^ the importance», [andj the wei.i;ht"> ol an oath. 
 
 » Poterit -« fut perf.— » veipflra.— •« Bender by involution: which it will be allowed 
 (lictre) to tin e to make on [by] cnon-h fair ^a,p(iis)vMn\\\\in\9.-^):v\m^.-^ J\'>"f^^'. """^ 
 to treat ilie thiiii.' too {coiiiparatici) lincly (subrUiti).—'' i<;i»orarc aluiuid.-» vis.— 
 » aucioritas,— •" pondu:*. 
 
 CIIAPTEU Fouirni. 
 
 TEMrOPiAL CLAUSES. 
 
 I. QUUM-CLAUSES AND THEIR EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 § 619. Qimm-clauscs arc either tuke tempoual clauses, denoling 
 the relations of time, connected with the principal predicate, or IM- 
 piiorEU TEMPORAL CLAUSES, whicli, tindcr tiie FORM of a temporal clause, 
 express certain relations of the predicate 7wt belongini,' to time {nfftctid 
 Quum-daus€.s). They arc 1) Modal Quum-clauses ; 2) Causal Quum- 
 CLAUSEs; 3) Adversative Quum-clauses; 4) Coordinating Quum- 
 clauses. 
 
 The pure temporal clauses arc either definite, or indefinite (7?. 34), 
 and, in regard to their grammatical relation, either adverbial, or attrib- 
 utive (see Obs. 2). 
 
 Or-* 1 The coninnction oumn nm^t l>e oonsidcred as an original advkhb of time 
 havin- the same relation to the relative adjective ry/zi, a^ the locative adveri>8 ufn and 
 vnde " As vbi \s = eo hx-o qvn, or = u^u>liKO, m) q>i>nn is = to hmjmre (/vo, or = (p/o 
 temmre Hence fnuuenlly relative clauses introduced by quo ttw/H)rP, are e(,uivalent 
 to Quum-clauses, and vice versa: (/uo fenijM,r. ( = qrtrwi) earn primuin liberam esse 
 audiv it.sine judici.» reddidit C'ejo. (^ic. CIu. .',!M.;2. Thu., for ln^tance, the appos. ne 
 <> nm-clau-('s ( A'. 81. Obs. «M have the forci' of a^drdinntina relanve clan^es. Therefore 
 tl e //Vol)./ of Quun)-clau-es frequently f..Ilous the rules on the mood ot relative clau-^es, 
 e i X-rtniteind the aKirdinatum relative (^,nm-clauses re.iuinnir the indicative ike 
 the corresponding t)ni-clause8, while causal and adversative (^lum-clau^es have their 
 predicates in the suT)iunctive. Only the subjunctive, which must or may be used lu 
 lome clasg," of tin- pure temporal Quum-clauses, must be considered as conventional, 
 deviatin-,' more or less from the rules on the mood ol relative clauses. 
 
 Ob« 2" Ouum-clauses are either ADVKitBiAL, or attkibutivk. The former arc thope 
 whichai-e directly dependent on the tjovernini: predicate; the latter arc tho.«e which are 
 deuendent on one of the «reneral nouns denotin:: time {tempu^. ditn. annu^, etc.). >«'C /f. 
 :i6 S.mu'times temporal Quuui-dauses are used as SiB.iErT-( i.ai'sks inostly referring 
 toindettniie time, so as to have the nature of Siclauses. as: /hfinifio est, q„„m in scriplo 
 verlmui aliquod est jxnifum cujus de vi quariiur Cic. Inv 2, l"l|<- V'"'?i''''i^i'i'. V'^'tilim 
 mus locu^^sf.ncum injuiiil cntumelia juncta demons riltur, I'V.l"'»^.^- ^.f!»^' '' ' " ™ 
 dissimulatio est quum alia diandurnc s.ntias, = alia dic.re (^^'''^J^'^" -•"«"' r\'.''nn,mm 
 ulatioest. Ib.Or.2,<i7.-Qui(l est autem (piod |>lus valea ad ponendum dolOiem quam 
 guutnest intellectum nihil prollci ? ( = Si ii.telli-itur, <|r; Intel i.m . plunmum valet I. 
 Tusc 3 is— The mood in subject Quum-clauses of this kind is the indicative, i.au r 
 writ.rs, however, use sometimes the f^uf>J>oic/ive, as : Nou exiijit defensrOrtm quumjalear 
 qux'dam eloquentiui eOrum defuisse. Tac. Dial. 25. 
 
 QUUM-CLAUSES AND THEIR EQUIVALEx\TS. 
 
 645 
 
 ««^ 
 
 
 '" 
 
 t 
 
 A. PURE TEMPORAL QUUM-CLAUSES. 
 1. Adverbial Quum-clauses. 
 
 Bern 34 Adverbial Quum-claiises denoting pnre time, refer either to 
 an indefinite, or t(. a definite time. The former have the nature ot 
 the indefmite relaiive clauses (p. 4U7, Obs. 7 loll.), denoting an uticertam 
 coHtinqcncy on Avhich the reality of the principtil i^redicate depends.^ In 
 the^e the conjunction quvm is either rendered by ' \chen , or by ?/ , 
 havino- either the force of 'whenever ', or denoting, like .< an assump- 
 tion o^ the speaker. (See p. 320 foil.) The mood ot^ indehnile Quum- 
 clauses is generallv the indicative (but see Obs. 2 and 5). 
 
 Ob*. 1 If ii.delinite Qunm-clanses refer to non-preteHfe principal predicates, their own 
 nr"ucHU- nay be 1) in Ihe perfect indicative, 2) in the present indicaiive, 3) in one of the 
 Ko future ttnses.Si.metmes the perfect and present are placed m the subjnnc lye 
 loi;V Kit neither of the two future tenses can, by conversion, become a subjuucUve 
 of the present or perfect (p. 447, foil.). 
 
 Ob« 2 If both the principal and the dependent predicates denote an indefinite present 
 ♦ imr^seei) 2MH V.'WT 2an(:^). the predicate of the Quum-clause is in the iNincATiVE 
 ru . ST ■. • c)'''/m p'-n^n-na ,)nemia .vnt, e.t cau^a peccandi : When (wherever) there 
 a e.m'u',ri/eMt.el.lout)thereisam<,tive for sinnrnj:. Cic. Off. 3, 20 ^"^'^,^^ ^™ "'»'"« 
 hori'< a iq 1 (I atrx iter fieri vidhnUK seiisum omneni humanitatis amittirnus. I'>- «• A^53. 
 i/L .e suinini ^.vN.mnium summa i.-rum, re-em ilium nnnm r6«///.y/.*. I'>- I^f P- ^' 
 ^ Iver 1, ' AKBiTR<>u' nos etiam tunc vtimvr, qvnm ea./ea;jj«. jurat, qna^ comperh» 
 h lu-mu- lb Font. 13. 2H.-Quod idem tit qnum de tniimpho r^/e^/wr. lb. Phil. 1, 5, 1^-— 
 Ronve •/;//o"e<M^ tiias liitctas /;70. lb. Att. 2. 15. l.-Non ea ..< m^lecTna qnyrn 
 
 re»,us ^uum renit calamita-. V^'I/l^/^'lL^'^n "'^ TT.V ^^ dIx V^ ^ lb a^iS 142- 
 2 1 1S-2 5 12- Hep. l,;is. .')(); Tull.11,28; Ciec. 1.3; Or. «»,32; J^n. 2, 25,.>4, in. ^,t»??, j^^ . 
 Plane fi 1; Ih 14 :i5-lf the two predicates denote habit or cu.«tom, the ;;?t//ct;>ai 
 
 , e k>m ma h, in the ..npe.lect : Tu.n qnum concurmnt ceten P'^'^'^i^^; ,',^»« "^n" 
 tor castra facilbat • At the season when the other j.raMors are on the field of act on, 
 
 h .t^?eM :4 u m was w..nt to bt.ild his camp. Cic. Verr. 2, 5 12.-ln post-classical !an- 
 mi-^r Ur- itnd a^^^^^ of such Quum-clauses are often placed in the subjunctive In 
 S;>: mri-.i- 1 -e the indicali\^', in clau^es of this liind. is even then necessary when 
 frclatisems the character of \ conc.sHve clause, as : Qui ">^-^'^«»t. X>'^'"»! "^I^.f 
 Itinm Quum manent corpore. animo tamen excuisai.t et vagrant tir. ^'C. Kep. 2.4.-lhe 
 SxrS^^"^ cZToZy be used when the clause is mbot/ique, or when '^^.subjunctive is 
 n M. nu'd for bv ttie rules on subjunctives by attraction or quasi-attractton <p. 398 foil., 
 n 4 s f II) a- (?^^^mr^</^am navem cursum tenentem stium, cum tempests, e /p«r7nem 
 niins auan'i HI .a,temperem ? Plane. :il», iM—Ceter.ne Ciesaris virtflies popuhlres sunt. , 
 nlNl^nHrsi u tt^^^^^^^^^^ f'-ne se latibulis /^7«''^ atque omnia bella jure jren- 
 
 ii m X^^ (Subjunctive by quasi-attraction on account of the 
 
 );/■«- mbSuea"/d^^^^^^ '^'*^"^" ^^^^T'^ *^ '-'^'•f"VZ 
 
 ac.or^fitS to tM3 ndes p 402,Obs.3, and p. 408, /?. 90, as : Ex suS vi {rem asmmt) quum 
 
 ^^' 0«« % If the predicate of such a Qnum-clanse denotes an action which m'?^t be con- 
 
 ^ •//.. Tu V.',,f 94 Q^ — \n ill e aves nisi qmnn v reritnt, canere non solent f lb Di\. A 
 tatein eiguiflcari putant (when the pilots see dolphins, etc.). lb. Div. 2, .0, 14o.-Dum lego, 
 
64:6 
 
 TEMrORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 n?p(M)fior, Quum maui librum. a??entio omnif» olabitnr. 11». Tupc. 1, 11, 24. C omp. Cic. Or. 
 2 •^4. 1(»4 : 1. .-^.S. ir»T ; Verr. 2, 3, 81> ; Off. :<. 21. Siibnmctivcs in clau-cs of this kind occur 
 o'lily bv uitrHction, or when iluM-Imii*c' is siibobiKim-. a» : Placet i-itur tibi,Caio, qvian 
 res suinp-^erui iioii < oncessas, ex illis • flicere qiioii velis? Cic. Fin. 4, 18. 
 
 Obs 4 FurrnK predicates in indefinite Qunm-claupcs remain in the indicative, a con- 
 versidii into the correspomlin.,' tiubjnnctivc tense beini,' not atimissible. They are mostly 
 connected with imperative sentences, as: Imfurfi jiopulo potedtfifis aliqind : non 
 eafian'^ eiim lihertate, se<l in(evdtrl< ciipiditilte libertfltis, fy/zwrn tanlummodo potestjltem 
 pistandi feceris. lb. Hep. 2. 2S. .'■>1.— 'l^inc antem fellcem tu w^vj'iUtn (junin ix>tnis\n 
 publico vivere, qiivm le parietes tui tegeut, non oh^condmt. ben. Ep. 43.— Conip. Cic. 
 Prov. Cons. 1, 1. 
 
 Ob*» 5 If indefinite Quum-clause? are dependent on preterite prcdicatep, they always 
 dein.te repeated or habitual actioti, their principal predicate beini,' in \\\Mimi^rtert of C(»i- 
 tinqent action (p. SQ'.Hoil.K while the predicate of tie <-lauseis in \hv pliii)erject-uutic(iin-e 
 if the action must be comi)lete(l l>ft'<ne the principal action; else it is in the twjhrjtct 
 indiratir" • as: (ives, quimi pahim ejus aniiuli ad palinam amverterat ( - u'htn he 
 turned or when he 'had turned), a nullo videf/atur ; idem riirsii- ridefjotur rrmm in locum 
 annulum inVf-rterat. Cic. Off. 3, n, :W. See p. 3"», Obs. l,and p. 331, Kx. S-f.. Ccmip. tic 
 
 Flacc. 7. 1« : Orat. 32, 113 : Verr. 2. 5, 11 
 
 Cics. B. (i. 7, 22 ; Cic. Cat. 3, 7, IT. For the use of 
 
 the tiidniiHrth-e in iiuletinite Quiim-dauses by the writers of the Augustan and silver 
 a"e«! 8ee p 331, c -When the principil predicate deuoies hatnf, and the pr«'dirate of the 
 clliiiae belongs to the same tiin<', the .sufijunrtire is often used even in Cicen), as : 14 \ anus 
 dicee ,<nfefxit qinnn daiis t<^stibtis alii tamen cifnrentiir. Cic. Fin. 2, 19. bee the Jj.x. cited 
 p. 331, Obs. 6, No. b, and Brut. G2, 222 ; Or. H, 2.")*. 
 
 Rem. ;>.■). The predicales of pure tcmporul Q'uim-claiises referrinc: to 
 DEKiNiTh: TIME Jire ixciicnilly in the iiidirntirr if tiie time is conceived sis 
 a dcpinte point of iiine ; and cither in the indicative or in the subjunc- 
 tive if tiic lime is conceived as a jieriod or a i<p((ce of time. But tliere 
 are several exceptions to tiiese rules (see Obs. 2 foil). 
 
 Obs 1 Ml the distinctions in reirard to the mood of pure temporal Qiium-claus-s 
 depend 1) on the tense of the principal predicate, accordin;; as it is in a NoN-ri:KTKi;iTK 
 or in a pkktkiutk tense ; 2) on the (luestimi wliethcT the time of the (iuum-dause crmi- 
 cides with that of the princip il predicate, or whether it is aidtrwr to it. Hence tlie fol- 
 lowin ■' main distinciions must l)e made U .\ntkkiou Quitm-clai'sks dependent on non- 
 PRETKRiTKs; 2) CoiNciDiNcj Qui'M-CLArsKs dependent on non-i'HKTKkitks ; o) Antk- 
 Kiou QuuM-cLAUsES Uepemlcnt ou ruKTEUiTEs : 4) Coincidi.ng (iuuM-cLAUSEs depend- 
 ent on PKETEUITES. 
 
 Obs. 2. ANTEniou Qim^m-clauses dependent on xox-PRETEUiTEshave their prrdirates 
 either in \\m jH-rftct indicative, or in the per/'trt-y>ttjj>tnctic>\ wlitre it makes no dilb-rence 
 whether the time is conceive 1 as a jwinl of time, or as a space. ii*<: Sociks eiro no>tris 
 mare per hos annos clausum fuisse dicum, f/>ium exercitus vestri nuimiuam a Brundisu), 
 nisi hieme summjl transmiotrint (when your armies hare crossed etc)? <^iiad vos ab 
 exteris nationibus venlrent captos *?//era/-, (jt/itm lepjilti P. B. redempti funf/ Mercaton- 
 bus tutum mure n(m fuisse dicam, qmiui duodeeim secQres in pra'dOimm potestatem 
 j)€rvenennt?^\c.h.yi. 12, 33^ut :_Jiuid_e^o_^stiem^e_Hiconiin()(|unij/w/Y^^ 
 ~ * Here, however, do vot belonir the passajres by which the author of the Publ. Sch. (ir. 
 attempts to prove this usa<'c: ll Zennnem. ii>iinn Atlienis easem, andiel>am frequenter. 
 Cic N D 1 '^Jl The author of Publ. Sch. (Jr. explains the use of the siibjunctive by tlie 
 fact that Cicero was more than once in Athens. This is true, but in this passajre Cicero 
 refers to that time when, afier his defense of Boscius Amerinus, he liad proceeded lo 
 Athens for the sike of stiidvimr philosophy. We know that durinir thi- period lie also 
 attended the lectures of the Kpiciirean Zeno (Fin. 1, r>, Iti» ; but he did not hear liim 
 a<'aip, and the connection of tlu; passat,'e,(i noted above, distinctly shows that Cicero 
 referred to tliat time (mlv when he was stadiimq at Athens.— 2) Nos turn </«'/;/* maxiuie 
 con-ilio nostro snhveiilre eominani falfiti opurteret, in seniltum non vocabjlmnr. cic. 
 Phil. 5, 1. The author of P. Sch. Gr. renders : ' I was not summoned to attend th.- Senate 
 rtvn oj'i fH'ca<ion>t when mv advice was most needed'. Whoever has read the I'hilipines 
 must know that the ' Ao^' ' and the 'vocatxiniur' in this passape do rot reler iiMiivKiually 
 to Cicero, but to the whol^ Senate, and to one occasi',>n only, namely to tiiat tune ol 
 Antoniu-'s consulship in which for political reasons he did not call the Senate t^virether 
 Nor ci»/ld the r'a<sa<'e refer to Cicero individuallv, since the Senators were not summoned 
 individuallv.but hy^piddic call throu-;h the prieco. It was altoirether impossible to pre- 
 vent a Seiiatoi'fl coming into the Senate by 'not inviting him'. 
 
 QUUM-CLAUSES AND THEIR EQUIV.VLENTS. 
 
 G4:7 
 
 classis eacni consul P- I^;^P-nil"^^t;^ S^^^e^^^S^lT^^ 
 Photild 1 complain, when n fleet l\^!^^"'J'^'''^^^^ honestum sit. tnm rursus rfaa- 
 
 llud probo (1U0.1 qanm f<'['''' -^^^:;!^^^^^^ again say that etc.). lb 
 
 U etc. ; that, when y..u ^^'^/^''^ " 'JL^l .1/« ,7. m n.st nc-dod of indefinite length, iti 
 
 
 ^;^;:i^JWZ'S:^rlS'tSi^:^^^^ «urn. ^.«>.^»».-, re .am,!.. 
 r^drS,?™rchoice.im«.«,a,Jna„,^ 
 
 „ot wonder tchen (tj } Ivoufc.^ 'i'^'n^^tnStii^hulT^^^^ ita e.t lb. M«r. 2, 5). 
 
 this is so (meaning jj'f^, J »;,[«>• J^'^^^.^j'^.'^jea tM.e meaning of 'since , as; 
 
 Sometimes <l'»um-clauses wittia prestni i c^ ^^^^^ (since) 
 
 Quo.l vos quom faeere nony.o/^v ^,., aniquam >" ™/^;'y ^^JJi^ coincidiuL' Qnu 
 
 ?ou cannot do tins, y..u ^!:^,^^:J:^:^-^h}^^J^Z^ced.M^ 
 
 ',:;"./-'.";-" .7, '7;ih;.;';;;m-n.'s"S"tho'idl,atiJe after nu„c gumn, as : Quanto lac.l.us 
 Clu.4.0.-C.)mp.Cic.\err. 1,18 (|u.l^r 3. s.^. ^^^^^^^^^^ ^ „/^ iC ^,,^. Matter 
 
 condidil. Cic. Div. 1. l7.-io. •""!"' 'phii /4 11 —Sometimes Ouum-clauses which, 
 (= eut.nv^>re quo, f ./^J^f i;*^; .^V resent d ^^i^uaV^^^i^ciding^ .>ne time-point bv 
 et/ictly taken, «re «;»/^7W, arc rtprc^^^^^^^ •' . ., ^^^ji^atire instead of 
 
 giving t«) the predicate of »*'« Q'''' »f ''^"^^ '"^J" "' ^, '\ A £ . £-0 m. hercules. 7""'^ 
 
 all codices), is quoted wit li the /"'''^'V,,'^' ;.;'',;,," .leulioned before, thepredicate 
 
 l,v a pirfi-ct iiulicaine to < cn..lc;.a ';""■;*',. "J o,/J„ .rim" m i.. iPiaii'm rem. pater 
 tsse incii)ere(, ad exercilum venil. Cies. B. O. •., z. 
 
648 
 
 TEMrORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 * .^.77/^ ^c/' Bt.iptiv «Doikin"- U anterior to the predicate 'mm percusfiis'. But 
 cate 'dehVa e^t v j*/, '<^VJnh a, ih r^^ coinci.lent at the Hamc tiine-ix.int. to exprosp the 
 
 Pftn'm. iic.ur. *. 4». viii"u iiiin i\ /.. ),«p,. tho muior tv or the C Out . nai* the 
 
 V'4^'r Tmnirm -S^init m^lu i>i'^S^ (i,mm.d:u.se is in fact a /.^^ 
 
 Jc?1if ^r!^a, S|n. .;.^ 
 
 eipMl l>7<';:'^y.'V';>^r'jrU^..ce he M >;ct m^^ i./the above pas<ai?es inu.t^hc 
 
 ?et' , r' ,™, ,,l ";,^««- <im>m-cl.u„es r.f.rm.s 1,. Inno-,»,,,,!, «x Ob,. 1 L 
 
 ■ '^ J^rSiSiS? Sis i^^ 
 
 noii-hi.storical) htAie. '"^- ?'.''""'■ [^'X,;,^'"/;,,. ,iixtwjr<>e as- ()uod ^m/: o8 tuum v"«w* 
 viims eos honnnes »» c.m.One (. ic \ er^^^^ .,^ ^.,.,,„ .i,,i, 
 
 locabmlnr. H>-."-2/'2,.«.-He-.'uU s tu ^^^,".'7 ''?' .V_;^,^,, |i„c factHohtm semper turn 
 quam h donu consuh1l•l^.mansl>^et. ^ ; \V- ;; tVV .5 _k;^^^ »"„« a nos.ro CatOne 
 
 lu.mar, vel reprehendi ine,.ce ens none ^.^^a^^ .<^^,^^,^ ^P„„,. 
 
 ^^i^;^^;,;;s>v./ ..^...(i.. .-y be uj.d i^,Q---;--«,;::;:;rti;;^?r.;:<;;.e^ 
 
 the mea.un. 'while', '"'d the t.^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ Hir- 
 
 whicli is represented a.s fal in^ u^U/nn tht- h'»^, "^,; ^ ' "• /^^^,,^ .nl.iri stratum (>/vru.rf the 
 
 is;:.^;;rrc^:imSat^^ 
 
 ^"HJ^^ondMin7er^Qu,un.c.a.^^iU^ a^^^ are ^->;^ -^--;;-; 
 
 ir.^'iir„;;;v'-s"' .;;;; 's,^K:;i;'ar.!'katsi'e':?rThe%ne uotiou i, represented to 
 
 fall within the period of the other. 
 
 QUUM-CLAUSES AKD THEIR EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 649 
 
 DdThnm ct vchcmenter anq^bar quum viderem (while, i. e. since I saw) virnm talem non 
 in eadem foriana esse. lb. Marc. 1, 2.— (c) if qwon denotes ' as long as ; see p. 324, Obs. 2. 
 
 Ods G If Quum-clauBes coinciding in the time-jyeriod of the principal predicate (Obs 5) 
 are n<ed in histouicai. discourse (t. e. so that their time is the same as that which issmken 
 Of at that stageof the narrative), tlie imperfect subjunctive is far more, frequently used than 
 the imperfect indicative, as : Qunm circa Tarenium, consules ambo in bamnio essent, 
 jam famem CampSni sentmant. Liv. 2.5, Vi.-Ouvm tanta multittldo lapides ac tela cwje- 
 V vV/ in muroconsistendi j.otestaa erat nnllT. Oes. B. G. 2,<>.-§Mwm se hostes identi- 
 dem iii silvns recinerent, ac rnrsns ex silvis in nostros impetum /rtc^r«/i^ t«^mm lejriO- 
 
 essex qux^ venerant, castra mnnire ra>perunL lb. 2, 19.-But : 0«vm jam a/>7>ro/w«7^/a. 
 6.m/ Poris ad hortatiOnem nautflrum intent us erat. Liv.40,4.-In later Latimty, in 
 rlau-e« of this kind (both historical and non-historical), the subjunctive imperfect was ea;- 
 clZiveh, nsed. Thus to the followin- passa-e of Ter. Andr. 2,3, 13 « cam esse censes nunc 
 me atque olim (eram) quum dabam\ Doniius remarks 'Nos dicimus ^' quurn darem'' \ 
 
 Obs 7 If coincident Qunm-clauses refer to a fime-jxAnt (being represented as com- 
 nleteacts) while the pmicipal predicate denotes an action extending over a /^;7^^- 
 7^./• oc/ the predicate of the clause is in the jH-rfect indicative botl in historical 
 and ar4mcritativc discourse, as: Quum Oesar in Galliam Tenit, aherlns factiOms 
 princ^es erant yEdui, alterfus Sequani. Ca^s. B. G. C, 12. [Here the Quum-clause de- 
 
 otes a time several years before the time spoken of at that stajre of the narrative, 
 ad hence this part of the discourse is not historical in the above-mentioned sense, 
 Uumc^^^rocc.rriml in an historianl.-Eo7"^'m veni, pnetor quiescebat iratves immbula- 
 Z t ac \vrr 2. 4, 14. [This passage is historical, since the time of rera corresponds 
 w/ h ttie-encral time of the episodical narrative, althou-h not used by an historian].-- 
 ll-ec Cra«; T'S;/» edita am\o est, quatuor et tri-inta tum Aa/>?'k/^ annos, totidemq e 
 ann^s mihi nra;^/<T6fl<. Cic. Brut. 43, 101 (not historical).-Jusquod«anum??/wn Aselius 
 TmoS/^/Mnot historical). lb. VeVr. 2, 1, 41.-Tu, quum Qu^stor esfa^ius, etiain qui te 
 mim iiiani V dennt, ilium honOrem nomini mandabant tuo. lb. Pis 1, 2 (Here the clause 
 r""t ctly «'^''«^^^^^^^ *^ represented as virtually «oincident according to the principle 
 
 nuMi oned Obs. 4 .-Ambo reqnabant quum de eis tnumphatumest. Liy. 45, 39^-1 he 
 wfierrof the silver age, most always, use the subjunctive tmperject in clauses of this 
 kind as: Eftice ul idem status sit, quum exigis, qui /«i/I quum promttterem. Sen. Ben. 
 5 39 '(.where Cicero would say ' tum quum2»'oml<i'). 
 
 'obs 8 If coincident Quum-clauses refer to a «;;w-»mo<Z. while the principal pre^^icate 
 i^^^Xe^'^tiZ-point falling within that period, the predicate ot the Qunm-c ause is 
 .f//?r in Uie MPKRFECT indicative, or in the niPEKFECT subjunctive, while th? prm- 
 r ml nredica e L in the perfect (or in another preterite tense, according to the rules on 
 Z n-e of Tenio") as: Isto in -enere/wim^/y ipsi, qnvm am hi tiOnis nostra tempora 
 Xl:tulfbant C c P a c IS, 45.-Qnod. qUm res agetxltur, nemo in me dixit id totannis 
 {^>^t I? . nvcnn.s qu diceres Mb. Pliil. 2. 9. 22.-Bene apud ma Ores nostros tum quum 
 
 ^Zr\bat\xi^'iiv\xl^^^ principum filiis sex singulis Etrurue populis ra ^^-p- 
 
 Pie \^ rf 2 4 S -S/ m ort;e appropinquarent. editus ignisab Ilannibale e*^ Liv. 2c, 9. 
 
 r.p\ r>i'^m ab ho<tc/n< 1 ampliVs p issuum XII millibus a^,essef. ad eum legati 7-^pr/;u/.- 
 ;;? cS.^B. G 4 11 :-8o" in ep\stolaW style :(^.ym banc Jf'^^rP'f ±Vn ■ If 57 ' 
 tabellarii a vobis ven^runt. Cic. Qu.Fr. 3, 1, 17. Comp. Liv. 1,50; 10,30, .o 11 , 42,o7. 
 
 Ob« The two constructions, mentioned Obs. 8, are used ''^ ^l'!" f^''^} ™'^^^^^ 
 pened'at a t me-point of the period expressed by the Pn^^'M^al Pred'ca/e. ^J ^^" ^^^/^^«t 
 f he main fact while, when the period is conceived as the miu faa, t»'« P"";_iPf • «^" 
 {^,eTn;a,econ,eaC^,u..««,.^^^ 
 
 K"?"Vf,;S'«A?n"%.o°°BnUf^^^^^ 
 
650 
 
 TEMrORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 live, the predicate denoting the time-period hein*? in the imperfect, while the predicate 
 denotjiij^ tlie time-point i» in \he /lejfect. Tiie foriner i;* assi^'iud to Uie primipal tn'U- 
 tfiice. which nUsviyt' precedes the (.^uuin-clause, a.s : Jam projie trat ut in ^'um^nun ciivi 
 jutrum evaderent. (juurn tcrj^a hoptes dedere. Liv. 2. 65. Comp. tl:e Ex, p. 3:J4, Obs. 1, and 
 p. ;ii5. Ex. 1-4. Hence, whtiiever two propofitltms are piven, the one denotin<j a time- 
 period, the other dtnotin;z a time-point, there will be ttirte ways t)f conibininj: thtm into 
 a temporal sentence, acconlins: to tlie importance assiirned to the one. or to the otlier, or 
 to Ijoth of the predicates : at*: I'oytero die, horS fere sicunda. (jnum etiamtuin in lecto Cnis- 
 suts esset. et apud eum Sulpiciui* (.^deret, Antoninn anteni inamtAddret cum t'ottil in porticu, 
 repente Q. Catnlus» fcnex cum C. .Julio retdt. Cic. Or. 2,3, 12. This lenience is construed 
 accordinir to Ob.s. S, the predicate referring to a time-point heinp represented as the 
 main action. liv apj)lyiiig the construction of Obs. 7 (^'iw//i Caiulus vinit, Crassus in 
 lecto erat) \\c\\\\\ make the predicates denoting,' the time-period the kadin;,' actions. 
 But by applyinj: the construction of an apimsitive t^ttnm-clause (Crassus in lecto erat^ 
 quum Catnlus venit) we assign an equal importance to tx)i.h actions. Grammatically the 
 appositive Quum-clause must be considered a relative clause ( = quo ttinj^ire Catulus 
 venit), in which the relative has cinjidinatinr/ fi>rce. This accounts lor the absolute 
 necessity of the indicative mood in such clauses, and also lor the fact that not rarely two 
 asyndetTc principal sentences are used in pla< e of the ctmstruction with an appositive 
 (^uum-chiuse. See p. 3.'W, Obs. 4. The form of the appositive Quum-clause is not con- 
 lined to coincident C^uum-dauses (see Obs. 10). 
 
 Obs. 10. The form of an appositivk Qiii:m-clause is sometimes applied to sentences 
 in which the actions of the two propositions either both denote time-pornts, or both 
 time-i)eriods (Obs. 4 ; Obs. 5). In the former iiistaiue both predicates are placed in the 
 verftct indicative, and in the latter instance both predicates are iilaced in the imj^trftct 
 indicative ; as : Cadeftdtur virgis civis Itomftnns. qintm inter&a nullus gemitus auditbd- 
 iur. Cic. Verr. 2, 5, i\'i (ditierent Iroin ' qimm.. .aM</i/e/wr ').— Populus id lum tulit, et postea 
 regem flagitaie non de^titit. quttm jjrudentes illi principes novam interregtii ineundi 
 ratiOnem txcorjitavtrunt. lb. Ren. 2, 11. 23 [diHeient fiom ' Quvm excogitavCnmt (exco- 
 gitarent), populus non destitit* ; and from 'Quum jjopulns non d^sHtit, y\vo\i\\A\^- 
 vw\\l"\.—Conrietnuil senatus, iieque tameu satis s*'vei»' dccrerif, quum erupit (Catillna) 
 ex senatu triumphans gandio. lb. Mur. 25, 51 (difl'erent from * Quum erupit, con(jtmml\ 
 and from ' Quvfn ingemisc^ret, erupit). 
 
 Ons. 11. From the 'appositivk Qnum-clanse' must he distinguished the'pARKNTHKTiCAii 
 Quum-dause', which is sometimes added to sentence-, complete in themselves, as a 
 parenthetical remark in regard to some action that happened at the same time as the 
 I)rincipal predicate. Such Quum-clauses, likewise, have tiie nature of a relative coor- 
 dination {(plum = qvo temjwre), the predicate being g-Mierally in the indicaHre, but also 
 \viX\\e (itnjmfect) sufjjunclive ; as: Maxime Iloriensium i)robavi jno Messaia dicenttm, 
 qunmXw abliiisti (quo tempore, qua «KcasiOne. tu abluisii). Cic. lirut. 9«». 3.28.— Ad eum 
 postridie mane vadCbam. quum hiec acripsi. lb. Att.4. 10, 2.— Non ego te niodo hie ante 
 aulTs vidi adst are, r/w//m 7/f7^//yrtj? mi esse sanum sinciput ? IMaut. Men. 4, 2, '15.— A I). VI 
 Id. Maj., quum ha.< datxim litteras. ex I'ompejano p'-oficiscrbar. Cic. Att.5, 2. 1.— Memo- 
 ria tenCtis, C^tta et 'J'orquato consulibus, < omplQres in Capifolio res de cjpIo esse pi-rcus- 
 sa<, 7>/?/m et simulacra deGrum depulsa svrd et legum a-ia liqiufacta. lb. Cat. 3. S. 1!>. — 
 Eos quos nominavi, cum Attico nosiro frequenter audlvi, v"w//t inirarltur ille quidem 
 utrumque, Ph;edruraautemetiam amdret. lb. Fin. 1,5, IG. 
 
 Obs 12. Often a coincident Qunm-clause determines the time at which an action 
 occurred, by a predicate serving for desiirnating timf a^ svch. Such (^uum-clanses must 
 always be in the suf)Jun^tire imperfect, whether the time is conceived as a period, or as 
 a point ; as : ProximS nocte, j:im fere quum lux appropinqudrft, ad ilhid a'diflcium 
 servi Q. Fabii frequentes tvn?/T/n/. Cic. Tull.9, 21.— Ipsi comi)rehensi ad me, quvm jam 
 dihiresceret, deduruntur. lb. Cat. 3, 3. fi.— Illi, qnvm adresperasceret, occulte ad pontem 
 Mulvium pervenCrunt. lb. 3. 2, 5. -(;>w?/m jam in exitii annus esset, C^. Marcius absers 
 mairistratu abitflrus erat. Liv. .';•.», 23.— A. d. IV Id. Oct., quum adreyperasceret, expedlto 
 exercitu, ita noctii iter feci ut a. d. Ill Id. Oct., quum lucfsc^ret, in Amanum ascenderem. 
 Cic. Fam. 15, 4. 8. But if the time is indefinite in the sense of li. 34. the predicate must, 
 of course, be in the indicative, as: Quum ver esse caperut. dabat se laboribus. Cic. 
 Verr. 2, 5, 10.— To such clauses the form of the appositive Qiium-elause is fre(piently 
 applied to rejjresent the time as an item equally important as the statement itself. In 
 this construction the proposition containing the designation of time, takes the forni of 
 a principal sentence preceding (ahnost always in the imperfect iiulicaliv»-)- the action 
 whost! time is determined, taking the form of" an appositive (.^uum-clause with a predi- 
 cate in the perfect indicative, as: I*rima fere lux erat quum vigiles ad arma civdamare- 
 7w/nndiflrerent"frotn '(^niim prima lux esset. vigiles conclamavCrunt). Liv.41.2«).— Diei 
 baud ita multi intercesilrunt quum ex Leotillnis pra^bidium oranle» venlrunt. lb. 24, 29.^ 
 
 QUUM-CLAUSES AND THEIR EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 651 
 
 Nondum lu^at, quum Amon.scitum -/.Cic ^- 34.-Jam ver appetel^at quum Uanni^ 
 ^^n\ «v hibeniis inovit. Liv. 22, 1. Comp. Ln .dH, >U. 
 
 an ay>;«^im-. <^«;/;.r7«"^^^ f.,rm is used as a 
 
 expres.-ions by uhich the '^' f^^^. ^;** "\^,,.7u '\^^ «^ being of an importance equaling 
 
 circumlocution to represent the length "' ^J,^,!',*^"^; //„,, ^^ «.f tlie peri(.d would 
 
 that of the fact itself Without ^.^,^ "'^^^'4^^ S^^^^^ is. and 14. Thisc.r- 
 
 be expressed ]^y ^\^;:/}^Z"^^^^^^^^^^^ the time spoken of 
 
 cumlocution IS used 1) to express ineicnMu». j instance the predicate 
 
 corresp..n(ling to the «^^'"f^'^^^V^.^^^f^ P^^'^tvf ^ is represented as lasiiiig 
 
 „t the C|i.um-clause IS in the r«f «, ^^J. \^ V'^^L'' ^-f^^^^^^ Engliih jn-e sent- perfect, iu 
 
 during the P^^!;;>^ ' t»ie /.r..^/^^ te i.c- ^ .r nie^ ^^^. / ^^ ^^^^ 
 
 accc.rdaiice with the ule /^ 4- p. 2<M ar.m^m jam tertium et vigesmmm 
 
 tersans (Cic. t lace. 2.>) ' «r i"fj«^^" " ' , ^ ^ y^^^ tHginta sunt quumnx loro 
 
 regnat (Cic. L. M.3 ; see p. 235) , ?n\ ""y ^-^y* ..^^'^j-Vdl^ llere the con- 
 
 ver^aris^ and ' ^riniyAm tre^^^^^^^^^ „,„o., or per quos 
 
 junction quum has the force «f ^^^ ' ^.^^S^^^^^ ista med t«tir>ne versatur; It U 
 annos). Example^ : -^''^'^ •^''''/ ^^ ^^^" 7'. -v efS^^^ ( = Ista cau.sa octo annos in 
 
 eight years that this matter has been under consicitraiion i^ i.,l.\„,io « nroronsuli- 
 
 meditatiOne versatur). Ci 
 
 i>us et a i)ropr.etoiil)ii8 
 
 quadringlnti sunt quum »»>V?r^'! :!!:vi "le Ji" uNh^'l^i^^^croMsometimes) in the 
 
 lime sp..ken ol is in the ;>a.*Mhe pitdicate '^ ' " ' [ *^X^^ l^ „^,^ j^^.r patri- 
 
 ,Sr "a"".ru Id er am;^^deration ( = Ista causa octo annos m 
 ' J Clu 30%2-C///am fnulti anni sunt ^«7/m be) a a procons"^^ 
 ^«rfS Vi^ym:?«r> lb. Div.2,3ti.-Apud «ra^cos jam onn^Vn>pe 
 
 rject. and always in '^'i^^i!^ZA.i^T^rS7t ^^r ^^X'i^S ^ U 
 magistratus t<ihuiK)sqiie nulla cert, ninayj/jra^ rei.eatedly, or nev 
 
 -If the action of the Quuin-clause is re rc>^^^^^ jyeifect indie 
 
 1 Ned to express the length ot time eiapMu "./'^' " "'j;;"'" / 
 
 lug to abhinc with an .^^>>!^";\e or accusatt^^^^^^^^ -j^^.e 
 
 cnte is m the pei/ect indicative, the ^^V!7; , c «reordi. «r to i) 5-26 6 ; as : Nondum cen- 
 introduced by ex quo tempore, or Q^o,qudM>^ ,TiS r/'^^o ^^J de p^ repetundis a 
 
 tuni et dece.n annt 7'' , ^^^ ( = ^^'^,\' f^^^.'tenc?! witZt a ciix.^^ would be: 
 
 L. Pi>One lata \^:x. est. <-i^- ^*^- ^- j'- // f ^^"l^V'^^^ j^^ e^t -3) Sometimes this form is 
 Abhinc (miuu^) centuin et decttn aunts (annos) lata lex «.; i._^o;^ „„rf«;« ..vpnr i.« to take 
 
 cHiV^es'mentioned p. 553. Obs. 7, in coni.ectKm ^^l^"' P;-,5?,^vW23 
 "^^rererS^^nnn exJrcitui frumentum meilri ^f J^ff /^^^^^J^^^h A/iiW.. (see p. 487, 8), 
 ^riiese ouum-clauses .«^e ^ramnmtia 1> in the u^m^^^^^ «nteclasiical Ian- 
 
 althuu.'h tliey miist, logically, ^^^ ^«"^'^l f ,^ "^^^^^ made by Quum-clauses, 
 
 guage the circumlocutions !»c"^'oned ^o. 1 a id ^ arc ^^^^^^^^^^.^/^,,,^,/(b^i„g likewise, 
 
 feut often so that they are in he f^^;'"^ 'J'^i' '^^/J .^^^^^^ in this const ructii.n, 
 
 h.gically. Predicate-clauses) 1 he predicate of c^^^^^^^^^ ,^ ,^1^ ^,^ ^l^e 
 
 consists of the impersonal copula est tl»^^ 1 " V 'V "'i"" fi„,s Thif predicate 
 
 period b..ing added to it "> the.f.>rm c. an adverb^^ Jonst.uc 
 
 ,f the Ouum-dause is in the \f^dtcatire^\\\^i^^^y^G&^^n^^^^ , . ^^ domuin 
 Hons. \his indicative is in th": ;>m.../ m tin. ca^^^^^ 
 
 jam multos annos est quumpo^sideo ( = 3;'"l,"iHV,L"X 2, as : Hauddum 
 
 Mecraribushuc commigravit*). Plant. P^rs. 1,3, o7. 
 
 and periods of time, liui u is 'l^-^^V^^"'-^/;'**: ■■•7,,7r,:.' lacVion as"": Ha;c quum dixisset, 
 
 br li^i^Si: &?;5v^; n-^t-'-^TISCJlS^ 
 
 .ThonmhorofthcPnW.Soh.O.r.p. Zs, quote, the above passage in the to™, given 
 In Ihe parculhesis, which Plaulus tlid ml use. 
 
652 
 
 TEMrORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 Ariovistum ad occnpandnm VesontiOnem coiitondore. C:rs. B. G, 1,35(.— Ko quum Vfini^- 
 set, anima<lve?fif ui\ iiltvriim ripum iiiH<:iias cfiHo ci)j)i.is ho>lium. lb. 5, IS.— Ancii» Mar- 
 tius, qi/urn Latljios bello (levicLfget, Ofic'irit von in civitutcm. Cic Kt-p. 2. 18. 3^3.— Quorum 
 TTieiuoria juciiiida t^ane/'a/ quidti in t-ani iiuix-r in hcrniOn*' (luodain incidiff^^ihux. II). 
 Brut. 2, y.— The principal predicalc is nio.-t freciuently in the p-rff-cf, I'Ut it may be in any 
 I)reterite tense (historical present, imperfect, and pi i|)erfect), as : Dionysius qunni lanuia 
 Proserpinae Locri;* expilavisset, vavigdbat ISyracfitJas. Cic. N.D. 3, 34. — Ho.-tes, qinnn 
 ina<:jn;e mantis vo convtnioie/it. multitudirie naviiim d.territi, a littore dv^cesKerant. Cjcs. 
 B. G. 5, 9.— The use of a pi-UI'kkfkct indicativk in (iiiuin-claiises of \\i\^ kind is ante- 
 clas^ieal and rare, as : Qunrti inftllextrus id coii.<ilii capere. cur non dixti e.xtemplo 
 Paniphilo? Ter. Andr. 3, 2, 37. ISomeiimes however, in clashical pro>e. the phijurj^ct 
 indicative is used i) to represent an action a< cotittiti]>oran(()nx with a perio(l/o//o«i«f/ tho 
 act ion of the clause, i^enerally in connect ion with ///f/M= at a time aJUr),2i9,:^i\m t umquuvi 
 in Apia r"s mannas permiilti ami^v/v/'//. scimus Hoin;e, soiiitione impiMlita, lidem conci- 
 di^se. Cic. L.M.7, lU.— (^wwm ea ccnstcrtti/s nondnju train (at a time u/nn I had not 
 yet achieved those re>ults) qunr sunt liominum opinioniiius ainplissima, tamm ista vestra 
 iioinina numquani sum adniiratus. 11). Fam. 3. 7, 5. But even in this instance tlie plii- 
 perfi'Ct subjunctive is moie u*nal tlian the indicative, as : .Mque hoc tantum lucri coz/w/i- 
 tiir (historical present) dare tmn qinnn (at a time alter) aratores ex airris, spolulti decu- 
 manOruin \\\']\\rn<profiifjisse?it. Cic. Verr. 2. 3. 32.— 2) Sometimes u jduperfect indicative 
 is used for particular reasons in place of a ttubjiinctii-e if/ijxrt'ect, if the predicatf is repre- 
 sented as coinciding in time with an action past at the tune spoken of, a.sj IV inillia 
 hominum erant. mixti ex «>mni coHuviune exsnles. et r/in/vi in civitatibus sui~ sub le<;i- 
 l)us rixeranf, et postquam eos fortilna con;,'ltibaverat. per lairocinia ac rapTnam_/r>/<?- 
 ra/i/<?.s' vitam ( = qui tot'varerant vitim qiotm in civitatibus suis rinrfnt, et toler'dxint 
 vitam postqnam eos fortOna consul' >bjiverat). Liv.2«;. 40. If here the imperfect subjtinc- 
 tive rir^r^/zMiad been used, the action would be mistaken as Mill lasiinj: at the time 
 spoken of. since tht? principal i)re(licate has the form of a participle which does not 
 mark tin; time as pa4 A pluperfect sttt/ji/ncfire would rei)resent the time of ' rivere 'as 
 past in rcL^ard to ■ tolerantf.'t\—:i) (Juum-clnuses regularly take the pltiperf«'Ct indicative 
 when they depend on an imperfect, o\ continrjent action, as : QKnni vineie i)aullum j^fO- 
 cesserant, iijni aut lapidibus corrumpebantxr. Sall.Juj?. '.»2. See p. 3-.n, Obs. 1. 
 
 Obs. 15. Anterior (Juum-clauses have their predicates in tlie imperfect ftuf)jiinctire 1) if 
 
 )])tion of tne other plan). Cic. Verr. 2.2. 4.— Epamiiionda-. y 
 exatiim:iri se ri(A";vY. «y'/^v7ri^ snlvnsne esset clipeus. lb. F'in. 2. 30. — Kqniies, snb>idio 
 con flsi.f/w'/w post sele<j;ir)nes vidi'ent, j>r!rcipites hostis ('-'/frMZ/A C:es. B. G. 5. 17.— Quum 
 in mesl salflte custodifciidil tarn nuiltos viros boiios rid?rem, capilfiam Don mcdiocreni 
 voluptatem. Cic. Plane. 1, 1. Compare with : (^//?/m e Ciliciil decCdens Khodnm tv/'i^**"//?, 
 et e«) nuhi (le (^. Hortensii morte es.<<t ff//(7/'/7AJ, opinione omnium majArem aniino cepi 
 dolorem (where tin; predicates venifseni and ef<f<et aWttiim contain actions which had 
 reaped when the principal ;icti>n commenced). Cic. Brut. 1, 1.— 2» If both actions belonj» 
 t(> the fame transaction, the principal action beinp: represented as an immediate or neces- 
 sary consequence of tlie action of the clause, as : Non intirl>rine Stratonlcus, qninn quidaiu 
 Alabaiidnm deuni esse contlrmaret, Ilerciilem nt^qdret^ 'Kriro'. iuquil, • milii Alabandus, 
 til)i Hercules sit iratiis\ Cic. N. D. 3, r.>, 50. — C^'/'///i ex captlvis qmer'-ret C:esar, qmiin- 
 obrem Aiiovistus non decerljlret, lianc rejieriehat cansam. Cies. B. G. 1, 50.— Catuuis. 
 qniim vx \oh\i^ quivreret. .., cepit mairnam sme virtutis pnernium quum. ..dixistis etc.; 
 Wtien Catulus had asked you etc.. he received the reward for his virtue by your answer 
 etc. Cic. L. M.20, 5'.i.— 3)ir thenctionof a (^uiim-claiise is represented both iv^imfnediotely 
 precedinq the principal action in time, and as a 7-ea<on or inotire for the principal action, 
 as: Themistocles, quum in epulis recusaret lyram, habitue et-t'wHhwX'xur. Cic. Tiisc. 1.2. — 
 Demarilfus. quum audlref, doMnna'iOn<ni Cypseli contirmilri, dejTiqif patriam. lb. Kep. 2, 
 l'.>. 34. Compare with : (^'/«m ^'/^//.v>yw Antiochum \n <s\m\\i\A\'i,constituimus nt ambu- 
 lationem postmeridian im conficerC'mus ; (immediately) after heariuq t\ lecture, of .Vntio- 
 chns, we resolved to take an afternoon walk. lb. Kin. 5, 1. Such clauses pass over into 
 'atfi'Cted' (^Muui-clatises. denotintj cause without any reijird to time. See A'. 37.— For 
 the use of the perfect indicatire in (^num-clause> immediately piior in time to the prin- 
 cipal predicate, see Obs. 4.— For the ditlVrencc of 'vbi (at, j)ostquam) I'idi'' from * quum 
 viderem', and 'quum vidlssem ' see li. 43. 
 
 ()Rs. in. The form of an appositivk QtruM-ci.ArsE is ai)plied to the anterior temporal 
 relation in the same manner, and for th<' samereas(»ns a> to coincidini: time (Obs. 9. 12). 
 In this instance the proposition d»Miotin<r anterior time fakes the form of a pritwipal sen- 
 teucc with a predicate iu the pluperfect, while the Quum-clause, with its i)redicatc iu iho 
 
 QOTM-CIAUSES AND THEIK EQCIYATEKTS. 
 
 653 
 
 . ,- „„ demote. n.i.<,'.e.t -imc Vin.' '^^fZ^t-^^^'i^S^^^^^ 
 
 mlcce^s on in 1 accusant L-.Cotiam (U luei ^gi^ience contains 
 
 I^umaniiamque '*' '^^*:.^^";^^_rrinj ^jv,ne form is used it ibc l»"*'/.'*"*' ,^ ,.« • Vix annus 
 
 repiiiled action, as . ,,^^ uo 
 atque acrms iuslare. ball. Jug. 9». 
 
 o Attributive QruM-CLACSES. 
 
 inVr lo \he rules on the mcod ot /^^^^''^^;;/;'^^^^'^,',, , ^ ^as a time) generally 
 
 .. 1 The exD.c-sions tempus est, ^«^'"/^/'/''^^/'nfr^,'' 'ccordin- to the rules m regard 
 
 ^^'"'- Vb Jsub uK>^ in ihei/ dependent Q"",'?:^''^ ^f ''^^''Xy rer^./w. quum rura c^Je- 
 
 rcquirethchunjumi . f ^ ^xv., p. 5ol fo I.), ^- ■f^'"- T^MPn^^ ff^wm mihi 
 
 to the analo-ou. ^' '"^If; ^J^^^ V«/ven"^ Varr. K. K- 3, l--^ ' f; V-fJguodsi fuit tempus 
 
 lb. Brut. 2, •^•-^/*^. V' .7, ^';. e Mil. 2(i -But the indicative / f ^J^^' " _yj4a potentially or 
 
 cate (acco.-< ill? m K; ?'■ 'j^;,,,,;; «so vafi.um (llie.< ay <" ."'"^'-f, ,15 t™ 51.0"! V""^ 
 clc-iinii* rfif""!"; '",V ","5 20 _N-onnnlU elia.n 1 lum <;.•«,'' "fh.V'day on «ftioS, a.id 
 wrteat loisur.-!. <-ic. »■.->. -^;^ vict.iriam P. 11. ''""'"■ J' '',S(urttn«»imo rei- 
 ,11« eadcm U.Sna. ^:=^\r^ :i-.'iVr,;|.a>.iensi« .l>'g»"» J""?';"^* ,*, n , civi un, dv-Mlrent 
 hica'i'fomi). I"-^'^"- 1',, • ;,,.i Sill a> in Iia am maxinii "-"^V,, r, .\„,,5ecOtus. ouam 
 
654: 
 
 TEMrORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 attribute todies). Tb. Cln. 20.72. Comp. Cic.Or. 1, 11 : Sost. 7, 15 ; Pis. 22.52; Plane. 
 41, «J*» ; ib. 42, 101 ; Rab. Post. 17, 47 ; Att. 12, 18, 1 ; Ofl". 1, 10. 81.— Sometim.s the noun 
 (enipwi as goveriiini^ no m of a (^luiin-clause must be ftitppHetl, as: Kenovabiltur j^^ta 
 militia ( = militia qn:e fuit eo tempore) quxin iste a foro abdQci xollbaf. Cic. Xvrv. 2, 5 i;i. 
 Sometimes (rarely) ijunni has the ineauiiif? of an ordinary relativf placed in tiie ablative 
 ol means : Pneceps vestra lei:atio fuit qunni Ilannibalem dciiosct-bdtis { = legatio qua de- 
 poscebatisi, referring to an embassy 8<'nt at a former time). Liv. 21, 18. 
 
 B. AFFECTED QUUM-CLAUSES. 
 
 Jlern. 37. AfTected Qnnm-claiiscs (^ GIO) are either modal, causal, adver- 
 safice, or coordinating. ]\Iou.\l Qiuim-chiuses are lused to represent the re- 
 lation of instrumentalitif (Obs. 1, No. 1), and some of the looser relations 
 oi coincide lit action (Oijs. 1, No. 2, and Obs. 2), under Wia form of a tem- 
 poral clause of coincident timk. Their predicates partly are placed in the 
 8 ubjunctice, and partly in the indicative. 
 
 Obs. 1. The 3tTB.juNCTivB is used in modal Ouum-clanse.s of the following relations : 
 1) If the clause has the force of an ablative of means and iNSTmrMKNTAHTV (p. 177), 
 as : Me ip-'um quondam ille decOpit. quinn et civis bonus et optimi cujusi^ie firmus ami- 
 cus riderlltir ; He deceived me 7vhen he seemed to me a <;ood citizen etc.; i. e. h]f making 
 vieheliecH that he was etc. Cic. C:el. (>, 14.— Soiebam dimitterea me 8c:evolam qmnn itA 
 ei die rein, me velle esse ineptum ; I dismissed him by telling him that I wished to make 
 nonsense. II). Or. 1,24. — (^ui Ciesarem, mitem hominem et a cjede «bhorrenlem. Ki^pe 
 increpuit, s;ppe accus-lvit, «/'/vm affirmdret illnin numquam. dum h:ec * natio' viveret. 
 Pine cura finQruin ; Wiio in-^tigat'-'d (upbraided) C.-esar f»y axuerting tliat he never would 
 be without care as long as this tribe was living. Ib. Sest. <».'J, 132.— (^ libus quotidie meam 
 potentiam invidiOse cnminaljiltur. qunm dice ret ^vxx^Wwn non quod sentfret. sed quod cl'O 
 vellem decernere ; He insidiously incriminated my influence oy saying etc. Ib. Mil. 5, 12. 
 — Ita «?'/'/m maximis eimi rebus /i/<f/v7/rj?, perparvam amicitiie culpain relinquGbas ; by 
 relieving him from the most important charL'es, you left a very trilling ofTence against 
 friendship. Ib. DcJ. 8, 10.~2) If t lie clause ha» the force of an acckssoky pkedicatb 
 (p. 2^15, § 2.V)), denoting the inner nniiy of ditlerent actions, quum with its jjredicate 
 being «generally rendered by a participle, as: Nobis quum ca?pi8set Curio rospondCre, 
 subito assedit. q>tt/m sibi venCnis ereptam memoriam «liceret ( = riicens sibi ereptam 
 e.sse); Curio suddenly took his seat, xaying tiiat he had lost his memory by witchcraft. 
 Cic. Orat. 37, 12!>.— Iter in Ciliciam facere institui, qmaa hac opinione e Cap|)adocia 
 di^cedereni ut regena mens advent us insidiis libcrarit ; I began my journey etc., leaving 
 Cappadocia with the convicti(m that etc. Ib. Fam. 15, 2, 8.— Iijitn'r in Syria imperatOre 
 illo nihil aliud actum est nisi pactiOnes pecuniilrum cum tyrantiis... , quum palam 
 populi Ronulni imperiTtor, instructo exerciiu, non ad laudeiii luilites korlaretur. sed 
 omnia sibi empta esse clamdret. Ib. Prov. Cons. 8, 5.— Ab eOdem homine vetiis ilia mairi- 
 gtra pudOris, censtlra, sublflta est, quutn in interim verl)o numquam signijicdri^ penten- 
 tiam tuam. Ib. Pis. 4, 9.— Here belong the (iuum-claiises connected with audlre, and 
 eomerimes with vid?rt {con,tpirere) in place of a, participle (p. 2rj;i,()Bs. 2), as: L. Flaccum 
 ego nutnvi quum dictret, Cieciiiumexissc ( r^ autl'ivi Flai'cnm <lv:entein, I heard him say). 
 Cic. Div. 1, 4»i. — S;epe ex socero meo a'/(/7/i qunm \» dicer-'t (socertim meuin dicenterii), 
 Laelium semper fcn^ cum ScipiOne solitum rusticilri. Ib. Or. 2.«i.— Is numquam est con- 
 gpfcfus quum ven'iret { = veniens) : He has never been seen coming. Ib. Sest. 59. Comp. 
 Cic. Or. 2, :W: 2, :n ; Pam. .3, 7 ; Fin. 5, 11».— The same construction is sometimes used 
 after meminisse, but in this instance the indv'aUve is used, as: .V>miin quum mihi desi- 
 pere ridebnre quod etc. Cic. Fam. 7. 2H. 1. But here the Quuin-clause may be cousidered 
 as a temjioral clause ( = Memini temp'>ris quum etc.). 
 
 Obs. 2. The indicativr is used if the same action which is expressed by the Quum- 
 clanse is represented in tlie principal seiitiMicc; according to its sii,'nirtcance" and imtxirt 
 (see p. .33!), li. f»9). TIn'se clause-» express that relation of 'coincident action'' winch 
 may also b(! expressed by a g^rundial ablative (as : Frafrcm laudando suflVagSris tibi. 
 Cic. Le/. 1. 1), or by in with a gTundial at)lafive (p. 194. § 540, 3), being rendered eitlier 
 by participial eonstructiotis with 'in ' or '■b>/\ or by '■ wheii\ ' t/i a^ much as"' etc , as: 
 Nee plus .■Xlricilnus in excidf-nd'i Nuniantiil re>publica> profuit, quun efidem tempore 
 T*. NasTca quum Ti. C.racchtim infevTtnit ( = in intetimendo (iracclio). Cic. OtV. 1. 22. 
 The^e r au-esnre di-tin.'uished from temporal Quum-claxutes by iht; fact that in tiie latter 
 tw-» diprent action- are repre-ented to coincide in time, while hen? the f>ame action is 
 represented in two different aspects. They arc also dibliuguislied from the (^uum-clausesi 
 
 QL'UM-CIAUSES ASD THEIR EQUIYAUINTS. 
 
 655 
 
 onted as the instmnunt for an 
 
 />/<>v as the principal predicau» U. A. 19— N»^* ^^^T *^^ whpn I mentiou myself, I 
 your Hlence), n.tlla esse co^^ced^-^^ K ^^^^^^^ ^'fV.rl Ztendl qualis tu f.teris 
 
 ;tion, without the mea "' --; 
 
 icnuoncu vy^.- -, :^„,,„,.piauses (leii^ii"''^ iuy..--j . .«hich moreover, tias lue ^u//<o 
 
 Mnixd^d puriiose. ^i'»" V *^^ "V.^dicate in the indicatne, wm^"'." ^we, quum laces (by 
 
 Lnialit/, h-ve '-^.'^^'J^: '^^j;; ras?C«ncedo tibi .ut ^^^,fi«,^;^/nuSXor ^uvm bella 
 
 ,..,.v as the principal predicau» U. A. 19.— Nisi for ecc«M77e u ^j ^ myself, I 
 
 ?our Hlence), n.tlla esse co^^ced^-^^ K ^^^^^^^ ^'fV.rl Ztendl qualis tu f.ieri. 
 
 «on geiv lb. >*mi. i\. l!?--//""' 01 110 -Quod quum ?<=/"^'^f"?t'':,!f, S gratis esse Oppi 
 
 consul futQrus. I^- ^"*- '; 11;^ /7 132-110 ii^am nun ^m"^^^^ et subagreste 
 
 anicumc..n(le.nnrinun. Ib-C^lu^-^^^^^^^^^ ^^^.^^^ civitStem novum quou_ ^_^^^^ ^ 
 
 Vam. 3, 10, 2. -Komulu>' ad tifma^^ virgines rmJ^^'H'^^ rn^l' the Ex. p. 2:59. 240. and 
 
 tSm Uid <J-'r^^}^'ri ^>0 iKd'Ufib 2, 3, 57 ; ib 'f: f' ^^^, j^ ^u'sed onl^ if the clause 
 Cic.Otr. 1. ;'^!?\ V'Viv'Vubj.inctive. in ^l^^^^^^.^o^^t.am periculOsa <iu:^fUotempte- 
 
 ^^l^ ^:^^^^^^^-^^^^^^ meaning, tlte cla.se 
 
 Rem 38 U qnnm ^^^"'^«^^^ ''*"*'' 'onrcHiises (p. 506, B. 21, Obs. 2). 
 
 tak^ *he SU JuNCTlVK, the -^-^l^^'^:^^^^^^ time ten^f^^^ 
 Ons. 1. Q""--clauses clenotmg cAti^- my^^ ^^^''iZ^^S^.i^l^^^^ ^T'^ 
 
 KotnionMneterite predicate.. -^^^^ .^,t^„ce 
 
 p'r„7, (jBS. 5), as V\f::y,n?^iJistsire^used without, ^ej-;^ ^ to *itne^^^ ^^^^^^ 
 ^ But often cansal Quuiivc a K.8 » j^^^ ..^^ r;?vvou should not pick up an 
 
 they always take the^uj ""^*/;*;- "; V ^ „f ,uch a dignity ^^e amicis insi(iiarum et 
 pere maKdictum ex tm>;^> • ^J^'^Jj^ j,i,,,. 6, 13. - Qu»m ^ ita ^P^ ^^'^\_Q„yrn amiciti^ 
 
 Ob- 2 Frequently causal 9«^^ is co ^^ because );«r ^.] " ^These expres- 
 
 l\ou^ always require J f f''^ f f/, ,, audent. Cic.L.M.,5.;^^^^^^^ J^^^^ rescrip^ero 
 
 vrcvsertim vos alium mt-senji-s i^,.^^^ ^^^,^^^^ ^.^m wmojecturu.^ stcji^^ r>^^ Ou.Fr.3, 1,4.- 
 lam oratir"'"" rescriber 
 (the more 
 
 ^uod^unniodo rft^if/'Vm'/^s: l^>- AnV^f^-^fllM^rnrcommoda valetaao qu. 
 
 inc j'uj ' - r.v.rri,,,» the subinncti 
 
 ,™> require t^":^^""». «Sin, «c. L. M., 5. '.J->^J«- ,-"„«. reScrlp.ero 
 m vos alium rnisentis, ""/.'J' „j ^.^n nemo led uru^^ "^JLih Ou Fr.3, 1.4.— 
 ,,,„ ,„„;ronem ro^cribere 7>r<*v^r/^^^^^^ ,, -,, I doj^^t rep )• I^- Q;-/^^^ 
 
 BCIi.>n.if Ihcpreilicile a;""";-,, l^, this theory the:e is inc nil' they refer lo 
 
 Curio (faciCbat 9*/"jnu|uf 
 
 bat * Vincat utdiiaa '. Cic. on. o. ^^- 
 
G56 
 
 TEMrOR.VL CI^VUSES. 
 
 Item. 'Sd. Adversative (concessive) Qmini-clanscs (i. e. those express- 
 ing a reason lor the contrary of what is stated in tiie principal sentence) 
 require their predicates to be in the subjunctive, the same as the analo- 
 gous Qui-clauses (p. 507, Ous. 4). 
 
 Ob3. Most jrenonilly adversative Qnum-clansep arc bofh temporal arid oonceppive, 
 whereby they are distingniphcd from the r<»nces»sive clauses iutnyduccd hy qumnqtiam, 
 etn etc, a»: L. IJrutus, tjwwi prir,l/i/fi essef, totam rempiil)licam piietimiit: L. brutiis 
 upheld tlie whole State when and ulilwnqh he was a private person. Cic. Kep. 2, 25, 47 (L. 
 Brutus was a private person at tlie time spoken of; this was a reason that he should 
 not have the ai)!lity to uphold the whole State; neverthdosn he did so). Ileuce Uuum- 
 clauses of this kind comprise three relations : 1) a temporal ; 2) a causal ; .'^) an adver- 
 sative. Thus : Eos scnStus non censuit redimendos, quiin». id parv-l pecuniil fieri jxiast^t. 
 Cic.Otr. 3. ;^2.— Sacerdotium, qituvi non ditlicillime consequi ponstm (t. g. at a certain 
 time m the mind of the author), non apix-tlvi. lb. Fam. 15, 4,3.— Ipse Cicero, quujn 
 tenuissimil valetudine esset (at the time spoken of, and although), ne nocturnum quidem 
 81 bi tempus ad quiCtem relinquCbat. C:es. B. G. 5,40.— Itaque. qt/nm me aml<i hortarenfitr 
 lit causasa_'«'re desistereui, quodvis potius p«'riculum mihi adeundum quam a spenlfS 
 dicendi ,i,doriiT discedemium puiavi. Cic. Brut. «H, 314.— Patrem meum, quuf/i proscriptus 
 vnue.'Oief, juj,'uiastis. lb. K. A. 11, 32. Comp. Cic. Brut. 31, lO-.t; !>.-). .325.— Adv.-r.sativet^uum- 
 clausfs which are at the same time temi)oraI, are not rarely found with their predicates 
 lu the indicative, the same as ihe correspondin<r (^ui-clauses, as; O beatos illos, qui, 
 «7'/«m adesse ipsis propter vim armorum nou Uclbat, udtrunt ta/nen et in medullis p'opuli 
 JtonuTni A<f7v7></«('.' Cic. I'hil. 1.15, ;^>. 
 
 But frequently such (imim-clauses are nsed without any reference to a partirnlartime, 
 coutaiuini^oiily two of the above-mentioned elements, namely, the causal and adversa- 
 tive relations. They are «xeiierally used to desijjiiate qualilies of the subject, the coex- 
 istence of which with the principal predicate, is contrarv to experience or to reason, 
 as: Itaque, qnnm ei nee officium d>-esset, et Jiagrdret stuciio dicendi. perpaucje ad eum 
 causje (ielerc'bantur. Cie. Brut, fil, 22<>.— Atticus. qnnm esset peciiniGsus, nemo illo minus 
 fiiit ema.\-. minus u>dilic:ltor. Ncp. Att. 1.3.— Bhocion fuit perpetuo pauper, qnnm divitis- 
 simus esse jmnet. lb. Bhoc. 1.— Tanjuinius S'.iperbus inte<;ra mente non erat, et, qnnm 
 imtueret ipse pa'nain sreleris sui summam, nietui se volehat. Cic. Bej). 2. 25. — Druentia, 
 Alpliius amiiis, qnujn aqua^ vim rehat inj^entem, non tamen navium patiens est. Liv. 2li 
 31. Comp. Cic. Brut. 7, 2ti.— For the use ol /f//.vf,s' in adversative Qunm-clanses see p. 42<j. 
 
 Concessive Quum-clauf^es pass over into coimlinafe Quum-clauses. when the causal 
 relation is more or less fading away till it entirely disappears, af : Timothens ConOnis 
 filius qnum belli laude non iiiferior///i.vw/ quam pater, ad eam laudem doctrlme et in-^enii 
 trlonam adjecit (Timotheus, ?rA;/^ he had not been inferior to his father, added to this 
 quality distinction in etc. ; or ' Timotlieus was not inferior to his father in war, bnt he 
 added etc'). Cic, Ott'. 1, .32.— Ilorum auctoritas maxiine florebat quod, c/^/?///i honr.re lonj^e 
 antecellerent ceteris, voluptatibus erant viferidres, nee pecuniis lerme superiores. lb. 
 Hep. 2, 34. — Sum Cn. Pompeji virtiltem admiratus quod, qnnm ijj.se ceteris omnibus 
 e.-^set anteldtus, ampliOrem houOreiu alteri tiibuil/at quam ipse erat assecQtus, lb. Pro v. 
 Cons. 11.27. 
 
 Iie)n. 40. Coordin.\te Quum-clauses are either adcersatice, or compar- 
 ative. The former require the mbjunctive, while the latter (OiJS. 2) have 
 their predicates either in the indicative, or in the subjunctive. 
 
 Obs. 1. Adveksative coordinate Quum-dauscs are equivalent to an adversative 
 coordination by anfem or rero. beiiii? distiiij,'uished from the odi>rsatire sufxjnlinate 
 (^uum-clauses (li. 39) by the lack of a causal relation. The Quiim-clause jrenerally fol- 
 lows (but may also precede) the principal sentence, beinjj rendered by an Enirlish clause 
 with * whert^as ' or ' while '. The two propositions denote oppaHte qnalUies or actions of 
 diferent snttjects, the predicate of the (iuiim-claiise bein<r alivays in the subjunctive, as: 
 Socratis inizeiiium i.iiimortalirjUi scri|)ti-« suis Plato tradidit, y?^//m ip^e litteram Socrates 
 nullain rdiquiHi^tt. Cic. Or. 3, l(i. W. — Eorum (UomaiiOrum) erat V millia numerus, quum 
 ipsi (Germaiii) non amplius octimzentos equites ha/jtnnt. Cie^. B. G. 4, 11— Ante id tem- 
 pus nemo aut miles aut eques a C:esare ad PompCjum transierar, qnnm ptene quotidie a 
 PompSjoadCiesarem irrofngerent. lb. B. C.3,«l.— Solus homo ex tot aniniHinium •reiie- 
 nbus atqne natflris jjurticeps est ratiOnis et co<,'itatioiii8, qnuin cetera sint omnia expertia. 
 Cic. Lei;. 1, 7. Comp. for preceding adversative Quuin-clauses the passage Cic. Ac. Po. 1, 
 lU, oo. 3,7. 
 
 Obs. 2. Sentences with comparative Quuk-CLAUSES are used as. one of the forms of 
 COORDINATION, to reprcscut two coordinate propositions referring to the same logical 
 
 QUUM 
 
 -CLAUSES A.ND THEIR EQUIY.U.ENTS. 
 
 657 
 
 , * «a iViia similarity or dipsinnlanty 
 ^« similar or dissimilar features, Ihi^ ^imu'» virtutibu^ ornatus 
 «uhiect as Mvins ef>mc ^^^^^1^1.]!; %rm, as: Ciajus ?"""''/'^^h'rned with all virtues, 
 S^^\\uini:aed by j^co.;^' ^^-^^f^ «^IV/^^lSlil^oUi ^Sue!' represent the 
 essel. iinii ea P'"'*^*-'.^' '^,{ •, ,1 at quality that etc . » *^'*:^'^\7" urincipal sentence refer- 
 «o he was di.tingui^hed in ; "MV/Vmusewo-tby q"«^'t'*^ViLnJe The general lorm for 
 tu iect as the P*'-^^^^"^*:**''''^ coniaine'» in the ^"^'^V^^^^T,^,- ,,ie bV ««• • >ic ^^^a) ', 
 r 1 u to a particular qua lit • ^.- ^J^^^ie stnctly ^^^^l^^^^i'v\^ p<.nCbant, ita 
 couM.arativej.eriodsof thi. l^nui ^^^^^.^ l^^"^^"^^';? a.cer tht "rm of a comparalive 
 
 feoi^:;!^^^""-"^^ 
 
 sint in philosophia „rav. /nrota«i«) contains a 
 
 ^^:^s^ 3 ^.^^lirative Qnnm-clauscs a^useO: . U ^^^y^-^^ 
 rNivEUSAi. th!.. HP^t^freXn -^.fded t^ the tumoj the aj.odo. ;^2) jf^^t^^^P ^ 
 cipue, maxinie, vero f fjj .J ^."^''.'inie the ap«.dosis ^^'^^J^^.^'^^%r eater intensity ; 3 to 
 is in tlie relation ol «^.*«*/,"l. 'uodosis being represented as oij// _ , .^,^ besides, 
 
 The MCKiD iif tlw *"":^ " ''i^, Km\wrA ^imim-.lai.fc» ^"' ' ;'^^',„a<ie, ilie choice of 
 
 tl>u general rules oinl o '",''", '!'''ri„<l« and time-P">""„'^"""° '," i„ the nl,.pnfect, in 
 *JSna ,a.a..M..cl>.m he -cn ..mc ,e^^^ 
 
 
 
 cate of the '^}}'^^^^^ ( ofe sual i han^l^lllliill^l!^ V-r:^^^^;^^^^^^^:^^^'^^ '" 
 
 these clauses. KiiuNKU '^ay^. Tln^^^^^^^^^^^^^ P^"'»^*'*-^" ,, Lf.^'Thich is ext.einely se - 
 
 ami if thenpodusisisa c n^tquc c .^^^^^^^^ ^""T'i'.o I can 'e a '1 vet botlc moods 
 
 denote ca^/^e, t. ey iall "^\ -V ^ "mi-clunses do ''f^^,,^'^'"*''' .f,"": in whi6h the apodoMs 
 
 om the case. Generallv ^"•^'' X ""I comparative Q»"i"f ^'V't>i L' .venu.'.-MEiKiNtt 
 
 reiisidinthem in^^lf^Tut'^sis- we l.a?e not yet ^"^.f V^^\\'" m tl « we may, very 
 
 fl.,vs that thi- siibjiincti%e 18 )^ ^" .^,1,0 clauses by vhile \"^ f "^ ^. -'Madvig says : 
 freque.iily. introduce ^"^'^^.^ 'l^P' .^: -, ab..ut as of.cn as ^^^^^'''^^'^^^^^f cmnparison' (ac- 
 
 ,oir should >-^'a">i-^'.the s J ctn^ j^^jj,^, '''^P'^'^'hI^ dui m by one solitary pas- 
 eral principle, asseringlia^^^^^^^^ ^^,,^,1 ^^^'^'.V''' .1 /S tamen eOrnm.audi- 
 
 the subiunctive. He »''"''^f„;\';, ', ; .ymnasia phil'>^^;P''' '^^'^^Knt be subjunctive in 
 p fre: lioc ipso ten,pore '/""''' .*;;„V?„ maU.nt. Cic. ^J-.J: ^..^f ! ' '^^or can we, even 
 -^. discum aua^re q;.nn^l>U;^- 
 
 ejM'e: ll«>c ipso iv-'i'"'- V , V ,,,„ inaiuui. '-'V ^Cou "n«« \ j^or can we, even 
 
 Vvhich we oppose the follow ini, P*; ., .. -„^iuus est ^r^'^'^^'^H <' t 1 2 —Some gram- 
 ^^'"^" ...;/J ...,«/ in.l L'ua. tnni nUiii ,"""" ,..,..,.„ „n,,r,ri,r. Cic. best, i,^- . 
 
 niarians give the iuK.*naiii ^ .1,.. ivuiow 
 
 't r'ame'-p.-edicau-, ":'y{"iS;;;„t,'emen.iu° W«- <;'^^ Fj™,'! f ^^f 'am 't optali.sima 
 
G58 
 
 TEMTORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 EXAMPLKS.— 1. T?ELATION OF A UNIVERSAL TO A PARTIcri.AR. (a) NON-mETEniTEB : 
 
 Q'/i/T/i st-mper tiiCii mmiicipcs» mcos constilvU ''"»* li'<^' auiiiis» pru'cipiic ad incain ciiram 
 jhrlinet ; A^ I am al\vay< wont to Io«)k after the interests of my townsmen, w heloiijja 
 tliis year particularly to my care. Cic. Fam. 13, 11, 3.— (^'/?/wt te ■'■e//i/)er niaxinie Uileji, 
 titf/i fratrum tuOruni sinpfiililtis j)ictas nullum nie pafifar officii erira te niunus ])r;i'ter- 
 mittere. Ih. fi, 14. — Sl'Bjinctivks : (^/////7/* in omnibus caiisis «jravioribus initio dic^'udi 
 comnioveri fO^eam v»'lie:iientius, /?///; in haccausjl ita nieniiilta perturliant ut etc. Ih. Dej. 
 1, 1. (Coinpire the passages with subjunctives in the foi>t-nttte p. (i57.)— (/y) Pi£ETEUitks : 
 Sex. Koscius. fjifu/n omni temixire iiobiliifitis fautoryV/itSN«=/, t>/m hoc tumu!tu proximo pr:e- 
 terceteros in eil vicinitilte earn partem cans inKiuerfcVVnd/'. Cic. I?. A. fi. — Idque,v'/ '///*. per 
 pe dijinus piifantur, ti/m auctontale et jiratifl I.uculli ab Tleiacl» iisiiuis impetrdvif. II). 
 Arcli. 4.— (^'///msjepe antea fortuiijlioseos Inunines^'/^/^vTy^//» (jui. . .traiKiuillitJltem vit:e 
 eecflti sunt, t"in vert) In his MiirCna' perictili!!'iiu.^</7y/ animo afftdut^wx eic. lb. ^Mur. 27. .V). 
 . — Ex eo qunrn ab ineunte letilte bene npefovi^^f-in, turn pnecU'ire existimjlre c(X]A eximiisi 
 judiciis, fju;e de eo feceras, coiruiiis. lb. Fam. 13, 16, \. — Quttm omnia judicia vx iinpro- 
 bOrum iiijuriil nafa in/nt ( = are born ; owe their orij^in ; ^nafa' havin-j^ the force of a 
 pn'dicate-adjective with a pre-entt, /'//M hoc judicium panels iiisce annis propter bomi- 
 luim nimiani licentiam con>titiltum est. II). Tiill. 4, H.— Diciinus. C. Verreni. ^//////< niulta 
 in deos homine.'^que nefatie/fce?^/. fi/vi practerea, quadringenties scsterliuiu ex Siciliil 
 contra le<:es ahstnlisse. lb. Verr. 1, IS, SH. 
 
 •2. ItELATION OP A POSITIVK TO A COMPARATIVE OR St'PERLATIVE : QlH/T/l OTTinibU» 
 
 me virtntibus allectum esse e>/pio. tuin nihil est (jiiod maiim quain me ef cs-e craiinn ct 
 vidGri. Cic. I'hmc. 3:i, 80. — Cj/'/'/m omnium rerum simuiaiio f=v/ ritiosd. linn amicitiie re- 
 puirnat mr/j'Jm*'. lb. Am.2.">. i*2.— <^w>///i phirimas et maximas cominoditfltes auiicitia 
 <wi/JA/f(7/, ///w ilia niuiTiiim ;>?•<»■.</<// omnibus (juod bonam spt m pradQctft in postfrum. 
 lb 7. 'i\. — Qmnii tota pliiiosoj)hia fruirifera ^aV, tuni wwWn^ fe raciov in eS locus et»l quani 
 de ofticiis. lb. OtT. 3. 2. — ItH(|ue '/////w eum ant'-a tui .'^liid'tin vulenm. Oim vero nunc a 
 doctissimo viro instructum muiio videiiam ninili'rririn. H). Brut. 71, 2.">().— r^/z/^/zj auctori- 
 tas et diixnitas PisOnis ra'?hat \)\nY\n\\\m. turn ill.i crat vuu-fi ju^ty-inia (iui»d eum sibi 
 Acha'i patrOiium adoptilrant. lb. JJiv. Cu'c. 20. ♦»."). [The conneciioii of this pa-saire shows, 
 that a 8ut)junctive (ra/c/'e/) could not have been used without niakiiii,' ilie meaninjj of 
 tlie el !U«e amliiiruous]. 
 
 3. The apooosis uknotino an AnnirioNAT. fact of orkatkk impoiitanck : Qtnun 
 tuJ et men ntaxiim- inferest te valere. tnin miiltis est curav Cic. Fam. Hi. 4, 4.— (^iiie tpn/m 
 res tuiii ficfd nj/ pueriliier, /////* ne etticit quid^-m quod viilt. M). Fin. 1.(5, !!<.— Qu;e quinn 
 aW/or/'g/</! a litteri» et ab humanitjlte, tnin vero coniraria sunt imperio et diirnitilti. lb. 
 Qu. Fr. 1. 1, 12. — (^'/'//n hos sibi (jua'stiis cw/AVj/Mtx.sv/' ex his caiisis quas ipse insiituerat 
 cum cohorte snil coirnoscrre, tuiii intinlium «renus inveneratad innumerabilem jx cuniam 
 corripiendam. lb. Verr. 2, 2. 11.— Ihecyf///m merito ejus fieri inttllif/ehat. turn ma<;ni inter- 
 esse arbitrabiliur, eju< auctoritjltem inter suos qiiam plurimum valere. Cujs. B G. 5, 4. — 
 Ilrec urbs qiDim maun muniti.ssim» e^-i^et. fiirn loci nattlrfl tern! ac mari clandebJltur. Cic. 
 Verr. 2. 2, 2.— Sc:evola 7'///m t)nea»ntus esstt ad excoiritandutn, /«//* verbis erat ad rem 
 cum suminil brevitilte miral)iliter aptus. lb. Brut. 31>, 145. 
 
 Ob:*. 4. If both the protasis and the apodosis h-ive the pamc predicate, this common 
 predicatt; may be repeated in l)oth j)ropositions (as in the examples quoted in the loot- 
 note to Obs. 3, and in the passaire Cic. Brut. 71.250, quoted Ous. 3. No. 2) ; but it is fre- 
 quently once omitted, ^'i///^;* in the prota-is, or in the apodosis. In either ca-e, the ctmi- 
 mon predicate, if ext)ressed only once, is in the iu'licafire. as : Qumn omtiiuin sociOriim 
 provinciarumque ratir>nem dilij^jenter habere itehT'tifi, tuin pnecipne Sicili;R. Cic. Verr. 
 2. 2. 1. — Nam mihi. qunin muita eximie divinequi' I'i'ien'ur Atlieia' tute j)eperisse, tmii 
 nihil melius iilis mysteriis (iuil>us ex a>;resti vitil exciilti ad humanitiltt-m sumus. lb. 
 Les». 2. 14.— Hoc eiro qiiuin reipublicje cansfl c^n^iii, turn imprimis retinendje diirnitJtis 
 tua'. lb. Fam. 12, 22. — Te quititi semper valere oijno. ft/m cvrw qiium hie sumus. lb. 7, 4. 
 — Id fcediim consilium (/'/"m. inceplo turn etiam exitu/V/jV ibo'h in its be<,'innini; and its 
 end: or«vir'//at the bef^inninrj. «v at tin; end). Liv. 2(i, 38. — .AKesilJus g>/i/in a c«'teris 
 scriptoribus, fn/n a Xenophonte co'l'i'i(l(Vi/.< t.-./. Nep. As;. 1. — Multum, qaum in omnibus 
 rebus, turn in re militjlri, potttil fortQna. Cies. B. G. ti, 30. 
 
 Obs. .5. Not »'very Quum-clause used as a protasis with a followinir /'/w, can be con- 
 eidered as a cotnparaiivt (^ninn-clanse. Sometimes tdis form is applied to pure tempo- 
 ral clause!», atid also to concessive Quuni-cl luses, when 'he mood of the Quum-clause 
 follows the rules about that class of Qiium-clauses Ui which it belonixs. In such instan- 
 ces the adverb turn, openini; the a])odosis, is altvays redundant, beiti^' used only to mark 
 more distinctly the bei.Mnniii^ of the apodosis. ^ Tum'' must then be considered as a 
 mere syndetic antecedent w iiu an incersion, similar to that of relative clauses ^see p. 505, 
 Obs. 2>: aa : 1) Tkmpouai. cl.m'ses : Quuni mihi projxjftui (see /i. 34, Obs. 3) re;rnantem 
 Leutulum.. ., turn lamcntutiOnem matrum fumilias.. .perhorresco. Cic. Cat. 4,0, 12.— Qui 
 
 POSTQUAM-CLAUSES AND THEIR EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 659 
 
 . 
 
 ,: 
 
 ,.um ill! breviter resj.ndi.ent J,e. 21^ ^^^^,t^^^ 
 
 quanta conscientne vis «^^« ' "f^'^ I'^^jl^^^^Ji^'i "opS T)- Fam. 15, 2. 5.- 
 
 me ^'andere t/.xe^v,m. it/m ; "«^.^J^f ^.^f^ ,^'VSs libi gratias agam, non reperio. 
 
 -:;^;(;.i;;tu;.ire^^bo=qnr^^^^ 
 
 ad bciie vW^^^^^ lb Fin. 3, 5,5;). 
 
 Item 41. Sometimes Quvm-rlauf^es have the force of hypothelical bi- 
 clau^estcmlraiy to re.Uity, in uhich instance they require their precU- 
 cates in the subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect, as : 
 
 Onod ^^f!ff ludicitim ouuvi ex Verris tnrpisgimo comitatu tree recuperatOrum nomine 
 
 ;. -vie esse illud quidem non q>a-ererent, "cui bono «."''"^^'t • . J^^J^- /. 3 . 8h. upinor, 
 t..v, louu VI aiidirtli)i turn causa aL^i vere viderelw. lb. V err. -J, l. lu. 
 
 out of Leoiidas, if he had ordered him to be present. Cic. \ err. 2, 5, 5. 
 
 II. Temporal clauses with postquam and its synonyms. 
 
 I ^ 620 Temporal chmses introduced by podquam {postcuquam) , 'ubi,ut, 
 Hmul {simulac, siniulatque), and quando have their predicates in the 
 
 INDICATIVE. .:,..• ♦!« 
 
 Obs 1 The above-mentioned temporal conjunctions' have their pi-edicates in the 
 
 C«»a,i8, co,m„mf ll.i.iii5u.« pnT.c.pt-s "' ;^,^-i^'* "; V\-;/,^,,;^ i (('„ ^^^^^^ „ith 
 
 wimMmimmmm 
 
 vcrc^ mr?^ a ,t^ quam m in- pr,,vh,ci»,.. V^ 
 
 (in St editors bavin." podea quum against the conices). !'>• Lt'g^A ^ -^"f Z;^^;,^"^^^^^ 
 
 mo.us, orta ...m^ne' iK>stqaam C. Cu|sari baud .ff^^f^l^^^t.^foiTUUtJd vvlu^^^ 
 (Where the editors say that the very plain passage has >^^» ^^^ "^;.^^/'!^^^^^^ m-ove to 
 W anything to gel rid of the subjunctive alter •;x/.s/./t/am •- ^j^^^ J fl,^-^^' 1^^^ '" 
 evfdcnce x\mi imtquani sometimes, though rarely, is construed with the ml^unctiie. 
 
660 
 
 i 
 
 TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 Ob!*. 2. 1 he rlanses dependont on jmtquam and simvldc inrnvlafque), from a strictly 
 {rruiiimatical t^taiidpomt, nuisr be CDusider.'d a^^ comjiaradve clauses (j)ost and in^sted 
 qnarn = later than ; ^imitl ac or afqne = at ttie ^nine lime as). Hence these conjniiction>< 
 are som time- >e|)anued into their elements by insertinir one or metre words (po^/ea vera 
 qi/ani ; vniUi.s fx)st a/inh- quavi etc : see the examples below).— 'I'he clauses introduced 
 by ihe conjiinetioiis .numerat.d abov.- are only nsi-d as fff/re/«ttf/ clau>es, except those 
 intro.iuced by postquaw, wiiich .«.metimes occur as uttiibutt-davKea, dependent on nouns 
 deiiotuiu: time (p. -jrW, foil.). Such chinseshave three lorms : D with the "•ov.rnin" noun 
 in iheaulative (rarely ti.e accusative) of lime, as : Auhoposiqimm rofanaf iviU^ .AlTjiieia' 
 dedicuMir. Liv. 7. '-'H - ^ ndeat/io die ixt.-<tqinim a te disccsseram hoc litteruijuum exanlvi. 
 Cic. Ati. 12. 1.— I'rofectus d'^c'uii" jn),s( die quatn exercitum accepeiat. Liv.42 2 —2) I^txt 
 IS coniH;cied as a preposiiiim with the goveriiiiio: noun (always with ordinals) : Po-'t di>^tn 
 XL et \ 1 qmmi a voids dii^cexoeiant. Cic. Fam. 16. 21, l.—I'osf dhin lertintn ^m sla res est 
 quam aixnat. lb. Mil. 16.— 3) I o<t may be elliptically omitted, if the ^'overniii"' noun is 
 m thcai)lative, or is connected with the prep<.sition intra : quadnhgtnlemno ainioquaiu 
 url)s Honiana amdila etat, qtnnio tuvesimo qxavi a (Jallis )td]yer<Va, patricii consuh-fl 
 ambo ex inierre<,'no ma-iftiatum iniere. Liv. 7, 18 — t'onsiil inilites duflrum Ie<Mnnum 
 intra dif.<t seoraqinta quam in provinciam reriit. dimlsit. lb. 4:j,9.-The tense in these 
 attributive clauses is reirnlarly the pluj)er/'trt ; but scmietimes the ]iredicate is in the 
 perfect, as m the last passa<,'e. Tlitis : Cent 11711 et octo annU jiostquuin Lycur'nis le«'eB scri- 
 bere t/z^/t/i/i/, prima posita est Olympian. Cic. Kep. 2, 10, 18. 
 
 llrni. 42. Clauses with jnistquam nic ureiierally depondont on preterite 
 prt'ilicatcs, in which iu.stance ;w.s/r/^mm has 1) the nicanini,^ of the Eng- 
 lish conjunctions * after' or ' irhe/i' (a,<^ soon ns) ; 2) the incauin;^ of the 
 rehitiveexpi-ession ex quo {tonpon), z= 'from' or 'since the time thnt\ 
 'ever 4nee\ More rarely, 'pontqunm is dejieudent on NON-ruETEuiTE 
 predicates (Ohs. 7-11). -The predicates of Postquain-clauses are either 
 in the PERFECT, PLiPERFECT, IMPERFECT, or PRESENT, biit neither in 
 the futiire-i)resent, nor in the fiiture-i)erfeci*. For the use of Postquam- 
 clauses referrini,^ to indefinite time sec Ous. 10. 
 
 1. PosTQUAM, in the meaning ' after' {ichen), dependent on Preterites. 
 
 Ob^. 1. Clauses with po.^fqvnm, in the above menninu'. arc used: 1) to represent the 
 two predicates as lieiii',' merely \\\ a. f-uccts.sioii f/ /i///«? without any other connection of 
 ttie two actions ; 2) to reiiresent the main action as a coih-eejuejice ol the anteiior action • 
 3) to denote an incident by whicli tiie lo-:ieal subject of the principal senience was 
 induced or detemnrud to jterfonn the main action: 4) to repres.iit an action which 
 accorc lUK to the inteniion of the doer. /ra.v to l)e performed before the main action. 
 
 In all these instances, postqumn is a synonym of quum. \\\\\\ the pluperfect subjunctive 
 or ol uta and xit wiih the perfect indicative ; but not of quum wiili an imimfect subjunc- 
 tive, nor of r/^/w/w, //«!/?■, and ut with a pluperfect or imperfect indicative. 'J'he ten<ks 
 Hitx'T ]X)stquam essentially ])reserve iheir peculiar force which ihev have in ind.pend.-nt 
 sentences according' to the jrcni n>l rule.-. Hence we tind after 'jtostquam not only tlie 
 /iistonatl present (see Ons. G), hut also (in silver Latinitv) tin- hlstoncal infinitive ' But 
 the tensys after qunm, iibi, and ut (aside from the perlect indicative), Lave mostly con- 
 vtntional si,i,'nilieatious. 
 
 Obs. 2. When, accordincr to these principles, either posfquam or qvi/m (ubi etc.) miirht 
 be employed, the l/in<,'iia<,re nevertheless prefers the use of jwstquam 1) to pre«crve the 
 original and idiomatic lorce of certain tenses. This mostly refers to the use of the im- 
 perlect (Obs. 5), but also to the perfect and j)luperfect, as for inst. : Postquam Manlins 
 </U7/, pecunise summa homines movit. Liv. 22. <il. Here the perfect indicative dtj-it lias 
 the idiomatic ne<rative nieaninir mentioned p. ;30.J, Ous. 3 rafter Manlius had ceased to 
 speak '), which would be etlaced by Ujuum diHsxet \ as in the followinir passaj^e, where 
 the speaker did not ctaxe to speak : Ifepc quum dixisstt, jiintvir se nisi victOienrin ca-tra 
 non reversOrum. O.es. B. C. 3, 87.— 2» Po.<tquam is used in preference both to quum .tnd 
 ubi (ut) if the action is opjjoaed to other actions, bcloncnmr to a. previous time mentioned 
 
 * The En<,dish 'after' (when) with the liiture-perrcct cannot be e>cpres>ed liy • i>ost- 
 gnam wilh a Latin future-perfect. In this instance the Eiiirlish 'afur'' U «■■enerally 
 expressed by (fuum. vbi or n/nulac with a Aiture perfect (p. o54, Obs. 3). Sometimes 
 however, imtqnam is used in this tjense with a perfect, as : Pa«tea vero qunm profectus ei 
 (not en-<), velim recordere quie ego de te in seiultu cgcrim {after you will have departed, 
 I wibh you would remember etc.). Cic. Fam. 5, 2, 4. 
 
 rOSTQUAM^LAUSES AND THEIR EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 661 
 
 ... in this it^tance ^^^^^^^^S"^/?' ^S^f^^^^^^/S^^^^'^ 
 
 before. 
 
 (Which forms are 'requeimy eu.,..v.Yvv^^^ ^"iaebatis ; jwsfeaquam (i. e. 'vero') mentes 
 
 {rebatis, me qnoque cum '''^^ ^^ 'J" ,!""' Ve viistiL Cic. Pr^^^^ 
 
 tesn-as 7nH'a.stis, me comitcm ^f » -^ ''^^ h Mcs ter.^a verterunt. C*s. B. G. 7. :i7. 
 
 quam equilatus master 1» f »"^P^''"''\ ^4^' ,L . V^V 21,33; 25,25; Cais. B. G. 7, 82 ; 
 
 ?-omp. Liv.3«h 12; 3:3. 18^ 32,22 ^^%^^\^%;^ \md often.-3) If 'the'En.di^h conjunc 
 
 B. C. 3,58 ; Cic. Fam 3 .. 5 , ib I\^'»; \";\; „' /.^ i>e introduced hv posfquarn, and not by 
 
 tion V//y^r' means ■ afer than ' ^^^ ^''V. f^,/ " , ',ver to theques ion ' how much later ?\ 
 
 quum, Ui, or ut. This is t'spt^'Cially t Ic case 1 > »"' ^»- to "j^ q construction iw^fqaam 
 
 I in 'the attr.biitive claiises mentm ^^,^^ -^^ ,,^,,^,,, ^,,,^ 
 
 tak.'s either a pluperlect .«'^ ^ P<^V ./-^ v,;,/ liA 21 -ii) -lliYu non multo ])Ost qv am tu a 
 quam consules in P'-^vinciam y>ro/.o<t 6;a .^ l^^^^^^^^ Mario. Cic. Att. 12,49. 
 
 ?ne di.cesd.ti, subito quidam ']''^^^''\^^Jl'^^^^^^ ^ay be generallv used 
 
 OBS. 3. Aside fro.11 these Py/^f , V, ,^ f>X'ibUn'c?ivro?S of Ubi-clauses with 
 
 in ph.cc of Q""^"-^'^"^r^^,l^l^,,^'''L'r. tV?au^^^^^^^^^ very similar ,.ass.g. s wi.h 
 
 aporfectindicaiive, andbolhfon sarcl't^^^^^^^^^^^^ J exanimari se vidcMet, 
 
 eiactly the same lorce, as.: f;P«7" "/;,^"'j?"nf es^rt^^ s-n respondisse7U. ro:.avit 
 
 qineslvit salvusne essx-t chpeus ^ '' ,/^/,^^1;^'^;^^, „,,^1^,^,,.,^ evelh jussit eam,.qua 
 Jssentnc fusi liostes. Qu^m% } 9". '^" ^ om are w 1. : Epaminondas turn denique 
 erat tninslixus, hastam. <->c. 1 11. 2 30 9 • c omp^^^^^^^^ j,,. 
 
 sibi avelli jubet spic.ilum. ^'^^'^f '^J^,f '^„^^^^1^ S^ «1'"^ locGtum ferunt quam 
 
 Fam. 5, 12. 5; and: Y^'\^^\^^'l'^''lZ\ue<a^^^^^^ dictum ed incolumes 
 
 quiesisse si incolunus Lycortas X ,lo^[^;.;,;iVo cxspinlvit. Liv. :3«>, 50.-Eo postquarti 
 
 2,se. 'Bene habet "'^'''^; ^J, ^^*^^ ^/^ctesB"^^ 1^^^^^ Eo g./«m Ca^^ar 
 
 Clesar;>c/T^^^^^<)bsldes arnlapopo^cl tai^.^5.^_^^ Brundusium re7.ii, contionatus 
 venisset, civitatiinis milites imperat. Ib.o 1--^^':'J'^.\ g _Hasdrubal. postquam peniiias 
 i Id milites. . . , II. Non. Jan. navTs ^«'Iv • J • B- ^" f^\^ H' „a ..^'iiannibal accepit, 
 ris ad Cissim acci pit, iter ad '"^,^/^^^];^'^;, _\Vann ial, ^uum recermd^sef omnium 
 equitibus emissis in h..stem erflpit. -V ;. .7^^; •vota ex^^^^^^^^^^^ lb. 21, 21.-Po<vY^«am ilh 
 ^2ntium auxilia, Gadcs Vro^i^etns Uc^^^^^^^^ Frequently such 
 
 iusta ma-nihce /fCfm//^ reiruli m "V2 Ln?.mle it 0« €0^ oTher, as : Romana pubes, 
 equivalent temporal clauses are '"«' « „^,«P^3^'i"Vi^|/'' ,'„^ silentium ob.inuit 
 
 '^"' .ere. a lux 7'ediif, vbi vacuam sedem^t^««...ina ^^^ ^^^j^^^^^,_ 
 
 ;;^;;y,;;;^;r Serena mx r<;inf^j^2^^,,i:^Se:^vty^ '^f'''\ 
 
 Uvheu, after the return ^^^ I'f 'f.' iV-f^ym^o empor^^^ 
 in-intere-tinjrpassa-e almo>t . [ '^^*"_\*,' '^ CVltibCri. qui profecti erant a domo, dedi- 
 relative forms, are cc)...bi.u'd w h <-Nic^^ ?, primiin imbres rejniserwd, 077nnbus. Contre- 
 tionis i-nari. qtnnn, '»''*'^''";1'' t /u- '^/^/-K^r^^^^^^ in alteram partem translata rati, aut 
 bia.n renU-'enf, postquam ^^^^'-'.''\%]lf'^^^^^^ accesserunt. Liv. 40, m. 
 
 recessis.e hostis per -^'^'^'^' '"^^"^J^^^^^^^^ enumerated Obs. 1. the perfect, 
 
 Obs. 4. In the f»'''r/^^*^criptions of Postqua n c a^^ ^^^^ ^,^^^.^ categories is 
 
 pluperfect, or imperfect may be used. ,/;;;.i''caJe-orv^i//^tr tlie perfect or ihe pluper- 
 fheVr/Vr/. while in the causeso tie m ^^^^.^ .1^ place of a perfect 
 
 feet is used. The pluperlect 7.aij,n J '^;|^;.J^,^'^"j- an immediate one. I" the second 
 
 ?ii;ljrJ.T iias always ai idU>matic m--^^-- ^,^,,, ,,,, .^eras M, Postnmia 
 •1 Meue tkmporai._succkssion . i) 1 Euthcis . _/ iA<y .\. .*..„ „;,.iAr.^a f.Mines ouidcm 
 
 ca 
 
 2) 
 es 
 
 nt 
 nin 
 
 stemuam in istam provinciain 7>^/tMo. ?^«' a''. ^^' ' '_pienunius, qnique in eadein 
 artio accidisset. sic tu mil,. vulSris t^c lb- Q^- 1^- 2- 2 1. ^ p^^^ ^J^^.^.^ Liy.^J.22 
 nsa erant, poxtquam Romam *-'^V [^i"/^;/^^^^^^^^ temptationem ajgbam 
 
 ;., Plupkufkcts : .Equi. w^tquam t^^''^l^\^^'S n- tereiVtur etc Liv. 9. 4.5.-Tum, qunu 
 
 ::.se"ut ter.0.e in-'-o Ju^li. -lanos s .^ ti P;"^' - '[-eottam in judicium vocabat. 
 
 P AtV cslnu--. iX)-<teaqunT7i ni> consu. et *-' ' "^ -' .. 
 
 cic Piv Ca-c. 21. See sail. Juu^ 11,2. qi.<>tcdOB>.^ Po.tquam vineas a<ri tur- 
 
 li Tkmporai, srccESSiON with 9<»^'^>Q\f'^"f ,; ' ,,,,.V4w that woiks etc. were erected 
 
 rl/que exci.ari rieHrunl, Hda P^^tinacia .^r^ Aft^r t ( w^^^ ^^ 
 
662 
 
 TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 compertnm est, in bello plnrimnm irgonium pospp. Sail. Cat. 2, 2.— Iljspala, postg^iam 
 lictOri-'!< in vestihiilo, et consiilein ip:«iim conipexif, prope exanimilta eft. lb. 31>, 12. — 
 Wacedones». . .niovGii n(>q[iiivenint ; jwstquam htvo latt'ie nudilto ciraanarjcre ha^tai? in 
 venirntcm hostetn condti mnt. tuvhdti t xtepiplo. . .terira vertunt. lb. *i, 18— Ax^/vva/;» 
 audita vox in foro est pra-cuni:?, veliu nova res niirabundain j)li;b('m conrerdf quidnaiu 
 incidis^i^•t, lb. 3, 38.— Anliuchus qiuim, pa^teuquam a L. ScipiOne devictus, Taur«> ti-niis 
 rcKiiarejw,svfw*'6,sY, omnein banc At^iani amisJigeet ; Wben Antiocbus, after bein;; directed 
 by Scipio {i. e. in consequence of Scipio's order) to reii,Mi as far as Mount Taurus, bad 
 lost all tliis Asia. C\c.Dv}.l'i.— CreHtne'^]\i:^^-n\Ui.])0.'ifguam neniinem annfltum in niu- 
 ris ridtnnit. lb. 43, 9.— Duni loiigius aberant (ialli, plus multitudine telurum proticigbant; 
 pofifedquam piopiiis ttucieist/Srunf, ant be ntiniulis induibant, aut etc. Cits. B. G. 7, 82, 
 
 C. TmK ACTION or TIIK CLAUSE DETKKMININO A nESOLUTION OP THE PRINCIPAL PIBJECT, 
 
 1) Perpkcts : PosfQitOTfi conipt-rit lran^itunl ejl non esse, castrn quain extenciscima po- 
 test valle locat. Liv. 21,:52.— Marcellus, jx)sfm/am id inceptuin irritum f'/it, ngua ad 
 Enryabim rcferri junnt. lb. 25. 2o.— llasdrul)al, //asy^'/r/m animadi't^rtit. exi<rnuni "Konijl- 
 nuni exercitum in castris esse, nad^d/.vr cum CeltiberCrum principibus nt copias incie 
 abdflcant. lb. 25. 3:i.— Ilanc pbalanj,'ein Hippias et Leonnatus raptim adduxerant, jxtitf. 
 qvain prospcre pu<!:nasse cquitem ncrepirunr. lb. 42. .59 (see p. 34»», Oiis. 3).— Hannibal, 
 
 iMKtqiinm cohoTWi: strai:em ridit, recipere si<;na cccjnt. lb. 26, H. C"i)mp. Cirs. B. G. 7, .58; 
 .iv. 10, 29; 21,31: 32.30; Cic. Clu. 63, 177 ; Kep. 2. 31.— 2) 1'i.upekpects aie sonietinifs 
 used in clauses of tliis kind (rt> if tbe predicate denotes an action indefinitely repeated 
 before tbe main action, as; Qui, ])0.^tq}(am alia frustra ternptuta eranf, earn actionem 
 BuscepOrunt qua etc. Liv. 10, ii.—Fo.^fqaam nulla occasio puiruantii configerat (ini})lyini^ 
 several attempts btan^ made in vain), castra movit. lb. 24, .36.— Ilanc vir;:inem Appius 
 pretio pellicere adortus,/>0N7g'/a/M omnia piulOre septa auitnadverttrat (be had seen by 
 repeated attempts etc.), ad crudelem vim animum convertit. lb. 3, 44.— This pluperfect 
 of repeated action is generally chosen instead of an imperfect of repealed actinn (see 
 ()Bs. 5). if the main action is conceiveci to be sejiarated by a perioci of ti^ne from the 
 anterior action. ^*) If the action of the clause bad already been slated before, and is 
 mentioned again as occasioning another action, as : Metapontlni. i)ostquatn (Fabius) ad 
 constitOtum non venerai diem, remissi ut cunctantem hortarentur. Liv. 27, 26 (the fact 
 that Fabius would not come having been stated before).— Philippus (pioqiie, primovere, 
 jmtqvavi lei:jlti ab Romfl nihil pacjlti reiiilerai^t (which fact has i)een repeatecily men- 
 tioned before), dileclum p«'r omnia oppida habCre instituit. Liv.:i.3, 3.— I'aucos ante dies 
 Perseus. ;>o.<.V7//fl;?j legSti ab Komil n-ixrcf^A jmnideranf spem pads, consilium habuit. 
 lb. 42, 50.— /V/^//^»/i i)ars major exercitus e/nhi^a 6?a^ jam ne cis quidein quie ultro 
 dicta erant, ptabaiur. lb, 26, 17, Cornp. lb. 108. Sail. Jug. 97. 
 
 />. The MAIN ACTION depending on the PUEVIOrS PEKrORMANCE OF THE ACTION 
 
 IN THE CLAUSE ; 1) Peupkcts : Postqnani (as soon as) assnetudine <iuotidi;ln;l satisintre- 
 pide fieri visum est. adversus instructos CampanOriim equites processCrunt. Liv. 26, 4. — 
 Postedqvam (as soon as) satis calCre res Kubrio ri<a *-fi/, ' (^uieso ', incpiit, 'Philodame 
 etc' Cic. Verr. 2. 1. 26.— Itaqiie Hannibal, posfquam Ipsi sententia sfefif Ilaliam peteie (as 
 Boon as his resolution of invading: Italy was settletl), advocjlta continue v.irie militum 
 v«'rsat animutn, Liv. 21, 30.— 2i Pli'pekfects : Pos/qimtfunnu'inm animos oculosque oc- 
 cupaverat certamen, turn arreptis scutis adversam adoriuutur Itomanam aciem. Liv. 22, 
 4S, — Posfedqua/n tantam miiltituilinem co">'q"rat erablematura ut ne unum qiiidem cuT- 
 quam reliquisset, instituit otticTnam Syracflsis in reiria, Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 24.— Ceterum /xW- 
 quam jam ad siirna pei'renerat Hispanbrum, tumundique in eum traguhe conject;e ("after 
 he had ab-eady come'; i e. 'not before lu; had reached the line', the enemy waiting 
 with the hurling of tbe missiles till be had come up to tbe line). Liv. 26, 5,— In all these 
 Bentences, the two propositions do not merely denote a succession in time; nor is the 
 principal action a mere consequtiice of the action in the clause ; nor is the will of tbe 
 principal subject determined by it. But in all the passaires quoted, the doers are waiting 
 ftir a certain issue, indicated by the predicate of tbe clause, to jjerform tbe main actioii. 
 In su< h constructions both a perfect and a pluperfect may be used, and even an imper- 
 fect, if tbe other requirements of ibis tense are satisfied (Ons. 5, 3). 
 
 Obs. 5. The iMPEUFECT is very rarely used in Postquam-clauses to denote a m^ere fd/c- 
 cession of time*. But it frequently occurs in clauses beloniring to the last three catego- 
 ries, mentioned Obs. 1. Hence such clauses are to tbe main action almost ahvavs in a 
 relation resembliuir came. Tbe imperfect is unied in Postquam-daust-s if tbe action of 
 the clause, expressed as a» independent sentence, would requir»; or admit tbe imperfect 
 tense according to the difi'erent rules on the use of this tense (p. 305 loll.), Such imper- 
 
 * An example of sucb a construction occurs in Liv. 10, 24 : Fuit contcntio in scnfitn, 
 et postquam ibi Fabius plus }X)ferat, revocata res ad populum est ( = Fabius carried bis* 
 Doint in the Senate, whereupon the matter was referred to the people). 
 
 rOSTQUAM-CLAUSES AND THEIR EQUIV.U.ENTS. 
 
 663 
 
 ^cts mostly correspond to thc^T-J^ct^c. s.ate of coi^n^^ 
 
 also to tbe diflercnr uliomatic '"JP/'^ '*: "• f .^,'''^^;^^^^^^^ Hence frequently perfects and imper- 
 an.l tbe imperfect of ""^"^^^'^^^^L.^^^'/i'P .-^^ ' be enually correct in the same ^entence.-- 
 fects (and s.»me.imes also PV'';f ^^-^.fiaVlv requi?-e a change of expression in English 
 Postquam-clauses with '»>P'^«-f^'^,'%;i^"?;7?/,S fng cavs7, the conjunction 7>o^ 9"am 
 and ;iuce they always «P-'f r^/,,^f ''^'^"al coS 'since'. Very frequent y he 
 
 must frequently be rendered l>y y>« f '^\^f 7,,,. ."^jon is nc-ative, the negation imply ng 
 
 mp'rlecl is used in I'o^^*l'!'^"\-^f»f^!,yo be Srrettt time-points up to the beginning 
 that the action was not P^'^ ''«""V j^'f ^Stim'ed ' non-action '. Hence almost every 
 oi the principal action. ^^;; Vive SredS^r^mv take its predicate in the imperfect. 
 
 Postquam-clause with a negative predicate r/my ^amc^ plebs gravabatur se templa 
 
 FvAMPiE- 1 Actions of catkgouy B: ,5^""f,,J'',"i alia opera traductbantur (imp. 
 d.itun cScHflcare manibus ^^^^^^^!^^^ Seing t Kerred to other works, 
 
 rv^;r^^s^J4rSirSi»SSv. 5^^ 
 
 tur • This di-order was quelled i", ^.^^^^t^J;,"''' . pfriphkastic imp. of state) by the 
 wei^ free (were set free, ivere ma stat^oj .r^^f^l{' "^il^'^ii) j^sfqimm Romam advenfa- 
 fliVht of the mountaineers). ^V- ^Iv^^'TvT, 7 n S) Ob* 1^2), sen 
 / /"///(When thcv were on the point of arruing. p. f ; ;^5\^!ls^^d m-^^g'/am, dilapso tem- 
 t s esr 1 ceretne Juirurth* IcL^atos recipi. ^aU JuL^ AS ^- »^ / V^^^^^ AlbTnus 
 
 ore CO tiorum dies adverddfrnt (when ^^^^^^^^ [.feum tr Ims justis exercitibus ade- 
 i omam dece.sit, lb. 37. -«•-'^^^■^^"«'^ res 'mperatorc^ cum ^j ^^^^ ^^^^^^ g^ ^ arutn 
 
 r«/ (Since three generals were present, l^^^'-^^^/^JJ^l'^/',,^ 'dies comitiOrum aderat (when 
 Td luendum locum valitflroj esse, Liv, 2o,>S.^^^^^^^^ ^,..^ ,,,^ ^^ [Compare : 
 
 election day had emu), <^"- ^" i « Ow /m is dies\vni.v.^^/ etc. t:jc. ?h>l. 5 -, 20] -- 
 rbi ilia dies venit ^'t^; ^^i^j^ :^^{Jhaa,%ui>o..f2«am uuUus ad^raU^uice there was 
 QuterCl)ant auctorem repeutTn.v laiiiuo,. h ^ i 
 
 none), evanuitgaudium. lb.4o, i. Po^tanam citSti non conreniebant. dimissi 
 
 2 Actions belonging to categoky a-PoPtq^^^^ .^ ^ ^^4,^,^ to meet upon 
 
 d.^a d.uuos apparitores. referunt ^«"^V'i^t their hou-es who reported that the senate 
 
 ?he s,?mm<.ns,'|.ublic ofticcM- ----en -^" /X^^'ne^o a./7/J(ad t"bflna Ml^ni.im 
 
 43 T. C MH -"lb :«. 17].-Scipio, postquam ^'^^' j^^^^i^P^^^^^gJ^Comp. C«s, B. G, 7, 87].- 
 tiVp OF continued action), retro cedere ^fl'^;^^,]^^^^^^^ /mperf. of ^tate = 
 
 Aico Z^fauam conduiOiies tristes a ^iCOre/er^oa/^f'/^ u ^ ^^ hostem raan- 
 
 nosunnm c SitiOnes qiue ferebantur, tnstes ^m^ , ''^^%P^^!;j/%i„ce' the undertaking 
 Lb 21 v2.-/>.>^-^9"aminitutn .''^«P-^^^X^.f^^Vbyu [Compare : Marcellus, post- 
 f Vledi recenti post signa. proelio excesserui t. 1». lu, i* ^ee Liv. 42. 58 : ;x).^<ywam ea 
 
 ^;S ird.".K'i.-ep.uni /.^, ^^^^^"^^ ^^^i^i^u^m ^il^^.r^T^ioTs^ 
 
 Mtur (repeated action). coufQ-i m ^7;^^] "''/"' cc(>mplished action, p. '^oy' <^/*-- V/ 
 ^rie. ati jus^i : postquam ha^Mtafjant ^'?»f- .''^^^ ^Srer^.n etc. Liv, 42, 36.-Sed i)(W^ 
 ?.^..}.h?.. ' ii It nnicouam mandatum esse, JU-.?' r^ uin ulrc re ^_ ^^^^^^^ ^^^^_ 
 
 6«i/wr (repeaieuauiio.... vv,^-^_.. - ^ unaccompnsueu »;r'.'""' *^jp — o"^ „^^',. 
 
 «r« l.'.'-iti iussi ; postquam fnvMtaoani ^'^f •;'„,,„, :.Tre rci etc. Liv, 42, 36,— bed i^o^t 
 
 ,,hr.i«tie imoerfcct). scd etiam uuctus t,i "»i^^ • 
 
 1 \CTiovs BEi-oNoiNO TO CATEr.oBT T>---'oilqmm I ^ tyraiimis legs OS Ela- 
 
 Jat cSSn a.' the- city was in • '«f 'y!!CViico A «<m (as /00« a.).ab Hippoora. 
 
664: 
 
 TE]\rrOR.VL CLAUSES. 
 
 \u^i '}k 7? 9^'*^^'>-e »" soon as Syracnse was occupied etc.), fadlo perpulcrat etc. 
 i ).-il..^5.-/o.sYv'/am portnm ttnihant, conikincs cam-re juhcnt. Ih.'ZA.Ail-J'ostnuojn 
 1 »/ii ''"^•/^^r{; ^"^ I^^>i"J^»i i" arceni co)>funtrant. coutichcl.atque paiililiiin tunuiltus, 
 turn H.iniMl)al larentltios convocSre jiihet. Jl).ir., \(\.~P(K^tfjuum hatis Niriiim colk-ctuiu 
 a I oninls» coniltuy ridlbat, turn «x i^n\> unun» scitJciiatum honiani ad patrt in niinit etc 
 ,11 -^~: [fV'^ia^ '"l''"^'", "^'""WiH' A/rt^>a//^ cum paucis pn.c-enini in medium duces 
 proceaunt. It). 1. 2.i.— Turn ^\\<y\\yl[u\,fx)stquam omnis Numidiie />o/i^/A7///r < = possid6bat) 
 in otio facinu^ huum cum ammo reputaus, timCre populum Kuniilmim. Sail. Juir. 13. 
 
 wY'"/'",^""'^*""^^ (mostly in Sallu.'^t) in Po.«tqnam daus.-s a lii>toncal prescinds u*ed 
 iTriiM " V""t^-"''- ') J'^''"f*'<"^- "> ''!*• nieanin-s mentioned above, as : Ei, jwstquain muium 
 arieti bus ftMlri rident. anrum atque ai^tntum domiim n<:iam comportant. Sail Ju- 7<) 
 —lostqiiamUi^-ds copias ridet Catillna, in conlertigsimos hostls iiicuirit It) CaV(H)" 
 
 ^>!.?!P-i 1 ;V'^i>-^*]'^"--^':.":.^^''" "'^ '''■''' TO.'<tqvam ridfo me sic luditieari.r. Vhnit. 
 ^;ipt..i,l,ii.—/o../quam nihil./?/, clamnre homiiu-m posco. Ih. Cure. 5, H, 5.— Posfouam 
 iideo ueycio quid tuspicarier, magis ca'pi iuttfire ut dicat. Ter. llec. 5, 3, '2S. 
 
 2. Postquam, = ex quo {tempore). 
 
 period during which the principal action is naid to continue, or the peiiod itself 'duo 
 the becnnnnifj of ichick ' the principal action is represented to continue. In both in 
 t<tances the period must be surh as to last up to the time spoken of 
 
 1. H the Postqiiam-clause refers to a period lastini; up to the time of the ppeaker 
 po^tquam IS rendi-red by (ever) since, or. with a nc-^aiion, bv ' h'-tfr since \ The principal 
 predicale :s jjenerally in the perfect, with the force <»f ah En'Mish present-perftd but 
 also in the present In the former instance the pn-dicate of the clause is eit/ui' \\\ the 
 
 que m 
 reuewe 
 
 emoriain acceptie cladis (nor alter his return ; <^r ' from the time he returned and 
 edetc >. Liv.-2:>.(51.— L. Cincius Alimentus scrii)it. ex ipso audisse. Haunihalem 
 2>o^tquam \ihvi\iiun\n transient Tri-inta VF. niillia hominum amisisse (ihat Hannibal 
 jrom the ti/ne he crossed the Khodanus to his arrival in Italy lost r^.dOO men). lb '21 S8 
 — Cunclatio Fabii conlempta end, utique postquajn al)sente eo temeritilte ma<'istri pros- 
 
 ent which is rendered by an Ki'iirlish pr)e>ent-perlecL"asV PlViuV"ivl\'"-j^^^^^ videor 
 
 posfquam in Porinulno .««-////i (;is ion^' as I have been in mv Forniiannm) C'ic Att -2 111 
 i.)tumesiHliud_/>o./^(77?m//iyvr/ia te disjunctior. To. 13,11, ].-Q„(kI mihi nuncdeninue 
 apparutt posteaqvam et ipsa (porticus) tota pafet. et columiue jioiifcv ftunt (peripiir 
 pr»;«ent). lb. (^u. br. 3, 1.1.— Quian' tibi unquam qiiidquam. ;>&sVa'/a//J ft/f/s sum (as Ion" 
 as I have been your property), verbOrum dtdl / Tlaut. Most. 4, 2, 22.-Suspecta majotibua 
 
 rOSTQUAM-CLAUSES AND THEIR EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 G65 
 
 no.tris ni.re in.onia .ervnrum, ^^^^^^l^l^'^.t^ ' 
 
 vero nationes in famiins fiami"s, "^"J 'I' \l' nTein^^^ qn<> tempore' (ever since , 
 
 OBS. 9. In place of l'<'^'9'l'""-;;'"";td;nende^^^^ employed (s. p. 198. Obs. 1), 
 
 frequently reversed i)articipial phrases «[f'; '^; ;,,%'/^^^^ rrravissimum est (ever 
 
 I'} Hoc. crimen postjudicia de V^'^^}^^:'};. J^^^']^'^^^^ consiimnm 
 
 3. Exceptional usages of postquam. ^ , ^,„ 
 
 OBs 10 Ilarelv;>o../,.«...tiot bavin, the mcanm, '..^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 d.^n on NON-ruETKiuTK predicates. <'J .^^^f^^'/ . ;i;.r, '^SicYe it, the perfect, with the 
 > s quam-clause. dependent "" ^ "^^.'^"«^;";.^; 4 it -^ he idea of CAUsk or of advkh- 
 meanini: of an En-h^.h Preseti -perfec appr^^^^^^^^ pra^clarissimum est, quod 
 
 SATIVF cause (concession), as: Cujus <l^^J''t " q u tm n , ^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ 
 
 ji>Zlqnam a'caesare tctra.ThiS,re^mo, peou^^ evenerint, poenitere : after 
 
 lT,spic.n-nm qu.e sibi a.'l l'"^/'*^^"^ ^l^.^.V/f S^^^ he yet says that he aoc8 
 
 i^oioxavu>^ has been pinnshedn^ .crimaram suam ab inTqu s 
 
 no re-ret etc._ «^ '^- 1>1^'- ^' ]5:r.^n ?S T/yJ? ^ 
 
 observari. indicio de se ipse m^ ^ bt o ^ fl/f^r / ,^„imony iu his own behalf. 
 
 n.at his works are beinsr c«»"im<-^"t^f^ "I'^'lf j;,^' .eni- j ^...^^ a predicate in ihe 
 
 Ter. Ad.Prol.l.-2. S'''V^\'"'*'\' n ^0^1 , "rfec '^ Poltq"<nn hoc ab Romams yobis 
 pr'-senf, pre-nantly includin- a P'^;';,"^^:\' f ^^ L,^,;;,/. pacem afero ad vos (,= after it 
 ulla spes est, nee vestra jam arma ^'O^^;'^' f^^^^^^'e on the Komaiis etc.. i. e. since there 
 lias become plain ^l^^ y*'" ^^^i;:;^, .^'.^".^1 e mfof an epistolary imperfect in H"^ lar «r 
 is no more hopo). Liv. 21. 13.-1 ^•^"''•'' '^ ' f,;:,, ' .-njor eraf quam put5ram, et mea qua?- 
 8en<e • Postefquam et PompCji ^•«n^".^*^'^''^ o du t rnior e/^«^^ i i ridebatur, aut certe 
 
 da n tibi non iirnota dubi.atio aut '"^1 ^^ Tf 1^^^^^^^^^ ''' Po-tquam-clause 
 
 Tardare, ride quid mihi ^''^'/Jf" ; :^ ^,J;^^;r :e of an E^ present-perf.cL refers to 
 
 with a predicate in ^^i^^P^'^"--^^: ^''Xl''ii,]a^^^^^ qmedam, priva vir fi is 
 
 indetinf^ and (/eneral Ume, «^ •.£J^*;,';'''?;;;/fn"e,no freta perverterc xnhi^...assveiit 
 imifltrix dieendi copiam consecufa est. turn i"?^;;'"..^^ ' ariibus iinperinm a vobis 
 r= Bolet) Cic Inv. V,3 -^«o e^o plerosqu^^ SrLS?metimes l">th th^e principal and 
 pefere. et jya^lgmm adepti .'>v»f, ^l?!! ;» F vdi'li" present-perlects : Atque e-o see qm, 
 
 fe;t;;^KT;n.xs:l]SrSs^^ ^^^-^^ ^--^^^ ^^^^^^ ^* 
 
 ^""i;^ {l^^^Sy^o^^.^- occurs with Pre^^^^^^^li^^^^^'^^ Z^ 
 in<- «7m".\ 'nViile\' Equidem etiatn ^^y^" "°;.\ ir whereas? altboudi it actually 
 nire n i' nor mihi esse vidTtur, posteaqxam e-^fj^^y'^ ric F n 5 1.-2) In the combination 
 ?s lar"e -solSbam intuens ^cipiOnem W a^^^ etc Oc^ Fm- 5,„,,,^,o,,g,am mulio mapO- 
 n'ncm^fqiiam with the force of n>mc 7" '^'j/,» V ' riis ho:tium fati-atos subsislere (dixiO. 
 
 sit erpccunia. Plaut. True. 2, 3, 24. 
 
 4 Ubi, nt, simulac, quando. 
 1 * ♦! ,.A r^f ovnressin"- the immediate temporal 
 Bern, 43. The usual "^^^^^'^^,. \f ,^X\S or 'after') is by 
 
 successioti of two acta (in E^^^^^^^^^f^^f/^^'tn lie verfert indicatice. The 
 clauses with .//>^' or nt, ^^-'ll^'^;^'^^^^^^ 
 
666 
 
 TEMPOK\X CL.VUSES. 
 
 Obs. 2. When clauses introduced hy vbi, vf, or dmv lac take thv\r predicates in the 
 impertVct or pluperfect, they ^'eiicr.illy nler to indefinite time, or t«) actions iiKlelinitely 
 re;-e!il»'d, as* Vui^i, ubi pericula \m^\\i jrropuli-roDt, s'lxiis» alquc ainlcis aiixilia portSljaut 
 (whenever tliey had averted daiii^ers. they would carry help to their allien). Sail. Cat. 6. 
 See p. :i-,>9 foil. For this purj)ose Post nmunda uses cannot be used. Sometimes, (but 
 rart-ly) tin- hii^torians uce ubi and vt with inii^erfectH if they refer to delinite time, 
 aecordinir to the same distinctions as with ]K>f!/gu(i//i, as : Constil, vbi ne paucos quidenx 
 
 ?ni [n-Imfi luce obambulaverant, parte ulla cernebaf, inft-rri siirna jiissit. Liv. '27. 4-^. - 
 Vyi numo obvius ibut, ph-no ^'radu ad castra hostiuni tendunt. II). 9,45. — Ubi ea dies 
 advenit, ct Amynauder in llnibus erat, quatuor i*iinul locis Macedonuni prit'sidiaexpulsa. 
 lb. ;i'^, 1.— Fabii onitio fuit qualis biennio ante ; deinde, ut viiicelHitur consensu, vt-.-sa ad 
 P. Decium coile<,'am popcendum. lb. 10, 22. — Deinde, ?//; nulla vi pcrcuisos sustiiien^ 
 poterat, 'Quid ultra moror', inquit etc. lb. 10, 28.— Marcellus, ut tanta vis inqruifjat 
 jiiali. traduxerat in urbein suos. lb. 25, 2(3— Still more rarely these conjunctions are 
 construed with pUiperfects, so as to reler to delinite time and sin<jle actions, as* : Ut ad 
 mare nostra? cohortcs excubueranf, acces^Gre eubito prima luc»; I'ompejani. Cais. B. C. 3, 
 iJ'>i.— Ubi ad pecuniaj mentiOneni veidavi erat, ibi hu'eitabat. Li v. 44, 2.>. 
 
 Obs. 3. Ubi, tit, Hmid, si/nul vt etc. are also used if the principal predicate is non-pre- 
 teri'e. which is rarely the case with pa'itq it am. The principal predicate is in the puksk.nt 
 only if they refer to indefinite time, in which instance the predicate of the clause is 
 either in the present indicatire, or (according to p. 301», Ji. 43) in the perftct indica/ire, 
 as : Adfo ofjdecat animos fortflna ubi vim suam in>;ruentem infringi non vult. Liv. 5, 37. 
 — Ubi salutatio dejluxit (ac soon as the calls hare cea<ed), litteris me incolvo. Cic. Kam. '.♦, 
 20, 3. — Omne animal, *t//i«/ ut orturn e.-ft, et se ipsuin, et omnTs partTs suas ddir/it. II). 
 Fin. 2, 11.— Ab'i//iw/«^^?/« increpuit suspicio tuniultus, «rtes illico nostne conticescunf. lb. 
 Mur. 10.— If clauses of this kind designate a definite time, they always refer to the 
 future, and, while their principal prt-oicates are' in the future, tln-ir own pn-dicates 
 (according to the rules p. 353 and 3.'J4) are eitber in the />dure-prr{ie/U„ or /uture-per/'tct, 
 as: JSimul et quid eHt certi. ticribam ad te. Cic. Att. 2,20. 2.— Ego statim hal/tbo quod 
 scribam, ^imul ut (others read siniul et) vid-ro CiiriOnem. lb. 10. 4, 12. — If such clauses are 
 suboblique, the oblique governing clause (in the periphrastic itilinitive of the future) 
 being df pendent «m a i)rfterite, their predicates, according to the general rule p. 45;^, 
 are placed in Iha pluperfect subjunctive in place of a future-perfect, as: IJixi, siinulac 
 limCre dei>isses, similem te futurum tui. Cic. Phil. 2, 34, 80. 
 
 Obs. 4. Qaando, which oriirinally is an interrogative, and al-o an indefinite temporal 
 advt-rl). is sometimes (rarely) used as a temporal conjunction : 1) as a synonym with qnum 
 lollowed by a perfect indicative, as: Anctoriiatem senatus exstilre sentio turn quando 
 ( = turn qiium) Alexa mortuo legatos Tyrum mvduius. Cic. Agr. 2, !<).- 2) As a synonym 
 of jHtst'iuarn with an imperfect: Consul trepidatiDnem injiciendam ratus. ^-/a/n/o vi pelli 
 non jHjterant, equitibus immis-is turbare prima signa hostium conatur, Liv.7, :^j. — 
 3) with a present, futurepr«8ent, future-perfect, and imperfect, as a synonym of quum 
 (whenever), or of ubi (as soon as), as : (/uando esurio. turn crej)ant intestlna. Plaut. 
 Men. 5,5. 27.— At tu, quando habebis, turn dato. lb. 3, 3, 23.— Opera reddetur. quando quid 
 tibi erit sutjv^ptuin. lb. 4, 2, lOO.— C^ui non comparCbunt, quando (piisque primum inventus 
 futrit, reddatur. Liv. 38, II. — Quando pars major in eandem senteniiam i/mt, bellum erat, 
 consensum. lb. 1,;^2. Sometimes a perfect indicative is used aft<'r quando with the 
 force of a future-perfect, as : Tu, quando Itomani salvus, ut spero, renisfi, yidGbis omnia. 
 Cic. Att. 0,4, 2. For the use of ^ua/<t/o as a causal conjunction seep. G87,Oii8. 13. 
 
 III. Temporal clauses with antcquam and pi'iusquani. 
 
 % 621, Clauses with anteqanm {antedquain) and pHusquam take their 
 
 predicates either in the indicative or in the subjunctive. Any tense may 
 
 be used in them except the future-present and the j)hiperfect indicative. 
 
 The imperfect indicative and the pUiperfect subjunctive rarely occur. 
 
 Obs. 1. Claases with antequam and priusquam are properly comparative clausep. the 
 same as Postquam-clau-es, antequam and priuxquam neing = ante (\)v\w^).. .quatn, 
 ' fooner \ or • earlier than \ ' before the time that \ ' b fore, as a conjunction '. Bot h ante 
 and ptius are frequently separated from quum by one or more words, and regularly so, 
 if the principal sentence is ner/alire (non ante raiit quam ; neque prius destiterunt quain 
 etc.). Such a separation, however, neither aft'ects rtie nature, nor the constructit)n of 
 the clause, although many grammarians take great pains to establish a diflTcreuce between 
 anlequam and ante quam. 
 
 CLAUSES WITH ANTEQUAM AND PRIUSQUAM. 667 
 
 OBS. 2. C,au.e. with antequam (-^^^^^^^^-'^^[^rrSlitSKr^^h:^^^^^ 
 often t.sed as ATTKiBUTE-CLArsES, betmr d pc Uu.tM^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^ predicate of the 
 
 predicate, in this '"-^^'i.''^^- "^"f^^^/.f, 1 ,t?, ij hcMW^^ indicative or in tlie imperfect 
 clause being indiscnmu.ately I' ^^^'j.', ;;^;,;Vl s^^ oppngnareut, urbemque Komam 
 subjunctive, as: Duc.ntis «''^^»- .7^, ^ '«^ ,.S":i:j'_Va^/dv a«/« diebus quam Syracu^« 
 camreut, in Ilaliam Galli ^'«''■^^*^'/"^' ""V.,r'Ti; o? 01 _Vespasianus natus est 9Mt/'?«en- 
 cf/^r./*/;/r,Otacili...in AlncanWm/.x .^^^ Ib-^^^^^^^^^ f,,!,,,,^^, aocuit anno 
 
 vio antequam A.igustus d.^'deret ^^x^!^^-^^^^^^^ antequam e^t 
 
 inso antequam natus est Ennius. ^y^'-^l^^^-},?^^^^^^ jb Am. 3, ll.--Tiie pluperlect 
 
 Jnortuus (some Cdd. have e<^e< "^'-^"T^J^m^Z Is m the p .perfect : Stajenus biennio 
 subjunctive occurs when ^^'^ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^S^n^ nummum se judicium 
 «,./.%//./m causani bonoruiu Sati.u r6C^/>^^^^^^^^ ,,i,h ant^qnanu and 
 
 ''^t Often in Ant.quam-clayses ^^^^ ^^i:^^^^'^^^ ^^ 
 the contr.Vv is said) 1 he choice of 'V^'^^^Vp^'J' n mm^^^^^ such i^" tances the mood is often 
 o any desc-iption which do not '•^Q;;»;^^ « f^^f/'^'^^^^^^^^ general meaning of tense 
 
 detei-mined l)y particular a""^/>f/ « f/^lio^^ » ^^j^^^ r^^^,^ ^re, hoxv- 
 
 and n.ood.and often by a "'^\ ^ff wb eh he t.-e of tense and mood in these clauses is 
 ever, certain get.eral Pf V),"'}!'::' ''^K-e^e '^ ^^^^^^^^^ "'""'1 ^" ^".?^^ronl 
 
 ^^^ X^S^i:^^^^^ ;^S;;i^j;^^-.xEUiXE predicate. 
 
 1 Anteqiiam^lauses referring to Indefinite Time 
 OB. 4. The niood and tense of the. j^l^emA^^ 
 
 u'ed in two meanings : 1) t",'^tate that the 7>y'«/^«^^^ ^^ ^^ negative p^.st- 
 
 Sf the clause has not tHke.i place before (an/.^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^j^,, the pr.nci- 
 
 quam) ; 2) to express that t^e action of the cm /^^^a«^^^ V speak before learmng gram- 
 pal action has talven place beh.re ,.^'X\Sw6 J^r^ w"flit our language even b^JoreweJiave 
 mar' may convey the meaning ^J^^^".^,^'!,*^- Jf f^i „^ under No. 1 ; or, ' We do rM 
 ZZdred (wiTHoLT having ^<^^l^^]'f^^^:,^^Ta^^^^^ falling under No. 2 If 
 
 (at any day) stu^ly our grammar, ^^le^s «e /^a^« '«^^^ J g^pECT indicative, or the 
 The clLsc. is used in the « '["^er ni^eamng ^l^l^\ll,lfZZ,,„^, it lakes the puesent ei^- 
 PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. ^^ ^^. ^'^."^p bartlie iiatuie of the perfect mentioned p. 300, 
 juNc . ivE only. The perfect " «^'^^'J^^ '\^' f/J^ ^A I negative subjunctive according to 
 7^43; the subjunctive present ha^ f^ "e ongiL to the fiust formula with per- 
 the principle explained p. 543. Ex. . j] .^J/;"^f IJ".? Jea m causa habeamus : we 
 
 rfc¥s: Membris utimur ;/rm^9"a'^/ ^J^ »'' '^^^^^^^^^^^^ know- 
 
 use our limbs before ive have ^^«/''^,^,["f. ^^'^if "3'^i '06 -O inanes nostras contentiOnes, 
 n- ; it might hi,' ^ priusquam sciamus) f;^J- ,^ "^^;,*; ^^'^' quam portum conspicere potut- 
 ine in m^dio spatio Siepe Iranguniur. et a« « ooi */M//^«r "i [ f imjjlicatur aliquo 
 
 Zit not conspicere /><>-^''-'^''v;;;;[/'Srop num esse't '"udiclSe. lb. Oft'. 1, ^-^- ll^;-^"\« 
 ^l^l/^ai^irs'^I.ScUS^^Slir^lrS^erath, 
 
 ri^-Nec enim ille res,nrat «'''^«««''^//'^f^^^^^'jf /I^I^^S" ovidentia est per quam 
 ]ii<n'f rirunt, ac si ita lutOri semper essent lb. ^ "• ^.-«^^^^ j^ [^^he reading as. it is 
 futflrmn aliquid ridilur antequanifacumj.^^^^ ^^^ ,^ ^ i, evident 
 
 .r V, n in our texts against the authority of /»»!' c«<|'^^; '^ { j n^i ante mors adveniet 
 Sat he reading «)ftliecc)(lices V^^^'i"^ !l,,""%\|'Tr-c 1 46.-Rorarii dicti a rore ; 
 '* am ChakUeOrum oromisKi ^'^'',:f^7 /.^^^Z^"^^ J^^amnSi '(where plait must be taken 
 mi bellum comminebant ante : qiunl ante r.^.f q.^Xin -2) FiR=^T formula with sub- 
 
 -77;;;;;;;,am-clan.c8 referring' to indennijct.mc^ 
 c!l"tincla/«U. Cicl>hil.5-,n,47. 
 
GG8 
 
 TEMrORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 adopse jxtte/^t qumn qnipqnam ventflmm op"=o qr/eaf (whicli mijrlit be j)of>/if, which is* not 
 U80(l lor the Kikc of fiipliony on jiccoiiiit of tlic i)r«'Codiiiir jtofesO. C\c. Hep. •,'. .'}, 5.— Ante 
 riilrf/i>/s fnls^MiiJitiOnt'in (/i/<iiti Honum a'/(/hl//n/s (which iniL'hr hv aiidinittnn). Sen. Qn. N. 
 2. 12.— (^iii stTvflvit (do ccpIo). noii hal)itis comitiis. Krd piiunquayn hab^uuivr {or /labita 
 sunt) dihet iitintuire. Cic. Phil. 2. 32— 3) Sfcond foumila : Trajroedi (\\\ox\(\'\c, antequam 
 proriNfifient (not pjvnutitiaivnt), voccm ciibantci* seiisim cxciiant ; Tra<;«'dians every day 
 izraduHlly rais^o thcr voici's ht-fori; tlioy ^p»•ak hmdly iJ. *'. they d«) not h|)«'ak h)ndly unices 
 they have jjradnally raised their voices*). Cic. Or. 1,'5'.>. 2')!.— Medico (iilii^cnri jirinsqtiam 
 cohetf/r (not coiidtns esf) a'^ro adhihCre mcdccTnani, consiietOdo valentis cof//ioscinda est 
 (I. e. Phys'ician-' oui^ht not to «;ive medicine, unless they know the constitution ol the 
 ]>atient wlien in a healtliy stale). lb. Dr. 2.44, l.'^»}.— Tenii)estas tuintifuranfequam furffaf, 
 cnpa/if a'ditleia (wf<qtm'in corrnaiit («lot corruTtKnt). Sen. Ep. 103. — In oinniinis neufotiis 
 jninsq'Kvn aqqredxdn^ adhihtiida est prai)araiio diligens (.not agyretsue es, from a double 
 reason). Cic. OH". 1, 21. 
 
 2. Antequam referring to defnite time, dependent on Kon-preterites. 
 
 Oi^s. .5. The temporal relation of every clanso is a double one. 1) in regard to the time 
 of the jjrineip.il predieate ; 2> in regard to the time of the speaker. Aitteqinnn-rlanse.^ 
 have tlie peculiarity that they ^/«Y/y.* are fitim!K in regard to the principal jjredicate, 
 hut in regard to tlie speak«"r's time, they may be either future, or |)rcstnt. or past. If 
 they are i)rescnt or past, the two temporal relations (»f the clau8>' are m cohjlirt with each 
 othi-r, which ac<'<>unts for tiie peculiar treatment of these cIaus«'S in regard lo tense and 
 mood. If the princi))al predieate is a non-puktkiutk. th»- mood and tense of the predi- 
 cate of the Antequam-clau^e is treated according to the followinir rides. 
 
 1. If the principal i)iedicate is in tlie ^^^sK^T. the predicate of the clau.=e is either in 
 the present subjunctive, or in the present indicative, as : Hie. iiriusquani peteret consul.1- 
 tum. (insanlvit) : nunc qtiocjue. con>ul, priiisQ^Kiin casfra fidmf (before seeini.' tin* camp) 
 aut hostem, ?7/A<7//?7. Li v. 22. .■;'.).— Omnia fecerit oporlei, pri'iyqiiani' i\\\q\\'n\ jxiafnht. Cic. 
 Phil. 7.9 2r>.— Mill! certinn fisf, aiite(juam ad meani deleiisionem vfijiio, illlus ufi c«»nfessi- 
 OiK'. ib. C'a'-;. 0. 24— /V(/Cf/ enim Chrysippo qnum iiiterroirCtur ' tuia paita sint. annk 
 MiTLTA ' aliquanto »n'/* q>unti ad nnilia )ien>tii(if. quiescere (where the subjunctive may 
 be taken a>e (puisi-Hihobliciue). II). Ac. Pr. 2. 2".», 93. 
 
 2. If ilur ])rincipal predicate is an actual (or virtual) FUTrRE-pnESFKT (including 
 inip<-raiives), the jjredicate of the clause is either in tlie rnKSKNT-i.NDirATivE. or in the 
 rKi:sENT-srB.Ji'NCTiVK, or ill then TruK-rKUFEcr. but not u\ theFfTiHE-riiESE.NT*. The 
 present indi. ative is irenerally used in cKiuses uf this kind if the aetion of the cfaiise is 
 repre-seuted as inivi'diatflij iintniu'Ut. or a- dependent on the will of the speaker : bnt 
 goiuetimes, in tliis instance, the iire-eiit .••■»///;"//('/i/v occurs, which is always used if the 
 action of tlie clause is represented either as uncertain, or as an act prohibited by the will 
 of the speaker unless tlie principal action takes place. The fulure-peifect is useil : (a) 
 If it is stated tliat the prineii)al action is not to happen, unless the action of the clause 
 has ha])pent'd before. In this instance the i)rincipal sentence is always actually or 
 virtually iie<iatir'\ 0) If the doer is represented as vot to finish the action of the chtnse 
 before t.e principal action will happen. In this instaice the principal action is aftir- 
 mativet. 
 
 Ex. : I)E. Vr'iva reitpondeo qvam roqo. Ch. Prxu^ in emis quam rtndo. pater. Plant. Merc. 
 Z,ii.]l8.—An(eq>iain ad sententiam n^/fo, de me ])}U\cii dicam. Cic. Cat. 4, in, 20.— .4 r//^- 
 quam pro L. Miiieii:! dicere in-<lil'io. j)ro me ipso jjaiica diann. li). Miir. 1.— C'lii pni/<- 
 gMffmde ceteris whu^ re^xxtdfo, de amicitifl. . .pauca dicam. Ih. VhU.H. 1.3. — Anft^quatn 
 de incommodis Siciliag dico. pauca inihi videniur €.<>« de provinciie diirnitatc diceru/a 
 (virtual future). lb. Verr. 2, 1, 1.— Si (lueuuiuain nacttis eris qui perferat. litteras des (vir- 
 tual future) antequam discedimus. \h. AiX.\Q,\b.— Antequam opprimit\\\x,ma]ov&C]\\Q 
 
 ♦ If the predicate occurs in the iirst jterson «ubjunctive of the third and fourth conju- 
 gations, its form is the same as that of the future-present. Such i)redicates must not 
 l)e mistaken for futures. There is no passage extant, in classical lauiriiaL'e. with a fut- 
 ure-present in those forms which are diflerent from the present subjunctive.- In antc- 
 cla>»sical and pustclassical style, however, future-presents occapi(mai!y occur, referriuj; 
 both to deliuite and indetiuite time: Pnii<q>iatn istam j)Ui:nam puqndlx), daboaliaiii pug- 
 nain. Plant. PscmkI. 1, 5, 110. — B<tves;;/7//.s7^^/a//i in viam aqt'x. pice liquids corniia inflina 
 niigiiito. Cato H. II. 72.— /'/i'/NV'"^"^* messmi pines. i)orcam pra?ci(laiieain fieri opoitet. 
 lb. 131. — Pniisqiiam porcum feminaui imrmilCihis, Jano struem commoveto. lb.— Quia 
 criminum mvidia pro reo est, ptiw-iquain probabitur. Quint. 4. 3. 6. 
 t If ihe principal predicate is an epistolary perfect or imj)erfect, having the force of a 
 resent, the predicate of the clause is always in the imperfect mbjunctive: Priusquam 
 d scireni^ nihil ausus sum euuicre. Cic. Alt. 11, 11, 2. 
 
 I 
 
 CLAUSES \S'ITn ANTEQUAM AND PRIUSQUAM. 
 
 669 
 
 ho«tium n<-mina obi^munt iter, por \\o^...€rvmpdmvs (virtual f"M- ,V^- 22,50.->S'inA 
 
 s.Vsionibus tantum ufaiVvrxxx eo tuCri sex le^iones poss.s ^l\'J'^-.-^^^--,l);'^^^^ 
 anteaunm reniat in P.mtum, litteras ad Pcunpejum ;/(t//fC. lb Agr. 2, 20.-.4/?/f^ mm ae 
 or ec^erti" oratorii- c/?C(7///'v.v, Vi^/^/^/r dicendum esse de genere ipsTus artis. 11). Inv. 14.- 
 K/^i (^7/^? oc irculo 6Xr?'/a.s redde roponsuui. Li v. 4.5. l2.-E.:o enim ;>;e.y,s<7''am ad 
 fineiiC;^^ .«.s/i.?6o. lb. Ac. Pr. 2. ^2^.-P7'iusquam «f7.7r^^^ar ad causa Cor- 
 
 eM ou ddam cl . commtlni conditinne omnium nostrum covwiemoravdum ridetuj-lh 
 P H lb' ? s - ^* O'/am de repubiica dicaw, expouam vobis breviter consilium proleciOnis 
 rneae" i'b Phil 1 -AddQca n qui hunc tollant, pnusquam turbarum quid Ja«a« am- 
 D it" PI lu M e'n 5 T^.-VidUamux. prvn<qnum agoredianmr ad leges ^i"ff"l"^ Jim 
 ,^ tm'.im e leM< ib Le<' 2. 4.-Ante provinciam sibi decreiam a-'diet quam p^>tujrtt 
 natiitam(iiic u i.. lo. i^» .,. ^.^. i o i _De Cartha<dne verGr 7)0n ante desi- 
 
 S.,5" lb " c<- i\ll-:MH,m,n aliqno loco w,.«d(ro. neqve lonuae a me, "7"f '™- 
 
 vfwiiMiu imneratoiem iiicu>ilre ryz/r/m finTtum helium ridero. Ln.23. l<J.--bomaimes ^oul 
 ,ej " > in^n^ a perfect subjunctive is used in I^""^^»;';^ 
 
 li... I i„ Ml.ire nf I future Derlect even if the clause Is not sul)ol)lique. as: ^ullopacto 
 ^S^;i!.SSi;W^«mS:c^lir£... Plant. Mil. Gl. 4, 3,.3. ,?f «^l^'^jl'^i^"- ^^Jl;;?;^^'^ 
 elause Wi.uld in an ind.-pendent form, have the pre>ent_ indicative it takes «' t^^^r J^e 
 1„ ,^yVt s bi mt v^^^ subjunctive according to the law ol consecution, 
 
 ^T u. m^S'a'li:.;;;/;.^;^'^ prU^qU p.m^c.rW.r Dc^abellam ^onsulem es.e 
 
 j,j.Jrum (iNi.KP.: Priusquam pr^Jichcor, l^*>l^'^^-'i=l';V"A\f V];.,dkate of^ clause is 
 «^ If till, nriiieioal oredicate s a FUTtiKE-PEKPECT. the piedicatc oi liie ii.iipe js 
 aUram Z\\Tfuue^^^^^^^ : Si quid mihi pnas accident quam hoc t.-|ntum nialum n- 
 
 d^TlV^V^V '^^^^ dyratinm^r a,.ieq"«m iHornm anc pites vias n'tionesque 
 
 ;tnV/i?*Ib!on3;k-Neca4 vmenmus quam C. Flammium patres asave- 
 
 rint. Liv. 23, 3. 
 
 3. Anteqmin referring to defnite time, dependent on Preterites. 
 
 On., r. If in clau<e«» of this kind an indicative is used (Obs. 7). it isalmost always a per- 
 vv^T i\?di, at^ve An imV^^^^^^^^ sometimes, but rarely, occurs if the principal 
 
 ^""^ ''ji'PoVf/,^.^^? i s^;;:/'llt^ indicative never occurs, because 
 
 ^.T'n'^t'c. woti 'yiS^^^ '»'« '>V>'«>^-^'-->' ti"'e i^^'.'ich requires a per- 
 
 % n £. ve ^; "t^l^relalhm to the principal predicate ^;^^^^:^^^r;^^:'l^:^ZA:^d 
 
 *-iV*ie .rwrNcTivE i. n.od. .he predicate of the clatise i» reyntarly Pl«ja;,;>^';;| 
 
 siibU nctive of non-r.ant!,. In this instance. Fnusqna7n.uotanf^^^^^^ 
 
 PleiViue infertecti s.nt P^u^-am X^^^^^'^^^pr^^-^ue quam^idlr'enf, 
 
 ;,,i.5y.«m mamis coJ^^e^^^^^ „{, ^arento, aves nan 
 
 a^X"^^ (Which P-ve^^^^ 
 
 - * M.7st granim:TH^iiI7^i^.:^tli^^r7^ ^" Autequaiu- 
 
 Clauses, wuich is crroneoua as f howu by the above-meuiioucd pabtagcs. 
 
670 
 
 TEMrORiVL CLAUSES. 
 
 Qui tmii'f, alternm Ciinatuim conflcit. lb. 1, ?^.— Tyrannus, pt-iu-tqiram a mcdiJl acio 
 f!iiccnn'eretut\ ex.-pirilvit. \h.^:^,m.—Pn>i^qriam ad ictutn tcfl vnnret, capest^it fufjam. 
 Ih 2t» 40 —11 tin- predicate of tlie clause is the verl) yw.v.^^', the mood, in this ill^t•lll«•.^ isj 
 Hoitietimes» (rarely) foiir.d in ih*.- perfect indicafivt, as : Fran is lil)er<>s pnu-i \\\a. pnravit 
 qiiam iHi haiic a naiara proprmui lucem acciptre pofue/vnf. C'ic. Clii. 11. 31. 1 hi« is 
 iilvvayt» the c.ise if the perfect tense refers to indefinite time, depending ou nou-preteritei?. 
 See the Ex. Oiis. 4. No. 1. , . . , i • 
 
 '>) If the action of th(! clanse (li<l take place, but the door if» represented as havinir on 
 purimsc roresfall^d or antidi>af'd it by perf..rmin;: the principal actK.n. This siilyniic- 
 tive has Ui.- nature of a t»ubjunctive of intention (virtually suboMique), as : Postnniiua 
 w;-i'/.sv/'/rt;;i uirbe) exlret, vcAem Victoriie dedicilvit. Liv. 10.:«.— IlannibaJ lladruniC-tuiu 
 perffl -it, omnia, pri'isquam ixcederet pu-rna. expertus. lb. :i0,3r>.— Fal.ius pnuii(/>/am ad 
 coiijcctuin teli venlr>-f, aut nianun» cnnAerevet, et suos a fuiril ( fln-il, et ab nimis ferOci 
 puMul iK-siIs coiuinuil. W^.'-Xi.'i^S.—Primqnam coinitiis in inseiiuentem annum consules 
 rovare//^ Camillus de Latlnis populis ad «Mi-ltum reiiilit (where the connection shows 
 that Cainillus on purpor^e made his report Itefore the follo\vin«,' election), lb. 8, 13. — 1 isidas 
 Vri\L.< ad liostein pervenlr.; cupiCbat quain de re male ;re-tjl fama ad suos perien^rel. 
 N. p. Dat. ♦>.— Xeqiie eum prima opinio fcfellit : nam pervCnit (ad ca»tra) prummam Pom- 
 
 pejiis.vfAi/Irg/xw.se/'. C:es. B. C.3, 47. ,..,... .u ^ / » .,u 
 
 Obs 8 Aside from these instances, fi/Z^er the perfect indicative or the imperfect sub- 
 junctive is indiscriminately used in Ante(iuam-clauses flepeiulenlon preierite predicates, 
 a<- Omnia i-*ta ante, facta sunt //'/am isle Italiain t^'tirjit. Cic. V'err. 2, 2. «if».— \ eiii.sti 
 inVtus, qu>>d ei,'o pn>t.^(/'tain Uxpii ofpUfi. seM^i. Ih. Vat. 2,4.-Qu:p .sunt tibi inimicitne 
 cum CO ciijus piii'dia ante possedisii qnani ipsiim co(jimb<(i. lb. K. A. 50.— Crassiis, ante- 
 U'lani no- in forum ven'vnu<, judicio centumviraii banc senteiitiam defeiidir. Ii).(!ec. 
 ly —Oh-essis. prliiitqnam alter consul adrenit, conimt-iltus ex moistilxis Samiiitiuin 
 iiivecti erant Liv.«», 1.3.— Equidem. anteqwun tuas l^gi littiras, horninein ire ciipiebam. 
 Cic •\tt Z 7 2— Cui fiii semper amicus u/;/e'7//am ille reipublic;»'boiiisqiieomnil)ns t.im- 
 auerte e4 }'actiis inimlcus. lb. Phil. 12. !). •ri. — Ant>q'tani ddectdla t^^t Athenu-nsium ci vitas 
 Inc lau(Ledicendi. miilta jam memorabilia effecerat. lb. Brut. 13. 4;». But : .\tiie.iuam con- 
 pules in Etniriam prrvehlrenf, SenOnes Galli multitudine iiiirenn ad Clusiuin veiienint. 
 Liv 10 'Ziu—Priu-^q'Him clamor Otlleretur, concurreteturqne, piillarius cecidit. lb. 10. 40.— 
 Prills concuirit Voliimnins qumii Appius ad hostem jiervetnret (without havinir the pur- 
 nose of otltstrippill^ Ai)pius). H). 10, lU.-O solem ii)sum beatissimuin, ^xm anteqmni se 
 ahderet, fu-ientem vidit Antonium. Cic. Phil. 14. 10, 27. On the whole, ti.e zndiaitir^ in 
 clauses which do not fall under the rules mentioned in Obs. 7, is more fieqii.'iitly used t lian 
 tlie subjunctive. Tins is especially the case when the principal nenteiice is ne<,Mtive, m 
 constructions. orrespondiiii; to the Emrlisli ' ;/o/. . JUr, ' not . . .bfifore \ as: Omnes hosten 
 ter«'a verterunt, «'(VM^ vr'ina fuircre destitCrunt //warn ad (lum.Mi Hhenum jm-renirunt 
 (where, hovvever,thereadin«,MsdoubMul). C'jes B. (J. 1, 5.3.— .\>f'q«ncvere«//^'7'/a//i Latnim 
 o\x\r\M 8iit)*'nlre : nor d\d they rest till (Uefnrv) ffteij had .<iib<lued the wlioie ot Lhiiuiu Liv. 
 ^,Vi—Non piiuA 8um conritua misericordiam aliis commovCre qnani nii-erico;diil >v///t 
 ip-^e captu.^ Cic Or 2,47. 105— AVc-ostendCrunt bellum ptiutt qnani intnlerunt. Liv. 1, 11. 
 —Nee ante fu«':e fitiem qxam Patras rentum est, fecit. lb. 35, 2»i.— Ave prius seiisCre qi/am 
 eoH \nx oppresdt. lb. 9. 30.— AVc /m'e linlium r»tq'/am tribflnus miliium, <}ui<iue ciicuiu 
 eum constiterant, interfecti mnt. lb. 41, 2.— Even if such Antequam-clauses are ^'//x///- 
 liqiie, their predicates are frequently placed in the perfect indicative, as : ScitOte eqniti iii 
 Komflnum biduo retentiun, n''qne ante dimvisntn qnani ad conditiOnes ejus di-f)e/Jtug est. 
 Cic V'err 2 3 21 — Oiiidam aiictOres sunt. . .«^c «/</e ad consules lamam ejus ciadis />^/-. 
 latani qnam in conspectu /"//Srt^ GallOrum eqiiites. Liv. 10, vH». Most grammarians (for 
 instance. Madvi<r, Mririnir,'Kuhner) assert that Antcqiiam clauses dep.-ndeiit on nei,'ative 
 sentences alway^^ have their predicates in the indicative. But this is by no means tlie 
 case. Even in such constructions, the subjunctive is not rare, as: ^on />nwdestiiit 
 mittere (pmm i)acem cum eis contirmnrtt. Liv. 45. n.—Primqnatii id scirem, tn/nl aiisus 
 sum sumere. Cic. Att. 11, 11, 2.— .Vi; concusso quidem motu terr.e tb.-airo, /////<'^cantilre 
 destilit qnam inchoStum altsolveret v6txov. Suet. Ner. 20. Thus in the passa«>:^^C ic. 1 ar. 
 «i, 1, quoted Obs. 5, 2 ; and in the two passaizcs quoted Obs. G. In the i)assaL'<- Mep Kum. 
 4 {" ^on prius distracti sunt quam alterum anima reliqmrit\ where the perlect subjunc- 
 tive stands against the law of consecution), the readinj; is i)robabIy corrupted. -Some- 
 times the indicative must be used to avoid ambi-xuity, as : Prins vriiisset qnam tu 
 adrenisfi; lie would have come before you arrived. Plant. Ep. 5, 1.22. Here aUvenirta 
 would represent the action as hypotlietical, like that of the principal sentence. 
 
 Obs 9. Very ranly* the pluperfect subjunctive occurs in Anle.iuam-clauses it is 
 found : 1) sometimes in attriV.i iiive Antequam-clitu ses, and in thos e refernni; to indefinito 
 ""• Mosr^raminarians assert (rather boldly) that t\\v. pln})€rfed oubjunctire is one of tlio 
 'regular tenses after antequam and priaaquam, and occurs inxyrefrtquentUj than the per- 
 fect indicative (I). 
 
 DUM-CLAUSES AND EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 671 
 
 time, if dependent on p^terit^ [^S^JJ^.rSs^^nff^e^o^e^^f^^lulllSI^^^^^Snnc^ 
 fewpassa-es ol t'li^P"^'*'""^^"^ ^^^'^j;^, f.^"^^^^^^ d.^ meo adventu andlre 
 
 tive, accord ng to Obs. 7, ^«- "^' «^; .,^;^'^?'Slc 4 98 -Ende Serapion cum epistoia 
 potuissent, in Maced..niam l?*"7,'^^•^A^„:\'i"^^^^ eo scripsi^se antea (Cicero, on 
 
 Venit, q»''nW>n''-^'7''«'/^«F7*ff ' ^^^^^^^^ told Serapion what is stated by him). 
 
 v''Kri(;^'7r''3?r;raewp'^^^ 
 
 1). Att. 10, 17. 1.-3) in tiicw P ■ '>,\'^' ^^^. ^ ,„,^ ^„,„ „,,,,^,. „„.. mortua est nuam tu na- 
 
 \ 
 
 ccppturosl^Unm quam etc: Indkp. : non «"f «' ^ J'^f; V-","*/," 9^ may take a 
 
 /ira m.y al™ occur, accordii,« lo r ile P-l'^^'^j;,- f,^\V%'X,,„„ i„.r nt. in Banc reipn- 
 lire woNlcl have bevn used, «>: D'f ' ">^- J'^l Se voV vchcm popuhim solli- 
 
 pendent on a,l/e qmim ..r pnuo '''""" "'Jli'"!,"" ;\'<,i'^o;„s^S"e"' ^ pnuoq'mm «rbs 
 iint. ncsant .e Indc ;«■<«« '/'.';""«".'''„ "'^, '' fdlV S rdcpR-t,!.™/ es.c' ...que ad 
 
 Ml lie iM>nd(i claris-atio cjsot, nee ''''''««""'** ''^^^"'^ii.Vu _Ariii;1ti uuUum aide 
 mSu pugni «;/am «wrtento fccSruut ( = aulcquam ,mrere,Uur). lb. 21, U. 
 
 IV Temporal clauses with dtim, donee, quoad, axd qitmndiii. 
 
 8622. />,«, if used as a synonym of ?««m ^v-ith the subjunclh-e in 
 the temporal meanins '«/«fc'. generally requires the predicate of the 
 clause to be in the puks.nt indicative (0ns. 2-5).--D«», ^^f • ^;"^^- 
 .nnd guamdi,,, if used in the meaning '«^ '"«? «.', gener.a ly have the 
 predicates of their clauses in the indicative, the tei.se being different 
 
 CO dilg to the general rules on tenses (Obs. 6 f.,ll.).-i^»», .-<^, -d 
 aonec. if used in .he meaning W«'.take tho.r l-"f;''>' '"J,^^ 
 INDICATIVE, and partly in the suejcnctivb, according lo the special 
 
 • "o»I ["r'^rdmlremtcanin.» in whict. *™ (;™Poral) occu;. 
 
672 
 
 TEMrORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 DUM-CLAUSES AND EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 673 
 
 fXfcpii^Jquamadvmf, or donee «luvi) pe,rernt)^ ''^^Tn'^^i o i ,1 n7e ^e;» e4 
 
 iii/dfruzi^^ --^F^-%vf HAH ^^^^- """'""'= 
 
 Durn moliu/dur, dum coinunlur annus tsL ler. lleaiit. A A lu. 
 
 1 DuM as a Si/nomjm of quum (while). 
 Ob^ «> If the PI inrioMl pmlicate is a pkesknt or future, the c«"J"nc/\?" ' ^f j^f,'.?.^ 
 
 qu., d'un certa et pauca et nui^.m '//j <"' ;. 'f «J/Jj^r '^.010,1,^ hLi^S 0.1 acccperint, 
 niKMiflv such futures» occur 111 ante(hi!«.-ual bivie, as . v^uou ok.», ru . ... i 
 
 3 /fofeam ^S in modio. .iu^ailo. .e«iertii .eiui..e« Uahuniur. Ca.o It U. Uo. 
 no. -^ ir H.onnnrinal Dredicatc is a preteuite, the Dum-chmsc may frequently be 
 
 p. ws. UBS. J), oui iH'i, " " "^ ' ,. . „f thP eliuxe re<Milarlv is n the />m>v/»' indicntire, 
 !',r" m";"; \Y ^"f ;«..VqnVv Mii'enn» ;; pp'ilS.nr, prima n„c,; u ,u.,ri, .^re«. e,c 
 
 — Sometimi 
 
 con.. toaill,m.fe'rf, </"/« lu accusauoncni comparires. (. c. Mur 24 4.. 
 
 yECT INDICATIVE '"«^ead ol u th • /J/t^ «^ i , Vent ,V imperJltor ^m^ aitercatio w7a >^st. 
 
 dered by iookint? at the j:<>''"*'Ction. - . (.. v^..^ 35 7.): Apud Xenophontom 
 
 + Peculiar I. tlie use of d;/m with a^^^^ ^^^l ,„|. „„iu,m 
 
 morieiis Cyrus hiecdicit: ^"'J!,^ " '/'^'J^" "\* ' For vou .«'i not ^ee 
 
 Dam^lnnoes to "ivfi to them the force of certain Postquam-clansef» with the pluperfect 
 (If A'l Or- 4 Ih- />wm in unam partem oculosanimosque hostmm certamenarerfora/, 
 phiribus locis Hcalis capitur murus. Liv. 32. 24. Probably this i« the ouly passage pc- 
 curm" in good proge. in which dum is thus "^ed with a pluperfect. Perhaps Livy 
 wrote 'atv/y^T^r according to the usage mentioned No. 4. bometime?, in the writers 
 of h.- silver a«^e, dum is used in the same meaning with a presmt indicative, as : Quod 
 ace itinihi^/'7/A c<.rrupturadicendi genu» revocare ad sevenOra judicia con^^.^rfo ( m 
 S.iU/Vc.of myeliorrstorecair; the connection showing hat 'J^^f^-^J^l'^^f^.'^ 
 meant to have this force, and not the meaning 'while'). Quint. 10, 1, 125.-4) The histo- 
 rian- not rarelv usec/«miuthe meaning 'M'Ai/e' with the sub-tunctive imperfect in 
 l^V^^n'^^^lJ^V^^^^^ by the Dum-clause the motive of the main action, or 
 
 ' THE lu. IT time ' for performing the principal action. To express such pregnant mean- 
 in." i Kn-lish, the passage must be generally recast as : /?.y/i intentus 111 eum se rex 
 toTusamtere^ alter da.aiu sectlrim in caput dejtcit ; While the kingV mind was wholly 
 en' "i-ed with him, the other ^viade use of this opportunity ' to strike his head with the axe, 
 L ivl 40 -^o^te8. dum, pnedte magis quam pugme memores, tet-erent tempus, triam 
 K.)inani con.d()bati ad pnetorium /-^t/^wnj; (The tiiarii made use of the enemy's negh- 
 iece to return etc ). lb. 2, 47.-PeIopida8 vallum incendit, dumgue ignibus subrmveren- 
 ^ur (Where the vulgate reading, acc.rding to a bad conjecture, has submxyventur ) hos- 
 ted pse mivium s>rperavit (PeTop. made use of the time while the enemy was kept back 
 bv the fire, to cross the river). F.ont. Strat. 1, 5, ^i.-IJum ea in Samnio gererentur liom^- 
 nis in Etruria interim bellum ingens concitur i^hQ Etrurians made use of the time 
 while the Komans were engaged in the Samnite war, to raise an enormous war against 
 the n) Liv 10 1^ -Rex. quatuor millia armatorum, dnm recens terror esset, Sotflsam 
 fS (he made use of the time while the fright was yet fresh in their memory, to send 
 a pHrty for the capture of Sotusa). Ib.30,9.-So, when the I)um-clause_ denotes the 
 mStive or aim of the main action (dmn = vt interea) : Perseus, d«m /rwar6^_ res, lega 
 tos Koniam ad aniicitiam p:iterna.a reservandam wisit (= ut mterea Jirmxire posset). 
 Uv 4 58 -51 Later writers, and poets for the sake of the metrum, frequently u^e dum 
 (while)'with the eubjunctive with<.ut any particular point, when in good prose, either 
 «^ mwitl ail imperfect suDjunctive, or dum witii a present indicative would be used, 
 Ks : Pvrrhus in Gfseciam regressus, dum Argos oppugnaret, ictu tegulae prostratus est. 
 Aur.Vict.;i-),10*. ^., _ - ^. 
 
 Obs. 5. Frequently dum is used as a synonym of quum (while) to express relations 
 
 not purely temporal : . ^ j, a- * w» 
 
 1. T<. denote an action which in the principal sentence is .represented according to its 
 Pisrniticanceand import, </'/m being rendered by w/nle, when, in as much of, by with a parti- 
 cipial Ues^^^^^^^ this relation («.37, OBS.2). Such Dura-clauses have 
 th . r p. "iica les in the indicative, the tense bein- either the same as that of the principa 
 fe liute orinthe present indicative, as in strictly temporal clauses, as: Dum Aristo 
 c^ I'vrrho in V rtnte 'sic <.m..ia esse vf^uPruut ut cam rerum selectiOne e.xspoliarent, yir- 
 tQtem ipsam^XA-r///./ ; w/dle (when) Ari-to and Pyrrho held the .opinion (or 'Aristo 
 etc 6// /SnVlhe opinion', or 'i/» as much as they held the opinion '). they destroyed 
 Jhe Ve?v idci of Virtue'. Cic. Fin. 2. 13.-/^«m ilia traddbam, qwA^ijovebam dolOres meos. 
 lb At 12 18 1-Neminem tequiOrem reperiet quam me, cm, dum se civibus impiis 
 jLm « A/V iiimlcus «luam amicus esse r««^/i/. lb. Phil. 5, ^«.-T-aweor erat hostium 
 S4 <7//// ab n^^^^^^ multitiKline Ireti, sntisidia mitfunt ad castra oppugnanda. Liv. 2, 
 4V-I Si 1) m c auses are subol.lique. they have their predicates in the subjnnc ive 
 wi^h enses ac^rd ng to the L-enenil rules, as : DUisfi, dum Plancii in me meritum 
 lrMl^::^l^r^^ mcere e cloaca. Cic. ^'«"c. 40,95 -P«r^;.d.,m t.b. roganti voluertm 
 <il>,ii.niii ine iniDrudeiitiam susctpisse (see. p. 41^, rso. .J).lb. urin. «1, -i.«5. 
 
 rF e; e. y tl e ac on of th "principal sentence is represented as a consequence of 
 
 an acti'' of the K.me doer, designated by the Dum-clause, in ^yhlch instance the predi- 
 
 ? te of the Di i-clause is an equivalent of an ablative gerundial, and may be rendered 
 
 v a part cip 1 after ^by\ The predicates of such clauses are either in the present 
 
 InV.c-atIve! or in the PERFECT indicative, as: Hoc loco nimium oy>ene consumttur a 
 
 nhri^es the adverb yvu by ' du?n eram robiscum\ giving to eram the force of a present 
 Krinc pal pr'u^^^ Greek *«pareUikewise referring to a time present 
 
 II; theVpiSker ' XJm sum vobiscum ' would Represent the imperfect videbalis as a real 
 
 ^'^*^Pecuiiar is the (very rare) use of a pluperfect snhjunctire after dum, in place of quum 
 wMh r,tpe feet sibju^c.ivJ, as : Dun ((he rea.iing '.^'1""^ I ,^/,/"7,^, amid'eoTi>ci^ 
 al quot spectatis paribus affectos dimisisset, conciOne inde adyocata t f f P"^^"* 'J^J 
 ? H^"ertu?. Liv. 21! 43. This use of ^a,n seenis to have ^««n .oW^vto^, and to have crept 
 inadvertently into the passage. So in Hut. B. Afr. bl , ib. 88 , B. Hisp. -w. 
 
 
674 
 
 TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 Stoici 
 is coil 
 
 I 
 l> 
 
 . dum morho corpornm rornparalvr morhnrnm ammi .imilitm o j Too much ime 
 
 obseq.or his a.l<>l;'-ennbns ui,. e^j^M^.^^^^^^^^^^^ ^-.^,, aflVnltur, ante 
 
 sciu-m esse s^nn of>ntnA lb. or.*. 4. V"';; // /, Vpit 2 2 ;w — Sucli daiises are .-ft en 
 honnn tortiam noetic de foro 'i^" ^' ;f f'^^^" l^i!,^ //^^^^^^^ hahfre parata 
 
 equivalent to an adversative .^'•''"l'';; * "' "",-,^,'^;„^^^^^ i,/;r^?/= Caesar, wlule wish- 
 
 injr that others should have a rca<ly majenal o c^^^^^^ r^ Brut 75 -mi -Most frequently 
 vvritini? (or : C«-sar wi>hed etc., '^^ '''' 'J,^,^^"/;^^^^^^^^ same d„or, the ,,r\ncii.al 
 
 .uch Dum-clauses(ienotea_^^7H'«/^o^. «^«-^^ of Ihe .ioer, 
 
 llorteusii consilio. qui, <Vim reiyix tsi ,.c ^ ''"^'^,;' ':-' i" . .j _itn \/wm 
 
 nail iiiud. slJtius esse ilium in /"^«-^reiinqtn ^:}'-;;;,;;^;;,^^^ ^;^;.^:;;^:,,^^;^'^; 
 
 [iissimiUinius. lb. I^nit. 81, <2Hi.-r»m c uuis > ii « .nnnrioia Veneris 
 
 lique, it is eith.r placed m »»»^ y>f :^ ^, .;' ^^^ ,. c( nstituHmus. omn.-m 
 
 reqiiiredbv the law o! consecution: J"*»!' r,'. '^;, ,, ./:'VV/»7; Jes-e awUoo'O'^. Cic.Clu. 
 ntilitfltem nos hujus interdict.. <^'^''Jf!0 / l;''^4i8 No sVdicVVr^^^^^ a me ...v. 
 ll.-lloc vero dico ./.m brenu-r ^^^^0^^^^^^^^^^ JitSion: KHiqunm est j.t ubi nunc 
 
 S'!l";^S;n;i s:n;is i;>lias quam:l^m illatn vetereu. ..nCnnur, .imus in null., lb. 
 Fam. y, ••>, 3. , 
 
 2 Dum, and its synonym^, in the meaning ' as long as. 
 
 Clauses is regularly tne 'N» ^■;^'^\ >. , ;;-,;; ^, ^ „„n-j.reterite, or a preterite. Not 
 tnilly treated accordinuMis the pnntipaiprtmuu^^ > ^ndetic antecedent tarn- 
 
 onl/r/^/amrfi^/, but also dnm «P<» ^''-y'^ Jren ^^^^^ ^.,„,j,„,,. 
 
 ^i^/, fn which instance Q''<pndiu '^'^'^'^J'''^^^^^^^^^ tantumvmin, tantl<per, 
 
 XrS i^o^!''^^'^ :^;;ri?^;;Sints orten ^and always m have a re- 
 stHctlve niennins ( = only fO long os). 
 
 
 DUM-CLAUSES AND EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 675 
 
 ITE principal predicates, the predicate of the clause is almost always in the same tense 
 as the principal |)ndicate, so that a principal predicate in the present requires the pred- 
 icate of the Dnm-clause in the present indicative.— Hence, if the principal predicsne 's 
 in the future-present, the predicate of the clause must be in the future-present, and not 
 in the future-perfert *, as in other temporal clauses, and in conditional clans» s. Ex.: Eo 
 ma"is n-spublica, dum per deos immurtMlIs licet, I'rui debet suinmi viri vita atque virtOte. 
 Cic L M 20 W.).—Ihim xSmor abeKt (as long as there is no fear), a te non discMit aud.icia. 
 lb Phil 2 :^H —Dum ixttestift, dum licft, jrrovidete ne duriOrem conditiOnt-m statuatis 
 orilini vestro quam f.-rre possit. lb. Kab. Post, fi.— /)wm istis consiliis uferii>, non potes 
 cs<«' diutunius. lb. Phil. 2. AA.—Dum genus hominum, dum P. R. nomen exftabif. tua ilia 
 pe«tifera secfssio nominabitur. lb. 2.'il. — Dum vos de vobis aliquid titnebifis, illi num- 
 quam de se pertimef<cenf. lb. Sest. 43,94.— Nee enim dum era, angar ulia re, quum omni 
 vacem cnlnA. lb. Fam. fi. 3, 4.~/;/m Latlne loqnentur litterae, qnercus huic loco non 
 dttiV quie Mariana diciltur. lb. Leg. 1. 1. See Cic. H. A. 32. 91 ; Off. 2, 8. 29 : Tu.c 1,31 ; 
 Plant. Pseud. IJi.—Di'ice^ a prlncipe hujus teintis philosophuruni quamdiu roles ; tamdiu 
 autem velle f/<?/>t6tX yj/oaof te, quantum proficias, non ])o>)iitebif. Cic. Off. 1, 1.— Ipse me 
 
 t : iA^,.r.,-,r^-, nt^lifum /mt.\ iiir/i^rifAf lilininllflni XHm. eTCU.'iafuri 
 
 sed Ita quoad statum suum retinet. Cic. Kep. 2. 23.— Ti. Gracchus iamdiu kwdafntur 
 dum memoria rerum Roinaii5rum mambit. lb. Off. 2,12.— Eas litteras quum lego, minus 
 mihi tiirpis rideor, sed tamdiu dum leqo. lb. Att. 9. 6.— Bajse nostra} tamdiu dum tn ades, 
 /f7/;/M)blTue ( = immemores) sui. lb. Kam. 9, 12. 1.— Kgo tamdiu requi^-sco quamdiu m\t, 
 ad te j«m«w, ant tuas litteras leqo. \h.\)A,\.-quamdiu hi censOres magistrStum ^a/.<?. 
 bunt indil.-ctu prodlbis? Liv.4J, 14.— Sometimes the clause takes it< predicate in the 
 future if the principal predicate is in the present, but is a future in sense, as : Dum hwc 
 de Oi)i)ianico con sf dbu n t. qiin\ ext quod hunc innocentem opjwvnere posse rideatur ? 
 { = nihil eum opprimere poterit). C\c.C\\\.AA.— Quamdiu inter mortaies en/, nihil ex 
 d«mio sua niortale esse ^ew/ia/. Sen. Cons. Pol. 31. , ,, . i • , -,. aa 
 
 If the clau^jc is s»bob'ique. it either retains the indicative and the tense which it would 
 have in the ordinary constniction, or it is placed in the subjunctire with a tense acconiing 
 to tlie law of consecution, as: Nee mihi hunc errOrem. dum nw, extoiqueri volo. Cic 
 Sen 2:i, 85.-.Egroto, dum anima est, sjyes esse dicitur. lb. Att. 9, lO.-Quare ut ^d quoad 
 liceW, id est quoad ^cies ubi slinus, quam sa'pissime facias, te rehemeuter ro<to. lb. Att 
 10 4 1 — But- Dixi, te quoad metueres, omnia pronmsiirum (indep.: promittes quoad 
 m'r(ue^) lb Phil. 2. 35.— 'I'e a Sc:evoia petisse dicis ^<^ dum tu abesses,_ livovinnaepneesset 
 (INOKP • pnre^to provincite dum ego absum). lb. Fam.:i,5,5.-Prusias pruht.'b5iur se 
 cum Konnlnis, quoad helium fo?-et. stalfuvm. Liv. 44. 14.-Cui cohortls traderes, ut dum 
 tempusanni edet idoneuni. aii.iuid negotii gerere jwssem (indep : aliquid geravi dum 
 ten.pus.n/.idoneum). lb, :3. 6,5.-Z^«'m in ffistlvis nos essemus.\\\mxi p.ieris locum f>\^e 
 l^llissimuj/i dujimus (indep.: Locus bellis>imus erit dum in aistlyis e77/?<//^^). lb. Att. 5, 
 IT Com p Liv 4.5.14.-SO in the case of attraction, when the princip:«l sentx-nce is a 
 livp-.theiical pluperfect, where both the mood and the tense are attracted by the pluper- 
 fect subiunctive as: ;Susfi,rui.<set hoc crimen ipse ille latrOnum occultator locus, </wm 
 iiequemutasolitildoi;*^im>^e/,ne(,weaeca nox o.^fendisset Milonem (independent of 
 CONDITION : ^ustinebit dum ueque muta solilQdo indicabit, ueque ca;ca uv^oslendet). lb. 
 Mil. 19.50. , ^ 
 
 Ob« 9 Non-preterite clauses with dum and quoad (not with qimmdiu) in the meaning 
 'aslo'nn'a'^\ take the si-bjunctive if the clause is represented a^ lacking reality, or as 
 heim/ i^JW^ the ,.rincipal sentence being ne-.-ative, as : .Y^ tamdiu quidem dominus 
 ("' vo/mn) ;h>. dull ex eis de patris morte qu^iratur? Shall he ""^^^n so long be 
 the nviMerof the ^laves as thev are examined on the death of his hither i Cic «• A. 28, 
 78 T le eTHminati(.n of the slaves did r.ot tak.^ place, being m vain demanded by the 
 defender The in iicative Uju<,rMnr' would repre.sent the action as one which wil cer- 
 
 il"; occur in the fuu.re.-if the predicate is in the ^^^cond person ;;>n^j;l-^'J\ ^ in- 
 (U-nniie mcaniii". it mu-f be in the subjunctive accordimr to tt e rule p. 3.9. Obs. .\. al^ . 
 T- n ! u discendun est^,/o uescias; You (we) must learn as long as yoii (we) are igno- 
 
 ra1." of anrth°nrSen. Ep. 7>i. -m anteclassicul language, tlie present subjunctive some- 
 
 * In the passa-e Sail. Jus. 110 {quoad vices, numquam tibi redditam gratiam putaveris\ 
 the i dpal prJdicat^ pular.risX^ a perfect subjunctive with imperative f^r^e-.f cord- 
 i - on 383, OBS. 5. and not a future-perfect, as some -rammarians state. But " ^>l>er 
 I rtinit'v u future:perfect sometimes occurs when the P''"^!P=^l ir'^/i^n.Tn ^ nJ.^,S 
 futun -pre'ent. as : Quamdiu fuertt nllus litteris honor, quamdiu stetent Latin* lingu» 
 potenlia, vigebit cum maximis viris. Sen. Cons. Pol. 21. 
 
I 
 
 67G 
 
 TEMPOEAL CLAUSES. 
 
 DUM-CLAUSES AND EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 677 
 
 times ocrnrs in place of a fiitnre-prosicnt, as : Pnm tn llli, quod edat ct quod potct pra- 
 beas, iiuniqiiam odt-pol ftKjitt. IMuut. Men. 1, 1. U. 
 
 Obs. 10. If the principal predicate is* a pbetekite, clauses with tamdlu. . .quamdiu 
 require tin; prtdicates ui l)otli propos^ition^* to be iu the perfect indicative (see p. 32i, 
 R. (il, Obs. 2i. clautics with d>nn and qimid (in the nicaiiini,' ' n.^ fon(/ fui") generally have 
 thtnr predicates iu the indicativk (f^ce Ob». 1-2), the ten^e bein;; either the i'kkkect, 
 or the IMPERFECT. If tiie principal predicate is» in thi: itnptrjecf, the clan>e (in irood 
 prose*) lakes the same tense ; but if the principal predicate is in the )>er/tct (or plii|)er- 
 fect), the predicate of the clause is tither in the perfect or in the imperfect, according to 
 the special rules p. 32-2. foil., Obs. 3-5 ; p. 32:^, Ji. Hi ; p. 324, Obs. 1-3. To the pa^sase8 
 quoted there, the followini,' may he added : JMuit, quoiul rixi/, se nocuis?e reipublicje. 
 Cic. Leir. 3. Iti.— Fasces laurejltos (tmii quoad tcneiidos pu/dri. II), Lii:, 3, 7,— Massiiien-es, 
 guodd Ticifxit, . , .circumvenire n()^tros contemiebanf. Cas. IJ. C. 1. bs.— Qumd mecum rex 
 yV/i/, perbOuo loco res era/. Cic. Atl.(i, 1,3. -Dionysius </<//« imperium perpetuum «/Mt///t< 
 munlre. nullliis pepercit vit;e quern ejus insidialGrem piitilret, Nep. Ke<,'. 2. — />*'<//< ves- 
 tris viribu!" rtstWutis, pacis numquan» ajmd v»)s mentiOuem ./Vet. Liv. -^1.13 — iJnm 
 necesse eral, resiiue ip-a axiZhat. unus omnia fxjUntf. Cic. U. A. 4S.— '"> ft r/iul a Uif occisio 
 in se unum vertendie ^'lurije dum le^'cr colleira eraf. Liv. 21, 53 — Macedoues if/<qi/t duin 
 ordines et velut stipAta phahinx constdbaf, movCri nequiverunt, lb. 3-3, 18.— Nequ.- diulius 
 quam dmn recens tral, quajstio vi'/ait. lb. J». 2«).— Dionysit», dum eji-timaham va^os nos 
 fore, itolui molestus esse. Cic. Atf. 7, 2«». Tlie j)rincipai predicat' may be a parCiciple^ 
 as : Susce[)tum l)ellumest quie-cente me, depulsum ex Iialijl. inuiKiite u\e <{uoad pofui lb. 
 Fam.H,ri,rit.— If the clause- are sUBoBLi(iUE, I hey may eitiier retain their indicative tenses, 
 
 or may be in tlie subjunctive with tenses according to the rules on consecuiion, as : An 
 censes, dnrn ilia riqueiuu/, non eosdem gradus oratorum vnlgi judicio et dodoruin 
 fiiisse? Cic. Brui. 50," lS»i. -Prudeiiti^sima civitas Alheniensinm, dmn ea rcrum jM^nfu e^f, 
 fuirse traditur. lb. H. A. 25. — Fateiliur se privA'um pnedouiiin duces vivos d nii fum 
 iittqite dum per me licueril, retinuisse (ind. : rttinuit dum lUuif. ace. 'to p. 418, No. 3). lb. 
 Verr. 2, 1, 5. — Pnesertim quum sim conscius me, quoad licuerit, di-rnitJlii reipublicie con- 
 guluisse. lb. Fam. 6. 21, 1. U.ni>. : ivitsalui quoad Ucuif, p. 4.8). Cp. Cajs. B, C. 2, 2u; Liv. 2G, 51. 
 
 Obs. 11. liJirely the present indicative is used in the clause if dum denotes 'as long 
 as' (never with quoad or quamdiu). Sach present indicatives mii^t be c«msidered as 
 historical presents, and hence mostly occur when the iirincipal predicate is an hi-torical 
 present, as : /Jum. aviditilte certamiius provecti, extra muniiiOnes purjnaut (as long as 
 tliey were lighting), hand paullo superior e.'<t Homanus ndles, (sedt pofiKjuatn etc. Liv. 
 32 12, But They also occur when the principal predicate is a pnttiife, as : J)um ego in 
 Sicilia mm (as long as I was in Sicily), nulla rtatua dejecta e^t, postquam discessi etc. 
 Cic. Verr. 2, 2. «>').— Tantum ibi moriius, dum milites ad pnedam dUfCununt. Liv. 27, 42. 
 See the examples p. 323, Ubs. 4. 
 
 Obs. 12. In clauses with (i<//n (in the meaning ' a-'^ lonri o-f") the sfB.?i:NrTivE imper- 
 FECT is used 1) a-« subjunctive of non-rcal'dij, as : Secundum /V/^m/' (it would have been 
 next best) dum. lu-ertt, ablre. Liv. 42. 4H.-2) If the principal action, according to the 
 intention of the doer, is to last up to the end of the space expresh«'rt l>y the predicate of 
 the clause, the tiuie of this endpoint being as yet uncertain at the time of the principal 
 predicate. Such clauses may always be changed into clauses introduced by till if the 
 imperfect is turned into an English pluperfect' or into a verl) denoting the endpoint of 
 the action (Com)». (Jeil.N. A.ti, 21), as : Dum is ibi helium gerent. Cornelio proroi:atnr 
 imperiun» (Tlie command of Cornelius was continued as long as the war would last, or 
 'tilKhe icar ivouldbetitded'). Liv. 41, 21,— Hi laniiim temporis retenii dum erfionrrent 
 quantie regiie copiie luissent (as hmg as ihey were explaining, or ' till thoj hadtJ'plained ). 
 lb. 45, 2.-Oioandcs tanrum moriltns f/^/m pecunia de/erritur {a^ long as it took to de- 
 liver the money). lb. 45. »>.— Ob^idio tleinde per paucos dies magis (piam oppuirnatio 
 fuit dum vulnus duels ruraretur (as long as the wound of the commander would l)e heal- 
 ing, or • ti/l the wound had hniled '). lb. 21, 8 —Die inseqnenii (jnievere dum pru'lectus ju- 
 ventfltem Apolioniatiuin inspicertl (as long as the inspection would last, or * till (he troops 
 had been iiuipected ). lb. 24, 40. 
 
 Obs. 13. From the potential meaning of Dum-clanses with a subjunctive (Obs. 9) has 
 arisen the veMrictive n^e. of dum in t he me.n\\uv^ 'if but \' p rovided that only\ The 
 
 ♦ Rarely, in anteclassical language,' the Dum-clause hs^ a perfect when the principal 
 sentence iias an imperlect, as in I er. Ileaut. 5, 2, 34. ▼ 
 
 t in the lollowiuur passage all the three conjunctions dum. mioad. and donee occur in 
 the meaning • (Vi /unq (U<\ the same idea t)eing also expres>ed by an ablative absolute: 
 Egregium vita lamaque Tiberii quoad privStus vel in imperils sub Augiisto fuit ; occul- 
 tum ac subdolum t/o/ze'c Germaiiicus ac Drusus superfutre ; idem inter bona malaqiie 
 mixtus, incolumi inatie; intestabilis siEViliarfam Sejinum dilexit timuitve. Tac. A. 6,5L 
 
 predicate of such a clause is represented as a fart which, according to the idea of the 
 speaker or doer, mu^t coincide with the principal acticm in order to remove his objec- 
 tions a"ainst the latter. It implies the \(\v&'AsUmq as the acti.m of the clause coexists 
 with the principal action, I have no ol)jection against the transpiring or perforiningof the 
 latter ' Tlie principal predicate of such Dum-clauses is almost always non-pretente, being 
 niostly'in the (potential) subjunctive present, or imperative, but also in the indicative 
 pr« sent, or in the (potent iali future. The predicate of the clause is placed in the sub- 
 junctive present, unless it is suboidique, in which instance the tense follows the law 
 of consecution, as: Nollem idem alio loco dixissei ' Odei-iftd dum rnfuant ( et them 
 hate as lon«' as they fear, or ' if thev only fear'). Cic. Se*t. 4S, 103. Thus lb. 1 hil. 1. 14, 
 :U —Dum n7ihi polem lunamque intiieri liceat, dum auUnnm in sublliiii semper ha/Kam, 
 ciuantiim refert quid calcein ? As hmg as I am allowed (if I am but allowed) to look at 
 the sun etc., what matter» it on what my feet will tread ? Sen. Cons. Ilelv 9.-5/;/< vel 
 plures, </'//» talemducem/i«/>«^(f'/^- Let their number even be greater, * as Ion- as they 
 have' (if they but have) such a leader. Liv. 2*^, 34.— In oratioiie firmissimum quodque f-tt 
 primum. dum illud tamen in ntrOque tenedtur. Cic. Or. 2, 77,- Qui qnidvis perpeliantvr, 
 dum quod velint corc-^equantur, lb. Oft". l.iiO.— Dum res maneant. verba .A/'<7a?i<arbiirfitu 
 suo lb Fin 5. 29. Ptccltur in vos, dum diirni nti.-< quibus iia satistiat. Liv. ti. 2b. C omp. 
 Ter' And 4.1,54. Cic. K. A. 41, 119 ; Iti. Fam. 10,23.1: lb. Leg.2, 2.5.-Ntgative Dun> 
 clauses of this kind take ne, which often is written in one word wiih dum idumne), and 
 sometimes take the syndetic aniecedeni ita : Si cui adhuc videor segnior fuisse, dumne 
 tibi videar. non Ial)r)ro. Cic. Att. S, 11 b 3.— Consul equilibus piu-dam circunijecti agri con- 
 ces>it <///m //f amplius duabus noctibus fl4*;.^^€/«^ Liv. 44, 45.— Imitamini turbam incon- 
 pultam, (///m e"o 7J6 iz/ji/*»/' tribQnos. lb. 3. 21.-Cautum est. i/a id sacrum taciret.rfwm 
 ne plu* quinque sacritlcio infe7'e^^ent. Ih. 39, 18. C.mip. lb. 25,40; 28.40; 2b. 1 ; Platit. 
 Cure. 1, 1, 36, Ter. Andr.5. 3, 31. Dum non occurs in the poets and in the \\riters ol the 
 Pilvera«'e as- Lee Pompfja permissum Bithynicis civitatibiis ascribere sibi qnos vel- 
 leni cives. dutn civitatis non sint aliCna?. Plin. Ej). 10, 115. Comp. U). Pan. 27. 2. Sen. Ep. 
 64; II). 56; Ulp. Dig. 48, IS, 1,8. Ov. Met. 1.3. 151. -Frequently duvi, in this meaning, is 
 combined with 7aio(/o (sometimes with ^'/i</<'7«), which imparts to the clause the addi- 
 tional meaniiH' that nothing else but the fact stated in the clause is necessary for the 
 doer to perform or to suffer the principal action, as: (iuainobrem, sne in 1 uscuiano, 
 sive in Cumano ad te placebit. sive I{oma\ dufmnc/do sim ul .Hmua, perfxciAm profecio ut 
 etc Cic Fam. 9, 1. 2 —Dummodo niorata recie venial, dotata'st satis. Plant. Aiil. 2, 2, 61. 
 —Dumquidemne quid j^rcout'trix ^y\<n\ non liib.at pndoqui. lb. 2, 2. :i4.— Gallia ^»)»"!^ 
 iBqiio amino belli paiitur injurias. dumrnodo repellat periculum servitu'is. Uc. 1 nil. 
 12 4, 9.— Maf'no me inelu liberabis, dmnmodo int-r me et te mums intereit. lb. Cat. 1, 5. 
 Comp. lb. Off. 3. 21 : Or. 3, 48 ; Cut. 1, 9, 22 ; Alt. 12. 4.5, 1 : Fam. 10. 25, 3 : Brut. 82, 285 ; Qu. 
 Fr 117- Le<'.2, 1.5, ;iS._Harelv dum (in the restrictive meaning), and dummodo are 
 dependent on n/v/^ri'e predicates, as : Qui id numquam, duntmodo otiOsi essent, recvm- 
 runt Cic. Alt. 7,7.— Itaque dum locus comminus pugnandi </are/«r, a-quo annuo singii- 
 las binis navis ohjicitbant ( = They did not hesitate to oppose one ship to their tw^. if 
 hut the opportunity of a liand-ti>-liand fight was given), ties. B.C. 1, 58.— So in saiJ. 
 Cat. 1 1. 6 : Cic. Fil. in Cic. Fam. IC. 21, 11. Comp. Ov. Her. 3, 12;i More trequen ly pre- 
 terite predicates occur in this construction if the dau.-e is tnjbobhque, as : Decretum est 
 ut Antonius exercitum citra flumen KiibicOiiem educeret, dumne vwpm^ ^^'%}l! ^*^5*f"^ 
 ducenia millia rt(///ior?/-«/. Cic. Phil. 6. 3, 5. Comp. Liv. :«. 24, 9 ; lb. 1, -M. 5 Thus if the 
 Dum-clause is made dependent on a hypothetical preterite subjunctive of non-reality. 
 Qui et ipse in cruciatum dari cuperet dum de patris morte ^^/(j/-6r<^/Mr (if only an inves- 
 tigation would be had im his father's death). Cic. K. A. 41, 119 Comp. Sail. Cat. 40 4 
 
 OB'* 14 The restrictive relation of dum and d«/ww/oc/^'may also be expressed in the fol- 
 lowing fo'rms: 1) By an independent potential subjunctive in connection with the 
 particle tnodo (negatively modo ne). as : Quos. valetfldo modo hom ^t^if o'lly Uie health 
 is i:ood) teiiuitas ipsa delectat. Cic. Brut. 16, 64.-Putant eiiim qui horride '"C'l heque 
 dicat, tno^lo id eleiranter /adrt^ eum solum Attice dicere. lb. Orat. 9, HB. O.mp. lb. Sen 
 7 2-»- N D 3 8 20- Oft" 3 6,31.— Qute de Sicinio audi^tl. ea mihi pndwntur: moao ne 
 ll'laVxceptio in alici'u.m incurrat bene de nobis meritum. Il>- At/. 5,4.-Si quis est paullo 
 ad volnptatespn.peiisior. modo ne sit ex pecudum g. nere lb. Oft. 1, d(> Comp. J >; 'JJ-''' 
 49 • Am. 17, 61 ; Off 2, 20, 71 ; Fam. 16. 22, 4 ; Liv. 32. 21. Since pro))Ositions ot this Kind 
 are grammatically independent, being a species of adversative c<)ordinate proj^siiions 
 the Tense of the predicate is not subject to the law of consecution. Sometimes, such 
 consirmtions h .ve a general restrictive force, without the peculiar meanin-ol dum or 
 dummodo, as: Q.ue placet Peripatetici« et recte placet :7«ot/on6 laudarent iracundiam 
 oxdicrent utiliieranatQra datam. Cic. Oft". 1, 25.^9. Heie the subjunctives Wa?-^«i 
 nr.C\ diet rent have the force of the potential subjunctives mentioned p. 379. Obs. 4, the 
 sentence introduced by 7nodo ne having the force of an adversative coordination hy^frf, 
 or that of a concessive period, = ^but (only) they ought not to praise etc. ~ 2j Ihe 
 
678 
 
 TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 pamc rolation is sometimes expressed hy modo with an dhlntive nhsohite, or with adjec- 
 ti.ret' whicli have the force of accessory predicates, as : Iiaque veiiiam quo voces, inodo 
 ad'futore te { = inodo ad jut or sin). Cic. Att. 1»J, \-i. — Turn qiiam phirimis, nwdo diffni/>, se 
 utilein prai-beat ( = jnodo d'lgid fint). lb. Off. 1, 2f>. M'l. — Utinaui posset aliqua ratiOnc hoc 
 crimen, (luainvis falsil, modo fuondnd at(]iie u4fdfd, d(Mendere ( = modo ca hinndna atquA 
 xisitdta nt). II). Verr. 2. 3,97. Tims inodo m ly be connected with adverbial adjuncts of 
 the sentence, in whicli instance the predicate? must l)e supplied accordini? to the connec- 
 tion, us : Decenu!, modo rede ( = viodo rede dtcernas, or 'inodo id rede facias'), t'ic. 
 Ko<c. A. 48. — Bonis viris approbantibns faciendum vat. inodo pro fandtafibus, nos ipsl 
 ut fecimus ( = modo id pro facnltotiffus faciant). lb. OtT. 2, 17. Conip. lb. 1, ;io, 127 , 1, 44, 
 15»;. - ;]) Rarely modo is ust-d in this nieaniiii,' with an ri-claiise, as: Modo vl ha-c no- 
 bis loca tenCre liceaf, bellissinie in nostris pnediis esse poteritis (if it is only allowed to 
 us etc.). Cic. Fam. 14. 14. 1. — 4) Ri\rely a Se-dausf without inodo is used in the mran- 
 \\\Z diiwmodo ne. as: Sinl misericordes in fnribus a»rani, ne ill! saiiiruinem nostrum larr/i- 
 antiir. Sail. Cat.. 52. 12. — IVrmissum nt au.xilia absociis, ve supr.i quinque millium nume- 
 nim, accipiaf. lAv. .%, 1. — 5) Frequently si modo with the indicativk is used to express 
 the Emrlish 'if only \ 'provided that '. Hut such claiisi-slack the peculiarity of the i)um- 
 clauses, m«*nti()ne(l Obs. 1.3, havinj» merely a conditional force, the particle inodo be- 
 ii «J used to represent thenon-fulfilinent of the condition as improbable, or its lultiiment 
 as easy, as : Sine alios qui possunt, s-i modo roliinf, sustinere. Cic. Fam. 14. 2. 3. — Heliqua 
 tingulOruni dierum ecribemus ad te, si modo labellarios U\ jnotbibU. Ib.-C^u. Fr. 2, 12. 
 
 3. Diim and its synonyms, in the meaning ' till *. 
 
 Obs. 15. If d'/m. q>ioad, and donee are used in the meanin-.: ' tiU\ the principal action 
 is alwnys represented as continuiiii,' duriiiLr some space of time, but as ceasing at the 
 moment when the action of the clause occurred, or will occur. For the tens»- of the 
 principal predicate see p. 323, Obs. 6.— These three conjunctions sometimes talie the 
 syndetic antecedents usque, usque eo (usque ad euvi Jinem) and tatndiu, which denote 
 'solo'i(/\ but tjenerally an' not t*eparatcly rendered. The moods aud tenses of Till- 
 clau-ies are ditt'erent for each of the lliree conjunctions mentioned. 
 
 Obs. Ifi. Dum (tilH. if it refers to time indefinite and oenkhal (i. e. if the action 
 refers toe/// times), takes the suiufNCTivK pkksknt: as : Iijltis subirahendi sunt ei iu 
 quos impetum facere conantur. dum se ipsi coliujant (till they collect themselves). Cic. 
 Tusc. 4. 3t). 78.— Ditl'erant in t«'mpus aliud. dum deiene<cat ira. lb.— (^nid «licam, quaniua 
 amor best jlriim sit in ediicandis eis quje procreavCrunt n^quc ad eum ft/ttm dum ftosH/d- so 
 ipsa detendere 'f lb. N. D. 2, 51. — Ut ne expectemus quidem dum ivyemur. lb. Am. 13, 44. 
 
 Obs. 17. When dum (till) refers to pahticular time, it generally tiikes the si'bjunc- 
 TiVE PUESENT if the principal predicate is non-priterife (present or liiture), as^Kxspecta 
 <///'« Atticiim conreniam ; Wait till I see (till I have seen) Atticus. Cic. Att. 7. 1, 4. — 
 Nunc Scujvola paullum requiescMt dum se ca\orj'ranqaf ; till the heat sub^ides (has ^»^ 
 sided), lb. Or. 1,<»2. — Nuin exspectas dum te stimulis J'odinmf lb. Piiil. 2, 34.— (^uuin ea 
 saii< tiruia sit, Itneor tamen dum a Dolabelhe procuraloribus txUjani. primam pen>iOnem. 
 lb. Fam. (i. IS. .5.— Ot»to ne se ilia ir'iis moveat d'lm ad te le<,'iones perducantur. lb. Fam. 
 12, 19, 2.— Kxspectii duai consul ant dictator fiat. Liv. 3. 1 1, 13.— .Vt tu apud nos mane 
 dum rtdeat ips i. Ter. Kiin. 3, 3. 28. Comp. Cic.'Fam. 11, 2-3, 2 ; lb. 11,21, 2. Thus dum. iu 
 the meaniiij; 'till\ with tin; pkksknt sub.junctive is expressly opp«>sed Xndum, ' wliile ', 
 with the present indicative : 'I'ibi laiendum tantisper il)Idem dum efTcrvescit ♦ ( = tatn- 
 diu quamdiu etlervescet), et simul dum audidmus (Mill we have heard', 'until we shall 
 liear') (juemadmodum negotium confectum sit. I'ic. Fum. J», 2, 4.— Sometimes (if the 
 principal predicate is in the future) the I)iitn-clau-e takes a future-perfect, as: Miiii 
 quideui usque cune erit quid ajjas, </'///i quid eceris .««e/o. lb. Fam. 12. 11», 3.— In ante- 
 clas>ical lauiruai^e, and rarely in the epistolary style of Cicero, the puesent indicativb 
 is Used in place of a present sui»junciive, as : Exspectdbo dum renif. Ter. Eun. 1, 2, 
 12»). —Me niineat triduum lioc. dum id quod est promissum ab amicis arp^entum aufero. 
 lb. I'horiii, .3. 2,27. Comp. lb. Andr. 2. 1 ; Phorm. 5. 7, M), and Lentilus in Cic. Fam. 12, 
 14. 4. Cicero uses the present indicative in .\tt. 10. 3 : K^ro in Arcjlno opperi'-r duui ista 
 co/no-tco. In the following passai:es which are generally quoted as a pro()f for this con- 
 sinictioii, d'/rn lias not the meaiung ' (Ul\ hnt ' whil^' : Atcpie intena, </'//// hu^c qino 
 di>persa sunt coHiqunfur. vel pa-sini licet colligentein undiqui" replCri jn-ia juris civlhs 
 scientia. Cic. Or. i. 42 — I\Mpaucos dies commorilbor dum pecunia acclpitur ( = while 
 the delivery of the funds due to me is going on). \U.V^\\\.'.i,b, \.—X future-prfsent 
 
 * Mo~t of the older editions read '<l>imder'ervescat'{= till tlie congratulating excitement 
 his subsided), which might be correct if it were confirmed by manuscript authority. 
 The CiKle.x Mediceus (the only manuscript authority for the let'iera ad Fam.) gives tho 
 reading meuiioued above. 
 
 DUM-CLAUSES AND EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 679 
 
 in Bum-clauses of this kind occurs only in tlie poets : Quae maneant dum rac fata perTre 
 
 rolent. Prop. 1,14. ..,.,, ,. . .,,,..11,. j- * 
 
 Hence in quasi-oblique Dum-clauses ol this kind, the predicate will be in the imperfect 
 subjundive if the i)rincipal predicate of the oblique construciion is a preterite, as: Legi 
 scrii)tum esse, avem quamdam.. .usque eo pienure eJlrum (avium) capita mordicus dum 
 ilhecaptiim (piscem) amUtennt. Cic. N.D. 2, 49.— Ut spatium intercedere posset dum 
 milites convenirent, legjltis respondit etc. Cais.B.G. 1,7. Comp. Nep. Paus. 3. 
 
 Ob^ 18 If dum (till), referring to particular time, is dependent on a preterite princi- 
 pal predicate, the predicate of the clause is regularly the subjunctive impeupect, as : 
 Dum hie r^nlref, locum relinquere w^luit. Cic. Mil. 20,54.— Comitia dilata ex senatus 
 consulto dum lex de tacito jiuiido fen-etur. lb. Att, 4, 16.— Valuit tamdiu du7n hue pro- 
 dirtt lb Flacc. 17. 41.— Deleciu perfecto, consules i)aucos mordti dies dum socii ab 
 nomine Lutlno venirent. Liv. 22. 38.— This tense and mood is required even then when we 
 should expect a pluperlect according to English usage: Virgiuius (iwm colle-am cons-u- 
 leret moratur (<i&\d tiU. he had con.-iuUed). Liv. 4,21.— Timoleon ne a-picere quidem tra- 
 ternum sanfiiinem voluit ; nam dum res conficerefur, in pra'sidio luiL {fill all had been 
 done). Nep.Tim. 1,4 (where the interpreters, variously trying to explain the subjunctive, 
 render dum by 'while'. Tiie same tense, of course, is required if the clause is siibob- 
 liqiie. or quasi-suboblique, as: Quippe qui moram teniporis quairerent dum Hannibal m 
 Afnc&m (rajiceret. Liv. 30. 16. . . , . , , r^^ •«. 
 
 The pekfect indicative in Dum-chiuses of this kind is extremely rare. In Cicero it 
 occurs only in Verr. 1, (i, 16 : E3, niansit in conditiOne usque ad eum flnem dum judiceB 
 rejedi sunt, la this passage, not the use of the indicative is unusual (a subjunctive 
 would have been faulty), but the use of dum in place of quoad or don/^c {sen Obs. 26). 
 The indicative perfect is also found in Gell. 10, 3, and, poetically, in Prop. 1,3, 4:i. 1 he 
 pluperfect and imperfect indicative never occur in Dumclauses of this kind, nor does 
 a pluperfect subjunctive occur if the clause is oblique, as it should be expected from 
 the future-perfect being admissible according to Obs. 17. 
 
 Ou« 19 Quoad in the meaning ' till ' is rarely used if the time of the clause is indefi- 
 nite and general. It thus occurs in direct discourse with the predicate of the clause in 
 the pkkf'ect sub.ii'Nctive: Quoad enim pei-centum sit eo quo sumpta navis est, non 
 domini navis est, sed navigantium. Cic. Off. 3. 23. 89.- -In preterite consecution, and it 
 the clause is suboblique, the predicate is placed in the plupeufect sub.tunctive : Pa- 
 tres interre'Mii ineundi ratiOnem excogitavGrunt, ut, quoad certus rex dedaratus esset., 
 nee sine re'"e civitas, nee diuturno rege esset. lb. Rep. 2, 12.— If quoad refers to a par- 
 TiCLLAU time, and the principal predicate is non-preteuite, the predicate is placetl in 
 the present si:b.iunctive, as: E'^o hie coqito common! ri quoad me reficiam.. Cic. Fam. 
 7 26 2 —Ea \ero continebis quoad ipse te rideam. lb. Att. 13. 21,4. If the construction 
 i« oblique the predicate of the clause is either in the present subjunctive, or in the 
 imperfect subjunctive, accordiuir as the tense of the governing predicate is non-preU;riie 
 or preterUe: Ego me Astune diutius arblfrorconm\oiatnrum quoad Wle venial. Cic. Fam. 
 (J 19, 2 — Ubi i}.^^iidafu*-ram quoad aliquid ad me de eo scriberes quod etc. lb. Att. 3, 13, 1. 
 But it is peculiar that in these t)blique (or quasi-oblique) constructions sometimes, 
 instead of a present suloundive, a peufect subjunctive is used, and instead of an imper- 
 fect a pi.uPEUFECT subjunctive, as : Censeo. . .senatui placCre ut. . .interea provincial ab 
 eis obtiutHiitur quoad culque ex senatus consulto succei^sum sit. Cic. Pliil. 11, 1'2. Comp. 
 lb 10 11 2-> —Ip-e interea, oyoa(/ legioues collocatas. muuiuique hiberna co!7//ot^^*^ef, in 
 Gallia moiari const ituit. Cies. B. O. 5, 2i. So Ctes. B. C. 1, 10. These tenses can only be 
 explained as cvuvericd future perfeds (see p. 45:3: Independent construction: i/ro- 
 tincue obtihfbuidur quf>ad successum ent ; inordbor quoad cognovero), althou-rh vouchers 
 for such constructions in direct discourse are found only with dum and donee, but not 
 with quoad (as far as we know). 
 
 Obs 20 If clauses with quoad (till) are made dependent on preterite predicates, the 
 predicate of the clause (in classical prose) is in ttie pekpect indicative: Usque e«) se 
 tenuit quoad» PompCjoadeum leirfiti litteneque venerunt. Cic. Dej. 4 II.--M1I0, quum 
 ill s»'natu fuisseteo dxc. quoad ^e\\^i\x* est dimissus, diovciwrn venit. 1»). Mil. 10, 28~Lqui- 
 testlmm sequendi non feclrunt quoad prsecipites hostis egerunt. Cies. B. G. 5, 1<.— hpa- 
 minoiidas ferrum usque eo in corpora letinuit quoad renuutidtum est vicisse lioeotios. 
 Nep. Ep. 9. Comp. Liv. 26, 46.— Rarely quoad is used, in place of dum in those construc- 
 tions ot this kind which require the subjunctive, as : An Brutus non ;>o/wt/ domum re- 
 dlre, triumphare, primus in hoc ordine, quoad inagistrdlum iniret, sententiam dicere. 
 Cic. Phil, r,, 3, 8. Her.' iulrd is a subjunctive of non-reality, being represented as an 
 action which woidd have happened if Brutus had returned. Hence the clause should 
 have been introduced by dum, which probably would have been done but for the ambi. 
 guity arisiiK' from dum (dum iulret = while lie was enterin-.:).— The writers ol tlie silver 
 age coubtrue quoad either with a perfect indicative, or with an imperfect subjunctive. 
 
680 
 
 TEMTORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 a? : Tamdiu ccrtamen anceps fait quoad Darlns /ugeret (where in classical prose *fiigit* 
 •would have been used). Ju^t.ll,y. 
 
 Obs. 21. Donee (till), which has? an anteclassical collateral form donicvm, docs not 
 occur in clas^j^ical prose if dependent on non-preterite pri'dicates (unless the j)rincipal 
 pentence is oblique, and the governing verb of the principal sentence is preterite, or 
 the clause is virtually mbobliqne. (See below.) But in anteclas?ical and potJt-clat^gical 
 htyle. and also in the poets, donee is» frequently used if it depends on presents, futures, 
 aiid iniperatTvfcs. If it refers to indefinite time, it has its predicate in the present sxib- 
 jtmclive (more rarely in the future present, or future-perfect), as : Inter eadem pecora 
 degunt, donee aitas keparet ingenuos. Tac. Germ. 20. Conip. lb. H. 2, 1 ; 4, (j5 ; Cohim. 
 12.25; 12. 26,— CVx^wito usque donee eA cotmnadcfnt bene. Cato H. K. l.'iC».— Id aliquoties 
 facito, usqne adeo d(rn^=e sal desiverit tabescere biduum. lb. SS. So lb. 146, 149.— If donrc 
 refers to puriiciUdr time (dependent on non-preterites), it ha.* its predicate, in anteclassicil 
 laniruage, reirularly in the FUTUKK-PEnFECT, as : Hand desinatn dontc perj'ecero hoc. Ter. 
 Phorm. 2, 8, 72,— Ne quoquam exsurgdti.< donee a me erit signnm datum. Plant. IJacrh. 4, 
 4, lOtt. Comp. Ter. Ad. 4, t», 5. In post-classical language the present subjunctive is used: Sea 
 est vallum murlque et trahendi artes, donee e proximis provinciis auxilia concurrant. 
 Tac. H. 4, (io. Comp. II). 4, 58. The poets also use the futl'ke-puesent : Hie jam ter cen- 
 tum ioU^i^ regnabitur annos, donee n-L'Tna sacerdos. . .geminam dat/it Ilia i)n)lem. Virg. 
 ^n. 1,272.— Livy thus uses donee in oblique discourse, the predicate of the clause being 
 in xhii jtresent subjunctive if the governing verb of the obhque periodie a non-preterite, 
 as: Ko usque mc viverc r?//^jA^ rfow^c alterlus vestrum superstes baud ambiguum regeni 
 ftlterum meS morte /Vi««m. Liv. 40, 8, 18.--Pererraiflrum se omne Latium, (/on^^c ad eos 
 verveniat qui etc. lb. 1,53. In preterite consecution, the suhoblique predicate of the 
 l>onec-clanse is either in ihe imjterfeci suhjxiuct'we, or pi u pet feet subjunctive: Sicinius 
 Macedouiam obtinire, donee successor venlret,jussus est. lb. 42, 27.— Patres eensuire eos- 
 dem Macedonian) otttin^ re donee res composuissent. lb. 45, 16. So Liv. 4, i;i; 1,30; 26,9; 
 33, 31. Such pluperfects can only be explained if taken as converted tenses with the 
 force of/'/ ^//'«'-^^e/yVc^*- (Macedoniam obtinebunt donee rt'i^ composuerint), allhongh Livy 
 does not use this tense in direct discourse.— S^mietimes donee is thus used with a sub- 
 junctive if the clause St^ virtually suhoblique, the predicate referring to a future event 
 which at the time spoken of is exi)ect*-d, as : A cetera pnodiT Fabius militem abstinuit 
 donee coW^'^^-ji venire nt. Liv. 4, 69. This construction presnpi>oses an independent con- 
 struction with & present: ' Pneda abstinete do/t^e coIIGgie veniant\ 
 
 On». 22. 7)0MfC occurs in oil periods of the language when the principal predicate is 
 preterite, the prt-dicate of the clause beinur in the ferpect indicative (the same as with 
 quoad). For exceptii)ns see Obs. 23. Donee is thus used: 1) in antecla«-sical style: 
 Numquamd^*Vi/ii orOre tisque ad eo donee jterpulit. Ter. And. 4, l,:i6. Comp. Plant. True. 
 1, 1, 17.— 2) In classical language ; very frequently in Livy, but not in Ca'sar or Sallust ; 
 in Cicero only in a few passages: Usque e<)/u/i'/i ne quis de m<a tide dubitaret, dtutec ad 
 rejieiendos judices veni/nus. Verr. 1, 6, 17. Fundum s»^ habere usque eo non in«)leste 
 tulit donee viclnom nactus est qui etc. lb. Tull. 6, 14.— Neque flnis tiet)at, donee pt»pulu8 
 senatum co^git ut etc. lb. Verr. 2, 4, 40. De comitiis donee vtdiit Marnllus silen- 
 Wnmfnit. Liv. 23, 81, 9.— Potitii antistites futrunt donee genus omne PotitiOnim interiit. 
 Ih. 1,7,14. Comp. lb. Pnef. 9 ; 1,23; 1.31;'l,34; .3.48; 4, 57 ; 5, 32; 44, 5 : 45,6, and often. 
 Livy sometimes uses an historical present in the Donee-clause, as : Nee minor cjedes in 
 «rbe/ut/, rfon^-cabjectisarmisdictatnri dedunfur. lb. 4,34. So lb. 1, 54. 10.-3» Frequently 
 donee has this construction in the silver Latinity. as : Cnncta ejus dicta scire inalebat, 
 donee Junius quidam indicium detulit. Tac. A. 2, 28. Comp. lb. 4, 72; 0,51; 13,44; lb. 
 Agr.26, :i6; Suet. Jul. 82. 
 
 Obs. 2:3. Donee (till) with an imperfect or plupehfect subjunctive first occnrs in Livy, 
 who uses this construction 1) if the principal sentence is negative; Principio anni tri- 
 bOni nihil more runt donee Camillus in Faliscos proflci secret ur. Liv. 5, 26.— Progredi prne 
 turba occurrenfium non jwterat, don^c a consulibus lictOres missi essent qui etc. lb. 45, 7. 
 —2) If the predicates of both propositions denote repeated and contingent artion (ac- 
 cording top. :i31. No. c). as: TrepidatiOnis aliquantum edtbant (eleplianti) donee (piie- 
 tem ipse imwrfecisset (i.e. every time when a raft with elephants was conveyed across 
 the river). Liv. 21, 28.— 3) If the action of the clause is in the relation of non-reality : 
 Quiescerem et paterer, donee in regiam meam arniatus renis^et f Liv 42, 41.— The authors 
 of the silver age use donee far m(»re frequently with the imperfect sub.iunctive than 
 with a perfect indicative, and very rarely employ dum in the meaning 'till '; as : Tam- 
 diu se in sedlli puo t^enuit donee cervlcem cireuraactu rotie frangertt. Sen. Ep. 70— Tnm 
 Incupletissimus quisque miles labOre fatigdri. donee vacatiOnem eineret. Tac. II. 1.46. 
 Comp. Tac. A. 2, 82; II). H. 2,8; 1,13; 2,49"; Plin. Ep. 9,;«. 6. In still later Latinity, the 
 subjunctive became the only mood in Donec-clauSes (Charis. 2, p. 202). 
 
 Obs. 84. Livy, the poets, and more frequently the wiiteis of the t-ilver age, use donee 
 
 DUM-CLAUSES AND EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 681 
 
 In the meaning' « ^s' long n-< \ Livy, in direct discourse, uses donee in this meaning, mostly 
 with r<7em ct-'tc) « v/^^-i/^ principal predicates, placing the predicate of the clause in the 
 ^mI'krf^'; or PKiJFEcr in'd.cative'. as: />o..c arnnlti c^.nfertlq.i^e a^^*«.^ pedit^i^n la- 
 hor in ner^eouendo fuif ' po^tquam etc. Liv. 6, 13. Ccmip. lb. 2. 49,9, 1.7.13. »"' '"e 
 
 XvV/ cSV. Sr^J/i /<.und as^a su.>junctive of ^•-^:.^'^-^,r.^Ti:.n^^^^^ L v' 
 
 No-fc): Nihil sane tre/ndubant elcphanii donee contineiit Nvlut ponte ag^r.r^J^^^^^ 
 21 28 (where some <T,-a,nmariHns. lor in<t. the author of ttie Publ. Sch Or., ^".'^''-f f 
 ?o«iider «7erXr 7.^'"lu...,bUquc ', the elephants U.u., '•^'^/IL^'^lSrcIe^'l^The Donee 
 tiir. ^i,i.w-.\ Tf thp iirinrJDal ur.-dicfttf i^ ill ihe i^nbiiiiictive. the predicale 01 ine uonec 
 c m-L a«um" ho 'h ?he to^^ the mn„d of the f„rn,er: Ut...Kom,ilus m"m< 
 
 niwl writers of the silver n'^e, n<e donee in the meaning ' as long a-^ with reitrence lo 
 /^y/jJaetions, both predicates being placed in tl.cy^//7-^V>msv,>^ as: Ne quern vest um^ 
 ilnner anieouim in re mea supererit, judicaium a.idictumque duci patiar. Liv. 6, 14.- 
 tuee ? K ffiix nu.lU)s'";.;V.^kt. aiAlios. Ov. Trist. 1, 9, 'J-y-^'i^SU^Mr'Ta "'1^^ 
 in.-erfo t>rU dontc dubitdfAt'/r imperatorem in castris, an hostem habeatis. lac. ii. i,.5j. 
 PeVu iar?s \i,riTse of a /i/^^^^^^^^ indicative alter donee (as long as), referring to a present^ 
 uS'h/t'he'l.'ense of S.rE^glisl. present -per feet : Per ^f-\^^^^^^^{:S^ 
 
 Jl ^^oac io.ii /V ^^^^^^^ maker inrrodueed in the discourse. In tins 
 
 in Ta ^ce t'ie pre-ffcatVo/ the clause is pla/ed in the ''"'^i"-! J^ ri>-'«^},«8^PSK-" a 
 which must be explained as converted /«^'/-^-pr^s^^///.^. "^'^•^J l"?-' ]? P-,^l«' ^;/';,^"ini 
 Dresent indicative never occurs with donee in direct disco-irse ; as . Edixit, "e Qui miii 
 lis X,^c n c\"tri"L^< bona j>os.<idtref (Indkp. : Ne quis p,ssideto bona miliiis. donee 
 i^caS TriV Liv 2 24.-Ne^ umcpiam, rfo«.c sang.iinis Barcini quisquam siiiyerM, 
 j;,W^nrRomana fidiVa (Isokp. : ^'nnnn-^^m quiescent Ic^dera. rfon.c quisquam super- 
 erit) 11). 21, 10. Comp. lb. 4, 21 ; 4, 60 ; 25, 11 ; 34, 2-3 ; Tac. A. lo, 64. 
 
 OB*» 2-) Peculiar to the writers of the silver a-e, is the use of donee to introduce 
 l<5.!t.ve c.Au" Ks": in the meaning ' usque ad eum Ipeum ^'O^^^^^^^^}^ ^i l-on '- 
 III this seii-e. it Generally takes the present subjunctive, or tmjXitpct tobjunctiie ««^t^^r " 
 \Vv" fhe ens^Tof the principal predicate, a. : lihenus s.rvat uorn^n dome Oceano 
 mfvr^.?////- Tac. A.2,6.-Caput usque eo dimlsit, donee radns msereret. ben. Ep. <0. 
 Comp. Tac. Germ. 1 ; lb. :ij. . 
 
 Ors 26 Dum quoad, and donee (in the meaning 'tilD are thus distinguished in 
 cliisical prW^'l) />^' (not q>UHid or donee) is used if the clause refers to tnne indefl- 
 nito am general In the paisage Oft'. 3,21, 89 (Obs. 19) quoad, as ha^ bee., shown is 
 sed f'c.r particular reasons* Donee with reference to indefinite time, does not occur n 
 classical pZs • )b^ 21). The mood of Dum-dauses, in this relation, '^«»«;^>-^, '|« P/^^'-; 
 P r Jul. . n.i ve -2) Ihim (not quoad or donee) is used if the clause is dependent on 
 ex'mdi^^^^^^^^ "^*i"U' «l^vays the subjunctive 1«^'<>1"P- tl»«.ex;u|'Ple; 
 
 OBflTl^as KviU-^c/^^^^^^ 
 
 (^•l\\ \\ i\i -Kxsmctas lortasse rf////i dicat eic. Cic. fuse. 2,7. Com.. Oes H. G. 1, 
 UOnoeM^ also with dum and a present "ulicat.ye (see 
 
 Obs i( Theenpen.r Trajamis construed ..r.^>66/<I/-^ ^\xh donee: Sx exspeet asses dmec 
 me ^Vi;/^7-f" F in Ep 10 122. See p. 593, Obs. 8.-3) If the principal predicate ^ non- 
 ,7;.^^?'; and uxnl duui and r^oad (both ^'•^'''"'c ^^^nr"'!- and 19* 
 
 iinc live are used opfionaUy. Donee is n..t used in this connection. See Obs. 1« a"d 1.1 
 
 W f ti.e >ii cii.ll nredicate is preterite, dum. quoad, and donee are used. B t on y 
 7.nnxultaC^d^^^^^^^ f "»« pVi-ci pal action is represented a^ tnfentvm^illy 
 
 con i 1 .1 by he d«>er till the action <.f the cla.iVe ' will happen '; almost always with a 
 « ctiVJ^np^^^^^^^ 18.-5) If n<. such intention. is implied the pnnc.pal 
 
 ac i beim' yimpy represented as continuing till a.u.ther action occurred, quoad or do- 
 ^" H e ,1 "d) wMt^iout Sny difference, both 7;quirin,r the P^;f^f:^:;^l^S^Jl^^^ 
 ^^,^.^^,^ III ..o-tcU^-'ical i.ro-e there are the followuiir difl-^ences fiom tneciassica u a e 
 
 ;■ .a'- Zi am. ,'^«.l»;e ei„,.l..ye,l when in ,l,i..ical P-;-=^rS "S^',Sri:,d.c«fve! 
 c.irn-ct (.\.i. 1): («'th^arhe Mibjiiuclire mml if used, ll^l)ml^cu.m^ly »iih ihc iiiuicative, 
 w ..r.. in rli«»ical unisc only the iiulicalire if considered a» correct (No. 5|. 
 "s. ,n:a,n'e/;to.'a\i^.s':.,i,ivale„,,,are syliiMiyili» of a,,(^^^^^^^ 
 
 • I-» : .u I nil ' oii.i ' i»»»f.>ri»' iii'iv itfteii Ot" used as ^^vno^yIIls^. t>»>iii, u,urr» 
 
 Sa.;/:7V/a.^:ep?e^M \.e i ic )^ '»'« -'-" 7' ^'" ^'^"'^• 
 
 Bu w i£^ rcla ses i </«m, do,iec, and quoad, the principal action is al^v^ys repre- 
 ?euted as couiiniing to the moment of the dependent action, this is generally not the 
 
G82 
 
 CAUSAL CLAUSES. 
 
 ca?e in claupos with anteqnam, oxccpt when the principal a^nti'nce i? veqafive, in which 
 instance both, the AnttMiuaui-clauses. and the Duni-clau-es refer to principal actions, 
 the n"t-/tapp*-iiinff of which contijines up to the mtuneni of the depen(h-nt action. Ht-nce 
 in such sentences a-< • /Juin hie v nlret, locum relinquere noliiif ^Cic. Mil. iO) \ a Piiusqiiaui. 
 clause may be snbstiiuted fir the Duin-datige {iiou piins locum relinquere voluit (juam 
 hie rei'Vet). Thus ' X'tmqxam dtstitit urdre tisque to donee ixrpuUt (.Tei-. And. 4, l,3ti) = 
 NonpriHS demtilit a/ are quarn etc. 
 
 CIIAPTEU FIFTH. 
 
 CAUSAL CLAUSES. 
 I. DIRECT CAUSE. 
 
 § 623. Ciiusul cltiiises are introduced by the coiij unctions quia or qtwd 
 (because), and, for particular causal relations, by quiuti or quoniam 
 (since); sometimes by quando, qudiuloquidem, or siquidem. Causal Qiium- 
 clauseshave their predicates in the subjunctivi<: (p. 055). The other con- 
 junctions take the indicative, with the exceptions mentioned Obs. 17 
 
 Obs. 1. Quoil (generally not quia) it» nscd : 1) if the clause has the force of a complet- 
 ing That-clause, boinj; ijoverned either by one of the rtrba afrctuurn (p. 51H) foil.), or by 
 th?)>e verbs the objects of which d<'note at the same time their causes (p. .V.KS). The use 
 ol quia alter such verbs is fxtremelv rare, whi-n qxia may generally be paraphrased by 
 '■for no other reaaon than that \ as : 'lieprehenili.^ me quia defendam et ir.isceris. C'ic. Snll. 
 18, no.— Id quia non est a me factum, ugis (jratiast Ter. Ad. 4, 8,5.-2) (^'/w/ (very rarely 
 quia^ is usrd if the cause is represented us the means and instrumknt of the ipain 
 action, so that the -vndetic antecedent eo is either used or may ))e supplied, as : VitiOsi 
 principes non solum" obsunt quod ( - toquod) ipsi cornimj'uniur, sed etiam^z/O'/ ( = eo 
 quod) corrumpiint, pliisque exempio (piani peccaio nocent. Cic. Leg. 3. 14, 3-2.— .Anctaque 
 invidia ad pU-betn quod ( = eo quod) tribQtum etiam in siipendium miliium collatum est. 
 Liv. 10, 4»;.- Id fernim. etiamsi ha'sis.-et in scuio, pavOrem iAc'xQhiW. quod ( = to quod) 
 arma omitti coLrebat. Ib.-.»].S. See p. (iUti, Obs. 4. i^uia is very rarely used in clauses 
 denoting' instrumcntaiiiy ; but it .M)inelimes occurs, i-ven in place of 'J'haf-claime^ {Vnvt- 
 clauses) lor the sake of emphasis, as : Id lulfliuui fui^^)e tx tO quia lacluni est, inlelligi 
 df bet (from the very fact that etc.) Cic. Fat. •>, 18. 
 
 Op.s. 2. On tlie other hand, quia (not quod, nor qvmn, quoniam etc.') ninst be used in 
 answer to a (^rEsTioN askiri<_' for the reason or cause ol an action, as : Cur dixisti testi- 
 monium in alios? (^uia coactus (sum). Cur damnati sunt i Quia creditum e^t. Cic. Sull. 
 17. 48.— Owe tandem ista cau.ta est? Quia liiec est mca germana i)atria. lb. Le<r. 2, 1. 
 Comp. lb. 2. 3, 7; Part. Or. 4 ; Liv. 6, 18 ; Ter. Andr. 4. 3, 13; H). r., 2, 51 ; Eun. 1,2. »; 
 Heaut. 4, 5, 53. In anteclas<ical language quia, in such answers, is frequently strenirth- 
 ened by euiin, wliich. according to the English conception is redundant. Comp. Ter. llec. 
 3, 1, 31 ; Heaut. 4, 5 52. 
 
 Obs. 3. Aside from these diflferencc?, quod and quia are used without distirction*, 
 1) to express a motive (se'' the examples under ^1), 2) to represent the principal act ion 
 as the consequence and tffect of the causal prwiicate (caum efficiens), in which instance 
 
 * Several trrammarians have unsuccessfully tried to *establi-h various diti^renceM 
 between quod and quia. liAMSiiouN says : C^uod denotes a caise (Uksacue». i.e. that 
 which immediately precedes an action, and etlects it : quia denotes the ^qround \ i. e. tlie 
 remoter cause, by whidi the action becomes p()ssil)le. That tliis distinction (which is 
 almost correct in'reirard to quia and quum) is utterly uratuitoiis, is evident from the pas- 
 sair» s given under J and />' in the text.— Meiiung says : Quod always letains tlie mean- 
 ing 'that\ 8o that it mav be paraphraseil 'on account of the fact that". But this is no 
 Eeouliaritv of quod, l)eiirg just as true in reirard to quia. — Uki^w aimo-t reverses Hams- 
 orn's difference, by stating that quia represents an immediate and necessary cause, quod 
 meaning ' in respect to '. 
 
 DIBECT CAUSE. 
 
 683 
 
 a consecutive Vt.lau. r.^yll^^^^%^^:^4:^^X^^ 
 clause taking the place o ''^ J^^^/., ,^',!:^' i^^^^^ relations by C|uod-clause8 
 
 C;esar never uses ^f «' ,^ \V^ ses%^1 ve^y mi ch oftener than quod (about m the rela- 
 only. on tlie other »«»'d !;»>>"?'. ^'^?""^;/'^^^,"^'^ xvhich. by this writer, is rarely 
 
 tion of three t.. «'1^^)' ^.''^^,'^,^\'^ '''.I'^n ;!,\^^e the^^^^^^^^^ cmijunctions without giving a. y 
 expressed by quod. Cicero « 'ilj^^'l\:'„ f Vimbonv The syndetic antecedents ol quod 
 preference to either, except for the sake f^o^^^^^ ii,o). V^«. »««'•« "^"^"^^ ^''^^^ 
 
 Sre propterea. iccirco, eo {tare, ^';^/«'' ,f/' '.f/' :,t , fr^dv o quia- 
 
 icnnoSni «1«^-/'^^ ^;!/" /..^^^^J^/'dl.fS veni'syracfisas qvod ab 
 
 Examples : A. Quod and ?^'»'' V i «"^"^ ' - "^v motive in coing to Svracuse was, 
 oa urbe transmissio in Gneciam 1"/^ « ,'^"1 ( - my ^^^,Vood C.c. Aiil. i:3, 7.-Quem 
 ,h:n the passage to O.reece fmm liat ot> as .^^^^^^^^.^ Sail. Jug. 92.- 
 
 locum Marius, (/?/ot/ ibi ro.g'^/''^^/ ml-tTcessisse credCbant hostem, in amnein ruunt. 
 Itaqueetmulliindme freti, ct rywo^nneli tcs^^^^^^^ mbQiius plebis legem pro- 
 
 Lvl2l, 5.-llnic simu Has cum .^''^E^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^ ^.'^ ;^^ licslet quo<i Ja.n beft- 
 
 mulgaverat qua e c. V,^,%^\^j,^' J?' „.., ci^^^^^^^^^ Sail. Jug. 5 ; 7 ; «1 : Cic. tin. 
 
 • tus nollet esse. Cic. 1 use. 5, 21. ^*\" ,\'; '-^\^:, YJJiVi^ aucioribus sum certior factus. vel 
 , 16. 53 ; Liv. 21, 25.-Postea y,^';^ XTudierVim < BiS^^^ vel quia administra- 
 
 <^uod tanta res erat, vel ««^/^f \' ^ " e"t coiiiman s q^^^ ad me de.ata essent, scnbenda 
 Tio liujus Ix-lh nnhi nim K'j^f > l'-» "^/^J ut "is^ t^i^V^''^'^ <1"^'^ ''^^"^""^ sequuntur, 
 ad V..S putilvi. Cic.lam. 15. ^' 1;-/, ;\^f, . "^^^^^^^ j/ a^ i i.-Dionvsius utrnmnuemter- 
 
 taceant autem iecirco quia ^'''''^''^^'^^^I'lX^^X. iierimeidi sui, alterum quia dictum id 
 tlci jussit.alteruiuv^J" v'»'"denu.nstumsset^^n^^^^^^ ^^^ coopta.us in augurum 
 
 risu approbavisset. lb. '\ use 5, -i^^;-*^;,;;/; 1^/."" 26. UH.-Epicydes prolectus in 
 
 colle::ium non erat, non "^";^;;' '"^,,^^;''^^^^^^^^^ Liv. 24, 
 
 ^;:-^sr:u.^r^;:dt\i:sr;s=^p|^ 
 2;;s-;^^i^;n!s:is;;uibu^ 
 
 ?l.ll: 21.17; 4,59; 1,4; Cic^AtM, 3^5 J_a^^.5^ ^.^^^^ ;>,.o/)^,rfa ^empitemam 
 
 li. Quod and quia = calsA ^^f^*^'*;'*-^,*^,:. /^r". , _ Voinniates tfficiunt iif deorum vita 
 
 in acie ancipiii iisquam ^•^''•'= f. ' ZZ' "n^VJum^ possumus dicere, q./ia.scnpta non 
 
 ciens (butliever the means and '"^,^;";"'^" .5^^! , i" o/Zas a rfved at by way of kea- 
 f.rence thai <<>''7'^^''«"«^'^^^,'-,t^'^.V, "' *i'" «ction as 
 
 SONINO or logical ^«^^^'i-^^''^.^' 'V,^ .1 mSt?* Hence causal Quum-clauses are used 
 an vmnediate sequence ol the <^^f ; ;' » V*; ^ .f , «Vllogi^ms, as : ^um omnia qu;e ratiO- 
 1> a- a form of the major and minor piemi.c '^^^.^t'^;^''/^ ?;;,;. m Ulcere, uUam rem prie- 
 nem habent pra-^teut eis ^;^^^:::^^tc^^L^ ^ Cic. Leg. 2, 7, 16 ( = 
 gtare mil One omnium ^^" "-J/'t f "t";,, P^'c • ? atmii nefas est dicere etc. ; 3. ergo confi- 
 
 «r,.nic, «nee in "•''"y"' '^-i P^-^^-^f.i^Tp; i<'^™co;^^^^^ iu tUe common acccptatioD 
 
684: 
 
 CAUSAL CLAUSES. 
 
 DIRECT CAUSE. 
 
 685 
 
 qucmqnani, si minus in maxiiiijl arte qunm illi in minimi!» oper» consiimpperim ? lb. 
 Jii'p. 1, 22 ( =: 1. Opirtcos progrecii in «nil arte fttudenl ; 2. (Uqni mea ars ed i-espiiblua ; 
 '\. tvfjo rt'ipnt)lica' stiidCrc me oportet).— LuciiUus' n'sponclit,(lin>s s^t* liabere viclnos, equi- 
 ti-m Ifomflniiin (rt libertlimm, quorum quutn e,<fitnf mai;iiilic;v villie, conct'di sibi opoitOrc 
 qu<»(l eis qui in(<'iir>ris ordini;» e.«*s(>nt, licCrct. lb. Li-l;. .'1 i;i, yo ( - 1. (^tiod iiiferioribus 
 liii't. mihi cotice'fi ojxjrfef ; 2. (iff/>n viiini mei mai^Miiticas» villas hofjent ; ',i. ergo milii licet 
 villain luibC'ie mai;niticam).— 2) (^umn-claiiset? are espicially used if one or more inter- 
 mediate iinkfi, denotini: the immediate caui^c of the principal i)redicate. must be siip- 
 plied, as : Qxum. mentiuuem ejus rei in vetustioribus annalibus nullain inreuintn, mai:is 
 lit belli ({jdlici cans:! (lictatonin crcatum arl)itrer. incllnat aninms. Liv. 7, '.Msupply : 
 because if T. (^uinctius h.id been appointed dictator for the purpose mmtioned before, 
 it would have been recorded in the annals).— (|ui {i. e. deOrum metus) quum descendere 
 ad animos sine allquo cominenfo miraculi non ]>OMef, simulat sibi cum de3 Ejjerifi con- 
 jjressus noctiirnos esse. Liv. 1, 19 ( = .Numa pretended t(» meet Ei.'eria. bircaune he wished 
 to make I he Romans accept his reforms in religion, since v\r.). — Q'n/tn propter lon<:itn- 
 dinem au'iiiinis minus facile omnia per se oliire, et quid quoque loco faciendum esset 
 proriiiTie j)f>ssenf, jiis^Criint promiiitiare ut iinptdimttita relinqueient, atque in orl)em 
 cousisterent. Ca;s. B. (i 5, ;ii (Thov i^avi* the order to relinquish the ha^'irnut', fj^cuftse 
 this was n«'ce»sary to form a compact line of l):ittle, ^i//r^ the column was too lonir to 
 impart to them the necessary commands). Comp. Liv. 1, 13 ; Ca;s. li. U. 2, 2o, and the pas- 
 buyes qu<>ted p. Gr>5, Obs. 1. 
 
 Obs. 5, This line of distinction between quia (quod) and qitum (the same as in Enirlii'h 
 between 'because' and '^ince') cannot be drawn with ab.-olute definiteness, since the 
 supplyiii;; of connecting; links will olten appear more or less unnecessary, accordinij to 
 the conce|)tion of the author, and because the term •immediate', if applied tothouijht, is 
 not capablt" of belnir absulutily determined. lU-mc qw/tn or quiau/uod) may siometimea 
 be optionally used, and, not rarely, in very similar sentences, tiie one is fuund wiih a 
 Quum-clause. wliile in the other quid or quod is emjjloyed, as ; Nam quutn soliifldo et 
 vita sine amicis insidiArum et metiis p<ena sit, nitit» ipsa monet amicitias comparflre. 
 Cic. Fin. 1, 20, r><;. Compare with : Quia nuilo modo sine amiciiiil lirmam et perpi-tuam 
 jncunditatem vitie tenere possumus, iainv amicitia cum voluptjlfe connectiiur. lb. 1, 
 20, ti7. — Itaque, quum lonL'iiHiuil a domo insfei militia. incerinuKiue sit quando domos 
 vestras risili'i ^i/i.v, commeStiim do. Liv. 21.21. Compare with: Hannibal, quia fe^sum 
 militeni i)ra'liis operibusqiie habebat. paucorum his dierum <iuieteui dedit. lb. 21,11. — 
 Dionysiiis, quum in comnninibuei suL'<:jestis consistere no/i ««/(/e/f/, coniionari ex turn 
 altjl solGbat. Cic. Tusc. ."i, 20. Compare witli : Ariclnu-* quia palam inteilici /urn />o(traf, 
 oblflto falso crimim; insontem oppressit. Liv. 1,51, It is evident that, in all thesis p.is- 
 i^ii'^v^, quu/n miirht have been subsiiiuted for quia. iu\i\ quia Utrquu/n. Tim-* clauses 
 with p/wse/fiat quum (see the passjij^es p. ti.")5, Ons. 2> are often entirely equivalent to 
 clauses introduced by 7Haj'i/nt quod, to maqis quod iquta), eo mi/ius quod, as : (^uanto 
 erat in dies «rravior oppuuMiatio, et maxime quod, ina<:njl parte miliium conlectil. res ad 
 pauciiiltem defi'iisorum i»«*rvenerat, tanto crebiiOres littene ad Ciesarem miitebantiir. 
 C'a>s. B. li. 5, l."> ( = y>/(f.vfr/im quum res ad piucitjlti-m peivenerai).— Ab magis quod 
 pridie GermJlni retinC-ri non pot«'rant ( = quum pnnstitim ntiuiri noit jxjfuisxt ni). lb. 1. 
 47. — Neque llispaniam nei:li<;endam ratus, <^o 7/ii/ius quod baud ii^nnrus erat ( = quum 
 prcRsertiiu haiui ijxnilrus esset) circumitam ab Homilnis earn legiltis*. Liv. 21,22.— Causal 
 quum can never be connecteil with any syndetic antecedent. 
 
 Obs. G. Quoninm (probably derive(! from quum \\\\(\ jatn) i.s used if the action of tho 
 clause is represented as known to the ptr'-oii. addres.'<ed. especially if referrin^j to the 
 addressed person's own acts, or as g-uendhj kiiowu, whereas with quia and quod the 
 author means to inform the reader or the person spoken to, o/ a lit w fact, not presumed 
 to be known to them. In Entrli.-h this relation is expressed by ' niiice\ Quoniam 
 closely resembles the French pui^que.* Mostly quouiam is used conventionally in i)ar- 
 ticular relations (Obs. 7), but it, also, frequently occurs with the force of both quia 
 {qu(Hi) and qunm, beiniir distiniriiished from these conjunctions by the mere fact that tho 
 statement in the claust; is assumed as kuoirn. as : 
 
 A. Quoniam with tiik fokck of quia : Quoniam me verbo premi?, posthac non dicam 
 *MisKrt08 kssk', sed tantiim 'misehos'; hince you flirht me for a word (improperly 
 used), I will hereafter not say 'miseros esse', but oidy 'miseros*. Cic. Tusc. 1,7.— Sed 
 \W\\e, quoniam satis jam ambuKlttim est, l«)cum mutemus, et sermOid reliquo operam 
 demus sedentes ? lb. Le<;. 2, 1.— .\Jii, ut celeriter perrumpant censent, quoniam tam pio- 
 I>inqua sintcastra. Cies. B. G. 6. 40. Comp. Caes. B. C. 1,72 ; Sail. Juir.3."> ; 10.4; Cic. Leij. 
 3, 2 ; lb. Part. Or. 25, «9; O. G. O. 2, 4 ; Cat. 3, 12, 29; Sen. 2:J, 84 ; Pla ut. Mil.4,2. 54. Otten 
 
 * Very rarely (and only in anteclassical lanjruaL'e and late Latinity) quoniam occurs 
 when a fact not known to the i)ersoii addressed, or new to the reader, is stated as a cause: 
 Quid isiuc, inquam, oruilti est? Quoniam, miser, quod habui perdidi. Tcr. Eun. 2, 2, (i. 
 
 qucmiam and quia occur in the same period, both exprcppincf the pame relation, and be- 
 ing both used of known facts. Comp. Cic. Or. 1, 50, 217 ; lb. N. I). I,y9, 109 ; lb. Cjcc. 1. 2 ; 
 lb. Fam. 1, 1. — Quoniam. in jrood prose, does not take the syndetic antecedents of quia. 
 However Colum. 12. jujef. says: Quoniam hunc sexum diligeiiliai assignaverat nattira, 
 iccirco timidlOrem reddit. 
 
 li. Quoniam with the force op qnvm : Est ijritur, qnoniam nihil est ratiOne melius 
 et in fiomin'e et in deo, prima homini cum deo ratiOnis societas. Cic. Leg. 1, 7. 2:1— Ex 
 quo intelliiritur, quoniam Griecorum oratOrum pnestantissimi sini ei qui fiigrunt Atheuis, 
 eorum aiitem princeps facile Demosthenes, hunc si qui imitetur, eum et Attice dictflrum 
 et optime. H). O. G. O. 4, i:i — Quoniam tantum natflra a natQra (iistat. quid mirum est, 
 has dissiimilitudines ex ditferentibus caiisis esse facias? lb. Fat. 4. -Et qvoniam del 
 lacientls adjflvant, prius iiivo( abo eos. Varro R. H. 1.— Adventus Komanr>nim Latinos ex 
 prope certa tiduciil mox cnpiendic arcis, quoniam oppido potirentur (quasi-suboblique), 
 in exiguam de se ip>is spem verterat. Liv. 6. :i.'i. Comp. lb. (i, ;i7 ; 8, (i ; Sail. Jug. 3. 1 ; Cic. 
 Leg. 2,11, 27; lb. :i, 1;J. .'JO: 3,16; Part. Or. 9, .-^3 ; 21,72; Fin. 1,11,37; Sen. Cons. Helv. 14. 
 — Sometimes 7//o/<iam and 7M'/m are coordinate iii the «^ame sentence, as: Quoniatnqve 
 exspectaiiOne rerum bonarum erigifur animus, recte etiam Spes a Calatino consecrata 
 est. . . ; quumque Vesta quasi focuin urbis complexa sit. ei colendai virgines pne-int. (.-ic. 
 Leg. 2, 11. 28, 29.— Primuin, quum orbis lerue dirhus sit in duas partis ab Eratosthene, et 
 sine dubio y>/o//t«;/i saliibrior pars septentrionaiis c^t quain meridiSna, dicendum (est) 
 magis earn fuisse opportfliiam ad colenduui quam Asiain. Varr. li. li. 2. 
 
 Obs. 7. The conventional usaires of quotnam must be derived from the original tem- 
 poral meaning of this conjunction {— quum jam). In anteclassical language g^'owia/zt 
 occurs both with the me.ining ol quum (dui/i) temporal, and of ])Os(qvam, as: Is quo- 
 niam moritur— ita avido ingeniu fuit— , numquam indicSre id lilio voluit suo ; Wheji he 
 was dying, he did not wish etc. Piaut. .\n\. \)ro]. *).— Quoniam prolecius hinc est Char- 
 mides ; While Ch. was on th-^ point of departure. lb. Tnn. 1, 2, 12. — Ego. qvoniam in- 
 Hpexi mulieris sententiam, cep' talxllas, consignavi clancuium, dedi meicatOri etc.: Af' 
 ieT understanding the womans meaning, I took my tablets etc. lb. Mil. Gl. 2, 1,51. 
 So li). Merc. 4, 1, 1; Baccb. 2,3, 5fi. In classical language there are only traces of this 
 temporal use, without referiinir also to cause, as: Nunc quoniam hominem generavit et 
 ornavit deus, porspicuum sit illiid ipsnm, per se naturam longius jyrogredi j Let th.s be 
 understood, that alter Go<l created and endowed man, Nature by her>elt is continuing 
 [his work] Cic Leg. 1,9,27. Indeed, jtostquam. in its sect>iid and third meanings, men- 
 tioned p. 660, Obs. 1, combines a tt nipoial ard causal signification, and qvoniam is 
 frequently used with similar force, as : Marius anxius trahere cum animo suo omitte- 
 retne inceptum, quoniam Irustra erat, an fortunam opperiretur. Sail. Jug. 9:i. But in 
 this and ad similar passages, the fact of the clau>e {quoniam incepium fiuslra erat) is 
 represented as known to the reader, having been narrated before, and althouirh pa-<tquam 
 might have been used in its place, such a substitution of quoniam is not admissible in 
 those Postquam-(laus«'s, in which the action is mentioned for the first time. It is prob- 
 al)le that tne anteclassical temporal use of qucmiam was basrd on c<dloquial i)ractice, 
 and that this usage was continued in the following periods of the language. For we 
 find in Festus (s. v. quouiam>, and Donatus (ad Ter. Ad. prol. 1) the express remark 
 that quoniam had the meaning of both quia and poatquam. 
 
 Obs. 8. From the original temporal meaning of quoniam must, in the first place, be 
 derived its use as denoting a reason, not /or the principal action as svch, but for its pres- 
 ent performance, or for its performance at the time spoken of. Generally, in this 
 instance, the clause contains an action just accomplished, the performance of the prin- 
 cipal action being made pos.^ible or desirable thereby. Quoniam, if thus used, is ren- 
 dered either by '■after'' or by 'since', or by a participial construe tion. as: Nunc quoniam 
 illi*>, quantum mores niei poscel)ant. re-i/x)udi. pauca de repnblica loquar (the 'res]X>n- 
 dere' being not a cause for the principal act as such, but the accoinplishii g of the 
 resjiondire makin<; it possil)le for the speaker to add his other remarks). Sail. Juir. 85, 
 44 —Sed quouiam nos tanti viri res ad/nonuit, idoneum visum est, de natiira ejus paucis 
 dicere. H) Ub.— Quoniam j»s/jondi postrcMiite tuje paiijme prima nu-a, nunc ad primara 
 revertar tuam. Cic. Att.6. 2. 3.— (^/'/o/^iaz/i fldem mnaii-tri cognostis, co(/noscite nunc d\»ci- 
 puli a'quitatem. lb. K. A. 21.— C>//o//ia;/t de comniQni totlus Asiie crimine dit'tum est, 
 agqrediar Jam ad singula, lb Flacc. 15 —Quoniam nacti te sinnus aliqnando otiosum, 
 cefte audiam quid sit quod Epicflrum non i)ri>bes. lb. Fin. 1,5. 14.— Ariovistus legatos 
 miitit : (^ucd antea de colloquio jjostulasset, id per se./iVW licere. quoniam projAus aices- 
 siiist-f. C;es. B. G. 1,42.— Quibus quoniam pro pietate sa'llfectrit, hal^re mine se rationeni 
 oflicii. lb. 5, 2». — (;/'/o/<irtm tuta ea pacataque ab terL'o relinqutbantur, ovamhn^ jam 
 co-itationibu- in Philippum conversis. Liv.:i;i. 2.— Qiiein Ca;sar remittit cum mandatis : 
 Q'luniani ad id tempus facultas colloqueiidi non futtit, atque ipse Brundusium sit ven- 
 IQrus, iiUtresse rcipublicui se cum Pomp5jo coUoqui {i. e. : Quoniam facultas adhuc nou 
 
 
686 
 
 CAUSAL CLAUSES. 
 
 
 hi 
 
 l)U 
 
 et cade;.! fere aDsent.. q.uo. .i conun e..eTnu. consoqne Cu^. t am^^^ ^^^^. ,,i ^.^ 
 
 OB. 10. Hence aA.e the u.e of Q"oni.m;Clau^vvhen ^ --^^--;;;:^^?^: 
 fio/iwith the principal action, bat \"C'J"Jy 7"t:r?ornied Sue clause. nio>.t generally 
 MO/», conMclerinir which the P""^'P^V<'Sh in oS^^^^ th^form of thJ 
 
 refer to actions of aper.on adciressed which mohlqutd.^^^^ con.idera- 
 
 Hon 
 
 Hon, 
 
 reft-r to actions? of a pei 
 
 thi 
 
 tioi 
 
 the connection, as : (^uare, y//o/,,am J« A ^ ,^ '^'d if onS (I ^^ two points, ?/« 
 
 ante dica.nn. qme etc. ( = ^.nce V'^.^^ I'^^^^^^.^^Vth^ e wh^^ Cic. P. 0.24,86. 
 
 vwst connder them now; and firs^t we^uiil ^PS' ^/'J ;.;"," \,;'V,„^ venire invi- 
 
 _(^.a/.mm hanc .ihi populOque »«»"^^^";«; ■^,';;V,V^"\'^:^"s 'm-e he^\^^^^^^ I'i"^ 
 
 tilt us crravarCtur, h;pc e^se q.ue a») eo P"^V''£p:n;:r> ,ri.^ rL;^^^^ 
 
 for thc".e heueti.s by decliu n^ an miemcMV. he \<-'^.^'^'^^^^.«-;Xw/7jf^ dri/«/i.s- <;.«u.' 
 in writing ; they were the Jollowin- C a^s «;, J'; j ; '^;' .T.^' ^ ^ornS'it si nuus omnibus 
 Tepudiatum est, nonu-n tanti.-n vjdeb.tu r. Si^^^^^^ P^ ^,.^ ^^j^^,,,^ ,^t 
 
 reliquis ina-istralil)ns impenlbit ( - *^"V t.^! i «n t o i.th. r mn-it^trates etc ). Cic. Leir. 
 
 ^;;s;i:quo^xciJ;ipli:VGiiiiac.f.uh..acra 
 
 Sause. as: Nee s.>h.m ^•^''Mioi'e'.tur Nxrba r t u„e^^^ '„ ,ca^lv arran^red etc., 
 
 fi//m ^'.«^ ann>nn alterumdiximus W u < U "y'^' •';»'''> '; " ,,„.,, (^.j,.. (,,at. 49. 104. 
 
 70hirh we laid down as the second P'>V'f ^l^/^J^r^h'!^^^^^ 
 
 Comp. 11). Le-. 2. 15, .33.-Of ten a t?"<>"'a"»-^>a '^;^^.^^^, » "^ Itm-r/ /ir,S^^^^ 
 
 ^vord or phrase of the princ-pal s.ntence, »^ ;. f*;'J^,^**,: ""l^"',,, d 'n inOta : = the niaj- 
 
 )«et, a 1.C l..llica; cciimonix- l.r<.(U-lii..tii.r, J' -:-*'-/^,"' ',';,/;„„, „m,J8 n civiia.c clls- 
 ,^nail,mdam Numa (livlrn auct,.i; J..ns ' "^1 :"-Fri aiScoH a conlrovir^ia est 
 
 DIRECT CAUSE. 
 
 687 
 
 1,21 ( = An the twelve tables forbade a prescription within five feet of the boundary, so 
 we shall not isuffer the old landmarks of the Academy to be encroached upon).— Ego 
 vero, qnoniam mtn desermsse mihi vidcor pra^sidium in quo a P. K. locStus sum, del>eo 
 j)n)fccio in co quoque labt^rSre nt sint dociiOres cives mei. lb. Fin. 1,4 ( = ^« I did not 
 desert the po<t in which I was placed by the R. P., so I must show my gratitude to it by 
 promoiini; tite knowledjre of my countrymen).— Sometimes qnoniam occurs with the 
 f(»rce of qvod ( = quod attinet ad), as : Qiiare quoniam nonnullOrum permo jam incre- 
 bruit. |)Hitim se ip-os Attice dicere, partim neminem nostrum diceie, alferos neqligamns 
 etc. ; Tlierefore. a.< to tlte fa^t that the pretensions of several persona are going abroad 
 that etc., let Ut, reply nothing to the one class etc. Cic. O. G. 0. 4, 11. 
 
 Obs. 1.3. Qnando* (since, seeinij that, considering that) represents like gvoniam,U^o 
 cause as known, and is a synonym of qnoniam in all its conventional meanings (Obs. 
 8-11), desiirnatinir a fact ascausini,' an action '■vndtr the circumstances or at the time 
 being.'' But in classical langUHge it is not used instead of quoniain when the latter repre- 
 sents an ordinary cause as granted (Obs. {\).—Quando\, as a causal conjunction (for its 
 temporal use sec p. G6G), often occurs in the anteclassical writers : and also in Livy and 
 the classical poets ; but rarely in CiceroJ and Sallust ; never in Caesar, but often in the 
 silver writers, who sometimes use it = qina% (always however referring to a known fact). 
 Examples : Due me ad earn, quando hue veni (seeing that I am here). Ter. And. 4, 5, 
 2i.— Quando hoc bene successit, liilarem nunc sumJmiis diem. lb. Ad. 2, 4, 23. — Quando 
 habeo multos cou'iiiiros. quid opus sit mihi liberis? Phiut. Mil. 8, 1, 110.— Quin ergoabia 
 quando respcmsum est? lb. 4. 2, 'd\.— Quando igitur i)ote^^t tibi Gemiinis Quintus vidSri, 
 quid babes exi)ior;lti cur non etc. Cic. .\c. Pr. 2, 2H.— (;^'ya/irfo el aliis locis de virtQte dixi- 
 
 mus, et sjepo dicendum est quando igitur virtus est affcctio animi constans, ex ea 
 
 proliciscuntur honestaj volimtates. Cic. Tusc. 4, 15.— MancSmus in eadem sententia, 
 y'/«//(/o hoc miserius esse nihil potest. lb. Att. 9, 13. S;].— Nunc, ^'/a«c?6> per illam licet, 
 festlna, atque uti ca?pisti perge. Sail. Jug. 102.— Si tu perinittis, volo ego illi belluae 
 ostendere, quando adeo fi-rox pr:esultat hostiura signis, me ex ca famiha ortum etc. 
 Liv. 7. 10.— DictatOri neutiquara placCbat, qnando nulla cogeret res, fortunie se comrait- 
 tere adveisus hostt-m. II). 7. 12.— Quid prcelia enumerem, 9</a/i(/o res plus valent quam 
 verl)a? Tac. Hist. 3. 11, 6.— Eva-jTinur, quando uberior sempt-r extra causam materia est. 
 Quint. 3, 11,2.-).— Omip. Ter. Ad. 3.1,9: 3,2, .50: 3,3,81: llec.4,4.81: Eun. 1, 2. 116: Sail. 
 Jug. 110. 7 : Liv. 10, 44 : 2(i. 50 : 29. 24 : 35, 22 ; 39, 51 : Veil. 2, 14 ; Tac. Hist. 1, 19, V\ ; 4, 5 ; 
 Ann. 1.44,3; 1. .57, 1 ; 2,26; 3,18; 4.6; 4.64; 13,2; 1.5,19: Quint.. 5. 12, 13 ; Suet. Cses. 
 28 ; Virg. .En. 1. 261.— Often quando. like quonia?}i. is connected with the particle quidem, 
 being generaliv written in one word with it, as : Hiec dctur cura censoribus. qvandoqui- 
 dem eos m republiril semjxjr volumiis esse. Cic. Le?. 3, 20. 47,— ' Bene habet', inquit 
 SfXtius. *■ quandoquidem tantum inteicessinnem pollc'ie placet, isto ipso telo tutabimur 
 plebem'. Liv. «. :}.').- Atque hoc contiteor jure mihi oht'MsinBc, quandoqnidem tarn iners, 
 tarn nihil conscia sum. Ter. And. 3, ,5. 2. Comp. lb. 3. 2.7: Ter. Eun. 2. 3.82 ; Liv. 1,54; 
 G, ;i.S ; Cic. Oral. 31, 112 ; lb. Brut. 44, 163. lb. Phil. 2, 3. 6 ; lb. Or. 3, 14, .54^. 
 
 Obs. 14. Siquidevi (or si quidem) properly is an emphatical si with conditional mean- 
 insr. Only in this meaning Hquidpvi ocfurs in anteclassical ]an<j:uage, as : Si quidem (if 
 indeed) me amditt, turn i>tuc prodf^.o^et Gnatho. Ter. Eun. 3. 1,56.— .vi quidem ( = etiam- 
 si» centies hie visa sit, tanu-n inlicias eat. Pl ant. Mil. 2. 2, 34. — Si quidem (= si tnodo) tu 
 
 * According to the testimony of ancient grammarians, quando was pronounced with- 
 out any accent when used as a causal conjunction, but with the accent on the first 
 syllable wiien used as a temporal adverb. Paul. Diac. £xc. Fest. XV. 
 
 t Ilarelv, instead of quando \\\ii form quandbqne occurs in two or three passages cf 
 Livy, as: Quanduqne lu. T. Manli, neque imptrium consulSre, neque majcststein pa- 
 triam vcritus, adversus edictum nostrum in liostem pugnasti, nos potius nosiro edicto 
 plcclCmur quam etc. Liv. 8,7. Comp. lb. 9, 10, where quandOque is used in an ancient 
 lornuila in })la(e of quando. . 
 
 t Some (for inst. Wunder Var. Lect. p. 75 foil., and Frkund and Andrews in the 
 lexicon) state that quando never occurs in Cicero as a causal conjimction, changing 
 quando in all the passages where it occurs, arbitrarily into quoniam. In this expeditious 
 WMv we niiL'ht remove a great many words oui of Cicero. 
 
 §I)o.\atl's (toTer. And.3, 2, 7) says : Quando cr qnuin intcrdum sunt conjunctiOnes 
 cau-aies, et quando pro quoidam 'et quia ' intelligimus. 
 
 II To thesi' three Ciceronian pas«ai:es should be added Cic. Par. 3,1: Atqni qvoniam 
 pares virtQtes sunt, recte /acta, quando a virtutihus proficiscuntnr, paria esse debent. 
 In this pohage some codices read qvoniam for quando. The latter was the common 
 reading belore'ORELM. who prefers * quoniam \ without sufllcient reasons. 
 
 ^ The difiVreuce between quando and quonia7n,iis stated by Ramshoun, and endorsed 
 by ZuMPT, Xharquoniajfi denotes a cause referring topresent circumstances, and quando 
 a cause referring to circumstances of an ind^nite time, is a mere fiction. 
 
688 
 
 CAUSAL CKVUSES. 
 
 ' ,c' f.m. .crv!,,,. to deslsLte Ihe fact ..f the ;;l»'''/ "/, » -jl^Xh ■ ,b ' o b " "^'' 
 
 Kish.-d by the tact» et,„incrat.;d). ''■ B"'-j'^;,f;;-^f ^^a ,1?, ' f ; i^^^M^^^^^^ 
 
 by the fact that etc.l siiiiiii.!.' is an oversleppiif,' of t , l' '•"• ' ■ •■ -'• \]J"}": i Ti™y 
 tian, p.e„e ,>bse,«Onem a,.l.ellilbai,t «V""'';"' ;i^,,' tl "' '"'"^aM l. rtv m cave ll.e 
 
 of ruan or ./.im. For the ^^^-"vutu.n J.f ^'/'yv^* J^<^^^^ kT-^cc P I § 401), it occur, in the 
 4 If oMiy)y><^ has the force of Mil EMiuiATic I'AKTiri.h if-cc I . I.. 8 ^yiN • 
 
 rono,vin?c:i,:,K.c,i..,,.:...I"c....,ec.i....wi,l,m«.<<<«^^^^^^ 
 
 s;;;; ^im :^^i^sr..:'"miic;io,r'»^;rpa;,ic;i.nai^r^^ 
 
 . T„e «atem™. of the ^a,m,ja.ja,;, «mt ^vjjl^jj^ -a iy .1- -'.'V -;«„- ^r-- 
 
 the k^^ic<.i^rapher8 quote the follmv.n^pa-a^^^^ 
 
 C-a^.-um vidi.srt. Cic.Fam. 1, •.♦,!). ^ \ ' '"..V' ' iT;^ e m^^^^ without a 
 
 of the Pui»l. Sell. Gr.) i;» misquoted, all the le\t^ auu luc nmim. 1,11^^1.0 « „ 
 
 DIRECT CAUSE. 
 
 689 
 
 as h»\ve the form of an apposition. Phrases of this kind have always a causal mean- 
 in*?, and nuiy be renolved into causal relative clauses with quippe qvi. as : Coniitioram 
 prope major patrihus quam belli cura erat, qttipj}e prope a^)is^um ceim.iHiil,u.< summum 
 impenum ( = (piipfte v'/i amissum cernerent). Liv.5, 14. — Non crediderim PisOui, qui 
 quadrairinta millla pondo ar^'cuti seposita in earn rem scribit, quippe sinnmatn pecuniaj 
 neque ex unius tun» urbis piieda eperandam. et etc. ( = quippe quaa sumnia ueque trpe- 
 raucla fuerit, et). Liv. K.'i.i. — Ne metus quidem ab Rouifluis erat, quippe tam paucis 
 ( = quippe qui tam puuci essent). H). 25, ;W.— Sol Deinocnto magnus vidCtur, quippe 
 homini erudite ( = quippe qui homo erudltus* fuerit). Cic. Fin. 1,0, 2(). Comp. Liv. 1. 14 ; 
 1,2.5; 8.4; Sail. Jug. Wi; lb. 1U5.— ti) Rarely y//i;>/>e is used as an emphatic particle if it 
 is not thus connected with causal propositions «)r phraser, when it may be either ren- 
 dered by 'of cour>e\ or be lelt out in Knglifh. Often we may use the F^iiglish emphatic 
 particle "J/'Ay', as : VidOte quid ea vitii lex habitQra fuerit. ciijus»periculOsa etiam re- 
 prehetisio est: et aspexit mc illit» oculis quibus turn solCbai quum omnibus omnia 
 minabatiii. M<»vet me quippe lumen curia; ; H'Ay (of couife)^ the light of the Senate- 
 house awed me (the meaning Iteing ironical). Cic. Mil. 12, 3:i.— Ergoad coenam petitionis 
 causa si quis vocet, condemnetur? C/*/iy>/>^, inqiiit, tu mihi summum imperium petas 
 fovendis liominnm sensibus? ( HV/y, do you mean to seek the highest otlice by means 
 of flattering men's senses?) lb. Mur. Jio, 74.— Jam, inquit. fateor in Gabinium me nefa- 
 rium fuisse. Q>iip}y> vides. pcenam illam in te ipsum esse conversam {Why, you see that 
 punishment is coming back on yourself). lb. Dom. 4K, 120. In some other passages the 
 reading quipj)€ rests on inferior authority, lor instance, Cic. Mur. 30, 02; Jb. Phii. 2, 29, 74. 
 
 IJ. Often quippe occurs in the hiptorians (in I.ivy and Sallust, and frequently in Velle- 
 jus. Tacitus, Justin, but not in tU'sar. nor in Cicero*) as a cooudinating conjunction 
 with the meaning of nam or enim (for. ftecause). as : DeteriOre conditiOne sumus qiiam 
 captlvi, quippe illis ordo militandi tantum est mutSfus. Liv. 20, 0.— Intelligo a^quos 
 bonosque mihi favere, quipj)e beneficia mea reipnblicte procCdunt. Sail. lug. «.5. Comp. 
 Ter. lleatit. 2, 4, 9 ; Plant. Mil. 3, 1, 9 ; Liv. 5, 3:3 ; 1, 25 ; 10, 41 ; Sail. Jug. 85, 27 ; lb. 90, lb. 53t. 
 
 Obs. 17. Causal clause* (aside from those introduced by quum, which always require 
 the subjunctive) take their predicates in the subjunctivk 1) according to the gtueral 
 rulen if theclau^e is suboblique (p. 398 foil.) or virtually suboblique (p. 404), or if the 
 mood is attracted (p. 408) ; also if the predicate has the force of a potential subjunctive 
 Cp. 378 foil.); 2) according to the rules on relative clauses, if the clause requires a sub- 
 junctive ol non-reality (p. 543 foil.). 
 
 .1. Causal clauses introduced by quod. quia,nr\d quoniam, are frequently placed in the 
 subjunctive to desiirnate them as conceived or uttered by the subject, without the addi- 
 tion of anvthing else to indicate ihis fact (see p. 400, § 000. Obs.). as: Numa Camgnis 
 eum locuni sacravit, quod enrnm ibi concilia cum conjutre sua Egeria essent ( = quod, lit 
 dlrit, it)i erant). Liv. 1. 21.— Brutus, velut si prolapsus cecidissi-t, terram osculocontigit, 
 scilicet quod ea comimTnis mater omnium mortalium tsfiet. lb. 1, 50.— Nemo oiatOrt-m 
 hdmiratus est quod Latlne loquereturX. Cic. Or. ;i, 14.— g,uum Sagunilnis, quia prieter 
 
 leve tnim est ttnum ho* , risuni movCre. Cic.T)rr2, 54.— Recte igiturdiceres te restituisse ? 
 Quippe quid enim facilius est quam etc. ? lb. Ctec.19,55. But in both passages quijrpe 
 may be separated by punctuation from the lollowing words, and be taken in the mean- 
 ing ' of course ', ' certainly ', according to No. 0. 
 
 * The passages irenerally quoted to prove that Cicero uses qvippe in this meaning are 
 Phil.2. 29, 74: "0^2, 54.218: Dom. 4s, 120. But in the first passage quin must be read 
 instead of quippe (a<cording to the belter codices, and all the recent critical editions) ; 
 in the second and third passaires, quip/)e has merely the meaning of an emphatic particle. 
 
 t Quipi^e, if used with causal force, cannot be considered as a sufjoidinating conjunc 
 tion, although there are several passages in which it is either coordinate with qoia, 01 
 in which quia may be substituted lor it, as : Neque tameii SimAtus provinciam inyltu< 
 
 or 
 us 
 
 sensiOniim et^se. quid in duabus wrhWm* fort f Liv.5,24.— Senatus dis agt-re graiias quod 
 Camillus in magistratu esset ; dictatOrem ry/ayvx? dicendum /aj^v'^, si privatus esset. lb. 
 
 publicis consilia* Liv.4.57.-Unde enim eam pecuniam confici jx)sse, nisi tribtlto in- 
 dicto* lb 4 (W —A^am Siciliam nimisceleri desperati0nererumcanc6^j«am («*?««). lb. 21. 1. 
 i llere the subjunctive is not used on account of the negative form of the principal 
 
G90 
 
 CAUSAL CLAUSES. 
 
 .pen. -i..--'^ crcvU.^ anin. r^ CJ^.^I^^h^^'S 
 
 the SHL'UiMiaiKs as the logical ^" *J^\\ '^,1^ ' ; ili it I iv 'M •> fHere the Hubjnnctivcs, 
 a. the rea.onj cla,nor.m r.,n.n^. .^ ,^, co.ieiv.cn.y 
 
 A i> 1 11 Jo. liv ^ -Vi- Oiiintil 5,10,119.-0) Fokmlla 1. wita nan quia: r^u..^ 
 
 of ' iwa id ' in . he meaning- mm quod , 1 h,^>. '''^^l^^^, J'^^^ ifow little 
 
 Si';*'.»-. rtSc tUc7oru'. of'iu™'t-lu»e of u^u-iealUy is iu co>,forml,y wuU .he 
 
 DIRECT CAUSE. 
 
 691 
 
 rum cxcmpla tibi misi, iwn vt. ddibemrem rcddendjene assent, sed quod non dubito etc. 
 Cic. Att. It, 17, 4 {not that I deliberate whfther they should be returned; = non qvod 
 Udilterrirein). — Ha?c ad le stril)0, uoa ut queaf< tudemere solitudineui, sed etc. lb. 11, 15, 3 
 (not that you ari- able to remove my y^orrow, but etc. : = non qvod). Thue the clauees 
 occui in reversed order: Qiiorr^uui hiec pneteilta? Qiiia sequitur illud c\c...^non ut 
 ear- reii cau>am allVrient auiOris. lb. Fato 15,35 [ = lla-c dicta hunt non vt { = quod) 
 cjiut^am atiVrrent aniuri.s, .s>(/ (/>/ia sequitur etc.]. This formula with ' nt causaP rarely 
 occurs, on account of its ambiiruity, and because it was supplanted by the third formula 
 ' non quo\—(d) Fokmui-a 3. This is the most frequently used amonj» the formulas men- 
 tioned ^ZiTMPT's as^erlioll to the contrary notwithstanding), and is best explained by 
 
 Plane. 23, 5ii; Alt'. 7, 15; Fam.5.19.2; Liv. 28, 27; 28,37; 32, S3.— (^) Formila 4: Sed 
 me non movet re-piiblica, non quo sit mihi quicquam carius, fed desfiei^dtu^ etiam Hippo- 
 crateji i^tat adhit/ere tnedeclnani. Cic. Att. l(i, 15.— Comp. lb. Att. 4, 15; Fam. 3, 17, 3 ; lb. 
 l(t, 12.3: Or.:i, 24, 93; Brut. 21,83; Tusc. 1, 1 : Liv. 21,31.— (/) P'ohmula 5 : Hujus con- 
 htiiutionis Ilermauoras inventor esse existimtltur, Jion quo non vn dnt e3 veteres oratO- 
 n'<, sed quia non animadverterunt artis sciiptorc* cam supcriores. Cic. Inv. 1. 11.16. — 
 Majores nostri in douiinum de servo qmcri noiueruiit, non quia non jxtsset yemm inve- 
 nlri, sed quia videbatur indignum. lb Mil. ?2, 59. Comp. Id. Verr. 2, 2, 35 ; Quint. 8, 3, 
 42; lb. 2, 2, 2.— (5-^ Fou.Mri.A Gt : Ego me ducem in civTIi bello negavi esse, non quin. 
 rectum es»d, sed quia, quod multo rectior fuit, id milii fraudem tulit. Cic. Att. 7,26.— 
 Pnt me tuli, me nihil malU- qiiam pacem, non quin eadem timCrem qute illi, sed ea bello 
 cirUi jtofiOra duceba/n. II). 8, 11 /A 1.— Comp. Cic. Fam. 4, 7, 1 ; 16,24,1; Or. 2, 72, 295; 
 Urat. 68, 227 ; Liv. 2, 15, 2 ; lb. 32, 32$. 
 
 D. Xon quod, and non quia Omt not non quod non, non quia non. nor non quo and non 
 qvin) take the indicative if tne predicate of the clause is rej)ri'sented as a real fact, 
 which is denied to be a cause for the principal statement (in English: ^ not becautie'); 
 as : /Elius 8extus 'egroirie cordfifus' el • catus ' ab Ennio dictus est, non quod ea qu<xre- 
 bat qiiuj luinKjuam invenlret, sed quod ea respondebat quie eos, qui qniesi!»sent, et cura 
 et net'otio solvcrent (/Elius Sexius, 'the Sceptic' really sought what he never found, 
 namily the objective truth «>f things ; but this ua.^^ not t/te rea.<on why he was called ' ca- 
 tus ' etc.). Cic, Kep. 1, 18.— Elto sum exercitus, non quia mvltis debeo, sed quia nepe cou- 
 cnrrit...ut in omnis verear ne vix possim gratus vidGri (Cicero really was owing obliga- 
 tions to many; but that was not the reason of liis embarrassment). lb. Plane. 32, 7S. — 
 XeA^ vero hoc, quia tiuni ip.<e augur, ita sentio, sed quia sic existimilri nos est necesse. 
 lb. Leg. 2, 1'l.—Son quia ad<->! pnesens. dico hoc. Ter. Ad. 3, 3,39.— Nam et ille, y.on quia 
 ernif, leno est, sed, quia leno erat, emit; nee hie quia sic erat locutus occTdit, sed quia 
 erat occisOrus, t^ic b.cOtus est. Quint. 5, 10,47.— Comp. Cic. P. 0. 14,48; Quint. 5, 10,56; 
 11). 5, 10,82. The poets, however, sometimes use the indicative with 7wn quia {non), even 
 if tiie fact is non real, as: llancidum aprum antlqui landabant, non quia nasus Illis 
 lUlllusVa^ sed quod etc. Ilor. Ser m. 2, 2, 89. Also Livy, in a number ol passages, usea 
 
 principle often mentioned (p. 6J2, foot-note; p. 608, Obs. 6). In fact, this is the only 
 way in which we can explain our English That-clause, used in this connection ( = not 
 for the rt-a-son that). . 
 
 * Most grammarians explain non quo by an 'attraction', stating that '^ non quod is 
 chanired into 'non quo' to aL'ree with the ablative eo which 7nai/ be understood {non eo 
 quodl. If this were so, we mav proi)erly ask why, in the frequent Quod-clauses depend- 
 ent on eo without a negation, the same attraction never occurs? Moreover this attrac- 
 tion would be entirely without analogy, since in Lati7i relative clauses the case of the 
 relative is never (and certainly not in good prose) attracted by its antecedent. The cor- 
 rectnesti of our explanation is almost made indubitable by the fact that clauses with non 
 quo never occur with the indicative, as the clauses with non quod, ancl non quia (see No. JJ). 
 
 t The quin in these clauses may be either explained as the reirular conjunction in 
 neirativc That-clauses with negative principal predicates (deriving themfrom/OA-w//a2), 
 or by the original interrogative negative meaning of quin ( = not why J should not). 
 
 X The use of quo.niani In these lonnulas peems to be excluded, because a predicate 
 cannot he at the same time an acknowledged fact, and against reality. Nevertlieless 
 we read in Tic. Verr. 2, 1, 9; Utar oratlone perpeiuil, non quoniam hoc sit luce-se. ve- 
 rura ut experiar utrum ille etc. Madciq has emendated this passage (against the codi- 
 ces): 'non quo Jam hoc sit necesse'. But we way explain 'no/i qmniam" by saying 
 that Cicero used quoniam with the same peculiar force (Obs. 9), as he would have with- 
 out a neiration. But tiiis question can hardly be decided withcmt another passage m 
 which non quoniam occurs in this meaning. Such apastage, however, is not extant. 
 
692 
 
 CAUSAL CLAUSES. 
 
 the indicntive with rofcronce to facts non-real, whore Cicero would u?e the PuhjnncHve. 
 a».: IduQuinctiofMcilr i.upetrAium. »w^ <pna (Ba-otioB) ^at.'^ «VP'o;; ^''-*" ^"^.^'^'f/ ;;''« 
 onia Aniiucho n'<re jam suMucto. favor cM.iuiliaiuliir» noinii.i Hotnano apiid civifjltea 
 ?rat Liv 33/27. Co'ip.II) 10,41 (non ^luia 1^»<< ummi rird.e.n, «nd lb 40.33 (;.m, r,>na 
 cunctm su.k). So Cohini.8, iilt. Frequently such indicative, are f'»"";»^",';;!,^' !:;;•.« 
 of the Mlver »?e. as: Vutu. niacnifiea c-r, nou qnia per t-e fmihwi f-^f malo <^»"ii><'e, 
 Ped oiiia animiTni laxat. Sen. N. (^ Pnef.-S.iadente Ku^ro, no,, qyxa industnft Haviani 
 '7?/.^ .e .H^e^^^^ Tae. II. 3, 4. Conip. (Jell. 7. % 11. -In later Latinity even um qmmmvi 
 i^fuund with the indicative in re-ard to lact>. non-n-a . a»^r ^on uuoi.tamm-^^xy^MW'^ 
 unani derivationem e.s-e hoc fevertnd (inst. of 'no» y^/w/ h(H' fm^rnU ) hoe Ca'sar dixit 
 ^ed nt ete. Pon.p. Con.in. Art. I)(»n. p. KlH Und-Aofi quo. and ,am qmn are never nsed 
 11 he predicate of the clause i^ r.'presented as a real fact, ^.nce neither qnin, nor q>'0 
 can he cu.."trued with the indic'itive*.^ir the pre.licate of these causal clause. 1. a 
 hypothetical preterite, it take, the form mentioned p. 4 j.{, Nj>. ^- »=;• \ 7'""i>^'\\f ,^e 
 iide».«e Dotui-sein 1 Nan m(0 proflci jx^fnertt aliquid, sed etc. Cic. 1 Mill. l.b,14.-ln tlie 
 writers fie silver a^e. ;. Jv"^^ "«'d non quia are often found «'!»'""'« «"'f ^;;',^' 
 ."that the copula must he suj.plu <1. as : ^:quioriht,s «nim-s recepti sm.l q. I »1 .^^^ 
 uium veueiant, /«>/uyMia mode.lior miles U-c e^*•eO, "^ed duci pluBauctoruau». 1 aft 11. 6, m. 
 
 H. ADYEKSATIVE CAUSE. (CONCESSIVE CLAUSES.) 
 ^ 624 (\>NCEssivE CLAUSES aic either indefinite, or definite. In- 
 deiinUe concessive clauses are those whieh contain an action merely 
 assumed bv the author ( = even if, hoicenr much). They are intnuhiced 
 bv etiavui\\\\\\\ the indicative or siibjnnrtive), qmnnvis with the subjunc- 
 tive or ?/Mvith the subjinuMive. 7>^/?y/<7c eoneessive clauses reter to a 
 certain fact ( = althouuh), ami are inliotluced by quamquam or €t»i (tarn- 
 ftsi)\\\\h the indicative (rarely by y//^n/im), or by ^//^(//i with the suU- 
 iunctive (p. Con). The impersonal verb licet, if used with the torce ot a 
 conjunclion, belomrsto bolh, delinile and indetinilc concessive clauses. 
 OB* 1 Concessive ciau^es denote advkksativk caipe, t e. a cause which, ^f^JpI'l'^S 
 to ueneral experience, sh-uhl result in a c.nsequence either contrarj/ to, or efferent 
 fmm that expressed oy the principal sei.ten-e. Hence they contain hoth. ^^^ odrermtive 
 Ind^conresdre element; m/r./>y//i/>. hecause the result expresses a C(mtr(U<t \o the 
 c^ s^ m 7/rS?4 hecause the author concedes, a^ ii were, that there is a tact form- 
 hi.; nam t .d^ to the pnncip.d stat^'ment. Therefore, concessive periods 
 
 are ftJr pS n'«»ns Af proV..sitions expressly containing the predjca e 
 
 Mo ionce, ' r hy ordinary wlcersativ. n>^rdinaf. prop,. si. Ions with famen (hu .M ; 
 a^' FafZa concede) insitam e.se nobis crporis nost.i cantfltem. mm ^*^;> " ' * 
 
 pendum illi : .en'ie.dum ner,o mt I deny that we ^•;;>"'i . ''V, ''14 Ih itracu K^^ 
 et4 eius in-ila est caritas, serviendnm /nine» non est). !>en. hp. 14.-l)i\ tiacus (.ixu, 
 Irtre^e ilia esse r^ra ; sese tamea auir,re fraterno commovCri. ( se». U. G 1 , 20. - 
 Seintur ex oppi.lo^b^ i".n deMitit tani.n ( = eM ex oppido ;;xpul^u^ est 
 
 S/ on de<t tit) Ih.7;4.-Indertnite concessive clause, have either the nature of 
 cZcWioZ i«*^'i he n^^ ntroduced hy ttiaom), or of indefioit.relaftve clause, (he.n;,' 
 fn. n d c ed l.v </«' //a-i.s). t>ee p. 4!.S f.dl.-The .y>,de(ic antecedent, of concessive clause» 
 
 a r in ;;?^r/.« ..4. .i/uUi... which, »---'-r- »«•« ^7;>^;« 'y "j^^^ 'j; le 
 
 niyy/o^U Ui» ' no.t-cedent»'), so tliat the concessive clauses form the pwKMh. n inc 
 KSa/ set.tfn^^^ concessive dau.e, n.» syndetic «ntecedentH are Used 
 
 %Zuh sometime!., in antecia.sical style even in .hi« Instance tutncu 1« used, as: 
 Tumtn liet, elH tti fidem seivaveri«. Plant. Hud. 5. Z, b-i. 
 
 Or* 2 Clause, introduced hy etianm (even if), are a ppecieg of conditional clauecs, 
 ,,,.;"?:i.:;.. '!! ! v.rv\;..snectjht^ fonniny ti.e connectin^^ link between the 
 
 '♦IUmTiTFT li^in'dicative alter non q>i«d the -rainmaria.i. d.sa-ree. Kuhner ^«v^ : ' /?y 
 the t'dicatire the canse iv v^prexenttd as hkai.i.v i^or noldinq (/oo<i\ uhich is utterly 
 rrt.n eouf MEiKiNG .ays : ' Livy and later writer, .tra-.frely use non quod and »onq''ia 
 will I e i.Klica ive' (i-norin- the reqular use of tlie iudicuiive).-MAi.vi« remarks that 
 J^a re are Tfev exceptions to The use of the suijunctive after non 7'/0(/ quoitn- the above- 
 lin re lilt, J» 11,« v^.\^- i»i»"« .1,.. i)..Ki ».1/^.1. <!■. ^uv,i. 'If ilw rtiusfi d&nitd 
 
 nmoe up to suit the one p!4.-.-..^v. ^. .. ... — -- ...---^ . . 1 . . , „„.. 
 
 iudicaiivea u^eed by Livy, Seneca, and Tacitue, in the above-quoted pastage^. 
 
 ADVERSATr\T3 CAUSE. 
 
 693 
 
 concc!»pive and conditional clauses. In t>oth, the Efiamsi-clavse/i and conditional-clavsu, 
 the predicate of the clause is represented as an uncertain continjjewcy ; but in ctndi- 
 litnuil-clau.'^es this uncertainty etlectsthe reality of tlie principal predicate, while in Eiiam- 
 si-dauses the principal predicate is represented as real or as non-real notwitht<tandin<r the 
 uncertidnty of the dependent predicate. Etiamsi-clauses have this in common with defi- 
 nite concessive clauses, that they r>ecome identical with them when the uncertainty of the 
 predicate is removed. Thus the conditional-concessive clause 'Omnia brevia tolerabilia 
 esse tlebent, efiam-H magna sunt ' (Cic. Am. "27, 104) becomes a dtfinile concessive clause 
 if a<lefiniie subject is substituted in the sentence: ' Hie dolor, etsi majrnus est, tolera- 
 bilis esse debet. '. — Sometimes, however, etiarn^i (the same as 'even if in English) is used 
 in tlie meaiiin<;of<?Avt(alihou<rh>, just as si may virtually be equal to quia. If soused, 
 etlntnsi rtqiiires th»; indicative (while, if vice versa etsi is used in the meanini; of 
 fiatnd, it very frequently has the i^uhjiinctive, see Obs. 13); as: Etiamsi (althoutrh) 
 dudum />/^r«^ amhiu'uum hoc mihi, nunc non est. Tcr. Hec.4, 4, 26.— Nam ista Veritas, 
 e/ia/z/M "(althoiifj;li) jucunda non 6,-*^, mihi tameii <,'rata est. Cic. Att. 3, 24. 
 
 Ons. 3. Eflam>:i takes the indicative or subjunctive accordinj:^ as an ordinary condi- 
 tional clause, if sul)siitured for it, would take an indicative or a subjunctive. See Chapter 
 VI. ; as: Kliamn qui<l scribas non fiaf>ef)is, scribito tainen. Cic. Fam. 1«), 2«. — EtiamA alie- 
 riiiii xixwnun jHvd and >ifn est, } erdam poiiiis quam sinam etc. Plant. Ep. 3, 4, 85.— £'/t«m>;i 
 caiitilte a iratre niajOieri//w;-, misericordiil certe vinci non debeo. \A\.A(),\b.—Eliantsi 
 uwn.' relkm (contrary to reality), bold viri me ut id non facerem rojrareiit. Cic. Plane, 
 3rt.— (^uis, hoiie<ta in familiil fiistitfltus, non ipsa tiirpitudine. f/ia;/i.vi euni hesflra non 
 /f;7 (viiiuallvsuboi)lique). oftinditur? lb. Fin. 3,11. Comp. lb. Oft". 1,4, 14 ; Div. Ciec. fi, '-il ; 
 N. L). 1,3'.«, ill»: Mil. H. 21; Fam. 1,!», 47: Tac. Hist. 1, «>, 47.— Thus Livy, accordinj; to 
 the prireiple explained p. .3.31, No.C, uses the subjunctive if the principal predicate is an 
 imperlect of coiiiiiitj;ent .•letion. as : Id maxiine, tfiamsi /ta:sl^set in sciito, mvc penetrasset 
 in corpus. pavOrem /rt(u:/l><j/. Liv. 21. 8.— Csesar, who does not use etiatnsi. instead of it 
 employs si loliowed l»y etiani : Ut, si qid «tiain in pifesi ntiil se o<cid/a.^sefd, tavieu his 
 rerum'omnium inopia pereiindum viderCtur. Cies. B. G. (J, 43. Comp. lb. 7, 9. 
 
 Obs. 4. QxamrisW a compound of the relative quantitative adverb ^vam (as much)with 
 the 2iid sin^. pres. iiid. of the verb rell'' ( = as niucli as >ou wish). But in this compo- 
 sition. qiianiHs conventionally has the force of an indefinite relative adverb ( = qnarncun- 
 Q'tf. which <:oes not exist, see p. .501. No, •.)), the verb ris being in xbe indicative, since in- 
 dellnile relative clauses require this mood (p. bOH, Obs. 12). Quainvis occurs both as a rel- 
 ative adverb, and as a concessive conjunction, with the following difl'erent functions : 
 
 .4. It is used as a cijncessive quantitative advkkb to quMlify adjectives or other 
 adverbs, = •h'm'erer'' (much, little, rich etc.); 'ever so" (many, few etc.). In this 
 iiistjince, of coiirr-e, it has nothitiL: 10 do with the m<K)d of the predicate of its proi)Osi- 
 tioii, the 'concessive ' idea existing merely in rcL'ard to the adjective or adverb thus 
 qualified, as : (^itamris insi/nens, poterat perseutiscere illam esse etc. ; Jlouerer sti/jnd, 
 he miirht have perceived etc. Plant. Merc. 4, 1, 21.— Itaque ad quemvis numerum epliip- 
 piaioiiim equiiuin quannis pauci adire audent ; Hence ever so few (however few, or 
 •evt-n the smallest niimtier')of them dare to attack any number of horsemen on sad- 
 dled horses. Cies. B. (J. 4. 2.— (^uasi vero milii difticile sit, quaMVis fnidtos nominatiin 
 
 roferre. Cic. K. A. Iti.— Externus timor qnamris suspectos injensosque inter se jungebat. 
 
 iv.2,.'i9.—(N(d)ili;s) quasi pollui consuiaium credCbant si eum quatnris egreqius homo 
 
 I 
 
 adepius foret. Sail. Cat. 2-3, (J.— Tiberius qua'sTta iuterdum comitate quamrU fnanifestajn 
 derectionem ttgGbaf. Tiic. Ann. ♦'», 50.- Stultitiam accusare quamvis copidse licet. Cic. 
 Tusc.3,:W. Ccmip. Cic. Fam. 2.1«, 2; 7,3,6; Phil. 2.45, llti ; Verr.2,2,54; 2,;3,97; Tac. 
 ni>t. l,'2ti. Sometimes <y?/ff/«?i.<, in anteclassical and postdassical language, and in the 
 poets, has the nnaniui: of an adverb of intensity without any concessive idea(= ad- 
 tnoduni), as : Quannis ridiodus est, ubi uxor non adest. Plant. Men. 2, 2, 43.— The 
 poets sometimes ii^t- quandit^et in the meaning of quatnris: Quainlibei inflrrnoe raanus. 
 Ov. Am. 1,7, ♦>«;. — Instead of ihe second person singular vis. also the third person singular, 
 or the first, second, and third i.erscms plural, are thus joined with r^uam in the mean|ng of 
 quatnris, as: Expectate lacinus quam rultis improf/wn. Cic. \ err. 2.5, 5. See No. 2^. 
 B. (;;//«»«? iV, as a conce>sive adverb, frequently is used in imperative sentences with 
 predicjites in the potential subjunctive (p. 382 foil.) qualifying both predicate-adjectives 
 and verbal predicates. With the latter it has the meaning -ever so much ' (or however 
 tnuch), the adverb ouantumris being u^ed as lis synonym, in silver Latinity *. Sentences 
 of iliis kind may either be rendered, according to their original conception, as impera- 
 tive sentences, or as concesfhe clauses, with •however' as introducing conjunction, as : 
 
 * Quantumvis occnrs once in epistolary style = ' very much ' (Cic. Att, 7," 3, 12). In Cic. 
 Am. 20, 73, the reading ' quant uinvis licet excellas'' is less supported \\\m\qvamvis.'' Livy 
 uses quantutniibet = quannis: Oro vos, quantunUibet intersit inter Romanos et Achmos, 
 modo ne in lequo hostes vestri apud vos sint, ac nos eocii, jure. ' "' '^' "^" 
 
 Liv. 39, 37. 
 
694 
 
 CAUSAL CLAUSES. 
 
 ADVERSATR^ CAUSE. 
 
 695 
 
 Ouar7,rl<^ hoc hirrx «7, tamcn, quonJam expodit, fariam ; = cither: ♦ J/rr?/ ^^'f < » ^« 
 ^<^ZdiSj7aceZr, or (lisirracclul a^ it may be '), I shall yet < lo U since it is >^M''^tl'; t , 
 r>r- • I Swrr U sen.cef..rtl.is may be etc.'). Cic. Ofl". 3, Ki.-Quoc frpe est, id, «''«^ ^.« 
 tx'dre rnxmitu hone^t^m fi.ri imllo m<.(lo potest; =. either: ' ^'^"^ ^'''^/ ^^ '',« V 'I? 
 %X{iJZr m nrurh couceaUd. it cannot by any means ';<'^;;";i;'';;"rVM? OfT ^ t 
 Ts di-tr.acefiil cannot become ht)nest. howtver much it maybe connakd . <- 'C- "' ■ ';• '• 
 n- tead , la mele subjunctive, the periphrasis uith licet and "^;' 'J""^ l^'f «V^/'^Viou 
 1 n H17 <») is liedueiitlv used in connection with qmi7nrh< (al>o in '"^•.^^'■^"'^l' " 
 iuMitioned No 4) s: Quamrl^ IM in^ectTmvr^unvo^mvuxo ne phUosj.phi .iiit i: M y 
 Teever^o wcA attack the Stoics', or • lloic^nr wvch we attack the J^toics etc. Cic. 
 Tu<(^ 4 '>4 -iSter (OS quaviris emmeres m>dtos licet, nonnullos rcpcrio pernicu^os tri- 
 hn n i>s I b L. cr 8 W-Oitawvi,< licet Menti delubra con^ecnnwK tamcn etc. Jb.N.U. o, 
 ^-^miH^^^(r>^w>^'ncet .a-cY//a.s-, omnls tuos ad «mplissimos honOre. porduce e 
 lb \m -H ;3 C(.U Liu-i--«.«01.-Thus with qmimlibet, instead o^qmiinus: ^am cer e, 
 ^un^ui^' nni:Z^^^^^ contuleri, .etas juior, majora tan)en a lup.a disc.t piier etc 
 Z).! nt 1 1 18 -So ssxWxqucnarultii', qiiavx rokt etc. : (^(om volet yo**/'//;./ I-^'t ""\ J*f,J 
 
 /ve Jo nmch ihowerer much l.e JeJ). Cic. N. D. 2, ^ ••- V"«//i/^f ^^ .^''l.f £'• 4^^^ 
 r..v.u-ibnntnr • 1 et them yield as ihey may {however much they yield). It). I im. - ^- 
 ViJa;/) S '/v/^^^^^^ rtmr;//./.v tamen, etc. iho>reve7' ivvch we may love ourselves 
 
 tcTl\ {\T^^^^ 1 • - (^"^i'n vis ,um means ' hou<v.r little \ as : Senect us r^'mmm^ 
 
 mndfmv!^, tan.en aulert lam vi. iditatem, in qua e.iamnunc erat bcipio (hoicever little 
 6w7't/^/<^//ie old a;?e may be). Cic. Am. 3, 11. 
 
 C From the constant use of this c(mstruction, the adverbial expression (Jl'^mri^; '" 
 the 'cone, l.tion of the people, became tantamcunt to a ((.njinction, uud wa» Jel as 
 ;,,c// He ce it was used to introduce all kinds of clauses relernns to an »'<1' ' ' « 
 c cc--^ive ' and 'quantitative' meanimr. if their predicates were in any kind of p«»ten- 
 U- sub um-t es. ?o that we may rather say that (^iamvis i. qoverrud by a >',^'U'>nct^re 
 n that oVamvis noverr»^ a subjunctive. lU,th the ' nmefivite c.mcesMve'. and the 
 • nui ,tit-ui?e ' mcani w^^^ least in the Ciceronian age, are almost a ways contained in 
 Uuamvi "cUuis.^s ^ to apply them to a definite eoncesMve relation, and to a rtnm 
 
 ic? a peali^r'ciJcumlocutilm i. nsed : qnamvis i»- >/'^-^^^'[,V: f.^^' »""':;" Vni 
 ^ av he be e\er so happy, as he really is - 7fiO,st happy as he t-^: Cic.K. A.H. ^^•-|''» 
 ^//ItLI's- 7-i/Ar*/L^6^ KUANT, mihi tamen lisum non moverunt; Jhdiodotfs os 
 
 ffi r£^ it dd not make me lauizh. 'lb. i\.m.l,:i-l.-Qnamvi< prmUus ad coptandum 
 Ji s c?^^ Ks. amen nu.nquam ea res tibi tam belle in "«entem venire poiu. lb. An 2, 
 ^r-y-llmmrl-^ i-imr fuerit acQtus, ux fuit. tamen etc. lb. Ac. Ir. 2. 22,<.'.K-So 1. 
 Vhrr"^ W.;s lh~4 iV- on- 8,33.117; Att.8.9.3; Tusc. 1, 18,41, and often For onh- 
 i^ 5,mmvi;-dmi^.i ioi^are ; Cic. Tus.. 2, 25^ «1 : V-r 2^ 1, 9 ; Kep^ ^, 37 ; Ofl. 2, ., 
 24- Or 1 5:3 2.30; lb. 54, 2:31; Auct. Her. 4, 4ti ; ben. Cons. Pol. 30 ; lb. Ep.9. 
 
 n Often the intensive force of quamri^ refers neither to the predicate nor to an 
 ndiectver adverb bu to a substanfive adjunct <.f the predicate. In this connecti.| 
 oiamVi^^^ X^^Wornqmnn (althoujrh). but its intensive fo've w I 
 
 S?ratdo«erex minition.as: (jlnnvis i:mm Themistndes ^w'''; lamhf'^r, e\ nt i.o- 
 2n ejus qmim ioinnis illustrius, non minus pneciarum hoc quam ilh.d J,''<, l^-f'-d""",^*-, ^ 
 rioveverii'l.tfnllvThemist«.cles maybe praised, and -however more >Jl"^t"*;»^„ '"'^ 
 
 ?i^^;stJe nVinfn- o l/.amrl^- is so weak that it approaches the '"^;i'"'.';^;'f / ^'Z;. ; 
 Iv Ue the redfcate itill retains a potential force, as : Etsi munus rtaptHP-, 7"'" 
 ln\^oste?Jr^^^^^^^^^^ q"ide,n solet nisi concitStus. tamen e-o etc. ; Althoui:. not 
 
 c-vcM. the pe^^^ ivont, to il.sist on a public soectacle :ho»i^rrvnu;h: so,nebod> may 
 
 have held it mit to them, = ^ even if somefjody has held it out\ Cic. tam. 9,8. 1. 
 
 Ors 5 The use of an indicative in Ouamvis-clauses is extremely rare I; "<'7'[';; 
 l^onci.in ivy where v'/a//*rM retains tlie meanimr 'however much \ but without the 
 J-eeSo-v i( lea;." ndennit.-n(-ss: Non tibi. qmimvi-^ infesto a..im<) et miiiSci l^^lf'l'^ras 
 
 c«"p« dniiliuidiiim dcSucU Ck. Kab. Post. 9, 4.-3) Unce in Nepos with the mean- 
 
 \r\z ^ althovgh\ where it is doubtful whether ^qvamvis^ was used by Nepos himself, or 
 cnmes from his puhtclassical epitomist* : Erat inter eos dignitate regis, quavivis carebat 
 nomine. Nep. Milt. 2. — i) The prose-writers of the silver age frequemly u^e quatpvis in 
 the meaning of q>iamquam,'AUii ^ometime8, in this meaning, construe it with the Indica- 
 tiv<!, as: Q>/amcis ab o/mnbuM rfc^-s^erunt. Sen. Br. \^it. 11. — Q>iainvis major XXV ari ids 
 earn i/iteT'j>o.-<'/it. Ulp. Dig. 2, 15,3. !3iif Seneca, Taeitns, Quititilian etc.. generally use the 
 siibjumtive after q>/amvis, and always, when quamvis means ' however much '. Celsus, 
 however, always uses the indicative after Quamcis. That this was not ' the reqular con. 
 sfrurtion'' in later Latinity, as most grammarians assert, but was always considered as 
 faulty, also appears from tlie ta<t that the ancient grammarians (Diom. p. 387 ; Charis. 
 p. 202) expressly require the subjunctive after quamri^. and even declare quamvis with 
 the indicative a solecism, even when used by the poets (Charis. 4, p. 24»t). — 5) The poets use 
 quamvis, when the metruiu forbids a subjunctive, with an indicative, both in its projier 
 meaning, and in the meaning of etiamsi and quarnquatn. Comp. Ilor. Sat. 1, 3, 29; lb. 
 Carm. 1, 28, 11 ; Prop. 1, 18, 13 ; 2, 4, 29 ; Virg. Mn. 5, 542. 
 
 Obs. fi. The writers of the silver age construe qvainvis with ablative absolutes, and 
 participles, often with the meaning' of quaniqiiam, as : Quarnvin flagrante adhuc PersS- 
 ruin bt-llo. Ta«'. Ann. 2, .')<».— (^lue fato maiieiit, quamvis significata ( — quamvis sint sig- 
 niticilta), non vitantur. lb. Ilist. 1, 18. Comp. lb. 2, 30 ; Suet. Aug. 72 ; Ctes. 48. See for 
 this construction Obs. 11. 
 
 Or>». 7. The conjunction licet (meaning both 'even tf\ and 'although'') is nothing but 
 the impersonal veib /to/, as coiistrui-d with an asyndetic subjret Ttiat-chiuse, with irs 
 predicate in the subjunctive (p. (H7, 9). As used inthe classical jieriod, and in the better 
 l)ro8e-writer8 of the silver age. Licet-clauses may almost always be understood in this 
 way. The const rnctiinis with licet in the present tense, as an ordinary impersonal verb, 
 contain a 'concessive' element dicet = conctditur), but without adversative force, being 
 most generally convertible into Si-clauses, as : Ilic pitgn^< licet, non repugndbo (Here you 
 may tight; I shall not oppose you, = if you fiu'ht. I shall not etc.). Cic. Ac. Pr. 2, 18,37. 
 Comp. Tac. Or. 9. Hut often it adds an adversative element, and in this instance the 
 sentence is convertible into a clause with etiamsi or qvamqvani ; as: Sed omnia licet 
 cojicuri'aut : Idus Martiaj consolantur ( = etianv^i omnia concutTont). Cic. Att. 14, 4. — 
 Fremant omnes /^t•^/// ( = etiamsi omnes fremant). dicam quod .-entio. lb. Or. 1. 44. — Si 
 cui sua non videntur atnplissima, licet totlus nuindi dominus ^it. tamm miser est ( = 
 etiamsi sit). Sen. Ei). 9. Comp. Cic. Par. 1, 1 ; K. A. 11, 31 ; Ac. Pr. 2, :«, 102 ; Sen. Cons, 
 llelv. 10 ; lb. 11 ; lb. Cons. Pol. .35 ; Cons. Marc. \2.— Licet tibi, ut scnbis ngnificaHjyi ut 
 ad me venires, tamen intelligo etc. ( =:Quainquam tibi significllvi). Cic. Att. :3, 12. Comp. 
 li). Fam. 13, 27, 1 ; Quint. 1, 22 ; Pliii. Ep. 2, IH, 3.— Sometimes licet, in these meanings, is 
 placed in the luture-preseiit (licttAt), but never in a preterite tense, or in any subjunc- 
 tive, as : Licebit ( = etiamsi) eiim solus anus, me :emiilum non habCbis. Cic. Att. ti, 3. 7. 
 —Licet cannot be used in the meaning ' although ' (or * even if) il the predicate of the 
 principal sentence is a m\'f(-7-ife. since it would in this instance require a tense of pre- 
 ttfiite consecution, which would be incomtwtibio with the non-preterite form of licet. 
 Nevertheless later writi'rs of the silver age sometimes (but very rarely) use licet with 
 an i;//;>f;ytr/ subjunctive, making it dependent on a preterite predicate, as: Nam licet 
 tyrannicis vitiis semper abundar«-t, tamen simulatio hiec vitiOrum. non natfira erat. 
 Just. 21, 3.— Z,Jr^/', in the jurists, and the later writers (.Appulejus, Ammianus, Macro- 
 b^iis etc.), also in the poets, sometimes occurs with an i/idirative. But this was c<m- 
 sidered a faulty construction, ihe am:ient grammarians (Diom. p. 387) expressly as^igu- 
 ing the subjunctive to licet. 
 
 Obs. 8. Ut (even if) properly menus 'granted that' (snpply 'fariam'' or ' ponam vt\ 
 I will grant for argumcni's sake that etc.; or the clause may be taken as a kind of final 
 clau>e ; see p. 636, Obs. 4). I'l-clauses of this kind represent the truth ot the conces- 
 sive statement as 'not acknowledged' but as fli<.<//;//^rf for the time being: Sed r/HiaiC 
 voncedautur, reliqua qui tandem intelligi possunt? Cic. N. D. 3.16.— i7 tibi concectam 
 lioc indi^num esse, tii mihi coneCdas necesse est, mnltoesse indiirnius diseedi a leiribus. 
 lb. Clu. 53, 141). — Ut cniui ingeniOsi et tardi ita nascantur, non seqiiitur tamen ut etc. lb. 
 Fat. .'). U. Comp. the Ex. quoted p. o:30 toll., Obs. 4. 1.— Sometimes ut is a mere equiva- 
 lent oi etiamsi, &^: Ainbulatiuncu'a, wi tantum faciamus qnnwwww in Tusculano feci- 
 mus, piope dimidio minOris coustabit ist(» loco. Cic. Att. 13, 39. 2.— Ut-clauses of this 
 ., kind are rarely made dependent on preterite predicates, mostly il' suboblique. or virtu- 
 ally so, implying a ' conression ' of the ,suljje<:t ; as : Ae jam, ut omnia contra opinionem 
 arcid'Vent, tamen se plurinfum navibus nosse perspvitb((nt. Ca's. B. G. 3. 9. But i-ome- 
 limes Ut-clauses of this kind are dependent on preterites, even if not suboblique, as: 
 
 * The crrammarians, in this passage, and In Cic. Rah. 2, find fault with Vne indicative. 
 They should have found fault rather with the meaning in which quamvis is used. 
 
696 
 
 CAUSAL CLAUSES. 
 
 ADVERSATIVE CAUSE. 
 
 697 
 
 m Pnim nomincm alinm ni^i T. Patinam roqa.<<sff, pcire jy)hiif illo ipso die a MilOne 
 
 ^ToT^n7^ZZsi'n\l)^^ .1 ..ulcl have a.Ur.l n.>l>oay b..tT. I'ati.m.he cuk h^^ known 
 
 ir (M( Mi 17 46 -If concessive Uf-(lauses are NKOATivK, m \^ "'^^<M''"»t "' ^''"^ 
 
 not the «rreati j^r evil, it certainly is an evil). lb. 1 use. 2, 5. , ,, * 
 
 Or.. M 0//a//-a?/«m if merelv it^ etymology \^ considered, i^* in the Pame relation to 
 ./s? a- Q//.m a-H- n ;/iar^>r -IncU-ed in nio.t ot the pa^sa^M-. wherr U oecnrs in ante- 
 f-il'^irftTTi nitv it may he taken as an .qnivalent of r///«wm, for instance. Plant. 
 Merc 2 2^H ) 4 4 ; I ui n classical lani.ace. and in th.- silver and later Latimty 
 ft i'nLo-t never nselvvith reference to the i«/fwi^y «f the pre.l.cate, althou'-h it» 
 
 de vi H?m U. W'.^m sh<>ul<l .eem to imply this ^^;^Y-T'^T7T ^'^"^^^^ 
 tl.f. K„.'r.-h '}.ltliOU-h' referrinir to actions real and definite which, as in an «PPnr 'it 
 c ntlict v^ h e i cipal pre.Ticate. are cnced.d by the speaker. It is J'^^'J^'J ' '^^ 
 Ssar never es' qmmnL, hut always ,and very Ireqnently) *^!"P'">-^j;;\ Sffem.ce 
 He idea ot- -althou-h'. ricen. uses both tisi and q>tamquam without «^' V. ' Ji"^^ .^n' 
 exce t thai niZ'inam is far more frequently used than . /4 toexpress the 'j;'i''^,f///;^"\\;' 'i 
 mr ' ' w ver ' /()Bs 12) It has been nmarked thai Cicero likes to bei;in his letters w iili 
 eNi , mw Mmm7'm ;0, w^ sh.>uld seem strange, considerinuMhe on.L'inal nic^n s 
 of ^/ There arVr.rithan\itKMcem 
 
 use of quamquam prevails over that of ettn. T he writers of »»'<-' f»^*^J«^e"^f,f|\*'"^.'\ 
 with non-historic, and quarruiua,n with historic predicates ^;^"^*j^^ ^^,7/' , . ,^. ,^ 
 <,nce in the Dialo-us). and Suetonius (excep in I ib. <'>^^^»'«;\^\"?*^^;_'^;,'X lea 
 r...nn,UM Ho i.of n«p ft-<i at all as a hubordinatini: conjunction, but expnss ^^^*^^^f- 
 
 'i ' oul-*- h W"-^?""'" - «'""""•" """■'•";■•• '.",';-\'"";;'r'ri'Th"'e wh..": " """^'" 
 
 iiaHnq n>tiiinicli<>n, in which -.^i.s.' mmwimim jl"; s ii'.'t "'"'J ^ ,V,*;?,am rlaii'^e occur- 
 
 ri,!?:'!;ir;:i i^ ;^^s^;:^;^;t.:v;^d iti:^;;?!':h;i';n^i;^r;r j:^^^ 
 
 [e ce as (jZ q>mm non venit ad Hnem tain «iidax ii.ceptu.in, »''3" ^aud oinnl.u 
 vXum fuit.'^Liv.lO,:«.-r^Mamy//«m jam niotus imhec.llitAti* ''^''^'^7^'; ^' ' .,^5 ^f f.^' 
 n^ iir V 2 U^ -( hmniQ'f am vrovv duMcCitnx lejrir.nuin numeruse/a/ \ alenti, studia 
 
 menm imIn^^^aS^m^ndi.\m>l^ 
 pruMu) fessi exwt, tamen Metello instructi obviani procCdui.t. ^\'l- '„ 'f .^iLim' i quo- 
 Limodum probAtA n.tio, q.uunq.amnimut qm.m acumjne >!'f •^;'i"\, l^n S r2bo, 
 dam lepOre dicendi, proxime a Lacyde solo retenta est. C ic Ac. I r. 2. h, 1»k ."Nam - ira u, 
 
 t!am<mm fuit acri Injjenio, tamen ah ea disciplin>l Vi^V ''^.n.'l!;;.'!' rm- -at'' i^atviuaa 
 1 u '\i \^»*Hntem non oossumus ouin alu a nobis dissentiant rei u-art, 7'/a7« /mh'^* 
 ,';!i\"S-^Udem Jst, quiVemm inveuire sine uUu content.Oue volumus. lb. 
 
 "^OBs. iVsometimes the pub-ttnctive is used in Qnamquam-claiiseP ^^^:^^^'^:^^^^^^ 
 
 the <Uflerent periods of the lanL'ua<:e must be 'l^t'"^''"^»^; *„ Vnn u- hTcic Div 1 
 
 lan"ti:i<'e7^/a/<r/>/amalwavs stands Nvith the indicativk Comp ^Vk V^"!, %'^; , _«; 
 
 2(V- »lmt Merc 2 2 It) • H). 4. 4, tiO ; lb. Pers. 3. 1, S. Ter. Ad. 2, 1,5; Ib. Ileaut 1. 1, 1.-^) 
 
 cen a^ic^ from t leVotential Subjunctive in coordinating' ^^'«"^^""'"7, ""^t. u'e 
 
 Obs.12) a d aside from the ^nbobliqne subjunctives, and thos« pa^sa^:es in N^h^^^^^^^ 
 
 rcSdin.' is donbtful t, uses the subjiUKtive n\Xi^imi7nqnam <.nly in threejiuth. ntuatcd 
 
 ~* TheTtJitemeuts of ttl^rammarianslibout the use of the subjunctive in Quamquam- 
 
 cliuiesareva?m" M savs: ^S.mietimes -/a/fr »i^n/^r^ " use the subiuncve -- 
 
 Km.iFeHnvt-iMie writers of the silver a-e qeturaUy use quamquam \sn\v the sub- 
 
 "^^^^ ihe d^ri!^!; wriu-rs do this only when tl- concession n.ers^ mi ^ser- 
 
 ti.in nf "oihern"' [This statement is false in every piirtKiilar.] — Mkiuino sajs. iu 
 
 euoets and later pros -writers quamquam and quamvl< xxx^ used )v.thout any d.lle - 
 
 pne.^with both mood-' -Rkisk; says: ' Quamqmm and etn are construed with the iti- 
 
 Swe '^"ubjlnlSrve: according ul. the'^tateiiient is repr-ont^as^^^ - ^V^ 
 
 hip' [vvlijch w'iih resuect lo (/^/(<wo//am, is certainly wronj; in revrarcl to inc < la. sic^u 
 
 «l^ige a d is w 4.^;,?repml ..Miie usa.e of the silver »''^'"'>:»!'^- 'V'lll^rTrit « 
 
 u^.i^c, »11« uc V r^ riiioi 7i'MPT ntran"'elv savs: In later wrinr» 
 
 t'verv Dassa<'o which will not lit ins ruiej.— ai mi i pimn-nj r«j ,_„» . „__,>. i „nA 
 
 quZqZmlud quamV^ have exchar>ged .their ^^^'^^^^:^\l^;^^^ 
 quamquam is construed with the subjunctive, quamrls^^^\\^ the '"^^"/'J.f,, 1 ;'» V^^ \.JX 
 Kl hn^c<)ntradictiontothefacis,andtot»ie rul.s of the ancient ^™^^""' «^^ 
 aSPof the PuBKic Sen. Ciu. (alwavs inclined to enrich the lauLMia-e) has "'V'-nte.i a 
 n?w concessive conjunction, namely'i/^//^ and says : ' A c<mcessive clause wthv««^A- 
 qZm a^id utut will be indicative, but if suboblique or «no».ic [tliis f[^™^|^"' " "'i^J 
 the expression > -nomic ' very fr.quently, without ^^^V'-f^y ">f,2 '^,"^';'i » " fbiunc iVV" 
 subjunctive. By writers of ihe silver H^n- /y//«//|y^/«m is freely used with ^1»« «' ^J'^'^f'.^ J„; 
 + In the followin-' passatres : Cic.Ofl. l,2,b ; lb. 1, 5, 15 ; lb. l,«t,.JO , /?• ^' j/',^^ ' \;- 
 Fiii. a! is'is; 0^^51172; I'lanc 3, S, the readuigs are doubtlul, the subjiuiclives re^t. 
 
 paBsape?: Nee em m licet eis qui landem cnm dolOre petendam ePse dicnnt ne<rare eos 
 es^c b.atos qui eain adepti sunt. Quamquam enim nnt ( = Foreign if ih^y should be) 
 in quibnsdam malis, tamen hoc nomen beSti lon-e et late patet Cic Ti sc^5 % rin 
 this passage, quainquam is evidently u.«ed with the force of «/iam^j't he^ subjunctive 
 beini; used accordinj^to the rules of Etiamsi-clauses, Obs. 3.]-Atque hSc, J /SiV! 
 prresente L. Lucullo (o^w;-. tamen.. .publics litteris tegtatasunt omnia lb mT 9 20 
 
 sT„Vm"«ifrMft"'V''"} •" T'""'^'^ ''^'^ '''''""'' ^^^"^' ^«'■^"^ «'^^*^ sapienti ratiOnem amici ac 
 
 I Fin • 9 ' r/i '' ciilque cariorem suam. tamen hi quoque posteriOres fatentur etc. 
 
 II). !< in. ,3.21. [It IS evidently iranossihle to reduce the use of the subjunctive in the 
 
 nnV ;r ^' v'"-"' ^? ''r7 «nle.l-S) In Nepos, quamquam is once construed wiih a sulJ 
 
 jinctue. >ecpraiterIho^^w//<(7wamnonmilli8leve visum iri»M<e//i. Nep.Att 13 where 
 
 the s,,l>junctive seems to have the force of a subjunctive of guarded statement pS 
 
 -4) In Lyy the subjunctive alter quamquam occurs in two passages without assi-nabie 
 
 reason: Qiiinciius, quamquam vrnverttur his vocibus, manu tamen abnuit, qul?quaru 
 
 in se opisesse. Liy. :3G. 31.-Ceternm quamquam tales' viri mitUrentur, quorum de^oS^ 
 
 Mlio ^perarl posset imperatOres nihil indijnie decreturos esse, tamen in senatu a-itaia 
 
 est ^umma con.iiioiu.u. Ib 4.5, 18.-5) In the writers of the silver a-e, especiallV the his* 
 
 Vvhfi" V if .^«"^V-n^*"*" ?^ quamquam with the subjunctive became far more frequent. 
 
 Uhile Aellejus still construes quamquam with the indicative onlv, Tacitus uses the 
 
 indicative about as often as the subjunctive (without any assi<;nablu difference) nuam- 
 
 quam occurrin:; about 15 times with the subjunctive. Suetonius, howeve?, nevefus^s 
 
 the indicative alter quamquam, construins? it either according to Obs. 11, without a 
 
 finite verb, or with the subjunctive (Comp. Tac. Hist. 3, 59 ; lb Ann 2 2 • " on . o -u • 
 
 2.40; 4 74; f;,51; Suet.C;es.3; lb.54; Tib^.J ; ^Yn^ 22? Sliiblllf Hence' ^ 
 
 inner distinction between the use of the indicative and subjunctive in Quamquam- 
 
 clHuses On-Mially the indicative was the only mood used. and. in the classical period. 
 
 e uiH Ire^ue'nt*''*'' ^ subjunctive, till in the silver age both moods became 
 
 Obs. 11. In the writers of the silver a-e (but not in classical language) Quamquam- 
 claiises very fre^iien ly have the lorm of pakticipial clauses, being ireaTed like an 
 
 ?!•' h!fi;^,.KV'"l?''.'i'''"l''^'^-i^'-*- ^"^^ ^^"^''^^ '^'''^ ^^"'y^'''' introduced hy quaviqu am. 
 II the subject of the clause does not occur m the principal sentence, or may be elimi- 
 
 .£1 .?' r" ^ .^ ^'^"""'' '^y '"^'''"'' ^^ ^ passive construction, the Quamqiiam-clause 
 takes the form ol ABi.ATivKa absolutk, as : At Germanicu>., quamquam contralto exer- 
 cifu, pra'mittu htteras ad Ca'clnam ( = quamquam exenifum amtrax.rat). 'i'ac A 1 48 
 -I osteriores quoque existimo, quamquam jam, ducrttis profes,<w„ibu^, nihilo minua 
 in^tituisse qmedam genera instituiionum adeloquentiam comparandam. Suet. Gram 5 — 
 Jiut If the subject of the clause is also contained in the principal sentence, it is expressed 
 only in the principal sent.-nce, the participial predicate of the clause a<'recin^ with it 
 as: .\c Aquitania quidein. quamquam a Julio Cordo in verba OthOuis obsfricta diii 
 .v!f',!r -^"^ 9'!a>>\Q''am obsfricta em/). Tac. Hist. h-Hi—Aqrippwam. quamquam' bene 
 louienienfem. dimiiterc coactus est ( := quamquam ea l>ene conveniebat). Suet. Tib 7- 
 Ji the predicate of the clause consi^ts of the copula with a completing predicate the 
 topula IS omitted, as m ordinary participial construction, as : Moris tum erat {nnnnnejn) 
 qmimvuunp7a:senftm, scnptisadlie ( :- quamquam preE-^ens erat, or €.«eet). Tac Aim 4 
 .jy.-^liiat I no) pnecipiuim robiir, quamquam ntque ptvi-era stataia, et venfre paulio mo- 
 ^.r^; 0. e erat). f net. Tu. 3 V:'"?-^^"- ^<'0: 1,83; 2,41; 3. 15 ; 3. 18^; 3, 82^ 3, 
 Th V^'i '1 ^ if -^ ''• '^'Vl- ^- •^'.' ^' ''•' ' 1, (i5 ; 2. 57 ; 2, 75 ; 3, 30 etc. ; Suet. Tib. 3 ; Ib. 11 • 
 
 i. ;;',/*;/ '• ^'''T ^"^ ' H'""!- ^' -^' ?'^- ^"^ often.-This participial form mu/t l,e con-' 
 . Itrcd a.s tlie /equiar wnsfrurhon of Quamquam-clauses in the writers of the silver 
 
 n he Ou^uu'V.ll r""'^"' ''''Vw^ 'I' ^''*' P'oPonion of five to one, as compared with the 
 1 ite Quamquam-c laiises. Of the same nature is the participial construction with 
 7 r///m (mentu)ne<l Obs. G). which, however, is far l.-ss frequent than the same con 
 striictionjvvith^y^/ft/;> y7^m.-We mu st not confound with this_W)ns^uc2ion the: oml..v". 
 
 \^^iZu'!^!^:i :Tlu'l!'^- r'^'iV'' «'>y IV' ^''" pa-ssagesVlu.re the manuscril>Fauthority 
 'i,'. r ..c ' •" '"!'''•'• r^""^' ^^ ^''^''"*-' P^-^'^ages can be considered as a proof that 
 
 n lb n" 1 .''i'" ^^'!-''''''^' after 7'/^//;^^'/«m. In other j.assaires produced by the <rram. 
 niaiian-, the subjunctives are either suboblique (as Ac. Po. 1 S. and Or 3 7 '->7) or «nb 
 J.incfives l)y attraction (as Leg. :i. 8, IS, and Fan,. .3, 10 i 'ln?ie pa^s.-e ^a j Ju- 3 
 theT'^nr '''^r'" 'P'V^.'^-'^ t''^' indicative would be'faultv. since Ihe^ecomlpe son ha' 
 e nieu.Mng of an indehnite i,erson (p. 413. Obs. 4). Verv strangely KiiunkA refers to 
 e^m, ihI'"'^' .P''^'!^'^/ "« "» t'xample for the use of the s'ubjunctiv^ : Quie, quamquam 
 y^iT^ltl? ^'{? ^'^''^«1« audiam, tamen lil,entissime ex tiiis litieris?ognoscam. He 
 «iV/7;- ' !^;i!;., ^r""^'?',"^ «'/^^«/m by ' Quamquam fibi concMo quum dicU im lutx 
 kin, /r,^ ';""-' ^''^ Hfldn-ssed i)erson never said, nor could liave said anythin<' of the 
 iviud. ihe fact IS, that audiam is no subjunctive at all, but a future 
 
G98 
 
 CAUSAL CLAUSES. 
 
 ADVERSATIVE CAUSE. 
 
 699 
 
 of the copula in Ouamqnam-clausc.. if tho clause ha. it. «^"J"^^;:!^,;.'" [Jjf Y7;"'{'7;; 
 ns- 0.m//V/'/a/n Tiberio nulla retn>i in Amiitcui in (i.e eral). ac. Ann. 1, »'J„ ^ X 
 mrHv S 7 /" V, c.nneots two imiuamks /ri/Ai// a ^^cntence. a« : Camilhi>» cum rn)uH - 
 
 H i:i -MmmM.idi's c Xenophancs, minus iMmis .^UAMiiUAM t'^/>ii^^s *e(/ famen Ults re/6i 
 //w.<. inciopant eOnun ano^jantiam. Cic. Ac. 2, 23. . . , • 
 
 Or. !•> IVeuliar i. tlie u?e of qmwquaw for rnmoDiCAi. coOudination which is 
 r.u<^'. !>• fr -q 'nf in Cicoro and s'ncca where it, perhaps ocmr. of.ener than aU 
 the ot er wrhVrs taken toirether. In ^^uch sentences, r/uam<^uaw which ^-enerally opens 
 Im.viKTiod l.aM K, 'c()iH^^^ '"f'-^-'y '»»^ 'adverKi.ve' force <.l its 
 
 ^y t amecedent /a;..n, hein, rendered Vv '''"--««; ^/ 'l"J.\'^''y;-,/<':^:r'"^^^ 
 if thus u^ed iias? the nature of a ' coord matinir relative' (see p 520, /^. 9). ''»).'"g "*; 
 pan e re iti n o /a '.«, a. a conrdinatin- relative to a coordin,.tin^,' ^l^'-'V'''^»/'! Wn^n e 
 n iVVi n" 2 4 and p 520), or as quu,n \n im apf>^r<ifi re qnnm-cUxns,- (p hlD foil.) to the 
 
 U.mons ?rtive a<h"'^^^^^^^^^^^ proposition., h.tro.luced by the coOrdinatin- conjunc. 
 
 th tu r ml ler • d verb ') <r'(nnquu]n a?e ^n-nerally used to restrict a previous «^ta ement 
 
 ■oi tS^ mad,' bv the .p.-aker in hi. own name. Fre<,uently a conner-t in- Ink 
 
 Ji^^iis be su t ie 1 as : N-.m ut sint ilia vendibilin.a, luec uberir.ra certe sunt. Qmm'iumn 
 
 5 muden i Cb^^^^^ e W existiiiKlre qui K-erint. Cic. Fin. 1. 4, 12 ( = However those may 
 ■<• e i X^^^^^ 'However I will not decide this ; may those do it who ec.). 
 
 Ins -ul oV / mm/' r// , a proposition with famfu mi-ht have been used ^I/oc- tamen /itr- 
 
 6 / il^ .Vil/fflr etc ' or • oLl tamen licGbit ' accordinu' to the relailve form metilloned 
 p S Nf.. f-Vh^^^^ i"i-"'"*i <-»"^""^ essc.ne omnes potm. me arb. rentur 
 caus\e qu ni vol relidOni vestra^ defuisse. Quavujvam *'K" (.= «'l-'V/""^';" "*",', :^'^ 
 T)er< ladeo non vos propter juris (h.biam rafion-m moram anquisi.se. lb. Ciec 2 0. [He e 
 t e^Sc^iceprececinj^^^ i'»'^ the fore- oUx (^uam<tvam-rau.e while 9/ /|«- 
 oi«f»wirt he force o{ tamen, = 'althou-h the case is dif^ieult. ./i/Z I believe etc. ]- 
 1^ Z.Xm quid S/te uvltem. a «luo jam scio esse pr.e,nis.u<(,,ii tihi ad Forum Aure- 
 y'''*''' '",'/. '••"tnr V ih Cat 1 M *'3( = However I am wroiiL' in inviting you, since 
 ^""! ''Sn if\c VrVr? 5:^ A^^^ nropositions of this kind the iX>ten. 
 
 Ouare 'BFLi^K' et 'festivb' niniium sa'pe dicfttur. nolo. Q.,am>i>,am lila ipsa exclama- 
 li 'NorPi^TFsT MELtUs' .it Telim crebra. Cic. Or. 3, 2r,. 101 irellm, as sul>jnuetive of 
 mo.kStreitron).-At nonnunastribuspunctis pa-ne totid.m tulerunt. (^uippe q.iutu 
 a, a t pr > e s perioribus c<.mitii.. declaraiKiiie veni.-ent. Qnamqu>>muv Hi qu den 
 iu"p • r>.eni cuiliani. /mhuerif, = But evn-n wnhout. this f'^^l «^^-/f^J»'"!' J''^^^' ^n 
 no L'-ound for suspicion (a vinnally hypothetical subjunctive). lb. Plane. 2^. ■'>^-^ » ^"^ 
 Jccn -set tempns n quo per-picere posses quanti IJiuium faceniu ; qnamqmvn 11 con- 
 sS lineqi'o idiana perspexisses, sicut perspicie«; = fumever, hnx sti hyou would ha^e 
 Been this from our daily intercmrse (virtually hypothetical), lb. tarn. 3, 10.2. 
 
 Ob. 13. Etn (.ometime. tametsi), in classical lan^uaL-e, 1'.«^!'^';.»»*"«"'"" «']^,.f""' 
 struct on oi qnamnmm.h^uv^ leirularly cmstrued with Xh^ twhcat^r. a. A^«t c^u sa 
 hestemo .ermnne lafKfarlafa est, inihi tamen v„lCiur esse v«7\7'"\' ;, ,^;^;^;;- ' '^(^' t* .Va 
 —Illi eiH ab ho«te ea 'liohantxr, n<m tamen neijlijrenda existimJlbant. C a^.. B. <^'-.^ -«• 
 -Tametn ab duce et a fortQiiJl (iesTehanfur. tamen omn.-m spem salflti. in virttlte 
 m.n5 Ivi. t lb 5 : «.-Sometimes et.i is used instead of efiam.L as : Hoc omnium judic.o 
 It telii^i potest qi.i permulta oh eam caii.:.m unam faciunt quia rectum est, .7..? •'V'-n 
 Ih m cmsecu anm emohimentnm rh/ent. Cic. Fin. 2. 14.-Numqnam edepol f nu' et 
 taneP^ (e"m if. capital fecerit (Cut. perf.). Plant. Men. 1,1,(5. If ef^t 1. ""?'/'"'.»'« 
 m eai ill"- of ^ i^/m.^^/, it MiaV take the saf,}"nrfive for the same reasons as etmm.^i Obs 3) 
 r.- Sed^tancU-in, famfAsi p.Khi-rosis pedil)us .s.sy/ Entymus uren j^ he were 'Jt^-KJ'"; 
 JtMiii-se a po potuit. Flint. Merc. 3. 4.8.-QMamquam, efsi prioie foedere •^^«'•f/J'^' s- 
 ca ,um erat SaLMintTni.; (= However, even if the former treaty •;;:^^«f//^/?;;'^'''^l^/^'; 
 ralid ihe inten-.t of the Sa<riintian. wa< sulhciently provided h)r). Liv 21, !!>.- bed me 
 vera pro ^^^^^^ h.qui. e^d meiim in^'enium non monPref necessitas coirit ( = et c.n.en>t 
 etiaiK non monC're. ). H). 3, r.8 -^^i nihil aliud Snlla' nisi cmsuliltum abstuhssett.-, 
 Sereov.T, lento, esse oportebat. Cic. Sull. .32. W. - Fabnla etiam nonnumqiiara, 
 
 ^M^I^ iucredibilis, tamen ho,'nim-s commovet. ^^,^'^;^;^'^''^rV^^'!l %^,Z 
 etiaftisi) is thus used with a lo/ieal tense (see p. 428. Obs. 3) : Vln efn ( - f'^"^""^' 
 S/vm aiiiuid numero .wV. ma-na rerfe avh-^ /ait '=cerfum f.^t mairimm ca'den 
 fn&) Liv 3 8, 1(..- Aside from these instances, and from those of subol.liqmty and 
 a n.c ion. etH is always construed with an imlicative. nor is ei.^,. like ^vr/mr/;/,/,;,, en, - 
 
 8trS with a subjunctive in silver Latinity. V^^^Z'"'^ r '"'''-^r '''-''' Vn'\^\^Z^^^^^^ 
 out bv erammarians a. exceptions to this rule. But they either are quoted witli false 
 i^ad n.^las t i it. F. ,n. »i, 4, 1. where Heisi<; reads ^efA vi>jeatMr\ which is a bad 
 
 co^ljtclure, instead of vidlmur, or vidmr, exhibited by the codices), or are misintcr- 
 
 ^^u.^^'n^''^ ^^^'•^ ^^^ subjunctive expentum sit is evidently Bubobliqne, 
 'i^see OBr"»;::!' mtl1>;"reLt^'aV^^ m^ quamquam, and qvam- 
 
 f 
 ra 
 
 erci.ussalva. h.cuin c , ein ."/ta^^ircapi po."^^ a^nmento, tamen, s.imma ex- 
 
 rictus, fjlorijl tamen omnia vicit. Just. 12^ hia.-Arjis, eln a mul.iiudiue 
 
 v!^^fuJS;Kf!ioSvi^S^^^ "*=^'l in three different relation. ; 1) For 
 
 ( = This, however, canm t ocxn r Cic n? V"^- ^Vi ^'^'^* '"^ accidere non potest 
 lacite dat iixsa lex iotSeni (Siidendi lb qnodammodo 
 
 ^;;:^^,^:,;^;; r^^iS SS^^ 
 
 had a t t-illv diff'u.nr i/« nr^ v^^^^^^ construction of qnamvis in the classical period 
 
 / . iT'^ M '" '"""■*' ^'•"'•'•''n' "^ f'-^i "hen it coordinates adj.-ctives^ Here \h"xv?^adlc 
 Th^MvV'lIn*''^ ^T^ r^^^r" '" ^*^^'' o^''^-- ^«-'' the two propositions of a cXcsive Period 
 
 of' na veVllXTiC^i^^^^ 
 
 sei V. \\v m iv^-^^^^^ a. the coordinating coNJi NOTION ^ed, only in a contrary 
 
 s t 1 (. u« niaj analyze these coordinate phrases n the usual wav bv renpaiin.r tho 
 
 ?e oh'!^dl ^'i^;"^/'''" ^^'-^ "''"'' ^"«'•di-ate member. Thus thc^m ' ai^itiliv & n-av be 
 fnm fa^tunfest. ^" '''''''''"" ^'^^^^^^'<^omuUnm factum e.t, at certe^ri.ie eeiSilVconstil 
 
700 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF DOUBTFL-X REALITY. 701 
 
 Qunm-clanpe (i^ee p. 650) : 2) in the form of a Cf)ncessive Qni-clanse (see p. 507, Obs. 4) ; 
 3) ill the form of h si-clause, either witii or witiiont tajnt^ii in ihe npodosis, as : Decern 
 vocassct A-i ad CdMiam siimiiios viros. nimium ol)s<»i)jIvif (he would iiav»- had too many 
 di^hes, eren if he had invited ten of the nio^t prominent rnfio. riant. Merc. 4,"i. 3.— Hie 
 Tio>-t«-ronltor. n minus erit doctns ( — etiam-si minus eiii doctiis). attamen ipsa ex<-reila- 
 tiOne istos quidem verbertTldf. neqne sc ab eis coniemni sinet. Cie. Or. 3, 21, 7U.— Comp. 
 lb. Mur.4,8: lb. Sen. 11,88; lb. Rep. 1, -27. Sail. Ju«?. So, 48; Ter. Eun. 1, 1.— 4) By abla- 
 TivKs ABsoLi'TK or ordinary participles without any conjunction, irenerally witli (ametx 
 or iiihll<miinu!i\n the principal sentence, as: Snllam. hmUVri omnibus rel)ii.s tribunicij 
 jwtfsfate ( = qnainqiiuin nudasset potertiatem) tainfit intercessionem liberam reliquisse. 
 C'a's. B.C. 1,7.— Ul Variu< dicere solC*!)at. quum ditU t'stibnn, alii tameu ciiarentur ( = 
 qiium, qiKWKiuam dedissef tesils). Cic, Fiu. a, 19.— Ilac spe la^mm Indutiomflrus, tiifii/o- 
 tnirii/ft copias cojrere c<ppit ( = etn lapyits ernf). C'ses. B. Ci. 5, .V).~5) Bv an ordinar^- co- 
 ordinaiion. wiib /ame/i in the si-cond proposition : AV uMjnum poMtiilJlre videtiir lla'-din- 
 bal. f-^'iro /</;«/>« lion censeo quod jutit tribuendum ( = ef-<i a-qinim jjostultlre vidCtur, 
 tam^n vjo etc.). Liv. 21, i. C-'omp Cic, Fin. 1. :i, 7.-0) By a coordination with 'luidem and 
 tivmn : Use clade> Itomam quum essent nuiitiilta\ inprens. (inidtm lucuis civitflten) cepit, 
 Bed tdinfn, quia consules etc., minus eis cladibus movebantur ( = qiiatnqnain. his cladibim 
 nuntifitis. inirensluctusriviijltem crpit, minus tamen etc ). Liv. 2,"), 22.— 7) Often the neira- 
 tive causal clauses mentioixd p. »•!»() may be used in place of a C(>n(•es^ive clause. Thus tlie 
 Fentenc»' -Pu^iles in jactandisca'<tibus iiiiremiscunt. non tjiiln doltunf etc' (Cic, Tusc. 2, 2."0 
 may be expressed ' I'liriiltsinfjemixcunt etsi non dolent '.— S) By an imperative sentence fol- 
 lowed asyndeiically by the main sentence, as: (^uare nf nobis o?jlior in hoc interpreiandi 
 penere H)irabilis: in auirmdo. in ornando etc. mau'is existiiniltur meiumdus, (piam adnii- 
 randiisorjltor ( = r^'/a/z/^vx miial)ilis sii. tamen in au-end»» etc.). Cic. Brut.o'.», \M\. — Kiner- 
 St^/i/vx pecuhltus etiam judicio : mediietur dediicibus hostium (pios acceptjl pecunia libe- 
 rflvit ( = ttinmA ejnerserit, meditCnir tatm-n etc ). lb. Verr. 2, 1, 5. Here belongs the cir- 
 cumlocution wwh^tiiitje. in the meanini;' supposinir\ * jrr.inted forarpiinniifs smUc': Inter- 
 fecti aiiqui 8unt,./i/'r/e' a nobis : (juidy vos senaton-s Campanos se( dri non pcrcussisiis f 
 = Sup[Misin<_' we had killed them, or 'even if we h id killed them '. did voii not behead 
 the C'ampaaiau senators:' Liv.3y,;j7.— 9j J3y the circunilocuiions meniioued Obs, 1. 
 
 CHAPTER SIXTH. 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 t Li». Conditional periods represent the rcalit}- of the iMincipal sen- 
 tence (thesis)* as contingent on the reality of another action, contained 
 in a clause (conditional clacsk). Conditional clauses are divided into 
 four classes: 1) Clauses of doubtful reality, generally with an indiaitire, 
 l)ut sometimes with a suhjunctice ; 2) Clauses of doubtless bealitv, 
 always requiring the indicntice ; \\) Clauses of nox-iiealitv, with a snh- 
 junrtive in both the theds ami the clause ; 4) iMruoPEH conditional 
 clauses, with moods depending on particular rules. Affirmative con- 
 ditional clauses are introduced by d (sometimes by sin, (»r sice)\ negative 
 conditional clauses, by nisi, d non, or ni. 
 
 Ob». 1. While Errammatically n condition.ll clnupe is dependpnt on the principal pen- 
 tence or tin-sis. loL'ically the the.s-ix is dcix-ndeiit on Ihe co/idi/ion, since (in proper c«»n- 
 ditional clauses) the former cannot exist without the latter. From this peculiarity 
 chn-fly arise? the crreat variety in treatini; the mood of the two propositions in condi- 
 tional periods, since th(! mood of the clause is partly determined by the nature of the 
 thesis, and partly the mo od of theMliesis by the natuVe of the cl.iuse. 'I'iie mood of the 
 
 * For th<! expressions phot.^sis' and ' a poliosis "pee p. 478. ObsTtI ^Many jrratnma- 
 rians api)ly these terms improperly to conditional periods onlv. A Si-clanse cannot be 
 a 'protasis' (i. e. preceding i)ropositi(>n) if it follows the thesis, nor can any period 
 begin wuh an -apodosis' ( = subsequent proposition). 
 
 thesis js often a subjunctive onhj hecanse the Si-clansc is in this mood «o th-if wp ofY^n 
 miist mpply a Si-clause to accwnd f<,r the subjunctive in the tluSs (/} 48 OB^Tand 8^ 
 Often, on lie con-ra.y. the subjunctive of the Si-cJause is derived s<,hVfV(.m ihe 1"^! 
 t ml charac er of he thesis, even it the thesis is not in the subjunctive (R. 44, Obs iV; ^ '" 
 V..^ rh i- 'l'^-"''J<]'Kt.ve 1.1 the St-dausH has its own force» without l.^i./- affected b^ 
 he thesis.-beveral kinds of conditional periods have the peculiarity that7he rV^i i y of 
 the principal senteiu-e (against the definition in § .i2.5) does «0« l(.«'ic4llv denend on\h^ 
 reality of the S.-cla..se. In such instances the con,litional IZ^lkl^x^o^Kll^tv Tm^re 
 «/•a;/.;;m ,.v//yorm belonging to the improi^er conditional periods for insta.cewh?,.^ 
 has the force of f/,«,„.vn.,.r the real thesis must be vUr.lood, so t at t e nrinci n-tl 
 sentence is not at the same time the thesis of the conditiotial period (Sc4T48,Ob^^^^ 
 
 Obs 2 In C()nditi<mal clauses of iJoiBTFiL nEALirr, the reality of the action i^ ren- 
 resented as questional, e and undecided. The thesis denotes either the co«VX*//^^^ 
 ihe dect.^ton (or of ' ftiltilling the condition \ as : ' Jf mu trromUe InillnW^^^^ % 
 
 ,.^th ,f •' '" ^" "^^- "'■' ^''^ ''' '^"'''■'^'' '• U^' H' «J'^' danger does not b.^in i "cowiZV^^ci 
 
 r the decision but exists ev.n before the decision, or does i.ot exist at aU-^S 
 
 oiial clauses of 1,01 btlkss ueai.itv represent the action of the clause as cr/f^'n bit 
 
 £^/Iw^r'A'-' ^'^' ''"''"'• '"'^ consequence is reached, as liable to d.ml.t (//• Jrer" "^ S 
 
 {trn^f"f^''T"'- '''''^ ^''^^^'^ ^^" mo,e).-lu condi.ional periods of non-reai ity the 
 
 actions of both i.ropositions are leinvsented as y,o/ happening while they have an ai^r- 
 
 mafne form, ot; as read!/ Iuipiy>->nnr, wh.le they are negative, tne co.Kiition contalnif^V a 
 
 inere fiction u\ the speaker, and the thesis expressing what would e le cc^^^seq, 'H^ 
 
 ..f such an action, as : / wo,dd prwe H, if you denied it (but I do not prove be 'ms" v<m 
 
 do i.ot deny).-The ci iteri<»n ol these three classes of dat ses is X\xl^d\c?Xoi\ ' In elms, s 
 
 n '<; /"o <,t her classes, the aetion of the clause being unconditionally hue in clause, of 
 do btless re.hty, and vnronditU.naHy untrue in clauses «,f non-realit/,-The m .1 diffl- 
 c Ities in Uitin cond,ti(,nal periods are 1) the choice of mo(Kl in either of the tvv prono- 
 
 tsi^!i.l:!^:^::^, ';!i!t^::ir''''' -' — ^'^^^ ^ ^> ^^- ^-- «^ -^-i^^ z^ 
 
 ui,s. I, lo I. \[ they are //^y/ coordinate, they must either belotg todiflenut classes or to 
 rterent divisions of the same class ; or one conditional clause may be depcM riem on 
 an,,ther,as : si q.u re.trum forte mirdfur, me nunc ad ac<u.sandum <iesce dere is "i 
 tntt con.ttn caumm co<jnorent., id qm.d facio i.robabit. Cic. Di v. ( a-c. 1, 1 The second 
 bi clause js an improper (temporal» coiidith.nal clause {n. ..cofmoniV = ouum coanoveiit 
 
 tia J^ufjue ptcunia l,(i,da ,st a mo, 'si Kt vino rxon materfamilias essft' neain 
 
 h r • "" ^ '.^,^-*'";'"'"" "''^ f'''','"' the -iK-nse-wire' of her husband, no legacy is di e 
 o her It shednl not marry her husband m the lorm of ' i„ manum conven.io " Cic. Top 
 
 i\i 44 n;.''''^^!''I.,T h''''"'"'' '■■'^*.""'' \''Y^-^ ^" '"^' ^-'"Klitions denotin- exemplinc-.ti.ln 
 (K. 44 C)i.s. 1,1, «hie the second and third clauses are clauses ol doubtful reality (the 
 
 ^h e/Mi.'r b.''?''^^'; V'^' ^Tr- ""'? ""^ 'l''''^ ^" '»'*-• P^^»>' ""» belongin^r to the same thess^ 
 Hute the lii>t cuiiuiuoual clause is at the same time the thesis of the secoud. 
 
 I. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF DOUBTFUL REALITY 
 
 Hem. 44. A conditional clause of doubtful reality re<nilarly has its 
 predicate in the indicative. But the sujjjunctive mav oy must be used 
 in t le instances mentioned p. 709 foil. The predicate of Uie thesis is gen- 
 erally in the indicative eun if the clause has a subjunctive. But it 7nav be 
 ('/) 111 an independent potential su])iunctive, or {b) its subjunctive may be 
 ch'termine d by that of th e clause^On^. H. i;)). -The tense of the clause, 
 * It is customary among irrammarlans to illustrate tir.nfiftc^?;nrirci^diti(i^l^n^riic- 
 illTun-' i**''"^"'" ^""""^^^ ' '^» 'i^^'' i'-fii» ' ; ' -St dicas errdhi^ ' etc. This method is worse 
 r'vlT- "]"'"^'.'»"^ " ^*\y '^'^^' "f the existing combinations (of uhicli th. re are more 
 ih.in til >) can be L'lven, and because periods of very difieretit forms may have the same 
 jneaning. while p<-nods of the same for.ns may refer to conditions altogether different 
 n ttieir nature. W e have used the conditional formulas merely to show their chaujres 
 in oblique discourse, where not the meanini;, but the form alone is essential Cp G32) 
 
702 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OP DOUBTFUL REALITY. 
 
 703 
 
 if in the indicative, is determined either by the general rules, or by tho 
 parliciUar rules mentioned below. 
 A Tenses of the Indicative in Clauses of doubtful reality. 
 
 OBS. 1. The MOO. of a conaitional clauj. of ^-J>^;;:;,-;}V^;;j^^;;r;^C^UhiU^ 
 TiVK whatever mood may be used in P.n-li>li. l "t '""""*" /j -o . ,; w g r.ui • „ ;«i 
 
 ll'sieimiuVji; Jl fl.A ,»r;.': %,i. H . 1>. O. U, W.-Ko,-mam i^ilur mil.i totlu, republic*, 
 
 l'>"-?.-'-rv7™.«,w Plant Mil- 1 4 lO.-MihlSrntiorilliriiWu/-, «qnis«(»fll8us 
 
 r'™''rTh i' r 0« "jl^S «e^toinnilM» in v.l.is: qui rf icclrco -,6«^^ ut «li:- m 
 igiiogco. lb. t.im. 1(1. -n.'^ ,.,''',, ii, K-mi !■> •> 3 -Oii.kI >i iia liii nt. tntain irinora» 
 t„l«, ne m v.. us <,nl<U.m (.,-f. ,.^ I!.. K ... 1-. -^1. y ,„'„a,/„„,n.-s unlu. sint. H 
 
 ;'.!:';;s™>.l^S<';,!iti..i-:n.'/S';n;^ »..'..« qu« ,.u,au,„». u,a.uis »ub«. 
 
 ''''^'•'' "SL'X ', ,V urjr m ^ «"^ "^^ .lari illa.n quani darl hunnino L'..nfrl mel.w, 
 
 rsi^^j'^cJiai^wio'^i.-kVi" i>- "^ -" '"-■" "<='" ^•='""" 
 
 "'opT^ 'ir fht'ac'tfon of the Si-clause refer, to a time r.TCKE t,. the speaker, the fol- 
 
 '"'V'f^'m.r■;ll■v'i;"Ml''IhX';^i «.ul the .«-/«.-«e have their pre.lieate. In the ruTURE- 
 ^^;f ;\5 Jel^Vh^^icluture «.,n,.,^^^ 
 
 a vobi 
 qiue 
 
 ia »^/?m/^^ quo banc le<jjatinnein douiu.n relerilinus 
 ico>. libenter «.s.sv///ia;-. Cic. Fin. l,8.28.-(iu.;m t 
 
 Liv, 45, "24. — .Vi milii proMZ/is ea 
 andem tiiuhun nostra calauiitas 
 
 rt//4 
 
 quie dico!*, libenter "If'!'''''' •^'J^'ir'^rv.)''"- ^^^^^^ ,„ coii^tituerif, meuui ron 
 
 eS'ii.^^lf Pon=;^^;! ;rg^«U 
 
 future ''•'•77.»": -.-"' ;;: r ,■ , U m.i* r, Vh ™^^^^ iaciun» et a.ln.i.-un. 
 
 SiSrs-i^i^^i:;:;;^ :;ir-^,i;;urft/'n;s^:;:^,s^ -^7u;;:;;uS:;^;rsi::i 
 
 68 —This form occurs even if the future ii» possibly remote, as : Quod si assequor (at any 
 future time), f/perv Cra-sum divitiis, atque omnium vicos et prata contemrio. Cic. Att. 1, 
 4 3 _,S't milii tiliuf qeidtur, it^qiie prius moritur, tuni mihi ilie M heres. lb. Or. 2, 82, 141. 
 C The tljesis may be in the perfect with the name meanin<r as when the clause 
 refers to present time according to One. 1, C: Brutus si conservdtus eiit, vicimm. Cic. 
 Fam. 12. 6, 2. (Comp. the examples p. 30.3, Obs. 2). -Tum, hercule, illo die quo ego congul 
 fum creiltU"» male res r/e\/a publicu fst, fd lej;em banc tuleritis (If you carry that law, 
 then indeed I «hall think that it was an evil day for the republic when 1 was elected cou- 
 
 // If tlie thesis contains an action holding sood at all times, the predicate being 
 placed in the jxjtentkil future, according to the rules p. 350 foil., ^. 75, Obb. 5-7, the 
 predicate of the clause is regularly placed in the future. Such a future in the claiise is 
 not a future by virtue of the conditional clause and its own temporal relation, but a 
 iHmuhnt future, according to the rule p. 353, R. 76, as : AdversariOrum de&criptio tn/fr- 
 7/iaWur, n lalsa demonstmbitur ; The statement of the adversaries will be refuted il it 
 is proved false. Cic.Inv. 2, IT, 54.-Quo breviter laudjlto. aut, H erit mmme, pneter- 
 mi-so deinceps, si res patietur, de fortfliiis erit et facultatibus dicendum. lb. P. O. 22,74. 
 —Defensor primum, si poterit, dtblbit vitara ejus, qui iusinmlabitur, quam honestissiinam 
 demt)iistrflre. lb. Inv. 2. 11, 35. 
 
 Ob« 3 The action whose reality is represented as doubtful, may be past at the speak- 
 er's lime. In this instance the predicate of the clause is regularly in the indicative of 
 one of the three pmt tenses *, according to the general rules on tenses. 
 
 A The principal predicate is in the future, or an equivalent potential form (impera- 
 tive' subjunctive present, gerundial etc.). if tlic doubt about the reahty of the past 
 action must be removed b^fare the action of the thesis can ber/in, as : Non utar ea consue- 
 tiidine si quid factum ^.s/clemenrer, ut dissolQte factum crimiuer. C'ic.\ err. 2, 5, 8.— «Ji 
 triumidium mm' cumtba^\ ciijus tandem te rei cupiditSte arsisse dejendes? lb. Pis. 24,56. 
 MA iam aiinuid/aWww<'.s7 per FIaccum../fe/;a me. ib. Fam. 3, ll,9.-Sapiensnonnumquam 
 ina-na scelera levins quam n)iiiuraro//J/>*^^rf^, si ilia lapsu, mm cnideiit5te«wim?.s*:a sunt. 
 Sen" Ira 1 10— Sinas nutrlcem percontSri quid hoc rei sit, ut, si lalso pater dxctus suniy 
 jeou'iOre hinc animo dL<cidam. Liv. 3.48.->bi qui se vitidruni illecebris dediderunU ims- 
 sos/V/da/<< honOres. Cic. Sest. «G. i:d8.-6't quem libido in ilUim gurgitem a/y7•^/^M^^ illo; 
 rum turn cum qinl)us conjurjlvit, non suum judicet esse. Liv. 39, lb.->^i il^metu coacti 
 statuam dedrruid, conliteare necesse e-t, te pecunias per vim coegisse. Cic. V err. 2, 2, bl. 
 
 B The predicate of the thesis is in the indicative of one of the past tenses, U the 
 action is represented as coincident with the action of the clause, presupposing the reality 
 of the latter • or it is placed in the pkesent indicative if represented as existiuir at the 
 speaker's tinie, provided the action of theclause was a reality at the time spoken ol, as: 
 (Juo in hello si fuit envr, commflnis e\ fuit cum senHtu. Cic. Phi 11 13,34 -(^^worf^i 
 iios ad aliquam si)em fortOna reserrfivit. minus est erratum a nobis. Ib. I<am. 14.^. L— '>| 
 \\'d.itci C'laudiuin, dolo malo dtjHi. lb. Tull. 12.29.-6'i non deum na, nee faio, sed 
 cnlpil veiiinini^ ad C^annas. cujus tandem ea culpa fvitf Liv.25,6.-^t. .q"" ^'i^ '^^i* 
 eedHs Ui.niie facta est. ego AtliC-nis eo die fui, in c«de interesse non jiotui. Cic. Inv. 1, 
 3(5— Si id actum ^st, et iccirco anna sttmpta s-unt ut homines postrgmi alienis pecuniis 
 locupletarentur, turn vero in isto beilo subadus oppressusqut popnliis Komanns est. l\). K. 
 A 47 _.si Koma condita est secundo anno Olympiadis septiinie, in id sieculum Komuli 
 c^riWk tetas, quum jam plena (inecia poetarnm esset. Ib. Kep. 2, 10.-^\ tibi ilia proba- 
 banuVcynnou propriis verbis ilia tentt^ f lb. Fin.4,22.-^i magoo emerat (decumas), 
 lare ;>S>(ts' enptori lucrum addi oportgie t lb. Verr. 2, 3, m.-Quodsi mil um ante con- 
 M m «r^^^ .-us inieras, ad te minime 2^rtinebat. Ib. K. A. 34.-^t .Hi honOns c-ausS 
 sainam dedidPrunt, inimici non sunt. lb. Verr. 2,2. til.-Ai.st hinc hodie .^m^rart/ aut 
 heii certo scio hie habitdre. Plant. Most. 4. 3. U.-Si omnes tduimus quod arguimm-, 
 m)nWtn7?m/a/.s' voluntiliemafacto; omnes plecttlmur. Liv.45,24. 
 
 C The iMincioal predicate may be in a hypothetical subjunctive of the imperfect 
 or Pluperfect. In this instance the principal sentence is not the thesis of the indicative 
 Si-clause but the real thesis (ccmceived as a general assertion of the speaker) must be 
 suimlied "as: Si fatum///t/, classls populi Komai.i inteilre. etiamsi iripudium so hsiimum 
 fecKsent cl .sses tamen ilterissent ( = Jf this was the decree of fate ^f ts certain that 
 he fleets would have perished, even if etc.). Cic. Di v. 2, 8. 20 -In such constructions it 
 n mv be nJce "sary to suoplv both, the hypothetical 8i-clause belonging to the hypolheti- 
 Snnfsis. and the thesi's proper of the '"'ii^^^ive S.-chnse. as: At..d neque ^. fatu^ 
 fuerat. effuqisset, nee, si non^/wmI^^l^euln casum mcidisset [ = I f this was (had been) 
 * Some <rrammarrai7s7f(Vr"in-tance Arnold, Pkosk Compos § 441) assert that *i with 
 the hnTf^c "ml pluperfect ahcays takes the subjunctive This erroneous <:P'n.on ,9 
 refuted by the examples mentioned in the text, and bv the regular use of 6» with a« 
 imperfect or pluperfect indicative in clauses of repeated action vP. i'^^, Obs. 1). 
 
701 
 
 CONDITTONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF DOUBTFUL EEALITY. 705 
 
 the decree of fate, U i. certain that he conl. .c. ^Il^^^^fr^^:,^^^^'^^'^ J^l^ 
 
 V, Xfg\tive Si-clauses OF DOUBTFUL iiEALiTY 
 
 03. 4 Ne^H^!^onalclan.e,or<Iou;>tfulr..i|^^^ 
 (Hn'thu^'sinemo, si mhil etc.), correspo mli. u^^tp ^^.ffj^^^'g;, /according to Ob., b). 
 
 i^ar ^ ."ed non faciet si). A clause V' .^ 'J^^J '^w y' iuch.UcB the idea of ^t ;^o« If 
 but it does not iieces-anly contain it, \M 1^ „ nch or what is not meant hy ilie speaker 
 Iv . 1 sl" /i.vi instead of si nun, we may my too niic 1, ^' ^. and fail to express the whole 
 if we liVi ^on instead of ;.i.i, we '''«Vv fv a t i spViker did not mean to assert; 
 rnoaniiv' of the speaker, but we will not sa> ' "! < .^^^^^'^f^jj j,, the sentence ; Vtncu- 
 "Z^^i weaken his thou^^lit, V.ut we ca >t " 1^^ following two ideas arc 
 
 Avhich is expressly stated hy usii - iht ^'-/j^y;; , ^ ^ ,i ,,on, and not hy nisi: 
 
 OBS 5 Ne-ative condiiional clauses must he n^"^"*'^;^^^^^^^^ of the nol-happenin- 
 
 i if the'rcli<mof the thesis '^J^^y';;^'^^i^l^J'X^^^iheacl\on of the clause 
 ot the acticm in the clause, f,ut «f/^'^''^'''^^// f/;' *f.'"vi "chrvso<M.no inipetnlre non pos- 
 U to mevent or to exclude the princuml a.^t on, as .Si a cnrj .^^ 1^^ jnevaH'ng on 
 
 lumus an m perfu^num est v^'^tra Juniitas. C.c^^^^^^^^^ .oodness^; but not 
 
 Chrv-^o-'onus will have tl«.e «'O''^*''/»^ f<^;;'" '\^,,V r(-fu 'e etc.').- decemviri hnem per- 
 ' Our pr~evailinu' on Chrysogonus ^v\ L Jf ^^, ,\\\\V a-sQ "l^s is^^ U v. 3, 52 ( = / W 1 the not-^ 
 tinacile non faciunr, rtiere ^l^ :^^^f^^^%^",o\^l everything go to ruins ' but N.^ 
 r^f,'<inaoi the decemvirs obstinacy induct, y"" «• letting everything etc.? \—^\ 
 
 ^V\M1 the m/vi/^JZ of their obstinacy Prevent you fun kju^^ Oic. Ihut. 51.-Quod 
 tmi e i nat-e «OMi-elerant somim, ^^^i'^'f!^^'^^^ '^' ^ n ffquod mihi cum tide im- 
 ^ , Mferre non potero, opprimi me onere oftuu maio Hua ^ ^^^^^^^^^ .. ^^^^^ „, ,,,,c 
 
 positum est, propter pertldiam 'V^J'^^,^-,?^ ^.- ^os /u/n tenent fa'dera vestra, ne nos 
 re mihi non Pl^ceat, vitupeT^re. l . 4»k-M vo^ ?st.-Suasori proponitur simplex 
 
 zt^-~ j!'-;';;;!i;f i^,!':?"^ "!!;^i^t ^Sri^^n:^:^' '^^r^r^^ p' 
 
 enisor pars 'The non-utilitv of the action must result in the "nefiat"' ; the sua 
 gjtvs ' The utility of tiie action prevents the " ne flat " \ i. e. causes the ' fiat '. lie 
 
 snasor 
 gstys 'The utility ot tin- action prevents tne - ne nai , ?. c causes me iiai . Hence 
 Nisi-clauseri cou'ld not be u>-ed by the dissuasor, since they would iiulude the iSi-clause 
 of the suasor while they are meant to be opposed to it.— Hence when the idea of 'con- 
 hequence' i- expressly indicated by the i)reflicaie of the thesis, the cnnditioual ncL^ative 
 clause must be introduced by Vi non\ ami not by ' /a.>i ' ; Si l.iec euuncialio '\ENihT 
 IN Tltsculanum' vera non est, seqnitur ut falsa sit. Cic. Fat. 12. v8. _ , _ 
 
 n If a ne<'ative conditional clause is at the same lime concesmvf, si non, not m^t, 
 mu-'t be ust^d since, in this instance, the action of the thesis will not he exvlxditd 
 hv -the happeiiiiM-' of the action in the clause, but will held good, whether the action 
 of the clause happens or no», as : ISi non plus ingenio valebas quam ego, certe timybas 
 minii*» Cic Att y, 15. 7.— (^uibus (volnpt)itil»us) j^enecius, si non abunde potliur, non om- 
 nlno caret lb Seii. 14.— Quern «i imit:lri aique exprimere /iO/< possumus, at qualis esse 
 debeat pc/terimus fortasse diceie. lb. Orat.5, 19.— A Flamina, si non potes omne, partem 
 aliquam velim «-xlorqueas. lb. Fain. 10, 24, 'i.-Si ilhid non licet, saltein hoc licebit. ler. 
 Euii 4 2 11 —0^/fW^ide Antonio /<o/*laboraiis. mihi certe consiileredebetis. Cic. i n. 1-i, 8. 
 
 C If a ne"ative conditional clause beloiiL's to the clauses of doibtless reality (^. 
 45) it must'""be introduced hy « //O/i. not by nisi, since such clauses always n.ntam a 
 doubtless • not happening' of the action, so that the second requirement oJ a Nisi-clause 
 (si cavto. non facitt : see Obs. 4) is always wanting in them, as : Si Antoni») Crassus visus 
 non est eloquens. numquam Cotta esset, liun.quam lloriensius. Cic. Orat.30, 10b. Here 
 the negative action of Crassus is represented as a doubtless fact : and hence the assump- 
 tion cannot be represented in an affirmative form, which excludes the use of inn. 
 
 D If the ne<'ation refers to a single member of the conditional clause, with wnicH 
 another member of the clause is c..5rdinate(i by an adrer^ative conjunction, the nega- 
 tion cannot coal, see with n into nui, as : Si non deum ira. nee faio. t^ed culpa periimus 
 ad Cannas ciijus tandem ea culpa fuit V Liv. 2.\ O.-Tibi minus commode consuluens. .^t 
 von foi-tunoi oftvecu^/^- videbere, sed inevm aliq'iod factum condemnavuse. C*s inCic. 
 Att 10 i^Ji 1 — Mehor lit grex, si non est ex coltectis connmiTnu^, sed ex consuettsiwa. 
 V-irroii \{ '> 3— If the ne"ation refers to a single member of the clause, whtc/i is twt 
 followed braiiother member, adversatively coordinated, nisi may be used instead of 
 ii non. if not forbidden l>y ihe other rules *.— For the use of si non and msi, if two con- 
 ditional clauses are opposed to each other, see 11. 49, Obs, 1. 
 
 Obs »; III the ft)llowin<: instances nisi is used for clauses of douhtfiil reality : 
 
 A To' represent the action of the clause as the only means of j.re venting, excluding, 
 or avoidiii" the action of the thesis, as : Nisi hiec cohors sistit impetum ho^tlUln, a<ium 
 de iwptfioest ( = The staying of the attack is the only means to prevent the fa i of the 
 emnire) Liv 4 3^.-Actum igitur de te ed, nisi provides. Lic.ham.9,lb,^.—l>£j)ugneS 
 OiMtet, 'ni-^i concedis. lb. Alt. 7. 9.4.-Frangite sorltas, ne molesti sint ; etwit enim, nm 
 c\-ivCtis lb \c 2 29, 9:i— Very frequei Illy in such periods the thesis is likewise nega- 
 tive, in which instance 'nisi. ..non' has the meaning of 'only if (=' not except , 
 'iK.t unless'), as: Msi deus te corporis custodiis liberaverit, hue tibi aditus paiSre 
 7,on i)o"te«^l ( = Onli/ if a «rod relieves you. the access can be open : or ' y7atss a god re- 
 lieves vol"., no access Van be open '). Cic. Kep. (5, 15.-Cui persuadCri posse non arbitror, 
 nisi eiit convenius. lb. Att. 8. 9, 4.-Qu:e sceleris vesti-ia, 7im multa et manilestJi sun , 
 res t.-.ui s<:ele>ta cndi non i.oiest. lb. R. A. 22.-lIi snnt. qui jn.^i mecivitate expulissent 
 olitintMv se fon posse i)Ulaveiunt licentiam cupiditjltum siiarum. lb. Att. 10. 4, 1. -At 
 vero lilii, IJrute, non solvam. nid p.iiis a le cavero. ainplius eo nomine nemmem petiifl- 
 rum lb. Ihut.o, lS.-Ai.si quam vicfriS patefecerimus viam, 7/M//«m hal.emns. Liv.9 
 2:"-If 'nin non\ in such senten-es. has not the lorce of 'only', ihe c.mlit.onal 
 clause must be iniroduced by '*i. . ./*o« ', as : Quod iwn»on potest .st id. quod visum 
 erit, diseerni non poterit a falso. Cic Ac. 2, 8 [i e. -Tijis is \^^^^^^^;^^'l'l^;;:i^]^?l^ 
 the Sceptics is true, namely that truth cannot be distiuLMUslied from falsehood. Mst 
 id disceini iK>tent ' would inean ' This is only possible if, m the things seen, we are able 
 to disiiii'-iiish truth from falsehood '.] ... j 
 
 iJ iFiI.e thtsis and the clause are to each other in the relation of rule and excep- 
 Ti oN, or if the action of the claus e is represented as a mere chance or accident, the 
 
 *Theirrammariansdo«o/add this restriction to their rule \'l'^\t if the negation refers 
 to a sin.de word of the sentence, the use of msi is not admissible'. But \\ithout th ib 
 re-triction, the rule would not hold good, as appears Irom the lollowing passage . Hie 
 autem qui arcliiuirata diciiur, nin U'luabilittr pnedam oispertiat, interliciaiur Cic Off 
 2 1 40 Here e ideiitlv the negation belongs to ivquabiliter. and yet is blended with s% 
 imoVXi Thus in the' following passage a Isi>i-clause might have been used without 
 LttVcti g the sense otherwi-elhaH the sense is affected by changing st non "'to «m in 
 a/,V seiiTence : Si latum tibi est ex hoc morbo non convalescere, non couvalcbccs. Ciu 
 Fat. 12, 29 ( = Nisi latum tibi est ex hoc morbo couvalescere). 
 
706 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 clause is introduced by ni4, not by H non (henoo always 'nisi for(e\ never ''sivon 
 f'trle '). as : Ciiiltos sinlrulo-' juivjiiraiulo udi^'un. tiid ciii morbus causa crit. Liv. 24, Hi. 
 (2u.<re, nin quid vobisaliud f>l.ici-t. ud ilia pt-r^'ilinus. Cic. Orai. «i5. ^-.'O.— E<;<» b.lluni l(c- 
 dirisin)uin tbru puto, id<i qui Puithicus casu- rx-Jitcrit. lb, A't. 7, "^t;. .'i — Il)iiur i<:itur. et 
 ita quidein ut cimisi's, nisi cujus tinivioris persOiiie suscipit-iulie sposerit anic oblaia. II). 
 10. 1) y. — .Vi.si liiiic liodie rini^'ravil aiit luri.certo scio hie bahitflre. Plaut. Most. 4. 3, 14. 
 —Xisi oinncs di \\\v. atqui^ houiincs destTUUt. t'xossjllx» e;,'o ilium, lb. pM-ud. 1,8. 171. 
 
 C. If a noL'ative conditional clause is used to desi;,'ii;iie an :<ction as nwv wniili m>i<t 
 be; done, or inutit hold j;ood iii order to av..i(| certain «li.«iadvantaLfr-, penalties, or threats 
 expressed in the thesis, the clause is almost always introduced by i,i.>i, very rarely by 
 si non In this instance, ihit Nisi-clause has the force of a cate-^'orical, aftirmative im- 
 
 pera'ive if it refers to the action of another, and th it «tfa solemn jiromii^e or ass» i>r<itio>i 
 if it refers to an act of ihe sjnake/, as : Quod nifi lacis, in viiula te duci jubCbo. Liv. 
 
 own actions, the clause beini; equivalent to a pledi,'e : Nulla sni)pruia recflso, /«iAi paucis 
 diCbus hos populaiores airrOrum iiostrOrum fusos fu;;atosqiie castris exuero, Liv.;j. «i8 
 ( = I p'edtje mystlf to drive them from their camp; else \ submit to every torture).— 
 lliBC /<t.si "omnia nerspexerilis in causfl, temere a nobis illam appeliari putatOte. C'ic. 
 Clu. G. 18. —Sin mtelie.'ceritis ( = unless I convince you), j'uiiCtn, nullum esse ofti- 
 ciu'u tarn sanctum, quoil non Capitonis scelus violSrit, viriim optimum ef^e eum judi- 
 catOte. lb. i{. .\..is. 1U'.>.— .\ikdeat deinde talia adus. n/.vi in hunc iiisi<;ue jam documen- 
 tum mortalil)Us dedero. Liv. 1, 28.— So when the clause is equivalent to a «-iron"; as.-eve- 
 ratit)n : Occidor, nisi e;ro intro luic propeie proj)iro currere. I'laut. Aul. 2, 8. 23.— Ai.4 
 me suspeudo. occidi! lu. llud. f). 3,.VJ.— .J/o/'iar, nisi fac6te ! Cic. .Att. l(i, 11, 1. — /Vrt-r/z/J, 
 nid sollicirus -urn. Cass. iuCic. Faui. 15, 1!>, 4. So J'laut. .Most. 1,3.35; lb. Trin.2. 4, 114. 
 
 Som(^times (but raiely) conditional clauses referring: to a penalty for non-perforuiance, 
 are introduced by ni non. as : «b'i mild non jam culleis laic ol.iim deportabitur, te ipsam 
 culleo ego eras laciam ut deportCre in per;,Milam. I'laut. Pseu<l. 1. 2. 83. This is <i//r(/y!f 
 the case if the sulTerer of the penalty, and the doer of the punishable action are dift'< rent 
 persons, as for instance, when a bondsman or a liostaye is to suller a punishment for 
 another, as : Dauiunetu et Piiintiam ferunt hoc aninio inter se fiiisse ui vas factus Mt 
 alter ejus si^tendi, ut, vi ille non reveitissei, moriendum es.^et ipsi. Cic. Otl'. 3, 10,45. — 
 Obsidet* etiam sexcenti equites imper:Tti qui capite luerenl n pacio non staretur. Li v. 9, 
 5.— Ariovistimi in obsides omnia exempla cruc iatusque edere, ^t qua res non ad nnium 
 eius facta sit. C:es. B. G. 1,31.*— For the u-e of ni, instead of nisi, in clauses n'feniui^ 
 to penally for non-performance fee Obs. 1>, />>.— For tlie iJVe of nisi in certain idiomatic 
 phra-es see It. 5"), Ubs. 1-9. For nh<i in clauses of non-iealihj, see /.'. 4r>, Obs. 3. 
 
 Obs. 7. In many instances the sense is not essentially afiVcted, whetlnr the thesis is 
 considered as the consequence of a '' not-doing \ or as excluded by a ' doinq\ In such 
 instances the conditi(»ual clause may eitfur be introduce I hy si non. or by nisi, as : E_'o, 
 ui mr navii^atio no/i luorabitur, cpiie inciirrObat in ii)s()s Etesin-;. propediem te. nt spen», 
 vidCoo. Cic. Fam. 1."). 11.2. Coinpan; with : Kl,'o, nisi quid me Etesiie morabuntur. eeleri- 
 ter. ur spero. vos vidO'io. II). 2. 15. 7 — Tu autem, ni^i molest urn e^t. paullisper «-xsur^'e. 
 lb. Clu.H(5. But : Qiud acturus si^, M tibi non est inolestum. rescrlbas nulii velim. H). 
 Fam. 5, 12.31. — Coiistitui virtus null'» modo potest, ni^i ea qua- sum prima natflne tenO- 
 bit. lb. Fin. 4, 15. Compart! with : .Equitas tollitur omnis si habere su'.im cuTqiie tion 
 licet. lb. Oil". 2. 22. 78.— -Vnte portas est belliim ; si inde non pellitnr, ^am intra mtBuia 
 erit. Liv. 3, <j8. But: Ab eis, ni-i pros|)icitis. brevi tempore deseremii.i. Cic. Alt. 1, 9, 
 20.— For the n-»e of si non. an I nisi in coordinate conditional periods, see li. 49, Obs. 1. 
 
 Obs. 8. Xi (tinless, if not) luid a ditlereut nieaninj; in the preliterary (archaic), ante- 
 classical, and classical periods of the lani;iia<,'e. In the archaic j)eiiod. a» far as we can 
 judge from the few monuments extant, ar.d from the later develoi)mi nt «if the use of ni, 
 111 was n~ed with the force of ,<i non (Obs. 9. .4). Of this usage there are still several relics 
 in special connections, both in anteelassical and classical stvle (Obs. 9, /y and ('). But 
 in the classical period ni was extensively used as an equivalent of nisi in jnost of its 
 meaning-», ex'-ept in those coniiections wht!ic //ixi has the force of n co<irdina/inr/ amjnuc- 
 tion (see /?. 50 Obs. 1-9). Only traces (dthis use occur in the anteelassical authors. But it 
 becaiie more frequent in Cicero and Salliist. and reached its greatest extent in Livy and 
 Tacitus, who. in clauses of non-reality, use ni more frequently than both nisi and si non 
 taken togetljer. — C;Rs:ir ii(!ver uses the conj unction ni. 
 
 * If a penalty attached to a non-perfornmnce. refers to indefinite doers in gknbual 
 Ri'LES or LAWS, the conditional clause is iutrodticed by ai non, not by nisi, as : Si quis 
 in jus vocStus non ierit (not 'ni<i.. .ierit"), a judice mulctil damnabilur. Paul. Dig. 2, 5, 
 2,— Si non accipit, quod te debSre dicis, ucctlsea. Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 12. 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF DOUBTFUL REALITY. 707 
 
 according to H, '*•» <^f,^-J> •, "f • Kp\ni \ Tab 1 -Kem vfd pa-junt, orfito ; 7a pagunt, 
 hat, libras lams in diem i^^^o. t rgm. All. i lu • '• {; the actor shall plead; if tliere 
 
 "'""'''r'^Sw'hau'inmJduce lie ^"in tl^cSu^Ic! Frgm.il Tab 3. and 
 j^ no contract. »»« ^»'^^,1 '."t"^**""^^/" j )^.\ iireadv cea-ed in the earliest anteelassical 
 Auet. Her. 2, 13, 20. This use of ui h.xd a 1 react > ^^^;^ ^^^^^ habSbis. foenum non defi- 
 writers, who use si non in this connec ion . 1 . »^^"")/i ^^"^^"^ I!^, vntere use 7n in this ccm- 
 
 ciet : si non erit, siecnm ''"^""'"'♦«•.^;;;^, ";.;^- Thus Lh'v in a verbatim quotation of a 
 mction only when j^ey g'/o/. a.u^^nt lavv^ ^hu^^^L^^^ ^ a 4^^^^^^ ^^^ 
 
 p.ssa-e of the hbri '*V"^'^^ • •\'>f« l^'^. ^".^^^ ori^u^ H^um in terram defOdi ; siu 
 
 consule) m.u-itur. probe iaclum MdCn ; ''* "'^[';" '^'" i,e pulilicum d^ 
 autem .ese devovCre N^h-t. ;jt "^^"^^'^^S^^^eertSin Lm-a or om|sslons as 
 
 qui sese <levoverit. Lu.8,10.— -^ ,/." ^^;:,,?"''?; : ()„i t^c sicrit testar er, ni testimo- 
 r)i.nishable. the thesis «^P--^^;'"?/;^^ P'^?,'i^^:afenip yed as an instrumVnt witness, 
 Ilium fariiltur, inlesiahilis esto , If he j;''^,^^.f^._\"j»'pr,-n^^ xil Tab. S.-Aij>fdicdtum 
 refuses to give his t»^^=^'>;7"y, he shjd be infa^^^^^^ gt^all imprison and 
 
 facit. ducito, vtncTto ; // he does ^«f *«^ 'V^,. f^/S^^^^ be distiniruished from penal- 
 fetter him. !»>• \-T»»^;r^' »?:;"f V i.*^ io r^ e fo niai/ce n 1 1 e former .t non was used in the 
 ties denounced by tndtrtduals '"' jf/^-VV;?"' 'je"! nisi was used. See foot-note p. 700. 
 literary perio.ls of the !''V?n^f;e, w le ni thc^.^^^^^ as ^^^ ^^ ^ .^^^^.^.^^ 
 
 B. M. as an unquestionable re le of archaic ».>R,ii ^^ ^^^^^ .^^^ ^ covenant 
 
 (or 'It you nave hol comno.i^" -»-. " ^--.V.t,' ^..gh a sum' (or ' f I did commii 
 
 etc.. Jvani). The def-ndant Y^^^^l^ •v.Ailo etc "^^^^^ So in criminal suits lor 
 
 Buch a crime') ' I sha 1 pav such ^ ":^ <.» ^/.^^.lo^f/^jou of U^^ complainant was ' Al vir 
 certain kinds of slander ad>;dlusy^^imo>«,s the sponsio^^^^^^ , i sponsions re- 
 
 f,jnus sum etc.'. and tliat of the ^^''«''^1^ 1^,^^^ >;'/ uer 'd and if the classical writers 
 muined, to a certain extent, ^'rou^'h the classical pcrioc^^^a^^^^^^^^ ^^^^ .^^ ^^^ sponsion 
 
 refer to a sponsio, they designate ''^ "'>J.^Jt^mucl> i)> ^^'^/^\<^' . -^ j^,,^.i^ clauses can- 
 cf the complainant trarely ^J ^^-^J^;^ ^\^^ I onius socititn in decumis esse di- 
 not be literally rendered ; as : SP"""-'^*. ^ ?,. ;;\\\*:,:X "jicknowledg.-s you (the pnetor) 
 cat.' Cic. Verr. 2. 3. 59; The sponsion is ^ha. A .oni.h acKiioN for both the pitetor and 
 L his partner in the collectb.n of the tithes v-Jiuh^vascrcmr ^ „ummum facere 
 
 not know y Ep. Theii 1 hei a taient ag. i -si » t."„ 'V'rrcle pi-nus. ni omnia memini et scio ; 
 Plant. Ep. 5, 2, :i3.-To. Non ^'«^^'P'^^, ^^''^„,^,f k^J.^ry ^v^rVth^^^^^^ lb. Pcrs. 2, 2,4.-Id 7ii fit, 
 Will vou bet with me that I remember, ai^d kno % i^^^^g^^'^p j ^ _Ti,e party, making a 
 mecum pig.n.s.. siquis volt, da.o ni urnam ^^J^^^^-Ji'^i^l^,, qi^t habeas hodie 
 
 mecum pig.nis. si quis volt, daio "^ «irnam "^"'^'-^^j^^^^-^; ',,:(, t^.te quot habeas hodie 
 &;;;in';=re.^(^tS'a:!;;^^;^;^^ ^^ not^^know how many 
 
 «Ts«ffi.!inuJ^.?s^r:rc£;Sn^^e.«nsu^ 
 
 imililil.ns. Hi «L'liuni iletui-, sine """7'»V7'"' oni .•"o, ,,m 
 
 ni |.r,.VM.cl»..i tibI quam v„lueri8 *^''^,^"'l^'' 'l"<^;™t ,„ decree the province lo 
 
 '^i^l^Tl^V^^Z^S^iC: i'it«e7u."o"ai'ey »^re cdered to deuounc. 
 
708 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF DOUBTFUL REALITY. 
 
 709 
 
 war nnlo«s satisfaction was clvcn^. 11>. 1. 2-2*.— TimObat irtim Ponilti. 7)i pannssct locatis. 
 Sall'..Iii". 2.-., 7.— .Vi fua cii-tOdi:* nvuliis, jam h:vv uuf.Mvr la-res. 1I'>''- ^^i^,,'' f^ ^-^l-— y/ 
 posces mitf (licm lihriiiu oiiinlumiiie.., invidiil vt-l ainOre viiril torqueberu, lb. i-p. 1, A .i4. 
 — ScTvItnni libi inc alxluciti), //Hccero. Plant. Pseiwl. 1,5, 105. ^ . , ^^ 
 
 K III the «^aiiie wavtlu' assrv.TationsiiK'iitionfd Obs. «, C may he Ptronsthened by M- 
 claii<e< iu-ti-ad of by Nisi-clause-, as: Moriar, ni pnto to mall»; a O-^an' consnii qiiam 
 ir.aunlH Cic Fam. 7. 23, \.—I\rt'H/i. ni pit*(i'm piiulvi esse. Varro, H. It. .}. 8. 10.—I'>ni, 
 lu'rclf hodie, ni hiinc a te abiiro. Plant. True. 2, 7, (i<>.-I)i me, pater, ..nines od.-nnt, ?/< ina- 
 .'i«* te niiam ocnlos nunc aino meos. Ter. Ad. 4. 5, Wi.— Similai ly minnn, witl. the principal 
 uredii ate <».sy understood ( = iiiinim est. ov miruin essel : almost ol the name force as 7«o- 
 i-iar perii etc.), occurs witli a Ni-clause in anteclissical style, as: .)/i/7//» m domi est 
 ( = T am sure, he is home; literally : A miracle if be is not home). Ter. And. 3.4, r.».— 
 Mirumid l:ic me quasi nuiricnam exossilre cogitat. Plant. Anipli. 1, 1,UW -In Uie same 
 meanin" ' mini sunt ' is used : Mira sunt, ni Pseudrdus est. Plant. Pseud. 4, ., 11 .. See lb. 
 Baecb :? 3 4»»C'apt 4,2 -,'5.— In elassieal style Ni-clanscs occur with //a;v/;/j, when the cop- 
 ula is f.r/>re.v»"'/, as : Mir'imqne esse td jam exterir.re i)arte eastra hosliiim oppusnentiir. 
 Liv 3 O.S _St)metimes nisi is used, in place of y^j, after /nirum.a^: Plant. Ampli. 1.1, 127; 
 lb i i 275. Similar is the use of nisi ndrum t>^t as a parenthetical elanse. as : 1 u. nisi 
 iHiruin est, plane perdidisii mulierem ( = mirntn ni perdidisti). Plant. Pseud. 4. 7, 114t. 
 
 F Vi i-* used with the force of nisi in the instance meniioned Obs. (i, A, to repn'seut 
 an action a< the on/i/ means of excliidinLr the action of the thesis, both with an alHrina- 
 tive and a negative thesis, as: (Decemviri exislimSbant) temptalioncm earn lore al)o- 
 lend'i <ibi ma<"i>tratus, //i con-ensu resisterent. Liv. 3. 3"^.— Iain pro|>e es»e ratus nt, 7a 
 violeniiu' eorTim re-i>teretur. vietum imperinm essct. lb. 3. 41.— (ialii (iiinm vidGrent, 
 iienuieciiiim Homaiios tot eladibiis territo-, ner llexilros ad deditiOnem amnios m vis 
 adhibeiT'tiir. lb. 5. 43. — Ka enim se didfuum ii\uv, ni Ihinr, n>/l/(i sit paeis conditio. lb. 
 30 ;];i — Marcellns jussit pimii:! alt-^iimn 1 virtually neirative) ;<? ab se sii,'iium nccei)is>ent. 
 lb 2:i 44 —Xi ilium recipit, niJdt egl quo me recipiam (excei)t he receive» him. I have no 
 retn<'o) Plaut (apt. 1, 2, IM.— (^li rempiiblicam sistere nt-rjut posse, )n ad e(piestrem ordi- 
 nenriiidicia refeiautMr. Cic. Verr. 2, 3. W [Hand. aceordiUL' to his erroneous tlieorv. cor- 
 rects /ii, in this pa.<sa!.'c. into//ixi. Put this would require the same coireciiou in almost 
 all the p:is>a<:es quoted above, and in a L^reat many more]. ^ , »u 
 
 G ()iiiie frequently /4 is emploved in those clauses where, accordinc: to Obs. <. both 
 fjjvi and .si non inii^dit'l).' used, as :'Servus indicflvit, qiiinqu*' nobiles juvenes CampajiO- 
 rum id incendium lecisse, vuliroque facti'iros alia, ni eomprendantur. Liv.2<i, 27.— 
 E"o wi restiiuitur pU'Mia, rorti'mam cum omnibus, infamiam K»his seiitiam. Id. 0.24.— 
 Eamcoi!tuiiieIiam,//J sibi ab his qui lecerint, demamr, ipsos omni vi depulsilros esse. lb. 
 g o.3_(),ii nuntiarent. seiiiltnm, /a Cornelius consul ad mairistriltus siibroganrios l<o- 
 maiii venlret, potiu» quam (i. Minucium a belloavocfiret, interregnum inlri passOrum. lb. 
 
 ""//Extremely vare is the use of ni, instead of 7dsi. if the clause is to the thesis in the 
 relation of an exeepti«m to a rule (arconlini,' to Ob<. H. //>. and instead of si non. when 
 a Nisi-dause would be imi)roper (Obs. 5. A), as: Mens hie est homo, ni ( = nisn med 
 omnes di atque homin es deserunt. P htiiy;^H;ud^2^,J^— Pli2>jjtu Achtei l iabuC- 
 
 "* Hand triesTo7)rove that ni has only the force of si non, and not of nisi, by quoting 
 the above-mentioned passa«?e, and coiiiparinir it with the followiiiir i>as.«aj:e : ' Le-jiltus, 
 si non dednntur, (pios exi)o-cit, helium ita indTcit. Liv. 1,32. Rut in this passage si non 
 is coinrtlv u>-ed, accordiiiL' to loot-note to Obs. (J, C, and accordint; to our remark» 
 under No. '(7 of the present Obs.: since Livy recites the siib-tauce <>! the /(/?r conceru- 
 iu'^ the declarations of war, and does not refer to any individual or j)articular tlireat. 
 
 t From this use of Ni-(dauses as peculiar forms of asseveratiou, must i)robably be de- 
 rived the ori'MU of the particles nifnlntm, (juiJni, and quipjie (instead o\fjui(Jp>-ni). 
 Ximlrinn (of^-ourse) stands either in^tejid of the parenthetical ' ni inh'um tsf , as in the 
 abov.'-fiuoted passa"e of Plantus, or instead of ' ni ifn est, jnin/m est\ [There is no 
 analo"v whatever, by which the usual derivation of nl/nlrum from ne wiruni could be 
 x^ro\■^^!i^ — 0>li<^ni (why not) is = Quid sit ni (what would be the matter if not : it would 
 be wonVlerlul if not, -^ mirnrn ni). This is best seen from the pass;i«res m which qmd 
 is senirated from ni, as : 0>d<l cqo ni fleam f Plaut. Pseud. 1. 1, !>4. (^nid eqo m lentiwi f 
 11, -2' 2 ':u —quid iilain ni alniruat ^ Ter. Ad. 4, 5. 2H.— C^'/;/>/>f//i (or quifipini) oceur.s 
 eei)arite(l bv one or more word-, exactly in tin; sense of qmdni. as : Ps. Nimis tandem 
 e.ro abs te'contemiior. Si. Quippe etro te ni contemiiam, >trat lotiei'.s homo qui eltiar. 
 plant P-(Mul 4 1.12 Hence (/iiii>/nni. written as one word, lias the si-nse of iiinnrurn, 
 »< • Ps Scele-te • lU. Dicis vera, Ps. Verbero ! Ba. Q"ippi,d.^ lb. 1, 3. 142. Comp. lb. Men. 
 5 (J ■jo'—lt seems that qnippf, a- it occurs in classical u>aL'e. is nothina: but r/inpptnt 
 with ii« ni dropped, the usual derivation of r/*/j>;>« from f/uia/ie being objer-tionabie in 
 gevetal respects. But perhaps quippe may have arisen from the mere iuterrogaiive quia 
 with the suffix />(5, with a force bimilar to 'quidf quod\ 
 
 runt, deprecantes, quia, ni ( = si non) impetrassent pacem BoeOtis, bellum simul gerere 
 decreveiant. Liv. 33, 29. 
 /. For the use of ni in clause? of non-reality pee R. 46, Obs. 3. 
 
 C. Tenses of the Subjunctive in clauses of doubtful reality. 
 
 Obs. 10. In clauses of doubtful reality the following classes of subjunctives must be 
 disiini;ui>hed : 1> The sul>junclive of impuobabii.ity (Obs. 11) : 2) the subjiinciive of 
 actions DKPEXDENT ON THE WILL of the person addressed (Obs. 12) : 3) the subjunctive 
 of viKTiAL NON-KEAMTY (Obs. i:^, 14) : 4) the subjiiiict i ve in indefinite condiiional 
 l)erio(is(OBs. 1.5. Ki) ; 5) tlie subjunctive of exemplification (Obs. 17): b) the historical 
 bulijunctive. The subjunctives enumerated No. 1-4. occur onJy when the principal pred- 
 C!ite is non-preterite, and hence their tenses are either the present or the perfect. The 
 historical subjunctive (Xo. 5) occurs when the principal predicate \^ prtteHle, and hence 
 ittj teuse is the imperfect or pluperfect*. 
 
 1. Subjunctive of Improbahility. 
 
 Obs. 11. The subjunctive of improbability represents the condition as not likely to 
 occur, as : Omnes. ^i in Italia cwtsistat Pompejus. un-l erimus ; sin cedet, consilii res est. 
 Cic. Att. 7. 10. Here the eventuality of PimipeyV staying in Italy is npresented as less 
 probable than the other alternative, by jilacing the former in the subjunctive, and the 
 latter in the future.— Non tantum, si ]tr(elio vieeris, gloria; adjeceris ouantum adenieris 
 « quid adversi eveniat. Liv. 30. W. Here Hannihal represents Scipio's losing the impend- 
 ing battle of Zama as less probable than his winning it. and hence uses the subjunctive 
 '■e'i'eniat '. but the future ' riceiis '.— Istuc quidem. ait Ilomilnus, par omnibus periculnm 
 est qui cum hoste ad colloquium comrrediuniur, .n mdla fides sit. Ncm tamen, inquit 
 rex, T. Quincti, par pertidiie pnemiiim est, si fraude wjdtur. Philippus et Pha^ieas. LIt. 
 32, ;i2— So in Msi-danses if the non-existence ot the action is represented as iniprob- 
 
 ...ipiH)i)ai)iiity as eqiu — ,. - i ,• 
 
 thesis derive< its force from the subjunctive of the Si-clause, according to the peculiar- 
 ity of conditional clauses mentioned § 625. Obs. 1. This imparts to the conditional 
 period the a'ppearance of a period o{ non-reaUfy (in which always the subjunctive of the 
 thesis is logicallv determined by that of the Si-clause), a strong improl.ability being 
 treated as if it were a non-realitv: as : Tiim vero nos similes istOrum simus si diutms hie 
 viotemur. Liv. 7. 34.— ^'i in laiitfl scriptorum tuiha niea fama in obhcuio sU. md)ilit3'e ac 
 ma*^nitU(iine eornm me, qui iioinini otticii-nt iiieo, con.^o'er. Liv. Prief. 3 (Here Livy inti- 
 maVeshis stroii" hope that his fame will not remain ob?cure. and that he will not be in 
 the situation of u-ing the consolation mentitmed).— 6'//< eos, qui naiuia cives sunt, volun- 
 tate hostes, salvos ttlis, quid tandem intersit inter te et illos ? Cic. Phil. 8, 4, 13. Com- 
 >at 
 
 y 
 
 t=i 
 
 very 
 
 ire with : Qui -vi ca qna> dicit Wnsenrirtt, quid inter eiim et AristOnem inleressel f lb. 
 in 4 2-> 60 In both these jjassages the author means that the persons spoken to and 
 loiieii of do not think what is stated, but in the first passage it isx)nly represented as 
 ,v!rv imprtdiable. a stronger form being not chosen, because the course of his rea.^^oning 
 niake< it necessary to consider this aliernative for a moment as a doubtful possiluliiy. 
 But in the last pa^s;^ge the non-reality of the fact is distinctly stated, and hence h.vpo- 
 Ihetical tenses «re used according to Jl^A^. Obs. 1 foil. )^TheKtme analogy between these 
 "♦the theories of the grammarians on the use of the subjunctive in non-hypothetical 
 conditi(mal clauses are widely apart, and either too vague, or altogether erroneous 1 bus 
 KOiiNEit requires the subjunctive if the condition is expressed as uncertain, -undecided,, 
 a< a mere snintosition. or a.-suwpf ion, ovconcession. If this theory were true, then every con- 
 ditional clause of doul)iful reality would require the subjunciive. Madvig requires the pres- 
 ent snitjunctive " when a condition that is ^lill possible isas-umed aiu. subjected toreasoii- 
 inabu wan of 'rial, so as to occur now or at some future time, while it is intimated that it 
 will not actually occur", which liardlv intelli-ible statement isamended by his translator 
 bv (.milting the italicized w..rds. Bv this omission, however, almost every diMinciion 
 between the conditicmal presmr subiunctive and the hypothetical imperfect-subjunctive 
 iseflaced, iK.t meiitiimiiiir the tact that the great majority of the present-snhjunctives 
 will n(»t accommodate to this rule. What the author means b> it. \vill become cUar l)y 
 our remarks, in Obs. 11. on the passage Cic. Fin. 4. 22. 60.-S()me American grammarians 
 h:.ve invented a subjunctive .)f 'lesser vividness and probability _, illustrating it by the 
 followiii" exami)le : ' Ha:c yi hoim patna loquadir. nonne iwmfrare debeat r Cic. Cat. i, 
 8 -Anotlier grammarian (Ahnold Prose-composition, p. 154) makes the iis^e ol the sub- 
 junctive dependent on the ^prosj^ct of decUiun\ saying: Uncertainty with prospect of 
 deci-^ion = present subjunctive; uncertainty without i.rospect = imperlect subjunctive. 
 This utterly unfounded theory is borrowed from the Greek grammarians. 
 
 iM 
 
710 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 twokind.of conditional poviod.^yl.enc.ic^hontho^ 
 
 ment «r th. author on the com^c tne . ) nc op m Ronulnum ac 
 
 helical moods (imperU-ct s^uDjuncnvi-,.— ow...^.. - j.;.!...» id- 
 
 virjii» ciu>os. '''■■'••'■— '■'^, .„ " JV,;, ,!,„„;„,, I :i'0 imro tiiiic HUfcm.-r. I'laut. litre. 
 
 3. Siibjunctive of virtual non-reality. 
 
 isse rfica^ et Inec j^uieii!* q.mi.. ''/"-;V";: ^;',//;, •u'ninT tibi vi-iuUmc natiun Tibiiir. et te 
 
 tuu=* e.t, lunmne equum mali.^ an 'HI";; • ^^'^^, " i, i ,, n-l i n mihi ,si/, .^i ^/'/rfmm Chmd.|fi 
 deant inin.Ici? Liv. H. 18.-Neque ''V,V""n fi " -ite ^^^^^^^^^^ 10.-67 ipso in nos mitis 
 
 ...nti nihil anti.iuius i" •■^'P"^^"*-^;;'^' "' ^^c^'e ^n^hm',:^ < nam indiini nt redinu-re- 
 Tlunnibal esse r./i/, '''^'1 'a.nen obi- u a^^^^^^^ . 1 .^ ^ .,.^ j^ j. ,1 „,j,i,,a 
 
 mur a vobis visi sunns, lb. 22. r)<t.-A/ (//> f" /w '^^^^ » , , principal predicate re- 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF DOUBTFUL REALITY. 
 
 711 
 
 Ob9 U SometimoP, in conditional periods of thi? kind the predicate of Vhc thesis i8 
 nlVml i.i the fidure-present, or in the indicative of tlie penphrashc future, according to 
 tCa xV( <'V(>f ihi.se Av;>o/A..'ioa.' periods i-. which the predicate of tfie thesis ,s placed in 
 
 e ml "itivJ of a pret.ri.e tense (/?. 46, Obs. %\u as : Jam n ^uflVagiuni rf€^^/r hunc, qui 
 V .1, s n a nm ininan.r. eis qni fortiL.as stabilire ^■o\^^^X imEjere(u? = If you should have 
 to c hoo-c between them by vour votes, will yon {would ijou) prefer hini etc..' Liv. 4, 49.-- 
 (iuk S h stis ad urbem IniatJ'aciuH exlU ( =/aa.7/i.) ; quid, s. plebs armSta tema^J 
 il ; 5-2.-.Si fraude, n casu Vejis incendium ortumsiU et fl^U"n^»^^,?^^'", f'^'' ^ " "1,^1* 
 ah<umat Fidenas inde aut Gabios Qumilun mmus ( = qn(zramm) ? lb. 5 5f .-Such con- 
 SrSn-hm ever, are extremeW rare, and wherever the predicate ol the thesis haa 
 oeotl.ose forms which are the slune both for the future and for the present su»xjunc- 
 ti e, thev should always he considered as snhjnnchves, and not as lutures, a^ • '^ya^i 
 i^V/ad ex turn vit;e, nou ab ea republica meUar qua ca.endura esje do earn. Cic B am. 
 «^ 4 -If he author, in conditional chiuses referring to time indefinite, means to m- 
 tiinaie that the eventuality assumed will never happen, the period is one of mn-reahty 
 jrroper, and takes hyitOthetiaU tenses (see E. 4(i, Obs. 4). 
 
 4. Suhjunctive in indefinite conditional periods. 
 
 Ob^ 15 iNDBFiNiTE CONDITIONAL PERIODS are those in which ftateraents conceniing 
 froierll truth- riHes. delinitions, general habits and customs, pertaimivj to all f^^nes htq 
 Si^e<l Iv conditionsjikewise pertainii.g to all times. Tiie predicates of such periods 
 ^i ..^^^^^^^^^^ indicative: as: ^quitas tollitur omnis. .i habSre siium 
 
 r iTnne nmi /i^^/ Cic Ofl' 2, 22. -In corpore « quid ejusmodi est quod rcbquo corpori 
 n ce u id ri secarlque paamur\ ut membrum aliqliod potius quam Uitum corpus intereat. 
 lb PI ilia \l-of^aVu,rsi^m^ sermonem nostrum imitatnr, si quis incessum, « qui8 
 I ilim aliqu<>d cor^Tds aut lin.'u.e erpriuat. «en. Const 17.-The P-^-ate «f^he clause 
 11111V be in the peufect indicative, according to p. 300, U. 4.3, ana p. diu, ubs. o, as 
 N J t^,e«. V-o^kW i/ d dens, n tact ton (est) dolOre corpus, ferre non jmsumus Cic 
 T wr o ll, H str o li i aulUim se mmit extra numerum. aut n versus pronuidtatus est 
 sv Uba\nurbJS^ ut* lo gior, ex.-ibU<nur et exploditur. lb. Par.3 2 2^i.-Comp. lb 
 Quinct 5 4'. C es. B. G. (i. 13? If the period contains a general rule, in d.dact.c ^ yle, the 
 r,- Stes of botli propos tions mav be in the future according to p. 3ol foil, f - »"<! p. 
 a-,4 UP^V or o e of the two predicates may be in tiie present indicative, while he ot er 
 f:1n Vh.^f m lire MS ' Eadeui est utiliias uniuscujusque et universOrum. quam si ad se quis- 
 IS in the finuie. as . ii.aucunsi mniiu.. j m f^norl (Kat-nuT-yntir i^i cave- 
 
 Im^as S'l-Vor 11.^^ of indetinite couditional periods to the temporal bi- 
 
 clauses (^•i = whenever), see li. 47, Obs. 4. ^,.r«^n ,-„ 
 
 Ons. If.. Indefinite conditional periods take the subjunctive (presenter perfect) in 
 
 ^'' 4*'!\''?hl' nVldVc'unf the clause is represented as improf^ahle. or as a rare ^ni^eoccep. 
 
 ;rt ?' ^<u sr,i^^ imi-i do oculi peccent (rare and exceptional), tameii inest in ei^ ms 
 ^'^ V r;7niv -2 V -AViS^ noil dt molesTus, tamen est miserrimum, 
 
 (Which the author ^•'"«'•.•"^^d, «.^,f„ «: f, f ,f A ;. fo ^iquence, the predicate of the clause 
 condition must be conceived -^^.^''^^'^V V.. le oat mSr e^^^^^ plurimos accusatOres 
 
 is place.l in the perfect guhjunctue ^Vvi ,.?f.^s iT R \ 2U 56 -Si-nificant canes et 
 
 t>i quandi) non d.portSti ex P»^'^,'.'"^;.^, "''^'',: '"lY.^^ take< a subjuictive, according to 
 Very Ireqiiently in such perKKi^ ibe ihes s ^^^;^''^^^^^^^^^ a,it si absurde 
 
712 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF DOUBTFUL REALITY. 
 
 713 
 
 Her 4,l.-Coc;mtioiiatarffi manca .i/ n ""/l^pctio rcrnm consequatur. Cic. Off. 1, 43- 
 
 Sini.'iis noil f/<V<^</^ ^ Nee s^i puMiu(/e/t/a.-2//' It). Ac. -^,4-1. • , •, 
 
 ] O t lu H,^b^^ tive I used i.. indetinite (not in definite) ,^om .tjon=U peno.^ 
 
 distin.tiOne .alia nnoquo i>,op>dsafnm.s i^\^ ^elonn-ntiam. non 
 
 «./;,/7/e/- (modeM statement, II >tead<> 5^/^''X7/ .2~ "often, however, indeliniie t>i- 
 
 etjcjQna Mdeatm. »'>-.}^"/«.'*.;»;., ',,',.';:^ -j .u _viiuif nns (orifina. r/i.vi totari/'m/'/r. Sen. 
 
 8t 
 
 ver 
 
 'jV'^n:!^ villeltu b V 44 - M^ioiw nui.Unuin v.let doctrlna, .isi ndnst,.^, 
 
 5. Suhjunctite of cxempUJicatum. 
 r»„^ 1- Pmiditinniilcl-m^e^of EXEMPLiFirATioNan; those in which f^ovnc parfindar 
 
 of tiH. c^u,.c. urn., V co,,cj.,ve.a »-:;;' ^™j;;\' V ',,^;^eJ;::l;lro;,al..•^i..<l. i^ "«-i 
 
 man no?;?^ O'// to him that it if» cold?).— >9i in mari jactflra/adfwcfa n^, equTne pretiO^i 
 potius iacitlram facial an servuli vilis ? Ih. 3, 23. ii9.—Si medicus ^c^o^ euni ip;:rOtum qui 
 ju-<ns sit viniini snmere. merariii!* gumplflrum, Ptatimqiie peniunim, nia^na s>l in 
 cuiiKl 11) N.l) 3, 31.— .St L'ladiiim quis apud te saiul niente deposnerif. repfif (if uwinii^n», 
 r.ddeVe pi-eri-linm /.?/, omciiim non reddne. Ih. Oft'. 3, -io.-Quid ? n Phalanm crudelem 
 tyraminm (tlie speaker does not mean the tyrant Phalaris, hnt A Phahins), yir bouiis, 
 lie ip>e !ri"ore contieiaiiir, vesiltn spoliare //cwi.', noniie /V/(ta/ .?' lb. Oil..., b, '2;>.— Lonip. 
 ('ie.V)tr. :i.\ 2«» ; lb. 3, 4, «hi : Or. 2. 3U, 1G2 ; Inv. 1, 10, 1)2 : ^rnll. '^l 53 : Oft. 3 6, 30.- 1 hese 
 periods are extremelv frequent in law-ca<uistry, and occur in innumerable passajres of 
 the jurists who re-ndarlv place the predicate of the thesis in the indicative, and that of 
 the clause in the suhjundice. as : Idem juris 6< si ciii post factum testameiitum u.xor lu 
 maniim coureulat, vel qmc in inarm fuit, vubat. Gaj. Inst. 2. V^.-Si procuiator rendtde- 
 lit et canrif emtnri. nuantur, an domino vel adversus dominum actio dan debeat. t.p. 
 Dig Kmti vend. 13, 2.5.— Scmietimes the writerscd the silver ajre and the jurists usea sub- 
 inncfive ])l»mrrect \\\ the clause (and a subjnnctive imperfect in the thesis), when the 
 classical auiliors would use the subjunctive of \\\i^ j^rfect and jrresent, as : Si pauca quia 
 tibi ^/o/m^w/ juirera. accepisse te dictres beneficium.. ..si pecuniam tibi aliquis doiiavtrit, 
 iH'iHticium rocjfti/.'. Sen. Ben.4.«.-A't sociu.s qua'dam ncizligt-nter in socieiate e(ii>i.^tt,\n 
 pU-ri>-(iue autem societilten auxi.^net. non compenHitur compendium cum ne<j:li<rentia. L ip. 
 \)\' i)ro Soc 17 2 2t).— If tlie Si-clause is neqaiive, si i>on and not nisi is used, unless the 
 condition is a secondary one, fl(/(/<^(/ to tlie main condition by which the ca-e is stated, as: 
 Hi navis non cum jittat porium, (luem ej;o probSvi, cum tempestfue pvgnem potius quam 
 eic ? C'ic. Plane. 39. — S'^ quid procurator citra mandaium in voliiptfitem fecit, permilien- 
 dum ei aiiferri, nv<l ratioiiem suintus istlus dominus admittit. I'lp.DiG. Mand. 10,10. 
 
 Obs 18. Periods of exemplification not rarely take the predicates of both proposi- 
 tions in the future-present or future-perfect, beiiii? treated like indetiiiite penotls refer- 
 riiKMo «-eneral rules (Ons. !.■)). as: .Si tvrannidein occupare, « |)atriam prodere conahi- 
 ^„,."( ^''conetur^ pater, sUehitin filius/ -Si nihil prqfHcf, accxsabif, minubtfur i-Wam. Lie. 
 Off 3 23 IK)— Si tabulam de nauirairio stnlius ar/r/^^/^n/', extorquebitnc cam sajuens y ih. 
 ;^ 2:^ S<) —Sometimes, when liieaction of the clause is anterior, a ;x^7;/<^c/! indtcafireis used 
 in the clause, and a present indicatire in the thesis: :Si Fabiai pecuuia iia legata eat a. 
 
 viro, A.i etc nihil t/e(!/e/M;'. Cic. Top. 14. 
 
 Ob"» 10 Often a period of exemplification is used in the protasis of a simile (See 
 Comparative clauses), in which instance />o//i propositions rejrularly take the sub.iunc- 
 TivK I'RK^FNT (or the Si-clause may also take a sul)junctive;>cr/'^c/), as : Ut enim nee do- 
 mus nee respublicaratioiiequadam et disciplina de>ij,niata nV/.a/(/r, « in ea nee recte 
 factis priemia ejrstent ulla. nee siii)plicia peccatis, sic mniidi divliia in homines moderaiio 
 profecto nulla est. si in eft diecrlmen nuMum est b<m5rum et malGrum. (.ic. >•. D.3, ^o. 
 rt "i in ordine stantis notos complQris viderimus, nihil nostra infersit utrum a summo, 
 an ah imo nomina .Orum dicere imipiannn^, item etc. Auct. Her. 3. 18.-If. m this instance, 
 the predicate of the comparative apodosis is a preterite, the two predicates of the con- 
 ditional period are placed in the imperfect (respectively plnperj^c) subjunctive, accord- 
 in" to the law of consecuti<»n, as : Ut enim. « aurum cm, quod esset muliilariam de- 
 fo.<sum, commoiistrare ?v//^//?, satis esse def,eret >i si-iia et notas ostenderem hxfnim, 
 '^ic has e<'o aitrunienir.rum i.otas demonstrdvi ubi sint. Cic. Or. 2, 41. -\ ery frequently Si- 
 clanses of exemplification are made dependent on parenthetica! comparative cmuses with 
 vt v't si = ui.< fur i„starne\\\h\<:\\ in this connecti<m, is also expressed by \si exempli 
 qvatia \ ' si vivhi causa \ comp. for inst. Cic. Off. 3. 12).. Such Si-clauses liKewise require 
 the present subjnnctiie, as: In hominem transfertur crimen (the charge), utsi accimturx^ 
 nui P Snlplcium se fateatur occidisse. et id jnssu consulum delendat. Auct. Her. 1,15, 
 S^-r/ 5 uis hoc relit ..stendere. eum qui pareiitcm necarit maximo supp icio esse dig- 
 r nm. Cic. Inv. 2. ].5.-Translatum est miod aliud conficit quam causa ^^''^''t^I'S^^ 
 cilem farhd auditorum. quum benevolentiam causa de^uleret. lb. 1 IS -ta qu^ "^l^! "?^ 
 ab humanitate discrepant, ut si qui in foro cantet. facile ^'PP5'-^;nt- IJ • % ^^Ue «f X 
 Aiipt Her •) •>« 4 • 2 27 43 ; 2, 29. 4»; : 3. 2, 2: C'lC. Inv. 1, 49, 92, and often. 1 tie use oi me 
 i^mire In mVcT. «•la\is;.s is oxtremH Vare.' as in Cic. Inv. 1. 50, 94, where some critics have 
 chantred the future in * ut si qui dej'endet ' into ' defttidal \ 
 
 G. lUstormtl conditional sulonncUve. 
 
 Ob« 20 ni-TouicAi. 8UB.irNCTivEs iu clauses of doubtful reality are those depending 
 on a p^eterite^iredicate. If these subjunctives are s.^f^bnque .^^^.^^^.^ ^^'.^^^^-^^^^ 
 imperf.ct or pluperfect; but In tlie instances mentioned ^o. i? and (7, they arc aiwajs 
 TUPKitvKrTs Thev occur in llie following instances: , . , j * 
 
 rifTcondiional period is oblique or virtually oblique, be.n- dependent on a 
 preterite itTstrcSlac^cordi.ig to the i.-neral mles on dependent subjunctive^ and ac- 
 SSrd u ' to the SI ecial rules p. m\ foil. If, iu this instance, the predicate of the subob- 
 
714 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 Unno m rlftii^c refer* to n time future In reL'.uxl to the firn^ f>})okeno/, n peculiar ollippis 
 jn En-liHh, Hlwti s be iiitr.ulure.l by 'in the event that \ >" ^ ' <^ase ha t c icmh 
 
 Rnn'iMhe\ .. m"^^^^ ruture-perlect;a8: Hie Ni 
 
 tvi»Ki. • '•sicomilia lion fienf, n urtft/n mrnam' C\c. Alt. 4,.i, .i.— t^arinauuiRu. imr m 
 
 IH drubale X VX^S.^^ ^1'^^^ ""'•'i'' ^mt (-.perahant .e ''•'''^'fj^ ?' 
 
 llH.Hiri oau^ iia M :[" ^^ ,.» enit, xi ex majorihus c^istns subvet.irttur. lb. 
 
 '. nnan. a^'lac in! Hec;.ndbbat(^accl.KlGb^^ cos q.md nalvos se tore ^''-^-jf]^^!^ 
 «!■.! hit n te-t-iuK-nto ut heresfilio suo irrai.dis pecuniie le-atnni 8.»lyeret, h qui natis 
 
 tlu pariiup t ui 111«^ H 1^ /?. l5Si: A.i ..ppuixnandam Llicani onuils beUi \jrls 
 
 Ui-clain*c > 1 mpHu I «Hi^^^ respectuni prii-iiiue R)eietati8 rem a'j(fre.<.<urux eiat 
 
 ituk^i e'tt> uurt ve'im?.rf.ct it .h. condili..nal period re vrs u> <\^^"i:' JJ^'^'Vl 
 
 ilJum poterat, et, n .iler'et urcinUi p.tent^. ^I^l'^f^/^^^/^^!;;:;; X^ v k a^^^ 
 
 IK .M» -ji —Necaciecertare Hannibal ausus, quia tanta pau( lait; ^'^ 7^/' ■'\. *.//.: i'.. 
 
 24 <=Numi(he /*rW« luis^i erant quia, n luce irefur.hn^U» P/*^^"7"'* „,..;,,(•,', u of the 
 
 f. 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF DOUBTLESS REALITY. 
 
 715 
 
 the thesi* is a preterite nof referrinjj to the future, hut to the time spoken of, as : Qua 
 quidem tempore, etiannd ille die?: vitie finem uiihi allaturus esset, satis ma^aiam cej^ram 
 fnutiim quiim vos etc. Cic. Phil. 6, 1, 2*. 
 
 ('. Prriod!" of viKTiTAi. NoN-iiKAi.iTY ate sometimc« assigned to an indefinite past 
 TIME, if the p'Tf^oii to whom they n-fer wa;* dead at the speaker's time, and the tact 
 as.<uined by fiction vun/ have happened at any time of his life. In this instance both 
 piopoj^itions require the impeukect subjinctive, exactly coiTospondiui: to the present 
 t^ubjuiictive in thos»; periods of virtual non-reality which refer to time altoirether indefi- 
 nite (C)Ks. 13). Siicii periods require their predicates in W\Qjilupe,rfect in Enoflish, a lit- 
 eral traiihlaiion of which would he faulty, as: Ciir et Camillus dderet si hiec post tre- 
 cenios et quinquaginta fere annos eveiiiaia 7;w/(Irf/; et etro ddeavi si ad decern millia 
 auiiOrum «'eiitem aliquam uri)e nostra potitflrnm put^mf Quia etc. ; What is the reason 
 that Cainiliiis would have been rp-iened, had he believed that this would happen etc. : and 
 why would f be sorry if etc. ? Because etc. Cic. Tu<c. 1, 37t. [Camillus niif/ht liave thouirht 
 go at any time of his life. But the assumption is a mere Jicdon, no question beino^ 
 rai-^ed about its reality or non-reality ; hence the period is virtmUly non-real in regard 
 to past indeflnlte time. If it referred to time alt(»gether indefinite, it would require the 
 subjunctive present, the same as the second conditi(mal period 'cur eiro dolearn si pu- 
 ^^/;i']._De Ciesare ipso.<fi 7?/flp;<pr^*' quidnam egisset in urbe et in togS, leges multas 
 ni^miidli-el se et pneclSras tulisse, chin)irrapha vero non in suis actis ducertt. lb, Pinl. 
 1 7 18- //a/i wo'^as-yl-f J Caisar etc., he tvould have answered etc. [The author does not 
 m.-an to say that Ciesar, who was dead at the tim<;, had not been asked as stated. But 
 the assumption of this fact is a mere Jidinti ; hence the period is virtually non-iealy 
 which had Ciesar been living would have required jrresent subjunctives].— Si L. Mum- 
 miusalitinem islorum rit/?/*-/, inatellionem Corinthium cupidissime tractantem, qumn 
 ip<e totani Corinthum ccmtempsisset, utrum ilium civem excellentem, an atriensem dili- 
 .'ent.m i)Ui(ir(tf lb. Par..';, 2. 38.— Ciesar si petetet, non quicquam proflceret 'Even ^l 
 Cmt^ar hail asked him {i. e. the singer Tigellius, who was dead at the time), he would 
 not have -ucceded. llor. Sat. 1, 3, 4.— In the same way indefinite conditional peuiods, 
 which accordiii"- to Obs. l»i, 4-C7, would require th^i pre'<ent subjunctive, take the tinpe?'- 
 ftct subjiinctive"if confined to ;;a.>7 indefinite time, as : Quod eiiim usu non veiji51)at. de 
 *e<» si quis le<>-em aut judicium constituerel, n(m tarn prohibGre videretur quam admonGre; 
 If anv one (in the times of our ancestors) would have made a law about thiiiirs that were 
 not really transpiriuir. he would have seemed etc. Cic. Tall. 4, 9. [This period, if refer- 
 rir«» to the future as well as to the past, would have required a subjunctive present ac- 
 cording to Oiis. l«i, A and C. Hence the imperfect is used with reference to past time, since 
 a law of this kind trnqht have been proposed at any time.]— The condition-il periods of 
 ihis kind pass ever into those conditional periods of non-reality mentioned li. 4b, Ubs. 11, 
 from which they are onlv distiu'juished by the fact that in the latter the tiction assumed 
 as re il i< impos'sil.Ie, while in the former tlie real occurrence of the fiction is not excluded. 
 
 D. For the use of the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive in bi-clauses denoting re- 
 peated and contingent action, see p. 331, No. b and c. 
 
 II. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF DOUBTLESS REALITY. 
 Bern. 45. The form of a conditional clause is frequently used when 
 there is no doubt about the reality of the factexpnssed in the clause. Such 
 clauses aUcaiiH take their predicates in the indicative, i^enerally in the 
 present, or jlerfect ; never in the future ; rarely in the impertect, or plu- 
 l)erfect since the general rules about the use of these two tenses can 
 rarely be applied ^o clauses of this kind. The thesis may be in any 
 tense or mood required by its relation to the other parts ot the discourse, 
 but sienerally is in the present indicative or future. Negative conditional 
 clauses of doubtless reality are always introduced by si non, never by 
 
 irid or ni. 
 
 '~*~Very rarely clauses of this kind take the pluperfect subjunctive, with the force of a 
 future-uerf.-ct referring to a past time, instead of to the lime of the speaker : as : i^iime- 
 ins non nisi vicisstnt Ilomini, sed nisi helium e/essissent, maaere m regno suo non po- 
 
 "I'ivQiiNEH incorrectly rendewi this passage ' Why should Camillus have gi-ieved ', which 
 would iui|)ly that Camillas ouqhl not to have grieved, whereas the author mtans to say 
 that Caiuillus's <;rief would be le-itimate.-Others (lor inst. the author of tlie Piibl. bch. 
 Gr. p. 393) take this passage ai^hi/pothefical, adding that the pluperlect is not used because 
 the fact belongs to a 'Jloudng past time '. 
 
716 
 
 CONDITION.\L CL.VUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL PERIODS OF NON-REALITY. 
 
 717 
 
 OCS.1. conditional clansos of c.onhtl^^ renllty arc cn.plo^^^ tho^s 
 
 as an inftreuce ^vlnch tlu' f<p^(ihr niakrs f.oin a lact a.Hi.in^ .^ ^^ ^ ^,^ 
 
 ynavt'»- in oraiiono cm ppt'cl 
 ih 3, v.), l'.> : ^^eii- Const. 5. r,nrf>r)i7rtr fact apsertod by the author. 
 
 2 To represent a ^-eneral truth ;^-a proof f «^ « ^^^.^^ ^*^ '^^^^ i^rrfio^/ar a. to the 
 
 Such conclinonal iHMiods «'-^; '"f';^;;^''',, ^ Xo.n^^^^ q""m (^ M.-fHum tarn 
 thesi-. as : ,si pietftii sumnui //t//'/r/"/a l.ius ^^^ cu jh u •■■ ,. «, ^^_^*. ^,.,,..^tjtt«' esse 
 
 Phil 2,41, 144. , ,,„.,1, ,,,„ f,-,-(.o of Ouia-cianses to represent 
 
 OBS. 3. IVculiar is the use of ^'-^l'"^'■^'^^;;*^ ^^T^t'tVa n the thesis ^houM he 
 
 the factor .lu-clau-e as b.-.n^' "^ retj^son hv the iacl^ s^^^^ ,„vce(lini,' 
 
 inferred from it. The thesis is always /-.^^^/^^^^^^^ H generally 
 
 this construction the causal relation becomes identical with the concessive relation ; 
 h.-nce both, a Qnia-clause (accordinsr to p. 6W), or an Etsi-clause may often take the 
 t)l-ice of euch a Si-elause; as: .Vo;;. d tibi AuW profi/it. semper proderit. Uc. Phii. », 4, 
 io_Von, ^.i Opimiflm defeudi^fijcnrco te isti bonum civem putal)uut. lb. Or. 2.40.— 
 Neom enim. si ha-e barlmria loreiisis dnt locum vel vitiosissimis orat..ribns, iccirco nos 
 hoc ouod qniPiimus, omittC'iuns. Ih. -[.-HS-Xefine enim. « tuie res -estie cet.roriim 
 lau(iii'us ()l)srnriiJltem aTtulCriint. iccirco Pompeji memonam amisimus Ih. Dej. 4, 12. 
 -\fc .siciipitis dnlurem fMcit, inutilis h.miinihns sol e-t. Quint. 5. tO, S2.-Som.;times 
 ^rirelv) poti f«.llo\vs the Si-rlanse, as: Si vcnium meretnr qui imprtldens nocuit, wwi 
 inerCtur premium qui imprOdens prr.fuit. Quint. 5, 10, 78 -Sonietin.es Ulico or continuo 
 < added ill the thesis», whifh adverhs (bein- redundant in th.- En-hsh conception) refer 
 to the neo'ation, intimatiuir ihat the conclusion expressed in the thesis should not be 
 ' nishlv ' o^r • immediatfly ' made as : XfC. H oinne enuntiatum ant verum aut faisiim est, 
 seonitiir iflico esse c:iusas immutabilTs qu;c prohil)eant quicquam secus cadere atque 
 rn-nrum sit Cic Fat 12,28. Sed n hoe in Saserntr fiiiido in Gallia satis/^a/, mn cori- 
 tin>m idem 'in aj-ro Lijrustico montano. Varr. R. K. 1. 18.-Sometimes a Quia-clanse is 
 cuordii.aied with such a Si-clause, as: Nec.fjmn nusquamerat scriptum ut contra omnTs 
 ho<iiuncopias in ponte uniis assisteret, a terirOque poi.tem interscindi juliSret, tc<trco 
 niinu<Co(litem il'um rem sr.-ssisse tantam fortitudinis le<;e putabimus: nec,n reirnante 
 L Tarouinio nulla erat Honne lex scripta do stiipris, iccirco non contra illam le-em 
 sempiternam Sex. Tarquinius vim Lucretia; attulit. Cic. Leg. 2, 4. -In the following 
 ni-sa-rc an Ktsi-clause is used in place of a Si-clause: Quare non, etsi c oquentissimns 
 Alhenis Pcricle-, idemque in ea civitate plnrimos annos princ-ps congihi publici tint, 
 iccirco .j.isdem h<.minis utque artis utr.que facultas exiMimai.da est. J.)C- Or. 1 50.- 
 Sometimes tliis form of Si-clauses is appli-d to clauses of doubtM rfaltfy, as: ^€C. si 
 no o/"/a^'r. propfer.a etiam permittitur. Cic. Phil. 18. (5, ]^--^jc tdeo i^mhs minus urere 
 potesr si in materiam incidit inviolabilem lUimmis. Sen. Pen. 5,5. Compare those cautal 
 clauses after a negation, which require the indicative p. t/Jl, D. 
 
 in. CONDITIONAL PERIODS OF NON-REALITY. 
 
 Bern. 4ft. Cotidition.il clauses of non-realtty contain actions which 
 the 'jpcakcr, hy ticlion, assunies as occiirrini;- at the time spoken of, 
 althoiin-h tliry^lo not, or di<l not, in reality, occur at that time; the thesis 
 cxtire^sin"^ the conscfiuence of tlie action if axmmed m real. The pred- 
 icates of both propositions are reprulaily in the subjunctive, generally 
 of the TMPKKFECT or PLUPERFECT, but in certain instances ot the ppes- 
 FNT or PERFECT (Obs. 0)- Sometimes the predicate of the them (not 
 timt of the rlaniu') assumes the indicative of a preterite tense. 
 Clan^^es of non-reality ^villl the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive, or 
 with the indicative of a i)reterite tense are called hypothetical clauses 
 (HYr<)TiiESEs), and the moods used in them are called hypothetical 
 
 MOODS*. 
 
 Ob« 1 If the action of the Si-clause is non-real, the action of the thesis is likcAvise 
 non-real' unh-ss si is used with the force uUtiamd, as: Qui m (=etiamsi) rcliquis flajr,- 
 tii: se absHnG.e;>o/./..>W(h,,t he could not; hence ' P'^l^'^'^'^' ^ ^^:;iy^^^^^J^ 
 Ob hoclacium dijinum ilium onini i^ixnnx puturan Uhe ^I'^^H''^^^ !>, i J t^u-.f « 
 whe her the ondftion exists or not, hence putrmm is real, but nevertheless takes a 
 
 V o » ei c d tcn< • see Ihm. 47. Obs. 1-8). Cic. Phil. 13, 8, 17. But: .^i quam niedecinam 
 
 V ,7 . / .1 . I 'lo»of fi>'<l a reme.lv ; hence non-rml), tihi eandera mttterar^ (I do riot 
 
 s . < h M.ce wiff.r.r. is likewis.- r.o.-rea/). Ih. Fam. 0, 12,5.-Such Paj^f^^s as the lol- 
 
 h.wiii-arenotiu eontlict with tins rule :_^Quulnam_tii^2rovs^2jiuM;t£t^>^f^/_Ln. 3,5, 
 
 * The term ' hypothe1ical\ as denotin- non-reality in this specific ^c":?.' '*^,}',P^*" f;» 
 
 obicction since -eiMM-allv ' /n/p'^f/t^ficar is used as a synonym ot ^conditional But 
 
 wh le Ok h supertluous and objectionable to use two perfectly synonymous terms 
 
 o de- M ate he t=mie idea, we -reativ need a specific term for this class ol clauses of 
 
 , -refli V in ord.r to avoid The cnstant repetition of circumlocutions when these 
 • ■ isrs e'to he desi-Miate.l. Hence we have thou-lit it best to appropria e a useless 
 s , o nvm t< a mor; sp.-citie mV-aniutr. This liherty is certainly far less ohject.oiiable 
 than tl.e practice of many ^-ammanans who aPP^opruite the ^eneraU 
 tnd 'anodo-i-' which have no svnonvms in their general meaning:, to the sptc no 
 Sijnifk-iHm.s of ' conditional clause ' aiul ' thesi. ', where they are ru>t uecded, and of leu 
 are iu conjiicl with their real signification. 
 
718 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL PERIODS OF NON-KEALITY. 
 
 719 
 
 U. Here ^ riicere^ If taken in .the rru^^;-:^^,^^^^:^:^^^ pl^ON 
 
 m.'an. ' what ^^'onldheyouro,nmon^^h^^^^^^^^^^ K te/im/ moo<i8 (.ubjuiiciive 
 
 OBs^ Ao English lan,ua.e docs not distinguish ^;^^^^yj^^::^;^::Ptj;::^t^^; 
 
 th.Mcal clauses of non-reality, bnt >"^ !t.^;;;!."!';^\^' " V r "/^m^^ ' / / /ia<i\ 'M 
 o\ the predicates, namely tje mibjuncuve ol the , n ter M^ ^^^^,,j 
 
 .,f'Uie preterite or pluperfect (.ro.//(/, ^.['l/TiOr^^^^^^^^^ xvh 'rea. he Latin hin-ua-e 
 even used iu P^'io'^t^'f ^'^''''l"'! I:,^?' ^^.f fj'jn f,?^ nonreality by the 
 
 ngularlv distin-uishes hypothetical Ih "o « [ ;'"•'/''*:' \.',,(.^.^ ,v».ere usa-e admit» a 
 ;:.amn.atical f<.nn ot .he pr.-d.cat.^j ,X^' ,J \,; ,/", i Iv h pothetical with an ^^ 
 clu.ice between tlK•seform-J(^eep 7.1 lU^^^ , ^..^^ ^.^.r.^), or for 
 
 live form are eu her directly used i P'\''^^\/; J ,^^'; "^f^^A^ „, ne-aiive seutencet., but 
 certai.i rhetorical p.irposes ''^f^^f'^J'^Jf^^'^'^^^^^ oHhe action, a^: E-o, ^t 
 
 always in^plyin,- the spc-aker « \;i^ll'^^^^^:ZnM^^^^ Cic. Att. 8. 1. 4. Here 
 
 Homi.um capere jxj.s.'^em, ^^ ^am on:^ is tp i^^^^^^^^^ respectively attlrmative, ^^en- 
 
 botli proposal. ions may ''9 ,^»'ec/'y„^' ' ',7.V! h .' ^w"/ ca/ ^o/! sleep).-^(^u ^^ «H- 
 
 tencei ( = / annoy ymi ^v.tb so lo..- le t^n", ^.X' .^"^ ^^.^^^ b. v\u. 4, 2-2.^ Here, 
 cit, ita sentVet.qind (-nihil) in ei eum 7 /, > '/ *'''^"'/j;' . ,,.,,5,;n,.e Uie thesis merely 
 oniy the Si-dause can be «I'^ect y c.mnjre ;"t^^.,^^J ,7 ^'V.,ntr ary o n * He do... r.ot 
 
 imUinnxj the authorV sen iment h t he ..a unu^^^ patricius dice; 
 
 mean wliat he says ; else there nnouUI be no "^'^^'^.^^^^^^^^ f,^,,t/ liany I'airi- 
 
 ret ' AIT OMNIA AcriPiTE, Aur N.ini. KKKo . '1'^ /^ ! '"^/,.^ , , ' Vhich t-noiie) of vou 
 clan wuuhl say, «Either accept ^^'''Jtl'"'^'; «;;,Ij'\^,^ ^;/^,^;/^.; ,"^^ j,, ., ..J^a- 
 
 would bear i. ? Liv. 0, 40. Here the Pr^'Po^Hio s \' ^''^^^^'^^.'^ ^^f^V u, unplv that no 
 
 If, (,n the contrary, the author doe- not '*;'="' /"■^''^.V^^'tcrnmis. however impo-si- 
 
 CMC. Att. S. 15, 3.-Ad.uH'rete video ;>v^^^^^^^^^^^ he H not io n- t,. produce books, 
 
 theticals are used, b(rcause the speaker >m lic>^ uUnncnt v the tlTesis n hvpo.h.tical 
 althoULTh he mlnhl direct y fulfil th.s ^^^ ^ ''' i;;;,c v^^^^ :iHl,-e<iuivalent 
 
 periods takes the form of an luterro-r tne .^ ' J"f \''^.';;,^,^'rrex^^^^^^^^ «'hI 
 
 io a nej^tive. ^^^'^^'^^^^f^^Z u ^ ro/ ^?'w E pfcurCMun e^sse, .1 pnM- 
 luMice always are v.rtiallyr^ma/'a.a^^^^^^ p,event me (but in reality very 
 
 re/n quie ille diceret? Cic. h ,n. 1, H , - f^"J , ,-j,i i ■ nnrove etc Similar is the re ation 
 much prevents me) from beint; an Epicurean i.d I ' P^"^ ^\,^^ ^j^V^is is in a hypothetical 
 of an ironical affirnu^ion which means ' ^^^»^^- "^ ,*; ^^^'f^'?,^ ..Vitsirram- 
 
 mood it^ ^^^^>Z'^uTT^t^S^U^d^^iftr^^^^ fn.stra fu.mina miff.nf/ 
 
 if he meant tointiiuaie this. • • • ^„ ,,^ „wv,iri 
 
 which niH would be correct, and is quite often thns used by Cicero, as : Dtcfiremquse 
 aniea lutQra dixissem, m t>;fr<^r ne ex eventis Angare vidtrer. Cic. Fain. 6. G. H. -C^nod 
 ni navifrirevK ipse scriberem. lb. 12, -23. 2. -Stat im Arpluum irem, ni te in lormiSno 
 ev>peciari lidSrem.. lb. Att. 2, 14, 2.-In Livy nt occurs in this sense in nearly a hundred 
 pa^saL'es, bein;; more frequently used than both H /i/?/i and uld tojrether. Livy jrenerally 
 
 «^...v.. proeul w//>7X.~.. , ,. ^ . . -.-,,-, I o<i f* 
 
 Komani, Jii clamor ab eis qui erant extra arcem sublatus, omnia Mmajtcutm. lb. JM, b'^. 
 
 OB.S. 4. All p«?riods of non-reality are either definite (particular) or indefinite, in the 
 pame sense, as tiicM- express^ions are taken in periods of doubtful and doubi less reality 
 (K 44, Ons 15). Indetinite conditional periods are considered as hijpothetical if they 
 are as^uuled contrary to InitU, i. e. contrary to a fact holdini,' K«od in all .nm^-s, a^^J ^» 
 semper optima tenere ;xw.s^//«w^, baud sane consilio multum efjeiemiis. Cic. 1 .0. 2;j, 89. 
 It is not necessarv that the^'eneral lacts contained in i*uch periods should be represented 
 as ab>olutely imp"os.-ible ; it is enouirh if the author represents the assumption as con- 
 trary to geutrai experieni e, as: Quodxi in secundis rebus bonam qiioque meiiteni darent 
 dei.'non ea holum qua' (.'venissent, sed etiam ea quie evcnire possent reputaihnvx. Liv. 
 ;iO ;iO.— A hypothetical period may be indefinite in the hypothesis, and detinite (particiiiar) 
 in'the thesi- as : QoodH in hello dari \iearii follrent, libenter me j)ro D. Bruto inclildi 
 Vdteier. Cic. I'hil. 12.2.4. The rules about the use of hypothetical or non-hypothetical 
 moods iu indefinite periods of non-nahty are the same as those for particular condi- 
 tional periods of non-realitv. Only when indefinite periods of this kind are used in cer- 
 tain lorms of sylloj,'isms, a'freer treatment of mood and tense is admiited. See Obs. 15. 
 
 Obs 5. The use of mood and tense in periods of non-reality is re^rulated by the 
 following' rule: If the predicate of either, or of both, of the two propositions refers to a 
 \\mc present or future in ngard to the moment of speaking, it takes the imi'erfkct SL;n- 
 jiNcTtvK. corre-^pondingto the indicative, subjunctive, or potential mood of the preterite 
 Tense in En-lisli ; but if the predicate, as above, refers to a past time, it takes the plu- 
 j'KKKECT sriijiTNCTivK, coiTespondini: to the indicative and j)otential moods of the same 
 len^e in English. To these rules tliere are several exceptions, referring 1) to the use 
 of the NON-HYi'oTHETiCAi> MOODS, 2) to the Use of an i.mpki{FKCt in i)lace of a plupek- 
 FKCT- and :\) to the use of the indicative of th(! three preterite tenses, and ahso some- 
 times of the present and future. These exceptions difler according to the relation of 
 the two predicates to the time of the speakeii. Hence the following instances must 
 be disiin"ui^hed : 1) Both i)redieates referring to i)resent or future time ; 2) both predi- 
 cate-' referriu"' to the past ; 8) one of the two predicates referring to the present or luture, 
 and the oiher"'to the past.— Sometimes in the the sis of a hypothetical clause the flmie 
 sion of the contrarv o? the thesis, and si non a consequence ot a negative assumption ". 
 But iu clauses of lion-reality fjoth of these alternatives coincide and include each other, 
 wtii'ch is the reason tliat the Latin uses tiUi and si non without distincti(m in these 
 clauses, a.-: Cwdcr^in te, nifi inusceier. Sen. Ira. 1, 15 ; ='My l)eing angry <-aT/*/</c*' my 
 strikiu" you "• but also =' mv not being angrv (as assum<d) would iiave the consequeiice 
 that I would strike you ". Hand tries to establish his theory by the h»llowin_' example : 
 '(hneco-'itatiort non incidisxtt. mm labonlrem ; Had this consideration not arisen in 
 me, IwoiTldnot l)eindi>tress'. Cic. Att. 13.32. llA.NDsays. "It would have been 'absukd 
 to use in tliis sentence the conjunction //m", which is a very palpable mistake, nccording 
 to Hand's own theory, si-ice the s.-nteiice evidently means : *Tlie 7Wf happmmg oi tins 
 con>iderati..n would have excluded my distress '. Tims ni.n is used in the lollowing 
 
 * The loHowinir enumeration of ]>art of the passages in which m is used «ith ttie 
 
 IX, 14 (twice). 32. 40. 41 42; x.Ml 15.30.37.41.4.-): xxu, 22 ; xxiii,l. 14; xxv 3«; xxvi, 
 21) : xxvii. 42; xxviii. 15. 22. 30: xxix. 2. <i. 10: xxx. 18 (three tlme^) ; xxxi, 43; xxxiii,5. 
 17.25; xxxiv, 2.s.2!).H2; xxxv. 1 ; xi.ii, 43. -Tacitus uses «i in the saii.e way as Livy.— 
 For the anteclas-ical use of in in clauses of non-reality, coiup. Plant. Cist. 2,3,81; Iseua 
 6, 2, 3S; Trin. 1,1,3; Merc. 3, 4, 4 ; Aul. 3, 5, 49 ; 4, 6, 3 ; 4, 10, 12 ; Ter. Hec. 2, 1, 23. 
 
720 
 
 CONDmONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL TERIODS OF NON-KEALITY. 
 
 721 
 
 verb or the predicate i. elliptlonlly .ornitted as : O .tuItiHam, nisi mea major CBset, 
 nn'j'darem ( =qu» singvlans e.sstt, nin etc.). ( ic.Fam. 12, o. 1. 
 
 1 Voods in periods of non-r^nUt;i with both pmlirates referring to the Pres- 
 ent or Future. 
 
 0„,. 6. All ,hehypo,h.,ica, P-lnd. in which both prop^,U^^^^^^ 
 to ih.. ,„<v,k,T. (,r u, in,l,-l,niie >!'"'; ''"' "'J J " '> K^lVr k. I l)Lri.NiTKrTiME with 
 
 sapei-ef Anto..ia.; Even tluit con.i>irac.v ['X^'/i'^'^'^^^^ 
 
 r?m'/.s- cum .H<>"iii"»*- ^'^- "^^ ^J'p^f VV'^ 4 J .2 Defimtk timk with nk(;ativk 
 ta<^»e• ^•tant resistcndnm est. Cic 1 nil. li, A 4.— *• Vr.; -^n In Mnnolhis nisi liidoa 
 cf.xis'Ks; Non ,.fere,n pacem ^'^^V^'l/l^-j/^f [-«1^ ^-^J; -'^^^^^ 
 
 •.^^'^^'"hoi i,..".n «onus ora.ioni, yl. hjyu. loc^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 l:^:P.;.i«»«aliacl.,,inrao,_c..,inraU.^ 
 
 can consitler death an evil, who thus praises etc.*). 
 OB. 7..ir a hypo,,,Hi.... a..,n,p,i,,n ..r..r. .0 ,h^ 
 
 
 ^all..JUl,^ -ii, -ii.— v^""' """." ".""• "V,- »»» m « s-j nni •indiGrunt \•\l\^^s\ e<seni i 
 
 vos hnrtarer, milites, ,v2 cmn aruia..^. ' Vrj; V fc Ut i* a io te ui)ore ;v>7K)/*vr/r//.N- «.s'^fw. 
 paull.un loci mihi nt ei. re.i.on.lerem dares ^^^n^^a^^^ ..^^^.^^_ 
 
 Cio. Fin. 4. 2-.'.- Hoc lem.o ammo P<'''^''-r'^J'}*lJ^^\'^'^^^^^^^ ad Ili^^panien- 
 
 Sall.Ju<;.31,21.-Consi\i.Mn ..tud t,mc ^ff/ l^'i'^f ^^^ n i audiG u viiiOsi 6.w^^ 
 
 dt-fi- 
 the 
 iiite rutiire, oramary im/>tnfr, '•';</'"^' '■,;-, ";:» V»,,. nn-^ont time'i- meant, as: Ea nnllo 
 connection make, it.clear .liat f f"'" ;'' -^"^ ^ eri ir ? " n e -le r bv the connection 
 mod.> /;o..sym.^ilGre siade-o^em ^!^- '\^ : ' ;/,^;/„,.,.Vi /-^ v lich the author refused to attend. 
 
 Cftre? Liv. 6,40. 
 
 inite time, while periods of virtual non-realitv can only refer to indefinite time. This 
 ditr.-rence is best pcen in the following? passa'j:e: Nam si forte qucerer'etur quae esset ars 
 impenitOris, constitncndum pnfarem ])rincipio quis es-^et imperator... ; sin autem qvcB- 
 7>>7?//»>/.<quis esset is qui ad reinpiiblicam moderandam usum et scientiam coiituhsset, 
 dt'liinrrtn hoc modo:..-6'i;? autem qncereretitr qnisnam jiirisconsultua verus nominarStur, 
 eilm dicereni qui etc....\tqne ul jam ad leviOra artium studia veniam, si musicus, si 
 oTainmaticus si poeta nuceratur, jw^sim «imiliter explicflre. ..OratOrem autem. qiioniam 
 de eo qmrrimifs, equitlem etc. Cic. Or. 1. 48 foil. The transition from the imperfects 
 qucererUnr. qucerer?tnus etc. in the first three periods, to the pr«*sent qnoiratur in the 
 fourth has ])erplexed the j^rammarians. Kuhner considers all the lour periods as 
 ontinary conditional periods (i. e. of doubtful reality), pronouncing the use of the 
 imperfects as anomalous, and the present in the fourth period as normal. The author 
 of the Publ. Sch. Gr. (p. :wn says: " The transition fro7n imperfect to present is deter- 
 viin&d bi/ no potential dv^fificfion between the hypotheses, thoufjh the vse oj examples to 
 ,nnn the first three may have led Cicero to choose the imperfect form as more man- 
 
 con 
 
 AOEARi.K (')7'or that purjxtsey The fact is that the tirst three periods with impertects 
 are \'cnuin«'"^ hypothetical periods, referring to definite time, namely to the moment of 
 
 Boeakiii", while the fourth is a period of virtual non-reality, referring to indefinite time 
 The author, discussins: the requirements of an orator, says in the first three periods: 'If 
 my object in the present treatise were (=*i qHcrrerltar) the art of a soldier, of a sta*"" 
 man. of a jurist {which it ivas not), I would define in this way etc. These assumpti 
 l>ein"- evidently contrary to fact, hvi)othetical moods were required. In the foi 
 
 of a states- 
 
 ons 
 
 jfourth 
 
 tlie predicate ' possim explicdre', which certainly is not contrary to reality. 
 
 Obs 9 In the following; Instances, the presekt sub.junctive is used in periods of 
 non-realitv: 1) In antf.claspical language often, and sometimes in the poets, the pre^s- 
 ent subjunctive is used with the force of an imperfect subjunctive (Obs. 10).— 2) If 
 the assumed fact is a suPEUNATfRAL act (Obs. 11).— 3) If the predicate is a verbum 
 sENTiEvm with an object denotini; another action (Obs. 12).— 4) If the assumed fact is 
 the speaker's own act, the performance of which depends on his will (Obs. 13).— 5) If 
 si has the force of etiamsi [Obs. 14).— (i) If the assumed act is a link in certain kinds of 
 
 SYLLOGISMS (OBS. 15). 
 
 Obs. 10. The anteclassical comics use the subjunctive of the present in strictly 
 hvp«)lhetical periods ottener than the imperfect subjunctive, as: Vocemte ad coenatn. 
 vhi e>'omet cone7n foris; I would invite you to dinner (but I do iwt), did I not myself 
 dine abroad il do dine abroad). Plant. Stich. 2, 1, .36. Compare with: E<?omet ducmrem 
 
 " " ■' ^ ""■' Neque quid me ores cogitas; 
 
 I, vi mi eseet ad forum negotiiun. lb. Most. 3, 2, 160.— 
 I St coqites, renntta--^ yAvn. me ontrSre injuriis. Ter. And. 
 
 eum 
 
 ^\•M\\ sterol. ^. ., , . ^ , , - ., 
 
 alere jm'ntn inisericordia: I would feel pity, could I feed my famijy on pity 
 
 5. 1, l.—Muereat, si familiaiu 
 
 Plant. 
 
 Pseud 1 3. 55 —Si liercle haheam (nummum), ]x>llicear Itibens ; Had I any money (but I 
 have noi), I wouM willingly i)romi<c it (but I do not). lb. Ep. 3, 1, 12.— A'i mala sies, 
 quod viro esse odio videas, lute tibi odio //a6<=a>^ ; Were you not bad, you would hate 
 what you see is hateful to your husband. lb. Men. 1, 2, X.—Dicam, si videam tibi esse 
 otium lb Merc. 2, 2. 15.— (^lia, si e<,'o emortuos sim, AthSnis te sit nemo nequior. lb. 
 P<.im1 1 3 1-jn— Tii-si hic*t^ aliter\sv///irt.s\- Were you in my place (but you are not), 
 you would think otherwise (but vou do not). Ter. And. 2, 1, 10.*— Poets sometimes 
 U'-e the imperfect snbjnnctive in the thesis, and the present subjunctive in the hypoth- 
 esis as: Et /•rt<:f7•«^ A'i non iera repulsa .vo/^^/*/. Tib. 1, 8, 22. So: Compella rem Qcro 
 illam, ni inefitam ne desinat etc. Plant. Aul. 3. 5, 49.— Sometimes the poets even use 
 pre-ent subjunctives in pi ice oi pluperfect subjunctives, as: Spatia si plura svpersint, 
 tninoat prior, ambiiruumve relinqmt {-transisiet prior, ambiguumve reliquisset cer- 
 tilmen.) Virg. Mu. 5, 325. 
 
 Obs 11. If the lact assumed in the hvpothesis is a fiction referring to supernatural 
 acts the period must take hypofheticat moods when the author means to deny the 
 assumed possibility, and the th esis expresses a conseq ucncejikcwis e denied in reirard 
 ^* MArrvTo~places this passaire in the same category as tlie periods of non-reality 
 nientitmed Obs. 11, saying that the present subjunctive must be used in this sentence, 
 which is an evident mistake. The above-cited passa-jre is very difterent from the class 
 of periods considered iu Obs.' 11; for the assumption ' Were. yo»i in my circumstances 
 is not contrary to the laws of nature, but contrary to fact, which is the very reason that 
 it \»hymtheficnl, and would take an imperfect subjunctive in classical style Compare 
 tiie similar passage of Cato, quoted by Itui'iN. Figur. p. 204: iSi vos m eo loco es&etts, 
 quid aliud/ac<;re/iif.^ 
 
722 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL PERIODS OF NON-REALITY. 
 
 723 
 
 to itH reality as: QuodH omnia nobis q.ue ad virt.im pprtinont, quasi virpilta dhlna 
 
 ^;^ ,^^^^.^, '--i;x;2;';r?';c ^oS^'r ^rsr o.n>;c i^:^ 'i:;^':xi;^r^nt 
 
 nemo ad/n^ret «'^amr;^^^^^^ viiorc' ^i proxiini n.e.ubri vliletud.ne.u «d .e tra(lnxi..et. 
 hnhrrft \\i pus^e putaut k. Naicrt ei P^"-^'"' ., .. .. r, _uut if imnossib o facts ot 
 
 «•itriril* The KUt riClJlIl!* v\ OlIKl il«-l»i I » ^ J"" "' J _ . , . a ii;„ r'.i» l U l''iMnii!iri> ■ 
 
 'lh- 'V, 3 Ih..c « p.. n^lo,i„ai,;r, .">"."■ •"'..em re <^.W / «i-io"--;.. lutu^ i .l.:cum 
 
 Liv 
 
 pnpn 
 
 V. 5, 4 Coin pan . Y'[2^^j^^\\f ,.Jii in »; 12 -Ouantnui inf,emU<mnt patrt'>? (ances- 
 populi R..in:lni .'^'^^'''{^'■'^'^'^f •'_<-';;• J. *^;„^^^^^^^^^ W — Si Ueiis te t/./e/rof/e^ quid 
 
 re^miideaxf Cic. Ac. 2, 2.) — Umntb ^-"^ " '' /,,V ..,,, I s.-rvU. Suluieio non nnt com- 
 
 Tuli^''. ;;,,! n,yum!e7;m.n;uato»u<.,,(ir etc., quid uudum wlibue v,r„ ,«,K„W««/ 
 
 Dulsu^ ad eOrum causam me adjunfjerem. Cic ham. \';'';Vh./r.Mnl lie- were how lu-ld i>V 
 mood, are u^ed in butli P'-<M><'''' ;;•»;;• .R'V„^^;,^';.^^^^^^^^^^ are contrary to 
 
 parati os?Cmu!», scirem ( =Reftpond?re non ponn^im, qvla ne^cio qnemadmodxtm etc.). Cic 
 Alt. 7, 18, 1.— Often t»ucii eentences include both, non-reality in rt'<rard to the present, 
 and doubtful realUii in reirard to the future'. In this instance the predicates are always* 
 in tiie Kubjunetive present, as: llle no<*ter anilcu;» tibi irStns est; hoc *t quanti tu 
 le-times sciam^ turn quid mihi elaborandum sit, scire jWsvim (=nef!Cio nync, fed n fades 
 lit sriam. scire poffro). Cic. Att. 1, 8. 1.— De Feilcis testaineuto turn masjis qverare, H scias. 
 lb. Qii. Fr. ;3, 0. 8.— If the predicate refers nicrehj to tiie future, without a present non- 
 reality, the sentence is an ordinary period of doubtiul reality: Sed tanieti ^i wia;/t (future) 
 quid constitueris, meuin consilium accomvwdabo ad tuum. Cic. Fam. 9, 7,2. 
 
 Ob'*. 1.3. If the speaker iti the Si-clan-^e assumes an act of liis own. implying that ft« 
 is }iot noinq to perform it, the thesis expressing the consequence if the action were to 
 be performed, the |)iedicates of the periods are either l)Oth in the present subjunctive, 
 or both in the lmpekfect sitb-tunctive*), as: Hie ego si frnttm faciam liicendi, satis ja- 
 dici lecisse ridear. cur sectitidum Kosciutn judicilre debeat ; If I would etid my argu- 
 ment here ijnit lam not qoinq to do so), I would have done enough etc. Cic. R.'C. .5. — 
 Coiup. with : Quibus.^i niiiilaliud resjwnderem, msi me M. Brutone^are rogauti noluisse, 
 jtista ej<set excusatio ; /f I would anjuier notiiing else hut etc. (but 1 am qoinq to ansiner 
 something more), it would be a le<ritimate excuse. lb. Orat. 41, 140.— aSI hoc reticeavi, aut 
 fuperbus aui oi)noxius ri6?>-ar. Liv. 2}, 12. Comp. : Mihi i:,'n()scere mm dtbej-elis si taci- 
 t-em. Cic. Clu. G. 18. — El'o /fi me Scii)iOnis desiderio movSri neqem, mentiar. 11). Am. :^. — 
 Quid mihi sit i)oni si merdiarf Plaut. Most. 2. 1, 23. Comp. : Qiiid assequerer si istS extrS- 
 ma defensione idevtr? Cic. Plane. 6, IH. — Quibijs ego si me restitisse dicam, nimium 
 mihi sitmam, et non simferendus. lb. Car. :i,9, 22. Comp. : Si lar::itiOnem esse confiterer, 
 idque rectutn factum c^^^i' defenderem,face7-e7n improbe. lb. Mur. 3.— /Ve/n vnpn'dens si 
 plus/>r>.</;//<'7« qiiam homini arerum na'tunl tribui potest. lb. Fam. 11, 21,3. Comp.: Si 
 tabellartos ad te cum inanibns litteris mitterem, facerem inepte. lb. Att. 8, 14, 1.— Sed 
 quid opjHmas. si neqem me umqnam istas litteras ad te misisse ? lb. Phil. 2, 4. 8. Comp. : 
 /S'iasperius in quosdain homines invehi tW/«m, quis non concederet nt eos perstringerem ? 
 lb. Sest. <). 14.— Hiec *i verbis explicSre ro/j?w/r, nullo posito sub oculis simuiacro. eS- 
 rum reriim fru-tra suscipiatur labor. lb. Tim. 10. Comp. : Si plane sic verlerem PlatOnera 
 nr verterunt nOstri poCtit- fabulas, mule m^rJrtr de meis civibus, lb. Fin. 1, 3.— Nam si 
 conftram nos cum illis, iiijuriain notnini Romano /adrt/». Liv. 22, 59.— Cotnp. Liv. 2:3, 42; 
 Cic. Fam. 13, 8. 2; lb. .5, 2, 3.— I'resent subjunctives are always used in the expression 
 ' Dies deficiat si ' (Time would be wanting if I would etc.), as : Dies definat si iinperatO- 
 res temeie in hostium terrain transirressos cum maximis cladibus suisenumeraie velim. 
 Liv. 28, 41. — Dies defciat si velim wwmei^ryi (inWms bonis male evenerit. Cic. N. D. 3. 32. 
 —Nunc me dies, vox, latera, dtficiaid si hoc vociferari velim. lb. Verr. 2, 2. 21. In the fol- 
 lowinir passage the '_'reat.r i)art of tlie Codd. n-ad dejiciet : Dies deficiat si velim pauper- 
 tatis cimsam {Icfendere. Cic. Tnsc. 5, 35.— In place of'a present subjunctive in the thesis, 
 i\ perfect subjunctive (of guarded statement or individual opinion, see p. :378, Obs. 2) is 
 sometimes used : Multos circa nnam rem ambitiis/Vc^/'im si qiiip de Marcelli morte va- 
 riant auctOres, omnia exsequi velim. Liv. 27,27. feee lb. 2»i. 49.— Very rarely the thesis 
 has its predicate in tlie intkurocjative imperfect subjunctive (p. ;381. Obs. 3), while 
 the Si-clause lias a present subjunctive : Si profitear (quod utinam possem !) me studiO- 
 sis dicendi priecepta traditflruiu, qui tandem id reprehendertt f Cic. Orat. 41, 141. 
 
 Obs. 14. Sl-clauscs of non-reality in which si has the force of efiamsi are generally 
 treated as hvpotheiical with i/np-rfert (ra^peci'WL-ly pluperfect) subjunctives, as: Cum 
 qtiibu!^ « mihi nulla causa i>def\>dertt, tamen tnonetem te ut eOruin fortQiiis consuleres. 
 Cic. Fam. 13. 4, \.—Si oh eam cau>am peccftret, t^nnen iqnosceret nemo. lb. Sest. *'A. But 
 often present subjunctives are u.>=ed in clauses of this kind, as : Thucydidis oratiOnes 
 imitari neque possim si velim (=even if I wished), ucc velim I'orlasse si possim. Cic. 
 Brut. 83. Compare : Micrnrcm miiiiii; dolorem nee i)otui, nee sij)0ssem, velletn. lb. Att. 
 12.2S. 2.— .Si Ciaudiie familia' non sim (even if I were not a member of the Claudian 
 family), reticCre jxKsMtm, L. Sextium tantum sibi Iicenti:e sunipsisse? Liv. 6, 40. Com- 
 pare : (^ujR si exsequi nequinm, tamen me lectulus oblectdret meus ea ipsa cogitan- 
 tem. Cic. Sen. 11. — ^ec ea dico, quae si dicam tamen infirmare non jwssis. lb. Ca?c. 9, 29. • 
 — Fact tirusne opera? pretium sim si res P. II. perscripserim, nee satis scio, nee si sciam, 
 
 * The grammarians generally consider tliese periods as ordinary conditional periods 
 referring to \hr future. But they are evidently periods of non-reality, since the action 
 of the clause is represented i\^ not to become real : else it would not be admissible to 
 tise al<() hypothetical moods in tJiese periods. It is true that periods of this kind refer 
 to the decision of a (/o'/6^ about performance or non-performance. But this doubt is a 
 past one, and does not refer to the present or future performance, havini; ceased to 
 exist at tlie very moment the sentence is formed. Unquestioiial.>ly the implied reler- 
 cuce to such a former doubt is the reason that uon-hypotlietical moods are udiuitied ia 
 these periods along with hypothetical moods. 
 
724 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL PERIODS OF NON-REALITY. 
 
 725 
 
 dicere auHm. Liv. Pr^r 1 .-Sometime, (-^^^^.^^i^'- il:-|^';!;!j:;:;,iT"!C7l^ 
 iiiiKMive witli a pres^etit i?ul)junctive of the h} potliesif, wnui uic i f/ '" .. 
 
 •ar7'/m^"^'//i ''^ co'ittnno he truth "',':;;,{. ""^^^^^ imi'kkfect subjunctive, 
 
 III if S FS'SSHS^^^^ 
 
 *'^n. .? Vh 'l e- 1 18 -Mu (1 divlua in homines m.uleratio pn.fecto nulla e,f,si m ea 
 nulla e-if. lo. L,e«,'. i, i». •^'''"''' "y,'. ,-,.,,,,, n» x I) M ;i5 — Ach U's « ( ens «-^.^ et Or- 
 
 Atticum n( i ^ i I p;^ nr ,f o 9M -^()n<Ml d ita <>.</ qua. niiilum. stultiiiil fnf Koscius ? 
 
 junctiv.r imperfect or present, as: Cur, (iu<..l ui sinu ve^tro e.st, cxtuU juOeli^ polius 
 quam pondt'u!, uiA aliqua Iraus guhe^t .^ Liv. h, 1.). 
 
 2 J/<>^x7« i/< 7?rn"or/s o/ non-reality, both propositions referring to the 1 ast. 
 OBs Ifi. If a hypothetical period refers to a time anterior to that of the ''Pcak*;^ ^»>;h 
 nmoositions eenerally taiie the ruPKUFKCT sibjunctivk, as: I'lancuN .vt semltum 
 S S^; m.Eua.^ cur.am inc.nlis.et. ^ic. Phil. 13, li.-ilcn: bd mn .; prm.a s^^^ 
 nn.-i)eraV?/i.<.v/// hand dub e «id lluiujluos» ptn'^'nuxet. Liv. 8, 3.— 1 hil i)puj-, *t uiuu is 
 S[A- W id bell m j^t>i.s-.s<^/. lb. ;«. 23.-(^ui consul exset farfu.., mn m Maiulnos con.uia- 
 ui^hH-hils.fVw Brut 47, n:..-Qu()d m fH-U<e( Cav-ar. unum ni locum omue*' adver- 
 . nor. n c Pi;e co^e h^^en lb. 1). v. '2. 24.-Me, d vis ,.<m fm.^s,f, nulla .r« labefac. Jlre 
 wS Vh SesKW», 1-27.-TO Ihi. rule there an- the lnll.,win- kxcki'TIons. lu wlml 
 Tm KKFFCT H hjunct ves are used with the force «.f En-li^h plupkufkcts : 1) U the 
 ,e iTnTerr ni to^ p^^^^^ nctious. ,ni-_'ht luive taken puksknt suhjunc.ves .''/»•'. I err. d 
 t<r/rif'ytimeToBs. l7).--i) If tlu- tlusis . c.ntains an intkuk..uative sul)junctue (Obs 
 IsZ-T f both prV^^ •t.fer to past time, and th- clause is either •••{'«•^-"ted as 
 
 coiNciOKNT will., or ruECKDiNO iu lime, tlie pre.licale ot the thens (Ubs. 19. liO). 
 
 ()B^ 17 If a past l.ypothetical period is sudi that the predicated would "r '"•;;»' t J'^ye 
 
 tnk.i.PKESKNT -iB-iUNCTiVKs. accordiui: to OBS. 11-15. if ref.-rnd to p.e>ent t nu-. both 
 
 •e 1 .1 s a*^^' aMK^^^^^ in th.' impkufect sibjunct.ve «ith the force ol an Li.i,- 
 
 • '^ VA PE FKr^^ >u u.e a. in the a,.alo;,'ous iuManc . of clauM-. ol ,7'-V'l;;;;"'riH 
 
 V U) 710) Heme this o.nstructi.... occurs : 1) if the fact assu...ed in the »'VP 't''^,':''; '» 
 
 a fiction refer, in^ to sipernatihal acts (Obs. 11), for nist.. to my hcdogical fictions, 
 
 S/ .srProTu/t e.7., q. uui mo.talibuH ii:u.-m dividere vclUt, ipse a vi.Inis carbunculoa 
 
 ^/^nK^r^ m 1 r d cni s ruienforr If Promelh.us, when he was -oin- to c.rrv hie 
 
 U> [ f .m>VtT, /;;;i h.tnsHf t.en h^oowu li^'l"ed coaln from his ^^tli^'l^^^S 
 
 lot hare .eenied ridiculous v A„ci. H.-r. 4, 6.-At (.^t) dme^ banc vim ^'^'^r^Xno uM^^i 
 
 rum uercu^MOne possit heres sciptus esse qui levcia mm es.set h. re^. m toro, n.ii.i 
 
 ^ZtsMret*] But had you yiven to M. Cra^.us (who was dead^t_il.e Um^of^eak- 
 
 " * Tixis passage id preceded by a Bimilar pas=age, referring to ihe present, with puk3- 
 
 Inff) the power to Pmnirsle, hy a snap of his finjjerP. the nnme of a person not being an 
 hcTr as an heir into a will. \\iiwmUU have danced in the forum. Cic.Ofr.8. \% m.—^) If 
 the i)redicaie of the clause contains the pPEAKEirs own act which, at th»^ time spoken 
 of he mi-ht have performed, but did not i.eiform on account of the statement "» the 
 th"i"<i< (Ons 13» as : Ac t.im si dicerem. nan audlrer ; Had 1 sjwken then, / would i>oi 
 have he* n heard ('ic.Clu.29 (referred to the present : Si hoc dicavi, n<m audiar : er<:o 
 no.i dicam) — Superbe me faterer f^icere ( = tateor me factQium fuisse) n, pr.usquam lu 
 Airicam trai»'cissem. te tuS voluntAte cedentem Ita.ia a^^jMri'drer ; I wou.d have acied 
 Hn'o.Vintly had I rejected vour oilers etc. Liv. 30. 31 (referring to the present : S>q)erbe 
 fariam siasnen>er).-ii) If 'the hypothetical clause is concessive (Obs. U), being eiihcr 
 iutri.(lur.dbV€^irtm-«i,or,siwitli the force of ^^iaw«, as : Atque ille, f/w//J>i al.il quapiam 
 vi exmlltrelnr (wcmld have been expeiii-d) eis temporibus ex hac urbe. facile jMtevetur. 
 Cic Se<t 2*> — Hosciirs, si nihil dicertt (even if he had said nothin-), tacito ip^^i' otnc.o et 
 studio quod hat.ebar erga propinquum suum, quemvis comimreret. lb. Quu.ct. 25.-Lte- 
 nim A lum veniret, me tamei. socium suOrum consiliOnim vidSre posset, lb. bt-st. Z\i,M. 
 — Kcquie vox uimiuam ««si audita consulum? Quamquam quis aw(/I/v^ M r/*a«m6 queri 
 velitnt^ lb 30 iS\ —Si fnceres (in edicto) polestatem oratOri noii modo rejiciei.di, sea 
 eriam 'su'.iendi r.-cuperatOres. tamen hoc novum genus mjurue lerre nemo iiosset. \V^. 
 VeiT 2 3 13 Coinp Fin. 2, 2t'JU) — 4) If a hypothetical clause is» used as an assumption 
 for the'^ar-'iinuntum e.\ contrario' (Obs. 15): Nu.nquain perpeferereut homines injunaB 
 tu'c remetilum morle quiP.erent, ;/t>t ea res ad qu«stuui ei ad prsedam tuam jmtineret ; 
 You ivoafd never have s^feved that people should s.'ek a remedy for your outrages in 
 death, had this not fjeai a matter of profit and plu-.ide. for you. Cic. V err. 2.3,tb. 
 
 Ops 18 If the thesis of a hypothetical clause consists of an intrruogative siTB-nmc- 
 TivEi'n ti.e imp.-rfect, referring to the past. accT.linir to p. 3^1. the hypothesis ge_ner- 
 allv takes likewise an iwjM'rfect subjunctive sxn\i the force ol a ;>/r/;^/:/6cf as: Si .Alfenus 
 tib. nV satis daret, et judicium accipere rdlet. revocare.^ eum quem in (i;i ham mise.as? 
 I dlfeuu^ qiv^n vo.i security etc.. Wa/ you have recalled eic? Cic. Quiuct. 2h.-Mim 
 i.ritirODimium.A'i turn €s.<es {had you lived hi thai time), nefarium civem pufaresr lb. 
 Phil.8,4, 14.—' Si auctOres ad liberHudam \mir\iini desiderareiitur ilhs actoribus, Brutos 
 e"0 iiilptUt-reui quorum uterque etc. t II). 2, 11, 2G. 
 ^Ons m If a i>a<t hypothetical clause is conceived as coincident with the action of 
 the the-i< the pre.lica.e of the clause viay l)e in the impekfkct srB.Il^^cv^lVE according 
 tti.'eneral rules explan.ed p. 414 loll. (§ »103. Obs.), while the principal predicate 
 reuit n.e re.ruiar plup.Mfect subjunciive, as: Si nihil p.iEter f.igam Q^^f'er^^^r 
 funl^sem l.l>enti.si.ne : Had nothing but tlight be^n in quextwa. 1 xJiould have fled most 
 Sndy Cic.Att. 9. 10. 2.-Ilujus .si vita, si mos, .i vultus mm omnem commen- 
 a -mm iV'enii evevtereL nuijus n.unen in patrOnis />/iW; //«;/ not his li^' ;-t'^ 
 XT, Zed all The <-ftVct of hi ^ genius, his name among barristers would hav-_ been g.-eater. 
 11, B.m t 7 -N^^ tanta i:nr&\fdaissent cerimonias sepulcrorum, nmh^revH m eOrum 
 nuM.tibus, mor.e.u nou inu-ritum e<se, sed quasi migrat.Onem l»^' \.';;;^- ^-jf ^,^;;;^^^ 
 e..ri.. iio.i /Vt-ivst' si suum iiumer.im naves habtitnt. In. V e.r. 2. 5. 51.— Comp. ID m» "pJ- 
 ^(VsV Vm 2 ti A 4; Fam. 3, 20, 2; Phil. 2, 2, 3; Oral. 17 55; Brut. 10, 40; Liv. 10. 4U 
 lb ^J9 4-> lb 9, 8.-But in all these pa^s.ges a pluperfect subjunctive would have been 
 as corVe 'tly used as an imperfect, as; Qui tu vir et qnantus/^/i^>^^.* «_i llus d.ei mentem 
 t'yxS^lll(U<e^. Cic.Phil.2.3n-Isy;;-25ce.s>i<^^en.onoribus iongius, ?^m semper infi.m5, 
 at»iue etiam legrS, valeiuQine/«i*^>.e/. lb. Brut. 48. 
 
 OBS 20 If in a past hvpoti.etical period the hypothesis is represented aj^ preceding 
 
 the tin-s s in time pl.ipe.-fecl subjunctives are generally used in (,oth propositums. But 
 
 some me "in tlds instance, the ..-edicate of the thesis is pj-.ced iu the i^nperfect s^ib- 
 
 jr^'rwhle the hypothesis retains its pluperfect subjunctive, as; ,St hic lalsus arc 1. - 
 
 'piraia .;..A/-ar/...s-a\it pro/uqUsef. uouesxet <litticile (it ^'•<i;;^%^^^^^^^^ 
 
 dimn in supposiii locum supponere. Cic. \ err. 2 5. .3(. -At 7u S hi FrL i< rib! 
 
 ginicsium d'..ctor./V/i^.e^ nihil recusandum -iM>P 'cu /wv<- Liv ,>2 bl.-Ergo is ti^^^ 
 
 civis (P \a-Ica) si te.nporib.is il is fui^xe.^, nou prol^arlturf Cic. Phil b. 4, 14.— M e^set 
 
 ;;;/V/;/PomVK. ...Oruul c«usa. n.mlq.iam exsrnve,^t^ywo^dd^>^r^ A«r. ;;f;^^f,;^,«^l')- 
 
 II) 13 s 17 — C(Mnp. Liv. 9, 19; lb. 42. 43; Caes. B. C. 3. Ill; ^ ic. \ err. 2, l^^L^'N >'>• ^ «'f- 
 
 3 -^ 54- 1 ; Se -Ttds fo.-.n is (»ft. n used to represent the action of the clause as 
 
 la:n,^)o the moment <>f making^ if thecmid i lion Jiad been fulfilled, as: 6t^nt<mius 
 
 FNT srB.irNCTivEs (Si vir bo., us hatxat hanc vim ut, ei digitis tovcrepuent, possit m 
 
 h'cupien, ,n tiMa.uenta nouien gus inepere. hac yi non ^'ff^-^}^^"^:^^^ 
 
 sage in tm;;«fVc/*-c:.nnot be likewise referred to the presen . l)y ender ng ,t ««yf you 
 
 would qive XhU power to a M. C.assus'. The a.i.hor of the /;»b,l^-^^^^,^;.J'^^- Pjif^^^^^^^ 
 
 plains the imperfect by stating 'that the J^^^o-.tino pekiod of Crassus s 1^^^^^^^^^^^ ^ 
 
 contemplated ', which certainly is a novel way of explaining the use of an imptrltct m 
 
 place of a pluperfect. 
 
^ 
 
 72G 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL PEEIODS OF NON-REALITY. 
 
 727 
 
 opprimero nrhom jx>tini^set. statim; n Gallmm tcnOrc panllo post, ^* P^" ^"W ^ 
 eundinn rcluiuis U-^tl ^^tTvicndum ( = the oUuts would hart been compel ed to he ^lavc8, 
 \Z\Zuldt^<<o m Cic. Phil. 8. 13, :U.-AW< eni.n ipsi (Autonio) siatim *eme/i(/"m. 
 si Cle^ar ah eo re>;ui int^iguia accii)ere voluU^et. lb. 3. 5, 12. 
 3. One of the propositions referring to the Piesent, the oth£r to the Past. 
 Ob9. 21. If the fheds refers, to the present, while the h>/j)of/>e-^is refers »« ,^^^,^7 "I'ime, 
 the fonner in clH^'sic:ll prose, always lakes the impekfect ^subjunctive while the pred; 
 U^iei'lUie latter takis tl,; PLm-EKKECT .ubjunelive.as : Uuo ;i'/|'/<>»^.l«'Al?^'7;.,!j 
 lueu.n consilium v«/MWwe^ tu hodie ef/tres, no» Hberi *^,v.srm«^. Cic I hil.2 \^; -^-"tj;,*^ 
 tn Fraei tot et taiita d nactus esses, tempu» te cuius quam oraiio d^^tictret. lb. K. A..U. 
 -bu ° me aXS; honeste vivermLlh. Fam. 7, 3, i).-Uterer domest.cis exempli s. 
 nav^e^isZ. lb. Orut. ^.-NUi ante lio,uMn'oAcfMS e,,es, nunc earn ^^'-^Yt'lTm 
 lb Fam 7 11 1 -The anteclassical writers, in analo-y to the u^^age stated Obs. 10, 
 icmi.hmes a.cihe present sui>juncnve in the thesis, and the Z-'/^^^U u^MiTa VilZ 
 hvpothe.si!.. as: N.-jrat y Tu. Eiiam roj^itas? nwa/nsiconfessussit Plaui. Most, d, i, ^-4. 
 --In tenebris conspmilus si sis me, abstineas manum. lb. 1 seud. 4, -i, ^. 
 
 Obs 22 Rarelv the ther^is of a hypothetical period has its predicate in the pluperfect, 
 when the"hvi)oth'esis with a predicate in the inMH-rfecl subjunctive refer? to a present 
 Snc (the Ks 'eneraliy denoting' the cous.quence of the hypothesis). This connec- 
 tm occurs n two instances : 1 ) It the hyp..the.is denotes a state (or custom) 6^j7i«/|i/.f7 
 S-7th;- time ol tlie thesis and continuing to the moment of speakin- as: J^u rt 
 SeVri./ry;;M = vix.ssenttu.n,etiu,ncviverent,bellumo 
 
 Phd 13 13 — Non /Vci.s'.NW/i hominis menliOnem msi judicartm ( = mm J^^".' /^'"'^'"' ^-J 
 m u- jiiditWm) qui^•rimino^ius diceret me andivi«.se i.eminem. lb. B.ut .«.-Liro ^ 
 fois c«ni/J/rm (J si solitus essem etc.), Cn. Octavio non dejuissem, lb. ^«n^ V^'.-.f- 
 .-NusQuam hoc est in fcedere (Jaditilno, ac sicdA esset (et turn fuisset), lex id Gel la 
 ^^iKS lb Ba b. 14.-2) It the fnct, men.h.ned in the hypolhois is to he refuted by 
 *ap' m^^^^^ the thesis containing' an a,;,M.n.K-nt, lake.i «rum the past as : 
 
 Nun " o"t Antonius, nam n esset, non canunisi^stt ut ei .enil.us, tanquam Ilannibali, 
 denli.icia.Vtne oppu-naret 8a.-ii..lu.n. Cic. Phil, b, S.-t^uod ia.i tsset, certe ut a crudc- 
 lissimo liO!?te fuyissef. lb. Clu. »•(). 
 
 4. Preterite Indicatices in hypotheticnl Periods. 
 Ob«* 23 In the'foUowin^' instances the p.e.licate of the thesis i.i hypothetical periods 
 mavhe placd in the ini)7cat.ve ok one of the tiiuek pkktkkite ^^^'^^v; ;. I' ,. ,!v 
 «rc-dicate consists of the pote.stial verbs and verbal exp.-ess.o..s denot.nir possib ut^ 
 Sec is ty, nKsn^ABiLiTT and p.^opkietv (Obs. 24-20.. 2) In those instances i«; which a 
 preteiite tt'.ise of the perii.hrastic futu.e is used with hyp..lhe .cal meaninir Obs. 2 . . 
 3) 1.1 some instances when the predicate consists of o.dinary vc.-ba predicat.s (Obs 28 . 
 _T is usei.f the indicative df.es .iot .efer to the predicate of the .y/>r> A.^rs wh.c , 
 even if dependent on hyp<.theiical indicatives, retains its re-ular hypothet.ca Mib- 
 iim.iive Hut exceptionally, thon-h very rarely, p.cterite indicativrH a.-e found .n 
 hypoheic.l Si-claules. na.m-ly: 1. I.. epi<.ohuv sty e .f the *^^lafse is int.^duced by 
 n^; . Ipsam tibi cpistolam misis^tm, vi.i tam si.b.to fratns i.uer proM'i-^cthotur { = VVO- 
 ?ect is es.et) (Mc Alt. 8, 1. 1.-2» Sometimes in analo-y to the hypothetical pre.^ent 
 indiaitiVe wi.en the Si-cause assumes a p(i.^t fact to be refuted by ' argument, nn ex 
 a tHuicr Obs 1.-^.: Wn^lsi (^.esa.is ca..sa in provinciam vemebatts, ad eu.n P'olcc <,, 
 exclflsi pr..vi..ci[l, vJssHis. Cic. Li-. 8 ( = Vo.. did i,ot come in C;esar s behalf to the 
 province^: for if so, y<.u would, aftrr yo.ir expulsion, have -one \»> C^J^^''' .^--'^^^^ 
 i,terrWfuru.^et'um{\mi\ I {..tended t<. kill you., n.m tc.np.-rassem y.n..| Liv . 4(), 14 
 S especiiillv. .1- th.- THESIS likewise has a hypothetical i.id.cat.ve ( BS.24): II ...C si 
 rw;m/ . on e. ... (.ua.n dinti>si.ue vivere v.dle drbebuf f Had he hated h.m, must he not 
 have wished him Vhe lu..^'est possible lifey Cic. Clu. «Jl (Con.pare: In quo po u. ^^t te 
 cdisZi, minus qu..d ,ibi obesMl facen-y lb. Fa.n. .3, U\^\).-lJeb,lHi>,t ^x .m.nis bono8 
 
 race, they im-ht to have made all m»-., good. lb. N. D. 3 32, .9 (C onip. u th I' • /^. . 
 2 »U 127) In such passa-es as Cic. Uiv. 2, 8 (uequ-- n faUuujuerat, ejurjt.^.set), the 
 pre(r.cuie>/mi^ of the Si-cia.ise has .,.. hypolhe.ical force, as it has been shown p ..( 4 
 Ob^ 3 C -Very harsh is the indicative perfect « ilh hypothetical meanin- in he follow lUK 
 uassa"." I.muscit.-CeihC-i adole.sc-uiiie. nhi itcru.n patrue b llumy«^r</. hall. tat. .j-i, ..-l. 
 Jlere the Nisi-clause is evidt-ntly hypothetical, si.ice .he author means to «ssrrt that 
 Ceil.e"..s u'us a .cb.l lor the spc....(i time. Moreover, .he hypothetical thes s has the 
 unexampled fo.n. of an imperative, the whole passa^'e havin- the mean...- Censh-ema. 
 vdb.s CethS-o i^M.oscendum esse. ni4. . ./ecis set \-Soi Uy^ harsh is the present indica- 
 tive in a Nisi-clause. with the force of a hypothetical imperfect subjunct.ve, m the 
 Xoilowin- passa-e: Plura de Ju-urtha scribere dehortatur me lorttlna mea... .«i*t tameu 
 
 intelligo, ilium supra q.iam e-o sum pcterc (=nihil amplius scriberejn de Jugurtha, nisi 
 irdeUifjerein ilium sup.a peterc, i. e. that he has a higher aim than me). Ball. Jug. 24. 
 It is evident that the clause • nisi intelligo^ is contrary to reality, since the writer of the 
 letter means to say that he indeed knows the fact mentioned. Hence a hypothetical 
 mood should have been used. 
 
 Obs. 24. The potential verbs and verbal forms which, as theses of hypothetical 
 clauses may be in the indicative of a jneferite tense are: j)Osse, debere, dectre, oportet, 
 (Ff/uum est, apt 'an est, mdius est, optuldle est, interest, satis est, causa non est cur, non est 
 quod, and the ]>enpfira><tic gerundials. The preterites of these verbs are used in two diifer- 
 ent relations to the verbal act. ons to which they give a potential character. In the first 
 place, they may represent the main action as reailij perjoi^ned, in which ins^nce they 
 Iiave the ^anie nature as any other modal auxiliary {solere, veUe etc.). a.id can generally 
 not be re.idered by the English potential mood, as : Pugnfitum ab hostibus ila acriter 
 est ut a viris fortibus pug.ulri debuit. Cais. B. G. 2, 133 ( = the enemy really fought as it 
 vas their duty to tight). — Tanta est contentiOne actum q.ianta &gi debuit. lb. B.C. 3, 
 111.— Neque eniin ipse Ciesar, ut multis rebus intelligere pofui, est aliCnus a nobis (as I 
 h'lif bten adte xo iutt'T from many facts). Cic.Fam. 6. 10, 2.— ity/wi/ aliqui ab initio noa 
 sedisse, et tamen Oppianicum gratis condemnasse (it 2vas possible etc.). lb. Clu. 41. — 
 But frequently these potentials represent the action as not really performed, denoting 
 that the pe.formance was merely jx)iisible, or that it should have taken place from moral 
 reasons, or lor the sake ol exj.ediency. as: Volumnia debr/it in te officiosior esse quam 
 fuit. et id ipsiim quod lecit, jx)tuit facere diligentius et cautius ; Volumnia ought to have 
 acted more dutil..lly to you (f/ut she did not), and might have done, what she did, more 
 carefully etc. (which she did not). Cic. Fam. 14, 10. In this instance the potentials meiv 
 tione<l above pregnantly imply the idea of nonreaUty as if a hypothetical clause had 
 been added. Th.is ''hoc profdbtre debuisfi'' (ywi ought to have hindered this) has a force 
 similar to *//' you had done yovr duty, you would hare hindered this\ If thus used the 
 potentials ineniioned aie regularly in the indicative of a preterite tense (see the 
 exanii)les Obs. 25. 26). Hence predicates of this kind retain their indicative tense, even 
 if a hypothetical clause is expressly added, as : Delgri totus exercitus ;x>/wf/, si fugientis 
 2>trsecuii \\v\rn-iiA essenf. Liv. ;i2. 12. B.it in ihis instance also hyiiotlteticcU subjunctives 
 may be ..sed. as : Xl<i totlus diei labore milites essenl defessi, omnes hostium copiie delgri 
 jwfuissmt. Ctes. B. G.7, 88.— Quid fucvrv pot uissem, nisi turn consul /wi.s^m.^' Cic. Rep. 
 1,H. So if the hypotheti«al clause is understood, or contained in some member of the 
 sentence by implication (p. 734. 736, Obs. 3. 4. S). as : Urbes sine hominu?n coetu (i. e. nisi 
 honiinum cief us f /assent) non potuiss<nt neciediftcari nee frequentilri. Cic. Off. 1,4. — Ilia 
 a..ij)liil)olia quie Cia'sum decGpit, vel Chrysippum jxjfuisset decipe.e. lb. Div. 2, 56, 116. — 
 Nonne multo melius fitisse/, otiOsam lettltem et quietam traducere? lb. Sen. 23, S2.— The 
 Si-clauses added to hypothetical potentials in the indicative are /lOf always hypothetical, 
 as: Hoc si q.ii pati m.ii jx/tuit, mori debuit ; If any one was unable (clause of doubtful 
 reality» to bear ihis. he ought to have died (by his ow.i hand). Cic. Fam. 9, 17, 1.— <S'it'« 
 h;i.ic 'tui'ham efl'i.irere roluisti, sire etc., lie Ciesa.-e fame., mtuisti dicere. lb. Brut. 72. — 
 Lysimachia tenendu erat n pacern petitdn erdtis; Lysimaciiia ought to have been held, if 
 you were to sue for peace. Liv. 37, ;i6. - 
 
 Obs. 25. The hyi.othetical perfect indicative of the potentials mentioned Obs. 24. has 
 the force tif a plipkufect which lepresents the assu.ned fact as complete at the time 
 iipokeu of (pp. 302 and 305): Niim id vitari fxjtuit si Flaminius auspiciis jKimissetf 
 Ceite non potuit. Cic. Div. 2, 8. — Consul essequi jwtui, nisi eum vitas cursum tenuissem? 
 lb. Hep. 1,6.— Tetigistin' fores ? Tu. Q,uoniodo pulsflre ;>o/?/i si non tangerem (how could 
 I have knocked, had I not touched the door) y Plant. Mosl. 2, 2, 31.— Non /Jt/Zt/i/", inquies, 
 lieri supie.is (EpicCirus), nisi natus esset. Cic. Fin. 2, 31.— C^ui nos, qnos favendo in ccmi- 
 inil.ii causa retinCie 7X>^/r-rMAt^ invidendo abalienSrunt. lb. Fam. 1,7, 7.— 6'i omnibus 
 copiis congressus rex fuissef, forsitan inter tumiilttim exui castris jwtueHt rex (the 
 hypothetical indicative potuit being changed into the subjunctive of its own tense on 
 account of forsVan which required ihis mood, in analogy lo the instance mentioned p. 
 44.]. Obs. 3, 3). Liv. 31, .'i8.— Z^^c^'/i^yi mihi ignoscere ivi Sextii volunulti parere ?;f>/wi*.>.'f//i. 
 Cic. Vat. 1,2.— Quia, quod per vim hostium esset actum, ratum esse non debuit. li) Off. 
 
 p-ndere. Cic. N. D. 3. 33.— .Si ujium diem fnordti ef^setis. morifjtdum ommbnn fnit. Liv 
 2, :i8.— Quje H hoc tempore non diem obisset. \m\n:y post annis tamen ei moriendum 
 fuit. Cic. F'am. 4.5,4. —Illud potius ptwcipiendum fuit ut diliirentiam adhiberCuus in 
 ainicitiis co.npa.-jiiidis. lb. A.n. 17.— .Si ila putasset, certe ojifdbiiius Miloni /wt^ dare 
 Jugulum P. Clodio quam juguliri a vobis. lb. Mil. 11.— So.ueiimes the copula is placed 
 
■^ 
 
 728 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 CONDITIONAL TERIODS OF NON-REALITY. 
 
 729 
 
 in n hypothetical perfect indicative, if the thesis is virtvally potentml, aP : Tp?nm 
 
 nim ru^ar.n exsSre ma^/n/m/zi^' For it. would have been loo j^reat u lo^;^ (and 
 
 u c\N m oV- I le) o wait for (iesar's return. Cic. Phil. 2, 40. So in connection with im- 
 
 e ^on" lindi utV-genh^ : ISapievtu autem civisfait, Imnc. (Uiusam perniciO.o cjvi 
 
 on r li lu ue e • It would have been actin- the part of a wit^e citizen etc. (=cau8a relin- 
 
 r^n /n, En Cic Le«' 3 11 -Very rarely the imtentials mentioned are in the PLurEK- 
 
 ?;c4^N o SuE^^^tak^^n inV' hypoth^ ionise but nevcT if a ^y;^^^'^^[^^:;^ 
 
 Vxuvi's^U' added as • Non po/ueras hoc a principio dicere ? Cic. Div 2,04.— Q lanto nie i- 
 
 ,s';;rm/pr<Sii^^^^ non e.se Herljltum^! I '>• ^«- •% -^S.-Cati Ina erfljut c .enUta 
 
 trimnphai.B -audio, quern oninino vivum illinc exTre non oporUurat. lb. Mur. 2o. 
 
 ^K^ ^(i Sometime!* the IMPKUFECT inuicativb of the above-mentioned potential» la 
 h>TotheticallTu'Jrpar^^^ the force of a hypothetical plui^rfect, partly with the 
 
 'TVt1s^tX1»e^'S^^^^ rr.rrEnrECT if the action a. an indepen- 
 
 dent ta^tredieate would have required or admitted the u.<e of an tmperftct ll^dicaUie 
 p. : 05 : wS ahno.t alway. i. dependent on the author'. ^""9*^Pt>««' «"'^^' ^'^.^.y;''^»: 
 lal element of the action may always be considered as an »"/.^'.«^^»^" /f^ t^''' %: 
 U(wt('s PustinCri non mteranf, ni extraordmarue cohortcs se of'jfci^f^ent. Li\. «i ••— «^* 
 ' didam ve.tem aXK^^ lujrentium Pe.sei ca.um P^-''^-re^''peaejii ;^ .m^^ 
 
 Ih i-S 20— Quid Quum iussisset pnetor, tuin mittere nonne ;x>/t/(i.N/ C c. tiuinU. -4b. 
 1 niu8 (Onph iciH- ur vit:e Avitiis invidObat? Ilunc H acerbe et penitus oJ^ra/ (see 
 O i I: ) non eim^ Ifiutissime vivere vello ^iemat (ourjht ('^ "^(.^''^«S^,:*;^ Jfij '^^J^i;^ 
 t() the ti me when Oppianicus was living, who was dead at the time). lb. Clu. bl.-Sestins 
 Ma sil am profectui est ut «ocerum (^.^ScipiOncm) conso :lri P^'^^V't', >•' '^j f/J'^ l^;';?l 
 . centem out-m in majOrum snOrum vesiigiis t^UiTu opartcljat (L. Scipio being d.ad at the 
 hm lb Se<t 37 -\ chipirilta SyracasTs. quoniam iii Syracusjlno c'aptus erat, custo- 
 dlH U^^?^aM^^ be£e\hetimeof speakTngV >»>• V-rr. 2,5, 27.-In unS civitate bis 
 ii mro bui fui-ti quum et 7rmi4sti quod non oj^orCefxit et accepisti quod non licCbat II). 
 YeVr 25 }^i Comu Ih 2, 1, «l.-.Si talis nos natflra r/*""i->f/ "t earn ipsam intueri et 
 Bc?<Dicere posscmu^ baud eruf sane (there would have been no reason) quod qmsquara 
 ?a irm Mu ar/lo^^^^^^^^ lb. Tusc. 3, 1,2. So if the predicate is r«r/«a//y;..^ n- 
 
 iTiVnsisnnoTo ,i,e copula with imt.er.^onal predicate-genitives : ^•lvestenl mis.-n- 
 Si-1 TJ/«W".-f«^tam(.n id his non 'licGre per interdicta l«»'^''';f.''^tu;e m/(/./ r /^ 
 eraTw ferendce {would hare been an intoleruble act «'f rniel.y). Cic. ^'f; ^•j»;-^'," f' 
 vi<i (li mentem reVi ar/'W/i.vsfn/, et ipsum ii.gentis dtjffiadtalu (rat Liv.44,b. So in 
 en?«to a"v s V e where the imperfect Vs used of present actions which are represented 
 hI I. St irrt-an o the fut.ire reading of the letter, the same imperfect indicative ,8 
 SeKyp tlK-fically as past in reirard to the future reading : Xhi magnam -Pe«"/;f>^- 
 m« C ciari nos catiiam VrobatOros non a-at causa cur at. « '^uu cont.ndercvn^ (tfure 
 woidd have been no reason", viewed from the time of reading the letter). Cie tain. U i,.i. 
 2 \V tt tiie force of b«th a pli'I-ekfkct and impeuvect subjunctive, referrin- to an 
 nrtinn w ich is ret rt"e tecl as -iven up or as not existin- at a/orwertune. but so that the 
 S?rea i ^is co'VK;;i.r«y Ihftune q} the speaker; or relerring to i»^^^/^''^!^^^.^^^, 
 ii "the past as well as the future : as : Iloriim obt^rect^itioiiihus nos scito ^^^; ^ ^^^t^' '''^ 
 1 r>^trl sententia iam esse depulsos, n<m nos quidem ut dignitatis simus «.blTti, srd ut 
 hablimu "rat On^^^^^ Poterat utriimque pneclSre n esset fide- in homnii bus consu- 
 
 Kbus "bS ( ur di-n^ and welfare) mh/d hare been pn-served unul might be nmo 
 fre^.rvedTiM ere Am^ liten Unui if there were now) any faith in oiir former consuls 
 Cic Fam 1 7 7 -S^ Icri .imilitudine.n non tarn propter p.riiam legis studeo. quami t 
 maxime asseqtiar d.Lcu.crc. : quod poteran^nu. ip^a vilhl fi;;:Z'!^J^:;i^Z^M<^i 
 Atr 12 3« 1 Here 'quod poteram' {=' ivhich I mujht have achieved , ami nntcn, i 
 miohfJu achieve! refers both to the past and to the present (future), since the speaker 
 hacl already bSore writing thisjtmerjbmido.^ the plan of building _themonuniHP2 on 
 "VThF^iiform assertion of all grammarians that the hypothetical i.nperf«>ct iml}eai>ve 
 
 is alwavs used with the force of an i'"irf''^ .^^^^J''^^'^''' '^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 utterly Erroneous, as sufticiently appears from the passages quoted u pB^-.-*' -^^ '''""/ ^ 
 Da«.a^es imnerlect indicatives of potentials, althou-h accompanied by Si-clauses Mth 
 ?ur0^nc.ti vv^^mTerfects, are not hyUetical, as : Si luec ^-T^^l^^^'T^^^ir^^^On- 
 posteris et de ilia immortalitate solhcilor, qme j^ferat esse P^'P<^ "; .tAVhl !n... krr /at 
 iKtitfltis et moiibu-. Cic Rep. 3, 20. Here the connection shows that the >pe..ker (at 
 Se' I^'>^ troraccldj did Sot' mean t.> 'l^"y the :;.//ni. ri« J'f^^^^ ^;^;^,!];^;'-^^ 
 t^ented the contrary as a possible eveutuahty. Nor did be n t ^o 1 y the rt.i i y c^^^ 
 the rhewis ' au(E r>oterat esse permtua , but meant to say : 1 he rei)ui)lic naa (Otiore 
 the tin^e of t^ e Gmcchi) The lyoiJer or germ of immortality, j^-ovided the people were o 
 li^erc!>rdi,i'' to the institutions of their forefathers '. Hence the- passage belongs to 
 the couditioual periods with historical subjunctives mentiouetl p. »14, n. 
 
 his villa site.— PerturbatiOnes animOrum poteram ctro morbos appeliare : sed non conve- 
 nlret ad omnia ; I rni'fht hav*- (f>efcn-f, and jnight now) called the disiuibaiices of the mind 
 diseases, Ih. Fin. 3, 1'o.— Contumeliil eum onera^fi quem patris loco. « ulla in to pietas 
 e-set. colere debebas : You loaded with disgrace him whom you ovght to hare reven-d (at 
 the time <>1 the ■ onerdre\ and oimht to revere now) like a father it you hud had (and 
 had now) any pieiy in von. Ih. I'hil. 2. 38. — Vos certe viciOres conspici velle dtbehwis ; At 
 all events you o/zer/i^^o Aar<= wi>hed to ])e seen as conquerors (al the time you left the 
 province, and ?iow). i.iv. 45. :W.— Panietius. quum ad Q. TuberOuem de d«dore patierdo 
 sc/ifjent, qu« d esse caput dfbtbat, m probari ]x>sset, nusquam jiosidt (Pansetius, when he 
 wroieon ' beating,' LMief '. alio-eiher omitted what ought to have been (and ought to be 
 BOW) the main point i/ it could be proved. Ih. Fin. 4. 0, 23 — Intelligi a nobis di velle 
 deljefjanfq\nn nostra cau^a nos monCreiit; The ^tds ought to have wished (and ouL'ht to wish 
 now) that what they imparted to us should be understood by us. lb. Div. 2. 64.— Chaldsei, 
 quum iu)tent sidera natalicia, quaecunque Luna juneta videantur, oculoraui fallacissinio 
 eensu judicant ea qua? latione atqiie animo vidCre de//tbnnf. Docet enim ratio mathema- 
 ticOrum. qiiam istis notam esse ojfortlbat, quanta humilitSte Luna lerfitur; The astrolo- 
 gers judge l)y the sense of sight whnt thev ought to have seen (and ought now to see) by 
 their reason; for the mathematical rules, which ought tohave been (and ought now to be) 
 known to them, teach eic. lb. Div. 2, 43 (Here • debebat' and 'ojwrtWat ' refer to present, 
 and future, and to the whole past time during which the astrologers practised their pro- 
 f^.j^wiuiD.—Ktsi enim illiid erat aptius. iv(\mv.n (est) culque concedere ; For. though the 
 former plan a\ould have been more convenient (and would be so now), it Is (air to yield 
 to every one's desire. lb. Fin. 4, \.—Si verum respondere velles, Cato, luce erant dicenda 
 (referrin-' to an answer which Cato. bef(jre. had declined to give : 'You wonld have had 
 to say/A^», and may say so now"), lb. Fin. 4, 23. (C<mipaie 'cequius erat id voluniSte 
 fieri', m the corrupted passage Cic. Off. 1. 0, 2S). So. when a i)redicate with the copula is 
 viritndli/ potential : Erat rhetoriceres prorsus facilis ac parva, si uuo et brevi pr»scripto 
 conti/itfetur. Quint. 2, 13, 2. 
 
 3. If the Si-clause has the force of a hvpothctical concemre clause, the thesis (since in 
 thi ..... ....... 
 
 ought to punish him). lb. Verr. 2. 3. .^5. —Si vietoria. pra3da, laus. ihihUxessent. tamen om- 
 uls bonos reipublicaj subvenire decibat. Sail. Jul'. 8.j, 4.5.— .Si Roime Cn Pompejus pnva- 
 tus esset, tamen ad lantiim helium is erat deligendus. Cic. L. M. 17.— <S'i mihi nee stipen- 
 dia omnia emerita essent, necdum ajias vacatiOnem daret, tarn' n aquum erat me diimtti. 
 Liv. 42. 34. -Si ad hoc belluin nihil j)ertin?ref. ad disci pllnain certe milii iie plurinuim inter- 
 e/v//. iiiMiescere militem nostrum etc. lb. 5, «i.— Quanius imperator L ^milius fiierit, 
 *i ex alia re nulla exi^tima^i jtossit. velhoc satis t rat quod etc. H). 45. 37.— In this m- 
 stanee, however, imperfect .sv/(V'//<c'^iz7f*' are fir more frequently used than imperfect in- 
 dicatives, as: ,Si nemo responsOrus esset, tamen ipsam causani demonstiare lum posses. 
 Cic. Div. Cicc. 13. 43.— «Si ita esset, tamen vos sociorum querimonias aucilre opw/e/e?. ib. 
 Verr. 2, 2. G. Comp. lb. 2. 1, 27. If the hvpothctical clause is not concessive, a potential 
 thesi<,'.-xclusively referrinLT \o present lime must always be in the imperfect subjunctive, 
 as: Mihi igiiosceVe non dtbetiti^ (not debebdtis) si taclrem. Cic. Clu. 6, 18.— Peculiar is 
 theu>eof '«/.-i^^/Zi,*' referring to a hypothetical /«////re action: Uld, ,vi vos decedens, 
 confecia provineia, relinquereni (=relictarus essetn\, deum hominumqu-' fidem iinploiare 
 d<l>elHVisv\c. (Where 'deJjerrtis' would refer \o present time). Liv. 28. 2S.— Poets use the 
 impi-rfect indicative in place of a hvi)othetici! imperfect subjunctive without any re- 
 striction, as : Nam nos t/.c<VyaM=<ieceret)...lugere, ubi e>^set aliquis in lucem editus. 
 Translaiion Iroin Eiirip. in Cic. Tusc. 1. 48. 
 
 Obs. 27. Frequentlv the indicative of the three preterite tenses of the periphrastic 
 Fi-TUUK is used ill place of ordinary hypothetical pluperfect subjunctives, with th<' di>- 
 tinction explained p. 131 foil., li. U\. 14ti.as: Kemissiim est id quod ereptun erant {i.e. 
 nisi remisMim esset) : Whai they Wtre going to take by main lorce (and what they uouta 
 hare taken, bad it not been for the concession), was conceded. Liv. (i. 17.— Antonius 
 coram mihi negare iu)n vult quod ego non logaftlrus eram (i.e. si adfuisset),_nec. *i 
 inimtrassem, crediturus. Cic. Att. 10. l3,2.-Quod Awy^wW/aclurifuinuis (z=teci.-^^emu,<) si 
 a?des llo^trie dejiagrassent. Liv. .5, .S3. C«)mp. the pa8^aires quoted p. |.W.-Somt tunes 
 the imperf. ind. «)f a periphrastic future, with the predicate of the hypothesis in the imp. 
 subjunctive, refers to a past indetinitt time, so that, if referring to a time altogether m- 
 defiiiiie, it would be a period ol 'virtual non-reality with pres'^id subjumtires (p. 7!0), as: 
 Quid « Si v^HMnwerer, meciim exspiratilra respublica/^ra' ? Had Idled, would the repub- 
 lic /iare<'a-;rir«(/ with me* Liv. 28, 28 [With time altogether indefinite: ,St es/o wr/n/z?;. me 
 cum exspiratura bit respublica ?]. Coinp. : Si jam vocer ad exitum vitie etc. tic. k am.0, 4, 4 
 
 e- 
 4. 
 
730 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 IMPROPER CONDITIONAL PERIODS. 
 
 731 
 
 Obs. 28. In the followiii':: instances the indicative of the three preterite tenses of 
 ORUiNAiiY VERBS is ustd iu the thesis of hypothetical p.-riods: 
 
 1. The iMVKitFKCT. Hiid goim-iinu.'s the plupkhfkct indicitive (the pkrfkct only in 
 certain connections), are nsed to represent past acti<tn^ as vet^ near to actual perform- 
 ance, the hypothetical clause (mostly inirodnced by nisi, ofttii by ni, k-ss often by .si) 
 denotin" a fact that hindrred the accoinp'Uhintut {--\vm\ it not bt-en for the fict thMt),as: 
 /S'i per Metelluin Ikitum e.-^stt { = uid Mttellus nrohibuUset), matre^ illOrum veniehanf ; 
 Had it been i>ermitted by Metelliis (had not M. prevented them), their muihers would 
 have come to Rome (:=iheir mothers were on tlie point of startiiiLT, and they would have 
 come etc.. Cic. Verr. 2, H, 4'.» *.— Aa/v^/ya/' loiiLrins U would hive swerved farther from tiie 
 point). ;?i4 me rttinnUxein. H». Lcl?. 1, 1». 52.— Cui eiro nin rt^titis^tm, ex hac deciina 
 vestril, quos iste udnuerat, in eniiiu consiliutn mbsortitftatur (he was on the point of 
 drawin" by lot etc., and would have done so, had I not resisted). lb. Verr. 2. 1, til. -Jam 
 hand procul justo pnvlio res (-rant, id celeriter dire/nptum certiimen per ceninriOnes 
 e^ifief. Liv. 7, 14.— Aniiochus enit, n pauca /nutari^set, ;rermanissimiis Sioicus. 
 
 (ic. Ac. 
 
 2 43 — Ancept» pedesire certjlmen erat (the infantry-li.<,'ht w»)uld have l)efcn a drawn 
 battle), nL-ii CA]n\ii;^ f!i'perve,tistteiif. L\v. 2S,-i-i.— VifiCeljat(/ue anxilii loco paucitas, ni 
 Veien;^ in verticem coUis ^m4v.«?/. Ih. 2,:^0.—IUVur in c;ede.s, ni4 Afranins et Annten» 
 Seneca obviam is-fienf. Tac. An. 13, 2.— PLrPKurECTs: Hoc ipsnm fortQna eripu-rat 
 (would have taken away), 7ii.<i nnlus amici opes nubvenUsttit. Cic. K.ib. To, 17.— Aivi 
 Latini siiil sponte arma nurnpd^enf, capfi et de/efi era/nun, Li v. 3. 1»).— Pia'dire rice- 
 rilnins, ni<i Lepidus recepisset Antoniiun. Cic. B\im. 12. 10. 3 (Joinp. at Brut. 1, 15, 2).— 
 PeriiTa' imperinm .«-i Fal)ius lantnm a '/»•'/.•«' e.s\ve/. (luantiim ira Miadebnt. Sen. Ir. 1.11.— 
 ,S"i Cn.Poinpejum Neapoli valetQdo a/^.-^tulhf'ft, inmibiiatn-^ P. K. prii.ceps t-.r(v.v.ven//. lb. 
 Cons. Marc. 20.— Sometimes tlte \ian\c\o ' fkene\ or ' prope\ is ailded to the tln-.«-is, in 
 which instance the predicate is placed in the pkiipkct indicative: I'^nx^ sublicnis iter 
 p^vne hostihns dedit.ni iimis \\t fuUset. Liv. 2, lO.-Sic prope onerdtum e^t sinistrum 
 Ko iiiliiiscornn. id referentibus jam irradum consul iu'naviam ej-cusai^set. lb. 2. f,5.-In the 
 follo\vin>'P"'^!*;'i,'c the perfect indicative ' inquW stands in the /i!/i>of/ie.^i.t. because tiiere is 
 no form '^inqi(U<et\ and ' inqnubaV isoidy used with respect to repeated aciitui: Ptenas 
 rebellionis^^(/iA>v//^«i Vetiius Messins claril voce, Mlic j)r;ebiiilri, iz/y/ir etc. Liv. 4, 28. 
 
 2. Sometimes (verv frecjuently in Tacitus) a hyixiihetical Si clause is added !«• an 
 ordinary preterite pmlicate in the itnpt-r/ict indicative, wheti the proper hypothetical 
 thesis, denotin,' the execution of the princip U predicate, must l)e si:ppi,ii:i) as an inter- 
 mediate link between the priiicipal sentence and the hypothesis. Such hypotlieiiral 
 clauses are almost ahvavs ne'iaiire. bein^rrcLrnlarly introduced by ni. as: .Ma^rna iiominuni 
 pars eo ul le^'aiio siipplex liomam mitteretur, inrHndhat (supply 'id n'wd /actum esset'', 
 Td atietores defectifjiiis arertiftnc eolonias aconsiliis paci>. Liv. H, 21. — Campus Martins 
 re-stdbat (supplv '^/ dn'ixu^ tss't). ni4 \n-\n-^ cum fntre suo Antoiiiu^/'/.'/iv.W. Cic. Phil. 
 (>, .-).— Romam ferri protinus Siccium placPbat (supply ' id f/uod factum txset ') id deeein- 
 viri funus niilitilre piiblicil impensfl facere rnaturasxent. lAV.3,-i-i.—Ad/non?b((tu\orvs 
 nt hoc (pioiiue loco interitum elo(iuenri;e dfphrdnni (supply 'id quod J'tcittxtm' ov 
 " facerem'), ni vererer ne de me ip-o vidC-rer queri. CiC. Oil". 2. 10. — Rec pei;lre Annenhim 
 avTftjat (supply '<-t rtcepisuft), ni a Mar-o pio/nljitu< foret. Tac. An. 4. ll.—SfieraWitur 
 puijna (supply * el pu//niitu/neifitt'), ni Maroboduus casira in c<dles sufjd'uri'-xet. P). 2, 4»;. 
 
 'Z Rarely The thesis of conckssivk Si-clansi-s takes a hypothetical imperfect or 
 pluperfect indicative, willioiit beinj; potential (Obs. 2(1. 3): Si :,'iadiuin in Asiil non 
 strinHitseni, n hostes non ridixxem, taineii i)roconsul triumphum iti Thra<ia diiobus 
 prceliis tneruerain. Liv. 3S. 40. — At /tiam^i desertuin vadinMiiiuni esxet, tameii in istj 
 l)o^rIllati^>lle iin!)rol)is-'imus r-y^'Ti^^-l/r. Cic. (^iiincf. 18.— Anteclassicady sometimes the 
 p^-rfect indicative is used in this connection with hypothcttcal force, as: Decem cocasset 
 isi (=etiamsi vocasset) ad e<eiiam viros, nimiiim oh-it/ndrit. I*laut. Merc. 4.2, 3. 
 
 4. Sometimes hvpot helical Si-claiisei are made dependent on intkkikxjative ses- 
 TENCES with a i»iedicaie in the indicative, which pre<;naiitly contain a hypothetical 
 subjunctive by implicatim, as: Nam ni \t>i fnxet. cur lu .Apronium //<a/2/x/.v(|nain .Minuciuni 
 decumas sumere ( = "' \t<iv»>^et, caum nul'a /uixxtt cur tu ccti' Cic. Verr. 2, 3, (il. — AiAi 
 id facertt, cur Plato /E.i^yptum p^ra^pdvit f\ = c-MX^i\ non fui-set. cur etc.) lb. Fin. 5. 2». 
 —Nam fd verborum disceptatiOnis ri*sev.sv/;, quiit (=cur> fivdus Ha-drnl)alis cum Lutatil 
 priOie ftedere annparand-im erat f ( = cjmsii non luisset cur compnarctur). Liv.Jl, 10.^ 
 
 ~* Most «grammarians render this sentence (and all similar sentences) ' The nwther» 
 trerecoininfj\ siipposini? that, when this construction is used, the action is alwavs repre- 
 sented a< having' a 1 read v commenced, beinir iattrrupteil by the uclioii «»f tlie Si-ciause. 
 But in none of the pa.<sa'.:es extant, it Is even so much as intimated, that the principal ac- 
 tion had already commenced ; while in several i)assai,'es the contrary is evident. The 
 imperfect indicative sii.iply denotes that the action wm^ direct I ij impe ndinij (see p. 30J, It. 
 53). The hypothetical ihe'bis proper may always be supplied (see Ji. 48, Oas. 8). 
 
 IV. DirROPER CONDITIONAL PERIODS. 
 Rem. 47. Impi-oper coiulitioiial clauses ai-e those clauses introduced by 
 coiidiliotial coujuticlions, which are equivalent to other classes of clauses 
 or sentences. They chietly occur as equivalents of 1) Adversative prop- 
 ositions and CONCESSIVE clauses (Obs. 1-;}); 2) Temporal clauses (Obs. 
 4. 5) ; '6) That-Clauses and relative clauses (Obs. 6). 
 
 Obs. L Adversative conditional periods are those in which the thesis is represented 
 as not subject to the uncertainty or non-reality implied in the Si-clause, thus forming an 
 adversative opposition to it (=The action of tne clause may be doubtlul or non-real, 
 but the action of the thesis is dimbtless or real). In such periods the Si-clause gener- 
 ally has the force of an Efianid-clauxe (.vi = 'even \V). as : Si ego ab ilia deserar, tamen 
 in mea pristinil sententia permanebo; Even if I shall (should) be deserted by that body, 
 I shall yet persist in my former views. Cic. Att. 1,20, 3. Here the thesis is represented as 
 TMt subject to the uncertainty implied in the clause, and as true, whether the condition 
 is fultilled or not. At the same time, the thesis implies an adversative coordination, and 
 the dau.se has conces.s-ice sitrnitication. But in clauses of this kind, the concessive 
 meaning maybe so weak, that the clause cannot be properly rendered by 'even if, 
 as: ;s'i narbaiOrum est, in diem vivere, nostra consilia sem})iternum tempus spectare 
 debent (=The barbarians may live for the moment, but our nians etc.). Cic. Or. 2, 40.— 
 The Si-clan-e in arlver.-ative (concessive) periods may be, like an ordinary Si-clause, a 
 clause of doubtful reality, or of doubtless reality, or of non-reality. The mood and teiise 
 of the Si-clause are treated accordinc: to the rules of the coirespondiiig class of proper 
 conditional clauses. The /Ae.vi^, alth6ui,'h it is /it*;; contingent on the fulfilment of the 
 condition, takes likewise the same mood and tense, as if it were an ordinary condi- 
 tional thesis (for exceptions see 2f. 4«. Obs. 2«. 3 ; Obs. 28, 3). Concessive Si-clauses 
 of r/o'//'//^.**- r(?a/i/y correspond to E'-ti-clauses, which, from this reason, always take an 
 indicative. Concessive Si-clauses of doubtful reality, and ol n<m-reality correspond to 
 Etiamsi-clauses. Hence etiamsi always takes a subjunctive, if an ordinary Si-clause 
 would require a subjunctive of doubt fill reality or of non-reality.— Examples: 1. Doubt- 
 TV\. reality : (Jund-'i de Antonio non laf)07'dti'<, mihi certe. patres conscripti, consulere 
 debeiis. Cic. Phil. 12. 8, 10.— ^'i aliquando oculi peccant . Uxmen inest in eis vis videndi. 
 Il>. Div 2.52.-2. Dotbtless keality {si=ttA): Si tihi tortana non dedif, ut patrecerto 
 nascerCre, at natflra certe dedit nt non parum humanitatis habGres. lb. R. A. Iti, 46.— ^Si 
 Massilietises per deiecios sumtna ju-»iiiia rt-rpintur. inest tamen in ea conditiOtie simili- 
 tfldo quiedam servitutis. lb. Rep. 1.27.— 3) Non-reai.ity (^^=€/^aw.<f^) : <S'imihi numquam 
 amicus C. Cic-ar fuisset, si aspe)/iarit ur amieWhim meim. tamen ei non amicus esse non 
 possem. II). Pis. :i3. (The thesis ' =/ would be still his friend ' is real, but is placed in the 
 same hypothetical mood as if it were non-real). 
 
 Ous. 2. In concessive conditional periods, the Si-clausc is almost always a protasis, 
 aiid the thesis an aptodosis. (Jenerally the apodosi- (as in \)ro\ter concessive clauses) is 
 introduced by an adversative coordinating conjunction (tamen or at\, or by a restricting 
 particle (certe. saltern, atcirfe}. At. certe. and •<altem are generally used if the claus- is 
 nx/afive, or virtually so ; as: (Rogabat Caisar ab Ariovisto), .<i nullani partem GermamV 
 riiin domum reinittere posset, at ne quos ampliiis Riienum transire jiareretur. Cies. B. G. 
 1, 43.— .si pecunias lequare aon placet, n ingenia ouinia paria esse non possunt, juracer^g 
 j)aria debent esse eOrutn inter se, qui sunt cives in eadem civitaie. Cic. Rep. 1, 32. Nega- 
 tive condiiional clauses with concessive force are almost always introduced hy si with 
 a iiei:ation [si non, si nanus (=h non). si iiullus etc.] But in the following passaire ni^i 
 has the force of ttiamA non, the apodosis being introduced by 'et ipsvm\ where ipse 
 ( = even) imparts concessive force to niid. having at. the same time the meaning of an 
 adversative particle : Quod, nlH di mentem regi ademusent. et ipsuni intrentis difficnlta- 
 tis erat. Liv. 44. «.—Frequently concessive clauses introduced by si non or si minus, have 
 the same predicate as tiie thesis, in which instance the common predicate is expressed 
 oidv once, the .«^ame as in Etsi-clauses», as: Eorum desiderium si non lequo ammo, at 
 forti fera<. Cic. Fam. (J, 22, 2.— Ad eum liliiim ejus adduxit. ut iile si non omnem, at ali- 
 qiiaiii partem mierOris sui de/x)neret. lb. Sest. 3. 7.— Eadem ratiofuit Seslii, *i minus in 
 accusando, at certe in necessitate defendendie saltltis sua. lb. 42. 
 
 Obs. 3. Concessive Si-clauses often t.ake idiomatic forms : 
 
 1. Si is often combined with re/ (vet si=etiam.si). or with ?naxime (si maxime) having 
 a meaning similar to quanict^ (tif ever so much), in classical prose always with the sub- 
 , unctive, as: Ego vero, rel si pereundum/wi'>'.'^f<. .., scmel peilie tamen maliiissein quam 
 ')i- vincere. Ci(^ Sest. 1!).— Qui autem. n maxime hoc placeat. moderatius tamen id vo- 
 unt fieri ^who wish this to be done rather m(»deralelv, even if they like it ever so much), 
 lb. Fin. 1,1,2. Comp. lb. Verr. 2. 2, 08 ; 2,4,42; 2,5,8; Cat. 1,12; Sest, 30, 04. 
 
732 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 2 Tf the thesis is mqative. the nesation i«> frequently tran«ferrefl to the Si-clanse in 
 theform •//^.vi...7'/»'/<^//r = -notev.'n if. I., thi- con^tniciiou the thc*>is ohIut r^tauis 
 its i..-ati..n*. .'.-nlMallv if it pnc^<hs the cIhusc or it drops the ne^'ation if it jo'lo'i^ 
 tlie Si-claii^e us: OimiTiio iiisci amici? mm t.-mero solro. m n iwieinur (/indnn , 1 rto 
 «o^ creiuM-allv .'rnmble with my IrifiHls ^^m* i/ff"!/ 'lestn-r if (eqir.valriit to, )ut_ ^tn.uirer 
 lluia V/iam>i trierentur'). Cie. Phii.H, 5.-A<? peric.ilis v./i</f/// c()mpnlsus ad Lorum cau- 
 Kim me ailjiinir.Tcin, ;/e m .w/m//m '/"''i^"* «'^'-«''t «" tnemeitta co„>>(artnt. j'^-^' ": -jj- 
 n.-si ,„:e(ionil)Ur* pactum pro capite pretiiim non ^tt" ''"=*';' .n^-n 'J m- ^/Vn f-^ -^«nt^ 
 <./.v quiLn id non hceris. lb. OlV. :J. 'i!». 107. Ciup. ID. Fnv. 1. 81 . TO; Oft 3 1*>- ^; •-« • 
 Itaqiie /^f si j'trundl^simu^ qxid^ia no< somntu \\^\lvo< pntGinus. fc. uiymiOni>, >()innum ^\o- 
 
 Ih niil 5 <>-Vn. ne si sit quidein A'/zmcC >■^//i</^!f, ad i;ijberMaciila reipublioP accedtre 
 eiim patiCmur ? Liv. 4, 3. Comp. CMc. Phil. 12, 7. 15 ; Div. 2. 59, 122 ; Fam. 9. 5, 2 : Alt. U 
 10- Liv 4 4 • lb 42 41.— Someiimes (rarely) tht; ne-ation i.s n-peated even if the M- 
 clui^e oreVedes tiie tlie-is, as: Tiii ireiu-ri esse e<?o iriltus, uf. si cu/natn qmdem, non ;kw- 
 ^';,/^ t?c pTs &. -Qui pati, n^ si nat guidem, rwn potest. Sen. Const. 4, 8 -Somelime-; nee 
 with a Si-clause is used witli the fore»' of ne. ..q'ddem, as : Sapiens non iimeal > ^tc s% 
 patria deleStur y Non doleat ? Xec n delCta sit ? Cic. Ac. 2. 44. 
 
 Obs. 4 Tkmpokal clauses, in the followinLT instance?, mav take the form of con- 
 ditional clauses: 1) IMrely if a premise-, represented as < ;'"»>'''l*^'*: '•^'';;7,J'* 2i S',«.. 
 fuf'ire time in which instance a Quum-clause cannot jrenerally be replaced by a Si-claust , 
 as: .Si damnatvs eris, atque adeo (or rather) q>i>,m damnatus (Mms-nam I>^'B'Tatio cov- 
 DE.MNATIONIS QU.K poTEHAT KssK?-vir-is te ad iiccem cic. 1 "^^^^^'r.^enr. Cic W^^ 
 2 3 29 This rule however, is not always observed. Thus th(! Kn-rlish aftei with a 
 fuTure-perfect may be expressed both hy quum or si (but not by ;wv/r/»/a//o, as : Nunc 
 protieiscenmr ad n-liqua. .vi !)auca ante /*(fWm?/.s' a vobis. judices, deprecati. Cic. V err. 
 2 3 5 -2) If no d'tinih time is as.-ii:iu..l to an action, so tliat the consequence will be 
 true '"if it happen; at anv time', or ' whenever it happens \ it is <./tcn optional to use a 
 Si-clause or a Quum-clause (or Ubi-clause.. This is the case when the idea of the time and 
 that of ih.' coiidition are id^^ntical (' if »>ein-,' the same as ' when'), i. ^ when, by //w>/y 
 a.<suminnthe time of the action as definite, the condition must be considered asjuf^ntttd 
 as- Nulla nnvna 'ivitas quiescere i)otest; 4 foris hostctn n<m ha?^f, donii invciiit 
 Liv 30 44 lle'^ardiii" the ti ne of the ' non hahZre hostem' as come, the condition is at 
 once fiilftlied. So: CiTchleie suo sibi succo vivunr, r..s si m.n cadit Plaut. Capr. 1. 1. 13. 
 Hence in both passaires Quum-clauses may be substituted f..r the Si-clausc-> ujuuni forir* 
 hosJem n,)n habetr7'''''''- ros non cadit). Thus all of the indct n.t.- Quum-clausj's 
 Quoted n «;45 Ons 2, may be chanired into Si-claus.'s. and many of the indefinite Si- 
 clausesqu..ted p. 711. OBs.l5f«.l.,nuiybr turned iMtoQiiuniclauses,as:Si^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 «quinoctuinCapitoliumvetiennt (^qnuin qui...ven5runt). .V"" , .i//,: /riVi n, nd 
 factis verbis fivqlienter nt:lmur (=7'"^"'- • "timur). Comp.: Quod \ilqu>nn id quod 
 factum est. pluril.us de causis ratiun vidc-ri p..test. lb. Inv. 2 4.-Qms audeat de 
 homine paiillo majoribus opihiis pnedito j.idicilre y^/^///M =.^n ?•W.«^ Mbi de e" q"y'l 
 conseiis.iit causam esse dicendam ? lb. Clu. 55.-ll.it when he (indcn.nte) time of 
 an action is not conceived as identical with its reality, the Si-diuse cannot be replaced 
 bv a Quum-clause, as: .Si pat-namilias intest:lto »/*ori////-, familia pecut.iaque ejus 
 a-nifttinu esto. Cic. Inv. 2, 50. and Auct. Her. 1, 13. When the indefinite time of the 
 cfaii-e 'Si paterfamilias moritxr' becomes detinite. the condition, whether he lias left 
 a will or i/oMsi intestato moru.tr) remains still d<,ubt/ul, Hence VK^chmse inust be 
 introduced by *i, not bv vw?/m.-Qni summum bonum sic instiiuit ut ni^il habeat cnui 
 virtQ-e conjuuctutn, liic, si sifn ip<e r<,nse„nat, neciue amicitiam colere possi , nee 
 institiam. Cic. OlV. 1, 2. If thi- period be referred to time definite, it does '^o/ i"M> Y tl»c 
 lultihnentof the condition 'si sihi ipse consent iar^^■\ur\l ^''1» '•^'!"f'«i;'/<^"^^t['' ;3*'"':;: 
 tt Quum-clause would not be a.bni-sible. From the same I'JIV'^'P'^;- ^^|''';^;''^ ^^P^ '^ 
 sometimes used in~tea<l of h;/pothetical Si-clauses (see P; ^»-^-»- ^^- ^l^ =y' f »^ 'z.^'"; 7 
 clauses, 'efiani q>ntm' (efiam fam q>iam\ beini? used with the f«»rce of etianui. as. Qui 
 incoluni maritimas urbes, etiaui q>i>im cinpore manent ammo tanien excursant. cu. 
 Kep 2,4-'Vn etiam ^/m quiesceretis. cun.-taremini, timerCtis, qnmn ivmpub icam a 
 l>icino;osissimis sicariis esse oppres.am ri'/./e/i.s / lb. S,sr. :i^.-32. ^..nil.irly boh 
 Quum-clauses and Si-clauses maybe used if the clause f""»»'''^ '^ '^^•^■;;'/'2:'/.'>'JT'" "! 
 of an example by whicji a La'neraljvssmionjirthe^pj;nic^^ 
 
 ■~*'This~repetTiion of the ne-ation in concessive Si-claus-s is on the same principle »is 
 the repetition of the ne-ation when nequidem refers to members of the ?ame sentein t. r 
 when single members «.f a negative sentence are coordinated l>.y/^'r7v„ f '•?' .\-en this 
 of by et. et, or a'/t. . .nut, as : Non enim ,.r:etereundum est ne id quidein (not <;^^'' y»'» 
 must be passed over). Cic. Verr. 1. m.-Nihil ne in ips,l qnldeni p>ir)na imcuinie fccOiuul. 
 lb. Tusc. 4, 22.— Quibus nihil nee tictrius, nee ftedius eicogitari potest. ID. un. J, ». 
 
 EQUIVALENTS AND ELLIPSIS OF SI-CLAUSES. 
 
 733 
 
 j 
 
 Simplex conclusio reprehenditnr, ,<fi (or quum) hoc qnod peqniturnon videStnr neces- 
 pario cum eo quod aiitecessit coluerC're. Cic. Inv. 1. 46. C<>mpare with: Legitima est; 
 consiiiutio quutn (or sii in scripto ali(inid controversiae nascitur. Auct Her. 1,11. — 
 ]Slala(U'linitioest. qnuai (or->i) ant cominunia descrlbit hoc modo etc., aut falsiimqiiiddam 
 dicit. Cic. Inv. 1. 49.— 4) Clauses of repeated and contingent action (in En<:li>ii intro- 
 duced bv '?r^frjer<'r''). whether referring to time altogether indetinite, or to a definite 
 time-period when the time of each single action is indetinite, may be introduced by si {si 
 guando. 'if at any time '), or by the temporal conjunctions qu>(7H and utd (p. 329, Oes. 1). 
 Ors. 5. Si-clau>^cs sometimes occur in i)lace of Fact-clauses introduced hy quod (p. 
 005 fidl.i, and with the same svndetic antecedents as these (in eo si, literally 'in the fact 
 if\ i. e. 'in the fact that pe'rhapx'). to designate the fact as a doubtful futurity, as: 
 L)i.\Crunt, in eo verti p.iellai salQtem, si posiero die vindex injiirite ad tempus prtesto 
 esset. Liv. 3, 4fi.— .'\djccerunt, Scipioneiu in eo positam habuisse spein pacis, si Han- 
 nil)al ct Mairo ex Italia non revocarentnr. lb. 30, 'I'i.—Ta eo enim speni victori* verti, si 
 et loca opportOna et socii pneoccuparentur. lb. 35. 18.— Summa et perfecta gloria 
 constat «'.r iribus his, si dili<;it multitQdo. « fidem habet. m cum adiniratiOne quadam 
 honOre dignos putat. Cic. Oft'. 2, 9.— Similar is the use of Si-clauses in place of relative 
 clauses, being generally employed to imply a doubt whether such persjiis or things as 
 those to which the relative refers, really exist or not. These Si-ciauses take the same 
 adjective syndetic antecedents as Qui-claufes would take in their place. as: Moitem pro- 
 posuit, non eis solum qui illam rem >;es-Crunt, sed ti^ etiaiu si qui non moleste tulCrunt 
 (r^biit even lo those who were not dissatisfied with it, if there were any). Cic. Phil. 13, IS. 
 Pnechlrum nobiscum actum erit si P. K. non istuni majus in sese scelus concepisse 
 Btatuerit quani e/)s si qui istum sententia sua libeiaiint (rrthan those who may ab-olve 
 bim bv their votes, if there will f*€ any). lb. Verr. 2, 1, 4. — Dixit errSre (supply ^w) si 
 giii in bello omuls secundos rerum proventusexspect«'nt. Cies. B. G. 7, 29.— Errat n quis 
 existimat facilem rem esse, donare. Sen. V. li. 24.— «S'i quis habet causam celebritaiis a 
 l)atre acceptam.in /i«/tc oculi omnium conjiciuntur. Cic. Oft". 2, 13. — Diinissi-*qiie (i. e. eis) 
 « ^7/1 parum idonei essent. Liv. 42. 31.— Sometimes Si-clauses (like English If-clauses) 
 are usi,d as iNTEBUOfiATivR clauses, M having the meaning ' whether ', as: Caniniiis enim, 
 si quid ego scirem inlerrogarat, quod tu uesclres. Cic. Fam. 9, 6, 0. See p. 397. Obs. 10. 
 
 V. EQUIVALENTS AND ELLIPSIS OF SI-CLAUSES. 
 
 Heni. 48. As equivalents of Si-clauses are used 1) The Quum-clauses 
 nirntionod K. 47, Ous. 4.-2) The clauses introduced by dinn, dinnmodo, 
 and modo (p. 070 foil., Obs. 13 foil.)— 3) liKL.vTiVE clauses (Obs 1).— 4) 
 Pauticipi.vl constructions (Obs. 2).— 5) Subject-infinitives (Obs. 3).— 
 G) Certain pakticles or other members of the sentence (Obs. 4. 5).- 7) 
 Independent sentences, asyndetically fidlowed by the thesis (Obs. 7). 
 Sometimes hyp()Tiii:tical Si-clauses are eniirely omitted and merely 
 implied by the hypothetical mood of the principal predicate (Obs. 8). 
 
 Obs. 1. Relative clauses (especially those introduced by indefinite relatives) sometimes 
 h^ive the force and the moods (»f conditional clauses, as : (^uie qui sine ccnnparaiioiie 
 illorum spectdret, .satis m^zwa dice ret (=si quis sptctdrcl. dicertt). Cic. Brut. 47. — In qua- 
 cninqur enim ^ahquis) plane clauderet. orator esse non posset {=si quis claaderet etc.). lb. 
 b'J.—Jlirarttur qui tutu c^rnertt 'Cos) tarn fene genii objectos. Liv. 34. 9. 
 
 Obs. 2. The participial constructions used with the force of conditional clauses are 
 either ordinary participles airreeing with their loirical subject in the thesis, or ablatives 
 absolute, as: (^uie vinientia metuuntur eadem, afticiunt aegritudine instantia ( = qua3 me- 
 tuuntiir si reniunf. eadem ;egritu(line afticiunt ihomines) .i instant). Cic. Tnsc. 4. ti. — Cui 
 coiicedeiidiim est ot-menti (=4 qemit). lb. 2. 7.— Qiu-e creso-ntia vitiosa sunt, eadem sunt 
 vitiO-a naxci-ntia. lb. 4, IS.— Ilac de causa coustitiierat, sigua inferentilius resistere. prior 
 i)rfelio non laces-jere (=resistere hosfibus si signa inferrtnt). Cie-^. B. C. 1,S2.— Qu<»nam 
 ille modo distractus es.-iet. taiuo scelere non modo /)f->yVc/o, sed t-tiam cogiidtop ( = si tan- 
 tum scelus non modo ])trt'ect'nn sed etiam co/ifatuni e<set). Cic. Dej. .5. 15.— An ego in' 
 hac urbe o^-e possim his pulsis qn\ nie hiijus urbis compuiein leccruut ? (=si hi pulsi 
 tint q:ii). lU. Sest. l>9. 
 
 Ods. 3. Subject-infinitives have the force of hypothetical clauses when the principal 
 predicate is oiie of the potential impersiuials nienti(med A\ 4<i. Ou?. 24. a'-: Si homines 
 ratiouem a deo datam in fraudem conveitunt, non dari illam qiiaiu dari humano geueri 
 vulius fait {=melius fuisset 4 ratio non data esset). Cic. N. D. 3, 31, 78. Comp. the exam- 
 pies quoted li. 4«, Ol'.s. 2t foil. 
 
 Obs. 4. Particles, adverbial expressions, and other members of the sentence frequently 
 
'*» 
 
 734 
 
 CONDITIONAL CL;VUSES. 
 
 EQUIVALENTS AND ELLIPSIS OF SI-CLAUSES. 
 
 735 
 
 pcforn. the office of a «vpojm.kt^.. c|a.j^ in wlud^^^ %X 
 
 lypoih.Mical sub unctlv(^a*lt aconipletehyi m^^^^^^ 
 
 pop.iU. jiKlfX q.ii ^efHirutrn ^^'*''^l''^i^l^^J''f!',Z^^^ aiuuLf, idem j.uii 
 
 c vitas ulla UUorein imiumu» i. .«^.o ^--'; ' .y" - 7 - . , _.,„.,. trif'tia/'/i^vn^ a» innu 
 aliiul accessisset). Liv.4o,-2o.-bu'o C ^-'^^f^^"^^./.' ' ,''^„ uj eV II) Plane. :i9 -Placvluvi 
 
 Saev« .ervo, qut occldii ba urul m 1.»^ li,.manns 
 
 ScievsiJ servo, qui occiuil .^'"""^''^ "' //''[V; nui ccl.lit Satiirnf.iuiu, eques Il<)mann> 
 fuL^-'et). Cic.IUb.Pinxl.il.,— I auurM)ciu<>m uberrlmi, et pax dm 
 
 7/«inicc //c#fo[.»/. v.-M ■•; .^/ / :_'»i; noiwiiin »'s; hiec le"a'i<» talis inairiuiin i>iacn- 
 
 rtl^^su^ ma-mim iwicularn '^''f < ^.T^l- •;PJ^^'^;"V^^^ o;i _SonK'tinu':* adverbs 
 
 it/m ..v/, et esset^etiavi^ T?': ^m^^Js wl e ib.^hy^^^^^ takes ,he place 
 
 take the place of a hypotli.^tical ^^;;^ ;;/;'. V./corm en Q Ilorti-nsio dUimlartm ( = 1 
 ;;^.Sld^E'ir:Sy mS^^'l^^mM^^^Ah^ in person). Cic L.M.... 
 
 "oBs. 5 «:; b^ion^s L particle -^--tjj.^i^^^-^-./^S'iH.iKrs;;;:; 
 
 or single members of a >^•'"t^'M^'^,P ^^^;-;';; ^ "e be «m times by the Auc- 
 
 is first used by Terence (in =1 *>"f;l^ l'= r'';f, ; morrfmi umt V h^ Livv (not in Ciesar), 
 TOH ad IIKKENN. and by ^''^'^'^ •';;^V [J "^^ 
 
 and the writers of the silver a-e If '"t.ro(liicin^ a co upiY»^ represent in- an ar- 
 
 ^es both the foree.of a 00^. ;m«/^.7 c^^^^^^^^^ „,Hod be- 
 
 fn- always conv.Mtible into a ^-"^'Ht^ ona en i v '^^ ; ;^^'^,f;^/ /,^,^ ,^„ jar.nm. imilto 
 Y,roieef>m>lerem^'Mv^nmiMn; r^''']l^^f^y\l\l^^^^^^^^ \ would not lend you an 
 
 oboliis; mucfi ^'^•''•\ ^^'*V' ^^ I;. 1 Ln ^^^^^ b ii'tiii-nislied: 1) The akgumentlm 
 constructions of this k„,d three ^^\\; f ^^f ' ": ,, \, ,/ . 1" ,,, n etc. . which is n-ularly 
 A M.uoKH. contained in l»'^\ P''^'^^'^^'"; J f' ';*'' .^ predi' ate in tli<" indicative 
 
 ner;ance or virtual y so j^^^l^/^^y -" ^f ^^V^'^J i^^'i^ii.,? Ivhi.-h n-p-vsents th. pr.- 
 or subjunctive— -^) ^ "^^'' ,'^ ^/ ^•//, ic «/i/ /h^ ca<te) at the same iime implyin'.^ 
 
 cedin-' statement as a S.-clause 1««;'^. ,^ .f, V Zf^^?umT%nvch l..<s can it be the case 
 that the subse(inent statement is %Xl oux^^^^^ propositi..!» introduce by »6- 
 
 that elc.).-3) Th.« coNcMfsio ad ^ .^^ ". ^,^'' f ^. ^.^\;" f '^..'//.^^ n„n-reaiitv>, with a condi- 
 dum. which is either a l'y.l>'>t»"'V''''V v/ n^ Vr i to oV^ 4 \n ore ralvlv) a potenthU 
 
 assertion. The predicate ol the ^ "V/'Vi .h.- i - ui.dl rst . ,,! is in tne impkufect, but 
 the subjunctive whn-h il ;' hn>^^^^^^^^^ If it is merely 
 
 may also be in the present, accnlu i; ^ '^/"'^ * '/ ^ ,i,„K-ti v.- Ekami-ues. 1. The con- 
 a />^'-'/V^^.---^t'on, the predicate^ sM^ ^''i£;^^U^^"am^ur, numquam sufT.rre eji.s 
 clu-ion bt-uii,' a thesis op ^"^-?*'''*''7^ •, ^„i^ ,);* ' ^^ ,„iilto minus tu iHist^ix. t'i an.a- 
 ptusqueat ; ne^lum V.p<^i^ ^^>^tr^^:^^ i,„„iWns rebuH 
 
 nussU). Ter. H^'au. 3. l,4i -hi cum nniti ni- >um ,antuhs viribns co«a- 
 
 sum 
 
 p:irariOrcs venTrent ; ned>j>n ""P^^^m orbis tcrr^^^^^^^^^ ^^,^^. ^ ,,,„^. 
 
 're.t'<ri = ^x v.l C'l "\fl/n turns tarn ex.i^us^c^^^^^^^^^^^ , ansferre. Ai.et. Her. 
 
 lis copiis vemrenf, si in aninu^ ^''^''^' '»' » 'n J ec O M t^llus vim tribui.iciam susti- 
 
 mari et via facile sit, abesse ab injuria temporis (-^i in tccti* iri„u. uo 
 
 1 
 
 viulfo minus injiiriam efurjias si in mari nariges). Ib.Fam. 16. 8,3.— SingulSris homo 
 j)rivfltns vix facile sesc rejjionibus officii ma<;nis lortanis et copiis continet : nedum isti 
 ab liiillo electi colOni, Capme, in domicilii» superbise. collocati, non statini conguisituri 
 ^i/^/ aliqiiid sceieris et tla<;iiii (=« VaytuiE coUocentur). lb. Aj,'r. 2, 85.— Quippe secunda 
 n-s >apiriiiium animos raiTL!:aiit (=:ne sapienios qiiidem fortanam ferre possuiit). nedum 
 illi c.MTUptis moribus victoriaj temperdrent (i. e. si occasio eis oblaia esset victoria abu- 
 tendi). Sail. Cat. 11, 8.— Ke<rii we ex medio quidem cornua sua couspicere potermt; ne- 
 duia extremi inter se compicertniur. Liv. 37, 41. Com p. lb. 28. 40 ; llor. A. P. «3 ; Prop. 
 1, 1>. 31.— 2. Ti e conclusion bein;? potential : Albam nnde ipsi oriundi erant e fiinda- 
 nicntis proruerunt ( = .\ll)ie non pepercemiit) : ncd'ini eos Capuie par>flro8 credam (much 
 less could 1 btlifiv-). Liv. 2t), 13. — Attonitu» inopinSto malo vix quid ol)jicer6nir intelli- 
 <rere potui ; nedum satis xciam qiiomodo me tuear. lb. 40. 15.— Nee tamen Epaminondie 
 permitlerSmus, ne si extra judicium qiiidera esset, nt is nobis sentenfi;im legis iiiierpre- 
 taretnr, ?uduin nunc ismm patidmur. quum praesto lex sit, Cic. Inv. 1, 39. See Liv. 26. 2ti. 
 
 Obs. r». In Livy and the writers of the silver age (once or twice also in Cicero) nedum 
 connects two single membeh-- of the same sentence, the firsfof the two members con- 
 t.iininira ncL'ation. as: In Sicilia re<rnum ad Ilieronymiim translatum. ^wcrum rixdum 
 libenatem. nedum dominatiOnem modice latQrum (a boy who would hfirdly brook free- 
 dom, much less a throne). Liv. 24, 4.— In arcem, qu;e rix capere, 7?fd?/m tu6ri, tantara 
 niultiiudinem posset. lb. 3«j,24.— Quin voces quoque aiidltas esse, OEqre inermem taiitam 
 miiltitiidiiiem.«fe</M/rtarmatim, sustinCri posse. lb. 6, 7.— T7xclamOrem, w^rfi/m impetnm, 
 Siiesst'tani tlll6n^ lb. 34. 20, 7. — Nulla simulacra urbibus suis, nedum templis, siiiunt, 
 Tac. Hist. 5. 5.— Virtus sic contra (;asus indflrat ut nee incliliari, nedum vinci, pos^it. Sen. 
 Coiist.5.— Quinctiiis, quem armdrum etiam pro patria satietas teneret ( = qui arma pro 
 patria sumere jtfUlet), nedum adversus patriam. Liv.7, 40.— Someiimes the sentence to 
 which nedum refers has the form of a question, rirtually nesaiive, in which instance it 
 cannot properly be rendered 'much less', as: quid autem tuto culquara, nedum sum- 
 mam rempiiblicam permit ti, si ratio non sit reddenda ? If no account is to be rendered, 
 nothing can be >afely entrusted to anyone, and certainly not the government of the re- 
 public. Liv. ;i8, 50.— Sometimes (rarely) the member preceding nedum contains no nega- 
 tion, in which instance nedum has the force of ' much more ', as : Quae vel socios, nedutn 
 hostes vlctos, tcTrCre jw^.-^ent ; Which might tcriily even allies, much more a deleated 
 enemy. Liv. 45. 21J.— AdiiLuinues etiam victis Macedonibus graves, nedum victoribus. 
 lb. !>, 18. Coinp. 'I'ac. An. 13, 20. Sometimes, in this instance, nedum is used with the force 
 of ne dicam (see p. «i:i8, Obs. 3), as : Non voco autem sapientem supra quem quidquam 
 est, nedu/n voliipias ; I do not call him a wise man a]>ove whom there is anything (wlio 
 is subservient to anything), to say nothing of pleasure ( =much less do I call him wise 
 who i,s subservient to pleasure). Sen. V. li. 11. In the passage Cic. Fam. 7. 28. 1. quoted 
 j). G3S, Oks. 3, nedum is yeneraily taken lor ne dica?n, but it may al?obe rendered 'much 
 less \ ilie negatiiMi l)eiiig implied in the comparative member ' quam tola Pelojmuiesus ^ 
 ( =:not the whole Pelopi>iiiie>us can be onipared with Home, much less Patne)*. 
 
 Sometimes (rarely) nedum coordinates a clause (eiiher an Ut-c!ause, or a Si-clause): Ne 
 voce qnidem incommoda. nedum ut ulla vi-^ fieiet. i>auiatim permulcendo tractandoque 
 mansueleceraiit j>lehem ( =nedum ita ut iIk fieret, much less by ajtplying any violence). 
 Liv.3, '.l,(i. — CnncGilaiit niilii omiics oporiet. factarum alicpiaiHlo virum bonum ut 
 mendacium dicai, et qnidem nonnnmqtiam levioribus causis. nedum n ab homine «icci- 
 dendo i.'ra>saior urertendus nt (=and much more so if a desperado is to be prevented from 
 coMimitting a murder). Quint. 12, 1, 3.S.— In the j)assage Tac. Dial. 10. ' ?/6(/'7m m^ per tot 
 l)roviiKias innotesCat', nedum is a conjecture for the senseless '7nedium\ 
 
 Obs. 7. Two propositions may be asyndetically coordinated, so that the first of the two 
 has the force of a conditional clau>e. and the subsequent one that of its thesis. The 
 luoctdsof the two propositions, in this construction, are the same as if the conditional con- 
 junction had_beeiM3xpress]y added, as: Id quod scis prodesl, nihil id quod nescis,6>6e.'?i.^ 
 
 * There are traces which seem to indicate that nedum was colloquially used in place 
 of * non modo'. Put the reading in the two passages where this usaire seems to occur, 
 is very doubtlnl : Tu quoniam (^nartana cares, et nedum morbuin removisti. sed etiam 
 gravedincin, te vegetem nobis in CJnecia siste (Since you are free from the quartan 
 fever, and have removed not only your sickness, but even indisposition, present yourself 
 hale in Greece, Cic. Att. It), Ki. Here the Cod. Mediceiis, which is the best manuscript 
 authority for the letters to Atticus, read.s novum instead of nedum, and others have con- 
 jectured 'non modo\ Some render "vedum' by "not to say\ which would be mean- 
 ingless in this |>assage.— A^t/^/^>i hominum humilium. ut nos sumus, sed etiam amplissi- 
 mOrum virorum con>ilia ex eventn prol)ari solent. Cic Att, 9. 7 ^. Here nedNm is a 
 conjecture, the codex Mediceus exhibiting 'tneirm\ which is senseless. If Cicero wrote 
 '■nedum\ it lias eiiher the meaning "not oidy\ or the two members must be reversed 
 ( =^vel amplissimOrum virorum, ne dicam humilium, consilia). 
 
730 
 
 C0N1)ITI0N.\L CLAUSES. 
 
 COORDINATION OP CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 737 
 
 nior fui--evide[lrr. !»>■ ^ err. 2. 3, 2 -\ nn o^''^^^^^ hvpo.luMual con.tniclu.n^ wit i 
 
 a pn..eut .uhjuuctivc '}^f:i!l"i;i'^^^^^^^^ u nun 1 fv q.ndc.n di^MUua .najur. a luiuo 
 
 iu-.)ti()putet? ^H^^ar.5,2..W.-^o in n>c njP'^^^^^^ ,,„vver). in loro sallant. 
 
 Ib"()tV.3. 1«...-With l^ypotl.et.ca! plnperfc^^ . V ^ /'^^^^^- acri<n.sef i ^if e.ther ot 
 
 t^ilinm certo uon ^/<;;^/i.s.s-^<. p-.^ \^ ;^„,. .' "vo had happened \ accordi..- to Ob.*. 1), 
 thetwohadhappe.ud; or'uW^^je f^^^ ^1/ ^„^ t^,„ proposition, cmi- 
 
 member of the clause except by the ^^y\''' ^^^^^^^^^^^^ iTo.n the c<.nuecti(>n, 
 
 Uiis instance the content, of t»ie chui.e uler.tm^^^^ ^^^^.,^^ lallere (i 6. .i 
 
 L: Nam ilia amphibolia q.ue Cro^s ni decx it ncI^^^^^^^^ cullilta e^sent. quod vjx 
 
 tale oraculum accepis.et) Cic. ^'^ji: ;••- /^"Ji\,ft^f,uo i Kc.nulni vix ausi essent, st in 
 lionu-lnus toties victor auchref, » 'J-\,5^"";^, ^t,' nnm^ qtio>* l»'<^'lio elVu-eraut «pios 
 Sam..itiiim loco f>ns,enf). Liv, 10, -U-M^^^^ <^'r- V^' " "^' 
 
 Cie.ar fortas.e serms^et (x. e. ^ ' j /^ ' f ^^If ^'.'^Vj.S \i. e. « rohrU^eO. lb. Brut. 41 - 
 29.-Atque hand ^'Cio an par 1'" ; 't'^ '^ '7c-aa c^^^^ tanta ne.putia ^^^^>'^^l^'!^ 
 
 Non modo unTu8 P^^t'^^^^iV' 'U^•1^ o- romn n H^^^^^^^^^ 44. ItVJ ; 7f,.-2(i3: Orat. 3(», 10b ; Or. 
 issef (i. e. .i hal,.i^), l^.}y^- ?dV,^" al Mib unetlves nu.n.io,Ved p. 3T^Ons. 4 a.: 
 
 n'ed p. 3T!>, 
 dixerit. 
 
 Ons. 4, a."»: 
 
 i.sef (i. e. .si hab'um'O. i». ' " ' th /;mte iUVuh in(tives mention' 
 
 esseaquam. lb. Ofl. 3, -^^.-Ca Quid «uaisrc^^^^^^ .arripere.^ piUri ( =y<^" 
 
 VI COOUmXATlON OF CONDITIONAL CL.VLSES. 
 Ran 40. The coo.-.linatio,. of cmlUional clauses if^^l^^^l^^^:^ 
 
 coonlinatioii of co.ubt.onal P''"-)"^'^' ^ '' ^Xrrs tivc c ninncUon : a.ul 
 „,a,l. by «• non. or ''.'""'''''■.^yi 'l " '^^ ,f,t ''Trm 's^ <-„or- 
 
 I ifof two co„,V,,ion:n p,.r,o,U. a,U.,.r.,.|vHy co<^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Soe O,^^ 2) o^ si mln,.^ U used in this «"Stance ^^;. ^^e O' e ronim. Ci'-. Fin. 5.2S.- 
 beatusmmerit; .si mala f.on sunt, -If f *>'"'!:;,[; ,' /;', ; «c ..-is. i-noscam. lb. Fam. 
 
 ISlI^^ri. id quod o^''--^^ '";^f ';;;!;;J;^^^" 1^^ ^ '"u^^ /i^;: »'abes. ne tu qu - 
 
 K iq -2 -Si habes quod lupu-iit. ne(iui u>p<n w«.. .. . . j^ almost a wav. used if 
 
 den pereipis. lb. Ac. 2, ^«l.-Ni mu... }''^>'"'- ';!^::,;/' ,i'!^cCpi .ns aceui n ' posset ; si 
 the predicate o! the netrat.ive <" ^;f J^ '^//'''^ ^''^'^2. -iV J i^ nccur.am : sin 
 
 f,nn>l<< (=si tion posset), t'xlut as facere ^^'^f ;,?'„,,,,, veniam, quam pet.., dederit, 
 miuNs. neutiquain neccsf^e erit. tic. ^^ -^; •^'. •,;•,,,:;/,/ ,,,. ip.o. lb. Att.i». 14, l.-A c-.m- 
 u ar illTus cdndilione; si "'^"^- 'l^l^^.^Vr/he < con^ <lanse \s /..//^//ir., while 
 
 mon i)redicate may a so l>^V'^tV Vn tVic V//i //'" " •'^c-d. as : Ttrum cetera iM.m.na 
 the s<!rond is afllrmative. In tin* 1"-»«";'^^ nnom< do tabulas conf.cis ? Si t-fiarn (but 
 in codicem di-esta »>abes an non ? A o« q^^^^^^^^^ cic. Rose. Com. 3. 
 
 it you have), quamobrem hoc nomen u «' ^^'^: '« ' '. ^,i,,,,y eof.rdinated: 1) If the 
 Obs.2. iVTsimaybe used i"/.<>n'l>"7.^:i l^fj^' :;"*iVJ\^^ .^^^^ IMt. deleStur 
 
 ^S4^^<^^^rJi;r^aSr ^^it '^S!:-^^ ^elnCS^uJ vincet. Cic. Att. 10, T. 1.- 
 
 Bellum comparat snis civibns, exltiabile nisi vicerit, calamitGs^um eiianisi vicerit. lb. 
 10. 4, 3. Ct»inp. lb. Clu. 6, 18.— 2) If the conditional clauses have diffi-rtht subjects, as : 
 Afffvu/n (the one) si fit, intolerabile vitium cht : alteram (the other) nisi lit, dissipata et 
 ineuita est oratio. Cic. Orat. m, 220. [ I'he i>assa-,'e: Si exerceas nientem, conteniur; 
 ni^i exerceas, rubisinem contraliil. Fi-^m. Cat. Mor. (Geil. 11, 2, 2) is mi!^quoted iu 
 Allen's Lat. Gr. p. ITl. Iu all tuc texts stands si nou.] 
 
 Obs. 3. If a conditional period is opposed to a precedinjr conditional period, the clanse 
 bcin" ajfirmative, Xhe second clause may he introduced hy si. or si autem, si vero.a^: 
 Pouia ex arboribuH, « crudaeunt. vi avelluntur, si mafura, decidunt. Cic. Sen. 19,71. 
 But «'cnerally the second clause, in this instance, is introduced by sin, sin antem, or sin 
 rero1.i\^tt hy sfd sin), which form is also (sometimes) applied if the clause is ne«rative, 
 as: Ilunc inihi tiinorem eripe; si est veras, ne oppfi/nar: sin/alsus, ut timere desinam. 
 Cic. Cat 1 7, 18.— llli de retinendis suis fortflnis .si eriint seeundie, ^^/i a'//*^m adversae, 
 de periculo commonendi erunt. lb. T. O. 27, m.—Si liberari mortis inetu possnmus, id 
 a-'Smus; sin id mm potest, nunc, si videtur, hoc (a«,'amus) etc. lb. Tusc. 1, 11, 23.— 
 ifefendet te si poteiit; stJi id minifs poterit, iiej^abit. lb. Inv. 2,29.— Sometimes Sm- 
 C'au-es are used if the precediiii; clause \» rirt milt i/ conditional, especially if it is intro- 
 duced bv an indefinite relative, as: Qnicqitid statueris, te niihi amlcnm, shi id quod 
 opto, ctiam amicissimum judicilbo. Cic. Fam. 5, 19. 2.~/Vr.s'?«i(/6C nti Jutrurtham maj?i- 
 vifi (=if possible) vivum, sin id parum procedat, necatum sibi iradereut. Sail. Jug. 4t), 4. 
 
 Obs. 4. A PIS.JUNCTIVE coordination of conditional jHriods U used to represent two or 
 more conditions as ai.teukatives. for each of w inch a diff"erent consequence is asserted, 
 so that each of the clauses has a diferent thesis. Each of the conditional clauses (which 
 are always clauses of doubtful reali'ii/) is introduced by sive (sea), or the one by sire, and 
 the other by si. Generallvthis method of coordination is contrary to the Euirlish idiom, 
 which either requires a clianire of the (/i.<;/'//«'^ir^ into an adversative coordination (iu 
 which instance the idea of di.«junctioii issacriticed), or transforms the condiiional clauses 
 intodisjunctivepropositionsindependentof the coordinated theses, as: Eis ,stre creditur, 
 creditnr hoc ipsum quod nos artruimus; «re fides non habttur. de adversani testium fide 
 dero"atur. Cic. Ciec. 1, 3; = 1) If these are believed (by the judge», the very thing is 
 belicA-ed which we charge; but (or?) if no faith is jdaced in (hem, we weaken the trust- 
 worthiness of the adversary's wit nesses. 2) These are either btlit-Ttd or not ; in the former 
 instance the very thin<; is believed etc. : in tfie latter instance we weaken etc.— 6"ir<' enini 
 ad .«apieniiam i.ervenlri potest, non j.aranda nobis solum ea, sed fruenda etiam sapientia 
 est • sive hoe ditlicile est, tainen nee modus est ullus investigaudi veri, nee etc. lb. 1, 1,3. 
 —Nam sire timuit, quid ignavins? sive ineliorem suam causam illOrum ctede fore 
 pni.lvit.quid injusiius? lb.' Att. \<,\),Z.—Sni vicit. ferociter instat viciis ; stu victns est, 
 instaurat 'um victorilms ceriSmen. Liv. 27, 14. Comp. lb. ;if>, 5; Cic. Tusc. 1, 1^.42; tin. 
 1 <j 20 —Disjunctive conditional clauses of this kind regularly have their predicates in 
 the indicative. But thev mav take a subjunctive either according to the general rules 
 (if subolilicpie etc.), or according to the rules on conditional clauses of doubtful reality 
 (p 709, Obs. 11. foil.), as : Sive enim ZenOnem sequare. magnum est efticere utquis intelli- 
 gat etc.: si vero Academiam jiersequamur, quam erit acQie explicanda nobis! Cic. Ac. 1, 
 2.7. Tlei-e a subjunctive is used in the first clause, because the predicate is in tne 
 second person denot in ir an indefinite person; the second clause takes a subjunctive of 
 improbability, the speaker having declared before, that he would probably not com- 
 ment on these subjects. 
 
 Obs. 5. If merely the conditional clausks are disjunctively coordinated, each of the 
 clauses referriip' to the same thesis, thev are introduced by ihe same conjunctions (sive.. . 
 j!/r6 t/c ) as wheii whole periods are coordinated; but the conjunctions are, in this in- 
 stance, rendered by ' whether. . .or \ or by ' be it that. . .or that ' ( = ' H the one alternative 
 is true, the thesis holds good; if the other is true, the thesis holds good likewise ). 
 The moods of these clauses (bein<j: always of doubtful reality) is regularly the indica- 
 TiVK The j.redicate of the disjunctive clauses may be either dift'erent for each clause, 
 or common to all, as : Veniet tempus, et quidein celeriter, sire retractdbis. sive proj)er(i- 
 bvi Cic. Tusc. 1. :W.— Ex isto moibt) convalesces, sive adhibueris medicnm, sive non adtii- 
 bii>ris. ib. Fat. 13.— .S're- hTc confictum est, ut appSret, sive rnissvm domo est, ut dicitur, 
 commovebor. Ib. Flacc. 16.— Hoc loco libentissime utor, m'<? quid mecum ipse cof/ito, 
 sive aliquid scrif^o aut It-r/o. lb. Leg. 2, 1.— CenturiOnes, sen vere (piam habuerant opiniO- 
 nem perferunt sive eiiam puribus Vari serviunt, confirmant totlus exercitus animos ali- 
 CnosesseaCuiiOne. C;es. B. C. 2,27.— Probabile est quod fere solet fieri. *iiy id falsuin 
 est. sive verum. Cic. Inv. 1, 29.-»-»S'av ilia vestis mutatio ad liictuin ipsOrum, sive ad depre- 
 canduni valibat, quis umqiiam tam crudelis fuit qui prohibCret quemquain mairgre ? Ib. 
 Sest. 14 — Superstitio instat et uriret, et quo te cunque verteris, persequitur, sive tu vatem, 
 sive tu omen audieris, sive immoldris, sire avem aspe^reris, si Chaldanim. si haruspicem 
 videris, si fulsent etc. lb.Div.2,72. Comp. Cic. Brut. 72, 251 ; Orat. G8, 228; Coec.31,90; 
 
738 
 
 CONDIllONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 T iv 4 9 -The «tiMuncfire occurs in these clauses for the same reasons as in thcflisjunc- 
 [i^t;SrdSion'^>rwh;^e per.od. a)B.. 4), as : QnH.Uo esse ..t.us chxOr.nU u^^^^ 
 rr\itt..re le.'-ltos .sw (iisceutfire, .n>v< ro-nre seiiatun» 7n(illei>t. Ij\. .15. .U-P. >tn proimis 
 
 S'e .ti locus e.set. Il..:^»,l (s..bjunctive of cont.nu-eut •y'7"i"^,X^' 'r./J^£-,; f, ,^ 
 c< miKire: Cato. ^^ causa orauda exM, eloquenti^^simu^ uat ^*^/ •^;\'^" -." ,;,V,; ^^^^^ 
 t e diovnaric expres.iou -r.lU »o/if ' (u.ay he wish it or "*>'^/^»;^''^i',^'7 ': i • • a" * 
 steal of ^nvevelit,nve uolit\ hein- suh unctives «ccordn.- to p. «1*^' V»^v »H 4' 
 Ilnnc it^a lu..diltum necesse e.t, vtlit nolif, seqiuTtur hilarita« cont.uua. ben. \ . B. 4 
 OBs (5 Verv frenuontly nre. ..Hre disjunctively coordinates That-clauses causal ami 
 
 /•,>•. iniiptioim Sire in the constructions mentioned Ob». 4 and .>, lias ini '"'^^^."' .,,* 
 \ Pr TTw^\^^^^^ conjunction, the coordination hein- made by the 
 
 { nTrireii^rlmn ri« spe Mintis i/.ii'/r/j, prima niicie e cabins i-gre«i ad Khcniim c m- 
 Ob" in,"" b. S" .i .™ »-/«»a vctri. Liv. U. IS.-Ouinque o.n.ilMO "^■"■"t <i;; »W'^. " 
 
 md^ni"!S^ri^^i'^uaL ab uumrs p.ur.o,.u, cuu.id«rire pnucp.um, rcpcr,.mu« 
 
 etc. Cic.Inv. 1,1. ^ „ ,• » *i,„ ci 
 
 OBs 7 Antedassiral is the use of dve=rel si fo that ?vZ does not conrdinate the 5i. 
 
 c/^": buMlli'^A^.i^ on which the ^-<^^-^ ^^ ^^Xltl^ "In cri^I^Sc^rSSJe^:^ 
 
 ^sp<,n-u,n ' te7f;oS;5K ^n^fe inlrSJ/cJS.a: rcJd;> q ui um '-»-m judicem ;.e^oU, 
 
 '=';/1t JJ 'as^''?ll,fd';.od^^^^^ ' .ive Hire '^ irrideut Cic. C>c-. 2.3 .according to a very 
 probable conjecture, the manuscripts having the senseless ^ uibe ). 
 VII PVRTICULAU USAGE OF CONDITIONAL CONJUNC- 
 
 TIONS AND CLAUSES. 
 Rem 50 There are several idiomatic usages of the coiulitional con- 
 junctions nisi and *i, and conventional usa-es in regarc ^'^'^^^^^ 
 ofconditi.mal clauses, whicli more or less deviate trom the English idiom. 
 Or^ 1 XUi rnever id) is often used with coordinatinc; force, to kestiuct a preceding 
 or'^^ubs.q.ferA esp'iallV negative, .taten.ent,rep,.^ 
 
 ^^:^^.S:tr£^ ;;^/;;tStKes^s:'S! 5r-;^p!^iss:i:ria 
 
 abLr^viat?d clauses (Uks. 4) ; 4) single members of a «eutcnce (Ons. 5-b). 
 
 Or« 2 The sfntences introduced by nUi have sometimes the value of independent seu- 
 teS,beTn^Teirh^ to the preceding Bubsequcut Beutcuce m the logical 
 
 rARTICULAR USAGE OF CONDITIONAL CONJUNCTIONS. 739 
 
 relation of a condition to its thesis. In this instance nisi has an AnvEnsATivE and re- 
 etrictiui.' force, similar to the cocirdinatiiifr rjvamquam (p. <i9S, Obs. VI), by which it may 
 beolieii replaced, beintj generally rendered by 'hoicev€r\ or ' buV. If so used, it is 
 generally connected with tainen. the jjrecediiig sentence which is restricted by it (and 
 which sometimes is underi<tooil) being ner/ative. The proposition thus introduced by 
 nUi «>r nisi tiwien^ since it is an independent sentence, has its predicate always in the 
 indicative, as : (^iiid est quod C'apitOnem })rimum scire voluerit? Ne^eio. vin hoc video, 
 CapitOtiem in his Ijonis esse sociiim ; I do not know ; but Oioiverer) this I see that Capito 
 is his partner in this property. Cic. It. A. .'i.5.— I)e re w?7it/ possum judicjlre ; nin illud 
 mihi certe jtersiiadeo, te, talem virum, nihil temerc fecisee. lU. Fam. 13, 73, 2.— iViAt/ 
 niihi gratins facere potes. nif^i tamen id eAt gratissimum, si, qua» tibi maudavi, confece- 
 riu. lb. Fam. 5, 14. — Kciiiidim iiec cur ille tantopere conteiidat video, nee cur tu repug- 
 nes. nisi ttnnen niiilto minus tibi concOdi ]K)t€st quam illi, laborjlre sine causa ( =nisi 
 tamen hoc video, multo minus tibi concGdi jwsse etc. ; But so much I see that it can be 
 much les-» conceded to you than to hiin, to labor without a cause). lb. Fam. 13, 1.4. — 
 Marius pudOre magis quam malo exercitum coercCbat, quod multi per ambitiOnem fieri 
 ajgl) lilt, pars, quod a i)ueritia consiiCiam duritiam volnptati habuisset : ni^i tamen res- 
 jiublica pariter ac stvvissuiiio imperio bene atque decOre rjesta ; However the adminis- 
 tration of the a; my »*as irood and respectable, the same as it would have been under the 
 severest command. Sail. Jug. 100. [Here we may supply as a connecting link '■nescio 
 quo jure hcec dicantur, nisi hoc tamen scio rempublicam etc.'; //iyi^be this as it ma 3*]. 
 
 Obs. 3. Frequently nisi, without a predicate of its own, connects a relative, temporal 
 or any other clause with a nrevious negative sentence, so that it merely restricts the 
 negation ( =not except, notning but), non...nisi being frequently equivalent to 'only'. 
 In such con^tructions nisi behmgs to a principal sentence vnderstood, on which the 
 clause is made d •pendent. Examples. 1. Relative clauses : Dicere bene nemo potest 
 nisi qui i>rudenter intelligit: iW>w/y can speak well but (except) he who intelligently 
 uiKierstaiids (what he says). Cic. Brut. <i, 23 ( =nin hie dicere jtotest qvi eic). — Adversus 
 qm»d ego nihil dictQrus sum, nisi (i. e. id dictiirus swn) quod a vobis didici. Liv. 21. 18. — 
 Semo irascendo lit fortior, nisi q}ii fortis sine ira non esset. Sen. Ira. 1, Vi.— Quis morta- 
 lium. nisi ci nullum supere^t hominis vestigium, per diem iioctemque tiiiiiari velit ? 
 ]b. Brev. V. 5.— 2. Infinitive clauses: De pneiOre nihii dicam alintl, «i^i eaderti evm 
 titnuisse quam ceteros. Cic. Plane. 41. — 3. Ut-clauses of all desciuptions: Aihil aliud 
 labOro, nisi id salvus sinu Cic. Fam. 16,4.8. — Keperio nihil aliud actum, nin vt decem 
 re^'es constitiiereiitur. lb. Agr. 2, «i.— Tg quod optem quidem '^dinx habeo. wm ut aliqua 
 inimici misericordia liberemur. lb. Att. l>, 12, 4. For various kinds of Ut-ciaiises thus 
 connected by /<i^i, comp. Cic. Qu. Fr. 1.3,G: lb. Fam l(i,G,3: 12,2.2; Fin. 5.19, 53; Ac. 
 2, 3, 7 ; Orat. 51. HO : Quinct. :iO, 91 ; Litr. 4. 10 ; Ciel. 13, 32 ; Liv. 21, 29 ; 39. 52 ; Suet. C-al. 
 2.3. In anteclassical and posiclassical Latinity, ^i^t ut frequently has the force of ».a^ 
 ita ut (' ercept so that ', * but that ') with the same meaning as nisi si (see below. No. 6), 
 as : C^uis hie homo est ? Non edepol scio, nisi nt observemus quo eat. aut quam rem 
 gerai {=?iud siobsenemus}. Plaut. Pseud. 4, «1,39.— Irasci uon potes, w?.si vt omnia tre- 
 maiit. Sen. Clem. 1, 8. —Nee qiiisquam perspicere tot reconditas res potest, nisi vt facul- 
 taii vis eloquentia} accCdat. Tac. Dial. 33, 5.— For nisi in connection with Fact-clauses 
 introduced by ry WW/, see p. ()07.— 4. Temporal Quim-clauses and Dum-clai ses : An 
 ill:e aves, tiisi quum vicenmt, canerc non sclent ? Cic. Div. 2, 2r>. — Atque ille eis semper 
 utebatur ; uos, nisi dum a populo aiispicia accepta habemus, quam multum eis utimur? 
 ( = non utitnur ni<i dum, 'except while''). lb. 2, 3<). — Nee umquam tacentem, nisi dum 
 velllt alas. Sen. Ep.5(i.— 5. For C^uia-clauses with nisi see Liv. 34, 4; Plaut. True. 4, 8, 
 11 ; Kud. 4, 3, 85 : Pers. 4, 3, 84 ; Pseud. 1,1, 105.— G. Often nisi is placed before other Si- 
 clauses, the si of the Si-clause being apparently redundant {nisi si = 'except if — ' ex- 
 cept '). If si is thus omitted, the clause becomes an ordinary Nisi-clause. The two con- 
 structions, however, are qrammaticaily dift'erent. as : Nunc, nisi si quid ex prasennte 
 viatOre esceptum est, scire nihil i)ossumus. Cic. Att. 2, 11, 1.— Noli putare me ad quem- 
 quam longiores epistolas scribere, ;/i.vi si quis ad me plura scripsil cui etc. lb. F^am. 14, 
 2, 1. Comp. lb. Att. 2,3,2 ; Nep. Att. 12, 2.— Often nisi si is used when the principal seu- 
 tence is not n^^a^h'?, especially in an ironical sense, as: Dixisset etiam collgga mens, 
 patriius tuus; nisi si tu es solus Antoniiis (but perhaps you are the Antonius). Cic. Phil. 
 2, 28.— Jam sum as.-ecQtus ut vos omnes factam es.<e aperte conjuraiiOnem vidergtis; 
 ni^i vero si (juis est qui Catillnie simills cum Catillna seutlre non piitet. lb. Cat. 2, 4, 6. — 
 A'ivi si quid in Cse^are sit aiixiiii. omnibus Gallis idem esse faciendum quod Helvetii 
 fecerint. Cies. B. G. 1, 31. Comp. Cic. Inv. 2, 57, 171 ; Liv. 6, 26 ; 2fi. 3: 28, 31 ; Sen. Ot. 30. 
 —Sometimes, instead oi nisi si, the comjiarative forms extra quavi si, and jmtterqvam si 
 are found, mostly occurring in quotations of ancient legal formulas and treaties, but also 
 (rarely) in ordinary style, a.*: Si quis ascrlbat ad le-rem iianc exceptionem '■extra quam si 
 quis rrijmblicie causa "exercitum non tradideiit'. Cic. Inv. 1, 33. — Datum consulibus nego- 
 tium est, ut omnia Bacchaimiia diruerent, extra quam si qua ibi vetusta ara aut signum 
 
 HI 
 
 m 
 
 1. 1 
 
 
 , ti 
 
740 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 ^ T • Oft 1Q v..<T,v„t «nrfientom Piiscoptflnim ullam n-ipuMicte par- 
 con?ecrStum es^set. L'^. 30. 18.-^. ca t J»- r^^^^^^^^ ,j ^ ^. ,„._AntCn()r, pr(t- 
 
 (=„i,i«</M«.i/".se«;;0. •;j-!,'^,-^i\7:,^.:'^.;""',,d;,,l,„m, « v..n „ia.,tur r-i-i uH.ml 
 
 'que credit /ri^i .i Q''^;' v ,n « V^ v' L^//^^^^^^^^^ Liv.2.fti». Instead 
 
 Poimieinm Mppellut. lb. Pain. <.. ♦.. lit.— .\<'//'o ''"'''V/''' ;;.■'' ,,^,.,1 ^- • AV esse u him 
 of ""14 ill .hi» c,,nnvc.i0,^ .ho pr.y..smon ,;«. «M^^_-^ 
 
 "'-■' ';;iif;'..i'n r,:taiV;v ""iri'ivio';, "^crptvJ.'';,, v."?!,, : > , .■;>• • .i^-^/ ««-^ "'-*■ '-■••. ..r 
 
 a.im,,s:„-i;r,;>ni;nw,ra</.oc.,,..«i.-siT-q"j;;-,^;;i^^^^ 
 
 iiaU. era..t^ Plant. c:a,>t^,S^C^acau4..o..^^ ^^. ,^^^. ,.,., , ij, 
 
 urn perfu-'erunt. Liv. «.». 2* — /A/'>-^7"« ,*^^'',.,' ,„. ,,:,: ...iVr eos qui in-ammit. Cic. It. 
 nt.rierc. Sail. J..-. 17,«5.-Quo<l '''l2r'Zu,^j'l\^m^^ A ticuni; whom some 
 
 ^^{S-^l^'^^^ltl^TU^^^^^^^ ^^-^' -'^ '''- ''' ""'^ ^^^"• 
 
 ^\;^:^r^c::^iS-d:usr urr^Loauccd l>y n.i^.. Cumcss perhap. ut^Iess by 
 
 A 
 c 
 
 rARTICULAR USAGE OF CONDITIONAL CONJUNCTIONS. . 741 
 
 chance), recrnlarlv with the tvtitcativr, 1) If the author does nof seriovahj mean to condi- 
 tion tile principal ^tatt-mtnt by ilie fact elated in the Nifi-clause. Such a condition may 
 be added (a) for the purpose of irony, either to ridicute every possible object ion which 
 mav be made a<x,iinst the main statement, or to /<i/ a person by 1*0111 e passing remark, 
 niuhr the semblance of a serious Ptatement made for a different i)urpose ; as : Negare 
 hoc, y^ii forte ncfidre onnna ron~'>fifiiisti. nuUo modo poles. Cic. Verr. 2. 3, 64.— Nee vero 
 nnnc (luidcm culpa in eo (i.e. Ciesare; est, in cujus poiestjTte omnia sunt, nin forU id 
 ipy't/m fs^pvon dehnit. lb. Fain. 7. 2S. 3.— .Vt<i fort'' h;e •, illi arma d-dimus ut nunc cum 
 l)ene i)anlt() pni;naremus. lb. Alt. 7. «>, 2.— Si Achilles dens est, et Orpheus et Rhesus di 
 f»unf, .MnsiT matre nati, ni-n forte maritinice, nupticR terrenis aideponuntnr, lb. N.D. 3. 18. 
 — Quam ab«:nr(Inm. qui prastor fieri non potuerit, eum petere coiipuiatum. nv<l forte dam- 
 nalu'neni ]>n) pra-lflra putat. lb. IMi. W.'^.— Sin forte jure (iermanum Cimber occldit. 
 ]1, n,»;. — Sisi forte adolfscenies pucritiam. u'tilte proL'ressi a(lole;-c<Mitiam debent lequi- 
 rere. lb. 3$.— Nam quid illi mali mors attulit? N In forte, iiieptis labulis ducimur, ut ex- 
 istimemus eum apud inftros impiorum pupplicia perferre. lb. Clu.61.— (6) To add a good- 
 NATiMiKD .TEST t«> the i)rincii)al stattnieni : Alexim, hnmanissimum puerum, nisi forte 
 d'ini erjo ati.<>/}n i(tn\y fi>v a ti':\v\\'vk<')odote.'iceniif(ti:tu.<!est—\d enim a^'ere videi)atur— 
 salvCre jubt-as vdinr. C'lc. Att. 7, 7, 7.-2» Often however the ctmdition addi'd i;* «eriously 
 meant, reiircseutinir the possible reality of the condition as accidentai., taking even in 
 this iiisnnce the indicative, a^: Eas litteras in eundem fasciculum velim addas, nisi 
 forte jam dedi<ti (unh'-s l)y chance you have already sent it away). Cic. Att. 12. 53. — 
 Vropen^ior esse beniKnitas de])GI)it in'calamitOsos. tdsl forte erind digni caiamitdte. lb. 
 Oir. 2. 18. — ItJique accCdam ad omnia lua, TorcpuTte. ni-n inemoria forte defecent. lb. 
 Fin. 2. 14.— .Vi.<-i q :e me forte fu<:iunt, hiec sunt f«re de animo sententiae. lb. Tusc. 1, 
 11.— Non placet autem, detracta voliiptate, leiiritudinem statim conseqni. nisi in volup- 
 tatis locum door forte s"cce.<se/it (luture-pcrfcct). lb. Fin. 1, 17, r)G.— Nemo fere saltat 
 »obrius. /li.si forti-'iiM'nnt, neque in solitudine. neque in convivio honesto. lb. Mur. 6. 
 — Pt-culiar is the useof a siTB.irNCTivE after nisi forte in the followinir |)assage : Quod 
 declamationibus nostris cares, damiii nihil facis.* Quod Ilirtio invid^res nisi eum amd- 
 res ( = As to your remark that you ico>dd envy Iliriiiis if you did not love him), nouerat 
 causa invidendi, nisi forte ipsTiis eloquentiie mairis quam quod me A\i(\\vi.-x, invideres ; 
 Vntifss indeed yo'i would enry him etc. C'lc. Fam. 7.33. 1. II«re the person addressed had 
 not said that he did envy, but that he would envy Ilirtius. In repeating his words, Cicero 
 liad to use the subjunctive. The indiuitive • invide< ' would have represented the ' invi- 
 dere' as a reality, which it was not.— In place of /u*?,/or/e with an ironical or jesting 
 meaiiin?, ' nin rhv'' (with the indicative) is sometimes used, as : MH vero tu libelli-' so- 
 ceri till causam M". Curii defeiidlMi. Cic. Or. 1, 57.— .Vi.vi v^ro majoribus habes beneficiis 
 obliiratos quam C;esar quosdam habuit ex iis a quibus est interfeclus. Cic. Phil. 2, 45. 
 
 Obs. 10. If a condition is represented as the only one by which the consequence, ex- 
 pressed in the thesis, can be reaelied, it liequently "takes the .«yudetic antecedent ita. or 
 *<-(/ ita (ita .st='hut onlv it\ or 'on the condition that'). In all such constructions, the 
 form of a neqatire conditional clau^e with nin may also be used (accordini: to p, 705, 
 Obs. (i. A.'w as: Ita senectiis honesta est si se ipsa defendit; Old age is respectable only if 
 it defends itself [=senectus. nin se ipsa defendit (or defendat), honesta non est]. Cic. 
 Sen. 11.— //« enim Acilium re<,'i concessisse si J^^tolOrum fuissent, n voluntatc, non si vi 
 atque armis coacti cum .FtOlis essent ; Acilius had made these concessions to the king, 
 but only if (on the condition that) they had joined the .Etolians voluntarily etc. Liv. 
 31», .T).— ifuic nieie voluntilti ut faveas vehementer rogo, sed ita si non jejQnum quod ego 
 g(fssi et contenmendum videbiliir. Cic. Fam. 15, 4, 14.— De Irumento respon^un1, ita usfl- 
 riim eo populum llouianum, si pretium acciperont. Liv. 3e), 4. Comp. Cic. Att. IG, 0, 2; 
 Div.1,0, 10. 
 
 Obs. 11. In manv instances the principal sentence is not the lof/k'ol thesis of the con- 
 dition, so that ihe'n-al thesis is either understood, or contained in the principal sentence 
 by ini plication. Here belons; the lollowiii«; constructions : 1. The subordination of hy- 
 jwth'tical c/rt'/>w to indicative |)reterites, wliere a hypothetical thesis must be supplied 
 (see It 4<'., Obs. 27. 2).— 2» Those suboblique Si-clauses whose oblique thesis is elliptic- 
 ally omitted accordini? to p. 714. Obs. 20, A.—Z) The instances in which a conditional 
 clause i? made jzrammaticaliy dependent on the second term of a compaiison, when gener- 
 ally the real t hesis must be nhpplit-d. Here belong the combinations quam si. velut si. ac 4, 
 gaan, tamfjuam si. For this construction see Chapter VII. -4) Hestrictions referring to 
 the truth of a statement, or to the limits within w hich a statement is to be accepted, are 
 oltei e.Kint'ssed by Si-clau.>ies^n which the restriction is represented as dependent on 
 the choice of the 'person addres.-ed or of an indefinite person. These conditittns do not 
 strictiv affect the truth of the statement as such, and hence stand only in a loose con- 
 nection witii the principal sentence. The predicate of such Si-clauses is regularly in 
 the SUBJUNCTIVE, as: Cajsar, si Podutmim audlre velles, persecutama erat Cmeum (epis- 
 tolary lenses) ; If you choose to believe Fostumus, Caesar is going to pursue Ponipey. Cic, 
 
 til 
 
 \4 
 
 
74^ 
 
 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 A ft Q o o n-TP the reality of ' mr^erutrmi^ erat ' doc«. not dopoml "!?«" j^»« ^'j" 5»! ^^f 
 
 ii\ncai «■ons'tniciioii «n mt; :-^-iinii«-'-. '- 
 l\)stumus dicli, rtn/in ent' {^according 
 
 to I'o.onnu,. sfauv.nn: y''vr"^';7'^;:ri'^:i^j;;e;;r.u;''th^ wii^ of S';:^;Mln'nd. 
 
 n.s'ed. which can only (k'tennine h.s «.wn vu-w- -M I^ ?. v. ;W. 10- 
 
 ,uniii ho.tiu.n en tin- «m.t oe.a ( = "^;;''r V, f , ^; LVL nr.m ol^e tradit; nee He. Ih. 44, 
 m Vaferio A»nm creda^, nee '•^l'^''-\'''^i'^' 'jf]''^^^^^ (artha-iniensinm 
 
 13.-.S'i quh reram orir/inem juris f.ngere rdlrt qn m :'*'n"^;j'7;; '',,„; rinht is conAd- 
 iL? ( = What title hav. the ^'^■■^^^^^^J^'.Jl^'^^^^:^ .-esti.nSre, 
 
 eredf). I-iv.34,r.->.-^V nn.nerSre f n • a ^ "^;'^', /^^^/.^^jVa n . . claus.s an- used in this re- 
 ami-erat Cracrho.. Si-n ^ ""^."i Vl Hm^T-i- Mn-^^^^^.^ -^^^^ alhiuant.. m.ruit sup- 
 la ion with tl.e force of ^'»"'\'V s?o S vekt) LiV , lO—On account .»f the loose- 
 plicii. q>n vcre rem a'st.niare vdit (^^st qui^. • J,^'// '(,,!;* V/,/ ".nee and conditions of this 
 !,es. of the lo-ical conmHtu.u ''^'V^ hi Kw of en' ecu on arc used in the ^nhjunc 
 kind, ''oui.ti.nes /or/^m ./».j..s .HgH.n.t t^^h^^ "^i^^ZxS^ prince,... n quis Ulnm 
 
 tive of the conditiona Predicate, as ^''\'^^p| ;" '". -Cicero, si u'lU virtutihus vitia 
 a prit.cipatu suo :esti.nJlre ''''''l^l''!-^.'^^^^^ are /^,/am>(/ Nvith his 
 
 jnUrnit, vir tna-jnus, «^er meinc.ra hilis fui ( K c o m ^ ^^^^ .^^^^^^.^ 
 
 vtnisset. Liv.9. IS. 
 
 
 6«; ,,to..t,esHmoniautnm; ...>-.! 
 
 4 
 
 w/s-^/mW te<timonia etiata in S. Ko-cuun ou .u.uy -• ' ;; Yo_(»„o.l illi interhrti 
 Td^^i!.:'t. nefas esse 'Oun^ --u h-m jdebejum^ i... :,, 3.>.-In 
 
 r url^rJil^ aS;ue ea^r^c^ ;$l;i;.nu conviviis, sunt qui exercitu« >n Mac.do- 
 
 n^.xl^cr of il-^'^^»H>: to m=.ke a stateme^ fr; 
 
 him, as if he would expect nuexpr. 
 
 si (nam hoe r/mrris. express a 
 )m eonie reason, npn;:n!inl to 
 
 „„„, a, „ n. w ^^.■--.-vv- ■-, ;i;i';;::Bi^£"v'^^:in^^ 
 
 even this , let mc auu >■. .^ _th\ if rl.e statemei 
 
 COMrARATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 743 
 
 I 
 
 dercd ' indefd\ Ht is true thaf\ ^ to ocTcnowlcdge even thi^ '), as : Sunt morOpi. et anxii, 
 et iraciiudi, et difficiles >cnes. si qyitrinvis. etiatn avjlri ; sed lupc ni<>ruin vitia sunt. 
 Cic. Sen. 18. — Kk, si qinehfis. is qui appeliStur dicax, hoc jrenere maxime excellet, ^^d 
 risus movent alii niajOres. Ih. Ov.'iAVl. — Marius solus edixit. Et ea res, «i queens, ei 
 nia<:no lionOri fuit (the author iinplyinir in the subsequent remarks that the morality of 
 the action w is very questionable», lb. Ofl". 3, 20. — Omnino, si quixHs. ludi apparanssfmi, 
 sed non tui stoniachi. lb. Kani.7, 1, i.— Scaiirum Triarius reum fecit. Si quceris, i\\x\\& 
 est mijrnopere commOt i (rvfj-ndxitia; sed tainen etc. 4, 17. 2. 
 
 5. Often Si-clause» are parenthetically added to a gin;,'le expression of the sentence, 
 intiuiatini,' that the use of the word mi^ht seem of doubilul propriety, as : De lucro 
 pn»pe jam (piadrieiinium vivimus, si aut hoc lucrum est. aut hiec vita, superstiti'm rei- 
 ptibiieie vivrre, Cie. Fam. 9. 17, 1. — Roma? (/i/€C^w.s habetur. si hie dilectns aj.pellandus 
 est quiMU nitro s(» olferunt omiies. II). 11,8, 2. — Non est is (^uinctius, qui fraudatiOnis 
 caii-'jl latit'irif, nisi si Uititaut qui ad neiroiium suum, relicto procuraiore. proticiscuntur. 
 li). Quinct. 19, 60.— llabes formam rtipublic<E, si in castris potest esse respublica. lb. 
 Fam. 12, 23, 3. 
 
 CHAPTER SEVEXTII. 
 COMPARATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 § 6*20. Comparative clauses are eitlier qualtt.\tive or quantitative, 
 the foriiKir (lescribiiiq: the mnnner or quality, and the latter, the intensity 
 or numeral relation of a member of the principal sentence. Qualitative 
 comparative clauses are introduced eitlier l)y the relative adjectives qui 
 and qnallH, or by the rehitive adverbs quemadmoduia and quomodo, or by 
 tlie comparative conjunctions ut, sicut, atque^ and ac (rarely by quam), 
 and also by the conjunctions tamquam, quasi, relut, and the combinations 
 ac si, tit si, and tamquam si. All these relatives and conjunctions gener- 
 ally correspond to the English comparative conjunction 'as' {as if).— 
 QuantitaticG comparative clauses are either introduced by the relative ad- 
 jectives quot and quantus, or by the adverb and conjunction quam. 
 
 Ob««. 1. Comparative claupe? introduced by relative adj''Ctives belong, like the ordinanr 
 relative clauses (p. 494), to the atthibutive clauses. Those that are introduced by ad- 
 verbs or conjunctions, belong to the adverbial clauses. In both ttie qualitative and 
 qu;intitative comparisons the relations compared are either represented as like or as 
 unlike, lor instance, uvque.. .ac\ and ' a/ifer. . .ac' for the qu'ilitative, and 'tarn... 
 quam\ 'maqu. ..quam' for the quantitative comparison. Generally, comparative 
 clauses have'one or more of their members common with the principal sentence, and 
 hence appear in an abbreviated form, which is completed by supplying the common 
 members, not expressed in the clause (see P. 1, p. 207 loll.). 
 
 Obs. 2. The nature of a comparative clause is determined by it? stndetic antkce- 
 DENT, which is ditVerent fory'/a/i/a/ir« and quanfifafire comparison. If the comparative 
 clause is an aftribat^-chvtse, the syndetic antecedent is always an adjective {idem, talis, 
 alius, tantus. tot). In this instance the c<miparative clause, if qualitative, may be either 
 introduced by an aimectivk or bv a conjinction (id^m qui, or idem ac ; alius ac, or 
 alius quam): but in the (juantitative comparison, an adjective antecedent always re- 
 quires the clause to be introduced by a kki>ative adjective. If the antecedents are 
 , tiie ADVKUBs tarn or tofirs, the clause is introduced by quam or quQties. both of which, in 
 this conneciion. ruust be considt-refl as relative apvekbs. But if the antecedent i* con- 
 tained in a comparative (mtlior. etc.), quam must be considt-red as a conjunction, since 
 in this instance it cannot l)e paraphrased like a relative adverb. 'Tarn.. quam' may be 
 l>araphrased by Uanto qradu\. .' quanta qradu' (^tantopere. . .quantrqwre), hut this para- 
 phrase does not apply to '7nagis...quam\ nor to ' sapienfior.. .quam' (p. 489, C foil.). 
 
 Obs. 3. In both the qualitative and quantitative comparisons, the fact contained in tho 
 
 f.^1 
 
744 
 
 COMrARATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 litt.T k lui are called iivi-otiikticai. compauativk ilausi-s. riie\ la\e the w|"ie j-jn 
 i .• m • dent- as the unli.mry e.mipMrative clau>es. l)nt tlu' conjunctions )y^^»u;•h 
 lu ^lr • . rod cefar' reuul.^ w,th the conditu.nai cnjunetion « (lor he 
 
 « diSi e^^^^^^^^^^ r'a4. '»t si, v.l>U suae d : f..r the q'jai.t.tat.vc companso , 
 
 ^Inlnilsr- I li former coi n-spondini; to ' as if\ the latier to both ' than tf and a>* xf ). 
 T e rc'^icates h p'.U e icil co.nimrative ehu.ses must always be iu the ^''bJ^nct.v^ 
 .i HMhe'e c an.e.a wavs in.plv a hypothetical thesis underst,.o.i, an : Hoc :cl.m e>t ac 
 '1 nihil ;>fr.5v. (/</<:ia.>U;^r . A>7 .# /^ melius fecisii nuam n lacui6.^es,^Ciuam fe- 
 
 ciss€f! si hicuigsen. See p. 748, Obs. o. 
 
 I. Qualitative Comparison. 
 Rem 51 Comparative clauses ri'prosfntin.i? coniparea qualities a^ like, 
 take as svntletic antecedents the adjkctives idem, par, simiU^, ov talts, 
 llie clause bein- introduced by the relative adjective Qf/L (with laem), or 
 1)V O'/a'u (with' Odi:^), or by tlie conjunctions ^fc and atque In the coin- 
 pfiri.on of like 7aanner, the syndetic antecedents are 1) the adverbs «^c 
 and iA^ takin"- the conjunctions ut {^icuti, uti), tamquam, or tlie adverbs 
 qneniadmodum and qimmodo; 2) the adverbs ivque, panter^nnnifer or the 
 lU'-ative adverb m>M .<*<'C?/.s, takini; the conjunctions aique a4id .rr (rarely 
 „,/r,,,,)_For the comparison of unlike qualities, the adjective ante- 
 cedent a/i'is is useil, with the conjtnictions afquc and ac {^omitUmvs, quum), 
 and tor unlike manner, the adverbs aliter and contra, with the conjunc- 
 tions afque and ac (sometimes q^am). For hypothetical comparison 
 l<{i"r> Ojjs y) the conjunctions quasi, tamquam si, velnt si, vt si, acsi, or 
 tunqu.nii and vehif, without si, are employed. Tlie mood ot the clause 
 lor hvpothetical ompari^on, is always the .Nhjunchve, and '>i' "ri^in^^^ 
 compariscm, always the iW/c^f^tt'^, unless the general rules (p. o8a toll.) 
 
 require the subjunctive. 
 
 Obs 1 Comparative clauses dependent on th<' syndetic anfrcedent tW^m Jicnerally 
 tak(f the f^ rm of a keiative c.Acsk. introduce.l by v" «P- 4%». while in Lu- ish a 
 I^irt.v comDar tivc lorm (by the conjunction '«.■. ') is used: as: hwiem fere fj>ne ex 
 nu 't is c,?Zter t7tle'i(// . tlilni:. a.s he had learned (Tom the messeuijers). c-oram per- 
 ?oic f Ue- i i 5, lO.-Nemo nostrum idem est in senectQte qui luit m juyentQte Sen 
 E ',S t both propositi..ns of the compari>oM have the same predicate, the ^ui-clause 
 r^'nif^Vlv H S^^^^^ predicate of its own: Non licet mihi ^/.7/*. r/vrW ets. quil.u- omnia 
 ;^U be u'tic a o. mie!.t>b«« deforuntnr. Cic. V. r. 'i. 5. 70 - V.U. i''./"' 7«; 7-J ^^';^.;^^ 
 iorXi lb L a- 2 -i-J.-Non ead<m mild, gmi mi>erwnb>is con-odifjus, h-u-e et conditio ne 
 iteiu urn e-e d^'cievi. Ib.-2,3.-AW.m copias, r/uas ante, pnesidio navibu-j rellmut. 
 Cei BUS 11 Very freqiKMitly a coordina.iou by tL a>uue, aan que is u-ed in place 
 «Vf a'rei-ilive eon-trtiction, if the predicates are the snm.-, and m tlu- same tense and 
 momras Ni^"«S^^^^ '^^'^''^ habuent Ko^cius. nolo v.ncat: I <l.. not 
 
 w - ijo' ci.^ to S^^^^^ his adversary, unless he has the mm. ,nan as an a.hvrsary and 
 '^•^^ tie's (^.unless his adversary be at the same time ''«^^vUness) Cic. H. A .i ).- 
 
 r- hH end ot his rii"-n was the same a* the end of hi^ lil«». ftj.ill. .«uu'. j— WuirMmiur 
 i ^//1//^ c -'//'i'v //, capiiis sui arjudiom esse. Liv. 8. :52.-Est O'l'^dmi ,t n;p.rt et i:oxx- 
 ^^i^nv^ZZZviri pecnnias/c.c. Or. 2, 4^.-lt eadan .it utiUtas ""^'.''^•"J/Xom 
 univer-Onim ib OlV. 3,»i.— Virtud eadem in homme ac deo est. lb. L.-<;. L 2.> -f rom 
 ll is cons ricti. arose the us..- of m- and ntqu>' with tlie force of a omparative c- n- 
 ictim c rr.^^^^^^^^^^^^^ to the English V/..\ as: Amii.us eru'u te idnn K.^uarjmt. ^xs 
 
 i e same as t w ^ efon). Trr. Il.aut. 2. :), 21.-Iloc ipsum niium et idem vi. etur « ^^e 
 oJ^^^li q lod de me ipso nomi.uT.im uilisti ,this very thin- was Ihv. samo «^ ^al wl ic 1, 
 ?ic ct )om 2(),.51 idem i* followed by »/ ; DispulatioiK-in habitan ^<^ n 
 
 f'-re vermVexpJi mn^ actum di>putalnm<,ue est. Cin. Tuse. 2. 8.-1 idem '« »'« ;•y»- 
 d.■tic u tecedent «.f a humth.ncal coinpanitive clause (§62r., Obs. 3), the claus.' is m me- 
 ;^:^ i;un>ducS by^li^frelative ..ui combined wiih .i^as : Acta per eun.U,a ^^ « Ui^- 
 tliKMiiiensium nomine sic a-'fretiir ( = r/'/o actum exsei m, etc.) \as.U,^^. utiuraiy, 
 ow -v T cU iserc? t!iis kiiufare introduced by the conjunction ac or vt. 'n^..nn..c uu 
 wiU. 't \=as if), as: Xeque vero idem proflci lon-.o itinens '•P-J '«)«<; ^^eontm de mu^ 
 bus condiiionibus duictprdur ^=ac proJiacUur, m duceptdur). Lm. ii- C. 1, -Ji.-<^ui am» 
 
 QUALITATIVE COMrARISON. 
 
 745 
 
 nocont nt in alio? liberales sint, in eadem sunt injustitia ut si in suam rem aliSna con- 
 vertuiit. Cic. Ort", 1, 14. 
 
 Obs. 2. Par and mnilis, which are generally construed with a dative or {reni*ive often 
 take comparative clanses introduced by ac or vf, according to the analogy of idem as- 
 Hostes inter se jactHbant, nmilem Romte pavOrem fore, ac bello Gallico fnerit • That 
 tliere would be a consternation like the one (similar to the one) in the Gallic war {=pavd- 
 ^^.['^\.^''"^^.^.''\^^^ V^^'^^^^ operam ne simili utamur foriQna at 
 
 ut, 
 
 tus 
 
 ac 
 
 , . .. Tu T « « .; . ' . —a --^«... pictflrie scientia 
 
 fuisset, lb. Inv. 2, 2.— Cassius pan, atnue antea, raliOne egit. Cies. B. C. 101.— Whether 
 qiiam was nsi-d aUvvpar, is doubtful [In the only passage where it occurs, 'cum pari 
 «mnero equitiim quam in continenti relinquCbat', Cais. B. G. 5,8, it is uncertain whether 
 quam or quern must be read]. Frequently, hypothetical comparative clauses with ac H, 
 etc., are nse<l alter i^imilui and jxir, as : SimUes sunt ut si qui gubernatOrem in navigando 
 nihil agerc du^ant ( =they act us if). Cic. Sen. 6, 11.— Simile est quasi dicas in operto (me 
 fuisse). Ib. AtL 1, IG, \0.—Similes sunt di tamquam si Poeni aut Hisp5iii in senStu nostro 
 loquerentnr • . ,. ^. - .. . 
 
 aniTcoorbatus qualis nemo umquam erit. Cic. Am. 3, X^.—qualia quisqiie liabet, tall^ est; 
 Every one is such, as he ha-* qualities (=as his qualities are). Sen. Ep. 87. Ilarely talis 
 is lollowed by ac, as : Ilonos talis paucis est delatus ac mihi. Cic. Vatiu. 4, 10. 
 
 Obs. .3. As adverbial syndetic antecedents of such clausesi, the adverbs (or adverbial 
 ablatives with tnod(A of the above-mentioned adjectives may be used (eodetn modo par- 
 xter, similiter), aNo item, a;que, and (rarely) ^"wa-to (=equally, or 'next to'), peHh'de (in 
 tiie same manner, Mhe same') or proinde, and the negative combination hand (non) 
 $ecus, the latter two more frequently occurrimr in hypothetical com{)arative clauses; be- 
 ing iollow(;d by the conjunctions mentioned Obs. 2, as : Quum animi inaniter movean- 
 tur todem modo rebus his qu;e nulhe sint ut iis quae sint. Cic. Ac. 2, 15.— Neque vero ilium 
 einniiter, atque ipse eram. commOtum esse vidi. Ib. Phil. 1. 4.— /'a/i^er nunc opera me 
 adjiives rt<?du(lum re opituiata es. Ter. Phorm. 5,:i:3.— Is rellqiiit filium paHter moratura 
 w/ pater ejus fuit. Plant. Aul. Prol. 21.— Fecisti itern vt pnedOnes solent. Cic. Verr. 2. 4, 
 9.— Qiue beneticia aque magna non sunt habenda atque ea quie considerate delflta sunt. 
 Ib. Off. 1, 15.— Nisi habcM-es qui illi- i^que ac tu ipse iraiideres. Ib. Am. 6.— Curiius me 
 edit (Equr ac patrOuum suum. Ib. Fam, 13, m, 1.— Vestnim nomeii jaxta ac deos immor- 
 tales mtiietur. Liv. 37, 54.— A'o/i dixi secus ac sentiCbam. Ib. Or. 2, 6.— So with quam: 
 Juxta earn rem a;<rre passi sunt, </t/am quum consulatum vulirari vidgrent. Liv. 10. «.— 
 Ne quid liat secus quam volumiis, quamque oportet. Cic. Att. 6, 2, 2.— With HTPOTHKTiCAii 
 comparative clauses : Si unltm motlo putant, exercitu in fore coUocato, dici pro Milnne 
 decuist^e. vt si de re i)rivata ad unum judicem diceremus, vim eloquentise sua lacultate 
 nietiuntiir. Cic. O. G. O. 4, 10.— Juxta ac si hostes adessent. castra vallo atque fossa niu- 
 nlre. Sail. Juir. 45.— -Vimi/j/e/- facis ac si me 7C;7<?.< cur le duObus contucar oculis. CicN. 
 D. 3, 3.— Navaies socii }uxta effOsi ac si insuiis cuUOrum egentibus proidarentur. Liv. 22, 
 31.--Egnatii abseniis rem ut tueare, a^que a te peto acsi mea neuotia esierd. Cic. Fam. 
 
 ex me esu^-t iiata ('n*-ver otherwise than I would if \-alw;iys the same as if). Ter. Ilec. 
 2, 3, 5.— Tecum again non secus ac si mens ess&^ frater. Cic. Mur. 4 *. 
 
 ' Ptrinde iprniiith) ut ' or 'perindeac ' means 'according as \ the same as prout (Or.s. 4, 
 //). otren adding ita or sic in the principal sentence as an apodosis ; as : Habes a patre 
 niiinus, mea quidem sententia magnum, sed perinde erit vt acceperis. Cic. Off. 3,33.— 
 Philosophia non jn'oinde ac de hominum viia inerita est. laudatur. Ib. Tusc. .5, 2.— Per- 
 inde ut opinio est de ClIju^que moribus. ita quid ab eo factum et non factum sit, cxisti- 
 mari potest. Ib. Clu. 25. — In exspectatiOne civitas erat, jyerinde vt evenisset res, ita com- 
 municatos honOres pro bene aut secus consulto habitflra. Liv. 7, 6. 
 
 0B»^4.^he usual syndetic antecedents of comparative rif-c^aj/se* (sometimes of clauses 
 
 * In anteclassical language, (rque is tised with (jr^^f^rirTquaTrtitTtive cornpan'son, \vTFh 
 
 the force of iam.. .quam. as : liidiculus mque nullu'st quam hie quando esurit. Plant. 
 
 btich. 1.3, W.— Nnllum opiiior esse agrum <xque ferdcein quam hie est l=tamferdcenu 
 
 or jeraciOrem). Ib.Ep. 2,3,2. 
 
 If' 
 
 
 
 •■ ii 
 
746 
 
 COMTAEATm: CLAUSES. 
 
 "foTcc^Tf' V(Vi«w nioflo qm\ romparin? what 
 
 mr.tive Ut-clau-es chuHy ocnir in I ho f< )1 low inj^ relatione . 
 
 ^ i Gcn.-ml Vtc Kia)..-"r has the force ..f /^i«m v 
 
 a-Ve.sii. the man..er«»f it^ perlormnncc iep.e>..:ntini: au a 
 
 the .ame ,nan..er as (l.vi.ed. «^,.f I'ff ,^«' l^''^;;/, J?;;j:^^^^^^ difiVrent 
 
 tH or Pimiianiv, an ; luiLt-i «fit k' ••■""-■• • T. V..;. lu r-i^r 7 18 
 
 iiZis «r oculi. vidCre P<>^^^mus nemo ue u.vu..^»^^^ rK:-^^ semen tern fe<«eri9, 
 r„nu.onimn Attioum «r amo u( alterum ^'f^'^'V;;- ^ '"^;-!:^^^^^^ rarely (ninnuam, quein- 
 ita mete»., lb. Or. 2,n:,.-Hiec. f'''.'^,;'-\P*^"-";' ''« f,*'?,',^r ^^^ as sv. (ieiic a.ilece- 
 
 wlmodmn or y'/w/*/></a i« n^ed with the ""^^^ ''^. ' / -'Vn .nt S tn in ext iCmil parte rnu- 
 den.s(or'p->^tceden.8-),as: Trnmayfr-V^^^]'^^^^^^^ 
 „eri8 tni dilii:ei.ti^>imns es^e dehes. V'C-,*j";,V,n • ,m J "anin^^^ 1») Am. l^..-Manu^» 
 
 pauci facti sunt. Ih. L. Air. J, '• ,/I^Vfl;ii\ rV- i;r'//i re<'l llhnerat. pax convenit. ^all. 
 \\\ aiiHlojjy to relative clause*, (p. 501> foil.), as -vr'/f* hl^i ^ ' \ • y^ „,o'/rt/ (co/i^'^c/- 
 Jn.'. as, 10 -Uem «.mnem v/i acta erat, co-iiOvit 'J • 'I- -'--^ \",'Vn 1 e ^ae period, as a 
 /V V) Ui-claiise depends .»n the same syudetic '"^'V'^'C^' ^ »' »'/|'' ' , l^^r"^^^^^^^ 
 cUvaraiire Ut-clause. as: si ^ ^X:^:^;^^.;;;^;^ ^McCitTi -When U.e author 
 ut pnetermitteres, nic tu in mult.)s Autronios '"^""^^.^ ^*" ^-^^''j.J'Yfv./el^^ the negation 
 aAu. the existence «f |"V -q"^' ''X r'l!:'^!: ! 1 !\.?.n " n n '^ tT.e ne- 
 
 denh^ the existence 01 an ^'^.''-^^ '"^;' ;;•;;■ ;.;;;:V//cH r,.llowini,' the ne- 
 
 i;;s'."^;r':v;c. !^i"r,%'nr;;^:J';r.- ""r ;;r^;.n v-;^, f^, r,,.,. liv.-,, ...-.v»., ,...»- 
 
 \dmMUm luMlle nol.ie lu'.-t. .W. jr."T.^ ^'''""ll'^ri V,, ,V,,,',. .^f^iiLr.. «hich mmtraU, 
 
 luueiiij; Mil- «j/www. .. «. , 
 
 dents Vas: Ut ... ^.n.mfr;„an. -^^^ -^'^'^riZ^r::^.^^^^!^ 
 junctiveof the second indetinite persoin, sic '''^ '//'V^:f/;fV,nJ" jmlicil 
 
 [;ic. U. A. 27.-ITT ai^rtu^ '"./^•"'^r J't"' h ^^t 2 - VJorpora nostra "iL 7,,../., sic 
 xitrmcna sua consilia <.mnihus feet. I'^- ^^['^•.V/^in L _f t f«wiN/m/i/>'/v /"7''^'. ita 
 
 ?r*M,\4M lev,. q,.L:d.un vi,n. ,»7u/_m(^,.;_m ^^^^ 
 potiira delectant. Cic. 1 use. d. o 
 
 fl.^tln-l rario$ wotm eicri, tamqiam in eantu ^mo-'^ ?'j'.Vro,V hv w^\ ()r%.'m>'^ bv n-pre- 
 "^t'. Often comparative Ut-clauses '^^'^y^''^ '^^:^;^^'T^ n ila to . . ' a.iversa.ive 
 sontin- .hem a« restit.L'on tl'C ^v,m^ c | .^ or pi c^^ 
 
 coonlittaiiou of C^...n^cUu>ses. a,^<i s;. n^^^^^^^^ „,„,, ,,r.;..ihente se 
 
 ...turn; see p. «m»), /?. 40i, a- . L t i "^L'' ;;*;';,; i„p,.nti I iv 2-. 37.- Sicrx aliis in lociB 
 perv.^nisse in glonfn>o„fUtut. ^^a Hf/^ '«/'"''' '«^^^^^^^^^^ Cic. Clu. 
 
 parum virinm reritm hahr-t, sic in hoc lV^''-{f';'l, l\\n f„ >" u-m^^^V^^ mw o^>^arn'a,.t ab 
 
 K^^u^r,r vidl^r ry^F^nriiUJ^T-ltinsu^ T t' J^;. ta^.e t .v, ..c panon ntUiur tu 
 
 ^i^K:;?;i^:;::K^s;Si;;^;?i.yes t«ue v- f<.m of .>mp;.^;vcrt^^^^^ 
 
 the principal sentence ' //'M-'^> ^'^5 ''Vs^JJltw "^^ £r/ L'(or a. / /»•.) \ as: 
 
 va,n \ properly meaning W h.it I sav 1=^. • J' " 'm^'h .,,„:/ 1. 54 -Ita mf di amnd ut 
 .Sic- medi aniabuat ut me tniVuu» iniser.t, m ^^^^^ j 1 lis I 43 S -//« n,e di amabnut ut 
 eironuno non tarn "'^''''PV^^^l^.^^/J,. *' Vl^'^jj^j',-^ Cic. 
 
 ^;;^^^^-5o JiSli^ril^ -prc^iou^'aro ^^Uhotically inserted in the a.scven. 
 
 QUALITATIVE COMPARISON, 
 
 '47 
 
 tion without vt, as : Nam, if a riram, pntavi (=Tta vivatn, ut pntavi). Cic. Fam 2 13 3 -- 
 SnllTntat, tta vtvam. me tua valetfldo. H). 16.20.-S«pe, ita me di juvent, te 'ailctOrem 
 consihoriim meorum desiderSvi. lb. Att, 1, 16, 1. uv-tuicm 
 
 A', roinpjinifive Ut-clauses, without a syndetic antecedent, are for varion? purnosea 
 pnreritlieftcaUy inserted m the principal sentence, always containing an additional re- 
 mark, which may he omitted without impairini,' the sense, and which is represented as 
 h.Mnir in some relation similar to that of the principal action, for instance when the 
 principal assertion is represented as a mere opinion of the speaker or of another person 
 or as- a similar action of another person, or as a hearsay, or as a former remark of the 
 speaker, or if it is illustrated by examples, etc. Sometimes such clauses are introduced 
 by ?v/'//. qufviadvioduv}, or qnowodo ; as : Cupidilates qufp possunt in eo qui vt ime 
 nrrujititor obj'df, mri s.-mper hal)itarit. Cic. U. A. 14, 3J».— Postumius fn<'erat 'in leW 
 ti-.nem. y Jama ferebaf, populi judicium. Liv. 10, 4H.— Sed, vt plerumaue, fit, maTor 
 pars meliOrem yicit. \h.^2\A.-Ut ex proirinqvis ^ju>i avdio, non tu in isto artificio calli- 
 dior es qijam hic in siio. Cic. R. A. 14.— NoiTte putilre, quemadtnodmn in fabtdis mjy^nv- 
 jn-ro rid^fiK. eos. qui aliqnid impie commiserint, a<ritgri Furiis. lb. 24.- Civitas sine Ice 
 PUIS partibus. uf nenna, et mni7»ine. ft wembri^:. uti non potest. lb. Clu 53 — Bestiie quas 
 pi-nuntiir e terra, rWf/z-i crocoiUn. lb. N. D. 2, 48.-Sunt bestiae in quibus inest aliquid 
 simile virtQtis. ut in iennibus, nt in C(tnibu.<i, in equis. lb. Fin. 5, 14— Sometimes a clause 
 with qualiM. referrmir to the qnnlify of the subject, is used in place of a parenthetical 
 I t-claiise : Sapien.<i priPtor, qualis hic fxit. Cic. Mur. 'i^.—Kquitum acies, qualis quce esse 
 tnyfrurftx^iima i)otext, c:rde omnia rcplet. Liv. 8. 39.-Siich clauses may also be introduced 
 by \\M' quanfitatire relaiivc 'quantum' (=as much as), as : In quo templo, quantum in 
 vw Juif, jeci fundamenta pacis. Cic. Phil. 1, l.—Tanta est eloquentia ut me quidem, 
 qunntum. ego Gnera srripta intelliqfre pofimm, mairnopere delectmt. lb. Or. 2, 13. 
 
 /'. The form of a pfirehthellcnl Ut-clause is used to represent a quality expressed by a 
 descriptive adjective in the principal sentence as only ' cowparatively ' true. con>iideiing 
 ttie condition of the persons, times, or circiimstanrcs mentioned, as: TriumphStum est in- 
 nqni, vt iUurum tenqxyrum habitus (rat, triumpho ; a niMjrniticent triumph considering 
 the notions of those limes. Liv. 10. 4B.— Ardeam Rutiili babel)ant. eens, vt in m reqiune at- 
 aye in ea <vtate. pnTpoflens. lb. 1, 57.— Vir, vt inter ^l^fdlo,^, facvndus (eloqii.nt foran ^to- 
 ll n ; con>ideiin£3: that he was an .iCtolian). lb. 32, :«.— Hunc Themistocles insecQtiis est, 
 ut apud fios(u'ifh ret>j^ct to us). perantTqiius. vt apud Athenienm iuith n.specttothe Athe- 
 injins). non ita sani'v.tus. Cic. Brut. lO.—Meneclidas satis^r/^rrtVa/t/jy in dicendo nt The- 
 t,o,,uy SiVicet (\hi\{ is to say /or a Thef>an). Nep. Epain. 5.— OratiOnis penus, ut inoratOre^ 
 exife (poor for an orator). Cic. Or. 3. 18.— In this sense the formula ' utcaptu^ est alicujus' 
 IS frequently employed : Hic Oeta. ut captua est , nervorum (lor a slave) non mains. Ter. 
 A(1.3. 4, 34.— Civitas ampla iiX(\\\v. florens, ut caplus est (fermanorum (for German nal 
 tioiis). Ca?s. B. G. 4,3. The same form of a parenthetical Ut-clause is also employed to 
 represent a quality as (?/;.{»<?/<% peculiar to the class of persons mentioned, nt b. in<^ 
 n-ntl.-rerl by ' as\ or 'fjeinq\ as : Tu mihi videris Epicharmi, acflti nee insulsi hominis"! 
 vt Siculi, {'bfinq a Sicilian', 'as a Sicilian ') sentenriam sequi. Cic. Tusc. 1. 18.— Grajci 
 homines non satis animus!. prud>-ntes, vt est caplus hominum, Palis (but shrewd enough 
 as It 18 characteristic for that nation). lb. 2. 27. ° ' 
 
 (t. The comparative conjuiH tion vt, without a predication, connects substantive 
 ArcKssoRY rRKDiCATKs (p. 252 foil.) to disis:nate a qiality attributed to a person or 
 tniiiir. II such a quality is represented as in'ierent in the person at the time spoken of 
 the noun u-^cd as an accessory predicite is added without any connective (see the exam- 
 ples p. 2.V2 foil.). Bnt if a quality is attril)ut('d to a person onlv with respect to the 
 priicipal action (ut=tike). the-accessory predicate is connected hy'ut, as: ^tjyptii caiiem 
 et lelem nt dens colunt. Cic. Lesr. 1. 11. But: Galli deu/n (not ut deujn) niaxime M^-rcu- 
 rnim colunt. Ca?s. B. G. ft. 17. Mercuriiis was considered a i?od, even without any reler- 
 enc to the worship of the (Jauls ; but doirs and cats were not considered as j^ods, except 
 by the E<;ypiians. The relation of an accessory predicate connected by /// is also ex- 
 pressed by the preposition pro, with the ablative of the noun, as: Britanni iituntur 
 taU'is fcrris pro nummo (or nt nuniwo, but not numnw alone). Cses. B. G. 5, 12.— Exam- 
 ri.Ks: Ilabuit (ei) honOrem nt proditdri, non vt amico fidem. Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 15.— Anii- 
 ochns turn Hannil)alem non vt prudentern tantnm rirutn, sed nt vatem omnium quse turn 
 evcnirent, admiratus est. Liv. 3«, 15.— Cicero ea qu:e nunc usu veniunt, cecinit ut vales. 
 JNep. Att. 16.— Dionysium dimisi a me, ut maqistrnni Ciceifnium, non liibentur; vt homi' 
 netmnqrdtum, n(m invltus. Cic. Att. 8, 10.— If the accessory predicate, attributed to a 
 pers(m or thinff, is represented as, bcin? falsely attributed by the subject, or as beint^ 
 .tir/uraftveli/ compared v\ith the thini? (.r perstjn referred to (beinir an abbreviated orcon'^ 
 deiised SIMPLE), the conjunction taviquam. quasi, or relut jjenerallv takes the place of 
 ut, as: Ficta omnia tamquam flasculi decidunt. Cic. Off. 2, 12.— Herodotus quasi sedatm 
 a//««M fluit lb. Orat. 12— Oculi in ciip'ne, tamquam in «rc^. mirifice colloc ati sunt. lb. 
 ri. D. L, 56.— Ex vita discCdo, tamquam ex dorm, non tamquam ex fiosjntio. lb. Sen. 23. 
 
 
 
748 
 
 COMPARATIYE CLAUSES. 
 
 Auri ar-entlque n.nm, r.^/« omnium scderum 7^'^'^^,'^'/"^,;;lV*J;,Tw"af re/"u^ 
 n I^out (in>*tPadof pro eo iit) nwiius ' accord in/j as \- I'roHt tcmpiis ac rts Hucrti. 
 
 ^m^rSj al time a.Kl c'lrcnmstances would p.-rmit. Jj^%8- ^"tA '\-^l;V^'^<^^I's"iS^ 
 a quoQue navilta opera erat, dnnflii (=accordinv' to tho.r ment>) ^ ?; 'I^',- V?;r?Jr^h m^^^ 
 PMM n^r-lr-it «uDDcllectilein fk'<^aiitiOrem, pro'/^ TluTinitruu hominir' tac^lt:•ltL'^ feiObant. 
 Sc Iv f f 3I S-^^^^^^ inlqnns ;equnsvo his aut illi., pro../ anunus P"u'nannum 
 
 aratommque penuria lulit uiuoted from a letter). Cic.\ err. *, .i, Oi. 
 
 Obs 5 HvpoTUKTiCAL QUAMTATIVK coMPAUisoNS (i. e. those which compare facts 
 merelv a- "1 m'd and non^ arc introduced by tamquam «, ut ,u i>„t n. ac -t,//''^;^- 
 
 Th esL^"»,, Vrti\ms m.y tak./ the .ame syndetic antecedents f ,;\'-l\"r;X<.VeT;e lly 
 conjunctions (mostly ifa, and .sic; see the examples in Oas. 1.2 .^); but more ir";' «i^;'' ^ 
 U ey e sed wiaiout, anC- syndetic antecedent. The ?'<'^^^-^'^,^^[^:v:,y!i:;^XSt^X 
 in ti.e subjunctive, which (deviatintr from the rules in »»vi">"'^'VV' hu ". r /^ I ( « 
 f Hows (hi law of conseoifio», as : Tamqnam si emeris me arirento, liber ,v*^/ 1 Omj "» < « 
 / ;" • iZ Zjf ,ne with monev) Plant. Men. 5, M 42 -Sic ^^7r^;^;Zt^la:F^^ 
 ioLm^quusi nihil umquam audifnm de dis ^^}''^l'l}^^'^'''%('':' '^fj^^^^^^^^ 
 thin.') C'ic. N. !).:], 7.-Qu..niam taciturnitas l//,^^/^/^ confessiOnem pi., eo c ^i co«<^^ 
 
 * Tvi^ui^i/'i/ />aU been confessed) concludere oporteb.t •''•'-'"»^''>''V,-""T,, V V^ ndhi rl 
 -Vos QUOd". e i^lim milites, noii lamentis tamquam e.xstinctos seqiii. sed. tW.// -i adhor- 
 tante^^Slmqi/i dante. riJ/ea/M dlos («. i/' ^.. .r.r. ^f i^/J^I^^H/y^,?;^ yM'^" ^^^l 
 25 :i8 — Oiiid t-'o his testibus vtor, quasi res dubia aut ub>rnra ^t/.^ t-^c. IJiv. L^^c. 4 
 
 intouiuipiannini sic ro.re/,..^/, /«//.^v.frn ^ 
 
 6,4.-Ruflo tuus Ita dedd^raf,a/ur ut si essefxunx^ e "•»^»'^ ,J''/; "m :. h/T^, 4 ^ 
 
 n/jfiivfiir Cic Or 1.06. — s>equani aosenii?» -Aiiwurn »_iiiviv..i.c..v... .^»- — ^ ------ •- ■ - 
 
 ?orre6«/i/ S^^ HY.'oTiiETicAL MOODS (in the imperfect and pluperf.-ct) 
 
 a?ruuHo fremrmftly^^ eve.i iflhe principal pre.licate i. a mwpreUnte, m ac<-ordance 
 w th he nl?". hypothetical Si-dauses, as: Kjus ne-otuim s.c yelini •-''•^l^V/»"-^; ',,f* 
 ^.S res mea'cic. Fam. 2, 14.-Ita se ,'eran. in istis Asiatics V^^V/'i^^.'.'Vam 13 A^^2 
 viil farerf^ lb Ou Fi 1, 1, c. 0. Comp. the passa-res Cic. O. (.. O 4, 10, ham. l-i. 4.1, i , 
 i u/4 (qi oVe^^l O^^^^^^^ Cic. Div. 2. G4. and Sail. Ju,v'.10-2, 7 (qu-t .1 0.;s. •^'•-«••"'.^.li';';! 
 
 ?J::i.i^. and r./.^ are iise<U without the «deli, io.M>i -• !" t - --^i:^"^:; n^^i .ic^u 
 
 Sr ^ ised w li PAKTH r ALCcu.structiiUi^ «ecOrus admo.lum de belh. Romano 
 
 crat /alV' ""* /^n (rafisifuris in Asiam liomdnis (as if the lomans ^^remffonoo 
 crol'^ orertoAsia\ Liv. :i5, 41. -Id resp<.nsum Latinos, velut ,nfn( jamnon conctd*-»tib>8 
 lioniTini^ feroc ores fecit, lb. S,3.-Necverovelim,7/7a.i decMrsospatto. fi calce ad car- 
 /rresX-ari^^ C^ 4. For the u.e of 2*/a//t *i iu clauses of quantitative compar- 
 
 ieoii, eee j). 702, F. 
 
 Ons fi Often quasi (mostly in connection with vero-) is used for PEnionicAL coGkdi- 
 NAT?oN like /^i/(p 7:iS, Obs. 2). and quamquam (p. .i'.KS, Obs. 12K 10 .!es,:znate as un r e 
 a fact whk h would be true if some assertion of another i>^r.o„, con a.ned m t lie preced- 
 fn ' stMUence were cc.rrect. The predicate of sentences thus introduced by quasi, is in 
 he SUB t^^crn-E 4.^ of the hypotlntic.l or of the non-hypotheti.al tenses "ccor. inur 
 is the predicate of the preceding -ntence is a pretente or a mu^ 0'^«- 
 
 casu ! ih.^'n.—Oua.'-i rcro rejtrai quoo nen |.,Mr^i. ,,•<"■'.•:.•" r;- \ \r^ \ n„n.i 
 
 tu homo ridiculus'es, qui ex mequa^ras quid de ist.s ^l^^^l^XV^IlV"^^! ^-r^^Vi 
 aut e'^o uuiduuam WMZ/i quod iste neseiai, aut, etc. lb. bam. 9 17, 1— .Mulia N<ri.a it 
 ds i Fe qm .n res vidSres. caus-im nou qmerere. Quasi eu'o a.it lien concedeiem nnt ^set 
 phi.sophi, eau-am non qu;prere. lb. Div. 2. 2). 4fi.--Expo-u.t vasa ^^''"'''; .,<?'(.' ;^'/'f^^ 
 i^sset Dio-enes Cynicus morluus, et non diMni hominis Afncam mors houestarttui . lb. 
 Mur. 36. " . J J . * 
 
 Obs 7. Very freqnentlv quasi (sometimes telnt Axx^lawquam^S^ "^f.''/'','^^"'.!!'.^... 
 H(»m ■ sinje Jord, f,ei.iir In any irramm:itnal relation (either a «"''•J»'^^.?' V;^.^'l ^ "'*il?^ ; 
 predicate, .>r anvpart of speech). a< a FiorKATivK kxpuessios ^ = " «-'^^'J^/f . V,^' ^,! '^i^ 
 cnim homines qua^i specfafdre^ rerum c«-le.tuim (a trope taken from the » '• '• ^'f; 
 N D 2 .% --Quo plures dot tibi tamquam ansas ad repreliendendain. lb. Am. lb, 5J.— 
 
 QUALITATIVE COMPARISON. 
 
 749 
 
 Anrcs dnros et miasi cornedtos (a diminutive formed by Cicero himsclf=*hornish ') ha- 
 bent introitiis. lb. N. I). 2. 57.— ILec est irravium hominum, ilia (auteni) quasi assentato- 
 rum populi, multitudinis levitatem voluptate quan titillantium. Jb. Oft". 2. 18.- S. d est 
 alius qiioque aditiis ad multitudinem, ut in universOrum animos tamquam influere pos- 
 {'Tmus. lb. Off. 2,».— Sum I liomi /es qui ty^/avi c/e industrid (almost on purpose; the Latin 
 expression hi-'uxn Jigvratire) in odium P. K. irrueie videuiitur. lb. Verr. 1. 12.— Haec ne- 
 quicquam velut ralicindtn^ Romruius. Liv. 3."), 23.— If the word thus de^igllated as fi<,'ura- 
 tive. is a noun which, in Enfrlish, would take an indefifnte article, the indefinite adjective 
 quidam. or aliquis is «jenerally added, as: Ei qui qua-i mairnam qua"da?n insulam inco- 
 lunt, quam nos orhem terra; vocamus. Cic. N. D. 2, Mi.— Mors est qucedam quasi tniqraiio 
 cominiitatioque vita;, lb. Tutc. 1, 22.— Odyssoa Ilumeii est tamquam opus aliquo'd DiX,- 
 dali. lb. Brut. 18. 
 
 Obs. 8. (Jeu is used as a comparative conjunction, both in the classical poets, and in 
 the prose-writer> of the silver a^e : 1) with the meauiui,' of ut in a simile, as : Squannim 
 iiiceiidebat fuI<;or, ceu nubibus areiis rnille tratiit varM>s adverso sole colOres. Virjj. ^En. 
 5,S<).— Soc^// d with the subjunctive^ m/ si: Ctu lapidem si jiercutiut lapis. Lucr.'tt, 100. 
 —2) With the meanini,' of tamquam (asif): Ut <?lorio>issima8 victorias, cew damnosas 
 reipiiblicie, increparet. Suet. Tib. .52.— .*i> With the force of ut parenthetical : Rediicto 
 coma capite, ceu noxii solent. Siiet.Vitell. 17. — \) With the nieatdns; of r/?/a^t tv/o, used 
 coonlinatively for denial (Obs. r.): Veuvtro non hoc etiam iudit;natiOne sacrie parentis 
 expriini possit. Plin. H. N. piuf. 1. 
 
 Obs. 9. Clauses denoting a comparison of pifferent quality or manneu take the 
 SYNDETIC at).tective anteokuknt alius, and the advekbial antecedents aliter and con- 
 tra. The CLAi'.sE is introduced : 
 
 1) By «f or a/que, whicli coirespond to * t/ian ' after 'other \ to '■from^ after 'different \ 
 aj\d lo ' to' Hhvr ' contrarij\ as: Potest aiiud ndhi ac tibi vidch (I mav have anf>///^r 
 view than you have ; or '& \\ew different from yours'). Cic. Orat.71.— Si"^ esseiit omnia 
 mihi soliiti-sinia, tamen in republic-l non atius eVsem atque nunc sum. lb. Fam. 1,9,21. 
 Lonire a'la ac tu scripseras narrantur. lb. Att. 11, K», 2.— Morini loii<;e alia ratiOiieac reli- 
 qui lialli helium ^erere insiiiueriint. Cies. B. (i. y, 2H,— Ne sim saivus si a/iter scribo ac 
 beiitio. Cic. Att. Hi, Via, 1.— Qui nuntijlrent aliter causam a'_'i atque idi exist imtlient. lb. 
 R. A, 22.— Ea res lon'.re aliter ac ratu< erat evCnit. Sail. Ju^. 7.— Illi nejilbant, sibi judi- 
 cium siimptilros contra atque o imis Italia popuhisque Ronulnus judicavisset. Cjes. B. C. 
 v). 12.— Vidis omnia fere contra ac dicta sint ab haruspicibus eveni>se. Cic. Div. 2. 24.— 
 Sometimes 67-f/a'/>;es' ate used after aliter: Sed si aliter vt dixi. accidisset. Cic. Rep. 1.3. 
 
 2) I?y qi/am, (ranly by ac) when the syn(letic ant-cedent is connected with a negation, 
 as: \irtiis //j'/t/ (;/i'/</ e-t quam in se perfecta iiatQra. Cic. Lcl'. 1, 8.— AV «/i/^/* Horteu- 
 sius quam e;,'o velim, meum laudet ini^mium. Ih.Verr. 1. 9, 21.- A>cquicqnam ali"d opus 
 est quam abro^'ari. II). Att. H. 15. 5.— Lysander fiihil aliud molltus est quam ui omnT> ci- 
 Tiiilt"- in sua tenCret potestate. Nep. Lys. 1.— Valerius et Ilotatius netjdbatd se aliter iiC- 
 ros quam si decemviri «leponereni insiirnia mauittriltus. Liv. .3. 51.— Tlius "non aliter 
 quam ' may be followed by a hypothetic.il Si-clause: In senaiu nihil actum aliter quam 
 si plebis ibi esstt consilium (-'quam ar/erefursi, etc.) Liv. 2:i, A.—Contj-a may l)e followed 
 by q'lam, even if not connected with a negative: De vestr») jure contra quam proj)osue- 
 ram, jiidicilbo. Cic. Dom. 40. — Quiim c'o////'rt fecerint quam polliciii sint. H). Leg. 2.5.— 
 Generally, however, \i alius is connected with a negative, 7iidi is used an place of quam. 
 See p. 710, Obs. 7. 
 
 Obs. 10. Peculiar is the use of ' nihil aliud quam'' or' quid aliud qvam\\\\\h the mean- 
 ing of the particle 'only', when 'aiiud' has entirely lo^t the quality of an absolute ad- 
 jective, 1-: Per aspera priino, rdhil aliud quam \i!i impefini, iOre; They marched, being 
 Idndered cnli/ »)y the roarl. Liv. 27, 18. — Hostes uihi' aliud quam perfOsis vano tiniOie 
 Itomnni-'. citato agniine abeiiiit: i. ^..'wheti the Romans had been mei^ely seized with 
 an unnecessnry fear. lb. 2, {i'\.—Quid aliud quam admonendi essCtis? Notliing would be 
 ueces-iarj' but to admonish ycui (=:it would be onlij necessary to etc.). lb. 22, GO. 
 
 Obs. 11. Frequently <^//tw.« (like eV7ewi> takes propositions coordinated hy et, ac. or qne, 
 instead of comparative clauses, as: /l/i<7 ciusa est ejus qui ca'amitate premitur. et ejus 
 qui res meliOres qiuerit. Cic. Off. 2. 18 (The cause of one \* ho is in distress U different 
 from the Ciiuse of one who is looking for better things).— Pompgjus solet a'iud sr-ntlre 
 et loqiii. lb. Fain. 8 1.3. Frequently a/i //v. in place of taki; <: a comjiaiative clause, is 
 repeatt-d in a coOniinate a-yndetic propo>ition, as: /1/j^/r/ est enim laboiSre, a/i^/d dolgre; 
 Wonyiiii: one's self isditlerent fro:;! grieving (=:Laboi are est r?/??/</rtCdolere). Cic. Tu-c. 
 2, 15.--.4//'/f/ est inaleiiicere, ftH'id acciisaic. lb. Ciel. 3.— J/t7^r loqueris. ff/i/'er vivis, 
 Sen. Vit. B. IS. — Scitis esse notissimnm ridiculi genu-', quum c//iw(^ exspectamus. aliud 
 dit itur. Cic. Or. 2 t)3. — Di.xi enim rationem aliam esse ]ot\. aliam severitfiiis. lb. 2. 65. 
 Dolus mains est quum aliwi airitur, a'iud simuiatur. lb. Top. i». — Alia legatio dicta erat, 
 cUia data cbt. lb. Att. 2, 7, 3.— Turpe est aliud loqui, aliud senfire. Sen. Ep. 24. 
 
 £1 
 
 ;* 
 
 ■'■A 
 
750 
 
 COMPARATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 I 
 
 QUANTITATIYE COMPAKISON. 
 
 I o. 
 
 II. Quantitative CoMrARisoN. 
 1. Comparison of Like Quantity. 
 
 Rem. 52. In the comparison of like quantities in regard to numbkks, 
 tot and totidem are ii8ed as syndetic adjectivk antecedents, and totiea 
 as ADVEUiiiAL antecedent. In a comparison of like intensity, the 
 adieciive antecedents are tantus and tantusdem, and the adverbial ante- 
 cedents, tarn and tnntopere. A numeral comp\uative clause is lulio- 
 duced by tlie rehitive adjective quot or the rehitive adverb quotics. A 
 comparative clause of intensity is introduced by the relative adjective 
 quautiiH, and the relative adverbs qnantopcre and quam. 
 
 OB9. 1. In the numeral comparison of equal quantity the comparative clanPe j^ Jntro- 
 dnce.l by the relative adjective quot A=a.'<) for both adjective ^''^''^.""'l^'^lJ^^^^^^^^ 
 dents') fat and tofidem, as: Tot appellatiOnes dei possunt e^se, n>'ot umnerA { « J"^"/ 
 apiH-Iiations as fniieti..n>). i^eu.lWn.A.l.-Ouot hummer, tot Hcntentue. ler. I honn 2, 
 4]u.-Quot officia oratoris, tot sunt -cera dlcendi. Cic. Orat. 21.-Video, non mm o ceie- 
 r.)s, scd te ipf'um /o/i^Am verbis edixi.-se, ^//o< verbis edin Komje polet. lb \ err. 2 1, 
 k-vln-is mntatiOnes^o/i././« sunt r/./r>/ani.nr,rum. lb. Orat J7.-Injater^^^^^^ 
 
 occ.irs after fnfUifm : Cum fotuiem navibus atfjue erat prolectus. -^^1'- 'X'/'a^U.A ..(^^ S 
 of quot the indefinite relative quotcunque maybe used to represent an "'^l^'^"»te . ber 
 as (lepen.lent on .he will of th.- subject, ^^' Quotoinqae semltus ^f•;'*y«"^ J «»;"/"";/ 
 iusserir. tot sunt. Cic. I.e.'. ;i, 8.-The adverb totie.^ re-ularly takes a clause \s\\\\qHoties 
 is: ^.oVe.vdicimus,/o/i.xde nobis jndicatur. CMc. Or. 1. 27.-M.ror nou ^^^J;^' 
 peretuaslitterasr////)^t^.s'a(ininto mihi Iratre aflerantur. I*> ^""^; V *' V «?H ' "w.^ii 
 coinpuiMtive ela..-e with ryi/o/i. < relers to the adjective antecedeji /o^ as: i'» f^ consul - 
 bus mrruisset qnoti^x ipse consul tuit ; If he had s.-rved as a sc.ldie.- under a-» w««y c n- 
 .uls. ^cuinany'time^' he was consul himself (i. .. 'If the "'''|>!>^''- <>, .,V'«,,f"'if''lf J' Z/ 
 whom he i-erved, equalled the [number of] times he wascon-ul himself ). Cic. »J; .'^- ^<^',^'- 
 Such co.istructions are analo-ous to the relative consti-uctions mentioned p. ^ *•;[/»':• -^' 
 qnonex beinir equivalent U> ^ qnot Ticibus' (which phrase cannot be used). J ' ; ^^^^^^^^ 
 ?..mpara.ive clause in.nxuiccd by qnot, so.uetimes refers to t^'^. a^^^*^''"»'\'i,f" ^^! ''V"' 
 toiler, as: Moverat eum sul)euMda dimicatio totie^ quot conje.rjlti j^upere^sei.l (that ho 
 should have to 8trugi,'le a» many times, as there were cimspirators lelt). Liv. A M. 
 
 C)Bs. 2. In the comparison of like intensities, the adjective connectives '^a;'/"* 
 {Jtanlimhia)... qoanta.^ ' nrv. analo-cus to the ni.m.^ral combina ions /o. ('^^^J'f;;*);- -If'^^^^^^ 
 as: ya//A2est contentiOne actum quanta a-i dc'buit Cus. H. C. .i, 111 -7^/ jV|m tCnmn 
 multuudinem nostri inteifccCiunt. quantum fu.t diCi. spatium. I»- l^- <'.-'; -{^[P 
 iUe super.Ores vicerat -loriS, quauto tu omnibus pnestmsti; (Bi/) f/'*''^V ^sl n f i' 
 rb.r in renown to the former ««'Ue.als, a.* (by as 7nuch)jon have outdone all. J;'^ "^J;,-*» 
 12 -Fiscus ^/rt/i est. (7va/(^//n habet. Sen. Ep. H7.-Malo benefacere tanfumdernc^t 
 quantum houn nialeface.-e. Plant. Pom.. .3, 3, 20. -Often the neuter /a/*/^/m w. h a i>ar tu e 
 g.nitive plural is ns.-d with the meanin-j of the num.ral tot, in whi.^h insta.ice tju y'ai.se 
 IS inlioduced hy qnanfuvi, as: In sua quisque nave dicit se tanium habuissc nautui u/n 
 quantum oportuerit. Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 39. 
 
 Obs. 3. The adverbial comparison of like intensities is made by the adyerby fam...^ 
 Quam, or tantomre... quantopere. Tarn relers both to a'Jj^cttvts (adverbs) and rtrb, 
 tanlomre (far ...ore ra.-ely used than tam) refers only to vc.bs; as: Nulla in-enia /a//i 
 prona ad invidiam sunt quam eOrum qui -enus ac foi-ta.iam suam animis non a'quant. 
 liv 4.) '2— Nequeeos ^a//i istlus hominis perditi subita bet.tia, quam hominis ainpl.s- 
 si.ni nova -.-atulaiio commovef>af. Cic. Verr. 1, S.-C^.a nulla i.. re tarn utor 7"«'" i'' hac 
 civlii et put.lica. lb. Att.2,17,2.-Ncque enim tantopere «'""C a Crasso di>puta iiu le n 
 c/m'/^/(7/xi//i. v'/a«^ow^;vcju3()rati0.ie in causis delecior. lb Or. l,.^o. Karei> quam s 
 used after tantoperl as: Quid est in vittl tantopere q.iierendum </w«/n quum om..ia in 
 phil!.sophia, nin/i.i ( ..od in his libris qu.eritur? lb. Fin. 1, ■i•-;.l;'^S,^'^^V'\r^'^n'^^'^.n.lv 
 'tantum... quantum' as accusatives of intensity (Comp. p. 2(i3, Obs. 1), are not rarely 
 used with the lorce of the adverbs tam... quam,W refernns; to verl)s, as: Si nie amas 
 tanium, quantum profecto amas. Cic. Att. 2,23, 3.-In prima ace ante ^^'^F'^ ^:}'-\'^^''%\\'^ 
 coll.cat, baud tantum eis fldens quantum ab hoste timCr. eos credCbat. Liv. -j'.^;.- 1 .le 
 neuter accusatives tantum... quantum, if used as adverbial accusatives of tb-iance 
 have b<.th the nature of an alUtire, and of an adverbial comparison, as : V;\:;'!', .7^ 
 a'je-ta mi'.snitudine ixuUiu, quant utn a f.)rtitudine audacia. Sen. Ira. 1 10. *^*1"^- ','['>;• 
 when both tarn and quam refer to the same or similar adjectives or adverbs the adjec- 
 tives or adverbs are repeated A\to.r quam in tlie comparative clause, accordinjj to the 
 rule for relative clauses (p. 506 full., Obs. 3), as: Tam liquidus est, quam liquida tempes- 
 
 tas esse sold. •Plant. Most. 3. 2. 64.— Quia umqnam obeundi negotii studio tam breti 
 tempore tot loca adire potuit, quam ceUriter Cn. Pompejo duce tanti belli impetus navi- 
 jjavit t Cic. L. M. 12, ;i4. Hence a comparative clause belonj^Mi.g to the compound ante- 
 cedent tamdiu is more frequently introduced by quamdiu than by quam (p. 074, Obs. 6, 
 toll. ..— II a nufneral comj)arison of like quantity is to be made by absolute adjectiveit,' tot. . . 
 quot ' are not used, but tam.. .viulti (multa) followed by quam or ' qvam..inulti {multa)\ 
 are substituted, as : Nemo orator tam multa, ne in Gr:eco quidem otio scripsit, quam 
 w///a sunt nostra. Cic. Or. :iO, 168.— Virtu te ipsa non tatn ;«w//:i praediti esse ouam 
 videii volunt. lb. Am. 26. »8. 
 
 Obs. 4. Frequently comparisons of equal quantities or intensities are made hy aque 
 ...atque {ac) in connection with an adjective, to denote a perfect equality of two quan- 
 tit.itive ideas, as: Quie l)enetlcia <pywe magna non sunt hal)enda atque ea, quie consi- 
 derate deiata sunt. Cic. OlT. 1, 15.— Ale certe habebis, cui et carus ceque sis ct jucundus ac 
 fuisti patri. lb. Brut. 71. 
 
 Obs. 5. If two quantities or the intensity of two qualities or actions are so compared 
 with each other that tliey are represented as inckeasing or decreasing in like pro- 
 portion, the Enirlish lanf,'ua;.,'e introduces each proposition by ' /Ae ' before a compara- 
 tive, while the Latin lanL,'uaL'e uses the followinj,' forms: 1) The construction by abla- 
 tives OF DiKFKRENCE (P. L, p. 218), the principal sentence being introduced by the abla- 
 tive neuter singular of an absolute demonstrative (eo or hoc), or by tanto, followed by a 
 comparative denoting the intensity of one of the two compared actions or qualities; 
 the clause being introduced by the corresponding relative (eo...quo; tanto.. .quanto), 
 followed by a compamtive referrinsr to the other action, as : Quo «lelictum 7naju8 est, eo 
 piena est tardior; The greater an oflence is, the dower is the punishment. Cic. Case. 3, 7. 
 — Quo ca/iv acceptiarque om.iibus erat, eo mors ejus (■v.^pectior fuit. Liv. 35, 15.— §mo 
 ;>///.s- ncipit .-iniinus, //oc .se rnagis la.xat. Sen. Ep. I(i8.— (;>(«/«/o divtim con^iOmro, tanto 
 mihi res videtnr obscurior. Cic. N. D. 1, 22.— If tuch periods are dependent on another 
 sent(!nce by means of a relative connection, the relative comparative clause is elegantly 
 inro'red in the governing' relative (p. 5;J4 foil.), as : Itaque benignitas benignitate colitur, 
 qua quo in j)lures usus sis, eo Tninu< in multas uti possis (for, the greater the number of 
 those who have partaken in if, the fewer are those to whom it may still be applied). Cic. 
 Oil. 2. 1.").— 2> The construction by ineans of a comparative Ut-clause with quisqne and 
 a srPKULATivE, the principal sentence being introduced bv i/a or «c likewise followed 
 by a superlative. This lorm is used if the subject is indefinite, belonging to a plurality 
 of inditinite or definite peryons or things, as : Ut qul^que a^t vir optimus, ita diffifUliTiie 
 \i<i>i- alios improlxis suspicatur, Cic. Qu. Fr. 1, 1. c.4 (the better a man is, the vwre unwill- 
 ingly will he suspect others to be wicked).— T/ quaque res est turpisdma, tdc maxime 
 et ;/irt''//vV><//i<i; vindicanda est. lb. Cajc. 2, 7 (the more dixgraceful an action etc.).— C? 
 quisque\u Uvzii ytostilinu.'i, ita in periciilo /wt/i'C*?/)-'* (virtual superlative) erat. lb. Verr. 2, 
 5,34 (The more backward any one was in the flight, the more was he exposed to dan<rer, 
 = every one that was last in fliirht. was the first in danger).— .3) Ihe fir.-t form with abla- 
 tives of dillV-rence and comparatives, is sometimes aj)plied to indefinite persons, with 
 quixque or with the indefinite quis, immediately after the relative quo or quanto (see p. 
 532), as : Quo qui.<que afqtfriu.>< adversiis Kon.anos locOtus erat, eo spes gratite majm- fuit; 
 'J he m'ne stvtrely a person had spoken etc., the greater was his chance of favor. Liv. .35, 
 11.— Quo quis vtrsutior et caUidior, hocinvisior et sv.^}>ectior, detracts opiniOne probita- 
 tis. Cic. Ofi". 2, 9. Comp. lb. Hose. Com. 11 (quoted p. 5-32).— 4) Itarer forms are the follow- 
 ing : (a) In place of tlie ablatives of difl'ei-ence, sometimes ordinary relatives referring 
 to the logical subjects of the compared actions, are used: A quo ex])edifior et celerior re- 
 niuneratio fore videtur, in evin fere est voluntas nostra pwpenHo7' (=qno expeditio?' ab 
 aliquo remuneratio est, eo propeiisior in eum est voluntas). Cic. Off. 2, 20.— (6) The rela- 
 tive clause is sometimes introduced by an accusative op intensity, the principal sen- 
 tence taking the companitives magis tnagi^que : Quantum in altitudinem progredieban- 
 tur, magift magisque invia loca excipiCbant (=quunto altius progrediebantur, eo magis 
 inria loca excipiSbant). Liv. 40. 22. — (c) In silver Latinity the demonstratives eo and tanto 
 are sometimes omitti-d, when the relative clauses precede, as: (^xnA-Am, quo plus debent, 
 fnagi.1 oderunt. Sen. Ep. 19. — ((/) Sonieti.nes both propositions are comprised in a single 
 Sentence with qulsque and two superlatives : Ego enim ignavissimo cvlque maxime fidem 
 hal)eo ( — Ut quisqut ignavut-^imus est, ita ego ei maxime fidem habeo). Cic. Fam. 7, 18, 1. 
 (0 In anteclassical language, this comparison is frequently made with t((m.. .quatn and 
 either a comparative, or a superlative i.i both propositions, as : Qvam magis a?rumna 
 u.-get, tam inagis ad male lacii^iidum viget. Enii. Mtd. fi"gin. \).— Qua?n magis la in alium 
 caiessis, /a//i ie?tus te in portu.n refert. VhwW. A^.\,ii,h. — Quatn magis \d re\)\\Xo. tam, 
 tnof/is uror, qiue ineus filius turbavit. lb. Bach. 5, 1. 5. — Quam citi9.4me confides, tarn 
 maxime (ix\nii'nit. CawR.R. 64.— Quatti acerbissimd olea oleum facies, /am oleum opti- 
 mum erit. lb. i<o.—Quam maxime buie vana liasc suspicio erit, tamfacUliine patris pacem 
 In k'ijes conficiet suas. Tor. Ueaut. 5, 2, 44. Comp. lb. Ad. 3, 4, 56. 
 
752 
 
 COMrARATTV^E CLAUSES. 
 
 2. Comparison of Unlike Quantity. 
 
 Rem. 53. A comparison of unlike quantities may be expressed by a 
 
 comparison of like quantities made negative {non tain quani etr.) ; but 
 
 generally it is expressed by an adjective or adverb in the coMPARATrvB 
 DEGREE, as syndetic antecedent of the comparative clause, which is cither 
 introduced by quarn, or takes the form of a comparative ablative (Obs. 14). 
 In the comparison of unlike ncmeual quantities the plural adjectives 
 q}lure« and pauciorei^ are used as syndetic antecedents, instead of which 
 freciuently the sintrular neuter adjectives jj^m*, amplius, and mimis are used 
 with pavtitice genitives in the plural (Obs. 1). A comparison of unlike 
 INTENSITY is FCiTularly made by the adverbs 7nagis and ?>nnus as syndetic 
 antecedents, the former of which is frequently mersjed in the compara- 
 tive DEGREE of a DESCRIPTIVE ADJECTIVE Or ADVERB (OBS. 7. 10). In 
 
 place of viagis the sin!j:ul:ir neuter adjective plus is used in certain in- 
 stances as adverbial accusative of intensity (Obs. 7, C). The mood of the 
 comparative clause is reirularly the indicative, except when the clause 
 iini)lies a denial under an afliimative form (Obs. 12). 
 
 Ob^ 1 A comparison of unlike numkrical qcantities is* made l)y the plural afljec- 
 tives» nliire.'i {mon-) nud paueidre^ (fewer), as : Verren plur^.< Hocinriim tirhe^, qyam Mum- 
 mius hosiium t^imlias^^e vitiGliir. Cic. Verr. 2, .*! 4.— Sic habefute, pf>oe.-< esse a Syracusjlnis 
 i^llu>4 adventu dtos \i. e. ^tatiias deOriim), qunm virtoriil Marcelli Iwnimts desKienltoi*. 
 ih 2 4 ^^—Khnhanii ;>/w;fA' ab ipsis rectorJl)ii!* quam ab hos'fe iiiterfocti. Liv. !:i.4.«.— 
 Ihvc'ad te nha-ibus I'erOis scripsi qu(im soleo. CMc. Earn. 7, l.O.-Cautiim est in ScipiOnis 
 le'Mbu- lie «/«messcnt in senfltii ex cnloiK-rum immero, q>mm ex vetere A <jrni,'eii nig- 
 rum lb Verr.2,2.50.-7V^/m dixi qi/am \uhi\. lb.-2. r),:iO.-/V//m ( = inore books) brevi 
 tempore eversjl, auam inultis anius. stante republic;!, scripsimus. Il>. OH. ;i 1. — / /'/ra 
 etiam dicta <iuam scripta sunt. lb. Brut.44, IW.-Quo quum ali(inanto /Hjunores quam 
 umquam ante venissent. Liv. 3(), 15.— Multo pauciOrts otatOres (Vnim }K,iliF fma rcperien- 
 tiir Cic Off 1.3— In place oi pauciores frequently the neiraiive exprest^ion 'nanus 
 imiltV (iiterallv 'lei<,< many') is used : Cum Spartaco minus multi (i. e. quam cum Scap- 
 tio> primo fuer'unt. Cic. Att. (),2,8. -In ph.ce t.f both phire.^ and 2>(a/cwre.^, the sm^u ar 
 neuter adjectives 7>^/^- and miuu.v with plural i)artitive irenitivc!* are frequently used if 
 the phrasi is in the nominatire ..r arcumfire (P. I. p. 2»i7. § 371). as : (,)unm jdu>^ cladmrn 
 intulissetf/z/amaccepissct. Uw^o^i-l.-Samidlium plus, quam velleut, intra m<enla eusc 
 rebantur. lb. 8, 25. 
 
 Obs 2 An adverbial numeral comparison of nnlikc quantities i« used if one of the 
 compared quantities is represented as a mal/iiUe of the other ('^o many times more or 
 •80 much inore W/i«;<, -twice etc. as much as'). For tins kind ot omparison the fol- 
 lowim' forms occur: 1) Ablatives ok uifferknce with the iionn pavtihiis ami an in- 
 detiuite or definite numeral witii a comparative adjective (as vutjor, ampUor vie.) as : 
 Sol multis partifjus miuonxuina atnplior est quam terra universa; '1 he ^iin is many times 
 greater than the whole earth. Cic. NM). 2. 3.i.-Quid, ^i doceo te dnahus parhbus am. 
 plius frumenti abstulisse quam populo Romano misis:<e {tmC'^ as mwh ^rain as etc.] lb. 
 Verr 2 3 19 — Mathematici, »»olem ami)lius duodeviqinti parfihiis couWrm-MM majoreni 
 esse qiJam terram. lb. Ac. 2, 20.-2) The adverbial accusative tantum or the ablative of 
 difference tanto with a cardinal adcerb and a comparative, as: 7er tanin pejor ma est. 
 quam illam tu esse vis. Plant. Pers. 13, 73.-Ltea nv^xxx^ma denes '^J'^i^/'^^'J/'/W^ 
 quanti essent, icstimarentur. Liv.:}0.44. Comp. the examples p. 2».4. Obs. 4,- One Ualf 
 as much more ' or • less ' is expressed by ' dimidio plus quam , or dwndio min us quatn , 
 and Uts many men-e than\ by ' iaufo plures quam\ as: hocu^dimidio miu'is quam 
 civibus daluin. I.iv. 41, 13.-r(/«^o /;/^/;f.s ablati er.nt quam relicti. Ck.\ err, > :>,2H.-3) 
 In anteclassical lan-ua-e the plural neuter of tantus is sometimes ined as ablative of 
 difference, with the force of a noun ^tribus. qualuor, tanlis r///(//// = by tine- etc multiples 
 of), as : (A<;er ille) Iribus lands minus redil quam obseveris. 1 laut, lrin.--i,4, i;,.». 
 
 Obs 3. Both plus and ami>lius are used to npresent a numerical qtiantity an inuepinitk 
 in rec'ard to its excess over a f,'iven definvt^ number, accoidinj; to the idiom explained ^ 3U 
 (P I^p 21'») For this relatitui the loUowimr formulas are used: 1) t'lus {a/u/jlius) qiaim 
 decern mililes.-2) Plus {amj)lius) dtcem milites.-Z) Plus (amplius) decern mihlibus. 1 he 
 game lormulas are used with yninus, in place of plus, to represent less than u fjiven quan- 
 tity The comparatives plus, amplius, minus alwaye remain uuchauged. lu the nrac 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 QUANTITATIVE COMPARISON. 
 
 753 
 
 AMPLE.. Fikstform lA- i'eri on no^^^ '"'*' ':^ '"'''^ freq-ently nsec..-E.x. 
 
 atjlieut C'ic VeiV •> ^ 47 ' vt^, •' 7"* "^ ?^^"'' 1"^^ ^^^^''* medimmi ex ju-ero ex- 
 2.W I^'reh^nlthi.^•,oi.n,l;^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ^eu plures o, am t/^cJm ; r v?'nr .nr / ,/,i / "^^"^ ,'" place of /;^/.- or amplius. as: 
 
 hahc.o. L\v.:S<.m.-^ycoV^^^^ ?'.^^''"'" Pl"'' Qnam trfirinfa remis^.jPur, 
 
 Ampnus ,unf seTmeni^ nriT^^^^^^^^^^^^ Liv. 42,8.- 
 
 CunVentu Svracu>Zrir.\V,V 2 -^".0 ' \wf''-'^ '''"^' Romanos ImbCbat ex 
 
 3»),.3S.-Num JiocLTno 17,/; -'^; ;». •~l^''^i; «'''^'^'<'' -^^'«^ ceriamen sustlnnere. Liv. 
 
 non amplL: h^m.m'",/^^^.?' ; Zt left^KnSr n; ^'^^ f'' ^>^' ^-^^V^^ 
 diesf^nm. Ilaut. Trin 2 4 1 —()ni<AnL?lt ^uMinCre. Ih.2, xb.l.—3hnus quwdecwi 
 
 annOrum more rn '«^^IvtrC-u i^!^ Uv^^ RomSnos q„„ni plus dlrenforum 
 
 l.roxima Eiilxeie est nr r itr .iVu-n^^ q>/alyor millium (passuum) inde in 
 
 conlin-top. 115 /Mt 2 \o 4 Vl^V^ d Tm«" " ^«r^^''^" -^^^" ''''^•*''* '"«ad : ac- 
 
 venisset. minus tfim„fn,m?u,. M-.. .n ': *l.-.„^.^/- .- ^^'^' '"iitfl'e.Lieiilius cum lnteria 
 
 ^nannuum ( = ..e duret' .lu. quauTu m am.um Cic \t^^ ^'^V 
 
 uuo nummo plus petas- Indeed I wi. vn , !.t , i V 7^ iiercle. ut 
 
 than yon are entitled toVpimit'Mostll^ 119. ""^ ""'^ ''''' '''^''''' ''^''^ ^^•^• 
 
 nu^n"hei^isT)iLvT!; .'I'V""''"^ are nsed when the existence of an excess, or of a lesser 
 H, t ■« <• „~ "^'- ' J <''.v\s:notus i,on sunt us ptu.^ quam (jua'uor cokyrihus V\c 
 
 '7./^/..rfu;s.e i V 2r-'4 in r n t ^•""■'^"^''^/f ''^" '"i""'' ducentos Carihnoiniensium 
 «//.yVi/^s i.; fi. Jnr i/i^TAvJv ""^i'^^'»"'"^ ho^tium a-nie,, et nostrum primum non 
 umpnu» quinis aut sems naUibus passuum iitererat. (•ie< B G 1 n — Kn.fiii.ntiv fi>» 
 
 h^l^Mn^'Mlir,;'""' ^'r^''^K> 'I'or^ rniuus^ are parenthetic allvinseVted in h? ;m 'enc^ 
 Iti n^ as V,?n "■') ^";'""'>V" «»'<.s:.me construction as it would hc^v 1 out tSai- 
 11 tons, as. /JUG, hand ampln,s, jndliu peditum cum M.-.-One effn-'Grunt J iv 2^ 21 
 
 ( V rum i see ,V- est nf -ji^^^ '''"■^""' '^ <P'i"^I"m>da, non minus, ade^f^vui, 
 
 IS Tf L.W) . ' • 7.^- I''-.-^~-2^--<^ium 111 senatu centum, non minus, essent lb 39 
 
 : tlms 'm; TVs''l ee yji!' ^•«'"'; "^"'V'l'^ "--tl, ^^^ mrKUAT.vE. 'nemir>us^rn:pl^^ 
 ni, !]^^ I : "^^'.«^"•/V"'"'^'''*^ tru/inta. ne minus, adessent (the roakm^^ 'hi- 
 
 ori.iuity conjectures, partly reslinir «.n inferior authority) Cic Veir 2 2 V.7 fumnMr..- 
 Locum const.tnir. quo duo. ne plus, necessarii caplv.e ciim auro Unirent. Liv ii SI' 
 
 t\nuf ,^: ??:^ ''''^""'* '"."•■'"'!'» <Vlu>'^^Y minus\\\\\Hm\ quam ,- hiU luA ' amplius') is'some- 
 A , - 1 ?-^'' t-xi)ress indetiMite excesses over quantities (intensities) not nimier. T. • 
 T ^Fuf i-o%" 'T'' J'*'"/-^^'^ ^^-^^ />^- ^-^i-^ (you ^^•iH "^' "lore than suffidcn ly varni) 
 mUlo.1 u.r\- J -^•^^'*l"t^""y '^'^' Urst lormula (with an indecli. able ;>/./.. and quam) i 
 i ttn l^'^^'T' *"■ "^""•' «:'-M>nv-siM- QUAL1TIE.S, to represent them ai beiii- of ffiSe? 
 
 eiaut (resources more than ordinary). Liv. 21, 2.-Perfldia plus^quam PunicaiaUhh 
 nnn^^"" ZT"" *^'"" ^'""'^^ ^''- -1' 4 -Id hand nia-num quiUem o^iSum est tJ nlm 
 quam medilerraneum, celebre, ct Irequens empoiiimi. lb 38, 18.-E iam Pontidius S 
 
 
754 
 
 COMrARATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 ta^ nrlvatas cmi^aaactitJlvit, noc hohci» (fuU) in c.iupis. vel dicam plus otmm qvam non 
 l^^^?/ a.- Brut. 70. Dixit, primu pra-lia GallOnnn pin, qunm rironmi, iM.^.ruma ,nxnus 
 o^uuHfeminarum i'^sv. OrMX\r^ "^^'^- Je<H than vvom.-n). l^>.v 10 ^. 
 
 C'nntit or ^^^^^ libcratOri-spopuli Honiili.i coi.^ervat..rcsquc reipubliciP Mut. phis 
 
 ^mm ^im/•/ol^ ) ".;.^ 7^«m ho,nicidas, plus eliam quavi parricidus e.^e (e.-.m Ihau a.- 
 tfussinc etc.) Cic. Phil. 2, 13. . 
 
 Obs 6. In the comparison of i-miKE intexsitv. p/'/x and /«int/.« (al-^o ^'^yf ';;•'" '/''r- 
 t-iiii conn.' tioiis) with 7«aw. i.rc u-tMl a- AUsonTii adject.vks, nih. r u-i(/w/t n.y ad- 
 t n^7^f^^\^ku* 'he -.ncr.l idea of intensity (;>/'/.• = a L^reater amount) or w. 
 parfUn-e genitive^ in (he d„q>dar, expressing tne ^xv^WAx atn>>„Uve 'more or .-ss m 
 c^M.er foT, vi<h a nonn denoting a ma/eri // or a y./a/./y Un..n' silvrr more emir il^o 
 ete .as: Plusqaamcr^X ei eonee.^u.n l*;«i''ns i.npenlvit ; he e«)nn.v.nd>Hl /m^^ 
 he mide lar -rr reuuisitions) than was allowed hy the laws. Cic \en. ^^ '^'^'-^f'i 
 \^\Zcx^pl.s quln tibi d.Ou.am, nenuttetn. lb. t'^""' «f' \- ••-^'"::,^;;«'JV'f ^^^^^^^ 
 re.ididi^ti. lb. 3. 13, I -Vlu.^ tibi virt... tua d.d.t quam 1«!'; ^ 1* .^^^''^J'^-;' \^; V.^i 
 Si niilii tecum minus es^et qiuim est emu tuis omnibus, lb. l.>. 10, ^.-7 /'/*• ".fq"'- 1 i] 
 dl aVi^^^^^^^^^ reifammm-u. lb.«, H, 2.-Ca-cIna in hae re plus xm\n mnmi 
 
 SmSi^rS lb.Ciec.8 2-2.-Siestenim aliMtti-l /,/». .>t t^oui qumn 
 
 ?ut5 am lb Att. 2, 7, 4.-Nec 7nin„. op.ris labori.^que i-x oppu-natu-ino ouam "'^«^-^f « 
 
 ;bm.Lrv.:^fK50.-S«withc..mparativ 
 Noil verendume-t ne ;>///,s' rtY//'0 in amicitiam e(.n^<Taiur. Cic. Am. lb.— Moieinonfy , 
 
 iLl- /,l ru Ll ciintnor columiris dealbandas quam ille omi.Is a>diUeandas l,.ctl\it. 
 CirVer 2 1 5«; -^Accip te^ ' inn in „dnOre peanij non minus iM.pu(le..ten. oalu.nnmm 
 ^aValum iv reVe'riti ' to a ^mal:er8um of mo,u-y). lb 2,2.1». rius and vn>;us, in tl.iseon- 
 truet' ^..'ca;, Ve m^^ in the nominatire, accu.adve.nna in '";:. r/^';;/^-;; I'-.J^^!':^ 
 
 va;u.-(ac(<n(lin.' to p 2()i; foil.) : /V?//i.sVfndidt <iecumas quurn eetm. tie. V t-rr. -£..<, .. 
 r 1 ( 'tii H r^ 1>l>o-i'< Hit (will be worth mon-) quam nun mudo hostes, M-d etiam 
 
 Jr m « n 8 ri Edui b F a n. 7. 10, 4.-Sotnetinu-s. instead ..f pins, the dnnn.ut.ve form 
 •^'Jl^S occ»;- ; Am(!;-i no^-r.; plu.'.Uum ^.x . title niynM '{'"Z^^^^uS:^^ 
 iM-.ri.ir,. cir P\im .5 12 3— ,4/// ///i '/.«.-, as an absolute a<//*t7<rf. it used .i- an t qui van nt 
 o^^m>y' imi, "th^ Kl'O, hoc oui-re suscepto, et n-eepia c.usa 
 
 S ci U- 'i 'a eVu' an mV> sum aliquant*, a^^^^^^^ (.. o. ^.mm.in hac .•au>il continC ur ; 
 ^nm^it d^iiaddili^^^^ ') • su-eepi enun eau^am totlus ordini>»-, suscepl caiisam reipi- 
 b^S^ C f Ve?r:2^ 2 i:^T;vviri, ii C.e^ar ..,y./i.. obsnlum u. .. 51u-.-M.teH< ed.ran ; 
 in addition to those *'iven bfb.re) velit, dare pollicentur. ( ;es. R .. b.'l.-lMcquui y 
 nnZlul xVxllxx^^ a lu'-.tion or in intt-rroirative pro,,o>itions. in which in- 
 
 Ht c t otteeor.' ponds to the En.dish • ./.. '. (which word is to be rendered by ^aUu. 
 oi Iv f it nie-ins '.iitl ■rc-ne.') ' ; as : liatOru- non Mini mnpliu.-^ (i. e. quam dedi) ; I «'"""t 
 pl^J m ^;^:";nylSin':; nior;. (else). C.e. Verr. 2. ^- f ---^'f ' V''^'^:^^':^ ^j; .. ^.^ 
 nn-im lac7uin e<t)- notlrnirelse s necessary, lb. Qii. V r. 1, .3, ..-t^iui t bi m .i ars 
 S- -r,. S p..t Tcr. And. 2. 1,4.-Qui,l vulti^ onfin^f Cxc. Mil l-l- 
 
 mbi i\\c amnriul lb Arch 4.-Fre(pu-ntlv amprius i- ihus u^ed udnrhudly as a pai- 
 iV/. wUh ^iX oi prat^rea ( - in addition . as : C;es„r (postuhUmt) ne qyx^>^ am- 
 %^!!lx^i^^^:'il^U^nr\ that he should n..t suff^.r.,«v «.or. bodujs o Ger- 
 mans ( = in addition to tlio-e already in Gaul) to cross the Kh.ne. Ca's. B. G. 1, 4.i. 
 
 Ob'» 7 K'moie' and '/^^,.;*' denote the adrerbinl i<lea of intensity Onore = ' in a 
 .'rertei-dejrci) they e ex,.re.s>ed by tlu- c.unparative fornwulvrrb 'narjisorhyxhe 
 Siicra iSvesS/and ///i////^. as adverbial accusatives .>f intensity (p. 2M. O ns. 1). 
 T» e adv rl. • es^ is «"^^^^^^^^^^^ exprC'sse t by ^winuH\ Tlie adverb • mor.-' ,s p-neraliy ex- 
 T, ^iedbv'rX^^^^^^^ '»^- infl'-^tiouMl r<,mparative o de^cnpllve 
 
 aliV-ciivesl plu^ hZ^r only u^ed in certain in^lanros (No. C). The adverbial idea of 
 » «I*,///»»' inten«*itv ' occurs in the follow iiii: relations : • *• ^ 
 
 ^rlncVmiiectir.n wku a DKBCun'TivE mukc t.ve. If ''-'7 ;,^\^^'\^;,!1 / .Im'S' ' 
 adjective or adverb whi.h forms no inflectional de-ree- (P. I, p. ^> 'J, .^T f;/'/: •,;/,."''. 
 frouianvrea<(m(i) 7.V.» Ons. K») an infl.ctional comparative is not used, more mu-t in « x- 
 Si-e-4 bv ;m . I -vc^ hv plu.<, as: Nactus sum mauis vlon.um tempns quam umquam 
 Sntea Cic Fan ' ». 3.-Intelli-o, nullu.n luiss,- lem|)us quod mar/i.< -lebuerit m*//'/m esse 
 S l^Ti' (f ?. VaS ...c). lb. At;. J^. 14, l.-Nnlluui oniciu.n re...renda -ratuv naiqt>> ue- 
 ?^ wi'm -t b Off. 1, 15.-Facie magi-^ quam lacetus ridwulux. I''- tan.. 1. 3,2.- 
 T n m ri b ec I on animim meum inqqix .oltiritum habent quam tuum. lb. 2. !•., 1 - 
 
 natum ii e auam hiinc) in iu< cium mducere? lb. \ err. 2.2, tl.— lliu-* niaqis mu. l 
 Ihva'sbeus?d fa ixlu-r de^^^ree is ascribed to prefHi^tiona expressions which have 
 tie m^e of a l/i.S'i/./'itv a. O^'tive or adverb, as : Multo '"«,?. f -}, ^f,"''^'j;«''^;^'i^^ 
 ( = uattlne conveniens) exceleitas animi quam volupta?. Cic. Oflf. 3. 5.-Ciuod ita a te 
 
 QUANTITATIYE COMPARISON. 
 
 766 
 
 i 
 
 pcto vitmagiYX animo fas if = 't?iaqis opfanf^r') petere non popsim. lb Fam 11 22 2 
 -Ilominem hominis incommodo ^u^ul cummodum axxir^ra, maqls e>^t cout,ajiafaram 
 = natanecontrar um)7vam mors lb. Off. 3. .5.-Thus sLu.e imef ul stan tve^ Ss^ 
 the Idea of intensity to whicti a hi.-li. r degree is attributed. Such substantives asif 
 they were adjective.., are co.inect.ed with magi., not with plu..- Nihil v rtflu adcM porest 
 quo magt. rtr/usm (i. e. quam ..st) ; nothing by wliicu Virtue may be ' ni re vFt-tue' 
 (different from ^j)Ims quam rir/us^ acc.rdin- tS Obs. 5). Cic. Par. .3. l.-Nis forte /«/i, 
 ^.t pa?Ttcida qui consumivm pativm quam si quis humile.u necaver t Cinie'rhe^i* 
 rnoj-eofa murderer who etc ). lb. .Mil. l.-Magi. a(nH.< lim ....n poiuitset he could not 
 have become ' more of at. a-dile than lie became), lb. Plane. 24.ii the f dlouMn Mm- 
 sa.e a claiise ol manner tak.s the place of a de>criptive adverb, Lin- oualiflTc/^^^ 
 magi.: Ad CicerOnem .ta scripsis.i u. m-que severius, nLque temperknti il%?ri po ue^- 
 
 A i 1? lTTTZ'r:x^T^r' T^r^r" r^r ' < = "^^ '"a,Ms\.x animo meo)^ ' ?. 
 Att. 13 1, 1 [The Cod Me.i. and the other Codd., beini: copies of it, have 'vmoisouam 
 
 aulty. Ihe cUxxxsa ^ guemadmrxlum. . .vellem' ^tHxuls in exactly the same rel a on as 
 
 befo'n'i; ;r7.f'^'''''-' y^'l "'''"' ^^"^P^rannu.: and does no^more nS^xlT'qlam' 
 
 e..re It, ban ' severe' ixud'tempr ranter ' \Mnxk\ do. if m./^i. were chosen instead of 
 
 :^::'^ urjsrtion?'"" ^^ ^^-^^^"^'^ ^ °'"^« ^^^^^ ^y ^ -^^-^ who did 11 
 
 n If the adverbial idea of intensity refer» to a verb, so that two dif event degrees in 
 ffie i''ten.pfy of the action expressed by the verl, are compared, magi, IV re^MilarJv used 
 \eibs„l this kind aie yv,?ri, optare, dtsiderare, admiran, reprehendere ofend^e 
 landare, Uvfan, quen ,ollinfare, eucruciare, imidere. indigere, arch'TdJ^th?ftZl^e' 
 Jfonre, excellere, enifcre, conflrmdre, minuere, pud^t, I uLf,' placet; tudVxt^vs^^^^^^ 
 expressing an action which admits of increase'; as: J/«7i.^t^e/>a/ An o.do he was 
 
 enio;iw;;n^i ii''\b'q''""^ •^''^•^'■yV «^.-Adolescens magis Jloriut dicendo ? Jim 
 r.. . tTT^ //-,^]-^-^-~'*^«^'* o.lf^ndit niminiu quavi parum. lb. Orat. 22, 73 -Alina 
 
 iA7 i-' tuum olhciuni rf.^^(/^^o quam a te lequlii putcavi meum. lb. Fan 7 2(i 1 - 
 Jlocaflirmo, mortem nemini 7nagis optandum fiii.s.se {i. e. quam mihi) lb Att 3 7 2 — 
 
 f .V". '""'V; '"•''•7V /• '■ "^T"' '""^"•*'' "H^*"'^ ''^ lineamenta hospitie dele'ctdbant. lb. Verr. 
 2, 2, .>(,.- l/avi-v //y/.eM-undere quam perdere. Plant. Peis. 4, 4. lOS.-Quai vis est ouie ma. 
 ^|.<^^/r.«Miominesalnmprobitate umni quam 8i sense.int etc. Cic. Par. 3, 2.-Td quod 
 n lito magisv^x admirandum (i. e. quam res ip.si). lb. Cat. ], 3.-Quos mul o magiTre. 
 rear quamyOvxxux honiinum, qui vivunt, rumusculos. lb. Att. 2. 5, L-Nihil est c uod J«- 
 ii.W ! '" ^"-"^"^.''"M>"'^'!V V'^"« "« etc. lb. 2, li. l.-De Fellci8\estame 1 u 1 m.i to 
 
 ni': h V f J i r M^.^' ''1"'^^' quaffu (]xxmrx tloreb-lmus, re ramiliari commintlti su- 
 
 ol//-" •/-]•■)''•'*'■*'. ''r^^''"' "^ '■'^^ tnagis jylarebat. lb. Qu. Fr. :i l. 1 —Nihil me mani<t 
 
 ^oticifabati^xx^xxxxxxhx^ mole.^tiis non me ridere tecum. lb. Fan . i 12 1 -Cr"^^^^^^^^ 
 
 e im, /,*«r/^•^: inc judicio hoc. 7'/«m morte inimlci AW.7/Mm.-lb. 7, 2, 2 -.IM7 rt^^ 
 
 SM n ^*'" i".V.^- ^'""'' ^"•' ""'."' """ ^'^^- ^en. Ben. 3. 3.5.-ln quo magis reprehmTndts 
 
 Him (piod I'iK.F.EA' .«cripserim, quam quod ' in ' addiderim. Cic. Att. 7, 3 % -N^si to rte 
 
 p>Tus elo(,uenti;e ;««7j«- 7^/am quod meatidlret, inridh-es. lb. Fam. 7, ;i3, 1 -Uii'de ouam- 
 
 iiuabfuisti, ;/*«./,,■ a me «6..v,v^videbflre,5r./a;/, si d(uno esses. lb. Att. J 5 -Ni nc i di- 
 
 iiitn meiim xuuUomagi.< confirmo testimonio tuo (i. e. quam antea). lb. Brut 42 -Mmis 
 
 esset pud,j,dam sJ in sentential permaneres. lb. Tusc.2,5, 14.-Nihil ?nagis caveSn 
 
 e.^t senectuti quam ne lan^MiOri so dedat. lb. Off. 1, 34. cazenaum 
 
 hS'.ur.Y'''-'^''^' «^"'^l''-'' 'J^^'^'^^e in the instance mentioned No. B. is in the followin^r 
 i.s antes expres.sed by ;>//^?, as adverbial accusative of intensitv: 1) If the <vovernin5 
 
 ini^ ;;: v>?'i^/I-"J-"' "''"^'''' ^ ""^'A " ^'^'JJ ^^^y ^^ construed with t'he accvsaliveof indef- 
 ' ^ir !::V^^\'"' />o.vs^. r«A;'^. j>otirre, pjvdesse, nocZre, sapere. The Latin .ays 
 V . • • -I ''{^.1"Vi f^^''^ ( = to be powerless, to be powerful): nihil valere, to be of no 
 
 mi ;,. r;/ ''"!'^^ "'•""■^'' '"''^^ '"^'"'^^ *" ''^' "" 'i^-noramus'; «one of these verbs ad- 
 b 7; •/'ivJ'iL' ? Htc'»";«tJ V' ^'-^P''^''^''^.tl »>y Piihsiantives. The intensity of such verbs, 
 e er bv «7/ J,7 ,'' f^^f r"^'-!-*^ hy accusatives of ' intensity ' (multum, tantum), and hardlj? 
 ,i// Jt Yh • ' * ^"^ intensity (adeo tarn, valde, admodumetc). The same V('rbs requirb 
 il- iV '^V.^'.-""-*^^' « ^'^'f^^^' ^'(n-ee of their intensity, and cannot be construed with magis • 
 eM',.n I . ''1'" •' '"•■.'•1^"''*-'=* mytros non modo armis plus guam ceTeras natiOnes. veVum 
 
 maj^istiatus. CiV.-. B G. 1, 14. b'O plus j)osse occurs Cic. Att 6 1 3- Fam 5 21 2 and 
 
 meVrL'7.uU''^^^^^^^^ Liv.44,40;-/Y;M"apnd 
 
 Solum mm !m^ '^T" ''1'-' ?f""l^.<-''c- ^*'"-. 1, l.-P/u.'> in amicitia ra/^/ similitCdo 
 moium quam animias. Nep. Att. 5.-Utilitas;>/w.* raluit (had a greater weight) quam ho- 
 
 f'^- 
 
 
75G 
 
 COMrARATIYE CLAUSES. 
 
 QUANTITATIVE COMPARISON. 
 
 757 
 
 TiPRfm Cic Off 3 ^0 —Ad cnmo]anAnm mhW plus ralff qunm qnod etc. lb. ram. 5,13. 3. 
 );«f rm.rf5(iant lit tibi nlus ouam ipsi hoc tempore pnxhsse pop-ini. Cic. ham 10, -K».— At 
 
 f Le. 4- .ic ut"n -run. Jnpi. or />///. /.0<vy- potui.set r/.«/« i.ocut ^'bi ipse 
 
 in alt.im oiiam (iiue in ^tatiOiie sunt nav.s, prommei t. I^ ^- •i\' :^*--'^f /^'''^ .^"V/V? 
 li,i . «;/-?m (lonn^ • le<t Im; may tl)iiik himr^elf icis^r than his master. ( aio. R. R. o. 
 ^te^p '^m^^^ tiliu.il. Ilor. Ep. 1, 18. 277.-2) Certain yerh< take convkn- 
 
 lower. Here belonir affnlre and ,/iliffere (in classical prose always ^^■uh plus, = J;» joye 
 nwrl or bef/er\ while in the positive both, the adverbs r(iI<i^yrar/mo>i>wi, and the a - 
 ?e2tiv<?s mX-m. hinfum ete. occur; ' m/>U^ and v//i7"«^i «"''^ ;;''^^^\r ^^''rir^'Tl' 
 tivemeumn^, different from /.iAi/ ralrre and ;>,wM^.v^.- see <^'>%Fmn..lb 2 ; A •1-19.4 , 
 '> 20 "j- 2 23 3- »i 1 2H):as: Hiinc (inem tu/)/'<.s' quam te rtm^^*. Cic. Brut. 8h.— tiuasi ntri 
 uo-^i^iifqt.tqnam p/// • alteruni <ii/i,af. quam se.' Ib.Tusc. -S. 2t>.-Ut;>/«^^ a//^^^. lien nul o 
 m.d pot?s . \b.-Totu.n h.cum pUs urM> posthac. lb. Let:. 2. ^-AntecMass.c.Uly bo h 
 »;/a7i.s- and;.//i.< are used: (^lem e-o ///f^r/t.v a/yK> quam te. Pluut. 1 rue 5, 5 2(K-Non quo 
 quemquam j>lus ameni, aut ?>/". iniigani (i. e 7^.a/n .llnm> eo ''^.^l; J^^-J^'l^.j^^'.^^'^- 
 Tiins uater (juite ainat iihisqtuim hosce oculos. lb. Ad. 5, ..5.— Jo /lafe uori^e i«» ex 
 ^Shy^u'oSeiLt • t'., love better " not by ; ;../i.. «'-^rO: but also ^v^^^ 
 iiis>y ' uioderam mn\U> p^'jus hunc quam ipsuin Cladunn. Cic. Finn. . 2, .^--Q '>'<•'"' 
 quo plu^ciebet/t (ec.) ;..«./ls4/?/vv./ Sen. Ep. 19 -/>,.?/■. ^t.^^'Krio 19 2 ^2') So ne 
 v//;(i/v' a-- Non multo />/'/>• patiia'/aro quam «jloruetuif. Cic. Fam. 10 19, 2.-^) some 
 few v^rbV d^M oti . " itensitv, l,ut not belon-im: to the abovcMnentioned s,-mi-transime 
 AvrbValU(convniti(.nallv) either plus nr vutois, as: Hn>t,^. rr?-,n tut^re.f, 7,u,ve,e 
 }^Lo^:)lZf^l^ and perhaps s.line others; a;^: ^i'"^ j''^^;:^::/^^ uiV'' inteiii^'o n o 
 capi Li-urum, cjmtm bene defendi causan. M'. Cum. Cic. Hr U. .3. \''' • .V^/V * n \tt 
 »/Xiv £7*/e/<ss/tiia te a.'ere iiuod a-eii'lum est, quam mefl, te adesse comltu^.* lb. Alt. 
 f T( 1 -S wTt he s' d .( e';serat. mequ,. plus r,uam ..-rvi more d.-be.e videbfl, ur, covonoie- 
 rnf Ih \tt 1 12 4 Rut- Sed me ///ofvm/ nemo m.^f/iwy/^./mis quern tu neminen. pu- 
 U- lb Att 7 8 8 Oue quia tibi sunt propiora quam nobis, tiia ine ruusil uums me 
 
 ^om -^^m nt^ lif Fa;!" 12. 7, l.-NcH putare. me de "V^,X^'^^ti'e '^^la/^nllnO 
 de hac> lb Ati 1 3 liut : Ut si mea res esset, non matjis Mxuurtm (1. e. (juain n 11 c). 
 ih Km i!44 So 11) 13 5t 3- 13.74.-/V'/.* et vfnnvn: et (irnhnus de<.s iminortalls. 
 ] V Th uomi) he 1 -a:4 \l\i\xvutqU r^nn, «juoted No. B).-nr.^uH seems_ t« 
 Uxk; «/^tonirs na v.l'cVn M>t s in thepositive ' ruUI. r.rsun\ but ' mulfumvnsan^ 
 ]!^!;i(umi^mud^^ersurL Cic. Brut. 47) ; as : In rebu. atque usu plus, quam vellem, v.r- 
 *rt/a.<. Cic. Fani.6, 10, 6. . , ^„ . , •,•„„ 
 
 n Tf not two different de-rces in the intensity of the ««ame action, but the inlen-ities 
 oUuodflreu^ compared wi.h each' other, the cmparison is always made 
 
 dunTe-'UUtoV'/o//^ dufntauhni magls quam li.hnt.m rvhn^^m*. l»^-Att 10 
 
 RT-Sucirc nLue ions as the follnwin- belnn- to the silv.-r a-.' and to the pi.ets: Huh 
 %latt^icS:.Uuam val.t. Sen. Ep.K) (Such wordn --'-'V/'rfoI '^" ' "''^ ^' 
 where plus is treated as a transilive oloecU according to p. ho, A. 39 foil. 
 
 F If the de-rees of two actions belonjn- as objects to the .«ame pre.licate. or two 
 AvlmVXsv are compared mth €a<h oHi.r, the comparison is ma.U- hy marjis, not by 
 W s as- Tantasuin^^^ l]r<v,n.'an quamauw /^""/7;;^^.,^;- 
 
 { t' ('ic F- m '^ 1 ~Sed i ra-teritnrum. qute //ur/i>' npi-e/i^u^/ifjuamrornui pos^ent 
 nh Tiuu^' Liv 3t?2^) - Var/ism\h\ vid-iitur vota /arturi contra rem pub icam 7.''«^" »'"!'* 
 M 7 r Cic Cai 2 y -R im-lni maais iluudis quam urnpv'udls bo^eJhysnmuUux^ panV 
 
 •~^-~VrnT n the<c an d the followim; passa<;es it clearly appears that the distinction made 
 by aU "mnuuuianl accoa to whicl? ;>/«. does not refer to the inienstd/, but only to 
 the extent of an action, is utterly unfounded. 
 
 aci se imponari desulereiit. Ca^s. li. li. 4, 2.— Comp. Tac. H. 4, 25; Sail. Cat. 14 —If th 
 actions thus eompared are represented as producing at the same time a different intensif 
 of tlie main aciion, the conii)arison may be made hy pi ux, if admissible accordiiiij to th 
 rules U'lder No. f:. as in the passage Cic. Le»;. 3, 14, cited above (VitiOsi priucipes pli 
 
 iv(e. Cic. Fam. 7, 1, 1.— Omnibus ita existimantibus, magis sanctitdte rifce quam sacerdi>- 
 
 tv jure cam rem lluminem obtinuisse. Liv. •?7. S.— Impetraia pax, rnagis ut fessa tarn di- 
 
 utiiio beilo acqiiiesceretcivitas, 7«am7'/"(/ digni peterent. Liv. 5, 23 (Here the intei eitiea 
 
 of the cause?, in reirard to their effects, are compared with each other).— Mercatoribus 
 
 est aditus fnaai< eo ut quje hello ceperint quibus veiiderunt habeant, 9^ '/am quo ullam rem 
 
 ad se importjlri desiuereiit. Ca^s. B. G. 4, 2.— Comp. Tac. H. 4, 25; Sail. Cat. 14 —If the 
 
 sify 
 
 the 
 
 , - ^ ., , , . - ^.lus 
 
 extmjHo quavi ptccato no<:ent). 
 
 Obs. 8. Peculiar is the use of plus and mngis with a neoation {non plu-o quam, non 
 mnijis quam = no more than). A nep^ative comparison of this kind repiesents the com- 
 pared actions as not different in their degrees of keality ; ' non magis quam ' represent- 
 insx either the two propositions as equallij vntr^ie, or as equally trve. In ttie first in- 
 f^tance both non plus and non magis are used, both having the force of 'as little as'; 
 in the second insHnce, «renerally, oidy '•non magis quam' is used, with the force ol 'as 
 MUCH As\ but with a peculiar relation of the two actions. 
 
 A. The English ^ as little as' must always be expressed by maglt or plus with a nega- 
 tion, because the Latin language has no direct expression for the intensive adverb 
 'litile' ( = 'non inultum\ 'non adnioduni'' etc.; see p. 2(14, Obs. 5). 'Ae little as' is 
 rather more frequently expressed by 'non plus quam ' {nihil plus quam) in classical lan- 
 giiag»*, than by 'non magis quam\ the former being employed even when 'plus quam' 
 would not be admissible without a nega'ion; a-: De ciijus incolumitjlte nou plus dubifo 
 quam te memini dubitilre de meil; About his inteirrity I doubt as little as{\ do not doubt 
 auy mart than) I rem-mberthat you doui)ted of mine. Cic. Fam. «i, G. 2.— Hunc annuliim 
 si habeat sapiens, nihil plus sil>i licCre putet peccdre, quam si non liaberet; He would 
 tiiiiik wrong-doing to be as little allowed to him as it would be if he had no such ring. 
 H). Off. 3. 9.— Angor iste qui ])ro simlco sjejje capiendus est, }ion plus valet quam ut vir- 
 tfltps, quia iionnuUascuras atlerant, repudientur ; is of no greater weight a^'ainst friend- 
 ship (i. e. holds good as little against friendship) than (as) thai virtues should be repudi- 
 ated, because they may cause some cares. lb. Am. i:^, 48. — Ego illas Calvo litterasmisi, non 
 jilus quam has, quam nunc legis, existimans eaituras; thinking that the letter would be- 
 come as little public as the one wtiichyou are now reading. Cic. Fam. 15. 21. 4. — S<i- enim, 
 me Gncce loqui in Latino sermnne non plus so]Qri', quam in Gra'co Latliie. Ib.Tusc. 
 1,8.— Scutum, gladiuin. galeam in onere nostri milites non plus numt-ranf, quam huine- 
 ros. lacertos, nmnns; they count them just as litMe as (no more than) they do their 
 shoulders etc. lb. Tusc.2. "]>;.— Bil)nliis. dum unus hostis in Syriii fiiit, jiedem porta non, 
 vlus extulit quam <ionius * t-ua; Bibulus, as long as a single enemy was in Syria. i)laced 
 nis foot as little out of the gate as his house did. lb. Att7(). 8. 5.— Cicero also' uses ' noti 
 magis *^uatn' in this meaning, but less frequently than 'non plus quam\ and without 
 any assi^'iiable distinciion from it, as : Nihilo magis ei licifurum esset, plebCjo. rempub- 
 licam prodere quam patricio esset licitum; It wolild be as little allowed to him. in his 
 quality as a Plebeian. t<> betray the rei>ublic, as this would be allowed to the Patricians. 
 Cic. Att. 2. 1. 5.— Si proccsseris longius. von vuigis doUndum est. quam airricola^ dolenr, 
 praferitd verni teinporis suaviiate. a-statem etautumiium venisse. lb. Sen. 1!), 70.— Qui 
 animus est in alicpio inorbo. non magis est sauus quam id corpus qui>d in morbo est. lb. 
 Tusc. 3.5, 10. — Sin ali(iu:"I in re Verris siinili"» fiiero, non magis m\\\[ deerif inimlcus ^//aw 
 Verri defuit. Ib.Verr. 2. 3. 69. — \ qua (gratijl) te affici non magis potiiisse dimonstras 
 quam Herculem Xeiu)phontC'um ilium a voluptate. lb. Fam. 5, 12, 3.— The writers of the 
 silvt-rage do not use ' non plus quam'' in the adverbial moaning 'as little as', but only 
 ' n'ui magis quam \ as : Quid sit animus non magis tibi qui^quain cxpedief quam ubi sit; 
 What the s<»ul is, nolxxly can tell yoii any more than where it is (can be said as little as 
 etc.). Sen. Q. N. 7, 24. Comi). Sen". Iia.2.'l2 : lb. 2. 14: Quint. proaMn.5(); Suet. Cal. 19.— 
 Oft<'n non plus quam or non ?nagts qvam is added to a sentence already negative, in 
 \yhich instance ' mui plus' must be rendered ' any more', as: Xeque enim bonitas, nee 
 liberalitas esse potest, non plus quam amicitia, si h:ec nou per se expetantur; Nor 
 can there be any goodness etc., any moi'e than friendship, il etc. Cic. Off. . 3, .33. — Ne 
 iiuiic q iiidem vires dt-sidi ro adolescent is, non plus (any more) quam adf)lescens Uuiri aut 
 
 ♦iThe Cod. Mid. an(i the other Codd. which are copies from it, read'^?/am domo siid\ 
 which makes no sense. The critics liave variously tried to emendate the readinjr; some 
 conjecturinij 'quam olim doi^io sua'; others, 'quam consul domo sua, '. But these con- 
 j< ctiiies do not essentially remedy the passaice. In our oj)inion. there is no doubt that 
 Cicero wrote ' quamdo/nussna '. although this reading is nothing but our own conjecture. 
 The connection shows that the comparative clause was meatit to denote an action alto- 
 gether out of the question, Bibulus beiusr designated as a coward for remaining immov- 
 able iu his headquarters as long as there was any danger. 
 
 I: 
 
•5 
 
 758 
 
 COMPARATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 QUANTTTATIYE COMPARISON. 
 
 759 
 
 elephanti dcslderabam. lb. Sen. 19. 27.— Hoe rf»8 tion sunt ira», n/>n magis quam tristitia 
 esitqmu ad conspectimi mlmici naufragii contrahii troutem. Son. Ira, 2, 2.— .\t>/i iia.^citur 
 ex lualo bouum. 7M>/i mayi»' ^waw. ticii!' ex oloa. lb. Ep. 87. 
 
 B. When the comparativi- clause contains a fact represented as holding good, the 
 two p^(>po^iitions beiii'r represented m beini,' equally true, ' non magis' has the lorce of 
 ' a^ much \ but the construction is uof equivalent to ' (am., .quam ', ' taiitum.. .quam , 
 'oeque...ac: representing ratlier the fact of the clause alter ' quain' as beini,' ' no less 
 true than that of the principal sentence, and sometinies implyin;,' that the fact in tlie 
 comparative clause /nay hold good in a Ai<//ifr decree than that of the principal sen- 
 tence. Hence this construction is equivalent to ' nun minus quam \ if the relations of 
 the clause and of tlie principal sentence are reversed C nori magis e<j:o quam tu ' being 
 tlie same as ' rwn minus tu quam ego '), This reversal is always preftrable ni rendering 
 
 pluii \\v2.^-x\\u valibas quam _ , 
 strong in mind than you, you certainly feared less literally: If you were not more strong 
 in mind than I, etc.). Cic. Att. 3. 15, 7. Uut : Jus bonuuiqiie apud eos (i. e. prisc«»s llomil- 
 no-') non le<'ibus magis quam natura ralthat; Kight was maintained no less by its own 
 nature than by the laws. Sail. Cat. 9. Here, according to Ob-'. 7, A', the use ol plus in 
 excluded.— A>c me 7nagis me;e miseriic excrunant quam tu;e; Your distress torments me 
 no Ifss than my own (as nun h as my own). Cic. Fam. 14, 8, l.-Ciuid enim in meis snpe- 
 rioril)us litteris fait pneler querelam temporum? quie iio)i meiitn animuirt magis sollici- 
 turn habent quam tuum; which engage your mind no less than miive (as much as mine), 
 lb. 2, 10, \.—Xon magis te, quam de te judicium meuin reprthendo ; I censure my judg- 
 ment on you no less than 1 censure you. H). U», 2»j, 2.— .V^'/w enim ipsOruin conviviorum 
 delectaiionem voluptaiibus corporis «u/7i< quam ca'tu amicOrum et sermoniKiis metie- 
 bar. lb. Sen. 13, 45. This construction occurs also with reference to numerical relations 
 (non plures quam), afi: Itaque non uqnH, non iirni pi u rihu s h)C\i^ ufimur quam «micitia; 
 We do not use friendship less often ^on fewer occasions) than w.iter and tire. Cic. Am. 
 (i, 22.— Compare for t^tich constructions with 7i0/i magis quam : Cic.Verr. 2, 4, 3; Liv. 1, 
 28; 9, 22: 2, 5; 22. 27: 39, 52: 45. 10.* This construciion is al>o applied to predicates con- 
 Bistingof a predicate-adjective with the copula, in which instmce the comparative wa- 
 f/i.>' irenerally coalesces with the adjective in the form of the inflectional c(»mparative 
 de"-ree, as : Cincinnatus non in plebe coeicenda quam senAtu castigando rf/<f;/<a</ior 
 fiPit; he was not /€.s\!? vehement in reproacliing the senate, than in <»)eicing the plebs. 
 Liv.^1, 19.— Sometimes the comparative clause is nei/'/ier asserted as holding good, nonis 
 iioidin"' not good, as: Hiec quidem ratio rton magis contra Uciruli quam contra onmo 
 ju-juraiidum valet: This reason prevails no tnort a-amst Heu'nlus's oath, than nL.'ainst 
 any other oath. Cic. Otf. 3, 29 (i. ^..- If ir holds good against Keguliis's oatli, ii holds 
 good against every other oath; if not, not). 
 
 Obs. 9. 'Potius qua?H ' corresponds to ' rather thnn \ and is used to correct the fact ex- 
 pressed in the clause, representing it as //o^ holding good, and hence a comparison by 
 'potlus quam' is sitn'.lar to a negative coordination by 'non.. .std\ as : Hoc re jxjfius 
 dcclarabo quam oratiOne: I will declare this rather by facts than by words (alniosi the 
 same as: 'hoc non aratidne, sed re declardbo'). Cic. Fam. H. i:^, 4. But the comparative 
 form t)y 'pitfius quam' repiest-nts the two actions as optional alternatires (I might iio' 
 Clare it" by words, but I do not), and hence is e.«pecially applied to correct falfe antici- 
 pations or views which the reader, or hearer, or the person spoken of, might enter- 
 tain about the reality of some action; as: Auxit potius tinioiem quam minuit. Liv. 
 45 \0 —Mi'^'ericf nostme jMtiu.^ velim quam inconstanfiw tribiias quod a VibOne subito 
 discessimus. Cic. Att. 3, 4.— Velim banc inanem meam diiigeniiam tnl<erafdlem jtotius 
 quam ineptam pnte^. lb. ;?. 23, 1. — /'o/i/^^■ ritil quam palrid carebo. lb. 3. ild.-Ne causd 
 jKitius apud te vahiisso videar qua7n gratia. lb. Fam. 13,5. i. — Opftmus jjofiu.^ ut eat in 
 exsilium quam queramur. lb. Cat. 2, 1.—Xocti se potius ac solitiidini quam ulli ant urfji 
 ant hospiii committCbat. lb. Clu. 68.— Meinini quum mihi desipere videbflre quod cuiti 
 istis mtius viveres quafn vfMscum. lb. Fam.7, 2S. 1.— .Vc/f/i'»" quam (as in most of the 
 passages quoted Ons. 7, D and E) is often used with a force siiinlar to ' potius quam' ; 
 ~"*yBy"not reversing the two comparative clauses in construction» of this kind, pas- 
 sages have often been misinterpreted. So the much-discussed passage Cic. Tusc. 1, 17, 
 4l"w here we must evidently read ' non nomindta magis quam inte/Ucta ' (as some ol the 
 CtMld have it) in place of the vulirata 'qnam non intellecta '. The vul.'ata will not make 
 
 Mise required by the connection, whether we reverse the terms, or whether we read 
 
 in the Latin ordei-. But by reading 'quam intdlecta '. if we understand the pas- 
 
 nenativdij according to No. A, the sense will be clear at once (.-The filth element, 
 
 the ser 
 
 them ii 
 
 Baire negativdy 
 
 which is as little comprehended as it has a name). 
 
 but a clause dependent on magis, if used in this sense, denotes rather a small decree 
 than an absolute denial, although a degree exceedingly small is virtually a denial. Thus 
 it^ sometimes occurs iu the same period with ;x>/i'/v," merely to change the expression, as: 
 Ne id quod petat, ex.igere magis quam roQdre, et in mercMis jxttius qua?n beneficii loco 
 numerare videatur. Cic. Fam. 2, «1, 1. Similarly : Priinum eniui judicio malo ( = magi8 
 voio) quavi gladio (hetari), delude glo7'ia potius (helari volo) quam calamitdte. lb. 7, 2. 2. 
 —Potius^ in connection with a disjunctive conjunction, serves to correct a single 
 expression of tlie sentence ; generally rel iwtius being thus used, but also sen jxjtius, 
 or aut jxjtius: as: quotidie, rel jwtius in dies singulos. breviOres litteras ad te mitto. Cic. 
 Att. 5. 7. 1.— Scripsissem. te frustra in nendtum, sire ixAius in conventum si-natoruin, esse 
 yentarnm, ni etc. Ih.VAin. A, \,\.— Cunspectu7n, aut ])Otius citn\\i\iixnm mihi tuum, defu- 
 is^e. lb. Att. 4. 1,2. Sometimes the adverbial Cim\\^SiV'M'\\Q citius or ]i7i us is used with 
 the force of potius, as: Vitain sibi eripi cidus qua7n irloriam rerum gestarum posse vo- 
 cilerabatur; He exclaimed that his life could be rather {WlQT'dWy ' 77iore quickly ') ts\n'n 
 from him than the glory of his deeds. Liv. S, 32.— .^gyptii quamvis carniliclnam p/JM« 
 sul)ierint qun77i ibin aut aspidein violent. Cic. Tusc. 5, 27.— MagnStes iu corpora isua 
 citiu.^ siTvi'uros qua77i ut Romanam amicitiam violarent. Liv. 35, 31, 
 
 Obs. 10. If a comparison refers to the intensity of a descriptive adjective or adverb, 
 the c<nnparatiye adverb '7/iagis' is generally merged in the Inflectional comparative de- 
 gree of the adjective or adverb. Hence every inflectional comparative of a descriptive 
 adjective or adverb contains the syndetic antededeiit 7nagis of the Quam-clause by im- 
 jdicatiMii, as: Luna est i7iajor quam dimidia pars terra}. Cic. N. D. 2. 40.— Exercitus multo 
 niodestia post victoriam, ^uar/i ipsa victoria, /o//c/aW/ior.' Liv. 3(i, 21.— QuiPdam abscin- 
 diiiituryV/ct/^'/A^ animo qua/n teinperantur. Sen. Ep. \^^6.—^[aju6 accCpit beneficiura ouam 
 dedii. lb. Ben. 3, 35. *- ^ f « 
 
 If the degrees in the intensity of tivo different descriptive adjectives (predicative or at- 
 
 triiMitive) or adverbs are compared witli each other, the Latin language places either 
 
 both adjectives (or adverbs) in the comparative degree, or both in the i)ositive decree. 
 
 In the latter instance the comparison is made by the adverb waz/i*" (sometimes by 
 
 j)0/ius. or melius). The fonner method is more usual in Livy and ihe historians, as : 
 
 l^ngiorquajn latior ac\en erat ; mtei:ali.y : The battle-line was longer than deeper 
 
 (J e. The length of the battle line exceeded its width ; or ' The battle-line was long, but 
 
 it had little depth) Liv. 27, 48.— Triumphus ob earn rem cla7'ior qvarn gratior fuit ; The 
 
 triuiiiph. therefore, was ra^^^r (more) brilliant than ]X)pular. lb. 5. 2:j.— Asia rfi/t5r<>« 
 
 quam,ror^?r>^^ exercitus hiciGbat : Asia made our armies 7ather7ich than brave. lb. 39, 1. 
 
 Sometimes 7/iagis or potius is redundantly added to such comparisons : Cele7idra 
 
 quam tutiC/ra consilia 7nagis placere diicibus. H). 9, 32.— The second method is more 
 
 Usual in Cicero. Mihi autein i/npud>'ns 77iagis qva/zi stultus vidStur. Cic Att. 5. 21. 12. — 
 
 Sed exstitit tempus optdtu77i mihi magis quam sperdtU7n. lb. Fam. 5. 8. 2.— Artem juris 
 
 civilis habebitis. magi-s' 7nagna7n atque vlie7'e7n, qua7n dijficiie7n i^t obscura7n. Ib.Or. 1, 
 
 42.— Octavius jid dicendum veniGbat ?nagis audadter quaoi pa7'dte. lb. Brut. (58. — Vir 
 
 iiiireiiii i/i(igni 77iagi-< qua7n bcmi. Sen. Ira, 1, Ki,— Quid valet igitur ilia L. Crassi cojriosa 
 
 7nagi.'< quam sa]ne7is oratio ? Cic. Par. 5. 3.— Est non gloribsa 7/iagis qua7n dives victoria 
 
 vesira. Liv. 37. 54.- -Consul respondit. ?nagis scepe qaa7n rere ninqnam .^tOlos pacem 
 
 petere. lb. :i8. 8.— Quod fiubtilifer 7nagis quum ditucide dicitnr. Cic. Tusc. 1. 17. So with 
 
 indius; Quam causani Pompejiis. animdlus i/itlius qua7ti pardtus susceperat. Cic. Fam. 
 
 0. (i. 10. Cicero, however, sometimes made use of the method by two comparatives: Non 
 
 linu'o, ne lifjtntius li:ec in Clodium evomere videar y?/awi veiius. Cic. Mil. 29. — In the 
 
 writers of the silver Latinity sometimes an inflectional co7/i]mrative is used in the first 
 
 j)art of the comparison with a ]X)-^itire\\\ the Quam-clause ; and sometimes two positives 
 
 are connected by quam without magis: Ingenium Agricohe specieni magnie gloriae 
 
 rthe7nentius qua7n caute ajjpetebat. Tac. Agr. 1.— Fine anni excessit Asinius Agrippa, 
 
 Claris majoribiis qua77i vetusiis. lb. Ann. 4, 61. 
 
 Obs. 11. The 'compared members' in a comparative period may be single members of 
 the two ])ropositions, as in most of the passages quoted above, or whole clauses. 
 
 A. Uklative Claisks. A comparison of relative clauses occurs in the followinc: in- 
 stances : 1. II fn'o relative daufies are compared with each other, as : Scito multo plures 
 es-^e qui d> t7'ibuto recusent, quam qui exigi relinf. Cic. Fam. 3,7,3.-2. The S7jndetic 
 antecedent of a relative clause may be compared with its !7/'a//jwir/^?'ca/ antecedent in the 
 l>rincipal sentence. In this instance the syndetic antecedent is ow?i//^c/, the relative 
 clause being immediately preceded hy qua7h, as: Xavls facit hunnUOres quam quid us 
 in nostro marl uti consuevimus. Ca?s. B. G. 5, 1 (= qua7H eiefuttunt quibus etc.).— £"2?- 
 ercitu hand minOre quam que77i prius habuerat, ire ad hosils permit (= quam is fuit 
 guem prius habuerat : with an army not smaller than that which he had etc.) Liv. 30, 
 11.— 3. Ill a comparative period wMth the adjectives j)lii7'es^ plus, 7)iinus, or a descriptive 
 •djective in the comparative degree, the second term of the comparison often takes the 
 
 
 tiMf 
 
760 
 
 COMrARATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 QUANTITATIVE COMPARISON. 
 
 761 
 
 form of & relafire clawe introcluccd by a qitnntilatire or a numeral relative adjective 
 {qitaiitus, quoO after the conjunction quaw, if the (iiium-clause lias a predicate different 
 Ironi that of th<' principal sentence, and if the compared quantitative or uunicralidras 
 occur in each of the two (completed) propos^iiions as attkibitive, absolute, or pkkdi- 
 CATivE ADJKCTiVES, as: Quud t'iii plus fnime/iti imjx-ratviTtur. qnain qvxinfuin ^xatara/tt/ 
 Because they were char<.'«'d witli t/tore corn than they had harve^ttd. Cic. Verr. 2.3.29. 
 In tliii* ^^ellt^•nce the predicat'S of the propositions are differetit, the comparative clau^e 
 l)einu completed in the loliowin;: fern», ' 1 hey had harvested less corn \ Hen- the com- 
 pared quantitative ideas occur in both propositions as absolute and respec lively at- 
 tributive adjectives; hence quantum {\.e. frumaiti) is addeci fiUvr quain, afjreein^ with 
 .// ntneiiti in pender and number, according? to the rules for relative clause's, but takinor 
 ihe cage required by the construction of the clause. In Enqlii^h fuch relatives cannot he 
 exprei^fted. — Hannibal jdureti et duces et miliies IJomanorum occldit, ^w^/;? ^?/o<' super- 
 Hunt. \a\. ^,V.\ {— Paucidres duces supersunt ; hence the /JM//i.vrt/ adjective 7«ryMakes 
 the j)Iace of pauciores). — Dux jjlures, quam quot mtis erant in usum, ijrnes accendit. Liv. 
 '3(i. 10 (— pauciores iqnes satiti erant}.— i>o when /(//j/?///i with a multiple is the syndetic 
 anteceileiit : Iiitelli<;Ctur, sexies tantum {i. e. fruroeu\i) quam quantum satum sit, abla- 
 tum esse ah aratorTl)us. Cic. Verr. 2, 3. 43. — De i)ectiniil finltur. uti major (equivalent to 
 the unusual ^ p/us pecunicv") causa ludorum consumeretur. 7^/^/7« 7««///« Fuivio Nobili- 
 viidecrifa ei>set. Liv. 40, 44. — ImplC-bat hondnet» cerliuris f^jxi. quam quantam fides i)ro- 
 missi humsliu pubiicere solet. Liv. 2(). 19 (= tides ?ni/iu< spei subjicere solet).— Cu. Len- 
 tulus multo viajorein ojtinionem dicendi actiOne faciebat, quam quanta in eo facidtas 
 crat. Cic. Brur.fi6. 2-34 (=opiniOnem dicendi majonm fecit ; farultax dic*^idi minor fuit ; 
 the quantitative adjective bein<r attributive, quantum, takii.jrit? place, must n<,'ree with 
 the «govern ill LT noun yrtC«//«.s'). These (piantitative relatives. how6v«'r, m ly be left out 
 if tlie relative is in tiie nominative or accusative, or In the same case as the compara- 
 tive in the i)rincipal sentence, as: Patiemini, judices, ab araroril)Us jAua aliquanto 
 (frumeiiti) abljltiiiu qs^s^q., quam natitm f<it ?' (*>r quatn quantum natum sit). Cic. Verr. 2, 
 3. 43.— (^uo maJOre, etiam apud vos odioesse deber. quam (inst o{ quamquanto) est apiid 
 l)opulum Homiliium. lb. 1. It. Thus in the foUowinir passa-^e both formsare ii^edaloiif; 
 viih each 01 her : (Quantum Aproidu» edidissel dehc-ri, tantttm (frumenti) ex «'dicto dan- 
 diim erat. Etiamne si plua edidisset quam quantum natum erat ? Etiam : Quid, si mi- 
 /c/.v dedisset. quam poposcisset .Ai)ronin>i' lb. Verr. 2, 3. 2^>.— So in most of the i)a>saLret« 
 ■with ditierent predicates, quoted in Obs. 1 and (>. the relatives are omitted. But 
 puch an admission is inadmissible if the construction recjiiires the adjective to l)e 
 placed in the «jenilive, dativt-, or ablative, as : Cojris eos plin< lucri aildere. quam quanti 
 venierant (decuma'K Cic. Verr. 2,3,39. [= Decuma» re?iierant minorii^ pr^tii. the com- 
 mon terms in the two propositions beinir the idea of the very amount the intensities of 
 Aviiich are compari d Since this idea, in tiie clause, requires to be in the «reiiitive of 
 price, the relativ<>, liy which it is represented, cannot l)e omitted].— .</a/o/vw sumpluiu 
 lecerunt, ^wam ^'/^n/'i CatOnis lis jesiimilta est. lb. Verr. 2. 4, 10.— ..l/^(;(y;v inde aninu) 
 pacis opera inchojita, quam quanta mole j^esserat bella. Liv. 1.38. — 4. Sometimes the 
 same form of a relative quantitative clause after qu(im. is used to denote a • concessive 
 ioka', so that the (lej,'ree is representtd as irreater or less than it should te inft rnd 
 from the (act stated in the clause (— mon-, L'^reater than ' accordin<jr to '). as : Pnedam 
 inde majorem r\i\vx\X, quam quanta f/elli fama erat ; a booty irrealer than. acc«)rdin<; 
 to the reports on the war. it should iiave been expected Liv. 1,35. (ienerally. however, 
 this relation is more briefly exjiressed hy quajn pro \\'\\\\ an ablative: and this form is 
 applied to all tlie quantitative comparisons, in which the dei^ree is lepreseiited as being 
 ■not in. a direct projK>rtv>n to the fact contained in the clause • as : Achiei mulio majurem, 
 quam jnv numerocopiarnm, hostil)tis teirOrem intulerunt. Liv. .37, 20. — Quidquid dixero, 
 minus, qvam pro ati'ocitate et masrnitudine rei. dictum scitnte esse. lb. 39. \h.— Pluiihus 
 ivMiibus. quam pro numeromaneuHum, in sjkm iem lactis. ib. 21, 3'.'.— Omnium non tmta 
 pro .Eiolis cura vtM./erociori//UK quam pro ingmiis draco/ um (jtntis. Ib. 27, 30.— Cabtra 
 nietjitus est latius qvain pro copii>i. lb. 3G, 10. 
 
 D. iNFiNiTivE-ci.ArsEs.— If the compared memlier of a Qnam-clause is a Tlint-clanse, 
 its form must l>e determined accordinir to the manner in winch th»- (^>iiam cI!lU^e is to be 
 completed, as : Ut mori mallet { = ma^/ift re.Met) quam de his rt-fjus Sullam docT ri. Cic. H. 
 A. 9. 2f) (^minns roluit, Sullam de hi.< reftus doiu/i. which shows iliat the 'IMiat-elause is 
 an OhjecT-clause dependent on t'elte. and hence to be exi>ress<'d in tiie form of an Infini- 
 tive-clanse accordin;: to p. f)(j2, 3, A), — Neque salus nlla reii)ublicap. 7najorhoc tempore re- 
 pt'iTri potest, quam jyqmlum llomdnvm intelliqere. iif(iue taiita pcrnicies iilia potest acci- 
 dere, quam rationem Vtritdti< ah hoc oidine ((hjndirdri. lb. \'eir. 2, 1. v. '! he completed 
 Qiiam-clausesare ' Mitjor salus est jiopulnm H<imSi;uin intelli<r«'re: and Major })er nicies ettt 
 rationem abjudicftri \ Hence a Suliject infinitire-clause is required (p. ♦>13, Obs. 8: p. 609, 
 Obs. S). So, when the clause takes the form of a suhject-infinitive: QujPcausH i'tuthonesti- 
 or, quam a proviucia defeusOrem coustitui (=me det'ensOnun conslituij ? Cic. Vetr. 2, 1, 5. 
 
 a TJT-CT.AUSEs.-That-claneeB take the form of Ut-claupes of any description if the 
 romplet.-d comparative clause will require this form according to the general ru es a"- 
 ^'/'.•' J-'.V' '''"•^"•' ^''^''^ti's deos quam ut incolumi ahire liceat. Liv. 2G 41 -Coiwimi' 
 nihil mihi optatius cadere quatn ut tu me quam primiim consequare "cic Att 3 1 l' 
 (= opto ut etc.).— Magis vereor, ne parum gloriie. quam ne nimium belli sit.' Liv. 38 17* 
 -Idioma ical is the use ol a final UT-rxAUsE to represent the consequence of a denr*e 
 less than that of the principal action, denoting at the same time that the hiqher de-ive 
 as stated 111 the principal sentence, does not produce this consequence. Iii Eii'-lish we 
 use, instead of the Latin comparative, a positive with 'to(i\ and in^tead ofilTe Latin 
 I t-clause of purpose, an object-infinitive with Mo \ as : Clarior res erat quafn ur K-i ac 
 i\)>;^\imihin posset :^T\w.nua\er\s-n^ too clear to be covered up and dissembled (literallv 
 1 he matter was clearer than that it could be covered up). Liv. 2(i. 51. Here the sec d 
 term of the c<.mparis(,n must be completed by ' qtmm ea res esse dehuit ut tegi mssef ' - 
 i he matter was clearer than it ought to hare been in order to be covered up -So- Ouod 
 pra'ceptum, quia majus erat quam ut ab horaine videiCtur, iccirco assifrnatum est deo• 
 l Ins precept because it wa.s too sublime \o come from man, was assigned to a god' 
 veri.-iteln v hli.nV'iT" J,'';''";.^'^^.Canachi signa ligidiora esse, quam vt hmieutur 
 \criiatem y lb. Ibut. 18.~Potenttus yim id malum aiiparuit quam ut minOres per ma-is- 
 atussedarCtnr. Liv 25 l.-P«ter de se magis timCbit quam 1// filii necem ulciscaur. 
 11). 40, ll.-l' requently (but not in Cicero) final Ut-clauses of this kind (the same as or- 
 dinary final clauses, according to p. 557, Obs. 5. foil.) take the form of relative clauses 
 tie relative agreeing with its antecedent which, in consinictions ..fthis kind, is almost 
 always contained in the principal sentence, as : Vi^ii \e<:AXo major ac\e>^ qaam qmr ah 
 suo pnesKlM) sushnt?tpo.^sit ; The let-ate considered the army too strong lobe resisted by 
 hi< force. Liv. 10 4.— Famie et fidei damna majdroQ^^e quam qua; a'stiniaii possent Id 
 3. .-..-.Magis aunbus quam animis id acceptum erat. ut majus ketiusque quam, quod 
 nieiitccapere aut satis credere possent {too glad for them to comprehend), lb 27 50- 
 Ajiint, iios loqui ma^ma qnam qua; natflra hunulna sustineat. Sen. Ep. 104 — Sometim'ea 
 Quam-clauses dependent on jwtius and its equivalent^ (Obs. 9) take the form of an Ut- 
 ciaii>e to express more stron-ly the negative force of the clause ip. 608, Obs. 0), as • Ma<^- 
 nete.< 11. corpora ^wa citius sjevitQros. quam ut Homanam amicitiam violarent. Liv 35 
 31. Clauses of this kind inu.^t be ccmipleted by means of a verbum faciendi {=quam 
 nmnntterent ut vudarent). Generally, however, in constructions of this kind the 
 Quam-cianse takes a sufjjunctive without vt. See Obs. 12. 
 
 I). TKMf(.K.\L CLAUSES may be connected with Quam-clauses, to compare the time of 
 tilt! princii)al action with the time of another acticm mentioned in the clause in which 
 insrance the principal sentence generally contains a temporal adverb to which the time 
 01 the temp-iral clause is opposed: as: Vos uunc graviore caiCna vincti estis Quain ouum. 
 (=quanW^///i(/v</m) pru'sidium Macedonum in arce habuistis. Liv. 35 ;38 — E-re^ie Ari- 
 stoU'les ait. numquam nos verecundiores esse debere. qvam rjuum de deis agitiir. "sen O 
 .N. ..30. Generally such Quiim-clauses have their predicates in the indicative; but some- 
 times the subjunctive occurs. The same form is also used in compari.«ons of equality 
 
 ?r.";. ''m" '''^'" ^VV^"'^'^ '''""*■'' ^""^ l*''^*''*''' ^"^'^* ^^(^"^^ consulatum vulgSri rider^nt Liv 
 10. «,.— 1 emporal clauses are also used afrer quum when referring to indefinite time hav- 
 ing always their i)redicate in the indicative, a» : Omnium societutum nulla pnestiintior 
 est, quam quum viri bom. moribus similes, sunt familiaritate conjuncti. Cle. Ofl". 1, 17. 
 
 E. Causal clauses after quain represent a fact either as bein"- in a less deo^ree or 
 not at all the cause of some action, the real cause being stated in the principal sentence 
 which IS gener.iily connected wiih magU; as: Impetrata jiax imigis ut fessa tarn diutino 
 hello acquiesceret civitas. quam quod digni jyeterent. Liv. 5, 23. Hence this form is an 
 equivalent of the constructiim with 'non quod, sed\ explained p. «90 foil From the 
 reasons stated there, the mood of the clause must alwavs be the suaiUNcnvE. Ex • Sed 
 ex aliis xvhw^ vmgis quam quod ciilquam id compertum /0;«/, h;ec fama valGbat. Sail. 
 Cat. W.—Magix ut consiietudinem servem. quam quod vos non vestra sponte hoc facid- 
 «^o l^^^^^V^y"^^*"'',".^'"*' "^'^1'.*'^ audiatis. Cjc. Clu. 32.— Antiochus Ephesum est profectus. 
 
 guia Id negare Porsenna nequiverat Tarquiniis. ry//«//; quod nei^atiim iii *!ibi al) Komanis 
 vjnoraret. Liv. 2. 13.— Very frequently, in place of quod or quia in such clauses, quo is 
 used, the same as in the coiistr^i' tion * non quo. sed' (p.G90,6'). as: Benevoieniia maqis 
 M(UivU\<, quam quo res Ua postuldret. fiii Umgior. Cic. Fain. 6, 3, 1.— Mercatoribus est 
 aditiis magis eo ut qme bello ceperint qiiibus veiidant habeant, quam quo ullam rem ad 
 6c iraportari desiderent. Ctes. B. G. 4, 2.— H:ec. amOre magis impulsus, scril)enda ad te 
 putavl, quam quo le arbitrSrer mouitis et pr^eceptis egGre." Cic.Fam. 10,3,4.— Elsi more 
 
7(32 
 
 COMPARATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 QUANTITATIVE COMPARISON. 
 
 7G3 
 
 maoi^ hoc Pcribo, quam quo tc admonendum piitem. lb. 12, 20, 3.-Thc indicativk mu«t 
 be ii-^ed whiMi the comparison is madw by noa maqU, accordiiii,' to Obs. 8, No. B. oecaii^ie 
 in \\\\^ ii.st inco the fuct of the claii-*; is represented «v rm/, as: Decmius cum inH-iio as- 
 seiisu andltus .st, iwn rnnrji^ eo quod inultitudinis no.>cam clcvilbat, r/uarn quod m aucto- 
 res vertentt.. Liv. 4-), 10. In this instance, quo can not be substituted for quod. 
 
 F Si-ci AtT««Ks are frequently combined with quani. wlien the (iuam-clau-e must be so 
 coinnlrtedas to contain the conditwn<tl the.<is, the pndicate bei.i- always supplied front 
 tbt' principal sent.-nce. The combination q>iani si (f/uin if> lias the same ofllee in the 
 clauses of r/'/aw/i/a^ir^ comparison as the conjunction quasi uis if), and the equivalent 
 combinations ac si, vt si etc. have in clauses of qmUitafive comi)arison; but with the dis- 
 tinction that the latter always require the suhjunctir,', bein,<: always jwn-rtul, while quain 
 si may be conceived either a- d..ubtfiil, or as non-real, accordin- to the nature .. the he- 
 sis whicli mu«t be supplied, and hence may be lollowed by an indicahiy; as . Mhil to 
 niihi qrafiiui facere posse, quani si omnibus tuis opibus Laniiam in V^\'\'''^l'^J'!^J2'l1,,fl' 
 lure-i/erfect). Cic. Fam. 11, 17, 2. Here the Quam-clause must l)e completed by/ qnamfe- 
 ceris si' etc.-Nisi forte viaqis erit parricTda, qui consulilrem patrem. quamKi.e.v^niUi 
 or,;iVhumilem necarerit. Il).Mil. 7.-Geiierdly. however, this foim is used when the the- 
 sis by which the Quam-clause must be completed is hy})ol helical, and, in this instance, 
 the moods are jrenerally hyiuAhelical (i e. imperfect or phiperfect subjunctive), while the 
 mood with quiii. ac si Jtc generally folh.ws the hiw of consecution; as: l>eto a tedihq'^n- 
 Wil-q^ni (i. e. pelerem) sPmea res essel. Cic. Fam. 18 11. 2.-Rei:ulus, quum \i.>l/'y'<> 
 necabiltur erat in meliOrc caus;l 7"«'^ d-^- fuisset) .s7 doini consuUlns remannssel. lb 
 OffVi^-Ptus ea oratio moment! ad incitando- ad bellum habuit. quam {i.e. habuisset) 
 si aperie siia^lendo cupiditatem res -crendi osMidissel. Liv. :i5.^r).-Peloponnesum quo- 
 nue adire jussi, nude prior le-atio discesserat incertiore >\A\n quam (?. f disctv-sis.ent) 
 s^ non venUsenf. II). 39. :«.— Hunc annulum si habeat sapi.-ns, nihil />/««; sibi hcere putet 
 li^^lZ^TiUwn e ih-eret) si non hab?rel. Cic. Ort'. 3. «J.-This form Is also applied to the 
 Kjlml of KQ '. L qu:intiries, as: Vide ne relijrio nobis tam adhibenda .a quam it.e^ 
 adlibenda esset) .4 teiiimonium diC'-nmu^. H). Brut. 85.-(iui autem non defendit si 
 potest, ta/n est iu vitio quain (i. e. si/) si parentes, aut amicjs,aut patnam deserat. lb, 
 
 Oft.l,'"!. ,.^ , -. , 
 
 Obs 12 When the two propositions of a comparative period have difTerent predicates 
 ami the comparative clause denotes not only the lesser •'«*-'•^•<^J''!:/^ 'ir;;;/,f ;//,, i'?/;;^.^ 
 Mated in it, the mood of the clause is re-ularly the subju-Nctivk. Mm h clauses are 
 c mi ar "d } means of the syndetic antecedent y>o/i*/.s-, or itsequivaknts ctlius audpnus 
 H ee OBs 9)^as : ErnTbo }m,1 us quam p^rducfe/ (lui^piam ( = lla(l>er l/ian take a -uiue, I 
 will .M?a.t ay) inaut.Mo^ 'i"<t"^ ro'in^ i" p.-ricnlum, divului.m face 
 
 S//: 5/m'Vo... into .iamjer, divide). Ter A..D. 2, 2. 32.-/W;;- V^'^'mid ^^^-^f,^ 
 dabo (lialher than allow this lo happen, I will irive) Plant. Pseud. l,o, 141 -^' ■ 9"« '* 
 t i M nTcum halH-am faciain ut j isseris {liaf/ier than have you an en.-my, 1 will do as 
 vou wi^orde r^^^^^^^^^ <>P"1vit />o^i'/.^ eum relinquere quam eu") 
 
 ? eUiriui cL;A^o/^s■/m/•./^ Plant. Aul. .red. ll.-IUicitalorem jx,l i us pon:xm quam illud 
 ni'.n s i.^t/. Cic.Fam.7,2,l.-Cur quod in sinu vestro e^t ^f^^'\i^^';^Z/:^Z^''ln 
 wnmlis f (Why do you bid us search for what you have in the bosom oJ your ^ ' "^^^f-^^^ 
 ^idoflauinq il downf) Liv. «i. m.-^E-yptii quamvis carnihclnam /.rVt'/w subiennt, 
 7'/ 1 f(.i au7aspi(le.n rinlent. Cic Tusc. 5. 27. -Zeno perpes.us est omnux ,M>Husquam 
 ?on'cios delend:e tyranni.lis indicarel. lb.2,22.-Depu?:na /f ^!/;//:^; " ,f^; 1'^^' ^ ^.f;^' 
 7 7 7 -If maqis is used in the principal sentence, the mood «d the c ause is he ludca- 
 tlve •' Maqisiiv\y.x le-atr,rum beni-ne sunt audita quam momentum ad muiandos animos 
 hahierun Liv. 42, 40.-Sometimes the writers of the silver age use subjunctives in com- 
 paraUve (iua.n-clauses as loosely as they use the subjunctive in 'r/« Vi^.^'l^'rof thi 
 Caio (Uticeiisis) majore spatio i)roavum vicerut quam a crasso vinceretur (instead of tde 
 proper ' victus est '). Sen. V. B. 21. 
 
 Ob* 13 The Latin likes to give to those words in the comparative clause which are 
 hmmlogous to words of the priucii>al sentence (he ^'^'''^.Of^^'''''''''''''^^^^/^^^^^^^^ 
 have in the nrincipal sentence. This attuaction. which applies to all the clas^. s or 
 ccmiparataJe^pe^i^)^^^^ produces inciiL-rnities both in reiraid to grammatical 
 
 and lo-icai laws, which chieJly appear in the following constructions : 
 
 A. If the principal sentence in a comparative period, both terms ol ^^'^"/.Vif.^ P^,^; 
 icatesof their own, has the form of an obliepie inlinitive clause, the VV^^^ o^^ 
 comparative clause should be, as subobliq.ie, in the ^^•''*//'''-^"'^' «^ "', "^ ; i''!,^^ 
 the indicatii-e But contrary to this rule, ihe predicate of such a comparatne c au>e is 
 mire generally (alth.mgh nof always) i^laced l^xV^uiflnilire ^'^»' *!« f.^J'J^jf^^Vibi X' 
 m'iiv^beiiM' treated ^i^i/i/i^;fre> coordinate \s\\\\ its ])rincipal sentence, as .1 ibi afflr- 
 m5vi,'q,.id;qs\reV>^i"*>'^^/>^'"*-^"r«m. quam ex Italia ad bellum ^\l'^]^l.";^^^f[}^^^^^^ ^^1 
 Fum.2,lG, 3 (instead of 'quam ex Italia exeam).-<l\x\Ci si doceo, te duabus p.uiibus am- 
 
 p.ius fruinenti ^6,*^?^/i.w qvam populo Romano misisse (instead of onam mtHeri^) Ih 
 ::''nL^: ^-'r-^^T \" ^"f'V/^^'^^^^a^^^es such an attraction is som. ime?usS a- Cenl 
 ses ante coronam herbie exs/ilu<se, quam conceptrwi esse semen ? lb Div 2 32 -Thii' « 
 raction, however, is not used : 1) If the tense'^ui the predica eg are j/;f^^^^^^^^ 
 tenifre. iMuin re comm,s>urum, quam verbis mirnlabStur. ne. m. putav t Cic C^c 7 >l 
 -hril niox qui arg.iat qranurem Asi,c, ^.am Anuochus/..n^ Emii5nem eSse. lI •'41• 
 42.-.>) II Ihe predicates ot both propositions are the same, but are exnressed in Vich 
 prop:.s,non, the l^iam-clanse consisting merely of this co,. moii prcMHcue^^ ^ m^^^^^ 
 plum duusse, quam Uixisset, putaretur. Cic. It. A 1.-3» If the prec ca e s made bv If 
 ftus .,r Its equivalents, and the fact of the clause is co.icei.ed as non real thrmTclicai?' 
 
 S van Son '!<" i^J^Ti^:. ""If;!^ H'^^'^^ "' the subjunctive tl^i^tn U^'inflSe 
 ■/ -V.'^V- ;.^: t" ^^^ "'^^ patieiida censeo jjolius quam trucidflri cornora vesira 
 
 HJici a 0« iioa/oca/(^/?-. Itv 22, .33.— llamilcar pentflrum se »o;!/w.n' dixit auam cum thnrn 
 
 eS;n^;:;;;;i';:;^;^:r-i^^^""-^--^^-^^«- - d«£^d.ehan;i.^;^ ^^^^^s:^ 
 
 predicate-intimtive in the principal sentence, (hL-ubJecf of the c/auseT^^ai^^^^^^^^ 
 accusattre, being attracted by the subject-accusative of the HnS sent? nee as In- 
 elhge^s mulu, meviqyareacnus ad salfltem, quam te ad pern\"iem'.e pulS C^^^ Cu 
 
 L/,". ■''" '''' '■'^'•" "''^'' '"' '"'^^'^' mv^i^iv^^ nostros non niodo arn.is / «^«^«m c^/er^^ 
 tiationes,yiirmn etiam sapientia jx^tuisse. lb. R. A. 25.-Non enimXMie or*S dixeiim 
 
 fe; orta.?" 'Tb Ac'o "^'"* aV^^'; I'\«-"',^^-I>i^ct^ ^ne «..i" 'idSre^rm"^;. o" 
 f *f ;., "V^;"^;, V^wJ-LrfnT .•' • ' /• '^V'.^'^i'"^ if^Mmare qnanti Sacerdo&m. lb. Verr. 
 li ' •,~i'^ ^«"^'^ hetitia perjundi arbitramur, quanta aut sumriorem Africanmn 
 
 Hann.bale victo. aut posteriinrem , Kartha::ine eversaHb. Fin. 5, 24.-ThX aUra^ToS 
 o.curs 111 the quahiative comparison, as : AjGbant te non fatc^5 c./^ms> ex vestra f^^^^^^ 
 
 far hTa'bn nnn "Tx^.'T' '""7"- ^'^" ^^^''- '^ ^^'-Q"""" <^«a^e onines fugerent //q.u q fe 
 , i: ' f^\\<rrouem, Cannens, p„g„a, ut mulfos alios i?nperald?^€s. Liv 26 3 So 
 
 II comparative relaivecauses after ic/^,/i; Cumd,.os ejusdem juris coiiditi..nisqire%/;?/# 
 ^P'"l'n e^.e piacmt Liv. 8, 14. S(,metimes, however, the sii hjects (.f s icl clai^^es a^^^ 
 pkued m the nominative, as : Vult se in eddem, quo ceteri, jure iLrsdri. Cic L ^-"^2.3 
 
 I. A comparative clause, which does not refer to the whole principal sentence but 
 nerely to an attributive phra.e with a comparative as an artrib,ui';'"a%^;:ctive !; n^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 atZ /a/'V-''!/"' ';^ ''" '' predicate, as : H;ec le-atio etiam insolentioris {le7,ationisl 
 quimjlla juit sails mairnum piaculum esset. Liv. 45. 23.-7%i. multo //?«;^i ouam 
 Ajnainus ruit. Cic. Fam. 5, 7, 3.-Sometimes, the copula of si cl cl uses Knft ted 
 and the snbject o. the clause is attracted by the case of the co?, pa^<^i^Z • Pr 0. am 
 ^■ri-HT J""' ^f .>"">""'him). quod facere solent q.ii hortan,u?y .viVi/'.m^hZo 
 
 rnn qmim Lalium (== quain Lvliusfidt), tlbi adjunctum esse patere. lb. 5 7 3 -Homi- 
 nem e-o irarundidnm quam te (= quam tu es) novi neminem. Plant. Merc i 2 30 - 
 Cerie e(iii!dem;y//^?v/my>V^r<?;« quamte (=quamtu es)nu\\ neminem. lb. Pers" 2 2' 27 — 
 *jg<> homtnem callidtotem vidi neminem, quam Phorinionenn= quam Pfimnioest^ Ter 
 i'eorrh ^^-^" r ''■'"'• ^J<'ft--^;l''-^-Very rarely this attraction occur" when .he 
 h li- r ., 1 "'''■-''^"'^' ',' //o/2/^^/.e. accusative, as: Thermopylae locus appdiatur. no- 
 uiiis Lacediemoniornm ad versus Pei-sas morte, tnaqis memorabili qvam puqnai=quajn 
 Sm iu^J. »'»v. 36, 15 If puqna is taken as a nominative, the omission of the copula 
 w ould be as harsh as the attraction by the ablat ives morte tnagis memorabUl. 
 
 o,?.m",!it".,^*'''^?' ^''"'■^''' c«".f«i"i"?r.a comparative by implication, are construed with 
 Quam-clau<es, the same as with maqis expressed. 1) The verbs maUe (sometimes velle 
 ^J^^rlTJmJ''^^^^^^^ Snaqnisque ab aliis benefacta laudSri quam ipse aliOrum 
 
 ^^!1 nJl ^^^- ^•''.'•V'^-.^--^^i''*i;' amultis eligere homines coramodissimum quod- 
 que, quam ^vfG nni alicui certo vtllmt addicere. Cic. Inv. 2.2.-Accipere ouam facere 
 ;mf*Vaj injunam. Cic. Tusc. .5. 19.-2) The adverb ultra in the meaning 'farther\ 
 beyond . denoting an exceeding of the limits stated in the Quam-clause %ntra 
 9 M<///i mostly occurs with ne-atioiis, but aUo affirmativelv ;. iV/) in regard to placb 
 (literally or li_Mirativelv), = ultetius quatn, lonqius quam: Tlicipitlnus non ultra quam 
 (no lartiier thannii Ilernicos procedit. Liv. 3. 8. -Longuni exordium est quod W^ra 
 9wr/m suns est producitur (luither than it is sufficient). Cic. Inv. 1. 18. Coinp lb Tusc 
 1 %.• . • 'T^^'^^' 7.}^^-'- .^-':"''i'' """ "^/'■'^ V'^«'« ("o longer than) quinque dies Hhodi 
 niorati. Liv. 4.^,10.- I rienniiifn et sex mensis ///f/m ^Mom 11« et lege Emilia ceiisflram 
 gerai. lb. <», 31. Comp. Tac. Ann. 6, 41.- (^) Of the ixtknsity of acticms. designating the 
 intensiiy as •beyond measure ' : Nihil uUra (= intolerabiiius) malOrum est, quam QUod 
 pa>si ^.umus. Liv. 2s, :i{).-(d) (Jenerally it is thus nsed wiih Ut-clauses, dependent ou 
 uverbum faciendi (by Livy, not by Cicero), as a mere synonym of amjdius (Ubs 6j: 
 
 ,j,&» 
 
764 
 
 COMTAKATIYE CLAUSES. 
 
 QUANTITAXrV^E COMPARISON. 
 
 765 
 
 X , * ««cf.-^Knt • Thprc remained vnfhinq eUe (nolhing 
 Nihil ultra qvam uf poonitGret ^''^f^^^^^lZu^^^^^ vUra valnCrnnt quam 
 
 iuomdo oes.arCMnns (= m/^^,/ «"'i'/^/^Y-^^^^^^^ >onu.iinu.. tl.e advert 
 
 *//»ra atid ,s///)<-r are similaily us. d with ^i"'{ " ^'7!- r <i i) 2 54. -(h) = ultra (beyond) : 
 s pm quam a.l lin.Miam ^toniachns «""\; ''"J;^^, euTn credihile e.t Sail. Cat. 5. 
 
 _-P,\enas dedit, usque '^'n^r'^^^J''''^^^^^ VvUnovWm^. super quam quod 
 
 (with a FactH^lau.e) = i>/v»/^/7'/am r^/o^^^^^^i^n ^^^^^^^^^ 2 :i._MarcHlu. etuun ad- 
 
 li>sen.erant a consilio, ti-rntis ^V' ' Z na e uenavc-rat. Ih. 27, 20. Si-nificantly a 
 
 .uiuuMC.iveofnon.real.ty is ^;*;;^ " 'o t. C in terms b.youd what could 
 
 feret./wamlU'ri;>^>.'« ;anoralor^^^^^^^^ ,tyle, the adverb pn^ 
 
 happen. Cic. Oiat. 40. -4) In autcdapsi^^^^^^^^ .^^^^ ^^^ compakisos. ;>/tg- 
 
 is construed with ^^''^'^-^■^«'^"^■^\ *;>^''n(m'(-^ with) : Nihil hoc qnuleu. est 
 
 quam beiu- ofre.i written as ^^''^.^ ^^v' V^^h 8 is u»ll.ui^ nith what he 
 
 t.i-ntamMKe,;>r^<Z"^/"^a''5>« ^,"'"^'l^^i*^J,un fnii^ omnia facio. pnvquam ivuh^i'^ 
 otherwise spends. Plant. ^^^'^^ ■'^),\^-J: ,,, Uier tiicki* he playe.i on me. lb. 5, 2, 2o.- 
 ine modis lu.lificatus est : co,ni^"^ ^'/,i ' « res palitur. .tudu>t ele;:antiiv : without 
 Nee i)ol profecto Mue i:randi malo, /^''^'i'""'; . ' ,, » ,,. ^f,.,.e Pro!. 22.— Sed hoc etuun 
 .cdoK. ei-Ms, e.nnpared ^vi'^' /he advann.j^e. U - 1 1» ; ^\:,!n excellent, ...tnpared with 
 
 nulcium 'St. ;mry"rtm sumi)tus nhi l»*^^^''.' ' ! pv lb \ul 3,5 :W.-Caionis s^ententia 
 the time when lliey are demai. ding their nionev. Ih. AUi. .5, j.^>^_^^^^^^.^ .j^^^, (inecum 
 
 nulcrum Vt. »r(rv"«"t ''""M""-' •■■ '.1 V,. .\w>tw.v Ih \ul 3,5 :«.— t aionis senieni. 
 e time when lliey are ^l!""^^^'-; 'I'S H^ " - >^^ iii„,, (inecu 
 
 laxiorib'is pauUo lonLMonhuMine Nerhis o.m r^^^^^^^^^^ / . ,^j,„..„ce). (ie 
 
 raio's wordiu- i^ rather "•r'a'^i; -Jr'-s uhiM^ Nvitl' "t i"^'*^"d of w. 
 
 N.A.in.l. ^'<''M^.l*l';'''-^uV 3 5.^.-77''^^^^^^^^^^ belou!,' the adverbs yx 
 
 qunm. as in Plant. Men .^. 5, •«. ^ "»"•/,;,,' r/i,,,,^ j,, conneciion with Q"<im (see ... 
 Ld ante (= pnu-^). formini; UMupon " ^ J,", ^'.^s are used with pridie, as : Si 
 
 «.-,<♦, and p. HWi foil.). As ^vuh rt/^/^, and / "s i"'i'n \ "^^.^.^ ,,^,. jepl.-iola) e-t />ri(/<t; 
 hie pridie na.us foret ^'mm hn- c>t '''.'y. ^i;!;.;,;- ,,,„,„ con.i.ia lure puiahantur. 
 
 data 7'mm ilia. C'ic. A^t- 3. «. --i-ll-^'' '''/,' ,. 1 n--/'ridie quam c.xcesMt e viti. 
 Ih. 4, 15, H.-rridiequam e-^o ^ '^na^ ve t >^;;.; 'j;^,^ ^ someiimes ronstrned with 
 
 a miVwm quam (si) (p. 73'J, Obs. 3, lin.). 
 '"*'""" ^ i,.«,,ro<iv..rh In tnc comparative 
 
 craf ipse Cyclo]»!» quam rt/'i<?.« iltfi prudenfior. Ih. 5. 39.— On the other hand, a comparative 
 ablative is j)refenH-d if the subject is a negative absolute adj''ctive, or an intenvf/ative ad- 
 jective, virtually ne:.'ative, as : Outs vberior in dicendo Platonef Quis Aristctele /lervo- 
 sior, Theophriisto dulc'wrf Cic. lirut. 31.— §'/?^ eiiim hoc adolescente castior/ Quis autera 
 Wo. qui m.iiedTcit. impurior f II). Phil 3. tj.— In publicis nihil est leqe pravius. lb. 2, 42. 
 — A'i/iil ii>^t detestalnlius dedecore, nihil fcedius nervit ate. 11).3, 14.— A^i^i/ est animo vtlo- 
 cius. lb. Tusc. 1, 19. — \ihil enim est, profecto, homini j^rudentid dukius. lb. 1. 39.— Si 
 iiiiiil es.<et ali ud. 7ii/ii^ esset hoJiiiiie de/ormius. Ih. Tus'c. 2, 21.— A'iAi/ est rirfute ama- 
 bitius. Ih. Brut. IS.— Quid est melius aut quid prcestantius et benfificentius bonitate ? lb. 
 N. D. 1, 43.— A'j^i/ est in historiS, pura et illustri breritnte dulcius. lb. Brut. 7.'i. Accord- 
 iiiir 10 a remarkable L;iiiu idiom, the form * quid y/iihil) e.it\ etc., in this construction is 
 used with relerence to peksons. j^enerally referring to their actions or qualities; as: 
 Xii'il erat Crasso cojnoHus (=Nobody had a greater command of the laiiiruage thaii 
 Crassus; or: No orations show a greater command of th^ language than those of 
 C'rasMis), Cic. lirut. 39 — Qi'id enim beafius illis. quo< tu expulsos a te pnedicas? Nothing 
 is hidier than the co/idition of those whom «!tc. lb. Pliil. 2. Vi.— Tarquinio vero quid irn- 
 pu'fe/itiu<, qui etc.? What is more impudent than the act of Tarquin who etc.? lb. Tusc. 
 3, 12. — Quid est autem nequiu< aut turpii's fffemiuato lirof What is so wicked or dis- 
 graceful as fffeminacy in a man? lb. 3. 17.— AVc mihi est te jucundius quicquam nee ca- 
 rina, lb. Fain. 2. 10, 1. — Acces^it etiain ilia opinio, quod homini homiue pulchrius nihil 
 videiitur. lb. N. D. 1,27.— Comparative ablatives are al«o used when the comparative 
 adjective has the lorce of a participle., so as to be equivalent to a relative clause: Est 
 bos c(!rvi flgflra, cujtis a media fronte inter aurls unum cornu exsistit, excelsius (=quod 
 est exceldusj muqifque directum hi<, qu;e nobis nota sunt, cornibus. Ca;s. B. G. 6, 2ti. 
 
 ]}. If tlie comparative is in the relaiiou of a completing puedicate in thb accusa- 
 TIVK, dejiendent on a pactitivp: verb (p. 101. li. 71), especially verbs of conside?'ifig (p. 
 102, No. 6'). tlie compared noun being conceived as x\\g subject of the same lactitive verb 
 under.-tood, the constrnct'on of tlie comparative ablative is frequently used, as: Sapi- 
 eiiti.i omnia inferiara virtilfe ducit. (Coinjileted : Sapient la viriQ.em siiperiOrem ducit; 
 = Virtue i" su'jterior. as wisdcnn considers it). Cic.Tiise. 4, 2H.— fi^st boni consulis, siiam 
 salutem post^rioiem salilte com muni ducere. 11). llab. Perd. 1. 3. — Profecto Epieflrus nihil 
 Ctxsalione meliut eritttitnat. Ih. N. D. 1, W.—IIerodotmil cur r- raciorem ducam Eunio f lb. 
 Div 2, 50.— Qui nihil hattet (considers) in vita jucundiv.'f vita, is cum virtute vitam nou 
 ])(»ie-t colere, Auct. Her. 4, 14.— //oc mihi fjra'iu'i fac» re nihil potes. Cic. Fam. 13, 44.— 
 Bnl tlK- construction \\\\\\ quam, 'n\ thi< conn- ction. occurs as often as thai with com- 
 })arative ablatives, as: Ut nihil pulchnua quam hominem putdrtt. Cic. N. D. 1, 27.— Nou 
 ininuii pneclilrum hoc quam illud judicundum est. II). Ofl". 1, 22. 
 
 (\ A comparative ablative i- often used when the principal sentence with a predicate- 
 adjective in ilie co/nptiratice dtqree is in the accusativk with thk infimtivk. the com- 
 l)a"red noun having the relation of a sul>jecl-accui>ative in a Quam-cl luse, as : (Jra>^so nihil 
 statuo fieri potuisce ]>erfectius (Indepknoently : Cra<so nihil perfectius est., or fieri 
 jiotest).' Cic. Brut. 3H. — Dixerui t. omni pnesenti atatu spem cnjusque novandi res suas 
 b/andiorem eK-<e (Inoep. : Spes cuju-qiie tjlandior est quam ontnis prttsens status). Liv. :i5, 
 17.— (^iiiil egt) caiisam civiiaiium ai;o. (juam ipsis a(jtiitVtus et nos et regem cognoscere 
 txquiusest ( — y?]quius est nos caiisam coirnoscere ; minus iequiim est ips(f.-< agentts cau- 
 pam c<»s.'no8cere). \A\. 3."), 10. Tie construction in this i)as?age is extremely harsh, since 
 thr comparative ablatixe is not the subject of the copula, but of a predicate-infinitive, 
 d«'pendent ot\ it. — But the ordinary construction \\'\i\\quami\\\i\ an attracted subject-accu- 
 sative (accoriiing to(^iis. 12. No. I'i), is about as frequently used as a comi)arative al)lative, 
 as: Sentio. Lailuam liuiruam loc'ipletiorem esse quam Gntcavi. Ci(^.¥'u\.\.'i.—Xevdnem 
 diqniorem esse ex sociin vestris quam me. dicere aiisiin. Li v. 37. .53. Compare the following 
 two similar sentences with ditlVreut comparative constructions: Illud cognosces pro- 
 fecto, mihi te {=quafn tei neque cariorem, iwqui\/ ucundidrem esse quemquam. Cic. Fam. 
 2, 3, 2. — A'<?;;*///f//t cul.iuani neque cariorem wqwe jucundiorem unqnam ful'^se quam te 
 niihi. lb. 1,9, 24: where, the construction with ^'/am is used, because the comparative 
 clause consists of an object (mihi), bet^ides the subject-accusative te. 
 
 1). If the comparative i> in the relation of an attimbute-adjkctive, the comparative 
 noun in tiie con>truction of a comparative ablative may be used if the comparative ab- 
 lative is equivalent to a Quam-clause witii a predicate-adjective and the copula, provided 
 tlie governing comparative adjective is in the nominative or accusative, as: Hoc mihi 
 inojtis ( = m<ijor 7'ts quam, hcec est)'Ah dis imniortalibus nihil dari potest. Cic. Phil. 2, 46. 
 — Causam suscepisii antiquiohm m*7norid lua (=quam memoria tua est). lb. Rab. Perd. 
 9._()„em auclOrem locuplttidrem PUifune laudilre possninus {-locuplttiorem quam Plato 
 esDt lb liep 1, 111.— Non tiilit ullos Inec civitas aut irloria daridres, aut auctoriiate qravi- 
 or'-s. aut Immanitate poliiii>re.s, P. Africano, C. LiBlio. L. Furio. lb. Or. 2, 37.— Nullum ^o 
 telu7n ad viuccuduiu homini ab dis imiuortalibus acnus datum est (=nullum telum ucrius 
 
 'M 
 
766 
 
 COMPARATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 QUANTITATIVE COMPARISON. 
 
 767 
 
 ; 7 .oA T \^r 91 11 Hilt oftm tlic coTistruction with qnam is applied to sentences 
 
 Vr.e.^fannas ( = n.,llam >V."\V'-'^^^^ril°T x ex i V^r^^ falti-W)"^^^m ^^^ detract.,» 
 
 ^^ciuuni honctn. e.t) I >. 1 u.c^ , .f^," f^ oppicfu a ha l niil^ majde certa.nine cepit 
 erat (not tynnino). L v . '^'^' l^-;-/*' /l"cm,n^^ H Quoted Obs. 13, C. Coinpani- 
 
 7/m//' cnstm (not ca-tris). Ib..W. 'Jf;,^ ^r.^l"^;;;'"'' u ,Vot in the nominative or acen-ative, 
 tV. ablative., when \he amipara ive a j.x^ however, the pa«. 
 
 occur ..nl> m the poets and ''' '*^';^\\V .wit^ U Pan am meintu^ potwre placentts 
 
 Kifie Cic. Att. 1. li, 1. cued in the foot- ote), «\, ^^ V-'.J> , ,,tn^^ wlwfi^ n(roc(ae 
 
 (=qnam "'-^^"^«^ . :""!?• olnn.'^" .<! -UnWw ite?. t the "ilvJr a^e n.e compara^ve 
 i^iKt f tf!:^:mU!u'SSaJ;i'auin.Xre.olv.d into a .ti^ect with the copula, a.: 
 t.i^i; :..<;.... ....i.animt.m |;abnit .=anam ^nuU.na^^.J^ -^j,^^,,,,, ,^,,,. 
 
 maiorem semltu animum habnit (=qnam senufug habmt). 
 Dixit. As,a>n hoc lon.^e m4ivs qnam ^'J^^.f '^'^^^i ; V,;^,;! f.o,;„\';,;uio H.e,-mo polV'S 
 
 •inxrit Cic luv. l,r)5 (Cornp. Auct. ller. !i, .il).— iU'CTi.an^uraii. ,jv I iw e/ft The U'^e 
 
 able that the correct readin- is 'm«i/^^■ «^''^«^ Anlouio ,i.e. ^J"""\^"^'^,^^^^"^^^ _._. 
 ^ I„ ti.e foliowin. two instance. tlu,construcUonw.mc^ 
 
 be alwa!/s used ni place of Q„am-claa>e^. }^\.;^J'':'^lll'^^^^^^^ of the eom- 
 
 comparative clause refers to a J>recx'din^ a/i^ ^. as .nbjt^MM i^^^ ^.^^^^ 
 
 ^^:iou.^^:yn;diu.ahoferoccH.xn^V^^ J^^V» -'> If 1 1 e* i mpan-d word is a hkla- 
 
 nihil uoXG^X, v,i^ii admirahiliu.<. <-'c. N. D. 2,40.— NatQr .^ y /a mnu i» i i .^ _p 1^,,^ 
 Tb \ D •> 57 -Mens,r/'/a nihil honiiin dedit dens \\^<cdivvnus. lb. Utt. }' J."- ^Vl"'^"! ' 
 bl-ilmn 7^/o nnllu.n neque majns, neque i,e/ic./fo..^. Komani ^-essere. Lin. 38,^. bcc 
 tlu> i>:is«'ji<''e~ ciuoied p. S-'iS, Obs. 8. 
 
 «' k™m.rL the'ronowin, iaiomntie constmction, jn^^^^ 
 
 C; 
 
 ^,S;;rcS'l- fVit,,-Z>K:/i ,.ro,.. d/^« eqmm 
 
 quain solitum 
 ( = major qnam 
 
 nnn/eral expressions, referring to the comparative adjectives major und minor, denoting 
 AGK. as : MdjOres duodecini. annix coronjlti gupplicavgrunt (thosf that weri* older than 
 twelve years;. Liv. 40. 37.— Mancipia mi/?//ra annis vij^inti. lb. 3!), 44. (So re«rularly 'ma- 
 jor' or 'initial- viqinti q>iinque annu\ in rej;ard to the term of lei:al guardianship.) If 
 ' iintiia'' or 'natx ' is added t» the nnmcral expressing the years, cmparaiive al)!atives 
 are generally not used, the first or second formula mentioned in Obs. 3 lieing employed 
 instead, as: Majors'/am quindecim annas na(>ix. JAv. 45.S2.—ifaJor qi/adragiiifa annos 
 iiat(fs\ Cic. K. A. 14. Karely, however, comparative ablatives occur even wirh Jtafu, 
 as : Ne qui rrriTwr triqinta anids natu legerStnr. Cic.Verr. 2, 2, 49. The Jurists frequently 
 place the numeral expression referring to the age in the qenitive (major, or minor vujinti 
 quinque niinorum), combining thus two different constructions, namely, that of the 
 second formula in Obs. 3, and of a qualitative genitive (major viginti annontm=:homo 
 ])lus viginti annnrum; '■homo liqinfi ani'Orum'' meaning a ^man of twenty yearn') as: 
 Nisi si minor sit anndimm viginti quinque. Gaj.lnst. 2, 163. The same construction 
 occurs in Liv. 3S, 38. 
 
 3) Sometimes (very rarely) ablatives absolute serve at the same time as comparative 
 ablatives, as: Virttlie gubernante, quid potest e-se prcecfarius ? What can be more ad- 
 mirable than the reign of virtue? (=quam quum virtus regnat). Cic. Rep. 1. 34. 
 
 4) II it is desirable, for rhetorical purposes, to give to a. compared Infinitive-clause a 
 svndetic antecedent in the form of a neuter demonstrative (see p. 492, Obs. 15. No. 1), 
 tiiis demonstrative antecedent must be placed in the comparative ablative, as : Quid hoc 
 toia Sicilia est claiiua. (juam onines Segest» matrOnas conveuisse, quum Diana exporta- 
 rCtur ex oppido ? Cic.\ err. 2. 4, 33. 
 
 h) The poets sometimes use comparative ablatives in place of Qnam-clanses referring 
 to a comparison of unlike quality (p. 749, Obs. 3), as: Ne putes alium sapienti bonoque 
 beiltum. Ilor. Ep. 1, 16, 20. This licence, however, is never extended to clauses of equal 
 quantity or quality. 
 
 Obs. 16. Sometimes in the historians (Sallnst. Livy, Tacitns, Nepos *). the comparative 
 degree to which a Quam-clmse refers, is eUipticnlly omitted. Tliis ellipsis only occurs 
 in the construction with maqis. mentioned Obs. 7, Nos. D and E, when either the inten- 
 sities of two verbal predicates, or those of two objects of the same predicate, are com- 
 pared with each other. In this instance, magi^ is sometimes (but rarely) omitted. In 
 Sallust there arc only two passages critically established : FortOna res cunctas ex lubi- 
 dine quam ex vero celebrat obscuratque (=ex lui)idine jnagi^i quam etc.). Sail. Cat. 8, 1; 
 and: Beneflcii" quam metu imperium agitdbant. lb. 9. 5; although even in these pas- 
 sages many Codd. exhibit magbi. In the other passages (Cat. 48. 5 ; and 52. 3) the trreat 
 majority of the Codd. give mdgift. althonirh most of the editions have left it otlt. In Livy, 
 this omission is very rare; as: Ciaudii oratio Uxil precib us quam juririo similis (=ma7i« 
 
 passage (Ann. 4. 61. cited Obs. 10) two descriptive adjectives in the positive degree are 
 compared by quam without 7na7w.— In Nepos this ellipsis occurs in one passage: Ta- 
 men statuit congredi quam cum tantis copiis reliigere. Dat. S. 
 
 Obs. 17. If two propositions are so compared with each other that it is represented as 
 donbtiul to which of the comixired terms the higher degree is to be attributed, the com- 
 parative period takes the form of a dis.iu.mctive questiov, P. I. § 419). the second term 
 l)ein<' introduced by an instead of quam Disjun-tiive comp irisons are treated in every 
 respect like perio.is with Quain-clau-es, especially in the form of the cotnpara;ive de- 
 gree in tjie first term of the comparison ; only fiat, if the ouestiou is oblique, the predi- 
 cates of'the period always require the subjun'tire ; as : Utrum 7a< a^/iv est inirandnm, 
 quod is coiidemnatns est. a/> quod oninlno respondCre ausus est? Cic. Clu. 22, 60.— 
 S«peet multuni hocmeum coiiitavi. bonliie an mali plus aftulerit hominihuseloquentuB 
 studium. lb. Inv. 1, 1.— Ex liiteris tuis cepi Iruclnm duplicem. mihique ditticilem adjii- 
 dieandum, amoremne erga me tuum an animum in rempublicaiu p(url< icstimandum 
 putarem? lb Fam. 10, 5, 1.— If two adjectives are compared with each other, generally 
 each of them is placed in the comparative, the same as with Quam-clauses, as: Multi 
 dubitavCre, J'orlior an felicior esset. Sail. Jug. 95. ^ 
 
 some),~beiiig^nsed~witliThe force of 'less interest ',=/«J/?ort*'v« usuris quam centesirnis. 
 This use >eems to have been colloquial. . . 
 
 *The pas.^ao-e Liv. .'i.il, 15: 'invidiam lenTre quam minvno sno pnvato incommodo, 
 publieOque piTpuli Komani', will mike no i:ood sense without reading ' h-nlre siio pn- 
 vato incommodo, 7Wrtm/y/i/w//iO incommodo publico?. R.', = suo incommodo ma^t.* quam 
 etc. However, this conjecture is too bold, and there is no other passage in Livy in wnictl 
 this ellii)sisoccuru, except the cue cited in the text. 
 
 if 
 
Ygg OBLIQUE DISCOURSE. 
 
 ClIArTER EIGHTH. 
 
 OBLIQUE DISCOURSE. 
 
 B ««, cm ,orE r>.«couusE {oratio ohV.qua) is a scries of periods ex- 
 
 prosscd in un oblique form (as ^'^'h»-'^^ 5^ ;« • P' "o'^uo^oZ^na l.as several 
 «ttenHlbyaspeaUer.i„trod,^edby . a Ih- 0-^^ obU.ue and snb- 
 
 peculiari, es. ''-'f "'^ ^^ ^^f tCPr,,«,m« ?,•.«<.««.. rCVrrin,, to tbe 
 oblique clauses, 1) in the "^» " " e p ' ,,^^^,,1 ,„„„ of the 
 
 sneaker, and to the person spoken to , .) m tue y 
 
 predicates, both of the l"i"cipal sentenees and he ^ "'^, •, „p„,„.,„, 
 OB, 1. Not every Oblique or «•'>" ''■'l"" J 1 ,%,'i^ .^11 ai |ir .'cipal [.nllicnte. may 
 
 7,'«/n.'a.<*^, i^^ ea ./i>a7>/«/^o ^''^f,?'''';; J.^J^ i^nv ea h oth, r without any ^^^r'!''^^^ 
 ThiKoftfti ft srcat number of P^^'^'"*^ ^"V,l,, v<.rv awkward in He L^;:ll^n \erMon. 
 V. ,- >n dicendi, which const ructu.ns an- .et^a^^^^ ^^^ .applied, bu 
 
 Irammaticany to all ^^'■^^r^^!:^^'Vt^\^^^^l.u\av^^^n^e to consider t >« «^2 o 
 itir* more in conformity w^h the^niu^ .roverned by the ic/^a of obli'initi/. It ^ t * 
 neriodMCOUi^titatin-'oratioobuiui /V* X ,™unatical forms of the oratio obliqua, 
 cone, ptiou to which tl»e peculiarities in the Ijratm^^^^^^^ account of these devia- 
 
 itlie deviations Irom the -enera rnles, m"';t \« !„ i the 'oiatio obliqiur, must be 
 
 coi'HsK. . . ^ J «nd Fccond persons is fa-c^i/c?*'^/ in 
 
 Or^ 2 The nsc of pronouns both of J"« ,V\*'^ ,»;;",. ",..,, or that of the person ad- 
 obr.que discourse, unless the author quo es V^!;,^^,^ ./^.f/^f^^^^ rE.;soN must per- 
 
 dreX^d If speeches of others are.quote th "< ; =^ *» ^ ^^ ^ p,r,on spoken of a 
 
 ?oi I the three offices of r.p.esentii.j,' the action J f l^^^^f p^' ^ „\ore expressions lor 
 
 person spoken to, and to the *'P^:'^)^^-^^^;V^;;V,ji„ aJ^/.a.je than there are in En{,dish ; 
 he 'third i.er.^on' at the disposi ion of ^h -^, ' i ,li a" much an impos^'^^'ility as U is 
 else t col'.struction (^f onuio ^^^^^^^ll^ a;dlu^i<n -adjectives K i p.e, ille iaud 
 [n English ; "---'yJ^^^Xr spokVn o^^ ^^'d";. while in KugU.h only 'A.' and it. 
 ;;;i!?s^;;;^r ^h^nla?^;a ^-1 - be used for Uii^ntrpos. ^^^^^^,^ .^ 
 
 OBs 3 The FiusT PERSON (i.^. that iK'rson ^^hlch refcrs^^^^^^^^^ 
 C^S^ral ; expressed by the pronoun ,.u ^^''^:^^^^^^,^t\.e is required n the 
 «rooositions of the discourse, or f ''ti.. t;^-^' ->cepi \nc^ re-ularly subobhque). 
 
 Kricinil clause, or in the dependent t'lte cUu^ts i'^ |\»^" ^^^^^i^^^ referrin- to ll.e 
 V^J'Ts subject' accusative is frequently «";'"^2;,,,„Via ita'sint, tamen ...^ cum ei. 
 speaker aie re.'ularly expressed by --'^^^ ^ij. • ^^'^"^^e \nparatum veni^.e), QU-^\ "e- 
 E^ur^vlLs^U^^^c^u^^a ^in^. tlno posita pr.s..ia exisUmataios 
 
 OBLIQUE DISCOURSE. 
 
 769 
 
 e«8C. In prjTscntia cnrre esse^tolis debSre. ut copia frumenti ftvis PuppcdilStnr. Liv, 
 85. 44.- But since frequently, accordiiiii: to the fjeneral rules, the same forms are required 
 lor both, the person spftken to, and the person ^poken of (if referring to the subject), 
 the connection must olten decide wliether by m/i. fti/)i. fte, and gwts. the i'jyeaker is meant, 
 or one of I he two other ])er>ons : ai« : Tarciiiinius dixit (in concilio EtruscOrum). . .ne*'^, 
 ortiim (jiisdein san^ruinis. extorreni cum liberis adolescentil)UP ante oeulos «/os perire 
 simrent. Liv. 3. <>. Here the pronoun se refers to the speaker, but "ftuos"' to the persons 
 fjxiken of, bein;j the subjects of the predicate nnerent, which relation is distinctly 
 j-hown by the connection. But if, for instance, the sentence did not contain the 
 l)hrasep * /J<», ortiitn ejusdfm sanrjuinu. extorrem \ and only the latter part {ne liheromin^e 
 oculofi nuos ju-i'irt sinerent) were expressed, it would be doubtful whether ^ svos'' referred 
 to Tarquin or to the Etruscans ; and the plural '' ipsoridii'' with reference to the Etrus- 
 cans, or the singular 'iptnuK'' with reference to Tarquin would have to be substituted. 
 So Ciesar in the followin<; passage uses Hprn^'' with reference to the fi^peakers, while the 
 prec€?dinir f^ftis ref- rs to the p rson s^wk'^ii o/"(as subject ol the clause), and the possess- 
 ive i>u<f, to the person f^pok^n to (likewi^e the subject of an adjoined clause) : Quod im- 
 jn-ovTso uiium pagum adortus esset. qunm ei qui flumen transissent, svis auxilium ferre 
 non possent, ne oh earn rem aut ^^/<^ magnopere virtuti tribneret, aut ipiios despiceret, 
 (tlie Helvetians, as the speakers, instead of 'X(? despiceret, which would be ambiguous). 
 C;es. B. O. 1. 18. — Sometimes the pronoun'* t*, en, id, are used with reference to the 
 ftp^aker. to obviate ambiguities which might arise out of the use of the pronoun sui^ 
 sihi, se ; as : Qiiodsi veteris contnmelite oblivisci vcllet, num etiara recentium injuria- 
 rijm, quod ^o i/f?I/o iter per provinciam tentassient, memoriam deponere posse * lb. B. 
 G. 1, 14. Here se invito mitrht refer to the L'rammatical subject (instead of 'inrl/i' as 
 accessory predicate).— The chansre of the first person into the third, in all kinds of in- 
 direct statements in wliich a third person speaks of himself. i> even then necessary if 
 the first person ' ego'' in direct discourse would have the force of a 7i0un, as : Pompejus 
 ad omnia me alteiuin se (his other 'ego' or ""self) fore dixit. Cic. Alt. 4, 1, 7. 
 
 Obs. 4. If the speaker is the sub-tect of a ^finite dependent clause, the pronoun desig- 
 nating this subject is either left out (if no 'ambiguity can arise), or it is generally ex- 
 ))ressed by i})se. which is also used in any case il the speaker places himself in opposi- 
 tion to other persons, as: Si ipse populo RomSno non priescrii)eret, quemadmodum sue 
 jure nterCfur, non oportCre sese a jxtpulo lionijlno in siio jure inipedlri. C'jes. B. G. 1, 
 3t). If 'nos'' does not express the speaker himself, but reters to the j)eople or friends 
 etc. of the speaker, it is generally retained in oratio obliqua. as : Ariovistus ad po?-tu- 
 liSta ("a^'saris respi>ndit. Ut ip>i concedi nonoponCret. si in nostfos fines impetum faceret, 
 sic item nos esse iniquos quod in suo jure se interpellaremus. Ca.*s. B, G. 1, 44. 
 
 Obs. 5. The jierson spoken to. in oratione obliqua. is regularly expressed by is,ea etc. 
 (but if in ojiposiiion to the s])eaker, by Ule), unless the use of siti, sibi, se ior {^^uu,<) is re- 
 rp:ired by the L'cneral rules; as : De bello Sablno eos (i. e. the addressed decemvirs) 
 ref<rre, t'amquam majus j)f>pulo Homilno bellum sit quain cum eis. Liv. 3,39. (In ora- 
 tiOiie direct:! it would be rofi. robiy).—l{('X in consilio ^EiolOrum dixit, id suse impensse 
 erL'a eo*' (the addressed J^^tolians) voluntatis maxima' debCre esse indicium, quod nee 
 j)ar5tus satis nlhl re, et tempore ad navigandum immaturo. vocantibus legStis eornm 
 {thi-ir, the addressed JEiolian ambassadors), baud gravate obsecQtus esset. Liv. 35, 44. 
 (In oratiOne diiecta: ' erga ros\ 'tef/d/i< rf.sy?7N ') — Ariovistus respondit, si fliscessisset 
 I'tc. inagno >f6 illam priemio remnneratCrum. et, qua'cunque bella geri vellet, sine ullo 
 'J'/.-! labOre confeciQrum. Ca's. B G. 1, 44. (Orat. uir. : Magno fe jjriemio remuuerai)or; 
 i)ella sine ull«> tuQ lal)Ore Qonficiam).— Si quid ipsi a Caesare opus esset, se^e ad eutn ven- 
 tfirum iuisse, ei quid Ule se (facere) velit, ilium ad se venire oportCre. lb. 1,34. 
 
 Obs. (5. The predicates of the principal sentences in oratione obliqua, according to the 
 general rules (p. :iHT toll., § h\W,) slvq predicate-infinitives if declarative, and in the snfj- 
 jnnctive if imperative : but, if intkhrooative, generally the form of an infinitive-clause 
 is Used (difterent from the rules on ordinary oblique questions), as : Quodsi veteris inju- 
 ria» memonam aeponere vellet, /iww etiam recentium injuriarum niemoriam deponere 
 mssf / C'tes B. G. 1. 14.— Q'lid enim sua sponte Jlievoni/tnttm piierum facere jxttuisse? 
 Liv. 24. 2.J.— Chersonesiim, queni dubitdre, quin Lysiinachi fuerit* lb. 3;}, 40. — Quid 
 enim eos per populum egisse/ lb. 3, 39.— MoritQros se citius (dicSbant) — quippe nunc 
 in unaurbe tantam dissensinnem esse, quid in duabiis ur.hibusyo/e,^ lb. 5. '24. In ques- 
 tions of this kiiKl. no verb o! asking can be supplied, as in ordinary oblique questions ; 
 but these questions, as all the other principal sentences in oblique discourse, must be 
 coie-idered as governed by ihc f/^ntnd idea of obliquity. le.finitive-ciauses of this kind 
 can never be leKdered by English That-clauses. Sometimes, however, if a verbum in- 
 ti-rrogandi in^ jn-edicatt-inlinitire maybe supplied, such clauses assume the same form as 
 ordinary dependent questions, as : Quain putdrent continual militiie causam esse? 
 >iullam'profecto aliam inventflros {-inlenogdre se, quam putareut etc.). Liv. 5,;J. 
 
770 
 
 OBLIQUE DISCOURSE. 
 
 OBLIQUE DISCOURSE. 
 
 771 
 
 ifiiil^li^il 
 
 A U .1 All t\.e snbobli.liu-cl.All^'F.s rtopeii lent on t Py , ;„,,;,.«,;„,■ ,„ orrtinary 
 
 „,l,obliqu.' :^'i!';,;V'/\V;i "";«;" Imal in,m»ce. mci.t,...u 1 ',,1' f;, ,',%VJVcnwrk. of 
 
 Konnlnos posMt. Liv. 35, 3-2. „,.K,,hr,nne clauses in orntiono obliqna laKe tne 
 
 r^«a 10 In thi> following int'tance? f''^'*»7 T, ,.r. -mNATisiJ relative rlause ^). 5-iO, 
 
 ifirtdri hoslibus. Liv.b. ^4 — V""^- 1 „ 
 S;\uuUcuu<,ue.obyia,u ae.„. .^^^^^^^^ 
 
 MCi- 
 
 CLAUr'ES 
 
 tlinate. 
 
 ?Kre^i»;;i;';i-^Sji;;!^^ 
 
 of ihoclanso 1« « ''«'' ll^i; ''X, /' ^f „ra ' o Jim'/.I ; ae: W-^i',A,"."'':!'i'Vnt M l'"l- 
 
 Isgiliilsii:iiii|s^ 
 
 t:un (lili'-r«Miter inq"irtie quid "^' ':;;-' ' t,, ;,> 40 -Claudiii- '/i.rif.. .tU> i)»-iio f" .y. 
 
 prodicate-inflnitive is non-preterite, as: Zeno ab Quinctio flens pctif. ne nnlns amentiam 
 civiljlti (ts^if/mret. Suo quenique periciilo fiirerc. Ma_Mietas tion libertati'm modo, sed 
 omnia qiiie hoiiiiiiibus sancta \i/</', popiilo Roiu^nn d^(/ere. Nihil qiieinqnain ab dis im- 
 inurtaliDiis precari jw.^.ie. quod noa MaLMiStcs ab illis /lab^reuf, el in corpora sua cidus 
 huJvitQros qiiarn ut lioinaiiam amicitiam violurent. Liv. 35, 31. 
 
 Obs. 12. If tile f^overiiing infinitive i:» a perfkct, generally the same tenses are used 
 which would be used if tbj clause were made dependent on the same perfect in the in- 
 
 dixit. ..non quod ullum periculum, ant semen majOris belli videat, iccirco se, priusquam 
 l)rovincia dtcTdat oppriuu-ndos ller>retes duju<se >-e, ue impunlia tam bcelerata defectio 
 tsf^et. Liv. 28. 32. Im>ep. : Nou quod ullum periculum videam, iccirco, piiusquam dtce- 
 da/n, opprimendos llergCtes duxi (et nunc duco). 
 
 Obs. 13. If a suboblique predicate in oratione obliqna is dependent on a finite pre- 
 TKBiTE tense, the consecution is ii\\\i\yi^ prekrite. unless the «reneral rules for Hii)obl.que 
 clauses admit tenses of present consecution : as: S -d qua Lysimachi quondnuj regnum 
 fii^rit, quo vict<» omnia, quse WWn^fuissent, jure belli Seleuci /ac/a sinl existmiare sine 
 diciOnis esse. Liv. 'ii. 40.~Dixit L. Cornelius, jam nunc ia se parSre Claudium ut com!- 
 t lorn m. quaMpse Aa/i'/tri/, .««(//! sibi ratiOnem reddendam esse, utrum in unum ainium 
 crtCitl t^iitt, an (supply 'cndti dnt ') donee leges, quie det.ssent, perferrenlur. lb. 3, 40. 
 
 Obs, 14. Frequently there is a tranntion fromoratio obllqua to oratiodirecta ; mostly 
 on account of the ambiguity which llie use of trie /j^r^V'ttrt/ pronouna of the third permn 
 for all the three grammatical persons would create ; as : Fabius adeo atrociter in roga- 
 tOrem latorenujue est invectus ut nildl relictum minSrum bit: insidiatvm eum, et, tem- 
 pore ca\>\o,adorfnm rempublicam. .., neque ilium fie c/f/y/'6C(/7i quominus pergat ut 
 co^perir. * To*', i/iguii Fabinn, ^ ceteH fribilni, on'n/iu/i. ut i)rimum omnium cogiietis 
 l)otestarem istani ail singulOrum auxilium, non ad perniciem universorum comparatam 
 esse; tril)iinos i)l<bis ros crejltos, non hostes patribus ; nobi-i miserum, invidiosuin tobis 
 est. deseriam rempublicam iiivSdi. Non jus vestnim sed invidiam minuerilis'. Liv. 3, 
 !♦. [It would be almo>t impossilile to tran>lorm the direct j)art of the above speech into 
 oblique discoui>e without causing ambiguity by changing the pronouns of the tirst and 
 second jM-rson, used aliove. into pronouns of the third person].— C'incinnatus dixit .., 
 omnia juvenlQtis decora pidsa ex urb(! Ron^ana €-<se ; UHi'idctS, aeditidt^Oi^, semina dis- 
 cordiaruin, iierum ac t<'riium //77y^7//o.y pes>imis artibus vivere. '■''Aulas", inquit, ''•ille 
 yinjiiiin.'i, quia in Capitolio non /V<i/, minus supplicii quam Appius ^/<e/•//^^" .?• Liv. 3, 
 v.). [Here the force of the direct que-tion would be impainnl i»y continuing the ol)liqne 
 discoiirsej.— MiMiippus optimum luisse ommi)us, qui Uric-ciam incolereiit^ ait. iutegris 
 rebus IMiiiippi y>o/'/i.ssr intervt-nlre Aniiochum ; sua quemque hal'itflrum /</i^^(^, neque 
 omnia sub dicionem Ilomanam i^rvadara. "■ Nunc quoiine''' .\\\i\\\\\, "fi modo t?Oi«, 
 qu.e iiichoiifitis consilia coiistanter puducilis ad exituui, poterit dis juvantil)us Anti- 
 <R;hus Gra^ciui res restituere. Liv. 3."), 32.— Sometimes the oblique discourse passes over 
 into direct discourse, then returns to oblique, and ttually is ajain changed into direct dis- 
 course, as: (^uinclius dixit -IcZ/ttOA' probe scire, vEtolOrum ferociam in verbis, non in 
 
 factist*'.s<'y iiaijue p.irvi AclneOrum exist imationem/t-m.se'. Quodsi quis luiXea iff/wrofset, 
 quie res Aniiochum et /EtOlos conju/txissef, ex leg.itOrum sermOne />o;!wi.Nve appargre, 
 mentiendo vana spe inflatos esse. '- JJi/m hi ab se victum Philippum, sua virtflte pro- 
 tcctos Romanos. et quie modo audiebati^, naj-ranf, ros ceterasque civitates suam sectaiu 
 esse secuifiros : rex peditum equitumque nubesjf«t'/rt^ et conslruU maria classibussuis. 
 E<t auteui res simillima ca?n:e Chalcideiisis hospitis mei, apud quern, qnum, solstitiaii 
 tempore /nirareniur, nude illi eo tempore tam varia venatio, homo ait varietatem illani 
 ferluie carnisex mansueto sue factam." Ilocdiciapie in copiis regis, qu;e paullo ante 
 jxcfiVie ftu/tf, pofise. Varia enim i:enera armOrum, et multa nomina gentium inauflita- 
 rum, Syros omuls esse. . . " Et ulina/n siibjicere vesfri/f oculis jM-ox-tn concursatiOnein 
 reikis ma.'ui.. .videiGiis vix" ere. Liv. 3."). 4!*. Here a conversion of the inserted anec- 
 dote, and of the closing optative formula, into au oblique discourse, is hardly po&sible. 
 
 FINIS. 
 
INDEX TO PAET II. 
 
 il 
 
 t^T^ The first number?» of the references refer to themes .of the Second Part; the 
 number? and Utters adjoined to tliese, after a comma, TCrer either to the §, or to the 
 Hern., or to the Ob?»., or to mere numerical divisions of a paragraph. If on the page 
 referred to, are !i«everal numbers of the same kind, their different designations (/?., Obs., 
 or §) are always added. Numbers, or references after n. refer to the foot-notes. Num- 
 bers separated by a semicolon always contain a new reference. 
 
 We beg to notice the following abbreviations: 
 
 abl. ablative dep. 
 
 abs. absolute diff. 
 
 ace. accusative expl. 
 
 act. active expr. 
 
 a'ij. adjective fut. 
 
 adv. adverb gen. 
 
 ant. antecedent gram, 
 
 attr. attribate imp. 
 
 cl. clause impers. 
 
 comp. comparative ind. 
 
 cond. conditi(»nal indef. 
 
 conj. conjunction inf. 
 
 constr. construed intens. 
 
 coord, cooidinate. or nom. 
 
 cortrdinaiinji «l>j. 
 
 dat. dative part, 
 
 def. definite pass. 
 
 A <ab, absK prep. s<^ea'>. 
 a, Kiigl. article ; twice a day, bis in di" 45, 78. 
 ab (a, abs), Lat. prep. w. abl. ; use of, and 
 diir. from de and ex^ 2.) foil.— Denoting 
 
 DISTANCE, and SEPAItATIOX PROM 27, 4: 
 
 2^0, 4. — = at a distance of 28, 47. — Inci- 
 pcre ah, to begin from (withK n>t (x. 28. 
 A%. — Used of TIME (r= since) 29, 442. Idioms 
 w. ab '^2, 55. — When retained before names 
 of cities 48, R. 82.— Introdncing a co>i- 
 ri.ETiNo oijj. of advs. of distance {prond 
 ab etc.) 220, 7. — w. oeruxdial abl. 195, 
 511. — w. abl. of reversed participial 
 phrases 198, ob». 2. — Ab re est (it is hurt- 
 fiiU. constr. ftll, 5. 
 
 se abdere, constr. w. in and acc. 38, 07. 
 
 se abdicare, w. al)l. 94. 479. 
 
 abcsse, constr. w. ab 27, n. 2. — Different con- 
 structions o( oMfi'fe, in regard toDisTAvr-E 
 220. 4. — Tant'on abfst, with single Ut- 
 clause 62*^, 8: with double Ut-cl., see fan- 
 lum abeif. — .Vihi/ abet, non longing abesf, 
 7)on multum ahest, with Quin-rl. 628. 8. 
 
 abhino, adv. of time (= ago), use, and diff. 
 In nil dehinc 223, 4.— Constr. w. acc. or abl. 
 230, I. 
 
 abhorrere, to differ from, w. ab 29, 48 ; fo 
 afirink from, w. gerundial abl. after ab 
 195, 243. 
 
 abigere, to drive from, constr. w. acc. of the 
 tiling and dat. of the pers. 97. (»8. 
 
 ablative, as compU-tinir obj. of verbs 93 
 loll. ; w. another completing obj. 99, 4S6. 
 
 perf. 
 
 perfect 
 
 pers. 
 
 person 
 
 pi. 
 
 |)lural 
 
 phip. 
 
 J)! n perfect 
 
 pred. 
 
 predicate 
 
 prep. 
 
 preposition 
 
 pres. 
 
 present 
 
 pret. 
 
 preterite 
 
 princ. 
 
 principal 
 
 pron. 
 
 pronoun 
 
 rel. 
 
 relative 
 
 sent. 
 
 sentence 
 
 sing. 
 
 wngnlar 
 
 euhj. 
 
 subject 
 
 subjunc. 
 
 subjunctive 
 
 fynd. 
 
 syndetic 
 
 w. 
 
 with 
 
 dependent 
 
 difference 
 
 explained 
 
 expressed 
 
 future 
 
 genitive 
 
 grammatical 
 
 imperfect 
 
 impersonal 
 
 indicative 
 
 indefinite 
 
 infinitive 
 
 intensity 
 
 nominative 
 
 object 
 
 participle 
 
 passive 
 
 —Completing obj, of adjectives 119 foil.; 
 of adj. denoting dimension (rare) 115. 102. 
 — Abl. after prepositions 12 ; 25 foil. — 
 Abl. or acc. after preps. 12 ; 37, 450. —Gen- 
 eral i)rinciple about tlie use of abl. in ad- 
 vkrbial relations 243, obs. 1.— .^bl. of 
 PLACE, in names of cities, inst. of in vv. 
 abl. 147, 19; inst. of ex w. abl. 147,3.— 
 Abl. of distance 22), 2 ; 22i>, 4 and 5 ; abl. 
 of quantitative form-adj., to express dis- 
 tance 221, 2. — Abl. of time (quest. ' when ') 
 2-28 foil. ; denoting 1 -iiirth of time before 
 or after an action 229 foil.: abl. of time- 
 measure 229. 13; dep. on abhinc, 2:J0 foil. ; 
 dep on advs. post and ante, 2:^1 foil. : de- 
 noting duration of actions inst. of the 
 regular acc. 23H, a ; denoting time applied 
 to. or required for an action 236. b. — Abl. 
 of MANNER 242, 553. Limitations in its 
 use, and diff. from abl. of the instrument 
 243 : 244, OBS. 2. — Hoc (ea) condttldne. lege, 
 e'l rafioiie. m con-nlio, ea -^p" 244, 4.— Abl . of 
 QUALITY 80, 27. — .\ccEssoRY PRKD. In abl. 
 22 >. 24 ; 255. ;>.— Abl. of the accessory p^ed. 
 as abl. of quality 256, obs. 1.— .\bl. of coin- 
 cident ACTION '2.58, /?. 28. — Abl. of means, 
 its limits and equivalents 277. 1 and 2 : 278, 
 4. Form-adj. as abl. of means 278, 3. 
 Clauses conceived as abl. of means 278, 
 4.— Abl. of PRICE and value in form of 
 substantives 266 foil. ; not with pretium 
 dep. on esse = to be worth ; of fisrurative 
 price 2t;7, 4 ; w. nouns denoting denomi- 
 
774 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 be used a. ahls. «jl pncc ^^f^^^^^^^^^l , 
 pen with («^/ m«r^ 2«'i 3.— Ai>i. oi M^A^ 1 
 gen. ^' '"'^ . . ,i,.,u»tinc excf!»- of nu*a^- 
 
 port onal tncapure) ^^i. -^- /" "^ ' L __ * ki 
 
 of DIFFBKENCB (SC'C P. I . ^M Ol qUHl ^ 
 
 tfttive adis. before comps. 2<>s.. i' • ^;'\' ^* 
 duced by quo. . . eo. and ?"«'if ; ' -./^"^f, 
 
 rr,, 5 _XV,. of GEUUNPIAL ABLaTIV b ID.» 
 
 fnii See aNo compauaTive ablative. 
 
 la. ,. of abl. abs. to P^nc .ent. 1 2, 2 7 
 Relation of tbe ^^^ ^f ^^i'.'^iJ; i^'^'XvS n 
 5;lro?^in5^'S.lml^re<^abL-nH.m 
 K.eJd;^>.J)npredabl..;u.lcon.ecttn^^ 
 
 ^' 'riS. ir 'iKndi ii;?^ of'^aecmnuKd 
 P^r- u^iV-i- 174 4 Abl. abs. intro- 
 
 rindeied by -witbouf w. parttcipuils 188, 
 
 j^lSiives absolute -ith perf . pass part^lTT 
 lou. TlH-irusen Hi tran.l y. .M^c^^ ^^^ 
 
 ?^c:S;in^E^^-"t.' 177,222,1; 178^2. 
 PaiiveVei.t in thin con.tru.-t.on 1.7 
 
 ttruct!;;.!, Ib-DJponenU with pa«. 
 
 meanin- 172, 4. 533- rendered 
 
 Abl. ab3. w. preseiit part. 1«^ JJ\' ^ • p j. 
 
 bv prepositional P»'' '"*'';• ^^^''i^f.-bl W ' 
 ),hrLstic pa... pan. n.ed a. prM . abl. w. 
 
 Ab abs w. nouns and adj. as pred. abl. 18 • 
 
 5:5 Wiat nouns "^^y *^« 'r^;l./''J ,7iM- 
 ahl. {Cu'^rbne conmle etc ) IS. ••^^^\. ^okm 
 
 ADiKCTiVEJ» as» pretl. abl. !«♦' '*-J^ ',','*i\^ 
 
 24. Rendered by snb w. uhl. 40, 454- -jl^V^ 
 /o w. obj. inf., rendered by periphrasiic 
 
 alsiivlre: 'con.tr. w. ace. of pers. and gen. 
 
 ol tluni,''.t9, «Nl. jTQ. w ffernn- 
 
 abstinere. const., w. abl 04, 4 •«-,;•,, ^,^f ;«. 
 
 ^;;^li;;i;l«^:s.^ iJ^a^i-ciJus:^: ^- r. 
 
 i^S^rdative, .00 rr.rfl.a^f ^^*;;;; A^>- 
 .tract <lat. as accessory Pn;d. 2o : 2«. 
 abstrahcre, con^tr. w. gerundiul abl. alter ao 
 
 absu^dum est. constr. w. subj. inf. claa*c 
 
 abundare, w. abl. 03 479. 
 
 abuti, XV. abl. ''3, 4. '.♦.;' -t)- , ^„„j. 
 
 ac. as coord, conj se,^ I as comp j^ 
 
 2.'>4, 4. , 
 
 acceptna w. dat. 118, iij;. . .^j^^^ functions 
 
 Accessory predicate. Ut 1'"^' ^; ^i,,,,,,.^ 
 
 ' and analvMS '^l ^ f^^- • .;i4b \>«^( ^r,^ Adj. 
 
 "'"^*^''^-i;?oVed 247 20 ve bal adjs. iu 
 
 r "^x'm^i^" 1' i^ '^7 "'>• 13'.), /^ 158 ; m 
 
 "^^ . \;iei of fVr/Vitbe idiom expl.)2o4, 
 
 r^F::;:tn.u^^^/^''^;ni^-^i^^^sr^Bs: 
 
 pred. 2.-,0 f..ll ; ''••""".,;; ::/\'>red from 
 ol.j*. as 1 ...ir l"--";i>l -'".J- -'^•' „„ i„- 
 ',ri.m..ve .<■... a,„; "."■ "f/,: -..f i/,I*c, 
 
 happens-) w. dat. l^,'- 'V' , ^, ^18 2. Diff. 
 
 19U. -S.V-K I- ^,4. 11Q 119- w cviiidial 
 
 accommodatus, w. dat. ^}.^-,\ *• '^,;/if.,-2. l. 
 
 ,lat. l.U. 1 ; w. ••f^'7''f;!i'f^o\' Sprout 748, 
 according i^s^perind^ ut .4a, i , -P' 
 
 according to=arf, secundum, ex. pro. For 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 775 
 
 diff. 32, 5.3 : 35. 62. Rendered by paren- 
 thetical rel. clauses {qude. tua est huumni- 
 f as VAC.) .')i;i, D 
 
 accusare, incusare, criminari, w. ace. of pers. 
 and iren. of tiling 9!), 4S4. Accusare, tjen- 
 eraliy takes (^uod-cl., rarely luf. cl. 598, 9, 
 and n. 
 
 Accusative, a? completin;r obj. of transi- 
 
 T!V K VKUBS 84 foil. ; W, NEUTER VERBS 85, 
 
 39; w. passives {indutus vestem etc.) &'), 
 40. Ace. of neuter form-adj. dep. on neu- 
 ter verbs 85. .39. Ace. dep. on verbs cotn- 
 j)()uii(led w. the preps, circum, per, prcEter, 
 ininx m, 473. Exclamatory ace. 87, It. 44. 
 DouBLK ace. w. verbs compounded with 
 trans 87. 42. Donble ace. dep. on doclre, 
 cdarc, r<x}are etc. 1(X), 4SH, Double ace. 
 consistini^ of a necter adj. aloni^ w. 
 transitive ace. {hoc fe hortor etc.) 101. 73. 
 Double ace. w. factitive verbs 101, 487. 
 Transitive ace, alonj» w. obj. inf. 104. 491; 
 w. jxb^re 5!m. 6, and n. ||. Ace. as com- 
 pietini^ obj. of An,js. denotini; dimknsiox 
 Klniigns etc.) 115, 498; as obj. of adjs. w. 
 force of limiting abls, (celer pedes) 11«, 10.5. 
 Prepositions w. ace. 12; w. ace. or abl. 
 lb. and ;37, 4:)0. 
 
 Acjusativc (adverbial). Ace. of place in 
 n lines of citie< 47, 2. Ace. neuter of form- 
 ad js. expressin^j intensity, or extent of 
 thi! pred. 2«.i, 1 : 755, C. Ace. of distance 
 220, 'i foil. ; of quantitative fonn-adjs. to 
 express distance 221, 2. Ace. of time 2.34. 
 14; ace. or abl. w. ahhinc 230 foil.; ace. of 
 time chanired into a pass. nom. 146. n. 14. 
 etc. of intensity denoiinsr age of men 23fi, 
 5. Ace. of WEIGHT 275, 562. Ace. w. iNr. 
 see Inf. clauses, 
 
 to accuse one of a capital crime— <:a7Ji^t6' ac- 
 cxsdre. 99, H. 70. 
 
 to accustom one to »omothing = assuefacere 
 afif/'/em alif/ud re 99, 485. 
 
 acerbus with II supine 121, 121. 
 
 actutum, expl. 225, 11. 
 
 acuere w. <,'erundial after ad 190, 239. 1. 
 
 ad, prep. w. aec, use 12 loll. Ad in local 
 relations 13, 11. When Eiii,'!. ' to ' is expr. 
 by ad. and when by dat. lb. Moaiiini,' of 
 spectdre and rergere (to face) w. ad 221, 8. 
 ^ (/= accord ini; to, up to 14, 13. Idioms 
 with ad, 15. 14. Ad before names of coun- 
 tries, postclasslcal ;i8, n. 4. When retained 
 in connection w. names of cities, 48. 83 
 foil. Ad vrheMi venire, inst. of in xirbem 
 rtnlre ;it», (»9. Ditf. of ad from in w. ace. 
 in local relations :^. «»9 ; in fisrurative rela- 
 tions 40 foil. Ad referring to time "at," 
 and before dates of month 228, '^.—Ad de- 
 noting purpose, 284, 2; dill", of ad and ia 
 denoting jnirpose 41, 71; ad Jinem = \n 
 order to 283, .566; 28.3. \.—Ad denoting 
 MANNER 244, 5. Referring to the thing 
 which is of interest 274, »)<— Verbs com- 
 
 l)ounded w. ad constr. w. dat. or ace. 90, 
 
 45. 
 
 addicere, to award, constr. w. obj. of price 
 in gen. or abl. 206, 2. 
 
 adducere conetr. w. That-clanseB etc., seo 
 inavere ; w. gerandials after ad 190, 2;^9, 1. 
 —Adductus w. abl. as circumlocution 
 (=from) 119, 11.5. 
 
 adeo (so, so much), adv. of intens. Diff. 
 Irom tarn, tantopere, tantum, mic. ita 262, 4; 
 as synd. ant. of clauses of intens. 435, 2; 
 of consecutive clauses lb.— Adeo non (ni- 
 /ieO = 'so little '264, 5. 
 adesse w. dat. 89. Adesse and interesse w. 
 gerundial dative 163, 209; adesse scribendo, 
 expl. 163, 1 ; adesse rei agendce. lb.; adesse 
 ad rejnfaciendam, diff. from adesse rei fa- 
 ciendis 237, 2. 
 
 adhibere w. gerundial dat. 163, 209 ; w. ge- 
 rundial after afl? 190. 239. 1. 
 adhortari w. gerundial after ad 190, 239, 1. 
 adhuc, adv. of time 222, 9. 
 adimere w. ace. of thing and dat. of pers. 
 (= from) 97, 68. 
 
 adipisci, constr., see impetrdre. 
 adire, to api)roach, w. aec. 89, n. 4, 
 Adjectives. Their construction with ob.ject8 
 113, 96 foil. w. ace. 115, 498; w. gKin. 117, 
 499; w. gen. in the poets and later prose 
 118, 111 : w. dat. 118. .500; w. abl. 119. 501 ; 
 w. inf. 121. 502 ; w. II supine 121, 503; w. 
 gerundial gen. 161, 207; vv. gerundial dat. 
 164, 210; w. genindi.d after ad 192, 240.— 
 Adjectives as accessory preds. 247, 20. Di- 
 viding line between adjs. as access, preds. 
 and adverbs 248, 1.— Adverbial use of neu- 
 ter FouM-ADjECTiVKs iu acc. 26:3, 1 ; in 
 abl. lb. and 264, 3. Their relation to advs. 
 of intens. 2(53, 2. 
 
 adjicere ianiuwm) w. gerundial dat. 16:3, 209. 
 
 adjuvare w. acc. 87, n. 3 ; w. acc. »>f neuter 
 
 form-adjs. along w. tmnsiiive obj. a5, ;39, 2. 
 
 admirari, constr. w. interrogative clauses 
 
 3!)0, a. 
 
 admodum, adv of intens. 2^2, 6. 
 admonere constr. w. acc. of pers, and gen. 
 of thing 99, 4W. 
 adspergere and inspergere, constr. either w. 
 acc. of thing and dat. of pers.. or w. acc. 
 of pers. and abl. of thing98, 483. 
 adulari w, dat. or' acc. 91. 
 advenire constr, w. ad or in and acc, 36. 67, 
 Adverbial (incidental) relations, or circumstan- 
 ces, 214 foil. 
 
 Adverbial clauses, their analysis and division 
 ■iss, 12. 
 
 Adverbs, formation of, see P, I. — Explana- 
 tion of their linguistic nature 215, 1. — 
 Advs. in o 239, obs, 3 ; are originally pas- 
 sive impers. predicate-abls. ISt), 2.34. — 
 Advs. in im 241, 16; their diff. from ordi- 
 nary advs, lb, OBS.— Advs, of place, see 
 locative adverf)^ ; advs. of place not in lo- 
 cative cases 219— Advs. of distance 220, 
 7.— AdvB. of manner, their analysis 242, 
 17 ; how formed H^, 552; their predicative 
 use 239. OBS. 1.— Diff. of Engl, and Latin 
 in the use of advs. 2:j9. obs. 2,- Formation 
 of modal form-adverbs 239. li. 15,— What 
 advs. may take objects? 114. 98,— What 
 advs, may be used as objs, of adjs, ? 114, 99, 
 
776 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 777 
 
 t4t«ri«l w. dat. 88; coni.tr. w. clauses, see ' 
 Tk -w-Diff from Ciiiainquam-cl. bob, 
 
 and erf7a 15, 1(»; 41, <-J. 
 
 «dificare, con^tr. w. obj. ot ruicE 20b, z. 
 
 Bger vv. ubl l;-i<\'/l';- , . „en. or dat. 119. 
 aquahs w. dat. 11», H* , >^- n^"- " 
 
 il.(m)tw. Ut-cl.) bin •'i ;";»"•+: 
 
 %riS "-^""erh S valu;;;. take, obj ..f 
 iu'cK -ib? 3;when w. abl. and wlun w. 
 V 071 4- fts verb of estekmino 2il. 1. 
 Slt'lh'pr-^aaou t„ utMU (pert, 
 
 dl,!)^, i.«n, I , " ' .>>i-iH() 2i'). — After 
 
 ftbl abs*. and i)art. 1 19, ^ii . i^^'. '***;•. ^f;',, . 
 
 fis coni n-n.lered by /KAs7(/'/«//t bbO f.»n. , 
 
 w^ft u/, dmut, and it« compou »'. b>., 
 
 IfV^/w Dro?. perf. hy ]Xfsfqucwiy>. perl. 
 —Aj(ei w.i'i' • I ...//T w fut. pert, not by 
 or pres. bbS, 10.— >V'^'^ ^^- .,V/ o. 7W 4- 
 
 against, J^ngi. pit-u., n»' > .,.y 
 
 r.i ; 41, 72 ; by pre., ab ab>^. 1^^ -!^J- 
 aee of men, how expr. -fib, 5. „ « — 
 
 aB[ta;.faB-vtrbof.triviu,w.«<o.-«.5n 
 .gmine mresto (ff"». '»«"'"'• *"'«"■«"'• "'"■>• 
 
 S;//mayVu.td in the meaning 'a,o 
 
 ai;!\o-introduce Indirect HtaUnncntB 380, 1. 
 alacer w. irerundinl after wl 1^>2, ». 
 tSsvv.Vrundia. after a. 140,1. 
 
 alioquin. modal l..rni-adv. 23.», lo. 
 aliorsum, expl. -21 ». S. 
 
 quondam and oam '2vJ, ^. 
 
 aliquanto, adverbial, abl. of inter,» ; when 
 u.ed ill place oi iUiquantum^^>^.-l- 
 aiiquantui, adverbial ace. ol mtea». 263,31. 
 aliouatenus, expl. 217, 8. 
 ali4uotx--»,adv',f t.mc2;2,9. 
 a.iter.modal lorm-adv. 2.^^i. l». 
 
 ^^^lh /orerof the' particle ^«"^!--(jfj\^^, 
 only 749, 10.-^/i«^ ^„""»^Vi '^*'='^'"^ 
 ail thl things wluch, rendered either omnia 
 n>t,e, or omnia ta 7"<* 5^"' ^,;./ « 
 alone Eu^d. adv., how expr. 2;>1, 7. 
 
 air"dv.:with ace. f>';,f -^!';^;;;;'»,,, ' iH he 
 
 alter, nsed as e(,uivalent of /"•""^'^y.o 111, 
 
 acK.n i. betwee.. tNv;o only lOS- • 1? : 1^'' 
 
 amabo te, use of 348, 5. 
 amans w. ^'en. Hi, 10». .^-c. r 
 amare w. ;>/'/.<, not w. w^7^< '/'^'' V -^oo a 
 Sb g;re,cinstr. w. interro^-at.ve cl. 390, a. 
 tSbuWw. ace. ..f distance 22C), 3. 
 
 amicus, w. S^'';;;^:[/'V:.nderid 1"'''^ 19, '2.", ; 
 among Kutd. P':M;'Ji ^^^,,,. 43. 7.-> : 44. 7b. 
 
 dJuotinu-nnmeVal excess (a./i/>/i''* c/ecm) 
 fyv) 'A' w neiiatn>ns «m. •*. „ t> t \ 
 
 al Lat. Vnterro-u.ive particle (.ee P. D, 
 °' !^ Vnnrtive comparison 7b«. lb. 
 
 ^ '"'^ASfn^'ole'Velation of purpose, 
 a?ii°^'' iwor^ " 28:}, 1. Animvm concer- 
 lu abl. -i^^; •*'''**'' Verundial after «(i 
 ;-f S f i'S.m i-/"" ^. as verb of 
 sniN^^' w. t/1 and ... 5'.»9, 2 ; w..obJ. ">f. 
 tln'2^Animinn facers, >^^'^ rnonre 
 anniis numeral nouns derived romt 22 . 
 
 ante, prep. ''''^^^^^i^^V^. 
 
 of !-- i= ^rt '^^onXf^com funded w 
 ""•\til\/«> 'mo 45. -.4«/^ diem, i" what 
 T;^;";? ht'^r..J',nT,^'••a;..•,•o^.^.^e,• 
 »?n%"'''v."n' .'. o,>",Ucd to pre., -ame 
 
 Snt.'hf'ic antecedents. 
 an cedere,w.dat.oracc 91 4.5. 
 
 ;nteire,Nv.dat.oracc.yi,4io. 
 
 Anteqnam-clausea (and Priusquam-clauses), 
 WK», foil, lieferrinj; to fut. action .344, 4 ; 35.5. 
 — 'I'hey properly are comi-arative clauses 
 6bb, 1.— Wlien ante (pritis) and ^«a//imu8t 
 be written ^s two .separate words b<)6. 1. 
 Tenses of their predicates in j^eneral m), 
 021 ; 344, 4; 355. Particular rules of the forms 
 ot the pred. : A. If dev. on non-pket. 
 PKi.NC. PHKD. 1) indef. time: pred. in perf. 
 iiid. or pres. subjunc. bb7, 4 ; 2) def. time: 
 pres. iiid., pres. hubjunc, or fut. perf. 
 Ob», 5.— B. Dep. on pket. piunc. pred. 1) 
 indef. time: imp. suhjuuc. or plup. subj. 
 007, n.*; 2) def. time : perf. (rarely imp.) 
 ind.. or imp. (rarely plup.) subjunc. 009. b. 
 —Dirt, between the two moods in these 
 constructions 667, 3 ; («)9, 7 and 8.— No 
 tut. pres. used w. anfer/uatn or priuyguam 
 in clasMcal lan<;ua<je <Wi'i, b21 ; bb», '5.— In 
 indirect discourse b()9. 2. — Participial 
 Anteqnam-cl. 071, 11.— Attr. Autequam-cl. 
 Obi. 2. !See also priusquam. 
 
 antiqoitus, «dv. ol time 225, 11. 
 
 antiquius, iii/dl antiquius habere auam w. 
 ut 5in>, 2. ^ 
 
 Apodosis, see protasis. 
 
 apparere, dirt", from videri 74, 10. W. dat. 
 m.—Appartt (impers.) av. subj. inf. cl. 015, 
 1: w. nom. and inf. lb. 
 
 to appear, when rendered by apparire, and 
 wlitii by rif/eri 74, lb. 
 
 appellare aliquem, appeal to somcbodv, 86, 
 47.J. As faetitive verb w. double ace. JO», 13. 
 
 appellere, to land. w. ace. after in 38, 07. 
 
 appetens w. }rei\ . 107, 108. 
 
 Apposition (see also P. I.) Nouns in appo- 
 sition to a SENT., in connection with a lel., 
 not used in Latin .50«i. 3 : 510. 1 and :i : 517, 
 0.— Appositions by which verbal ideas are 
 'quoted' as such (the verb ' to lore," etc.), 
 expr. hy cr<'n. of £r,.ruiidial 154, 194, 4. 
 
 Appositive Quum-clauses, definition and use, 
 049. 9 : L'ram. form and mood 050, 9. 'I'en- 
 ses 650, 9 and 10. Kefenin^ to anterior 
 time 652, 10. W. princ. sent, containing a 
 circumlocuiion of a time-object 051, 13. 
 
 appositus w. ^erundial after ad 192, 1. 
 
 appropinquare w. dat. 89. 
 
 aptatus w. nl. cl. in subjunc. .557, 3. 
 
 aptus w. dat. IIM, ll-> ; w. rrerundial dat. 
 104, 210; w. jrerundial after ad 192, 1 ; w. 
 rel. cl. in subjunc. 557, 3. 
 
 apud, prep. w. ace. 10, 430 foil.— DifT. from 
 cinn 17, 20.— Dirt, of ' in VoL^cu; ' and ' apud 
 lo/.vco.s' 44, n. 1. 
 
 arbitrari, as lactitive verb w. double ace. 
 10-2. c. 
 
 arbitratu tno, 242, ons. 
 
 arcere w. «^, or a mere abl. 29, 48. 
 
 arduus w. irerundiil after ad 192, 2. 
 
 Argos, city, how declined 67, n. 10. 
 arguere w. ace. of pers. and «jcn. of thing 
 
 99. 484 ; w. inf. cl. 104. »3; 5U2. 9. Doubt- 
 ful whctlier the inf. after arguere is an obj. 
 
 01 pred. inf. 1()4. n. 2. 
 argumentum est, constr. w. subj. Quod-cl. 
 
 013,9. ^ 
 
 arriving, verbs of, constr. w. ace. after in or 
 ad 37, (J7 ; w. a mere ace. of nouns of cities 
 47, n. 2. 
 
 artifex, w. ^erundial gen. 159, 2. 
 As (Latin denomination of money), a? stand- 
 ard of money, and unit of fractional ex- 
 pressions 208, 5. 
 
 as, En<,d. coxj. of time, rendered by vhi.vt., 
 idmid and its comi)ounds 665, 1.— .^s comp. 
 cosj., w. various Latin equivalents 743, 
 026 ; rendered by qui 744. 1 ; by ac, atque, 
 lb.; by comp. Ul-clause 746 foil.; bv tam- 
 quam, quornodo, quem'tdmcHium, qvasi, ve- 
 lut, lb. ; by quoi and quoties 750, 1 ; by 
 qnantug 750, '2.— As. . . .so rendered bv ut 
 incut).... sic {if a) 7.56, B. or by comp. 
 Quum-cl. (quum....tum) 657, 2.— .4« con- 
 cessive, by quatnvuw. sicut est (rich as he is 
 = quamvis sit dires, sicut est) 694, C.—As, 
 as accessory pred., generally omitted in 
 Latm 253, obs.; but in certain instances by 
 itt 747, G; also by recasting' the clause (to 
 distinsruish one's self as a fribune = i«.*i(7- 
 nem tribundtum gerere) 199. n. 2.— As far 
 AS, how rendered 518, b. As far as con- 
 sistent (not prejudicial) = quod fieri jyossit 
 w. abl. lb.; as far as I am al)ie, quantum- 
 cunque jwssum .500, 5. As far as, l»y rel. 
 cl. w. subjunc. 560. 1 and 2 ; by quoad 674, 
 7.— As FOR instance, not by exempli gra- 
 iid, but by nt si w. subjunc. 713, 19.— As 
 IP, ac si, ut si, velut si, 744, 1 ; pennde ac 
 SI, haud secus ac si, perinde quasi 745 3 ; 
 tamquam {si), quasi etc. 748, 5.— As little 
 AS, magis quarn or jtlus qvam w. neiration 
 ^7^"' ^""^** (*'") LONG AS, by quoad, qvam- 
 aiu, dufii 674. 6 ; only so long as. tarndiu 
 
 duni, tantuvx dum, ita dum.nl^o 
 
 w. quoad and qua?ndiu 674. 6.— As much 
 AS by iion magis (pt us) guam 758, B; by 
 rel. clauses 509. 2 ; as much as I can. lb.— 
 As MICH, denoting multiples 264, 4 ; 7.52, 
 2.— As SOON AS. by postquam mi, I) ; 66:3, 
 3; by quuni pnmum, ut pmnum. siiradac 
 66.5, 43 foil; 'as soon as' with pres. perf. 
 see 660, 3.— As to (the tact that) = quod W7, 
 3.— As TO ME (as regards me) = quod ad 
 vie at.tirut 518. B.—As to the kest = quod 
 reliquuin est. etc. 518, C. 
 ascertaining, V'eibs of, constr. w. 06 or ex 
 2S. 4S. 
 
 aside from with participial =prceter id ouod 
 
 »i07. 2. 
 to ask for permission, how rendered .595, -3. 
 
 —Asking questions, Verbs of, constr. w. 
 
 ab, ex, de 28, 48. 
 asper, w. gerundial dat. 165, 2. 
 assembling (convenire etc.). Verbs of, constr. 
 
 w. ate. after in ;38, 07. 
 assentari, w. dar. 88. 
 assentiri, w. dat. 89. 
 assequi w. Utcl., see impetrare. 
 assignare. w. ])articipial gerundive 148, 178. 
 assis est, 272, 3. 
 assuefacere w. transitive ace. and obj. inf. 
 
 104. »3 ; w. aliquem aliqud re (to somethiu"^) 
 
 99, 485. 
 
778 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 assuetus \v. abl. 110, lie. .,„.-0 tm 
 
 Asyndetic combination of 8«°*'e°<=»^,1 ';',,;• 
 \Clu'.> applied to CMonimationui (I ^u > >^ 
 dinaiion of Pent. ATi, '\: ^'h,^.- i^^o 
 words asvndetically c()5rdinaU'd 4.b (-- 
 Idio.nan6 asyndeton, it ..no danso s i e^- 
 ative 47«, A l.-A^yndeiic imperative 
 (•laiis('s5!>r,. r, ; 597,8. 
 at, at certe, Liitin advs.. as pynd. a"„tj/^j'^^ 
 
 cedents^ of conces-ive Si-clauscs -Jl. j. 
 at En-1. preo., rendered by ad or opud 10. 
 
 1»)- bv in w. ace. (verbs ot arnymjr, a^- 
 
 'ombMn^ landiu- etc.) 37, H7; by tj w. 
 
 abl 4>,t4: bv mere abl. 44, 78 (see p. 828). 
 
 Se ore imrnei of cities by abl. or p-n. 4 > 
 
 and 47. Af. refnrins to price and Nalue 
 
 hv ai)l. or <ren. 2»»8, :il ; 270. 
 atone (coDrd. con], n-e P. I) ; comp. conj. 
 'X r^./.m ..re. 744, .51 ; 744, 1 After a/*t/. 
 
 and con/ra 74'.>. 1>; after toMtm ;-A J; 
 attamen, pynd. ant. (postcedeni) of concth- 
 
 sive clauses 692, 1. „♦:,.„ r-ii 
 
 attinet (non), meaning and construction b-i. 
 
 Attraction in Comp. clauses 762, 13 foil. See 
 Siil>i'ihctivebii altvadion. 
 
 attribuere w. participial Lrerundivc 14H. 1.». 
 
 Attribute (see P. I) KH- «'U- »^ »»'.''•. "'^ 
 
 ^nom^s ii! their own cl. .V>S folI.-Partit.ve 
 rel a^m-eiiigwith its L'overiiinsr numeral 
 «r noun m} m>'<'-^ r.fn>f; <,"oi^ /;'"^;t^« 
 = quorum ill mifitero) .'Jv'H. 1 and -. "' 
 governing noun ellipiically omitted o2.>, .3 
 
 Attribute-clauses, a g.;:im. form ^f (lop. ^;^"; 
 tei.ces 4S0, 610. The dilleiynt •'•«i;^^ 
 which may assume the relation as attii- 
 
 AlSilJrmt-clauses, 623 foil By ^yhat 
 th.'ir A>rm as Inf. clauses. I »-^''- ^»' •J'" ' ' " 
 termined «123, 29.-Their analogy to g-rnn- 
 dial genitives 624, 1-T>'t'ir f mTunig 
 noun "mnst be abstract (lex etc.^ 624. 2.- 
 Cir m. dep. on a noun, but loL'tcally on a 
 v^X;26, k and 6.-l)ep. on a le.u ing ide 
 vnderstood 626, 7 f<.ll.-The.r r.-latiun to 
 SuDJect That-clauses 624, 3; 627, A. 
 auctor, w. genindial gen. 159, 2. 
 audiens, w. dai. 118, 108. , ^^oa-n '>• 
 
 audire and accipere, t-o"*=<'-- «'• ^«^.^ .^^^'-S' 2 • 
 wuHre con^tr. w. accessory pied. 2.>>, 2 
 w Inf. cl. 5^. 23. AmFiri qnvrn dv^rej 
 ,326, 3; always with pret. consecution 42., 
 
 because, Engl, conj , by quod an;1^9t'i«/>«^. 
 62;i: 683 foil.; by siquidtm 6b8, M, oy 
 
 befiri^'Engl. prep, and adv., by rf"/;:' «"'/^' 
 nee these. Ikjhre. conj. (= beloie the 
 time that) by (uittq'iam or prvtsri'iam 006, 
 1 : bv noiidum w. al)l. ahs. 179, V^l. 
 beginning, V.rhs of. con^tr. w. ub 28, 48. 
 to beheve in, how rendered 88, n. 4. 
 bellum, r/'/<//a or i/J 41. 72. ..... „ 
 
 benignitas est w. subj <i""t^PVu».>S 
 benignus w. gerundial after ad 192, 5. 
 
 be8 = ^;116, 105. 
 
 to bestow on somebody, by rovfene in all- 
 a'n//i, or dtfene aiiciii 98. 69. _ 
 better, you had belter -^ quia w. imperative 
 
 b'ipartito. tripartite, etc., as impcrs. pred. abl. 
 
 ISC, 231. . » or^ 4 
 
 bis tanto etc., twice as much 264, 4. 
 
 blandiri w. dat. KS 
 
 bonus w. L'erundial.dat. it>o. «. 
 
 to border on, how e.\i)r. 221, 8. 
 
 brevi, ^o(.n : difl". from luox etc. 
 
 brevi's, w. 11 sui)ine 121. 121. 
 
 Bull Run, how rendered 3».2. n. 
 
 but Kn-l. adversative conj. (lor autem. 
 .tcee P. 1): w. clemonstrat.ves or pers. 
 pron., n ndered by cOrd. rehune* 520, 1 
 • Hut so THAT,' ita ut etc. 4.ij, 2. Bitt 
 ONLY IF, ita 4 741, 10. But that = Qvtn 
 547 (• and D. But rendered by M.^t .39, 
 2 'b,t = except 739,3. Bit remie.c^l 
 dve 7-37, 4.— Bltt fou thk fact tuat .1», 
 3. But if (but if not) 7:J6. 1-3. 
 buying. Verbs of, cn^tr. w. ab 28. 48. 
 
 VM Bv w. particii)ial = L'enind.al abl. 16'. , 
 iih- rendeivd )>y a Fact -clause ^eo quod) 
 »1U6," 4, 1 ; by abl. abs. 18«J, 225. 
 
 221, 3. 
 11. 
 
 fed 
 
 Cadit(ithappens).difr. frpmaccldif; con^tr 
 
 w. subj. Quod-cl. or ;:«-<V'^|?ir 
 in anqiiem w. b^ubj. uif. or L t-cl. in. 
 Calendffl, see Kalenda:'. , , 
 
 c«rK..gl. potential ''"^^il''^'-^- [/^"^^^^'^^^J 
 pr.s. ind. or fut. ol ;/o.w 3.9. a. Can 
 l.AVK (may have) by poU.t.fienu ^ erf. 
 379, c : rarely hy i>o.<.se w. obj. mf. in perl. 
 
 cineret- trans, ace. 1.39, n. 12 ; w. abl. 95,62. 
 capax \v. L'cn. 118, 111. 
 
 ^9.1 '^- alwavs with pret. con<ecuuoii -i*., capax w. t;.u. ";:■,";•, „*.„,. .^10- oin 
 f^Au^ZquuJiir.r.t 326 4.-Pecu- capere w. ffj-n^"''-^- ^ l^f/^YJ,^.,^)' ^'''ubj 
 liar use of the i-P- «- -J^- ^:?;,'i.t. oA'^^^'j}. 'c.uV'^ ' °^ 
 
 auferre, constr. w. ace. .>t 'In'"-' "'J'^/Jat- «^ 
 iK-rs. (alicui = from sonvbody) 9.. «)S. 
 augurato and auspicate as impers. pred. abl 
 
 IKH, 2;U. 
 auxiliari, w. dat. 87, 4.1. 
 
 averUre'V^ gerundial abl. after ab 195, 213, 
 
 t^^^e'v.l^iV'x^Jaial^;;^)!. after «.295, 243. 
 
 Be it that. 
 as it inaij: 
 
 . ..ortbat = «»€ 
 by ni6i 739, 2. 
 
 737, 5.~B€ this 
 
 (Jiiod-cl. 614, 9 
 (•arpre w abl. 93, 479. ^^ ._ 
 
 ctrgo .>Va ship, how remlerod, 3:^1, J- .In- 
 cases of nouns. Hu-ory of their use 84, 1 .1. 
 castLre construction ..f. see reprehendere. 
 castrfs '/^/Va.. etc ) = tribusdilbu. 2:36, b. 
 «•«.an accidentallv 241, .3. . , 
 
 elS'a. w attr. ltd., Quominiis-cl., and 
 Ouodcl 627, I?, 6.-6'«'/.^« e4.y>-,^n\^h 
 I> cl 6 13 4 -Causa mn e.^t, in ind. of 
 ^'pret? tense, used hypothetically 724. ^^ 
 
 foil. 
 
 IXDEX. 
 
 779 
 
 •ansa in abl., w. an attr., to denote cause 
 em. iriit mid parposc 2-.9, 5<;5 ; 28-3, 5(;ri and 
 i. vv . fren. of a noun = propter 24, 43 ; w. 
 gen. or posscs-ive adj. denoting can.se etti- 
 cieui and Jiioiive -27.1, 1 and 2 ; w. g.rundi. 1 
 V'-'?-.\";'''''^"'^' purpose (lor the sake ol) 
 !.>.». &. ^M. \.— Causa incof/nitd, -xpl. IS'.l a. 
 
 Causal clauses, 682 loll. Generally take ind. 
 except with qu»m 682. 623. Causal con.js. 
 II). — When snhjiii.c. is used alter guod, 
 ^,f *^',.""*^ Q'""nani 689. A ; 690 li and C- 
 i he difleient formulas ol Quod clauses.aiid 
 ^^lla-cl. witii snbjunc. after non 690 C. loll. 
 —Collocation of cau>al cl. 47S. 6.— Subob- 
 iique causal cl. referring to fut. with peri- 
 phrastic lenses 419, li. See also qaod, 
 quia, quonunn, siquidem, quando, and 
 tonip(tn.<ou of can ml clauses. 
 
 Causal Postquam-clauses w. imp. ind. 662, 5 : 
 w. p.rf. ind. (k;.-,. lo. 
 
 Causal Quum-clauses. Their mood follows 
 the rules on causal rel. cl. 6.i5, 3M. Always 
 111 the suhjuuc, unless referring also to 
 tune 655. 1. ° 
 
 Causal relative clauses, .566, 21 foil. Six in- 
 t^tances in which rel. clauses may be used 
 Hist, ol cau>al Quuin-dauses 5»i6, 1 foil.; 
 insr. of Siquidem-clauses 567.3; raielv 
 iiist of Qu(,«t.(l. and (^nia-cl. 56»}, -2. Ke-"- 
 nlarly vv suhjunc; when w. ind. .567, 6; 
 »•»8, 7. Kel. eau.sal cl. used w. force of 
 <yiiuin-cl. denolini: identity of acti.m .568, 
 6. liis'. ol c.nnpleiing Quod-clauses 568, 7. 
 >> . ludei. antec -dents b\,S, 8 ami 9. 
 Cause, relation of -277 toll. Uel. adjs. w. 
 lor. e of caus.il ol)jecls.5-27. C'.-Causeexpr. 
 i)v the rel adv«. cur, qmre. quamoljrem.— 
 When prepositional rel. objects must be 
 u.«»ed to express cause {profiler quna etc.) 
 5-7. a and b. — Cause efficient and rnotire. 
 how expr. 279, 565 iV.ll. Cause, as purpose, 
 how expr -.'83, 566 foil, 
 cuyere w. ace. 86. 473; w. That-cl. 596 foil. 
 l^.»rm ol the Tiiat-cl. when carere is a ver- 
 huin jm|)eraiidi .596. n. t.—Di tie rent mean- 
 ini,'s and constructions oJ car<'rt 599, n. t 
 Asyerl) of avoiding, w. ne (iOl, ,5. — Cave 
 
 Avitha.syiidfticsul)jiinc..asciicumloculion 
 ol m-rrative imperatives 6-28. 30. 
 ccdere w. dat.; w. ahl. 93. 479; w. dat. and 
 ahl. as compound obj. {alicui aliqua re) 96, 
 
 celare, meaning 100. n.- With double ace. 
 
 JUO, 486; w. de 101), n. How constr. in 
 
 piss, voice 101, 7.3. 
 celer w. gerundial abl. after in 194, 540 ; w 
 
 gerundial after ad 19:2, 5. 
 colebcr, w. ahl. 1:20, 116. 
 
 ccnsere, constr. w. inf. cl., or nt, according 
 to II- meaning .59.3. 9. Censlre. to propose-' 
 w. imperative clauses 595, 4. Ce.nslbat and 
 cfi,,yuU :3.x. ;3. 
 
 It is certain, how rendered 6!i?. n. t. 
 
 certe, as s\nd. ant. (posice.lenti of conces- 
 sive cl. 69-2, 1 : of concessive Si-cl. 731, 2 
 
 "rtus w. dat. 119, 112. Cei'tior, w. gen. 118, 
 109.-CV/-^um est, m<^auiug and construc- 
 
 tion 612, n. t.— Cerddrem facere, with de 
 rf2, .54. 
 
 ce:era (lem. sing.) as attr. of collective uouna 
 
 2.>3, n. 6 (see P. J), 
 cea, poetically i<nd in «Iver prose as comp. 
 C.M.J =a.v749. 8; =a>.if lb. 
 chairman, r.^nd.red by rector 164, n. 10. 
 circa, circum, about, n'ear, prejjs. w. ace. use 
 of 18. 431. Diff. irom pjoj)e.a/)ud, projtfer. 
 — rscuter verbs compounded w. circum be- 
 c.nne transitive «<;. 4;;3. 
 circumdare c.)n>tr. w. aliquem. aliqua re, or 
 ahoii aliquid 98. 48:3; 99. 48.5. 
 cis, citra, preps, w. ace, u.se 24, 438. 
 citius, w. force of potius 759, 9. 
 city. Diff. of civitas, nrl/s, and oppidum 53, 
 n. 66.— Names of cities, towns, etc., how 
 constr. 46 foil.— Clloquially names of vil- 
 las constr. like names of cities. 4.52, n. 21. 
 clam, semipreposiiioii, w. ahl. or ace. 114. 98. 
 clamore, w. shouts, used as adverbial obj. of 
 coincident action, with or without cmw 244, 
 3 ; 258. 2. ' 
 
 claudus w. abl. 120, 116. 
 Clauses, general theory of 4S0 foil. ; their 
 division 480. «ilO, and n. *.— Used w. fierce 
 of a Miijrle conj. 474, 6. Collocation of 
 clauses 477 foil. See Sentences, Coordina- 
 tion of clauses; OI>ject-clauses ; Subject- 
 clauses: At'ribut,-.cl.,nses ; Adinbial 
 clauses; and the special classes of clau.-es 
 (Hel., That-cl., M..dal cl. etc.) 
 coenare, may take an onj. of puice267. .32. 2. 
 coepisse, when used in pa-^s. voice 104, 80 
 
 \V. irenindial abl. after ab 195, 243. 
 cogere, cotstr. \v, transitive ace. and obj. 
 Inf. 491, 83 ; w. ut, or an obj. inC mi, 4. 
 cogitare, as verb of striving w. ut or ne 599, 
 2; also w. obj. inf. 590, 2.— Cof/itaba?7i, in 
 lettt-rs with ellip>is of its obj. inl. 359, K 
 Coincident action, one o( the relations of mo- 
 dality 245 f.)ll. Its function in the sentence 
 expj. 245, oBs.— Is either pr.'dicaiive (uc- 
 cessory predicate : see this article), or ob- 
 jective 21.'i, 555. — Expr. bv abls. with or 
 wiihout cum (.sine) 258, 556.— Clauses of 
 coincidenr action 6:i5. 32, 1. 
 collecting, Verbs of, constr. \v. in and ace. 
 :if^. itl. 
 
 colligere, constr. w. in and ace. 38, 07. 
 comitari, onstr. w. dat., or ace. 91. 475. 
 commencement- exercises, how to render 286 
 n. 94. 
 
 committere, constr. w. imperative clause .597, 
 
 8 ; w. pred. Ut-cl., used as circumlocuiion 
 
 6-28, :i\). 
 commodum est, it is expedient, convenient, 
 
 w. Mil)j inf. cl., not L't-cl. 611, 5. 
 commodum, w. force of adverbial particle 
 
 (- ju.-li, w. pill I). 317. 6. 
 commonere and commonefacere w. ace. of pers. 
 
 and i,'('ii. of thing !I9. -184. 
 communis w. gen. or dat. 119. IVi.— Commune 
 
 est w. bubj. Quod-cl., Inf. ci., or Ut-cl. 610, 
 
 4. 
 
 Comparatio compendiaria 144, n. 21. 
 Comparative ablative, w hen it may, may not^ 
 
780 
 
 INDKX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 781 
 
 or mu.t he nfcd 5n?t. of a Q"'^-?^»"^^ 
 ?;-.4 15 foil. ; i» Pl^^^ "• ""P^^»'^- i""^'- '' '' 
 copula 7Wi,fr\ 1. f . iptivo adjective?, 
 
 icticns «re compared w ca.h - »ur lb. 
 ComparaUve clauses («r 'n^. a m >> r, 
 
 ivh.tiou to ^>''^'f/i''"^''^r^;V division 
 Th.-ir collocation 4.8, 7. .">»o ,' r-io 
 in o Q m tative and quantitanve c s .4.^ 
 
 } -^Keds. generally «""''Ivt^: ^. ,i f\ 
 r-i ^^hiunc in coinp. el. «48, 5 . »»)■*, ^ . 
 ^^^o ?.. Vli ly.-Attraetion in conj). cl,. 
 
 (V*^? in re-ari o pred. when P-i-^"- P''^' ; '^ 
 ^ • r -kV /t • (ft) in reiranl torul)j., when 
 
 IVr',..,, f 'VZses^tll;^'".'."™'»' form of 
 
 vt g'nsq>ie with two .upcrluines (-ffu 
 ...//<«) 751. 5. i.:i._. tVij.ir differ- 
 
 '5^ i introduced hy V-^'^'f; ^^s^'u^n ^* 
 com,.. tiuan,-elanseH .o(), 3 . .• -, 51 ' • 
 Comparative' Quum-c ause3 Uy n .^^^ ^-J- 
 
 i;:i^;;r \.iK/hv ti;^^^ 
 
 relations »^( .' rally optii'uaHi.) 1.3. 
 Omi^Mon of the commou predicate in lut 
 
 ^^ '''^l-t lirith how rendered 704, 14, n. 4. ^ 
 compared witH, now re.m inyam qui. 
 
 Comparison of depend nt clau es iq a y^^^^ 
 
 y,/«m W.^_9'/« / V^ '"^ V "^; „ j,iV..n or 
 
 etc.) .59, 11. ^1- Y ■/. _(M „f Inf. clau.>e8 
 = too much to »01, 5;- ^i , ' ,p X jnu-t be 
 7.i0, B. ^Vr^^S^ ^:?; , 'ut ciauieV7.1, 
 in comp. Mhl '/V'^.m.-- En.d. 'too nuuh 
 
 V <.>««";,;''', rVhW-rcc of romp. 
 
 Onat;i:clal>s without .t Ib.-U/) of U-m- 
 
 (sul.iunc. us.d in thein 7t.l. A.- / ) <»» J^ 
 not w. obj. inf. or Ut-cl. bOi, n. . 
 
 complere aHqmd iaHqvem) aJiqu^ re 99, 485. 
 r'"-l.? --l^^-!^d w. con generally 
 
 corciin-to it« "^'antng 5W, , jv- fl»^- 
 
 per., and i">P':i?^';;V,;^,ir cU'ia i-run- 
 in good prose 59«, 0, w. paruci^n» ^ 
 
 dive US 1T8. ^^^ go- 2, 
 
 concerning the fact tnai - Jfly „'' 
 
 ry,/«//K/./fl;/», c.Mley "i»y ^^ ^^^^^^. ^j 
 &,;^';Kh;^'S;.^o-f«^c.n.ry>art.c^ 
 
 perativesett. .jub n^^^^^^^ ,o„c. cj. 
 
 S^!'^eSJ!o^,V-7-;;-;^;f^-- 
 
 Concessive («''''^'>^''V1 hf n - eul^^r = ^/fem- 
 iiiioroDercond.cl. (.^t l)eiiig tiinti c 
 
 ',• .r L .A^i) : their "^e »nd niood^ .il, 1. 
 
 'i'h..ir«vnd ant. (postoedents) ,.i\, ''• ^*^f] 
 
 nvi oonce-ive ii-cl.take.i .o..,not ym, 
 
 h.^),nissu.nofpred.(^t^o« .a).^J^^ 
 
 ciiine •«», 4M. inc y j , j^j,q 
 
 '*'•'■!!.'= ij'''S "-t" ;*.d™.. ,me of a 
 
 i.':;;i;„f'cv,mc'- =.;;,««-. »'''•<''■'*<''"' 
 
 Kclativecond. cl.).-l-qm^^^ 
 
 caiiy ad.ied to ^7^i;:,-;';;^:,;;'^\n:-Fom 
 
 dinatiun of cond. elauf» s .-iu 1 • _ 
 
 of pred. if th«;sis is »"/" •/j^' ^%l i* „, 
 Collocation ot coud. ^^- f, .f' ;\t,,Vi\ cond. 
 
 Cai;«; "comparisoti of cond. clauses' 
 and the artirlen beh>w Pefinl- 
 
 Conditional clauses of do'ibUul reahtj. ^ ^^^^^ 
 tion and nature «01, i- a^""" 
 
 and cl. regularly ind. 701, 44 ; 702 foil. ; 
 711, 15. For subjunc. see * Snlijuiictive in 
 cond. cl.'— Tense of thesis and cl. 70*2 roll. 
 Negative cond. cl. of doubtf. real, (ai i}On^ 
 nUi. or «i.^) 704 foil.— Peculiarities of in- 
 definiie cond. periods 711, 15 foil.— Idio- 
 matic ellipsis of the-is if referring to past 
 time (si - in the event tii.il) 718, 20, A foil. 
 Conditional clauses of doubtless reality. Deti- 
 idiion and nature 701, "2. — Mood always 
 ind. : neirative els. introduced by H von, 
 not wjvj 715, 45.— Intjtauccs when they are 
 n>«d 71»). oHs. 'i. 
 
 Conditicnal clauses of non-reality, 7)7 foil. 
 J)etlnition and moods (thesis and hypothe- 
 sis) 717. 4(>. See also ' Hvpotlu'tieal peri- 
 o(ls.' Diff. from other cond. cl. 717, 1.— 
 Different conception in Latin and English 
 71H. 2. — Xciiative cond. cl. of non-real, in- 
 troduced by nisi, ni, or n non with no as- 
 signable diff. 718. 3.— General rule on their 
 moods 719, 5. — If both preds. refer to time 
 pres.. generally both pteds. in imp. siil)- 
 junc. 720, fi ; if to the fiit., the cl. generally 
 in imp. Biibjunc. of periphrast. fur. 720, 7.— 
 Instances in which pres. eubjunc. must, 
 may, or may not be used 721. 9-15. Pres. 
 ind. in surirperiods 724, 15.— If both preds. 
 refer to the past, generally in plup. ^^ub- 
 junc. 724, 1(5. Use of imp. pubjnnc. in its 
 l>lace 724, 17-20.— Tense and mood if one 
 pred. ref. to pres., and the other to past 
 72»), 21 foil.— For use of ind. se«? 'Indica- 
 tive in iiypothetical periods,'— Hypotheti- 
 cal cl. oileii contained by implication in 
 members of the sent. 784, 4. or supplied 
 without such implicali«)n 7-U), 8. 
 
 condonare. w. dat. 88. Different meanings 
 Ns. n. 5. 
 
 conducere, to hire, w. participial gerundive 
 1 1>^, 178 ; w. obj. of price 2«i(). 2. 
 
 conferre, constr. w. ad 14, 11.— ^'e conferre w. 
 a< c. after in 38. 67. 
 
 confestim, adv. of time 225, 11. 
 
 confidere w. dat. 88 ; w. abl. 93, 479; 88, n. 3. 
 
 congregare w. a<'c. after in 38. <i7. 
 
 coag-uebant and co/if/rinr'fnf 338, 7. 
 
 congmenter w. dat. 114, 98. 
 
 congruit, impersonally used as verb of hap- 
 pi nuiiT w'. subj. Ut-cl. <)li>, 3. 
 
 Corjunctions. For coord, conjs. see 'CoOr- 
 dinaiioii of clauses' and P. I.— Subordi- 
 natini; conjs. which are u<v<\ to introduce 
 tin; different class -s «d' clauses 482, 3. 
 What ('(mj-i. may l>e used to introduce abls. 
 abs. 173. 2 (see .\bl;it. abs.). Collocation 
 of conjs. 4TU. 10. (ien- rally not repeated 
 when <'o5rdii.ate clauses are dej). on the 
 same subordinating c^njs. 475. A. 
 
 conscius w. sen. 118. 109; w. dat. 118, 110; 
 w. L'i'i-nndi:tl <;e!i. Itil, "JOT. 
 
 Consecution and Conversion of tenses of the 
 subjunctive. Law of C()n>^«^ution 414 foil. 
 Diff. b. 'tween tenses of pres. consecution 
 and pret. consecution 414, 003. Diff. be- 
 tween the two tenses belouiring to either 
 kind ol'cousec. lb. Examples illustrating 
 
 the law of consec, 415 foil.— Consecution 
 if the governing pred. is non-finite (part., 
 inf., L'erundial, supine, adj., noun) 410, 92; 
 417 foil.; 418, OBs. 1 and note t: 419 a; 
 420, ft and c— Instances in which the law 
 of consec. must, may, or may not be set 
 aside (logical tenses; see these) 422 foil.; 
 424, 91. Tense of i)otential subjunc. in 
 dep cl, 42:3, 3.— Tense of subjunc. deter- 
 mine! by a governing pred. understood 
 424, 4.— Law of consec. must yield to pro- 
 hibitory gram, laws 425, 1.— Con<ec. when 
 princ. PUET. pred. implies a pres. 427, a, 
 ft and c— Pret. final clauses, and epistolary 
 pert", and imp. always require pret. consec. 
 429, 1-3.— Perf. subjunc. dep. on another 
 perf. subjunc. by attraction 4.30, 7.— Con- 
 .sec. when princ. pred. is hypothetical 4;i0, 
 8 ; 431, 9.— Consec. in comp. Qunm-cl. 431, 
 10 ; in moda! Ut and Quin-ci. 4:i3 foil.— No 
 plup. subjunc. in modal Ut-cl. 435. 3. Perf. 
 subjunc. used in modal Ut-cl. 435,4. Imp. 
 subjunc. in the same 430, 5 : 44U, 12. Pres. 
 subjunc. 430, 0. Errors of «rrauimarians 
 4:i6, 7. Rare occurrence of perf. pui)junc. 
 in clauses of manner, coincident, and 
 suBsEQUKNT action 437, 8, A ; 439. C— 
 Tense of subjunc. optional in cl. of inteiis. 
 4.38, J^.— Perf. subjunc. in rel. cl. w. force 
 of modal Ut-cl. 439, 9 ; in Quin-d. 440, 10. 
 —Equality of tenses in certain modal 
 clauses 440. 11.— Application of law of 
 consec. to dep. hypothetical periods 442, 
 2-444, 4.— Imp. subjunc. dep, on nou-pret. 
 preds. 445, 0; 440, 7.— Conversion of the 
 two fut. tenses if the pred. requires sub- 
 junc. 447 loll. : 1) by method of ordinary 
 tenses 448, 97 foil. ; '2) by method of peri- 
 phrastic tut. tenses 448, 98 foil. See the 
 articles future-present and Future-pevm 
 
 /ect.— Consec. if governing pred. is a con- 
 verted fut. perf. 4.54, 5.— Consec. applied 
 to periphrastic gerundials 143, 109. 
 
 Consecutive clauses, 0;i5, 32, 1. 
 
 consensus est, w. suly. Ut-cl. 613, 3. 
 
 consentaneum est w. Ut-cl., or Inf. cl. 610, 4. 
 
 consequens est, as impers. pred., how constr. 
 02.3, 4. 
 
 consequi, constr. w. That-d. ; see impefrare. 
 
 considering, parenthetically used, rendered 
 by paniitheticjl relative cl. 519, D. "Con- 
 nderiiig that ' by quando «587, 13. 
 
 consilium in abl. denotes purpose 283, 560 ; 
 2S3. 1. 
 
 consolitio est, w. subj. Qnod-cl. 614, 9. 
 
 constanter, adv.. w. dat. 114, 98. 
 
 constare, to abide by, w. abl. after in 95, 58; 
 con^tare, to consist, w. abl. ; more fre- 
 quently w. de, ex, in 95, 58; w. gerundial 
 abl. after ex 197, 740. Constare. to cost, 
 w. abl. 94, 479; takes an <»bj. of price 267, 
 4. Constat, it is known, w. dat. 89 ; w. 
 inter 89, n. 5 : w. subj. Inf. cl. along w. 
 dat. or inter 015. 3. 
 
 constituere, constr. like decernere (see this) '. 
 ciiiistr. like iHillicZri 59.">, 5. Constitutiis\ 
 w. gerundial after ad 192, 1. 
 
782 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 constitution of a State, ^9^^ t« '"^"^f f *5i"' 
 
 o7^_.-To Irume a constitution 4W), n. s^. 
 
 Construction ..f vorbs m foil. ; meuuin,' of 
 
 consuetudo, w.tli uitr. Ut-cl 6-25. C. jonsue 
 «ii^X ,uHl mcnsnlto. a. impcr». prcd. abl. 
 
 temporal, aiul ^""''^ • .^i;/^'^' ^/em^H, rule 
 32i>, 2; by fonip. tl;^:^^f\'*- J'','^l jn these 
 on the gram, forms 3-30, 5. Mooa lu u'^ 
 
 cl a30,Hloll. w. Biibj. Ft-cl. 
 
 contmgit w. dat. 89 , •"'' ''H' J"' ^^ ^ en». »;. 
 
 Ditf. from flm^/t/. lb. ^^ v at 1 b 
 completing pred. m «^>\ver Lat i . 
 
 ^rB;^dSc^nt'ofi<.m..jM;;^- 
 quality, followed by ac or quam (- diticr 
 
 ent from) 749. 1). . „q /.-. 
 
 coitrahere. cou.tr. w. ace. af er in 38, b.. 
 
 contrarius w. gon. or •»'' ;. V" \,\ , „1 615 12. 
 controversia non est, \v- ^"^^J- ^^"'^ ^'- ^^^' 
 convenienter \v dat. in, y- - 
 
 convincere, w. ate. oi pii- • «" « 
 
 o n. ;.l se t 471 7.-Cor)r.linate elausef 
 Llimn.' the or.n of coord, in.lep. ^ent 
 4?4 7 l".Tl -CLAUSES cannot he coord, b 
 
 Ordinations exi.r. ^^^. A^^'' ''if' JJ, V/ n 
 
 f'oArd- nation of condilionMl cl. .•>••. 4.t lou. 
 
 Co-Sate iuum-clauses; their u.e and mood 
 
 (^ordlnatSg' Relatives 520 folK Piflerenl 
 
 v-hen the period opens w a f'f^ZtJoll 
 -Quod as Kcneral c<»nnective of p no 3 
 open.n- with a protasis {quodU ^' -> ^-^' 
 4. See^'W del. neuter Kel. ad%s. lor 
 periodical coordination o21,d. 
 
 Cupula. Hoinetiines '^.^--i^'Jlcoifull ibT^ 
 in numl)er «4, !■>. D».ec«*c. '-"i 
 
 refuted 480. n. t. ,, «r ^m 
 coram, KMi.iprep. w. «J^ •,,^';,^l- j^ gramma- 
 Correlatives, a iipcless term of tiic gnimu. 
 
 cJiil^ii'denoUn. interest in an action ; 
 triioSirilS^SSSri'TJeoet one's 
 cJ^:yul;:w.S:-W; -rely w. abl. 115. 
 
 Jl'r« m f>irtitlveverb w. double ace. 101, A. 
 creareasfactltl^o^^^ ,„eaniMgs and 
 
 credere w. /!«;• ^, •,. J' „ 4. w. Inf. cl. 588,23. 
 constri>ctu>n!» ol S«, n. -*, «• i" 
 Lc;,./o. parenthetically "»^* '^'^ '^ ' 1'^ 
 
 crimen graie est, it.i« a .erious charge , w. 
 t;ubj. inf. el. (»13,2. 
 
 criminari, constr., see a^'n/.^Ir^. 
 
 cnminidare(Hb.tractdat. 2o7-^^^^ 
 
 SrT flSTipr V2I; 121. Cruc/e/. est w. 
 c;b;:^c^i^,^^i;-^henusedin.t.of.^^^ 
 
 Cobic meMaw. 1'"« '^^''^]'- ^^f'- ,\?r■ 
 ™S^rlU:ract,,a,«.f^,«\"-"- 
 cuius a um. used as rei. 4'X), 4 , ■*•"• ^• 
 cuSs're'i causa, as nms.il rel. form 527, d. 
 
 1 cujusmodi, use of *•» 'j '^;,^ ^^ 44«. Combined 
 cum, prep. w. abl., use ni«, ^,f rum in 
 
 w. .vim'// and ?//^a •^'^' oii V. ;,, the rela- 
 the relation of mannkk 214. 5 . in tiic rem 
 !ion ..f roiNr.PKNT action 2.J, foil. 
 
 •^^'^'r w"dal ^In-'iee^inMfff^n'nt meaninj; 
 
 'T!-^- ■ win cl . 5S8. n. Cupne icoucu- 
 
 ^l;;l;;:;w--<d;^inf.,Inf^.l.,.^..,ormere 
 
 cS^wf;StKll8:\i;r\v.ger«naiaUen. 
 thing done) 148, 1»8. 
 
 Damaare w, ao<-. of p.TJ.. and s"!»- "t crlmo 
 
 "' ' ,r,, o 1J^ 178 Dai-p (oneram etc.) w. 
 Sllrulluul daulVI:-m I>\.re eplMa,n ai 
 
 14, n. 1. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 783 
 
 Dates of the month, how oxpr. 227, 3 and 4. ; 
 in abi. of the day 228, 2 ; by prep, ad 228. 
 3. In letters, as regards tense Kdedi, not 
 dahain) ;i57. c ; 361», 1 ; in regard to place, 
 abl., not gen. 228. 4. 
 
 Dative, as coinijieiing obj. of vejibs 87, 474 
 loll. : iTOveriied by velle and facfre 92, 476; 
 whi-n used as i)ers«»nal olij. i)f i/fij/erd/e 
 along w. impcrativL- eluu^e fj9G, H. JuOere 
 w. dat. i)o!itelas^ical 596, n. 1| ; dep. on ]}tr- 
 mittete, coiniidittn. coiicedrre along w. im- 
 perative clause .'J97, 8.— Dative as obj. of 
 AUJs. 118. 500.— Dat. of the interes^ted per- 
 son 90,47; cxpl. 91, 48.— ^<»sse8^ive dat. 
 91, 48, 1 (see Predicate </a/u-(?».— Ethical 
 dative 91, 48, 2.— W. interjeciious 91, 48, 3. 
 —Dat. w. r«-fert 274, 6.— Dat. in the form 
 of participles referring to person.s in gen- 
 eral 91, 48, 4. — Accessory pred. in dat. 255, 
 21 a lid 2,5. 
 
 datum ferre aliquid (accessory pred,), mean- 
 iui; of 251, 4. 
 
 de, from, prep. w. abl. ; use and diff. from 
 ah and ex 25 foil. £>, not de^ used in re- 
 spect to time, in the ni' aniiiir 'from' 29, 
 4V2.—/Je as equivalent of i)ariiiive gen. 30, 
 443,— Z>€ denoting material 30, 2. — De equo 
 j)Ufjnate 31, d.—De = concerninji: 32, 445. — 
 Idioms with de 32, 55. W. gerundiai abl. 
 196, 542 ; w. participial reversed phrase 199, 
 6; de causa 279, M.—Ue w. Quod-cl. {^de to 
 quod) mi, 2. 
 
 debellato. impers. prod. abl. 186. 234. 
 
 debere, difl". Ironi other verbs expressinc: nc- 
 ccs.Kity 140. 163. In the iiid. of a pret. 
 tense used h\ pothetically 127, 24 loll. In 
 flit., how to render ^i")!, i. 
 
 decedere w. ai)l. 93, 4T9 ; w. gerundiai abl. 
 aft.-r (//> 19.-), 243. 
 
 decere, in the ind. of a pret. tense hypothet- 
 ieally used 727. 24. Decet w. tiubj". Inf. cl. 
 or subj Inf. 620, 1; w. lo-ical subject iu 
 ace. 107, IM). 
 
 decernere, constr. 1) w. imperative cl. ; 2) w. 
 gerundiai Inf. el. ; ,3) \v. obj. inf.; 4) w. 
 ordinary Inf. cl. in the meaning ' to judge ' 
 5!).-). 5. 
 
 decidere to compromise, w. obj. of value and 
 |)rice 266. 2. 
 
 Declarative clauses 4S0. 610. 
 
 declarare, as lac li live verb w. double ace. 
 101, A, 
 
 decunx = five sixths ; 116, 105. 
 
 Deductio ad absurdum, by pred. in fut. 3.51, B. 
 
 de?sse with «lat. 89; w. irerundial dat. 163, 
 2i)9. J)ee.<se ad i-tf m facie/tdam, (WSernni 
 from dees^e rei facieudie 189, 2. Sibi non 
 df(-s\s'e. constr. w. quiii 6u3, 5. 
 
 defendere, w. ah 2\i. 4S. 
 
 defending, Verbs of, constr. w. ab 29, 48. 
 
 deferre w. ad or dat. 14, 11, 
 
 defcere w. ace. 85, 39 ; w. ab 29, 48. 
 
 defiLire aliquid aliqua re lOt^ 485. 
 
 definitio, w. aitr. Ut-cl. 625. D. 
 
 deincepe, adv. of lime ; derivation 225 11. 
 
 deinde, then ; diff. from turn and iiifle 22-3, 3. 
 
 delectat, impersonally used w. 6ubj.inf.G17,8. 
 
 deligere w. double dat. 90, 65 ; w. participial 
 i:erundive 148, 178. 
 
 demanding, Verbs of, constr. w. ah 28, 48. 
 
 demere, w. ace. of the thing, ahd dat. of 
 pers. {— from) 97, 68. 
 
 demoliri, error about its meaning in the lex- 
 icons, corrected 312, n. 6. 
 
 Demonstrative adjectives in the neuter, as 
 pviid. ant. of iSubj. and completing Obj. 
 cl. 492, 1. Hepiaced by ea 7es lb.; replaced 
 by .sic and ila lb. 
 
 denarius, value of 268. 5. 
 
 denique, ditT. from tandem and postrhno 223, 
 5. 
 
 denuo, again; diff. from iterum and rursus 
 224, 6; deriv. 275, 11, 
 
 to depend on, rendered by pendere ex 29, 48. 
 
 Dependent sentences 478, 2 ; see Clauses. — Dk- 
 I'KNUKNT «^LKsTioMs, See Interrogative 
 Clauses. 
 
 Deponents, NVhat forms have passive mean- 
 ing 140, 161 ; deponent participles used 
 passively 172, 4. 
 
 deposcere, w. participial jrerundive 148, 178. 
 
 deprecari, w. tie : non deprecdri, w. quin or 
 q'/oniinus, 602, n. **. 
 
 desinere, to cease, when used in pass, voice 
 104. 80. 
 
 desistere, w. abl. 94, 479; w. de 29, obs. 48. 
 
 desisting, \'erb8 of, constr. w. ab, or a mere 
 abl. 29, 48. 
 
 desperare, w. dat., ace, or de 91, 47.5, n, 3. 
 
 destinare, w. gerundiai dat. 163, 209; w. ge- 
 rundiai after ad 190. 2:i9, 1. 
 
 deterrere and absterrere w\ gerund'al abl. 
 after ab 1!»5, 243; deter/ ere w. obj. inf. 60:3, 
 n. 1|. As verb of hindering w. quo/ninus 
 i)v }ie 602, 5. 
 
 detrahere, w. ace, of thing and dat. of pers. 
 (= from) 97, 68. 
 
 deunx = eleven twelfths ; 116, 105. 
 
 dicere, w. inf. cl. 5!>4, 1 ; w. imperative cl. 
 li). In pass, generally takt-s noin. w. inf. 
 106.87; except ill perf. and plup. lOH, 88. 
 As factitive verb w. double ace. 102, B; 
 w. abstract dative {die7n alicui rei dicere) 
 96, iiri.—Dico quod sentio, or dico quid sen- 
 tiarn ? 393. — IficTham, as imp. of reference, 
 ()|jtional w. dlH 341, 3. 
 
 dicto audientem esse, w. dat. The conetruc- 
 tion expi. 87, n. 4. 
 
 dies w. gerundiai gen. 1.59, 3 : w. dat. {diem 
 colloqaio dicere) 257, 2.— Advs. derived 
 from dies 225, 11. Numeral nouns derived 
 from dies 226. 1. 
 
 difference. Verbs expressing difference 
 constr. w. ab 29, 48. 
 
 differre, constr. w. ab 29, A?,.—Differre, ex- 
 s/>ect~fre, cu/tcfnri, (duhildre. to hesitjite), 
 sibi dtesse . prattrtnittere, as verbs of delay- 
 ing and oniitting, constr. w. quin if con- 
 nected w. a nci^ation 604, 4. — Differebaty 
 ditf. from distulit ;3;38, 10. 
 
 difficilis. w. dat. 118, 112 ; w. II sup. 121, 121. 
 Difficile est, w. subj. That-cl, 609, n. t. 
 
 diffiiiere, w. dat. 88, n. 3. 
 
 digitus, as measure unit 115, 101. 
 
784: 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 785 
 
 ••"rely w. obj i.f. \^^^:J}ll^^,^, w. ut lb. 
 
 dimicare, us verb of Btrnin^. 
 
 dimidiatus, m^*^"*"? "[' k, .,,tor ab 105, 243. 
 
 ili'^OP-C %V. lilt. CI. Oob, ^7. ^V *- ^ o^r» f,,ll • 
 
 „1,1 .,.ir 7i*l"ll. ^f^ jfi^rfpat. impcr... 
 *ll"l?S";Vn,''ern4,.,vocl.; «»• <ii^"pat< 
 
 dt'eniS »; .» 39,48 <aV.ow.;;m= from).- 
 
 /'l"-.vv ^7, 27 n. 2; different construc- 
 distare vv, ao -*•, ';..,: '4 
 
 distinguished for -,{^Xt ' eca-c^ 22:), 11. 
 diu adv. -' ^^^^^nii^l^ 14S. 178. 
 d videre, w. P;^'^^'^^' ",L, ki,. ace 100, 48«) ; 
 
 dear.., = three .^."..|.,|;'>^W;',„,, „3 , 
 dolere, >v. ace., ^)^- .. j.^i 5.H). Formood 
 
 tr„od P'-'>^e in^, II- ^ ^ntod like name 
 
 *rct-tr4r4! ' tX in *."i W-" "'- 
 
 *r'^,fp"S^'"- --•»*>-- ''■'''"'''• 
 
 of ihin^ 98, 483. ^nnirvni) temporal 
 
 donee, (an;;;!; ,„Si a1?d mood of D.^nee- 
 
 eonj. V t[m S 21-2.3. nonec ^ as 
 
 clauses ( = ^7 ^.^^/Ke ' oet^ and silver 
 
 Quill-el. 62o, -'*• ^ •„..,_ „1 QQo a. Non 
 
 in the meanin-r ^^!, ^^V IJ' f ordmiuy or 
 cl. or ohj. u.f. 5^i> .. y^^^; i, .;. 44(^^3. 
 pcMiph.a.tic ]:;^\^J^^^^^c\. :m. a. 
 
 ofpred,acc 02 .0. ^J .''^^\^^^^ and 
 fstcemint;, takes an oi>j. 
 
 di;du8,'J^' libl., as cireumlocution, to ex- 
 
 prC'!-8 >10T1VK Hi». Il3- 
 
 l;'™;.rie',ipS l^v.'uixcd to negation, 
 
 .i ; .^20, .i , f-l^t: ]f ' vf,,od ill snbobliqno 
 Duin-el. t..^, 3 l)in n v 
 
 l.os(. AS.' Mo..d, inrf. or 'S'',' fnV ■ ".1,1 
 g.„.Tany a.'r.ol.Mr >v,,h pnn. t m.. . c_ .^ 
 
 Li;s'T5^[/o7:inriiiim'.nw;rr."d 
 
 ;il'!;.i^il'4■-«='^''«.»-;?'r;n't"^• 
 
 THAT), w. snhjiine. <>«»'J'^-,, ^ 
 
 d;l;^^^J^i^;.;fl;i^inl;V^Hetn^ 
 
 pn.vi.led tl»at ' ; w. ^"'^J""^", !; .'rt^A; ;• or 
 during. Kn.d. r-^^'^JV^^V^i^X 
 
 1 ; by pres. abl, f^--J^;f 
 dux, w. {;erundial ;,'en. 1j.», -«• 
 
 E, prep., pee fX 
 
 \ East = ontns .<o/. 222, n. .5. ^ 
 ea, fonrtli U.eauvc rase 216 , -Jl». <•• 
 
 ::f-^;;^K?:;^.s;;c^ra^!:-5;-..i^ 
 
 1 Eetiesi» in ."t.-rropiuv.; «nd o.hcr clau.ea 
 edictum, w.attr. >:^-,-'>it '.r'''.;./ 102 1 
 
 efficiens w. ^-en. 117, 1(>H. 
 ;|rin^.S-I^e^waysw.abl.93,54; 
 
 egr'^df'w. abl. 04.479; used in perf. part. 
 
 as ruED. ABi.. 172. 3. „-,.^738 6. 
 
 either... or, ^'^'^^^-'J-it ' ca^^es. .1^/512, C. 
 ejus rei..ei rei, as "' •4U« f a^cs mi ,^^^ 
 
 ejusmodi - sucb ; n>' 2»1. 4 a ^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 1,1 Modal clanHts 4,i., . . 4^i, ^ A/ 
 
 Ellipsis. General principle with respect to 
 the ussuminK of ellipses to explain Latin 
 con^'tl•llction8 120, 11. 1.— Ellipsis of e.tse as 
 aii.\iliary 3(r), 571, obs.— Ell. (»f pred. and 
 oihrr tt-rms in rel. el. 5:K), 1 foil.— Ell. of 
 liypotlii-tieal clauses 73«, 8; of a hypotheti- 
 cal thesis 7«2. F; 730, 1 and 2. 
 
 eloquens, w. ^'ermidial after ad 192, 5, 
 
 emere, w. a* or c/e ; dilf. between both 28, 
 n. 2. W. an ohj. of price 26«, 2 ; 94, 479. 
 
 enemy, Eiiirl. collect, noun ; in Latin n^ore 
 frequently in plur. {limtes) than sing. 52, 
 n. 46. 
 
 to enter (on the books) = referre 164, n. 20-. 
 
 eo, 1) abl. of is (id) ; 2) abl. of diff. ; 3) third 
 locative case -216 ; 4) abl. of means 218, 
 (' ; 278. 4 ; 5) adv. «>f cause or purpose 281, 
 5 and 7 : 283, 5r.6 ; 28^1, 3. DitT. Ironi prgo, 
 lArr/"", i(;if>tr 281, 6.— .\s ubl. of ditf. it 
 stands brfore comparatives, e8j>ecially in 
 the const I net ion eo ... qiio\= the. .. .flu) 
 2'14, 3 ; 751, 5. and eo ina'ps quod 60<), 4, 1 ; 
 6S4, T).—Eo as synd. ant. of Qiiod-cl. 6S3, 3 ; 
 of consecutive clauses 4.'i">, 2: of final cl. 
 lb.— ^ cohkUio, ed ?'a/idne, as synd. ant. of 
 liiial Clauses 135, 2: 283, 1. 
 
 eousque, compound local adv., expl. 217, 8; 
 adv. of time 'i-ii. 9. 
 
 Epistolary tenses 3.')6 foil. In what instances 
 they are used, and what tenses 356, 77. 
 When ordinary tenses must be used in 
 letters a")8, 3, 4. When they became ob- 
 polete 3(K), 3. 
 
 erga, prep. w. ace. ; use, and diff. from 
 adversus and contra 15, 16; 41, 72. Collo- 
 c ition of erga 25. 44. 
 
 ergo, semipreposition, w. gen. 114, 98. Der- 
 ivation (= e recjo) lb. 
 
 eripere.w. ace. of thins and dat. of pers. 97,68. 
 
 erumpere w. abl. 94, 479. 
 
 esse, i)cciirs 1; as AUxiLiAnr of tense (its 
 ellipsis 305, .571, ons.).— 2) As copl'la, w. 
 pred. nom. 73; \v. pred trcn. 77; w pred. 
 dat. 81 ; w. pred. abl. 80, 27 ; w. geruiuliiil 
 <ren. 161, 208 ; w. genindial dat. KiS, 212 
 (^.sw. as copula, used iiypothetically in the 
 ii!(). 727, 25 fin).— 3) .As ordinary xeuteu 
 VEhB. takinj; adverbial and pre'pt>sitioiial 
 objects, {a) as verb of state ami existence 
 = * to l)e there ' (see s'/nt f/ui). Here beloiitr 
 the expres-ioii!* et>t q'lod, est cut\ ed qunm 
 487, 3 ; ed uf, prope est ut 487. 2 ; also the 
 COMPOUNDS (tftsse, which take completin»; 
 objs. in flat. 89.— (A) As a verb of situation 
 (= sifi/m esse}, takiiiir ace. or abl. of place 
 220, 4.— (c) Asa verb of iiiteie-t and worth, 
 constr. w. <;en. (sometimes abl.) of price 
 and value 267. 4 ; 271. 2; 273. 1. 
 
 et ipse, ~ lik'wi-e. used as accessory predi- 
 c itf 2.52, 9. Difl'. from idem = likewise lb. 
 
 etiam (for^/jam, as particle, see P. 1). Et'iam 
 afque etinvi, used in place ol valde 262,6. 
 Etiatn qwim — even when. w. ind. 645, 2 ; 
 =.f/i(n/i.<i w. suitjujc. 732, 4.* 
 
 etiamnum. use of, 222, n. §. 
 
 Etiamsi-clauses, beloni; to the indef. conces- 
 Bive cl. 692, 624. Their relation to condi- 
 
 ' tional and Etsi-clauses 693, 2 ; their moods 
 6!».3, 3. Etiamsi, sometimes = ei^i 693, 2. 
 Not used by Caisar 693, 3. 
 
 etiamtum (etiamtunc), use, 222, n. § ; w. imp. 
 316, 1. Diff. from adhuc lb. 
 
 Etsi-clauses, generally w. ind. 698, 13. Sub- 
 juiic. in Eisi-cl. lb. Etsi, sometimes = 
 e/iamA lb. W. participial construction 
 699, 14 ; 173, 2; as coord, conj. 699, 5; 699, 
 n. t. 
 
 evadere w pred. nom. 73, 462. 
 
 even if, rendered etiamsi 692, 624 foil. ; hyvi 
 695, 8 ; Jtot even if, by ne si., .quident. 732. 2. 
 
 evenire w. dat. 89. Eceidt, impels, w. dat. 
 107. 90; w. bubj. Ut-cl. or Quod-cl. 619, 4. 
 Diff. from acridit etc. lb. 
 
 ever since, as prepositional combination, = 
 inde ab 3i», 442 ; ever since that day, ex hoc 
 die .30, 49 ; as adverbial expression, = ex 
 (a^t) eo tempore 319. 4; as conjunct, (ever 
 since the time that) =ex quo (with or with- 
 out tempore) 526, d; also by postquam 6tK}, 
 2; (5(34,7 foil. 
 
 evincere, constr. w. Ut-cl., see vincere. 
 
 ex, prep. w. abl., use. and diff. from de and 
 at) 25 foil. Ex omitted Uoco cedere, sendtu 
 vwrere etc.) 27, n. 1 ; before names of cities 
 47 foil,— A> = be^'inning from, 29, 442 ; 
 equivalent of partitive iren. 30, 443; de- 
 noting material 30. i.—Ex itinere scfi,bere 
 etc. 31, 3 —Denoting chan^'e 31, 444; = 
 'after' 31, 52; = 'according to' 31, 2. W. 
 gerundlal abl. 197, 246; w. participial re- 
 versed phrase 19«), 5; w. Quod-cl. (f-x eo 
 qnod) 6<)7, 'i.—Ex {ah) eo tempore w. perf. 
 or imp., difterent from Engl. 319, ^.—Ex 
 quo (tempore) = 'niter' 52(;. B; = * ever 
 since' 526, d. Ex quo replaced by ]x>st- 
 quam 6t»4. l.—Ex usu est, ex re est, e repu- 
 blicd est, impers. nse and construction of 
 these phras<'s 622, 5. 
 
 excedere, w. abl. 93, 479. 
 
 ezcellens, w. abl. 120, 116. 
 
 except, rv-ndered by »14 739, 3: except that 
 = pnettr id quod, fiisi quod (»07, 2. 
 
 excipere, w. ace. after in 38, «57. If = ' to 
 exempt from,' constr. w. ne or quominus 
 602. 5. 
 
 excitare, w. gcrundial after ad 190, 2.39, 1 ; 
 w. Tliat-cl. see /norere. 
 
 exciting, Veri)s of. constr. w, ad 41, 70. 
 
 excludere, w. gerundial abl. after ad 195, 243. 
 
 Exconsul, Expresident etc., how to express in 
 Lat. .32, n. 1. 
 
 excusatio, w. attr. (^nominus-cl. 625. D. 
 
 exhorting. Verbs of, eonstr. w. ad 21, 70. 
 
 exigere. w. participial gerund' ve 148. 174. 
 
 exiguus (= too small for) w. gerunciial dat. 
 1(;5. 2. 
 
 existimare w. Inf. cl 588.23; in the pass, 
 generally takes nom. w. inf. 106, 87; ex- 
 cept in perf and plui) 88. As factitive 
 verb. w. double ace. 102, C ; as verb of 
 esteeming w. tren. of value 272, 1. — Existi- 
 7/iaf)at and existimdrit 337. 2. 
 
 to expect w. That-cl., not by €Xsi)ectdr€^ but 
 sperdre 593, 8. 
 
786 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 787 
 
 expedit, w. Inf. cl. and dat.of the interested 
 expensum ferre (accessory prcd.) expl. 2;>4,4. 
 
 Nv. s„l,l. Inf. cl.r.l-i n. t. , 
 expugnare.w.Tl.af-cl.,s.en/r.m 
 
 roizativc cV not adnutti..- penphrastic 
 
 eSyarew.abl or./.03 470^^^^^ 
 
 extcmplo, adv. of time, expl. -^-^/'v,^ ^ ,, 
 
 Dirt, from .«'A(f .Jh, «».i. ^""•.I'^-.V* J, 1. 
 Qnam-el. {fxfra quam si) .b4, 14, no. d, 
 
 7:V> 8 no. ti- 
 extremum est. w. Ut-cl. 113 1 . 
 
 exuerc, fitluT w. ace. of tin n? 
 m-rV. or ace, of pers. and uhl. 
 
 m ; 98, 483. 
 
 F pvmbol of the nncia IK"., 10r> FS., symbol 
 Vtlu'^eptunx 110, 105. FZ., symbol of 
 
 £r:;t^:^I^!p'?21,121;w.Bubj.Inr,or 
 f:;u;iXw'J^Vlnf.cl.,Ut-cl.,orsubj. 
 
 fivIrJ'w: dat. 89; w. ;>/.., not ^"«f^J^ (;• 
 favor, ' to do somebody a favor,' how e:.pi. 
 in Lat. 28-3, n. 12. _ .,.- 
 
 fecundus w. -en. 118, 109: w. abl. 119, 116. 
 felix w. <renindial dat. Ifv), 2. 
 ferox w -'.-rundial after ad 192, 5. 
 f Se (m^V;./., o'rfve.orarU.r ^'tcV more f e 
 cnilv w. Inf. el. than ^v.|lu<Hl 590. ^^r 
 
 qui 
 
 ♦.-In 
 
 re 
 the 
 
 and dat. of 
 of Ihiu': 97; 
 
 of the Hep 
 tS'^;c'.:'r;.V:.rVi'n.''l-^.- point, of the com. 
 
 ticlirnrmcuK/vorh «■ do„We ao.. 101, 
 
 ?;;cunlonXn45i..lO;|>2i30.-Sym;ps^ 
 of th. dit^Vreni si-nillcations and con^truc- 
 
 et'c = llinnot help doin,^' sonu-thin^' |UK 
 ?_^'ac, •suppo>e that,' w. InL d. 1.0 , 
 ;; ** Fac I/I. as circnmlocution of the 
 affirmative imperative 488, 10; , , .. 
 facilis w. dat. 11^ li2; w. -.«rundial dative 
 
 1 
 
 8Up 
 
 ^foJnlr Ut^^^^ ♦i0.5,2r.. lnt.odnr|Hl by 
 fnlrl or uf ■ dirt". l)etween them (.(I;), 1- 1'» 
 Ji;;o^;;f;ansitiveot,jec.s^2;mj^^ 
 
 I,f at.l. of means (eo quo'h <»0*'- V' " j"^^' 
 
 Hs ver1)nm imperandi 59(), n 
 
 mennin" Mo reoort ' takes nom. >\. im«- »> 
 
 pli^, except in- perf. and plup, 100, 8. and 
 
 fides, w. Attr. That-cl. 624. A, •i.-Fulevi ha- 
 
 fidere, w. dat. 8S ; w. abl. 88, n. 3 , J^, 4.». 
 
 \)\{\. from co'ijidere 88, n. .i. 
 fieri fee rV/c.rl Constr. w. Vrc<} l^(^n^ .3, 
 
 Fit, it happen» w. subj. Ut-cl. UiutrLut 
 
 Tinir ThAt clauses Syndetic ant. {eo, eo 
 
 «""• VM; I CcT'aT V I>ar ' 'h.liaa 
 I'omoletinir inai-ti. <»•)<, '• ■» •*■ . .., » 
 
 S Ut-cf. (•.:'>8, 3. Always ^^V^^^f 
 
 consecution if dep. on l»'^'^; } " .''.•.^^•'ioi 
 fingerc. as factitive verb, w. <1«'^'I »^^,.; ^"^' 
 
 A Flnnt - suppose, w. Inf. cl. <09, 1« . 
 fi^ w.Ci'rundial pen. l-'^./^--^'^^"?: 
 
 St. of t^ynd. ant. of llnal clause^ 2b.i, 500, 
 
 283. 1. 
 rinite clauses 4S0r,10 
 
 firmna w <'erun<lial dat. l'>o, '«• ^„,.„1 
 
 fiS Canr.ons in renderin- lhi8 numeral 
 
 into T-atin 290.x. inn i«w; • how con- 
 
 ai'gitiis'om est w ;"l;j^T"r. cl. 609, 
 
 abl. 118, lUo. 
 
 o 
 
 cilis w. dat. 11^ I'-f' ;;.:, =^;, V'lV ^ 2 • v H. Aairans. w. abl. 118, 
 ♦;-, 'I- w. eerundial after «u l.»^,.-*, "^^- "• ^°-..i 0-0 3, 
 ;,;,';.-121, 121. FaMe ut w. .ui.J. cl. 60.1, ^ a.m «t. -;-. '-, ^.„ 
 
 Factitive verbs, con:-i-i «'• ■' — ^ .^_ . 
 
 CoHstr. w. double ace. or uom. 101, 4^.7 , 
 
 w. pred. gen. 102. 7«. 
 facultas vv^ attr. Ut -J - 6|^,_^ ,.^ ^,, ^„,,;^ 
 
 fiu^U w. .nbj^ Inf. cl or TTt-cl. 612,6. 
 famaestw. eubj. Inf.cl .3 1. 
 famUiaris w. gen. or dut. 119, in. 
 
 ever. iHW'.-^' ^'Ki sliSsSiS)»" 
 
 Tfor a consi leration, ?Mr.'/H^i ^'-■^^?'^';;.^'^' 
 rm^T^ To have regard for, by gen. 144 n 
 Jf •^•^F.-r' w participials by gernndial 
 rron r,9 1- by participial gerundive 148, 
 
 '.^['cr'^r';';. i^:«c'(r.;r*e turP-e-or 557 
 
 (see P. I); by dquiOem 688, 14 ; by ^uipix 
 
 fo-as and forig. PifT. between them 219, n. t. 
 
 fore, forem etc. I'se of 1.30.140; l:i5, l.')0. 
 Wiih i.erf. parr. 1.37, I.50. Cireumloeution 
 hy fore >it 137, 151 : 487. b. Forem w. perf. 
 part. = perf. bit. subj. of the pass. 137, 1.52; 
 Jorein,a^ auxiliary in place of t-w^m 130, 
 140; in place of periphrastic fut. 451, 2. 
 
 Form adjectives (see P. I). Demonstrative 
 /orm-adj. as synd. ant. of different classes 
 of clau>es, see Syndetic anf^cedenU. As 
 synd. ant. of attr. modal Ut-cl. 493, 4. 
 Wh.it fonn-adjs. may be used as accessory 
 I)re(|s. o-)() foil. ; MS pred. abl. 185, 2. 
 
 forsitan, w. subjunc. 37t>, 1. 
 
 forte. 242. OBS. 
 
 fortuna w. gernndial <:en. 1.59. 3. 
 
 Tractions, h-nv cxpr. 110, 105. Symbols of 
 fraciioiis lb. 
 
 free speech (to demandUiowexpr.in Lat. 151,7, 
 freeing, VeiDs of. constr. w. ub 29, 48. 
 fretus \v. al>l. Ill), IKi. 
 
 from, Ivngl. prep., rendered by ah, de, f.r 25 
 loll ; ixfore names of cities 48.82; after 
 verbs of lakinir away by dat. 97, »i8. De- 
 noting time (from tne time that), inde ob 
 {>^et' iiid-). t.v (/)/o (si'o ex), po-^tqua/n <JGit. 
 42; r.04, 2 and 7; deiiotiii;^r cause, bv ob 
 and de; 30, 31; 279, 5<)5 ; bv partici'ples 
 {d'icfns etc.) 119. 115; l)y abl. 279. .505. 
 * From the lact that,' ex eo quod mi. 2. 
 'Different fro/n' = aUn-'i afque 74!). 9.— 
 From w. pa'rticipials (de>ist from liu'litinir. 
 etc.) I)y ohj inf. t»()4. 3 ; by quominus 004, 
 1 : by qt/in t»4, 4 ; 004. 6. 
 fnii ( perfrui). w. abl. 1)3, 479 and n. 9. Treat- 
 ed as transitive verb in reversed gerundive 
 plira-es 152. 188. 
 fmstra, 212. obs. 
 fugiens, w. ireii. 117. 108. 
 funditus. DilV from radicifus 242, obs. 
 fungi { i)firfinifii) w. abl. •.»3. 479 and n. 9. 
 'i'lcatedas tr.msitive in reversed gerundive 
 ]>h rases 152, 188. 
 furari, w. ace. of thing and dat. of pers. 
 
 (= from) 97, 08. 
 Future-perfect. When used as ordinary fu- 
 ture teii-^e (see Future tent^fs) 349 foil. ; w. 
 lorc^ of Eiiirl. fut. perf. 319, 1 ; w. force of 
 EiiL'I. fut. pres. 349, 2.— As potential fut. 
 350, 75 foil. : as imperative 350. 1.— As de- 
 pendt-nt future 35i foil.; rendered by Eiiirl. 
 pres. or perf. 354. 3. Form of the pred. of 
 its princ. sent. 3.55, 5. Convkhsion of fut. 
 pert, into an ordinary perC or plup. when 
 the clause must be in subjunc. 452, 98 foil, 
 (not by circumlocution w. 'futunnnsit uf 
 4.53, n. *). Cannot be converted if in pass, 
 4.53, 1. I'liU). subjunc. inst. of perf. sub- 
 junc. as coiiverted fut. perf. 454, 3.— Fut. 
 perf. in Antequam-cl. 008, 2; 609, 3; in 
 periods of c«)ntiii<rent action 330, 5; in 
 Quum-clauses (i40, 4; 047, 3.— %Vhen depo- 
 nent ftit. perf. takes the auxiliary futro, 
 3.50, 3. 
 
 Future-present (see Future tenses)^ >vhcn used 
 
 a? ordinary fut. tense 347, 73 foil. It? rela- 
 tion to the Engl, forms with 'will' and 
 ' shall ' 348, 1 foil. Potential fut. pres. 350, 
 7.5. 1 ; as imperative .350, 1 ; denoting con- 
 clusions 350. 2; of potential verbs (jx)s.<e 
 etc.) and gerundials 351, 3 : to express syl- 
 logisms 351, 4, A ; for deduct io ad absur- 
 dnm, in interrog. form a51, B; for rules 
 3.)2, B; fur opinions advanced 352. 6; in 
 polite statements 352, 7.— Conversion of 
 fut. pres. into ordinary pres. or imp. if the 
 cl. must be in subjunc. 448 foil. ; into per- 
 iphrastic fut. 449 foil. Different methods 
 of converting futures of the pass. 451, 3.— 
 Future-pres. not used in Antequam-ciaiises 
 in good prose 068. n. *.— Exceptionally used 
 after dutn = while 672, 2.— In clauses of 
 contin<rent action 330, 5.— In Si-clauses of 
 doubtful reality 702,2; 711, 15; 7l0, 14; 
 713, 18.-In Quum-ciauses 640. 4; 647, 3.— 
 Not n-^ed in Si-clauses of doubtless reality 
 71.5, 4.5. ^ 
 
 Future Tenses. Gram. division: Fut. pres.and 
 Int. perf. 347, 587 and obs.; Logical division: 
 Onlin.iry fut., potential fut.. dependent 
 fut. 347, 588. For periphrastic fut. see that 
 article. Hules on the choice between fut. 
 l)res. ;ind fur. perf. in indep. sent., and cl. 
 dep. on them 351, 1 ; 354, 2. Ordinary fut. 
 347 foil. : potential fut. 350 foil. ; dep. lut. 
 3,53 foil. Four combinations, according to 
 which either fut. pres. or fut. perf. must 
 be used as dep. fut. 353. 1. Dep. fut. in 
 cond. cl. of doubtful reality 703 A».~If the 
 clause requires subjunc, the dependent 
 fut. cannot be converted into periphrastic 
 subjunc. 4.50, C— Epistolary tenses in place 
 of fut. tenses 3,58, .5. 
 futunis, verb. adj. ofessie 125, 12S.—Fufi'irv/m 
 esse, use of i;3o, 1.50: as circumlocution, 
 wiih nt 134, 4; 137, 154. Faturum est ut, 
 use as finite pred. 1.%, n. 1 ; cannot be used 
 as circumlocution of fut. perf. 453, 1. Fu- 
 turumfuisae ut, use of, 137, 155. 
 
 Gaudere, w. abl., or de 93, 479, n. 8.— W. re- 
 versed participial phrase in abl. 173, 1 ; w. 
 Inf. cl. or w. Quod-cl. 590. For mood of 
 the Quod-cl. see laudare. 
 
 Genitive case. Pre», gkn. 77 foil. Gen, of 
 the possessor 77. 460 (diff. from dat. of the 
 l)ossessor 79, 24) ; impers. pred. gen. 77, 
 466. 2 (inst. of neuter pred. adj. 79, 2.5) ; 
 qualitative gen. 78, 31 (diff. from qualita- 
 tive abl. 80, 27); after factitive verbs 1U2, 
 76 ; eren. denoting the aire of men 2-36, 5.— 
 
 GeX. as COMPLETING OBJ. of VEKBS 92 foll.; 
 
 along w. a transitive obj. 99, 484.— Dep. on 
 ADjKCTivEs and participles 117, 499.— Ge.v. 
 of GEKUNDFALs 1.57 foil. ; of reversed par- 
 ticipial phrases 162, 527.— Gen. of place 
 (names of cities 47). Gen. of distance 
 220, 4 ; of ui.mension after nouns 115. 102; 
 after adjs. 11.5, 498; dep. on comparativea 
 denoting numerical excess 116, 103.— Attr. 
 pen. referring to the length of time-peri- 
 ODs 237, 7.— Accessory predicatb-okk. 
 
788 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 05H 3- 250, 26 and oB8. 1-««^; «^ff 7: 
 ^)'>, o , *•» '» . worth, ^(•«1 * » 
 
 and VAMK afti-r «'^^^^' " " .jves lnn^t bo 
 2,w 3 -What abs. Q«>""t''7'\V'^ ' o-,, •!> 
 
 fexnlnnaiionoi thi> form f«i' V ^ «en 
 genus, w. j: rundml iren. 15J, 3. 
 
 "'■i'" "■■■''' ''-'\','" "j;:;."".^ "^"y'<^- 
 
 cur (a) in ^^j;"; " , „,.,,1, „r n.-iiphniflic 
 
 (c)>i^ attrU.ut. s aiul obj^^ ^* »» *• . 
 '■""'7^; Vn n.lu - lee he arti.-le. un<h-r | 
 
 loll. .Mt tmiii " j-o »L.>2\ (ieruiub* 
 
 151, Ih.) or(.M" _ yj.ivin.' activt^ meamnj;, 
 «re i-'n>«'''- l»»"**- ,;^;' ,,7^^^.; thiir .xci'p- 
 
 {alc^ntransitive objero^ 5^1^^^^^ 
 ^,ram. «noma y o • •'^^^ '^^;„;:.Vruc. i.lu in 
 «rrtaiii connectloni* hU, •• 
 ,vith ot.j-. in an «'«"'Vl'A.mH n whi h L-e- 
 
 rnncUaU may '••• '';">;;j;:^J V' . .1.^1^ u. 
 
 191. Tia<»'»« of the- UM oi 1.« 
 
 iiubi,.. ami transitive obj^l.;' "• 
 
 /^----r^w'um^eUca..;how 
 ''"■'V K^''.ii?an<l*'5 Wh.t n-ttttlonnare 
 
 ---;^!^''r^:.*^|o/'a!;i;%i;r*n 
 r;;;r.^t.U;i;;:.'o„...e.Uui.w 
 
 v,ri.* nil «>7. A» prrti. u.niuvo w. loi» 
 ula Hi J. 'itlH. „ |.,,n I 
 
 ' ..,. iti,.<aL'<"' onU I 
 
 I XV irMi,-iliv.ol.J IM l»«l 
 
 ' 1 vlilrh It «H- 
 
 f- r«"i ' , oi.j Mi». «»••• 
 
 f„ll._,. ,»l «tHi . vf !• ' 
 
 \i. L>»n.f'"Ui 
 
 erain.rccltilK5..;...j...^-v-^;^ ;^J^;;^ 
 as accessory pred. 1.0, -ii-»,- "^-1^ ' com- 
 al.l ab-. or of a clan>-c 1 .0. 1 , «'» * ""» 
 f.Vrat abl 170, 2 : a» completins: obj. 1 .0. .J. 
 ^''S'tivviy «.'adverbial obMf n.»^"Uer, = 
 'without' w. partH ipiai l'-». i. ^- 
 T/EKUNi>.Au\rrKHrKEi.<).moN. ra^^ 
 
 :;'^co:::^^iSn.o;o.of^e:..de..otin.^x 
 
 IW 2:^«.), 2. Dep. <»n «njs. 1^2, ^40. A8 
 atir. l^M, ons. 'l)iff. from j:<rundm da • 
 ?'i?237; from p.rticipial «eru.nd e IW, 
 2m-//i >v. Kernnd.al ACCiB IW M. • 
 Force of ihi^ ronsttn. tum ^f'f.}\\^^^ 
 Diff. from LM-rui..iial.after m l.».i 2^2- 
 G.rundial abi.. after in VM /' • • "'''^^ '7 
 
 -^G^n.ndi^l ace «fier c>6 1%, 5 13 ; alter in- 
 
 nartieipial phrase m abl. 1 ..i. 1 , \n . ^iuou 
 dorlnf. cl.5U8,y; 5»8,n.^ 
 
 gloriosum est w. ^'«»^3^ y.'^^' *!.;„,! dial pen. 
 
 by /1/(7'^ TOO, lb. _y_ --J. . 
 
 gratia in abl., to denote P"''^"*'^ m ^;'; 
 
 1 -iKl 1 W tren., a»» hviionvm of projXer 
 
 con>tr. w. C^KKl-cl. r>08.9: '«rely ^^. l"f,^}- 
 
 gratificari, w dat. 8".». 
 
 «rati» {'/'K'ii"} 212, on?. „ 
 
 Iratulari. w. dat. W» ; w. Quod-cl. 598, 9 
 
 gVatu.. vv'dat lis 112 (rat"fne*t ^^. 
 ^iuod-cl. GIO, 4; w. Ltd. 612, b. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 789 
 
 gvrumlial pi*Kl. g«u. iws» »• 
 
 Habere, n^ factitive verb w. double a^c 10., 
 C ; more freciuenlly in pasn. w- • < " '« 
 ,,om. 102, oB«. <'onr.tr w V^o.<^ n rm- 
 t„,n} 102 7.'». Ah veib «)f cHteemJn--'. w. 
 old "inner value 272. 1. , W. pt-rf- P^f^^ 
 HHMcee-Kirv pred., b.lnuMbe origin «.I the 
 Su"marr-t«»'«ve'in nuHlern lan.;n«-e.» 
 5?^ k t'on-.r. w. a rel. el. In M.bju..c. 
 fw; / diramK «. obj. inf.. w. ge- 
 
 rund i w. iiiterro-Htive rl. 55., ^. 
 
 hftUlis »n<i inhabilii. w. dal. 118, 112; >*• 
 i.rrni d al all. I r/// 102.1. ,.«,.- qq o 
 
 h»b»tare in 'v take an obj. of price 2<i.. 3^ *• 
 Habitual actioot. how . xpr. UX '»• . 
 K»c |,.,nih l.»..uiv.' cane 21«.. "'f'**'"''. 
 
 , n.'mpound adv ..f 4th lor. ra8e «H, 8 , 
 
 had it not bwn for, h.»vv rend.ted . 18/; 
 ,htlf. how expr. ll'i. IIJK </n« A"// <^ 
 
 it happens that, expr. by different imper- 
 sonal^ 61S, A ; dill", between these G19, 9. 
 
 hand («o/n secus, synd. ant. of com par. cl. 
 of (jiia iry 745, 3. What conj^>. are u.sed 
 ufler it. Ih. 
 
 he who, liow rendered .509, 2: 514, 1. 
 
 help. * I cannot help' w. participial =fa- 
 cfre non jwsxnni qiiin; or noti posmni 
 quin ; or non jm^issioh non 005, 7. 
 
 hie. denionstr. adj. (r^ee P. I.); hh ?ynd. ant. 
 of rel. and modal cl. of (juality 4.J5, 2. 
 inc. adv. in first locative case 217, 4; as 
 temporal adv. = turn 22.3, 3. 
 
 hiding, verbs of, w. ace, alter in .38, r»7. 
 
 hinc, demonstr. adv. in second locative 
 case 217, 4 ; a.s temporal adv. = deinde 
 2-22. 9. 
 
 Historical present, pec Presient. Historical 
 INFINITIVE, sec Infinitive. Histokical im- 
 rEUFECT, s<'e Imp*-' ftct. Histok. 8UB.iunc- 
 TivE, see Suhjunct'ii'e in conditional cl. 
 
 honestus, \v. «reruudial after ad lt>2, 5; w. 
 II. Sup. 121, 121. ilonestitin est., w. Subj. 
 Inf. cl. 610, 3. 
 
 hora (hour), how calculated, and divided 
 iiy the Latins 226, 1. 
 
 horno, temp. adv. = hoc anno 223, 11. 
 
 horsum, compound locative adv. 217, 8. 
 
 hortari, w. ace. after ad or in 41, n. 2, W. 
 imperative cl. 595. 4 ; rarely w. obj. inf. lb. 
 
 how, (litlereiit ways of renderinij 240, 2. 
 
 however, rendered by quarnquam^^^, 12; by 
 nitl «»r nvii tanit-n 739, 2. (By autem, etc. ; 
 Pee P. 1.). — Ilotreier mucli. by quamvi'< 
 (not qiKuncmque) 5(K). 5: 501, 9; 693. A 
 foil. Hon't-r^r w. an adj., l)y qua/nris 693, 
 4 : //owe rer little = quamris non 691, H. 
 
 hue. adv. of j.lace in 3d locative ca.se 317, 
 oBs. 4. Ilucuxque, compound locative 
 adv. 2!7, 8; postclassically as temporal 
 adv. 222. 9. 
 
 humus, as locative object, takes locative 
 (•a>es, like names of cities 47, 81. 
 
 hundred-weight, how expr. 275, 1. 
 
 Hypothetical comparison, in re<,'ard to comp. 
 cl. introd'icrd by qiian. ac xi, qxam n'l, 
 etc. 74-3. 3 loll. Subjunc. in the cl., sub- 
 ject to law of consecution 748, 5. 
 
 Ihi, adv. of place, in 1st locative case 216; 
 Hs temporal adv. !i"J2, n. t. 
 
 icciroo, causal adv. 280. 40. Svndet. ant. of 
 (^lod and (^uia-cl. 68-3, 3; of iinal cl. 4;i5. 2; 
 ot causal Si-cl. 716. 3 foil. Use of iccirco 
 if not svnd. ant. .if clauses 282. 8. 
 
 id quod, lntn»dncin<; parenthetical rel. cl., 
 rendered by * which ' after a uoua lu appo- 
 sition 517. 4. 
 
 idem, determinative form-adj. (t«ee P. I.>, 
 as synd. ant. of comp. cl. of quality, fol- 
 lowed by qiti, ac, atque, uf. etc. 744. 1. 
 IVeil as acc.'ss. pr.d. in the meanin;; 
 ' likewiw^ ' 251, 9. ])iff. frotn tt ipse. lb. 
 
 identidem, temp. adv. 222. H. 
 
 ideo. therelore. cau(»al adv. 280, 5 and 7. 
 Ditf. Irom the causal conjs. trqo. iffifvr, 
 ilaque 281,6. Adv. of purpose 283,566; 
 
 284, 3. Synd. ant. of Qaod-cl. 683, 3. 
 Meaning of idea if used without a causal 
 cl. 282. 8. 
 
 idoneus, w. dat. 118, 112; w. gernndial after 
 ad; w. a rel. cl. in subjunc. 557, 3. 
 
 Idus, meaning and gram, use 227, 1. 
 
 if, regular Engl, equivalent o\ si 488, B; 
 rendered by quum 645, 34, If not = ?nsi, 
 ni, or si non (see these conjs.). 'If / am 
 not mistaken' = nisi im fallit, nisi fallor 
 (not nisi ert-o, nor si non fallor, etc.) 742. 2. 
 ' Jf you please ' = si placet, si videtur, sis, 
 sodes (anted, and poet) 742, 11.—' If but, if 
 indeed' = si quidem 688, 14. ' If but = 
 if only, provided that.' by diim or dmnmo- 
 do w. subjunc, si modo, etc. 676, 13; 677, 14. 
 
 ignarus, w. gen. 118, 109. W. gerundial gen. 
 161, 207, Te ignaro, without your knowl- 
 edire it^, 1. 
 
 i^orare (non) w. Quin-cl. .^89, 4. 
 
 ignoscere, w. dat. 88; difl'erent constructions 
 SS. n. 5. W. Quod-cl. 598, 9; w. Si-cl. 598, 
 n. *. 
 
 ille, demonstr. form-adj. (see P. I.) Svnd. 
 ant. of clauses of quality 435, 2. -Ille ego 
 qui 51.5, 4. 
 
 illico, adv. of time, expl. 22.5, 11. In a neffa- 
 tive thesis of conditional periods, emphat- 
 ically used inst. of iccirco 717, 3. 
 
 illudere, w.»dat. or ace. 91, 475. 
 
 immemor, w. gen. 118, 109. 
 
 imminens, w. dat. 118, 108. 
 
 immolare.w. abl. or ace. of the victim 95, 62. 
 
 immunem esse, ^v. ab or mere abl. 29, 48. 
 
 impedimentum, w. attr. Qiiominus-cl. 625, D. 
 I/jij>Klinitnto i:»t. w. subj. Quod-ci. 615, 11. 
 
 impedire, constr. w. trans, ace. along w. obj. 
 inf. 101, 83; 603, n. li ; w. trans, ace. along 
 w. neuter lonn-adj, S5, 39, 2. As verb of 
 negative doing w. Quominus-cl. 602, 5. 
 Kon impedire w. quin, an anomalous con- 
 struction (i03, n. t. W. ne 603, n. 1. W. 
 gerundial after ad. lb. 
 
 impellere, w. gerundial after ad 190, 239, 1 ; 
 w. That-cl., see movtre. 
 
 imperare, w. dat. 88. Other con<»trnction3 
 88, n. 1. Imperare alicui aliqnid, of mili- 
 tary requisitions 98, 69. Personal con- 
 otruction of the pass, imperor w. obj. inf. 
 105, 85. Constr. w. imperative clauses 
 596, 6 ; their different forms, and connec- 
 tions w. the dat. of the personal obj. lb. 
 Sitii non imperare (not to restrain one's 
 self) constr. w. Quin-cl. 603, 5. 
 
 Imperative clauses, a main division of depen- 
 dent sentences 480. 610. Gram, form ;389, 
 8:1 Dep. on ordinary verbs of saying 
 389, 2. Different classes of imperative 
 clau.ses according to the nature of the lead- 
 ing imperative idea 59.5, 2. Form of im- 
 perative cl. dep. on verbs of neirative com- 
 mand 5!t7, 7 ; on verbs of permission 597, 
 8. Governiug verb of command under- 
 stood Sl^O, 3. Im|)erative cl. in form of 
 Inf. cl. w. «rerundial pred. 594, 1. 
 
 Imperative mood (see P. I). The II. Impern- 
 tive, denoting laws and rules 351, A, Its 
 
'QS 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 KH 3; 25fi, 86 and obp. 1— Oon. of rnirK 
 nnu VAi.rK aftrr ett«f, lo !»•• worth, 2«i7, 2 ; 
 3»{S, 3. — What ahn. (jiiiuititutivi-M lnll^t hv 
 
 1>Iii<mmI In ifi-n. oT price uud value 2TU. 35. 
 •^xplanailon ol thii» form 271, 1. (Jcii. or 
 nl>l. of vahn' «lep. on dsfitmTrt 271. 3. (Jen. 
 of liitrmnl valin- 272. Vi-rl»-* takliiir a K^u. 
 ol iiittrniil van»' 272 1.— (it-n. |>1. of nount» 
 of ••(Tond ih'cli'n^'ion. ih-nutini; dfnoniiiia- 
 tlont» »»f nionoy. formed in uin 117, n. 2 ; 
 QtW). ft.--Kllii)!'i'* of tht; iroveiiiiiij; nonn «)f 
 nil attr. i,'en. {,/orit S/aforis, i.e. (ftn/Unm) 
 II »>. For in trihiitive p'n. nrv I*. I. 
 
 genuam iterrtmmi, u» utir. of hHutive ad- 
 v«-ib- :a)1, u. 22. 
 
 ftBM, w. );' riiiidiHl «.'cn. 159, 3. 
 
 gtrtBSj w <:<'ii. 117. 1()8. 
 
 Oemnd ami Oerandive, .iiLilyif» 1 11. n. ♦ : l.'il, 
 II. 1. I).-iinU' the (111. rent v'nim. lorm?» 
 which %erl»al ««Ij». in dun may aM-iime in 
 th'- franu'Wiirk ol the Hentcnce. They oc- 
 cur {ft) ill NoM., In coiiiu'ctioii w. the cop- 
 ula (ptrilMat«-i:«-riiiidinl.x. or peri|)hra>tic 
 pTinidialf ), {f» UH rAitTK'UM-Ks (uccet'.>*ory 
 iin-dicatef). the participle of tlu; copula 
 Im-Iiii: uiul«THtood (oartiripial priiudials). 
 (r) hj» attriliut- s and ol)je(;tH in the form of 
 rever«»ed phra.^cH (ireriindial^. in the nar- 
 rower »«rn-e». For I'eriphrastic and Par- 
 ticipial (teriindial!*, net* tlie artichn under 
 tiiiu heading. F<»r (Jerundials in the uar- 
 row«'r sense, Hce the article below. 
 
 Oenindi&ls (in reversed phrancp) .Analyd!» l.'iO 
 lull. Are eilher okiunds (expl. lol, TjIH ; 
 l.'il, 187) »)roKUl NDIVE."* 12-V3. 522). (Jerunds 
 «re impers. pasg. havlni; acti v»^ meaninii;, 
 a» every otiur im])ei«. pas^. ; their excep- 
 tional il!*»' in the ineanini; of personal pa>- 
 pive» 1.')!, 187. Are used either witli<»iii, ob- 
 ject!* («rerunds absoluie. arg n(ivifjanUi), or 
 take intransitive object» 152. IBs. Tlie 
 jiram. anomaly of transitive objs. dep. on 
 ^leruiuls, m ule a re;,'ular construction in 
 certain connections 152, 51!». (ierunds 
 with objs. in an attracted case 152, .520. — 
 The dilVerent ^'rani. relations in which ^e- 
 rundiaU may or may nut be used 154, H. 
 31H. Trace» of the w^v. of frerundlajs as 
 8iibj8. and transitive objs. 1,5<), l!i8 foil. 
 
 GEnUNl>IAI. CiKNlTIVK, 157, 52fi foil. II!» 
 form 1.57, 52ti. W. attracted case, how 
 expl. 158, 204 and 205. What relations are 
 exi)r. liy ircriind. };en. 1.5'.», 2()«». Eii^l. preps, 
 etc. ase<iuival<-nts 159. 1. — Dep. .as iittr. on 
 nouns 15!», 1-3; as obj. of adjs. 101, 207. 
 t'annot be used as compleiiiif? obj. of 
 veri)s 161. 207. As pred. i;iniiive w. cop- 
 ula Kil, 208. 
 
 Gkkundial dative. 163 foil. Extremely 
 peldtiin (in three pissajres only) t.ikcs the 
 form of jj;<rund w. transitive olij. \M. Dif- 
 ferent objective relations in which it oc- 
 curs W\, 528. As compietiiif,' obj. 163. 20*.» 
 foil. — Qerundial dat. of purpose l<i5, 211 
 loll Diff. from qerundial alter ad 189. 237. 
 — Gerundial pred. dat. 168,212. Dill", from 
 gerundial pred. gen. 168, 2. 
 
 (iBi^rNniAL ABi.ATivR, 169 foil. It? een- 
 cral force 169, .529; as passive apeiit l«i9.213; 
 as accessory pretl. 170, 214 : w, the force of 
 abl. ah», or of a clause 170. 1 ; ni« com- 
 n.irat. abl. 170,2: !«b complelini; obj. 170,3. 
 Nei.'atively us adverbial obj. of muiiuur, = 
 'without' w. participial 1^8. 1, (■. 
 
 (iEitrNi>iAi> ArTKii puKrosiTioNf». Can- 
 not take the forui of a u'^'iiilul w. tiansiiivo 
 «)bj. 188. 2.37.— .'i</ w. Kerundi.ilH 189, .5:i8. 
 As completinL; obj. of verlis deimtiiiir aim 
 UK), 2.3«». 1. As equivalent of Final It-cl. 
 I'M), 23'», 2. Dep. on aojs. 192, 240. As 
 atir. 191, ons. Dill", from pcrundial dat. 
 1^'.», 237; from pirticipial gerundive ItK), 
 2:W. — 7/1 w. gerundial Acci s. 19-3, 6:^9. 
 F«)rce of this construction 193, 241 foil. 
 Dirt", from gerundial after ad 19.3, 212.— 
 (jierundial abi,. after in 194 loll.; alter f/6 
 19.5. :A\ ; d*' IW, ,542 ; ^.r and pro 197. .541. 
 — Uerundial ace. after oO 196, 5J3 ; alter in- 
 ter 1!>7, 544. 
 
 gloriari, w. abl. or d*' 93. 429 ; w. reversed 
 partici[)iMl phrase in abl. 173, 1 ; w. (^uod- 
 cl. or li.f. cl. .598. 9; 598, n. %. 
 
 gloriosum est w. t-ubj. I't-cl. 610, 4. 
 
 gnarus w. gen. 118, 109; w. gerundial gen. 
 161, 207. 
 
 to go. ' Which «roes to Bhow,' how rendered 
 4.35, 2. — * Goihi/ to ' rendered by peripliras- 
 tic future 129. .507. 
 
 granted (granting) t/int, rendered by pub- 
 junc. of the main pred. ;i84. 7; by fV-clj 
 695, 8. '(Jranted for argument's sake,' 
 hy Jin r/f 700, 16. 
 
 gratia in abl,, to denote purpose 283, .566 ; 
 283, 1. W. gen., as synonym of projtfer 
 24, 4ti.— dm fia-f aqfre. f/rii/iaf/i ri-ferre. 
 coiii-tr. w. (^uod-cl. .598. 9;" rarely w. Inf. cl. 
 .599. \\.*—Giati(treftrtHdiXet^8e, expl. lt»8,l. 
 
 gratificari, w. dat. 89. 
 
 gratis (f/rafiif<) 242, on?. 
 
 gratulari, w. dat. 8'.»; w. Quod-cl. 598, 9 
 (i.ot w. Quuiu-cl. .598, n. i\. 
 
 gratns, w. dat. lis, 112. Gratum est w. 
 l^uod-cl. 610, 4; w. Ut-cl. 612, 6. 
 
 Habere, as factitive verb w. double ace. 102, 
 C. ; more fre(iuently in pass. w. double 
 nom. 102, oBs. C'onstr. w. pro. or in uu- 
 tnero 102, 7.5. As vi'rb of esteeniintr, w. 
 obj. of inner value 272. 1. W. perf. part, 
 as accessory pred., being the oriirin ol the 
 auxiliary Mo have' in modern langnages 
 2.54. 3. C^onstr. w. a rel. cl. in subjuiic. 
 (kal)€0 quod dicam)^ w. obj. inf.. w. ge- 
 rundial. and w. interrogative cl. 557, 2. 
 
 kabilis and inhabilis, w! dat. 118, 112; w. 
 t.'eruiidial alter ad 192, 1. 
 
 habitare, m.i y take an obj. of ])ricc 267, 32, 2. 
 
 Habitual actions, how expr. 343, 71. 
 
 hac, fourth locative case 216. Ilact^nus 
 ci-mpound adv. of 4th loc. case 217, 8; 
 222. 9. llitr hactf-n'is. .520, n. 1.3. 
 
 had it not been for, how rendered 718, 3. 
 
 half, how expr. 116, 105. One half as 
 much, or letis, how expr. 752, 2. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 789 
 
 it happens that, expr. by different imper- 
 sonals 613, A ; diff. between these 619, 9. 
 
 baud {noil) secus, synd. ant. of compar. cl. 
 of qua iiy 745, 3. What conj;^. are used 
 after it. lb. 
 
 he who, how rendered 500, 2; 514, 1. 
 
 help. ' / cannot help' w. participial = fa- 
 cere non pofsuni qi/in; or non, 2>ostium 
 qiiin ; or uon jHissitin non t»05, 7. 
 
 hie, demon str. adj. (see P. I.) ; as synd. ant. 
 of rel. and modal cl. of quality 43o, 2. 
 Jflc. adv. in ffrst locative case 217, 4; as 
 tcmponil adv. = turn 22:3. 3. 
 
 hiding, verbs of, w. ace. after in .38, 67, 
 
 hinc, demonstr. adv. in second locative 
 case 217, 4 ; as temporal adv. = demde 
 222. 9. 
 
 Historical present, pce Preaent. Historical 
 jNFiNiTivE, see Inflnilive. Historical im- 
 rEKFECT, st^e Imperfect. Histok. sub.iunc- 
 TivE, see Suhjunctice in conditional cl. 
 
 honestus, w. gerundial after ad 192, 5 ; w. 
 11. Sup. 121, 121. Uonestum est^ w. bubj. 
 Inf. cl. 610, 3. , , ;, V -1 ^ 
 
 hora (hour), how calculated, and divided 
 by tiie Latins 226, 1. 
 
 homo, temp. adv. = hoc anno 22o, 11. 
 
 horsum, compound locative adv. 217, 8. 
 hortari, w. ace. after ad or in 41, n. 2. W. 
 imi)erative cl. 595, 4; rarely w. obj. inf. lb. 
 how, different ways of rendering 240, 2. 
 however, rendered by quamguanim^, 12; t>y 
 niH or nisi tanun 739, 2. (By autem, etc. ; 
 p^.^. i> I.) —However much, by quamvi.'< 
 (not quamcxnque) 500. 5: 501, 9; 693,^1 
 loll. Howerer w. an adj., by quamrts W6, 
 4 • however tittle = quaniriit non 694, B. 
 hue adv. of place in 3d locative case 317, 
 oBs. 4. Ifiicusque, compound locative 
 adv. 217, 8 ; poetclassically as temporal 
 
 adv. 222, 9. , , v- 
 
 humus, as locative object, takes locative 
 
 cases, like names of cities 47, 81. 
 hundred-weight, how expr. 275, 1. 
 Hypothetical comparison, in regard to comp. 
 cl. introduced by r/z/a-fi. ac ki, qvam «, 
 etc. 74:}. 3 loll. Subjunc. in the cl., sub- 
 ject to law of consecution 748, 5. 
 
 Ibi, adv. of place, in 1st locative case 216; 
 as temporal adv. 222. n. t. 
 
 icciroo, causal adv. 280. 40. Syndet. ant of 
 Ouod and Quia-cl. 68-3, 3; of linal cl. 4:i.5. 2; 
 of causal Si-cl. 716. 3 foil. Use of iccirco 
 if not sviid. ant. of clauses 282. 8. 
 
 idauod, jntroducing i)arenthetical rel. cl., 
 rendered by ' which ' after a uoua in appo- 
 sition 517. 4. ., , -n t \ 
 
 idem determinative form-adj. (see P. L|, 
 as synd. ant. of comp. cl. of quality, fol- 
 lowed by q>ii, ac, utque, ut, etc. 744. 1. 
 Used as access, pr.-d. in the meaning 
 ' likewise ' 251, 9. Diff. from et ip>se. lb. 
 
 identidem, temp. adv. 222, 9. 
 
 ideo therefore, causal adv. 280, 5 and <. 
 Diff Irom the causal conjs. ergo, if/ifiir, 
 itaq'ue 281, 6. Adv. of purpose 283, 566 ; 
 
 284, 3. Synd. ant. of Quod-cl. 683, 3. 
 Meaning of ideo if used without a causal 
 cl. 282, 8. 
 
 idoneus, w. dat. 118, 112 ; w. gerundial after 
 ad ; w. a rel. cl. in subjunc. 557, 3. 
 
 Idas, meaning and gram, use 227, 1. 
 
 if, regular Engl, equivalent of.v.-i 488. B; 
 rendered by quuni 645, 34. If not = nl4, 
 ni, or si non (see these conjs.). ' If I am 
 not mistaken'' = nid nie fallit, nisi fallor 
 (not nisi erro. nor si non fallor. etc.) 742. 2. 
 ' If you please ' = si placet, si tidetur, sis, 
 sodea (anted, and poet) 742, 11.—' If but, if 
 indeed' = si qiiidem 688, 14. ' If but = 
 if only, provided that.' by dum or d'/mmo- 
 do \v. subjunc, si modo, etc. 676, 13; 677, 14. 
 
 ignarus, w. gen. lis, 109. W. gerundial gen. 
 161, 207. Te ignaro, without your knowl- 
 edge 1&4, 1. 
 
 i^orare (non) w. Quin-cl. 589, 4. 
 
 ignoscere, w. dat. 88; different constructions 
 88, n. 5. W. Quod-cl. 598, 9; w. Si-cl. 598, 
 n. t- 
 
 ille, demonstr. form-adj. (see P. I.) Synd. 
 ant. of clauses of quality 435, 2. -Ule ego 
 
 illico, adv. of time. expl. 22.5, 11. In a nega- 
 tive thesis of conditional periods, emphat- 
 ically used inst. of iccirco 717, 3. 
 
 illudere, w.'dat. or ace. 91, 475. 
 
 immemor, w. gen. 118, 109. 
 
 imminens, w. diit, 118, 108. 
 
 immolare,w. abl. or ace. of the victim 9o, 62. 
 
 immunem esse, w, ab or mere abl. 29, 48, 
 
 impedimentum, w. attr. Quominus-cl. 625, D. 
 hnp'-dimento est. w. subj. Quod-cl. 615, 11. 
 
 impedire, constr. w. trans, ace. along w. obj. 
 inf. 104. 83; 603, n. 11 ; w. trans, ace. along 
 w. neuter lonn-adj. So, 39, 2. As verb ot 
 negative doing w. Quominus-cl. 602, 5. 
 Non impedire w. quin, an anomalous con- 
 struction mi, n. t. W. ne 603, u. U. W\ 
 gerundial after ad. lb. 
 
 impellere, w. gerundial after ad 190, 239, 1 ; 
 w. That-cl., see movere. 
 
 imperare, w. dat. 88. Other constructions 
 8S, n. 1. Imperare alicui aliqind, of mili- 
 tary requisitions 98, 69. Personal con- 
 struction of the pass, imperor w. obj. mf. 
 105, 85. Constr. w. imperative clauses 
 596, 6 ; their different forms, and connec- 
 tions w. the dat. of the personal obj. lb. 
 SUA non imperare (not to restrain one's 
 self) constr. w. Quin-cl. 603, .5. 
 
 Imperative clauses, a main division of depen- 
 dent sentences 480. 610. Gram, form :i89, 
 8:i Dep. on ordinary verbs of saying 
 :i89, 2. Different classtis of imperative 
 clauses according to the nature of the lead- 
 ino- imperative idea 595, 2. Form of im- 
 peTative cl. dep. on verbs of negative com- 
 mand 597, 7 ; on verbs of permission 597, 
 8 Governing verb of couimand under- 
 stood 390, 3. Imperative cl. in form of 
 Inf. cl. w. gerundial pred. 594, 1. 
 Imperative mood (see P. I). The II. Impern- 
 live, denoting laws and rules 351, A. Its 
 
790 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 equivalents. lb. Used for didactic rules 
 ;i-jL B. 
 
 Imperative mood (En2;l.) expr. by Latin fut. 
 ttiist's 35(). 1 ; by Lat. siibjiinc. ;ts::> ft»ll. 
 
 Imperative (independcui) sentences (.see P. I). 
 \\ tRMi llieir pred. is placed in Mihjuuc. 
 aSl loll. Ut^ed \v. force of Si-cl. 355, G; T.'Jfi, 
 7. \\ itb concessive force :i84, 7. Form 
 of iiiipt-rative seat, in obi. ditJcourse, see 
 Oblhpie <iUc<>in se. 
 
 Imperfect Indicative, 305 foil. Two general 
 n'qiurt'nu'nts, ^a) incomim.ktkness of ac- 
 tion ;3()."), 312; (b) peculiar conccpti«)n in 
 ref^'ard to timk of action 313 foil.— Accord- 
 ing to the various relations of ' inconi- 
 l)lefeneps ' the imp. is either imperfect of 
 bTATK (:W6, .50), imp. of contimkd (pro- 
 gret^sive) action (:iU7, 51), or of uki'Kated 
 ACTION (311, 3): alfO imp. of unsuccess- 
 ful ATTEMPT, and of directly iMrENi>ft<o 
 ACTU»N (:Wy, .53). Incompleteness of act, 
 pregnantly implied {(juare prqticiscebatur? 
 = quid EUAT caut^a cur jir()fidsct?e(ur) 308, 
 52.— Necessity «)l determining the stand- 
 point of TIMK in the u.se of imp. 313. 5T(), 
 OBs. The lime of the action either con- 
 ceived as time-point (315, 377). oras period 
 of time (3ir. foil.), both of which may be 
 designated by adverbs of time (313, 55). or 
 by temporal clauses (:jJO, »1U>, or by impli- 
 cation (314. 5»»). Use of pelf, or imp. ac- 
 cording to the difterent combinations and 
 relations »)f these elements (313, 577. oBs. ; 
 81 4, 1 and 2 ; 317, 3 and 4 ; 318, 58 ; 320. t,0 ; 
 322, ()1 : 323, «i2 ; 325, oiss. 2). — Particular 
 classes of imperfecis, which must be con- 
 sidered as typical forms : Imptrleet of 
 
 CONTINOKNT ACTION 328 foil. ; DEsCUiniNO 
 IMI'EKKKCT 332 loll. ; HISfOUICAL IMl'Ett- 
 
 FECT 3*1 loll. ; imperf. of inneu action 
 33b foil., which is subdivided into imp. of 
 
 REFEKENCE 539 hill., imp. of DEBATES 
 
 3U), ot habit 312.— Imp. w. anfea, inst. of 
 plup. 31H, n. 11. Imp. w. force t)f Engl, 
 phip. when an action was still lasting at 
 the time spoken of 310. 5'.>. — Imp. in princ. 
 tent, determining the time of another ac- 
 tion, 32.5, OBS.— Idiomatic use of the imp. 
 of audlre (325, 1), and dictre (3H, 3).— 
 I'erf. or imp. of t^olere 343, 72; w. sape 
 32«), 3, 4 ; w. semper 32«, 3 ; w. qitotidie 
 320, 5; w. etianUum 31»), 1.— Lat. imp. 
 rendered into Engl. 1) by progressive form 
 of preterite ;S07, t)BS. ; 311, 3 ; 2) by com- 
 mon form of pret. ;i(t7, 1 ; 320 loll. ; 3:17 
 foil.; 340 foil.; 344, 72; .3) by 'used to,' 
 'was wont to ' 344. 72 foil. ; 4) by pluperf. 
 310, 50; 340, 4 ; 5) by pivsent-perf. 319, 5; 
 357,/. ; »i) l)v present or future in episto- 
 lary imp. .3.^7 toll. ; 358, 5 ; 7) by ' about to,' 
 'goini! to ' 3.57, //. 
 
 ImPEUF. of I'ERIPHRASTIC FUTITUB, 860 
 
 Ptrijihr. /w^— Imp. of periphrastic ok- 
 itUNDiALS 145, 514.— Imp. as epistolauy 
 tense, vv. force of pres. or Int. 357 foil. ; 
 3.")8, 5.— Imp. in TEMeoKAi. Quum-d. 320, 
 60; in Quum-cl. denoting identity of ac- 
 
 tion 339, 69 ; in Postquam-claufses C62. 5 
 foil.; in Antequam-cl. «.(iO. 6; after c/wm, 
 while (exceptionally) 072, 4; 073, 5, 1 ; alter 
 donee, ii^ lonu'as, tiyl,24; in Si-cl. of doubt- 
 ful reality 703, A foil.— Imp. ind. of poten- 
 tial verbs {poteiam, oporlebat etc.) in a 
 hypothetical sense w. force of plup. sub- 
 iunc. 728, 20; w. force of imp. subjunc. 
 72S n. *. Imp. ind. ol ordinary veibs in 
 hypothetical sense 130. 
 
 Imperfect Subjunctive in declarative indej). 
 sentences, not belonging to liypothetical 
 periods 379. 4 ; in interrogative seiitences 
 and w. force of pol«ntial future 381, 2: in 
 optative sentences 38^1, 0. For imp. subj. 
 in thesis and hypothesis of conditional 
 l)eriods of non-reality, see SuhjuitctiVK in 
 conditional (hypothetical) ])enods.—\my>. 
 subjunct. independent clau^es, as regular 
 tense of preterite consecution for con- 
 temporaneous action 414, «)0.3. ITsed as 
 logical tense, dep. on noii-preieriie pred. 
 445, 0; 440, 7.— In cond. clauses of doubt- 
 ful reality 1) according to law of consecu- 
 tion 713, 1!>; 2) as bi^torlcal cond. sub- 
 junc. 713, 20 foil. : 714, 20, .1 ; 3) in cond. 
 cl. of virtual non-reality 715. C — Imp. 
 subj. in periods of contingent action .i:*), 
 f). In Qiium-d. with force of Engl. plup. 
 319, 2 (for imp. subjunc. in other Quum- 
 cl., see these). In Anteqiiam and Priii.s- 
 quam-cl. 009, Oand7; 070, 8. In Donec-cl. 
 (since Livy) r.80, "iA. In Dum-cl., and 
 Quoad cl. (rt) dam = while, denoting the 
 motive of the doer 07.3, 4; {b) t/'/m, and 
 quoad, =. as long as (i70. 12; (c)durn and 
 du/nmodo — provided that 077, 13.— In 
 Mod.l Ul-cl. 4.35, 3; 430,5. 
 
 Impersonals. Impersonal verbs, their enu- 
 meialioM and con-irnction 015 foil. Im- 
 pers. \v subj. inf. 107 494. Case of logi- 
 cal subj. of impersonals 107, 90. Impers. 
 predicates in inf. 108. 92 and 93.— Impers. 
 PARTICIPLES alter preposiiions 1!«8, 219; 
 19'.), 3. - I mpeksonal passives, their mean- 
 ing and use 71 toll. Impers. pass, as peri- 
 phrastic geruudials 142, 513, as ubl. abs. 
 180, 5.30 ; 187, 2. 
 impertire, either w. ace. of thing and dat. 
 «if pers., or ace. of jjcrs. and abl. of thing 
 OS, 4^:i.— Imperil re {labOrem etc.) w. ge- 
 ruudial dat. 1«>3, 209. 
 
 impetrare, ob/inere, (entre, asicqui, consequi, 
 adijH!ici, as verbs of achievinjj, consir. 
 with nt or ne 001, 3. 
 implorare, w. imper.itivc cl. 505, 3. 
 imponere, w. ace. after in 38, n. 2. 
 impoi w. iren. 118. lbl>. 
 impoteiis, w. gen. 118, 109 ; w. gerundial gen. 
 ir,i, 207. 
 impulsus, w. abl., as circumlpcuiion of mo- 
 tive 119, 113. 
 in, prep. w. ace, 37 foil. Diff. from in w. 
 
 I abl. "u, 00. //' w. ace. = on (to), against, 
 for, :18, (ks. Dilf. from ad in local relations 
 
 ' 38, 09. /// w. ace. before countries 38, 09 : 
 
 : left out before cities 40 foil. ; vvUea rc- 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 791 
 
 tallied 48, 8:? foil.— In figurative relations 
 39, 451. Dilf. from ad denoting purpose 
 
 41, 71 ; from erqa, adrermtf). contra 38, 08 ; 
 41,71. Hanc in modum. mirum in modum 
 expl. 41, 7'2. Marfnarn in partem \h.—Jn 
 w. ace. of gerundial 193, .5.39.— In relations 
 of time 42,4.52; to denote length of fut. 
 periods 2:18, 0. In the relation of manner 
 244. 5,— Dep. on spectdre and vergere (to 
 lace) 221, \i.—Jiirdre in verfni 105, n. 7.— 
 Peccdre in aliquem or in. aliquo 199, n. 1. 
 
 In w. abl. 42. 453 foil. In local relations, 
 — on, at. in 42, 74.— Corresponding to 
 Engl, 'in' in figurative relations 43, 74. 
 In = with 43, 74 : = among 43, 75 ; = ' in 
 the country of ' 43, 70. When in is left 
 out 44. 77 ; omitted before names of cities 
 40 foil. ; when retained 48, 84. In w. 
 gerundial abl. l'.)4, 540; w. jiarticipial re- 
 versed phrase IJW, 0. — In temporal rela- 
 tions 44. 78 ; = during 45, 78 ; when omit- 
 ted 45, 78.— /ft w. (^uod-cl. (iu eoquod) »107, 
 2. /ft eo «i^< M^ (impersonally) 487, 6. Verbs 
 compounded w. in, lake dat. or ia w. ace. 
 or abl. 90, 45. 
 
 In. Engl. prep. Rendered bv Lat. in w. abl. 
 
 42, 74 ; 43. 74. Before names of cities 40, 
 455. In relation of time 228 ; of manner 
 243. /ft expr. by pres. abl. abs. 182, 229.— /ft 
 with participials expr. by gerundial geni- 
 tive 154, 1.— '/ft order to'' expr. by ltd. 
 435, 2 ; by (^ui-cl. 557, ; by verbal adj. in 
 ilrusWiS), i'>8.—' In accordance ivith,' 'in 
 keeping icith, ' 519, /?.— ' /ft the event that ' 
 714, '20, A. 
 
 inauditum est, w. Subj. Inf. cl. 009, 2, 
 
 inaugurato, expl. 1S9. a. 
 
 Incautus, \v. gerundial after «^ 192. 5. 
 
 Incertum est, w. interrog. cl. aJK), a. 
 
 incidit, w. Subj. Ut-cl. 019, 3. Ditl". from ac- 
 
 ridit. lb. 
 
 incitare, w. That-ol.. see movers. 
 inclinare, w. irernndial after ad 190, 239, 1. 
 incolumi exercitu, 184, 1. 
 Incorporation of antecedent in relative cl. 
 
 .5ii(i. h. 
 incredibilis, w. II. sup. 121, 121. IncredibUe 
 
 est w. Subj. Inf. cl. 009, 2. 
 increpare, w. Qiiod-cl., i^vf reprehendere. 
 incumbere, w. gerundial alter ad 190, '239, 1. 
 incusare, w. Thiit-c\., nee accumre. 
 inde, locative adv. 210; temporal adv. 222, 
 
 9 ; 2'2:i. 3; as synd. ant. of quod causal OS:i, 
 
 S.—Inde ab {jam inde ab), ever since 30, 
 
 442. 
 Indefinite relative adjectives: formation 496. 4; 
 
 4I)S. 1 : meaning 4'.t7. 7. Ditf. from ordinary 
 
 relatives 498. 8. Used without irram. ant. 
 
 49S. 2. Difli*. ill the use of the doubled forms, 
 
 and the compounds w. cunqne 499, 9. 
 Indefinite relative adverbs ; formation 501,10. 
 
 In locative clauses .575, 1. 
 Indefinite relative clauses. Their relation to 
 
 conditional and concessive clauses 498. 2 ; 
 
 50-2, 11. Mood of their pred. 499, 2. When 
 
 tbev takesubjunc. .5(V1, 12. Analysis.50'2. 1<». 
 Indicative in causal cl. 082, 02:1 ; w. quamvis 
 
 694, 5 ; w. qnamquam 696, 9. See the sin- 
 gle clauses. 
 
 Indicative in hypothetical periods 726 foil. 
 
 When the clause may take an ind. 720, 2-3. 
 
 ind. of tlie thesis 720, 2:i-'28. Force of hy- 
 pothetical perf. ind. of potential verbs 727, 
 
 '25; of their imp. ind. 728. '20. in what 
 
 in^tances ordinary verbs take a hypoth. 
 ind. 7.30. 
 
 indigere, w. gen. 92, 478 ; w. abl. 93, 54 ; 9.3, 
 479. 
 
 indignus, w. abl. (Ca^s. B. G. 5, 35 ; 7, 17 ; 
 Cic. Vat. 10, 39); constr. w. rel. cl. in 
 subjunc. 5.57, 3. — Indiqnvm efse w, Subj. 
 Quod-cl. 610, 4 ; w. Subj. Inf. cl. lb. 
 
 inducere, w. ace. after in ;18. 07. 
 
 inductus, w. abl. as circumlocution of mo- 
 tive 119. 115. 
 
 induere, aliquem aliqud re, or aliquid alicui 
 98. 4S3. 
 
 indulgere w. dat. 89. 
 
 inesse, w. dat. In Cic. w. abl. after in 89, n. 3. 
 
 ineunte aetatc, 182, 229. 
 
 inferring, Verbs of, constr. w. ex 29, 48. 
 
 Infinitive rarely made dep. on adjs. 121, .502. 
 As impers. pred. lOS, 92. Free use of Inf. 
 w. force of ordinary nouns 108, 495. See 
 Object-infinitive, and iSubjecl-infinitive,— 
 Historical Infinitive, as equivalent of 
 imp. of repeated or internal action 31*2. 2. 
 Always refers to jmsons as subjs. 31-2, 2. 
 Connections in which it occurs 312, 3. In 
 appositive Quum-cl. 003. 16.— Inf. pres. of 
 periphrastic fut. 134, 508 ; o:il, 6. Inf. 
 perf. of the same 235, 151 ; 6.33. 
 
 Infinitive (Enirlish). Rendered by interrog- 
 ative cl. {quid dicam nescio) 39<), e ; by rel. 
 cl. .5.56, 1 and 2 ; .557, 3 and 5 ; 5.58 foil.; by 
 That-cl. of various descriptions 139, 11; 
 .595 ; 590, 6 : 637. .37. Engl. obj. inf by Lat. 
 pass. inf. cl. 630, 3. See Object-inJ\, and 
 Subject-in f. 
 
 Infinitive clauses, as oblique clauses 387. 598. 
 UBJ. Inf. cl. dep. on verba sentiendi 588 
 (exceptions 588, '23); on verbs of emotion 
 590, 5; exclamatory 591, 6; 481. obs.; on 
 verbs of volition 592, obs. 7. 1 foil. ; on 
 verbs of hopinir etc. .593, 11.— Dep. on 
 verba declarandi 594, 24 ; on verbs denot- 
 intr the manitestation of emotions, and of 
 praisini; etc. 592, 9. n. J.— Subject Inf. 
 CL. or Ut-cl. as subj. of passive pred. 008, 
 •27 foil.: as subj. of predicate-adjs. 609.2 
 foil.; of adj. w. II. sup. 122, 124; of pred. 
 nouns 013, 1 ; of impers. verbs 015, 2s foil. 
 —Attribute Inf. cl. 6'24, A, foil.— Inf. 
 cl. introduced by qvippe 689. n. t ; after 
 nam and enim lb.— Tenses of the Predi- 
 cate-I\f. 030. 4 loll. Dift". in the use of 
 ordinary inf.. and periphrastic fut. inf. 
 r)31, 6. Treatment of conditional periods 
 if the thesis (apodosi'^) must assume the 
 form of an inf. cl. 631, 7 foil.— Inf. cl. ia 
 form of nom. w. inf. see this article. 
 
 infra, prep. w. ace. 24, 4.38. 
 
 ingredi, in perf. part, as pred. abl. 172, 3. 
 
 iniijuum est, w. Subj. Inf. cl. (not ut) 611, 5. 
 
792 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 793 
 
 injucundas, w. II. Snp. 121, 121. 
 injuria i/i (not contra) atiquern 41, 72. In- 
 Juii'i, unjustly, 2-t4. 3. 
 injuriosum est, w. Siibj. Inf. cl. 610, 3. 
 injussu, \\ itluti/. onU-r, ohj. of coiiicident 
 
 actioii 242, v^BS. Jiijusgu fneo etc., e-xpl. 
 
 W.K C. / 
 inopg, \v. oen. 118, inO. 
 inquam, /fiow used in quotations 3Sfi, 1. 
 
 \\hvi\.(U(-(^?'e is u?-od iiii^t. of inquam II). 
 insciu» \v. yen. IIH. 101*. 'Vie i//.srio 184, 1. 
 inscrilere, as factitive verb, w. double ace. 
 
 \{K.\\. 
 'ikacfvire.w. dat. 89. 
 insidere, w. dat. or ace. 281, n. 10. 
 insimulare, w. ace. of pers. and jrcn. of 
 
 cliar-'e iH>. 484. Generally \v. Inf. cl. rarely 
 
 w. Qiiod-d. 508, 9; 598, n. +; 101, 83. 
 
 Doubtful, wbether inf., dep. on indinulare 
 
 is()l)j. inf. or pred. inf. 104, n. 2. 
 instabilis, w. irerundiul after ad 192, 5. 
 instare, w. Imperative cl. or luf. cl. accord- 
 ing to its ineaniiii? 595. 3. 
 instituere, as factitive verb, w. double ace, 
 
 101. A. 
 
 instruere, aliquem (aliqtfid) nliqvd re 09, 485. 
 insuetus. w.{,'eu. 118, 109; w. gerundial gen. 
 
 i«il. 207. _, . 
 
 integer, w. gerundial after ad 105, 5. He in- 
 
 tetirCi 1S4. 1. Iiitegrwn est, \v. Subj. Inf. 
 
 or Suhj. LIt-cl. (WO, 2. 
 
 intelligere, with Inf cl. 588, 23. 
 
 Intensity, adverbial relrtti«»n, 200 foil. Its 
 
 dilVerent gram, fonus 200, 5«8 foil. Clauses 
 
 of intens. 0-'}5, 32, 1. 
 
 intentus, w. dat. 118, 112; w. gerundial dat. 
 104. 1 : w. gerundial after flf^/ 192. 4. 
 
 inter prep. w. ace. 18 foil. Ditt'. from apvd 
 10, 25 ; from;>«/' 21, :«. As exponetit of 
 
 the reciprocal relation 19, 28. Inter Uilca- 
 
 rios 19, 25. Inter tncariofi 20, 29. Kefer- 
 riiiir to the endpoints of distances 220, 4. 
 — \V. participial reversed phrase 109, 0.— 
 W. gerundial ace. 107, 248. Verbs com- 
 pounded \v. inter often take dat. 90, 45. 
 
 intercalate, in retrard to leap-years 227. n. t. 
 
 intercedere. w. dat. of pers. along w. Q,uoim- 
 nns-cl. 002, n. §. 
 
 intercludere, either w. arc. of thing and dat. 
 of pers., or ace. of pers. and abl. ol thing 
 98, 4S;i.— W. That-el.. see obstare. 
 
 interciperc, w. ace. of thing and dat, of pers. 
 07. 08. 
 
 interdicere, w. dat. of pors. and abl. of thing 
 yO, li.3. As verb of negative command, 
 coiistr. w. imperative cl. 597, 7. 
 
 interdiu, temporal adv. 225 11. 
 
 interdum, temporal adv. 224, 10. 
 
 inte-ea, adv. expl. 217, 8. 
 
 interes8e,\v. dat., ^ecadease. Interest (impers. 
 verb) and rHert, how constr. 213 foil. 
 Form of their Subj. cl. 021, 4. The degree 
 of interest w. these verbs 274, 4 : by p/ws- 
 or rnagix 75<). C. n. 2. Interested person 
 274, 5. The thing concerned 275, 0. Inter- 
 eat in the ind. of a preterite tense, used 
 hypothetically 727, 24 foil. 
 
 intermisso tempore, after some time 180, OBS. 
 interrogare, w. donl)le ace. 100, 4sO. 
 Interrogative Particles (s.e P. I). Instance?, 
 in which they are left «)Ut 3.")1, B. ^ 
 
 Interrogative clauses, one of the main divi- 
 si4)ns of dependent sentences 480, 010. 
 Delinition, grammatical form, and mood 
 (sul)june.) 300, .s5 lull. Improper interroga- 
 tive cl. 390, 85, 1. (JoveriM (I by verba sen- 
 tiendi and dicendi 390, b. W. force ol neg- 
 ative assertion 391, c. Governing verb 
 understood 391, 2. Parenthetically used 
 lb. — Interrogative Subject-clauses 391,3; 
 int. attrib. cl. 391, 4. Diff. of relative-in- 
 terrogative cl. from ordinary rel. cl. 391, 
 5. When Engl. rel. el. must or may be 
 expr. bv Lat. interroiiative cl. (qnid not 
 quod) 392 loll.; «»5, 8.- Expr. by Engl, 
 nouns 395, 8. Ik Interrog. cl.w. their pred. in 
 indicative 391 foil.- Invoh'tion ol mterr. 
 cl. 396, c; in the form of abl. abs. 173, 3. 
 EcTUESis 390. d. Different ways of ren- 
 dering interrog. cl. referrimr to the luture 
 396, e. When they take periphrastic tens- 
 es 449, 4. Interrog. locative clauses 570, 
 4. Interroi:. comparative cl. 707, 17. Col- 
 location of interrog. clauses 478, 4. 
 Interrogative (independent) sentences, sec P. I. 
 intra, prep. w. ace, use 24, 438. Denoting 
 performance at or before the end t)f a pe- 
 riod (or =: ' no loniriT than ') 2:30, 0. Used 
 — jxtst and abkinc lb. 
 introducere, constr. w. ace. after in 38, 67. 
 intus, adv. w. abl. 114, •)8. 
 inutilis, w. gerund, after ad 192, 1. 
 inventus (repertus) est qui, expl. 551, 4, 5 ; 
 always w. sul)june. 552, 5. 
 Inversion of rel. cl. 506. a. Invers. when the 
 clause is introduced by an abs. rel. 513, 4. 
 invicem, w. recii)rocal meaning 20, 20. 
 invidere w. dat. 89. . 
 
 invidia in (not contra) aliqvem 41, .2. 
 invidiosum est w. Subj. quod-cl. 610, 4. 
 invita Minerva 184. 1. . „ -nr 
 
 invitare. w. ace. after ad or m 41, n. 3. W. 
 gerundial after ad 190, 239, 1 ; w. impera- 
 tive cl. 595, 3. 
 inviting. Verbs of, constr. w. ad 41. .0 
 Involution of interrogative clauses (dutbanj, 
 quid p<-fejite!i rtnU^tnt etc.) 39<J, V ; in the 
 form of abl. abs. 173, 3. 
 InvoluUon of relative clauses. Dofinitioii 5.34, 
 13 Its gram, nature, and inadmissibility 
 in En<:l. 5;M, 1: 5:«. n. * and n. **. The 
 different classes of clauses in which a rela- 
 tive may be involved .535. HenderinL' of 
 involved relative cl. (devolution) 53.), 2 
 fo 1 1 . 1 ) D i rect de vol ii I i on .536, 4 ; 2 ) d e y o- 
 lution by reversal .530,5; 3) by contraction 
 .5:37, 6: 4) by c«>r)i di nation .^:i8, 7. Cios<- 
 inv'olution and its devolution .5.39, 14 loll. 
 Involution of rel. in abl. abs. 173, 3. 
 ipse (determ. adj. ; see P. 1). Placed in the 
 nom. as adjunct of abl. abs. 176, 1 ; or as 
 adjunct of gerundial abl. 170, 2. Lse in 
 oratio obliqua 7»i8, 3; 709, 4. 
 ira, w. attr. (iuoa-cl. 625, B, 3. 
 
 irasci. w. dat. 89; w, Subj. Quod-cl. ; more 
 rarely w. Inf. d. 590. 
 
 ire, w. double dat. 90, 05; w. first snp. 137, 
 158, n. : in the i)ass. inf. (iri) w. first sup. 
 as circumlocution of inf. fut. pass. 1.37, 158. 
 
 is. ea, id (i)ers. ])ron. and determ. adj., see 
 P. 1). As predictte-adj. w. Ut-cl. 502, C. 
 Use in oratio obliqua 700, 5. As synd. ant. 
 of clauses of quality 435. 2. --/•? qui; dil- 
 ferent renderings and simiifieations 515,4; 
 .501. A : .501, n.* and n. t; .508, n. X- 1^ Q^'i 
 parentheticallv,inst. of .?'/«. 501, 11.* />' q'/i 
 w. 8UB.ILTNC. .561, A. /^', in is qui, connect- 
 ed w. a i)red. noun .502, D; as pred. geni- 
 tive {e'lnii est qui) 5»i2, E ; is, as pred. adj. 
 understood 502, A.— Is qui w. i.nd. .502, 5. 
 Use of mood when i.< stands in the relation 
 of an attribute 503, iS.—Is qui w. subjunc. 
 in causal meaning 508, 8. 
 
 it is I who, etc., how rendered 5.5.3, 0. 
 
 ita, moilal form-adv.; its derivation, 239, 15. 
 Diff. from tain and ad^o 2f)2. 4. Ita and sic 
 as synd. ant. of modal Ut-cl. 435, 2. When 
 they arc omitted 035, 32, oBs. \.— Jta vt 
 rendered ' but so that ' 4.3.5, 2 ; 6:30, 4, 2 foil. 
 —As synd. ant. of duni, quoad, and quani- 
 diu (=only so long as).— //a si {sed ita si) 
 = 'but onlv if 741, 10. -//a. regular ant. 
 of comp. Ut-cl. 74.5. i.—fta in asseverations 
 (ita me di anidbunt nt; ita vivani ut) 740,/>. 
 
 item and itidem, modal forin-advs.; deriva- 
 tion 23'.», 15; 241. 5. Idiomatic use of non 
 item lb. 
 
 item, Engl, noun, how to render into Latin 
 270, n. 7. 
 
 iter diei, as measure of distance 220, 1. 
 
 iterum, dill", from denuo and rursus '22i, G. 
 W. force of bis 372, n. 2. 
 
 Jactura est, w. Subj. Qnod-cl. 014, 9. 
 
 jam. temp. adv. 221, 10: 224. oBs. 2. Jim- 
 
 prl'leni lb; jamd'm, 225. 11; Jaindudum 
 expl. 225. 11. Jam exoleti vely used 200.42. 
 
 jubere, w. transitive obj. along w. oljj. inl. 
 lOt, 8.3. The diff. constructions of the 
 clauses dep. on it .5!)0, 6. Controversy, 
 Avhether the ace. dep. on jubtre is a trans- 
 itive obj. ace., or a subj. ace., and whether 
 the inf. is obj. inf. or pred. inf. 10(i, Hi.— 
 Jiibeor w. obj. inf. 104, &1. Peculiar pass, 
 construction by making the transitive obj. 
 of the obj. inf. ot jubtre its pass. subj. 105, 
 %—J,/ssus w. obj. inf. 104, S4. oBs, 
 
 jucundus, w. dat. 118. 112 : v^. 11. sup. 121, 121. 
 .///(•//;irf?/;/i6.N'^ w. subj. Ut-cl. 012, 0, 
 
 judicare aUquevi atiqud re 100, 485 ; as facti- 
 tive verb w. doubh; ace. 102. C. 
 
 Judge, Roman, functions of 204, n. 18. 
 
 judging. Verbs of, constr. w. ex 29, 48. 
 
 jnrare, in verfxi, expl. 105, n. 17. 
 
 jure, justly. 244, 3; meo jure hoc feci, I was 
 right in doing this lb. 
 
 iury Engl, noun, how^ to render 291, n. IS. 
 
 lus est, w. Subj. Ut-cl. 613. 3. 
 
 iusjurandum, oxpl. 149, n.**; vv. attr. That- 
 c 1.02.5, .4,:3. 
 
 jnssu, by order 234, obs. 
 
 just, Engl, particle, by commodum, or tan- 
 tum quod 347, 6. May be intimated by tho 
 IMP. tense of the pred. 315, 3. 
 
 juvare, w. ace. 87, n. 3. Juvat, impers., 
 takes its logical subj. in ace. 107. iK). Juvat 
 me, w. subj. inf. 617, 8; w. perf. inf. lb. 
 
 juxta, prep. w. ace, use 3.3, 4:37. Diff. from 
 p)0i)eix\\(\ propter 'HA A\. As adv.(=equally), 
 synd. ant. of comp. cl. 745, 3. Conjunc- 
 tions used after it lb. 
 
 Kalends, meaning and use of 227, 1. 
 
 to know how to, etc., expr. by scire, either w. 
 
 obj. inf., or w. quomodo. Diff. of both 
 
 constructions 396/. 
 
 Laborare, w. abl. or de 93, 479; w. plus or 
 magis 750, 6'. no. 2. Laborare and elabo- 
 rdre, as verbs of strivinu:. w. ut or ne 500, 2. 
 
 Istari, w. al)I. or de 93, 479, n. 8; w. Inf. cl. 
 or q>/od .500. 
 
 lamentis lacrimisque, as obj. of coincident 
 action 214, 3. 
 
 languages, names of, if objs. of verbs of 
 speaking, knowing, writing, etc., assume 
 the form of an adv. ( Latins loqui etc.) 84, 38. 
 
 the last, not rendered in such expressions as 
 ' the la»f ten years ' 200, 42. Lastfij (at last, 
 at len-rth, finally) how expr. in Lat. 223, 5. 
 
 Latine loqui, see languages. 
 
 latus, w. ace. or gen., rarely w. abl. 115,498. 
 
 laudare, w. Quod-cl. 598. 9 (once in Livy w. 
 Quum-el. 508. n. :{:). Subjunc. or ind. of 
 the Quod-cl. 388; :3S0, 3. Wh^-n it may take 
 quia or qiioniam :388. n. *; 508, n. %• 
 
 laudationis est, w. Sul)). Inf. cl. 015. 11. 
 
 laus est, \\\ Subj. Quod-el. or Inf. el. 01:3, 2. 
 
 Law of consecution, see Consecution of tenses. 
 In reirard to the subjunc. dep. on pred. w. 
 epistolarv tenses ;3.50, C. 
 
 learning, Verbs of. constr. w. ab or e'x28,48. 
 
 lege agere, expl. 2.58, 2. 
 
 lest. Ent^l. con]., how to render 6.38, 2. 
 
 let (Engl, imperative) how expr. .382, 3. 
 
 lex, w. attr. Ut-cl. and Ne-cl. 625, C. Lex 
 e4. w. Subj. Ut-cl. 613, 3. 
 
 liberare, w. ab or mere abl. 29, 48; w. ace. of 
 pers. and gen. of thing 99, 484. 
 
 liberum esserw\ ab or mere abl. 29, 48. 
 
 libet mihi, w. Subj. inf. Diff. from placet lb. 
 
 libra, pound, standard of wei;:ht 275, 1. 
 
 libralis, weighing a pound 270, 3. 
 
 licere to be sold for. to be held at a certain 
 price; takes an obj. of price 207, 4; 94, 
 479._/^ic^/, impers. (it is allowed), w. dat. 
 80; 107,90. ijc^/ mi/a, different construc- 
 tions and signiflcaiions 017, 9.— Licet, w. 
 force or a concessive eonj. (= even if, or 
 although) w. subjunc. 695, 7. 
 
 likewise, Enszl. adv., how to be rendered 
 241. 5. Expr. by et ipse or idem 2.52, 9. 
 
 liquet, w. Subj. inf., or Subj. Inf. cl. 615, 1. 
 Yon liquet, w. intorroirative cl. .390. a. 
 
 litare, w. abl. 95,62.— Li^a^o, as impers. pred. 
 ahl. 180. 234. 
 
 little, Emrl. adv. of intcns. ; diff. ways of 
 expressing it in Lat. 264. 5. 
 
 I 
 
794 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 locare, to let, rent out, w. participial gerun 
 (iive 14S, ns ; w. obj. of price 2«.b, 2. 
 locatio and conductio operarum, nieanin<; ana , 
 rouHtruction of 148, ii. 1- t^.^.^- 
 
 Locative adverbs; gram, '.'ature 215.3 Fonna- 
 tiun (\ casrs w. ^»peCIfic endinj^s) 215, 4. 
 Synop^^iH 216. Of thi^ def. Jormyfnuide 
 etc.), as 8ynd. ant. of locative cl. 4W. 2. ; 
 575. Loc. adv. of indef. rel.. how formed 
 (ubiubi, or nbicnnque etc.) 501, 7. Used m 
 c<>mi)<)siti(m with other advi». 2J7. 8. 
 Locative cases, in nanu-H of citie^, etc. 21 ., 7 : 
 uf locaiivf advs.215,3; 217. rseofsi-c_on 
 case in place of the first {unde purfiuniO 
 217 5 4 Second case as completiniroDj. 
 of advs. of dismnre (proc'd vnl^) '^20, «. 
 i:se of third case 218, b. Fourth case inst 
 of first 21S, c— In relations of time and 
 niodalitv21S, a. . ^ *• ^, 
 
 Locative clauses. 574 foil.; interroorativo or 
 n-l<.tive:,Tl, H16. Attributive and advei- 
 l.iul locative els. 575, 1,2. Is»; and lorm 
 of attr. loc. cl. 375, Ii. Keferrin" to per- 
 goim as ants. 57»), D. M«>od "» J;»;- t'"'' 
 and ellipsis of irram. ants, lorus oii>, S. JH- 
 terrofiative loc. els. 57H, 4. 
 locus, w. irerundial «en. 1^9, ti. -Locum ca^- 
 // is- cape re 2.")7. 2. . inn r n 
 
 Logical tenses of dep. subjunctives 422 foil, 
 (s.-e Consecution of tenses), la restricting' 
 
 Si-cls. 742, 10. , 11 iin 
 
 lon-u8, w. ace. or pen. ; ''arely w. ahl 1 .5 
 4\iS—Iy)nrfumef<f. w. Mihj. Inf. «"'-^^ ';'*'' 
 lonninfi est q>iam w. Snhj. I l-cl. «ilO, n.t— 
 jA,nge, as adv. of distance 270. 7 ; as adv. 
 of intens. before superlatives 2(>4, 3. 
 
 loqui. w. intransitivf ace. 85, ly.). 
 
 luci, as local ivf case 225, 11. 
 
 lugere w. ace. 85, 39. 
 
 Macte, w. ahl. 120, 118. ^ 
 
 majrere. w. arc. 8.5. 39; w. ahl ncc, or de 
 
 !».{. 479; w. Inf. cl. or Quod-el. 5«»0. 
 magis, iisi-anddifT. from ;>/'/«' 754, . foil, in- 
 stances in which mrt7t^'. "ot />/«•< must be 
 used 7.50 foil.. A; Ii; D: Ej sK\xvnplu<< 
 not v\agiK must be used .o.), ( . ^V "*;^» 
 either ;>/'/>? or rnanU may he use(t K>b, f., 
 n. 2. Noil mafju q'lanu = '"^,'"^',';'*^.' 
 757. A: = 'asn.uch as' 758, /. ^^^•^ 
 quam = pofiu.i qnain 7.58 loll., 9. W ht-n 
 the comp. decree of descriptive ndjs. must 
 be formed by mnnii^ 7.59. 10; 754, A.- Ma- 
 ni.'iquam quod (<pna\ in-^t. ornnnqxo't. . . 
 miquod.\y. snbjunc. 7«n, i^-^---.^^''/'?- «'' 
 Pvnd ant. of ()uam-cl. elliptically omitted 
 7};7 1(5 -Mnqis est = 'there are more rea- 
 sons' w. Siibj. Ut-c1., or Quod-el. (il4, 4. 
 magnificum est w. Subj. Ut-el. 610, 4. 
 
 sii:r':;ttv':;i,j. Quo.|:oi 6.0 4 w.« 
 
 esf (mon- important) w. huhj. Ut-cl. hlO, 5. 
 malle. ccmstniciion, see velte ' w. comj). 
 
 QiiaTi-cl. im, U.-Malim and inanern in 
 
 optative sentences 3s;}, »). ,^ ,, „. , 
 malum est, w. Subj. Inf. cl. and Suhj. Lt-cl. 
 
 in the tame sentence 613, 2. 
 
 mandare, w. imperative claase 596, 6. 
 
 mane, 225, 11. _„ 
 
 manere, to remain, constr. w. pred. nom. 7.^, 
 4t>>. Ma/lire, to abide, w. abl. alter in 
 
 95, 58. , .. • 
 
 Manner (i. e. quality of actions) relation of, 
 ;>;kS loll. — .\dvs. of manner 228, .'>.>2. r.x- 
 pressed by participles(<7«a arr^mintia rsra 
 Interdixilset) 245, 7; hy abl. 243, lo . ; >y 
 cmn 244, 5 ; by modal clauses b3o fi»ll. ; uy 
 comparative clauses 744. 51. 
 
 to marry, how rendered 89, n. 8. 
 
 maturus, w. gerundial dat. 165, 2 ; mature, 
 t>«)on. how ustd 225, 4. 
 
 may Engl, potential auxiliary, expr. i>y 
 PKKs. snuuNC. in imperative sentences 
 383, 6 ; in declarative sent. 37S 1 ; in rel. 
 cl. 556, 1; in final Ut-cl. («7, 1 h'll. By 
 ruEs, iND., or FIT. of ;)0^sv3.9. a: hyiio-i 
 ,37'.>, a : 617, 9 : by ri^T. phes. :i52, U ; by 
 INI). MOOD ill indef. rel. cl. .50:?, 12. 
 
 maxime, in apodosis of comp. Quum-cl. «).57, 
 3. MuTime quod, w. lorcc of pviXsertitn 
 (itntm 1)84, 5. „„ 
 
 Measure of distance 220 foil. ^^ heri measure 
 of length etc. may be ext^res^ed hv a.ljs. 
 276 B. I'roporiional measure, by abl. ii\, 
 3. Units of measure, used hy the Romans 
 4!)S. 101. 
 
 mederi, w. dat. 89. , , 
 
 melius est, in ind. of a pret. tense used hy- 
 
 pothetieally 727, 74 foil. 
 memini, w. gen. 92,478. When it niav, or 
 inu>t: take" ace. 1«, 51; 93. .52. W . Int. cl. 
 58^, 23 ; w. pre8. Inf. referring to tho 
 past (i:i(), 5. ... ^„ 
 
 memor, w. gen. 118, 109; w. genindial gen. 
 
 mens, i"*»hl. to denote purpose m.56<5; 283.1. 
 mensis, month. Divishm of 227; how treat- 
 ed gram. 226 foil. Adjs. derived from it 
 
 »)OJJ \ 
 
 meUri a'iquein (aliquvf) nliqna re 100, 48.5 
 mctuere. as verb of fearimr. w^n«, «.r vtjne. 
 
 ftnn) rm. 1. Non metuere w. Quin-cl. 589,4. 
 metus, w. attr. Inf. el. 62.5, Ii. 2. 
 menm est w. Subj. Ut-d. 613, ». 
 Sue as measure of distance, different ways 
 
 of expressing it 220. 1. 
 mina, value of. 2»".8. 5. 
 
 mina'ri, w. dat. «•:»^ ^^\ 1"^;.,;"S.J'"\ ^^' ''• 
 pred. inf. in i)enphrastic lut l.n, 2 
 
 minister of war, how to be rendered 292, u.98. 
 
 ministrare, w. <lat. SO. , 
 
 ' minor points.' how to be rendered 29.'. n 3r^ 
 
 minus i's synd. ant. of comp. cl. ol nnhke 
 
 "intens. 7.52. .53; TA. 6 foil.; w-.phir. parti- 
 tive "en. used inst. of paunvref «52, 1. 
 Mvvrs mum=paucidre'i, Ib.-J/?;jr/.«, de- 
 noting h'^'s than a given number, how 
 constr. 7.52, 3 loll. 
 
 minute (division of the hour), how cxpr. in 
 
 1 "it '^26 1. 
 'minutM of transactions '=at/c/ori^a^<'* prce- 
 
 mirart' niore 'frequently w. Inf. cl. than w. 
 quod 590. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 795 
 
 mirum est, and mirabile est w. Subj.Quod-cl., 
 or Subj. Inf. cl. 6in», 2. Mirum est {= it is 
 strange) w. Subj. Ut-cl. 612, 6. Mirum, ni 
 708, K 
 
 mise et, impers., w. ace, as logical subj., 
 alonjr XV. gen. «JO, 484. 
 
 mittere, w. ad or d;tt. 14, 11; w. participial 
 gerundive H8, 178 ; w. double dat. 96, 65; 
 w. imperative cl. in the meaning 'to send 
 word ' .594 n. $. 
 
 Modal form-adverbs. Formation 239.15. When 
 phia<es must be used in iheir place 2."}9, B. 
 
 Modal clauses. Division 434, 1. Modal Diiin- 
 clauses 673, 5, Modal Quuin-cl.; their use 
 and iintods, 654, 1 and 2. 
 
 Modal Dt-clauses and Quin-claus?s. Division 
 into cl. ol manner, intensity, coincident 
 and consecutive action 635, 32. 1. Use and 
 omission of their synd. ant. (sic, ita, etc.) 
 (W6, 4; 4;i5, 2. Negative mod. cl. introduced 
 by ut uon 6-36, 2, by quin 636, 3. Mod. Ut- 
 cl. dep. on (ideo /ion mi. 3. W. the force 
 of concessive cl. 63»». 4, 1. Tense of the 
 subjune. in mod. Ut-cl. 434 foil. Ct)nflict- 
 in:,' statements of the «rrammarians4il. 11.*. 
 Exceptional use of plup. snbjunc. 43.5. 3. 
 When |)iet. modal Ut-cl. may, or must, 
 take perf. subjune. 4:i5 loll.; 4-39, C ; when 
 they must take imp. subjune. 436. 5; when 
 they may take eiiher pres. or imp. sub- 
 june. 436, 6; when they may take eiiher 
 perf. or imp. subjune. 4:iS, B. When the 
 tense of tin ».laii>e must correspond to tiie 
 tense of the priuc. pred. 410, 11. When 
 they take periphrastic tenses of the fut. 
 419, Ji. 
 
 Modahty. The different adverbial relations 
 cuinprised by it. 2-38 foil. 
 
 moderari (to yhap»; one'p actions), as verb of 
 striving, with ut or ns 599, 2. 
 
 modius, measure, 270. n. 1. 
 
 modo. as temp. adv. 22.5. 11 ; = just now 222, 
 n. *. (For 7nodo as particle, see P. I.) W. 
 the force of duminodo {— if but) w. sub- 
 june. 677. 14. This subjune. not subject 
 to consecution lb. Modo (if but) w. abl. 
 abs..a(ljs. oradvs.67S, oBs. 14; w. Ut-cl. lb. 
 
 modulus, a relative unit of measure 115. 101. 
 
 modus w. gerundial gen. 159, 3. In abl. to 
 express man.neu 243. 553. 
 
 molestus.w. dat. 118. 112; w. IT. sup. 121. 121. 
 
 moliri, as verb of striving w. ut or ?»e599, 2; 
 w. obj. inf. 600, 2. 
 
 mollis, w. gerundial after ad 192, 5. 
 
 monarchy, how to translate 279, n. 7. 
 
 monere, w. Ut-cl., or Inf. cl., according to 
 meaning 591, 1. W. imperative cl. 595, 4. 
 Karely w. obj. inf. lb. 
 
 Money, standard and denominations of, 
 2»18. 5. 
 
 Mood, in cond., concessive, causal etc. 
 clauses, see Subjunctive, and the articles 
 on eacli clause. 
 
 Mood in Quum clauses. In indef. Qunm-cl. 
 <:enerally ind. 645, 34; 645, OBS. 2 loll.— In 
 def. Quum-cl. either ind, or subjune. ac- 
 cording to the relation of the cl. to princ. 
 
 pred. 646— C52.— Mood in attr. Quum-cL 
 6.53, 36; in subj. Quum-cl. 644, 2; in com- 
 pared temporal cl. 761, D. In causal 
 Quum-cl. 654, 1. 
 mora, w. gerundial gen. 159,3; with attr. 
 
 Qiiominiis-cl. 625, D. 
 non morari {moram non intei^wnere)., constr. 
 
 w. quoininus or quin 603, n. §. 
 more, rendered by j^lus, magis, amjylius, or 
 comp. degree of an adj. or adv. 759. lU. As 
 abs. adj. = ;>///§ or amplius 7.54, 6; as attr, 
 adj. of nouns exI)ros^^ing quantity or qual- 
 ity = j)lus w. partitive gen. in sing. 7.54, 6; 
 referring to number = plures, or plus w. 
 partiiive gen. in pi. 7.52, 1; as adv. by ma- 
 yis 754 foil. A, B, I), E ; by pUn^, or option- 
 ally by magis or plus loo, 6'.— More money 
 = tnajor ptcunia 754, 6. 
 
 mos, in abl. (more), to denote relation of 
 manner ;^43, b ; 344, 4. J/cw est (tnoris est), 
 w. Sul)j. Ut-cl., or in pass, construction 
 w. Inf. cl. 614, 2 ; w. L'eruudial gen. lb.— 
 Morem gertre, w. dat. 89. 
 
 mori, makes the verbal aiij. moriturus from 
 its pres. stem 125, 127. In perf. as pred. 
 abl. (mortuo) 172, 3. Mortar si, use of, 348,5. 
 
 morigerari, w. dat. 89. 
 
 motus, perf. j)art., w. abl. as circumlocution 
 of motive 119, 115. 
 
 to move, neuter verb, to be rendered by 
 pass. o{inortre 51, n. 3. 
 
 movere, constr. w, ace. of neuter form-adjs. 
 along w. a transitive obj. 85, 39, 2. With 
 plus or magis 756, C, n. 2. Mozlre, ani- 
 nium facere, excifdre, incitare, adducere, 
 impellere, perpellere, cogere, suborndre, as 
 verbs of inducing, constr. w. ut, ne, or ge- 
 rundial after «(/602. 4. 
 
 mox, use of, 224, 3. 
 
 multiples, compared w. a simple, how expr. 
 7.5-2, 2. 
 
 multus (as form-adj., see P. I.). As acces- 
 sory })red. 251, 7. Cannot be used in the 
 positive in the relation of price and value 
 2(»7, 2. Mnltmn, as adv. of intens., its 
 gram, nature, and relation to the pi. multa 
 263. 1 ; 2t»3, n.*. Mullo, as adv. of intens.; 
 dill' from in nit inn 2W, 3. 
 
 munus est, w. Subj. Ut-cl. 613, 3. Muneri 
 mittere, 2.57, 2. 
 
 must, Eiiirl. potent, auxiliary, how expr. in 
 Lat. (periphrastic gerundial, oportet. etc.) 
 141, 164 ; by pres. or fut. of deffire 379, a ; 
 hy fut. tense of the verb ,3.52, B ; 352, 6 ; in 
 syllogisms .351, A. ' Musf w. 'have' as 
 perf. potential 145, 171 ; by oportMt w. 
 perf. inf. 351, 3. 
 
 Nam and enim, w. Inf. cl. in ©ratio obliqua 
 
 689, n. t. 
 narrare, in pass. w. nom. w. inf., exc. in 
 
 perf. and plup. 106, 87 foil, 
 natus (born) w. genindial after ad 192, 1 ; 
 
 natus (old), used of the aire of men 2-36, 5; 
 
 w. ace. 1 15, 498. Xatu as adjunct of major^ 
 
 minor, etc. 120, 118. 
 nauci est, 272, 3. 
 
796 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 oe (nejjative particle, = not, see P. I.), "scd 
 ins't. of non in rt ■^t^ictive claucfs intro- 
 duced hy dum. dutnmodo, or inodo (= if 
 but) H77, la foU. ; when used insst. of von 
 \v. reference to numeral excess (not more 
 than) 7M, 4.—ye...f/ui<fem after a nega- 
 tion, in the meatiing 'even ' 7.^-2, n. *. Ae 
 n. .qiiidein, not even if. idiomatic nse 
 732,2.— iVg, conjunction, = 'ihat not'." lest;* 
 wlien it mu5«t he used iust. ofw/! non: (a) 
 introduciii-' negative imperative cl. 594, 
 1 ; .V.H). fi; :i89. m) ; (f» «tep. on verba faci- 
 endi b*M. 25 ; (when ut non is used in thest^ 
 chiuses mi, u. *) ; (<•) in That-cl. of pur- 
 pose iuiH, 2 {>/f non »«8, 2 and 3) ; ((/) ne or 
 «/ nov ill Fact-cl. «07. .'S; (<-) \\hen used in 
 JSubj. Tliat-ci. Jill, 5 ; 612, (i ; 613. 3 ; 615, 
 28 loll. ; (/) wiien used in miKhil That-cl. 
 636, OBs. 2; ((f) when Uf<e<l in atrr. Thai-cl. 
 625! 7^2; «i25 C and D.—Xe multa, ellipti- 
 cal 'Final cl. 6;W. 3. 
 
 Ne-clauses, w. lorce of negative Dummodo- 
 claiises 678, no, 4.— Concessive Nc-clanses 
 0%^ 8.— Ne-clauses w. force of Enj;!. atlir 
 niative clauses («) dep. on verbs ot leariiiix 
 r)«9. 1 ; 0) as Sul)j. cl. of penculutn est 613, 
 3 ; ((•) w. v«tI)s of negative c(»niniand {iu- 
 terdicere,ritare) 597,7; (^) w. verbs im- 
 jjlytiig a negative aim {in'ohiMie etc.) 602.5. 
 necessarius, w, gen. or jjosnessive adj.. or 
 d;tt. IIH, 112; 119, 114; w. gerundial after 
 (id 192 3. 
 
 necesse'est! DitT. from opvfi €!>t, oportet. and 
 l)eriphrastic geiuiidiMJ 141. 103 Its use in 
 syllogisms 351. A. Meaning of iis future 
 tense 351, 3.— W. gerundial after ail 192. 
 3. W. perf. subjunc. corresi)on(iiiig to 
 Engl, potential w. 'must, iiavcM4.i, 171. 
 For construction w. Subj. cl. etc., see 
 0}X)rtet. 
 
 Necessity, idea of, how oxpr. in Lat. 140. 
 103. How to chanire tht; voice of Kngl. 
 verbs denoting necessity when to be ren- 
 dered into Lat. 144, 170. 
 nedum, particle, = much less; explanation 
 and use of 7-34 foil. Without a pred. 735. «>. 
 need not, how expr. in silver Latinity, 383, 6. 
 nefarius. w. H. Sup. 121, 121. ,. , , 
 
 nefas est, w. 11. Sup. 121, 121 ; w. Subj. Inf. 
 
 (1. 613. 1. 
 
 negare {non) w. Qiiin-cl. 580, 4. 
 Negation (i«i general see P. I.), llowexpr. 
 ill negative imperative eent. 383. 5. How 
 expr. in clauses, see ne, Ne-dattfies, rieyfie, 
 m, and /<m.— Negations as accessory pre- 
 dicates (niiUun, niliil) 251,8. In c<»nnection 
 w. ni.n, in the meaning ' only ' 739, 3 ; 740, 
 5 and 6. When tlie negations must be 
 blended w. other words, see P. I. 
 negotium dare (.i" i^h»i"K^). w. imperative cl. 
 
 5'.l»i. ti. 
 
 nequaquam. modal form-adv. 239, 15. 
 
 neque tas negative conj.. see P. I.), used as 
 equivalent of Engl, participial alter ' with- 
 out' 189, 3. Neque eo minus - neverthe- 
 less 476, 2. 
 
 nequicquam, modal forra-adv. 239, 15. 
 
 nescio quia {quid etc.) w. force of indef. adj. 
 
 3'.tti. 9. 
 
 nescire, w. interroirative cl. 390, a. 
 nescius, w. <r< n. 1I8. 109. 
 neutiquam, modal form-adv. 239, 15. 
 ni, C(Mid. negative ccmj., usetl in cond. cl. 
 ol doubtful nality 70«i. 8 foil. History of 
 the word 706, 8 : 707, 9. Not occurring in 
 Cffsar 70<), 8. Ni in si)onsions and wjiL'i-rs, 
 expl. 707. li and C Minivi ni,'^^^^., E. 
 Used inst. of ni4 707, I): 7a*', K-II. I«i 
 cond. cl. of non-reality 71.S 3 ; 718. n. * ; 
 719, n. *. „ ,^ 
 
 nihil, negative abs. form-adj. {^o(^ P. I.). 
 Midi abt'^t quin 487, a. M/dl a' bid ?nd, 
 idiomatic use without a pred. 740. 7.— 
 Ai/iil est Cras,<oroi)iosiu>i = nemo e>t co/d- 
 o.<ior 765, A. Nihil, as ucce-sory pred., 
 inst. of //OH '251, 8; in the ace. inst. oi non, 
 dep. on r<dZre. itocerr.vnpedlre, etc. 85,39. 
 'i.—Nihito before comp. 264. 3. Ni/iHi, as 
 neirative obj. of price and value 272, 1. 
 Nihdomini/siis synd. ant. (poslcedeni) of 
 conc.'s-ive claiiiies 692, 1 ; 700, 16. Mhilo 
 S'l-ius. 211, 5. 
 
 nimirum, di-rivation 708, n. t. 
 nimium, adv. of intens. 26.3, 31; 2f.3, 2. 
 When it takes the f»)rm /fjwavli). ; 260. n*. 
 nisi, distinction from n non in cond. d. of 
 doubtful reality 701 f<'ll. ^i non, not vM, 
 used in cond. cl. of exemplification (713, 
 17, tin.), and of doubt. ess reality 715,45. 
 Nisi in cond. cl. of UMn-rcaliiy 718, 3. 
 When It may be used in>t. ol n non to 
 coordinate negative cond. cl. 7.36. 2. A» 
 coOni. coiij. of indep. sentences {ni>i ta- 
 rnen) 738, 2 foil. AJ>t alter a previous 
 neL'ati»)n or univcr.-al = 'except.' 'but,' 
 in the coordination of clans» s. and of m«'m- 
 bers of the same sentenc»- 739, 3 ; 740. 4 
 foil. Nui w. participial clauses and abl. 
 »bs. 173, 2 ; 740. 4. Msi quod, 607. 2. MH 
 f&r'e. and tiisi rt?'0 741. 9. Mi fi 739, 3, 
 no. 6. M.yi me fallil {niM faVor) 742. 2. 
 niti, w. abl. 93.' 479. Mit and ndnVi, w. 
 geiundial after ad »90. '2*<9. 1 ; niii, adnVt, 
 enVi, as verbs ol strivii g, w. vi or ne 599, 
 2 : also w. obj. inf. 600, 2. 
 nive, 7;i8. 7. . , 
 
 nocerc, w. dat. 89 ; w. ace. of a neuter form- 
 adj. 85, 39. 2; w.plus, m>t 7naqis 755, ('. 
 noctu, locative case, ditlerent Irom uocte 
 225, n. , ^ 
 
 nolle, ccmstr. w. obj. inf., Inf. cl., vt, ne, or 
 mere subjunc. 592, OBS. 7. 1 foil. Nolim and 
 nollem in optative pent. 383.6. Noli, as 
 circumlocution of the negative impeiaiive 
 
 38:i, 5. , , V,, 
 
 nominare, as factitive verb, w. double ace. 
 
 Nominative (as Ribj. see P. I.); ascase of the 
 completing or accessory pred. 73 loll.; 'i4tj, 
 18 Double nom. w. lactitive verbs in the 
 pass. '201, 487. Nom. w. Inf. 106. Lsed 
 lust, of a Subj. That-cl. 484, 3. 
 
 non, neirative particle (see P. 1.). Its use in 
 imperative sentences 383, 6. In connec- 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 797 
 
 tion w. si and uf, pee these conjp. NoneM 
 ur 487, a. Non est quod in ind. of a pret. 
 ten-e. vv. hypothetical force 727, 24 fol . 
 nonnisi, = only, in the writers of the silver 
 age 710, »■». 
 
 nonnumiuam {nonnunquam), temp. adv. 2V4, 
 9. 
 
 North-west, how to express in Lat. 222, n. 6. 
 not even if, ln)w rendered 732, 2. Not . . .tilt, 
 not., hi/ore, by Priiisquam-cl. w. perl. ind. 
 670. 8. 
 
 nothing but, nobody but, hy nrhil mn. nemo 
 Tiixi, etc. 740, 5 : by niliil ali'id mn 740. 7. 
 ' Todo nothing else but,' how rendered lb. 
 Nouns, used as accessory pred. 2.52, 22.— 
 Nouns, expressitig the diflerent adverbia 
 n-lations, see these. Denoting price and 
 value, 267. Denoting the denominations 
 of money 26S, 5. Denoting tneasure of 
 distance 220, I : time 226. 1 ; weiirht, 275, 1. 
 novum est. w. Subj. Inf. cl. or Ut-cl. 612, 6. 
 noxius, w. dat. 612, 6. 
 nubere, w. dat. S9. , «-.e n 
 
 nudius w. ordinal numerals, expl. 225, 11. 
 nudus, w. al)l. l-'O. 116. , . ^ , _, 
 
 nullus asaccessorv pred., inst. of 7wn 2jI, 
 S; as pred. abl. 181, '231. 
 Numeral comparison, 752, .53. Numeral excess 
 (inure than ten, etc.), how exp. 7o3. 4. 
 Numerals (use (.f their different classes, see 
 P. I.>. How to express numeral multiples 
 (twice as much, etc.) 7.52. 2. 
 numquam (nioiquani). temp. adv. 222, J.— 
 
 X'lfH'/uam nnn, always, '222. 9. 
 nunc 222,9 an«l n.*; nunc ipsum,^i,r\* 
 ■ Nunc quuni, now that 493. 3 ; w. subjunc. 
 617. 3; nunc iwstquaui, w. pna. ind. 665, 11. 
 Nundin», as division of time '226, 1. 
 nuntiare, w. Inf. cl.59t, 1. 
 nuntius, w. gerundial gen. l-A 2; w. attr. 
 Ne-cl. 625, C. 
 
 nuper. expl. 225. 11. ^ , ^. , 
 
 nusquam, used boih as first and fourth loca- 
 tive case 218, b. 
 
 Ob prep. w. ace, use of '20, 31; denotnTj 
 imrnose '284. 2 : w. L'ernndial ace. 196, .543; 
 w participial phrase 19!>, 3. Ob causnm 
 '27'9 39- Ob w. Qiiod-cl (ob H quod) 607. 
 2. Verbs compounded w. ob take dat. 
 
 obidire! w. dat. 87, 474. Obediens w. dat. 
 
 lis 108 
 obesse, w. d»t. 88. Obest, used impers., how 
 
 eon sir. 622, 5. 
 
 SS^i'-n'pkting and incidental (adverb- 
 ral) t)9, 4.56; simple and compound .0, 4). ; 
 near and remote 9<». 4Sl. Onjects w. rela- 
 tive torin 526 foil. Euirl. compound objs.w 
 two objective cases generally correspond 
 to Latin compound objs. in ace. and dat. 
 
 ObLt-danses, definition 4S(), fnO. Without 
 a princ. ^ent. 481. oBS. Different gram, 
 forms „f comoletin,' Obj. clauses 482. 1. 
 Their gram, relation to princ. prod, 483, a. 
 
 Rein tion of Object That-cl. to Subject 
 That-clauses 483. 1 foil. 
 Obje^t-mfiuitive (Latin). Verbs constr. with 
 obj. inf. 103,77. Transitive and intransi- 
 tive verbs w, their substanrive objs. along 
 w. obj. inf. 101, 491. Obj. inf. dep. on 
 passives 103, 490. Use of Inf. clauses in 
 place of pass. obj. infs. 104 81. Obj. infs. 
 dep. on verbs of volition 592, OBS. 7, 1 loll.; 
 on permit fere 597, 8; on cogeie r>02. 4; on 
 verbs of doing w. neirative aim {proltiber"^ 
 recusdre, etc.) 602, 5.— Tense of obj. inf. 
 107, 493. Exceptional use of perf. inf. as 
 obj. inf. 107, 1-4. ^ . 
 
 Object-infinitive (Engl.>, rendered by Latm 
 iin'>eraii ve or inf. clauses 594. 1. How ren- 
 dei^ed after verbs of commanding 596, 6; 
 alter verbs of striving by Ui-cl. or Ne-cl. 
 600; after verbs of inducing by Ut-cl. or ad 
 w. geiundial 602, 4. When rendered by 
 final Ut-cl. 637. 33; with 'not to' 0:^8, 2 foil. 
 Rendered bv (iuin-cl. 604. 4; by rel. cl. of 
 l)uri)Ose .557, 5. Rendered by Latm pass. 
 Inf. cl. 630 3, no. '2. 
 objection, ' I have no objection ' =perme licet 
 tjir, 9. 
 
 objurgare, see reprehendere. 
 Oblique clauses, detinition 386, .597. Gram. 
 forms of 3^7 foil. Oblique Inf. cl. 387, 81. 
 Obi. finite clauses, declantive 388, 82; im- 
 perative 389. 83; interrogative 39 •, 84. ODl. 
 causal clauses, by enallage, t ikim: the form 
 of Inf. clauses dep. on a verb of saying 
 405, OBS. 3. Obi. Quod-clauses dep. on 
 verbs of emotion, praising etc. 492, n. *. 
 Oblique discourse, see Oratio obliqua. 
 oblivisci w. gen. 92.478; whenit may or must 
 take an ace. 92. 51 ; w. interrogative cl. 
 .39», a. Obntus, foriretful, w. gen. 118, 109. 
 obsecrare, w. imperative cl. 595, 3. 
 obsequi, w. dat. 87, 474. 
 observans, w. gen. 117, 108. 
 obsistere, see obsfdre. 
 
 obstare w. dat. v^8. Obstare, obsistere. adver- 
 sdn. intercludt-re. intercedere, deterrere^ 
 excipere, as verbs of hindering, consir. w. 
 lie or quominus 602, 5. 
 obtaining, Verbs of, constr. w. ab 28, 48. 
 obtemperare, w. dat. 87, 474. _ 
 
 obtinere, construction, see impetrare. 
 obtingit, impers., w. Subj. Ut-cl.; diff. from 
 conlinqit etc, 619, 7. 
 obtrectare, w. dat. 89. 
 obvenire, w. dat. 89. 
 obviam, along w. a verb of motion, constr. 
 
 w. dat. 89. 
 
 occasio, w. gerundial gen. 1.59, 3. 
 occupare, when it takes an obj. inf. 10.3, <8. 
 02currere, w. dat. 89, „ t \ 
 
 of Eu'd. prep., rendered by gen. (*ee P. I.); 
 
 bv (/e 32, 54; 31 51; by ex 30 and 31. 443. 
 
 Of, before pariicipials, rendered by relative 
 
 ci. in subjunc. 557,3; by gerundial gen. 
 
 2.59, \. — -Of course: rendered by quipfte 
 
 (•.89! .4. (for other Engl, equivalents, see P.I). 
 offensive and defensive warfare, how rendered 
 
 19t, n. 35. 
 
^:5 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 officium eat, w. Subj. Ut-cl. 613, 3. 
 
 old, w. immeral expr»'!»t»ions. in regard to 
 
 age of men. hv nat'is 115, 4fl8; 23H, 5. 
 Without numeral expressions by ^enex 
 (P. I.). Older w. numeral expr. {inajorvi- 
 g'lnti qiiinque annis or annorum) 707, 2. 
 Ohler, oldest, without num. exi»r. : major 
 nafii, nidj-ifnitM natu 1-20, 18.— llow old is 
 expr. itrelerrinir to things 270, 6. 
 
 olere, constr. \v. ace. 85. '^V^. 
 
 olim, adv. of time. DifT. from altQuando 
 and (piondani 223. 2. If opposed to present 
 time, constr. vv. imp. 31»). 2. 
 
 on Eni,'l. prep., rendered rf^32,54; circa 18, 
 Jt. 23, 1; in w. ace. 38, 08; e.r 2<>. 7^48; 
 31, 3; in w. ahl. 42 foil., 74. Jf denotin- 
 time, b.v mere ahl. 44. 78; 228. By hat. lu 
 several compound obj. phrases, 98, 69. 
 
 once, variously expr. -22;^, 2. 
 
 onerare afif/ne/n {(iHqnid) aliqud re 99, 485. 
 
 oneriferendo esse 1<)8, 1. 
 
 only, Knirl. panicle, rendered by ni»? after a 
 ne''ati»»n 710. 5; bv non),isi (silver Lat.) 
 740, G; 1)V ytihil aliud q'niin 749, 10. For the 
 ordinary Lat. equivalents of onlij, ^ee P. I. 
 
 onustus U-. al)l. 119, 115. . . 
 
 operam dare, equivalent toaverbof striving, 
 \v. ut or ne h%), 2. 
 
 opere, abl. orrvy//.s\ exponent of the relation 
 of intensity {niagnopere, tanlopere etc.) 
 2»;i, 2<>. 
 
 opinio, vv. attr. That-cl. in different forms 
 (;.'(. .1. 2. 
 
 opinor, parenthetically inserted 3%, 4. 
 
 oportet, dill, from opxa est. nec^.fixe est, and 
 the .'enindials 111, 163. Takes its logical 
 euhj. in ace. 107. 90, which, however, 
 fhould Ix^ considered a subj. ace. 020, 3, a. 
 roM>tructi«)n of oportet, necesfte est, and 
 opuii ext in reirard to the form of their subj. 
 clauses 020, 3 foil. OjX)rtet w. perf. sub- 
 iunc. corresp'Oiding to Engl. perf. poten- 
 tial w. '/nnst have' 145, 171. Use of Int. 
 tense of 0})Ortet :i51, 3. In the ind. of a 
 pret. t<'nse used hypotheticallv 727, 24 foil, 
 opportunns, w. g-rundial dat. 104, 1; w. ge- 
 
 riuniial after ad 192, 1. 
 optabile est, in ind. of a prct. tense used hy- 
 pottietically 727, 21 foil, 
 optare, constr. w. Ut-cl. or Inf. c1. r>02. ob«». 
 7 1. Optato. as impers. pred. abl. 180, 234. 
 optimus, w. II. sup. 121, n\. — Ontimwnest 
 ( - it i>i very strange) w. Subj. Ut-cl. 612, 6. 
 opulentus, w."al>l. 119, 116. 
 opus est, w. abl. 91, 479. Its construction 
 in General 9."), •. DilV. from oiHirt^t, ne- 
 ce^fieeM. etc. 141, 163: w. II. fiii>. 121, 121: 
 w. .'crundial alter ad 19>. 3; w. pirticipial 
 phras.' in ahl. 173, 1. For form ol its Subj. 
 cl. see oportet. 
 
 orare, w. imi)erativc cl. .595. 3. 
 oratio in atiqutm, more usual than contra 
 at'iq. 41. 7i. 
 
 Oratio obliiua (oblique discourse) 7<i8 foil. 
 Detinilioii 7t)8. 607, and OBs. 1. Must he 
 considered as dep. on the idea of obliqaity 
 708, 1. When pronouns of 1. and 2. per» 
 
 may be used in or. obi . 709, 4. Conversion 
 of the-e t)ron. into tho.<e of the 3. pcrs. 
 7(i8, 3; 769. 5. Form of the pred. in or. 
 <>bl. {a\ of declarative seiitenci-s 709. 0; (h) 
 of interrogative sent, (whether inf. or sub- 
 June.) 7«»1», 6; (c) of imperative sent. 770.7: 
 Kd) of dep. clauses 770. 9. — I.imitationj)f 
 law of conseculion in or. obi. 770, 1 ; 771, 
 12; 420, rt. Transition from or. obi. into 
 oratio di recta 771, 1 1. Int. rl. after (/wj/v'« 
 089, n. t; after nam and enlin lb. 
 
 orbua w. abl. 120, 110. 
 
 Ordinal numerals (for their ordin.".ry use, sec 
 1*. I.). Distinction between the adverbial 
 forms in um and o 224, 0: 250. 2 and 3. 
 Ord. num., inst. of Enu'l. cardinals, to 
 de-ignate the lenirth of periods 2.3.5. 2. 
 Did", in computinir by ordinals in Lat. and 
 En«/1 . 2:«, 4. Ord. num. as accessory pred, 
 2.50 foil. Diff. of these from the adverbial 
 {orm>* {primus, primum, or ])rimo.^) 250, 
 1 foil. 
 
 oriri, w. gerundial abl. after ab 195, 243. — 
 In the perf. as pred. abl. 172, 3. 
 
 ornare aliquem (alionid) aliqud re 99, 485. 
 
 otinm, w. irerundial gen. 159. 3. 
 
 ought to (have), how expr. in Lat. 727. 24. 
 (inim. analysis of this form, and of it3 
 Latin equivalents Il>. 
 
 over, Engl. prep, rend !• red supra and per\1\ 
 21, 32 : trans 24, 4:J8 ; ill w. abl. 42, 74 ; 
 super OS. 
 
 Pace tua (alicujus), or cum pace {pace bona) 
 2.59 . .3. c. 
 
 pacisci w. imperative cl. .595. 5. 
 
 palam, semi-prepos. w. abl. 114. 98. 
 
 palmus. as measure-unit 115. lol. 
 
 paludatus, accessory pred., ex|)l. 218, n. ♦. 
 
 pangere, w. imperative cl. (only in perf. 7)^- 
 phji) .595, 5; 50.5, n. **. 
 
 par", w. gen. or dat. 119, 113: w- abl. (alinn 
 aliqud re) 120. 110; w. dat. and abl. gerun- 
 dial 104, 1.: as synd. ant. of comp cl. of 
 quality, followed by uc. atque. or vt 745, 2. 
 Parent, it is proper, w. Subj Inf. cl. (uot 
 
 Ut-cl.) on, 5. 
 
 at par (to buy, sell at par), how to be ren- 
 dered 404, n. 31. 
 
 parare, w. obj. inf.: rarely w. Ut-cl. 600, r. t- 
 J'ar'ffi/s, w. irerundial dat. 101, 1; w. gerun- 
 dial after ad 192, 4 ; w. relative cl. in sub- 
 junc 557, 3. 
 
 parcere, w. dat. 89; w. gerundial dat. 103, 209. 
 
 Parenthetical clauses. A. Relative clau>^es, 
 how nnd' reil iiiio Enijl. 510. .3. Idiomatic 
 jiarenthetieals: Quod sciam; qnod com mo- 
 do fuo , fieri jM)<sif: quo I atfinet ud ; quod 
 reliquum est; qnai^quanta) tua est humani- 
 tas: qu(f> sunf t)arl>arbrum inqtnia 518 foil. 
 — 7/. Final Ut-cl. w. subjunc. ( = Enul. int. 
 w ' /o') 038. 3.— r. Comparative Ut-cl. = 
 a^747, E; =for'-Al,F.—D. Parenthetical 
 Si-cl. 742, 11. 
 
 parere, w. dat. 87, 474. 
 
 particeps, w. geu. 118, 109; w. gerundial gen. 
 161, 207. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 799 
 
 Participial constructions, i. e. participial form 
 of sentences, as asuhdivisitmol' non-finite 
 clauses (see V. D. Pauticipi.\l riuiASE 
 is tlie predicative phrase of a participial 
 clause, being either an ordinary, or re- 
 versed participial plirase 150, R. 185. See 
 Reversed participial phrases. Participial 
 clauses w. Ibrce of relative clauses 541, 15 
 foil. ; w. forc<' of cond. cl. 733, 2; w. force 
 c.f temporal cl. in place of abl. abs, 174. 
 218 ; 175, 2. Panic clauses introduced by 
 conjuncti -us : by anttquam 671, 11; by 
 qwpi>e, »W9, .4 ,* by quamquam, quamv'is, 
 etsi 111».'). ; 097. 11 ; «)99. 14 ; by nUi 740, 4. 
 Participial gerundive, when used and how. 
 147. 177 Verlts by wliicli it may be gov- 
 erned 148, 178. llow to recast an Enirl. 
 sent, to render it by a part gerund. 148, 
 180. Ad w. gerundial sometimes used 
 inst. of part, trerundives lb. 
 Participles (Latin). For constructi(m of 
 pre^. and pert. part, see P. I.— Pres. part, 
 w. gen. lit, 108. Use as accessory pred. 
 240 foil. — Part, of the peripurasiic future 
 (verbal adj. in urus) as accessory pred. 
 139. 158: as thesis of cond. cl. 714, 20, .4. 
 The term 'participle of pass, fut.' gene- 
 rally applied to the verbal adj. in das if 
 used as participial or attributive gerund- 
 ive \ii\, 120 ; 120. n. 1. 
 Participles (Engl.) rendered by verbal adj. in 
 Cirus i:}9. 1.58; bv c<»ord. rel. cl. 520, 1 ; by 
 eausd rel. cl. 509, 9 ; by motial Quum-cl. 
 054. 1. .. , 
 
 parum, adv. of intens. 204, 5 ; w. irerundial 
 dat. 105. 2; Parum/ter. temp. adv. 22.'), 11. 
 Passive voice. lis intluence on construction 
 of verbs 70. 4.59. Personal passives 71. 6. 
 Impers. pass, and their «litlerent kinds 71, 
 460. Use of impers. jiass. 71, 9. 10. I'ass. 
 inf. useil impeixmally 72, 11. Lat. impers. 
 pas.s. corresponding to Engl, personal 
 pa«s. 71, 9. Verl)s governing dar. nuist 
 take an impers. form in the pass. 92, 477. 
 passus, as measure 115, 101. Passuum, un- 
 derstood w. inillia 2-.»l, n. 8. 
 patere, w. ace. of distance 220, 3 ; as general 
 verl» denolinu' dunension, w. ace. 276, «J*. 
 Patet w. Subj. Inf. cl. 675. 1. 
 pati, w. ace. and «)bj. inf. lOl.aS; w. Inf. cl. 
 5^<8, 23. Construed like jufjrre 597, 8. 
 Karely w. Ut-cl. 598, 8. As verU of emo- 
 tion (facile pati etc.) w. Inf. cl. 598, n. *. 
 patiens! w. gen. 117, 108. 
 pauci, as indef. numeral adj. see P. I. Pauci 
 qui w. subjunc. 550, 1. Paucidres, as synd. 
 jint. ofcoiiip. Ciuam-cl. of unlike numbers 
 7.5-2. 1. 
 
 paulli3per(;>a'//'i>'/>^r), temp. adv. 225, 11. 
 paulLum ( /w//"//n used as adv. of intens. 
 •203, 31 ; 2«')4, 5. When pau/lo must b<^ used 
 264, 3. Paiillum (^)est w. Q,uin-cl. 628, 8. 
 pauper, w. abl. 120. 116. 
 pecunia, what attributes it takes to express 
 quantity 267, 2. Ptruni<e repefundiP, 149. 
 11. ♦*. Pecuniam niutuamdare^ acctii-sovy 
 
 pred. a48, li. 20. 
 
 pendere, error about this verb in the lexi- 
 cons corrected 275, n. *. Pendere, as verb 
 of esteeming, constr. 272, 1.— Pendere, 
 constr. w. ex 29, 48. Pendere (not pen- 
 dere). to weigh (= to be of a certain 
 weight) 275, 2 foil. 
 
 penes, prep. w. ace., use of, 24, 44. 
 
 penitus, 242. obs. 
 
 per, prep. w. ace, use of 30 foil. Dift'. from 
 i/y/fr 21, ;i3: from i/i w. abl. in the mean- 
 ing 'durinu'' 45, n. 1. To denote time 
 during which an action lasted 235, 3. Per 
 causam 280, 1. Per as equivalent of the 
 nbl. of means 277; to introduce logical 
 subj. of licet 617. 8 ; a>* intensive prefix; 
 also separately 203, 7. Ptr, couipounded w. 
 neuter verbs, makes them transitive 86,473. 
 
 Perfect (ind.), use of 302 foil. General theory, 
 and relation to imp. :300, 509. Relation to 
 End. Pres. perf. 428, oBS. 3 ; 302. .570, obs.; 
 Jiii;^, 40; ;^)4, 47. Rendered by Engl. pres. 
 300, 43; 300 obs. Negative meaning of 
 perf. (f'uimus = non sumus) 'W3, 3. Use of 
 perf.. if the pred. refers to indef. time :304, 
 48; if the action is complete at th<; time 
 spoken of 304. 571 ; if the action holds good 
 at every time (by later writers) 305, 572. 
 Perf. or imp. according to the author's 
 standpoint in regard to the time of the 
 action 314. 50, 1. Rendered by Engl pro- 
 gress, form of pret. 320; 322,1. When 
 used for repeated action 325, 04; 325, 2; 
 w. scepe 3-^5, 3; 32ti ; w. semper 320. 3; w. 
 quotidie 326, 5 : w. tatndiu.. .quamdiu 322, 
 
 01. Solebat or solitus est? 343, 71, 1 and 
 
 2. W. force of Eii<rl. plup. 340. 4; of fut. 
 perf. 355. 8. Perf. and pres. in periods of 
 contingent action :«0. 5. Epistolary pert. 
 a57. 77; :i57, 2. Perf. ind. in Quum-cl. 049. 
 7 and 9; ib\, 2; when rendered by Eni.'l. 
 pres. 04.5,3; in Postquam-cl. 001 foil. (w. 
 force of fut. perf. 062. n.*); in .\ntequam- 
 cl. 007, 4 ; 009, ; 070. 8. Exceptionally 
 used after dam = while 072, 4 ; 073, 5. 1 
 and 2. Perf. after quoad=l\\\ 679, 2i» : after 
 dontc ()S0. 22; asi. 24. In Si-cl. of doubt- 
 ful reality 703, A foil.; 711, 15 ; 713. 18. In 
 Si-cl. of doubtless reality 715, 45.— Pert, 
 ind. of potential verbs {potui, debui etc.) 
 in ordinary and hvpothetical meaniuir 727, 
 24 foil. ; of ordinary verbs w. hypothetical 
 sc^ise 7:W. Perf. of periphrastic fi'.t. 131, 
 143; of periphrastic gerundial 14.5, 514. 
 IrrcLMilar ccmsecution of tenses after a per- 
 fect {a) if implying a present tense 428, 3; 
 Kb) after inrenti (reperfi) sunt 429, B, 2 ; 
 (c) referriuir to the speaker's time 4-2i», B, 
 1 • 420, 0. Consecution after perfect verbs 
 4l'9. 6. . ^. , , 
 
 Perfect subjunctive w. ne imperatively used 
 a^3 5; of guarded statement, iinidying 
 'perhaps' :^78. 2. P.rf. subj. as tense of 
 pres. consecution 414 foil. Dep. on pret. 
 pred, 429 foil. ; dep. on another perf. sub- 
 junc. 4:J0. 7 : in modal Ut-cl, 4:^5. 4 ; 430. 4. 
 Perf. subjunc. in Antequam-cl. 671, 10; in 
 cond. periods of doubtful reality 712, 17; 
 
800 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 801 
 
 713, 19. Antecla??ically w. force of a hy- 
 potlu'tical pliip. siibjnnc. 726, 21. 
 
 perferens, w. *;ri\. 117, 108. 
 
 perficere, as verb of doini;, w. ut or ne 600, 3. 
 
 perfrui, w. al)l. 9-3, 47!>, no. 9. 
 
 perfungi, w. abl. 93, 479, no. 9. 
 
 perhibere, in pass., w. noin. and inf., except 
 ill pit', ami pliip. 100, S7 loll. 
 
 periculosum est, w. subj. Inf. cl. 000, 3. 
 
 periculum est, w. snbj. Nc-cl. 613, 3. 
 
 peril, I am lost. 303, 2. 
 
 perinde {proind<), adv. of manner, itf» use 
 •Z\l 5; as Hvnd. ant, of compar. cl. of 
 ciiiality 745, 3". Conjs. u.scd after it lb. iVr- 
 i///i^ Hf — arrordincc aa lb. 
 
 Periodical co-ordination, definition 473, 4 ; 
 made bv demonstratives lb. ; by nam, 
 itaqne, etc. 474, 5; hy relatives .VJO, !» loll.; 
 by qnnnuiuam and f7.-« 098, Vi. ; 0!»9, 14. 
 
 Periphrastic conjugation, d<linition and divis- 
 ion 1-20, 503. Tliore is no peri|)brastic 
 conjii'-ation of the i)re8cnt participle, as 
 in Enu'l. 12<i, 131. 
 
 Periphrastic future, conjnuation and use of 
 l-i\k, ."j07 loll. : \v. ridiri, iiist. of w. e.<.<!e 
 130, 141, n. Present ten.-e of periphr. Int. 
 1.30 141 IinixTf, ordinarv and hypotbeti- 
 cal'iise 131, 143; 132, 141: 729, 27; as equi- 
 valent of a verb of resolution, w. quasi- 
 pubohliqne clause dep. on it 407, 1, no. d ; 
 its elliptical construction w. Si-cl. 714, 20, 
 A. Imp. of per. fut. as epistolary tense 
 3.59, 1).— Perl, of periphr. lut. 131, 143 loll.; 
 729, 27. Pin p. of periphr. fut. 133, 140 
 Future tenses of periphr. fut. 133, 147. 
 Pres. inf. 134, .508; nom. w. inf. i;i.5, 149; 
 perf. inf. i:«, 1.51. Equivalents of periphr. 
 flit, when the verb is in pass, voiee 130, 
 509. Circumlocution by iri 137. 158.— Use 
 of snbjuiic. of periphr. fut in dep. clauses 
 (periphrastic tenses) 448 foil.; after verbs 
 of fearini,'448, 2; after verbs of doubtinj? 
 449, 3; in dep. questions 449, 4: in sul)- 
 oblique clauses in general 449, li ; not in 
 final clauses 449. 5; not as converted tense 
 of a dep. fut. 4.50. C. Siibjunc. of ordiiuiry 
 tenses colloquially used inst. of subjuuc. 
 ])eriphr. fut. 451. I). 
 
 Periphrastic gerundial, 140 foil. Meaninir of 
 140, 511; UU, 102. Kelaiion to periphr. 
 fut. 140, 100. Passive meaninj; of depo- 
 nents as periphr. «.'erundives 140, 101. Dift'. 
 between gerund, and gerundive 141, 512 ; 
 
 142, 513. Gerundives must be transitive 
 verbs 142, 513 ; gerundive form of vti,frui, 
 fungi, and jwCin, unusual in good i)rose 
 
 143. n. 1.— Periphr. gerundials take their 
 passive agent in dat. 143, 2 ; when ab is 
 used as pass, agent 113, 117. Impersonal 
 cerund of intransitive verbs 143, 165. 
 Impers. srerunds \v. transitive acciis. in 
 Varro and Lucretius 143, 100. Rendering 
 ol impers. gerunds 143, 1(W. — Periphr. 
 gerundials in perf. and imp. ind. 11.5, 514; 
 w. hyuothetical meaning 171 ; 727, 24 foil.; 
 In perf., imperf., and piup. subjunc. 14.5, 
 172 foil. Future of periphr. gerund. 351, 
 
 3;ofprc3. and perf. inf. 146, 515. Verba 
 which are construed w. gerundial pred. 
 inf. 140. 175 ; .593, 9 ; 594, 1 ; 595, 5. Perf. 
 inf. w. non-hypothetical meaning 147, 176. 
 Participles of the periphr. gerundive (i. e. 
 verbal adjs. in duf<) w. the force of attrib- 
 utive or al)s. adjs., or of rel. cl. 149, 182. 
 
 Periphrastic (perfect* participles with the copu- 
 la; 127 loll. DitV. between iieriphrastic 
 l)re8. inmdtns sum) and perf. pass. 127, 
 133. Dill", in the past tenses 127, 134 ; 128, 
 137. Periphrastic pluperfect {avuVusfue- 
 ram) 128. 130. The two fut. tenses 128, 
 137. Periphr. inf. 128, 138. Ccmsecutiou 
 of tenses in clauses dep. on the pres. of 
 the periphr. participle 428, 4 foil. 
 
 peritus, w. gen. 118, 109; w. gerundial gen. 
 Itil. 207. 
 
 permanere, to abide by, generally constr. w. 
 ill 9.5, r)8. 
 
 permissu, ])v permission 242, op.s. 
 
 permittere, w. tlat. and obj. inf. 104. 83 ; w. 
 gerundial dat. 103, 209 ; w. dat. of the pers 
 along w. imperativecl..597,rt. Exceptional 
 constructions of j^termittere lb. Original 
 meaning of permittere vt .597, n. Ii. Per- 
 7ni(tere vtlictatlb.—W. parlicii)ial gerund- 
 ive 148, 17.-«. 
 
 permotus, w. abl., as circumlocution of mo- 
 
 live 11!», 115. 
 
 perpellere, construct icm of, see mov^re. 
 perquam, adv. of intens. 202, 3. 
 perseverare, to abide by, generally constr. w. 
 
 ill 95, .5S. 
 
 perspectus, w. dat. 119, 112. 
 perspicuum est, w. Subj. Inf. cl. 600, 2. 
 persuaders, w. dat. 89 ; \\. Ut-cl., or Inf. cl. 
 according to meaning 594, 1 ; w. impera- 
 tive <lause 59.5, 4. ,..n .m- 
 perterritus, w. abl. = from fear of 119, 115. 
 pertinax, w. gerundial alter <td 192. 5. 
 pertinere, w. ad 14, 11 ; w. f.r'"»tiia after 
 ad 190, M), 1 ; w. ace. of distance 220, 6. 
 J'ntiiiet, impers., how used and constr. 
 622, 3. .^ . 
 pervenire, to arrive, constr. w. ace. alter tn 
 37. f.7. 
 
 pervincere, construction of, see rincere. 
 pes as measure-unit 115, 101 loll. ; jus qua- 
 drat us 110,104. 
 
 petere, w. imperative cl. .595, 3. 
 piget, impers., w. logical suhj. in ncc. 107, 
 «H) ; w. ace. along w. gen. 99, 484 ; w. Subj 
 (iuod-cl., Subj. Inf. cl. abmg w. ace. of 
 loi:ical subj.. or w. pass. Inf. cl. 018, 1. 
 pignori dare 2.57. 2. 
 pingui (crassa) Minerva li^l, obs. 1. 
 Place re.allon of. how e.\pr. 21.5, 54S. 
 placere, w. dat. «^9. Plact. impers., takes 
 its log. subj. in dat. 107, 90. Dift". m.-an- 
 ings and constructions o\' pfartt, in respect 
 tolts subjects and ol)jec*s 616, 8 lull, /b'i 
 placet 7-i'Z\ 11. 
 plaudere, w. dat. 89. 
 play on the violin, bow rendered 9.), 62. 
 plenus, w. gen. 118, 1U9 ; w. abl. 118, 110; 
 119, 116. 
 
 I 
 
 pleriquc in the nom., as adjunct to abl. abs. 
 170,1 (foritsuseasindef. lorm-adj.,see P.I.) 
 plerumque, temp. adv. -222, 9. 
 pluere, w. abl. 9.5, 62; as pred. inf. without 
 
 subj. aco. 0-29, •>. 
 Pluperfect indicative, use of .340 foil. Denot- 
 ing siate :W>. 1; exceptionally of actions 
 happening at, or after tiie time spoken ot 
 346. 3. Plup. deponent w.fueram ;i47, 7. 
 Plup. w. force ol a future-pluperfect :i55, 
 8; w. force of a fiit. perf. 358. .5. Episto- 
 larv pluperf. 357, 77 ; -3.58, 4. Plup. in cl. of 
 c«>ntini:ent action 329 foil., OBS. 1 and 3; 
 :«0. 4 and 5. Plup. ind. iu temporal Quum- 
 cl. not referring to continirent action 0.52, 
 14; in princ. sent, of appositive Quum- 
 cl. 652, 16; 331, 3. In PosUiuam-cl. 601 
 full. Plup. of repeated action, W>2. C. 
 Plup. after pattijuam = ever since 664. 2; 
 in Anteqiiam-cl. 609, 0; in Dum-cl. {dnm 
 = whilei 072, 4; w. d'/m = alter (collo- 
 quially) 07:3, n.*; in Si-cl. of doubtful 
 reality 703. Ii. : 703, 6'.— Plup. ind. of po- 
 tential and onlinarv verbs used in hypo- 
 thetical sense 728. 27; 730. 
 Pluperfect (Engl.) rendered by Latin imperf. 
 ;i40 4; 721, 17 loll. ; by Lat. imp. <»r perf. 
 111(1. 379, 5; 728, 27. In cl. introduced by 
 'tiir rendered by Lat, imperf. subjunc. 
 after dam 679, 18. In cond. cl. of virtual 
 nou-realitv and indef. cond. cl., corre- 
 gponding'to Lat. imperf. subjunc. 715. C; 
 the same in i)eriods on non-reality 724, 17 
 foil.—' One would have said' etc. = di- ^ 
 cerex etc. .379. 3. 
 
 Pluperfect subjunctive in optative sent. 38-3, 
 0; iu declarative sent. 379, 4 ; in temporal | 
 Quum-d. 651, 14; in Autequam-cl. 070,9; 
 671. 10: in cond. cl. of non-reality 724, 16. 
 llvpothetical plup. snbjunc. generally re- 
 quire preterite cou-^eciitioii iri clauses dep. 
 ou them 430. 8. Exceptions 431, 9. 
 plus, quantitative abs. comp. adj. (see P. \.\ 
 I'lu'i, as ai)s. adj.. followe 1 by quam-cl. 
 751, 0. Pluif, w. pirtitive gen. in numeral 
 and intensive compari-on 752, 1 and 3; 
 754. 6. Denotintr numeral excess (plus 
 decern) 752, 3. Fide-f pins quam Pu/nca 
 7.53. .5. P/a'i (accus.) used adverbially 263, 
 2 ; 754. 7 foil. Its ditl". from 7na:/is 751, A, 
 foil. See viaqis.—'^on pl"s quam = as 
 little as 7.57, A, foil ; = as much as 7.58, 
 Ji ; non ;?''/< quam after another negation 
 757, A.—Pl'/sc'dam w'vh quam 751, 6.— 
 Plitrea. more, as syndetic ant. of compar. 
 clauses relerriiiL' to unlike numbers 752, 
 1 —PliiH'i as «ren. of price and value 270, 
 ^:^.-^riurimam (mostly) as adv. of intens. 
 263 31; when plurimc is used in its place 
 2()1. li.—Plurinii and pluriino as gen. and 
 alil. of value and price 270, 35 ; 272, 1. _ 
 pcBnitet, impers., t.ikes its logical subj. in 
 ace. 107, 90; constr. w. ace. along w. gen. 
 99 481 • w. subj. inf. alcmg w. acc. ot the 
 io'Vical subj.; w. Sub). Quod-cl., or pass. 
 IiPf. cl. 618, 11. Pcenitendum est, as peri- 
 phrastic gerund 149, n.* 
 
 poUere w. phm, not maqis 755, C. 
 
 poUiceri, constr. w. Inf. cl., the pred. mf. 
 beiii-' in peripliraslic fut. 134, 2; 593, 11. 
 
 ponderis esse, 270. 3. 
 
 pondo, standard of weight; its gram, treat- 
 ment 275, 1. 
 
 pone, prep w. acc, use of, 22, 37. 
 
 porro, temp. adv. 244, 10. 
 
 poscere., w. doubU; acc 100 480; how constr. 
 in tin- pass. 101, 73. Not constr. w. im- 
 perative cl. in good prose 595. 3. 
 
 posse (w. obj. inf, see P. I.), cimstr. w. acc. 
 of a neuter form-adj. 85,39,2; w. quanti- 
 tative neuter form-adjs. {pluiiinnm posse, 
 etc.) 104, 82; w. plus, not viaqi^ 75.5, C. 
 Its use in the ind. w. force of Engl, poten- 
 tial mood w. 'can' 379, 5; its hypotheti- 
 cal use in ind. of a pret. tense 727, 24 foil. ; 
 meaning of its fut. tense 351, .3. 
 
 possible, ' It is possible that,' how rendered 
 107, 493, 1. ' While it is possible ' 289. n. 
 27 'It is not possible.' 292, n. 99. 
 post prep. w. acc, use of 22, 435 ; diff. from 
 secundum 22, 2 and 3; w. reversed parti- 
 cipial phrase 198. 545; diff. from abi. abs. 
 198 OBS. 1 ; w. the force of jwstqnaw (= 
 ex qwt femim-e) 665. 9. Idiomatic use w. 
 ordinal nu-merals 233, 2. Post, used as 
 adv. w'. abl. of diflerence 22. :«: as adv. 
 or prep. w. numeral expressions of time 
 2:32. Verbs compounded w. post take dat. 
 90 45. 
 
 postea, compound temporal adv. expl. 217, 8; 
 w. an imperf. 310. 2. 
 
 posthac, compound ti^mp. adv.. expl. 2i7, 8. 
 
 Postiuam-clauses, require ind. 0,59, 1. Eight 
 
 pa^sa^es extant in which Postquam-cl are 
 
 constr. w. subjunc. Jb. Attributive Po<t- 
 
 nuam-cl. w. plup.; their different significa- 
 tion- 600, 41, 2. — Postquam-cl. pmperly 
 comparative clauses GfO, 41. 2. Tenses 
 after postquam mostly correspond t<» the 
 tenses in indep. sent. 660. 42, 1; 663 5. 
 Use of tense when ;w.-/7>/(-»n means 'after 
 (iOO. 1. Perf. or plup. 66!. 3 ; 601. 24 ; 662, 
 C and D. Imperf. ind. 0(i2. 5 foil. His- 
 torical pres. 0«54, 6. Diff. of jw.^fqnam from 
 
 quum w. plup. ^"'Xi- «"^^ '^^* *^^l\ ^ '^''; 
 Posfquam = as soon as t;02. />. — Use and 
 ten-^e of Postquam-clause when postquam 
 means ex quo tempore (since) 664, 7 foil. 
 Perf. or plup. »)4. 7: pres. 664, 8. Post- 
 quam - dum, quoad, quamdiu 664, 8; = 
 whereas, while 60,5, 11. W. force of c«m- 
 cessive cl. ()()5. 10. -Postquam-cl. referring 
 to indef. time 005. 10: w. pred. in pres. 
 661. 1.2; 664, 8 ; 66.5, 10 and 11. Postquam 
 not used = tohenever {\W. 2. 
 postremus, as accessory predicate, and ditf 
 irom uttimus 2.50, 4. Postreino, adv. of 
 time, use and diff. from tandem and dent- 
 que 223 5. PostrSmum est, w. Subj. Ut- 
 
 postridie, different constructions 22o, 11; W. 
 
 acc in regard to dates 227, 3. 
 postulare, w. imperative clause, or pass. Inf. 
 
 cl. 595, 3. 
 
802 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 potens. w. gen. 118, 109; w. gernndlal gen. 
 
 It.l, -^07. 
 potestas, (liff. from impennm 197, n. 1. 
 potiri w. }il>l. «).i. 54 : 1)3, 4?.». n. 5»; f^oini'times 
 
 w. -.11. '.»2.478 (/>o/7W (iidlidr'tm 284. Ex. 
 
 m.^ Treated as transitive verb in the lonn 
 
 of a •gerundive l.">2, 18S. 
 potissimus, a- ace. pred. 250, 5; w. gcrundml 
 
 alter <i I 1U2, 1 (for ]X>(hdmu7n as particle, 
 
 sec P. I.). 
 potius, its use in romp. el. 7.58, 9. \d('^ire, 
 
 ant) pafius, without coinp. cl. 7.")9, 9. I'o- 
 
 (ius fi'ft out with velie and a comp. Quain- 
 
 el. 7f,;i. 1:3. . . , . 
 
 pound, how expr. in the lelation of weight 
 
 y..). 
 
 I loll. 
 
 practical, how rendered 254, n. 18, 19. 
 
 pra, prep. vv. abl., use 33, 447. As adv. 
 
 coiisir. w. comp. cl. 764, 14, n. 4. ^Verbs 
 
 compounded w. pnv take dat. 90, 45. 
 prabere, w. pariieipial «^.-rundive 148, 178. 
 
 ,Si- pnedere as factitive verb w. double ace. 
 
 101. A. 
 
 prsBcipere, oonstr. like imperdre, see tliis». 
 pracipiteaa ire. arctss. j)rt'd., expl. 24'.», 3. 
 praecipue, in apodosis of comp. Quum-cl. 
 
 ti.'):. .\ (u-e as parti<le, see V. \.\ 
 praeclarus w. ahl. 120. lir.. Pnedari'^.^tmu/^ 
 
 lihtr. different from pnccIanMine H-npfi':" 
 
 lih^r 1!«». n. W.—PnTcldruin est^ w. Subj. 
 
 Ut-cl. or Inf. cl. (111. 5. 
 praecurrere, w. dat. or ace. 91, 475. 
 prfflditas, w. abl.. idiomatically used 119. ii.5. 
 praeesse, w. dat. 87, 48^4 ; 88, n. 1; w. gcrundial 
 
 d.it. If.:}. 209. 
 prsferre, w. dat. 14, 11. 
 praeficere (pmfMoiere), w. ace. of pers. and 
 
 dat. of thing 98, C9; w. geruudial dat. 163, 
 
 20'.». 
 praequam, adv. compar. conjanction,= com- 
 
 pai.'d with' 7t)4, 1 4. n. 4. 
 praDscribere, constr. like imperdre, see this. 
 
 praesente eo 184. 1. 
 
 prsBsidio relinqaere 257. 9. t» t ^ 
 
 prssertim ( luphalical particle, pee V. I.). 
 
 J'/iBserfii/i q>i'i w. siibjanc. .572, 4 ; priP^^er- 
 
 tiin qninn = the more so because', always 
 
 w. sul)junc. 655,2; synonym of vuuiine 
 
 f/nnl, eo marfis iininna) quod 684, 5. 
 
 prsstans w. abl 120,116. 
 
 prsstare, w. abl. 93, 47!», no. 2. As verb of 
 jlo u"- w. ul or n>' 600. 3. .SV pvixMare. as 
 
 factitive verb, w. d*)uble ace. 101. A. Pne- 
 
 />7^/^ impers., w. Subj. Inlcl. 622, 6; w. 
 comparative Ouamel. 703, 14. 
 
 prasto esse. w. dat. 89. 
 
 prastolari, w. dat. or ace. 01, 4.o. 
 
 prater, prep. w. ace, use of 23. 436 ; w. 
 Ouod-cl. { prfsfer id quod) 60». 2; w. the 
 f.irceof ni4 after ne<;ations740, 5 : w. com- 
 p.u-ative Quam-cl. {pnefer q'lain) .64, 14, 
 110.5. Neuter verbs comp. w.i;/a;fer be- 
 come transitive 8<», 473. 
 
 praterea, adv. 23, 39;217, 8. . , ^^o r 
 
 non pratermittere, constr. w. Quin-cl. 603^ •>• 
 
 praterquam quod 607, 2 ; prceterquam st «39, 
 3, no. 6. 
 
 precari, w. imperative cl. 59.'>, 3. 
 preces, w. attributive Ut-cl. 625, C 
 Predicate (as member of the predicative 
 phrase, j^'overned by the subj., see V. I.). 
 Dili*, beiween predicate and jjredicalion 
 480, n. *. Tredicate-nouns, and adjctived 
 in the relation of completing jired. »19, /?. 
 2. For the dillVrent cases of completing 
 preds. (pred. nom. eic.) see the articles» be- 
 low. Completinir preds. of pubj. inls. and 
 Inf. clauses placed In ace. 75. 4ti3. Airrw- 
 ing in the dat.w. the obj. of impers. preds. 
 (Ikef mi/ii esfie aecuw) 75, 19 ; <)17, 9. Cai*e 
 of completinir preds. dep. on obj. infs. 75, 
 2. Completint: preds. dep. on participle:» 
 76, 20. Accessory predicates, see this ar- 
 ticle. 
 
 Predicate-nominative. Verbs requiring it 73, 
 4(»2 (For Its aicrtrment w. subj. see P. I.). 
 In the neuter, when the siihj. is mascu- 
 line or feminine 74, 14. Dep. on ohj. inf. 
 75. 2. Sometimes w. force of pred dat. 
 451, n. 6. 
 
 Predicate -genitive. U^'C and classes of *6, 
 464: 77 foil. Possessive adjs. in i)lace of 
 pred. gen. 77,21. Pred. gen. in>tead of 
 j)red. nom. (inorix est, etc.) 8», 467; con- 
 sistiui; of a gerundive phrase l«»l, 2(>< ; de- 
 noting purpose in later writers 161, obs. 
 Pred." gen. w. factitive verbs l(^2, 76. 
 Pred. gen. w. rel. clauses in su'junc. 
 {f>ju!i rifi e,<t qui) 562, E; w. Subj. clauses 
 «115. 11. 
 
 Predicate-dative, as dat. of the possessor 81, 
 4C>8; denotiiijr nomenclature (w. rtomeu) 82, 
 31. Dirt", between dat. and gen. of the 
 possessor 82. 32.— Abstract pred. dat., or 
 double dat. S2, 469. Dat of the person 
 often left out 83, 33. Abstract dat. w. 
 factitive and other verbs 8:^, 34 ; 2.56. obs. 2. 
 As access, pred. w. vi-rbs otln-r than esse 
 96, 64 and »15. Pred. dat. w. Subj. clauses 
 615. 11 : 617. 9. , 
 
 Predicate-accusative, as completing pred. 
 dep. on hictitive verbs loi, 487 ; as compl. 
 pred. of pn-d. inf. in Inf. c!., see these. 
 Predicate -ablative, as abl. of quality t-O, 27 
 aiul 28. Abl . of quality as accessory pred- 
 icate-aid. 256. OBS. 1. Other accessory 
 predicate-ablatives 2.55, 21 ; 2.5.5, 3. Pred. 
 abl. as pred. in the construction of abl. 
 abs. 171, 530. _ „ . . , 
 
 Predicate-clauses 480. 610. Definition and 
 ]). culiarities 4S6. s; 48«), n.*. I).p. on rftVfi 
 48«», 9; on /(«•f/^486, 10; on verbs of say- 
 ing, askini;, and commanding 4S8, 11. 
 Predicate Thai-clauses 6>8. 30. 
 Prepositions, definition, and functions in the 
 sentciu c 7. 4?4 : S. 2 and 3. Deiivation 7, 
 1. Objective and at. ributive use 8, 3. L.-jiJ 
 of retlexive pronouns after them 9, 7. 
 Cases required by preps. 11: 12. Preps, on 
 which gerundials may be made dependent 
 188, 2:i6. Ccdlocation 9, 6. When placed 
 after relative adjs. dep. on them 497, 6. 
 Li-Jt of i)reps. 12. 
 Present indicative 298 foil. Threefold nature 
 
 IKDEX. 
 
 803 
 
 of this tense 298, 567. No distinction of 
 forms for progressive and ncm-progressive 
 actions 298, 3. Present tense denoiin«: 
 contemp.n-aneonsness w. the speaker, has 
 ft twofold meaning 298, 41. Pres. tense 
 referring to actions true for all times 2!)1>, 
 2: referring to the sayings etc. ol known 
 persons in time past .JOO, 44 : 301. 1 and 2 
 W. force of Engl. pres. perl. '-iOH 4.^ ; of 
 Engl, preterite (historical pn-sent) •'<'1;4.> 
 Hist pre-*, w. force of imperf. 312. 5; .^«, 
 1- after nbi, ut, etc. 665, 1; in Postquam- 
 cl «164 6 ; in D(mec Cl. 680, 22. Consecu- 
 tion y,t tenses dep. (m historical l)resents 
 301 3 Pres. w. force of Enud. fut. .348,4; 
 w. 'force of "dependent fut. pres. or fut. 
 nerf 3."»5. 6. Pres. rendered by progressive 
 form of Emil. preterite 320, 3. Pres im . 
 in Post-q:i.im-cl. corresponding to bniri. 
 pres. perf 664.8: «M55, 10 : corresponding 
 10 End. presents after 'wliereas, 'while. 
 6«»5. iT. In Ante(piam-cl. «»«»8. 1 and 2. In 
 Dum cl. {dum --= while), referring to past 
 time 672, 2 and 3: 673, 1 and 2. In sub- 
 oblique Dum-d. 672,3: 076,11. In cond. 
 cl o\ douldlul reality 702. B: 711, 15; w. 
 foVce of fut. pres. 7o2, li; in hypothencal 
 periods, referring to syllouisms 724, lo. 
 Present subjunctive. lu indep. sent as sub- 
 iuiic of iTiiarded statement 3.8, 1; as in- 
 terrogative subjunc. :iS1. 1; w. force of po- 
 tential fut. 381.2; in imperative and opta- 
 tive sent. .382, 1-4: 38:^. 3-6. --Pres. sub- 
 junc. in dep. clauses as regular tense o 
 ores, consecution 414, 603. As logical 
 tense dep.. .n pret. preds.: see Connecuhon 
 of tenses. Pres. subj. in Antequam cl. 66;, 
 <[• (;(}8, 1 and 2; in Dum-cl. {dum = till) 
 678, 16: after r///m and dummodo ^ 'pro- 
 vided that' 67»i, 13 foil :.bi Quo id-cl.( = 
 till) 67M 19- in cond. periods ol doulitlul 
 reality 709, 10 loll.; in «oud. periods ol non- 
 reality 721, 9 and 10; 726. 21; iioetically in 
 hvDothetical perii)ds in place ol plup. siihj. 
 7->l 10 Pres. subjunc. in cond. clauses 
 w^hi'ii the thesis is in the imperf. subjunc. 
 7>2 11 • 72.3, 13: 724, 14. 
 Present tense (Engl.) rctidered by Lat per- 
 fect -m, 43; by Lat. future ?i^3, «6 : in tem- 
 poral (lauses bv Latin perl. ind. hl.j, 3. 
 Present-perfect (En-1.) expr. by Lat. plup. 
 3.5.S. 4 : after 'till,' by pres. subjunc. after 
 
 duni 678. 17. j ;„ t »f 
 
 Presidential elccUon, how to render in Lat. 
 
 Preterite 'consecution, see ConMCution of 
 
 Preterite tense iFM<:\,) \n the P/ogressive form 
 rendered bv Latin imi)erf. (bee It/U)er- 
 ferf) : by Latin present, 320. 3. 
 
 pretium; a.lj<. used av. it to qualify the idea 
 
 %,f price and value 267, 33: 26., ons. 2. 
 
 Price, adverhial rcdation of. ^fe T|';,'// ,, - 
 
 'price for a trip to,' how translated 21»4, n. ». 
 
 pridem, temporal adv. 224. 10. 
 
 nridie different construciKins of 22.o. 11, ^^. 
 
 Quam-cl. 764, 14, no. 5 ; w. Qnam-cl. in 
 Subjunc. lb. 
 
 nrimus (as ordinal numeral, see P. I.) ; as ac- 
 cessory pred. 250, 1 foil.; when prtmuni 
 and pnmo must be used 2.50, 2 and 6. ini- 
 muni est w. subj. Ut-cl. «112. 7 UA\.-P)irna8 
 iviere 279, n. b.— Prima luce 228, 12. 
 
 princeps, w. gerundial gen. 159, 2; as acccs- 
 ^orv i)red. 2.50, 4. ^ t^ . 
 
 prior and prius, how used 250, 4. Pnm w. 
 force of potius 759, 9. 
 
 Priusauam-clauses, see AnteqmmrClayj^ — 
 J'riusquam, noi antequam, is used when 
 the action of the clause has failed to take 
 
 ac 
 
 "c.'in regard to dates 227, 2; w. comp. 
 
 place (>69, I.— Antequam, not priusquani, 
 used when the clause is attributive 66., 2. 
 Pnuyquam referring to fut. action 3o4, 
 
 pro "pr'epos. w. abl., use U, 448; w. gerun- 
 dial abl. 197, 247; w. participial reversed 
 ]>hrase 199, 4. VV. Quod-cl. (pro eo quod) 
 
 607 2 
 probabiie est, w. subj. Inf. cl., or Subj. Ut- 
 
 probarc'in pass, voice, takes Ut-cl. in place 
 of Inf. cl. 608, 27, 2. 
 
 probatus w. dat. 119, 112. . 
 
 proconsul, proprator, etc. how expr. in classi- 
 cal Latin 31. n. 4. 1 i n^ qq. «, 
 
 procul, adv. of distance, w. abl. 114, 98, w. 
 (//>, or II. locative case 220, 7. 
 
 prodesse, w. dat. 89 ; w. ace. of a neutei 
 form-ad j. 85, 39, 2 ; w. pLns, not magis joo, 
 C. I^'odest, impers. (not m classical 
 prose), how constr. 622, 5. 
 
 proficerc, w. ace. of a neuter form-adj. bo, 
 
 pr'oflcisci, w. ace. of distance 220, 3. In perf. 
 part, as pred. abl. 172, 3. 
 
 prohibere, con-tr. w. ab or "^ ere abl. 29, 48 , 
 w. transitive ace. along w. obj. int. KH, 
 83 Prohibere, to prevent, as vert) or 
 doino- w. negative aim, constr. w. Q^pmt-^ 
 nus 602. 5. In the meaning ' to prohibit 
 ' to forbid ' w. obj. inf. «102 n. X- ^on pr^ 
 hibere, w. quominvs rareVy w. ^'^/j/^-J: 
 n. t : w. ne 603, 5; 603, n. t w. ut after dt 
 jirohibeant' lb. .. ,, r n 
 
 proinde, as causal adv. 281, 5 foil. 
 
 prompted by, how to expr. m Lat. 119, 115 
 
 5Stus w -erundial dat. 164, 1 ; w. gerund- 
 
 PronomiM? connection of sentences. Definition 
 and nat.neof472,60i); 473,2. Pronominal 
 cov5rdination and subordination 4.3, 2. 
 
 pronu3,w. gerundial after «(/192 4^. 
 
 nroue iirep. or adv. w. ace. 2.5, 43. ,24, 4U. 
 Diff' from propter, juxt a, ad, ^iu\ apud 
 24 41 Construction of pro}ie as adv of 
 distance 220, 7. Prope est ut 487, a.-l ro- 
 nioraml proximns, w. ace. or dat, or w. 
 abl after a* 114.498; w. gerundial dat. 
 164 1 When propior and proximus take 
 the'aciverliial, and when the adjective form 
 
 2.51, «5. Propins and P^'C^'^^ne^^ ^^'"^^'^^"^ 
 ositions w. ace. or abl. 114, <do.-Proxv 
 mum est, w. Subj. Ut-cl. 013, 7. , 
 
I 
 
 804 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 805 
 
 propediem (soon), use of 223, 4. 
 
 propensus, w. irermidial tUun- ad 102, 4. 
 
 proponere w. participial «ronindivo 148, 178. 
 
 P'-oprius, w. sjfii. ordut. 119. IVi.- Propti'tm 
 esf, w. Subj. Ut-cl. Oil, 5; w. Subj. luf. 
 cl. lb. 
 
 propter, pi'-p. w. ncc, nse of 93, 437: w. 
 p;ii licipuil rovers>cd pbrases 191», 3. Com- 
 pounds of 217. 8. Propter w. ratio 282, 1. 
 Propter quein {quos etc.) hk aiusal relaiive 
 object 527, d. 
 
 propterea, »'xpl. 217, 8. r.«c as causal adv. 
 281, 'i\ 2sl, 7. Syiid. aut. ol'quod and quia 
 ♦i83, 3; 281, 7. 
 
 prospicere w. dat. or ace. accordini? to mean- 
 iiiL' '.»1, 475; as verb of strivinj,', w. nt or 
 tifi ."!»•.», 2. 
 
 Protasis and apodosis; meaninj; of these 
 terms, and to what sentence» tiiey are ap- 
 plied 478, 7. Protasis, preceded by the 
 t»ubj. of the apodosis 478, 7. In comp. 
 Quum-cl. t).'")7, 2. Not confined to coud. 
 peiiods 1(H), n. * 
 
 protecting, Vei-l)s of, constr. w. ab 20, 48. 
 
 protenus, local adv. 210, 3; temp. adv. 224, 
 10. 
 
 prout, according; as, 748, H. 
 
 providere, w. dat. or ace. 01, 475. Aa verb of 
 striving w. uf or /le ^M), 2. 
 
 proximus and proxime, sec prope. 
 
 prudens, w. L'fn. US, 100. 
 
 pubes, collectively = younir men 101, n. 7. 
 
 pudet impers., takes its logi-al subj. in ace. 
 107. 90; constr. \v. ace. aiong w. <xen. W, 
 481. W. Stibj. Quod.d., or Sul>j. inf. alon;; 
 w. acc. of logical subj., or \v. pass. Inf. cl. 
 r.is. 11. 
 
 pugnare, as verb of striving, \v. ut or tie 
 
 cm. 2. 
 
 pungit me, impers. used, w. Snbj. Quod.cl., 
 
 snhj. int.. or pass. Inf. cl. 018, 11. 
 Purpose, relation ol; ila exponent?, 283, 
 
 putare to believe, as verbum sentiendi w. 
 Inf. cl. 588, 23 (see P. I.); in pass, gen- 
 enilly takes noni. w. inf., except in i>erl. 
 and plup. lot», 87 foil. As factitive verb 
 w. double acc. 102, C. Constr. w. jm) 
 inst.ofw. pred. acc. 102, 75. Future, to 
 estinmte, takes an obj. of price 2»i7, 32, 2. 
 llow constr. as verb of esteeming 272, 1.— 
 Putdbat and putdv'U 337, 1. 
 
 Qua and quactinque, locative interrog. and 
 relative adv. in fourth locative ca^- 210; 
 21S, 1 ; 400, 4. Introducing locative clause» 
 571. r.Ki; 575, 1; 575, C. 
 
 quadrans, = one fourth 110. 105. 
 
 qu», 8c«' q>'i. Qme tua est humanita'^ (qx't 
 <2.s' priidtnthh etc.) = pro tml hiniKtniidtt 
 510, I). Qu(V quu?H ita sint. as circumlo- 
 cution of a causal conj., to connect periods 
 474. 0. 
 
 quaBritur, imperi'., \v. interrogative cl., how 
 r. n,!,red 391, 3. 
 
 i ,, interrog. and rel. adj. of the qnalita- 
 11 ve class 40d, 4 (see P. I.t. Qudlh - as, 
 
 introducing, compar. cl. of quality, w. talis 
 as synd. ant. 745, 2. 
 
 qualiscunque (aineclasa. gnalUqiialiK), indef. 
 rel. adj. of the qualitative class 400, 4; 
 5(H), 5. 
 
 qualiter, po>^tclas?., rel. adv. of the qualita- 
 tive class 49(i, 4. 
 
 quam. 1) = how, interrog. adv. of intensity 
 
 201, 30; 201, ons. 2. Mi rum quam v\v. 
 
 202, 3. Quam nihil, or quam a on = how 
 little 264, .5.-2) relat. adv. ol intens., in- 
 tnuliicing <^uam-cl. wiih synd. ant. tarn 
 743 foil.; 750, .3. Kepetition of the C(mi- 
 pared adj. or adv. 7.50, 3. Quam and quan- 
 tum, \\. superlative in the meanini: 'as 
 much as possible' 2»K5,r).— 3). Quam as 
 comp. conj.. see Comp. ciau.<en. Quam in 
 ccmip. cl. of quality after a/ius w. a nega- 
 tion 741, 2. Quam *i, its use and relation 
 to quasi 7ti2, F. 
 
 quamdiu, how long, as long a?, as; interrog. 
 and rel. adv. of time 222, 9; 225, 1. An- 
 alysis 074, 7.— (iuamdiu-clauses Uelong to 
 the same class of temporal clause» aa 
 Dum-clauses and (iuoau-cl. (se»; the.se) ; 
 their synd. ant. t)74, 0. Always w. ind. 
 074, 8. Tense the sauu* as that of princ. 
 j)red. if the latter is non-j)reterite 075, 8; 
 if i>reterite, the tense is the rEuFE( T 
 070, 10. 
 
 quamlibet, concessive quantitative adv. 00.3, 
 .4 ; |)ostclass. as conjunction = quamcis 
 001, //. 
 
 quamobrem, nse as interrog. and rel. adv. 
 ■JSO, 4(1; 280. 4; as adv. ol purpose 28.3. 5(Hj. 
 Used lor periodical connection inst. of 
 itaq'O' etc. 521. 2; 281, G. 
 
 quamquam, concessive conj., originally in- 
 def. rel. adv. 501. '.♦. In anteclas<. lauLtnige 
 used as synonym of the adv. quumvis 
 (iiowever nuieln: but in class, lini^uage 
 always conj. = although OlXi, 9. >,'t»t used 
 in Cjesar lb. Relation t«) f/*i lb. IJeirnlar 
 mood iNO. lb. Whejj used w. subjunc. 
 (i'.Mi, U).— Quawquatn introducing parti- 
 cipial clauses and abl. abs. 097, 11 ; 173, 2. 
 As coord, conj. for i)eri(»dical connection 
 (= however) 008, 12. Use ol poteutiui 
 subjunc. i!i such sentences lb. 
 
 quamvis, 1) concecsive (juantitative adverb 
 (= however), qualilyiiiL' adjs.. and with- 
 out intluence on mood of the sent. 093, A. 
 Analysis 09.3. 4; tm. 11. Anieclass., post- 
 class., and \>ov{.=admodum 093. .4. Quam 
 ru/ti.f. quam volet etc. in-t. (A'quamrifi II»., 
 and 09». J}. Qualifying impetjitive preds. 
 093, Ji. Quamii-<liett\h. Qua mi is nou, how- 
 ever \\\Ue tm. H.—2) Quamvis as conces- 
 sive conj. (= however much), requires the 
 sui)junc. Analy>is of this const ruction 094, 
 v. In class, "language always as i?id(/. 
 concessive lb. Is made del", by ' dcut 
 est ' lb. Quamvis w. ind. 00». 5. In silver 
 Lat. = quamquam (although) 095, 5.^ W. 
 participles and abl. abs. 09.5, 0; 173, 2. 
 DilVerent conception of quamvis in classi- 
 cal and postclass. use 099, n. * 
 
 qxiando, 1) Interrog. temporal adv. 222, 7?. 9; 
 22 2 n +, and obs. 1.— 2.) .As temporal conj. 
 000, 4; requires ind. 059. 020, 1.— 3) Aa 
 causal conj.; dift". Irom quod, quia, etc. 
 087, 13. Not used in Ciesar. lb. 
 
 quandocunque, iiidef, rel. temporal adv. 222, 
 9; lOS, n. ; .501, 7. 
 
 quandoque, w. force of yi/a/i/Zo causal 087,n.t. 
 
 quacdoquidem = qi/a/x/o causal ()87, 13. 
 
 Quantitative Form-adjectives (-ee P. I.), used 
 in acc. neuier (tantam etc.) to express iu- 
 def.distance 221, 2. 
 
 quantopere. intern)g. and rel. adv. of intens. 
 2(il, 20; 49»), 4. Introducing adv. comp. cl. 
 of equal intens., w. tantojttre as synd. aut. 
 750, 3. 
 
 quantulas, in the meaning ' how little ' 204, 
 5 ; 4!»<>, 4. Quaiituluscunque 500. 5. 
 
 quantumlibet, w. force of the adv. quamvis 
 093. n.* 
 
 quantumvis, adv. of intens. 203, 31. In silver 
 L;it. us synonym of the adv. quamvis 
 «.93. Ji. 
 
 quantus, interrosr. and rel. adj. of the quan- 
 titative class 490. 4 (see P. I.); as logical 
 relative in parenthetical clauses 518, b; 
 519. D (quantum inteUigo, as far as I aee. 
 205, 0). Introducing comp. cl. of like 
 intensity 750, 2. Quantum (acc. neuter), 
 used as interroir. and rel. adv. of intens. 
 203, 31. Difi". from quam 203. 2. Intro- 
 ducing adverbial comp. cl. of intensity 
 after fautum 750, 3. When quanto is used 
 in place of quantum 201, 3. Quanto... 
 /<j/?/o, corrRsponding to ' the. ..tke' 751,5; 
 w. 'mi>- 3:iO. b. 
 
 quantuscunque, and quantusqnantus, indef. rel. 
 a(lj<. of the quantitative class; use of 4%, 
 4 ; .500, 5. 
 
 quapropter, componnd causal adv. 217. 8; 
 2si. 5. As connective of periods = itaque 
 281, 0. 
 
 quaqua and quacunque. indef. rel. adva. of 
 ih.' 4lh locative ca.-e 210 : 490. 4. 
 
 quare, caua d rel. adv. 280. 2. Diff. from cur, 
 quid and quamobrem 280, 4. Use of 527, 
 a. b. c. 
 
 quasi (as if), compar. componnd conj., in- 
 troducing hypothetical comp. clauses 743. 
 3; 745, 2. W. subjunc. according to law 
 of consecution 748, 5. Used before parti- 
 cir)les and abl. abs. 748, 5 ; 173, 2. Qua.n 
 (quasi v-ro) used to introduce exclamatory 
 sent for periodical coordination 481. obs.; 
 748, T). Qualifying single words 748, 7. 
 Q'/asi qui, w. subjunc. .572, '2.— Quasi qni- 
 dam, q"a<i {a'/)qms 719. 7. 
 Quasi-oblique, :iiid quasi-subobliqu«* clauses. An- 
 alvsi- kU, ons ; tlieir use 404, 8S foil. Take 
 siibjinic. 40», 000. 
 
 quatenus, interroir. and rel. adv. 222, 0; 4%, 
 J. Poetically and anteclass. iiist. of quo- 
 ?ii<i/n. as causal conj. 088, 15. 
 quemadmodum, as interrog and rel. adv. of 
 manner 240, 2; as compar. adv. = vf, w. 
 synd. ant. sic and ita 740, A ; in similes 
 746, B ; in parenthetical clauses 747, E. 
 
 queri, w. acc. 86. 473 ; w. de 32, 54 ; w. Quod- 
 d. or Inf. cl. 598, 9. 
 
 Questions, dependent>ee Tnterroqative clavses. 
 
 ' It is the question why ' how rendered 391. 3. 
 
 qui, rel. ndj. 490. 4 (for interrog. qui. and 
 qni as disjunct and abs. relative, see P. I). 
 How rendered 490, 1. Inflected after two 
 declensions 240, n. t: archaic forms (qvojus 
 etc.) 497, 0. I'se of the abl. form qui 240, 
 n. t; 497, 6.— §'/? = ' as,' when introducing 
 comp. cl. after idetn 744, 1. Omission of 
 its predicate lb. Qui n. iiitrodu«-ing hy- 
 pothetical comparisons lb. Qui tamen 
 573, 5.— Quo 171 numero=qvorum in ymmero 
 528, 1. Quo pacto=quomodo 240, 2. See 
 lielative clauses. 
 
 qui, interrog. form-adv. of manner 239, 15; 
 use 240, 2 ; derivation 240, n. t. Qtd= 
 ' whv ' 280, 3. 
 
 quia, "dlfT. from qnnd causal. 682, 1-3. Not 
 used in C:esar 08:3, 3. Its synd. ant. lb. 
 DifT. from quum causal 683. 4. W. aub- 
 junc. of indirect statement without a gov- 
 erning verb of saying etc. 089, A ; w. sub- 
 junc. of non-reality 090, B. Non quia (not 
 that) w. subjunc. 090, C'foll.; 090, B; w. 
 ind. 091, Z>; 092, n. *. Nov quia (non quod) 
 replaced by Si-clauses orEt si-cl.717, 3. 
 
 quicunque, indef. rel. adj. (see Indef. rela- 
 tives) 490, 4. Its relation xoqvisquis 499, 2. 
 Lacks the gen. plur. lb. Separated b^ 
 tmesis lb. Used as oidinary indef. adj. 
 ( = quisque) Il>. Sec qul-^quis. 
 
 quid (neuter of quis, see P. I). Quid in the 
 meaning ' how ' 240, 2. Quid^why 280, 3. 
 ^Quidf quod' — nay even (»07, 3. 
 quidni, why not, derivation 708, n. t. Ita 
 use. and diff. from quin and cwr ;M>^/i 280, 4. 
 quidquid, see quiaqnis. 
 quin, and Quin-chiuses. Diflerent uses and 
 meanings of quin ,540, 11 foil. 
 
 1) Quin.n^ iNTEKUOGATivE negative adv. 
 (whv not) 540, A. Dili". Irom cur non and 
 q>/idni-2S0. 4. Quin (quin etiatn)-nay even 
 540, .4. With imperative 11). 
 
 2) Quin (wiiy not) as kelative ncgati^^e 
 adveH) (nulla causa est quin etc.) 547. B ; 
 615, 12. ^ . 
 
 3) Quin, a? con-tunction, (a) = that, m 
 coMrLt:TiNG Tuat-clauses 547. C. Dep. 
 on non dubitdre and noncunctdri 589, 2 and 
 3. Dep. on other verba sentieiidi w. nega- 
 tions 580, 4. OriL'inal meaning of quin in 
 these clauses ( = why not» .589. n. *. Intro- 
 ducing subj. cl. (duf)ium non e.'^fquin. non 
 di.-crepat. non fallif) 009. 2; 010, 5 and 7. 
 Introd. attributive That-cl. 62.5, B, 1. — 
 Dep. on verbs of ncL'ative doing w. another 
 negation 002, 5. Its relation to quominus 
 603. 5. Dep. on verbs expressing the ideas 
 'not restraining,' 'not omitting' 605. 7. 
 Facere non possutn quin; fitri iion ixitest 
 quin lb. Non stat per ali'quem quin 020, 
 OBS. 2. Alter nihil abe^t, pautlum abest 
 etc. 628. %.-(b) Quin, introduci^ig modal 
 TiiAT-CLAUSEs after a negation ( = ut non, 
 rendered by ' uifhouf w. participial) 189, 
 
80G 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 807 
 
 3 : 547, n {nemo est gain etc.) Not to he 
 
 considered as h contniction of the nom. 
 
 gul with non 547, n. t. How tar it may he 
 
 replaced by qui 7wn etc. 547, 1); 548. Re- 
 
 placd hy ut non tVW, a. — (c) A« a causal 
 
 CONJUNCTION {71011 quin = non quia non) 
 
 «K), C; 691, n. t.— Consecution ol tenses in 
 Qiiiii-dauses 4J.3 foil. 
 
 quinarius (coin), vahie of 2()8. 5. 
 
 quincunx, =^ live tu" Iftli llti, 1(I5. 
 
 quippe, derivation 708. n. t. Ditierent iises 
 ufti8H. 16. W. participial construction ()89, 
 A. Aw a coOrd. conj. — mnn CiHfl, Ji. Not 
 to he consid'-red as suhordinatinf; conj. 
 689, n. t. W. Inf. cl. Ih. Not used in 
 CiPsar 689, li. Quippe qui 572, 1. Quippe 
 quu/n 65.*), 2. Quippini 708, n. t- 
 
 quisque, use of as indef. adj. see P. I). Is 
 j)laced in the nom. as adjunct of ;;erundial 
 abl. and ahl. ahs. 170, 2; 176, 1. 
 
 quisquis and quidquid, indef. rel. adj. 496, 4. 
 I;^ relation to qaicunque 4Wi, 1 loll. What 
 cases or ^'//.o'V'/i.s- are in ns«;. and in wliat 
 relations ihey occur 491», 2 foW.—Quit/quid, 
 as adverbial ace. (= how far po ever) .501, 
 7. -Quidquid and quodeunque w. partitive 
 rjen. = quofquof and quotcunque 5(K), 4. 
 
 quo, 1) as ordinary abl. of tlie abs. neuter 
 rel. adj. quod ; quo <= qua re) j'aetutn eM 
 lit 474, 6. As abl. of difl". hefore compara- 
 tives, (iuo...€0 ;i30, 6; 751, 5.-2) As inter- 
 rogative and rel. adv. of the 3d locative 
 case 216 ; 496, 4. Its use in locative clauses 
 575, 616 loll— 3) Inst, of vt eo. {a) to intro- 
 duce final clauses 283, ^MS ; 28t, 3 ; .5.58, 8 
 (M'G llelative dauset!) ; {h) w. modal force 
 afier non {non quo = non vf eo. or non 
 quod) 6'.K), />' ; 690. 6' foil. ; 691, n.* ; after 
 VKiqi^ quam 761. E. 
 
 quoad, 1) as interroj^ative and rel adv. (how 
 far, up to what time, as far as, etc.); deri- 
 vation and analysis 217,8; 222,9; 674,7 
 {quoad eju.< fitri jx>f(f(, lb.). 2) as tempo- 
 ral CON.;., {('() = as loUL,' a» 671, 622; synd. 
 ant. 674. 6; tense and mood of its ))re(l. 
 674, S foil. ; 676, 10 ; 323, 62 ; (/>) = till 679, 
 19 and 20. Dil^'. from dumiunl donee (iS\,2rK 
 
 quocirca, derivation 217, 8 ; use of 280. 1 foil.; 
 as causal relative adv. 281, 5 ; as periodical 
 coniieciive 281. 6. 
 
 quod, relative neuter adj. (for it." jreneral use, 
 see r. I., qui, and Relative cl.); w. i)arti- 
 tive sen. like quodeunque and quidquid 
 499, 1. Quod altinet ad 518, li ; quod reli- 
 quum est, quod superest — as to the rest 
 518, (' ; quod conimo.io tuo fieti poasil 518, 
 b : quod flat jxiee tua 560, 2 ; quod t^eiani. 
 quod eoq'uovtjim etc. 518, ft ; .560, 2 ; quod 
 ajuiit 5i8, a : quod in te est 5<H), 2; quod 
 exsfef Ih. Quod = quod atliru t ad (»07, 3.— 
 Quod (iiccns. neuterK as jieneral connec- 
 tive of i)eriods {quod at or quodai, quod 
 vhi etc.) .V21, 4 ; 522, 5. 
 quod, conjunction — that, 1) introducing 
 completing' That-clauses after verbs of 
 emotion r.^K), 5. CJram. nature of such 
 Quod-cl. 388, n.*, 590, n.t ; their mood;388, 
 
 2. Exclamatory Qnod-cl. 591, 6.-2) dep. 
 on verbs denoting? the manifestation of 
 emotions, and on verbs of aecusinj^, prais- 
 in-;, etc. 594, 24 ; .598, 1,9; 598, n. X \ 'l»t'ir 
 mood 388, 2.-3) (^uod-cl. dep. on verbs ol 
 paying and thiidving in late Latinity3s7, 
 2.-4) Quod, introducinjr Factcl (see this 
 article) («) in the relation of transitive objs. 
 {jnittoquod <tc.) 605, 2 ; {b) in the relation 
 of an abl. of instrument (eo quod) <i06, 4; 
 (t") of prci)Ositional ohjs. (ex eo quod, etc.) 
 607,2; (d) Quod-cl. denoting identity of 
 action (bene faeis quod, etc.) •.06. 1 : {() el- 
 liptical (|uo(l-cl. {quid? quod) f.07, 3 ; 339, 
 3.-5) Quod introducing Subj. clauses t>()9, 
 2 foil. ; 61.3, 2; 615, 28 foil. ; 62;^, .5.— Quod 
 introducing attributive That-cl. 626. 5 ; 
 627, 6. 
 
 quod, causal conj. = because. Diff. from 
 ^?/ia 682, 1-3; from quuin causal <i83, 4; 
 synd. ant. 6S3, 3. Causal Quod-cl. with 
 subjunc. of indirect statement witliout 
 governing verb of .«ayiui.', etc. 689, A ; w. 
 subjunc. of non-reality 6JH). B. I^on quod 
 (iion quo) w. subjunc. 6JH), C loll. ; w. 
 ind. CJK», B; 691, J) ; 692. n.*. 
 quominus, conj. Dep. on verbs of doing w. 
 neirativc aim {ptohif^eie etc.) «".02, 5. When 
 quilt or ne may, or may not be used inst. 
 of quo7ninus 6o:i, 5. Quomi/ins iuii)arts to 
 any governini: verb the idea of hindering 
 604, 6 ; to introduce 8ubj. cl. 619, 4 : 619, 
 B foil. ; attr. cl. 625, I) ; (»26, A. ; 627, 6 ; 
 intrtxlucing consecutive clauses 6.36, n. * ; 
 6:^6, 3 ; introd. fiuul Thal-cl. w . force of ne 
 6:i^, 2. 
 
 quomodo, its use as infcrrog. and rel. adv. 
 240, 2 ; 4'.M5, 4. Quotno'toeunque and quo- 
 quo7nodo as indef. rel. adv. 496, 4. Quoinodo 
 — ut, to introduce coinp. cl. ol quality w. 
 synd. ant. tde or ita 746, A ; in Similes 746, 
 B ; to introduce parenthetical clauses 747, 
 /,'. 
 
 quondam, temp. adv. Difl'. from a/iqnando 
 and o/itn. NV. impcrf., opposed to pres. 
 time 316, 57. 
 quoniam, since, causal conj. Use and diff". 
 Irom quod, quia, and quu7n 684, 6 foil. 
 Generailv without synd. iint.(»85, .«1. Con- 
 ventional usages 6N5, 7-12. In the mean- 
 ing of quum (du7)i) and jwcfquain 687, 7 ; 
 w. /orce of comj). coijs. 68r,, 12 ; = guod 
 atfi/iet ad 687, 12. W. Subjunc. of indi- 
 rect statement <i89, A. 
 
 quoquo (>r quocunque, indef. rel. locativeadv. 
 in the .3d. locative case 2ir> ; 496, 4. 
 quoquoversus, derivation 217. 8. 
 quorsum, derivation 217. 8 ; use 496. 4. 
 quot, interrog. and rel. numeral adj. 496. 4; 
 w. force of ordinary rel. 497. 3 ; introduc- 
 injr com p. clauses of like numbers 7.50. 1. 
 Quof. in composition w. die, anniii, inenn- 
 t,ii.<. Cahriditi. = 'at,' or 'in every' 225. 11. 
 quotcunque, iiidef. rel. adj., iniroducing 
 numeral comp. clauses 750, 1. See quot- 
 
 quot. 
 
 quotidie, w, imperf. 326, 5 ; w. perf. lb. 
 
 » 
 
 quoties, interrog. and rel. numeral adv. 229, 
 9 ; 496, 4. Introducing comp. cl. alter 
 lolies and tot 7.50, 1. W. meaning of quo- 
 titxcuuqut 501, 8. 
 
 quotiescunaue, indef. rel. numeral adv. 496, 
 4 ; 501, 8. W. perl. 3-J9, 2. 
 
 quotquot, indet. rel. adj. = quotcunque 490, 
 4; r.Ol. 
 
 quotusquisque est qui, w. subjunc. .5.o0,l. 
 
 quousque, comp. locative adv. 217, 8; its 
 temporal w^c 222, 9. Quui7i, conj., origi- 
 nallv temporal adv. 644. 1; rendered when, 
 if, while, whfTievertii^, 34 ; 618, 5 ; 32\), obs. 
 1. Dirt", from du/n 321, 7. Qua/n p/i/nu/n 
 w. perf. ind. 665. 43. Quu7n cau>ai, mean- 
 ing and dirt", from quod and quia 68-3,4; 
 takes no synd. ant. 6&4, 5. See Causal 
 ()inim-clauses. 
 
 Quum-clauses (temporal) 644, 619 foil. Their 
 dirterent relations toprinc. sent, as adver- 
 bial or attributive clauses 644, 2. Definite 
 and indefinite 645, 34. Tense and mood 
 in (;uum-cl. reterring to indef. timeW.5, 3; 
 64i;. 5; referring to del', time 646, 35 loll. 
 Their different offices in determining time 
 619, 9 foil.; 314, 1: 3-'0, 2; 3.39, 69; 339, 3and 
 4. Quum-cl. used w. force of hypothet- 
 ical Si-ci. 6.5!», 41; w. force of ordinary Si- 
 cl. 732, 4. When M-clauses may be used 
 inst. of indef. Quum-d. lb. See Modal 
 clauses. Adver^alive Quum-clauses; Co- 
 ordinating Quum-cl.; Appositive Quum- 
 cl. : Parenthetical Quum-cl. ; Mood in 
 Quum-clauses. 
 
 Radicitus, 242. obs. 
 
 rarum est, w. Subj. Ut-cl. 612, 0. , 
 
 rather, rendered i<y ]x>fiu'i, citiu^t. pnus (.oS, 
 9 ; 7.59, 9. • liatlitr than do this, J will 
 etc.,' how renilered 762, 12. 
 
 ratio, w. irerundial i;en. 1.59, 3; in abl. to de- 
 note purpose 28-3, 566 and 1. liatio est \\. 
 Subj. Ut-cl. 613, 3. 
 
 recedere. w. «jrerundial ahl. after a^> 195, 243. 
 
 receiving, Verbs of. const r. w. ab 28, 48; w. 
 :uc. after i« 38. 67. 
 
 receptui cancre, expl. 2.57, 2. 
 
 recipere w. aec. after in. or w. ad in flirura- 
 tive relations 40; in d€ditidtu7n, in civitd- 
 ttin lecijiere, expl. 41, n. 1; w. ace. or abl. 
 after in ;38, 67, n. 1 ; w. participial gerun- 
 dive 148, 178. , . 
 
 Reciprocal relation, meaning and rendering 
 of. 19. n. 2. 
 
 rectum est, it is rii^ht, w. Subj. Ut-cl., or 
 Subj. Inf. cl. 611. 5; in the meaning 'it is 
 proper' w. Inf. cl. 611. 5. 
 
 recusare. w. neijation, constr. w. quowinvs 
 
 or (/uin. or w. obj. inf. »i02, n. ^; ti03, n. |. 
 
 reddere, as factitive verb, w. double ace. 
 
 redigerei^v. adU,U\ w. ace. after i» or at? 40. 
 
 redimere, constr. w. an obj. of price 266, 2. 
 
 redire, w. ace. after ad or in 13, 11; 40. 
 
 redole're, w. ace. 85. »>. 
 
 redundare, w. abl. 93. 479. 
 
 re-elect the President, how expressed 203,n.59. 
 
 referre, w. ad 14, 11; w. gerund lal after ad 
 1<K), 239, 1. 
 
 refert, impers., derivation and construction 
 273 foil. 621, 4. See interest. 
 
 refertus, w. abl. 119, 116. 
 
 Reflexives (see P. I). Use of reflexive and 
 non-reflexive forms for Engl, personal or 
 possessive pronouns 9-11. See se. 
 
 refragari, w. dat. 88. 
 
 refugere, w. gerundial ahl. after ab 195, 243. 
 
 regere, ditf. from regndre 54, n. 78. 
 
 regredi, in perf. part., as pred. abl. 172, 3. 
 
 reipublica causa, meaning of 290, n. 3. 
 
 Relative adjectives and adverbs, (see P. I). 
 Enumeration and clas.-ification 496, 4 (see 
 Indefinite Bel.) Dift"erent conception of 
 ri'lative adjs. and advs. in Latin and Eng- 
 lish 495, 2. Agreement of the relative 504, 
 612. Referriiig to more than oiie ant. 
 504.2t; agreement w.reference to collective 
 nouns, and per-^onsdesignated hy the names 
 of things ij05,3. A'_'reement of the rel. subj. 
 w, the pred. nom. 525, 2:^ ; agreement of rel. 
 predicate nom. w. the sul)j., and not w. 
 antecedent 525, 3. Gnim. forms of abso- 
 lute relatives (how rendered) 5ii9, 2 foil. 
 Logical airreement of relatives 512, C; 528, 
 u **. Peculiar agreement w. the case of 
 antecedent 531,3. Collocation t)f rel. adj. 
 and adverbs 523, 1 ; 524. 2. Dift'erent grain, 
 forms of relative attributes 528. Rel. in 
 C(mnection w. gerundives and abl. ahs. 
 529, 5. Rel. adjs. as ace. and abl. of time 
 526, a, b, c; as ohjs. of manner, modality, 
 and cause .527, C. Relatives w the force 
 of conditional conjs. {qvi=si guis, etc.) 
 320, 2; 7:^3, 1. Difl"erence between relative 
 adverbs (M6i etc.) and adverbial conjunc- 
 tions 495, n. Locative relative adverbs 
 575 616 foil.; their replacement hy attrib- 
 utive phrases \v. locus {ubi = in quo loco 
 
 Relative' Clauses. 494 foil. Classification and 
 gram, properties 494,611; 494, n.* Fotm and 
 function of the gram, antecedents 504 lolL 
 Place of the gram. ant. and its difl"erent 
 forms .50.5-.507. Incoi?poration of the ant. 
 in the clause 506, 6; incorp. in the lorm of 
 a partitive gen. 507, 4. Inversion of the 
 rel. cl. 506, a. F«>rm of the relative if the 
 «Tarn ant. is understood 508, 6 foil. Eii- 
 7.IPS1S of ants, denoting iNDhr. persons or 
 things C*"^'^ ^"^' ^"^^'^^ qui, praniisds qui) 
 510 2 Peksonai. pitONouNs as gram. ants. 
 514' 7 foil. Omission of the pers. pron! as 
 ant' 514, 3, Dift"irent meaning and render- 
 in" of is' qui 51.5, 4. Ble ego qui lb. The 
 pronominal ant. merged in a possessive 
 515, 5. Logical relative clauses (referring 
 to sentences, or thouslits) 515, foil.: re- 
 ferrin<' to two dift'erent sentences 5l6, 2. 
 DiHerent forms of rel. parenthetical ci. 
 516 3 {id quod 517. 4; referring to parts of 
 the «'•oven.ing sentence 517, 5). Idiomatic 
 parelith. rel. cl. w. logical relatives 518 
 foil —Gram, form of the predicate in rel. 
 cl. 524, 1. Its ellipsis 530, 1 foil. Incorpo- 
 
808 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 ration in the rel. cl. of words bclonq:in^ to 
 I)rinc. i*ent.: 1) Incorp, of quisque 581. ob8, 
 1; 2) of desicriptive adj^. and superla- 
 tives, as accet«!*ory prcd. of the rel. 5y2, 2. 
 — I^el. cl. ahbrevialed by PAUTiciriAL con- 
 struction 541, 15 loll.— Mood in rel. cl. 542 
 foil. CoNSEcvTiON of tense in rel. cl., t»ee 
 Suhiunctlve in relative r/.— Collocation of 
 rel. cl. 478, 5.— Peculiar form in the co<5r- 
 dinaiiun of relat. cl. 4T4, 7.- See alt^o In- 
 rolufion of relatires. Cooniinafinr/ /elafives, 
 Jncfejinife relat.. Syndetic antecedents, Cotn- 
 2)aiif'0n of vtlative daufei^. 
 
 rAHTICUL.\K CLASSES OF RELATIVE CLAU- 
 SES. Kkstricting relative cl. (lonn and 
 mood of pred. etc.) 545, 8; 54«, 10; 5r>(), 1 
 and 2.— Relative cl. of PiniposE : dilf. from 
 final Ut-claiisos 557, 5; 558, (5 and 7. Ken- 
 (lerinjj: ami construction 557, 5. Clause? 
 of purpose introduced by quo 558, 8; w. 
 indef. ant. 558, 9; 558, n.*; alter a com- 
 parative w. quam idiomatically «fed to 
 express the En<.'l. 'too much to' \v. inf. 
 7t;i, 6'.— Kel. cl. of quality; referrini^ to 
 a prec(Hlin>jf des('riptive adj. 570, A. Mood 
 .^)<;0, 20, 1 and 2. Their ditierent tjram. 
 forms (is €ft qui, ehts modi, talis qui etc.) 
 
 5t)l, 3 foil.— R.l. cl. of INTENSITY, whcU 
 
 used inst. of Ut-cl. 5<)4, 9 and 10. Form 
 'nefno est tarn ferns qui yquin)' 564, 9.— 
 Rel. cl. of manner; when they may be 
 used inst. of modal Ut-cl. 5(i4, 8. Referring 
 to ])receding descrintive adjs. 570, B. — For 
 CAUSAL rel. cl. see'this article. Conces- 
 sive rel. cl. 5<i7, 4 foil.— Rel. clauses with 
 forc»^ of 8i CLAUSES 738, 1 ; w. force of 
 restricting: cond. cl. 742, 10.— Relation of 
 relative clauses to interuooative clauses, 
 introduced by interrofj. adjs. and advs., 
 and when they may be replaced one by 
 the other 395. 8 foil. 
 
 relinquere, w. double dat. 96. 65; w i)artici- 
 pidl irerundive l»i8, 178. litliuqiutur, it 
 remains, w. Ut-cl. (i08, 3. 
 
 reliiuum est. w. Subj. Ut-cl. 009, 2; 600 n*. 
 
 reminisci, w. <:en. 9t2, 478. 
 
 remunerari aliquein aliqud re 99, 485. 
 
 reniti, w. dat. 88. 
 
 rents are cheap, how rendered 295, n. 32. 
 
 renuntiare, as factitive verb, w. double ace. 
 101, A. 
 
 replere aliquem (aHqvid) aliqua re 99, 48.'. 
 
 reprehendere,ri/«/y>e/v7/Y, increpdre. castifjdre, 
 ohjurqtlre. con^-tr. w. Qiiod-cl. 598, 9. 
 
 se reprimere, nbi iernpfrdre, siH inijy^rdre. 
 afJ.-'Hiitre, as verbs of restrainitii,', if con- 
 nected w. iion, constr. w. Quiu-cl. 602, 
 5 foil. 
 
 repugnans est, w. Subj. Inf. cl. 610, 3. 
 
 repugnare, w. dat. 88; w. quondnun. ne, or 
 qiihi, see renistcre. Repugnat, impers., w. 
 subj. Inf. cl. or subj. inf. «)20. 2. 
 
 res, exi)ressinj; the «reneral idea of things, 
 see P. 1. Re Integra, meanin}; 289, n. 27; 
 Tfhene 'jestd 180, obs.; res de qna aqitur, 
 the subject under discussion (legal for- 
 nnila) 404, n. 17; res contrahendiv, con- 
 
 tracts 197, 246. Rem €0 dedvcere, equiva- 
 lent to a verb of accomplishing, w. ut or 
 ne Hmi. .8. 
 
 to resign an office, magistrdtu abire 238, 
 n. .5. 
 
 resistere, w. dat. 8«. Resistere, repvgnare, 
 recusdre, deprecdri, as verbs of resistiiiL', 
 constr. w. qnoininus or ne. or w. quia if 
 connected with a negation 6U2, 5 foil. 
 
 respondere, w. dat. 89. 
 
 restat, impers., w. subj. Ut-cl. 622, 4, 2. 
 
 restituere, w. at/, or w. dat. 14, 11; w. in 40, 
 70: 40. n. 5. 
 
 to return, reiulered by reddere w. dat. (=to 
 give back), or by redlre w. ad 13, 11; w. 
 ace. after in 40 (=to go back). 
 
 reus w. genindial gen. 159, 2. 
 
 Reversed phrases, meaning and origin of 150, 
 517; II). 183. Ditr. from ordinary attribu- 
 tive i)hrases 150. 18.5. Tbeir diflerent 
 gram, relations l.')3, 522 ; L">4. R. 194. Rev. 
 phr. in api)osition (= namtly) 154,194.4. 
 Ditt". between gerundive and ])articipial 
 levereed phrases 155, 52:?, When they 
 may interchange w. each other 155, 19(3. 
 P()inted opposition of the two kinds of 
 phrases 155, If/i. Reversed phr. as com- 
 l)leting objects 155.6. Pronouns and ab- 
 solute acijs. as governing words in reversed 
 ])hrasts 155, 195. 
 
 Reversed gerundive phrases. Whether they 
 occur as transitive objects and sultjects 
 1.56, 198. In gen. 157. 526 foil.; as attrib- 
 utes of nouns 159 foil.; as objs. of adjs. 
 IHl, 207; as pred. gen. 261.208; in dat. 163 
 foil.; in abl. ir,9 foil.; after prepositioi-s 
 (onlv after ad, in, ab. de. ob, inter, ex, pro) 
 187, 537 loll. See the articles on gerundial 
 cases. 
 
 Reversed participial phrases, as subjs. nnd 
 tian>itive obj>. 1,5«). ^)•^"). Change of subj. 
 nom. into a pred. alil. 15«», 200. In gen, 
 162, .527; in abl. as completing obj 173, 1; 
 as Mbl. abs. (see this article); after prepo- 
 sitions 198 loll. 
 
 ridiculum est, w. subj. Quod-cl. 610, 4. 
 
 to be right, liow rendeied 2<4, 3. 
 
 rights which we are bound to respect, how ren- 
 dered 5«;8. n. 61. 
 
 rite, 242, ous. 
 
 robur, meaning of, in military language 504, 
 n. 7. 
 
 rogare, w. double ace. 100, 486; how constr. 
 in the pass. 101, 73 ; w. imperative cl. 
 595, 3. 
 
 rogatio, w. attributive X^t-cl. 625, T, 
 rudis w. gen., or w in 118, 109 foil.; w. 
 gerundial after ad 192. 5. 
 rumor est, w. Subj. Inf. cl. 613. 1. 
 rursus, ditl'. from iferutn and denuo2'2i, 6. 
 rus. takes locative cases like names of 
 
 cities 47, 4. 
 rusticus sermo 477, 2. 
 
 8, symbol of setnis 116, 105.— SZ, symbol of 
 ; dodrans lb. 
 sacer, w. dat. or gen, 119, 113. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 809 
 
 Bfflpe, temp. adv. 222, 9; 224, 10; w. perf. or 
 imp. 32t). 
 
 saltern, as svnd. ant. (postcedent) of conces- 
 sive si-cl.'731.2. 
 
 salva fide, 184, 1; salvis auspiciis 185, R. 231, 
 
 OBS. 1. 
 
 sancire, w. imperative cl. 595, 5. 
 
 sapere. w. ace. 8.-), 39 ; w. plus, not magis 
 
 satis", quantitative abs. adj. and adv.. see 
 P 1: w. gerundial after ad 192, 3; w. final 
 Ut-cl. 638, 4. Hads est, and satius est, in 
 ind. of a i)ret. tense, used hypothetically 
 727, 24 foil.; w. subj. inf. or bubj. Int. cl. 
 
 satisdato^as impers. pred. abl. 186, 234. 
 
 satisfacere, w. dat. 89. 
 
 scatere, w. abl 93, 479. 
 
 scire constr. w. an adverb denoting lan- 
 guages (Laflne scire): how to be exj)l. 104, 
 SI 'As verbum sentieiidi constr. w. Int. 
 d.' (P. I, and 588. 23); w. obj. int. or inter; 
 rotative clause (w. quo //w/o)396./. /Scivi 
 different from scitbani ;i;38, 9. *J>ti€«5, w. 
 irerundial i:en 161, 207. 
 
 scribere, w. ad, or dat. 14, 11; 14, n.; w. Inf. 
 cl. 594, 1. 
 
 se in p'l.tce of euin, against the rule, for the 
 sake of pregnantly intimatinir certain re- 
 liitions ot the pre'jicate 401, n. 4. 
 
 Second person singular w. the meaning of an 
 indef. per-on ( = aliquis) ; requirert sub- 
 jiinc; how used 413, oBS. 4._ 
 
 secundum, prep. w. ace. 22, 4"i5. 
 
 secus, use of 241, 6; w. nan {hand), as synd. 
 ant.' of 'lualitative comp. clauses 745, 3. 
 
 seeing that, rendered by quoniam 68«», 9 
 ami 10 ; by quando 687, 13; by siqtudem 
 688. 14. ^^^ ^ 
 
 segnis, w. gerundial after ad 192, 4. 
 
 sejungere, cou-tr. w. ab 29, 48. 
 
 Semi prepositions 114, 98. 
 
 semis, — one half 116. 105, 
 
 semper, temp. adv. 229. 9; 224, 10; w perf 
 or imp. 326,3; to iiulicatc repeated and 
 coin imrent action 328, 65.^ 
 
 senatus consultum, w, altr. Ut-cl. 62.), C. 
 
 to send word, rendered by mittere w. imper- 
 ative cl. 594, n.t- , .. f 
 
 Sentences, combination and connection of 
 472 foil • is either svndetic. pronominal, 
 or asyndetic 472, 609 foil. ; coord, or subor- 
 dinai"ing (see these articles). Di=5»y^'"''^r- 
 ing Latin compound sentences 4.9, 11. 
 Tlicir euphonic arrangement 4:7, 2. 
 sententia. form of the altr. That-cl. dcp. on 
 
 it fi24, .4, 1. 
 sentire, w. Inf. cl. 5S.8, 23. 
 separare, con-tr. w. ab 29, 48. 
 separating. Verbs ol, cot.str. w. ab. 29, 48. 
 septunx, = .seven-twelfths ll«i. 10.>. 
 se^uitur (consequitur) w. Subj. Inf. cl. or 
 Ui-cl. 62:3. 4. 
 
 servire. w. dat. 89. , ..^ n- 
 
 sesqui, meaning and use of 116, llo. ^ 
 sestertius, value and notation 2«)8, o. Dif- 
 ferent "ram. forms {sesteriium, eestejtia 
 
 etc.>; form of the numerals connected w, 
 it 269. 6. 
 
 sexcenti, as indef. numeral 528, n.*. 
 
 sextans, = one-sixth 116. 105. 
 
 shall EiiLd. potential auxiliary, rendered by 
 Lat. future :347, 73 foil.; by II. form of 
 imperative 354, 5, A; by pres. subjunc 
 381. 1. (See P. I.) 
 
 should, (should have), Engl, potential auxili- 
 arv, rendeied by i)eriplirastic gerundial 
 140, 1U2: by interrogative subjunc. pres. 
 or imp. 378, 1; :38l, 1 and 2; 38:1 4. Velleni 
 {cupereni) or velim etc., I should wish 38:3, 
 {\.—' ShouUr etc. in clauses, rendered by 
 the mere pred. inf. of the main verb, and 
 in Ut-cl. by subjunc. 1:35, 5; 611, 6; 594, 
 1 : by fut. pres. ;351, obs. 4. B ; 352. B.— 
 'Should' = ought to, see 'ought.'— In 
 cond. cl. of doubtful reality often by fut. 
 702, 2, A. 
 
 si if, Cond. conj.. see these. Si = Mn the 
 event that ' 407, 3; 71:3, A. foil., si r=when- 
 ever 3:9. 1 ; 734. 4. Si and O si = ' would 
 that • :38:3, (i.—Si, as interrog. panicle. :397, 
 10; 7:3:3, 5.— S'i non, in cond. cl. of d(mbt- 
 ful realitv 7u4. 5; 71:3, 17; in cl. of doubt- 
 less reafity 715, 45; in cond. cl. of non- 
 reality 718. 3; in imjjroper cond. cl. 731, 
 2; in opposition to a preceding si 7:36, 1. 
 Si non... at, w. pred. omitted 731, 2. Si 
 minus, inst. of «i no/i 73(;, l.—Si etiam ( = 
 but if etc.) II). Si forte :329. 1. Si maxirm 
 (= quamris etc.) 503, 11 ; 731, 3. Si nwdo 
 678, no. 5. Si prius 355, 4, b. St quis. si 
 quo, si quando 329. 1. Si placet, si ridetur 
 742, 11. Si qua; i is 742, 4. Si di-^ placet 
 742, 3. Si ita vis 742, 11 Si vales bene est 
 
 sic'inoclal form-adv. 239, 15; derivation 239, 
 
 n!* Sic and ifa distini:uished 240, 3 ; diflT. 
 from fa?n and adto 262, 4. As synd. ant. 
 of modal Ut-cl. 4:35, 2 ; «)f comp. ci. 745, 4 ; 
 of obj. and Subj. Inf. cl. inst. of the regu- 
 lar ant. hoc, id etc. 49:3, 1. 
 
 sicubi, if any where 329. 1 
 
 sicut (sicuti), oriiiinally adv. of manner 240, 
 1; comparative conj. as synonym of nt, 
 introducing comp. qualitative cl. 744, 51; 
 746, A. W. abl. abs. 17:3, 2. 
 
 silentio, abl. of manner or coincident action 
 
 244, 3'; 258, 2. . .u , r 
 
 Simile, rhetorical figure, in the form of a 
 
 comp. period 74(1, B. 
 simiUs, w. dat. or gen. 118, 112; 119, 113; as 
 
 synd. ant. of comparative qualitative cl., 
 
 followed by ac, atque, id, ac si, quasi, ut 
 
 8imul,^simulac, simulatque. Simul, temporal 
 adv 222, 9; w. cum. or mere al)l. il4, 98. 
 As tein|)oral conj. ; its svnonyms simukic, 
 ninul ut, sinvilatque, simul ei 329, 1; 6o9, 
 «;20 1 • w. piM f . ind. «»65. 43 ; «565, 1 ; w. 
 imp. or plup. «166. 2 ; w. pres. or fut. 666, 3. 
 
 simulare, w. Inf. cl. ; not w. mere obj. mf. 
 
 sin isin vera etc.) ; use in the adversative 
 coordination of cond. cl. 737. 3. 
 
810 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 811 
 
 since. Engl. prep, and adv., rendered by ah 
 Hud ex {inde) 'B, 44-2. As temporal conj. j 
 by ex quo 30, 50 ; T)-^»;, d ; by ])ost(iuaviim, 
 42; Wil. 2 and 7 foil. A^ causal eoiij. by I 
 qiiinn rm, 4; quoniam r^, 0; qnando and 
 quaiidoqiiidem <>HT, 13: nquUitni G88, 14; 
 bv iMisfqiHun w. imp. W)2. 5 lull, 
 sine, prep. w. nbl., use and difl". from exfra 
 3(i, »1.3; denolin<,'Coineident action 25.^, .V)<>. 
 sinere, eonstr. w. ace. alon^ w. obj. int. lUl, 
 N3 : const r. Mk^'jubtre h^l, 8. 
 singly, bow expr. in Lat. 251, 7. ^ 
 singulus, as accessory pred. 2.")!, 7. 
 siquidem, causal conj., use and difterence 
 lioni ihe other causal conj. »187, 14; «16, 
 DBS. 1. When it must be written in one 
 word, or in two words 688, 14. 
 sis, = « vis (if you please) 742. 11. 
 sitire, con^tr. w. ace. 85, 39. jSitiens w. gen. 
 
 117, 108. 
 sive - rel si, anteclass. 738, 7 ; as synonym 
 ofV^/, see P. I. Sive.. .nre, as disjunctive 
 cond conj 1) in the coordination of whole 
 cond. periods 737, 4 ; 2) of cond. clauses 
 737, 5; 3) of other clauses, or members of 
 the same sent. 737, ti. Mood in Hivu-clauses 
 737, 5. Clauses w. sive...sive pass over 
 inu) iiidef. rel. and concessive cl. 603, 11. 
 60 EultI. adv. rendcrtd by ni\ ifa, (am, 
 dd^o, tantopere, tantimi. Dift'. of these ex- 
 pressions 262.4. *So th.'it' = ita, vf, or 
 vf, without ifa 4^5, 2; (J3H, obs. 1. 'So as 
 to,' how rendered 435, 2; 5,^)7, 5. 'So 
 much.' * so many,' see i*. I, ' So much for 
 this subject' = h;ec hactenus .5-.0, n. 13. 
 ' So-called ' 55, n. 18 ; = qui dicitur 182, ii. 
 97 ; = quetn rocant 341, n. 21. 
 sodes, ( = si voles), if you please 742, 11. 
 solere, w. obj. inf. see P. 1. ; ir. perl", or imp. 
 3J3, 71. 
 
 solitus, w. {jerundial dat. 1(55. 2. 
 soUemnis, w. trerundial dat. IH.'», 2. 
 sollicitare, w, <:erundial alter ad 190, 5.30, 1.— 
 ikMicitat me, iinpors., w, siibj. Quod-cl., 
 pass. Inf. cl. orsnbj. inf. 618, 11. 
 sollicitum esse, w. Quod-cl. or Inf. cl. 51K). 
 solhcitudo, w. attr. Quod-cl. »;25. «, .3. ^ 
 
 solus, as accessory pred. 251,7; i)luced in 
 the «ren. if dep. «m j»ossessives H). Solus 
 qui w. subjunc. .551. 4 . w. ind. 553, 7. 
 solvendo esse, expl. 168. 3. 
 soon, how to reiuler 224, 3 : 225. Sooner = 
 VKiturvix, citius, or prius 225, 4 ; 759, 9. 
 Bordida vestis, expl. 259, n. 1. 
 Bouthern (Northern) States, how to be render- 
 ed 3.52, n. 19. 
 spatium, w. «rennulial iren. 159. 3. 
 to speak pro and con, how to translate 41, 72. 
 spectare, as verb of striving, w. vt or ne 
 
 .")'.)'.). 2, 
 to spend time at a place, by esse, or absumere ; 
 
 how distinizuished 288, n. 71. 
 Bperare, w. ace. 86. 473; w. Inf. cl. and peri- 
 phrastic pred. inf. 134. 2; rarely w. Ut-cl. 
 593, 8; rarely w. Obj. inf. .593, 11. 
 Bpes, w. attr. inf. cl. ; sometimes w. Ut-cl. 
 624,^, 1. 
 
 sponte, 242, obs. 
 
 8quare-measur«, how expr. 116, 104. 
 
 stadium, 2J2, n. 3. ^ , . 
 
 stare, to al.tdebv ; vv. abl. 0.5, .58: stare, to 
 cost, w. obj, of price 2<i7. 4 ; 94. 479. Stat 
 mild. impers. ( = cejtum est mi/ii) .w. siibj. 
 inf. 620, OBS. 2. Stat per aHqumi w. quo- 
 minus or tie 610, li loll. ; non f<taf pet all- 
 quem, w. quoininus or quiii 605, 6. 
 
 statim, expl. 225, 11. c,. 4 ■, axo- 
 
 statuere. constr., see deairiere. Jblatud, ain. 
 from xfaturtjat 3.*jS. 16. 
 
 still, Engl. adv. variously expressed in La- 
 tin 222, II. f 
 
 BtonewallJackson, how to be rendered 363, 
 n. 54, .55. 
 
 to stop payment, how rendered, 4(>^, n. .30. 
 
 strictly speaking, adhibito discnmiue, 183, 
 
 strong, ( = amounting to) w. numerals, how 
 
 expr. 277, e. 
 
 studere, w. dat. 80. Noris rebus studTre, 80. 
 
 n 10. W. geriindial dat. 1«W, 209 ; w. obj. 
 inf.. Inf. cl., or w. ut or ne 51W, 2 ; 600, 2 ; 
 
 600, n.*. 
 
 Btudiosus, w. gen. 118, 109 ; w. gerundial gen. 
 161, 207. 
 
 to study, how to render 80, n. 10. 
 
 suadere, w. imperative cl. ; postclaes. w. obj. 
 inf. .5!«5, 4. 
 
 8uavi8.w. II. Sup. 121,121. 
 
 sub, prep. w. ace. or abl., use of 45: 4b. 
 Sub jus didonernque redif/ere 193, n. 2<i.— 
 Verbs compounded w. si/b lake dat. !H), 45. 
 
 subducere, constr. w. ace. of thing and dat. 
 olljcrs. ( = from) 97, 6S. 
 
 Subject, ifs irram. form, ste P. I. 
 
 Subject-ablative. 171, 5:^0 ; see abl. abs. 
 
 Subject-accusative, explanation of this form 
 (i->'t 1. umiited 1) always if pred. int. is 
 impers. without snbj. 629.2; 2) sometimes 
 a- a ))ers. pronoun lb. ; 3) almost always 
 if an accessorv pred. is made dep. on a 
 ])ers pron. conceived as snbj. ace 630, 2. 
 
 Subject-clauses, different chi;ses and n-la- 
 tions of 480, 610 ; 482, A U)\\. : 484 foil. 
 Must have impersonal pred. 48:^, 2. Kela- 
 ti<m to obj. clauses 48:^. 3. Subject inter- 
 rogative clauses 391, obs. 3. Subj. '1 hat- 
 clauses 608, 27 : 1) as subjs. of pass verbs 
 (Inf. cl., Ut-cl. , Qu(»d-cl., etc) (m, 1-4; 
 2) Form of Snbj. That-cl.w. impers. pred. 
 adjs. (i09, 2 f<»ll. : 3) w. impers. pred. 
 nouns <;i:i, 8 foil. : 4) w. impers. verbs »; 1.5 
 28 foil : 51 w. ordinary active verbs U2.i, 5 
 foil.— Subj. cl. conceived as subj. ace. 485, 
 
 Subject-infinitive, its cram relation, see PI. 
 As sub), of impers. predicates 107,89 ; 609 
 foil. Tense and voice of subj. int. 107, 494. 
 Cliange into passive subj. Inf. cl. <ilO, n. t. 
 Exceptional use of subj. inf. w. ordinary 
 active verbs 108,94: 623.7. Used as ex- 
 clamatory elliptical sent, without a pred. 
 481 OBS. As subject-acc. in Inf. clauses 
 lOS' 93. W. force of hypothetical clauses 
 733, 3.— Completing pred. of subj, inf. Hi 
 
 I 
 
 ace. masculine sing. 107, 91 ; 75, 1. When 
 it requires its completing pred. in dat. 7o, 
 19. Form of accessory preds. dep. on 
 subj. inf. 255. 2. / * *• i 
 
 'Subjunctive in independent sentences (potential 
 siibiunc.) :J78 foil. Is either declarative 
 (:i78, 1 and 2: 379, 3 and 4), interrogative 
 (:iSl, .593 loll.», or imperative (optative) .^2 
 f.ill. For imperat. >ubj. see P. I.. 303 loll 
 Subjunctive in dependent sentences in general 
 ;iH5, 1 and 2; 1) Subjunc. of inYu^ect 
 STATEMENT (oblique clauses) :^S5 foil. ; -iho. 
 5'.>7 ; (a) in Quod-d. alter gaudere etc. :388, 
 b. ; alt.-r laudare etc. 38^, 2 ; Ind. in such 
 Quod-clauses :i89, .3. (b) in imperative cl. 
 389, 83 : in a-yndetic clauses alter velie et(v 
 5''2', a • (c) in interroizative clauses ;i90, 85 
 folT. (see Inferrooative clauses) : id) in sub- 
 oblique cl. .398 toll, (see the-'c); («) in 
 Quasi-oblique clauses 404. 600 foil— 2) 
 Subjunc. by attraction and qua>^i-attrac- 
 tion 408 foil. In cl. dep. on subj. inf. and 
 subj. Inf. cl. 412 foil. Ji. 91. Tenses of the 
 uiijiiiK'.. sec Cofi^fcufion of Tenses. 
 
 Subjunctive in particular clauses, 1 
 That-clauses introduced by id, i 
 
 ) In all 
 
 . ne, quin, 
 
 quominHs\ iim\ in asyndetic That-cl. 5S8, 
 617.— 2) In temporal and causal Quum- 
 claiises, see Mood in Qnu}n-dau,^es.—:i) /in 
 clauses of contingent and repeated action 
 (wfienevr etc.) :«1, obs. 6 —4) Subjunc. 
 after ;>o.s-/7'/am «rA 1.— 5) Mxhy anjequani, 
 priufquaw, and pridie 667 f«»ll. ; 764, 13.-— 
 6) Afi. r dum and quoad = as long as 6. .5 
 9- 67'">, 12 : after dum and dunnnodo = if 
 but «•,76, 13 ; 6-17, 13.-7) After quia amX 
 quod cnu-al 6S9 loll., 17: w. siiboblique 
 subjunc. 401 foil.: w. quippe 572. 12.— b) 
 A tier etsi 69S, 13: quamquam 696, 10; 
 etiauisi cm, 2 and 3, quatnrl-< «••94, C ; licet 
 695, 1', nt ( = even if) 695, 8 ; vel si ( = 
 etianui) ; si maxime ( = quaunis) 731, 3— 
 9) In compirative clauses 748,5; «62, ^; 
 762. 12; 764, 14, n. 3: after quasi, veluf, 
 tamquam etc. in hvpotheiical comparison 
 (see this article).— 10) In conditional 
 clauses ; see Subjunctive in cond. cl.—W) In 
 relative cl., see Subjunc. in rel. cl.—VZ) 
 Subjunc. of a verb of saying denoting a 
 cni.-al relation of an Inf. cl. dep. on the 
 verbum dicendi 405. obs. 3. 
 Subjunctive in conditional clauses, 1) in cond. 
 clauses of doubtful reality : (a) Subjunc. 
 of improbabihtv 709, 11 ; (b) of actions 
 dep. on the person spoken to 710. 12 : (c) of 
 virtual non-realitv 710. 13 and 14 ; 71.5, 6 ,• 
 id) inindef. coiid\ iieriods 711, 15 and 16; 
 712; (<iiof exemplificaiion712, 17 foil. ; (/) 
 historical subjunc. 713, 20 f<dl.-2) In cond. 
 clauses of non-n-alitv. see this article. 
 ^Subjunctive in relative clauses, is either a sub- 
 junc. of non-reality, or gnomic 512, 614. 
 
 1) Sl'BJUNC. OF NON-UK ALITV 543. 16 foll. 
 
 (rti after noil est qui, nulla causa est cure\c. 
 .54», 2 and 3; after quis est qni 544, 4. 
 ^^hen ind. must be used in relative cl. 
 dej)t. on negative pred. 544, 5-8 ; 546, 9 and 
 
 10. -(b) After indefinites implying a nega- 
 tion {jxiuci. quotmquisque, solus etc.) .550, 
 l_3._(c) After sunt qui, inventus est gut 
 etc. 551 foil.— (rf) If princ. pred. is poten- 
 tial or doubtful .554, 18; after aliquis 55.5, 
 Z.~{e) Kel. sutijunc. of adaptedness and 
 purpose 5.56. 19 foil. Nature of subjunc. 
 of purpose expl. .559, n.*— 2) Gnomic sub- 
 junctive 559 foil.; is either restricting 
 (.560, 1 and 2), or modal (qualitative, i^ est 
 qui etc. 560. 20 foll. ; of intensity 564, 9 and 
 10», or causal .">66. foil.— Subjunc. in rel. cl. 
 referring to precedinir descriptive adjs. ; 
 its difterent nature .570, 10 loll.— Subjunc. 
 of loose h)irical relation 571, 11 foil.— Sub- 
 iunc. by attraction in rel. cl. 410. 3, 2.-- 
 Tknses of subjunc. in rel. cl. ; (a) logical 
 tenses in restricting relative clauses 42:?, 
 2; in modal rel. cl. 433 loll. : 439, 9; 440, 
 10. Periphrasric tenses of the subjunc. 
 in rel. subobl.que clauses referring to the 
 future 449. B. 
 tfubUmis fertur, expl. 249. 3. 
 Suboblique clauses, definition :^7, 507. Sub- 
 junc. m suboblique clauses ;398 foll. When 
 they take ind. 399, 1 loll. Subjunc. m cl. 
 virtually suboblique (quasi-suboblique) 
 404, 600 foll. Ind. in such cl. 405, obs. 2. 
 Subobl. cl. when a governing oblique 
 clause is implied in princ. sent. 406, foil., 
 OBS. 1. Elliptical omission of the govern- 
 ini; clause 407, 3.— Suboblique Dum-clauses 
 retaining their ind. present or perf . 672, 3; 
 675. 8 ; 676, 10. Periiihrastic tenses in sub- 
 oblique clauses 449, Ii. 
 Subordination of sentences, definition 472. 608; 
 
 472. 2 loll. Sentences coordinate w. each 
 
 oilier, and subordinate to a third _474. 7. 
 
 Sent. dep. on subordinate sent. 477. 10. 
 
 Their collocation 477, 1 ; 478, 8 ; 479, 4. 
 
 See Clauses. 
 subornare, constr., see movere. 
 Substantive Clauses = Fact-cl., see these. 
 
 Substantive Si-clauses inst. of a Fact-cl. 
 
 introduced bv quod, 733, 5. . , ^ 
 SubsUntives, (Engl.) expr. by Latin interro- 
 
 «rative clauses (commands = quix fieri veUt ; 
 
 size = quanfM. sit etc.) 395, S, b. 
 Bubvenire, w. dat. 87, 474. 
 Buccedere, w. dat. 89 ; w. siti and ace. 89, n. 
 
 not to succeed, n^m male gerere 228, n. 7. 
 succensere, w. dit. 89. 
 Buccurrere, w. dat. 87, 474. 
 Bufficere, w. gerundi;il dat. 
 
 uiulial aft era(/ 190,239,1. 
 
 w. Subj. Ut-cl. 622 6. 
 
 suffragari, w. dat. 87, 474. _ .. ^, i; 
 
 Bui, sibi se, and suus, their use in oratio obli- 
 
 qua 7GS, 3 : 7(59. 5. Sai protest dtern facere, 
 
 :k n. 1. For their general use, see P.l.; 
 
 see also #:€. , „,^ ,^ 
 
 Bultis ( = si vu/fis), anteclass. 742, 11. 
 sum (Engl, noun), how exiir. in Lat. 268, 
 
 :^i 2 
 
 Bumere, w. participial gerundive 14S, 178. 
 Bumme and summum, as adv. of lutens. 2bo, 7. 
 
 163.209; w. ger- 
 Sufficil. impers., 
 
812 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 813 
 
 summopere, 2(il, 20. 
 
 sunt qui etc. w. Mihjnnc. fjol, 4 ; w. ind. 552, 
 
 ;") and «5. The consUuctioii expl. 551, 4 ; 
 
 510, 2; 486, 9, 1. 
 super, pri'p. w. ucc. and nh\., its use 6S, sup- 
 
 I)l(-'in. Suiter w. coinp. tiiiam-cl. '.04, 14, 
 
 no 3. Wrbs compounded w. suiter lake 
 
 dat. W. 45. 
 
 superbum est, w. subj. Tnf. cl. 000, 3. 
 superesse, w. dat. 80 ; \v. <,'eruudial dat. 1G3, 
 
 *iO. 
 
 supersedere, w. abl. 94, 479; w. obj. inf. 103, 
 
 superstes, w. sen. or dat. 110, 11.^. 
 
 Supine, liri^t, H«e P.I. ; fecond Sup. 121, 503. 
 \ trhs fonninir a second sup. 121, 121. 
 WJicn II. sill), it» \\^v\\ as impersonal pred. 
 l-,'2, 124. Used expletively II). 
 
 suppetere. w. trerundia! after ad 100, 230, 1. 
 
 supposing that, how r' ndi'red 384, 7. 
 
 supra, prep. w. ace. 24, 4:W; used to denote 
 numeral excess 753,3; w. comp. (iuam-cl. 
 7r.4. 14, no, 3. , 
 
 surripere, w. ace. of thinjj, and dat. of pers. 
 (--Iioni) 07, (i8. 
 
 suscipere, w. piirticipial tjerundive 148, 178. 
 
 saspicio, vv. attr. Quin-cl. 025. /i, 1. 
 
 Syllogism, w. pred. in Int. pres. 351, 4, A. 
 llypi'theiieal suhjinic. or ind. in syllogisms 
 by arirnmeiiliiin ex enntrario 724, 15. 
 
 Syndetic antecedents of clauses, delinition and 
 use 402, 15; ol relative cl. 40(), 4: of loca- 
 tive cl. 575, 1; of modal Ut-cl. O-T), 32, 1: 
 their omission H).; of concessive cl. 002, 1; 
 of c«tmp. cl., see these. For other clauses 
 4!»2 foil. 
 
 Syndetic combination of sentences 472, GOO; 
 47.J, 1. 
 
 Tabula, account-books, idioms connected 
 
 w. them expl. 254,4. 
 tsdet, impers., w. lof^ical subj. in ace. 107, 
 
 00; const r. w. ace. aloni; w. ;;en. 00, 4S4. 
 taking away, verDs of, coiistr. w. dat. of 
 
 pels, from whom somethiiii? is taken 07, 
 
 OS; also w. ab, tie, ex 2i», 48. 
 talentum, talent, as weii,'ht 2T5, 1; as desig- 
 nation of money 200, 5. 
 talis, def. form-adj. of the qualitative class, 
 
 see P. I. Syndet. ant. of modal Vt- 
 
 clanses 435, 2; of qualitaiive lel. cl. 400, 4. 
 
 Ta/i-s- 7'/?, always w, su»)junc. 502, CV 504, 
 
 7. Did". Irom /a/e.* guali-^on-i, n. *. Synd. 
 
 ant. of. comp. (pialitative cl. 745, 2. 
 taliter (posicluss.) synd. ant. of qualiter 
 
 400. 4. 
 tam, .w, adv. of intens.; diff. from tanfum, 
 
 tdiifopere. ml^o, sic, and Ha 2«i2, 4: 750, 3. 
 
 Sviid. ant. of Ut-cl. of iniens. 4;i'). 2; of 
 
 comp. (^uam-cl. of lik(! quantity 750, 52. 
 
 When tani tnulti must be used iust. of 
 
 (.f /n/ 751, 3. 
 tamdiu, temp. adv. 222, 9; 225, 11. Synd. 
 
 ant. of ilum. quoad, and quantdiu 403, 3; 
 
 n74, 0. Tamdiu.. .quaw.diu w. perf. ind. 
 
 322, 2. 
 tamen, as adverbial conj. and particle see 
 
 P. I. As eynd. ant. (postcedent) of con- 
 cessive clauses \v. etsi and (/uainquamiJ^Ji, 
 1; of concessive Si-clauses 731, 2. 
 tametsi, altlioiii:h,= efsi 098, 13. 
 tamquam, comp. conj. iniroducinff hypo- 
 thetical cotnp. clau>e9 743, 3. \V. sub- 
 jiinc, subject to law of consecution 748, 5; 
 introducim'; ordinary comp. cl. of quality 
 7^4, 51; iiitrodiicinir a simile { = uf) 740, Ji: 
 introd. an accessory pred. 747, G'; before 
 l>ariiciples and abl. abs. 74S, 5; \Ti, 2; 
 qiiali lying single words 748, 7. Tamquam 
 qui w. sui>jiinc. .572, 2. Tamquam w. qui- 
 dam or aliquis 74!», 7. 
 tandem, use of. and diff. from detiique and 
 jxtffrenio 223, 5. 
 
 tantus, def. form-adj. of the quantitative 
 class, see P. 1. As synd. ant. of Ul-cl. of 
 intens. 035, 2. Tatdus ut = only so much 
 as to 440, 12. Syml. ant. of quantitative 
 rel. or comp. clauses {tardus quan'us) 4%, 
 4; 750, 52. Tan/us qui 5<i4, 0; dill*, from 
 tafdus quantus 505, n. * — Tanfum w. par- 
 titive gen. in the meaning of fo( 75U, 2. 
 Tatdum as adv. of iiitens. -ziV-K. 31 ; its use 
 20:1, 1; d ft', from tatn and fa/dojHrf 2tW, 2. 
 When fa/do nui.-t be used inst. of it 204. 3. 
 Tatd<)(Viu\'\y taut urn) toexprets muliiples 
 201, 4 ; 752. 2. Tu/ifutn quod w. plup. 347, 
 0. Taidiim as synd. ant. of quantum, 
 ii.st. of ^«m. . .^"«//t 750. 3: as synd. ant. 
 of dum, quoad, and quamdiu (only so 
 long) 074. 0. Tanlu7n afjent w. attr. Lt cl. 
 {^taidum abrst ab to ut (028, 8; idioma-ic- 
 ally w. two Ut-ciauses (attr. atid modal) 
 «37.3. 7a/j/o...9?/a/</0 followed by two 
 comparatives = 'the., .the' 751, 5. Taidi, 
 not taido, as obj. of value and price :;i70, 
 3.5, 2 foil. Tanti est, idiomatic use of 272, 
 2.—Tantum, as particle = oi.ly, see P.I. 
 tantisper, temp. adv. 225, 11; as ^ynd. ant. 
 i>t dum, quoad, and quamdiu 074. 0. 
 tantopere, adv. of i'jtens. 201, 20. Dift'. fmm 
 tam etc. 202, 4. Synd. ant. of adverbial 
 comp. cl. introduced by quanfopert 750, 3; 
 400, 4. Quam after tantoptre 750, 3. 
 tantulus, = so little 204, 5. 
 tantusdem, as synd. ant. of quantitative rel. 
 (comp.) cl. 400, 4; 7.50. 52. Tantuindem, 
 used as adv. of iniens. .2»»:i, 31. 
 tardus, constr. w. gerundial after rtt/ or in 
 
 (w. a 1)1.) 104, 540. 
 temperare, w. gerundial dat. 103, 209. hibi 
 tempejdrf, as verb of restraining, w. That- 
 cl.; see rcprifnere, 
 
 temperi, temporal adv. in locative case 
 *'-J."). 11. 
 Temporal adverbs and particles ; different 
 
 cl i>M's and use of •-i".'2 foil. 
 Temporal clauses (541 foil. Introduced by 
 quum 015 loll.; by ptsfqvam, utn, ut,n- 
 inulac, quaiido 0.50. 020 foil.; by aid^qnnm 
 and priusquam «.«iO foil.; by dum, donfC, 
 quoad, quamdiu (i71 foil. Temporal rela- 
 tive clauses .520. Vi. Temporal Si-clauses 
 732, 4. Collocation of temporal clauses 
 478, 7. 
 
 I 
 
 tcmpus, w. gerundial gen. 150. 3. Tempvs 
 est, w. gerundial gen., w. subj. inf., or 
 siibj. Inf. cl. 014. .3. 
 
 tendere, as verb of striving w. id GOO, 2; 
 MK), n. !!. , 
 
 tenere, = obfiuere, as verb of doing, w, rit, 
 se • iiiqtetrdre. As verb of hindering (^ae-- 
 tiiitre) w. quoniinu'i, and as verb ()f re- 
 straining accompanied by a negation, w. 
 qui /I 002. 5; 003, n. ^. 
 
 Tenses, iheir use in the ind. 298 foil.; see the 
 sin.de tenses. Tenses in letters, see A>w- 
 (olury t(nses. DitlVrent coneepiion of past 
 ten«es in Latin and in Engl. .'302. .508, 1. 
 For ten>es of ind. used in the difl'erent 
 clauses, sec the articles on the particular 
 conjunctions and clauses.- -Tensks of the 
 SUBJUNCTIVE, see Consecution of tensex.— 
 Look AL tknses of the subjui.c. Defini- 
 tion 422, 00.5. Ditl. from 'tenses by con- 
 secution,' and coi.flict, w. them 422, OBs. ; 
 4J2. 000 foil. Logical tenses chiefly used 
 when not the time spoken of, but the time 
 of the speaker is taUtvn as the standard of 
 time w. respect topa^t actions 423, 1. In- 
 siaiices in which this occurs 423, 2 foil.; 
 421, 04. (rt) In restricting rel. cl. 423, 2 ; 
 {b) w. potential subjunc. in certain con- 
 nections 423, 3; U-) for the s.ike of perspi- 
 cuity, or to avoid a conflict w. other gram, 
 rules 42.5, 1 foil.; id) when the governing 
 ))ier. pled, contains a present pred. by 
 implication 420, 2; {f) in comp. Quum-cl. 
 431, 10; (/'» in modal Ut-cl. and their 
 t'uuivaleuts 434 foil, (views of the gram- 
 nrarians examined 434, n. *); ig) in hypo- 
 thetical clauses made dep. on non-pret. 
 pred. 412 foil.; (/<^ the imp. subjunc. as 
 io'ical tense when the princ. non-pretenie 
 pred. contains a past ten.<e by implication, 
 jind for particular rea-oii-' 745, and 7.— 
 Wh n loirical tense» cannot be used 42*>, 
 1-3; 440, 12.— Conversion of tenses in the 
 subjiuK!., sec Consecution of tenses. ^ Conv. 
 of tenses in cl. d'p. on verbs of fearing 448, 
 2; on verb- of doubling 440,3; in dep. 
 questions 440, 4; after erspectdre, lb.; in 
 final clauses 449. 5; in sub-oblique clauses 
 44".», n, 1. Convers. of dep. Int., if the 
 pred. must be in subjunc. 450, C. 
 tentare, as verb of striving, w. ut or Jie 
 
 f)'.»'.». 2. 
 
 tenui Minerva, 184. obs. 1. , , ^ . .„ «c 
 tenus xiiii-preposiiion \v. abl. 0, b; 1^: 'W. 
 44» ' Adve«-bs in 4tli locative case com- 
 poiiiided w. tenus 217, 8. Its derivation, 
 and cimstruction w. gen. .30, oBs. 
 terra, meaning in the pi. 10.5, n. 1. Ter- 
 rdt urn iqentium) as attr. of locative ad- 
 verbs ,504. n. 22. 
 terribilis, w. II. Snp. 121, 121. 
 teruncii est, 272, 3. ,-a n 
 
 testis, constr. w. crerundial gen. 1;)".», Z. 
 testato and intestate, as impers. pred. able. 
 
 than, rendered quam (see this conjj. Than 
 ulier 'Other' by ac, atque, or quam «49, 0. 
 
 That-clauses 588 foil. Different gram, forms 
 inLatiu.58S017. 1)0b.iect That-clauses, 
 b'ing either (a\ Inf. d., or {b) clauses in- 
 troduced by ut, lie, quia, qvoininas ; or 
 (c-) Quod-clauses, .588, 22. See these dif- 
 ferent classes of cl. — Form of That cl. 
 after verba sentiendi 580 foil.; alter verbs 
 of emotion 500, 5 ; after verba declarandi 
 .504. foil.; after verba faciendi (see these) 
 5'.t0 foil. When the latter are introduced 
 by vt, ne, quomiaus, or quin .500. 25 foil. 
 2) Subject-That-cl; 3) Attribute That-cl.; 
 4) Predicate That-cl.; 5) Modal 'I hat-cl. 
 See these different classes of clauses.— 
 Comparison of That-clauses 7r)0, li loll.; 
 7i;i, C. Idiomatic use of compared Ut-cl. 
 after comparatives w. the meaning 'too 
 much to' 7t)l, C. Collocation of That- 
 clause» 478, 3 foil. 
 
 the... the, before comparatives; different 
 wavs of rendering into Latin 751. 5; by vt 
 qu'isque w. two superlatives 330. a: by 
 quo...eo, or quanfo.. .tanto w. compara- 
 tives 25(5, 6V3;10, (}. 
 
 then, how expressed 223, -3, 
 
 theoretical, how to render, see practical. 
 
 there, as locative adv., = jM, as first locative 
 case 210; l)y third loc case (eo) 218, b;hy 
 fourth loc. case (ed) 218, c— 'There ts, 
 ' fhf-re ar*',' how rendered, see esse no. 3, a; 
 
 487. 3; 510, 2. , , ^ 
 
 till Eniil. prepos., rendered by ad or iisque 
 ad 13,^3, R. 10; as conj. by dum, quoad, 
 tfo/i/'c; sec these conjs. , , , 
 
 Time, relation of, 222 foil. Time absolute 
 and relative m\, 1 and 2. Gram, forms of 
 the objects denoting time 220. 5.50. Ro- 
 man division of time 220, 1. Accusative 
 of time, denoting lensth of period:- 234. 
 Length of periods designated by abl. or 
 l)y per %lb foil. : referring to the fut. 230, 6. 
 Lengih of i)eriods, as attr. in gen., ace. 
 {vnum diem supplicatio). or by per and in 
 2:37, 7.— Ablative of time, denoting time 
 ' wiien ' 227 foil. No distinction in Lat, 
 in regard to the Engl, temporal prepos. at, 
 on, in 2-28 n.— Relative adjs. as abl. and 
 ace. of time 520. a, 6,c.— Advs. of time 222 
 foil. Standpoint of time, and adverbial 
 expressions in rejrard to the use of past 
 tenses 313, 55: 310, 57; in regard to length 
 of time 310, 50. Time expr. by temporal 
 clauses, see these. 
 
 timere alicni and aliqwm., in different mean- 
 innOl, 475; constr. w. Ne-clause, or Ut-cl. 
 .580, 1 ; either w. plus or maqisTii\, C, no. 2. 
 
 timer, w. attr. Ne-clause, or Ut-cl. 62"i, B. 2. 
 to Enul. prepos., either by dat. or by acc. 
 after ad or in 13, 11 foil. Before names of 
 countries by in 14, 12. Before names of 
 cities by mere acc. 47 foil. ' To' before a 
 participial, bv rel. cl. in subjunc. .557. 3. 
 ' To ' w. inf. by a rel. cl. of purpose 5.57, 5 ; 
 by imperative or final Ut-cl., or Inf. cl. sec 
 Of)ject inf. (Engl.)--' To condemn to a fine.' 
 by abl. of value 2()8, .34.—' To condemn to 
 death ' 90, 70.—' To the best of my know- 
 
814 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 lodfjo,' qmd snam etc. 518, b. * To tho 
 best of oue\s ability ' :m, 2.—" To (the inX- 
 vaiitJJfje, fi-^cjace etc. of)' by abl. or cnn 
 25«) 4.—' To-d'ty ' and * (o-nionviv,'' 224, 
 10, 2. How v\[>r. ill letiers 3(H), 1 and 2. 
 
 too, w. an adj. followed by ' fo' or 'for,' not 
 expr. by a(^ w. gerundiul, except w. ^e;v/,s> 
 aft (too late to) l{)2, oBs. 1. (Jenc-rally by 
 Ut-cl.. or rel. cl. w. qitam after a conip. 
 7fil, 6'. 
 
 tot and totidem, def. fomi-adj?. of the nu- 
 meral ela<>, see P. I. As pynd. ant. in 
 coinp. cl. of like numbers 49«i, 4 ; T^O. 52 ; 
 fullowvd by qmt 750, 1 ; in later Latinity 
 bv (itqiie Ii>. 
 
 toties, iciiiporal nnd numeral adv. 222. 9. 
 Sviid. ant. in conip. el. of like nmnbcrs 
 750. 52 ; 405, 4. Followed by quoties or 
 
 qnnf T.")0 1. 
 
 totus, (whollv) a?» accessory prcd. 251. 7. 
 
 tradere, todi-iivt-r. w. participial «renindive 
 11^. n> : in tlie nieaiiinji; ' to report,' as 
 v<rbuin deelarandi w. Int. cl. (sec 1*. I). In 
 the i)a>s. iicncrally w. nom. w. inf., except 
 ill pi-rf. and plnp. KMJ, 87 foil. 
 
 trans, pn-p. w. ace. 24, 438. Neuter verbs 
 conipoiinded w. ti'dits become t/an^ifice, 
 exci-pt tmnrfuqere. transcurrerp, 80, 478. 
 
 transducere, trajicere, etc., constr. w. two 
 arc NT, -12. 
 
 se transferre, w. «renindial after a'Z 100, 2:i0, 1. 
 
 transgredi, in perf. part, used us pred. abl. 
 
 n-2. 3. 
 transigere, to a^ree on a price, constr. w. an 
 
 object of price and value 2<;ti, 2. 
 Transitive verbs, see the articles Verbs, and 
 
 Accu-^diire. 
 tribe = tribu.<>, when it denotes a division of 
 
 ilie Homan people ; = gem or )ialio, when 
 
 it means a barbaric nation, 52, n. 40. 
 triens -- one third 1H>, 105. 
 to trust, either by amwdttere, or cotifidtre, 
 
 or credere w. diflerent meaniujjs 88, n. 3 
 
 and 4. 
 
 tueri, constr. w. ab 20, 48. 
 turn, temp. adv. Ditl". from deinde and ivtle 
 
 2-.23. 3. As synd. ant. of ta-npoial (^uum- 
 
 cl. and Postquam-cl. 40.3, 3; «48 loll. The 
 
 instances in which it introduces the apo- 
 
 dosis ()58 5. 
 to turn to flight (in neuter meaning), terqa 
 
 rerf> re 48, n. 4. 
 tnrpis w. II. Sup. 121, 121. T^>r^}e eft w. 
 
 Sul)j. Inf. cl. or Subj. Ui-cl. GOO. 3 ; 610, 4. 
 
 Ubi, where, rel. locative form-adv. of first 
 locative case 216: 400, 4. In locative 
 clauses 574, 610 foil. With perscms as 
 antecedents 576, D. Vhi or siaibi = 
 wherever 32^), 2. — T'Ai, when, as soon as, 
 as temporal conjunction, re<iuires ind. 650. 
 ti20. 1 ; w. i)erf. ind. 005, 43 : 005, 1 ; 606. 3 ; 
 w. imp. or plup. ind. WWJ. 2; w. pres. ind. 
 or fut. 606,3; w. historical pres. 60.5. 1. 
 W. imp. or plnp. ind. in the meaning 
 'whenever' 32<», 1 ; w. subjunc. in Livy 
 and later authors 331, no. c. 
 
 uWcnnqne, or nbiubi, indef. rel. adv. 4%, 4. 
 
 ultimus, indef. form-adj. of the numeral 
 class, see P. I. As accessory prcd. and 
 diff. from po^trernns 250, 4. 
 
 ultra, semi-preposition w. ace. 24,438; as 
 adv. of distance •4!20, 4 ; implyiui.' a com- 
 paiaiive. and constr. w. ct)mp. t^uam-cl. 
 70.3, 14. Ultra quain w. Ut-cl. 703, 1 4. no. d. 
 
 uncia = nuit 110, 1U5 ; in re;iard to wei^jht 
 275. 1. 
 
 unde, whence, relat. locative adv. of second 
 locative case 210; 217. oBs. 3; 400, 4. 
 Kendered bv ' v///^;e ' 217. rt. lu locative 
 clauses 574, 616 foil. W. persons as ante- 
 cedents 576, I). 
 
 undecunque, or undeunde, indef. rel. adv. 400, 
 4. 
 
 under, Eni:!. prep., = sub 45 foil. 'Under 
 consideration' = ttub judice 40, 80. ' len- 
 der ' rendered by abl. ahs. 180, 223 ; 1^2, 
 22!); 185,232. 
 
 unus, numeral adj., see P. I. As accessory 
 pred. 251. 7. Placed in gen. if <l<p. on 
 possessives lb. Liius qui w. subjunc. 551, 
 4 ; w. md. 553, 7. 
 
 up to, rendered by ad or vsqve ad 13. 10 ; by 
 (tnus 135, 440 ; by sub w. aec. 45, 454. 
 
 upon, Engl, jirep. : in regard to place ren- 
 dered by in w. abl. 42, 4r.3. As temporal 
 prepos. w. participial, l)y abl. abs. 180, 
 225 ; by vbi, lit, simul and its compounds 
 00.5, 1. 
 
 it is useful, expedient hurtful. Different ways 
 of rendering: into Lat. (i22, .5. 
 
 usquam and nusquam, e\]>l. 217, 5. 
 
 usque, adv., in connection w. prepos. 13, 
 10 ; as temporal adv. 222, 9. Formation of 
 its compcmnds vv. third locative case 217, 
 8. U^qiie or usque eo, as synd. ant. of 
 clauses of intens. 435. 2; of cl. introduced 
 bv dinn. quoad, and df'ihc ( = till, or as 
 lonq rt.s) 403, 3 ; 074, 0: 078. 1.5. 
 
 usus est, (mostly antcclass. and poet.) w. 
 abl. iC), 61. , ^ 
 
 Usui esse, w. gerundial, after ad. C.ener- 
 aliy used inst. of titilis as pred. adj. 102, 
 
 n.* 
 
 ut, uti, as interrogative form-ndv. 2'^9, 15; 
 230 11. t. Ut as conj. introducing com- 
 l)letingThat-cl., see Ut-clausfS.— Ut intro- 
 duciiiir optative sentences 388, 1, a; in- 
 troducimr exclamatory si-nttnces A^\. obs. 
 ' Te ut ulla resfrangdt,'' etc. 501, 0.— (7. as 
 conj., introducing modal and final I't-cl., 
 see these.— tV. as tempor-al ccmj , requires 
 iM). <i50. 620. 1. W. perf. ind. 005.43 ; ()«i5, 
 1; (;0(). 3. W. imp. or i)lup. (»00, 2; w. 
 pres. or fut. 000, 3. Ut pnmuin m\. 43.— 
 Ut = 'as soon as,' in clauses of contin- 
 gent and repeated action 329, \.— Ut as 
 comparative conj.. w. ind. see Conipara- 
 tire Uf-clauxes.— T'f qui w. subjunc. expl. 
 .572 'i —Ut w. subjunc. in hypothetical 
 C(m'ip. cl. 744,51 ; 744, \.— Ut n w. subjunc. 
 748, 5. Ut = 'as,' befort! substantives 
 used as accessory pred.; difl'. from acces- 
 
 I sory pred. without ut 747, G. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 815 
 
 Ut-clauses, always w. subjunc. when used as 
 Thai-clauses; from what reasons 388,1, 
 (I _i) Ut-clauses dep. on verba skntiendi 
 (verbs of fearing 580, 1 ; of volition 603, 
 oB<. 7, 1 foil. ; on sjferare, vid'ere, censure 
 503).— 2) Depend, on verba dicendi if 
 thay belong to one of the folio winir 
 classes : (a) Verbs of request .595, 3. (b) of 
 advice and exhortation .505. 4, (c) of re- 
 solution and sli|mlati<m 505, 5, {d) of com- 
 mand 50(». 0, {e) of permission .507, 8.-3) 
 Dep. on verba faciendi 500, 25 loll, (con- 
 sist inir of verbs of striving and prepara- 
 tion .500. 2 ; of accomplishing WK), 3 ; of 
 indiicinir 002, 4).— 4) Dei), on ' />i invhi- 
 beaut' 0(13, n. !1. -5) Faot-clai'ses intro- 
 duced by vt, i'l) transitive Ut-clauses after 
 merPre. nddere etc. (J07, 5 ; (b) preposi- 
 tional V\c\.{ad id vt, eo ut) 008,2; (c) 
 Ut-cl. of non-reality 008, 6 (te vt uUa res 
 franqat .501, 6; lonqe or tanturn abest nt 
 028, 8; w. causal meaning in the construc- 
 tion twn ut...se(L not that but 000, 6 ; 600 
 n. t): (d) Passive Fact-d. introd. by w< 
 000, 4.— 0) SuiUECT Ut-clai'ses (M)9, 2 foil, 
 (see tlie.se).— 7) Attkibute Ut-clausks 
 (see these).— 8) Prkdicate Ut-clauses 
 (see Predicate clauses).—*.)) Ut-clauses w. 
 concessive fouce ; their nature and use 
 eg-,, 8.-1(1) Modal Ut-clattses (see these), 
 utcunque, indef. form-adj. 23), 15. 
 uter interroiTHtive lorm-adj. of the deter- 
 minative class, see P. I. Its relative use 
 406, 2 ; used with force of utercunque 500, 
 3. 
 utercunque, indef. rel. form-adj. 500, 3. 
 uti, deponent verb, w. abl. 03, 479 ; n. .) ; 
 treated as transitive in gerundive phrases 
 
 152, 188, ,. , J * • 
 
 utiUs, w. dat. 118. 112; w. <:enindial dat. in 
 
 Pliny 10.5,2. Utile est w. subj. Lt-cl. or 
 
 subj. Inf. cl 611, 5. 
 utinam, introducing optative sentences 38-5, 
 
 0. 
 
 utique, modal form-adv. ?39, 15. 
 utpotequi, w. su)>junc. 572, 3; ufpote quum 
 
 w. subjunc. 655, 2. 
 utut, indef. modal form-adv. 230, 1;). 
 
 Vacare, to be flc-stitute, w abl 93, 479: to 
 
 hav.- leisure for. vv. ..'erundial dat. 1(>3, jOO. 
 
 Vacat, impers. in silver Latinity, w. dat. 
 
 and subj. inf. 018, 10. 
 vacatio, w. attr. Quominns-cl. 62.), J). 
 vacuus, w. abl. 120. 110. Vacuum e^.^e w. ab, 
 
 or abl. 20, 48. Varuum est, impers., w. 
 
 dat. and subj. inf. 018. 10. 
 ▼aide, adv. of intens. 2(>-', 0. 
 va'.ere to be strong, w abl. 03, 479 ; = to be 
 
 of importance, w. ace. of neuter form-adjs. 
 \ 85 30. 2 ; 270, 3 : w. plux. not maqi>i «oo, C. 
 
 Vallre. to be worth (mostly antedass. and 
 
 postcla-s.). w. abl. of value 207. 4 ; w. atn-. 
 
 of value in Varro 208, Z.— Valuit and vale- 
 
 Value^'an/price, relation of, 206 foil. . Verbs 
 constr. w. an obj. of value and price '2Gb, 
 
 2. Nouns used to express value and price 
 '2(J7. .33.— Indefinite price and value, with- 
 out a noun, by certain absolute form-adjs. 
 iquanti, rnagtw, pluris etc.) '270, 35. When 
 they are placed in abl. and when in ;:en. 
 270 .500. Hare or false expressions for 
 indef. value 271, 2. By adverbs {bene, male, 
 care) 271, 4. By ita - at such a \n\ce. 272, 
 Ex. 11.— Genitive (uot ablative) of internal 
 value 272, 5(jl. 
 
 vas, (suretv) w. gerundial gen. 159. 2. 
 vehementer,' as adv. of intensity 262. 6. 
 vel, disjunctive conj. and particle, see P.l. 
 Vel si = etiamsi w. subjunc, 731, 3. \el 
 'l>otius 7.50, OBS. 0. 
 
 velle, meaninir and use of its fut. tense .3.il, 
 3 Difl". of veliui and vellein (I should wisb) 
 in optative sent. 383,(5. Vdit nolit.}n^i. 
 of sive vulf. sire non rult 738, 5. \elie w. 
 dat 92, 476 ; w. ace. of a neuter form-adj. 
 8.5. 30. 2: w. obj. inf.. Inf. cl., ut, ne, or a 
 mer»! subjunc. 591, 7 foil. : w. perf. (peri- 
 phrastic) participle .502, 3. a; w. comp. 
 Quam-cl.. inst. of waJle or pot i us velle tb-i, 
 Vi.— VoluU and rolebat ;i.37, 4. 
 velut as comi). c<mj. introducinir a Simde 
 74(5. B. Velut {velut n) introd. hypothetical 
 comp. cl., w. subjunc. 748, 5. Velut = as 
 if, before participles and abl. abs. I'^y. ' 
 748. 5 ; qualifving simile words 748,7. i el- 
 ut qui w. sul>junc. 572, ^.— Vtlut w. aliqats 
 or q'lidam 572, 2. > . «. 
 
 venalis, the only adj. constr. w. an obj. of 
 value anrl price 2()6, 1. , . «, 
 
 vendere, w. abl. 04, 470; takes an obj. of 
 l)iice 2()0, 2. 
 
 venire to be sold, used as the regular pass, 
 of rendere.^MS. n.*; constr. w. an obj. of 
 price '21.6, 2 ; 04, 470. . 
 
 venire, to come, w. ace. after in or ad. M 
 snem reulre, in amicitiam alicui venire 40, 
 n 1. Venit in rnenfem. impers., w. dat. of 
 the losiical subj. 107. 00: w. gen^ ot the 
 thing 03, .53: w. subj. Inf. cl , I^ t-cl or 
 pubj inf. according to meaning 010, 0. 
 Veyiit ad anrl». impers., lb. U^^u renit w. 
 Subj. Ut-cl. : «liff. from accidit 610, 5. 
 Verbal adjectives in bundui^ 12.5, 125. 
 Verbal adjective in das. Formation 120. 129. 
 Verbs not forming it 120. 120. Irregulari- 
 ties in its formation 126. I'.O. As pred. 
 nom • ?cc Perii>/ira.<!tic gerundial ; a^ at- 
 tributive or al)solute adj. see Gerundials 
 i), renr.'^ed pb rases. 
 
 Verbal adjective in urus. Fomiation of, 12.5, 
 120 Verbs not fornnni: it 125. 120 loll, ir- 
 re'Milari ie>* in its formation 1*25, 12« foil. 
 U"ed as j)artici|)le. or accessory predicate 
 138. 510 ; 130, 158 ; as ab<. adj. l-'iX. 1.57 : w. 
 bvpotbetical meaning 130. 1.59; as abl. abs, 
 13'.}, 1.50 B; as pred. nom. ; see Periphrastic 
 
 future. , , , * ♦v,^:^ 
 
 Verbs, construction of, i.e., fomis of their 
 completing objects or subjects 00 Toll. 
 Transitive verbs 70, 4.5^. Verbs in a per- 
 sonal pass. form, always transitive 84, .3b. 
 Conversion of transitive verbs into pas- 
 
INDEX. 
 
 816 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 pivpp 85. 2. Neuter verh? constr. w. jicc. 85, 
 R. m. Latin transitive verbs, intranf^itive 
 in Engl. 8(). 47:1 Neuter verbs made tran- 
 sitive by eompoHition w. tbe prepos». cir- 
 C'lm, lraa>^, pn\ jmefcr 8(5, 478. Wiih dat. 
 ar»> constr. verbs of bt'lpintr, ob^-yinir, com- 
 mandinj:, ()[)posing. trustinir. pardoninir, 
 flattering, encountering, liuppening, being 
 angrv, and most compounds o\ e^se 88 foil. 
 Sinude verbs \v. dat. 89. Verbs constr. w. 
 dat. or ace. 91. 475 ; w. jren. 92 foil. Verbf» 
 denoting aflecti"ii^', plenty or want, and 
 separation take ahl. 98, 479. Verbs constr. 
 w. two completing objs. 9»'. foil. They are 
 mostly transiiive, takinir 1) ace. of thing 
 and dat. of pers. 97. 482; 2> arc. of pers. or 
 tliinLT an<l abl. of thing or instrument 9S, 
 488 toll. ; 3) ace. of pers. and gen. of thing 
 91». 484; 4) two accusatives 100. 48<) : 101 
 foil. Factitive verhs, t.iking a transitive 
 ace. alonir w. a ])red. ace. HM, 74. V«'rbs 
 constr. w. inf. 102 foil.; w. obj. ace. along 
 w. obj. inf. 104, 8i.— Verbs constr. with 
 the pri'p. <tb. ad, de, ex, in, 13 loll.; 2G foil; 
 28; 29; 40 loll. 
 
 Verbs of granting, criving, 8endin<r, de- 
 maiifliiig, takinsr, receiving are constr. w. 
 participial gerundive 148. 178. Verbs 
 constr. w. gernndial dat. Ifti. 200.— Verbs 
 of motion and extent take ace. of diPtancc 
 or extent 220. 8. Verbs denoting trans- 
 nction for a valuable consideration of es- 
 timatinif, nppraisin<r. costinir, being worth, 
 take nn obj. of value and price (gen., aid., 
 or adverbial) 2(H5. 82 ; 2rt7, 8 and 4. Verbs 
 denotiiiir appreciation and esteem take a 
 gen. of inner value 272. 1 foil.— Verbs ()f 
 fearing, constr. w. Ul and tie .5X9. 1; w. in- 
 terrogative cl. 391, 1. A'o)i dnhitdre takes 
 Quin-cl. .'iSO, 2; dnbitdre takes interrog. cl. 
 3W. 85, a. Verba skntikndi, constr. w. 
 Inf. cl. 5S8, 23. ExceptioJis ,5s9. 1 foil. 
 Verbs of emotion (verba afl'ectunm") take 
 Inf. cl. orOiiod C1.5JK1, 5. Verbs of volition 
 take obj. inf., Inf. cl. iif, ne, or a mere 
 f ubjniic. .592. OBs. 7. 1 foil. Verbs of thr(;at- 
 eniiiir, hoping, promisinir. and pietending 
 are. in En<_'l.. constr. w. obj. inf.. but in 
 Latin vv. Inf. cl. 598, ll.Verba dkclauandi, 
 vv. Inf. cl., but if denoting command, w. 
 im|)erative cl. 594, 24 foil. Verbs of exhor- 
 tation take imperative cl., a irerundial alter 
 ad. ran-lv obj. inf. 595. 4. Verbs of resolu- 
 tion and stipulation take imperative cl., 
 paps. Inf. cl. w. gerundials, or obj. inf. 
 595. 5. Verbs of permission take impera- 
 tive cl. 597, 8. Verbs denoting manilesta- 
 tion «>f emotions and feelinirs, of accnsinir, 
 praising, censurino:, condemning, take 
 (iuod-cl., sometimes Inf. cl. 598, 9; 598, 
 I!. *.— Verba faciendi (of striving, accom- 
 plishing, and inducimz) take Ut-el. or Ne- 
 cl. 59<), 2,5 loll. Verbs of doing w. neirative 
 aim take Ne-el., Quominus-cl., or Quin-cl. 
 lb. — Ordinary tkansitivk verbs with 
 Quod-cl. atid'rt-cl. (Facl-cl.) 605 foil.— 
 Construction of iMi'EusoNAL verbs CIS loll. 
 
 —Verbs which may be construed w. ik- 
 TKi{no<;ATiVE clauses 8'.K), <i and b ; 391. 
 verecundia, w. attr. Inf. cl. 025. li. 3. 
 vereri, w. Ne-cl (= that), and Ut-cl. (=that 
 not) 589, 1 ; w. Quin-cl. 589.4; w. interrog- 
 ative cl. 391, 1. Its pred. not in periphrastic 
 future 448, .1, 2.— Constr. either w. ;;/«» or 
 l/iar^/iK 75(>, C\ no. 2. 
 
 yerisimile est, w. ISubj. Inf. cl., or Subj. Ut- 
 cl. <il2, 0. 
 
 versari, w. abl. after in 42. 453; 42, n. t; 
 w. plus, not niagix 75H. C, fin. 
 versus, versum, seiniprepos. w. ace. 12 ; 9, 
 (i ; I."). 15. 
 
 verum est, it is true, w. Subj. Ut-cl., or 
 Snbj. Inf. cl. (ill, 5; 012, 0. Ytnnn est, 
 it is proper, w. Subj. Inf. cl. 611, 5. 
 very (very much), rendered by rahle, ad- 
 modum. reheniftiler. inultum, ttiam alQue 
 etiam, or prefix j)er ; see these articles; 
 by superlative, .see P. I. ; hy facile 615, 1. 
 vesci, w. abl 98, 479, n. 9. 
 vesperi, locative case. 225. 11. 
 vestire, w. ace. of pers. and abl. of thing 
 
 99 485. 
 vetare, w. obj. inf. along w. transitive ncc. 
 
 104, 83; as verb of neirative command w. 
 
 imperative clauses 597. 7. In the silver 
 
 writers w. qitomiinf.< 597, n. +. 
 vi, dolo, precario possidere, expl. 244, .?. 
 videre, w. a participle as accessory pred. 
 
 258, 2 ; as verbum seiitiendi w. Inf. cl. 
 
 588, 28 ; as verb of stri ving (= to take care 
 
 of .soraethiuL') w. ?// or ve, .599, 2: 598, 10. 
 
 Vide w. interrog. cl. 895, b ; ride ne. as 
 
 idiomatic circumlocution 593, \\).— Yider%, 
 
 to seem, w. completing ])redicate 78, 462. 
 
 Difl^. from appatlre 74, 16. W. nom. w. 
 
 inf.. even in perf. and pltip. 10(». S7 and 8S. 
 
 Vidifu)', impers.. w. subj. Inf. cl. and dat. 
 
 of the person 615. 2. Mi/ii videor, w. inf. 
 
 Ih. — Vl-tujii fst 7nihi, = ]>lanot jniJd, w. 
 
 Ut-cl. or Inf. cl. lb.— >6"i vidUur, if you 
 
 please, 712. 11. 
 vincere, as verb of achieving (= to prevail 
 
 alter a struggle) w. completing Ut-cl. or 
 
 Ne-cl. (;01, 3. Vici, \\. force of a pres. or 
 
 Int. :5()8. 2. 
 ▼indicare. to defend, w. ab or mere nbl. 29, 
 
 48; w. gernndial abl. after ab 195, 243. 
 vis (noun) w. attr. Ut-cl. 625, 1). 
 vitare, seeripcre, cavere. as verbs of avoiding, 
 
 con-tr. w. lie (aftirinative in Eni:l.) 608. 5. 
 vitium est, w. Subj. Quod-cl. 61 1, 9. Vilio 
 
 (pr(tf/r<)) dare 2."j7. 2. 
 vitTiperare,( onstruction of, see reprehendere. 
 
 vivo fratre. 184. 
 
 vix. negative particle, see P. I.; w. plop. 
 347. 6. 
 
 vocare, w. ad 14.11: w. in (aliquid in di/M'nn 
 focCire, to doubt something Cic. Inv. 2. 28; 
 aliqiiem in inridiatn rcK'dre, to make some- 
 body odious lb. I'hil. 2, 24; aliquid in ju- 
 dicium vor'ire. to call to account lb. Verr. 
 2. 1, 12). V(K-<lre, w. gernndial afiernrrf 190, 
 289.1. As factitive verb w. double acc.lU2,Zi. 
 
 voluntas, w. attr. Ut-cl. 025, B, 4. 
 
 \ 
 
 roti,=siifragium, or sententia. Dift'. 5.5, n. 19. 
 
 Wagers, how expr. 707, C -' What will you 
 bet tiiat" (I bet that) = da picjuus ni, 
 
 vTa'^ding'off, Verbs of, constr. w. ah, or mere 
 
 at.l. 29, 48. 
 week, hebdoina'i. sepHinana, ""known as 
 
 division of time in ihe classical period 2-^0, 
 
 1. Names of we»'k-days (dits Soils etc.), 
 
 when inirodueed 227. n.**. 
 to weigh, w. numeral *.bjs., how expr. ^7o, 
 
 2 loll.: 277, d. . . , 1 ..P 
 
 Weight, rel.tive of, 275, .%2; standard of 
 2r.5, 1. 'T«) l)e oi weigUi ' in a tigurative 
 sense, how expr. 276. 8._ 
 
 West, occ'dtnx f<(>l 222. n. 5. 
 
 what abs. relative adj.. how rendere^ .509, 
 2- 511 1 UV/a/. interro^'. iidj.. see 1 . 1.— 
 'What' are vou ca>lled T = quomodo nomi- 
 nfiris ? 289, ous. 2. Whatsoever, whichso- 
 ever, how lendereil 49'.« foil. 
 
 when, teuip. adv.. how expr. 222 OBS. 1. 
 Wk'H. at-, teuipoial eonj., rendered by 
 n.nini 645.84 toll.: I>y ubi, ut , siinnljwd 
 US compound- 665. 48 ; i.y .ibl. abs. »)(..) 4.j. 
 
 wh8ne?er, rendered bv quuni 6».), 84; b4o. 
 2: i»y tibi, vi. f<imulac. not hy j)Os(qua>n 
 66f>, 2; l>y .•>•? (•■^i (piaiido) 829. 1 ; 782, 4 ; by 
 nuaiidocunrjup 498. 1 ; 5(M. 7. 
 
 where, r.d. and it.ierr. a<lv.. by ?/6i 216 ; b> 
 nnde-ill.r,,i: hy q'"l 2is, c: by .///o 218 
 d; S'-e 575 foil. Imroducmg interrogative 
 
 whereas! rendered' by quu/n 65<>, 40, 1 ; by 
 
 i)(>.<fquaui w. pre-, ind. l>6.5, 11. 
 wherever iwheres .even, by ubionique, qua- 
 
 cuii'iuf. uU(H)unqueh\)\,l. t^ t i 
 
 whether, as ni erro-. particle, ^ee P. I. ; by « 
 
 :i'.tT, 10 ; 7.«. 5. \Mietl„fr...or,^sive.. ntt 
 
 787 5 
 
 while. *Rngl. eonj., by dum w. pre-, ind. 
 0T> 2 l-dl TAi/^ = as Ion- as, ))y dutn. 
 qjoid. or qmnndiu 671, 6. \V/>i/e ^ when. 
 yquumiA^.:^: 65.;. 40. 1, Dift. be w^eu 
 d'um ami quum 821, 7. W/iy'e. hy posf qua m 
 w pres. ind. r.C^^ 11 : by Ha ut 48.) 2 ; by 
 „res abl. abs. 181, 228; by abl. abs. w. 
 perf. perii)hrastic pi-cd. abl. 18:J, 2:i0. 
 
 wholly (entirely), how expr. 251, 7. 
 why, as interr«)g. panicle, by cur. 
 
 qui. 
 
 qudinobrem, quart, see these articles 
 Why not by quin, cur non, quidrn, ^ee 
 these urticles —As emphatic particle, by 
 quippe 68t), A. ^ a 
 
 Will En-d. auxiliary of fut. tense ; rendered 
 i.y'Lat: rut 847, 78 foil. ; by subjunc. pi;es. 
 878, 1; denoting rule and habil, hy soltre, 
 or by fut. tense 352, C. 
 with, 'Engl, prepos., rendered c?/wi 32. 44() , 
 apud 17, 20 ; penes 25. 44 ; in. w. abl. 48, 
 74 Denoting manner and instrument by 
 mere «ibl. or cum 248 foil. : denoting coin- 
 cident action, by cum or mere abl. 2.i», 
 5.'i(} f«dl. By circumlocution w. abl. aos. 
 180. 225; 182, 229. ' WUli' before partici- 
 pials by Quod-cl. 388. b ; 38S \ ^ ,^ , 
 without, Engl. prep.. »)y sine to, 4^9 ;y 
 extra 24, 4.88 loll. Difl'. between sine and 
 extra 36, 68; by pres. abj. abs. 182 ;^'W. 
 ' Withour before participials, ditteicnt 
 ways of expressiuii it 36, 64; 188. obs , 
 by non w. gernndial abl. 170, 214; by quin 
 547, C, I) ; by quin. or ut non (W6, 3 
 worse, p^jor or deterior, see P. 1. 1 o hate 
 worse, maqis odis,<e, or jiej us odisse, i5b, L. 
 worth, as adj. of price, how expr. 2^. C 
 • Tu l>e WO) ill.' how rendered 26 . . 4. He 18 
 worth a million, po.'^sidet decie^ lb. 
 would Enirl. potential auxiliary, introduc- 
 ing optative sentences 383,6; in deciara- 
 tivH' sent, of guarded statement etc., by 
 subjunc. pres. 378, 1 ; 381, 1: by subjiinc. 
 perf. 87S. 2. ' Would,' expr. by tut. .i^J. j . 
 In interroirative cl. 396, e; in cond. periods 
 of non-reality 718 loll. ; in co.id. P^rx.ds 
 of doubtful reality 710, obs. 11 ; .10, I'.d, 
 711, 4. • Would' by imperfect iiid. olre- 
 peated action 311. 3 ; 329, 2. 
 
 Year Designation of the year in chron- 
 
 olo^v. by the names of the Consuls, in abl. 
 
 iih^.'\^^.\.-Aytar' = ' every year,' how 
 
 rendered 2<U, n. 11. 
 yesterday, heri m, -2 -hesterno die 304, 47, 
 
 Ex. 3 ; how expr. lu letters 360. 2. 
 
 Z, symbol of the quadrans 116, 105. 
 
 
 • • • . 
 
 • • • • • • 
 
 4 • 
 
 
ft % 
 
 • * « * 
 
 • • • « 
 
This book is due two weeks from the last date stamped 
 below and it nor returned at or before that time a fine of 
 V : be incurred. 
 
 The second part of Robys Latin Grammar has deservedly attracted the 
 attention of Latin scholars on account of its rich collection of classical 
 .a.sages. But their uncritical selection and lack of arrangement have met 
 
 I 
 
 III 
 
 m 
 
 II 
 II. 
 
 iii 
 
 w 
 
 with decided disapproval. Instead of giving an accurate statement of the 
 laws governing the language, Mr. Rol Columbia university libraries [-oTn 
 
 t> t> » ' II III II llllllllllllll lllillii lllllllll |l|IIIIM IIII IV^l" 
 
 which these laws might be construe! ' ' | I I P! i ^^^ 
 
 nd/ 
 
 If 
 if. 
 
 
 them himself. His collection of exar 
 
 hence he fails to illustrate many important facts of the language. ' 
 
 An examination of Dr. Fischer's work will show that non*» nf th#.w 
 faults can be iir 
 
 the most necei 
 generally acki 
 attention o 
 Whenever he 
 arguments caii 
 refuted by Dr. 
 stereotyped w] 
 
 We invite 
 Composition. 
 
 ';:: s 1 1. 
 
 ^■•~\ 
 
 Part I 
 
 IS \ 
 
 student to the 
 
 important prirt 
 
 I 
 Part II di 
 
 adapted to the 
 
 Part I, 440 
 
 Part 11, 81? 
 
 Parts I and 
 — ^-i— ^ 
 
 Specimen 
 \ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 'v-r., \rwjn^rwrs, 
 
 14 Bond Street, New Tcrk^ 
 
 JUl 6 
 
jii'wvi^' Ui i W F W IWI ffiWttM K K MB ^ 
 
 F 
 
 • J 
 
 SllNSO'™^*'!?"--*^* ■• 
 
 tmmstim^'» 
 
 
 m-' 
 
 J 
 
 MMMWMMMMnMasti» 
 
 j" ' " > *" " ■ ■" ■ f 
 
 13^ 
 
 i*MMii 
 
 .^. 
 
 *'!i' 
 
 
 1 * '"" i.' ** ,; 
 
 i 
 
END OF REEL 
 PLEASE REWIND